Chevrolet - Equinox Awd - Workshop Manual - 2010 - 2010

Factory Workshop Manual Make Chevrolet Model Equinox Awd Engine and year V6-3.0L (2010) Please navigate through the PDF using the options provided by OnlyManuals.com on the sidebar. This manual was submitted by Anonymous Date 1st January 2018 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Relay > Component Information > Locations Accessory Relay: Locations Electrical Center Identification Views X51A Fuse Block - Instrument Panel Label (before A6284015) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 7 X51A Fuse Block - Instrument Panel Label (A6284015 and after) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 8 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 9 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 10 Accessory Relay: Diagrams X80A Accessory Power Receptacle - Center Console 1 X80B Accessory Power Receptacle - Center Console 2 X80G Accessory Power Receptacle - Instrument Panel Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 11 X80R Accessory Power Receptacle - Rear Compartment Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Service and Repair Alarm Module: Service and Repair Theft Deterrent Module Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > OnStar(R) - Availability for Hearing Impaired Communications Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins OnStar(R) - Availability for Hearing Impaired INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 06-08-46-005B Date: February 11, 2010 Subject: Availability of OnStar(R) for Hearing Impaired Models: 2007-2010 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (Including Saturn and Saab) Except 2007 Cadillac CTS Except 2007-2008 HUMMER H2, H2 SUT Except 2007 Pontiac Montana SV6 Except 2007-2010 Pontiac Vibe Except 2007 Saturn ION, VUE Except 2008 Saturn Astra Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add a Note regarding 2009 Bluetooth(R)-equipped vehicles, additional models and model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 06-08-46-005A (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Important This service bulletin is not applicable to 'GM of Canada' dealers and retailers. Note On 2009 and newer model year vehicles equipped with the Bluetooth(R) feature (option code UPF), when up-fitted with TTY capabilities, the Bluetooth(R) feature will be disabled. OnStar with Text Telephone Capability (TTY) General Motors is pleased to announce that the safety and security of OnStar is now available to our deaf, hard of hearing and speech impaired customers. The current vehicles listed above, as well as forthcoming vehicles equipped with OnStar hardware version 7.0 or higher, have the ability to utilize texting telephones. Vehicle specific TTY capability can be determined by utilizing the VIN lookup Tool. Additional information may be found by referring to www.onstar.com/tty. TTY equipment allows people who are deaf, hard of hearing or speech impaired, in-vehicle access to 911 and basic OnStar(R) services by pressing the OnStar(R) blue button or red emergency button. The keypad provides a means to communicate by allowing customers to type messages back and forth, with an OnStar(R) advisor or other party when using the OnStar(R) Hands-Free Calling feature. A TTY is required at both ends of the conversation in order to communicate. OnStar(R) Turn by Turn Navigation and Virtual Advisor are not available with the addition of TTY. The Reimbursement Program This equipment will be made available to eligible customers through GM Mobility and OnStar(R). Under this program, the customer must complete a GM Mobility application form. To take advantage of the program, vehicles must be adapted at the time of delivery for purchase / lease and a dealer claim ($1,000 Maximum per GM Mobility guidelines) with the application form submitted to GM Mobility. Saab dealers must fax documents. GM Dealers will receive electronic reimbursement directly from GM Mobility. Saab dealers will receive a check directly from OnStar(R). Additional questions or concerns should be directed to the OnStar Dealer Center. How to Order To order the dealer installed kit, contact AutoCraft Electronics or via the web at www.autocraft.com. The kit consists of an OnStar Interface Module, a Dial Pad (for making calls), OTIM wiring harness, the TTY device, installation/Tech 2(R) programming instructions and owner's guide. Warranty Information The Ultra-Tec Compact C TTY device is manufactured by an independent manufacturer and is covered by the manufacturer's warranty. It is not covered under the GM New Vehicle Limited Warranty. All other parts (OTIM, dial pad and OTIM wiring harness) are covered by the standard GM new vehicle parts and labor warranty. Replacement parts are available through AutoCraft Electronics. Contact AutoCraft Electronics or via the web. Warranty claims for the OTIM, dial pad and OTIM wiring harness should be submitted through normal warranty procedures using a sublet warranty claim with GM Labor Operation R5140. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > OnStar(R) - Availability for Hearing Impaired > Page 19 Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > OnStar(R) - Availability for Hearing Impaired > Page 20 Communications Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins Audio - Radio Does Not Mute Enough When Using OnStar(R) TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 10-08-46-001 Date: January 27, 2010 Subject: Radio Does Not Mute Enough When OnStar(R) Turn-by Turn Navigation Directions Are Announced (Increase Volume Setting or Request Soft Mute Feature Change Through OnStar(R) Customer Service) Models: 2009-2010 GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (Including Saturn) 2009-2010 HUMMER H2, H3 2009 Saab 9-7X All Equipped with OnStar(R) (RPO UE1) Condition Some customers may comment that when the radio is on, it does not mute enough when the OnStar(R) Turn-by-Turn Navigation directions are announced. Cause This condition may be caused by the customer improperly setting the radio volume high enough when the Turn-by-Turn Navigation messages are played. The 2009 and 2010 models with OnStar(R) initiates a "soft mute" feature when the radio is on during Turn-by-Turn Navigation direction announcements. During the announcement, the radio can still be heard at a very low volume. Previous model years initiated a "hard mute" during this function which completely muted the radio audio. Correction Instruct the customer to increase the radio volume while getting the Turn-by-Turn Navigation direction announcements. You can control the message volume using the radio volume control, only when the Turn-by-Turn navigation messages are playing. Some customers that were accustomed to previous model vehicles with the "hard mute" feature may be dissatisfied with the function of the "soft mute" feature. For those customers, contact the OnStar(R) Customer Service Center by pushing the Blue OnStar(R) Button to speak to a trained Advisor and request a change be made to the vehicle from the "soft mute" setting to that of the hard or complete muting of audio playback during Turn by Turn directions. OnStar(R) will then create a case number. Advise the customer that the vehicle update should be completed Over the Air within 5 business days, after which an OnStar(R) Customer Care advisor will follow-up with the customer to verify the fix. If the customer does not hear back from OnStar(R) within a week, advise them to press the Blue OnStar(R) Button and ask for Customer Care to check status. Warranty Information (excluding Saab U.S. Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use: Warranty Information (Saab U.S. Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table above. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > OnStar(R) - Availability for Hearing Impaired > Page 21 Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 22 Communications Control Module: Locations Instrument Panel/Center Console Component Views Left Side of the Instrument Panel Components 1 - P16 Instrument Cluster 2 - B10B Ambient Light/Sunload Sensor (C68) or B10 Ambient Light Sensor (C67) 3 - P19B Speaker - Center Instrument Panel (UZ8) 4 - P17 Info Display Module 5 P19V Speaker - Right Front Tweeter 6 - A20 Radio/HVAC Controls 7 - A11 Radio 8 - S3 Transmission Shift Lever 9 - P2 Transmission Shift Lever Position Indicator 10 - T11 Multimedia Player Interface Module (KTA) 11 - K108 Active Noise Cancellation Module (VQN) 12 - E8J Instrument Panel Courtesy Lamp - Left (LTZ or SLT) 13 - S36 Instrument Panel Dimmer Switch Lower Left of the Instrument Panel Components Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 23 1 - B80 Park Brake Switch 2 - T3 Audio Amplifier 3 - K9 Body Control Module 4 - K73 Telematics Communication Interface Control Module (UE1) 5 - B107 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor 6 T4S Wireless Communication Antenna - Bluetooth (UE1 with UPF) 7 - B22 Brake Pedal Position Sensor 8 - X84 Data Link Connector Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 24 Communications Control Module: Diagrams K73 Telematics Communication Interface Control Module X1 (UE1) K73 Telematics Communication Interface Control Module X2 (UE1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 25 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 26 Communications Control Module: Service and Repair Communication Interface Module Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Emergency Contact Module: > 05-08-46-004C > Dec > 10 > OnStar(R) - Number Incorrect/Incorrectly Assigned Emergency Contact Module: Customer Interest OnStar(R) - Number Incorrect/Incorrectly Assigned INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 05-08-46-004C Date: December 23, 2010 Subject: OnStar(R) Phone Number Concerns (Phone Number Incorrect/Assigned to Another Vehicle/Phone) That Occur During Diagnosis of OnStar(R) System Models: 2000-2011 GM Passenger Cars and Trucks Equipped with OnStar(R) (RPO UE1) Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update model years up to 2011. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 05-08-46-004B (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). During diagnosis of an OnStar(R) concern, the technician may be told that the OnStar(R) phone number is incorrect or tied to another vehicle and/or phone of some kind. To resolve these concerns, the Tech 2(R) with software version 22.005 (or higher), has the capability to change the OnStar(R) phone number. Service Procedure 1. With the Tech 2(R), build the vehicle to specifications within the Diagnostics area of the Tech 2(R). 2. For vehicles with physical-based diagnostics - under Body, go to the OnStar(R) section. Then select the Special Functions menu. For vehicles with functional-based diagnostics - under Body and Accessories, go to the Cellular Communication section. Select Module Setup and then Vehicle Communication Interface Module. 3. Locate the Program Phone Number prompt and select it. The original phone number will be displayed on the Tech 2(R) screen. 4. Contact the OnStar(R) team at the GM Technical Assistance Center (TAC) to obtain a new phone number. 5. Highlight the digits of the phone number one at a time and enter the new phone number using the number keys on the Tech 2(R). 6. Press the Soft key at the base of the screen for Done once these numbers have been changed on the screen. 7. Press the Soft key for Done again. The area code or new phone number has now been programmed into the phone. 8. Cycle the ignition to Off and open the driver's door. 9. Press the blue OnStar(R) button to make sure that a normal connection can be made to the OnStar(R) call center. If applicable, make sure the Hands-Free Calling (HFC) works properly by making a phone call. 10. If the system is working properly, fax or voicemail a case closing into the OnStar(R) team at TAC with the results. Dealers in Canada should submit case closing information through the GM infoNET. Please follow this diagnostic process thoroughly and complete each step. If the condition exhibited is resolved WITHOUT completing every step, the remaining steps do not need to be performed. If the procedure above does not resolve the condition, you must contact TAC for further assistance. This diagnostic approach was developed specifically for this condition and should not automatically be used for other vehicles with similar symptoms. Warranty Information (excluding Saab Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use: Warranty Information (Saab Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Emergency Contact Module: > 05-08-46-004C > Dec > 10 > OnStar(R) - Number Incorrect/Incorrectly Assigned > Page 35 Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 05-08-46-004C > Dec > 10 > OnStar(R) - Number Incorrect/Incorrectly Assigned Emergency Contact Module: All Technical Service Bulletins OnStar(R) - Number Incorrect/Incorrectly Assigned INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 05-08-46-004C Date: December 23, 2010 Subject: OnStar(R) Phone Number Concerns (Phone Number Incorrect/Assigned to Another Vehicle/Phone) That Occur During Diagnosis of OnStar(R) System Models: 2000-2011 GM Passenger Cars and Trucks Equipped with OnStar(R) (RPO UE1) Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update model years up to 2011. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 05-08-46-004B (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). During diagnosis of an OnStar(R) concern, the technician may be told that the OnStar(R) phone number is incorrect or tied to another vehicle and/or phone of some kind. To resolve these concerns, the Tech 2(R) with software version 22.005 (or higher), has the capability to change the OnStar(R) phone number. Service Procedure 1. With the Tech 2(R), build the vehicle to specifications within the Diagnostics area of the Tech 2(R). 2. For vehicles with physical-based diagnostics - under Body, go to the OnStar(R) section. Then select the Special Functions menu. For vehicles with functional-based diagnostics - under Body and Accessories, go to the Cellular Communication section. Select Module Setup and then Vehicle Communication Interface Module. 3. Locate the Program Phone Number prompt and select it. The original phone number will be displayed on the Tech 2(R) screen. 4. Contact the OnStar(R) team at the GM Technical Assistance Center (TAC) to obtain a new phone number. 5. Highlight the digits of the phone number one at a time and enter the new phone number using the number keys on the Tech 2(R). 6. Press the Soft key at the base of the screen for Done once these numbers have been changed on the screen. 7. Press the Soft key for Done again. The area code or new phone number has now been programmed into the phone. 8. Cycle the ignition to Off and open the driver's door. 9. Press the blue OnStar(R) button to make sure that a normal connection can be made to the OnStar(R) call center. If applicable, make sure the Hands-Free Calling (HFC) works properly by making a phone call. 10. If the system is working properly, fax or voicemail a case closing into the OnStar(R) team at TAC with the results. Dealers in Canada should submit case closing information through the GM infoNET. Please follow this diagnostic process thoroughly and complete each step. If the condition exhibited is resolved WITHOUT completing every step, the remaining steps do not need to be performed. If the procedure above does not resolve the condition, you must contact TAC for further assistance. This diagnostic approach was developed specifically for this condition and should not automatically be used for other vehicles with similar symptoms. Warranty Information (excluding Saab Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use: Warranty Information (Saab Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 05-08-46-004C > Dec > 10 > OnStar(R) - Number Incorrect/Incorrectly Assigned > Page 41 Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Entertainment System Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams Entertainment System Control Module: Diagrams T11 Multimedia Player Interface Module (KTA) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Entertainment System Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 45 Entertainment System Control Module: Service and Repair Multimedia Player Interface Module Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Diagrams Keyless Entry Module: Diagrams K77 Remote Control Door Lock Receiver Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 49 Keyless Entry Module: Service and Repair Remote Control Door Lock Receiver Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Navigation Module: > 09221C > Jan > 11 > Campaign - Navigation System Update Navigation Module: Recalls Campaign - Navigation System Update SERVICE UPDATE Bulletin No.: 09221C Date: January 27, 2011 Subject: 09221C - Service Update for Inventory and Customer Vehicles - Navigation System Update - Expires with Base Warranty Models: 2010 Buick Allure, LaCrosse 2010 Cadillac SRX 2010 Chevrolet Equinox 2010 GMC Terrain Supercede: The Service Procedure in this bulletin has been revised. Please discard all copies of bulletin 09221B, issued November 2009. THIS SERVICE UPDATE INCLUDES VEHICLES IN DEALER INVENTORY AND CUSTOMER VEHICLES THAT RETURN TO THE DEALERSHIP FOR ANY REASON. IT WILL EXPIRE AT THE END OF THE INVOLVED VEHICLE'S NEW VEHICLE LIMITED WARRANTY PERIOD. Purpose This bulletin provides a service procedure to program the radio module on certain 2010 Buick Allure, LaCrosse; Cadillac SRX; Chevrolet Equinox; and GMC Terrain vehicles. This program will address multiple concerns with the navigation system. This service procedure should be completed as soon as possible on involved vehicles currently in dealer inventory and customer vehicles that return to the dealer for any type of service during the New Vehicle Limited Warranty coverage period. Vehicles Involved A list of involved vehicles currently in dealer inventory is available on the "Service Update Bulletin Information" link under the "Service" tab in GM GlobalConnect (US), or attached to the Dealer Communication (Canada), used to release this bulletin. Customer vehicles that return for service, for any reason, and are still covered under the vehicle's base warranty, and are within the VIN breakpoints provided below, should be checked for vehicle eligibility in the appropriate system listed below. Important Dealers are to confirm vehicle eligibility prior to beginning repairs by using the Investigate Vehicle History link on the Global Warranty Management application within GlobalConnect. Not all vehicles within the above breakpoints may be involved. Parts Information For US: Flash drives were shipped from the Warranty Parts Center (WPC) at no charge via UPS Ground Delivery-Attention: Parts Manager, to dealers with involved vehicles. If your USB Flash Drive has been misplaced, dealers are to obtain a USB 2.0 Flash Drive locally at their expense. The minimum USB Flash Drive capacity requirement is 512 MB. Follow the service procedure titled, FOR CANADIAN DEALERS, AND US DEALERS WHO NEED TO DOWNLOAD A CALIBRATION TO A NEW USB FLASH DRIVE. The calibration downloaded to the USB Flash Drive can be used to program all vehicles involved in the field action. After completing the programming event for all vehicles involved in the field action, remove (delete) the calibration from the USB Flash Drive. Save the USB Flash Drive for future USB programming events. Do NOT contact the WPC for a USB Flash Drive. For Canada: Dealers are to obtain a USB 2.0 Flash Drive locally. The minimum USB Flash Drive capacity requirement is 512 MB. A one-time allowance is provided for the purchase of a USB 2.0. Flash Drive. The calibration downloaded to the USB Flash Drive can be used to program all vehicles involved in the field action. After completing the programming event for all vehicles involved in the field action, remove (delete) the calibration Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Navigation Module: > 09221C > Jan > 11 > Campaign - Navigation System Update > Page 58 from the USB Flash Drive. Save the USB Flash Drive for future USB programming events. Service Procedure Note This procedure begins with a USB flash drive programming event. This IS NOT a TIS2WEB programming event. This procedure requires a USB 2.0 flash drive. The minimum USB flash drive capacity requirement is 512 MB. The software downloaded to the USB flash drive can be used to update all vehicles involved in this bulletin. Any existing date on the USB flash drive will be erased during the TIS2WEB-to-USB flash drive download procedure. To ensure important date IS NOT deleted from the USB flash drive, transfer the data from the USB flash drive onto another approved storage device BEFORE attempting to download software from TIS2WEB. Once the software is downloaded to the USB, DO NOT add any data to the storage device. 1. The Navigation radio software has been revised to address the above conditions. You will udpate the radio using a USB FLASH DRIVE and the Service Programming System (SPS) with the file available on TIS2WEB. Refer to the SPS procedures and Control Module References in SI. Note During programming, the battery voltage MUST be maintained within the proper range of 12-15 volts. 2. Connect the Midtronics(R) PSC 550 Battery Maintainer (SPS Programming Support Tool EL-49642) or an equivalent to the battery. 3. Connect the MDI to the vehicle. 4. Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. 5. Select: J-2534 MDI from the Select Diagnostics Tool and Programming Process screen. 6. Select: RAD - "Radio USB Programming for Navigation Software - Setup", from the Supported Controllers screen. Refer to SI and SPS for programming instructions, if required. 7. Insert a USB flash drive into the USB port of your computer. Press the REFRESH button if your USB drive IS NOT selectable in the Available USB Drives box. 8. Select NEXT from the SPS Special Function screen. 9. Monitor the Progress Status bar at the bottom of the SPS Special Function screen. Note The files have been successfully loaded onto the USB flash drive when the Progress Status bar is completely shaded and the SPS Special Functions screen displays the following message: "Remove the USB stick and insert into the vehicle USB port." 10. Remove the USB flash drive from the computer when the Progress Status bar indicates that the software download has been completed. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Navigation Module: > 09221C > Jan > 11 > Campaign - Navigation System Update > Page 59 11. Press FINISH from the SPS Special Function screen. DO NOT wait for the Completion screen to appear on the display. Note On Cadillac SRX vehicles, turn on the radio and press the NAV button to raise the viewscreen. If this is not done before inserting the USB drive, you will not be able to operate the "Ok" button in the following step. 12. Insert the USB flash drive into the USB port of the vehicle. The radio will display the title "Program Update" along with warnings not to interrupt power or remove the media. A bar graph will form indicating progress and an "OK" button will appear. PRESS the appropriate radio button or area of the screen to activate the "OK" command and begin programming. 13. A status bar indicates progress. Note DO NOT cycle the ignition even if the view screen indicates to cycle it. At the conclusion of the USB drive downloading to the radio, installation of the programming will automatically begin as indicated by the white progress bar below. If the view screen instead remains blank for more than 40 minutes, you may then cycle the ignition. This will reinitialize the programming event. Do not remove the USB flash drive. 14. After the USB programming has completed, the screen will go blank. (On the SRX, the screen will also lower.) It is not necessary to observe the entire programming process. Once the screen has gone blank, a white outline bar graph will appear. (Not visible on SRX due to the screen being lowered.) The downloaded program will automatically install. Once this progress bar fills, the screen will go blank and USB programming will be complete. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Navigation Module: > 09221C > Jan > 11 > Campaign - Navigation System Update > Page 60 15. When the programming event has completed, the radio will display Download Complete and the version number U413. Note On the SRX, the display screen will rise at the completion of the USB download to allow viewing of the programming complete screen and version number. 16. Turn OFF the ignition for 60 seconds. 17. Remove the USB flash drive. 18. The vehicle MUST now be calibrated. Note Vehicle calibration is a required step. Many of the radio and navigation functions will not operate properly unless the calibration outlined in the following steps is performed. Note After completion of the USB programming event, but prior to the initialization of SPS programming, the radio will display a Cadillac splash screen if operated. This is a normal condition. Completion of the SPS programming below will restore the radio to the proper splash screen for the vehicle being serviced. 19. Return to the SPS programming screen. Select J-2534 MDI from the Select Diagnostics Tool and Programming Process screen. 20. Select RAD: Radio Programming. 21. You must now select the proper choices for the build of the vehicle you are servicing. Refer to the vehicle SPID label or the vehicle build information through GWM for the specific RPOs the vehicle is equipped with. 22. Once you have selected the proper vehicle options, you may initiate SPS programming. Upon completion of this step, the radio is updated. Note At the completion of the programming, you may verify the programming is updated and successful by pressing CONFIG, entering NAV and then viewing the map database. You should see version U413 displayed. Note The navigation radio will be returned to factory default value during this upgrade. Warranty Transaction Information Submit a claim using the table below. * USB Flash Drives were sent to involved U.S. dealers at no charge from the WPC. If dealers no longer have that flash drive, they are to purchase one at their expense. Do NOT submit for the cost of a USB flash drive. ** Submit the actual cost of the USB 2.0 Flash Drive, not to exceed $10.00 USD, $10.30 CAD. The calibration downloaded to the USB Flash Drive can be used to program all vehicles involved in the field action. After completing the programming event for all vehicles involved in the field action, remove (delete) the calibration from the USB Flash Drive. Save the USB Flash Drive for future USB programming events. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Navigation Module: > 09221C > Jan > 11 > Campaign - Navigation System Update > Page 61 Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Navigation Module: > 09221C > Jan > 11 > Campaign - Navigation System Update Navigation Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Campaign - Navigation System Update SERVICE UPDATE Bulletin No.: 09221C Date: January 27, 2011 Subject: 09221C - Service Update for Inventory and Customer Vehicles - Navigation System Update - Expires with Base Warranty Models: 2010 Buick Allure, LaCrosse 2010 Cadillac SRX 2010 Chevrolet Equinox 2010 GMC Terrain Supercede: The Service Procedure in this bulletin has been revised. Please discard all copies of bulletin 09221B, issued November 2009. THIS SERVICE UPDATE INCLUDES VEHICLES IN DEALER INVENTORY AND CUSTOMER VEHICLES THAT RETURN TO THE DEALERSHIP FOR ANY REASON. IT WILL EXPIRE AT THE END OF THE INVOLVED VEHICLE'S NEW VEHICLE LIMITED WARRANTY PERIOD. Purpose This bulletin provides a service procedure to program the radio module on certain 2010 Buick Allure, LaCrosse; Cadillac SRX; Chevrolet Equinox; and GMC Terrain vehicles. This program will address multiple concerns with the navigation system. This service procedure should be completed as soon as possible on involved vehicles currently in dealer inventory and customer vehicles that return to the dealer for any type of service during the New Vehicle Limited Warranty coverage period. Vehicles Involved A list of involved vehicles currently in dealer inventory is available on the "Service Update Bulletin Information" link under the "Service" tab in GM GlobalConnect (US), or attached to the Dealer Communication (Canada), used to release this bulletin. Customer vehicles that return for service, for any reason, and are still covered under the vehicle's base warranty, and are within the VIN breakpoints provided below, should be checked for vehicle eligibility in the appropriate system listed below. Important Dealers are to confirm vehicle eligibility prior to beginning repairs by using the Investigate Vehicle History link on the Global Warranty Management application within GlobalConnect. Not all vehicles within the above breakpoints may be involved. Parts Information For US: Flash drives were shipped from the Warranty Parts Center (WPC) at no charge via UPS Ground Delivery-Attention: Parts Manager, to dealers with involved vehicles. If your USB Flash Drive has been misplaced, dealers are to obtain a USB 2.0 Flash Drive locally at their expense. The minimum USB Flash Drive capacity requirement is 512 MB. Follow the service procedure titled, FOR CANADIAN DEALERS, AND US DEALERS WHO NEED TO DOWNLOAD A CALIBRATION TO A NEW USB FLASH DRIVE. The calibration downloaded to the USB Flash Drive can be used to program all vehicles involved in the field action. After completing the programming event for all vehicles involved in the field action, remove (delete) the calibration from the USB Flash Drive. Save the USB Flash Drive for future USB programming events. Do NOT contact the WPC for a USB Flash Drive. For Canada: Dealers are to obtain a USB 2.0 Flash Drive locally. The minimum USB Flash Drive capacity requirement is 512 MB. A one-time allowance is provided for the purchase of a USB 2.0. Flash Drive. The calibration downloaded to the USB Flash Drive can be used to program all vehicles involved in the field action. After completing the programming event for all vehicles involved in the field action, remove (delete) the calibration Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Navigation Module: > 09221C > Jan > 11 > Campaign - Navigation System Update > Page 67 from the USB Flash Drive. Save the USB Flash Drive for future USB programming events. Service Procedure Note This procedure begins with a USB flash drive programming event. This IS NOT a TIS2WEB programming event. This procedure requires a USB 2.0 flash drive. The minimum USB flash drive capacity requirement is 512 MB. The software downloaded to the USB flash drive can be used to update all vehicles involved in this bulletin. Any existing date on the USB flash drive will be erased during the TIS2WEB-to-USB flash drive download procedure. To ensure important date IS NOT deleted from the USB flash drive, transfer the data from the USB flash drive onto another approved storage device BEFORE attempting to download software from TIS2WEB. Once the software is downloaded to the USB, DO NOT add any data to the storage device. 1. The Navigation radio software has been revised to address the above conditions. You will udpate the radio using a USB FLASH DRIVE and the Service Programming System (SPS) with the file available on TIS2WEB. Refer to the SPS procedures and Control Module References in SI. Note During programming, the battery voltage MUST be maintained within the proper range of 12-15 volts. 2. Connect the Midtronics(R) PSC 550 Battery Maintainer (SPS Programming Support Tool EL-49642) or an equivalent to the battery. 3. Connect the MDI to the vehicle. 4. Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. 5. Select: J-2534 MDI from the Select Diagnostics Tool and Programming Process screen. 6. Select: RAD - "Radio USB Programming for Navigation Software - Setup", from the Supported Controllers screen. Refer to SI and SPS for programming instructions, if required. 7. Insert a USB flash drive into the USB port of your computer. Press the REFRESH button if your USB drive IS NOT selectable in the Available USB Drives box. 8. Select NEXT from the SPS Special Function screen. 9. Monitor the Progress Status bar at the bottom of the SPS Special Function screen. Note The files have been successfully loaded onto the USB flash drive when the Progress Status bar is completely shaded and the SPS Special Functions screen displays the following message: "Remove the USB stick and insert into the vehicle USB port." 10. Remove the USB flash drive from the computer when the Progress Status bar indicates that the software download has been completed. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Navigation Module: > 09221C > Jan > 11 > Campaign - Navigation System Update > Page 68 11. Press FINISH from the SPS Special Function screen. DO NOT wait for the Completion screen to appear on the display. Note On Cadillac SRX vehicles, turn on the radio and press the NAV button to raise the viewscreen. If this is not done before inserting the USB drive, you will not be able to operate the "Ok" button in the following step. 12. Insert the USB flash drive into the USB port of the vehicle. The radio will display the title "Program Update" along with warnings not to interrupt power or remove the media. A bar graph will form indicating progress and an "OK" button will appear. PRESS the appropriate radio button or area of the screen to activate the "OK" command and begin programming. 13. A status bar indicates progress. Note DO NOT cycle the ignition even if the view screen indicates to cycle it. At the conclusion of the USB drive downloading to the radio, installation of the programming will automatically begin as indicated by the white progress bar below. If the view screen instead remains blank for more than 40 minutes, you may then cycle the ignition. This will reinitialize the programming event. Do not remove the USB flash drive. 14. After the USB programming has completed, the screen will go blank. (On the SRX, the screen will also lower.) It is not necessary to observe the entire programming process. Once the screen has gone blank, a white outline bar graph will appear. (Not visible on SRX due to the screen being lowered.) The downloaded program will automatically install. Once this progress bar fills, the screen will go blank and USB programming will be complete. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Navigation Module: > 09221C > Jan > 11 > Campaign - Navigation System Update > Page 69 15. When the programming event has completed, the radio will display Download Complete and the version number U413. Note On the SRX, the display screen will rise at the completion of the USB download to allow viewing of the programming complete screen and version number. 16. Turn OFF the ignition for 60 seconds. 17. Remove the USB flash drive. 18. The vehicle MUST now be calibrated. Note Vehicle calibration is a required step. Many of the radio and navigation functions will not operate properly unless the calibration outlined in the following steps is performed. Note After completion of the USB programming event, but prior to the initialization of SPS programming, the radio will display a Cadillac splash screen if operated. This is a normal condition. Completion of the SPS programming below will restore the radio to the proper splash screen for the vehicle being serviced. 19. Return to the SPS programming screen. Select J-2534 MDI from the Select Diagnostics Tool and Programming Process screen. 20. Select RAD: Radio Programming. 21. You must now select the proper choices for the build of the vehicle you are servicing. Refer to the vehicle SPID label or the vehicle build information through GWM for the specific RPOs the vehicle is equipped with. 22. Once you have selected the proper vehicle options, you may initiate SPS programming. Upon completion of this step, the radio is updated. Note At the completion of the programming, you may verify the programming is updated and successful by pressing CONFIG, entering NAV and then viewing the map database. You should see version U413 displayed. Note The navigation radio will be returned to factory default value during this upgrade. Warranty Transaction Information Submit a claim using the table below. * USB Flash Drives were sent to involved U.S. dealers at no charge from the WPC. If dealers no longer have that flash drive, they are to purchase one at their expense. Do NOT submit for the cost of a USB flash drive. ** Submit the actual cost of the USB 2.0 Flash Drive, not to exceed $10.00 USD, $10.30 CAD. The calibration downloaded to the USB Flash Drive can be used to program all vehicles involved in the field action. After completing the programming event for all vehicles involved in the field action, remove (delete) the calibration from the USB Flash Drive. Save the USB Flash Drive for future USB programming events. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Navigation Module: > 09221C > Jan > 11 > Campaign - Navigation System Update > Page 70 Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking Assist Control Module > Component Information > Locations Parking Assist Control Module: Locations Luggage Compartment/Rear of Vehicle Component Views Left Side of the Luggage Compartment Components 1 - X80R Accessory Power Receptacle - Rear Compartment 2 - K41 Parking Assist Module (UD7) 3 - M17 Liftgate Motor Assembly (TB5) 4 - K27 Fuel Pump Control Module Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking Assist Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 74 Parking Assist Control Module: Diagrams K41 Parking Assist Control Module X1 (UD7) K41 Parking Assist Control Module X2 (UD7) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking Assist Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 75 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking Assist Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 76 Parking Assist Control Module: Service and Repair Rear Object Alarm Module Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relay Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Relay Module: > 09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules Relay Module: Customer Interest Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 09-06-03-004D Date: December 08, 2010 Subject: Intermittent No Crank/No Start, No Module Communication, MIL, Warning Lights, Vehicle Messages or DTCs Set by Various Control Modules - Diagnosing and Repairing Fretting Corrosion (Disconnect Affected Connector and Apply Dielectric Lubricant) Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks Attention: This repair can be applied to ANY electrical connection including, but not limited to: lighting, body electrical, in-line connections, powertrain control sensors, etc. DO NOT over apply lubricant to the point where it prevents the full engagement of sealed connectors. A light coating on the terminal surfaces is sufficient to correct the condition. Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the Attention statement and add the 2011 model year. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 09-06-03-004C (Section 06 Engine/Propulsion System). Condition Some customers may comment on any of the following conditions: - An intermittent no crank/no start - Intermittent malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) illumination - Intermittent service lamp illumination - Intermittent service message(s) being displayed The technician may determine that he is unable to duplicate the intermittent condition. Cause This condition may be caused by a buildup of nonconductive insulating oxidized debris known as fretting corrosion, occurring between two electrical contact surfaces of the connection or connector. This may be caused by any of the following conditions: - Vibration - Thermal cycling - Poor connection/terminal retention - Micro motion - A connector, component or wiring harness not properly secured resulting in movement On low current signal circuits this condition may cause high resistance, resulting in intermittent connections. On high current power circuits this condition may cause permanent increases in the resistance and may cause a device to become inoperative. Representative List of Control Modules and Components The following is only a representative list of control modules and components that may be affected by this connection or connector condition and DOES NOT include every possible module or component for every vehicle. - Blower Control Module - Body Control Module (BCM) - Communication Interface Module (CIM) - Cooling Fan Control Module - Electronic Brake Control Module (EBCM) - Electronic Brake and Traction Control Module (EBTCM) - Electronic Suspension Control (ESC) Module - Engine Control Module (ECM) - Heating, Ventilation and Air Conditioning (HVAC) Control Module Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relay Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Relay Module: > 09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules > Page 85 - HVAC Actuator - Inflatable Restraint Sensing and Diagnostic Module (SDM) - Any AIR BAG module - Seatbelt Lap Anchor Pretensioner - Seatbelt Retractor Pretensioner - An SIR system connection or connector condition resulting in the following DTCs being set: B0015, B0016, B0019, B0020, B0022, or B0023 - Powertrain Control Module (PCM) - Remote Control Door Lock Receiver (RCDLR) - Transmission Control Module (TCM) Correction Important DO NOT replace the control module, wiring or component for the following conditions: - The condition is intermittent and cannot be duplicated. - The condition is present and by disconnecting and reconnecting the connector the condition can no longer be duplicated. Use the following procedure to correct the conditions listed above. 1. Install a scan tool and perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle. Retrieve and record any existing history or current DTCs from all of the control modules (refer to SI). ‹› If any DTC(s) are set, refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle to identify the connector(s) of the control module/component which may be causing the condition (refer to SI). ‹› If DTCs are not set, refer to Symptoms - Vehicle to identify the connector(s) of the control module/component which may be causing the condition (refer to SI). 2. When identified, use the appropriate DTC Diagnostics, Symptoms, Schematics, Component Connector End Views and Component Locator documents to locate and disconnect the affected harness connector(s) which are causing the condition. Note Fretting corrosion looks like little dark smudges on electrical terminals and appear where the actual electrical contact is being made. In less severe cases it may be unable to be seen or identified without the use of a magnifying glass. Important DO NOT apply an excessive amount of dielectric lubricant to the connectors as shown, as hydrolock may result when attempting to mate the connectors. Use ONLY a clean nylon brush that is dedicated to the repair of the conditions in this bulletin. 3. With a one-inch nylon bristle brush, apply dielectric lubricant to both the module/component side and the harness side of the affected connector(s). 4. Reconnect the affected connector(s) and wipe away any excess lubricant that may be present. 5. Attempt to duplicate the condition by using the following information: - DTC Diagnostic Procedure - Circuit/System Description - Conditions for Running the DTC - Conditions for Setting the DTC - Diagnostic Aids - Circuit/System Verification ‹› If the condition cannot be duplicated, the repair is complete. ‹› If the condition can be duplicated, then follow the appropriate DTC, Symptom or Circuit/System Testing procedure (refer to SI). Repair Order Documentation Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relay Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Relay Module: > 09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules > Page 86 Important The following information MUST be documented on the repair order. Failure to do so may result in a chargeback. - Customer vehicle condition. - Was a Service Lamp or Service Message illuminated? If yes, specify which Service Lamp or Service Message. - Was a DTC(s) set? If yes, specify which DTC(s) were set. - After following the procedure contained within this bulletin, could the condition be duplicated? ‹› If the condition was not duplicated, then document the affected module/component connector name and number on the repair order. - If the condition was duplicated after the procedure contained within this bulletin was followed, and additional diagnosis led to the replacement of a module or component, the SI Document ID Number MUST be written on the repair order. Parts Information Alternate Distributor For All of North America Note NyoGel(R) 760G Lubricant* is equivalent to GMSPO P/N 12377900, and P/N 10953529 (Canada), specified for use to correct the condition in this bulletin. *We believe this source and their products to be reliable. There may be additional manufacturers of such products/materials. General Motors does not endorse, indicate any preference for, or assume any responsibility for the products or material from this firm or for any such items that may be available from other sources. Warranty Information (excluding Saab Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the appropriate/closest labor operation depending upon the module/component connection that the dielectric lubricant was applied to: Warranty Information (Saab Models) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relay Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Relay Module: > 09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules > Page 87 For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the appropriate/closest labor operation depending upon the module/component connection that the dielectric lubricant was applied to refer to the table above. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relay Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Relay Module: > 09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules Relay Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 09-06-03-004D Date: December 08, 2010 Subject: Intermittent No Crank/No Start, No Module Communication, MIL, Warning Lights, Vehicle Messages or DTCs Set by Various Control Modules - Diagnosing and Repairing Fretting Corrosion (Disconnect Affected Connector and Apply Dielectric Lubricant) Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks Attention: This repair can be applied to ANY electrical connection including, but not limited to: lighting, body electrical, in-line connections, powertrain control sensors, etc. DO NOT over apply lubricant to the point where it prevents the full engagement of sealed connectors. A light coating on the terminal surfaces is sufficient to correct the condition. Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the Attention statement and add the 2011 model year. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 09-06-03-004C (Section 06 Engine/Propulsion System). Condition Some customers may comment on any of the following conditions: - An intermittent no crank/no start - Intermittent malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) illumination - Intermittent service lamp illumination - Intermittent service message(s) being displayed The technician may determine that he is unable to duplicate the intermittent condition. Cause This condition may be caused by a buildup of nonconductive insulating oxidized debris known as fretting corrosion, occurring between two electrical contact surfaces of the connection or connector. This may be caused by any of the following conditions: - Vibration - Thermal cycling - Poor connection/terminal retention - Micro motion - A connector, component or wiring harness not properly secured resulting in movement On low current signal circuits this condition may cause high resistance, resulting in intermittent connections. On high current power circuits this condition may cause permanent increases in the resistance and may cause a device to become inoperative. Representative List of Control Modules and Components The following is only a representative list of control modules and components that may be affected by this connection or connector condition and DOES NOT include every possible module or component for every vehicle. - Blower Control Module - Body Control Module (BCM) - Communication Interface Module (CIM) - Cooling Fan Control Module - Electronic Brake Control Module (EBCM) - Electronic Brake and Traction Control Module (EBTCM) - Electronic Suspension Control (ESC) Module - Engine Control Module (ECM) - Heating, Ventilation and Air Conditioning (HVAC) Control Module Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relay Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Relay Module: > 09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules > Page 93 - HVAC Actuator - Inflatable Restraint Sensing and Diagnostic Module (SDM) - Any AIR BAG module - Seatbelt Lap Anchor Pretensioner - Seatbelt Retractor Pretensioner - An SIR system connection or connector condition resulting in the following DTCs being set: B0015, B0016, B0019, B0020, B0022, or B0023 - Powertrain Control Module (PCM) - Remote Control Door Lock Receiver (RCDLR) - Transmission Control Module (TCM) Correction Important DO NOT replace the control module, wiring or component for the following conditions: - The condition is intermittent and cannot be duplicated. - The condition is present and by disconnecting and reconnecting the connector the condition can no longer be duplicated. Use the following procedure to correct the conditions listed above. 1. Install a scan tool and perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle. Retrieve and record any existing history or current DTCs from all of the control modules (refer to SI). ‹› If any DTC(s) are set, refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle to identify the connector(s) of the control module/component which may be causing the condition (refer to SI). ‹› If DTCs are not set, refer to Symptoms - Vehicle to identify the connector(s) of the control module/component which may be causing the condition (refer to SI). 2. When identified, use the appropriate DTC Diagnostics, Symptoms, Schematics, Component Connector End Views and Component Locator documents to locate and disconnect the affected harness connector(s) which are causing the condition. Note Fretting corrosion looks like little dark smudges on electrical terminals and appear where the actual electrical contact is being made. In less severe cases it may be unable to be seen or identified without the use of a magnifying glass. Important DO NOT apply an excessive amount of dielectric lubricant to the connectors as shown, as hydrolock may result when attempting to mate the connectors. Use ONLY a clean nylon brush that is dedicated to the repair of the conditions in this bulletin. 3. With a one-inch nylon bristle brush, apply dielectric lubricant to both the module/component side and the harness side of the affected connector(s). 4. Reconnect the affected connector(s) and wipe away any excess lubricant that may be present. 5. Attempt to duplicate the condition by using the following information: - DTC Diagnostic Procedure - Circuit/System Description - Conditions for Running the DTC - Conditions for Setting the DTC - Diagnostic Aids - Circuit/System Verification ‹› If the condition cannot be duplicated, the repair is complete. ‹› If the condition can be duplicated, then follow the appropriate DTC, Symptom or Circuit/System Testing procedure (refer to SI). Repair Order Documentation Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relay Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Relay Module: > 09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules > Page 94 Important The following information MUST be documented on the repair order. Failure to do so may result in a chargeback. - Customer vehicle condition. - Was a Service Lamp or Service Message illuminated? If yes, specify which Service Lamp or Service Message. - Was a DTC(s) set? If yes, specify which DTC(s) were set. - After following the procedure contained within this bulletin, could the condition be duplicated? ‹› If the condition was not duplicated, then document the affected module/component connector name and number on the repair order. - If the condition was duplicated after the procedure contained within this bulletin was followed, and additional diagnosis led to the replacement of a module or component, the SI Document ID Number MUST be written on the repair order. Parts Information Alternate Distributor For All of North America Note NyoGel(R) 760G Lubricant* is equivalent to GMSPO P/N 12377900, and P/N 10953529 (Canada), specified for use to correct the condition in this bulletin. *We believe this source and their products to be reliable. There may be additional manufacturers of such products/materials. General Motors does not endorse, indicate any preference for, or assume any responsibility for the products or material from this firm or for any such items that may be available from other sources. Warranty Information (excluding Saab Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the appropriate/closest labor operation depending upon the module/component connection that the dielectric lubricant was applied to: Warranty Information (Saab Models) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relay Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Relay Module: > 09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules > Page 95 For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the appropriate/closest labor operation depending upon the module/component connection that the dielectric lubricant was applied to refer to the table above. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Signal Processing Module > Component Information > Locations Signal Processing Module: Locations Instrument Panel/Center Console Component Views Left Side of the Instrument Panel Components 1 - P16 Instrument Cluster 2 - B10B Ambient Light/Sunload Sensor (C68) or B10 Ambient Light Sensor (C67) 3 - P19B Speaker - Center Instrument Panel (UZ8) 4 - P17 Info Display Module 5 P19V Speaker - Right Front Tweeter 6 - A20 Radio/HVAC Controls 7 - A11 Radio 8 - S3 Transmission Shift Lever 9 - P2 Transmission Shift Lever Position Indicator 10 - T11 Multimedia Player Interface Module (KTA) 11 - K108 Active Noise Cancellation Module (VQN) 12 - E8J Instrument Panel Courtesy Lamp - Left (LTZ or SLT) 13 - S36 Instrument Panel Dimmer Switch Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Signal Processing Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 99 Signal Processing Module: Diagrams K108 Active Noise Cancellation Module (VQN) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Signal Processing Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 100 Signal Processing Module: Description and Operation Active Noise Cancellation Description and Operation The entertainment system on this vehicle may have several different configurations. To determine the specific configuration of the vehicle, please see the Service Parts ID Label, and refer to RPO Code List (See: Application and ID/RPO Code List). Active Noise Cancellation (ANC) is a method used to cancel out undesirable sound generated by the engine or an open window. Active Noise Cancellation Control Circuit Operation An Active Noise Cancellation (ANC) system has four main components: the ANC module, microphone(s), audio amplifier(s), and speaker(s). The microphone is connected to the audio system and picks up the sound/noise in the vehicle cabin while the speakers produce the cancellation vibrations. The ANC system is composed of two microphones. The microphones are centrally located in the headliner to detect noise in the vehicle caused by the engine, or an open window. The processor analyzes the noise signal and outputs a cancellation signal audio tone based on positive coefficient and phase change to moderate the engine noise and make the vehicle seem quieter and without vibration. The ANC system uses the engine revolutions per minute (RPM) signal from the tachometer to determine the rotational speed in an engine. The ANC system works within 1500-2500 engine RPM. The cancellation signal is then amplified and a signal is sent to the speaker and subwoofer. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Signal Processing Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 101 Signal Processing Module: Service and Repair Active Noise Cancellation Module Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Door Lock Relay > Component Information > Locations Door Lock Relay: Locations Electrical Center Identification Views X50A Fuse Block - Underhood, Label Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Door Lock Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 106 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Diagrams Keyless Entry Module: Diagrams K77 Remote Control Door Lock Receiver Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 110 Keyless Entry Module: Service and Repair Remote Control Door Lock Receiver Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Memory Positioning Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Electrical - L/H Seat Inop./Erratic Memory Sys Operation Memory Positioning Module: Technical Service Bulletins Electrical - L/H Seat Inop./Erratic Memory Sys Operation TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 09-08-50-015B Date: January 15, 2010 Subject: Driver Power Seat Inoperative, Outside Mirrors Do Not Return to Original Position with Park Tilt Mirrors, Memory Remote Recall Intermittent Operation, Adjustable Pedals Inoperative (Reprogram Memory Seat Module) Models: 2010 Cadillac SRX Built Prior to January 6, 2010 2010 Chevrolet Equinox 2010 GMC Terrain All Built Prior to November 2, 2009 Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the 2010 Cadillac SRX build date. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 09-08-50-015A (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Condition Some customers may comment on one or more of the following concerns: - The driver power seat is inoperative (when equipped with Memory Seat only). The driver seat will not move forward, rearward and the recliner will not move forward or rearward. The customer may also experience the inability to move the seat up or down. - The outside mirrors do not return to the original position after the Park Tilt Mirrors function is engaged. The customer may report that the outside mirrors tilt downward when placing the vehicle in reverse, attempt to return to the original position, but do not reach the memory position after taking the vehicle out of reverse. The customer may also witness the mirrors staying in the tilt position and not returning to the memory position at all. - The Memory Remote Recall feature operates intermittently. If the customer enables the Memory Remote Recall feature in the Vehicle Personalization menu, they may comment about intermittent operation. - The Adjustable Pedals are inoperative (Cadillac SRX only). The customer may experience the inability to move the Adjustable Pedals forward or rearward. Cause This condition may be caused by a software state, interaction of features and serial data messages that can contribute to one or more of the above conditions. Correction Important DO NOT replace the MSM for this concern. Reprogram and perform the Setup procedure for the MSM with the latest software calibration. Refer to Memory Seat Control Module Programming and Setup in SI. Important Select the correct calibration files for the appropriate vehicle configuration (body style) and RPO codes. A revised calibration has been developed to address this condition. Technicians are to reprogram the MSM using the Service Programming System (SPS) with the latest software available on TIS2WEB. Refer to the Service Programming System (SPS) procedures in SI. When using a Tech 2(R) or a Multiple Diagnostic Interface (MDI) for reprogramming, ensure that it is updated with the latest software version. During programming, the battery voltage must be maintained within the proper range of 12-15 Volts. Only use the approved Midtronics(R) PSC 550 Battery Maintainer (SPS Programming Support Tool EL-49642) or equivalent during programming. Warranty Information Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Memory Positioning Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Electrical - L/H Seat Inop./Erratic Memory Sys Operation > Page 115 For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table above. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Memory Positioning Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 116 Memory Positioning Module: Locations Passenger Compartment/Roof Component Views Driver Seat Components 1 - M56D Seat Recline Motor - Driver (AE8) 2 - E14A Seat Heating Element - Driver Back (KA1) 3 P22E Video Display - Driver Seatback (UWG) 4 - F106L Side Air Bag - Left 5 - M52D Seat Lumbar Support Horizontal Motor - Driver 6 - M51D Seat Horizontal Motor - Driver (AE8) 7 - K40 Seat Memory Control Module (LTZ or SLT) or K29 Seat Heating Control Module (KA1 without LTZ or SLT) 8 - F113D Seat Belt Anchor Pretensioner - Driver 9 - M55D Seat Rear Vertical Motor (AE8) or M57D Seat Vertical Motor (without AE8) 10 - M50D Seat Front Vertical Motor - Driver 11 - S65D Seat Lumbar Support Switch - Driver 12 - S64D Seat Adjuster Switch - Driver (without AE8) 13 S64D Seat Adjuster Switch - Driver (AE8) 14 - S47D Seat Memory Switch - Driver (LTZ or SLT) 15 - E14B Seat Heating Element - Driver Cushion (KA1) 16 - B88D Seat Belt Switch - Driver Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Memory Positioning Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 117 Memory Positioning Module: Diagrams K40 Seat Memory Control Module X1 (LTZ or SLT) K40 Seat Memory Control Module X2 (LTZ or SLT) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Memory Positioning Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 118 K40 Seat Memory Control Module X3 (KA1 with LTZ or SLT) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Memory Positioning Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 119 K40 Seat Memory Control Module X4 (LTZ or SLT) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Memory Positioning Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 120 K40 Seat Memory Control Module X5 (LTZ or SLT) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Memory Positioning Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 121 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Power Mirror Control Module > Component Information > Locations Power Mirror Control Module: Locations Door Component Views Driver Door Components 1 - A23D Door Latch Assembly - Driver 2 - A9A Outside Rearview Mirror - Driver 3 - E1C Accent Lamp - Driver Door Handle (LTZ or SLT) 4 - K96L Mirror Control Module - Left (LTZ or SLT) 5 S52S Outside Rearview Mirror Switch 6 - P19G Speaker - Left Front 7 - M74D Window Motor Driver 8 - B63LF Side Impact Sensor - Left Front 9 - S79D Window Switch - Driver 10 - E1D Accent Lamp - Driver Door (LTZ or SLT) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Power Mirror Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 125 Power Mirror Control Module: Diagrams K96L Mirror Control Module - Left (LTZ or SLT) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Power Mirror Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 126 Power Mirror Control Module: Service and Repair Outside Rearview Mirror Folding Control Module Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Power Seat Control Module > Component Information > Locations Power Seat Control Module: Locations Passenger Compartment/Roof Component Views Driver Seat Components 1 - M56D Seat Recline Motor - Driver (AE8) 2 - E14A Seat Heating Element - Driver Back (KA1) 3 P22E Video Display - Driver Seatback (UWG) 4 - F106L Side Air Bag - Left 5 - M52D Seat Lumbar Support Horizontal Motor - Driver 6 - M51D Seat Horizontal Motor - Driver (AE8) 7 - K40 Seat Memory Control Module (LTZ or SLT) or K29 Seat Heating Control Module (KA1 without LTZ or SLT) 8 - F113D Seat Belt Anchor Pretensioner - Driver 9 - M55D Seat Rear Vertical Motor (AE8) or M57D Seat Vertical Motor (without AE8) 10 - M50D Seat Front Vertical Motor - Driver 11 - S65D Seat Lumbar Support Switch - Driver 12 - S64D Seat Adjuster Switch - Driver (without AE8) 13 S64D Seat Adjuster Switch - Driver (AE8) 14 - S47D Seat Memory Switch - Driver (LTZ or SLT) 15 - E14B Seat Heating Element - Driver Cushion (KA1) 16 - B88D Seat Belt Switch - Driver Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Power Seat Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 130 Power Seat Control Module: Diagrams K40 Seat Memory Control Module X1 (LTZ or SLT) K40 Seat Memory Control Module X2 (LTZ or SLT) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Power Seat Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 131 K40 Seat Memory Control Module X3 (KA1 with LTZ or SLT) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Power Seat Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 132 K40 Seat Memory Control Module X4 (LTZ or SLT) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Power Seat Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 133 K40 Seat Memory Control Module X5 (LTZ or SLT) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Power Seat Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 134 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Power Seat Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 135 Power Seat Control Module: Service and Repair Driver or Passenger Seat Adjuster Memory Module Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module: > 09-08-66-010B > Mar > 10 > Body - Power Liftgate Inoperative from Key FOB Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module: Customer Interest Body - Power Liftgate Inoperative from Key FOB TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 09-08-66-010B Date: March 25, 2010 Subject: Power Liftgate Inoperative from Key FOB, Interior Mounted Open/Close Switch, Gate Mounted Open/Close Switch and Gate Mounted Touch Pad (Reprogram Liftgate Control Module) Models: 2010 Cadillac CTS Sport Wagon, SRX 2010 Chevrolet Equinox 2010 GMC Terrain Built Prior to the Following VIN Breakpoints: Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add VIN breakpoint information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 09-08-66-010A (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Condition - Some customers may comment that the power liftgate is inoperative from the key FOB, the interior mounted open/close switch, the liftgate mounted open/close switch and the liftgate mounted touch pad. - 2010 Cadillac CTS Sport Wagon ONLY - Some customers may comment that the power liftgate does not open on first attempt, but will open on subsequent consecutive attempts. Cause This condition may be caused by a power liftgate microprocessor issue that could cause the power liftgate module to stop communicating on the GMLAN Serial Data Bus. Correction Note If the power liftgate module is not communicating, remove the two power liftgate module fuses, wait a minimum of 1 minute , and reinstall the two fuses; or disconnect the power liftgate module (disconnect all three connectors at the module), check and verify power and ground to the module, and re-connect the power liftgate module. Verify communication. If communication is restored, then update the software in the power liftgate module. - A revised power liftgate module calibration has been released to address this condition. Reprogram the power liftgate module using the Service Programming System (SPS) with the latest calibration available on TIS2WEB. Refer to the SPS procedures in SI. - When using a multiple diagnostic interface (MDI) for reprogramming, ensure that it is updated with the latest software version. - When using a Tech 2(R) for reprogramming, ensure that it is updated with the latest software version. - During programming, the battery voltage must be maintained within the proper range of 12-16 volts. Only use the approved Midtronics(R) PSC 550 Battery Maintainer (SPS Programming Support Tool EL-49642) or equivalent during programming. Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table above. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module: > 09-08-66-010B > Mar > 10 > Body - Power Liftgate Inoperative from Key FOB > Page 144 Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module: > 09-08-66-010B > Mar > 10 > Body - Power Liftgate Inoperative from Key FOB Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - Power Liftgate Inoperative from Key FOB TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 09-08-66-010B Date: March 25, 2010 Subject: Power Liftgate Inoperative from Key FOB, Interior Mounted Open/Close Switch, Gate Mounted Open/Close Switch and Gate Mounted Touch Pad (Reprogram Liftgate Control Module) Models: 2010 Cadillac CTS Sport Wagon, SRX 2010 Chevrolet Equinox 2010 GMC Terrain Built Prior to the Following VIN Breakpoints: Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add VIN breakpoint information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 09-08-66-010A (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Condition - Some customers may comment that the power liftgate is inoperative from the key FOB, the interior mounted open/close switch, the liftgate mounted open/close switch and the liftgate mounted touch pad. - 2010 Cadillac CTS Sport Wagon ONLY - Some customers may comment that the power liftgate does not open on first attempt, but will open on subsequent consecutive attempts. Cause This condition may be caused by a power liftgate microprocessor issue that could cause the power liftgate module to stop communicating on the GMLAN Serial Data Bus. Correction Note If the power liftgate module is not communicating, remove the two power liftgate module fuses, wait a minimum of 1 minute , and reinstall the two fuses; or disconnect the power liftgate module (disconnect all three connectors at the module), check and verify power and ground to the module, and re-connect the power liftgate module. Verify communication. If communication is restored, then update the software in the power liftgate module. - A revised power liftgate module calibration has been released to address this condition. Reprogram the power liftgate module using the Service Programming System (SPS) with the latest calibration available on TIS2WEB. Refer to the SPS procedures in SI. - When using a multiple diagnostic interface (MDI) for reprogramming, ensure that it is updated with the latest software version. - When using a Tech 2(R) for reprogramming, ensure that it is updated with the latest software version. - During programming, the battery voltage must be maintained within the proper range of 12-16 volts. Only use the approved Midtronics(R) PSC 550 Battery Maintainer (SPS Programming Support Tool EL-49642) or equivalent during programming. Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table above. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module: > 09-08-66-010B > Mar > 10 > Body - Power Liftgate Inoperative from Key FOB > Page 150 Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 151 Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module: Locations Luggage Compartment/Rear of Vehicle Component Views Liftgate Components 1 - B71R Liftgate Object Sensor - Right (TB5) 2 - E18 Rear Defogger Grid 3 - B71L Liftgate Object Sensor - Left (TB5) 4 - M45 Rear Wiper Motor 5 - K39 Liftgate Control Module (TB5) 6 - A23C Liftgate Latch Assembly 7 - B70 Liftgate Close Switch (TB5) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 152 Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module: Diagrams K39 Liftgate Control Module X1 (TB5) K39 Liftgate Control Module X2 (TB5) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 153 K39 Liftgate Control Module X3 (TB5) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 154 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 155 Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module: Service and Repair Accessory and Liftgate Control Module Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Control Module > Component Information > Locations Seat Heater Control Module: Locations Passenger Compartment/Roof Component Views Driver Seat Components 1 - M56D Seat Recline Motor - Driver (AE8) 2 - E14A Seat Heating Element - Driver Back (KA1) 3 P22E Video Display - Driver Seatback (UWG) 4 - F106L Side Air Bag - Left 5 - M52D Seat Lumbar Support Horizontal Motor - Driver 6 - M51D Seat Horizontal Motor - Driver (AE8) 7 - K40 Seat Memory Control Module (LTZ or SLT) or K29 Seat Heating Control Module (KA1 without LTZ or SLT) 8 - F113D Seat Belt Anchor Pretensioner - Driver 9 - M55D Seat Rear Vertical Motor (AE8) or M57D Seat Vertical Motor (without AE8) 10 - M50D Seat Front Vertical Motor - Driver 11 - S65D Seat Lumbar Support Switch - Driver 12 - S64D Seat Adjuster Switch - Driver (without AE8) 13 S64D Seat Adjuster Switch - Driver (AE8) 14 - S47D Seat Memory Switch - Driver (LTZ or SLT) 15 - E14B Seat Heating Element - Driver Cushion (KA1) 16 - B88D Seat Belt Switch - Driver Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 159 Seat Heater Control Module: Diagrams K29 Seat Heating Control Module X1 (KA1 without LTZ or SLT) K29 Seat Heating Control Module X1 (SPO Accessory) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 160 K29 Seat Heating Control Module X2 (KA1 without LTZ or SLT) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 161 K29 Seat Heating Control Module X3 (KA1 without LTZ or SLT) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 162 K29 Seat Heating Control Module X3 (SPO Accessory) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 163 K29 Seat Heating Control Module X4 (SPO Accessory) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 164 K29 Seat Heating Control Module X5 (SPO Accessory) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 165 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 166 Seat Heater Control Module: Service and Repair Front Seat Heater Control Module Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Trunk / Liftgate Relay > Component Information > Locations Trunk / Liftgate Relay: Locations Electrical Center Identification Views X50A Fuse Block - Underhood, Label Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Trunk / Liftgate Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 170 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Locations Electronic Brake Control Module: Locations Front of Vehicle/Engine Compartment Component Views Engine Compartment Components (Chevrolet) 1 - B20 Brake Fluid Level Switch 2 - B19B Brake Booster Vacuum Sensor 3 - M75 Windshield Wiper Motor 4 - X50A Fuse Block - Underhood 5 - C1 Battery 6 - G24 Windshield Washer Pump 7 - B55 Hood Ajar Switch (BTV) 8 - P12B Horn - Low Note 9 - P12A Horn - High Note 10 - K17 Electronic Brake Control Module Engine Compartment Components (GMC) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 175 1 - B20 Brake Fluid Level Switch 2 - B19B Brake Booster Vacuum Sensor 3 - M75 Windshield Wiper Motor 4 - X50A Fuse Block - Underhood 5 - C1 Battery 6 - G24 Windshield Washer Pump 7 - P12B Horn - Low Note 8 - B55 Hood Ajar Switch (BTV) 9 - K17 Electronic Brake Control Module 10 - P12A Horn - High Note Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 176 Electronic Brake Control Module: Diagrams K17 Electronic Brake Control Module Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 177 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 178 Electronic Brake Control Module: Service and Repair Electronic Brake Control Module Replacement Removal Procedure Warning: Refer to Brake Fluid Irritant Warning (See: Brakes and Traction Control/Service Precautions/Technician Safety Information/Brake Fluid Irritant Warning). Caution: Refer to Brake Fluid Effects on Paint and Electrical Components Caution (See: Brakes and Traction Control/Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings). Caution: Always connect or disconnect the wiring harness connector from the EBCM/EBTCM with the ignition switch in the OFF position. Failure to observe this precaution could result in damage to the EBCM/EBTCM. 1. Place the ignition switch in the OFF position. 2. Remove the accessory wiring junction block. Refer to Accessory Wiring Junction Block Replacement (See: Maintenance/Fuses and Circuit Breakers/Fuse Block/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Accessory Wiring Junction Block Replacement). 3. Clean the electronic brake control module (EBCM) to brake pressure modulator valve (BPMV) area of any dirt or debris. 4. Disconnect the EBCM electrical connector by lifting the locking lever upward. 5. Remove the 4 EBCM bolts (1). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 179 Note: Do not pry the components apart. 6. Carefully pull the EBCM (1) from the BPMV. 7. Remove the 12 EBCM seals, if necessary. Installation Procedure 1. Install the EBCM seals, if removed. 2. Install the EBCM (1) to the BPMV. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 180 Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener Caution). 3. Install the 4 EBCM bolts (1) and tighten the bolts in a cross pattern to 3 Nm (27 lb in). 4. Install the accessory wiring junction block. Refer to Accessory Wiring Junction Block Replacement (See: Maintenance/Fuses and Circuit Breakers/Fuse Block/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Accessory Wiring Junction Block Replacement). 5. If installing a new EBCM, program the EBCM. Refer to Control Module References (See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning). 6. Without starting the engine, place the ignition switch in the ON position. 7. Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle (See: Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Vacuum Pump Relay, Brakes > Component Information > Locations Vacuum Pump Relay: Locations Electrical Center Identification Views X50A Fuse Block - Underhood, Label Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Vacuum Pump Relay, Brakes > Component Information > Locations > Page 184 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay: Locations Electrical Center Identification Views X50A Fuse Block - Underhood, Label Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 189 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Compressor Clutch Relay > Component Information > Locations Compressor Clutch Relay: Locations Electrical Center Identification Views X50A Fuse Block - Underhood, Label Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Compressor Clutch Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 194 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Control Module HVAC: > 09298D > Nov > 10 > Recall Defroster/Defogger Inoperative Technical Service Bulletin # 09298D Date: 101122 Recall - Defroster/Defogger Inoperative FMVSS NONCOMPLIANCE Bulletin No.: 09298D Date: November 22, 2010 Subject: 09298D - Heating and Windshield Defrost Inoperative - Replace Computer Module Models: 2010 Chevrolet Equinox 2010 GMC Terrain Supercede: The Parts Information section in this bulletin has been revised for Canadian dealers. Mass Comp is no longer an Authorized GM Electronics Service Center. Canadian dealers are to begin contacting York Electronics for all exchanges.Discard all copies of bulletin 09298C, issued March 2010. Customers are being instructed to provide their VIN when calling to schedule a service appointment. If the vehicle will not be programmed at the dealership, please provide the VIN to the Parts Manager so parts can be ordered and received in time for the service appointment. Parts will be shipped overnight to dealers so please do not order more than 2 days prior to the scheduled service appointment date. Condition General Motors has decided that certain 2010 model year Chevrolet Equinox and GMC Terrain vehicles fail to conform to Federal/Canada Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 103, "Windshield Defrosting and Defogging Systems", and Standard 101, "Controls and Displays". On these vehicles, software in the center instrument panel can cause the heating, air conditioning, defrost, and radio controls, as well as the panel illumination to become inoperative. Driving without a functioning defrost system can decrease the driver's visibility under certain driving conditions and could result in a crash without warning. Driving without panel illumination can divert the driver's attention while looking for a control. Correction Dealers are to replace the computer module in the center instrument panel. Vehicles Involved Involved are certain 2010 model year Chevrolet Equinox and GMC Terrain vehicles built within these VIN breakpoints: Important Dealers are to confirm vehicle eligibility prior to beginning repairs by using the Required Field Actions section in the Global Warranty system. Not all vehicles within the above breakpoints may be involved. For dealers with involved vehicles, a listing with involved vehicles containing the complete vehicle identification number, customer name, and address information has been prepared and will be provided to US and Canadian dealers through the GM GlobalConnect Recall Reports, or sent directly to export dealers. Dealers will not have a report available if they have no involved vehicles currently assigned. The listing may contain customer names and addresses obtained from Motor Vehicle Registration Records. The use of such motor vehicle registration data for any purpose other than follow-up necessary to complete this recall is a violation of law in several states/provinces/countries. Accordingly, you are urged to limit the use of this report to the follow-up necessary to complete this recall. Parts Information For dealers using the programming tool: Most repairs require no parts. There are a small number of vehicles that will not be able to be reprogrammed; for these vehicles, please follow the parts information below. If you have parts currently in your inventory, please return them to Specmo (U.S.) or York Electronics (Canada). For dealers that did not receive a programming tool: A center instrument panel will be required. Note Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Control Module HVAC: > 09298D > Nov > 10 > Recall Defroster/Defogger Inoperative > Page 203 Center instrument panels (radio control assemblies) will be shipped overnight to dealers. Note: Core returns for this recall are to be shipped within 24 hours of receiving the exchange. A prepaid Federal Express Ground label will be included with each exchange. Package the core securely in the original packaging and package inserts provided with the exchange. It is important that the return unit be packaged identically to the exchange unit to prevent damage in shipping. Failure to return the core will result in a charge to the dealer's Open Parts Account. Do not order parts for customer vehicles until they have scheduled an appointment. U.S. Dealers Only: If the customer is not experiencing any concerns with the center instrument panel (ICS), please contact Specmo Enterprises for arrange for an exchange. If the customer does have ICS concerns, please contact the Technical Assistance Center (TAC) prior to ordering an exchange ICS. Dealers are to contact Specmo Enterprises via the internet at www.specmo.com/dealers, to arrange for an exchange of the center instrument panel (radio control assembly). Dealers that do not have an account with Specmo will be able to create an account in order to access the website. Arrange for an exchange by following the prompts. The information below will be required to arrange for an exchange. - Bulletin number 09298 - VIN Ontario Dealers Only: Due to a limited inventory, and to avoid backorders, an onsite mobile upgrade is available. Please contact York Electronics at 888-650-9675 to schedule an appointment. All Other Provinces, Excluding Ontario: To arrange for an exchange of the centre instrument panel (radio control assembly), please contact York Electronics at 888-650-9675. Service Procedure Service Procedure Using the Programming Tool (for dealers that were shipped a programming tool) Note Programming is not performed using TIS2WEB SPS; use provided programming tool. Note If the customer is NOT experiencing any concerns with the center instrument panel (ICS), reprogram the rdio control assembly (center instrument panels) following the instructions below. If the customer does have ICS concerns, please contact the Technical Assistance Center (TAC) prior to programming the radio control assembly (center instrument panels). (1) First Design Radio Control Assembly; (2) Second Design Radio Control Assembly 1. Determine if the radio control assembly is programmable. First design radio control assemblies are NOT programmable and must go through the radio control assembly exchange process. - First design radio control assemblies (1) are NOT programmable. There are NO slots on the backside of the radio control assembly. - Second design radio control assemblies (2) are programmable. They have two slots on the backside of the radio control assembly. If the radio control assembly is a second design assembly, proceed to Step 2. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Control Module HVAC: > 09298D > Nov > 10 > Recall Defroster/Defogger Inoperative > Page 204 Caution Insert a plastic body trim tool between the IP and radio control assembly along the top portion of the radio control assembly as shown in the illustration. DO NOT use a flat-blade screwdriver to remove the radio assembly. 2. Remove the radio control assembly (1). Refer to Radio Control Assembly Replacement in SI. 3. Carefully align the radio control assembly channels to the locating pegs of the programming tool as shown in the illustration. 4. Carefully seat the radio control assembly onto the programming tool. 5. The display area of the programming tool will indicate when the programming event has been completed. The programming tool will read "Programming Successful. Remove module." The programming event takes less than 30 seconds to complete. 6. Detach the radio control assembly from the programming tool. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Control Module HVAC: > 09298D > Nov > 10 > Recall Defroster/Defogger Inoperative > Page 205 7. Place blue dot (3) on the back of the radio control assembly to indicate that the radio control module has been reprogrammed. 8. Install the radio control assembly. Refer to Radio Control Assembly Replacement in SI. Service Procedure Using the Radio Control Assembly Exchange Process Caution Insert a plastic body trim tool between the IP and radio control assembly along the top portion of the radio control assembly as shown in the illustration. DO NOT use a flat-bladed screwdriver to remove the radio control assembly. Note If the customer is NOT experiencing any concerns with the center instrument panel (ICS), proceed to Step 1 and perform this recall. If the customer DOES have ICS concerns, please contact the Technical Assistance Center (TAC) prior to performing this recall. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Control Module HVAC: > 09298D > Nov > 10 > Recall Defroster/Defogger Inoperative > Page 206 Note For vehicles without the color touch screen navigation, unsnap and remove the display from the radio control assembly. Do not return the radio display with the radio control assembly. 1. Remove the radio control assembly (1). Refer to Radio Control Assembly Replacement in SI. 2. Package the radio control assembly and ship it to the exchange center indicated on the prepaid Federal Express Ground label that was enclosed with the exchange unit within 24 hours. Note Module programming and setup is NOT required when replacing only the radio control assembly. 3. Install the radio control assembly. Refer to Radio Control Assembly Replacement in SI. Courtesy Transportation - For US and Canada The General Motors Courtesy Transportation program is intended to minimize customer inconvenience when a vehicle requires a repair that is covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranties. The availability of courtesy transportation to customers whose vehicles are within the warranty coverage period and involved in a product program is very important in maintaining customer satisfaction. Dealers are to ensure that these customers understand that shuttle service or some other form of courtesy transportation is available and will be provided at no charge. Dealers should refer to the General Motors Service Policies and Procedures Manual for Courtesy Transportation guidelines. Warranty Transaction Information 1. Submit a transaction using the table below. * Dealers using WINS should add 0.2 administrative allowance to the labor time. Dealers using GWM should submit 0.2 hours administrative allowance under Administrative Time. ** Administrative allowance for unit exchange. *** Dealers are to claim only administrative allowance of 0.2 hours when the radio control assembly is reprogrammed by York's Mobile Unit. Dealers using WINS should submit 0.2 hours administrative allowance in labor time. Dealers using GWM should submit 0.2 hours administrative allowance under Administrative Time. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Control Module HVAC: > 09298D > Nov > 10 > Recall Defroster/Defogger Inoperative > Page 207 Customer Notification - For US and Canada General Motors will notify customers of this recall on their vehicle (see copy of customer letter included with this bulletin). Customer Notification - For Export Letters will be sent to known owners of record located within areas covered by the US National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act. For owners outside these areas, dealers should notify customers using the attached sample letter. Dealer Recall Responsibility - For US and Export (US States, Territories, and Possessions) The US National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act provides that each vehicle that is subject to a recall of this type must be adequately repaired within a reasonable time after the customer has tendered it for repair. A failure to repair within sixty days after tender of a vehicle is prima facie evidence of failure to repair within a reasonable time. If the condition is not adequately repaired within a reasonable time, the customer may be entitled to an identical or reasonably equivalent vehicle at no charge or to a refund of the purchase price less a reasonable allowance for depreciation. To avoid having to provide these burdensome remedies, every effort must be made to promptly schedule an appointment with each customer and to repair their vehicle as soon as possible. In the recall notification letters, customers are told how to contact the US National Highway Traffic Safety Administration if the recall is not completed within a reasonable time. This bulletin is notice to you that the new motor vehicles included in this recall may not comply with the standard identified above. Under Title 49, Section 30112 of the United States Code, it is illegal for a dealer to sell a new motor vehicle which the dealer knows does not comply with an applicable Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard. As a consequence, if you sell any of these motor vehicles without first performing the recall correction, your dealership may be subject to a civil penalty for each such sale. Dealer Recall Responsibility - All All unsold new vehicles in dealers' possession and subject to this recall must be held and inspected/repaired per the service procedure of this recall bulletin before customers take possession of these vehicles. Dealers are to service all vehicles subject to this recall at no charge to customers, regardless of mileage, age of vehicle, or ownership, from this time forward. Customers who have recently purchased vehicles sold from your vehicle inventory, and for which there is no customer information indicated on the dealer listing, are to be contacted by the dealer. Arrangements are to be made to make the required correction according to the instructions contained in this bulletin. A copy of the customer letter is provided in this bulletin for your use in contacting customers. Recall follow-up cards should not be used for this purpose, since the customer may not as yet have received the notification letter. In summary, whenever a vehicle subject to this recall enters your vehicle inventory, or is in your dealership for service in the future, you must take the steps necessary to be sure the recall correction has been made before selling or releasing the vehicle. Disclaimer Owner Letter Owner Letter Dear General Motors Customer: This notice is sent to you in accordance with the requirements of the National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act. General Motors has decided that certain 2010 model year Chevrolet Equinox and GMC Terrain vehicles fail to conform to Federal/Canada Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 103, "Windshield Defrosting and Defogging Systems", and Standard 101, "Controls and Displays". As a result, GM is conducting a recall. We apologize for this inconvenience. However, we are concerned about your safety and continued satisfaction with our products. Important - Your vehicle is involved in recall 09298. - Schedule an appointment with your GM dealer. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Control Module HVAC: > 09298D > Nov > 10 > Recall Defroster/Defogger Inoperative > Page 208 - This service will be performed for you at no charge. Why is your vehicle being recalled? The software in the center instrument panel can cause the heating, air conditioning, defrost, and radio controls, as well as the panel illumination to become inoperative. Driving without a functioning defrost system can decrease your visibility under certain driving conditions and could result in a crash without warning. Driving without panel illumination can divert your attention while looking for a control. What will we do? Your GM dealer will replace the computer module in the center instrument panel. This service will be performed for you at no charge. Because of service scheduling requirements, it is likely that your dealer will need your vehicle longer than the actual service correction time of approximately 20 minutes. If your vehicle is within the New Vehicle Limited Warranty, your dealer may provide you with shuttle service or some other form of courtesy transportation while your vehicle is at the dealership for this repair. Please refer to your Owner's Manual and your dealer for details on courtesy transportation. What should you do? You should contact your GM dealer to arrange a service appointment as soon as possible. When scheduling your appointment, please provide your dealer with your vehicle's 17 character vehicle identification number (VIN). Your VIN can be found above your name and address at the top of this letter, and will follow the numbers "09298". Your dealer will need your VIN to order parts for your vehicle so that they will be available on the day of your service appointment. Do you have questions? If you have questions or concerns that your dealer is unable to resolve, please contact the appropriate Customer Assistance Center at the number listed below. More information about your vehicle can be found at the Owner Center at www.gmownercenter.com. If after contacting your dealer and the Customer Assistance Center, you are still not satisfied we have done our best to remedy this condition without charge and within a reasonable time, you may wish to write the Administrator, National Highway Traffic Safety Administration, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE, Washington DC 20590, or call the toll-free Vehicle Safety Hotline at 1.888.327.4236 (TTY 1.800.424.9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov. Federal regulation requires that any vehicle lessor receiving this recall notice must forward a copy of this notice to the lessee within ten days. Scott Lawson Director, Customer and Relationship Services 09298 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Control Module HVAC: > NHTSA09V489000 > Dec > 09 > Recall 09V489000: Defroster Malfunction Control Module HVAC: Recalls Recall 09V489000: Defroster Malfunction VEHICLE MAKE/MODEL: MODEL YEAR(S): Chevrolet/Equinox 2010 GMC/Terrain 2010 MANUFACTURER: General Motors Corp. MFR'S REPORT DATE: December 18, 2009 NHTSA CAMPAIGN ID NUMBER: 09V489000 NHTSA ACTION NUMBER: N/A COMPONENT: Visibility: Defroster/Defogger System POTENTIAL NUMBER OF UNITS AFFECTED: 59031 SUMMARY: General Motors is recalling certain model year 2010 Chevrolet Equinox and GMC Terrain vehicles for failing to comply with the requirements of Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 103, "Windshield Defrosting and Defogging Systems and with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 101, "Controls and Displays". The software in the center instrument panel can cause the heating, air conditioning, defrost, and radio controls, as well as the panel illumination to become inoperative. CONSEQUENCE: Driving without a functioning defrost system can decrease your visibility under certain driving conditions and could result in a crash without warning. REMEDY: Dealers will replace the computer module in the center instrument panel free of charge. The safety recall is expected to begin during January 2010. Owners may contact Chevrolet at 1-800-630-2438, GMC at 1-866-996-9463 or at www.gmownercenter.com. NOTES: GM safety recall No. 090298. Owners may also contact The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration's Vehicle Safety Hotline at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY 1-800-424-9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Control Module HVAC: > 09298D > Nov > 10 > Recall - Defroster/Defogger Inoperative Technical Service Bulletin # 09298D Date: 101122 Recall - Defroster/Defogger Inoperative FMVSS NONCOMPLIANCE Bulletin No.: 09298D Date: November 22, 2010 Subject: 09298D - Heating and Windshield Defrost Inoperative - Replace Computer Module Models: 2010 Chevrolet Equinox 2010 GMC Terrain Supercede: The Parts Information section in this bulletin has been revised for Canadian dealers. Mass Comp is no longer an Authorized GM Electronics Service Center. Canadian dealers are to begin contacting York Electronics for all exchanges.Discard all copies of bulletin 09298C, issued March 2010. Customers are being instructed to provide their VIN when calling to schedule a service appointment. If the vehicle will not be programmed at the dealership, please provide the VIN to the Parts Manager so parts can be ordered and received in time for the service appointment. Parts will be shipped overnight to dealers so please do not order more than 2 days prior to the scheduled service appointment date. Condition General Motors has decided that certain 2010 model year Chevrolet Equinox and GMC Terrain vehicles fail to conform to Federal/Canada Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 103, "Windshield Defrosting and Defogging Systems", and Standard 101, "Controls and Displays". On these vehicles, software in the center instrument panel can cause the heating, air conditioning, defrost, and radio controls, as well as the panel illumination to become inoperative. Driving without a functioning defrost system can decrease the driver's visibility under certain driving conditions and could result in a crash without warning. Driving without panel illumination can divert the driver's attention while looking for a control. Correction Dealers are to replace the computer module in the center instrument panel. Vehicles Involved Involved are certain 2010 model year Chevrolet Equinox and GMC Terrain vehicles built within these VIN breakpoints: Important Dealers are to confirm vehicle eligibility prior to beginning repairs by using the Required Field Actions section in the Global Warranty system. Not all vehicles within the above breakpoints may be involved. For dealers with involved vehicles, a listing with involved vehicles containing the complete vehicle identification number, customer name, and address information has been prepared and will be provided to US and Canadian dealers through the GM GlobalConnect Recall Reports, or sent directly to export dealers. Dealers will not have a report available if they have no involved vehicles currently assigned. The listing may contain customer names and addresses obtained from Motor Vehicle Registration Records. The use of such motor vehicle registration data for any purpose other than follow-up necessary to complete this recall is a violation of law in several states/provinces/countries. Accordingly, you are urged to limit the use of this report to the follow-up necessary to complete this recall. Parts Information For dealers using the programming tool: Most repairs require no parts. There are a small number of vehicles that will not be able to be reprogrammed; for these vehicles, please follow the parts information below. If you have parts currently in your inventory, please return them to Specmo (U.S.) or York Electronics (Canada). For dealers that did not receive a programming tool: A center instrument panel will be required. Note Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Control Module HVAC: > 09298D > Nov > 10 > Recall - Defroster/Defogger Inoperative > Page 218 Center instrument panels (radio control assemblies) will be shipped overnight to dealers. Note: Core returns for this recall are to be shipped within 24 hours of receiving the exchange. A prepaid Federal Express Ground label will be included with each exchange. Package the core securely in the original packaging and package inserts provided with the exchange. It is important that the return unit be packaged identically to the exchange unit to prevent damage in shipping. Failure to return the core will result in a charge to the dealer's Open Parts Account. Do not order parts for customer vehicles until they have scheduled an appointment. U.S. Dealers Only: If the customer is not experiencing any concerns with the center instrument panel (ICS), please contact Specmo Enterprises for arrange for an exchange. If the customer does have ICS concerns, please contact the Technical Assistance Center (TAC) prior to ordering an exchange ICS. Dealers are to contact Specmo Enterprises via the internet at www.specmo.com/dealers, to arrange for an exchange of the center instrument panel (radio control assembly). Dealers that do not have an account with Specmo will be able to create an account in order to access the website. Arrange for an exchange by following the prompts. The information below will be required to arrange for an exchange. - Bulletin number 09298 - VIN Ontario Dealers Only: Due to a limited inventory, and to avoid backorders, an onsite mobile upgrade is available. Please contact York Electronics at 888-650-9675 to schedule an appointment. All Other Provinces, Excluding Ontario: To arrange for an exchange of the centre instrument panel (radio control assembly), please contact York Electronics at 888-650-9675. Service Procedure Service Procedure Using the Programming Tool (for dealers that were shipped a programming tool) Note Programming is not performed using TIS2WEB SPS; use provided programming tool. Note If the customer is NOT experiencing any concerns with the center instrument panel (ICS), reprogram the rdio control assembly (center instrument panels) following the instructions below. If the customer does have ICS concerns, please contact the Technical Assistance Center (TAC) prior to programming the radio control assembly (center instrument panels). (1) First Design Radio Control Assembly; (2) Second Design Radio Control Assembly 1. Determine if the radio control assembly is programmable. First design radio control assemblies are NOT programmable and must go through the radio control assembly exchange process. - First design radio control assemblies (1) are NOT programmable. There are NO slots on the backside of the radio control assembly. - Second design radio control assemblies (2) are programmable. They have two slots on the backside of the radio control assembly. If the radio control assembly is a second design assembly, proceed to Step 2. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Control Module HVAC: > 09298D > Nov > 10 > Recall - Defroster/Defogger Inoperative > Page 219 Caution Insert a plastic body trim tool between the IP and radio control assembly along the top portion of the radio control assembly as shown in the illustration. DO NOT use a flat-blade screwdriver to remove the radio assembly. 2. Remove the radio control assembly (1). Refer to Radio Control Assembly Replacement in SI. 3. Carefully align the radio control assembly channels to the locating pegs of the programming tool as shown in the illustration. 4. Carefully seat the radio control assembly onto the programming tool. 5. The display area of the programming tool will indicate when the programming event has been completed. The programming tool will read "Programming Successful. Remove module." The programming event takes less than 30 seconds to complete. 6. Detach the radio control assembly from the programming tool. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Control Module HVAC: > 09298D > Nov > 10 > Recall - Defroster/Defogger Inoperative > Page 220 7. Place blue dot (3) on the back of the radio control assembly to indicate that the radio control module has been reprogrammed. 8. Install the radio control assembly. Refer to Radio Control Assembly Replacement in SI. Service Procedure Using the Radio Control Assembly Exchange Process Caution Insert a plastic body trim tool between the IP and radio control assembly along the top portion of the radio control assembly as shown in the illustration. DO NOT use a flat-bladed screwdriver to remove the radio control assembly. Note If the customer is NOT experiencing any concerns with the center instrument panel (ICS), proceed to Step 1 and perform this recall. If the customer DOES have ICS concerns, please contact the Technical Assistance Center (TAC) prior to performing this recall. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Control Module HVAC: > 09298D > Nov > 10 > Recall - Defroster/Defogger Inoperative > Page 221 Note For vehicles without the color touch screen navigation, unsnap and remove the display from the radio control assembly. Do not return the radio display with the radio control assembly. 1. Remove the radio control assembly (1). Refer to Radio Control Assembly Replacement in SI. 2. Package the radio control assembly and ship it to the exchange center indicated on the prepaid Federal Express Ground label that was enclosed with the exchange unit within 24 hours. Note Module programming and setup is NOT required when replacing only the radio control assembly. 3. Install the radio control assembly. Refer to Radio Control Assembly Replacement in SI. Courtesy Transportation - For US and Canada The General Motors Courtesy Transportation program is intended to minimize customer inconvenience when a vehicle requires a repair that is covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranties. The availability of courtesy transportation to customers whose vehicles are within the warranty coverage period and involved in a product program is very important in maintaining customer satisfaction. Dealers are to ensure that these customers understand that shuttle service or some other form of courtesy transportation is available and will be provided at no charge. Dealers should refer to the General Motors Service Policies and Procedures Manual for Courtesy Transportation guidelines. Warranty Transaction Information 1. Submit a transaction using the table below. * Dealers using WINS should add 0.2 administrative allowance to the labor time. Dealers using GWM should submit 0.2 hours administrative allowance under Administrative Time. ** Administrative allowance for unit exchange. *** Dealers are to claim only administrative allowance of 0.2 hours when the radio control assembly is reprogrammed by York's Mobile Unit. Dealers using WINS should submit 0.2 hours administrative allowance in labor time. Dealers using GWM should submit 0.2 hours administrative allowance under Administrative Time. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Control Module HVAC: > 09298D > Nov > 10 > Recall - Defroster/Defogger Inoperative > Page 222 Customer Notification - For US and Canada General Motors will notify customers of this recall on their vehicle (see copy of customer letter included with this bulletin). Customer Notification - For Export Letters will be sent to known owners of record located within areas covered by the US National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act. For owners outside these areas, dealers should notify customers using the attached sample letter. Dealer Recall Responsibility - For US and Export (US States, Territories, and Possessions) The US National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act provides that each vehicle that is subject to a recall of this type must be adequately repaired within a reasonable time after the customer has tendered it for repair. A failure to repair within sixty days after tender of a vehicle is prima facie evidence of failure to repair within a reasonable time. If the condition is not adequately repaired within a reasonable time, the customer may be entitled to an identical or reasonably equivalent vehicle at no charge or to a refund of the purchase price less a reasonable allowance for depreciation. To avoid having to provide these burdensome remedies, every effort must be made to promptly schedule an appointment with each customer and to repair their vehicle as soon as possible. In the recall notification letters, customers are told how to contact the US National Highway Traffic Safety Administration if the recall is not completed within a reasonable time. This bulletin is notice to you that the new motor vehicles included in this recall may not comply with the standard identified above. Under Title 49, Section 30112 of the United States Code, it is illegal for a dealer to sell a new motor vehicle which the dealer knows does not comply with an applicable Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard. As a consequence, if you sell any of these motor vehicles without first performing the recall correction, your dealership may be subject to a civil penalty for each such sale. Dealer Recall Responsibility - All All unsold new vehicles in dealers' possession and subject to this recall must be held and inspected/repaired per the service procedure of this recall bulletin before customers take possession of these vehicles. Dealers are to service all vehicles subject to this recall at no charge to customers, regardless of mileage, age of vehicle, or ownership, from this time forward. Customers who have recently purchased vehicles sold from your vehicle inventory, and for which there is no customer information indicated on the dealer listing, are to be contacted by the dealer. Arrangements are to be made to make the required correction according to the instructions contained in this bulletin. A copy of the customer letter is provided in this bulletin for your use in contacting customers. Recall follow-up cards should not be used for this purpose, since the customer may not as yet have received the notification letter. In summary, whenever a vehicle subject to this recall enters your vehicle inventory, or is in your dealership for service in the future, you must take the steps necessary to be sure the recall correction has been made before selling or releasing the vehicle. Disclaimer Owner Letter Owner Letter Dear General Motors Customer: This notice is sent to you in accordance with the requirements of the National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act. General Motors has decided that certain 2010 model year Chevrolet Equinox and GMC Terrain vehicles fail to conform to Federal/Canada Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 103, "Windshield Defrosting and Defogging Systems", and Standard 101, "Controls and Displays". As a result, GM is conducting a recall. We apologize for this inconvenience. However, we are concerned about your safety and continued satisfaction with our products. Important - Your vehicle is involved in recall 09298. - Schedule an appointment with your GM dealer. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Control Module HVAC: > 09298D > Nov > 10 > Recall - Defroster/Defogger Inoperative > Page 223 - This service will be performed for you at no charge. Why is your vehicle being recalled? The software in the center instrument panel can cause the heating, air conditioning, defrost, and radio controls, as well as the panel illumination to become inoperative. Driving without a functioning defrost system can decrease your visibility under certain driving conditions and could result in a crash without warning. Driving without panel illumination can divert your attention while looking for a control. What will we do? Your GM dealer will replace the computer module in the center instrument panel. This service will be performed for you at no charge. Because of service scheduling requirements, it is likely that your dealer will need your vehicle longer than the actual service correction time of approximately 20 minutes. If your vehicle is within the New Vehicle Limited Warranty, your dealer may provide you with shuttle service or some other form of courtesy transportation while your vehicle is at the dealership for this repair. Please refer to your Owner's Manual and your dealer for details on courtesy transportation. What should you do? You should contact your GM dealer to arrange a service appointment as soon as possible. When scheduling your appointment, please provide your dealer with your vehicle's 17 character vehicle identification number (VIN). Your VIN can be found above your name and address at the top of this letter, and will follow the numbers "09298". Your dealer will need your VIN to order parts for your vehicle so that they will be available on the day of your service appointment. Do you have questions? If you have questions or concerns that your dealer is unable to resolve, please contact the appropriate Customer Assistance Center at the number listed below. More information about your vehicle can be found at the Owner Center at www.gmownercenter.com. If after contacting your dealer and the Customer Assistance Center, you are still not satisfied we have done our best to remedy this condition without charge and within a reasonable time, you may wish to write the Administrator, National Highway Traffic Safety Administration, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE, Washington DC 20590, or call the toll-free Vehicle Safety Hotline at 1.888.327.4236 (TTY 1.800.424.9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov. Federal regulation requires that any vehicle lessor receiving this recall notice must forward a copy of this notice to the lessee within ten days. Scott Lawson Director, Customer and Relationship Services 09298 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Control Module HVAC: > NHTSA09V489000 > Dec > 09 > Recall 09V489000: Defroster Malfunction Control Module HVAC: All Technical Service Bulletins Recall 09V489000: Defroster Malfunction VEHICLE MAKE/MODEL: MODEL YEAR(S): Chevrolet/Equinox 2010 GMC/Terrain 2010 MANUFACTURER: General Motors Corp. MFR'S REPORT DATE: December 18, 2009 NHTSA CAMPAIGN ID NUMBER: 09V489000 NHTSA ACTION NUMBER: N/A COMPONENT: Visibility: Defroster/Defogger System POTENTIAL NUMBER OF UNITS AFFECTED: 59031 SUMMARY: General Motors is recalling certain model year 2010 Chevrolet Equinox and GMC Terrain vehicles for failing to comply with the requirements of Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 103, "Windshield Defrosting and Defogging Systems and with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 101, "Controls and Displays". The software in the center instrument panel can cause the heating, air conditioning, defrost, and radio controls, as well as the panel illumination to become inoperative. CONSEQUENCE: Driving without a functioning defrost system can decrease your visibility under certain driving conditions and could result in a crash without warning. REMEDY: Dealers will replace the computer module in the center instrument panel free of charge. The safety recall is expected to begin during January 2010. Owners may contact Chevrolet at 1-800-630-2438, GMC at 1-866-996-9463 or at www.gmownercenter.com. NOTES: GM safety recall No. 090298. Owners may also contact The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration's Vehicle Safety Hotline at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY 1-800-424-9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 228 Control Module HVAC: Locations Instrument Panel/Center Console Component Views Right Side of Instrument Panel - Center Console and HVAC System 1 - B7E Air Temperature Sensor - Duct Right Lower 2 - B7J Air Temperature Sensor - Duct Right Upper 3 - M6 Air Temperature Door Actuator 4 - M8 Blower Motor 5 - K8 Blower Motor Control Module 6 - B39 A/C Evaporator Temperature Sensor 7 - M46 Air Recirculation Door Motor 8 - M37 Mode Door Actuator 9 - X83 Auxiliary Audio Input X1 (without UWG) 10 - X83 Auxiliary Audio Input X2 (without UWG) 11 - X80A Accessory Power Receptacle - Center Console 1 12 - E28 Center Console Compartment Lamp (LT or LTZ or SLE2 or SLT) 13 - X80B Accessory Power Receptacle Center Console 2 14 - X82 Audio/Video Input Adapter (UWG) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 229 Control Module HVAC: Diagrams K8 Blower Motor Control Module X1 K8 Blower Motor Control Module X2 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 230 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 231 Control Module HVAC: Service and Repair Blower Motor Control Module Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Instrument Panel > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 09298D > Nov > 10 > Recall Defroster/Defogger Inoperative Technical Service Bulletin # 09298D Date: 101122 Recall - Defroster/Defogger Inoperative FMVSS NONCOMPLIANCE Bulletin No.: 09298D Date: November 22, 2010 Subject: 09298D - Heating and Windshield Defrost Inoperative - Replace Computer Module Models: 2010 Chevrolet Equinox 2010 GMC Terrain Supercede: The Parts Information section in this bulletin has been revised for Canadian dealers. Mass Comp is no longer an Authorized GM Electronics Service Center. Canadian dealers are to begin contacting York Electronics for all exchanges.Discard all copies of bulletin 09298C, issued March 2010. Customers are being instructed to provide their VIN when calling to schedule a service appointment. If the vehicle will not be programmed at the dealership, please provide the VIN to the Parts Manager so parts can be ordered and received in time for the service appointment. Parts will be shipped overnight to dealers so please do not order more than 2 days prior to the scheduled service appointment date. Condition General Motors has decided that certain 2010 model year Chevrolet Equinox and GMC Terrain vehicles fail to conform to Federal/Canada Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 103, "Windshield Defrosting and Defogging Systems", and Standard 101, "Controls and Displays". On these vehicles, software in the center instrument panel can cause the heating, air conditioning, defrost, and radio controls, as well as the panel illumination to become inoperative. Driving without a functioning defrost system can decrease the driver's visibility under certain driving conditions and could result in a crash without warning. Driving without panel illumination can divert the driver's attention while looking for a control. Correction Dealers are to replace the computer module in the center instrument panel. Vehicles Involved Involved are certain 2010 model year Chevrolet Equinox and GMC Terrain vehicles built within these VIN breakpoints: Important Dealers are to confirm vehicle eligibility prior to beginning repairs by using the Required Field Actions section in the Global Warranty system. Not all vehicles within the above breakpoints may be involved. For dealers with involved vehicles, a listing with involved vehicles containing the complete vehicle identification number, customer name, and address information has been prepared and will be provided to US and Canadian dealers through the GM GlobalConnect Recall Reports, or sent directly to export dealers. Dealers will not have a report available if they have no involved vehicles currently assigned. The listing may contain customer names and addresses obtained from Motor Vehicle Registration Records. The use of such motor vehicle registration data for any purpose other than follow-up necessary to complete this recall is a violation of law in several states/provinces/countries. Accordingly, you are urged to limit the use of this report to the follow-up necessary to complete this recall. Parts Information For dealers using the programming tool: Most repairs require no parts. There are a small number of vehicles that will not be able to be reprogrammed; for these vehicles, please follow the parts information below. If you have parts currently in your inventory, please return them to Specmo (U.S.) or York Electronics (Canada). For dealers that did not receive a programming tool: A center instrument panel will be required. Note Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Instrument Panel > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 09298D > Nov > 10 > Recall Defroster/Defogger Inoperative > Page 241 Center instrument panels (radio control assemblies) will be shipped overnight to dealers. Note: Core returns for this recall are to be shipped within 24 hours of receiving the exchange. A prepaid Federal Express Ground label will be included with each exchange. Package the core securely in the original packaging and package inserts provided with the exchange. It is important that the return unit be packaged identically to the exchange unit to prevent damage in shipping. Failure to return the core will result in a charge to the dealer's Open Parts Account. Do not order parts for customer vehicles until they have scheduled an appointment. U.S. Dealers Only: If the customer is not experiencing any concerns with the center instrument panel (ICS), please contact Specmo Enterprises for arrange for an exchange. If the customer does have ICS concerns, please contact the Technical Assistance Center (TAC) prior to ordering an exchange ICS. Dealers are to contact Specmo Enterprises via the internet at www.specmo.com/dealers, to arrange for an exchange of the center instrument panel (radio control assembly). Dealers that do not have an account with Specmo will be able to create an account in order to access the website. Arrange for an exchange by following the prompts. The information below will be required to arrange for an exchange. - Bulletin number 09298 - VIN Ontario Dealers Only: Due to a limited inventory, and to avoid backorders, an onsite mobile upgrade is available. Please contact York Electronics at 888-650-9675 to schedule an appointment. All Other Provinces, Excluding Ontario: To arrange for an exchange of the centre instrument panel (radio control assembly), please contact York Electronics at 888-650-9675. Service Procedure Service Procedure Using the Programming Tool (for dealers that were shipped a programming tool) Note Programming is not performed using TIS2WEB SPS; use provided programming tool. Note If the customer is NOT experiencing any concerns with the center instrument panel (ICS), reprogram the rdio control assembly (center instrument panels) following the instructions below. If the customer does have ICS concerns, please contact the Technical Assistance Center (TAC) prior to programming the radio control assembly (center instrument panels). (1) First Design Radio Control Assembly; (2) Second Design Radio Control Assembly 1. Determine if the radio control assembly is programmable. First design radio control assemblies are NOT programmable and must go through the radio control assembly exchange process. - First design radio control assemblies (1) are NOT programmable. There are NO slots on the backside of the radio control assembly. - Second design radio control assemblies (2) are programmable. They have two slots on the backside of the radio control assembly. If the radio control assembly is a second design assembly, proceed to Step 2. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Instrument Panel > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 09298D > Nov > 10 > Recall Defroster/Defogger Inoperative > Page 242 Caution Insert a plastic body trim tool between the IP and radio control assembly along the top portion of the radio control assembly as shown in the illustration. DO NOT use a flat-blade screwdriver to remove the radio assembly. 2. Remove the radio control assembly (1). Refer to Radio Control Assembly Replacement in SI. 3. Carefully align the radio control assembly channels to the locating pegs of the programming tool as shown in the illustration. 4. Carefully seat the radio control assembly onto the programming tool. 5. The display area of the programming tool will indicate when the programming event has been completed. The programming tool will read "Programming Successful. Remove module." The programming event takes less than 30 seconds to complete. 6. Detach the radio control assembly from the programming tool. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Instrument Panel > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 09298D > Nov > 10 > Recall Defroster/Defogger Inoperative > Page 243 7. Place blue dot (3) on the back of the radio control assembly to indicate that the radio control module has been reprogrammed. 8. Install the radio control assembly. Refer to Radio Control Assembly Replacement in SI. Service Procedure Using the Radio Control Assembly Exchange Process Caution Insert a plastic body trim tool between the IP and radio control assembly along the top portion of the radio control assembly as shown in the illustration. DO NOT use a flat-bladed screwdriver to remove the radio control assembly. Note If the customer is NOT experiencing any concerns with the center instrument panel (ICS), proceed to Step 1 and perform this recall. If the customer DOES have ICS concerns, please contact the Technical Assistance Center (TAC) prior to performing this recall. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Instrument Panel > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 09298D > Nov > 10 > Recall Defroster/Defogger Inoperative > Page 244 Note For vehicles without the color touch screen navigation, unsnap and remove the display from the radio control assembly. Do not return the radio display with the radio control assembly. 1. Remove the radio control assembly (1). Refer to Radio Control Assembly Replacement in SI. 2. Package the radio control assembly and ship it to the exchange center indicated on the prepaid Federal Express Ground label that was enclosed with the exchange unit within 24 hours. Note Module programming and setup is NOT required when replacing only the radio control assembly. 3. Install the radio control assembly. Refer to Radio Control Assembly Replacement in SI. Courtesy Transportation - For US and Canada The General Motors Courtesy Transportation program is intended to minimize customer inconvenience when a vehicle requires a repair that is covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranties. The availability of courtesy transportation to customers whose vehicles are within the warranty coverage period and involved in a product program is very important in maintaining customer satisfaction. Dealers are to ensure that these customers understand that shuttle service or some other form of courtesy transportation is available and will be provided at no charge. Dealers should refer to the General Motors Service Policies and Procedures Manual for Courtesy Transportation guidelines. Warranty Transaction Information 1. Submit a transaction using the table below. * Dealers using WINS should add 0.2 administrative allowance to the labor time. Dealers using GWM should submit 0.2 hours administrative allowance under Administrative Time. ** Administrative allowance for unit exchange. *** Dealers are to claim only administrative allowance of 0.2 hours when the radio control assembly is reprogrammed by York's Mobile Unit. Dealers using WINS should submit 0.2 hours administrative allowance in labor time. Dealers using GWM should submit 0.2 hours administrative allowance under Administrative Time. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Instrument Panel > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 09298D > Nov > 10 > Recall Defroster/Defogger Inoperative > Page 245 Customer Notification - For US and Canada General Motors will notify customers of this recall on their vehicle (see copy of customer letter included with this bulletin). Customer Notification - For Export Letters will be sent to known owners of record located within areas covered by the US National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act. For owners outside these areas, dealers should notify customers using the attached sample letter. Dealer Recall Responsibility - For US and Export (US States, Territories, and Possessions) The US National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act provides that each vehicle that is subject to a recall of this type must be adequately repaired within a reasonable time after the customer has tendered it for repair. A failure to repair within sixty days after tender of a vehicle is prima facie evidence of failure to repair within a reasonable time. If the condition is not adequately repaired within a reasonable time, the customer may be entitled to an identical or reasonably equivalent vehicle at no charge or to a refund of the purchase price less a reasonable allowance for depreciation. To avoid having to provide these burdensome remedies, every effort must be made to promptly schedule an appointment with each customer and to repair their vehicle as soon as possible. In the recall notification letters, customers are told how to contact the US National Highway Traffic Safety Administration if the recall is not completed within a reasonable time. This bulletin is notice to you that the new motor vehicles included in this recall may not comply with the standard identified above. Under Title 49, Section 30112 of the United States Code, it is illegal for a dealer to sell a new motor vehicle which the dealer knows does not comply with an applicable Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard. As a consequence, if you sell any of these motor vehicles without first performing the recall correction, your dealership may be subject to a civil penalty for each such sale. Dealer Recall Responsibility - All All unsold new vehicles in dealers' possession and subject to this recall must be held and inspected/repaired per the service procedure of this recall bulletin before customers take possession of these vehicles. Dealers are to service all vehicles subject to this recall at no charge to customers, regardless of mileage, age of vehicle, or ownership, from this time forward. Customers who have recently purchased vehicles sold from your vehicle inventory, and for which there is no customer information indicated on the dealer listing, are to be contacted by the dealer. Arrangements are to be made to make the required correction according to the instructions contained in this bulletin. A copy of the customer letter is provided in this bulletin for your use in contacting customers. Recall follow-up cards should not be used for this purpose, since the customer may not as yet have received the notification letter. In summary, whenever a vehicle subject to this recall enters your vehicle inventory, or is in your dealership for service in the future, you must take the steps necessary to be sure the recall correction has been made before selling or releasing the vehicle. Disclaimer Owner Letter Owner Letter Dear General Motors Customer: This notice is sent to you in accordance with the requirements of the National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act. General Motors has decided that certain 2010 model year Chevrolet Equinox and GMC Terrain vehicles fail to conform to Federal/Canada Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 103, "Windshield Defrosting and Defogging Systems", and Standard 101, "Controls and Displays". As a result, GM is conducting a recall. We apologize for this inconvenience. However, we are concerned about your safety and continued satisfaction with our products. Important - Your vehicle is involved in recall 09298. - Schedule an appointment with your GM dealer. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Instrument Panel > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 09298D > Nov > 10 > Recall Defroster/Defogger Inoperative > Page 246 - This service will be performed for you at no charge. Why is your vehicle being recalled? The software in the center instrument panel can cause the heating, air conditioning, defrost, and radio controls, as well as the panel illumination to become inoperative. Driving without a functioning defrost system can decrease your visibility under certain driving conditions and could result in a crash without warning. Driving without panel illumination can divert your attention while looking for a control. What will we do? Your GM dealer will replace the computer module in the center instrument panel. This service will be performed for you at no charge. Because of service scheduling requirements, it is likely that your dealer will need your vehicle longer than the actual service correction time of approximately 20 minutes. If your vehicle is within the New Vehicle Limited Warranty, your dealer may provide you with shuttle service or some other form of courtesy transportation while your vehicle is at the dealership for this repair. Please refer to your Owner's Manual and your dealer for details on courtesy transportation. What should you do? You should contact your GM dealer to arrange a service appointment as soon as possible. When scheduling your appointment, please provide your dealer with your vehicle's 17 character vehicle identification number (VIN). Your VIN can be found above your name and address at the top of this letter, and will follow the numbers "09298". Your dealer will need your VIN to order parts for your vehicle so that they will be available on the day of your service appointment. Do you have questions? If you have questions or concerns that your dealer is unable to resolve, please contact the appropriate Customer Assistance Center at the number listed below. More information about your vehicle can be found at the Owner Center at www.gmownercenter.com. If after contacting your dealer and the Customer Assistance Center, you are still not satisfied we have done our best to remedy this condition without charge and within a reasonable time, you may wish to write the Administrator, National Highway Traffic Safety Administration, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE, Washington DC 20590, or call the toll-free Vehicle Safety Hotline at 1.888.327.4236 (TTY 1.800.424.9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov. Federal regulation requires that any vehicle lessor receiving this recall notice must forward a copy of this notice to the lessee within ten days. Scott Lawson Director, Customer and Relationship Services 09298 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Instrument Panel > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > NHTSA09V489000 > Dec > 09 > Recall 09V489000: Defroster Malfunction Instrument Panel Control Module: Recalls Recall 09V489000: Defroster Malfunction VEHICLE MAKE/MODEL: MODEL YEAR(S): Chevrolet/Equinox 2010 GMC/Terrain 2010 MANUFACTURER: General Motors Corp. MFR'S REPORT DATE: December 18, 2009 NHTSA CAMPAIGN ID NUMBER: 09V489000 NHTSA ACTION NUMBER: N/A COMPONENT: Visibility: Defroster/Defogger System POTENTIAL NUMBER OF UNITS AFFECTED: 59031 SUMMARY: General Motors is recalling certain model year 2010 Chevrolet Equinox and GMC Terrain vehicles for failing to comply with the requirements of Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 103, "Windshield Defrosting and Defogging Systems and with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 101, "Controls and Displays". The software in the center instrument panel can cause the heating, air conditioning, defrost, and radio controls, as well as the panel illumination to become inoperative. CONSEQUENCE: Driving without a functioning defrost system can decrease your visibility under certain driving conditions and could result in a crash without warning. REMEDY: Dealers will replace the computer module in the center instrument panel free of charge. The safety recall is expected to begin during January 2010. Owners may contact Chevrolet at 1-800-630-2438, GMC at 1-866-996-9463 or at www.gmownercenter.com. NOTES: GM safety recall No. 090298. Owners may also contact The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration's Vehicle Safety Hotline at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY 1-800-424-9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Instrument Panel > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Component Information > Locations Parking Assist Control Module: Locations Luggage Compartment/Rear of Vehicle Component Views Left Side of the Luggage Compartment Components 1 - X80R Accessory Power Receptacle - Rear Compartment 2 - K41 Parking Assist Module (UD7) 3 - M17 Liftgate Motor Assembly (TB5) 4 - K27 Fuel Pump Control Module Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Instrument Panel > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Component Information > Locations > Page 253 Parking Assist Control Module: Diagrams K41 Parking Assist Control Module X1 (UD7) K41 Parking Assist Control Module X2 (UD7) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Instrument Panel > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Component Information > Locations > Page 254 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Instrument Panel > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Component Information > Locations > Page 255 Parking Assist Control Module: Service and Repair Rear Object Alarm Module Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Instrument Panel > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Instrument Panel Control Module: > 10-07-30-002A > Jun > 10 > A/T Controls - Snapshot Data Using (GDS) Instrument Panel Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Electrical - Instrument Panel Blanks Out/Inoperative TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 10-08-49-003 Date: May 17, 2010 Subject: Intermittent Instrument Panel Cluster (IPC) Inoperative, Driver Information Center (DIC) Blanks Out (Reprogram IPC) Models: 2010 Chevrolet Equinox 2010 GMC Terrain All Built Prior to November 15, 2009 Condition In rare cases, some customers may comment that on ignition start up, intermittently, the IPC lights do not come on, the IPC gauges are inoperative, or the DIC goes blank. The Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) may also come on. Cause This condition may be caused by a software state or anomaly, which can contribute to one or more of the above conditions. Correction Important On certain IPCs that are inoperative, the cluster could lock up in sleep mode. Cycling the ignition will not unlock it from sleep mode. Disconnect the battery or fuse for at least 3 minutes and re-apply the power to unlock the cluster. This procedure is required prior to reprogramming an IPC that is locked up in sleep mode. DO NOT replace the IPC or Body Control Module (BCM) for this concern. Reprogram the IPC with the latest software calibration. Note A limited number of early build Equinox vehicles may experience an error when attempting to reprogram the IPC. Should you experience this condition when reprogramming the IPC, please contact the Techline Customer Support Center (TCSC) for revised calibrations. VINS that MAY experience this condition will have VIN sequence numbers between 200008 and 200575. Important Select the correct calibration files for the appropriate vehicle configuration (body style) and RPO codes. A revised calibration has been developed to address this condition. Technicians are to reprogram the IPC using the Service Programming System (SPS) with the latest software available on TIS2WEB. Refer to Instrument Cluster Programming and Setup in SI. When using a Tech 2(R) or a Multiple Diagnostic Interface (MDI) for reprogramming, ensure that it is updated with the latest software version. During programming, the battery voltage must be maintained within the proper range of 12-15 Volts. Only use the approved Midtronics(R) PSC 550 Battery Maintainer (SPS Programming Support Tool EL-49642) or equivalent during programming. Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table above. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Instrument Panel > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Instrument Panel Control Module: > 10-07-30-002A > Jun > 10 > A/T Controls - Snapshot Data Using (GDS) > Page 261 Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Instrument Panel > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Instrument Panel Control Module: > 09-07-30-016A > Nov > 09 > Recalls: > 09298D > Nov > 10 > Recall - Defroster/Defogger Inoperative Technical Service Bulletin # 09298D Date: 101122 Recall - Defroster/Defogger Inoperative FMVSS NONCOMPLIANCE Bulletin No.: 09298D Date: November 22, 2010 Subject: 09298D - Heating and Windshield Defrost Inoperative - Replace Computer Module Models: 2010 Chevrolet Equinox 2010 GMC Terrain Supercede: The Parts Information section in this bulletin has been revised for Canadian dealers. Mass Comp is no longer an Authorized GM Electronics Service Center. Canadian dealers are to begin contacting York Electronics for all exchanges.Discard all copies of bulletin 09298C, issued March 2010. Customers are being instructed to provide their VIN when calling to schedule a service appointment. If the vehicle will not be programmed at the dealership, please provide the VIN to the Parts Manager so parts can be ordered and received in time for the service appointment. Parts will be shipped overnight to dealers so please do not order more than 2 days prior to the scheduled service appointment date. Condition General Motors has decided that certain 2010 model year Chevrolet Equinox and GMC Terrain vehicles fail to conform to Federal/Canada Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 103, "Windshield Defrosting and Defogging Systems", and Standard 101, "Controls and Displays". On these vehicles, software in the center instrument panel can cause the heating, air conditioning, defrost, and radio controls, as well as the panel illumination to become inoperative. Driving without a functioning defrost system can decrease the driver's visibility under certain driving conditions and could result in a crash without warning. Driving without panel illumination can divert the driver's attention while looking for a control. Correction Dealers are to replace the computer module in the center instrument panel. Vehicles Involved Involved are certain 2010 model year Chevrolet Equinox and GMC Terrain vehicles built within these VIN breakpoints: Important Dealers are to confirm vehicle eligibility prior to beginning repairs by using the Required Field Actions section in the Global Warranty system. Not all vehicles within the above breakpoints may be involved. For dealers with involved vehicles, a listing with involved vehicles containing the complete vehicle identification number, customer name, and address information has been prepared and will be provided to US and Canadian dealers through the GM GlobalConnect Recall Reports, or sent directly to export dealers. Dealers will not have a report available if they have no involved vehicles currently assigned. The listing may contain customer names and addresses obtained from Motor Vehicle Registration Records. The use of such motor vehicle registration data for any purpose other than follow-up necessary to complete this recall is a violation of law in several states/provinces/countries. Accordingly, you are urged to limit the use of this report to the follow-up necessary to complete this recall. Parts Information For dealers using the programming tool: Most repairs require no parts. There are a small number of vehicles that will not be able to be reprogrammed; for these vehicles, please follow the parts information below. If you have parts currently in your inventory, please return them to Specmo (U.S.) or York Electronics (Canada). For dealers that did not receive a programming tool: A center instrument panel will be required. Note Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Instrument Panel > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Instrument Panel Control Module: > 09-07-30-016A > Nov > 09 > Recalls: > 09298D > Nov > 10 > Recall - Defroster/Defogger Inoperative > Page 270 Center instrument panels (radio control assemblies) will be shipped overnight to dealers. Note: Core returns for this recall are to be shipped within 24 hours of receiving the exchange. A prepaid Federal Express Ground label will be included with each exchange. Package the core securely in the original packaging and package inserts provided with the exchange. It is important that the return unit be packaged identically to the exchange unit to prevent damage in shipping. Failure to return the core will result in a charge to the dealer's Open Parts Account. Do not order parts for customer vehicles until they have scheduled an appointment. U.S. Dealers Only: If the customer is not experiencing any concerns with the center instrument panel (ICS), please contact Specmo Enterprises for arrange for an exchange. If the customer does have ICS concerns, please contact the Technical Assistance Center (TAC) prior to ordering an exchange ICS. Dealers are to contact Specmo Enterprises via the internet at www.specmo.com/dealers, to arrange for an exchange of the center instrument panel (radio control assembly). Dealers that do not have an account with Specmo will be able to create an account in order to access the website. Arrange for an exchange by following the prompts. The information below will be required to arrange for an exchange. - Bulletin number 09298 - VIN Ontario Dealers Only: Due to a limited inventory, and to avoid backorders, an onsite mobile upgrade is available. Please contact York Electronics at 888-650-9675 to schedule an appointment. All Other Provinces, Excluding Ontario: To arrange for an exchange of the centre instrument panel (radio control assembly), please contact York Electronics at 888-650-9675. Service Procedure Service Procedure Using the Programming Tool (for dealers that were shipped a programming tool) Note Programming is not performed using TIS2WEB SPS; use provided programming tool. Note If the customer is NOT experiencing any concerns with the center instrument panel (ICS), reprogram the rdio control assembly (center instrument panels) following the instructions below. If the customer does have ICS concerns, please contact the Technical Assistance Center (TAC) prior to programming the radio control assembly (center instrument panels). (1) First Design Radio Control Assembly; (2) Second Design Radio Control Assembly 1. Determine if the radio control assembly is programmable. First design radio control assemblies are NOT programmable and must go through the radio control assembly exchange process. - First design radio control assemblies (1) are NOT programmable. There are NO slots on the backside of the radio control assembly. - Second design radio control assemblies (2) are programmable. They have two slots on the backside of the radio control assembly. If the radio control assembly is a second design assembly, proceed to Step 2. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Instrument Panel > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Instrument Panel Control Module: > 09-07-30-016A > Nov > 09 > Recalls: > 09298D > Nov > 10 > Recall - Defroster/Defogger Inoperative > Page 271 Caution Insert a plastic body trim tool between the IP and radio control assembly along the top portion of the radio control assembly as shown in the illustration. DO NOT use a flat-blade screwdriver to remove the radio assembly. 2. Remove the radio control assembly (1). Refer to Radio Control Assembly Replacement in SI. 3. Carefully align the radio control assembly channels to the locating pegs of the programming tool as shown in the illustration. 4. Carefully seat the radio control assembly onto the programming tool. 5. The display area of the programming tool will indicate when the programming event has been completed. The programming tool will read "Programming Successful. Remove module." The programming event takes less than 30 seconds to complete. 6. Detach the radio control assembly from the programming tool. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Instrument Panel > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Instrument Panel Control Module: > 09-07-30-016A > Nov > 09 > Recalls: > 09298D > Nov > 10 > Recall - Defroster/Defogger Inoperative > Page 272 7. Place blue dot (3) on the back of the radio control assembly to indicate that the radio control module has been reprogrammed. 8. Install the radio control assembly. Refer to Radio Control Assembly Replacement in SI. Service Procedure Using the Radio Control Assembly Exchange Process Caution Insert a plastic body trim tool between the IP and radio control assembly along the top portion of the radio control assembly as shown in the illustration. DO NOT use a flat-bladed screwdriver to remove the radio control assembly. Note If the customer is NOT experiencing any concerns with the center instrument panel (ICS), proceed to Step 1 and perform this recall. If the customer DOES have ICS concerns, please contact the Technical Assistance Center (TAC) prior to performing this recall. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Instrument Panel > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Instrument Panel Control Module: > 09-07-30-016A > Nov > 09 > Recalls: > 09298D > Nov > 10 > Recall - Defroster/Defogger Inoperative > Page 273 Note For vehicles without the color touch screen navigation, unsnap and remove the display from the radio control assembly. Do not return the radio display with the radio control assembly. 1. Remove the radio control assembly (1). Refer to Radio Control Assembly Replacement in SI. 2. Package the radio control assembly and ship it to the exchange center indicated on the prepaid Federal Express Ground label that was enclosed with the exchange unit within 24 hours. Note Module programming and setup is NOT required when replacing only the radio control assembly. 3. Install the radio control assembly. Refer to Radio Control Assembly Replacement in SI. Courtesy Transportation - For US and Canada The General Motors Courtesy Transportation program is intended to minimize customer inconvenience when a vehicle requires a repair that is covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranties. The availability of courtesy transportation to customers whose vehicles are within the warranty coverage period and involved in a product program is very important in maintaining customer satisfaction. Dealers are to ensure that these customers understand that shuttle service or some other form of courtesy transportation is available and will be provided at no charge. Dealers should refer to the General Motors Service Policies and Procedures Manual for Courtesy Transportation guidelines. Warranty Transaction Information 1. Submit a transaction using the table below. * Dealers using WINS should add 0.2 administrative allowance to the labor time. Dealers using GWM should submit 0.2 hours administrative allowance under Administrative Time. ** Administrative allowance for unit exchange. *** Dealers are to claim only administrative allowance of 0.2 hours when the radio control assembly is reprogrammed by York's Mobile Unit. Dealers using WINS should submit 0.2 hours administrative allowance in labor time. Dealers using GWM should submit 0.2 hours administrative allowance under Administrative Time. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Instrument Panel > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Instrument Panel Control Module: > 09-07-30-016A > Nov > 09 > Recalls: > 09298D > Nov > 10 > Recall - Defroster/Defogger Inoperative > Page 274 Customer Notification - For US and Canada General Motors will notify customers of this recall on their vehicle (see copy of customer letter included with this bulletin). Customer Notification - For Export Letters will be sent to known owners of record located within areas covered by the US National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act. For owners outside these areas, dealers should notify customers using the attached sample letter. Dealer Recall Responsibility - For US and Export (US States, Territories, and Possessions) The US National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act provides that each vehicle that is subject to a recall of this type must be adequately repaired within a reasonable time after the customer has tendered it for repair. A failure to repair within sixty days after tender of a vehicle is prima facie evidence of failure to repair within a reasonable time. If the condition is not adequately repaired within a reasonable time, the customer may be entitled to an identical or reasonably equivalent vehicle at no charge or to a refund of the purchase price less a reasonable allowance for depreciation. To avoid having to provide these burdensome remedies, every effort must be made to promptly schedule an appointment with each customer and to repair their vehicle as soon as possible. In the recall notification letters, customers are told how to contact the US National Highway Traffic Safety Administration if the recall is not completed within a reasonable time. This bulletin is notice to you that the new motor vehicles included in this recall may not comply with the standard identified above. Under Title 49, Section 30112 of the United States Code, it is illegal for a dealer to sell a new motor vehicle which the dealer knows does not comply with an applicable Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard. As a consequence, if you sell any of these motor vehicles without first performing the recall correction, your dealership may be subject to a civil penalty for each such sale. Dealer Recall Responsibility - All All unsold new vehicles in dealers' possession and subject to this recall must be held and inspected/repaired per the service procedure of this recall bulletin before customers take possession of these vehicles. Dealers are to service all vehicles subject to this recall at no charge to customers, regardless of mileage, age of vehicle, or ownership, from this time forward. Customers who have recently purchased vehicles sold from your vehicle inventory, and for which there is no customer information indicated on the dealer listing, are to be contacted by the dealer. Arrangements are to be made to make the required correction according to the instructions contained in this bulletin. A copy of the customer letter is provided in this bulletin for your use in contacting customers. Recall follow-up cards should not be used for this purpose, since the customer may not as yet have received the notification letter. In summary, whenever a vehicle subject to this recall enters your vehicle inventory, or is in your dealership for service in the future, you must take the steps necessary to be sure the recall correction has been made before selling or releasing the vehicle. Disclaimer Owner Letter Owner Letter Dear General Motors Customer: This notice is sent to you in accordance with the requirements of the National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act. General Motors has decided that certain 2010 model year Chevrolet Equinox and GMC Terrain vehicles fail to conform to Federal/Canada Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 103, "Windshield Defrosting and Defogging Systems", and Standard 101, "Controls and Displays". As a result, GM is conducting a recall. We apologize for this inconvenience. However, we are concerned about your safety and continued satisfaction with our products. Important - Your vehicle is involved in recall 09298. - Schedule an appointment with your GM dealer. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Instrument Panel > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Instrument Panel Control Module: > 09-07-30-016A > Nov > 09 > Recalls: > 09298D > Nov > 10 > Recall - Defroster/Defogger Inoperative > Page 275 - This service will be performed for you at no charge. Why is your vehicle being recalled? The software in the center instrument panel can cause the heating, air conditioning, defrost, and radio controls, as well as the panel illumination to become inoperative. Driving without a functioning defrost system can decrease your visibility under certain driving conditions and could result in a crash without warning. Driving without panel illumination can divert your attention while looking for a control. What will we do? Your GM dealer will replace the computer module in the center instrument panel. This service will be performed for you at no charge. Because of service scheduling requirements, it is likely that your dealer will need your vehicle longer than the actual service correction time of approximately 20 minutes. If your vehicle is within the New Vehicle Limited Warranty, your dealer may provide you with shuttle service or some other form of courtesy transportation while your vehicle is at the dealership for this repair. Please refer to your Owner's Manual and your dealer for details on courtesy transportation. What should you do? You should contact your GM dealer to arrange a service appointment as soon as possible. When scheduling your appointment, please provide your dealer with your vehicle's 17 character vehicle identification number (VIN). Your VIN can be found above your name and address at the top of this letter, and will follow the numbers "09298". Your dealer will need your VIN to order parts for your vehicle so that they will be available on the day of your service appointment. Do you have questions? If you have questions or concerns that your dealer is unable to resolve, please contact the appropriate Customer Assistance Center at the number listed below. More information about your vehicle can be found at the Owner Center at www.gmownercenter.com. If after contacting your dealer and the Customer Assistance Center, you are still not satisfied we have done our best to remedy this condition without charge and within a reasonable time, you may wish to write the Administrator, National Highway Traffic Safety Administration, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE, Washington DC 20590, or call the toll-free Vehicle Safety Hotline at 1.888.327.4236 (TTY 1.800.424.9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov. Federal regulation requires that any vehicle lessor receiving this recall notice must forward a copy of this notice to the lessee within ten days. Scott Lawson Director, Customer and Relationship Services 09298 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Instrument Panel > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Instrument Panel Control Module: > 09-07-30-016A > Nov > 09 > Recalls: > NHTSA09V489000 > Dec > 09 > Recall 09V489000: Defroster Malfunction Instrument Panel Control Module: Recalls Recall 09V489000: Defroster Malfunction VEHICLE MAKE/MODEL: MODEL YEAR(S): Chevrolet/Equinox 2010 GMC/Terrain 2010 MANUFACTURER: General Motors Corp. MFR'S REPORT DATE: December 18, 2009 NHTSA CAMPAIGN ID NUMBER: 09V489000 NHTSA ACTION NUMBER: N/A COMPONENT: Visibility: Defroster/Defogger System POTENTIAL NUMBER OF UNITS AFFECTED: 59031 SUMMARY: General Motors is recalling certain model year 2010 Chevrolet Equinox and GMC Terrain vehicles for failing to comply with the requirements of Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 103, "Windshield Defrosting and Defogging Systems and with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 101, "Controls and Displays". The software in the center instrument panel can cause the heating, air conditioning, defrost, and radio controls, as well as the panel illumination to become inoperative. CONSEQUENCE: Driving without a functioning defrost system can decrease your visibility under certain driving conditions and could result in a crash without warning. REMEDY: Dealers will replace the computer module in the center instrument panel free of charge. The safety recall is expected to begin during January 2010. Owners may contact Chevrolet at 1-800-630-2438, GMC at 1-866-996-9463 or at www.gmownercenter.com. NOTES: GM safety recall No. 090298. Owners may also contact The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration's Vehicle Safety Hotline at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY 1-800-424-9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Instrument Panel > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Instrument Panel Control Module: > 09-07-30-016A > Nov > 09 > All Other Service Bulletins for Instrument Panel Control Module: > 10-08-49-003 > May > 10 > Electrical - Instrument Panel Blanks Out/Inoperative Instrument Panel Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Electrical - Instrument Panel Blanks Out/Inoperative TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 10-08-49-003 Date: May 17, 2010 Subject: Intermittent Instrument Panel Cluster (IPC) Inoperative, Driver Information Center (DIC) Blanks Out (Reprogram IPC) Models: 2010 Chevrolet Equinox 2010 GMC Terrain All Built Prior to November 15, 2009 Condition In rare cases, some customers may comment that on ignition start up, intermittently, the IPC lights do not come on, the IPC gauges are inoperative, or the DIC goes blank. The Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) may also come on. Cause This condition may be caused by a software state or anomaly, which can contribute to one or more of the above conditions. Correction Important On certain IPCs that are inoperative, the cluster could lock up in sleep mode. Cycling the ignition will not unlock it from sleep mode. Disconnect the battery or fuse for at least 3 minutes and re-apply the power to unlock the cluster. This procedure is required prior to reprogramming an IPC that is locked up in sleep mode. DO NOT replace the IPC or Body Control Module (BCM) for this concern. Reprogram the IPC with the latest software calibration. Note A limited number of early build Equinox vehicles may experience an error when attempting to reprogram the IPC. Should you experience this condition when reprogramming the IPC, please contact the Techline Customer Support Center (TCSC) for revised calibrations. VINS that MAY experience this condition will have VIN sequence numbers between 200008 and 200575. Important Select the correct calibration files for the appropriate vehicle configuration (body style) and RPO codes. A revised calibration has been developed to address this condition. Technicians are to reprogram the IPC using the Service Programming System (SPS) with the latest software available on TIS2WEB. Refer to Instrument Cluster Programming and Setup in SI. When using a Tech 2(R) or a Multiple Diagnostic Interface (MDI) for reprogramming, ensure that it is updated with the latest software version. During programming, the battery voltage must be maintained within the proper range of 12-15 Volts. Only use the approved Midtronics(R) PSC 550 Battery Maintainer (SPS Programming Support Tool EL-49642) or equivalent during programming. Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table above. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Instrument Panel > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Instrument Panel Control Module: > 09-07-30-016A > Nov > 09 > All Other Service Bulletins for Instrument Panel Control Module: > 10-08-49-003 > May > 10 > Electrical - Instrument Panel Blanks Out/Inoperative > Page 285 Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Instrument Panel > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Instrument Panel Control Module: > Page 286 Parking Assist Control Module: Diagrams K41 Parking Assist Control Module X1 (UD7) K41 Parking Assist Control Module X2 (UD7) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Instrument Panel > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Instrument Panel Control Module: > Page 287 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Fog/Driving Lamp Relay > Component Information > Locations Fog/Driving Lamp Relay: Locations Electrical Center Identification Views X50A Fuse Block - Underhood, Label Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Fog/Driving Lamp Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 292 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Dimmer Relay > Component Information > Locations Headlamp Dimmer Relay: Locations Electrical Center Identification Views X50A Fuse Block - Underhood, Label Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Dimmer Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 296 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Horn Relay > Component Information > Locations Horn Relay: Locations Electrical Center Identification Views X50A Fuse Block - Underhood, Label Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Horn Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 300 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp Relay > Component Information > Locations Parking Lamp Relay: Locations Electrical Center Identification Views X50A Fuse Block - Underhood, Label Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 304 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Turn Signal Relay > Component Information > Locations Turn Signal Relay: Locations Electrical Center Identification Views X50A Fuse Block - Underhood, Label Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Turn Signal Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 308 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Accessory Relay > Component Information > Locations Accessory Relay: Locations Electrical Center Identification Views X51A Fuse Block - Instrument Panel Label (before A6284015) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Accessory Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 313 X51A Fuse Block - Instrument Panel Label (A6284015 and after) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Accessory Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 314 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Accessory Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 315 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Accessory Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 316 Accessory Relay: Diagrams X80A Accessory Power Receptacle - Center Console 1 X80B Accessory Power Receptacle - Center Console 2 X80G Accessory Power Receptacle - Instrument Panel Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Accessory Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 317 X80R Accessory Power Receptacle - Rear Compartment Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Relay > Component Information > Service and Repair > Relay Replacement (Attached to Wire Harness) Power Distribution Relay: Service and Repair Relay Replacement (Attached to Wire Harness) Relay Replacement (Attached to Wire Harness) Removal Procedure 1. Locate the relay. Refer to the Master Electrical Component List (See: Locations/Component Locations/A - Z Index) to locate the relay in the vehicle. 2. Remove any fasteners which hold the relay in place. 3. Remove any connector position assurance (CPA) devices or secondary locks. Note: Use care when removing a relay in a wiring harness when the relay is secured by fasteners or tape. 4. Separate the relay (1) from the wire harness connector (2). Installation Procedure 1. Connect the relay (1) to the wire harness connector (2). 2. Install any connector position assurance (CPA) devices or secondary locks. 3. Install the relay using any fasteners or tape that originally held the relay in place. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Relay > Component Information > Service and Repair > Relay Replacement (Attached to Wire Harness) > Page 322 Power Distribution Relay: Service and Repair Relay Replacement (Within an Electrical Center) Relay Replacement (Within an Electrical Center) Special Tools J 43244 Relay Puller Pliers Removal Procedure 1. Remove the electrical center cover. 2. Locate the relay. Refer to Electrical Center Identification Views (See: Maintenance/Fuses and Circuit Breakers/Fuse/Application and ID) to locate the electrical center where the relay exists. Note: * Always note the orientation of the relay. * If equipped with a notch style relay; observe the location of the notch on the old relay to verify the new relay is installed with the notch in the same location. * Ensure that the electrical center is secure, as not to put added stress on the wires or terminals. 3. Using the J 43244 (1) position the tool on opposing corners of the relay (2). Caution: Use J43244 to pull the relay straight out from the electrical center terminals. The use of pliers or a flat bladed tool could damage the electrical center. 4. Remove the relay (2) from the electrical center. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Relay > Component Information > Service and Repair > Relay Replacement (Attached to Wire Harness) > Page 323 1. Install the relay (2) in the same position as removed. 2. Install the electrical center cover. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood Relay Box: Application and ID Fuse Block - Underhood Electrical Center Identification Views X50A Fuse Block - Underhood, Label Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 328 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 329 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 330 X50A Fuse Block - Underhood, Top View X50A Fuse Block - Underhood, Bottom View Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 331 X50A Fuse Block - Underhood X1 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 332 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 333 X50A Fuse Block - Underhood X2 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 334 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 335 X50A Fuse Block - Underhood X3 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 336 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 337 X50A Fuse Block - Underhood X4 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 338 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 339 X50A Fuse Block - Underhood X5 X50A Fuse Block - Underhood X6 (LAF) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 340 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 341 Relay Box: Application and ID Fuse Block - Instrument Panel Label Electrical Center Identification Views X51A Fuse Block - Instrument Panel Label (before A6284015) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 342 X51A Fuse Block - Instrument Panel Label (A6284015 and after) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 343 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 344 X51A Fuse Block - Instrument Panel, Top View X51A Fuse Block - Instrument Panel, Bottom View Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 345 X51A Fuse Block - Instrument Panel Wire Entry Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 346 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 347 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 348 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Body Controls - Unable To Reprogram Body Control Module Body Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins Body Controls - Unable To Reprogram Body Control Module INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 09-08-47-001A Date: June 14, 2010 Subject: Unable to Reprogram Body Control Module (BCM), BCM Reprogramming Did Not Complete - Revised Reprogramming Instructions Models: 2006-2010 Buick Lucerne 2006-2010 Cadillac DTS 2007-2010 Cadillac Escalade, Escalade ESV, Escalade EXT, SRX 2008-2010 Cadillac CTS 2010 Cadillac CTS Wagon 2010 Chevrolet Camaro 2006-2007 Chevrolet Monte Carlo 2006-2010 Chevrolet Impala 2007-2010 Chevrolet Avalanche, Equinox, Silverado, Suburban, Tahoe 2008-2010 Chevrolet Express 2009-2010 Chevrolet Traverse 2007-2010 GMC Acadia, Sierra, Yukon, Yukon XL, Yukon Denali, Yukon Denali XL 2008-2010 GMC Savana 2010 GMC Terrain 2007-2009 Pontiac Torrent 2008-2009 Pontiac G8 2008-2009 HUMMER H2 2007-2009 Saturn OUTLOOK 2008-2009 Saturn VUE Refer to GMVIS Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the models and the model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 09-08-47-001 (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Some technicians may experience an unsuccessful body control module (BCM) reprogramming event, when choosing the Reprogram ECU selection on the Service Programming System (SPS). The technician may also notice that when attempting to reprogram the BCM again after this incident has occurred, the BCM may not complete the programming event. This condition may be caused by the following: - A reprogramming event that was interrupted due to a lack of communication between the vehicle and the TIS2WEB terminal. - The vehicle experienced low system voltage during the reprogramming event. Important Do not replace the BCM for this condition. SPS Programming Process Selection Perform this procedure first. 1. If reprogramming has failed during the initial reprogramming event, back out of the SPS application completely. 2. Re-select SPS from the TIS2WEB terminal application. 3. When selecting the Programming Process , choose Replace and Program ECU , even though a new BCM is NOT being installed. 4. Reprogram the BCM using the Service Programming System (SPS) with the latest calibration available on TIS2WEB. Refer to the SPS procedures in SI. When using a multiple diagnostic interface (MDI) for reprogramming, ensure that it is updated with the latest software version. When using a Tech 2(R) for reprogramming, ensure that it is updated with the latest software version. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Body Controls - Unable To Reprogram Body Control Module > Page 355 During programming, the battery voltage must be maintained within the proper range of 12-15 volts. Only use the approved Midtronics(R) PSC 550 Battery Maintainer (SPS Programming Support Tool EL-49642) or equivalent during programming. BCM Still Fails to Reprogram If the BCM still fails to reprogram perform this procedure: 1. Turn OFF the ignition, and remove the key. 2. Remove the fuses that power up the following modules/components for a minimum of 2 minutes: - BCM - EBCM - ECM - IS LPS (located in the left IP fusebox) - TCM 3. Open and close the driver door. Allow enough time for the retained accessory power (RAP) to turn OFF. 4. Reinstall the fuses. 5. When selecting the Programming Process , choose Replace and Program ECU , even though a new BCM is NOT being installed. 6. Reprogram the BCM using the Service Programming System (SPS) with the latest calibration available on TIS2WEB. Refer to the SPS procedures in SI. When using a multiple diagnostic interface (MDI) for reprogramming, ensure that it is updated with the latest software version. When using a Tech 2(R) for reprogramming, ensure that it is updated with the latest software version. During programming, the battery voltage must be maintained within the proper range of 12-15 Volts. Only use the approved Midtronics(R) PSC 550 Battery Maintainer (SPS Programming Support Tool EL-49642) or equivalent during programming. Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table above. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 356 Body Control Module: Locations Instrument Panel/Center Console Component Views Lower Left of the Instrument Panel Components 1 - B80 Park Brake Switch 2 - T3 Audio Amplifier 3 - K9 Body Control Module 4 - K73 Telematics Communication Interface Control Module (UE1) 5 - B107 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor 6 T4S Wireless Communication Antenna - Bluetooth (UE1 with UPF) 7 - B22 Brake Pedal Position Sensor 8 - X84 Data Link Connector Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 357 Body Control Module: Diagrams K9 Body Control Module X1 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 358 K9 Body Control Module X2 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 359 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 360 K9 Body Control Module X3 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 361 K9 Body Control Module X4 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 362 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 363 K9 Body Control Module X5 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 364 K9 Body Control Module X6 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 365 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 366 K9 Body Control Module X7 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 367 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 368 Body Control Module: Service and Repair Body Control Module Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 09333A > May > 10 > Campaign - Evaporative Emission Diagnostics Technical Service Bulletin # 09333A Date: 100504 Campaign - Evaporative Emission Diagnostics SERVICE UPDATE Bulletin No.: 09333A Date: May 04, 2010 Subject: 09333A - Service Update for Inventory and Customer Vehicles - Evaporative Emission Diagnostics Models: 2010 Chevrolet Equinox 2010 GMC Terrain Supercede: The ECM programming service procedure in this bulletin has been revised to include instructions for dealers to contact Engineering at 734-320-8123 if programming stops prior to completion. Do NOT attempt to reprogram.Please discard all copies of bulletin 09333, issued January 2010. This service update includes vehicles in dealer inventory and customer vehicles that return to the dealership for any reason. Purpose This bulletin provides a service procedure to improve the ability of the evaporative emissions diagnostic to detect leaks by installing a fuel tank vent tubing jumper on certain 2010 model year Chevrolet Equinox and GMC Terrain vehicles. Vehicles equipped with a V6 engine will also require reprogramming of the engine control module. This service procedure should be completed as soon as possible on involved vehicles currently in dealer inventory and customer vehicles that return to the dealer for any type of service. Vehicles Involved A list of involved vehicles currently in dealer inventory is available on the "Service Update Bulletin Information" link under the "Service" tab in GM GlobalConnect (US) or attached to the GlobalConnect message (Canada) used to release this bulletin. Customer vehicles that return for service, for any reason, and are still covered under the vehicle's 8 year/80,000 mile (130,000 km) base emission warranty, and are within the VIN breakpoints provided below, should be checked for vehicle eligibility in the appropriate system listed below. Important Dealers are to confirm vehicle eligibility prior to beginning repairs by using GMVIS (dealers using WINS) or the Investigate Vehicle History link (dealers using GWM). Not all vehicles within the above breakpoints may be involved. Parts Information Parts required to complete this service update are to be obtained from General Motors Service and Parts Operations (GMSPO). Please refer to your "involved vehicles listing" before ordering parts. Normal orders should be placed on a DRO = Daily Replenishment Order. In an emergency situation, parts should be ordered on a CSO = Customer Special Order. Claim Information For vehicles repaired under the 8 year/80,000 mile (130,000 km) emission warranty: 1. Submit a claim using the table below. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 09333A > May > 10 > Campaign - Evaporative Emission Diagnostics > Page 377 2. Courtesy Transportation - For dealers using WINS, submit using normal labor code; for dealers using GWM - submit as Net Item under the repair labor code. Disclaimer Service Procedure Service Procedure 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle in SI. 2. Locate the fuel tank EVAP emissions canister (1) and fuel tank EVAP vapor line connection (2). 3. Disconnect the 16 mm (5/8 in) quick connect vapor line (2) from the front of EVAP emissions canister (1). 4. Identify all parts included in the EVAP jumper hose assembly kit. The kit contains two EVAP jumper hoses and three tie straps. There is a large diameter 16 mm (5/8 in) EVAP jumper hose (1) with a 45 degree T-fitting (2) and a small diameter 8 mm (5/16 in) EVAP jumper hose with a T-fitting (3). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 09333A > May > 10 > Campaign - Evaporative Emission Diagnostics > Page 378 5. Connect the new 16 mm (5/8 in) EVAP jumper hose (larger diameter hose) (2) to the EVAP emissions canister (1). 6. Install the second piece of the new 8 mm (5/16 in) jumper hose (smaller diameter hose) (3) to the 45 degree T-fitting on the new 16 mm (5/8 in) EVAP jumper hose (2). Ensure that the new 8 mm (5/16 in) jumper hose (3) is installed between the new 16 mm (5/8 in) EVAP jumper hose (2) and floor pan. 7. Insert the non-connector end of the 16 mm (5/8 in) EVAP jumper hose (larger diameter hose) (2) into the existing EVAP vapor line (4). 8. Secure the new jumper hose assembly with a tie strap (6) through the hole in brake clip (5) on LH underbody rail. Avoid contacting the brake or fuel line with the tie wrap. 9. Cut off excess tie strap (6). 10. Route the 8 mm (5/16 in) hose (3) on top of the fuel feed line on the left (driver's) side of the fuel tank assembly. 11. Continue routing the 8 mm (5/16 in) hose (3) through the suspension on the front side of the underbody rail and behind the tank and all-wheel drive unit. Follow the path of the park brake cable. The 8 mm (5/16 in) line should be routed on top of the park brake cable routing. 12. Disconnect the existing EVAP-to-fuel tank vapor line (yellow connector) located on the rear right (passenger side) of vehicle at the fuel tank. 13. Connect the new 8 mm (5/16 in) hose (3) to the fuel tank. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 09333A > May > 10 > Campaign - Evaporative Emission Diagnostics > Page 379 14. Connect the existing EVAP hose to the T-fitting on the new 8 mm (5/16 in) hose. Caution Ensure that the 8 mm (5/16 in) hose (3) is tucked in over the park brake cable to prevent the hose from sagging over the fuel tank cutout area. 15. Secure the 8 mm (5/16 in) hose (3) to the parking brake line at the left (driver's) (A) and right (passenger' side) (B) fuel tank strap locations (9) with two tie straps (8) as shown in the illustration. 16. Lower the vehicle. 17. Determine if the vehicle is equipped with a four or six cylinder engine. - If the vehicle is equipped with a four cylinder engine, no further action is required. Refer to the Claim section of the bulletin. - If the vehicle is equipped with a six cylinder engine, refer to ECM Programming Service Procedure in this bulletin. ECM PROGRAMMING SERVICE PROCEDURE Do not attempt to order the calibration number from GMSPO. The calibration numbers required for this service procedure are programmed into control modules via a Multiple Diagnostic Interface (MDI) and TIS2WEB with the calibration update. Use TIS2WEB on or after 01/07/10 to obtain the calibration. If you cannot access the calibration, call the Techline Customer Support Center and it will be provided. If programming stops prior to completion, contact Engineering at 734-320-8123. Do NOT attempt to reprogram. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 09333A > May > 10 > Campaign - Evaporative Emission Diagnostics > Page 380 For step-by-step programming instructions, please refer to SI and the Techline Information System (TIS) terminal. 1. Verify that there is a battery charge of 12 to 16 volts. The battery must be able to maintain a charge during programming. Only use an approved Midtronic 165-PSC charger to maintain proper battery voltage during programming. 2. Reprogram the engine control module (ECM). Refer to SI and Service Programming System (SPS) documentation for programming instructions, if required. 1. Connect the MDI to the vehicle. Note Select J2534 MDI and Reprogram ECU from the Select Diagnostic Tool and Programming Process screen. 2. Select J2534 MDI and Reprogram ECU from the Select Diagnostic Tool and Programming Process screen. 3. Select ECM Engine Control Module - Programming from the Supported Controllers screen. 4. Follow the on-screen instructions. 3. Use MDI and GDS to clear all DTCs if required. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 04-06-04-054B > Nov > 10 > Engine Controls Aftermarket Accessory Usage Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - Aftermarket Accessory Usage INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 04-06-04-054B Date: November 18, 2010 Subject: Info - Non-GM Parts and Accessories (Aftermarket) Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add model years and update to the new U.S. Fixed Operation Manager (FOM) and Canada Warranty Manager (WM) names. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 04-06-04-054A (Section 06 - Engine/Propulsion System). The recent rise and expansion of companies selling non-GM parts and accessories has made it necessary to issue this reminder to dealers regarding GM's policy on the use and installation of these aftermarket components. When a dealer is performing a repair under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty, they are required to use only genuine GM or GM-approved parts and accessories. This applies to all warranty repairs, special policy repairs or any repairs paid for by GM. Parts and accessories advertised as being "the same" as parts manufactured by GM, but not sold through GM, do not qualify for use in warranty repairs, special policy repairs or any repairs paid for by GM. During a warranty repair, if a GM original equipment part is not available through GM Customer Care and Aftersales (GM CC&A;), ACDelco(R) distributors, other GM dealers or approved sources, the dealer is to obtain comparable, non-GM parts and clearly indicate, in detail, on the repair order the circumstances surrounding why non-GM parts were used. The dealer must give customers written notice, prior to the sale or service, that such parts or accessories are not marketed or warranted by General Motors. It should also be noted that dealers modifying new vehicles and installing equipment, parts and accessories obtained from sources not authorized by GM are responsible for complying with the National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act. Certain non-approved parts or assemblies, installed by the dealer or its agent not authorized by GM, may result in a change to the vehicle's design characteristics and may affect the vehicle's ability to conform to federal law. Dealers must fully understand that non-GM approved parts may not have been validated, tested or certified for use. This puts the dealer at risk for potential liability in the event of a part or vehicle failure. If a GM part failure occurs as the result of the installation or use of a non-GM approved part, the warranty will not be honored. A good example of non-authorized modification of vehicles is the result of an ever increasing supply of aftermarket devices available to the customer, which claim to increase the horsepower and torque of the Duramax(TM) Diesel Engines. These include the addition of, but are not limited to one or more of the following modifications: - Propane injection - Nitrous oxide injection - Additional modules (black boxes) that connect to the vehicle wiring systems - Revised engine calibrations downloaded for the engine control module - Calibration modules which connect to the vehicle diagnostic connector - Modification to the engine turbocharger waste gate Although the installation of these devices, or modification of vehicle components, can increase engine horsepower and torque, they may also negatively affect the engine emissions, reliability and/or durability. In addition, other powertrain components, such as transmissions, universal joints, drive shafts, and front/rear axle components, can be stressed beyond design safety limits by the installation of these devices. General Motors does not support or endorse the use of devices or modifications that, when installed, increase the engine horsepower and torque. It is because of these unknown stresses, and the potential to alter reliability, durability and emissions performance, that GM has adopted a policy that prevents any UNAUTHORIZED dealer warranty claim submissions to any remaining warranty coverage, to the powertrain and driveline components whenever the presence of a non-GM (aftermarket) calibration is confirmed - even if the non-GM control module calibration is subsequently removed. Refer to the latest version of Bulletin 09-06-04-026 (V8 Gas Engines) or 06-06-01-007 (Duramax(TM) Diesel Engines) for more information on dealer requirements for calibration verification. These same policies apply as they relate to the use of non-GM accessories. Damage or failure from the use or installation of a non-GM accessory will not be covered under warranty. Failure resulting from the alteration or modification of the vehicle, including the cutting, welding or disconnecting of the vehicle's original equipment parts and components will void the warranty. Additionally, dealers will NOT be reimbursed or compensated by GM in the event of any legal inquiry at either the local, state or federal level that Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 04-06-04-054B > Nov > 10 > Engine Controls Aftermarket Accessory Usage > Page 386 results from the alteration or modification of a vehicle using non-GM approved parts or accessories. Dealers should be especially cautious of accessory companies that claim the installation of their product will not void the factory warranty. Many times these companies have even given direction on how to quickly disassemble the accessory in an attempt to preclude the manufacturer from finding out that is has been installed. Any suspect repairs should be reviewed by the Fixed Operations Manager (FOM), and in Canada by the Warranty Manager (WM) for appropriate repair direction. If it is decided that a goodwill repair is to be made on the vehicle, even with the installation of such non-GM approved components, the customer is to be made aware of General Motors position on this issue and is to sign the appropriate goodwill documentation required by General Motors. It is imperative for dealers to understand that by installing such devices, they are jeopardizing not only the warranty coverage, but also the performance and reliability of the customer's vehicle. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 09-06-04-026C > Aug > 10 > Engine/Transmission Aftermarket Calibrations Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine/Transmission - Aftermarket Calibrations INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 09-06-04-026C Date: August 13, 2010 Subject: Identifying Non-GM (Aftermarket) Engine and Transmission Calibrations for V8 Gas Engines Using Tech 2(R) or Global Diagnostic System (GDS) Models: 2006-2011 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (Excluding Saab 9-7X) 2006-2009 HUMMER H2 2006-2010 HUMMER H3 Equipped with V8 Gas Powered Engines Only Attention: This bulletin applies to V8 gas powered engines ONLY. For Duramax(TM) diesel powered engines, refer to the latest version of Corporate Bulletin Number 08-06-04-006G. Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2011 model year. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 09-06-04-026A (Section 06 - Engine/Propulsion System). General Motors is identifying an increasing number of engine, transmission and catalytic converter part failures that are the result of non-GM (aftermarket) engine and transmission control calibrations being used. When alteration to the GM-released engine or transmission control calibrations occurs, it subjects powertrain and driveline components (engine , transmission, transfer case, driveshaft and rear axle) to stresses that were not tested by General Motors. It is because of these unknown stresses, and the potential to alter reliability, durability and emissions performance, that GM has adopted a policy that prevents any UNAUTHORIZED dealer warranty claim submissions to any remaining warranty coverage, to the powertrain and driveline components whenever the presence of a non-GM (aftermarket) calibration is confirmed - even if the non-GM control module calibration is subsequently removed. Warranty coverage is based on the equipment and calibrations that were released on the vehicle at time of sale, or subsequently updated by GM. That's because GM testing and validation matches the calibration to a host of criteria that is essential to assure reliability, durability and emissions performance over the life of the warranty coverage and beyond. Stresses resulting from calibrations different from those tested and released by GM can damage or weaken components, leading to poor performance and or shortened life. Additionally, non-GM (aftermarket) issued engine control modifications often do not meet the same emissions performance standards as GM issued calibrations. Depending on state statutes, individuals who install engine control module calibrations that put the vehicle outside the parameters of emissions certification standards may be subject to fines and/or penalties. This bulletin outlines a procedure to identify the presence of non-GM (aftermarket) calibrations. GM recommends performing this check whenever a hard part failure is seen on internal engine or transmission components, or before an engine assembly or transmission assembly is being replaced under warranty. It is also recommended that the engine calibration verification procedure be performed whenever diagnostics indicate that catalytic converter replacement is indicated. The PQC has a process to confirm the ECM/PCM calibration is GM issued. The PQC will require a picture of the engine calibration verification screen, as outlined in this bulletin, before authorizing any V8 gas powered engine replacement. If a non-GM calibration is found and verification has taken place through GM, the remaining powertrain and driveline warranty will be blocked and notated in GMVIS and the dealership will be notified. This block prevents any UNAUTHORIZED warranty claim submission. 1. Connect the Tech 2(R) to the vehicle. 2. Go to: Diagnostics and build the vehicle. 3. Select: Powertrain. 4. Select: Engine. 5. *Select: Engine Control Module or PCM. 6. *Select: Module ID Information or I/M Information System if the Module ID Information selection is not available. 7. *If "I/M information System" was selected, it may be necessary to select "Vehicle Information" in order to display the calibration information. ‹› If the CVN information is displayed as "N/A", it will be necessary to contact the TCSC to obtain the CVN information. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 09-06-04-026C > Aug > 10 > Engine/Transmission Aftermarket Calibrations > Page 391 8. Take a CLEAR digital picture of the Tech 2(R) Vehicle Information screen showing the engine Calibration IDs and Verification Numbers as shown above. Retain the printout information and the Tech 2(R) screen photograph with the repair order. Note All pictures must be sent as a.jpg file. 9. E-mail a copy of the picture to [email protected]. In the subject line of the e-mail include the phrase "V8 Cal" as well as the complete VIN and Dealer BAC. In the body of the e-mail, include the VIN, mileage, R.O. number and BAC. Include a brief description of the customer concern and cause of the concern. Note The dealer will receive an e-mail reply after the calibrations have been validated. The e-mail reply will advise the dealer if the calibrations are OEM. 10. Allow two hours for the PQC to verify the calibrations and set up the case details. ‹› If the PQC determines that the calibrations ARE aftermarket calibrations, DO NOT contact GM Technical Assistance to discuss warranty concerns on the aftermarket calibrations. ALL questions and concerns about warranty should be directed to the dealers Fixed Operations Manager (FOM), (Warranty Manager (WM) in Canada). 11. You may call the PQC two hours after submitting the e-mail for authorization to replace the assembly. This will provide them time to receive, review and set up a case on the request. Please be prepared to provide all the usual documentation that is normally required when requesting an assembly authorization from the PQC. Tech 2(R) Displaying All Zeroes for the Verification Numbers on the Calibration ID and Verification Number Screen If the Tech 2(R) that you are using displays all zeroes for the Verification Numbers as shown, then perform the following steps: 1. Update the Tech 2(R) with the latest software from TIS2WEB. 2. Turn OFF the ignition for 90 seconds. 3. Connect the Tech 2(R) to the vehicle. 4. Turn ON the ignition, and build the vehicle. Observe the Tech 2(R) Calibration ID and Verification Number screen for proper operation. ‹› If the Tech 2(R) screen still does not display properly, then turn OFF the ignition for 90 seconds again. Turn ON the ignition and observe the same screen for proper operation. Retrieving Calibrations From a Global A Vehicle This information applies to the 2010 Camaro and is typical of the procedure that will be used on Global A vehicles. 1. Turn OFF the ignition. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 09-06-04-026C > Aug > 10 > Engine/Transmission Aftermarket Calibrations > Page 392 2. Connect the MDI to the Data Link Connector (DLC) of the vehicle. Note Use the USB port to make the following MDI connection: 3. Connect the MDI to a PC or laptop that has been downloaded with the GDS application from TIS2WEB. Note At least one Diagnostic Package must be installed on the PC to perform diagnostics. If GDS was just installed, select: Add New Diagnostic Package and then select: a Diagnostic Package to download. 4. Click: On the GDS icon on the PC. 5. The Login Page will appear. 6. Select: A User. 7. The ID Screen will appear. 8. Select: The serial number of the MDI being used. 9. Select: Connect. 10. Verify that the system status is ready by observing for a flashing PC light icon on the MDI. 11. Select: Make, Model and Model Year, in order to build the vehicle. 12. Click: Upload VIN, to allow the VIN to be reported to the PC. 13. At: The Verification step, turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. 14. Select: Next Action. 15. The Home Page will appear. 16. Select: Next. 17. The Diagnostic Screen will appear. Note Due to vehicle build, software and RPO variations, GDS may ask for additional information in Step 18. 18. Select: Engine ID, if prompted. 19. Select: Module Diagnostics. 20. Select: ECM. 21. Select: ID Information. 22. The Diagnostics page will appear. Typical View of GDS Calibration History Screen Note GDS is capable of displaying up to 10 Calibration History events. 23. Select: Calibration History from the drop down menu in order to display the following items on the screen: - Calibration History Buffer - Number of Calibration History Events Stored - Calibration Part Number History - Calibration Verification Number History 24. Select: Screenshot. 25. Name and save the file in an appropriate folder. 26. Select : Print, and retain a copy of the screenshot with the repair order. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 09-06-04-026C > Aug > 10 > Engine/Transmission Aftermarket Calibrations > Page 393 Note All pictures must be sent as a.jpg file. 27. E-mail a copy of the screenshot to [email protected]. In the subject line of the e-mail include the phrase "V8 Cal" as well as the complete VIN and Dealer BAC. In the body of the e-mail, include the VIN, mileage, R.O. number and BAC. Include a brief description of the customer concern and cause of the concern. Note The dealer will receive an e-mail reply after the calibrations have been validated. The e-mail reply will advise the dealer if the calibrations are OEM. 28. Allow two hours for the PQC to verify the calibrations and set up the case details. ‹› If the PQC determines that the calibrations ARE aftermarket calibrations, DO NOT contact GM Technical Assistance to discuss warranty concerns on the aftermarket calibrations. ALL questions and concerns about warranty should be directed to the dealers Fixed Operations Manager (FOM), (Warranty Manager (WM) in Canada). 29. You may call the PQC two hours after submitting the e-mail for authorization to replace the assembly. This will provide them time to receive, review and set up a case on the request. Please be prepared to provide all the usual documentation that is normally required when requesting an assembly authorization from the PQC. Warranty Information - The Dealership Service Management must be involved in any situation that would justify the use of labor operation Z1111. - Notify the Fixed Operations Manager (FOM) (Warranty Manager (WM) in Canada) of the situation. - All claims will have to be routed to the FOM (WM in Canada) for approval. - Please refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 09-00-89-016, Labor Operation Z1111 - Suspected Tampering or Vehicle Modifications for important information. For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 09333A > May > 10 > Campaign - Evaporative Emission Diagnostics Technical Service Bulletin # 09333A Date: 100504 Campaign - Evaporative Emission Diagnostics SERVICE UPDATE Bulletin No.: 09333A Date: May 04, 2010 Subject: 09333A - Service Update for Inventory and Customer Vehicles - Evaporative Emission Diagnostics Models: 2010 Chevrolet Equinox 2010 GMC Terrain Supercede: The ECM programming service procedure in this bulletin has been revised to include instructions for dealers to contact Engineering at 734-320-8123 if programming stops prior to completion. Do NOT attempt to reprogram.Please discard all copies of bulletin 09333, issued January 2010. This service update includes vehicles in dealer inventory and customer vehicles that return to the dealership for any reason. Purpose This bulletin provides a service procedure to improve the ability of the evaporative emissions diagnostic to detect leaks by installing a fuel tank vent tubing jumper on certain 2010 model year Chevrolet Equinox and GMC Terrain vehicles. Vehicles equipped with a V6 engine will also require reprogramming of the engine control module. This service procedure should be completed as soon as possible on involved vehicles currently in dealer inventory and customer vehicles that return to the dealer for any type of service. Vehicles Involved A list of involved vehicles currently in dealer inventory is available on the "Service Update Bulletin Information" link under the "Service" tab in GM GlobalConnect (US) or attached to the GlobalConnect message (Canada) used to release this bulletin. Customer vehicles that return for service, for any reason, and are still covered under the vehicle's 8 year/80,000 mile (130,000 km) base emission warranty, and are within the VIN breakpoints provided below, should be checked for vehicle eligibility in the appropriate system listed below. Important Dealers are to confirm vehicle eligibility prior to beginning repairs by using GMVIS (dealers using WINS) or the Investigate Vehicle History link (dealers using GWM). Not all vehicles within the above breakpoints may be involved. Parts Information Parts required to complete this service update are to be obtained from General Motors Service and Parts Operations (GMSPO). Please refer to your "involved vehicles listing" before ordering parts. Normal orders should be placed on a DRO = Daily Replenishment Order. In an emergency situation, parts should be ordered on a CSO = Customer Special Order. Claim Information For vehicles repaired under the 8 year/80,000 mile (130,000 km) emission warranty: 1. Submit a claim using the table below. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 09333A > May > 10 > Campaign - Evaporative Emission Diagnostics > Page 398 2. Courtesy Transportation - For dealers using WINS, submit using normal labor code; for dealers using GWM - submit as Net Item under the repair labor code. Disclaimer Service Procedure Service Procedure 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle in SI. 2. Locate the fuel tank EVAP emissions canister (1) and fuel tank EVAP vapor line connection (2). 3. Disconnect the 16 mm (5/8 in) quick connect vapor line (2) from the front of EVAP emissions canister (1). 4. Identify all parts included in the EVAP jumper hose assembly kit. The kit contains two EVAP jumper hoses and three tie straps. There is a large diameter 16 mm (5/8 in) EVAP jumper hose (1) with a 45 degree T-fitting (2) and a small diameter 8 mm (5/16 in) EVAP jumper hose with a T-fitting (3). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 09333A > May > 10 > Campaign - Evaporative Emission Diagnostics > Page 399 5. Connect the new 16 mm (5/8 in) EVAP jumper hose (larger diameter hose) (2) to the EVAP emissions canister (1). 6. Install the second piece of the new 8 mm (5/16 in) jumper hose (smaller diameter hose) (3) to the 45 degree T-fitting on the new 16 mm (5/8 in) EVAP jumper hose (2). Ensure that the new 8 mm (5/16 in) jumper hose (3) is installed between the new 16 mm (5/8 in) EVAP jumper hose (2) and floor pan. 7. Insert the non-connector end of the 16 mm (5/8 in) EVAP jumper hose (larger diameter hose) (2) into the existing EVAP vapor line (4). 8. Secure the new jumper hose assembly with a tie strap (6) through the hole in brake clip (5) on LH underbody rail. Avoid contacting the brake or fuel line with the tie wrap. 9. Cut off excess tie strap (6). 10. Route the 8 mm (5/16 in) hose (3) on top of the fuel feed line on the left (driver's) side of the fuel tank assembly. 11. Continue routing the 8 mm (5/16 in) hose (3) through the suspension on the front side of the underbody rail and behind the tank and all-wheel drive unit. Follow the path of the park brake cable. The 8 mm (5/16 in) line should be routed on top of the park brake cable routing. 12. Disconnect the existing EVAP-to-fuel tank vapor line (yellow connector) located on the rear right (passenger side) of vehicle at the fuel tank. 13. Connect the new 8 mm (5/16 in) hose (3) to the fuel tank. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 09333A > May > 10 > Campaign - Evaporative Emission Diagnostics > Page 400 14. Connect the existing EVAP hose to the T-fitting on the new 8 mm (5/16 in) hose. Caution Ensure that the 8 mm (5/16 in) hose (3) is tucked in over the park brake cable to prevent the hose from sagging over the fuel tank cutout area. 15. Secure the 8 mm (5/16 in) hose (3) to the parking brake line at the left (driver's) (A) and right (passenger' side) (B) fuel tank strap locations (9) with two tie straps (8) as shown in the illustration. 16. Lower the vehicle. 17. Determine if the vehicle is equipped with a four or six cylinder engine. - If the vehicle is equipped with a four cylinder engine, no further action is required. Refer to the Claim section of the bulletin. - If the vehicle is equipped with a six cylinder engine, refer to ECM Programming Service Procedure in this bulletin. ECM PROGRAMMING SERVICE PROCEDURE Do not attempt to order the calibration number from GMSPO. The calibration numbers required for this service procedure are programmed into control modules via a Multiple Diagnostic Interface (MDI) and TIS2WEB with the calibration update. Use TIS2WEB on or after 01/07/10 to obtain the calibration. If you cannot access the calibration, call the Techline Customer Support Center and it will be provided. If programming stops prior to completion, contact Engineering at 734-320-8123. Do NOT attempt to reprogram. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 09333A > May > 10 > Campaign - Evaporative Emission Diagnostics > Page 401 For step-by-step programming instructions, please refer to SI and the Techline Information System (TIS) terminal. 1. Verify that there is a battery charge of 12 to 16 volts. The battery must be able to maintain a charge during programming. Only use an approved Midtronic 165-PSC charger to maintain proper battery voltage during programming. 2. Reprogram the engine control module (ECM). Refer to SI and Service Programming System (SPS) documentation for programming instructions, if required. 1. Connect the MDI to the vehicle. Note Select J2534 MDI and Reprogram ECU from the Select Diagnostic Tool and Programming Process screen. 2. Select J2534 MDI and Reprogram ECU from the Select Diagnostic Tool and Programming Process screen. 3. Select ECM Engine Control Module - Programming from the Supported Controllers screen. 4. Follow the on-screen instructions. 3. Use MDI and GDS to clear all DTCs if required. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 04-06-04-054B > Nov > 10 > Engine Controls Aftermarket Accessory Usage Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - Aftermarket Accessory Usage INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 04-06-04-054B Date: November 18, 2010 Subject: Info - Non-GM Parts and Accessories (Aftermarket) Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add model years and update to the new U.S. Fixed Operation Manager (FOM) and Canada Warranty Manager (WM) names. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 04-06-04-054A (Section 06 - Engine/Propulsion System). The recent rise and expansion of companies selling non-GM parts and accessories has made it necessary to issue this reminder to dealers regarding GM's policy on the use and installation of these aftermarket components. When a dealer is performing a repair under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty, they are required to use only genuine GM or GM-approved parts and accessories. This applies to all warranty repairs, special policy repairs or any repairs paid for by GM. Parts and accessories advertised as being "the same" as parts manufactured by GM, but not sold through GM, do not qualify for use in warranty repairs, special policy repairs or any repairs paid for by GM. During a warranty repair, if a GM original equipment part is not available through GM Customer Care and Aftersales (GM CC&A;), ACDelco(R) distributors, other GM dealers or approved sources, the dealer is to obtain comparable, non-GM parts and clearly indicate, in detail, on the repair order the circumstances surrounding why non-GM parts were used. The dealer must give customers written notice, prior to the sale or service, that such parts or accessories are not marketed or warranted by General Motors. It should also be noted that dealers modifying new vehicles and installing equipment, parts and accessories obtained from sources not authorized by GM are responsible for complying with the National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act. Certain non-approved parts or assemblies, installed by the dealer or its agent not authorized by GM, may result in a change to the vehicle's design characteristics and may affect the vehicle's ability to conform to federal law. Dealers must fully understand that non-GM approved parts may not have been validated, tested or certified for use. This puts the dealer at risk for potential liability in the event of a part or vehicle failure. If a GM part failure occurs as the result of the installation or use of a non-GM approved part, the warranty will not be honored. A good example of non-authorized modification of vehicles is the result of an ever increasing supply of aftermarket devices available to the customer, which claim to increase the horsepower and torque of the Duramax(TM) Diesel Engines. These include the addition of, but are not limited to one or more of the following modifications: - Propane injection - Nitrous oxide injection - Additional modules (black boxes) that connect to the vehicle wiring systems - Revised engine calibrations downloaded for the engine control module - Calibration modules which connect to the vehicle diagnostic connector - Modification to the engine turbocharger waste gate Although the installation of these devices, or modification of vehicle components, can increase engine horsepower and torque, they may also negatively affect the engine emissions, reliability and/or durability. In addition, other powertrain components, such as transmissions, universal joints, drive shafts, and front/rear axle components, can be stressed beyond design safety limits by the installation of these devices. General Motors does not support or endorse the use of devices or modifications that, when installed, increase the engine horsepower and torque. It is because of these unknown stresses, and the potential to alter reliability, durability and emissions performance, that GM has adopted a policy that prevents any UNAUTHORIZED dealer warranty claim submissions to any remaining warranty coverage, to the powertrain and driveline components whenever the presence of a non-GM (aftermarket) calibration is confirmed - even if the non-GM control module calibration is subsequently removed. Refer to the latest version of Bulletin 09-06-04-026 (V8 Gas Engines) or 06-06-01-007 (Duramax(TM) Diesel Engines) for more information on dealer requirements for calibration verification. These same policies apply as they relate to the use of non-GM accessories. Damage or failure from the use or installation of a non-GM accessory will not be covered under warranty. Failure resulting from the alteration or modification of the vehicle, including the cutting, welding or disconnecting of the vehicle's original equipment parts and components will void the warranty. Additionally, dealers will NOT be reimbursed or compensated by GM in the event of any legal inquiry at either the local, state or federal level that Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 04-06-04-054B > Nov > 10 > Engine Controls Aftermarket Accessory Usage > Page 407 results from the alteration or modification of a vehicle using non-GM approved parts or accessories. Dealers should be especially cautious of accessory companies that claim the installation of their product will not void the factory warranty. Many times these companies have even given direction on how to quickly disassemble the accessory in an attempt to preclude the manufacturer from finding out that is has been installed. Any suspect repairs should be reviewed by the Fixed Operations Manager (FOM), and in Canada by the Warranty Manager (WM) for appropriate repair direction. If it is decided that a goodwill repair is to be made on the vehicle, even with the installation of such non-GM approved components, the customer is to be made aware of General Motors position on this issue and is to sign the appropriate goodwill documentation required by General Motors. It is imperative for dealers to understand that by installing such devices, they are jeopardizing not only the warranty coverage, but also the performance and reliability of the customer's vehicle. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 09-06-04-026C > Aug > 10 > Engine/Transmission Aftermarket Calibrations Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine/Transmission - Aftermarket Calibrations INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 09-06-04-026C Date: August 13, 2010 Subject: Identifying Non-GM (Aftermarket) Engine and Transmission Calibrations for V8 Gas Engines Using Tech 2(R) or Global Diagnostic System (GDS) Models: 2006-2011 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (Excluding Saab 9-7X) 2006-2009 HUMMER H2 2006-2010 HUMMER H3 Equipped with V8 Gas Powered Engines Only Attention: This bulletin applies to V8 gas powered engines ONLY. For Duramax(TM) diesel powered engines, refer to the latest version of Corporate Bulletin Number 08-06-04-006G. Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2011 model year. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 09-06-04-026A (Section 06 - Engine/Propulsion System). General Motors is identifying an increasing number of engine, transmission and catalytic converter part failures that are the result of non-GM (aftermarket) engine and transmission control calibrations being used. When alteration to the GM-released engine or transmission control calibrations occurs, it subjects powertrain and driveline components (engine , transmission, transfer case, driveshaft and rear axle) to stresses that were not tested by General Motors. It is because of these unknown stresses, and the potential to alter reliability, durability and emissions performance, that GM has adopted a policy that prevents any UNAUTHORIZED dealer warranty claim submissions to any remaining warranty coverage, to the powertrain and driveline components whenever the presence of a non-GM (aftermarket) calibration is confirmed - even if the non-GM control module calibration is subsequently removed. Warranty coverage is based on the equipment and calibrations that were released on the vehicle at time of sale, or subsequently updated by GM. That's because GM testing and validation matches the calibration to a host of criteria that is essential to assure reliability, durability and emissions performance over the life of the warranty coverage and beyond. Stresses resulting from calibrations different from those tested and released by GM can damage or weaken components, leading to poor performance and or shortened life. Additionally, non-GM (aftermarket) issued engine control modifications often do not meet the same emissions performance standards as GM issued calibrations. Depending on state statutes, individuals who install engine control module calibrations that put the vehicle outside the parameters of emissions certification standards may be subject to fines and/or penalties. This bulletin outlines a procedure to identify the presence of non-GM (aftermarket) calibrations. GM recommends performing this check whenever a hard part failure is seen on internal engine or transmission components, or before an engine assembly or transmission assembly is being replaced under warranty. It is also recommended that the engine calibration verification procedure be performed whenever diagnostics indicate that catalytic converter replacement is indicated. The PQC has a process to confirm the ECM/PCM calibration is GM issued. The PQC will require a picture of the engine calibration verification screen, as outlined in this bulletin, before authorizing any V8 gas powered engine replacement. If a non-GM calibration is found and verification has taken place through GM, the remaining powertrain and driveline warranty will be blocked and notated in GMVIS and the dealership will be notified. This block prevents any UNAUTHORIZED warranty claim submission. 1. Connect the Tech 2(R) to the vehicle. 2. Go to: Diagnostics and build the vehicle. 3. Select: Powertrain. 4. Select: Engine. 5. *Select: Engine Control Module or PCM. 6. *Select: Module ID Information or I/M Information System if the Module ID Information selection is not available. 7. *If "I/M information System" was selected, it may be necessary to select "Vehicle Information" in order to display the calibration information. ‹› If the CVN information is displayed as "N/A", it will be necessary to contact the TCSC to obtain the CVN information. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 09-06-04-026C > Aug > 10 > Engine/Transmission Aftermarket Calibrations > Page 412 8. Take a CLEAR digital picture of the Tech 2(R) Vehicle Information screen showing the engine Calibration IDs and Verification Numbers as shown above. Retain the printout information and the Tech 2(R) screen photograph with the repair order. Note All pictures must be sent as a.jpg file. 9. E-mail a copy of the picture to [email protected]. In the subject line of the e-mail include the phrase "V8 Cal" as well as the complete VIN and Dealer BAC. In the body of the e-mail, include the VIN, mileage, R.O. number and BAC. Include a brief description of the customer concern and cause of the concern. Note The dealer will receive an e-mail reply after the calibrations have been validated. The e-mail reply will advise the dealer if the calibrations are OEM. 10. Allow two hours for the PQC to verify the calibrations and set up the case details. ‹› If the PQC determines that the calibrations ARE aftermarket calibrations, DO NOT contact GM Technical Assistance to discuss warranty concerns on the aftermarket calibrations. ALL questions and concerns about warranty should be directed to the dealers Fixed Operations Manager (FOM), (Warranty Manager (WM) in Canada). 11. You may call the PQC two hours after submitting the e-mail for authorization to replace the assembly. This will provide them time to receive, review and set up a case on the request. Please be prepared to provide all the usual documentation that is normally required when requesting an assembly authorization from the PQC. Tech 2(R) Displaying All Zeroes for the Verification Numbers on the Calibration ID and Verification Number Screen If the Tech 2(R) that you are using displays all zeroes for the Verification Numbers as shown, then perform the following steps: 1. Update the Tech 2(R) with the latest software from TIS2WEB. 2. Turn OFF the ignition for 90 seconds. 3. Connect the Tech 2(R) to the vehicle. 4. Turn ON the ignition, and build the vehicle. Observe the Tech 2(R) Calibration ID and Verification Number screen for proper operation. ‹› If the Tech 2(R) screen still does not display properly, then turn OFF the ignition for 90 seconds again. Turn ON the ignition and observe the same screen for proper operation. Retrieving Calibrations From a Global A Vehicle This information applies to the 2010 Camaro and is typical of the procedure that will be used on Global A vehicles. 1. Turn OFF the ignition. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 09-06-04-026C > Aug > 10 > Engine/Transmission Aftermarket Calibrations > Page 413 2. Connect the MDI to the Data Link Connector (DLC) of the vehicle. Note Use the USB port to make the following MDI connection: 3. Connect the MDI to a PC or laptop that has been downloaded with the GDS application from TIS2WEB. Note At least one Diagnostic Package must be installed on the PC to perform diagnostics. If GDS was just installed, select: Add New Diagnostic Package and then select: a Diagnostic Package to download. 4. Click: On the GDS icon on the PC. 5. The Login Page will appear. 6. Select: A User. 7. The ID Screen will appear. 8. Select: The serial number of the MDI being used. 9. Select: Connect. 10. Verify that the system status is ready by observing for a flashing PC light icon on the MDI. 11. Select: Make, Model and Model Year, in order to build the vehicle. 12. Click: Upload VIN, to allow the VIN to be reported to the PC. 13. At: The Verification step, turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. 14. Select: Next Action. 15. The Home Page will appear. 16. Select: Next. 17. The Diagnostic Screen will appear. Note Due to vehicle build, software and RPO variations, GDS may ask for additional information in Step 18. 18. Select: Engine ID, if prompted. 19. Select: Module Diagnostics. 20. Select: ECM. 21. Select: ID Information. 22. The Diagnostics page will appear. Typical View of GDS Calibration History Screen Note GDS is capable of displaying up to 10 Calibration History events. 23. Select: Calibration History from the drop down menu in order to display the following items on the screen: - Calibration History Buffer - Number of Calibration History Events Stored - Calibration Part Number History - Calibration Verification Number History 24. Select: Screenshot. 25. Name and save the file in an appropriate folder. 26. Select : Print, and retain a copy of the screenshot with the repair order. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 09-06-04-026C > Aug > 10 > Engine/Transmission Aftermarket Calibrations > Page 414 Note All pictures must be sent as a.jpg file. 27. E-mail a copy of the screenshot to [email protected]. In the subject line of the e-mail include the phrase "V8 Cal" as well as the complete VIN and Dealer BAC. In the body of the e-mail, include the VIN, mileage, R.O. number and BAC. Include a brief description of the customer concern and cause of the concern. Note The dealer will receive an e-mail reply after the calibrations have been validated. The e-mail reply will advise the dealer if the calibrations are OEM. 28. Allow two hours for the PQC to verify the calibrations and set up the case details. ‹› If the PQC determines that the calibrations ARE aftermarket calibrations, DO NOT contact GM Technical Assistance to discuss warranty concerns on the aftermarket calibrations. ALL questions and concerns about warranty should be directed to the dealers Fixed Operations Manager (FOM), (Warranty Manager (WM) in Canada). 29. You may call the PQC two hours after submitting the e-mail for authorization to replace the assembly. This will provide them time to receive, review and set up a case on the request. Please be prepared to provide all the usual documentation that is normally required when requesting an assembly authorization from the PQC. Warranty Information - The Dealership Service Management must be involved in any situation that would justify the use of labor operation Z1111. - Notify the Fixed Operations Manager (FOM) (Warranty Manager (WM) in Canada) of the situation. - All claims will have to be routed to the FOM (WM in Canada) for approval. - Please refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 09-00-89-016, Labor Operation Z1111 - Suspected Tampering or Vehicle Modifications for important information. For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 415 Engine Control Module: Diagrams K20 Engine Control Module X1 (LAF) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 416 K20 Engine Control Module X1 (LF1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 417 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 418 K20 Engine Control Module X2 (LAF) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 419 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 420 K20 Engine Control Module X2 (LF1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 421 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 422 K20 Engine Control Module X3 (LAF) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 423 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 424 K20 Engine Control Module X3 (LF1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 425 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 426 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 427 Engine Control Module: Description and Operation Engine Control Module Description The engine control module (ECM) interacts with many emission related components and systems, and monitors the emission related components and systems for deterioration. OBD II diagnostics monitor the system performance and a diagnostic trouble code (DTC) sets if the system performance degrades. The malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) operation and the DTC storage are dictated by the DTC type. A DTC is ranked as a Type A or Type B if the DTC is emissions related. Type C is a non-emissions related DTC. The ECM is in the engine compartment. The ECM is the control center of the engine controls system. The ECM controls the following components: * The fuel injection system * The ignition system * The emission control systems * The on-board diagnostics * The A/C and fan systems * The throttle actuation control (TAC) system The ECM constantly monitors the information from various sensors and other inputs, and controls the systems that affect the vehicle performance and the emissions. The ECM also performs diagnostic tests on various parts of the system. The ECM can recognize operational problems and alert the driver via the MIL. When the ECM detects a malfunction, the ECM stores a DTC. The condition area is identified by the particular DTC that is set. This aids the technician in making repairs. ECM Function The engine control module (ECM) can supply 5 V or 12 V to the various sensors or switches. This is done through pull-up resistors to the regulated power supplies within the ECM. In some cases, even an ordinary shop voltmeter will not give an accurate reading because the resistance is too low. Therefore, a DMM with at least 10 Mohm input impedance is required in order to ensure accurate voltage readings. The ECM controls the output circuits by controlling the ground or the power feed circuit through the transistors or a device called an output driver module. EEPROM The electronically erasable programmable read only memory (EEPROM) is a permanent memory that is physically part of the engine control module (ECM). The EEPROM contains program and calibration information that the ECM needs in order to control the powertrain operation. Special equipment, as well as the correct program and calibration for the vehicle, are required in order to reprogram the ECM. Data Link Connector (DLC) The data link connector (DLC) is a 16-pin connector that provides the technician a means of accessing serial data for aid in the diagnosis. This connector allows the technician to use a scan tool in order to monitor the various serial data parameters, and display the DTC information. The DLC is located inside of the drivers compartment, underneath the dash. Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) The malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) is inside of the instrument panel cluster (IPC). The MIL is controlled by the engine control module (ECM) and illuminates when the ECM detects a condition that affects the vehicle emissions. ECM Service Precautions The engine control module (ECM), by design, can withstand the normal current draws that are associated with the vehicle operations. However, care must be used in order to avoid overloading any of these circuits. When testing for opens or shorts, do not ground or apply voltage to any of the ECM circuits unless the diagnostic procedure instructs you to do so. These circuits should only be tested with a DMM. Emissions Diagnosis For State I/M Programs This OBD II equipped vehicle is designed to diagnose any conditions that could lead to excessive levels of the following emissions: * Hydrocarbons (HC) * Carbon monoxide (CO) * Oxides of nitrogen (NOx) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 428 * Evaporative emission (EVAP) system losses Should this vehicles on-board diagnostic system (ECM) detect a condition that could result in excessive emissions, the ECM turns ON the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) and stores a DTC that is associated with the condition. Aftermarket (Add-On) Electrical And Vacuum Equipment Caution: Do not attach add-on vacuum operated equipment to this vehicle. The use of add-on vacuum equipment may result in damage to vehicle components or systems. Caution: Connect any add-on electrically operated equipment to the vehicle's electrical system at the battery (power and ground) in order to prevent damage to the vehicle. Aftermarket, add-on, electrical and vacuum equipment is defined as any equipment installed on a vehicle after leaving the factory that connects to the vehicles electrical or vacuum systems. No allowances have been made in the vehicle design for this type of equipment. Add-on electrical equipment, even when installed to these strict guidelines, may still cause the powertrain system to malfunction. This may also include equipment not connected to the vehicle electrical system, such as portable telephones and radios. Therefore, the first step in diagnosing any powertrain condition is to eliminate all of the aftermarket electrical equipment from the vehicle. After this is done, if the problem still exists, the problem may be diagnosed in the normal manner. Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) Damage Note: In order to prevent possible electrostatic discharge damage to the engine control module (ECM), DO NOT touch the connector pins on the ECM. The electronic components that are used in the control systems are often designed to carry very low voltage. The electronic components are susceptible to damage caused by electrostatic discharge. Less than 100 V of static electricity can cause damage to some electronic components. There are several ways for a person to become statically charged. The most common methods of charging are by friction and by induction. An example of charging by friction is a person sliding across a car seat. Charging by induction occurs when a person with well insulated shoes stands near a highly charged object and momentarily touches ground. Charges of the same polarity are drained off leaving the person highly charged with the opposite polarity. Static charges can cause damage, therefore, it is important to use care when handling and testing electronic components. Emissions Control Information Label The underhood Vehicle Emissions Control Information Label contains important emission specifications and setting procedures. In the upper right corner is the exhaust emission information. This identifies the year, the manufacturing division of the engine, the displacement of the engine in liters, the class of the vehicle, and type of fuel metering system. There is also an illustrated emission components and vacuum hose schematic. This label is located in the engine compartment of every General Motors vehicle. If the label has been removed, it can be ordered from GM service parts operations (GMSPO). Underhood Inspection Note: This inspection is very important and must be done carefully and thoroughly. Perform a careful underhood inspection when performing any diagnostic procedure or diagnosing the cause of an emission test failure. This can often lead to repairing a condition without further steps. Use the following guidelines when performing an inspection: * Inspect all of the vacuum hoses for correct routing, pinches, cuts, or disconnects. * Inspect any hoses that are difficult to see. * Inspect all of the wires in the engine compartment for the following conditions: - Burned or chafed spots - Pinched wires - Contact with sharp edges - Contact with hot exhaust manifolds Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 429 Engine Control Module: Service and Repair Engine Control Module Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 430 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Application and ID Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Application and ID Electrical Center Identification Views X50A Fuse Block - Underhood, Label Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Application and ID > Page 434 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Control Unit > Component Information > Locations Fuel Pump Control Unit: Locations Luggage Compartment/Rear of Vehicle Component Views Left Side of the Luggage Compartment Components 1 - X80R Accessory Power Receptacle - Rear Compartment 2 - K41 Parking Assist Module (UD7) 3 - M17 Liftgate Motor Assembly (TB5) 4 - K27 Fuel Pump Control Module Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Control Unit > Component Information > Locations > Page 439 Fuel Pump Control Unit: Diagrams K27 Fuel Pump Control Module Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Control Unit > Component Information > Locations > Page 440 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Application and ID Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Application and ID Electrical Center Identification Views X50A Fuse Block - Underhood, Label Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Application and ID > Page 444 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Ignition System > Ignition Relay > Component Information > Locations Ignition Relay: Locations Electrical Center Identification Views X50A Fuse Block - Underhood, Label Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Ignition System > Ignition Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 449 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Locations > SIR Identification Views Air Bag Control Module: Locations SIR Identification Views SIR Identification Views The SIR Identification Views shown below illustrate the approximate location of all SIR components available for the vehicle. This will assist in determining the appropriate SIR Disabling and Enabling for a given service procedure. Refer to SIR Disabling and Enabling (See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming/Service and Repair). 1 - Front End Sensor - Right-Located under the front hood in the engine compartment 2 Instrument Panel Air Bag-Located at the top right under the instrument panel 3 - Roof Rail Air Bag Right-Located under the headliner, extending from the passenger front windshield pillar to the passenger rear windshield pillar 4 - Right Front Side Impact Sensor-Located under the right front door trim near the lower rear of the door frame 5 - Inflatable Restraint Sensing and Diagnostic Module (SDM)-Located underneath the vehicle carpet under the center console 6 - Passenger Presence Detection System-Located under the front passenger sear trim cover (if equipped) 7 Right Front Seat Belt Anchor Tensioner-Located on the outboard side of the passenger seat (if equipped) 8 - Passenger Side Seat Impact Air Bag-Located on the seat back of passenger seat (if equipped) 9 - Right Front Seat Belt Retractor Pretensioner-Located under the trim near the bottom of the center pillar 10 - Right Rear Side Impact Sensor-Located under the right rear door trim near the lower rear of the door frame 11 - Right Roof Rail Module-Located behind the garnish molding on the upper rear pillar 12 - Left Roof Rail Module-Located behind garnish molding on the upper rear pillar 13 - Left Rear Side Impact Sensor-Located under the left rear door trim near the lower rear of the door frame 14 - Left Front Seat Belt Retractor Pretensioner-Located under the trim near the bottom of the center pillar 15 - Driver Side Seat Impact Air Bag-Located on the seat back of the driver seat 16 - Left Front Seat belt Anchor Tensioner-Located on the outboard side of the driver seat 17 - Left Front Side Impact Sensor-Located under the left front door trim near the lower rear of the door frame 18 - Left Roof Rail Air Bag-Located under the headliner, extending from the driver front windshield pillar to the driver rear windshield pillar 19 - Steering Wheel Air Bag-Located on the steering wheel 20 - Vehicle Battery-Located at the front left of the engine compartment. 21 - Left Front End Sensor-Located under the front hood in the engine compartment Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Locations > SIR Identification Views > Page 455 Air Bag Control Module: Locations Passenger Compartment/Roof Component Views Passenger Compartment/Roof Component Views Left Side of the Passenger Compartment Components 1 - F105R Roof Rail Air Bag - Right 2 - F105L Roof Rail Air Bag - Left 3 - K36 Inflatable Restraint Sensing and Diagnostic Module 4 - B119 Multi-axis Acceleration Sensor Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 456 Air Bag Control Module: Diagrams K36 Inflatable Restraint Sensing and Diagnostic Module X1 K36 Inflatable Restraint Sensing and Diagnostic Module X2 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 457 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 458 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 459 Air Bag Control Module: Service and Repair Inflatable Restraint Sensing and Diagnostic Module Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Restraint Systems - Accessory Electrical Interference Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag: Technical Service Bulletins Restraint Systems Accessory Electrical Interference INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 08-09-41-007D Date: January 28, 2011 Subject: Passenger Presence System (PPS) May Command Passenger Airbag Indicator and Seat Belt Reminder On When Electronic Devices (Computers, MP3 Players, Cell Phones, Diagnostic Scan Tool, etc.) Are Placed on Front Passenger Seat, DTCs 5045, B0074 0F, B101D or B0081 Set Models: 2009-2011 Buick Enclave 2009-2011 Cadillac CTS 2010-2011 Cadillac SRX 2009-2011 Chevrolet Cobalt (except SS model), HHR (except SS model), Impala, Traverse 2010-2011 Chevrolet Equinox 2009-2011 GMC Acadia 2010-2011 GMC Terrain 2009-2010 Saturn OUTLOOK 2010 Saturn VUE ' Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2011 model year. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 08-09-41-007C (Section 09 - Restraints). Dealers should be aware that when certain electronic devices (computers, MP3 players, cell phones, Tech 2(R), etc.) are placed on the front passenger seat, the front passenger airbag indicator may illuminate. The seat belt reminder light/chime may also be activated. This is due to the fact that some electronic devices placed on the front passenger seat may interfere with the electric field generated by the PPS system, causing it to enable (turn ON) the passenger airbag and turn on the safety belt reminder light and chime - even though the seat is not occupied. The electronic device does not necessarily need to be turned on to cause this condition. DTCs 5045, B0081 0F, B0074 0F or B101D may set depending on the vehicle. If you remove the electronic device from the front passenger seat, the DTC will go into history. If this happens, clear all SDM and PPS DTCs. If the DTC is still current, follow the service procedure in SI for that DTC. If the DTCs do not return, no repair is needed (do not replace any parts for this condition). Note Never rest the diagnostic scan tool or components on the passenger front seat or touch the passenger front seat while the diagnostic scan tool is in contact with your body. This may cause the SIR lamp to illuminate while holding the diagnostic scan tool because your body can transfer the electronic "noise" to the sensor mat in the passenger front seat. Please advise the customer to avoid placing the electronic device in the front passenger seat in the future. Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Starting and Charging > Starter Relay > Component Information > Locations Starter Relay: Locations Electrical Center Identification Views X50A Fuse Block - Underhood, Label Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Starting and Charging > Starter Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 468 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Steering and Suspension > Relays and Modules - Steering > Steering Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams Steering Control Module: Diagrams K43 Power Steering Control Module X1 (LAF) K43 Power Steering Control Module X2 (LAF) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Steering and Suspension > Relays and Modules - Steering > Steering Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 474 K43 Power Steering Control Module X3 (LAF) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Steering and Suspension > Relays and Modules - Steering > Steering Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 475 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Steering and Suspension > Relays and Modules - Steering > Steering Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 476 Steering Control Module: Service and Repair Power Steering Control Module Calibration Steering Angle Sensor Centering and Software Endstop Learning Warning An inaccurate or not centered steering angle sensor could limit the operation of the electric power steering (EPS) and result in personal injury. Centering of the steering angle sensor and software endstop learning might be required after certain service procedures are performed. Some of these procedures are as follows: * Steering angle sensor replacement * Steering gear replacement * Power steering assist motor replacement * Steering column replacement * Steering linkage inner tie rod replacement * Steering linkage outer tie rod replacement Note: It is necessary to perform the steering angle sensor centering before the software endstop learning. Steering Angle Sensor Centering For the centering procedure of the external steering angle sensor (electronic stability program) refer to Steering Angle Sensor Centering (See: Sensors and Switches/Sensors and Switches Steering and Suspension/Sensors and Switches - Steering/Steering Angle Sensor/Service and Repair/Procedures). The centering procedure of the internal steering angle sensor (w/o electronic stability program) can be completed with the following steps: Conditions: Front axle measured and set, engine running, vehicle speed 0 km/h (0 MPH), internal steering angle sensor is activated. 1. Using the steering wheel, align the front wheels in the center forward position. 2. Using a scan tool, perform the Configuration/Reset Functions, Steering Wheel Angle Sensor Centering procedure. 3. Steer from the center position slowly 90° to the left. 4. Steer slowly back to the center position and then slowly 90° to the right. 5. Steer slowly back to the center position. 6. Perform the steering movements again. 7. Centering procedure is completed. Software Endstop Learning The software endstop learning procedure can be completed with the following steps: Conditions: Front axle measured and set, vehicle speed 0 km/h (0 MPH), internal steering angle sensor is calibrated or external steering angle sensor sends a valid CAN signal. 1. Using a scan tool, perform the Configuration/Reset Functions, Power Steering Softstops Reset procedure and follow the on-screen instructions. 2. Using a scan tool, perform the Configuration/Reset Functions, Power Steering Softstops Learn procedure and follow the on-screen instructions. 3. Software endstop learning procedure is completed. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Steering and Suspension > Relays and Modules - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > TPMS System - Service And Re-Learning Sensor IDs Tire Pressure Module: Technical Service Bulletins TPMS System - Service And Re-Learning Sensor IDs INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 10-03-16-001 Date: July 19, 2010 Subject: TPMS System Service and Re-Learning Sensor IDs Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2 2009 and Prior HUMMER H3 2010 and Prior Saturn Models 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X with Wheel-Mounted Tire Pressure Sensors In the event that the spare tire, which is normally not equipped with a tire pressure monitor (TPM) sensor, is installed in place of one of the road tires and the vehicle is driven above 40 km/h (25 mph) for 20 minutes or more, the TPM indicator icon on the instrument panel cluster (IPC) will flash for approximately one minute and then remain on steady each time the ignition is turned ON, indicating a diagnostic trouble code (DTC) has been set. The driver information center (DIC), if equipped, will also display a SERVICE TIRE MONITOR type message. When the road tire is repaired and reinstalled in the original location, the TPM indicator icon illumination and DIC message may remain displayed until the DTC is cleared. To ensure that the TPM indicator and the DIC message are cleared after service, it is necessary to clear any TPM DTCs using a scan tool. If a scan tool is unavailable, performing the TPM relearn procedure using a TPM diagnostic tool will provide the same results. It is advised to perform the relearn procedure away from other vehicles to prevent picking up a stray sensor signal. If one or more of the TPM sensors are missing or damaged and have been replaced, then the relearn procedure must be performed. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-07-30-016A > Nov > 09 > A/T Controls - Downshift Hesitation/Delayed Shifting Control Module: Customer Interest A/T Controls - Downshift Hesitation/Delayed Shifting TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 09-07-30-016A Date: November 25, 2009 Subject: Transmission Hesitation, Delayed Shifting, Shifting at Wrong Time (Reprogram TCM) Models: 2010 Buick Enclave 2010 Chevrolet Equinox, Traverse 2010 GMC Acadia, Terrain 2010 Saturn OUTLOOK Equipped with 6T40/45 (RPOs MH7, MHC) or 6T70/75 (RPOs MH2, MH4, MY9, MH6) Automatic Transmission 2010 Buick LaCrosse Equipped with 3.0L (RPO LF1) Engine and 6T70 (RPOs MH2, MH4) Automatic Transmission 2010 Chevrolet Malibu 2010 Pontiac G6 2010 Saturn AURA Equipped with 6T40 (RPO MH8) Automatic Transmission All Vehicles Built Prior to the Following VIN Breakpoints: Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add models. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 09-07-30-016 (07- Transmission/Transaxle). Condition Some customers may comment on transmission downshift hesitation, delayed shifting and shifting at the wrong time. Correction A revised transmission calibration has been developed to address these issues. Reprogram the transmission control module (TCM) with updated calibration files using the TIS2WEB Service Programming System (SPS) application. Select SEQ Programming Sequence ECM/TCM from the Supported Controllers screen. Refer to SI and Service Programming System (SPS) documentation for programming instructions, if required. Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table above. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Control Module: > 10-07-30-002A > Jun > 10 > A/T Controls - Snapshot Data Using (GDS) Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T Controls - Snapshot Data Using (GDS) INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 10-07-30-002A Date: June 11, 2010 Subject: Navigation Procedure for Snapshot Data Using Global Diagnostic System (GDS), Uploading Snapshot Data to Computer and E-mailing Models: 2010-2011 Buick LaCrosse 2011 Buick Regal 2010-2011 Cadillac SRX 2010-2011 Chevrolet Camaro, Equinox 2010-2011 GMC Terrain Attention: For additional information about GDS and/or the snapshot feature, please review course number: 16048.26W Global Diagnostic System, at the GM training website: www.gmtraining.com. In Canada go to: www.gmprocanada.com. You may also utilize the Help Section of GDS by clicking on the Menu button that is on the lower left corner of the GDS screen. Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2011 model year and correct the step number referred to in the Note for Step 18. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 10-07-30-002 (Section 07 - Transmission/Transaxle). The Global Diagnostic System (GDS) and the multiple diagnostic interface (MDI) module will take the place of the Tech 2(R) on certain vehicles when communicating and diagnosing vehicle on-board electrical systems. This diagnostic tool platform and software will be required for use with all 2010 and later GM Global Architecture (Global A) vehicles beginning with the Chevrolet Camaro, followed by the Buick LaCrosse, Chevrolet Equinox, Cadillac SRX, GMC Terrain and Buick Regal. The following procedure is intended to show the user how to navigate to the appropriate data screen, upload a snapshot of the data to a computer and create an e-mail of the snapshot. The procedure is written for an automatic transmission, but is similar for other data screens. Procedure for GDS Navigating and Uploading Transmission Snapshot Data to a PC and Creating an E-mail 1. Turn OFF the ignition. 2. Connect the MDI to the Data Link Connector (DLC) of the vehicle. Note Use the USB port to make the following MDI connection: 3. Connect the MDI to a PC or laptop that has been downloaded with the GDS application from TIS2WEB. Note At least one Diagnostic Package must be installed on the PC to perform diagnostics. If GDS was just installed, select: Add New Diagnostic Package and then select: a Diagnostic Package to download. 4. Click: On the GDS icon on the PC. 5. The Login Page will appear. 6. Select: A User. 7. The ID Screen will appear. 8. Select: The serial number of the MDI being used. 9. Select: Connect. 10. Verify that the system status is ready by observing for a flashing PC light icon on the MDI. 11. Select: Make, Model and Model Year, in order to build the vehicle. 12. At: The Verification step, turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. 13. Click: Upload VIN, to allow the VIN to be reported to the PC. 14. Select: Next Action. 15. The Home Page will appear. 16. Select: Next. 17. The Diagnostic Screen will appear. Note Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Control Module: > 10-07-30-002A > Jun > 10 > A/T Controls - Snapshot Data Using (GDS) > Page 497 Due to vehicle build, software and RPO variations, GDS may ask for additional information in Step 18. 18. Select: Engine ID, if prompted. 19. Select: Module Diagnostics. 20. Select: TCM. 21. Select: Data Display. 22. Select: The drop down menu to display the available Data Display selections. 23. Select: The appropriate Data Display for the snapshot to be taken. Note The snapshot data can be recorded at idle or on a hoist when using a shop PC. IF the vehicle is driven, the use of a laptop with GDS will be required. PC memory will determine the amount of snapshot recording time. 24. Select: Record Snapshot, when ready. 25. Select: Stop Snapshot, upon completion. 26. Insert: Comment. Use a name, the vehicle model or the concern and date in order to identify the snapshot. 27. Exit: The Data List. 28. Exit: The Diagnostic Screen. 29. The Home Page will appear with the snapshot on the right side. 30. Click: On the Snapshot to Highlight it. 31. Click: Tech Support. Note Enter the necessary e-mail information into ALL of the blank boxes. Failure to do so will result in an error message and the snapshot will not be sent. 32. The Send E-mail dialog box will appear. 1. SENDER: Enter your first name. Use only ONE name as multiple words may cause an error message. 2. RECIPIENT: Enter their e-mail address. Note An error message will occur if this box contains ANY spaces. 3. REPLY TO: Enter your first name here. An e-mail address can be used but it MUST NOT contain any spaces or unrecognized characters. 4. SUBJECT: Enter the appropriate information here, such as the condition, symptom, data parameter being investigated or DTC. 5. TEXT: Type a short message here, such as the test results, snapshot type, or a cell phone number. Note A copy of the snapshot will still reside on the PC. 33. Click: OK, to send the snapshot. Procedure to E-mail GDS Snapshot Data to TAC Important When e-mailing a snapshot to TAC, only send the snapshot data they have REQUESTED. 1. Select: Home Page. The snapshot will appear on the right side. 2. Click: On the Snapshot to Highlight it. 3. Click: Tech Support. 4. The Send E-mail dialog box will appear. Note Enter the necessary e-mail information into ALL of the blank boxes. Failure to do so will result in an error message and the snapshot will not be sent. 5. SENDER: Enter your first name here. Use only ONE name as multiple words may cause an error message. 6. RECIPIENT: Enter the USA or Canada TAC E-mail Address. Note An error message will occur if this box contains ANY spaces. 7. REPLY TO: Enter your first name here. An e-mail address can be used but it MUST NOT contain any spaces or unrecognized characters. 8. SUBJECT: Enter Your TAC Case Number & VIN Number here. Both numbers MUST appear in this box or the e-mail cannot be processed and will be deleted. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Control Module: > 10-07-30-002A > Jun > 10 > A/T Controls - Snapshot Data Using (GDS) > Page 498 9. TEXT: Type a short message here, such as the test results, snapshot type, or a cell phone number. Note A copy of the snapshot will still reside on the PC. 10. Click: OK, to send the snapshot. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Control Module: > 09-07-30-016A > Nov > 09 > A/T Controls - Downshift Hesitation/Delayed Shifting Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T Controls - Downshift Hesitation/Delayed Shifting TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 09-07-30-016A Date: November 25, 2009 Subject: Transmission Hesitation, Delayed Shifting, Shifting at Wrong Time (Reprogram TCM) Models: 2010 Buick Enclave 2010 Chevrolet Equinox, Traverse 2010 GMC Acadia, Terrain 2010 Saturn OUTLOOK Equipped with 6T40/45 (RPOs MH7, MHC) or 6T70/75 (RPOs MH2, MH4, MY9, MH6) Automatic Transmission 2010 Buick LaCrosse Equipped with 3.0L (RPO LF1) Engine and 6T70 (RPOs MH2, MH4) Automatic Transmission 2010 Chevrolet Malibu 2010 Pontiac G6 2010 Saturn AURA Equipped with 6T40 (RPO MH8) Automatic Transmission All Vehicles Built Prior to the Following VIN Breakpoints: Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add models. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 09-07-30-016 (07- Transmission/Transaxle). Condition Some customers may comment on transmission downshift hesitation, delayed shifting and shifting at the wrong time. Correction A revised transmission calibration has been developed to address these issues. Reprogram the transmission control module (TCM) with updated calibration files using the TIS2WEB Service Programming System (SPS) application. Select SEQ Programming Sequence ECM/TCM from the Supported Controllers screen. Refer to SI and Service Programming System (SPS) documentation for programming instructions, if required. Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table above. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Control Module: > 10-07-30-002A > Jun > 10 > A/T Controls - Snapshot Data Using (GDS) Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T Controls - Snapshot Data Using (GDS) INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 10-07-30-002A Date: June 11, 2010 Subject: Navigation Procedure for Snapshot Data Using Global Diagnostic System (GDS), Uploading Snapshot Data to Computer and E-mailing Models: 2010-2011 Buick LaCrosse 2011 Buick Regal 2010-2011 Cadillac SRX 2010-2011 Chevrolet Camaro, Equinox 2010-2011 GMC Terrain Attention: For additional information about GDS and/or the snapshot feature, please review course number: 16048.26W Global Diagnostic System, at the GM training website: www.gmtraining.com. In Canada go to: www.gmprocanada.com. You may also utilize the Help Section of GDS by clicking on the Menu button that is on the lower left corner of the GDS screen. Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2011 model year and correct the step number referred to in the Note for Step 18. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 10-07-30-002 (Section 07 - Transmission/Transaxle). The Global Diagnostic System (GDS) and the multiple diagnostic interface (MDI) module will take the place of the Tech 2(R) on certain vehicles when communicating and diagnosing vehicle on-board electrical systems. This diagnostic tool platform and software will be required for use with all 2010 and later GM Global Architecture (Global A) vehicles beginning with the Chevrolet Camaro, followed by the Buick LaCrosse, Chevrolet Equinox, Cadillac SRX, GMC Terrain and Buick Regal. The following procedure is intended to show the user how to navigate to the appropriate data screen, upload a snapshot of the data to a computer and create an e-mail of the snapshot. The procedure is written for an automatic transmission, but is similar for other data screens. Procedure for GDS Navigating and Uploading Transmission Snapshot Data to a PC and Creating an E-mail 1. Turn OFF the ignition. 2. Connect the MDI to the Data Link Connector (DLC) of the vehicle. Note Use the USB port to make the following MDI connection: 3. Connect the MDI to a PC or laptop that has been downloaded with the GDS application from TIS2WEB. Note At least one Diagnostic Package must be installed on the PC to perform diagnostics. If GDS was just installed, select: Add New Diagnostic Package and then select: a Diagnostic Package to download. 4. Click: On the GDS icon on the PC. 5. The Login Page will appear. 6. Select: A User. 7. The ID Screen will appear. 8. Select: The serial number of the MDI being used. 9. Select: Connect. 10. Verify that the system status is ready by observing for a flashing PC light icon on the MDI. 11. Select: Make, Model and Model Year, in order to build the vehicle. 12. At: The Verification step, turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. 13. Click: Upload VIN, to allow the VIN to be reported to the PC. 14. Select: Next Action. 15. The Home Page will appear. 16. Select: Next. 17. The Diagnostic Screen will appear. Note Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Control Module: > 10-07-30-002A > Jun > 10 > A/T Controls - Snapshot Data Using (GDS) > Page 508 Due to vehicle build, software and RPO variations, GDS may ask for additional information in Step 18. 18. Select: Engine ID, if prompted. 19. Select: Module Diagnostics. 20. Select: TCM. 21. Select: Data Display. 22. Select: The drop down menu to display the available Data Display selections. 23. Select: The appropriate Data Display for the snapshot to be taken. Note The snapshot data can be recorded at idle or on a hoist when using a shop PC. IF the vehicle is driven, the use of a laptop with GDS will be required. PC memory will determine the amount of snapshot recording time. 24. Select: Record Snapshot, when ready. 25. Select: Stop Snapshot, upon completion. 26. Insert: Comment. Use a name, the vehicle model or the concern and date in order to identify the snapshot. 27. Exit: The Data List. 28. Exit: The Diagnostic Screen. 29. The Home Page will appear with the snapshot on the right side. 30. Click: On the Snapshot to Highlight it. 31. Click: Tech Support. Note Enter the necessary e-mail information into ALL of the blank boxes. Failure to do so will result in an error message and the snapshot will not be sent. 32. The Send E-mail dialog box will appear. 1. SENDER: Enter your first name. Use only ONE name as multiple words may cause an error message. 2. RECIPIENT: Enter their e-mail address. Note An error message will occur if this box contains ANY spaces. 3. REPLY TO: Enter your first name here. An e-mail address can be used but it MUST NOT contain any spaces or unrecognized characters. 4. SUBJECT: Enter the appropriate information here, such as the condition, symptom, data parameter being investigated or DTC. 5. TEXT: Type a short message here, such as the test results, snapshot type, or a cell phone number. Note A copy of the snapshot will still reside on the PC. 33. Click: OK, to send the snapshot. Procedure to E-mail GDS Snapshot Data to TAC Important When e-mailing a snapshot to TAC, only send the snapshot data they have REQUESTED. 1. Select: Home Page. The snapshot will appear on the right side. 2. Click: On the Snapshot to Highlight it. 3. Click: Tech Support. 4. The Send E-mail dialog box will appear. Note Enter the necessary e-mail information into ALL of the blank boxes. Failure to do so will result in an error message and the snapshot will not be sent. 5. SENDER: Enter your first name here. Use only ONE name as multiple words may cause an error message. 6. RECIPIENT: Enter the USA or Canada TAC E-mail Address. Note An error message will occur if this box contains ANY spaces. 7. REPLY TO: Enter your first name here. An e-mail address can be used but it MUST NOT contain any spaces or unrecognized characters. 8. SUBJECT: Enter Your TAC Case Number & VIN Number here. Both numbers MUST appear in this box or the e-mail cannot be processed and will be deleted. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Control Module: > 10-07-30-002A > Jun > 10 > A/T Controls - Snapshot Data Using (GDS) > Page 509 9. TEXT: Type a short message here, such as the test results, snapshot type, or a cell phone number. Note A copy of the snapshot will still reside on the PC. 10. Click: OK, to send the snapshot. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission Control Module: Service and Repair 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission Control Solenoid Valve and Transmission Control Module Assembly Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the transmission control valve body cover. Refer to Control Valve Body Cover Replacement (See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Valve Body/Service and Repair/6T30/6T40/6T45 Automatic Transmission/Control Valve Body Cover Replacement). 2. Disconnect the input speed sensor electrical connector (1). 3. Disconnect the output speed sensor electrical connector (2). 4. Disconnect the shift position switch electrical connector (3). 5. Remove the 3 control valve body bolts (1) M5 x 40.5. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 512 6. Remove the 12 control valve body bolts (2) M6 x 97. 7. Remove the control solenoid valve assembly (3) with transmission control module. Caution: Use care when removing or installing the filter plate assembly. A broken or missing retaining tab may not adequately secure the filter plate to the control solenoid valve assembly, resulting in possible damage or contamination. 8. Remove the control solenoid valve assembly filter plate (4). Discard the filter plate. It is not reusable. 9. Inspect the channel plate bolt pass through holes for damage or brinelling. Any damage will cause incorrect pressure switch operation. Replace as necessary. Installation Procedure Caution: Use care when removing or installing the filter plate assembly. A broken or missing retaining tab may not adequately secure the filter plate to the control solenoid valve assembly, resulting in possible damage or contamination. 1. Install a NEW control solenoid valve assembly filter plate (4) to prevent fluid leaks past the fluid seals. 2. Install the control solenoid valve assembly (3) with transmission control module. 3. Hand start the control valve body bolts (1, 2). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 513 Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener Caution). 4. Secure the 12 control valve body bolts (2) M6 x 97 and tighten in sequence to 10 Nm (89 lb in). 5. Secure the 3 control valve body bolts (1) M5 x 40.5 and tighten in sequence to 8 Nm (71 lb in). 6. Connect the input speed sensor electrical connector (1). 7. Connect the output speed sensor electrical connector (2). 8. Connect the shift position switch electrical connector (3). 9. Install the transmission control valve body cover. Refer to Control Valve Body Cover Replacement (See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Valve Body/Service and Repair/6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission/Control Valve Body Cover Replacement). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 514 Control Module: Service and Repair 6T70/6T75 - Automatic Transmission Control Solenoid Valve and Transmission Control Module Assembly Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the control valve body cover. Refer to Control Valve Body Cover Replacement (See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Valve Body/Service and Repair/6T70/6T75 - Automatic Transmission/Control Valve Body Cover Replacement). 2. Disconnect the input speed sensor electrical connector (1). 3. Disconnect the output speed sensor electrical connector (2). 4. Disconnect the shift position switch electrical connector (3). 5. Remove the 4 control valve body bolts (1) M6 x 80. 6. Position the control solenoid valve spring (8) to the side. Spring will be released with the removal of the control valve body assembly. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 515 7. Remove the 2 control valve body bolts (4) M6 x 65. 8. Remove the control valve body bolt (3) M6 x 42. 9. Remove the 3 control valve body bolts (2) M6 x 95. 10. Remove the control valve body bolt (7) M6 x 55. 11. Remove the control solenoid valve body and transmission control module (TCM) assembly (5). Caution: Use care when removing or installing the filter plate assembly. A broken or missing retaining tab may not adequately secure the filter plate to the control solenoid valve assembly, resulting in possible damage or contamination. 12. Remove the control solenoid valve assembly filter plate (6). * Discard the filler plate. It is not reusable. * Inspect the pressure switch manifold seals for damage or contamination. Replace the control solenoid valve assembly as necessary. * Inspect the upper channel plate bolt holes for damage, peening or burnelling. Any damage around the bolt holes near the pressure control switch (PCS) feed holes could cause leakage around the PCS seals. Replace the upper channel plate as necessary. Installation Procedure Caution: Use care when removing or installing the filter plate assembly. A broken or missing retaining tab may not adequately secure the filter plate to the control solenoid valve assembly, resulting in possible damage or contamination. 1. Install a NEW control solenoid valve assembly filter plate (1). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 516 2. Install the control solenoid valve body and TCM assembly (5). 3. Rotate the control solenoid valve spring (7) into position. Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener Caution). Note: Install all bolts before tightening, then tighten in specified sequence. 4. Install the 4 control valve body bolts (1) M6 x 80. 5. Install the control valve body bolt (6) M6 x 55. 6. Install the 3 control valve body bolts (2) M6 x 95. 7. Install the control valve body bolt (3) M6 x 42. 8. Install the 2 control valve body bolts (4) M6 x 65 and tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb in). 9. Connect the input speed sensor electrical connector (1). 10. Connect the output speed sensor electrical connector (2). 11. Connect the shift position switch electrical connector (3). 12. Install the control valve body cover. Refer to Control Valve Body Cover Replacement (See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Automatic Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 517 Transmission/Transaxle/Valve Body/Service and Repair/6T70/6T75 - Automatic Transmission/Control Valve Body Cover Replacement). 13. For transmission control module programming and setup. Refer to Control Module References (See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning). Note: After an internal transmission repair or internal part replacement the service fast learn adapt procedure should be performed. 14. Perform the transmission adaptive values learn procedure. Refer to Transmission Adaptive Values Learn (See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Differential > Control Unit, Differential Lock > Component Information > Locations Control Unit: Locations Wheels/Vehicle Underbody Component Views Rear Underbody Components 1 - K47 Rear Differential Clutch Control Module (F46) 2 - R6 Data Link Resistor Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Differential > Control Unit, Differential Lock > Component Information > Locations > Page 522 Control Unit: Diagrams K47 Rear Differential Clutch Control Module (F46) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Differential > Control Unit, Differential Lock > Component Information > Service and Repair > Rear Differential Clutch Control Module Replacement Control Unit: Service and Repair Rear Differential Clutch Control Module Replacement Rear Differential Clutch Control Module Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Differential > Control Unit, Differential Lock > Component Information > Service and Repair > Rear Differential Clutch Control Module Replacement > Page 525 Control Unit: Service and Repair Rear Wheel Drive Module Clutch Housing Replacement Rear Wheel Drive Module Clutch Housing Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element Relay > Component Information > Locations Heated Glass Element Relay: Locations Electrical Center Identification Views X50A Fuse Block - Underhood, Label Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 530 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Relay > Component Information > Locations Windshield Washer Relay: Locations Electrical Center Identification Views X50A Fuse Block - Underhood, Label Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 535 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Relay > Component Information > Locations Wiper Relay: Locations Electrical Center Identification Views X50A Fuse Block - Underhood, Label Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 539 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Locations Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm): Locations Front of Vehicle/Engine Compartment Component Views Engine Compartment Components (Chevrolet) 1 - B20 Brake Fluid Level Switch 2 - B19B Brake Booster Vacuum Sensor 3 - M75 Windshield Wiper Motor 4 - X50A Fuse Block - Underhood 5 - C1 Battery 6 - G24 Windshield Washer Pump 7 - B55 Hood Ajar Switch (BTV) 8 - P12B Horn - Low Note 9 - P12A Horn - High Note 10 - K17 Electronic Brake Control Module Engine Compartment Components (GMC) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Locations > Page 545 1 - B20 Brake Fluid Level Switch 2 - B19B Brake Booster Vacuum Sensor 3 - M75 Windshield Wiper Motor 4 - X50A Fuse Block - Underhood 5 - C1 Battery 6 - G24 Windshield Washer Pump 7 - P12B Horn - Low Note 8 - B55 Hood Ajar Switch (BTV) 9 - K17 Electronic Brake Control Module 10 - P12A Horn - High Note Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Locations > Page 546 Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm): Diagrams B55 Hood Ajar Switch (BTV) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Locations Parking Assist Distance Sensor: Locations Luggage Compartment/Rear of Vehicle Component Views Rear of Vehicle Components (Chevrolet) 1 - E2LR Side Marker Lamp - Left Rear 2 - E5A Backup Lamp - Left 3 - E6 Center High Mounted Stop Lamp 4 - T4G Cellular Phone, Navigation, and Digital Radio Antenna 5 - M45 Rear Wiper Motor 6 - E5B Backup Lamp - Right 7 - E2RR Side Marker Lamp - Right Rear 8 - E5T Tail/Brake and Turn Signal Lamp - Right 9 - E7R License Plate Lamp - Right 10 - B78H Rear Object Sensor Right Outer (UD7) 11 - B78F Rear Object Sensor - Right Middle (UD7) 12 - S46 Liftgate Handle Switch 13 - B87 Rearview Camera (UVC) 14 - X88 Trailer Connector (V92) 15 - B78E Rear Object Sensor - Left Middle (UD7) 16 - E7L License Plate Lamp - Left Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 550 17 - B78G Rear Object Sensor - Left Outer (UD7) 18 - E5S Tail/Brake and Turn Signal Lamp - Left Rear of Vehicle Components (GMC) 1 - E5M Tail Lamp - Left Upper 2 - E6 Center High Mounted Stop Lamp 3 - T4G Cellular Phone, Navigation, and Digital Radio Antenna 4 - M45 Rear Wiper Motor 5 - E5N Tail Lamp - Right Upper 6 - E5T Tail/Brake and Turn Signal Lamp - Right 7 - E2RR Side Marker Lamp - Right Rear 8 - E5K Tail Lamp - Right Lower 9 - E5B Backup Lamp - Right 10 - B78H Rear Object Sensor - Right Outer (UD7) 11 - E7R License Plate Lamp - Right 12 - S46 Liftgate Handle Switch 13 - B87 Rearview Camera (UVC) 14 - E7L License Plate Lamp - Left 15 - B78F Rear Object Sensor - Right Middle (UD7) 16 - X88 Trailer Connector (V92) 17 - B78E Rear Object Sensor - Left Middle (UD7) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 551 18 - B78G Rear Object Sensor - Left Outer (UD7) 19 - E5A Backup Lamp - Left 20 - E5J Tail Lamp - Left Lower 21 - E2LR Side Marker Lamp - Left Rear 22 - E5S Tail/Brake and Turn Signal Lamp Left Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 552 Parking Assist Distance Sensor: Diagrams B78E Rear Object Sensor - Left Middle (UD7) B78F Rear Object Sensor - Right Middle (UD7) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 553 B78G Rear Object Sensor - Left Outer (UD7) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 554 B78H Rear Object Sensor - Right Outer (UD7) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 555 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Rear Object Sensor Housing Replacement Parking Assist Distance Sensor: Service and Repair Rear Object Sensor Housing Replacement Rear Object Sensor Housing Replacement 1. Remove the rear fascia. Refer to Rear Bumper Fascia Replacement (See: Body and Frame/Bumper/Rear Bumper/Rear Bumper Cover / Fascia/Service and Repair/Rear Bumper Fascia Replacement). 2. Disconnect the sensor harness. 3. Remove the sensor from the sensor housing. The sensor housing must be painted if replaced. If reinstalled, painting will not be necessary. Important: Do Not grind off alignment tabs. 4. Sand/grind sonic weld plastic residue from the fascia. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Rear Object Sensor Housing Replacement > Page 558 5. Apply structural adhesive epoxy, Lord Fusor(TM) 127EZ or equivalent, to fascia at mating surface. 6. Using the alignment tabs, install the sensor housing to the fascia. 7. Allow adhesive to cure according to manufacturer's directions. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Rear Object Sensor Housing Replacement > Page 559 8. Install the sensor to the sensor housing. 9. Connect the electrical harness. 10. Install the rear fascia. Refer to Rear Bumper Fascia Replacement (See: Body and Frame/Bumper/Rear Bumper/Rear Bumper Cover / Fascia/Service and Repair/Rear Bumper Fascia Replacement). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Rear Object Sensor Housing Replacement > Page 560 Parking Assist Distance Sensor: Service and Repair Rear Object Sensor Replacement Rear Object Sensor Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove rear bumper fascia. Refer to Rear Bumper Fascia Replacement (See: Body and Frame/Bumper/Rear Bumper/Rear Bumper Cover / Fascia/Service and Repair/Rear Bumper Fascia Replacement). 2. Disconnect electrical from the rear object sensor. 3. Lift the locking tabs on the housing and remove the rear object sensor. Installation Procedure Note: Do not refinish previously painted sensors. Excess paint build up will cause the sensor to be inoperative. 1. Paint the rear object sensor. Refer to Basecoat/Clearcoat Paint Systems (See: Body and Frame/Paint, Striping and Decals/Paint/Application and ID/Basecoat/Clearcoat Paint Systems). 2. Ensure the paint does not exceed 6 mils. Use a paint thickness gauge suitable for non-ferrous metals. Refer to Paint Gauges (). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Rear Object Sensor Housing Replacement > Page 561 3. Insert the sensor into the housing. 4. Connect the electrical connector to the rear object sensor. 5. Install the rear bumper fascia. Refer to Rear Bumper Fascia Replacement (See: Body and Frame/Bumper/Rear Bumper/Rear Bumper Cover / Fascia/Service and Repair/Rear Bumper Fascia Replacement). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Pedal Positioning Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Brake Pedal Position Sensor Calibration Pedal Positioning Sensor: Service and Repair Brake Pedal Position Sensor Calibration Brake Pedal Position Sensor Calibration Calibration Criteria Note: Do not apply the brake pedal during the brake pedal position sensor calibration procedure. Any movement of the brake pedal during this procedure will cause the calibration procedure to fail. If this occurs, the brake pedal position sensor calibration must be repeated. Brake pedal position sensor calibration must be performed after the brake pedal position sensor or body control module (BCM) have been serviced. The calibration procedure will set the brake pedal position sensor home value. This value is used by the BCM to determine the action of the driver applying the brake system and to provide this information to the vehicle subsystems via serial data. Calibration Procedure 1. Apply the parking brake. 2. Place the transmission in the PARK position. 3. Install a scan tool. 4. Clear all BCM DTCs before proceeding. 5. Navigate to the Module Diagnosis menu. 6. Select BCM menu item. 7. Select Configuration/Reset Functions menu item. 8. Select the Brake Pedal Position Sensor Learn procedure and follow the directions displayed on the screen. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Pedal Positioning Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Brake Pedal Position Sensor Calibration > Page 566 Pedal Positioning Sensor: Service and Repair Brake Pedal Position Sensor Replacement Brake Pedal Position Sensor Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Hood Switch / Sensor > Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Locations Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm): Locations Front of Vehicle/Engine Compartment Component Views Engine Compartment Components (Chevrolet) 1 - B20 Brake Fluid Level Switch 2 - B19B Brake Booster Vacuum Sensor 3 - M75 Windshield Wiper Motor 4 - X50A Fuse Block - Underhood 5 - C1 Battery 6 - G24 Windshield Washer Pump 7 - B55 Hood Ajar Switch (BTV) 8 - P12B Horn - Low Note 9 - P12A Horn - High Note 10 - K17 Electronic Brake Control Module Engine Compartment Components (GMC) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Hood Switch / Sensor > Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Locations > Page 572 1 - B20 Brake Fluid Level Switch 2 - B19B Brake Booster Vacuum Sensor 3 - M75 Windshield Wiper Motor 4 - X50A Fuse Block - Underhood 5 - C1 Battery 6 - G24 Windshield Washer Pump 7 - P12B Horn - Low Note 8 - B55 Hood Ajar Switch (BTV) 9 - K17 Electronic Brake Control Module 10 - P12A Horn - High Note Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Hood Switch / Sensor > Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Locations > Page 573 Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm): Diagrams B55 Hood Ajar Switch (BTV) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Pedal Positioning Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Brake Pedal Position Sensor Calibration Pedal Positioning Sensor: Service and Repair Brake Pedal Position Sensor Calibration Brake Pedal Position Sensor Calibration Calibration Criteria Note: Do not apply the brake pedal during the brake pedal position sensor calibration procedure. Any movement of the brake pedal during this procedure will cause the calibration procedure to fail. If this occurs, the brake pedal position sensor calibration must be repeated. Brake pedal position sensor calibration must be performed after the brake pedal position sensor or body control module (BCM) have been serviced. The calibration procedure will set the brake pedal position sensor home value. This value is used by the BCM to determine the action of the driver applying the brake system and to provide this information to the vehicle subsystems via serial data. Calibration Procedure 1. Apply the parking brake. 2. Place the transmission in the PARK position. 3. Install a scan tool. 4. Clear all BCM DTCs before proceeding. 5. Navigate to the Module Diagnosis menu. 6. Select BCM menu item. 7. Select Configuration/Reset Functions menu item. 8. Select the Brake Pedal Position Sensor Learn procedure and follow the directions displayed on the screen. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Pedal Positioning Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Brake Pedal Position Sensor Calibration > Page 578 Pedal Positioning Sensor: Service and Repair Brake Pedal Position Sensor Replacement Brake Pedal Position Sensor Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Mirror Switch > Component Information > Locations Power Mirror Switch: Locations Door Component Views Driver Door Components 1 - A23D Door Latch Assembly - Driver 2 - A9A Outside Rearview Mirror - Driver 3 - E1C Accent Lamp - Driver Door Handle (LTZ or SLT) 4 - K96L Mirror Control Module - Left (LTZ or SLT) 5 S52S Outside Rearview Mirror Switch 6 - P19G Speaker - Left Front 7 - M74D Window Motor Driver 8 - B63LF Side Impact Sensor - Left Front 9 - S79D Window Switch - Driver 10 - E1D Accent Lamp - Driver Door (LTZ or SLT) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Mirror Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 582 Power Mirror Switch: Diagrams S52 Outside Rearview Mirror Switch Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Mirror Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 583 Power Mirror Switch: Service and Repair Outside Remote Control Rearview Mirror Switch Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Locations Power Seat Switch: Locations Passenger Compartment/Roof Component Views Driver Seat Components 1 - M56D Seat Recline Motor - Driver (AE8) 2 - E14A Seat Heating Element - Driver Back (KA1) 3 P22E Video Display - Driver Seatback (UWG) 4 - F106L Side Air Bag - Left 5 - M52D Seat Lumbar Support Horizontal Motor - Driver 6 - M51D Seat Horizontal Motor - Driver (AE8) 7 - K40 Seat Memory Control Module (LTZ or SLT) or K29 Seat Heating Control Module (KA1 without LTZ or SLT) 8 - F113D Seat Belt Anchor Pretensioner - Driver 9 - M55D Seat Rear Vertical Motor (AE8) or M57D Seat Vertical Motor (without AE8) 10 - M50D Seat Front Vertical Motor - Driver 11 - S65D Seat Lumbar Support Switch - Driver 12 - S64D Seat Adjuster Switch - Driver (without AE8) 13 S64D Seat Adjuster Switch - Driver (AE8) 14 - S47D Seat Memory Switch - Driver (LTZ or SLT) 15 - E14B Seat Heating Element - Driver Cushion (KA1) 16 - B88D Seat Belt Switch - Driver Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 587 Power Seat Switch: Diagrams S64D Seat Adjuster Switch - Driver (AE8 or LTZ or SLT) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 588 S64D Seat Adjuster Switch - Driver (without AE8 or LTZ or SLT) S65D Seat Lumbar Support Switch - Driver Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 589 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driver Seat Adjuster Switch Replacement Power Seat Switch: Service and Repair Driver Seat Adjuster Switch Replacement Driver Seat Adjuster Switch Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driver Seat Adjuster Switch Replacement > Page 592 Power Seat Switch: Service and Repair Driver Seat Lumbar Control Switch Replacement Driver Seat Lumbar Control Switch Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Trunk / Liftgate Hazard Sensor > Component Information > Locations Power Trunk / Liftgate Hazard Sensor: Locations Luggage Compartment/Rear of Vehicle Component Views Liftgate Components 1 - B71R Liftgate Object Sensor - Right (TB5) 2 - E18 Rear Defogger Grid 3 - B71L Liftgate Object Sensor - Left (TB5) 4 - M45 Rear Wiper Motor 5 - K39 Liftgate Control Module (TB5) 6 - A23C Liftgate Latch Assembly 7 - B70 Liftgate Close Switch (TB5) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Trunk / Liftgate Hazard Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 596 Power Trunk / Liftgate Hazard Sensor: Diagrams B71L Liftgate Object Sensor - Left (TB5) B71R Liftgate Object Sensor - Right (TB5) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Trunk / Liftgate Hazard Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 597 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Switch > Component Information > Diagrams Seat Heater Switch: Diagrams S32D Seat Heating Switch - Driver (SPO Accessory) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Seat Memory Switch > Component Information > Locations Seat Memory Switch: Locations Passenger Compartment/Roof Component Views Driver Seat Components 1 - M56D Seat Recline Motor - Driver (AE8) 2 - E14A Seat Heating Element - Driver Back (KA1) 3 P22E Video Display - Driver Seatback (UWG) 4 - F106L Side Air Bag - Left 5 - M52D Seat Lumbar Support Horizontal Motor - Driver 6 - M51D Seat Horizontal Motor - Driver (AE8) 7 - K40 Seat Memory Control Module (LTZ or SLT) or K29 Seat Heating Control Module (KA1 without LTZ or SLT) 8 - F113D Seat Belt Anchor Pretensioner - Driver 9 - M55D Seat Rear Vertical Motor (AE8) or M57D Seat Vertical Motor (without AE8) 10 - M50D Seat Front Vertical Motor - Driver 11 - S65D Seat Lumbar Support Switch - Driver 12 - S64D Seat Adjuster Switch - Driver (without AE8) 13 S64D Seat Adjuster Switch - Driver (AE8) 14 - S47D Seat Memory Switch - Driver (LTZ or SLT) 15 - E14B Seat Heating Element - Driver Cushion (KA1) 16 - B88D Seat Belt Switch - Driver Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Seat Memory Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 604 Seat Memory Switch: Diagrams S47D Seat Memory Switch - Driver (LTZ or SLT) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Seat Memory Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 605 Seat Memory Switch: Service and Repair Driver Seat Adjuster Memory Switch Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Switch > Component Information > Locations Sunroof / Moonroof Switch: Locations Passenger Compartment/Roof Component Views Headliner Components 2 - E37R Dome/Reading Lamps - Rear 3 - B77R Radio Volume Compensator Interior Noise Microphone - Rear (VQN) 4 - M69 Sunroof Motor (CF5) 5 - E37M Dome/Reading Lamps - Middle 6 - E37EL Dome/Reading Lamps - Front Overhead Console Left 7 - S12 Dome Lamp Switch 8 - B24 Cellular Phone Microphone (UE1) 9 - S72 Sunroof Switch (CF5) 10 - S45B Liftgate Control Switch Interior (TB5) 11 - S88 Sunroof Tilt Switch (CF5) 12 - S17RF Dome/Reading Lamps Switch - Front Overhead Console Right 13 - S17LF Dome/Reading Lamps Switch - Front Overhead Console Left 14 - E37ER Dome/Reading Lamps - Front Overhead Console Right 15 - E1L Accent Lamp Overhead Console (LT or LTZ or SLE2 or SLT) 16 - P14 Passenger Airbag Disable Indicator 17 - A3R Sunshade - Right Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 609 18 - K77 Remote Control Door Lock Receiver 19 - A10 Inside Rearview Mirror 20 - P7 Display (UVC without UYS or PCJ) 21 - A3L Sunshade - Left 22 - B77F Radio Volume Compensator Interior Noise Microphone - Front (VQN) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 610 Sunroof / Moonroof Switch: Diagrams S72 Sunroof Switch (CF5) S88 Sunroof Tilt Switch (CF5) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 611 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Sunroof Tilt Position Switch Replacement Sunroof / Moonroof Switch: Service and Repair Sunroof Tilt Position Switch Replacement Sunroof Tilt Position Switch Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Sunroof Tilt Position Switch Replacement > Page 614 Sunroof / Moonroof Switch: Service and Repair Sunroof Switch Sunroof Switch Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Trunk / Liftgate Switch > Component Information > Locations Trunk / Liftgate Switch: Locations Luggage Compartment/Rear of Vehicle Component Views Liftgate Components 1 - B71R Liftgate Object Sensor - Right (TB5) 2 - E18 Rear Defogger Grid 3 - B71L Liftgate Object Sensor - Left (TB5) 4 - M45 Rear Wiper Motor 5 - K39 Liftgate Control Module (TB5) 6 - A23C Liftgate Latch Assembly 7 - B70 Liftgate Close Switch (TB5) Rear of Vehicle Components (Chevrolet) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Trunk / Liftgate Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 618 1 - E2LR Side Marker Lamp - Left Rear 2 - E5A Backup Lamp - Left 3 - E6 Center High Mounted Stop Lamp 4 - T4G Cellular Phone, Navigation, and Digital Radio Antenna 5 - M45 Rear Wiper Motor 6 - E5B Backup Lamp - Right 7 - E2RR Side Marker Lamp - Right Rear 8 - E5T Tail/Brake and Turn Signal Lamp - Right 9 - E7R License Plate Lamp - Right 10 - B78H Rear Object Sensor Right Outer (UD7) 11 - B78F Rear Object Sensor - Right Middle (UD7) 12 - S46 Liftgate Handle Switch 13 - B87 Rearview Camera (UVC) 14 - X88 Trailer Connector (V92) 15 - B78E Rear Object Sensor - Left Middle (UD7) 16 - E7L License Plate Lamp - Left 17 - B78G Rear Object Sensor Left Outer (UD7) 18 - E5S Tail/Brake and Turn Signal Lamp - Left Rear of Vehicle Components (GMC) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Trunk / Liftgate Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 619 1 - E5M Tail Lamp - Left Upper 2 - E6 Center High Mounted Stop Lamp 3 - T4G Cellular Phone, Navigation, and Digital Radio Antenna 4 - M45 Rear Wiper Motor 5 - E5N Tail Lamp - Right Upper 6 - E5T Tail/Brake and Turn Signal Lamp - Right 7 - E2RR Side Marker Lamp - Right Rear 8 - E5K Tail Lamp - Right Lower 9 - E5B Backup Lamp - Right 10 - B78H Rear Object Sensor - Right Outer (UD7) 11 - E7R License Plate Lamp - Right 12 - S46 Liftgate Handle Switch 13 - B87 Rearview Camera (UVC) 14 - E7L License Plate Lamp - Left 15 - B78F Rear Object Sensor - Right Middle (UD7) 16 - X88 Trailer Connector (V92) 17 - B78E Rear Object Sensor - Left Middle (UD7) 18 B78G Rear Object Sensor - Left Outer (UD7) 19 - E5A Backup Lamp - Left 20 - E5J Tail Lamp Left Lower 21 - E2LR Side Marker Lamp - Left Rear 22 - E5S Tail/Brake and Turn Signal Lamp Left Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Trunk / Liftgate Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 620 Trunk / Liftgate Switch: Diagrams B70 Liftgate Close Switch (TB5) S45B Liftgate Control Switch - Interior (TB5) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Trunk / Liftgate Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 621 S46 Liftgate Handle Switch Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Trunk / Liftgate Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 622 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Trunk / Liftgate Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Liftgate Close Switch Replacement Trunk / Liftgate Switch: Service and Repair Liftgate Close Switch Replacement Liftgate Close Switch Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Trunk / Liftgate Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Liftgate Close Switch Replacement > Page 625 Trunk / Liftgate Switch: Service and Repair Rear Compartment Lid Release Switch Replacement Rear Compartment Lid Release Switch Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Trunk / Liftgate Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Liftgate Close Switch Replacement > Page 626 Trunk / Liftgate Switch: Service and Repair Liftgate Release Switch Replacement Liftgate Release Switch Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Trunk / Liftgate Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair Trunk / Liftgate Position Sensor: Service and Repair Liftgate Side Upper Sensor Replacement (Equinox) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Booster Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations Brake Booster Vacuum Sensor: Locations Front of Vehicle/Engine Compartment Component Views Engine Compartment Components (Chevrolet) 1 - B20 Brake Fluid Level Switch 2 - B19B Brake Booster Vacuum Sensor 3 - M75 Windshield Wiper Motor 4 - X50A Fuse Block - Underhood 5 - C1 Battery 6 - G24 Windshield Washer Pump 7 - B55 Hood Ajar Switch (BTV) 8 - P12B Horn - Low Note 9 - P12A Horn - High Note 10 - K17 Electronic Brake Control Module Engine Compartment Components (GMC) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Booster Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 634 1 - B20 Brake Fluid Level Switch 2 - B19B Brake Booster Vacuum Sensor 3 - M75 Windshield Wiper Motor 4 - X50A Fuse Block - Underhood 5 - C1 Battery 6 - G24 Windshield Washer Pump 7 - P12B Horn - Low Note 8 - B55 Hood Ajar Switch (BTV) 9 - K17 Electronic Brake Control Module 10 - P12A Horn - High Note Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Booster Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 635 Brake Booster Vacuum Sensor: Diagrams B19B Brake Booster Vacuum Sensor Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Booster Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 636 Brake Booster Vacuum Sensor: Service and Repair Power Brake Booster Vacuum Sensor Replacement (3.0L) Removal Procedure 1. With the engine OFF, apply and release the brake pedal several times until the brake pedal becomes firm to deplete the power vacuum brake booster vacuum reserve. 2. Remove the intake manifold cover. Refer to Intake Manifold Cover Replacement (See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Intake Manifold/Service and Repair/Intake Manifold Cover Replacement). 3. Disconnect the power brake booster vacuum sensor electrical connector. 4. Remove the power brake booster vacuum sensor (1) from the power vacuum brake booster. 5. Release the spring clamp (1) and remove the power brake booster vacuum hose from the power brake booster vacuum sensor (2). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Booster Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 637 Installation Procedure Note: A small amount of denatured alcohol may be used to ease assembly. Do not use soap. 1. Release the tension on the spring clamp (1) and install the power brake booster vacuum hose to the power brake booster vacuum sensor (2). Note: A small amount of denatured alcohol may be used to ease assembly. Do not use soap. 2. Install the power brake booster vacuum sensor (1) to the power vacuum brake booster. 3. Connect the power brake booster vacuum sensor electrical connector. 4. Install the intake manifold cover. Refer to Intake Manifold Cover Replacement (See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Intake Manifold/Service and Repair/Intake Manifold Cover Replacement). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch: Locations Front of Vehicle/Engine Compartment Component Views Engine Compartment Components (Chevrolet) 1 - B20 Brake Fluid Level Switch 2 - B19B Brake Booster Vacuum Sensor 3 - M75 Windshield Wiper Motor 4 - X50A Fuse Block - Underhood 5 - C1 Battery 6 - G24 Windshield Washer Pump 7 - B55 Hood Ajar Switch (BTV) 8 - P12B Horn - Low Note 9 - P12A Horn - High Note 10 - K17 Electronic Brake Control Module Engine Compartment Components (GMC) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 641 1 - B20 Brake Fluid Level Switch 2 - B19B Brake Booster Vacuum Sensor 3 - M75 Windshield Wiper Motor 4 - X50A Fuse Block - Underhood 5 - C1 Battery 6 - G24 Windshield Washer Pump 7 - P12B Horn - Low Note 8 - B55 Hood Ajar Switch (BTV) 9 - K17 Electronic Brake Control Module 10 - P12A Horn - High Note Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 642 Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch: Diagrams B20 Brake Fluid Level Switch Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 643 Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch: Service and Repair Brake Fluid Level Indicator Switch Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the accessory wiring junction block. Refer to Accessory Wiring Junction Block Replacement (See: Maintenance/Fuses and Circuit Breakers/Fuse Block/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Accessory Wiring Junction Block Replacement). 2. Disconnect the brake fluid level indicator switch electrical connector. 3. While compressing the retaining tabs on the inboard side of the brake fluid level indicator switch (1), carefully remove the switch from the brake master cylinder reservoir. Installation Procedure Note: Ensure the retaining tabs on the brake fluid level indicator switch are fully engaged in the master cylinder reservoir. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 644 1. Install the brake fluid level indicator switch (1) by carefully inserting the switch into the master cylinder reservoir. 2. Connect the brake fluid level indicator switch electrical connector. 3. Install the accessory wiring junction block. Refer to Accessory Wiring Junction Block Replacement (See: Maintenance/Fuses and Circuit Breakers/Fuse Block/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Accessory Wiring Junction Block Replacement). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations Parking Brake Warning Switch: Locations Instrument Panel/Center Console Component Views Lower Left of the Instrument Panel Components 1 - B80 Park Brake Switch 2 - T3 Audio Amplifier 3 - K9 Body Control Module 4 - K73 Telematics Communication Interface Control Module (UE1) 5 - B107 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor 6 T4S Wireless Communication Antenna - Bluetooth (UE1 with UPF) 7 - B22 Brake Pedal Position Sensor 8 - X84 Data Link Connector Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 648 Parking Brake Warning Switch: Diagrams B80 Park Brake Switch Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 649 Parking Brake Warning Switch: Service and Repair Parking Brake Indicator Switch Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Traction Control Switch > Component Information > Locations Traction Control Switch: Locations Instrument Panel/Center Console Component Views Right Side of the Instrument Panel Components 1 - F107 Steering Wheel Air Bag 2 - P19H Speaker - Left Front Tweeter 3 - E1K Accent Lamp Right Lower Instrument Panel 4 - X80G Accessory Power Receptacle - Instrument Panel 5 - E8K Instrument Panel Courtesy Lamp - Right (LTZ or SLT) 6 - S112 Fuel Economy Mode Switch 7 E1S Accent Lamp - Console Cupholder Right 8 - S75 Traction Control Switch 9 - X80B Accessory Power Receptacle - Center Console 2 10 - E1J Accent Lamp - Left Lower Instrument Panel Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Traction Control Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 653 Traction Control Switch: Diagrams S75 Traction Control Switch Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Traction Control Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 654 Traction Control Switch: Service and Repair Electronic Traction Control and Vehicle Stability Control Switch Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations Wheel Speed Sensor: Locations Wheels/Vehicle Underbody Component Views Wheel Components 1 - B5RF Wheel Speed Sensor - Right Front 2 - B5RR Wheel Speed Sensor - Right Rear 3 - B5LR Wheel Speed Sensor - Left Rear 4 - B5LF Wheel Speed Sensor - Left Front Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 658 Wheel Speed Sensor: Diagrams B5LF Wheel Speed Sensor - Left Front B5LR Wheel Speed Sensor - Left Rear Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 659 B5RF Wheel Speed Sensor - Right Front Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 660 B5RR Wheel Speed Sensor - Right Rear Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 661 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Wheel Speed Sensor Replacement Wheel Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Front Wheel Speed Sensor Replacement Front Wheel Speed Sensor Replacement Removal Procedure Warning: Refer to Brake Dust Warning (See: Brakes and Traction Control/Service Precautions/Technician Safety Information/Brake Dust Warning) . 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle (See: Maintenance/Vehicle Lifting/Service and Repair). 2. Remove the tire and wheel assembly. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation (See: Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair ). 3. Disconnect the wheel speed sensor electrical connector. 4. Remove the front brake hose bracket nut (1). 5. Release the front wheel speed sensor harness from the retainers on the front brake hose. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Wheel Speed Sensor Replacement > Page 664 6. Remove the wheel speed sensor bolt (1). 7. Remove the wheel speed sensor (1) by pulling the sensor straight upward from the steering knuckle. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Wheel Speed Sensor Replacement > Page 665 1. Install the wheel speed sensor (1) to the steering knuckle. Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener Caution). 2. Install the wheel speed sensor bolt (1) and tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb in). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Wheel Speed Sensor Replacement > Page 666 3. Install the front brake hose bracket nut (1) and tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb in). 4. Connect the wheel speed sensor electrical connector. 5. Install the front wheel speed sensor harness to the retainers on the front brake hose. 6. Install the tire and wheel assembly. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation (See: Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Wheel Speed Sensor Replacement > Page 667 Wheel Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Rear Wheel Speed Sensor Replacement Rear Wheel Speed Sensor Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Yaw Rate Sensor > Component Information > Locations Yaw Rate Sensor: Locations Passenger Compartment/Roof Component Views Left Side of the Passenger Compartment Components 1 - F105R Roof Rail Air Bag - Right 2 - F105L Roof Rail Air Bag - Left 3 - K36 Inflatable Restraint Sensing and Diagnostic Module 4 - B119 Multi-axis Acceleration Sensor Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Yaw Rate Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 671 Yaw Rate Sensor: Diagrams B119 Multi-axis Acceleration Sensor Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Yaw Rate Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 672 Yaw Rate Sensor: Testing and Inspection Vehicle Yaw Sensor Learn Note: The Multi-axis Acceleration Sensor is also known as the Inertia Sensor Module (IMU) in SPS and the Yaw Rate Sensor in the scan tool. The sensor must be configured using SPS before the vehicle yaw sensor learn is performed. The multi-axis acceleration sensor requires a SPS configuration and a yaw rate sensor learn. This is required after certain service procedures are performed. Some of these procedures are as follows: * Electronic brake control module (EBCM) replacement * Multi-axis acceleration sensor replacement * Vehicle yaw sensor replacement * Vehicle yaw sensor with lateral and longitudinal accelerometer sensor replacement The yaw rate sensor learn procedure can be completed with a scan tool using the following steps: 1. Place vehicle on a level surface. 2. Apply the parking brake, or set the transmission in the P position. 3. Install the scan tool to the data link connector. 4. Ignition ON, engine OFF 5. Select Yaw Rate Sensor Reset in the Multi-axis Acceleration Sensor Module Configuration/Reset Functions list. 6. Follow the scan tool directions to complete the calibration procedure. 7. Select Yaw Rate Sensor Learn in the Multi-axis Acceleration Sensor Module Configuration/Reset Functions list. 8. Follow the scan tool directions to complete the calibration procedure. 9. Select Yaw Rate Sensor Learn in the EBCM Configuration/Reset Functions list. 10. Follow the scan tool directions to complete the calibration procedure. 11. Clear any DTCs that may be set. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Yaw Rate Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 673 Yaw Rate Sensor: Service and Repair Vehicle Yaw Sensor Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Service and Repair Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Service and Repair Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor Replacement (LF1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Cruise Control Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Cruise Control Switch Replacement (NK5) Cruise Control Switch: Service and Repair Cruise Control Switch Replacement (NK5) Cruise Control Switch Replacement (NK5) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Cruise Control Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Cruise Control Switch Replacement (NK5) > Page 684 Cruise Control Switch: Service and Repair Cruise Control Switch Replacement (NP5) Cruise Control Switch Replacement (NP5) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Engine > Oil Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Disassembled Views Oil Pressure Sensor: Locations Disassembled Views Disassembled Views Oil Filter Adapter 440 - Oil Filter Adapter 441 - Oil Filter Adapter Gasket 442 - Oil Filter Adapter Bolt 443 - Oil Filter Adapter Bolt - Long 445 - Oil Filter Fitting 449 - Oil Filter 728 - Engine Oil Pressure Sensor 729 Engine Oil Pressure Sensor O-ring Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Engine > Oil Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Disassembled Views > Page 690 Oil Pressure Sensor: Locations Powertrain Component Views Powertrain Component Views Front Engine Components (LAF 1 of 2) 1 - Q38 Throttle Body 2 - G18 High Pressure Fuel Pump 3 - B23F Camshaft Position Sensor Intake 4 - B37 Engine Oil Pressure Switch 5 - B68 Knock Sensor 6 - B26 Crankshaft Position Sensor 7 - M64 Starter Motor 8 - Q2 A/C Compressor Clutch 9 - G13 Generator Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Engine > Oil Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 691 Oil Pressure Sensor: Diagrams B37 Engine Oil Pressure Switch (LAF) B37 Engine Oil Pressure Switch (LF1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Engine > Oil Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 692 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Engine > Oil Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 693 Oil Pressure Sensor: Service and Repair Engine Oil Pressure Sensor and/or Switch Replacement (LF1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Specifications Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC: Specifications Ambient Air Temperature Sensor Resistance Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Specifications > Page 698 Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC: Locations Front of Vehicle/Engine Compartment Component Views Front of the Engine Compartment Components 1 - G10R Cooling Fan Motor - Right (LF1) 2 - G10L Cooling Fan Motor - Left (LF1) 3 - R10 Cooling Fan Resistor (LAF) 4 - G10 Cooling Fan Motor (LAF) 5 - B9 Ambient Air Temperature Sensor Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Specifications > Page 699 Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC: Diagrams B9 Ambient Air Temperature Sensor Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Ambient Air Temperature Sensor Replacement Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC: Service and Repair Ambient Air Temperature Sensor Replacement Ambient Air Temperature Sensor Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Ambient Air Temperature Sensor Replacement > Page 702 Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC: Service and Repair HVAC - Automatic Ambient Air Quality Sensor Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Discharge Air Temperature Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Locations Discharge Air Temperature Sensor / Switch: Locations Instrument Panel/Center Console Component Views Right Side of Instrument Panel - Center Console and HVAC System 1 - B7E Air Temperature Sensor - Duct Right Lower 2 - B7J Air Temperature Sensor - Duct Right Upper 3 - M6 Air Temperature Door Actuator 4 - M8 Blower Motor 5 - K8 Blower Motor Control Module 6 - B39 A/C Evaporator Temperature Sensor 7 - M46 Air Recirculation Door Motor 8 - M37 Mode Door Actuator 9 - X83 Auxiliary Audio Input X1 (without UWG) 10 - X83 Auxiliary Audio Input X2 (without UWG) 11 - X80A Accessory Power Receptacle - Center Console 1 12 - E28 Center Console Compartment Lamp (LT or LTZ or SLE2 or SLT) 13 - X80B Accessory Power Receptacle Center Console 2 14 - X82 Audio/Video Input Adapter (UWG) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Discharge Air Temperature Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 706 Discharge Air Temperature Sensor / Switch: Diagrams B7E Air Temperature Sensor - Duct Right Lower (C68) B7J Air Temperature Sensor - Duct Right Upper (C68) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Discharge Air Temperature Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 707 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Discharge Air Temperature Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Duct Air Temperature Sensor Replacement Upper Discharge Air Temperature Sensor / Switch: Service and Repair Duct Air Temperature Sensor Replacement - Upper Duct Air Temperature Sensor Replacement - Upper Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Discharge Air Temperature Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Duct Air Temperature Sensor Replacement Upper > Page 710 Discharge Air Temperature Sensor / Switch: Service and Repair Duct Air Temperature Sensor Replacement - Lower Duct Air Temperature Sensor Replacement - Lower Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Locations Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch: Locations Instrument Panel/Center Console Component Views Right Side of Instrument Panel - Center Console and HVAC System 1 - B7E Air Temperature Sensor - Duct Right Lower 2 - B7J Air Temperature Sensor - Duct Right Upper 3 - M6 Air Temperature Door Actuator 4 - M8 Blower Motor 5 - K8 Blower Motor Control Module 6 - B39 A/C Evaporator Temperature Sensor 7 - M46 Air Recirculation Door Motor 8 - M37 Mode Door Actuator 9 - X83 Auxiliary Audio Input X1 (without UWG) 10 - X83 Auxiliary Audio Input X2 (without UWG) 11 - X80A Accessory Power Receptacle - Center Console 1 12 - E28 Center Console Compartment Lamp (LT or LTZ or SLE2 or SLT) 13 - X80B Accessory Power Receptacle Center Console 2 14 - X82 Audio/Video Input Adapter (UWG) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 714 Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch: Diagrams B39 A/C Evaporator Temperature Sensor Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 715 Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch: Service and Repair Evaporator Air Temperature Sensor Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > High Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair High Pressure Sensor / Switch: Service and Repair Air Conditioning Refrigerant Pressure Sensor Valve Replacement (LF1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Locations Dimmer Switch: Locations Instrument Panel/Center Console Component Views Left Side of the Instrument Panel Components 1 - P16 Instrument Cluster 2 - B10B Ambient Light/Sunload Sensor (C68) or B10 Ambient Light Sensor (C67) 3 - P19B Speaker - Center Instrument Panel (UZ8) 4 - P17 Info Display Module 5 P19V Speaker - Right Front Tweeter 6 - A20 Radio/HVAC Controls 7 - A11 Radio 8 - S3 Transmission Shift Lever 9 - P2 Transmission Shift Lever Position Indicator 10 - T11 Multimedia Player Interface Module (KTA) 11 - K108 Active Noise Cancellation Module (VQN) 12 - E8J Instrument Panel Courtesy Lamp - Left (LTZ or SLT) 13 - S36 Instrument Panel Dimmer Switch Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 724 Dimmer Switch: Diagrams S36 Instrument Panel Dimmer Switch Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 725 Dimmer Switch: Service and Repair Instrument Panel Lamp Dimmer Switch Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations Parking Brake Warning Switch: Locations Instrument Panel/Center Console Component Views Lower Left of the Instrument Panel Components 1 - B80 Park Brake Switch 2 - T3 Audio Amplifier 3 - K9 Body Control Module 4 - K73 Telematics Communication Interface Control Module (UE1) 5 - B107 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor 6 T4S Wireless Communication Antenna - Bluetooth (UE1 with UPF) 7 - B22 Brake Pedal Position Sensor 8 - X84 Data Link Connector Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 729 Parking Brake Warning Switch: Diagrams B80 Park Brake Switch Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 730 Parking Brake Warning Switch: Service and Repair Parking Brake Indicator Switch Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Ambient Light Sensor > Component Information > Locations Ambient Light Sensor: Locations Instrument Panel/Center Console Component Views Left Side of the Instrument Panel Components 1 - P16 Instrument Cluster 2 - B10B Ambient Light/Sunload Sensor (C68) or B10 Ambient Light Sensor (C67) 3 - P19B Speaker - Center Instrument Panel (UZ8) 4 - P17 Info Display Module 5 P19V Speaker - Right Front Tweeter 6 - A20 Radio/HVAC Controls 7 - A11 Radio 8 - S3 Transmission Shift Lever 9 - P2 Transmission Shift Lever Position Indicator 10 - T11 Multimedia Player Interface Module (KTA) 11 - K108 Active Noise Cancellation Module (VQN) 12 - E8J Instrument Panel Courtesy Lamp - Left (LTZ or SLT) 13 - S36 Instrument Panel Dimmer Switch Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Ambient Light Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 735 Ambient Light Sensor: Diagrams B10 Ambient Light Sensor (C67) B10B Ambient Light/Sunload Sensor (C68) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Ambient Light Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 736 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Dome Lamp Switch > Component Information > Locations Dome Lamp Switch: Locations Passenger Compartment/Roof Component Views Headliner Components 2 - E37R Dome/Reading Lamps - Rear 3 - B77R Radio Volume Compensator Interior Noise Microphone - Rear (VQN) 4 - M69 Sunroof Motor (CF5) 5 - E37M Dome/Reading Lamps - Middle 6 - E37EL Dome/Reading Lamps - Front Overhead Console Left 7 - S12 Dome Lamp Switch 8 - B24 Cellular Phone Microphone (UE1) 9 - S72 Sunroof Switch (CF5) 10 - S45B Liftgate Control Switch Interior (TB5) 11 - S88 Sunroof Tilt Switch (CF5) 12 - S17RF Dome/Reading Lamps Switch - Front Overhead Console Right 13 - S17LF Dome/Reading Lamps Switch - Front Overhead Console Left 14 - E37ER Dome/Reading Lamps - Front Overhead Console Right 15 - E1L Accent Lamp Overhead Console (LT or LTZ or SLE2 or SLT) 16 - P14 Passenger Airbag Disable Indicator 17 - A3R Sunshade - Right Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Dome Lamp Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 740 18 - K77 Remote Control Door Lock Receiver 19 - A10 Inside Rearview Mirror 20 - P7 Display (UVC without UYS or PCJ) 21 - A3L Sunshade - Left 22 - B77F Radio Volume Compensator Interior Noise Microphone - Front (VQN) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Dome Lamp Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 741 Dome Lamp Switch: Diagrams S12 Dome Lamp Switch Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Dimmer Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair Headlamp Dimmer Sensor: Service and Repair Headlamp Automatic Control Ambient Light Sensor Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Locations Headlamp Dimmer Switch: Locations Instrument Panel/Center Console Component Views Left Side of the Instrument Panel Components 1 - P16 Instrument Cluster 2 - B10B Ambient Light/Sunload Sensor (C68) or B10 Ambient Light Sensor (C67) 3 - P19B Speaker - Center Instrument Panel (UZ8) 4 - P17 Info Display Module 5 P19V Speaker - Right Front Tweeter 6 - A20 Radio/HVAC Controls 7 - A11 Radio 8 - S3 Transmission Shift Lever 9 - P2 Transmission Shift Lever Position Indicator 10 - T11 Multimedia Player Interface Module (KTA) 11 - K108 Active Noise Cancellation Module (VQN) 12 - E8J Instrument Panel Courtesy Lamp - Left (LTZ or SLT) 13 - S36 Instrument Panel Dimmer Switch Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Horn Switch > Component Information > Locations Horn Switch: Locations Instrument Panel/Center Console Component Views Steering Wheel Components 1 - S70L Steering Wheel Controls Switch - Left 2 - S33 Horn Switch 3 - S70R Steering Wheel Controls Switch - Right Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Horn Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 751 Horn Switch: Diagrams S33 Horn Switch Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Horn Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 752 Horn Switch: Service and Repair Steering Wheel Horn Contact Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Turn Signal Switch > Component Information > Locations Turn Signal Switch: Locations Instrument Panel/Center Console Component Views Steering Column Components 1 - S78 Turn Signal/Multifunction Switch 2 - X85 Steering Wheel Air Bag Coil 3 - S82 Windshield Wiper/Washer Switch 4 - S39 Ignition Switch 5 - M93 Ignition Cylinder Lock Control Solenoid Actuator 6 - B101 Immobilizer Antenna 7 - B99 Steering Wheel Angle Sensor Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Turn Signal Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 756 Turn Signal Switch: Diagrams S78 Turn Signal/Multifunction Switch Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Turn Signal Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Turn Signal Switch Bracket Replacement Turn Signal Switch: Service and Repair Turn Signal Switch Bracket Replacement Turn Signal Switch Bracket Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Turn Signal Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Turn Signal Switch Bracket Replacement > Page 759 Turn Signal Switch: Service and Repair Turn Signal Multifunction Switch Replacement Turn Signal Multifunction Switch Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Absolute Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair Absolute Pressure Sensor: Service and Repair Throttle Inlet Absolute Pressure Sensor Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Locations Instrument Panel/Center Console Component Views Lower Left of the Instrument Panel Components 1 - B80 Park Brake Switch 2 - T3 Audio Amplifier 3 - K9 Body Control Module 4 - K73 Telematics Communication Interface Control Module (UE1) 5 - B107 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor 6 T4S Wireless Communication Antenna - Bluetooth (UE1 with UPF) 7 - B22 Brake Pedal Position Sensor 8 - X84 Data Link Connector Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 768 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Diagrams B107 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 769 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Service and Repair Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Diagrams B75B Mass Air Flow/Intake Air Temperature Sensor Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 773 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Service and Repair Mass Airflow Sensor with Intake Air Temperature Sensor Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Barometric Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams Barometric Pressure Sensor: Diagrams B17 Barometric Pressure Sensor (LF1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Battery Current Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams Battery Current Sensor: Diagrams B18 Battery Current Sensor Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Disassembled Views Camshaft Position Sensor: Locations Disassembled Views Disassembled Views Camshaft Timing Components 1 - Primary Timing Chain Tensioner Bolt 2 - Left Secondary Timing Chain Shoe Bolt 3 - Right Secondary Timing Chain Tensioner 4 - Right Secondary Timing Chain Tensioner Gasket 5 - Right Secondary Timing Chain Shoe 6 - Secondary Timing Chain 7 - Camshaft Position Actuator Bolt 8 Exhaust Camshaft Position Actuator 9 - Camshaft Position Actuator Thrust Washer 10 - Intake Camshaft Position Actuator 11 - Right Secondary Timing Chain Guide 12 - Left Camshaft Intermediate Drive Shaft Sprocket 13 - Camshaft Intermediate Drive Shaft Sprocket Bolt 14 - Left Secondary Timing Chain Shoe 15 - Left Secondary Timing Chain Tensioner Gasket 16 - Left Secondary Timing Chain Tensioner Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Disassembled Views > Page 784 17 - Left Secondary Timing Chain Guide 18 - Lower Primary Timing Chain Guide 19 - Lower Primary Timing Chain Guide Bolt 20 - Crankshaft Sprocket 21 - Primary Timing Chain 22 - Right Camshaft Intermediate Drive Shaft Sprocket 23 - Upper Primary Timing Chain Guide 24 - Primary Timing Chain Tensioner Gasket 25 - Primary Timing Chain Tensioner Engine Front Cover 1 - Water Pump Pulley Bolt 2 - Water Pump Pulley 3 - Water Pump Assembly 4 - Water Pump Pulley Gasket 5 - Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve Seal 6 - Camshaft Position Sensor Bolt 7 - Camshaft Position Sensor 8 - Camshaft Position Sensor O-ring Seal 9 - Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve Bolt 10 - Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve 11 - Engine Front Cover Gasket 12 - Engine Front Cover Locating Pin Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Disassembled Views > Page 785 13 - Engine Front Cover 14 - Engine Front Cover Bolt 15 - Engine Front Cover Seal 16 Crankshaft Balancer 17 - Crankshaft Balancer Bolt 18 - Engine Front Cover Bolt 19 - Water Pump Bolt Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Disassembled Views > Page 786 Camshaft Position Sensor: Locations Powertrain Component Views Powertrain Component Views Front Engine Components (LAF 1 of 2) 1 - Q38 Throttle Body 2 - G18 High Pressure Fuel Pump 3 - B23F Camshaft Position Sensor Intake 4 - B37 Engine Oil Pressure Switch 5 - B68 Knock Sensor 6 - B26 Crankshaft Position Sensor 7 - M64 Starter Motor 8 - Q2 A/C Compressor Clutch 9 - G13 Generator Left Rear Engine Components (LAF) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Disassembled Views > Page 787 1 - T8D Ignition Coil 4 2 - T8C Ignition Coil 3 3 - T8B Ignition Coil 2 4 - T8A Ignition Coil 1 5 - Q6F Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Intake 6 - Q6E Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Exhaust 7 - B52A Heated Oxygen Sensor 1 8 - B52B Heated Oxygen Sensor 2 9 - B34 Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor 10 - B23E Camshaft Position Sensor - Exhaust 11 - Q12 Evaporative Emission Purge Solenoid Valve Right Rear of the Engine Components (LF1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Disassembled Views > Page 788 1 - B74 Manifold Absolute Pressure Sensor 2 - T8E Ignition Coil 5 3 - T8C Ignition Coil 3 4 - Q12 Evaporative Emission Purge Solenoid Valve 5 - Q38 Throttle Body 6 - B23B Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 1 Intake 7 - B23D Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 2 Intake 8 - Q6D Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Bank 2 Intake 9 - Q6C Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Bank 2 Exhaust 10 - B23C Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 2 Exhaust 11 - Q6B Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Bank 1 Intake 12 - Q6A Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Bank 1 Exhaust 13 - B23A Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 1 Exhaust 14 - B68A Knock Sensor 1 15 - B26 Crankshaft Position Sensor 16 - T8A Ignition Coil 1 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 789 Camshaft Position Sensor: Diagrams B23A Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 1 Exhaust (LF1) B23B Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 1 Intake (LF1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 790 B23C Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 2 Exhaust (LF1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 791 B23D Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 2 Intake (LF1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 792 B23E Camshaft Position Sensor - Exhaust (LAF) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 793 B23F Camshaft Position Sensor - Intake (LAF) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 794 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Camshaft Position Sensor Replacement - Bank 2 (Left Side) Exhaust Camshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair Camshaft Position Sensor Replacement - Bank 2 (Left Side) Exhaust Camshaft Position Sensor Replacement - Bank 2 (Left Side) Exhaust Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Camshaft Position Sensor Replacement - Bank 2 (Left Side) Exhaust > Page 797 Camshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair Camshaft Position Sensor Replacement - Bank 2 (Left Side) Intake Camshaft Position Sensor Replacement - Bank 2 (Left Side) Intake Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Camshaft Position Sensor Replacement - Bank 2 (Left Side) Exhaust > Page 798 Camshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair Camshaft Position Sensor Replacement - Bank 1 (Right Side) Exhaust Camshaft Position Sensor Replacement - Bank 1 (Right Side) Exhaust Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Camshaft Position Sensor Replacement - Bank 2 (Left Side) Exhaust > Page 799 Camshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair Camshaft Position Sensor Replacement - Bank 1 (Right Side) Intake Camshaft Position Sensor Replacement - Bank 1 (Right Side) Intake Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Service and Repair Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Service and Repair Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor Replacement (LF1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Disassembled Views Crankshaft Position Sensor: Locations Disassembled Views Disassembled Views Engine Covers and Component Assemblies (1 of 2) (LF1) 1 - Right Camshaft Cover Assembly 2 - Ignition Coil Bolt 3 - Ignition Coil 4 - Spark Plug 5 - Intake Manifold Assembly 6 - Left Camshaft Cover Assembly 7 - Fuel Rail Noise Shield 8 - Fuel Pump Cover 9 - Fuel Pump Cover Bolt 10 - Engine Flywheel 11 - Engine Flywheel Bolt 12 - Engine Assembly 13 - Oil Pan Assembly 14 - Engine Front Cover Assembly 15 - Crankshaft Balancer 16 Crankshaft Balancer Bolt Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Disassembled Views > Page 807 17 - Crankshaft Position Sensor Heat Shield Bolt - Large 18 - Crankshaft Position Sensor Heat Shield 19 - Crankshaft Position Sensor Heat Shield Bolt - Small Engine Covers and Component Assemblies (2 of 2) (LF1) 1 - Water Outlet Bolt 2 - Water Outlet 3 - Water Outlet O-ring 4 - Water Outlet Seal 5 - Knock Sensor Bolt 6 - Knock Sensor 7 - Engine Coolant Heater Assembly 8 - Crankshaft Position Sensor Bolt 9 - Crankshaft Position Sensor 10 - Crankshaft Position Sensor O-ring 11 - Right Cylinder Head Assembly 12 - Right Cylinder Head Gasket 13 - Lower Fuel Rail Noise Shield 14 - Engine Cooling Thermostat Gasket 15 - Engine Cooling Thermostat 16 - Engine Cooling Thermostat Housing 17 - Engine Cooling Thermostat Bolt - Short 18 - Engine Cooling Thermostat Housing Bolt - Long Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Disassembled Views > Page 808 19 - Fuel Feed Pipe Assembly 20 - Fuel Feed Pipe Assembly Bolt 21 - Fuel Feed Intermediate Pipe Assembly 22 - Fuel Pump Gasket 23 - Fuel Pump O-ring Seal 24 - Fuel Pump 25 - Fuel Pump Bolt 26 - Left Cylinder Head Assembly 27 - Left Cylinder Head Gasket 28 - Oil Level Indicator 29 Oil Level Indicator Handle O-ring 30 - Oil Level Indicator Tube Bolt 31 - Oil Level Indicator Tube 32 - Oil Level Indicator Tube O-ring 33 - Oil Filter Adapter Assembly 34 - Engine Short Block Assembly 35 - Oil Pump Assembly 36 - Timing Drive Assembly Camshaft Cover Assembly 250 - Left Camshaft Cover 251 - Left Camshaft Cover Gasket 252 - Right Camshaft Cover Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Disassembled Views > Page 809 253 - Right Camshaft Cover Gasket 254 - Camshaft Cover Spark Plug Port Seal 254 - Camshaft Cover Spark Plug Port Seal 255 - Camshaft Cover Bolt 255 - Camshaft Cover Bolt 256 - Camshaft Cover Bolt Insulator 256 - Camshaft Cover Bolt Insulator 257 - Ignition Coil Bolt Thread Insert 258 Oil Fill Cap 259 - Oil Fill O-ring 259 - Oil Fill O-ring 260 - Left Camshaft Cover PCV Fitting 261 Right Camshaft Cover PCV Fitting Orifice 262 - Oil Fill Tube 263 - Left Camshaft Cover PCV Fitting O-ring 265 - Left Camshaft Housing Cover Insulator 266 - Right Camshaft Housing Cover Insulator 704 - Ignition Coil 704 - Ignition Coil 705 - Ignition Coil Bolt 705 - Ignition Coil Bolt 719 - Spark Plug 719 - Spark Plug Camshaft Timing Components Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Disassembled Views > Page 810 1 - Primary Timing Chain Tensioner Bolt 2 - Left Secondary Timing Chain Shoe Bolt 3 - Right Secondary Timing Chain Tensioner 4 - Right Secondary Timing Chain Tensioner Gasket 5 - Right Secondary Timing Chain Shoe 6 - Secondary Timing Chain 7 - Camshaft Position Actuator Bolt 8 Exhaust Camshaft Position Actuator 9 - Camshaft Position Actuator Thrust Washer 10 - Intake Camshaft Position Actuator 11 - Right Secondary Timing Chain Guide 12 - Left Camshaft Intermediate Drive Shaft Sprocket 13 - Camshaft Intermediate Drive Shaft Sprocket Bolt 14 - Left Secondary Timing Chain Shoe 15 - Left Secondary Timing Chain Tensioner Gasket 16 - Left Secondary Timing Chain Tensioner 17 - Left Secondary Timing Chain Guide 18 - Lower Primary Timing Chain Guide 19 - Lower Primary Timing Chain Guide Bolt 20 - Crankshaft Sprocket 21 Primary Timing Chain 22 - Right Camshaft Intermediate Drive Shaft Sprocket 23 - Upper Primary Timing Chain Guide 24 - Primary Timing Chain Tensioner Gasket Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Disassembled Views > Page 811 25 - Primary Timing Chain Tensioner Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Disassembled Views > Page 812 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Locations Powertrain Component Views Powertrain Component Views Front Engine Components (LAF 1 of 2) 1 - Q38 Throttle Body 2 - G18 High Pressure Fuel Pump 3 - B23F Camshaft Position Sensor Intake 4 - B37 Engine Oil Pressure Switch 5 - B68 Knock Sensor 6 - B26 Crankshaft Position Sensor 7 - M64 Starter Motor 8 - Q2 A/C Compressor Clutch 9 - G13 Generator Right Rear of the Engine Components (LF1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Disassembled Views > Page 813 1 - B74 Manifold Absolute Pressure Sensor 2 - T8E Ignition Coil 5 3 - T8C Ignition Coil 3 4 - Q12 Evaporative Emission Purge Solenoid Valve 5 - Q38 Throttle Body 6 - B23B Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 1 Intake 7 - B23D Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 2 Intake 8 - Q6D Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Bank 2 Intake 9 - Q6C Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Bank 2 Exhaust 10 - B23C Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 2 Exhaust 11 - Q6B Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Bank 1 Intake 12 - Q6A Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Bank 1 Exhaust 13 - B23A Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 1 Exhaust 14 - B68A Knock Sensor 1 15 - B26 Crankshaft Position Sensor 16 - T8A Ignition Coil 1 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 814 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Diagrams B26 Crankshaft Position Sensor Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 815 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Testing and Inspection Crankshaft Position System Variation Learn Note: The Crankshaft Position System Variation Learn procedure is also required when the following service procedures have been performed, regardless of whether DTC P0315 is set: * An engine replacement * An engine control module (ECM) replacement * A crankshaft balancer replacement * A crankshaft replacement * A crankshaft position sensor replacement * Any engine repairs which disturb the crankshaft to crankshaft position sensor relationship. Note: The ECM monitors certain component signals to determine if all the conditions are met to continue with the crankshaft position System Variation Learn Procedure. 1. Install a scan tool. 2. Monitor the ECM for DTCs with a scan tool. If other DTCs are set, except DTC P0315, refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle ( See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Descriptions/Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle) for the applicable DTC that set. 3. With a scan tool, select the Crankshaft Position System Variation Learn Procedure and perform the following: 1. Block drive wheels. 2. Set parking brake. 3. DO NOT apply brake pedal. 4. Cycle ignition from OFF to ON. 5. Apply and hold brake pedal for the duration of the procedure. 6. Start and idle engine. 7. Turn the air conditioning (A/C) OFF. 8. The vehicle must remain in Park or Neutral. Note: While the learn procedure is in progress, release the throttle immediately when the engine starts to decelerate. The engine control is returned to the operator and the engine responds to throttle position after the learn procedure is complete. 9. Accelerate to wide open throttle (WOT) and release when the fuel cut-off occurs. 4. The scan tool displays Test In Progress. 5. The scan tool displays Learn Successful. 6. Verify DTC P0315 ran and passed This Ignition Cycle. ‹› If DTC P0315 failed or did not run This Ignition Cycle, or another DTC is present, refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle ( See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Descriptions/Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle) for the applicable DTC that set. 7. Once the Learn Procedure has successfully completed, and in order to store the crankshaft position system variation values in the ECM, turn OFF the ignition and verify all vehicle systems are OFF. This may take up to 2 minutes. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 816 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair Crankshaft Position Sensor Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Locations Fuel Level Sensor: Locations Wheels/Vehicle Underbody Component Views Fuel System Components 1 - B46B Fuel Level Sensor - Secondary 2 - B150 Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor 3 - Q13 Evaporative Emission Vent Solenoid Valve 4 - B46A Fuel Level Sensor - Primary 5 - G12 Fuel Pump 6 - B47 Fuel Pressure Sensor Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Fuel Level Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions Electrical Schematic Symbols Electrical Schematic Symbols Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 822 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 823 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 824 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 825 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 826 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 827 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 828 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 829 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 830 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 831 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 832 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 833 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 834 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 835 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 836 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 837 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 838 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 839 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 840 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 841 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 842 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 843 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 844 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 845 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 846 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 847 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 848 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 849 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 850 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 851 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 852 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 853 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 854 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 855 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 856 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 857 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 858 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 859 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 860 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 861 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 862 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 863 General Electrical Diagnosis General Electrical Diagnosis Basic Knowledge Required Without a basic knowledge of electricity, it will be difficult to use the diagnostic procedures contained in the service manual. You should understand the basic theory of electricity, and know the meaning of voltage (V), current (A), and resistance (Ohms ). You should also be able to read and understand a wiring diagram, as well as understand what happens in a circuit with an open or a shorted wire. Vehicle Zoning Strategy Vehicle Zoning Strategy All grounds, in-line connectors, and splices have identifying numbers that correspond to where they are located in the vehicle. The following table explains the numbering system. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 864 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 865 Fuel Level Sensor: Diagnostic Aids Arrows and Symbols Arrows and Symbols This service manual uses various symbols in order to describe different service operations. 1 - Front of Vehicle 2 - View Detail 2 - View Detail 3 - Ambient Air Mixed with Another Gas or Indicate Temperature Change 4 - Motion or Direction 5 - View Angle 6 - Dimension (1:2) 7 Ambient/Clean Air Flow or Cool Air Flow 8 - Lubrication Point - Oil or Fluid 9 - Task Related 10 Sectioning (1:3) 11 - Gas Other Than Ambient Air or Hot Air Flow 12 - Lubrication Point - Grease or Jelly 13 - Multidirectional Arrow Decimal and Metric Equivalents Decimal and Metric Equivalents Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 866 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 867 Checking Aftermarket Accessories Checking Aftermarket Accessories Warning: Refer to SIR Warning (See: Restraint Systems/Service Precautions/SIR Warning). Caution: The OBD II symbol is used on the circuit diagrams in order to alert the technician that the circuit is essential for proper OBD II emission control circuit operation. Any circuit which fails and causes the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) to turn ON, or causes emissions-related component damage, is identified as an OBD II circuit. Do not connect aftermarket accessories into the following circuits: * SIR circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the SIR symbol. * OBD II circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the OBD II symbol. Always check for aftermarket accessories (non-OEM) as the first step in diagnosing electrical problems. If the vehicle is so equipped, disconnect the system to verify that these add-on accessories are not the cause of the problems. Possible causes of vehicle problems related to aftermarket accessories include: * Power feeds connected to points other than the battery * Antenna location * Transceiver wiring located too close to vehicle electronic modules or wiring * Poor shielding or poor connectors on antenna feed line * Check for recent service bulletins detailing installation guidelines for aftermarket accessories. Circuit Testing Circuit Testing The Circuit Testing section contains the following diagnostic testing information. Using this information along with the diagnostic procedures will identify the cause of the electrical malfunction. * Using Connector Test Adapters (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Using Connector Test Adapters) * Probing Electrical Connectors (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Probing Electrical Connectors) * Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 868 Procedures/Circuit Testing/Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter) * Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp) * Using Fused Jumper Wires (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Using Fused Jumper Wires) * Measuring Voltage (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Measuring Voltage) * Measuring Voltage Drop (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Measuring Voltage Drop) * Measuring Frequency (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Measuring Frequency) * Testing Ground and Low Reference Circuits (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Testing Ground and Low Reference Circuits) * Testing for Continuity (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Continuity) * Testing for Short to Ground (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Short to Ground) * Testing for a Short to Voltage (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for a Short to Voltage) * Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections) * Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions) * Testing for Electrical Intermittents (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Electrical Intermittents) * Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure) * Circuit Protection - Fuses (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Circuit Protection - Fuses) * Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers) * Circuit Protection - Fusible Links (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Circuit Protection - Fusible Links) Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp Special Tools EL-35616-200 - Test Light - Probe Kit For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test Probe Caution). A test lamp can simply and quickly test a low impedance circuit for voltage. A Digital Multimeter (DMM) should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present if the impedance is low enough, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. In other words, if there is not enough current, the test lamp will not illuminate even though voltage is present. The EL-35616-200 - kit is Micro-Pack compatible and comprised of a 12-volt light bulb with an attached pair of leads. To properly operate this tool use the following procedures. When testing for voltage: 1. Attach one lead to ground. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is voltage at the point being tested. When testing for ground: 1. Attach one lead to battery positive voltage. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where ground should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is ground at the point being tested. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 869 Testing for a Short to Voltage Testing for a Short to Voltage Special Tools EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM) For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test Probe Caution). The following procedure tests for a short to voltage in a circuit. 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Set the rotary dial of the Digital Multimeter (DMM) to the V (DC) position. 4. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. Turn ON the ignition and operate all accessories. 7. If the voltage measured is greater than 1 V, there is a short to voltage in the circuit. Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions Special Tools J-25070 - Heat Gun For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Many intermittent open or shorted circuits are affected by harness/connector movement that is caused by vibration, engine torque, bumps/rough pavement, etc. In order to duplicate the customer's concern, it may be necessary to manipulate the wiring harness if the malfunction appears to be vibration related. Manipulation of a circuit can consist of a wide variety of actions, including: * Wiggling the harness * Disconnecting a connector and reconnecting * Stressing the mechanical connection of a connector * Pulling on the harness or wire in order to identify a separation/break inside the insulation * Relocating a harness or wires All these actions should be performed with some goal in mind. For instance, with a scan tool connected, wiggling the wires may uncover a faulty input to the control module. The snapshot option would be appropriate here. Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure). Another option is, with the component commanded ON and OFF by the scan tool, move related connectors and wiring and observe the component operation. With the engine running, move related connectors and wiring while monitoring engine operation. If harness or connector movement affects the data displayed, component/system operation, or engine operation, inspect and repair the harness/connections as necessary. You may need to load the vehicle in order to duplicate the concern. This may require the use of weights, floor jacks, jackstands, frame machines, etc. In these cases you are attempting to duplicate the concern by manipulating the suspension or frame. This method is useful in finding harnesses that are too short and their connectors pull apart enough to cause a poor connection. A DMM set to Peak Min/Max mode and connected to the suspect circuit while testing can yield desirable results. Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Electrical Intermittents). Certainly, using the senses of sight, smell, and hearing while manipulating the circuit can provide good results as well. There may be instances where circuit manipulation alone will not meet the required criteria for the fault condition to appear. In such cases it may be necessary to expose the suspect circuit to other conditions while manipulating the harness. Such conditions would include high moisture conditions, along with exceptionally high or low temperatures. The following discusses how to expose the circuit to these kinds of conditions. Salt Water Spray Some compounds possess the ability to conduct electricity when dissolved in water such as ordinary salt. By mixing table salt with water in sufficient Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 870 quantities, you can enhance the conductive properties of water so that any circuit which may be sensitive to moisture will more readily fail when liberally sprayed with this mixture. Mixing 0.35L (12 oz) of water with approximately 1 tablespoon of salt will yield a salt solution of 5 percent. Fill a normal spray bottle with this mixture. This mixture is sufficient to enhance the water's own conductivity. This may cause the circuit to fail more easily when sprayed. Once the mixture is completed, spray the suspect area liberally with the solution. Then, while monitoring either a scan tool or DMM, manipulate the harness as discussed previously. High Temperature Conditions If the complaint tends to be heat related, you can simulate the condition using the J-25070 - heat gun. Using the heat gun, you can heat up the suspected area or component. Manipulate the harnesses under high temperature conditions while monitoring the scan tool or DMM to locate the fault condition. The high temperature condition may be achieved simply by test driving the vehicle at normal operating temperature. If a heat gun is unavailable, consider this option to enhance your diagnosis. This option does not allow for the same control, however. Low Temperature Conditions Depending on the nature of the fault condition, placing a fan in front of the vehicle while the vehicle is in the shade can have the desired effect. If this is unsuccessful, use local cooling treatments such as ice or a venturi type nozzle (one that provides hot or cold air). This type of tool is capable of producing air stream temperatures down to -18°C (0°F) from one end and +71°C (160°F) from the other. This is ideally suited for localized cooling needs. Once the vehicle, component, or harness has been sufficiently cooled, manipulate the harness or components in an effort to duplicate the concern. Duplicating Failure Conditions * If none of the previous tests are successful, attempt to duplicate and/or capture the failure conditions. * Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, where applicable, contains the conditions that were present when the DTC set. 1. Review and record Freeze Frame/Failure Records data. 2. Clear the DTCs using the scan tool. 3. Turn the key to OFF and wait 15 seconds. 4. Operate the vehicle under the same conditions that were noted in Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, as closely as possible. The vehicle must also be operating within the Conditions for Running the DTC. Refer to Conditions for Running the DTC in the supporting text if a DTC is being diagnosed. 5. Monitor DTC Status for the DTC being tested. The scan tool will indicate Ran, when the enabling conditions have been satisfied long enough for the DTC to run. The scan tool will also indicate whether the DTC passed or failed. * An alternate method is to drive the vehicle with the DMM connected to a suspected circuit. An abnormal reading on the DMM when the concern occurs, may help you locate the concern. Measuring Frequency Measuring Frequency Special Tools EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM) For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test Probe Caution). The following procedure determines the frequency of a signal. Note: Connecting the Digital Multimeter (DMM) to the circuit before pressing the Hz button will allow the DMM to autorange to an appropriate range. 1. Apply power to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (AC) position. 3. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 871 5. Press the Hz button on the DMM. 6. The DMM will display the frequency measured. Measuring Voltage Measuring Voltage Special Tools EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM) For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test Probe Caution). The following procedure measures the voltage at a selected point in a circuit. 1. Disconnect the electrical harness connector for the circuit being tested, if necessary. 2. Enable the circuit and/or system being tested. Use the following methods: * Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. * Turn ON the engine. * Turn ON the circuit and/or system with a scan tool in Output Controls. * Turn ON the switch for the circuit and/or system being tested. 3. Select the V (AC) or V (DC) position on the Digital Multimeter (DMM). 4. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the point of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. The DMM displays the voltage measured at that point. Measuring Voltage Drop Measuring Voltage Drop Special Tools EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM) For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test Probe Caution). The following procedure determines the difference in voltage potential between 2 points. 1. Set the rotary dial of the Digital Multimeter (DMM) to the V (DC) position. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 872 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to one point of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to the other point of the circuit. 4. Operate the circuit. 5. The DMM displays the difference in voltage between the 2 points. Probing Electrical Connectors Probing Electrical Connectors Note: Always be sure to reinstall the connector position assurance (CPA) and terminal position assurance (TPA) when reconnecting connectors or replacing terminals. Front probe Disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the mating side (front) of the connector. Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test Probe Caution). Note: When probing female 0.64 terminals, it is important to use the correct adapter. There have been some revisions to the test adapter for 0.64 terminals. The proper adapter for 0.64 terminals is the EL-35616-64B which has a gold terminal and a black wire between the base and tip. Failure to use the proper test adapter may result in damage to the terminal being tested and improper diagnosis. Note: The proper adapter for probing the terminals for fuses, relays, or diodes in an electrical center is EL-35616-35. Using any other tool or adapter may damage the terminal being tested. Refer to the following table as a guide in selecting the correct test adapter for front probing connectors: Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 873 Backprobe Note: * Backprobe connector terminals only when specifically required in diagnostic procedures. * Do not backprobe a sealed (Weather Pack(R)) connector, less than a 280 series Metri-Pack connector, a Micro-Pack connector, or a flat wire (dock and lock) connector. * Backprobing can be a source of damage to connector terminals. Use care in order to avoid deforming the terminal, either by forcing the test probe too far into the cavity or by using too large of a test probe. * After backprobing any connector, inspect for terminal damage. If terminal damage is suspected, test for proper terminal contact. Do not disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the harness side (back) of the connector. Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure Using Snapshots in Global Diagnostic System (GDS) Overview Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 874 A snapshot is a recording of what a control module on the vehicle was receiving for information while the snapshot is being made. A snapshot may be used to analyze the data during the time a vehicle condition is current. This allows you to concentrate on making the condition occur, rather than trying to view all the data in anticipation of the fault. To record a snapshot in GDS, select, Record Snapshot, from the options at the top right portion of any of the various pages that allow snapshots to be taken (e.g. Data Display, Control Functions, etc.). When you are finished recording, select, Stop Snapshot recording. The snapshot will now be available for replay. Snapshot Replay The Snapshot Replay function allows reviews of previously recorded vehicle snapshot data. This information can be used in analysis of vehicle problems and detection of trigger error conditions. The graph function can be used to compare parameters to see if a component is functioning properly. Recorded snapshots can be selected for viewing by the following three methods: * Selecting a snapshot file from the Vehicle Home Page and clicking on the Review selection. * Double clicking on the selected snapshot from the Vehicle Home Page. * Entering the Tools selection from the Menu selection and selecting Snapshot replay. Next, open the Snapshot Manager. Double click on the snapshot file you wish to view or click on the Load Snapshot selection and select a snapshot file. Regardless of selection method, a File Loaded pop-up window will be displayed from the Snapshot Replay screen. Select OK from the pop-up window. Snapshot Play Functions There are several snapshot play functions that are used to replay recorded snapshots * The Play function is used to play the snapshot forward by clicking on this selection. A marker will move across the screen when this selection is used. All selections in this area turn grey when they are active. * The Pause function is used to pause play of the snapshot. When this selection is clicked a second time the snapshot will start playing where it left off. * The Stop function is used to stop playing the snapshot. The snapshot will start from the beginning, if Play is selected after using the Stop function. Time Control Time control is used to control the snapshot replay. This function allows selection of a specific time frame, display of different views, and control of display speed. The following functions can be selected directly under Time Control. * The Bookmark selection allows you to add a specific comment in the current display and return to this point in the future. When this option is selected, a pop-up window is displayed. Enter a bookmark name and select OK. * The Note Pad can be selected to add comments to the snapshot replay file at the current point of time. When this option is selected, a pop-up window is displayed. Enter a comment for the snapshot file and select OK. * The Load Snapshot (blue folder) opens a snapshot file and makes it ready for further analysis. This function is also available by clicking on an available snapshot file from the Snapshot Manager. * The Down Arrow displays all Time Control options when selected. Individual options can also be selected by clicking on the item you want. * The Snapshot Display Speed can be controlled by selecting this option. Slow speeds of 1/8X, 1/4X, and 1/2X can be selected. The real time speed can also be selected at 1. Faster speeds of 2X, 4X, and 8X can also be obtained by using this selection. View Selections Each View Selection provides a different way of displaying vehicle data for analysis. The following functions can be selected under Available Views: Note: The parameter name will be shown in the original language used for capture if no translation is available for the name. * Parameter List View - Displays incoming information from the snapshot file. The current value of the parameters is displayed on the screen. * Log View - Contains all the information from the snapshot file. All parameter values are listed in the order they were recorded. Specific parameters can be added or removed from a watchlist by clicking on the appropriate item. * State View - Shows the values of all parameters in a specific time frame. These values can be used for comparison with the trigger view. * Trigger View - Displays all system and user defined triggers. This function can be used when there is a combination of factors involved in a diagnostic problem. When a Trigger condition is met a caution triangle will be displayed on the screen. Triggers: * Load Triggers - Allows you to load a file containing trigger definitions. * Save Triggers - Allows you to save the trigger to your computer's hard drive. * Remove Trigger - Allows you to remove the current trigger. It will no longer be present. * Edit Trigger - Displays a pop-up window where you can modify the limits and parameters contained within a trigger. * Adds Trigger - Displays a pop-up window to configure a trigger. * DTC View - After the Play function is selected and this option is selected this function opens the list of recorded DTCs. * Line Graph View - Displays data that can be visualized against the time-axis. From this view, specific parameters can be selected for graphing by Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 875 checking the box under Selected. At the bottom of the graph there are four functions Zoom In (increase size), Zoom Out (decrease size), Bookmarks, and Pause Scrolling. Each of these functions can be accessed by clicking on them. Testing for Continuity Testing for Continuity Special Tools EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM) For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test Probe Caution). The following procedures verify good continuity in a circuit. With a Digital Multimeter (DMM) 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the Ohms position. 2. Disconnect the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 3. Disconnect the load. 4. Press the MIN MAX button on the DMM. 5. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 6. Connect the other lead of the DMM to the other end of the circuit. 7. If the DMM displays low or no resistance, the circuit has good continuity. With a Test Lamp Note: Only use the test lamp procedure on low impedance power and ground circuits. 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect one lead of the test lamp to one end of the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 5. Connect the other end of the circuit to ground. 6. If the test lamp illuminates (full intensity), then the circuit has good continuity. Testing for Electrical Intermittents Testing for Electrical Intermittents Special Tools EL-39200 Digital Multimeter For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Perform the following procedures while wiggling the harness from side to side. Continue this at convenient points (about 6 inches apart) while watching the test equipment. * Testing for Short to Ground (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Short to Ground) * Testing for Continuity (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Continuity) * Testing for a Short to Voltage (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for a Short to Voltage) If the fault is not identified, perform the procedure below using the MIN MAX feature on the EL-39200 DMM. This feature allows you to manipulate the circuit without having to watch the EL-39200. The EL-39200 will generate an audible tone when a change is detected. Note: The EL-39200 must be used in order to perform the following procedure since the EL-39200 can monitor current, resistance or voltage while recording the minimum (MIN), and maximum (MAX) values measured. 1. Connect the EL-39200 to both sides of a suspected connector (still connected), or from one end of a suspected circuit to the other. Refer to Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 876 Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter) for information on connecting the EL-39200 to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the EL-39200 to the V (AC) or V (DC) position. 3. Press the range button of the EL-39200 in order to select the desired voltage range. 4. Press the MIN MAX button of the EL-39200. The EL-39200 displays 100 ms RECORD and emits an audible tone (beep). Note: The 100 ms RECORD mode is the length of time an input must stay at a new value in order to record the full change. 5. Simulate the condition that is potentially causing the intermittent connection, either by wiggling the connections or the wiring, test driving, or performing other operations. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions). 6. Listen for the audible Min Max Alert which indicates that a new minimum or maximum value has been recorded. 7. Press the MIN MAX button once in order to display the MAX value and note the value. 8. Press the MIN MAX button again in order to display the MIN value and note the value. 9. Determine the difference between the MIN and MAX values. * If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is 1 V or greater an intermittent open or high resistance condition exists. Repair the condition as necessary. * If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is less than 1 V, an intermittent open or high resistance condition does not exist. Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections Special Tools EL-35616 Terminal Test Probe Kit For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). When the condition is not currently present, but is indicated in DTC history, the cause may be intermittent. An intermittent may also be the cause when there is a customer complaint, but the symptom cannot be duplicated. Refer to the Symptom Table of the system that is suspect of causing the condition before trying to locate an intermittent condition. Most intermittent conditions are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. Inspect for the following items: * Wiring broken inside the insulation * Poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector * Poor terminal to wire connection-Some conditions which fall under this description are poor crimps, poor solder joints, crimping over the wire insulation rather than the wire itself, and corrosion in the wire to terminal contact area, etc. * Pierced or damaged insulation can allow moisture to enter the wiring causing corrosion. The conductor can corrode inside the insulation, with little visible evidence. Look for swollen and stiff sections of wire in the suspect circuits. * Wiring which has been pinched, cut, or its insulation rubbed through may cause an intermittent open or short as the bare area touches other wiring or parts of the vehicle. * Wiring that comes in contact with hot or exhaust components * Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions) in order to duplicate the conditions required, in order to verify the customer concern. * Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Electrical Intermittents) for test procedures to detect intermittent open, high resistance, short to ground, and short to voltage conditions. * Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure) for advanced intermittent diagnosis and Vehicle Data Recorder operation. Testing for Terminal Fretting Some intermittent conditions can be caused by wire terminal fretting corrosion. Fretting corrosion is a build-up of insulating, oxidized wear debris that can form when there is a small motion between electrical contacts. The oxidized wear debris can pile up enough at the electrical contact spots that the electrical resistance across the connection increases. Movement between the contacting surfaces as small as 10 to 100 microns can cause fretting. To put this in perspective, a sheet of paper is about 100 microns thick, so fretting motion is small and hard to see. Vibration and thermal expansion/contraction are the main sources that create fretting motion. Since vehicles vibrate and can experience large temperature swings, they are a good source for fretting motion. Tin, copper, nickel, and iron surfaces are all susceptible to fretting corrosion. Fretting corrosion can be difficult to see but it looks like small, dark smudges on the terminals contact surface. To correct a fretting condition disconnect the suspect connector and add Nyogel lubricant 760G (dielectric grease) to both sides of the connector Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 877 terminals. Then reconnect the connector and wipe away any excess lubricant. This will correct the additional terminal contact resistance due to the terminal fretting corrosion. Testing for Proper Terminal Contact It is important to test terminal contact at the component and any inline connectors before replacing a suspect component. Mating terminals must be inspected to ensure good terminal contact. A poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector may be the result of contamination or deformation. Contamination may be caused by the connector halves being improperly connected. A missing or damaged connector seal, damage to the connector itself, or exposing the terminals to moisture and dirt can also cause contamination. Contamination, usually in the underhood or underbody connectors, leads to terminal corrosion, causing an open circuit or intermittently open circuit. Deformation is caused by probing the mating side of a connector terminal without the proper adapter. Always use the EL-35616 when probing connectors. Other causes of terminal deformation are improperly joining the connector halves, or repeatedly separating and joining the connector halves. Deformation, usually to the female terminal contact tang, can result in poor terminal contact causing an open or intermittently open circuit. Testing for Proper Terminal Contact in Bussed Electrical Centers It is very important to use the correct test adapter when testing for proper terminal contact of fuses and relays in a bussed electrical center. Use EL-35616-35 to test for proper terminal contact. Failure to use EL-35616-35 can result in improper diagnosis of the bussed electrical center. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact: 1. Separate the connector halves. 2. Visually inspect the connector halves for contamination. Contamination may result in a white or green build-up within the connector body or between terminals. This causes high terminal resistance, intermittent contact, or an open circuit. An underhood or underbody connector that shows signs of contamination should be replaced in its entirety: terminals, seals, and connector body. 3. Using an equivalent male terminal / terminated lead, verify that the retention force is significantly different between a known good terminal and the suspect terminal. Replace the female terminal in question. Flat Wire (Dock and Lock) Connectors There are no serviceable parts for flat wire (dock and lock) connectors on the harness side or the component side. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact: 1. Remove the component in question. 2. Visually inspect each side of the connector for signs of contamination. Avoid touching either side of the connector as oil from your skin may be a source of contamination as well. 3. Visually inspect the terminal bearing surfaces of the flat wire circuits for splits, cracks, or other imperfections that could cause poor terminal contact. Visually inspect the component side connector to ensure that all of the terminals are uniform and free of damage or deformation. 4. Insert the appropriate adapter from the on the flat wire harness connector in order to test the circuit in question. Control Module/Component Voltage and Grounds Poor voltage or ground connections can cause widely varying symptoms. * Test all control module voltage supply circuits. Many vehicles have multiple circuits supplying voltage to a control module. Other components in the system may have separate voltage supply circuits that may also need to be tested. Inspect connections at the module/component connectors, fuses, and any intermediate connections between the voltage source and the module/component. A test lamp or a DMM may indicate that voltage is present, but neither tests the ability of the circuit to carry sufficient current. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. Refer to Circuit Testing (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Circuit Testing) and Power Distribution Schematics (See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Starting and Charging/Power and Ground Distribution/System Diagram/Power Distribution Schematics). * Test all control module ground and system ground circuits. The control module may have multiple ground circuits. Other components in the system may have separate grounds that may also need to be tested. Inspect grounds for clean and tight connections at the grounding point. Inspect the connections at the component and in splice packs, where applicable. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. Refer to Circuit Testing (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Circuit Testing) and Ground Distribution Schematics (See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Starting and Charging/Power and Ground Distribution/System Diagram/Ground Distribution Schematics). Temperature Sensitivity * An intermittent condition may occur when a component/connection reaches normal operating temperature. The condition may occur only when the component/connection is cold, or only when the component/connection is hot. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 878 * Freeze Frame, Failure Records, Snapshot, or Vehicle Data Recorder data may help with this type of intermittent condition, where applicable. * If the intermittent is related to heat, review the data for a relationship with the following: - High ambient temperatures - Underhood/engine generated heat - Circuit generated heat due to a poor connection, or high electrical load - Higher than normal load conditions, towing, etc. * If the intermittent is related to cold, review the data for the following: - Low ambient temperatures-In extremely low temperatures, ice may form in a connection or component. Inspect for water intrusion. - The condition only occurs on a cold start. - The condition goes away when the vehicle warms up. * Information from the customer may help to determine if the trouble follows a pattern that is temperature related. * If temperature is suspected of causing an intermittent fault condition, attempt to duplicate the condition. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions) in order to duplicate the conditions required. Electromagnetic Interference and Electrical Noise Some electrical components/circuits are sensitive to electromagnetic interference or other types of electrical noise. Inspect for the following conditions: * A misrouted harness that is too close to high voltage/high current devices such as secondary ignition components, motors, generator etc.-These components may induce electrical noise on a circuit that could interfere with normal circuit operation. * Electrical system interference caused by a malfunctioning relay, or a control module driven solenoid or switch-These conditions can cause a sharp electrical surge. Normally, the condition will occur when the malfunctioning component is operating. * Improper installation of non-factory or aftermarket add on accessories such as lights, 2-way radios, amplifiers, electric motors, remote starters, alarm systems, cell phones, etc.-These accessories may lead to interference while in use, but do not fail when the accessories are not in use. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Checking Aftermarket Accessories). * Test for an open diode across the A/C compressor clutch and for other open diodes. Some relays may contain a clamping diode. * The generator may be allowing AC noise into the electrical system. Incorrect Control Module * There are only a few situations where reprogramming a control module is appropriate: - A new service control module is installed. - A control module from another vehicle is installed. - Revised software/calibration files have been released for this vehicle. Note: DO NOT re-program the control module with the SAME software/calibration files that are already present in the control module. This is not an effective repair for any type of concern. * Verify that the control module contains the correct software/calibration. If incorrect programming is found, reprogram the control module with the most current software/calibration. Refer to Control Module References (See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning) for replacement, setup, and programming. Testing for Short to Ground Testing for Short to Ground Special Tools * EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM) * EL 35616-200 - Test Light-Probe Kit For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test Probe Caution). The following procedures test for a short to ground in a circuit. With a Digital Multimeter (DMM) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 879 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the Ohms position. 4. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the other lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. If the DMM does NOT display infinite resistance (OL), there is a short to ground in the circuit. With a Test Lamp 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect one lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to one end of the circuit to be tested. 5. If the test lamp illuminates, there is a short to ground in the circuit. Fuse Powering Several Loads 1. Review the system schematic and locate the fuse that is open. 2. Open the first connector or switch leading from the fuse to each load. 3. Connect a DMM across the fuse terminals (be sure that the fuse is powered). * When the DMM displays voltage the short is in the wiring leading to the first connector or switch. * If the DMM does not display voltage refer to the next step. 4. Close each connector or switch until the DMM displays voltage in order to find which circuit is shorted. Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter Special Tools EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM) For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test Probe Caution). Digital Multimeter (DMM) Basic Requirements Service information is validated using digital multimeters that meet or exceed the following requirements. Using a multimeter that does not meet these basic requirements may give inaccurate readings which could lead to an incorrect diagnosis. Display and Settings 1. Four digits displayed 2. Voltage, amperage, resistance, frequency, diode test settings, and min-max function 3. Display positive and negative values Voltage 1. Have at least 10 Mohm input impedance 2. Test a DC voltage range of 0.1-1000 V. 3. Test an AC voltage range of 0.1-1000 V. Amperage 1. Test a DC amperage range of 0.1µA-10 A. 2. Test an AC amperage range of 0.1µA-10 A. Resistance Test a resistance range of 0.1 ohm-40 Mohm and displays infinite for a value greater than 40 Mohm (O.L. (Over-load)) Frequency Test for a frequency range of 0.5 HZ-199 K HZ Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 880 Diode Test 1. Apply at least 1 mA when performing the diode bias test 2. Display the break over voltage drop (0-3 V) of a forward biased diode 3. Display infinite (O.L. (Over-load)) when a diode is reverse biased Min-Max Readings 1. Can update at a 1 ms sample rate 2. Saves and displays minimum and maximum values Note: Circuits which include any solid state control modules, such as the engine control module (ECM), should only be tested with a 10 MOhms or higher impedance digital multimeter such as the EL-39200. The EL-39200 instruction manual is a good source of information and should be read thoroughly upon receipt of the DMM as well as kept on hand for future reference. A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present if the impedance is low enough, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. In other words, if there is not enough current, the test lamp will not illuminate even though voltage is present. The ohmmeter function on a DMM shows how much resistance exists between 2 points along a circuit. Low resistance in a circuit means good continuity. Note: Disconnect the power feed from the suspect circuit when measuring resistance with a DMM. This prevents incorrect readings. DMMs apply such a small voltage to measure resistance that the presence of voltages can upset a resistance reading. Diodes and solid state components in a circuit can cause a DMM to display a false reading. To find out if a component is affecting a measurement take a reading once, then reverse the leads and take a second reading. If the readings differ the solid state component is affecting the measurement. Following are examples of the various methods of connecting the DMM to the circuit to be tested: * Probe both ends of the connector and either hold the leads in place while manipulating the connector or tape the leads to the harness for continuous monitoring while you perform other operations or test driving. Refer to Probing Electrical Connectors (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Probing Electrical Connectors). * Disconnect the harness at both ends of the suspected circuit where it connects either to a component or to other harnesses. * If the system that is being diagnosed has a specified pinout or breakout box, it may be used in order to simplify connecting the DMM to the circuit or for testing multiple circuits quickly. Using Connector Test Adapters Using Connector Test Adapters Special Tools EL 35616 - Terminal Test Probe Kit For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Caution: Do not insert test equipment probes (DMM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the EL-38125-580 GM Approved Terminal Release Tool Kit in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the EL-38125-580 GM Approved Terminal Release Tool Kit , ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the EL-38125-580 GM Approved Terminal Release Tool Kit label on the inside of the EL-38125-580 GM Approved Terminal Release Tool Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Using Fused Jumper Wires Using Fused Jumper Wires Special Tools J 36169-A Fused Jumper Wire Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 881 Note: A fused jumper may not protect solid state components from being damaged. The J 36169-A includes small clamp connectors that provide adaptation to most connectors without damage. This fused jumper wire is supplied with a 20-A fuse which may not be suitable for some circuits. Do not use a fuse with a higher rating than the fuse that protects the circuit being tested. AFL/EPC Connectors AFL/EPC Connectors Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. 1. For connectors with a bolt in the dress cover, turn the bolt counterclockwise to remove the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 882 2. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the top of the wire dress cover. Slide the CPA forward. 3. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 883 View showing depressing of the lever lock release tab. View of connector in released position. 4. Disconnect the connector from the component. 5. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the dress cover. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs and remove the dress cover. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 884 6. Release the rear lower half of the wiredress cover. 7. Release the tabs that are holding the wiredress cover to the connector body. 8. Remove the nose piece by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the slots on both ends of the connector body. Gently pry the nose piece out of the connector. J 38125-216 can also be used to remove the nose piece. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 885 9. Use the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by lifting the terminal retaining tabs on the inside of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Bosch Connectors (BSK) Bosch Connectors (BSK) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 886 Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 3. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 4. Insert the J 38125-561 tool into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 5. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Bosch Connectors (ECM) Bosch Connectors (ECM) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 887 1. Locate the assist lever on the top of the connector. Move the assist lever to the forward position. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 888 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the connector. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the locking tabs and remove the dress cover. 4. The terminal positive assurance (TPA) is located in the front of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 889 5. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove TPA from the connector. 6. Use the J 38125-213 or the J 38125-556 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 890 Note: Ensure that the dress cover and connector body are both in the released position before reassembling. Failure to do so may cause damage to the connector and component. Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Bosch Connectors (0.64) Bosch Connectors (0.64) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While pressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock until the lever is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Pull the rubber boot that covers the wires back to expose the end of the connector dress cover. 4. Place the connector locking lever in the center of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 891 5. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs that are on the wire end of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover and connector body and pry up. 6. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs located on the opposite side of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover at the connector end and pry up. 7. Remove the dress cover. 8. Cut the tie wrap on the wire bundle. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 892 9. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting a small flat-bladed tool into the small slot in the end of the slider and pushing on the TPA until it comes out of the connector. When the TPA exits the opposite side of the connector, gasp the TPA and pull it completely out of the connector. 10. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 11. Insert the J 38125-560 into the 2 triangular cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 12. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Terminal Replacement Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 893 1. Prior to installation the terminal must be aligned so the (1) coding lugs align with the (2) coding grooves on the connector. 2. Once the terminal is aligned, slide the terminal into the cavity until the retainer has engaged in the cavity of the connector. 3. Slide the TPA in the connector body and seat it using a small flat bladed tool. The TPA is seated when it is flush with the contact housing. 4. Secure the wires to the connector body using a tie wrap and replace the dress cover and grommet. Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Pull out the slider on the connector position assurance (CPA) until it is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 894 5. Insert the J 38125-557 into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Connector Position Assurance Locks Connector Position Assurance Locks The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of the connector. CPAs are used in various connectors throughout the vehicle. CPAs are also used in all SIR system electrical connectors. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals, of the connector. Connector Repairs Connector Repairs Connector Repairs contains a list of all connector repairs. The connector repairs are listed by the connector manufacturer and then by connector type. If the technician cannot identify the manufacturer of the connector, refer to Identifying Connectors below. Knowing the connector manufacturer will assist in finding the correct connector repair from the following list: * Connector Position Assurance Locks (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Connector Position Assurance Locks) * Terminal Position Assurance Locks (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Terminal Position Assurance Locks) * AFL/EPC Connectors (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/AFL/EPC Connectors) * Bosch Connectors (BSK) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Bosch Connectors (BSK))Bosch Connectors (0.64) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Bosch Connectors (0.64))Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT))Bosch Connectors (ECM) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Bosch Connectors (ECM)) * Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack))Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Push to Seat))Delphi Connectors Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 895 (Pull To Seat) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Pull to Seat))Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W))Delphi Connectors (Micro.64) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Micro .64))Delphi Connectors (12-Way) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (12-Way))Delphi Connectors (Steering Gear) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Steering Gear)) * FCI Connectors (Lever Lock) (See: General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/FCI Connectors (Lever Lock))FCI Connectors (SIR) (See: General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/FCI (SIR)) * FEP Connectors (Steering Gear) (See: General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/FEP Connectors (Steering Gear)) * JST Connectors (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/JST Connectors) * Kostal Connectors (Glow Plug Control Module) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Kostal Connectors (Glow Plug Control Module))Kostal Connectors (Transmission) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Kostal Connectors (Transmission)) * Molex Connectors (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Molex Connectors) * Sumitomo Connectors (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Sumitomo Connectors) * Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way))Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor))Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap))Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way))Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module)) * Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Yazaki Connectors (2-Way))Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Yazaki Connectors (16-Way)) * Repairing Connector Terminals (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Repairing Connector Terminals) Connector Anatomy 1 - Connector Positive Assurance (CPA) 2 - Assist Lever 3 - Wiredress Cover 4 - Seal Strain/Relief Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 896 5 - Slide Left Hand 6 - Slide Right Hand 7 - Terminal Positive Assurance (TPA) 8 - Terminal Positive Assurance (TPA) 9 - Connector Seal 10 - Connector Housing 11 - Inner Connector Identifying Connectors Knowing the connector manufacturer is helpful when trying to locating the correct connector repair procedure. There are many different connector designs used on GM vehicles and it is sometimes difficult to identify the connector manufacturer. The information in this document should help with the identification of connector manufactures. The following connector manufacturers make most of the connectors found in GM vehicles: * AFL/EPC (Alcoa Fujikura Ltd./Engineered Plastics Components) * Bosch * Delphi * FCI (Framatome Connectors International) * JAE (Japan Aviation Electronics) * JST (Japan Solderless Terminals) * Kostel * Molex * Sumitomo * Tyco/AMP * Yazaki Identifying the manufacturer of a connector is often difficult. When trying to determine the manufacturer of a connector, look for specific identifying marks that are unique to that connector supplier. Most of these identify marks are hard to find or see. Check the connector carefully and refer to the information below for pictures and descriptions of connector identification markings. * Most of AFLs connectors have EPC on their connector body. Some of the smaller connectors will not have any markings on them. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 897 * In some cases Bosch will actually be printed on the connector. If Bosch does not appear on the connector, look for the Bosch logo. The Bosch logo is a circle with a blunted arrow inside. This logo can appear anywhere on the connector and is often very small. * In some cases Delphi will actually be printed on the connector. If Delphi is not printed on the connector, look for PED. In both cases there is no specific orientation for Delphi or PED and they can appear anywhere on the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 898 * FCI connectors may have the FCI logo on their connectors. The logo is the letters FCI with an "A" above it. * JAE connector have JAE in small letters on their connectors. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 899 * JST connectors have JST in small letters on their connectors, similar to that above. The location of the logo will vary with the connector size and style. * Kostel has an "LK" with a circle around it. These connector are usually used as a transmissions connection. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 900 * Most Molex connectors will have the Molex logo on the dresscover of the connector. In some cases the connectors may have MX followed by another letter. The third letter indicates where the connector was made. A connector with MXD is a Molex connector made in Detroit. Sumitomo has a unique symbol on their connector and possibly a part number. The symbol is similar to that of a diamond lying on its side, similar to that shown. The logo could appear anywhere but the most common place is at the wire side of the housing. * Tyco/AMP has many different and unique connector designs. Some may or may not have identifiable marks on them. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 901 * Yazaki has a wedge or arrow shape, similar to that shown. Delphi Connectors (Push to Seat) Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Follow the steps below in order to repair push to seat connectors. 1. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device, the connector position assurance (CPA) device, and/or the secondary lock. 2. Separate the connector halves (1). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 902 3. Use the proper pick or removal tool (1) in order to release the terminal. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 4. Gently pull the cable and the terminal (2) out of the back of the connector. 5. Re-form the locking device if you are going to reuse the terminal (1). 6. To repair the terminal, refer to Terminal Repair. Terminal Repair 1. Slip the cable seal away from the terminal. 2. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 3. Slip a new cable seal onto the wire. 4. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 5. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 6. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. 7. Slide the cable seal toward the terminal. 8. Crimp the cable seal and the insulation. 9. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply grease to the connector. Reinstalling Terminal 1. In order to reuse a terminal or lead assembly, refer to Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Wiring Repairs). 2. Ensure that the cable seal is kept on the terminal side of the splice. 3. Insert the lead from the back until it catches. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Terminated Lead Repair 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Find the appropriate terminated lead. 3. Use the appropriate splice sleeves depending on the gauge size. 4. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves). Delphi Connectors (Pull to Seat) Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) Special Tools Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 903 J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal If the terminal is visibly damaged or is suspected of having a faulty connection, the terminal should be replaced. Follow the steps below in order to repair pull-to-seat connectors: 1. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) device and/or the secondary lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component or separate the connectors for in-line connectors. 3. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device. 4. Insert the proper pick or removal tool into the front of the connector body. Note: On connectors with more than one terminal the service loop may not be large enough to remove the terminal and crimp on a new one. If the terminal wire does not have a large enough service loop for removal, cut the wire 5 cm (2 in) behind the connector before removal. 5. Grasp the wire at the back of the connector body and gently push the terminal out the front of the connector body. Terminal Repair 1. If the wire needed to be cut in order to remove the terminal, gently push a small length of the same size wire through the back of the connector cavity until there is enough wire exposed in order to crimp on a new terminal. If the wire was not cut, cut the existing wire as close to the old terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 4. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. Terminal Installation 1. Align the terminal and pull the wire from the back of the connector in order to seat the terminal. 2. If necessary, cut the new wire to proper length and splice with existing circuit. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves). 3. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply dielectric grease to the connector. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Micro .64) Delphi Connectors (Micro.64) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 904 Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro.64 connectors. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. The lever lock may be located on the top or sides of the wire dress cover. View of a typical Micro 64 connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 905 Depress the lock and pull the lever over and past the lock. View of the connector when released from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 906 View of another type of Micro 64 connector. Depress the locks that are located on both sides of the wiredress cover and pull the lever over and past the locks. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 907 View of the connector when released from the component. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the front of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool push down on one of the locking tabs and pull the cover up until the dress cover releases. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. 4. Once the front 2 locks are unlocked, lift the front of the dress cover and pull it forward. Note: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 5. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the small slot on the TPA and pushing down until the TPA releases. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 908 Note: Be careful not to angle or rock the J 38125-21 tool when inserting it into the connector or the tool may break. 6. Insert the J 38125-21 tool into the round canal between the terminals cavities at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Follow the steps below in order to repair Micro 64 connector terminals. The Micro 64 connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-64 (M jaw) was developed to crimp Micro 64 terminals. The J 38125-64 crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. The J 38125-64 crimping tool is also designed to crimp both the wire and the insulation at the same time. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro 64 terminals. Note: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gauge wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 1. Cut the wire as close to the damaged terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 909 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert terminal into the appropriate terminal holder until it hits bottom and stops. The correct terminal holder is determined by the wire size. Also ensure that the terminals wings are pointing towards the former on the tool and the release locator. 5. Insert the stripped cable into the terminal. Insulation should be visible on both sides of the terminal insulation wings. 6. Compress the handles until the ratchet automatically releases. 7. Place the terminal into the appropriate cavity and assemble the connector. Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 910 Terminal Removal Procedure There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W connectors. These connectors are very similar but use different terminals and have some minor physical differences also. The first connector design of the Micro-Pack 100W (1) has a white connector interface that holds the terminals. The second design of the Micro-Pack 100W (2) has a gray interface to hold the terminals. Also, the first design has terminal cavities that are further apart (3 mm centerline) and offset from the other row of terminal cavities in the connector. The second design has terminals cavities that are closer together (2.54 mm centerline) and aligned vertically. One other way to identify the second design is the thin strip of material that runs along the outside of the cavities. Note: There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W terminals which are very similar. Ensure that you have the correct terminal before crimping the new terminal to the wire. The first design connector uses the longer terminal (1) that has a raised area in front of the recess in the terminal. The second design connector uses the shorter terminal without the raised area. Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro-Pack 100W connectors. Some Micro-Pack 100W connector disassembly procedures will vary. Use this procedure as a guide. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 911 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Locate the nose piece locking tabs that are positioned on the side of the connector nose piece. The connector nose piece acts as a terminal positive assurance (TPA) and may be referred to as such. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to push in one of the locking tabs while gently pulling on the same side of the nose piece. 4. Repeat the procedure for the other locking tab and remove the nose piece. 5. Remove the wire dress cover. The following is a general procedure for wire dress cover removal. Use this procedure as a guide, some dress cover removal procedures may vary. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 912 6. Use fingers to squeeze the 2 locking legs of the cover. 7. Apply pressure and gently rock the cover until one locking leg is unseated. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 913 8. Continue to apply pressure and rock the cover until the second locking leg is unseated. Repeat procedure for the other side of the dress cover and remove the cover. 9. Use J 38125-12A to gently lift the terminal retaining tab while gently pulling the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. If the terminal is severely bent or damaged, it may be possible on some connectors to push the wire out of the front of the connector instead of pulling it through. This will prevent damage to the internal seals of the connector. Once the terminal is pushed out of the connector, cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible and pull the wire through the connector. Terminal Repair Procedure The Micro-Pack 100W connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool was developed to crimp Micro-Pack 100W terminals. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro-Pack 100 terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 914 1. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. Note: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gauge wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert the terminal into the crimp tool until the core wings are flush with the anvil on the crimp tool. Be sure that the wings are pointed toward the crimp tool former and release the spring locator. The locator will hold the terminal in place. Inspect the alignment of the terminal wings with the crimp tool former. If the terminal wings are wider than the crimp tool former, remove the terminal and bend the terminal wings in slightly. 5. Place stripped wire into terminal. 6. Crimp the new terminal to the wire. If a jam occurs, press the emergency release to open applicator. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 915 Terminal Replacement Procedure After the terminal is crimped to the wire perform the following procedure in order to replace Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the Terminal Removal Procedure. Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The following is the proper procedure for the repair of Weather Pack(R) Connectors. 1. Separate the connector halves (1). 2. Open the secondary lock. A secondary lock aids in terminal retention and is usually molded to the connector (1). 3. Grasp the wire and push the terminal to the forward most position. Hold the wire in this position. 4. Insert the Weather Pack(R) terminal removal tool J 38125-10A into the front (mating end) of the connector cavity until it rests on the cavity shoulder (1). 5. Gently pull on the wire to remove the terminal through the back of the connector (2). Note: Never use force to remove a terminal from a connector. 6. Inspect the terminal and connector for damage. Repair as necessary. Refer to Repairing Connector Terminals (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Repairing Connector Terminals). 7. Reform the lock tang (2) and reset terminal in connector body. 8. Close secondary locks and join connector halves. 9. Verify that circuit is complete and working satisfactorily. 10. Perform system check. Delphi Connectors (12-Way) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 916 Delphi Connectors (12-Way) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) and slide the lever lock away from the connector body. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs on the dress cover of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool release all of the locking tabs. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 917 4. Release the lower wire dress cover locking tab. 5. Release the upper wire dress cover locking tab. 6. Once the locks are unlocked, lift the dress cover off. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 918 Note: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 7. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the locking tabs on both sides of the TPA. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. 8. Remove the nose piece by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the locking tabs on both sides of the nose piece. Gently pry the nose piece out of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 919 9. Insert the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Delphi Connectors (Steering Gear) Delphi Connectors (Steering Gear) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 920 Removal Procedure 1. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the locking tab on the connector. 2. Push down the locking tab to release the connector. The small flat-bladed tool may need to be pushed down and angled back slightly to depress the locking tab. Pull on the connector body while releasing the locking tab to disconnect the connector. FCI Connectors (Lever Lock) FCI Connectors (Lever Lock) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 921 Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. 1. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. 2. The release tab is located on the top of the wiredress cover. 3. View of connector in released position. 4. Disconnect the connector from the component. 5. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the dress cover. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs and remove the dress cover. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 922 6. Use a small flat-blade tool to slide the terminal position assurance (TPA) up one notch on both ends of the connector. The TPA is located underneath the wire dress cover. For the larger terminals insert the J 38125-556 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. For the smaller terminals insert the J 38125-560 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 923 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. FCI (SIR) FCI Connectors (SIR) Removal Procedure Note: The orange CPA must be released first to disconnect or to connect the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 924 1. Lift the orange CPA vertically (avoid lifting on an angle to the connector) approximately 4 mm to release the connector. Use a small flat-bladed tool to help release the orange CPA. The orange CPA can also be released manually without any tools. 2. Grab the connector on both sides and lift the connector vertically to disconnect the connector. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 925 1. Lift the orange CPA vertically approximately 4 mm before installing the connector. Use a small flat-bladed tool to help release the orange CPA. The orange CPA can also be released manually without any tools. 2. Line up the connector key tabs with the initiator key slots. Grab the connector on both sides and push the connector down into the initiator connector sub assembly until fully seated. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 926 3. After the connector is fully seated, push down the orange CPA with your thumb. Push down until the orange CPA is touching the yellow cover on the connector. FEP Connectors (Steering Gear) FEP Connectors (Steering Gear) Removal Procedure 1. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the locking tab on the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 927 2. Push down the locking tab to release the connector. The small flat-bladed tool may need to be pushed down and angled back slightly to depress the locking tab. Pull on the connector body while releasing the locking tab to disconnect the connector. JST Connectors JST Connectors Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. While depressing the lock, remove the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 928 2. Locate the two indents of the terminal position assurance (TPA) located on the bottom of the connector body. Note: The TPA cannot be removed from the connector while there are terminals present in the connector body. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to very carefully raise the TPA on both sides of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 929 4. View of the TPA when removed from the connector body. 5. Use the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the left side of the terminal release cavity as shown in the graphic. Use the tool to move the terminal release to the right with a gentle prying motion. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Kostal Connectors (Glow Plug Control Module) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 930 Kostal Connectors (Glow Plug Control Module) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure View of typical connector. View of connector in released position. 1. Locate the assist lever at the back of the connector. Move the assist lever to the rear position. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 931 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove the dress cover. 4. Slide the dress cover forward and off of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 932 5. The terminal positive assurance (TPA) is located in the front and rear of the connector. Note: The front TPA cannot be removed from the connector. Only move it to the preset position. 6. Use a small flat-blade tool to move the front TPA to the preset position, outboard approximately 0.125 in. (3 mm). 7. Use a small flat-blade tool to completely remove the rear TPA from the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 933 8. Use the J 38125-24 or the J 38125-560 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 9. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Kostal Connectors (Transmission) Kostal Connectors (Transmission) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 934 1. While depressing the lock, twist and remove the connector from the component. 2. Locate the terminal position assurance (TPA). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 935 Note: The TPA cannot be removed from the connector while there are terminals present in the connector body. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to push the TPA until it bottoms out. 4. Use the J 38125-28 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal cavity as shown in the graphic. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 5. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Terminal Replacement Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 936 After the terminal is crimped to the wire, perform the following procedure in order to replace the terminal. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. Locate the terminal position assurance (TPA). 4. Use a small flat-blade tool to push the TPA until it bottoms out. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 937 5. Ensure the TPA is fully seated. The TPA should be centered and flush with the connector body when viewed. Molex Connectors Molex Connectors Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the top of the wire dress cover. Slide the CPA forward. 2. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 938 3. The lever should be in the full forward position. 4. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 939 5. Remove the dress cover by using a flat bladed tool to release the dress cover locking tabs and lift up on the dress cover. 6. Cut the tie wrap that holds the wires to the connector body. 7. Use a small flat-blade tool to pry one side of the nose piece up to the pre-stage position. When the nose piece is in the pre-staged position, the nose piece will be raised above the connector body the length of the step in the nose piece. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 940 8. Use a small flat-blade tool to pry the other side of the piece to the pre-stage position. If the nose piece is higher than the first step in the nose piece, gently push down on the nose piece until it meets with resistance from the connector body, you should feel the nose piece click into position. 9. Insert the J 38125-213 into the small terminal release hole on the nose piece and gently pull on the back of the wire. 10. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Refer to the terminal crimping procedure in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit. Terminal Replacement Procedure After the terminal is crimped to the wire, perform the following procedure in order to replace the terminal. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 941 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the connector disassembly procedure. Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the connector body and pull the CPA out. The CPA is on the wire harness side of connector. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Use a small flat-bladed tool to gently pry off the dress cover by inserting the tool under the cover opposite the harness side and prying up. 4. Remove the cover. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 942 5. Using a small flat-bladed tool, push on the side of the nose piece retainer while pushing the nose piece forward with your thumb. This will release the terminal position assurance (TPA). 6. Insert the J 38125-12A into the corresponding terminal release cavity. The release cavities are the 2 center rows of cavities on one half of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 943 7. Pressing the J 38125-12A tool in the release cavity of the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and crimper in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. Slide the lever lock away from the connector body. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs on the dress cover of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool release all of the locking tabs. 4. Once the locks are unlocked, lift the dress cover off. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 944 Note: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 5. Release the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the blue locking tabs on both ends of the connector. Gently slide the TPA up to the released position on both ends. 6. For the larger terminals insert the J 38125-13A tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. For the smaller terminals insert the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 945 View of the release tool being used for the larger terminals. View of the release tool being used for the larger terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 946 View of the release tool being used for the smaller terminals. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 947 Side view of connector. View of top of connector. 1. Locate the assist lever and lock on the top of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 948 2. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. 3. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 949 4. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the rear of the connector. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. 5. Once the locking tabs are unlocked, slide the inner connector out of the rear of the connector housing. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 950 6. Use the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by pressing on the tang. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Repairing Connector Terminals Repairing Connector Terminals Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Use the following repair procedures in order to repair the following: * Push to Seat terminals * Pull to Seat terminals Some terminals do not require all of the steps shown. Skip the steps that do not apply for your terminal repair. The J-38125 contains further information. 1. Cut off the terminal between the core and the insulation crimp. Minimize any wire loss. For cable seal terminals, remove the seal. 2. Apply the correct cable seal per gauge size of the wire, if used. Slide the seal back along the wire in order to enable insulation removal. 3. Remove the insulation. 4. For sealed terminals only, align the seal with the end of the cable insulation. 5. Position the strip in the terminal. For sealed terminals, position the strip and seal in the terminal. 6. Hand crimp the core wings. 7. Hand crimp the insulation wings. For sealed terminals, hand crimp the insulation wings around the seal and the cable. 8. Solder all of the hand crimp terminals excepting Micro-Pack 100.64 size. Soldering Micro-Pack 100 World terminals may damage the terminal. Sumitomo Connectors Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 951 Sumitomo Connectors Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 952 3. Remove the dress cover by using a flat-blade tool to release the connector locking tabs and pulling off the dress cover. 4. Relieve the tension on the nose piece retainers by inserting J 38125-12A into the single retainer slot on the end of the nose piece and gently prying out the locking tab. Repeat the process for both of the nose piece locking tabs on the opposite side of the nose piece. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 953 5. Once the nose piece retainers are relaxed, use the J 38125-552 to pull up the nose piece by hooking the tool under the nose piece and pulling up. The nose piece should raise slightly. 6. On the opposite side of the nose piece, use the J 38125-552 to pull up the nose piece by hooking the tool under the nose piece and pulling up. The nose piece should release completely. If the nose piece does not come off, repeat the procedure on the opposite side. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 954 7. The illustration above identifies the entry canal where the terminal release tool will be inserted, and the terminal cavity. * Terminal (1) * Entry Canal (2) 8. Insert the J 38125-553 tool into the entry canal and pry up on the terminal retainer. The terminal retainer is a small plastic piece on the top of the terminal. The terminal retainer must be held up while the terminal is pulled out of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 955 9. The illustration shows a cutaway view of the connector to aid the technician in releasing the terminal retainer. 10. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Refer to the terminal crimping procedure in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit. Terminal Replacement Procedure After the terminal is crimped to the wire, perform the following procedure in order to replace the terminal. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the connector disassembly procedure. Terminal Position Assurance Locks Terminal Position Assurance Locks The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 956 2. Insert the J 38125-11A tool into the cavity on the lower right hand face of the connector until the terminal release tang access panel slides over. 3. Ensure that the terminal release tang access panel is in the correct location to access the terminals. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 957 5. Insert the J 38125-11A into the terminal release tang access slot located behind the access panel of the connector and press down on the terminal while carefully pulling the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component by pressing down on the connector position assurance (CPA). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 958 2. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting the tool in the small recess on the side of the connector and pushing up until the TPA releases from the connector body. The TPA should raise just slightly. Do not try to remove the TPA. Note: The TPA on this connector cannot be removed unless the terminals are removed first. The TPA will come out of the connector body, but only slightly. When the TPA is slightly raised the terminals can be removed. Using excessive force to remove the TPA with the terminals still in the connector will damage the connector. 3. Repeat the process for the other side of the connector. 4. Ensure that the TPA is in the proper position to remove the terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 959 5. While pushing the terminal forward, insert the J 38125-24 in the release cavity above the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 960 2. Insert a small flat-blade tool in the slot below the front loaded terminal position assurance (TPA) and pry up. 3. Remove the TPA by pulling it out of the connector. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-553 on a slight upward angle into the cavity below the terminal to be removed. Ensure that the pointed on the end of the tool is facing the bottom of the terminal and it stays in contact with the terminal until it stops on the plastic terminal retainer. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 961 6. Gently pry the plastic terminal retainer down and carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 962 1. While depressing the lock, pull the two connector halves apart. Note: The TPA is fragile and may break if not done carefully. 2. Use a small flat-blade tool to very carefully push the terminal position assurance (TPA) towards the face of the connector on both sides of the connector. 3. View of the male half of the connector with female terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 963 4. View of the female half of the connector with male terminals. 5. Use the J 38125-215 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. View of the female half of the connector with male terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 964 7. View of the male half of the connector with female terminals. 8. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers A circuit breaker is a protective device that is designed to open the circuit when a current load is in excess of the rated breaker capacity. If there is a short or other type of overload condition in the circuit, the excessive current will open the circuit between the circuit breaker terminals. Two types of circuit breakers are used. Circuit Breaker - This type opens when excessive current passes through it for a period of time. It closes again after a few seconds, and if the cause of the high current is still present, it will open again. The circuit breaker will continue to cycle open and closed until the condition causing the high current is removed. Positive Temperature Coefficient (PTC) Circuit Breaker - This type greatly increases its resistance when excessive current passes through it. The excessive current heats the PTC device, as the device heats its resistance increases. Eventually the resistance gets so high that the circuit is effectively open. Unlike the ordinary circuit breaker the PTC unit will not reset until the circuit is opened, by removing the voltage from its terminals. Once the voltage is removed the circuit breaker will re-close within a second or 2. Circuit Protection - Fuses Circuit Protection - Fuses Special Tools EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM) For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 965 The fuse is the most common method of an automotive wiring circuit protection. Whenever there is an excessive amount of current flowing through a circuit the fusible element will melt and create an open or incomplete circuit. Fuses are a one time protection device and must be replaced each time the circuit is overloaded. To determine if a fuse is open, remove the suspected fuse and examine if the element in the fuse is broken (2). If not broken (1), also check for continuity using a Digital Multimeter (DMM) or a continuity tester. If the element is broken or continuity is suspect, replace the fuse with one of equal current rating. Circuit Protection - Fusible Links Circuit Protection - Fusible Links Special Tools EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM) For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Fusible link is wire designed to melt and break continuity when excessive current is applied. It is often located between or near the battery and starter or electrical center. Use a continuity tester or a Digital Multimeter (DMM) at each end of the wire containing the fusible link in order to determine if it is broken. If broken, it must be replaced with fusible link of the same gauge size. Repairing a Fusible Link Note: Fusible links cut longer than 225 mm (approximately 9 in) will not provide sufficient overload protection. Flat Wire Repairs Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 966 Flat Wire Repairs The flat wire within the flex wiring harness is not serviceable. If an open or short exists within the flex wiring harness the complete harness must be replaced. GMLAN Wiring Repairs GMLAN Wiring Repairs Special Tools * EL-38125-10 - Splice Sleeve Crimping Tool * J 38125-5 - Ultra Torch Special Tool * DuraSeal splice sleeves * A wire stripping tool For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: * A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. * A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The GM Local Area Network (GMLAN) System requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working on GMLAN connectors and terminals. GMLAN Repairs Note: When making a repair to any GMLAN network, the original wire length after the repair must be the same length as before the repair. If the network is a twisted pair, the twist must be maintained after the repair is completed. GMLAN has 2 types of networks, low speed and high speed. Low speed GMLAN has a single wire and works at slow speeds. High speed GMLAN has 2 wires in a twisted pair and works at higher speeds. For more information on GMLAN, refer to Data Link Communications Description and Operation ( See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Information Bus/Description and Operation). GMLAN Connector Terminal Repair Note: A terminated lead can be used to replace damaged connector terminals for both high speed and low speed GMLAN systems. When making a connector terminal repair on a GMLAN high speed system with twisted pair wires, do not untwist the wires more than necessary to make the repair. If the individual terminals are damaged on any GMLAN connection, use the appropriate connector repair procedure in order to repair the terminal. Refer to Connector Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Connector Repairs) for the appropriate connector repair procedure. GMLAN Wire Repair Note: Refer to Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Wiring Repairs) in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gauge size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and EL-38125-10 - tool. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the DuraSeal splice sleeves. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 967 Note: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: * Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. * Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. * Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert to regional wiring gauge size. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the EL-38125-10 - tool in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the splice sleeve crimp tool. The crimp tool has four nests, one for each color. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 968 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs Caution: Do not solder repairs under any circumstances as this could result in the air reference being obstructed. If the heated oxygen sensor pigtail wiring, connector, or terminal is damaged the entire oxygen sensor assembly must be replaced. Do not attempt to repair the wiring, connector, or terminals. In order for the sensor to function properly it must have a clean air reference. This clean air reference is obtained by way of the oxygen sensor signal and heater wires. Any attempt to repair the wires, connectors or terminals could result in the obstruction of the air reference and degrade oxygen sensor performance. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 969 The following guidelines should be used when servicing the heated oxygen sensor: * Do not apply contact cleaner or other materials to the sensor or vehicle harness connectors. These materials may get into the sensor, causing poor performance. Also, the sensor pigtail and harness wires must not be damaged in such a way that the wires inside are exposed. This could provide a path for foreign materials to enter the sensor and cause performance problems. * Neither the sensor nor vehicle lead wires should be bent sharply or kinked. Sharp bends, kinks, etc., could block the reference air path through the lead wire. * Do not remove or defeat the oxygen sensor ground wire (where applicable). Vehicles that utilize the ground wire sensor may rely on this ground as the only ground contact to the sensor. Removal of the ground wire will also cause poor engine performance. * To prevent damage due to water intrusion, be sure that the peripheral seal remains intact on the vehicle harness connector. High Temperature Wiring Repairs High Temperature Wiring Repairs Special Tools * EL-38125-10 - Splice Sleeve Crimping Tool * J 38125-5 - Ultra Torch * DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). High Temperature Wiring Wiring that is exposed to high temperatures, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time may use materials i.e. wires, connectors, and shielding that has a higher heat rating than typical wiring. When making a repair in a high temperature area observe the following: * Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature to replace any damaged wire. * Replace any heat shielding that is removed. * Cover any DuraSeal splice sleeves with SCT1 shrink tubing. * After making a wiring repair, ensure that the location of the wiring is not moved closer to the heat source. Identifying High Temperature Wiring Wiring that is exposed to high temperature, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time need special considerations when making wiring repairs. Areas that may be exposed to higher temperatures can be identified by heat resistant materials that are being used in those areas. These materials may include heat reflective tape, moon tape, and high temperature shrink tubing. Also conduit and other protective coverings may be used. Because conduit or similar coverings are used throughout the vehicle regardless of the temperature, it may be necessary for the technician to determine if an area is exposed to excessive heat before making a wiring repair. Obvious areas of consideration would be any area located near the exhaust manifolds, catalytic converter, and exhaust pipes. Items Required * DuraSeal splice sleeves to crimp and seal connections * High temperature SCT1 shrink tubing to protect the splice sleeves * Terminated leads or pigtails * The correct tools to remove the terminals from the connectors Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature of the same or larger gauge size as the original wire when repair damage wire. Also replace any reflective tape that you remove during the repair. High Temperature Wire Repair Note: Refer to Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Wiring Repairs) in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature rating of the same gauge size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the EL-38125-10 - tool and then encapsulate the splice sleeve using the high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 970 Note: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: * Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. * Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. * Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert to regional wiring gauge size. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Slide a section of high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing down the length of wire to be spliced. Ensure that the shrink tubing will not interfere with the splice procedure. 5. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 6. Use the EL-38125-10 - tool in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the splice sleeve crimp tool. The crimp tool has four nests, one for each color. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 971 7. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 8. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 9. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 10. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 11. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 972 12. Center the high temperature SCT1 shrink tube over the DuraSeal splice sleeve. 13. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the high temperature heat shrink tubing. 14. Gradually move the heat from the center to the open end of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. 15. Replace any reflective tape and clips that may have been remove during the repair. Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation If the wire insulation has been chafed, or broken, enough to show the conductive portion of the wire, and the wire is not damaged, determine the length of insulation that needs to be repaired. If the repair is less than 280 mm (11 in), cut the wire within the damaged area. Than slide the appropriate heat shrink tubing (listed below) over the wire, and repair the wire by splicing the wires together. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves). Once the wire is spliced together slide heat shrink tubing over the damaged area and apply heat to seal the repaired wire. If the wire is damaged, or the damaged area is larger than 280 mm (11 in), than replace the damaged wire by splicing in a new section of wire. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 973 SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs Special Tools * EL-38125-10 - Splice Sleeve Crimping Tool * J 38125-5 - Ultra Torch * DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: * A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. * A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides the necessary low resistance contact integrity for these sensitive, low energy circuits. The Supplemental Inflatable Restraint (SIR) System/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working with the SIR/SRS, and the wiring components, such as connectors and terminals. SIR/SRS Connector Repair (Plastic Body and Terminal Metal Pin) Note: Do not use the terminals in the kit in order to replace damaged SIR/SRS system terminals. Use either an SIR/SRS pigtail or a terminated lead from the SIR Repair Kit Tray. The terminals in the SIR/SRS system are made with a special plating. This plating provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. Pigtail repair packs are available for SIR/SRS connectors with eight or less terminals. Only the connector body is available for connectors with more than eight terminals. Terminated leads can be used to replace damaged terminals when replacing the connector body. SIR/SRS Component Wire Pigtail Repair Note: Do not make wire, connector, or terminal repairs on components with wire pigtails. A wire pigtail is a wire or wires attached directly to the device, not by a connector. If a wiring pigtail is damaged, you must replace the entire component, with pigtail. The inflatable restraint steering wheel module coil is an example of a pigtail component. SIR/SRS Wire Repair Note: Refer to Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Wiring Repairs) in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 974 If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gauge size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and EL-38125-10 - tool. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the DuraSeal splice sleeves. Note: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: * Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. * Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. * Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert to regional wiring gauge size. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the EL-38125-10 - tool in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the splice sleeve crimp tool. The crimp tool has four nests, one for each color. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 975 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Connector Position Assurance (CPA) The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of a connector. CPAs are used in all SIR System connectors and also in some connectors of other systems. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals of a connection. Terminal Position Assurance (TPA) The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 976 Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Special Tools * EL-38125-10 - Splice Sleeve Crimping Tool * J 38125-5 - Ultra Torch * DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Note: Use only DuraSeal splice sleeves. Other splice sleeves may not protect the splice from moisture or provide a good electrical connection. Use DuraSeal splice sleeves to form a one-to-one splice on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. Use DuraSeal splice sleeves where there is special requirements such as moisture sealing. Follow the instructions below in order to splice copper wire using DuraSeal splice sleeves. Note: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: * Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. * Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. * Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert to regional wiring gauge size. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 977 5. Use the EL-38125-10 - tool in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the splice sleeve crimp tool. The crimp tool has four nests, one for each color. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 978 * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Splicing Inline Harness Diodes Splicing Inline Harness Diodes Many vehicle electrical systems use a diode to isolate circuits and protect the components from voltage spikes. When installing a new diode use the following procedure. 1. Open the harness. * If the harness is taped, remove the tape. * To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing seam ripper (available from sewing supply stores) in order to cut open the harness. * If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the diode. 2. If the diode is taped to the harness, remove all of the tape. 3. Check and record the current flow direction and orientation of diode. 4. Remove the inoperative diode from the harness with a suitable soldering tool. Note: If the diode is located next to a connector terminal remove the terminal(s) from the connector to prevent damage from the soldering tool. 5. Carefully strip away a section of insulation next to the old soldered portion of the wire(s). Do not remove any more than is needed to attach the new diode. 6. Check current flow direction of the new diode, being sure to install the diode with correct bias. Reference the appropriate service manual wiring schematic to obtain the correct diode installation position. 7. Attach the new diode to the wire(s) using 60/40 rosin core solder. Before soldering attach some heat sinks (aluminum alligator clips) across the diode wire ends to protect the diode from excessive heat. Follow the manufacturer's instruction for the soldering equipment. 8. Reinstall terminal(s) into the connector body if previously removed. Note: To prevent shorts to ground and water intrusion, completely cover all exposed wire and diode attachment points with tape. 9. Tape the diode to the harness or connector using electrical tape. Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable Twisted/shielded cable is used in order to protect wiring from electrical noise. Two-conductor cable of this construction is used between the radio and the Delco-Bose(R) speaker/amplifier units and other applications where low level, sensitive signals must be carried. Follow the instructions below in order to repair the twisted/shielded cable. 1. Remove the outer jacket (1). Use care not to cut into the drain wire of the mylar tape. 2. Unwrap the tape. Do not remove the tape. Use the tape in order to rewrap the twisted conductors after the splice is made. 3. Prepare the splice. Untwist the conductors and follow the instructions for Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves). Staggering the splices by 65 mm (2.5 in) is recommended. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 979 Note: Apply the mylar tape with the aluminum side inward. This ensures good electrical contact with the drain wire. 4. Re-assemble the cable. * Rewrap the conductors with the mylar tape. If the mylar tape is damaged, use 3M product AL-36FR to replace the damaged mylar tape. * Use caution not to wrap the drain wire in the tape (1). * Follow the splicing instructions for copper wire and splice the drain wire. * Wrap the drain wire around the conductors and tape with electrical tape to replace the outer insulation. 5. Tape over the entire cable. Use a winding motion when you apply the tape. Wiring Repairs Wiring Repairs The Wiring Repairs section contains the following types of wiring repair information. Using these elements together will make wiring repair faster and easier: * Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections) * Flat Wire Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Flat Wire Repairs) * GMLAN Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/GMLAN Wiring Repairs) * High Temperature Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/High Temperature Wiring Repairs) * Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs) * Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves) * Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable) * Splicing Inline Harness Diodes (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Inline Harness Diodes) * SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs) US English/Metric Conversion US English/Metric Conversion Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 980 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 981 Basic Digital Multimeter Requirements Basic Digital Multimeter Requirements Digital Multimeter (DMM) Basic Requirements Service information is validated using digital multimeters that meet or exceed the following requirements. Using a multimeter that does not meet these basic requirements may give inaccurate readings which could lead to an incorrect diagnosis. Display and Settings 1. Four digits displayed 2. Voltage, amperage, resistance, frequency, diode test settings, and min-max function 3. Display positive and negative values Voltage 1. Have at least 10 Mohm input impedance 2. Test a DC voltage range of 0.1-1000 V. 3. Test an AC voltage range of 0.1-1000 V. Amperage 1. Test a DC amperage range of 0.1µA-10 A. 2. Test an AC amperage range of 0.1µA-10 A. Resistance Test a resistance range of 0.1 ohm-40 Mohm and displays infinite for a value greater than 40 Mohm (O.L. (Over-load)) Frequency Test for a frequency range of 0.5 HZ-199 K HZ Diode Test 1. Apply at least 1 mA when performing the diode bias test 2. Display the break over voltage drop (0-3 V) of a forward biased diode 3. Display infinite (O.L. (Over-load)) when a diode is reverse biased Min-Max Readings 1. Can update at a 1 ms sample rate 2. Saves and displays minimum and maximum values Testing Ground and Low Reference Circuits Testing Ground and Low Reference Circuits Because a test lamp can light with up to 200 ohm in a ground or low reference circuit they are not recommended to be used for this type of test. A low impedance test lamp can light and indicate the circuit is good when there is as much as 20-30 ohm present, while a high impedance test lamp can light with up to 200 ohm present in the circuit. This is why the Digital Multi-Meter (DMM) is used when validating a ground or low reference circuit continuity. When using the DMM there are many vehicle conditions that can affect the ground and low reference continuity testing. If these conditions are not met, a ground or low reference circuit test can fail on a good circuit. This may cause longer diagnosis time and incorrect component replacement. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 982 Any current flow through a ground or low reference circuit, while being tested, will skew the DMM continuity reading, or display a reading higher than when there is no current flowing. Performing a ground or low reference circuit continuity test, in reference to the vehicles battery negative terminal, will have the highest risk of failing a good ground or low reference circuit test than any other ground reference point. The best ground test points would be a control module housing (if the control modules housing is metal and grounded), door jamb striker (if attached to metal), under dash metal frame work, engine block, or body ground studs (other than where the negative battery cable is attached). A typical DMM ground or low reference circuit continuity reading can be as high as 100 ohm with the ignition ON, and drop to 15-25 ohm after the ignition is turned OFF. The reading will drop below 10 ohm after 30-40 seconds, then below 5 ohm after 60 seconds. Once the vehicle completely goes to sleep (generally 3-10 minutes) the reading will drop below 0.3 ohm. The following list of conditions may need to be met to ensure a valid continuity reading on a ground or low reference circuit: * Ignition OFF * Key out of the ignition switch (when not equipped with keyless entry and remote start) * Retained Accessory Power (RAP) OFF (open and close the driver door after ignition OFF) * Battery charger set at a 2 A or less charge rate * Scan tool not communicating with any vehicle control module (in some cases it may need to be disconnected from the DLC) * All entry doors closed * Headlamps OFF (auto headlamps disabled) * Any delay lighting OFF * HVAC after blow OFF * Any accessory that can work when the ignition is OFF * Wait up to 60 seconds (after all other listed conditions are met) Activating the DOOR LOCK function with a key fob can greatly reduce the time to achieve a valid ground or low reference continuity test result. Terminal Wiring Repair Terminal Wiring Repair Special Tools * EL-38125-10 - Splice Sleeve Crimp Tool * EL-38125-580 - Terminal Release Tool Kit * J-38125-5 - Ultra Torch * EL-35616 - Connector Test Adapter Kit For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Note: All repairs near the engine manifold, turbo engine and all exhaust pipes should follow the High Temperature Wiring Repair procedures. 1. Find the appropriate connector end view within the connector end view section. The connector end view has the following information: * Diagnostic probe tool * Terminal release tool * Terminal/terminated lead part numbers 2. Determine if a terminal is damaged. Note: Not using the proper test kit probe may cause damage to the terminal(s) that are probed. * Locate the diagnostic probe tool from the connector end view. The connector end view describes the color and part number to help the technician find and use the correct tool. * Connect the probe tool to the Digital Multimeter. * Insert the probe tool into the cavity and follow the procedures from the Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter). 3. Disconnect the connector body to perform the repair. Note: Several procedures for specific connector bodies are called out in Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Wiring Repairs). Use the following repair procedures to repair the following terminals: Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 983 Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack))Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Push to Seat))Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Pull to Seat))Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W))Delphi Connectors (Micro.64) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Micro .64) )Delphi Connectors (12-Way) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (12-Way))Delphi Connectors (Steering Gear) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Steering Gear)) * The TPA and CPA should be removed before releasing the terminal for the connector body. * Look at the connector end view to locate the cavity of the damaged terminal and find the proper terminal release tool from the terminal release tool kit. Note: Using the incorrect terminal release tool can damage the connector body. * Insert the terminal release tool into the cavity. Note: Some terminals have a lever that must be disengaged before the terminal can be released. Gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Terminated Lead Repair Terminated Lead Repair Special Tools * EL-38125-10 - Splice Sleeve Crimp Tool * EL-38125-580 - Terminal Release Tool Kit * J-38125-5 - Ultra Torch * EL-35616 - Connector Test Adapter Kit For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Note: All repairs near the engine manifold, turbo engine and all exhaust pipes should follow the High Temperature Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/High Temperature Wiring Repairs) procedures. Terminated leads are terminals that are crimped onto wires. The terminated lead can be used throughout the vehicle since it is designed for temperatures up to 150°C. The length of the wire is 450 mm. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 984 The DuraSeal splice sleeve has the following 2 critical features: * A special heat shrink tubing that environmentally seals the splice. The shrink tubing contains a sealing adhesive inside the shrink tubing. * A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp that provides the necessary contact integrity for sensitive low energy circuits. 1. Use the connector end view to identify the correct terminated lead. 2. The terminated lead package should include a DuraSeal splice sleeve. If not, use the chart to identify the correct part. 3. Open the harness by removing any tape: Use a sewing seam ripper, or a comparable tool, to cut open the harness, to avoid wire insulation damage. 4. Depending on how many terminals need repairs, cut the terminal and wire back at least 40 mm. Try to keep the harness wire length the same. If more than one terminated lead is required, stagger the lengths by 40 mm. This helps reduce the bundle size of the wire harness. 5. Use the EL-38125-10 - tool in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the splice sleeve crimp tool. The crimp tool has four nests, one for each color. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 985 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the J-38125-5 - ultra torch , apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 986 Fuel Level Sensor: Connector Views A6C Fuel Pump and Level Sensor Assembly - Primary B46B Fuel Level Sensor - Secondary Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 987 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 988 Fuel Level Sensor: Electrical Diagrams For information regarding diagrams for this component, please refer to Powertrain Management diagrams. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 989 Fuel Level Sensor: Service and Repair Primary Fuel Level Sensor Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Locations Fuel Pressure Sensor: Locations Wheels/Vehicle Underbody Component Views Fuel System Components 1 - B46B Fuel Level Sensor - Secondary 2 - B150 Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor 3 - Q13 Evaporative Emission Vent Solenoid Valve 4 - B46A Fuel Level Sensor - Primary 5 - G12 Fuel Pump 6 - B47 Fuel Pressure Sensor Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 993 Fuel Pressure Sensor: Diagrams B47 Fuel Pressure Sensor Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Locations Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor: Locations Wheels/Vehicle Underbody Component Views Fuel System Components 1 - B46B Fuel Level Sensor - Secondary 2 - B150 Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor 3 - Q13 Evaporative Emission Vent Solenoid Valve 4 - B46A Fuel Level Sensor - Primary 5 - G12 Fuel Pump 6 - B47 Fuel Pressure Sensor Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 997 Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor: Diagrams B150 Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 998 Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor: Service and Repair Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Diagrams B75B Mass Air Flow/Intake Air Temperature Sensor Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1002 Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Service and Repair Mass Airflow Sensor with Intake Air Temperature Sensor Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Disassembled Views Knock Sensor: Locations Disassembled Views Disassembled Views Engine Covers and Component Assemblies (2 of 2) (LF1) 1 - Water Outlet Bolt 2 - Water Outlet 3 - Water Outlet O-ring 4 - Water Outlet Seal 5 - Knock Sensor Bolt 6 - Knock Sensor 7 - Engine Coolant Heater Assembly 8 - Crankshaft Position Sensor Bolt 9 - Crankshaft Position Sensor 10 - Crankshaft Position Sensor O-ring 11 - Right Cylinder Head Assembly 12 - Right Cylinder Head Gasket 13 - Lower Fuel Rail Noise Shield 14 - Engine Cooling Thermostat Gasket 15 - Engine Cooling Thermostat 16 - Engine Cooling Thermostat Housing Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Disassembled Views > Page 1007 17 - Engine Cooling Thermostat Bolt - Short 18 - Engine Cooling Thermostat Housing Bolt - Long 19 - Fuel Feed Pipe Assembly 20 - Fuel Feed Pipe Assembly Bolt 21 - Fuel Feed Intermediate Pipe Assembly 22 - Fuel Pump Gasket 23 - Fuel Pump O-ring Seal 24 - Fuel Pump 25 - Fuel Pump Bolt 26 - Left Cylinder Head Assembly 27 - Left Cylinder Head Gasket 28 - Oil Level Indicator 29 Oil Level Indicator Handle O-ring 30 - Oil Level Indicator Tube Bolt 31 - Oil Level Indicator Tube 32 - Oil Level Indicator Tube O-ring 33 - Oil Filter Adapter Assembly 34 - Engine Short Block Assembly 35 - Oil Pump Assembly 36 - Timing Drive Assembly Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Disassembled Views > Page 1008 Knock Sensor: Locations Powertrain Component Views Powertrain Component Views Front Engine Components (LAF 1 of 2) 1 - Q38 Throttle Body 2 - G18 High Pressure Fuel Pump 3 - B23F Camshaft Position Sensor Intake 4 - B37 Engine Oil Pressure Switch 5 - B68 Knock Sensor 6 - B26 Crankshaft Position Sensor 7 - M64 Starter Motor 8 - Q2 A/C Compressor Clutch 9 - G13 Generator Left Front of the Engine Components (LF1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Disassembled Views > Page 1009 1 - T8B Ignition Coil 2 2 - T8D Ignition Coil 4 3 - T8F Ignition Coil 6 4 - G18 High Pressure Fuel Pump 5 - B34 Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor 6 - M64 Starter Motor 7 - B68B Knock Sensor 2 8 - B37 Engine Oil Pressure Switch 9 - B1 A/C Refrigerant Pressure Sensor 10 - Q2 A/C Compressor Clutch 11 - G13 Generator Right Rear of the Engine Components (LF1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Disassembled Views > Page 1010 1 - B74 Manifold Absolute Pressure Sensor 2 - T8E Ignition Coil 5 3 - T8C Ignition Coil 3 4 - Q12 Evaporative Emission Purge Solenoid Valve 5 - Q38 Throttle Body 6 - B23B Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 1 Intake 7 - B23D Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 2 Intake 8 - Q6D Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Bank 2 Intake 9 - Q6C Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Bank 2 Exhaust 10 - B23C Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 2 Exhaust 11 - Q6B Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Bank 1 Intake 12 - Q6A Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Bank 1 Exhaust 13 - B23A Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 1 Exhaust 14 - B68A Knock Sensor 1 15 - B26 Crankshaft Position Sensor 16 - T8A Ignition Coil 1 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1011 Knock Sensor: Diagrams B68 Knock Sensor (LAF) B68A Knock Sensor 1 (LF1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1012 B68B Knock Sensor 2 (LF1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1013 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Knock Sensor Replacement - Bank 1 Knock Sensor: Service and Repair Knock Sensor Replacement - Bank 1 Knock Sensor Replacement - Bank 1 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Knock Sensor Replacement - Bank 1 > Page 1016 Knock Sensor: Service and Repair Knock Sensor Replacement - Bank 2 Knock Sensor Replacement - Bank 2 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor: Locations Powertrain Component Views Front Engine Components (LAF 2 of 2) 1 - B47B Fuel Rail Pressure Sensor 2 - B74 Manifold Absolute Pressure Sensor 3 - Q17D Fuel Injector 4 4 - Q17C Fuel Injector 3 5 - B1 A/C Refrigerant Pressure Sensor 6 - Q17B Fuel Injector 2 7 - Q17A Fuel Injector 1 Right Rear of the Engine Components (LF1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1020 1 - B74 Manifold Absolute Pressure Sensor 2 - T8E Ignition Coil 5 3 - T8C Ignition Coil 3 4 - Q12 Evaporative Emission Purge Solenoid Valve 5 - Q38 Throttle Body 6 - B23B Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 1 Intake 7 - B23D Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 2 Intake 8 - Q6D Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Bank 2 Intake 9 - Q6C Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Bank 2 Exhaust 10 - B23C Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 2 Exhaust 11 - Q6B Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Bank 1 Intake 12 - Q6A Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Bank 1 Exhaust 13 - B23A Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 1 Exhaust 14 - B68A Knock Sensor 1 15 - B26 Crankshaft Position Sensor 16 - T8A Ignition Coil 1 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1021 Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor: Diagrams B74 Manifold Absolute Pressure Sensor Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1022 Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor: Service and Repair Manifold Absolute Pressure Sensor Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oil Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Disassembled Views Oil Pressure Sensor: Locations Disassembled Views Disassembled Views Oil Filter Adapter 440 - Oil Filter Adapter 441 - Oil Filter Adapter Gasket 442 - Oil Filter Adapter Bolt 443 - Oil Filter Adapter Bolt - Long 445 - Oil Filter Fitting 449 - Oil Filter 728 - Engine Oil Pressure Sensor 729 Engine Oil Pressure Sensor O-ring Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oil Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Disassembled Views > Page 1027 Oil Pressure Sensor: Locations Powertrain Component Views Powertrain Component Views Front Engine Components (LAF 1 of 2) 1 - Q38 Throttle Body 2 - G18 High Pressure Fuel Pump 3 - B23F Camshaft Position Sensor Intake 4 - B37 Engine Oil Pressure Switch 5 - B68 Knock Sensor 6 - B26 Crankshaft Position Sensor 7 - M64 Starter Motor 8 - Q2 A/C Compressor Clutch 9 - G13 Generator Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oil Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1028 Oil Pressure Sensor: Diagrams B37 Engine Oil Pressure Switch (LAF) B37 Engine Oil Pressure Switch (LF1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oil Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1029 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oil Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1030 Oil Pressure Sensor: Service and Repair Engine Oil Pressure Sensor and/or Switch Replacement (LF1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations Oxygen Sensor: Locations Powertrain Component Views Left Rear Engine Components (LAF) 1 - T8D Ignition Coil 4 2 - T8C Ignition Coil 3 3 - T8B Ignition Coil 2 4 - T8A Ignition Coil 1 5 - Q6F Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Intake 6 - Q6E Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Exhaust 7 - B52A Heated Oxygen Sensor 1 8 - B52B Heated Oxygen Sensor 2 9 - B34 Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor 10 - B23E Camshaft Position Sensor - Exhaust 11 - Q12 Evaporative Emission Purge Solenoid Valve Front of the Exhaust System Components (LF1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1034 1 - B52C Heated Oxygen Sensor - Bank 1 Sensor 1 2 - B52D Heated Oxygen Sensor - Bank 1 Sensor 2 3 - B52F Heated Oxygen Sensor - Bank 2 Sensor 2 4 - B52E Heated Oxygen Sensor Bank 2 Sensor 1 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1035 Oxygen Sensor: Diagrams B52A Heated Oxygen Sensor 1 (LAF) B52B Heated Oxygen Sensor 2 (LAF) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1036 B52C Heated Oxygen Sensor - Bank 1 Sensor 1 (LF1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1037 B52D Heated Oxygen Sensor - Bank 1 Sensor 2 (LF1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1038 B52E Heated Oxygen Sensor - Bank 2 Sensor 1 (LF1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1039 B52F Heated Oxygen Sensor - Bank 2 Sensor 2 (LF1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1040 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service Precautions > Heated Oxygen and Oxygen Sensor Caution Oxygen Sensor: Service Precautions Heated Oxygen and Oxygen Sensor Caution Heated Oxygen and Oxygen Sensor Caution Caution: Do not remove the pigtail from either the heated oxygen sensor (HO2S) or the oxygen sensor (O2S). Removing the pigtail or the connector will affect sensor operation. Handle the oxygen sensor carefully. Do not drop the HO2S. Keep the in-line electrical connector and the louvered end free of grease, dirt, or other contaminants. Do not use cleaning solvents of any type. Do not repair the wiring, connector or terminals. Replace the oxygen sensor if the pigtail wiring, connector, or terminal is damaged. This external clean air reference is obtained by way of the oxygen sensor signal and heater wires. Any attempt to repair the wires, connectors, or terminals could result in the obstruction of the air reference and degraded sensor performance. The following guidelines should be used when servicing the heated oxygen sensor: * Do not apply contact cleaner or other materials to the sensor or vehicle harness connectors. These materials may get into the sensor causing poor performance. * Do not damage the sensor pigtail and harness wires in such a way that the wires inside are exposed. This could provide a path for foreign materials to enter the sensor and cause performance problems. * Ensure the sensor or vehicle lead wires are not bent sharply or kinked. Sharp bends or kinks could block the reference air path through the lead wire. * Do not remove or defeat the oxygen sensor ground wire, where applicable. Vehicles that utilize the ground wired sensor may rely on this ground as the only ground contact to the sensor. Removal of the ground wire will cause poor engine performance. * Ensure that the peripheral seal remains intact on the vehicle harness connector in order to prevent damage due to water intrusion. The engine harness may be repaired using Packard's Crimp and Splice Seals Terminal Repair Kit. Under no circumstances should repairs be soldered since this could result in the air reference being obstructed. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service Precautions > Heated Oxygen and Oxygen Sensor Caution > Page 1043 Oxygen Sensor: Service Precautions Heated Oxygen Sensor Resistance Learn Reset Caution Heated Oxygen Sensor Resistance Learn Reset Caution Caution: When replacing the HO2S perform the following: * A code clear with a scan tool, regardless of whether or not a DTC is set * HO2S heater resistance learn reset with a scan tool, where available Perform the above in order to reset the HO2S resistance learned value and avoid possible HO2S failure. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service Precautions > Heated Oxygen and Oxygen Sensor Caution > Page 1044 Oxygen Sensor: Service Precautions Silicon Contamination of Heated Oxygen Sensors Caution Silicon Contamination of Heated Oxygen Sensors Caution Caution: Contamination of the oxygen sensor can result from the use of an inappropriate RTV sealant (not oxygen sensor safe) or excessive engine coolant or oil consumption. Remove the HO2S and visually inspect the portion of the sensor exposed to the exhaust stream in order to check for contamination. If contaminated, the portion of the sensor exposed to the exhaust stream will have a white powdery coating. Silicon contamination causes a high but false HO2S signal voltage (rich exhaust indication). The control module will then reduce the amount of fuel delivered to the engine, causing a severe driveability problem. Eliminate the source of contamination before replacing the oxygen sensor. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heated Oxygen Sensor - Bank 1 Sensor 1 Oxygen Sensor: Service and Repair Heated Oxygen Sensor - Bank 1 Sensor 1 Heated Oxygen Sensor Replacement - Bank 1 Sensor 1 (LF1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heated Oxygen Sensor - Bank 1 Sensor 1 > Page 1047 Oxygen Sensor: Service and Repair Heated Oxygen Sensor - Bank 1 Sensor 2 Heated Oxygen Sensor Replacement - Bank 1 Sensor 2 (LF1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heated Oxygen Sensor - Bank 1 Sensor 1 > Page 1048 Oxygen Sensor: Service and Repair Heated Oxygen Sensor - Bank 2 Sensor 1 Heated Oxygen Sensor Replacement - Bank 2 Sensor 1 (LF1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heated Oxygen Sensor - Bank 1 Sensor 1 > Page 1049 Oxygen Sensor: Service and Repair Heated Oxygen Sensor - Bank 2 Sensor 2 Heated Oxygen Sensor Replacement - Bank 2 Sensor 2 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Exploded Views Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Exploded Views 6L50/6L80/6L90 - Automatic Transmission Disassembled Views Park System Components 50 - A/Trans Case 600 - Park Pawl Shaft 601 - Park Pawl Spring 602 - Park Pawl 603 - Park Pawl Actuator Guide Pin 604 - Manual Shift Shaft Seal 605 - Park Pawl Actuator Guide Seal 606 - Park Pawl Actuator Guide 607 - Park Pawl Actuator Assembly 608 - Manual Shift Detent Lever Shaft 609 - Manual Shift Detent (w/Shaft Position Switch) Lever Assembly 610 - Manual Shift Detent Lever Pin 611 - Manual Shift Shaft Pin 6T70/6T75 - Automatic Transmission Disassembled Views Park System Components Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Exploded Views > Page 1054 500 - Park Pawl Actuator Bracket Bolt 501 - Park Pawl Actuator Bracket 502 - Park Pawl Shaft 503 - Park Pawl 504 - Park Pawl Spring 505 - Park Pawl Actuator Guide Pin 506 - Park Pawl Actuator Guide 507 - A/Trans Case Assembly 508 - Manual Shift Shaft Seal 509 - Park Pawl Actuator Assembly 510 - Manual Shift Shaft Pin 511 - Manual Shift Detent (w/Shaft Position Switch) Lever Assembly Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Exploded Views > Page 1055 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Connector Views P2 Transmission Shift Lever Position Indicator Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Service and Repair 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission Manual Shift Detent Lever with Shaft Position Switch Assembly Replacement Special Tools * DT-48550 Detent Lever Pin Remover * J 41229 Manual Shaft Pin Installer Removal Procedure 1. Remove the control valve body. Refer to Control Valve Body Replacement (See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Valve Body/Service and Repair/6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission/Control Valve Body Replacement). 2. Remove the manual shaft detent lever hub pin (1) using DT-48550. 3. Remove the manual shift shaft pin (5). Discard the pin. 4. Remove the manual shaft (2). Note: Disconnect the actuator rod (3) from the detent lever assembly. Do not remove the actuator rod from the transmission case. 5. Remove the manual shaft detent (w/shift position switch) lever assembly (4). Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 1058 Note: Connect the actuator rod (3) to the detent lever assembly. 1. Install the manual shaft detent (w/shift position switch) lever assembly (4). Note: Lubricate the shaft with automatic transmission fluid to prevent damage to the manual shift shaft seal during installation. 2. Install the manual shaft (2). 3. Install the manual shaft detent lever hub pin (1) using DT-48550. Install the Manual Shaft Detent Lever Hub Pin to height of (b) 7.9 mm (0.38 in). Caution: Use the manual shaft pin installer to install the pin at the correct height in order to properly secure the manual shaft. If you install the pin too deep, the case bore may crack. 4. Install the NEW manual shift shaft pin (5) using J 41229. Use a NEW pin to ensure proper engagement with the case. Inspect pin installed height is within (a) 7.2-8.2 mm (0.28-0.32 in). 5. Install the control valve body. Refer to Control Valve Body Replacement (See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Valve Body/Service and Repair/6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission/Control Valve Body Replacement). 6. Perform the transmission adaptive values learn procedure. Refer to Transmission Adaptive Values Learn (See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 1059 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Service and Repair 6T70/6T75 - Automatic Transmission Manual Shift Detent Lever with Shaft Position Switch Assembly Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 1060 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Locations Instrument Panel/Center Console Component Views Lower Left of the Instrument Panel Components 1 - B80 Park Brake Switch 2 - T3 Audio Amplifier 3 - K9 Body Control Module 4 - K73 Telematics Communication Interface Control Module (UE1) 5 - B107 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor 6 T4S Wireless Communication Antenna - Bluetooth (UE1 with UPF) 7 - B22 Brake Pedal Position Sensor 8 - X84 Data Link Connector Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1065 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Diagrams B107 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1066 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Service and Repair Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Diagrams B75B Mass Air Flow/Intake Air Temperature Sensor Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1070 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Service and Repair Mass Airflow Sensor with Intake Air Temperature Sensor Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations > Disassembled Views Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch: Locations Disassembled Views Disassembled Views Fuel Rail (LF1) 1 - Fuel Rail Bolt 2 - Fuel Pressure Sensor 3 - Fuel Injector Retainer 4 - Fuel Injector O-ring Seal 5 - Fuel Injector Spacer 6 - Fuel Injector 7 - Fuel Injector Teflon Seal 8 - Fuel Rail Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations > Disassembled Views > Page 1075 Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch: Locations Powertrain Component Views Powertrain Component Views Front Engine Components (LAF 2 of 2) 1 - B47B Fuel Rail Pressure Sensor 2 - B74 Manifold Absolute Pressure Sensor 3 - Q17D Fuel Injector 4 4 - Q17C Fuel Injector 3 5 - B1 A/C Refrigerant Pressure Sensor 6 - Q17B Fuel Injector 2 7 - Q17A Fuel Injector 1 Top of the Engine Components (LF1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations > Disassembled Views > Page 1076 1 - B47B Fuel Rail Pressure Sensor 2 - Q17A Fuel Injector 1 3 - Q17C Fuel Injector 3 4 - Q17E Fuel Injector 5 5 - Q17F Fuel Injector 6 6 - Q17D Fuel Injector 4 7 - Q17B Fuel Injector 2 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1077 Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch: Diagrams B47B Fuel Rail Pressure Sensor Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Pressure Sensor Replacement - Fuel Feed Pipe Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch: Service and Repair Fuel Pressure Sensor Replacement - Fuel Feed Pipe Fuel Pressure Sensor Replacement - Fuel Feed Pipe Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Pressure Sensor Replacement - Fuel Feed Pipe > Page 1080 Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch: Service and Repair Fuel Pressure Sensor Replacement - Fuel Injection Fuel Rail Fuel Pressure Sensor Replacement - Fuel Injection Fuel Rail (LF1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Disassembled Views Camshaft Position Sensor: Locations Disassembled Views Disassembled Views Camshaft Timing Components 1 - Primary Timing Chain Tensioner Bolt 2 - Left Secondary Timing Chain Shoe Bolt 3 - Right Secondary Timing Chain Tensioner 4 - Right Secondary Timing Chain Tensioner Gasket 5 - Right Secondary Timing Chain Shoe 6 - Secondary Timing Chain 7 - Camshaft Position Actuator Bolt 8 Exhaust Camshaft Position Actuator 9 - Camshaft Position Actuator Thrust Washer 10 - Intake Camshaft Position Actuator 11 - Right Secondary Timing Chain Guide 12 - Left Camshaft Intermediate Drive Shaft Sprocket 13 - Camshaft Intermediate Drive Shaft Sprocket Bolt 14 - Left Secondary Timing Chain Shoe 15 - Left Secondary Timing Chain Tensioner Gasket 16 - Left Secondary Timing Chain Tensioner Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Disassembled Views > Page 1086 17 - Left Secondary Timing Chain Guide 18 - Lower Primary Timing Chain Guide 19 - Lower Primary Timing Chain Guide Bolt 20 - Crankshaft Sprocket 21 - Primary Timing Chain 22 - Right Camshaft Intermediate Drive Shaft Sprocket 23 - Upper Primary Timing Chain Guide 24 - Primary Timing Chain Tensioner Gasket 25 - Primary Timing Chain Tensioner Engine Front Cover 1 - Water Pump Pulley Bolt 2 - Water Pump Pulley 3 - Water Pump Assembly 4 - Water Pump Pulley Gasket 5 - Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve Seal 6 - Camshaft Position Sensor Bolt 7 - Camshaft Position Sensor 8 - Camshaft Position Sensor O-ring Seal 9 - Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve Bolt 10 - Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve 11 - Engine Front Cover Gasket 12 - Engine Front Cover Locating Pin Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Disassembled Views > Page 1087 13 - Engine Front Cover 14 - Engine Front Cover Bolt 15 - Engine Front Cover Seal 16 Crankshaft Balancer 17 - Crankshaft Balancer Bolt 18 - Engine Front Cover Bolt 19 - Water Pump Bolt Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Disassembled Views > Page 1088 Camshaft Position Sensor: Locations Powertrain Component Views Powertrain Component Views Front Engine Components (LAF 1 of 2) 1 - Q38 Throttle Body 2 - G18 High Pressure Fuel Pump 3 - B23F Camshaft Position Sensor Intake 4 - B37 Engine Oil Pressure Switch 5 - B68 Knock Sensor 6 - B26 Crankshaft Position Sensor 7 - M64 Starter Motor 8 - Q2 A/C Compressor Clutch 9 - G13 Generator Left Rear Engine Components (LAF) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Disassembled Views > Page 1089 1 - T8D Ignition Coil 4 2 - T8C Ignition Coil 3 3 - T8B Ignition Coil 2 4 - T8A Ignition Coil 1 5 - Q6F Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Intake 6 - Q6E Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Exhaust 7 - B52A Heated Oxygen Sensor 1 8 - B52B Heated Oxygen Sensor 2 9 - B34 Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor 10 - B23E Camshaft Position Sensor - Exhaust 11 - Q12 Evaporative Emission Purge Solenoid Valve Right Rear of the Engine Components (LF1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Disassembled Views > Page 1090 1 - B74 Manifold Absolute Pressure Sensor 2 - T8E Ignition Coil 5 3 - T8C Ignition Coil 3 4 - Q12 Evaporative Emission Purge Solenoid Valve 5 - Q38 Throttle Body 6 - B23B Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 1 Intake 7 - B23D Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 2 Intake 8 - Q6D Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Bank 2 Intake 9 - Q6C Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Bank 2 Exhaust 10 - B23C Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 2 Exhaust 11 - Q6B Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Bank 1 Intake 12 - Q6A Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Bank 1 Exhaust 13 - B23A Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 1 Exhaust 14 - B68A Knock Sensor 1 15 - B26 Crankshaft Position Sensor 16 - T8A Ignition Coil 1 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1091 Camshaft Position Sensor: Diagrams B23A Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 1 Exhaust (LF1) B23B Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 1 Intake (LF1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1092 B23C Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 2 Exhaust (LF1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1093 B23D Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 2 Intake (LF1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1094 B23E Camshaft Position Sensor - Exhaust (LAF) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1095 B23F Camshaft Position Sensor - Intake (LAF) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1096 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Camshaft Position Sensor Replacement - Bank 2 (Left Side) Exhaust Camshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair Camshaft Position Sensor Replacement - Bank 2 (Left Side) Exhaust Camshaft Position Sensor Replacement - Bank 2 (Left Side) Exhaust Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Camshaft Position Sensor Replacement - Bank 2 (Left Side) Exhaust > Page 1099 Camshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair Camshaft Position Sensor Replacement - Bank 2 (Left Side) Intake Camshaft Position Sensor Replacement - Bank 2 (Left Side) Intake Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Camshaft Position Sensor Replacement - Bank 2 (Left Side) Exhaust > Page 1100 Camshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair Camshaft Position Sensor Replacement - Bank 1 (Right Side) Exhaust Camshaft Position Sensor Replacement - Bank 1 (Right Side) Exhaust Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Camshaft Position Sensor Replacement - Bank 2 (Left Side) Exhaust > Page 1101 Camshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair Camshaft Position Sensor Replacement - Bank 1 (Right Side) Intake Camshaft Position Sensor Replacement - Bank 1 (Right Side) Intake Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Disassembled Views Crankshaft Position Sensor: Locations Disassembled Views Disassembled Views Engine Covers and Component Assemblies (1 of 2) (LF1) 1 - Right Camshaft Cover Assembly 2 - Ignition Coil Bolt 3 - Ignition Coil 4 - Spark Plug 5 - Intake Manifold Assembly 6 - Left Camshaft Cover Assembly 7 - Fuel Rail Noise Shield 8 - Fuel Pump Cover 9 - Fuel Pump Cover Bolt 10 - Engine Flywheel 11 - Engine Flywheel Bolt 12 - Engine Assembly 13 - Oil Pan Assembly 14 - Engine Front Cover Assembly 15 - Crankshaft Balancer 16 Crankshaft Balancer Bolt Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Disassembled Views > Page 1106 17 - Crankshaft Position Sensor Heat Shield Bolt - Large 18 - Crankshaft Position Sensor Heat Shield 19 - Crankshaft Position Sensor Heat Shield Bolt - Small Engine Covers and Component Assemblies (2 of 2) (LF1) 1 - Water Outlet Bolt 2 - Water Outlet 3 - Water Outlet O-ring 4 - Water Outlet Seal 5 - Knock Sensor Bolt 6 - Knock Sensor 7 - Engine Coolant Heater Assembly 8 - Crankshaft Position Sensor Bolt 9 - Crankshaft Position Sensor 10 - Crankshaft Position Sensor O-ring 11 - Right Cylinder Head Assembly 12 - Right Cylinder Head Gasket 13 - Lower Fuel Rail Noise Shield 14 - Engine Cooling Thermostat Gasket 15 - Engine Cooling Thermostat 16 - Engine Cooling Thermostat Housing 17 - Engine Cooling Thermostat Bolt - Short 18 - Engine Cooling Thermostat Housing Bolt - Long Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Disassembled Views > Page 1107 19 - Fuel Feed Pipe Assembly 20 - Fuel Feed Pipe Assembly Bolt 21 - Fuel Feed Intermediate Pipe Assembly 22 - Fuel Pump Gasket 23 - Fuel Pump O-ring Seal 24 - Fuel Pump 25 - Fuel Pump Bolt 26 - Left Cylinder Head Assembly 27 - Left Cylinder Head Gasket 28 - Oil Level Indicator 29 Oil Level Indicator Handle O-ring 30 - Oil Level Indicator Tube Bolt 31 - Oil Level Indicator Tube 32 - Oil Level Indicator Tube O-ring 33 - Oil Filter Adapter Assembly 34 - Engine Short Block Assembly 35 - Oil Pump Assembly 36 - Timing Drive Assembly Camshaft Cover Assembly 250 - Left Camshaft Cover 251 - Left Camshaft Cover Gasket 252 - Right Camshaft Cover Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Disassembled Views > Page 1108 253 - Right Camshaft Cover Gasket 254 - Camshaft Cover Spark Plug Port Seal 254 - Camshaft Cover Spark Plug Port Seal 255 - Camshaft Cover Bolt 255 - Camshaft Cover Bolt 256 - Camshaft Cover Bolt Insulator 256 - Camshaft Cover Bolt Insulator 257 - Ignition Coil Bolt Thread Insert 258 Oil Fill Cap 259 - Oil Fill O-ring 259 - Oil Fill O-ring 260 - Left Camshaft Cover PCV Fitting 261 Right Camshaft Cover PCV Fitting Orifice 262 - Oil Fill Tube 263 - Left Camshaft Cover PCV Fitting O-ring 265 - Left Camshaft Housing Cover Insulator 266 - Right Camshaft Housing Cover Insulator 704 - Ignition Coil 704 - Ignition Coil 705 - Ignition Coil Bolt 705 - Ignition Coil Bolt 719 - Spark Plug 719 - Spark Plug Camshaft Timing Components Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Disassembled Views > Page 1109 1 - Primary Timing Chain Tensioner Bolt 2 - Left Secondary Timing Chain Shoe Bolt 3 - Right Secondary Timing Chain Tensioner 4 - Right Secondary Timing Chain Tensioner Gasket 5 - Right Secondary Timing Chain Shoe 6 - Secondary Timing Chain 7 - Camshaft Position Actuator Bolt 8 Exhaust Camshaft Position Actuator 9 - Camshaft Position Actuator Thrust Washer 10 - Intake Camshaft Position Actuator 11 - Right Secondary Timing Chain Guide 12 - Left Camshaft Intermediate Drive Shaft Sprocket 13 - Camshaft Intermediate Drive Shaft Sprocket Bolt 14 - Left Secondary Timing Chain Shoe 15 - Left Secondary Timing Chain Tensioner Gasket 16 - Left Secondary Timing Chain Tensioner 17 - Left Secondary Timing Chain Guide 18 - Lower Primary Timing Chain Guide 19 - Lower Primary Timing Chain Guide Bolt 20 - Crankshaft Sprocket 21 Primary Timing Chain 22 - Right Camshaft Intermediate Drive Shaft Sprocket 23 - Upper Primary Timing Chain Guide 24 - Primary Timing Chain Tensioner Gasket Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Disassembled Views > Page 1110 25 - Primary Timing Chain Tensioner Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Disassembled Views > Page 1111 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Locations Powertrain Component Views Powertrain Component Views Front Engine Components (LAF 1 of 2) 1 - Q38 Throttle Body 2 - G18 High Pressure Fuel Pump 3 - B23F Camshaft Position Sensor Intake 4 - B37 Engine Oil Pressure Switch 5 - B68 Knock Sensor 6 - B26 Crankshaft Position Sensor 7 - M64 Starter Motor 8 - Q2 A/C Compressor Clutch 9 - G13 Generator Right Rear of the Engine Components (LF1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Disassembled Views > Page 1112 1 - B74 Manifold Absolute Pressure Sensor 2 - T8E Ignition Coil 5 3 - T8C Ignition Coil 3 4 - Q12 Evaporative Emission Purge Solenoid Valve 5 - Q38 Throttle Body 6 - B23B Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 1 Intake 7 - B23D Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 2 Intake 8 - Q6D Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Bank 2 Intake 9 - Q6C Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Bank 2 Exhaust 10 - B23C Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 2 Exhaust 11 - Q6B Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Bank 1 Intake 12 - Q6A Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Bank 1 Exhaust 13 - B23A Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 1 Exhaust 14 - B68A Knock Sensor 1 15 - B26 Crankshaft Position Sensor 16 - T8A Ignition Coil 1 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1113 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Diagrams B26 Crankshaft Position Sensor Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1114 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Testing and Inspection Crankshaft Position System Variation Learn Note: The Crankshaft Position System Variation Learn procedure is also required when the following service procedures have been performed, regardless of whether DTC P0315 is set: * An engine replacement * An engine control module (ECM) replacement * A crankshaft balancer replacement * A crankshaft replacement * A crankshaft position sensor replacement * Any engine repairs which disturb the crankshaft to crankshaft position sensor relationship. Note: The ECM monitors certain component signals to determine if all the conditions are met to continue with the crankshaft position System Variation Learn Procedure. 1. Install a scan tool. 2. Monitor the ECM for DTCs with a scan tool. If other DTCs are set, except DTC P0315, refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle ( See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Descriptions/Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle) for the applicable DTC that set. 3. With a scan tool, select the Crankshaft Position System Variation Learn Procedure and perform the following: 1. Block drive wheels. 2. Set parking brake. 3. DO NOT apply brake pedal. 4. Cycle ignition from OFF to ON. 5. Apply and hold brake pedal for the duration of the procedure. 6. Start and idle engine. 7. Turn the air conditioning (A/C) OFF. 8. The vehicle must remain in Park or Neutral. Note: While the learn procedure is in progress, release the throttle immediately when the engine starts to decelerate. The engine control is returned to the operator and the engine responds to throttle position after the learn procedure is complete. 9. Accelerate to wide open throttle (WOT) and release when the fuel cut-off occurs. 4. The scan tool displays Test In Progress. 5. The scan tool displays Learn Successful. 6. Verify DTC P0315 ran and passed This Ignition Cycle. ‹› If DTC P0315 failed or did not run This Ignition Cycle, or another DTC is present, refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle ( See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Descriptions/Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle) for the applicable DTC that set. 7. Once the Learn Procedure has successfully completed, and in order to store the crankshaft position system variation values in the ECM, turn OFF the ignition and verify all vehicle systems are OFF. This may take up to 2 minutes. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1115 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair Crankshaft Position Sensor Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Locations Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: Locations Instrument Panel/Center Console Component Views Steering Column Components 1 - S78 Turn Signal/Multifunction Switch 2 - X85 Steering Wheel Air Bag Coil 3 - S82 Windshield Wiper/Washer Switch 4 - S39 Ignition Switch 5 - M93 Ignition Cylinder Lock Control Solenoid Actuator 6 - B101 Immobilizer Antenna 7 - B99 Steering Wheel Angle Sensor Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Locations > Page 1120 Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: Service and Repair Ignition Lock Cylinder Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. Refer to Battery Negative Cable Disconnection and Connection (See: Starting and Charging/Battery/Battery Cable/Negative/Service and Repair/Battery Negative Cable Disconnection and Connection). 2. Remove the steering column shroud. Refer to Steering Column Shroud Replacement (See: Steering and Suspension/Steering/Steering Column/Service and Repair/Steering Column Shroud Replacement). 3. Insert the key into the ignition lock cylinder and turn the key to the RUN position. 4. Depress the retainer through the lock housing access hole (2) with a small Allen wrench or similar pick-type tool. 5. Remove the ignition lock cylinder (1) from the ignition and start switch housing. Installation Procedure 1. If you are installing a new ignition lock cylinder, code the lock cylinder. Refer to Lock Cylinder Coding - Ignition (See: Body and Frame/Locks/Service and Repair/Lock Cylinder Coding - Ignition). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Locations > Page 1121 2. Turn the key to the RUN position and insert ignition lock cylinder (1) into the ignition and start switch housing. 3. Turn the key to the LOCK position and remove the key from the ignition lock cylinder. 4. Install the steering column shroud. Refer to Steering Column Shroud Replacement (See: Steering and Suspension/Steering/Steering Column/Service and Repair/Steering Column Shroud Replacement). 5. Connect the battery negative cable. Refer to Battery Negative Cable Disconnection and Connection (See: Starting and Charging/Battery/Battery Cable/Negative/Service and Repair/Battery Negative Cable Disconnection and Connection). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Disassembled Views Knock Sensor: Locations Disassembled Views Disassembled Views Engine Covers and Component Assemblies (2 of 2) (LF1) 1 - Water Outlet Bolt 2 - Water Outlet 3 - Water Outlet O-ring 4 - Water Outlet Seal 5 - Knock Sensor Bolt 6 - Knock Sensor 7 - Engine Coolant Heater Assembly 8 - Crankshaft Position Sensor Bolt 9 - Crankshaft Position Sensor 10 - Crankshaft Position Sensor O-ring 11 - Right Cylinder Head Assembly 12 - Right Cylinder Head Gasket 13 - Lower Fuel Rail Noise Shield 14 - Engine Cooling Thermostat Gasket 15 - Engine Cooling Thermostat 16 - Engine Cooling Thermostat Housing Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Disassembled Views > Page 1126 17 - Engine Cooling Thermostat Bolt - Short 18 - Engine Cooling Thermostat Housing Bolt - Long 19 - Fuel Feed Pipe Assembly 20 - Fuel Feed Pipe Assembly Bolt 21 - Fuel Feed Intermediate Pipe Assembly 22 - Fuel Pump Gasket 23 - Fuel Pump O-ring Seal 24 - Fuel Pump 25 - Fuel Pump Bolt 26 - Left Cylinder Head Assembly 27 - Left Cylinder Head Gasket 28 - Oil Level Indicator 29 Oil Level Indicator Handle O-ring 30 - Oil Level Indicator Tube Bolt 31 - Oil Level Indicator Tube 32 - Oil Level Indicator Tube O-ring 33 - Oil Filter Adapter Assembly 34 - Engine Short Block Assembly 35 - Oil Pump Assembly 36 - Timing Drive Assembly Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Disassembled Views > Page 1127 Knock Sensor: Locations Powertrain Component Views Powertrain Component Views Front Engine Components (LAF 1 of 2) 1 - Q38 Throttle Body 2 - G18 High Pressure Fuel Pump 3 - B23F Camshaft Position Sensor Intake 4 - B37 Engine Oil Pressure Switch 5 - B68 Knock Sensor 6 - B26 Crankshaft Position Sensor 7 - M64 Starter Motor 8 - Q2 A/C Compressor Clutch 9 - G13 Generator Left Front of the Engine Components (LF1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Disassembled Views > Page 1128 1 - T8B Ignition Coil 2 2 - T8D Ignition Coil 4 3 - T8F Ignition Coil 6 4 - G18 High Pressure Fuel Pump 5 - B34 Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor 6 - M64 Starter Motor 7 - B68B Knock Sensor 2 8 - B37 Engine Oil Pressure Switch 9 - B1 A/C Refrigerant Pressure Sensor 10 - Q2 A/C Compressor Clutch 11 - G13 Generator Right Rear of the Engine Components (LF1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Disassembled Views > Page 1129 1 - B74 Manifold Absolute Pressure Sensor 2 - T8E Ignition Coil 5 3 - T8C Ignition Coil 3 4 - Q12 Evaporative Emission Purge Solenoid Valve 5 - Q38 Throttle Body 6 - B23B Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 1 Intake 7 - B23D Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 2 Intake 8 - Q6D Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Bank 2 Intake 9 - Q6C Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Bank 2 Exhaust 10 - B23C Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 2 Exhaust 11 - Q6B Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Bank 1 Intake 12 - Q6A Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Bank 1 Exhaust 13 - B23A Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 1 Exhaust 14 - B68A Knock Sensor 1 15 - B26 Crankshaft Position Sensor 16 - T8A Ignition Coil 1 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1130 Knock Sensor: Diagrams B68 Knock Sensor (LAF) B68A Knock Sensor 1 (LF1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1131 B68B Knock Sensor 2 (LF1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1132 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Knock Sensor Replacement Bank 1 Knock Sensor: Service and Repair Knock Sensor Replacement - Bank 1 Knock Sensor Replacement - Bank 1 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Knock Sensor Replacement Bank 1 > Page 1135 Knock Sensor: Service and Repair Knock Sensor Replacement - Bank 2 Knock Sensor Replacement - Bank 2 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > SIR Identification Views Impact Sensor: Locations SIR Identification Views SIR Identification Views The SIR Identification Views shown below illustrate the approximate location of all SIR components available for the vehicle. This will assist in determining the appropriate SIR Disabling and Enabling for a given service procedure. Refer to SIR Disabling and Enabling (See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming/Service and Repair). 1 - Front End Sensor - Right-Located under the front hood in the engine compartment 2 Instrument Panel Air Bag-Located at the top right under the instrument panel 3 - Roof Rail Air Bag Right-Located under the headliner, extending from the passenger front windshield pillar to the passenger rear windshield pillar 4 - Right Front Side Impact Sensor-Located under the right front door trim near the lower rear of the door frame 5 - Inflatable Restraint Sensing and Diagnostic Module (SDM)-Located underneath the vehicle carpet under the center console 6 - Passenger Presence Detection System-Located under the front passenger sear trim cover (if equipped) 7 Right Front Seat Belt Anchor Tensioner-Located on the outboard side of the passenger seat (if equipped) 8 - Passenger Side Seat Impact Air Bag-Located on the seat back of passenger seat (if equipped) 9 - Right Front Seat Belt Retractor Pretensioner-Located under the trim near the bottom of the center pillar 10 - Right Rear Side Impact Sensor-Located under the right rear door trim near the lower rear of the door frame 11 - Right Roof Rail Module-Located behind the garnish molding on the upper rear pillar 12 - Left Roof Rail Module-Located behind garnish molding on the upper rear pillar 13 - Left Rear Side Impact Sensor-Located under the left rear door trim near the lower rear of the door frame 14 - Left Front Seat Belt Retractor Pretensioner-Located under the trim near the bottom of the center pillar 15 - Driver Side Seat Impact Air Bag-Located on the seat back of the driver seat 16 - Left Front Seat belt Anchor Tensioner-Located on the outboard side of the driver seat 17 - Left Front Side Impact Sensor-Located under the left front door trim near the lower rear of the door frame 18 - Left Roof Rail Air Bag-Located under the headliner, extending from the driver front windshield pillar to the driver rear windshield pillar 19 - Steering Wheel Air Bag-Located on the steering wheel 20 - Vehicle Battery-Located at the front left of the engine compartment. 21 - Left Front End Sensor-Located under the front hood in the engine compartment Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > SIR Identification Views > Page 1141 Impact Sensor: Locations Door Component Views Door Component Views Driver Door Components 1 - A23D Door Latch Assembly - Driver 2 - A9A Outside Rearview Mirror - Driver 3 - E1C Accent Lamp - Driver Door Handle (LTZ or SLT) 4 - K96L Mirror Control Module - Left (LTZ or SLT) 5 S52S Outside Rearview Mirror Switch 6 - P19G Speaker - Left Front 7 - M74D Window Motor Driver 8 - B63LF Side Impact Sensor - Left Front 9 - S79D Window Switch - Driver 10 - E1D Accent Lamp - Driver Door (LTZ or SLT) Passenger Door Components Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > SIR Identification Views > Page 1142 1 - A9B Outside Rearview Mirror - Passenger 2 - E1M Accent Lamp - Passenger Door Handle (LTZ or SLT) 3 - S79P Window Switch - Passenger 4 - A23P Door Latch Assembly - Passenger 5 - E1P Accent Lamp - Passenger Door (LTZ or SLT) 6 - B63RF Side Impact Sensor - Right Front 7 M74P Window Motor - Passenger 8 - P19U Speaker - Right Front Left Rear Door Components Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > SIR Identification Views > Page 1143 1 - A23LR Door Latch Assembly - Left Rear 2 - S79LR Window Switch - Left Rear 3 - M74LR Window Motor - Left Rear 4 - P19K Speaker - Left Rear 5 - B63LR Side Impact Sensor - Left Rear Right Rear Door Components Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > SIR Identification Views > Page 1144 1 - S79RR Window Switch - Right Rear 2 - A23RR Door Latch Assembly - Right Rear 3 - M74RR Window Motor - Right Rear 4 - B63RR Side Impact Sensor - Right Rear 5 - P19X Speaker - Right Rear Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1145 Impact Sensor: Diagrams B59L Front Impact Sensor - Left B59R Front Impact Sensor - Right Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1146 B63LF Side Impact Sensor - Left Front Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1147 B63LR Side Impact Sensor - Left Rear Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1148 B63RF Side Impact Sensor - Right Front Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1149 B63RR Side Impact Sensor - Right Rear Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1150 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front End Inflatable Restraint Discriminating Sensor Replacement Impact Sensor: Service and Repair Front End Inflatable Restraint Discriminating Sensor Replacement Front End Inflatable Restraint Discriminating Sensor Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front End Inflatable Restraint Discriminating Sensor Replacement > Page 1153 Impact Sensor: Service and Repair Inflatable Restraint Side Impact Sensor Replacement - Front Side Door Inflatable Restraint Side Impact Sensor Replacement - Front Side Door Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front End Inflatable Restraint Discriminating Sensor Replacement > Page 1154 Impact Sensor: Service and Repair Inflatable Restraint Side Impact Sensor Replacement - Rear Side Door Inflatable Restraint Side Impact Sensor Replacement - Rear Side Door Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Buckle Switch > Component Information > Locations Seat Belt Buckle Switch: Locations Passenger Compartment/Roof Component Views Driver Seat Components 1 - M56D Seat Recline Motor - Driver (AE8) 2 - E14A Seat Heating Element - Driver Back (KA1) 3 P22E Video Display - Driver Seatback (UWG) 4 - F106L Side Air Bag - Left 5 - M52D Seat Lumbar Support Horizontal Motor - Driver 6 - M51D Seat Horizontal Motor - Driver (AE8) 7 - K40 Seat Memory Control Module (LTZ or SLT) or K29 Seat Heating Control Module (KA1 without LTZ or SLT) 8 - F113D Seat Belt Anchor Pretensioner - Driver 9 - M55D Seat Rear Vertical Motor (AE8) or M57D Seat Vertical Motor (without AE8) 10 - M50D Seat Front Vertical Motor - Driver 11 - S65D Seat Lumbar Support Switch - Driver 12 - S64D Seat Adjuster Switch - Driver (without AE8) 13 S64D Seat Adjuster Switch - Driver (AE8) 14 - S47D Seat Memory Switch - Driver (LTZ or SLT) 15 - E14B Seat Heating Element - Driver Cushion (KA1) 16 - B88D Seat Belt Switch - Driver Passenger Seat Components Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Buckle Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1158 1 - F106R Side Air Bag - Right 2 - P22F Video Display - Passenger Seatback (UWG) 3 - E14C Seat Heating Element - Passenger Back (KA1) 4 - B88P Seat Belt Switch - Passenger 5 - K85 Passenger Presence Detection Module 6 - E14D Seat Heating Element - Passenger Cushion (KA1) 7 - F113P Seat Belt Anchor Pretensioner - Passenger Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Buckle Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1159 Seat Belt Buckle Switch: Diagrams B88D Seat Belt Switch - Driver B88P Seat Belt Switch - Passenger F113D Seat Belt Anchor Pretensioner - Driver Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Buckle Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1160 F113P Seat Belt Anchor Pretensioner - Passsenger Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Buckle Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1161 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Restraint Systems - Accessory Electrical Interference Seat Occupant Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins Restraint Systems - Accessory Electrical Interference INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 08-09-41-007D Date: January 28, 2011 Subject: Passenger Presence System (PPS) May Command Passenger Airbag Indicator and Seat Belt Reminder On When Electronic Devices (Computers, MP3 Players, Cell Phones, Diagnostic Scan Tool, etc.) Are Placed on Front Passenger Seat, DTCs 5045, B0074 0F, B101D or B0081 Set Models: 2009-2011 Buick Enclave 2009-2011 Cadillac CTS 2010-2011 Cadillac SRX 2009-2011 Chevrolet Cobalt (except SS model), HHR (except SS model), Impala, Traverse 2010-2011 Chevrolet Equinox 2009-2011 GMC Acadia 2010-2011 GMC Terrain 2009-2010 Saturn OUTLOOK 2010 Saturn VUE ' Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2011 model year. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 08-09-41-007C (Section 09 - Restraints). Dealers should be aware that when certain electronic devices (computers, MP3 players, cell phones, Tech 2(R), etc.) are placed on the front passenger seat, the front passenger airbag indicator may illuminate. The seat belt reminder light/chime may also be activated. This is due to the fact that some electronic devices placed on the front passenger seat may interfere with the electric field generated by the PPS system, causing it to enable (turn ON) the passenger airbag and turn on the safety belt reminder light and chime - even though the seat is not occupied. The electronic device does not necessarily need to be turned on to cause this condition. DTCs 5045, B0081 0F, B0074 0F or B101D may set depending on the vehicle. If you remove the electronic device from the front passenger seat, the DTC will go into history. If this happens, clear all SDM and PPS DTCs. If the DTC is still current, follow the service procedure in SI for that DTC. If the DTCs do not return, no repair is needed (do not replace any parts for this condition). Note Never rest the diagnostic scan tool or components on the passenger front seat or touch the passenger front seat while the diagnostic scan tool is in contact with your body. This may cause the SIR lamp to illuminate while holding the diagnostic scan tool because your body can transfer the electronic "noise" to the sensor mat in the passenger front seat. Please advise the customer to avoid placing the electronic device in the front passenger seat in the future. Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Restraint Systems - Accessory Electrical Interference > Page 1166 Seat Occupant Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins Restraints - Passenger Presence System Information INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 06-08-50-009F Date: December 23, 2010 Subject: Information on Passenger Presence Sensing System (PPS or PSS) Concerns With Custom Upholstery, Accessory Seat Heaters or Other Comfort Enhancing Devices Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks Equipped with Passenger Presence Sensing System Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 06-08-50-009E (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Concerns About Safety and Alterations to the Front Passenger Seat Important ON A GM VEHICLE EQUIPPED WITH A PASSENGER SENSING SYSTEM, USE THE SEAT COVERS AND OTHER SEAT-RELATED EQUIPMENT AS RELEASED BY GM FOR THAT VEHICLE. DO NOT ALTER THE SEAT COVERS OR SEAT-RELATED EQUIPMENT. ANY ALTERATIONS TO SEAT COVERS OR GM ACCESSORIES DEFEATS THE INTENDED DESIGN OF THE SYSTEM. GM WILL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY PROBLEMS CAUSED BY USE OF SUCH IMPROPER SEAT ALTERATIONS, INCLUDING ANY WARRANTY REPAIRS INCURRED. The front passenger seat in many GM vehicles is equipped with a passenger sensing system that will turn off the right front passenger's frontal airbag under certain conditions, such as when an infant or child seat is present. In some vehicles, the passenger sensing system will also turn off the right front passenger's seat mounted side impact airbag. For the system to function properly, sensors are used in the seat to detect the presence of a properly-seated occupant. The passenger sensing system may not operate properly if the original seat trim is replaced (1) by non-GM covers, upholstery or trim, or (2) by GM covers, upholstery or trim designed for a different vehicle or (3) by GM covers, upholstery or trim that has been altered by a trim shop, or (4) if any object, such as an aftermarket seat heater or a comfort enhancing pad or device is installed under the seat fabric or between the occupant and the seat fabric. Aftermarket Seat Heaters, Custom Upholstery, and Comfort Enhancing Pads or Devices Important ON A GM VEHICLE EQUIPPED WITH A PASSENGER SENSING SYSTEM, USE ONLY SEAT COVERS AND OTHER SEAT-RELATED EQUIPMENT RELEASED AS GM ACCESSORIES FOR THAT VEHICLE. DO NOT USE ANY OTHER TYPE OF SEAT COVERS OR SEAT-RELATED EQUIPMENT, OR GM ACCESSORIES RELEASED FOR OTHER VEHICLE APPLICATIONS. GM WILL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY PROBLEMS CAUSED BY USE OF SUCH IMPROPER SEAT ACCESSORIES, INCLUDING ANY WARRANTY REPAIRS MADE NECESSARY BY SUCH USE. Many types of aftermarket accessories are available to customers, upfitting shops, and dealers. Some of these devices sit on top of, or are Velcro(R) strapped to the seat while others such as seat heaters are installed under the seat fabric. Additionally, seat covers made of leather or other materials may have different padding thickness installed that could prevent the Passenger Sensing System from functioning properly. Never alter the vehicle seats. Never add pads or other devices to the seat cushion, as this may interfere with the operation of the Passenger Sensing System and either prevent proper deployment of the passenger airbag or prevent proper suppression of the passenger air bag. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 1167 Seat Occupant Sensor: Locations Passenger Compartment/Roof Component Views Passenger Seat Components 1 - F106R Side Air Bag - Right 2 - P22F Video Display - Passenger Seatback (UWG) 3 - E14C Seat Heating Element - Passenger Back (KA1) 4 - B88P Seat Belt Switch - Passenger 5 - K85 Passenger Presence Detection Module 6 - E14D Seat Heating Element - Passenger Cushion (KA1) 7 - F113P Seat Belt Anchor Pretensioner - Passenger Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 1168 Seat Occupant Sensor: Diagrams K85 Passenger Presence Detection Module Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 1169 Seat Occupant Sensor: Service and Repair Inflatable Restraint Front Passenger Presence Sensor Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Battery Current Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams Battery Current Sensor: Diagrams B18 Battery Current Sensor Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Locations Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: Locations Instrument Panel/Center Console Component Views Steering Column Components 1 - S78 Turn Signal/Multifunction Switch 2 - X85 Steering Wheel Air Bag Coil 3 - S82 Windshield Wiper/Washer Switch 4 - S39 Ignition Switch 5 - M93 Ignition Cylinder Lock Control Solenoid Actuator 6 - B101 Immobilizer Antenna 7 - B99 Steering Wheel Angle Sensor Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Locations > Page 1178 Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: Service and Repair Ignition Lock Cylinder Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. Refer to Battery Negative Cable Disconnection and Connection (See: Starting and Charging/Battery/Battery Cable/Negative/Service and Repair/Battery Negative Cable Disconnection and Connection). 2. Remove the steering column shroud. Refer to Steering Column Shroud Replacement (See: Steering and Suspension/Steering/Steering Column/Service and Repair/Steering Column Shroud Replacement). 3. Insert the key into the ignition lock cylinder and turn the key to the RUN position. 4. Depress the retainer through the lock housing access hole (2) with a small Allen wrench or similar pick-type tool. 5. Remove the ignition lock cylinder (1) from the ignition and start switch housing. Installation Procedure 1. If you are installing a new ignition lock cylinder, code the lock cylinder. Refer to Lock Cylinder Coding - Ignition (See: Body and Frame/Locks/Service and Repair/Lock Cylinder Coding - Ignition). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Locations > Page 1179 2. Turn the key to the RUN position and insert ignition lock cylinder (1) into the ignition and start switch housing. 3. Turn the key to the LOCK position and remove the key from the ignition lock cylinder. 4. Install the steering column shroud. Refer to Steering Column Shroud Replacement (See: Steering and Suspension/Steering/Steering Column/Service and Repair/Steering Column Shroud Replacement). 5. Connect the battery negative cable. Refer to Battery Negative Cable Disconnection and Connection (See: Starting and Charging/Battery/Battery Cable/Negative/Service and Repair/Battery Negative Cable Disconnection and Connection). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering > Steering Angle Sensor > Component Information > Locations Steering Angle Sensor: Locations Instrument Panel/Center Console Component Views Steering Column Components 1 - S78 Turn Signal/Multifunction Switch 2 - X85 Steering Wheel Air Bag Coil 3 - S82 Windshield Wiper/Washer Switch 4 - S39 Ignition Switch 5 - M93 Ignition Cylinder Lock Control Solenoid Actuator 6 - B101 Immobilizer Antenna 7 - B99 Steering Wheel Angle Sensor Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering > Steering Angle Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1185 Steering Angle Sensor: Diagrams B99 Steering Wheel Angle Sensor Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering > Steering Angle Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures Steering Angle Sensor: Procedures Steering Angle Sensor Centering The steering angle sensor does not require a centering often. Centering of the steering angle sensor might be required after certain service procedures are performed. Some of these procedures are as follows: * Electronic brake control module (EBCM) replacement * Steering angle sensor replacement * Steering gear replacement * Steering column replacement * Collision or other physical damage The steering angle sensor centering procedure can be completed with a scan tool using the following steps: 1. Using the steering wheel, align the front wheels forward. 2. Apply the parking brake, or set the transmission in the P position. 3. Install the scan tool to the data link connector. 4. Ignition ON, engine OFF 5. Select Steering Wheel Angle Sensor Reset in the Steering Wheel Angle Sensor Module Configuration/Reset Functions list. 6. Follow the scan tool directions to complete the learn procedure. 7. Select Steering Wheel Angle Sensor Learn in the Steering Wheel Angle Sensor Module Configuration/Reset Functions list. 8. Follow the scan tool directions to complete the learn procedure. 9. Select Steering Wheel Angle Sensor Learn in the EBCM Configuration/Reset Functions list. 10. Follow the scan tool directions to complete the learn procedure. 11. Clear any DTCs that may be set. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering > Steering Angle Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1188 Steering Angle Sensor: Removal and Replacement Steering Angle Sensor Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Suspension > Steering Angle Sensor > Component Information > Locations Steering Angle Sensor: Locations Instrument Panel/Center Console Component Views Steering Column Components 1 - S78 Turn Signal/Multifunction Switch 2 - X85 Steering Wheel Air Bag Coil 3 - S82 Windshield Wiper/Washer Switch 4 - S39 Ignition Switch 5 - M93 Ignition Cylinder Lock Control Solenoid Actuator 6 - B101 Immobilizer Antenna 7 - B99 Steering Wheel Angle Sensor Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Suspension > Steering Angle Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1193 Steering Angle Sensor: Diagrams B99 Steering Wheel Angle Sensor Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Suspension > Steering Angle Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures Steering Angle Sensor: Procedures Steering Angle Sensor Centering The steering angle sensor does not require a centering often. Centering of the steering angle sensor might be required after certain service procedures are performed. Some of these procedures are as follows: * Electronic brake control module (EBCM) replacement * Steering angle sensor replacement * Steering gear replacement * Steering column replacement * Collision or other physical damage The steering angle sensor centering procedure can be completed with a scan tool using the following steps: 1. Using the steering wheel, align the front wheels forward. 2. Apply the parking brake, or set the transmission in the P position. 3. Install the scan tool to the data link connector. 4. Ignition ON, engine OFF 5. Select Steering Wheel Angle Sensor Reset in the Steering Wheel Angle Sensor Module Configuration/Reset Functions list. 6. Follow the scan tool directions to complete the learn procedure. 7. Select Steering Wheel Angle Sensor Learn in the Steering Wheel Angle Sensor Module Configuration/Reset Functions list. 8. Follow the scan tool directions to complete the learn procedure. 9. Select Steering Wheel Angle Sensor Learn in the EBCM Configuration/Reset Functions list. 10. Follow the scan tool directions to complete the learn procedure. 11. Clear any DTCs that may be set. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Suspension > Steering Angle Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1196 Steering Angle Sensor: Removal and Replacement Steering Angle Sensor Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > TPMS System - Service And Re-Learning Sensor IDs Tire Pressure Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins TPMS System - Service And Re-Learning Sensor IDs INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 10-03-16-001 Date: July 19, 2010 Subject: TPMS System Service and Re-Learning Sensor IDs Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2 2009 and Prior HUMMER H3 2010 and Prior Saturn Models 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X with Wheel-Mounted Tire Pressure Sensors In the event that the spare tire, which is normally not equipped with a tire pressure monitor (TPM) sensor, is installed in place of one of the road tires and the vehicle is driven above 40 km/h (25 mph) for 20 minutes or more, the TPM indicator icon on the instrument panel cluster (IPC) will flash for approximately one minute and then remain on steady each time the ignition is turned ON, indicating a diagnostic trouble code (DTC) has been set. The driver information center (DIC), if equipped, will also display a SERVICE TIRE MONITOR type message. When the road tire is repaired and reinstalled in the original location, the TPM indicator icon illumination and DIC message may remain displayed until the DTC is cleared. To ensure that the TPM indicator and the DIC message are cleared after service, it is necessary to clear any TPM DTCs using a scan tool. If a scan tool is unavailable, performing the TPM relearn procedure using a TPM diagnostic tool will provide the same results. It is advised to perform the relearn procedure away from other vehicles to prevent picking up a stray sensor signal. If one or more of the TPM sensors are missing or damaged and have been replaced, then the relearn procedure must be performed. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 1202 Tire Pressure Sensor: Testing and Inspection Tire Pressure Indicator Sensor Learn Special Tools J-46079 Tire Pressure Monitor Diagnostic Tool Relearn Mode Description The tire pressure monitor (TPM) system uses the instrument panel cluster (IPC), body control module (BCM), 4 radio frequency transmitting pressure sensors, and the serial data circuit to perform the TPM Relearn mode functions. The sensor Relearn procedure must be performed after every tire rotation, BCM replacement, or sensor replacement. Once the relearn mode has been enabled, each of the sensors unique identification codes can be learned into the BCM memory. When a sensor ID has been learned, the BCM sends a serial data message to the BCM to sound a horn chirp. This verifies the sensor has transmitted its ID and the BCM has received and learned it. The BCM must learn the sensor IDs in the proper sequence to determine correct sensor location. The first learned ID is assigned to the left front location, the second to right front, the third to right rear and the fourth to left rear. The turn signals will individually illuminate indicating which location is to be learned in the proper sequence. Sensor Functions Using J-46079 or EL-46079 Each sensor has an internal low frequency coil. When the J-46079 is used in activate mode, it produces a low frequency transmission that activates the sensor. The sensor responds to a low frequency activation by transmitting in learn mode. When the BCM receives a learn mode transmission while in TPM learn mode, it will assign that sensors ID to the location on the vehicle relative to the order in which it was learned. Sensor Functions Using Pressure Increase/Decrease Method Each sensor takes a pressure measurement sample once every 30 seconds while in stationary mode. If the tire pressure increases, or decreases by more than 8.3 kPa (1.2 psi) from the last pressure measurement, another measurement will occur immediately to verify the change in pressure. If a pressure change has indeed occurred, the sensor transmits in Learn mode. When the BCM receives a Learn mode transmission while in TPM learn mode, it will assign that sensor's ID to the location on the vehicle relative to the order in which it was learned. Relearn Mode Cancellation The Relearn mode will cancel if the ignition is cycled to OFF or if more than 2 minutes has elapsed for any sensor that has not been learned. If the relearn mode is cancelled before the first sensor is learned, the original sensor IDs will be maintained. If the relearn mode is canceled after the first sensor is learned, the following will occur: * All stored sensor IDs will be invalidated in the BCM memory. * If equipped, the DIC will display dashes instead of tire pressures. * DTC C0775 will be set. These conditions will now require the relearn procedure to be repeated for the system to function properly. TPM Relearn Procedure Note: If using the scan tool to enable the relearn mode, the J-46079 must be used to activate the sensors. When this preferred method is used, any stray sensor signals will not affect the relearn procedure. In the event a particular sensor's information is displayed on the special tool upon activation but the horn does not chirp, it may be necessary to rotate the wheel valve stem to a different position due to the sensor signal is being blocked by another component. If using the DIC buttons to enable the relearn mode, the J-46079 or Pressure Increase/Decrease Method may be used. Before proceeding with this method, ensure that no other learn procedure is being performed simultaneously or that tire pressures are not being adjusted on another TPM equipped vehicle within close proximity. Stray signals from other TPM equipped vehicles just driving by can be inadvertently learned. If any random horn chirps are heard from the vehicle while performing the learn procedure, most likely a stray sensor has been learned and the procedure will need to be cancelled and repeated. Under these circumstances, performing the TPM Relearn Procedure away from other vehicles would be highly recommended. In the event a particular sensor activation does not cause the horn to chirp, it may be necessary to rotate the wheel valve stem to a different position due to the sensor signal is being blocked by another component. Preferred Scan Tool Relearn Enable Method 1. Apply park brake (manual transmission only). 2. Ignition ON, using a scan tool, initiate the Tire Pressure Sensors Learn mode. A double horn chirp will sound indicating the Relearn mode has been enabled. The left front turn signal will also be illuminated. 3. Starting with the left front tire, active the sensor by holding the antenna of the J-46079 aimed upward against the tire sidewall close to the wheel rim at the valve stem location. Press and release the Activate button and wait for a horn chirp. Once the horn chirp has sounded, the sensor information is learned and the turn signal in the next location to be learned will illuminate. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 1203 4. After the horn chirp has sounded and the right front turn signal is illuminated, repeat step 2 for the remaining 3 sensors in the following order: 1. Right front 2. Right rear 3. Left rear 5. When the left rear sensor has been learned and a double horn chirp has sounded, the learn process is complete and the BCM exits the Relearn mode. 6. Ignition OFF, adjust all tires to the recommended pressures. Refer to Vehicle Certification, Tire Placard, Anti-Theft, and Service Parts ID Label ( See: Application and ID/Vehicle Certification, Tire Placard, Anti-Theft and Service Parts ID Label). Alternate DIC Relearn Enable Method 1. Apply park brake (manual transmission only). 2. Ignition ON, activate the Relearn mode with the driver information center (DIC) display controls. A double horn chirp sounds indicating the Relearn mode has been enabled and the left front turn signal will also be illuminated. 3. Starting with the left front tire, activate the tire pressure sensor by using one of the following methods: * Hold the antenna of the J-46079 aimed upward against the tire sidewall close to the wheel rim at the valve stem location. Press and release the activate button and wait for a horn chirp. Once the horn chirp has sounded, the sensor information is learned and the turn signal in the next location to be learned will illuminate. Warning Over inflating tires may cause personal injury or damage to the tires and wheels. When increasing tire pressure do not exceed the maximum inflation pressure as noted on the tire sidewall. * Increase/decrease the tire pressure for 8-10 seconds then wait for a horn chirp. The horn chirp may occur before or up to 30 seconds after the 8-10 second pressure increase/decrease time period has been reached. Once the horn chirp has sounded, the sensor information is learned and the turn signal in the next location to be learned will illuminate. 4. After the horn chirp has sounded and the right front turn signal is illuminated, repeat step 2 for the remaining 3 sensors in the following order: 1. Right front 2. Right rear 3. Left rear 5. When the left rear sensor has been learned and a double horn chirp has sounded, the learn process is complete and the BCM exits the Relearn mode. 6. Ignition OFF, adjust all tires to the recommended pressures. Refer to Vehicle Certification, Tire Placard, Anti-Theft, and Service Parts ID Label ( See: Application and ID/Vehicle Certification, Tire Placard, Anti-Theft and Service Parts ID Label). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 1204 Tire Pressure Sensor: Service and Repair Tire Pressure Indicator Sensor Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Raise the vehicle on a suitable support. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle (See: Maintenance/Vehicle Lifting/Service and Repair). 2. Remove the tire/wheel assembly from the vehicle. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation (See: Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair). Note: Before the tire is removed from the wheel, note the following items to avoid tire pressure sensor damage upon tire dismounting. * Place the sensor's cap and valve on a dry clean surface after removal. The cap is aluminum and the valve is nickel plated to prevent corrosion and are not to be substituted with a cap or valve made of any other material. * When separating the tire bead from the wheel, position the bead breaking fixture 90 degrees from the valve stem. * Position the mounting/dismounting head so the tire iron, or pry bar can be inserted slightly clockwise of the sensor body when prying the tire bead up and over the mounting/dismounting head. * Using the tire machine, rotate the tire/wheel assembly clockwise when transferring the tire bead to the out side of the wheel rim. * Repeat items for inner bead. 3. Remove the tire from the wheel. Refer to Tire Dismounting and Mounting (See: Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Tires/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement). Note: If any tire sealant is noted upon tire dismounting, remove all residual liquid sealant from the inside of the tire and wheel surfaces. 4. Remove the tire pressure sensor nut. 5. Remove the tire pressure sensor. Installation Procedure 1. Clean any dirt or debris from the grommet sealing area. 2. Insert the sensor in the wheel hole with the air passage facing away from the wheel. Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener Caution). 3. Install the sensor nut and position the sensor body parallel to the inside wheel surface while torquing. Tighten the sensor nut to 7 Nm (62 lb in). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 1205 Note: Before reinstalling the tire on the wheel, note the following items to avoid tire pressure sensor damage upon tire mounting: * Position the mounting/dismounting head 180 degrees from the valve stem. * Position the bead transition area 45 degrees counterclockwise of the valve stem. * Using the tire machine, rotate the tire/wheel assembly clockwise when transferring the tire bead to the inside of the wheel rim. * Repeat items for outer bead. 4. Install the tire on the wheel. Refer to Tire Dismounting and Mounting (See: Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Tires/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement). Note: A service replacement tire pressure sensor is shipped in OFF mode. In this mode the sensor's unique identification code cannot be learned into the liftgate module (LGM) memory. The sensor must be taken out of OFF mode by spinning the tire/wheel assembly above 32 km/h (20 mph) in order to close the sensor's internal roll switch for at least 10 seconds. 5. Install the tire/wheel assembly on the vehicle. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation (See: Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair). 6. Lower the vehicle. 7. Learn the tire pressure sensors. Refer to Tire Pressure Indicator Sensor Learn (See: Testing and Inspection). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Mode Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations Transmission Mode Switch: Locations Powertrain Component Views Automatic Transmission Electronic Components 1 - Q8 Control Solenoid Valve Assembly 2 - B15 Transmission Internal Mode Switch 3 - B14A Transmission Output Shaft Speed Sensor 4 - B14C Transmission Input Shaft Speed Sensor Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Exploded Views Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Exploded Views 6L50/6L80/6L90 - Automatic Transmission Disassembled Views Park System Components 50 - A/Trans Case 600 - Park Pawl Shaft 601 - Park Pawl Spring 602 - Park Pawl 603 - Park Pawl Actuator Guide Pin 604 - Manual Shift Shaft Seal 605 - Park Pawl Actuator Guide Seal 606 - Park Pawl Actuator Guide 607 - Park Pawl Actuator Assembly 608 - Manual Shift Detent Lever Shaft 609 - Manual Shift Detent (w/Shaft Position Switch) Lever Assembly 610 - Manual Shift Detent Lever Pin 611 - Manual Shift Shaft Pin 6T70/6T75 - Automatic Transmission Disassembled Views Park System Components Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Exploded Views > Page 1215 500 - Park Pawl Actuator Bracket Bolt 501 - Park Pawl Actuator Bracket 502 - Park Pawl Shaft 503 - Park Pawl 504 - Park Pawl Spring 505 - Park Pawl Actuator Guide Pin 506 - Park Pawl Actuator Guide 507 - A/Trans Case Assembly 508 - Manual Shift Shaft Seal 509 - Park Pawl Actuator Assembly 510 - Manual Shift Shaft Pin 511 - Manual Shift Detent (w/Shaft Position Switch) Lever Assembly Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Exploded Views > Page 1216 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Connector Views P2 Transmission Shift Lever Position Indicator Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Service and Repair 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission Manual Shift Detent Lever with Shaft Position Switch Assembly Replacement Special Tools * DT-48550 Detent Lever Pin Remover * J 41229 Manual Shaft Pin Installer Removal Procedure 1. Remove the control valve body. Refer to Control Valve Body Replacement (See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Valve Body/Service and Repair/6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission/Control Valve Body Replacement). 2. Remove the manual shaft detent lever hub pin (1) using DT-48550. 3. Remove the manual shift shaft pin (5). Discard the pin. 4. Remove the manual shaft (2). Note: Disconnect the actuator rod (3) from the detent lever assembly. Do not remove the actuator rod from the transmission case. 5. Remove the manual shaft detent (w/shift position switch) lever assembly (4). Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 1219 Note: Connect the actuator rod (3) to the detent lever assembly. 1. Install the manual shaft detent (w/shift position switch) lever assembly (4). Note: Lubricate the shaft with automatic transmission fluid to prevent damage to the manual shift shaft seal during installation. 2. Install the manual shaft (2). 3. Install the manual shaft detent lever hub pin (1) using DT-48550. Install the Manual Shaft Detent Lever Hub Pin to height of (b) 7.9 mm (0.38 in). Caution: Use the manual shaft pin installer to install the pin at the correct height in order to properly secure the manual shaft. If you install the pin too deep, the case bore may crack. 4. Install the NEW manual shift shaft pin (5) using J 41229. Use a NEW pin to ensure proper engagement with the case. Inspect pin installed height is within (a) 7.2-8.2 mm (0.28-0.32 in). 5. Install the control valve body. Refer to Control Valve Body Replacement (See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Valve Body/Service and Repair/6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission/Control Valve Body Replacement). 6. Perform the transmission adaptive values learn procedure. Refer to Transmission Adaptive Values Learn (See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 1220 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Service and Repair 6T70/6T75 - Automatic Transmission Manual Shift Detent Lever with Shaft Position Switch Assembly Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 1221 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations Transmission Speed Sensor: Locations Powertrain Component Views Front Engine Components (LAF 1 of 2) 1 - Q38 Throttle Body 2 - G18 High Pressure Fuel Pump 3 - B23F Camshaft Position Sensor Intake 4 - B37 Engine Oil Pressure Switch 5 - B68 Knock Sensor 6 - B26 Crankshaft Position Sensor 7 - M64 Starter Motor 8 - Q2 A/C Compressor Clutch 9 - G13 Generator Front Engine Components (LAF 2 of 2) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 1225 1 - B47B Fuel Rail Pressure Sensor 2 - B74 Manifold Absolute Pressure Sensor 3 - Q17D Fuel Injector 4 4 - Q17C Fuel Injector 3 5 - B1 A/C Refrigerant Pressure Sensor 6 - Q17B Fuel Injector 2 7 - Q17A Fuel Injector 1 Left Rear Engine Components (LAF) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 1226 1 - T8D Ignition Coil 4 2 - T8C Ignition Coil 3 3 - T8B Ignition Coil 2 4 - T8A Ignition Coil 1 5 - Q6F Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Intake 6 - Q6E Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Exhaust 7 - B52A Heated Oxygen Sensor 1 8 - B52B Heated Oxygen Sensor 2 9 - B34 Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor 10 - B23E Camshaft Position Sensor - Exhaust 11 - Q12 Evaporative Emission Purge Solenoid Valve Top of the Engine Components (LF1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 1227 1 - B47B Fuel Rail Pressure Sensor 2 - Q17A Fuel Injector 1 3 - Q17C Fuel Injector 3 4 - Q17E Fuel Injector 5 5 - Q17F Fuel Injector 6 6 - Q17D Fuel Injector 4 7 - Q17B Fuel Injector 2 Left Front of the Engine Components (LF1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 1228 1 - T8B Ignition Coil 2 2 - T8D Ignition Coil 4 3 - T8F Ignition Coil 6 4 - G18 High Pressure Fuel Pump 5 - B34 Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor 6 - M64 Starter Motor 7 - B68B Knock Sensor 2 8 - B37 Engine Oil Pressure Switch 9 - B1 A/C Refrigerant Pressure Sensor 10 - Q2 A/C Compressor Clutch 11 - G13 Generator Right Rear of the Engine Components (LF1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 1229 1 - B74 Manifold Absolute Pressure Sensor 2 - T8E Ignition Coil 5 3 - T8C Ignition Coil 3 4 - Q12 Evaporative Emission Purge Solenoid Valve 5 - Q38 Throttle Body 6 - B23B Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 1 Intake 7 - B23D Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 2 Intake 8 - Q6D Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Bank 2 Intake 9 - Q6C Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Bank 2 Exhaust 10 - B23C Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 2 Exhaust 11 - Q6B Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Bank 1 Intake 12 - Q6A Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Bank 1 Exhaust 13 - B23A Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 1 Exhaust 14 - B68A Knock Sensor 1 15 - B26 Crankshaft Position Sensor 16 - T8A Ignition Coil 1 Front of the Exhaust System Components (LF1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 1230 1 - B52C Heated Oxygen Sensor - Bank 1 Sensor 1 2 - B52D Heated Oxygen Sensor - Bank 1 Sensor 2 3 - B52F Heated Oxygen Sensor - Bank 2 Sensor 2 4 - B52E Heated Oxygen Sensor Bank 2 Sensor 1 Automatic Transmission Electronic Components Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 1231 1 - Q8 Control Solenoid Valve Assembly 2 - B15 Transmission Internal Mode Switch 3 - B14A Transmission Output Shaft Speed Sensor 4 - B14C Transmission Input Shaft Speed Sensor Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > 6L50/6L80/6L90 Automatic Transmission Transmission Speed Sensor: Diagrams 6L50/6L80/6L90 - Automatic Transmission Component Location Component Location 1 - Reaction Carrier Assembly 2 - Control Valve Body Assembly 3 - Input Carrier Assembly 4 Valve Channel Plate 5 - Output Carrier Assembly 6 - Park Gear 7 - Control Solenoid (w/Body and TCM) Valve Assembly 8 - Drive Link Assembly 9 - Drive Sprocket 10 - Torque Converter Assembly 11 - A/Trans Fluid Pump Assembly 12 - Differential Carrier Assembly 13 - Front Differential Ring Gear 14 - Driven Sprocket 15 - 1-2-3-4 Clutch Assembly Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > 6L50/6L80/6L90 Automatic Transmission > Page 1234 16 - Low and Reverse Clutch Assembly 17 - 2-6 Clutch Assembly 18 - 3-5 Reverse Clutch Assembly 19 - 4-5-6 Clutch Assembly 20 - A/Trans Input Speed Sensor Assembly 21 - Reaction Sun Gear Assembly Disassembled Views Disassembled Views Case and Associated Parts 1 - Control Valve Body Cover Bolt 2 - Control Valve Body Cover Assembly 3 - Control Valve Body Cover Gasket 4 - Control Valve Body Bolt 5 - Control Valve Body Cover Hole Seal 6 - Control Solenoid Valve Heat Sink Bolt 7 - Control Solenoid (w/Body and TCM) Valve Assembly 8 - Control Valve Body Filter Plate Assembly 9 - Control Valve Body Bolt 10 - Control Valve Body Bolt Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > 6L50/6L80/6L90 Automatic Transmission > Page 1235 11 - Control Valve Body Assembly 12 - Control Valve Body Spacer Plate Assembly 13 - A/Trans Fluid Level Control Valve 14 - A/Trans Fluid Level Control Valve Gasket 15 - A/Trans Output Speed Sensor Bolt 16 - A/Trans Output Speed Sensor Assembly 17 - Manual Shaft Detent Spring Bolt 18 - Manual Shaft Detent Lever Spring Assembly 19 - A/Trans Input Speed Sensor Assembly 20 - A/Trans Input Speed Sensor Assembly O-Ring Seal 21 - A/Trans Input Speed Sensor Bolt 22 Fill Cap 23 - Fill Cap Seal 24 - Torque Converter Housing Gasket 25 - A/Trans Fluid Pump Seal Assembly 26 - Torque Converter with Fluid Pump Housing Assembly 27 - Torque Converter and Differential Housing Bolt 28 - A/Trans Fluid Fill Tube Plug Assembly 29 - Torque Converter Assembly 3-5 Reverse Clutch Assembly 500 - A/Trans Input Shaft Speed Sensor Reluctor Wheel Retainer Ring 501 - A/Trans Input Shaft Speed Sensor Reluctor Wheel 502 - 3-5-Reverse Clutch Piston 503 - 3-5-Reverse Clutch Piston Return Spring Assembly 504 - 3-5-Reverse Clutch Piston Inner Seal 505 - 3-5-Reverse Clutch Piston Inner Seal 506 - 3-5-Reverse Clutch Piston Dam Seal 507 - 3-5-Reverse Clutch Apply Plate 508 - 3-5-Reverse Clutch Plate 509 - 3-5-Reverse Clutch (w/Friction Material) Plate Assembly 510 - 3-5-Reverse Clutch Backing Plate 511 - 3-5-Reverse Clutch Backing Plate Retainer Ring Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > 6L50/6L80/6L90 Automatic Transmission > Page 1236 Transmission Speed Sensor: Diagrams 6T70/6T75 - Automatic Transmission Component Location Component Location Component Locations 1 - Manual Shift Detent Lever Assembly (w/Shaft Position Switch) 2 - Trans Fluid Level Indicator 3 Reaction Carrier Assembly 4 - Output Speed Sensor 5 - Input Carrier Assembly 6 - Output Carrier Assembly 7 - Front Differential Transfer Drive Gear 8 - Front Differential Transfer Drive Gear Support Assembly 9 - Torque Converter Assembly 10 - Park Pawl Actuator Assembly 11 - Fluid Pump Drive Link Assembly 12 - Park Pawl 13 - Front Differential Transfer Driven Gear Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > 6L50/6L80/6L90 Automatic Transmission > Page 1237 14 - Front Differential Drive Pinion Gear 15 - Park Gear 16 - Torque Converter and Support and Fluid Pump Housing Assembly 17 - Front Differential Carrier Assembly 18 - Front Differential Carrier Baffle 19 - Front Differential Ring Gear 20 - Front Differential Drive Pinion Gear Lube Tube 21 - 1-2-3-4 Clutch Assembly 22 - Low and Reverse Clutch Assembly (OWC) 23 - Low and Reverse Clutch 24 - 2-6 Clutch Assembly 25 - 3-5-Reverse Clutch Assembly 26 - 4-5-6 Clutch Assembly 27 - Input Speed Sensor 28 - Case Cover Assembly 29 - Control Valve Body Cover 30 Input Shaft Speed Sensor Reluctor Wheel 31 - Control Valve Lower Body Assembly 32 - Control Valve Upper Body Assembly 33 - Control Valve Channel Plate Assembly 34 - Control Solenoid Valve Assembly (w/Body and TCM) 35 - Manual Valve Disassembled Views Disassembled Views Case and Associated Parts Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > 6L50/6L80/6L90 Automatic Transmission > Page 1238 1 - Control Valve Body Cover Assembly 2 - Transmission Fluid Level Indicator Assembly 3 - Fluid Level Indicator Tube - Model Dependent 4 - Fluid Level Indicator Tube Seal - Model Dependent 5 Control Valve Body Cover Assembly Gasket 6 - Control Valve Body Cover Stud 7 - Control Valve Body Cover Bolt 8 - Control Valve Body Bolt 9 - Control Valve Body Bolt 10 - Control Valve Body Cover Wiring Connector Hole Seal 11 - Control Solenoid Valve Spring 12 - Control Valve Body Bolt 13 - Control Valve Body Bolt 14 - Control Valve Body Bolt 15 - Control Solenoid (w/Body and TCM) Valve Assembly 16 - Control Solenoid (w/Body and TCM) Filter Plate Assembly 17 - Manual Shaft Detent Assembly 18 - Control Valve Body Assembly 19 - A/Trans Output Speed Sensor Assembly 20 - A/Trans Output Speed Sensor Bolt 21 - A/Trans Case Assembly 22 - Torque Converter Housing Outer Seal 23 - Front Differential Drive Pinion (w/Transfer Gear) Gear Assembly 24 Front Differential Drive Pinion Gear Lube Tube Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > 6L50/6L80/6L90 Automatic Transmission > Page 1239 25 - Torque Converter and Support and A/Trans Fluid Pump Housing Assembly 26 - Torque Converter and Differential Housing Bolt 27 - Torque Converter Assembly 28 - Dust Cover Push Pin - Model Dependent 29 - Dust Cover Bolt - Model Dependent 30 - Dust Cover - Model Dependent 31 - Front Differential Carrier Assembly 32 - Input Shaft Thrust Bearing Assembly 33 - A/Trans Case Cover Gasket 34 - A/Trans Case Cover Assembly 35 - A/Trans Case Cover Assembly Bolt A/Trans Case Cover, 2-6 and Low Reverse Pistons 400 - A/Trans Input Speed Sensor Assembly 401 - A/Trans Input Speed Sensor Bolt 402 - ISS O-Ring Seal 403 - A/Trans Case Cover Assembly 404 - 3-5-Reverse and 4-5-6 Clutch Fluid Seal Ring 405 - 2-6 Clutch Piston 406 - 2-6 Clutch Spring Assembly 407 - 2-6 Clutch Spring Retainer Ring 408 - Low and Reverse Clutch Piston Assembly 409 - Low and Reverse Clutch Spring 410 Low and Reverse Clutch Spring Retainer Ring Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 Automatic Transmission Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission Output Speed Sensor Replacement Output Speed Sensor Replacement Input Speed Sensor Replacement Input Speed Sensor Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the transmission control valve body cover. Refer to Control Valve Body Cover Replacement (See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Valve Body/Service and Repair/6T30/6T40/6T45 Automatic Transmission/Control Valve Body Cover Replacement). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 Automatic Transmission > Page 1242 2. Disconnect the input speed sensor electrical connector (1). 3. Remove the input speed sensor bolt (2) M6 x 23. 4. Remove the input speed sensor (3). 5. Remove the 3 input speed sensor seals (1). Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 Automatic Transmission > Page 1243 1. Install the 3 input speed sensor seals (1). 2. Install the input speed sensor (3). Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener Caution). 3. Install the input speed sensor bolt (2) M6 x 23 and tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb in). 4. Connect the input speed sensor electrical connector (1). 5. Install the transmission control valve body cover. Refer to Control Valve Body Cover Replacement (See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Valve Body/Service and Repair/6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission/Control Valve Body Cover Replacement). 6. Perform the transmission adaptive values learn procedure. Refer to Transmission Adaptive Values Learn (See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 Automatic Transmission > Page 1244 Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair 6T70/6T75 - Automatic Transmission Output Speed Sensor Replacement Output Speed Sensor Replacement Input Speed Sensor Replacement Input Speed Sensor Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 Automatic Transmission > Page 1245 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Locations Power Window Switch: Locations Door Component Views Driver Door Components 1 - A23D Door Latch Assembly - Driver 2 - A9A Outside Rearview Mirror - Driver 3 - E1C Accent Lamp - Driver Door Handle (LTZ or SLT) 4 - K96L Mirror Control Module - Left (LTZ or SLT) 5 S52S Outside Rearview Mirror Switch 6 - P19G Speaker - Left Front 7 - M74D Window Motor Driver 8 - B63LF Side Impact Sensor - Left Front 9 - S79D Window Switch - Driver 10 - E1D Accent Lamp - Driver Door (LTZ or SLT) Passenger Door Components Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1250 1 - A9B Outside Rearview Mirror - Passenger 2 - E1M Accent Lamp - Passenger Door Handle (LTZ or SLT) 3 - S79P Window Switch - Passenger 4 - A23P Door Latch Assembly - Passenger 5 - E1P Accent Lamp - Passenger Door (LTZ or SLT) 6 - B63RF Side Impact Sensor - Right Front 7 M74P Window Motor - Passenger 8 - P19U Speaker - Right Front Left Rear Door Components Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1251 1 - A23LR Door Latch Assembly - Left Rear 2 - S79LR Window Switch - Left Rear 3 - M74LR Window Motor - Left Rear 4 - P19K Speaker - Left Rear 5 - B63LR Side Impact Sensor - Left Rear Right Rear Door Components Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1252 1 - S79RR Window Switch - Right Rear 2 - A23RR Door Latch Assembly - Right Rear 3 - M74RR Window Motor - Right Rear 4 - B63RR Side Impact Sensor - Right Rear 5 - P19X Speaker - Right Rear Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1253 Power Window Switch: Diagrams S79D Window Switch - Driver S79LR Window Switch - Left Rear Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1254 S79P Window Switch - Passenger X1 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1255 S79P Window Switch - Passenger X2 (LTZ or SLT) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1256 S79RR Window Switch - Right Rear Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1257 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Side Door Window Switch Replacement Power Window Switch: Service and Repair Front Side Door Window Switch Replacement Front Side Door Window Switch Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Side Door Window Switch Replacement > Page 1260 Power Window Switch: Service and Repair Front Side Door Window and Multifunction Switch Replacement Front Side Door Window and Multifunction Switch Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Side Door Window Switch Replacement > Page 1261 Power Window Switch: Service and Repair Rear Side Door Window Switch Replacement Rear Side Door Window Switch Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Switch > Component Information > Locations Windshield Washer Switch: Locations Instrument Panel/Center Console Component Views Steering Column Components 1 - S78 Turn Signal/Multifunction Switch 2 - X85 Steering Wheel Air Bag Coil 3 - S82 Windshield Wiper/Washer Switch 4 - S39 Ignition Switch 5 - M93 Ignition Cylinder Lock Control Solenoid Actuator 6 - B101 Immobilizer Antenna 7 - B99 Steering Wheel Angle Sensor Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1266 Windshield Washer Switch: Diagrams S82 Windshield Wiper/Washer Switch Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1267 Windshield Washer Switch: Service and Repair Windshield Wiper and Washer Switch Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair Wiper Switch: Service and Repair Windshield Wiper and Washer Switch Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Steering/Suspension - Wheel Alignment Specifications Alignment: Technical Service Bulletins Steering/Suspension - Wheel Alignment Specifications WARRANTY ADMINISTRATION Bulletin No.: 05-03-07-009C Date: December 09, 2010 Subject: Wheel Alignment Specifications, Requirements and Recommendations for GM Vehicles Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks Supercede: This bulletin is being extensively revised to provide technicians and warranty administrators with an all inclusive guide for wheel alignments. PLEASE FAMILIARIZE YOURSELF WITH THESE UPDATES BEFORE PERFORMING YOUR NEXT GM WHEEL ALIGNMENT SERVICE. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 05-03-07-009B (Section 03 - Suspension). Purpose The purpose of this bulletin is to provide retail, wholesale and fleet personnel with General Motors' warranty service requirements and recommendations for customer concerns related to wheel alignment. For your convenience, this bulletin updates and centralizes all of GM's Standard Wheel Alignment Service Procedures, Policy Guidelines and bulletins on wheel alignment warranty service. Important PLEASE FAMILIARIZE YOURSELF WITH THESE UPDATES BEFORE PERFORMING YOUR NEXT GM WHEEL ALIGNMENT SERVICE. The following five (5) key steps are a summary of this bulletin and are REQUIRED in completing a successful wheel alignment service. 1. Verify the vehicle is in an Original Equipment condition for curb weight, tires, wheels, suspension and steering configurations. Vehicles modified in any of these areas are not covered for wheel alignment warranty. 2. Review the customer concern relative to "Normal Operation" definitions. 3. Verify that vehicle is within the "Mileage Policy" range. 4. Document wheel alignment warranty claims appropriately for labor operations E2000 and E2020. The following information must be documented or attached to the repair order: - Customer concern in detail - What corrected the customer concern? - If a wheel alignment is performed: - Consult SI for proper specifications. - Document the "Before" AND "After" wheel alignment measurements/settings. - Completed "Wheel Alignment Repair Order Questionnaire" (form attached to this bulletin) 5. Use the proper wheel alignment equipment (preferred with print-out capability), process and the appropriate calibration maintenance schedules. Important If it is determined that a wheel alignment is necessary under warranty, use the proper labor code for the repair. E2000 for Steering Wheel Angle and/or Front Toe set or E2020 for Wheel Alignment Check/Adjust includes Caster, Camber and Toe set (Wheel alignment labor time for other component repairs is to be charged to the component that causes a wheel alignment operation.). The following flowchart is to help summarize the information detailed in this bulletin and should be used whenever a wheel alignment is performed. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Steering/Suspension - Wheel Alignment Specifications > Page 1276 Verify Original Equipment Condition of the Vehicle - Verify that Original Equipment Tires and Wheels or Official GM Accessory Tires and Wheels are on the vehicle. - Verify that aftermarket suspension "Lift" or "Lowering" Kits or other suspension alterations have NOT been done to the vehicle. - Check for accidental damage to the vehicle; for example, severe pothole or curb impacts, collision damage that may have affected the wheel alignment of the vehicle; e.g., engine cradles, suspension control arms, axles, wheels, wheel covers, tires may show evidence of damage/impact. - Check to be sure vehicle has seen "Normal Use" rather than abuse; e.g., very aggressive driving may show up by looking at the tires and condition of the vehicle. - Check for other additional equipment items that may significantly affect vehicle mass such as large tool boxes, campers, snow plow packages (without the snowplow RPO), etc., especially in trucks and cutaway/incomplete vehicles. Significant additional mass can affect trim height and wheel alignment of the vehicle and may necessitate a customer pay wheel alignment when placed semi-permanently in the vehicle (Upfitter instructions are to realign the vehicle after placement of these types of items. (This typically applies to trucks and incomplete vehicles that can be upfit with equipment such as the above.) Customer Concerns, "Normal Operation" Conditions and "Mileage Policy" Possible Concerns The following are typical conditions that may require wheel alignment warranty service: 1. Lead/Pull: defined as "at a constant highway speed on a typical straight road, the amount of effort required at the steering wheel to maintain the vehicle's straight heading." Important Please evaluate for the condition with hands-on the steering wheel. Follow the "Vehicle Leads/Pulls" diagnostic tree located in SI to determine the cause of a lead/pull concern. Lead/Pull concerns can be due to road crown or road slope, tires, wheel alignment or even in rare circumstances a steering gear issue. Lead/pull concerns due to road crown are considered "Normal Operation" and are NOT a warrantable condition -- the customer should be advised that this is "Normal Operation." Important Some customers may comment on a "Lead/Pull" when they hold the steering wheel in a level condition. If so, this is more likely a "steering wheel angle" concern because the customer is "steering" the vehicle to obtain a "level" steering wheel. 2. Steering wheel angle to the left or right (counter-clockwise or clockwise, respectively): Defined as the steering wheel angle (clocking) deviation from "level" while maintaining a straight heading on a typical straight road. 3. Irregular or Premature tire wear: Slight to very slight "feathering" or "edge" wear on the shoulders of tires is NOT considered unusual and should even out with a tire rotation; if the customer is concerned about a "feathering" condition of the tires, the customer could be advised to rotate the tires earlier than the next scheduled mileage/maintenance interval (but no later than the next interval). Be sure to understand the customer's driving habits as this will also heavily influence the tire wear performance; tire wear from aggressive or abusive driving habits is NOT a warrantable condition. Important Slight or mild feathering, cupping, edge or heel/toe wear of tire tread shoulders is "normal" and can show up very early in a tire/vehicle service mileage; in fact, some new tires can show evidence of feathering from the factory. These issues do NOT affect the overall performance and tread life of the tire. Dealer personnel should always check the customer's maintenance records to ensure that tire inflation pressure is being maintained to placard and that the tires are being rotated (modified-X pattern) at the proper mileage intervals. Wheel alignments are NOT to be performed for the types of "Normal" Tire Feathering shown in Figures 1-4 below. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Steering/Suspension - Wheel Alignment Specifications > Page 1277 Figure 1: Full Tread View - "NORMAL" Tire "Feathering" Wear on the Shoulder/Adjacent/Center Ribs Figure 2: Tire Shoulder View Example 1 - "NORMAL" Tire "Feathering" Wear on the Shoulder Figure 3: Tire Shoulder View Example 2 - "NORMAL" Tire "Feathering" Wear Figure 4: Detail Side View of Tire Shoulder Area - "NORMAL" Tire "Feathering" Wear Important When a wheel alignment is deemed necessary for tire wear, be sure to document on the repair order, in as much detail as possible, the severity and type of tire wear (e.g., severe center wear or severe inside or outside shoulder wear) and the position of the tire on the vehicle (RF, LF, LR, RR). Please note the customer's concern with the wear such as, noise, appearance, wear life, etc. A field product report with pictures of the tire wear condition is recommended. Refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 02-00-89-002J and #07-00-89-036C. 4. Other repairs that affect wheel alignment; e.g., certain component replacement such as suspension control arm replacement, engine cradle adjustment/replace, steering gear replacement, steering tie rod replace, suspension strut/shock, steering knuckle, etc. may require a wheel alignment. Important If other components or repairs are identified as affecting the wheel alignment, policy calls for the wheel alignment labor time to be charged to the replaced/repaired component's labor operation time rather than the wheel alignment labor operations. Important Vibration type customer concerns are generally NOT due to wheel alignment except in the rare cases; e.g., extreme diagonal wear across the tread. In general, wheel alignments are NOT to be performed as an investigation/correction for vibration concerns. "Normal Operation" Conditions Vehicle Lead/Pull Due to Road Crown or Slope: As part of "Normal Operation," vehicles will follow side-to-side or left to right road crown or slope. Be sure to verify from the customer the types of roads they are driving as they may not recognize the influence of road crown on vehicle lead/pull and steering wheel angle. If a vehicle requires significant steering effort to prevent it from "climbing" the road crown there may be an issue to be looked into further. Important Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Steering/Suspension - Wheel Alignment Specifications > Page 1278 A wheel alignment will generally NOT correct vehicles that follow the road crown since this is within "Normal Operation." Mileage Policy The following mileage policy applies for E2020 and E2000 labor operations: Note Wheel Alignment is NOT covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty for Express and Savana Cutaway vehicles as these vehicles require Upfitters to set the wheel alignment after completing the vehicles. - 0-800 km (0-500 mi): E2000/E2020 claims ONLY allowed with Call Center Authorization. Due to the tie down during shipping, the vehicle's suspension requires some time to reach normal operating position. For this reason, new vehicles are generally NOT to be aligned until they have accumulated at least 800 km (500 mi). A field product report should accompany any claim within this mileage range. - 801-12,000 km (501-7,500 mi): - If a vehicle came from the factory with incorrect alignment settings, any resulting off-angle steering wheel, lead/pull characteristics or the rare occurrence of excessive tire wear would be apparent early in the life of the vehicle. The following policy applies: - Vehicles 100% Factory Set/Measured for Caster/Camber/Toe - Escalade/ESV/EXT, Tahoe/Suburban, Yukon/XL/Denali, Silverado/Sierra, Express/Savana, Corvette and Colorado/Canyon: E2000/E2020 Claims: Call Center Authorization Required - All Vehicles NOT 100% Factory Set/Measured for Caster/Camber/Toe as noted above: E2000/E2020 Claims: Dealer Service Manager Authorization Required - 12,001 km and beyond (7,501 miles and beyond): During this period, customers are responsible for the wheel alignment expense or dealers may provide on a case-by case basis a one-time customer enthusiasm claim up to 16,000 km (10,000 mi). In the event that a defective component required the use of the subject labor operations, the identified defective component labor operation will include the appropriate labor time for a wheel alignment as an add condition to the component repair. Important Only one wheel alignment labor operation claim (E2000 or E2020) may be used per VIN. Warranty Documentation Requirements When a wheel alignment service has been deemed necessary, the following items will need to be clearly documented on/with the repair order: - Customer concern in detail - What corrected the customer concern? - If a wheel alignment is performed: - Consult SI for proper specifications. - Document the "Before" AND "After" wheel alignment measurements/settings. - Completed "Wheel Alignment Repair Order Questionnaire" (form attached to this bulletin) 1. Document the customer concern in as much detail as possible on the repair order and in the warranty administration system. Preferred examples: - Steering wheel is off angle in the counterclockwise direction by approximately x degrees or clocking position. - Vehicle lead/pulls to the right at approximately x-y mph. Vehicle will climb the road crown. Severe, Moderate or Slight. - RF and LF tires are wearing on the outside shoulders with severe feathering. Important In the event of a lead/pull or steering wheel angle concern, please note the direction of lead/pull (left or right) or direction of steering wheel angle (clockwise or counterclockwise) on the repair order and within the warranty claim verbatim. Important In the event of a tire wear concern, please note the position on the vehicle and where the wear is occurring on the tire; i.e., the RF tire is wearing on the inside shoulder. 2. Document the technician's findings on cause and correction of the issue. Examples: - Reset LF toe from 0.45 degrees to 0.10 degrees and RF toe from -0.25 degrees to 0.10 degrees to correct the steering wheel angle from 5 degrees counterclockwise to 0 degrees. - Reset LF camber from 0.25 degrees to -0.05 degrees to correct the cross-camber condition of +0.30 degrees to 0.00 degrees on the vehicle. - Front Sum toe was found to be 0.50 degrees, reset to 0.20 degrees. 3. Print-out the "Before" and "After" wheel alignment measurements/settings and attach them to the Repair Order or if print-out capability is not Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Steering/Suspension - Wheel Alignment Specifications > Page 1279 available, measurements may also be clearly and legibly handwritten into the Wheel Alignment Repair Order Questionnaire attached to this bulletin. 4. Attach the Wheel Alignment Repair Order Questionnaire below along with the print-out of "Before" and "After" wheel alignment measurements to the Repair Order and retain for use by GM. Wheel Alignment Equipment and Process Wheel alignments must be performed with a quality machine that will give accurate results when performing checks. "External Reference" (image-based camera technology) is preferred. Please refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 05-00-89-029B: General Motors Dealership Critical Equipment Requirements and Recommendations. Requirements: - Computerized four wheel alignment system. - Computer capable of printing before and after alignment reports. - Computer capable of time and date stamp printout. - Racking system must have jacking capability - Racking system must be capable of level to 1.6 mm (1/16 in) - Appropriate wheel stops and safety certification - Built-in turn plates and slip plates - Wheel clamps capable of attaching to 20" or larger wheels - Racking capable of accepting any GM passenger car or light duty truck - Operator properly trained and ASE-certified (U.S. only) in wheel alignment Recommendations: Racking should have front and rear jacking capability. Equipment Maintenance and Calibration: Alignment machines must be regularly calibrated in order to give correct information. Most manufacturers recommend the following: - Alignment machines with "internal reference" sensors should be checked (and calibrated, if necessary) every six months. - Alignment machines with "external reference" (image-based camera technology) should be checked (and calibrated, if necessary) once a year. - Racks must be kept level to within 1.6 mm (1/16 in). - If any instrument that is part of the alignment machine is dropped or damaged in some way, check the calibration immediately. Check with the manufacturer of your specific equipment for their recommended service/calibration schedule. Wheel Alignment Process When performing wheel alignment measurement and/or adjustment, the following steps should be taken: Preliminary Steps: 1. Verify that the vehicle has a full tank of fuel (compensate as necessary). 2. Inspect the wheels and the tires for damage. 3. Inspect the tires for the proper inflation and irregular tire wear. 4. Inspect the wheel bearings for excessive play. 5. Inspect all suspension and steering parts for looseness, wear, or damage. 6. Inspect the steering wheel for excessive drag or poor return due to stiff or rusted linkage or suspension components. 7. Inspect the vehicle trim height. 8. Compensate for frame angle on targeted vehicles (refer to Wheel Alignment Specifications in SI). Satisfactory vehicle operation may occur over a wide range of alignment angles. However, if the wheel alignment angles are not within the range of specifications, adjust the wheel alignment to the specifications. Refer to Wheel Alignment Specifications in SI. Give consideration to excess loads, such as tool boxes, sample cases, etc. Follow the wheel alignment equipment manufacturer's instructions. Measure/Adjust: Important Prior to making any adjustments to wheel alignment on a vehicle, technicians must verify that the wheel alignment specifications loaded into their wheel alignment machine are up-to-date by comparing these to the wheel alignment specifications for the appropriate model and model year in SI. Using incorrect and/or outdated specifications may result in unnecessary adjustments, irregular and/or premature tire wear and repeat customer concerns Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Steering/Suspension - Wheel Alignment Specifications > Page 1280 Important When performing adjustments to vehicles requiring a 4-wheel alignment, set the rear wheel alignment angles first in order to obtain proper front wheel alignment angles. Perform the following steps in order to measure the front and rear alignment angles: 1. Install the alignment equipment according to the manufacturer's instructions. 2. Jounce the front and the rear bumpers 3 times prior to checking the wheel alignment. 3. Measure the alignment angles and record the readings. If necessary, adjust the wheel alignment to vehicle specification and record the before and after measurements. Refer to Wheel Alignment Specifications in SI. Important Technicians must refer to SI for the correct wheel alignment specifications. SI is the only source of GM wheel alignment specifications that is kept up-to-date throughout the year. Test drive vehicle to ensure proper repair. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Steering/Suspension - Wheel Alignment Specifications > Page 1281 Frame Angle Measurement (Express / Savana Only) ........ Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Steering/Suspension - Wheel Alignment Specifications > Page 1282 What corrected the customer concern and was the repair verified? Please Explain: ............. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Specifications > Fastener Tightening Specifications Alignment: Specifications Fastener Tightening Specifications Fastener Tightening Specifications Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Specifications > Fastener Tightening Specifications > Page 1285 Alignment: Specifications Trim Height Specifications Trim Height Specifications Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Specifications > Fastener Tightening Specifications > Page 1286 Alignment: Specifications Wheel Alignment Specifications Wheel Alignment Specifications Note: Specification relative to Caster Sweep measurement method Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Description and Operation > Caster Description Alignment: Description and Operation Caster Description Caster Description Caster is the tilting of the uppermost point of the steering axis either forward or backward, when viewed from the side of the vehicle. A backward tilt is positive (+) and a forward tilt is negative (-). Caster influences directional control of the steering but does not affect the tire wear. Caster is affected by the vehicle height, therefore it is important to keep the body at its designed height. Overloading the vehicle or a weak or sagging rear spring will affect caster. When the rear of the vehicle is lower than its designated trim height, the front suspension moves to a more positive caster. If the rear of the vehicle is higher than its designated trim height, the front suspension moves to a less positive caster. With too little positive caster, steering may be touchy at high speed and wheel returnability may be diminished when coming out of a turn. If one wheel has more positive caster than the other, that wheel will pull toward the center of the vehicle. This condition will cause the vehicle to pull or lead to the side with the least amount of positive caster. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Description and Operation > Caster Description > Page 1289 Alignment: Description and Operation Camber Description Camber Description Camber is the tilting of the wheels from the vertical when viewed from the front of the vehicle. When the wheels tilt outward at the top, the camber is positive (+). When the wheel tilts inward at the top, the camber is negative (-). The amount of tilt is measured in degrees from the vertical. Camber settings influence the directional control and the tire wear. Too much positive camber will result in premature wear on the outside of the tire and cause excessive wear on the suspension parts. Too much negative camber will result in premature wear on the inside of the tire and cause excessive wear on the suspension parts. Unequal side-to-side camber of 1 degree or more will cause the vehicle to pull or lead to the side with the most positive camber. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Description and Operation > Caster Description > Page 1290 Alignment: Description and Operation Toe Description Toe Description Toe is a measurement of how much the front and/or rear wheels are turned in or out from a straight-ahead position. When the wheels are turned in, toe is positive (+). When the wheels are turned out, toe is negative (-). The actual amount of toe is normally only a fraction of a degree. The purpose of toe is to ensure that the wheels roll parallel. Toe also offsets the small deflections of the wheel support system that occur when the vehicle is rolling forward. In other words, with the vehicle standing still and the wheels set with toe-in, the wheels tend to roll parallel on the road when the vehicle is moving. Improper toe adjustment will cause premature tire wear and cause steering instability. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Description and Operation > Caster Description > Page 1291 Alignment: Description and Operation Setback Description Setback Description Setback applies to both the front and the rear wheels. Setback is the amount that one wheel may be aligned behind the other wheel. Setback may be the result of a road hazard or a collision. The first clue is a caster difference from side-to-side of more than 1 degree. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Description and Operation > Caster Description > Page 1292 Alignment: Description and Operation Caster Description Caster Description Caster is the tilting of the uppermost point of the steering axis either forward or backward, when viewed from the side of the vehicle. A backward tilt is positive (+) and a forward tilt is negative (-). Caster influences directional control of the steering but does not affect the tire wear. Caster is affected by the vehicle height, therefore it is important to keep the body at its designed height. Overloading the vehicle or a weak or sagging rear spring will affect caster. When the rear of the vehicle is lower than its designated trim height, the front suspension moves to a more positive caster. If the rear of the vehicle is higher than its designated trim height, the front suspension moves to a less positive caster. With too little positive caster, steering may be touchy at high speed and wheel returnability may be diminished when coming out of a turn. If one wheel has more positive caster than the other, that wheel will pull toward the center of the vehicle. This condition will cause the vehicle to pull or lead to the side with the least amount of positive caster. Camber Description Camber Description Camber is the tilting of the wheels from the vertical when viewed from the front of the vehicle. When the wheels tilt outward at the top, the camber is positive (+). When the wheel tilts inward at the top, the camber is negative (-). The amount of tilt is measured in degrees from the vertical. Camber settings influence the directional control and the tire wear. Too much positive camber will result in premature wear on the outside of the tire and cause excessive wear on the suspension parts. Too much negative camber will result in premature wear on the inside of the tire and cause excessive wear on the suspension parts. Unequal side-to-side camber of 1 degree or more will cause the vehicle to pull or lead to the side with the most positive camber. Toe Description Toe Description Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Description and Operation > Caster Description > Page 1293 Toe is a measurement of how much the front and/or rear wheels are turned in or out from a straight-ahead position. When the wheels are turned in, toe is positive (+). When the wheels are turned out, toe is negative (-). The actual amount of toe is normally only a fraction of a degree. The purpose of toe is to ensure that the wheels roll parallel. Toe also offsets the small deflections of the wheel support system that occur when the vehicle is rolling forward. In other words, with the vehicle standing still and the wheels set with toe-in, the wheels tend to roll parallel on the road when the vehicle is moving. Improper toe adjustment will cause premature tire wear and cause steering instability. Setback Description Setback Description Setback applies to both the front and the rear wheels. Setback is the amount that one wheel may be aligned behind the other wheel. Setback may be the result of a road hazard or a collision. The first clue is a caster difference from side-to-side of more than 1 degree. Thrust Angles Description Thrust Angles Description The front wheels aim or steer the vehicle. The rear wheels control tracking. This tracking action relates to the thrust angle (3). The thrust angle is the path that the rear wheels take. Ideally, the thrust angle is geometrically aligned with the body centerline (2). In the illustration, toe-in is shown on the left rear wheel, moving the thrust line (1) off center. The resulting deviation from the centerline is the thrust angle. If the thrust angle is not set properly the vehicle may "dog track", the steering wheel may not be centered or it could be perceived as a bent axle. Thrust angle can be checked during a wheel alignment. Positive thrust angle means the thrust line is pointing to the right hand side (RHS) of the vehicle. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Description and Operation > Caster Description > Page 1294 Negative thrust angle means the thrust line is pointing to the left hand side (LHS) of the vehicle. If the thrust angle is out of specification, moving the axle to body relationship will change the thrust angle reading. If the vehicle is out in the Positive (+) direction-moving the RHS forward and/or LHS rearward will move the thrust angle towards zero degrees. If the vehicle is out in the Negative (-) direction-moving the RHS rearward and/or LHS forward will move the thrust angle towards zero degrees. Lead/Pull Description Lead/Pull Description At a constant highway speed on a typical straight road, lead/pull is the amount of effort required at the steering wheel to maintain the vehicle's straight path. Important: Vehicles will tend to lead/pull in the direction of the road slope as part of normal operation. Lead/pull is usually caused by the following factors: * Road slope * Variability in tire construction * Wheel alignment (front cross caster and camber) * Unbalanced steering gear * Electronic Power Steering (EPS) steering position and torque sensors not calibrated correctly, if equipped. Torque Steer Description Torque Steer Description A vehicle pulls or leads in one direction during hard acceleration. A vehicle pulls or leads in the other direction during deceleration. The following factors may cause torque steer to be more apparent on a particular vehicle: * A slightly smaller diameter tire on the right front increases a right torque lead. Inspect the front tires for differences in the brand, the construction, or the size. If the tires appear to be similar, change the front tires from side-to-side and retest the vehicle. Tire and wheel assemblies have the most significant effect on torque steer correction. * A large difference in the right and left front tire pressure * Left-to-right differences in the front view axle angle may cause significant steering pull in a vehicle. The pull will be to the side with the most downward sloping axle from the differential to the wheels. Axles typically slope downward from the differential. The slope of the transaxle pan to level ground may be used as an indication of bias axle angles. The side with the higher transaxle pan (shown on the left side of the illustration) has the most downward sloping axle angle. Memory Steer Description Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Description and Operation > Caster Description > Page 1295 Memory Steer Description Memory steer is when the vehicle wants to lead or pull in the direction the driver previously turned the vehicle. Additionally, after turning in the opposite direction, the vehicle will want to lead or pull in that direction. Wander Description Wander Description Wander is the undesired drifting or deviation of a vehicle to either side from a straight path with hand pressure on the steering wheel. Wander is a symptom of the vehicle's sensitivity to external disturbances, such as road crown and crosswind, and accentuated by poor on-center steering feel. Scrub Radius Description Scrub Radius Description Ideally, the scrub radius is as small as possible. Normally, the SAI angle and the centerline of the tire and the wheel intersect below the road surface, causing a positive scrub radius. With struts, the SAI angle is much larger than the long arm/short arm type of suspension. This allows the SAI angle to intersect the camber angle above the road surface, forming a negative scrub radius. The smaller the scrub radius, the better the directional stability. Installing aftermarket wheels that have additional offset will dramatically increase the scrub radius. The newly installed wheels may cause the centerline of the tires to move further away from the spindle. This will increase the scrub radius. A large amount of scrub radius can cause severe shimmy after hitting a bump. Four-wheel drive vehicles with large tires use a steering damper to compensate for an increased scrub radius. Scrub radius is not directly measurable by the conventional methods. Scrub radius is projected geometrically by engineers during the design phase of the suspension. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Description and Operation > Page 1296 Alignment: Testing and Inspection Trim Height Inspection Trim Height Measurement Trim height is a predetermined measurement relating to vehicle ride height. Incorrect trim heights can cause the vehicle to bottom out over bumps, damage to the suspension components and symptoms similar to wheel alignment problems. Check the trim heights when diagnosing suspension concerns and before checking the wheel alignment. Perform the following before measuring the trim heights: * Set the tire pressure to the specifications shown on the certification label. Refer to Vehicle Certification, Tire Placard, Anti-Theft, and Service Parts ID Label (See: Application and ID/Vehicle Certification, Tire Placard, Anti-Theft and Service Parts ID Label). * Check the fuel level. Add additional weight if necessary to simulate a full tank. One U.S. gallon of gasoline weighs approximately 6.5 lbs. One liter of gasoline weights approximately 0.70 kg. * Make sure the passenger and rear compartments are empty, except for the spare tire. * Make sure the vehicle is on a flat and level surface, such as an alignment rack. * For vehicles equipped with automatic level control, ensure the system is functioning properly. * Check that all the vehicle doors are securely closed. * Check that the vehicle hood and rear deck lids are securely closed. * Check for installed after market accessories or modifications that could affect trim height measurement: - Larger of smaller than production wheels and tires - Lifting or lowering kits - Wheel opening flares or ground affects Measuring the P and R Heights Note: The left and right P and R height difference should be no more than 12 mm (0.47 in). Use the following procedure to measure the P and R dimensions: 1. Lift the front bumper of the vehicle up about 38 mm (1.5 in). 2. Gently remove your hands and let the vehicle settle. 3. Repeat this operation 2 more times for a total of 3 times. 4. Measure vertically from the ground to the bottom lip of the wheel opening through the centerline of the front wheel, P height. 5. Push the front bumper of the vehicle down about 38 mm (1.5 in). 6. Gently remove your hands and let the vehicle settle. 7. Repeat this operation 2 more times for a total of 3 times. 8. Re-measure the P height as in step 4. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Description and Operation > Page 1297 9. The true P height is the average of the measurements taken in steps 4 and 8. Refer to Trim Height Specifications (See: Specifications/Mechanical Specifications/Suspension/System Specifications/Trim Height Specifications). 10. Repeat the above steps at the rear of the vehicle for the R heights. 11. If the P and R heights are outside of specifications, measure the Z and D heights. Measuring the Z Height Note: * In order to obtain the proper measurement, Z will equal inner minus the outer. * The left and right Z height difference should be no more than 12 mm (0.47 in). Use the following procedure to measure the Z height: 1. Lift the front bumper of the vehicle up about 38 mm (1.5 in). 2. Gently remove your hands and let the vehicle settle. 3. Repeat this operation 2 more times for a total of 3 times. 4. Repeat this jouncing operation 2 more times for a total of 3 times. 5. Measure from the center of the forward lower control arm attaching bolt tip (a) to the alignment rack. 6. Measure from the center of the ball joint (b) to the alignment rack. 7. The difference between these 2 measurements (a-b) is the Z height. 8. Push the front bumper of the vehicle down about 38 mm (1.5 in). 9. Gently remove your hands and let the vehicle settle. 10. Repeat this operation 2 more times for a total of 3 times. 11. Re-measure the Z height as in step 4. 12. The true Z height is the average of the measurements taken in steps 4 and 8. Refer to Trim Height Specifications (See: Specifications/Mechanical Specifications/Suspension/System Specifications/Trim Height Specifications). If any of these measurements are out of specifications, inspect for the following conditions: * Worn or damage suspension components * Collision damage Measuring the D Height Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Description and Operation > Page 1298 Important: * In order to obtain the proper measurement, D will equal inner minus the outer. * The left and right D height difference should be no more than 12 mm (0.47 in). Use the following procedure to measure the D height: 1. Lift the rear bumper of the vehicle up about 38 mm (1.5 in). 2. Gently remove your hands and let the vehicle settle. 3. Repeat this operation 2 more times for a total of 3 times. 4. Measure from the center of the inner pivot bolt (A) to the alignment rack. 5. Measure from the center of the outer pivot bolt (B) to the alignment rack. 6. The difference between these 2 measurements is the D height. 7. Lift the rear bumper of the vehicle up about 38 mm (1.5 in). 8. Gently remove your hands and let the vehicle settle. 9. Repeat this operation 2 more times for a total of 3 times. 10. Re-measure the D height as in step 4. 11. The true D height is the average of the measurements taken in steps 4 and 8. Refer to Trim Height Specifications (See: Specifications/Mechanical Specifications/Suspension/System Specifications/Trim Height Specifications). If any of these measurements are out of specifications, inspect for the following conditions: * Worn or damage suspension components * Collision damage Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Alignment Measurement Alignment: Service and Repair Wheel Alignment Measurement Wheel Alignment Measurement Steering and vibration complaints are not always the result of improper alignment. One possible cause is wheel and tire imbalance. Another possibility is tire lead due to worn or improperly manufactured tires. Lead/pull is defined as follows: At a constant highway speed on a typical straight road, lead/pull is the amount of effort required at the steering wheel to maintain the vehicle's straight path. Lead is the vehicle deviation from a straight path on a level road without pressure on the steering wheel. Refer to Radial Tire Lead/Pull Correction (See: Wheels and Tires/Testing and Inspection/Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures/Radial Tire Lead/Pull Correction) in order to determine if the vehicle has a tire lead problem. Before performing any adjustment affecting wheel alignment, perform the following inspections in order to ensure correct alignment readings: * Inspect for visible damage to the suspension components and replace as necessary. * Inspect the tires for the proper inflation and irregular tire wear. Refer to Vehicle Certification, Tire Placard, Anti-Theft, and Service Parts ID Label (See: Application and ID/Vehicle Certification, Tire Placard, Anti-Theft and Service Parts ID Label) and Tire Diagnosis - Irregular or Premature Wear (See: Wheels and Tires/Testing and Inspection/Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures/Tire Diagnosis - Irregular or Premature Wear). * Inspect the runout of the wheels and the tires. Refer to Wheel Mounting Surface Check (See: Wheels and Tires/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics). * Inspect the wheel bearings for backlash and excessive play. Refer to Wheel Bearings Diagnosis (See: Steering and Suspension/Suspension/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Wheel Bearings Diagnosis). * Inspect the ball joints for looseness or wear. * Inspect the tie rod ends for looseness or wear. * Inspect the control arms and stabilizer shaft for looseness or wear. * Inspect the steering gear for looseness at the frame. Refer to Fastener Tightening Specifications (See: Specifications/Mechanical Specifications/Steering/System Specifications). * Inspect the struts/shock absorbers for wear, leaks, and any noticeable noises. Refer to Suspension Strut and Shock Absorber Testing - On Vehicle (See: Steering and Suspension/Suspension/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Suspension Strut and Shock Absorber Testing - On Vehicle). * Inspect the vehicle trim height. Refer to Trim Height Inspection (See: Steering and Suspension/Suspension/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Trim Height Inspection). * Inspect the steering wheel for excessive drag or poor return due to stiff or rusted linkage or suspension components. * Inspect the fuel level. The fuel tank should be full or the vehicle should have a compensating load added. Give consideration to excess loads, such as tool boxes, sample cases, etc. If normally carried in the vehicle, these items should remain in the vehicle during alignment adjustments. Give consideration also to the condition of the equipment being used for the alignment. Follow the equipment manufacturer's instructions. Satisfactory vehicle operation may occur over a wide range of alignment settings. However, if the setting exceeds the service allowable specifications, correct the alignment to the service preferred specifications. Refer to Wheel Alignment Specifications (See: Specifications/Wheel Alignment Specifications). Perform the following steps in order to measure the front and rear alignment angles: 1. Install the alignment equipment according to the manufacturer's instructions. 2. Jounce the front and the rear bumpers 3 times prior to checking the wheel alignment. 3. Measure the alignment angles and record the readings. Note: * Record the "Before" and "After" alignment measurements. * When performing adjustments to vehicles requiring a 4-wheel alignment, set the rear toe adjustment first in order to obtain proper front alignment angles. * The rear camber and caster is not adjustable. 4. Adjust alignment angles to vehicle specification, if necessary. Refer to Wheel Alignment Specifications (See: Specifications/Wheel Alignment Specifications). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Alignment Measurement > Page 1301 Alignment: Service and Repair Front Camber Adjustment Front Camber Adjustment 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle (See: Vehicle Lifting/Service and Repair). 2. Remove the wheel and tire assemblies. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation (See: Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair). 3. Remove the strut to knuckle nuts and bolts. Discard the nuts and bolts. 4. If the strut has not been previously modified, perform the following procedure: 1. Disconnect the strut from the knuckle. Note: * Maximum outboard adjustment-(increased negative camber) 2.0 mm of outboard elongation or to within 11.0 mm from outboard edge of lower strut clevis bracket, whichever comes first * Maximum inboard adjustment-(increased positive camber) 4.0 mm of inboard elongation Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Alignment Measurement > Page 1302 * If filing the strut, paint the exposed metal with primer. 2. If increasing negative camber, remove material from the outside of the lower strut hole. 3. If decreasing negative camber, remove material from the inside of the lower strut hole. 5. Loosely install new strut to knuckle nuts and bolts. 6. Adjust the camber to specifications by moving the top of the wheel in or out as necessary. Refer to Wheel Alignment Specifications (See: Specifications/Wheel Alignment Specifications). Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener Caution). 7. Tighten strut to knuckle nuts and bolts to 180 Nm (133 lb ft). 8. Install the wheel and tire assemblies. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation (See: Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Alignment Measurement > Page 1303 Alignment: Service and Repair Wheel Alignment - Steering Wheel Angle and/or Front Toe Adjustment Wheel Alignment - Steering Wheel Angle and/or Front Toe Adjustment 1. Position and lock the steering wheel with the vehicle with the wheels in the straight forward position. 2. Loosen both inner tie rod jam nuts. Note: The inner tie rod must rotate freely from the boot seal surface. Do not allow the boot to rotate. 3. Loosen the inner tie rod seal to boot surface. 4. Use a wrench on the tie rod flats to increase or decrease the toe angle specifications. Refer to Wheel Alignment Specifications (See: Specifications/Wheel Alignment Specifications). Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener Caution). 5. Tighten the inner tie rod jam nuts to 70 Nm (52 lb ft). 6. Inspect the toe angle to ensure proper adjustment and adjust as necessary. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Alignment Measurement > Page 1304 Alignment: Service and Repair Wheel Alignment Measurement Wheel Alignment Measurement Steering and vibration complaints are not always the result of improper alignment. One possible cause is wheel and tire imbalance. Another possibility is tire lead due to worn or improperly manufactured tires. Lead/pull is defined as follows: At a constant highway speed on a typical straight road, lead/pull is the amount of effort required at the steering wheel to maintain the vehicle's straight path. Lead is the vehicle deviation from a straight path on a level road without pressure on the steering wheel. Refer to Radial Tire Lead/Pull Correction (See: Wheels and Tires/Testing and Inspection/Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures/Radial Tire Lead/Pull Correction) in order to determine if the vehicle has a tire lead problem. Before performing any adjustment affecting wheel alignment, perform the following inspections in order to ensure correct alignment readings: * Inspect for visible damage to the suspension components and replace as necessary. * Inspect the tires for the proper inflation and irregular tire wear. Refer to Vehicle Certification, Tire Placard, Anti-Theft, and Service Parts ID Label (See: Application and ID/Vehicle Certification, Tire Placard, Anti-Theft and Service Parts ID Label) and Tire Diagnosis - Irregular or Premature Wear (See: Wheels and Tires/Testing and Inspection/Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures/Tire Diagnosis - Irregular or Premature Wear). * Inspect the runout of the wheels and the tires. Refer to Wheel Mounting Surface Check (See: Wheels and Tires/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics). * Inspect the wheel bearings for backlash and excessive play. Refer to Wheel Bearings Diagnosis (See: Steering and Suspension/Suspension/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Wheel Bearings Diagnosis). * Inspect the ball joints for looseness or wear. * Inspect the tie rod ends for looseness or wear. * Inspect the control arms and stabilizer shaft for looseness or wear. * Inspect the steering gear for looseness at the frame. Refer to Fastener Tightening Specifications (See: Specifications/Mechanical Specifications/Steering/System Specifications). * Inspect the struts/shock absorbers for wear, leaks, and any noticeable noises. Refer to Suspension Strut and Shock Absorber Testing - On Vehicle (See: Steering and Suspension/Suspension/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Suspension Strut and Shock Absorber Testing - On Vehicle). * Inspect the vehicle trim height. Refer to Trim Height Inspection (See: Steering and Suspension/Suspension/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Trim Height Inspection). * Inspect the steering wheel for excessive drag or poor return due to stiff or rusted linkage or suspension components. * Inspect the fuel level. The fuel tank should be full or the vehicle should have a compensating load added. Give consideration to excess loads, such as tool boxes, sample cases, etc. If normally carried in the vehicle, these items should remain in the vehicle during alignment adjustments. Give consideration also to the condition of the equipment being used for the alignment. Follow the equipment manufacturer's instructions. Satisfactory vehicle operation may occur over a wide range of alignment settings. However, if the setting exceeds the service allowable specifications, correct the alignment to the service preferred specifications. Refer to Wheel Alignment Specifications (See: Specifications/Wheel Alignment Specifications). Perform the following steps in order to measure the front and rear alignment angles: 1. Install the alignment equipment according to the manufacturer's instructions. 2. Jounce the front and the rear bumpers 3 times prior to checking the wheel alignment. 3. Measure the alignment angles and record the readings. Note: * Record the "Before" and "After" alignment measurements. * When performing adjustments to vehicles requiring a 4-wheel alignment, set the rear toe adjustment first in order to obtain proper front alignment angles. * The rear camber and caster is not adjustable. 4. Adjust alignment angles to vehicle specification, if necessary. Refer to Wheel Alignment Specifications (See: Specifications/Wheel Alignment Specifications). Front Camber Adjustment Front Camber Adjustment 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle (See: Vehicle Lifting/Service and Repair). 2. Remove the wheel and tire assemblies. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation (See: Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Alignment Measurement > Page 1305 3. Remove the strut to knuckle nuts and bolts. Discard the nuts and bolts. 4. If the strut has not been previously modified, perform the following procedure: 1. Disconnect the strut from the knuckle. Note: * Maximum outboard adjustment-(increased negative camber) 2.0 mm of outboard elongation or to within 11.0 mm from outboard edge of lower strut clevis bracket, whichever comes first * Maximum inboard adjustment-(increased positive camber) 4.0 mm of inboard elongation * If filing the strut, paint the exposed metal with primer. 2. If increasing negative camber, remove material from the outside of the lower strut hole. 3. If decreasing negative camber, remove material from the inside of the lower strut hole. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Alignment Measurement > Page 1306 5. Loosely install new strut to knuckle nuts and bolts. 6. Adjust the camber to specifications by moving the top of the wheel in or out as necessary. Refer to Wheel Alignment Specifications (See: Specifications/Wheel Alignment Specifications). Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener Caution). 7. Tighten strut to knuckle nuts and bolts to 180 Nm (133 lb ft). 8. Install the wheel and tire assemblies. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation (See: Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair). Front Caster Adjustment Front Caster Adjustment The front caster is not adjustable. If the front caster angle is not within specifications, inspect for suspension support misalignment or front suspension damage. Refer to Wheel Alignment Specifications (See: Specifications/Wheel Alignment Specifications). Replace any damaged suspension components as necessary. Wheel Alignment - Steering Wheel Angle and/or Front Toe Adjustment Wheel Alignment - Steering Wheel Angle and/or Front Toe Adjustment Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Alignment Measurement > Page 1307 1. Position and lock the steering wheel with the vehicle with the wheels in the straight forward position. 2. Loosen both inner tie rod jam nuts. Note: The inner tie rod must rotate freely from the boot seal surface. Do not allow the boot to rotate. 3. Loosen the inner tie rod seal to boot surface. 4. Use a wrench on the tie rod flats to increase or decrease the toe angle specifications. Refer to Wheel Alignment Specifications (See: Specifications/Wheel Alignment Specifications). Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener Caution). 5. Tighten the inner tie rod jam nuts to 70 Nm (52 lb ft). 6. Inspect the toe angle to ensure proper adjustment and adjust as necessary. Rear Camber Adjustment Rear Camber Adjustment Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Alignment Measurement > Page 1308 1. Loosen the upper control arm-to-frame fastener enough to allow movement. Note: The frame of the vehicle is slotted, turning the cam nut will move the camber in to the designated location. 2. Rotate the upper control arm-to-frame fastener in the direction necessary to the correct the camber measurement. 3. Snug the upper control arm-to-frame fastener, do not tighten at this time. 4. Reinspect the rear camber specifications and adjust as necessary. Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener Caution). 5. Hold the nut and tighten the upper control arm-to-frame bolt to 164 Nm (121 lb ft). 6. Repeat the procedure for the other rear wheel. Rear Toe Adjustment Rear Toe Adjustment 1. Loosen the suspension adjustment link-to-frame fastener enough to allow for movement. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Alignment Measurement > Page 1309 Note: If experiencing problems in adjusting the rear toe, replace the existing nut with the service cam nut to eliminate the adjustment problem. 2. Rotate the suspension adjustment nut in the direction necessary to correct the toe angle. 3. Snug the suspension adjustment link-to-frame fastener, do not tighten at this time. 4. Reinspect the rear toe specifications and adjust as necessary. Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener Caution). 5. Hold the nut and tighten the link-to-frame fastener bolt to 164 Nm (121 lb ft). 6. Repeat the procedure for the other rear wheel. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Pressure > System Information > Specifications Fuel Pressure: Specifications Fuel Pressure (Ignition ON, engine OFF) ....................................................................................................................................... 276-448 kPa (40-65 psi). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Pressure > System Information > Specifications > Page 1314 Fuel Pressure: Service Precautions Relieving Fuel Pressure Warning Warning Remove the fuel tank cap and relieve the fuel system pressure before servicing the fuel system in order to reduce the risk of personal injury. After you relieve the fuel system pressure, a small amount of fuel may be released when servicing the fuel lines, the fuel injection pump, or the connections. In order to reduce the risk of personal injury, cover the fuel system components with a shop towel before disconnection. This will catch any fuel that may leak out. Place the towel in an approved container when the disconnection is complete. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Pressure > System Information > System Diagnosis > Fuel Pressure Gauge Installation and Removal Fuel Pressure: Testing and Inspection Fuel Pressure Gauge Installation and Removal Fuel Pressure Gauge Installation and Removal Special Tools CH-48027-100 Digital Pressure Gauge Installation Procedure Warning: Refer to Gasoline/Gasoline Vapors Warning (See: Powertrain Management/Fuel Delivery and Air Induction/Fuel/Service Precautions). Warning Remove the fuel tank cap and relieve the fuel system pressure before servicing the fuel system in order to reduce the risk of personal injury. After you relieve the fuel system pressure, a small amount of fuel may be released when servicing the fuel lines, the fuel injection pump, or the connections. In order to reduce the risk of personal injury, cover the fuel system components with a shop towel before disconnection. This will catch any fuel that may leak out. Place the towel in an approved container when the disconnection is complete. 1. Relieve the fuel system pressure. Refer to Fuel Pressure Relief (See: Fuel Filter/Fuel Pressure Release/Service and Repair). 2. Connect the CH-48027-1 (1) to the CH-48027-2 (2). 3. Remove the shop towel from around the fuel rail service port, and place in an approved gasoline container. 4. Perform any tests and/or diagnostics as needed. For the proper usage of the CH-48027-100, refer to the manufacture's directions. Removal Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Pressure > System Information > System Diagnosis > Fuel Pressure Gauge Installation and Removal > Page 1317 Warning Wrap a shop towel around the fuel pressure connection in order to reduce the risk of fire and personal injury. The towel will absorb any fuel leakage that occurs during the connection of the fuel pressure gauge. Place the towel in an approved container when the connection of the fuel pressure gauge is complete. 1. Relieve the fuel system pressure, if required. Perform the following steps: 1. Wrap a shop towel around the fuel rail service port. 2. Place the hose on the CH-48027-2 (2) into an approved gasoline container. 3. Open the valve on the CH-48027-2 (2) in order to bleed any fuel from the fuel rail. 4. Close the valve on the CH-48027-2 (2). 5. Remove the hose on the CH-48027-2 (2) from the approved gasoline container. 6. Remove the shop towel from around the fuel rail service port, and place in an approved gasoline container. Caution: Clean all of the following areas before performing any disconnections in order to avoid possible contamination in the system: * The fuel pipe connections * The hose connections * The areas surrounding the connections 2. Disconnect the CH-48027-1 (1) from the CH-48027-2 (2). 3. Disconnect the CH-48027-2 (2) from the CH-48027-3 (3). 4. Disconnect the CH-48027-3 (3) from the fuel rail service port. 5. Install the fuel rail service port cap. 6. Install the engine cover, if required. 7. Tighten the fuel fill cap. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Pressure > System Information > System Diagnosis > Fuel Pressure Gauge Installation and Removal > Page 1318 Fuel Pressure: Testing and Inspection Fuel System Diagnosis Fuel System Diagnosis Diagnostic Instructions * Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle (See: Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle) prior to using this diagnostic procedure. * Review Strategy Based Diagnosis (See: Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Strategy Based Diagnosis) for an overview of the diagnostic approach. * Diagnostic Procedure Instructions (See: Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Diagnostic Procedure Instructions) provides an overview of each diagnostic category. Circuit/System Description The engine control module (ECM) supplies voltage to the fuel pump control module when the ECM detects that the ignition is ON. The voltage from the ECM to the fuel pump control module remains active for 2 s, unless the engine is in Crank or Run. While this voltage is being received, the fuel pump control module closes the ground switch of the fuel pump and also supplies a varying voltage to the fuel tank module in order to maintain the desired fuel rail pressure. The fuel system is an electronic returnless on-demand design. A returnless fuel system reduces the internal temperature of the fuel tank by not returning hot fuel from the engine to the fuel tank. Reducing the internal temperature of the fuel tank results in lower evaporative emissions. An electric turbine style fuel pump attaches to the primary fuel pump module inside the fuel tank. The fuel pump supplies fuel through the fuel feed pipe to the high pressure fuel pump. The high pressure fuel pump supplies fuel to a variable-pressure fuel rail. Fuel enters the combustion chamber through precision multi-hole fuel injectors. The high pressure fuel pump, fuel rail pressure, fuel injection timing, and injection duration are controlled by the engine control module (ECM). The primary fuel tank module also contains a primary jet pump and a secondary jet pump. Fuel pump flow loss, caused by vapor expulsion in the pump inlet chamber, is diverted to the primary jet pump and the secondary jet pump through a restrictive orifice located on the pump cover. The primary jet pump fills the reservoir of the primary fuel tank module. The secondary jet pump creates a venturi action which causes the fuel to be drawn from the secondary side of the fuel tank, through the fuel transfer pipe, to the primary side of the fuel tank. Reference Information Description and Operation Fuel System Description (LF1) (See: Powertrain Management/Fuel Delivery and Air Induction/Description and Operation/Fuel System Description) Electrical Information Reference * Circuit Testing (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Circuit Testing) * Connector Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Connector Repairs) * Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections) * Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Wiring Repairs) Scan Tool Reference Control Module References (See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning) for scan tool information Special Tools * CH 48027 - Digital Pressure Gauge * J 37287 - Fuel Line Shut-off Adapter Circuit/System Verification Note: * Repair all fuel system related DTCs before performing this diagnostic. * Inspect the fuel system for damage or external leaks before proceeding. * Verify that adequate fuel is in the fuel tank before proceeding. * The Fuel Pump Enable may need to be commanded ON a few times in order to obtain the highest possible fuel pressure. * Before proceeding with this test review the User Manual CH 48027-5 for Safety Information and Instructions. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Pressure > System Information > System Diagnosis > Fuel Pressure Gauge Installation and Removal > Page 1319 1. Ignition OFF, all accessories OFF, install a CH 48027 - Gauge. Refer to Fuel Pressure Gauge Installation and Removal (See: Fuel Pressure Gauge Installation and Removal). Note: High fuel pressure readings may result due to hot soak fuel boiling. With the engine OFF, the fuel pressure may increase to the setting of the pressure relief regulator valve, approximately 580 kPa (84 psi). 2. Ignition ON, engine OFF, command the Fuel Pump Enable ON with a scan tool. Verify the fuel pressure is between 276-448 kPa (40-65 psi) and does not decrease more than 34 kPa (5 psi) in 1 min. 3. Engine idling at normal operating temperature, verify the scan tool Fuel Pump Control Module Fuel Pressure Sensor parameter is between 276-324 kPa (40-47 psi). Circuit/System Testing Note: * The Fuel Pump Enable may need to be commanded ON a few times in order to obtain the highest possible fuel pressure. * DO NOT start the engine. * High fuel pressure readings may result due to hot soak fuel boiling. With the engine OFF, the fuel pressure may increase to the setting of the pressure relief regulator valve, approximately 580 kPa (84 psi). 1. Ignition ON, engine OFF, command the Fuel Pump Enable ON with a scan tool and observe the fuel pressure gauge while the fuel pump is operating. Verify the fuel pressure is between 276-448 kPa (40-65 psi). ‹› If the fuel pressure is less than the specified range, test, inspect, and repair the items listed below. If all items test normal, replace the primary fuel tank module. * Restricted fuel feed pipe * Inspect the harness connectors and the ground circuits of the fuel pump for poor connections. 2. Verify that the fuel pressure does not decrease more than 34 kPa (5 psi) in 1 min. ‹› If the fuel pressure decreases more than the specified value, perform the following procedure: 1. Ignition OFF, relieve the fuel pressure. Refer to Fuel Pressure Relief (See: Fuel Filter/Fuel Pressure Release/Service and Repair). 2. Install the J 37287 - Adapter between the chassis fuel feed hose and the engine compartment fuel feed pipe. 3. Open the valve on the J 37287 - Adapter. 4. Ignition ON, command the Fuel Pump Enable ON with a scan tool and bleed the air from the CH 48027 - Gauge. 5. Command the Fuel Pump Enable ON and then OFF with a scan tool. 6. Close the valve on the J 37287 - Adapter. 7. Monitor the fuel pressure for 1 min. ‹› If the fuel pressure does not decrease more than 34 kPa (5 psi) within the specified time, replace the primary fuel tank module. 3. Relieve the fuel pressure to 69 kPa (10 psi). Verify that the fuel pressure does not decrease more than 14 kPa (2 psi) in 5 min. ‹› If the fuel pressure decreases more than the specified value, replace the primary fuel tank module. 4. Operate the vehicle within the conditions of the customer's concern while monitoring the fuel pressure with the CH 48027 - Gauge. The fuel pressure should not drop off during acceleration, cruise or hard cornering. ‹› If the fuel pressure drops off, test, inspect, and repair the items listed below. If all items test normal, replace the primary fuel tank module. * Restricted fuel feed pipe * Inspect the harness connectors and the ground circuits of the fuel pump for poor connections 5. If the fuel system tests normal, refer to Symptoms - Engine Controls (See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures/Symptoms - Engine Controls). Repair Instructions Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification (See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures/Verification Tests and Procedures) after completing the diagnostic procedure. * Fuel Feed Pipe Replacement (LF1) (See: Powertrain Management/Fuel Delivery and Air Induction/Fuel Supply Line/Service and Repair/Fuel Feed Pipe Replacement) * Fuel Tank Fuel Pump Module Replacement (See: Powertrain Management/Fuel Delivery and Air Induction/Fuel Pump/Service and Repair) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Idle Speed > System Information > Specifications Idle Speed: Specifications Information not supplied by the manufacturer. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Idle Speed > System Information > Specifications > Page 1323 Idle Speed: Testing and Inspection Throttle/Idle Learn (LF1, LFW) Description The engine control module (ECM) learns the airflow through the throttle body to ensure the correct idle. The learned airflow values are stored within the ECM. These values are learned to adjust for production variation and will continuously learn during the life of the vehicle to compensate for reduced airflow due to throttle body coking. Anytime the throttle body airflow rate changes, for example due to cleaning or replacing, the values must be relearned. An engine that had a heavily coked throttle body that has been cleaned or replaced may take several drive cycles to learn out the coking. To accelerate the process, the scan tool has the ability to reset all learned values back to zero. A new ECM will also have values set to zero. The idle may be unstable or a DTC may set if the learned values do not match the actual airflow. Conditions for Running the Throttle Learn Procedure Reset Procedure * DTCs P0068, P0101, P0102, P0103, P0106, P0107, P0108, P0116, P0117, P0118, P0120, P0122, P0123, P0128, P0171, P0172, P0174, P0175, P0201, P0202, P0203, P0204, P0205, P0206, P0220, P0222, P0223, P0300, P0351, P0352, P0353, P0496, P0601, P0604, P0606, P060D, P0641, P0651, P1516, P2101, P2119, P2120, P2122, P2123, P2125, P2127, P2128, P2135, P2138, or P2176 are not set. * Ignition ON, engine OFF. * The vehicle speed sensor (VSS) is 0 km/h (0 mph). Learn Procedure * DTCs P0068, P0101, P0102, P0103, P0106, P0107, P0108, P0116, P0117, P0118, P0120, P0122, P0123, P0128, P0171, P0172, P0174, P0175, P0201, P0202, P0203, P0204, P0205, P0206, P0220, P0222, P0223, P0300, P0351, P0352, P0353, P0496, P0601, P0604, P0606, P060D, P0641, P0651, P1516, P2101, P2119, P2120, P2122, P2123, P2125, P2127, P2128, P2135, P2138, or P2176 are not set. * The engine speed is between 450-4,000 RPM. * The manifold absolute pressure (MAP) is greater than 5 kPa. * The mass air flow (MAF) is greater than 2 g/s. * The ignition voltage is greater than 10 volts. Throttle Learn Reset Procedure (Performed after the throttle body is cleaned or replaced) 1. Ignition ON, engine OFF, perform the Idle Learn Reset in Module Setup with a scan tool. 2. Start the engine and monitor the TB Idle Airflow Compensation parameter. The TB Idle Airflow Compensation value should equal 0 percent and the engine should be idling at a normal idle speed. 3. Clear the DTCs and return to the diagnostic that referred you here. Learn Procedure (Performed after the ECM is flashed or replaced) Note: Do NOT perform this procedure if DTCs are set. Refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle (See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Descriptions/Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle). 1. Start and idle the engine for 3 minutes. 2. With a scan tool, monitor the Desired Idle Speed and the actual Engine Speed. 3. The ECM will start to learn the new idle cells and Desired Idle Speed should start to decrease. 4. Ignition OFF for 60 seconds. 5. Start and idle the engine for 3 minutes. 6. After the 3 minute run time the engine should be idling normal. Note: During the drive cycle the check engine light may come on with idle speed DTCs. If idle speed codes are set, clear codes so the ECM can continue to learn. ‹› If the engine idle speed has not been learned the vehicle will need to be driven at speeds above 70 km/h (44 mph) with several decelerations and extended idles. 7. After the drive cycle, the engine should be idling normally. ‹› If the engine idle speed has not been learned, turn OFF the ignition for 60 seconds and repeat step 6. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Idle Speed > System Information > Specifications > Page 1324 8. Once the engine speed has returned to normal, clear DTCs and return to the diagnostic that referred you here. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Cleaner Fresh Air Duct/Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair Air Cleaner Fresh Air Duct/Hose: Service and Repair Air Cleaner Outlet Duct Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Filter Element > Component Information > Service and Repair Air Filter Element: Service and Repair Air Cleaner Element Replacement (LE5) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Filter > Fuel Pressure Release > System Information > Service and Repair Fuel Pressure Release: Service and Repair Fuel Pressure Relief Warning Fuel that flows out at high pressure can cause serious injury to the skin and eyes. ALWAYS depressurize the fuel system before removing components that are under high fuel pressure. Note: If a scan tool is not available, WAIT at LEAST 2 hours after the engine has been run, before removing the high pressure fuel line. 1. Install a scan tool to the vehicle and command the fuel pump relay OFF, allowing the low pressure fuel pump to shut off. 2. Start the vehicle and allow the engine to idle until the engine stops. The engine will stop in approximately 20-30 seconds. 3. Turn the ignition OFF. 4. Using the scan tool, verify that there is little to no fuel pressure, if there still is fuel pressure repeat step 2. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Firing Order > Component Information > Specifications Firing Order: Specifications Ignition System Specifications Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Ignition Timing > System Information > Specifications Ignition Timing: Specifications Information not supplied by the manufacturer. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications Spark Plug: Specifications Ignition System Specifications Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1345 Spark Plug: Application and ID Ignition System Specifications Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1346 Spark Plug: Testing and Inspection Spark Plug Inspection Spark Plug Usage * Ensure that the correct spark plug is installed. An incorrect spark plug causes driveability conditions. Refer to Ignition System Specifications ( See: Powertrain Management/Ignition System/Specifications) for the correct spark plug. * Ensure that the spark plug has the correct heat range. An incorrect heat range causes the following conditions: - Spark plug fouling-Colder plug - Pre-ignition causing spark plug and/or engine damage-Hotter plug Spark Plug Inspection * Inspect the terminal post (1) for damage. - Inspect for a bent or broken terminal post (1). - Test for a loose terminal post (1) by twisting and pulling the post. The terminal post (1) should NOT move. * Inspect the insulator (2) for flashover or carbon tracking, soot. This is caused by the electrical charge traveling across the insulator (2) between the terminal post (1) and ground. Inspect for the following conditions: - Inspect the spark plug boot for damage. - Inspect the spark plug recess area of the cylinder head for moisture, such as oil, coolant, or water. A spark plug boot that is saturated causes arcing to ground. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1347 * Inspect the insulator (2) for cracks. All or part of the electrical charge may arc through the crack instead of the electrodes (3, 4). * Inspect for evidence of improper arcing. - Measure the gap between the center electrode (4) and the side electrode (3) terminals. Refer to Ignition System Specifications (See: Powertrain Management/Ignition System/Specifications). An excessively wide electrode gap can prevent correct spark plug operation. - Inspect for the correct spark plug torque. Refer to Ignition System Specifications (See: Powertrain Management/Ignition System/Specifications). Insufficient torque can prevent correct spark plug operation. An over torqued spark plug, causes the insulator (2) to crack. - Inspect for signs of tracking that occurred near the insulator tip instead of the center electrode (4). - Inspect for a broken or worn side electrode (3). - Inspect for a broken, worn, or loose center electrode (4) by shaking the spark plug. * A rattling sound indicates internal damage. * A loose center electrode (4) reduces the spark intensity. - Inspect for bridged electrodes (3, 4). Deposits on the electrodes (3, 4) reduce or eliminates the gap. - Inspect for worn or missing platinum pads on the electrodes (3, 4), if equipped. - Inspect for excessive fouling. * Inspect the spark plug recess area of the cylinder head for debris. Dirty or damaged threads can cause the spark plug not to seat correctly during installation. Spark Plug Visual Inspection * Normal operation-Brown to grayish-tan with small amounts of white powdery deposits are normal combustion by-products from fuels with additives. * Carbon fouled-Dry, fluffy, black carbon or soot caused by the following conditions: - Rich fuel mixtures * Leaking fuel injectors * Excessive fuel pressure * Restricted air filter element * Incorrect combustion - Reduced ignition system voltage output * Weak coils Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1348 * Worn ignition wires * Incorrect spark plug gap - Excessive idling or slow speeds under light loads can keep spark plug temperatures so low that normal combustion deposits may not burn off. * Deposit fouling-Oil, coolant, or additives that include substances such as silicone, very white coating, reduces the spark intensity. Most powdery deposits will not effect spark intensity unless they form into a glazing over the electrode. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1349 Spark Plug: Service and Repair Spark Plug Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the ignition coil(s). Refer to Ignition Coil Replacement - Bank 1 (See: Powertrain Management/Ignition System/Ignition Coil/Service and Repair/Ignition Coil Replacement - Bank 1) and/or Ignition Coil Replacement - Bank 2 (See: Powertrain Management/Ignition System/Ignition Coil/Service and Repair/Ignition Coil Replacement - Bank 2). Warning: Refer to Safety Glasses and Compressed Air Warning (See: Service Precautions/Technician Safety Information/Safety Glasses and Compressed Air Warning). Caution: Clean the spark plug recess area before removing the spark plug. Failure to do so could result in engine damage because of dirt or foreign material entering the cylinder head, or by the contamination of the cylinder head threads. The contaminated threads may prevent the proper seating of the new plug. Use a thread chaser to clean the threads of any contamination. 2. Use compressed air in order to remove debris from the spark plug cavity. Caution: Allow the engine to cool before removing the spark plugs. Attempting to remove the spark plugs from a hot engine may cause the plug threads to seize, causing damage to cylinder head threads. 3. Remove the spark plug. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1350 Caution: Use only the spark plugs specified for use in the vehicle. Do not install spark plugs that are either hotter or colder than those specified for the vehicle. Installing spark plugs of another type can severely damage the engine. Caution: Check the gap of all new and reconditioned spark plugs before installation. The pre-set gaps may have changed during handling. Use a round feeler gauge to ensure an accurate check. Installing the spark plugs with the wrong gap can cause poor engine performance and may even damage the engine. 1. Ensure that the spark plug gap is equivalent to the spark plug gap specification. Refer to Ignition System Specifications (See: Powertrain Management/Ignition System/Specifications). Caution: Be sure that the spark plug threads smoothly into the cylinder head and the spark plug is fully seated. Use a thread chaser, if necessary, to clean threads in the cylinder head. Cross-threading or failing to fully seat the spark plug can cause overheating of the plug, exhaust blow-by, or thread damage. Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener Caution). 2. Install the spark plug. Tighten the spark plug to 20 Nm (15 lb ft). 3. Install the ignition coil(s). Refer to Ignition Coil Replacement - Bank 1 (See: Powertrain Management/Ignition System/Ignition Coil/Service and Repair/Ignition Coil Replacement - Bank 1) and/or Ignition Coil Replacement - Bank 2 (See: Powertrain Management/Ignition System/Ignition Coil/Service and Repair/Ignition Coil Replacement - Bank 2). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Compression Check > System Information > Specifications Compression Check: Specifications Compression Check Record the compression readings from all of the cylinders. The lowest reading should not be less than 70 percent of the highest reading. No cylinder reading should be less than 965 kPa (140 psi). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Compression Check > System Information > Specifications > Page 1354 Compression Check: Testing and Inspection Engine Compression Test Special Tools EN 39313 - Spark Plug Port Adapter For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Tools and Equipment/Special Tools). A compression pressure test of the engine cylinders determines the condition of the rings, the valves and the head gasket. 1. Run the engine until it reaches normal operating temperature. The battery must be at or near full charge. 2. Turn the engine OFF. Important: Remove the powertrain control module (PCM) and the ignition fuse from the instrument panel (I/P) fuse block. 3. Disable the ignition. 4. Disable the fuel systems. 5. Remove the spark plugs from all cylinders. 6. Remove the air duct from the throttle body. 7. Block the throttle plate in open position. 8. Measure the engine compression, using the following procedure: 1. Thread the EN 39313 - adapter into the spark plug hole. 2. Thread the compression gauge into the EN 39313 - adapter. 3. Have an assistant crank the engine through, at least 4 compression strokes, in the testing cylinder. 4. Check and record the readings on the gauge at each stroke. 5. Remove the compression gauge from the EN 39313 - adapter. 6. Remove the EN 39313 - adapter from the spark plug hole. 7. Repeat the compression test for each cylinder. 9. Record the compression readings from all of the cylinders. * The lowest reading should not be less than 70 percent of the highest reading. * No cylinder reading should be less than 965 kPa (140 psi). 10. The following are examples of measurement problems: * When the compression measurement is normal, the compression builds up quickly and evenly to specified compression on each cylinder. * When low compression is caused by the piston rings, compression is low on the first stroke and tends to build up on the following strokes, but does not reach normal. Compression improves considerably with the addition of oil. Use approximately 3 squirts of oil from a plunger-type oiler. * When low compression is caused by the valves, the measurement is low on the first stroke and does not build up even with the addition of oil. * Leaking head gaskets will provide the same results as worn valves but engine coolant may be identified in the crankcase. In addition, a leaking head gasket will give low readings on paired cylinders. 11. Remove the block from the throttle plate. 12. Install the air duct to the throttle body. 13. Install the spark plugs. 14. Install the powertrain control module (PCM). 15. Install the ignition fuses to the I/P fuse block. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Timing Component Alignment Marks > Component Information > Locations Timing Component Alignment Marks: Locations Timing Chain Alignment Diagram Camshaft Position Actuator Timing Marks 1 - Right Intake Camshaft Position Actuator Identifier 2 - Right Intake Camshaft Position Actuator Right Side Timing Mark - Triangle 3 - Left Intake Camshaft Position Actuator Left Side Timing Mark - Circle 4 - Left Intake Camshaft Position Actuator Identifier 5 - Exhaust Camshaft Position Actuator Identifier 6 - Exhaust Camshaft Position Actuator Right Side Timing Mark - Triangle 7 - Exhaust Camshaft Position Actuator Left Side Timing Mark - Circle Stage One Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Timing Component Alignment Marks > Component Information > Locations > Page 1358 1 - Left Intake Camshaft Position (CMP) Actuator Timing Mark - Circle 2 - Left Intake Secondary Camshaft Timing Drive Chain Timing Link 3 - Left Exhaust Secondary Camshaft Timing Drive Chain Timing Link 4 - Left Exhaust Camshaft Position (CMP) Actuator Timing Mark - Circle 5 - Left Secondary Camshaft Timing Drive Chain 6 - Primary Camshaft Drive Chain Timing Link for the Left Primary Camshaft Intermediate Drive Chain Sprocket 7 - Left Primary Camshaft Intermediate Drive Chain Sprocket Timing Mark for the Primary Camshaft Drive Chain 8 - Left Primary Camshaft Intermediate Drive Chain Sprocket 9 - Left Secondary Camshaft Timing Drive Chain Timing Link for the Left Primary Camshaft Intermediate Drive Chain Sprocket, behind hole in sprocket 10 - Left Primary Camshaft Intermediate Drive Chain Sprocket Timing Window for the Left Secondary Camshaft Timing Drive Chain Timing Link 11 - Primary Camshaft Drive Chain 12 - Primary Camshaft Drive Chain Timing Link for the Crankshaft Sprocket 13 - Crankshaft Sprocket Timing Mark 14 - Crankshaft Sprocket 15 - Right Primary Camshaft Intermediate Drive Chain Sprocket 16 - Primary Camshaft Drive Chain Timing Link for the Right Primary Camshaft Intermediate Drive Chain Sprocket 17 - Right Primary Camshaft Intermediate Drive Chain Sprocket Timing Mark Stage Two Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Timing Component Alignment Marks > Component Information > Locations > Page 1359 1 - Left Intake Camshaft Position (CMP) Actuator Timing Mark - Circle 2 - Left Intake Secondary Camshaft Timing Drive Chain Timing Link 3 - Left Exhaust Secondary Camshaft Timing Drive Chain Timing Link 4 - Left Exhaust Camshaft Position (CMP) Actuator Timing Mark - Circle 5 - Left Secondary Camshaft Timing Drive Chain 6 - Primary Camshaft Drive Chain Timing Link for the Left Primary Camshaft Intermediate Drive Chain Sprocket 7 - Left Primary Camshaft Intermediate Drive Chain Sprocket Timing Mark for the Primary Camshaft Drive Chain 8 - Left Primary Camshaft Intermediate Drive Chain Sprocket 9 - Left Secondary Camshaft Timing Drive Chain Timing Link for the Left Primary Camshaft Intermediate Drive Chain Sprocket, behind hole in sprocket 10 - Left Primary Camshaft Intermediate Drive Chain Sprocket Timing Window 11 - Primary Camshaft Drive Chain 12 - Primary Camshaft Drive Chain Timing Link for the Crankshaft Sprocket 13 - Crankshaft Sprocket Timing Mark 14 - Crankshaft Sprocket 15 - Right Primary Camshaft Intermediate Drive Chain Sprocket 16 - Primary Camshaft Drive Chain Timing Link for the Right Primary Camshaft Intermediate Drive Chain Sprocket 17 - Right Primary Camshaft Intermediate Drive Chain Sprocket Timing Mark for the Primary Camshaft Drive Chain 18 - Right Primary Camshaft Intermediate Drive Chain Sprocket Timing Mark/Window for the Right Secondary Camshaft Timing Drive Chain 19 - Right Secondary Camshaft Timing Drive Chain Timing Link for the Right Primary Camshaft Intermediate Drive Chain Sprocket 20 - Right Secondary Camshaft Timing Drive Chain 21 - Right Exhaust Camshaft Position (CMP) Actuator Timing Mark - Triangle 22 - Right Exhaust Secondary Camshaft Timing Drive Chain Timing Link 23 - Right Intake Secondary Camshaft Timing Drive Chain Timing Link Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Timing Component Alignment Marks > Component Information > Locations > Page 1360 24 - Right Intake Camshaft Position (CMP) Actuator Timing Mark - Triangle Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 10-06-01-006 > Jul > 10 > Engine - Drive Belt Noise Inspect Pulley Drive Belt: Customer Interest Engine - Drive Belt Noise Inspect Pulley TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 10-06-01-006 Date: July 26, 2010 Subject: Intermittent or Continuous Drive Belt Noise (Inspect for Pulley Damage, Misalignment and/or Replace Drive Belt) Models: 2010 Buick LaCrosse 2010 Cadillac SRX 2010 Chevrolet Equinox 2010 GMC Terrain Equipped with 3.0L (RPO LF1) or 3.6L (RPO LLT) V6 Engine Built Prior to February 27, 2010 Condition Some customers may comment on an intermittent or continuous drive belt noise. Cause This condition may be caused by any of the following: - One or more of the accessory drive pulleys may be misaligned, bent or damaged. - The power steering (PS) pump pulley may be misaligned due to improper mounting on the PS pump. - The drive belt may need to be replaced. Correction 1. Verify the intermittent or continuous drive belt noise condition exists. ‹› If the condition exists, proceed to Step 2. ‹› If the condition does not exist, then this bulletin does not apply. 2. Perform a visual inspection for damage to any accessory drive pulley or to the drive belt. Refer to Drive Belt Chirping, Squeal and Whine Diagnosis in SI. ‹› If the diagnosis reveals a condition, then repair as needed. ‹› If the diagnosis does not reveal a condition, proceed to Step 3. 3. Remove the drive belt. Refer to Drive Belt Replacement in SI. Important To properly perform Step 4, you MUST refer to and follow the referenced procedure. 4. Inspect the PS pump pulley and determine if it is flush with the PS pump shaft on the FRONT side. Refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 08-06-01-008A, Diagnosing Accessory Drive Belt/Serpentine Belt Noise and Use of Laser Alignment Tool in SI. ‹› If the inspection reveals that the PS pump pulley is properly aligned, then replace the drive belt. Refer to Drive Belt Replacement in SI. Parts Information Warranty Information Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 10-06-01-006 > Jul > 10 > Engine - Drive Belt Noise Inspect Pulley > Page 1369 For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Drive Belt: > 10-06-01-006 > Jul > 10 > Engine - Drive Belt Noise Inspect Pulley Drive Belt: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine - Drive Belt Noise Inspect Pulley TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 10-06-01-006 Date: July 26, 2010 Subject: Intermittent or Continuous Drive Belt Noise (Inspect for Pulley Damage, Misalignment and/or Replace Drive Belt) Models: 2010 Buick LaCrosse 2010 Cadillac SRX 2010 Chevrolet Equinox 2010 GMC Terrain Equipped with 3.0L (RPO LF1) or 3.6L (RPO LLT) V6 Engine Built Prior to February 27, 2010 Condition Some customers may comment on an intermittent or continuous drive belt noise. Cause This condition may be caused by any of the following: - One or more of the accessory drive pulleys may be misaligned, bent or damaged. - The power steering (PS) pump pulley may be misaligned due to improper mounting on the PS pump. - The drive belt may need to be replaced. Correction 1. Verify the intermittent or continuous drive belt noise condition exists. ‹› If the condition exists, proceed to Step 2. ‹› If the condition does not exist, then this bulletin does not apply. 2. Perform a visual inspection for damage to any accessory drive pulley or to the drive belt. Refer to Drive Belt Chirping, Squeal and Whine Diagnosis in SI. ‹› If the diagnosis reveals a condition, then repair as needed. ‹› If the diagnosis does not reveal a condition, proceed to Step 3. 3. Remove the drive belt. Refer to Drive Belt Replacement in SI. Important To properly perform Step 4, you MUST refer to and follow the referenced procedure. 4. Inspect the PS pump pulley and determine if it is flush with the PS pump shaft on the FRONT side. Refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 08-06-01-008A, Diagnosing Accessory Drive Belt/Serpentine Belt Noise and Use of Laser Alignment Tool in SI. ‹› If the inspection reveals that the PS pump pulley is properly aligned, then replace the drive belt. Refer to Drive Belt Replacement in SI. Parts Information Warranty Information Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Drive Belt: > 10-06-01-006 > Jul > 10 > Engine - Drive Belt Noise Inspect Pulley > Page 1375 For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Drive Belt: > 08-06-01-008A > Jul > 09 > Engine - Drive Belt Misalignment Diagnostics Drive Belt: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine - Drive Belt Misalignment Diagnostics INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 08-06-01-008A Date: July 27, 2009 Subject: Diagnosing Accessory Drive Belt / Serpentine Belt Noise and Availability and Use of Kent-Moore EN-49228 Laser Alignment Tool - Drive Belt Models: 2010 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (Including Saturn) 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 Vehicles 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add a model year and update the Tool Information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 08-06-01-008 (Section 06 - Engine). Background Several aftermarket companies offer laser alignment tools for accessory drive systems that can be very helpful in eliminating drive belt noise as a result of misaligned pulleys. Typically pricing ranges from $160 - $200. EN-49228 Laser Alignment Tool - Drive Belt The GM Tool program has now made available a competitive, simple to use and time-saving laser tool to assist in achieving precise alignment of the drive belt pulleys. This optional tool removes the guesswork from proper pulley alignment and may serve to reduce comebacks from: - Drive Belt Noise - Accelerated Drive Belt Wear - Drive Belt Slippage Instructions The instructions below are specific only to the truck Gen IV V-8 family of engines. These instructions are only for illustrative purposes to show how the tool may be used. Universal instructions are included in the box with the Laser Alignment Tool - Drive Belt. Caution - Do not look directly into the beam projected from the laser. - Use caution when shining the laser on highly polished or reflective surfaces. Laser safety glasses help reduce laser beam glare in many circumstances. - Always use laser safety glasses when using the laser. Laser safety glasses are not designed to protect eyes from direct laser exposure. 1. Observe and mark the serpentine belt orientation. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Drive Belt: > 08-06-01-008A > Jul > 09 > Engine - Drive Belt Misalignment Diagnostics > Page 1380 2. Remove the serpentine belt from the accessory drive system. 3. Install the tool onto the power steering pulley. Position the legs of the tool into the outer grooves of the pulley, farthest from the front of the engine. 4. Install the retaining cord around the pulley and to the legs of the tool. 5. Put on the laser safety glasses provided with the tool. 6. Depress the switch on the rear of the tool to activate the light beam. 7. Rotate the power steering pulley as required to project the light beam onto the crankshaft balancer pulley grooves. 8. Inspect for proper power steering pulley alignment. - If the laser beam projects onto the second rib or raised area (1), the pulleys are aligned properly. - If the laser beam projects more than one-quarter rib 0.9 mm (0.035 in) mis-alignment, adjust the position of the power steering pulley as required. - Refer to SI for Power Steering Pulley Removal and Installation procedures. 9. Install the serpentine belt to the accessory drive system in the original orientation. 10. Operate the vehicle and verify that the belt noise concern is no longer present. Tool Information Please visit the GM service tool website for pricing information or to place your order for this tool. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Drive Belt: > 08-06-01-008A > Jul > 09 > Engine - Drive Belt Misalignment Diagnostics > Page 1381 Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Drive Belt: > 08-06-01-008A > Jul > 09 > Engine - Drive Belt Misalignment Diagnostics Drive Belt: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine - Drive Belt Misalignment Diagnostics INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 08-06-01-008A Date: July 27, 2009 Subject: Diagnosing Accessory Drive Belt / Serpentine Belt Noise and Availability and Use of Kent-Moore EN-49228 Laser Alignment Tool - Drive Belt Models: 2010 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (Including Saturn) 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 Vehicles 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add a model year and update the Tool Information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 08-06-01-008 (Section 06 - Engine). Background Several aftermarket companies offer laser alignment tools for accessory drive systems that can be very helpful in eliminating drive belt noise as a result of misaligned pulleys. Typically pricing ranges from $160 - $200. EN-49228 Laser Alignment Tool - Drive Belt The GM Tool program has now made available a competitive, simple to use and time-saving laser tool to assist in achieving precise alignment of the drive belt pulleys. This optional tool removes the guesswork from proper pulley alignment and may serve to reduce comebacks from: - Drive Belt Noise - Accelerated Drive Belt Wear - Drive Belt Slippage Instructions The instructions below are specific only to the truck Gen IV V-8 family of engines. These instructions are only for illustrative purposes to show how the tool may be used. Universal instructions are included in the box with the Laser Alignment Tool - Drive Belt. Caution - Do not look directly into the beam projected from the laser. - Use caution when shining the laser on highly polished or reflective surfaces. Laser safety glasses help reduce laser beam glare in many circumstances. - Always use laser safety glasses when using the laser. Laser safety glasses are not designed to protect eyes from direct laser exposure. 1. Observe and mark the serpentine belt orientation. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Drive Belt: > 08-06-01-008A > Jul > 09 > Engine - Drive Belt Misalignment Diagnostics > Page 1387 2. Remove the serpentine belt from the accessory drive system. 3. Install the tool onto the power steering pulley. Position the legs of the tool into the outer grooves of the pulley, farthest from the front of the engine. 4. Install the retaining cord around the pulley and to the legs of the tool. 5. Put on the laser safety glasses provided with the tool. 6. Depress the switch on the rear of the tool to activate the light beam. 7. Rotate the power steering pulley as required to project the light beam onto the crankshaft balancer pulley grooves. 8. Inspect for proper power steering pulley alignment. - If the laser beam projects onto the second rib or raised area (1), the pulleys are aligned properly. - If the laser beam projects more than one-quarter rib 0.9 mm (0.035 in) mis-alignment, adjust the position of the power steering pulley as required. - Refer to SI for Power Steering Pulley Removal and Installation procedures. 9. Install the serpentine belt to the accessory drive system in the original orientation. 10. Operate the vehicle and verify that the belt noise concern is no longer present. Tool Information Please visit the GM service tool website for pricing information or to place your order for this tool. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Drive Belt: > 08-06-01-008A > Jul > 09 > Engine - Drive Belt Misalignment Diagnostics > Page 1388 Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 1389 Drive Belt: Diagrams Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 1390 Drive Belt: Service Precautions Belt Dressing Caution Caution: Do not use belt dressing on the drive belt. Belt dressing causes the breakdown of the composition of the drive belt. Failure to follow this recommendation will damage the drive belt. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 1391 Drive Belt: Description and Operation Drive Belt System Description The drive belt system consists of the following components: * The drive belt * The drive belt tensioner * The drive belt idler pulley * The crankshaft balancer pulley * The accessory drive component mounting brackets * The accessory drive components - The power steering pump, if belt driven - The generator - The A/C compressor, if equipped - The engine cooling fan, if belt driven - The water pump, if belt driven - The vacuum pump, if equipped - The air compressor, if equipped The drive belt system may use 1 belt or 2 belts. The drive belt is thin so that it can bend backwards and has several ribs to match the grooves in the pulleys. The drive belts are made of different types of rubbers, chloroprene or EPDM, and have different layers or plys containing either fiber cloth or cords for reinforcement. Both sides of the drive belt may be used to drive the different accessory drive components. When the back side of the drive belt is used to drive a pulley, the pulley is smooth. The drive belt is pulled by the crankshaft balancer pulley across the accessory drive component pulleys. The spring loaded drive belt tensioner keeps constant tension on the drive belt to prevent the drive belt from slipping. The drive belt tensioner arm will move when loads are applied to the drive belt by the accessory drive components and the crankshaft. The drive belt system may have an idler pulley, which is used to add wrap to the adjacent pulleys. Some systems use an idler pulley in place of an accessory drive component when the vehicle is not equipped with the accessory. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Drive Belt Chirping, Squeal, and Whine Diagnosis Drive Belt: Testing and Inspection Drive Belt Chirping, Squeal, and Whine Diagnosis Drive Belt Chirping, Squeal, and Whine Diagnosis Diagnostic Aids * A chirping or squeal noise may be intermittent due to moisture on the drive belts or the pulleys. It may be necessary to spray a small amount of water on the drive belts in order to duplicate the customers concern. If spraying water on the drive belt duplicates the symptom, cleaning the belt pulleys may be the probable solution. * If the noise is intermittent, verify the accessory drive components by varying their loads making sure they are operated to their maximum capacity. An overcharged A/C system, power steering system with a pinched hose or wrong fluid, or a generator failing are suggested items to inspect. * A chirping, squeal or whine noise may be caused by a loose or improper installation of a body or suspension component. Other items of the vehicle may also cause the noise. * The drive belts will not cause a whine noise. Test Description The numbers below refer to the step numbers on the diagnostic table. 2. The noise may not be engine related. This step is to verify that the engine is making the noise. If the engine is not making the noise do not proceed further with this table. 3. The noise may be an internal engine noise. Removing the drive belts one at a time and operating the engine for a brief period will verify the noise is related to the drive belt. When removing the drive belt the water pump may not be operating and the engine may overheat. Also DTCs may set when the engine is operating with the drive belts removed. 4. Inspect all drive belt pulleys for pilling. Pilling is the small balls or pills or it can be strings in the drive belt grooves from the accumulation of rubber dust. 6. Misalignment of the pulleys may be caused from improper mounting of the accessory drive component, incorrect installation of the accessory drive component pulley, or the pulley bent inward or outward from a previous repair. Test for a misaligned pulley using a straight edge in the pulley grooves across two or three pulleys. If a misaligned pulley is found refer to that accessory drive component for the proper installation procedure for that pulley. 10. Inspecting of the fasteners can eliminate the possibility that a wrong bolt, nut, spacer, or washer was installed. 12. Inspecting the pulleys for being bent should include inspecting for a dent or other damage to the pulleys that would prevent the drive belt from not seating properly in all of the pulley grooves or on the smooth surface of a pulley when the back side of the belt is used to drive the pulley. 14. This test is to verify that the drive belt tensioner operates properly. If the drive belt tensioner is not operating properly, proper belt tension may not be achieved to keep the drive belt from slipping which could cause a squeal noise. 15. This test is to verify that the drive belt is not too long, which would prevent the drive belt tensioner from working properly. Also if an incorrect length drive belt was installed, it may not be routed properly and may be turning an accessory drive component in the wrong direction. 16. Misalignment of the pulleys may be caused from improper mounting of the accessory drive component, incorrect installation of the accessory drive component pulley, or the pulley bent inward or outward from a previous repair. Test for a misaligned pulley using a straight edge in the pulley grooves across two or three pulleys. If a misaligned pulley is found refer to that accessory drive component for the proper installation procedure for that pulley. 17. This test is to verify that the pulleys are the correct diameter or width. Using a known good vehicle compare the pulley sizes. 19. Replacing the drive belt when it is not damaged or there is not excessive pilling will only be a temporary repair. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Drive Belt Chirping, Squeal, and Whine Diagnosis > Page 1394 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Drive Belt Chirping, Squeal, and Whine Diagnosis > Page 1395 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Drive Belt Chirping, Squeal, and Whine Diagnosis > Page 1396 Drive Belt: Testing and Inspection Drive Belt Rumbling and Vibration Diagnosis Drive Belt Rumbling and Vibration Diagnosis Diagnostic Aids The accessory drive components can have an affect on engine vibration. Vibration from the engine operating may cause a body component or another part of the vehicle to make rumbling noise. Vibration can be caused by, but not limited to the A/C system over charged, the power steering system restricted or the incorrect fluid, or an extra load on the generator. To help identify an intermittent or an improper condition, vary the loads on the accessory drive components. The drive belt may have a rumbling condition that can not be seen or felt. Sometimes replacing the drive belt may be the only repair for the symptom. If replacing the drive belt, completing the diagnostic table, and the noise is only heard when the drive belts are installed, there might be an accessory drive component with a failure. Varying the load on the different accessory drive components may aid in identifying which component is causing the rumbling noise. Test Description The numbers below refer to the step numbers on the diagnostic table. 2. This test is to verify that the symptom is present during diagnosing. Other vehicle components may cause a similar symptom. 3. This test is to verify that one of the drive belts is causing the rumbling noise or vibration. Rumbling noise may be confused with an internal engine noise due to the similarity in the description. Remove only one drive belt at a time if the vehicle has multiple drive belts. When removing the drive belts the water pump may not be operating and the engine may overheat. Also DTCs may set when the engine is operating with the drive belts removed. 4. Inspecting the drive belts is to ensure that they are not causing the noise. Small cracks across the ribs of the drive belt will not cause the noise. Belt separation is identified by the plys of the belt separating and may be seen at the edge of the belt our felt as a lump in the belt. 5. Small amounts of pilling is normal condition and acceptable. When the pilling is severe the drive belt does not have a smooth surface for proper operation. 9. Inspecting of the fasteners can eliminate the possibility that the wrong bolt, nut, spacer, or washer was installed. 11. This step should only be performed if the water pump is driven by the drive belt. Inspect the water pump shaft for being bent. Also inspect the water pump bearings for smooth operation and excessive play. Compare the water pump with a known good water pump. 12. Accessory drive component brackets that are bent, cracked, or loose may put extra strain on that accessory component causing it to vibrate. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Drive Belt Chirping, Squeal, and Whine Diagnosis > Page 1397 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Drive Belt Chirping, Squeal, and Whine Diagnosis > Page 1398 Drive Belt: Testing and Inspection Drive Belt Falls Off and Excessive Wear Diagnosis Drive Belt Falls Off and Excessive Wear Diagnosis Diagnostic Aids If the drive belt repeatedly falls off the drive belt pulleys, this is because of pulley misalignment. An extra load that is quickly applied on released by an accessory drive component may cause the drive belt to fall off the pulleys. Verify the accessory drive components operate properly. If the drive belt is the incorrect length, the drive belt tensioner may not keep the proper tension on the drive belt. Excessive wear on a drive belt is usually caused by an incorrect installation or the wrong drive belt for the application. Minor misalignment of the drive belt pulleys will not cause excessive wear, but will probably cause the drive belt to make a noise or to fall off. Excessive misalignment of the drive belt pulleys will cause excessive wear but may also make the drive belt fall off. Test Description The numbers below refer to the step numbers on the diagnostic table. 2. This inspection is to verify the condition of the drive belt. Damage may of occurred to the drive belt when the drive belt fell off. The drive belt may of been damaged, which caused the drive belt to fall off. Inspect the belt for cuts, tears, sections of ribs missing, or damaged belt plys. 4. Misalignment of the pulleys may be caused from improper mounting of the accessory drive component, incorrect installation of the accessory drive component pulley, or the pulley bent inward or outward from a previous repair. Test for a misaligned pulley using a straight edge in the pulley grooves across two or three pulleys. If a misaligned pulley is found refer to that accessory drive component for the proper installation procedure of that pulley. 5. Inspecting the pulleys for being bent should include inspecting for a dent or other damage to the pulleys that would prevent the drive belt from not seating properly in all of the pulley grooves or on the smooth surface of a pulley when the back side of the belt is used to drive the pulley. 6. Accessory drive component brackets that are bent or cracked will let the drive belt fall off. 7. Inspecting of the fasteners can eliminate the possibility that a wrong bolt, nut , spacer, or washer was installed. Missing. loose, or the wrong fasteners may cause pulley misalignment from the bracket moving under load. Over tightening of the fasteners may cause misalignment of the accessory component bracket. 13. The inspection is to verify the drive belt is correctly installed on all of the drive belt pulleys. Wear on the drive belt may be caused by mis-positioning the drive belt by one groove on a pulley. 14. The installation of a drive belt that is two wide or two narrow will cause wear on the drive belt. The drive belt ribs should match all of the grooves on all of the pulleys. 15. This inspection is to verify the drive belt is not contacting any parts of the engine or body while the engine is operating. There should be sufficient clearance when the drive belt accessory drive components load varies. The drive belt should not come in contact with an engine or a body component when snapping the throttle. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Drive Belt Chirping, Squeal, and Whine Diagnosis > Page 1399 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 1400 Drive Belt: Service and Repair Drive Belt Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Cleaner Fresh Air Duct/Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair Air Cleaner Fresh Air Duct/Hose: Service and Repair Air Cleaner Outlet Duct Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Filter Element > Component Information > Service and Repair Air Filter Element: Service and Repair Air Cleaner Element Replacement (LE5) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Cabin Air Filter > Component Information > Service and Repair Cabin Air Filter: Service and Repair Passenger Compartment Air Filter Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Fuel Filter > Fuel Pressure Release > System Information > Service and Repair Fuel Pressure Release: Service and Repair Fuel Pressure Relief Warning Fuel that flows out at high pressure can cause serious injury to the skin and eyes. ALWAYS depressurize the fuel system before removing components that are under high fuel pressure. Note: If a scan tool is not available, WAIT at LEAST 2 hours after the engine has been run, before removing the high pressure fuel line. 1. Install a scan tool to the vehicle and command the fuel pump relay OFF, allowing the low pressure fuel pump to shut off. 2. Start the vehicle and allow the engine to idle until the engine stops. The engine will stop in approximately 20-30 seconds. 3. Turn the ignition OFF. 4. Using the scan tool, verify that there is little to no fuel pressure, if there still is fuel pressure repeat step 2. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Oil Filter, Engine > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine - Engine Noise Or Damage After Oil Filter Replace Oil Filter: Technical Service Bulletins Engine - Engine Noise Or Damage After Oil Filter Replace INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 10-06-01-003A Date: June 30, 2010 Subject: Diagnostic Information on Internal Engine Noise or Damage After Oil Filter Replacement Models: 2004-2006 Buick Rendezvous 2005-2008 Buick LaCrosse, Allure (Canada Only) 2008-2010 Buick Enclave 2010 Buick LaCrosse 2010 Cadillac SRX 2008-2010 Chevrolet Equinox, Malibu 2009-2010 Chevrolet Traverse 2007-2010 GMC Acadia 2010 GMC Terrain 2007-2009 Pontiac G6 2008-2009 Pontiac Torrent 2007-2009 Saturn AURA 2007-2010 Saturn OUTLOOK 2008-2009 Saturn VUE Equipped with 3.0L (RPO LF1) or 3.6L (RPO LLT or LY7) 6 Cylinder Engine Attention: Oil filter misapplication may cause abnormal engine noise or internal damage. Always utilize the most recent parts information to ensure the correct part number filter is installed when replacing oil filters. Do not rely on physical dimensions alone. Counterfeit copies of name brand parts have been discovered in some aftermarket parts systems. Always ensure the parts you install are from a trusted source. Improper oil filter installation may result in catastrophic engine damage. Some aftermarket oil filters share the outside dimension of Factory Equipment and AC Delco service replacement filters. Though they look the same, these filters do not meet GM specification and function requirements. In recent warranty engine teardown reviews, it has been found that aftermarket filters have caused internal engine failures and/or noise due to the lack of lubrication. Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the models and add additional pictures to help aid diagnosis. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 10-06-01-003 (Section 06 Engine/Propulsion). Important Engine damage that is the result of an incorrect or improperly installed engine oil filter is not a warrantable claim. The best way to avoid oil filter quality concerns is to purchase ACDelco(R) oil filters directly from General Motors Customer Care and Aftersales (GMCC&A;). This condition may be caused by aftermarket oil filter internal failure. Filter debris can be transferred throughout the engine this way. Important Aftermarket oil filter failure is not covered by GM Powertrain warranty. The following information is being communicated to aid the technician in proper diagnostics. Engine Ticking Noise in Valve Train First, the location of the tick must be determined (exhaust or intake, front or rear engine bank). Using a suitable listening device such as chassis ears and/or a stethoscope, determine the location of the ticking noise. 1. Does the noise only come from one bank location (intake or exhaust lifters area)? 2. If the noise is in the one bank location, then the oil galley lubrication hole may be obstructed with foreign material. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Oil Filter, Engine > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine - Engine Noise Or Damage After Oil Filter Replace > Page 1420 3. When the location is determined, the technician should remove the valve cover and inspect the lifters for aeration. Remove the stationary hydraulic lifter assemblies (SHLA) for the suspect location / cylinder. For Example; Bank 2 Cylinder # 1 A & B exhaust lifters are making noise. Inspect the lifters for the presence of oil. If oil is present, SHLA will be pumped and hard to compress. If aeration is present, the lifter will be spongy. Test by trying to compress with your fingers or a suitable tool. 4. Spongy SHLA (lifters) mean aeration and obstruction to flow oil to SHLA is present. Reference the oil lubrication description document in SI for details of system operation. 5. (A) Bank 1 (2, 4, 6) Reference 1-Intake oil galley for lifters, Reference 2-Camshaft Actuator (Phaser) Oil Galley, Reference 3- Exhaust Oil Galley for Lifters. (B) Bank 2 ( 1, 3, 5) Reference 1-Intake oil galley for lifters, Reference 2-Camshaft Actuator (Phaser) Oil Galley, Reference 3- Exhaust Oil Galley for Lifters. An obstruction to oil flow is present at the engine block deck passage under the head gasket for lifter oil pressure. The passage is the location in the front engine block deck. The oiling passage can be identified as a hole with eye brows cut to each side. See figures above. 6. One example of obstruction is shown above. Filter media material plugging the 2 mm lubrication passage hole creating aeration in the exhaust lifter oil galley. The obstruction can be filter media material or an orange silicone rubber material. The above example is filter media. 7. Engine oil passages will have to be cleaned of aftermarket filter media debris or orange silicone rubber. Engine Knocking / Piston Skirt Knock-Topic 2 1. Follow the procedures in SI for the source of a knock condition. Additional diagnosis is required by removal of the oil pan for main and rod bearing inspection. Further inspection for the source of bearing failure is required. Recent failed engine analysis reviews reveal the bearings are Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Oil Filter, Engine > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine - Engine Noise Or Damage After Oil Filter Replace > Page 1421 not removed and oil passages are not being checked in many cases. Technicians need to inspect for oil galley obtrusion, which is a source for oil starvation and bearing life in some cases. 2. One source for oil starvation is due to aftermarket oil filter anti-drain back valves deterioration. Orange silicone rubber material has been found in many cases of oil starvation underneath the main and rod bearings, with material contained in the oil lubrication galley in both blocks and crankshaft lubrication holes. The orange silicone rubber is from aftermarket oil filters anti drain back valve assembly, which is located under the filter media and above the screw on the base. Orange silicone rubber is not used in the assembly of the High Feature V6 as well as most GM engine applications. Examples are below. Rod bearing welded to crankshaft (1). Orange silicone rubber obstructing the oil flow to the main and rod bearings in the engine block webbing (1). Silicone rubber found in main and rod bearing and in the piston skirt squirters (sprayers) (1). Sprayer is removed to show obstruction material. 3. Such related failures as shown in the examples above are not considered to be warranty by General Motors. Example of Aftermarket Filter Failures First do a general inspection for possible source. With the metal can cut off, you can see detail of media failure. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Oil Filter, Engine > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine - Engine Noise Or Damage After Oil Filter Replace > Page 1422 This is an oil filter that is teardown. The left (1) shows a part removed from a failed engine oil main bearing gallery. The right one (2) is a new seal removed from a new aftermarket filter. This is what a drainback valve looks like prior to failure. Conclusion Repair as necessary to remove filter media/debris from oil galleys and piston squirter sprayer in the cylinder head. Repair and/or replace damaged engine components as necessary. GM Powertrain engines require oil filters that can meet the challenges of today oil filtration systems, engine oil pressure requirements (both hot and cold) and Oil Life Monitoring systems. Improper oil filter usage may result in catastrophic engine damage or failure that is not covered by the GM Powertrain warranty. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Oil Filter, Engine > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine - Engine Noise Or Damage After Oil Filter Replace > Page 1423 Oil Filter: Technical Service Bulletins Engine - Noise/Damage Oil Filter Application Importance INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 07-06-01-016B Date: July 27, 2009 Subject: Information on Internal Engine Noise or Damage After Oil Filter Replacement Models: 2010 and Prior Passenger Cars and Trucks (Including Saturn) 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being updated to add model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 07-06-01-016A (Section 06 - Engine/Propulsion System). Important Engine damage that is the result of an incorrect or improperly installed engine oil filter is not a warrantable claim. The best way to avoid oil filter quality concerns is to purchase ACDelco(R) oil filters directly from GMSPO. Oil filter misapplication may cause abnormal engine noise or internal damage. Always utilize the most recent parts information to ensure the correct part number filter is installed when replacing oil filters. Do not rely on physical dimensions alone. Counterfeit copies of name brand parts have been discovered in some aftermarket parts systems. Always ensure the parts you install are from a trusted source. Improper oil filter installation may result in catastrophic engine damage. Refer to the appropriate Service Information (SI) installation instructions when replacing any oil filter and pay particular attention to procedures for proper cartridge filter element alignment. If the diagnostics in SI (Engine Mechanical) lead to the oil filter as the cause of the internal engine noise or damage, dealers should submit a field product report. Refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 02-00-89-002I (Information for Dealers on How to Submit a Field Product Report). Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Oil Filter, Engine > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 1424 Oil Filter: Service and Repair Engine Oil and Oil Filter Replacement (LF1) Removal Procedure 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle (See: Vehicle Lifting/Service and Repair). 2. Place a drain pan under the oil pan drain plug. 3. Remove the oil pan drain plug. Allow the oil to drain completely. Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener Caution). 4. Install the oil pan drain plug and tighten to 20 Nm (15 lb ft). Warning: Refer to Hot Exhaust System Warning (See: Service Precautions/Technician Safety Information/Hot Exhaust System Warning). 5. Place the drain pan under the oil filter (1). 6. Remove the oil filter. Allow the oil to drain completely. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Oil Filter, Engine > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 1425 1. Lubricate the NEW oil filter gasket with clean engine oil. 2. Tighten the oil filter (1) to 30 Nm (22 lb ft). 3. Lower the vehicle. 4. Refill the engine oil. Refer to Approximate Fluid Capacities (See: Specifications). 5. Start the engine and inspect for leaks. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Coolant Line/Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair Coolant Line/Hose: Service and Repair Engine Coolant Air Bleed Pipe Replacement (LF1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Heater Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heater Inlet Hose Replacement Heater Hose: Service and Repair Heater Inlet Hose Replacement Heater Inlet Hose Replacement (LF1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Heater Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heater Inlet Hose Replacement > Page 1434 Heater Hose: Service and Repair Heater Outlet Hose Replacement Heater Outlet Hose Replacement (LF1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Air Conditioning Condenser and Air Conditioning Evaporator Tube Replacement Hose/Line HVAC: Service and Repair Air Conditioning Condenser and Air Conditioning Evaporator Tube Replacement Air Conditioning Condenser and Air Conditioning Evaporator Tube Replacement Special Tools J 39400-A - Halogen Leak Detector Removal Procedure 1. Recover the refrigerant. Refer to Refrigerant Recovery and Recharging (See: Heating and Air Conditioning/Service and Repair/Procedures/Refrigerant Recovery and Recharging). 2. Remove the left headlamp. Refer to Headlamp Replacement (Equinox) (See: Lighting and Horns/Headlamp/Service and Repair) Headlamp Replacement (Terrain) (See: Lighting and Horns/Headlamp/Service and Repair). 3. Remove the surge tank. Refer to Radiator Surge Tank Replacement (See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Cooling System/Coolant Reservoir/Service and Repair/Radiator Surge Tank Replacement). 4. Remove the washer bottle. Refer to Windshield Washer Solvent Container Replacement (Equinox) (See: Wiper and Washer Systems/Windshield Washer Reservoir/Service and Repair) Windshield Washer Solvent Container Replacement (Terrain) (See: Wiper and Washer Systems/Windshield Washer Reservoir/Service and Repair). 5. Remove the battery. Refer to Battery Replacement (See: Starting and Charging/Battery/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Battery Replacement). 6. Remove the battery box bolts from the battery box. 7. Disconnect the negative battery cable nut from the wheelhouse. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Air Conditioning Condenser and Air Conditioning Evaporator Tube Replacement > Page 1439 8. Remove the nut retaining the liquid line to the strut tower. 9. Disconnect the harness and vent hose retainers from the liquid line. 10. Remove the evaporator outlet hose and liquid line retainer plate nut from the thermal expansion valve (TXV). 11. Remove the evaporator outlet hose and liquid line from the TXV. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Air Conditioning Condenser and Air Conditioning Evaporator Tube Replacement > Page 1440 12. Remove the liquid line nut from the condenser. 13. Remove the liquid line from the condenser. 14. Remove the bolt retaining the liquid line to the body. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Air Conditioning Condenser and Air Conditioning Evaporator Tube Replacement > Page 1441 15. Position the battery box inboard to allow for routing of the liquid line. 16. Route the liquid line above the battery box and the ground lug. 17. Lift the rear portion of the liquid line upward and remove the liquid line from the vehicle. 18. Remove and discard the sealing washer from the liquid line. Refer to Air Conditioning System Seal Replacement (See: Heating and Air Conditioning/Coupler HVAC/A/C Coupler O-ring/Service and Repair/Air Conditioning System Seal Replacement). 19. Install protective caps to the condenser, the evaporator outlet hose, and the TXV to prevent contamination and desiccant saturation. Installation Procedure 1. Route the liquid line below the battery box and the ground lug. Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener Caution). 2. Connect the negative battery cable nut to the wheelhouse and tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb in). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Air Conditioning Condenser and Air Conditioning Evaporator Tube Replacement > Page 1442 3. Remove the protective caps from the condenser, the evaporator outlet hose, and the TXV. 4. Install the new sealing washer to the liquid line. Refer to Air Conditioning System Seal Replacement (See: Heating and Air Conditioning/Coupler HVAC/A/C Coupler O-ring/Service and Repair/Air Conditioning System Seal Replacement). 5. Route the condenser end of the liquid line into position. 6. Install the liquid line to the condenser. Note: Use a large pair of pliers to hold the fitting while tightening the nut. Be careful not to twist the line. 7. Install the liquid line nut to the condenser and tighten to 22 Nm (16 lb ft). 8. Install the bolt to retain the liquid line to the body and tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb in). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Air Conditioning Condenser and Air Conditioning Evaporator Tube Replacement > Page 1443 9. Remove the protective cap from the TXV, the liquid line, and the evaporator outlet hose. 10. Install new seal washers to the liquid line and the evaporator outlet hose. Refer to Air Conditioning System Seal Replacement (See: Heating and Air Conditioning/Coupler HVAC/A/C Coupler O-ring/Service and Repair/Air Conditioning System Seal Replacement). 11. Install the liquid line and the evaporator outlet hose to the TXV. 12. Install the liquid line and evaporator outlet hose retainer plate nut to the TXV and tighten to 22 Nm (16 lb ft). 13. Install the four battery box bolts to the inside of the battery box and tighten to 15 Nm (11 lb ft). 14. Install the battery box bolt to the outside of the battery box and tighten to 10 Nm (86 lb in). 15. Install the battery. Refer to Battery Replacement (See: Starting and Charging/Battery/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Battery Replacement). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Air Conditioning Condenser and Air Conditioning Evaporator Tube Replacement > Page 1444 16. Install the liquid line to the strut tower. 17. Install the liquid line nut to the strut tower and tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb in). 18. Connect the harness and vent hose retainers to the liquid line. 19. Install the surge tank. Refer to Radiator Surge Tank Replacement (See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Cooling System/Coolant Reservoir/Service and Repair/Radiator Surge Tank Replacement). 20. Install the washer bottle. Refer to Windshield Washer Solvent Container Replacement (Equinox) (See: Wiper and Washer Systems/Windshield Washer Reservoir/Service and Repair) Windshield Washer Solvent Container Replacement (Terrain) (See: Wiper and Washer Systems/Windshield Washer Reservoir/Service and Repair). 21. Install the left headlamp. Refer to Headlamp Replacement (Equinox) (See: Lighting and Horns/Headlamp/Service and Repair) Headlamp Replacement (Terrain) (See: Lighting and Horns/Headlamp/Service and Repair). 22. Recharge the A/C system. Refer to Refrigerant Recovery and Recharging (See: Heating and Air Conditioning/Service and Repair/Procedures/Refrigerant Recovery and Recharging). 23. Test the affected A/C joints for leaks using J 39400-A - Halogen Leak Detector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Air Conditioning Condenser and Air Conditioning Evaporator Tube Replacement > Page 1445 Hose/Line HVAC: Service and Repair Air Conditioning Compressor Hose Replacement Air Conditioning Compressor Hose Replacement (LF1) Special Tools J 39400-A - Halogen Leak Detector Removal Procedures 1. Recover the refrigerant. Refer to Refrigerant Recovery and Recharging (See: Heating and Air Conditioning/Service and Repair/Procedures/Refrigerant Recovery and Recharging). 2. Remove the left headlamp. Refer to Headlamp Replacement (Equinox) (See: Lighting and Horns/Headlamp/Service and Repair) Headlamp Replacement (Terrain) (See: Lighting and Horns/Headlamp/Service and Repair). 3. Remove the air conditioning compressor hose nut (2) from the air conditioning evaporator thermal expansion valve tube hose. 4. Remove the air conditioning compressor hose from the air conditioning evaporator thermal expansion valve tube hose. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Air Conditioning Condenser and Air Conditioning Evaporator Tube Replacement > Page 1446 5. Remove the compressor hose nut (2) from the condenser. 6. Remove the compressor hose (1) from the condenser. 7. Unclip hose from fan shroud. 8. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle (See: Vehicle Lifting/Service and Repair). 9. Disconnect the electrical connector from the air conditioning refrigerant pressure sensor valve. 10. Remove the compressor hose nut (1) at the compressor. 11. Remove the compressor hose (2) from the compressor. 12. Remove the compressor hose from the vehicle. 13. Remove and discard the sealing washers from the compressor hose. Refer to Air Conditioning System Seal Replacement (See: Heating and Air Conditioning/Coupler HVAC/A/C Coupler O-ring/Service and Repair/Air Conditioning System Seal Replacement). Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Air Conditioning Condenser and Air Conditioning Evaporator Tube Replacement > Page 1447 1. Install new seal washers to the compressor hose. Refer to Air Conditioning System Seal Replacement (See: Heating and Air Conditioning/Coupler HVAC/A/C Coupler O-ring/Service and Repair/Air Conditioning System Seal Replacement). 2. Install the compressor hose (2) to the compressor. Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener Caution). 3. Install the compressor hose nut (1) to the compressor and tighten the nut to 22 Nm (16 lb ft). 4. Connect the electrical connector to the air conditioning refrigerant pressure sensor valve. 5. Lower the vehicle. 6. Position the compressor hose in the vehicle. 7. Install a new sealing washer to the air conditioning evaporator thermal expansion valve tube hose. Refer to Air Conditioning System Seal Replacement (See: Heating and Air Conditioning/Coupler HVAC/A/C Coupler O-ring/Service and Repair/Air Conditioning System Seal Replacement). 8. Install the air conditioning evaporator thermal expansion valve tube hose to the compressor hose. 9. Install the compressor hose nut (2) to the air conditioning evaporator thermal expansion valve tube hose and tighten the nut to 22 Nm (16 lb ft). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Air Conditioning Condenser and Air Conditioning Evaporator Tube Replacement > Page 1448 10. Install a new sealing washer to the compressor hose at the condenser. Refer to Air Conditioning System Seal Replacement (See: Heating and Air Conditioning/Coupler HVAC/A/C Coupler O-ring/Service and Repair/Air Conditioning System Seal Replacement) 11. Install the compressor hose (1) to the condenser. 12. Install the compressor hose nut (2) to the condenser and tighten to 20 Nm (15 lb ft). 13. Install the left headlamp. Refer to Headlamp Replacement (Equinox) (See: Lighting and Horns/Headlamp/Service and Repair) Headlamp Replacement (Terrain) (See: Lighting and Horns/Headlamp/Service and Repair). 14. Recharge the A/C system. Refer to Refrigerant Recovery and Recharging (See: Heating and Air Conditioning/Service and Repair/Procedures/Refrigerant Recovery and Recharging). 15. Test the affected A/C joints for leaks using J 39400-A. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Power Steering Line/Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Power Steering Line/Hose: > 09334A > Mar > 10 > Campaign - Power Steering Hose Heat Sleeve Removal Technical Service Bulletin # 09334A Date: 100324 Campaign - Power Steering Hose Heat Sleeve Removal SERVICE UPDATE Bulletin No.: 09334A Date: March 24, 2010 Subject: 09334A - Service Update for Inventory and Customer Vehicles - Power Steering Line Sleeve May Retain Moisture - Expires with Base Warranty Models: 2010 Chevrolet Equinox 2010 GMC Terrain Supercede: A Caution statement has been added to the service procedure advising technicians to use care when removing the heat shield from the power steering lines to prevent damage to the power steering lines or power steering line brackets.Please discard all copies of bulletin 09334, issued December 2009. This service update includes vehicles in dealer inventory and customer vehicles that return to the dealership for any reason. It will expire at the end of the involved vehicle's New Vehicle Limited Warranty period. Purpose This bulletin provides a service procedure to remove the sleeve from the power steering line on certain 2010 model year Chevrolet Equinox and GMC Terrain vehicles. The power steering return hose assembly routes power steering fluid from the steering gear, to a heat exchanger, and back to the steering pump. A portion of the lines are covered with a sleeve. The heat sleeve is wrapped around the pipes and secured with nylon ties. Moisture can become trapped between the sleeve and the lines, which over an extended amount of time, could cause corrosion on the line. This service procedure should be completed as soon as possible on involved vehicles currently in dealer inventory and customer vehicles that return to the dealer for any type of service during the New Vehicle Limited Warranty coverage period. Vehicles Involved A list of involved vehicles currently in dealer inventory is available on the "Service Update Bulletin Information" link under the "Service" tab in GM GlobalConnect (US), or attached to the GlobalConnect message (Canada), used to release this bulletin. Customer vehicles that return for service, for any reason, and are still covered under the vehicle's base warranty, and are within the VIN breakpoints provided below, should be checked for vehicle eligibility in the appropriate system listed below. Important Dealers are to confirm vehicle eligibility prior to beginning repairs by using GMVIS (dealers using WINS) or the Investigate Vehicle History link (dealers/retailers using GWM). Not all vehicles within the above breakpoints may be involved. Parts Information No parts are required for this service update. Claim Information 1. Submit a claim using the table above. 2. Courtesy Transportation - For dealers using WINS, submit using normal labor code; for dealers using GWM - submit as Net Item under the repair labor code. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Power Steering Line/Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Power Steering Line/Hose: > 09334A > Mar > 10 > Campaign - Power Steering Hose Heat Sleeve Removal > Page 1457 Disclaimer Service Procedure Service Procedure 1. Partially raise and support vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle in SI. 2. Determine if there are power steering line heat sleeves attached to the power steering lines located along the frame on the front passenger side of the vehicle. - If heat sleeves are attached to the power steering lines, proceed to Step 3. - If no heat sleeves are attached to the power steering lines, lower the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle in SI. No further action is required. 3. Remove the front passenger side tire and wheel assembly. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation in SI. 4. Remove the passenger side engine splash shield. Refer to Engine Splash Shield Replacement -Right Side in SI. Caution Do not bend the power steering lines or power steering line brackets while removing the heat shield from the power steering lines. Bending the power steering lines or power steering line brackets may cause the power steering lines to contact the drive axle or frame of the vehicle, either at rest or during engine-roll. After removing the heat shield, ensure that there is no contact between the power steering lines and the drive axle or frame of the vehicle to avoid a lline rub through condition and power steering line leak. 5. Locate the power steering line heat sleeves. The power steering lines in the wheelhouse area are wrapped in silver heat sleeves (1) that are secured with service tie straps (2). 6. Remove the tie straps (2) from the power steering line heat sleeves (1) accessible from the wheelhouse area using a wire cutter or equivalent tool. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Power Steering Line/Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Power Steering Line/Hose: > 09334A > Mar > 10 > Campaign - Power Steering Hose Heat Sleeve Removal > Page 1458 Caution To avoid cutting the rubber portion of the power steering lines or scratching the corrosion-resistant coating on the steel portion of the power steering lines, it is essential to take the following precautions: - Use a safety/utility knife to cut through the silver heat sleeve material. - Apply tape to the outside (non-cutting edges) of the safety/utility knife. - Cut away from the power steering lines and hoses. Never cut into the power steering lines or rubber hoses. - Slowly and carefully remove the sleeve from the power steering line. - Ensure there is NO blade-to-metal or blade-to-rubber contact with the safety/utility knife and power steering line during the sleeve removal process. Note If a plastic body trim tool is NOT available, use a piece of electrical conduit or a flat wooden stick to protect the rubber portion of the power steering line. 7. Protect the hose when starting the cut by inserting a plastic body trim tool (1) or equivalent tool between the rubber hose portion (2) of the power steering line and the heat sleeve (3). Refer to illustration. 8. Insert the safety/utility knife (4) into the heat sleeve material (3) until the blade contacts the plastic body trim tool (1). Caution Do not let the blade tip run off the body trim tool and cut into the rubber hose. 9. Once the blade has made contact with the plastic body trim tool, make a horizontal cut toward the front of the vehicle that is about 25 mm (1 in.) in length. 10. Once the cut has been started, remove the plastic body trim tool or equivalent from the heat sleeve and power steering line. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Power Steering Line/Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Power Steering Line/Hose: > 09334A > Mar > 10 > Campaign - Power Steering Hose Heat Sleeve Removal > Page 1459 Caution Carefully remove the heat shield from the power steering lines to avoid cutting the rubber hose or metal portion of the power steering lines. 11. Cut the remaining portion of the heat sleeve (3) from end-to-end (5) using a safety/utility knife (4). With the blade tip and cutting edge pointed away from and not contacting the rubber hose, complete the cut by pulling the excess heat sleeve to one side of the hose so the cut path is away from the hose. 12. Remove the heat sleeve material from the power steering lines. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Power Steering Line/Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Power Steering Line/Hose: > 09334A > Mar > 10 > Campaign - Power Steering Hose Heat Sleeve Removal > Page 1460 ERROR: stackunderflow OFFENDING COMMAND: ~ STACK: Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Power Steering Line/Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Power Steering Line/Hose: > 09334A > Mar > 10 > Campaign - Power Steering Hose Heat Sleeve Removal Technical Service Bulletin # 09334A Date: 100324 Campaign - Power Steering Hose Heat Sleeve Removal SERVICE UPDATE Bulletin No.: 09334A Date: March 24, 2010 Subject: 09334A - Service Update for Inventory and Customer Vehicles - Power Steering Line Sleeve May Retain Moisture - Expires with Base Warranty Models: 2010 Chevrolet Equinox 2010 GMC Terrain Supercede: A Caution statement has been added to the service procedure advising technicians to use care when removing the heat shield from the power steering lines to prevent damage to the power steering lines or power steering line brackets.Please discard all copies of bulletin 09334, issued December 2009. This service update includes vehicles in dealer inventory and customer vehicles that return to the dealership for any reason. It will expire at the end of the involved vehicle's New Vehicle Limited Warranty period. Purpose This bulletin provides a service procedure to remove the sleeve from the power steering line on certain 2010 model year Chevrolet Equinox and GMC Terrain vehicles. The power steering return hose assembly routes power steering fluid from the steering gear, to a heat exchanger, and back to the steering pump. A portion of the lines are covered with a sleeve. The heat sleeve is wrapped around the pipes and secured with nylon ties. Moisture can become trapped between the sleeve and the lines, which over an extended amount of time, could cause corrosion on the line. This service procedure should be completed as soon as possible on involved vehicles currently in dealer inventory and customer vehicles that return to the dealer for any type of service during the New Vehicle Limited Warranty coverage period. Vehicles Involved A list of involved vehicles currently in dealer inventory is available on the "Service Update Bulletin Information" link under the "Service" tab in GM GlobalConnect (US), or attached to the GlobalConnect message (Canada), used to release this bulletin. Customer vehicles that return for service, for any reason, and are still covered under the vehicle's base warranty, and are within the VIN breakpoints provided below, should be checked for vehicle eligibility in the appropriate system listed below. Important Dealers are to confirm vehicle eligibility prior to beginning repairs by using GMVIS (dealers using WINS) or the Investigate Vehicle History link (dealers/retailers using GWM). Not all vehicles within the above breakpoints may be involved. Parts Information No parts are required for this service update. Claim Information 1. Submit a claim using the table above. 2. Courtesy Transportation - For dealers using WINS, submit using normal labor code; for dealers using GWM - submit as Net Item under the repair labor code. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Power Steering Line/Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Power Steering Line/Hose: > 09334A > Mar > 10 > Campaign - Power Steering Hose Heat Sleeve Removal > Page 1466 Disclaimer Service Procedure Service Procedure 1. Partially raise and support vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle in SI. 2. Determine if there are power steering line heat sleeves attached to the power steering lines located along the frame on the front passenger side of the vehicle. - If heat sleeves are attached to the power steering lines, proceed to Step 3. - If no heat sleeves are attached to the power steering lines, lower the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle in SI. No further action is required. 3. Remove the front passenger side tire and wheel assembly. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation in SI. 4. Remove the passenger side engine splash shield. Refer to Engine Splash Shield Replacement -Right Side in SI. Caution Do not bend the power steering lines or power steering line brackets while removing the heat shield from the power steering lines. Bending the power steering lines or power steering line brackets may cause the power steering lines to contact the drive axle or frame of the vehicle, either at rest or during engine-roll. After removing the heat shield, ensure that there is no contact between the power steering lines and the drive axle or frame of the vehicle to avoid a lline rub through condition and power steering line leak. 5. Locate the power steering line heat sleeves. The power steering lines in the wheelhouse area are wrapped in silver heat sleeves (1) that are secured with service tie straps (2). 6. Remove the tie straps (2) from the power steering line heat sleeves (1) accessible from the wheelhouse area using a wire cutter or equivalent tool. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Power Steering Line/Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Power Steering Line/Hose: > 09334A > Mar > 10 > Campaign - Power Steering Hose Heat Sleeve Removal > Page 1467 Caution To avoid cutting the rubber portion of the power steering lines or scratching the corrosion-resistant coating on the steel portion of the power steering lines, it is essential to take the following precautions: - Use a safety/utility knife to cut through the silver heat sleeve material. - Apply tape to the outside (non-cutting edges) of the safety/utility knife. - Cut away from the power steering lines and hoses. Never cut into the power steering lines or rubber hoses. - Slowly and carefully remove the sleeve from the power steering line. - Ensure there is NO blade-to-metal or blade-to-rubber contact with the safety/utility knife and power steering line during the sleeve removal process. Note If a plastic body trim tool is NOT available, use a piece of electrical conduit or a flat wooden stick to protect the rubber portion of the power steering line. 7. Protect the hose when starting the cut by inserting a plastic body trim tool (1) or equivalent tool between the rubber hose portion (2) of the power steering line and the heat sleeve (3). Refer to illustration. 8. Insert the safety/utility knife (4) into the heat sleeve material (3) until the blade contacts the plastic body trim tool (1). Caution Do not let the blade tip run off the body trim tool and cut into the rubber hose. 9. Once the blade has made contact with the plastic body trim tool, make a horizontal cut toward the front of the vehicle that is about 25 mm (1 in.) in length. 10. Once the cut has been started, remove the plastic body trim tool or equivalent from the heat sleeve and power steering line. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Power Steering Line/Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Power Steering Line/Hose: > 09334A > Mar > 10 > Campaign - Power Steering Hose Heat Sleeve Removal > Page 1468 Caution Carefully remove the heat shield from the power steering lines to avoid cutting the rubber hose or metal portion of the power steering lines. 11. Cut the remaining portion of the heat sleeve (3) from end-to-end (5) using a safety/utility knife (4). With the blade tip and cutting edge pointed away from and not contacting the rubber hose, complete the cut by pulling the excess heat sleeve to one side of the hose so the cut path is away from the hose. 12. Remove the heat sleeve material from the power steering lines. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Power Steering Line/Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Power Steering Line/Hose: > 09334A > Mar > 10 > Campaign - Power Steering Hose Heat Sleeve Removal > Page 1469 ERROR: stackunderflow OFFENDING COMMAND: ~ STACK: Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Power Steering Line/Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Power Steering Fluid Cooling Pipe Replacement Power Steering Line/Hose: Service and Repair Power Steering Fluid Cooling Pipe Replacement Power Steering Fluid Cooling Pipe Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Place drain pans under the vehicle. 2. Remove the intake manifold cover. Refer to Intake Manifold Cover Replacement (See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Intake Manifold/Service and Repair/Intake Manifold Cover Replacement). 3. Remove as much power steering fluid from the upper power steering fluid reservoir as possible. 4. Remove the front bumper fascia. Refer to Front Bumper Fascia Replacement (Equinox) (See: Body and Frame/Bumper/Front Bumper/Front Bumper Cover / Fascia/Service and Repair/Front Bumper Fascia Replacement)Front Bumper Fascia Replacement (Terrain) (See: Body and Frame/Bumper/Front Bumper/Front Bumper Cover / Fascia/Service and Repair/Front Bumper Fascia Replacement). 5. Disconnect the power steering fluid cooling pipe (1) from the power steering gear (2). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Power Steering Line/Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Power Steering Fluid Cooling Pipe Replacement > Page 1472 6. Disconnect the power steering fluid cooling pipe (1) from the lower power steering fluid reservoir (2). 7. Remove the power steering fluid cooling pipe bolt (5) from the bracket (4). 8. Disconnect the power steering fluid cooling pipe clip (3) from the bracket. 9. Remove the power steering fluid cooling pipe nut (2) and disconnect the bracket from the stud. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Power Steering Line/Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Power Steering Fluid Cooling Pipe Replacement > Page 1473 10. Remove the 2 power steering fluid cooling pipe bolts (1) from the front bumper impact bar. 11. Disconnect the 3 power steering fluid cooling pipe clips (2). 12. Remove the power steering fluid cooling pipe (3) from the vehicle. Installation Procedure 1. Position the power steering fluid cooling pipe (3) in the vehicle. 2. Connect the 3 power steering fluid cooling pipe clips (2). Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener Caution). 3. Install the 2 power steering fluid cooling pipe bolts (1) to the front bumper impact bar and tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb in). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Power Steering Line/Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Power Steering Fluid Cooling Pipe Replacement > Page 1474 4. Connect the power steering fluid cooling pipe bracket to the stud. Install the power steering fluid cooling pipe nut (2) and tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb in). 5. Connect the power steering fluid cooling pipe clip (3) to the bracket (4). 6. Install the power steering fluid cooling pipe bolt (5) to the bracket and tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb in). 7. Connect the power steering fluid cooling pipe (1) to the reservoir (2). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Power Steering Line/Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Power Steering Fluid Cooling Pipe Replacement > Page 1475 8. Connect the power steering fluid cooling pipe (1) to the power steering gear (2). Tighten the fitting to 34 Nm (25 lb ft). 9. Fill and bleed the power steering system. Refer to Power Steering System Bleeding (See: Steering and Suspension/Steering/Power Steering/Power Steering Bleeding/Service and Repair). 10. Clean any excess power steering fluid from the vehicle. 11. Remove the drain pans. 12. Install the front bumper fascia. Refer to Front Bumper Fascia Replacement (Equinox) (See: Body and Frame/Bumper/Front Bumper/Front Bumper Cover / Fascia/Service and Repair/Front Bumper Fascia Replacement)Front Bumper Fascia Replacement (Terrain) (See: Body and Frame/Bumper/Front Bumper/Front Bumper Cover / Fascia/Service and Repair/Front Bumper Fascia Replacement). 13. Install the intake manifold cover. Refer to Intake Manifold Cover Replacement (See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Intake Manifold/Service and Repair/Intake Manifold Cover Replacement). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Power Steering Line/Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Power Steering Fluid Cooling Pipe Replacement > Page 1476 Power Steering Line/Hose: Service and Repair Power Steering Fluid Reservoir Outlet Hose Replacement Power Steering Fluid Reservoir Outlet Hose Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Power Steering Line/Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Power Steering Fluid Cooling Pipe Replacement > Page 1477 Power Steering Line/Hose: Service and Repair Power Steering Gear Inlet Pipe/Hose Replacement Power Steering Gear Inlet Pipe/Hose Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Radiator Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Radiator Inlet Hose Replacement Radiator Hose: Service and Repair Radiator Inlet Hose Replacement Radiator Inlet Hose Replacement (LF1) Special Tools J 38185 - Hose Clamp Pliers Removal Procedure 1. Drain the cooling system. Refer to Cooling System Draining and Filling (Static) (See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Cooling System/Service and Repair/Cooling System Draining and Filling (Static))Cooling System Draining and Filling (GE 47716) (See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Cooling System/Service and Repair/Cooling System Draining and Filling (GE 47716)). 2. Remove the intake manifold cover. Refer to Intake Manifold Cover Replacement (See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Intake Manifold/Service and Repair/Intake Manifold Cover Replacement). 3. Disengage tension on the radiator inlet hose clamp (1) at the radiator using J 38185 - Hose Clamp Pliers. 4. Remove the radiator inlet hose (2) from the radiator. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Radiator Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Radiator Inlet Hose Replacement > Page 1482 5. Disengage tension on the radiator inlet hose clamp (1) at the engine using J 38185 - Hose Clamp Pliers. 6. Remove the radiator inlet hose (2) from the engine. 7. Remove the radiator inlet hose from the vehicle. Installation Procedure 1. Install radiator inlet hose to the vehicle. Note: Lubricate the inside diameters of the hose with clean coolant prior to installation. 2. Install the radiator inlet hose (2) to the engine. 3. Engage tension on the radiator inlet hose clamp (1) at the engine using J 38185 - Hose Clamp Pliers. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Radiator Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Radiator Inlet Hose Replacement > Page 1483 4. Install the radiator inlet hose (2) to the radiator. 5. Engage tension on the radiator inlet hose clamp (1) at the radiator using J 38185 - Hose Clamp Pliers. 6. Install the intake manifold cover. Refer to Intake Manifold Cover Replacement (See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Intake Manifold/Service and Repair/Intake Manifold Cover Replacement). 7. Fill the cooling system. Refer to Cooling System Draining and Filling (Static) (See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Cooling System/Service and Repair/Cooling System Draining and Filling (Static))Cooling System Draining and Filling (GE 47716) (See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Cooling System/Service and Repair/Cooling System Draining and Filling (GE 47716)). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Radiator Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Radiator Inlet Hose Replacement > Page 1484 Radiator Hose: Service and Repair Radiator Outlet Hose Replacement Radiator Outlet Hose Replacement (LF1) Special Tools J 38185 - Hose Clamp Pliers Removal Procedure 1. Drain the cooling system. Refer to Cooling System Draining and Filling (Static) (See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Cooling System/Service and Repair/Cooling System Draining and Filling (Static))Cooling System Draining and Filling (GE 47716) (See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Cooling System/Service and Repair/Cooling System Draining and Filling (GE 47716)). 2. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle (See: Vehicle Lifting/Service and Repair). 3. Disengage tension on the radiator outlet hose clamp (1) at the radiator using J 38185 - Hose Clamp Pliers. 4. Remove the radiator outlet hose (2) from the radiator. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Radiator Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Radiator Inlet Hose Replacement > Page 1485 5. Disengage tension on the radiator outlet hose clamp (1) at the engine using J 38185 - Hose Clamp Pliers. 6. Remove the radiator outlet hose (2) from the engine. 7. Remove the radiator outlet hose from the vehicle. Installation Procedure 1. Install radiator outlet hose to the vehicle. Note: Lubricate the inside diameters of the hose with clean coolant prior to installation. 2. Install the radiator outlet hose (2) to the engine. 3. Engage tension on the radiator outlet hose clamp (1) at the engine using J 38185 - Hose Clamp Pliers. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Radiator Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Radiator Inlet Hose Replacement > Page 1486 4. Install the radiator outlet hose (2) to the radiator. 5. Engage tension on the radiator outlet hose clamp (1) at the radiator using J 38185 - Hose Clamp Pliers. 6. Lower the vehicle. 7. Fill the cooling system. Refer to Cooling System Draining and Filling (Static) (See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Cooling System/Service and Repair/Cooling System Draining and Filling (Static))Cooling System Draining and Filling (GE 47716) (See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Cooling System/Service and Repair/Cooling System Draining and Filling (GE 47716)). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Brake Fluid > Component Information > Specifications Brake Fluid: Specifications Hydraulic Brake System: DOT 3 Hydraulic Brake Fluid (GM Part No. U.S. 12377967, in Canada 89021320). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Coolant > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications Coolant: Capacity Specifications Cooling System ................................................................................................................................... .............................................. 10.8 quarts (10.2 liters) NOTE: All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the approximate level. Recheck fluid level after filling. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Coolant > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 1495 Coolant: Fluid Type Specifications ENGINE COOLANT The cooling system in the vehicle is filled with DEX-COOL engine coolant. This coolant is designed to remain in the vehicle for five years or 240 000 km (150,000 miles), whichever occurs first. The following explains the cooling system and how to check and add coolant when it is low. CAUTION: Adding only plain water to your cooling system can be dangerous. Plain water, or some other liquid such as alcohol, can boil before the proper coolant mixture will. Your vehicle's coolant warning system is set for the proper coolant mixture. With plain water or the wrong mixture, your engine could get too hot but you would not get the overheat warning. Your engine could catch fire and you or others could be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and DEX-COOL coolant. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and DEX-COOL coolant. If using this mixture, nothing else needs to be added. This mixture: Gives freezing protection down to -34°F (-37°C). Gives boiling protection up to 265°F (129°C). Protects against rust and corrosion. Will not damage aluminum parts. Helps keep the proper engine temperature. NOTICE: If you use an improper coolant mixture, your engine could overheat and be badly damaged. The repair cost would not be covered by your warranty. Too much water in the mixture can freeze and crack the engine, radiator, heater core and other parts. NOTICE: If extra inhibitors and/or additives are used in the vehicle's cooling system, the vehicle could be damaged. Use only the proper mixture of the engine coolant listed for the cooling system. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T - Water Or Coolant Contamination Information Fluid - A/T: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Water Or Coolant Contamination Information INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 08-07-30-035B Date: November 01, 2010 Subject: Information on Water or Ethylene Glycol in Transmission Fluid Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks with Automatic Transmission Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 08-07-30-035A (Section 07 - Transmission/Transaxle). Water or ethylene glycol in automatic transmission fluid (ATF) is harmful to internal transmission components and will have a negative effect on reliability and durability of these parts. Water or ethylene glycol in ATF will also change the friction of the clutches, frequently resulting in shudder during engagement or gear changes, especially during torque converter clutch engagement. Indications of water in the ATF may include: - ATF blowing out of the transmission vent tube. - ATF may appear cloudy or, in cases of extreme contamination, have the appearance of a strawberry milkshake. - Visible water in the oil pan. - A milky white substance inside the pan area. - Spacer plate gaskets that appear to be glued to the valve body face or case. - Spacer plate gaskets that appear to be swollen or wrinkled in areas where they are not compressed. - Rust on internal transmission iron/steel components. If water in the ATF has been found and the source of the water entry has not been identified, or if a leaking in-radiator transmission oil cooler is suspected (with no evidence of cross-contamination in the coolant recovery reservoir), a simple and quick test kit is available that detects the presence of ethylene glycol in ATF. The "Gly-Tek" test kit, available from the Nelco Company, should be obtained and the ATF tested to make an accurate decision on the need for radiator replacement. This can help to prevent customer comebacks if the in-radiator transmission oil cooler is leaking and reduce repair expenses by avoiding radiator replacement if the cooler is not leaking. These test kits can be obtained from: Nelco Company Test kits can be ordered by phone or through the website listed above. Orders are shipped standard delivery time but can be shipped on a next day delivery basis for an extra charge. One test kit will complete 10 individual fluid sample tests. For vehicles repaired under warranty, the cost of the complete test kit plus shipping charges should be divided by 10 and submitted on the warranty claim as a net item. The transmission should be repaired or replaced based on the normal cost comparison procedure. Important If water or coolant is found in the transmission, the following components MUST be replaced. - Replace all of the rubber-type seals. - Replace all of the composition-faced clutch plates and/or bands. - Replace all of the nylon parts. - Replace the torque converter. - Thoroughly clean and rebuild the transmission, using new gaskets and oil filter. Important The following steps must be completed when repairing or replacing. Flush and flow check the transmission oil cooler using J 45096. Refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 02-07-30-052F- Automatic Transmission Oil Cooler Flush and Flow Test Essential Tool J 45096 TransFlow. - Thoroughly inspect the engine cooling system and hoses and clean/repair as necessary. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T - Water Or Coolant Contamination Information > Page 1500 Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications Fluid - A/T: Capacity Specifications 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission 6T40 / 6T45 6-SPEED AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Fluid Change - Drain Plug .................................................................................................................................................... 4.0 6.0 liters (4.2 - 6.3 quarts) Valve Body Cover Removal ................................................................................................................................................. 5.0 7.0 liters (5.3 - 7.4 quarts) Overhaul .................................................................................................... ........................................................................... 8.0 - 8.5 liters (8.5 - 9.0 quarts) 6T70 / 6T75 6-SPEED AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Fluid Change - Drain Plug .................................................................................................................................................... 4.0 6.0 liters (4.2 - 6.3 quarts) Valve Body Cover Removal ................................................................................................................................................. 5.0 7.0 liters (5.3 - 7.4 quarts) Overhaul .................................................................................................... ........................................................................... 7.0 - 9.0 liters (7.4 - 9.5 quarts) NOTE: All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the approximate level. Recheck fluid level after filling. 6T70/6T75 - Automatic Transmission 6T40 / 6T45 6-SPEED AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Fluid Change - Drain Plug .................................................................................................................................................... 4.0 6.0 liters (4.2 - 6.3 quarts) Valve Body Cover Removal ................................................................................................................................................. 5.0 7.0 liters (5.3 - 7.4 quarts) Overhaul .................................................................................................... ........................................................................... 8.0 - 8.5 liters (8.5 - 9.0 quarts) 6T70 / 6T75 6-SPEED AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Fluid Change - Drain Plug .................................................................................................................................................... 4.0 6.0 liters (4.2 - 6.3 quarts) Valve Body Cover Removal ................................................................................................................................................. 5.0 7.0 liters (5.3 - 7.4 quarts) Overhaul .................................................................................................... ........................................................................... 7.0 - 9.0 liters (7.4 - 9.5 quarts) NOTE: All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the approximate level. Recheck fluid level after filling. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 1503 Fluid - A/T: Fluid Type Specifications Automatic Transmission DEXRON-VI Automatic Transmission Fluid. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission Fluid - A/T: Testing and Inspection 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission Transmission Fluid Level and Condition Check This procedure checks both the transmission fluid level, as well as the condition of the fluid itself. Caution: Use Dexron VI transmission fluid only. Failure to use the proper fluid may result in transmission internal damage. Note: Ensure the transmission has enough fluid in it to safely start the vehicle without damaging the transmission. With the vehicle off and the transmission fluid temperature at approximately 20-25°C (68-77°F) there must be at least enough fluid to drain out of the fluid level hole. This will ensure that there is enough fluid in the sump to fill the components once the vehicle is started. Non Dipstick Level Checking Procedure 1. Start the engine. 2. Depress the brake pedal and move the shift lever through each gear range, pausing for about 3 seconds in each range. Then move the shift lever back to PARK (P). 3. Allow the engine to idle 500-800 rpm for at least 3 minutes to allow any fluid foaming to dissipate and the fluid level to stabilize. Release the brake pedal. Note: If the TFT reading is not at the required temperature, allow the vehicle to cool, or operate the vehicle until the appropriate TFT is reached. If the fluid temperature is below the specified range, perform the following procedure to raise the fluid temperature to the specification. Drive the vehicle in second gear until the fluid temperature is at the specified temperature. 4. Keep the engine running and observe the transmission fluid temperature (TFT) using the Driver Information Center or a scan tool. Caution: The transmission fluid level must be checked when the transmission fluid temperature (TFT) is at 85-95°C (185-203°F). If the TFT is not at this temperature, operate the vehicle or allow the fluid to cool as required. Setting the fluid level with a TFT outside this temperature will result in either an under or over-filled transmission. TFT 95°C under-filled, TFT 85°C over-filled. An under-filled transmission will cause premature component wear or damage. An over-filled transmission will cause fluid to discharge out the vent tube, fluid foaming, or pump cavitation. 5. Raise the vehicle on a hoist. The vehicle must be level, with the engine running and the shift lever in the PARK range. 6. While the vehicle is idling, remove the oil level set plug. Allow any fluid to drain. Oil Level Plug (1) * If the fluid is flowing as a steady stream, wait until the fluid begins to drip. * If no fluid comes out, add fluid until fluid drips out. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 1506 7. Inspect the fluid color. The fluid should be red or dark brown. * If the fluid color is very dark or black and has a burnt odor, inspect the fluid for excessive metal particles or other debris. A small amount of "friction" material is a "normal" condition. If large pieces and/or metal particles are noted in the fluid, flush the oil cooler and cooler lines and overhaul the transmission. If there are no signs of transmission internal damage noted, replace the fluid, repair the oil cooler, and flush the cooler lines. * Fluid that is cloudy or milky or appears to be contaminated with water indicates engine coolant or water contamination. Refer to Engine Coolant/Water in Transmission (See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Testing and Inspection/Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures/6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission/Engine Coolant/Water in Transmission). 8. Inspect for external leaks. Refer to Fluid Leak Diagnosis (See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission/Fluid Leak Diagnosis). 9. If the fluid was changed, reset the transmission oil life monitor if applicable. Dipstick Level Checking Procedure (If equipped) 1. Park the vehicle on a level surface, apply the parking brake and place the shift lever in PARK (P). Start the engine. 2. Depress the brake pedal and move the shift lever through each gear range, pausing for about 3 seconds in each range. Then move the shift lever back to PARK (P). 3. Allow the engine to idle 500-800 rpm for at least 3 minutes to allow any fluid foaming to dissipate and the fluid level to stabilize. Release the brake pedal. 4. Keep the engine running and observe the transmission fluid temperature (TFT) using the Driver Information Center or a scan tool. Caution: The transmission fluid level must be checked when the transmission fluid temperature (TFT) is at 85-95°C (185-203°F). If the TFT is not at this temperature, operate the vehicle or allow the fluid to cool as required. Setting the fluid level with a TFT outside this temperature will result in either an under or over-filled transmission. TFT 95°C under-filled, TFT 85°C over-filled. An under-filled transmission will cause premature component wear or damage. An over-filled transmission will cause fluid to discharge out the vent tube, fluid foaming, or pump cavitation. Note: * If the TFT reading is not at the required temperature, allow the vehicle to cool, or operate the vehicle until the appropriate TFT is reached. If the fluid temperature is below the specified range, perform the following procedure to raise the fluid temperature to the specification. * Check the transmission fluid level when the TFT is at between 85-95°C (185-203°F). The fluid level rises as fluid temperature increases, so it is important to ensure the transmission fluid temperature is at the specified temperature. Drive the vehicle in second gear until the fluid temperature is at the specified temperature. 5. The vehicle must be level, with the engine running and the shift lever in the PARK range. 6. Remove the dipstick and wipe it with a clean rag or paper towel. 7. Inspect the fluid color. The fluid should be red or dark brown. * If the fluid color is very dark or black and has a burnt odor, inspect the fluid for excessive metal particles or other debris. A small amount of "friction" material is a "normal" condition. If large pieces and/or metal particles are noted in the fluid, flush the oil cooler and cooler lines and overhaul the transmission. If there are no signs of transmission internal damage noted, replace the fluid, repair the oil cooler, and flush the cooler lines. * Fluid that is cloudy or milky or appears to be contaminated with water indicates engine coolant or water contamination. Refer to Engine Coolant/Water in Transmission (See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Testing and Inspection/Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures/6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission/Engine Coolant/Water in Transmission). 8. Install the dipstick. Wait three seconds and then remove it again. Note: Always check the fluid level at least twice. Consistent readings are important to maintaining proper fluid level. If inconsistent readings are noted, inspect the transmission vent cap to ensure it is clean and unclogged. Note: It is not necessary to get the fluid level all the way up to the MAX mark. Anywhere within the crosshatch band is acceptable. 9. Check both sides of the dipstick and read the lower level. 10. Install and remove the dipstick again to verify the reading. Note: Do not add more than one half pint (0.25L) at a time without rechecking the level. Once the oil is on the dipstick bullet, it will not take much more fluid to raise the fluid level into the crosshatch band. Do not overfill. Also, if the fluid level is low, inspect the transmission for leaks. Refer to Fluid Leak Diagnosis (See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission/Fluid Leak Diagnosis). 11. If the fluid level is not within the crosshatch band, and the transmission temperature is at 90°C (194°F), add or drain fluid as necessary to bring the level into the crosshatch band. If the fluid level is low, add only enough fluid to bring the level into the crosshatch band. 12. If the fluid level is in the acceptable range, install the dipstick. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 1507 13. If the fluid was changed, reset the transmission oil life monitor if applicable. Fluid Condition Inspection * Inspect the fluid color. The fluid should be red in color. The fluid may also turn brown form normal use, and does not always indicate contamination. Note: Fluid that is very dark or black and has a burnt odor usually indicates contamination or overheating. * If the fluid color is very dark or black and has a burnt odor, inspect the fluid for excessive metal particles or other debris which may indicate transmission damage. Refer to Road Test (See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission) to verify transmission operation. Change the transmission fluid if no other conditions are found. * Fluid that is cloudy or milky or appears to be contaminated with water indicates engine coolant or water contamination. Refer to Engine Coolant/Water in Transmission (See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Testing and Inspection/Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures/6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission/Engine Coolant/Water in Transmission). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 1508 Fluid - A/T: Testing and Inspection 6T70/6T75 - Automatic Transmission Transmission Fluid Level and Condition Check This procedure checks both the transmission fluid level, as well as the condition of the fluid itself. Caution: Use Dexron VI transmission fluid only. Failure to use the proper fluid may result in transmission internal damage. Note: Ensure the transmission has enough fluid in it to safely start the vehicle without damaging the transmission. With the vehicle off there must be at least enough fluid to wet the end of the dipstick bullet. This will ensure that there is enough fluid in the sump to fill the components once the vehicle is started. Level Checking Procedure 1. Park the vehicle on a level surface, apply the parking brake and place the shift lever in PARK (P). 2. Start the engine. 3. Depress the brake pedal and move the shift lever through each gear range, pausing for about 3 seconds in each range. Then move the shift lever back to PARK (P). 4. Allow the engine to idle 500-800 rpm for at least 1 minute. Release the brake pedal. 5. Keep the engine running and observe the transmission fluid temperature (TFT) using the Driver Information Center or a scan tool. Note: If the fluid temperature is below the specified range, perform the following procedure to raise the fluid temperature to the specified range. 6. If the TFT reading is not within the required temperature ranges, allow the vehicle to cool, or operate the vehicle until the appropriate TFT is reached. Drive the vehicle in second gear until the fluid temperature is within the specified range. Note: Check the transmission fluid level when the TFT is between 180°F and 200°F (82°C and 93°C). The fluid level rises as fluid temperature increases, so it is important to ensure the transmission fluid temperature is within range. 7. Remove the dipstick and wipe it with a clean rag or paper towel. 8. Inspect the fluid color. The fluid should be red or dark brown. * If the fluid color is very dark or black and has a burnt odor, inspect the fluid for excessive metal particles or other debris. A small amount of "friction" material is a "normal" condition. If large pieces and/or metal particles are noted in the fluid, flush the oil cooler and cooler lines and overhaul the transmission. If there are no signs of transmission internal damage noted, replace the fluid, repair the oil cooler, and flush the cooler lines. * Fluid that is cloudy or milky or appears to be contaminated with water indicates engine coolant or water contamination. Refer to Engine Coolant/Water in Transmission (See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Testing and Inspection/Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures/6T70/6T75 - Automatic Transmission/Engine Coolant/Water in Transmission). 9. Install the dipstick and tighten. Wait three seconds and then remove it again. Note: Always check the fluid level at least twice. Consistent readings are important to maintaining proper fluid level. If inconsistent readings are noted, inspect the transmission vent assembly to ensure it is clean and unclogged. 10. Check both sides of the dipstick and read the lower level. Note: It is not necessary to get the fluid level all the way up to the MAX mark. Anywhere within the crosshatch band is acceptable. 11. Install and remove the dipstick again to verify the reading. 12. If the fluid level is not within the crosshatch band, and the transmission temperature is between 180°F and 200°F (82°C and 93°C), add or drain fluid as necessary to bring the level into the crosshatch band. If the fluid level is low, add only enough fluid to bring the level into the crosshatch band. Note: Do not add more than one pint (0.5L) at a time without rechecking the level. Once the oil is on the dipstick bullet, it will not take much more fluid to raise the fluid level into the crosshatch band. Do not overfill. Also, if the fluid level is low, inspect the transmission for leaks. Refer to Fluid Leak Diagnosis (See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/6T70/6T75 - Automatic Transmission/Fluid Leak Diagnosis). 13. If the fluid level is in the acceptable range, install the dipstick. 14. If the fluid was changed, reset the transmission oil life monitor if applicable. Fluid Condition Inspection * Inspect the fluid color. The fluid should be red in color. The fluid may also turn brown form normal use, and does not always indicate contamination. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 1509 Note: Fluid that is very dark or black and has a burnt odor usually indicates contamination or overheating. * If the fluid color is very dark or black and has a burnt odor, inspect the fluid for excessive metal particles or other debris which may indicate transmission damage. Refer to Road Test (See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/6T70/6T75 - Automatic Transmission) to verify transmission operation. Change the transmission fluid if no other conditions are found. * Fluid that is cloudy or milky or appears to be contaminated with water indicates engine coolant or water contamination. Refer to Engine Coolant/Water in Transmission (See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Testing and Inspection/Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures/6T70/6T75 - Automatic Transmission/Engine Coolant/Water in Transmission). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission Fluid - A/T: Service and Repair 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission Transmission Fluid Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle (See: Vehicle Lifting/Service and Repair). 2. Remove the fluid drain plug (1). 3. Drain transmission fluid into a suitable container. Caution: Refer to Component Fastener Tightening Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Component Fastener Tightening Caution). 4. Install the fluid drain plug (1) and tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb in). Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 1512 1. Lower the vehicle. 2. Remove the fluid fill cap (1). 3. Fill the transmission to the proper level with the correct fluid. Refer to Transmission Fluid Level and Condition Check (See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission/Transmission Fluid Level and Condition Check) and Fluid Capacity Specifications (6T40/45/50) (See: Specifications/Capacity Specifications/6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission). 4. Install the fluid fill cap (1). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 1513 Fluid - A/T: Service and Repair 6T70/6T75 - Automatic Transmission Transmission Fluid Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - Differential > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications Fluid - Differential: Capacity Specifications Rear Differential ................................................................................................................................... ................................................ 500 ml (16.9 ounces) NOTE: All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the approximate level. Recheck fluid level after filling. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - Differential > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 1518 Fluid - Differential: Fluid Type Specifications Rear Differential Assembly Synthetic Gear Oil 75W-90 GM P/N 12378514 (Canadian P/N 88901045) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - Differential > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures Fluid - Differential: Procedures Rear Axle Lubricant Level Inspection Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - Differential > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1521 Fluid - Differential: Removal and Replacement Differential Oil Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - Transfer Case > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications Fluid - Transfer Case: Capacity Specifications Getrag 760 ........................................................................................................................................... ............................................... 1.0 liters (1.06 quarts) NOTE: All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the approximate level. Recheck fluid level after filling. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - Transfer Case > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 1526 Fluid - Transfer Case: Fluid Type Specifications TRANSFER CASE (POWER TRANSFER UNIT) SAE 75W-90 Synthetic Axle Lubricant (GM Part No. U.S. 89021677, in Canada 89021678) meeting GM Specification 9986115. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - Transfer Case > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1527 Fluid - Transfer Case: Service and Repair Transfer Case Fluid Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle (See: Vehicle Lifting/Service and Repair). 2. Remove the drain plug (2). 3. Remove the fill plug (1). Installation Procedure 1. Clean the drain plug. Caution: Refer to Component Fastener Tightening Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Component Fastener Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - Transfer Case > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1528 Tightening Caution). 2. Install the drain plug (2) and tighten to 39 Nm (29 lb ft). 3. Fill the transfer case with synthetic gear lubricant GM P/N 89021677 (Canadian P/N 89021678) to the bottom of the fill plug, or 0.80 L (0.85 qt). 4. Install the fill plug (1) and tighten to 39 Nm (29 lb ft). 5. Lower the vehicle. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Engine Oil > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine - GM dexos 1 and dexos 2(R) Oil Specifications Engine Oil: Technical Service Bulletins Engine - GM dexos 1 and dexos 2(R) Oil Specifications INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 11-00-90-001 Date: March 14, 2011 Subject: Global Information for GM dexos1(TM) and GM dexos2(TM) Engine Oil Specifications for Spark Ignited and Diesel Engines, Available Licensed Brands, and Service Fill for Adding or Complete Oil Change Models: 2012 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks Excluding All Vehicles Equipped with Duramax(TM) Diesel Engines GM dexos 1(TM) Information Center Website Refer to the following General Motors website for dexos 1(TM) information about the different licensed brands that are currently available: http://www.gmdexos.com GM dexos 1(TM) Engine Oil Trademark and Icons The dexos(TM) specification and trademarks are exclusive to General Motors, LLC. Only those oils displaying the dexos‹›(TM) trademark and icon on the front label meet the demanding performance requirements and stringent quality standards set forth in the dexos‹›(TM) specification. Look on the front label for any of the logos shown above to identify an authorized, licensed dexos 1(TM) engine oil. GM dexos 1(TM) Engine Oil Specification Important General Motors dexos 1(TM) engine oil specification replaces the previous General Motors specifications GM6094M, GM4718M and GM-LL-A-025 for most GM gasoline engines. The oil specified for use in GM passenger cars and trucks, PRIOR to the 2011 model year remains acceptable for those previous vehicles. However, dexos 1(TM) is backward compatible and can be used in those older vehicles. In North America, starting with the 2011 model year, GM introduced dexos 1(TM) certified engine oil as a factory fill and service fill for gasoline engines. The reasons for the new engine oil specification are as follows: - To meet environmental goals such as increasing fuel efficiency and reducing engine emissions. - To promote long engine life. - To minimize the number of engine oil changes in order to help meet the goal of lessening the industry's overall dependence on crude oil. dexos 1(TM) is a GM-developed engine oil specification that has been designed to provide the following benefits: - Further improve fuel economy, to meet future corporate average fuel economy (CAFE) requirements and fuel economy retention by allowing the oil to maintain its fuel economy benefits throughout the life of the oil. - More robust formulations for added engine protection and aeration performance. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Engine Oil > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine - GM dexos 1 and dexos 2(R) Oil Specifications > Page 1533 - Support the GM Oil Life System, thereby minimizing the replacement of engine oil, before its life has been depleted. - Reduce the duplication of requirements for a large number of internal GM engine oil specifications. International Lubricants Standardization and Approval Committee (ILSAC) GF-5 Standard In addition to GM dexos 1(TM), a new International Lubricants Standardization and Approval Committee (ILSAC) standard called GF-5, was introduced in October 2010. - There will be a corresponding API category, called: SN Resource Conserving. The current GF-4 standard was put in place in 2004 and will become obsolete in October 2011. Similar to dexos 1(TM), the GF-5 standard will use a new fuel economy test, Sequence VID, which demands a statistically significant increase in fuel economy versus the Sequence VIB test that was used for GF-4. - It is expected that all dexos 1(TM) approved oils will be capable of meeting the GF-5 standard. However, not all GF-5 engine oils will be capable of meeting the dexos 1(TM) specification. - Like dexos(TM), the new ILSAC GF-5 standard will call for more sophisticated additives. The API will begin licensing marketers during October 2010, to produce and distribute GF-5 certified products, which are expected to include SAE 0W-20, 0W-30, 5W-20, 5W-30 and 10W-30 oils. Corporate Average Fuel Economy (CAFE) Requirements Effect on Fuel Economy Since CAFE standards were first introduced in 1974, the fuel economy of cars has more than doubled, while the fuel economy of light trucks has increased by more than 50 percent. Proposed CAFE standards call for a continuation of increased fuel economy in new cars and trucks. To meet these future requirements, all aspects of vehicle operation are being looked at more critically than ever before. New technology being introduced in GM vehicles designed to increase vehicle efficiency and fuel economy include direct injection, cam phasing, turbocharging and active fuel management (AFM). The demands of these new technologies on engine oil also are taken into consideration when determining new oil specifications. AFM for example can help to achieve improved fuel economy. However alternately deactivating and activating the cylinders by not allowing the intake and exhaust valves to open contributes to additional stress on the engine oil. Another industry trend for meeting tough fuel economy mandates has been a shift toward lower viscosity oils. dexos 1(TM) will eventually be offered in several viscosity grades in accordance with engine needs: SAE 0W-20, 5W-20, 0W-30 and 5W-30. Using the right viscosity grade oil is critical for proper engine performance. Always refer to the Maintenance section of a vehicle Owner Manual for the proper viscosity grade for the engine being serviced. GM Oil Life System in Conjunction With dexos (TM) Supports Extended Oil Change Intervals To help conserve oil while maintaining engine protection, many GM vehicles are equipped with the GM Oil Life System. This system can provide oil change intervals that exceed the traditional 3,000 mile (4,830 km) recommendation. The dexos (TM) specification, with its requirements for improved oil robustness, compliments the GM Oil Life System by supporting extended oil change intervals over the lifetime of a vehicle. If all GM customers with GM Oil Life System equipped vehicles would use the system as intended, GM estimates that more than 100 million gallons of oil could be saved annually. GM dexos 2(TM) Information Center Website Refer to the following General Motors website for dexos 2(TM) information about the different licensed brands that are currently available: http://www.gmdexos.com GM dexos 2(TM) Engine Oil Trademark and Icons Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Engine Oil > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine - GM dexos 1 and dexos 2(R) Oil Specifications > Page 1534 The dexos (TM) specification and trademarks are exclusive to General Motors, LLC. Only those oils displaying the dexos (TM) trademark and icon on the front label meet the demanding performance requirements and stringent quality standards set forth in the dexos (TM)specification. Look on the front label for any of the logos shown above to identify an authorized, licensed dexos 2(TM) engine oil. GM dexos 2(TM) Engine Oil Specification - dexos 2(TM) is approved and recommended by GM for use in Europe starting in model year 2010 vehicles, regardless of where the vehicle was manufactured. - dexos 2(TM) is the recommended service fill oil for European gasoline engines. Important The Duramax(TM) diesel engine is the exception and requires lubricants meeting specification CJ-4. - dexos 2(TM) is the recommended service fill oil for European light-duty diesel engines and replaces GM-LL-B-025 and GM-LL-A-025. - dexos 2(TM) protects diesel engines from harmful soot deposits and is designed with limits on certain chemical components to prolong catalyst life and protect expensive emission reduction systems. It is a robust oil, resisting degradation between oil changes and maintaining optimum performance longer. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Engine Oil > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications Engine Oil: Capacity Specifications Engine Oil with Filter ............................................................................................................................ ............................................... 6.0 quarts (5.7 liters) NOTE: All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the approximate level. Recheck fluid level after filling. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Engine Oil > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 1537 Engine Oil: Fluid Type Specifications ENGINE OIL TYPE Look for three things: 1. Your vehicle's engine requires oil meeting GM Standard GM6094M. 2. Oils meeting these requirements should also have the starburst symbol on the container. This symbol indicates that the oil has been certified by the American Petroleum Institute (API). You should look for this information on the oil container 3. All temperatures above -20°F (-29°C) SAE 5W-30 is best for your vehicle. These numbers on an oil container show its viscosity, or thickness. Do not use other viscosity oils such as SAE 10W-40, SAE 20W-50, or any other viscosity grade not recommended. NOTICE: Use only engine oil identified as meeting GM Standard GM6094M and showing the American Petroleum Institute Certified For Gasoline Engines starburst symbol. Failure to use the recommended oil can result in engine damage not covered by your warranty. GM Goodwrench oil meets all the requirements for your vehicle. If you are in an area of extreme cold, where the temperature falls below -20°F (-29°C), it is recommended that you use either an SAE 5W-30 synthetic oil or an SAE 0W-30 oil. Both will provide easier cold starting and better protection for your engine at extremely low temperatures. ENGINE OIL ADDITIVES / ENGINE OIL FLUSHES Do not add anything to your oil. The recommended oils with the starburst symbol that meet GM Standard GM6094M are all you will need for good performance and engine protection. Engine oil system flushes are not recommended and could cause engine damage not covered by the vehicle warranty. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Engine Oil > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1538 Engine Oil: Service and Repair Engine Oil and Oil Filter Replacement (LF1) Removal Procedure 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle (See: Vehicle Lifting/Service and Repair). 2. Place a drain pan under the oil pan drain plug. 3. Remove the oil pan drain plug. Allow the oil to drain completely. Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener Caution). 4. Install the oil pan drain plug and tighten to 20 Nm (15 lb ft). Warning: Refer to Hot Exhaust System Warning (See: Service Precautions/Technician Safety Information/Hot Exhaust System Warning). 5. Place the drain pan under the oil filter (1). 6. Remove the oil filter. Allow the oil to drain completely. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Engine Oil > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1539 1. Lubricate the NEW oil filter gasket with clean engine oil. 2. Tighten the oil filter (1) to 30 Nm (22 lb ft). 3. Lower the vehicle. 4. Refill the engine oil. Refer to Approximate Fluid Capacities (See: Specifications). 5. Start the engine and inspect for leaks. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Power Steering Fluid > Component Information > Specifications Power Steering Fluid: Specifications Hydraulic Power Steering System (V6 Engines Only) DEXRON-VI Automatic Transmission Fluid Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications Refrigerant: Capacity Specifications Refrigerant charge ............................................................................................................................... ........................................................ 0.65 kg (1.43 lb) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 1547 Refrigerant: Fluid Type Specifications Refrigerant ........................................................................................................................................... ....................................................................... R-134a Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1548 Refrigerant: Service and Repair Refrigerant Recovery and Recharging Special Tools J 34100 - Smart Cart Warning To prevent personal injury, avoid breathing A/C Refrigerant and lubricant vapor or mist. Work in a well ventilated area. To remove refrigerant from the A/C System, use service equipment designed for recovery that is certified to meet the requirements of the appropriate SAE Standards. If an accidental system discharge occurs, ventilate the work area before continuing service. Additional health and safety information may be obtained from the refrigerant, refrigerant recovery, and lubricant manufacturers. Warning For personal protection, goggles and lint-free gloves should be worn and a clean cloth wrapped around fittings, valves, and connections when doing work that includes opening the refrigerant system. If refrigerant comes in contact with any part of the body severe frostbite and personal injury can result. The exposed area should be flushed immediately with cold water and prompt medical help should be obtained. Caution: You must replace the desiccant if the A/C refrigerant system has been open to atmosphere for more than four hours, or if the A/C refrigerant oil has been contaminated. Failure to replace the desiccant will result in damage to the A/C refrigerant system. Caution: R-134a is the only approved refrigerant for use in this vehicle. The use of any other refrigerant may result in poor system performance or component failure. Caution: To avoid system damage use only R-134a dedicated tools when servicing the A/C system. Caution: Use only Polyalkylene Glycol Synthetic Refrigerant Oil (PAG) for internal circulation through the R-134a A/C system and only 525 viscosity mineral oil on fitting threads and O-rings. If lubricants other than those specified are used, compressor failure and/or fitting seizure may result. The J 34100 - Smart Cart is a complete air conditioning service center for R-134a. The Smart Cart recovers, recycles, evacuates and recharges A/C refrigerant quickly, accurately and automatically. The unit has a display screen that contains the function controls and displays prompts that will lead the technician through the recover, recycle, evacuate and recharge operations. R-134a is recovered into and charged out of an internal storage vessel. The ACR 2000 automatically replenishes this vessel from an external source tank in order to maintain a constant 5.45-6.82 kg (12-15 lbs) of A/C refrigerant. The Smart Cart has a built in A/C refrigerant identifier that will test for contamination, prior to recovery and will notify the technician if there are foreign gases present in the A/C system. If foreign gases are present, the Smart Cart will not recover the refrigerant from the A/C system. The Smart Cart also features automatic air purge, single pass recycling and an automatic oil drain. Refer to the J 34100 - Smart Cart Smart Cart manual for operation and setup instruction. Always recharge the A/C System with the proper amount of R-134a. Refer to Refrigerant System Specifications (See: Heating and Air Conditioning/Specifications) for the correct amount. A/C Refrigerant System Oil Charge Replenishing If oil was removed from the A/C system during the recovery process or due to component replacement, the oil must be replenished. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant Oil > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications Refrigerant Oil: Capacity Specifications Refrigerant Oil Abrupt Refrigerant Loss ....................................................................................................................... ......................................................... 65 ml (2.20 oz) Compressor Replacement ................................ .............................................................................................................................................. 74 ml (2.50 oz) The service compressor is precharged with the specified amount of PAG oil. Condenser Replacement with the Receiver Dehydrator ...................................................................................................................................... 60 ml (2 oz) Condenser Replacement without the Receiver Dehydrator ................................................................................................................................. 30 ml (1 oz) Evaporator Replacement ..................................................................................................................... ................................................................ 30 ml (1 oz) Receiver Dehydrator Replacement ................ ..................................................................................................................................................... 30 ml (1 oz) Thermal Expansion Valve Replacement ........................................................................................................................................................ 20 ml (0.75 oz) Total System PAG Oil Capacity ....................................................................................... ................................................................................ 120 ml (4 oz) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant Oil > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 1553 Refrigerant Oil: Fluid Type Specifications PAG Oil GM P/N 12378526 for United States PAG Oil GM P/N 88900060 for Canada Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Trunk / Liftgate Hydraulic Fluid > Component Information > Service and Repair > Liftgate Hydraulic System Refilling Trunk / Liftgate Hydraulic Fluid: Service and Repair Liftgate Hydraulic System Refilling Liftgate Hydraulic System Refilling Warning: Refer to Eye Protection Warning (See: Service Precautions/Technician Safety Information/Eye Protection Warning). Warning: Refer to Battery Disconnect Warning (See: Starting and Charging/Battery/Service Precautions). Note: * The actuator/hose assemblies are shipped full with fluid. In this case the pump fluid reservoir should only be filled to the normal + sign. Do not overfill to compensate for an empty actuator/hose assembly. * Symptom of a low fluid condition will be a jerking liftgate and with an abnormal hydraulic pump noise as the liftgate is being open. The liftgate will not open to the full open position. The liftgate will reverse before reaching the full open position if not operating properly. * Inspection of the hydraulic fluid level and/or refilling may only be completed if the liftgate hydraulic actuator pump is removed from the vehicle and placed on a clean/level workbench horizontally to the + sign to accurately inspect and add fluid as needed. The liftgate hydraulic actuator pump must rest in the horizontal position for one minute before the hydraulic fluid level is inspected. The level must be above the + mark. * The liftgate hydraulic system components must be tested for proper operation before reinstalling the trim panels that cover the liftgate hydraulic actuator pump and actuator/hose assemblies so the fluid level can be recheck after cycling the liftgate 3-5 times to ensure proper fluid level. Rechecking the fluid level will require removal of the liftgate hydraulic pump. 1. Remove the liftgate hydraulic pump. Refer to Liftgate Hydraulic Pump Replacement (See: Body and Frame/Doors, Hood and Trunk/Trunk / Liftgate/Trunk / Liftgate Hydraulic Pump/Service and Repair/Liftgate Hydraulic Pump Replacement). 2. Position the pump with the fluid reservoir in a vertical position with the filler screw (1) in the up and/or on top position. 3. Wipe the surface around the filler screw clean. 4. Remove the filler screw (1) and place on a clean, lint and dust free surface. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Trunk / Liftgate Hydraulic Fluid > Component Information > Service and Repair > Liftgate Hydraulic System Refilling > Page 1558 5. Add hydraulic fluid from a clean container (1). Refer to Adhesives, Fluids, Lubricants, and Sealers (See: Body and Frame/Locks/Specifications/Fluid Type Specifications) for the recommended fluid. Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener Caution). 6. Install the filler screw and tighten to 1.3 Nm (12 lb in). 7. Position the liftgate hydraulic actuator pump (1) on a clean/level workbench horizontally to the + sign to accurately inspect and add fluid as needed. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Trunk / Liftgate Hydraulic Fluid > Component Information > Service and Repair > Liftgate Hydraulic System Refilling > Page 1559 8. The liftgate hydraulic actuator pump must rest in the horizontal position for one minute before the hydraulic fluid level is inspected. The level must be above the + mark. 9. Install the pump without the trim and inspect for proper operation and fluid level. The fluid level can be checked after cycling the liftgate 3-5 times to ensure proper fluid level. If the fluid is still low repeat the procedure. 10. Install the liftgate hydraulic pump after inspection. Refer to Liftgate Hydraulic Pump Replacement (See: Body and Frame/Doors, Hood and Trunk/Trunk / Liftgate/Trunk / Liftgate Hydraulic Pump/Service and Repair/Liftgate Hydraulic Pump Replacement). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Trunk / Liftgate Hydraulic Fluid > Component Information > Service and Repair > Liftgate Hydraulic System Refilling > Page 1560 Trunk / Liftgate Hydraulic Fluid: Service and Repair Liftgate Hydraulic System Bleeding Liftgate Hydraulic System Bleeding Warning: Refer to Eye Protection Warning (See: Service Precautions/Technician Safety Information/Eye Protection Warning). Note: Inspection of the hydraulic fluid level and/or refilling may only be completed if the liftgate hydraulic actuator pump is removed from the vehicle and placed on a clean/level workbench horizontally to the + sign to accurately inspect and add fluid as needed. The liftgate hydraulic actuator pump must rest in the horizontal position for one minute before the hydraulic fluid level is inspected. The level must be above the + mark after cycling the liftgate 3-5 times. 1. Cycle the liftgate 3-5 times to ensure proper fluid level. 2. Inspect the fluid level. Refer to Liftgate Hydraulic Pump Replacement (See: Body and Frame/Doors, Hood and Trunk/Trunk / Liftgate/Trunk / Liftgate Hydraulic Pump/Service and Repair/Liftgate Hydraulic Pump Replacement). 3. If adding fluid is required, refer to Liftgate Hydraulic System Refilling (See: Liftgate Hydraulic System Refilling). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Antilock Brake Automated Bleed Procedure Brake Bleeding: Service and Repair Antilock Brake Automated Bleed Procedure Antilock Brake System Automated Bleed Warning: Refer to Brake Fluid Irritant Warning (See: Brakes and Traction Control/Service Precautions/Technician Safety Information/Brake Fluid Irritant Warning). Caution: Refer to Brake Fluid Effects on Paint and Electrical Components Caution (See: Brakes and Traction Control/Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings). Note: Before performing the antilock brake system (ABS) Automated Bleed Procedure, first perform a manual or pressure bleed of the base brake system. Refer to Hydraulic Brake System Bleeding (Manual) (See: )Hydraulic Brake System Bleeding (Pressure) (See: ). The automated bleed procedure is recommended when one of the following conditions exist: * Base brake system bleeding does not achieve the desired pedal height or feel * Extreme loss of brake fluid has occurred * Air ingestion is suspected in the secondary circuits of the brake modulator assembly The ABS Automated Bleed Procedure uses a scan tool to cycle the system solenoid valves and run the pump in order to purge any air from the secondary circuits. These circuits are normally closed off, and are only opened during system initialization at vehicle start up and during ABS operation. The automated bleed procedure opens these secondary circuits and allows any air trapped in these circuits to flow out toward the brake corners. Automated Bleed Procedure Caution: The Auto Bleed Procedure may be terminated at any time during the process by pressing the EXIT button. No further Scan Tool prompts pertaining to the Auto Bleed procedure will be given. After exiting the bleed procedure, relieve bleed pressure and disconnect bleed equipment per manufacturers instructions. Failure to properly relieve pressure may result in spilled brake fluid causing damage to components and painted surfaces. 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle (See: Vehicle Lifting/Service and Repair). 2. Remove all 4 tire and wheel assemblies. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation (See: Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair). 3. Inspect the brake system for leaks and visual damage. Refer to Symptoms - Hydraulic Brakes (See: Brakes and Traction Control/Hydraulic System/Testing and Inspection/Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures/Symptoms - Hydraulic Brakes). Repair or replace components as needed. 4. Lower the vehicle. 5. Inspect the battery state of charge. Refer to Battery Inspection/Test (See: Starting and Charging/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Battery Inspection/Test). 6. Install a scan tool. 7. Turn the ignition ON, with the engine OFF. 8. With the scan tool, establish communications with the ABS system. Select Special Functions. Select Automated Bleed from the Special Functions menu. 9. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle (See: Vehicle Lifting/Service and Repair). 10. Following the directions given on the scan tool, pressure bleed the base brake system. Refer to Hydraulic Brake System Bleeding (Manual) (See: )Hydraulic Brake System Bleeding (Pressure) (See: ). 11. Follow the scan tool directions until the desired brake pedal height is achieved. 12. If the bleed procedure is aborted, a malfunction exists. Perform the following steps before resuming the bleed procedure: * If a DTC is detected, refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle (See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Descriptions/Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle) and diagnose the appropriate DTC. * If the brake pedal feels spongy, perform the conventional brake bleed procedure again. Refer to Hydraulic Brake System Bleeding (Manual) ( See: )Hydraulic Brake System Bleeding (Pressure) (See: ). 13. When the desired pedal height is achieved, press the brake pedal to inspect for firmness. 14. Lower the vehicle. 15. Remove the scan tool. 16. Install the tire and wheel assemblies. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation (See: Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair). 17. Inspect the brake fluid level. Refer to Master Cylinder Reservoir Filling (See: Brakes and Traction Control/Hydraulic System/Brake Master Cylinder/Service and Repair/Procedures/Master Cylinder Reservoir Filling). 18. Road test the vehicle while inspecting that the pedal remains high and firm. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Antilock Brake Automated Bleed Procedure > Page 1565 Brake Bleeding: Service and Repair Hydraulic Brake Bleeding (Manual) Hydraulic Brake System Bleeding (Manual) Warning: Refer to Brake Fluid Irritant Warning (See: Brakes and Traction Control/Service Precautions/Technician Safety Information/Brake Fluid Irritant Warning). Caution: Refer to Brake Fluid Effects on Paint and Electrical Components Caution (See: Brakes and Traction Control/Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings). 1. Place a clean shop cloth beneath the brake master cylinder to prevent brake fluid spills. 2. With the ignition OFF and the brakes cool, apply the brakes 3-5 times, or until the brake pedal effort increases significantly, in order to deplete the brake booster power reserve. 3. If you have performed a brake master cylinder bench bleeding on this vehicle, or if you disconnected the brake pipes from the master cylinder, you must perform the following steps: 1. Ensure that the brake master cylinder reservoir is full to the maximum-fill level. If necessary, add GM approved brake fluid from a clean, sealed brake fluid container. Refer to Fluid and Lubricant Recommendations (USA and Canada) (See: ). If removal of the reservoir cap and diaphragm is necessary, clean the outside of the reservoir on and around the cap prior to removal. 2. With the rear brake pipe installed securely to the master cylinder, loosen and separate the front brake pipe from the front port of the brake master cylinder. 3. Allow a small amount of brake fluid to gravity bleed from the open port of the master cylinder. 4. Reconnect the brake pipe to the master cylinder port and tighten securely. 5. Have an assistant slowly depress the brake pedal fully and maintain steady pressure on the pedal. 6. Loosen the same brake pipe to purge air from the open port of the master cylinder. 7. Tighten the brake pipe, then have the assistant slowly release the brake pedal. 8. Wait 15 seconds, then repeat steps 3.3-3.7 until all air is purged from the same port of the master cylinder. 9. With the front brake pipe installed securely to the master cylinder, after all air has been purged from the front port of the master cylinder, loosen and separate the rear brake pipe from the master cylinder, then repeat steps 3.3-3.8. 10. After completing the final master cylinder port bleeding procedure, ensure that both of the brake pipe-to-master cylinder fittings are properly tightened. 4. Fill the brake master cylinder reservoir with GM approved brake fluid from a clean, sealed brake fluid container. Ensure that the brake master cylinder reservoir remains at least half-full during this bleeding procedure. Add fluid as needed to maintain the proper level. Refer to Master Cylinder Reservoir Filling (See: Brakes and Traction Control/Hydraulic System/Brake Master Cylinder/Service and Repair/Procedures/Master Cylinder Reservoir Filling). Clean the outside of the reservoir on and around the reservoir cap prior to removing the cap and diaphragm. 5. Install a proper box-end wrench onto the RIGHT REAR wheel hydraulic circuit bleeder valve. 6. Install a transparent hose over the end of the bleeder valve. 7. Submerge the open end of the transparent hose into a transparent container partially filled with GM approved brake fluid from a clean, sealed brake fluid container. 8. Have an assistant slowly depress the brake pedal fully and maintain steady pressure on the pedal. 9. Loosen the bleeder valve to purge air from the wheel hydraulic circuit. 10. Tighten the bleeder valve, then have the assistant slowly release the brake pedal. 11. Wait 15 seconds, then repeat steps 8-10 until all air is purged from the same wheel hydraulic circuit. 12. With the right rear wheel hydraulic circuit bleeder valve tightened securely, after all air has been purged from the right rear hydraulic circuit, install a proper box-end wrench onto the LEFT FRONT wheel hydraulic circuit bleeder valve. 13. Install a transparent hose over the end of the bleeder valve, then repeat steps 7-11. 14. With the left front wheel hydraulic circuit bleeder valve tightened securely, after all air has been purged from the left front hydraulic circuit, install a proper box-end wrench onto the LEFT REAR wheel hydraulic circuit bleeder valve. 15. Install a transparent hose over the end of the bleeder valve, then repeat steps 7-11. 16. With the left rear wheel hydraulic circuit bleeder valve tightened securely, after all air has been purged from the left rear hydraulic circuit, install a proper box-end wrench onto the RIGHT FRONT wheel hydraulic circuit bleeder valve. 17. Install a transparent hose over the end of the bleeder valve, then repeat steps 7-11. 18. After completing the final wheel hydraulic circuit bleeding procedure, ensure that each of the 4 wheel hydraulic circuit bleeder valves are properly tightened. 19. Fill the brake master cylinder reservoir to the maximum-fill level with GM approved brake fluid from a clean, sealed brake fluid container. 20. Slowly depress and release the brake pedal. Observe the feel of the brake pedal. Note: If it is determined that air was induced into the system upstream of the ABS modulator prior to servicing, the Antilock Brake System Automated Bleed (See: ) must be performed. 21. If the brake pedal feels spongy, repeat the bleeding procedure again. If the brake pedal still feels spongy after repeating the bleeding procedure, perform the following steps: Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Antilock Brake Automated Bleed Procedure > Page 1566 1. Inspect the brake system for external leaks. Refer to Brake System External Leak Inspection (See: Brakes and Traction Control/Hydraulic System/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Brake System External Leak Inspection). 2. Pressure bleed the hydraulic brake system in order to purge any air that may still be trapped in the system. 22. Turn the ignition key ON, with the engine OFF. Check to see if the brake system warning lamp remains illuminated. Note: DO NOT allow the vehicle to be driven until it is diagnosed and repaired. 23. If the brake system warning lamp remains illuminated, refer to Diagnostic Starting Point Vehicle (See: Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Diagnostic Starting Point - Vehicle). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Antilock Brake Automated Bleed Procedure > Page 1567 Brake Bleeding: Service and Repair Hydraulic Brake Bleeding (Pressure) Hydraulic Brake System Bleeding (Pressure) Special Tools * J-29532 - Diaphragm Type Brake Pressure Bleeder, or equivalent * J-35589-A - Master Cylinder Bleeder Adapter For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Brakes and Traction Control/Hydraulic System/Tools and Equipment). Warning: Refer to Brake Fluid Irritant Warning (See: Brakes and Traction Control/Service Precautions/Technician Safety Information/Brake Fluid Irritant Warning). Caution: Refer to Brake Fluid Effects on Paint and Electrical Components Caution (See: Brakes and Traction Control/Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings). 1. Place a clean shop cloth beneath the brake master cylinder to prevent brake fluid spills. 2. With the ignition OFF and the brakes cool, apply the brakes 3-5 times, or until the brake pedal effort increases significantly, in order to deplete the brake booster power reserve. 3. If you have performed a brake master cylinder bench bleeding on this vehicle, or if you disconnected the brake pipes from the master cylinder, you must perform the following steps: 1. Ensure that the brake master cylinder reservoir is full to the maximum-fill level. If necessary, add GM approved brake fluid from a clean, sealed brake fluid container. Refer to Fluid and Lubricant Recommendations (USA and Canada) (See: ). If removal of the reservoir cap and diaphragm is necessary, clean the outside of the reservoir on and around the cap prior to removal. 2. With the rear brake pipe installed securely to the master cylinder, loosen and separate the front brake pipe from the front port of the brake master cylinder. 3. Allow a small amount of brake fluid to gravity bleed from the open port of the master cylinder. 4. Reconnect the brake pipe to the master cylinder port and tighten securely. 5. Have an assistant slowly depress the brake pedal fully and maintain steady pressure on the pedal. 6. Loosen the same brake pipe to purge air from the open port of the master cylinder. 7. Tighten the brake pipe, then have the assistant slowly release the brake pedal. 8. Wait 15 seconds, then repeat steps 3.3-3.7 until all air is purged from the same port of the master cylinder. 9. With the front brake pipe installed securely to the master cylinder, after all air has been purged from the front port of the master cylinder, loosen and separate the rear brake pipe from the master cylinder, then repeat steps 3.3-3.8. 10. After completing the final master cylinder port bleeding procedure, ensure that both of the brake pipe-to-master cylinder fittings are properly tightened. 4. Fill the brake master cylinder reservoir to the maximum-fill level with GM approved brake fluid from a clean, sealed brake fluid container. Refer to Master Cylinder Reservoir Filling (See: Brakes and Traction Control/Hydraulic System/Brake Master Cylinder/Service and Repair/Procedures/Master Cylinder Reservoir Filling). Clean the outside of the reservoir on and around the reservoir cap prior to removing the cap and diaphragm. 5. Install the J-35589-A - Master Cylinder Bleeder Adapter to the brake master cylinder reservoir. 6. Check the brake fluid level in the J-29532 - Diaphragm Type Brake Pressure Bleeder, or equivalent , or equivalent. Add GM approved brake fluid from a clean, sealed brake fluid container as necessary to bring the level to approximately the half-full point. 7. Connect the J-29532 - Diaphragm Type Brake Pressure Bleeder, or equivalent , or equivalent, to the J-35589-A - Master Cylinder Bleeder Adapter. 8. Charge the J-29532 - Diaphragm Type Brake Pressure Bleeder, or equivalent , or equivalent, air tank to 175-205 kPa (25-30 psi). 9. Open the J-29532 - Diaphragm Type Brake Pressure Bleeder, or equivalent , or equivalent, fluid tank valve to allow pressurized brake fluid to enter the brake system. 10. Wait approximately 30 seconds, then inspect the entire hydraulic brake system in order to ensure that there are no existing external brake fluid leaks. Any brake fluid leaks identified require repair prior to completing this procedure. 11. Install a proper box-end wrench onto the RIGHT REAR wheel hydraulic circuit bleeder valve. 12. Install a transparent hose over the end of the bleeder valve. 13. Submerge the open end of the transparent hose into a transparent container partially filled with GM approved brake fluid from a clean, sealed brake fluid container. 14. Loosen the bleeder valve to purge air from the wheel hydraulic circuit. Allow fluid to flow until air bubbles stop flowing from the bleeder, then tighten the bleeder valve. 15. With the right rear wheel hydraulic circuit bleeder valve tightened securely, after all air has been purged from the right rear hydraulic circuit, install a proper box-end wrench onto the LEFT FRONT wheel hydraulic circuit bleeder valve. 16. Install a transparent hose over the end of the bleeder valve, then repeat steps 13-14. 17. With the left front wheel hydraulic circuit bleeder valve tightened securely, after all air has been purged from the left front hydraulic circuit, install a proper box-end wrench onto the LEFT REAR wheel hydraulic circuit bleeder valve. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Antilock Brake Automated Bleed Procedure > Page 1568 18. Install a transparent hose over the end of the bleeder valve, then repeat steps 13-14. 19. With the left rear wheel hydraulic circuit bleeder valve tightened securely, after all air has been purged from the left rear hydraulic circuit, install a proper box-end wrench onto the RIGHT FRONT wheel hydraulic circuit bleeder valve 20. Install a transparent hose over the end of the bleeder valve, then repeat steps 13-14. 21. After completing the final wheel hydraulic circuit bleeding procedure, ensure that each of the 4 wheel hydraulic circuit bleeder valves are properly tightened. 22. Close the J-29532 - Diaphragm Type Brake Pressure Bleeder, or equivalent , or equivalent, fluid tank valve, then disconnect the J-29532 Diaphragm Type Brake Pressure Bleeder, or equivalent , or equivalent, from the J-35589-A Master Cylinder Bleeder Adapter. 23. Remove the J-35589-A - Master Cylinder Bleeder Adapter from the brake master cylinder reservoir. 24. Fill the brake master cylinder reservoir to the maximum-fill level with GM approved brake fluid from a clean, sealed brake fluid container. 25. Slowly depress and release the brake pedal. Observe the feel of the brake pedal. Note: If it is determined that air was induced into the system upstream of the ABS modulator prior to servicing, the Antilock Brake System Automated Bleed (See: ) must be performed. 26. If the brake pedal feels spongy, perform the following steps: 1. Inspect the brake system for external leaks. Refer to Brake System External Leak Inspection (See: Brakes and Traction Control/Hydraulic System/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Brake System External Leak Inspection). 2. Using a scan tool, perform the antilock brake system automated bleeding procedure to remove any air that may have been trapped in the brake pressure modulator valve (BPMV). Refer to Antilock Brake System Automated Bleed (See: ). 27. Turn the ignition key ON, with the engine OFF. Check to see if the brake system warning lamp remains illuminated. Note: DO NOT allow the vehicle to be driven until it is diagnosed and repaired. 28. If the brake system warning lamp remains illuminated, refer to Diagnostic Starting Point Vehicle (See: Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Diagnostic Starting Point - Vehicle). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Antilock Brake Automated Bleed Procedure > Page 1569 Brake Bleeding: Service and Repair Hydraulic Brake Flushing Hydraulic Brake System Flushing Warning: Refer to Brake Fluid Irritant Warning (See: Brakes and Traction Control/Service Precautions/Technician Safety Information/Brake Fluid Irritant Warning). Caution: Refer to Brake Fluid Effects on Paint and Electrical Components Caution (See: Brakes and Traction Control/Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings). 1. Inspect the brake fluid for the following conditions, indicating brake fluid contamination: * Fluid separation, indicating 2 types of fluid are present; a substance other than the recommended brake fluid has been introduced into the brake hydraulic system - Swirled appearance - oil-based substance - Layered appearance - silicone-based substance * Fluid discoloration, indicating the presence of moisture or particles that have been introduced into the brake hydraulic system - Cloudy appearance - moisture - Dark appearance/suspended particles in fluid - dirt, rust, corrosion, brake dust 2. Inspect the master cylinder reservoir cap diaphragm and the reservoir-to-master cylinder grommets for swelling, indicating brake fluid contamination. 3. If the brake fluid WAS contaminated with an oil-based or a silicone-based substance, indicated by fluid separation and/or a swollen master cylinder reservoir cap diaphragm and/or swollen reservoir-to-master cylinder grommets, perform the following: 1. Remove ALL of the following components listed from the vehicle. Each component contains internal rubber seals/linings which have been contaminated by the contaminated brake fluid in the brake hydraulic system. Refer to the procedures indicated: * Master Cylinder Replacement (See: Brakes and Traction Control/Hydraulic System/Brake Master Cylinder/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement) * Front Brake Hose Replacement (See: Brakes and Traction Control/Hydraulic System/Brake Hose/Line/Service and Repair/Front Brake Hose Replacement) * Rear Brake Hose Replacement (See: Brakes and Traction Control/Hydraulic System/Brake Hose/Line/Service and Repair/Rear Brake Hose Replacement) * Front Brake Caliper Replacement (See: Brakes and Traction Control/Disc Brake System/Brake Caliper/Service and Repair/Front Brake Caliper Replacement) * Rear Brake Caliper Replacement (See: Brakes and Traction Control/Disc Brake System/Brake Caliper/Service and Repair/Rear Brake Caliper Replacement) * Brake Pressure Modulator Valve Replacement (See: Brakes and Traction Control/Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems/Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes/Service and Repair/Brake Pressure Modulator Valve Replacement) 2. Clean out all the hydraulic brake pipes using denatured alcohol, or equivalent. 3. Dry the brake pipes using non-lubricated, filtered air. 4. Repair or replace ALL of the following components listed and install them to the vehicle. Each component contains internal rubber seals/linings which have been contaminated by the contaminated brake fluid in the brake hydraulic system. Refer to the procedures indicated: * Master Cylinder Replacement (See: Brakes and Traction Control/Hydraulic System/Brake Master Cylinder/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement); also perform the following: Clean the brake master cylinder reservoir using denatured alcohol, or equivalent, then dry the reservoir using non-lubricated, filtered air. Inspect the reservoir for cracks and/or damage and replace if necessary. Refer to Master Cylinder Reservoir Replacement (See: Brakes and Traction Control/Hydraulic System/Brake Fluid Reservoir/Service and Repair). Replace the brake master cylinder reservoir cap diaphragm. * Front Brake Hose Replacement (See: Brakes and Traction Control/Hydraulic System/Brake Hose/Line/Service and Repair/Front Brake Hose Replacement) * Rear Brake Hose Replacement (See: Brakes and Traction Control/Hydraulic System/Brake Hose/Line/Service and Repair/Rear Brake Hose Replacement) * Front Brake Caliper Replacement (See: Brakes and Traction Control/Disc Brake System/Brake Caliper/Service and Repair/Front Brake Caliper Replacement) * Rear Brake Caliper Replacement (See: Brakes and Traction Control/Disc Brake System/Brake Caliper/Service and Repair/Rear Brake Caliper Replacement) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Antilock Brake Automated Bleed Procedure > Page 1570 * Brake Pressure Modulator Valve Replacement (See: Brakes and Traction Control/Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems/Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes/Service and Repair/Brake Pressure Modulator Valve Replacement) 4. If the brake fluid was NOT contaminated with an oil-based or a silicone-based substance, but WAS contaminated with water or dirt, rust, corrosion, and/or brake dust, replace the brake master cylinder reservoir cap diaphragm. The diaphragm may have allowed the moisture or particles to enter the hydraulic system. 5. Fill the brake master cylinder reservoir to the maximum-fill level with approved brake fluid from a clean, sealed brake fluid container as specified in the owners manual. 6. Pressure bleed the hydraulic brake system. Begin the procedure with the pressure bleeder reservoir filled to the maximum-fill level with the correct brake fluid as indicated. Refer to Hydraulic Brake System Bleeding (Manual) (See: )Hydraulic Brake System Bleeding (Pressure) (See: ). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Diagrams Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Diagrams P14 Passenger Air Bag Disable Indicator Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Diagrams > Page 1574 Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair SIR Disabling and Enabling SIR component location affects how a vehicle should be serviced. There are parts of the SIR system installed in various locations around a vehicle. To find the location of the SIR components refer to SIR Identification Views (See: Restraint Systems/Air Bag Systems/Locations). There are several reasons for disabling the SIR system, such as repairs to the SIR system or servicing a component near or attached to an SIR component. There are several ways to disable the SIR system depending on what type of service is being performed. The following information covers the proper procedures for disabling/enabling the SIR system. SIR Service Precautions Warning When performing service on or near the SIR components or the SIR wiring, the SIR system must be disabled. Failure to observe the correct procedure could cause deployment of the SIR components. Serious injury can occur. Failure to observe the correct procedure could also result in unnecessary SIR system repairs. The inflatable restraint sensing and diagnostic module (SDM) maintains a reserved energy supply. The reserved energy supply provides deployment power for the air bags if the SDM loses battery power during a collision. Deployment power is available for as much as 1 minute after disconnecting the vehicle power. Waiting 1 minute before working on the system after disabling the SIR system prevents deployment of the air bags from the reserved energy supply. General Service Instructions The following are general service instructions which must be followed in order to properly repair the vehicle and return it to its original integrity: * Do not expose air bags to temperatures above 65°C (149°F). * Verify the correct replacement part number. Do not substitute a component from a different vehicle. * Use only original GM replacement parts available from your authorized GM dealer. Do not use salvaged parts for repairs to the SIR system. Discard any of the following components if it has been dropped from a height of 92 cm (3 feet) or greater: * Inflatable restraint sensing and diagnostic module (SDM) * Any air bag * Driver steering wheel air bag coil * Any impact sensor * Seat belt anchor and/or retractor pretensioners * Passenger presence module and/or occupant sensor Disabling Procedure - Air Bag Fuse 1. Turn the steering wheel so that the vehicles wheels are pointing straight ahead. 2. Place the ignition in the OFF position. Note: The SDM may have more than one fused power input. To ensure there is no unwanted SIR deployment, personal injury, or unnecessary SIR system repairs, remove all fuses supplying power to the SDM. With all SDM fuses removed and the ignition switch in the ON position, the AIR BAG warning indicator illuminates. This is normal operation, and does not indicate a SIR system malfunction. 3. Locate and remove the fuse(s) supplying power to the SDM. Refer to SIR Schematics (See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Air Bag Systems) or Electrical Center Identification Views (See: Fuses and Circuit Breakers/Fuse/Application and ID). 4. Wait 1 minute before working on the system. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Diagrams > Page 1575 Enabling Procedure - Air Bag Fuse 1. Place the ignition in the OFF position. 2. Install the fuse(s) supplying power to the SDM. Refer to SIR Schematics (See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Air Bag Systems) or Electrical Center Identification Views (See: Fuses and Circuit Breakers/Fuse/Application and ID). 3. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position. The AIR BAG indicator will flash then turn OFF. 4. Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle if the AIR BAG warning indicator does not operate as described. Refer to Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle (See: Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle). Disabling Procedure - Negative Battery Cable 1. Turn the steering wheel so that the vehicles wheels are pointing straight ahead. 2. Place the ignition in the OFF position. 3. Disconnect the negative battery cable from the battery. Refer to Battery Negative Cable Disconnection and Connection (See: Starting and Charging/Battery/Battery Cable/Negative/Service and Repair/Battery Negative Cable Disconnection and Connection). 4. Wait 1 minute before working on system. Enabling Procedure - Negative Battery Cable 1. Place the ignition in the OFF position. 2. Connect the negative battery cable to the battery. Refer to Battery Negative Cable Disconnection and Connection (See: Starting and Charging/Battery/Battery Cable/Negative/Service and Repair/Battery Negative Cable Disconnection and Connection). 3. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position. The AIR BAG indicator will flash then turn OFF. 4. Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle if the AIR BAG warning indicator does not operate as described. Refer to Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle (See: Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Engine Compartment Fuse Block - Owners Manual Fuse: Locations Engine Compartment Fuse Block - Owners Manual ENGINE COMPARTMENT FUSE BLOCK Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Engine Compartment Fuse Block - Owners Manual > Page 1581 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Engine Compartment Fuse Block - Owners Manual > Page 1582 To remove the fuse block cover, squeeze the clips on the cover and lift it straight up. The vehicle may not be equipped with all of the fuses and relays shown. Notice: Spilling liquid on any electrical components on the vehicle may damage it. Always keep the covers on any electrical component. Engine Compartment Fuse Block J-Case Fuses ...................................................................................................................................... ......................................................................... Usage Fuse 1 .................................................................................................................................................. ............................................................. Cool Fan 1 Fuse 2 ................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................. Cool Fan 2 Fuse 3 ............................................................................................................................................... ................................................................ Rear Defog Fuse 4 ............................................................. .............................................................................................................................. Power Windows Right Fuse 5 ........................................................................................................................................ ...................................................... Memory Seat Module Fuse 6 ....................................................... .............................................................................................................................................. Power Seat - Left Fuse 7 ................................................................................................................................ ................................................ Instrument Panel Fuse Block 1 Fuse 8 ............................................... ................................................................................................................................. Instrument Panel Fuse Block 2 Fuse 9 ............................................................................................................................ .......................................................................................... Starter Fuse 10 ......................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. . Brake Booster Fuse 11 ...................................................................................................................... ............................................................................................ Sunroof Fuse 12 ..................................... ........................................................................................................................................... Antilock Brake System Pump Fuse 13 .............................................................................................................. ................................................................ Instrument Panel Fuse Block 3 Fuse 14 ............................. .............................................................................................................................................................. Power Windows - Left Fuse 15 ............................................................................................................ ................................................................. Antilock Brake System Module Mini Fuses ........................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................ Usage Fuse 16 ................................................................................................................................................ ................... Transmission Control Module Battery Fuse 17 ............................................................... .............................................................................................................................. Trailer Parking Light Fuse 18 ....................................................................................................................................... ...................................... Engine Control Module Battery Fuse 19 ....................................................... ................................................................................................................................................. Heated Mirror Fuse 20 ..................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................ Trailer Left Fuse 21 .................................................... ............................................................................................................................................... Lift Gate Module Fuse 22 ................................................................................................................................... .................................................................... Power Lumbar Fuse 23 .................................................. ........................................................................................................................................................ Trailer Right Fuse 24 ........................................................................................................................... .............................................................................. Canister Vent Fuse 25 .......................................... .............................................................................................................................................. Memory Mirror Module Fuse 26 ............................................................................................................................................................ Regulated Voltage Control Battery Sensor Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Engine Compartment Fuse Block - Owners Manual > Page 1583 Fuse 27 ................................................................................................................................................ ................................ Rear Accessory Power Outlet Fuse 28 .............................................................. ....................................................................................................................................................... Wiper Fuse 29 ..................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................ Rear Wiper Fuse 30 ................................................... ............................................................................................................................. Air Conditioning Compressor Fuse 31 ........................................................................................................................... ................................................................................... Rear Latch Fuse 32 ......................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ................ Horn Fuse 33 ...................................................................................................................... ............................................................ Right High-Beam Headlamp Fuse 34 ..................................... ............................................................................................................................................... Left High-Beam Headlamp Fuse 35 ........................................................................................................... ....................................................................................... Ignition Even Coil Fuse 36 ........................... .............................................................................................................................................................. .......... Ignition Odd Coil Fuse 37 ......................................................................................................... ....................................................................................... Windshield Washer Fuse 38 ........................ .............................................................................................................................................................. .............. Front Fog Lamps Fuse 39 .................................................................................................... ........................................................... Post Catalytic Converter Oxygen Sensor Fuse 40 .................. .............................................................................................................................................................. ......... Engine Control Module Fuse 41 ................................................................................................ ................................................................ Pre-Catalytic Converter Oxygen Sensor Fuse 42 .............. .............................................................................................................................................................. ... Transmission Control Module Fuse 43 ............................................................................................ ........................................................................................................................ Mirror Fuse 44 ............ .............................................................................................................................................................. . Chassis Control Module Ignition Fuse 45 .......................................................................................... ............................................................................................................................ Spare Fuse 46 ........ .............................................................................................................................................................. .......................... Rear Drive Module Fuse 47 ...................................................................................... ................................................................................................... Lift Gate Module Logic Fuse 48 ....... ............................................................................................................................................................. Instrument Panel Fuse Block Ignition Fuse 49 .................................................................................... ............................................................................................................ Heated Seat - Front Fuse 50 .. .............................................................................................................................................................. ......................... Chassis Control Module Fuse 51 .............................................................................. ........................................................................................................... Engine Control Module Fuse 52 ......................................................................................................................................................... ...................................... Rear Vision Camera Midi Fuse ............................................................................................................................................. ....................................................................... Usage Fuse 53 ................................................................................................................................................ ......................................... Electric Power Steering Micro Relays ........................................................................................................................................ ....................................................................... Usage Relay 54 .............................................................................................................................................. ........................................................ Rear Defogger Relay 55 ............................................................. .................................................................................................................................... Cooling Fan Low Relay 56 ....................................................................................................................................... ................................................. Head Lamp High Beam Relay 57 ...................................................... ....................................................................................................................................... Cooling Fan Control Relay 58 .................................................................................................................................. ........................................................ Wiper On/Off Control Relay 59 ................................................... ........................................................................................................................... Air Conditioning Compressor Relay 60 .......................................................................................................................... ............................................................................... Wiper Speed Relay 61 ......................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ...... Fog Lamp Relay 62 ...................................................................................................................... ............................................................................... Engine Control Relay 63 ...................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............... Starter Relay 64 ................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................... Run/Crank Mini Relays .......................................................................................................................................... ....................................................................... Usage Relay 65 .............................................................................................................................................. ................................................... Cooling Fan High Relay 66 .............................................................. ........................................................................................................................................ Brake Booster Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Engine Compartment Fuse Block - Owners Manual > Page 1584 Fuse: Locations Instrument Panel Fuse Block - Owners Manual INSTRUMENT PANEL FUSE BLOCK Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Engine Compartment Fuse Block - Owners Manual > Page 1585 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Engine Compartment Fuse Block - Owners Manual > Page 1586 The instrument panel fuse block is located on the passenger side panel of the center console. To access the fuses, open the fuse panel door from the passenger side by pulling it out. To reinstall the door, insert the tabs on the bottom of the door into the console first, then push the door back into its original location. The vehicle may not be equipped with all of the fuses and relays shown. Instrument Panel Fuse Block Mini Fuses ........................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................ Usage Fuse 1 .................................................................................................................................................. ............................................... Steering Wheel DM Fuse 2 ................................................................. ....................................................................................................................................................... Spare Fuse 3 ....................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................. Spare Fuse 4 ..................................................... ...................................................................................................................................... Body Control Module 1 Fuse 5 .................................................................................................................................. ........................................................................... Infotainment Fuse 6 ................................................. .......................................................................................................................................... Body Control Module 7 Fuse 7 ..................................................................................................................... ........................................................................ Noise Control Module Fuse 8 ..................................... ...................................................................................................................................................... Body Control Module 4 Fuse 9 ............................................................................................................ ........................................................................................................... Radio Fuse 10 ......................... .............................................................................................................................................................. .................... SEO Battery Fuse 11 ...................................................................................................... .............................................................. Ultrasonic Rear Parking Aid Module Fuse 12 ................................................................................................................................................. Heater, Ventilation and Air Conditioning Battery Fuse 13 ................................................................................ ........................................................................................................... Auxiliary Power Front Fuse 14 ................................................................................................................................................ Heater, Ventilation and Air Conditioning Ignition Fuse 15 ................................................................................ ................................................................................................................................... Display Fuse 16 .............................................................................................................................................................. ........................... Body Control Module 5 Fuse 17 .............................................................................. .............................................................................................................. Auxiliary Power Rear Fuse 18 ......................................................................................................................................................... ................. Instrument Panel Cluster Ignition Fuse 19 ........................................................................ ................................................................................................................................... PDI Module Fuse 20 ................................................................................................................................................ ......................................... Body Control Module 6 Fuse 21 ................................................................ ............................................................................................................ SEO Retained Accessory Power Fuse 22 .................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................... SDM Ignition Fuse 23 .................................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. .... Spare Fuse 24 ................................................................................................................................ ...................................................................................... Spare Fuse 25 .............................................. .............................................................................................................................................................. ...... PRNDL Fuse 26 ........................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................... Spare Fuse 27 ......................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............... Spare Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Engine Compartment Fuse Block - Owners Manual > Page 1587 Fuse 28 ................................................................................................................................................ ...................................................................... Spare Fuse 30 .............................................................. ........................................................................................................................... Body Control Module 3 Fuse 31 ............................................................................................................................................. .................................................................. Amplifier Fuse 32 .............................................................. ................................................................................................................ Discrete Logic Ignition Switch Fuse 33 .................................................................................................................................... ................................ Communications Integration Module Fuse 34 .................................................... ..................................................................................................................................... Body Control Module 2 Fuse 35 ................................................................................................................................ .......................................................................... SDM Battery Fuse 36 ............................................... ............................................................................................................................................. Data Link Connection Fuse 37 ............................................................................................................................ ............................................... Instrument Panel Cluster Battery Fuse 38 .............................................................................................................................................................. IOS Module (Passenger Sensing System) Fuse 39 ............................................................................ .......................................................................................................................................... Spare J-Case Fuses ...................................................................................................................................... ......................................................................... Usage Fuse 29 ................................................................................................................................................ ............................................... Front Blower Motor Fuse 40 ................................................................ ......................................................................................................................... Body Control Module 8 Relays .................................................................................................................................................. ........................................................................ Usage Relay 41 .............................................................................................................................................. ............................................................. LOG Relay Relay 42 .............................................................. ........................................................................................................... Retained Accessory Power Relay Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood Fuse: Application and ID Fuse Block - Underhood Electrical Center Identification Views X50A Fuse Block - Underhood, Label Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 1590 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 1591 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 1592 X50A Fuse Block - Underhood, Top View X50A Fuse Block - Underhood, Bottom View Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 1593 X50A Fuse Block - Underhood X1 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 1594 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 1595 X50A Fuse Block - Underhood X2 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 1596 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 1597 X50A Fuse Block - Underhood X3 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 1598 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 1599 X50A Fuse Block - Underhood X4 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 1600 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 1601 X50A Fuse Block - Underhood X5 X50A Fuse Block - Underhood X6 (LAF) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 1602 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 1603 Fuse: Application and ID Fuse Block - Instrument Panel Label Electrical Center Identification Views X51A Fuse Block - Instrument Panel Label (before A6284015) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 1604 X51A Fuse Block - Instrument Panel Label (A6284015 and after) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 1605 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 1606 X51A Fuse Block - Instrument Panel, Top View X51A Fuse Block - Instrument Panel, Bottom View Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 1607 X51A Fuse Block - Instrument Panel Wire Entry Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 1608 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 1609 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 1610 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Instrument Panel/Center Console Component Views Fuse Block: Locations Instrument Panel/Center Console Component Views Instrument Panel/Center Console Component Views Lower Right of the Instrument Panel Components 1 - K33 HVAC Control Module 2 - F105 Passenger Instrument Panel Air Bag 3 - X51A Fuse Block Instrument Panel Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Instrument Panel/Center Console Component Views > Page 1615 Fuse Block: Locations Front of Vehicle/Engine Compartment Component Views Front of Vehicle/Engine Compartment Component Views Engine Compartment Components (Chevrolet) 1 - B20 Brake Fluid Level Switch 2 - B19B Brake Booster Vacuum Sensor 3 - M75 Windshield Wiper Motor 4 - X50A Fuse Block - Underhood 5 - C1 Battery 6 - G24 Windshield Washer Pump 7 - B55 Hood Ajar Switch (BTV) 8 - P12B Horn - Low Note 9 - P12A Horn - High Note 10 - K17 Electronic Brake Control Module Engine Compartment Components (GMC) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Instrument Panel/Center Console Component Views > Page 1616 1 - B20 Brake Fluid Level Switch 2 - B19B Brake Booster Vacuum Sensor 3 - M75 Windshield Wiper Motor 4 - X50A Fuse Block - Underhood 5 - C1 Battery 6 - G24 Windshield Washer Pump 7 - P12B Horn - Low Note 8 - B55 Hood Ajar Switch (BTV) 9 - K17 Electronic Brake Control Module 10 - P12A Horn - High Note Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Fuse Block: Diagram Information and Instructions Electrical Schematic Symbols Electrical Schematic Symbols Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1619 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1620 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1621 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1622 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1623 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1624 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1625 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1626 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1627 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1628 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1629 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1630 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1631 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1632 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1633 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1634 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1635 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1636 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1637 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1638 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1639 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1640 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1641 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1642 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1643 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1644 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1645 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1646 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1647 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1648 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1649 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1650 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1651 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1652 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1653 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1654 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1655 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1656 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1657 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1658 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1659 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1660 General Electrical Diagnosis General Electrical Diagnosis Basic Knowledge Required Without a basic knowledge of electricity, it will be difficult to use the diagnostic procedures contained in the service manual. You should understand the basic theory of electricity, and know the meaning of voltage (V), current (A), and resistance (Ohms ). You should also be able to read and understand a wiring diagram, as well as understand what happens in a circuit with an open or a shorted wire. Vehicle Zoning Strategy Vehicle Zoning Strategy All grounds, in-line connectors, and splices have identifying numbers that correspond to where they are located in the vehicle. The following table explains the numbering system. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1661 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1662 Fuse Block: Diagnostic Aids Arrows and Symbols Arrows and Symbols This service manual uses various symbols in order to describe different service operations. 1 - Front of Vehicle 2 - View Detail 2 - View Detail 3 - Ambient Air Mixed with Another Gas or Indicate Temperature Change 4 - Motion or Direction 5 - View Angle 6 - Dimension (1:2) 7 Ambient/Clean Air Flow or Cool Air Flow 8 - Lubrication Point - Oil or Fluid 9 - Task Related 10 Sectioning (1:3) 11 - Gas Other Than Ambient Air or Hot Air Flow 12 - Lubrication Point - Grease or Jelly 13 - Multidirectional Arrow Decimal and Metric Equivalents Decimal and Metric Equivalents Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1663 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1664 Checking Aftermarket Accessories Checking Aftermarket Accessories Warning: Refer to SIR Warning (See: Restraint Systems/Service Precautions/SIR Warning). Caution: The OBD II symbol is used on the circuit diagrams in order to alert the technician that the circuit is essential for proper OBD II emission control circuit operation. Any circuit which fails and causes the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) to turn ON, or causes emissions-related component damage, is identified as an OBD II circuit. Do not connect aftermarket accessories into the following circuits: * SIR circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the SIR symbol. * OBD II circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the OBD II symbol. Always check for aftermarket accessories (non-OEM) as the first step in diagnosing electrical problems. If the vehicle is so equipped, disconnect the system to verify that these add-on accessories are not the cause of the problems. Possible causes of vehicle problems related to aftermarket accessories include: * Power feeds connected to points other than the battery * Antenna location * Transceiver wiring located too close to vehicle electronic modules or wiring * Poor shielding or poor connectors on antenna feed line * Check for recent service bulletins detailing installation guidelines for aftermarket accessories. Circuit Testing Circuit Testing The Circuit Testing section contains the following diagnostic testing information. Using this information along with the diagnostic procedures will identify the cause of the electrical malfunction. * Using Connector Test Adapters (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Using Connector Test Adapters) * Probing Electrical Connectors (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Probing Electrical Connectors) * Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1665 Procedures/Circuit Testing/Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter) * Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp) * Using Fused Jumper Wires (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Using Fused Jumper Wires) * Measuring Voltage (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Measuring Voltage) * Measuring Voltage Drop (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Measuring Voltage Drop) * Measuring Frequency (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Measuring Frequency) * Testing Ground and Low Reference Circuits (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Testing Ground and Low Reference Circuits) * Testing for Continuity (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Continuity) * Testing for Short to Ground (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Short to Ground) * Testing for a Short to Voltage (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for a Short to Voltage) * Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections) * Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions) * Testing for Electrical Intermittents (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Electrical Intermittents) * Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure) * Circuit Protection - Fuses (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Circuit Protection - Fuses) * Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers) * Circuit Protection - Fusible Links (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Circuit Protection - Fusible Links) Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp Special Tools EL-35616-200 - Test Light - Probe Kit For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test Probe Caution). A test lamp can simply and quickly test a low impedance circuit for voltage. A Digital Multimeter (DMM) should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present if the impedance is low enough, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. In other words, if there is not enough current, the test lamp will not illuminate even though voltage is present. The EL-35616-200 - kit is Micro-Pack compatible and comprised of a 12-volt light bulb with an attached pair of leads. To properly operate this tool use the following procedures. When testing for voltage: 1. Attach one lead to ground. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is voltage at the point being tested. When testing for ground: 1. Attach one lead to battery positive voltage. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where ground should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is ground at the point being tested. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1666 Testing for a Short to Voltage Testing for a Short to Voltage Special Tools EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM) For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test Probe Caution). The following procedure tests for a short to voltage in a circuit. 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Set the rotary dial of the Digital Multimeter (DMM) to the V (DC) position. 4. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. Turn ON the ignition and operate all accessories. 7. If the voltage measured is greater than 1 V, there is a short to voltage in the circuit. Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions Special Tools J-25070 - Heat Gun For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Many intermittent open or shorted circuits are affected by harness/connector movement that is caused by vibration, engine torque, bumps/rough pavement, etc. In order to duplicate the customer's concern, it may be necessary to manipulate the wiring harness if the malfunction appears to be vibration related. Manipulation of a circuit can consist of a wide variety of actions, including: * Wiggling the harness * Disconnecting a connector and reconnecting * Stressing the mechanical connection of a connector * Pulling on the harness or wire in order to identify a separation/break inside the insulation * Relocating a harness or wires All these actions should be performed with some goal in mind. For instance, with a scan tool connected, wiggling the wires may uncover a faulty input to the control module. The snapshot option would be appropriate here. Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure). Another option is, with the component commanded ON and OFF by the scan tool, move related connectors and wiring and observe the component operation. With the engine running, move related connectors and wiring while monitoring engine operation. If harness or connector movement affects the data displayed, component/system operation, or engine operation, inspect and repair the harness/connections as necessary. You may need to load the vehicle in order to duplicate the concern. This may require the use of weights, floor jacks, jackstands, frame machines, etc. In these cases you are attempting to duplicate the concern by manipulating the suspension or frame. This method is useful in finding harnesses that are too short and their connectors pull apart enough to cause a poor connection. A DMM set to Peak Min/Max mode and connected to the suspect circuit while testing can yield desirable results. Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Electrical Intermittents). Certainly, using the senses of sight, smell, and hearing while manipulating the circuit can provide good results as well. There may be instances where circuit manipulation alone will not meet the required criteria for the fault condition to appear. In such cases it may be necessary to expose the suspect circuit to other conditions while manipulating the harness. Such conditions would include high moisture conditions, along with exceptionally high or low temperatures. The following discusses how to expose the circuit to these kinds of conditions. Salt Water Spray Some compounds possess the ability to conduct electricity when dissolved in water such as ordinary salt. By mixing table salt with water in sufficient Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1667 quantities, you can enhance the conductive properties of water so that any circuit which may be sensitive to moisture will more readily fail when liberally sprayed with this mixture. Mixing 0.35L (12 oz) of water with approximately 1 tablespoon of salt will yield a salt solution of 5 percent. Fill a normal spray bottle with this mixture. This mixture is sufficient to enhance the water's own conductivity. This may cause the circuit to fail more easily when sprayed. Once the mixture is completed, spray the suspect area liberally with the solution. Then, while monitoring either a scan tool or DMM, manipulate the harness as discussed previously. High Temperature Conditions If the complaint tends to be heat related, you can simulate the condition using the J-25070 - heat gun. Using the heat gun, you can heat up the suspected area or component. Manipulate the harnesses under high temperature conditions while monitoring the scan tool or DMM to locate the fault condition. The high temperature condition may be achieved simply by test driving the vehicle at normal operating temperature. If a heat gun is unavailable, consider this option to enhance your diagnosis. This option does not allow for the same control, however. Low Temperature Conditions Depending on the nature of the fault condition, placing a fan in front of the vehicle while the vehicle is in the shade can have the desired effect. If this is unsuccessful, use local cooling treatments such as ice or a venturi type nozzle (one that provides hot or cold air). This type of tool is capable of producing air stream temperatures down to -18°C (0°F) from one end and +71°C (160°F) from the other. This is ideally suited for localized cooling needs. Once the vehicle, component, or harness has been sufficiently cooled, manipulate the harness or components in an effort to duplicate the concern. Duplicating Failure Conditions * If none of the previous tests are successful, attempt to duplicate and/or capture the failure conditions. * Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, where applicable, contains the conditions that were present when the DTC set. 1. Review and record Freeze Frame/Failure Records data. 2. Clear the DTCs using the scan tool. 3. Turn the key to OFF and wait 15 seconds. 4. Operate the vehicle under the same conditions that were noted in Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, as closely as possible. The vehicle must also be operating within the Conditions for Running the DTC. Refer to Conditions for Running the DTC in the supporting text if a DTC is being diagnosed. 5. Monitor DTC Status for the DTC being tested. The scan tool will indicate Ran, when the enabling conditions have been satisfied long enough for the DTC to run. The scan tool will also indicate whether the DTC passed or failed. * An alternate method is to drive the vehicle with the DMM connected to a suspected circuit. An abnormal reading on the DMM when the concern occurs, may help you locate the concern. Measuring Frequency Measuring Frequency Special Tools EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM) For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test Probe Caution). The following procedure determines the frequency of a signal. Note: Connecting the Digital Multimeter (DMM) to the circuit before pressing the Hz button will allow the DMM to autorange to an appropriate range. 1. Apply power to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (AC) position. 3. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1668 5. Press the Hz button on the DMM. 6. The DMM will display the frequency measured. Measuring Voltage Measuring Voltage Special Tools EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM) For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test Probe Caution). The following procedure measures the voltage at a selected point in a circuit. 1. Disconnect the electrical harness connector for the circuit being tested, if necessary. 2. Enable the circuit and/or system being tested. Use the following methods: * Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. * Turn ON the engine. * Turn ON the circuit and/or system with a scan tool in Output Controls. * Turn ON the switch for the circuit and/or system being tested. 3. Select the V (AC) or V (DC) position on the Digital Multimeter (DMM). 4. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the point of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. The DMM displays the voltage measured at that point. Measuring Voltage Drop Measuring Voltage Drop Special Tools EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM) For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test Probe Caution). The following procedure determines the difference in voltage potential between 2 points. 1. Set the rotary dial of the Digital Multimeter (DMM) to the V (DC) position. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1669 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to one point of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to the other point of the circuit. 4. Operate the circuit. 5. The DMM displays the difference in voltage between the 2 points. Probing Electrical Connectors Probing Electrical Connectors Note: Always be sure to reinstall the connector position assurance (CPA) and terminal position assurance (TPA) when reconnecting connectors or replacing terminals. Front probe Disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the mating side (front) of the connector. Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test Probe Caution). Note: When probing female 0.64 terminals, it is important to use the correct adapter. There have been some revisions to the test adapter for 0.64 terminals. The proper adapter for 0.64 terminals is the EL-35616-64B which has a gold terminal and a black wire between the base and tip. Failure to use the proper test adapter may result in damage to the terminal being tested and improper diagnosis. Note: The proper adapter for probing the terminals for fuses, relays, or diodes in an electrical center is EL-35616-35. Using any other tool or adapter may damage the terminal being tested. Refer to the following table as a guide in selecting the correct test adapter for front probing connectors: Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1670 Backprobe Note: * Backprobe connector terminals only when specifically required in diagnostic procedures. * Do not backprobe a sealed (Weather Pack(R)) connector, less than a 280 series Metri-Pack connector, a Micro-Pack connector, or a flat wire (dock and lock) connector. * Backprobing can be a source of damage to connector terminals. Use care in order to avoid deforming the terminal, either by forcing the test probe too far into the cavity or by using too large of a test probe. * After backprobing any connector, inspect for terminal damage. If terminal damage is suspected, test for proper terminal contact. Do not disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the harness side (back) of the connector. Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure Using Snapshots in Global Diagnostic System (GDS) Overview Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1671 A snapshot is a recording of what a control module on the vehicle was receiving for information while the snapshot is being made. A snapshot may be used to analyze the data during the time a vehicle condition is current. This allows you to concentrate on making the condition occur, rather than trying to view all the data in anticipation of the fault. To record a snapshot in GDS, select, Record Snapshot, from the options at the top right portion of any of the various pages that allow snapshots to be taken (e.g. Data Display, Control Functions, etc.). When you are finished recording, select, Stop Snapshot recording. The snapshot will now be available for replay. Snapshot Replay The Snapshot Replay function allows reviews of previously recorded vehicle snapshot data. This information can be used in analysis of vehicle problems and detection of trigger error conditions. The graph function can be used to compare parameters to see if a component is functioning properly. Recorded snapshots can be selected for viewing by the following three methods: * Selecting a snapshot file from the Vehicle Home Page and clicking on the Review selection. * Double clicking on the selected snapshot from the Vehicle Home Page. * Entering the Tools selection from the Menu selection and selecting Snapshot replay. Next, open the Snapshot Manager. Double click on the snapshot file you wish to view or click on the Load Snapshot selection and select a snapshot file. Regardless of selection method, a File Loaded pop-up window will be displayed from the Snapshot Replay screen. Select OK from the pop-up window. Snapshot Play Functions There are several snapshot play functions that are used to replay recorded snapshots * The Play function is used to play the snapshot forward by clicking on this selection. A marker will move across the screen when this selection is used. All selections in this area turn grey when they are active. * The Pause function is used to pause play of the snapshot. When this selection is clicked a second time the snapshot will start playing where it left off. * The Stop function is used to stop playing the snapshot. The snapshot will start from the beginning, if Play is selected after using the Stop function. Time Control Time control is used to control the snapshot replay. This function allows selection of a specific time frame, display of different views, and control of display speed. The following functions can be selected directly under Time Control. * The Bookmark selection allows you to add a specific comment in the current display and return to this point in the future. When this option is selected, a pop-up window is displayed. Enter a bookmark name and select OK. * The Note Pad can be selected to add comments to the snapshot replay file at the current point of time. When this option is selected, a pop-up window is displayed. Enter a comment for the snapshot file and select OK. * The Load Snapshot (blue folder) opens a snapshot file and makes it ready for further analysis. This function is also available by clicking on an available snapshot file from the Snapshot Manager. * The Down Arrow displays all Time Control options when selected. Individual options can also be selected by clicking on the item you want. * The Snapshot Display Speed can be controlled by selecting this option. Slow speeds of 1/8X, 1/4X, and 1/2X can be selected. The real time speed can also be selected at 1. Faster speeds of 2X, 4X, and 8X can also be obtained by using this selection. View Selections Each View Selection provides a different way of displaying vehicle data for analysis. The following functions can be selected under Available Views: Note: The parameter name will be shown in the original language used for capture if no translation is available for the name. * Parameter List View - Displays incoming information from the snapshot file. The current value of the parameters is displayed on the screen. * Log View - Contains all the information from the snapshot file. All parameter values are listed in the order they were recorded. Specific parameters can be added or removed from a watchlist by clicking on the appropriate item. * State View - Shows the values of all parameters in a specific time frame. These values can be used for comparison with the trigger view. * Trigger View - Displays all system and user defined triggers. This function can be used when there is a combination of factors involved in a diagnostic problem. When a Trigger condition is met a caution triangle will be displayed on the screen. Triggers: * Load Triggers - Allows you to load a file containing trigger definitions. * Save Triggers - Allows you to save the trigger to your computer's hard drive. * Remove Trigger - Allows you to remove the current trigger. It will no longer be present. * Edit Trigger - Displays a pop-up window where you can modify the limits and parameters contained within a trigger. * Adds Trigger - Displays a pop-up window to configure a trigger. * DTC View - After the Play function is selected and this option is selected this function opens the list of recorded DTCs. * Line Graph View - Displays data that can be visualized against the time-axis. From this view, specific parameters can be selected for graphing by Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1672 checking the box under Selected. At the bottom of the graph there are four functions Zoom In (increase size), Zoom Out (decrease size), Bookmarks, and Pause Scrolling. Each of these functions can be accessed by clicking on them. Testing for Continuity Testing for Continuity Special Tools EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM) For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test Probe Caution). The following procedures verify good continuity in a circuit. With a Digital Multimeter (DMM) 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the Ohms position. 2. Disconnect the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 3. Disconnect the load. 4. Press the MIN MAX button on the DMM. 5. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 6. Connect the other lead of the DMM to the other end of the circuit. 7. If the DMM displays low or no resistance, the circuit has good continuity. With a Test Lamp Note: Only use the test lamp procedure on low impedance power and ground circuits. 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect one lead of the test lamp to one end of the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 5. Connect the other end of the circuit to ground. 6. If the test lamp illuminates (full intensity), then the circuit has good continuity. Testing for Electrical Intermittents Testing for Electrical Intermittents Special Tools EL-39200 Digital Multimeter For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Perform the following procedures while wiggling the harness from side to side. Continue this at convenient points (about 6 inches apart) while watching the test equipment. * Testing for Short to Ground (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Short to Ground) * Testing for Continuity (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Continuity) * Testing for a Short to Voltage (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for a Short to Voltage) If the fault is not identified, perform the procedure below using the MIN MAX feature on the EL-39200 DMM. This feature allows you to manipulate the circuit without having to watch the EL-39200. The EL-39200 will generate an audible tone when a change is detected. Note: The EL-39200 must be used in order to perform the following procedure since the EL-39200 can monitor current, resistance or voltage while recording the minimum (MIN), and maximum (MAX) values measured. 1. Connect the EL-39200 to both sides of a suspected connector (still connected), or from one end of a suspected circuit to the other. Refer to Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1673 Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter) for information on connecting the EL-39200 to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the EL-39200 to the V (AC) or V (DC) position. 3. Press the range button of the EL-39200 in order to select the desired voltage range. 4. Press the MIN MAX button of the EL-39200. The EL-39200 displays 100 ms RECORD and emits an audible tone (beep). Note: The 100 ms RECORD mode is the length of time an input must stay at a new value in order to record the full change. 5. Simulate the condition that is potentially causing the intermittent connection, either by wiggling the connections or the wiring, test driving, or performing other operations. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions). 6. Listen for the audible Min Max Alert which indicates that a new minimum or maximum value has been recorded. 7. Press the MIN MAX button once in order to display the MAX value and note the value. 8. Press the MIN MAX button again in order to display the MIN value and note the value. 9. Determine the difference between the MIN and MAX values. * If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is 1 V or greater an intermittent open or high resistance condition exists. Repair the condition as necessary. * If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is less than 1 V, an intermittent open or high resistance condition does not exist. Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections Special Tools EL-35616 Terminal Test Probe Kit For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). When the condition is not currently present, but is indicated in DTC history, the cause may be intermittent. An intermittent may also be the cause when there is a customer complaint, but the symptom cannot be duplicated. Refer to the Symptom Table of the system that is suspect of causing the condition before trying to locate an intermittent condition. Most intermittent conditions are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. Inspect for the following items: * Wiring broken inside the insulation * Poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector * Poor terminal to wire connection-Some conditions which fall under this description are poor crimps, poor solder joints, crimping over the wire insulation rather than the wire itself, and corrosion in the wire to terminal contact area, etc. * Pierced or damaged insulation can allow moisture to enter the wiring causing corrosion. The conductor can corrode inside the insulation, with little visible evidence. Look for swollen and stiff sections of wire in the suspect circuits. * Wiring which has been pinched, cut, or its insulation rubbed through may cause an intermittent open or short as the bare area touches other wiring or parts of the vehicle. * Wiring that comes in contact with hot or exhaust components * Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions) in order to duplicate the conditions required, in order to verify the customer concern. * Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Electrical Intermittents) for test procedures to detect intermittent open, high resistance, short to ground, and short to voltage conditions. * Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure) for advanced intermittent diagnosis and Vehicle Data Recorder operation. Testing for Terminal Fretting Some intermittent conditions can be caused by wire terminal fretting corrosion. Fretting corrosion is a build-up of insulating, oxidized wear debris that can form when there is a small motion between electrical contacts. The oxidized wear debris can pile up enough at the electrical contact spots that the electrical resistance across the connection increases. Movement between the contacting surfaces as small as 10 to 100 microns can cause fretting. To put this in perspective, a sheet of paper is about 100 microns thick, so fretting motion is small and hard to see. Vibration and thermal expansion/contraction are the main sources that create fretting motion. Since vehicles vibrate and can experience large temperature swings, they are a good source for fretting motion. Tin, copper, nickel, and iron surfaces are all susceptible to fretting corrosion. Fretting corrosion can be difficult to see but it looks like small, dark smudges on the terminals contact surface. To correct a fretting condition disconnect the suspect connector and add Nyogel lubricant 760G (dielectric grease) to both sides of the connector Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1674 terminals. Then reconnect the connector and wipe away any excess lubricant. This will correct the additional terminal contact resistance due to the terminal fretting corrosion. Testing for Proper Terminal Contact It is important to test terminal contact at the component and any inline connectors before replacing a suspect component. Mating terminals must be inspected to ensure good terminal contact. A poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector may be the result of contamination or deformation. Contamination may be caused by the connector halves being improperly connected. A missing or damaged connector seal, damage to the connector itself, or exposing the terminals to moisture and dirt can also cause contamination. Contamination, usually in the underhood or underbody connectors, leads to terminal corrosion, causing an open circuit or intermittently open circuit. Deformation is caused by probing the mating side of a connector terminal without the proper adapter. Always use the EL-35616 when probing connectors. Other causes of terminal deformation are improperly joining the connector halves, or repeatedly separating and joining the connector halves. Deformation, usually to the female terminal contact tang, can result in poor terminal contact causing an open or intermittently open circuit. Testing for Proper Terminal Contact in Bussed Electrical Centers It is very important to use the correct test adapter when testing for proper terminal contact of fuses and relays in a bussed electrical center. Use EL-35616-35 to test for proper terminal contact. Failure to use EL-35616-35 can result in improper diagnosis of the bussed electrical center. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact: 1. Separate the connector halves. 2. Visually inspect the connector halves for contamination. Contamination may result in a white or green build-up within the connector body or between terminals. This causes high terminal resistance, intermittent contact, or an open circuit. An underhood or underbody connector that shows signs of contamination should be replaced in its entirety: terminals, seals, and connector body. 3. Using an equivalent male terminal / terminated lead, verify that the retention force is significantly different between a known good terminal and the suspect terminal. Replace the female terminal in question. Flat Wire (Dock and Lock) Connectors There are no serviceable parts for flat wire (dock and lock) connectors on the harness side or the component side. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact: 1. Remove the component in question. 2. Visually inspect each side of the connector for signs of contamination. Avoid touching either side of the connector as oil from your skin may be a source of contamination as well. 3. Visually inspect the terminal bearing surfaces of the flat wire circuits for splits, cracks, or other imperfections that could cause poor terminal contact. Visually inspect the component side connector to ensure that all of the terminals are uniform and free of damage or deformation. 4. Insert the appropriate adapter from the on the flat wire harness connector in order to test the circuit in question. Control Module/Component Voltage and Grounds Poor voltage or ground connections can cause widely varying symptoms. * Test all control module voltage supply circuits. Many vehicles have multiple circuits supplying voltage to a control module. Other components in the system may have separate voltage supply circuits that may also need to be tested. Inspect connections at the module/component connectors, fuses, and any intermediate connections between the voltage source and the module/component. A test lamp or a DMM may indicate that voltage is present, but neither tests the ability of the circuit to carry sufficient current. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. Refer to Circuit Testing (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Circuit Testing) and Power Distribution Schematics (See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Starting and Charging/Power and Ground Distribution/System Diagram/Power Distribution Schematics). * Test all control module ground and system ground circuits. The control module may have multiple ground circuits. Other components in the system may have separate grounds that may also need to be tested. Inspect grounds for clean and tight connections at the grounding point. Inspect the connections at the component and in splice packs, where applicable. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. Refer to Circuit Testing (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Circuit Testing) and Ground Distribution Schematics (See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Starting and Charging/Power and Ground Distribution/System Diagram/Ground Distribution Schematics). Temperature Sensitivity * An intermittent condition may occur when a component/connection reaches normal operating temperature. The condition may occur only when the component/connection is cold, or only when the component/connection is hot. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1675 * Freeze Frame, Failure Records, Snapshot, or Vehicle Data Recorder data may help with this type of intermittent condition, where applicable. * If the intermittent is related to heat, review the data for a relationship with the following: - High ambient temperatures - Underhood/engine generated heat - Circuit generated heat due to a poor connection, or high electrical load - Higher than normal load conditions, towing, etc. * If the intermittent is related to cold, review the data for the following: - Low ambient temperatures-In extremely low temperatures, ice may form in a connection or component. Inspect for water intrusion. - The condition only occurs on a cold start. - The condition goes away when the vehicle warms up. * Information from the customer may help to determine if the trouble follows a pattern that is temperature related. * If temperature is suspected of causing an intermittent fault condition, attempt to duplicate the condition. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions) in order to duplicate the conditions required. Electromagnetic Interference and Electrical Noise Some electrical components/circuits are sensitive to electromagnetic interference or other types of electrical noise. Inspect for the following conditions: * A misrouted harness that is too close to high voltage/high current devices such as secondary ignition components, motors, generator etc.-These components may induce electrical noise on a circuit that could interfere with normal circuit operation. * Electrical system interference caused by a malfunctioning relay, or a control module driven solenoid or switch-These conditions can cause a sharp electrical surge. Normally, the condition will occur when the malfunctioning component is operating. * Improper installation of non-factory or aftermarket add on accessories such as lights, 2-way radios, amplifiers, electric motors, remote starters, alarm systems, cell phones, etc.-These accessories may lead to interference while in use, but do not fail when the accessories are not in use. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Checking Aftermarket Accessories). * Test for an open diode across the A/C compressor clutch and for other open diodes. Some relays may contain a clamping diode. * The generator may be allowing AC noise into the electrical system. Incorrect Control Module * There are only a few situations where reprogramming a control module is appropriate: - A new service control module is installed. - A control module from another vehicle is installed. - Revised software/calibration files have been released for this vehicle. Note: DO NOT re-program the control module with the SAME software/calibration files that are already present in the control module. This is not an effective repair for any type of concern. * Verify that the control module contains the correct software/calibration. If incorrect programming is found, reprogram the control module with the most current software/calibration. Refer to Control Module References (See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning) for replacement, setup, and programming. Testing for Short to Ground Testing for Short to Ground Special Tools * EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM) * EL 35616-200 - Test Light-Probe Kit For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test Probe Caution). The following procedures test for a short to ground in a circuit. With a Digital Multimeter (DMM) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1676 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the Ohms position. 4. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the other lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. If the DMM does NOT display infinite resistance (OL), there is a short to ground in the circuit. With a Test Lamp 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect one lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to one end of the circuit to be tested. 5. If the test lamp illuminates, there is a short to ground in the circuit. Fuse Powering Several Loads 1. Review the system schematic and locate the fuse that is open. 2. Open the first connector or switch leading from the fuse to each load. 3. Connect a DMM across the fuse terminals (be sure that the fuse is powered). * When the DMM displays voltage the short is in the wiring leading to the first connector or switch. * If the DMM does not display voltage refer to the next step. 4. Close each connector or switch until the DMM displays voltage in order to find which circuit is shorted. Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter Special Tools EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM) For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test Probe Caution). Digital Multimeter (DMM) Basic Requirements Service information is validated using digital multimeters that meet or exceed the following requirements. Using a multimeter that does not meet these basic requirements may give inaccurate readings which could lead to an incorrect diagnosis. Display and Settings 1. Four digits displayed 2. Voltage, amperage, resistance, frequency, diode test settings, and min-max function 3. Display positive and negative values Voltage 1. Have at least 10 Mohm input impedance 2. Test a DC voltage range of 0.1-1000 V. 3. Test an AC voltage range of 0.1-1000 V. Amperage 1. Test a DC amperage range of 0.1µA-10 A. 2. Test an AC amperage range of 0.1µA-10 A. Resistance Test a resistance range of 0.1 ohm-40 Mohm and displays infinite for a value greater than 40 Mohm (O.L. (Over-load)) Frequency Test for a frequency range of 0.5 HZ-199 K HZ Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1677 Diode Test 1. Apply at least 1 mA when performing the diode bias test 2. Display the break over voltage drop (0-3 V) of a forward biased diode 3. Display infinite (O.L. (Over-load)) when a diode is reverse biased Min-Max Readings 1. Can update at a 1 ms sample rate 2. Saves and displays minimum and maximum values Note: Circuits which include any solid state control modules, such as the engine control module (ECM), should only be tested with a 10 MOhms or higher impedance digital multimeter such as the EL-39200. The EL-39200 instruction manual is a good source of information and should be read thoroughly upon receipt of the DMM as well as kept on hand for future reference. A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present if the impedance is low enough, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. In other words, if there is not enough current, the test lamp will not illuminate even though voltage is present. The ohmmeter function on a DMM shows how much resistance exists between 2 points along a circuit. Low resistance in a circuit means good continuity. Note: Disconnect the power feed from the suspect circuit when measuring resistance with a DMM. This prevents incorrect readings. DMMs apply such a small voltage to measure resistance that the presence of voltages can upset a resistance reading. Diodes and solid state components in a circuit can cause a DMM to display a false reading. To find out if a component is affecting a measurement take a reading once, then reverse the leads and take a second reading. If the readings differ the solid state component is affecting the measurement. Following are examples of the various methods of connecting the DMM to the circuit to be tested: * Probe both ends of the connector and either hold the leads in place while manipulating the connector or tape the leads to the harness for continuous monitoring while you perform other operations or test driving. Refer to Probing Electrical Connectors (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Probing Electrical Connectors). * Disconnect the harness at both ends of the suspected circuit where it connects either to a component or to other harnesses. * If the system that is being diagnosed has a specified pinout or breakout box, it may be used in order to simplify connecting the DMM to the circuit or for testing multiple circuits quickly. Using Connector Test Adapters Using Connector Test Adapters Special Tools EL 35616 - Terminal Test Probe Kit For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Caution: Do not insert test equipment probes (DMM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the EL-38125-580 GM Approved Terminal Release Tool Kit in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the EL-38125-580 GM Approved Terminal Release Tool Kit , ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the EL-38125-580 GM Approved Terminal Release Tool Kit label on the inside of the EL-38125-580 GM Approved Terminal Release Tool Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Using Fused Jumper Wires Using Fused Jumper Wires Special Tools J 36169-A Fused Jumper Wire Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1678 Note: A fused jumper may not protect solid state components from being damaged. The J 36169-A includes small clamp connectors that provide adaptation to most connectors without damage. This fused jumper wire is supplied with a 20-A fuse which may not be suitable for some circuits. Do not use a fuse with a higher rating than the fuse that protects the circuit being tested. AFL/EPC Connectors AFL/EPC Connectors Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. 1. For connectors with a bolt in the dress cover, turn the bolt counterclockwise to remove the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1679 2. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the top of the wire dress cover. Slide the CPA forward. 3. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1680 View showing depressing of the lever lock release tab. View of connector in released position. 4. Disconnect the connector from the component. 5. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the dress cover. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs and remove the dress cover. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1681 6. Release the rear lower half of the wiredress cover. 7. Release the tabs that are holding the wiredress cover to the connector body. 8. Remove the nose piece by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the slots on both ends of the connector body. Gently pry the nose piece out of the connector. J 38125-216 can also be used to remove the nose piece. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1682 9. Use the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by lifting the terminal retaining tabs on the inside of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Bosch Connectors (BSK) Bosch Connectors (BSK) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1683 Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 3. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 4. Insert the J 38125-561 tool into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 5. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Bosch Connectors (ECM) Bosch Connectors (ECM) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1684 1. Locate the assist lever on the top of the connector. Move the assist lever to the forward position. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1685 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the connector. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the locking tabs and remove the dress cover. 4. The terminal positive assurance (TPA) is located in the front of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1686 5. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove TPA from the connector. 6. Use the J 38125-213 or the J 38125-556 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1687 Note: Ensure that the dress cover and connector body are both in the released position before reassembling. Failure to do so may cause damage to the connector and component. Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Bosch Connectors (0.64) Bosch Connectors (0.64) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While pressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock until the lever is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Pull the rubber boot that covers the wires back to expose the end of the connector dress cover. 4. Place the connector locking lever in the center of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1688 5. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs that are on the wire end of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover and connector body and pry up. 6. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs located on the opposite side of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover at the connector end and pry up. 7. Remove the dress cover. 8. Cut the tie wrap on the wire bundle. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1689 9. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting a small flat-bladed tool into the small slot in the end of the slider and pushing on the TPA until it comes out of the connector. When the TPA exits the opposite side of the connector, gasp the TPA and pull it completely out of the connector. 10. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 11. Insert the J 38125-560 into the 2 triangular cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 12. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Terminal Replacement Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1690 1. Prior to installation the terminal must be aligned so the (1) coding lugs align with the (2) coding grooves on the connector. 2. Once the terminal is aligned, slide the terminal into the cavity until the retainer has engaged in the cavity of the connector. 3. Slide the TPA in the connector body and seat it using a small flat bladed tool. The TPA is seated when it is flush with the contact housing. 4. Secure the wires to the connector body using a tie wrap and replace the dress cover and grommet. Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Pull out the slider on the connector position assurance (CPA) until it is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1691 5. Insert the J 38125-557 into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Connector Position Assurance Locks Connector Position Assurance Locks The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of the connector. CPAs are used in various connectors throughout the vehicle. CPAs are also used in all SIR system electrical connectors. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals, of the connector. Connector Repairs Connector Repairs Connector Repairs contains a list of all connector repairs. The connector repairs are listed by the connector manufacturer and then by connector type. If the technician cannot identify the manufacturer of the connector, refer to Identifying Connectors below. Knowing the connector manufacturer will assist in finding the correct connector repair from the following list: * Connector Position Assurance Locks (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Connector Position Assurance Locks) * Terminal Position Assurance Locks (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Terminal Position Assurance Locks) * AFL/EPC Connectors (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/AFL/EPC Connectors) * Bosch Connectors (BSK) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Bosch Connectors (BSK))Bosch Connectors (0.64) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Bosch Connectors (0.64))Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT))Bosch Connectors (ECM) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Bosch Connectors (ECM)) * Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack))Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Push to Seat))Delphi Connectors Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1692 (Pull To Seat) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Pull to Seat))Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W))Delphi Connectors (Micro.64) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Micro .64))Delphi Connectors (12-Way) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (12-Way))Delphi Connectors (Steering Gear) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Steering Gear)) * FCI Connectors (Lever Lock) (See: General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/FCI Connectors (Lever Lock))FCI Connectors (SIR) (See: General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/FCI (SIR)) * FEP Connectors (Steering Gear) (See: General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/FEP Connectors (Steering Gear)) * JST Connectors (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/JST Connectors) * Kostal Connectors (Glow Plug Control Module) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Kostal Connectors (Glow Plug Control Module))Kostal Connectors (Transmission) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Kostal Connectors (Transmission)) * Molex Connectors (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Molex Connectors) * Sumitomo Connectors (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Sumitomo Connectors) * Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way))Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor))Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap))Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way))Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module)) * Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Yazaki Connectors (2-Way))Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Yazaki Connectors (16-Way)) * Repairing Connector Terminals (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Repairing Connector Terminals) Connector Anatomy 1 - Connector Positive Assurance (CPA) 2 - Assist Lever 3 - Wiredress Cover 4 - Seal Strain/Relief Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1693 5 - Slide Left Hand 6 - Slide Right Hand 7 - Terminal Positive Assurance (TPA) 8 - Terminal Positive Assurance (TPA) 9 - Connector Seal 10 - Connector Housing 11 - Inner Connector Identifying Connectors Knowing the connector manufacturer is helpful when trying to locating the correct connector repair procedure. There are many different connector designs used on GM vehicles and it is sometimes difficult to identify the connector manufacturer. The information in this document should help with the identification of connector manufactures. The following connector manufacturers make most of the connectors found in GM vehicles: * AFL/EPC (Alcoa Fujikura Ltd./Engineered Plastics Components) * Bosch * Delphi * FCI (Framatome Connectors International) * JAE (Japan Aviation Electronics) * JST (Japan Solderless Terminals) * Kostel * Molex * Sumitomo * Tyco/AMP * Yazaki Identifying the manufacturer of a connector is often difficult. When trying to determine the manufacturer of a connector, look for specific identifying marks that are unique to that connector supplier. Most of these identify marks are hard to find or see. Check the connector carefully and refer to the information below for pictures and descriptions of connector identification markings. * Most of AFLs connectors have EPC on their connector body. Some of the smaller connectors will not have any markings on them. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1694 * In some cases Bosch will actually be printed on the connector. If Bosch does not appear on the connector, look for the Bosch logo. The Bosch logo is a circle with a blunted arrow inside. This logo can appear anywhere on the connector and is often very small. * In some cases Delphi will actually be printed on the connector. If Delphi is not printed on the connector, look for PED. In both cases there is no specific orientation for Delphi or PED and they can appear anywhere on the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1695 * FCI connectors may have the FCI logo on their connectors. The logo is the letters FCI with an "A" above it. * JAE connector have JAE in small letters on their connectors. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1696 * JST connectors have JST in small letters on their connectors, similar to that above. The location of the logo will vary with the connector size and style. * Kostel has an "LK" with a circle around it. These connector are usually used as a transmissions connection. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1697 * Most Molex connectors will have the Molex logo on the dresscover of the connector. In some cases the connectors may have MX followed by another letter. The third letter indicates where the connector was made. A connector with MXD is a Molex connector made in Detroit. Sumitomo has a unique symbol on their connector and possibly a part number. The symbol is similar to that of a diamond lying on its side, similar to that shown. The logo could appear anywhere but the most common place is at the wire side of the housing. * Tyco/AMP has many different and unique connector designs. Some may or may not have identifiable marks on them. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1698 * Yazaki has a wedge or arrow shape, similar to that shown. Delphi Connectors (Push to Seat) Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Follow the steps below in order to repair push to seat connectors. 1. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device, the connector position assurance (CPA) device, and/or the secondary lock. 2. Separate the connector halves (1). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1699 3. Use the proper pick or removal tool (1) in order to release the terminal. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 4. Gently pull the cable and the terminal (2) out of the back of the connector. 5. Re-form the locking device if you are going to reuse the terminal (1). 6. To repair the terminal, refer to Terminal Repair. Terminal Repair 1. Slip the cable seal away from the terminal. 2. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 3. Slip a new cable seal onto the wire. 4. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 5. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 6. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. 7. Slide the cable seal toward the terminal. 8. Crimp the cable seal and the insulation. 9. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply grease to the connector. Reinstalling Terminal 1. In order to reuse a terminal or lead assembly, refer to Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Wiring Repairs). 2. Ensure that the cable seal is kept on the terminal side of the splice. 3. Insert the lead from the back until it catches. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Terminated Lead Repair 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Find the appropriate terminated lead. 3. Use the appropriate splice sleeves depending on the gauge size. 4. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves). Delphi Connectors (Pull to Seat) Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) Special Tools Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1700 J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal If the terminal is visibly damaged or is suspected of having a faulty connection, the terminal should be replaced. Follow the steps below in order to repair pull-to-seat connectors: 1. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) device and/or the secondary lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component or separate the connectors for in-line connectors. 3. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device. 4. Insert the proper pick or removal tool into the front of the connector body. Note: On connectors with more than one terminal the service loop may not be large enough to remove the terminal and crimp on a new one. If the terminal wire does not have a large enough service loop for removal, cut the wire 5 cm (2 in) behind the connector before removal. 5. Grasp the wire at the back of the connector body and gently push the terminal out the front of the connector body. Terminal Repair 1. If the wire needed to be cut in order to remove the terminal, gently push a small length of the same size wire through the back of the connector cavity until there is enough wire exposed in order to crimp on a new terminal. If the wire was not cut, cut the existing wire as close to the old terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 4. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. Terminal Installation 1. Align the terminal and pull the wire from the back of the connector in order to seat the terminal. 2. If necessary, cut the new wire to proper length and splice with existing circuit. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves). 3. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply dielectric grease to the connector. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Micro .64) Delphi Connectors (Micro.64) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1701 Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro.64 connectors. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. The lever lock may be located on the top or sides of the wire dress cover. View of a typical Micro 64 connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1702 Depress the lock and pull the lever over and past the lock. View of the connector when released from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1703 View of another type of Micro 64 connector. Depress the locks that are located on both sides of the wiredress cover and pull the lever over and past the locks. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1704 View of the connector when released from the component. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the front of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool push down on one of the locking tabs and pull the cover up until the dress cover releases. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. 4. Once the front 2 locks are unlocked, lift the front of the dress cover and pull it forward. Note: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 5. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the small slot on the TPA and pushing down until the TPA releases. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1705 Note: Be careful not to angle or rock the J 38125-21 tool when inserting it into the connector or the tool may break. 6. Insert the J 38125-21 tool into the round canal between the terminals cavities at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Follow the steps below in order to repair Micro 64 connector terminals. The Micro 64 connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-64 (M jaw) was developed to crimp Micro 64 terminals. The J 38125-64 crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. The J 38125-64 crimping tool is also designed to crimp both the wire and the insulation at the same time. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro 64 terminals. Note: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gauge wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 1. Cut the wire as close to the damaged terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1706 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert terminal into the appropriate terminal holder until it hits bottom and stops. The correct terminal holder is determined by the wire size. Also ensure that the terminals wings are pointing towards the former on the tool and the release locator. 5. Insert the stripped cable into the terminal. Insulation should be visible on both sides of the terminal insulation wings. 6. Compress the handles until the ratchet automatically releases. 7. Place the terminal into the appropriate cavity and assemble the connector. Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1707 Terminal Removal Procedure There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W connectors. These connectors are very similar but use different terminals and have some minor physical differences also. The first connector design of the Micro-Pack 100W (1) has a white connector interface that holds the terminals. The second design of the Micro-Pack 100W (2) has a gray interface to hold the terminals. Also, the first design has terminal cavities that are further apart (3 mm centerline) and offset from the other row of terminal cavities in the connector. The second design has terminals cavities that are closer together (2.54 mm centerline) and aligned vertically. One other way to identify the second design is the thin strip of material that runs along the outside of the cavities. Note: There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W terminals which are very similar. Ensure that you have the correct terminal before crimping the new terminal to the wire. The first design connector uses the longer terminal (1) that has a raised area in front of the recess in the terminal. The second design connector uses the shorter terminal without the raised area. Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro-Pack 100W connectors. Some Micro-Pack 100W connector disassembly procedures will vary. Use this procedure as a guide. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1708 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Locate the nose piece locking tabs that are positioned on the side of the connector nose piece. The connector nose piece acts as a terminal positive assurance (TPA) and may be referred to as such. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to push in one of the locking tabs while gently pulling on the same side of the nose piece. 4. Repeat the procedure for the other locking tab and remove the nose piece. 5. Remove the wire dress cover. The following is a general procedure for wire dress cover removal. Use this procedure as a guide, some dress cover removal procedures may vary. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1709 6. Use fingers to squeeze the 2 locking legs of the cover. 7. Apply pressure and gently rock the cover until one locking leg is unseated. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1710 8. Continue to apply pressure and rock the cover until the second locking leg is unseated. Repeat procedure for the other side of the dress cover and remove the cover. 9. Use J 38125-12A to gently lift the terminal retaining tab while gently pulling the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. If the terminal is severely bent or damaged, it may be possible on some connectors to push the wire out of the front of the connector instead of pulling it through. This will prevent damage to the internal seals of the connector. Once the terminal is pushed out of the connector, cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible and pull the wire through the connector. Terminal Repair Procedure The Micro-Pack 100W connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool was developed to crimp Micro-Pack 100W terminals. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro-Pack 100 terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1711 1. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. Note: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gauge wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert the terminal into the crimp tool until the core wings are flush with the anvil on the crimp tool. Be sure that the wings are pointed toward the crimp tool former and release the spring locator. The locator will hold the terminal in place. Inspect the alignment of the terminal wings with the crimp tool former. If the terminal wings are wider than the crimp tool former, remove the terminal and bend the terminal wings in slightly. 5. Place stripped wire into terminal. 6. Crimp the new terminal to the wire. If a jam occurs, press the emergency release to open applicator. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1712 Terminal Replacement Procedure After the terminal is crimped to the wire perform the following procedure in order to replace Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the Terminal Removal Procedure. Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The following is the proper procedure for the repair of Weather Pack(R) Connectors. 1. Separate the connector halves (1). 2. Open the secondary lock. A secondary lock aids in terminal retention and is usually molded to the connector (1). 3. Grasp the wire and push the terminal to the forward most position. Hold the wire in this position. 4. Insert the Weather Pack(R) terminal removal tool J 38125-10A into the front (mating end) of the connector cavity until it rests on the cavity shoulder (1). 5. Gently pull on the wire to remove the terminal through the back of the connector (2). Note: Never use force to remove a terminal from a connector. 6. Inspect the terminal and connector for damage. Repair as necessary. Refer to Repairing Connector Terminals (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Repairing Connector Terminals). 7. Reform the lock tang (2) and reset terminal in connector body. 8. Close secondary locks and join connector halves. 9. Verify that circuit is complete and working satisfactorily. 10. Perform system check. Delphi Connectors (12-Way) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1713 Delphi Connectors (12-Way) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) and slide the lever lock away from the connector body. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs on the dress cover of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool release all of the locking tabs. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1714 4. Release the lower wire dress cover locking tab. 5. Release the upper wire dress cover locking tab. 6. Once the locks are unlocked, lift the dress cover off. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1715 Note: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 7. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the locking tabs on both sides of the TPA. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. 8. Remove the nose piece by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the locking tabs on both sides of the nose piece. Gently pry the nose piece out of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1716 9. Insert the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Delphi Connectors (Steering Gear) Delphi Connectors (Steering Gear) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1717 Removal Procedure 1. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the locking tab on the connector. 2. Push down the locking tab to release the connector. The small flat-bladed tool may need to be pushed down and angled back slightly to depress the locking tab. Pull on the connector body while releasing the locking tab to disconnect the connector. FCI Connectors (Lever Lock) FCI Connectors (Lever Lock) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1718 Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. 1. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. 2. The release tab is located on the top of the wiredress cover. 3. View of connector in released position. 4. Disconnect the connector from the component. 5. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the dress cover. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs and remove the dress cover. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1719 6. Use a small flat-blade tool to slide the terminal position assurance (TPA) up one notch on both ends of the connector. The TPA is located underneath the wire dress cover. For the larger terminals insert the J 38125-556 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. For the smaller terminals insert the J 38125-560 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1720 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. FCI (SIR) FCI Connectors (SIR) Removal Procedure Note: The orange CPA must be released first to disconnect or to connect the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1721 1. Lift the orange CPA vertically (avoid lifting on an angle to the connector) approximately 4 mm to release the connector. Use a small flat-bladed tool to help release the orange CPA. The orange CPA can also be released manually without any tools. 2. Grab the connector on both sides and lift the connector vertically to disconnect the connector. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1722 1. Lift the orange CPA vertically approximately 4 mm before installing the connector. Use a small flat-bladed tool to help release the orange CPA. The orange CPA can also be released manually without any tools. 2. Line up the connector key tabs with the initiator key slots. Grab the connector on both sides and push the connector down into the initiator connector sub assembly until fully seated. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1723 3. After the connector is fully seated, push down the orange CPA with your thumb. Push down until the orange CPA is touching the yellow cover on the connector. FEP Connectors (Steering Gear) FEP Connectors (Steering Gear) Removal Procedure 1. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the locking tab on the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1724 2. Push down the locking tab to release the connector. The small flat-bladed tool may need to be pushed down and angled back slightly to depress the locking tab. Pull on the connector body while releasing the locking tab to disconnect the connector. JST Connectors JST Connectors Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. While depressing the lock, remove the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1725 2. Locate the two indents of the terminal position assurance (TPA) located on the bottom of the connector body. Note: The TPA cannot be removed from the connector while there are terminals present in the connector body. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to very carefully raise the TPA on both sides of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1726 4. View of the TPA when removed from the connector body. 5. Use the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the left side of the terminal release cavity as shown in the graphic. Use the tool to move the terminal release to the right with a gentle prying motion. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Kostal Connectors (Glow Plug Control Module) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1727 Kostal Connectors (Glow Plug Control Module) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure View of typical connector. View of connector in released position. 1. Locate the assist lever at the back of the connector. Move the assist lever to the rear position. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1728 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove the dress cover. 4. Slide the dress cover forward and off of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1729 5. The terminal positive assurance (TPA) is located in the front and rear of the connector. Note: The front TPA cannot be removed from the connector. Only move it to the preset position. 6. Use a small flat-blade tool to move the front TPA to the preset position, outboard approximately 0.125 in. (3 mm). 7. Use a small flat-blade tool to completely remove the rear TPA from the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1730 8. Use the J 38125-24 or the J 38125-560 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 9. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Kostal Connectors (Transmission) Kostal Connectors (Transmission) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1731 1. While depressing the lock, twist and remove the connector from the component. 2. Locate the terminal position assurance (TPA). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1732 Note: The TPA cannot be removed from the connector while there are terminals present in the connector body. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to push the TPA until it bottoms out. 4. Use the J 38125-28 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal cavity as shown in the graphic. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 5. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Terminal Replacement Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1733 After the terminal is crimped to the wire, perform the following procedure in order to replace the terminal. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. Locate the terminal position assurance (TPA). 4. Use a small flat-blade tool to push the TPA until it bottoms out. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1734 5. Ensure the TPA is fully seated. The TPA should be centered and flush with the connector body when viewed. Molex Connectors Molex Connectors Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the top of the wire dress cover. Slide the CPA forward. 2. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1735 3. The lever should be in the full forward position. 4. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1736 5. Remove the dress cover by using a flat bladed tool to release the dress cover locking tabs and lift up on the dress cover. 6. Cut the tie wrap that holds the wires to the connector body. 7. Use a small flat-blade tool to pry one side of the nose piece up to the pre-stage position. When the nose piece is in the pre-staged position, the nose piece will be raised above the connector body the length of the step in the nose piece. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1737 8. Use a small flat-blade tool to pry the other side of the piece to the pre-stage position. If the nose piece is higher than the first step in the nose piece, gently push down on the nose piece until it meets with resistance from the connector body, you should feel the nose piece click into position. 9. Insert the J 38125-213 into the small terminal release hole on the nose piece and gently pull on the back of the wire. 10. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Refer to the terminal crimping procedure in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit. Terminal Replacement Procedure After the terminal is crimped to the wire, perform the following procedure in order to replace the terminal. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1738 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the connector disassembly procedure. Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the connector body and pull the CPA out. The CPA is on the wire harness side of connector. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Use a small flat-bladed tool to gently pry off the dress cover by inserting the tool under the cover opposite the harness side and prying up. 4. Remove the cover. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1739 5. Using a small flat-bladed tool, push on the side of the nose piece retainer while pushing the nose piece forward with your thumb. This will release the terminal position assurance (TPA). 6. Insert the J 38125-12A into the corresponding terminal release cavity. The release cavities are the 2 center rows of cavities on one half of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1740 7. Pressing the J 38125-12A tool in the release cavity of the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and crimper in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. Slide the lever lock away from the connector body. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs on the dress cover of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool release all of the locking tabs. 4. Once the locks are unlocked, lift the dress cover off. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1741 Note: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 5. Release the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the blue locking tabs on both ends of the connector. Gently slide the TPA up to the released position on both ends. 6. For the larger terminals insert the J 38125-13A tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. For the smaller terminals insert the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1742 View of the release tool being used for the larger terminals. View of the release tool being used for the larger terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1743 View of the release tool being used for the smaller terminals. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1744 Side view of connector. View of top of connector. 1. Locate the assist lever and lock on the top of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1745 2. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. 3. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1746 4. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the rear of the connector. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. 5. Once the locking tabs are unlocked, slide the inner connector out of the rear of the connector housing. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1747 6. Use the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by pressing on the tang. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Repairing Connector Terminals Repairing Connector Terminals Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Use the following repair procedures in order to repair the following: * Push to Seat terminals * Pull to Seat terminals Some terminals do not require all of the steps shown. Skip the steps that do not apply for your terminal repair. The J-38125 contains further information. 1. Cut off the terminal between the core and the insulation crimp. Minimize any wire loss. For cable seal terminals, remove the seal. 2. Apply the correct cable seal per gauge size of the wire, if used. Slide the seal back along the wire in order to enable insulation removal. 3. Remove the insulation. 4. For sealed terminals only, align the seal with the end of the cable insulation. 5. Position the strip in the terminal. For sealed terminals, position the strip and seal in the terminal. 6. Hand crimp the core wings. 7. Hand crimp the insulation wings. For sealed terminals, hand crimp the insulation wings around the seal and the cable. 8. Solder all of the hand crimp terminals excepting Micro-Pack 100.64 size. Soldering Micro-Pack 100 World terminals may damage the terminal. Sumitomo Connectors Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1748 Sumitomo Connectors Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1749 3. Remove the dress cover by using a flat-blade tool to release the connector locking tabs and pulling off the dress cover. 4. Relieve the tension on the nose piece retainers by inserting J 38125-12A into the single retainer slot on the end of the nose piece and gently prying out the locking tab. Repeat the process for both of the nose piece locking tabs on the opposite side of the nose piece. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1750 5. Once the nose piece retainers are relaxed, use the J 38125-552 to pull up the nose piece by hooking the tool under the nose piece and pulling up. The nose piece should raise slightly. 6. On the opposite side of the nose piece, use the J 38125-552 to pull up the nose piece by hooking the tool under the nose piece and pulling up. The nose piece should release completely. If the nose piece does not come off, repeat the procedure on the opposite side. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1751 7. The illustration above identifies the entry canal where the terminal release tool will be inserted, and the terminal cavity. * Terminal (1) * Entry Canal (2) 8. Insert the J 38125-553 tool into the entry canal and pry up on the terminal retainer. The terminal retainer is a small plastic piece on the top of the terminal. The terminal retainer must be held up while the terminal is pulled out of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1752 9. The illustration shows a cutaway view of the connector to aid the technician in releasing the terminal retainer. 10. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Refer to the terminal crimping procedure in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit. Terminal Replacement Procedure After the terminal is crimped to the wire, perform the following procedure in order to replace the terminal. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the connector disassembly procedure. Terminal Position Assurance Locks Terminal Position Assurance Locks The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1753 2. Insert the J 38125-11A tool into the cavity on the lower right hand face of the connector until the terminal release tang access panel slides over. 3. Ensure that the terminal release tang access panel is in the correct location to access the terminals. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1754 5. Insert the J 38125-11A into the terminal release tang access slot located behind the access panel of the connector and press down on the terminal while carefully pulling the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component by pressing down on the connector position assurance (CPA). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1755 2. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting the tool in the small recess on the side of the connector and pushing up until the TPA releases from the connector body. The TPA should raise just slightly. Do not try to remove the TPA. Note: The TPA on this connector cannot be removed unless the terminals are removed first. The TPA will come out of the connector body, but only slightly. When the TPA is slightly raised the terminals can be removed. Using excessive force to remove the TPA with the terminals still in the connector will damage the connector. 3. Repeat the process for the other side of the connector. 4. Ensure that the TPA is in the proper position to remove the terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1756 5. While pushing the terminal forward, insert the J 38125-24 in the release cavity above the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1757 2. Insert a small flat-blade tool in the slot below the front loaded terminal position assurance (TPA) and pry up. 3. Remove the TPA by pulling it out of the connector. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-553 on a slight upward angle into the cavity below the terminal to be removed. Ensure that the pointed on the end of the tool is facing the bottom of the terminal and it stays in contact with the terminal until it stops on the plastic terminal retainer. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1758 6. Gently pry the plastic terminal retainer down and carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1759 1. While depressing the lock, pull the two connector halves apart. Note: The TPA is fragile and may break if not done carefully. 2. Use a small flat-blade tool to very carefully push the terminal position assurance (TPA) towards the face of the connector on both sides of the connector. 3. View of the male half of the connector with female terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1760 4. View of the female half of the connector with male terminals. 5. Use the J 38125-215 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. View of the female half of the connector with male terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1761 7. View of the male half of the connector with female terminals. 8. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers A circuit breaker is a protective device that is designed to open the circuit when a current load is in excess of the rated breaker capacity. If there is a short or other type of overload condition in the circuit, the excessive current will open the circuit between the circuit breaker terminals. Two types of circuit breakers are used. Circuit Breaker - This type opens when excessive current passes through it for a period of time. It closes again after a few seconds, and if the cause of the high current is still present, it will open again. The circuit breaker will continue to cycle open and closed until the condition causing the high current is removed. Positive Temperature Coefficient (PTC) Circuit Breaker - This type greatly increases its resistance when excessive current passes through it. The excessive current heats the PTC device, as the device heats its resistance increases. Eventually the resistance gets so high that the circuit is effectively open. Unlike the ordinary circuit breaker the PTC unit will not reset until the circuit is opened, by removing the voltage from its terminals. Once the voltage is removed the circuit breaker will re-close within a second or 2. Circuit Protection - Fuses Circuit Protection - Fuses Special Tools EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM) For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1762 The fuse is the most common method of an automotive wiring circuit protection. Whenever there is an excessive amount of current flowing through a circuit the fusible element will melt and create an open or incomplete circuit. Fuses are a one time protection device and must be replaced each time the circuit is overloaded. To determine if a fuse is open, remove the suspected fuse and examine if the element in the fuse is broken (2). If not broken (1), also check for continuity using a Digital Multimeter (DMM) or a continuity tester. If the element is broken or continuity is suspect, replace the fuse with one of equal current rating. Circuit Protection - Fusible Links Circuit Protection - Fusible Links Special Tools EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM) For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Fusible link is wire designed to melt and break continuity when excessive current is applied. It is often located between or near the battery and starter or electrical center. Use a continuity tester or a Digital Multimeter (DMM) at each end of the wire containing the fusible link in order to determine if it is broken. If broken, it must be replaced with fusible link of the same gauge size. Repairing a Fusible Link Note: Fusible links cut longer than 225 mm (approximately 9 in) will not provide sufficient overload protection. Flat Wire Repairs Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1763 Flat Wire Repairs The flat wire within the flex wiring harness is not serviceable. If an open or short exists within the flex wiring harness the complete harness must be replaced. GMLAN Wiring Repairs GMLAN Wiring Repairs Special Tools * EL-38125-10 - Splice Sleeve Crimping Tool * J 38125-5 - Ultra Torch Special Tool * DuraSeal splice sleeves * A wire stripping tool For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: * A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. * A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The GM Local Area Network (GMLAN) System requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working on GMLAN connectors and terminals. GMLAN Repairs Note: When making a repair to any GMLAN network, the original wire length after the repair must be the same length as before the repair. If the network is a twisted pair, the twist must be maintained after the repair is completed. GMLAN has 2 types of networks, low speed and high speed. Low speed GMLAN has a single wire and works at slow speeds. High speed GMLAN has 2 wires in a twisted pair and works at higher speeds. For more information on GMLAN, refer to Data Link Communications Description and Operation ( See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Information Bus/Description and Operation). GMLAN Connector Terminal Repair Note: A terminated lead can be used to replace damaged connector terminals for both high speed and low speed GMLAN systems. When making a connector terminal repair on a GMLAN high speed system with twisted pair wires, do not untwist the wires more than necessary to make the repair. If the individual terminals are damaged on any GMLAN connection, use the appropriate connector repair procedure in order to repair the terminal. Refer to Connector Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Connector Repairs) for the appropriate connector repair procedure. GMLAN Wire Repair Note: Refer to Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Wiring Repairs) in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gauge size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and EL-38125-10 - tool. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the DuraSeal splice sleeves. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1764 Note: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: * Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. * Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. * Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert to regional wiring gauge size. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the EL-38125-10 - tool in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the splice sleeve crimp tool. The crimp tool has four nests, one for each color. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1765 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs Caution: Do not solder repairs under any circumstances as this could result in the air reference being obstructed. If the heated oxygen sensor pigtail wiring, connector, or terminal is damaged the entire oxygen sensor assembly must be replaced. Do not attempt to repair the wiring, connector, or terminals. In order for the sensor to function properly it must have a clean air reference. This clean air reference is obtained by way of the oxygen sensor signal and heater wires. Any attempt to repair the wires, connectors or terminals could result in the obstruction of the air reference and degrade oxygen sensor performance. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1766 The following guidelines should be used when servicing the heated oxygen sensor: * Do not apply contact cleaner or other materials to the sensor or vehicle harness connectors. These materials may get into the sensor, causing poor performance. Also, the sensor pigtail and harness wires must not be damaged in such a way that the wires inside are exposed. This could provide a path for foreign materials to enter the sensor and cause performance problems. * Neither the sensor nor vehicle lead wires should be bent sharply or kinked. Sharp bends, kinks, etc., could block the reference air path through the lead wire. * Do not remove or defeat the oxygen sensor ground wire (where applicable). Vehicles that utilize the ground wire sensor may rely on this ground as the only ground contact to the sensor. Removal of the ground wire will also cause poor engine performance. * To prevent damage due to water intrusion, be sure that the peripheral seal remains intact on the vehicle harness connector. High Temperature Wiring Repairs High Temperature Wiring Repairs Special Tools * EL-38125-10 - Splice Sleeve Crimping Tool * J 38125-5 - Ultra Torch * DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). High Temperature Wiring Wiring that is exposed to high temperatures, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time may use materials i.e. wires, connectors, and shielding that has a higher heat rating than typical wiring. When making a repair in a high temperature area observe the following: * Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature to replace any damaged wire. * Replace any heat shielding that is removed. * Cover any DuraSeal splice sleeves with SCT1 shrink tubing. * After making a wiring repair, ensure that the location of the wiring is not moved closer to the heat source. Identifying High Temperature Wiring Wiring that is exposed to high temperature, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time need special considerations when making wiring repairs. Areas that may be exposed to higher temperatures can be identified by heat resistant materials that are being used in those areas. These materials may include heat reflective tape, moon tape, and high temperature shrink tubing. Also conduit and other protective coverings may be used. Because conduit or similar coverings are used throughout the vehicle regardless of the temperature, it may be necessary for the technician to determine if an area is exposed to excessive heat before making a wiring repair. Obvious areas of consideration would be any area located near the exhaust manifolds, catalytic converter, and exhaust pipes. Items Required * DuraSeal splice sleeves to crimp and seal connections * High temperature SCT1 shrink tubing to protect the splice sleeves * Terminated leads or pigtails * The correct tools to remove the terminals from the connectors Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature of the same or larger gauge size as the original wire when repair damage wire. Also replace any reflective tape that you remove during the repair. High Temperature Wire Repair Note: Refer to Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Wiring Repairs) in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature rating of the same gauge size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the EL-38125-10 - tool and then encapsulate the splice sleeve using the high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1767 Note: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: * Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. * Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. * Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert to regional wiring gauge size. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Slide a section of high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing down the length of wire to be spliced. Ensure that the shrink tubing will not interfere with the splice procedure. 5. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 6. Use the EL-38125-10 - tool in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the splice sleeve crimp tool. The crimp tool has four nests, one for each color. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1768 7. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 8. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 9. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 10. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 11. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1769 12. Center the high temperature SCT1 shrink tube over the DuraSeal splice sleeve. 13. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the high temperature heat shrink tubing. 14. Gradually move the heat from the center to the open end of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. 15. Replace any reflective tape and clips that may have been remove during the repair. Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation If the wire insulation has been chafed, or broken, enough to show the conductive portion of the wire, and the wire is not damaged, determine the length of insulation that needs to be repaired. If the repair is less than 280 mm (11 in), cut the wire within the damaged area. Than slide the appropriate heat shrink tubing (listed below) over the wire, and repair the wire by splicing the wires together. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves). Once the wire is spliced together slide heat shrink tubing over the damaged area and apply heat to seal the repaired wire. If the wire is damaged, or the damaged area is larger than 280 mm (11 in), than replace the damaged wire by splicing in a new section of wire. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1770 SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs Special Tools * EL-38125-10 - Splice Sleeve Crimping Tool * J 38125-5 - Ultra Torch * DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: * A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. * A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides the necessary low resistance contact integrity for these sensitive, low energy circuits. The Supplemental Inflatable Restraint (SIR) System/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working with the SIR/SRS, and the wiring components, such as connectors and terminals. SIR/SRS Connector Repair (Plastic Body and Terminal Metal Pin) Note: Do not use the terminals in the kit in order to replace damaged SIR/SRS system terminals. Use either an SIR/SRS pigtail or a terminated lead from the SIR Repair Kit Tray. The terminals in the SIR/SRS system are made with a special plating. This plating provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. Pigtail repair packs are available for SIR/SRS connectors with eight or less terminals. Only the connector body is available for connectors with more than eight terminals. Terminated leads can be used to replace damaged terminals when replacing the connector body. SIR/SRS Component Wire Pigtail Repair Note: Do not make wire, connector, or terminal repairs on components with wire pigtails. A wire pigtail is a wire or wires attached directly to the device, not by a connector. If a wiring pigtail is damaged, you must replace the entire component, with pigtail. The inflatable restraint steering wheel module coil is an example of a pigtail component. SIR/SRS Wire Repair Note: Refer to Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Wiring Repairs) in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1771 If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gauge size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and EL-38125-10 - tool. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the DuraSeal splice sleeves. Note: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: * Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. * Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. * Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert to regional wiring gauge size. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the EL-38125-10 - tool in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the splice sleeve crimp tool. The crimp tool has four nests, one for each color. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1772 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Connector Position Assurance (CPA) The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of a connector. CPAs are used in all SIR System connectors and also in some connectors of other systems. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals of a connection. Terminal Position Assurance (TPA) The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1773 Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Special Tools * EL-38125-10 - Splice Sleeve Crimping Tool * J 38125-5 - Ultra Torch * DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Note: Use only DuraSeal splice sleeves. Other splice sleeves may not protect the splice from moisture or provide a good electrical connection. Use DuraSeal splice sleeves to form a one-to-one splice on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. Use DuraSeal splice sleeves where there is special requirements such as moisture sealing. Follow the instructions below in order to splice copper wire using DuraSeal splice sleeves. Note: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: * Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. * Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. * Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert to regional wiring gauge size. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1774 5. Use the EL-38125-10 - tool in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the splice sleeve crimp tool. The crimp tool has four nests, one for each color. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1775 * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Splicing Inline Harness Diodes Splicing Inline Harness Diodes Many vehicle electrical systems use a diode to isolate circuits and protect the components from voltage spikes. When installing a new diode use the following procedure. 1. Open the harness. * If the harness is taped, remove the tape. * To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing seam ripper (available from sewing supply stores) in order to cut open the harness. * If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the diode. 2. If the diode is taped to the harness, remove all of the tape. 3. Check and record the current flow direction and orientation of diode. 4. Remove the inoperative diode from the harness with a suitable soldering tool. Note: If the diode is located next to a connector terminal remove the terminal(s) from the connector to prevent damage from the soldering tool. 5. Carefully strip away a section of insulation next to the old soldered portion of the wire(s). Do not remove any more than is needed to attach the new diode. 6. Check current flow direction of the new diode, being sure to install the diode with correct bias. Reference the appropriate service manual wiring schematic to obtain the correct diode installation position. 7. Attach the new diode to the wire(s) using 60/40 rosin core solder. Before soldering attach some heat sinks (aluminum alligator clips) across the diode wire ends to protect the diode from excessive heat. Follow the manufacturer's instruction for the soldering equipment. 8. Reinstall terminal(s) into the connector body if previously removed. Note: To prevent shorts to ground and water intrusion, completely cover all exposed wire and diode attachment points with tape. 9. Tape the diode to the harness or connector using electrical tape. Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable Twisted/shielded cable is used in order to protect wiring from electrical noise. Two-conductor cable of this construction is used between the radio and the Delco-Bose(R) speaker/amplifier units and other applications where low level, sensitive signals must be carried. Follow the instructions below in order to repair the twisted/shielded cable. 1. Remove the outer jacket (1). Use care not to cut into the drain wire of the mylar tape. 2. Unwrap the tape. Do not remove the tape. Use the tape in order to rewrap the twisted conductors after the splice is made. 3. Prepare the splice. Untwist the conductors and follow the instructions for Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves). Staggering the splices by 65 mm (2.5 in) is recommended. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1776 Note: Apply the mylar tape with the aluminum side inward. This ensures good electrical contact with the drain wire. 4. Re-assemble the cable. * Rewrap the conductors with the mylar tape. If the mylar tape is damaged, use 3M product AL-36FR to replace the damaged mylar tape. * Use caution not to wrap the drain wire in the tape (1). * Follow the splicing instructions for copper wire and splice the drain wire. * Wrap the drain wire around the conductors and tape with electrical tape to replace the outer insulation. 5. Tape over the entire cable. Use a winding motion when you apply the tape. Wiring Repairs Wiring Repairs The Wiring Repairs section contains the following types of wiring repair information. Using these elements together will make wiring repair faster and easier: * Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections) * Flat Wire Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Flat Wire Repairs) * GMLAN Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/GMLAN Wiring Repairs) * High Temperature Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/High Temperature Wiring Repairs) * Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs) * Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves) * Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable) * Splicing Inline Harness Diodes (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Inline Harness Diodes) * SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs) US English/Metric Conversion US English/Metric Conversion Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1777 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1778 Basic Digital Multimeter Requirements Basic Digital Multimeter Requirements Digital Multimeter (DMM) Basic Requirements Service information is validated using digital multimeters that meet or exceed the following requirements. Using a multimeter that does not meet these basic requirements may give inaccurate readings which could lead to an incorrect diagnosis. Display and Settings 1. Four digits displayed 2. Voltage, amperage, resistance, frequency, diode test settings, and min-max function 3. Display positive and negative values Voltage 1. Have at least 10 Mohm input impedance 2. Test a DC voltage range of 0.1-1000 V. 3. Test an AC voltage range of 0.1-1000 V. Amperage 1. Test a DC amperage range of 0.1µA-10 A. 2. Test an AC amperage range of 0.1µA-10 A. Resistance Test a resistance range of 0.1 ohm-40 Mohm and displays infinite for a value greater than 40 Mohm (O.L. (Over-load)) Frequency Test for a frequency range of 0.5 HZ-199 K HZ Diode Test 1. Apply at least 1 mA when performing the diode bias test 2. Display the break over voltage drop (0-3 V) of a forward biased diode 3. Display infinite (O.L. (Over-load)) when a diode is reverse biased Min-Max Readings 1. Can update at a 1 ms sample rate 2. Saves and displays minimum and maximum values Testing Ground and Low Reference Circuits Testing Ground and Low Reference Circuits Because a test lamp can light with up to 200 ohm in a ground or low reference circuit they are not recommended to be used for this type of test. A low impedance test lamp can light and indicate the circuit is good when there is as much as 20-30 ohm present, while a high impedance test lamp can light with up to 200 ohm present in the circuit. This is why the Digital Multi-Meter (DMM) is used when validating a ground or low reference circuit continuity. When using the DMM there are many vehicle conditions that can affect the ground and low reference continuity testing. If these conditions are not met, a ground or low reference circuit test can fail on a good circuit. This may cause longer diagnosis time and incorrect component replacement. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1779 Any current flow through a ground or low reference circuit, while being tested, will skew the DMM continuity reading, or display a reading higher than when there is no current flowing. Performing a ground or low reference circuit continuity test, in reference to the vehicles battery negative terminal, will have the highest risk of failing a good ground or low reference circuit test than any other ground reference point. The best ground test points would be a control module housing (if the control modules housing is metal and grounded), door jamb striker (if attached to metal), under dash metal frame work, engine block, or body ground studs (other than where the negative battery cable is attached). A typical DMM ground or low reference circuit continuity reading can be as high as 100 ohm with the ignition ON, and drop to 15-25 ohm after the ignition is turned OFF. The reading will drop below 10 ohm after 30-40 seconds, then below 5 ohm after 60 seconds. Once the vehicle completely goes to sleep (generally 3-10 minutes) the reading will drop below 0.3 ohm. The following list of conditions may need to be met to ensure a valid continuity reading on a ground or low reference circuit: * Ignition OFF * Key out of the ignition switch (when not equipped with keyless entry and remote start) * Retained Accessory Power (RAP) OFF (open and close the driver door after ignition OFF) * Battery charger set at a 2 A or less charge rate * Scan tool not communicating with any vehicle control module (in some cases it may need to be disconnected from the DLC) * All entry doors closed * Headlamps OFF (auto headlamps disabled) * Any delay lighting OFF * HVAC after blow OFF * Any accessory that can work when the ignition is OFF * Wait up to 60 seconds (after all other listed conditions are met) Activating the DOOR LOCK function with a key fob can greatly reduce the time to achieve a valid ground or low reference continuity test result. Terminal Wiring Repair Terminal Wiring Repair Special Tools * EL-38125-10 - Splice Sleeve Crimp Tool * EL-38125-580 - Terminal Release Tool Kit * J-38125-5 - Ultra Torch * EL-35616 - Connector Test Adapter Kit For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Note: All repairs near the engine manifold, turbo engine and all exhaust pipes should follow the High Temperature Wiring Repair procedures. 1. Find the appropriate connector end view within the connector end view section. The connector end view has the following information: * Diagnostic probe tool * Terminal release tool * Terminal/terminated lead part numbers 2. Determine if a terminal is damaged. Note: Not using the proper test kit probe may cause damage to the terminal(s) that are probed. * Locate the diagnostic probe tool from the connector end view. The connector end view describes the color and part number to help the technician find and use the correct tool. * Connect the probe tool to the Digital Multimeter. * Insert the probe tool into the cavity and follow the procedures from the Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter). 3. Disconnect the connector body to perform the repair. Note: Several procedures for specific connector bodies are called out in Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Wiring Repairs). Use the following repair procedures to repair the following terminals: Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1780 Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack))Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Push to Seat))Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Pull to Seat))Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W))Delphi Connectors (Micro.64) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Micro .64) )Delphi Connectors (12-Way) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (12-Way))Delphi Connectors (Steering Gear) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Steering Gear)) * The TPA and CPA should be removed before releasing the terminal for the connector body. * Look at the connector end view to locate the cavity of the damaged terminal and find the proper terminal release tool from the terminal release tool kit. Note: Using the incorrect terminal release tool can damage the connector body. * Insert the terminal release tool into the cavity. Note: Some terminals have a lever that must be disengaged before the terminal can be released. Gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Terminated Lead Repair Terminated Lead Repair Special Tools * EL-38125-10 - Splice Sleeve Crimp Tool * EL-38125-580 - Terminal Release Tool Kit * J-38125-5 - Ultra Torch * EL-35616 - Connector Test Adapter Kit For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Note: All repairs near the engine manifold, turbo engine and all exhaust pipes should follow the High Temperature Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/High Temperature Wiring Repairs) procedures. Terminated leads are terminals that are crimped onto wires. The terminated lead can be used throughout the vehicle since it is designed for temperatures up to 150°C. The length of the wire is 450 mm. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1781 The DuraSeal splice sleeve has the following 2 critical features: * A special heat shrink tubing that environmentally seals the splice. The shrink tubing contains a sealing adhesive inside the shrink tubing. * A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp that provides the necessary contact integrity for sensitive low energy circuits. 1. Use the connector end view to identify the correct terminated lead. 2. The terminated lead package should include a DuraSeal splice sleeve. If not, use the chart to identify the correct part. 3. Open the harness by removing any tape: Use a sewing seam ripper, or a comparable tool, to cut open the harness, to avoid wire insulation damage. 4. Depending on how many terminals need repairs, cut the terminal and wire back at least 40 mm. Try to keep the harness wire length the same. If more than one terminated lead is required, stagger the lengths by 40 mm. This helps reduce the bundle size of the wire harness. 5. Use the EL-38125-10 - tool in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the splice sleeve crimp tool. The crimp tool has four nests, one for each color. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1782 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the J-38125-5 - ultra torch , apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures Fuse Block: Procedures Ground Repair Electrical Grounds Proper electrical system function relies on secure, positive, corrosion-free ground connections. Loose, stripped, or corroded connections increase the possibility of improper system function and loss of module communication. These conditions may also lead to unnecessary repairs and component replacements. In general, electrical ground connections are accomplished using one, or a combination of, three attachment methods: * Welded M6 stud and nut * Welded M6 nut and bolt * Welded M8 nut and bolt Caution: Use GM approved replacement fasteners with conductive finish for electrical ground repair. Determine which attachment method is used, and carry out the appropriate repair. M6 Weld Stud Replacement 1. Select a location adjacent the damaged or missing M6 ground stud having 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance behind the panel surface and 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance surrounding the M6 rivet stud flange. 2. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, remove any grease from the repair site and allow to dry. Note: Ensure 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance is maintained behind the panel to be drilled. 3. Drill a 10 mm (0.40 in) diameter hole through the panel. 4. Carefully remove paint and primer from the area surrounding the rivet stud flange until bare metal is visible. Caution: Use GM approved replacement fasteners with conductive finish for electrical ground repair. 5. Select a replacement conductive M6 rivet stud. Refer to GM parts catalog for the correct part number and application. 6. Using a rivet stud installer, install the replacement conductive M6 rivet stud. 7. Ensure the new rivet stud is securely fastened, with no detectable movement. Note: The rivet stud and surrounding panel area must be properly refinished prior to the installation of the ground terminal and nut to maintain positive electrical grounding. 8. Completely wrap the threads of the rivet stud with painters tape or equivalent. 9. Refinish the repair area using an anti-corrosion primer. Refer to Anti-Corrosion Treatment and Repair (). 10. Allow the refinished repair area to cure sufficiently before removing the protective material applied to the rivet stud threads. 11. Remove the painters tape or equivalent from the rivet stud threads. 12. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, thoroughly clean the rivet stud threads to remove any adhesive and allow to dry. 13. Carefully remove any corrosion from the electrical ground wire terminal. Refer to Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections). 14. Using a small brush, apply Dielectric Lubricant GM P/N 12377900 (Canadian P/N 10953529) to the new conductive M6 rivet stud threads. 15. Install the ground terminal to the new rivet stud. 16. Select a new, conductive M6 nut. Refer to GM parts catalog for the correct part number and application. Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener Caution). 17. Install the M6 nut and tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb in). 18. Check for proper system operation. M6 Weld Nut Caution: Use GM approved replacement fasteners with conductive finish for electrical ground repair. 1. If the M6 weld nut at the electrical ground location is damaged or stripped, a new, conductive self-threading M7 bolt may be used to secure the ground terminal. Refer to GM parts catalog for the correct part number and application. 2. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, remove any grease from the surface surrounding the weld nut and allow to dry. 3. Remove any loose metal particles from the damaged or stripped weld nut with a stiff brush. 4. Using a small brush, apply Dielectric Lubricant GM P/N 12377900 (Canadian P/N 10953529) to the new, conductive, self-threading M7 bolt Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1785 threads. 5. Carefully remove any corrosion from the electrical ground terminal. Refer to Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections). 6. Install the electrical ground terminal to the new, conductive M7 bolt. Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener Caution). 7. Install the M7 bolt and tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb in). 8. Check for proper system operation. M6 Weld Nut (Alternative Repair) Caution: Use GM approved replacement fasteners with conductive finish for electrical ground repair. 1. If the electrical ground location is accessible from both sides of the panel, a conductive M6 bolt and a conductive M6 nut may be used to secure the electrical ground terminal. Refer to GM parts catalog for the correct part number and application. 2. Select a location adjacent the damaged M6 weld nut having 20 mm (0.79 ) clearance behind the panel surface and 20 mm (0.79 ) clearance surrounding the new electrical ground site. 3. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, remove any grease from the surface surrounding the ground location and allow to dry. Note: Ensure 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance is maintained behind the panel to be drilled. 4. Drill a 10 mm (0.40 in) diameter hole through the panel. 5. Carefully remove paint and primer from the area surrounding the new ground site until bare metal is visible. 6. Using a small brush, apply Dielectric Lubricant GM P/N 12377900 (Canadian P/N 10953529) to the new, conductive M6 bolt threads. 7. Carefully remove any corrosion from the electrical ground terminal. Refer to Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections). 8. Install the electrical ground terminal and new, conductive M6 bolt to the ground location. Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener Caution). 9. Install the conductive M6 nut and tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb in). Note: The repair area must be properly refinished to maintain positive electrical grounding. 10. Refinish the repair area using an anti-corrosion primer. Refer to Anti-Corrosion Treatment and Repair (). 11. Check for proper system operation. M8 Weld Nut Caution: Use GM approved replacement fasteners with conductive finish for electrical ground repair. 1. If the M8 weld nut electrical ground location is accessible from both sides of the panel, a conductive M8 bolt and a conductive M8 nut may be used to secure the ground terminal. Refer to GM parts catalog for the correct part numbers and application. 2. Select a location adjacent to M8 weld nut having 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance behind the panel surface and 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance surrounding the new electrical ground site. 3. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, remove any grease from the surface surrounding the ground location and allow to dry. Note: Ensure 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance is maintained behind the panel to be drilled. 4. Drill a 10 mm (0.40 in) diameter hole through the panel. 5. Carefully remove paint and primer from the area surrounding the new ground site until bare metal is visible. 6. Using a small brush, apply Dielectric Lubricant GM P/N 12377900 (Canadian P/N 10953529) to the new, conductive M8 bolt threads. 7. Carefully remove any corrosion from the electrical ground terminal. Refer to Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections). 8. Install the electrical ground terminal and new, conductive M8 bolt to the ground location. Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener Caution). 9. Install the conductive M8 nut and tighten to 22 Nm (16 lb ft). Note: The repair area must be properly refinished to maintain positive electrical grounding. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1786 10. Refinish the repair area using an anti-corrosion primer. Refer to Anti-Corrosion Treatment and Repair (). 11. Check for proper system operation. M8 Weld Nut (Alternative Repair) Caution: Use GM approved replacement fasteners with conductive finish for electrical ground repair. 1. If the M8 weld nut electrical ground location is not accessible from both sides of the panel, a conductive M6 rivet stud and a conductive M6 nut may be used to secure the ground terminal. Refer to GM parts catalog for the correct part numbers and application. 2. Select a location adjacent the damaged M8 weld nut having 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance behind the panel surface and 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance surrounding the new, conductive M6 rivet stud flange. 3. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, remove any grease from the repair site and allow to dry. Note: Ensure 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance is maintained behind the panel to be drilled. 4. Drill a 10 mm (0.40 in) diameter hole through the panel. 5. Carefully remove paint and primer from the area surrounding the rivet stud flange until bare metal is visible. 6. Using a rivet stud installer, install the replacement conductive M6 rivet stud. 7. Ensure the new rivet stud is securely fastened, with no detectable movement. Note: The rivet stud and surrounding panel area must be properly refinished prior to the installation of the ground terminal and nut to maintain positive electrical grounding. 8. Completely wrap the threads of the rivet stud with painters tape or equivalent. 9. Refinish the repair area using an anti-corrosion primer. Refer to Anti-Corrosion Treatment and Repair (). 10. Allow the refinished repair area to cure sufficiently before removing the protective material applied to the rivet stud threads. 11. Remove the painters tape or equivalent from the rivet stud threads. 12. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, thoroughly clean the rivet stud threads to remove any adhesive and allow to dry. 13. Carefully remove any corrosion from the electrical ground wire terminal. Refer to Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections). 14. Using a small brush, apply Dielectric Lubricant GM P/N 12377900 (Canadian P/N 10953529) to the new conductive M6 rivet stud threads. 15. Install the ground terminal to the new, conductive M6 rivet stud. Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener Caution). 16. Install the conductive M6 nut and tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb in). 17. Check for proper system operation. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1787 Fuse Block: Removal and Replacement Accessory Wiring Junction Block Replacement Accessory Wiring Junction Block Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1788 Instrument Panel Wiring Harness Junction Block Replacement Instrument Panel Wiring Harness Junction Block Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1789 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood Relay Box: Application and ID Fuse Block - Underhood Electrical Center Identification Views X50A Fuse Block - Underhood, Label Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 1794 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 1795 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 1796 X50A Fuse Block - Underhood, Top View X50A Fuse Block - Underhood, Bottom View Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 1797 X50A Fuse Block - Underhood X1 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 1798 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 1799 X50A Fuse Block - Underhood X2 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 1800 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 1801 X50A Fuse Block - Underhood X3 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 1802 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 1803 X50A Fuse Block - Underhood X4 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 1804 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 1805 X50A Fuse Block - Underhood X5 X50A Fuse Block - Underhood X6 (LAF) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 1806 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 1807 Relay Box: Application and ID Fuse Block - Instrument Panel Label Electrical Center Identification Views X51A Fuse Block - Instrument Panel Label (before A6284015) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 1808 X51A Fuse Block - Instrument Panel Label (A6284015 and after) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 1809 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 1810 X51A Fuse Block - Instrument Panel, Top View X51A Fuse Block - Instrument Panel, Bottom View Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 1811 X51A Fuse Block - Instrument Panel Wire Entry Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 1812 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 1813 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 1814 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Service Reminder Indicators > Low Tire Pressure Indicator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM System Message/Service Tips Low Tire Pressure Indicator: Technical Service Bulletins Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM System Message/Service Tips # 09-03-16-002A: Dealership Service Consultant Procedure as Vehicle Comes into Service Drive for Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM) System Message, Light and Customer Information - (Apr 27, 2010) Subject: Dealership Service Consultant Procedure as Vehicle Comes into Service Drive for Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM) System Message, Light and Customer Information Models: 2006-2011 Cars and Light Duty Trucks (Including Saturn and Saab) 2006-2010 HUMMER H2, H3 ATTENTION The information found in this bulletin is to be used as a dealership service consultant procedures for customers coming into the service lane with an illuminated "low tire light" or comments on a check tire pressure/low tire pressure/add air to tire or service tire monitor system message. Maintaining proper tire pressures is an Owner's Maintenance item and is not covered under warranty. This bulletin is being revised to add model years and update additional bulletin reference information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 09-03-16-002 (Section 03 -- Suspension). Customer Concerns and Confusion with the Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPM) System The following procedure should be used by dealership service consultants when a customer comes into the service drive with a "low tire light" on or comments on a check tire pressure/low tire pressure/add air to tire or service tire monitor system message. The service consultant should perform the following steps: Procedure Turn the key to ON, without starting the engine. ^ If the low tire light comes on and stays on solid with a check tire pressure/low tire pressure/add air to tire message (on vehicles equipped with DIC), advise the customer: - The system is working properly. - Properly adjusting all tire air pressures to the recommended levels and driving the vehicle will turn the light off (refer to the Tire and Loading Information label on the driver side door). - More detailed information can be found in the Owner Manual. - Service is not covered under warranty - this maintenance is the responsibility of the owner. - Give the customer a copy of the "GM Customer TPMS Information". ^ If the Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM) light blinks for one minute then stays on solid with a service tire monitor system message (on vehicles equipped with DIC): - A TPM system problem exists. The vehicle should be written up accordingly and sent to your service department for further DTC diagnosis and service. - If dashes (--) are displayed in only one or two of the tire pressure readouts, it is likely caused by a previous TPM system relearn that was performed incorrectly due to interference from another vehicle's TPM system during the relearn process (refer to the Important statement later in this bulletin regarding TPM relearn with a Tech 2(R)). - If dashes (--) are displayed in all four of the tire pressure readouts, there is a system problem. Follow the appropriate SI service procedures. ^ If a customer indicates the low tire light comes on for a few minutes when the vehicle is started, then goes off after driving a while, advise the customer: - The system is working properly. - Most likely, air pressure in one or more of the tires is low enough to turn the light on when tires are cold. After driving for a while, tires will heat Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Service Reminder Indicators > Low Tire Pressure Indicator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM System Message/Service Tips > Page 1820 up, allowing tire air pressure to increase above the threshold causing the light to go off. Properly adjusting all tire air pressures to the recommended levels will correct this (Refer to the Tire and Loading Information Label on the driver side door). - More detailed information can be found in the Owner Manual. - Service is not covered under warranty - this maintenance is the responsibility of the owner. - Give the customer a copy of the "GM Customer TPMS Information". For more detailed information, refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 07-03-16-004C and TPMS Training Course 13044.12T2. Tire Pressure Light At key on, without starting the vehicle: Steady Solid Glowing TPM Indicator If the TPM indicator appears as a steady glowing yellow lamp (as above), the system is functioning properly and you should add air to the tires to correct this condition. Blinking TPM Indicator If the TPM indicator appears as a BLINKING yellow lamp for one minute and then stays on solid, diagnostic service is needed. The Effect of Outside Temperature on Tire Pressures Important: As a rule of thumb, tire pressure will change about 7kPa (1 psi) for every 6°C (10°F) decrease in temperature - Tire pressure will drop when it gets colder outside, and rise when it gets warmer. Under certain situations such as extreme outside temperature changes, the system may bring on a solid light with a check tire pressure message. This should be considered normal and the system is working properly. The light will turn off upon adding the proper amount of air to the tires (refer to the Tire & Loading Information label in the driver's door opening). When properly adjusting tire air pressure, the following steps are important to help optimize the system and prolong bringing a tire pressure light on: ^ Use an accurate, high quality tire pressure gauge. ^ Never set the tire pressure below the specified placard value regardless of tire temperature or ambient temperature. ^ Tire pressure should be set to the specified placard pressure at the lowest seasonal temperature the vehicle will encounter during operation. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Service Reminder Indicators > Low Tire Pressure Indicator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM System Message/Service Tips > Page 1821 ^ When adding proper tire air pressure, it is important to remember fluctuations in outside air temperatures and tire temperatures effect tire air pressures. ^ After you have added the proper tire pressure, if the vehicle has a DIC (after the system has updated), check to see if DIC displays are the same readings as the tire pressure gauge used (adjust as necessary). ^ Only perform a TPM sensor re-learn after a tire rotation or system part replacements and use the Tech 2(R) to initiate the relearn whenever possible to avoid invalid sensor I.D. learns. Important: Always take outside temperature and tire temperature into consideration to properly set tire pressures. Foe example, on colder days (20°F/-7°C), if setting tire pressure when the vehicle has been indoors (60°F/16°C) or the tires are warm from being driven, it will be necessary to compensate for the low outside temperature by adding 21-27 kPa (3-4 psi) more then the placecard pressure. At some later time, when the vehicle has been parked outside for a while, the tires will cool off and the pressures will drop back into the placecard range. Important: Recently, nitrogen gas (for use in inflating tires) has become available to the general customer through some retailers. The use of nitrogen gas to inflate tires is a technology used in automobile racing. Tires inflated with nitrogen gas may exhibit less of a pressure change in response to outside temperature changes. Nitrogen gas inflation is compatible with GM TPM sensors. For additional information, refer to Corporate Service Bulletin 05-03-10-020C. Important: All Models (Except the Pontiac Vibe): Do not perform a TPM relearn at PDI, the system has already been set at the Assembly Plant. Do not perform a TPM relearn after adding air to the tires. The low tire light is similar to the low fuel indicator and adding something (fuel, air) to the vehicle makes that light turn back off again. Note that because of system behavior, some vehicles must be driven a short distance before the sensors recognize the increase in pressure and turns the light off again. Pontiac Vibe Only: Do not use the TPMS reset button to turn off the light. The system will update and light will turn off when all tire pressures have been adjusted followed by short distance drive. Important: All models (except the Pontiac Vibe): Each tire monitor sensor is learned to a specific vehicle corner. When performing a TPM relearn (only after a tire rotation or replacement of a TPM sensor or Module), always use the Tech2(R) to initiate the J 46079 relearned process. Tech 2(R) - initiated relearns lock out other vehicle TPM signals that may be broadcasting in the area. Only signals initiated by the J 46079 tool will be accepted. This method avoids storing false TPM I.D.s and will prevent customers from returning with dashes (--) displayed in tire pressure readouts and/or a flashing tire pressure monitor (TPM) light. Checking the four TPM I.D.s with the Tech 2(R) prior to and following relearn to verify they are the same can prevent invalid I.D. learns. Pontiac Vibe Only: Tire Monitor Sensors are not learned to a specific vehicle corner. Do not perform a TPM Reset after tire rotation. The TPMS Reset button must only be used during pre-delivery inspection by the dealer to initialize the system (after all tire pressures have been adjusted properly) or when a Tire Pressure Monitor System component is replaced. The J 46079 tool does not work on Vibe TPM sensors. A TPMS relearn on Vibe must be preformed with a Tech 2(R) to set the TPMS Module in learn mode. The TPMS sensor IDs are entered through the Tech 2(R). Refer to SI for further Vibe TPMS information. Labor Operation and Repair Order/Warranty System Claim Required Documentation Important: The ONLY time labor operation E0726 or E0722 should be used is to diagnose for a system issue. That should ONLY occur if, at key ON, without starting the engine, the Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM) blinks for one minute and then stays on solid with a Service Tire Monitor System message (on vehicles equipped with a DIC) If that occurs, a TPM system problem exists and the system will have set a DTC. If one of these operastions is used, the following Repair Order and Warranty System documentation are required: ^ Document the customer complaint on the Repair Order. ^ Document the TPMS DTC that has set on the Repair Order. ^ Enter the TPMS DTC in the Warranty System (WINS) in the Failure Code/DTC field on the claim submission (refer to the Claims Processing Manual, Section IV, Warranty claim Data, Page 6, Item G). If the above information is not documented on the Repair Order and Warranty System, the claim may be rejected. If the Warranty Parts Center (WPC) generates a request, this repair order documentation must be sent back. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Service Reminder Indicators > Low Tire Pressure Indicator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM System Message/Service Tips > Page 1822 Customer TPMS Information Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Service Reminder Indicators > Low Tire Pressure Indicator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM System Message/Service Tips > Page 1823 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Service Reminder Indicators > Low Tire Pressure Indicator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM System Message/Service Tips > Page 1824 Frequently Asked Questions Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Service Reminder Indicators > Maintenance Required Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Service and Repair Maintenance Required Lamp/Indicator: Service and Repair SERVICE VEHICLE SOON or SERVICE ENGINE SOON INDICATOR If your vehicle is equipped with a "SERVICE VEHICLE SOON"or a "SERVICE ENGINE SOON" indicator. This indicator is not a maintenance indicator and does not mean a maintenance service is required. For additional "SERVICE VEHICLE SOON"or a "SERVICE ENGINE SOON" indicator information refer to Malfunction Indicator Lamp. For Maintenance Required Lamp/Indicator, refer to Oil Change Reminder Lamp. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Service Reminder Indicators > Malfunction Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Malfunction Indicator Lamp: Testing and Inspection Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) Diagnosis Diagnostic Instructions * Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle (See: Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle) prior to using this diagnostic procedure. * Review Strategy Based Diagnosis (See: Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Strategy Based Diagnosis) for an overview of the diagnostic approach. * Diagnostic Procedure Instructions (See: Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Diagnostic Procedure Instructions )provides an overview of each diagnostic category. Circuit/System Description Ignition voltage is supplied to the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL). The engine control module (ECM) turns the MIL ON by grounding the MIL control circuit. Diagnostic Aids If the condition is intermittent, move the related harnesses and connectors with the engine operating. Monitor the scan tool Circuit Test Status parameters for the component. The Circuit Test Status parameter will change from OK or Not run to Fault if there is a condition with the circuit or a connection. Reference Information Schematic Reference * Instrument Cluster Schematics (See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators/System Diagram/Instrument Cluster Schematics) * Engine Controls Schematics (See: Powertrain Management/Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams) Connector End View Reference Component Connector End Views (See: Diagrams/Connector Views) Electrical Information Reference * Circuit Testing (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Circuit Testing) * Connector Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Connector Repairs) * Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections) * Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Wiring Repairs) Scan Tool Reference Control Module References (See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning)for scan tool information Circuit/System Verification 1. Ignition ON, observe the scan tool MIL Circuit Test Status parameters. Each of the MIL circuit test status parameters should display OK or Not Run. 2. Ignition ON, command the MIL ON and OFF with a scan tool. The MIL should turn ON and OFF as commanded. 3. Operate the vehicle within the Conditions for Running the DTC to verify the DTC does not reset. You may also operate the vehicle within the conditions that you observed from the Freeze Frame/Failure Records data. Circuit/System Testing 1. If any other IPC indicators or gauges are inoperative, refer to Instrument Cluster Gauges Inoperative (See: Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators/Testing and Inspection/Instrument Cluster Gauges Inoperative). 2. Ignition OFF, disconnect the ECM harness connectors. Ignition ON, the MIL should not illuminate. ‹› If the MIL is illuminated, test the MIL control circuit terminal 46-X1 for a short to ground. If the circuit tests normal, replace the IPC. 3. Ignition ON, connect a 3 A fused jumper wire between the MIL control circuit terminal 46-X1 and ground. The MIL should illuminate. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Service Reminder Indicators > Malfunction Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 1831 ‹› If the MIL does not illuminate, test the MIL control circuit for a short to voltage, or an open/high resistance. If the circuit test normal, replace the IPC/bulb. 4. If all circuits/connections test normal, replace the ECM. Repair Instructions Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification (See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures/Verification Tests and Procedures) after completing the diagnostic procedure. * Control Module References (See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning) * Instrument Cluster Replacement (Equinox) (See: Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators/Instrument Cluster / Carrier/Service and Repair)Instrument Cluster Replacement (Terrain) (See: Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators/Instrument Cluster / Carrier/Service and Repair) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Service Reminder Indicators > Oil Change Reminder Lamp > Component Information > Service and Repair Oil Change Reminder Lamp: Service and Repair GM Oil Life System Resetting This vehicle has a computer system that indicates when to change the engine oil and filter. This is based on engine revolutions and engine temperature, and not on mileage. Based on driving conditions, the mileage at which an oil change is indicated can vary considerably. For the oil life system to work properly, the system must be reset every time the oil is changed. When the system has calculated that oil life has been diminished, it indicates that an oil change is necessary. A "Change Engine Oil Soon" message comes on. Change the oil as soon as possible within the next 1 000 km (600 miles). It is possible that, if driving under the best conditions, the oil life system might not indicate that an oil change is necessary for over a year. However, the engine oil and filter must be changed at least once a year and at this time the system must be reset. Your dealer has trained service people who will perform this work using genuine parts and reset the system. It is also important to check the oil regularly and keep it at the proper level. If the system is ever reset accidentally, the oil must be changed at 5 000 km (3,000 miles) since the last oil change. Remember to reset the oil life system whenever the oil is changed. How to Reset the Engine Oil Life System Reset the system whenever the engine oil is changed so that the system can calculate the next engine oil change. To reset the system: 1. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN with the engine off. 2. Fully press and release the accelerator pedal three times within five seconds. If the vehicle has Driver Information Center (DIC) buttons: 1. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN, with the engine off. 2. Press the DIC menu button until "Remaining Oil Life" displays. 3. Press and hold the set/clear button until "100%" is displayed. 4. Turn the key to LOCK/OFF. The system is reset when the "Change Engine Oil Soon" message goes off. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Vehicle Lifting > Component Information > Service and Repair Vehicle Lifting: Service and Repair Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle Danger: To avoid any vehicle damage, serious personal injury or death when major components are removed from the vehicle and the vehicle is supported by a hoist, support the vehicle with jack stands at the opposite end from which the components are being removed and strap the vehicle to the hoist. Danger: To avoid any vehicle damage, serious personal injury or death, always use the jackstands to support the vehicle when lifting the vehicle with a jack. Caution: Perform the following steps before beginning any vehicle lifting or jacking procedure: * Remove or secure all of the vehicle contents in order to avoid any shifting or any movement that may occur during the vehicle lifting or jacking procedure. * The lifting equipment or the jacking equipment weight rating must meet or exceed the weight of the vehicle and any vehicle contents. * The lifting equipment or the jacking equipment must meet the operational standards of the lifting equipment or jacking equipment manufacturer. * Perform the vehicle lifting or jacking procedure on a clean, hard, dry, level surface. * Perform the vehicle lifting or jacking procedure only at the identified lift points. DO NOT allow the lifting equipment or jacking equipment to contact any other vehicle components. Failure to perform the previous steps could result in damage to the lifting equipment or the jacking equipment, the vehicle, and/or the vehicle contents. Vehicle Lifting-Frame Contact Lift Front Lift Pads When lifting the vehicle with a frame-contact lift, place the front lift pads approximately 12.2 in (310 mm) inboard from the front pinchweld flanges. Rear Lift Pads When lifting the vehicle with a frame-contact lift, place the rear lift pads 10.0 in (255 mm) inboard from the rear pinchweld flanges. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Vehicle Lifting > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 1839 Vehicle Jacking Note: * Only the left side or the right side of the rear of the vehicle can be lifted at a time when using these jacking point. * The floor jack pad must not contact the oil pan, splash shield or the steering linkage. Under the Rear Suspension Lift the rear of the vehicle by placing the floor jack lift pad on either side of the suspension cradle, inboard and forward of the rear suspension, as shown. Under the Center of the Front Suspension Frame Lift the front of the vehicle by placing the floor jack lift pad at the center of the front suspension frame, as shown. Supporting the Vehicle with Jackstands Place jackstands ONLY under strong and stable vehicle structures. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Relays and Modules - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > TPMS System - Service And Re-Learning Sensor IDs Tire Pressure Module: Technical Service Bulletins TPMS System - Service And Re-Learning Sensor IDs INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 10-03-16-001 Date: July 19, 2010 Subject: TPMS System Service and Re-Learning Sensor IDs Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2 2009 and Prior HUMMER H3 2010 and Prior Saturn Models 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X with Wheel-Mounted Tire Pressure Sensors In the event that the spare tire, which is normally not equipped with a tire pressure monitor (TPM) sensor, is installed in place of one of the road tires and the vehicle is driven above 40 km/h (25 mph) for 20 minutes or more, the TPM indicator icon on the instrument panel cluster (IPC) will flash for approximately one minute and then remain on steady each time the ignition is turned ON, indicating a diagnostic trouble code (DTC) has been set. The driver information center (DIC), if equipped, will also display a SERVICE TIRE MONITOR type message. When the road tire is repaired and reinstalled in the original location, the TPM indicator icon illumination and DIC message may remain displayed until the DTC is cleared. To ensure that the TPM indicator and the DIC message are cleared after service, it is necessary to clear any TPM DTCs using a scan tool. If a scan tool is unavailable, performing the TPM relearn procedure using a TPM diagnostic tool will provide the same results. It is advised to perform the relearn procedure away from other vehicles to prevent picking up a stray sensor signal. If one or more of the TPM sensors are missing or damaged and have been replaced, then the relearn procedure must be performed. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > TPMS System - Service And Re-Learning Sensor IDs Tire Pressure Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins TPMS System - Service And Re-Learning Sensor IDs INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 10-03-16-001 Date: July 19, 2010 Subject: TPMS System Service and Re-Learning Sensor IDs Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2 2009 and Prior HUMMER H3 2010 and Prior Saturn Models 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X with Wheel-Mounted Tire Pressure Sensors In the event that the spare tire, which is normally not equipped with a tire pressure monitor (TPM) sensor, is installed in place of one of the road tires and the vehicle is driven above 40 km/h (25 mph) for 20 minutes or more, the TPM indicator icon on the instrument panel cluster (IPC) will flash for approximately one minute and then remain on steady each time the ignition is turned ON, indicating a diagnostic trouble code (DTC) has been set. The driver information center (DIC), if equipped, will also display a SERVICE TIRE MONITOR type message. When the road tire is repaired and reinstalled in the original location, the TPM indicator icon illumination and DIC message may remain displayed until the DTC is cleared. To ensure that the TPM indicator and the DIC message are cleared after service, it is necessary to clear any TPM DTCs using a scan tool. If a scan tool is unavailable, performing the TPM relearn procedure using a TPM diagnostic tool will provide the same results. It is advised to perform the relearn procedure away from other vehicles to prevent picking up a stray sensor signal. If one or more of the TPM sensors are missing or damaged and have been replaced, then the relearn procedure must be performed. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 1850 Tire Pressure Sensor: Testing and Inspection Tire Pressure Indicator Sensor Learn Special Tools J-46079 Tire Pressure Monitor Diagnostic Tool Relearn Mode Description The tire pressure monitor (TPM) system uses the instrument panel cluster (IPC), body control module (BCM), 4 radio frequency transmitting pressure sensors, and the serial data circuit to perform the TPM Relearn mode functions. The sensor Relearn procedure must be performed after every tire rotation, BCM replacement, or sensor replacement. Once the relearn mode has been enabled, each of the sensors unique identification codes can be learned into the BCM memory. When a sensor ID has been learned, the BCM sends a serial data message to the BCM to sound a horn chirp. This verifies the sensor has transmitted its ID and the BCM has received and learned it. The BCM must learn the sensor IDs in the proper sequence to determine correct sensor location. The first learned ID is assigned to the left front location, the second to right front, the third to right rear and the fourth to left rear. The turn signals will individually illuminate indicating which location is to be learned in the proper sequence. Sensor Functions Using J-46079 or EL-46079 Each sensor has an internal low frequency coil. When the J-46079 is used in activate mode, it produces a low frequency transmission that activates the sensor. The sensor responds to a low frequency activation by transmitting in learn mode. When the BCM receives a learn mode transmission while in TPM learn mode, it will assign that sensors ID to the location on the vehicle relative to the order in which it was learned. Sensor Functions Using Pressure Increase/Decrease Method Each sensor takes a pressure measurement sample once every 30 seconds while in stationary mode. If the tire pressure increases, or decreases by more than 8.3 kPa (1.2 psi) from the last pressure measurement, another measurement will occur immediately to verify the change in pressure. If a pressure change has indeed occurred, the sensor transmits in Learn mode. When the BCM receives a Learn mode transmission while in TPM learn mode, it will assign that sensor's ID to the location on the vehicle relative to the order in which it was learned. Relearn Mode Cancellation The Relearn mode will cancel if the ignition is cycled to OFF or if more than 2 minutes has elapsed for any sensor that has not been learned. If the relearn mode is cancelled before the first sensor is learned, the original sensor IDs will be maintained. If the relearn mode is canceled after the first sensor is learned, the following will occur: * All stored sensor IDs will be invalidated in the BCM memory. * If equipped, the DIC will display dashes instead of tire pressures. * DTC C0775 will be set. These conditions will now require the relearn procedure to be repeated for the system to function properly. TPM Relearn Procedure Note: If using the scan tool to enable the relearn mode, the J-46079 must be used to activate the sensors. When this preferred method is used, any stray sensor signals will not affect the relearn procedure. In the event a particular sensor's information is displayed on the special tool upon activation but the horn does not chirp, it may be necessary to rotate the wheel valve stem to a different position due to the sensor signal is being blocked by another component. If using the DIC buttons to enable the relearn mode, the J-46079 or Pressure Increase/Decrease Method may be used. Before proceeding with this method, ensure that no other learn procedure is being performed simultaneously or that tire pressures are not being adjusted on another TPM equipped vehicle within close proximity. Stray signals from other TPM equipped vehicles just driving by can be inadvertently learned. If any random horn chirps are heard from the vehicle while performing the learn procedure, most likely a stray sensor has been learned and the procedure will need to be cancelled and repeated. Under these circumstances, performing the TPM Relearn Procedure away from other vehicles would be highly recommended. In the event a particular sensor activation does not cause the horn to chirp, it may be necessary to rotate the wheel valve stem to a different position due to the sensor signal is being blocked by another component. Preferred Scan Tool Relearn Enable Method 1. Apply park brake (manual transmission only). 2. Ignition ON, using a scan tool, initiate the Tire Pressure Sensors Learn mode. A double horn chirp will sound indicating the Relearn mode has been enabled. The left front turn signal will also be illuminated. 3. Starting with the left front tire, active the sensor by holding the antenna of the J-46079 aimed upward against the tire sidewall close to the wheel rim at the valve stem location. Press and release the Activate button and wait for a horn chirp. Once the horn chirp has sounded, the sensor information is learned and the turn signal in the next location to be learned will illuminate. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 1851 4. After the horn chirp has sounded and the right front turn signal is illuminated, repeat step 2 for the remaining 3 sensors in the following order: 1. Right front 2. Right rear 3. Left rear 5. When the left rear sensor has been learned and a double horn chirp has sounded, the learn process is complete and the BCM exits the Relearn mode. 6. Ignition OFF, adjust all tires to the recommended pressures. Refer to Vehicle Certification, Tire Placard, Anti-Theft, and Service Parts ID Label ( See: Application and ID/Vehicle Certification, Tire Placard, Anti-Theft and Service Parts ID Label). Alternate DIC Relearn Enable Method 1. Apply park brake (manual transmission only). 2. Ignition ON, activate the Relearn mode with the driver information center (DIC) display controls. A double horn chirp sounds indicating the Relearn mode has been enabled and the left front turn signal will also be illuminated. 3. Starting with the left front tire, activate the tire pressure sensor by using one of the following methods: * Hold the antenna of the J-46079 aimed upward against the tire sidewall close to the wheel rim at the valve stem location. Press and release the activate button and wait for a horn chirp. Once the horn chirp has sounded, the sensor information is learned and the turn signal in the next location to be learned will illuminate. Warning Over inflating tires may cause personal injury or damage to the tires and wheels. When increasing tire pressure do not exceed the maximum inflation pressure as noted on the tire sidewall. * Increase/decrease the tire pressure for 8-10 seconds then wait for a horn chirp. The horn chirp may occur before or up to 30 seconds after the 8-10 second pressure increase/decrease time period has been reached. Once the horn chirp has sounded, the sensor information is learned and the turn signal in the next location to be learned will illuminate. 4. After the horn chirp has sounded and the right front turn signal is illuminated, repeat step 2 for the remaining 3 sensors in the following order: 1. Right front 2. Right rear 3. Left rear 5. When the left rear sensor has been learned and a double horn chirp has sounded, the learn process is complete and the BCM exits the Relearn mode. 6. Ignition OFF, adjust all tires to the recommended pressures. Refer to Vehicle Certification, Tire Placard, Anti-Theft, and Service Parts ID Label ( See: Application and ID/Vehicle Certification, Tire Placard, Anti-Theft and Service Parts ID Label). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 1852 Tire Pressure Sensor: Service and Repair Tire Pressure Indicator Sensor Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Raise the vehicle on a suitable support. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle (See: Vehicle Lifting/Service and Repair). 2. Remove the tire/wheel assembly from the vehicle. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation (See: Service and Repair). Note: Before the tire is removed from the wheel, note the following items to avoid tire pressure sensor damage upon tire dismounting. * Place the sensor's cap and valve on a dry clean surface after removal. The cap is aluminum and the valve is nickel plated to prevent corrosion and are not to be substituted with a cap or valve made of any other material. * When separating the tire bead from the wheel, position the bead breaking fixture 90 degrees from the valve stem. * Position the mounting/dismounting head so the tire iron, or pry bar can be inserted slightly clockwise of the sensor body when prying the tire bead up and over the mounting/dismounting head. * Using the tire machine, rotate the tire/wheel assembly clockwise when transferring the tire bead to the out side of the wheel rim. * Repeat items for inner bead. 3. Remove the tire from the wheel. Refer to Tire Dismounting and Mounting (See: Tires/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement). Note: If any tire sealant is noted upon tire dismounting, remove all residual liquid sealant from the inside of the tire and wheel surfaces. 4. Remove the tire pressure sensor nut. 5. Remove the tire pressure sensor. Installation Procedure 1. Clean any dirt or debris from the grommet sealing area. 2. Insert the sensor in the wheel hole with the air passage facing away from the wheel. Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener Caution). 3. Install the sensor nut and position the sensor body parallel to the inside wheel surface while torquing. Tighten the sensor nut to 7 Nm (62 lb in). Note: Before reinstalling the tire on the wheel, note the following items to avoid tire pressure sensor damage upon tire mounting: Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 1853 * Position the mounting/dismounting head 180 degrees from the valve stem. * Position the bead transition area 45 degrees counterclockwise of the valve stem. * Using the tire machine, rotate the tire/wheel assembly clockwise when transferring the tire bead to the inside of the wheel rim. * Repeat items for outer bead. 4. Install the tire on the wheel. Refer to Tire Dismounting and Mounting (See: Tires/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement). Note: A service replacement tire pressure sensor is shipped in OFF mode. In this mode the sensor's unique identification code cannot be learned into the liftgate module (LGM) memory. The sensor must be taken out of OFF mode by spinning the tire/wheel assembly above 32 km/h (20 mph) in order to close the sensor's internal roll switch for at least 10 seconds. 5. Install the tire/wheel assembly on the vehicle. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation (See: Service and Repair). 6. Lower the vehicle. 7. Learn the tire pressure sensors. Refer to Tire Pressure Indicator Sensor Learn (See: Testing and Inspection). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Low Tire Pressure Indicator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM System Message/Service Tips Low Tire Pressure Indicator: Technical Service Bulletins Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM System Message/Service Tips # 09-03-16-002A: Dealership Service Consultant Procedure as Vehicle Comes into Service Drive for Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM) System Message, Light and Customer Information - (Apr 27, 2010) Subject: Dealership Service Consultant Procedure as Vehicle Comes into Service Drive for Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM) System Message, Light and Customer Information Models: 2006-2011 Cars and Light Duty Trucks (Including Saturn and Saab) 2006-2010 HUMMER H2, H3 ATTENTION The information found in this bulletin is to be used as a dealership service consultant procedures for customers coming into the service lane with an illuminated "low tire light" or comments on a check tire pressure/low tire pressure/add air to tire or service tire monitor system message. Maintaining proper tire pressures is an Owner's Maintenance item and is not covered under warranty. This bulletin is being revised to add model years and update additional bulletin reference information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 09-03-16-002 (Section 03 -- Suspension). Customer Concerns and Confusion with the Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPM) System The following procedure should be used by dealership service consultants when a customer comes into the service drive with a "low tire light" on or comments on a check tire pressure/low tire pressure/add air to tire or service tire monitor system message. The service consultant should perform the following steps: Procedure Turn the key to ON, without starting the engine. ^ If the low tire light comes on and stays on solid with a check tire pressure/low tire pressure/add air to tire message (on vehicles equipped with DIC), advise the customer: - The system is working properly. - Properly adjusting all tire air pressures to the recommended levels and driving the vehicle will turn the light off (refer to the Tire and Loading Information label on the driver side door). - More detailed information can be found in the Owner Manual. - Service is not covered under warranty - this maintenance is the responsibility of the owner. - Give the customer a copy of the "GM Customer TPMS Information". ^ If the Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM) light blinks for one minute then stays on solid with a service tire monitor system message (on vehicles equipped with DIC): - A TPM system problem exists. The vehicle should be written up accordingly and sent to your service department for further DTC diagnosis and service. - If dashes (--) are displayed in only one or two of the tire pressure readouts, it is likely caused by a previous TPM system relearn that was performed incorrectly due to interference from another vehicle's TPM system during the relearn process (refer to the Important statement later in this bulletin regarding TPM relearn with a Tech 2(R)). - If dashes (--) are displayed in all four of the tire pressure readouts, there is a system problem. Follow the appropriate SI service procedures. ^ If a customer indicates the low tire light comes on for a few minutes when the vehicle is started, then goes off after driving a while, advise the customer: - The system is working properly. - Most likely, air pressure in one or more of the tires is low enough to turn the light on when tires are cold. After driving for a while, tires will heat Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Low Tire Pressure Indicator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM System Message/Service Tips > Page 1859 up, allowing tire air pressure to increase above the threshold causing the light to go off. Properly adjusting all tire air pressures to the recommended levels will correct this (Refer to the Tire and Loading Information Label on the driver side door). - More detailed information can be found in the Owner Manual. - Service is not covered under warranty - this maintenance is the responsibility of the owner. - Give the customer a copy of the "GM Customer TPMS Information". For more detailed information, refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 07-03-16-004C and TPMS Training Course 13044.12T2. Tire Pressure Light At key on, without starting the vehicle: Steady Solid Glowing TPM Indicator If the TPM indicator appears as a steady glowing yellow lamp (as above), the system is functioning properly and you should add air to the tires to correct this condition. Blinking TPM Indicator If the TPM indicator appears as a BLINKING yellow lamp for one minute and then stays on solid, diagnostic service is needed. The Effect of Outside Temperature on Tire Pressures Important: As a rule of thumb, tire pressure will change about 7kPa (1 psi) for every 6°C (10°F) decrease in temperature - Tire pressure will drop when it gets colder outside, and rise when it gets warmer. Under certain situations such as extreme outside temperature changes, the system may bring on a solid light with a check tire pressure message. This should be considered normal and the system is working properly. The light will turn off upon adding the proper amount of air to the tires (refer to the Tire & Loading Information label in the driver's door opening). When properly adjusting tire air pressure, the following steps are important to help optimize the system and prolong bringing a tire pressure light on: ^ Use an accurate, high quality tire pressure gauge. ^ Never set the tire pressure below the specified placard value regardless of tire temperature or ambient temperature. ^ Tire pressure should be set to the specified placard pressure at the lowest seasonal temperature the vehicle will encounter during operation. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Low Tire Pressure Indicator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM System Message/Service Tips > Page 1860 ^ When adding proper tire air pressure, it is important to remember fluctuations in outside air temperatures and tire temperatures effect tire air pressures. ^ After you have added the proper tire pressure, if the vehicle has a DIC (after the system has updated), check to see if DIC displays are the same readings as the tire pressure gauge used (adjust as necessary). ^ Only perform a TPM sensor re-learn after a tire rotation or system part replacements and use the Tech 2(R) to initiate the relearn whenever possible to avoid invalid sensor I.D. learns. Important: Always take outside temperature and tire temperature into consideration to properly set tire pressures. Foe example, on colder days (20°F/-7°C), if setting tire pressure when the vehicle has been indoors (60°F/16°C) or the tires are warm from being driven, it will be necessary to compensate for the low outside temperature by adding 21-27 kPa (3-4 psi) more then the placecard pressure. At some later time, when the vehicle has been parked outside for a while, the tires will cool off and the pressures will drop back into the placecard range. Important: Recently, nitrogen gas (for use in inflating tires) has become available to the general customer through some retailers. The use of nitrogen gas to inflate tires is a technology used in automobile racing. Tires inflated with nitrogen gas may exhibit less of a pressure change in response to outside temperature changes. Nitrogen gas inflation is compatible with GM TPM sensors. For additional information, refer to Corporate Service Bulletin 05-03-10-020C. Important: All Models (Except the Pontiac Vibe): Do not perform a TPM relearn at PDI, the system has already been set at the Assembly Plant. Do not perform a TPM relearn after adding air to the tires. The low tire light is similar to the low fuel indicator and adding something (fuel, air) to the vehicle makes that light turn back off again. Note that because of system behavior, some vehicles must be driven a short distance before the sensors recognize the increase in pressure and turns the light off again. Pontiac Vibe Only: Do not use the TPMS reset button to turn off the light. The system will update and light will turn off when all tire pressures have been adjusted followed by short distance drive. Important: All models (except the Pontiac Vibe): Each tire monitor sensor is learned to a specific vehicle corner. When performing a TPM relearn (only after a tire rotation or replacement of a TPM sensor or Module), always use the Tech2(R) to initiate the J 46079 relearned process. Tech 2(R) - initiated relearns lock out other vehicle TPM signals that may be broadcasting in the area. Only signals initiated by the J 46079 tool will be accepted. This method avoids storing false TPM I.D.s and will prevent customers from returning with dashes (--) displayed in tire pressure readouts and/or a flashing tire pressure monitor (TPM) light. Checking the four TPM I.D.s with the Tech 2(R) prior to and following relearn to verify they are the same can prevent invalid I.D. learns. Pontiac Vibe Only: Tire Monitor Sensors are not learned to a specific vehicle corner. Do not perform a TPM Reset after tire rotation. The TPMS Reset button must only be used during pre-delivery inspection by the dealer to initialize the system (after all tire pressures have been adjusted properly) or when a Tire Pressure Monitor System component is replaced. The J 46079 tool does not work on Vibe TPM sensors. A TPMS relearn on Vibe must be preformed with a Tech 2(R) to set the TPMS Module in learn mode. The TPMS sensor IDs are entered through the Tech 2(R). Refer to SI for further Vibe TPMS information. Labor Operation and Repair Order/Warranty System Claim Required Documentation Important: The ONLY time labor operation E0726 or E0722 should be used is to diagnose for a system issue. That should ONLY occur if, at key ON, without starting the engine, the Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM) blinks for one minute and then stays on solid with a Service Tire Monitor System message (on vehicles equipped with a DIC) If that occurs, a TPM system problem exists and the system will have set a DTC. If one of these operastions is used, the following Repair Order and Warranty System documentation are required: ^ Document the customer complaint on the Repair Order. ^ Document the TPMS DTC that has set on the Repair Order. ^ Enter the TPMS DTC in the Warranty System (WINS) in the Failure Code/DTC field on the claim submission (refer to the Claims Processing Manual, Section IV, Warranty claim Data, Page 6, Item G). If the above information is not documented on the Repair Order and Warranty System, the claim may be rejected. If the Warranty Parts Center (WPC) generates a request, this repair order documentation must be sent back. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Low Tire Pressure Indicator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM System Message/Service Tips > Page 1861 Customer TPMS Information Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Low Tire Pressure Indicator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM System Message/Service Tips > Page 1862 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Low Tire Pressure Indicator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM System Message/Service Tips > Page 1863 Frequently Asked Questions Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > TPMS System - Service And Re-Learning Sensor IDs Tire Pressure Module: Technical Service Bulletins TPMS System - Service And Re-Learning Sensor IDs INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 10-03-16-001 Date: July 19, 2010 Subject: TPMS System Service and Re-Learning Sensor IDs Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2 2009 and Prior HUMMER H3 2010 and Prior Saturn Models 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X with Wheel-Mounted Tire Pressure Sensors In the event that the spare tire, which is normally not equipped with a tire pressure monitor (TPM) sensor, is installed in place of one of the road tires and the vehicle is driven above 40 km/h (25 mph) for 20 minutes or more, the TPM indicator icon on the instrument panel cluster (IPC) will flash for approximately one minute and then remain on steady each time the ignition is turned ON, indicating a diagnostic trouble code (DTC) has been set. The driver information center (DIC), if equipped, will also display a SERVICE TIRE MONITOR type message. When the road tire is repaired and reinstalled in the original location, the TPM indicator icon illumination and DIC message may remain displayed until the DTC is cleared. To ensure that the TPM indicator and the DIC message are cleared after service, it is necessary to clear any TPM DTCs using a scan tool. If a scan tool is unavailable, performing the TPM relearn procedure using a TPM diagnostic tool will provide the same results. It is advised to perform the relearn procedure away from other vehicles to prevent picking up a stray sensor signal. If one or more of the TPM sensors are missing or damaged and have been replaced, then the relearn procedure must be performed. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > TPMS System - Service And Re-Learning Sensor IDs Tire Pressure Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins TPMS System - Service And Re-Learning Sensor IDs INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 10-03-16-001 Date: July 19, 2010 Subject: TPMS System Service and Re-Learning Sensor IDs Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2 2009 and Prior HUMMER H3 2010 and Prior Saturn Models 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X with Wheel-Mounted Tire Pressure Sensors In the event that the spare tire, which is normally not equipped with a tire pressure monitor (TPM) sensor, is installed in place of one of the road tires and the vehicle is driven above 40 km/h (25 mph) for 20 minutes or more, the TPM indicator icon on the instrument panel cluster (IPC) will flash for approximately one minute and then remain on steady each time the ignition is turned ON, indicating a diagnostic trouble code (DTC) has been set. The driver information center (DIC), if equipped, will also display a SERVICE TIRE MONITOR type message. When the road tire is repaired and reinstalled in the original location, the TPM indicator icon illumination and DIC message may remain displayed until the DTC is cleared. To ensure that the TPM indicator and the DIC message are cleared after service, it is necessary to clear any TPM DTCs using a scan tool. If a scan tool is unavailable, performing the TPM relearn procedure using a TPM diagnostic tool will provide the same results. It is advised to perform the relearn procedure away from other vehicles to prevent picking up a stray sensor signal. If one or more of the TPM sensors are missing or damaged and have been replaced, then the relearn procedure must be performed. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 1872 Tire Pressure Sensor: Testing and Inspection Tire Pressure Indicator Sensor Learn Special Tools J-46079 Tire Pressure Monitor Diagnostic Tool Relearn Mode Description The tire pressure monitor (TPM) system uses the instrument panel cluster (IPC), body control module (BCM), 4 radio frequency transmitting pressure sensors, and the serial data circuit to perform the TPM Relearn mode functions. The sensor Relearn procedure must be performed after every tire rotation, BCM replacement, or sensor replacement. Once the relearn mode has been enabled, each of the sensors unique identification codes can be learned into the BCM memory. When a sensor ID has been learned, the BCM sends a serial data message to the BCM to sound a horn chirp. This verifies the sensor has transmitted its ID and the BCM has received and learned it. The BCM must learn the sensor IDs in the proper sequence to determine correct sensor location. The first learned ID is assigned to the left front location, the second to right front, the third to right rear and the fourth to left rear. The turn signals will individually illuminate indicating which location is to be learned in the proper sequence. Sensor Functions Using J-46079 or EL-46079 Each sensor has an internal low frequency coil. When the J-46079 is used in activate mode, it produces a low frequency transmission that activates the sensor. The sensor responds to a low frequency activation by transmitting in learn mode. When the BCM receives a learn mode transmission while in TPM learn mode, it will assign that sensors ID to the location on the vehicle relative to the order in which it was learned. Sensor Functions Using Pressure Increase/Decrease Method Each sensor takes a pressure measurement sample once every 30 seconds while in stationary mode. If the tire pressure increases, or decreases by more than 8.3 kPa (1.2 psi) from the last pressure measurement, another measurement will occur immediately to verify the change in pressure. If a pressure change has indeed occurred, the sensor transmits in Learn mode. When the BCM receives a Learn mode transmission while in TPM learn mode, it will assign that sensor's ID to the location on the vehicle relative to the order in which it was learned. Relearn Mode Cancellation The Relearn mode will cancel if the ignition is cycled to OFF or if more than 2 minutes has elapsed for any sensor that has not been learned. If the relearn mode is cancelled before the first sensor is learned, the original sensor IDs will be maintained. If the relearn mode is canceled after the first sensor is learned, the following will occur: * All stored sensor IDs will be invalidated in the BCM memory. * If equipped, the DIC will display dashes instead of tire pressures. * DTC C0775 will be set. These conditions will now require the relearn procedure to be repeated for the system to function properly. TPM Relearn Procedure Note: If using the scan tool to enable the relearn mode, the J-46079 must be used to activate the sensors. When this preferred method is used, any stray sensor signals will not affect the relearn procedure. In the event a particular sensor's information is displayed on the special tool upon activation but the horn does not chirp, it may be necessary to rotate the wheel valve stem to a different position due to the sensor signal is being blocked by another component. If using the DIC buttons to enable the relearn mode, the J-46079 or Pressure Increase/Decrease Method may be used. Before proceeding with this method, ensure that no other learn procedure is being performed simultaneously or that tire pressures are not being adjusted on another TPM equipped vehicle within close proximity. Stray signals from other TPM equipped vehicles just driving by can be inadvertently learned. If any random horn chirps are heard from the vehicle while performing the learn procedure, most likely a stray sensor has been learned and the procedure will need to be cancelled and repeated. Under these circumstances, performing the TPM Relearn Procedure away from other vehicles would be highly recommended. In the event a particular sensor activation does not cause the horn to chirp, it may be necessary to rotate the wheel valve stem to a different position due to the sensor signal is being blocked by another component. Preferred Scan Tool Relearn Enable Method 1. Apply park brake (manual transmission only). 2. Ignition ON, using a scan tool, initiate the Tire Pressure Sensors Learn mode. A double horn chirp will sound indicating the Relearn mode has been enabled. The left front turn signal will also be illuminated. 3. Starting with the left front tire, active the sensor by holding the antenna of the J-46079 aimed upward against the tire sidewall close to the wheel rim at the valve stem location. Press and release the Activate button and wait for a horn chirp. Once the horn chirp has sounded, the sensor information is learned and the turn signal in the next location to be learned will illuminate. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 1873 4. After the horn chirp has sounded and the right front turn signal is illuminated, repeat step 2 for the remaining 3 sensors in the following order: 1. Right front 2. Right rear 3. Left rear 5. When the left rear sensor has been learned and a double horn chirp has sounded, the learn process is complete and the BCM exits the Relearn mode. 6. Ignition OFF, adjust all tires to the recommended pressures. Refer to Vehicle Certification, Tire Placard, Anti-Theft, and Service Parts ID Label ( See: Application and ID/Vehicle Certification, Tire Placard, Anti-Theft and Service Parts ID Label). Alternate DIC Relearn Enable Method 1. Apply park brake (manual transmission only). 2. Ignition ON, activate the Relearn mode with the driver information center (DIC) display controls. A double horn chirp sounds indicating the Relearn mode has been enabled and the left front turn signal will also be illuminated. 3. Starting with the left front tire, activate the tire pressure sensor by using one of the following methods: * Hold the antenna of the J-46079 aimed upward against the tire sidewall close to the wheel rim at the valve stem location. Press and release the activate button and wait for a horn chirp. Once the horn chirp has sounded, the sensor information is learned and the turn signal in the next location to be learned will illuminate. Warning Over inflating tires may cause personal injury or damage to the tires and wheels. When increasing tire pressure do not exceed the maximum inflation pressure as noted on the tire sidewall. * Increase/decrease the tire pressure for 8-10 seconds then wait for a horn chirp. The horn chirp may occur before or up to 30 seconds after the 8-10 second pressure increase/decrease time period has been reached. Once the horn chirp has sounded, the sensor information is learned and the turn signal in the next location to be learned will illuminate. 4. After the horn chirp has sounded and the right front turn signal is illuminated, repeat step 2 for the remaining 3 sensors in the following order: 1. Right front 2. Right rear 3. Left rear 5. When the left rear sensor has been learned and a double horn chirp has sounded, the learn process is complete and the BCM exits the Relearn mode. 6. Ignition OFF, adjust all tires to the recommended pressures. Refer to Vehicle Certification, Tire Placard, Anti-Theft, and Service Parts ID Label ( See: Application and ID/Vehicle Certification, Tire Placard, Anti-Theft and Service Parts ID Label). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 1874 Tire Pressure Sensor: Service and Repair Tire Pressure Indicator Sensor Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Raise the vehicle on a suitable support. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle (See: Vehicle Lifting/Service and Repair). 2. Remove the tire/wheel assembly from the vehicle. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation (See: Service and Repair). Note: Before the tire is removed from the wheel, note the following items to avoid tire pressure sensor damage upon tire dismounting. * Place the sensor's cap and valve on a dry clean surface after removal. The cap is aluminum and the valve is nickel plated to prevent corrosion and are not to be substituted with a cap or valve made of any other material. * When separating the tire bead from the wheel, position the bead breaking fixture 90 degrees from the valve stem. * Position the mounting/dismounting head so the tire iron, or pry bar can be inserted slightly clockwise of the sensor body when prying the tire bead up and over the mounting/dismounting head. * Using the tire machine, rotate the tire/wheel assembly clockwise when transferring the tire bead to the out side of the wheel rim. * Repeat items for inner bead. 3. Remove the tire from the wheel. Refer to Tire Dismounting and Mounting (See: Tires/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement). Note: If any tire sealant is noted upon tire dismounting, remove all residual liquid sealant from the inside of the tire and wheel surfaces. 4. Remove the tire pressure sensor nut. 5. Remove the tire pressure sensor. Installation Procedure 1. Clean any dirt or debris from the grommet sealing area. 2. Insert the sensor in the wheel hole with the air passage facing away from the wheel. Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener Caution). 3. Install the sensor nut and position the sensor body parallel to the inside wheel surface while torquing. Tighten the sensor nut to 7 Nm (62 lb in). Note: Before reinstalling the tire on the wheel, note the following items to avoid tire pressure sensor damage upon tire mounting: Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 1875 * Position the mounting/dismounting head 180 degrees from the valve stem. * Position the bead transition area 45 degrees counterclockwise of the valve stem. * Using the tire machine, rotate the tire/wheel assembly clockwise when transferring the tire bead to the inside of the wheel rim. * Repeat items for outer bead. 4. Install the tire on the wheel. Refer to Tire Dismounting and Mounting (See: Tires/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement). Note: A service replacement tire pressure sensor is shipped in OFF mode. In this mode the sensor's unique identification code cannot be learned into the liftgate module (LGM) memory. The sensor must be taken out of OFF mode by spinning the tire/wheel assembly above 32 km/h (20 mph) in order to close the sensor's internal roll switch for at least 10 seconds. 5. Install the tire/wheel assembly on the vehicle. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation (See: Service and Repair). 6. Lower the vehicle. 7. Learn the tire pressure sensors. Refer to Tire Pressure Indicator Sensor Learn (See: Testing and Inspection). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM System Message/Service Tips Tires: Technical Service Bulletins Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM System Message/Service Tips # 09-03-16-002A: Dealership Service Consultant Procedure as Vehicle Comes into Service Drive for Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM) System Message, Light and Customer Information - (Apr 27, 2010) Subject: Dealership Service Consultant Procedure as Vehicle Comes into Service Drive for Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM) System Message, Light and Customer Information Models: 2006-2011 Cars and Light Duty Trucks (Including Saturn and Saab) 2006-2010 HUMMER H2, H3 ATTENTION The information found in this bulletin is to be used as a dealership service consultant procedures for customers coming into the service lane with an illuminated "low tire light" or comments on a check tire pressure/low tire pressure/add air to tire or service tire monitor system message. Maintaining proper tire pressures is an Owner's Maintenance item and is not covered under warranty. This bulletin is being revised to add model years and update additional bulletin reference information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 09-03-16-002 (Section 03 -- Suspension). Customer Concerns and Confusion with the Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPM) System The following procedure should be used by dealership service consultants when a customer comes into the service drive with a "low tire light" on or comments on a check tire pressure/low tire pressure/add air to tire or service tire monitor system message. The service consultant should perform the following steps: Procedure Turn the key to ON, without starting the engine. ^ If the low tire light comes on and stays on solid with a check tire pressure/low tire pressure/add air to tire message (on vehicles equipped with DIC), advise the customer: - The system is working properly. - Properly adjusting all tire air pressures to the recommended levels and driving the vehicle will turn the light off (refer to the Tire and Loading Information label on the driver side door). - More detailed information can be found in the Owner Manual. - Service is not covered under warranty - this maintenance is the responsibility of the owner. - Give the customer a copy of the "GM Customer TPMS Information". ^ If the Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM) light blinks for one minute then stays on solid with a service tire monitor system message (on vehicles equipped with DIC): - A TPM system problem exists. The vehicle should be written up accordingly and sent to your service department for further DTC diagnosis and service. - If dashes (--) are displayed in only one or two of the tire pressure readouts, it is likely caused by a previous TPM system relearn that was performed incorrectly due to interference from another vehicle's TPM system during the relearn process (refer to the Important statement later in this bulletin regarding TPM relearn with a Tech 2(R)). - If dashes (--) are displayed in all four of the tire pressure readouts, there is a system problem. Follow the appropriate SI service procedures. ^ If a customer indicates the low tire light comes on for a few minutes when the vehicle is started, then goes off after driving a while, advise the customer: - The system is working properly. - Most likely, air pressure in one or more of the tires is low enough to turn the light on when tires are cold. After driving for a while, tires will heat Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM System Message/Service Tips > Page 1880 up, allowing tire air pressure to increase above the threshold causing the light to go off. Properly adjusting all tire air pressures to the recommended levels will correct this (Refer to the Tire and Loading Information Label on the driver side door). - More detailed information can be found in the Owner Manual. - Service is not covered under warranty - this maintenance is the responsibility of the owner. - Give the customer a copy of the "GM Customer TPMS Information". For more detailed information, refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 07-03-16-004C and TPMS Training Course 13044.12T2. Tire Pressure Light At key on, without starting the vehicle: Steady Solid Glowing TPM Indicator If the TPM indicator appears as a steady glowing yellow lamp (as above), the system is functioning properly and you should add air to the tires to correct this condition. Blinking TPM Indicator If the TPM indicator appears as a BLINKING yellow lamp for one minute and then stays on solid, diagnostic service is needed. The Effect of Outside Temperature on Tire Pressures Important: As a rule of thumb, tire pressure will change about 7kPa (1 psi) for every 6°C (10°F) decrease in temperature - Tire pressure will drop when it gets colder outside, and rise when it gets warmer. Under certain situations such as extreme outside temperature changes, the system may bring on a solid light with a check tire pressure message. This should be considered normal and the system is working properly. The light will turn off upon adding the proper amount of air to the tires (refer to the Tire & Loading Information label in the driver's door opening). When properly adjusting tire air pressure, the following steps are important to help optimize the system and prolong bringing a tire pressure light on: ^ Use an accurate, high quality tire pressure gauge. ^ Never set the tire pressure below the specified placard value regardless of tire temperature or ambient temperature. ^ Tire pressure should be set to the specified placard pressure at the lowest seasonal temperature the vehicle will encounter during operation. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM System Message/Service Tips > Page 1881 ^ When adding proper tire air pressure, it is important to remember fluctuations in outside air temperatures and tire temperatures effect tire air pressures. ^ After you have added the proper tire pressure, if the vehicle has a DIC (after the system has updated), check to see if DIC displays are the same readings as the tire pressure gauge used (adjust as necessary). ^ Only perform a TPM sensor re-learn after a tire rotation or system part replacements and use the Tech 2(R) to initiate the relearn whenever possible to avoid invalid sensor I.D. learns. Important: Always take outside temperature and tire temperature into consideration to properly set tire pressures. Foe example, on colder days (20°F/-7°C), if setting tire pressure when the vehicle has been indoors (60°F/16°C) or the tires are warm from being driven, it will be necessary to compensate for the low outside temperature by adding 21-27 kPa (3-4 psi) more then the placecard pressure. At some later time, when the vehicle has been parked outside for a while, the tires will cool off and the pressures will drop back into the placecard range. Important: Recently, nitrogen gas (for use in inflating tires) has become available to the general customer through some retailers. The use of nitrogen gas to inflate tires is a technology used in automobile racing. Tires inflated with nitrogen gas may exhibit less of a pressure change in response to outside temperature changes. Nitrogen gas inflation is compatible with GM TPM sensors. For additional information, refer to Corporate Service Bulletin 05-03-10-020C. Important: All Models (Except the Pontiac Vibe): Do not perform a TPM relearn at PDI, the system has already been set at the Assembly Plant. Do not perform a TPM relearn after adding air to the tires. The low tire light is similar to the low fuel indicator and adding something (fuel, air) to the vehicle makes that light turn back off again. Note that because of system behavior, some vehicles must be driven a short distance before the sensors recognize the increase in pressure and turns the light off again. Pontiac Vibe Only: Do not use the TPMS reset button to turn off the light. The system will update and light will turn off when all tire pressures have been adjusted followed by short distance drive. Important: All models (except the Pontiac Vibe): Each tire monitor sensor is learned to a specific vehicle corner. When performing a TPM relearn (only after a tire rotation or replacement of a TPM sensor or Module), always use the Tech2(R) to initiate the J 46079 relearned process. Tech 2(R) - initiated relearns lock out other vehicle TPM signals that may be broadcasting in the area. Only signals initiated by the J 46079 tool will be accepted. This method avoids storing false TPM I.D.s and will prevent customers from returning with dashes (--) displayed in tire pressure readouts and/or a flashing tire pressure monitor (TPM) light. Checking the four TPM I.D.s with the Tech 2(R) prior to and following relearn to verify they are the same can prevent invalid I.D. learns. Pontiac Vibe Only: Tire Monitor Sensors are not learned to a specific vehicle corner. Do not perform a TPM Reset after tire rotation. The TPMS Reset button must only be used during pre-delivery inspection by the dealer to initialize the system (after all tire pressures have been adjusted properly) or when a Tire Pressure Monitor System component is replaced. The J 46079 tool does not work on Vibe TPM sensors. A TPMS relearn on Vibe must be preformed with a Tech 2(R) to set the TPMS Module in learn mode. The TPMS sensor IDs are entered through the Tech 2(R). Refer to SI for further Vibe TPMS information. Labor Operation and Repair Order/Warranty System Claim Required Documentation Important: The ONLY time labor operation E0726 or E0722 should be used is to diagnose for a system issue. That should ONLY occur if, at key ON, without starting the engine, the Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM) blinks for one minute and then stays on solid with a Service Tire Monitor System message (on vehicles equipped with a DIC) If that occurs, a TPM system problem exists and the system will have set a DTC. If one of these operastions is used, the following Repair Order and Warranty System documentation are required: ^ Document the customer complaint on the Repair Order. ^ Document the TPMS DTC that has set on the Repair Order. ^ Enter the TPMS DTC in the Warranty System (WINS) in the Failure Code/DTC field on the claim submission (refer to the Claims Processing Manual, Section IV, Warranty claim Data, Page 6, Item G). If the above information is not documented on the Repair Order and Warranty System, the claim may be rejected. If the Warranty Parts Center (WPC) generates a request, this repair order documentation must be sent back. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM System Message/Service Tips > Page 1882 Customer TPMS Information Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM System Message/Service Tips > Page 1883 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM System Message/Service Tips > Page 1884 Frequently Asked Questions Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM System Message/Service Tips > Page 1885 Tires: Technical Service Bulletins TPMS System - Service And Re-Learning Sensor IDs INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 10-03-16-001 Date: July 19, 2010 Subject: TPMS System Service and Re-Learning Sensor IDs Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2 2009 and Prior HUMMER H3 2010 and Prior Saturn Models 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X with Wheel-Mounted Tire Pressure Sensors In the event that the spare tire, which is normally not equipped with a tire pressure monitor (TPM) sensor, is installed in place of one of the road tires and the vehicle is driven above 40 km/h (25 mph) for 20 minutes or more, the TPM indicator icon on the instrument panel cluster (IPC) will flash for approximately one minute and then remain on steady each time the ignition is turned ON, indicating a diagnostic trouble code (DTC) has been set. The driver information center (DIC), if equipped, will also display a SERVICE TIRE MONITOR type message. When the road tire is repaired and reinstalled in the original location, the TPM indicator icon illumination and DIC message may remain displayed until the DTC is cleared. To ensure that the TPM indicator and the DIC message are cleared after service, it is necessary to clear any TPM DTCs using a scan tool. If a scan tool is unavailable, performing the TPM relearn procedure using a TPM diagnostic tool will provide the same results. It is advised to perform the relearn procedure away from other vehicles to prevent picking up a stray sensor signal. If one or more of the TPM sensors are missing or damaged and have been replaced, then the relearn procedure must be performed. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM System Message/Service Tips > Page 1886 Tires: Technical Service Bulletins Wheels/Tires - Use of Nitrogen Gas in Tires INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 05-03-10-020C Date: April 27, 2010 Subject: Use of Nitrogen Gas in Tires Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (including Saturn) 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 05-03-10-020B (Section 03 - Suspension). GM's Position on the Use of Nitrogen Gas in Tires General Motors does not oppose the use of purified nitrogen as an inflation gas for tires. We expect the theoretical benefits to be reduced in practical use due to the lack of an existing infrastructure to continuously facilitate inflating tires with nearly pure nitrogen. Even occasional inflation with compressed atmospheric air will negate many of the theoretical benefits. Given those theoretical benefits, practical limitations, and the robust design of GM original equipment TPC tires, the realized benefits to our customer of inflating their tires with purified nitrogen are expected to be minimal. The Promise of Nitrogen: Under Controlled Conditions Recently, nitrogen gas (for use in inflating tires) has become available to the general consumer through some retailers. The use of nitrogen gas to inflate tires is a technology used in automobile racing. The following benefits under controlled conditions are attributed to nitrogen gas and its unique properties: - A reduction in the expected loss of Tire Pressure over time. - A reduction in the variance of Tire Pressures with temperature changes due to reduction of water vapor concentration. - A reduction of long term rubber degradation due to a decrease in oxygen concentrations. Important These are obtainable performance improvements when relatively pure nitrogen gas is used to inflate tires under controlled conditions. The Promise of Nitrogen: Real World Use Nitrogen inflation can provide some benefit by reducing gas migration (pressure loss) at the molecular level through the tire structure. NHTSA (National Highway Traffic Safety Administration) has stated that the inflation pressure loss of tires can be up to 5% a month. Nitrogen molecules are larger than oxygen molecules and, therefore, are less prone to "seeping" through the tire casing. The actual obtainable benefits of nitrogen vary, based on the physical construction and the materials used in the manufacturing of the tire being inflated. Another potential benefit of nitrogen is the reduced oxidation of tire components. Research has demonstrated that oxygen consumed in the oxidation process of the tire primarily comes from the inflation media. Therefore, it is reasonable to assume that oxidation of tire components can be reduced if the tire is inflated with pure nitrogen. However, only very small amounts of oxygen are required to begin the normal oxidation process. Even slight contamination of the tire inflation gas with compressed atmospheric air during normal inflation pressure maintenance, may negate the benefits of using nitrogen. GM Tire Quality, Technology and Focus of Importance Since 1972, General Motors has designed tires under the TPC (Tire Performance Criteria) specification system, which includes specific requirements that ensure robust tire performance under normal usage. General Motors works with tire suppliers to design and manufacture original equipment tires for GM vehicles. The GM TPC addresses required performance with respect to both inflation pressure retention, and endurance properties for original equipment tires. The inflation pressure retention requirements address availability of oxygen and oxidation concerns, while endurance requirements ensure the mechanical structure of the tire has sufficient strength. This combination has provided our customers with tires that maintain their structural integrity throughout their useful treadlife under normal operating conditions. Regardless of the inflation media for tires (atmospheric air or nitrogen), inflation pressure maintenance of tires is critical for overall tire, and ultimately, vehicle performance. Maintaining the correct inflation pressure allows the tire to perform as intended by the vehicle manufacturer in many areas, including comfort, fuel economy, stopping distance, cornering, traction, treadwear, and noise. Since the load carrying capability of a tire is related to inflation pressure, proper inflation pressure maintenance is necessary for the tire to support the load imposed by the vehicle without excessive structural Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM System Message/Service Tips > Page 1887 degradation. Important Regardless of the inflation media for tires (atmospheric air or nitrogen), inflation pressure maintenance of tires is critical for overall tire, and ultimately, vehicle performance. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM System Message/Service Tips > Page 1888 Tires: Technical Service Bulletins Tires/Wheels - Tire Puncture Repair Procedures INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 04-03-10-001F Date: April 27, 2010 Subject: Tire Puncture Repair Procedures For All Cars and Light Duty Trucks Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (including Saturn) 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 04-03-10-001E (Section 03 - Suspension). This bulletin covers puncture repair procedures for passenger car and light duty truck radial tires in the tread area only. The tire manufacturer must be contacted for its individual repair policy and whether or not the speed rating is retained after repair. Caution - Tire changing can be dangerous and should be done by trained professionals using proper tools and procedures. Always read and understand any manufacturer's warnings contained in their customers literature or molded into the tire sidewall. - Serious eye and ear injury may result from not wearing adequate eye and ear protection while repairing tires. - NEVER inflate beyond 275 kPa (40 pounds) pressure to seat beads. Some run flat tires, such as the Goodyear Extended Mobility Tire (EMT) used on the Corvette, may require more than 275 kPa (40 psi) to seat the bead. In such a case, a tire safety cage must be used. Consult the tire manufacturer for its individual repair policy. - NEVER stand, lean or reach over the assembly during inflation. Repairable area on a radial tire. Important - NEVER repair tires worn to the tread indicators 1.59 mm (2/32") remaining depth). - NEVER repair tires with a tread puncture larger than 6.35 mm (1/4"). - NEVER substitute an inner tube for a permissible or non-permissible repair. - NEVER perform an outside-in tire repair (plug only, on the wheel). - Every tire must be removed from the wheel for proper inspection and repair. - Regardless of the type of repair used, the repair must seal the inner liner and fill the injury. - Consult with repair material supplier/manufacturer for repair unit application procedures and repair tools/repair material recommendations. Three basic steps for tire puncture repair: 1. Remove the tire from the wheel for inspection and repair. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM System Message/Service Tips > Page 1889 2. Fill the injury (puncture) to keep moisture out. 3. Seal the inner liner with a repair unit to prevent air loss. External Inspection 1. Prior to demounting, inspect the tire surface, the valve and the wheel for the source of the leak by using a water and soap solution. Mark the injured area and totally deflate the tire by removing the valve core. 2. Demount the tire from the wheel and place the tire on a well-lighted spreader. Internal Inspection 1. Spread the beads and mark the puncture with a tire crayon. 2. Inspect the inner tire for any signs of internal damage. 3. Remove the puncturing object, noting the direction of the penetration. 4. Probe the injury with a blunt awl in order to determine the extent and direction of the injury. 5. Remove any loose foreign material from the injury. 6. Punctures exceeding 6.35 mm (1/4") should not be repaired. Cleaning 1. Clean the area around the puncture thoroughly with a proper liner cleaner, clean cloth and a scraper. This step serves to remove dirt and mold lubricants to insure proper adhesion and non-contamination of the buffing tool. 2. Refer to information on the product or manufacturer's Material Safety Data Sheet and follow guidelines for handling and disposal. Clean the Injury Channel Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM System Message/Service Tips > Page 1890 1. Use a proper hand reamer, carbide cutter or drill bit to ream the puncture channel from the inside of the tire in order to clean the injury. 2. Remove steel wires protruding above the liner surface to prevent damage to the repair unit. 3. Consult your repair material supplier for recommended reaming tool(s). Fill the Injury 1. It is necessary to fill the injury channel to provide back up for the repair unit and to prevent moisture from entering the tire fabric and steel wires. 2. (For combination repair/plug units skip this step.) Cement the injured channel and fill the injury from the inside of the tire with the repair plug per repair material manufacturer's recommendations. Without stretching the plug, cut the plug off just above the inside tire surface. 3. Consult your repair material supplier for proper repair material selection. Repair Unit Selection Important Do not install the repair unit in this step. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM System Message/Service Tips > Page 1891 1. Center the repair unit over the injury as a reference and outline an area larger than the unit so that buffing will not remove the crayon marks. 2. Remove the repair unit. 3. DO NOT overlap previous or multiple repair units. 4. Consult your repair material supplier for proper repair unit selection. Buffing 1. To prevent contamination and preserve the outline, buff within the marked area thoroughly and evenly with a low speed buffing tool using a fine wire brush or gritted rasp. 2. Buff to a smooth velvet surface (RMA #1 or #2 buffed texture). 3. Use caution not to gouge the inner liner or expose casing fabric. 4. Remove any buffing dust with a vacuum cleaner. 5. Consult your repair material supplier for a proper buffing tool. Cementing Apply chemical cement according to the repair material manufacturer's procedures. Repair Unit Application Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM System Message/Service Tips > Page 1892 1. The tire must be in the relaxed position when the repair unit is installed (Do not spread the beads excessively). Two-Piece Plug and Repair Units 1. If applicable, install the repair unit so that the alignment is correct. 2. Center the repair unit over the injury and stitch down thoroughly with the stitching tool, working from the center out. 3. Being careful not to stretch the plug material, cut the plug flush with the outer tread. Combination Repair/Plug Units 1. Pull the plug through the injury until the repair just reaches the liner. Stitch down thoroughly. 2. Follow the repair material manufacturer's recommendations for further installation instructions. 2. Consult your repair material supplier for the proper stitching tool. Safety Cage Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM System Message/Service Tips > Page 1893 Some run flat tires, such as the Goodyear Extended Mobility Tire (EMT) used on the Corvette, may require more than 275 kPa (40 psi) to seat the bead. In such a case, a tire safety cage must be used. Consult the tire manufacturer for its individual repair policy. Final Inspection 1. After remounting and inflating the tire, check both beads, the repair and the valve with a water and soap solution in order to detect leaks. 2. If the tire continues to lose air, the tire must be demounted and reinspected. 3. Balance the tire and wheel assembly. Refer to Tire and Wheel Assembly Balancing - OFF Vehicle. For additional tire puncture repair information, contact: Rubber Manufacturers Association (RMA) Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM System Message/Service Tips > Page 1894 Tires: Technical Service Bulletins Tires - Slight/Mild Edge Feathering Information INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 07-03-10-008B Date: August 13, 2009 Subject: Information on Slight or Mild Tire Feathering and Recommended Practices (Normal Tire Wear Condition) Models: 2006-2010 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (including Saturn) 2006-2010 HUMMER H2, H3 2006-2009 Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 07-03-10-008A (Section 03 - Suspension). This bulletin provides information regarding the normal tire wear condition of slight or mild tire feathering and recommended practices. If a vehicle comes into a dealership with a concern of slight or mild feathering-type wear on the tires, review with the customer their past tire rotation history. Tires should be rotated every 8,000 to 13,000 km (5,000 to 8,000 mi) for applicable vehicles with tires where a tire rotation is possible or recommended. Refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 05-03-10-015B for information on tire rotation for vehicles with different front/rear tire/wheel sizes. SOME TIRE FEATHERING IS A NORMAL PART OF TIRE WEAR AND THROUGH PROPER TIRE ROTATION AND INFLATION, THIS TIRE WEAR CAN BE MINIMIZED AND TIRE LIFE MAXIMIZED. If the customer has not rotated the tires within the last 8,000 to 13,000 km (5,000 to 8,000 mi), a tire rotation in the modified X-pattern is necessary to clean-up the feathering, rather than placing the vehicle on the alignment machine. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Description and Operation > Tread Wear Indicators Description Tires: Description and Operation Tread Wear Indicators Description Tread Wear Indicators Description The original equipment tires have tread wear indicators that show when you should replace the tires. The location of these indicators are at 60 degree intervals around the outer diameter of the tire. The indicators appear as a 6 mm (0.25 in) wide band when the tire tread depth becomes 1.6 mm (2/32 in). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Description and Operation > Tread Wear Indicators Description > Page 1897 Tires: Description and Operation Tire Inflation Description Tire Inflation Description When you inflate the tires to the recommended inflation pressures, the factory-installed wheels and tires are designed in order to handle loads to the tire's rated load capacity. Incorrect tire pressures, or under-inflated tires, can cause the following conditions: * Vehicle handling concerns * Poor fuel economy * Shortened tire life * Tire overloading Inspect the tire pressure when the following conditions apply: * The vehicle has been sitting at least 3 hours. * The vehicle has not been driven for more than 1.6 km (1 mi). * The tires are cool. Inspect the tires monthly or before any extended trip. Adjust the tire pressure to the specifications on the tire label. Install the valve caps or the extensions on the valves. The caps or the extensions keep out dust and water. The kilopascal (kPa) is the metric term for pressure. The tire pressure may be printed in both kilopascal (kPa) and psi. One psi equals 6.9 kPa. Tires with a higher than recommended pressure can cause the following conditions: * A hard ride * Tire bruising * Rapid tread wear at the center of the tire Tires with a lower than recommended pressure can cause the following conditions: * A tire squeal on turns * Hard steering * Rapid wear and uneven wear on the edge of the tread * Tire rim bruises and tire rim rupture * Tire cord breakage * High tire temperatures * Reduced vehicle handling * High fuel consumption * Soft riding Unequal pressure on the same axle can cause the following conditions: * Uneven braking Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Description and Operation > Tread Wear Indicators Description > Page 1898 * Steering lead * Reduced vehicle handling Refer to the Tire Placard for specific tire and wheel applications and tire pressures. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Description and Operation > Tread Wear Indicators Description > Page 1899 Tires: Description and Operation All Seasons Tires Description All Seasons Tires Description Most Saturn vehicles are equipped with steel belted all-season radial tires as standard equipment. These tires qualify as snow tires, with a higher than average rating for snow traction than the non-all season radial tires previously used. Other performance areas, such as wet traction, rolling resistance, tread life, and air retention, are also improved. This is done by improvements in both tread design and tread compounds. These tires are identified by an M + S molded in the tire side wall after the tire size. The suffix MS is also molded in the tire side wall after the TPC specification number. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Description and Operation > Tread Wear Indicators Description > Page 1900 Tires: Description and Operation P-Metric Sized Tires Description P-Metric Sized Tires Description Most P-metric tire sizes do not have exact corresponding alphanumeric tire sizes. Replacement tires should be of the same tire performance criteria TPC specification number including the same size, the same load range, and the same construction as those originally installed on the vehicle. Consult a tire dealer if you must replace the P-metric tire with other sizes. Tire companies can best recommend the closest match of alphanumeric to P-metric sizes within their own tire lines. The above illustration may not correspond with your vehicle, but is meant as an example. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures Tires: Procedures Tire Repair Tire Repair Warning * Tire changing can be dangerous and should be done by trained professionals using proper tools and procedures. Always read and understand any manufacturer's warnings contained in their customers literature or molded into the tire sidewall. * Serious eye and ear injury may result from not wearing adequate eye and ear protection while repairing tires. * NEVER inflate beyond 275 kPa (40 pounds) pressure to seat beads. * NEVER stand, lean or reach over the assembly during inflation. Note: Repairable area on a radial tire. * NEVER repair tires worn to the tread indicators 1.59 mm (2/32 in) remaining depth. * NEVER repair tires with a tread puncture larger than 6.35 mm (1/4 in). * NEVER substitute an inner tube for a permissible or non-permissible repair. * NEVER perform an outside-in tire repair (plug only, on the wheel). * Every tire must be removed from the wheel for proper inspection and repair. * Regardless of the type of repair used, the repair must seal the inner liner and fill the injury. * Consult with repair material supplier/manufacturer for repair unit application procedures and repair tools/repair material recommendations. Three basic steps for tire puncture repair: 1. Remove the tire from the wheel for inspection and repair. 2. Fill the injury (puncture) to keep moisture out. 3. Seal the inner liner with a repair unit to prevent air loss. External Inspection 1. Prior to demounting, inspect the tire surface, the valve and the wheel for the source of the leak by using a water and soap solution. Mark the injured area and totally deflate the tire by removing the valve core. 2. Demount the tire from the wheel and place the tire on a well-lighted spreader. Internal Inspection Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1903 1. Spread the beads and mark the puncture with a tire crayon. 2. Inspect the inner tire for any signs of internal damage. 3. Remove the puncturing object, noting the direction of the penetration. 4. Probe the injury with a blunt awl in order to determine the extent and direction of the injury. 5. Remove any loose foreign material from the injury. 6. Punctures exceeding 6.35 mm (1/4 in) should not be repaired. Cleaning 1. Clean the area around the puncture thoroughly with a proper liner cleaner, clean cloth and a scraper. This step serves to remove dirt and mold lubricants to insure proper adhesion and non-contamination of the buffing tool. 2. Refer to information on the product or manufacturer's Material Safety Data Sheet and follow guidelines for handling and disposal. Clean the Injury Channel Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1904 1. Use a proper hand reamer, carbide cutter or drill bit to ream the puncture channel from the inside of the tire in order to clean the injury. 2. Remove steel wires protruding above the liner surface to prevent damage to the repair unit. 3. Consult your repair material supplier for recommended reaming tool(s). Fill the Injury 1. It is necessary to fill the injury channel to provide back up for the repair unit and to prevent moisture from entering the tire fabric and steel wires. 2. For combination repair/plug units skip this step. Cement the injured channel and fill the injury from the inside of the tire with the repair plug per repair material manufacturer's recommendations. Without stretching the plug, cut the plug off just above the inside tire surface. 3. Consult your repair material supplier for proper repair material selection. Repair Unit Selection Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1905 Note: Do not install the repair unit in this step. 1. Center the repair unit over the injury as a reference and outline an area larger than the unit so that buffing will not remove the crayon marks. 2. Remove the repair unit. 3. DO NOT overlap previous or multiple repair units. 4. Consult your repair material supplier for proper repair unit selection. Buffing 1. To prevent contamination and preserve the outline, buff within the marked area thoroughly and evenly with a low speed buffing tool using a fine wire brush or gritted rasp. 2. Buff to a smooth velvet surface (RMA #1 or #2 buffed texture). 3. Use caution not to gouge the inner liner or expose casing fabric. 4. Remove any buffing dust with a vacuum cleaner. 5. Consult your repair material supplier for a proper buffing tool. Cementing Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1906 Apply chemical cement according to the repair material manufacturer's procedures. Repair Unit Application The tire must be in the relaxed position when the repair unit is installed. Do not spread the beads excessively. Two-Piece Plug and Repair Units 1. If applicable, install the repair unit so that the alignment is correct. 2. Center the repair unit over the injury and stitch down thoroughly with the stitching tool, working from the center out. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1907 3. Being careful not to stretch the plug material, cut the plug flush with the outer tread. Combination Repair/Plug Units 1. Pull the plug through the injury until the repair just reaches the liner. Stitch down thoroughly. 2. Follow the repair material manufacturer's recommendations for further installation instructions. Consult your repair material supplier for the proper stitching tool. Safety Cage Some run flat tires may require more than 275 kPa (40 psi) to seat the bead. In such a case, a tire safety cage must be used. Consult the tire manufacturer for its individual repair policy. Final Inspection Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1908 1. After remounting and inflating the tire, check both beads, the repair and the valve with a water and soap solution in order to detect leaks. 2. If the tire continues to lose air, the tire must be demounted and reinspected. 3. Balance the tire and wheel assembly. Refer to Tire and Wheel Assembly Balancing - Off Vehicle (See: Body and Frame/Testing and Inspection/Vibration Diagnosis and Correction/Repair Instructions/Tire and Wheel Assembly Balancing - Off Vehicle). For additional tire puncture repair information, contact: Rubber Manufacturers Association (RMA) 1400 K Street, N.W., Suite 900 Washington, DC 20005-2403 Tire Rotation Tire Rotation Rotate the tires and wheels at frequent intervals to equalize wear. Refer to Maintenance Schedule (North American Emissions) (See: ). In addition to scheduled rotation, rotate the tire and wheel whenever uneven tire wear is noticed. Radial tires tend to wear faster in the shoulder area, particularly in front positions. Radial tires in non-drive locations may develop an irregular wear pattern that may increase tire noise. This makes regular rotation especially necessary. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation (See: Service and Repair). Always use a 4-wheel rotation. After rotation, check the wheel nuts for specified torque. Then, set the tire pressure. After the tires have been rotated, the tire pressure sensors must be reset, if applicable. Refer to Refer to Tire Pressure Indicator Sensor Learn. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1909 Tires: Removal and Replacement Tire Dismounting and Mounting Caution: Use a tire changing machine in order to dismount tires. Do not use hand tools or tire irons alone in order to remove the tire from the wheel. Damage to the tire beads or the wheel rim could result. Caution: Do not scratch or damage the clear coating on aluminum wheels with the tire changing equipment. Scratching the clear coating could cause the aluminum wheel to corrode and the clear coating to peel from the wheel. Caution: Damage to either the tire bead or the wheel mounting holes can result from the use of improper wheel attachment or tire mounting procedures. It takes up to 70 seconds for all of the air to completely exhaust from a large tire. Failure to follow the proper procedures could cause the tire changer to put enough force on the tire to bend the wheel at the mounting surface. Such damage may result in vibration and/or shimmy, and under severe usage lead to wheel cracking. 1. Remove the valve core from the valve stem. 2. Deflate the tire completely. Note: Rim-clamp European-type tire changers are recommended. 3. Use the tire changer in order to remove the tire from the wheel. Follow steps 4-7 to remove the tire from the wheel. 4. When separating the tire bead from the wheel, position the bead breaking fixture 90, 180 and 270 degrees from the valve stem. Caution: Failure to position valve stem in proper position while dismounting and mounting the tire may result in the TPM sensor to become damaged. 5. Position the wheel and tire so the valve stem is at the 7 o'clock position relative to the head. The tire iron or pry bar can be inserted when prying the outer tire bead up and over the mounting/dismounting head. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1910 6. Position the wheel and tire so the valve stem is again at the 7 o'clock position relative to the head. The tire iron or pry bar can be inserted when prying the inner tire bead up and over the mounting/dismounting head. 7. Remove all residual liquid sealant from the inside of the tire and wheel surfaces. If any tire sealant is noted upon tire dismounting on vehicles equipped with TPM, replace the tire pressure sensor. Refer to Tire Pressure Indicator Sensor Replacement (See: Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires/Tire Pressure Sensor/Service and Repair). 8. Use a wire brush or coarse steel wool in order to remove any rubber, light rust or corrosion from the wheel bead seats. Caution: When mounting the tires, use an approved tire mounting lubricant. DO NOT use silicon or corrosive base compounds to lubricate the tire bead and the wheel rim. A silicon base compound can cause the tire to slip on the rim. A corrosive type compound can cause tire or rim deterioration. 9. Apply mounting lubricant to the tire bead and the wheel rim. Refer to Adhesives, Fluids, Lubricants, and Sealers (See: Specifications/Fluid Type Specifications/Suspension/Tires and Wheels). 10. Position the rim so the valve stem (1) is at the 7 o'clock position relative to the head (2). This will protect the sensor when the bottom bead seats. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1911 11. Using the tire machine, rotate the tire/wheel assembly clockwise when transferring the tire bead to the inside of the wheel rim. Ensure that the valve stem (1) is at the 7 o'clock position. 12. After the bottom bead is on the wheel, reposition the wheel and tire so that the valve stem (1) is at the 7 o'clock position relative to the head. This will protect the sensor while mounting the tire bead to the outside of the wheel. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1912 13. Use the tire changer in order to install the tire to the wheel. Warning To avoid serious personal injury, do not stand over tire when inflating. The bead may break when the bead snaps over the safety hump. Do not exceed 275 kPa (40 psi) pressure when inflating any tire if beads are not seated. If 275 kPa (40 psi) pressure will not seat the beads, deflate, relubricate the beads and reinflate. Overinflation may cause the bead to break and cause serious personal injury. 14. Inflate the tire until it passes the bead humps. Be sure that the valve core is not installed at this time. 15. Install the valve core to the valve core stem. 16. Inflate the tire to the proper air pressure. 17. Ensure that the locating rings are visible on both sides of the tire in order to verify that the tire bead is fully seated on the wheel. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 00-03-10-006F > May > 10 > Wheels/Tires - Tire Radial Force Variation (RFV) Wheels: Customer Interest Wheels/Tires - Tire Radial Force Variation (RFV) INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 00-03-10-006F Date: May 04, 2010 Subject: Information on Tire Radial Force Variation (RFV) Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X 2000-2005 Saturn L Series 2003-2007 Saturn ION Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to considerably expand the available information on Radial Force Variation (RFV) and should be reviewed in whole. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 00-03-10-006E (Section 03 - Suspension). Important - Before measuring tires on equipment such as the Hunter GSP9700, the vehicle MUST be driven a minimum of 16 km (10 mi) to ensure removal of any flat-spotting. Refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 03-03-10-007E - Tire/Wheel Characteristics of GM Original Equipment Tires. - Equipment such as the Hunter GSP9700 MUST be calibrated prior to measuring tire/wheel assemblies for each vehicle. The purpose of this bulletin is to provide guidance to GM dealers when using tire force variation measurement equipment, such as the Hunter GSP9700. This type of equipment can be a valuable tool in diagnosing vehicle ride concerns. The most common ride concern involving tire radial force variation is highway speed shake on smooth roads. Tire related smooth road highway speed shake can be caused by three conditions: imbalance, out of round and tire force variation. These three conditions are not necessarily related. All three conditions must be addressed. Imbalance is normally addressed first, because it is the simpler of the three to correct. Off-vehicle, two plane dynamic wheel balancers are readily available and can accurately correct any imbalance. Balancer calibration and maintenance, proper attachment of the wheel to the balancer, and proper balance weights, are all factors required for a quality balance. However, a perfectly balanced tire/wheel assembly can still be "oval shaped" and cause a vibration. Before balancing, perform the following procedures. Tire and Wheel Diagnosis 1. Set the tire pressure to the placard values. 2. With the vehicle raised, ensure the wheels are centered on the hub by loosening all wheel nuts and hand-tightening all nuts first by hand while shaking the wheel, then torque to specifications using a torque wrench, NOT a torque stick. 3. Visually inspect the tires and the wheels. Inspect for evidence of the following conditions and correct as necessary: - Missing balance weights - Bent rim flange - Irregular tire wear - Incomplete bead seating - Tire irregularities (including pressure settings) - Mud/ice build-up in wheel - Stones in the tire tread - Remove any aftermarket wheels and/or tires and restore vehicle to original condition prior to diagnosing a smooth road shake condition. 4. Road test the vehicle using the Electronic Vibration Analyzer (EVA) essential tool. Drive for a sufficient distance on a known, smooth road surface to duplicate the condition. Determine if the vehicle is sensitive to brake apply. If the brakes are applied lightly and the pulsation felt in the steering wheel increases, refer to the Brakes section of the service manual that deals with brake-induced pulsation. If you can start to hear the vibration as a low boom noise (in addition to feeling it), but cannot see it, the vehicle likely has a first order (one pulse per propshaft revolution) driveline vibration. Driveline first order vibrations are high enough in frequency that most humans can start to hear them at highway speeds, but are too high to be able to be easily seen. These issues can be caused by driveline imbalance or misalignment. If the vehicle exhibits this low boom and the booming pulses in-and-out on a regular basis (like a throbbing), chances are good that the vehicle could have driveline vibration. This type Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 00-03-10-006F > May > 10 > Wheels/Tires - Tire Radial Force Variation (RFV) > Page 1921 of vibration is normally felt more in the "seat of the pants" than the steering wheel. 5. Next, record the Hertz (Hz) reading as displayed by the EVA onto the tire data worksheet found at the end of this bulletin. This should be done after a tire break-in period of at least 16 km (10 mi) at 72 km/h (45 mph) or greater, in order to eliminate any possible tire flat-spotting. This reading confirms what the vehicle vibration frequency is prior to vehicle service and documents the amount of improvement occurring as the result of the various steps taken to repair. Completing the Steering Wheel Shake Worksheet below is required. A copy of the completed worksheet must be saved with the R.O. and a copy included with any parts returned to the Warranty Parts Center for analysis. A reading of 35 to 50 Hz typically indicates a first order propshaft vibration. If this is the situation, refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 08-07-30-044D. Generally, a reading between 10 and 20 Hz indicates a tire/wheel vibration and if this is the reading obtained, continue using this bulletin. If the tire 1st order vibration goes away and stays away during this evaluation, the cause is likely tire flat-spotting. Tire flat-spotting vibration may come and go at any speed over 72 km/h (45 mph) during the first 10 minutes of operation, if vibration continues after 10 minutes of driving at speeds greater than 72 km/h (45 mph), tire flat-spotting can be ruled out as the cause for vibration. 6. If flat-spotting is the cause, provide the explanation that this has occurred due to the vehicle being parked for long periods of time and that the nature of the tire is to take a set. Refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 03-03-10-007E: Information on Tire/Wheel Characteristics (Vibration, Balance, Shake, Flat Spotting) of GM Original Equipment Tires. 7. If the road test indicates a shake/vibration exists, check the imbalance of each tire/wheel assembly on a known, calibrated, off-car dynamic balancer.Make sure the mounting surface of the wheel and the surface of the balancer are absolutely clean and free of debris. Be sure to chose the proper cone/collet for the wheel, and always use the pilot bore for centering. Never center the wheel using the hub-cap bore since it is not a precision machined surface. If any assembly calls for more than 1/4 ounce on either rim flange, remove all balance weights and rebalance to as close to zero as possible. If you can see the vibration (along with feeling it) in the steering wheel (driving straight without your hands on the wheel), it is very likely to be a tire/wheel first order (one pulse per revolution) disturbance. First order disturbances can be caused by imbalance as well as non-uniformities in tires, wheels or hubs. This first order frequency is too low for a human to hear, but if the amplitude is high enough, it can be seen. If a vibration or shake still exists after balancing, any out of round conditions, of the wheel, and force variation conditions of the tire, must be addressed. Equipment such as the Hunter GSP9700 can address both (it is also a wheel balancer). Tire radial force vibration (RFV) can be defined as the amount of stiffness variation the tire will produce in one revolution under a constant load. Radial force variation is what the vehicle feels because the load (weight) of the vehicle is always on the tires. Although free runout of tires (not under load) is not always a good indicator of a smooth ride, it is critical that total tire/wheel assembly runout be within specification. Equipment such as the Hunter GSP9700 loads the tire, similar to on the vehicle, and measures radial force variation of the tire/wheel assembly. Note that the wheel is affecting the tire's RFV measurement at this point. To isolate the wheel, its runout must be measured. This can be easily done on the Hunter, without the need to set up dial indicators. If the wheel meets the runout specification, the tire's RFV can then be addressed. After measuring the tire/wheel assembly under load, and the wheel alone, the machine then calculates (predicts) the radial force variation of the tire. However, because this is a prediction that can include mounting inaccuracies, and the load wheel is much smaller in diameter than used in tire production, this type of service equipment should NOT be used to audit new tires. Rather, it should be used as a service diagnostic tool to minimize radial force variation of the tire/wheel assembly. Equipment such as the Hunter GSP9700 does an excellent job of measuring wheel runout, and of finding the low point of the wheel (for runout) and the high point of the tire (for radial force variation). This allows the tire to be matched mounted to the wheel for lowest tire/wheel assembly force variation. The machine will simplify this process into easy steps. The following assembly radial force variation numbers should be used as a guide: When measuring RFV and match mounting tires perform the following steps. Measuring Wheel Runout and Assembly Radial Force Variation Important The completed worksheet at the end of this bulletin must be attached to the hard copy of the repair order. - Measure radial force variation and radial runout. - If a road force/balancing machine is used, record the radial force variation (RFV) on the worksheet at the end of this bulletin. It may be of benefit to have the lowest RFV assembly to the front left corner. If the machine is not available and the EVA data suggests there is an issue, swap the tire and wheel assemblies from the front to the back. Re-check on the EVA and if the problem still exists, test another vehicle to find tires that do not exhibit the same frequency and swap those tires onto the subject vehicle. - If a runout/balancing machine is used, record the radial runout of the tire/wheel assemblies on the worksheet at the end of this bulletin. If one or more of the tire/wheel assemblies are more than.040 in (1.02 mm), match mount the tire to the wheel to get below.040 in (1.02 mm). For sensitive customers, readings of 0.030 inch (0.76 mm) or less are preferable, it may also be of benefit to have the lowest runout assembly to the front left corner. If the machine is not available and the EVA data suggests there is an issue, swap the tire and wheel assemblies from the front to the back. Re-check on the EVA and if the problem still exists, test another vehicle to find tires that do not exhibit the same frequency and swap those tires Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 00-03-10-006F > May > 10 > Wheels/Tires - Tire Radial Force Variation (RFV) > Page 1922 onto the subject vehicle. - After match mounting, the tire/wheel assembly must be rebalanced. If match mounting tires to in-spec wheels produces assembly values higher than these, tire replacement may be necessary. Replacing tires at lower values will probably mean good tires are being condemned. Because tires can sometimes become temporarily flat-spotted, which will affect force variation, it is important that the vehicle be driven at least 16 km (10 mi) prior to measuring. Tire pressure must also be adjusted to the usage pressure on the vehicle's tire placard prior to measuring. Most GM vehicles will tolerate radial force variation up to these levels. However, some vehicles are more sensitive, and may require lower levels. Also, there are other tire parameters that equipment such as the Hunter GSP9700 cannot measure that may be a factor. In such cases, TAC should be contacted for further instructions. Important - When mounting a GM wheel to a wheel balancer/force variation machine, always use the wheel's center pilot hole. This is the primary centering mechanism on all GM wheels; the bolt holes are secondary. Usually a back cone method to the machine should be used. For added accuracy and repeatability, a flange plate should be used to clamp the wheel onto the cone and machine. This system is offered by all balancer manufacturers in GM's dealer program. - Any type of service equipment that removes tread rubber by grinding, buffing or truing is NOT recommended, and may void the tire warranty. However, tires may have been ground by the tire company as part of their tire manufacturing process. This is a legitimate procedure. Steering Wheel Shake Worksheet When diagnosing vibration concerns, use the following worksheet in conjunction with the appropriate Vibration Analysis-Road testing procedure in the Vibration Correction sub-section in SI. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 00-03-10-006F > May > 10 > Wheels/Tires - Tire Radial Force Variation (RFV) > Page 1923 Refer to the appropriate section of SI for specifications and repair procedures that are related to the vibration concern. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 05-03-10-003F > Apr > 10 > Tires/Wheels - Low Tire/Leaking Cast Aluminum Wheels Wheels: Customer Interest Tires/Wheels - Low Tire/Leaking Cast Aluminum Wheels TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 05-03-10-003F Date: April 27, 2010 Subject: Low Tire Pressure, Leaking Cast Aluminum Wheels (Repair with Adhesive Sealant) Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (Including Saturn) 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X with Cast Aluminum Wheels Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the model years and the bulletin reference information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 05-03-10-003E (Section 03 - Suspension). Condition Some customers may comment on a low tire pressure condition. Diagnosis of the low tire pressure condition indicates an air leak through the cast aluminum wheel. Cause Porosity in the cast aluminum wheel may be the cause. Notice This bulletin specifically addresses issues related to the wheel casting that may result in an air leak. For issues related to corrosion of the wheel in service, please refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 08-03-10-006C - Tire Slowly Goes Flat, Tire Air Loss, Low Tire Pressure Warning Light Illuminated, Aluminum Wheel Bead Seat Corrosion (Clean and Resurface Wheel Bead Seat). Correction 1. Remove the tire and wheel assembly from the vehicle. Refer to the appropriate service procedure in SI. 2. Locate the leaking area by inflating the tire to 276 kPa (40 psi) and dipping the tire/wheel assembly in a water bath, or use a spray bottle with soap and water to locate the specific leak location. Important - If the porosity leak is located in the bead area of the aluminum rim (where the tire meets the rim), the wheel should be replaced. - If two or more leaks are located on one wheel, the wheel should be replaced. 3. If air bubbles are observed, mark the location. - If the leak location is on the tire/rubber area, refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 04-03-10-001F Tire Puncture Repair Procedures for All Cars and Light Duty Trucks. - If the leak is located on the aluminum wheel area, continue with the next step. 4. Inscribe a mark on the tire at the valve stem in order to indicate the orientation of the tire to the wheel. 5. Dismount the tire from the wheel. Refer to Tire Mounting and Dismounting. 6. Remove the tire pressure sensor. Refer to Tire Pressure Sensor removal procedure in SI. 7. Scuff the INSIDE rim surface at the leak area with #80 grit paper and clean the area with general purpose cleaner, such as 3M(R) General Purpose Adhesive Cleaner, P/N 08984, or equivalent. 8. Apply a 3 mm (0.12 in) thick layer of Silicone - Adhesive/Sealant, P/N 12378478 (in Canada, use 88900041), or equivalent, to the leak area. 9. Allow for the adhesive/sealant to dry. Notice Caution must be used when mounting the tire so as not to damage the sealer. Damaging the repair area may result in an air leak. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 05-03-10-003F > Apr > 10 > Tires/Wheels - Low Tire/Leaking Cast Aluminum Wheels > Page 1928 10. Align the inscribed mark on the tire with the valve stem on the wheel. 11. Reinstall the Tire Pressure Sensor. Refer to Tire Pressure Sensor installation procedure in SI. 12. Mount the tire on the wheel. Refer to Tire Mounting and Dismounting. 13. Pressurize the tire to 276 kPa (40 psi) and inspect for leaks. 14. Adjust tire pressure to meet the placard specification. 15. Balance the tire/wheel assembly. Refer to Tire and Wheel Assembly Balancing - Off-Vehicle. 16. Install the tire and wheel assembly onto the vehicle. Refer to the appropriate service procedure in SI. Parts Information Warranty Information (excluding Saab U.S. Models) Important The Silicone - Adhesive/Sealant comes in a case quantity of six. ONLY charge warranty one tube of adhesive/sealant per wheel repair. For vehicles repaired under warranty, use: One leak repair per wheel. Warranty Information (Saab U.S. Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table above. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 08-03-10-006C > Apr > 10 > Tires/Wheels - Tire Slowly Goes Flat/Warning Light ON Wheels: Customer Interest Tires/Wheels - Tire Slowly Goes Flat/Warning Light ON TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 08-03-10-006C Date: April 27, 2010 Subject: Tire Slowly Goes Flat, Tire Air Loss, Low Tire Pressure Warning Light Illuminated, Aluminum Wheel Bead Seat Corrosion (Clean and Resurface Wheel Bead Seat) Models: 2000-2011 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (including Saturn) 2003-2009 HUMMER H2 2006-2010 HUMMER H3 2005-2009 Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 08-03-10-006B (Section 03 - Suspension). Condition Some customers may comment on a tire that slowly loses air pressure over a period of days or weeks. Cause Abrasive elements in the environment may intrude between the tire and wheel at the bead seat. There is always some relative motion between the tire and wheel (when the vehicle is driven) and this motion may cause the abrasive particles to wear the wheel and tire materials. As the wear continues, there may also be intrusion at the tire/wheel interface by corrosive media from the environment. Eventually a path for air develops and a 'slow' leak may ensue. This corrosion may appear on the inboard or outboard bead seating surface of the wheel. This corrosion will not be visible until the tire is dismounted from the wheel. Notice This bulletin specifically addresses issues related to wheel bead seat corrosion that may result in an air leak. For issues related to porosity of the wheel casting that may result in an air leak, please refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 05-03-10-006F - Low Tire Pressure, Leaking Cast Aluminum Wheels (Repair with Adhesive Sealant) Correction In most cases, this type of air loss can be corrected by following the procedure below. Important DO NOT replace a wheel for slow air loss unless you have evaluated and/or tried to repair the wheel with the procedure below. Notice The repair is no longer advised or applicable for chromed aluminum wheels. 1. Remove the wheel and tire assembly for diagnosis. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation in SI. 2. After a water dunk tank leak test, if you determine the source of the air leak to be around the bead seat of the wheel, dismount the tire to examine the bead seat. Shown below is a typical area of bead seat corrosion.Typical Location of Bead Seat Corrosion Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 08-03-10-006C > Apr > 10 > Tires/Wheels - Tire Slowly Goes Flat/Warning Light ON > Page 1933 Important Other forms of slow air leaks are possible. If the body of the tire, valve stem and wheel flange show no signs of air seepage, refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 05-03-10-003D for additional information on possible wheel porosity issues. 3. Bead seat corrosion is identified by what appears like blistering of the wheel finish, causing a rough or uneven surface that is difficult for the tire to maintain a proper seal on. Below is a close-up photo of bead seat corrosion on an aluminum wheel that was sufficient to cause slow air loss. Close-Up of Bead Seat Corrosion 4. If corrosion is found on the wheel bead seat, measure the affected area as shown below. - For vehicles with 32,186 km (20,000 mi) or less, the total allowable combined linear area of repairable corrosion is 100 mm (4 in) or less. If the total area(s) of corrosion exceed these dimensions, the wheel should be replaced. - For vehicles that have exceeded 32,186 km (20,000 mi), the total allowable combined linear area of repairable corrosion is 200 mm (8 in) or less. If the total area(s) of corrosion exceed these dimensions, the wheel should be replaced. 5. In order to correct the wheel leak, use a clean-up (fine cut) sanding disc or biscuit to remove the corrosion and any flaking paint. You should remove the corrosion back far enough until you reach material that is stable and firmly bonded to the wheel. Try to taper the edge of any flaking paint as best you can in order to avoid sharp edges that may increase the chance of a leak reoccurring. The photo below shows an acceptable repaired surface. Notice Corrosion that extends up the lip of the wheel, where after the clean-up process it would be visible with the tire mounted, is only acceptable on the inboard flange. The inboard flange is not visible with the wheel assembly in the mounted position. If any loose coatings or corrosion extend to the visible surfaces on the FACE of the wheel, that wheel must be replaced. Important Remove ONLY the material required to eliminate the corrosion from the bead seating surface. DO NOT remove excessive amounts of material. ALWAYS keep the sealing surface as smooth and level as possible. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 08-03-10-006C > Apr > 10 > Tires/Wheels - Tire Slowly Goes Flat/Warning Light ON > Page 1934 Acceptably Prepared (Cleaned-Up) Wheel Surface 6. Once the corrosion has been eliminated, you should coat the repaired area with a commercially available tire sealant such as Patch Brand Bead Sealant or equivalent. Commercially available bead sealants are black rubber-like coatings that will permanently fill and seal the resurfaced bead seat. At 21°C (70°F) ambient temperature, this sealant will set-up sufficiently for tire mounting in about 10 minutes.Coated and Sealed Bead Seat 7. Remount the tire and install the repaired wheel and tire assembly. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation in SI. Parts Information Patch Brand Bead Sealer is available from Myers Tires at 1-800-998-9897 or on the web at www.myerstiresupply.com. The one-quart size can of sealer will repair about 20 wheels. Warranty Information (excluding Saab U.S. Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use: Warranty Information (Saab U.S. Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table above. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 08-03-10-006C > Apr > 10 > Tires/Wheels - Tire Slowly Goes Flat/Warning Light ON > Page 1935 Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 00-03-10-002F > Apr > 11 > Wheels - Chrome Wheel Staining/Pitting/Corrosion Wheels: All Technical Service Bulletins Wheels - Chrome Wheel Staining/Pitting/Corrosion INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 00-03-10-002F Date: April 21, 2011 Subject: Chemical Staining, Pitting, Corrosion and/or Spotted Appearance of Chromed Aluminum Wheels Models: 2012 and Prior GM Cars and Trucks Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update model years, suggest additional restorative products and add additional corrosion information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 00-03-10-002E (Section 03 - Suspension). Important You may give a copy of this bulletin to the customer. What is Chemical Staining of Chrome Wheels? Figure 1 Chemical staining in most cases results from acid based cleaners (refer to Figure 1 for an example). These stains are frequently milky, black, or greenish in appearance. They result from using cleaning solutions that contain acids on chrome wheels. Soap and water is usually sufficient to clean wheels. If the customer insists on using a wheel cleaner they should only use one that specifically states that it is safe for chromed wheels and does not contain anything in the following list. (Dealers should also survey any products they use during prep or normal cleaning of stock units for these chemicals.) - Ammonium Bifluoride (fluoride source for dissolution of chrome) - Hydrofluoric Acid (directly dissolves chrome) - Hydrochloric Acid (directly dissolves chrome) - Sodium Dodecylbenzenesulfonic Acid - Sulfamic Acid - Phosphoric Acid - Hydroxyacetic Acid Notice Many wheel cleaner instructions advise to take care to avoid contact with painted surfaces. Most customers think of painted surfaces as the fenders, quarter panels and other exterior sheet metal. Many vehicles have painted brake calipers. Acidic wheel cleaners may craze, crack, or discolor the paint on the brake calipers. Damage from wheel cleaners is not covered under the vehicle new car warranty. Soap and water applied with a soft brush is usually all that is required to clean the calipers. Whenever any wheel cleaner is used, it must be THOROUGHLY rinsed off of the wheel with clean, clear water. Special care must be taken to rinse under the hub cap, balance weights, wheel nuts, lug nut caps, between the wheel cladding and off the back side of the wheel. Wheels returned to the Warranty Parts Center (WPC) that exhibit damage from wheel cleaners most often have the damage around and under the wheel weight where the cleaner was incompletely flushed away. Notice Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 00-03-10-002F > Apr > 11 > Wheels - Chrome Wheel Staining/Pitting/Corrosion > Page 1941 Do not use cleaning solutions that contain hydrofluoric, oxalic and most other acids on chrome wheels (or any wheels). If the customer is unsure of the chemical make-up of a particular wheel cleaner, it should be avoided. For wheels showing signs of milky staining from acidic cleaners, refer to Customer Assistance and Instructions below. Warranty of Stained Chrome Wheels Stained wheels are not warrantable. Most acid based cleaners will permanently stain chrome wheels. Follow-up with dealers has confirmed that such cleaners were used on wheels that were returned to the Warranty Parts Center (WPC). Any stained wheels received by the WPC will be charged back to the dealership. To assist the customer, refer to Customer Assistance and Instructions below. Pitting or Spotted Appearance of Chrome Wheels Figure 2 A second type or staining or finish disturbance may result from road chemicals, such as calcium chloride used for dust control of unpaved roads. The staining will look like small pitting (refer to Figure 2). This staining will usually be on the leading edges of each wheel spoke, but may be uniformly distributed. If a vehicle must be operated under such conditions, the chrome wheels should be washed with mild soap and water and thoroughly rinsed as soon as conveniently possible. Important Road chemicals, such as calcium chloride used for dust control of unpaved roads, can also stain chrome wheels. The staining will look like small pitting. This staining will usually be on the leading edges of each wheel spoke. This is explained by the vehicle traveling in the forward direction while being splashed by the road chemical. If a vehicle must be operated under such conditions, the chrome wheels should be washed with mild soap and water and thoroughly rinsed as soon as conveniently possible. Warranty of Pitted or Spotted Chrome Wheels Wheels returned with pitting or spotting as a result of road chemicals may be replaced one time. Damage resulting from contact with these applied road chemicals is corrosive to the wheels finish and may cause damage if the wheels are not kept clean. Important Notify the customer that this is a one time replacement. Please stress to the customer the vital importance of keeping the wheels clean if they are operating the vehicle in an area that applies calcium chloride or other dust controlling chemicals! "GM of Canada" dealers require prior approval by the District Manager - Customer Care and Service Process (DM-CCSP). "Stardust" Corrosion of Chrome Wheels Figure 3 A third type of finish disturbance results from prolonged exposure to brake dust and resultant penetration of brake dust through the chrome. As brakes are applied hot particles of brake material are thrown off and tend to be forced through the leading edge of the wheel spoke windows by airflow. These Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 00-03-10-002F > Apr > 11 > Wheels - Chrome Wheel Staining/Pitting/Corrosion > Page 1942 hot particles embed themselves in the chrome layer and create a small pit. If the material is allowed to sit on the wheel while it is exposed to moisture or salt, it will corrode the wheel beneath the chrome leaving a pit or small blister in the chrome. Heavy brake dust build-up should be removed from wheels by using GM Chrome Cleaner and Polish, P/N 1050173 (in Canada use 10953013). For moderate cleaning, light brake dust build-up or water spots use GM Swirl Remover Polish, P/N 12377965 (in Canada, use Meguiars Plast-X(TM) Clear Plastic Cleaner and Polish #G12310C**). After cleaning, the wheel should be waxed using GM Cleaner Wax, P/N 12377966 (in Canada, use Meguiars Cleaner Wax #M0616C**), which will help protect the wheel from brake dust and reduce adhesion of any brake dust that gets on the wheel surface. For general maintenance cleaning, PEEK Metal Polish† may be used. It will clean and shine the chrome and leave behind a wax coating that may help protect the finish. Warranty of Stardust Corroded Chrome Wheels Wheels returned with pitting or spotting as a result of neglect and brake dust build-up may be replaced one time. Important Notify the customer that this is a one time replacement. Please stress to the customer the vital importance of keeping the wheels clean and free of prolonged exposure to brake dust build-up. "GM of Canada" dealers require prior approval by the District Manager - Customer Care and Service Process (DM-CCSP). Customer Assistance and Instructions GM has looked for ways customers may improve the appearance of wheels damaged by acidic cleaners. The following product and procedure has been found to dramatically improve the appearance of stained wheels. For wheels that have milky stains caused by acidic cleaners try the following: Notice THE 3M CHROME AND METAL POLISH REQUIRED FOR THIS PROCEDURE IS AN EXTREMELY AGGRESSIVE POLISH/CLEANER. THE WHEELS MUST BE CLEANED BEFORE APPLICATION TO AVOID SCRATCHING THE WHEEL SURFACE. THIS PRODUCT WILL REDUCE THE THICKNESS OF THE CHROME PLATING ON THE WHEEL AND IF USED INCORRECTLY OR EXCESSIVELY MAY REMOVE THE CHROME PLATING ALL TOGETHER, EXPOSING A LESS BRIGHT AND BRASSY COLORED SUB-LAYER. FOLLOW INSTRUCTIONS EXACTLY. 1. Wash the wheels with vigorously with soap and water. This step will clean and may reduce wheel staining. Flood all areas of the wheel with water to rinse. 2. Dry the wheels completely. Notice Begin with a small section of the wheel and with light pressure buff off polish and examine results. ONLY apply and rub with sufficient force and time to remove enough staining that you are satisfied with the results. Some wheels may be stained to the extent that you may only achieve a 50% improvement while others may be able to be restored to the original lustre. IN ALL CASES, only apply until the results are satisfactory. 3. Apply 3M Chrome and Metal Polish #39527* with a clean terry cloth towel. As you apply the polish, the staining will be diminished. 4. When dry, buff off the polish with a clean portion of the towel. 5. Repeat application of the 3M Chrome and Metal Polish until satisfied with the results. If continued applications fail to improve the appearance further discontinue use. This procedure will improve the appearance of the wheels and may, with repeated applications, restore the finish dramatically. For wheels that exhibit spotting from road chemicals the above procedure may marginally improve the condition but will not restore the finish or remove the pitting. In this type of staining the wheel finish has actually been removed in spots and no manner of cleaning will restore the finish. †*We believe this source and their products to be reliable. There may be additional manufacturers of such products/materials. General Motors does not endorse, indicate any preference for or assume any responsibility for the products or material from this firm or for any such items that may be available from other sources. Parts Information Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 00-03-10-002F > Apr > 11 > Wheels - Chrome Wheel Staining/Pitting/Corrosion > Page 1943 *This product is currently available from 3M. To obtain information for your local retail location please call 3M at 1-888-364-3577. **This product is currently available from Meguiars (Canada). To obtain information for your local retail location please call Meguiars at 1-800-347-5700 or at www.meguiarscanada.com. ^ This product is currently available from Tri-Peek International. To obtain information for your local retail location please call Tri-Peek at 1-877-615-4272 or at www.tripeek.com. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 09-03-10-011A > Mar > 11 > Tires/Wheels - 19 Inch Wheels Available through GM Wheels: All Technical Service Bulletins Tires/Wheels - 19 Inch Wheels Available through GM INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 09-03-10-011A Date: March 21, 2011 Subject: 19 Inch Accessory Wheels Available through GM Accessories Models: 2010-2011 Chevrolet Equinox 2010-2011 GMC Terrain Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add 2011 model year and update information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 09-03-10-011 (Section 03 - Suspension). The purpose of this bulletin is to provide a reference guide for the technician to upgrade a vehicle from factory wheels and tires to 19" wheels and tires, which are available through GM Accessories. This guide will cover tires, wheels, vehicle modifications, and warranty information. Tires GM offers one tire; the Bridgestone Dueler Alenza HL P235/50R19 99H, GM P/N 19190765, to be used in conjunction with the 19" accessory wheels. The Bridgestone Dueler Alenza HL tire has a Tire Performance Criteria (TPC) spec of 1343MS (molded on the sidewall), which meets or exceeds all Federal Safety guidelines. Important - If the vehicle was built with 19" factory wheels, it is OK to install the accessory 19" wheel, but DO NOT install the accessory 19" tire. Please re-use the 19" factory tire. - If the vehicle was built with 17" or 18" factory wheels, ONLY install the accessory 19" tire on the 19" wheel. DO NOT install the 19" factory tire. Mounting and Balancing Refer to the most recent version of Corporate Bulletin Number 08-03-10-004A for proper methods for mounting, balancing and installing accessory wheels and tires. Wheels Wheel (Lug) Nuts Each wheel nut should be torqued in the appropriate torque sequence (refer to graphic) and to 170 Nm (125 lb ft). The torque should be rechecked after the first 160 km (100 mi). To help protect the wheels from theft, a wheel lock kit is also available. Caution Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly tightened wheel nuts can cause the wheel to become loose and even come off. This could lead to an accident. Be sure to use the correct wheel nuts. Care / Cleaning Use soap, hot water and a 100% cotton cloth to clean and polish the new wheels. If using a wheel cleaner, be sure to select one that will not harm the wheel surface. Avoid car washes that use carbide tipped brushes, as these may damage the wheel's finish. Periodically clean the backside of the wheel to Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 09-03-10-011A > Mar > 11 > Tires/Wheels - 19 Inch Wheels Available through GM > Page 1948 remove road grime, brake dust and grease. Mounting and Balancing Refer to the most recent version of Corporate Bulletin Number 08-03-10-004A for proper methods for mounting, balancing and installing accessory wheels and tires. The mounted and balanced wheel/tire assemblies MUST meet GM service guidelines for measured radial force variation to ensure vibration free performance. The following radial force variation numbers for the assembly should be used as a guide: If any wheel/tire assembly does not meet the above standards, refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 00-03-10-006F: Information on Tire Radial Force Variation (RFV) for further information on possible corrective actions. Vehicle Modifications Tire Label After installing the recommended P235/50R19 tires, place the provided tire label on the vehicle. The new tire label should be located within the red box, over the top of the original tire label found on the door jamb. To locate the label within the red box use the upper left hand edge of the red line as a guide. When properly placed, the new tire label will obscure the original tire information. Be sure that the surface is clean and dry. The surface temperature should not be less than 21°C (65°F). The label is provided as a guide for tire inflation pressures and information relevant to occupant/cargo capacities. Tire Type/Pressure Selection To provide a more accurate function of the Tire Pressure Monitoring System, it is necessary to update the body control module (BCM) with the correct tire type and pressure information. The factory 17" and 18" tires have a placard inflation pressure of 241 kPa (35 psi), which must be changed to 250 kPa (36 psi) when upsizing to the 19" accessory tires. Using the Global Diagnostic System (GDS 2), follow the steps listed below to select the appropriate tire type/pressure: 1. Enter "Module Diagnosis". 2. Select "Body Control Module". 3. Select "Configuration/Reset Functions". 4. Select "Tire Type/Pressure Selection". Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM) System To avoid system malfunctions, it is necessary to install tire pressure sensors in the accessory wheels. Replacement sensors can be obtained or sensors from the OE wheels can be transferred to the accessory wheels. After the wheels are installed on the vehicle, it is necessary to learn the new sensor identification codes/locations into the body control module (BCM). TPM Sensor Relearn Procedure Note If using the scan tool (GDS 2) to enable the learn mode, the EL 46079 Diagnostic Tool must be used to activate the sensors. When this preferred method is used, any stray sensor signals will not affect the learn procedure. In the event a particular sensor's information is displayed on the special tool upon activation but the horn does not chirp, it may be necessary to rotate the wheel valve stem to a different position due to the sensor signal is being blocked by another component. If using the keyless entry transmitter or driver information center buttons to enable the learn mode, the EL 46079 Diagnostic Tool or Pressure Increase/Decrease Method may be used. Before proceeding with this method, ensure that no other learn procedure is being performed simultaneously or that tire pressures are not being adjusted on another Tire Pressure Monitor equipped vehicle within close proximity. Stray signals from other tire pressure equipped vehicles just driving by can be inadvertently learned. If any random horn chirps are heard from the vehicle while performing the learn procedure, most likely a stray sensor has been learned and the procedure will need to be cancelled and repeated. Under these circumstances, performing the tire pressure Learn Procedure away from other vehicles may be highly recommended. In the event a particular sensor activation does not cause the horn to chirp, it may be necessary to rotate the wheel valve stem to a different position due to the sensor signal is being blocked by another component. Preferred Scan Tool (GDS 2) Learn Enable Method Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 09-03-10-011A > Mar > 11 > Tires/Wheels - 19 Inch Wheels Available through GM > Page 1949 1. Using a scan tool (GDS 2), initiate the tire pressure Learn Mode. A double horn chirp will sound together with activated turn signal lamps indicating the Learn Mode has been enabled. The left front turn signal only will then be illuminated. 2. Starting with the left front tire, active the sensor by holding the antenna of the EL 46079 Diagnostic Tool aimed upward against the tire sidewall close to the wheel rim at the valve stem location. Press and release the Activate button and wait for a horn chirp. Once all the turn signal lamps have been activated for 3 seconds and the horn chirp has sounded, the sensor information is learned and the turn signal in the next location to be learned will illuminate. 3. After the horn chirp has sounded and the turn signal in the next location to be learned will illuminate, repeat step 2 for the remaining 3 sensors in the following order: 1. Right front 2. Right rear 3. Left rear 4. When the left rear sensor has been learned, all the turn signal lamps have been activated for 3 seconds and a double horn chirp has sounded, the learn process is complete and BCM exits the learn mode. 5. Ignition OFF, adjust all tires to the recommended pressures. Alternate Driver Information Center Learn Enable Method 1. Ignition ON, press and release the driver information center info button on the stalk switch until the tire learn message appears on the driver information center display. Press and hold the set/reset button until all the turn signal lamps have been activated for 3 seconds and a double horn chirp sounded indicating the Learn Mode has been enabled. The left front turn signal will then be illuminated. 2. Starting with the left front tire, learn the tire pressure using one of the following methods: - Hold the antenna of the EL 46079 Diagnostic Tool aimed upward against the tire sidewall close to the wheel rim at the valve stem location. Press and release the activate button and wait for a horn chirp. Once all the turn signal lamps have been activated for 3 seconds and a single horn chirp sounded, the sensor information is learned and the turn signal in the next location to be learned will illuminate. - Increase/decrease the tire pressure 8.3 kPa (1.2 psi) then wait for a horn chirp. The horn chirp may occur before or up to 30 seconds after the pressure increase/decrease. Once the horn chirp has sounded, the sensor information is learned and the turn signal in the next location to be learned will illuminate. 3. After the horn chirp has sounded the turn signal in the next location to be learned will illuminate, repeat step 2 for the remaining 3 sensors in the following order: 1. Right front 2. Right rear 3. Left rear 4. When the left rear sensor has been learned and all the turn signal lamps have been activated for 3 seconds and a double horn chirp has sounded, the learn process is complete and BCM exits the learn mode. 5. Ignition OFF, adjust all tires to the recommended pressures. Engine Control Module (ECM) Reprogramming Important For proper vehicle operation and to insure coverage under the provisions of the new vehicle warranty, the vehicle must be programmed with the correct calibration as soon as the 19" wheels are installed. When upsizing from 17" wheels only, the ECM must be reprogrammed for speedometer accuracy. Contact Techline to obtain a VCI number. Record this number on the form below. Use the Service Programming System (SPS). Checking and Clearing DTCs After Reprogramming DTCs codes may be set as a result of the programming process. In most cases the codes can be cleared. Calibration Information Documentation 1. Make a copy of the "Accessory Wheel and Tire Information Form" included in this bulletin. 2. Provide all information required on the form. 3. Make a copy of the completed form for the customer to keep in the vehicle along with their Owner's Manual. 4. File the original completed form in the Dealership's Vehicle Service History folder. Important: If original equipment tires/wheels are reinstalled, it will be necessary to reset the programming of the ECM to the original specifications. Warranty Information Wheels Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 09-03-10-011A > Mar > 11 > Tires/Wheels - 19 Inch Wheels Available through GM > Page 1950 All GM Accessories sold and permanently installed on a GM vehicle PRIOR to new vehicle delivery will be covered under the provisions of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. For the U.S., in the event GM Accessories are installed AFTER new vehicle delivery, or are replaced under the new vehicle warranty, they will be covered (parts and labor) for the balance of the vehicle warranty, but in no event less than 12 months/12,000 miles. This coverage is only effective for GM Accessories permanently installed by a GM dealer or a GM approved ADI (Accessory Distributor / Installer). For Canada, in the event GM Accessories are installed AFTER new vehicle delivery, they will be covered (parts and labor) for the balance of the vehicle warranty, or up to 12 months/unlimited kilometers depending on month installed. For replacement after the new vehicle warranty expires, but within the 12 months/unlimited kilometers coverage, refer to claim type ZPTI guidelines. GM Accessories sold over-the-counter, or those not requiring installation, will continue to receive the standard GM Dealer Parts Warranty of 12 months from the date of purchase (parts only). Tires Any approved tire installed on a GM Vehicle PRIOR to delivery will be covered under the provisions of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Tires are covered against defects in material and workmanship. Tires are warranted for defects "without" prorated charge for tread mileage. Subsequent replacements under this warranty will continue to be covered for the remainder of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Any approved tire installed on a GM Vehicle PRIOR to delivery may continue to be warranted on a prorated basis by the tire manufacturer once the New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires. Any approved tire installed AFTER delivery will be covered under the provisions of the tire manufacturer warranty. USA dealers should refer to GM Warranty Administration Bulletin 00-03-10-003O for more information. Canadian dealers should refer to GM Warranty Administration Bulletin 01-03-10-003H. ACCESSORY WHEEL AND TIRE INFORMATION FORM Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 09-03-10-011A > Mar > 11 > Tires/Wheels - 19 Inch Wheels Available through GM > Page 1951 You have just modified your vehicle by installing an "Accessory Package" which includes Wheels and Tires. This form contains important information about your accessory installation. In an effort to provide superior service to you, our customer, we ask that you please present this form to your Servicing Dealer when removing or installing wheels and tires on your vehicle. This form contains important information necessary to service your vehicle. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 99-08-51-007E > Mar > 11 > Wheels/Tires - Refinishing Aluminum Wheels Wheels: All Technical Service Bulletins Wheels/Tires - Refinishing Aluminum Wheels INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 99-08-51-007E Date: March 17, 2011 Subject: Refinishing Aluminum Wheels Models: 2012 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add additional model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 99-08-51-007D (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). This bulletin updates General Motor's position on refinishing aluminum wheels. GM does not endorse any repairs that involve welding, bending, straightening or re-machining. Only cosmetic refinishing of the wheel's coatings, using recommended procedures, is allowed. Evaluating Damage In evaluating damage, it is the GM Dealer's responsibility to inspect the wheel for corrosion, scrapes, gouges, etc. The Dealer must insure that such damage is not deeper than what can be sanded or polished off. The wheel must be inspected for cracks. If cracks are found, discard the wheel. Any wheels with bent rim flanges must not be repaired or refinished. Wheels that have been refinished by an outside company must be returned to the same vehicle. The Dealer must record the wheel ID stamp or the cast date on the wheel in order to assure this requirement. Refer to Refinisher's Responsibility - Outside Company later in this bulletin. Aluminum Wheel Refinishing Recommendations - Chrome-plated aluminum wheels Re-plating these wheels is not recommended. - Polished aluminum wheels These wheels have a polyester or acrylic clearcoat on them. If the clearcoat is damaged, refinishing is possible. However, the required refinishing process cannot be performed in the dealer environment. Refer to Refinisher's Responsibility - Outside Company later in this bulletin. - Painted aluminum wheels These wheels are painted using a primer, color coat, and clearcoat procedure. If the paint is damaged, refinishing is possible. As with polished wheels, all original coatings must be removed first. Media blasting is recommended. Refer to GM Aluminum Refinishing Bulletin #53-17-03A for the re-painting of this type of wheel. - Bright, machined aluminum wheels These wheels have a polyester or acrylic clearcoat on them. In some cases, the recessed "pocket" areas of the wheel may be painted. Surface refinishing is possible. The wheel must be totally stripped by media blasting or other suitable means. The wheel should be resurfaced by using a sanding process rather than a machining process. This allows the least amount of material to be removed. Important Do not use any re-machining process that removes aluminum. This could affect the dimensions and function of the wheel. Painting is an option to re-clearcoating polished and bright machined aluminum wheels. Paint will better mask any surface imperfections and is somewhat more durable than clearcoat alone. GM recommends using Corsican SILVER WAEQ9283 for a fine "aluminum-like" look or Sparkle SILVER WA9967 for a very bright look. As an option, the body color may also be used. When using any of the painting options, it is recommended that all four wheels be refinished in order to maintain color uniformity. Refer to GM Aluminum Refinishing Bulletin #53-17-03A for specific procedures and product recommendations. Refinisher's Responsibility - Outside Company Important Some outside companies are offering wheel refinishing services. Such refinished wheels will be permanently marked by the refinisher and are warranted by the refinisher. Any process that re-machines or otherwise re-manufactures the wheel should not be used. A refinisher's responsibility includes inspecting for cracks using the Zyglo system or the equivalent. Any cracked wheels must not be refinished. No welding, hammering or reforming of any kind is allowed. The wheel ID must be recorded and follow the wheel throughout the process in order to assure that the same wheel is returned. A plastic media blast may be used for clean up of the wheel. Hand and/or lathe sanding of the machined surface and the wheel window is allowed. Material removal, though, must be kept to a minimum. Re-machining of the wheel is not allowed. Paint and/or clear coat must not be present on the following surfaces: the nut chamfers, the wheel mounting surfaces and the wheel pilot hole. The refinisher must permanently ID stamp the wheel and warrant the painted/clearcoated surfaces for a minimum of one year or the remainder of the new vehicle warranty, whichever is Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 99-08-51-007E > Mar > 11 > Wheels/Tires - Refinishing Aluminum Wheels > Page 1956 longer. Important Whenever a wheel is refinished, the mounting surface and the wheel nut contact surfaces must not be painted or clearcoated. Coating these surfaces could affect the wheel nut torque. When re-mounting a tire on an aluminum wheel, coated balance weights must be used in order to reduce the chance of future cosmetic damage. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 06-03-10-010A > Jun > 10 > Wheels - Changing Procedures/Precautions Wheels: All Technical Service Bulletins Wheels - Changing Procedures/Precautions INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 06-03-10-010A Date: June 09, 2010 Subject: Information on Proper Wheel Changing Procedures and Cautions Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks 2010 and Prior HUMMER Models 2005-2009 Saab 9-7X 2005-2009 Saturn Vehicles Attention: Complete wheel changing instructions for each vehicle line can be found under Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation in Service Information (SI). This bulletin is intended to quickly review and reinforce simple but vital procedures to reduce the possibility of achieving low torque during wheel installation. Always refer to SI for wheel lug nut torque specifications and complete jacking instructions for safe wheel changing. Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to include the 2011 model year and update the available special tool list. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 06-03-10-010 (Section 03 Suspension). Frequency of Wheel Changes - Marketplace Driven Just a few years ago, the increasing longevity of tires along with greater resistance to punctures had greatly reduced the number of times wheels were removed to basically required tire rotation intervals. Today with the booming business in accessory wheels/special application tires (such as winter tires), consumers are having tire/wheel assemblies removed - replaced - or installed more than ever. With this increased activity, it opens up more of a chance for error on the part of the technician. This bulletin will review a few of the common concerns and mistakes to make yourself aware of. Proper Servicing Starts With the Right Tools The following tools have been made available to assist in proper wheel and tire removal and installation. - J 41013 Rotor Resurfacing Kit (or equivalent) - J 42450-A Wheel Hub Resurfacing Kit (or equivalent) Corroded Surfaces One area of concern is corrosion on the mating surfaces of the wheel to the hub on the vehicle. Excessive corrosion, dirt, rust or debris built up on these surfaces can mimic a properly tightened wheel in the service stall. Once the vehicle is driven, the debris may loosen, grind up or be washed away from water splash. This action may result in clearance at the mating surface of the wheel and an under-torqued condition. Caution Before installing a wheel, remove any buildup on the wheel mounting surface and brake drum or brake disc mounting surface. Installing wheels with poor metal-to-metal contact at the mounting surfaces can cause wheel nuts to loosen. This may cause a wheel to come off when the vehicle is moving, possibly resulting in a loss of control or personal injury. Whenever you remove the tire/wheel assemblies, you must inspect the mating surfaces. If corrosion is found, you should remove the debris with a die grinder equipped with a fine sanding pad, wire brush or cleaning disc. Just remove enough material to assure a clean, smooth mating surface. The J 41013 (or equivalent) can be used to clean the following surfaces: - The hub mounting surface - The brake rotor mounting surface - The wheel mounting surface Use the J 42450-A (or equivalent) to clean around the base of the studs and the hub. Lubricants, Grease and Fluids Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 06-03-10-010A > Jun > 10 > Wheels - Changing Procedures/Precautions > Page 1961 Some customers may use penetrating oils, grease or other lubricants on wheel studs to aid in removal or installation. Always use a suitable cleaner/solvent to remove these lubricants prior to installing the wheel and tire assemblies. Lubricants left on the wheel studs may cause improper readings of wheel nut torque. Always install wheels to clean, dry wheel studs ONLY. Notice Lubricants left on the wheel studs or vertical mounting surfaces between the wheel and the rotor or drum may cause the wheel to work itself loose after the vehicle is driven. Always install wheels to clean, dry wheel studs and surfaces ONLY. Beginning with 2011 model year vehicles, put a light coating of grease, GM P/N 1051344 (in Canada, P/N 9930370), on the inner surface of the wheel pilot hole to prevent wheel seizure to the axle or bearing hub. Wheel Stud and Lug Nut Damage Always inspect the wheel studs and lug nuts for signs of damage from crossthreading or abuse. You should never have to force wheel nuts down the stud. Lug nuts that are damaged may not retain properly, yet give the impression of fully tightening. Always inspect and replace any component suspected of damage. Tip Always start wheel nuts by hand! Be certain that all wheel nut threads have been engaged BEFORE tightening the nut. Important If the vehicle has directional tread tires, verify the directional arrow on the outboard side of the tire is pointing in the direction of forward rotation. Wheel Nut Tightening and Torque Improper wheel nut tightening can lead to brake pulsation and rotor damage. In order to avoid additional brake repairs, evenly tighten the wheel nuts to the proper torque specification as shown for each vehicle in SI. Always observe the proper wheel nut tightening sequence as shown below in order to avoid trapping the wheel on the wheel stud threads or clamping the wheel slightly off center resulting in vibration. The Most Important Service You Provide While the above information is well known, and wheel removal so common, technicians run the risk of becoming complacent on this very important Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 06-03-10-010A > Jun > 10 > Wheels - Changing Procedures/Precautions > Page 1962 service operation. A simple distraction or time constraint that rushes the job may result in personal injury if the greatest of care is not exercised. Make it a habit to double check your work and to always side with caution when installing wheels. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 00-03-10-006F > May > 10 > Wheels/Tires - Tire Radial Force Variation (RFV) Wheels: All Technical Service Bulletins Wheels/Tires - Tire Radial Force Variation (RFV) INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 00-03-10-006F Date: May 04, 2010 Subject: Information on Tire Radial Force Variation (RFV) Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X 2000-2005 Saturn L Series 2003-2007 Saturn ION Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to considerably expand the available information on Radial Force Variation (RFV) and should be reviewed in whole. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 00-03-10-006E (Section 03 - Suspension). Important - Before measuring tires on equipment such as the Hunter GSP9700, the vehicle MUST be driven a minimum of 16 km (10 mi) to ensure removal of any flat-spotting. Refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 03-03-10-007E - Tire/Wheel Characteristics of GM Original Equipment Tires. - Equipment such as the Hunter GSP9700 MUST be calibrated prior to measuring tire/wheel assemblies for each vehicle. The purpose of this bulletin is to provide guidance to GM dealers when using tire force variation measurement equipment, such as the Hunter GSP9700. This type of equipment can be a valuable tool in diagnosing vehicle ride concerns. The most common ride concern involving tire radial force variation is highway speed shake on smooth roads. Tire related smooth road highway speed shake can be caused by three conditions: imbalance, out of round and tire force variation. These three conditions are not necessarily related. All three conditions must be addressed. Imbalance is normally addressed first, because it is the simpler of the three to correct. Off-vehicle, two plane dynamic wheel balancers are readily available and can accurately correct any imbalance. Balancer calibration and maintenance, proper attachment of the wheel to the balancer, and proper balance weights, are all factors required for a quality balance. However, a perfectly balanced tire/wheel assembly can still be "oval shaped" and cause a vibration. Before balancing, perform the following procedures. Tire and Wheel Diagnosis 1. Set the tire pressure to the placard values. 2. With the vehicle raised, ensure the wheels are centered on the hub by loosening all wheel nuts and hand-tightening all nuts first by hand while shaking the wheel, then torque to specifications using a torque wrench, NOT a torque stick. 3. Visually inspect the tires and the wheels. Inspect for evidence of the following conditions and correct as necessary: - Missing balance weights - Bent rim flange - Irregular tire wear - Incomplete bead seating - Tire irregularities (including pressure settings) - Mud/ice build-up in wheel - Stones in the tire tread - Remove any aftermarket wheels and/or tires and restore vehicle to original condition prior to diagnosing a smooth road shake condition. 4. Road test the vehicle using the Electronic Vibration Analyzer (EVA) essential tool. Drive for a sufficient distance on a known, smooth road surface to duplicate the condition. Determine if the vehicle is sensitive to brake apply. If the brakes are applied lightly and the pulsation felt in the steering wheel increases, refer to the Brakes section of the service manual that deals with brake-induced pulsation. If you can start to hear the vibration as a low boom noise (in addition to feeling it), but cannot see it, the vehicle likely has a first order (one pulse per propshaft revolution) driveline vibration. Driveline first order vibrations are high enough in frequency that most humans can start to hear them at highway speeds, but are too high to be able to be easily seen. These issues can be caused by driveline imbalance or misalignment. If the vehicle exhibits this low boom and the booming pulses in-and-out on a regular basis (like a throbbing), chances are good that the vehicle could have driveline vibration. This type Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 00-03-10-006F > May > 10 > Wheels/Tires - Tire Radial Force Variation (RFV) > Page 1967 of vibration is normally felt more in the "seat of the pants" than the steering wheel. 5. Next, record the Hertz (Hz) reading as displayed by the EVA onto the tire data worksheet found at the end of this bulletin. This should be done after a tire break-in period of at least 16 km (10 mi) at 72 km/h (45 mph) or greater, in order to eliminate any possible tire flat-spotting. This reading confirms what the vehicle vibration frequency is prior to vehicle service and documents the amount of improvement occurring as the result of the various steps taken to repair. Completing the Steering Wheel Shake Worksheet below is required. A copy of the completed worksheet must be saved with the R.O. and a copy included with any parts returned to the Warranty Parts Center for analysis. A reading of 35 to 50 Hz typically indicates a first order propshaft vibration. If this is the situation, refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 08-07-30-044D. Generally, a reading between 10 and 20 Hz indicates a tire/wheel vibration and if this is the reading obtained, continue using this bulletin. If the tire 1st order vibration goes away and stays away during this evaluation, the cause is likely tire flat-spotting. Tire flat-spotting vibration may come and go at any speed over 72 km/h (45 mph) during the first 10 minutes of operation, if vibration continues after 10 minutes of driving at speeds greater than 72 km/h (45 mph), tire flat-spotting can be ruled out as the cause for vibration. 6. If flat-spotting is the cause, provide the explanation that this has occurred due to the vehicle being parked for long periods of time and that the nature of the tire is to take a set. Refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 03-03-10-007E: Information on Tire/Wheel Characteristics (Vibration, Balance, Shake, Flat Spotting) of GM Original Equipment Tires. 7. If the road test indicates a shake/vibration exists, check the imbalance of each tire/wheel assembly on a known, calibrated, off-car dynamic balancer.Make sure the mounting surface of the wheel and the surface of the balancer are absolutely clean and free of debris. Be sure to chose the proper cone/collet for the wheel, and always use the pilot bore for centering. Never center the wheel using the hub-cap bore since it is not a precision machined surface. If any assembly calls for more than 1/4 ounce on either rim flange, remove all balance weights and rebalance to as close to zero as possible. If you can see the vibration (along with feeling it) in the steering wheel (driving straight without your hands on the wheel), it is very likely to be a tire/wheel first order (one pulse per revolution) disturbance. First order disturbances can be caused by imbalance as well as non-uniformities in tires, wheels or hubs. This first order frequency is too low for a human to hear, but if the amplitude is high enough, it can be seen. If a vibration or shake still exists after balancing, any out of round conditions, of the wheel, and force variation conditions of the tire, must be addressed. Equipment such as the Hunter GSP9700 can address both (it is also a wheel balancer). Tire radial force vibration (RFV) can be defined as the amount of stiffness variation the tire will produce in one revolution under a constant load. Radial force variation is what the vehicle feels because the load (weight) of the vehicle is always on the tires. Although free runout of tires (not under load) is not always a good indicator of a smooth ride, it is critical that total tire/wheel assembly runout be within specification. Equipment such as the Hunter GSP9700 loads the tire, similar to on the vehicle, and measures radial force variation of the tire/wheel assembly. Note that the wheel is affecting the tire's RFV measurement at this point. To isolate the wheel, its runout must be measured. This can be easily done on the Hunter, without the need to set up dial indicators. If the wheel meets the runout specification, the tire's RFV can then be addressed. After measuring the tire/wheel assembly under load, and the wheel alone, the machine then calculates (predicts) the radial force variation of the tire. However, because this is a prediction that can include mounting inaccuracies, and the load wheel is much smaller in diameter than used in tire production, this type of service equipment should NOT be used to audit new tires. Rather, it should be used as a service diagnostic tool to minimize radial force variation of the tire/wheel assembly. Equipment such as the Hunter GSP9700 does an excellent job of measuring wheel runout, and of finding the low point of the wheel (for runout) and the high point of the tire (for radial force variation). This allows the tire to be matched mounted to the wheel for lowest tire/wheel assembly force variation. The machine will simplify this process into easy steps. The following assembly radial force variation numbers should be used as a guide: When measuring RFV and match mounting tires perform the following steps. Measuring Wheel Runout and Assembly Radial Force Variation Important The completed worksheet at the end of this bulletin must be attached to the hard copy of the repair order. - Measure radial force variation and radial runout. - If a road force/balancing machine is used, record the radial force variation (RFV) on the worksheet at the end of this bulletin. It may be of benefit to have the lowest RFV assembly to the front left corner. If the machine is not available and the EVA data suggests there is an issue, swap the tire and wheel assemblies from the front to the back. Re-check on the EVA and if the problem still exists, test another vehicle to find tires that do not exhibit the same frequency and swap those tires onto the subject vehicle. - If a runout/balancing machine is used, record the radial runout of the tire/wheel assemblies on the worksheet at the end of this bulletin. If one or more of the tire/wheel assemblies are more than.040 in (1.02 mm), match mount the tire to the wheel to get below.040 in (1.02 mm). For sensitive customers, readings of 0.030 inch (0.76 mm) or less are preferable, it may also be of benefit to have the lowest runout assembly to the front left corner. If the machine is not available and the EVA data suggests there is an issue, swap the tire and wheel assemblies from the front to the back. Re-check on the EVA and if the problem still exists, test another vehicle to find tires that do not exhibit the same frequency and swap those tires Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 00-03-10-006F > May > 10 > Wheels/Tires - Tire Radial Force Variation (RFV) > Page 1968 onto the subject vehicle. - After match mounting, the tire/wheel assembly must be rebalanced. If match mounting tires to in-spec wheels produces assembly values higher than these, tire replacement may be necessary. Replacing tires at lower values will probably mean good tires are being condemned. Because tires can sometimes become temporarily flat-spotted, which will affect force variation, it is important that the vehicle be driven at least 16 km (10 mi) prior to measuring. Tire pressure must also be adjusted to the usage pressure on the vehicle's tire placard prior to measuring. Most GM vehicles will tolerate radial force variation up to these levels. However, some vehicles are more sensitive, and may require lower levels. Also, there are other tire parameters that equipment such as the Hunter GSP9700 cannot measure that may be a factor. In such cases, TAC should be contacted for further instructions. Important - When mounting a GM wheel to a wheel balancer/force variation machine, always use the wheel's center pilot hole. This is the primary centering mechanism on all GM wheels; the bolt holes are secondary. Usually a back cone method to the machine should be used. For added accuracy and repeatability, a flange plate should be used to clamp the wheel onto the cone and machine. This system is offered by all balancer manufacturers in GM's dealer program. - Any type of service equipment that removes tread rubber by grinding, buffing or truing is NOT recommended, and may void the tire warranty. However, tires may have been ground by the tire company as part of their tire manufacturing process. This is a legitimate procedure. Steering Wheel Shake Worksheet When diagnosing vibration concerns, use the following worksheet in conjunction with the appropriate Vibration Analysis-Road testing procedure in the Vibration Correction sub-section in SI. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 00-03-10-006F > May > 10 > Wheels/Tires - Tire Radial Force Variation (RFV) > Page 1969 Refer to the appropriate section of SI for specifications and repair procedures that are related to the vibration concern. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 05-03-10-003F > Apr > 10 > Tires/Wheels - Low Tire/Leaking Cast Aluminum Wheels Wheels: All Technical Service Bulletins Tires/Wheels - Low Tire/Leaking Cast Aluminum Wheels TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 05-03-10-003F Date: April 27, 2010 Subject: Low Tire Pressure, Leaking Cast Aluminum Wheels (Repair with Adhesive Sealant) Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (Including Saturn) 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X with Cast Aluminum Wheels Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the model years and the bulletin reference information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 05-03-10-003E (Section 03 - Suspension). Condition Some customers may comment on a low tire pressure condition. Diagnosis of the low tire pressure condition indicates an air leak through the cast aluminum wheel. Cause Porosity in the cast aluminum wheel may be the cause. Notice This bulletin specifically addresses issues related to the wheel casting that may result in an air leak. For issues related to corrosion of the wheel in service, please refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 08-03-10-006C - Tire Slowly Goes Flat, Tire Air Loss, Low Tire Pressure Warning Light Illuminated, Aluminum Wheel Bead Seat Corrosion (Clean and Resurface Wheel Bead Seat). Correction 1. Remove the tire and wheel assembly from the vehicle. Refer to the appropriate service procedure in SI. 2. Locate the leaking area by inflating the tire to 276 kPa (40 psi) and dipping the tire/wheel assembly in a water bath, or use a spray bottle with soap and water to locate the specific leak location. Important - If the porosity leak is located in the bead area of the aluminum rim (where the tire meets the rim), the wheel should be replaced. - If two or more leaks are located on one wheel, the wheel should be replaced. 3. If air bubbles are observed, mark the location. - If the leak location is on the tire/rubber area, refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 04-03-10-001F Tire Puncture Repair Procedures for All Cars and Light Duty Trucks. - If the leak is located on the aluminum wheel area, continue with the next step. 4. Inscribe a mark on the tire at the valve stem in order to indicate the orientation of the tire to the wheel. 5. Dismount the tire from the wheel. Refer to Tire Mounting and Dismounting. 6. Remove the tire pressure sensor. Refer to Tire Pressure Sensor removal procedure in SI. 7. Scuff the INSIDE rim surface at the leak area with #80 grit paper and clean the area with general purpose cleaner, such as 3M(R) General Purpose Adhesive Cleaner, P/N 08984, or equivalent. 8. Apply a 3 mm (0.12 in) thick layer of Silicone - Adhesive/Sealant, P/N 12378478 (in Canada, use 88900041), or equivalent, to the leak area. 9. Allow for the adhesive/sealant to dry. Notice Caution must be used when mounting the tire so as not to damage the sealer. Damaging the repair area may result in an air leak. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 05-03-10-003F > Apr > 10 > Tires/Wheels - Low Tire/Leaking Cast Aluminum Wheels > Page 1974 10. Align the inscribed mark on the tire with the valve stem on the wheel. 11. Reinstall the Tire Pressure Sensor. Refer to Tire Pressure Sensor installation procedure in SI. 12. Mount the tire on the wheel. Refer to Tire Mounting and Dismounting. 13. Pressurize the tire to 276 kPa (40 psi) and inspect for leaks. 14. Adjust tire pressure to meet the placard specification. 15. Balance the tire/wheel assembly. Refer to Tire and Wheel Assembly Balancing - Off-Vehicle. 16. Install the tire and wheel assembly onto the vehicle. Refer to the appropriate service procedure in SI. Parts Information Warranty Information (excluding Saab U.S. Models) Important The Silicone - Adhesive/Sealant comes in a case quantity of six. ONLY charge warranty one tube of adhesive/sealant per wheel repair. For vehicles repaired under warranty, use: One leak repair per wheel. Warranty Information (Saab U.S. Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table above. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 08-03-10-006C > Apr > 10 > Tires/Wheels - Tire Slowly Goes Flat/Warning Light ON Wheels: All Technical Service Bulletins Tires/Wheels - Tire Slowly Goes Flat/Warning Light ON TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 08-03-10-006C Date: April 27, 2010 Subject: Tire Slowly Goes Flat, Tire Air Loss, Low Tire Pressure Warning Light Illuminated, Aluminum Wheel Bead Seat Corrosion (Clean and Resurface Wheel Bead Seat) Models: 2000-2011 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (including Saturn) 2003-2009 HUMMER H2 2006-2010 HUMMER H3 2005-2009 Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 08-03-10-006B (Section 03 - Suspension). Condition Some customers may comment on a tire that slowly loses air pressure over a period of days or weeks. Cause Abrasive elements in the environment may intrude between the tire and wheel at the bead seat. There is always some relative motion between the tire and wheel (when the vehicle is driven) and this motion may cause the abrasive particles to wear the wheel and tire materials. As the wear continues, there may also be intrusion at the tire/wheel interface by corrosive media from the environment. Eventually a path for air develops and a 'slow' leak may ensue. This corrosion may appear on the inboard or outboard bead seating surface of the wheel. This corrosion will not be visible until the tire is dismounted from the wheel. Notice This bulletin specifically addresses issues related to wheel bead seat corrosion that may result in an air leak. For issues related to porosity of the wheel casting that may result in an air leak, please refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 05-03-10-006F - Low Tire Pressure, Leaking Cast Aluminum Wheels (Repair with Adhesive Sealant) Correction In most cases, this type of air loss can be corrected by following the procedure below. Important DO NOT replace a wheel for slow air loss unless you have evaluated and/or tried to repair the wheel with the procedure below. Notice The repair is no longer advised or applicable for chromed aluminum wheels. 1. Remove the wheel and tire assembly for diagnosis. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation in SI. 2. After a water dunk tank leak test, if you determine the source of the air leak to be around the bead seat of the wheel, dismount the tire to examine the bead seat. Shown below is a typical area of bead seat corrosion.Typical Location of Bead Seat Corrosion Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 08-03-10-006C > Apr > 10 > Tires/Wheels - Tire Slowly Goes Flat/Warning Light ON > Page 1979 Important Other forms of slow air leaks are possible. If the body of the tire, valve stem and wheel flange show no signs of air seepage, refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 05-03-10-003D for additional information on possible wheel porosity issues. 3. Bead seat corrosion is identified by what appears like blistering of the wheel finish, causing a rough or uneven surface that is difficult for the tire to maintain a proper seal on. Below is a close-up photo of bead seat corrosion on an aluminum wheel that was sufficient to cause slow air loss. Close-Up of Bead Seat Corrosion 4. If corrosion is found on the wheel bead seat, measure the affected area as shown below. - For vehicles with 32,186 km (20,000 mi) or less, the total allowable combined linear area of repairable corrosion is 100 mm (4 in) or less. If the total area(s) of corrosion exceed these dimensions, the wheel should be replaced. - For vehicles that have exceeded 32,186 km (20,000 mi), the total allowable combined linear area of repairable corrosion is 200 mm (8 in) or less. If the total area(s) of corrosion exceed these dimensions, the wheel should be replaced. 5. In order to correct the wheel leak, use a clean-up (fine cut) sanding disc or biscuit to remove the corrosion and any flaking paint. You should remove the corrosion back far enough until you reach material that is stable and firmly bonded to the wheel. Try to taper the edge of any flaking paint as best you can in order to avoid sharp edges that may increase the chance of a leak reoccurring. The photo below shows an acceptable repaired surface. Notice Corrosion that extends up the lip of the wheel, where after the clean-up process it would be visible with the tire mounted, is only acceptable on the inboard flange. The inboard flange is not visible with the wheel assembly in the mounted position. If any loose coatings or corrosion extend to the visible surfaces on the FACE of the wheel, that wheel must be replaced. Important Remove ONLY the material required to eliminate the corrosion from the bead seating surface. DO NOT remove excessive amounts of material. ALWAYS keep the sealing surface as smooth and level as possible. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 08-03-10-006C > Apr > 10 > Tires/Wheels - Tire Slowly Goes Flat/Warning Light ON > Page 1980 Acceptably Prepared (Cleaned-Up) Wheel Surface 6. Once the corrosion has been eliminated, you should coat the repaired area with a commercially available tire sealant such as Patch Brand Bead Sealant or equivalent. Commercially available bead sealants are black rubber-like coatings that will permanently fill and seal the resurfaced bead seat. At 21°C (70°F) ambient temperature, this sealant will set-up sufficiently for tire mounting in about 10 minutes.Coated and Sealed Bead Seat 7. Remount the tire and install the repaired wheel and tire assembly. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation in SI. Parts Information Patch Brand Bead Sealer is available from Myers Tires at 1-800-998-9897 or on the web at www.myerstiresupply.com. The one-quart size can of sealer will repair about 20 wheels. Warranty Information (excluding Saab U.S. Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use: Warranty Information (Saab U.S. Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table above. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 08-03-10-006C > Apr > 10 > Tires/Wheels - Tire Slowly Goes Flat/Warning Light ON > Page 1981 Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 00-03-10-002F > Apr > 11 > Wheels - Chrome Wheel Staining/Pitting/Corrosion Wheels: All Technical Service Bulletins Wheels - Chrome Wheel Staining/Pitting/Corrosion INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 00-03-10-002F Date: April 21, 2011 Subject: Chemical Staining, Pitting, Corrosion and/or Spotted Appearance of Chromed Aluminum Wheels Models: 2012 and Prior GM Cars and Trucks Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update model years, suggest additional restorative products and add additional corrosion information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 00-03-10-002E (Section 03 - Suspension). Important You may give a copy of this bulletin to the customer. What is Chemical Staining of Chrome Wheels? Figure 1 Chemical staining in most cases results from acid based cleaners (refer to Figure 1 for an example). These stains are frequently milky, black, or greenish in appearance. They result from using cleaning solutions that contain acids on chrome wheels. Soap and water is usually sufficient to clean wheels. If the customer insists on using a wheel cleaner they should only use one that specifically states that it is safe for chromed wheels and does not contain anything in the following list. (Dealers should also survey any products they use during prep or normal cleaning of stock units for these chemicals.) - Ammonium Bifluoride (fluoride source for dissolution of chrome) - Hydrofluoric Acid (directly dissolves chrome) - Hydrochloric Acid (directly dissolves chrome) - Sodium Dodecylbenzenesulfonic Acid - Sulfamic Acid - Phosphoric Acid - Hydroxyacetic Acid Notice Many wheel cleaner instructions advise to take care to avoid contact with painted surfaces. Most customers think of painted surfaces as the fenders, quarter panels and other exterior sheet metal. Many vehicles have painted brake calipers. Acidic wheel cleaners may craze, crack, or discolor the paint on the brake calipers. Damage from wheel cleaners is not covered under the vehicle new car warranty. Soap and water applied with a soft brush is usually all that is required to clean the calipers. Whenever any wheel cleaner is used, it must be THOROUGHLY rinsed off of the wheel with clean, clear water. Special care must be taken to rinse under the hub cap, balance weights, wheel nuts, lug nut caps, between the wheel cladding and off the back side of the wheel. Wheels returned to the Warranty Parts Center (WPC) that exhibit damage from wheel cleaners most often have the damage around and under the wheel weight where the cleaner was incompletely flushed away. Notice Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 00-03-10-002F > Apr > 11 > Wheels - Chrome Wheel Staining/Pitting/Corrosion > Page 1987 Do not use cleaning solutions that contain hydrofluoric, oxalic and most other acids on chrome wheels (or any wheels). If the customer is unsure of the chemical make-up of a particular wheel cleaner, it should be avoided. For wheels showing signs of milky staining from acidic cleaners, refer to Customer Assistance and Instructions below. Warranty of Stained Chrome Wheels Stained wheels are not warrantable. Most acid based cleaners will permanently stain chrome wheels. Follow-up with dealers has confirmed that such cleaners were used on wheels that were returned to the Warranty Parts Center (WPC). Any stained wheels received by the WPC will be charged back to the dealership. To assist the customer, refer to Customer Assistance and Instructions below. Pitting or Spotted Appearance of Chrome Wheels Figure 2 A second type or staining or finish disturbance may result from road chemicals, such as calcium chloride used for dust control of unpaved roads. The staining will look like small pitting (refer to Figure 2). This staining will usually be on the leading edges of each wheel spoke, but may be uniformly distributed. If a vehicle must be operated under such conditions, the chrome wheels should be washed with mild soap and water and thoroughly rinsed as soon as conveniently possible. Important Road chemicals, such as calcium chloride used for dust control of unpaved roads, can also stain chrome wheels. The staining will look like small pitting. This staining will usually be on the leading edges of each wheel spoke. This is explained by the vehicle traveling in the forward direction while being splashed by the road chemical. If a vehicle must be operated under such conditions, the chrome wheels should be washed with mild soap and water and thoroughly rinsed as soon as conveniently possible. Warranty of Pitted or Spotted Chrome Wheels Wheels returned with pitting or spotting as a result of road chemicals may be replaced one time. Damage resulting from contact with these applied road chemicals is corrosive to the wheels finish and may cause damage if the wheels are not kept clean. Important Notify the customer that this is a one time replacement. Please stress to the customer the vital importance of keeping the wheels clean if they are operating the vehicle in an area that applies calcium chloride or other dust controlling chemicals! "GM of Canada" dealers require prior approval by the District Manager - Customer Care and Service Process (DM-CCSP). "Stardust" Corrosion of Chrome Wheels Figure 3 A third type of finish disturbance results from prolonged exposure to brake dust and resultant penetration of brake dust through the chrome. As brakes are applied hot particles of brake material are thrown off and tend to be forced through the leading edge of the wheel spoke windows by airflow. These Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 00-03-10-002F > Apr > 11 > Wheels - Chrome Wheel Staining/Pitting/Corrosion > Page 1988 hot particles embed themselves in the chrome layer and create a small pit. If the material is allowed to sit on the wheel while it is exposed to moisture or salt, it will corrode the wheel beneath the chrome leaving a pit or small blister in the chrome. Heavy brake dust build-up should be removed from wheels by using GM Chrome Cleaner and Polish, P/N 1050173 (in Canada use 10953013). For moderate cleaning, light brake dust build-up or water spots use GM Swirl Remover Polish, P/N 12377965 (in Canada, use Meguiars Plast-X(TM) Clear Plastic Cleaner and Polish #G12310C**). After cleaning, the wheel should be waxed using GM Cleaner Wax, P/N 12377966 (in Canada, use Meguiars Cleaner Wax #M0616C**), which will help protect the wheel from brake dust and reduce adhesion of any brake dust that gets on the wheel surface. For general maintenance cleaning, PEEK Metal Polish† may be used. It will clean and shine the chrome and leave behind a wax coating that may help protect the finish. Warranty of Stardust Corroded Chrome Wheels Wheels returned with pitting or spotting as a result of neglect and brake dust build-up may be replaced one time. Important Notify the customer that this is a one time replacement. Please stress to the customer the vital importance of keeping the wheels clean and free of prolonged exposure to brake dust build-up. "GM of Canada" dealers require prior approval by the District Manager - Customer Care and Service Process (DM-CCSP). Customer Assistance and Instructions GM has looked for ways customers may improve the appearance of wheels damaged by acidic cleaners. The following product and procedure has been found to dramatically improve the appearance of stained wheels. For wheels that have milky stains caused by acidic cleaners try the following: Notice THE 3M CHROME AND METAL POLISH REQUIRED FOR THIS PROCEDURE IS AN EXTREMELY AGGRESSIVE POLISH/CLEANER. THE WHEELS MUST BE CLEANED BEFORE APPLICATION TO AVOID SCRATCHING THE WHEEL SURFACE. THIS PRODUCT WILL REDUCE THE THICKNESS OF THE CHROME PLATING ON THE WHEEL AND IF USED INCORRECTLY OR EXCESSIVELY MAY REMOVE THE CHROME PLATING ALL TOGETHER, EXPOSING A LESS BRIGHT AND BRASSY COLORED SUB-LAYER. FOLLOW INSTRUCTIONS EXACTLY. 1. Wash the wheels with vigorously with soap and water. This step will clean and may reduce wheel staining. Flood all areas of the wheel with water to rinse. 2. Dry the wheels completely. Notice Begin with a small section of the wheel and with light pressure buff off polish and examine results. ONLY apply and rub with sufficient force and time to remove enough staining that you are satisfied with the results. Some wheels may be stained to the extent that you may only achieve a 50% improvement while others may be able to be restored to the original lustre. IN ALL CASES, only apply until the results are satisfactory. 3. Apply 3M Chrome and Metal Polish #39527* with a clean terry cloth towel. As you apply the polish, the staining will be diminished. 4. When dry, buff off the polish with a clean portion of the towel. 5. Repeat application of the 3M Chrome and Metal Polish until satisfied with the results. If continued applications fail to improve the appearance further discontinue use. This procedure will improve the appearance of the wheels and may, with repeated applications, restore the finish dramatically. For wheels that exhibit spotting from road chemicals the above procedure may marginally improve the condition but will not restore the finish or remove the pitting. In this type of staining the wheel finish has actually been removed in spots and no manner of cleaning will restore the finish. †*We believe this source and their products to be reliable. There may be additional manufacturers of such products/materials. General Motors does not endorse, indicate any preference for or assume any responsibility for the products or material from this firm or for any such items that may be available from other sources. Parts Information Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 00-03-10-002F > Apr > 11 > Wheels - Chrome Wheel Staining/Pitting/Corrosion > Page 1989 *This product is currently available from 3M. To obtain information for your local retail location please call 3M at 1-888-364-3577. **This product is currently available from Meguiars (Canada). To obtain information for your local retail location please call Meguiars at 1-800-347-5700 or at www.meguiarscanada.com. ^ This product is currently available from Tri-Peek International. To obtain information for your local retail location please call Tri-Peek at 1-877-615-4272 or at www.tripeek.com. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 09-03-10-011A > Mar > 11 > Tires/Wheels - 19 Inch Wheels Available through GM Wheels: All Technical Service Bulletins Tires/Wheels - 19 Inch Wheels Available through GM INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 09-03-10-011A Date: March 21, 2011 Subject: 19 Inch Accessory Wheels Available through GM Accessories Models: 2010-2011 Chevrolet Equinox 2010-2011 GMC Terrain Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add 2011 model year and update information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 09-03-10-011 (Section 03 - Suspension). The purpose of this bulletin is to provide a reference guide for the technician to upgrade a vehicle from factory wheels and tires to 19" wheels and tires, which are available through GM Accessories. This guide will cover tires, wheels, vehicle modifications, and warranty information. Tires GM offers one tire; the Bridgestone Dueler Alenza HL P235/50R19 99H, GM P/N 19190765, to be used in conjunction with the 19" accessory wheels. The Bridgestone Dueler Alenza HL tire has a Tire Performance Criteria (TPC) spec of 1343MS (molded on the sidewall), which meets or exceeds all Federal Safety guidelines. Important - If the vehicle was built with 19" factory wheels, it is OK to install the accessory 19" wheel, but DO NOT install the accessory 19" tire. Please re-use the 19" factory tire. - If the vehicle was built with 17" or 18" factory wheels, ONLY install the accessory 19" tire on the 19" wheel. DO NOT install the 19" factory tire. Mounting and Balancing Refer to the most recent version of Corporate Bulletin Number 08-03-10-004A for proper methods for mounting, balancing and installing accessory wheels and tires. Wheels Wheel (Lug) Nuts Each wheel nut should be torqued in the appropriate torque sequence (refer to graphic) and to 170 Nm (125 lb ft). The torque should be rechecked after the first 160 km (100 mi). To help protect the wheels from theft, a wheel lock kit is also available. Caution Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly tightened wheel nuts can cause the wheel to become loose and even come off. This could lead to an accident. Be sure to use the correct wheel nuts. Care / Cleaning Use soap, hot water and a 100% cotton cloth to clean and polish the new wheels. If using a wheel cleaner, be sure to select one that will not harm the wheel surface. Avoid car washes that use carbide tipped brushes, as these may damage the wheel's finish. Periodically clean the backside of the wheel to Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 09-03-10-011A > Mar > 11 > Tires/Wheels - 19 Inch Wheels Available through GM > Page 1994 remove road grime, brake dust and grease. Mounting and Balancing Refer to the most recent version of Corporate Bulletin Number 08-03-10-004A for proper methods for mounting, balancing and installing accessory wheels and tires. The mounted and balanced wheel/tire assemblies MUST meet GM service guidelines for measured radial force variation to ensure vibration free performance. The following radial force variation numbers for the assembly should be used as a guide: If any wheel/tire assembly does not meet the above standards, refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 00-03-10-006F: Information on Tire Radial Force Variation (RFV) for further information on possible corrective actions. Vehicle Modifications Tire Label After installing the recommended P235/50R19 tires, place the provided tire label on the vehicle. The new tire label should be located within the red box, over the top of the original tire label found on the door jamb. To locate the label within the red box use the upper left hand edge of the red line as a guide. When properly placed, the new tire label will obscure the original tire information. Be sure that the surface is clean and dry. The surface temperature should not be less than 21°C (65°F). The label is provided as a guide for tire inflation pressures and information relevant to occupant/cargo capacities. Tire Type/Pressure Selection To provide a more accurate function of the Tire Pressure Monitoring System, it is necessary to update the body control module (BCM) with the correct tire type and pressure information. The factory 17" and 18" tires have a placard inflation pressure of 241 kPa (35 psi), which must be changed to 250 kPa (36 psi) when upsizing to the 19" accessory tires. Using the Global Diagnostic System (GDS 2), follow the steps listed below to select the appropriate tire type/pressure: 1. Enter "Module Diagnosis". 2. Select "Body Control Module". 3. Select "Configuration/Reset Functions". 4. Select "Tire Type/Pressure Selection". Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM) System To avoid system malfunctions, it is necessary to install tire pressure sensors in the accessory wheels. Replacement sensors can be obtained or sensors from the OE wheels can be transferred to the accessory wheels. After the wheels are installed on the vehicle, it is necessary to learn the new sensor identification codes/locations into the body control module (BCM). TPM Sensor Relearn Procedure Note If using the scan tool (GDS 2) to enable the learn mode, the EL 46079 Diagnostic Tool must be used to activate the sensors. When this preferred method is used, any stray sensor signals will not affect the learn procedure. In the event a particular sensor's information is displayed on the special tool upon activation but the horn does not chirp, it may be necessary to rotate the wheel valve stem to a different position due to the sensor signal is being blocked by another component. If using the keyless entry transmitter or driver information center buttons to enable the learn mode, the EL 46079 Diagnostic Tool or Pressure Increase/Decrease Method may be used. Before proceeding with this method, ensure that no other learn procedure is being performed simultaneously or that tire pressures are not being adjusted on another Tire Pressure Monitor equipped vehicle within close proximity. Stray signals from other tire pressure equipped vehicles just driving by can be inadvertently learned. If any random horn chirps are heard from the vehicle while performing the learn procedure, most likely a stray sensor has been learned and the procedure will need to be cancelled and repeated. Under these circumstances, performing the tire pressure Learn Procedure away from other vehicles may be highly recommended. In the event a particular sensor activation does not cause the horn to chirp, it may be necessary to rotate the wheel valve stem to a different position due to the sensor signal is being blocked by another component. Preferred Scan Tool (GDS 2) Learn Enable Method Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 09-03-10-011A > Mar > 11 > Tires/Wheels - 19 Inch Wheels Available through GM > Page 1995 1. Using a scan tool (GDS 2), initiate the tire pressure Learn Mode. A double horn chirp will sound together with activated turn signal lamps indicating the Learn Mode has been enabled. The left front turn signal only will then be illuminated. 2. Starting with the left front tire, active the sensor by holding the antenna of the EL 46079 Diagnostic Tool aimed upward against the tire sidewall close to the wheel rim at the valve stem location. Press and release the Activate button and wait for a horn chirp. Once all the turn signal lamps have been activated for 3 seconds and the horn chirp has sounded, the sensor information is learned and the turn signal in the next location to be learned will illuminate. 3. After the horn chirp has sounded and the turn signal in the next location to be learned will illuminate, repeat step 2 for the remaining 3 sensors in the following order: 1. Right front 2. Right rear 3. Left rear 4. When the left rear sensor has been learned, all the turn signal lamps have been activated for 3 seconds and a double horn chirp has sounded, the learn process is complete and BCM exits the learn mode. 5. Ignition OFF, adjust all tires to the recommended pressures. Alternate Driver Information Center Learn Enable Method 1. Ignition ON, press and release the driver information center info button on the stalk switch until the tire learn message appears on the driver information center display. Press and hold the set/reset button until all the turn signal lamps have been activated for 3 seconds and a double horn chirp sounded indicating the Learn Mode has been enabled. The left front turn signal will then be illuminated. 2. Starting with the left front tire, learn the tire pressure using one of the following methods: - Hold the antenna of the EL 46079 Diagnostic Tool aimed upward against the tire sidewall close to the wheel rim at the valve stem location. Press and release the activate button and wait for a horn chirp. Once all the turn signal lamps have been activated for 3 seconds and a single horn chirp sounded, the sensor information is learned and the turn signal in the next location to be learned will illuminate. - Increase/decrease the tire pressure 8.3 kPa (1.2 psi) then wait for a horn chirp. The horn chirp may occur before or up to 30 seconds after the pressure increase/decrease. Once the horn chirp has sounded, the sensor information is learned and the turn signal in the next location to be learned will illuminate. 3. After the horn chirp has sounded the turn signal in the next location to be learned will illuminate, repeat step 2 for the remaining 3 sensors in the following order: 1. Right front 2. Right rear 3. Left rear 4. When the left rear sensor has been learned and all the turn signal lamps have been activated for 3 seconds and a double horn chirp has sounded, the learn process is complete and BCM exits the learn mode. 5. Ignition OFF, adjust all tires to the recommended pressures. Engine Control Module (ECM) Reprogramming Important For proper vehicle operation and to insure coverage under the provisions of the new vehicle warranty, the vehicle must be programmed with the correct calibration as soon as the 19" wheels are installed. When upsizing from 17" wheels only, the ECM must be reprogrammed for speedometer accuracy. Contact Techline to obtain a VCI number. Record this number on the form below. Use the Service Programming System (SPS). Checking and Clearing DTCs After Reprogramming DTCs codes may be set as a result of the programming process. In most cases the codes can be cleared. Calibration Information Documentation 1. Make a copy of the "Accessory Wheel and Tire Information Form" included in this bulletin. 2. Provide all information required on the form. 3. Make a copy of the completed form for the customer to keep in the vehicle along with their Owner's Manual. 4. File the original completed form in the Dealership's Vehicle Service History folder. Important: If original equipment tires/wheels are reinstalled, it will be necessary to reset the programming of the ECM to the original specifications. Warranty Information Wheels Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 09-03-10-011A > Mar > 11 > Tires/Wheels - 19 Inch Wheels Available through GM > Page 1996 All GM Accessories sold and permanently installed on a GM vehicle PRIOR to new vehicle delivery will be covered under the provisions of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. For the U.S., in the event GM Accessories are installed AFTER new vehicle delivery, or are replaced under the new vehicle warranty, they will be covered (parts and labor) for the balance of the vehicle warranty, but in no event less than 12 months/12,000 miles. This coverage is only effective for GM Accessories permanently installed by a GM dealer or a GM approved ADI (Accessory Distributor / Installer). For Canada, in the event GM Accessories are installed AFTER new vehicle delivery, they will be covered (parts and labor) for the balance of the vehicle warranty, or up to 12 months/unlimited kilometers depending on month installed. For replacement after the new vehicle warranty expires, but within the 12 months/unlimited kilometers coverage, refer to claim type ZPTI guidelines. GM Accessories sold over-the-counter, or those not requiring installation, will continue to receive the standard GM Dealer Parts Warranty of 12 months from the date of purchase (parts only). Tires Any approved tire installed on a GM Vehicle PRIOR to delivery will be covered under the provisions of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Tires are covered against defects in material and workmanship. Tires are warranted for defects "without" prorated charge for tread mileage. Subsequent replacements under this warranty will continue to be covered for the remainder of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Any approved tire installed on a GM Vehicle PRIOR to delivery may continue to be warranted on a prorated basis by the tire manufacturer once the New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires. Any approved tire installed AFTER delivery will be covered under the provisions of the tire manufacturer warranty. USA dealers should refer to GM Warranty Administration Bulletin 00-03-10-003O for more information. Canadian dealers should refer to GM Warranty Administration Bulletin 01-03-10-003H. ACCESSORY WHEEL AND TIRE INFORMATION FORM Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 09-03-10-011A > Mar > 11 > Tires/Wheels - 19 Inch Wheels Available through GM > Page 1997 You have just modified your vehicle by installing an "Accessory Package" which includes Wheels and Tires. This form contains important information about your accessory installation. In an effort to provide superior service to you, our customer, we ask that you please present this form to your Servicing Dealer when removing or installing wheels and tires on your vehicle. This form contains important information necessary to service your vehicle. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 99-08-51-007E > Mar > 11 > Wheels/Tires - Refinishing Aluminum Wheels Wheels: All Technical Service Bulletins Wheels/Tires - Refinishing Aluminum Wheels INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 99-08-51-007E Date: March 17, 2011 Subject: Refinishing Aluminum Wheels Models: 2012 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add additional model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 99-08-51-007D (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). This bulletin updates General Motor's position on refinishing aluminum wheels. GM does not endorse any repairs that involve welding, bending, straightening or re-machining. Only cosmetic refinishing of the wheel's coatings, using recommended procedures, is allowed. Evaluating Damage In evaluating damage, it is the GM Dealer's responsibility to inspect the wheel for corrosion, scrapes, gouges, etc. The Dealer must insure that such damage is not deeper than what can be sanded or polished off. The wheel must be inspected for cracks. If cracks are found, discard the wheel. Any wheels with bent rim flanges must not be repaired or refinished. Wheels that have been refinished by an outside company must be returned to the same vehicle. The Dealer must record the wheel ID stamp or the cast date on the wheel in order to assure this requirement. Refer to Refinisher's Responsibility - Outside Company later in this bulletin. Aluminum Wheel Refinishing Recommendations - Chrome-plated aluminum wheels Re-plating these wheels is not recommended. - Polished aluminum wheels These wheels have a polyester or acrylic clearcoat on them. If the clearcoat is damaged, refinishing is possible. However, the required refinishing process cannot be performed in the dealer environment. Refer to Refinisher's Responsibility - Outside Company later in this bulletin. - Painted aluminum wheels These wheels are painted using a primer, color coat, and clearcoat procedure. If the paint is damaged, refinishing is possible. As with polished wheels, all original coatings must be removed first. Media blasting is recommended. Refer to GM Aluminum Refinishing Bulletin #53-17-03A for the re-painting of this type of wheel. - Bright, machined aluminum wheels These wheels have a polyester or acrylic clearcoat on them. In some cases, the recessed "pocket" areas of the wheel may be painted. Surface refinishing is possible. The wheel must be totally stripped by media blasting or other suitable means. The wheel should be resurfaced by using a sanding process rather than a machining process. This allows the least amount of material to be removed. Important Do not use any re-machining process that removes aluminum. This could affect the dimensions and function of the wheel. Painting is an option to re-clearcoating polished and bright machined aluminum wheels. Paint will better mask any surface imperfections and is somewhat more durable than clearcoat alone. GM recommends using Corsican SILVER WAEQ9283 for a fine "aluminum-like" look or Sparkle SILVER WA9967 for a very bright look. As an option, the body color may also be used. When using any of the painting options, it is recommended that all four wheels be refinished in order to maintain color uniformity. Refer to GM Aluminum Refinishing Bulletin #53-17-03A for specific procedures and product recommendations. Refinisher's Responsibility - Outside Company Important Some outside companies are offering wheel refinishing services. Such refinished wheels will be permanently marked by the refinisher and are warranted by the refinisher. Any process that re-machines or otherwise re-manufactures the wheel should not be used. A refinisher's responsibility includes inspecting for cracks using the Zyglo system or the equivalent. Any cracked wheels must not be refinished. No welding, hammering or reforming of any kind is allowed. The wheel ID must be recorded and follow the wheel throughout the process in order to assure that the same wheel is returned. A plastic media blast may be used for clean up of the wheel. Hand and/or lathe sanding of the machined surface and the wheel window is allowed. Material removal, though, must be kept to a minimum. Re-machining of the wheel is not allowed. Paint and/or clear coat must not be present on the following surfaces: the nut chamfers, the wheel mounting surfaces and the wheel pilot hole. The refinisher must permanently ID stamp the wheel and warrant the painted/clearcoated surfaces for a minimum of one year or the remainder of the new vehicle warranty, whichever is Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 99-08-51-007E > Mar > 11 > Wheels/Tires - Refinishing Aluminum Wheels > Page 2002 longer. Important Whenever a wheel is refinished, the mounting surface and the wheel nut contact surfaces must not be painted or clearcoated. Coating these surfaces could affect the wheel nut torque. When re-mounting a tire on an aluminum wheel, coated balance weights must be used in order to reduce the chance of future cosmetic damage. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 06-03-10-010A > Jun > 10 > Wheels - Changing Procedures/Precautions Wheels: All Technical Service Bulletins Wheels - Changing Procedures/Precautions INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 06-03-10-010A Date: June 09, 2010 Subject: Information on Proper Wheel Changing Procedures and Cautions Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks 2010 and Prior HUMMER Models 2005-2009 Saab 9-7X 2005-2009 Saturn Vehicles Attention: Complete wheel changing instructions for each vehicle line can be found under Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation in Service Information (SI). This bulletin is intended to quickly review and reinforce simple but vital procedures to reduce the possibility of achieving low torque during wheel installation. Always refer to SI for wheel lug nut torque specifications and complete jacking instructions for safe wheel changing. Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to include the 2011 model year and update the available special tool list. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 06-03-10-010 (Section 03 Suspension). Frequency of Wheel Changes - Marketplace Driven Just a few years ago, the increasing longevity of tires along with greater resistance to punctures had greatly reduced the number of times wheels were removed to basically required tire rotation intervals. Today with the booming business in accessory wheels/special application tires (such as winter tires), consumers are having tire/wheel assemblies removed - replaced - or installed more than ever. With this increased activity, it opens up more of a chance for error on the part of the technician. This bulletin will review a few of the common concerns and mistakes to make yourself aware of. Proper Servicing Starts With the Right Tools The following tools have been made available to assist in proper wheel and tire removal and installation. - J 41013 Rotor Resurfacing Kit (or equivalent) - J 42450-A Wheel Hub Resurfacing Kit (or equivalent) Corroded Surfaces One area of concern is corrosion on the mating surfaces of the wheel to the hub on the vehicle. Excessive corrosion, dirt, rust or debris built up on these surfaces can mimic a properly tightened wheel in the service stall. Once the vehicle is driven, the debris may loosen, grind up or be washed away from water splash. This action may result in clearance at the mating surface of the wheel and an under-torqued condition. Caution Before installing a wheel, remove any buildup on the wheel mounting surface and brake drum or brake disc mounting surface. Installing wheels with poor metal-to-metal contact at the mounting surfaces can cause wheel nuts to loosen. This may cause a wheel to come off when the vehicle is moving, possibly resulting in a loss of control or personal injury. Whenever you remove the tire/wheel assemblies, you must inspect the mating surfaces. If corrosion is found, you should remove the debris with a die grinder equipped with a fine sanding pad, wire brush or cleaning disc. Just remove enough material to assure a clean, smooth mating surface. The J 41013 (or equivalent) can be used to clean the following surfaces: - The hub mounting surface - The brake rotor mounting surface - The wheel mounting surface Use the J 42450-A (or equivalent) to clean around the base of the studs and the hub. Lubricants, Grease and Fluids Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 06-03-10-010A > Jun > 10 > Wheels - Changing Procedures/Precautions > Page 2007 Some customers may use penetrating oils, grease or other lubricants on wheel studs to aid in removal or installation. Always use a suitable cleaner/solvent to remove these lubricants prior to installing the wheel and tire assemblies. Lubricants left on the wheel studs may cause improper readings of wheel nut torque. Always install wheels to clean, dry wheel studs ONLY. Notice Lubricants left on the wheel studs or vertical mounting surfaces between the wheel and the rotor or drum may cause the wheel to work itself loose after the vehicle is driven. Always install wheels to clean, dry wheel studs and surfaces ONLY. Beginning with 2011 model year vehicles, put a light coating of grease, GM P/N 1051344 (in Canada, P/N 9930370), on the inner surface of the wheel pilot hole to prevent wheel seizure to the axle or bearing hub. Wheel Stud and Lug Nut Damage Always inspect the wheel studs and lug nuts for signs of damage from crossthreading or abuse. You should never have to force wheel nuts down the stud. Lug nuts that are damaged may not retain properly, yet give the impression of fully tightening. Always inspect and replace any component suspected of damage. Tip Always start wheel nuts by hand! Be certain that all wheel nut threads have been engaged BEFORE tightening the nut. Important If the vehicle has directional tread tires, verify the directional arrow on the outboard side of the tire is pointing in the direction of forward rotation. Wheel Nut Tightening and Torque Improper wheel nut tightening can lead to brake pulsation and rotor damage. In order to avoid additional brake repairs, evenly tighten the wheel nuts to the proper torque specification as shown for each vehicle in SI. Always observe the proper wheel nut tightening sequence as shown below in order to avoid trapping the wheel on the wheel stud threads or clamping the wheel slightly off center resulting in vibration. The Most Important Service You Provide While the above information is well known, and wheel removal so common, technicians run the risk of becoming complacent on this very important Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 06-03-10-010A > Jun > 10 > Wheels - Changing Procedures/Precautions > Page 2008 service operation. A simple distraction or time constraint that rushes the job may result in personal injury if the greatest of care is not exercised. Make it a habit to double check your work and to always side with caution when installing wheels. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Description and Operation > Replacement Wheels Description Wheels: Description and Operation Replacement Wheels Description Replacement Wheels Description Replace the wheel if any of the following conditions exist: * The wheel exhibits excessive runout. * The wheel is bent. * The wheel is cracked. * The wheel is severely rusted. * The wheel is severely corroded. Note: Air leaks caused by porosity on aluminum wheels are repairable. * The wheel leaks air. Warning If you are replacing the wheel(s), the wheel stud(s), the wheel nut(s) or the wheel bolt(s), install only new GM original equipment parts. Installation of used parts or non-GM original equipment parts may cause the wheel to loosen, loss of tire air pressure, poor vehicle handling and loss of vehicle control resulting in personal injury. Caution: The use of non-GM original equipment wheels may cause: * Damage to the wheel bearing, the wheel fasteners and the wheel * Tire damage caused by the modified clearance to the adjacent vehicle components * Adverse vehicle steering stability caused by the modified scrub radius * Damage to the vehicle caused by the modified ground clearance * Speedometer and odometer inaccuracy Replace the wheel, the wheel studs and the wheel/nuts, or the wheel bolts if applicable, if any of the following conditions exist: * The wheel has elongated bolt holes. * The wheel/nuts, or bolts if applicable, loosen repeatedly. Steel wheel identification is stamped into the wheel near the valve stem. Aluminum wheel identification is cast into the inboard side of the wheel. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Description and Operation > Replacement Wheels Description > Page 2011 Wheels: Description and Operation Steel Wheel Repair Description Steel Wheel Repair Description Caution: Do not heat wheels in an attempt to soften them for straightening or repair damage from striking curbs, etc. Do not weld wheels. The alloy used in these wheels is heat-treated and uncontrolled heating from welding affects the properties of the material. Caution: The use of tubes in tubeless tires is not a recommended repair due to the fact that speed ratings are greatly reduced. If leaks are found in a steel wheel, replace the wheel with a wheel of original equipment quality. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Wheel Bearing: Testing and Inspection Wheel Bearings Diagnosis Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension Wheel Bearing: Service and Repair Front Suspension Front Wheel Bearing and Hub Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 2017 Wheel Bearing: Service and Repair Rear Suspension Rear Wheel Bearing and Hub Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Hub > Axle Nut > Component Information > Specifications Axle Nut: Specifications Axle nut ................................................................................................................................................ .................................................... 205 Nm (151 lb ft) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Fastener > Component Information > Specifications Wheel Fastener: Specifications Wheel Fastener ................................................................................................................................... ...................................................... 190 Nm (140 ft lb) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Fastener > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2025 Wheel Fastener: Description and Operation Metric Wheel Nuts and Bolts Description Metric wheel/nuts and bolts are identified in the following way: * The wheel/nut has the word Metric stamped on the face. * The letter M is stamped on the end of the wheel bolt. The thread sizes of metric wheel/nuts and the bolts are indicated by the following example: M12 x 1.5. * M = Metric * 12 = Diameter in millimeters * 1.5 = Millimeters gap per thread Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Fastener > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension Wheel Fastener: Service and Repair Front Suspension Wheel Stud Replacement Tools Required J 43631 Ball Joint Remover Removal Procedure 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle (See: Vehicle Lifting/Service and Repair). 2. Remove the tire and wheel assembly. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation (See: Service and Repair). 3. Remove the wheel bearing/hub assembly. Refer to Front Wheel Bearing and Hub Replacement (See: Wheel Bearing/Service and Repair/Front Suspension). 4. Using the J 43631, press out the wheel stud from the wheel bearing/hub assembly. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Fastener > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 2028 Installation Procedure 1. Install the wheel stud to the wheel bearing/hub assembly from the bearing side of the hub flange. 2. Place flat washers over the wheel stud being installer. 3. Install the wheel nut or a hex head nut to the wheel stud. 4. Gradually tighten the nut in order to draw the stud into the hub flange until the head of the wheel stud is fully seated against the hub flange. 5. Remove the nut and flat washers. 6. Install the wheel bearing/hub assembly to the steering knuckle. Refer to Front Wheel Bearing and Hub Replacement (See: Wheel Bearing/Service and Repair/Front Suspension). 7. Install the tire and wheel assembly. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation (See: Service and Repair). 8. Lower the vehicle. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Fastener > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 2029 Wheel Fastener: Service and Repair Rear Suspension Wheel Stud Replacement Tools Required J 43631 Ball Joint Remover Removal Procedure 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle (See: Vehicle Lifting/Service and Repair). 2. Remove the tire and wheel assembly. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation (See: Service and Repair). 3. Remove the wheel bearing/hub replacement. Refer to Rear Wheel Bearing and Hub Replacement (See: Wheel Bearing/Service and Repair/Rear Suspension). 4. Using the J 43631, press out the wheel stud from the wheel bearing/hub assembly. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Fastener > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 2030 Installation Procedure 1. Install the wheel stud to the wheel bearing/hub assembly from the bearing side of the hub flange. 2. Place flat washers over the wheel stud being installed. 3. Install the wheel nut or a hex head nut to the wheel stud. 4. Gradually tighten the nut in order to draw the stud into the hub flange until the head of the wheel stud is fully seated against the hub flange. 5. Remove the nut and flat washers. 6. Install the tire and wheel assembly. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation (See: Service and Repair). 7. Lower the vehicle. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Vehicle Lifting > Component Information > Service and Repair Vehicle Lifting: Service and Repair Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle Danger: To avoid any vehicle damage, serious personal injury or death when major components are removed from the vehicle and the vehicle is supported by a hoist, support the vehicle with jack stands at the opposite end from which the components are being removed and strap the vehicle to the hoist. Danger: To avoid any vehicle damage, serious personal injury or death, always use the jackstands to support the vehicle when lifting the vehicle with a jack. Caution: Perform the following steps before beginning any vehicle lifting or jacking procedure: * Remove or secure all of the vehicle contents in order to avoid any shifting or any movement that may occur during the vehicle lifting or jacking procedure. * The lifting equipment or the jacking equipment weight rating must meet or exceed the weight of the vehicle and any vehicle contents. * The lifting equipment or the jacking equipment must meet the operational standards of the lifting equipment or jacking equipment manufacturer. * Perform the vehicle lifting or jacking procedure on a clean, hard, dry, level surface. * Perform the vehicle lifting or jacking procedure only at the identified lift points. DO NOT allow the lifting equipment or jacking equipment to contact any other vehicle components. Failure to perform the previous steps could result in damage to the lifting equipment or the jacking equipment, the vehicle, and/or the vehicle contents. Vehicle Lifting-Frame Contact Lift Front Lift Pads When lifting the vehicle with a frame-contact lift, place the front lift pads approximately 12.2 in (310 mm) inboard from the front pinchweld flanges. Rear Lift Pads When lifting the vehicle with a frame-contact lift, place the rear lift pads 10.0 in (255 mm) inboard from the rear pinchweld flanges. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Vehicle Lifting > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 2034 Vehicle Jacking Note: * Only the left side or the right side of the rear of the vehicle can be lifted at a time when using these jacking point. * The floor jack pad must not contact the oil pan, splash shield or the steering linkage. Under the Rear Suspension Lift the rear of the vehicle by placing the floor jack lift pad on either side of the suspension cradle, inboard and forward of the rear suspension, as shown. Under the Center of the Front Suspension Frame Lift the front of the vehicle by placing the floor jack lift pad at the center of the front suspension frame, as shown. Supporting the Vehicle with Jackstands Place jackstands ONLY under strong and stable vehicle structures. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Description and Operation Variable Valve Timing Actuator: Description and Operation Camshaft Actuator System Description Camshaft Actuator System Overview 1 - Camshaft Actuator Vane 2 - Timing Chain Sprocket 3 - Engine Oil Pressure-For retarding the camshaft 4 - Camshaft 5 - Input Signals from Engine Sensors 6 - Engine Control Module (ECM) 7 Camshaft Actuator Solenoid 8 - Engine Oil Pump 9 - Engine Oil Pressure Supply 10 - Engine Oil Drain 11 - Engine Oil Pressure-For advancing the camshaft 12 - Camshaft Actuator Rotor 13 Camshaft Position Sensor Reluctor 14 - Camshaft Actuator Lock Pin 15 - Camshaft Actuator Housing The camshaft actuator system enables the engine control module (ECM) to change camshaft timing of all 4 camshafts while the engine is operating. The CMP actuator assembly (15) varies the camshaft position in response to directional changes in oil pressure. The CMP actuator solenoid valve controls the oil pressure that is applied to advance or retard a camshaft. Modifying camshaft timing under changing engine demand provides better balance between the following performance concerns: * Engine power output * Fuel economy * Lower tailpipe emissions The CMP actuator solenoid valve (7) is controlled by the ECM. The crankshaft position (CKP) sensor and the CMP sensors are used to monitor changes in camshaft positions. The ECM uses the following information in order to calculate the desired camshaft positions: * The engine coolant temperature (ECT) sensor * The calculated engine oil temperature (EOT) * The mass air flow (MAF) sensor * The throttle position (TP) sensor * The vehicle speed sensor (VSS) * The volumetric efficiency Operation The CMP actuator assembly has an outer housing that is driven by an engine timing chain. Inside the assembly is a rotor with fixed vanes that is attached to the camshaft. Oil pressure that is applied to the fixed vanes will rotate a specific camshaft in relationship to the crankshaft. The movement of the intake camshafts will advance the intake valve timing. The movement of the exhaust camshafts will retard the exhaust valve timing. When oil pressure is Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 2041 applied to the return side of the vanes, the camshafts will return to 0 crankshaft degrees, or top dead center (TDC). The CMP actuator solenoid valve directs the oil flow that controls the camshaft movement. The ECM commands the CMP solenoid to move the solenoid plunger and spool valve until oil flows from the advance passage (11). Oil flowing thru the CMP actuator assembly from the CMP solenoid advance passage applies pressure to the advance side of the vanes in the CMP actuator assembly. When the camshaft position is retarded, the CMP actuator solenoid valve directs oil to flow into the CMP actuator assembly from the retard passage (3). The ECM can also command the CMP actuator solenoid valve to stop oil flow from both passages in order to hold the current camshaft position. The ECM operates the CMP actuator solenoid valve by pulse width modulation (PWM) of the solenoid coil. The higher the PWM duty cycle, the larger the change in camshaft timing. The CMP actuator assembly also contains a lock pin (14) that prevents movement between the outer housing and the rotor vane assembly. The lock pin is released by oil pressure before any movement in the CMP actuator assembly takes place. The ECM is continuously comparing CMP sensor inputs with CKP sensor input in order to monitor camshaft position and detect any system malfunctions. If a condition exists in either the intake or exhaust camshaft actuator system, the opposite bank, intake or exhaust, camshaft actuator will default to 0 crankshaft degrees. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Variable Valve Timing Solenoid > Component Information > Locations Variable Valve Timing Solenoid: Locations Powertrain Component Views Left Rear Engine Components (LAF) 1 - T8D Ignition Coil 4 2 - T8C Ignition Coil 3 3 - T8B Ignition Coil 2 4 - T8A Ignition Coil 1 5 - Q6F Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Intake 6 - Q6E Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Exhaust 7 - B52A Heated Oxygen Sensor 1 8 - B52B Heated Oxygen Sensor 2 9 - B34 Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor 10 - B23E Camshaft Position Sensor - Exhaust 11 - Q12 Evaporative Emission Purge Solenoid Valve Right Rear of the Engine Components (LF1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Variable Valve Timing Solenoid > Component Information > Locations > Page 2045 1 - B74 Manifold Absolute Pressure Sensor 2 - T8E Ignition Coil 5 3 - T8C Ignition Coil 3 4 - Q12 Evaporative Emission Purge Solenoid Valve 5 - Q38 Throttle Body 6 - B23B Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 1 Intake 7 - B23D Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 2 Intake 8 - Q6D Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Bank 2 Intake 9 - Q6C Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Bank 2 Exhaust 10 - B23C Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 2 Exhaust 11 - Q6B Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Bank 1 Intake 12 - Q6A Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Bank 1 Exhaust 13 - B23A Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 1 Exhaust 14 - B68A Knock Sensor 1 15 - B26 Crankshaft Position Sensor 16 - T8A Ignition Coil 1 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Variable Valve Timing Solenoid > Component Information > Locations > Page 2046 Variable Valve Timing Solenoid: Diagrams Q6A Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Bank 1 Exhaust (LF1) Q6B Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Bank 1 Intake (LF1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Variable Valve Timing Solenoid > Component Information > Locations > Page 2047 Q6C Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Bank 2 Exhaust (LF1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Variable Valve Timing Solenoid > Component Information > Locations > Page 2048 Q6D Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Bank 2 Intake (LF1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Variable Valve Timing Solenoid > Component Information > Locations > Page 2049 Q6E Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Exhaust (LAF) Q6F Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Intake (LAF) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Variable Valve Timing Solenoid > Component Information > Locations > Page 2050 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Variable Valve Timing Solenoid > Component Information > Service and Repair > Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve Solenoid Replacement - Bank 1 (Right Side) Intake Variable Valve Timing Solenoid: Service and Repair Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve Solenoid Replacement - Bank 1 (Right Side) Intake Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve Solenoid Replacement - Bank 1 (Right Side) Intake Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Variable Valve Timing Solenoid > Component Information > Service and Repair > Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve Solenoid Replacement - Bank 1 (Right Side) Intake > Page 2053 Variable Valve Timing Solenoid: Service and Repair Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve Solenoid Replacement - Bank 1 (Right Side) Exhaust Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve Solenoid Replacement - Bank 1 (Right Side) Exhaust Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Variable Valve Timing Solenoid > Component Information > Service and Repair > Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve Solenoid Replacement - Bank 1 (Right Side) Intake > Page 2054 Variable Valve Timing Solenoid: Service and Repair Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve Solenoid Replacement - Bank 2 (Left Side) Intake Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve Solenoid Replacement - Bank 2 (Left Side) Intake Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Variable Valve Timing Solenoid > Component Information > Service and Repair > Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve Solenoid Replacement - Bank 1 (Right Side) Intake > Page 2055 Variable Valve Timing Solenoid: Service and Repair Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve Solenoid Replacement - Bank 2 (Left Side) Exhaust Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve Solenoid Replacement - Bank 2 (Left Side) Exhaust Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Compression Check > System Information > Specifications Compression Check: Specifications Compression Check Record the compression readings from all of the cylinders. The lowest reading should not be less than 70 percent of the highest reading. No cylinder reading should be less than 965 kPa (140 psi). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Compression Check > System Information > Specifications > Page 2059 Compression Check: Testing and Inspection Engine Compression Test Special Tools EN 39313 - Spark Plug Port Adapter For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Tools and Equipment/Special Tools). A compression pressure test of the engine cylinders determines the condition of the rings, the valves and the head gasket. 1. Run the engine until it reaches normal operating temperature. The battery must be at or near full charge. 2. Turn the engine OFF. Important: Remove the powertrain control module (PCM) and the ignition fuse from the instrument panel (I/P) fuse block. 3. Disable the ignition. 4. Disable the fuel systems. 5. Remove the spark plugs from all cylinders. 6. Remove the air duct from the throttle body. 7. Block the throttle plate in open position. 8. Measure the engine compression, using the following procedure: 1. Thread the EN 39313 - adapter into the spark plug hole. 2. Thread the compression gauge into the EN 39313 - adapter. 3. Have an assistant crank the engine through, at least 4 compression strokes, in the testing cylinder. 4. Check and record the readings on the gauge at each stroke. 5. Remove the compression gauge from the EN 39313 - adapter. 6. Remove the EN 39313 - adapter from the spark plug hole. 7. Repeat the compression test for each cylinder. 9. Record the compression readings from all of the cylinders. * The lowest reading should not be less than 70 percent of the highest reading. * No cylinder reading should be less than 965 kPa (140 psi). 10. The following are examples of measurement problems: * When the compression measurement is normal, the compression builds up quickly and evenly to specified compression on each cylinder. * When low compression is caused by the piston rings, compression is low on the first stroke and tends to build up on the following strokes, but does not reach normal. Compression improves considerably with the addition of oil. Use approximately 3 squirts of oil from a plunger-type oiler. * When low compression is caused by the valves, the measurement is low on the first stroke and does not build up even with the addition of oil. * Leaking head gaskets will provide the same results as worn valves but engine coolant may be identified in the crankcase. In addition, a leaking head gasket will give low readings on paired cylinders. 11. Remove the block from the throttle plate. 12. Install the air duct to the throttle body. 13. Install the spark plugs. 14. Install the powertrain control module (PCM). 15. Install the ignition fuses to the I/P fuse block. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft Bearing > Component Information > Specifications Camshaft Bearing: Specifications Camshaft bearing caps Left (DI) Right (DI) First pass ............................................................................................................................................. ......................................................... 10 Nm (89 lb in) Second pass ................................................... ...................................................................................................................................... Loosen bolts 1, 2, 3, 4 Final pass bolts 1, 2, 3, 4 ...................................................................................................... ....................................................................... 10 Nm (89 lb in) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft Gear/Sprocket > Component Information > Specifications Camshaft Gear/Sprocket: Specifications Camshaft position actuator .................................................................................................................. ......................................................... 58 Nm (43 lb ft) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Camshaft Position Actuator Replacement - Bank 1 Camshaft: Service and Repair Camshaft Position Actuator Replacement - Bank 1 Camshaft Position Actuator Replacement - Bank 1 (LF1) Special Tools * EN49982-1 - Timing Chain Retainer * EN49982-2 - Timing Chain Retainer For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Tools and Equipment/Special Tools). Removal Procedure 1. Remove the camshaft cover. Refer to Camshaft Cover Replacement - Right Side (LF1) (See: Cylinder Head Assembly/Valve Cover/Service and Repair/Camshaft Cover Replacement - Right Side). 2. Remove the camshaft position actuator solenoid valve solenoid - intake. Refer to Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve Solenoid Replacement - Bank 1 (Right Side) Intake (See: Actuators and Solenoids - Engine/Variable Valve Timing Solenoid/Service and Repair/Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve Solenoid Replacement - Bank 1 (Right Side) Intake). 3. Remove the intake camshaft position sensor. Refer to Camshaft Position Sensor Replacement Bank 1 (Right Side) Intake (See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Camshaft Position Sensor/Service and Repair/Camshaft Position Sensor Replacement - Bank 1 (Right Side) Intake). 4. Remove the exhaust camshaft position sensor. Refer to Camshaft Position Sensor Replacement - Bank 1 (Right Side) Exhaust (See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Camshaft Position Sensor/Service and Repair/Camshaft Position Sensor Replacement - Bank 1 (Right Side) Exhaust). 5. Remove the camshaft position actuator solenoid valve solenoid - exhaust. Refer to Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve Solenoid Replacement - Bank 1 (Right Side) Exhaust (See: Actuators and Solenoids - Engine/Variable Valve Timing Solenoid/Service and Repair/Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve Solenoid Replacement - Bank 1 (Right Side) Exhaust). 6. Rotate engine clockwise using crankshaft dampener retaining bolt until the flats at the rear ends of the camshafts are pointing up. This puts the camshafts on "base circle" and will reduce their tendency to rotate from valve spring pressure when the camshaft position actuators/drive chains are removed. Note: Do NOT remove or back out the camshaft position actuator bolt(s) significantly, simply break them loose from their fully-torqued position. The position actuators must stay firmly attached until the retaining tools are in place, but they should be broken loose while the chain is still tight and in position. 7. Loosen intake and/or exhaust camshaft position actuator retaining bolts, depending on which camshaft position actuator and/or camshaft you will be servicing. If servicing both camshaft position actuators and/or camshafts, loosen both bolts. Note: Be certain to clearly mark the position of the chain to the camshaft position actuator(s). Though the engine does not need to be set to a specific timing mark before starting the procedure, the relationship of the chain to the actuator(s) is critical and must be reestablished on assembly. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Camshaft Position Actuator Replacement - Bank 1 > Page 2071 8. Mark the position of the chain to the camshaft position actuator - intake. 9. Mark the position of the chain to the camshaft position actuator - exhaust. 10. Remove camshaft front cap bolts (1). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Camshaft Position Actuator Replacement - Bank 1 > Page 2072 Note: Do NOT remove or loosen any other camshaft bearing caps at this time, even if you intend to eventually remove the camshaft. 11. Remove the camshaft front cap (1). 12. Loosen wingnut (4) to open the clamping area of EN49982-1 - retainer. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Camshaft Position Actuator Replacement - Bank 1 > Page 2073 Note: Do NOT overtighten the thumbscrew. The EN49982-1 - retainer should be able to slide slightly via the slot the screw goes through. This fore/aft movement will allow easier removal and installation of the chain later. 13. Install EN49982-1 - retainer intake side chain holder onto front cover by screwing in the thumbscrew (2) on the EN49982-1 - retainer finger-tight. Note: Do NOT tighten the wingnut with a tool of any kind. Firm finger-tightening is sufficient. 14. Tighten wingnut (4) so EN49982-1 - retainer closes over and firmly grasps timing chain. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Camshaft Position Actuator Replacement - Bank 1 > Page 2074 Note: The engine front cover is removed for clarity in the following graphics, but is NOT required to be removed to perform the procedure. 15. EN49982-2 - retainer (1) will be installed in the following steps such that it wedges between an internal rib (2) that is cast into the inside of the front cover (shown in dotted line above) and the timing chain and spring-loaded tensioner shoe (3), holding the chain in position. The wedge will be left in place during the cam position actuator and/or camshaft service. 16. Insert the EN49982-2 - retainer between the two camshaft position actuators with the "teeth" on theEN49982-2 - retainer facing toward the front cover. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Camshaft Position Actuator Replacement - Bank 1 > Page 2075 17. Once the wedge portion of EN49982-2 - retainer is below the camshaft position actuators, rotate the EN49982-2 - retainer until the flat in the handle faces toward the intake camshaft position actuator. This orients the "teeth" toward the chain. Note: Do not try to force the wedge into position, simply ensure it is loosely engaged in the timing chain and in the correct overall position. 18. Drop the wedge down until it begins to engage the timing chain and the belt casting (2). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Camshaft Position Actuator Replacement - Bank 1 > Page 2076 19. If possible shine a strong light down from above, between the camshaft position actuators, and see the wedge in overall position as shown in the above graphic. 20. Using a 20 mm wrench on the cast hexagonal portion of the exhaust camshaft, rotate the camshaft toward the intake camshaft while pushing down on the handle of the EN49982-2 - retainer. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Camshaft Position Actuator Replacement - Bank 1 > Page 2077 21. This rotation of the camshaft will compress the tensioner shoe (3) against the spring force of the tensioner, opening up a gap between the chain and the internal rib in the front cover. The wedge will then drop into this gap. You will feel a distinct click as the teeth engage the chain. Caution: Be sure the EN49982-2 is captured firmly as described before continuing. This is critical to ensuring the camshaft drive chains stay properly timed. 22. Release the force on the wrench, allowing the spring tension to close the tensioner shoe against the wedge portion of EN49982-2 - retainer. You should be able to lightly tug on the EN49982-2 - retainer and it should stay in position. Repeat Steps 20 and 21 if necessary to re-insert the EN49982-2 - retainer until you are certain it is in position and will stay in position. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Camshaft Position Actuator Replacement - Bank 1 > Page 2078 23. With EN49982-2 - retainer in position and with the 20 mm wrench removed, there should now be some slack in the timing drive chain as indicated in the graphics shown. 24. Do not pry against the face of the camshaft position actuators or the position actuator retaining bolt. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Camshaft Position Actuator Replacement - Bank 1 > Page 2079 Caution: Do not pry against the face of the camshaft position actuators or the position actuator retaining bolts as the position actuators will be damaged. 25. Position a screwdriver or small pry bar between a camshaft cap and camshaft lobe. Carefully move/pry the camshafts as far as possible toward the rear/flywheel end of the engine. Note: Do not move or disturb the EN49982 - retainer components after their installation or the timing chains may be lost inside the front cover. 26. The EN49982-1 - retainer and EN49982-2 - retainer should be in position as shown, they must be left in position during the servicing of the camshaft position actuator(s) and/or camshaft(s). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Camshaft Position Actuator Replacement - Bank 1 > Page 2080 27. Remove and capture the plastic thrust washers (1) in the following steps. Ensure the plastic thrust washer does not fall into the front cover area. 28. To remove the intake camshaft position actuator, remove the loosened retaining bolt. To remove only the exhaust camshaft position actuator, skip the steps for removing the intake camshaft position actuator. However, the EN49982-1 - retainer MUST be installed as discussed even if the intake side will not be serviced or the timing of the camshaft chains will be lost. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Camshaft Position Actuator Replacement - Bank 1 > Page 2081 29. Slide the camshaft position actuator forward and off the end of the intake camshaft. The slot in the EN49982-1 - retainer will allow the tool to move forward enough to disengage the camshaft position actuator from the front of the camshaft. Remove the plastic thrust washer when removing the camshaft position actuator from the end of the camshaft. 30. Tilt the camshaft position actuator forward and out/away from the engine. Note: DO NOT remove the EN49982 - retainers. They are holding the cam chains to maintain their properly-timed positions. 31. Allow the chain to rest on the EN49982-1 - retainer and EN49982-2 - retainer in position during service. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Camshaft Position Actuator Replacement - Bank 1 > Page 2082 1. Install plastic camshaft position actuator thrust washer (1) between cylinder head face and camshaft position actuator on assembly. 2. It may help to carefully pry the camshaft forward and to move the EN49982-1 - retainer backward via the slot to reengage the position actuator to the camshaft. The dowel pin on the camshaft position actuator must be aligned with the slot in the camshaft nose for reassembly. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Camshaft Position Actuator Replacement - Bank 1 > Page 2083 Note: Ensure plastic thrust washer is in place before installing the actuator. 3. Install the intake camshaft position actuator first by inserting the actuator between the timing chain and front cover. Tilt the actuator in and engage the chain while aligning the marks you made on the chain and position actuator. 4. Ensure the camshaft position actuator fits snugly to the end of the camshaft. Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener Caution). 5. Install the intake camshaft position actuator retaining bolt, and lightly tighten the bolt to hold the camshaft actuator in place. DO NOT torque at this time. 6. Install the exhaust camshaft position actuator retaining bolt, and lightly tighten the bolt to hold the camshaft actuator in place. DO NOT torque at this time. 7. Double-check that the marks on both the intake and exhaust camshaft position actuators to ensure that they are aligned with their respective paint marks on the chain. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Camshaft Position Actuator Replacement - Bank 1 > Page 2084 8. Using a 20 mm wrench on the cast hexagonal portion of the exhaust camshaft, rotate the camshaft clockwise while pulling up on the handle of the EN49982-2 - retainer. 9. Remove EN49982-2 retainer. 10. Release the pressure on the wrench. The timing chain should now be tight and should lose the slack the wedge was providing. Note: Double-check the marks on the camshaft position actuators and chains to ensure they are correct. 11. Torque one or both camshaft position actuator retaining bolts to 58 Nm (43 lb ft). 12. Unscrew the wingnut on EN49982-1 - retainer to release timing chain, and then remove EN49982-1 - retainer from the front cover by unscrewing the thumbscrew (2). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Camshaft Position Actuator Replacement - Bank 1 > Page 2085 13. Install camshaft front cap and bolts (1). 14. Tighten the camshaft front cap outer bolts to 10 Nm (89 lb in). 15. Tighten the camshaft front cap inner bolts to 10 Nm (89 lb in). 16. Install the camshaft position actuator solenoid valve solenoid - exhaust. Refer to Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve Solenoid Replacement - Bank 1 (Right Side) Exhaust (See: Actuators and Solenoids - Engine/Variable Valve Timing Solenoid/Service and Repair/Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve Solenoid Replacement - Bank 1 (Right Side) Exhaust). 17. Install the camshaft position actuator solenoid valve solenoid-intake. Refer to Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve Solenoid Replacement Bank 1 (Right Side) Intake (See: Actuators and Solenoids - Engine/Variable Valve Timing Solenoid/Service and Repair/Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve Solenoid Replacement Bank 1 (Right Side) Intake). 18. Install the intake camshaft position sensors. Refer to Camshaft Position Sensor Replacement Bank 1 (Right Side) Intake (See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Camshaft Position Sensor/Service and Repair/Camshaft Position Sensor Replacement - Bank 1 (Right Side) Intake). 19. Install the exhaust camshaft position sensor. Refer to Camshaft Position Sensor Replacement Bank 1 (Right Side) Exhaust (See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Camshaft Position Sensor/Service and Repair/Camshaft Position Sensor Replacement - Bank 1 (Right Side) Exhaust). 20. Install the camshaft cover. Refer to Camshaft Cover Replacement - Right Side (LF1) (See: Cylinder Head Assembly/Valve Cover/Service and Repair/Camshaft Cover Replacement - Right Side). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Camshaft Position Actuator Replacement - Bank 1 > Page 2086 Camshaft: Service and Repair Camshaft Position Actuator Replacement - Bank 2 Camshaft Position Actuator Replacement - Bank 2 (LF1) Special Tools EN-48313 - Timing Chain Retention Tool For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Tools and Equipment/Special Tools) Removal Procedure 1. Remove the intake manifold. Refer to Intake Manifold Replacement (See: Intake Manifold/Service and Repair/Intake Manifold Replacement). 2. Remove the left camshaft cover. Refer to Camshaft Cover Replacement - Left Side (LF1) (See: Cylinder Head Assembly/Valve Cover/Service and Repair/Camshaft Cover Replacement - Left Side). 3. Remove the left intake and exhaust camshaft position sensors. Refer to Camshaft Position Sensor Replacement - Bank 2 (Left Side) Intake (See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Camshaft Position Sensor/Service and Repair/Camshaft Position Sensor Replacement - Bank 2 (Left Side) Intake) and Camshaft Position Sensor Replacement - Bank 2 (Left Side) Exhaust (See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Camshaft Position Sensor/Service and Repair/Camshaft Position Sensor Replacement - Bank 2 (Left Side) Exhaust). 4. Remove the left intake and exhaust camshaft position actuator solenoids. Refer to Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve Solenoid Replacement - Bank 2 (Left Side) Intake (See: Actuators and Solenoids - Engine/Variable Valve Timing Solenoid/Service and Repair/Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve Solenoid Replacement - Bank 2 (Left Side) Intake) and Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve Solenoid Replacement - Bank 2 (Left Side) Exhaust (See: Actuators and Solenoids - Engine/Variable Valve Timing Solenoid/Service and Repair/Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve Solenoid Replacement - Bank 2 (Left Side) Exhaust). Note: Rotate the crankshaft balancer bolt in a clockwise direction ONLY. 5. Rotate the crankshaft balancer using the balancer bolt until the camshafts are in a neutral (low tension) position. The camshafts will be parallel with the camshaft cover rail (1). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Camshaft Position Actuator Replacement - Bank 1 > Page 2087 Note: Ensure that the camshaft timing chain and the camshaft position actuators are marked for proper assembly. 6. Use a paint stick to create an alignment mark on one of the timing chain links (2) and the adjacent tooth on the exhaust camshaft position actuator (1). 7. Use a paint stick to create an alignment mark on one of the timing chain links (3) and the adjacent tooth on the intake camshaft position actuator (4). Caution: Refer to Torque Reaction Against Timing Drive Chain Caution (See: Timing Components/Service Precautions). 8. Use an open end wrench on the hex cast into the left intake and exhaust camshafts and rotate the camshafts toward each other in order to create slack in the chain between the actuators. 9. Unscrew the EN-48313 - tool so that the legs of the tool are retracted. 10. Insert the EN-48313 - tool between the camshaft actuators, rearward of the timing chain until the bottom line that is scribed in the body of the tool (2) is adjacent to the top surface of the cylinder head (1). This is the approximate installed position. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Camshaft Position Actuator Replacement - Bank 1 > Page 2088 Note: The engine front cover is removed for clarity in the following graphics, but NOT required to perform the procedure. 11. Ensure that the feet (4) on the legs of the tool are facing the front of the engine. 12. Partially expand the legs (1, 3) of the EN-48313 - tool by turning the T-shaped handle clockwise. 13. Insert the leg of the tool (1) behind the timing chain guide (2). 14. Continue expanding the EN-48313 tool until the legs (1, 3) contact the timing chain. Do not tighten at this time. Note: Ensure that the foot (1) of the EN-48313 - tool is engaged into one of the link pockets to prevent tool slippage during tightening of the EN-48313 - tool. 15. Hand tighten the EN-48313 - tool. 16. Use an open end wrench on the hex cast into the left intake and exhaust camshafts and rotate the camshafts toward each other in order to create slack in the chain between the actuators. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Camshaft Position Actuator Replacement - Bank 1 > Page 2089 17. The EN-48313 - tool is now properly installed to hold the timing chain in position. 18. Use an open end wrench on the hex cast into the camshaft in order to prevent engine rotation when loosening the camshaft position actuator bolt. 19. If replacing the exhaust camshaft position actuator, then remove the bolt and the actuator. 20. If replacing the Intake camshaft position actuator, then remove the bolt and the actuator. 21. If removing both the exhaust and intake camshaft actuators, the timing chain can be draped over the EN-48313 - tool once the actuators have been removed. 22. Rotate the actuator in order to align the opening in the actuator reluctor wheel with the cam sensor boss in the front cover, to allow actuator removal. 23. Remove the camshaft thrust washer. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Camshaft Position Actuator Replacement - Bank 1 > Page 2090 Note: Ensure that the camshaft timing chain and the camshaft position actuators are marked for proper assembly. 1. Align the exhaust camshaft actuator alignment mark (1) to the timing chain alignment mark (2) made during disassembly. 2. Ensure that the intake camshaft actuator alignment mark (4) and the timing chain alignment mark (3) are also aligned. 3. Position the exhaust camshaft actuator to the camshaft and install the actuator bolt hand tight. 4. Remove the EN-48313 - tool. Note: * The camshaft position actuator will vary depending on application. * Camshaft thrust washers must be installed on all 2010 applications when servicing the camshaft position actuators. Do not install washers on 2009 applications if they are not already present. 5. Ensure the proper camshaft thrust washer is used. Use a 1.6 mm (0.063 in) thrust washer on applications that have 5 attaching screws on the back side of the camshaft position actuator (1). Use a 1.1 mm (0.043 in) thick thrust washer with yellow speckles on applications that have 4 attaching screws on the back side of the camshaft position actuator (2). 6. Install the thrust washer, if applicable. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Camshaft Position Actuator Replacement - Bank 1 > Page 2091 Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener Caution). 7. If the exhaust camshaft position actuator has been replaced, Then Tighten the bolt to 58 Nm (43 lb ft). 8. If the Intake camshaft position actuator has been replaced, Then Tighten the bolt to 58 Nm (43 lb ft). 9. If both the exhaust and intake has been replaced, Then tighten bolt to 58 Nm (43 lb ft). 10. Install the left intake and exhaust camshaft position actuator solenoids. Refer to Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve Solenoid Replacement - Bank 2 (Left Side) Intake (See: Actuators and Solenoids - Engine/Variable Valve Timing Solenoid/Service and Repair/Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve Solenoid Replacement Bank 2 (Left Side) Intake) and Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve Solenoid Replacement Bank 2 (Left Side) Exhaust (See: Actuators and Solenoids - Engine/Variable Valve Timing Solenoid/Service and Repair/Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve Solenoid Replacement Bank 2 (Left Side) Exhaust). 11. Install the left intake and exhaust camshaft position sensors. Refer to Camshaft Position Sensor Replacement - Bank 2 (Left Side) Intake (See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Camshaft Position Sensor/Service and Repair/Camshaft Position Sensor Replacement - Bank 2 (Left Side) Intake) and Camshaft Position Sensor Replacement - Bank 2 (Left Side) Exhaust (See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Camshaft Position Sensor/Service and Repair/Camshaft Position Sensor Replacement - Bank 2 (Left Side) Exhaust). 12. Install the left camshaft cover. Refer to Camshaft Cover Replacement - Left Side (LF1) (See: Cylinder Head Assembly/Valve Cover/Service and Repair/Camshaft Cover Replacement - Left Side). 13. Install the intake manifold. Refer to Intake Manifold Replacement (See: Intake Manifold/Service and Repair/Intake Manifold Replacement). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Camshaft Position Actuator Replacement - Bank 1 > Page 2092 Camshaft: Service and Repair Camshaft Replacement - Left Side Camshaft Replacement - Left Side Special Tools * EN-46111 - Crankshaft Rotation Socket * EN-46313 - Timing Chain Retention Tool For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Tools and Equipment/Special Tools). Removal Procedure 1. Remove the intake manifold. Refer to Intake Manifold Replacement (See: Intake Manifold/Service and Repair/Intake Manifold Replacement). 2. Remove the left bank camshaft cover. Refer to Camshaft Cover Replacement - Left Side (LF1) (See: Cylinder Head Assembly/Valve Cover/Service and Repair/Camshaft Cover Replacement - Left Side). 3. Remove the camshaft sensors. Refer to Camshaft Position Sensor Replacement - Bank 2 (Left Side) Exhaust (See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Camshaft Position Sensor/Service and Repair/Camshaft Position Sensor Replacement - Bank 2 (Left Side) Exhaust) and Camshaft Position Sensor Replacement - Bank 2 (Left Side) Intake (See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Camshaft Position Sensor/Service and Repair/Camshaft Position Sensor Replacement - Bank 2 (Left Side) Intake). 4. Remove the camshaft position actuator solenoid. Refer to Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve Solenoid Replacement - Bank 2 (Left Side) Intake (See: Actuators and Solenoids - Engine/Variable Valve Timing Solenoid/Service and Repair/Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve Solenoid Replacement - Bank 2 (Left Side) Intake). 5. Remove the camshaft position actuator. Refer to Camshaft Position Actuator Replacement Bank 2 (LF1) (See: Camshaft Position Actuator Replacement - Bank 2). 6. Remove the crankshaft balancer. Refer to Crankshaft Balancer Replacement (See: Cylinder Block Assembly/Harmonic Balancer - Crankshaft Pulley/Service and Repair). 7. Rotate the crankshaft with the EN-46111 - socket until the camshafts are in a neutral (low tension) position. The camshaft flats will be parallel with the camshaft cover rail (1). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Camshaft Position Actuator Replacement - Bank 1 > Page 2093 Caution: Refer to Torque Reaction Against Timing Drive Chain Caution (See: Timing Components/Service Precautions). Note: * Use an open-end wrench at the camshaft hex to prevent camshaft/engine rotation. * DO NOT remove the camshaft position actuator bolt at this time. 8. Loosen the camshaft position actuator bolt. Note: Ensure that the tips of the EN-46313 - tool are fully engaged into the timing chain. 9. Install the EN-46313 - tool in order to retain the timing chain. Firmly tighten the EN-46313 - tool nuts. Note: Ensure that the camshaft timing chain and the camshaft position actuators are marked for proper assembly. 10. Mark the timing chain and the respective locations on the camshaft position actuators (1-4). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Camshaft Position Actuator Replacement - Bank 1 > Page 2094 11. Remove the camshaft position actuator bolt. 12. Remove the camshafts. Refer to Camshaft Removal - Left Side (See: Service and Repair/Overhaul/33. Camshaft Removal - Left Side). Installation Procedure Note: * Ensure that the marks on the camshaft position actuator and the timing chain (1-4) are aligned. * DO NOT tighten the camshaft position actuator bolt at this time. 1. Locate the camshafts to the cylinder head and assemble the camshaft actuators to the camshafts. 2. Install the camshafts and the camshaft bearing caps. Refer to Camshaft Installation Left Side (See: Service and Repair/Overhaul/102. Camshaft Installation - Left Side). 3. Remove the EN-46108 - tool. Caution: Refer to Torque Reaction Against Timing Drive Chain Caution (See: Timing Components/Service Precautions). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Camshaft Position Actuator Replacement - Bank 1 > Page 2095 Note: Use an open-end wrench at the camshaft hex to prevent camshaft/engine rotation. 4. Install and tighten the camshaft position actuators. Refer to Camshaft Position Actuator Installation - Left Side Intake (See: Service and Repair/Overhaul/106. Camshaft Position Actuator Installation - Left Side Intake) and Camshaft Position Actuator Installation - Left Side Exhaust (See: Service and Repair/Overhaul/107. Camshaft Position Actuator Installation - Left Side Exhaust). 5. Install the intake camshaft position actuator solenoid. Refer to Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve Solenoid Replacement - Bank 2 (Left Side) Intake (See: Actuators and Solenoids - Engine/Variable Valve Timing Solenoid/Service and Repair/Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve Solenoid Replacement - Bank 2 (Left Side) Intake). 6. Install the camshaft sensors. Refer to Camshaft Position Sensor Replacement - Bank 2 (Left Side) Exhaust (See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Camshaft Position Sensor/Service and Repair/Camshaft Position Sensor Replacement - Bank 2 (Left Side) Exhaust) and Camshaft Position Sensor Replacement - Bank 2 (Left Side) Intake (See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Camshaft Position Sensor/Service and Repair/Camshaft Position Sensor Replacement - Bank 2 (Left Side) Intake). 7. Install the crankshaft balancer. Refer to Crankshaft Balancer Replacement (See: Cylinder Block Assembly/Harmonic Balancer - Crankshaft Pulley/Service and Repair). 8. Install the camshaft cover. Refer to Camshaft Cover Replacement - Left Side (LF1) (See: Cylinder Head Assembly/Valve Cover/Service and Repair/Camshaft Cover Replacement - Left Side). 9. Install the intake manifold. Refer to Intake Manifold Replacement (See: Intake Manifold/Service and Repair/Intake Manifold Replacement). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Camshaft Position Actuator Replacement - Bank 1 > Page 2096 Camshaft: Service and Repair Camshaft Replacement - Right Side Camshaft Replacement - Right Side Special Tools * EN-46111 - Crankshaft Rotation Socket * EN-46313 - Timing Chain Retention Tool For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Tools and Equipment/Special Tools). Removal Procedure 1. Remove the intake manifold. Refer to Intake Manifold Replacement (See: Intake Manifold/Service and Repair/Intake Manifold Replacement). 2. Remove the camshaft cover. Refer to Camshaft Cover Replacement - Right Side (LF1) (See: Cylinder Head Assembly/Valve Cover/Service and Repair/Camshaft Cover Replacement - Right Side). 3. Remove the camshaft sensors. Refer to Camshaft Position Sensor Replacement - Bank 1 (Right Side) Exhaust (See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Camshaft Position Sensor/Service and Repair/Camshaft Position Sensor Replacement - Bank 1 (Right Side) Exhaust) and Camshaft Position Sensor Replacement - Bank 1 (Right Side) Intake (See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Camshaft Position Sensor/Service and Repair/Camshaft Position Sensor Replacement - Bank 1 (Right Side) Intake). 4. Remove the intake camshaft position actuator solenoid. Refer to Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve Solenoid Replacement - Bank 1 (Right Side) Intake (See: Actuators and Solenoids - Engine/Variable Valve Timing Solenoid/Service and Repair/Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve Solenoid Replacement - Bank 1 (Right Side) Intake). 5. Remove the Camshaft Position Actuator. Refer to Camshaft Position Actuator Replacement Bank 1 (LF1) (See: Camshaft Position Actuator Replacement - Bank 1). 6. Remove the crankshaft balancer. Refer to Crankshaft Balancer Replacement (See: Cylinder Block Assembly/Harmonic Balancer - Crankshaft Pulley/Service and Repair). 7. Rotate the crankshaft with the EN-46111 - socket until the camshafts are in a neutral (low tension) position. The camshaft flats will be parallel with the camshaft cover rail (1). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Camshaft Position Actuator Replacement - Bank 1 > Page 2097 Caution: Refer to Torque Reaction Against Timing Drive Chain Caution (See: Timing Components/Service Precautions). Note: * Use an open-end wrench at the camshaft hex to prevent camshaft/engine rotation. * DO NOT remove the camshaft position actuator bolt at this time. 8. Loosen the camshaft position actuator bolt. Note: Ensure that the tips of the EN-46313 - tool are fully engaged into the timing chain. 9. Install the EN-46313 - tool in order to retain the timing chain. Firmly tighten the EN-46313 - tool nuts. Note: Ensure that the camshaft timing chain and the camshaft position actuators are marked for proper assembly. 10. Mark the timing chain and the respective locations on camshaft position actuators (15-18). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Camshaft Position Actuator Replacement - Bank 1 > Page 2098 11. Remove the camshaft position actuator bolt. 12. Remove the camshaft bearing caps and the camshaft. Refer to Camshaft Removal - Right Side (See: Service and Repair/Overhaul/38. Camshaft Removal - Right Side). Installation Procedure Note: * Ensure that the marks on the camshaft position actuators and the timing chain (15-18) are aligned. * DO NOT tighten the camshaft position actuator bolt at this time. 1. Locate the camshafts to the cylinder head and assemble the camshaft actuators to the camshafts. 2. Install the camshafts and the camshaft bearing caps. Refer to Camshaft Installation Right Side (See: Service and Repair/Overhaul/102. Camshaft Installation - Left Side). 3. Remove the EN-46313 - tool. 4. Install the crankshaft balancer. Refer to Crankshaft Balancer Replacement (See: Cylinder Block Assembly/Harmonic Balancer - Crankshaft Pulley/Service and Repair). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Camshaft Position Actuator Replacement - Bank 1 > Page 2099 Caution: Refer to Torque Reaction Against Timing Drive Chain Caution (See: Timing Components/Service Precautions). Note: Use an open-end wrench at the camshaft hex to prevent camshaft/engine rotation. 5. Install and tighten the camshaft position actuators. Refer to Camshaft Position Actuator Installation - Right Side Intake (See: Service and Repair/Overhaul/104. Camshaft Position Actuator Installation - Right Side Intake) and Camshaft Position Actuator Installation - Right Side Exhaust (See: Service and Repair/Overhaul/105. Camshaft Position Actuator Installation - Right Side Exhaust). 6. Install the intake camshaft position actuator solenoid. Refer to Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve Solenoid Replacement - Bank 1 (Right Side) Intake (See: Actuators and Solenoids - Engine/Variable Valve Timing Solenoid/Service and Repair/Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve Solenoid Replacement - Bank 1 (Right Side) Intake). 7. Install the camshaft sensors. Refer to Camshaft Position Sensor Replacement - Bank 1 (Right Side) Exhaust (See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Camshaft Position Sensor/Service and Repair/Camshaft Position Sensor Replacement - Bank 1 (Right Side) Exhaust) and Camshaft Position Sensor Replacement - Bank 1 (Right Side) Intake (See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Camshaft Position Sensor/Service and Repair/Camshaft Position Sensor Replacement - Bank 1 (Right Side) Intake). 8. Install the camshaft cover. Refer to Camshaft Cover Replacement - Right Side (LF1) (See: Cylinder Head Assembly/Valve Cover/Service and Repair/Camshaft Cover Replacement - Right Side). 9. Install the intake manifold. Refer to Intake Manifold Replacement (See: Intake Manifold/Service and Repair/Intake Manifold Replacement). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Lifter / Lash Adjuster, Valve > Component Information > Service Precautions Lifter / Lash Adjuster: Service Precautions Valve Lifter Priming Caution Caution: Ensure each valve lifter is filled with clean engine oil and the valve lifter does not tip over (plunger down) before the installation of the valve lifters. The loss of oil in the valve lifter lower pressure chamber or the dry stroking/cycling of the valve lifter plunger will allow air to travel into the high pressure chamber of the valve lifter. Air in the high pressure chamber of the valve lifter may not be purged causing extensive engine component damage. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Lifter / Lash Adjuster, Valve > Component Information > Service and Repair > Valve Lifter Replacement - Left Side Lifter / Lash Adjuster: Service and Repair Valve Lifter Replacement - Left Side Valve Lifter Replacement - Left Side Removal Procedure 1. Remove the applicable camshafts. Refer to Camshaft Replacement - Left Side (See: Camshaft/Service and Repair/Camshaft Replacement - Left Side). 2. Remove the rocker arms. Refer to Valve Rocker Arm Replacement - Left Side (See: Rocker Arm Assembly/Service and Repair/Valve Rocker Arm Replacement - Left Side). 3. Remove the lifters. Refer to Valve Lifter Removal - Left Side (See: Service and Repair/Overhaul/36. Valve Lifter Removal - Left Side) 4. Clean and inspect the camshafts, rocker arms and lifters. Repair or replace as necessary. Refer to Camshaft Cleaning and Inspection (See: Service and Repair/Overhaul/62. Camshaft Cleaning and Inspection) and Valve Lifter Cleaning and Inspection (See: Service and Repair/Overhaul/63. Valve Lifter Cleaning and Inspection). 5. Clean and inspect the rocker arm. Refer to Valve Rocker Arm Cleaning and Inspection (See: Service and Repair/Overhaul/64. Valve Rocker Arm Cleaning and Inspection) Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Lifter / Lash Adjuster, Valve > Component Information > Service and Repair > Valve Lifter Replacement - Left Side > Page 2105 1. Install the lifters. 2. Install the rocker arms. Refer to Valve Rocker Arm Replacement - Left Side (See: Rocker Arm Assembly/Service and Repair/Valve Rocker Arm Replacement - Left Side). 3. Install the camshafts. Refer to Camshaft Replacement - Left Side (See: Camshaft/Service and Repair/Camshaft Replacement - Left Side). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Lifter / Lash Adjuster, Valve > Component Information > Service and Repair > Valve Lifter Replacement - Left Side > Page 2106 Lifter / Lash Adjuster: Service and Repair Valve Lifter Replacement - Right Side Valve Lifter Replacement - Right Side Removal Procedure 1. Remove the applicable camshaft(s). Refer to Camshaft Replacement - Right Side (See: Camshaft/Service and Repair/Camshaft Replacement Right Side). 2. Remove the rocker arms. Refer to Valve Rocker Arm Removal - Right Side (See: Service and Repair/Overhaul/39. Valve Rocker Arm Removal Right Side). 3. Remove the lifters. Refer to Valve Lifter Removal - Right Side (See: Service and Repair/Overhaul/40. Valve Lifter Removal - Right Side). 4. Clean and inspect the camshaft(s) and the rocker arm(s) and lifter. Repair or replace as necessary. Refer to Camshaft Cleaning and Inspection ( See: Service and Repair/Overhaul/62. Camshaft Cleaning and Inspection) , Valve Lifter Cleaning and Inspection (See: Service and Repair/Overhaul/63. Valve Lifter Cleaning and Inspection) and Valve Rocker Arm Cleaning and Inspection (See: Service and Repair/Overhaul/64. Valve Rocker Arm Cleaning and Inspection). Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Lifter / Lash Adjuster, Valve > Component Information > Service and Repair > Valve Lifter Replacement - Left Side > Page 2107 1. Install the lifters. Refer to Valve Lifter Installation - Right Side (See: Service and Repair/Overhaul/100. Valve Lifter Installation - Left Side). 2. Install the rocker arms. Refer to Valve Rocker Arm Installation - Right Side (See: Service and Repair/Overhaul/101. Valve Rocker Arm Installation - Left Side). 3. Install the applicable camshaft(s). Refer to Camshaft Replacement - Right Side (See: Camshaft/Service and Repair/Camshaft Replacement - Right Side). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Rocker Arm Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair > Valve Rocker Arm Replacement - Left Side Rocker Arm Assembly: Service and Repair Valve Rocker Arm Replacement - Left Side Valve Rocker Arm Replacement - Left Side Removal Procedure 1. Remove the applicable camshaft(s). Refer to Camshaft Replacement - Left Side (See: Camshaft/Service and Repair/Camshaft Replacement - Left Side). 2. Remove the rocker arms. 3. Clean and inspect the camshaft(s) and the rocker arm(s). Repair or replace as necessary. Refer to Camshaft Cleaning and Inspection (See: Service and Repair/Overhaul/62. Camshaft Cleaning and Inspection) and Valve Lifter Cleaning and Inspection (See: Service and Repair/Overhaul/63. Valve Lifter Cleaning and Inspection). Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Rocker Arm Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair > Valve Rocker Arm Replacement - Left Side > Page 2112 1. Install the rocker arms. 2. Install the camshaft(s). Refer to Camshaft Replacement - Left Side (See: Camshaft/Service and Repair/Camshaft Replacement - Left Side). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Rocker Arm Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair > Valve Rocker Arm Replacement - Left Side > Page 2113 Rocker Arm Assembly: Service and Repair Valve Rocker Arm Replacement - Right Side Valve Rocker Arm Replacement - Right Side Removal Procedure 1. Remove the applicable camshaft(s). Refer to Camshaft Replacement - Right Side (See: Camshaft/Service and Repair/Camshaft Replacement Right Side). 2. Remove the rocker arms. 3. Clean and inspect the camshaft(s) and the rocker arm(s). Repair or replace as necessary. Refer to Camshaft Cleaning and Inspection (See: Service and Repair/Overhaul/62. Camshaft Cleaning and Inspection) and Valve Lifter Cleaning and Inspection (See: Service and Repair/Overhaul/63. Valve Lifter Cleaning and Inspection). 4. Clean and inspect the valve rocker arm. Refer to Valve Rocker Arm Cleaning and Inspection (See: Service and Repair/Overhaul/64. Valve Rocker Arm Cleaning and Inspection) Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Rocker Arm Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair > Valve Rocker Arm Replacement - Left Side > Page 2114 1. Install the rocker arms. 2. Install the camshaft(s). Refer to Camshaft Replacement - Right Side (See: Camshaft/Service and Repair/Camshaft Replacement - Right Side). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Description and Operation Variable Valve Timing Actuator: Description and Operation Camshaft Actuator System Description Camshaft Actuator System Overview 1 - Camshaft Actuator Vane 2 - Timing Chain Sprocket 3 - Engine Oil Pressure-For retarding the camshaft 4 - Camshaft 5 - Input Signals from Engine Sensors 6 - Engine Control Module (ECM) 7 Camshaft Actuator Solenoid 8 - Engine Oil Pump 9 - Engine Oil Pressure Supply 10 - Engine Oil Drain 11 - Engine Oil Pressure-For advancing the camshaft 12 - Camshaft Actuator Rotor 13 Camshaft Position Sensor Reluctor 14 - Camshaft Actuator Lock Pin 15 - Camshaft Actuator Housing The camshaft actuator system enables the engine control module (ECM) to change camshaft timing of all 4 camshafts while the engine is operating. The CMP actuator assembly (15) varies the camshaft position in response to directional changes in oil pressure. The CMP actuator solenoid valve controls the oil pressure that is applied to advance or retard a camshaft. Modifying camshaft timing under changing engine demand provides better balance between the following performance concerns: * Engine power output * Fuel economy * Lower tailpipe emissions The CMP actuator solenoid valve (7) is controlled by the ECM. The crankshaft position (CKP) sensor and the CMP sensors are used to monitor changes in camshaft positions. The ECM uses the following information in order to calculate the desired camshaft positions: * The engine coolant temperature (ECT) sensor * The calculated engine oil temperature (EOT) * The mass air flow (MAF) sensor * The throttle position (TP) sensor * The vehicle speed sensor (VSS) * The volumetric efficiency Operation The CMP actuator assembly has an outer housing that is driven by an engine timing chain. Inside the assembly is a rotor with fixed vanes that is attached to the camshaft. Oil pressure that is applied to the fixed vanes will rotate a specific camshaft in relationship to the crankshaft. The movement of the intake camshafts will advance the intake valve timing. The movement of the exhaust camshafts will retard the exhaust valve timing. When oil pressure is Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 2118 applied to the return side of the vanes, the camshafts will return to 0 crankshaft degrees, or top dead center (TDC). The CMP actuator solenoid valve directs the oil flow that controls the camshaft movement. The ECM commands the CMP solenoid to move the solenoid plunger and spool valve until oil flows from the advance passage (11). Oil flowing thru the CMP actuator assembly from the CMP solenoid advance passage applies pressure to the advance side of the vanes in the CMP actuator assembly. When the camshaft position is retarded, the CMP actuator solenoid valve directs oil to flow into the CMP actuator assembly from the retard passage (3). The ECM can also command the CMP actuator solenoid valve to stop oil flow from both passages in order to hold the current camshaft position. The ECM operates the CMP actuator solenoid valve by pulse width modulation (PWM) of the solenoid coil. The higher the PWM duty cycle, the larger the change in camshaft timing. The CMP actuator assembly also contains a lock pin (14) that prevents movement between the outer housing and the rotor vane assembly. The lock pin is released by oil pressure before any movement in the CMP actuator assembly takes place. The ECM is continuously comparing CMP sensor inputs with CKP sensor input in order to monitor camshaft position and detect any system malfunctions. If a condition exists in either the intake or exhaust camshaft actuator system, the opposite bank, intake or exhaust, camshaft actuator will default to 0 crankshaft degrees. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Connecting Rod Bearing > Component Information > Specifications Connecting Rod Bearing: Specifications Connecting Rod Connecting Rod Bearing Clearance ............................................................................................................................... 0.010-0.070 mm (0.0004-0.0028 in) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Connecting Rod, Engine > Component Information > Specifications Connecting Rod: Specifications Connecting Rod Connecting Rod Bore Diameter - Bearing End .......................................................................................................... 59.620-59.636 mm (2.3472-2.3479 in) Connecting Rod Bore Diameter - Pin End - Production ............................................................................................ 24.009-24.019 mm (0.9452-0.9456 in) Connecting Rod Bore Diameter - Pin End - Service Maximum ......................................................................................................... 24.007 mm (0.9457 in) Connecting Rod Length - Center to Center ........................................................................................................................................ 156.05 mm (6.1437 in) Connecting Rod Side Clearance .................................................................................................................................... 0.095-0.355 mm (0.0037-0.0140 in) Connecting Rod Width - Bearing End Production .......................................... ................................................................................................................................................ 21.775 mm (0.8573 in) Service ....................................................................................................................... ................................................ 21.725-21.825 mm (0.8553-0.8593 in) Connecting Rod Width - Pin End Production .................................................................................................................................... ...................................................... 21.775 mm (0.8573 in) Service .................................................... ................................................................................................................... 21.725-21.825 mm (0.8553-0.8593 in) Connecting rod bolts Tighten ................................................................................................................................................. ........................................................ 30 Nm (22 lb ft) Loosen .............................................................. .............................................................................................................................................................. . zero Re-tighten First Pass ................................................................................................................. ..................................................................................... 25 Nm (18 lb ft) Final Pass ............................ .............................................................................................................................................................. .................. 110 degrees Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Crankshaft Main Bearing > Component Information > Specifications Crankshaft Main Bearing: Specifications Crankshaft Crankshaft Main Bearing Clearance .............................................................................................................................. 0.010-0.060 mm (0.0004-0.0024 in) Crankshaft Main Bearing Bore Diameter ................................................................................................................... 72.867-72.881 mm (2.8688-2.8693 in) Main bearing caps First, inboard bolts (1-8) First pass ...................................................................................................... ................................................................................................ 20 Nm (15 lb ft) Second pass ............. .............................................................................................................................................................. ............... additional 80 degrees Second, outboard bolts (9-16) First pass ............................................................................................ .......................................................................................................... 15 Nm (11 lb ft) Second pass ... .............................................................................................................................................................. ....................... additional 110 degrees Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Crankshaft Main Bearing > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2129 Third, short/inner bolts (17-20) First pass ............................................................................................ .......................................................................................................... 30 Nm (22 lb ft) Second pass ... .............................................................................................................................................................. ......................... additional 60 degrees Fourth, long/outer bolts (21-24) First pass .......................................................................................... ............................................................................................................ 30 Nm (22 lb ft) Second pass . .............................................................................................................................................................. ........................... additional 60 degrees Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Crankshaft Seal Retainer > Component Information > Service and Repair Crankshaft Seal Retainer: Service and Repair Crankshaft Rear Oil Seal and Housing Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the engine flywheel. Refer to Engine Flywheel Replacement (See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Flex Plate/Service and Repair). 2. Remove the oil pan. Refer to Oil Pan Replacement (See: Engine Lubrication/Oil Pan/Service and Repair). 3. Remove the crankshaft rear oil seal and housing. Refer to Crankshaft Rear Oil Seal and Housing Removal (See: Service and Repair/Overhaul/44. Crankshaft Rear Oil Seal and Housing Removal). Installation Procedure 1. Install the crankshaft rear oil seal and housing. Refer to Crankshaft Rear Oil Seal and Housing Installation (See: Service and Repair/Overhaul/91. Crankshaft Rear Oil Seal and Housing Installation). 2. Install the oil pan. Refer to Oil Pan Replacement (See: Engine Lubrication/Oil Pan/Service and Repair). 3. Install the engine flywheel. Refer to Engine Flywheel Replacement (See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Flex Plate/Service and Repair). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Crankshaft, Engine > Component Information > Specifications Crankshaft: Specifications Crankshaft Connecting Rod Journal Diameter ............................................................................................................................. 55.992-56.008 mm (2.2044-2.2050 in) Connecting Rod Journal Out-of-Round ................................................................................................................................................ 0.005 mm (0.0002 in) Connecting Rod Journal Taper ............................................................................................................................................................. 0.005 mm (0.0002 in) Connecting Rod Journal Width Production ...................................................... .................................................................................................................................... 22.000 mm (0.8661 in) Service .............................................................................................................................. ......................................... 21.920-22.080 mm (0.8630-0.8693 in) Crankshaft End Play ...................................................................................................................................................... 0.100-0.330 mm (0.0039-0.0130 in) Crankshaft Main Bearing Clearance .............................................................................................................................. 0.010-0.060 mm (0.0004-0.0024 in) Crankshaft Main Journal Diameter ..................................................................................................................................................... 68.000 mm (2.6772 in) Crankshaft Main Journal Out-of-Round ............................................................................................................................................... 0.005 mm (0.0002 in) Crankshaft Main Journal Taper ............................................................................................................................................................ 0.005 mm (0.0002 in) Crankshaft Main Journal Thrust Wall Runout ................................................... ......................................................................................................................... 0.000-0.040 mm (0.0000-0.0016 in) Square ................................................................................................................... ......................................................... 0.000-0.010 mm (0.0000-0.0004 in) Crankshaft Main Journal Width, #2, 4 Production ....................................................................................................................... ................................................................... 24.000 mm (0.9449 in) Service ....................................... ................................................................................................................................ 23.900-24.100 mm (0.9409-0.9488 in) Crankshaft Main Journal Width, #3 Production .............................................. ............................................................................................................................................ 24.400 mm (0.9606 in) Service ....................................................................................................................... ................................................ 24.360-24.440 mm (0.9591-0.9622 in) Crankshaft Pilot Bearing Bore Diameter ................................................................................................................... 20.965-20.995 mm (0.8254-0.8266 in) Crankshaft Rear Flange Runout ............................................................................................................................................................ 0.025 mm (0.0010 in) Crankshaft Reluctor Ring Runout - Maximum ..................................................................................................................................... 2.000 mm (0.0787 in) Crankshaft Runout ............................................................................................................ .................................................................... 0.030 mm (0.0012 in) Crankshaft Thrust Bearing Clearance ............................................................................................................................ 0.076-0.305 mm (0.0030-0.0120 in) Crankshaft Thrust Surface - Height Diameter .................................................................................................................................... 95.000 mm (3.7401 in) Crankshaft Thrust Surface Runout ....................................................................................................................................................... 0.040 mm (0.0016 in) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Engine Block Heater > Component Information > Service and Repair > Coolant Heater Replacement Engine Block Heater: Service and Repair Coolant Heater Replacement Coolant Heater Replacement (LF1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Engine Block Heater > Component Information > Service and Repair > Coolant Heater Replacement > Page 2140 Engine Block Heater: Service and Repair Coolant Heater Cord Replacement Coolant Heater Cord Replacement (LF1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Harmonic Balancer Crankshaft Pulley > Component Information > Specifications Harmonic Balancer - Crankshaft Pulley: Specifications Crankshaft balancer .................................................................................................................................. 100 Nm (74 lb ft) plus an additional 150 degrees Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Harmonic Balancer Crankshaft Pulley > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2144 Harmonic Balancer - Crankshaft Pulley: Service and Repair Crankshaft Balancer Replacement Special Tools * EN-38416-2 - Crankshaft Button * EN-41816 - Crankshaft Balancer Remover * EN-41998-B - Crankshaft Balancer Installer * EN-45059 - Angle Meter * EN-46106 - Flywheel Holding Tool For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Tools and Equipment/Special Tools). Removal Procedure 1. Remove the drive belt. Refer to Drive Belt Replacement (See: Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories/Drive Belt/Service and Repair). 2. Install the engine support fixture. Refer to Engine Support Fixture (See: Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Engine Support Fixture). 3. Remove the starter. Refer to Starter Replacement (LAF) (See: Starting and Charging/Starting System/Starter Motor/Service and Repair)Starter Replacement (LF1) (See: Starting and Charging/Starting System/Starter Motor/Service and Repair). 4. Install the EN-46106 - tool through the starter mounting hole. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Harmonic Balancer Crankshaft Pulley > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2145 5. Using engine support fixture, lower engine approximately two inches. 6. Remove the crankshaft balancer bolt. Discard the bolt. 7. Install the EN-38416-2 - button in the nose of the crankshaft. 8. Install the EN-41816 - remover in order to remove the crankshaft balancer. 9. Tighten the center bolt of the EN-41816 - remover in order to pull the crankshaft balancer off of the crankshaft. 10. Remove the EN-41816 - remover from the crankshaft balancer. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Harmonic Balancer Crankshaft Pulley > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2146 1. The EN-46106 - tool must be installed onto the flywheel. 2. Use the EN-41998-B - installer , nut, bearing and washer to install the crankshaft balancer. Note: Do not lubricate the crankshaft front oil seal or crankshaft balancer sealing surfaces. The crankshaft balancer is installed into a dry seal. 3. Apply lubricant to the inside of the crankshaft balancer hub bore. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Harmonic Balancer Crankshaft Pulley > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2147 4. Place the crankshaft balancer in position on the crankshaft. 5. Thread the EN-41998-B - installer in the crankshaft. Ensure you engage at least 10 threads of the EN-41998-B - installer before pressing the crankshaft balancer in place. 6. Push the crankshaft balancer into position by tightening the nut on the EN-41998-B - installer until the large washer bottoms out on the crankshaft end. 7. Remove the EN-41998-B - installer. Note: Always install a new crankshaft balancer retaining bolt and washer. 8. Install the NEW crankshaft balancer bolt. Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener Caution). 9. Tighten the crankshaft balancer bolt to 100 Nm (74 lb ft) and an additional 150 degrees using the EN-45059 - meter. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Harmonic Balancer Crankshaft Pulley > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2148 10. Remove the EN-46106 - tool. 11. Install the starter. Refer to Starter Replacement (LAF) (See: Starting and Charging/Starting System/Starter Motor/Service and Repair)Starter Replacement (LF1) (See: Starting and Charging/Starting System/Starter Motor/Service and Repair). 12. Install the drive belt. Refer to Drive Belt Replacement (See: Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories/Drive Belt/Service and Repair). 13. Remove the engine support fixture. Refer to Engine Support Fixture (See: Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Engine Support Fixture ). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Piston, Engine > Component Information > Specifications Piston: Specifications Pistons and Pins Piston Piston Diameter - Measured Over Skirt Coating ........................................................................................................ 88.476-89.014 mm (3.4833-3.5045 in) Piston Diameter - Service Limit Minimum, w/more than 10k miles ................................................................................................... 88.926 mm (3.5010 in) Piston Pin Bore Diameter .......................................................................................................................................... 24.007-24.012 mm (0.9452-0.9454 in) Piston Ring Groove Width - First Compression Ring .................................................................................................... 1.220-1.240 mm (0.0480-0.0488 in) Piston Ring Groove Width - Second Compression Ring ............................................................................................... 1.510-1.530 mm (0.0595-0.0602 in) Piston Ring Groove Width - Oil Control Ring ............................................................................................................... 2.510-2.530 mm (0.0988-0.0996 in) Piston to Bore Clearance - Production; Measured at Skirt Coating ............................................................................... 0.022-0.032 mm (0.0008-0.0013 in) Piston to Bore Clearance - Service Limit Maximum, w/more than 10k miles ...................................................................................... 0.650 mm (0.0256 in) Pin Piston Pin Clearance to Connecting Rod Bore - Production .......................................................................................... 0.007-0.024 mm (0.0003-0.0010 in) Piston Pin Clearance to Connecting Rod Bore - Service Maximum ..................................................................................................... 0.030 mm (0.0012 in) Piston Pin Clearance to Piston Pin Bore - Production ................................................................................................... 0.007-0.015 mm (0.0003-0.0006 in) Piston Pin Clearance to Piston Pin Bore - Service Maximum .............................................................................................................. 0.015 mm (0.0006 in) Piston Pin Diameter ................................................................................................................................................... 23.997-24.000 mm (0.9448-0.9449 in) Piston Pin Length ........................................................................................................................................................... 60.60-61.10 mm (2.3858-2.4055 in) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Piston Ring, Engine > Component Information > Specifications Piston Ring: Specifications Piston Rings Piston Ring End Gap First Compression Ring - Nominal ................................................................................................................................ 0.150-0.300 mm (0.0059-0.0118 in) First Compression Ring - Maximum, Ring in Bore .............................................................................................................................. 0.350 mm (0.1378 in) Second Compression Ring - Nominal ............................................................................................................................ 0.280-0.480 mm (0.0110-0.0189 in) Second Compression Ring - Maximum, Ring in Bore .......................................................................................................................... 0.450 mm (0.0177 in) Oil Control Ring ............................................................................................................................................................ 0.150-0.600 mm (0.0059-0.0236 in) Piston Ring to Groove Clearance First Compression Ring ................................................................................................................................................. 0.030-0.065 mm (0.0012-0.0026 in) Second Compression Ring ............................................................................................................................................. 0.015-0.060 mm (0.0006-0.0024 in) Oil Control Ring ............................................................................................................................................................ 0.030-0.170 mm (0.0012-0.0669 in) Piston Ring Thickness First Compression Ring ................................................................................................................................................. 1.175-1.190 mm (0.0463-0.0469 in) Second Compression Ring ............................................................................................................................................. 1.470-1.495 mm (0.0579-0.0589 in) Oil Control Ring ............................................................................................................................................................ 2.360-2.480 mm (0.0929-0.0976 in) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Fuel Pressure Release > System Information > Service and Repair Fuel Pressure Release: Service and Repair Fuel Pressure Relief Warning Fuel that flows out at high pressure can cause serious injury to the skin and eyes. ALWAYS depressurize the fuel system before removing components that are under high fuel pressure. Note: If a scan tool is not available, WAIT at LEAST 2 hours after the engine has been run, before removing the high pressure fuel line. 1. Install a scan tool to the vehicle and command the fuel pump relay OFF, allowing the low pressure fuel pump to shut off. 2. Start the vehicle and allow the engine to idle until the engine stops. The engine will stop in approximately 20-30 seconds. 3. Turn the ignition OFF. 4. Using the scan tool, verify that there is little to no fuel pressure, if there still is fuel pressure repeat step 2. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Rocker Arm Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair > Valve Rocker Arm Replacement - Left Side Rocker Arm Assembly: Service and Repair Valve Rocker Arm Replacement - Left Side Valve Rocker Arm Replacement - Left Side Removal Procedure 1. Remove the applicable camshaft(s). Refer to Camshaft Replacement - Left Side (See: Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods/Camshaft/Service and Repair/Camshaft Replacement - Left Side). 2. Remove the rocker arms. 3. Clean and inspect the camshaft(s) and the rocker arm(s). Repair or replace as necessary. Refer to Camshaft Cleaning and Inspection (See: Service and Repair/Overhaul/62. Camshaft Cleaning and Inspection) and Valve Lifter Cleaning and Inspection (See: Service and Repair/Overhaul/63. Valve Lifter Cleaning and Inspection). Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Rocker Arm Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair > Valve Rocker Arm Replacement - Left Side > Page 2163 1. Install the rocker arms. 2. Install the camshaft(s). Refer to Camshaft Replacement - Left Side (See: Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods/Camshaft/Service and Repair/Camshaft Replacement - Left Side). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Rocker Arm Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair > Valve Rocker Arm Replacement - Left Side > Page 2164 Rocker Arm Assembly: Service and Repair Valve Rocker Arm Replacement - Right Side Valve Rocker Arm Replacement - Right Side Removal Procedure 1. Remove the applicable camshaft(s). Refer to Camshaft Replacement - Right Side (See: Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods/Camshaft/Service and Repair/Camshaft Replacement - Right Side). 2. Remove the rocker arms. 3. Clean and inspect the camshaft(s) and the rocker arm(s). Repair or replace as necessary. Refer to Camshaft Cleaning and Inspection (See: Service and Repair/Overhaul/62. Camshaft Cleaning and Inspection) and Valve Lifter Cleaning and Inspection (See: Service and Repair/Overhaul/63. Valve Lifter Cleaning and Inspection). 4. Clean and inspect the valve rocker arm. Refer to Valve Rocker Arm Cleaning and Inspection (See: Service and Repair/Overhaul/64. Valve Rocker Arm Cleaning and Inspection) Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Rocker Arm Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair > Valve Rocker Arm Replacement - Left Side > Page 2165 1. Install the rocker arms. 2. Install the camshaft(s). Refer to Camshaft Replacement - Right Side (See: Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods/Camshaft/Service and Repair/Camshaft Replacement - Right Side). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Cover > Component Information > Service and Repair > Camshaft Cover Replacement - Left Side Valve Cover: Service and Repair Camshaft Cover Replacement - Left Side Camshaft Cover Replacement - Left Side (LF1) Special Tools EN-46101 - Spark Plug Tube Seal Guide For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Tools and Equipment/Special Tools). Removal Procedure 1. Remove the ignition coils. Refer to Ignition Coil Replacement - Bank 2 (See: Powertrain Management/Ignition System/Ignition Coil/Service and Repair/Ignition Coil Replacement - Bank 2). 2. Disconnect and remove the engine harness from the camshaft cover. 3. Remove the intake manifold. Refer to Intake Manifold Replacement (See: Intake Manifold/Service and Repair/Intake Manifold Replacement). 4. Remove the left camshaft cover bolts. 5. Remove the left camshaft cover from the left cylinder head. 6. Clean the mating surfaces of the cylinder head and the camshaft cover. Refer to Camshaft Cover Cleaning and Inspection (See: Service and Repair/Overhaul/79. Camshaft Cover Cleaning and Inspection) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Cover > Component Information > Service and Repair > Camshaft Cover Replacement - Left Side > Page 2170 7. Install the EN-46101 - guide onto the spark plug tubes of the left cylinder head. Installation Procedure 1. Install new camshaft cover bolt grommets prior to installing the camshaft cover bolts. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Cover > Component Information > Service and Repair > Camshaft Cover Replacement - Left Side > Page 2171 2. Place a bead 8 mm (0.3150 in) in diameter by 4 mm (0.1575 in) in height of RTV sealant equivalent, on the engine front cover split lines (1). 3. Place the left camshaft cover into position onto the left cylinder head. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Cover > Component Information > Service and Repair > Camshaft Cover Replacement - Left Side > Page 2172 Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener Caution). 4. Loosely install the left camshaft cover bolts. 5. Tighten the left camshaft cover bolts in the sequence shown to 10 Nm (89 lb in). 6. Connect and install the engine harness to the camshaft cover. 7. Install the intake manifold. Refer to Intake Manifold Replacement (See: Intake Manifold/Service and Repair/Intake Manifold Replacement). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Cover > Component Information > Service and Repair > Camshaft Cover Replacement - Left Side > Page 2173 8. Remove the EN-46101 - guide from the spark plug tubes of the left cylinder head. 9. Install the ignition coils. Refer to Ignition Coil Replacement - Bank 2 (See: Powertrain Management/Ignition System/Ignition Coil/Service and Repair/Ignition Coil Replacement - Bank 2). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Cover > Component Information > Service and Repair > Camshaft Cover Replacement - Left Side > Page 2174 Valve Cover: Service and Repair Camshaft Cover Replacement - Right Side Camshaft Cover Replacement - Right Side (LF1) Special Tools EN-46101 - Spark Plug Tube Seal Guide For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Tools and Equipment/Special Tools) Removal Procedure 1. Remove the ignition coils. Refer to Ignition Coil Replacement - Bank 1 (See: Powertrain Management/Ignition System/Ignition Coil/Service and Repair/Ignition Coil Replacement - Bank 1) 2. Disconnect and remove the engine harness from the camshaft cover. 3. Remove the right camshaft cover bolts. 4. Remove the right camshaft cover from the right cylinder head. 5. Clean the mating surfaces of the cylinder head and the camshaft cover. Refer to Camshaft Cover Cleaning and Inspection (See: Service and Repair/Overhaul/79. Camshaft Cover Cleaning and Inspection) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Cover > Component Information > Service and Repair > Camshaft Cover Replacement - Left Side > Page 2175 6. Install the EN-46101 - guide onto the spark plug tubes of the right cylinder head. Installation Procedure 1. Install new camshaft cover bolt grommets prior to installing the camshaft cover bolts. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Cover > Component Information > Service and Repair > Camshaft Cover Replacement - Left Side > Page 2176 2. Place a bead 8 mm (0.3150 in) in diameter by 4 mm (0.1575 in) in height of RTV sealant, on the engine front cover split lines (1). 3. Place the right camshaft cover into position onto the right cylinder head. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Cover > Component Information > Service and Repair > Camshaft Cover Replacement - Left Side > Page 2177 Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener Caution) 4. Loosely install the right camshaft cover bolts. 5. Tighten the right camshaft cover bolts in the sequence shown to 10 Nm (89 lb in). 6. Connect and install the engine harness to the camshaft cover. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Cover > Component Information > Service and Repair > Camshaft Cover Replacement - Left Side > Page 2178 7. Remove the EN-46101 - guide from the spark plug tubes of the right cylinder head. 8. Install the ignition coils. Refer to Ignition Coil Replacement - Bank 1 (See: Powertrain Management/Ignition System/Ignition Coil/Service and Repair/Ignition Coil Replacement - Bank 1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Spring > Component Information > Service and Repair > Valve Stem Oil Seal and Valve Spring Replacement - Left Side Valve Spring: Service and Repair Valve Stem Oil Seal and Valve Spring Replacement - Left Side Valve Stem Oil Seal and Valve Spring Replacement - Left Side Special Tools * EN-39313 - Spark Plug Port Adapter * EN-46106 - Flywheel Holding Tool * EN-46110 - On-Vehicle Valve Spring Compressor * EN-46116 - Valve Stem Seal Remover/Installer For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Tools and Equipment/Special Tools). Removal Procedure 1. Remove the rocker arms. Refer to Valve Rocker Arm Replacement - Left Side (See: Rocker Arm Assembly/Service and Repair/Valve Rocker Arm Replacement - Left Side). 2. Remove the starter motor. Refer to Starter Replacement (LAF) (See: Starting and Charging/Starting System/Starter Motor/Service and Repair )Starter Replacement (LF1) (See: Starting and Charging/Starting System/Starter Motor/Service and Repair). Note: If the EN-46106 - tool is not installed, the crankshaft may rotate. If the crankshaft rotates, disassembly and reassembly of the entire camshaft timing system may be required. 3. Install the EN-46106 - tool in order to prevent crankshaft rotation. 4. Remove the spark plug from the applicable cylinder. Refer to Spark Plug Replacement (See: Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks/Spark Plug/Service and Repair). 5. Install the EN-39313 - adapter to the applicable cylinder. 6. Connect the EN-39313 - adapter to a compressed air source. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Spring > Component Information > Service and Repair > Valve Stem Oil Seal and Valve Spring Replacement - Left Side > Page 2183 7. Install the EN-46110 - compressor above the applicable cylinder as shown. 8. Tighten the EN-46110 - compressor nut (2). 9. Remove the valve keepers. 10. Loosen the EN-46110 - compressor nut. 11. Remove the valve spring retainer. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Spring > Component Information > Service and Repair > Valve Stem Oil Seal and Valve Spring Replacement - Left Side > Page 2184 12. Remove the valve spring. 13. Use the EN-46116 - remover/installer (1) in order to remove the valve stem seal (2). Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Spring > Component Information > Service and Repair > Valve Stem Oil Seal and Valve Spring Replacement - Left Side > Page 2185 1. Use the EN-46116 - remover/installer (1) in order to install the valve stem seal (2). 2. Install the valve spring. 3. Install the valve spring retainer. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Spring > Component Information > Service and Repair > Valve Stem Oil Seal and Valve Spring Replacement - Left Side > Page 2186 4. Install the EN-46110 - compressor above the applicable valve spring as shown. Tighten the EN-46110 - compressor nut (2). 5. Install the valve spring keepers. 6. Remove the EN-46110 - compressor. 7. Disconnect the EN-39313 - adapter from the compressed air source. 8. Remove the EN-39313 - adapter. 9. Install the spark plugs. Refer to Spark Plug Replacement (See: Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks/Spark Plug/Service and Repair). 10. Install the rocker arms. Refer to Valve Rocker Arm Replacement - Left Side (See: Rocker Arm Assembly/Service and Repair/Valve Rocker Arm Replacement - Left Side). 11. Remove the EN-46106 - tool in order to prevent crankshaft rotation. 12. Install the starter motor. Refer to Starter Replacement (LAF) (See: Starting and Charging/Starting System/Starter Motor/Service and Repair )Starter Replacement (LF1) (See: Starting and Charging/Starting System/Starter Motor/Service and Repair). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Spring > Component Information > Service and Repair > Valve Stem Oil Seal and Valve Spring Replacement - Left Side > Page 2187 Valve Spring: Service and Repair Valve Stem Oil Seal and Valve Spring Replacement - Right Side Valve Stem Oil Seal and Valve Spring Replacement - Right Side Special Tools * EN-39313 - Spark Plug Port Adapter * EN-46106 - Flywheel Holding Tool * EN-46110 - On-Vehicle Valve Spring Compressor * EN-46116 - Valve Stem Seal Remover/Installer For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Tools and Equipment/Special Tools). Removal Procedure 1. Remove the rocker arms. Refer to Valve Rocker Arm Replacement - Right Side (See: Rocker Arm Assembly/Service and Repair/Valve Rocker Arm Replacement - Right Side). 2. Remove the starter motor. Refer to Starter Replacement (LAF) (See: Starting and Charging/Starting System/Starter Motor/Service and Repair )Starter Replacement (LF1) (See: Starting and Charging/Starting System/Starter Motor/Service and Repair). Note: If the EN-46106 - tool is not installed, the crankshaft may rotate. If the crankshaft rotates, disassembly and reassembly of the entire camshaft timing system may be required. 3. Install the EN-46106 - tool in order to prevent crankshaft rotation. 4. Remove the spark plug from the applicable cylinder. Refer to Spark Plug Replacement (See: Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks/Spark Plug/Service and Repair). 5. Install the EN-39313 - adapter to the applicable cylinder. 6. Connect the EN-39313 - adapter to a compressed air source. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Spring > Component Information > Service and Repair > Valve Stem Oil Seal and Valve Spring Replacement - Left Side > Page 2188 7. Install the EN-46110 - compressor above the applicable cylinder as shown. 8. Tighten the EN-46110 - compressor nut (2). 9. Remove the valve keepers. 10. Loosen the EN-46110 - compressor nut. 11. Remove the valve spring retainer. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Spring > Component Information > Service and Repair > Valve Stem Oil Seal and Valve Spring Replacement - Left Side > Page 2189 12. Remove the valve spring. 13. Use the EN-46116 - remover/installer (1) in order to remove the valve stem seal (2). Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Spring > Component Information > Service and Repair > Valve Stem Oil Seal and Valve Spring Replacement - Left Side > Page 2190 1. Use the EN-46116 - remover/installer (1) in order to install the valve stem seals (2). 2. Install the valve spring. 3. Install the valve spring retainer. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Spring > Component Information > Service and Repair > Valve Stem Oil Seal and Valve Spring Replacement - Left Side > Page 2191 4. Install the EN-46110 - compressor above the applicable valve spring as shown. Tighten the EN-46110 - compressor nut (2). 5. Install the valve spring keepers. 6. Remove the EN-46110 - compressor. 7. Disconnect the EN-39313 - adapter from the compressed air source. 8. Remove the EN-39313 - adapter. 9. Install the spark plugs. Refer to Spark Plug Replacement (See: Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks/Spark Plug/Service and Repair). 10. Install the rocker arms. Refer to Valve Rocker Arm Replacement - Right Side (See: Rocker Arm Assembly/Service and Repair/Valve Rocker Arm Replacement - Right Side). 11. Remove the EN-46106 - tool. 12. Install the starter motor. Refer to Starter Replacement (LAF) (See: Starting and Charging/Starting System/Starter Motor/Service and Repair )Starter Replacement (LF1) (See: Starting and Charging/Starting System/Starter Motor/Service and Repair). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive Belt > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 10-06-01-006 > Jul > 10 > Engine - Drive Belt Noise Inspect Pulley Drive Belt: Customer Interest Engine - Drive Belt Noise Inspect Pulley TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 10-06-01-006 Date: July 26, 2010 Subject: Intermittent or Continuous Drive Belt Noise (Inspect for Pulley Damage, Misalignment and/or Replace Drive Belt) Models: 2010 Buick LaCrosse 2010 Cadillac SRX 2010 Chevrolet Equinox 2010 GMC Terrain Equipped with 3.0L (RPO LF1) or 3.6L (RPO LLT) V6 Engine Built Prior to February 27, 2010 Condition Some customers may comment on an intermittent or continuous drive belt noise. Cause This condition may be caused by any of the following: - One or more of the accessory drive pulleys may be misaligned, bent or damaged. - The power steering (PS) pump pulley may be misaligned due to improper mounting on the PS pump. - The drive belt may need to be replaced. Correction 1. Verify the intermittent or continuous drive belt noise condition exists. ‹› If the condition exists, proceed to Step 2. ‹› If the condition does not exist, then this bulletin does not apply. 2. Perform a visual inspection for damage to any accessory drive pulley or to the drive belt. Refer to Drive Belt Chirping, Squeal and Whine Diagnosis in SI. ‹› If the diagnosis reveals a condition, then repair as needed. ‹› If the diagnosis does not reveal a condition, proceed to Step 3. 3. Remove the drive belt. Refer to Drive Belt Replacement in SI. Important To properly perform Step 4, you MUST refer to and follow the referenced procedure. 4. Inspect the PS pump pulley and determine if it is flush with the PS pump shaft on the FRONT side. Refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 08-06-01-008A, Diagnosing Accessory Drive Belt/Serpentine Belt Noise and Use of Laser Alignment Tool in SI. ‹› If the inspection reveals that the PS pump pulley is properly aligned, then replace the drive belt. Refer to Drive Belt Replacement in SI. Parts Information Warranty Information Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive Belt > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 10-06-01-006 > Jul > 10 > Engine - Drive Belt Noise Inspect Pulley > Page 2201 For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive Belt > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Drive Belt: > 10-06-01-006 > Jul > 10 > Engine - Drive Belt Noise Inspect Pulley Drive Belt: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine - Drive Belt Noise Inspect Pulley TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 10-06-01-006 Date: July 26, 2010 Subject: Intermittent or Continuous Drive Belt Noise (Inspect for Pulley Damage, Misalignment and/or Replace Drive Belt) Models: 2010 Buick LaCrosse 2010 Cadillac SRX 2010 Chevrolet Equinox 2010 GMC Terrain Equipped with 3.0L (RPO LF1) or 3.6L (RPO LLT) V6 Engine Built Prior to February 27, 2010 Condition Some customers may comment on an intermittent or continuous drive belt noise. Cause This condition may be caused by any of the following: - One or more of the accessory drive pulleys may be misaligned, bent or damaged. - The power steering (PS) pump pulley may be misaligned due to improper mounting on the PS pump. - The drive belt may need to be replaced. Correction 1. Verify the intermittent or continuous drive belt noise condition exists. ‹› If the condition exists, proceed to Step 2. ‹› If the condition does not exist, then this bulletin does not apply. 2. Perform a visual inspection for damage to any accessory drive pulley or to the drive belt. Refer to Drive Belt Chirping, Squeal and Whine Diagnosis in SI. ‹› If the diagnosis reveals a condition, then repair as needed. ‹› If the diagnosis does not reveal a condition, proceed to Step 3. 3. Remove the drive belt. Refer to Drive Belt Replacement in SI. Important To properly perform Step 4, you MUST refer to and follow the referenced procedure. 4. Inspect the PS pump pulley and determine if it is flush with the PS pump shaft on the FRONT side. Refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 08-06-01-008A, Diagnosing Accessory Drive Belt/Serpentine Belt Noise and Use of Laser Alignment Tool in SI. ‹› If the inspection reveals that the PS pump pulley is properly aligned, then replace the drive belt. Refer to Drive Belt Replacement in SI. Parts Information Warranty Information Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive Belt > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Drive Belt: > 10-06-01-006 > Jul > 10 > Engine - Drive Belt Noise Inspect Pulley > Page 2207 For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive Belt > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Drive Belt: > 08-06-01-008A > Jul > 09 > Engine - Drive Belt Misalignment Diagnostics Drive Belt: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine - Drive Belt Misalignment Diagnostics INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 08-06-01-008A Date: July 27, 2009 Subject: Diagnosing Accessory Drive Belt / Serpentine Belt Noise and Availability and Use of Kent-Moore EN-49228 Laser Alignment Tool - Drive Belt Models: 2010 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (Including Saturn) 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 Vehicles 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add a model year and update the Tool Information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 08-06-01-008 (Section 06 - Engine). Background Several aftermarket companies offer laser alignment tools for accessory drive systems that can be very helpful in eliminating drive belt noise as a result of misaligned pulleys. Typically pricing ranges from $160 - $200. EN-49228 Laser Alignment Tool - Drive Belt The GM Tool program has now made available a competitive, simple to use and time-saving laser tool to assist in achieving precise alignment of the drive belt pulleys. This optional tool removes the guesswork from proper pulley alignment and may serve to reduce comebacks from: - Drive Belt Noise - Accelerated Drive Belt Wear - Drive Belt Slippage Instructions The instructions below are specific only to the truck Gen IV V-8 family of engines. These instructions are only for illustrative purposes to show how the tool may be used. Universal instructions are included in the box with the Laser Alignment Tool - Drive Belt. Caution - Do not look directly into the beam projected from the laser. - Use caution when shining the laser on highly polished or reflective surfaces. Laser safety glasses help reduce laser beam glare in many circumstances. - Always use laser safety glasses when using the laser. Laser safety glasses are not designed to protect eyes from direct laser exposure. 1. Observe and mark the serpentine belt orientation. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive Belt > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Drive Belt: > 08-06-01-008A > Jul > 09 > Engine - Drive Belt Misalignment Diagnostics > Page 2212 2. Remove the serpentine belt from the accessory drive system. 3. Install the tool onto the power steering pulley. Position the legs of the tool into the outer grooves of the pulley, farthest from the front of the engine. 4. Install the retaining cord around the pulley and to the legs of the tool. 5. Put on the laser safety glasses provided with the tool. 6. Depress the switch on the rear of the tool to activate the light beam. 7. Rotate the power steering pulley as required to project the light beam onto the crankshaft balancer pulley grooves. 8. Inspect for proper power steering pulley alignment. - If the laser beam projects onto the second rib or raised area (1), the pulleys are aligned properly. - If the laser beam projects more than one-quarter rib 0.9 mm (0.035 in) mis-alignment, adjust the position of the power steering pulley as required. - Refer to SI for Power Steering Pulley Removal and Installation procedures. 9. Install the serpentine belt to the accessory drive system in the original orientation. 10. Operate the vehicle and verify that the belt noise concern is no longer present. Tool Information Please visit the GM service tool website for pricing information or to place your order for this tool. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive Belt > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Drive Belt: > 08-06-01-008A > Jul > 09 > Engine - Drive Belt Misalignment Diagnostics > Page 2213 Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive Belt > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Drive Belt: > 08-06-01-008A > Jul > 09 > Engine - Drive Belt Misalignment Diagnostics Drive Belt: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine - Drive Belt Misalignment Diagnostics INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 08-06-01-008A Date: July 27, 2009 Subject: Diagnosing Accessory Drive Belt / Serpentine Belt Noise and Availability and Use of Kent-Moore EN-49228 Laser Alignment Tool - Drive Belt Models: 2010 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (Including Saturn) 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 Vehicles 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add a model year and update the Tool Information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 08-06-01-008 (Section 06 - Engine). Background Several aftermarket companies offer laser alignment tools for accessory drive systems that can be very helpful in eliminating drive belt noise as a result of misaligned pulleys. Typically pricing ranges from $160 - $200. EN-49228 Laser Alignment Tool - Drive Belt The GM Tool program has now made available a competitive, simple to use and time-saving laser tool to assist in achieving precise alignment of the drive belt pulleys. This optional tool removes the guesswork from proper pulley alignment and may serve to reduce comebacks from: - Drive Belt Noise - Accelerated Drive Belt Wear - Drive Belt Slippage Instructions The instructions below are specific only to the truck Gen IV V-8 family of engines. These instructions are only for illustrative purposes to show how the tool may be used. Universal instructions are included in the box with the Laser Alignment Tool - Drive Belt. Caution - Do not look directly into the beam projected from the laser. - Use caution when shining the laser on highly polished or reflective surfaces. Laser safety glasses help reduce laser beam glare in many circumstances. - Always use laser safety glasses when using the laser. Laser safety glasses are not designed to protect eyes from direct laser exposure. 1. Observe and mark the serpentine belt orientation. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive Belt > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Drive Belt: > 08-06-01-008A > Jul > 09 > Engine - Drive Belt Misalignment Diagnostics > Page 2219 2. Remove the serpentine belt from the accessory drive system. 3. Install the tool onto the power steering pulley. Position the legs of the tool into the outer grooves of the pulley, farthest from the front of the engine. 4. Install the retaining cord around the pulley and to the legs of the tool. 5. Put on the laser safety glasses provided with the tool. 6. Depress the switch on the rear of the tool to activate the light beam. 7. Rotate the power steering pulley as required to project the light beam onto the crankshaft balancer pulley grooves. 8. Inspect for proper power steering pulley alignment. - If the laser beam projects onto the second rib or raised area (1), the pulleys are aligned properly. - If the laser beam projects more than one-quarter rib 0.9 mm (0.035 in) mis-alignment, adjust the position of the power steering pulley as required. - Refer to SI for Power Steering Pulley Removal and Installation procedures. 9. Install the serpentine belt to the accessory drive system in the original orientation. 10. Operate the vehicle and verify that the belt noise concern is no longer present. Tool Information Please visit the GM service tool website for pricing information or to place your order for this tool. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive Belt > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Drive Belt: > 08-06-01-008A > Jul > 09 > Engine - Drive Belt Misalignment Diagnostics > Page 2220 Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive Belt > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2221 Drive Belt: Diagrams Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive Belt > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2222 Drive Belt: Service Precautions Belt Dressing Caution Caution: Do not use belt dressing on the drive belt. Belt dressing causes the breakdown of the composition of the drive belt. Failure to follow this recommendation will damage the drive belt. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive Belt > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2223 Drive Belt: Description and Operation Drive Belt System Description The drive belt system consists of the following components: * The drive belt * The drive belt tensioner * The drive belt idler pulley * The crankshaft balancer pulley * The accessory drive component mounting brackets * The accessory drive components - The power steering pump, if belt driven - The generator - The A/C compressor, if equipped - The engine cooling fan, if belt driven - The water pump, if belt driven - The vacuum pump, if equipped - The air compressor, if equipped The drive belt system may use 1 belt or 2 belts. The drive belt is thin so that it can bend backwards and has several ribs to match the grooves in the pulleys. The drive belts are made of different types of rubbers, chloroprene or EPDM, and have different layers or plys containing either fiber cloth or cords for reinforcement. Both sides of the drive belt may be used to drive the different accessory drive components. When the back side of the drive belt is used to drive a pulley, the pulley is smooth. The drive belt is pulled by the crankshaft balancer pulley across the accessory drive component pulleys. The spring loaded drive belt tensioner keeps constant tension on the drive belt to prevent the drive belt from slipping. The drive belt tensioner arm will move when loads are applied to the drive belt by the accessory drive components and the crankshaft. The drive belt system may have an idler pulley, which is used to add wrap to the adjacent pulleys. Some systems use an idler pulley in place of an accessory drive component when the vehicle is not equipped with the accessory. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive Belt > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Drive Belt Chirping, Squeal, and Whine Diagnosis Drive Belt: Testing and Inspection Drive Belt Chirping, Squeal, and Whine Diagnosis Drive Belt Chirping, Squeal, and Whine Diagnosis Diagnostic Aids * A chirping or squeal noise may be intermittent due to moisture on the drive belts or the pulleys. It may be necessary to spray a small amount of water on the drive belts in order to duplicate the customers concern. If spraying water on the drive belt duplicates the symptom, cleaning the belt pulleys may be the probable solution. * If the noise is intermittent, verify the accessory drive components by varying their loads making sure they are operated to their maximum capacity. An overcharged A/C system, power steering system with a pinched hose or wrong fluid, or a generator failing are suggested items to inspect. * A chirping, squeal or whine noise may be caused by a loose or improper installation of a body or suspension component. Other items of the vehicle may also cause the noise. * The drive belts will not cause a whine noise. Test Description The numbers below refer to the step numbers on the diagnostic table. 2. The noise may not be engine related. This step is to verify that the engine is making the noise. If the engine is not making the noise do not proceed further with this table. 3. The noise may be an internal engine noise. Removing the drive belts one at a time and operating the engine for a brief period will verify the noise is related to the drive belt. When removing the drive belt the water pump may not be operating and the engine may overheat. Also DTCs may set when the engine is operating with the drive belts removed. 4. Inspect all drive belt pulleys for pilling. Pilling is the small balls or pills or it can be strings in the drive belt grooves from the accumulation of rubber dust. 6. Misalignment of the pulleys may be caused from improper mounting of the accessory drive component, incorrect installation of the accessory drive component pulley, or the pulley bent inward or outward from a previous repair. Test for a misaligned pulley using a straight edge in the pulley grooves across two or three pulleys. If a misaligned pulley is found refer to that accessory drive component for the proper installation procedure for that pulley. 10. Inspecting of the fasteners can eliminate the possibility that a wrong bolt, nut, spacer, or washer was installed. 12. Inspecting the pulleys for being bent should include inspecting for a dent or other damage to the pulleys that would prevent the drive belt from not seating properly in all of the pulley grooves or on the smooth surface of a pulley when the back side of the belt is used to drive the pulley. 14. This test is to verify that the drive belt tensioner operates properly. If the drive belt tensioner is not operating properly, proper belt tension may not be achieved to keep the drive belt from slipping which could cause a squeal noise. 15. This test is to verify that the drive belt is not too long, which would prevent the drive belt tensioner from working properly. Also if an incorrect length drive belt was installed, it may not be routed properly and may be turning an accessory drive component in the wrong direction. 16. Misalignment of the pulleys may be caused from improper mounting of the accessory drive component, incorrect installation of the accessory drive component pulley, or the pulley bent inward or outward from a previous repair. Test for a misaligned pulley using a straight edge in the pulley grooves across two or three pulleys. If a misaligned pulley is found refer to that accessory drive component for the proper installation procedure for that pulley. 17. This test is to verify that the pulleys are the correct diameter or width. Using a known good vehicle compare the pulley sizes. 19. Replacing the drive belt when it is not damaged or there is not excessive pilling will only be a temporary repair. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive Belt > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Drive Belt Chirping, Squeal, and Whine Diagnosis > Page 2226 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive Belt > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Drive Belt Chirping, Squeal, and Whine Diagnosis > Page 2227 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive Belt > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Drive Belt Chirping, Squeal, and Whine Diagnosis > Page 2228 Drive Belt: Testing and Inspection Drive Belt Rumbling and Vibration Diagnosis Drive Belt Rumbling and Vibration Diagnosis Diagnostic Aids The accessory drive components can have an affect on engine vibration. Vibration from the engine operating may cause a body component or another part of the vehicle to make rumbling noise. Vibration can be caused by, but not limited to the A/C system over charged, the power steering system restricted or the incorrect fluid, or an extra load on the generator. To help identify an intermittent or an improper condition, vary the loads on the accessory drive components. The drive belt may have a rumbling condition that can not be seen or felt. Sometimes replacing the drive belt may be the only repair for the symptom. If replacing the drive belt, completing the diagnostic table, and the noise is only heard when the drive belts are installed, there might be an accessory drive component with a failure. Varying the load on the different accessory drive components may aid in identifying which component is causing the rumbling noise. Test Description The numbers below refer to the step numbers on the diagnostic table. 2. This test is to verify that the symptom is present during diagnosing. Other vehicle components may cause a similar symptom. 3. This test is to verify that one of the drive belts is causing the rumbling noise or vibration. Rumbling noise may be confused with an internal engine noise due to the similarity in the description. Remove only one drive belt at a time if the vehicle has multiple drive belts. When removing the drive belts the water pump may not be operating and the engine may overheat. Also DTCs may set when the engine is operating with the drive belts removed. 4. Inspecting the drive belts is to ensure that they are not causing the noise. Small cracks across the ribs of the drive belt will not cause the noise. Belt separation is identified by the plys of the belt separating and may be seen at the edge of the belt our felt as a lump in the belt. 5. Small amounts of pilling is normal condition and acceptable. When the pilling is severe the drive belt does not have a smooth surface for proper operation. 9. Inspecting of the fasteners can eliminate the possibility that the wrong bolt, nut, spacer, or washer was installed. 11. This step should only be performed if the water pump is driven by the drive belt. Inspect the water pump shaft for being bent. Also inspect the water pump bearings for smooth operation and excessive play. Compare the water pump with a known good water pump. 12. Accessory drive component brackets that are bent, cracked, or loose may put extra strain on that accessory component causing it to vibrate. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive Belt > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Drive Belt Chirping, Squeal, and Whine Diagnosis > Page 2229 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive Belt > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Drive Belt Chirping, Squeal, and Whine Diagnosis > Page 2230 Drive Belt: Testing and Inspection Drive Belt Falls Off and Excessive Wear Diagnosis Drive Belt Falls Off and Excessive Wear Diagnosis Diagnostic Aids If the drive belt repeatedly falls off the drive belt pulleys, this is because of pulley misalignment. An extra load that is quickly applied on released by an accessory drive component may cause the drive belt to fall off the pulleys. Verify the accessory drive components operate properly. If the drive belt is the incorrect length, the drive belt tensioner may not keep the proper tension on the drive belt. Excessive wear on a drive belt is usually caused by an incorrect installation or the wrong drive belt for the application. Minor misalignment of the drive belt pulleys will not cause excessive wear, but will probably cause the drive belt to make a noise or to fall off. Excessive misalignment of the drive belt pulleys will cause excessive wear but may also make the drive belt fall off. Test Description The numbers below refer to the step numbers on the diagnostic table. 2. This inspection is to verify the condition of the drive belt. Damage may of occurred to the drive belt when the drive belt fell off. The drive belt may of been damaged, which caused the drive belt to fall off. Inspect the belt for cuts, tears, sections of ribs missing, or damaged belt plys. 4. Misalignment of the pulleys may be caused from improper mounting of the accessory drive component, incorrect installation of the accessory drive component pulley, or the pulley bent inward or outward from a previous repair. Test for a misaligned pulley using a straight edge in the pulley grooves across two or three pulleys. If a misaligned pulley is found refer to that accessory drive component for the proper installation procedure of that pulley. 5. Inspecting the pulleys for being bent should include inspecting for a dent or other damage to the pulleys that would prevent the drive belt from not seating properly in all of the pulley grooves or on the smooth surface of a pulley when the back side of the belt is used to drive the pulley. 6. Accessory drive component brackets that are bent or cracked will let the drive belt fall off. 7. Inspecting of the fasteners can eliminate the possibility that a wrong bolt, nut , spacer, or washer was installed. Missing. loose, or the wrong fasteners may cause pulley misalignment from the bracket moving under load. Over tightening of the fasteners may cause misalignment of the accessory component bracket. 13. The inspection is to verify the drive belt is correctly installed on all of the drive belt pulleys. Wear on the drive belt may be caused by mis-positioning the drive belt by one groove on a pulley. 14. The installation of a drive belt that is two wide or two narrow will cause wear on the drive belt. The drive belt ribs should match all of the grooves on all of the pulleys. 15. This inspection is to verify the drive belt is not contacting any parts of the engine or body while the engine is operating. There should be sufficient clearance when the drive belt accessory drive components load varies. The drive belt should not come in contact with an engine or a body component when snapping the throttle. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive Belt > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Drive Belt Chirping, Squeal, and Whine Diagnosis > Page 2231 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive Belt > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 2232 Drive Belt: Service and Repair Drive Belt Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive Belt Tensioner > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Drive Belt Tensioner: Testing and Inspection Drive Belt Tensioner Diagnosis Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive Belt Tensioner > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 2236 Drive Belt Tensioner: Service and Repair Drive Belt Tensioner Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Engine Mount > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Engine Mount: Testing and Inspection Engine Mount Inspection Note: Before replacing any engine mount due to suspected fluid loss, verify that the source of the fluid is the engine mount, not the engine or accessories. 1. Install the engine support fixture. Refer to Engine Support Fixture (See: Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Engine Support Fixture). 2. Observe the engine mount while raising the engine. Raising the engine removes the weight from the engine mount and creates slight tension on the rubber. 3. Replace the engine mount if the engine mount exhibits any of the following conditions: * The hard rubber is covered with heat check cracks. * The rubber is separated from the metal plate of the engine mount. * The rubber is split through the center of the engine mount. * The engine mount itself is leaking fluid. 4. For engine mount replacement. Refer to Engine Mount Replacement - Right Side (See: Service and Repair). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Engine Mount > Component Information > Service and Repair > Engine Mount - Right Side Engine Mount: Service and Repair Engine Mount - Right Side Engine Mount Replacement - Right Side Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Engine Mount > Component Information > Service and Repair > Engine Mount - Right Side > Page 2242 Engine Mount: Service and Repair Engine Mount Bracket Replacement - Right Side Engine Mount Bracket Replacement - Right Side Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Idler Pulley > Component Information > Service and Repair Idler Pulley: Service and Repair Drive Belt Idler Pulley Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the drive belt. Refer to Drive Belt Replacement (See: Drive Belt/Service and Repair). 2. Remove the drive belt idler pulley bolt. 3. Remove the drive belt idler pulley. Installation Procedure 1. Install the drive belt idler pulley. Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener Caution). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Idler Pulley > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 2246 2. Install the drive belt idler pulley bolt and tighten to 58 Nm (43 lb ft). 3. Install the drive belt. Refer to Drive Belt Replacement (See: Drive Belt/Service and Repair). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Engine Oil Pressure > Component Information > Specifications Engine Oil Pressure: Specifications Oil Pressure - Minimum @ Idle ........................................................................................................... .......................................................... 69 kPa (10 psi) Oil Pressure - Minimum @ 2,000 RPM ....................................................................................................................................................... 138 kPa (20 psi) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Engine Oil Pressure > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2251 Engine Oil Pressure: Testing and Inspection Oil Pressure Diagnosis and Testing Special Tools * EN-47971 - Oil Pressure Gauge Adapter * CH 48027 - Pressure Gauge For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Tools and Equipment/Special Tools). 1. With the vehicle on a level surface, run the vehicle for a few minutes, allow adequate drain down time, 2-3 minutes, and measure the oil level. 2. If required, add the recommended grade engine oil and fill the crankcase until the oil level measures full on the oil level indicator. 3. Run the engine briefly, 10-15 seconds, and verify low or no oil pressure on the vehicle gauge or light. 4. Listen for a noisy valve train or a knocking noise. 5. Inspect for the following conditions: * Oil diluted by water or glycol antifreeze * Foamy oil 6. Remove the oil filter. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Engine Oil Pressure > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2252 Caution: Special new tool EN 47971 must be used. Due to the special size and thread pitch of the oil filter adapter fitting ensure the proper tool is used or component damage will result. 7. Install the EN-47971 - adapter onto the oil filter adapter. 8. Install the 1/8 NPT fitting from the CH 48027 - gauge into the port on the EN-47971 - adapter. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Engine Oil Pressure > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2253 9. Install the CH 48027 - gauge flexible hose to the EN-47971 - adapter. 10. Run the engine and measure the engine oil pressure. 11. Compare the readings to Engine Mechanical Specifications (LF1) (See: Specifications/Service Limits & General Specifications). 12. If the engine oil pressure is below specifications, inspect the engine for 1 or more of the following conditions: * Oil pump worn or dirty. Refer to Oil Pump Replacement (See: Oil Pump/Service and Repair) , Oil Pump Disassemble (See: Service and Repair/Overhaul/66. Oil Pump Disassemble) and Oil Pump Cleaning and Inspection (See: Service and Repair/Overhaul/67. Oil Pump Cleaning and Inspection). * Oil pump-to-engine block bolts loose. Refer to Oil Pump Replacement (See: Oil Pump/Service and Repair). * Oil pump screen loose, plugged, or damaged. Refer to Oil Pump Suction Pipe and Screen Assembly Replacement (See: Oil Pick Up/Strainer/Service and Repair) and Oil Pump Suction Pipe and Screen Cleaning and Inspection (See: Service and Repair/Overhaul/73. Oil Pump Suction Pipe and Screen Cleaning and Inspection). * Oil pump screen O-ring seal missing or damaged. Refer to Oil Pump Suction Pipe and Screen Assembly Replacement (See: Oil Pick Up/Strainer/Service and Repair) and Oil Pump Suction Pipe and Screen Cleaning and Inspection (See: Service and Repair/Overhaul/73. Oil Pump Suction Pipe and Screen Cleaning and Inspection). * Oil pump pressure relief valve malfunction. Refer to Oil Pump Replacement (See: Oil Pump/Service and Repair). * Engine bearing clearance excessive. Refer to Crankshaft and Bearing Cleaning and Inspection (See: Service and Repair/Overhaul/49. Crankshaft and Bearing Cleaning and Inspection) , Crankshaft and Bearing Installation (See: Service and Repair/Overhaul/89. Crankshaft and Bearing Installation) and Piston, Connecting Rod, and Bearing Installation (See: Service and Repair/Overhaul/90. Piston, Connecting Rod, and Bearing Installation). * Cracked, porous, or restricted oil galleries. * Oil gallery plugs missing or incorrectly installed. Refer to Engine Block Assemble (See: Service and Repair/Overhaul/88. Engine Block Assemble) and Cylinder Head Assemble (LF1 or LFW) (See: Service and Repair/Overhaul/61. Cylinder Head Assemble). * Valve lifters broken. Repair, as necessary. Refer to Valve Lifter Replacement - Left Side (See: Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods/Lifter / Lash Adjuster/Service and Repair/Valve Lifter Replacement - Left Side) and/or Valve Lifter Replacement - Right Side (See: Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods/Lifter / Lash Adjuster/Service and Repair/Valve Lifter Replacement - Right Side) and Valve Lifter Cleaning and Inspection (See: Service and Repair/Overhaul/63. Valve Lifter Cleaning and Inspection). Caution: This engine uses a special high performance oil filter. Use of any other filter may lead to filter failure and/or severe engine damage. 13. If the oil pressure reading on the CH 48027 - gauge , or equivalent, is within specifications, inspect for the following conditions: * Plugged or incorrect oil filter and/or malfunctioning oil bypass valve. Refer to Engine Oil and Oil Filter Replacement (LF1) (See: Engine Oil/Service and Repair). * Malfunctioning oil pressure gauge or sensor. Repair, as necessary. Refer to Engine Oil Pressure Sensor and/or Switch Replacement (LF1) ( See: Oil Pressure Sensor/Service and Repair). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Engine Oil Dip Stick - Dip Stick Tube > Component Information > Service and Repair Engine Oil Dip Stick - Dip Stick Tube: Service and Repair Oil Level Indicator Tube Replacement (LF1) Removal Procedure 1. Remove the intake manifold cover. Refer to Intake Manifold Cover Replacement (See: Intake Manifold/Service and Repair/Intake Manifold Cover Replacement) 2. Remove the oil level indicator tube bracket bolt (1). 3. Remove the oil level indicator and tube (2) by sliding the tube out from the lower crankcase hole. 4. Remove and discard the O-ring from the oil level indicator tube if damaged. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Engine Oil Dip Stick - Dip Stick Tube > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 2257 1. Install a NEW O-ring on the oil level indicator tube. 2. Install the oil level indicator and tube (2) by sliding the tube down through the lower crankcase hole. Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener Caution). 3. Install the oil level indicator tube bracket bolt (1) and tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb in). 4. Install the intake manifold cover. Refer to Intake Manifold Cover Replacement (See: Intake Manifold/Service and Repair/Intake Manifold Cover Replacement). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Engine Oil > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine - GM dexos 1 and dexos 2(R) Oil Specifications Engine Oil: Technical Service Bulletins Engine - GM dexos 1 and dexos 2(R) Oil Specifications INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 11-00-90-001 Date: March 14, 2011 Subject: Global Information for GM dexos1(TM) and GM dexos2(TM) Engine Oil Specifications for Spark Ignited and Diesel Engines, Available Licensed Brands, and Service Fill for Adding or Complete Oil Change Models: 2012 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks Excluding All Vehicles Equipped with Duramax(TM) Diesel Engines GM dexos 1(TM) Information Center Website Refer to the following General Motors website for dexos 1(TM) information about the different licensed brands that are currently available: http://www.gmdexos.com GM dexos 1(TM) Engine Oil Trademark and Icons The dexos(TM) specification and trademarks are exclusive to General Motors, LLC. Only those oils displaying the dexos‹›(TM) trademark and icon on the front label meet the demanding performance requirements and stringent quality standards set forth in the dexos‹›(TM) specification. Look on the front label for any of the logos shown above to identify an authorized, licensed dexos 1(TM) engine oil. GM dexos 1(TM) Engine Oil Specification Important General Motors dexos 1(TM) engine oil specification replaces the previous General Motors specifications GM6094M, GM4718M and GM-LL-A-025 for most GM gasoline engines. The oil specified for use in GM passenger cars and trucks, PRIOR to the 2011 model year remains acceptable for those previous vehicles. However, dexos 1(TM) is backward compatible and can be used in those older vehicles. In North America, starting with the 2011 model year, GM introduced dexos 1(TM) certified engine oil as a factory fill and service fill for gasoline engines. The reasons for the new engine oil specification are as follows: - To meet environmental goals such as increasing fuel efficiency and reducing engine emissions. - To promote long engine life. - To minimize the number of engine oil changes in order to help meet the goal of lessening the industry's overall dependence on crude oil. dexos 1(TM) is a GM-developed engine oil specification that has been designed to provide the following benefits: - Further improve fuel economy, to meet future corporate average fuel economy (CAFE) requirements and fuel economy retention by allowing the oil to maintain its fuel economy benefits throughout the life of the oil. - More robust formulations for added engine protection and aeration performance. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Engine Oil > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine - GM dexos 1 and dexos 2(R) Oil Specifications > Page 2262 - Support the GM Oil Life System, thereby minimizing the replacement of engine oil, before its life has been depleted. - Reduce the duplication of requirements for a large number of internal GM engine oil specifications. International Lubricants Standardization and Approval Committee (ILSAC) GF-5 Standard In addition to GM dexos 1(TM), a new International Lubricants Standardization and Approval Committee (ILSAC) standard called GF-5, was introduced in October 2010. - There will be a corresponding API category, called: SN Resource Conserving. The current GF-4 standard was put in place in 2004 and will become obsolete in October 2011. Similar to dexos 1(TM), the GF-5 standard will use a new fuel economy test, Sequence VID, which demands a statistically significant increase in fuel economy versus the Sequence VIB test that was used for GF-4. - It is expected that all dexos 1(TM) approved oils will be capable of meeting the GF-5 standard. However, not all GF-5 engine oils will be capable of meeting the dexos 1(TM) specification. - Like dexos(TM), the new ILSAC GF-5 standard will call for more sophisticated additives. The API will begin licensing marketers during October 2010, to produce and distribute GF-5 certified products, which are expected to include SAE 0W-20, 0W-30, 5W-20, 5W-30 and 10W-30 oils. Corporate Average Fuel Economy (CAFE) Requirements Effect on Fuel Economy Since CAFE standards were first introduced in 1974, the fuel economy of cars has more than doubled, while the fuel economy of light trucks has increased by more than 50 percent. Proposed CAFE standards call for a continuation of increased fuel economy in new cars and trucks. To meet these future requirements, all aspects of vehicle operation are being looked at more critically than ever before. New technology being introduced in GM vehicles designed to increase vehicle efficiency and fuel economy include direct injection, cam phasing, turbocharging and active fuel management (AFM). The demands of these new technologies on engine oil also are taken into consideration when determining new oil specifications. AFM for example can help to achieve improved fuel economy. However alternately deactivating and activating the cylinders by not allowing the intake and exhaust valves to open contributes to additional stress on the engine oil. Another industry trend for meeting tough fuel economy mandates has been a shift toward lower viscosity oils. dexos 1(TM) will eventually be offered in several viscosity grades in accordance with engine needs: SAE 0W-20, 5W-20, 0W-30 and 5W-30. Using the right viscosity grade oil is critical for proper engine performance. Always refer to the Maintenance section of a vehicle Owner Manual for the proper viscosity grade for the engine being serviced. GM Oil Life System in Conjunction With dexos (TM) Supports Extended Oil Change Intervals To help conserve oil while maintaining engine protection, many GM vehicles are equipped with the GM Oil Life System. This system can provide oil change intervals that exceed the traditional 3,000 mile (4,830 km) recommendation. The dexos (TM) specification, with its requirements for improved oil robustness, compliments the GM Oil Life System by supporting extended oil change intervals over the lifetime of a vehicle. If all GM customers with GM Oil Life System equipped vehicles would use the system as intended, GM estimates that more than 100 million gallons of oil could be saved annually. GM dexos 2(TM) Information Center Website Refer to the following General Motors website for dexos 2(TM) information about the different licensed brands that are currently available: http://www.gmdexos.com GM dexos 2(TM) Engine Oil Trademark and Icons Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Engine Oil > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine - GM dexos 1 and dexos 2(R) Oil Specifications > Page 2263 The dexos (TM) specification and trademarks are exclusive to General Motors, LLC. Only those oils displaying the dexos (TM) trademark and icon on the front label meet the demanding performance requirements and stringent quality standards set forth in the dexos (TM)specification. Look on the front label for any of the logos shown above to identify an authorized, licensed dexos 2(TM) engine oil. GM dexos 2(TM) Engine Oil Specification - dexos 2(TM) is approved and recommended by GM for use in Europe starting in model year 2010 vehicles, regardless of where the vehicle was manufactured. - dexos 2(TM) is the recommended service fill oil for European gasoline engines. Important The Duramax(TM) diesel engine is the exception and requires lubricants meeting specification CJ-4. - dexos 2(TM) is the recommended service fill oil for European light-duty diesel engines and replaces GM-LL-B-025 and GM-LL-A-025. - dexos 2(TM) protects diesel engines from harmful soot deposits and is designed with limits on certain chemical components to prolong catalyst life and protect expensive emission reduction systems. It is a robust oil, resisting degradation between oil changes and maintaining optimum performance longer. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Engine Oil > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications Engine Oil: Capacity Specifications Engine Oil with Filter ............................................................................................................................ ............................................... 6.0 quarts (5.7 liters) NOTE: All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the approximate level. Recheck fluid level after filling. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Engine Oil > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 2266 Engine Oil: Fluid Type Specifications ENGINE OIL TYPE Look for three things: 1. Your vehicle's engine requires oil meeting GM Standard GM6094M. 2. Oils meeting these requirements should also have the starburst symbol on the container. This symbol indicates that the oil has been certified by the American Petroleum Institute (API). You should look for this information on the oil container 3. All temperatures above -20°F (-29°C) SAE 5W-30 is best for your vehicle. These numbers on an oil container show its viscosity, or thickness. Do not use other viscosity oils such as SAE 10W-40, SAE 20W-50, or any other viscosity grade not recommended. NOTICE: Use only engine oil identified as meeting GM Standard GM6094M and showing the American Petroleum Institute Certified For Gasoline Engines starburst symbol. Failure to use the recommended oil can result in engine damage not covered by your warranty. GM Goodwrench oil meets all the requirements for your vehicle. If you are in an area of extreme cold, where the temperature falls below -20°F (-29°C), it is recommended that you use either an SAE 5W-30 synthetic oil or an SAE 0W-30 oil. Both will provide easier cold starting and better protection for your engine at extremely low temperatures. ENGINE OIL ADDITIVES / ENGINE OIL FLUSHES Do not add anything to your oil. The recommended oils with the starburst symbol that meet GM Standard GM6094M are all you will need for good performance and engine protection. Engine oil system flushes are not recommended and could cause engine damage not covered by the vehicle warranty. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Engine Oil > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2267 Engine Oil: Service and Repair Engine Oil and Oil Filter Replacement (LF1) Removal Procedure 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle (See: Maintenance/Vehicle Lifting/Service and Repair). 2. Place a drain pan under the oil pan drain plug. 3. Remove the oil pan drain plug. Allow the oil to drain completely. Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener Caution). 4. Install the oil pan drain plug and tighten to 20 Nm (15 lb ft). Warning: Refer to Hot Exhaust System Warning (See: Service Precautions/Technician Safety Information/Hot Exhaust System Warning). 5. Place the drain pan under the oil filter (1). 6. Remove the oil filter. Allow the oil to drain completely. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Engine Oil > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2268 1. Lubricate the NEW oil filter gasket with clean engine oil. 2. Tighten the oil filter (1) to 30 Nm (22 lb ft). 3. Lower the vehicle. 4. Refill the engine oil. Refer to Approximate Fluid Capacities (See: Maintenance/Specifications). 5. Start the engine and inspect for leaks. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Filter, Engine > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine - Engine Noise Or Damage After Oil Filter Replace Oil Filter: Technical Service Bulletins Engine - Engine Noise Or Damage After Oil Filter Replace INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 10-06-01-003A Date: June 30, 2010 Subject: Diagnostic Information on Internal Engine Noise or Damage After Oil Filter Replacement Models: 2004-2006 Buick Rendezvous 2005-2008 Buick LaCrosse, Allure (Canada Only) 2008-2010 Buick Enclave 2010 Buick LaCrosse 2010 Cadillac SRX 2008-2010 Chevrolet Equinox, Malibu 2009-2010 Chevrolet Traverse 2007-2010 GMC Acadia 2010 GMC Terrain 2007-2009 Pontiac G6 2008-2009 Pontiac Torrent 2007-2009 Saturn AURA 2007-2010 Saturn OUTLOOK 2008-2009 Saturn VUE Equipped with 3.0L (RPO LF1) or 3.6L (RPO LLT or LY7) 6 Cylinder Engine Attention: Oil filter misapplication may cause abnormal engine noise or internal damage. Always utilize the most recent parts information to ensure the correct part number filter is installed when replacing oil filters. Do not rely on physical dimensions alone. Counterfeit copies of name brand parts have been discovered in some aftermarket parts systems. Always ensure the parts you install are from a trusted source. Improper oil filter installation may result in catastrophic engine damage. Some aftermarket oil filters share the outside dimension of Factory Equipment and AC Delco service replacement filters. Though they look the same, these filters do not meet GM specification and function requirements. In recent warranty engine teardown reviews, it has been found that aftermarket filters have caused internal engine failures and/or noise due to the lack of lubrication. Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the models and add additional pictures to help aid diagnosis. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 10-06-01-003 (Section 06 Engine/Propulsion). Important Engine damage that is the result of an incorrect or improperly installed engine oil filter is not a warrantable claim. The best way to avoid oil filter quality concerns is to purchase ACDelco(R) oil filters directly from General Motors Customer Care and Aftersales (GMCC&A;). This condition may be caused by aftermarket oil filter internal failure. Filter debris can be transferred throughout the engine this way. Important Aftermarket oil filter failure is not covered by GM Powertrain warranty. The following information is being communicated to aid the technician in proper diagnostics. Engine Ticking Noise in Valve Train First, the location of the tick must be determined (exhaust or intake, front or rear engine bank). Using a suitable listening device such as chassis ears and/or a stethoscope, determine the location of the ticking noise. 1. Does the noise only come from one bank location (intake or exhaust lifters area)? 2. If the noise is in the one bank location, then the oil galley lubrication hole may be obstructed with foreign material. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Filter, Engine > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine - Engine Noise Or Damage After Oil Filter Replace > Page 2273 3. When the location is determined, the technician should remove the valve cover and inspect the lifters for aeration. Remove the stationary hydraulic lifter assemblies (SHLA) for the suspect location / cylinder. For Example; Bank 2 Cylinder # 1 A & B exhaust lifters are making noise. Inspect the lifters for the presence of oil. If oil is present, SHLA will be pumped and hard to compress. If aeration is present, the lifter will be spongy. Test by trying to compress with your fingers or a suitable tool. 4. Spongy SHLA (lifters) mean aeration and obstruction to flow oil to SHLA is present. Reference the oil lubrication description document in SI for details of system operation. 5. (A) Bank 1 (2, 4, 6) Reference 1-Intake oil galley for lifters, Reference 2-Camshaft Actuator (Phaser) Oil Galley, Reference 3- Exhaust Oil Galley for Lifters. (B) Bank 2 ( 1, 3, 5) Reference 1-Intake oil galley for lifters, Reference 2-Camshaft Actuator (Phaser) Oil Galley, Reference 3- Exhaust Oil Galley for Lifters. An obstruction to oil flow is present at the engine block deck passage under the head gasket for lifter oil pressure. The passage is the location in the front engine block deck. The oiling passage can be identified as a hole with eye brows cut to each side. See figures above. 6. One example of obstruction is shown above. Filter media material plugging the 2 mm lubrication passage hole creating aeration in the exhaust lifter oil galley. The obstruction can be filter media material or an orange silicone rubber material. The above example is filter media. 7. Engine oil passages will have to be cleaned of aftermarket filter media debris or orange silicone rubber. Engine Knocking / Piston Skirt Knock-Topic 2 1. Follow the procedures in SI for the source of a knock condition. Additional diagnosis is required by removal of the oil pan for main and rod bearing inspection. Further inspection for the source of bearing failure is required. Recent failed engine analysis reviews reveal the bearings are Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Filter, Engine > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine - Engine Noise Or Damage After Oil Filter Replace > Page 2274 not removed and oil passages are not being checked in many cases. Technicians need to inspect for oil galley obtrusion, which is a source for oil starvation and bearing life in some cases. 2. One source for oil starvation is due to aftermarket oil filter anti-drain back valves deterioration. Orange silicone rubber material has been found in many cases of oil starvation underneath the main and rod bearings, with material contained in the oil lubrication galley in both blocks and crankshaft lubrication holes. The orange silicone rubber is from aftermarket oil filters anti drain back valve assembly, which is located under the filter media and above the screw on the base. Orange silicone rubber is not used in the assembly of the High Feature V6 as well as most GM engine applications. Examples are below. Rod bearing welded to crankshaft (1). Orange silicone rubber obstructing the oil flow to the main and rod bearings in the engine block webbing (1). Silicone rubber found in main and rod bearing and in the piston skirt squirters (sprayers) (1). Sprayer is removed to show obstruction material. 3. Such related failures as shown in the examples above are not considered to be warranty by General Motors. Example of Aftermarket Filter Failures First do a general inspection for possible source. With the metal can cut off, you can see detail of media failure. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Filter, Engine > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine - Engine Noise Or Damage After Oil Filter Replace > Page 2275 This is an oil filter that is teardown. The left (1) shows a part removed from a failed engine oil main bearing gallery. The right one (2) is a new seal removed from a new aftermarket filter. This is what a drainback valve looks like prior to failure. Conclusion Repair as necessary to remove filter media/debris from oil galleys and piston squirter sprayer in the cylinder head. Repair and/or replace damaged engine components as necessary. GM Powertrain engines require oil filters that can meet the challenges of today oil filtration systems, engine oil pressure requirements (both hot and cold) and Oil Life Monitoring systems. Improper oil filter usage may result in catastrophic engine damage or failure that is not covered by the GM Powertrain warranty. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Filter, Engine > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine - Engine Noise Or Damage After Oil Filter Replace > Page 2276 Oil Filter: Technical Service Bulletins Engine - Noise/Damage Oil Filter Application Importance INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 07-06-01-016B Date: July 27, 2009 Subject: Information on Internal Engine Noise or Damage After Oil Filter Replacement Models: 2010 and Prior Passenger Cars and Trucks (Including Saturn) 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being updated to add model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 07-06-01-016A (Section 06 - Engine/Propulsion System). Important Engine damage that is the result of an incorrect or improperly installed engine oil filter is not a warrantable claim. The best way to avoid oil filter quality concerns is to purchase ACDelco(R) oil filters directly from GMSPO. Oil filter misapplication may cause abnormal engine noise or internal damage. Always utilize the most recent parts information to ensure the correct part number filter is installed when replacing oil filters. Do not rely on physical dimensions alone. Counterfeit copies of name brand parts have been discovered in some aftermarket parts systems. Always ensure the parts you install are from a trusted source. Improper oil filter installation may result in catastrophic engine damage. Refer to the appropriate Service Information (SI) installation instructions when replacing any oil filter and pay particular attention to procedures for proper cartridge filter element alignment. If the diagnostics in SI (Engine Mechanical) lead to the oil filter as the cause of the internal engine noise or damage, dealers should submit a field product report. Refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 02-00-89-002I (Information for Dealers on How to Submit a Field Product Report). Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Filter, Engine > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2277 Oil Filter: Service and Repair Engine Oil and Oil Filter Replacement (LF1) Removal Procedure 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle (See: Maintenance/Vehicle Lifting/Service and Repair). 2. Place a drain pan under the oil pan drain plug. 3. Remove the oil pan drain plug. Allow the oil to drain completely. Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener Caution). 4. Install the oil pan drain plug and tighten to 20 Nm (15 lb ft). Warning: Refer to Hot Exhaust System Warning (See: Service Precautions/Technician Safety Information/Hot Exhaust System Warning). 5. Place the drain pan under the oil filter (1). 6. Remove the oil filter. Allow the oil to drain completely. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Filter, Engine > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2278 1. Lubricate the NEW oil filter gasket with clean engine oil. 2. Tighten the oil filter (1) to 30 Nm (22 lb ft). 3. Lower the vehicle. 4. Refill the engine oil. Refer to Approximate Fluid Capacities (See: Maintenance/Specifications). 5. Start the engine and inspect for leaks. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Filter Adapter > Component Information > Service and Repair Oil Filter Adapter: Service and Repair Oil Filter Adapter Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pan, Engine > Component Information > Specifications Oil Pan: Specifications Oil pan 8 mm bolts (1-11) ................................................................................................................................ ......................................................... 23 Nm (17 lb ft) 6 mm bolts (12, 13) .......................................... ........................................................................................................................................... 10 Nm (89 lb in) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pan, Engine > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2285 Oil Pan: Service and Repair Oil Pan Replacement Special Tools EN-46109 - Guide Pin Set For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Tools and Equipment/Special Tools). Removal Procedure 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle (See: Maintenance/Vehicle Lifting/Service and Repair). 2. Drain the engine oil and remove the oil filter. Refer to Engine Oil and Oil Filter Replacement (LF1) (See: Engine Oil/Service and Repair). 3. Remove the catalytic converter. Refer to Catalytic Converter Replacement - Left Side (LF1) (See: Exhaust System/Catalytic Converter/Service and Repair/Catalytic Converter Replacement - Left Side). 4. Remove the air conditioning (A/C) compressor bolts and reposition. Refer to Air Conditioning Compressor Replacement (LAF) (See: Heating and Air Conditioning/Compressor HVAC/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement)Air Conditioning Compressor Replacement (LF1) (See: Heating and Air Conditioning/Compressor HVAC/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement). 5. Remove the front cover. Refer to Engine Front Cover Replacement (See: Timing Components/Timing Cover/Service and Repair). 6. Remove the oil pan to transmission bolts. 7. Remove the oil pan bolts. 8. Remove the oil pan. 9. Clean the oil pan and the engine block gasket surface. Refer to Oil Pan Cleaning and Inspection (See: Service and Repair/Overhaul/72. Oil Pan Cleaning and Inspection). Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pan, Engine > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2286 1. Install the 8 mm (0.315 in) guides from the EN-46109 - set into the center oil pan rail bolt hole on each side of the engine block. 2. Place a 3 mm (0.118 in) bead (1) of RTV sealant , on the block pan rail and the crankshaft rear oil seal housing. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pan, Engine > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2287 3. Position the oil pan onto the block. 4. Remove the EN-46109 - set 8 mm (0.315 in) guides from the engine block. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pan, Engine > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2288 5. Loosely install the oil pan bolts. Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener Caution). 6. Tighten the oil pan bolts in sequence. * The 8 mm bolts (1-11) to 23 Nm (17 lb ft). * The 6 mm bolts (12, 13) to 10 Nm (89 lb in). 7. Install engine front cover. Refer to Engine Front Cover Replacement (See: Timing Components/Timing Cover/Service and Repair). 8. Install the air conditioning (A/C) compressor. Refer to Air Conditioning Compressor Replacement (LAF) (See: Heating and Air Conditioning/Compressor HVAC/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement)Air Conditioning Compressor Replacement (LF1) (See: Heating and Air Conditioning/Compressor HVAC/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement). 9. Install the catalytic converter. Refer to Catalytic Converter Replacement - Left Side (LF1) (See: Exhaust System/Catalytic Converter/Service and Repair/Catalytic Converter Replacement - Left Side). 10. Lower the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle (See: Maintenance/Vehicle Lifting/Service and Repair). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pan, Engine > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2289 11. Refill the engine oil. Refer to Engine Oil and Oil Filter Replacement (LF1) (See: Engine Oil/Service and Repair). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Disassembled Views Oil Pressure Sensor: Locations Disassembled Views Disassembled Views Oil Filter Adapter 440 - Oil Filter Adapter 441 - Oil Filter Adapter Gasket 442 - Oil Filter Adapter Bolt 443 - Oil Filter Adapter Bolt - Long 445 - Oil Filter Fitting 449 - Oil Filter 728 - Engine Oil Pressure Sensor 729 Engine Oil Pressure Sensor O-ring Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Disassembled Views > Page 2294 Oil Pressure Sensor: Locations Powertrain Component Views Powertrain Component Views Front Engine Components (LAF 1 of 2) 1 - Q38 Throttle Body 2 - G18 High Pressure Fuel Pump 3 - B23F Camshaft Position Sensor Intake 4 - B37 Engine Oil Pressure Switch 5 - B68 Knock Sensor 6 - B26 Crankshaft Position Sensor 7 - M64 Starter Motor 8 - Q2 A/C Compressor Clutch 9 - G13 Generator Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2295 Oil Pressure Sensor: Diagrams B37 Engine Oil Pressure Switch (LAF) B37 Engine Oil Pressure Switch (LF1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2296 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2297 Oil Pressure Sensor: Service and Repair Engine Oil Pressure Sensor and/or Switch Replacement (LF1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pick Up/Strainer > Component Information > Service and Repair Oil Pick Up/Strainer: Service and Repair Oil Pump Suction Pipe and Screen Assembly Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the oil pan. Refer to Oil Pan Replacement (See: Oil Pan/Service and Repair). 2. Remove the oil pan scraper bolts. 3. Remove the oil pan scraper. 4. Remove the oil suction pipe bolts. 5. Remove the oil suction pipe. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pick Up/Strainer > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 2301 6. Remove the oil suction tube seal from the oil suction tube. Discard the oil suction tube seal. Installation Procedure 1. Install a NEW oil suction tube seal onto the oil suction tube. DO NOT reuse the old oil suction tube seal. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pick Up/Strainer > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 2302 2. Install the oil suction pipe. Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener Caution). 3. Install the oil suction pipe bolts and tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb in). 4. Install the oil pan scraper. 5. Install the oil pan scraper bolts and tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb in). 6. Install the oil pan. Refer to Oil Pan Replacement (See: Oil Pan/Service and Repair). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pump, Engine > Engine Oil Pressure > Component Information > Specifications Engine Oil Pressure: Specifications Oil Pressure - Minimum @ Idle ........................................................................................................... .......................................................... 69 kPa (10 psi) Oil Pressure - Minimum @ 2,000 RPM ....................................................................................................................................................... 138 kPa (20 psi) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pump, Engine > Engine Oil Pressure > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2307 Engine Oil Pressure: Testing and Inspection Oil Pressure Diagnosis and Testing Special Tools * EN-47971 - Oil Pressure Gauge Adapter * CH 48027 - Pressure Gauge For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Tools and Equipment/Special Tools). 1. With the vehicle on a level surface, run the vehicle for a few minutes, allow adequate drain down time, 2-3 minutes, and measure the oil level. 2. If required, add the recommended grade engine oil and fill the crankcase until the oil level measures full on the oil level indicator. 3. Run the engine briefly, 10-15 seconds, and verify low or no oil pressure on the vehicle gauge or light. 4. Listen for a noisy valve train or a knocking noise. 5. Inspect for the following conditions: * Oil diluted by water or glycol antifreeze * Foamy oil 6. Remove the oil filter. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pump, Engine > Engine Oil Pressure > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2308 Caution: Special new tool EN 47971 must be used. Due to the special size and thread pitch of the oil filter adapter fitting ensure the proper tool is used or component damage will result. 7. Install the EN-47971 - adapter onto the oil filter adapter. 8. Install the 1/8 NPT fitting from the CH 48027 - gauge into the port on the EN-47971 - adapter. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pump, Engine > Engine Oil Pressure > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2309 9. Install the CH 48027 - gauge flexible hose to the EN-47971 - adapter. 10. Run the engine and measure the engine oil pressure. 11. Compare the readings to Engine Mechanical Specifications (LF1) (See: Specifications/Service Limits & General Specifications). 12. If the engine oil pressure is below specifications, inspect the engine for 1 or more of the following conditions: * Oil pump worn or dirty. Refer to Oil Pump Replacement (See: Service and Repair) , Oil Pump Disassemble (See: Service and Repair/Overhaul/66. Oil Pump Disassemble) and Oil Pump Cleaning and Inspection (See: Service and Repair/Overhaul/67. Oil Pump Cleaning and Inspection). * Oil pump-to-engine block bolts loose. Refer to Oil Pump Replacement (See: Service and Repair). * Oil pump screen loose, plugged, or damaged. Refer to Oil Pump Suction Pipe and Screen Assembly Replacement (See: Oil Pick Up/Strainer/Service and Repair) and Oil Pump Suction Pipe and Screen Cleaning and Inspection (See: Service and Repair/Overhaul/73. Oil Pump Suction Pipe and Screen Cleaning and Inspection). * Oil pump screen O-ring seal missing or damaged. Refer to Oil Pump Suction Pipe and Screen Assembly Replacement (See: Oil Pick Up/Strainer/Service and Repair) and Oil Pump Suction Pipe and Screen Cleaning and Inspection (See: Service and Repair/Overhaul/73. Oil Pump Suction Pipe and Screen Cleaning and Inspection). * Oil pump pressure relief valve malfunction. Refer to Oil Pump Replacement (See: Service and Repair). * Engine bearing clearance excessive. Refer to Crankshaft and Bearing Cleaning and Inspection (See: Service and Repair/Overhaul/49. Crankshaft and Bearing Cleaning and Inspection) , Crankshaft and Bearing Installation (See: Service and Repair/Overhaul/89. Crankshaft and Bearing Installation) and Piston, Connecting Rod, and Bearing Installation (See: Service and Repair/Overhaul/90. Piston, Connecting Rod, and Bearing Installation). * Cracked, porous, or restricted oil galleries. * Oil gallery plugs missing or incorrectly installed. Refer to Engine Block Assemble (See: Service and Repair/Overhaul/88. Engine Block Assemble) and Cylinder Head Assemble (LF1 or LFW) (See: Service and Repair/Overhaul/61. Cylinder Head Assemble). * Valve lifters broken. Repair, as necessary. Refer to Valve Lifter Replacement - Left Side (See: Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods/Lifter / Lash Adjuster/Service and Repair/Valve Lifter Replacement - Left Side) and/or Valve Lifter Replacement - Right Side (See: Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods/Lifter / Lash Adjuster/Service and Repair/Valve Lifter Replacement - Right Side) and Valve Lifter Cleaning and Inspection (See: Service and Repair/Overhaul/63. Valve Lifter Cleaning and Inspection). Caution: This engine uses a special high performance oil filter. Use of any other filter may lead to filter failure and/or severe engine damage. 13. If the oil pressure reading on the CH 48027 - gauge , or equivalent, is within specifications, inspect for the following conditions: * Plugged or incorrect oil filter and/or malfunctioning oil bypass valve. Refer to Engine Oil and Oil Filter Replacement (LF1) (See: Engine Oil/Service and Repair). * Malfunctioning oil pressure gauge or sensor. Repair, as necessary. Refer to Engine Oil Pressure Sensor and/or Switch Replacement (LF1) ( See: Oil Pressure Sensor/Service and Repair). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Intake Manifold > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine - Intake Manifold Inspection/Replacement Intake Manifold: Technical Service Bulletins Engine - Intake Manifold Inspection/Replacement INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 00-06-01-026C Date: February 03, 2010 Subject: Intake Manifold Inspection/Replacement After Severe Internal Engine Damage Models: 2010 and Prior Passenger Cars and Trucks (Including Saturn) 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to include additional model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 00-06-01-026B (Section 06 - Engine). When replacing an engine due to internal damage, extreme care should be taken when transferring the intake manifold to the new Goodwrench service engine long block. Internal damage may result in the potential discharge of internal engine component debris in the intake manifold via broken pistons and/or bent, broken, or missing intake valves. After removing the intake manifold from the engine, the technician should carefully inspect all of the cylinder head intake ports to see if the valve heads are still present and not bent. Usually when the valve heads are missing or sufficiently bent, internal engine component debris will be present to varying degrees in the intake port of the cylinder head. If this debris is present in any of the cylinder head intake ports, the intake manifold should be replaced. This replacement is required due to the complex inlet runner and plenum configuration of most of the intake manifolds, making thorough and complete component cleaning difficult and nearly impossible to verify complete removal of debris. Re-installation of an intake manifold removed from an engine with deposits of internal engine component debris may result in the ingestion of any remaining debris into the new Goodwrench service engine. This may cause damage or potential failure of the new service engine. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Intake Manifold > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2314 Intake Manifold: Specifications Intake manifold First pass ............................................................................................................................................. ......................................................... 23 Nm (17 lb ft) Second pass .................................................... .............................................................................................................................................. 23 Nm (17 lb ft) Throttle body ........................................................................................................................................ ....................................................... 10 Nm (89 in lb) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Intake Manifold > Component Information > Service and Repair > Intake Manifold Replacement Intake Manifold: Service and Repair Intake Manifold Replacement Intake Manifold Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the power steering fluid reservoir upper bracket only. 2. Remove the power brake booster vacuum check valve and hose. Refer to Power Brake Booster Vacuum Check Valve and Hose Replacement (2.4L) (See: Brakes and Traction Control/Power Brake Assist/Vacuum Pump/Service and Repair)Power Brake Booster Vacuum Check Valve and Hose Replacement (3.0L) (See: Brakes and Traction Control/Power Brake Assist/Vacuum Pump/Service and Repair). 3. Remove the coolant air bleed pipe. Refer to Engine Coolant Air Bleed Pipe Replacement (LF1) (See: Cooling System/Coolant Line/Hose/Service and Repair). 4. Remove the intake manifold cover. Refer to Intake Manifold Cover Replacement (See: Intake Manifold Cover Replacement). 5. Disconnect and remove the positive crankcase ventilation (PCV) tube (1) from the intake manifold and right camshaft cover. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Intake Manifold > Component Information > Service and Repair > Intake Manifold Replacement > Page 2317 6. Remove the evaporative emission (EVAP) hose from the intake manifold and EVAP solenoid. 7. Remove the fuel pipe shield. Refer to Fuel Pipe Shield Replacement (LF1) (See: Powertrain Management/Fuel Delivery and Air Induction/Fuel Supply Line/Service and Repair/Fuel Pipe Shield Replacement). 8. Unclip wire harnesses as necessary. 9. Remove the intake manifold bolts (1). 10. Remove the intake manifold assembly (2). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Intake Manifold > Component Information > Service and Repair > Intake Manifold Replacement > Page 2318 11. Remove and discard the intake manifold gasket (1). 12. To clean the intake manifold, refer to Intake Manifold Cleaning and Inspection (LF1 or LFW) (See: Service and Repair/Overhaul/82. Intake Manifold Cleaning and Inspection). 13. To disassemble the intake manifold, refer to Intake Manifold Disassemble (LF1 or LFW) (See: Service and Repair/Overhaul/81. Intake Manifold Disassemble). Installation Procedure 1. Assemble the intake manifold if needed. Refer to Intake Manifold Assemble (LF1 or LFW) (See: Service and Repair/Overhaul/83. Intake Manifold Assemble). 2. Install the NEW intake manifold gasket (1). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Intake Manifold > Component Information > Service and Repair > Intake Manifold Replacement > Page 2319 3. Install the intake manifold assembly (2). Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener Caution). 4. Install the intake manifold bolts (1). 5. Tighten the intake manifold bolts in the sequence shown. 6. Tighten the intake manifold bolts in sequence to 23 Nm (17 lb ft). 7. Tighten the intake manifold bolts a second pass in sequence to 23 Nm (17 lb ft). 8. Remove the fuel pipe shield. Refer to Fuel Pipe Shield Replacement (LF1) (See: Powertrain Management/Fuel Delivery and Air Induction/Fuel Supply Line/Service and Repair/Fuel Pipe Shield Replacement). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Intake Manifold > Component Information > Service and Repair > Intake Manifold Replacement > Page 2320 9. Connect the EVAP hose to the upper intake manifold and EVAP solenoid. 10. Connect the PCV tube assembly (1) to the upper intake manifold and the right camshaft cover. 11. Install coolant hose. 12. Install intake manifold cover. Refer to Intake Manifold Cover Replacement (See: Intake Manifold Cover Replacement). 13. Install the coolant air bleed pipe. Refer to Engine Coolant Air Bleed Pipe Replacement (LF1) (See: Cooling System/Coolant Line/Hose/Service and Repair). 14. Install the power steering fluid reservoir upper bracket. 15. Install the power brake booster vacuum check valve and hose. Refer to Power Brake Booster Vacuum Check Valve and Hose Replacement (2.4L) (See: Brakes and Traction Control/Power Brake Assist/Vacuum Pump/Service and Repair)Power Brake Booster Vacuum Check Valve and Hose Replacement (3.0L) (See: Brakes and Traction Control/Power Brake Assist/Vacuum Pump/Service and Repair). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Intake Manifold > Component Information > Service and Repair > Intake Manifold Replacement > Page 2321 Intake Manifold: Service and Repair Intake Manifold Cover Replacement Intake Manifold Cover Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Crankshaft Main Bearing Seal > Component Information > Service and Repair Crankshaft Main Bearing Seal: Service and Repair Crankshaft Rear Oil Seal and Housing Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the engine flywheel. Refer to Engine Flywheel Replacement (See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Flex Plate/Service and Repair). 2. Remove the oil pan. Refer to Oil Pan Replacement (See: Engine Lubrication/Oil Pan/Service and Repair). 3. Remove the crankshaft rear oil seal and housing. Refer to Crankshaft Rear Oil Seal and Housing Removal (See: Service and Repair/Overhaul/44. Crankshaft Rear Oil Seal and Housing Removal). Installation Procedure 1. Install the crankshaft rear oil seal and housing. Refer to Crankshaft Rear Oil Seal and Housing Installation (See: Service and Repair/Overhaul/91. Crankshaft Rear Oil Seal and Housing Installation). 2. Install the oil pan. Refer to Oil Pan Replacement (See: Engine Lubrication/Oil Pan/Service and Repair). 3. Install the engine flywheel. Refer to Engine Flywheel Replacement (See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Flex Plate/Service and Repair). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Front Crankshaft Seal > Component Information > Service and Repair Front Crankshaft Seal: Service and Repair Crankshaft Front Oil Seal Replacement Special Tools EN-29184 - Oil Seal Installer For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Tools and Equipment/Special Tools). Removal Procedure 1. Remove the crankshaft balancer. Refer to Crankshaft Balancer Replacement (See: Cylinder Block Assembly/Harmonic Balancer - Crankshaft Pulley/Service and Repair). 2. Use a flat-bladed tool in order to remove the crankshaft oil seal. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Front Crankshaft Seal > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 2329 Note: Do not lubricate the crankshaft front oil seal or the crankshaft balancer sealing surfaces. 1. Use the EN-29184 - installer or equivalent to install the crankshaft front oil seal. 2. Install the crankshaft balancer. Refer to Crankshaft Balancer Replacement (See: Cylinder Block Assembly/Harmonic Balancer - Crankshaft Pulley/Service and Repair). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Valve Guide Seal > Component Information > Service and Repair > Valve Stem Oil Seal and Valve Spring Replacement - Left Side Valve Guide Seal: Service and Repair Valve Stem Oil Seal and Valve Spring Replacement - Left Side Valve Stem Oil Seal and Valve Spring Replacement - Left Side Special Tools * EN-39313 - Spark Plug Port Adapter * EN-46106 - Flywheel Holding Tool * EN-46110 - On-Vehicle Valve Spring Compressor * EN-46116 - Valve Stem Seal Remover/Installer For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Tools and Equipment/Special Tools). Removal Procedure 1. Remove the rocker arms. Refer to Valve Rocker Arm Replacement - Left Side (See: Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods/Rocker Arm Assembly/Service and Repair/Valve Rocker Arm Replacement - Left Side). 2. Remove the starter motor. Refer to Starter Replacement (LAF) (See: Starting and Charging/Starting System/Starter Motor/Service and Repair )Starter Replacement (LF1) (See: Starting and Charging/Starting System/Starter Motor/Service and Repair). Note: If the EN-46106 - tool is not installed, the crankshaft may rotate. If the crankshaft rotates, disassembly and reassembly of the entire camshaft timing system may be required. 3. Install the EN-46106 - tool in order to prevent crankshaft rotation. 4. Remove the spark plug from the applicable cylinder. Refer to Spark Plug Replacement (See: Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks/Spark Plug/Service and Repair). 5. Install the EN-39313 - adapter to the applicable cylinder. 6. Connect the EN-39313 - adapter to a compressed air source. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Valve Guide Seal > Component Information > Service and Repair > Valve Stem Oil Seal and Valve Spring Replacement - Left Side > Page 2334 7. Install the EN-46110 - compressor above the applicable cylinder as shown. 8. Tighten the EN-46110 - compressor nut (2). 9. Remove the valve keepers. 10. Loosen the EN-46110 - compressor nut. 11. Remove the valve spring retainer. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Valve Guide Seal > Component Information > Service and Repair > Valve Stem Oil Seal and Valve Spring Replacement - Left Side > Page 2335 12. Remove the valve spring. 13. Use the EN-46116 - remover/installer (1) in order to remove the valve stem seal (2). Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Valve Guide Seal > Component Information > Service and Repair > Valve Stem Oil Seal and Valve Spring Replacement - Left Side > Page 2336 1. Use the EN-46116 - remover/installer (1) in order to install the valve stem seal (2). 2. Install the valve spring. 3. Install the valve spring retainer. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Valve Guide Seal > Component Information > Service and Repair > Valve Stem Oil Seal and Valve Spring Replacement - Left Side > Page 2337 4. Install the EN-46110 - compressor above the applicable valve spring as shown. Tighten the EN-46110 - compressor nut (2). 5. Install the valve spring keepers. 6. Remove the EN-46110 - compressor. 7. Disconnect the EN-39313 - adapter from the compressed air source. 8. Remove the EN-39313 - adapter. 9. Install the spark plugs. Refer to Spark Plug Replacement (See: Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks/Spark Plug/Service and Repair). 10. Install the rocker arms. Refer to Valve Rocker Arm Replacement - Left Side (See: Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods/Rocker Arm Assembly/Service and Repair/Valve Rocker Arm Replacement - Left Side). 11. Remove the EN-46106 - tool in order to prevent crankshaft rotation. 12. Install the starter motor. Refer to Starter Replacement (LAF) (See: Starting and Charging/Starting System/Starter Motor/Service and Repair )Starter Replacement (LF1) (See: Starting and Charging/Starting System/Starter Motor/Service and Repair). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Valve Guide Seal > Component Information > Service and Repair > Valve Stem Oil Seal and Valve Spring Replacement - Left Side > Page 2338 Valve Guide Seal: Service and Repair Valve Stem Oil Seal and Valve Spring Replacement - Right Side Valve Stem Oil Seal and Valve Spring Replacement - Right Side Special Tools * EN-39313 - Spark Plug Port Adapter * EN-46106 - Flywheel Holding Tool * EN-46110 - On-Vehicle Valve Spring Compressor * EN-46116 - Valve Stem Seal Remover/Installer For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Tools and Equipment/Special Tools). Removal Procedure 1. Remove the rocker arms. Refer to Valve Rocker Arm Replacement - Right Side (See: Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods/Rocker Arm Assembly/Service and Repair/Valve Rocker Arm Replacement - Right Side). 2. Remove the starter motor. Refer to Starter Replacement (LAF) (See: Starting and Charging/Starting System/Starter Motor/Service and Repair )Starter Replacement (LF1) (See: Starting and Charging/Starting System/Starter Motor/Service and Repair). Note: If the EN-46106 - tool is not installed, the crankshaft may rotate. If the crankshaft rotates, disassembly and reassembly of the entire camshaft timing system may be required. 3. Install the EN-46106 - tool in order to prevent crankshaft rotation. 4. Remove the spark plug from the applicable cylinder. Refer to Spark Plug Replacement (See: Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks/Spark Plug/Service and Repair). 5. Install the EN-39313 - adapter to the applicable cylinder. 6. Connect the EN-39313 - adapter to a compressed air source. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Valve Guide Seal > Component Information > Service and Repair > Valve Stem Oil Seal and Valve Spring Replacement - Left Side > Page 2339 7. Install the EN-46110 - compressor above the applicable cylinder as shown. 8. Tighten the EN-46110 - compressor nut (2). 9. Remove the valve keepers. 10. Loosen the EN-46110 - compressor nut. 11. Remove the valve spring retainer. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Valve Guide Seal > Component Information > Service and Repair > Valve Stem Oil Seal and Valve Spring Replacement - Left Side > Page 2340 12. Remove the valve spring. 13. Use the EN-46116 - remover/installer (1) in order to remove the valve stem seal (2). Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Valve Guide Seal > Component Information > Service and Repair > Valve Stem Oil Seal and Valve Spring Replacement - Left Side > Page 2341 1. Use the EN-46116 - remover/installer (1) in order to install the valve stem seals (2). 2. Install the valve spring. 3. Install the valve spring retainer. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Valve Guide Seal > Component Information > Service and Repair > Valve Stem Oil Seal and Valve Spring Replacement - Left Side > Page 2342 4. Install the EN-46110 - compressor above the applicable valve spring as shown. Tighten the EN-46110 - compressor nut (2). 5. Install the valve spring keepers. 6. Remove the EN-46110 - compressor. 7. Disconnect the EN-39313 - adapter from the compressed air source. 8. Remove the EN-39313 - adapter. 9. Install the spark plugs. Refer to Spark Plug Replacement (See: Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks/Spark Plug/Service and Repair). 10. Install the rocker arms. Refer to Valve Rocker Arm Replacement - Right Side (See: Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods/Rocker Arm Assembly/Service and Repair/Valve Rocker Arm Replacement - Right Side). 11. Remove the EN-46106 - tool. 12. Install the starter motor. Refer to Starter Replacement (LAF) (See: Starting and Charging/Starting System/Starter Motor/Service and Repair )Starter Replacement (LF1) (See: Starting and Charging/Starting System/Starter Motor/Service and Repair). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Sensors and Switches - Engine > Oil Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Disassembled Views Oil Pressure Sensor: Locations Disassembled Views Disassembled Views Oil Filter Adapter 440 - Oil Filter Adapter 441 - Oil Filter Adapter Gasket 442 - Oil Filter Adapter Bolt 443 - Oil Filter Adapter Bolt - Long 445 - Oil Filter Fitting 449 - Oil Filter 728 - Engine Oil Pressure Sensor 729 Engine Oil Pressure Sensor O-ring Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Sensors and Switches - Engine > Oil Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Disassembled Views > Page 2348 Oil Pressure Sensor: Locations Powertrain Component Views Powertrain Component Views Front Engine Components (LAF 1 of 2) 1 - Q38 Throttle Body 2 - G18 High Pressure Fuel Pump 3 - B23F Camshaft Position Sensor Intake 4 - B37 Engine Oil Pressure Switch 5 - B68 Knock Sensor 6 - B26 Crankshaft Position Sensor 7 - M64 Starter Motor 8 - Q2 A/C Compressor Clutch 9 - G13 Generator Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Sensors and Switches - Engine > Oil Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2349 Oil Pressure Sensor: Diagrams B37 Engine Oil Pressure Switch (LAF) B37 Engine Oil Pressure Switch (LF1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Sensors and Switches - Engine > Oil Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2350 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Sensors and Switches - Engine > Oil Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2351 Oil Pressure Sensor: Service and Repair Engine Oil Pressure Sensor and/or Switch Replacement (LF1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Camshaft Gear/Sprocket > Component Information > Specifications Camshaft Gear/Sprocket: Specifications Camshaft position actuator .................................................................................................................. ......................................................... 58 Nm (43 lb ft) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Chain > Component Information > Service and Repair > Primary Camshaft Drive Chain and Sprockets Replacement Timing Chain: Service and Repair Primary Camshaft Drive Chain and Sprockets Replacement Primary Camshaft Drive Chain and Sprockets Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the engine front cover. Refer to Engine Front Cover Replacement (See: Timing Cover/Service and Repair). 2. Remove the right bank secondary camshaft drive chain tensioner. Refer to Secondary Timing Chain Tensioner Removal - Right Side (See: Service and Repair/Overhaul/13. Secondary Timing Chain Tensioner Removal - Right Side). 3. Remove the right bank secondary camshaft drive chain shoe. Refer to Secondary Camshaft Drive Chain Shoe Removal - Right Side (See: Service and Repair/Overhaul/14. Secondary Camshaft Drive Chain Shoe Removal - Right Side). 4. Remove the right bank secondary camshaft drive chain guide. Refer to Secondary Timing Chain Guide Removal - Right Side (See: Service and Repair/Overhaul/15. Secondary Timing Chain Guide Removal - Right Side). 5. Remove the right bank secondary camshaft drive chain. Refer to Secondary Camshaft Intermediate Drive Chain Removal - Right Side (See: Service and Repair/Overhaul/16. Secondary Camshaft Intermediate Drive Chain Removal - Right Side). 6. Remove the primary camshaft drive chain tensioner. Refer to Primary Camshaft Intermediate Drive Chain Tensioner Removal (See: Service and Repair/Overhaul/17. Primary Camshaft Intermediate Drive Chain Tensioner Removal). 7. Remove the primary camshaft drive chain upper guide. Refer to Primary Timing Chain Guide Removal - Upper (See: Service and Repair/Overhaul/18. Primary Timing Chain Guide Removal - Upper). 8. Remove the primary camshaft timing chain. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Chain > Component Information > Service and Repair > Primary Camshaft Drive Chain and Sprockets Replacement > Page 2360 1. Install the primary camshaft timing chain. Refer to Primary Camshaft Intermediate Drive Chain Installation (See: Service and Repair/Overhaul/115. Primary Camshaft Intermediate Drive Chain Installation). 2. Install the primary upper camshaft drive chain guide. Refer to Primary Timing Chain Guide Installation - Upper (See: Service and Repair/Overhaul/117. Primary Timing Chain Guide Installation - Upper). 3. Install the primary camshaft drive chain tensioner. Refer to Primary Camshaft Intermediate Drive Chain Tensioner Installation (See: Service and Repair/Overhaul/118. Primary Camshaft Intermediate Drive Chain Tensioner Installation). 4. Install the right bank secondary camshaft drive chain. Refer to Secondary Camshaft Intermediate Drive Chain Installation - Right Side (See: Service and Repair/Overhaul/119. Secondary Camshaft Intermediate Drive Chain Installation Right Side). 5. Install the right bank secondary camshaft drive chain guide. Refer to Secondary Timing Chain Guide Installation - Right Side (See: Service and Repair/Overhaul/120. Secondary Timing Chain Guide Installation - Right Side). 6. Install the right bank secondary camshaft drive chain shoe. Refer to Secondary Camshaft Drive Chain Shoe Installation - Right Side (See: Service and Repair/Overhaul/121. Secondary Camshaft Drive Chain Shoe Installation - Right Side). 7. Install the right bank secondary camshaft drive chain tensioner. Refer to Secondary Timing Chain Tensioner Installation - Right Side (See: Service and Repair/Overhaul/122. Secondary Timing Chain Tensioner Installation - Right Side). 8. Install the engine front cover. Refer to Engine Front Cover Replacement (See: Timing Cover/Service and Repair). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Chain > Component Information > Service and Repair > Primary Camshaft Drive Chain and Sprockets Replacement > Page 2361 Timing Chain: Service and Repair Secondary Camshaft Intermediate Drive Chain Replacement Left Side Secondary Camshaft Intermediate Drive Chain Replacement - Left Side Removal Procedure 1. Remove the engine front cover. Refer to Engine Front Cover Replacement (See: Timing Cover/Service and Repair). 2. Remove the right bank secondary camshaft drive chain tensioner. Refer to Secondary Timing Chain Tensioner Removal - Right Side (See: Service and Repair/Overhaul/13. Secondary Timing Chain Tensioner Removal - Right Side). 3. Remove the right bank secondary camshaft drive chain shoe. Refer to Secondary Camshaft Drive Chain Shoe Removal - Right Side (See: Service and Repair/Overhaul/14. Secondary Camshaft Drive Chain Shoe Removal - Right Side). 4. Remove the right bank secondary camshaft drive chain guide. Refer to Secondary Timing Chain Guide Removal - Right Side (See: Service and Repair/Overhaul/15. Secondary Timing Chain Guide Removal - Right Side). 5. Remove the right bank secondary camshaft drive chain. Refer to Secondary Camshaft Intermediate Drive Chain Removal - Right Side (See: Service and Repair/Overhaul/16. Secondary Camshaft Intermediate Drive Chain Removal - Right Side). 6. Remove the primary camshaft drive chain tensioner. Refer to Primary Camshaft Intermediate Drive Chain Tensioner Removal (See: Service and Repair/Overhaul/17. Primary Camshaft Intermediate Drive Chain Tensioner Removal). 7. Remove the primary upper camshaft drive chain guide. Refer to Primary Timing Chain Guide Removal - Upper (See: Service and Repair/Overhaul/18. Primary Timing Chain Guide Removal - Upper). 8. Remove the primary camshaft drive chain. Refer to Primary Camshaft Intermediate Drive Chain Removal (See: Service and Repair/Overhaul/20. Primary Camshaft Intermediate Drive Chain Removal). 9. Remove the right bank camshaft intermediate drive chain idler. Refer to Timing Chain Idler Sprocket Removal - Right Side (See: Service and Repair/Overhaul/21. Timing Chain Idler Sprocket Removal - Right Side). 10. Remove the left bank secondary camshaft drive chain tensioner. Refer to Secondary Timing Chain Tensioner Removal - Left Side (See: Service and Repair/Overhaul/22. Secondary Timing Chain Tensioner Removal - Left Side). 11. Remove the left bank secondary camshaft drive chain shoe. Refer to Secondary Camshaft Drive Chain Shoe Removal - Left Side (See: Service and Repair/Overhaul/23. Secondary Camshaft Drive Chain Shoe Removal - Left Side). 12. Remove the left bank secondary camshaft drive chain guide. Refer to Secondary Timing Chain Guide Removal - Left Side (See: Service and Repair/Overhaul/24. Secondary Timing Chain Guide Removal - Left Side). 13. Remove the left bank camshaft intermediate drive chain idler. Refer to Timing Chain Idler Sprocket Removal - Left Side (See: Service and Repair/Overhaul/26. Timing Chain Idler Sprocket Removal - Left Side). 14. Remove the left bank secondary camshaft drive chain. Refer to Secondary Camshaft Intermediate Drive Chain Installation - Left Side (See: Service and Repair/Overhaul/110. Secondary Camshaft Intermediate Drive Chain Installation - Left Side) 15. Clean and inspect all of the camshaft timing drive components. Refer to Camshaft Timing Drive Components Cleaning and Inspection (See: Service and Repair/Overhaul/65. Camshaft Timing Drive Components Cleaning and Inspection). Replace components as necessary. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Chain > Component Information > Service and Repair > Primary Camshaft Drive Chain and Sprockets Replacement > Page 2362 1. Install the left bank secondary camshaft drive chain. 2. Install the left bank camshaft intermediate drive chain idler. Refer to Timing Chain Idler Sprocket Installation - Left Side (See: Service and Repair/Overhaul/109. Timing Chain Idler Sprocket Installation - Left Side). 3. Install the left bank secondary camshaft drive chain guide. Refer to Secondary Timing Chain Guide Installation - Left Side (See: Service and Repair/Overhaul/111. Secondary Timing Chain Guide Installation - Left Side). 4. Install the left bank secondary camshaft drive chain shoe. Refer to Secondary Camshaft Drive Chain Shoe Installation - Left Side (See: Service and Repair/Overhaul/112. Secondary Camshaft Drive Chain Shoe Installation - Left Side). 5. Install the left bank secondary camshaft drive chain tensioner. Refer to Secondary Timing Chain Tensioner Installation - Left Side (See: Service and Repair/Overhaul/113. Secondary Timing Chain Tensioner Installation - Left Side). 6. Install the right bank camshaft intermediate drive chain idler. Refer to Timing Chain Idler Sprocket Installation - Right Side (See: Service and Repair/Overhaul/114. Timing Chain Idler Sprocket Installation - Right Side). 7. Install the primary camshaft drive chain. Refer to Primary Camshaft Intermediate Drive Chain Installation (See: Service and Repair/Overhaul/115. Primary Camshaft Intermediate Drive Chain Installation). 8. Install the primary upper camshaft drive chain guide. Refer to Primary Timing Chain Guide Installation - Upper (See: Service and Repair/Overhaul/117. Primary Timing Chain Guide Installation - Upper). 9. Install the primary camshaft drive chain tensioner. Refer to Primary Camshaft Intermediate Drive Chain Tensioner Installation (See: Service and Repair/Overhaul/118. Primary Camshaft Intermediate Drive Chain Tensioner Installation). 10. Install the right bank secondary camshaft drive chain. Refer to Secondary Camshaft Intermediate Drive Chain Installation - Right Side (See: Service and Repair/Overhaul/119. Secondary Camshaft Intermediate Drive Chain Installation Right Side). 11. Install the right bank secondary camshaft drive chain guide. Refer to Secondary Timing Chain Guide Installation - Right Side (See: Service and Repair/Overhaul/120. Secondary Timing Chain Guide Installation - Right Side). 12. Install the right bank secondary camshaft drive chain shoe. Refer to Secondary Camshaft Drive Chain Shoe Installation - Right Side (See: Service and Repair/Overhaul/121. Secondary Camshaft Drive Chain Shoe Installation - Right Side). 13. Install the right bank secondary camshaft drive chain tensioner. Refer to Secondary Timing Chain Tensioner Installation - Right Side (See: Service and Repair/Overhaul/122. Secondary Timing Chain Tensioner Installation - Right Side). 14. Install the engine front cover. Refer to Engine Front Cover Replacement (See: Timing Cover/Service and Repair). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Chain > Component Information > Service and Repair > Primary Camshaft Drive Chain and Sprockets Replacement > Page 2363 Timing Chain: Service and Repair Secondary Camshaft Intermediate Drive Chain Replacement Right Side Secondary Camshaft Intermediate Drive Chain Replacement - Right Side Removal Procedure 1. Remove the engine front cover. Refer to Engine Front Cover Replacement (See: Timing Cover/Service and Repair). 2. Remove the right bank secondary camshaft drive chain tensioner. Refer to Secondary Timing Chain Tensioner Removal - Right Side (See: Service and Repair/Overhaul/13. Secondary Timing Chain Tensioner Removal - Right Side). 3. Remove the right bank secondary camshaft drive chain shoe. Refer to Secondary Camshaft Drive Chain Shoe Removal - Right Side (See: Service and Repair/Overhaul/14. Secondary Camshaft Drive Chain Shoe Removal - Right Side). 4. Remove the right bank secondary camshaft drive chain guide. Refer to Secondary Timing Chain Guide Removal - Right Side (See: Service and Repair/Overhaul/15. Secondary Timing Chain Guide Removal - Right Side). 5. Remove the right bank secondary camshaft drive chain. Installation Procedure 1. Ensure the stage 1 camshaft timing is correct. Refer to Setting Camshaft Timing (See: Service and Repair). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Chain > Component Information > Service and Repair > Primary Camshaft Drive Chain and Sprockets Replacement > Page 2364 2. Install the right bank secondary camshaft drive chain. Refer to Secondary Camshaft Intermediate Drive Chain Installation - Right Side (See: Service and Repair/Overhaul/119. Secondary Camshaft Intermediate Drive Chain Installation Right Side) 3. Install the right bank secondary camshaft drive chain guide. Refer to Secondary Timing Chain Guide Installation - Right Side (See: Service and Repair/Overhaul/120. Secondary Timing Chain Guide Installation - Right Side). 4. Install the right bank secondary camshaft drive chain shoe. Refer to Secondary Camshaft Drive Chain Shoe Installation - Right Side (See: Service and Repair/Overhaul/121. Secondary Camshaft Drive Chain Shoe Installation - Right Side). 5. Install the right bank secondary camshaft drive chain tensioner. Refer to Secondary Timing Chain Tensioner Installation - Right Side (See: Service and Repair/Overhaul/122. Secondary Timing Chain Tensioner Installation - Right Side). 6. Install the engine front cover. Refer to Engine Front Cover Replacement (See: Timing Cover/Service and Repair). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Chain Guide > Component Information > Service and Repair > Primary Timing Chain Guide Replacement - Lower Timing Chain Guide: Service and Repair Primary Timing Chain Guide Replacement - Lower Primary Timing Chain Guide Replacement - Lower Removal Procedure 1. Remove the primary camshaft drive chain tensioner. Refer to Primary Camshaft Intermediate Drive Chain Tensioner Replacement (See: Timing Chain Tensioner/Service and Repair/Primary Camshaft Intermediate Drive Chain Tensioner Replacement). 2. Remove the primary camshaft drive chain lower guide bolts. 3. Remove the primary camshaft drive chain lower guide. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Chain Guide > Component Information > Service and Repair > Primary Timing Chain Guide Replacement - Lower > Page 2369 1. Position the primary camshaft drive chain lower guide to the oil pump. Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener Caution). 2. Install the primary camshaft drive chain lower guide bolts and tighten to 23 Nm (17 lb ft). 3. Install the primary camshaft drive chain tensioner. Refer to Primary Camshaft Intermediate Drive Chain Tensioner Replacement (See: Timing Chain Tensioner/Service and Repair/Primary Camshaft Intermediate Drive Chain Tensioner Replacement). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Chain Guide > Component Information > Service and Repair > Primary Timing Chain Guide Replacement - Lower > Page 2370 Timing Chain Guide: Service and Repair Primary Timing Chain Guide Replacement - Upper Primary Timing Chain Guide Replacement - Upper Removal Procedure 1. Remove the engine front cover. Refer to Engine Front Cover Replacement (See: Timing Cover/Service and Repair). 2. Remove the primary camshaft drive chain tensioner. Refer to Primary Camshaft Intermediate Drive Chain Tensioner Replacement (See: Timing Chain Tensioner/Service and Repair/Primary Camshaft Intermediate Drive Chain Tensioner Replacement). 3. Remove the primary upper camshaft drive chain guide. Refer to Primary Timing Chain Guide Removal - Upper (See: Service and Repair/Overhaul/18. Primary Timing Chain Guide Removal - Upper). Installation Procedure 1. Install the primary upper camshaft drive chain guide. Refer to Primary Timing Chain Guide Removal - Lower (See: Service and Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Chain Guide > Component Information > Service and Repair > Primary Timing Chain Guide Replacement - Lower > Page 2371 Repair/Overhaul/19. Primary Timing Chain Guide Removal - Lower). 2. Install the primary camshaft drive chain tensioner. Refer to Primary Camshaft Intermediate Drive Chain Tensioner Installation (See: Service and Repair/Overhaul/118. Primary Camshaft Intermediate Drive Chain Tensioner Installation). 3. Install the engine front cover. Refer to Engine Front Cover Replacement (See: Timing Cover/Service and Repair). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Chain Guide > Component Information > Service and Repair > Primary Timing Chain Guide Replacement - Lower > Page 2372 Timing Chain Guide: Service and Repair Secondary Timing Chain Guide Replacement - Left Side Secondary Timing Chain Guide Replacement - Left Side Removal Procedure 1. Remove the engine front cover. Refer to Engine Front Cover Replacement (See: Timing Cover/Service and Repair). 2. Remove the left bank secondary camshaft drive chain tensioner. Refer to Secondary Timing Chain Tensioner Removal - Left Side (See: Service and Repair/Overhaul/22. Secondary Timing Chain Tensioner Removal - Left Side). 3. Remove the left bank secondary camshaft drive chain guide. Installation Procedure 1. Install the left bank secondary camshaft drive chain guide. Refer to Secondary Timing Chain Guide Installation - Left Side (See: Service and Repair/Overhaul/111. Secondary Timing Chain Guide Installation - Left Side) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Chain Guide > Component Information > Service and Repair > Primary Timing Chain Guide Replacement - Lower > Page 2373 2. Install the left bank secondary camshaft drive chain tensioner. Refer to Secondary Timing Chain Tensioner Installation - Left Side (See: Service and Repair/Overhaul/113. Secondary Timing Chain Tensioner Installation - Left Side). 3. Install the engine front cover. Refer to Engine Front Cover Replacement (See: Timing Cover/Service and Repair). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Chain Guide > Component Information > Service and Repair > Primary Timing Chain Guide Replacement - Lower > Page 2374 Timing Chain Guide: Service and Repair Secondary Timing Chain Guide Replacement - Right Side Secondary Timing Chain Guide Replacement - Right Side Removal Procedure 1. Remove the spark plugs in order to ease crankshaft/engine rotation. Refer to Spark Plug Replacement (See: Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks/Spark Plug/Service and Repair). 2. Remove the engine front cover. Refer to Engine Front Cover Replacement (See: Timing Cover/Service and Repair). 3. Remove the right bank secondary camshaft drive chain tensioner. Refer to Secondary Timing Chain Tensioner Removal - Right Side (See: Service and Repair/Overhaul/13. Secondary Timing Chain Tensioner Removal - Right Side). 4. Remove the right bank secondary camshaft drive chain guide. Refer to Secondary Timing Chain Guide Removal - Right Side (See: Service and Repair/Overhaul/15. Secondary Timing Chain Guide Removal - Right Side). Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Chain Guide > Component Information > Service and Repair > Primary Timing Chain Guide Replacement - Lower > Page 2375 1. Install the right bank secondary camshaft drive chain guide. Refer to Secondary Timing Chain Guide Installation - Right Side (See: Service and Repair/Overhaul/120. Secondary Timing Chain Guide Installation - Right Side). 2. Install the right bank secondary camshaft drive chain tensioner. Refer to Secondary Timing Chain Tensioner Installation - Right Side (See: Service and Repair/Overhaul/122. Secondary Timing Chain Tensioner Installation - Right Side). 3. Install the engine front cover. Refer to Engine Front Cover Replacement (See: Timing Cover/Service and Repair). 4. Install the spark plugs. Refer to Spark Plug Replacement (See: Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks/Spark Plug/Service and Repair). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Chain Idler Gear > Component Information > Service and Repair > Timing Chain Idler Sprocket Replacement - Left Side Timing Chain Idler Gear: Service and Repair Timing Chain Idler Sprocket Replacement - Left Side Timing Chain Idler Sprocket Replacement - Left Side Removal Procedure 1. Remove the engine front cover. Refer to Engine Front Cover Replacement (See: Timing Cover/Service and Repair). 2. Remove the right bank secondary camshaft drive chain tensioner. Refer to Secondary Timing Chain Tensioner Removal - Right Side (See: Service and Repair/Overhaul/13. Secondary Timing Chain Tensioner Removal - Right Side). 3. Remove the right bank secondary camshaft drive chain shoe. Refer to Secondary Camshaft Drive Chain Shoe Removal - Right Side (See: Service and Repair/Overhaul/14. Secondary Camshaft Drive Chain Shoe Removal - Right Side). 4. Remove the right bank secondary camshaft drive chain guide. Refer to Secondary Timing Chain Guide Removal - Right Side (See: Service and Repair/Overhaul/15. Secondary Timing Chain Guide Removal - Right Side). 5. Remove the right bank secondary camshaft drive chain. Refer to Secondary Camshaft Intermediate Drive Chain Removal - Right Side (See: Service and Repair/Overhaul/16. Secondary Camshaft Intermediate Drive Chain Removal - Right Side). 6. Remove the primary camshaft drive chain tensioner. Refer to Primary Camshaft Intermediate Drive Chain Tensioner Removal (See: Service and Repair/Overhaul/17. Primary Camshaft Intermediate Drive Chain Tensioner Removal). 7. Remove the primary upper camshaft drive chain guide. Refer to Primary Timing Chain Guide Removal - Upper (See: Service and Repair/Overhaul/18. Primary Timing Chain Guide Removal - Upper). 8. Remove the primary camshaft drive chain. Refer to Primary Camshaft Intermediate Drive Chain Removal (See: Service and Repair/Overhaul/20. Primary Camshaft Intermediate Drive Chain Removal). 9. Remove the right bank camshaft intermediate drive chain idler. Refer to Timing Chain Idler Sprocket Removal - Right Side (See: Service and Repair/Overhaul/21. Timing Chain Idler Sprocket Removal - Right Side). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Chain Idler Gear > Component Information > Service and Repair > Timing Chain Idler Sprocket Replacement - Left Side > Page 2380 10. If you are servicing the left bank camshaft intermediate drive chain idler, perform the following steps: 1. Remove the left bank secondary camshaft drive chain tensioner. Refer to Secondary Timing Chain Tensioner Removal - Left Side (See: Service and Repair/Overhaul/22. Secondary Timing Chain Tensioner Removal - Left Side). 2. Remove the left bank secondary camshaft drive chain shoe. Refer to Secondary Camshaft Drive Chain Shoe Removal - Left Side (See: Service and Repair/Overhaul/23. Secondary Camshaft Drive Chain Shoe Removal - Left Side). 3. Remove the left bank secondary camshaft drive chain guide. Refer to Secondary Timing Chain Guide Removal - Left Side (See: Service and Repair/Overhaul/24. Secondary Timing Chain Guide Removal - Left Side). 4. Remove the left bank secondary camshaft drive chain. Refer to Secondary Camshaft Intermediate Drive Chain Removal - Left Side (See: Service and Repair/Overhaul/25. Secondary Camshaft Intermediate Drive Chain Removal - Left Side). 5. Remove the left bank camshaft intermediate drive chain idler. Refer to Timing Chain Idler Sprocket Removal - Left Side (See: Service and Repair/Overhaul/26. Timing Chain Idler Sprocket Removal - Left Side). Installation Procedure 1. If you are servicing the left bank idler sprocket, perform the following steps: 1. Install the left bank camshaft intermediate drive chain idler. Refer to Timing Chain Idler Sprocket Installation - Left Side (See: Service and Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Chain Idler Gear > Component Information > Service and Repair > Timing Chain Idler Sprocket Replacement - Left Side > Page 2381 Repair/Overhaul/109. Timing Chain Idler Sprocket Installation - Left Side). 2. Install the left bank secondary camshaft drive chain. Refer to Secondary Camshaft Intermediate Drive Chain Installation - Left Side (See: Service and Repair/Overhaul/110. Secondary Camshaft Intermediate Drive Chain Installation - Left Side). 3. Install the left bank secondary camshaft drive chain guide. Refer to Secondary Timing Chain Guide Installation - Left Side (See: Service and Repair/Overhaul/111. Secondary Timing Chain Guide Installation - Left Side). 4. Install the left bank secondary camshaft drive chain shoe. Refer to Secondary Camshaft Drive Chain Shoe Installation - Left Side (See: Service and Repair/Overhaul/112. Secondary Camshaft Drive Chain Shoe Installation - Left Side). 5. Install the left bank secondary camshaft drive chain tensioner. Refer to Secondary Timing Chain Tensioner Installation - Left Side (See: Service and Repair/Overhaul/113. Secondary Timing Chain Tensioner Installation - Left Side). 2. Install the right bank camshaft intermediate drive chain idler. Refer to Timing Chain Idler Sprocket Installation - Right Side (See: Service and Repair/Overhaul/114. Timing Chain Idler Sprocket Installation - Right Side). 3. Install the primary camshaft drive chain. Refer to Primary Camshaft Intermediate Drive Chain Installation (See: Service and Repair/Overhaul/115. Primary Camshaft Intermediate Drive Chain Installation). 4. Install the primary upper camshaft drive chain guide. Refer to Primary Timing Chain Guide Installation - Upper (See: Service and Repair/Overhaul/117. Primary Timing Chain Guide Installation - Upper). 5. Install the primary camshaft drive chain tensioner. Refer to Primary Camshaft Intermediate Drive Chain Tensioner Installation (See: Service and Repair/Overhaul/118. Primary Camshaft Intermediate Drive Chain Tensioner Installation). 6. Install the right bank secondary camshaft drive chain. Refer to Secondary Camshaft Intermediate Drive Chain Installation - Right Side (See: Service and Repair/Overhaul/119. Secondary Camshaft Intermediate Drive Chain Installation Right Side). 7. Install the right bank secondary camshaft drive chain guide. Refer to Secondary Timing Chain Guide Installation - Right Side (See: Service and Repair/Overhaul/120. Secondary Timing Chain Guide Installation - Right Side). 8. Install the right bank secondary camshaft drive chain shoe. Refer to Secondary Camshaft Drive Chain Shoe Installation - Right Side (See: Service and Repair/Overhaul/121. Secondary Camshaft Drive Chain Shoe Installation - Right Side). 9. Install the right bank secondary camshaft drive chain tensioner. Refer to Secondary Timing Chain Tensioner Installation - Right Side (See: Service and Repair/Overhaul/122. Secondary Timing Chain Tensioner Installation - Right Side). 10. Install the engine front cover. Refer to Engine Front Cover Replacement (See: Timing Cover/Service and Repair). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Chain Idler Gear > Component Information > Service and Repair > Timing Chain Idler Sprocket Replacement - Left Side > Page 2382 Timing Chain Idler Gear: Service and Repair Timing Chain Idler Sprocket Replacement - Right Side Timing Chain Idler Sprocket Replacement - Right Side Removal Procedure 1. Remove the engine front cover. Refer to Engine Front Cover Replacement (See: Timing Cover/Service and Repair). 2. Remove the spark plugs in order to ease crankshaft/engine rotation. Refer to Spark Plug Replacement (See: Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks/Spark Plug/Service and Repair). 3. Remove the right bank secondary camshaft drive chain tensioner. Refer to Secondary Timing Chain Tensioner Removal - Right Side (See: Service and Repair/Overhaul/13. Secondary Timing Chain Tensioner Removal - Right Side). 4. Remove the right bank secondary camshaft drive chain shoe. Refer to Secondary Camshaft Drive Chain Shoe Removal - Right Side (See: Service and Repair/Overhaul/14. Secondary Camshaft Drive Chain Shoe Removal - Right Side). 5. Remove the right bank secondary camshaft drive chain guide. Refer to Secondary Timing Chain Guide Removal - Right Side (See: Service and Repair/Overhaul/15. Secondary Timing Chain Guide Removal - Right Side). 6. Remove the right bank secondary camshaft drive chain. Refer to Secondary Camshaft Intermediate Drive Chain Removal - Right Side (See: Service and Repair/Overhaul/16. Secondary Camshaft Intermediate Drive Chain Removal - Right Side). 7. Remove the primary camshaft drive chain tensioner. Refer to Primary Camshaft Intermediate Drive Chain Tensioner Removal (See: Service and Repair/Overhaul/17. Primary Camshaft Intermediate Drive Chain Tensioner Removal). 8. Remove the primary upper camshaft drive chain guide. Refer to Primary Timing Chain Guide Removal - Upper (See: Service and Repair/Overhaul/18. Primary Timing Chain Guide Removal - Upper). 9. Remove the primary camshaft drive chain. Refer to Primary Camshaft Intermediate Drive Chain Removal (See: Service and Repair/Overhaul/20. Primary Camshaft Intermediate Drive Chain Removal). 10. Remove the right bank camshaft intermediate drive chain idler. Refer to Timing Chain Idler Sprocket Removal - Right Side (See: Service and Repair/Overhaul/21. Timing Chain Idler Sprocket Removal - Right Side). Installation Procedure 1. Ensure stage 1 camshaft timing is correct. Refer to Setting Camshaft Timing (See: Service and Repair). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Chain Idler Gear > Component Information > Service and Repair > Timing Chain Idler Sprocket Replacement - Left Side > Page 2383 2. Install the right bank camshaft intermediate drive chain idler. Refer to Timing Chain Idler Sprocket Installation - Right Side (See: Service and Repair/Overhaul/114. Timing Chain Idler Sprocket Installation - Right Side). 3. Install the primary camshaft drive chain. Refer to Primary Camshaft Intermediate Drive Chain Installation (See: Service and Repair/Overhaul/115. Primary Camshaft Intermediate Drive Chain Installation). 4. Install the primary upper camshaft drive chain guide. Refer to Primary Timing Chain Guide Installation - Upper (See: Service and Repair/Overhaul/117. Primary Timing Chain Guide Installation - Upper). 5. Install the primary camshaft drive chain tensioner. Refer to Primary Camshaft Intermediate Drive Chain Tensioner Installation (See: Service and Repair/Overhaul/118. Primary Camshaft Intermediate Drive Chain Tensioner Installation). 6. Install the right bank secondary camshaft drive chain. Refer to Secondary Camshaft Intermediate Drive Chain Installation - Right Side (See: Service and Repair/Overhaul/119. Secondary Camshaft Intermediate Drive Chain Installation Right Side). 7. Install the right bank secondary camshaft drive chain guide. Refer to Secondary Timing Chain Guide Installation - Right Side (See: Service and Repair/Overhaul/120. Secondary Timing Chain Guide Installation - Right Side). 8. Install the right bank secondary camshaft drive chain shoe. Refer to Secondary Camshaft Drive Chain Shoe Installation - Right Side (See: Service and Repair/Overhaul/121. Secondary Camshaft Drive Chain Shoe Installation - Right Side). 9. Install the right bank secondary camshaft drive chain tensioner. Refer to Secondary Timing Chain Tensioner Installation - Right Side (See: Service and Repair/Overhaul/122. Secondary Timing Chain Tensioner Installation - Right Side). 10. Install the spark plugs. Refer to Spark Plug Replacement (See: Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks/Spark Plug/Service and Repair). 11. Install the engine front cover. Refer to Engine Front Cover Replacement (See: Timing Cover/Service and Repair). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Chain Tensioner > Component Information > Specifications Timing Chain Tensioner: Specifications Camshaft drive chain tensioner First Pass ............................................................................................................................................. .......................................................... 5 Nm (44 lb in) Final Pass ........................................................ ............................................................................................................................................. 25 Nm (18 lb ft) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Chain Tensioner > Component Information > Service and Repair > Primary Camshaft Intermediate Drive Chain Tensioner Replacement Timing Chain Tensioner: Service and Repair Primary Camshaft Intermediate Drive Chain Tensioner Replacement Primary Camshaft Intermediate Drive Chain Tensioner Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the engine front cover. Refer to Engine Front Cover Replacement (See: Timing Cover/Service and Repair). Note: If the entire camshaft timing system is not in Stage 2, Timing Chain Alignment Diagram (See: Timing Component Alignment Marks/Locations) , mark the timing chain and sprockets in order to ensure proper reassembly. 2. Remove the primary camshaft drive chain tensioner. Refer to Primary Camshaft Intermediate Drive Chain Tensioner Removal (See: Service and Repair/Overhaul/17. Primary Camshaft Intermediate Drive Chain Tensioner Removal). Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Chain Tensioner > Component Information > Service and Repair > Primary Camshaft Intermediate Drive Chain Tensioner Replacement > Page 2389 1. Install the primary camshaft drive chain tensioner. Refer to Primary Camshaft Intermediate Drive Chain Tensioner Installation (See: Service and Repair/Overhaul/118. Primary Camshaft Intermediate Drive Chain Tensioner Installation). 2. Install the engine front cover. Refer to Engine Front Cover Replacement (See: Timing Cover/Service and Repair). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Chain Tensioner > Component Information > Service and Repair > Primary Camshaft Intermediate Drive Chain Tensioner Replacement > Page 2390 Timing Chain Tensioner: Service and Repair Secondary Camshaft Intermediate Drive Chain Tensioner Replacement - Left Side Secondary Camshaft Intermediate Drive Chain Tensioner Replacement - Left Side Removal Procedure 1. Remove the engine front cover. Refer to Engine Front Cover Replacement (See: Timing Cover/Service and Repair). 2. Remove the left bank secondary camshaft drive chain tensioner. Refer to Secondary Timing Chain Tensioner Removal - Left Side (See: Service and Repair/Overhaul/22. Secondary Timing Chain Tensioner Removal - Left Side). Installation Procedure 1. Install the left bank secondary camshaft drive chain tensioner. Refer to Secondary Timing Chain Tensioner Installation - Left Side (See: Service and Repair/Overhaul/113. Secondary Timing Chain Tensioner Installation - Left Side). 2. Install the engine front cover. Refer to Engine Front Cover Replacement (See: Timing Cover/Service and Repair). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Chain Tensioner > Component Information > Service and Repair > Primary Camshaft Intermediate Drive Chain Tensioner Replacement > Page 2391 Timing Chain Tensioner: Service and Repair Secondary Camshaft Intermediate Drive Chain Tensioner Replacement - Right Side Secondary Camshaft Intermediate Drive Chain Tensioner Replacement - Right Side Removal Procedure 1. Remove the engine front cover. Refer to Engine Front Cover Replacement (See: Timing Cover/Service and Repair). 2. Remove the right bank secondary camshaft drive chain tensioner. Refer to Secondary Timing Chain Tensioner Removal - Right Side (See: Service and Repair/Overhaul/13. Secondary Timing Chain Tensioner Removal - Right Side). Installation Procedure 1. Install the right bank secondary camshaft drive chain tensioner. Refer to Secondary Timing Chain Tensioner Installation - Right Side (See: Service and Repair/Overhaul/122. Secondary Timing Chain Tensioner Installation - Right Side). 2. Install the engine front cover. Refer to Engine Front Cover Replacement (See: Timing Cover/Service and Repair). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Chain Tensioner > Component Information > Service and Repair > Primary Camshaft Intermediate Drive Chain Tensioner Replacement > Page 2392 Timing Chain Tensioner: Service and Repair Secondary Timing Chain Tensioner Shoe Replacement - Left Side Secondary Timing Chain Tensioner Shoe Replacement - Left Side Removal Procedure 1. Remove the engine front cover. Refer to Engine Front Cover Replacement (See: Timing Cover/Service and Repair). 2. Remove the left bank secondary camshaft drive chain tensioner. Refer to Secondary Timing Chain Tensioner Removal - Left Side (See: Service and Repair/Overhaul/22. Secondary Timing Chain Tensioner Removal - Left Side). 3. Remove the secondary shoe. Refer to Secondary Camshaft Drive Chain Shoe Removal - Left Side (See: Service and Repair/Overhaul/23. Secondary Camshaft Drive Chain Shoe Removal - Left Side). Installation Procedure 1. Install the secondary shoe. Refer to Secondary Camshaft Drive Chain Shoe Installation - Left Side (See: Service and Repair/Overhaul/112. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Chain Tensioner > Component Information > Service and Repair > Primary Camshaft Intermediate Drive Chain Tensioner Replacement > Page 2393 Secondary Camshaft Drive Chain Shoe Installation - Left Side). 2. Install the left bank secondary camshaft drive chain tensioner. Refer to Secondary Timing Chain Tensioner Installation - Left Side (See: Service and Repair/Overhaul/113. Secondary Timing Chain Tensioner Installation - Left Side). 3. Install the engine front cover. Refer to Engine Front Cover Replacement (See: Timing Cover/Service and Repair). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Chain Tensioner > Component Information > Service and Repair > Primary Camshaft Intermediate Drive Chain Tensioner Replacement > Page 2394 Timing Chain Tensioner: Service and Repair Secondary Timing Chain Tensioner Shoe Replacement - Right Side Secondary Timing Chain Tensioner Shoe Replacement - Right Side Removal Procedure 1. Remove the engine front cover. Refer to Engine Front Cover Replacement (See: Timing Cover/Service and Repair). 2. Remove the right bank secondary camshaft drive chain tensioner. Refer to Secondary Timing Chain Tensioner Removal - Right Side (See: Service and Repair/Overhaul/13. Secondary Timing Chain Tensioner Removal - Right Side). 3. Remove the right bank secondary camshaft drive chain shoe. Refer to Secondary Camshaft Drive Chain Shoe Removal - Right Side (See: Service and Repair/Overhaul/14. Secondary Camshaft Drive Chain Shoe Removal - Right Side). Installation Procedure 1. Install the right bank secondary camshaft drive chain shoe. Refer to Secondary Camshaft Drive Chain Shoe Installation - Right Side (See: Service and Repair/Overhaul/121. Secondary Camshaft Drive Chain Shoe Installation - Right Side). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Chain Tensioner > Component Information > Service and Repair > Primary Camshaft Intermediate Drive Chain Tensioner Replacement > Page 2395 2. Install the right bank secondary camshaft drive chain tensioner. Refer to Secondary Timing Chain Tensioner Installation - Right Side (See: Service and Repair/Overhaul/122. Secondary Timing Chain Tensioner Installation - Right Side). 3. Install the engine front cover. Refer to Engine Front Cover Replacement (See: Timing Cover/Service and Repair). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Component Alignment Marks > Component Information > Locations Timing Component Alignment Marks: Locations Timing Chain Alignment Diagram Camshaft Position Actuator Timing Marks 1 - Right Intake Camshaft Position Actuator Identifier 2 - Right Intake Camshaft Position Actuator Right Side Timing Mark - Triangle 3 - Left Intake Camshaft Position Actuator Left Side Timing Mark - Circle 4 - Left Intake Camshaft Position Actuator Identifier 5 - Exhaust Camshaft Position Actuator Identifier 6 - Exhaust Camshaft Position Actuator Right Side Timing Mark - Triangle 7 - Exhaust Camshaft Position Actuator Left Side Timing Mark - Circle Stage One Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Component Alignment Marks > Component Information > Locations > Page 2399 1 - Left Intake Camshaft Position (CMP) Actuator Timing Mark - Circle 2 - Left Intake Secondary Camshaft Timing Drive Chain Timing Link 3 - Left Exhaust Secondary Camshaft Timing Drive Chain Timing Link 4 - Left Exhaust Camshaft Position (CMP) Actuator Timing Mark - Circle 5 - Left Secondary Camshaft Timing Drive Chain 6 - Primary Camshaft Drive Chain Timing Link for the Left Primary Camshaft Intermediate Drive Chain Sprocket 7 - Left Primary Camshaft Intermediate Drive Chain Sprocket Timing Mark for the Primary Camshaft Drive Chain 8 - Left Primary Camshaft Intermediate Drive Chain Sprocket 9 - Left Secondary Camshaft Timing Drive Chain Timing Link for the Left Primary Camshaft Intermediate Drive Chain Sprocket, behind hole in sprocket 10 - Left Primary Camshaft Intermediate Drive Chain Sprocket Timing Window for the Left Secondary Camshaft Timing Drive Chain Timing Link 11 - Primary Camshaft Drive Chain 12 - Primary Camshaft Drive Chain Timing Link for the Crankshaft Sprocket 13 - Crankshaft Sprocket Timing Mark 14 - Crankshaft Sprocket 15 - Right Primary Camshaft Intermediate Drive Chain Sprocket 16 - Primary Camshaft Drive Chain Timing Link for the Right Primary Camshaft Intermediate Drive Chain Sprocket 17 - Right Primary Camshaft Intermediate Drive Chain Sprocket Timing Mark Stage Two Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Component Alignment Marks > Component Information > Locations > Page 2400 1 - Left Intake Camshaft Position (CMP) Actuator Timing Mark - Circle 2 - Left Intake Secondary Camshaft Timing Drive Chain Timing Link 3 - Left Exhaust Secondary Camshaft Timing Drive Chain Timing Link 4 - Left Exhaust Camshaft Position (CMP) Actuator Timing Mark - Circle 5 - Left Secondary Camshaft Timing Drive Chain 6 - Primary Camshaft Drive Chain Timing Link for the Left Primary Camshaft Intermediate Drive Chain Sprocket 7 - Left Primary Camshaft Intermediate Drive Chain Sprocket Timing Mark for the Primary Camshaft Drive Chain 8 - Left Primary Camshaft Intermediate Drive Chain Sprocket 9 - Left Secondary Camshaft Timing Drive Chain Timing Link for the Left Primary Camshaft Intermediate Drive Chain Sprocket, behind hole in sprocket 10 - Left Primary Camshaft Intermediate Drive Chain Sprocket Timing Window 11 - Primary Camshaft Drive Chain 12 - Primary Camshaft Drive Chain Timing Link for the Crankshaft Sprocket 13 - Crankshaft Sprocket Timing Mark 14 - Crankshaft Sprocket 15 - Right Primary Camshaft Intermediate Drive Chain Sprocket 16 - Primary Camshaft Drive Chain Timing Link for the Right Primary Camshaft Intermediate Drive Chain Sprocket 17 - Right Primary Camshaft Intermediate Drive Chain Sprocket Timing Mark for the Primary Camshaft Drive Chain 18 - Right Primary Camshaft Intermediate Drive Chain Sprocket Timing Mark/Window for the Right Secondary Camshaft Timing Drive Chain 19 - Right Secondary Camshaft Timing Drive Chain Timing Link for the Right Primary Camshaft Intermediate Drive Chain Sprocket 20 - Right Secondary Camshaft Timing Drive Chain 21 - Right Exhaust Camshaft Position (CMP) Actuator Timing Mark - Triangle 22 - Right Exhaust Secondary Camshaft Timing Drive Chain Timing Link 23 - Right Intake Secondary Camshaft Timing Drive Chain Timing Link Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Component Alignment Marks > Component Information > Locations > Page 2401 24 - Right Intake Camshaft Position (CMP) Actuator Timing Mark - Triangle Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Cover > Component Information > Specifications Timing Cover: Specifications Engine front cover Engine front cover bolts in the number (25) location are model dependent and may not apply First pass bolts (1-23) .......................................................................................................................... ......................................................... 20 Nm (14 lb ft) Second pass bolts (1-23) ................................. ............................................................................................................................................. 20 Nm (14 lb ft) Third pass bolts (1-23) .......................................................................................................... ............................................................... additional 60 degrees Bolts (24) .......................................... ........................................................................................................................................................... 15 Nm (11 lb ft) Bolts (25) ................................................................................................................... .................................................................................. 65 Nm (48 lb ft) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Cover > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2405 Timing Cover: Service and Repair Engine Front Cover Replacement Special Tools EN-46109 - Engine Front Cover Installation Guide Pins For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Tools and Equipment/Special Tools). Removal Procedure 1. Remove the intake manifold. Refer to Intake Manifold Replacement (See: Intake Manifold/Service and Repair/Intake Manifold Replacement). 2. Remove the camshaft covers. Refer to Camshaft Cover Replacement - Left Side (LF1) (See: Cylinder Head Assembly/Valve Cover/Service and Repair/Camshaft Cover Replacement - Left Side) and Camshaft Cover Replacement - Right Side (LF1) (See: Cylinder Head Assembly/Valve Cover/Service and Repair/Camshaft Cover Replacement - Right Side). 3. Drain the engine coolant. Refer to Cooling System Draining and Filling (Static) (See: Cooling System/Service and Repair/Cooling System Draining and Filling (Static))Cooling System Draining and Filling (GE 47716) (See: Cooling System/Service and Repair/Cooling System Draining and Filling (GE 47716)). 4. Disconnect the purge vent hose from the water outlet. 5. Remove the water outlet with the radiator hose and reposition aside. Refer to Water Outlet Replacement (LF1) (See: Cooling System/Coolant Outlet/Service and Repair). 6. Remove the crankshaft balancer. Refer to Crankshaft Balancer Replacement (See: Cylinder Block Assembly/Harmonic Balancer - Crankshaft Pulley/Service and Repair). 7. Remove the camshaft position sensors. Refer to Camshaft Position Sensor Replacement - Bank 2 (Left Side) Exhaust (See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Camshaft Position Sensor/Service and Repair/Camshaft Position Sensor Replacement - Bank 2 (Left Side) Exhaust) , Camshaft Position Sensor Replacement - Bank 2 (Left Side) Intake (See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Camshaft Position Sensor/Service and Repair/Camshaft Position Sensor Replacement - Bank 2 (Left Side) Intake) , Camshaft Position Sensor Replacement - Bank 1 (Right Side) Exhaust (See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Camshaft Position Sensor/Service and Repair/Camshaft Position Sensor Replacement - Bank 1 (Right Side) Exhaust) and Camshaft Position Sensor Replacement - Bank 1 (Right Side) Intake (See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Camshaft Position Sensor/Service and Repair/Camshaft Position Sensor Replacement - Bank 1 (Right Side) Intake). 8. Remove the generator. Refer to Generator Replacement (LAF) (See: Starting and Charging/Charging System/Alternator/Service and Repair )Generator Replacement (LF1) (See: Starting and Charging/Charging System/Alternator/Service and Repair). 9. Remove the water pump pulley only. 10. Remove the drive belt tensioner. Refer to Drive Belt Tensioner Replacement (See: Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories/Drive Belt Tensioner/Service and Repair). 11. Remove the camshaft position actuator solenoid valves from the front cover. Refer to Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve Solenoid Replacement - Bank 1 (Right Side) Intake (See: Variable Valve Timing/Variable Valve Timing Solenoid/Service and Repair/Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve Solenoid Replacement Bank 1 (Right Side) Intake) , Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve Solenoid Replacement Bank 1 (Right Side) Exhaust (See: Variable Valve Timing/Variable Valve Timing Solenoid/Service and Repair/Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve Solenoid Replacement - Bank 1 (Right Side) Exhaust) , Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve Solenoid Replacement - Bank 2 (Left Side) Intake (See: Variable Valve Timing/Variable Valve Timing Solenoid/Service and Repair/Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve Solenoid Replacement - Bank 2 (Left Side) Intake) , and Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve Solenoid Replacement - Bank 2 (Left Side) Exhaust (See: Variable Valve Timing/Variable Valve Timing Solenoid/Service and Repair/Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve Solenoid Replacement - Bank 2 (Left Side) Exhaust). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Cover > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2406 Note: There are a total of 22 M8 bolts that must be removed and 3 optional M12 bolts that may need to be removed before the front cover will separate from the engine block. 12. Remove the engine front cover with the water pump. Refer to Engine Front Cover Removal (See: Service and Repair/Overhaul/12. Engine Front Cover Removal). 13. Disassemble the engine front cover. Refer to Engine Front Cover Disassemble (See: Service and Repair/Overhaul/75. Engine Front Cover Disassemble). Note: Do NOT use sharp and/or metal gasket scrapers in order to clean the sealing surfaces. 14. Carefully clean the engine front cover sealing surfaces. Refer to Engine Front Cover Cleaning and Inspection (See: Service and Repair/Overhaul/76. Engine Front Cover Cleaning and Inspection). Note: Insert a piece of cardboard between the oil pan front and the oil pump in order to prevent any contaminants from falling into the oil pan. 15. Carefully clean the engine front cover sealing surfaces. Refer to Engine Front Cover Cleaning and Inspection (See: Service and Repair/Overhaul/76. Engine Front Cover Cleaning and Inspection). 16. Use compressed air in order to remove any engine coolant from the engine cooling passages and from the top of the oil pan scraper (windage tray). Installation Procedure 1. Assemble the engine front cover. Refer to Engine Front Cover Assemble (See: Service and Repair/Overhaul/77. Engine Front Cover Assemble). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Cover > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2407 2. Use the EN-46109 - pins in order to install the engine front cover. Refer to Engine Front Cover Installation (See: Service and Repair/Overhaul/123. Engine Front Cover Installation). 3. Install the camshaft position actuator solenoid valves to the front cover. Refer to Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve Solenoid Replacement - Bank 1 (Right Side) Intake (See: Variable Valve Timing/Variable Valve Timing Solenoid/Service and Repair/Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve Solenoid Replacement Bank 1 (Right Side) Intake) , Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve Solenoid Replacement Bank 1 (Right Side) Exhaust (See: Variable Valve Timing/Variable Valve Timing Solenoid/Service and Repair/Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve Solenoid Replacement - Bank 1 (Right Side) Exhaust) , Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve Solenoid Replacement - Bank 2 (Left Side) Intake (See: Variable Valve Timing/Variable Valve Timing Solenoid/Service and Repair/Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve Solenoid Replacement - Bank 2 (Left Side) Intake) , and Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve Solenoid Replacement - Bank 2 (Left Side) Exhaust (See: Variable Valve Timing/Variable Valve Timing Solenoid/Service and Repair/Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve Solenoid Replacement - Bank 2 (Left Side) Exhaust). 4. Install the camshaft position sensors. Refer to Camshaft Position Sensor Replacement - Bank 2 (Left Side) Exhaust (See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Camshaft Position Sensor/Service and Repair/Camshaft Position Sensor Replacement - Bank 2 (Left Side) Exhaust) , Camshaft Position Sensor Replacement - Bank 2 (Left Side) Intake (See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Camshaft Position Sensor/Service and Repair/Camshaft Position Sensor Replacement - Bank 2 (Left Side) Intake) , Camshaft Position Sensor Replacement - Bank 1 (Right Side) Exhaust (See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Camshaft Position Sensor/Service and Repair/Camshaft Position Sensor Replacement - Bank 1 (Right Side) Exhaust) and Camshaft Position Sensor Replacement - Bank 1 (Right Side) Intake (See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Camshaft Position Sensor/Service and Repair/Camshaft Position Sensor Replacement - Bank 1 (Right Side) Intake). 5. Install the crankshaft balancer. Refer to Crankshaft Balancer Installation (See: Service and Repair/Overhaul/129. Crankshaft Balancer Installation ). 6. Install the generator bracket with the generator and the belt tensioner. Refer to Generator Replacement (LAF) (See: Starting and Charging/Charging System/Alternator/Service and Repair)Generator Replacement (LF1) (See: Starting and Charging/Charging System/Alternator/Service and Repair). 7. Install the water outlet. Refer to Water Outlet Replacement (LF1) (See: Cooling System/Coolant Outlet/Service and Repair). 8. Install the purge vent hose to the water outlet. 9. Fill the cooling system. Refer to Cooling System Draining and Filling (Static) (See: Cooling System/Service and Repair/Cooling System Draining and Filling (Static))Cooling System Draining and Filling (GE 47716) (See: Cooling System/Service and Repair/Cooling System Draining and Filling (GE 47716)). 10. Install the water pump pulley. 11. Install the drive belt tensioner. Refer to Drive Belt Tensioner Replacement (See: Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories/Drive Belt Tensioner/Service and Repair). 12. Install the camshaft covers. Refer to Camshaft Cover Replacement - Left Side (LF1) (See: Cylinder Head Assembly/Valve Cover/Service and Repair/Camshaft Cover Replacement - Left Side) and Camshaft Cover Replacement - Right Side (LF1) (See: Cylinder Head Assembly/Valve Cover/Service and Repair/Camshaft Cover Replacement - Right Side). 13. Install the intake manifold. Refer to Intake Manifold Replacement (See: Intake Manifold/Service and Repair/Intake Manifold Replacement). 14. Fill the cooling system. Refer to Cooling System Draining and Filling (Static) (See: Cooling System/Service and Repair/Cooling System Draining and Filling (Static))Cooling System Draining and Filling (GE 47716) (See: Cooling System/Service and Repair/Cooling System Draining and Filling (GE 47716)). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Variable Valve Timing > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Description and Operation Variable Valve Timing Actuator: Description and Operation Camshaft Actuator System Description Camshaft Actuator System Overview 1 - Camshaft Actuator Vane 2 - Timing Chain Sprocket 3 - Engine Oil Pressure-For retarding the camshaft 4 - Camshaft 5 - Input Signals from Engine Sensors 6 - Engine Control Module (ECM) 7 Camshaft Actuator Solenoid 8 - Engine Oil Pump 9 - Engine Oil Pressure Supply 10 - Engine Oil Drain 11 - Engine Oil Pressure-For advancing the camshaft 12 - Camshaft Actuator Rotor 13 Camshaft Position Sensor Reluctor 14 - Camshaft Actuator Lock Pin 15 - Camshaft Actuator Housing The camshaft actuator system enables the engine control module (ECM) to change camshaft timing of all 4 camshafts while the engine is operating. The CMP actuator assembly (15) varies the camshaft position in response to directional changes in oil pressure. The CMP actuator solenoid valve controls the oil pressure that is applied to advance or retard a camshaft. Modifying camshaft timing under changing engine demand provides better balance between the following performance concerns: * Engine power output * Fuel economy * Lower tailpipe emissions The CMP actuator solenoid valve (7) is controlled by the ECM. The crankshaft position (CKP) sensor and the CMP sensors are used to monitor changes in camshaft positions. The ECM uses the following information in order to calculate the desired camshaft positions: * The engine coolant temperature (ECT) sensor * The calculated engine oil temperature (EOT) * The mass air flow (MAF) sensor * The throttle position (TP) sensor * The vehicle speed sensor (VSS) * The volumetric efficiency Operation The CMP actuator assembly has an outer housing that is driven by an engine timing chain. Inside the assembly is a rotor with fixed vanes that is attached to the camshaft. Oil pressure that is applied to the fixed vanes will rotate a specific camshaft in relationship to the crankshaft. The movement of the intake camshafts will advance the intake valve timing. The movement of the exhaust camshafts will retard the exhaust valve timing. When oil pressure is Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Variable Valve Timing > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 2412 applied to the return side of the vanes, the camshafts will return to 0 crankshaft degrees, or top dead center (TDC). The CMP actuator solenoid valve directs the oil flow that controls the camshaft movement. The ECM commands the CMP solenoid to move the solenoid plunger and spool valve until oil flows from the advance passage (11). Oil flowing thru the CMP actuator assembly from the CMP solenoid advance passage applies pressure to the advance side of the vanes in the CMP actuator assembly. When the camshaft position is retarded, the CMP actuator solenoid valve directs oil to flow into the CMP actuator assembly from the retard passage (3). The ECM can also command the CMP actuator solenoid valve to stop oil flow from both passages in order to hold the current camshaft position. The ECM operates the CMP actuator solenoid valve by pulse width modulation (PWM) of the solenoid coil. The higher the PWM duty cycle, the larger the change in camshaft timing. The CMP actuator assembly also contains a lock pin (14) that prevents movement between the outer housing and the rotor vane assembly. The lock pin is released by oil pressure before any movement in the CMP actuator assembly takes place. The ECM is continuously comparing CMP sensor inputs with CKP sensor input in order to monitor camshaft position and detect any system malfunctions. If a condition exists in either the intake or exhaust camshaft actuator system, the opposite bank, intake or exhaust, camshaft actuator will default to 0 crankshaft degrees. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Variable Valve Timing > Variable Valve Timing Solenoid > Component Information > Locations Variable Valve Timing Solenoid: Locations Powertrain Component Views Left Rear Engine Components (LAF) 1 - T8D Ignition Coil 4 2 - T8C Ignition Coil 3 3 - T8B Ignition Coil 2 4 - T8A Ignition Coil 1 5 - Q6F Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Intake 6 - Q6E Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Exhaust 7 - B52A Heated Oxygen Sensor 1 8 - B52B Heated Oxygen Sensor 2 9 - B34 Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor 10 - B23E Camshaft Position Sensor - Exhaust 11 - Q12 Evaporative Emission Purge Solenoid Valve Right Rear of the Engine Components (LF1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Variable Valve Timing > Variable Valve Timing Solenoid > Component Information > Locations > Page 2416 1 - B74 Manifold Absolute Pressure Sensor 2 - T8E Ignition Coil 5 3 - T8C Ignition Coil 3 4 - Q12 Evaporative Emission Purge Solenoid Valve 5 - Q38 Throttle Body 6 - B23B Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 1 Intake 7 - B23D Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 2 Intake 8 - Q6D Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Bank 2 Intake 9 - Q6C Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Bank 2 Exhaust 10 - B23C Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 2 Exhaust 11 - Q6B Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Bank 1 Intake 12 - Q6A Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Bank 1 Exhaust 13 - B23A Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 1 Exhaust 14 - B68A Knock Sensor 1 15 - B26 Crankshaft Position Sensor 16 - T8A Ignition Coil 1 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Variable Valve Timing > Variable Valve Timing Solenoid > Component Information > Locations > Page 2417 Variable Valve Timing Solenoid: Diagrams Q6A Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Bank 1 Exhaust (LF1) Q6B Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Bank 1 Intake (LF1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Variable Valve Timing > Variable Valve Timing Solenoid > Component Information > Locations > Page 2418 Q6C Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Bank 2 Exhaust (LF1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Variable Valve Timing > Variable Valve Timing Solenoid > Component Information > Locations > Page 2419 Q6D Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Bank 2 Intake (LF1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Variable Valve Timing > Variable Valve Timing Solenoid > Component Information > Locations > Page 2420 Q6E Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Exhaust (LAF) Q6F Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Intake (LAF) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Variable Valve Timing > Variable Valve Timing Solenoid > Component Information > Locations > Page 2421 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Variable Valve Timing > Variable Valve Timing Solenoid > Component Information > Service and Repair > Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve Solenoid Replacement - Bank 1 (Right Side) Intake Variable Valve Timing Solenoid: Service and Repair Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve Solenoid Replacement - Bank 1 (Right Side) Intake Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve Solenoid Replacement - Bank 1 (Right Side) Intake Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Variable Valve Timing > Variable Valve Timing Solenoid > Component Information > Service and Repair > Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve Solenoid Replacement - Bank 1 (Right Side) Intake > Page 2424 Variable Valve Timing Solenoid: Service and Repair Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve Solenoid Replacement - Bank 1 (Right Side) Exhaust Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve Solenoid Replacement - Bank 1 (Right Side) Exhaust Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Variable Valve Timing > Variable Valve Timing Solenoid > Component Information > Service and Repair > Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve Solenoid Replacement - Bank 1 (Right Side) Intake > Page 2425 Variable Valve Timing Solenoid: Service and Repair Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve Solenoid Replacement - Bank 2 (Left Side) Intake Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve Solenoid Replacement - Bank 2 (Left Side) Intake Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Variable Valve Timing > Variable Valve Timing Solenoid > Component Information > Service and Repair > Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve Solenoid Replacement - Bank 1 (Right Side) Intake > Page 2426 Variable Valve Timing Solenoid: Service and Repair Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve Solenoid Replacement - Bank 2 (Left Side) Exhaust Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve Solenoid Replacement - Bank 2 (Left Side) Exhaust Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Pressure > System Information > Specifications Fuel Pressure: Specifications Fuel Pressure (Ignition ON, engine OFF) ....................................................................................................................................... 276-448 kPa (40-65 psi). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Pressure > System Information > Specifications > Page 2431 Fuel Pressure: Service Precautions Relieving Fuel Pressure Warning Warning Remove the fuel tank cap and relieve the fuel system pressure before servicing the fuel system in order to reduce the risk of personal injury. After you relieve the fuel system pressure, a small amount of fuel may be released when servicing the fuel lines, the fuel injection pump, or the connections. In order to reduce the risk of personal injury, cover the fuel system components with a shop towel before disconnection. This will catch any fuel that may leak out. Place the towel in an approved container when the disconnection is complete. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Pressure > System Information > System Diagnosis > Fuel Pressure Gauge Installation and Removal Fuel Pressure: Testing and Inspection Fuel Pressure Gauge Installation and Removal Fuel Pressure Gauge Installation and Removal Special Tools CH-48027-100 Digital Pressure Gauge Installation Procedure Warning: Refer to Gasoline/Gasoline Vapors Warning (See: Powertrain Management/Fuel Delivery and Air Induction/Fuel/Service Precautions). Warning Remove the fuel tank cap and relieve the fuel system pressure before servicing the fuel system in order to reduce the risk of personal injury. After you relieve the fuel system pressure, a small amount of fuel may be released when servicing the fuel lines, the fuel injection pump, or the connections. In order to reduce the risk of personal injury, cover the fuel system components with a shop towel before disconnection. This will catch any fuel that may leak out. Place the towel in an approved container when the disconnection is complete. 1. Relieve the fuel system pressure. Refer to Fuel Pressure Relief (See: Fuel Filter/Fuel Pressure Release/Service and Repair). 2. Connect the CH-48027-1 (1) to the CH-48027-2 (2). 3. Remove the shop towel from around the fuel rail service port, and place in an approved gasoline container. 4. Perform any tests and/or diagnostics as needed. For the proper usage of the CH-48027-100, refer to the manufacture's directions. Removal Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Pressure > System Information > System Diagnosis > Fuel Pressure Gauge Installation and Removal > Page 2434 Warning Wrap a shop towel around the fuel pressure connection in order to reduce the risk of fire and personal injury. The towel will absorb any fuel leakage that occurs during the connection of the fuel pressure gauge. Place the towel in an approved container when the connection of the fuel pressure gauge is complete. 1. Relieve the fuel system pressure, if required. Perform the following steps: 1. Wrap a shop towel around the fuel rail service port. 2. Place the hose on the CH-48027-2 (2) into an approved gasoline container. 3. Open the valve on the CH-48027-2 (2) in order to bleed any fuel from the fuel rail. 4. Close the valve on the CH-48027-2 (2). 5. Remove the hose on the CH-48027-2 (2) from the approved gasoline container. 6. Remove the shop towel from around the fuel rail service port, and place in an approved gasoline container. Caution: Clean all of the following areas before performing any disconnections in order to avoid possible contamination in the system: * The fuel pipe connections * The hose connections * The areas surrounding the connections 2. Disconnect the CH-48027-1 (1) from the CH-48027-2 (2). 3. Disconnect the CH-48027-2 (2) from the CH-48027-3 (3). 4. Disconnect the CH-48027-3 (3) from the fuel rail service port. 5. Install the fuel rail service port cap. 6. Install the engine cover, if required. 7. Tighten the fuel fill cap. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Pressure > System Information > System Diagnosis > Fuel Pressure Gauge Installation and Removal > Page 2435 Fuel Pressure: Testing and Inspection Fuel System Diagnosis Fuel System Diagnosis Diagnostic Instructions * Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle (See: Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle) prior to using this diagnostic procedure. * Review Strategy Based Diagnosis (See: Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Strategy Based Diagnosis) for an overview of the diagnostic approach. * Diagnostic Procedure Instructions (See: Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Diagnostic Procedure Instructions) provides an overview of each diagnostic category. Circuit/System Description The engine control module (ECM) supplies voltage to the fuel pump control module when the ECM detects that the ignition is ON. The voltage from the ECM to the fuel pump control module remains active for 2 s, unless the engine is in Crank or Run. While this voltage is being received, the fuel pump control module closes the ground switch of the fuel pump and also supplies a varying voltage to the fuel tank module in order to maintain the desired fuel rail pressure. The fuel system is an electronic returnless on-demand design. A returnless fuel system reduces the internal temperature of the fuel tank by not returning hot fuel from the engine to the fuel tank. Reducing the internal temperature of the fuel tank results in lower evaporative emissions. An electric turbine style fuel pump attaches to the primary fuel pump module inside the fuel tank. The fuel pump supplies fuel through the fuel feed pipe to the high pressure fuel pump. The high pressure fuel pump supplies fuel to a variable-pressure fuel rail. Fuel enters the combustion chamber through precision multi-hole fuel injectors. The high pressure fuel pump, fuel rail pressure, fuel injection timing, and injection duration are controlled by the engine control module (ECM). The primary fuel tank module also contains a primary jet pump and a secondary jet pump. Fuel pump flow loss, caused by vapor expulsion in the pump inlet chamber, is diverted to the primary jet pump and the secondary jet pump through a restrictive orifice located on the pump cover. The primary jet pump fills the reservoir of the primary fuel tank module. The secondary jet pump creates a venturi action which causes the fuel to be drawn from the secondary side of the fuel tank, through the fuel transfer pipe, to the primary side of the fuel tank. Reference Information Description and Operation Fuel System Description (LF1) (See: Powertrain Management/Fuel Delivery and Air Induction/Description and Operation/Fuel System Description) Electrical Information Reference * Circuit Testing (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Circuit Testing) * Connector Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Connector Repairs) * Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections) * Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Wiring Repairs) Scan Tool Reference Control Module References (See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning) for scan tool information Special Tools * CH 48027 - Digital Pressure Gauge * J 37287 - Fuel Line Shut-off Adapter Circuit/System Verification Note: * Repair all fuel system related DTCs before performing this diagnostic. * Inspect the fuel system for damage or external leaks before proceeding. * Verify that adequate fuel is in the fuel tank before proceeding. * The Fuel Pump Enable may need to be commanded ON a few times in order to obtain the highest possible fuel pressure. * Before proceeding with this test review the User Manual CH 48027-5 for Safety Information and Instructions. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Pressure > System Information > System Diagnosis > Fuel Pressure Gauge Installation and Removal > Page 2436 1. Ignition OFF, all accessories OFF, install a CH 48027 - Gauge. Refer to Fuel Pressure Gauge Installation and Removal (See: Fuel Pressure Gauge Installation and Removal). Note: High fuel pressure readings may result due to hot soak fuel boiling. With the engine OFF, the fuel pressure may increase to the setting of the pressure relief regulator valve, approximately 580 kPa (84 psi). 2. Ignition ON, engine OFF, command the Fuel Pump Enable ON with a scan tool. Verify the fuel pressure is between 276-448 kPa (40-65 psi) and does not decrease more than 34 kPa (5 psi) in 1 min. 3. Engine idling at normal operating temperature, verify the scan tool Fuel Pump Control Module Fuel Pressure Sensor parameter is between 276-324 kPa (40-47 psi). Circuit/System Testing Note: * The Fuel Pump Enable may need to be commanded ON a few times in order to obtain the highest possible fuel pressure. * DO NOT start the engine. * High fuel pressure readings may result due to hot soak fuel boiling. With the engine OFF, the fuel pressure may increase to the setting of the pressure relief regulator valve, approximately 580 kPa (84 psi). 1. Ignition ON, engine OFF, command the Fuel Pump Enable ON with a scan tool and observe the fuel pressure gauge while the fuel pump is operating. Verify the fuel pressure is between 276-448 kPa (40-65 psi). ‹› If the fuel pressure is less than the specified range, test, inspect, and repair the items listed below. If all items test normal, replace the primary fuel tank module. * Restricted fuel feed pipe * Inspect the harness connectors and the ground circuits of the fuel pump for poor connections. 2. Verify that the fuel pressure does not decrease more than 34 kPa (5 psi) in 1 min. ‹› If the fuel pressure decreases more than the specified value, perform the following procedure: 1. Ignition OFF, relieve the fuel pressure. Refer to Fuel Pressure Relief (See: Fuel Filter/Fuel Pressure Release/Service and Repair). 2. Install the J 37287 - Adapter between the chassis fuel feed hose and the engine compartment fuel feed pipe. 3. Open the valve on the J 37287 - Adapter. 4. Ignition ON, command the Fuel Pump Enable ON with a scan tool and bleed the air from the CH 48027 - Gauge. 5. Command the Fuel Pump Enable ON and then OFF with a scan tool. 6. Close the valve on the J 37287 - Adapter. 7. Monitor the fuel pressure for 1 min. ‹› If the fuel pressure does not decrease more than 34 kPa (5 psi) within the specified time, replace the primary fuel tank module. 3. Relieve the fuel pressure to 69 kPa (10 psi). Verify that the fuel pressure does not decrease more than 14 kPa (2 psi) in 5 min. ‹› If the fuel pressure decreases more than the specified value, replace the primary fuel tank module. 4. Operate the vehicle within the conditions of the customer's concern while monitoring the fuel pressure with the CH 48027 - Gauge. The fuel pressure should not drop off during acceleration, cruise or hard cornering. ‹› If the fuel pressure drops off, test, inspect, and repair the items listed below. If all items test normal, replace the primary fuel tank module. * Restricted fuel feed pipe * Inspect the harness connectors and the ground circuits of the fuel pump for poor connections 5. If the fuel system tests normal, refer to Symptoms - Engine Controls (See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures/Symptoms - Engine Controls). Repair Instructions Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification (See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures/Verification Tests and Procedures) after completing the diagnostic procedure. * Fuel Feed Pipe Replacement (LF1) (See: Powertrain Management/Fuel Delivery and Air Induction/Fuel Supply Line/Service and Repair/Fuel Feed Pipe Replacement) * Fuel Tank Fuel Pump Module Replacement (See: Powertrain Management/Fuel Delivery and Air Induction/Fuel Pump/Service and Repair) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Idle Speed > System Information > Specifications Idle Speed: Specifications Information not supplied by the manufacturer. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Idle Speed > System Information > Specifications > Page 2440 Idle Speed: Testing and Inspection Throttle/Idle Learn (LF1, LFW) Description The engine control module (ECM) learns the airflow through the throttle body to ensure the correct idle. The learned airflow values are stored within the ECM. These values are learned to adjust for production variation and will continuously learn during the life of the vehicle to compensate for reduced airflow due to throttle body coking. Anytime the throttle body airflow rate changes, for example due to cleaning or replacing, the values must be relearned. An engine that had a heavily coked throttle body that has been cleaned or replaced may take several drive cycles to learn out the coking. To accelerate the process, the scan tool has the ability to reset all learned values back to zero. A new ECM will also have values set to zero. The idle may be unstable or a DTC may set if the learned values do not match the actual airflow. Conditions for Running the Throttle Learn Procedure Reset Procedure * DTCs P0068, P0101, P0102, P0103, P0106, P0107, P0108, P0116, P0117, P0118, P0120, P0122, P0123, P0128, P0171, P0172, P0174, P0175, P0201, P0202, P0203, P0204, P0205, P0206, P0220, P0222, P0223, P0300, P0351, P0352, P0353, P0496, P0601, P0604, P0606, P060D, P0641, P0651, P1516, P2101, P2119, P2120, P2122, P2123, P2125, P2127, P2128, P2135, P2138, or P2176 are not set. * Ignition ON, engine OFF. * The vehicle speed sensor (VSS) is 0 km/h (0 mph). Learn Procedure * DTCs P0068, P0101, P0102, P0103, P0106, P0107, P0108, P0116, P0117, P0118, P0120, P0122, P0123, P0128, P0171, P0172, P0174, P0175, P0201, P0202, P0203, P0204, P0205, P0206, P0220, P0222, P0223, P0300, P0351, P0352, P0353, P0496, P0601, P0604, P0606, P060D, P0641, P0651, P1516, P2101, P2119, P2120, P2122, P2123, P2125, P2127, P2128, P2135, P2138, or P2176 are not set. * The engine speed is between 450-4,000 RPM. * The manifold absolute pressure (MAP) is greater than 5 kPa. * The mass air flow (MAF) is greater than 2 g/s. * The ignition voltage is greater than 10 volts. Throttle Learn Reset Procedure (Performed after the throttle body is cleaned or replaced) 1. Ignition ON, engine OFF, perform the Idle Learn Reset in Module Setup with a scan tool. 2. Start the engine and monitor the TB Idle Airflow Compensation parameter. The TB Idle Airflow Compensation value should equal 0 percent and the engine should be idling at a normal idle speed. 3. Clear the DTCs and return to the diagnostic that referred you here. Learn Procedure (Performed after the ECM is flashed or replaced) Note: Do NOT perform this procedure if DTCs are set. Refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle (See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Descriptions/Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle). 1. Start and idle the engine for 3 minutes. 2. With a scan tool, monitor the Desired Idle Speed and the actual Engine Speed. 3. The ECM will start to learn the new idle cells and Desired Idle Speed should start to decrease. 4. Ignition OFF for 60 seconds. 5. Start and idle the engine for 3 minutes. 6. After the 3 minute run time the engine should be idling normal. Note: During the drive cycle the check engine light may come on with idle speed DTCs. If idle speed codes are set, clear codes so the ECM can continue to learn. ‹› If the engine idle speed has not been learned the vehicle will need to be driven at speeds above 70 km/h (44 mph) with several decelerations and extended idles. 7. After the drive cycle, the engine should be idling normally. ‹› If the engine idle speed has not been learned, turn OFF the ignition for 60 seconds and repeat step 6. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Idle Speed > System Information > Specifications > Page 2441 8. Once the engine speed has returned to normal, clear DTCs and return to the diagnostic that referred you here. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Cleaner Fresh Air Duct/Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair Air Cleaner Fresh Air Duct/Hose: Service and Repair Air Cleaner Outlet Duct Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Filter Element > Component Information > Service and Repair Air Filter Element: Service and Repair Air Cleaner Element Replacement (LE5) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Filter > Fuel Pressure Release > System Information > Service and Repair Fuel Pressure Release: Service and Repair Fuel Pressure Relief Warning Fuel that flows out at high pressure can cause serious injury to the skin and eyes. ALWAYS depressurize the fuel system before removing components that are under high fuel pressure. Note: If a scan tool is not available, WAIT at LEAST 2 hours after the engine has been run, before removing the high pressure fuel line. 1. Install a scan tool to the vehicle and command the fuel pump relay OFF, allowing the low pressure fuel pump to shut off. 2. Start the vehicle and allow the engine to idle until the engine stops. The engine will stop in approximately 20-30 seconds. 3. Turn the ignition OFF. 4. Using the scan tool, verify that there is little to no fuel pressure, if there still is fuel pressure repeat step 2. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Firing Order > Component Information > Specifications Firing Order: Specifications Ignition System Specifications Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Ignition Timing > System Information > Specifications Ignition Timing: Specifications Information not supplied by the manufacturer. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications Spark Plug: Specifications Ignition System Specifications Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2462 Spark Plug: Application and ID Ignition System Specifications Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2463 Spark Plug: Testing and Inspection Spark Plug Inspection Spark Plug Usage * Ensure that the correct spark plug is installed. An incorrect spark plug causes driveability conditions. Refer to Ignition System Specifications ( See: Powertrain Management/Ignition System/Specifications) for the correct spark plug. * Ensure that the spark plug has the correct heat range. An incorrect heat range causes the following conditions: - Spark plug fouling-Colder plug - Pre-ignition causing spark plug and/or engine damage-Hotter plug Spark Plug Inspection * Inspect the terminal post (1) for damage. - Inspect for a bent or broken terminal post (1). - Test for a loose terminal post (1) by twisting and pulling the post. The terminal post (1) should NOT move. * Inspect the insulator (2) for flashover or carbon tracking, soot. This is caused by the electrical charge traveling across the insulator (2) between the terminal post (1) and ground. Inspect for the following conditions: - Inspect the spark plug boot for damage. - Inspect the spark plug recess area of the cylinder head for moisture, such as oil, coolant, or water. A spark plug boot that is saturated causes arcing to ground. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2464 * Inspect the insulator (2) for cracks. All or part of the electrical charge may arc through the crack instead of the electrodes (3, 4). * Inspect for evidence of improper arcing. - Measure the gap between the center electrode (4) and the side electrode (3) terminals. Refer to Ignition System Specifications (See: Powertrain Management/Ignition System/Specifications). An excessively wide electrode gap can prevent correct spark plug operation. - Inspect for the correct spark plug torque. Refer to Ignition System Specifications (See: Powertrain Management/Ignition System/Specifications). Insufficient torque can prevent correct spark plug operation. An over torqued spark plug, causes the insulator (2) to crack. - Inspect for signs of tracking that occurred near the insulator tip instead of the center electrode (4). - Inspect for a broken or worn side electrode (3). - Inspect for a broken, worn, or loose center electrode (4) by shaking the spark plug. * A rattling sound indicates internal damage. * A loose center electrode (4) reduces the spark intensity. - Inspect for bridged electrodes (3, 4). Deposits on the electrodes (3, 4) reduce or eliminates the gap. - Inspect for worn or missing platinum pads on the electrodes (3, 4), if equipped. - Inspect for excessive fouling. * Inspect the spark plug recess area of the cylinder head for debris. Dirty or damaged threads can cause the spark plug not to seat correctly during installation. Spark Plug Visual Inspection * Normal operation-Brown to grayish-tan with small amounts of white powdery deposits are normal combustion by-products from fuels with additives. * Carbon fouled-Dry, fluffy, black carbon or soot caused by the following conditions: - Rich fuel mixtures * Leaking fuel injectors * Excessive fuel pressure * Restricted air filter element * Incorrect combustion - Reduced ignition system voltage output * Weak coils Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2465 * Worn ignition wires * Incorrect spark plug gap - Excessive idling or slow speeds under light loads can keep spark plug temperatures so low that normal combustion deposits may not burn off. * Deposit fouling-Oil, coolant, or additives that include substances such as silicone, very white coating, reduces the spark intensity. Most powdery deposits will not effect spark intensity unless they form into a glazing over the electrode. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2466 Spark Plug: Service and Repair Spark Plug Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the ignition coil(s). Refer to Ignition Coil Replacement - Bank 1 (See: Powertrain Management/Ignition System/Ignition Coil/Service and Repair/Ignition Coil Replacement - Bank 1) and/or Ignition Coil Replacement - Bank 2 (See: Powertrain Management/Ignition System/Ignition Coil/Service and Repair/Ignition Coil Replacement - Bank 2). Warning: Refer to Safety Glasses and Compressed Air Warning (See: Service Precautions/Technician Safety Information/Safety Glasses and Compressed Air Warning). Caution: Clean the spark plug recess area before removing the spark plug. Failure to do so could result in engine damage because of dirt or foreign material entering the cylinder head, or by the contamination of the cylinder head threads. The contaminated threads may prevent the proper seating of the new plug. Use a thread chaser to clean the threads of any contamination. 2. Use compressed air in order to remove debris from the spark plug cavity. Caution: Allow the engine to cool before removing the spark plugs. Attempting to remove the spark plugs from a hot engine may cause the plug threads to seize, causing damage to cylinder head threads. 3. Remove the spark plug. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2467 Caution: Use only the spark plugs specified for use in the vehicle. Do not install spark plugs that are either hotter or colder than those specified for the vehicle. Installing spark plugs of another type can severely damage the engine. Caution: Check the gap of all new and reconditioned spark plugs before installation. The pre-set gaps may have changed during handling. Use a round feeler gauge to ensure an accurate check. Installing the spark plugs with the wrong gap can cause poor engine performance and may even damage the engine. 1. Ensure that the spark plug gap is equivalent to the spark plug gap specification. Refer to Ignition System Specifications (See: Powertrain Management/Ignition System/Specifications). Caution: Be sure that the spark plug threads smoothly into the cylinder head and the spark plug is fully seated. Use a thread chaser, if necessary, to clean threads in the cylinder head. Cross-threading or failing to fully seat the spark plug can cause overheating of the plug, exhaust blow-by, or thread damage. Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener Caution). 2. Install the spark plug. Tighten the spark plug to 20 Nm (15 lb ft). 3. Install the ignition coil(s). Refer to Ignition Coil Replacement - Bank 1 (See: Powertrain Management/Ignition System/Ignition Coil/Service and Repair/Ignition Coil Replacement - Bank 1) and/or Ignition Coil Replacement - Bank 2 (See: Powertrain Management/Ignition System/Ignition Coil/Service and Repair/Ignition Coil Replacement - Bank 2). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Compression Check > System Information > Specifications Compression Check: Specifications Compression Check Record the compression readings from all of the cylinders. The lowest reading should not be less than 70 percent of the highest reading. No cylinder reading should be less than 965 kPa (140 psi). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Compression Check > System Information > Specifications > Page 2471 Compression Check: Testing and Inspection Engine Compression Test Special Tools EN 39313 - Spark Plug Port Adapter For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Tools and Equipment/Special Tools). A compression pressure test of the engine cylinders determines the condition of the rings, the valves and the head gasket. 1. Run the engine until it reaches normal operating temperature. The battery must be at or near full charge. 2. Turn the engine OFF. Important: Remove the powertrain control module (PCM) and the ignition fuse from the instrument panel (I/P) fuse block. 3. Disable the ignition. 4. Disable the fuel systems. 5. Remove the spark plugs from all cylinders. 6. Remove the air duct from the throttle body. 7. Block the throttle plate in open position. 8. Measure the engine compression, using the following procedure: 1. Thread the EN 39313 - adapter into the spark plug hole. 2. Thread the compression gauge into the EN 39313 - adapter. 3. Have an assistant crank the engine through, at least 4 compression strokes, in the testing cylinder. 4. Check and record the readings on the gauge at each stroke. 5. Remove the compression gauge from the EN 39313 - adapter. 6. Remove the EN 39313 - adapter from the spark plug hole. 7. Repeat the compression test for each cylinder. 9. Record the compression readings from all of the cylinders. * The lowest reading should not be less than 70 percent of the highest reading. * No cylinder reading should be less than 965 kPa (140 psi). 10. The following are examples of measurement problems: * When the compression measurement is normal, the compression builds up quickly and evenly to specified compression on each cylinder. * When low compression is caused by the piston rings, compression is low on the first stroke and tends to build up on the following strokes, but does not reach normal. Compression improves considerably with the addition of oil. Use approximately 3 squirts of oil from a plunger-type oiler. * When low compression is caused by the valves, the measurement is low on the first stroke and does not build up even with the addition of oil. * Leaking head gaskets will provide the same results as worn valves but engine coolant may be identified in the crankcase. In addition, a leaking head gasket will give low readings on paired cylinders. 11. Remove the block from the throttle plate. 12. Install the air duct to the throttle body. 13. Install the spark plugs. 14. Install the powertrain control module (PCM). 15. Install the ignition fuses to the I/P fuse block. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Water Pump > Component Information > Specifications Water Pump: Specifications Water pump bolts ................................................................................................................................ ........................................................ 10 Nm (89 lb in) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Water Pump > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2475 Water Pump: Service and Repair Water Pump Replacement (LF1) Tools Required EN 46104 - Water Pump Pulley Holder For equivalent regional tools refer to Special Tools (See: Cooling System/Tools and Equipment) Removal Procedure 1. Drain the cooling system. Refer to Cooling System Draining and Filling (Static) (See: Cooling System/Service and Repair/Cooling System Draining and Filling (Static))Cooling System Draining and Filling (GE 47716) (See: Cooling System/Service and Repair/Cooling System Draining and Filling (GE 47716)) 2. Remove the generator drive belt. Refer to Drive Belt Replacement (See: Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories/Drive Belt/Service and Repair) 3. Use the EN 46104 - water pump pulley holder to retain the pulley. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Water Pump > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2476 4. Remove the water pump pulley bolts. 5. Remove the water pump pulley. 6. Remove the water pump bolts. 7. Remove the water pump. 8. Remove and DISCARD the water pump seal. 9. Carefully clean the water pump sealing surfaces. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Water Pump > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2477 1. Install a NEW water pump seal. 2. Install the water pump. Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener Caution) 3. Install the water pump bolts and tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb in). 4. Install the water pump pulley and the water pump pulley bolts. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Water Pump > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2478 5. Use the EN 46104 - water pump pulley holder to hold the pulley. 6. Install the water pump pulley bolts and tighten to 12 Nm (108 lb in). 7. Install the generator drive belt. Refer to Drive Belt Replacement (See: Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories/Drive Belt/Service and Repair) 8. Fill the cooling system. Refer to Cooling System Draining and Filling (Static) (See: Cooling System/Service and Repair/Cooling System Draining and Filling (Static))Cooling System Draining and Filling (GE 47716) (See: Cooling System/Service and Repair/Cooling System Draining and Filling (GE 47716)) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications Coolant: Capacity Specifications Cooling System ................................................................................................................................... .............................................. 10.8 quarts (10.2 liters) NOTE: All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the approximate level. Recheck fluid level after filling. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 2484 Coolant: Fluid Type Specifications ENGINE COOLANT The cooling system in the vehicle is filled with DEX-COOL engine coolant. This coolant is designed to remain in the vehicle for five years or 240 000 km (150,000 miles), whichever occurs first. The following explains the cooling system and how to check and add coolant when it is low. CAUTION: Adding only plain water to your cooling system can be dangerous. Plain water, or some other liquid such as alcohol, can boil before the proper coolant mixture will. Your vehicle's coolant warning system is set for the proper coolant mixture. With plain water or the wrong mixture, your engine could get too hot but you would not get the overheat warning. Your engine could catch fire and you or others could be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and DEX-COOL coolant. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and DEX-COOL coolant. If using this mixture, nothing else needs to be added. This mixture: Gives freezing protection down to -34°F (-37°C). Gives boiling protection up to 265°F (129°C). Protects against rust and corrosion. Will not damage aluminum parts. Helps keep the proper engine temperature. NOTICE: If you use an improper coolant mixture, your engine could overheat and be badly damaged. The repair cost would not be covered by your warranty. Too much water in the mixture can freeze and crack the engine, radiator, heater core and other parts. NOTICE: If extra inhibitors and/or additives are used in the vehicle's cooling system, the vehicle could be damaged. Use only the proper mixture of the engine coolant listed for the cooling system. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant Line/Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair Coolant Line/Hose: Service and Repair Engine Coolant Air Bleed Pipe Replacement (LF1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant Outlet > Component Information > Service and Repair Coolant Outlet: Service and Repair Water Outlet Replacement (LF1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant Reservoir > Component Information > Service and Repair > Radiator Surge Tank Replacement Coolant Reservoir: Service and Repair Radiator Surge Tank Replacement Radiator Surge Tank Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant Reservoir > Component Information > Service and Repair > Radiator Surge Tank Replacement > Page 2495 Coolant Reservoir: Service and Repair Coolant Recovery Reservoir Vent Hose Replacement Coolant Recovery Reservoir Vent Hose Replacement (LF1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant Reservoir > Component Information > Service and Repair > Radiator Surge Tank Replacement > Page 2496 Coolant Reservoir: Service and Repair Coolant Recovery Reservoir Outlet Hose Replacement Coolant Recovery Reservoir Outlet Hose Replacement (LF1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Locations Radiator Cooling Fan Motor: Locations Front of Vehicle/Engine Compartment Component Views Front of the Engine Compartment Components 1 - G10R Cooling Fan Motor - Right (LF1) 2 - G10L Cooling Fan Motor - Left (LF1) 3 - R10 Cooling Fan Resistor (LAF) 4 - G10 Cooling Fan Motor (LAF) 5 - B9 Ambient Air Temperature Sensor Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2501 Radiator Cooling Fan Motor: Diagrams G10 Cooling Fan Motor (LAF) G10L Cooling Fan Motor - Left (LF1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2502 G10R Cooling Fan Motor - Right (LF1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2503 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay: Locations Electrical Center Identification Views X50A Fuse Block - Underhood, Label Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 2507 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Resistor > Component Information > Locations Radiator Cooling Fan Resistor: Locations Front of Vehicle/Engine Compartment Component Views Front of the Engine Compartment Components 1 - G10R Cooling Fan Motor - Right (LF1) 2 - G10L Cooling Fan Motor - Left (LF1) 3 - R10 Cooling Fan Resistor (LAF) 4 - G10 Cooling Fan Motor (LAF) 5 - B9 Ambient Air Temperature Sensor Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Resistor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2511 Radiator Cooling Fan Resistor: Diagrams R10 Cooling Fan Resistor (LAF) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Service and Repair Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Service and Repair Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor Replacement (LF1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Fan Shroud > Component Information > Service and Repair Fan Shroud: Service and Repair Engine Coolant Fan Shroud Replacement (LF1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Heater Core > Component Information > Service and Repair Heater Core: Service and Repair Heater Core Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Heater Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heater Inlet Hose Replacement Heater Hose: Service and Repair Heater Inlet Hose Replacement Heater Inlet Hose Replacement (LF1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Heater Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heater Inlet Hose Replacement > Page 2526 Heater Hose: Service and Repair Heater Outlet Hose Replacement Heater Outlet Hose Replacement (LF1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator > Radiator Drain Plug > Component Information > Service and Repair Radiator Drain Plug: Service and Repair Radiator Drain Cock Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cap > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Radiator Cap: Testing and Inspection Pressure Cap Testing Special Tools * J 24460-01 - Cooling System Pressure Tester * J 42401-1 - Radiator Cap / Surge Tank Test Adapter Pressure Cap Testing Warning To avoid being burned, do not remove the radiator cap or surge tank cap while the engine is hot. The cooling system will release scalding fluid and steam under pressure if radiator cap or surge tank cap is removed while the engine and radiator are still hot. 1. Remove the pressure cap. 2. Wash the pressure cap sealing surface with water. Note: Lubricate J-42401-1 and pressure cap o-rings with coolant and press cap to seat o-ring on J-42401-1 before turning to engage threads. 3. Use the J 24460-01 - Cooling System Pressure Tester (1) with J 42401-1 - Radiator Cap / Surge Tank Test Adapter (2) in order to test the pressure cap. 4. Test the pressure cap for the following conditions: * Pressure release when the J 24460-01 - Cooling System Pressure Tester exceeds the pressure rating of the pressure cap. * Maintain the rated pressure for at least 10 seconds. Note the rate of pressure loss. 5. Replace the pressure cap under the following conditions: * The pressure cap does not release pressure which exceeds the rated pressure of the cap. * The pressure cap does not hold the rated pressure. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Radiator Inlet Hose Replacement Radiator Hose: Service and Repair Radiator Inlet Hose Replacement Radiator Inlet Hose Replacement (LF1) Special Tools J 38185 - Hose Clamp Pliers Removal Procedure 1. Drain the cooling system. Refer to Cooling System Draining and Filling (Static) (See: Service and Repair/Cooling System Draining and Filling (Static))Cooling System Draining and Filling (GE 47716) (See: Service and Repair/Cooling System Draining and Filling (GE 47716)). 2. Remove the intake manifold cover. Refer to Intake Manifold Cover Replacement (See: Engine/Intake Manifold/Service and Repair/Intake Manifold Cover Replacement). 3. Disengage tension on the radiator inlet hose clamp (1) at the radiator using J 38185 - Hose Clamp Pliers. 4. Remove the radiator inlet hose (2) from the radiator. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Radiator Inlet Hose Replacement > Page 2538 5. Disengage tension on the radiator inlet hose clamp (1) at the engine using J 38185 - Hose Clamp Pliers. 6. Remove the radiator inlet hose (2) from the engine. 7. Remove the radiator inlet hose from the vehicle. Installation Procedure 1. Install radiator inlet hose to the vehicle. Note: Lubricate the inside diameters of the hose with clean coolant prior to installation. 2. Install the radiator inlet hose (2) to the engine. 3. Engage tension on the radiator inlet hose clamp (1) at the engine using J 38185 - Hose Clamp Pliers. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Radiator Inlet Hose Replacement > Page 2539 4. Install the radiator inlet hose (2) to the radiator. 5. Engage tension on the radiator inlet hose clamp (1) at the radiator using J 38185 - Hose Clamp Pliers. 6. Install the intake manifold cover. Refer to Intake Manifold Cover Replacement (See: Engine/Intake Manifold/Service and Repair/Intake Manifold Cover Replacement). 7. Fill the cooling system. Refer to Cooling System Draining and Filling (Static) (See: Service and Repair/Cooling System Draining and Filling (Static))Cooling System Draining and Filling (GE 47716) (See: Service and Repair/Cooling System Draining and Filling (GE 47716)). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Radiator Inlet Hose Replacement > Page 2540 Radiator Hose: Service and Repair Radiator Outlet Hose Replacement Radiator Outlet Hose Replacement (LF1) Special Tools J 38185 - Hose Clamp Pliers Removal Procedure 1. Drain the cooling system. Refer to Cooling System Draining and Filling (Static) (See: Service and Repair/Cooling System Draining and Filling (Static))Cooling System Draining and Filling (GE 47716) (See: Service and Repair/Cooling System Draining and Filling (GE 47716)). 2. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle (See: Maintenance/Vehicle Lifting/Service and Repair). 3. Disengage tension on the radiator outlet hose clamp (1) at the radiator using J 38185 - Hose Clamp Pliers. 4. Remove the radiator outlet hose (2) from the radiator. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Radiator Inlet Hose Replacement > Page 2541 5. Disengage tension on the radiator outlet hose clamp (1) at the engine using J 38185 - Hose Clamp Pliers. 6. Remove the radiator outlet hose (2) from the engine. 7. Remove the radiator outlet hose from the vehicle. Installation Procedure 1. Install radiator outlet hose to the vehicle. Note: Lubricate the inside diameters of the hose with clean coolant prior to installation. 2. Install the radiator outlet hose (2) to the engine. 3. Engage tension on the radiator outlet hose clamp (1) at the engine using J 38185 - Hose Clamp Pliers. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Radiator Inlet Hose Replacement > Page 2542 4. Install the radiator outlet hose (2) to the radiator. 5. Engage tension on the radiator outlet hose clamp (1) at the radiator using J 38185 - Hose Clamp Pliers. 6. Lower the vehicle. 7. Fill the cooling system. Refer to Cooling System Draining and Filling (Static) (See: Service and Repair/Cooling System Draining and Filling (Static))Cooling System Draining and Filling (GE 47716) (See: Service and Repair/Cooling System Draining and Filling (GE 47716)). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay: Locations Electrical Center Identification Views X50A Fuse Block - Underhood, Label Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 2547 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Service and Repair Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Service and Repair Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor Replacement (LF1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Thermostat, Engine Cooling > Component Information > Specifications Thermostat: Specifications Thermostat Diagnosis The 188 tempil stick melts at 87°C (188°F). The thermostat should begin to open. The 206 tempil stick melts at 97°C (206°F). The thermostat should be fully open. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Thermostat, Engine Cooling > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2556 Thermostat: Service and Repair Engine Coolant Thermostat Replacement (LF1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Thermostat Housing, Engine Cooling > Component Information > Service and Repair Thermostat Housing: Service and Repair Engine Coolant Thermostat Housing Replacement (LF1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Water Pump > Component Information > Specifications Water Pump: Specifications Water pump bolts ................................................................................................................................ ........................................................ 10 Nm (89 lb in) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Water Pump > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2563 Water Pump: Service and Repair Water Pump Replacement (LF1) Tools Required EN 46104 - Water Pump Pulley Holder For equivalent regional tools refer to Special Tools (See: Tools and Equipment) Removal Procedure 1. Drain the cooling system. Refer to Cooling System Draining and Filling (Static) (See: Service and Repair/Cooling System Draining and Filling (Static))Cooling System Draining and Filling (GE 47716) (See: Service and Repair/Cooling System Draining and Filling (GE 47716)) 2. Remove the generator drive belt. Refer to Drive Belt Replacement (See: Engine/Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories/Drive Belt/Service and Repair) 3. Use the EN 46104 - water pump pulley holder to retain the pulley. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Water Pump > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2564 4. Remove the water pump pulley bolts. 5. Remove the water pump pulley. 6. Remove the water pump bolts. 7. Remove the water pump. 8. Remove and DISCARD the water pump seal. 9. Carefully clean the water pump sealing surfaces. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Water Pump > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2565 1. Install a NEW water pump seal. 2. Install the water pump. Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener Caution) 3. Install the water pump bolts and tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb in). 4. Install the water pump pulley and the water pump pulley bolts. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Water Pump > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2566 5. Use the EN 46104 - water pump pulley holder to hold the pulley. 6. Install the water pump pulley bolts and tighten to 12 Nm (108 lb in). 7. Install the generator drive belt. Refer to Drive Belt Replacement (See: Engine/Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories/Drive Belt/Service and Repair) 8. Fill the cooling system. Refer to Cooling System Draining and Filling (Static) (See: Service and Repair/Cooling System Draining and Filling (Static))Cooling System Draining and Filling (GE 47716) (See: Service and Repair/Cooling System Draining and Filling (GE 47716)) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Catalytic Converter > Catalyst Shield > Component Information > Service and Repair Catalyst Shield: Service and Repair Catalytic Converter Heat Shield Replacement (LF1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Exhaust Pipe > Component Information > Service and Repair Exhaust Pipe: Service and Repair Exhaust Flexible Pipe Replacement (LF1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Muffler > Component Information > Service and Repair Muffler: Service and Repair Exhaust Muffler Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Body Controls - Unable To Reprogram Body Control Module Body Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins Body Controls - Unable To Reprogram Body Control Module INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 09-08-47-001A Date: June 14, 2010 Subject: Unable to Reprogram Body Control Module (BCM), BCM Reprogramming Did Not Complete - Revised Reprogramming Instructions Models: 2006-2010 Buick Lucerne 2006-2010 Cadillac DTS 2007-2010 Cadillac Escalade, Escalade ESV, Escalade EXT, SRX 2008-2010 Cadillac CTS 2010 Cadillac CTS Wagon 2010 Chevrolet Camaro 2006-2007 Chevrolet Monte Carlo 2006-2010 Chevrolet Impala 2007-2010 Chevrolet Avalanche, Equinox, Silverado, Suburban, Tahoe 2008-2010 Chevrolet Express 2009-2010 Chevrolet Traverse 2007-2010 GMC Acadia, Sierra, Yukon, Yukon XL, Yukon Denali, Yukon Denali XL 2008-2010 GMC Savana 2010 GMC Terrain 2007-2009 Pontiac Torrent 2008-2009 Pontiac G8 2008-2009 HUMMER H2 2007-2009 Saturn OUTLOOK 2008-2009 Saturn VUE Refer to GMVIS Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the models and the model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 09-08-47-001 (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Some technicians may experience an unsuccessful body control module (BCM) reprogramming event, when choosing the Reprogram ECU selection on the Service Programming System (SPS). The technician may also notice that when attempting to reprogram the BCM again after this incident has occurred, the BCM may not complete the programming event. This condition may be caused by the following: - A reprogramming event that was interrupted due to a lack of communication between the vehicle and the TIS2WEB terminal. - The vehicle experienced low system voltage during the reprogramming event. Important Do not replace the BCM for this condition. SPS Programming Process Selection Perform this procedure first. 1. If reprogramming has failed during the initial reprogramming event, back out of the SPS application completely. 2. Re-select SPS from the TIS2WEB terminal application. 3. When selecting the Programming Process , choose Replace and Program ECU , even though a new BCM is NOT being installed. 4. Reprogram the BCM using the Service Programming System (SPS) with the latest calibration available on TIS2WEB. Refer to the SPS procedures in SI. When using a multiple diagnostic interface (MDI) for reprogramming, ensure that it is updated with the latest software version. When using a Tech 2(R) for reprogramming, ensure that it is updated with the latest software version. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Body Controls - Unable To Reprogram Body Control Module > Page 2585 During programming, the battery voltage must be maintained within the proper range of 12-15 volts. Only use the approved Midtronics(R) PSC 550 Battery Maintainer (SPS Programming Support Tool EL-49642) or equivalent during programming. BCM Still Fails to Reprogram If the BCM still fails to reprogram perform this procedure: 1. Turn OFF the ignition, and remove the key. 2. Remove the fuses that power up the following modules/components for a minimum of 2 minutes: - BCM - EBCM - ECM - IS LPS (located in the left IP fusebox) - TCM 3. Open and close the driver door. Allow enough time for the retained accessory power (RAP) to turn OFF. 4. Reinstall the fuses. 5. When selecting the Programming Process , choose Replace and Program ECU , even though a new BCM is NOT being installed. 6. Reprogram the BCM using the Service Programming System (SPS) with the latest calibration available on TIS2WEB. Refer to the SPS procedures in SI. When using a multiple diagnostic interface (MDI) for reprogramming, ensure that it is updated with the latest software version. When using a Tech 2(R) for reprogramming, ensure that it is updated with the latest software version. During programming, the battery voltage must be maintained within the proper range of 12-15 Volts. Only use the approved Midtronics(R) PSC 550 Battery Maintainer (SPS Programming Support Tool EL-49642) or equivalent during programming. Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table above. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2586 Body Control Module: Locations Instrument Panel/Center Console Component Views Lower Left of the Instrument Panel Components 1 - B80 Park Brake Switch 2 - T3 Audio Amplifier 3 - K9 Body Control Module 4 - K73 Telematics Communication Interface Control Module (UE1) 5 - B107 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor 6 T4S Wireless Communication Antenna - Bluetooth (UE1 with UPF) 7 - B22 Brake Pedal Position Sensor 8 - X84 Data Link Connector Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2587 Body Control Module: Diagrams K9 Body Control Module X1 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2588 K9 Body Control Module X2 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2589 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2590 K9 Body Control Module X3 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2591 K9 Body Control Module X4 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2592 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2593 K9 Body Control Module X5 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2594 K9 Body Control Module X6 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2595 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2596 K9 Body Control Module X7 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2597 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2598 Body Control Module: Service and Repair Body Control Module Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 09333A > May > 10 > Campaign - Evaporative Emission Diagnostics Technical Service Bulletin # 09333A Date: 100504 Campaign - Evaporative Emission Diagnostics SERVICE UPDATE Bulletin No.: 09333A Date: May 04, 2010 Subject: 09333A - Service Update for Inventory and Customer Vehicles - Evaporative Emission Diagnostics Models: 2010 Chevrolet Equinox 2010 GMC Terrain Supercede: The ECM programming service procedure in this bulletin has been revised to include instructions for dealers to contact Engineering at 734-320-8123 if programming stops prior to completion. Do NOT attempt to reprogram.Please discard all copies of bulletin 09333, issued January 2010. This service update includes vehicles in dealer inventory and customer vehicles that return to the dealership for any reason. Purpose This bulletin provides a service procedure to improve the ability of the evaporative emissions diagnostic to detect leaks by installing a fuel tank vent tubing jumper on certain 2010 model year Chevrolet Equinox and GMC Terrain vehicles. Vehicles equipped with a V6 engine will also require reprogramming of the engine control module. This service procedure should be completed as soon as possible on involved vehicles currently in dealer inventory and customer vehicles that return to the dealer for any type of service. Vehicles Involved A list of involved vehicles currently in dealer inventory is available on the "Service Update Bulletin Information" link under the "Service" tab in GM GlobalConnect (US) or attached to the GlobalConnect message (Canada) used to release this bulletin. Customer vehicles that return for service, for any reason, and are still covered under the vehicle's 8 year/80,000 mile (130,000 km) base emission warranty, and are within the VIN breakpoints provided below, should be checked for vehicle eligibility in the appropriate system listed below. Important Dealers are to confirm vehicle eligibility prior to beginning repairs by using GMVIS (dealers using WINS) or the Investigate Vehicle History link (dealers using GWM). Not all vehicles within the above breakpoints may be involved. Parts Information Parts required to complete this service update are to be obtained from General Motors Service and Parts Operations (GMSPO). Please refer to your "involved vehicles listing" before ordering parts. Normal orders should be placed on a DRO = Daily Replenishment Order. In an emergency situation, parts should be ordered on a CSO = Customer Special Order. Claim Information For vehicles repaired under the 8 year/80,000 mile (130,000 km) emission warranty: 1. Submit a claim using the table below. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 09333A > May > 10 > Campaign - Evaporative Emission Diagnostics > Page 2607 2. Courtesy Transportation - For dealers using WINS, submit using normal labor code; for dealers using GWM - submit as Net Item under the repair labor code. Disclaimer Service Procedure Service Procedure 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle in SI. 2. Locate the fuel tank EVAP emissions canister (1) and fuel tank EVAP vapor line connection (2). 3. Disconnect the 16 mm (5/8 in) quick connect vapor line (2) from the front of EVAP emissions canister (1). 4. Identify all parts included in the EVAP jumper hose assembly kit. The kit contains two EVAP jumper hoses and three tie straps. There is a large diameter 16 mm (5/8 in) EVAP jumper hose (1) with a 45 degree T-fitting (2) and a small diameter 8 mm (5/16 in) EVAP jumper hose with a T-fitting (3). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 09333A > May > 10 > Campaign - Evaporative Emission Diagnostics > Page 2608 5. Connect the new 16 mm (5/8 in) EVAP jumper hose (larger diameter hose) (2) to the EVAP emissions canister (1). 6. Install the second piece of the new 8 mm (5/16 in) jumper hose (smaller diameter hose) (3) to the 45 degree T-fitting on the new 16 mm (5/8 in) EVAP jumper hose (2). Ensure that the new 8 mm (5/16 in) jumper hose (3) is installed between the new 16 mm (5/8 in) EVAP jumper hose (2) and floor pan. 7. Insert the non-connector end of the 16 mm (5/8 in) EVAP jumper hose (larger diameter hose) (2) into the existing EVAP vapor line (4). 8. Secure the new jumper hose assembly with a tie strap (6) through the hole in brake clip (5) on LH underbody rail. Avoid contacting the brake or fuel line with the tie wrap. 9. Cut off excess tie strap (6). 10. Route the 8 mm (5/16 in) hose (3) on top of the fuel feed line on the left (driver's) side of the fuel tank assembly. 11. Continue routing the 8 mm (5/16 in) hose (3) through the suspension on the front side of the underbody rail and behind the tank and all-wheel drive unit. Follow the path of the park brake cable. The 8 mm (5/16 in) line should be routed on top of the park brake cable routing. 12. Disconnect the existing EVAP-to-fuel tank vapor line (yellow connector) located on the rear right (passenger side) of vehicle at the fuel tank. 13. Connect the new 8 mm (5/16 in) hose (3) to the fuel tank. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 09333A > May > 10 > Campaign - Evaporative Emission Diagnostics > Page 2609 14. Connect the existing EVAP hose to the T-fitting on the new 8 mm (5/16 in) hose. Caution Ensure that the 8 mm (5/16 in) hose (3) is tucked in over the park brake cable to prevent the hose from sagging over the fuel tank cutout area. 15. Secure the 8 mm (5/16 in) hose (3) to the parking brake line at the left (driver's) (A) and right (passenger' side) (B) fuel tank strap locations (9) with two tie straps (8) as shown in the illustration. 16. Lower the vehicle. 17. Determine if the vehicle is equipped with a four or six cylinder engine. - If the vehicle is equipped with a four cylinder engine, no further action is required. Refer to the Claim section of the bulletin. - If the vehicle is equipped with a six cylinder engine, refer to ECM Programming Service Procedure in this bulletin. ECM PROGRAMMING SERVICE PROCEDURE Do not attempt to order the calibration number from GMSPO. The calibration numbers required for this service procedure are programmed into control modules via a Multiple Diagnostic Interface (MDI) and TIS2WEB with the calibration update. Use TIS2WEB on or after 01/07/10 to obtain the calibration. If you cannot access the calibration, call the Techline Customer Support Center and it will be provided. If programming stops prior to completion, contact Engineering at 734-320-8123. Do NOT attempt to reprogram. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 09333A > May > 10 > Campaign - Evaporative Emission Diagnostics > Page 2610 For step-by-step programming instructions, please refer to SI and the Techline Information System (TIS) terminal. 1. Verify that there is a battery charge of 12 to 16 volts. The battery must be able to maintain a charge during programming. Only use an approved Midtronic 165-PSC charger to maintain proper battery voltage during programming. 2. Reprogram the engine control module (ECM). Refer to SI and Service Programming System (SPS) documentation for programming instructions, if required. 1. Connect the MDI to the vehicle. Note Select J2534 MDI and Reprogram ECU from the Select Diagnostic Tool and Programming Process screen. 2. Select J2534 MDI and Reprogram ECU from the Select Diagnostic Tool and Programming Process screen. 3. Select ECM Engine Control Module - Programming from the Supported Controllers screen. 4. Follow the on-screen instructions. 3. Use MDI and GDS to clear all DTCs if required. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 04-06-04-054B > Nov > 10 > Engine Controls Aftermarket Accessory Usage Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - Aftermarket Accessory Usage INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 04-06-04-054B Date: November 18, 2010 Subject: Info - Non-GM Parts and Accessories (Aftermarket) Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add model years and update to the new U.S. Fixed Operation Manager (FOM) and Canada Warranty Manager (WM) names. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 04-06-04-054A (Section 06 - Engine/Propulsion System). The recent rise and expansion of companies selling non-GM parts and accessories has made it necessary to issue this reminder to dealers regarding GM's policy on the use and installation of these aftermarket components. When a dealer is performing a repair under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty, they are required to use only genuine GM or GM-approved parts and accessories. This applies to all warranty repairs, special policy repairs or any repairs paid for by GM. Parts and accessories advertised as being "the same" as parts manufactured by GM, but not sold through GM, do not qualify for use in warranty repairs, special policy repairs or any repairs paid for by GM. During a warranty repair, if a GM original equipment part is not available through GM Customer Care and Aftersales (GM CC&A;), ACDelco(R) distributors, other GM dealers or approved sources, the dealer is to obtain comparable, non-GM parts and clearly indicate, in detail, on the repair order the circumstances surrounding why non-GM parts were used. The dealer must give customers written notice, prior to the sale or service, that such parts or accessories are not marketed or warranted by General Motors. It should also be noted that dealers modifying new vehicles and installing equipment, parts and accessories obtained from sources not authorized by GM are responsible for complying with the National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act. Certain non-approved parts or assemblies, installed by the dealer or its agent not authorized by GM, may result in a change to the vehicle's design characteristics and may affect the vehicle's ability to conform to federal law. Dealers must fully understand that non-GM approved parts may not have been validated, tested or certified for use. This puts the dealer at risk for potential liability in the event of a part or vehicle failure. If a GM part failure occurs as the result of the installation or use of a non-GM approved part, the warranty will not be honored. A good example of non-authorized modification of vehicles is the result of an ever increasing supply of aftermarket devices available to the customer, which claim to increase the horsepower and torque of the Duramax(TM) Diesel Engines. These include the addition of, but are not limited to one or more of the following modifications: - Propane injection - Nitrous oxide injection - Additional modules (black boxes) that connect to the vehicle wiring systems - Revised engine calibrations downloaded for the engine control module - Calibration modules which connect to the vehicle diagnostic connector - Modification to the engine turbocharger waste gate Although the installation of these devices, or modification of vehicle components, can increase engine horsepower and torque, they may also negatively affect the engine emissions, reliability and/or durability. In addition, other powertrain components, such as transmissions, universal joints, drive shafts, and front/rear axle components, can be stressed beyond design safety limits by the installation of these devices. General Motors does not support or endorse the use of devices or modifications that, when installed, increase the engine horsepower and torque. It is because of these unknown stresses, and the potential to alter reliability, durability and emissions performance, that GM has adopted a policy that prevents any UNAUTHORIZED dealer warranty claim submissions to any remaining warranty coverage, to the powertrain and driveline components whenever the presence of a non-GM (aftermarket) calibration is confirmed - even if the non-GM control module calibration is subsequently removed. Refer to the latest version of Bulletin 09-06-04-026 (V8 Gas Engines) or 06-06-01-007 (Duramax(TM) Diesel Engines) for more information on dealer requirements for calibration verification. These same policies apply as they relate to the use of non-GM accessories. Damage or failure from the use or installation of a non-GM accessory will not be covered under warranty. Failure resulting from the alteration or modification of the vehicle, including the cutting, welding or disconnecting of the vehicle's original equipment parts and components will void the warranty. Additionally, dealers will NOT be reimbursed or compensated by GM in the event of any legal inquiry at either the local, state or federal level that Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 04-06-04-054B > Nov > 10 > Engine Controls Aftermarket Accessory Usage > Page 2616 results from the alteration or modification of a vehicle using non-GM approved parts or accessories. Dealers should be especially cautious of accessory companies that claim the installation of their product will not void the factory warranty. Many times these companies have even given direction on how to quickly disassemble the accessory in an attempt to preclude the manufacturer from finding out that is has been installed. Any suspect repairs should be reviewed by the Fixed Operations Manager (FOM), and in Canada by the Warranty Manager (WM) for appropriate repair direction. If it is decided that a goodwill repair is to be made on the vehicle, even with the installation of such non-GM approved components, the customer is to be made aware of General Motors position on this issue and is to sign the appropriate goodwill documentation required by General Motors. It is imperative for dealers to understand that by installing such devices, they are jeopardizing not only the warranty coverage, but also the performance and reliability of the customer's vehicle. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 09-06-04-026C > Aug > 10 > Engine/Transmission Aftermarket Calibrations Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine/Transmission - Aftermarket Calibrations INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 09-06-04-026C Date: August 13, 2010 Subject: Identifying Non-GM (Aftermarket) Engine and Transmission Calibrations for V8 Gas Engines Using Tech 2(R) or Global Diagnostic System (GDS) Models: 2006-2011 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (Excluding Saab 9-7X) 2006-2009 HUMMER H2 2006-2010 HUMMER H3 Equipped with V8 Gas Powered Engines Only Attention: This bulletin applies to V8 gas powered engines ONLY. For Duramax(TM) diesel powered engines, refer to the latest version of Corporate Bulletin Number 08-06-04-006G. Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2011 model year. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 09-06-04-026A (Section 06 - Engine/Propulsion System). General Motors is identifying an increasing number of engine, transmission and catalytic converter part failures that are the result of non-GM (aftermarket) engine and transmission control calibrations being used. When alteration to the GM-released engine or transmission control calibrations occurs, it subjects powertrain and driveline components (engine , transmission, transfer case, driveshaft and rear axle) to stresses that were not tested by General Motors. It is because of these unknown stresses, and the potential to alter reliability, durability and emissions performance, that GM has adopted a policy that prevents any UNAUTHORIZED dealer warranty claim submissions to any remaining warranty coverage, to the powertrain and driveline components whenever the presence of a non-GM (aftermarket) calibration is confirmed - even if the non-GM control module calibration is subsequently removed. Warranty coverage is based on the equipment and calibrations that were released on the vehicle at time of sale, or subsequently updated by GM. That's because GM testing and validation matches the calibration to a host of criteria that is essential to assure reliability, durability and emissions performance over the life of the warranty coverage and beyond. Stresses resulting from calibrations different from those tested and released by GM can damage or weaken components, leading to poor performance and or shortened life. Additionally, non-GM (aftermarket) issued engine control modifications often do not meet the same emissions performance standards as GM issued calibrations. Depending on state statutes, individuals who install engine control module calibrations that put the vehicle outside the parameters of emissions certification standards may be subject to fines and/or penalties. This bulletin outlines a procedure to identify the presence of non-GM (aftermarket) calibrations. GM recommends performing this check whenever a hard part failure is seen on internal engine or transmission components, or before an engine assembly or transmission assembly is being replaced under warranty. It is also recommended that the engine calibration verification procedure be performed whenever diagnostics indicate that catalytic converter replacement is indicated. The PQC has a process to confirm the ECM/PCM calibration is GM issued. The PQC will require a picture of the engine calibration verification screen, as outlined in this bulletin, before authorizing any V8 gas powered engine replacement. If a non-GM calibration is found and verification has taken place through GM, the remaining powertrain and driveline warranty will be blocked and notated in GMVIS and the dealership will be notified. This block prevents any UNAUTHORIZED warranty claim submission. 1. Connect the Tech 2(R) to the vehicle. 2. Go to: Diagnostics and build the vehicle. 3. Select: Powertrain. 4. Select: Engine. 5. *Select: Engine Control Module or PCM. 6. *Select: Module ID Information or I/M Information System if the Module ID Information selection is not available. 7. *If "I/M information System" was selected, it may be necessary to select "Vehicle Information" in order to display the calibration information. ‹› If the CVN information is displayed as "N/A", it will be necessary to contact the TCSC to obtain the CVN information. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 09-06-04-026C > Aug > 10 > Engine/Transmission Aftermarket Calibrations > Page 2621 8. Take a CLEAR digital picture of the Tech 2(R) Vehicle Information screen showing the engine Calibration IDs and Verification Numbers as shown above. Retain the printout information and the Tech 2(R) screen photograph with the repair order. Note All pictures must be sent as a.jpg file. 9. E-mail a copy of the picture to [email protected]. In the subject line of the e-mail include the phrase "V8 Cal" as well as the complete VIN and Dealer BAC. In the body of the e-mail, include the VIN, mileage, R.O. number and BAC. Include a brief description of the customer concern and cause of the concern. Note The dealer will receive an e-mail reply after the calibrations have been validated. The e-mail reply will advise the dealer if the calibrations are OEM. 10. Allow two hours for the PQC to verify the calibrations and set up the case details. ‹› If the PQC determines that the calibrations ARE aftermarket calibrations, DO NOT contact GM Technical Assistance to discuss warranty concerns on the aftermarket calibrations. ALL questions and concerns about warranty should be directed to the dealers Fixed Operations Manager (FOM), (Warranty Manager (WM) in Canada). 11. You may call the PQC two hours after submitting the e-mail for authorization to replace the assembly. This will provide them time to receive, review and set up a case on the request. Please be prepared to provide all the usual documentation that is normally required when requesting an assembly authorization from the PQC. Tech 2(R) Displaying All Zeroes for the Verification Numbers on the Calibration ID and Verification Number Screen If the Tech 2(R) that you are using displays all zeroes for the Verification Numbers as shown, then perform the following steps: 1. Update the Tech 2(R) with the latest software from TIS2WEB. 2. Turn OFF the ignition for 90 seconds. 3. Connect the Tech 2(R) to the vehicle. 4. Turn ON the ignition, and build the vehicle. Observe the Tech 2(R) Calibration ID and Verification Number screen for proper operation. ‹› If the Tech 2(R) screen still does not display properly, then turn OFF the ignition for 90 seconds again. Turn ON the ignition and observe the same screen for proper operation. Retrieving Calibrations From a Global A Vehicle This information applies to the 2010 Camaro and is typical of the procedure that will be used on Global A vehicles. 1. Turn OFF the ignition. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 09-06-04-026C > Aug > 10 > Engine/Transmission Aftermarket Calibrations > Page 2622 2. Connect the MDI to the Data Link Connector (DLC) of the vehicle. Note Use the USB port to make the following MDI connection: 3. Connect the MDI to a PC or laptop that has been downloaded with the GDS application from TIS2WEB. Note At least one Diagnostic Package must be installed on the PC to perform diagnostics. If GDS was just installed, select: Add New Diagnostic Package and then select: a Diagnostic Package to download. 4. Click: On the GDS icon on the PC. 5. The Login Page will appear. 6. Select: A User. 7. The ID Screen will appear. 8. Select: The serial number of the MDI being used. 9. Select: Connect. 10. Verify that the system status is ready by observing for a flashing PC light icon on the MDI. 11. Select: Make, Model and Model Year, in order to build the vehicle. 12. Click: Upload VIN, to allow the VIN to be reported to the PC. 13. At: The Verification step, turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. 14. Select: Next Action. 15. The Home Page will appear. 16. Select: Next. 17. The Diagnostic Screen will appear. Note Due to vehicle build, software and RPO variations, GDS may ask for additional information in Step 18. 18. Select: Engine ID, if prompted. 19. Select: Module Diagnostics. 20. Select: ECM. 21. Select: ID Information. 22. The Diagnostics page will appear. Typical View of GDS Calibration History Screen Note GDS is capable of displaying up to 10 Calibration History events. 23. Select: Calibration History from the drop down menu in order to display the following items on the screen: - Calibration History Buffer - Number of Calibration History Events Stored - Calibration Part Number History - Calibration Verification Number History 24. Select: Screenshot. 25. Name and save the file in an appropriate folder. 26. Select : Print, and retain a copy of the screenshot with the repair order. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 09-06-04-026C > Aug > 10 > Engine/Transmission Aftermarket Calibrations > Page 2623 Note All pictures must be sent as a.jpg file. 27. E-mail a copy of the screenshot to [email protected]. In the subject line of the e-mail include the phrase "V8 Cal" as well as the complete VIN and Dealer BAC. In the body of the e-mail, include the VIN, mileage, R.O. number and BAC. Include a brief description of the customer concern and cause of the concern. Note The dealer will receive an e-mail reply after the calibrations have been validated. The e-mail reply will advise the dealer if the calibrations are OEM. 28. Allow two hours for the PQC to verify the calibrations and set up the case details. ‹› If the PQC determines that the calibrations ARE aftermarket calibrations, DO NOT contact GM Technical Assistance to discuss warranty concerns on the aftermarket calibrations. ALL questions and concerns about warranty should be directed to the dealers Fixed Operations Manager (FOM), (Warranty Manager (WM) in Canada). 29. You may call the PQC two hours after submitting the e-mail for authorization to replace the assembly. This will provide them time to receive, review and set up a case on the request. Please be prepared to provide all the usual documentation that is normally required when requesting an assembly authorization from the PQC. Warranty Information - The Dealership Service Management must be involved in any situation that would justify the use of labor operation Z1111. - Notify the Fixed Operations Manager (FOM) (Warranty Manager (WM) in Canada) of the situation. - All claims will have to be routed to the FOM (WM in Canada) for approval. - Please refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 09-00-89-016, Labor Operation Z1111 - Suspected Tampering or Vehicle Modifications for important information. For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 09333A > May > 10 > Campaign - Evaporative Emission Diagnostics Technical Service Bulletin # 09333A Date: 100504 Campaign - Evaporative Emission Diagnostics SERVICE UPDATE Bulletin No.: 09333A Date: May 04, 2010 Subject: 09333A - Service Update for Inventory and Customer Vehicles - Evaporative Emission Diagnostics Models: 2010 Chevrolet Equinox 2010 GMC Terrain Supercede: The ECM programming service procedure in this bulletin has been revised to include instructions for dealers to contact Engineering at 734-320-8123 if programming stops prior to completion. Do NOT attempt to reprogram.Please discard all copies of bulletin 09333, issued January 2010. This service update includes vehicles in dealer inventory and customer vehicles that return to the dealership for any reason. Purpose This bulletin provides a service procedure to improve the ability of the evaporative emissions diagnostic to detect leaks by installing a fuel tank vent tubing jumper on certain 2010 model year Chevrolet Equinox and GMC Terrain vehicles. Vehicles equipped with a V6 engine will also require reprogramming of the engine control module. This service procedure should be completed as soon as possible on involved vehicles currently in dealer inventory and customer vehicles that return to the dealer for any type of service. Vehicles Involved A list of involved vehicles currently in dealer inventory is available on the "Service Update Bulletin Information" link under the "Service" tab in GM GlobalConnect (US) or attached to the GlobalConnect message (Canada) used to release this bulletin. Customer vehicles that return for service, for any reason, and are still covered under the vehicle's 8 year/80,000 mile (130,000 km) base emission warranty, and are within the VIN breakpoints provided below, should be checked for vehicle eligibility in the appropriate system listed below. Important Dealers are to confirm vehicle eligibility prior to beginning repairs by using GMVIS (dealers using WINS) or the Investigate Vehicle History link (dealers using GWM). Not all vehicles within the above breakpoints may be involved. Parts Information Parts required to complete this service update are to be obtained from General Motors Service and Parts Operations (GMSPO). Please refer to your "involved vehicles listing" before ordering parts. Normal orders should be placed on a DRO = Daily Replenishment Order. In an emergency situation, parts should be ordered on a CSO = Customer Special Order. Claim Information For vehicles repaired under the 8 year/80,000 mile (130,000 km) emission warranty: 1. Submit a claim using the table below. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 09333A > May > 10 > Campaign - Evaporative Emission Diagnostics > Page 2628 2. Courtesy Transportation - For dealers using WINS, submit using normal labor code; for dealers using GWM - submit as Net Item under the repair labor code. Disclaimer Service Procedure Service Procedure 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle in SI. 2. Locate the fuel tank EVAP emissions canister (1) and fuel tank EVAP vapor line connection (2). 3. Disconnect the 16 mm (5/8 in) quick connect vapor line (2) from the front of EVAP emissions canister (1). 4. Identify all parts included in the EVAP jumper hose assembly kit. The kit contains two EVAP jumper hoses and three tie straps. There is a large diameter 16 mm (5/8 in) EVAP jumper hose (1) with a 45 degree T-fitting (2) and a small diameter 8 mm (5/16 in) EVAP jumper hose with a T-fitting (3). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 09333A > May > 10 > Campaign - Evaporative Emission Diagnostics > Page 2629 5. Connect the new 16 mm (5/8 in) EVAP jumper hose (larger diameter hose) (2) to the EVAP emissions canister (1). 6. Install the second piece of the new 8 mm (5/16 in) jumper hose (smaller diameter hose) (3) to the 45 degree T-fitting on the new 16 mm (5/8 in) EVAP jumper hose (2). Ensure that the new 8 mm (5/16 in) jumper hose (3) is installed between the new 16 mm (5/8 in) EVAP jumper hose (2) and floor pan. 7. Insert the non-connector end of the 16 mm (5/8 in) EVAP jumper hose (larger diameter hose) (2) into the existing EVAP vapor line (4). 8. Secure the new jumper hose assembly with a tie strap (6) through the hole in brake clip (5) on LH underbody rail. Avoid contacting the brake or fuel line with the tie wrap. 9. Cut off excess tie strap (6). 10. Route the 8 mm (5/16 in) hose (3) on top of the fuel feed line on the left (driver's) side of the fuel tank assembly. 11. Continue routing the 8 mm (5/16 in) hose (3) through the suspension on the front side of the underbody rail and behind the tank and all-wheel drive unit. Follow the path of the park brake cable. The 8 mm (5/16 in) line should be routed on top of the park brake cable routing. 12. Disconnect the existing EVAP-to-fuel tank vapor line (yellow connector) located on the rear right (passenger side) of vehicle at the fuel tank. 13. Connect the new 8 mm (5/16 in) hose (3) to the fuel tank. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 09333A > May > 10 > Campaign - Evaporative Emission Diagnostics > Page 2630 14. Connect the existing EVAP hose to the T-fitting on the new 8 mm (5/16 in) hose. Caution Ensure that the 8 mm (5/16 in) hose (3) is tucked in over the park brake cable to prevent the hose from sagging over the fuel tank cutout area. 15. Secure the 8 mm (5/16 in) hose (3) to the parking brake line at the left (driver's) (A) and right (passenger' side) (B) fuel tank strap locations (9) with two tie straps (8) as shown in the illustration. 16. Lower the vehicle. 17. Determine if the vehicle is equipped with a four or six cylinder engine. - If the vehicle is equipped with a four cylinder engine, no further action is required. Refer to the Claim section of the bulletin. - If the vehicle is equipped with a six cylinder engine, refer to ECM Programming Service Procedure in this bulletin. ECM PROGRAMMING SERVICE PROCEDURE Do not attempt to order the calibration number from GMSPO. The calibration numbers required for this service procedure are programmed into control modules via a Multiple Diagnostic Interface (MDI) and TIS2WEB with the calibration update. Use TIS2WEB on or after 01/07/10 to obtain the calibration. If you cannot access the calibration, call the Techline Customer Support Center and it will be provided. If programming stops prior to completion, contact Engineering at 734-320-8123. Do NOT attempt to reprogram. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 09333A > May > 10 > Campaign - Evaporative Emission Diagnostics > Page 2631 For step-by-step programming instructions, please refer to SI and the Techline Information System (TIS) terminal. 1. Verify that there is a battery charge of 12 to 16 volts. The battery must be able to maintain a charge during programming. Only use an approved Midtronic 165-PSC charger to maintain proper battery voltage during programming. 2. Reprogram the engine control module (ECM). Refer to SI and Service Programming System (SPS) documentation for programming instructions, if required. 1. Connect the MDI to the vehicle. Note Select J2534 MDI and Reprogram ECU from the Select Diagnostic Tool and Programming Process screen. 2. Select J2534 MDI and Reprogram ECU from the Select Diagnostic Tool and Programming Process screen. 3. Select ECM Engine Control Module - Programming from the Supported Controllers screen. 4. Follow the on-screen instructions. 3. Use MDI and GDS to clear all DTCs if required. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 04-06-04-054B > Nov > 10 > Engine Controls Aftermarket Accessory Usage Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - Aftermarket Accessory Usage INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 04-06-04-054B Date: November 18, 2010 Subject: Info - Non-GM Parts and Accessories (Aftermarket) Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add model years and update to the new U.S. Fixed Operation Manager (FOM) and Canada Warranty Manager (WM) names. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 04-06-04-054A (Section 06 - Engine/Propulsion System). The recent rise and expansion of companies selling non-GM parts and accessories has made it necessary to issue this reminder to dealers regarding GM's policy on the use and installation of these aftermarket components. When a dealer is performing a repair under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty, they are required to use only genuine GM or GM-approved parts and accessories. This applies to all warranty repairs, special policy repairs or any repairs paid for by GM. Parts and accessories advertised as being "the same" as parts manufactured by GM, but not sold through GM, do not qualify for use in warranty repairs, special policy repairs or any repairs paid for by GM. During a warranty repair, if a GM original equipment part is not available through GM Customer Care and Aftersales (GM CC&A;), ACDelco(R) distributors, other GM dealers or approved sources, the dealer is to obtain comparable, non-GM parts and clearly indicate, in detail, on the repair order the circumstances surrounding why non-GM parts were used. The dealer must give customers written notice, prior to the sale or service, that such parts or accessories are not marketed or warranted by General Motors. It should also be noted that dealers modifying new vehicles and installing equipment, parts and accessories obtained from sources not authorized by GM are responsible for complying with the National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act. Certain non-approved parts or assemblies, installed by the dealer or its agent not authorized by GM, may result in a change to the vehicle's design characteristics and may affect the vehicle's ability to conform to federal law. Dealers must fully understand that non-GM approved parts may not have been validated, tested or certified for use. This puts the dealer at risk for potential liability in the event of a part or vehicle failure. If a GM part failure occurs as the result of the installation or use of a non-GM approved part, the warranty will not be honored. A good example of non-authorized modification of vehicles is the result of an ever increasing supply of aftermarket devices available to the customer, which claim to increase the horsepower and torque of the Duramax(TM) Diesel Engines. These include the addition of, but are not limited to one or more of the following modifications: - Propane injection - Nitrous oxide injection - Additional modules (black boxes) that connect to the vehicle wiring systems - Revised engine calibrations downloaded for the engine control module - Calibration modules which connect to the vehicle diagnostic connector - Modification to the engine turbocharger waste gate Although the installation of these devices, or modification of vehicle components, can increase engine horsepower and torque, they may also negatively affect the engine emissions, reliability and/or durability. In addition, other powertrain components, such as transmissions, universal joints, drive shafts, and front/rear axle components, can be stressed beyond design safety limits by the installation of these devices. General Motors does not support or endorse the use of devices or modifications that, when installed, increase the engine horsepower and torque. It is because of these unknown stresses, and the potential to alter reliability, durability and emissions performance, that GM has adopted a policy that prevents any UNAUTHORIZED dealer warranty claim submissions to any remaining warranty coverage, to the powertrain and driveline components whenever the presence of a non-GM (aftermarket) calibration is confirmed - even if the non-GM control module calibration is subsequently removed. Refer to the latest version of Bulletin 09-06-04-026 (V8 Gas Engines) or 06-06-01-007 (Duramax(TM) Diesel Engines) for more information on dealer requirements for calibration verification. These same policies apply as they relate to the use of non-GM accessories. Damage or failure from the use or installation of a non-GM accessory will not be covered under warranty. Failure resulting from the alteration or modification of the vehicle, including the cutting, welding or disconnecting of the vehicle's original equipment parts and components will void the warranty. Additionally, dealers will NOT be reimbursed or compensated by GM in the event of any legal inquiry at either the local, state or federal level that Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 04-06-04-054B > Nov > 10 > Engine Controls Aftermarket Accessory Usage > Page 2637 results from the alteration or modification of a vehicle using non-GM approved parts or accessories. Dealers should be especially cautious of accessory companies that claim the installation of their product will not void the factory warranty. Many times these companies have even given direction on how to quickly disassemble the accessory in an attempt to preclude the manufacturer from finding out that is has been installed. Any suspect repairs should be reviewed by the Fixed Operations Manager (FOM), and in Canada by the Warranty Manager (WM) for appropriate repair direction. If it is decided that a goodwill repair is to be made on the vehicle, even with the installation of such non-GM approved components, the customer is to be made aware of General Motors position on this issue and is to sign the appropriate goodwill documentation required by General Motors. It is imperative for dealers to understand that by installing such devices, they are jeopardizing not only the warranty coverage, but also the performance and reliability of the customer's vehicle. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 09-06-04-026C > Aug > 10 > Engine/Transmission Aftermarket Calibrations Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine/Transmission - Aftermarket Calibrations INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 09-06-04-026C Date: August 13, 2010 Subject: Identifying Non-GM (Aftermarket) Engine and Transmission Calibrations for V8 Gas Engines Using Tech 2(R) or Global Diagnostic System (GDS) Models: 2006-2011 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (Excluding Saab 9-7X) 2006-2009 HUMMER H2 2006-2010 HUMMER H3 Equipped with V8 Gas Powered Engines Only Attention: This bulletin applies to V8 gas powered engines ONLY. For Duramax(TM) diesel powered engines, refer to the latest version of Corporate Bulletin Number 08-06-04-006G. Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2011 model year. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 09-06-04-026A (Section 06 - Engine/Propulsion System). General Motors is identifying an increasing number of engine, transmission and catalytic converter part failures that are the result of non-GM (aftermarket) engine and transmission control calibrations being used. When alteration to the GM-released engine or transmission control calibrations occurs, it subjects powertrain and driveline components (engine , transmission, transfer case, driveshaft and rear axle) to stresses that were not tested by General Motors. It is because of these unknown stresses, and the potential to alter reliability, durability and emissions performance, that GM has adopted a policy that prevents any UNAUTHORIZED dealer warranty claim submissions to any remaining warranty coverage, to the powertrain and driveline components whenever the presence of a non-GM (aftermarket) calibration is confirmed - even if the non-GM control module calibration is subsequently removed. Warranty coverage is based on the equipment and calibrations that were released on the vehicle at time of sale, or subsequently updated by GM. That's because GM testing and validation matches the calibration to a host of criteria that is essential to assure reliability, durability and emissions performance over the life of the warranty coverage and beyond. Stresses resulting from calibrations different from those tested and released by GM can damage or weaken components, leading to poor performance and or shortened life. Additionally, non-GM (aftermarket) issued engine control modifications often do not meet the same emissions performance standards as GM issued calibrations. Depending on state statutes, individuals who install engine control module calibrations that put the vehicle outside the parameters of emissions certification standards may be subject to fines and/or penalties. This bulletin outlines a procedure to identify the presence of non-GM (aftermarket) calibrations. GM recommends performing this check whenever a hard part failure is seen on internal engine or transmission components, or before an engine assembly or transmission assembly is being replaced under warranty. It is also recommended that the engine calibration verification procedure be performed whenever diagnostics indicate that catalytic converter replacement is indicated. The PQC has a process to confirm the ECM/PCM calibration is GM issued. The PQC will require a picture of the engine calibration verification screen, as outlined in this bulletin, before authorizing any V8 gas powered engine replacement. If a non-GM calibration is found and verification has taken place through GM, the remaining powertrain and driveline warranty will be blocked and notated in GMVIS and the dealership will be notified. This block prevents any UNAUTHORIZED warranty claim submission. 1. Connect the Tech 2(R) to the vehicle. 2. Go to: Diagnostics and build the vehicle. 3. Select: Powertrain. 4. Select: Engine. 5. *Select: Engine Control Module or PCM. 6. *Select: Module ID Information or I/M Information System if the Module ID Information selection is not available. 7. *If "I/M information System" was selected, it may be necessary to select "Vehicle Information" in order to display the calibration information. ‹› If the CVN information is displayed as "N/A", it will be necessary to contact the TCSC to obtain the CVN information. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 09-06-04-026C > Aug > 10 > Engine/Transmission Aftermarket Calibrations > Page 2642 8. Take a CLEAR digital picture of the Tech 2(R) Vehicle Information screen showing the engine Calibration IDs and Verification Numbers as shown above. Retain the printout information and the Tech 2(R) screen photograph with the repair order. Note All pictures must be sent as a.jpg file. 9. E-mail a copy of the picture to [email protected]. In the subject line of the e-mail include the phrase "V8 Cal" as well as the complete VIN and Dealer BAC. In the body of the e-mail, include the VIN, mileage, R.O. number and BAC. Include a brief description of the customer concern and cause of the concern. Note The dealer will receive an e-mail reply after the calibrations have been validated. The e-mail reply will advise the dealer if the calibrations are OEM. 10. Allow two hours for the PQC to verify the calibrations and set up the case details. ‹› If the PQC determines that the calibrations ARE aftermarket calibrations, DO NOT contact GM Technical Assistance to discuss warranty concerns on the aftermarket calibrations. ALL questions and concerns about warranty should be directed to the dealers Fixed Operations Manager (FOM), (Warranty Manager (WM) in Canada). 11. You may call the PQC two hours after submitting the e-mail for authorization to replace the assembly. This will provide them time to receive, review and set up a case on the request. Please be prepared to provide all the usual documentation that is normally required when requesting an assembly authorization from the PQC. Tech 2(R) Displaying All Zeroes for the Verification Numbers on the Calibration ID and Verification Number Screen If the Tech 2(R) that you are using displays all zeroes for the Verification Numbers as shown, then perform the following steps: 1. Update the Tech 2(R) with the latest software from TIS2WEB. 2. Turn OFF the ignition for 90 seconds. 3. Connect the Tech 2(R) to the vehicle. 4. Turn ON the ignition, and build the vehicle. Observe the Tech 2(R) Calibration ID and Verification Number screen for proper operation. ‹› If the Tech 2(R) screen still does not display properly, then turn OFF the ignition for 90 seconds again. Turn ON the ignition and observe the same screen for proper operation. Retrieving Calibrations From a Global A Vehicle This information applies to the 2010 Camaro and is typical of the procedure that will be used on Global A vehicles. 1. Turn OFF the ignition. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 09-06-04-026C > Aug > 10 > Engine/Transmission Aftermarket Calibrations > Page 2643 2. Connect the MDI to the Data Link Connector (DLC) of the vehicle. Note Use the USB port to make the following MDI connection: 3. Connect the MDI to a PC or laptop that has been downloaded with the GDS application from TIS2WEB. Note At least one Diagnostic Package must be installed on the PC to perform diagnostics. If GDS was just installed, select: Add New Diagnostic Package and then select: a Diagnostic Package to download. 4. Click: On the GDS icon on the PC. 5. The Login Page will appear. 6. Select: A User. 7. The ID Screen will appear. 8. Select: The serial number of the MDI being used. 9. Select: Connect. 10. Verify that the system status is ready by observing for a flashing PC light icon on the MDI. 11. Select: Make, Model and Model Year, in order to build the vehicle. 12. Click: Upload VIN, to allow the VIN to be reported to the PC. 13. At: The Verification step, turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. 14. Select: Next Action. 15. The Home Page will appear. 16. Select: Next. 17. The Diagnostic Screen will appear. Note Due to vehicle build, software and RPO variations, GDS may ask for additional information in Step 18. 18. Select: Engine ID, if prompted. 19. Select: Module Diagnostics. 20. Select: ECM. 21. Select: ID Information. 22. The Diagnostics page will appear. Typical View of GDS Calibration History Screen Note GDS is capable of displaying up to 10 Calibration History events. 23. Select: Calibration History from the drop down menu in order to display the following items on the screen: - Calibration History Buffer - Number of Calibration History Events Stored - Calibration Part Number History - Calibration Verification Number History 24. Select: Screenshot. 25. Name and save the file in an appropriate folder. 26. Select : Print, and retain a copy of the screenshot with the repair order. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 09-06-04-026C > Aug > 10 > Engine/Transmission Aftermarket Calibrations > Page 2644 Note All pictures must be sent as a.jpg file. 27. E-mail a copy of the screenshot to [email protected]. In the subject line of the e-mail include the phrase "V8 Cal" as well as the complete VIN and Dealer BAC. In the body of the e-mail, include the VIN, mileage, R.O. number and BAC. Include a brief description of the customer concern and cause of the concern. Note The dealer will receive an e-mail reply after the calibrations have been validated. The e-mail reply will advise the dealer if the calibrations are OEM. 28. Allow two hours for the PQC to verify the calibrations and set up the case details. ‹› If the PQC determines that the calibrations ARE aftermarket calibrations, DO NOT contact GM Technical Assistance to discuss warranty concerns on the aftermarket calibrations. ALL questions and concerns about warranty should be directed to the dealers Fixed Operations Manager (FOM), (Warranty Manager (WM) in Canada). 29. You may call the PQC two hours after submitting the e-mail for authorization to replace the assembly. This will provide them time to receive, review and set up a case on the request. Please be prepared to provide all the usual documentation that is normally required when requesting an assembly authorization from the PQC. Warranty Information - The Dealership Service Management must be involved in any situation that would justify the use of labor operation Z1111. - Notify the Fixed Operations Manager (FOM) (Warranty Manager (WM) in Canada) of the situation. - All claims will have to be routed to the FOM (WM in Canada) for approval. - Please refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 09-00-89-016, Labor Operation Z1111 - Suspected Tampering or Vehicle Modifications for important information. For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2645 Engine Control Module: Diagrams K20 Engine Control Module X1 (LAF) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2646 K20 Engine Control Module X1 (LF1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2647 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2648 K20 Engine Control Module X2 (LAF) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2649 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2650 K20 Engine Control Module X2 (LF1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2651 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2652 K20 Engine Control Module X3 (LAF) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2653 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2654 K20 Engine Control Module X3 (LF1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2655 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2656 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2657 Engine Control Module: Description and Operation Engine Control Module Description The engine control module (ECM) interacts with many emission related components and systems, and monitors the emission related components and systems for deterioration. OBD II diagnostics monitor the system performance and a diagnostic trouble code (DTC) sets if the system performance degrades. The malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) operation and the DTC storage are dictated by the DTC type. A DTC is ranked as a Type A or Type B if the DTC is emissions related. Type C is a non-emissions related DTC. The ECM is in the engine compartment. The ECM is the control center of the engine controls system. The ECM controls the following components: * The fuel injection system * The ignition system * The emission control systems * The on-board diagnostics * The A/C and fan systems * The throttle actuation control (TAC) system The ECM constantly monitors the information from various sensors and other inputs, and controls the systems that affect the vehicle performance and the emissions. The ECM also performs diagnostic tests on various parts of the system. The ECM can recognize operational problems and alert the driver via the MIL. When the ECM detects a malfunction, the ECM stores a DTC. The condition area is identified by the particular DTC that is set. This aids the technician in making repairs. ECM Function The engine control module (ECM) can supply 5 V or 12 V to the various sensors or switches. This is done through pull-up resistors to the regulated power supplies within the ECM. In some cases, even an ordinary shop voltmeter will not give an accurate reading because the resistance is too low. Therefore, a DMM with at least 10 Mohm input impedance is required in order to ensure accurate voltage readings. The ECM controls the output circuits by controlling the ground or the power feed circuit through the transistors or a device called an output driver module. EEPROM The electronically erasable programmable read only memory (EEPROM) is a permanent memory that is physically part of the engine control module (ECM). The EEPROM contains program and calibration information that the ECM needs in order to control the powertrain operation. Special equipment, as well as the correct program and calibration for the vehicle, are required in order to reprogram the ECM. Data Link Connector (DLC) The data link connector (DLC) is a 16-pin connector that provides the technician a means of accessing serial data for aid in the diagnosis. This connector allows the technician to use a scan tool in order to monitor the various serial data parameters, and display the DTC information. The DLC is located inside of the drivers compartment, underneath the dash. Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) The malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) is inside of the instrument panel cluster (IPC). The MIL is controlled by the engine control module (ECM) and illuminates when the ECM detects a condition that affects the vehicle emissions. ECM Service Precautions The engine control module (ECM), by design, can withstand the normal current draws that are associated with the vehicle operations. However, care must be used in order to avoid overloading any of these circuits. When testing for opens or shorts, do not ground or apply voltage to any of the ECM circuits unless the diagnostic procedure instructs you to do so. These circuits should only be tested with a DMM. Emissions Diagnosis For State I/M Programs This OBD II equipped vehicle is designed to diagnose any conditions that could lead to excessive levels of the following emissions: * Hydrocarbons (HC) * Carbon monoxide (CO) * Oxides of nitrogen (NOx) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2658 * Evaporative emission (EVAP) system losses Should this vehicles on-board diagnostic system (ECM) detect a condition that could result in excessive emissions, the ECM turns ON the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) and stores a DTC that is associated with the condition. Aftermarket (Add-On) Electrical And Vacuum Equipment Caution: Do not attach add-on vacuum operated equipment to this vehicle. The use of add-on vacuum equipment may result in damage to vehicle components or systems. Caution: Connect any add-on electrically operated equipment to the vehicle's electrical system at the battery (power and ground) in order to prevent damage to the vehicle. Aftermarket, add-on, electrical and vacuum equipment is defined as any equipment installed on a vehicle after leaving the factory that connects to the vehicles electrical or vacuum systems. No allowances have been made in the vehicle design for this type of equipment. Add-on electrical equipment, even when installed to these strict guidelines, may still cause the powertrain system to malfunction. This may also include equipment not connected to the vehicle electrical system, such as portable telephones and radios. Therefore, the first step in diagnosing any powertrain condition is to eliminate all of the aftermarket electrical equipment from the vehicle. After this is done, if the problem still exists, the problem may be diagnosed in the normal manner. Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) Damage Note: In order to prevent possible electrostatic discharge damage to the engine control module (ECM), DO NOT touch the connector pins on the ECM. The electronic components that are used in the control systems are often designed to carry very low voltage. The electronic components are susceptible to damage caused by electrostatic discharge. Less than 100 V of static electricity can cause damage to some electronic components. There are several ways for a person to become statically charged. The most common methods of charging are by friction and by induction. An example of charging by friction is a person sliding across a car seat. Charging by induction occurs when a person with well insulated shoes stands near a highly charged object and momentarily touches ground. Charges of the same polarity are drained off leaving the person highly charged with the opposite polarity. Static charges can cause damage, therefore, it is important to use care when handling and testing electronic components. Emissions Control Information Label The underhood Vehicle Emissions Control Information Label contains important emission specifications and setting procedures. In the upper right corner is the exhaust emission information. This identifies the year, the manufacturing division of the engine, the displacement of the engine in liters, the class of the vehicle, and type of fuel metering system. There is also an illustrated emission components and vacuum hose schematic. This label is located in the engine compartment of every General Motors vehicle. If the label has been removed, it can be ordered from GM service parts operations (GMSPO). Underhood Inspection Note: This inspection is very important and must be done carefully and thoroughly. Perform a careful underhood inspection when performing any diagnostic procedure or diagnosing the cause of an emission test failure. This can often lead to repairing a condition without further steps. Use the following guidelines when performing an inspection: * Inspect all of the vacuum hoses for correct routing, pinches, cuts, or disconnects. * Inspect any hoses that are difficult to see. * Inspect all of the wires in the engine compartment for the following conditions: - Burned or chafed spots - Pinched wires - Contact with sharp edges - Contact with hot exhaust manifolds Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2659 Engine Control Module: Service and Repair Engine Control Module Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2660 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Application and ID Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Application and ID Electrical Center Identification Views X50A Fuse Block - Underhood, Label Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Application and ID > Page 2664 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Control Unit > Component Information > Locations Fuel Pump Control Unit: Locations Luggage Compartment/Rear of Vehicle Component Views Left Side of the Luggage Compartment Components 1 - X80R Accessory Power Receptacle - Rear Compartment 2 - K41 Parking Assist Module (UD7) 3 - M17 Liftgate Motor Assembly (TB5) 4 - K27 Fuel Pump Control Module Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Control Unit > Component Information > Locations > Page 2669 Fuel Pump Control Unit: Diagrams K27 Fuel Pump Control Module Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Control Unit > Component Information > Locations > Page 2670 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Application and ID Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Application and ID Electrical Center Identification Views X50A Fuse Block - Underhood, Label Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Application and ID > Page 2674 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Ignition System > Ignition Relay > Component Information > Locations Ignition Relay: Locations Electrical Center Identification Views X50A Fuse Block - Underhood, Label Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Ignition System > Ignition Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 2679 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Absolute Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair Absolute Pressure Sensor: Service and Repair Throttle Inlet Absolute Pressure Sensor Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Locations Instrument Panel/Center Console Component Views Lower Left of the Instrument Panel Components 1 - B80 Park Brake Switch 2 - T3 Audio Amplifier 3 - K9 Body Control Module 4 - K73 Telematics Communication Interface Control Module (UE1) 5 - B107 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor 6 T4S Wireless Communication Antenna - Bluetooth (UE1 with UPF) 7 - B22 Brake Pedal Position Sensor 8 - X84 Data Link Connector Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2688 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Diagrams B107 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2689 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Service and Repair Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Diagrams B75B Mass Air Flow/Intake Air Temperature Sensor Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2693 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Service and Repair Mass Airflow Sensor with Intake Air Temperature Sensor Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Barometric Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams Barometric Pressure Sensor: Diagrams B17 Barometric Pressure Sensor (LF1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Battery Current Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams Battery Current Sensor: Diagrams B18 Battery Current Sensor Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Disassembled Views Camshaft Position Sensor: Locations Disassembled Views Disassembled Views Camshaft Timing Components 1 - Primary Timing Chain Tensioner Bolt 2 - Left Secondary Timing Chain Shoe Bolt 3 - Right Secondary Timing Chain Tensioner 4 - Right Secondary Timing Chain Tensioner Gasket 5 - Right Secondary Timing Chain Shoe 6 - Secondary Timing Chain 7 - Camshaft Position Actuator Bolt 8 Exhaust Camshaft Position Actuator 9 - Camshaft Position Actuator Thrust Washer 10 - Intake Camshaft Position Actuator 11 - Right Secondary Timing Chain Guide 12 - Left Camshaft Intermediate Drive Shaft Sprocket 13 - Camshaft Intermediate Drive Shaft Sprocket Bolt 14 - Left Secondary Timing Chain Shoe 15 - Left Secondary Timing Chain Tensioner Gasket 16 - Left Secondary Timing Chain Tensioner Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Disassembled Views > Page 2704 17 - Left Secondary Timing Chain Guide 18 - Lower Primary Timing Chain Guide 19 - Lower Primary Timing Chain Guide Bolt 20 - Crankshaft Sprocket 21 - Primary Timing Chain 22 - Right Camshaft Intermediate Drive Shaft Sprocket 23 - Upper Primary Timing Chain Guide 24 - Primary Timing Chain Tensioner Gasket 25 - Primary Timing Chain Tensioner Engine Front Cover 1 - Water Pump Pulley Bolt 2 - Water Pump Pulley 3 - Water Pump Assembly 4 - Water Pump Pulley Gasket 5 - Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve Seal 6 - Camshaft Position Sensor Bolt 7 - Camshaft Position Sensor 8 - Camshaft Position Sensor O-ring Seal 9 - Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve Bolt 10 - Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve 11 - Engine Front Cover Gasket 12 - Engine Front Cover Locating Pin Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Disassembled Views > Page 2705 13 - Engine Front Cover 14 - Engine Front Cover Bolt 15 - Engine Front Cover Seal 16 Crankshaft Balancer 17 - Crankshaft Balancer Bolt 18 - Engine Front Cover Bolt 19 - Water Pump Bolt Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Disassembled Views > Page 2706 Camshaft Position Sensor: Locations Powertrain Component Views Powertrain Component Views Front Engine Components (LAF 1 of 2) 1 - Q38 Throttle Body 2 - G18 High Pressure Fuel Pump 3 - B23F Camshaft Position Sensor Intake 4 - B37 Engine Oil Pressure Switch 5 - B68 Knock Sensor 6 - B26 Crankshaft Position Sensor 7 - M64 Starter Motor 8 - Q2 A/C Compressor Clutch 9 - G13 Generator Left Rear Engine Components (LAF) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Disassembled Views > Page 2707 1 - T8D Ignition Coil 4 2 - T8C Ignition Coil 3 3 - T8B Ignition Coil 2 4 - T8A Ignition Coil 1 5 - Q6F Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Intake 6 - Q6E Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Exhaust 7 - B52A Heated Oxygen Sensor 1 8 - B52B Heated Oxygen Sensor 2 9 - B34 Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor 10 - B23E Camshaft Position Sensor - Exhaust 11 - Q12 Evaporative Emission Purge Solenoid Valve Right Rear of the Engine Components (LF1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Disassembled Views > Page 2708 1 - B74 Manifold Absolute Pressure Sensor 2 - T8E Ignition Coil 5 3 - T8C Ignition Coil 3 4 - Q12 Evaporative Emission Purge Solenoid Valve 5 - Q38 Throttle Body 6 - B23B Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 1 Intake 7 - B23D Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 2 Intake 8 - Q6D Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Bank 2 Intake 9 - Q6C Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Bank 2 Exhaust 10 - B23C Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 2 Exhaust 11 - Q6B Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Bank 1 Intake 12 - Q6A Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Bank 1 Exhaust 13 - B23A Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 1 Exhaust 14 - B68A Knock Sensor 1 15 - B26 Crankshaft Position Sensor 16 - T8A Ignition Coil 1 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2709 Camshaft Position Sensor: Diagrams B23A Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 1 Exhaust (LF1) B23B Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 1 Intake (LF1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2710 B23C Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 2 Exhaust (LF1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2711 B23D Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 2 Intake (LF1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2712 B23E Camshaft Position Sensor - Exhaust (LAF) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2713 B23F Camshaft Position Sensor - Intake (LAF) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2714 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Camshaft Position Sensor Replacement - Bank 2 (Left Side) Exhaust Camshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair Camshaft Position Sensor Replacement - Bank 2 (Left Side) Exhaust Camshaft Position Sensor Replacement - Bank 2 (Left Side) Exhaust Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Camshaft Position Sensor Replacement - Bank 2 (Left Side) Exhaust > Page 2717 Camshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair Camshaft Position Sensor Replacement - Bank 2 (Left Side) Intake Camshaft Position Sensor Replacement - Bank 2 (Left Side) Intake Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Camshaft Position Sensor Replacement - Bank 2 (Left Side) Exhaust > Page 2718 Camshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair Camshaft Position Sensor Replacement - Bank 1 (Right Side) Exhaust Camshaft Position Sensor Replacement - Bank 1 (Right Side) Exhaust Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Camshaft Position Sensor Replacement - Bank 2 (Left Side) Exhaust > Page 2719 Camshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair Camshaft Position Sensor Replacement - Bank 1 (Right Side) Intake Camshaft Position Sensor Replacement - Bank 1 (Right Side) Intake Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Service and Repair Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Service and Repair Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor Replacement (LF1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Disassembled Views Crankshaft Position Sensor: Locations Disassembled Views Disassembled Views Engine Covers and Component Assemblies (1 of 2) (LF1) 1 - Right Camshaft Cover Assembly 2 - Ignition Coil Bolt 3 - Ignition Coil 4 - Spark Plug 5 - Intake Manifold Assembly 6 - Left Camshaft Cover Assembly 7 - Fuel Rail Noise Shield 8 - Fuel Pump Cover 9 - Fuel Pump Cover Bolt 10 - Engine Flywheel 11 - Engine Flywheel Bolt 12 - Engine Assembly 13 - Oil Pan Assembly 14 - Engine Front Cover Assembly 15 - Crankshaft Balancer 16 Crankshaft Balancer Bolt Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Disassembled Views > Page 2727 17 - Crankshaft Position Sensor Heat Shield Bolt - Large 18 - Crankshaft Position Sensor Heat Shield 19 - Crankshaft Position Sensor Heat Shield Bolt - Small Engine Covers and Component Assemblies (2 of 2) (LF1) 1 - Water Outlet Bolt 2 - Water Outlet 3 - Water Outlet O-ring 4 - Water Outlet Seal 5 - Knock Sensor Bolt 6 - Knock Sensor 7 - Engine Coolant Heater Assembly 8 - Crankshaft Position Sensor Bolt 9 - Crankshaft Position Sensor 10 - Crankshaft Position Sensor O-ring 11 - Right Cylinder Head Assembly 12 - Right Cylinder Head Gasket 13 - Lower Fuel Rail Noise Shield 14 - Engine Cooling Thermostat Gasket 15 - Engine Cooling Thermostat 16 - Engine Cooling Thermostat Housing 17 - Engine Cooling Thermostat Bolt - Short 18 - Engine Cooling Thermostat Housing Bolt - Long Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Disassembled Views > Page 2728 19 - Fuel Feed Pipe Assembly 20 - Fuel Feed Pipe Assembly Bolt 21 - Fuel Feed Intermediate Pipe Assembly 22 - Fuel Pump Gasket 23 - Fuel Pump O-ring Seal 24 - Fuel Pump 25 - Fuel Pump Bolt 26 - Left Cylinder Head Assembly 27 - Left Cylinder Head Gasket 28 - Oil Level Indicator 29 Oil Level Indicator Handle O-ring 30 - Oil Level Indicator Tube Bolt 31 - Oil Level Indicator Tube 32 - Oil Level Indicator Tube O-ring 33 - Oil Filter Adapter Assembly 34 - Engine Short Block Assembly 35 - Oil Pump Assembly 36 - Timing Drive Assembly Camshaft Cover Assembly 250 - Left Camshaft Cover 251 - Left Camshaft Cover Gasket 252 - Right Camshaft Cover Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Disassembled Views > Page 2729 253 - Right Camshaft Cover Gasket 254 - Camshaft Cover Spark Plug Port Seal 254 - Camshaft Cover Spark Plug Port Seal 255 - Camshaft Cover Bolt 255 - Camshaft Cover Bolt 256 - Camshaft Cover Bolt Insulator 256 - Camshaft Cover Bolt Insulator 257 - Ignition Coil Bolt Thread Insert 258 Oil Fill Cap 259 - Oil Fill O-ring 259 - Oil Fill O-ring 260 - Left Camshaft Cover PCV Fitting 261 Right Camshaft Cover PCV Fitting Orifice 262 - Oil Fill Tube 263 - Left Camshaft Cover PCV Fitting O-ring 265 - Left Camshaft Housing Cover Insulator 266 - Right Camshaft Housing Cover Insulator 704 - Ignition Coil 704 - Ignition Coil 705 - Ignition Coil Bolt 705 - Ignition Coil Bolt 719 - Spark Plug 719 - Spark Plug Camshaft Timing Components Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Disassembled Views > Page 2730 1 - Primary Timing Chain Tensioner Bolt 2 - Left Secondary Timing Chain Shoe Bolt 3 - Right Secondary Timing Chain Tensioner 4 - Right Secondary Timing Chain Tensioner Gasket 5 - Right Secondary Timing Chain Shoe 6 - Secondary Timing Chain 7 - Camshaft Position Actuator Bolt 8 Exhaust Camshaft Position Actuator 9 - Camshaft Position Actuator Thrust Washer 10 - Intake Camshaft Position Actuator 11 - Right Secondary Timing Chain Guide 12 - Left Camshaft Intermediate Drive Shaft Sprocket 13 - Camshaft Intermediate Drive Shaft Sprocket Bolt 14 - Left Secondary Timing Chain Shoe 15 - Left Secondary Timing Chain Tensioner Gasket 16 - Left Secondary Timing Chain Tensioner 17 - Left Secondary Timing Chain Guide 18 - Lower Primary Timing Chain Guide 19 - Lower Primary Timing Chain Guide Bolt 20 - Crankshaft Sprocket 21 Primary Timing Chain 22 - Right Camshaft Intermediate Drive Shaft Sprocket 23 - Upper Primary Timing Chain Guide 24 - Primary Timing Chain Tensioner Gasket Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Disassembled Views > Page 2731 25 - Primary Timing Chain Tensioner Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Disassembled Views > Page 2732 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Locations Powertrain Component Views Powertrain Component Views Front Engine Components (LAF 1 of 2) 1 - Q38 Throttle Body 2 - G18 High Pressure Fuel Pump 3 - B23F Camshaft Position Sensor Intake 4 - B37 Engine Oil Pressure Switch 5 - B68 Knock Sensor 6 - B26 Crankshaft Position Sensor 7 - M64 Starter Motor 8 - Q2 A/C Compressor Clutch 9 - G13 Generator Right Rear of the Engine Components (LF1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Disassembled Views > Page 2733 1 - B74 Manifold Absolute Pressure Sensor 2 - T8E Ignition Coil 5 3 - T8C Ignition Coil 3 4 - Q12 Evaporative Emission Purge Solenoid Valve 5 - Q38 Throttle Body 6 - B23B Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 1 Intake 7 - B23D Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 2 Intake 8 - Q6D Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Bank 2 Intake 9 - Q6C Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Bank 2 Exhaust 10 - B23C Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 2 Exhaust 11 - Q6B Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Bank 1 Intake 12 - Q6A Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Bank 1 Exhaust 13 - B23A Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 1 Exhaust 14 - B68A Knock Sensor 1 15 - B26 Crankshaft Position Sensor 16 - T8A Ignition Coil 1 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2734 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Diagrams B26 Crankshaft Position Sensor Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2735 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Testing and Inspection Crankshaft Position System Variation Learn Note: The Crankshaft Position System Variation Learn procedure is also required when the following service procedures have been performed, regardless of whether DTC P0315 is set: * An engine replacement * An engine control module (ECM) replacement * A crankshaft balancer replacement * A crankshaft replacement * A crankshaft position sensor replacement * Any engine repairs which disturb the crankshaft to crankshaft position sensor relationship. Note: The ECM monitors certain component signals to determine if all the conditions are met to continue with the crankshaft position System Variation Learn Procedure. 1. Install a scan tool. 2. Monitor the ECM for DTCs with a scan tool. If other DTCs are set, except DTC P0315, refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle ( See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Descriptions/Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle) for the applicable DTC that set. 3. With a scan tool, select the Crankshaft Position System Variation Learn Procedure and perform the following: 1. Block drive wheels. 2. Set parking brake. 3. DO NOT apply brake pedal. 4. Cycle ignition from OFF to ON. 5. Apply and hold brake pedal for the duration of the procedure. 6. Start and idle engine. 7. Turn the air conditioning (A/C) OFF. 8. The vehicle must remain in Park or Neutral. Note: While the learn procedure is in progress, release the throttle immediately when the engine starts to decelerate. The engine control is returned to the operator and the engine responds to throttle position after the learn procedure is complete. 9. Accelerate to wide open throttle (WOT) and release when the fuel cut-off occurs. 4. The scan tool displays Test In Progress. 5. The scan tool displays Learn Successful. 6. Verify DTC P0315 ran and passed This Ignition Cycle. ‹› If DTC P0315 failed or did not run This Ignition Cycle, or another DTC is present, refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle ( See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Descriptions/Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle) for the applicable DTC that set. 7. Once the Learn Procedure has successfully completed, and in order to store the crankshaft position system variation values in the ECM, turn OFF the ignition and verify all vehicle systems are OFF. This may take up to 2 minutes. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2736 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair Crankshaft Position Sensor Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Locations Fuel Level Sensor: Locations Wheels/Vehicle Underbody Component Views Fuel System Components 1 - B46B Fuel Level Sensor - Secondary 2 - B150 Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor 3 - Q13 Evaporative Emission Vent Solenoid Valve 4 - B46A Fuel Level Sensor - Primary 5 - G12 Fuel Pump 6 - B47 Fuel Pressure Sensor Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Fuel Level Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions Electrical Schematic Symbols Electrical Schematic Symbols Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2742 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2743 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2744 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2745 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2746 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2747 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2748 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2749 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2750 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2751 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2752 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2753 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2754 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2755 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2756 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2757 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2758 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2759 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2760 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2761 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2762 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2763 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2764 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2765 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2766 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2767 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2768 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2769 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2770 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2771 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2772 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2773 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2774 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2775 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2776 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2777 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2778 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2779 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2780 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2781 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2782 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2783 General Electrical Diagnosis General Electrical Diagnosis Basic Knowledge Required Without a basic knowledge of electricity, it will be difficult to use the diagnostic procedures contained in the service manual. You should understand the basic theory of electricity, and know the meaning of voltage (V), current (A), and resistance (Ohms ). You should also be able to read and understand a wiring diagram, as well as understand what happens in a circuit with an open or a shorted wire. Vehicle Zoning Strategy Vehicle Zoning Strategy All grounds, in-line connectors, and splices have identifying numbers that correspond to where they are located in the vehicle. The following table explains the numbering system. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2784 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2785 Fuel Level Sensor: Diagnostic Aids Arrows and Symbols Arrows and Symbols This service manual uses various symbols in order to describe different service operations. 1 - Front of Vehicle 2 - View Detail 2 - View Detail 3 - Ambient Air Mixed with Another Gas or Indicate Temperature Change 4 - Motion or Direction 5 - View Angle 6 - Dimension (1:2) 7 Ambient/Clean Air Flow or Cool Air Flow 8 - Lubrication Point - Oil or Fluid 9 - Task Related 10 Sectioning (1:3) 11 - Gas Other Than Ambient Air or Hot Air Flow 12 - Lubrication Point - Grease or Jelly 13 - Multidirectional Arrow Decimal and Metric Equivalents Decimal and Metric Equivalents Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2786 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2787 Checking Aftermarket Accessories Checking Aftermarket Accessories Warning: Refer to SIR Warning (See: Restraint Systems/Service Precautions/SIR Warning). Caution: The OBD II symbol is used on the circuit diagrams in order to alert the technician that the circuit is essential for proper OBD II emission control circuit operation. Any circuit which fails and causes the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) to turn ON, or causes emissions-related component damage, is identified as an OBD II circuit. Do not connect aftermarket accessories into the following circuits: * SIR circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the SIR symbol. * OBD II circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the OBD II symbol. Always check for aftermarket accessories (non-OEM) as the first step in diagnosing electrical problems. If the vehicle is so equipped, disconnect the system to verify that these add-on accessories are not the cause of the problems. Possible causes of vehicle problems related to aftermarket accessories include: * Power feeds connected to points other than the battery * Antenna location * Transceiver wiring located too close to vehicle electronic modules or wiring * Poor shielding or poor connectors on antenna feed line * Check for recent service bulletins detailing installation guidelines for aftermarket accessories. Circuit Testing Circuit Testing The Circuit Testing section contains the following diagnostic testing information. Using this information along with the diagnostic procedures will identify the cause of the electrical malfunction. * Using Connector Test Adapters (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Using Connector Test Adapters) * Probing Electrical Connectors (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Probing Electrical Connectors) * Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2788 Procedures/Circuit Testing/Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter) * Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp) * Using Fused Jumper Wires (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Using Fused Jumper Wires) * Measuring Voltage (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Measuring Voltage) * Measuring Voltage Drop (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Measuring Voltage Drop) * Measuring Frequency (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Measuring Frequency) * Testing Ground and Low Reference Circuits (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Testing Ground and Low Reference Circuits) * Testing for Continuity (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Continuity) * Testing for Short to Ground (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Short to Ground) * Testing for a Short to Voltage (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for a Short to Voltage) * Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections) * Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions) * Testing for Electrical Intermittents (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Electrical Intermittents) * Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure) * Circuit Protection - Fuses (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Circuit Protection - Fuses) * Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers) * Circuit Protection - Fusible Links (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Circuit Protection - Fusible Links) Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp Special Tools EL-35616-200 - Test Light - Probe Kit For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test Probe Caution). A test lamp can simply and quickly test a low impedance circuit for voltage. A Digital Multimeter (DMM) should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present if the impedance is low enough, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. In other words, if there is not enough current, the test lamp will not illuminate even though voltage is present. The EL-35616-200 - kit is Micro-Pack compatible and comprised of a 12-volt light bulb with an attached pair of leads. To properly operate this tool use the following procedures. When testing for voltage: 1. Attach one lead to ground. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is voltage at the point being tested. When testing for ground: 1. Attach one lead to battery positive voltage. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where ground should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is ground at the point being tested. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2789 Testing for a Short to Voltage Testing for a Short to Voltage Special Tools EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM) For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test Probe Caution). The following procedure tests for a short to voltage in a circuit. 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Set the rotary dial of the Digital Multimeter (DMM) to the V (DC) position. 4. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. Turn ON the ignition and operate all accessories. 7. If the voltage measured is greater than 1 V, there is a short to voltage in the circuit. Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions Special Tools J-25070 - Heat Gun For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Many intermittent open or shorted circuits are affected by harness/connector movement that is caused by vibration, engine torque, bumps/rough pavement, etc. In order to duplicate the customer's concern, it may be necessary to manipulate the wiring harness if the malfunction appears to be vibration related. Manipulation of a circuit can consist of a wide variety of actions, including: * Wiggling the harness * Disconnecting a connector and reconnecting * Stressing the mechanical connection of a connector * Pulling on the harness or wire in order to identify a separation/break inside the insulation * Relocating a harness or wires All these actions should be performed with some goal in mind. For instance, with a scan tool connected, wiggling the wires may uncover a faulty input to the control module. The snapshot option would be appropriate here. Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure). Another option is, with the component commanded ON and OFF by the scan tool, move related connectors and wiring and observe the component operation. With the engine running, move related connectors and wiring while monitoring engine operation. If harness or connector movement affects the data displayed, component/system operation, or engine operation, inspect and repair the harness/connections as necessary. You may need to load the vehicle in order to duplicate the concern. This may require the use of weights, floor jacks, jackstands, frame machines, etc. In these cases you are attempting to duplicate the concern by manipulating the suspension or frame. This method is useful in finding harnesses that are too short and their connectors pull apart enough to cause a poor connection. A DMM set to Peak Min/Max mode and connected to the suspect circuit while testing can yield desirable results. Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Electrical Intermittents). Certainly, using the senses of sight, smell, and hearing while manipulating the circuit can provide good results as well. There may be instances where circuit manipulation alone will not meet the required criteria for the fault condition to appear. In such cases it may be necessary to expose the suspect circuit to other conditions while manipulating the harness. Such conditions would include high moisture conditions, along with exceptionally high or low temperatures. The following discusses how to expose the circuit to these kinds of conditions. Salt Water Spray Some compounds possess the ability to conduct electricity when dissolved in water such as ordinary salt. By mixing table salt with water in sufficient Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2790 quantities, you can enhance the conductive properties of water so that any circuit which may be sensitive to moisture will more readily fail when liberally sprayed with this mixture. Mixing 0.35L (12 oz) of water with approximately 1 tablespoon of salt will yield a salt solution of 5 percent. Fill a normal spray bottle with this mixture. This mixture is sufficient to enhance the water's own conductivity. This may cause the circuit to fail more easily when sprayed. Once the mixture is completed, spray the suspect area liberally with the solution. Then, while monitoring either a scan tool or DMM, manipulate the harness as discussed previously. High Temperature Conditions If the complaint tends to be heat related, you can simulate the condition using the J-25070 - heat gun. Using the heat gun, you can heat up the suspected area or component. Manipulate the harnesses under high temperature conditions while monitoring the scan tool or DMM to locate the fault condition. The high temperature condition may be achieved simply by test driving the vehicle at normal operating temperature. If a heat gun is unavailable, consider this option to enhance your diagnosis. This option does not allow for the same control, however. Low Temperature Conditions Depending on the nature of the fault condition, placing a fan in front of the vehicle while the vehicle is in the shade can have the desired effect. If this is unsuccessful, use local cooling treatments such as ice or a venturi type nozzle (one that provides hot or cold air). This type of tool is capable of producing air stream temperatures down to -18°C (0°F) from one end and +71°C (160°F) from the other. This is ideally suited for localized cooling needs. Once the vehicle, component, or harness has been sufficiently cooled, manipulate the harness or components in an effort to duplicate the concern. Duplicating Failure Conditions * If none of the previous tests are successful, attempt to duplicate and/or capture the failure conditions. * Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, where applicable, contains the conditions that were present when the DTC set. 1. Review and record Freeze Frame/Failure Records data. 2. Clear the DTCs using the scan tool. 3. Turn the key to OFF and wait 15 seconds. 4. Operate the vehicle under the same conditions that were noted in Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, as closely as possible. The vehicle must also be operating within the Conditions for Running the DTC. Refer to Conditions for Running the DTC in the supporting text if a DTC is being diagnosed. 5. Monitor DTC Status for the DTC being tested. The scan tool will indicate Ran, when the enabling conditions have been satisfied long enough for the DTC to run. The scan tool will also indicate whether the DTC passed or failed. * An alternate method is to drive the vehicle with the DMM connected to a suspected circuit. An abnormal reading on the DMM when the concern occurs, may help you locate the concern. Measuring Frequency Measuring Frequency Special Tools EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM) For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test Probe Caution). The following procedure determines the frequency of a signal. Note: Connecting the Digital Multimeter (DMM) to the circuit before pressing the Hz button will allow the DMM to autorange to an appropriate range. 1. Apply power to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (AC) position. 3. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2791 5. Press the Hz button on the DMM. 6. The DMM will display the frequency measured. Measuring Voltage Measuring Voltage Special Tools EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM) For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test Probe Caution). The following procedure measures the voltage at a selected point in a circuit. 1. Disconnect the electrical harness connector for the circuit being tested, if necessary. 2. Enable the circuit and/or system being tested. Use the following methods: * Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. * Turn ON the engine. * Turn ON the circuit and/or system with a scan tool in Output Controls. * Turn ON the switch for the circuit and/or system being tested. 3. Select the V (AC) or V (DC) position on the Digital Multimeter (DMM). 4. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the point of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. The DMM displays the voltage measured at that point. Measuring Voltage Drop Measuring Voltage Drop Special Tools EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM) For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test Probe Caution). The following procedure determines the difference in voltage potential between 2 points. 1. Set the rotary dial of the Digital Multimeter (DMM) to the V (DC) position. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2792 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to one point of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to the other point of the circuit. 4. Operate the circuit. 5. The DMM displays the difference in voltage between the 2 points. Probing Electrical Connectors Probing Electrical Connectors Note: Always be sure to reinstall the connector position assurance (CPA) and terminal position assurance (TPA) when reconnecting connectors or replacing terminals. Front probe Disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the mating side (front) of the connector. Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test Probe Caution). Note: When probing female 0.64 terminals, it is important to use the correct adapter. There have been some revisions to the test adapter for 0.64 terminals. The proper adapter for 0.64 terminals is the EL-35616-64B which has a gold terminal and a black wire between the base and tip. Failure to use the proper test adapter may result in damage to the terminal being tested and improper diagnosis. Note: The proper adapter for probing the terminals for fuses, relays, or diodes in an electrical center is EL-35616-35. Using any other tool or adapter may damage the terminal being tested. Refer to the following table as a guide in selecting the correct test adapter for front probing connectors: Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2793 Backprobe Note: * Backprobe connector terminals only when specifically required in diagnostic procedures. * Do not backprobe a sealed (Weather Pack(R)) connector, less than a 280 series Metri-Pack connector, a Micro-Pack connector, or a flat wire (dock and lock) connector. * Backprobing can be a source of damage to connector terminals. Use care in order to avoid deforming the terminal, either by forcing the test probe too far into the cavity or by using too large of a test probe. * After backprobing any connector, inspect for terminal damage. If terminal damage is suspected, test for proper terminal contact. Do not disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the harness side (back) of the connector. Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure Using Snapshots in Global Diagnostic System (GDS) Overview Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2794 A snapshot is a recording of what a control module on the vehicle was receiving for information while the snapshot is being made. A snapshot may be used to analyze the data during the time a vehicle condition is current. This allows you to concentrate on making the condition occur, rather than trying to view all the data in anticipation of the fault. To record a snapshot in GDS, select, Record Snapshot, from the options at the top right portion of any of the various pages that allow snapshots to be taken (e.g. Data Display, Control Functions, etc.). When you are finished recording, select, Stop Snapshot recording. The snapshot will now be available for replay. Snapshot Replay The Snapshot Replay function allows reviews of previously recorded vehicle snapshot data. This information can be used in analysis of vehicle problems and detection of trigger error conditions. The graph function can be used to compare parameters to see if a component is functioning properly. Recorded snapshots can be selected for viewing by the following three methods: * Selecting a snapshot file from the Vehicle Home Page and clicking on the Review selection. * Double clicking on the selected snapshot from the Vehicle Home Page. * Entering the Tools selection from the Menu selection and selecting Snapshot replay. Next, open the Snapshot Manager. Double click on the snapshot file you wish to view or click on the Load Snapshot selection and select a snapshot file. Regardless of selection method, a File Loaded pop-up window will be displayed from the Snapshot Replay screen. Select OK from the pop-up window. Snapshot Play Functions There are several snapshot play functions that are used to replay recorded snapshots * The Play function is used to play the snapshot forward by clicking on this selection. A marker will move across the screen when this selection is used. All selections in this area turn grey when they are active. * The Pause function is used to pause play of the snapshot. When this selection is clicked a second time the snapshot will start playing where it left off. * The Stop function is used to stop playing the snapshot. The snapshot will start from the beginning, if Play is selected after using the Stop function. Time Control Time control is used to control the snapshot replay. This function allows selection of a specific time frame, display of different views, and control of display speed. The following functions can be selected directly under Time Control. * The Bookmark selection allows you to add a specific comment in the current display and return to this point in the future. When this option is selected, a pop-up window is displayed. Enter a bookmark name and select OK. * The Note Pad can be selected to add comments to the snapshot replay file at the current point of time. When this option is selected, a pop-up window is displayed. Enter a comment for the snapshot file and select OK. * The Load Snapshot (blue folder) opens a snapshot file and makes it ready for further analysis. This function is also available by clicking on an available snapshot file from the Snapshot Manager. * The Down Arrow displays all Time Control options when selected. Individual options can also be selected by clicking on the item you want. * The Snapshot Display Speed can be controlled by selecting this option. Slow speeds of 1/8X, 1/4X, and 1/2X can be selected. The real time speed can also be selected at 1. Faster speeds of 2X, 4X, and 8X can also be obtained by using this selection. View Selections Each View Selection provides a different way of displaying vehicle data for analysis. The following functions can be selected under Available Views: Note: The parameter name will be shown in the original language used for capture if no translation is available for the name. * Parameter List View - Displays incoming information from the snapshot file. The current value of the parameters is displayed on the screen. * Log View - Contains all the information from the snapshot file. All parameter values are listed in the order they were recorded. Specific parameters can be added or removed from a watchlist by clicking on the appropriate item. * State View - Shows the values of all parameters in a specific time frame. These values can be used for comparison with the trigger view. * Trigger View - Displays all system and user defined triggers. This function can be used when there is a combination of factors involved in a diagnostic problem. When a Trigger condition is met a caution triangle will be displayed on the screen. Triggers: * Load Triggers - Allows you to load a file containing trigger definitions. * Save Triggers - Allows you to save the trigger to your computer's hard drive. * Remove Trigger - Allows you to remove the current trigger. It will no longer be present. * Edit Trigger - Displays a pop-up window where you can modify the limits and parameters contained within a trigger. * Adds Trigger - Displays a pop-up window to configure a trigger. * DTC View - After the Play function is selected and this option is selected this function opens the list of recorded DTCs. * Line Graph View - Displays data that can be visualized against the time-axis. From this view, specific parameters can be selected for graphing by Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2795 checking the box under Selected. At the bottom of the graph there are four functions Zoom In (increase size), Zoom Out (decrease size), Bookmarks, and Pause Scrolling. Each of these functions can be accessed by clicking on them. Testing for Continuity Testing for Continuity Special Tools EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM) For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test Probe Caution). The following procedures verify good continuity in a circuit. With a Digital Multimeter (DMM) 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the Ohms position. 2. Disconnect the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 3. Disconnect the load. 4. Press the MIN MAX button on the DMM. 5. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 6. Connect the other lead of the DMM to the other end of the circuit. 7. If the DMM displays low or no resistance, the circuit has good continuity. With a Test Lamp Note: Only use the test lamp procedure on low impedance power and ground circuits. 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect one lead of the test lamp to one end of the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 5. Connect the other end of the circuit to ground. 6. If the test lamp illuminates (full intensity), then the circuit has good continuity. Testing for Electrical Intermittents Testing for Electrical Intermittents Special Tools EL-39200 Digital Multimeter For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Perform the following procedures while wiggling the harness from side to side. Continue this at convenient points (about 6 inches apart) while watching the test equipment. * Testing for Short to Ground (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Short to Ground) * Testing for Continuity (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Continuity) * Testing for a Short to Voltage (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for a Short to Voltage) If the fault is not identified, perform the procedure below using the MIN MAX feature on the EL-39200 DMM. This feature allows you to manipulate the circuit without having to watch the EL-39200. The EL-39200 will generate an audible tone when a change is detected. Note: The EL-39200 must be used in order to perform the following procedure since the EL-39200 can monitor current, resistance or voltage while recording the minimum (MIN), and maximum (MAX) values measured. 1. Connect the EL-39200 to both sides of a suspected connector (still connected), or from one end of a suspected circuit to the other. Refer to Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2796 Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter) for information on connecting the EL-39200 to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the EL-39200 to the V (AC) or V (DC) position. 3. Press the range button of the EL-39200 in order to select the desired voltage range. 4. Press the MIN MAX button of the EL-39200. The EL-39200 displays 100 ms RECORD and emits an audible tone (beep). Note: The 100 ms RECORD mode is the length of time an input must stay at a new value in order to record the full change. 5. Simulate the condition that is potentially causing the intermittent connection, either by wiggling the connections or the wiring, test driving, or performing other operations. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions). 6. Listen for the audible Min Max Alert which indicates that a new minimum or maximum value has been recorded. 7. Press the MIN MAX button once in order to display the MAX value and note the value. 8. Press the MIN MAX button again in order to display the MIN value and note the value. 9. Determine the difference between the MIN and MAX values. * If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is 1 V or greater an intermittent open or high resistance condition exists. Repair the condition as necessary. * If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is less than 1 V, an intermittent open or high resistance condition does not exist. Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections Special Tools EL-35616 Terminal Test Probe Kit For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). When the condition is not currently present, but is indicated in DTC history, the cause may be intermittent. An intermittent may also be the cause when there is a customer complaint, but the symptom cannot be duplicated. Refer to the Symptom Table of the system that is suspect of causing the condition before trying to locate an intermittent condition. Most intermittent conditions are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. Inspect for the following items: * Wiring broken inside the insulation * Poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector * Poor terminal to wire connection-Some conditions which fall under this description are poor crimps, poor solder joints, crimping over the wire insulation rather than the wire itself, and corrosion in the wire to terminal contact area, etc. * Pierced or damaged insulation can allow moisture to enter the wiring causing corrosion. The conductor can corrode inside the insulation, with little visible evidence. Look for swollen and stiff sections of wire in the suspect circuits. * Wiring which has been pinched, cut, or its insulation rubbed through may cause an intermittent open or short as the bare area touches other wiring or parts of the vehicle. * Wiring that comes in contact with hot or exhaust components * Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions) in order to duplicate the conditions required, in order to verify the customer concern. * Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Electrical Intermittents) for test procedures to detect intermittent open, high resistance, short to ground, and short to voltage conditions. * Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure) for advanced intermittent diagnosis and Vehicle Data Recorder operation. Testing for Terminal Fretting Some intermittent conditions can be caused by wire terminal fretting corrosion. Fretting corrosion is a build-up of insulating, oxidized wear debris that can form when there is a small motion between electrical contacts. The oxidized wear debris can pile up enough at the electrical contact spots that the electrical resistance across the connection increases. Movement between the contacting surfaces as small as 10 to 100 microns can cause fretting. To put this in perspective, a sheet of paper is about 100 microns thick, so fretting motion is small and hard to see. Vibration and thermal expansion/contraction are the main sources that create fretting motion. Since vehicles vibrate and can experience large temperature swings, they are a good source for fretting motion. Tin, copper, nickel, and iron surfaces are all susceptible to fretting corrosion. Fretting corrosion can be difficult to see but it looks like small, dark smudges on the terminals contact surface. To correct a fretting condition disconnect the suspect connector and add Nyogel lubricant 760G (dielectric grease) to both sides of the connector Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2797 terminals. Then reconnect the connector and wipe away any excess lubricant. This will correct the additional terminal contact resistance due to the terminal fretting corrosion. Testing for Proper Terminal Contact It is important to test terminal contact at the component and any inline connectors before replacing a suspect component. Mating terminals must be inspected to ensure good terminal contact. A poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector may be the result of contamination or deformation. Contamination may be caused by the connector halves being improperly connected. A missing or damaged connector seal, damage to the connector itself, or exposing the terminals to moisture and dirt can also cause contamination. Contamination, usually in the underhood or underbody connectors, leads to terminal corrosion, causing an open circuit or intermittently open circuit. Deformation is caused by probing the mating side of a connector terminal without the proper adapter. Always use the EL-35616 when probing connectors. Other causes of terminal deformation are improperly joining the connector halves, or repeatedly separating and joining the connector halves. Deformation, usually to the female terminal contact tang, can result in poor terminal contact causing an open or intermittently open circuit. Testing for Proper Terminal Contact in Bussed Electrical Centers It is very important to use the correct test adapter when testing for proper terminal contact of fuses and relays in a bussed electrical center. Use EL-35616-35 to test for proper terminal contact. Failure to use EL-35616-35 can result in improper diagnosis of the bussed electrical center. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact: 1. Separate the connector halves. 2. Visually inspect the connector halves for contamination. Contamination may result in a white or green build-up within the connector body or between terminals. This causes high terminal resistance, intermittent contact, or an open circuit. An underhood or underbody connector that shows signs of contamination should be replaced in its entirety: terminals, seals, and connector body. 3. Using an equivalent male terminal / terminated lead, verify that the retention force is significantly different between a known good terminal and the suspect terminal. Replace the female terminal in question. Flat Wire (Dock and Lock) Connectors There are no serviceable parts for flat wire (dock and lock) connectors on the harness side or the component side. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact: 1. Remove the component in question. 2. Visually inspect each side of the connector for signs of contamination. Avoid touching either side of the connector as oil from your skin may be a source of contamination as well. 3. Visually inspect the terminal bearing surfaces of the flat wire circuits for splits, cracks, or other imperfections that could cause poor terminal contact. Visually inspect the component side connector to ensure that all of the terminals are uniform and free of damage or deformation. 4. Insert the appropriate adapter from the on the flat wire harness connector in order to test the circuit in question. Control Module/Component Voltage and Grounds Poor voltage or ground connections can cause widely varying symptoms. * Test all control module voltage supply circuits. Many vehicles have multiple circuits supplying voltage to a control module. Other components in the system may have separate voltage supply circuits that may also need to be tested. Inspect connections at the module/component connectors, fuses, and any intermediate connections between the voltage source and the module/component. A test lamp or a DMM may indicate that voltage is present, but neither tests the ability of the circuit to carry sufficient current. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. Refer to Circuit Testing (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Circuit Testing) and Power Distribution Schematics (See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Starting and Charging/Power and Ground Distribution/System Diagram/Power Distribution Schematics). * Test all control module ground and system ground circuits. The control module may have multiple ground circuits. Other components in the system may have separate grounds that may also need to be tested. Inspect grounds for clean and tight connections at the grounding point. Inspect the connections at the component and in splice packs, where applicable. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. Refer to Circuit Testing (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Circuit Testing) and Ground Distribution Schematics (See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Starting and Charging/Power and Ground Distribution/System Diagram/Ground Distribution Schematics). Temperature Sensitivity * An intermittent condition may occur when a component/connection reaches normal operating temperature. The condition may occur only when the component/connection is cold, or only when the component/connection is hot. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2798 * Freeze Frame, Failure Records, Snapshot, or Vehicle Data Recorder data may help with this type of intermittent condition, where applicable. * If the intermittent is related to heat, review the data for a relationship with the following: - High ambient temperatures - Underhood/engine generated heat - Circuit generated heat due to a poor connection, or high electrical load - Higher than normal load conditions, towing, etc. * If the intermittent is related to cold, review the data for the following: - Low ambient temperatures-In extremely low temperatures, ice may form in a connection or component. Inspect for water intrusion. - The condition only occurs on a cold start. - The condition goes away when the vehicle warms up. * Information from the customer may help to determine if the trouble follows a pattern that is temperature related. * If temperature is suspected of causing an intermittent fault condition, attempt to duplicate the condition. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions) in order to duplicate the conditions required. Electromagnetic Interference and Electrical Noise Some electrical components/circuits are sensitive to electromagnetic interference or other types of electrical noise. Inspect for the following conditions: * A misrouted harness that is too close to high voltage/high current devices such as secondary ignition components, motors, generator etc.-These components may induce electrical noise on a circuit that could interfere with normal circuit operation. * Electrical system interference caused by a malfunctioning relay, or a control module driven solenoid or switch-These conditions can cause a sharp electrical surge. Normally, the condition will occur when the malfunctioning component is operating. * Improper installation of non-factory or aftermarket add on accessories such as lights, 2-way radios, amplifiers, electric motors, remote starters, alarm systems, cell phones, etc.-These accessories may lead to interference while in use, but do not fail when the accessories are not in use. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Checking Aftermarket Accessories). * Test for an open diode across the A/C compressor clutch and for other open diodes. Some relays may contain a clamping diode. * The generator may be allowing AC noise into the electrical system. Incorrect Control Module * There are only a few situations where reprogramming a control module is appropriate: - A new service control module is installed. - A control module from another vehicle is installed. - Revised software/calibration files have been released for this vehicle. Note: DO NOT re-program the control module with the SAME software/calibration files that are already present in the control module. This is not an effective repair for any type of concern. * Verify that the control module contains the correct software/calibration. If incorrect programming is found, reprogram the control module with the most current software/calibration. Refer to Control Module References (See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning) for replacement, setup, and programming. Testing for Short to Ground Testing for Short to Ground Special Tools * EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM) * EL 35616-200 - Test Light-Probe Kit For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test Probe Caution). The following procedures test for a short to ground in a circuit. With a Digital Multimeter (DMM) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2799 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the Ohms position. 4. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the other lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. If the DMM does NOT display infinite resistance (OL), there is a short to ground in the circuit. With a Test Lamp 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect one lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to one end of the circuit to be tested. 5. If the test lamp illuminates, there is a short to ground in the circuit. Fuse Powering Several Loads 1. Review the system schematic and locate the fuse that is open. 2. Open the first connector or switch leading from the fuse to each load. 3. Connect a DMM across the fuse terminals (be sure that the fuse is powered). * When the DMM displays voltage the short is in the wiring leading to the first connector or switch. * If the DMM does not display voltage refer to the next step. 4. Close each connector or switch until the DMM displays voltage in order to find which circuit is shorted. Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter Special Tools EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM) For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test Probe Caution). Digital Multimeter (DMM) Basic Requirements Service information is validated using digital multimeters that meet or exceed the following requirements. Using a multimeter that does not meet these basic requirements may give inaccurate readings which could lead to an incorrect diagnosis. Display and Settings 1. Four digits displayed 2. Voltage, amperage, resistance, frequency, diode test settings, and min-max function 3. Display positive and negative values Voltage 1. Have at least 10 Mohm input impedance 2. Test a DC voltage range of 0.1-1000 V. 3. Test an AC voltage range of 0.1-1000 V. Amperage 1. Test a DC amperage range of 0.1µA-10 A. 2. Test an AC amperage range of 0.1µA-10 A. Resistance Test a resistance range of 0.1 ohm-40 Mohm and displays infinite for a value greater than 40 Mohm (O.L. (Over-load)) Frequency Test for a frequency range of 0.5 HZ-199 K HZ Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2800 Diode Test 1. Apply at least 1 mA when performing the diode bias test 2. Display the break over voltage drop (0-3 V) of a forward biased diode 3. Display infinite (O.L. (Over-load)) when a diode is reverse biased Min-Max Readings 1. Can update at a 1 ms sample rate 2. Saves and displays minimum and maximum values Note: Circuits which include any solid state control modules, such as the engine control module (ECM), should only be tested with a 10 MOhms or higher impedance digital multimeter such as the EL-39200. The EL-39200 instruction manual is a good source of information and should be read thoroughly upon receipt of the DMM as well as kept on hand for future reference. A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present if the impedance is low enough, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. In other words, if there is not enough current, the test lamp will not illuminate even though voltage is present. The ohmmeter function on a DMM shows how much resistance exists between 2 points along a circuit. Low resistance in a circuit means good continuity. Note: Disconnect the power feed from the suspect circuit when measuring resistance with a DMM. This prevents incorrect readings. DMMs apply such a small voltage to measure resistance that the presence of voltages can upset a resistance reading. Diodes and solid state components in a circuit can cause a DMM to display a false reading. To find out if a component is affecting a measurement take a reading once, then reverse the leads and take a second reading. If the readings differ the solid state component is affecting the measurement. Following are examples of the various methods of connecting the DMM to the circuit to be tested: * Probe both ends of the connector and either hold the leads in place while manipulating the connector or tape the leads to the harness for continuous monitoring while you perform other operations or test driving. Refer to Probing Electrical Connectors (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Probing Electrical Connectors). * Disconnect the harness at both ends of the suspected circuit where it connects either to a component or to other harnesses. * If the system that is being diagnosed has a specified pinout or breakout box, it may be used in order to simplify connecting the DMM to the circuit or for testing multiple circuits quickly. Using Connector Test Adapters Using Connector Test Adapters Special Tools EL 35616 - Terminal Test Probe Kit For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Caution: Do not insert test equipment probes (DMM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the EL-38125-580 GM Approved Terminal Release Tool Kit in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the EL-38125-580 GM Approved Terminal Release Tool Kit , ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the EL-38125-580 GM Approved Terminal Release Tool Kit label on the inside of the EL-38125-580 GM Approved Terminal Release Tool Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Using Fused Jumper Wires Using Fused Jumper Wires Special Tools J 36169-A Fused Jumper Wire Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2801 Note: A fused jumper may not protect solid state components from being damaged. The J 36169-A includes small clamp connectors that provide adaptation to most connectors without damage. This fused jumper wire is supplied with a 20-A fuse which may not be suitable for some circuits. Do not use a fuse with a higher rating than the fuse that protects the circuit being tested. AFL/EPC Connectors AFL/EPC Connectors Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. 1. For connectors with a bolt in the dress cover, turn the bolt counterclockwise to remove the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2802 2. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the top of the wire dress cover. Slide the CPA forward. 3. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2803 View showing depressing of the lever lock release tab. View of connector in released position. 4. Disconnect the connector from the component. 5. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the dress cover. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs and remove the dress cover. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2804 6. Release the rear lower half of the wiredress cover. 7. Release the tabs that are holding the wiredress cover to the connector body. 8. Remove the nose piece by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the slots on both ends of the connector body. Gently pry the nose piece out of the connector. J 38125-216 can also be used to remove the nose piece. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2805 9. Use the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by lifting the terminal retaining tabs on the inside of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Bosch Connectors (BSK) Bosch Connectors (BSK) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2806 Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 3. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 4. Insert the J 38125-561 tool into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 5. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Bosch Connectors (ECM) Bosch Connectors (ECM) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2807 1. Locate the assist lever on the top of the connector. Move the assist lever to the forward position. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2808 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the connector. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the locking tabs and remove the dress cover. 4. The terminal positive assurance (TPA) is located in the front of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2809 5. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove TPA from the connector. 6. Use the J 38125-213 or the J 38125-556 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2810 Note: Ensure that the dress cover and connector body are both in the released position before reassembling. Failure to do so may cause damage to the connector and component. Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Bosch Connectors (0.64) Bosch Connectors (0.64) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While pressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock until the lever is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Pull the rubber boot that covers the wires back to expose the end of the connector dress cover. 4. Place the connector locking lever in the center of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2811 5. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs that are on the wire end of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover and connector body and pry up. 6. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs located on the opposite side of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover at the connector end and pry up. 7. Remove the dress cover. 8. Cut the tie wrap on the wire bundle. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2812 9. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting a small flat-bladed tool into the small slot in the end of the slider and pushing on the TPA until it comes out of the connector. When the TPA exits the opposite side of the connector, gasp the TPA and pull it completely out of the connector. 10. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 11. Insert the J 38125-560 into the 2 triangular cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 12. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Terminal Replacement Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2813 1. Prior to installation the terminal must be aligned so the (1) coding lugs align with the (2) coding grooves on the connector. 2. Once the terminal is aligned, slide the terminal into the cavity until the retainer has engaged in the cavity of the connector. 3. Slide the TPA in the connector body and seat it using a small flat bladed tool. The TPA is seated when it is flush with the contact housing. 4. Secure the wires to the connector body using a tie wrap and replace the dress cover and grommet. Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Pull out the slider on the connector position assurance (CPA) until it is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2814 5. Insert the J 38125-557 into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Connector Position Assurance Locks Connector Position Assurance Locks The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of the connector. CPAs are used in various connectors throughout the vehicle. CPAs are also used in all SIR system electrical connectors. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals, of the connector. Connector Repairs Connector Repairs Connector Repairs contains a list of all connector repairs. The connector repairs are listed by the connector manufacturer and then by connector type. If the technician cannot identify the manufacturer of the connector, refer to Identifying Connectors below. Knowing the connector manufacturer will assist in finding the correct connector repair from the following list: * Connector Position Assurance Locks (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Connector Position Assurance Locks) * Terminal Position Assurance Locks (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Terminal Position Assurance Locks) * AFL/EPC Connectors (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/AFL/EPC Connectors) * Bosch Connectors (BSK) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Bosch Connectors (BSK))Bosch Connectors (0.64) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Bosch Connectors (0.64))Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT))Bosch Connectors (ECM) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Bosch Connectors (ECM)) * Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack))Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Push to Seat))Delphi Connectors Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2815 (Pull To Seat) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Pull to Seat))Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W))Delphi Connectors (Micro.64) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Micro .64))Delphi Connectors (12-Way) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (12-Way))Delphi Connectors (Steering Gear) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Steering Gear)) * FCI Connectors (Lever Lock) (See: General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/FCI Connectors (Lever Lock))FCI Connectors (SIR) (See: General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/FCI (SIR)) * FEP Connectors (Steering Gear) (See: General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/FEP Connectors (Steering Gear)) * JST Connectors (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/JST Connectors) * Kostal Connectors (Glow Plug Control Module) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Kostal Connectors (Glow Plug Control Module))Kostal Connectors (Transmission) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Kostal Connectors (Transmission)) * Molex Connectors (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Molex Connectors) * Sumitomo Connectors (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Sumitomo Connectors) * Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way))Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor))Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap))Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way))Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module)) * Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Yazaki Connectors (2-Way))Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Yazaki Connectors (16-Way)) * Repairing Connector Terminals (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Repairing Connector Terminals) Connector Anatomy 1 - Connector Positive Assurance (CPA) 2 - Assist Lever 3 - Wiredress Cover 4 - Seal Strain/Relief Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2816 5 - Slide Left Hand 6 - Slide Right Hand 7 - Terminal Positive Assurance (TPA) 8 - Terminal Positive Assurance (TPA) 9 - Connector Seal 10 - Connector Housing 11 - Inner Connector Identifying Connectors Knowing the connector manufacturer is helpful when trying to locating the correct connector repair procedure. There are many different connector designs used on GM vehicles and it is sometimes difficult to identify the connector manufacturer. The information in this document should help with the identification of connector manufactures. The following connector manufacturers make most of the connectors found in GM vehicles: * AFL/EPC (Alcoa Fujikura Ltd./Engineered Plastics Components) * Bosch * Delphi * FCI (Framatome Connectors International) * JAE (Japan Aviation Electronics) * JST (Japan Solderless Terminals) * Kostel * Molex * Sumitomo * Tyco/AMP * Yazaki Identifying the manufacturer of a connector is often difficult. When trying to determine the manufacturer of a connector, look for specific identifying marks that are unique to that connector supplier. Most of these identify marks are hard to find or see. Check the connector carefully and refer to the information below for pictures and descriptions of connector identification markings. * Most of AFLs connectors have EPC on their connector body. Some of the smaller connectors will not have any markings on them. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2817 * In some cases Bosch will actually be printed on the connector. If Bosch does not appear on the connector, look for the Bosch logo. The Bosch logo is a circle with a blunted arrow inside. This logo can appear anywhere on the connector and is often very small. * In some cases Delphi will actually be printed on the connector. If Delphi is not printed on the connector, look for PED. In both cases there is no specific orientation for Delphi or PED and they can appear anywhere on the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2818 * FCI connectors may have the FCI logo on their connectors. The logo is the letters FCI with an "A" above it. * JAE connector have JAE in small letters on their connectors. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2819 * JST connectors have JST in small letters on their connectors, similar to that above. The location of the logo will vary with the connector size and style. * Kostel has an "LK" with a circle around it. These connector are usually used as a transmissions connection. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2820 * Most Molex connectors will have the Molex logo on the dresscover of the connector. In some cases the connectors may have MX followed by another letter. The third letter indicates where the connector was made. A connector with MXD is a Molex connector made in Detroit. Sumitomo has a unique symbol on their connector and possibly a part number. The symbol is similar to that of a diamond lying on its side, similar to that shown. The logo could appear anywhere but the most common place is at the wire side of the housing. * Tyco/AMP has many different and unique connector designs. Some may or may not have identifiable marks on them. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2821 * Yazaki has a wedge or arrow shape, similar to that shown. Delphi Connectors (Push to Seat) Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Follow the steps below in order to repair push to seat connectors. 1. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device, the connector position assurance (CPA) device, and/or the secondary lock. 2. Separate the connector halves (1). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2822 3. Use the proper pick or removal tool (1) in order to release the terminal. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 4. Gently pull the cable and the terminal (2) out of the back of the connector. 5. Re-form the locking device if you are going to reuse the terminal (1). 6. To repair the terminal, refer to Terminal Repair. Terminal Repair 1. Slip the cable seal away from the terminal. 2. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 3. Slip a new cable seal onto the wire. 4. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 5. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 6. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. 7. Slide the cable seal toward the terminal. 8. Crimp the cable seal and the insulation. 9. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply grease to the connector. Reinstalling Terminal 1. In order to reuse a terminal or lead assembly, refer to Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Wiring Repairs). 2. Ensure that the cable seal is kept on the terminal side of the splice. 3. Insert the lead from the back until it catches. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Terminated Lead Repair 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Find the appropriate terminated lead. 3. Use the appropriate splice sleeves depending on the gauge size. 4. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves). Delphi Connectors (Pull to Seat) Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) Special Tools Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2823 J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal If the terminal is visibly damaged or is suspected of having a faulty connection, the terminal should be replaced. Follow the steps below in order to repair pull-to-seat connectors: 1. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) device and/or the secondary lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component or separate the connectors for in-line connectors. 3. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device. 4. Insert the proper pick or removal tool into the front of the connector body. Note: On connectors with more than one terminal the service loop may not be large enough to remove the terminal and crimp on a new one. If the terminal wire does not have a large enough service loop for removal, cut the wire 5 cm (2 in) behind the connector before removal. 5. Grasp the wire at the back of the connector body and gently push the terminal out the front of the connector body. Terminal Repair 1. If the wire needed to be cut in order to remove the terminal, gently push a small length of the same size wire through the back of the connector cavity until there is enough wire exposed in order to crimp on a new terminal. If the wire was not cut, cut the existing wire as close to the old terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 4. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. Terminal Installation 1. Align the terminal and pull the wire from the back of the connector in order to seat the terminal. 2. If necessary, cut the new wire to proper length and splice with existing circuit. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves). 3. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply dielectric grease to the connector. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Micro .64) Delphi Connectors (Micro.64) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2824 Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro.64 connectors. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. The lever lock may be located on the top or sides of the wire dress cover. View of a typical Micro 64 connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2825 Depress the lock and pull the lever over and past the lock. View of the connector when released from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2826 View of another type of Micro 64 connector. Depress the locks that are located on both sides of the wiredress cover and pull the lever over and past the locks. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2827 View of the connector when released from the component. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the front of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool push down on one of the locking tabs and pull the cover up until the dress cover releases. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. 4. Once the front 2 locks are unlocked, lift the front of the dress cover and pull it forward. Note: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 5. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the small slot on the TPA and pushing down until the TPA releases. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2828 Note: Be careful not to angle or rock the J 38125-21 tool when inserting it into the connector or the tool may break. 6. Insert the J 38125-21 tool into the round canal between the terminals cavities at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Follow the steps below in order to repair Micro 64 connector terminals. The Micro 64 connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-64 (M jaw) was developed to crimp Micro 64 terminals. The J 38125-64 crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. The J 38125-64 crimping tool is also designed to crimp both the wire and the insulation at the same time. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro 64 terminals. Note: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gauge wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 1. Cut the wire as close to the damaged terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2829 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert terminal into the appropriate terminal holder until it hits bottom and stops. The correct terminal holder is determined by the wire size. Also ensure that the terminals wings are pointing towards the former on the tool and the release locator. 5. Insert the stripped cable into the terminal. Insulation should be visible on both sides of the terminal insulation wings. 6. Compress the handles until the ratchet automatically releases. 7. Place the terminal into the appropriate cavity and assemble the connector. Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2830 Terminal Removal Procedure There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W connectors. These connectors are very similar but use different terminals and have some minor physical differences also. The first connector design of the Micro-Pack 100W (1) has a white connector interface that holds the terminals. The second design of the Micro-Pack 100W (2) has a gray interface to hold the terminals. Also, the first design has terminal cavities that are further apart (3 mm centerline) and offset from the other row of terminal cavities in the connector. The second design has terminals cavities that are closer together (2.54 mm centerline) and aligned vertically. One other way to identify the second design is the thin strip of material that runs along the outside of the cavities. Note: There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W terminals which are very similar. Ensure that you have the correct terminal before crimping the new terminal to the wire. The first design connector uses the longer terminal (1) that has a raised area in front of the recess in the terminal. The second design connector uses the shorter terminal without the raised area. Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro-Pack 100W connectors. Some Micro-Pack 100W connector disassembly procedures will vary. Use this procedure as a guide. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2831 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Locate the nose piece locking tabs that are positioned on the side of the connector nose piece. The connector nose piece acts as a terminal positive assurance (TPA) and may be referred to as such. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to push in one of the locking tabs while gently pulling on the same side of the nose piece. 4. Repeat the procedure for the other locking tab and remove the nose piece. 5. Remove the wire dress cover. The following is a general procedure for wire dress cover removal. Use this procedure as a guide, some dress cover removal procedures may vary. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2832 6. Use fingers to squeeze the 2 locking legs of the cover. 7. Apply pressure and gently rock the cover until one locking leg is unseated. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2833 8. Continue to apply pressure and rock the cover until the second locking leg is unseated. Repeat procedure for the other side of the dress cover and remove the cover. 9. Use J 38125-12A to gently lift the terminal retaining tab while gently pulling the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. If the terminal is severely bent or damaged, it may be possible on some connectors to push the wire out of the front of the connector instead of pulling it through. This will prevent damage to the internal seals of the connector. Once the terminal is pushed out of the connector, cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible and pull the wire through the connector. Terminal Repair Procedure The Micro-Pack 100W connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool was developed to crimp Micro-Pack 100W terminals. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro-Pack 100 terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2834 1. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. Note: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gauge wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert the terminal into the crimp tool until the core wings are flush with the anvil on the crimp tool. Be sure that the wings are pointed toward the crimp tool former and release the spring locator. The locator will hold the terminal in place. Inspect the alignment of the terminal wings with the crimp tool former. If the terminal wings are wider than the crimp tool former, remove the terminal and bend the terminal wings in slightly. 5. Place stripped wire into terminal. 6. Crimp the new terminal to the wire. If a jam occurs, press the emergency release to open applicator. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2835 Terminal Replacement Procedure After the terminal is crimped to the wire perform the following procedure in order to replace Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the Terminal Removal Procedure. Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The following is the proper procedure for the repair of Weather Pack(R) Connectors. 1. Separate the connector halves (1). 2. Open the secondary lock. A secondary lock aids in terminal retention and is usually molded to the connector (1). 3. Grasp the wire and push the terminal to the forward most position. Hold the wire in this position. 4. Insert the Weather Pack(R) terminal removal tool J 38125-10A into the front (mating end) of the connector cavity until it rests on the cavity shoulder (1). 5. Gently pull on the wire to remove the terminal through the back of the connector (2). Note: Never use force to remove a terminal from a connector. 6. Inspect the terminal and connector for damage. Repair as necessary. Refer to Repairing Connector Terminals (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Repairing Connector Terminals). 7. Reform the lock tang (2) and reset terminal in connector body. 8. Close secondary locks and join connector halves. 9. Verify that circuit is complete and working satisfactorily. 10. Perform system check. Delphi Connectors (12-Way) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2836 Delphi Connectors (12-Way) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) and slide the lever lock away from the connector body. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs on the dress cover of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool release all of the locking tabs. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2837 4. Release the lower wire dress cover locking tab. 5. Release the upper wire dress cover locking tab. 6. Once the locks are unlocked, lift the dress cover off. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2838 Note: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 7. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the locking tabs on both sides of the TPA. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. 8. Remove the nose piece by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the locking tabs on both sides of the nose piece. Gently pry the nose piece out of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2839 9. Insert the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Delphi Connectors (Steering Gear) Delphi Connectors (Steering Gear) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2840 Removal Procedure 1. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the locking tab on the connector. 2. Push down the locking tab to release the connector. The small flat-bladed tool may need to be pushed down and angled back slightly to depress the locking tab. Pull on the connector body while releasing the locking tab to disconnect the connector. FCI Connectors (Lever Lock) FCI Connectors (Lever Lock) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2841 Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. 1. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. 2. The release tab is located on the top of the wiredress cover. 3. View of connector in released position. 4. Disconnect the connector from the component. 5. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the dress cover. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs and remove the dress cover. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2842 6. Use a small flat-blade tool to slide the terminal position assurance (TPA) up one notch on both ends of the connector. The TPA is located underneath the wire dress cover. For the larger terminals insert the J 38125-556 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. For the smaller terminals insert the J 38125-560 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2843 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. FCI (SIR) FCI Connectors (SIR) Removal Procedure Note: The orange CPA must be released first to disconnect or to connect the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2844 1. Lift the orange CPA vertically (avoid lifting on an angle to the connector) approximately 4 mm to release the connector. Use a small flat-bladed tool to help release the orange CPA. The orange CPA can also be released manually without any tools. 2. Grab the connector on both sides and lift the connector vertically to disconnect the connector. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2845 1. Lift the orange CPA vertically approximately 4 mm before installing the connector. Use a small flat-bladed tool to help release the orange CPA. The orange CPA can also be released manually without any tools. 2. Line up the connector key tabs with the initiator key slots. Grab the connector on both sides and push the connector down into the initiator connector sub assembly until fully seated. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2846 3. After the connector is fully seated, push down the orange CPA with your thumb. Push down until the orange CPA is touching the yellow cover on the connector. FEP Connectors (Steering Gear) FEP Connectors (Steering Gear) Removal Procedure 1. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the locking tab on the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2847 2. Push down the locking tab to release the connector. The small flat-bladed tool may need to be pushed down and angled back slightly to depress the locking tab. Pull on the connector body while releasing the locking tab to disconnect the connector. JST Connectors JST Connectors Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. While depressing the lock, remove the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2848 2. Locate the two indents of the terminal position assurance (TPA) located on the bottom of the connector body. Note: The TPA cannot be removed from the connector while there are terminals present in the connector body. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to very carefully raise the TPA on both sides of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2849 4. View of the TPA when removed from the connector body. 5. Use the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the left side of the terminal release cavity as shown in the graphic. Use the tool to move the terminal release to the right with a gentle prying motion. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Kostal Connectors (Glow Plug Control Module) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2850 Kostal Connectors (Glow Plug Control Module) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure View of typical connector. View of connector in released position. 1. Locate the assist lever at the back of the connector. Move the assist lever to the rear position. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2851 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove the dress cover. 4. Slide the dress cover forward and off of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2852 5. The terminal positive assurance (TPA) is located in the front and rear of the connector. Note: The front TPA cannot be removed from the connector. Only move it to the preset position. 6. Use a small flat-blade tool to move the front TPA to the preset position, outboard approximately 0.125 in. (3 mm). 7. Use a small flat-blade tool to completely remove the rear TPA from the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2853 8. Use the J 38125-24 or the J 38125-560 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 9. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Kostal Connectors (Transmission) Kostal Connectors (Transmission) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2854 1. While depressing the lock, twist and remove the connector from the component. 2. Locate the terminal position assurance (TPA). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2855 Note: The TPA cannot be removed from the connector while there are terminals present in the connector body. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to push the TPA until it bottoms out. 4. Use the J 38125-28 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal cavity as shown in the graphic. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 5. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Terminal Replacement Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2856 After the terminal is crimped to the wire, perform the following procedure in order to replace the terminal. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. Locate the terminal position assurance (TPA). 4. Use a small flat-blade tool to push the TPA until it bottoms out. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2857 5. Ensure the TPA is fully seated. The TPA should be centered and flush with the connector body when viewed. Molex Connectors Molex Connectors Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the top of the wire dress cover. Slide the CPA forward. 2. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2858 3. The lever should be in the full forward position. 4. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2859 5. Remove the dress cover by using a flat bladed tool to release the dress cover locking tabs and lift up on the dress cover. 6. Cut the tie wrap that holds the wires to the connector body. 7. Use a small flat-blade tool to pry one side of the nose piece up to the pre-stage position. When the nose piece is in the pre-staged position, the nose piece will be raised above the connector body the length of the step in the nose piece. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2860 8. Use a small flat-blade tool to pry the other side of the piece to the pre-stage position. If the nose piece is higher than the first step in the nose piece, gently push down on the nose piece until it meets with resistance from the connector body, you should feel the nose piece click into position. 9. Insert the J 38125-213 into the small terminal release hole on the nose piece and gently pull on the back of the wire. 10. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Refer to the terminal crimping procedure in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit. Terminal Replacement Procedure After the terminal is crimped to the wire, perform the following procedure in order to replace the terminal. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2861 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the connector disassembly procedure. Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the connector body and pull the CPA out. The CPA is on the wire harness side of connector. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Use a small flat-bladed tool to gently pry off the dress cover by inserting the tool under the cover opposite the harness side and prying up. 4. Remove the cover. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2862 5. Using a small flat-bladed tool, push on the side of the nose piece retainer while pushing the nose piece forward with your thumb. This will release the terminal position assurance (TPA). 6. Insert the J 38125-12A into the corresponding terminal release cavity. The release cavities are the 2 center rows of cavities on one half of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2863 7. Pressing the J 38125-12A tool in the release cavity of the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and crimper in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. Slide the lever lock away from the connector body. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs on the dress cover of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool release all of the locking tabs. 4. Once the locks are unlocked, lift the dress cover off. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2864 Note: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 5. Release the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the blue locking tabs on both ends of the connector. Gently slide the TPA up to the released position on both ends. 6. For the larger terminals insert the J 38125-13A tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. For the smaller terminals insert the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2865 View of the release tool being used for the larger terminals. View of the release tool being used for the larger terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2866 View of the release tool being used for the smaller terminals. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2867 Side view of connector. View of top of connector. 1. Locate the assist lever and lock on the top of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2868 2. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. 3. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2869 4. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the rear of the connector. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. 5. Once the locking tabs are unlocked, slide the inner connector out of the rear of the connector housing. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2870 6. Use the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by pressing on the tang. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Repairing Connector Terminals Repairing Connector Terminals Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Use the following repair procedures in order to repair the following: * Push to Seat terminals * Pull to Seat terminals Some terminals do not require all of the steps shown. Skip the steps that do not apply for your terminal repair. The J-38125 contains further information. 1. Cut off the terminal between the core and the insulation crimp. Minimize any wire loss. For cable seal terminals, remove the seal. 2. Apply the correct cable seal per gauge size of the wire, if used. Slide the seal back along the wire in order to enable insulation removal. 3. Remove the insulation. 4. For sealed terminals only, align the seal with the end of the cable insulation. 5. Position the strip in the terminal. For sealed terminals, position the strip and seal in the terminal. 6. Hand crimp the core wings. 7. Hand crimp the insulation wings. For sealed terminals, hand crimp the insulation wings around the seal and the cable. 8. Solder all of the hand crimp terminals excepting Micro-Pack 100.64 size. Soldering Micro-Pack 100 World terminals may damage the terminal. Sumitomo Connectors Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2871 Sumitomo Connectors Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2872 3. Remove the dress cover by using a flat-blade tool to release the connector locking tabs and pulling off the dress cover. 4. Relieve the tension on the nose piece retainers by inserting J 38125-12A into the single retainer slot on the end of the nose piece and gently prying out the locking tab. Repeat the process for both of the nose piece locking tabs on the opposite side of the nose piece. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2873 5. Once the nose piece retainers are relaxed, use the J 38125-552 to pull up the nose piece by hooking the tool under the nose piece and pulling up. The nose piece should raise slightly. 6. On the opposite side of the nose piece, use the J 38125-552 to pull up the nose piece by hooking the tool under the nose piece and pulling up. The nose piece should release completely. If the nose piece does not come off, repeat the procedure on the opposite side. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2874 7. The illustration above identifies the entry canal where the terminal release tool will be inserted, and the terminal cavity. * Terminal (1) * Entry Canal (2) 8. Insert the J 38125-553 tool into the entry canal and pry up on the terminal retainer. The terminal retainer is a small plastic piece on the top of the terminal. The terminal retainer must be held up while the terminal is pulled out of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2875 9. The illustration shows a cutaway view of the connector to aid the technician in releasing the terminal retainer. 10. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Refer to the terminal crimping procedure in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit. Terminal Replacement Procedure After the terminal is crimped to the wire, perform the following procedure in order to replace the terminal. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the connector disassembly procedure. Terminal Position Assurance Locks Terminal Position Assurance Locks The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2876 2. Insert the J 38125-11A tool into the cavity on the lower right hand face of the connector until the terminal release tang access panel slides over. 3. Ensure that the terminal release tang access panel is in the correct location to access the terminals. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2877 5. Insert the J 38125-11A into the terminal release tang access slot located behind the access panel of the connector and press down on the terminal while carefully pulling the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component by pressing down on the connector position assurance (CPA). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2878 2. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting the tool in the small recess on the side of the connector and pushing up until the TPA releases from the connector body. The TPA should raise just slightly. Do not try to remove the TPA. Note: The TPA on this connector cannot be removed unless the terminals are removed first. The TPA will come out of the connector body, but only slightly. When the TPA is slightly raised the terminals can be removed. Using excessive force to remove the TPA with the terminals still in the connector will damage the connector. 3. Repeat the process for the other side of the connector. 4. Ensure that the TPA is in the proper position to remove the terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2879 5. While pushing the terminal forward, insert the J 38125-24 in the release cavity above the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2880 2. Insert a small flat-blade tool in the slot below the front loaded terminal position assurance (TPA) and pry up. 3. Remove the TPA by pulling it out of the connector. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-553 on a slight upward angle into the cavity below the terminal to be removed. Ensure that the pointed on the end of the tool is facing the bottom of the terminal and it stays in contact with the terminal until it stops on the plastic terminal retainer. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2881 6. Gently pry the plastic terminal retainer down and carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2882 1. While depressing the lock, pull the two connector halves apart. Note: The TPA is fragile and may break if not done carefully. 2. Use a small flat-blade tool to very carefully push the terminal position assurance (TPA) towards the face of the connector on both sides of the connector. 3. View of the male half of the connector with female terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2883 4. View of the female half of the connector with male terminals. 5. Use the J 38125-215 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. View of the female half of the connector with male terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2884 7. View of the male half of the connector with female terminals. 8. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers A circuit breaker is a protective device that is designed to open the circuit when a current load is in excess of the rated breaker capacity. If there is a short or other type of overload condition in the circuit, the excessive current will open the circuit between the circuit breaker terminals. Two types of circuit breakers are used. Circuit Breaker - This type opens when excessive current passes through it for a period of time. It closes again after a few seconds, and if the cause of the high current is still present, it will open again. The circuit breaker will continue to cycle open and closed until the condition causing the high current is removed. Positive Temperature Coefficient (PTC) Circuit Breaker - This type greatly increases its resistance when excessive current passes through it. The excessive current heats the PTC device, as the device heats its resistance increases. Eventually the resistance gets so high that the circuit is effectively open. Unlike the ordinary circuit breaker the PTC unit will not reset until the circuit is opened, by removing the voltage from its terminals. Once the voltage is removed the circuit breaker will re-close within a second or 2. Circuit Protection - Fuses Circuit Protection - Fuses Special Tools EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM) For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2885 The fuse is the most common method of an automotive wiring circuit protection. Whenever there is an excessive amount of current flowing through a circuit the fusible element will melt and create an open or incomplete circuit. Fuses are a one time protection device and must be replaced each time the circuit is overloaded. To determine if a fuse is open, remove the suspected fuse and examine if the element in the fuse is broken (2). If not broken (1), also check for continuity using a Digital Multimeter (DMM) or a continuity tester. If the element is broken or continuity is suspect, replace the fuse with one of equal current rating. Circuit Protection - Fusible Links Circuit Protection - Fusible Links Special Tools EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM) For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Fusible link is wire designed to melt and break continuity when excessive current is applied. It is often located between or near the battery and starter or electrical center. Use a continuity tester or a Digital Multimeter (DMM) at each end of the wire containing the fusible link in order to determine if it is broken. If broken, it must be replaced with fusible link of the same gauge size. Repairing a Fusible Link Note: Fusible links cut longer than 225 mm (approximately 9 in) will not provide sufficient overload protection. Flat Wire Repairs Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2886 Flat Wire Repairs The flat wire within the flex wiring harness is not serviceable. If an open or short exists within the flex wiring harness the complete harness must be replaced. GMLAN Wiring Repairs GMLAN Wiring Repairs Special Tools * EL-38125-10 - Splice Sleeve Crimping Tool * J 38125-5 - Ultra Torch Special Tool * DuraSeal splice sleeves * A wire stripping tool For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: * A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. * A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The GM Local Area Network (GMLAN) System requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working on GMLAN connectors and terminals. GMLAN Repairs Note: When making a repair to any GMLAN network, the original wire length after the repair must be the same length as before the repair. If the network is a twisted pair, the twist must be maintained after the repair is completed. GMLAN has 2 types of networks, low speed and high speed. Low speed GMLAN has a single wire and works at slow speeds. High speed GMLAN has 2 wires in a twisted pair and works at higher speeds. For more information on GMLAN, refer to Data Link Communications Description and Operation ( See: Computers and Control Systems/Information Bus/Description and Operation). GMLAN Connector Terminal Repair Note: A terminated lead can be used to replace damaged connector terminals for both high speed and low speed GMLAN systems. When making a connector terminal repair on a GMLAN high speed system with twisted pair wires, do not untwist the wires more than necessary to make the repair. If the individual terminals are damaged on any GMLAN connection, use the appropriate connector repair procedure in order to repair the terminal. Refer to Connector Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Connector Repairs) for the appropriate connector repair procedure. GMLAN Wire Repair Note: Refer to Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Wiring Repairs) in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gauge size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and EL-38125-10 - tool. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the DuraSeal splice sleeves. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2887 Note: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: * Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. * Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. * Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert to regional wiring gauge size. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the EL-38125-10 - tool in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the splice sleeve crimp tool. The crimp tool has four nests, one for each color. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2888 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs Caution: Do not solder repairs under any circumstances as this could result in the air reference being obstructed. If the heated oxygen sensor pigtail wiring, connector, or terminal is damaged the entire oxygen sensor assembly must be replaced. Do not attempt to repair the wiring, connector, or terminals. In order for the sensor to function properly it must have a clean air reference. This clean air reference is obtained by way of the oxygen sensor signal and heater wires. Any attempt to repair the wires, connectors or terminals could result in the obstruction of the air reference and degrade oxygen sensor performance. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2889 The following guidelines should be used when servicing the heated oxygen sensor: * Do not apply contact cleaner or other materials to the sensor or vehicle harness connectors. These materials may get into the sensor, causing poor performance. Also, the sensor pigtail and harness wires must not be damaged in such a way that the wires inside are exposed. This could provide a path for foreign materials to enter the sensor and cause performance problems. * Neither the sensor nor vehicle lead wires should be bent sharply or kinked. Sharp bends, kinks, etc., could block the reference air path through the lead wire. * Do not remove or defeat the oxygen sensor ground wire (where applicable). Vehicles that utilize the ground wire sensor may rely on this ground as the only ground contact to the sensor. Removal of the ground wire will also cause poor engine performance. * To prevent damage due to water intrusion, be sure that the peripheral seal remains intact on the vehicle harness connector. High Temperature Wiring Repairs High Temperature Wiring Repairs Special Tools * EL-38125-10 - Splice Sleeve Crimping Tool * J 38125-5 - Ultra Torch * DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). High Temperature Wiring Wiring that is exposed to high temperatures, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time may use materials i.e. wires, connectors, and shielding that has a higher heat rating than typical wiring. When making a repair in a high temperature area observe the following: * Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature to replace any damaged wire. * Replace any heat shielding that is removed. * Cover any DuraSeal splice sleeves with SCT1 shrink tubing. * After making a wiring repair, ensure that the location of the wiring is not moved closer to the heat source. Identifying High Temperature Wiring Wiring that is exposed to high temperature, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time need special considerations when making wiring repairs. Areas that may be exposed to higher temperatures can be identified by heat resistant materials that are being used in those areas. These materials may include heat reflective tape, moon tape, and high temperature shrink tubing. Also conduit and other protective coverings may be used. Because conduit or similar coverings are used throughout the vehicle regardless of the temperature, it may be necessary for the technician to determine if an area is exposed to excessive heat before making a wiring repair. Obvious areas of consideration would be any area located near the exhaust manifolds, catalytic converter, and exhaust pipes. Items Required * DuraSeal splice sleeves to crimp and seal connections * High temperature SCT1 shrink tubing to protect the splice sleeves * Terminated leads or pigtails * The correct tools to remove the terminals from the connectors Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature of the same or larger gauge size as the original wire when repair damage wire. Also replace any reflective tape that you remove during the repair. High Temperature Wire Repair Note: Refer to Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Wiring Repairs) in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature rating of the same gauge size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the EL-38125-10 - tool and then encapsulate the splice sleeve using the high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2890 Note: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: * Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. * Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. * Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert to regional wiring gauge size. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Slide a section of high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing down the length of wire to be spliced. Ensure that the shrink tubing will not interfere with the splice procedure. 5. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 6. Use the EL-38125-10 - tool in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the splice sleeve crimp tool. The crimp tool has four nests, one for each color. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2891 7. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 8. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 9. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 10. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 11. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2892 12. Center the high temperature SCT1 shrink tube over the DuraSeal splice sleeve. 13. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the high temperature heat shrink tubing. 14. Gradually move the heat from the center to the open end of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. 15. Replace any reflective tape and clips that may have been remove during the repair. Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation If the wire insulation has been chafed, or broken, enough to show the conductive portion of the wire, and the wire is not damaged, determine the length of insulation that needs to be repaired. If the repair is less than 280 mm (11 in), cut the wire within the damaged area. Than slide the appropriate heat shrink tubing (listed below) over the wire, and repair the wire by splicing the wires together. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves). Once the wire is spliced together slide heat shrink tubing over the damaged area and apply heat to seal the repaired wire. If the wire is damaged, or the damaged area is larger than 280 mm (11 in), than replace the damaged wire by splicing in a new section of wire. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2893 SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs Special Tools * EL-38125-10 - Splice Sleeve Crimping Tool * J 38125-5 - Ultra Torch * DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: * A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. * A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides the necessary low resistance contact integrity for these sensitive, low energy circuits. The Supplemental Inflatable Restraint (SIR) System/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working with the SIR/SRS, and the wiring components, such as connectors and terminals. SIR/SRS Connector Repair (Plastic Body and Terminal Metal Pin) Note: Do not use the terminals in the kit in order to replace damaged SIR/SRS system terminals. Use either an SIR/SRS pigtail or a terminated lead from the SIR Repair Kit Tray. The terminals in the SIR/SRS system are made with a special plating. This plating provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. Pigtail repair packs are available for SIR/SRS connectors with eight or less terminals. Only the connector body is available for connectors with more than eight terminals. Terminated leads can be used to replace damaged terminals when replacing the connector body. SIR/SRS Component Wire Pigtail Repair Note: Do not make wire, connector, or terminal repairs on components with wire pigtails. A wire pigtail is a wire or wires attached directly to the device, not by a connector. If a wiring pigtail is damaged, you must replace the entire component, with pigtail. The inflatable restraint steering wheel module coil is an example of a pigtail component. SIR/SRS Wire Repair Note: Refer to Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Wiring Repairs) in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2894 If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gauge size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and EL-38125-10 - tool. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the DuraSeal splice sleeves. Note: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: * Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. * Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. * Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert to regional wiring gauge size. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the EL-38125-10 - tool in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the splice sleeve crimp tool. The crimp tool has four nests, one for each color. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2895 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Connector Position Assurance (CPA) The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of a connector. CPAs are used in all SIR System connectors and also in some connectors of other systems. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals of a connection. Terminal Position Assurance (TPA) The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2896 Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Special Tools * EL-38125-10 - Splice Sleeve Crimping Tool * J 38125-5 - Ultra Torch * DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Note: Use only DuraSeal splice sleeves. Other splice sleeves may not protect the splice from moisture or provide a good electrical connection. Use DuraSeal splice sleeves to form a one-to-one splice on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. Use DuraSeal splice sleeves where there is special requirements such as moisture sealing. Follow the instructions below in order to splice copper wire using DuraSeal splice sleeves. Note: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: * Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. * Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. * Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert to regional wiring gauge size. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2897 5. Use the EL-38125-10 - tool in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the splice sleeve crimp tool. The crimp tool has four nests, one for each color. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2898 * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Splicing Inline Harness Diodes Splicing Inline Harness Diodes Many vehicle electrical systems use a diode to isolate circuits and protect the components from voltage spikes. When installing a new diode use the following procedure. 1. Open the harness. * If the harness is taped, remove the tape. * To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing seam ripper (available from sewing supply stores) in order to cut open the harness. * If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the diode. 2. If the diode is taped to the harness, remove all of the tape. 3. Check and record the current flow direction and orientation of diode. 4. Remove the inoperative diode from the harness with a suitable soldering tool. Note: If the diode is located next to a connector terminal remove the terminal(s) from the connector to prevent damage from the soldering tool. 5. Carefully strip away a section of insulation next to the old soldered portion of the wire(s). Do not remove any more than is needed to attach the new diode. 6. Check current flow direction of the new diode, being sure to install the diode with correct bias. Reference the appropriate service manual wiring schematic to obtain the correct diode installation position. 7. Attach the new diode to the wire(s) using 60/40 rosin core solder. Before soldering attach some heat sinks (aluminum alligator clips) across the diode wire ends to protect the diode from excessive heat. Follow the manufacturer's instruction for the soldering equipment. 8. Reinstall terminal(s) into the connector body if previously removed. Note: To prevent shorts to ground and water intrusion, completely cover all exposed wire and diode attachment points with tape. 9. Tape the diode to the harness or connector using electrical tape. Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable Twisted/shielded cable is used in order to protect wiring from electrical noise. Two-conductor cable of this construction is used between the radio and the Delco-Bose(R) speaker/amplifier units and other applications where low level, sensitive signals must be carried. Follow the instructions below in order to repair the twisted/shielded cable. 1. Remove the outer jacket (1). Use care not to cut into the drain wire of the mylar tape. 2. Unwrap the tape. Do not remove the tape. Use the tape in order to rewrap the twisted conductors after the splice is made. 3. Prepare the splice. Untwist the conductors and follow the instructions for Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves). Staggering the splices by 65 mm (2.5 in) is recommended. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2899 Note: Apply the mylar tape with the aluminum side inward. This ensures good electrical contact with the drain wire. 4. Re-assemble the cable. * Rewrap the conductors with the mylar tape. If the mylar tape is damaged, use 3M product AL-36FR to replace the damaged mylar tape. * Use caution not to wrap the drain wire in the tape (1). * Follow the splicing instructions for copper wire and splice the drain wire. * Wrap the drain wire around the conductors and tape with electrical tape to replace the outer insulation. 5. Tape over the entire cable. Use a winding motion when you apply the tape. Wiring Repairs Wiring Repairs The Wiring Repairs section contains the following types of wiring repair information. Using these elements together will make wiring repair faster and easier: * Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections) * Flat Wire Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Flat Wire Repairs) * GMLAN Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/GMLAN Wiring Repairs) * High Temperature Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/High Temperature Wiring Repairs) * Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs) * Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves) * Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable) * Splicing Inline Harness Diodes (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Inline Harness Diodes) * SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs) US English/Metric Conversion US English/Metric Conversion Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2900 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2901 Basic Digital Multimeter Requirements Basic Digital Multimeter Requirements Digital Multimeter (DMM) Basic Requirements Service information is validated using digital multimeters that meet or exceed the following requirements. Using a multimeter that does not meet these basic requirements may give inaccurate readings which could lead to an incorrect diagnosis. Display and Settings 1. Four digits displayed 2. Voltage, amperage, resistance, frequency, diode test settings, and min-max function 3. Display positive and negative values Voltage 1. Have at least 10 Mohm input impedance 2. Test a DC voltage range of 0.1-1000 V. 3. Test an AC voltage range of 0.1-1000 V. Amperage 1. Test a DC amperage range of 0.1µA-10 A. 2. Test an AC amperage range of 0.1µA-10 A. Resistance Test a resistance range of 0.1 ohm-40 Mohm and displays infinite for a value greater than 40 Mohm (O.L. (Over-load)) Frequency Test for a frequency range of 0.5 HZ-199 K HZ Diode Test 1. Apply at least 1 mA when performing the diode bias test 2. Display the break over voltage drop (0-3 V) of a forward biased diode 3. Display infinite (O.L. (Over-load)) when a diode is reverse biased Min-Max Readings 1. Can update at a 1 ms sample rate 2. Saves and displays minimum and maximum values Testing Ground and Low Reference Circuits Testing Ground and Low Reference Circuits Because a test lamp can light with up to 200 ohm in a ground or low reference circuit they are not recommended to be used for this type of test. A low impedance test lamp can light and indicate the circuit is good when there is as much as 20-30 ohm present, while a high impedance test lamp can light with up to 200 ohm present in the circuit. This is why the Digital Multi-Meter (DMM) is used when validating a ground or low reference circuit continuity. When using the DMM there are many vehicle conditions that can affect the ground and low reference continuity testing. If these conditions are not met, a ground or low reference circuit test can fail on a good circuit. This may cause longer diagnosis time and incorrect component replacement. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2902 Any current flow through a ground or low reference circuit, while being tested, will skew the DMM continuity reading, or display a reading higher than when there is no current flowing. Performing a ground or low reference circuit continuity test, in reference to the vehicles battery negative terminal, will have the highest risk of failing a good ground or low reference circuit test than any other ground reference point. The best ground test points would be a control module housing (if the control modules housing is metal and grounded), door jamb striker (if attached to metal), under dash metal frame work, engine block, or body ground studs (other than where the negative battery cable is attached). A typical DMM ground or low reference circuit continuity reading can be as high as 100 ohm with the ignition ON, and drop to 15-25 ohm after the ignition is turned OFF. The reading will drop below 10 ohm after 30-40 seconds, then below 5 ohm after 60 seconds. Once the vehicle completely goes to sleep (generally 3-10 minutes) the reading will drop below 0.3 ohm. The following list of conditions may need to be met to ensure a valid continuity reading on a ground or low reference circuit: * Ignition OFF * Key out of the ignition switch (when not equipped with keyless entry and remote start) * Retained Accessory Power (RAP) OFF (open and close the driver door after ignition OFF) * Battery charger set at a 2 A or less charge rate * Scan tool not communicating with any vehicle control module (in some cases it may need to be disconnected from the DLC) * All entry doors closed * Headlamps OFF (auto headlamps disabled) * Any delay lighting OFF * HVAC after blow OFF * Any accessory that can work when the ignition is OFF * Wait up to 60 seconds (after all other listed conditions are met) Activating the DOOR LOCK function with a key fob can greatly reduce the time to achieve a valid ground or low reference continuity test result. Terminal Wiring Repair Terminal Wiring Repair Special Tools * EL-38125-10 - Splice Sleeve Crimp Tool * EL-38125-580 - Terminal Release Tool Kit * J-38125-5 - Ultra Torch * EL-35616 - Connector Test Adapter Kit For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Note: All repairs near the engine manifold, turbo engine and all exhaust pipes should follow the High Temperature Wiring Repair procedures. 1. Find the appropriate connector end view within the connector end view section. The connector end view has the following information: * Diagnostic probe tool * Terminal release tool * Terminal/terminated lead part numbers 2. Determine if a terminal is damaged. Note: Not using the proper test kit probe may cause damage to the terminal(s) that are probed. * Locate the diagnostic probe tool from the connector end view. The connector end view describes the color and part number to help the technician find and use the correct tool. * Connect the probe tool to the Digital Multimeter. * Insert the probe tool into the cavity and follow the procedures from the Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter). 3. Disconnect the connector body to perform the repair. Note: Several procedures for specific connector bodies are called out in Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Wiring Repairs). Use the following repair procedures to repair the following terminals: Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2903 Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack))Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Push to Seat))Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Pull to Seat))Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W))Delphi Connectors (Micro.64) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Micro .64) )Delphi Connectors (12-Way) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (12-Way))Delphi Connectors (Steering Gear) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Steering Gear)) * The TPA and CPA should be removed before releasing the terminal for the connector body. * Look at the connector end view to locate the cavity of the damaged terminal and find the proper terminal release tool from the terminal release tool kit. Note: Using the incorrect terminal release tool can damage the connector body. * Insert the terminal release tool into the cavity. Note: Some terminals have a lever that must be disengaged before the terminal can be released. Gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Terminated Lead Repair Terminated Lead Repair Special Tools * EL-38125-10 - Splice Sleeve Crimp Tool * EL-38125-580 - Terminal Release Tool Kit * J-38125-5 - Ultra Torch * EL-35616 - Connector Test Adapter Kit For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Note: All repairs near the engine manifold, turbo engine and all exhaust pipes should follow the High Temperature Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/High Temperature Wiring Repairs) procedures. Terminated leads are terminals that are crimped onto wires. The terminated lead can be used throughout the vehicle since it is designed for temperatures up to 150°C. The length of the wire is 450 mm. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2904 The DuraSeal splice sleeve has the following 2 critical features: * A special heat shrink tubing that environmentally seals the splice. The shrink tubing contains a sealing adhesive inside the shrink tubing. * A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp that provides the necessary contact integrity for sensitive low energy circuits. 1. Use the connector end view to identify the correct terminated lead. 2. The terminated lead package should include a DuraSeal splice sleeve. If not, use the chart to identify the correct part. 3. Open the harness by removing any tape: Use a sewing seam ripper, or a comparable tool, to cut open the harness, to avoid wire insulation damage. 4. Depending on how many terminals need repairs, cut the terminal and wire back at least 40 mm. Try to keep the harness wire length the same. If more than one terminated lead is required, stagger the lengths by 40 mm. This helps reduce the bundle size of the wire harness. 5. Use the EL-38125-10 - tool in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the splice sleeve crimp tool. The crimp tool has four nests, one for each color. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2905 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the J-38125-5 - ultra torch , apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2906 Fuel Level Sensor: Connector Views A6C Fuel Pump and Level Sensor Assembly - Primary B46B Fuel Level Sensor - Secondary Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2907 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2908 Fuel Level Sensor: Electrical Diagrams For information regarding diagrams for this component, please refer to Powertrain Management diagrams. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2909 Fuel Level Sensor: Service and Repair Primary Fuel Level Sensor Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Locations Fuel Pressure Sensor: Locations Wheels/Vehicle Underbody Component Views Fuel System Components 1 - B46B Fuel Level Sensor - Secondary 2 - B150 Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor 3 - Q13 Evaporative Emission Vent Solenoid Valve 4 - B46A Fuel Level Sensor - Primary 5 - G12 Fuel Pump 6 - B47 Fuel Pressure Sensor Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2913 Fuel Pressure Sensor: Diagrams B47 Fuel Pressure Sensor Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Locations Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor: Locations Wheels/Vehicle Underbody Component Views Fuel System Components 1 - B46B Fuel Level Sensor - Secondary 2 - B150 Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor 3 - Q13 Evaporative Emission Vent Solenoid Valve 4 - B46A Fuel Level Sensor - Primary 5 - G12 Fuel Pump 6 - B47 Fuel Pressure Sensor Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2917 Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor: Diagrams B150 Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2918 Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor: Service and Repair Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Diagrams B75B Mass Air Flow/Intake Air Temperature Sensor Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2922 Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Service and Repair Mass Airflow Sensor with Intake Air Temperature Sensor Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Disassembled Views Knock Sensor: Locations Disassembled Views Disassembled Views Engine Covers and Component Assemblies (2 of 2) (LF1) 1 - Water Outlet Bolt 2 - Water Outlet 3 - Water Outlet O-ring 4 - Water Outlet Seal 5 - Knock Sensor Bolt 6 - Knock Sensor 7 - Engine Coolant Heater Assembly 8 - Crankshaft Position Sensor Bolt 9 - Crankshaft Position Sensor 10 - Crankshaft Position Sensor O-ring 11 - Right Cylinder Head Assembly 12 - Right Cylinder Head Gasket 13 - Lower Fuel Rail Noise Shield 14 - Engine Cooling Thermostat Gasket 15 - Engine Cooling Thermostat 16 - Engine Cooling Thermostat Housing Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Disassembled Views > Page 2927 17 - Engine Cooling Thermostat Bolt - Short 18 - Engine Cooling Thermostat Housing Bolt - Long 19 - Fuel Feed Pipe Assembly 20 - Fuel Feed Pipe Assembly Bolt 21 - Fuel Feed Intermediate Pipe Assembly 22 - Fuel Pump Gasket 23 - Fuel Pump O-ring Seal 24 - Fuel Pump 25 - Fuel Pump Bolt 26 - Left Cylinder Head Assembly 27 - Left Cylinder Head Gasket 28 - Oil Level Indicator 29 Oil Level Indicator Handle O-ring 30 - Oil Level Indicator Tube Bolt 31 - Oil Level Indicator Tube 32 - Oil Level Indicator Tube O-ring 33 - Oil Filter Adapter Assembly 34 - Engine Short Block Assembly 35 - Oil Pump Assembly 36 - Timing Drive Assembly Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Disassembled Views > Page 2928 Knock Sensor: Locations Powertrain Component Views Powertrain Component Views Front Engine Components (LAF 1 of 2) 1 - Q38 Throttle Body 2 - G18 High Pressure Fuel Pump 3 - B23F Camshaft Position Sensor Intake 4 - B37 Engine Oil Pressure Switch 5 - B68 Knock Sensor 6 - B26 Crankshaft Position Sensor 7 - M64 Starter Motor 8 - Q2 A/C Compressor Clutch 9 - G13 Generator Left Front of the Engine Components (LF1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Disassembled Views > Page 2929 1 - T8B Ignition Coil 2 2 - T8D Ignition Coil 4 3 - T8F Ignition Coil 6 4 - G18 High Pressure Fuel Pump 5 - B34 Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor 6 - M64 Starter Motor 7 - B68B Knock Sensor 2 8 - B37 Engine Oil Pressure Switch 9 - B1 A/C Refrigerant Pressure Sensor 10 - Q2 A/C Compressor Clutch 11 - G13 Generator Right Rear of the Engine Components (LF1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Disassembled Views > Page 2930 1 - B74 Manifold Absolute Pressure Sensor 2 - T8E Ignition Coil 5 3 - T8C Ignition Coil 3 4 - Q12 Evaporative Emission Purge Solenoid Valve 5 - Q38 Throttle Body 6 - B23B Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 1 Intake 7 - B23D Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 2 Intake 8 - Q6D Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Bank 2 Intake 9 - Q6C Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Bank 2 Exhaust 10 - B23C Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 2 Exhaust 11 - Q6B Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Bank 1 Intake 12 - Q6A Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Bank 1 Exhaust 13 - B23A Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 1 Exhaust 14 - B68A Knock Sensor 1 15 - B26 Crankshaft Position Sensor 16 - T8A Ignition Coil 1 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2931 Knock Sensor: Diagrams B68 Knock Sensor (LAF) B68A Knock Sensor 1 (LF1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2932 B68B Knock Sensor 2 (LF1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2933 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Knock Sensor Replacement - Bank 1 Knock Sensor: Service and Repair Knock Sensor Replacement - Bank 1 Knock Sensor Replacement - Bank 1 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Knock Sensor Replacement - Bank 1 > Page 2936 Knock Sensor: Service and Repair Knock Sensor Replacement - Bank 2 Knock Sensor Replacement - Bank 2 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor: Locations Powertrain Component Views Front Engine Components (LAF 2 of 2) 1 - B47B Fuel Rail Pressure Sensor 2 - B74 Manifold Absolute Pressure Sensor 3 - Q17D Fuel Injector 4 4 - Q17C Fuel Injector 3 5 - B1 A/C Refrigerant Pressure Sensor 6 - Q17B Fuel Injector 2 7 - Q17A Fuel Injector 1 Right Rear of the Engine Components (LF1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2940 1 - B74 Manifold Absolute Pressure Sensor 2 - T8E Ignition Coil 5 3 - T8C Ignition Coil 3 4 - Q12 Evaporative Emission Purge Solenoid Valve 5 - Q38 Throttle Body 6 - B23B Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 1 Intake 7 - B23D Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 2 Intake 8 - Q6D Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Bank 2 Intake 9 - Q6C Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Bank 2 Exhaust 10 - B23C Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 2 Exhaust 11 - Q6B Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Bank 1 Intake 12 - Q6A Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Bank 1 Exhaust 13 - B23A Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 1 Exhaust 14 - B68A Knock Sensor 1 15 - B26 Crankshaft Position Sensor 16 - T8A Ignition Coil 1 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2941 Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor: Diagrams B74 Manifold Absolute Pressure Sensor Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2942 Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor: Service and Repair Manifold Absolute Pressure Sensor Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oil Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Disassembled Views Oil Pressure Sensor: Locations Disassembled Views Disassembled Views Oil Filter Adapter 440 - Oil Filter Adapter 441 - Oil Filter Adapter Gasket 442 - Oil Filter Adapter Bolt 443 - Oil Filter Adapter Bolt - Long 445 - Oil Filter Fitting 449 - Oil Filter 728 - Engine Oil Pressure Sensor 729 Engine Oil Pressure Sensor O-ring Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oil Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Disassembled Views > Page 2947 Oil Pressure Sensor: Locations Powertrain Component Views Powertrain Component Views Front Engine Components (LAF 1 of 2) 1 - Q38 Throttle Body 2 - G18 High Pressure Fuel Pump 3 - B23F Camshaft Position Sensor Intake 4 - B37 Engine Oil Pressure Switch 5 - B68 Knock Sensor 6 - B26 Crankshaft Position Sensor 7 - M64 Starter Motor 8 - Q2 A/C Compressor Clutch 9 - G13 Generator Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oil Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2948 Oil Pressure Sensor: Diagrams B37 Engine Oil Pressure Switch (LAF) B37 Engine Oil Pressure Switch (LF1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oil Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2949 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oil Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2950 Oil Pressure Sensor: Service and Repair Engine Oil Pressure Sensor and/or Switch Replacement (LF1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations Oxygen Sensor: Locations Powertrain Component Views Left Rear Engine Components (LAF) 1 - T8D Ignition Coil 4 2 - T8C Ignition Coil 3 3 - T8B Ignition Coil 2 4 - T8A Ignition Coil 1 5 - Q6F Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Intake 6 - Q6E Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Exhaust 7 - B52A Heated Oxygen Sensor 1 8 - B52B Heated Oxygen Sensor 2 9 - B34 Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor 10 - B23E Camshaft Position Sensor - Exhaust 11 - Q12 Evaporative Emission Purge Solenoid Valve Front of the Exhaust System Components (LF1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2954 1 - B52C Heated Oxygen Sensor - Bank 1 Sensor 1 2 - B52D Heated Oxygen Sensor - Bank 1 Sensor 2 3 - B52F Heated Oxygen Sensor - Bank 2 Sensor 2 4 - B52E Heated Oxygen Sensor Bank 2 Sensor 1 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2955 Oxygen Sensor: Diagrams B52A Heated Oxygen Sensor 1 (LAF) B52B Heated Oxygen Sensor 2 (LAF) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2956 B52C Heated Oxygen Sensor - Bank 1 Sensor 1 (LF1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2957 B52D Heated Oxygen Sensor - Bank 1 Sensor 2 (LF1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2958 B52E Heated Oxygen Sensor - Bank 2 Sensor 1 (LF1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2959 B52F Heated Oxygen Sensor - Bank 2 Sensor 2 (LF1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2960 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service Precautions > Heated Oxygen and Oxygen Sensor Caution Oxygen Sensor: Service Precautions Heated Oxygen and Oxygen Sensor Caution Heated Oxygen and Oxygen Sensor Caution Caution: Do not remove the pigtail from either the heated oxygen sensor (HO2S) or the oxygen sensor (O2S). Removing the pigtail or the connector will affect sensor operation. Handle the oxygen sensor carefully. Do not drop the HO2S. Keep the in-line electrical connector and the louvered end free of grease, dirt, or other contaminants. Do not use cleaning solvents of any type. Do not repair the wiring, connector or terminals. Replace the oxygen sensor if the pigtail wiring, connector, or terminal is damaged. This external clean air reference is obtained by way of the oxygen sensor signal and heater wires. Any attempt to repair the wires, connectors, or terminals could result in the obstruction of the air reference and degraded sensor performance. The following guidelines should be used when servicing the heated oxygen sensor: * Do not apply contact cleaner or other materials to the sensor or vehicle harness connectors. These materials may get into the sensor causing poor performance. * Do not damage the sensor pigtail and harness wires in such a way that the wires inside are exposed. This could provide a path for foreign materials to enter the sensor and cause performance problems. * Ensure the sensor or vehicle lead wires are not bent sharply or kinked. Sharp bends or kinks could block the reference air path through the lead wire. * Do not remove or defeat the oxygen sensor ground wire, where applicable. Vehicles that utilize the ground wired sensor may rely on this ground as the only ground contact to the sensor. Removal of the ground wire will cause poor engine performance. * Ensure that the peripheral seal remains intact on the vehicle harness connector in order to prevent damage due to water intrusion. The engine harness may be repaired using Packard's Crimp and Splice Seals Terminal Repair Kit. Under no circumstances should repairs be soldered since this could result in the air reference being obstructed. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service Precautions > Heated Oxygen and Oxygen Sensor Caution > Page 2963 Oxygen Sensor: Service Precautions Heated Oxygen Sensor Resistance Learn Reset Caution Heated Oxygen Sensor Resistance Learn Reset Caution Caution: When replacing the HO2S perform the following: * A code clear with a scan tool, regardless of whether or not a DTC is set * HO2S heater resistance learn reset with a scan tool, where available Perform the above in order to reset the HO2S resistance learned value and avoid possible HO2S failure. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service Precautions > Heated Oxygen and Oxygen Sensor Caution > Page 2964 Oxygen Sensor: Service Precautions Silicon Contamination of Heated Oxygen Sensors Caution Silicon Contamination of Heated Oxygen Sensors Caution Caution: Contamination of the oxygen sensor can result from the use of an inappropriate RTV sealant (not oxygen sensor safe) or excessive engine coolant or oil consumption. Remove the HO2S and visually inspect the portion of the sensor exposed to the exhaust stream in order to check for contamination. If contaminated, the portion of the sensor exposed to the exhaust stream will have a white powdery coating. Silicon contamination causes a high but false HO2S signal voltage (rich exhaust indication). The control module will then reduce the amount of fuel delivered to the engine, causing a severe driveability problem. Eliminate the source of contamination before replacing the oxygen sensor. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heated Oxygen Sensor - Bank 1 Sensor 1 Oxygen Sensor: Service and Repair Heated Oxygen Sensor - Bank 1 Sensor 1 Heated Oxygen Sensor Replacement - Bank 1 Sensor 1 (LF1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heated Oxygen Sensor - Bank 1 Sensor 1 > Page 2967 Oxygen Sensor: Service and Repair Heated Oxygen Sensor - Bank 1 Sensor 2 Heated Oxygen Sensor Replacement - Bank 1 Sensor 2 (LF1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heated Oxygen Sensor - Bank 1 Sensor 1 > Page 2968 Oxygen Sensor: Service and Repair Heated Oxygen Sensor - Bank 2 Sensor 1 Heated Oxygen Sensor Replacement - Bank 2 Sensor 1 (LF1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heated Oxygen Sensor - Bank 1 Sensor 1 > Page 2969 Oxygen Sensor: Service and Repair Heated Oxygen Sensor - Bank 2 Sensor 2 Heated Oxygen Sensor Replacement - Bank 2 Sensor 2 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Exploded Views Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Exploded Views 6L50/6L80/6L90 - Automatic Transmission Disassembled Views Park System Components 50 - A/Trans Case 600 - Park Pawl Shaft 601 - Park Pawl Spring 602 - Park Pawl 603 - Park Pawl Actuator Guide Pin 604 - Manual Shift Shaft Seal 605 - Park Pawl Actuator Guide Seal 606 - Park Pawl Actuator Guide 607 - Park Pawl Actuator Assembly 608 - Manual Shift Detent Lever Shaft 609 - Manual Shift Detent (w/Shaft Position Switch) Lever Assembly 610 - Manual Shift Detent Lever Pin 611 - Manual Shift Shaft Pin 6T70/6T75 - Automatic Transmission Disassembled Views Park System Components Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Exploded Views > Page 2974 500 - Park Pawl Actuator Bracket Bolt 501 - Park Pawl Actuator Bracket 502 - Park Pawl Shaft 503 - Park Pawl 504 - Park Pawl Spring 505 - Park Pawl Actuator Guide Pin 506 - Park Pawl Actuator Guide 507 - A/Trans Case Assembly 508 - Manual Shift Shaft Seal 509 - Park Pawl Actuator Assembly 510 - Manual Shift Shaft Pin 511 - Manual Shift Detent (w/Shaft Position Switch) Lever Assembly Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Exploded Views > Page 2975 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Connector Views P2 Transmission Shift Lever Position Indicator Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Service and Repair 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission Manual Shift Detent Lever with Shaft Position Switch Assembly Replacement Special Tools * DT-48550 Detent Lever Pin Remover * J 41229 Manual Shaft Pin Installer Removal Procedure 1. Remove the control valve body. Refer to Control Valve Body Replacement (See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Valve Body/Service and Repair/6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission/Control Valve Body Replacement). 2. Remove the manual shaft detent lever hub pin (1) using DT-48550. 3. Remove the manual shift shaft pin (5). Discard the pin. 4. Remove the manual shaft (2). Note: Disconnect the actuator rod (3) from the detent lever assembly. Do not remove the actuator rod from the transmission case. 5. Remove the manual shaft detent (w/shift position switch) lever assembly (4). Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 2978 Note: Connect the actuator rod (3) to the detent lever assembly. 1. Install the manual shaft detent (w/shift position switch) lever assembly (4). Note: Lubricate the shaft with automatic transmission fluid to prevent damage to the manual shift shaft seal during installation. 2. Install the manual shaft (2). 3. Install the manual shaft detent lever hub pin (1) using DT-48550. Install the Manual Shaft Detent Lever Hub Pin to height of (b) 7.9 mm (0.38 in). Caution: Use the manual shaft pin installer to install the pin at the correct height in order to properly secure the manual shaft. If you install the pin too deep, the case bore may crack. 4. Install the NEW manual shift shaft pin (5) using J 41229. Use a NEW pin to ensure proper engagement with the case. Inspect pin installed height is within (a) 7.2-8.2 mm (0.28-0.32 in). 5. Install the control valve body. Refer to Control Valve Body Replacement (See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Valve Body/Service and Repair/6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission/Control Valve Body Replacement). 6. Perform the transmission adaptive values learn procedure. Refer to Transmission Adaptive Values Learn (See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 2979 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Service and Repair 6T70/6T75 - Automatic Transmission Manual Shift Detent Lever with Shaft Position Switch Assembly Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 2980 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Locations Instrument Panel/Center Console Component Views Lower Left of the Instrument Panel Components 1 - B80 Park Brake Switch 2 - T3 Audio Amplifier 3 - K9 Body Control Module 4 - K73 Telematics Communication Interface Control Module (UE1) 5 - B107 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor 6 T4S Wireless Communication Antenna - Bluetooth (UE1 with UPF) 7 - B22 Brake Pedal Position Sensor 8 - X84 Data Link Connector Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2985 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Diagrams B107 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2986 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Service and Repair Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Diagrams B75B Mass Air Flow/Intake Air Temperature Sensor Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2990 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Service and Repair Mass Airflow Sensor with Intake Air Temperature Sensor Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations > Disassembled Views Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch: Locations Disassembled Views Disassembled Views Fuel Rail (LF1) 1 - Fuel Rail Bolt 2 - Fuel Pressure Sensor 3 - Fuel Injector Retainer 4 - Fuel Injector O-ring Seal 5 - Fuel Injector Spacer 6 - Fuel Injector 7 - Fuel Injector Teflon Seal 8 - Fuel Rail Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations > Disassembled Views > Page 2995 Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch: Locations Powertrain Component Views Powertrain Component Views Front Engine Components (LAF 2 of 2) 1 - B47B Fuel Rail Pressure Sensor 2 - B74 Manifold Absolute Pressure Sensor 3 - Q17D Fuel Injector 4 4 - Q17C Fuel Injector 3 5 - B1 A/C Refrigerant Pressure Sensor 6 - Q17B Fuel Injector 2 7 - Q17A Fuel Injector 1 Top of the Engine Components (LF1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations > Disassembled Views > Page 2996 1 - B47B Fuel Rail Pressure Sensor 2 - Q17A Fuel Injector 1 3 - Q17C Fuel Injector 3 4 - Q17E Fuel Injector 5 5 - Q17F Fuel Injector 6 6 - Q17D Fuel Injector 4 7 - Q17B Fuel Injector 2 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 2997 Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch: Diagrams B47B Fuel Rail Pressure Sensor Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Pressure Sensor Replacement - Fuel Feed Pipe Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch: Service and Repair Fuel Pressure Sensor Replacement - Fuel Feed Pipe Fuel Pressure Sensor Replacement - Fuel Feed Pipe Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Pressure Sensor Replacement - Fuel Feed Pipe > Page 3000 Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch: Service and Repair Fuel Pressure Sensor Replacement - Fuel Injection Fuel Rail Fuel Pressure Sensor Replacement - Fuel Injection Fuel Rail (LF1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Disassembled Views Camshaft Position Sensor: Locations Disassembled Views Disassembled Views Camshaft Timing Components 1 - Primary Timing Chain Tensioner Bolt 2 - Left Secondary Timing Chain Shoe Bolt 3 - Right Secondary Timing Chain Tensioner 4 - Right Secondary Timing Chain Tensioner Gasket 5 - Right Secondary Timing Chain Shoe 6 - Secondary Timing Chain 7 - Camshaft Position Actuator Bolt 8 Exhaust Camshaft Position Actuator 9 - Camshaft Position Actuator Thrust Washer 10 - Intake Camshaft Position Actuator 11 - Right Secondary Timing Chain Guide 12 - Left Camshaft Intermediate Drive Shaft Sprocket 13 - Camshaft Intermediate Drive Shaft Sprocket Bolt 14 - Left Secondary Timing Chain Shoe 15 - Left Secondary Timing Chain Tensioner Gasket 16 - Left Secondary Timing Chain Tensioner Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Disassembled Views > Page 3006 17 - Left Secondary Timing Chain Guide 18 - Lower Primary Timing Chain Guide 19 - Lower Primary Timing Chain Guide Bolt 20 - Crankshaft Sprocket 21 - Primary Timing Chain 22 - Right Camshaft Intermediate Drive Shaft Sprocket 23 - Upper Primary Timing Chain Guide 24 - Primary Timing Chain Tensioner Gasket 25 - Primary Timing Chain Tensioner Engine Front Cover 1 - Water Pump Pulley Bolt 2 - Water Pump Pulley 3 - Water Pump Assembly 4 - Water Pump Pulley Gasket 5 - Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve Seal 6 - Camshaft Position Sensor Bolt 7 - Camshaft Position Sensor 8 - Camshaft Position Sensor O-ring Seal 9 - Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve Bolt 10 - Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve 11 - Engine Front Cover Gasket 12 - Engine Front Cover Locating Pin Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Disassembled Views > Page 3007 13 - Engine Front Cover 14 - Engine Front Cover Bolt 15 - Engine Front Cover Seal 16 Crankshaft Balancer 17 - Crankshaft Balancer Bolt 18 - Engine Front Cover Bolt 19 - Water Pump Bolt Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Disassembled Views > Page 3008 Camshaft Position Sensor: Locations Powertrain Component Views Powertrain Component Views Front Engine Components (LAF 1 of 2) 1 - Q38 Throttle Body 2 - G18 High Pressure Fuel Pump 3 - B23F Camshaft Position Sensor Intake 4 - B37 Engine Oil Pressure Switch 5 - B68 Knock Sensor 6 - B26 Crankshaft Position Sensor 7 - M64 Starter Motor 8 - Q2 A/C Compressor Clutch 9 - G13 Generator Left Rear Engine Components (LAF) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Disassembled Views > Page 3009 1 - T8D Ignition Coil 4 2 - T8C Ignition Coil 3 3 - T8B Ignition Coil 2 4 - T8A Ignition Coil 1 5 - Q6F Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Intake 6 - Q6E Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Exhaust 7 - B52A Heated Oxygen Sensor 1 8 - B52B Heated Oxygen Sensor 2 9 - B34 Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor 10 - B23E Camshaft Position Sensor - Exhaust 11 - Q12 Evaporative Emission Purge Solenoid Valve Right Rear of the Engine Components (LF1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Disassembled Views > Page 3010 1 - B74 Manifold Absolute Pressure Sensor 2 - T8E Ignition Coil 5 3 - T8C Ignition Coil 3 4 - Q12 Evaporative Emission Purge Solenoid Valve 5 - Q38 Throttle Body 6 - B23B Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 1 Intake 7 - B23D Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 2 Intake 8 - Q6D Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Bank 2 Intake 9 - Q6C Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Bank 2 Exhaust 10 - B23C Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 2 Exhaust 11 - Q6B Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Bank 1 Intake 12 - Q6A Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Bank 1 Exhaust 13 - B23A Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 1 Exhaust 14 - B68A Knock Sensor 1 15 - B26 Crankshaft Position Sensor 16 - T8A Ignition Coil 1 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3011 Camshaft Position Sensor: Diagrams B23A Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 1 Exhaust (LF1) B23B Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 1 Intake (LF1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3012 B23C Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 2 Exhaust (LF1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3013 B23D Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 2 Intake (LF1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3014 B23E Camshaft Position Sensor - Exhaust (LAF) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3015 B23F Camshaft Position Sensor - Intake (LAF) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3016 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Camshaft Position Sensor Replacement - Bank 2 (Left Side) Exhaust Camshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair Camshaft Position Sensor Replacement - Bank 2 (Left Side) Exhaust Camshaft Position Sensor Replacement - Bank 2 (Left Side) Exhaust Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Camshaft Position Sensor Replacement - Bank 2 (Left Side) Exhaust > Page 3019 Camshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair Camshaft Position Sensor Replacement - Bank 2 (Left Side) Intake Camshaft Position Sensor Replacement - Bank 2 (Left Side) Intake Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Camshaft Position Sensor Replacement - Bank 2 (Left Side) Exhaust > Page 3020 Camshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair Camshaft Position Sensor Replacement - Bank 1 (Right Side) Exhaust Camshaft Position Sensor Replacement - Bank 1 (Right Side) Exhaust Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Camshaft Position Sensor Replacement - Bank 2 (Left Side) Exhaust > Page 3021 Camshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair Camshaft Position Sensor Replacement - Bank 1 (Right Side) Intake Camshaft Position Sensor Replacement - Bank 1 (Right Side) Intake Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Disassembled Views Crankshaft Position Sensor: Locations Disassembled Views Disassembled Views Engine Covers and Component Assemblies (1 of 2) (LF1) 1 - Right Camshaft Cover Assembly 2 - Ignition Coil Bolt 3 - Ignition Coil 4 - Spark Plug 5 - Intake Manifold Assembly 6 - Left Camshaft Cover Assembly 7 - Fuel Rail Noise Shield 8 - Fuel Pump Cover 9 - Fuel Pump Cover Bolt 10 - Engine Flywheel 11 - Engine Flywheel Bolt 12 - Engine Assembly 13 - Oil Pan Assembly 14 - Engine Front Cover Assembly 15 - Crankshaft Balancer 16 Crankshaft Balancer Bolt Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Disassembled Views > Page 3026 17 - Crankshaft Position Sensor Heat Shield Bolt - Large 18 - Crankshaft Position Sensor Heat Shield 19 - Crankshaft Position Sensor Heat Shield Bolt - Small Engine Covers and Component Assemblies (2 of 2) (LF1) 1 - Water Outlet Bolt 2 - Water Outlet 3 - Water Outlet O-ring 4 - Water Outlet Seal 5 - Knock Sensor Bolt 6 - Knock Sensor 7 - Engine Coolant Heater Assembly 8 - Crankshaft Position Sensor Bolt 9 - Crankshaft Position Sensor 10 - Crankshaft Position Sensor O-ring 11 - Right Cylinder Head Assembly 12 - Right Cylinder Head Gasket 13 - Lower Fuel Rail Noise Shield 14 - Engine Cooling Thermostat Gasket 15 - Engine Cooling Thermostat 16 - Engine Cooling Thermostat Housing 17 - Engine Cooling Thermostat Bolt - Short 18 - Engine Cooling Thermostat Housing Bolt - Long Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Disassembled Views > Page 3027 19 - Fuel Feed Pipe Assembly 20 - Fuel Feed Pipe Assembly Bolt 21 - Fuel Feed Intermediate Pipe Assembly 22 - Fuel Pump Gasket 23 - Fuel Pump O-ring Seal 24 - Fuel Pump 25 - Fuel Pump Bolt 26 - Left Cylinder Head Assembly 27 - Left Cylinder Head Gasket 28 - Oil Level Indicator 29 Oil Level Indicator Handle O-ring 30 - Oil Level Indicator Tube Bolt 31 - Oil Level Indicator Tube 32 - Oil Level Indicator Tube O-ring 33 - Oil Filter Adapter Assembly 34 - Engine Short Block Assembly 35 - Oil Pump Assembly 36 - Timing Drive Assembly Camshaft Cover Assembly 250 - Left Camshaft Cover 251 - Left Camshaft Cover Gasket 252 - Right Camshaft Cover Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Disassembled Views > Page 3028 253 - Right Camshaft Cover Gasket 254 - Camshaft Cover Spark Plug Port Seal 254 - Camshaft Cover Spark Plug Port Seal 255 - Camshaft Cover Bolt 255 - Camshaft Cover Bolt 256 - Camshaft Cover Bolt Insulator 256 - Camshaft Cover Bolt Insulator 257 - Ignition Coil Bolt Thread Insert 258 Oil Fill Cap 259 - Oil Fill O-ring 259 - Oil Fill O-ring 260 - Left Camshaft Cover PCV Fitting 261 Right Camshaft Cover PCV Fitting Orifice 262 - Oil Fill Tube 263 - Left Camshaft Cover PCV Fitting O-ring 265 - Left Camshaft Housing Cover Insulator 266 - Right Camshaft Housing Cover Insulator 704 - Ignition Coil 704 - Ignition Coil 705 - Ignition Coil Bolt 705 - Ignition Coil Bolt 719 - Spark Plug 719 - Spark Plug Camshaft Timing Components Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Disassembled Views > Page 3029 1 - Primary Timing Chain Tensioner Bolt 2 - Left Secondary Timing Chain Shoe Bolt 3 - Right Secondary Timing Chain Tensioner 4 - Right Secondary Timing Chain Tensioner Gasket 5 - Right Secondary Timing Chain Shoe 6 - Secondary Timing Chain 7 - Camshaft Position Actuator Bolt 8 Exhaust Camshaft Position Actuator 9 - Camshaft Position Actuator Thrust Washer 10 - Intake Camshaft Position Actuator 11 - Right Secondary Timing Chain Guide 12 - Left Camshaft Intermediate Drive Shaft Sprocket 13 - Camshaft Intermediate Drive Shaft Sprocket Bolt 14 - Left Secondary Timing Chain Shoe 15 - Left Secondary Timing Chain Tensioner Gasket 16 - Left Secondary Timing Chain Tensioner 17 - Left Secondary Timing Chain Guide 18 - Lower Primary Timing Chain Guide 19 - Lower Primary Timing Chain Guide Bolt 20 - Crankshaft Sprocket 21 Primary Timing Chain 22 - Right Camshaft Intermediate Drive Shaft Sprocket 23 - Upper Primary Timing Chain Guide 24 - Primary Timing Chain Tensioner Gasket Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Disassembled Views > Page 3030 25 - Primary Timing Chain Tensioner Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Disassembled Views > Page 3031 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Locations Powertrain Component Views Powertrain Component Views Front Engine Components (LAF 1 of 2) 1 - Q38 Throttle Body 2 - G18 High Pressure Fuel Pump 3 - B23F Camshaft Position Sensor Intake 4 - B37 Engine Oil Pressure Switch 5 - B68 Knock Sensor 6 - B26 Crankshaft Position Sensor 7 - M64 Starter Motor 8 - Q2 A/C Compressor Clutch 9 - G13 Generator Right Rear of the Engine Components (LF1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Disassembled Views > Page 3032 1 - B74 Manifold Absolute Pressure Sensor 2 - T8E Ignition Coil 5 3 - T8C Ignition Coil 3 4 - Q12 Evaporative Emission Purge Solenoid Valve 5 - Q38 Throttle Body 6 - B23B Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 1 Intake 7 - B23D Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 2 Intake 8 - Q6D Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Bank 2 Intake 9 - Q6C Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Bank 2 Exhaust 10 - B23C Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 2 Exhaust 11 - Q6B Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Bank 1 Intake 12 - Q6A Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Bank 1 Exhaust 13 - B23A Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 1 Exhaust 14 - B68A Knock Sensor 1 15 - B26 Crankshaft Position Sensor 16 - T8A Ignition Coil 1 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3033 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Diagrams B26 Crankshaft Position Sensor Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3034 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Testing and Inspection Crankshaft Position System Variation Learn Note: The Crankshaft Position System Variation Learn procedure is also required when the following service procedures have been performed, regardless of whether DTC P0315 is set: * An engine replacement * An engine control module (ECM) replacement * A crankshaft balancer replacement * A crankshaft replacement * A crankshaft position sensor replacement * Any engine repairs which disturb the crankshaft to crankshaft position sensor relationship. Note: The ECM monitors certain component signals to determine if all the conditions are met to continue with the crankshaft position System Variation Learn Procedure. 1. Install a scan tool. 2. Monitor the ECM for DTCs with a scan tool. If other DTCs are set, except DTC P0315, refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle ( See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Descriptions/Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle) for the applicable DTC that set. 3. With a scan tool, select the Crankshaft Position System Variation Learn Procedure and perform the following: 1. Block drive wheels. 2. Set parking brake. 3. DO NOT apply brake pedal. 4. Cycle ignition from OFF to ON. 5. Apply and hold brake pedal for the duration of the procedure. 6. Start and idle engine. 7. Turn the air conditioning (A/C) OFF. 8. The vehicle must remain in Park or Neutral. Note: While the learn procedure is in progress, release the throttle immediately when the engine starts to decelerate. The engine control is returned to the operator and the engine responds to throttle position after the learn procedure is complete. 9. Accelerate to wide open throttle (WOT) and release when the fuel cut-off occurs. 4. The scan tool displays Test In Progress. 5. The scan tool displays Learn Successful. 6. Verify DTC P0315 ran and passed This Ignition Cycle. ‹› If DTC P0315 failed or did not run This Ignition Cycle, or another DTC is present, refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle ( See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Descriptions/Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle) for the applicable DTC that set. 7. Once the Learn Procedure has successfully completed, and in order to store the crankshaft position system variation values in the ECM, turn OFF the ignition and verify all vehicle systems are OFF. This may take up to 2 minutes. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3035 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair Crankshaft Position Sensor Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Locations Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: Locations Instrument Panel/Center Console Component Views Steering Column Components 1 - S78 Turn Signal/Multifunction Switch 2 - X85 Steering Wheel Air Bag Coil 3 - S82 Windshield Wiper/Washer Switch 4 - S39 Ignition Switch 5 - M93 Ignition Cylinder Lock Control Solenoid Actuator 6 - B101 Immobilizer Antenna 7 - B99 Steering Wheel Angle Sensor Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Locations > Page 3040 Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: Service and Repair Ignition Lock Cylinder Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. Refer to Battery Negative Cable Disconnection and Connection (See: Starting and Charging/Battery/Battery Cable/Negative/Service and Repair/Battery Negative Cable Disconnection and Connection). 2. Remove the steering column shroud. Refer to Steering Column Shroud Replacement (See: Steering and Suspension/Steering/Steering Column/Service and Repair/Steering Column Shroud Replacement). 3. Insert the key into the ignition lock cylinder and turn the key to the RUN position. 4. Depress the retainer through the lock housing access hole (2) with a small Allen wrench or similar pick-type tool. 5. Remove the ignition lock cylinder (1) from the ignition and start switch housing. Installation Procedure 1. If you are installing a new ignition lock cylinder, code the lock cylinder. Refer to Lock Cylinder Coding - Ignition (See: Body and Frame/Locks/Service and Repair/Lock Cylinder Coding - Ignition). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Locations > Page 3041 2. Turn the key to the RUN position and insert ignition lock cylinder (1) into the ignition and start switch housing. 3. Turn the key to the LOCK position and remove the key from the ignition lock cylinder. 4. Install the steering column shroud. Refer to Steering Column Shroud Replacement (See: Steering and Suspension/Steering/Steering Column/Service and Repair/Steering Column Shroud Replacement). 5. Connect the battery negative cable. Refer to Battery Negative Cable Disconnection and Connection (See: Starting and Charging/Battery/Battery Cable/Negative/Service and Repair/Battery Negative Cable Disconnection and Connection). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Disassembled Views Knock Sensor: Locations Disassembled Views Disassembled Views Engine Covers and Component Assemblies (2 of 2) (LF1) 1 - Water Outlet Bolt 2 - Water Outlet 3 - Water Outlet O-ring 4 - Water Outlet Seal 5 - Knock Sensor Bolt 6 - Knock Sensor 7 - Engine Coolant Heater Assembly 8 - Crankshaft Position Sensor Bolt 9 - Crankshaft Position Sensor 10 - Crankshaft Position Sensor O-ring 11 - Right Cylinder Head Assembly 12 - Right Cylinder Head Gasket 13 - Lower Fuel Rail Noise Shield 14 - Engine Cooling Thermostat Gasket 15 - Engine Cooling Thermostat 16 - Engine Cooling Thermostat Housing Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Disassembled Views > Page 3046 17 - Engine Cooling Thermostat Bolt - Short 18 - Engine Cooling Thermostat Housing Bolt - Long 19 - Fuel Feed Pipe Assembly 20 - Fuel Feed Pipe Assembly Bolt 21 - Fuel Feed Intermediate Pipe Assembly 22 - Fuel Pump Gasket 23 - Fuel Pump O-ring Seal 24 - Fuel Pump 25 - Fuel Pump Bolt 26 - Left Cylinder Head Assembly 27 - Left Cylinder Head Gasket 28 - Oil Level Indicator 29 Oil Level Indicator Handle O-ring 30 - Oil Level Indicator Tube Bolt 31 - Oil Level Indicator Tube 32 - Oil Level Indicator Tube O-ring 33 - Oil Filter Adapter Assembly 34 - Engine Short Block Assembly 35 - Oil Pump Assembly 36 - Timing Drive Assembly Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Disassembled Views > Page 3047 Knock Sensor: Locations Powertrain Component Views Powertrain Component Views Front Engine Components (LAF 1 of 2) 1 - Q38 Throttle Body 2 - G18 High Pressure Fuel Pump 3 - B23F Camshaft Position Sensor Intake 4 - B37 Engine Oil Pressure Switch 5 - B68 Knock Sensor 6 - B26 Crankshaft Position Sensor 7 - M64 Starter Motor 8 - Q2 A/C Compressor Clutch 9 - G13 Generator Left Front of the Engine Components (LF1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Disassembled Views > Page 3048 1 - T8B Ignition Coil 2 2 - T8D Ignition Coil 4 3 - T8F Ignition Coil 6 4 - G18 High Pressure Fuel Pump 5 - B34 Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor 6 - M64 Starter Motor 7 - B68B Knock Sensor 2 8 - B37 Engine Oil Pressure Switch 9 - B1 A/C Refrigerant Pressure Sensor 10 - Q2 A/C Compressor Clutch 11 - G13 Generator Right Rear of the Engine Components (LF1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Disassembled Views > Page 3049 1 - B74 Manifold Absolute Pressure Sensor 2 - T8E Ignition Coil 5 3 - T8C Ignition Coil 3 4 - Q12 Evaporative Emission Purge Solenoid Valve 5 - Q38 Throttle Body 6 - B23B Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 1 Intake 7 - B23D Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 2 Intake 8 - Q6D Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Bank 2 Intake 9 - Q6C Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Bank 2 Exhaust 10 - B23C Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 2 Exhaust 11 - Q6B Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Bank 1 Intake 12 - Q6A Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Bank 1 Exhaust 13 - B23A Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 1 Exhaust 14 - B68A Knock Sensor 1 15 - B26 Crankshaft Position Sensor 16 - T8A Ignition Coil 1 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3050 Knock Sensor: Diagrams B68 Knock Sensor (LAF) B68A Knock Sensor 1 (LF1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3051 B68B Knock Sensor 2 (LF1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3052 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Knock Sensor Replacement Bank 1 Knock Sensor: Service and Repair Knock Sensor Replacement - Bank 1 Knock Sensor Replacement - Bank 1 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Knock Sensor Replacement Bank 1 > Page 3055 Knock Sensor: Service and Repair Knock Sensor Replacement - Bank 2 Knock Sensor Replacement - Bank 2 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Pressure > System Information > Specifications Fuel Pressure: Specifications Fuel Pressure (Ignition ON, engine OFF) ....................................................................................................................................... 276-448 kPa (40-65 psi). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Pressure > System Information > Specifications > Page 3060 Fuel Pressure: Service Precautions Relieving Fuel Pressure Warning Warning Remove the fuel tank cap and relieve the fuel system pressure before servicing the fuel system in order to reduce the risk of personal injury. After you relieve the fuel system pressure, a small amount of fuel may be released when servicing the fuel lines, the fuel injection pump, or the connections. In order to reduce the risk of personal injury, cover the fuel system components with a shop towel before disconnection. This will catch any fuel that may leak out. Place the towel in an approved container when the disconnection is complete. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Pressure > System Information > System Diagnosis > Fuel Pressure Gauge Installation and Removal Fuel Pressure: Testing and Inspection Fuel Pressure Gauge Installation and Removal Fuel Pressure Gauge Installation and Removal Special Tools CH-48027-100 Digital Pressure Gauge Installation Procedure Warning: Refer to Gasoline/Gasoline Vapors Warning (See: Fuel Delivery and Air Induction/Fuel/Service Precautions). Warning Remove the fuel tank cap and relieve the fuel system pressure before servicing the fuel system in order to reduce the risk of personal injury. After you relieve the fuel system pressure, a small amount of fuel may be released when servicing the fuel lines, the fuel injection pump, or the connections. In order to reduce the risk of personal injury, cover the fuel system components with a shop towel before disconnection. This will catch any fuel that may leak out. Place the towel in an approved container when the disconnection is complete. 1. Relieve the fuel system pressure. Refer to Fuel Pressure Relief (See: Fuel Filter/Fuel Pressure Release/Service and Repair). 2. Connect the CH-48027-1 (1) to the CH-48027-2 (2). 3. Remove the shop towel from around the fuel rail service port, and place in an approved gasoline container. 4. Perform any tests and/or diagnostics as needed. For the proper usage of the CH-48027-100, refer to the manufacture's directions. Removal Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Pressure > System Information > System Diagnosis > Fuel Pressure Gauge Installation and Removal > Page 3063 Warning Wrap a shop towel around the fuel pressure connection in order to reduce the risk of fire and personal injury. The towel will absorb any fuel leakage that occurs during the connection of the fuel pressure gauge. Place the towel in an approved container when the connection of the fuel pressure gauge is complete. 1. Relieve the fuel system pressure, if required. Perform the following steps: 1. Wrap a shop towel around the fuel rail service port. 2. Place the hose on the CH-48027-2 (2) into an approved gasoline container. 3. Open the valve on the CH-48027-2 (2) in order to bleed any fuel from the fuel rail. 4. Close the valve on the CH-48027-2 (2). 5. Remove the hose on the CH-48027-2 (2) from the approved gasoline container. 6. Remove the shop towel from around the fuel rail service port, and place in an approved gasoline container. Caution: Clean all of the following areas before performing any disconnections in order to avoid possible contamination in the system: * The fuel pipe connections * The hose connections * The areas surrounding the connections 2. Disconnect the CH-48027-1 (1) from the CH-48027-2 (2). 3. Disconnect the CH-48027-2 (2) from the CH-48027-3 (3). 4. Disconnect the CH-48027-3 (3) from the fuel rail service port. 5. Install the fuel rail service port cap. 6. Install the engine cover, if required. 7. Tighten the fuel fill cap. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Pressure > System Information > System Diagnosis > Fuel Pressure Gauge Installation and Removal > Page 3064 Fuel Pressure: Testing and Inspection Fuel System Diagnosis Fuel System Diagnosis Diagnostic Instructions * Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle (See: Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle) prior to using this diagnostic procedure. * Review Strategy Based Diagnosis (See: Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Strategy Based Diagnosis) for an overview of the diagnostic approach. * Diagnostic Procedure Instructions (See: Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Diagnostic Procedure Instructions) provides an overview of each diagnostic category. Circuit/System Description The engine control module (ECM) supplies voltage to the fuel pump control module when the ECM detects that the ignition is ON. The voltage from the ECM to the fuel pump control module remains active for 2 s, unless the engine is in Crank or Run. While this voltage is being received, the fuel pump control module closes the ground switch of the fuel pump and also supplies a varying voltage to the fuel tank module in order to maintain the desired fuel rail pressure. The fuel system is an electronic returnless on-demand design. A returnless fuel system reduces the internal temperature of the fuel tank by not returning hot fuel from the engine to the fuel tank. Reducing the internal temperature of the fuel tank results in lower evaporative emissions. An electric turbine style fuel pump attaches to the primary fuel pump module inside the fuel tank. The fuel pump supplies fuel through the fuel feed pipe to the high pressure fuel pump. The high pressure fuel pump supplies fuel to a variable-pressure fuel rail. Fuel enters the combustion chamber through precision multi-hole fuel injectors. The high pressure fuel pump, fuel rail pressure, fuel injection timing, and injection duration are controlled by the engine control module (ECM). The primary fuel tank module also contains a primary jet pump and a secondary jet pump. Fuel pump flow loss, caused by vapor expulsion in the pump inlet chamber, is diverted to the primary jet pump and the secondary jet pump through a restrictive orifice located on the pump cover. The primary jet pump fills the reservoir of the primary fuel tank module. The secondary jet pump creates a venturi action which causes the fuel to be drawn from the secondary side of the fuel tank, through the fuel transfer pipe, to the primary side of the fuel tank. Reference Information Description and Operation Fuel System Description (LF1) (See: Fuel Delivery and Air Induction/Description and Operation/Fuel System Description) Electrical Information Reference * Circuit Testing (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Circuit Testing) * Connector Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Connector Repairs) * Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections) * Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Wiring Repairs) Scan Tool Reference Control Module References (See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning) for scan tool information Special Tools * CH 48027 - Digital Pressure Gauge * J 37287 - Fuel Line Shut-off Adapter Circuit/System Verification Note: * Repair all fuel system related DTCs before performing this diagnostic. * Inspect the fuel system for damage or external leaks before proceeding. * Verify that adequate fuel is in the fuel tank before proceeding. * The Fuel Pump Enable may need to be commanded ON a few times in order to obtain the highest possible fuel pressure. * Before proceeding with this test review the User Manual CH 48027-5 for Safety Information and Instructions. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Pressure > System Information > System Diagnosis > Fuel Pressure Gauge Installation and Removal > Page 3065 1. Ignition OFF, all accessories OFF, install a CH 48027 - Gauge. Refer to Fuel Pressure Gauge Installation and Removal (See: Fuel Pressure Gauge Installation and Removal). Note: High fuel pressure readings may result due to hot soak fuel boiling. With the engine OFF, the fuel pressure may increase to the setting of the pressure relief regulator valve, approximately 580 kPa (84 psi). 2. Ignition ON, engine OFF, command the Fuel Pump Enable ON with a scan tool. Verify the fuel pressure is between 276-448 kPa (40-65 psi) and does not decrease more than 34 kPa (5 psi) in 1 min. 3. Engine idling at normal operating temperature, verify the scan tool Fuel Pump Control Module Fuel Pressure Sensor parameter is between 276-324 kPa (40-47 psi). Circuit/System Testing Note: * The Fuel Pump Enable may need to be commanded ON a few times in order to obtain the highest possible fuel pressure. * DO NOT start the engine. * High fuel pressure readings may result due to hot soak fuel boiling. With the engine OFF, the fuel pressure may increase to the setting of the pressure relief regulator valve, approximately 580 kPa (84 psi). 1. Ignition ON, engine OFF, command the Fuel Pump Enable ON with a scan tool and observe the fuel pressure gauge while the fuel pump is operating. Verify the fuel pressure is between 276-448 kPa (40-65 psi). ‹› If the fuel pressure is less than the specified range, test, inspect, and repair the items listed below. If all items test normal, replace the primary fuel tank module. * Restricted fuel feed pipe * Inspect the harness connectors and the ground circuits of the fuel pump for poor connections. 2. Verify that the fuel pressure does not decrease more than 34 kPa (5 psi) in 1 min. ‹› If the fuel pressure decreases more than the specified value, perform the following procedure: 1. Ignition OFF, relieve the fuel pressure. Refer to Fuel Pressure Relief (See: Fuel Filter/Fuel Pressure Release/Service and Repair). 2. Install the J 37287 - Adapter between the chassis fuel feed hose and the engine compartment fuel feed pipe. 3. Open the valve on the J 37287 - Adapter. 4. Ignition ON, command the Fuel Pump Enable ON with a scan tool and bleed the air from the CH 48027 - Gauge. 5. Command the Fuel Pump Enable ON and then OFF with a scan tool. 6. Close the valve on the J 37287 - Adapter. 7. Monitor the fuel pressure for 1 min. ‹› If the fuel pressure does not decrease more than 34 kPa (5 psi) within the specified time, replace the primary fuel tank module. 3. Relieve the fuel pressure to 69 kPa (10 psi). Verify that the fuel pressure does not decrease more than 14 kPa (2 psi) in 5 min. ‹› If the fuel pressure decreases more than the specified value, replace the primary fuel tank module. 4. Operate the vehicle within the conditions of the customer's concern while monitoring the fuel pressure with the CH 48027 - Gauge. The fuel pressure should not drop off during acceleration, cruise or hard cornering. ‹› If the fuel pressure drops off, test, inspect, and repair the items listed below. If all items test normal, replace the primary fuel tank module. * Restricted fuel feed pipe * Inspect the harness connectors and the ground circuits of the fuel pump for poor connections 5. If the fuel system tests normal, refer to Symptoms - Engine Controls (See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures/Symptoms - Engine Controls). Repair Instructions Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification (See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures/Verification Tests and Procedures) after completing the diagnostic procedure. * Fuel Feed Pipe Replacement (LF1) (See: Fuel Delivery and Air Induction/Fuel Supply Line/Service and Repair/Fuel Feed Pipe Replacement) * Fuel Tank Fuel Pump Module Replacement (See: Fuel Delivery and Air Induction/Fuel Pump/Service and Repair) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Idle Speed > System Information > Specifications Idle Speed: Specifications Information not supplied by the manufacturer. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Idle Speed > System Information > Specifications > Page 3069 Idle Speed: Testing and Inspection Throttle/Idle Learn (LF1, LFW) Description The engine control module (ECM) learns the airflow through the throttle body to ensure the correct idle. The learned airflow values are stored within the ECM. These values are learned to adjust for production variation and will continuously learn during the life of the vehicle to compensate for reduced airflow due to throttle body coking. Anytime the throttle body airflow rate changes, for example due to cleaning or replacing, the values must be relearned. An engine that had a heavily coked throttle body that has been cleaned or replaced may take several drive cycles to learn out the coking. To accelerate the process, the scan tool has the ability to reset all learned values back to zero. A new ECM will also have values set to zero. The idle may be unstable or a DTC may set if the learned values do not match the actual airflow. Conditions for Running the Throttle Learn Procedure Reset Procedure * DTCs P0068, P0101, P0102, P0103, P0106, P0107, P0108, P0116, P0117, P0118, P0120, P0122, P0123, P0128, P0171, P0172, P0174, P0175, P0201, P0202, P0203, P0204, P0205, P0206, P0220, P0222, P0223, P0300, P0351, P0352, P0353, P0496, P0601, P0604, P0606, P060D, P0641, P0651, P1516, P2101, P2119, P2120, P2122, P2123, P2125, P2127, P2128, P2135, P2138, or P2176 are not set. * Ignition ON, engine OFF. * The vehicle speed sensor (VSS) is 0 km/h (0 mph). Learn Procedure * DTCs P0068, P0101, P0102, P0103, P0106, P0107, P0108, P0116, P0117, P0118, P0120, P0122, P0123, P0128, P0171, P0172, P0174, P0175, P0201, P0202, P0203, P0204, P0205, P0206, P0220, P0222, P0223, P0300, P0351, P0352, P0353, P0496, P0601, P0604, P0606, P060D, P0641, P0651, P1516, P2101, P2119, P2120, P2122, P2123, P2125, P2127, P2128, P2135, P2138, or P2176 are not set. * The engine speed is between 450-4,000 RPM. * The manifold absolute pressure (MAP) is greater than 5 kPa. * The mass air flow (MAF) is greater than 2 g/s. * The ignition voltage is greater than 10 volts. Throttle Learn Reset Procedure (Performed after the throttle body is cleaned or replaced) 1. Ignition ON, engine OFF, perform the Idle Learn Reset in Module Setup with a scan tool. 2. Start the engine and monitor the TB Idle Airflow Compensation parameter. The TB Idle Airflow Compensation value should equal 0 percent and the engine should be idling at a normal idle speed. 3. Clear the DTCs and return to the diagnostic that referred you here. Learn Procedure (Performed after the ECM is flashed or replaced) Note: Do NOT perform this procedure if DTCs are set. Refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle (See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Descriptions/Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle). 1. Start and idle the engine for 3 minutes. 2. With a scan tool, monitor the Desired Idle Speed and the actual Engine Speed. 3. The ECM will start to learn the new idle cells and Desired Idle Speed should start to decrease. 4. Ignition OFF for 60 seconds. 5. Start and idle the engine for 3 minutes. 6. After the 3 minute run time the engine should be idling normal. Note: During the drive cycle the check engine light may come on with idle speed DTCs. If idle speed codes are set, clear codes so the ECM can continue to learn. ‹› If the engine idle speed has not been learned the vehicle will need to be driven at speeds above 70 km/h (44 mph) with several decelerations and extended idles. 7. After the drive cycle, the engine should be idling normally. ‹› If the engine idle speed has not been learned, turn OFF the ignition for 60 seconds and repeat step 6. 8. Once the engine speed has returned to normal, clear DTCs and return to the diagnostic that referred you here. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Cleaner Fresh Air Duct/Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair Air Cleaner Fresh Air Duct/Hose: Service and Repair Air Cleaner Outlet Duct Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Filter Element > Component Information > Service and Repair Air Filter Element: Service and Repair Air Cleaner Element Replacement (LE5) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Filter > Fuel Pressure Release > System Information > Service and Repair Fuel Pressure Release: Service and Repair Fuel Pressure Relief Warning Fuel that flows out at high pressure can cause serious injury to the skin and eyes. ALWAYS depressurize the fuel system before removing components that are under high fuel pressure. Note: If a scan tool is not available, WAIT at LEAST 2 hours after the engine has been run, before removing the high pressure fuel line. 1. Install a scan tool to the vehicle and command the fuel pump relay OFF, allowing the low pressure fuel pump to shut off. 2. Start the vehicle and allow the engine to idle until the engine stops. The engine will stop in approximately 20-30 seconds. 3. Turn the ignition OFF. 4. Using the scan tool, verify that there is little to no fuel pressure, if there still is fuel pressure repeat step 2. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Firing Order > Component Information > Specifications Firing Order: Specifications Ignition System Specifications Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Ignition Timing > System Information > Specifications Ignition Timing: Specifications Information not supplied by the manufacturer. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications Spark Plug: Specifications Ignition System Specifications Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Page 3090 Spark Plug: Application and ID Ignition System Specifications Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Page 3091 Spark Plug: Testing and Inspection Spark Plug Inspection Spark Plug Usage * Ensure that the correct spark plug is installed. An incorrect spark plug causes driveability conditions. Refer to Ignition System Specifications ( See: Ignition System/Specifications) for the correct spark plug. * Ensure that the spark plug has the correct heat range. An incorrect heat range causes the following conditions: - Spark plug fouling-Colder plug - Pre-ignition causing spark plug and/or engine damage-Hotter plug Spark Plug Inspection * Inspect the terminal post (1) for damage. - Inspect for a bent or broken terminal post (1). - Test for a loose terminal post (1) by twisting and pulling the post. The terminal post (1) should NOT move. * Inspect the insulator (2) for flashover or carbon tracking, soot. This is caused by the electrical charge traveling across the insulator (2) between the terminal post (1) and ground. Inspect for the following conditions: - Inspect the spark plug boot for damage. - Inspect the spark plug recess area of the cylinder head for moisture, such as oil, coolant, or water. A spark plug boot that is saturated causes arcing to ground. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Page 3092 * Inspect the insulator (2) for cracks. All or part of the electrical charge may arc through the crack instead of the electrodes (3, 4). * Inspect for evidence of improper arcing. - Measure the gap between the center electrode (4) and the side electrode (3) terminals. Refer to Ignition System Specifications (See: Ignition System/Specifications). An excessively wide electrode gap can prevent correct spark plug operation. - Inspect for the correct spark plug torque. Refer to Ignition System Specifications (See: Ignition System/Specifications). Insufficient torque can prevent correct spark plug operation. An over torqued spark plug, causes the insulator (2) to crack. - Inspect for signs of tracking that occurred near the insulator tip instead of the center electrode (4). - Inspect for a broken or worn side electrode (3). - Inspect for a broken, worn, or loose center electrode (4) by shaking the spark plug. * A rattling sound indicates internal damage. * A loose center electrode (4) reduces the spark intensity. - Inspect for bridged electrodes (3, 4). Deposits on the electrodes (3, 4) reduce or eliminates the gap. - Inspect for worn or missing platinum pads on the electrodes (3, 4), if equipped. - Inspect for excessive fouling. * Inspect the spark plug recess area of the cylinder head for debris. Dirty or damaged threads can cause the spark plug not to seat correctly during installation. Spark Plug Visual Inspection * Normal operation-Brown to grayish-tan with small amounts of white powdery deposits are normal combustion by-products from fuels with additives. * Carbon fouled-Dry, fluffy, black carbon or soot caused by the following conditions: - Rich fuel mixtures * Leaking fuel injectors * Excessive fuel pressure * Restricted air filter element * Incorrect combustion - Reduced ignition system voltage output * Weak coils * Worn ignition wires Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Page 3093 * Incorrect spark plug gap - Excessive idling or slow speeds under light loads can keep spark plug temperatures so low that normal combustion deposits may not burn off. * Deposit fouling-Oil, coolant, or additives that include substances such as silicone, very white coating, reduces the spark intensity. Most powdery deposits will not effect spark intensity unless they form into a glazing over the electrode. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Page 3094 Spark Plug: Service and Repair Spark Plug Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the ignition coil(s). Refer to Ignition Coil Replacement - Bank 1 (See: Ignition System/Ignition Coil/Service and Repair/Ignition Coil Replacement - Bank 1) and/or Ignition Coil Replacement - Bank 2 (See: Ignition System/Ignition Coil/Service and Repair/Ignition Coil Replacement - Bank 2). Warning: Refer to Safety Glasses and Compressed Air Warning (See: Service Precautions/Technician Safety Information/Safety Glasses and Compressed Air Warning). Caution: Clean the spark plug recess area before removing the spark plug. Failure to do so could result in engine damage because of dirt or foreign material entering the cylinder head, or by the contamination of the cylinder head threads. The contaminated threads may prevent the proper seating of the new plug. Use a thread chaser to clean the threads of any contamination. 2. Use compressed air in order to remove debris from the spark plug cavity. Caution: Allow the engine to cool before removing the spark plugs. Attempting to remove the spark plugs from a hot engine may cause the plug threads to seize, causing damage to cylinder head threads. 3. Remove the spark plug. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Page 3095 Caution: Use only the spark plugs specified for use in the vehicle. Do not install spark plugs that are either hotter or colder than those specified for the vehicle. Installing spark plugs of another type can severely damage the engine. Caution: Check the gap of all new and reconditioned spark plugs before installation. The pre-set gaps may have changed during handling. Use a round feeler gauge to ensure an accurate check. Installing the spark plugs with the wrong gap can cause poor engine performance and may even damage the engine. 1. Ensure that the spark plug gap is equivalent to the spark plug gap specification. Refer to Ignition System Specifications (See: Ignition System/Specifications). Caution: Be sure that the spark plug threads smoothly into the cylinder head and the spark plug is fully seated. Use a thread chaser, if necessary, to clean threads in the cylinder head. Cross-threading or failing to fully seat the spark plug can cause overheating of the plug, exhaust blow-by, or thread damage. Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener Caution). 2. Install the spark plug. Tighten the spark plug to 20 Nm (15 lb ft). 3. Install the ignition coil(s). Refer to Ignition Coil Replacement - Bank 1 (See: Ignition System/Ignition Coil/Service and Repair/Ignition Coil Replacement - Bank 1) and/or Ignition Coil Replacement - Bank 2 (See: Ignition System/Ignition Coil/Service and Repair/Ignition Coil Replacement - Bank 2). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Compression Check > System Information > Specifications Compression Check: Specifications Compression Check Record the compression readings from all of the cylinders. The lowest reading should not be less than 70 percent of the highest reading. No cylinder reading should be less than 965 kPa (140 psi). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Compression Check > System Information > Specifications > Page 3099 Compression Check: Testing and Inspection Engine Compression Test Special Tools EN 39313 - Spark Plug Port Adapter For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Tools and Equipment/Special Tools). A compression pressure test of the engine cylinders determines the condition of the rings, the valves and the head gasket. 1. Run the engine until it reaches normal operating temperature. The battery must be at or near full charge. 2. Turn the engine OFF. Important: Remove the powertrain control module (PCM) and the ignition fuse from the instrument panel (I/P) fuse block. 3. Disable the ignition. 4. Disable the fuel systems. 5. Remove the spark plugs from all cylinders. 6. Remove the air duct from the throttle body. 7. Block the throttle plate in open position. 8. Measure the engine compression, using the following procedure: 1. Thread the EN 39313 - adapter into the spark plug hole. 2. Thread the compression gauge into the EN 39313 - adapter. 3. Have an assistant crank the engine through, at least 4 compression strokes, in the testing cylinder. 4. Check and record the readings on the gauge at each stroke. 5. Remove the compression gauge from the EN 39313 - adapter. 6. Remove the EN 39313 - adapter from the spark plug hole. 7. Repeat the compression test for each cylinder. 9. Record the compression readings from all of the cylinders. * The lowest reading should not be less than 70 percent of the highest reading. * No cylinder reading should be less than 965 kPa (140 psi). 10. The following are examples of measurement problems: * When the compression measurement is normal, the compression builds up quickly and evenly to specified compression on each cylinder. * When low compression is caused by the piston rings, compression is low on the first stroke and tends to build up on the following strokes, but does not reach normal. Compression improves considerably with the addition of oil. Use approximately 3 squirts of oil from a plunger-type oiler. * When low compression is caused by the valves, the measurement is low on the first stroke and does not build up even with the addition of oil. * Leaking head gaskets will provide the same results as worn valves but engine coolant may be identified in the crankcase. In addition, a leaking head gasket will give low readings on paired cylinders. 11. Remove the block from the throttle plate. 12. Install the air duct to the throttle body. 13. Install the spark plugs. 14. Install the powertrain control module (PCM). 15. Install the ignition fuses to the I/P fuse block. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Absolute Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair Absolute Pressure Sensor: Service and Repair Throttle Inlet Absolute Pressure Sensor Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Locations Instrument Panel/Center Console Component Views Lower Left of the Instrument Panel Components 1 - B80 Park Brake Switch 2 - T3 Audio Amplifier 3 - K9 Body Control Module 4 - K73 Telematics Communication Interface Control Module (UE1) 5 - B107 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor 6 T4S Wireless Communication Antenna - Bluetooth (UE1 with UPF) 7 - B22 Brake Pedal Position Sensor 8 - X84 Data Link Connector Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3107 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Diagrams B107 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3108 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Service and Repair Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Diagrams B75B Mass Air Flow/Intake Air Temperature Sensor Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3112 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Service and Repair Mass Airflow Sensor with Intake Air Temperature Sensor Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Diagrams B75B Mass Air Flow/Intake Air Temperature Sensor Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3116 Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Service and Repair Mass Airflow Sensor with Intake Air Temperature Sensor Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Barometric Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams Barometric Pressure Sensor: Diagrams B17 Barometric Pressure Sensor (LF1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Battery Current Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams Battery Current Sensor: Diagrams B18 Battery Current Sensor Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Body Controls - Unable To Reprogram Body Control Module Body Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins Body Controls - Unable To Reprogram Body Control Module INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 09-08-47-001A Date: June 14, 2010 Subject: Unable to Reprogram Body Control Module (BCM), BCM Reprogramming Did Not Complete - Revised Reprogramming Instructions Models: 2006-2010 Buick Lucerne 2006-2010 Cadillac DTS 2007-2010 Cadillac Escalade, Escalade ESV, Escalade EXT, SRX 2008-2010 Cadillac CTS 2010 Cadillac CTS Wagon 2010 Chevrolet Camaro 2006-2007 Chevrolet Monte Carlo 2006-2010 Chevrolet Impala 2007-2010 Chevrolet Avalanche, Equinox, Silverado, Suburban, Tahoe 2008-2010 Chevrolet Express 2009-2010 Chevrolet Traverse 2007-2010 GMC Acadia, Sierra, Yukon, Yukon XL, Yukon Denali, Yukon Denali XL 2008-2010 GMC Savana 2010 GMC Terrain 2007-2009 Pontiac Torrent 2008-2009 Pontiac G8 2008-2009 HUMMER H2 2007-2009 Saturn OUTLOOK 2008-2009 Saturn VUE Refer to GMVIS Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the models and the model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 09-08-47-001 (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Some technicians may experience an unsuccessful body control module (BCM) reprogramming event, when choosing the Reprogram ECU selection on the Service Programming System (SPS). The technician may also notice that when attempting to reprogram the BCM again after this incident has occurred, the BCM may not complete the programming event. This condition may be caused by the following: - A reprogramming event that was interrupted due to a lack of communication between the vehicle and the TIS2WEB terminal. - The vehicle experienced low system voltage during the reprogramming event. Important Do not replace the BCM for this condition. SPS Programming Process Selection Perform this procedure first. 1. If reprogramming has failed during the initial reprogramming event, back out of the SPS application completely. 2. Re-select SPS from the TIS2WEB terminal application. 3. When selecting the Programming Process , choose Replace and Program ECU , even though a new BCM is NOT being installed. 4. Reprogram the BCM using the Service Programming System (SPS) with the latest calibration available on TIS2WEB. Refer to the SPS procedures in SI. When using a multiple diagnostic interface (MDI) for reprogramming, ensure that it is updated with the latest software version. When using a Tech 2(R) for reprogramming, ensure that it is updated with the latest software version. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Body Controls - Unable To Reprogram Body Control Module > Page 3127 During programming, the battery voltage must be maintained within the proper range of 12-15 volts. Only use the approved Midtronics(R) PSC 550 Battery Maintainer (SPS Programming Support Tool EL-49642) or equivalent during programming. BCM Still Fails to Reprogram If the BCM still fails to reprogram perform this procedure: 1. Turn OFF the ignition, and remove the key. 2. Remove the fuses that power up the following modules/components for a minimum of 2 minutes: - BCM - EBCM - ECM - IS LPS (located in the left IP fusebox) - TCM 3. Open and close the driver door. Allow enough time for the retained accessory power (RAP) to turn OFF. 4. Reinstall the fuses. 5. When selecting the Programming Process , choose Replace and Program ECU , even though a new BCM is NOT being installed. 6. Reprogram the BCM using the Service Programming System (SPS) with the latest calibration available on TIS2WEB. Refer to the SPS procedures in SI. When using a multiple diagnostic interface (MDI) for reprogramming, ensure that it is updated with the latest software version. When using a Tech 2(R) for reprogramming, ensure that it is updated with the latest software version. During programming, the battery voltage must be maintained within the proper range of 12-15 Volts. Only use the approved Midtronics(R) PSC 550 Battery Maintainer (SPS Programming Support Tool EL-49642) or equivalent during programming. Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table above. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3128 Body Control Module: Locations Instrument Panel/Center Console Component Views Lower Left of the Instrument Panel Components 1 - B80 Park Brake Switch 2 - T3 Audio Amplifier 3 - K9 Body Control Module 4 - K73 Telematics Communication Interface Control Module (UE1) 5 - B107 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor 6 T4S Wireless Communication Antenna - Bluetooth (UE1 with UPF) 7 - B22 Brake Pedal Position Sensor 8 - X84 Data Link Connector Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3129 Body Control Module: Diagrams K9 Body Control Module X1 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3130 K9 Body Control Module X2 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3131 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3132 K9 Body Control Module X3 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3133 K9 Body Control Module X4 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3134 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3135 K9 Body Control Module X5 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3136 K9 Body Control Module X6 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3137 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3138 K9 Body Control Module X7 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3139 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3140 Body Control Module: Service and Repair Body Control Module Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Disassembled Views Camshaft Position Sensor: Locations Disassembled Views Disassembled Views Camshaft Timing Components 1 - Primary Timing Chain Tensioner Bolt 2 - Left Secondary Timing Chain Shoe Bolt 3 - Right Secondary Timing Chain Tensioner 4 - Right Secondary Timing Chain Tensioner Gasket 5 - Right Secondary Timing Chain Shoe 6 - Secondary Timing Chain 7 - Camshaft Position Actuator Bolt 8 Exhaust Camshaft Position Actuator 9 - Camshaft Position Actuator Thrust Washer 10 - Intake Camshaft Position Actuator 11 - Right Secondary Timing Chain Guide 12 - Left Camshaft Intermediate Drive Shaft Sprocket 13 - Camshaft Intermediate Drive Shaft Sprocket Bolt 14 - Left Secondary Timing Chain Shoe 15 - Left Secondary Timing Chain Tensioner Gasket 16 - Left Secondary Timing Chain Tensioner Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Disassembled Views > Page 3145 17 - Left Secondary Timing Chain Guide 18 - Lower Primary Timing Chain Guide 19 - Lower Primary Timing Chain Guide Bolt 20 - Crankshaft Sprocket 21 - Primary Timing Chain 22 - Right Camshaft Intermediate Drive Shaft Sprocket 23 - Upper Primary Timing Chain Guide 24 - Primary Timing Chain Tensioner Gasket 25 - Primary Timing Chain Tensioner Engine Front Cover 1 - Water Pump Pulley Bolt 2 - Water Pump Pulley 3 - Water Pump Assembly 4 - Water Pump Pulley Gasket 5 - Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve Seal 6 - Camshaft Position Sensor Bolt 7 - Camshaft Position Sensor 8 - Camshaft Position Sensor O-ring Seal 9 - Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve Bolt 10 - Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve 11 - Engine Front Cover Gasket 12 - Engine Front Cover Locating Pin Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Disassembled Views > Page 3146 13 - Engine Front Cover 14 - Engine Front Cover Bolt 15 - Engine Front Cover Seal 16 Crankshaft Balancer 17 - Crankshaft Balancer Bolt 18 - Engine Front Cover Bolt 19 - Water Pump Bolt Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Disassembled Views > Page 3147 Camshaft Position Sensor: Locations Powertrain Component Views Powertrain Component Views Front Engine Components (LAF 1 of 2) 1 - Q38 Throttle Body 2 - G18 High Pressure Fuel Pump 3 - B23F Camshaft Position Sensor Intake 4 - B37 Engine Oil Pressure Switch 5 - B68 Knock Sensor 6 - B26 Crankshaft Position Sensor 7 - M64 Starter Motor 8 - Q2 A/C Compressor Clutch 9 - G13 Generator Left Rear Engine Components (LAF) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Disassembled Views > Page 3148 1 - T8D Ignition Coil 4 2 - T8C Ignition Coil 3 3 - T8B Ignition Coil 2 4 - T8A Ignition Coil 1 5 - Q6F Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Intake 6 - Q6E Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Exhaust 7 - B52A Heated Oxygen Sensor 1 8 - B52B Heated Oxygen Sensor 2 9 - B34 Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor 10 - B23E Camshaft Position Sensor - Exhaust 11 - Q12 Evaporative Emission Purge Solenoid Valve Right Rear of the Engine Components (LF1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Disassembled Views > Page 3149 1 - B74 Manifold Absolute Pressure Sensor 2 - T8E Ignition Coil 5 3 - T8C Ignition Coil 3 4 - Q12 Evaporative Emission Purge Solenoid Valve 5 - Q38 Throttle Body 6 - B23B Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 1 Intake 7 - B23D Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 2 Intake 8 - Q6D Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Bank 2 Intake 9 - Q6C Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Bank 2 Exhaust 10 - B23C Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 2 Exhaust 11 - Q6B Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Bank 1 Intake 12 - Q6A Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Bank 1 Exhaust 13 - B23A Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 1 Exhaust 14 - B68A Knock Sensor 1 15 - B26 Crankshaft Position Sensor 16 - T8A Ignition Coil 1 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3150 Camshaft Position Sensor: Diagrams B23A Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 1 Exhaust (LF1) B23B Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 1 Intake (LF1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3151 B23C Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 2 Exhaust (LF1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3152 B23D Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 2 Intake (LF1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3153 B23E Camshaft Position Sensor - Exhaust (LAF) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3154 B23F Camshaft Position Sensor - Intake (LAF) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3155 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Camshaft Position Sensor Replacement - Bank 2 (Left Side) Exhaust Camshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair Camshaft Position Sensor Replacement - Bank 2 (Left Side) Exhaust Camshaft Position Sensor Replacement - Bank 2 (Left Side) Exhaust Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Camshaft Position Sensor Replacement - Bank 2 (Left Side) Exhaust > Page 3158 Camshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair Camshaft Position Sensor Replacement - Bank 2 (Left Side) Intake Camshaft Position Sensor Replacement - Bank 2 (Left Side) Intake Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Camshaft Position Sensor Replacement - Bank 2 (Left Side) Exhaust > Page 3159 Camshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair Camshaft Position Sensor Replacement - Bank 1 (Right Side) Exhaust Camshaft Position Sensor Replacement - Bank 1 (Right Side) Exhaust Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Camshaft Position Sensor Replacement - Bank 2 (Left Side) Exhaust > Page 3160 Camshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair Camshaft Position Sensor Replacement - Bank 1 (Right Side) Intake Camshaft Position Sensor Replacement - Bank 1 (Right Side) Intake Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Service and Repair Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Service and Repair Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor Replacement (LF1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Disassembled Views Crankshaft Position Sensor: Locations Disassembled Views Disassembled Views Engine Covers and Component Assemblies (1 of 2) (LF1) 1 - Right Camshaft Cover Assembly 2 - Ignition Coil Bolt 3 - Ignition Coil 4 - Spark Plug 5 - Intake Manifold Assembly 6 - Left Camshaft Cover Assembly 7 - Fuel Rail Noise Shield 8 - Fuel Pump Cover 9 - Fuel Pump Cover Bolt 10 - Engine Flywheel 11 - Engine Flywheel Bolt 12 - Engine Assembly 13 - Oil Pan Assembly 14 - Engine Front Cover Assembly 15 - Crankshaft Balancer 16 Crankshaft Balancer Bolt Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Disassembled Views > Page 3168 17 - Crankshaft Position Sensor Heat Shield Bolt - Large 18 - Crankshaft Position Sensor Heat Shield 19 - Crankshaft Position Sensor Heat Shield Bolt - Small Engine Covers and Component Assemblies (2 of 2) (LF1) 1 - Water Outlet Bolt 2 - Water Outlet 3 - Water Outlet O-ring 4 - Water Outlet Seal 5 - Knock Sensor Bolt 6 - Knock Sensor 7 - Engine Coolant Heater Assembly 8 - Crankshaft Position Sensor Bolt 9 - Crankshaft Position Sensor 10 - Crankshaft Position Sensor O-ring 11 - Right Cylinder Head Assembly 12 - Right Cylinder Head Gasket 13 - Lower Fuel Rail Noise Shield 14 - Engine Cooling Thermostat Gasket 15 - Engine Cooling Thermostat 16 - Engine Cooling Thermostat Housing 17 - Engine Cooling Thermostat Bolt - Short 18 - Engine Cooling Thermostat Housing Bolt - Long Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Disassembled Views > Page 3169 19 - Fuel Feed Pipe Assembly 20 - Fuel Feed Pipe Assembly Bolt 21 - Fuel Feed Intermediate Pipe Assembly 22 - Fuel Pump Gasket 23 - Fuel Pump O-ring Seal 24 - Fuel Pump 25 - Fuel Pump Bolt 26 - Left Cylinder Head Assembly 27 - Left Cylinder Head Gasket 28 - Oil Level Indicator 29 Oil Level Indicator Handle O-ring 30 - Oil Level Indicator Tube Bolt 31 - Oil Level Indicator Tube 32 - Oil Level Indicator Tube O-ring 33 - Oil Filter Adapter Assembly 34 - Engine Short Block Assembly 35 - Oil Pump Assembly 36 - Timing Drive Assembly Camshaft Cover Assembly 250 - Left Camshaft Cover 251 - Left Camshaft Cover Gasket 252 - Right Camshaft Cover Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Disassembled Views > Page 3170 253 - Right Camshaft Cover Gasket 254 - Camshaft Cover Spark Plug Port Seal 254 - Camshaft Cover Spark Plug Port Seal 255 - Camshaft Cover Bolt 255 - Camshaft Cover Bolt 256 - Camshaft Cover Bolt Insulator 256 - Camshaft Cover Bolt Insulator 257 - Ignition Coil Bolt Thread Insert 258 Oil Fill Cap 259 - Oil Fill O-ring 259 - Oil Fill O-ring 260 - Left Camshaft Cover PCV Fitting 261 Right Camshaft Cover PCV Fitting Orifice 262 - Oil Fill Tube 263 - Left Camshaft Cover PCV Fitting O-ring 265 - Left Camshaft Housing Cover Insulator 266 - Right Camshaft Housing Cover Insulator 704 - Ignition Coil 704 - Ignition Coil 705 - Ignition Coil Bolt 705 - Ignition Coil Bolt 719 - Spark Plug 719 - Spark Plug Camshaft Timing Components Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Disassembled Views > Page 3171 1 - Primary Timing Chain Tensioner Bolt 2 - Left Secondary Timing Chain Shoe Bolt 3 - Right Secondary Timing Chain Tensioner 4 - Right Secondary Timing Chain Tensioner Gasket 5 - Right Secondary Timing Chain Shoe 6 - Secondary Timing Chain 7 - Camshaft Position Actuator Bolt 8 Exhaust Camshaft Position Actuator 9 - Camshaft Position Actuator Thrust Washer 10 - Intake Camshaft Position Actuator 11 - Right Secondary Timing Chain Guide 12 - Left Camshaft Intermediate Drive Shaft Sprocket 13 - Camshaft Intermediate Drive Shaft Sprocket Bolt 14 - Left Secondary Timing Chain Shoe 15 - Left Secondary Timing Chain Tensioner Gasket 16 - Left Secondary Timing Chain Tensioner 17 - Left Secondary Timing Chain Guide 18 - Lower Primary Timing Chain Guide 19 - Lower Primary Timing Chain Guide Bolt 20 - Crankshaft Sprocket 21 Primary Timing Chain 22 - Right Camshaft Intermediate Drive Shaft Sprocket 23 - Upper Primary Timing Chain Guide 24 - Primary Timing Chain Tensioner Gasket Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Disassembled Views > Page 3172 25 - Primary Timing Chain Tensioner Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Disassembled Views > Page 3173 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Locations Powertrain Component Views Powertrain Component Views Front Engine Components (LAF 1 of 2) 1 - Q38 Throttle Body 2 - G18 High Pressure Fuel Pump 3 - B23F Camshaft Position Sensor Intake 4 - B37 Engine Oil Pressure Switch 5 - B68 Knock Sensor 6 - B26 Crankshaft Position Sensor 7 - M64 Starter Motor 8 - Q2 A/C Compressor Clutch 9 - G13 Generator Right Rear of the Engine Components (LF1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Disassembled Views > Page 3174 1 - B74 Manifold Absolute Pressure Sensor 2 - T8E Ignition Coil 5 3 - T8C Ignition Coil 3 4 - Q12 Evaporative Emission Purge Solenoid Valve 5 - Q38 Throttle Body 6 - B23B Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 1 Intake 7 - B23D Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 2 Intake 8 - Q6D Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Bank 2 Intake 9 - Q6C Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Bank 2 Exhaust 10 - B23C Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 2 Exhaust 11 - Q6B Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Bank 1 Intake 12 - Q6A Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Bank 1 Exhaust 13 - B23A Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 1 Exhaust 14 - B68A Knock Sensor 1 15 - B26 Crankshaft Position Sensor 16 - T8A Ignition Coil 1 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3175 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Diagrams B26 Crankshaft Position Sensor Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3176 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Testing and Inspection Crankshaft Position System Variation Learn Note: The Crankshaft Position System Variation Learn procedure is also required when the following service procedures have been performed, regardless of whether DTC P0315 is set: * An engine replacement * An engine control module (ECM) replacement * A crankshaft balancer replacement * A crankshaft replacement * A crankshaft position sensor replacement * Any engine repairs which disturb the crankshaft to crankshaft position sensor relationship. Note: The ECM monitors certain component signals to determine if all the conditions are met to continue with the crankshaft position System Variation Learn Procedure. 1. Install a scan tool. 2. Monitor the ECM for DTCs with a scan tool. If other DTCs are set, except DTC P0315, refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle ( See: Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Descriptions/Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle) for the applicable DTC that set. 3. With a scan tool, select the Crankshaft Position System Variation Learn Procedure and perform the following: 1. Block drive wheels. 2. Set parking brake. 3. DO NOT apply brake pedal. 4. Cycle ignition from OFF to ON. 5. Apply and hold brake pedal for the duration of the procedure. 6. Start and idle engine. 7. Turn the air conditioning (A/C) OFF. 8. The vehicle must remain in Park or Neutral. Note: While the learn procedure is in progress, release the throttle immediately when the engine starts to decelerate. The engine control is returned to the operator and the engine responds to throttle position after the learn procedure is complete. 9. Accelerate to wide open throttle (WOT) and release when the fuel cut-off occurs. 4. The scan tool displays Test In Progress. 5. The scan tool displays Learn Successful. 6. Verify DTC P0315 ran and passed This Ignition Cycle. ‹› If DTC P0315 failed or did not run This Ignition Cycle, or another DTC is present, refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle ( See: Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Descriptions/Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle) for the applicable DTC that set. 7. Once the Learn Procedure has successfully completed, and in order to store the crankshaft position system variation values in the ECM, turn OFF the ignition and verify all vehicle systems are OFF. This may take up to 2 minutes. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3177 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair Crankshaft Position Sensor Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector > Component Information > Locations > Lower Left of the Instrument Panel Components Data Link Connector: Locations Lower Left of the Instrument Panel Components Instrument Panel/Center Console Component Views Lower Left of the Instrument Panel Components 1 - B80 Park Brake Switch 2 - T3 Audio Amplifier 3 - K9 Body Control Module 4 - K73 Telematics Communication Interface Control Module (UE1) 5 - B107 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor 6 T4S Wireless Communication Antenna - Bluetooth (UE1 with UPF) 7 - B22 Brake Pedal Position Sensor 8 - X84 Data Link Connector Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector > Component Information > Locations > Lower Left of the Instrument Panel Components > Page 3182 Data Link Connector: Locations Wheels/Vehicle Underbody Component Views Wheels/Vehicle Underbody Component Views Rear Underbody Components 1 - K47 Rear Differential Clutch Control Module (F46) 2 - R6 Data Link Resistor Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector > Component Information > Locations > Page 3183 Data Link Connector: Diagrams R6 Data Link Resistor X84 Data Link Connector Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector > Component Information > Locations > Page 3184 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Actuator > Component Information > Description and Operation Electronic Throttle Actuator: Description and Operation Throttle Actuator Control (TAC) System Description The engine control module (ECM) is the control center for the throttle actuator control (TAC) system. The ECM determines the driver's intent based on input from the accelerator pedal position sensors, then calculates the appropriate throttle response based on the throttle position sensors. The ECM achieves throttle positioning by providing a pulse width modulated voltage to the throttle actuator motor. The throttle blade is spring loaded in both directions, and the default position is slightly open. Modes Of Operation Normal Mode During the operation of the TAC system, several modes, or functions, are considered normal. The following modes may be entered during normal operations: * Minimum pedal value-At key-up, the ECM updates the learned minimum pedal value. * Minimum throttle position values-At key-up, the ECM updates the learned minimum throttle position value. In order to learn the minimum throttle position value, the throttle blade is moved to the Closed position. * Ice break mode-If the throttle blade is not able to reach a predetermined minimum throttle position, the ice break mode is entered. During the ice break mode, the ECM commands the maximum pulse width several times to the throttle actuator motor in the closing direction. * Minimum pedal value-At key-up, the ECM updates the learned minimum pedal value. * Battery saver mode-After a predetermined time without engine RPM, the ECM commands the Battery Saver mode. During the Battery Saver mode, the TAC module removes the voltage from the motor control circuits, which removes the current draw used to maintain the idle position and allows the throttle to return to the spring loaded default position. Reduced Engine Power Mode When the ECM detects a condition with the TAC system, the ECM may enter a reduced engine power mode. Reduced engine power may cause one or more of the following conditions: * Acceleration limiting-The ECM will continue to use the accelerator pedal for throttle control, however, the vehicle acceleration is limited. * Limited throttle mode-The ECM will continue to use the accelerator pedal for throttle control, however, the maximum throttle opening is limited. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Actuator > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 3188 * Throttle default mode-The ECM will turn OFF the throttle actuator motor, and the throttle will return to the spring loaded default position. * Forced idle mode-The ECM will perform the following actions: - Limit engine speed to idle positioning the throttle position, or by controlling the fuel and spark if the throttle is turned OFF. - Ignore the accelerator pedal input. * Engine shutdown mode-The ECM will disable fuel and de-energize the throttle actuator. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 09333A > May > 10 > Campaign - Evaporative Emission Diagnostics Technical Service Bulletin # 09333A Date: 100504 Campaign - Evaporative Emission Diagnostics SERVICE UPDATE Bulletin No.: 09333A Date: May 04, 2010 Subject: 09333A - Service Update for Inventory and Customer Vehicles - Evaporative Emission Diagnostics Models: 2010 Chevrolet Equinox 2010 GMC Terrain Supercede: The ECM programming service procedure in this bulletin has been revised to include instructions for dealers to contact Engineering at 734-320-8123 if programming stops prior to completion. Do NOT attempt to reprogram.Please discard all copies of bulletin 09333, issued January 2010. This service update includes vehicles in dealer inventory and customer vehicles that return to the dealership for any reason. Purpose This bulletin provides a service procedure to improve the ability of the evaporative emissions diagnostic to detect leaks by installing a fuel tank vent tubing jumper on certain 2010 model year Chevrolet Equinox and GMC Terrain vehicles. Vehicles equipped with a V6 engine will also require reprogramming of the engine control module. This service procedure should be completed as soon as possible on involved vehicles currently in dealer inventory and customer vehicles that return to the dealer for any type of service. Vehicles Involved A list of involved vehicles currently in dealer inventory is available on the "Service Update Bulletin Information" link under the "Service" tab in GM GlobalConnect (US) or attached to the GlobalConnect message (Canada) used to release this bulletin. Customer vehicles that return for service, for any reason, and are still covered under the vehicle's 8 year/80,000 mile (130,000 km) base emission warranty, and are within the VIN breakpoints provided below, should be checked for vehicle eligibility in the appropriate system listed below. Important Dealers are to confirm vehicle eligibility prior to beginning repairs by using GMVIS (dealers using WINS) or the Investigate Vehicle History link (dealers using GWM). Not all vehicles within the above breakpoints may be involved. Parts Information Parts required to complete this service update are to be obtained from General Motors Service and Parts Operations (GMSPO). Please refer to your "involved vehicles listing" before ordering parts. Normal orders should be placed on a DRO = Daily Replenishment Order. In an emergency situation, parts should be ordered on a CSO = Customer Special Order. Claim Information For vehicles repaired under the 8 year/80,000 mile (130,000 km) emission warranty: 1. Submit a claim using the table below. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 09333A > May > 10 > Campaign - Evaporative Emission Diagnostics > Page 3197 2. Courtesy Transportation - For dealers using WINS, submit using normal labor code; for dealers using GWM - submit as Net Item under the repair labor code. Disclaimer Service Procedure Service Procedure 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle in SI. 2. Locate the fuel tank EVAP emissions canister (1) and fuel tank EVAP vapor line connection (2). 3. Disconnect the 16 mm (5/8 in) quick connect vapor line (2) from the front of EVAP emissions canister (1). 4. Identify all parts included in the EVAP jumper hose assembly kit. The kit contains two EVAP jumper hoses and three tie straps. There is a large diameter 16 mm (5/8 in) EVAP jumper hose (1) with a 45 degree T-fitting (2) and a small diameter 8 mm (5/16 in) EVAP jumper hose with a T-fitting (3). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 09333A > May > 10 > Campaign - Evaporative Emission Diagnostics > Page 3198 5. Connect the new 16 mm (5/8 in) EVAP jumper hose (larger diameter hose) (2) to the EVAP emissions canister (1). 6. Install the second piece of the new 8 mm (5/16 in) jumper hose (smaller diameter hose) (3) to the 45 degree T-fitting on the new 16 mm (5/8 in) EVAP jumper hose (2). Ensure that the new 8 mm (5/16 in) jumper hose (3) is installed between the new 16 mm (5/8 in) EVAP jumper hose (2) and floor pan. 7. Insert the non-connector end of the 16 mm (5/8 in) EVAP jumper hose (larger diameter hose) (2) into the existing EVAP vapor line (4). 8. Secure the new jumper hose assembly with a tie strap (6) through the hole in brake clip (5) on LH underbody rail. Avoid contacting the brake or fuel line with the tie wrap. 9. Cut off excess tie strap (6). 10. Route the 8 mm (5/16 in) hose (3) on top of the fuel feed line on the left (driver's) side of the fuel tank assembly. 11. Continue routing the 8 mm (5/16 in) hose (3) through the suspension on the front side of the underbody rail and behind the tank and all-wheel drive unit. Follow the path of the park brake cable. The 8 mm (5/16 in) line should be routed on top of the park brake cable routing. 12. Disconnect the existing EVAP-to-fuel tank vapor line (yellow connector) located on the rear right (passenger side) of vehicle at the fuel tank. 13. Connect the new 8 mm (5/16 in) hose (3) to the fuel tank. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 09333A > May > 10 > Campaign - Evaporative Emission Diagnostics > Page 3199 14. Connect the existing EVAP hose to the T-fitting on the new 8 mm (5/16 in) hose. Caution Ensure that the 8 mm (5/16 in) hose (3) is tucked in over the park brake cable to prevent the hose from sagging over the fuel tank cutout area. 15. Secure the 8 mm (5/16 in) hose (3) to the parking brake line at the left (driver's) (A) and right (passenger' side) (B) fuel tank strap locations (9) with two tie straps (8) as shown in the illustration. 16. Lower the vehicle. 17. Determine if the vehicle is equipped with a four or six cylinder engine. - If the vehicle is equipped with a four cylinder engine, no further action is required. Refer to the Claim section of the bulletin. - If the vehicle is equipped with a six cylinder engine, refer to ECM Programming Service Procedure in this bulletin. ECM PROGRAMMING SERVICE PROCEDURE Do not attempt to order the calibration number from GMSPO. The calibration numbers required for this service procedure are programmed into control modules via a Multiple Diagnostic Interface (MDI) and TIS2WEB with the calibration update. Use TIS2WEB on or after 01/07/10 to obtain the calibration. If you cannot access the calibration, call the Techline Customer Support Center and it will be provided. If programming stops prior to completion, contact Engineering at 734-320-8123. Do NOT attempt to reprogram. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 09333A > May > 10 > Campaign - Evaporative Emission Diagnostics > Page 3200 For step-by-step programming instructions, please refer to SI and the Techline Information System (TIS) terminal. 1. Verify that there is a battery charge of 12 to 16 volts. The battery must be able to maintain a charge during programming. Only use an approved Midtronic 165-PSC charger to maintain proper battery voltage during programming. 2. Reprogram the engine control module (ECM). Refer to SI and Service Programming System (SPS) documentation for programming instructions, if required. 1. Connect the MDI to the vehicle. Note Select J2534 MDI and Reprogram ECU from the Select Diagnostic Tool and Programming Process screen. 2. Select J2534 MDI and Reprogram ECU from the Select Diagnostic Tool and Programming Process screen. 3. Select ECM Engine Control Module - Programming from the Supported Controllers screen. 4. Follow the on-screen instructions. 3. Use MDI and GDS to clear all DTCs if required. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 04-06-04-054B > Nov > 10 > Engine Controls - Aftermarket Accessory Usage Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - Aftermarket Accessory Usage INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 04-06-04-054B Date: November 18, 2010 Subject: Info - Non-GM Parts and Accessories (Aftermarket) Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add model years and update to the new U.S. Fixed Operation Manager (FOM) and Canada Warranty Manager (WM) names. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 04-06-04-054A (Section 06 - Engine/Propulsion System). The recent rise and expansion of companies selling non-GM parts and accessories has made it necessary to issue this reminder to dealers regarding GM's policy on the use and installation of these aftermarket components. When a dealer is performing a repair under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty, they are required to use only genuine GM or GM-approved parts and accessories. This applies to all warranty repairs, special policy repairs or any repairs paid for by GM. Parts and accessories advertised as being "the same" as parts manufactured by GM, but not sold through GM, do not qualify for use in warranty repairs, special policy repairs or any repairs paid for by GM. During a warranty repair, if a GM original equipment part is not available through GM Customer Care and Aftersales (GM CC&A;), ACDelco(R) distributors, other GM dealers or approved sources, the dealer is to obtain comparable, non-GM parts and clearly indicate, in detail, on the repair order the circumstances surrounding why non-GM parts were used. The dealer must give customers written notice, prior to the sale or service, that such parts or accessories are not marketed or warranted by General Motors. It should also be noted that dealers modifying new vehicles and installing equipment, parts and accessories obtained from sources not authorized by GM are responsible for complying with the National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act. Certain non-approved parts or assemblies, installed by the dealer or its agent not authorized by GM, may result in a change to the vehicle's design characteristics and may affect the vehicle's ability to conform to federal law. Dealers must fully understand that non-GM approved parts may not have been validated, tested or certified for use. This puts the dealer at risk for potential liability in the event of a part or vehicle failure. If a GM part failure occurs as the result of the installation or use of a non-GM approved part, the warranty will not be honored. A good example of non-authorized modification of vehicles is the result of an ever increasing supply of aftermarket devices available to the customer, which claim to increase the horsepower and torque of the Duramax(TM) Diesel Engines. These include the addition of, but are not limited to one or more of the following modifications: - Propane injection - Nitrous oxide injection - Additional modules (black boxes) that connect to the vehicle wiring systems - Revised engine calibrations downloaded for the engine control module - Calibration modules which connect to the vehicle diagnostic connector - Modification to the engine turbocharger waste gate Although the installation of these devices, or modification of vehicle components, can increase engine horsepower and torque, they may also negatively affect the engine emissions, reliability and/or durability. In addition, other powertrain components, such as transmissions, universal joints, drive shafts, and front/rear axle components, can be stressed beyond design safety limits by the installation of these devices. General Motors does not support or endorse the use of devices or modifications that, when installed, increase the engine horsepower and torque. It is because of these unknown stresses, and the potential to alter reliability, durability and emissions performance, that GM has adopted a policy that prevents any UNAUTHORIZED dealer warranty claim submissions to any remaining warranty coverage, to the powertrain and driveline components whenever the presence of a non-GM (aftermarket) calibration is confirmed - even if the non-GM control module calibration is subsequently removed. Refer to the latest version of Bulletin 09-06-04-026 (V8 Gas Engines) or 06-06-01-007 (Duramax(TM) Diesel Engines) for more information on dealer requirements for calibration verification. These same policies apply as they relate to the use of non-GM accessories. Damage or failure from the use or installation of a non-GM accessory will not be covered under warranty. Failure resulting from the alteration or modification of the vehicle, including the cutting, welding or disconnecting of the vehicle's original equipment parts and components will void the warranty. Additionally, dealers will NOT be reimbursed or compensated by GM in the event of any legal inquiry at either the local, state or federal level that Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 04-06-04-054B > Nov > 10 > Engine Controls - Aftermarket Accessory Usage > Page 3206 results from the alteration or modification of a vehicle using non-GM approved parts or accessories. Dealers should be especially cautious of accessory companies that claim the installation of their product will not void the factory warranty. Many times these companies have even given direction on how to quickly disassemble the accessory in an attempt to preclude the manufacturer from finding out that is has been installed. Any suspect repairs should be reviewed by the Fixed Operations Manager (FOM), and in Canada by the Warranty Manager (WM) for appropriate repair direction. If it is decided that a goodwill repair is to be made on the vehicle, even with the installation of such non-GM approved components, the customer is to be made aware of General Motors position on this issue and is to sign the appropriate goodwill documentation required by General Motors. It is imperative for dealers to understand that by installing such devices, they are jeopardizing not only the warranty coverage, but also the performance and reliability of the customer's vehicle. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 09-06-04-026C > Aug > 10 > Engine/Transmission - Aftermarket Calibrations Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine/Transmission - Aftermarket Calibrations INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 09-06-04-026C Date: August 13, 2010 Subject: Identifying Non-GM (Aftermarket) Engine and Transmission Calibrations for V8 Gas Engines Using Tech 2(R) or Global Diagnostic System (GDS) Models: 2006-2011 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (Excluding Saab 9-7X) 2006-2009 HUMMER H2 2006-2010 HUMMER H3 Equipped with V8 Gas Powered Engines Only Attention: This bulletin applies to V8 gas powered engines ONLY. For Duramax(TM) diesel powered engines, refer to the latest version of Corporate Bulletin Number 08-06-04-006G. Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2011 model year. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 09-06-04-026A (Section 06 - Engine/Propulsion System). General Motors is identifying an increasing number of engine, transmission and catalytic converter part failures that are the result of non-GM (aftermarket) engine and transmission control calibrations being used. When alteration to the GM-released engine or transmission control calibrations occurs, it subjects powertrain and driveline components (engine , transmission, transfer case, driveshaft and rear axle) to stresses that were not tested by General Motors. It is because of these unknown stresses, and the potential to alter reliability, durability and emissions performance, that GM has adopted a policy that prevents any UNAUTHORIZED dealer warranty claim submissions to any remaining warranty coverage, to the powertrain and driveline components whenever the presence of a non-GM (aftermarket) calibration is confirmed - even if the non-GM control module calibration is subsequently removed. Warranty coverage is based on the equipment and calibrations that were released on the vehicle at time of sale, or subsequently updated by GM. That's because GM testing and validation matches the calibration to a host of criteria that is essential to assure reliability, durability and emissions performance over the life of the warranty coverage and beyond. Stresses resulting from calibrations different from those tested and released by GM can damage or weaken components, leading to poor performance and or shortened life. Additionally, non-GM (aftermarket) issued engine control modifications often do not meet the same emissions performance standards as GM issued calibrations. Depending on state statutes, individuals who install engine control module calibrations that put the vehicle outside the parameters of emissions certification standards may be subject to fines and/or penalties. This bulletin outlines a procedure to identify the presence of non-GM (aftermarket) calibrations. GM recommends performing this check whenever a hard part failure is seen on internal engine or transmission components, or before an engine assembly or transmission assembly is being replaced under warranty. It is also recommended that the engine calibration verification procedure be performed whenever diagnostics indicate that catalytic converter replacement is indicated. The PQC has a process to confirm the ECM/PCM calibration is GM issued. The PQC will require a picture of the engine calibration verification screen, as outlined in this bulletin, before authorizing any V8 gas powered engine replacement. If a non-GM calibration is found and verification has taken place through GM, the remaining powertrain and driveline warranty will be blocked and notated in GMVIS and the dealership will be notified. This block prevents any UNAUTHORIZED warranty claim submission. 1. Connect the Tech 2(R) to the vehicle. 2. Go to: Diagnostics and build the vehicle. 3. Select: Powertrain. 4. Select: Engine. 5. *Select: Engine Control Module or PCM. 6. *Select: Module ID Information or I/M Information System if the Module ID Information selection is not available. 7. *If "I/M information System" was selected, it may be necessary to select "Vehicle Information" in order to display the calibration information. ‹› If the CVN information is displayed as "N/A", it will be necessary to contact the TCSC to obtain the CVN information. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 09-06-04-026C > Aug > 10 > Engine/Transmission - Aftermarket Calibrations > Page 3211 8. Take a CLEAR digital picture of the Tech 2(R) Vehicle Information screen showing the engine Calibration IDs and Verification Numbers as shown above. Retain the printout information and the Tech 2(R) screen photograph with the repair order. Note All pictures must be sent as a.jpg file. 9. E-mail a copy of the picture to [email protected]. In the subject line of the e-mail include the phrase "V8 Cal" as well as the complete VIN and Dealer BAC. In the body of the e-mail, include the VIN, mileage, R.O. number and BAC. Include a brief description of the customer concern and cause of the concern. Note The dealer will receive an e-mail reply after the calibrations have been validated. The e-mail reply will advise the dealer if the calibrations are OEM. 10. Allow two hours for the PQC to verify the calibrations and set up the case details. ‹› If the PQC determines that the calibrations ARE aftermarket calibrations, DO NOT contact GM Technical Assistance to discuss warranty concerns on the aftermarket calibrations. ALL questions and concerns about warranty should be directed to the dealers Fixed Operations Manager (FOM), (Warranty Manager (WM) in Canada). 11. You may call the PQC two hours after submitting the e-mail for authorization to replace the assembly. This will provide them time to receive, review and set up a case on the request. Please be prepared to provide all the usual documentation that is normally required when requesting an assembly authorization from the PQC. Tech 2(R) Displaying All Zeroes for the Verification Numbers on the Calibration ID and Verification Number Screen If the Tech 2(R) that you are using displays all zeroes for the Verification Numbers as shown, then perform the following steps: 1. Update the Tech 2(R) with the latest software from TIS2WEB. 2. Turn OFF the ignition for 90 seconds. 3. Connect the Tech 2(R) to the vehicle. 4. Turn ON the ignition, and build the vehicle. Observe the Tech 2(R) Calibration ID and Verification Number screen for proper operation. ‹› If the Tech 2(R) screen still does not display properly, then turn OFF the ignition for 90 seconds again. Turn ON the ignition and observe the same screen for proper operation. Retrieving Calibrations From a Global A Vehicle This information applies to the 2010 Camaro and is typical of the procedure that will be used on Global A vehicles. 1. Turn OFF the ignition. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 09-06-04-026C > Aug > 10 > Engine/Transmission - Aftermarket Calibrations > Page 3212 2. Connect the MDI to the Data Link Connector (DLC) of the vehicle. Note Use the USB port to make the following MDI connection: 3. Connect the MDI to a PC or laptop that has been downloaded with the GDS application from TIS2WEB. Note At least one Diagnostic Package must be installed on the PC to perform diagnostics. If GDS was just installed, select: Add New Diagnostic Package and then select: a Diagnostic Package to download. 4. Click: On the GDS icon on the PC. 5. The Login Page will appear. 6. Select: A User. 7. The ID Screen will appear. 8. Select: The serial number of the MDI being used. 9. Select: Connect. 10. Verify that the system status is ready by observing for a flashing PC light icon on the MDI. 11. Select: Make, Model and Model Year, in order to build the vehicle. 12. Click: Upload VIN, to allow the VIN to be reported to the PC. 13. At: The Verification step, turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. 14. Select: Next Action. 15. The Home Page will appear. 16. Select: Next. 17. The Diagnostic Screen will appear. Note Due to vehicle build, software and RPO variations, GDS may ask for additional information in Step 18. 18. Select: Engine ID, if prompted. 19. Select: Module Diagnostics. 20. Select: ECM. 21. Select: ID Information. 22. The Diagnostics page will appear. Typical View of GDS Calibration History Screen Note GDS is capable of displaying up to 10 Calibration History events. 23. Select: Calibration History from the drop down menu in order to display the following items on the screen: - Calibration History Buffer - Number of Calibration History Events Stored - Calibration Part Number History - Calibration Verification Number History 24. Select: Screenshot. 25. Name and save the file in an appropriate folder. 26. Select : Print, and retain a copy of the screenshot with the repair order. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 09-06-04-026C > Aug > 10 > Engine/Transmission - Aftermarket Calibrations > Page 3213 Note All pictures must be sent as a.jpg file. 27. E-mail a copy of the screenshot to [email protected]. In the subject line of the e-mail include the phrase "V8 Cal" as well as the complete VIN and Dealer BAC. In the body of the e-mail, include the VIN, mileage, R.O. number and BAC. Include a brief description of the customer concern and cause of the concern. Note The dealer will receive an e-mail reply after the calibrations have been validated. The e-mail reply will advise the dealer if the calibrations are OEM. 28. Allow two hours for the PQC to verify the calibrations and set up the case details. ‹› If the PQC determines that the calibrations ARE aftermarket calibrations, DO NOT contact GM Technical Assistance to discuss warranty concerns on the aftermarket calibrations. ALL questions and concerns about warranty should be directed to the dealers Fixed Operations Manager (FOM), (Warranty Manager (WM) in Canada). 29. You may call the PQC two hours after submitting the e-mail for authorization to replace the assembly. This will provide them time to receive, review and set up a case on the request. Please be prepared to provide all the usual documentation that is normally required when requesting an assembly authorization from the PQC. Warranty Information - The Dealership Service Management must be involved in any situation that would justify the use of labor operation Z1111. - Notify the Fixed Operations Manager (FOM) (Warranty Manager (WM) in Canada) of the situation. - All claims will have to be routed to the FOM (WM in Canada) for approval. - Please refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 09-00-89-016, Labor Operation Z1111 - Suspected Tampering or Vehicle Modifications for important information. For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 09333A > May > 10 > Campaign - Evaporative Emission Diagnostics Technical Service Bulletin # 09333A Date: 100504 Campaign - Evaporative Emission Diagnostics SERVICE UPDATE Bulletin No.: 09333A Date: May 04, 2010 Subject: 09333A - Service Update for Inventory and Customer Vehicles - Evaporative Emission Diagnostics Models: 2010 Chevrolet Equinox 2010 GMC Terrain Supercede: The ECM programming service procedure in this bulletin has been revised to include instructions for dealers to contact Engineering at 734-320-8123 if programming stops prior to completion. Do NOT attempt to reprogram.Please discard all copies of bulletin 09333, issued January 2010. This service update includes vehicles in dealer inventory and customer vehicles that return to the dealership for any reason. Purpose This bulletin provides a service procedure to improve the ability of the evaporative emissions diagnostic to detect leaks by installing a fuel tank vent tubing jumper on certain 2010 model year Chevrolet Equinox and GMC Terrain vehicles. Vehicles equipped with a V6 engine will also require reprogramming of the engine control module. This service procedure should be completed as soon as possible on involved vehicles currently in dealer inventory and customer vehicles that return to the dealer for any type of service. Vehicles Involved A list of involved vehicles currently in dealer inventory is available on the "Service Update Bulletin Information" link under the "Service" tab in GM GlobalConnect (US) or attached to the GlobalConnect message (Canada) used to release this bulletin. Customer vehicles that return for service, for any reason, and are still covered under the vehicle's 8 year/80,000 mile (130,000 km) base emission warranty, and are within the VIN breakpoints provided below, should be checked for vehicle eligibility in the appropriate system listed below. Important Dealers are to confirm vehicle eligibility prior to beginning repairs by using GMVIS (dealers using WINS) or the Investigate Vehicle History link (dealers using GWM). Not all vehicles within the above breakpoints may be involved. Parts Information Parts required to complete this service update are to be obtained from General Motors Service and Parts Operations (GMSPO). Please refer to your "involved vehicles listing" before ordering parts. Normal orders should be placed on a DRO = Daily Replenishment Order. In an emergency situation, parts should be ordered on a CSO = Customer Special Order. Claim Information For vehicles repaired under the 8 year/80,000 mile (130,000 km) emission warranty: 1. Submit a claim using the table below. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 09333A > May > 10 > Campaign - Evaporative Emission Diagnostics > Page 3218 2. Courtesy Transportation - For dealers using WINS, submit using normal labor code; for dealers using GWM - submit as Net Item under the repair labor code. Disclaimer Service Procedure Service Procedure 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle in SI. 2. Locate the fuel tank EVAP emissions canister (1) and fuel tank EVAP vapor line connection (2). 3. Disconnect the 16 mm (5/8 in) quick connect vapor line (2) from the front of EVAP emissions canister (1). 4. Identify all parts included in the EVAP jumper hose assembly kit. The kit contains two EVAP jumper hoses and three tie straps. There is a large diameter 16 mm (5/8 in) EVAP jumper hose (1) with a 45 degree T-fitting (2) and a small diameter 8 mm (5/16 in) EVAP jumper hose with a T-fitting (3). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 09333A > May > 10 > Campaign - Evaporative Emission Diagnostics > Page 3219 5. Connect the new 16 mm (5/8 in) EVAP jumper hose (larger diameter hose) (2) to the EVAP emissions canister (1). 6. Install the second piece of the new 8 mm (5/16 in) jumper hose (smaller diameter hose) (3) to the 45 degree T-fitting on the new 16 mm (5/8 in) EVAP jumper hose (2). Ensure that the new 8 mm (5/16 in) jumper hose (3) is installed between the new 16 mm (5/8 in) EVAP jumper hose (2) and floor pan. 7. Insert the non-connector end of the 16 mm (5/8 in) EVAP jumper hose (larger diameter hose) (2) into the existing EVAP vapor line (4). 8. Secure the new jumper hose assembly with a tie strap (6) through the hole in brake clip (5) on LH underbody rail. Avoid contacting the brake or fuel line with the tie wrap. 9. Cut off excess tie strap (6). 10. Route the 8 mm (5/16 in) hose (3) on top of the fuel feed line on the left (driver's) side of the fuel tank assembly. 11. Continue routing the 8 mm (5/16 in) hose (3) through the suspension on the front side of the underbody rail and behind the tank and all-wheel drive unit. Follow the path of the park brake cable. The 8 mm (5/16 in) line should be routed on top of the park brake cable routing. 12. Disconnect the existing EVAP-to-fuel tank vapor line (yellow connector) located on the rear right (passenger side) of vehicle at the fuel tank. 13. Connect the new 8 mm (5/16 in) hose (3) to the fuel tank. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 09333A > May > 10 > Campaign - Evaporative Emission Diagnostics > Page 3220 14. Connect the existing EVAP hose to the T-fitting on the new 8 mm (5/16 in) hose. Caution Ensure that the 8 mm (5/16 in) hose (3) is tucked in over the park brake cable to prevent the hose from sagging over the fuel tank cutout area. 15. Secure the 8 mm (5/16 in) hose (3) to the parking brake line at the left (driver's) (A) and right (passenger' side) (B) fuel tank strap locations (9) with two tie straps (8) as shown in the illustration. 16. Lower the vehicle. 17. Determine if the vehicle is equipped with a four or six cylinder engine. - If the vehicle is equipped with a four cylinder engine, no further action is required. Refer to the Claim section of the bulletin. - If the vehicle is equipped with a six cylinder engine, refer to ECM Programming Service Procedure in this bulletin. ECM PROGRAMMING SERVICE PROCEDURE Do not attempt to order the calibration number from GMSPO. The calibration numbers required for this service procedure are programmed into control modules via a Multiple Diagnostic Interface (MDI) and TIS2WEB with the calibration update. Use TIS2WEB on or after 01/07/10 to obtain the calibration. If you cannot access the calibration, call the Techline Customer Support Center and it will be provided. If programming stops prior to completion, contact Engineering at 734-320-8123. Do NOT attempt to reprogram. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 09333A > May > 10 > Campaign - Evaporative Emission Diagnostics > Page 3221 For step-by-step programming instructions, please refer to SI and the Techline Information System (TIS) terminal. 1. Verify that there is a battery charge of 12 to 16 volts. The battery must be able to maintain a charge during programming. Only use an approved Midtronic 165-PSC charger to maintain proper battery voltage during programming. 2. Reprogram the engine control module (ECM). Refer to SI and Service Programming System (SPS) documentation for programming instructions, if required. 1. Connect the MDI to the vehicle. Note Select J2534 MDI and Reprogram ECU from the Select Diagnostic Tool and Programming Process screen. 2. Select J2534 MDI and Reprogram ECU from the Select Diagnostic Tool and Programming Process screen. 3. Select ECM Engine Control Module - Programming from the Supported Controllers screen. 4. Follow the on-screen instructions. 3. Use MDI and GDS to clear all DTCs if required. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 04-06-04-054B > Nov > 10 > Engine Controls - Aftermarket Accessory Usage Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - Aftermarket Accessory Usage INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 04-06-04-054B Date: November 18, 2010 Subject: Info - Non-GM Parts and Accessories (Aftermarket) Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add model years and update to the new U.S. Fixed Operation Manager (FOM) and Canada Warranty Manager (WM) names. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 04-06-04-054A (Section 06 - Engine/Propulsion System). The recent rise and expansion of companies selling non-GM parts and accessories has made it necessary to issue this reminder to dealers regarding GM's policy on the use and installation of these aftermarket components. When a dealer is performing a repair under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty, they are required to use only genuine GM or GM-approved parts and accessories. This applies to all warranty repairs, special policy repairs or any repairs paid for by GM. Parts and accessories advertised as being "the same" as parts manufactured by GM, but not sold through GM, do not qualify for use in warranty repairs, special policy repairs or any repairs paid for by GM. During a warranty repair, if a GM original equipment part is not available through GM Customer Care and Aftersales (GM CC&A;), ACDelco(R) distributors, other GM dealers or approved sources, the dealer is to obtain comparable, non-GM parts and clearly indicate, in detail, on the repair order the circumstances surrounding why non-GM parts were used. The dealer must give customers written notice, prior to the sale or service, that such parts or accessories are not marketed or warranted by General Motors. It should also be noted that dealers modifying new vehicles and installing equipment, parts and accessories obtained from sources not authorized by GM are responsible for complying with the National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act. Certain non-approved parts or assemblies, installed by the dealer or its agent not authorized by GM, may result in a change to the vehicle's design characteristics and may affect the vehicle's ability to conform to federal law. Dealers must fully understand that non-GM approved parts may not have been validated, tested or certified for use. This puts the dealer at risk for potential liability in the event of a part or vehicle failure. If a GM part failure occurs as the result of the installation or use of a non-GM approved part, the warranty will not be honored. A good example of non-authorized modification of vehicles is the result of an ever increasing supply of aftermarket devices available to the customer, which claim to increase the horsepower and torque of the Duramax(TM) Diesel Engines. These include the addition of, but are not limited to one or more of the following modifications: - Propane injection - Nitrous oxide injection - Additional modules (black boxes) that connect to the vehicle wiring systems - Revised engine calibrations downloaded for the engine control module - Calibration modules which connect to the vehicle diagnostic connector - Modification to the engine turbocharger waste gate Although the installation of these devices, or modification of vehicle components, can increase engine horsepower and torque, they may also negatively affect the engine emissions, reliability and/or durability. In addition, other powertrain components, such as transmissions, universal joints, drive shafts, and front/rear axle components, can be stressed beyond design safety limits by the installation of these devices. General Motors does not support or endorse the use of devices or modifications that, when installed, increase the engine horsepower and torque. It is because of these unknown stresses, and the potential to alter reliability, durability and emissions performance, that GM has adopted a policy that prevents any UNAUTHORIZED dealer warranty claim submissions to any remaining warranty coverage, to the powertrain and driveline components whenever the presence of a non-GM (aftermarket) calibration is confirmed - even if the non-GM control module calibration is subsequently removed. Refer to the latest version of Bulletin 09-06-04-026 (V8 Gas Engines) or 06-06-01-007 (Duramax(TM) Diesel Engines) for more information on dealer requirements for calibration verification. These same policies apply as they relate to the use of non-GM accessories. Damage or failure from the use or installation of a non-GM accessory will not be covered under warranty. Failure resulting from the alteration or modification of the vehicle, including the cutting, welding or disconnecting of the vehicle's original equipment parts and components will void the warranty. Additionally, dealers will NOT be reimbursed or compensated by GM in the event of any legal inquiry at either the local, state or federal level that Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 04-06-04-054B > Nov > 10 > Engine Controls - Aftermarket Accessory Usage > Page 3227 results from the alteration or modification of a vehicle using non-GM approved parts or accessories. Dealers should be especially cautious of accessory companies that claim the installation of their product will not void the factory warranty. Many times these companies have even given direction on how to quickly disassemble the accessory in an attempt to preclude the manufacturer from finding out that is has been installed. Any suspect repairs should be reviewed by the Fixed Operations Manager (FOM), and in Canada by the Warranty Manager (WM) for appropriate repair direction. If it is decided that a goodwill repair is to be made on the vehicle, even with the installation of such non-GM approved components, the customer is to be made aware of General Motors position on this issue and is to sign the appropriate goodwill documentation required by General Motors. It is imperative for dealers to understand that by installing such devices, they are jeopardizing not only the warranty coverage, but also the performance and reliability of the customer's vehicle. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 09-06-04-026C > Aug > 10 > Engine/Transmission - Aftermarket Calibrations Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine/Transmission - Aftermarket Calibrations INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 09-06-04-026C Date: August 13, 2010 Subject: Identifying Non-GM (Aftermarket) Engine and Transmission Calibrations for V8 Gas Engines Using Tech 2(R) or Global Diagnostic System (GDS) Models: 2006-2011 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (Excluding Saab 9-7X) 2006-2009 HUMMER H2 2006-2010 HUMMER H3 Equipped with V8 Gas Powered Engines Only Attention: This bulletin applies to V8 gas powered engines ONLY. For Duramax(TM) diesel powered engines, refer to the latest version of Corporate Bulletin Number 08-06-04-006G. Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2011 model year. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 09-06-04-026A (Section 06 - Engine/Propulsion System). General Motors is identifying an increasing number of engine, transmission and catalytic converter part failures that are the result of non-GM (aftermarket) engine and transmission control calibrations being used. When alteration to the GM-released engine or transmission control calibrations occurs, it subjects powertrain and driveline components (engine , transmission, transfer case, driveshaft and rear axle) to stresses that were not tested by General Motors. It is because of these unknown stresses, and the potential to alter reliability, durability and emissions performance, that GM has adopted a policy that prevents any UNAUTHORIZED dealer warranty claim submissions to any remaining warranty coverage, to the powertrain and driveline components whenever the presence of a non-GM (aftermarket) calibration is confirmed - even if the non-GM control module calibration is subsequently removed. Warranty coverage is based on the equipment and calibrations that were released on the vehicle at time of sale, or subsequently updated by GM. That's because GM testing and validation matches the calibration to a host of criteria that is essential to assure reliability, durability and emissions performance over the life of the warranty coverage and beyond. Stresses resulting from calibrations different from those tested and released by GM can damage or weaken components, leading to poor performance and or shortened life. Additionally, non-GM (aftermarket) issued engine control modifications often do not meet the same emissions performance standards as GM issued calibrations. Depending on state statutes, individuals who install engine control module calibrations that put the vehicle outside the parameters of emissions certification standards may be subject to fines and/or penalties. This bulletin outlines a procedure to identify the presence of non-GM (aftermarket) calibrations. GM recommends performing this check whenever a hard part failure is seen on internal engine or transmission components, or before an engine assembly or transmission assembly is being replaced under warranty. It is also recommended that the engine calibration verification procedure be performed whenever diagnostics indicate that catalytic converter replacement is indicated. The PQC has a process to confirm the ECM/PCM calibration is GM issued. The PQC will require a picture of the engine calibration verification screen, as outlined in this bulletin, before authorizing any V8 gas powered engine replacement. If a non-GM calibration is found and verification has taken place through GM, the remaining powertrain and driveline warranty will be blocked and notated in GMVIS and the dealership will be notified. This block prevents any UNAUTHORIZED warranty claim submission. 1. Connect the Tech 2(R) to the vehicle. 2. Go to: Diagnostics and build the vehicle. 3. Select: Powertrain. 4. Select: Engine. 5. *Select: Engine Control Module or PCM. 6. *Select: Module ID Information or I/M Information System if the Module ID Information selection is not available. 7. *If "I/M information System" was selected, it may be necessary to select "Vehicle Information" in order to display the calibration information. ‹› If the CVN information is displayed as "N/A", it will be necessary to contact the TCSC to obtain the CVN information. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 09-06-04-026C > Aug > 10 > Engine/Transmission - Aftermarket Calibrations > Page 3232 8. Take a CLEAR digital picture of the Tech 2(R) Vehicle Information screen showing the engine Calibration IDs and Verification Numbers as shown above. Retain the printout information and the Tech 2(R) screen photograph with the repair order. Note All pictures must be sent as a.jpg file. 9. E-mail a copy of the picture to [email protected]. In the subject line of the e-mail include the phrase "V8 Cal" as well as the complete VIN and Dealer BAC. In the body of the e-mail, include the VIN, mileage, R.O. number and BAC. Include a brief description of the customer concern and cause of the concern. Note The dealer will receive an e-mail reply after the calibrations have been validated. The e-mail reply will advise the dealer if the calibrations are OEM. 10. Allow two hours for the PQC to verify the calibrations and set up the case details. ‹› If the PQC determines that the calibrations ARE aftermarket calibrations, DO NOT contact GM Technical Assistance to discuss warranty concerns on the aftermarket calibrations. ALL questions and concerns about warranty should be directed to the dealers Fixed Operations Manager (FOM), (Warranty Manager (WM) in Canada). 11. You may call the PQC two hours after submitting the e-mail for authorization to replace the assembly. This will provide them time to receive, review and set up a case on the request. Please be prepared to provide all the usual documentation that is normally required when requesting an assembly authorization from the PQC. Tech 2(R) Displaying All Zeroes for the Verification Numbers on the Calibration ID and Verification Number Screen If the Tech 2(R) that you are using displays all zeroes for the Verification Numbers as shown, then perform the following steps: 1. Update the Tech 2(R) with the latest software from TIS2WEB. 2. Turn OFF the ignition for 90 seconds. 3. Connect the Tech 2(R) to the vehicle. 4. Turn ON the ignition, and build the vehicle. Observe the Tech 2(R) Calibration ID and Verification Number screen for proper operation. ‹› If the Tech 2(R) screen still does not display properly, then turn OFF the ignition for 90 seconds again. Turn ON the ignition and observe the same screen for proper operation. Retrieving Calibrations From a Global A Vehicle This information applies to the 2010 Camaro and is typical of the procedure that will be used on Global A vehicles. 1. Turn OFF the ignition. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 09-06-04-026C > Aug > 10 > Engine/Transmission - Aftermarket Calibrations > Page 3233 2. Connect the MDI to the Data Link Connector (DLC) of the vehicle. Note Use the USB port to make the following MDI connection: 3. Connect the MDI to a PC or laptop that has been downloaded with the GDS application from TIS2WEB. Note At least one Diagnostic Package must be installed on the PC to perform diagnostics. If GDS was just installed, select: Add New Diagnostic Package and then select: a Diagnostic Package to download. 4. Click: On the GDS icon on the PC. 5. The Login Page will appear. 6. Select: A User. 7. The ID Screen will appear. 8. Select: The serial number of the MDI being used. 9. Select: Connect. 10. Verify that the system status is ready by observing for a flashing PC light icon on the MDI. 11. Select: Make, Model and Model Year, in order to build the vehicle. 12. Click: Upload VIN, to allow the VIN to be reported to the PC. 13. At: The Verification step, turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. 14. Select: Next Action. 15. The Home Page will appear. 16. Select: Next. 17. The Diagnostic Screen will appear. Note Due to vehicle build, software and RPO variations, GDS may ask for additional information in Step 18. 18. Select: Engine ID, if prompted. 19. Select: Module Diagnostics. 20. Select: ECM. 21. Select: ID Information. 22. The Diagnostics page will appear. Typical View of GDS Calibration History Screen Note GDS is capable of displaying up to 10 Calibration History events. 23. Select: Calibration History from the drop down menu in order to display the following items on the screen: - Calibration History Buffer - Number of Calibration History Events Stored - Calibration Part Number History - Calibration Verification Number History 24. Select: Screenshot. 25. Name and save the file in an appropriate folder. 26. Select : Print, and retain a copy of the screenshot with the repair order. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 09-06-04-026C > Aug > 10 > Engine/Transmission - Aftermarket Calibrations > Page 3234 Note All pictures must be sent as a.jpg file. 27. E-mail a copy of the screenshot to [email protected]. In the subject line of the e-mail include the phrase "V8 Cal" as well as the complete VIN and Dealer BAC. In the body of the e-mail, include the VIN, mileage, R.O. number and BAC. Include a brief description of the customer concern and cause of the concern. Note The dealer will receive an e-mail reply after the calibrations have been validated. The e-mail reply will advise the dealer if the calibrations are OEM. 28. Allow two hours for the PQC to verify the calibrations and set up the case details. ‹› If the PQC determines that the calibrations ARE aftermarket calibrations, DO NOT contact GM Technical Assistance to discuss warranty concerns on the aftermarket calibrations. ALL questions and concerns about warranty should be directed to the dealers Fixed Operations Manager (FOM), (Warranty Manager (WM) in Canada). 29. You may call the PQC two hours after submitting the e-mail for authorization to replace the assembly. This will provide them time to receive, review and set up a case on the request. Please be prepared to provide all the usual documentation that is normally required when requesting an assembly authorization from the PQC. Warranty Information - The Dealership Service Management must be involved in any situation that would justify the use of labor operation Z1111. - Notify the Fixed Operations Manager (FOM) (Warranty Manager (WM) in Canada) of the situation. - All claims will have to be routed to the FOM (WM in Canada) for approval. - Please refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 09-00-89-016, Labor Operation Z1111 - Suspected Tampering or Vehicle Modifications for important information. For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3235 Engine Control Module: Diagrams K20 Engine Control Module X1 (LAF) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3236 K20 Engine Control Module X1 (LF1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3237 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3238 K20 Engine Control Module X2 (LAF) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3239 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3240 K20 Engine Control Module X2 (LF1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3241 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3242 K20 Engine Control Module X3 (LAF) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3243 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3244 K20 Engine Control Module X3 (LF1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3245 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3246 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3247 Engine Control Module: Description and Operation Engine Control Module Description The engine control module (ECM) interacts with many emission related components and systems, and monitors the emission related components and systems for deterioration. OBD II diagnostics monitor the system performance and a diagnostic trouble code (DTC) sets if the system performance degrades. The malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) operation and the DTC storage are dictated by the DTC type. A DTC is ranked as a Type A or Type B if the DTC is emissions related. Type C is a non-emissions related DTC. The ECM is in the engine compartment. The ECM is the control center of the engine controls system. The ECM controls the following components: * The fuel injection system * The ignition system * The emission control systems * The on-board diagnostics * The A/C and fan systems * The throttle actuation control (TAC) system The ECM constantly monitors the information from various sensors and other inputs, and controls the systems that affect the vehicle performance and the emissions. The ECM also performs diagnostic tests on various parts of the system. The ECM can recognize operational problems and alert the driver via the MIL. When the ECM detects a malfunction, the ECM stores a DTC. The condition area is identified by the particular DTC that is set. This aids the technician in making repairs. ECM Function The engine control module (ECM) can supply 5 V or 12 V to the various sensors or switches. This is done through pull-up resistors to the regulated power supplies within the ECM. In some cases, even an ordinary shop voltmeter will not give an accurate reading because the resistance is too low. Therefore, a DMM with at least 10 Mohm input impedance is required in order to ensure accurate voltage readings. The ECM controls the output circuits by controlling the ground or the power feed circuit through the transistors or a device called an output driver module. EEPROM The electronically erasable programmable read only memory (EEPROM) is a permanent memory that is physically part of the engine control module (ECM). The EEPROM contains program and calibration information that the ECM needs in order to control the powertrain operation. Special equipment, as well as the correct program and calibration for the vehicle, are required in order to reprogram the ECM. Data Link Connector (DLC) The data link connector (DLC) is a 16-pin connector that provides the technician a means of accessing serial data for aid in the diagnosis. This connector allows the technician to use a scan tool in order to monitor the various serial data parameters, and display the DTC information. The DLC is located inside of the drivers compartment, underneath the dash. Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) The malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) is inside of the instrument panel cluster (IPC). The MIL is controlled by the engine control module (ECM) and illuminates when the ECM detects a condition that affects the vehicle emissions. ECM Service Precautions The engine control module (ECM), by design, can withstand the normal current draws that are associated with the vehicle operations. However, care must be used in order to avoid overloading any of these circuits. When testing for opens or shorts, do not ground or apply voltage to any of the ECM circuits unless the diagnostic procedure instructs you to do so. These circuits should only be tested with a DMM. Emissions Diagnosis For State I/M Programs This OBD II equipped vehicle is designed to diagnose any conditions that could lead to excessive levels of the following emissions: * Hydrocarbons (HC) * Carbon monoxide (CO) * Oxides of nitrogen (NOx) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3248 * Evaporative emission (EVAP) system losses Should this vehicles on-board diagnostic system (ECM) detect a condition that could result in excessive emissions, the ECM turns ON the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) and stores a DTC that is associated with the condition. Aftermarket (Add-On) Electrical And Vacuum Equipment Caution: Do not attach add-on vacuum operated equipment to this vehicle. The use of add-on vacuum equipment may result in damage to vehicle components or systems. Caution: Connect any add-on electrically operated equipment to the vehicle's electrical system at the battery (power and ground) in order to prevent damage to the vehicle. Aftermarket, add-on, electrical and vacuum equipment is defined as any equipment installed on a vehicle after leaving the factory that connects to the vehicles electrical or vacuum systems. No allowances have been made in the vehicle design for this type of equipment. Add-on electrical equipment, even when installed to these strict guidelines, may still cause the powertrain system to malfunction. This may also include equipment not connected to the vehicle electrical system, such as portable telephones and radios. Therefore, the first step in diagnosing any powertrain condition is to eliminate all of the aftermarket electrical equipment from the vehicle. After this is done, if the problem still exists, the problem may be diagnosed in the normal manner. Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) Damage Note: In order to prevent possible electrostatic discharge damage to the engine control module (ECM), DO NOT touch the connector pins on the ECM. The electronic components that are used in the control systems are often designed to carry very low voltage. The electronic components are susceptible to damage caused by electrostatic discharge. Less than 100 V of static electricity can cause damage to some electronic components. There are several ways for a person to become statically charged. The most common methods of charging are by friction and by induction. An example of charging by friction is a person sliding across a car seat. Charging by induction occurs when a person with well insulated shoes stands near a highly charged object and momentarily touches ground. Charges of the same polarity are drained off leaving the person highly charged with the opposite polarity. Static charges can cause damage, therefore, it is important to use care when handling and testing electronic components. Emissions Control Information Label The underhood Vehicle Emissions Control Information Label contains important emission specifications and setting procedures. In the upper right corner is the exhaust emission information. This identifies the year, the manufacturing division of the engine, the displacement of the engine in liters, the class of the vehicle, and type of fuel metering system. There is also an illustrated emission components and vacuum hose schematic. This label is located in the engine compartment of every General Motors vehicle. If the label has been removed, it can be ordered from GM service parts operations (GMSPO). Underhood Inspection Note: This inspection is very important and must be done carefully and thoroughly. Perform a careful underhood inspection when performing any diagnostic procedure or diagnosing the cause of an emission test failure. This can often lead to repairing a condition without further steps. Use the following guidelines when performing an inspection: * Inspect all of the vacuum hoses for correct routing, pinches, cuts, or disconnects. * Inspect any hoses that are difficult to see. * Inspect all of the wires in the engine compartment for the following conditions: - Burned or chafed spots - Pinched wires - Contact with sharp edges - Contact with hot exhaust manifolds Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3249 Engine Control Module: Service and Repair Engine Control Module Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3250 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Mode Switch > Component Information > Locations Engine Mode Switch: Locations Instrument Panel/Center Console Component Views Right Side of the Instrument Panel Components 1 - F107 Steering Wheel Air Bag 2 - P19H Speaker - Left Front Tweeter 3 - E1K Accent Lamp Right Lower Instrument Panel 4 - X80G Accessory Power Receptacle - Instrument Panel 5 - E8K Instrument Panel Courtesy Lamp - Right (LTZ or SLT) 6 - S112 Fuel Economy Mode Switch 7 E1S Accent Lamp - Console Cupholder Right 8 - S75 Traction Control Switch 9 - X80B Accessory Power Receptacle - Center Console 2 10 - E1J Accent Lamp - Left Lower Instrument Panel Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Mode Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 3254 Engine Mode Switch: Diagrams S112 Fuel Economy Mode Switch Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Locations Fuel Level Sensor: Locations Wheels/Vehicle Underbody Component Views Fuel System Components 1 - B46B Fuel Level Sensor - Secondary 2 - B150 Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor 3 - Q13 Evaporative Emission Vent Solenoid Valve 4 - B46A Fuel Level Sensor - Primary 5 - G12 Fuel Pump 6 - B47 Fuel Pressure Sensor Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Fuel Level Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions Electrical Schematic Symbols Electrical Schematic Symbols Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3260 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3261 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3262 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3263 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3264 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3265 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3266 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3267 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3268 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3269 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3270 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3271 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3272 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3273 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3274 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3275 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3276 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3277 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3278 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3279 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3280 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3281 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3282 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3283 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3284 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3285 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3286 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3287 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3288 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3289 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3290 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3291 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3292 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3293 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3294 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3295 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3296 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3297 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3298 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3299 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3300 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3301 General Electrical Diagnosis General Electrical Diagnosis Basic Knowledge Required Without a basic knowledge of electricity, it will be difficult to use the diagnostic procedures contained in the service manual. You should understand the basic theory of electricity, and know the meaning of voltage (V), current (A), and resistance (Ohms ). You should also be able to read and understand a wiring diagram, as well as understand what happens in a circuit with an open or a shorted wire. Vehicle Zoning Strategy Vehicle Zoning Strategy All grounds, in-line connectors, and splices have identifying numbers that correspond to where they are located in the vehicle. The following table explains the numbering system. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3302 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3303 Fuel Level Sensor: Diagnostic Aids Arrows and Symbols Arrows and Symbols This service manual uses various symbols in order to describe different service operations. 1 - Front of Vehicle 2 - View Detail 2 - View Detail 3 - Ambient Air Mixed with Another Gas or Indicate Temperature Change 4 - Motion or Direction 5 - View Angle 6 - Dimension (1:2) 7 Ambient/Clean Air Flow or Cool Air Flow 8 - Lubrication Point - Oil or Fluid 9 - Task Related 10 Sectioning (1:3) 11 - Gas Other Than Ambient Air or Hot Air Flow 12 - Lubrication Point - Grease or Jelly 13 - Multidirectional Arrow Decimal and Metric Equivalents Decimal and Metric Equivalents Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3304 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3305 Checking Aftermarket Accessories Checking Aftermarket Accessories Warning: Refer to SIR Warning (See: Restraint Systems/Service Precautions/SIR Warning). Caution: The OBD II symbol is used on the circuit diagrams in order to alert the technician that the circuit is essential for proper OBD II emission control circuit operation. Any circuit which fails and causes the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) to turn ON, or causes emissions-related component damage, is identified as an OBD II circuit. Do not connect aftermarket accessories into the following circuits: * SIR circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the SIR symbol. * OBD II circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the OBD II symbol. Always check for aftermarket accessories (non-OEM) as the first step in diagnosing electrical problems. If the vehicle is so equipped, disconnect the system to verify that these add-on accessories are not the cause of the problems. Possible causes of vehicle problems related to aftermarket accessories include: * Power feeds connected to points other than the battery * Antenna location * Transceiver wiring located too close to vehicle electronic modules or wiring * Poor shielding or poor connectors on antenna feed line * Check for recent service bulletins detailing installation guidelines for aftermarket accessories. Circuit Testing Circuit Testing The Circuit Testing section contains the following diagnostic testing information. Using this information along with the diagnostic procedures will identify the cause of the electrical malfunction. * Using Connector Test Adapters (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Using Connector Test Adapters) * Probing Electrical Connectors (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Probing Electrical Connectors) * Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3306 Procedures/Circuit Testing/Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter) * Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp) * Using Fused Jumper Wires (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Using Fused Jumper Wires) * Measuring Voltage (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Measuring Voltage) * Measuring Voltage Drop (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Measuring Voltage Drop) * Measuring Frequency (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Measuring Frequency) * Testing Ground and Low Reference Circuits (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Testing Ground and Low Reference Circuits) * Testing for Continuity (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Continuity) * Testing for Short to Ground (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Short to Ground) * Testing for a Short to Voltage (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for a Short to Voltage) * Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections) * Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions) * Testing for Electrical Intermittents (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Electrical Intermittents) * Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure) * Circuit Protection - Fuses (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Circuit Protection - Fuses) * Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers) * Circuit Protection - Fusible Links (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Circuit Protection - Fusible Links) Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp Special Tools EL-35616-200 - Test Light - Probe Kit For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test Probe Caution). A test lamp can simply and quickly test a low impedance circuit for voltage. A Digital Multimeter (DMM) should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present if the impedance is low enough, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. In other words, if there is not enough current, the test lamp will not illuminate even though voltage is present. The EL-35616-200 - kit is Micro-Pack compatible and comprised of a 12-volt light bulb with an attached pair of leads. To properly operate this tool use the following procedures. When testing for voltage: 1. Attach one lead to ground. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is voltage at the point being tested. When testing for ground: 1. Attach one lead to battery positive voltage. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where ground should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is ground at the point being tested. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3307 Testing for a Short to Voltage Testing for a Short to Voltage Special Tools EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM) For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test Probe Caution). The following procedure tests for a short to voltage in a circuit. 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Set the rotary dial of the Digital Multimeter (DMM) to the V (DC) position. 4. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. Turn ON the ignition and operate all accessories. 7. If the voltage measured is greater than 1 V, there is a short to voltage in the circuit. Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions Special Tools J-25070 - Heat Gun For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Many intermittent open or shorted circuits are affected by harness/connector movement that is caused by vibration, engine torque, bumps/rough pavement, etc. In order to duplicate the customer's concern, it may be necessary to manipulate the wiring harness if the malfunction appears to be vibration related. Manipulation of a circuit can consist of a wide variety of actions, including: * Wiggling the harness * Disconnecting a connector and reconnecting * Stressing the mechanical connection of a connector * Pulling on the harness or wire in order to identify a separation/break inside the insulation * Relocating a harness or wires All these actions should be performed with some goal in mind. For instance, with a scan tool connected, wiggling the wires may uncover a faulty input to the control module. The snapshot option would be appropriate here. Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure). Another option is, with the component commanded ON and OFF by the scan tool, move related connectors and wiring and observe the component operation. With the engine running, move related connectors and wiring while monitoring engine operation. If harness or connector movement affects the data displayed, component/system operation, or engine operation, inspect and repair the harness/connections as necessary. You may need to load the vehicle in order to duplicate the concern. This may require the use of weights, floor jacks, jackstands, frame machines, etc. In these cases you are attempting to duplicate the concern by manipulating the suspension or frame. This method is useful in finding harnesses that are too short and their connectors pull apart enough to cause a poor connection. A DMM set to Peak Min/Max mode and connected to the suspect circuit while testing can yield desirable results. Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Electrical Intermittents). Certainly, using the senses of sight, smell, and hearing while manipulating the circuit can provide good results as well. There may be instances where circuit manipulation alone will not meet the required criteria for the fault condition to appear. In such cases it may be necessary to expose the suspect circuit to other conditions while manipulating the harness. Such conditions would include high moisture conditions, along with exceptionally high or low temperatures. The following discusses how to expose the circuit to these kinds of conditions. Salt Water Spray Some compounds possess the ability to conduct electricity when dissolved in water such as ordinary salt. By mixing table salt with water in sufficient Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3308 quantities, you can enhance the conductive properties of water so that any circuit which may be sensitive to moisture will more readily fail when liberally sprayed with this mixture. Mixing 0.35L (12 oz) of water with approximately 1 tablespoon of salt will yield a salt solution of 5 percent. Fill a normal spray bottle with this mixture. This mixture is sufficient to enhance the water's own conductivity. This may cause the circuit to fail more easily when sprayed. Once the mixture is completed, spray the suspect area liberally with the solution. Then, while monitoring either a scan tool or DMM, manipulate the harness as discussed previously. High Temperature Conditions If the complaint tends to be heat related, you can simulate the condition using the J-25070 - heat gun. Using the heat gun, you can heat up the suspected area or component. Manipulate the harnesses under high temperature conditions while monitoring the scan tool or DMM to locate the fault condition. The high temperature condition may be achieved simply by test driving the vehicle at normal operating temperature. If a heat gun is unavailable, consider this option to enhance your diagnosis. This option does not allow for the same control, however. Low Temperature Conditions Depending on the nature of the fault condition, placing a fan in front of the vehicle while the vehicle is in the shade can have the desired effect. If this is unsuccessful, use local cooling treatments such as ice or a venturi type nozzle (one that provides hot or cold air). This type of tool is capable of producing air stream temperatures down to -18°C (0°F) from one end and +71°C (160°F) from the other. This is ideally suited for localized cooling needs. Once the vehicle, component, or harness has been sufficiently cooled, manipulate the harness or components in an effort to duplicate the concern. Duplicating Failure Conditions * If none of the previous tests are successful, attempt to duplicate and/or capture the failure conditions. * Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, where applicable, contains the conditions that were present when the DTC set. 1. Review and record Freeze Frame/Failure Records data. 2. Clear the DTCs using the scan tool. 3. Turn the key to OFF and wait 15 seconds. 4. Operate the vehicle under the same conditions that were noted in Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, as closely as possible. The vehicle must also be operating within the Conditions for Running the DTC. Refer to Conditions for Running the DTC in the supporting text if a DTC is being diagnosed. 5. Monitor DTC Status for the DTC being tested. The scan tool will indicate Ran, when the enabling conditions have been satisfied long enough for the DTC to run. The scan tool will also indicate whether the DTC passed or failed. * An alternate method is to drive the vehicle with the DMM connected to a suspected circuit. An abnormal reading on the DMM when the concern occurs, may help you locate the concern. Measuring Frequency Measuring Frequency Special Tools EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM) For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test Probe Caution). The following procedure determines the frequency of a signal. Note: Connecting the Digital Multimeter (DMM) to the circuit before pressing the Hz button will allow the DMM to autorange to an appropriate range. 1. Apply power to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (AC) position. 3. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3309 5. Press the Hz button on the DMM. 6. The DMM will display the frequency measured. Measuring Voltage Measuring Voltage Special Tools EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM) For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test Probe Caution). The following procedure measures the voltage at a selected point in a circuit. 1. Disconnect the electrical harness connector for the circuit being tested, if necessary. 2. Enable the circuit and/or system being tested. Use the following methods: * Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. * Turn ON the engine. * Turn ON the circuit and/or system with a scan tool in Output Controls. * Turn ON the switch for the circuit and/or system being tested. 3. Select the V (AC) or V (DC) position on the Digital Multimeter (DMM). 4. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the point of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. The DMM displays the voltage measured at that point. Measuring Voltage Drop Measuring Voltage Drop Special Tools EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM) For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test Probe Caution). The following procedure determines the difference in voltage potential between 2 points. 1. Set the rotary dial of the Digital Multimeter (DMM) to the V (DC) position. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3310 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to one point of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to the other point of the circuit. 4. Operate the circuit. 5. The DMM displays the difference in voltage between the 2 points. Probing Electrical Connectors Probing Electrical Connectors Note: Always be sure to reinstall the connector position assurance (CPA) and terminal position assurance (TPA) when reconnecting connectors or replacing terminals. Front probe Disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the mating side (front) of the connector. Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test Probe Caution). Note: When probing female 0.64 terminals, it is important to use the correct adapter. There have been some revisions to the test adapter for 0.64 terminals. The proper adapter for 0.64 terminals is the EL-35616-64B which has a gold terminal and a black wire between the base and tip. Failure to use the proper test adapter may result in damage to the terminal being tested and improper diagnosis. Note: The proper adapter for probing the terminals for fuses, relays, or diodes in an electrical center is EL-35616-35. Using any other tool or adapter may damage the terminal being tested. Refer to the following table as a guide in selecting the correct test adapter for front probing connectors: Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3311 Backprobe Note: * Backprobe connector terminals only when specifically required in diagnostic procedures. * Do not backprobe a sealed (Weather Pack(R)) connector, less than a 280 series Metri-Pack connector, a Micro-Pack connector, or a flat wire (dock and lock) connector. * Backprobing can be a source of damage to connector terminals. Use care in order to avoid deforming the terminal, either by forcing the test probe too far into the cavity or by using too large of a test probe. * After backprobing any connector, inspect for terminal damage. If terminal damage is suspected, test for proper terminal contact. Do not disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the harness side (back) of the connector. Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure Using Snapshots in Global Diagnostic System (GDS) Overview Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3312 A snapshot is a recording of what a control module on the vehicle was receiving for information while the snapshot is being made. A snapshot may be used to analyze the data during the time a vehicle condition is current. This allows you to concentrate on making the condition occur, rather than trying to view all the data in anticipation of the fault. To record a snapshot in GDS, select, Record Snapshot, from the options at the top right portion of any of the various pages that allow snapshots to be taken (e.g. Data Display, Control Functions, etc.). When you are finished recording, select, Stop Snapshot recording. The snapshot will now be available for replay. Snapshot Replay The Snapshot Replay function allows reviews of previously recorded vehicle snapshot data. This information can be used in analysis of vehicle problems and detection of trigger error conditions. The graph function can be used to compare parameters to see if a component is functioning properly. Recorded snapshots can be selected for viewing by the following three methods: * Selecting a snapshot file from the Vehicle Home Page and clicking on the Review selection. * Double clicking on the selected snapshot from the Vehicle Home Page. * Entering the Tools selection from the Menu selection and selecting Snapshot replay. Next, open the Snapshot Manager. Double click on the snapshot file you wish to view or click on the Load Snapshot selection and select a snapshot file. Regardless of selection method, a File Loaded pop-up window will be displayed from the Snapshot Replay screen. Select OK from the pop-up window. Snapshot Play Functions There are several snapshot play functions that are used to replay recorded snapshots * The Play function is used to play the snapshot forward by clicking on this selection. A marker will move across the screen when this selection is used. All selections in this area turn grey when they are active. * The Pause function is used to pause play of the snapshot. When this selection is clicked a second time the snapshot will start playing where it left off. * The Stop function is used to stop playing the snapshot. The snapshot will start from the beginning, if Play is selected after using the Stop function. Time Control Time control is used to control the snapshot replay. This function allows selection of a specific time frame, display of different views, and control of display speed. The following functions can be selected directly under Time Control. * The Bookmark selection allows you to add a specific comment in the current display and return to this point in the future. When this option is selected, a pop-up window is displayed. Enter a bookmark name and select OK. * The Note Pad can be selected to add comments to the snapshot replay file at the current point of time. When this option is selected, a pop-up window is displayed. Enter a comment for the snapshot file and select OK. * The Load Snapshot (blue folder) opens a snapshot file and makes it ready for further analysis. This function is also available by clicking on an available snapshot file from the Snapshot Manager. * The Down Arrow displays all Time Control options when selected. Individual options can also be selected by clicking on the item you want. * The Snapshot Display Speed can be controlled by selecting this option. Slow speeds of 1/8X, 1/4X, and 1/2X can be selected. The real time speed can also be selected at 1. Faster speeds of 2X, 4X, and 8X can also be obtained by using this selection. View Selections Each View Selection provides a different way of displaying vehicle data for analysis. The following functions can be selected under Available Views: Note: The parameter name will be shown in the original language used for capture if no translation is available for the name. * Parameter List View - Displays incoming information from the snapshot file. The current value of the parameters is displayed on the screen. * Log View - Contains all the information from the snapshot file. All parameter values are listed in the order they were recorded. Specific parameters can be added or removed from a watchlist by clicking on the appropriate item. * State View - Shows the values of all parameters in a specific time frame. These values can be used for comparison with the trigger view. * Trigger View - Displays all system and user defined triggers. This function can be used when there is a combination of factors involved in a diagnostic problem. When a Trigger condition is met a caution triangle will be displayed on the screen. Triggers: * Load Triggers - Allows you to load a file containing trigger definitions. * Save Triggers - Allows you to save the trigger to your computer's hard drive. * Remove Trigger - Allows you to remove the current trigger. It will no longer be present. * Edit Trigger - Displays a pop-up window where you can modify the limits and parameters contained within a trigger. * Adds Trigger - Displays a pop-up window to configure a trigger. * DTC View - After the Play function is selected and this option is selected this function opens the list of recorded DTCs. * Line Graph View - Displays data that can be visualized against the time-axis. From this view, specific parameters can be selected for graphing by Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3313 checking the box under Selected. At the bottom of the graph there are four functions Zoom In (increase size), Zoom Out (decrease size), Bookmarks, and Pause Scrolling. Each of these functions can be accessed by clicking on them. Testing for Continuity Testing for Continuity Special Tools EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM) For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test Probe Caution). The following procedures verify good continuity in a circuit. With a Digital Multimeter (DMM) 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the Ohms position. 2. Disconnect the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 3. Disconnect the load. 4. Press the MIN MAX button on the DMM. 5. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 6. Connect the other lead of the DMM to the other end of the circuit. 7. If the DMM displays low or no resistance, the circuit has good continuity. With a Test Lamp Note: Only use the test lamp procedure on low impedance power and ground circuits. 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect one lead of the test lamp to one end of the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 5. Connect the other end of the circuit to ground. 6. If the test lamp illuminates (full intensity), then the circuit has good continuity. Testing for Electrical Intermittents Testing for Electrical Intermittents Special Tools EL-39200 Digital Multimeter For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Perform the following procedures while wiggling the harness from side to side. Continue this at convenient points (about 6 inches apart) while watching the test equipment. * Testing for Short to Ground (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Short to Ground) * Testing for Continuity (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Continuity) * Testing for a Short to Voltage (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for a Short to Voltage) If the fault is not identified, perform the procedure below using the MIN MAX feature on the EL-39200 DMM. This feature allows you to manipulate the circuit without having to watch the EL-39200. The EL-39200 will generate an audible tone when a change is detected. Note: The EL-39200 must be used in order to perform the following procedure since the EL-39200 can monitor current, resistance or voltage while recording the minimum (MIN), and maximum (MAX) values measured. 1. Connect the EL-39200 to both sides of a suspected connector (still connected), or from one end of a suspected circuit to the other. Refer to Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3314 Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter) for information on connecting the EL-39200 to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the EL-39200 to the V (AC) or V (DC) position. 3. Press the range button of the EL-39200 in order to select the desired voltage range. 4. Press the MIN MAX button of the EL-39200. The EL-39200 displays 100 ms RECORD and emits an audible tone (beep). Note: The 100 ms RECORD mode is the length of time an input must stay at a new value in order to record the full change. 5. Simulate the condition that is potentially causing the intermittent connection, either by wiggling the connections or the wiring, test driving, or performing other operations. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions). 6. Listen for the audible Min Max Alert which indicates that a new minimum or maximum value has been recorded. 7. Press the MIN MAX button once in order to display the MAX value and note the value. 8. Press the MIN MAX button again in order to display the MIN value and note the value. 9. Determine the difference between the MIN and MAX values. * If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is 1 V or greater an intermittent open or high resistance condition exists. Repair the condition as necessary. * If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is less than 1 V, an intermittent open or high resistance condition does not exist. Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections Special Tools EL-35616 Terminal Test Probe Kit For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). When the condition is not currently present, but is indicated in DTC history, the cause may be intermittent. An intermittent may also be the cause when there is a customer complaint, but the symptom cannot be duplicated. Refer to the Symptom Table of the system that is suspect of causing the condition before trying to locate an intermittent condition. Most intermittent conditions are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. Inspect for the following items: * Wiring broken inside the insulation * Poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector * Poor terminal to wire connection-Some conditions which fall under this description are poor crimps, poor solder joints, crimping over the wire insulation rather than the wire itself, and corrosion in the wire to terminal contact area, etc. * Pierced or damaged insulation can allow moisture to enter the wiring causing corrosion. The conductor can corrode inside the insulation, with little visible evidence. Look for swollen and stiff sections of wire in the suspect circuits. * Wiring which has been pinched, cut, or its insulation rubbed through may cause an intermittent open or short as the bare area touches other wiring or parts of the vehicle. * Wiring that comes in contact with hot or exhaust components * Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions) in order to duplicate the conditions required, in order to verify the customer concern. * Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Electrical Intermittents) for test procedures to detect intermittent open, high resistance, short to ground, and short to voltage conditions. * Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure) for advanced intermittent diagnosis and Vehicle Data Recorder operation. Testing for Terminal Fretting Some intermittent conditions can be caused by wire terminal fretting corrosion. Fretting corrosion is a build-up of insulating, oxidized wear debris that can form when there is a small motion between electrical contacts. The oxidized wear debris can pile up enough at the electrical contact spots that the electrical resistance across the connection increases. Movement between the contacting surfaces as small as 10 to 100 microns can cause fretting. To put this in perspective, a sheet of paper is about 100 microns thick, so fretting motion is small and hard to see. Vibration and thermal expansion/contraction are the main sources that create fretting motion. Since vehicles vibrate and can experience large temperature swings, they are a good source for fretting motion. Tin, copper, nickel, and iron surfaces are all susceptible to fretting corrosion. Fretting corrosion can be difficult to see but it looks like small, dark smudges on the terminals contact surface. To correct a fretting condition disconnect the suspect connector and add Nyogel lubricant 760G (dielectric grease) to both sides of the connector Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3315 terminals. Then reconnect the connector and wipe away any excess lubricant. This will correct the additional terminal contact resistance due to the terminal fretting corrosion. Testing for Proper Terminal Contact It is important to test terminal contact at the component and any inline connectors before replacing a suspect component. Mating terminals must be inspected to ensure good terminal contact. A poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector may be the result of contamination or deformation. Contamination may be caused by the connector halves being improperly connected. A missing or damaged connector seal, damage to the connector itself, or exposing the terminals to moisture and dirt can also cause contamination. Contamination, usually in the underhood or underbody connectors, leads to terminal corrosion, causing an open circuit or intermittently open circuit. Deformation is caused by probing the mating side of a connector terminal without the proper adapter. Always use the EL-35616 when probing connectors. Other causes of terminal deformation are improperly joining the connector halves, or repeatedly separating and joining the connector halves. Deformation, usually to the female terminal contact tang, can result in poor terminal contact causing an open or intermittently open circuit. Testing for Proper Terminal Contact in Bussed Electrical Centers It is very important to use the correct test adapter when testing for proper terminal contact of fuses and relays in a bussed electrical center. Use EL-35616-35 to test for proper terminal contact. Failure to use EL-35616-35 can result in improper diagnosis of the bussed electrical center. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact: 1. Separate the connector halves. 2. Visually inspect the connector halves for contamination. Contamination may result in a white or green build-up within the connector body or between terminals. This causes high terminal resistance, intermittent contact, or an open circuit. An underhood or underbody connector that shows signs of contamination should be replaced in its entirety: terminals, seals, and connector body. 3. Using an equivalent male terminal / terminated lead, verify that the retention force is significantly different between a known good terminal and the suspect terminal. Replace the female terminal in question. Flat Wire (Dock and Lock) Connectors There are no serviceable parts for flat wire (dock and lock) connectors on the harness side or the component side. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact: 1. Remove the component in question. 2. Visually inspect each side of the connector for signs of contamination. Avoid touching either side of the connector as oil from your skin may be a source of contamination as well. 3. Visually inspect the terminal bearing surfaces of the flat wire circuits for splits, cracks, or other imperfections that could cause poor terminal contact. Visually inspect the component side connector to ensure that all of the terminals are uniform and free of damage or deformation. 4. Insert the appropriate adapter from the on the flat wire harness connector in order to test the circuit in question. Control Module/Component Voltage and Grounds Poor voltage or ground connections can cause widely varying symptoms. * Test all control module voltage supply circuits. Many vehicles have multiple circuits supplying voltage to a control module. Other components in the system may have separate voltage supply circuits that may also need to be tested. Inspect connections at the module/component connectors, fuses, and any intermediate connections between the voltage source and the module/component. A test lamp or a DMM may indicate that voltage is present, but neither tests the ability of the circuit to carry sufficient current. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. Refer to Circuit Testing (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Circuit Testing) and Power Distribution Schematics (See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Starting and Charging/Power and Ground Distribution/System Diagram/Power Distribution Schematics). * Test all control module ground and system ground circuits. The control module may have multiple ground circuits. Other components in the system may have separate grounds that may also need to be tested. Inspect grounds for clean and tight connections at the grounding point. Inspect the connections at the component and in splice packs, where applicable. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. Refer to Circuit Testing (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Circuit Testing) and Ground Distribution Schematics (See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Starting and Charging/Power and Ground Distribution/System Diagram/Ground Distribution Schematics). Temperature Sensitivity * An intermittent condition may occur when a component/connection reaches normal operating temperature. The condition may occur only when the component/connection is cold, or only when the component/connection is hot. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3316 * Freeze Frame, Failure Records, Snapshot, or Vehicle Data Recorder data may help with this type of intermittent condition, where applicable. * If the intermittent is related to heat, review the data for a relationship with the following: - High ambient temperatures - Underhood/engine generated heat - Circuit generated heat due to a poor connection, or high electrical load - Higher than normal load conditions, towing, etc. * If the intermittent is related to cold, review the data for the following: - Low ambient temperatures-In extremely low temperatures, ice may form in a connection or component. Inspect for water intrusion. - The condition only occurs on a cold start. - The condition goes away when the vehicle warms up. * Information from the customer may help to determine if the trouble follows a pattern that is temperature related. * If temperature is suspected of causing an intermittent fault condition, attempt to duplicate the condition. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions) in order to duplicate the conditions required. Electromagnetic Interference and Electrical Noise Some electrical components/circuits are sensitive to electromagnetic interference or other types of electrical noise. Inspect for the following conditions: * A misrouted harness that is too close to high voltage/high current devices such as secondary ignition components, motors, generator etc.-These components may induce electrical noise on a circuit that could interfere with normal circuit operation. * Electrical system interference caused by a malfunctioning relay, or a control module driven solenoid or switch-These conditions can cause a sharp electrical surge. Normally, the condition will occur when the malfunctioning component is operating. * Improper installation of non-factory or aftermarket add on accessories such as lights, 2-way radios, amplifiers, electric motors, remote starters, alarm systems, cell phones, etc.-These accessories may lead to interference while in use, but do not fail when the accessories are not in use. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Checking Aftermarket Accessories). * Test for an open diode across the A/C compressor clutch and for other open diodes. Some relays may contain a clamping diode. * The generator may be allowing AC noise into the electrical system. Incorrect Control Module * There are only a few situations where reprogramming a control module is appropriate: - A new service control module is installed. - A control module from another vehicle is installed. - Revised software/calibration files have been released for this vehicle. Note: DO NOT re-program the control module with the SAME software/calibration files that are already present in the control module. This is not an effective repair for any type of concern. * Verify that the control module contains the correct software/calibration. If incorrect programming is found, reprogram the control module with the most current software/calibration. Refer to Control Module References (See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning) for replacement, setup, and programming. Testing for Short to Ground Testing for Short to Ground Special Tools * EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM) * EL 35616-200 - Test Light-Probe Kit For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test Probe Caution). The following procedures test for a short to ground in a circuit. With a Digital Multimeter (DMM) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3317 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the Ohms position. 4. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the other lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. If the DMM does NOT display infinite resistance (OL), there is a short to ground in the circuit. With a Test Lamp 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect one lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to one end of the circuit to be tested. 5. If the test lamp illuminates, there is a short to ground in the circuit. Fuse Powering Several Loads 1. Review the system schematic and locate the fuse that is open. 2. Open the first connector or switch leading from the fuse to each load. 3. Connect a DMM across the fuse terminals (be sure that the fuse is powered). * When the DMM displays voltage the short is in the wiring leading to the first connector or switch. * If the DMM does not display voltage refer to the next step. 4. Close each connector or switch until the DMM displays voltage in order to find which circuit is shorted. Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter Special Tools EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM) For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test Probe Caution). Digital Multimeter (DMM) Basic Requirements Service information is validated using digital multimeters that meet or exceed the following requirements. Using a multimeter that does not meet these basic requirements may give inaccurate readings which could lead to an incorrect diagnosis. Display and Settings 1. Four digits displayed 2. Voltage, amperage, resistance, frequency, diode test settings, and min-max function 3. Display positive and negative values Voltage 1. Have at least 10 Mohm input impedance 2. Test a DC voltage range of 0.1-1000 V. 3. Test an AC voltage range of 0.1-1000 V. Amperage 1. Test a DC amperage range of 0.1µA-10 A. 2. Test an AC amperage range of 0.1µA-10 A. Resistance Test a resistance range of 0.1 ohm-40 Mohm and displays infinite for a value greater than 40 Mohm (O.L. (Over-load)) Frequency Test for a frequency range of 0.5 HZ-199 K HZ Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3318 Diode Test 1. Apply at least 1 mA when performing the diode bias test 2. Display the break over voltage drop (0-3 V) of a forward biased diode 3. Display infinite (O.L. (Over-load)) when a diode is reverse biased Min-Max Readings 1. Can update at a 1 ms sample rate 2. Saves and displays minimum and maximum values Note: Circuits which include any solid state control modules, such as the engine control module (ECM), should only be tested with a 10 MOhms or higher impedance digital multimeter such as the EL-39200. The EL-39200 instruction manual is a good source of information and should be read thoroughly upon receipt of the DMM as well as kept on hand for future reference. A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present if the impedance is low enough, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. In other words, if there is not enough current, the test lamp will not illuminate even though voltage is present. The ohmmeter function on a DMM shows how much resistance exists between 2 points along a circuit. Low resistance in a circuit means good continuity. Note: Disconnect the power feed from the suspect circuit when measuring resistance with a DMM. This prevents incorrect readings. DMMs apply such a small voltage to measure resistance that the presence of voltages can upset a resistance reading. Diodes and solid state components in a circuit can cause a DMM to display a false reading. To find out if a component is affecting a measurement take a reading once, then reverse the leads and take a second reading. If the readings differ the solid state component is affecting the measurement. Following are examples of the various methods of connecting the DMM to the circuit to be tested: * Probe both ends of the connector and either hold the leads in place while manipulating the connector or tape the leads to the harness for continuous monitoring while you perform other operations or test driving. Refer to Probing Electrical Connectors (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Probing Electrical Connectors). * Disconnect the harness at both ends of the suspected circuit where it connects either to a component or to other harnesses. * If the system that is being diagnosed has a specified pinout or breakout box, it may be used in order to simplify connecting the DMM to the circuit or for testing multiple circuits quickly. Using Connector Test Adapters Using Connector Test Adapters Special Tools EL 35616 - Terminal Test Probe Kit For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Caution: Do not insert test equipment probes (DMM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the EL-38125-580 GM Approved Terminal Release Tool Kit in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the EL-38125-580 GM Approved Terminal Release Tool Kit , ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the EL-38125-580 GM Approved Terminal Release Tool Kit label on the inside of the EL-38125-580 GM Approved Terminal Release Tool Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Using Fused Jumper Wires Using Fused Jumper Wires Special Tools J 36169-A Fused Jumper Wire Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3319 Note: A fused jumper may not protect solid state components from being damaged. The J 36169-A includes small clamp connectors that provide adaptation to most connectors without damage. This fused jumper wire is supplied with a 20-A fuse which may not be suitable for some circuits. Do not use a fuse with a higher rating than the fuse that protects the circuit being tested. AFL/EPC Connectors AFL/EPC Connectors Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. 1. For connectors with a bolt in the dress cover, turn the bolt counterclockwise to remove the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3320 2. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the top of the wire dress cover. Slide the CPA forward. 3. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3321 View showing depressing of the lever lock release tab. View of connector in released position. 4. Disconnect the connector from the component. 5. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the dress cover. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs and remove the dress cover. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3322 6. Release the rear lower half of the wiredress cover. 7. Release the tabs that are holding the wiredress cover to the connector body. 8. Remove the nose piece by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the slots on both ends of the connector body. Gently pry the nose piece out of the connector. J 38125-216 can also be used to remove the nose piece. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3323 9. Use the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by lifting the terminal retaining tabs on the inside of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Bosch Connectors (BSK) Bosch Connectors (BSK) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3324 Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 3. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 4. Insert the J 38125-561 tool into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 5. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Bosch Connectors (ECM) Bosch Connectors (ECM) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3325 1. Locate the assist lever on the top of the connector. Move the assist lever to the forward position. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3326 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the connector. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the locking tabs and remove the dress cover. 4. The terminal positive assurance (TPA) is located in the front of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3327 5. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove TPA from the connector. 6. Use the J 38125-213 or the J 38125-556 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3328 Note: Ensure that the dress cover and connector body are both in the released position before reassembling. Failure to do so may cause damage to the connector and component. Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Bosch Connectors (0.64) Bosch Connectors (0.64) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While pressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock until the lever is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Pull the rubber boot that covers the wires back to expose the end of the connector dress cover. 4. Place the connector locking lever in the center of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3329 5. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs that are on the wire end of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover and connector body and pry up. 6. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs located on the opposite side of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover at the connector end and pry up. 7. Remove the dress cover. 8. Cut the tie wrap on the wire bundle. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3330 9. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting a small flat-bladed tool into the small slot in the end of the slider and pushing on the TPA until it comes out of the connector. When the TPA exits the opposite side of the connector, gasp the TPA and pull it completely out of the connector. 10. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 11. Insert the J 38125-560 into the 2 triangular cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 12. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Terminal Replacement Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3331 1. Prior to installation the terminal must be aligned so the (1) coding lugs align with the (2) coding grooves on the connector. 2. Once the terminal is aligned, slide the terminal into the cavity until the retainer has engaged in the cavity of the connector. 3. Slide the TPA in the connector body and seat it using a small flat bladed tool. The TPA is seated when it is flush with the contact housing. 4. Secure the wires to the connector body using a tie wrap and replace the dress cover and grommet. Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Pull out the slider on the connector position assurance (CPA) until it is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3332 5. Insert the J 38125-557 into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Connector Position Assurance Locks Connector Position Assurance Locks The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of the connector. CPAs are used in various connectors throughout the vehicle. CPAs are also used in all SIR system electrical connectors. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals, of the connector. Connector Repairs Connector Repairs Connector Repairs contains a list of all connector repairs. The connector repairs are listed by the connector manufacturer and then by connector type. If the technician cannot identify the manufacturer of the connector, refer to Identifying Connectors below. Knowing the connector manufacturer will assist in finding the correct connector repair from the following list: * Connector Position Assurance Locks (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Connector Position Assurance Locks) * Terminal Position Assurance Locks (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Terminal Position Assurance Locks) * AFL/EPC Connectors (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/AFL/EPC Connectors) * Bosch Connectors (BSK) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Bosch Connectors (BSK))Bosch Connectors (0.64) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Bosch Connectors (0.64))Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT))Bosch Connectors (ECM) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Bosch Connectors (ECM)) * Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack))Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Push to Seat))Delphi Connectors Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3333 (Pull To Seat) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Pull to Seat))Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W))Delphi Connectors (Micro.64) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Micro .64))Delphi Connectors (12-Way) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (12-Way))Delphi Connectors (Steering Gear) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Steering Gear)) * FCI Connectors (Lever Lock) (See: General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/FCI Connectors (Lever Lock))FCI Connectors (SIR) (See: General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/FCI (SIR)) * FEP Connectors (Steering Gear) (See: General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/FEP Connectors (Steering Gear)) * JST Connectors (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/JST Connectors) * Kostal Connectors (Glow Plug Control Module) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Kostal Connectors (Glow Plug Control Module))Kostal Connectors (Transmission) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Kostal Connectors (Transmission)) * Molex Connectors (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Molex Connectors) * Sumitomo Connectors (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Sumitomo Connectors) * Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way))Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor))Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap))Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way))Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module)) * Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Yazaki Connectors (2-Way))Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Yazaki Connectors (16-Way)) * Repairing Connector Terminals (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Repairing Connector Terminals) Connector Anatomy 1 - Connector Positive Assurance (CPA) 2 - Assist Lever 3 - Wiredress Cover 4 - Seal Strain/Relief Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3334 5 - Slide Left Hand 6 - Slide Right Hand 7 - Terminal Positive Assurance (TPA) 8 - Terminal Positive Assurance (TPA) 9 - Connector Seal 10 - Connector Housing 11 - Inner Connector Identifying Connectors Knowing the connector manufacturer is helpful when trying to locating the correct connector repair procedure. There are many different connector designs used on GM vehicles and it is sometimes difficult to identify the connector manufacturer. The information in this document should help with the identification of connector manufactures. The following connector manufacturers make most of the connectors found in GM vehicles: * AFL/EPC (Alcoa Fujikura Ltd./Engineered Plastics Components) * Bosch * Delphi * FCI (Framatome Connectors International) * JAE (Japan Aviation Electronics) * JST (Japan Solderless Terminals) * Kostel * Molex * Sumitomo * Tyco/AMP * Yazaki Identifying the manufacturer of a connector is often difficult. When trying to determine the manufacturer of a connector, look for specific identifying marks that are unique to that connector supplier. Most of these identify marks are hard to find or see. Check the connector carefully and refer to the information below for pictures and descriptions of connector identification markings. * Most of AFLs connectors have EPC on their connector body. Some of the smaller connectors will not have any markings on them. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3335 * In some cases Bosch will actually be printed on the connector. If Bosch does not appear on the connector, look for the Bosch logo. The Bosch logo is a circle with a blunted arrow inside. This logo can appear anywhere on the connector and is often very small. * In some cases Delphi will actually be printed on the connector. If Delphi is not printed on the connector, look for PED. In both cases there is no specific orientation for Delphi or PED and they can appear anywhere on the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3336 * FCI connectors may have the FCI logo on their connectors. The logo is the letters FCI with an "A" above it. * JAE connector have JAE in small letters on their connectors. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3337 * JST connectors have JST in small letters on their connectors, similar to that above. The location of the logo will vary with the connector size and style. * Kostel has an "LK" with a circle around it. These connector are usually used as a transmissions connection. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3338 * Most Molex connectors will have the Molex logo on the dresscover of the connector. In some cases the connectors may have MX followed by another letter. The third letter indicates where the connector was made. A connector with MXD is a Molex connector made in Detroit. Sumitomo has a unique symbol on their connector and possibly a part number. The symbol is similar to that of a diamond lying on its side, similar to that shown. The logo could appear anywhere but the most common place is at the wire side of the housing. * Tyco/AMP has many different and unique connector designs. Some may or may not have identifiable marks on them. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3339 * Yazaki has a wedge or arrow shape, similar to that shown. Delphi Connectors (Push to Seat) Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Follow the steps below in order to repair push to seat connectors. 1. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device, the connector position assurance (CPA) device, and/or the secondary lock. 2. Separate the connector halves (1). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3340 3. Use the proper pick or removal tool (1) in order to release the terminal. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 4. Gently pull the cable and the terminal (2) out of the back of the connector. 5. Re-form the locking device if you are going to reuse the terminal (1). 6. To repair the terminal, refer to Terminal Repair. Terminal Repair 1. Slip the cable seal away from the terminal. 2. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 3. Slip a new cable seal onto the wire. 4. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 5. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 6. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. 7. Slide the cable seal toward the terminal. 8. Crimp the cable seal and the insulation. 9. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply grease to the connector. Reinstalling Terminal 1. In order to reuse a terminal or lead assembly, refer to Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Wiring Repairs). 2. Ensure that the cable seal is kept on the terminal side of the splice. 3. Insert the lead from the back until it catches. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Terminated Lead Repair 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Find the appropriate terminated lead. 3. Use the appropriate splice sleeves depending on the gauge size. 4. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves). Delphi Connectors (Pull to Seat) Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) Special Tools Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3341 J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal If the terminal is visibly damaged or is suspected of having a faulty connection, the terminal should be replaced. Follow the steps below in order to repair pull-to-seat connectors: 1. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) device and/or the secondary lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component or separate the connectors for in-line connectors. 3. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device. 4. Insert the proper pick or removal tool into the front of the connector body. Note: On connectors with more than one terminal the service loop may not be large enough to remove the terminal and crimp on a new one. If the terminal wire does not have a large enough service loop for removal, cut the wire 5 cm (2 in) behind the connector before removal. 5. Grasp the wire at the back of the connector body and gently push the terminal out the front of the connector body. Terminal Repair 1. If the wire needed to be cut in order to remove the terminal, gently push a small length of the same size wire through the back of the connector cavity until there is enough wire exposed in order to crimp on a new terminal. If the wire was not cut, cut the existing wire as close to the old terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 4. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. Terminal Installation 1. Align the terminal and pull the wire from the back of the connector in order to seat the terminal. 2. If necessary, cut the new wire to proper length and splice with existing circuit. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves). 3. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply dielectric grease to the connector. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Micro .64) Delphi Connectors (Micro.64) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3342 Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro.64 connectors. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. The lever lock may be located on the top or sides of the wire dress cover. View of a typical Micro 64 connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3343 Depress the lock and pull the lever over and past the lock. View of the connector when released from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3344 View of another type of Micro 64 connector. Depress the locks that are located on both sides of the wiredress cover and pull the lever over and past the locks. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3345 View of the connector when released from the component. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the front of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool push down on one of the locking tabs and pull the cover up until the dress cover releases. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. 4. Once the front 2 locks are unlocked, lift the front of the dress cover and pull it forward. Note: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 5. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the small slot on the TPA and pushing down until the TPA releases. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3346 Note: Be careful not to angle or rock the J 38125-21 tool when inserting it into the connector or the tool may break. 6. Insert the J 38125-21 tool into the round canal between the terminals cavities at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Follow the steps below in order to repair Micro 64 connector terminals. The Micro 64 connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-64 (M jaw) was developed to crimp Micro 64 terminals. The J 38125-64 crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. The J 38125-64 crimping tool is also designed to crimp both the wire and the insulation at the same time. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro 64 terminals. Note: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gauge wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 1. Cut the wire as close to the damaged terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3347 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert terminal into the appropriate terminal holder until it hits bottom and stops. The correct terminal holder is determined by the wire size. Also ensure that the terminals wings are pointing towards the former on the tool and the release locator. 5. Insert the stripped cable into the terminal. Insulation should be visible on both sides of the terminal insulation wings. 6. Compress the handles until the ratchet automatically releases. 7. Place the terminal into the appropriate cavity and assemble the connector. Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3348 Terminal Removal Procedure There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W connectors. These connectors are very similar but use different terminals and have some minor physical differences also. The first connector design of the Micro-Pack 100W (1) has a white connector interface that holds the terminals. The second design of the Micro-Pack 100W (2) has a gray interface to hold the terminals. Also, the first design has terminal cavities that are further apart (3 mm centerline) and offset from the other row of terminal cavities in the connector. The second design has terminals cavities that are closer together (2.54 mm centerline) and aligned vertically. One other way to identify the second design is the thin strip of material that runs along the outside of the cavities. Note: There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W terminals which are very similar. Ensure that you have the correct terminal before crimping the new terminal to the wire. The first design connector uses the longer terminal (1) that has a raised area in front of the recess in the terminal. The second design connector uses the shorter terminal without the raised area. Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro-Pack 100W connectors. Some Micro-Pack 100W connector disassembly procedures will vary. Use this procedure as a guide. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3349 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Locate the nose piece locking tabs that are positioned on the side of the connector nose piece. The connector nose piece acts as a terminal positive assurance (TPA) and may be referred to as such. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to push in one of the locking tabs while gently pulling on the same side of the nose piece. 4. Repeat the procedure for the other locking tab and remove the nose piece. 5. Remove the wire dress cover. The following is a general procedure for wire dress cover removal. Use this procedure as a guide, some dress cover removal procedures may vary. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3350 6. Use fingers to squeeze the 2 locking legs of the cover. 7. Apply pressure and gently rock the cover until one locking leg is unseated. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3351 8. Continue to apply pressure and rock the cover until the second locking leg is unseated. Repeat procedure for the other side of the dress cover and remove the cover. 9. Use J 38125-12A to gently lift the terminal retaining tab while gently pulling the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. If the terminal is severely bent or damaged, it may be possible on some connectors to push the wire out of the front of the connector instead of pulling it through. This will prevent damage to the internal seals of the connector. Once the terminal is pushed out of the connector, cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible and pull the wire through the connector. Terminal Repair Procedure The Micro-Pack 100W connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool was developed to crimp Micro-Pack 100W terminals. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro-Pack 100 terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3352 1. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. Note: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gauge wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert the terminal into the crimp tool until the core wings are flush with the anvil on the crimp tool. Be sure that the wings are pointed toward the crimp tool former and release the spring locator. The locator will hold the terminal in place. Inspect the alignment of the terminal wings with the crimp tool former. If the terminal wings are wider than the crimp tool former, remove the terminal and bend the terminal wings in slightly. 5. Place stripped wire into terminal. 6. Crimp the new terminal to the wire. If a jam occurs, press the emergency release to open applicator. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3353 Terminal Replacement Procedure After the terminal is crimped to the wire perform the following procedure in order to replace Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the Terminal Removal Procedure. Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The following is the proper procedure for the repair of Weather Pack(R) Connectors. 1. Separate the connector halves (1). 2. Open the secondary lock. A secondary lock aids in terminal retention and is usually molded to the connector (1). 3. Grasp the wire and push the terminal to the forward most position. Hold the wire in this position. 4. Insert the Weather Pack(R) terminal removal tool J 38125-10A into the front (mating end) of the connector cavity until it rests on the cavity shoulder (1). 5. Gently pull on the wire to remove the terminal through the back of the connector (2). Note: Never use force to remove a terminal from a connector. 6. Inspect the terminal and connector for damage. Repair as necessary. Refer to Repairing Connector Terminals (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Repairing Connector Terminals). 7. Reform the lock tang (2) and reset terminal in connector body. 8. Close secondary locks and join connector halves. 9. Verify that circuit is complete and working satisfactorily. 10. Perform system check. Delphi Connectors (12-Way) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3354 Delphi Connectors (12-Way) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) and slide the lever lock away from the connector body. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs on the dress cover of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool release all of the locking tabs. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3355 4. Release the lower wire dress cover locking tab. 5. Release the upper wire dress cover locking tab. 6. Once the locks are unlocked, lift the dress cover off. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3356 Note: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 7. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the locking tabs on both sides of the TPA. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. 8. Remove the nose piece by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the locking tabs on both sides of the nose piece. Gently pry the nose piece out of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3357 9. Insert the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Delphi Connectors (Steering Gear) Delphi Connectors (Steering Gear) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3358 Removal Procedure 1. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the locking tab on the connector. 2. Push down the locking tab to release the connector. The small flat-bladed tool may need to be pushed down and angled back slightly to depress the locking tab. Pull on the connector body while releasing the locking tab to disconnect the connector. FCI Connectors (Lever Lock) FCI Connectors (Lever Lock) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3359 Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. 1. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. 2. The release tab is located on the top of the wiredress cover. 3. View of connector in released position. 4. Disconnect the connector from the component. 5. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the dress cover. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs and remove the dress cover. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3360 6. Use a small flat-blade tool to slide the terminal position assurance (TPA) up one notch on both ends of the connector. The TPA is located underneath the wire dress cover. For the larger terminals insert the J 38125-556 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. For the smaller terminals insert the J 38125-560 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3361 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. FCI (SIR) FCI Connectors (SIR) Removal Procedure Note: The orange CPA must be released first to disconnect or to connect the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3362 1. Lift the orange CPA vertically (avoid lifting on an angle to the connector) approximately 4 mm to release the connector. Use a small flat-bladed tool to help release the orange CPA. The orange CPA can also be released manually without any tools. 2. Grab the connector on both sides and lift the connector vertically to disconnect the connector. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3363 1. Lift the orange CPA vertically approximately 4 mm before installing the connector. Use a small flat-bladed tool to help release the orange CPA. The orange CPA can also be released manually without any tools. 2. Line up the connector key tabs with the initiator key slots. Grab the connector on both sides and push the connector down into the initiator connector sub assembly until fully seated. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3364 3. After the connector is fully seated, push down the orange CPA with your thumb. Push down until the orange CPA is touching the yellow cover on the connector. FEP Connectors (Steering Gear) FEP Connectors (Steering Gear) Removal Procedure 1. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the locking tab on the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3365 2. Push down the locking tab to release the connector. The small flat-bladed tool may need to be pushed down and angled back slightly to depress the locking tab. Pull on the connector body while releasing the locking tab to disconnect the connector. JST Connectors JST Connectors Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. While depressing the lock, remove the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3366 2. Locate the two indents of the terminal position assurance (TPA) located on the bottom of the connector body. Note: The TPA cannot be removed from the connector while there are terminals present in the connector body. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to very carefully raise the TPA on both sides of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3367 4. View of the TPA when removed from the connector body. 5. Use the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the left side of the terminal release cavity as shown in the graphic. Use the tool to move the terminal release to the right with a gentle prying motion. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Kostal Connectors (Glow Plug Control Module) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3368 Kostal Connectors (Glow Plug Control Module) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure View of typical connector. View of connector in released position. 1. Locate the assist lever at the back of the connector. Move the assist lever to the rear position. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3369 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove the dress cover. 4. Slide the dress cover forward and off of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3370 5. The terminal positive assurance (TPA) is located in the front and rear of the connector. Note: The front TPA cannot be removed from the connector. Only move it to the preset position. 6. Use a small flat-blade tool to move the front TPA to the preset position, outboard approximately 0.125 in. (3 mm). 7. Use a small flat-blade tool to completely remove the rear TPA from the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3371 8. Use the J 38125-24 or the J 38125-560 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 9. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Kostal Connectors (Transmission) Kostal Connectors (Transmission) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3372 1. While depressing the lock, twist and remove the connector from the component. 2. Locate the terminal position assurance (TPA). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3373 Note: The TPA cannot be removed from the connector while there are terminals present in the connector body. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to push the TPA until it bottoms out. 4. Use the J 38125-28 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal cavity as shown in the graphic. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 5. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Terminal Replacement Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3374 After the terminal is crimped to the wire, perform the following procedure in order to replace the terminal. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. Locate the terminal position assurance (TPA). 4. Use a small flat-blade tool to push the TPA until it bottoms out. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3375 5. Ensure the TPA is fully seated. The TPA should be centered and flush with the connector body when viewed. Molex Connectors Molex Connectors Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the top of the wire dress cover. Slide the CPA forward. 2. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3376 3. The lever should be in the full forward position. 4. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3377 5. Remove the dress cover by using a flat bladed tool to release the dress cover locking tabs and lift up on the dress cover. 6. Cut the tie wrap that holds the wires to the connector body. 7. Use a small flat-blade tool to pry one side of the nose piece up to the pre-stage position. When the nose piece is in the pre-staged position, the nose piece will be raised above the connector body the length of the step in the nose piece. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3378 8. Use a small flat-blade tool to pry the other side of the piece to the pre-stage position. If the nose piece is higher than the first step in the nose piece, gently push down on the nose piece until it meets with resistance from the connector body, you should feel the nose piece click into position. 9. Insert the J 38125-213 into the small terminal release hole on the nose piece and gently pull on the back of the wire. 10. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Refer to the terminal crimping procedure in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit. Terminal Replacement Procedure After the terminal is crimped to the wire, perform the following procedure in order to replace the terminal. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3379 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the connector disassembly procedure. Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the connector body and pull the CPA out. The CPA is on the wire harness side of connector. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Use a small flat-bladed tool to gently pry off the dress cover by inserting the tool under the cover opposite the harness side and prying up. 4. Remove the cover. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3380 5. Using a small flat-bladed tool, push on the side of the nose piece retainer while pushing the nose piece forward with your thumb. This will release the terminal position assurance (TPA). 6. Insert the J 38125-12A into the corresponding terminal release cavity. The release cavities are the 2 center rows of cavities on one half of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3381 7. Pressing the J 38125-12A tool in the release cavity of the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and crimper in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. Slide the lever lock away from the connector body. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs on the dress cover of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool release all of the locking tabs. 4. Once the locks are unlocked, lift the dress cover off. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3382 Note: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 5. Release the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the blue locking tabs on both ends of the connector. Gently slide the TPA up to the released position on both ends. 6. For the larger terminals insert the J 38125-13A tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. For the smaller terminals insert the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3383 View of the release tool being used for the larger terminals. View of the release tool being used for the larger terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3384 View of the release tool being used for the smaller terminals. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3385 Side view of connector. View of top of connector. 1. Locate the assist lever and lock on the top of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3386 2. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. 3. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3387 4. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the rear of the connector. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. 5. Once the locking tabs are unlocked, slide the inner connector out of the rear of the connector housing. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3388 6. Use the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by pressing on the tang. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Repairing Connector Terminals Repairing Connector Terminals Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Use the following repair procedures in order to repair the following: * Push to Seat terminals * Pull to Seat terminals Some terminals do not require all of the steps shown. Skip the steps that do not apply for your terminal repair. The J-38125 contains further information. 1. Cut off the terminal between the core and the insulation crimp. Minimize any wire loss. For cable seal terminals, remove the seal. 2. Apply the correct cable seal per gauge size of the wire, if used. Slide the seal back along the wire in order to enable insulation removal. 3. Remove the insulation. 4. For sealed terminals only, align the seal with the end of the cable insulation. 5. Position the strip in the terminal. For sealed terminals, position the strip and seal in the terminal. 6. Hand crimp the core wings. 7. Hand crimp the insulation wings. For sealed terminals, hand crimp the insulation wings around the seal and the cable. 8. Solder all of the hand crimp terminals excepting Micro-Pack 100.64 size. Soldering Micro-Pack 100 World terminals may damage the terminal. Sumitomo Connectors Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3389 Sumitomo Connectors Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3390 3. Remove the dress cover by using a flat-blade tool to release the connector locking tabs and pulling off the dress cover. 4. Relieve the tension on the nose piece retainers by inserting J 38125-12A into the single retainer slot on the end of the nose piece and gently prying out the locking tab. Repeat the process for both of the nose piece locking tabs on the opposite side of the nose piece. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3391 5. Once the nose piece retainers are relaxed, use the J 38125-552 to pull up the nose piece by hooking the tool under the nose piece and pulling up. The nose piece should raise slightly. 6. On the opposite side of the nose piece, use the J 38125-552 to pull up the nose piece by hooking the tool under the nose piece and pulling up. The nose piece should release completely. If the nose piece does not come off, repeat the procedure on the opposite side. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3392 7. The illustration above identifies the entry canal where the terminal release tool will be inserted, and the terminal cavity. * Terminal (1) * Entry Canal (2) 8. Insert the J 38125-553 tool into the entry canal and pry up on the terminal retainer. The terminal retainer is a small plastic piece on the top of the terminal. The terminal retainer must be held up while the terminal is pulled out of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3393 9. The illustration shows a cutaway view of the connector to aid the technician in releasing the terminal retainer. 10. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Refer to the terminal crimping procedure in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit. Terminal Replacement Procedure After the terminal is crimped to the wire, perform the following procedure in order to replace the terminal. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the connector disassembly procedure. Terminal Position Assurance Locks Terminal Position Assurance Locks The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3394 2. Insert the J 38125-11A tool into the cavity on the lower right hand face of the connector until the terminal release tang access panel slides over. 3. Ensure that the terminal release tang access panel is in the correct location to access the terminals. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3395 5. Insert the J 38125-11A into the terminal release tang access slot located behind the access panel of the connector and press down on the terminal while carefully pulling the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component by pressing down on the connector position assurance (CPA). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3396 2. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting the tool in the small recess on the side of the connector and pushing up until the TPA releases from the connector body. The TPA should raise just slightly. Do not try to remove the TPA. Note: The TPA on this connector cannot be removed unless the terminals are removed first. The TPA will come out of the connector body, but only slightly. When the TPA is slightly raised the terminals can be removed. Using excessive force to remove the TPA with the terminals still in the connector will damage the connector. 3. Repeat the process for the other side of the connector. 4. Ensure that the TPA is in the proper position to remove the terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3397 5. While pushing the terminal forward, insert the J 38125-24 in the release cavity above the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3398 2. Insert a small flat-blade tool in the slot below the front loaded terminal position assurance (TPA) and pry up. 3. Remove the TPA by pulling it out of the connector. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-553 on a slight upward angle into the cavity below the terminal to be removed. Ensure that the pointed on the end of the tool is facing the bottom of the terminal and it stays in contact with the terminal until it stops on the plastic terminal retainer. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3399 6. Gently pry the plastic terminal retainer down and carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3400 1. While depressing the lock, pull the two connector halves apart. Note: The TPA is fragile and may break if not done carefully. 2. Use a small flat-blade tool to very carefully push the terminal position assurance (TPA) towards the face of the connector on both sides of the connector. 3. View of the male half of the connector with female terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3401 4. View of the female half of the connector with male terminals. 5. Use the J 38125-215 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. View of the female half of the connector with male terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3402 7. View of the male half of the connector with female terminals. 8. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers A circuit breaker is a protective device that is designed to open the circuit when a current load is in excess of the rated breaker capacity. If there is a short or other type of overload condition in the circuit, the excessive current will open the circuit between the circuit breaker terminals. Two types of circuit breakers are used. Circuit Breaker - This type opens when excessive current passes through it for a period of time. It closes again after a few seconds, and if the cause of the high current is still present, it will open again. The circuit breaker will continue to cycle open and closed until the condition causing the high current is removed. Positive Temperature Coefficient (PTC) Circuit Breaker - This type greatly increases its resistance when excessive current passes through it. The excessive current heats the PTC device, as the device heats its resistance increases. Eventually the resistance gets so high that the circuit is effectively open. Unlike the ordinary circuit breaker the PTC unit will not reset until the circuit is opened, by removing the voltage from its terminals. Once the voltage is removed the circuit breaker will re-close within a second or 2. Circuit Protection - Fuses Circuit Protection - Fuses Special Tools EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM) For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3403 The fuse is the most common method of an automotive wiring circuit protection. Whenever there is an excessive amount of current flowing through a circuit the fusible element will melt and create an open or incomplete circuit. Fuses are a one time protection device and must be replaced each time the circuit is overloaded. To determine if a fuse is open, remove the suspected fuse and examine if the element in the fuse is broken (2). If not broken (1), also check for continuity using a Digital Multimeter (DMM) or a continuity tester. If the element is broken or continuity is suspect, replace the fuse with one of equal current rating. Circuit Protection - Fusible Links Circuit Protection - Fusible Links Special Tools EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM) For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Fusible link is wire designed to melt and break continuity when excessive current is applied. It is often located between or near the battery and starter or electrical center. Use a continuity tester or a Digital Multimeter (DMM) at each end of the wire containing the fusible link in order to determine if it is broken. If broken, it must be replaced with fusible link of the same gauge size. Repairing a Fusible Link Note: Fusible links cut longer than 225 mm (approximately 9 in) will not provide sufficient overload protection. Flat Wire Repairs Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3404 Flat Wire Repairs The flat wire within the flex wiring harness is not serviceable. If an open or short exists within the flex wiring harness the complete harness must be replaced. GMLAN Wiring Repairs GMLAN Wiring Repairs Special Tools * EL-38125-10 - Splice Sleeve Crimping Tool * J 38125-5 - Ultra Torch Special Tool * DuraSeal splice sleeves * A wire stripping tool For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: * A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. * A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The GM Local Area Network (GMLAN) System requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working on GMLAN connectors and terminals. GMLAN Repairs Note: When making a repair to any GMLAN network, the original wire length after the repair must be the same length as before the repair. If the network is a twisted pair, the twist must be maintained after the repair is completed. GMLAN has 2 types of networks, low speed and high speed. Low speed GMLAN has a single wire and works at slow speeds. High speed GMLAN has 2 wires in a twisted pair and works at higher speeds. For more information on GMLAN, refer to Data Link Communications Description and Operation ( See: Information Bus/Description and Operation). GMLAN Connector Terminal Repair Note: A terminated lead can be used to replace damaged connector terminals for both high speed and low speed GMLAN systems. When making a connector terminal repair on a GMLAN high speed system with twisted pair wires, do not untwist the wires more than necessary to make the repair. If the individual terminals are damaged on any GMLAN connection, use the appropriate connector repair procedure in order to repair the terminal. Refer to Connector Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Connector Repairs) for the appropriate connector repair procedure. GMLAN Wire Repair Note: Refer to Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Wiring Repairs) in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gauge size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and EL-38125-10 - tool. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the DuraSeal splice sleeves. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3405 Note: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: * Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. * Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. * Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert to regional wiring gauge size. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the EL-38125-10 - tool in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the splice sleeve crimp tool. The crimp tool has four nests, one for each color. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3406 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs Caution: Do not solder repairs under any circumstances as this could result in the air reference being obstructed. If the heated oxygen sensor pigtail wiring, connector, or terminal is damaged the entire oxygen sensor assembly must be replaced. Do not attempt to repair the wiring, connector, or terminals. In order for the sensor to function properly it must have a clean air reference. This clean air reference is obtained by way of the oxygen sensor signal and heater wires. Any attempt to repair the wires, connectors or terminals could result in the obstruction of the air reference and degrade oxygen sensor performance. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3407 The following guidelines should be used when servicing the heated oxygen sensor: * Do not apply contact cleaner or other materials to the sensor or vehicle harness connectors. These materials may get into the sensor, causing poor performance. Also, the sensor pigtail and harness wires must not be damaged in such a way that the wires inside are exposed. This could provide a path for foreign materials to enter the sensor and cause performance problems. * Neither the sensor nor vehicle lead wires should be bent sharply or kinked. Sharp bends, kinks, etc., could block the reference air path through the lead wire. * Do not remove or defeat the oxygen sensor ground wire (where applicable). Vehicles that utilize the ground wire sensor may rely on this ground as the only ground contact to the sensor. Removal of the ground wire will also cause poor engine performance. * To prevent damage due to water intrusion, be sure that the peripheral seal remains intact on the vehicle harness connector. High Temperature Wiring Repairs High Temperature Wiring Repairs Special Tools * EL-38125-10 - Splice Sleeve Crimping Tool * J 38125-5 - Ultra Torch * DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). High Temperature Wiring Wiring that is exposed to high temperatures, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time may use materials i.e. wires, connectors, and shielding that has a higher heat rating than typical wiring. When making a repair in a high temperature area observe the following: * Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature to replace any damaged wire. * Replace any heat shielding that is removed. * Cover any DuraSeal splice sleeves with SCT1 shrink tubing. * After making a wiring repair, ensure that the location of the wiring is not moved closer to the heat source. Identifying High Temperature Wiring Wiring that is exposed to high temperature, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time need special considerations when making wiring repairs. Areas that may be exposed to higher temperatures can be identified by heat resistant materials that are being used in those areas. These materials may include heat reflective tape, moon tape, and high temperature shrink tubing. Also conduit and other protective coverings may be used. Because conduit or similar coverings are used throughout the vehicle regardless of the temperature, it may be necessary for the technician to determine if an area is exposed to excessive heat before making a wiring repair. Obvious areas of consideration would be any area located near the exhaust manifolds, catalytic converter, and exhaust pipes. Items Required * DuraSeal splice sleeves to crimp and seal connections * High temperature SCT1 shrink tubing to protect the splice sleeves * Terminated leads or pigtails * The correct tools to remove the terminals from the connectors Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature of the same or larger gauge size as the original wire when repair damage wire. Also replace any reflective tape that you remove during the repair. High Temperature Wire Repair Note: Refer to Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Wiring Repairs) in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature rating of the same gauge size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the EL-38125-10 - tool and then encapsulate the splice sleeve using the high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3408 Note: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: * Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. * Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. * Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert to regional wiring gauge size. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Slide a section of high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing down the length of wire to be spliced. Ensure that the shrink tubing will not interfere with the splice procedure. 5. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 6. Use the EL-38125-10 - tool in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the splice sleeve crimp tool. The crimp tool has four nests, one for each color. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3409 7. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 8. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 9. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 10. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 11. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3410 12. Center the high temperature SCT1 shrink tube over the DuraSeal splice sleeve. 13. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the high temperature heat shrink tubing. 14. Gradually move the heat from the center to the open end of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. 15. Replace any reflective tape and clips that may have been remove during the repair. Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation If the wire insulation has been chafed, or broken, enough to show the conductive portion of the wire, and the wire is not damaged, determine the length of insulation that needs to be repaired. If the repair is less than 280 mm (11 in), cut the wire within the damaged area. Than slide the appropriate heat shrink tubing (listed below) over the wire, and repair the wire by splicing the wires together. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves). Once the wire is spliced together slide heat shrink tubing over the damaged area and apply heat to seal the repaired wire. If the wire is damaged, or the damaged area is larger than 280 mm (11 in), than replace the damaged wire by splicing in a new section of wire. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3411 SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs Special Tools * EL-38125-10 - Splice Sleeve Crimping Tool * J 38125-5 - Ultra Torch * DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: * A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. * A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides the necessary low resistance contact integrity for these sensitive, low energy circuits. The Supplemental Inflatable Restraint (SIR) System/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working with the SIR/SRS, and the wiring components, such as connectors and terminals. SIR/SRS Connector Repair (Plastic Body and Terminal Metal Pin) Note: Do not use the terminals in the kit in order to replace damaged SIR/SRS system terminals. Use either an SIR/SRS pigtail or a terminated lead from the SIR Repair Kit Tray. The terminals in the SIR/SRS system are made with a special plating. This plating provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. Pigtail repair packs are available for SIR/SRS connectors with eight or less terminals. Only the connector body is available for connectors with more than eight terminals. Terminated leads can be used to replace damaged terminals when replacing the connector body. SIR/SRS Component Wire Pigtail Repair Note: Do not make wire, connector, or terminal repairs on components with wire pigtails. A wire pigtail is a wire or wires attached directly to the device, not by a connector. If a wiring pigtail is damaged, you must replace the entire component, with pigtail. The inflatable restraint steering wheel module coil is an example of a pigtail component. SIR/SRS Wire Repair Note: Refer to Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Wiring Repairs) in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3412 If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gauge size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and EL-38125-10 - tool. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the DuraSeal splice sleeves. Note: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: * Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. * Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. * Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert to regional wiring gauge size. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the EL-38125-10 - tool in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the splice sleeve crimp tool. The crimp tool has four nests, one for each color. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3413 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Connector Position Assurance (CPA) The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of a connector. CPAs are used in all SIR System connectors and also in some connectors of other systems. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals of a connection. Terminal Position Assurance (TPA) The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3414 Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Special Tools * EL-38125-10 - Splice Sleeve Crimping Tool * J 38125-5 - Ultra Torch * DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Note: Use only DuraSeal splice sleeves. Other splice sleeves may not protect the splice from moisture or provide a good electrical connection. Use DuraSeal splice sleeves to form a one-to-one splice on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. Use DuraSeal splice sleeves where there is special requirements such as moisture sealing. Follow the instructions below in order to splice copper wire using DuraSeal splice sleeves. Note: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: * Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. * Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. * Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert to regional wiring gauge size. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3415 5. Use the EL-38125-10 - tool in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the splice sleeve crimp tool. The crimp tool has four nests, one for each color. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3416 * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Splicing Inline Harness Diodes Splicing Inline Harness Diodes Many vehicle electrical systems use a diode to isolate circuits and protect the components from voltage spikes. When installing a new diode use the following procedure. 1. Open the harness. * If the harness is taped, remove the tape. * To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing seam ripper (available from sewing supply stores) in order to cut open the harness. * If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the diode. 2. If the diode is taped to the harness, remove all of the tape. 3. Check and record the current flow direction and orientation of diode. 4. Remove the inoperative diode from the harness with a suitable soldering tool. Note: If the diode is located next to a connector terminal remove the terminal(s) from the connector to prevent damage from the soldering tool. 5. Carefully strip away a section of insulation next to the old soldered portion of the wire(s). Do not remove any more than is needed to attach the new diode. 6. Check current flow direction of the new diode, being sure to install the diode with correct bias. Reference the appropriate service manual wiring schematic to obtain the correct diode installation position. 7. Attach the new diode to the wire(s) using 60/40 rosin core solder. Before soldering attach some heat sinks (aluminum alligator clips) across the diode wire ends to protect the diode from excessive heat. Follow the manufacturer's instruction for the soldering equipment. 8. Reinstall terminal(s) into the connector body if previously removed. Note: To prevent shorts to ground and water intrusion, completely cover all exposed wire and diode attachment points with tape. 9. Tape the diode to the harness or connector using electrical tape. Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable Twisted/shielded cable is used in order to protect wiring from electrical noise. Two-conductor cable of this construction is used between the radio and the Delco-Bose(R) speaker/amplifier units and other applications where low level, sensitive signals must be carried. Follow the instructions below in order to repair the twisted/shielded cable. 1. Remove the outer jacket (1). Use care not to cut into the drain wire of the mylar tape. 2. Unwrap the tape. Do not remove the tape. Use the tape in order to rewrap the twisted conductors after the splice is made. 3. Prepare the splice. Untwist the conductors and follow the instructions for Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves). Staggering the splices by 65 mm (2.5 in) is recommended. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3417 Note: Apply the mylar tape with the aluminum side inward. This ensures good electrical contact with the drain wire. 4. Re-assemble the cable. * Rewrap the conductors with the mylar tape. If the mylar tape is damaged, use 3M product AL-36FR to replace the damaged mylar tape. * Use caution not to wrap the drain wire in the tape (1). * Follow the splicing instructions for copper wire and splice the drain wire. * Wrap the drain wire around the conductors and tape with electrical tape to replace the outer insulation. 5. Tape over the entire cable. Use a winding motion when you apply the tape. Wiring Repairs Wiring Repairs The Wiring Repairs section contains the following types of wiring repair information. Using these elements together will make wiring repair faster and easier: * Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections) * Flat Wire Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Flat Wire Repairs) * GMLAN Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/GMLAN Wiring Repairs) * High Temperature Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/High Temperature Wiring Repairs) * Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs) * Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves) * Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable) * Splicing Inline Harness Diodes (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Inline Harness Diodes) * SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs) US English/Metric Conversion US English/Metric Conversion Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3418 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3419 Basic Digital Multimeter Requirements Basic Digital Multimeter Requirements Digital Multimeter (DMM) Basic Requirements Service information is validated using digital multimeters that meet or exceed the following requirements. Using a multimeter that does not meet these basic requirements may give inaccurate readings which could lead to an incorrect diagnosis. Display and Settings 1. Four digits displayed 2. Voltage, amperage, resistance, frequency, diode test settings, and min-max function 3. Display positive and negative values Voltage 1. Have at least 10 Mohm input impedance 2. Test a DC voltage range of 0.1-1000 V. 3. Test an AC voltage range of 0.1-1000 V. Amperage 1. Test a DC amperage range of 0.1µA-10 A. 2. Test an AC amperage range of 0.1µA-10 A. Resistance Test a resistance range of 0.1 ohm-40 Mohm and displays infinite for a value greater than 40 Mohm (O.L. (Over-load)) Frequency Test for a frequency range of 0.5 HZ-199 K HZ Diode Test 1. Apply at least 1 mA when performing the diode bias test 2. Display the break over voltage drop (0-3 V) of a forward biased diode 3. Display infinite (O.L. (Over-load)) when a diode is reverse biased Min-Max Readings 1. Can update at a 1 ms sample rate 2. Saves and displays minimum and maximum values Testing Ground and Low Reference Circuits Testing Ground and Low Reference Circuits Because a test lamp can light with up to 200 ohm in a ground or low reference circuit they are not recommended to be used for this type of test. A low impedance test lamp can light and indicate the circuit is good when there is as much as 20-30 ohm present, while a high impedance test lamp can light with up to 200 ohm present in the circuit. This is why the Digital Multi-Meter (DMM) is used when validating a ground or low reference circuit continuity. When using the DMM there are many vehicle conditions that can affect the ground and low reference continuity testing. If these conditions are not met, a ground or low reference circuit test can fail on a good circuit. This may cause longer diagnosis time and incorrect component replacement. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3420 Any current flow through a ground or low reference circuit, while being tested, will skew the DMM continuity reading, or display a reading higher than when there is no current flowing. Performing a ground or low reference circuit continuity test, in reference to the vehicles battery negative terminal, will have the highest risk of failing a good ground or low reference circuit test than any other ground reference point. The best ground test points would be a control module housing (if the control modules housing is metal and grounded), door jamb striker (if attached to metal), under dash metal frame work, engine block, or body ground studs (other than where the negative battery cable is attached). A typical DMM ground or low reference circuit continuity reading can be as high as 100 ohm with the ignition ON, and drop to 15-25 ohm after the ignition is turned OFF. The reading will drop below 10 ohm after 30-40 seconds, then below 5 ohm after 60 seconds. Once the vehicle completely goes to sleep (generally 3-10 minutes) the reading will drop below 0.3 ohm. The following list of conditions may need to be met to ensure a valid continuity reading on a ground or low reference circuit: * Ignition OFF * Key out of the ignition switch (when not equipped with keyless entry and remote start) * Retained Accessory Power (RAP) OFF (open and close the driver door after ignition OFF) * Battery charger set at a 2 A or less charge rate * Scan tool not communicating with any vehicle control module (in some cases it may need to be disconnected from the DLC) * All entry doors closed * Headlamps OFF (auto headlamps disabled) * Any delay lighting OFF * HVAC after blow OFF * Any accessory that can work when the ignition is OFF * Wait up to 60 seconds (after all other listed conditions are met) Activating the DOOR LOCK function with a key fob can greatly reduce the time to achieve a valid ground or low reference continuity test result. Terminal Wiring Repair Terminal Wiring Repair Special Tools * EL-38125-10 - Splice Sleeve Crimp Tool * EL-38125-580 - Terminal Release Tool Kit * J-38125-5 - Ultra Torch * EL-35616 - Connector Test Adapter Kit For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Note: All repairs near the engine manifold, turbo engine and all exhaust pipes should follow the High Temperature Wiring Repair procedures. 1. Find the appropriate connector end view within the connector end view section. The connector end view has the following information: * Diagnostic probe tool * Terminal release tool * Terminal/terminated lead part numbers 2. Determine if a terminal is damaged. Note: Not using the proper test kit probe may cause damage to the terminal(s) that are probed. * Locate the diagnostic probe tool from the connector end view. The connector end view describes the color and part number to help the technician find and use the correct tool. * Connect the probe tool to the Digital Multimeter. * Insert the probe tool into the cavity and follow the procedures from the Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter). 3. Disconnect the connector body to perform the repair. Note: Several procedures for specific connector bodies are called out in Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Wiring Repairs). Use the following repair procedures to repair the following terminals: Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3421 Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack))Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Push to Seat))Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Pull to Seat))Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W))Delphi Connectors (Micro.64) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Micro .64) )Delphi Connectors (12-Way) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (12-Way))Delphi Connectors (Steering Gear) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Steering Gear)) * The TPA and CPA should be removed before releasing the terminal for the connector body. * Look at the connector end view to locate the cavity of the damaged terminal and find the proper terminal release tool from the terminal release tool kit. Note: Using the incorrect terminal release tool can damage the connector body. * Insert the terminal release tool into the cavity. Note: Some terminals have a lever that must be disengaged before the terminal can be released. Gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Terminated Lead Repair Terminated Lead Repair Special Tools * EL-38125-10 - Splice Sleeve Crimp Tool * EL-38125-580 - Terminal Release Tool Kit * J-38125-5 - Ultra Torch * EL-35616 - Connector Test Adapter Kit For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Note: All repairs near the engine manifold, turbo engine and all exhaust pipes should follow the High Temperature Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/High Temperature Wiring Repairs) procedures. Terminated leads are terminals that are crimped onto wires. The terminated lead can be used throughout the vehicle since it is designed for temperatures up to 150°C. The length of the wire is 450 mm. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3422 The DuraSeal splice sleeve has the following 2 critical features: * A special heat shrink tubing that environmentally seals the splice. The shrink tubing contains a sealing adhesive inside the shrink tubing. * A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp that provides the necessary contact integrity for sensitive low energy circuits. 1. Use the connector end view to identify the correct terminated lead. 2. The terminated lead package should include a DuraSeal splice sleeve. If not, use the chart to identify the correct part. 3. Open the harness by removing any tape: Use a sewing seam ripper, or a comparable tool, to cut open the harness, to avoid wire insulation damage. 4. Depending on how many terminals need repairs, cut the terminal and wire back at least 40 mm. Try to keep the harness wire length the same. If more than one terminated lead is required, stagger the lengths by 40 mm. This helps reduce the bundle size of the wire harness. 5. Use the EL-38125-10 - tool in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the splice sleeve crimp tool. The crimp tool has four nests, one for each color. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3423 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the J-38125-5 - ultra torch , apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3424 Fuel Level Sensor: Connector Views A6C Fuel Pump and Level Sensor Assembly - Primary B46B Fuel Level Sensor - Secondary Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3425 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3426 Fuel Level Sensor: Electrical Diagrams For information regarding diagrams for this component, please refer to Powertrain Management diagrams. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3427 Fuel Level Sensor: Service and Repair Primary Fuel Level Sensor Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Locations Fuel Pressure Sensor: Locations Wheels/Vehicle Underbody Component Views Fuel System Components 1 - B46B Fuel Level Sensor - Secondary 2 - B150 Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor 3 - Q13 Evaporative Emission Vent Solenoid Valve 4 - B46A Fuel Level Sensor - Primary 5 - G12 Fuel Pump 6 - B47 Fuel Pressure Sensor Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3431 Fuel Pressure Sensor: Diagrams B47 Fuel Pressure Sensor Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Locations Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor: Locations Wheels/Vehicle Underbody Component Views Fuel System Components 1 - B46B Fuel Level Sensor - Secondary 2 - B150 Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor 3 - Q13 Evaporative Emission Vent Solenoid Valve 4 - B46A Fuel Level Sensor - Primary 5 - G12 Fuel Pump 6 - B47 Fuel Pressure Sensor Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3435 Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor: Diagrams B150 Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3436 Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor: Service and Repair Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Information Bus: Diagram Information and Instructions Electrical Schematic Symbols Electrical Schematic Symbols Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3441 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3442 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3443 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3444 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3445 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3446 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3447 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3448 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3449 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3450 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3451 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3452 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3453 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3454 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3455 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3456 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3457 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3458 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3459 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3460 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3461 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3462 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3463 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3464 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3465 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3466 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3467 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3468 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3469 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3470 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3471 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3472 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3473 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3474 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3475 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3476 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3477 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3478 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3479 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3480 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3481 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3482 General Electrical Diagnosis General Electrical Diagnosis Basic Knowledge Required Without a basic knowledge of electricity, it will be difficult to use the diagnostic procedures contained in the service manual. You should understand the basic theory of electricity, and know the meaning of voltage (V), current (A), and resistance (Ohms ). You should also be able to read and understand a wiring diagram, as well as understand what happens in a circuit with an open or a shorted wire. Vehicle Zoning Strategy Vehicle Zoning Strategy All grounds, in-line connectors, and splices have identifying numbers that correspond to where they are located in the vehicle. The following table explains the numbering system. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3483 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3484 Information Bus: Diagnostic Aids Arrows and Symbols Arrows and Symbols This service manual uses various symbols in order to describe different service operations. 1 - Front of Vehicle 2 - View Detail 2 - View Detail 3 - Ambient Air Mixed with Another Gas or Indicate Temperature Change 4 - Motion or Direction 5 - View Angle 6 - Dimension (1:2) 7 Ambient/Clean Air Flow or Cool Air Flow 8 - Lubrication Point - Oil or Fluid 9 - Task Related 10 Sectioning (1:3) 11 - Gas Other Than Ambient Air or Hot Air Flow 12 - Lubrication Point - Grease or Jelly 13 - Multidirectional Arrow Decimal and Metric Equivalents Decimal and Metric Equivalents Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3485 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3486 Checking Aftermarket Accessories Checking Aftermarket Accessories Warning: Refer to SIR Warning (See: Restraint Systems/Service Precautions/SIR Warning). Caution: The OBD II symbol is used on the circuit diagrams in order to alert the technician that the circuit is essential for proper OBD II emission control circuit operation. Any circuit which fails and causes the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) to turn ON, or causes emissions-related component damage, is identified as an OBD II circuit. Do not connect aftermarket accessories into the following circuits: * SIR circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the SIR symbol. * OBD II circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the OBD II symbol. Always check for aftermarket accessories (non-OEM) as the first step in diagnosing electrical problems. If the vehicle is so equipped, disconnect the system to verify that these add-on accessories are not the cause of the problems. Possible causes of vehicle problems related to aftermarket accessories include: * Power feeds connected to points other than the battery * Antenna location * Transceiver wiring located too close to vehicle electronic modules or wiring * Poor shielding or poor connectors on antenna feed line * Check for recent service bulletins detailing installation guidelines for aftermarket accessories. Circuit Testing Circuit Testing The Circuit Testing section contains the following diagnostic testing information. Using this information along with the diagnostic procedures will identify the cause of the electrical malfunction. * Using Connector Test Adapters (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Using Connector Test Adapters) * Probing Electrical Connectors (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Probing Electrical Connectors) * Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3487 Procedures/Circuit Testing/Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter) * Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp) * Using Fused Jumper Wires (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Using Fused Jumper Wires) * Measuring Voltage (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Measuring Voltage) * Measuring Voltage Drop (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Measuring Voltage Drop) * Measuring Frequency (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Measuring Frequency) * Testing Ground and Low Reference Circuits (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Testing Ground and Low Reference Circuits) * Testing for Continuity (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Continuity) * Testing for Short to Ground (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Short to Ground) * Testing for a Short to Voltage (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for a Short to Voltage) * Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections) * Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions) * Testing for Electrical Intermittents (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Electrical Intermittents) * Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure) * Circuit Protection - Fuses (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Circuit Protection - Fuses) * Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers) * Circuit Protection - Fusible Links (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Circuit Protection - Fusible Links) Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp Special Tools EL-35616-200 - Test Light - Probe Kit For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test Probe Caution). A test lamp can simply and quickly test a low impedance circuit for voltage. A Digital Multimeter (DMM) should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present if the impedance is low enough, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. In other words, if there is not enough current, the test lamp will not illuminate even though voltage is present. The EL-35616-200 - kit is Micro-Pack compatible and comprised of a 12-volt light bulb with an attached pair of leads. To properly operate this tool use the following procedures. When testing for voltage: 1. Attach one lead to ground. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is voltage at the point being tested. When testing for ground: 1. Attach one lead to battery positive voltage. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where ground should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is ground at the point being tested. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3488 Testing for a Short to Voltage Testing for a Short to Voltage Special Tools EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM) For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test Probe Caution). The following procedure tests for a short to voltage in a circuit. 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Set the rotary dial of the Digital Multimeter (DMM) to the V (DC) position. 4. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. Turn ON the ignition and operate all accessories. 7. If the voltage measured is greater than 1 V, there is a short to voltage in the circuit. Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions Special Tools J-25070 - Heat Gun For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Many intermittent open or shorted circuits are affected by harness/connector movement that is caused by vibration, engine torque, bumps/rough pavement, etc. In order to duplicate the customer's concern, it may be necessary to manipulate the wiring harness if the malfunction appears to be vibration related. Manipulation of a circuit can consist of a wide variety of actions, including: * Wiggling the harness * Disconnecting a connector and reconnecting * Stressing the mechanical connection of a connector * Pulling on the harness or wire in order to identify a separation/break inside the insulation * Relocating a harness or wires All these actions should be performed with some goal in mind. For instance, with a scan tool connected, wiggling the wires may uncover a faulty input to the control module. The snapshot option would be appropriate here. Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure). Another option is, with the component commanded ON and OFF by the scan tool, move related connectors and wiring and observe the component operation. With the engine running, move related connectors and wiring while monitoring engine operation. If harness or connector movement affects the data displayed, component/system operation, or engine operation, inspect and repair the harness/connections as necessary. You may need to load the vehicle in order to duplicate the concern. This may require the use of weights, floor jacks, jackstands, frame machines, etc. In these cases you are attempting to duplicate the concern by manipulating the suspension or frame. This method is useful in finding harnesses that are too short and their connectors pull apart enough to cause a poor connection. A DMM set to Peak Min/Max mode and connected to the suspect circuit while testing can yield desirable results. Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Electrical Intermittents). Certainly, using the senses of sight, smell, and hearing while manipulating the circuit can provide good results as well. There may be instances where circuit manipulation alone will not meet the required criteria for the fault condition to appear. In such cases it may be necessary to expose the suspect circuit to other conditions while manipulating the harness. Such conditions would include high moisture conditions, along with exceptionally high or low temperatures. The following discusses how to expose the circuit to these kinds of conditions. Salt Water Spray Some compounds possess the ability to conduct electricity when dissolved in water such as ordinary salt. By mixing table salt with water in sufficient Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3489 quantities, you can enhance the conductive properties of water so that any circuit which may be sensitive to moisture will more readily fail when liberally sprayed with this mixture. Mixing 0.35L (12 oz) of water with approximately 1 tablespoon of salt will yield a salt solution of 5 percent. Fill a normal spray bottle with this mixture. This mixture is sufficient to enhance the water's own conductivity. This may cause the circuit to fail more easily when sprayed. Once the mixture is completed, spray the suspect area liberally with the solution. Then, while monitoring either a scan tool or DMM, manipulate the harness as discussed previously. High Temperature Conditions If the complaint tends to be heat related, you can simulate the condition using the J-25070 - heat gun. Using the heat gun, you can heat up the suspected area or component. Manipulate the harnesses under high temperature conditions while monitoring the scan tool or DMM to locate the fault condition. The high temperature condition may be achieved simply by test driving the vehicle at normal operating temperature. If a heat gun is unavailable, consider this option to enhance your diagnosis. This option does not allow for the same control, however. Low Temperature Conditions Depending on the nature of the fault condition, placing a fan in front of the vehicle while the vehicle is in the shade can have the desired effect. If this is unsuccessful, use local cooling treatments such as ice or a venturi type nozzle (one that provides hot or cold air). This type of tool is capable of producing air stream temperatures down to -18°C (0°F) from one end and +71°C (160°F) from the other. This is ideally suited for localized cooling needs. Once the vehicle, component, or harness has been sufficiently cooled, manipulate the harness or components in an effort to duplicate the concern. Duplicating Failure Conditions * If none of the previous tests are successful, attempt to duplicate and/or capture the failure conditions. * Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, where applicable, contains the conditions that were present when the DTC set. 1. Review and record Freeze Frame/Failure Records data. 2. Clear the DTCs using the scan tool. 3. Turn the key to OFF and wait 15 seconds. 4. Operate the vehicle under the same conditions that were noted in Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, as closely as possible. The vehicle must also be operating within the Conditions for Running the DTC. Refer to Conditions for Running the DTC in the supporting text if a DTC is being diagnosed. 5. Monitor DTC Status for the DTC being tested. The scan tool will indicate Ran, when the enabling conditions have been satisfied long enough for the DTC to run. The scan tool will also indicate whether the DTC passed or failed. * An alternate method is to drive the vehicle with the DMM connected to a suspected circuit. An abnormal reading on the DMM when the concern occurs, may help you locate the concern. Measuring Frequency Measuring Frequency Special Tools EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM) For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test Probe Caution). The following procedure determines the frequency of a signal. Note: Connecting the Digital Multimeter (DMM) to the circuit before pressing the Hz button will allow the DMM to autorange to an appropriate range. 1. Apply power to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (AC) position. 3. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3490 5. Press the Hz button on the DMM. 6. The DMM will display the frequency measured. Measuring Voltage Measuring Voltage Special Tools EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM) For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test Probe Caution). The following procedure measures the voltage at a selected point in a circuit. 1. Disconnect the electrical harness connector for the circuit being tested, if necessary. 2. Enable the circuit and/or system being tested. Use the following methods: * Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. * Turn ON the engine. * Turn ON the circuit and/or system with a scan tool in Output Controls. * Turn ON the switch for the circuit and/or system being tested. 3. Select the V (AC) or V (DC) position on the Digital Multimeter (DMM). 4. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the point of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. The DMM displays the voltage measured at that point. Measuring Voltage Drop Measuring Voltage Drop Special Tools EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM) For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test Probe Caution). The following procedure determines the difference in voltage potential between 2 points. 1. Set the rotary dial of the Digital Multimeter (DMM) to the V (DC) position. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3491 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to one point of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to the other point of the circuit. 4. Operate the circuit. 5. The DMM displays the difference in voltage between the 2 points. Probing Electrical Connectors Probing Electrical Connectors Note: Always be sure to reinstall the connector position assurance (CPA) and terminal position assurance (TPA) when reconnecting connectors or replacing terminals. Front probe Disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the mating side (front) of the connector. Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test Probe Caution). Note: When probing female 0.64 terminals, it is important to use the correct adapter. There have been some revisions to the test adapter for 0.64 terminals. The proper adapter for 0.64 terminals is the EL-35616-64B which has a gold terminal and a black wire between the base and tip. Failure to use the proper test adapter may result in damage to the terminal being tested and improper diagnosis. Note: The proper adapter for probing the terminals for fuses, relays, or diodes in an electrical center is EL-35616-35. Using any other tool or adapter may damage the terminal being tested. Refer to the following table as a guide in selecting the correct test adapter for front probing connectors: Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3492 Backprobe Note: * Backprobe connector terminals only when specifically required in diagnostic procedures. * Do not backprobe a sealed (Weather Pack(R)) connector, less than a 280 series Metri-Pack connector, a Micro-Pack connector, or a flat wire (dock and lock) connector. * Backprobing can be a source of damage to connector terminals. Use care in order to avoid deforming the terminal, either by forcing the test probe too far into the cavity or by using too large of a test probe. * After backprobing any connector, inspect for terminal damage. If terminal damage is suspected, test for proper terminal contact. Do not disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the harness side (back) of the connector. Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure Using Snapshots in Global Diagnostic System (GDS) Overview Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3493 A snapshot is a recording of what a control module on the vehicle was receiving for information while the snapshot is being made. A snapshot may be used to analyze the data during the time a vehicle condition is current. This allows you to concentrate on making the condition occur, rather than trying to view all the data in anticipation of the fault. To record a snapshot in GDS, select, Record Snapshot, from the options at the top right portion of any of the various pages that allow snapshots to be taken (e.g. Data Display, Control Functions, etc.). When you are finished recording, select, Stop Snapshot recording. The snapshot will now be available for replay. Snapshot Replay The Snapshot Replay function allows reviews of previously recorded vehicle snapshot data. This information can be used in analysis of vehicle problems and detection of trigger error conditions. The graph function can be used to compare parameters to see if a component is functioning properly. Recorded snapshots can be selected for viewing by the following three methods: * Selecting a snapshot file from the Vehicle Home Page and clicking on the Review selection. * Double clicking on the selected snapshot from the Vehicle Home Page. * Entering the Tools selection from the Menu selection and selecting Snapshot replay. Next, open the Snapshot Manager. Double click on the snapshot file you wish to view or click on the Load Snapshot selection and select a snapshot file. Regardless of selection method, a File Loaded pop-up window will be displayed from the Snapshot Replay screen. Select OK from the pop-up window. Snapshot Play Functions There are several snapshot play functions that are used to replay recorded snapshots * The Play function is used to play the snapshot forward by clicking on this selection. A marker will move across the screen when this selection is used. All selections in this area turn grey when they are active. * The Pause function is used to pause play of the snapshot. When this selection is clicked a second time the snapshot will start playing where it left off. * The Stop function is used to stop playing the snapshot. The snapshot will start from the beginning, if Play is selected after using the Stop function. Time Control Time control is used to control the snapshot replay. This function allows selection of a specific time frame, display of different views, and control of display speed. The following functions can be selected directly under Time Control. * The Bookmark selection allows you to add a specific comment in the current display and return to this point in the future. When this option is selected, a pop-up window is displayed. Enter a bookmark name and select OK. * The Note Pad can be selected to add comments to the snapshot replay file at the current point of time. When this option is selected, a pop-up window is displayed. Enter a comment for the snapshot file and select OK. * The Load Snapshot (blue folder) opens a snapshot file and makes it ready for further analysis. This function is also available by clicking on an available snapshot file from the Snapshot Manager. * The Down Arrow displays all Time Control options when selected. Individual options can also be selected by clicking on the item you want. * The Snapshot Display Speed can be controlled by selecting this option. Slow speeds of 1/8X, 1/4X, and 1/2X can be selected. The real time speed can also be selected at 1. Faster speeds of 2X, 4X, and 8X can also be obtained by using this selection. View Selections Each View Selection provides a different way of displaying vehicle data for analysis. The following functions can be selected under Available Views: Note: The parameter name will be shown in the original language used for capture if no translation is available for the name. * Parameter List View - Displays incoming information from the snapshot file. The current value of the parameters is displayed on the screen. * Log View - Contains all the information from the snapshot file. All parameter values are listed in the order they were recorded. Specific parameters can be added or removed from a watchlist by clicking on the appropriate item. * State View - Shows the values of all parameters in a specific time frame. These values can be used for comparison with the trigger view. * Trigger View - Displays all system and user defined triggers. This function can be used when there is a combination of factors involved in a diagnostic problem. When a Trigger condition is met a caution triangle will be displayed on the screen. Triggers: * Load Triggers - Allows you to load a file containing trigger definitions. * Save Triggers - Allows you to save the trigger to your computer's hard drive. * Remove Trigger - Allows you to remove the current trigger. It will no longer be present. * Edit Trigger - Displays a pop-up window where you can modify the limits and parameters contained within a trigger. * Adds Trigger - Displays a pop-up window to configure a trigger. * DTC View - After the Play function is selected and this option is selected this function opens the list of recorded DTCs. * Line Graph View - Displays data that can be visualized against the time-axis. From this view, specific parameters can be selected for graphing by Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3494 checking the box under Selected. At the bottom of the graph there are four functions Zoom In (increase size), Zoom Out (decrease size), Bookmarks, and Pause Scrolling. Each of these functions can be accessed by clicking on them. Testing for Continuity Testing for Continuity Special Tools EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM) For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test Probe Caution). The following procedures verify good continuity in a circuit. With a Digital Multimeter (DMM) 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the Ohms position. 2. Disconnect the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 3. Disconnect the load. 4. Press the MIN MAX button on the DMM. 5. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 6. Connect the other lead of the DMM to the other end of the circuit. 7. If the DMM displays low or no resistance, the circuit has good continuity. With a Test Lamp Note: Only use the test lamp procedure on low impedance power and ground circuits. 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect one lead of the test lamp to one end of the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 5. Connect the other end of the circuit to ground. 6. If the test lamp illuminates (full intensity), then the circuit has good continuity. Testing for Electrical Intermittents Testing for Electrical Intermittents Special Tools EL-39200 Digital Multimeter For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Perform the following procedures while wiggling the harness from side to side. Continue this at convenient points (about 6 inches apart) while watching the test equipment. * Testing for Short to Ground (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Short to Ground) * Testing for Continuity (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Continuity) * Testing for a Short to Voltage (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for a Short to Voltage) If the fault is not identified, perform the procedure below using the MIN MAX feature on the EL-39200 DMM. This feature allows you to manipulate the circuit without having to watch the EL-39200. The EL-39200 will generate an audible tone when a change is detected. Note: The EL-39200 must be used in order to perform the following procedure since the EL-39200 can monitor current, resistance or voltage while recording the minimum (MIN), and maximum (MAX) values measured. 1. Connect the EL-39200 to both sides of a suspected connector (still connected), or from one end of a suspected circuit to the other. Refer to Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3495 Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter) for information on connecting the EL-39200 to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the EL-39200 to the V (AC) or V (DC) position. 3. Press the range button of the EL-39200 in order to select the desired voltage range. 4. Press the MIN MAX button of the EL-39200. The EL-39200 displays 100 ms RECORD and emits an audible tone (beep). Note: The 100 ms RECORD mode is the length of time an input must stay at a new value in order to record the full change. 5. Simulate the condition that is potentially causing the intermittent connection, either by wiggling the connections or the wiring, test driving, or performing other operations. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions). 6. Listen for the audible Min Max Alert which indicates that a new minimum or maximum value has been recorded. 7. Press the MIN MAX button once in order to display the MAX value and note the value. 8. Press the MIN MAX button again in order to display the MIN value and note the value. 9. Determine the difference between the MIN and MAX values. * If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is 1 V or greater an intermittent open or high resistance condition exists. Repair the condition as necessary. * If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is less than 1 V, an intermittent open or high resistance condition does not exist. Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections Special Tools EL-35616 Terminal Test Probe Kit For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). When the condition is not currently present, but is indicated in DTC history, the cause may be intermittent. An intermittent may also be the cause when there is a customer complaint, but the symptom cannot be duplicated. Refer to the Symptom Table of the system that is suspect of causing the condition before trying to locate an intermittent condition. Most intermittent conditions are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. Inspect for the following items: * Wiring broken inside the insulation * Poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector * Poor terminal to wire connection-Some conditions which fall under this description are poor crimps, poor solder joints, crimping over the wire insulation rather than the wire itself, and corrosion in the wire to terminal contact area, etc. * Pierced or damaged insulation can allow moisture to enter the wiring causing corrosion. The conductor can corrode inside the insulation, with little visible evidence. Look for swollen and stiff sections of wire in the suspect circuits. * Wiring which has been pinched, cut, or its insulation rubbed through may cause an intermittent open or short as the bare area touches other wiring or parts of the vehicle. * Wiring that comes in contact with hot or exhaust components * Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions) in order to duplicate the conditions required, in order to verify the customer concern. * Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Electrical Intermittents) for test procedures to detect intermittent open, high resistance, short to ground, and short to voltage conditions. * Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure) for advanced intermittent diagnosis and Vehicle Data Recorder operation. Testing for Terminal Fretting Some intermittent conditions can be caused by wire terminal fretting corrosion. Fretting corrosion is a build-up of insulating, oxidized wear debris that can form when there is a small motion between electrical contacts. The oxidized wear debris can pile up enough at the electrical contact spots that the electrical resistance across the connection increases. Movement between the contacting surfaces as small as 10 to 100 microns can cause fretting. To put this in perspective, a sheet of paper is about 100 microns thick, so fretting motion is small and hard to see. Vibration and thermal expansion/contraction are the main sources that create fretting motion. Since vehicles vibrate and can experience large temperature swings, they are a good source for fretting motion. Tin, copper, nickel, and iron surfaces are all susceptible to fretting corrosion. Fretting corrosion can be difficult to see but it looks like small, dark smudges on the terminals contact surface. To correct a fretting condition disconnect the suspect connector and add Nyogel lubricant 760G (dielectric grease) to both sides of the connector Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3496 terminals. Then reconnect the connector and wipe away any excess lubricant. This will correct the additional terminal contact resistance due to the terminal fretting corrosion. Testing for Proper Terminal Contact It is important to test terminal contact at the component and any inline connectors before replacing a suspect component. Mating terminals must be inspected to ensure good terminal contact. A poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector may be the result of contamination or deformation. Contamination may be caused by the connector halves being improperly connected. A missing or damaged connector seal, damage to the connector itself, or exposing the terminals to moisture and dirt can also cause contamination. Contamination, usually in the underhood or underbody connectors, leads to terminal corrosion, causing an open circuit or intermittently open circuit. Deformation is caused by probing the mating side of a connector terminal without the proper adapter. Always use the EL-35616 when probing connectors. Other causes of terminal deformation are improperly joining the connector halves, or repeatedly separating and joining the connector halves. Deformation, usually to the female terminal contact tang, can result in poor terminal contact causing an open or intermittently open circuit. Testing for Proper Terminal Contact in Bussed Electrical Centers It is very important to use the correct test adapter when testing for proper terminal contact of fuses and relays in a bussed electrical center. Use EL-35616-35 to test for proper terminal contact. Failure to use EL-35616-35 can result in improper diagnosis of the bussed electrical center. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact: 1. Separate the connector halves. 2. Visually inspect the connector halves for contamination. Contamination may result in a white or green build-up within the connector body or between terminals. This causes high terminal resistance, intermittent contact, or an open circuit. An underhood or underbody connector that shows signs of contamination should be replaced in its entirety: terminals, seals, and connector body. 3. Using an equivalent male terminal / terminated lead, verify that the retention force is significantly different between a known good terminal and the suspect terminal. Replace the female terminal in question. Flat Wire (Dock and Lock) Connectors There are no serviceable parts for flat wire (dock and lock) connectors on the harness side or the component side. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact: 1. Remove the component in question. 2. Visually inspect each side of the connector for signs of contamination. Avoid touching either side of the connector as oil from your skin may be a source of contamination as well. 3. Visually inspect the terminal bearing surfaces of the flat wire circuits for splits, cracks, or other imperfections that could cause poor terminal contact. Visually inspect the component side connector to ensure that all of the terminals are uniform and free of damage or deformation. 4. Insert the appropriate adapter from the on the flat wire harness connector in order to test the circuit in question. Control Module/Component Voltage and Grounds Poor voltage or ground connections can cause widely varying symptoms. * Test all control module voltage supply circuits. Many vehicles have multiple circuits supplying voltage to a control module. Other components in the system may have separate voltage supply circuits that may also need to be tested. Inspect connections at the module/component connectors, fuses, and any intermediate connections between the voltage source and the module/component. A test lamp or a DMM may indicate that voltage is present, but neither tests the ability of the circuit to carry sufficient current. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. Refer to Circuit Testing (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Circuit Testing) and Power Distribution Schematics (See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Starting and Charging/Power and Ground Distribution/System Diagram/Power Distribution Schematics). * Test all control module ground and system ground circuits. The control module may have multiple ground circuits. Other components in the system may have separate grounds that may also need to be tested. Inspect grounds for clean and tight connections at the grounding point. Inspect the connections at the component and in splice packs, where applicable. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. Refer to Circuit Testing (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Circuit Testing) and Ground Distribution Schematics (See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Starting and Charging/Power and Ground Distribution/System Diagram/Ground Distribution Schematics). Temperature Sensitivity * An intermittent condition may occur when a component/connection reaches normal operating temperature. The condition may occur only when the component/connection is cold, or only when the component/connection is hot. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3497 * Freeze Frame, Failure Records, Snapshot, or Vehicle Data Recorder data may help with this type of intermittent condition, where applicable. * If the intermittent is related to heat, review the data for a relationship with the following: - High ambient temperatures - Underhood/engine generated heat - Circuit generated heat due to a poor connection, or high electrical load - Higher than normal load conditions, towing, etc. * If the intermittent is related to cold, review the data for the following: - Low ambient temperatures-In extremely low temperatures, ice may form in a connection or component. Inspect for water intrusion. - The condition only occurs on a cold start. - The condition goes away when the vehicle warms up. * Information from the customer may help to determine if the trouble follows a pattern that is temperature related. * If temperature is suspected of causing an intermittent fault condition, attempt to duplicate the condition. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions) in order to duplicate the conditions required. Electromagnetic Interference and Electrical Noise Some electrical components/circuits are sensitive to electromagnetic interference or other types of electrical noise. Inspect for the following conditions: * A misrouted harness that is too close to high voltage/high current devices such as secondary ignition components, motors, generator etc.-These components may induce electrical noise on a circuit that could interfere with normal circuit operation. * Electrical system interference caused by a malfunctioning relay, or a control module driven solenoid or switch-These conditions can cause a sharp electrical surge. Normally, the condition will occur when the malfunctioning component is operating. * Improper installation of non-factory or aftermarket add on accessories such as lights, 2-way radios, amplifiers, electric motors, remote starters, alarm systems, cell phones, etc.-These accessories may lead to interference while in use, but do not fail when the accessories are not in use. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Checking Aftermarket Accessories). * Test for an open diode across the A/C compressor clutch and for other open diodes. Some relays may contain a clamping diode. * The generator may be allowing AC noise into the electrical system. Incorrect Control Module * There are only a few situations where reprogramming a control module is appropriate: - A new service control module is installed. - A control module from another vehicle is installed. - Revised software/calibration files have been released for this vehicle. Note: DO NOT re-program the control module with the SAME software/calibration files that are already present in the control module. This is not an effective repair for any type of concern. * Verify that the control module contains the correct software/calibration. If incorrect programming is found, reprogram the control module with the most current software/calibration. Refer to Control Module References (See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning) for replacement, setup, and programming. Testing for Short to Ground Testing for Short to Ground Special Tools * EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM) * EL 35616-200 - Test Light-Probe Kit For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test Probe Caution). The following procedures test for a short to ground in a circuit. With a Digital Multimeter (DMM) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3498 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the Ohms position. 4. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the other lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. If the DMM does NOT display infinite resistance (OL), there is a short to ground in the circuit. With a Test Lamp 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect one lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to one end of the circuit to be tested. 5. If the test lamp illuminates, there is a short to ground in the circuit. Fuse Powering Several Loads 1. Review the system schematic and locate the fuse that is open. 2. Open the first connector or switch leading from the fuse to each load. 3. Connect a DMM across the fuse terminals (be sure that the fuse is powered). * When the DMM displays voltage the short is in the wiring leading to the first connector or switch. * If the DMM does not display voltage refer to the next step. 4. Close each connector or switch until the DMM displays voltage in order to find which circuit is shorted. Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter Special Tools EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM) For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test Probe Caution). Digital Multimeter (DMM) Basic Requirements Service information is validated using digital multimeters that meet or exceed the following requirements. Using a multimeter that does not meet these basic requirements may give inaccurate readings which could lead to an incorrect diagnosis. Display and Settings 1. Four digits displayed 2. Voltage, amperage, resistance, frequency, diode test settings, and min-max function 3. Display positive and negative values Voltage 1. Have at least 10 Mohm input impedance 2. Test a DC voltage range of 0.1-1000 V. 3. Test an AC voltage range of 0.1-1000 V. Amperage 1. Test a DC amperage range of 0.1µA-10 A. 2. Test an AC amperage range of 0.1µA-10 A. Resistance Test a resistance range of 0.1 ohm-40 Mohm and displays infinite for a value greater than 40 Mohm (O.L. (Over-load)) Frequency Test for a frequency range of 0.5 HZ-199 K HZ Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3499 Diode Test 1. Apply at least 1 mA when performing the diode bias test 2. Display the break over voltage drop (0-3 V) of a forward biased diode 3. Display infinite (O.L. (Over-load)) when a diode is reverse biased Min-Max Readings 1. Can update at a 1 ms sample rate 2. Saves and displays minimum and maximum values Note: Circuits which include any solid state control modules, such as the engine control module (ECM), should only be tested with a 10 MOhms or higher impedance digital multimeter such as the EL-39200. The EL-39200 instruction manual is a good source of information and should be read thoroughly upon receipt of the DMM as well as kept on hand for future reference. A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present if the impedance is low enough, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. In other words, if there is not enough current, the test lamp will not illuminate even though voltage is present. The ohmmeter function on a DMM shows how much resistance exists between 2 points along a circuit. Low resistance in a circuit means good continuity. Note: Disconnect the power feed from the suspect circuit when measuring resistance with a DMM. This prevents incorrect readings. DMMs apply such a small voltage to measure resistance that the presence of voltages can upset a resistance reading. Diodes and solid state components in a circuit can cause a DMM to display a false reading. To find out if a component is affecting a measurement take a reading once, then reverse the leads and take a second reading. If the readings differ the solid state component is affecting the measurement. Following are examples of the various methods of connecting the DMM to the circuit to be tested: * Probe both ends of the connector and either hold the leads in place while manipulating the connector or tape the leads to the harness for continuous monitoring while you perform other operations or test driving. Refer to Probing Electrical Connectors (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Probing Electrical Connectors). * Disconnect the harness at both ends of the suspected circuit where it connects either to a component or to other harnesses. * If the system that is being diagnosed has a specified pinout or breakout box, it may be used in order to simplify connecting the DMM to the circuit or for testing multiple circuits quickly. Using Connector Test Adapters Using Connector Test Adapters Special Tools EL 35616 - Terminal Test Probe Kit For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Caution: Do not insert test equipment probes (DMM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the EL-38125-580 GM Approved Terminal Release Tool Kit in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the EL-38125-580 GM Approved Terminal Release Tool Kit , ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the EL-38125-580 GM Approved Terminal Release Tool Kit label on the inside of the EL-38125-580 GM Approved Terminal Release Tool Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Using Fused Jumper Wires Using Fused Jumper Wires Special Tools J 36169-A Fused Jumper Wire Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3500 Note: A fused jumper may not protect solid state components from being damaged. The J 36169-A includes small clamp connectors that provide adaptation to most connectors without damage. This fused jumper wire is supplied with a 20-A fuse which may not be suitable for some circuits. Do not use a fuse with a higher rating than the fuse that protects the circuit being tested. AFL/EPC Connectors AFL/EPC Connectors Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. 1. For connectors with a bolt in the dress cover, turn the bolt counterclockwise to remove the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3501 2. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the top of the wire dress cover. Slide the CPA forward. 3. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3502 View showing depressing of the lever lock release tab. View of connector in released position. 4. Disconnect the connector from the component. 5. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the dress cover. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs and remove the dress cover. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3503 6. Release the rear lower half of the wiredress cover. 7. Release the tabs that are holding the wiredress cover to the connector body. 8. Remove the nose piece by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the slots on both ends of the connector body. Gently pry the nose piece out of the connector. J 38125-216 can also be used to remove the nose piece. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3504 9. Use the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by lifting the terminal retaining tabs on the inside of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Bosch Connectors (BSK) Bosch Connectors (BSK) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3505 Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 3. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 4. Insert the J 38125-561 tool into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 5. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Bosch Connectors (ECM) Bosch Connectors (ECM) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3506 1. Locate the assist lever on the top of the connector. Move the assist lever to the forward position. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3507 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the connector. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the locking tabs and remove the dress cover. 4. The terminal positive assurance (TPA) is located in the front of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3508 5. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove TPA from the connector. 6. Use the J 38125-213 or the J 38125-556 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3509 Note: Ensure that the dress cover and connector body are both in the released position before reassembling. Failure to do so may cause damage to the connector and component. Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Bosch Connectors (0.64) Bosch Connectors (0.64) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While pressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock until the lever is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Pull the rubber boot that covers the wires back to expose the end of the connector dress cover. 4. Place the connector locking lever in the center of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3510 5. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs that are on the wire end of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover and connector body and pry up. 6. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs located on the opposite side of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover at the connector end and pry up. 7. Remove the dress cover. 8. Cut the tie wrap on the wire bundle. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3511 9. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting a small flat-bladed tool into the small slot in the end of the slider and pushing on the TPA until it comes out of the connector. When the TPA exits the opposite side of the connector, gasp the TPA and pull it completely out of the connector. 10. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 11. Insert the J 38125-560 into the 2 triangular cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 12. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Terminal Replacement Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3512 1. Prior to installation the terminal must be aligned so the (1) coding lugs align with the (2) coding grooves on the connector. 2. Once the terminal is aligned, slide the terminal into the cavity until the retainer has engaged in the cavity of the connector. 3. Slide the TPA in the connector body and seat it using a small flat bladed tool. The TPA is seated when it is flush with the contact housing. 4. Secure the wires to the connector body using a tie wrap and replace the dress cover and grommet. Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Pull out the slider on the connector position assurance (CPA) until it is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3513 5. Insert the J 38125-557 into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Connector Position Assurance Locks Connector Position Assurance Locks The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of the connector. CPAs are used in various connectors throughout the vehicle. CPAs are also used in all SIR system electrical connectors. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals, of the connector. Connector Repairs Connector Repairs Connector Repairs contains a list of all connector repairs. The connector repairs are listed by the connector manufacturer and then by connector type. If the technician cannot identify the manufacturer of the connector, refer to Identifying Connectors below. Knowing the connector manufacturer will assist in finding the correct connector repair from the following list: * Connector Position Assurance Locks (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Connector Position Assurance Locks) * Terminal Position Assurance Locks (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Terminal Position Assurance Locks) * AFL/EPC Connectors (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/AFL/EPC Connectors) * Bosch Connectors (BSK) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Bosch Connectors (BSK))Bosch Connectors (0.64) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Bosch Connectors (0.64))Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT))Bosch Connectors (ECM) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Bosch Connectors (ECM)) * Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack))Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Push to Seat))Delphi Connectors Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3514 (Pull To Seat) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Pull to Seat))Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W))Delphi Connectors (Micro.64) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Micro .64))Delphi Connectors (12-Way) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (12-Way))Delphi Connectors (Steering Gear) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Steering Gear)) * FCI Connectors (Lever Lock) (See: General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/FCI Connectors (Lever Lock))FCI Connectors (SIR) (See: General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/FCI (SIR)) * FEP Connectors (Steering Gear) (See: General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/FEP Connectors (Steering Gear)) * JST Connectors (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/JST Connectors) * Kostal Connectors (Glow Plug Control Module) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Kostal Connectors (Glow Plug Control Module))Kostal Connectors (Transmission) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Kostal Connectors (Transmission)) * Molex Connectors (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Molex Connectors) * Sumitomo Connectors (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Sumitomo Connectors) * Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way))Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor))Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap))Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way))Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module)) * Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Yazaki Connectors (2-Way))Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Yazaki Connectors (16-Way)) * Repairing Connector Terminals (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Repairing Connector Terminals) Connector Anatomy 1 - Connector Positive Assurance (CPA) 2 - Assist Lever 3 - Wiredress Cover 4 - Seal Strain/Relief Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3515 5 - Slide Left Hand 6 - Slide Right Hand 7 - Terminal Positive Assurance (TPA) 8 - Terminal Positive Assurance (TPA) 9 - Connector Seal 10 - Connector Housing 11 - Inner Connector Identifying Connectors Knowing the connector manufacturer is helpful when trying to locating the correct connector repair procedure. There are many different connector designs used on GM vehicles and it is sometimes difficult to identify the connector manufacturer. The information in this document should help with the identification of connector manufactures. The following connector manufacturers make most of the connectors found in GM vehicles: * AFL/EPC (Alcoa Fujikura Ltd./Engineered Plastics Components) * Bosch * Delphi * FCI (Framatome Connectors International) * JAE (Japan Aviation Electronics) * JST (Japan Solderless Terminals) * Kostel * Molex * Sumitomo * Tyco/AMP * Yazaki Identifying the manufacturer of a connector is often difficult. When trying to determine the manufacturer of a connector, look for specific identifying marks that are unique to that connector supplier. Most of these identify marks are hard to find or see. Check the connector carefully and refer to the information below for pictures and descriptions of connector identification markings. * Most of AFLs connectors have EPC on their connector body. Some of the smaller connectors will not have any markings on them. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3516 * In some cases Bosch will actually be printed on the connector. If Bosch does not appear on the connector, look for the Bosch logo. The Bosch logo is a circle with a blunted arrow inside. This logo can appear anywhere on the connector and is often very small. * In some cases Delphi will actually be printed on the connector. If Delphi is not printed on the connector, look for PED. In both cases there is no specific orientation for Delphi or PED and they can appear anywhere on the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3517 * FCI connectors may have the FCI logo on their connectors. The logo is the letters FCI with an "A" above it. * JAE connector have JAE in small letters on their connectors. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3518 * JST connectors have JST in small letters on their connectors, similar to that above. The location of the logo will vary with the connector size and style. * Kostel has an "LK" with a circle around it. These connector are usually used as a transmissions connection. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3519 * Most Molex connectors will have the Molex logo on the dresscover of the connector. In some cases the connectors may have MX followed by another letter. The third letter indicates where the connector was made. A connector with MXD is a Molex connector made in Detroit. Sumitomo has a unique symbol on their connector and possibly a part number. The symbol is similar to that of a diamond lying on its side, similar to that shown. The logo could appear anywhere but the most common place is at the wire side of the housing. * Tyco/AMP has many different and unique connector designs. Some may or may not have identifiable marks on them. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3520 * Yazaki has a wedge or arrow shape, similar to that shown. Delphi Connectors (Push to Seat) Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Follow the steps below in order to repair push to seat connectors. 1. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device, the connector position assurance (CPA) device, and/or the secondary lock. 2. Separate the connector halves (1). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3521 3. Use the proper pick or removal tool (1) in order to release the terminal. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 4. Gently pull the cable and the terminal (2) out of the back of the connector. 5. Re-form the locking device if you are going to reuse the terminal (1). 6. To repair the terminal, refer to Terminal Repair. Terminal Repair 1. Slip the cable seal away from the terminal. 2. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 3. Slip a new cable seal onto the wire. 4. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 5. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 6. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. 7. Slide the cable seal toward the terminal. 8. Crimp the cable seal and the insulation. 9. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply grease to the connector. Reinstalling Terminal 1. In order to reuse a terminal or lead assembly, refer to Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Wiring Repairs). 2. Ensure that the cable seal is kept on the terminal side of the splice. 3. Insert the lead from the back until it catches. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Terminated Lead Repair 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Find the appropriate terminated lead. 3. Use the appropriate splice sleeves depending on the gauge size. 4. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves). Delphi Connectors (Pull to Seat) Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) Special Tools Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3522 J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal If the terminal is visibly damaged or is suspected of having a faulty connection, the terminal should be replaced. Follow the steps below in order to repair pull-to-seat connectors: 1. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) device and/or the secondary lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component or separate the connectors for in-line connectors. 3. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device. 4. Insert the proper pick or removal tool into the front of the connector body. Note: On connectors with more than one terminal the service loop may not be large enough to remove the terminal and crimp on a new one. If the terminal wire does not have a large enough service loop for removal, cut the wire 5 cm (2 in) behind the connector before removal. 5. Grasp the wire at the back of the connector body and gently push the terminal out the front of the connector body. Terminal Repair 1. If the wire needed to be cut in order to remove the terminal, gently push a small length of the same size wire through the back of the connector cavity until there is enough wire exposed in order to crimp on a new terminal. If the wire was not cut, cut the existing wire as close to the old terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 4. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. Terminal Installation 1. Align the terminal and pull the wire from the back of the connector in order to seat the terminal. 2. If necessary, cut the new wire to proper length and splice with existing circuit. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves). 3. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply dielectric grease to the connector. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Micro .64) Delphi Connectors (Micro.64) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3523 Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro.64 connectors. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. The lever lock may be located on the top or sides of the wire dress cover. View of a typical Micro 64 connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3524 Depress the lock and pull the lever over and past the lock. View of the connector when released from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3525 View of another type of Micro 64 connector. Depress the locks that are located on both sides of the wiredress cover and pull the lever over and past the locks. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3526 View of the connector when released from the component. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the front of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool push down on one of the locking tabs and pull the cover up until the dress cover releases. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. 4. Once the front 2 locks are unlocked, lift the front of the dress cover and pull it forward. Note: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 5. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the small slot on the TPA and pushing down until the TPA releases. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3527 Note: Be careful not to angle or rock the J 38125-21 tool when inserting it into the connector or the tool may break. 6. Insert the J 38125-21 tool into the round canal between the terminals cavities at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Follow the steps below in order to repair Micro 64 connector terminals. The Micro 64 connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-64 (M jaw) was developed to crimp Micro 64 terminals. The J 38125-64 crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. The J 38125-64 crimping tool is also designed to crimp both the wire and the insulation at the same time. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro 64 terminals. Note: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gauge wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 1. Cut the wire as close to the damaged terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3528 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert terminal into the appropriate terminal holder until it hits bottom and stops. The correct terminal holder is determined by the wire size. Also ensure that the terminals wings are pointing towards the former on the tool and the release locator. 5. Insert the stripped cable into the terminal. Insulation should be visible on both sides of the terminal insulation wings. 6. Compress the handles until the ratchet automatically releases. 7. Place the terminal into the appropriate cavity and assemble the connector. Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3529 Terminal Removal Procedure There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W connectors. These connectors are very similar but use different terminals and have some minor physical differences also. The first connector design of the Micro-Pack 100W (1) has a white connector interface that holds the terminals. The second design of the Micro-Pack 100W (2) has a gray interface to hold the terminals. Also, the first design has terminal cavities that are further apart (3 mm centerline) and offset from the other row of terminal cavities in the connector. The second design has terminals cavities that are closer together (2.54 mm centerline) and aligned vertically. One other way to identify the second design is the thin strip of material that runs along the outside of the cavities. Note: There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W terminals which are very similar. Ensure that you have the correct terminal before crimping the new terminal to the wire. The first design connector uses the longer terminal (1) that has a raised area in front of the recess in the terminal. The second design connector uses the shorter terminal without the raised area. Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro-Pack 100W connectors. Some Micro-Pack 100W connector disassembly procedures will vary. Use this procedure as a guide. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3530 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Locate the nose piece locking tabs that are positioned on the side of the connector nose piece. The connector nose piece acts as a terminal positive assurance (TPA) and may be referred to as such. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to push in one of the locking tabs while gently pulling on the same side of the nose piece. 4. Repeat the procedure for the other locking tab and remove the nose piece. 5. Remove the wire dress cover. The following is a general procedure for wire dress cover removal. Use this procedure as a guide, some dress cover removal procedures may vary. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3531 6. Use fingers to squeeze the 2 locking legs of the cover. 7. Apply pressure and gently rock the cover until one locking leg is unseated. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3532 8. Continue to apply pressure and rock the cover until the second locking leg is unseated. Repeat procedure for the other side of the dress cover and remove the cover. 9. Use J 38125-12A to gently lift the terminal retaining tab while gently pulling the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. If the terminal is severely bent or damaged, it may be possible on some connectors to push the wire out of the front of the connector instead of pulling it through. This will prevent damage to the internal seals of the connector. Once the terminal is pushed out of the connector, cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible and pull the wire through the connector. Terminal Repair Procedure The Micro-Pack 100W connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool was developed to crimp Micro-Pack 100W terminals. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro-Pack 100 terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3533 1. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. Note: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gauge wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert the terminal into the crimp tool until the core wings are flush with the anvil on the crimp tool. Be sure that the wings are pointed toward the crimp tool former and release the spring locator. The locator will hold the terminal in place. Inspect the alignment of the terminal wings with the crimp tool former. If the terminal wings are wider than the crimp tool former, remove the terminal and bend the terminal wings in slightly. 5. Place stripped wire into terminal. 6. Crimp the new terminal to the wire. If a jam occurs, press the emergency release to open applicator. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3534 Terminal Replacement Procedure After the terminal is crimped to the wire perform the following procedure in order to replace Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the Terminal Removal Procedure. Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The following is the proper procedure for the repair of Weather Pack(R) Connectors. 1. Separate the connector halves (1). 2. Open the secondary lock. A secondary lock aids in terminal retention and is usually molded to the connector (1). 3. Grasp the wire and push the terminal to the forward most position. Hold the wire in this position. 4. Insert the Weather Pack(R) terminal removal tool J 38125-10A into the front (mating end) of the connector cavity until it rests on the cavity shoulder (1). 5. Gently pull on the wire to remove the terminal through the back of the connector (2). Note: Never use force to remove a terminal from a connector. 6. Inspect the terminal and connector for damage. Repair as necessary. Refer to Repairing Connector Terminals (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Repairing Connector Terminals). 7. Reform the lock tang (2) and reset terminal in connector body. 8. Close secondary locks and join connector halves. 9. Verify that circuit is complete and working satisfactorily. 10. Perform system check. Delphi Connectors (12-Way) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3535 Delphi Connectors (12-Way) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) and slide the lever lock away from the connector body. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs on the dress cover of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool release all of the locking tabs. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3536 4. Release the lower wire dress cover locking tab. 5. Release the upper wire dress cover locking tab. 6. Once the locks are unlocked, lift the dress cover off. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3537 Note: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 7. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the locking tabs on both sides of the TPA. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. 8. Remove the nose piece by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the locking tabs on both sides of the nose piece. Gently pry the nose piece out of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3538 9. Insert the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Delphi Connectors (Steering Gear) Delphi Connectors (Steering Gear) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3539 Removal Procedure 1. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the locking tab on the connector. 2. Push down the locking tab to release the connector. The small flat-bladed tool may need to be pushed down and angled back slightly to depress the locking tab. Pull on the connector body while releasing the locking tab to disconnect the connector. FCI Connectors (Lever Lock) FCI Connectors (Lever Lock) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3540 Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. 1. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. 2. The release tab is located on the top of the wiredress cover. 3. View of connector in released position. 4. Disconnect the connector from the component. 5. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the dress cover. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs and remove the dress cover. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3541 6. Use a small flat-blade tool to slide the terminal position assurance (TPA) up one notch on both ends of the connector. The TPA is located underneath the wire dress cover. For the larger terminals insert the J 38125-556 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. For the smaller terminals insert the J 38125-560 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3542 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. FCI (SIR) FCI Connectors (SIR) Removal Procedure Note: The orange CPA must be released first to disconnect or to connect the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3543 1. Lift the orange CPA vertically (avoid lifting on an angle to the connector) approximately 4 mm to release the connector. Use a small flat-bladed tool to help release the orange CPA. The orange CPA can also be released manually without any tools. 2. Grab the connector on both sides and lift the connector vertically to disconnect the connector. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3544 1. Lift the orange CPA vertically approximately 4 mm before installing the connector. Use a small flat-bladed tool to help release the orange CPA. The orange CPA can also be released manually without any tools. 2. Line up the connector key tabs with the initiator key slots. Grab the connector on both sides and push the connector down into the initiator connector sub assembly until fully seated. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3545 3. After the connector is fully seated, push down the orange CPA with your thumb. Push down until the orange CPA is touching the yellow cover on the connector. FEP Connectors (Steering Gear) FEP Connectors (Steering Gear) Removal Procedure 1. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the locking tab on the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3546 2. Push down the locking tab to release the connector. The small flat-bladed tool may need to be pushed down and angled back slightly to depress the locking tab. Pull on the connector body while releasing the locking tab to disconnect the connector. JST Connectors JST Connectors Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. While depressing the lock, remove the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3547 2. Locate the two indents of the terminal position assurance (TPA) located on the bottom of the connector body. Note: The TPA cannot be removed from the connector while there are terminals present in the connector body. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to very carefully raise the TPA on both sides of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3548 4. View of the TPA when removed from the connector body. 5. Use the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the left side of the terminal release cavity as shown in the graphic. Use the tool to move the terminal release to the right with a gentle prying motion. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Kostal Connectors (Glow Plug Control Module) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3549 Kostal Connectors (Glow Plug Control Module) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure View of typical connector. View of connector in released position. 1. Locate the assist lever at the back of the connector. Move the assist lever to the rear position. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3550 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove the dress cover. 4. Slide the dress cover forward and off of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3551 5. The terminal positive assurance (TPA) is located in the front and rear of the connector. Note: The front TPA cannot be removed from the connector. Only move it to the preset position. 6. Use a small flat-blade tool to move the front TPA to the preset position, outboard approximately 0.125 in. (3 mm). 7. Use a small flat-blade tool to completely remove the rear TPA from the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3552 8. Use the J 38125-24 or the J 38125-560 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 9. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Kostal Connectors (Transmission) Kostal Connectors (Transmission) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3553 1. While depressing the lock, twist and remove the connector from the component. 2. Locate the terminal position assurance (TPA). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3554 Note: The TPA cannot be removed from the connector while there are terminals present in the connector body. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to push the TPA until it bottoms out. 4. Use the J 38125-28 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal cavity as shown in the graphic. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 5. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Terminal Replacement Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3555 After the terminal is crimped to the wire, perform the following procedure in order to replace the terminal. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. Locate the terminal position assurance (TPA). 4. Use a small flat-blade tool to push the TPA until it bottoms out. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3556 5. Ensure the TPA is fully seated. The TPA should be centered and flush with the connector body when viewed. Molex Connectors Molex Connectors Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the top of the wire dress cover. Slide the CPA forward. 2. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3557 3. The lever should be in the full forward position. 4. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3558 5. Remove the dress cover by using a flat bladed tool to release the dress cover locking tabs and lift up on the dress cover. 6. Cut the tie wrap that holds the wires to the connector body. 7. Use a small flat-blade tool to pry one side of the nose piece up to the pre-stage position. When the nose piece is in the pre-staged position, the nose piece will be raised above the connector body the length of the step in the nose piece. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3559 8. Use a small flat-blade tool to pry the other side of the piece to the pre-stage position. If the nose piece is higher than the first step in the nose piece, gently push down on the nose piece until it meets with resistance from the connector body, you should feel the nose piece click into position. 9. Insert the J 38125-213 into the small terminal release hole on the nose piece and gently pull on the back of the wire. 10. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Refer to the terminal crimping procedure in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit. Terminal Replacement Procedure After the terminal is crimped to the wire, perform the following procedure in order to replace the terminal. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3560 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the connector disassembly procedure. Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the connector body and pull the CPA out. The CPA is on the wire harness side of connector. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Use a small flat-bladed tool to gently pry off the dress cover by inserting the tool under the cover opposite the harness side and prying up. 4. Remove the cover. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3561 5. Using a small flat-bladed tool, push on the side of the nose piece retainer while pushing the nose piece forward with your thumb. This will release the terminal position assurance (TPA). 6. Insert the J 38125-12A into the corresponding terminal release cavity. The release cavities are the 2 center rows of cavities on one half of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3562 7. Pressing the J 38125-12A tool in the release cavity of the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and crimper in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. Slide the lever lock away from the connector body. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs on the dress cover of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool release all of the locking tabs. 4. Once the locks are unlocked, lift the dress cover off. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3563 Note: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 5. Release the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the blue locking tabs on both ends of the connector. Gently slide the TPA up to the released position on both ends. 6. For the larger terminals insert the J 38125-13A tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. For the smaller terminals insert the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3564 View of the release tool being used for the larger terminals. View of the release tool being used for the larger terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3565 View of the release tool being used for the smaller terminals. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3566 Side view of connector. View of top of connector. 1. Locate the assist lever and lock on the top of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3567 2. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. 3. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3568 4. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the rear of the connector. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. 5. Once the locking tabs are unlocked, slide the inner connector out of the rear of the connector housing. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3569 6. Use the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by pressing on the tang. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Repairing Connector Terminals Repairing Connector Terminals Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Use the following repair procedures in order to repair the following: * Push to Seat terminals * Pull to Seat terminals Some terminals do not require all of the steps shown. Skip the steps that do not apply for your terminal repair. The J-38125 contains further information. 1. Cut off the terminal between the core and the insulation crimp. Minimize any wire loss. For cable seal terminals, remove the seal. 2. Apply the correct cable seal per gauge size of the wire, if used. Slide the seal back along the wire in order to enable insulation removal. 3. Remove the insulation. 4. For sealed terminals only, align the seal with the end of the cable insulation. 5. Position the strip in the terminal. For sealed terminals, position the strip and seal in the terminal. 6. Hand crimp the core wings. 7. Hand crimp the insulation wings. For sealed terminals, hand crimp the insulation wings around the seal and the cable. 8. Solder all of the hand crimp terminals excepting Micro-Pack 100.64 size. Soldering Micro-Pack 100 World terminals may damage the terminal. Sumitomo Connectors Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3570 Sumitomo Connectors Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3571 3. Remove the dress cover by using a flat-blade tool to release the connector locking tabs and pulling off the dress cover. 4. Relieve the tension on the nose piece retainers by inserting J 38125-12A into the single retainer slot on the end of the nose piece and gently prying out the locking tab. Repeat the process for both of the nose piece locking tabs on the opposite side of the nose piece. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3572 5. Once the nose piece retainers are relaxed, use the J 38125-552 to pull up the nose piece by hooking the tool under the nose piece and pulling up. The nose piece should raise slightly. 6. On the opposite side of the nose piece, use the J 38125-552 to pull up the nose piece by hooking the tool under the nose piece and pulling up. The nose piece should release completely. If the nose piece does not come off, repeat the procedure on the opposite side. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3573 7. The illustration above identifies the entry canal where the terminal release tool will be inserted, and the terminal cavity. * Terminal (1) * Entry Canal (2) 8. Insert the J 38125-553 tool into the entry canal and pry up on the terminal retainer. The terminal retainer is a small plastic piece on the top of the terminal. The terminal retainer must be held up while the terminal is pulled out of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3574 9. The illustration shows a cutaway view of the connector to aid the technician in releasing the terminal retainer. 10. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Refer to the terminal crimping procedure in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit. Terminal Replacement Procedure After the terminal is crimped to the wire, perform the following procedure in order to replace the terminal. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the connector disassembly procedure. Terminal Position Assurance Locks Terminal Position Assurance Locks The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3575 2. Insert the J 38125-11A tool into the cavity on the lower right hand face of the connector until the terminal release tang access panel slides over. 3. Ensure that the terminal release tang access panel is in the correct location to access the terminals. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3576 5. Insert the J 38125-11A into the terminal release tang access slot located behind the access panel of the connector and press down on the terminal while carefully pulling the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component by pressing down on the connector position assurance (CPA). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3577 2. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting the tool in the small recess on the side of the connector and pushing up until the TPA releases from the connector body. The TPA should raise just slightly. Do not try to remove the TPA. Note: The TPA on this connector cannot be removed unless the terminals are removed first. The TPA will come out of the connector body, but only slightly. When the TPA is slightly raised the terminals can be removed. Using excessive force to remove the TPA with the terminals still in the connector will damage the connector. 3. Repeat the process for the other side of the connector. 4. Ensure that the TPA is in the proper position to remove the terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3578 5. While pushing the terminal forward, insert the J 38125-24 in the release cavity above the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3579 2. Insert a small flat-blade tool in the slot below the front loaded terminal position assurance (TPA) and pry up. 3. Remove the TPA by pulling it out of the connector. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-553 on a slight upward angle into the cavity below the terminal to be removed. Ensure that the pointed on the end of the tool is facing the bottom of the terminal and it stays in contact with the terminal until it stops on the plastic terminal retainer. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3580 6. Gently pry the plastic terminal retainer down and carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3581 1. While depressing the lock, pull the two connector halves apart. Note: The TPA is fragile and may break if not done carefully. 2. Use a small flat-blade tool to very carefully push the terminal position assurance (TPA) towards the face of the connector on both sides of the connector. 3. View of the male half of the connector with female terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3582 4. View of the female half of the connector with male terminals. 5. Use the J 38125-215 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. View of the female half of the connector with male terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3583 7. View of the male half of the connector with female terminals. 8. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers A circuit breaker is a protective device that is designed to open the circuit when a current load is in excess of the rated breaker capacity. If there is a short or other type of overload condition in the circuit, the excessive current will open the circuit between the circuit breaker terminals. Two types of circuit breakers are used. Circuit Breaker - This type opens when excessive current passes through it for a period of time. It closes again after a few seconds, and if the cause of the high current is still present, it will open again. The circuit breaker will continue to cycle open and closed until the condition causing the high current is removed. Positive Temperature Coefficient (PTC) Circuit Breaker - This type greatly increases its resistance when excessive current passes through it. The excessive current heats the PTC device, as the device heats its resistance increases. Eventually the resistance gets so high that the circuit is effectively open. Unlike the ordinary circuit breaker the PTC unit will not reset until the circuit is opened, by removing the voltage from its terminals. Once the voltage is removed the circuit breaker will re-close within a second or 2. Circuit Protection - Fuses Circuit Protection - Fuses Special Tools EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM) For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3584 The fuse is the most common method of an automotive wiring circuit protection. Whenever there is an excessive amount of current flowing through a circuit the fusible element will melt and create an open or incomplete circuit. Fuses are a one time protection device and must be replaced each time the circuit is overloaded. To determine if a fuse is open, remove the suspected fuse and examine if the element in the fuse is broken (2). If not broken (1), also check for continuity using a Digital Multimeter (DMM) or a continuity tester. If the element is broken or continuity is suspect, replace the fuse with one of equal current rating. Circuit Protection - Fusible Links Circuit Protection - Fusible Links Special Tools EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM) For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Fusible link is wire designed to melt and break continuity when excessive current is applied. It is often located between or near the battery and starter or electrical center. Use a continuity tester or a Digital Multimeter (DMM) at each end of the wire containing the fusible link in order to determine if it is broken. If broken, it must be replaced with fusible link of the same gauge size. Repairing a Fusible Link Note: Fusible links cut longer than 225 mm (approximately 9 in) will not provide sufficient overload protection. Flat Wire Repairs Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3585 Flat Wire Repairs The flat wire within the flex wiring harness is not serviceable. If an open or short exists within the flex wiring harness the complete harness must be replaced. GMLAN Wiring Repairs GMLAN Wiring Repairs Special Tools * EL-38125-10 - Splice Sleeve Crimping Tool * J 38125-5 - Ultra Torch Special Tool * DuraSeal splice sleeves * A wire stripping tool For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: * A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. * A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The GM Local Area Network (GMLAN) System requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working on GMLAN connectors and terminals. GMLAN Repairs Note: When making a repair to any GMLAN network, the original wire length after the repair must be the same length as before the repair. If the network is a twisted pair, the twist must be maintained after the repair is completed. GMLAN has 2 types of networks, low speed and high speed. Low speed GMLAN has a single wire and works at slow speeds. High speed GMLAN has 2 wires in a twisted pair and works at higher speeds. For more information on GMLAN, refer to Data Link Communications Description and Operation ( See: Description and Operation). GMLAN Connector Terminal Repair Note: A terminated lead can be used to replace damaged connector terminals for both high speed and low speed GMLAN systems. When making a connector terminal repair on a GMLAN high speed system with twisted pair wires, do not untwist the wires more than necessary to make the repair. If the individual terminals are damaged on any GMLAN connection, use the appropriate connector repair procedure in order to repair the terminal. Refer to Connector Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Connector Repairs) for the appropriate connector repair procedure. GMLAN Wire Repair Note: Refer to Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Wiring Repairs) in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gauge size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and EL-38125-10 - tool. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the DuraSeal splice sleeves. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3586 Note: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: * Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. * Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. * Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert to regional wiring gauge size. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the EL-38125-10 - tool in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the splice sleeve crimp tool. The crimp tool has four nests, one for each color. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3587 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs Caution: Do not solder repairs under any circumstances as this could result in the air reference being obstructed. If the heated oxygen sensor pigtail wiring, connector, or terminal is damaged the entire oxygen sensor assembly must be replaced. Do not attempt to repair the wiring, connector, or terminals. In order for the sensor to function properly it must have a clean air reference. This clean air reference is obtained by way of the oxygen sensor signal and heater wires. Any attempt to repair the wires, connectors or terminals could result in the obstruction of the air reference and degrade oxygen sensor performance. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3588 The following guidelines should be used when servicing the heated oxygen sensor: * Do not apply contact cleaner or other materials to the sensor or vehicle harness connectors. These materials may get into the sensor, causing poor performance. Also, the sensor pigtail and harness wires must not be damaged in such a way that the wires inside are exposed. This could provide a path for foreign materials to enter the sensor and cause performance problems. * Neither the sensor nor vehicle lead wires should be bent sharply or kinked. Sharp bends, kinks, etc., could block the reference air path through the lead wire. * Do not remove or defeat the oxygen sensor ground wire (where applicable). Vehicles that utilize the ground wire sensor may rely on this ground as the only ground contact to the sensor. Removal of the ground wire will also cause poor engine performance. * To prevent damage due to water intrusion, be sure that the peripheral seal remains intact on the vehicle harness connector. High Temperature Wiring Repairs High Temperature Wiring Repairs Special Tools * EL-38125-10 - Splice Sleeve Crimping Tool * J 38125-5 - Ultra Torch * DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). High Temperature Wiring Wiring that is exposed to high temperatures, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time may use materials i.e. wires, connectors, and shielding that has a higher heat rating than typical wiring. When making a repair in a high temperature area observe the following: * Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature to replace any damaged wire. * Replace any heat shielding that is removed. * Cover any DuraSeal splice sleeves with SCT1 shrink tubing. * After making a wiring repair, ensure that the location of the wiring is not moved closer to the heat source. Identifying High Temperature Wiring Wiring that is exposed to high temperature, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time need special considerations when making wiring repairs. Areas that may be exposed to higher temperatures can be identified by heat resistant materials that are being used in those areas. These materials may include heat reflective tape, moon tape, and high temperature shrink tubing. Also conduit and other protective coverings may be used. Because conduit or similar coverings are used throughout the vehicle regardless of the temperature, it may be necessary for the technician to determine if an area is exposed to excessive heat before making a wiring repair. Obvious areas of consideration would be any area located near the exhaust manifolds, catalytic converter, and exhaust pipes. Items Required * DuraSeal splice sleeves to crimp and seal connections * High temperature SCT1 shrink tubing to protect the splice sleeves * Terminated leads or pigtails * The correct tools to remove the terminals from the connectors Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature of the same or larger gauge size as the original wire when repair damage wire. Also replace any reflective tape that you remove during the repair. High Temperature Wire Repair Note: Refer to Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Wiring Repairs) in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature rating of the same gauge size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the EL-38125-10 - tool and then encapsulate the splice sleeve using the high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3589 Note: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: * Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. * Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. * Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert to regional wiring gauge size. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Slide a section of high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing down the length of wire to be spliced. Ensure that the shrink tubing will not interfere with the splice procedure. 5. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 6. Use the EL-38125-10 - tool in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the splice sleeve crimp tool. The crimp tool has four nests, one for each color. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3590 7. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 8. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 9. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 10. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 11. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3591 12. Center the high temperature SCT1 shrink tube over the DuraSeal splice sleeve. 13. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the high temperature heat shrink tubing. 14. Gradually move the heat from the center to the open end of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. 15. Replace any reflective tape and clips that may have been remove during the repair. Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation If the wire insulation has been chafed, or broken, enough to show the conductive portion of the wire, and the wire is not damaged, determine the length of insulation that needs to be repaired. If the repair is less than 280 mm (11 in), cut the wire within the damaged area. Than slide the appropriate heat shrink tubing (listed below) over the wire, and repair the wire by splicing the wires together. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves). Once the wire is spliced together slide heat shrink tubing over the damaged area and apply heat to seal the repaired wire. If the wire is damaged, or the damaged area is larger than 280 mm (11 in), than replace the damaged wire by splicing in a new section of wire. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3592 SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs Special Tools * EL-38125-10 - Splice Sleeve Crimping Tool * J 38125-5 - Ultra Torch * DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: * A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. * A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides the necessary low resistance contact integrity for these sensitive, low energy circuits. The Supplemental Inflatable Restraint (SIR) System/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working with the SIR/SRS, and the wiring components, such as connectors and terminals. SIR/SRS Connector Repair (Plastic Body and Terminal Metal Pin) Note: Do not use the terminals in the kit in order to replace damaged SIR/SRS system terminals. Use either an SIR/SRS pigtail or a terminated lead from the SIR Repair Kit Tray. The terminals in the SIR/SRS system are made with a special plating. This plating provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. Pigtail repair packs are available for SIR/SRS connectors with eight or less terminals. Only the connector body is available for connectors with more than eight terminals. Terminated leads can be used to replace damaged terminals when replacing the connector body. SIR/SRS Component Wire Pigtail Repair Note: Do not make wire, connector, or terminal repairs on components with wire pigtails. A wire pigtail is a wire or wires attached directly to the device, not by a connector. If a wiring pigtail is damaged, you must replace the entire component, with pigtail. The inflatable restraint steering wheel module coil is an example of a pigtail component. SIR/SRS Wire Repair Note: Refer to Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Wiring Repairs) in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3593 If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gauge size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and EL-38125-10 - tool. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the DuraSeal splice sleeves. Note: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: * Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. * Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. * Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert to regional wiring gauge size. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the EL-38125-10 - tool in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the splice sleeve crimp tool. The crimp tool has four nests, one for each color. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3594 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Connector Position Assurance (CPA) The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of a connector. CPAs are used in all SIR System connectors and also in some connectors of other systems. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals of a connection. Terminal Position Assurance (TPA) The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3595 Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Special Tools * EL-38125-10 - Splice Sleeve Crimping Tool * J 38125-5 - Ultra Torch * DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Note: Use only DuraSeal splice sleeves. Other splice sleeves may not protect the splice from moisture or provide a good electrical connection. Use DuraSeal splice sleeves to form a one-to-one splice on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. Use DuraSeal splice sleeves where there is special requirements such as moisture sealing. Follow the instructions below in order to splice copper wire using DuraSeal splice sleeves. Note: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: * Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. * Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. * Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert to regional wiring gauge size. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3596 5. Use the EL-38125-10 - tool in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the splice sleeve crimp tool. The crimp tool has four nests, one for each color. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3597 * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Splicing Inline Harness Diodes Splicing Inline Harness Diodes Many vehicle electrical systems use a diode to isolate circuits and protect the components from voltage spikes. When installing a new diode use the following procedure. 1. Open the harness. * If the harness is taped, remove the tape. * To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing seam ripper (available from sewing supply stores) in order to cut open the harness. * If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the diode. 2. If the diode is taped to the harness, remove all of the tape. 3. Check and record the current flow direction and orientation of diode. 4. Remove the inoperative diode from the harness with a suitable soldering tool. Note: If the diode is located next to a connector terminal remove the terminal(s) from the connector to prevent damage from the soldering tool. 5. Carefully strip away a section of insulation next to the old soldered portion of the wire(s). Do not remove any more than is needed to attach the new diode. 6. Check current flow direction of the new diode, being sure to install the diode with correct bias. Reference the appropriate service manual wiring schematic to obtain the correct diode installation position. 7. Attach the new diode to the wire(s) using 60/40 rosin core solder. Before soldering attach some heat sinks (aluminum alligator clips) across the diode wire ends to protect the diode from excessive heat. Follow the manufacturer's instruction for the soldering equipment. 8. Reinstall terminal(s) into the connector body if previously removed. Note: To prevent shorts to ground and water intrusion, completely cover all exposed wire and diode attachment points with tape. 9. Tape the diode to the harness or connector using electrical tape. Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable Twisted/shielded cable is used in order to protect wiring from electrical noise. Two-conductor cable of this construction is used between the radio and the Delco-Bose(R) speaker/amplifier units and other applications where low level, sensitive signals must be carried. Follow the instructions below in order to repair the twisted/shielded cable. 1. Remove the outer jacket (1). Use care not to cut into the drain wire of the mylar tape. 2. Unwrap the tape. Do not remove the tape. Use the tape in order to rewrap the twisted conductors after the splice is made. 3. Prepare the splice. Untwist the conductors and follow the instructions for Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves). Staggering the splices by 65 mm (2.5 in) is recommended. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3598 Note: Apply the mylar tape with the aluminum side inward. This ensures good electrical contact with the drain wire. 4. Re-assemble the cable. * Rewrap the conductors with the mylar tape. If the mylar tape is damaged, use 3M product AL-36FR to replace the damaged mylar tape. * Use caution not to wrap the drain wire in the tape (1). * Follow the splicing instructions for copper wire and splice the drain wire. * Wrap the drain wire around the conductors and tape with electrical tape to replace the outer insulation. 5. Tape over the entire cable. Use a winding motion when you apply the tape. Wiring Repairs Wiring Repairs The Wiring Repairs section contains the following types of wiring repair information. Using these elements together will make wiring repair faster and easier: * Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections) * Flat Wire Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Flat Wire Repairs) * GMLAN Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/GMLAN Wiring Repairs) * High Temperature Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/High Temperature Wiring Repairs) * Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs) * Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves) * Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable) * Splicing Inline Harness Diodes (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Inline Harness Diodes) * SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs) US English/Metric Conversion US English/Metric Conversion Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3599 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3600 Basic Digital Multimeter Requirements Basic Digital Multimeter Requirements Digital Multimeter (DMM) Basic Requirements Service information is validated using digital multimeters that meet or exceed the following requirements. Using a multimeter that does not meet these basic requirements may give inaccurate readings which could lead to an incorrect diagnosis. Display and Settings 1. Four digits displayed 2. Voltage, amperage, resistance, frequency, diode test settings, and min-max function 3. Display positive and negative values Voltage 1. Have at least 10 Mohm input impedance 2. Test a DC voltage range of 0.1-1000 V. 3. Test an AC voltage range of 0.1-1000 V. Amperage 1. Test a DC amperage range of 0.1µA-10 A. 2. Test an AC amperage range of 0.1µA-10 A. Resistance Test a resistance range of 0.1 ohm-40 Mohm and displays infinite for a value greater than 40 Mohm (O.L. (Over-load)) Frequency Test for a frequency range of 0.5 HZ-199 K HZ Diode Test 1. Apply at least 1 mA when performing the diode bias test 2. Display the break over voltage drop (0-3 V) of a forward biased diode 3. Display infinite (O.L. (Over-load)) when a diode is reverse biased Min-Max Readings 1. Can update at a 1 ms sample rate 2. Saves and displays minimum and maximum values Testing Ground and Low Reference Circuits Testing Ground and Low Reference Circuits Because a test lamp can light with up to 200 ohm in a ground or low reference circuit they are not recommended to be used for this type of test. A low impedance test lamp can light and indicate the circuit is good when there is as much as 20-30 ohm present, while a high impedance test lamp can light with up to 200 ohm present in the circuit. This is why the Digital Multi-Meter (DMM) is used when validating a ground or low reference circuit continuity. When using the DMM there are many vehicle conditions that can affect the ground and low reference continuity testing. If these conditions are not met, a ground or low reference circuit test can fail on a good circuit. This may cause longer diagnosis time and incorrect component replacement. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3601 Any current flow through a ground or low reference circuit, while being tested, will skew the DMM continuity reading, or display a reading higher than when there is no current flowing. Performing a ground or low reference circuit continuity test, in reference to the vehicles battery negative terminal, will have the highest risk of failing a good ground or low reference circuit test than any other ground reference point. The best ground test points would be a control module housing (if the control modules housing is metal and grounded), door jamb striker (if attached to metal), under dash metal frame work, engine block, or body ground studs (other than where the negative battery cable is attached). A typical DMM ground or low reference circuit continuity reading can be as high as 100 ohm with the ignition ON, and drop to 15-25 ohm after the ignition is turned OFF. The reading will drop below 10 ohm after 30-40 seconds, then below 5 ohm after 60 seconds. Once the vehicle completely goes to sleep (generally 3-10 minutes) the reading will drop below 0.3 ohm. The following list of conditions may need to be met to ensure a valid continuity reading on a ground or low reference circuit: * Ignition OFF * Key out of the ignition switch (when not equipped with keyless entry and remote start) * Retained Accessory Power (RAP) OFF (open and close the driver door after ignition OFF) * Battery charger set at a 2 A or less charge rate * Scan tool not communicating with any vehicle control module (in some cases it may need to be disconnected from the DLC) * All entry doors closed * Headlamps OFF (auto headlamps disabled) * Any delay lighting OFF * HVAC after blow OFF * Any accessory that can work when the ignition is OFF * Wait up to 60 seconds (after all other listed conditions are met) Activating the DOOR LOCK function with a key fob can greatly reduce the time to achieve a valid ground or low reference continuity test result. Terminal Wiring Repair Terminal Wiring Repair Special Tools * EL-38125-10 - Splice Sleeve Crimp Tool * EL-38125-580 - Terminal Release Tool Kit * J-38125-5 - Ultra Torch * EL-35616 - Connector Test Adapter Kit For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Note: All repairs near the engine manifold, turbo engine and all exhaust pipes should follow the High Temperature Wiring Repair procedures. 1. Find the appropriate connector end view within the connector end view section. The connector end view has the following information: * Diagnostic probe tool * Terminal release tool * Terminal/terminated lead part numbers 2. Determine if a terminal is damaged. Note: Not using the proper test kit probe may cause damage to the terminal(s) that are probed. * Locate the diagnostic probe tool from the connector end view. The connector end view describes the color and part number to help the technician find and use the correct tool. * Connect the probe tool to the Digital Multimeter. * Insert the probe tool into the cavity and follow the procedures from the Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter). 3. Disconnect the connector body to perform the repair. Note: Several procedures for specific connector bodies are called out in Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Wiring Repairs). Use the following repair procedures to repair the following terminals: Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3602 Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack))Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Push to Seat))Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Pull to Seat))Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W))Delphi Connectors (Micro.64) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Micro .64) )Delphi Connectors (12-Way) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (12-Way))Delphi Connectors (Steering Gear) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Steering Gear)) * The TPA and CPA should be removed before releasing the terminal for the connector body. * Look at the connector end view to locate the cavity of the damaged terminal and find the proper terminal release tool from the terminal release tool kit. Note: Using the incorrect terminal release tool can damage the connector body. * Insert the terminal release tool into the cavity. Note: Some terminals have a lever that must be disengaged before the terminal can be released. Gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Terminated Lead Repair Terminated Lead Repair Special Tools * EL-38125-10 - Splice Sleeve Crimp Tool * EL-38125-580 - Terminal Release Tool Kit * J-38125-5 - Ultra Torch * EL-35616 - Connector Test Adapter Kit For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Note: All repairs near the engine manifold, turbo engine and all exhaust pipes should follow the High Temperature Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/High Temperature Wiring Repairs) procedures. Terminated leads are terminals that are crimped onto wires. The terminated lead can be used throughout the vehicle since it is designed for temperatures up to 150°C. The length of the wire is 450 mm. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3603 The DuraSeal splice sleeve has the following 2 critical features: * A special heat shrink tubing that environmentally seals the splice. The shrink tubing contains a sealing adhesive inside the shrink tubing. * A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp that provides the necessary contact integrity for sensitive low energy circuits. 1. Use the connector end view to identify the correct terminated lead. 2. The terminated lead package should include a DuraSeal splice sleeve. If not, use the chart to identify the correct part. 3. Open the harness by removing any tape: Use a sewing seam ripper, or a comparable tool, to cut open the harness, to avoid wire insulation damage. 4. Depending on how many terminals need repairs, cut the terminal and wire back at least 40 mm. Try to keep the harness wire length the same. If more than one terminated lead is required, stagger the lengths by 40 mm. This helps reduce the bundle size of the wire harness. 5. Use the EL-38125-10 - tool in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the splice sleeve crimp tool. The crimp tool has four nests, one for each color. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3604 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the J-38125-5 - ultra torch , apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3605 Information Bus: Electrical Diagrams Data Communication Schematics Low Speed GMLAN (1 of 2) Low Speed GMLAN (2 of 2) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3606 High Speed GMLAN (1 of 2) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3607 High Speed GMLAN (2 of 2) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3608 Enable Serial Data Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3609 BCM Local Interconnect Network (LIN) Bus 1, 2, 3, 4 and Memory Seat LIN Bus Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3610 Radio/HVAC Local Interconnect Network (LIN) Bus and CAN Graphical Interface Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3611 Chassis Expansion Bus Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3612 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3613 Information Bus: Description and Operation Data Link Communications Description and Operation Circuit Description The communication among control modules is performed through the high speed GMLAN serial data circuit, the chassis high speed GMLAN serial data circuit, the mid speed GMLAN serial data circuit, and the low speed GMLAN serial data circuit. The modules that need real time communication are attached to the high speed GMLAN network and the chassis high speed GMLAN network. The body control module (BCM) is the gateway between the networks. The purpose of the gateway is to translate serial data messages between the high speed GMLAN bus and the low speed GMLAN bus. The gateway will interact with each network according to that network's transmission protocol. Refer to Body Control System Description and Operation ( See: Body and Frame/Body Control Systems/Description and Operation) for more information about the gateway. High Speed GMLAN Circuit Description The data link connector (DLC) allows a scan tool to communicate with the high speed GMLAN serial data circuit. The serial data is transmitted on two twisted wires that allow speed up to 500 Kb/s. The twisted pair is terminated with 120 ohms resistors. The resistors are used to reduce noise on the high speed GMLAN bus during normal vehicle operation. The high speed GMLAN is a differential bus. The high speed GMLAN serial data bus (+) and high speed GMLAN serial data (-) are driven to opposite extremes from a rest or idle level. The idle level, which is approximately 2.5 volts, is considered recessive transmitted data and is interpreted as a logic 1. Driving the lines to their extremes, adds one volt to the high speed GMLAN serial data bus (+) and subtracts one volt from the high speed GMLAN serial data bus (-) wire. This dominant state is interpreted as a logic 0. GMLAN network management supports selective start up and is based on virtual networks. A virtual network is a collection of signals started in response to a vehicle event. The starting of a virtual network signifies that a particular aspect of the vehicles functionality has been requested. A virtual network is supported by virtual devices, which represents a collection of signals owned by a single physical device. So, any physical device can have one or more virtual devices. The signal supervision is the process of determining whether an expected signal is being received or not. Failsofting is the ability to substitute a signal with a default value or a default algorithm, in the absence of a valid signal. Some messages are also interpreted as a heartbeat of a virtual device. If such a signal is lost, the application will set a no communication code against the respective virtual device. Note: a loss of serial data DTC does not represent a failure of the module that the code is set in. Chassis High Speed GMLAN Circuit Description The high speed GMLAN chassis expansion bus functions the same as the high speed GMLAN bus, and the two buses operate in parallel. The expansion chassis bus was added to reduce message congestion on the primary high speed bus. Since the high speed GMLAN chassis bus and primary high speed GMLAN bus operate in the same manner, the diagnostics for each are the same. Mid Speed GMLAN Circuit Description The data link connector (DLC) allows a scan tool to communicate with the mid speed GMLAN serial data circuit. Modules connected to the mid speed GMLAN serial data circuit monitor for serial data communications during normal vehicle operation. Operating information and commands are exchanged among the modules when the ignition switch is in any position other than OFF. The mid speed GMLAN serial data bus uses a terminating resistor that is in parallel with the mid speed GMLAN (+) and (-) circuits. Low Speed GMLAN Circuit Description The data link connector (DLC) allows a scan tool to communicate with the low speed GMLAN serial data circuit. The serial data is transmitted over a single wire to the appropriate control modules. The transmission speed for low speed GMLAN is up to 83.33 Kb/s. Under normal vehicle operating conditions, the speed of the bus is 33.33 Kb/s. This protocol produces a simple pulse train sent out over the low speed GMLAN serial data bus. When a module pulls the bus high, 5 volts, this creates a dominant logic state or 0 on the bus. When the bus is pulled low, 0 volts, it is translated as a recessive logic state or 1. To wake the control modules connected to the low speed GMLAN serial data bus, a high voltage wake up pulse is sent out over the bus, the voltage level of the pulse is +10 volts. Modules connected to the low speed GMLAN bus can be part of a virtual network as described in the previous paragraph. The modules on the low speed GMLAN serial data bus are connected to the bus in a parallel configuration. Local Interconnect Network (LIN) Circuit Description Serial data is transmitted over a Local Interconnect Network (LIN) single wire network circuit bus between a primary control module and other control modules within a particular subsystem. If serial data communication is lost between any of the control modules on the LIN bus network, a no communication code against the non-communicating control module will be set. CAN Graphical Interface (CGI) Circuit Description The CAN graphical interface (CGI) is a high speed UART-based serial data interface utilizing a CAN physical layer. It is used by the Entertainment sub-system to transfer high-rate display graphics between the Radio and the Info Display Module and/or Radio/HVAC Control. In the case where the Info Display Module and Radio/HVAC Control are separate control modules, the Radio interfaces only with the Info Display Module and the Info Display Module communicates with the Radio/HVAC Control through a LIN interface. The Info Display Module therefore is responsible for passing information between the Radio and the Radio/HVAC Control. A bus wake up signal will be generated by the Radio or by the Info Display Module when Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3614 the systems functionality is required. Once the CGI network is awake, all message transfers on the CGI are initiated by the Radio. Slave devices such as the Info Display Module and Radio/HVAC Control may not transmit unless they are responding to a request from the Radio. Dual wire CGI networks have a termination resistance between the CGI+ (CAN- High) and CGI(CAN- Low) conductors at each end of the bus. Each termination resistance is 120 ohms. The communication function of the CGI shall be enabled or disabled based on the voltage level of a dedicated input (typically called "Center Stack Wake"). The network will stay awake as long as this discrete signal is driven low to less than 1.5 V. When the Radio determines that the communication bus needs to be operational or active, it shall generate the wake-up signal by pulling this signal circuit low. The Radio can execute a warm reset of the Info Display Module if the Info Display Module fails to respond to Radio's request via the CGI interface. Center Stack Reset is a low-asserted pull down output (less than 1.5 V) from the Radio to the Info Display Module and has the same electrical characteristics as those for the Center Stack Wake signal defined above. Data Link Connector (DLC) The data link connector (DLC) is a standardized 16-cavity connector. Connector design and location is dictated by an industry wide standard, and is required to provide the following: * Pin 1 Low speed GMLAN communications terminal * Pin 3 Mid speed GMLAN serial bus (+) terminal * Pin 4 Scan tool power ground terminal * Pin 5 Common signal ground terminal * Pin 6 High speed GMLAN serial data bus (+) terminal * Pin 11 Mid speed GMLAN serial bus (-) terminal * Pin 12 Chassis high speed GMLAN serial bus terminal * Pin 13 Chassis high speed GMLAN serial bus terminal * Pin 14 High speed GMLAN serial data bus (-) terminal * Pin 16 Scan tool power, battery positive voltage terminal Serial Data Reference The scan tool communicates over the various buses on the vehicle. When a scan tool is installed on a vehicle, the scan tool will try to communicate with every module that could be optioned into the vehicle. If an option is not installed on the vehicle, the scan tool will display No Comm for that options control module. In order to avert misdiagnoses of No Communication with a specific module, refer to Data Link References (See: Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview) for a list of modules, the buses they communicate with, and the RPO codes for a specific module. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview Information Bus: Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview Data Link References This table identifies which serial data link that a particular module uses for in-vehicle data transmission. Some modules may use more than one data link to communicate. Some modules may have multiple communication circuits passing through them without actively communicating on that data link. This table is used to assist in correcting a communication malfunction. Not all modules listed will be applicable to all vehicles. Refer to the schematics to determine which modules apply. For the description and operation of these serial data communication circuits refer to Data Link Communications Description and Operation (See: Description and Operation). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 3617 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 3618 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 3619 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 3620 Information Bus: Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures Symptoms - Data Communications Symptoms - Data Communications Important: The following steps must be completed before using the symptom tables. 1. Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle (See: Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle) before using the symptom tables in order to verify that all of the following are true: * There are no DTCs set. * The control modules can communicate via the serial data links. 2. Review the system operation in order to familiarize yourself with the system functions. Refer to Data Link Communications Description and Operation (See: Description and Operation). Visual/Physical Inspection * Inspect for aftermarket devices which could affect the operation of the systems. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Checking Aftermarket Accessories). * Inspect the easily accessible or visible system components for obvious damage or conditions which could cause the symptom. Intermittent Faulty electrical connections or wiring may be the cause of intermittent conditions. Refer to Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections ( See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections). Symptom List Refer to a symptom diagnostic procedure from the following list in order to diagnose the symptom: * Scan Tool Does Not Power Up (See: Scan Tool Does Not Power Up) * Scan Tool Does Not Communicate with High Speed GMLAN Device (See: Scan Tool Does Not Communicate with High Speed GMLAN Device) * Scan Tool Does Not Communicate with Mid Speed GMLAN Device (See: Scan Tool Does Not Communicate with Mid Speed GMLAN Device) * Scan Tool Does Not Communicate with Low Speed GMLAN Device (See: Scan Tool Does Not Communicate with Low Speed GMLAN Device ) * Scan Tool Does Not Communicate with Chassis High Speed GMLAN Device (See: Scan Tool Does Not Communicate with Chassis High Speed GMLAN Device) Scan Tool Does Not Communicate with Chassis High Speed GMLAN Device Scan Tool Does Not Communicate with Chassis High Speed GMLAN Device Diagnostic Instructions * Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle (See: Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle) prior to using this diagnostic procedure. * Review Strategy Based Diagnosis (See: Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Strategy Based Diagnosis) for an overview of the diagnostic approach. * Diagnostic Procedure Instructions (See: Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Diagnostic Procedure Instructions) provides an overview of each diagnostic category. Diagnostic Fault Information Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 3621 Circuit/System Description The GMLAN high speed chassis expansion bus functions the same as the GMLAN high speed bus, and the two buses operate in parallel. The expansion chassis bus was added to reduce message congestion on the primary high speed bus. Since the GMLAN high speed chassis bus and primary GMLAN high speed bus operate in the same manner, the diagnostics for each are the same. The serial data is transmitted on two twisted wires that allow speeds up to 500 Kb/s. The twisted pair is terminated with two 120 ohms resistors, one is internal to the engine control module (ECM) and the other can be a separate resistor in a connector assembly or in another control module. The resistors are used as the load for the High Speed GMLAN buss during normal vehicle operation. The high speed GMLAN is a differential bus. The high speed GMLAN serial data bus (+) and high speed GMLAN serial data (-) are driven to opposite extremes from a rest or idle level of approximately 2.5 V. Driving the lines to their extremes, adds one volt to the high speed GMLAN serial data bus (+) circuit and subtracts one volt from the high speed GMLAN serial data bus (-) circuit. If serial data is lost, control modules will set a no communication code against the non-communicating control module. Note that a loss of serial data DTC does not represent a failure of the module that set it. Diagnostic Aids * Sometimes, while diagnosing a specific customer concern or after a repair, you may notice a history U-code present. However, there is no associated "current" or "active" status. Loss-of-communication U-codes such as these can set for a variety of reasons. Many times, they are transparent to the vehicle operator and technician, and/or have no associated symptoms. Eventually, they will erase themselves automatically after a number of fault-free ignition cycles. This condition would most likely be attributed to one of these scenarios: - A control module on the data communication circuit was disconnected while the communication circuit is awake. - Power to one or more modules was interrupted during diagnosis - A low battery condition was present, so some control modules stop communicating when battery voltage drops below a certain threshold. - Battery power was restored to the vehicle and control modules on the communication circuit did not all re-initialize at the same time. - If a loss-of-communication U-code appears in history for no apparent reason, it is most likely associated with one of the scenarios above. These are all temporary conditions and should never be interpreted as an intermittent fault, causing you to replace a part. * Do not replace a control module reporting a U code. The U code identifies which control module needs to be diagnosed for a communication issue. * Communication may be available between the BCM and the scan tool with the high speed GMLAN serial data system inoperative. This condition is due to the BCM using both the high and low speed GMLAN systems. * An open in the DLC ground circuit terminal 5 will allow the scan tool to operate but not communicate with the vehicle. * The engine will not start when there is a total malfunction of the high speed GMLAN serial data bus. * Technicians may find various Local Area Network (LAN) communication Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTC) and no low speed GMLAN communications with the scan tool. * The engine will not start when there is a total malfunction of the high speed GMLAN serial data bus. These conditions may be caused by the installation of an aftermarket navigation radio module (see bulletins). Some customers may comment of one or more of the following concerns: - Vehicle will not crank - Vehicle cranks but will not start - Vehicle stability enhancement system warning lights and messages - PRNDL gear indicator position errors Reference Information Schematic Reference * Data Communication Schematics (See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams) * Control Module References (See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning) Connector End View Reference Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 3622 Component Connector End Views (See: Diagrams/Connector Views) Description and Operation Data Link Communications Description and Operation (See: Description and Operation) Electrical Information Reference * Circuit Testing (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Circuit Testing) * Connector Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Connector Repairs) * Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections) * Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Wiring Repairs) Scan Tool Reference Control Module References (See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning) for scan tool information Circuit/System Testing Note: Each control module may need to be disconnected to isolate a circuit fault. Use the schematic to identify the following: * Control modules the vehicle is equipped with * Chassis high speed GMLAN serial data circuit terminating resistors * Control module locations on the chassis high speed GMLAN serial data circuits * Each control module chassis high speed GMLAN serial data circuit terminals 1. Attempt to communicate with all control modules on the high speed GMLAN serial data circuit. Refer to Data Link References (See: Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview). Communications should not be available with two or more control modules on the chassis high speed GMLAN serial data circuit. ‹› If only one control module is not communicating, diagnose that control module only. Refer to DTC U0100-U02FF (See: Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures/U Code Charts/U0100). 2. Disconnect the scan tool from the DLC. The following tests will be done at the DLC connector. 3. All access doors closed, ignition OFF for 60 seconds, test for less than 10 ohm between the ground circuit terminal 5 and ground. ‹› If greater than the specified range, test the ground circuit for an open/high resistance. 4. Ignition ON, test for less than 4.5 V between the serial data circuits listed below and ground: * Terminal 12 * Terminal 13 ‹› If greater than the specified range, test the serial data circuit for a short to voltage. Refer to Testing the Serial Data Circuits for a Short to Voltage. 5. Ignition OFF for 60 seconds, test for greater than 100 ohm between the serial data circuits listed below and ground: * Terminal 12 * Terminal 13 ‹› If not the specified value, test the serial data circuit for a short to ground. Refer to Testing the Serial Data Circuits for a Short to ground. 6. Test for 50-70 ohm between the serial data circuits terminal 12 and terminal 13. ‹› If less than 35 ohm, test for a short between the serial data circuits. Refer to Testing the Serial Data Circuits for a Short between the Circuits. ‹› If 35-50 ohm there may be a third terminating resistor between the serial data circuits. This can happen if the incorrect control module is installed. Some control modules are available with and without the terminating resistors installed to reduce the need of terminating resistors in the wiring harness. ‹› If greater than 70 ohm but less than infinite, test the serial data circuit for an open/high resistance. Refer to Testing the Serial Data Circuits for an Open/High Resistance. ‹› If infinite, test the serial data circuits between the DLC and the first connection to the serial data circuit for an open/high resistance. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 3623 Testing the Serial Data Circuits for a Short to Voltage 1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the harness connectors with the chassis high speed GMLAN serial data circuits at an easily accessible control module. 2. Ignition ON, test for greater than 4.5 V between each serial data circuit at the control module connector that was just disconnected and ground. Verify that one or more serial data circuits are greater than 4.5 V. ‹› If all serial data circuits are less than the specified range, replace the control module that was disconnected. 3. Ignition OFF, disconnect the harness connectors with the chassis high speed GMLAN serial data circuits at another control module, in the direction of the circuit shorted to voltage. 4. Ignition ON, test for greater than 4.5 V between the serial data circuits at the control module connector that was just disconnected and ground. Verify that one or more serial data circuits are greater than 4.5 V. ‹› If all serial data circuits are less than the specified range, replace the control module that was just disconnected. 5. Repeat step 3 until one of the follow conditions are isolated: * A short to voltage on the serial data circuit between 2 control modules or splice packs, if equipped * A short to voltage on the serial data circuit between a control module and a terminating resistor. Testing the Serial Data Circuits for a Short to Ground 1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the harness connectors with the chassis high speed GMLAN serial data circuits at an easily accessible control module. 2. Ignition OFF for 60 seconds, test for less than 1k ohm between each serial data circuit at the control module connector that was just disconnected and ground. Verify that one or more serial data circuits are less than 1k ohm. ‹› If all serial data circuits are greater than the specified range, replace the control module that was disconnected. 3. Disconnect the harness connectors with the chassis high speed GMLAN serial data circuits at another control module, in the direction of the circuit shorted to ground. 4. Ignition OFF for 60 seconds, test for less than 1k ohm between the serial data circuits at the control module connector that was just disconnected and ground. Verify that one or more serial data circuits are less than 1k ohm. ‹› If greater than the specified range for all serial data circuits, replace the control module that was just disconnected. 5. Repeat step 3 until one of the follow conditions are isolated: * A short to ground on the serial data circuit between 2 control modules or splice packs, if equipped * A short to ground on the serial data circuit between a control module and a terminating resistor. Testing the Serial Data Circuits for a Short between the Circuits 1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the harness connectors with the chassis high speed GMLAN serial data circuits at an easily accessible control module that is not communicating. 2. Ignition OFF for 60 seconds, test for less than 35 ohm between each pair of serial data circuits at the control module connector that was just disconnected. Verify that one pair of serial data circuits are less than 35 ohm. ‹› If each pair of serial data circuits is greater than the specified range, replace the control module that was disconnected. 3. Connect the harness connectors at the control module that was disconnected. 4. Disconnect the harness connectors with the chassis high speed GMLAN serial data circuits at another control module, in the direction of the circuits shorted together. 5. Ignition OFF for 60 seconds, test for less than 35 ohm between each pair of serial data circuits at the control module connector that was just disconnected. Verify that one pair of serial data circuits are less than 35 ohm. ‹› If each pair of serial data circuits is within the specified range, replace the control module that was just disconnected. 6. Repeat step 3 until one of the following conditions are isolated: * Serial data circuits shorted together between 2 control modules or splice packs, if equipped * Serial data circuits shorted together between a control module and a terminating resistor * A shorted terminating resistor Testing the Serial Data Circuits for an Open/High Resistance 1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the harness connectors with the chassis high speed GMLAN serial data circuits at an easily accessible control module that is not communicating. 2. Ignition OFF for 60 seconds, test for greater than 100k ohm between each pair of serial data circuits at the control module connector that was just disconnected. Verify that one pair of serial data circuits are greater than 100k ohm. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 3624 ‹› If each pair of serial data circuits is less than the specified range, replace the control module that was disconnected. 3. Connect the harness connectors at the control module that was disconnected. 4. Disconnect the harness connectors with the chassis high speed GMLAN serial data circuits at another control module, in the direction of the open circuit. 5. Ignition OFF for 60 seconds, test for greater than 100k ohm between each pair of serial data circuits at the control module connector that was just disconnected. Verify that one pair of serial data circuits are greater than 100k ohm. ‹› If each pair of serial data circuits is less than the specified range, replace the control module that was just disconnected. 6. Repeat step 3 until one of the following conditions are isolated: * An open/high resistance on the serial data circuit between 2 control modules or splice packs, if equipped * An open/high resistance on the serial data circuit between a control module and a terminating resistor * An open/high resistance terminating resistor Repair Instructions Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification (See: Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures/Verification Tests and Procedures) after completing the repair. * GMLAN Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/GMLAN Wiring Repairs) * Control Module References (See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning) for control module replacement, setup, and programming Scan Tool Does Not Communicate with High Speed GMLAN Device Scan Tool Does Not Communicate with High Speed GMLAN Device Diagnostic Instructions * Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle (See: Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle) prior to using this diagnostic procedure. * Review Strategy Based Diagnosis (See: Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Strategy Based Diagnosis) for an overview of the diagnostic approach. * Diagnostic Procedure Instructions (See: Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Diagnostic Procedure Instructions) provides an overview of each diagnostic category. Diagnostic Fault Information Circuit/System Description The serial data is transmitted on two twisted wires that allow speeds up to 500 Kb/s. The twisted pair is terminated with two 120 ohms resistors, one is internal to the engine control module (ECM) and the other can be a separate resistor in a connector assembly or in another control module. The resistors are used as the load for the High Speed GMLAN buss during normal vehicle operation. The high speed GMLAN is a differential bus. The high speed GMLAN serial data bus (+) and high speed GMLAN serial data (-) are driven to opposite extremes from a rest or idle level of approximately 2.5 V. Driving the lines to their extremes, adds one volt to the high speed GMLAN serial data bus (+) circuit and subtracts one volt from the high speed GMLAN serial data bus (-) circuit. If serial data is lost, control modules will set a no communication code against the non-communicating control module. Note that a loss of serial data DTC does not represent a failure of the module that set it. Diagnostic Aids Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 3625 * Sometimes, while diagnosing a specific customer concern or after a repair, you may notice a history U-code present. However, there is no associated "current" or "active" status. Loss-of-communication U-codes such as these can set for a variety of reasons. Many times, they are transparent to the vehicle operator and technician, and/or have no associated symptoms. Eventually, they will erase themselves automatically after a number of fault-free ignition cycles. This condition would most likely be attributed to one of these scenarios: - A control module on the data communication circuit was disconnected while the communication circuit is awake. - Power to one or more modules was interrupted during diagnosis. - A low battery condition was present, so some control modules stop communicating when battery voltage drops below a certain threshold. - Battery power was restored to the vehicle and control modules on the communication circuit did not all re-initialize at the same time. - If a loss-of-communication U-code appears in history for no apparent reason, it is most likely associated with one of the scenarios above. These are all temporary conditions and should never be interpreted as an intermittent fault, causing you to replace a part. * Do not replace a control module reporting a U code. The U code identifies which control module needs to be diagnosed for a communication issue. * Communication may be available between the BCM and the scan tool with the high speed GMLAN serial data system inoperative. This condition is due to the BCM using both the high and low speed GMLAN systems. * An open in the DLC ground circuit terminal 5 will allow the scan tool to operate but not communicate with the vehicle. * The engine will not start when there is a total malfunction of the high speed GMLAN serial data bus. * Technicians may find various Local Area Network (LAN) communication Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTC) and no low speed GMLAN communications with the scan tool. * The engine will not start when there is a total malfunction of the high speed GMLAN serial data bus. These conditions may be caused by the installation of an aftermarket navigation radio module (see bulletins). Some customers may comment of one or more of the following concerns: - Vehicle will not crank - Vehicle cranks but will not start - Vehicle stability enhancement system warning lights and messages - PRNDL gear indicator position errors Reference Information Schematic Reference * Data Communication Schematics (See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams) * Control Module References (See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning) Connector End View Reference Component Connector End Views (See: Diagrams/Connector Views) Description and Operation Data Link Communications Description and Operation (See: Description and Operation) Electrical Information Reference * Circuit Testing (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Circuit Testing) * Connector Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Connector Repairs) * Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections) * Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Wiring Repairs) Scan Tool Reference Control Module References (See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning) for scan tool information Circuit/System Testing Note: Each control module may need to be disconnected to isolate a circuit fault. Use the schematic to identify the following: * Control modules the vehicle is equipped with * High speed GMLAN serial data circuit terminating resistors * Control module locations on the high speed GMLAN serial data circuits * Each control module's high speed GMLAN serial data circuit terminals Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 3626 1. Attempt to communicate with all control modules on the high speed GMLAN serial data circuit Refer to Data Link References (See: Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview). Communications should not be available with two or more control modules on the high speed GMLAN serial data circuit. ‹› If only one control module is not communicating, diagnose that control module only. Refer to DTC U0100-U02FF (See: Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures/U Code Charts/U0100). 2. Disconnect the scan tool from the DLC. The following tests will be done at the DLC connector. 3. All access doors closed, ignition OFF for 60 seconds, test for less than 10 ohm between the ground circuit terminal 5 and ground. ‹› If greater than the specified range, test the ground circuit for an open/high resistance. 4. Ignition ON, test for less than 4.5 V between the serial data circuits listed below and ground: * Terminal 6 * Terminal 14 ‹› If greater than the specified range, test the serial data circuit for a short to voltage. Refer to Testing the Serial Data Circuits for a Short to Voltage. 5. Ignition OFF for 60 seconds, test for greater than 100 ohm between the serial data circuits listed below and ground: * Terminal 6 * Terminal 14 ‹› If not the specified value, test the serial data circuit for a short to ground. Refer to Testing the Serial Data Circuits for a Short to ground. 6. Test for 50-70 ohm between the serial data circuits terminal 6 and terminal 14. ‹› If less than 35 ohm, test for a short between the serial data circuits. Refer to Testing the Serial Data Circuits for a Short between the Circuits. ‹› If 35-50 ohm there may be a third terminating resistor between the serial data circuits. This can happen if the incorrect control module is installed. Some control modules are available with and without the terminating resistors installed to reduce the need of terminating resistors in the wiring harness. ‹› If greater than 70 ohm but less than infinite, test the serial data circuit for an open/high resistance. Refer to Testing the Serial Data Circuits for an Open/High Resistance. ‹› If infinite, test the serial data circuits between the DLC and the first connection to the serial data circuit for an open/high resistance. Testing the Serial Data Circuits for a Short to Voltage 1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the harness connectors with the high speed GMLAN serial data circuits at an easily accessible control module. 2. Ignition ON, test for greater than 4.5 V between each serial data circuit at the control module connector that was just disconnected and ground. Verify that one or more serial data circuits are greater than 4.5 V. ‹› If all serial data circuits are less than the specified range, replace the control module that was disconnected. 3. Ignition OFF, disconnect the harness connectors with the high speed GMLAN serial data circuits at another control module, in the direction of the circuit shorted to voltage. 4. Ignition ON, test for greater than 4.5 V between the serial data circuits at the control module connector that was just disconnected and ground. Verify that one or more serial data circuits are greater than 4.5 V. ‹› If all serial data circuits are less than the specified range, replace the control module that was just disconnected. 5. Repeat step 3 until one of the follow conditions are isolated: * A short to voltage on the serial data circuit between 2 control modules or splice packs, if equipped * A short to voltage on the serial data circuit between a control module and a terminating resistor. Testing the Serial Data Circuits for a Short to Ground 1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the harness connectors with the high speed GMLAN serial data circuits at an easily accessible control module. 2. Ignition OFF for 60 seconds, test for less than 1k ohm between each serial data circuit at the control module connector that was just disconnected and ground. Verify that one or more serial data circuits are less than 1k ohm. ‹› If all serial data circuits are greater than the specified range, replace the control module that was disconnected. 3. Disconnect the harness connectors with the high speed GMLAN serial data circuits at another control module, in the direction of the circuit shorted to ground. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 3627 4. Ignition OFF for 60 seconds, test for less than 1k ohm between the serial data circuits at the control module connector that was just disconnected and ground. Verify that one or more serial data circuits are less than 1k ohm. ‹› If greater than the specified range for all serial data circuits, replace the control module that was just disconnected. 5. Repeat step 3 until one of the follow conditions are isolated: * A short to ground on the serial data circuit between 2 control modules or splice packs, if equipped * A short to ground on the serial data circuit between a control module and a terminating resistor. Testing the Serial Data Circuits for a Short between the Circuits 1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the harness connectors with the high speed GMLAN serial data circuits at an easily accessible control module that is not communicating. 2. Ignition OFF for 60 seconds, test for less than 35 ohm between each pair of serial data circuits at the control module connector that was just disconnected. Verify that one pair of serial data circuits are less than 35 ohm. ‹› If each pair of serial data circuits is greater than the specified range, replace the control module that was disconnected. 3. Connect the harness connectors at the control module that was disconnected. 4. Disconnect the harness connectors with the high speed GMLAN serial data circuits at another control module, in the direction of the circuits shorted together. 5. Ignition OFF for 60 seconds, test for less than 35 ohm between each pair of serial data circuits at the control module connector that was just disconnected. Verify that one pair of serial data circuits are less than 35 ohm. ‹› If each pair of serial data circuits is within the specified range, replace the control module that was just disconnected. 6. Repeat step 3 until one of the following conditions are isolated: * Serial data circuits shorted together between 2 control modules or splice packs, if equipped * Serial data circuits shorted together between a control module and a terminating resistor * A shorted terminating resistor Testing the Serial Data Circuits for an Open/High Resistance 1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the harness connectors with the high speed GMLAN serial data circuits at an easily accessible control module that is not communicating. 2. Ignition OFF for 60 seconds, test for greater than 100k ohm between each pair of serial data circuits at the control module connector that was just disconnected. Verify that one pair of serial data circuits are greater than 100k ohm. ‹› If each pair of serial data circuits is less than the specified range, replace the control module that was disconnected. 3. Connect the harness connectors at the control module that was disconnected. 4. Disconnect the harness connectors with the high speed GMLAN serial data circuits at another control module, in the direction of the open circuit. 5. Ignition OFF for 60 seconds, test for greater than 100k ohm between each pair of serial data circuits at the control module connector that was just disconnected. Verify that one pair of serial data circuits are greater than 100k ohm. ‹› If each pair of serial data circuits is less than the specified range, replace the control module that was just disconnected. 6. Repeat step 3 until one of the following conditions are isolated: * An open/high resistance on the serial data circuit between 2 control modules or splice packs, if equipped * An open/high resistance on the serial data circuit between a control module and a terminating resistor * An open/high resistance terminating resistor Repair Instructions Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification (See: Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures/Verification Tests and Procedures) after completing the repair. * GMLAN Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/GMLAN Wiring Repairs) * Control Module References (See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning) for control module replacement, setup, and programming Scan Tool Does Not Communicate with Mid Speed GMLAN Device Scan Tool Does Not Communicate with Mid Speed GMLAN Device Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 3628 Diagnostic Instructions * Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle (See: Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle) prior to using this diagnostic procedure. * Review Strategy Based Diagnosis (See: Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Strategy Based Diagnosis) for an overview of the diagnostic approach. * Diagnostic Procedure Instructions (See: Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Diagnostic Procedure Instructions) provides an overview of each diagnostic category. Diagnostic Fault Information Circuit/System Description Modules connected to the mid speed GMLAN serial data circuits monitor for serial data communications during normal vehicle operation. Operating information and commands are exchanged among the modules when the ignition switch is in any position other than OFF. The mid speed GMLAN serial data bus uses a terminating resistor that is in parallel with the mid speed GMLAN (+) and (-) circuits. Diagnostic Aids * Sometimes, while diagnosing a specific customer concern or after a repair, you may notice a history U-code present. However, there is no associated "current" or "active" status. Loss-ofcommunication U-codes such as these can set for a variety of reasons. Many times, they're transparent to the vehicle operator and technician, and/or have no associated symptoms. Eventually, they will erase themselves automatically after a number of fault-free ignition cycles. This condition would most likely be attributed to one of these scenarios: - A control module on the data communication circuit was disconnected while the communication circuit is awake. - Power to one or more modules was interrupted during diagnosis. - A low battery condition was present, so some control modules stop communicating when battery voltage drops below a certain threshold. - Battery power was restored to the vehicle and control modules on the communication circuit did not all re-initialize at the same time. - If a loss-of-communication U-code appears in history for no apparent reason, it is most likely associated with one of the scenarios above. These are all temporary conditions and should never be interpreted as an intermittent fault, causing you to replace a part. * Do not replace a control module reporting a U code. The U code identifies which control module needs to be diagnosed for a communication issue. * Communication may be available between the BCM and the scan tool with the mid speed GMLAN serial data system inoperative. This condition is due to the BCM using the high, mid, and low speed GMLAN systems. * An open in the DLC ground circuit terminal 5 will allow the scan tool to operate but not communicate with the vehicle. * The engine will not start when there is a total malfunction of the mid speed GMLAN serial data bus. * Technicians may find various Local Area Network communication Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTC) and no low speed GMLAN communications with the scan tool. These conditions may be caused by the installation of an aftermarket navigation radio module (see bulletins). Some customers may comment of one or more of the following concerns: - Vehicle will not crank - Vehicle cranks but will not start - Vehicle stability enhancement system warning lights and messages - PRNDL gear indicator position errors Reference Information Schematic Reference * Data Communication Schematics (See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams) * Control Module References (See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 3629 Connector End View Reference Component Connector End Views (See: Diagrams/Connector Views) Description and Operation Data Link Communications Description and Operation (See: Description and Operation) Electrical Information Reference * Circuit Testing (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Circuit Testing) * Connector Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Connector Repairs) * Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections) * Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Wiring Repairs) Scan Tool Reference Control Module References (See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning) for scan tool information Circuit/System Testing Note: Each control module may need to be disconnected to isolate a circuit fault. Use the schematic to identify the following: * Control modules the vehicle is equipped with * Mid speed GMLAN serial data circuit terminating resistors * Control module locations on the mid speed GMLAN serial data circuits * Each control module's mid speed GMLAN serial data circuit terminals 1. Attempt to communicate with all control modules on the mid speed GMLAN serial data circuit. Refer to Data Link References (See: Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview). Communications should not be available with two or more control modules on the mid speed GMLAN serial data circuit. ‹› If only one control module is not communicating, diagnose that control module only. Refer to DTC U0100-U02FF (See: Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures/U Code Charts/U0100). 2. Disconnect the scan tool from the DLC. The following tests will be done at the DLC connector. 3. All access doors closed, ignition OFF for 60 seconds, test for less than 10 ohm between the ground circuit terminal 5 and ground. ‹› If greater than the specified range, test the ground circuit for an open/high resistance. 4. Ignition ON, test for less than 4.5 V between the serial data circuits listed below and ground: * Terminal 3 * Terminal 11 ‹› If greater than the specified range, test the serial data circuit for a short to voltage. Refer to Testing the Serial Data Circuits for a Short to Voltage. 5. Ignition OFF for 60 seconds, test for greater than 100 ohm between the serial data circuits listed below and ground: * Terminal 3 * Terminal 11 ‹› If not the specified value, test the serial data circuit for a short to ground. Refer to Testing the Serial Data Circuits for a Short to ground. 6. Test for 50-70 ohm between the serial data circuits terminal 3 and terminal 11. ‹› If less than 35 ohm, test for a short between the serial data circuits. Refer to Testing the Serial Data Circuits for a Short between the Circuits. ‹› If 35-50 ohm there may be a third terminating resistor between the serial data circuits. This can happen if the incorrect control module is installed. Some control modules are available with and without the terminating resistors installed to reduce the need of terminating resistors in the wiring harness. ‹› If greater than 70 ohm but less than infinite, test the serial data circuit for an open/high resistance. Refer to Testing the Serial Data Circuits for an Open/High Resistance. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 3630 ‹› If infinite, test the serial data circuits between the DLC and the first connection to the serial data circuit for an open/high resistance. Testing the Serial Data Circuits for a Short to Voltage 1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the harness connectors with the mid speed GMLAN serial data circuits at an easily accessible control module. 2. Ignition ON, test for greater than 4.5 V between each serial data circuit at the control module connector that was just disconnected and ground. Verify that one or more serial data circuits are greater than 4.5 V. ‹› If all serial data circuits are less than the specified range, replace the control module that was disconnected. 3. Ignition OFF, disconnect the harness connectors with the mid speed GMLAN serial data circuits at another control module, in the direction of the circuit shorted to voltage. 4. Ignition ON, test for greater than 4.5 V between the serial data circuits at the control module connector that was just disconnected and ground. Verify that one or more serial data circuits are greater than 4.5 V. ‹› If all serial data circuits are less than the specified range, replace the control module that was just disconnected. 5. Repeat step 3 until one of the follow conditions are isolated: * A short to voltage on the serial data circuit between 2 control modules or splice packs, if equipped * A short to voltage on the serial data circuit between a control module and a terminating resistor Testing the Serial Data Circuits for a Short to Ground 1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the harness connectors with the mid speed GMLAN serial data circuits at an easily accessible control module. 2. Ignition OFF for 60 seconds, test for less than 1k ohm between each serial data circuit at the control module connector that was just disconnected and ground. Verify that one or more serial data circuits are less than 1k ohm. ‹› If all serial data circuits are greater than the specified range, replace the control module that was disconnected. 3. Disconnect the harness connectors with the mid speed GMLAN serial data circuits at another control module, in the direction of the circuit shorted to ground. 4. Ignition OFF for 60 seconds, test for less than 1k ohm between the serial data circuits at the control module connector that was just disconnected and ground. Verify that one or more serial data circuits are less than 1k ohm. ‹› If greater than the specified range for all serial data circuits, replace the control module that was just disconnected. 5. Repeat step 3 until one of the follow conditions are isolated: * A short to ground on the serial data circuit between 2 control modules or splice packs, if equipped * A short to ground on the serial data circuit between a control module and a terminating resistor Testing the Serial Data Circuits for a Short between the Circuits 1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the harness connectors with the mid speed GMLAN serial data circuits at an easily accessible control module that is not communicating. 2. Ignition OFF for 60 seconds, test for less than 35 ohm between each pair of serial data circuits at the control module connector that was just disconnected. Verify that one pair of serial data circuits are less than 35 ohm. ‹› If each pair of serial data circuits is greater than the specified range, replace the control module that was disconnected. 3. Connect the harness connectors at the control module that was disconnected. 4. Disconnect the harness connectors with the mid speed GMLAN serial data circuits at another control module, in the direction of the circuits shorted together. 5. Ignition OFF for 60 seconds, test for less than 35 ohm between each pair of serial data circuits at the control module connector that was just disconnected. Verify that one pair of serial data circuits are less than 35 ohm. ‹› If each pair of serial data circuits is within the specified range, replace the control module that was just disconnected. 6. Repeat step 3 until one of the following conditions are isolated: * Serial data circuits shorted together between 2 control modules or splice packs, if equipped * Serial data circuits shorted together between a control module and a terminating resistor * A shorted terminating resistor Testing the Serial Data Circuits for an Open/High Resistance 1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the harness connectors with the mid speed GMLAN serial data circuits at an easily accessible control module that is not communicating. 2. Ignition OFF for 60 seconds, test for greater than 100k ohm between each pair of serial data circuits at the control module connector that was just Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 3631 disconnected. Verify that one pair of serial data circuits are greater than 100k ohm. ‹› If each pair of serial data circuits is less than the specified range, replace the control module that was disconnected. 3. Connect the harness connectors at the control module that was disconnected. 4. Disconnect the harness connectors with the mid speed GMLAN serial data circuits at another control module, in the direction of the open circuit. 5. Ignition OFF for 60 seconds, test for greater than 100k ohm between each pair of serial data circuits at the control module connector that was just disconnected. Verify that one pair of serial data circuits is greater than 100k ohm. ‹› If each pair of serial data circuits is less than the specified range, replace the control module that was just disconnected. 6. Repeat step 3 until one of the following conditions are isolated: * An open/high resistance on the serial data circuit between 2 control modules or splice packs, if equipped * An open/high resistance on the serial data circuit between a control module and a terminating resistor * An open/high resistance terminating resistor Repair Instructions Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification (See: Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures/Verification Tests and Procedures) after completing the repair. * GMLAN Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/GMLAN Wiring Repairs) * Control Module References (See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning) for control module replacement, setup, and programming Scan Tool Does Not Communicate with Low Speed GMLAN Device Scan Tool Does Not Communicate with Low Speed GMLAN Device Diagnostic Instructions * Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle (See: Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle) prior to using this diagnostic procedure. * Review Strategy Based Diagnosis (See: Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Strategy Based Diagnosis) for an overview of the diagnostic approach. * Diagnostic Procedure Instructions (See: Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Diagnostic Procedure Instructions) provides an overview of each diagnostic category. Diagnostic Fault Information Circuit/System Description The serial data is transmitted over a single wire to the appropriate control modules. The transmission speed for GMLAN low speed is up to 83.33 Kb/s. Under normal vehicle operating conditions, the speed of the buss is 33.33 Kb/s. The control modules toggle the serial data circuit between 0-5 V during normal communications. To wake the control modules connected to the GMLAN low speed serial data circuit, a voltage wake up pulse of 10 V is sent out. If serial data is lost, control modules will set a no communication code against the non-communicating control module. Note: a loss of serial data communications DTC does not represent a failure of the module that set it. Diagnostic Aids * Sometimes, while diagnosing a specific customer concern or after a repair, you may notice a history U-code present. However, there is no associated "current" or "active" status. Loss-ofcommunication U-codes such as these can set for a variety of reasons. Many times, they are transparent to the vehicle operator and technician, and/or have no associated symptoms. Eventually, they will erase themselves automatically after a number of fault-free ignition cycles. This condition would most likely be attributed to one of these scenarios: Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 3632 - A control module on the data communication circuit was disconnected while the communication circuit is awake. - Power to one or more modules was interrupted during diagnosis - A low battery condition was present, so some control modules stop communicating when battery voltage drops below a certain threshold. - Battery power was restored to the vehicle and control modules on the communication circuit did not all re-initialize at the same time. - If a loss-of-communication U-code appears in history for no apparent reason, it is most likely associated with one of the scenarios above. These are all temporary conditions and should never be interpreted as an intermittent fault, causing you to replace a part. * Do not replace a control module reporting a U-code. The U-code identifies which control module needs to be diagnosed for a communication issue. * Communication may be available between the body control module (BCM) and the scan tool with the low speed GMLAN serial data system inoperative. This condition is due to the BCM using both the high and low speed GMLAN systems. * An open in the low speed GMLAN serial data circuit between the splice pack and a module will only affect that specific module. This type of failure will set a loss of communication DTC for each module effected, and the other modules will still communicate. * An open in the data link connector (DLC) ground circuit terminal 5 will allow the scan tool to operate but not communicate with the vehicle. * The engine may not start when there is a total malfunction of the low speed GMLAN serial data circuit. * Technicians may find various Local Area Network (LAN) communication Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTC) and no low speed LAN communications with the scan tool. These conditions may be caused by the installation of an aftermarket navigation radio module (see bulletins). Some customers may comment of one or more of the following concerns: - Vehicle will not crank - Vehicle cranks but will not start - Vehicle stability enhancement system warning lights and messages - PRNDL gear indicator position errors Reference Information Schematic Reference Data Communication Schematics (See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams) Connector End View Reference Component Connector End Views (See: Diagrams/Connector Views) Description and Operation Data Link Communications Description and Operation (See: Description and Operation) Electrical Information Reference * Circuit Testing (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Circuit Testing) * Connector Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Connector Repairs) * Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections) * Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Wiring Repairs) Circuit/System Testing Note: Use the schematic to identify the following: * Control modules the vehicle is equipped with * Control module and splice pack locations on the low speed GMLAN serial data circuit * The low speed GMLAN serial data circuit terminals for each control module, component, or splice pack 1. Attempt to communicate with all control modules on the low speed GMLAN serial data circuit. Refer to Data Link References (See: Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview). Communications should not be available with two or more control modules on the low speed GMLAN serial data circuit. ‹› If only one control module is not communicating, diagnose that control module only. Refer to DTC U0100-U02FF (See: Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures/U Code Charts/U0100). ‹› If one or more control modules are communicating but not all, refer to Testing the Serial Data Circuit for an Open/High Resistance. 2. Disconnect the scan tool from the DLC. The following tests will be done at the DLC connector. 3. All access doors closed, ignition OFF for 60 seconds, test for less than 10 ohm between the ground circuit terminal 5 and ground. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 3633 ‹› If greater than the specified range, test the ground circuit for an open/high resistance. 4. Ignition ON, test for less than 4.5 V between the serial data circuit terminal 1 and ground. ‹› If greater than the specified range, test the serial data circuit for a short to voltage. Refer to Testing the Serial Data Circuit for a Short to Voltage. 5. Ignition OFF for 60 seconds, test for greater than 100 ohm between the serial data circuit terminal 1 and ground. ‹› If less than the specified range, test the serial data circuit for a short to ground. Refer to Testing the Serial Data Circuits for a Short to ground. 6. Disconnect the harness connector at the first splice pack closest in the circuit to the DLC. 7. Test for less than 2 ohm between the DLC serial data circuit terminal 1 and the splice pack connector serial data input terminal. ‹› If greater than the specified range, test the serial data circuit for an open/high resistance. If the circuit tests normal, replace the splice pack. Testing the Serial Data Circuits for a Short to Voltage 1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the appropriate harness connectors at the following components: * All low speed serial data splice packs * Any module or component between that may be between the splice packs 2. Ignition ON, test for less than 4.5 V between the DLC serial data circuit terminal 1 and ground. ‹› If greater than the specified range, repair the short to voltage. 3. Test for less than 4.5 V between each serial data circuit at each component connector and ground. ‹› If greater than the specified range, perform the appropriate test listed below: * Serial data circuits with one control module, test the serial data circuit for a short to voltage. If the circuit tests normal, replace the control module. * Serial data circuits with 2 or more control modules, test each section of the serial data circuit for a short to voltage. If the circuits test normal, replace the control module that causes the short to voltage when connected. Testing the Serial Data Circuits for a Short to Ground 1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the appropriate harness connectors at the following components: * All low speed serial data splice packs * Any module or component between that may be between the splice packs 2. Test for infinite resistance between the DLC serial data circuit terminal 1 and ground. ‹› If not the specified value, repair the short to ground. 3. Ignition OFF for 60 seconds, test for greater than 100 ohm between each serial data circuit at the splice pack and ground. ‹› If less than the specified range, perform the appropriate test listed below: * Serial data circuits with one control module, test the serial data circuit for a short to ground. If the circuit tests normal, replace the control module. * Serial data circuits with 2 or more control modules, test each section of the serial data circuit for a short to ground. If the circuits test normal, replace the control module that causes the short to ground when connected. Testing the Serial Data Circuit for an Open/High Resistance 1. If equipped with a second splice pack, ignition ON, verify the scan tool communicates with one or more control modules connected to the second splice pack. ‹› If all control modules on the second splice pack do not communicate, test the serial data circuit between the first and second splice packs for an open/high resistance. If the circuit tests normal, test the second splice pack for an open/high resistance. If the splice pack tests normal, replace any module or component that may be between those two splice packs. 2. If equipped with a third splice pack, ignition ON, verify the scan tool communicates with one or more control modules connected to the third splice pack. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 3634 ‹› If all control modules on the third splice pack do not communicate, test the serial data circuit between the second and third splice packs for an open/high resistance. If the circuit tests normal, test the third splice pack for an open/high resistance. If the splice pack tests normal, replace any module or component that may be between the those two splice packs. 3. Ignition OFF, disconnect the splice pack containing the serial data circuits to the modules that are not communicating. 4. Install a 3 A fused jumper wire between the splice pack connector serial data input terminal and a low speed GMLAN serial data circuit that is not communicating: 5. Ignition ON, verify the scan tool communicates with the control modules connected to the low speed GMLAN serial data circuit. ‹› If any control module does not communicate, test each section of the serial data circuit for an open/high resistance. If the circuits test normal, replace the control module that does not communicate when connected. Repair Instructions Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification (See: Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures/Verification Tests and Procedures) after completing the repair. * GMLAN Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/GMLAN Wiring Repairs) * Control Module References (See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning) for module replacement, setup, and programming Scan Tool Does Not Power Up Scan Tool Does Not Power Up Diagnostic Instructions * Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle (See: Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle) prior to using this diagnostic procedure. * Review Strategy Based Diagnosis (See: Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Strategy Based Diagnosis) for an overview of the diagnostic approach. * Diagnostic Procedure Instructions (See: Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Diagnostic Procedure Instructions) provides an overview of each diagnostic category. Diagnostic Fault Information Circuit/System Description The data link connector (DLC) is a standardized 16 cavity connector. Connector design and location is dictated by an industry wide standard, and is required to provide the following: * Scan tool B+ voltage at terminal 16 * Scan tool ground at terminal 4 * Common ground at terminal 5 Diagnostic Aids * The scan tool will power up with the ignition OFF. Some modules however, will not communicate unless the ignition is ON and the power mode master module sends the appropriate power mode message. * If the B+ circuit, ground circuits, and connections of the DLC are functioning properly, the malfunction must be due to the scan tool. Reference Information Schematic Reference Data Communication Schematics (See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams) Connector End View Reference Component Connector End Views (See: Diagrams/Connector Views) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 3635 Description and Operation Data Link Communications Description and Operation (See: Description and Operation) Electrical Information Reference * Circuit Testing (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Circuit Testing) * Connector Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Connector Repairs) * Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections) * Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Wiring Repairs) Scan Tool Reference Control Module References (See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning) for scan tool information. Circuit/System Testing 1. Test for less than 2.0 ohm between the ground circuits terminal 4 of the DLC and ground, and terminal 5 of the DLC and ground. ‹› If greater than the specified range, test the ground circuit for an open/high resistance. 2. Ignition ON, verify a test lamp illuminates between the B+ circuit terminal 16 at the DLC and ground. ‹› If the test lamp does not illuminate, test the voltage supply circuit for a short to ground or an open/high resistance. 3. If all circuits test normal, refer to the scan tool user guide. Repair Instructions Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification (See: Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures/Verification Tests and Procedures) after completing the repair. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Disassembled Views Knock Sensor: Locations Disassembled Views Disassembled Views Engine Covers and Component Assemblies (2 of 2) (LF1) 1 - Water Outlet Bolt 2 - Water Outlet 3 - Water Outlet O-ring 4 - Water Outlet Seal 5 - Knock Sensor Bolt 6 - Knock Sensor 7 - Engine Coolant Heater Assembly 8 - Crankshaft Position Sensor Bolt 9 - Crankshaft Position Sensor 10 - Crankshaft Position Sensor O-ring 11 - Right Cylinder Head Assembly 12 - Right Cylinder Head Gasket 13 - Lower Fuel Rail Noise Shield 14 - Engine Cooling Thermostat Gasket 15 - Engine Cooling Thermostat 16 - Engine Cooling Thermostat Housing Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Disassembled Views > Page 3640 17 - Engine Cooling Thermostat Bolt - Short 18 - Engine Cooling Thermostat Housing Bolt - Long 19 - Fuel Feed Pipe Assembly 20 - Fuel Feed Pipe Assembly Bolt 21 - Fuel Feed Intermediate Pipe Assembly 22 - Fuel Pump Gasket 23 - Fuel Pump O-ring Seal 24 - Fuel Pump 25 - Fuel Pump Bolt 26 - Left Cylinder Head Assembly 27 - Left Cylinder Head Gasket 28 - Oil Level Indicator 29 Oil Level Indicator Handle O-ring 30 - Oil Level Indicator Tube Bolt 31 - Oil Level Indicator Tube 32 - Oil Level Indicator Tube O-ring 33 - Oil Filter Adapter Assembly 34 - Engine Short Block Assembly 35 - Oil Pump Assembly 36 - Timing Drive Assembly Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Disassembled Views > Page 3641 Knock Sensor: Locations Powertrain Component Views Powertrain Component Views Front Engine Components (LAF 1 of 2) 1 - Q38 Throttle Body 2 - G18 High Pressure Fuel Pump 3 - B23F Camshaft Position Sensor Intake 4 - B37 Engine Oil Pressure Switch 5 - B68 Knock Sensor 6 - B26 Crankshaft Position Sensor 7 - M64 Starter Motor 8 - Q2 A/C Compressor Clutch 9 - G13 Generator Left Front of the Engine Components (LF1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Disassembled Views > Page 3642 1 - T8B Ignition Coil 2 2 - T8D Ignition Coil 4 3 - T8F Ignition Coil 6 4 - G18 High Pressure Fuel Pump 5 - B34 Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor 6 - M64 Starter Motor 7 - B68B Knock Sensor 2 8 - B37 Engine Oil Pressure Switch 9 - B1 A/C Refrigerant Pressure Sensor 10 - Q2 A/C Compressor Clutch 11 - G13 Generator Right Rear of the Engine Components (LF1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Disassembled Views > Page 3643 1 - B74 Manifold Absolute Pressure Sensor 2 - T8E Ignition Coil 5 3 - T8C Ignition Coil 3 4 - Q12 Evaporative Emission Purge Solenoid Valve 5 - Q38 Throttle Body 6 - B23B Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 1 Intake 7 - B23D Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 2 Intake 8 - Q6D Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Bank 2 Intake 9 - Q6C Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Bank 2 Exhaust 10 - B23C Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 2 Exhaust 11 - Q6B Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Bank 1 Intake 12 - Q6A Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Bank 1 Exhaust 13 - B23A Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 1 Exhaust 14 - B68A Knock Sensor 1 15 - B26 Crankshaft Position Sensor 16 - T8A Ignition Coil 1 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3644 Knock Sensor: Diagrams B68 Knock Sensor (LAF) B68A Knock Sensor 1 (LF1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3645 B68B Knock Sensor 2 (LF1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3646 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Knock Sensor Replacement - Bank 1 Knock Sensor: Service and Repair Knock Sensor Replacement - Bank 1 Knock Sensor Replacement - Bank 1 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Knock Sensor Replacement - Bank 1 > Page 3649 Knock Sensor: Service and Repair Knock Sensor Replacement - Bank 2 Knock Sensor Replacement - Bank 2 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Application and ID Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Application and ID Electrical Center Identification Views X50A Fuse Block - Underhood, Label Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Application and ID > Page 3653 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Malfunction Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Malfunction Indicator Lamp: Testing and Inspection Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) Diagnosis Diagnostic Instructions * Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle (See: Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle) prior to using this diagnostic procedure. * Review Strategy Based Diagnosis (See: Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Strategy Based Diagnosis) for an overview of the diagnostic approach. * Diagnostic Procedure Instructions (See: Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Diagnostic Procedure Instructions )provides an overview of each diagnostic category. Circuit/System Description Ignition voltage is supplied to the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL). The engine control module (ECM) turns the MIL ON by grounding the MIL control circuit. Diagnostic Aids If the condition is intermittent, move the related harnesses and connectors with the engine operating. Monitor the scan tool Circuit Test Status parameters for the component. The Circuit Test Status parameter will change from OK or Not run to Fault if there is a condition with the circuit or a connection. Reference Information Schematic Reference * Instrument Cluster Schematics (See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators/System Diagram/Instrument Cluster Schematics) * Engine Controls Schematics (See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams) Connector End View Reference Component Connector End Views (See: Diagrams/Connector Views) Electrical Information Reference * Circuit Testing (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Circuit Testing) * Connector Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Connector Repairs) * Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections) * Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Wiring Repairs) Scan Tool Reference Control Module References (See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning)for scan tool information Circuit/System Verification 1. Ignition ON, observe the scan tool MIL Circuit Test Status parameters. Each of the MIL circuit test status parameters should display OK or Not Run. 2. Ignition ON, command the MIL ON and OFF with a scan tool. The MIL should turn ON and OFF as commanded. 3. Operate the vehicle within the Conditions for Running the DTC to verify the DTC does not reset. You may also operate the vehicle within the conditions that you observed from the Freeze Frame/Failure Records data. Circuit/System Testing 1. If any other IPC indicators or gauges are inoperative, refer to Instrument Cluster Gauges Inoperative (See: Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators/Testing and Inspection/Instrument Cluster Gauges Inoperative). 2. Ignition OFF, disconnect the ECM harness connectors. Ignition ON, the MIL should not illuminate. ‹› If the MIL is illuminated, test the MIL control circuit terminal 46-X1 for a short to ground. If the circuit tests normal, replace the IPC. 3. Ignition ON, connect a 3 A fused jumper wire between the MIL control circuit terminal 46-X1 and ground. The MIL should illuminate. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Malfunction Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 3657 ‹› If the MIL does not illuminate, test the MIL control circuit for a short to voltage, or an open/high resistance. If the circuit test normal, replace the IPC/bulb. 4. If all circuits/connections test normal, replace the ECM. Repair Instructions Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification (See: Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures/Verification Tests and Procedures) after completing the diagnostic procedure. * Control Module References (See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning) * Instrument Cluster Replacement (Equinox) (See: Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators/Instrument Cluster / Carrier/Service and Repair)Instrument Cluster Replacement (Terrain) (See: Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators/Instrument Cluster / Carrier/Service and Repair) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor: Locations Powertrain Component Views Front Engine Components (LAF 2 of 2) 1 - B47B Fuel Rail Pressure Sensor 2 - B74 Manifold Absolute Pressure Sensor 3 - Q17D Fuel Injector 4 4 - Q17C Fuel Injector 3 5 - B1 A/C Refrigerant Pressure Sensor 6 - Q17B Fuel Injector 2 7 - Q17A Fuel Injector 1 Right Rear of the Engine Components (LF1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3661 1 - B74 Manifold Absolute Pressure Sensor 2 - T8E Ignition Coil 5 3 - T8C Ignition Coil 3 4 - Q12 Evaporative Emission Purge Solenoid Valve 5 - Q38 Throttle Body 6 - B23B Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 1 Intake 7 - B23D Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 2 Intake 8 - Q6D Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Bank 2 Intake 9 - Q6C Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Bank 2 Exhaust 10 - B23C Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 2 Exhaust 11 - Q6B Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Bank 1 Intake 12 - Q6A Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Bank 1 Exhaust 13 - B23A Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 1 Exhaust 14 - B68A Knock Sensor 1 15 - B26 Crankshaft Position Sensor 16 - T8A Ignition Coil 1 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3662 Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor: Diagrams B74 Manifold Absolute Pressure Sensor Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3663 Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor: Service and Repair Manifold Absolute Pressure Sensor Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oil Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Disassembled Views Oil Pressure Sensor: Locations Disassembled Views Disassembled Views Oil Filter Adapter 440 - Oil Filter Adapter 441 - Oil Filter Adapter Gasket 442 - Oil Filter Adapter Bolt 443 - Oil Filter Adapter Bolt - Long 445 - Oil Filter Fitting 449 - Oil Filter 728 - Engine Oil Pressure Sensor 729 Engine Oil Pressure Sensor O-ring Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oil Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Disassembled Views > Page 3668 Oil Pressure Sensor: Locations Powertrain Component Views Powertrain Component Views Front Engine Components (LAF 1 of 2) 1 - Q38 Throttle Body 2 - G18 High Pressure Fuel Pump 3 - B23F Camshaft Position Sensor Intake 4 - B37 Engine Oil Pressure Switch 5 - B68 Knock Sensor 6 - B26 Crankshaft Position Sensor 7 - M64 Starter Motor 8 - Q2 A/C Compressor Clutch 9 - G13 Generator Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oil Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3669 Oil Pressure Sensor: Diagrams B37 Engine Oil Pressure Switch (LAF) B37 Engine Oil Pressure Switch (LF1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oil Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3670 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oil Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3671 Oil Pressure Sensor: Service and Repair Engine Oil Pressure Sensor and/or Switch Replacement (LF1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations Oxygen Sensor: Locations Powertrain Component Views Left Rear Engine Components (LAF) 1 - T8D Ignition Coil 4 2 - T8C Ignition Coil 3 3 - T8B Ignition Coil 2 4 - T8A Ignition Coil 1 5 - Q6F Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Intake 6 - Q6E Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Exhaust 7 - B52A Heated Oxygen Sensor 1 8 - B52B Heated Oxygen Sensor 2 9 - B34 Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor 10 - B23E Camshaft Position Sensor - Exhaust 11 - Q12 Evaporative Emission Purge Solenoid Valve Front of the Exhaust System Components (LF1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3675 1 - B52C Heated Oxygen Sensor - Bank 1 Sensor 1 2 - B52D Heated Oxygen Sensor - Bank 1 Sensor 2 3 - B52F Heated Oxygen Sensor - Bank 2 Sensor 2 4 - B52E Heated Oxygen Sensor Bank 2 Sensor 1 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3676 Oxygen Sensor: Diagrams B52A Heated Oxygen Sensor 1 (LAF) B52B Heated Oxygen Sensor 2 (LAF) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3677 B52C Heated Oxygen Sensor - Bank 1 Sensor 1 (LF1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3678 B52D Heated Oxygen Sensor - Bank 1 Sensor 2 (LF1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3679 B52E Heated Oxygen Sensor - Bank 2 Sensor 1 (LF1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3680 B52F Heated Oxygen Sensor - Bank 2 Sensor 2 (LF1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3681 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service Precautions > Heated Oxygen and Oxygen Sensor Caution Oxygen Sensor: Service Precautions Heated Oxygen and Oxygen Sensor Caution Heated Oxygen and Oxygen Sensor Caution Caution: Do not remove the pigtail from either the heated oxygen sensor (HO2S) or the oxygen sensor (O2S). Removing the pigtail or the connector will affect sensor operation. Handle the oxygen sensor carefully. Do not drop the HO2S. Keep the in-line electrical connector and the louvered end free of grease, dirt, or other contaminants. Do not use cleaning solvents of any type. Do not repair the wiring, connector or terminals. Replace the oxygen sensor if the pigtail wiring, connector, or terminal is damaged. This external clean air reference is obtained by way of the oxygen sensor signal and heater wires. Any attempt to repair the wires, connectors, or terminals could result in the obstruction of the air reference and degraded sensor performance. The following guidelines should be used when servicing the heated oxygen sensor: * Do not apply contact cleaner or other materials to the sensor or vehicle harness connectors. These materials may get into the sensor causing poor performance. * Do not damage the sensor pigtail and harness wires in such a way that the wires inside are exposed. This could provide a path for foreign materials to enter the sensor and cause performance problems. * Ensure the sensor or vehicle lead wires are not bent sharply or kinked. Sharp bends or kinks could block the reference air path through the lead wire. * Do not remove or defeat the oxygen sensor ground wire, where applicable. Vehicles that utilize the ground wired sensor may rely on this ground as the only ground contact to the sensor. Removal of the ground wire will cause poor engine performance. * Ensure that the peripheral seal remains intact on the vehicle harness connector in order to prevent damage due to water intrusion. The engine harness may be repaired using Packard's Crimp and Splice Seals Terminal Repair Kit. Under no circumstances should repairs be soldered since this could result in the air reference being obstructed. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service Precautions > Heated Oxygen and Oxygen Sensor Caution > Page 3684 Oxygen Sensor: Service Precautions Heated Oxygen Sensor Resistance Learn Reset Caution Heated Oxygen Sensor Resistance Learn Reset Caution Caution: When replacing the HO2S perform the following: * A code clear with a scan tool, regardless of whether or not a DTC is set * HO2S heater resistance learn reset with a scan tool, where available Perform the above in order to reset the HO2S resistance learned value and avoid possible HO2S failure. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service Precautions > Heated Oxygen and Oxygen Sensor Caution > Page 3685 Oxygen Sensor: Service Precautions Silicon Contamination of Heated Oxygen Sensors Caution Silicon Contamination of Heated Oxygen Sensors Caution Caution: Contamination of the oxygen sensor can result from the use of an inappropriate RTV sealant (not oxygen sensor safe) or excessive engine coolant or oil consumption. Remove the HO2S and visually inspect the portion of the sensor exposed to the exhaust stream in order to check for contamination. If contaminated, the portion of the sensor exposed to the exhaust stream will have a white powdery coating. Silicon contamination causes a high but false HO2S signal voltage (rich exhaust indication). The control module will then reduce the amount of fuel delivered to the engine, causing a severe driveability problem. Eliminate the source of contamination before replacing the oxygen sensor. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heated Oxygen Sensor - Bank 1 Sensor 1 Oxygen Sensor: Service and Repair Heated Oxygen Sensor - Bank 1 Sensor 1 Heated Oxygen Sensor Replacement - Bank 1 Sensor 1 (LF1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heated Oxygen Sensor - Bank 1 Sensor 1 > Page 3688 Oxygen Sensor: Service and Repair Heated Oxygen Sensor - Bank 1 Sensor 2 Heated Oxygen Sensor Replacement - Bank 1 Sensor 2 (LF1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heated Oxygen Sensor - Bank 1 Sensor 1 > Page 3689 Oxygen Sensor: Service and Repair Heated Oxygen Sensor - Bank 2 Sensor 1 Heated Oxygen Sensor Replacement - Bank 2 Sensor 1 (LF1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heated Oxygen Sensor - Bank 1 Sensor 1 > Page 3690 Oxygen Sensor: Service and Repair Heated Oxygen Sensor - Bank 2 Sensor 2 Heated Oxygen Sensor Replacement - Bank 2 Sensor 2 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Body Controls - Unable To Reprogram Body Control Module Body Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins Body Controls - Unable To Reprogram Body Control Module INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 09-08-47-001A Date: June 14, 2010 Subject: Unable to Reprogram Body Control Module (BCM), BCM Reprogramming Did Not Complete - Revised Reprogramming Instructions Models: 2006-2010 Buick Lucerne 2006-2010 Cadillac DTS 2007-2010 Cadillac Escalade, Escalade ESV, Escalade EXT, SRX 2008-2010 Cadillac CTS 2010 Cadillac CTS Wagon 2010 Chevrolet Camaro 2006-2007 Chevrolet Monte Carlo 2006-2010 Chevrolet Impala 2007-2010 Chevrolet Avalanche, Equinox, Silverado, Suburban, Tahoe 2008-2010 Chevrolet Express 2009-2010 Chevrolet Traverse 2007-2010 GMC Acadia, Sierra, Yukon, Yukon XL, Yukon Denali, Yukon Denali XL 2008-2010 GMC Savana 2010 GMC Terrain 2007-2009 Pontiac Torrent 2008-2009 Pontiac G8 2008-2009 HUMMER H2 2007-2009 Saturn OUTLOOK 2008-2009 Saturn VUE Refer to GMVIS Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the models and the model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 09-08-47-001 (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Some technicians may experience an unsuccessful body control module (BCM) reprogramming event, when choosing the Reprogram ECU selection on the Service Programming System (SPS). The technician may also notice that when attempting to reprogram the BCM again after this incident has occurred, the BCM may not complete the programming event. This condition may be caused by the following: - A reprogramming event that was interrupted due to a lack of communication between the vehicle and the TIS2WEB terminal. - The vehicle experienced low system voltage during the reprogramming event. Important Do not replace the BCM for this condition. SPS Programming Process Selection Perform this procedure first. 1. If reprogramming has failed during the initial reprogramming event, back out of the SPS application completely. 2. Re-select SPS from the TIS2WEB terminal application. 3. When selecting the Programming Process , choose Replace and Program ECU , even though a new BCM is NOT being installed. 4. Reprogram the BCM using the Service Programming System (SPS) with the latest calibration available on TIS2WEB. Refer to the SPS procedures in SI. When using a multiple diagnostic interface (MDI) for reprogramming, ensure that it is updated with the latest software version. When using a Tech 2(R) for reprogramming, ensure that it is updated with the latest software version. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Body Controls - Unable To Reprogram Body Control Module > Page 3696 During programming, the battery voltage must be maintained within the proper range of 12-15 volts. Only use the approved Midtronics(R) PSC 550 Battery Maintainer (SPS Programming Support Tool EL-49642) or equivalent during programming. BCM Still Fails to Reprogram If the BCM still fails to reprogram perform this procedure: 1. Turn OFF the ignition, and remove the key. 2. Remove the fuses that power up the following modules/components for a minimum of 2 minutes: - BCM - EBCM - ECM - IS LPS (located in the left IP fusebox) - TCM 3. Open and close the driver door. Allow enough time for the retained accessory power (RAP) to turn OFF. 4. Reinstall the fuses. 5. When selecting the Programming Process , choose Replace and Program ECU , even though a new BCM is NOT being installed. 6. Reprogram the BCM using the Service Programming System (SPS) with the latest calibration available on TIS2WEB. Refer to the SPS procedures in SI. When using a multiple diagnostic interface (MDI) for reprogramming, ensure that it is updated with the latest software version. When using a Tech 2(R) for reprogramming, ensure that it is updated with the latest software version. During programming, the battery voltage must be maintained within the proper range of 12-15 Volts. Only use the approved Midtronics(R) PSC 550 Battery Maintainer (SPS Programming Support Tool EL-49642) or equivalent during programming. Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table above. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3697 Body Control Module: Locations Instrument Panel/Center Console Component Views Lower Left of the Instrument Panel Components 1 - B80 Park Brake Switch 2 - T3 Audio Amplifier 3 - K9 Body Control Module 4 - K73 Telematics Communication Interface Control Module (UE1) 5 - B107 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor 6 T4S Wireless Communication Antenna - Bluetooth (UE1 with UPF) 7 - B22 Brake Pedal Position Sensor 8 - X84 Data Link Connector Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3698 Body Control Module: Diagrams K9 Body Control Module X1 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3699 K9 Body Control Module X2 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3700 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3701 K9 Body Control Module X3 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3702 K9 Body Control Module X4 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3703 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3704 K9 Body Control Module X5 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3705 K9 Body Control Module X6 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3706 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3707 K9 Body Control Module X7 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3708 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3709 Body Control Module: Service and Repair Body Control Module Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 09333A > May > 10 > Campaign - Evaporative Emission Diagnostics Technical Service Bulletin # 09333A Date: 100504 Campaign - Evaporative Emission Diagnostics SERVICE UPDATE Bulletin No.: 09333A Date: May 04, 2010 Subject: 09333A - Service Update for Inventory and Customer Vehicles - Evaporative Emission Diagnostics Models: 2010 Chevrolet Equinox 2010 GMC Terrain Supercede: The ECM programming service procedure in this bulletin has been revised to include instructions for dealers to contact Engineering at 734-320-8123 if programming stops prior to completion. Do NOT attempt to reprogram.Please discard all copies of bulletin 09333, issued January 2010. This service update includes vehicles in dealer inventory and customer vehicles that return to the dealership for any reason. Purpose This bulletin provides a service procedure to improve the ability of the evaporative emissions diagnostic to detect leaks by installing a fuel tank vent tubing jumper on certain 2010 model year Chevrolet Equinox and GMC Terrain vehicles. Vehicles equipped with a V6 engine will also require reprogramming of the engine control module. This service procedure should be completed as soon as possible on involved vehicles currently in dealer inventory and customer vehicles that return to the dealer for any type of service. Vehicles Involved A list of involved vehicles currently in dealer inventory is available on the "Service Update Bulletin Information" link under the "Service" tab in GM GlobalConnect (US) or attached to the GlobalConnect message (Canada) used to release this bulletin. Customer vehicles that return for service, for any reason, and are still covered under the vehicle's 8 year/80,000 mile (130,000 km) base emission warranty, and are within the VIN breakpoints provided below, should be checked for vehicle eligibility in the appropriate system listed below. Important Dealers are to confirm vehicle eligibility prior to beginning repairs by using GMVIS (dealers using WINS) or the Investigate Vehicle History link (dealers using GWM). Not all vehicles within the above breakpoints may be involved. Parts Information Parts required to complete this service update are to be obtained from General Motors Service and Parts Operations (GMSPO). Please refer to your "involved vehicles listing" before ordering parts. Normal orders should be placed on a DRO = Daily Replenishment Order. In an emergency situation, parts should be ordered on a CSO = Customer Special Order. Claim Information For vehicles repaired under the 8 year/80,000 mile (130,000 km) emission warranty: 1. Submit a claim using the table below. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 09333A > May > 10 > Campaign - Evaporative Emission Diagnostics > Page 3718 2. Courtesy Transportation - For dealers using WINS, submit using normal labor code; for dealers using GWM - submit as Net Item under the repair labor code. Disclaimer Service Procedure Service Procedure 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle in SI. 2. Locate the fuel tank EVAP emissions canister (1) and fuel tank EVAP vapor line connection (2). 3. Disconnect the 16 mm (5/8 in) quick connect vapor line (2) from the front of EVAP emissions canister (1). 4. Identify all parts included in the EVAP jumper hose assembly kit. The kit contains two EVAP jumper hoses and three tie straps. There is a large diameter 16 mm (5/8 in) EVAP jumper hose (1) with a 45 degree T-fitting (2) and a small diameter 8 mm (5/16 in) EVAP jumper hose with a T-fitting (3). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 09333A > May > 10 > Campaign - Evaporative Emission Diagnostics > Page 3719 5. Connect the new 16 mm (5/8 in) EVAP jumper hose (larger diameter hose) (2) to the EVAP emissions canister (1). 6. Install the second piece of the new 8 mm (5/16 in) jumper hose (smaller diameter hose) (3) to the 45 degree T-fitting on the new 16 mm (5/8 in) EVAP jumper hose (2). Ensure that the new 8 mm (5/16 in) jumper hose (3) is installed between the new 16 mm (5/8 in) EVAP jumper hose (2) and floor pan. 7. Insert the non-connector end of the 16 mm (5/8 in) EVAP jumper hose (larger diameter hose) (2) into the existing EVAP vapor line (4). 8. Secure the new jumper hose assembly with a tie strap (6) through the hole in brake clip (5) on LH underbody rail. Avoid contacting the brake or fuel line with the tie wrap. 9. Cut off excess tie strap (6). 10. Route the 8 mm (5/16 in) hose (3) on top of the fuel feed line on the left (driver's) side of the fuel tank assembly. 11. Continue routing the 8 mm (5/16 in) hose (3) through the suspension on the front side of the underbody rail and behind the tank and all-wheel drive unit. Follow the path of the park brake cable. The 8 mm (5/16 in) line should be routed on top of the park brake cable routing. 12. Disconnect the existing EVAP-to-fuel tank vapor line (yellow connector) located on the rear right (passenger side) of vehicle at the fuel tank. 13. Connect the new 8 mm (5/16 in) hose (3) to the fuel tank. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 09333A > May > 10 > Campaign - Evaporative Emission Diagnostics > Page 3720 14. Connect the existing EVAP hose to the T-fitting on the new 8 mm (5/16 in) hose. Caution Ensure that the 8 mm (5/16 in) hose (3) is tucked in over the park brake cable to prevent the hose from sagging over the fuel tank cutout area. 15. Secure the 8 mm (5/16 in) hose (3) to the parking brake line at the left (driver's) (A) and right (passenger' side) (B) fuel tank strap locations (9) with two tie straps (8) as shown in the illustration. 16. Lower the vehicle. 17. Determine if the vehicle is equipped with a four or six cylinder engine. - If the vehicle is equipped with a four cylinder engine, no further action is required. Refer to the Claim section of the bulletin. - If the vehicle is equipped with a six cylinder engine, refer to ECM Programming Service Procedure in this bulletin. ECM PROGRAMMING SERVICE PROCEDURE Do not attempt to order the calibration number from GMSPO. The calibration numbers required for this service procedure are programmed into control modules via a Multiple Diagnostic Interface (MDI) and TIS2WEB with the calibration update. Use TIS2WEB on or after 01/07/10 to obtain the calibration. If you cannot access the calibration, call the Techline Customer Support Center and it will be provided. If programming stops prior to completion, contact Engineering at 734-320-8123. Do NOT attempt to reprogram. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 09333A > May > 10 > Campaign - Evaporative Emission Diagnostics > Page 3721 For step-by-step programming instructions, please refer to SI and the Techline Information System (TIS) terminal. 1. Verify that there is a battery charge of 12 to 16 volts. The battery must be able to maintain a charge during programming. Only use an approved Midtronic 165-PSC charger to maintain proper battery voltage during programming. 2. Reprogram the engine control module (ECM). Refer to SI and Service Programming System (SPS) documentation for programming instructions, if required. 1. Connect the MDI to the vehicle. Note Select J2534 MDI and Reprogram ECU from the Select Diagnostic Tool and Programming Process screen. 2. Select J2534 MDI and Reprogram ECU from the Select Diagnostic Tool and Programming Process screen. 3. Select ECM Engine Control Module - Programming from the Supported Controllers screen. 4. Follow the on-screen instructions. 3. Use MDI and GDS to clear all DTCs if required. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 04-06-04-054B > Nov > 10 > Engine Controls - Aftermarket Accessory Usage Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - Aftermarket Accessory Usage INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 04-06-04-054B Date: November 18, 2010 Subject: Info - Non-GM Parts and Accessories (Aftermarket) Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add model years and update to the new U.S. Fixed Operation Manager (FOM) and Canada Warranty Manager (WM) names. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 04-06-04-054A (Section 06 - Engine/Propulsion System). The recent rise and expansion of companies selling non-GM parts and accessories has made it necessary to issue this reminder to dealers regarding GM's policy on the use and installation of these aftermarket components. When a dealer is performing a repair under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty, they are required to use only genuine GM or GM-approved parts and accessories. This applies to all warranty repairs, special policy repairs or any repairs paid for by GM. Parts and accessories advertised as being "the same" as parts manufactured by GM, but not sold through GM, do not qualify for use in warranty repairs, special policy repairs or any repairs paid for by GM. During a warranty repair, if a GM original equipment part is not available through GM Customer Care and Aftersales (GM CC&A;), ACDelco(R) distributors, other GM dealers or approved sources, the dealer is to obtain comparable, non-GM parts and clearly indicate, in detail, on the repair order the circumstances surrounding why non-GM parts were used. The dealer must give customers written notice, prior to the sale or service, that such parts or accessories are not marketed or warranted by General Motors. It should also be noted that dealers modifying new vehicles and installing equipment, parts and accessories obtained from sources not authorized by GM are responsible for complying with the National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act. Certain non-approved parts or assemblies, installed by the dealer or its agent not authorized by GM, may result in a change to the vehicle's design characteristics and may affect the vehicle's ability to conform to federal law. Dealers must fully understand that non-GM approved parts may not have been validated, tested or certified for use. This puts the dealer at risk for potential liability in the event of a part or vehicle failure. If a GM part failure occurs as the result of the installation or use of a non-GM approved part, the warranty will not be honored. A good example of non-authorized modification of vehicles is the result of an ever increasing supply of aftermarket devices available to the customer, which claim to increase the horsepower and torque of the Duramax(TM) Diesel Engines. These include the addition of, but are not limited to one or more of the following modifications: - Propane injection - Nitrous oxide injection - Additional modules (black boxes) that connect to the vehicle wiring systems - Revised engine calibrations downloaded for the engine control module - Calibration modules which connect to the vehicle diagnostic connector - Modification to the engine turbocharger waste gate Although the installation of these devices, or modification of vehicle components, can increase engine horsepower and torque, they may also negatively affect the engine emissions, reliability and/or durability. In addition, other powertrain components, such as transmissions, universal joints, drive shafts, and front/rear axle components, can be stressed beyond design safety limits by the installation of these devices. General Motors does not support or endorse the use of devices or modifications that, when installed, increase the engine horsepower and torque. It is because of these unknown stresses, and the potential to alter reliability, durability and emissions performance, that GM has adopted a policy that prevents any UNAUTHORIZED dealer warranty claim submissions to any remaining warranty coverage, to the powertrain and driveline components whenever the presence of a non-GM (aftermarket) calibration is confirmed - even if the non-GM control module calibration is subsequently removed. Refer to the latest version of Bulletin 09-06-04-026 (V8 Gas Engines) or 06-06-01-007 (Duramax(TM) Diesel Engines) for more information on dealer requirements for calibration verification. These same policies apply as they relate to the use of non-GM accessories. Damage or failure from the use or installation of a non-GM accessory will not be covered under warranty. Failure resulting from the alteration or modification of the vehicle, including the cutting, welding or disconnecting of the vehicle's original equipment parts and components will void the warranty. Additionally, dealers will NOT be reimbursed or compensated by GM in the event of any legal inquiry at either the local, state or federal level that Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 04-06-04-054B > Nov > 10 > Engine Controls - Aftermarket Accessory Usage > Page 3727 results from the alteration or modification of a vehicle using non-GM approved parts or accessories. Dealers should be especially cautious of accessory companies that claim the installation of their product will not void the factory warranty. Many times these companies have even given direction on how to quickly disassemble the accessory in an attempt to preclude the manufacturer from finding out that is has been installed. Any suspect repairs should be reviewed by the Fixed Operations Manager (FOM), and in Canada by the Warranty Manager (WM) for appropriate repair direction. If it is decided that a goodwill repair is to be made on the vehicle, even with the installation of such non-GM approved components, the customer is to be made aware of General Motors position on this issue and is to sign the appropriate goodwill documentation required by General Motors. It is imperative for dealers to understand that by installing such devices, they are jeopardizing not only the warranty coverage, but also the performance and reliability of the customer's vehicle. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 09-06-04-026C > Aug > 10 > Engine/Transmission - Aftermarket Calibrations Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine/Transmission - Aftermarket Calibrations INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 09-06-04-026C Date: August 13, 2010 Subject: Identifying Non-GM (Aftermarket) Engine and Transmission Calibrations for V8 Gas Engines Using Tech 2(R) or Global Diagnostic System (GDS) Models: 2006-2011 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (Excluding Saab 9-7X) 2006-2009 HUMMER H2 2006-2010 HUMMER H3 Equipped with V8 Gas Powered Engines Only Attention: This bulletin applies to V8 gas powered engines ONLY. For Duramax(TM) diesel powered engines, refer to the latest version of Corporate Bulletin Number 08-06-04-006G. Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2011 model year. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 09-06-04-026A (Section 06 - Engine/Propulsion System). General Motors is identifying an increasing number of engine, transmission and catalytic converter part failures that are the result of non-GM (aftermarket) engine and transmission control calibrations being used. When alteration to the GM-released engine or transmission control calibrations occurs, it subjects powertrain and driveline components (engine , transmission, transfer case, driveshaft and rear axle) to stresses that were not tested by General Motors. It is because of these unknown stresses, and the potential to alter reliability, durability and emissions performance, that GM has adopted a policy that prevents any UNAUTHORIZED dealer warranty claim submissions to any remaining warranty coverage, to the powertrain and driveline components whenever the presence of a non-GM (aftermarket) calibration is confirmed - even if the non-GM control module calibration is subsequently removed. Warranty coverage is based on the equipment and calibrations that were released on the vehicle at time of sale, or subsequently updated by GM. That's because GM testing and validation matches the calibration to a host of criteria that is essential to assure reliability, durability and emissions performance over the life of the warranty coverage and beyond. Stresses resulting from calibrations different from those tested and released by GM can damage or weaken components, leading to poor performance and or shortened life. Additionally, non-GM (aftermarket) issued engine control modifications often do not meet the same emissions performance standards as GM issued calibrations. Depending on state statutes, individuals who install engine control module calibrations that put the vehicle outside the parameters of emissions certification standards may be subject to fines and/or penalties. This bulletin outlines a procedure to identify the presence of non-GM (aftermarket) calibrations. GM recommends performing this check whenever a hard part failure is seen on internal engine or transmission components, or before an engine assembly or transmission assembly is being replaced under warranty. It is also recommended that the engine calibration verification procedure be performed whenever diagnostics indicate that catalytic converter replacement is indicated. The PQC has a process to confirm the ECM/PCM calibration is GM issued. The PQC will require a picture of the engine calibration verification screen, as outlined in this bulletin, before authorizing any V8 gas powered engine replacement. If a non-GM calibration is found and verification has taken place through GM, the remaining powertrain and driveline warranty will be blocked and notated in GMVIS and the dealership will be notified. This block prevents any UNAUTHORIZED warranty claim submission. 1. Connect the Tech 2(R) to the vehicle. 2. Go to: Diagnostics and build the vehicle. 3. Select: Powertrain. 4. Select: Engine. 5. *Select: Engine Control Module or PCM. 6. *Select: Module ID Information or I/M Information System if the Module ID Information selection is not available. 7. *If "I/M information System" was selected, it may be necessary to select "Vehicle Information" in order to display the calibration information. ‹› If the CVN information is displayed as "N/A", it will be necessary to contact the TCSC to obtain the CVN information. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 09-06-04-026C > Aug > 10 > Engine/Transmission - Aftermarket Calibrations > Page 3732 8. Take a CLEAR digital picture of the Tech 2(R) Vehicle Information screen showing the engine Calibration IDs and Verification Numbers as shown above. Retain the printout information and the Tech 2(R) screen photograph with the repair order. Note All pictures must be sent as a.jpg file. 9. E-mail a copy of the picture to [email protected]. In the subject line of the e-mail include the phrase "V8 Cal" as well as the complete VIN and Dealer BAC. In the body of the e-mail, include the VIN, mileage, R.O. number and BAC. Include a brief description of the customer concern and cause of the concern. Note The dealer will receive an e-mail reply after the calibrations have been validated. The e-mail reply will advise the dealer if the calibrations are OEM. 10. Allow two hours for the PQC to verify the calibrations and set up the case details. ‹› If the PQC determines that the calibrations ARE aftermarket calibrations, DO NOT contact GM Technical Assistance to discuss warranty concerns on the aftermarket calibrations. ALL questions and concerns about warranty should be directed to the dealers Fixed Operations Manager (FOM), (Warranty Manager (WM) in Canada). 11. You may call the PQC two hours after submitting the e-mail for authorization to replace the assembly. This will provide them time to receive, review and set up a case on the request. Please be prepared to provide all the usual documentation that is normally required when requesting an assembly authorization from the PQC. Tech 2(R) Displaying All Zeroes for the Verification Numbers on the Calibration ID and Verification Number Screen If the Tech 2(R) that you are using displays all zeroes for the Verification Numbers as shown, then perform the following steps: 1. Update the Tech 2(R) with the latest software from TIS2WEB. 2. Turn OFF the ignition for 90 seconds. 3. Connect the Tech 2(R) to the vehicle. 4. Turn ON the ignition, and build the vehicle. Observe the Tech 2(R) Calibration ID and Verification Number screen for proper operation. ‹› If the Tech 2(R) screen still does not display properly, then turn OFF the ignition for 90 seconds again. Turn ON the ignition and observe the same screen for proper operation. Retrieving Calibrations From a Global A Vehicle This information applies to the 2010 Camaro and is typical of the procedure that will be used on Global A vehicles. 1. Turn OFF the ignition. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 09-06-04-026C > Aug > 10 > Engine/Transmission - Aftermarket Calibrations > Page 3733 2. Connect the MDI to the Data Link Connector (DLC) of the vehicle. Note Use the USB port to make the following MDI connection: 3. Connect the MDI to a PC or laptop that has been downloaded with the GDS application from TIS2WEB. Note At least one Diagnostic Package must be installed on the PC to perform diagnostics. If GDS was just installed, select: Add New Diagnostic Package and then select: a Diagnostic Package to download. 4. Click: On the GDS icon on the PC. 5. The Login Page will appear. 6. Select: A User. 7. The ID Screen will appear. 8. Select: The serial number of the MDI being used. 9. Select: Connect. 10. Verify that the system status is ready by observing for a flashing PC light icon on the MDI. 11. Select: Make, Model and Model Year, in order to build the vehicle. 12. Click: Upload VIN, to allow the VIN to be reported to the PC. 13. At: The Verification step, turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. 14. Select: Next Action. 15. The Home Page will appear. 16. Select: Next. 17. The Diagnostic Screen will appear. Note Due to vehicle build, software and RPO variations, GDS may ask for additional information in Step 18. 18. Select: Engine ID, if prompted. 19. Select: Module Diagnostics. 20. Select: ECM. 21. Select: ID Information. 22. The Diagnostics page will appear. Typical View of GDS Calibration History Screen Note GDS is capable of displaying up to 10 Calibration History events. 23. Select: Calibration History from the drop down menu in order to display the following items on the screen: - Calibration History Buffer - Number of Calibration History Events Stored - Calibration Part Number History - Calibration Verification Number History 24. Select: Screenshot. 25. Name and save the file in an appropriate folder. 26. Select : Print, and retain a copy of the screenshot with the repair order. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 09-06-04-026C > Aug > 10 > Engine/Transmission - Aftermarket Calibrations > Page 3734 Note All pictures must be sent as a.jpg file. 27. E-mail a copy of the screenshot to [email protected]. In the subject line of the e-mail include the phrase "V8 Cal" as well as the complete VIN and Dealer BAC. In the body of the e-mail, include the VIN, mileage, R.O. number and BAC. Include a brief description of the customer concern and cause of the concern. Note The dealer will receive an e-mail reply after the calibrations have been validated. The e-mail reply will advise the dealer if the calibrations are OEM. 28. Allow two hours for the PQC to verify the calibrations and set up the case details. ‹› If the PQC determines that the calibrations ARE aftermarket calibrations, DO NOT contact GM Technical Assistance to discuss warranty concerns on the aftermarket calibrations. ALL questions and concerns about warranty should be directed to the dealers Fixed Operations Manager (FOM), (Warranty Manager (WM) in Canada). 29. You may call the PQC two hours after submitting the e-mail for authorization to replace the assembly. This will provide them time to receive, review and set up a case on the request. Please be prepared to provide all the usual documentation that is normally required when requesting an assembly authorization from the PQC. Warranty Information - The Dealership Service Management must be involved in any situation that would justify the use of labor operation Z1111. - Notify the Fixed Operations Manager (FOM) (Warranty Manager (WM) in Canada) of the situation. - All claims will have to be routed to the FOM (WM in Canada) for approval. - Please refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 09-00-89-016, Labor Operation Z1111 - Suspected Tampering or Vehicle Modifications for important information. For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 09333A > May > 10 > Campaign - Evaporative Emission Diagnostics Technical Service Bulletin # 09333A Date: 100504 Campaign - Evaporative Emission Diagnostics SERVICE UPDATE Bulletin No.: 09333A Date: May 04, 2010 Subject: 09333A - Service Update for Inventory and Customer Vehicles - Evaporative Emission Diagnostics Models: 2010 Chevrolet Equinox 2010 GMC Terrain Supercede: The ECM programming service procedure in this bulletin has been revised to include instructions for dealers to contact Engineering at 734-320-8123 if programming stops prior to completion. Do NOT attempt to reprogram.Please discard all copies of bulletin 09333, issued January 2010. This service update includes vehicles in dealer inventory and customer vehicles that return to the dealership for any reason. Purpose This bulletin provides a service procedure to improve the ability of the evaporative emissions diagnostic to detect leaks by installing a fuel tank vent tubing jumper on certain 2010 model year Chevrolet Equinox and GMC Terrain vehicles. Vehicles equipped with a V6 engine will also require reprogramming of the engine control module. This service procedure should be completed as soon as possible on involved vehicles currently in dealer inventory and customer vehicles that return to the dealer for any type of service. Vehicles Involved A list of involved vehicles currently in dealer inventory is available on the "Service Update Bulletin Information" link under the "Service" tab in GM GlobalConnect (US) or attached to the GlobalConnect message (Canada) used to release this bulletin. Customer vehicles that return for service, for any reason, and are still covered under the vehicle's 8 year/80,000 mile (130,000 km) base emission warranty, and are within the VIN breakpoints provided below, should be checked for vehicle eligibility in the appropriate system listed below. Important Dealers are to confirm vehicle eligibility prior to beginning repairs by using GMVIS (dealers using WINS) or the Investigate Vehicle History link (dealers using GWM). Not all vehicles within the above breakpoints may be involved. Parts Information Parts required to complete this service update are to be obtained from General Motors Service and Parts Operations (GMSPO). Please refer to your "involved vehicles listing" before ordering parts. Normal orders should be placed on a DRO = Daily Replenishment Order. In an emergency situation, parts should be ordered on a CSO = Customer Special Order. Claim Information For vehicles repaired under the 8 year/80,000 mile (130,000 km) emission warranty: 1. Submit a claim using the table below. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 09333A > May > 10 > Campaign - Evaporative Emission Diagnostics > Page 3739 2. Courtesy Transportation - For dealers using WINS, submit using normal labor code; for dealers using GWM - submit as Net Item under the repair labor code. Disclaimer Service Procedure Service Procedure 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle in SI. 2. Locate the fuel tank EVAP emissions canister (1) and fuel tank EVAP vapor line connection (2). 3. Disconnect the 16 mm (5/8 in) quick connect vapor line (2) from the front of EVAP emissions canister (1). 4. Identify all parts included in the EVAP jumper hose assembly kit. The kit contains two EVAP jumper hoses and three tie straps. There is a large diameter 16 mm (5/8 in) EVAP jumper hose (1) with a 45 degree T-fitting (2) and a small diameter 8 mm (5/16 in) EVAP jumper hose with a T-fitting (3). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 09333A > May > 10 > Campaign - Evaporative Emission Diagnostics > Page 3740 5. Connect the new 16 mm (5/8 in) EVAP jumper hose (larger diameter hose) (2) to the EVAP emissions canister (1). 6. Install the second piece of the new 8 mm (5/16 in) jumper hose (smaller diameter hose) (3) to the 45 degree T-fitting on the new 16 mm (5/8 in) EVAP jumper hose (2). Ensure that the new 8 mm (5/16 in) jumper hose (3) is installed between the new 16 mm (5/8 in) EVAP jumper hose (2) and floor pan. 7. Insert the non-connector end of the 16 mm (5/8 in) EVAP jumper hose (larger diameter hose) (2) into the existing EVAP vapor line (4). 8. Secure the new jumper hose assembly with a tie strap (6) through the hole in brake clip (5) on LH underbody rail. Avoid contacting the brake or fuel line with the tie wrap. 9. Cut off excess tie strap (6). 10. Route the 8 mm (5/16 in) hose (3) on top of the fuel feed line on the left (driver's) side of the fuel tank assembly. 11. Continue routing the 8 mm (5/16 in) hose (3) through the suspension on the front side of the underbody rail and behind the tank and all-wheel drive unit. Follow the path of the park brake cable. The 8 mm (5/16 in) line should be routed on top of the park brake cable routing. 12. Disconnect the existing EVAP-to-fuel tank vapor line (yellow connector) located on the rear right (passenger side) of vehicle at the fuel tank. 13. Connect the new 8 mm (5/16 in) hose (3) to the fuel tank. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 09333A > May > 10 > Campaign - Evaporative Emission Diagnostics > Page 3741 14. Connect the existing EVAP hose to the T-fitting on the new 8 mm (5/16 in) hose. Caution Ensure that the 8 mm (5/16 in) hose (3) is tucked in over the park brake cable to prevent the hose from sagging over the fuel tank cutout area. 15. Secure the 8 mm (5/16 in) hose (3) to the parking brake line at the left (driver's) (A) and right (passenger' side) (B) fuel tank strap locations (9) with two tie straps (8) as shown in the illustration. 16. Lower the vehicle. 17. Determine if the vehicle is equipped with a four or six cylinder engine. - If the vehicle is equipped with a four cylinder engine, no further action is required. Refer to the Claim section of the bulletin. - If the vehicle is equipped with a six cylinder engine, refer to ECM Programming Service Procedure in this bulletin. ECM PROGRAMMING SERVICE PROCEDURE Do not attempt to order the calibration number from GMSPO. The calibration numbers required for this service procedure are programmed into control modules via a Multiple Diagnostic Interface (MDI) and TIS2WEB with the calibration update. Use TIS2WEB on or after 01/07/10 to obtain the calibration. If you cannot access the calibration, call the Techline Customer Support Center and it will be provided. If programming stops prior to completion, contact Engineering at 734-320-8123. Do NOT attempt to reprogram. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 09333A > May > 10 > Campaign - Evaporative Emission Diagnostics > Page 3742 For step-by-step programming instructions, please refer to SI and the Techline Information System (TIS) terminal. 1. Verify that there is a battery charge of 12 to 16 volts. The battery must be able to maintain a charge during programming. Only use an approved Midtronic 165-PSC charger to maintain proper battery voltage during programming. 2. Reprogram the engine control module (ECM). Refer to SI and Service Programming System (SPS) documentation for programming instructions, if required. 1. Connect the MDI to the vehicle. Note Select J2534 MDI and Reprogram ECU from the Select Diagnostic Tool and Programming Process screen. 2. Select J2534 MDI and Reprogram ECU from the Select Diagnostic Tool and Programming Process screen. 3. Select ECM Engine Control Module - Programming from the Supported Controllers screen. 4. Follow the on-screen instructions. 3. Use MDI and GDS to clear all DTCs if required. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 04-06-04-054B > Nov > 10 > Engine Controls - Aftermarket Accessory Usage Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - Aftermarket Accessory Usage INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 04-06-04-054B Date: November 18, 2010 Subject: Info - Non-GM Parts and Accessories (Aftermarket) Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add model years and update to the new U.S. Fixed Operation Manager (FOM) and Canada Warranty Manager (WM) names. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 04-06-04-054A (Section 06 - Engine/Propulsion System). The recent rise and expansion of companies selling non-GM parts and accessories has made it necessary to issue this reminder to dealers regarding GM's policy on the use and installation of these aftermarket components. When a dealer is performing a repair under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty, they are required to use only genuine GM or GM-approved parts and accessories. This applies to all warranty repairs, special policy repairs or any repairs paid for by GM. Parts and accessories advertised as being "the same" as parts manufactured by GM, but not sold through GM, do not qualify for use in warranty repairs, special policy repairs or any repairs paid for by GM. During a warranty repair, if a GM original equipment part is not available through GM Customer Care and Aftersales (GM CC&A;), ACDelco(R) distributors, other GM dealers or approved sources, the dealer is to obtain comparable, non-GM parts and clearly indicate, in detail, on the repair order the circumstances surrounding why non-GM parts were used. The dealer must give customers written notice, prior to the sale or service, that such parts or accessories are not marketed or warranted by General Motors. It should also be noted that dealers modifying new vehicles and installing equipment, parts and accessories obtained from sources not authorized by GM are responsible for complying with the National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act. Certain non-approved parts or assemblies, installed by the dealer or its agent not authorized by GM, may result in a change to the vehicle's design characteristics and may affect the vehicle's ability to conform to federal law. Dealers must fully understand that non-GM approved parts may not have been validated, tested or certified for use. This puts the dealer at risk for potential liability in the event of a part or vehicle failure. If a GM part failure occurs as the result of the installation or use of a non-GM approved part, the warranty will not be honored. A good example of non-authorized modification of vehicles is the result of an ever increasing supply of aftermarket devices available to the customer, which claim to increase the horsepower and torque of the Duramax(TM) Diesel Engines. These include the addition of, but are not limited to one or more of the following modifications: - Propane injection - Nitrous oxide injection - Additional modules (black boxes) that connect to the vehicle wiring systems - Revised engine calibrations downloaded for the engine control module - Calibration modules which connect to the vehicle diagnostic connector - Modification to the engine turbocharger waste gate Although the installation of these devices, or modification of vehicle components, can increase engine horsepower and torque, they may also negatively affect the engine emissions, reliability and/or durability. In addition, other powertrain components, such as transmissions, universal joints, drive shafts, and front/rear axle components, can be stressed beyond design safety limits by the installation of these devices. General Motors does not support or endorse the use of devices or modifications that, when installed, increase the engine horsepower and torque. It is because of these unknown stresses, and the potential to alter reliability, durability and emissions performance, that GM has adopted a policy that prevents any UNAUTHORIZED dealer warranty claim submissions to any remaining warranty coverage, to the powertrain and driveline components whenever the presence of a non-GM (aftermarket) calibration is confirmed - even if the non-GM control module calibration is subsequently removed. Refer to the latest version of Bulletin 09-06-04-026 (V8 Gas Engines) or 06-06-01-007 (Duramax(TM) Diesel Engines) for more information on dealer requirements for calibration verification. These same policies apply as they relate to the use of non-GM accessories. Damage or failure from the use or installation of a non-GM accessory will not be covered under warranty. Failure resulting from the alteration or modification of the vehicle, including the cutting, welding or disconnecting of the vehicle's original equipment parts and components will void the warranty. Additionally, dealers will NOT be reimbursed or compensated by GM in the event of any legal inquiry at either the local, state or federal level that Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 04-06-04-054B > Nov > 10 > Engine Controls - Aftermarket Accessory Usage > Page 3748 results from the alteration or modification of a vehicle using non-GM approved parts or accessories. Dealers should be especially cautious of accessory companies that claim the installation of their product will not void the factory warranty. Many times these companies have even given direction on how to quickly disassemble the accessory in an attempt to preclude the manufacturer from finding out that is has been installed. Any suspect repairs should be reviewed by the Fixed Operations Manager (FOM), and in Canada by the Warranty Manager (WM) for appropriate repair direction. If it is decided that a goodwill repair is to be made on the vehicle, even with the installation of such non-GM approved components, the customer is to be made aware of General Motors position on this issue and is to sign the appropriate goodwill documentation required by General Motors. It is imperative for dealers to understand that by installing such devices, they are jeopardizing not only the warranty coverage, but also the performance and reliability of the customer's vehicle. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 09-06-04-026C > Aug > 10 > Engine/Transmission - Aftermarket Calibrations Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine/Transmission - Aftermarket Calibrations INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 09-06-04-026C Date: August 13, 2010 Subject: Identifying Non-GM (Aftermarket) Engine and Transmission Calibrations for V8 Gas Engines Using Tech 2(R) or Global Diagnostic System (GDS) Models: 2006-2011 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (Excluding Saab 9-7X) 2006-2009 HUMMER H2 2006-2010 HUMMER H3 Equipped with V8 Gas Powered Engines Only Attention: This bulletin applies to V8 gas powered engines ONLY. For Duramax(TM) diesel powered engines, refer to the latest version of Corporate Bulletin Number 08-06-04-006G. Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2011 model year. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 09-06-04-026A (Section 06 - Engine/Propulsion System). General Motors is identifying an increasing number of engine, transmission and catalytic converter part failures that are the result of non-GM (aftermarket) engine and transmission control calibrations being used. When alteration to the GM-released engine or transmission control calibrations occurs, it subjects powertrain and driveline components (engine , transmission, transfer case, driveshaft and rear axle) to stresses that were not tested by General Motors. It is because of these unknown stresses, and the potential to alter reliability, durability and emissions performance, that GM has adopted a policy that prevents any UNAUTHORIZED dealer warranty claim submissions to any remaining warranty coverage, to the powertrain and driveline components whenever the presence of a non-GM (aftermarket) calibration is confirmed - even if the non-GM control module calibration is subsequently removed. Warranty coverage is based on the equipment and calibrations that were released on the vehicle at time of sale, or subsequently updated by GM. That's because GM testing and validation matches the calibration to a host of criteria that is essential to assure reliability, durability and emissions performance over the life of the warranty coverage and beyond. Stresses resulting from calibrations different from those tested and released by GM can damage or weaken components, leading to poor performance and or shortened life. Additionally, non-GM (aftermarket) issued engine control modifications often do not meet the same emissions performance standards as GM issued calibrations. Depending on state statutes, individuals who install engine control module calibrations that put the vehicle outside the parameters of emissions certification standards may be subject to fines and/or penalties. This bulletin outlines a procedure to identify the presence of non-GM (aftermarket) calibrations. GM recommends performing this check whenever a hard part failure is seen on internal engine or transmission components, or before an engine assembly or transmission assembly is being replaced under warranty. It is also recommended that the engine calibration verification procedure be performed whenever diagnostics indicate that catalytic converter replacement is indicated. The PQC has a process to confirm the ECM/PCM calibration is GM issued. The PQC will require a picture of the engine calibration verification screen, as outlined in this bulletin, before authorizing any V8 gas powered engine replacement. If a non-GM calibration is found and verification has taken place through GM, the remaining powertrain and driveline warranty will be blocked and notated in GMVIS and the dealership will be notified. This block prevents any UNAUTHORIZED warranty claim submission. 1. Connect the Tech 2(R) to the vehicle. 2. Go to: Diagnostics and build the vehicle. 3. Select: Powertrain. 4. Select: Engine. 5. *Select: Engine Control Module or PCM. 6. *Select: Module ID Information or I/M Information System if the Module ID Information selection is not available. 7. *If "I/M information System" was selected, it may be necessary to select "Vehicle Information" in order to display the calibration information. ‹› If the CVN information is displayed as "N/A", it will be necessary to contact the TCSC to obtain the CVN information. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 09-06-04-026C > Aug > 10 > Engine/Transmission - Aftermarket Calibrations > Page 3753 8. Take a CLEAR digital picture of the Tech 2(R) Vehicle Information screen showing the engine Calibration IDs and Verification Numbers as shown above. Retain the printout information and the Tech 2(R) screen photograph with the repair order. Note All pictures must be sent as a.jpg file. 9. E-mail a copy of the picture to [email protected]. In the subject line of the e-mail include the phrase "V8 Cal" as well as the complete VIN and Dealer BAC. In the body of the e-mail, include the VIN, mileage, R.O. number and BAC. Include a brief description of the customer concern and cause of the concern. Note The dealer will receive an e-mail reply after the calibrations have been validated. The e-mail reply will advise the dealer if the calibrations are OEM. 10. Allow two hours for the PQC to verify the calibrations and set up the case details. ‹› If the PQC determines that the calibrations ARE aftermarket calibrations, DO NOT contact GM Technical Assistance to discuss warranty concerns on the aftermarket calibrations. ALL questions and concerns about warranty should be directed to the dealers Fixed Operations Manager (FOM), (Warranty Manager (WM) in Canada). 11. You may call the PQC two hours after submitting the e-mail for authorization to replace the assembly. This will provide them time to receive, review and set up a case on the request. Please be prepared to provide all the usual documentation that is normally required when requesting an assembly authorization from the PQC. Tech 2(R) Displaying All Zeroes for the Verification Numbers on the Calibration ID and Verification Number Screen If the Tech 2(R) that you are using displays all zeroes for the Verification Numbers as shown, then perform the following steps: 1. Update the Tech 2(R) with the latest software from TIS2WEB. 2. Turn OFF the ignition for 90 seconds. 3. Connect the Tech 2(R) to the vehicle. 4. Turn ON the ignition, and build the vehicle. Observe the Tech 2(R) Calibration ID and Verification Number screen for proper operation. ‹› If the Tech 2(R) screen still does not display properly, then turn OFF the ignition for 90 seconds again. Turn ON the ignition and observe the same screen for proper operation. Retrieving Calibrations From a Global A Vehicle This information applies to the 2010 Camaro and is typical of the procedure that will be used on Global A vehicles. 1. Turn OFF the ignition. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 09-06-04-026C > Aug > 10 > Engine/Transmission - Aftermarket Calibrations > Page 3754 2. Connect the MDI to the Data Link Connector (DLC) of the vehicle. Note Use the USB port to make the following MDI connection: 3. Connect the MDI to a PC or laptop that has been downloaded with the GDS application from TIS2WEB. Note At least one Diagnostic Package must be installed on the PC to perform diagnostics. If GDS was just installed, select: Add New Diagnostic Package and then select: a Diagnostic Package to download. 4. Click: On the GDS icon on the PC. 5. The Login Page will appear. 6. Select: A User. 7. The ID Screen will appear. 8. Select: The serial number of the MDI being used. 9. Select: Connect. 10. Verify that the system status is ready by observing for a flashing PC light icon on the MDI. 11. Select: Make, Model and Model Year, in order to build the vehicle. 12. Click: Upload VIN, to allow the VIN to be reported to the PC. 13. At: The Verification step, turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. 14. Select: Next Action. 15. The Home Page will appear. 16. Select: Next. 17. The Diagnostic Screen will appear. Note Due to vehicle build, software and RPO variations, GDS may ask for additional information in Step 18. 18. Select: Engine ID, if prompted. 19. Select: Module Diagnostics. 20. Select: ECM. 21. Select: ID Information. 22. The Diagnostics page will appear. Typical View of GDS Calibration History Screen Note GDS is capable of displaying up to 10 Calibration History events. 23. Select: Calibration History from the drop down menu in order to display the following items on the screen: - Calibration History Buffer - Number of Calibration History Events Stored - Calibration Part Number History - Calibration Verification Number History 24. Select: Screenshot. 25. Name and save the file in an appropriate folder. 26. Select : Print, and retain a copy of the screenshot with the repair order. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 09-06-04-026C > Aug > 10 > Engine/Transmission - Aftermarket Calibrations > Page 3755 Note All pictures must be sent as a.jpg file. 27. E-mail a copy of the screenshot to [email protected]. In the subject line of the e-mail include the phrase "V8 Cal" as well as the complete VIN and Dealer BAC. In the body of the e-mail, include the VIN, mileage, R.O. number and BAC. Include a brief description of the customer concern and cause of the concern. Note The dealer will receive an e-mail reply after the calibrations have been validated. The e-mail reply will advise the dealer if the calibrations are OEM. 28. Allow two hours for the PQC to verify the calibrations and set up the case details. ‹› If the PQC determines that the calibrations ARE aftermarket calibrations, DO NOT contact GM Technical Assistance to discuss warranty concerns on the aftermarket calibrations. ALL questions and concerns about warranty should be directed to the dealers Fixed Operations Manager (FOM), (Warranty Manager (WM) in Canada). 29. You may call the PQC two hours after submitting the e-mail for authorization to replace the assembly. This will provide them time to receive, review and set up a case on the request. Please be prepared to provide all the usual documentation that is normally required when requesting an assembly authorization from the PQC. Warranty Information - The Dealership Service Management must be involved in any situation that would justify the use of labor operation Z1111. - Notify the Fixed Operations Manager (FOM) (Warranty Manager (WM) in Canada) of the situation. - All claims will have to be routed to the FOM (WM in Canada) for approval. - Please refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 09-00-89-016, Labor Operation Z1111 - Suspected Tampering or Vehicle Modifications for important information. For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3756 Engine Control Module: Diagrams K20 Engine Control Module X1 (LAF) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3757 K20 Engine Control Module X1 (LF1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3758 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3759 K20 Engine Control Module X2 (LAF) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3760 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3761 K20 Engine Control Module X2 (LF1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3762 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3763 K20 Engine Control Module X3 (LAF) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3764 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3765 K20 Engine Control Module X3 (LF1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3766 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3767 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3768 Engine Control Module: Description and Operation Engine Control Module Description The engine control module (ECM) interacts with many emission related components and systems, and monitors the emission related components and systems for deterioration. OBD II diagnostics monitor the system performance and a diagnostic trouble code (DTC) sets if the system performance degrades. The malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) operation and the DTC storage are dictated by the DTC type. A DTC is ranked as a Type A or Type B if the DTC is emissions related. Type C is a non-emissions related DTC. The ECM is in the engine compartment. The ECM is the control center of the engine controls system. The ECM controls the following components: * The fuel injection system * The ignition system * The emission control systems * The on-board diagnostics * The A/C and fan systems * The throttle actuation control (TAC) system The ECM constantly monitors the information from various sensors and other inputs, and controls the systems that affect the vehicle performance and the emissions. The ECM also performs diagnostic tests on various parts of the system. The ECM can recognize operational problems and alert the driver via the MIL. When the ECM detects a malfunction, the ECM stores a DTC. The condition area is identified by the particular DTC that is set. This aids the technician in making repairs. ECM Function The engine control module (ECM) can supply 5 V or 12 V to the various sensors or switches. This is done through pull-up resistors to the regulated power supplies within the ECM. In some cases, even an ordinary shop voltmeter will not give an accurate reading because the resistance is too low. Therefore, a DMM with at least 10 Mohm input impedance is required in order to ensure accurate voltage readings. The ECM controls the output circuits by controlling the ground or the power feed circuit through the transistors or a device called an output driver module. EEPROM The electronically erasable programmable read only memory (EEPROM) is a permanent memory that is physically part of the engine control module (ECM). The EEPROM contains program and calibration information that the ECM needs in order to control the powertrain operation. Special equipment, as well as the correct program and calibration for the vehicle, are required in order to reprogram the ECM. Data Link Connector (DLC) The data link connector (DLC) is a 16-pin connector that provides the technician a means of accessing serial data for aid in the diagnosis. This connector allows the technician to use a scan tool in order to monitor the various serial data parameters, and display the DTC information. The DLC is located inside of the drivers compartment, underneath the dash. Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) The malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) is inside of the instrument panel cluster (IPC). The MIL is controlled by the engine control module (ECM) and illuminates when the ECM detects a condition that affects the vehicle emissions. ECM Service Precautions The engine control module (ECM), by design, can withstand the normal current draws that are associated with the vehicle operations. However, care must be used in order to avoid overloading any of these circuits. When testing for opens or shorts, do not ground or apply voltage to any of the ECM circuits unless the diagnostic procedure instructs you to do so. These circuits should only be tested with a DMM. Emissions Diagnosis For State I/M Programs This OBD II equipped vehicle is designed to diagnose any conditions that could lead to excessive levels of the following emissions: * Hydrocarbons (HC) * Carbon monoxide (CO) * Oxides of nitrogen (NOx) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3769 * Evaporative emission (EVAP) system losses Should this vehicles on-board diagnostic system (ECM) detect a condition that could result in excessive emissions, the ECM turns ON the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) and stores a DTC that is associated with the condition. Aftermarket (Add-On) Electrical And Vacuum Equipment Caution: Do not attach add-on vacuum operated equipment to this vehicle. The use of add-on vacuum equipment may result in damage to vehicle components or systems. Caution: Connect any add-on electrically operated equipment to the vehicle's electrical system at the battery (power and ground) in order to prevent damage to the vehicle. Aftermarket, add-on, electrical and vacuum equipment is defined as any equipment installed on a vehicle after leaving the factory that connects to the vehicles electrical or vacuum systems. No allowances have been made in the vehicle design for this type of equipment. Add-on electrical equipment, even when installed to these strict guidelines, may still cause the powertrain system to malfunction. This may also include equipment not connected to the vehicle electrical system, such as portable telephones and radios. Therefore, the first step in diagnosing any powertrain condition is to eliminate all of the aftermarket electrical equipment from the vehicle. After this is done, if the problem still exists, the problem may be diagnosed in the normal manner. Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) Damage Note: In order to prevent possible electrostatic discharge damage to the engine control module (ECM), DO NOT touch the connector pins on the ECM. The electronic components that are used in the control systems are often designed to carry very low voltage. The electronic components are susceptible to damage caused by electrostatic discharge. Less than 100 V of static electricity can cause damage to some electronic components. There are several ways for a person to become statically charged. The most common methods of charging are by friction and by induction. An example of charging by friction is a person sliding across a car seat. Charging by induction occurs when a person with well insulated shoes stands near a highly charged object and momentarily touches ground. Charges of the same polarity are drained off leaving the person highly charged with the opposite polarity. Static charges can cause damage, therefore, it is important to use care when handling and testing electronic components. Emissions Control Information Label The underhood Vehicle Emissions Control Information Label contains important emission specifications and setting procedures. In the upper right corner is the exhaust emission information. This identifies the year, the manufacturing division of the engine, the displacement of the engine in liters, the class of the vehicle, and type of fuel metering system. There is also an illustrated emission components and vacuum hose schematic. This label is located in the engine compartment of every General Motors vehicle. If the label has been removed, it can be ordered from GM service parts operations (GMSPO). Underhood Inspection Note: This inspection is very important and must be done carefully and thoroughly. Perform a careful underhood inspection when performing any diagnostic procedure or diagnosing the cause of an emission test failure. This can often lead to repairing a condition without further steps. Use the following guidelines when performing an inspection: * Inspect all of the vacuum hoses for correct routing, pinches, cuts, or disconnects. * Inspect any hoses that are difficult to see. * Inspect all of the wires in the engine compartment for the following conditions: - Burned or chafed spots - Pinched wires - Contact with sharp edges - Contact with hot exhaust manifolds Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3770 Engine Control Module: Service and Repair Engine Control Module Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3771 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Application and ID Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Application and ID Electrical Center Identification Views X50A Fuse Block - Underhood, Label Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Application and ID > Page 3775 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Absolute Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair Absolute Pressure Sensor: Service and Repair Throttle Inlet Absolute Pressure Sensor Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Locations Instrument Panel/Center Console Component Views Lower Left of the Instrument Panel Components 1 - B80 Park Brake Switch 2 - T3 Audio Amplifier 3 - K9 Body Control Module 4 - K73 Telematics Communication Interface Control Module (UE1) 5 - B107 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor 6 T4S Wireless Communication Antenna - Bluetooth (UE1 with UPF) 7 - B22 Brake Pedal Position Sensor 8 - X84 Data Link Connector Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3783 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Diagrams B107 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3784 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Service and Repair Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Diagrams B75B Mass Air Flow/Intake Air Temperature Sensor Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3788 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Service and Repair Mass Airflow Sensor with Intake Air Temperature Sensor Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Barometric Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams Barometric Pressure Sensor: Diagrams B17 Barometric Pressure Sensor (LF1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Battery Current Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams Battery Current Sensor: Diagrams B18 Battery Current Sensor Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Disassembled Views Camshaft Position Sensor: Locations Disassembled Views Disassembled Views Camshaft Timing Components 1 - Primary Timing Chain Tensioner Bolt 2 - Left Secondary Timing Chain Shoe Bolt 3 - Right Secondary Timing Chain Tensioner 4 - Right Secondary Timing Chain Tensioner Gasket 5 - Right Secondary Timing Chain Shoe 6 - Secondary Timing Chain 7 - Camshaft Position Actuator Bolt 8 Exhaust Camshaft Position Actuator 9 - Camshaft Position Actuator Thrust Washer 10 - Intake Camshaft Position Actuator 11 - Right Secondary Timing Chain Guide 12 - Left Camshaft Intermediate Drive Shaft Sprocket 13 - Camshaft Intermediate Drive Shaft Sprocket Bolt 14 - Left Secondary Timing Chain Shoe 15 - Left Secondary Timing Chain Tensioner Gasket 16 - Left Secondary Timing Chain Tensioner Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Disassembled Views > Page 3799 17 - Left Secondary Timing Chain Guide 18 - Lower Primary Timing Chain Guide 19 - Lower Primary Timing Chain Guide Bolt 20 - Crankshaft Sprocket 21 - Primary Timing Chain 22 - Right Camshaft Intermediate Drive Shaft Sprocket 23 - Upper Primary Timing Chain Guide 24 - Primary Timing Chain Tensioner Gasket 25 - Primary Timing Chain Tensioner Engine Front Cover 1 - Water Pump Pulley Bolt 2 - Water Pump Pulley 3 - Water Pump Assembly 4 - Water Pump Pulley Gasket 5 - Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve Seal 6 - Camshaft Position Sensor Bolt 7 - Camshaft Position Sensor 8 - Camshaft Position Sensor O-ring Seal 9 - Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve Bolt 10 - Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve 11 - Engine Front Cover Gasket 12 - Engine Front Cover Locating Pin Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Disassembled Views > Page 3800 13 - Engine Front Cover 14 - Engine Front Cover Bolt 15 - Engine Front Cover Seal 16 Crankshaft Balancer 17 - Crankshaft Balancer Bolt 18 - Engine Front Cover Bolt 19 - Water Pump Bolt Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Disassembled Views > Page 3801 Camshaft Position Sensor: Locations Powertrain Component Views Powertrain Component Views Front Engine Components (LAF 1 of 2) 1 - Q38 Throttle Body 2 - G18 High Pressure Fuel Pump 3 - B23F Camshaft Position Sensor Intake 4 - B37 Engine Oil Pressure Switch 5 - B68 Knock Sensor 6 - B26 Crankshaft Position Sensor 7 - M64 Starter Motor 8 - Q2 A/C Compressor Clutch 9 - G13 Generator Left Rear Engine Components (LAF) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Disassembled Views > Page 3802 1 - T8D Ignition Coil 4 2 - T8C Ignition Coil 3 3 - T8B Ignition Coil 2 4 - T8A Ignition Coil 1 5 - Q6F Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Intake 6 - Q6E Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Exhaust 7 - B52A Heated Oxygen Sensor 1 8 - B52B Heated Oxygen Sensor 2 9 - B34 Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor 10 - B23E Camshaft Position Sensor - Exhaust 11 - Q12 Evaporative Emission Purge Solenoid Valve Right Rear of the Engine Components (LF1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Disassembled Views > Page 3803 1 - B74 Manifold Absolute Pressure Sensor 2 - T8E Ignition Coil 5 3 - T8C Ignition Coil 3 4 - Q12 Evaporative Emission Purge Solenoid Valve 5 - Q38 Throttle Body 6 - B23B Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 1 Intake 7 - B23D Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 2 Intake 8 - Q6D Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Bank 2 Intake 9 - Q6C Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Bank 2 Exhaust 10 - B23C Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 2 Exhaust 11 - Q6B Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Bank 1 Intake 12 - Q6A Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Bank 1 Exhaust 13 - B23A Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 1 Exhaust 14 - B68A Knock Sensor 1 15 - B26 Crankshaft Position Sensor 16 - T8A Ignition Coil 1 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3804 Camshaft Position Sensor: Diagrams B23A Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 1 Exhaust (LF1) B23B Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 1 Intake (LF1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3805 B23C Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 2 Exhaust (LF1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3806 B23D Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 2 Intake (LF1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3807 B23E Camshaft Position Sensor - Exhaust (LAF) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3808 B23F Camshaft Position Sensor - Intake (LAF) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3809 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Camshaft Position Sensor Replacement - Bank 2 (Left Side) Exhaust Camshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair Camshaft Position Sensor Replacement - Bank 2 (Left Side) Exhaust Camshaft Position Sensor Replacement - Bank 2 (Left Side) Exhaust Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Camshaft Position Sensor Replacement - Bank 2 (Left Side) Exhaust > Page 3812 Camshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair Camshaft Position Sensor Replacement - Bank 2 (Left Side) Intake Camshaft Position Sensor Replacement - Bank 2 (Left Side) Intake Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Camshaft Position Sensor Replacement - Bank 2 (Left Side) Exhaust > Page 3813 Camshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair Camshaft Position Sensor Replacement - Bank 1 (Right Side) Exhaust Camshaft Position Sensor Replacement - Bank 1 (Right Side) Exhaust Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Camshaft Position Sensor Replacement - Bank 2 (Left Side) Exhaust > Page 3814 Camshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair Camshaft Position Sensor Replacement - Bank 1 (Right Side) Intake Camshaft Position Sensor Replacement - Bank 1 (Right Side) Intake Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Service and Repair Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Service and Repair Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor Replacement (LF1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Disassembled Views Crankshaft Position Sensor: Locations Disassembled Views Disassembled Views Engine Covers and Component Assemblies (1 of 2) (LF1) 1 - Right Camshaft Cover Assembly 2 - Ignition Coil Bolt 3 - Ignition Coil 4 - Spark Plug 5 - Intake Manifold Assembly 6 - Left Camshaft Cover Assembly 7 - Fuel Rail Noise Shield 8 - Fuel Pump Cover 9 - Fuel Pump Cover Bolt 10 - Engine Flywheel 11 - Engine Flywheel Bolt 12 - Engine Assembly 13 - Oil Pan Assembly 14 - Engine Front Cover Assembly 15 - Crankshaft Balancer 16 Crankshaft Balancer Bolt Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Disassembled Views > Page 3822 17 - Crankshaft Position Sensor Heat Shield Bolt - Large 18 - Crankshaft Position Sensor Heat Shield 19 - Crankshaft Position Sensor Heat Shield Bolt - Small Engine Covers and Component Assemblies (2 of 2) (LF1) 1 - Water Outlet Bolt 2 - Water Outlet 3 - Water Outlet O-ring 4 - Water Outlet Seal 5 - Knock Sensor Bolt 6 - Knock Sensor 7 - Engine Coolant Heater Assembly 8 - Crankshaft Position Sensor Bolt 9 - Crankshaft Position Sensor 10 - Crankshaft Position Sensor O-ring 11 - Right Cylinder Head Assembly 12 - Right Cylinder Head Gasket 13 - Lower Fuel Rail Noise Shield 14 - Engine Cooling Thermostat Gasket 15 - Engine Cooling Thermostat 16 - Engine Cooling Thermostat Housing 17 - Engine Cooling Thermostat Bolt - Short 18 - Engine Cooling Thermostat Housing Bolt - Long Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Disassembled Views > Page 3823 19 - Fuel Feed Pipe Assembly 20 - Fuel Feed Pipe Assembly Bolt 21 - Fuel Feed Intermediate Pipe Assembly 22 - Fuel Pump Gasket 23 - Fuel Pump O-ring Seal 24 - Fuel Pump 25 - Fuel Pump Bolt 26 - Left Cylinder Head Assembly 27 - Left Cylinder Head Gasket 28 - Oil Level Indicator 29 Oil Level Indicator Handle O-ring 30 - Oil Level Indicator Tube Bolt 31 - Oil Level Indicator Tube 32 - Oil Level Indicator Tube O-ring 33 - Oil Filter Adapter Assembly 34 - Engine Short Block Assembly 35 - Oil Pump Assembly 36 - Timing Drive Assembly Camshaft Cover Assembly 250 - Left Camshaft Cover 251 - Left Camshaft Cover Gasket 252 - Right Camshaft Cover Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Disassembled Views > Page 3824 253 - Right Camshaft Cover Gasket 254 - Camshaft Cover Spark Plug Port Seal 254 - Camshaft Cover Spark Plug Port Seal 255 - Camshaft Cover Bolt 255 - Camshaft Cover Bolt 256 - Camshaft Cover Bolt Insulator 256 - Camshaft Cover Bolt Insulator 257 - Ignition Coil Bolt Thread Insert 258 Oil Fill Cap 259 - Oil Fill O-ring 259 - Oil Fill O-ring 260 - Left Camshaft Cover PCV Fitting 261 Right Camshaft Cover PCV Fitting Orifice 262 - Oil Fill Tube 263 - Left Camshaft Cover PCV Fitting O-ring 265 - Left Camshaft Housing Cover Insulator 266 - Right Camshaft Housing Cover Insulator 704 - Ignition Coil 704 - Ignition Coil 705 - Ignition Coil Bolt 705 - Ignition Coil Bolt 719 - Spark Plug 719 - Spark Plug Camshaft Timing Components Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Disassembled Views > Page 3825 1 - Primary Timing Chain Tensioner Bolt 2 - Left Secondary Timing Chain Shoe Bolt 3 - Right Secondary Timing Chain Tensioner 4 - Right Secondary Timing Chain Tensioner Gasket 5 - Right Secondary Timing Chain Shoe 6 - Secondary Timing Chain 7 - Camshaft Position Actuator Bolt 8 Exhaust Camshaft Position Actuator 9 - Camshaft Position Actuator Thrust Washer 10 - Intake Camshaft Position Actuator 11 - Right Secondary Timing Chain Guide 12 - Left Camshaft Intermediate Drive Shaft Sprocket 13 - Camshaft Intermediate Drive Shaft Sprocket Bolt 14 - Left Secondary Timing Chain Shoe 15 - Left Secondary Timing Chain Tensioner Gasket 16 - Left Secondary Timing Chain Tensioner 17 - Left Secondary Timing Chain Guide 18 - Lower Primary Timing Chain Guide 19 - Lower Primary Timing Chain Guide Bolt 20 - Crankshaft Sprocket 21 Primary Timing Chain 22 - Right Camshaft Intermediate Drive Shaft Sprocket 23 - Upper Primary Timing Chain Guide 24 - Primary Timing Chain Tensioner Gasket Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Disassembled Views > Page 3826 25 - Primary Timing Chain Tensioner Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Disassembled Views > Page 3827 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Locations Powertrain Component Views Powertrain Component Views Front Engine Components (LAF 1 of 2) 1 - Q38 Throttle Body 2 - G18 High Pressure Fuel Pump 3 - B23F Camshaft Position Sensor Intake 4 - B37 Engine Oil Pressure Switch 5 - B68 Knock Sensor 6 - B26 Crankshaft Position Sensor 7 - M64 Starter Motor 8 - Q2 A/C Compressor Clutch 9 - G13 Generator Right Rear of the Engine Components (LF1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Disassembled Views > Page 3828 1 - B74 Manifold Absolute Pressure Sensor 2 - T8E Ignition Coil 5 3 - T8C Ignition Coil 3 4 - Q12 Evaporative Emission Purge Solenoid Valve 5 - Q38 Throttle Body 6 - B23B Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 1 Intake 7 - B23D Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 2 Intake 8 - Q6D Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Bank 2 Intake 9 - Q6C Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Bank 2 Exhaust 10 - B23C Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 2 Exhaust 11 - Q6B Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Bank 1 Intake 12 - Q6A Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Bank 1 Exhaust 13 - B23A Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 1 Exhaust 14 - B68A Knock Sensor 1 15 - B26 Crankshaft Position Sensor 16 - T8A Ignition Coil 1 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3829 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Diagrams B26 Crankshaft Position Sensor Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3830 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Testing and Inspection Crankshaft Position System Variation Learn Note: The Crankshaft Position System Variation Learn procedure is also required when the following service procedures have been performed, regardless of whether DTC P0315 is set: * An engine replacement * An engine control module (ECM) replacement * A crankshaft balancer replacement * A crankshaft replacement * A crankshaft position sensor replacement * Any engine repairs which disturb the crankshaft to crankshaft position sensor relationship. Note: The ECM monitors certain component signals to determine if all the conditions are met to continue with the crankshaft position System Variation Learn Procedure. 1. Install a scan tool. 2. Monitor the ECM for DTCs with a scan tool. If other DTCs are set, except DTC P0315, refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle ( See: Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Descriptions/Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle) for the applicable DTC that set. 3. With a scan tool, select the Crankshaft Position System Variation Learn Procedure and perform the following: 1. Block drive wheels. 2. Set parking brake. 3. DO NOT apply brake pedal. 4. Cycle ignition from OFF to ON. 5. Apply and hold brake pedal for the duration of the procedure. 6. Start and idle engine. 7. Turn the air conditioning (A/C) OFF. 8. The vehicle must remain in Park or Neutral. Note: While the learn procedure is in progress, release the throttle immediately when the engine starts to decelerate. The engine control is returned to the operator and the engine responds to throttle position after the learn procedure is complete. 9. Accelerate to wide open throttle (WOT) and release when the fuel cut-off occurs. 4. The scan tool displays Test In Progress. 5. The scan tool displays Learn Successful. 6. Verify DTC P0315 ran and passed This Ignition Cycle. ‹› If DTC P0315 failed or did not run This Ignition Cycle, or another DTC is present, refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle ( See: Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Descriptions/Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle) for the applicable DTC that set. 7. Once the Learn Procedure has successfully completed, and in order to store the crankshaft position system variation values in the ECM, turn OFF the ignition and verify all vehicle systems are OFF. This may take up to 2 minutes. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3831 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair Crankshaft Position Sensor Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Locations Fuel Level Sensor: Locations Wheels/Vehicle Underbody Component Views Fuel System Components 1 - B46B Fuel Level Sensor - Secondary 2 - B150 Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor 3 - Q13 Evaporative Emission Vent Solenoid Valve 4 - B46A Fuel Level Sensor - Primary 5 - G12 Fuel Pump 6 - B47 Fuel Pressure Sensor Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Fuel Level Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions Electrical Schematic Symbols Electrical Schematic Symbols Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3837 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3838 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3839 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3840 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3841 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3842 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3843 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3844 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3845 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3846 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3847 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3848 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3849 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3850 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3851 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3852 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3853 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3854 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3855 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3856 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3857 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3858 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3859 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3860 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3861 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3862 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3863 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3864 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3865 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3866 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3867 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3868 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3869 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3870 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3871 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3872 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3873 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3874 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3875 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3876 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3877 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3878 General Electrical Diagnosis General Electrical Diagnosis Basic Knowledge Required Without a basic knowledge of electricity, it will be difficult to use the diagnostic procedures contained in the service manual. You should understand the basic theory of electricity, and know the meaning of voltage (V), current (A), and resistance (Ohms ). You should also be able to read and understand a wiring diagram, as well as understand what happens in a circuit with an open or a shorted wire. Vehicle Zoning Strategy Vehicle Zoning Strategy All grounds, in-line connectors, and splices have identifying numbers that correspond to where they are located in the vehicle. The following table explains the numbering system. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3879 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3880 Fuel Level Sensor: Diagnostic Aids Arrows and Symbols Arrows and Symbols This service manual uses various symbols in order to describe different service operations. 1 - Front of Vehicle 2 - View Detail 2 - View Detail 3 - Ambient Air Mixed with Another Gas or Indicate Temperature Change 4 - Motion or Direction 5 - View Angle 6 - Dimension (1:2) 7 Ambient/Clean Air Flow or Cool Air Flow 8 - Lubrication Point - Oil or Fluid 9 - Task Related 10 Sectioning (1:3) 11 - Gas Other Than Ambient Air or Hot Air Flow 12 - Lubrication Point - Grease or Jelly 13 - Multidirectional Arrow Decimal and Metric Equivalents Decimal and Metric Equivalents Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3881 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3882 Checking Aftermarket Accessories Checking Aftermarket Accessories Warning: Refer to SIR Warning (See: Restraint Systems/Service Precautions/SIR Warning). Caution: The OBD II symbol is used on the circuit diagrams in order to alert the technician that the circuit is essential for proper OBD II emission control circuit operation. Any circuit which fails and causes the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) to turn ON, or causes emissions-related component damage, is identified as an OBD II circuit. Do not connect aftermarket accessories into the following circuits: * SIR circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the SIR symbol. * OBD II circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the OBD II symbol. Always check for aftermarket accessories (non-OEM) as the first step in diagnosing electrical problems. If the vehicle is so equipped, disconnect the system to verify that these add-on accessories are not the cause of the problems. Possible causes of vehicle problems related to aftermarket accessories include: * Power feeds connected to points other than the battery * Antenna location * Transceiver wiring located too close to vehicle electronic modules or wiring * Poor shielding or poor connectors on antenna feed line * Check for recent service bulletins detailing installation guidelines for aftermarket accessories. Circuit Testing Circuit Testing The Circuit Testing section contains the following diagnostic testing information. Using this information along with the diagnostic procedures will identify the cause of the electrical malfunction. * Using Connector Test Adapters (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Using Connector Test Adapters) * Probing Electrical Connectors (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Probing Electrical Connectors) * Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3883 Procedures/Circuit Testing/Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter) * Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp) * Using Fused Jumper Wires (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Using Fused Jumper Wires) * Measuring Voltage (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Measuring Voltage) * Measuring Voltage Drop (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Measuring Voltage Drop) * Measuring Frequency (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Measuring Frequency) * Testing Ground and Low Reference Circuits (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Testing Ground and Low Reference Circuits) * Testing for Continuity (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Continuity) * Testing for Short to Ground (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Short to Ground) * Testing for a Short to Voltage (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for a Short to Voltage) * Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections) * Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions) * Testing for Electrical Intermittents (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Electrical Intermittents) * Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure) * Circuit Protection - Fuses (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Circuit Protection - Fuses) * Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers) * Circuit Protection - Fusible Links (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Circuit Protection - Fusible Links) Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp Special Tools EL-35616-200 - Test Light - Probe Kit For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test Probe Caution). A test lamp can simply and quickly test a low impedance circuit for voltage. A Digital Multimeter (DMM) should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present if the impedance is low enough, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. In other words, if there is not enough current, the test lamp will not illuminate even though voltage is present. The EL-35616-200 - kit is Micro-Pack compatible and comprised of a 12-volt light bulb with an attached pair of leads. To properly operate this tool use the following procedures. When testing for voltage: 1. Attach one lead to ground. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is voltage at the point being tested. When testing for ground: 1. Attach one lead to battery positive voltage. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where ground should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is ground at the point being tested. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3884 Testing for a Short to Voltage Testing for a Short to Voltage Special Tools EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM) For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test Probe Caution). The following procedure tests for a short to voltage in a circuit. 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Set the rotary dial of the Digital Multimeter (DMM) to the V (DC) position. 4. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. Turn ON the ignition and operate all accessories. 7. If the voltage measured is greater than 1 V, there is a short to voltage in the circuit. Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions Special Tools J-25070 - Heat Gun For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Many intermittent open or shorted circuits are affected by harness/connector movement that is caused by vibration, engine torque, bumps/rough pavement, etc. In order to duplicate the customer's concern, it may be necessary to manipulate the wiring harness if the malfunction appears to be vibration related. Manipulation of a circuit can consist of a wide variety of actions, including: * Wiggling the harness * Disconnecting a connector and reconnecting * Stressing the mechanical connection of a connector * Pulling on the harness or wire in order to identify a separation/break inside the insulation * Relocating a harness or wires All these actions should be performed with some goal in mind. For instance, with a scan tool connected, wiggling the wires may uncover a faulty input to the control module. The snapshot option would be appropriate here. Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure). Another option is, with the component commanded ON and OFF by the scan tool, move related connectors and wiring and observe the component operation. With the engine running, move related connectors and wiring while monitoring engine operation. If harness or connector movement affects the data displayed, component/system operation, or engine operation, inspect and repair the harness/connections as necessary. You may need to load the vehicle in order to duplicate the concern. This may require the use of weights, floor jacks, jackstands, frame machines, etc. In these cases you are attempting to duplicate the concern by manipulating the suspension or frame. This method is useful in finding harnesses that are too short and their connectors pull apart enough to cause a poor connection. A DMM set to Peak Min/Max mode and connected to the suspect circuit while testing can yield desirable results. Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Electrical Intermittents). Certainly, using the senses of sight, smell, and hearing while manipulating the circuit can provide good results as well. There may be instances where circuit manipulation alone will not meet the required criteria for the fault condition to appear. In such cases it may be necessary to expose the suspect circuit to other conditions while manipulating the harness. Such conditions would include high moisture conditions, along with exceptionally high or low temperatures. The following discusses how to expose the circuit to these kinds of conditions. Salt Water Spray Some compounds possess the ability to conduct electricity when dissolved in water such as ordinary salt. By mixing table salt with water in sufficient Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3885 quantities, you can enhance the conductive properties of water so that any circuit which may be sensitive to moisture will more readily fail when liberally sprayed with this mixture. Mixing 0.35L (12 oz) of water with approximately 1 tablespoon of salt will yield a salt solution of 5 percent. Fill a normal spray bottle with this mixture. This mixture is sufficient to enhance the water's own conductivity. This may cause the circuit to fail more easily when sprayed. Once the mixture is completed, spray the suspect area liberally with the solution. Then, while monitoring either a scan tool or DMM, manipulate the harness as discussed previously. High Temperature Conditions If the complaint tends to be heat related, you can simulate the condition using the J-25070 - heat gun. Using the heat gun, you can heat up the suspected area or component. Manipulate the harnesses under high temperature conditions while monitoring the scan tool or DMM to locate the fault condition. The high temperature condition may be achieved simply by test driving the vehicle at normal operating temperature. If a heat gun is unavailable, consider this option to enhance your diagnosis. This option does not allow for the same control, however. Low Temperature Conditions Depending on the nature of the fault condition, placing a fan in front of the vehicle while the vehicle is in the shade can have the desired effect. If this is unsuccessful, use local cooling treatments such as ice or a venturi type nozzle (one that provides hot or cold air). This type of tool is capable of producing air stream temperatures down to -18°C (0°F) from one end and +71°C (160°F) from the other. This is ideally suited for localized cooling needs. Once the vehicle, component, or harness has been sufficiently cooled, manipulate the harness or components in an effort to duplicate the concern. Duplicating Failure Conditions * If none of the previous tests are successful, attempt to duplicate and/or capture the failure conditions. * Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, where applicable, contains the conditions that were present when the DTC set. 1. Review and record Freeze Frame/Failure Records data. 2. Clear the DTCs using the scan tool. 3. Turn the key to OFF and wait 15 seconds. 4. Operate the vehicle under the same conditions that were noted in Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, as closely as possible. The vehicle must also be operating within the Conditions for Running the DTC. Refer to Conditions for Running the DTC in the supporting text if a DTC is being diagnosed. 5. Monitor DTC Status for the DTC being tested. The scan tool will indicate Ran, when the enabling conditions have been satisfied long enough for the DTC to run. The scan tool will also indicate whether the DTC passed or failed. * An alternate method is to drive the vehicle with the DMM connected to a suspected circuit. An abnormal reading on the DMM when the concern occurs, may help you locate the concern. Measuring Frequency Measuring Frequency Special Tools EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM) For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test Probe Caution). The following procedure determines the frequency of a signal. Note: Connecting the Digital Multimeter (DMM) to the circuit before pressing the Hz button will allow the DMM to autorange to an appropriate range. 1. Apply power to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (AC) position. 3. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3886 5. Press the Hz button on the DMM. 6. The DMM will display the frequency measured. Measuring Voltage Measuring Voltage Special Tools EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM) For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test Probe Caution). The following procedure measures the voltage at a selected point in a circuit. 1. Disconnect the electrical harness connector for the circuit being tested, if necessary. 2. Enable the circuit and/or system being tested. Use the following methods: * Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. * Turn ON the engine. * Turn ON the circuit and/or system with a scan tool in Output Controls. * Turn ON the switch for the circuit and/or system being tested. 3. Select the V (AC) or V (DC) position on the Digital Multimeter (DMM). 4. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the point of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. The DMM displays the voltage measured at that point. Measuring Voltage Drop Measuring Voltage Drop Special Tools EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM) For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test Probe Caution). The following procedure determines the difference in voltage potential between 2 points. 1. Set the rotary dial of the Digital Multimeter (DMM) to the V (DC) position. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3887 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to one point of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to the other point of the circuit. 4. Operate the circuit. 5. The DMM displays the difference in voltage between the 2 points. Probing Electrical Connectors Probing Electrical Connectors Note: Always be sure to reinstall the connector position assurance (CPA) and terminal position assurance (TPA) when reconnecting connectors or replacing terminals. Front probe Disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the mating side (front) of the connector. Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test Probe Caution). Note: When probing female 0.64 terminals, it is important to use the correct adapter. There have been some revisions to the test adapter for 0.64 terminals. The proper adapter for 0.64 terminals is the EL-35616-64B which has a gold terminal and a black wire between the base and tip. Failure to use the proper test adapter may result in damage to the terminal being tested and improper diagnosis. Note: The proper adapter for probing the terminals for fuses, relays, or diodes in an electrical center is EL-35616-35. Using any other tool or adapter may damage the terminal being tested. Refer to the following table as a guide in selecting the correct test adapter for front probing connectors: Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3888 Backprobe Note: * Backprobe connector terminals only when specifically required in diagnostic procedures. * Do not backprobe a sealed (Weather Pack(R)) connector, less than a 280 series Metri-Pack connector, a Micro-Pack connector, or a flat wire (dock and lock) connector. * Backprobing can be a source of damage to connector terminals. Use care in order to avoid deforming the terminal, either by forcing the test probe too far into the cavity or by using too large of a test probe. * After backprobing any connector, inspect for terminal damage. If terminal damage is suspected, test for proper terminal contact. Do not disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the harness side (back) of the connector. Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure Using Snapshots in Global Diagnostic System (GDS) Overview Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3889 A snapshot is a recording of what a control module on the vehicle was receiving for information while the snapshot is being made. A snapshot may be used to analyze the data during the time a vehicle condition is current. This allows you to concentrate on making the condition occur, rather than trying to view all the data in anticipation of the fault. To record a snapshot in GDS, select, Record Snapshot, from the options at the top right portion of any of the various pages that allow snapshots to be taken (e.g. Data Display, Control Functions, etc.). When you are finished recording, select, Stop Snapshot recording. The snapshot will now be available for replay. Snapshot Replay The Snapshot Replay function allows reviews of previously recorded vehicle snapshot data. This information can be used in analysis of vehicle problems and detection of trigger error conditions. The graph function can be used to compare parameters to see if a component is functioning properly. Recorded snapshots can be selected for viewing by the following three methods: * Selecting a snapshot file from the Vehicle Home Page and clicking on the Review selection. * Double clicking on the selected snapshot from the Vehicle Home Page. * Entering the Tools selection from the Menu selection and selecting Snapshot replay. Next, open the Snapshot Manager. Double click on the snapshot file you wish to view or click on the Load Snapshot selection and select a snapshot file. Regardless of selection method, a File Loaded pop-up window will be displayed from the Snapshot Replay screen. Select OK from the pop-up window. Snapshot Play Functions There are several snapshot play functions that are used to replay recorded snapshots * The Play function is used to play the snapshot forward by clicking on this selection. A marker will move across the screen when this selection is used. All selections in this area turn grey when they are active. * The Pause function is used to pause play of the snapshot. When this selection is clicked a second time the snapshot will start playing where it left off. * The Stop function is used to stop playing the snapshot. The snapshot will start from the beginning, if Play is selected after using the Stop function. Time Control Time control is used to control the snapshot replay. This function allows selection of a specific time frame, display of different views, and control of display speed. The following functions can be selected directly under Time Control. * The Bookmark selection allows you to add a specific comment in the current display and return to this point in the future. When this option is selected, a pop-up window is displayed. Enter a bookmark name and select OK. * The Note Pad can be selected to add comments to the snapshot replay file at the current point of time. When this option is selected, a pop-up window is displayed. Enter a comment for the snapshot file and select OK. * The Load Snapshot (blue folder) opens a snapshot file and makes it ready for further analysis. This function is also available by clicking on an available snapshot file from the Snapshot Manager. * The Down Arrow displays all Time Control options when selected. Individual options can also be selected by clicking on the item you want. * The Snapshot Display Speed can be controlled by selecting this option. Slow speeds of 1/8X, 1/4X, and 1/2X can be selected. The real time speed can also be selected at 1. Faster speeds of 2X, 4X, and 8X can also be obtained by using this selection. View Selections Each View Selection provides a different way of displaying vehicle data for analysis. The following functions can be selected under Available Views: Note: The parameter name will be shown in the original language used for capture if no translation is available for the name. * Parameter List View - Displays incoming information from the snapshot file. The current value of the parameters is displayed on the screen. * Log View - Contains all the information from the snapshot file. All parameter values are listed in the order they were recorded. Specific parameters can be added or removed from a watchlist by clicking on the appropriate item. * State View - Shows the values of all parameters in a specific time frame. These values can be used for comparison with the trigger view. * Trigger View - Displays all system and user defined triggers. This function can be used when there is a combination of factors involved in a diagnostic problem. When a Trigger condition is met a caution triangle will be displayed on the screen. Triggers: * Load Triggers - Allows you to load a file containing trigger definitions. * Save Triggers - Allows you to save the trigger to your computer's hard drive. * Remove Trigger - Allows you to remove the current trigger. It will no longer be present. * Edit Trigger - Displays a pop-up window where you can modify the limits and parameters contained within a trigger. * Adds Trigger - Displays a pop-up window to configure a trigger. * DTC View - After the Play function is selected and this option is selected this function opens the list of recorded DTCs. * Line Graph View - Displays data that can be visualized against the time-axis. From this view, specific parameters can be selected for graphing by Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3890 checking the box under Selected. At the bottom of the graph there are four functions Zoom In (increase size), Zoom Out (decrease size), Bookmarks, and Pause Scrolling. Each of these functions can be accessed by clicking on them. Testing for Continuity Testing for Continuity Special Tools EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM) For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test Probe Caution). The following procedures verify good continuity in a circuit. With a Digital Multimeter (DMM) 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the Ohms position. 2. Disconnect the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 3. Disconnect the load. 4. Press the MIN MAX button on the DMM. 5. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 6. Connect the other lead of the DMM to the other end of the circuit. 7. If the DMM displays low or no resistance, the circuit has good continuity. With a Test Lamp Note: Only use the test lamp procedure on low impedance power and ground circuits. 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect one lead of the test lamp to one end of the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 5. Connect the other end of the circuit to ground. 6. If the test lamp illuminates (full intensity), then the circuit has good continuity. Testing for Electrical Intermittents Testing for Electrical Intermittents Special Tools EL-39200 Digital Multimeter For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Perform the following procedures while wiggling the harness from side to side. Continue this at convenient points (about 6 inches apart) while watching the test equipment. * Testing for Short to Ground (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Short to Ground) * Testing for Continuity (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Continuity) * Testing for a Short to Voltage (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for a Short to Voltage) If the fault is not identified, perform the procedure below using the MIN MAX feature on the EL-39200 DMM. This feature allows you to manipulate the circuit without having to watch the EL-39200. The EL-39200 will generate an audible tone when a change is detected. Note: The EL-39200 must be used in order to perform the following procedure since the EL-39200 can monitor current, resistance or voltage while recording the minimum (MIN), and maximum (MAX) values measured. 1. Connect the EL-39200 to both sides of a suspected connector (still connected), or from one end of a suspected circuit to the other. Refer to Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3891 Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter) for information on connecting the EL-39200 to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the EL-39200 to the V (AC) or V (DC) position. 3. Press the range button of the EL-39200 in order to select the desired voltage range. 4. Press the MIN MAX button of the EL-39200. The EL-39200 displays 100 ms RECORD and emits an audible tone (beep). Note: The 100 ms RECORD mode is the length of time an input must stay at a new value in order to record the full change. 5. Simulate the condition that is potentially causing the intermittent connection, either by wiggling the connections or the wiring, test driving, or performing other operations. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions). 6. Listen for the audible Min Max Alert which indicates that a new minimum or maximum value has been recorded. 7. Press the MIN MAX button once in order to display the MAX value and note the value. 8. Press the MIN MAX button again in order to display the MIN value and note the value. 9. Determine the difference between the MIN and MAX values. * If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is 1 V or greater an intermittent open or high resistance condition exists. Repair the condition as necessary. * If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is less than 1 V, an intermittent open or high resistance condition does not exist. Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections Special Tools EL-35616 Terminal Test Probe Kit For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). When the condition is not currently present, but is indicated in DTC history, the cause may be intermittent. An intermittent may also be the cause when there is a customer complaint, but the symptom cannot be duplicated. Refer to the Symptom Table of the system that is suspect of causing the condition before trying to locate an intermittent condition. Most intermittent conditions are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. Inspect for the following items: * Wiring broken inside the insulation * Poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector * Poor terminal to wire connection-Some conditions which fall under this description are poor crimps, poor solder joints, crimping over the wire insulation rather than the wire itself, and corrosion in the wire to terminal contact area, etc. * Pierced or damaged insulation can allow moisture to enter the wiring causing corrosion. The conductor can corrode inside the insulation, with little visible evidence. Look for swollen and stiff sections of wire in the suspect circuits. * Wiring which has been pinched, cut, or its insulation rubbed through may cause an intermittent open or short as the bare area touches other wiring or parts of the vehicle. * Wiring that comes in contact with hot or exhaust components * Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions) in order to duplicate the conditions required, in order to verify the customer concern. * Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Electrical Intermittents) for test procedures to detect intermittent open, high resistance, short to ground, and short to voltage conditions. * Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure) for advanced intermittent diagnosis and Vehicle Data Recorder operation. Testing for Terminal Fretting Some intermittent conditions can be caused by wire terminal fretting corrosion. Fretting corrosion is a build-up of insulating, oxidized wear debris that can form when there is a small motion between electrical contacts. The oxidized wear debris can pile up enough at the electrical contact spots that the electrical resistance across the connection increases. Movement between the contacting surfaces as small as 10 to 100 microns can cause fretting. To put this in perspective, a sheet of paper is about 100 microns thick, so fretting motion is small and hard to see. Vibration and thermal expansion/contraction are the main sources that create fretting motion. Since vehicles vibrate and can experience large temperature swings, they are a good source for fretting motion. Tin, copper, nickel, and iron surfaces are all susceptible to fretting corrosion. Fretting corrosion can be difficult to see but it looks like small, dark smudges on the terminals contact surface. To correct a fretting condition disconnect the suspect connector and add Nyogel lubricant 760G (dielectric grease) to both sides of the connector Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3892 terminals. Then reconnect the connector and wipe away any excess lubricant. This will correct the additional terminal contact resistance due to the terminal fretting corrosion. Testing for Proper Terminal Contact It is important to test terminal contact at the component and any inline connectors before replacing a suspect component. Mating terminals must be inspected to ensure good terminal contact. A poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector may be the result of contamination or deformation. Contamination may be caused by the connector halves being improperly connected. A missing or damaged connector seal, damage to the connector itself, or exposing the terminals to moisture and dirt can also cause contamination. Contamination, usually in the underhood or underbody connectors, leads to terminal corrosion, causing an open circuit or intermittently open circuit. Deformation is caused by probing the mating side of a connector terminal without the proper adapter. Always use the EL-35616 when probing connectors. Other causes of terminal deformation are improperly joining the connector halves, or repeatedly separating and joining the connector halves. Deformation, usually to the female terminal contact tang, can result in poor terminal contact causing an open or intermittently open circuit. Testing for Proper Terminal Contact in Bussed Electrical Centers It is very important to use the correct test adapter when testing for proper terminal contact of fuses and relays in a bussed electrical center. Use EL-35616-35 to test for proper terminal contact. Failure to use EL-35616-35 can result in improper diagnosis of the bussed electrical center. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact: 1. Separate the connector halves. 2. Visually inspect the connector halves for contamination. Contamination may result in a white or green build-up within the connector body or between terminals. This causes high terminal resistance, intermittent contact, or an open circuit. An underhood or underbody connector that shows signs of contamination should be replaced in its entirety: terminals, seals, and connector body. 3. Using an equivalent male terminal / terminated lead, verify that the retention force is significantly different between a known good terminal and the suspect terminal. Replace the female terminal in question. Flat Wire (Dock and Lock) Connectors There are no serviceable parts for flat wire (dock and lock) connectors on the harness side or the component side. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact: 1. Remove the component in question. 2. Visually inspect each side of the connector for signs of contamination. Avoid touching either side of the connector as oil from your skin may be a source of contamination as well. 3. Visually inspect the terminal bearing surfaces of the flat wire circuits for splits, cracks, or other imperfections that could cause poor terminal contact. Visually inspect the component side connector to ensure that all of the terminals are uniform and free of damage or deformation. 4. Insert the appropriate adapter from the on the flat wire harness connector in order to test the circuit in question. Control Module/Component Voltage and Grounds Poor voltage or ground connections can cause widely varying symptoms. * Test all control module voltage supply circuits. Many vehicles have multiple circuits supplying voltage to a control module. Other components in the system may have separate voltage supply circuits that may also need to be tested. Inspect connections at the module/component connectors, fuses, and any intermediate connections between the voltage source and the module/component. A test lamp or a DMM may indicate that voltage is present, but neither tests the ability of the circuit to carry sufficient current. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. Refer to Circuit Testing (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Circuit Testing) and Power Distribution Schematics (See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Starting and Charging/Power and Ground Distribution/System Diagram/Power Distribution Schematics). * Test all control module ground and system ground circuits. The control module may have multiple ground circuits. Other components in the system may have separate grounds that may also need to be tested. Inspect grounds for clean and tight connections at the grounding point. Inspect the connections at the component and in splice packs, where applicable. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. Refer to Circuit Testing (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Circuit Testing) and Ground Distribution Schematics (See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Starting and Charging/Power and Ground Distribution/System Diagram/Ground Distribution Schematics). Temperature Sensitivity * An intermittent condition may occur when a component/connection reaches normal operating temperature. The condition may occur only when the component/connection is cold, or only when the component/connection is hot. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3893 * Freeze Frame, Failure Records, Snapshot, or Vehicle Data Recorder data may help with this type of intermittent condition, where applicable. * If the intermittent is related to heat, review the data for a relationship with the following: - High ambient temperatures - Underhood/engine generated heat - Circuit generated heat due to a poor connection, or high electrical load - Higher than normal load conditions, towing, etc. * If the intermittent is related to cold, review the data for the following: - Low ambient temperatures-In extremely low temperatures, ice may form in a connection or component. Inspect for water intrusion. - The condition only occurs on a cold start. - The condition goes away when the vehicle warms up. * Information from the customer may help to determine if the trouble follows a pattern that is temperature related. * If temperature is suspected of causing an intermittent fault condition, attempt to duplicate the condition. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions) in order to duplicate the conditions required. Electromagnetic Interference and Electrical Noise Some electrical components/circuits are sensitive to electromagnetic interference or other types of electrical noise. Inspect for the following conditions: * A misrouted harness that is too close to high voltage/high current devices such as secondary ignition components, motors, generator etc.-These components may induce electrical noise on a circuit that could interfere with normal circuit operation. * Electrical system interference caused by a malfunctioning relay, or a control module driven solenoid or switch-These conditions can cause a sharp electrical surge. Normally, the condition will occur when the malfunctioning component is operating. * Improper installation of non-factory or aftermarket add on accessories such as lights, 2-way radios, amplifiers, electric motors, remote starters, alarm systems, cell phones, etc.-These accessories may lead to interference while in use, but do not fail when the accessories are not in use. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Checking Aftermarket Accessories). * Test for an open diode across the A/C compressor clutch and for other open diodes. Some relays may contain a clamping diode. * The generator may be allowing AC noise into the electrical system. Incorrect Control Module * There are only a few situations where reprogramming a control module is appropriate: - A new service control module is installed. - A control module from another vehicle is installed. - Revised software/calibration files have been released for this vehicle. Note: DO NOT re-program the control module with the SAME software/calibration files that are already present in the control module. This is not an effective repair for any type of concern. * Verify that the control module contains the correct software/calibration. If incorrect programming is found, reprogram the control module with the most current software/calibration. Refer to Control Module References (See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning) for replacement, setup, and programming. Testing for Short to Ground Testing for Short to Ground Special Tools * EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM) * EL 35616-200 - Test Light-Probe Kit For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test Probe Caution). The following procedures test for a short to ground in a circuit. With a Digital Multimeter (DMM) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3894 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the Ohms position. 4. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the other lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. If the DMM does NOT display infinite resistance (OL), there is a short to ground in the circuit. With a Test Lamp 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect one lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to one end of the circuit to be tested. 5. If the test lamp illuminates, there is a short to ground in the circuit. Fuse Powering Several Loads 1. Review the system schematic and locate the fuse that is open. 2. Open the first connector or switch leading from the fuse to each load. 3. Connect a DMM across the fuse terminals (be sure that the fuse is powered). * When the DMM displays voltage the short is in the wiring leading to the first connector or switch. * If the DMM does not display voltage refer to the next step. 4. Close each connector or switch until the DMM displays voltage in order to find which circuit is shorted. Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter Special Tools EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM) For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test Probe Caution). Digital Multimeter (DMM) Basic Requirements Service information is validated using digital multimeters that meet or exceed the following requirements. Using a multimeter that does not meet these basic requirements may give inaccurate readings which could lead to an incorrect diagnosis. Display and Settings 1. Four digits displayed 2. Voltage, amperage, resistance, frequency, diode test settings, and min-max function 3. Display positive and negative values Voltage 1. Have at least 10 Mohm input impedance 2. Test a DC voltage range of 0.1-1000 V. 3. Test an AC voltage range of 0.1-1000 V. Amperage 1. Test a DC amperage range of 0.1µA-10 A. 2. Test an AC amperage range of 0.1µA-10 A. Resistance Test a resistance range of 0.1 ohm-40 Mohm and displays infinite for a value greater than 40 Mohm (O.L. (Over-load)) Frequency Test for a frequency range of 0.5 HZ-199 K HZ Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3895 Diode Test 1. Apply at least 1 mA when performing the diode bias test 2. Display the break over voltage drop (0-3 V) of a forward biased diode 3. Display infinite (O.L. (Over-load)) when a diode is reverse biased Min-Max Readings 1. Can update at a 1 ms sample rate 2. Saves and displays minimum and maximum values Note: Circuits which include any solid state control modules, such as the engine control module (ECM), should only be tested with a 10 MOhms or higher impedance digital multimeter such as the EL-39200. The EL-39200 instruction manual is a good source of information and should be read thoroughly upon receipt of the DMM as well as kept on hand for future reference. A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present if the impedance is low enough, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. In other words, if there is not enough current, the test lamp will not illuminate even though voltage is present. The ohmmeter function on a DMM shows how much resistance exists between 2 points along a circuit. Low resistance in a circuit means good continuity. Note: Disconnect the power feed from the suspect circuit when measuring resistance with a DMM. This prevents incorrect readings. DMMs apply such a small voltage to measure resistance that the presence of voltages can upset a resistance reading. Diodes and solid state components in a circuit can cause a DMM to display a false reading. To find out if a component is affecting a measurement take a reading once, then reverse the leads and take a second reading. If the readings differ the solid state component is affecting the measurement. Following are examples of the various methods of connecting the DMM to the circuit to be tested: * Probe both ends of the connector and either hold the leads in place while manipulating the connector or tape the leads to the harness for continuous monitoring while you perform other operations or test driving. Refer to Probing Electrical Connectors (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Probing Electrical Connectors). * Disconnect the harness at both ends of the suspected circuit where it connects either to a component or to other harnesses. * If the system that is being diagnosed has a specified pinout or breakout box, it may be used in order to simplify connecting the DMM to the circuit or for testing multiple circuits quickly. Using Connector Test Adapters Using Connector Test Adapters Special Tools EL 35616 - Terminal Test Probe Kit For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Caution: Do not insert test equipment probes (DMM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the EL-38125-580 GM Approved Terminal Release Tool Kit in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the EL-38125-580 GM Approved Terminal Release Tool Kit , ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the EL-38125-580 GM Approved Terminal Release Tool Kit label on the inside of the EL-38125-580 GM Approved Terminal Release Tool Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Using Fused Jumper Wires Using Fused Jumper Wires Special Tools J 36169-A Fused Jumper Wire Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3896 Note: A fused jumper may not protect solid state components from being damaged. The J 36169-A includes small clamp connectors that provide adaptation to most connectors without damage. This fused jumper wire is supplied with a 20-A fuse which may not be suitable for some circuits. Do not use a fuse with a higher rating than the fuse that protects the circuit being tested. AFL/EPC Connectors AFL/EPC Connectors Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. 1. For connectors with a bolt in the dress cover, turn the bolt counterclockwise to remove the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3897 2. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the top of the wire dress cover. Slide the CPA forward. 3. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3898 View showing depressing of the lever lock release tab. View of connector in released position. 4. Disconnect the connector from the component. 5. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the dress cover. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs and remove the dress cover. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3899 6. Release the rear lower half of the wiredress cover. 7. Release the tabs that are holding the wiredress cover to the connector body. 8. Remove the nose piece by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the slots on both ends of the connector body. Gently pry the nose piece out of the connector. J 38125-216 can also be used to remove the nose piece. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3900 9. Use the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by lifting the terminal retaining tabs on the inside of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Bosch Connectors (BSK) Bosch Connectors (BSK) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3901 Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 3. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 4. Insert the J 38125-561 tool into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 5. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Bosch Connectors (ECM) Bosch Connectors (ECM) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3902 1. Locate the assist lever on the top of the connector. Move the assist lever to the forward position. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3903 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the connector. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the locking tabs and remove the dress cover. 4. The terminal positive assurance (TPA) is located in the front of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3904 5. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove TPA from the connector. 6. Use the J 38125-213 or the J 38125-556 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3905 Note: Ensure that the dress cover and connector body are both in the released position before reassembling. Failure to do so may cause damage to the connector and component. Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Bosch Connectors (0.64) Bosch Connectors (0.64) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While pressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock until the lever is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Pull the rubber boot that covers the wires back to expose the end of the connector dress cover. 4. Place the connector locking lever in the center of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3906 5. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs that are on the wire end of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover and connector body and pry up. 6. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs located on the opposite side of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover at the connector end and pry up. 7. Remove the dress cover. 8. Cut the tie wrap on the wire bundle. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3907 9. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting a small flat-bladed tool into the small slot in the end of the slider and pushing on the TPA until it comes out of the connector. When the TPA exits the opposite side of the connector, gasp the TPA and pull it completely out of the connector. 10. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 11. Insert the J 38125-560 into the 2 triangular cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 12. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Terminal Replacement Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3908 1. Prior to installation the terminal must be aligned so the (1) coding lugs align with the (2) coding grooves on the connector. 2. Once the terminal is aligned, slide the terminal into the cavity until the retainer has engaged in the cavity of the connector. 3. Slide the TPA in the connector body and seat it using a small flat bladed tool. The TPA is seated when it is flush with the contact housing. 4. Secure the wires to the connector body using a tie wrap and replace the dress cover and grommet. Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Pull out the slider on the connector position assurance (CPA) until it is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3909 5. Insert the J 38125-557 into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Connector Position Assurance Locks Connector Position Assurance Locks The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of the connector. CPAs are used in various connectors throughout the vehicle. CPAs are also used in all SIR system electrical connectors. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals, of the connector. Connector Repairs Connector Repairs Connector Repairs contains a list of all connector repairs. The connector repairs are listed by the connector manufacturer and then by connector type. If the technician cannot identify the manufacturer of the connector, refer to Identifying Connectors below. Knowing the connector manufacturer will assist in finding the correct connector repair from the following list: * Connector Position Assurance Locks (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Connector Position Assurance Locks) * Terminal Position Assurance Locks (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Terminal Position Assurance Locks) * AFL/EPC Connectors (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/AFL/EPC Connectors) * Bosch Connectors (BSK) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Bosch Connectors (BSK))Bosch Connectors (0.64) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Bosch Connectors (0.64))Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT))Bosch Connectors (ECM) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Bosch Connectors (ECM)) * Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack))Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Push to Seat))Delphi Connectors Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3910 (Pull To Seat) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Pull to Seat))Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W))Delphi Connectors (Micro.64) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Micro .64))Delphi Connectors (12-Way) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (12-Way))Delphi Connectors (Steering Gear) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Steering Gear)) * FCI Connectors (Lever Lock) (See: General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/FCI Connectors (Lever Lock))FCI Connectors (SIR) (See: General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/FCI (SIR)) * FEP Connectors (Steering Gear) (See: General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/FEP Connectors (Steering Gear)) * JST Connectors (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/JST Connectors) * Kostal Connectors (Glow Plug Control Module) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Kostal Connectors (Glow Plug Control Module))Kostal Connectors (Transmission) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Kostal Connectors (Transmission)) * Molex Connectors (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Molex Connectors) * Sumitomo Connectors (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Sumitomo Connectors) * Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way))Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor))Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap))Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way))Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module)) * Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Yazaki Connectors (2-Way))Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Yazaki Connectors (16-Way)) * Repairing Connector Terminals (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Repairing Connector Terminals) Connector Anatomy 1 - Connector Positive Assurance (CPA) 2 - Assist Lever 3 - Wiredress Cover 4 - Seal Strain/Relief Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3911 5 - Slide Left Hand 6 - Slide Right Hand 7 - Terminal Positive Assurance (TPA) 8 - Terminal Positive Assurance (TPA) 9 - Connector Seal 10 - Connector Housing 11 - Inner Connector Identifying Connectors Knowing the connector manufacturer is helpful when trying to locating the correct connector repair procedure. There are many different connector designs used on GM vehicles and it is sometimes difficult to identify the connector manufacturer. The information in this document should help with the identification of connector manufactures. The following connector manufacturers make most of the connectors found in GM vehicles: * AFL/EPC (Alcoa Fujikura Ltd./Engineered Plastics Components) * Bosch * Delphi * FCI (Framatome Connectors International) * JAE (Japan Aviation Electronics) * JST (Japan Solderless Terminals) * Kostel * Molex * Sumitomo * Tyco/AMP * Yazaki Identifying the manufacturer of a connector is often difficult. When trying to determine the manufacturer of a connector, look for specific identifying marks that are unique to that connector supplier. Most of these identify marks are hard to find or see. Check the connector carefully and refer to the information below for pictures and descriptions of connector identification markings. * Most of AFLs connectors have EPC on their connector body. Some of the smaller connectors will not have any markings on them. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3912 * In some cases Bosch will actually be printed on the connector. If Bosch does not appear on the connector, look for the Bosch logo. The Bosch logo is a circle with a blunted arrow inside. This logo can appear anywhere on the connector and is often very small. * In some cases Delphi will actually be printed on the connector. If Delphi is not printed on the connector, look for PED. In both cases there is no specific orientation for Delphi or PED and they can appear anywhere on the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3913 * FCI connectors may have the FCI logo on their connectors. The logo is the letters FCI with an "A" above it. * JAE connector have JAE in small letters on their connectors. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3914 * JST connectors have JST in small letters on their connectors, similar to that above. The location of the logo will vary with the connector size and style. * Kostel has an "LK" with a circle around it. These connector are usually used as a transmissions connection. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3915 * Most Molex connectors will have the Molex logo on the dresscover of the connector. In some cases the connectors may have MX followed by another letter. The third letter indicates where the connector was made. A connector with MXD is a Molex connector made in Detroit. Sumitomo has a unique symbol on their connector and possibly a part number. The symbol is similar to that of a diamond lying on its side, similar to that shown. The logo could appear anywhere but the most common place is at the wire side of the housing. * Tyco/AMP has many different and unique connector designs. Some may or may not have identifiable marks on them. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3916 * Yazaki has a wedge or arrow shape, similar to that shown. Delphi Connectors (Push to Seat) Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Follow the steps below in order to repair push to seat connectors. 1. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device, the connector position assurance (CPA) device, and/or the secondary lock. 2. Separate the connector halves (1). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3917 3. Use the proper pick or removal tool (1) in order to release the terminal. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 4. Gently pull the cable and the terminal (2) out of the back of the connector. 5. Re-form the locking device if you are going to reuse the terminal (1). 6. To repair the terminal, refer to Terminal Repair. Terminal Repair 1. Slip the cable seal away from the terminal. 2. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 3. Slip a new cable seal onto the wire. 4. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 5. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 6. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. 7. Slide the cable seal toward the terminal. 8. Crimp the cable seal and the insulation. 9. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply grease to the connector. Reinstalling Terminal 1. In order to reuse a terminal or lead assembly, refer to Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Wiring Repairs). 2. Ensure that the cable seal is kept on the terminal side of the splice. 3. Insert the lead from the back until it catches. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Terminated Lead Repair 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Find the appropriate terminated lead. 3. Use the appropriate splice sleeves depending on the gauge size. 4. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves). Delphi Connectors (Pull to Seat) Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) Special Tools Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3918 J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal If the terminal is visibly damaged or is suspected of having a faulty connection, the terminal should be replaced. Follow the steps below in order to repair pull-to-seat connectors: 1. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) device and/or the secondary lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component or separate the connectors for in-line connectors. 3. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device. 4. Insert the proper pick or removal tool into the front of the connector body. Note: On connectors with more than one terminal the service loop may not be large enough to remove the terminal and crimp on a new one. If the terminal wire does not have a large enough service loop for removal, cut the wire 5 cm (2 in) behind the connector before removal. 5. Grasp the wire at the back of the connector body and gently push the terminal out the front of the connector body. Terminal Repair 1. If the wire needed to be cut in order to remove the terminal, gently push a small length of the same size wire through the back of the connector cavity until there is enough wire exposed in order to crimp on a new terminal. If the wire was not cut, cut the existing wire as close to the old terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 4. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. Terminal Installation 1. Align the terminal and pull the wire from the back of the connector in order to seat the terminal. 2. If necessary, cut the new wire to proper length and splice with existing circuit. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves). 3. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply dielectric grease to the connector. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Micro .64) Delphi Connectors (Micro.64) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3919 Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro.64 connectors. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. The lever lock may be located on the top or sides of the wire dress cover. View of a typical Micro 64 connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3920 Depress the lock and pull the lever over and past the lock. View of the connector when released from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3921 View of another type of Micro 64 connector. Depress the locks that are located on both sides of the wiredress cover and pull the lever over and past the locks. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3922 View of the connector when released from the component. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the front of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool push down on one of the locking tabs and pull the cover up until the dress cover releases. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. 4. Once the front 2 locks are unlocked, lift the front of the dress cover and pull it forward. Note: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 5. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the small slot on the TPA and pushing down until the TPA releases. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3923 Note: Be careful not to angle or rock the J 38125-21 tool when inserting it into the connector or the tool may break. 6. Insert the J 38125-21 tool into the round canal between the terminals cavities at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Follow the steps below in order to repair Micro 64 connector terminals. The Micro 64 connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-64 (M jaw) was developed to crimp Micro 64 terminals. The J 38125-64 crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. The J 38125-64 crimping tool is also designed to crimp both the wire and the insulation at the same time. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro 64 terminals. Note: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gauge wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 1. Cut the wire as close to the damaged terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3924 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert terminal into the appropriate terminal holder until it hits bottom and stops. The correct terminal holder is determined by the wire size. Also ensure that the terminals wings are pointing towards the former on the tool and the release locator. 5. Insert the stripped cable into the terminal. Insulation should be visible on both sides of the terminal insulation wings. 6. Compress the handles until the ratchet automatically releases. 7. Place the terminal into the appropriate cavity and assemble the connector. Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3925 Terminal Removal Procedure There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W connectors. These connectors are very similar but use different terminals and have some minor physical differences also. The first connector design of the Micro-Pack 100W (1) has a white connector interface that holds the terminals. The second design of the Micro-Pack 100W (2) has a gray interface to hold the terminals. Also, the first design has terminal cavities that are further apart (3 mm centerline) and offset from the other row of terminal cavities in the connector. The second design has terminals cavities that are closer together (2.54 mm centerline) and aligned vertically. One other way to identify the second design is the thin strip of material that runs along the outside of the cavities. Note: There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W terminals which are very similar. Ensure that you have the correct terminal before crimping the new terminal to the wire. The first design connector uses the longer terminal (1) that has a raised area in front of the recess in the terminal. The second design connector uses the shorter terminal without the raised area. Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro-Pack 100W connectors. Some Micro-Pack 100W connector disassembly procedures will vary. Use this procedure as a guide. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3926 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Locate the nose piece locking tabs that are positioned on the side of the connector nose piece. The connector nose piece acts as a terminal positive assurance (TPA) and may be referred to as such. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to push in one of the locking tabs while gently pulling on the same side of the nose piece. 4. Repeat the procedure for the other locking tab and remove the nose piece. 5. Remove the wire dress cover. The following is a general procedure for wire dress cover removal. Use this procedure as a guide, some dress cover removal procedures may vary. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3927 6. Use fingers to squeeze the 2 locking legs of the cover. 7. Apply pressure and gently rock the cover until one locking leg is unseated. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3928 8. Continue to apply pressure and rock the cover until the second locking leg is unseated. Repeat procedure for the other side of the dress cover and remove the cover. 9. Use J 38125-12A to gently lift the terminal retaining tab while gently pulling the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. If the terminal is severely bent or damaged, it may be possible on some connectors to push the wire out of the front of the connector instead of pulling it through. This will prevent damage to the internal seals of the connector. Once the terminal is pushed out of the connector, cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible and pull the wire through the connector. Terminal Repair Procedure The Micro-Pack 100W connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool was developed to crimp Micro-Pack 100W terminals. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro-Pack 100 terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3929 1. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. Note: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gauge wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert the terminal into the crimp tool until the core wings are flush with the anvil on the crimp tool. Be sure that the wings are pointed toward the crimp tool former and release the spring locator. The locator will hold the terminal in place. Inspect the alignment of the terminal wings with the crimp tool former. If the terminal wings are wider than the crimp tool former, remove the terminal and bend the terminal wings in slightly. 5. Place stripped wire into terminal. 6. Crimp the new terminal to the wire. If a jam occurs, press the emergency release to open applicator. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3930 Terminal Replacement Procedure After the terminal is crimped to the wire perform the following procedure in order to replace Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the Terminal Removal Procedure. Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The following is the proper procedure for the repair of Weather Pack(R) Connectors. 1. Separate the connector halves (1). 2. Open the secondary lock. A secondary lock aids in terminal retention and is usually molded to the connector (1). 3. Grasp the wire and push the terminal to the forward most position. Hold the wire in this position. 4. Insert the Weather Pack(R) terminal removal tool J 38125-10A into the front (mating end) of the connector cavity until it rests on the cavity shoulder (1). 5. Gently pull on the wire to remove the terminal through the back of the connector (2). Note: Never use force to remove a terminal from a connector. 6. Inspect the terminal and connector for damage. Repair as necessary. Refer to Repairing Connector Terminals (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Repairing Connector Terminals). 7. Reform the lock tang (2) and reset terminal in connector body. 8. Close secondary locks and join connector halves. 9. Verify that circuit is complete and working satisfactorily. 10. Perform system check. Delphi Connectors (12-Way) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3931 Delphi Connectors (12-Way) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) and slide the lever lock away from the connector body. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs on the dress cover of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool release all of the locking tabs. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3932 4. Release the lower wire dress cover locking tab. 5. Release the upper wire dress cover locking tab. 6. Once the locks are unlocked, lift the dress cover off. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3933 Note: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 7. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the locking tabs on both sides of the TPA. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. 8. Remove the nose piece by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the locking tabs on both sides of the nose piece. Gently pry the nose piece out of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3934 9. Insert the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Delphi Connectors (Steering Gear) Delphi Connectors (Steering Gear) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3935 Removal Procedure 1. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the locking tab on the connector. 2. Push down the locking tab to release the connector. The small flat-bladed tool may need to be pushed down and angled back slightly to depress the locking tab. Pull on the connector body while releasing the locking tab to disconnect the connector. FCI Connectors (Lever Lock) FCI Connectors (Lever Lock) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3936 Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. 1. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. 2. The release tab is located on the top of the wiredress cover. 3. View of connector in released position. 4. Disconnect the connector from the component. 5. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the dress cover. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs and remove the dress cover. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3937 6. Use a small flat-blade tool to slide the terminal position assurance (TPA) up one notch on both ends of the connector. The TPA is located underneath the wire dress cover. For the larger terminals insert the J 38125-556 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. For the smaller terminals insert the J 38125-560 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3938 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. FCI (SIR) FCI Connectors (SIR) Removal Procedure Note: The orange CPA must be released first to disconnect or to connect the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3939 1. Lift the orange CPA vertically (avoid lifting on an angle to the connector) approximately 4 mm to release the connector. Use a small flat-bladed tool to help release the orange CPA. The orange CPA can also be released manually without any tools. 2. Grab the connector on both sides and lift the connector vertically to disconnect the connector. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3940 1. Lift the orange CPA vertically approximately 4 mm before installing the connector. Use a small flat-bladed tool to help release the orange CPA. The orange CPA can also be released manually without any tools. 2. Line up the connector key tabs with the initiator key slots. Grab the connector on both sides and push the connector down into the initiator connector sub assembly until fully seated. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3941 3. After the connector is fully seated, push down the orange CPA with your thumb. Push down until the orange CPA is touching the yellow cover on the connector. FEP Connectors (Steering Gear) FEP Connectors (Steering Gear) Removal Procedure 1. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the locking tab on the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3942 2. Push down the locking tab to release the connector. The small flat-bladed tool may need to be pushed down and angled back slightly to depress the locking tab. Pull on the connector body while releasing the locking tab to disconnect the connector. JST Connectors JST Connectors Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. While depressing the lock, remove the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3943 2. Locate the two indents of the terminal position assurance (TPA) located on the bottom of the connector body. Note: The TPA cannot be removed from the connector while there are terminals present in the connector body. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to very carefully raise the TPA on both sides of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3944 4. View of the TPA when removed from the connector body. 5. Use the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the left side of the terminal release cavity as shown in the graphic. Use the tool to move the terminal release to the right with a gentle prying motion. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Kostal Connectors (Glow Plug Control Module) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3945 Kostal Connectors (Glow Plug Control Module) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure View of typical connector. View of connector in released position. 1. Locate the assist lever at the back of the connector. Move the assist lever to the rear position. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3946 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove the dress cover. 4. Slide the dress cover forward and off of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3947 5. The terminal positive assurance (TPA) is located in the front and rear of the connector. Note: The front TPA cannot be removed from the connector. Only move it to the preset position. 6. Use a small flat-blade tool to move the front TPA to the preset position, outboard approximately 0.125 in. (3 mm). 7. Use a small flat-blade tool to completely remove the rear TPA from the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3948 8. Use the J 38125-24 or the J 38125-560 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 9. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Kostal Connectors (Transmission) Kostal Connectors (Transmission) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3949 1. While depressing the lock, twist and remove the connector from the component. 2. Locate the terminal position assurance (TPA). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3950 Note: The TPA cannot be removed from the connector while there are terminals present in the connector body. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to push the TPA until it bottoms out. 4. Use the J 38125-28 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal cavity as shown in the graphic. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 5. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Terminal Replacement Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3951 After the terminal is crimped to the wire, perform the following procedure in order to replace the terminal. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. Locate the terminal position assurance (TPA). 4. Use a small flat-blade tool to push the TPA until it bottoms out. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3952 5. Ensure the TPA is fully seated. The TPA should be centered and flush with the connector body when viewed. Molex Connectors Molex Connectors Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the top of the wire dress cover. Slide the CPA forward. 2. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3953 3. The lever should be in the full forward position. 4. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3954 5. Remove the dress cover by using a flat bladed tool to release the dress cover locking tabs and lift up on the dress cover. 6. Cut the tie wrap that holds the wires to the connector body. 7. Use a small flat-blade tool to pry one side of the nose piece up to the pre-stage position. When the nose piece is in the pre-staged position, the nose piece will be raised above the connector body the length of the step in the nose piece. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3955 8. Use a small flat-blade tool to pry the other side of the piece to the pre-stage position. If the nose piece is higher than the first step in the nose piece, gently push down on the nose piece until it meets with resistance from the connector body, you should feel the nose piece click into position. 9. Insert the J 38125-213 into the small terminal release hole on the nose piece and gently pull on the back of the wire. 10. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Refer to the terminal crimping procedure in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit. Terminal Replacement Procedure After the terminal is crimped to the wire, perform the following procedure in order to replace the terminal. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3956 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the connector disassembly procedure. Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the connector body and pull the CPA out. The CPA is on the wire harness side of connector. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Use a small flat-bladed tool to gently pry off the dress cover by inserting the tool under the cover opposite the harness side and prying up. 4. Remove the cover. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3957 5. Using a small flat-bladed tool, push on the side of the nose piece retainer while pushing the nose piece forward with your thumb. This will release the terminal position assurance (TPA). 6. Insert the J 38125-12A into the corresponding terminal release cavity. The release cavities are the 2 center rows of cavities on one half of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3958 7. Pressing the J 38125-12A tool in the release cavity of the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and crimper in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. Slide the lever lock away from the connector body. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs on the dress cover of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool release all of the locking tabs. 4. Once the locks are unlocked, lift the dress cover off. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3959 Note: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 5. Release the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the blue locking tabs on both ends of the connector. Gently slide the TPA up to the released position on both ends. 6. For the larger terminals insert the J 38125-13A tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. For the smaller terminals insert the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3960 View of the release tool being used for the larger terminals. View of the release tool being used for the larger terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3961 View of the release tool being used for the smaller terminals. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3962 Side view of connector. View of top of connector. 1. Locate the assist lever and lock on the top of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3963 2. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. 3. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3964 4. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the rear of the connector. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. 5. Once the locking tabs are unlocked, slide the inner connector out of the rear of the connector housing. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3965 6. Use the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by pressing on the tang. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Repairing Connector Terminals Repairing Connector Terminals Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Use the following repair procedures in order to repair the following: * Push to Seat terminals * Pull to Seat terminals Some terminals do not require all of the steps shown. Skip the steps that do not apply for your terminal repair. The J-38125 contains further information. 1. Cut off the terminal between the core and the insulation crimp. Minimize any wire loss. For cable seal terminals, remove the seal. 2. Apply the correct cable seal per gauge size of the wire, if used. Slide the seal back along the wire in order to enable insulation removal. 3. Remove the insulation. 4. For sealed terminals only, align the seal with the end of the cable insulation. 5. Position the strip in the terminal. For sealed terminals, position the strip and seal in the terminal. 6. Hand crimp the core wings. 7. Hand crimp the insulation wings. For sealed terminals, hand crimp the insulation wings around the seal and the cable. 8. Solder all of the hand crimp terminals excepting Micro-Pack 100.64 size. Soldering Micro-Pack 100 World terminals may damage the terminal. Sumitomo Connectors Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3966 Sumitomo Connectors Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3967 3. Remove the dress cover by using a flat-blade tool to release the connector locking tabs and pulling off the dress cover. 4. Relieve the tension on the nose piece retainers by inserting J 38125-12A into the single retainer slot on the end of the nose piece and gently prying out the locking tab. Repeat the process for both of the nose piece locking tabs on the opposite side of the nose piece. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3968 5. Once the nose piece retainers are relaxed, use the J 38125-552 to pull up the nose piece by hooking the tool under the nose piece and pulling up. The nose piece should raise slightly. 6. On the opposite side of the nose piece, use the J 38125-552 to pull up the nose piece by hooking the tool under the nose piece and pulling up. The nose piece should release completely. If the nose piece does not come off, repeat the procedure on the opposite side. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3969 7. The illustration above identifies the entry canal where the terminal release tool will be inserted, and the terminal cavity. * Terminal (1) * Entry Canal (2) 8. Insert the J 38125-553 tool into the entry canal and pry up on the terminal retainer. The terminal retainer is a small plastic piece on the top of the terminal. The terminal retainer must be held up while the terminal is pulled out of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3970 9. The illustration shows a cutaway view of the connector to aid the technician in releasing the terminal retainer. 10. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Refer to the terminal crimping procedure in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit. Terminal Replacement Procedure After the terminal is crimped to the wire, perform the following procedure in order to replace the terminal. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the connector disassembly procedure. Terminal Position Assurance Locks Terminal Position Assurance Locks The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3971 2. Insert the J 38125-11A tool into the cavity on the lower right hand face of the connector until the terminal release tang access panel slides over. 3. Ensure that the terminal release tang access panel is in the correct location to access the terminals. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3972 5. Insert the J 38125-11A into the terminal release tang access slot located behind the access panel of the connector and press down on the terminal while carefully pulling the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component by pressing down on the connector position assurance (CPA). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3973 2. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting the tool in the small recess on the side of the connector and pushing up until the TPA releases from the connector body. The TPA should raise just slightly. Do not try to remove the TPA. Note: The TPA on this connector cannot be removed unless the terminals are removed first. The TPA will come out of the connector body, but only slightly. When the TPA is slightly raised the terminals can be removed. Using excessive force to remove the TPA with the terminals still in the connector will damage the connector. 3. Repeat the process for the other side of the connector. 4. Ensure that the TPA is in the proper position to remove the terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3974 5. While pushing the terminal forward, insert the J 38125-24 in the release cavity above the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3975 2. Insert a small flat-blade tool in the slot below the front loaded terminal position assurance (TPA) and pry up. 3. Remove the TPA by pulling it out of the connector. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-553 on a slight upward angle into the cavity below the terminal to be removed. Ensure that the pointed on the end of the tool is facing the bottom of the terminal and it stays in contact with the terminal until it stops on the plastic terminal retainer. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3976 6. Gently pry the plastic terminal retainer down and carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3977 1. While depressing the lock, pull the two connector halves apart. Note: The TPA is fragile and may break if not done carefully. 2. Use a small flat-blade tool to very carefully push the terminal position assurance (TPA) towards the face of the connector on both sides of the connector. 3. View of the male half of the connector with female terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3978 4. View of the female half of the connector with male terminals. 5. Use the J 38125-215 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. View of the female half of the connector with male terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3979 7. View of the male half of the connector with female terminals. 8. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers A circuit breaker is a protective device that is designed to open the circuit when a current load is in excess of the rated breaker capacity. If there is a short or other type of overload condition in the circuit, the excessive current will open the circuit between the circuit breaker terminals. Two types of circuit breakers are used. Circuit Breaker - This type opens when excessive current passes through it for a period of time. It closes again after a few seconds, and if the cause of the high current is still present, it will open again. The circuit breaker will continue to cycle open and closed until the condition causing the high current is removed. Positive Temperature Coefficient (PTC) Circuit Breaker - This type greatly increases its resistance when excessive current passes through it. The excessive current heats the PTC device, as the device heats its resistance increases. Eventually the resistance gets so high that the circuit is effectively open. Unlike the ordinary circuit breaker the PTC unit will not reset until the circuit is opened, by removing the voltage from its terminals. Once the voltage is removed the circuit breaker will re-close within a second or 2. Circuit Protection - Fuses Circuit Protection - Fuses Special Tools EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM) For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3980 The fuse is the most common method of an automotive wiring circuit protection. Whenever there is an excessive amount of current flowing through a circuit the fusible element will melt and create an open or incomplete circuit. Fuses are a one time protection device and must be replaced each time the circuit is overloaded. To determine if a fuse is open, remove the suspected fuse and examine if the element in the fuse is broken (2). If not broken (1), also check for continuity using a Digital Multimeter (DMM) or a continuity tester. If the element is broken or continuity is suspect, replace the fuse with one of equal current rating. Circuit Protection - Fusible Links Circuit Protection - Fusible Links Special Tools EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM) For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Fusible link is wire designed to melt and break continuity when excessive current is applied. It is often located between or near the battery and starter or electrical center. Use a continuity tester or a Digital Multimeter (DMM) at each end of the wire containing the fusible link in order to determine if it is broken. If broken, it must be replaced with fusible link of the same gauge size. Repairing a Fusible Link Note: Fusible links cut longer than 225 mm (approximately 9 in) will not provide sufficient overload protection. Flat Wire Repairs Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3981 Flat Wire Repairs The flat wire within the flex wiring harness is not serviceable. If an open or short exists within the flex wiring harness the complete harness must be replaced. GMLAN Wiring Repairs GMLAN Wiring Repairs Special Tools * EL-38125-10 - Splice Sleeve Crimping Tool * J 38125-5 - Ultra Torch Special Tool * DuraSeal splice sleeves * A wire stripping tool For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: * A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. * A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The GM Local Area Network (GMLAN) System requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working on GMLAN connectors and terminals. GMLAN Repairs Note: When making a repair to any GMLAN network, the original wire length after the repair must be the same length as before the repair. If the network is a twisted pair, the twist must be maintained after the repair is completed. GMLAN has 2 types of networks, low speed and high speed. Low speed GMLAN has a single wire and works at slow speeds. High speed GMLAN has 2 wires in a twisted pair and works at higher speeds. For more information on GMLAN, refer to Data Link Communications Description and Operation ( See: Information Bus/Description and Operation). GMLAN Connector Terminal Repair Note: A terminated lead can be used to replace damaged connector terminals for both high speed and low speed GMLAN systems. When making a connector terminal repair on a GMLAN high speed system with twisted pair wires, do not untwist the wires more than necessary to make the repair. If the individual terminals are damaged on any GMLAN connection, use the appropriate connector repair procedure in order to repair the terminal. Refer to Connector Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Connector Repairs) for the appropriate connector repair procedure. GMLAN Wire Repair Note: Refer to Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Wiring Repairs) in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gauge size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and EL-38125-10 - tool. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the DuraSeal splice sleeves. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3982 Note: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: * Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. * Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. * Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert to regional wiring gauge size. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the EL-38125-10 - tool in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the splice sleeve crimp tool. The crimp tool has four nests, one for each color. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3983 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs Caution: Do not solder repairs under any circumstances as this could result in the air reference being obstructed. If the heated oxygen sensor pigtail wiring, connector, or terminal is damaged the entire oxygen sensor assembly must be replaced. Do not attempt to repair the wiring, connector, or terminals. In order for the sensor to function properly it must have a clean air reference. This clean air reference is obtained by way of the oxygen sensor signal and heater wires. Any attempt to repair the wires, connectors or terminals could result in the obstruction of the air reference and degrade oxygen sensor performance. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3984 The following guidelines should be used when servicing the heated oxygen sensor: * Do not apply contact cleaner or other materials to the sensor or vehicle harness connectors. These materials may get into the sensor, causing poor performance. Also, the sensor pigtail and harness wires must not be damaged in such a way that the wires inside are exposed. This could provide a path for foreign materials to enter the sensor and cause performance problems. * Neither the sensor nor vehicle lead wires should be bent sharply or kinked. Sharp bends, kinks, etc., could block the reference air path through the lead wire. * Do not remove or defeat the oxygen sensor ground wire (where applicable). Vehicles that utilize the ground wire sensor may rely on this ground as the only ground contact to the sensor. Removal of the ground wire will also cause poor engine performance. * To prevent damage due to water intrusion, be sure that the peripheral seal remains intact on the vehicle harness connector. High Temperature Wiring Repairs High Temperature Wiring Repairs Special Tools * EL-38125-10 - Splice Sleeve Crimping Tool * J 38125-5 - Ultra Torch * DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). High Temperature Wiring Wiring that is exposed to high temperatures, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time may use materials i.e. wires, connectors, and shielding that has a higher heat rating than typical wiring. When making a repair in a high temperature area observe the following: * Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature to replace any damaged wire. * Replace any heat shielding that is removed. * Cover any DuraSeal splice sleeves with SCT1 shrink tubing. * After making a wiring repair, ensure that the location of the wiring is not moved closer to the heat source. Identifying High Temperature Wiring Wiring that is exposed to high temperature, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time need special considerations when making wiring repairs. Areas that may be exposed to higher temperatures can be identified by heat resistant materials that are being used in those areas. These materials may include heat reflective tape, moon tape, and high temperature shrink tubing. Also conduit and other protective coverings may be used. Because conduit or similar coverings are used throughout the vehicle regardless of the temperature, it may be necessary for the technician to determine if an area is exposed to excessive heat before making a wiring repair. Obvious areas of consideration would be any area located near the exhaust manifolds, catalytic converter, and exhaust pipes. Items Required * DuraSeal splice sleeves to crimp and seal connections * High temperature SCT1 shrink tubing to protect the splice sleeves * Terminated leads or pigtails * The correct tools to remove the terminals from the connectors Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature of the same or larger gauge size as the original wire when repair damage wire. Also replace any reflective tape that you remove during the repair. High Temperature Wire Repair Note: Refer to Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Wiring Repairs) in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature rating of the same gauge size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the EL-38125-10 - tool and then encapsulate the splice sleeve using the high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3985 Note: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: * Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. * Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. * Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert to regional wiring gauge size. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Slide a section of high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing down the length of wire to be spliced. Ensure that the shrink tubing will not interfere with the splice procedure. 5. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 6. Use the EL-38125-10 - tool in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the splice sleeve crimp tool. The crimp tool has four nests, one for each color. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3986 7. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 8. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 9. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 10. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 11. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3987 12. Center the high temperature SCT1 shrink tube over the DuraSeal splice sleeve. 13. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the high temperature heat shrink tubing. 14. Gradually move the heat from the center to the open end of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. 15. Replace any reflective tape and clips that may have been remove during the repair. Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation If the wire insulation has been chafed, or broken, enough to show the conductive portion of the wire, and the wire is not damaged, determine the length of insulation that needs to be repaired. If the repair is less than 280 mm (11 in), cut the wire within the damaged area. Than slide the appropriate heat shrink tubing (listed below) over the wire, and repair the wire by splicing the wires together. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves). Once the wire is spliced together slide heat shrink tubing over the damaged area and apply heat to seal the repaired wire. If the wire is damaged, or the damaged area is larger than 280 mm (11 in), than replace the damaged wire by splicing in a new section of wire. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3988 SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs Special Tools * EL-38125-10 - Splice Sleeve Crimping Tool * J 38125-5 - Ultra Torch * DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: * A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. * A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides the necessary low resistance contact integrity for these sensitive, low energy circuits. The Supplemental Inflatable Restraint (SIR) System/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working with the SIR/SRS, and the wiring components, such as connectors and terminals. SIR/SRS Connector Repair (Plastic Body and Terminal Metal Pin) Note: Do not use the terminals in the kit in order to replace damaged SIR/SRS system terminals. Use either an SIR/SRS pigtail or a terminated lead from the SIR Repair Kit Tray. The terminals in the SIR/SRS system are made with a special plating. This plating provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. Pigtail repair packs are available for SIR/SRS connectors with eight or less terminals. Only the connector body is available for connectors with more than eight terminals. Terminated leads can be used to replace damaged terminals when replacing the connector body. SIR/SRS Component Wire Pigtail Repair Note: Do not make wire, connector, or terminal repairs on components with wire pigtails. A wire pigtail is a wire or wires attached directly to the device, not by a connector. If a wiring pigtail is damaged, you must replace the entire component, with pigtail. The inflatable restraint steering wheel module coil is an example of a pigtail component. SIR/SRS Wire Repair Note: Refer to Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Wiring Repairs) in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3989 If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gauge size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and EL-38125-10 - tool. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the DuraSeal splice sleeves. Note: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: * Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. * Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. * Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert to regional wiring gauge size. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the EL-38125-10 - tool in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the splice sleeve crimp tool. The crimp tool has four nests, one for each color. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3990 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Connector Position Assurance (CPA) The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of a connector. CPAs are used in all SIR System connectors and also in some connectors of other systems. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals of a connection. Terminal Position Assurance (TPA) The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3991 Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Special Tools * EL-38125-10 - Splice Sleeve Crimping Tool * J 38125-5 - Ultra Torch * DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Note: Use only DuraSeal splice sleeves. Other splice sleeves may not protect the splice from moisture or provide a good electrical connection. Use DuraSeal splice sleeves to form a one-to-one splice on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. Use DuraSeal splice sleeves where there is special requirements such as moisture sealing. Follow the instructions below in order to splice copper wire using DuraSeal splice sleeves. Note: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: * Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. * Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. * Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert to regional wiring gauge size. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3992 5. Use the EL-38125-10 - tool in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the splice sleeve crimp tool. The crimp tool has four nests, one for each color. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3993 * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Splicing Inline Harness Diodes Splicing Inline Harness Diodes Many vehicle electrical systems use a diode to isolate circuits and protect the components from voltage spikes. When installing a new diode use the following procedure. 1. Open the harness. * If the harness is taped, remove the tape. * To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing seam ripper (available from sewing supply stores) in order to cut open the harness. * If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the diode. 2. If the diode is taped to the harness, remove all of the tape. 3. Check and record the current flow direction and orientation of diode. 4. Remove the inoperative diode from the harness with a suitable soldering tool. Note: If the diode is located next to a connector terminal remove the terminal(s) from the connector to prevent damage from the soldering tool. 5. Carefully strip away a section of insulation next to the old soldered portion of the wire(s). Do not remove any more than is needed to attach the new diode. 6. Check current flow direction of the new diode, being sure to install the diode with correct bias. Reference the appropriate service manual wiring schematic to obtain the correct diode installation position. 7. Attach the new diode to the wire(s) using 60/40 rosin core solder. Before soldering attach some heat sinks (aluminum alligator clips) across the diode wire ends to protect the diode from excessive heat. Follow the manufacturer's instruction for the soldering equipment. 8. Reinstall terminal(s) into the connector body if previously removed. Note: To prevent shorts to ground and water intrusion, completely cover all exposed wire and diode attachment points with tape. 9. Tape the diode to the harness or connector using electrical tape. Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable Twisted/shielded cable is used in order to protect wiring from electrical noise. Two-conductor cable of this construction is used between the radio and the Delco-Bose(R) speaker/amplifier units and other applications where low level, sensitive signals must be carried. Follow the instructions below in order to repair the twisted/shielded cable. 1. Remove the outer jacket (1). Use care not to cut into the drain wire of the mylar tape. 2. Unwrap the tape. Do not remove the tape. Use the tape in order to rewrap the twisted conductors after the splice is made. 3. Prepare the splice. Untwist the conductors and follow the instructions for Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves). Staggering the splices by 65 mm (2.5 in) is recommended. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3994 Note: Apply the mylar tape with the aluminum side inward. This ensures good electrical contact with the drain wire. 4. Re-assemble the cable. * Rewrap the conductors with the mylar tape. If the mylar tape is damaged, use 3M product AL-36FR to replace the damaged mylar tape. * Use caution not to wrap the drain wire in the tape (1). * Follow the splicing instructions for copper wire and splice the drain wire. * Wrap the drain wire around the conductors and tape with electrical tape to replace the outer insulation. 5. Tape over the entire cable. Use a winding motion when you apply the tape. Wiring Repairs Wiring Repairs The Wiring Repairs section contains the following types of wiring repair information. Using these elements together will make wiring repair faster and easier: * Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections) * Flat Wire Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Flat Wire Repairs) * GMLAN Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/GMLAN Wiring Repairs) * High Temperature Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/High Temperature Wiring Repairs) * Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs) * Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves) * Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable) * Splicing Inline Harness Diodes (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Inline Harness Diodes) * SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs) US English/Metric Conversion US English/Metric Conversion Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3995 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3996 Basic Digital Multimeter Requirements Basic Digital Multimeter Requirements Digital Multimeter (DMM) Basic Requirements Service information is validated using digital multimeters that meet or exceed the following requirements. Using a multimeter that does not meet these basic requirements may give inaccurate readings which could lead to an incorrect diagnosis. Display and Settings 1. Four digits displayed 2. Voltage, amperage, resistance, frequency, diode test settings, and min-max function 3. Display positive and negative values Voltage 1. Have at least 10 Mohm input impedance 2. Test a DC voltage range of 0.1-1000 V. 3. Test an AC voltage range of 0.1-1000 V. Amperage 1. Test a DC amperage range of 0.1µA-10 A. 2. Test an AC amperage range of 0.1µA-10 A. Resistance Test a resistance range of 0.1 ohm-40 Mohm and displays infinite for a value greater than 40 Mohm (O.L. (Over-load)) Frequency Test for a frequency range of 0.5 HZ-199 K HZ Diode Test 1. Apply at least 1 mA when performing the diode bias test 2. Display the break over voltage drop (0-3 V) of a forward biased diode 3. Display infinite (O.L. (Over-load)) when a diode is reverse biased Min-Max Readings 1. Can update at a 1 ms sample rate 2. Saves and displays minimum and maximum values Testing Ground and Low Reference Circuits Testing Ground and Low Reference Circuits Because a test lamp can light with up to 200 ohm in a ground or low reference circuit they are not recommended to be used for this type of test. A low impedance test lamp can light and indicate the circuit is good when there is as much as 20-30 ohm present, while a high impedance test lamp can light with up to 200 ohm present in the circuit. This is why the Digital Multi-Meter (DMM) is used when validating a ground or low reference circuit continuity. When using the DMM there are many vehicle conditions that can affect the ground and low reference continuity testing. If these conditions are not met, a ground or low reference circuit test can fail on a good circuit. This may cause longer diagnosis time and incorrect component replacement. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3997 Any current flow through a ground or low reference circuit, while being tested, will skew the DMM continuity reading, or display a reading higher than when there is no current flowing. Performing a ground or low reference circuit continuity test, in reference to the vehicles battery negative terminal, will have the highest risk of failing a good ground or low reference circuit test than any other ground reference point. The best ground test points would be a control module housing (if the control modules housing is metal and grounded), door jamb striker (if attached to metal), under dash metal frame work, engine block, or body ground studs (other than where the negative battery cable is attached). A typical DMM ground or low reference circuit continuity reading can be as high as 100 ohm with the ignition ON, and drop to 15-25 ohm after the ignition is turned OFF. The reading will drop below 10 ohm after 30-40 seconds, then below 5 ohm after 60 seconds. Once the vehicle completely goes to sleep (generally 3-10 minutes) the reading will drop below 0.3 ohm. The following list of conditions may need to be met to ensure a valid continuity reading on a ground or low reference circuit: * Ignition OFF * Key out of the ignition switch (when not equipped with keyless entry and remote start) * Retained Accessory Power (RAP) OFF (open and close the driver door after ignition OFF) * Battery charger set at a 2 A or less charge rate * Scan tool not communicating with any vehicle control module (in some cases it may need to be disconnected from the DLC) * All entry doors closed * Headlamps OFF (auto headlamps disabled) * Any delay lighting OFF * HVAC after blow OFF * Any accessory that can work when the ignition is OFF * Wait up to 60 seconds (after all other listed conditions are met) Activating the DOOR LOCK function with a key fob can greatly reduce the time to achieve a valid ground or low reference continuity test result. Terminal Wiring Repair Terminal Wiring Repair Special Tools * EL-38125-10 - Splice Sleeve Crimp Tool * EL-38125-580 - Terminal Release Tool Kit * J-38125-5 - Ultra Torch * EL-35616 - Connector Test Adapter Kit For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Note: All repairs near the engine manifold, turbo engine and all exhaust pipes should follow the High Temperature Wiring Repair procedures. 1. Find the appropriate connector end view within the connector end view section. The connector end view has the following information: * Diagnostic probe tool * Terminal release tool * Terminal/terminated lead part numbers 2. Determine if a terminal is damaged. Note: Not using the proper test kit probe may cause damage to the terminal(s) that are probed. * Locate the diagnostic probe tool from the connector end view. The connector end view describes the color and part number to help the technician find and use the correct tool. * Connect the probe tool to the Digital Multimeter. * Insert the probe tool into the cavity and follow the procedures from the Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter). 3. Disconnect the connector body to perform the repair. Note: Several procedures for specific connector bodies are called out in Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Wiring Repairs). Use the following repair procedures to repair the following terminals: Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3998 Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack))Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Push to Seat))Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Pull to Seat))Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W))Delphi Connectors (Micro.64) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Micro .64) )Delphi Connectors (12-Way) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (12-Way))Delphi Connectors (Steering Gear) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Steering Gear)) * The TPA and CPA should be removed before releasing the terminal for the connector body. * Look at the connector end view to locate the cavity of the damaged terminal and find the proper terminal release tool from the terminal release tool kit. Note: Using the incorrect terminal release tool can damage the connector body. * Insert the terminal release tool into the cavity. Note: Some terminals have a lever that must be disengaged before the terminal can be released. Gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Terminated Lead Repair Terminated Lead Repair Special Tools * EL-38125-10 - Splice Sleeve Crimp Tool * EL-38125-580 - Terminal Release Tool Kit * J-38125-5 - Ultra Torch * EL-35616 - Connector Test Adapter Kit For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Note: All repairs near the engine manifold, turbo engine and all exhaust pipes should follow the High Temperature Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/High Temperature Wiring Repairs) procedures. Terminated leads are terminals that are crimped onto wires. The terminated lead can be used throughout the vehicle since it is designed for temperatures up to 150°C. The length of the wire is 450 mm. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3999 The DuraSeal splice sleeve has the following 2 critical features: * A special heat shrink tubing that environmentally seals the splice. The shrink tubing contains a sealing adhesive inside the shrink tubing. * A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp that provides the necessary contact integrity for sensitive low energy circuits. 1. Use the connector end view to identify the correct terminated lead. 2. The terminated lead package should include a DuraSeal splice sleeve. If not, use the chart to identify the correct part. 3. Open the harness by removing any tape: Use a sewing seam ripper, or a comparable tool, to cut open the harness, to avoid wire insulation damage. 4. Depending on how many terminals need repairs, cut the terminal and wire back at least 40 mm. Try to keep the harness wire length the same. If more than one terminated lead is required, stagger the lengths by 40 mm. This helps reduce the bundle size of the wire harness. 5. Use the EL-38125-10 - tool in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the splice sleeve crimp tool. The crimp tool has four nests, one for each color. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4000 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the J-38125-5 - ultra torch , apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4001 Fuel Level Sensor: Connector Views A6C Fuel Pump and Level Sensor Assembly - Primary B46B Fuel Level Sensor - Secondary Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4002 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4003 Fuel Level Sensor: Electrical Diagrams For information regarding diagrams for this component, please refer to Powertrain Management diagrams. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4004 Fuel Level Sensor: Service and Repair Primary Fuel Level Sensor Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Locations Fuel Pressure Sensor: Locations Wheels/Vehicle Underbody Component Views Fuel System Components 1 - B46B Fuel Level Sensor - Secondary 2 - B150 Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor 3 - Q13 Evaporative Emission Vent Solenoid Valve 4 - B46A Fuel Level Sensor - Primary 5 - G12 Fuel Pump 6 - B47 Fuel Pressure Sensor Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4008 Fuel Pressure Sensor: Diagrams B47 Fuel Pressure Sensor Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Locations Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor: Locations Wheels/Vehicle Underbody Component Views Fuel System Components 1 - B46B Fuel Level Sensor - Secondary 2 - B150 Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor 3 - Q13 Evaporative Emission Vent Solenoid Valve 4 - B46A Fuel Level Sensor - Primary 5 - G12 Fuel Pump 6 - B47 Fuel Pressure Sensor Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4012 Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor: Diagrams B150 Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4013 Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor: Service and Repair Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Diagrams B75B Mass Air Flow/Intake Air Temperature Sensor Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4017 Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Service and Repair Mass Airflow Sensor with Intake Air Temperature Sensor Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Disassembled Views Knock Sensor: Locations Disassembled Views Disassembled Views Engine Covers and Component Assemblies (2 of 2) (LF1) 1 - Water Outlet Bolt 2 - Water Outlet 3 - Water Outlet O-ring 4 - Water Outlet Seal 5 - Knock Sensor Bolt 6 - Knock Sensor 7 - Engine Coolant Heater Assembly 8 - Crankshaft Position Sensor Bolt 9 - Crankshaft Position Sensor 10 - Crankshaft Position Sensor O-ring 11 - Right Cylinder Head Assembly 12 - Right Cylinder Head Gasket 13 - Lower Fuel Rail Noise Shield 14 - Engine Cooling Thermostat Gasket 15 - Engine Cooling Thermostat 16 - Engine Cooling Thermostat Housing Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Disassembled Views > Page 4022 17 - Engine Cooling Thermostat Bolt - Short 18 - Engine Cooling Thermostat Housing Bolt - Long 19 - Fuel Feed Pipe Assembly 20 - Fuel Feed Pipe Assembly Bolt 21 - Fuel Feed Intermediate Pipe Assembly 22 - Fuel Pump Gasket 23 - Fuel Pump O-ring Seal 24 - Fuel Pump 25 - Fuel Pump Bolt 26 - Left Cylinder Head Assembly 27 - Left Cylinder Head Gasket 28 - Oil Level Indicator 29 Oil Level Indicator Handle O-ring 30 - Oil Level Indicator Tube Bolt 31 - Oil Level Indicator Tube 32 - Oil Level Indicator Tube O-ring 33 - Oil Filter Adapter Assembly 34 - Engine Short Block Assembly 35 - Oil Pump Assembly 36 - Timing Drive Assembly Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Disassembled Views > Page 4023 Knock Sensor: Locations Powertrain Component Views Powertrain Component Views Front Engine Components (LAF 1 of 2) 1 - Q38 Throttle Body 2 - G18 High Pressure Fuel Pump 3 - B23F Camshaft Position Sensor Intake 4 - B37 Engine Oil Pressure Switch 5 - B68 Knock Sensor 6 - B26 Crankshaft Position Sensor 7 - M64 Starter Motor 8 - Q2 A/C Compressor Clutch 9 - G13 Generator Left Front of the Engine Components (LF1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Disassembled Views > Page 4024 1 - T8B Ignition Coil 2 2 - T8D Ignition Coil 4 3 - T8F Ignition Coil 6 4 - G18 High Pressure Fuel Pump 5 - B34 Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor 6 - M64 Starter Motor 7 - B68B Knock Sensor 2 8 - B37 Engine Oil Pressure Switch 9 - B1 A/C Refrigerant Pressure Sensor 10 - Q2 A/C Compressor Clutch 11 - G13 Generator Right Rear of the Engine Components (LF1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Disassembled Views > Page 4025 1 - B74 Manifold Absolute Pressure Sensor 2 - T8E Ignition Coil 5 3 - T8C Ignition Coil 3 4 - Q12 Evaporative Emission Purge Solenoid Valve 5 - Q38 Throttle Body 6 - B23B Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 1 Intake 7 - B23D Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 2 Intake 8 - Q6D Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Bank 2 Intake 9 - Q6C Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Bank 2 Exhaust 10 - B23C Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 2 Exhaust 11 - Q6B Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Bank 1 Intake 12 - Q6A Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Bank 1 Exhaust 13 - B23A Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 1 Exhaust 14 - B68A Knock Sensor 1 15 - B26 Crankshaft Position Sensor 16 - T8A Ignition Coil 1 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4026 Knock Sensor: Diagrams B68 Knock Sensor (LAF) B68A Knock Sensor 1 (LF1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4027 B68B Knock Sensor 2 (LF1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4028 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Knock Sensor Replacement - Bank 1 Knock Sensor: Service and Repair Knock Sensor Replacement - Bank 1 Knock Sensor Replacement - Bank 1 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Knock Sensor Replacement - Bank 1 > Page 4031 Knock Sensor: Service and Repair Knock Sensor Replacement - Bank 2 Knock Sensor Replacement - Bank 2 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor: Locations Powertrain Component Views Front Engine Components (LAF 2 of 2) 1 - B47B Fuel Rail Pressure Sensor 2 - B74 Manifold Absolute Pressure Sensor 3 - Q17D Fuel Injector 4 4 - Q17C Fuel Injector 3 5 - B1 A/C Refrigerant Pressure Sensor 6 - Q17B Fuel Injector 2 7 - Q17A Fuel Injector 1 Right Rear of the Engine Components (LF1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4035 1 - B74 Manifold Absolute Pressure Sensor 2 - T8E Ignition Coil 5 3 - T8C Ignition Coil 3 4 - Q12 Evaporative Emission Purge Solenoid Valve 5 - Q38 Throttle Body 6 - B23B Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 1 Intake 7 - B23D Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 2 Intake 8 - Q6D Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Bank 2 Intake 9 - Q6C Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Bank 2 Exhaust 10 - B23C Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 2 Exhaust 11 - Q6B Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Bank 1 Intake 12 - Q6A Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Bank 1 Exhaust 13 - B23A Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 1 Exhaust 14 - B68A Knock Sensor 1 15 - B26 Crankshaft Position Sensor 16 - T8A Ignition Coil 1 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4036 Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor: Diagrams B74 Manifold Absolute Pressure Sensor Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4037 Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor: Service and Repair Manifold Absolute Pressure Sensor Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oil Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Disassembled Views Oil Pressure Sensor: Locations Disassembled Views Disassembled Views Oil Filter Adapter 440 - Oil Filter Adapter 441 - Oil Filter Adapter Gasket 442 - Oil Filter Adapter Bolt 443 - Oil Filter Adapter Bolt - Long 445 - Oil Filter Fitting 449 - Oil Filter 728 - Engine Oil Pressure Sensor 729 Engine Oil Pressure Sensor O-ring Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oil Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Disassembled Views > Page 4042 Oil Pressure Sensor: Locations Powertrain Component Views Powertrain Component Views Front Engine Components (LAF 1 of 2) 1 - Q38 Throttle Body 2 - G18 High Pressure Fuel Pump 3 - B23F Camshaft Position Sensor Intake 4 - B37 Engine Oil Pressure Switch 5 - B68 Knock Sensor 6 - B26 Crankshaft Position Sensor 7 - M64 Starter Motor 8 - Q2 A/C Compressor Clutch 9 - G13 Generator Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oil Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4043 Oil Pressure Sensor: Diagrams B37 Engine Oil Pressure Switch (LAF) B37 Engine Oil Pressure Switch (LF1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oil Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4044 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oil Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4045 Oil Pressure Sensor: Service and Repair Engine Oil Pressure Sensor and/or Switch Replacement (LF1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations Oxygen Sensor: Locations Powertrain Component Views Left Rear Engine Components (LAF) 1 - T8D Ignition Coil 4 2 - T8C Ignition Coil 3 3 - T8B Ignition Coil 2 4 - T8A Ignition Coil 1 5 - Q6F Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Intake 6 - Q6E Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Exhaust 7 - B52A Heated Oxygen Sensor 1 8 - B52B Heated Oxygen Sensor 2 9 - B34 Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor 10 - B23E Camshaft Position Sensor - Exhaust 11 - Q12 Evaporative Emission Purge Solenoid Valve Front of the Exhaust System Components (LF1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4049 1 - B52C Heated Oxygen Sensor - Bank 1 Sensor 1 2 - B52D Heated Oxygen Sensor - Bank 1 Sensor 2 3 - B52F Heated Oxygen Sensor - Bank 2 Sensor 2 4 - B52E Heated Oxygen Sensor Bank 2 Sensor 1 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4050 Oxygen Sensor: Diagrams B52A Heated Oxygen Sensor 1 (LAF) B52B Heated Oxygen Sensor 2 (LAF) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4051 B52C Heated Oxygen Sensor - Bank 1 Sensor 1 (LF1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4052 B52D Heated Oxygen Sensor - Bank 1 Sensor 2 (LF1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4053 B52E Heated Oxygen Sensor - Bank 2 Sensor 1 (LF1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4054 B52F Heated Oxygen Sensor - Bank 2 Sensor 2 (LF1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4055 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service Precautions > Heated Oxygen and Oxygen Sensor Caution Oxygen Sensor: Service Precautions Heated Oxygen and Oxygen Sensor Caution Heated Oxygen and Oxygen Sensor Caution Caution: Do not remove the pigtail from either the heated oxygen sensor (HO2S) or the oxygen sensor (O2S). Removing the pigtail or the connector will affect sensor operation. Handle the oxygen sensor carefully. Do not drop the HO2S. Keep the in-line electrical connector and the louvered end free of grease, dirt, or other contaminants. Do not use cleaning solvents of any type. Do not repair the wiring, connector or terminals. Replace the oxygen sensor if the pigtail wiring, connector, or terminal is damaged. This external clean air reference is obtained by way of the oxygen sensor signal and heater wires. Any attempt to repair the wires, connectors, or terminals could result in the obstruction of the air reference and degraded sensor performance. The following guidelines should be used when servicing the heated oxygen sensor: * Do not apply contact cleaner or other materials to the sensor or vehicle harness connectors. These materials may get into the sensor causing poor performance. * Do not damage the sensor pigtail and harness wires in such a way that the wires inside are exposed. This could provide a path for foreign materials to enter the sensor and cause performance problems. * Ensure the sensor or vehicle lead wires are not bent sharply or kinked. Sharp bends or kinks could block the reference air path through the lead wire. * Do not remove or defeat the oxygen sensor ground wire, where applicable. Vehicles that utilize the ground wired sensor may rely on this ground as the only ground contact to the sensor. Removal of the ground wire will cause poor engine performance. * Ensure that the peripheral seal remains intact on the vehicle harness connector in order to prevent damage due to water intrusion. The engine harness may be repaired using Packard's Crimp and Splice Seals Terminal Repair Kit. Under no circumstances should repairs be soldered since this could result in the air reference being obstructed. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service Precautions > Heated Oxygen and Oxygen Sensor Caution > Page 4058 Oxygen Sensor: Service Precautions Heated Oxygen Sensor Resistance Learn Reset Caution Heated Oxygen Sensor Resistance Learn Reset Caution Caution: When replacing the HO2S perform the following: * A code clear with a scan tool, regardless of whether or not a DTC is set * HO2S heater resistance learn reset with a scan tool, where available Perform the above in order to reset the HO2S resistance learned value and avoid possible HO2S failure. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service Precautions > Heated Oxygen and Oxygen Sensor Caution > Page 4059 Oxygen Sensor: Service Precautions Silicon Contamination of Heated Oxygen Sensors Caution Silicon Contamination of Heated Oxygen Sensors Caution Caution: Contamination of the oxygen sensor can result from the use of an inappropriate RTV sealant (not oxygen sensor safe) or excessive engine coolant or oil consumption. Remove the HO2S and visually inspect the portion of the sensor exposed to the exhaust stream in order to check for contamination. If contaminated, the portion of the sensor exposed to the exhaust stream will have a white powdery coating. Silicon contamination causes a high but false HO2S signal voltage (rich exhaust indication). The control module will then reduce the amount of fuel delivered to the engine, causing a severe driveability problem. Eliminate the source of contamination before replacing the oxygen sensor. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heated Oxygen Sensor - Bank 1 Sensor 1 Oxygen Sensor: Service and Repair Heated Oxygen Sensor - Bank 1 Sensor 1 Heated Oxygen Sensor Replacement - Bank 1 Sensor 1 (LF1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heated Oxygen Sensor - Bank 1 Sensor 1 > Page 4062 Oxygen Sensor: Service and Repair Heated Oxygen Sensor - Bank 1 Sensor 2 Heated Oxygen Sensor Replacement - Bank 1 Sensor 2 (LF1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heated Oxygen Sensor - Bank 1 Sensor 1 > Page 4063 Oxygen Sensor: Service and Repair Heated Oxygen Sensor - Bank 2 Sensor 1 Heated Oxygen Sensor Replacement - Bank 2 Sensor 1 (LF1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heated Oxygen Sensor - Bank 1 Sensor 1 > Page 4064 Oxygen Sensor: Service and Repair Heated Oxygen Sensor - Bank 2 Sensor 2 Heated Oxygen Sensor Replacement - Bank 2 Sensor 2 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Exploded Views Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Exploded Views 6L50/6L80/6L90 - Automatic Transmission Disassembled Views Park System Components 50 - A/Trans Case 600 - Park Pawl Shaft 601 - Park Pawl Spring 602 - Park Pawl 603 - Park Pawl Actuator Guide Pin 604 - Manual Shift Shaft Seal 605 - Park Pawl Actuator Guide Seal 606 - Park Pawl Actuator Guide 607 - Park Pawl Actuator Assembly 608 - Manual Shift Detent Lever Shaft 609 - Manual Shift Detent (w/Shaft Position Switch) Lever Assembly 610 - Manual Shift Detent Lever Pin 611 - Manual Shift Shaft Pin 6T70/6T75 - Automatic Transmission Disassembled Views Park System Components Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Exploded Views > Page 4069 500 - Park Pawl Actuator Bracket Bolt 501 - Park Pawl Actuator Bracket 502 - Park Pawl Shaft 503 - Park Pawl 504 - Park Pawl Spring 505 - Park Pawl Actuator Guide Pin 506 - Park Pawl Actuator Guide 507 - A/Trans Case Assembly 508 - Manual Shift Shaft Seal 509 - Park Pawl Actuator Assembly 510 - Manual Shift Shaft Pin 511 - Manual Shift Detent (w/Shaft Position Switch) Lever Assembly Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Exploded Views > Page 4070 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Connector Views P2 Transmission Shift Lever Position Indicator Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Service and Repair 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission Manual Shift Detent Lever with Shaft Position Switch Assembly Replacement Special Tools * DT-48550 Detent Lever Pin Remover * J 41229 Manual Shaft Pin Installer Removal Procedure 1. Remove the control valve body. Refer to Control Valve Body Replacement (See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Valve Body/Service and Repair/6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission/Control Valve Body Replacement). 2. Remove the manual shaft detent lever hub pin (1) using DT-48550. 3. Remove the manual shift shaft pin (5). Discard the pin. 4. Remove the manual shaft (2). Note: Disconnect the actuator rod (3) from the detent lever assembly. Do not remove the actuator rod from the transmission case. 5. Remove the manual shaft detent (w/shift position switch) lever assembly (4). Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 4073 Note: Connect the actuator rod (3) to the detent lever assembly. 1. Install the manual shaft detent (w/shift position switch) lever assembly (4). Note: Lubricate the shaft with automatic transmission fluid to prevent damage to the manual shift shaft seal during installation. 2. Install the manual shaft (2). 3. Install the manual shaft detent lever hub pin (1) using DT-48550. Install the Manual Shaft Detent Lever Hub Pin to height of (b) 7.9 mm (0.38 in). Caution: Use the manual shaft pin installer to install the pin at the correct height in order to properly secure the manual shaft. If you install the pin too deep, the case bore may crack. 4. Install the NEW manual shift shaft pin (5) using J 41229. Use a NEW pin to ensure proper engagement with the case. Inspect pin installed height is within (a) 7.2-8.2 mm (0.28-0.32 in). 5. Install the control valve body. Refer to Control Valve Body Replacement (See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Valve Body/Service and Repair/6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission/Control Valve Body Replacement). 6. Perform the transmission adaptive values learn procedure. Refer to Transmission Adaptive Values Learn (See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 4074 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Service and Repair 6T70/6T75 - Automatic Transmission Manual Shift Detent Lever with Shaft Position Switch Assembly Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 4075 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Exploded Views Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Exploded Views 6L50/6L80/6L90 - Automatic Transmission Disassembled Views Park System Components 50 - A/Trans Case 600 - Park Pawl Shaft 601 - Park Pawl Spring 602 - Park Pawl 603 - Park Pawl Actuator Guide Pin 604 - Manual Shift Shaft Seal 605 - Park Pawl Actuator Guide Seal 606 - Park Pawl Actuator Guide 607 - Park Pawl Actuator Assembly 608 - Manual Shift Detent Lever Shaft 609 - Manual Shift Detent (w/Shaft Position Switch) Lever Assembly 610 - Manual Shift Detent Lever Pin 611 - Manual Shift Shaft Pin 6T70/6T75 - Automatic Transmission Disassembled Views Park System Components Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Exploded Views > Page 4080 500 - Park Pawl Actuator Bracket Bolt 501 - Park Pawl Actuator Bracket 502 - Park Pawl Shaft 503 - Park Pawl 504 - Park Pawl Spring 505 - Park Pawl Actuator Guide Pin 506 - Park Pawl Actuator Guide 507 - A/Trans Case Assembly 508 - Manual Shift Shaft Seal 509 - Park Pawl Actuator Assembly 510 - Manual Shift Shaft Pin 511 - Manual Shift Detent (w/Shaft Position Switch) Lever Assembly Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Exploded Views > Page 4081 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Connector Views P2 Transmission Shift Lever Position Indicator Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Service and Repair 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission Manual Shift Detent Lever with Shaft Position Switch Assembly Replacement Special Tools * DT-48550 Detent Lever Pin Remover * J 41229 Manual Shaft Pin Installer Removal Procedure 1. Remove the control valve body. Refer to Control Valve Body Replacement (See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Valve Body/Service and Repair/6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission/Control Valve Body Replacement). 2. Remove the manual shaft detent lever hub pin (1) using DT-48550. 3. Remove the manual shift shaft pin (5). Discard the pin. 4. Remove the manual shaft (2). Note: Disconnect the actuator rod (3) from the detent lever assembly. Do not remove the actuator rod from the transmission case. 5. Remove the manual shaft detent (w/shift position switch) lever assembly (4). Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 4084 Note: Connect the actuator rod (3) to the detent lever assembly. 1. Install the manual shaft detent (w/shift position switch) lever assembly (4). Note: Lubricate the shaft with automatic transmission fluid to prevent damage to the manual shift shaft seal during installation. 2. Install the manual shaft (2). 3. Install the manual shaft detent lever hub pin (1) using DT-48550. Install the Manual Shaft Detent Lever Hub Pin to height of (b) 7.9 mm (0.38 in). Caution: Use the manual shaft pin installer to install the pin at the correct height in order to properly secure the manual shaft. If you install the pin too deep, the case bore may crack. 4. Install the NEW manual shift shaft pin (5) using J 41229. Use a NEW pin to ensure proper engagement with the case. Inspect pin installed height is within (a) 7.2-8.2 mm (0.28-0.32 in). 5. Install the control valve body. Refer to Control Valve Body Replacement (See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Valve Body/Service and Repair/6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission/Control Valve Body Replacement). 6. Perform the transmission adaptive values learn procedure. Refer to Transmission Adaptive Values Learn (See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 4085 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Service and Repair 6T70/6T75 - Automatic Transmission Manual Shift Detent Lever with Shaft Position Switch Assembly Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 4086 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Description and Operation Variable Valve Timing Actuator: Description and Operation Camshaft Actuator System Description Camshaft Actuator System Overview 1 - Camshaft Actuator Vane 2 - Timing Chain Sprocket 3 - Engine Oil Pressure-For retarding the camshaft 4 - Camshaft 5 - Input Signals from Engine Sensors 6 - Engine Control Module (ECM) 7 Camshaft Actuator Solenoid 8 - Engine Oil Pump 9 - Engine Oil Pressure Supply 10 - Engine Oil Drain 11 - Engine Oil Pressure-For advancing the camshaft 12 - Camshaft Actuator Rotor 13 Camshaft Position Sensor Reluctor 14 - Camshaft Actuator Lock Pin 15 - Camshaft Actuator Housing The camshaft actuator system enables the engine control module (ECM) to change camshaft timing of all 4 camshafts while the engine is operating. The CMP actuator assembly (15) varies the camshaft position in response to directional changes in oil pressure. The CMP actuator solenoid valve controls the oil pressure that is applied to advance or retard a camshaft. Modifying camshaft timing under changing engine demand provides better balance between the following performance concerns: * Engine power output * Fuel economy * Lower tailpipe emissions The CMP actuator solenoid valve (7) is controlled by the ECM. The crankshaft position (CKP) sensor and the CMP sensors are used to monitor changes in camshaft positions. The ECM uses the following information in order to calculate the desired camshaft positions: * The engine coolant temperature (ECT) sensor * The calculated engine oil temperature (EOT) * The mass air flow (MAF) sensor * The throttle position (TP) sensor * The vehicle speed sensor (VSS) * The volumetric efficiency Operation The CMP actuator assembly has an outer housing that is driven by an engine timing chain. Inside the assembly is a rotor with fixed vanes that is attached to the camshaft. Oil pressure that is applied to the fixed vanes will rotate a specific camshaft in relationship to the crankshaft. The movement of the intake camshafts will advance the intake valve timing. The movement of the exhaust camshafts will retard the exhaust valve timing. When oil pressure is Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 4090 applied to the return side of the vanes, the camshafts will return to 0 crankshaft degrees, or top dead center (TDC). The CMP actuator solenoid valve directs the oil flow that controls the camshaft movement. The ECM commands the CMP solenoid to move the solenoid plunger and spool valve until oil flows from the advance passage (11). Oil flowing thru the CMP actuator assembly from the CMP solenoid advance passage applies pressure to the advance side of the vanes in the CMP actuator assembly. When the camshaft position is retarded, the CMP actuator solenoid valve directs oil to flow into the CMP actuator assembly from the retard passage (3). The ECM can also command the CMP actuator solenoid valve to stop oil flow from both passages in order to hold the current camshaft position. The ECM operates the CMP actuator solenoid valve by pulse width modulation (PWM) of the solenoid coil. The higher the PWM duty cycle, the larger the change in camshaft timing. The CMP actuator assembly also contains a lock pin (14) that prevents movement between the outer housing and the rotor vane assembly. The lock pin is released by oil pressure before any movement in the CMP actuator assembly takes place. The ECM is continuously comparing CMP sensor inputs with CKP sensor input in order to monitor camshaft position and detect any system malfunctions. If a condition exists in either the intake or exhaust camshaft actuator system, the opposite bank, intake or exhaust, camshaft actuator will default to 0 crankshaft degrees. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Variable Valve Timing Solenoid > Component Information > Locations Variable Valve Timing Solenoid: Locations Powertrain Component Views Left Rear Engine Components (LAF) 1 - T8D Ignition Coil 4 2 - T8C Ignition Coil 3 3 - T8B Ignition Coil 2 4 - T8A Ignition Coil 1 5 - Q6F Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Intake 6 - Q6E Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Exhaust 7 - B52A Heated Oxygen Sensor 1 8 - B52B Heated Oxygen Sensor 2 9 - B34 Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor 10 - B23E Camshaft Position Sensor - Exhaust 11 - Q12 Evaporative Emission Purge Solenoid Valve Right Rear of the Engine Components (LF1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Variable Valve Timing Solenoid > Component Information > Locations > Page 4094 1 - B74 Manifold Absolute Pressure Sensor 2 - T8E Ignition Coil 5 3 - T8C Ignition Coil 3 4 - Q12 Evaporative Emission Purge Solenoid Valve 5 - Q38 Throttle Body 6 - B23B Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 1 Intake 7 - B23D Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 2 Intake 8 - Q6D Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Bank 2 Intake 9 - Q6C Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Bank 2 Exhaust 10 - B23C Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 2 Exhaust 11 - Q6B Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Bank 1 Intake 12 - Q6A Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Bank 1 Exhaust 13 - B23A Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 1 Exhaust 14 - B68A Knock Sensor 1 15 - B26 Crankshaft Position Sensor 16 - T8A Ignition Coil 1 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Variable Valve Timing Solenoid > Component Information > Locations > Page 4095 Variable Valve Timing Solenoid: Diagrams Q6A Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Bank 1 Exhaust (LF1) Q6B Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Bank 1 Intake (LF1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Variable Valve Timing Solenoid > Component Information > Locations > Page 4096 Q6C Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Bank 2 Exhaust (LF1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Variable Valve Timing Solenoid > Component Information > Locations > Page 4097 Q6D Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Bank 2 Intake (LF1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Variable Valve Timing Solenoid > Component Information > Locations > Page 4098 Q6E Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Exhaust (LAF) Q6F Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Intake (LAF) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Variable Valve Timing Solenoid > Component Information > Locations > Page 4099 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Variable Valve Timing Solenoid > Component Information > Service and Repair > Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve Solenoid Replacement - Bank 1 (Right Side) Intake Variable Valve Timing Solenoid: Service and Repair Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve Solenoid Replacement - Bank 1 (Right Side) Intake Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve Solenoid Replacement - Bank 1 (Right Side) Intake Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Variable Valve Timing Solenoid > Component Information > Service and Repair > Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve Solenoid Replacement - Bank 1 (Right Side) Intake > Page 4102 Variable Valve Timing Solenoid: Service and Repair Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve Solenoid Replacement - Bank 1 (Right Side) Exhaust Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve Solenoid Replacement - Bank 1 (Right Side) Exhaust Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Variable Valve Timing Solenoid > Component Information > Service and Repair > Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve Solenoid Replacement - Bank 1 (Right Side) Intake > Page 4103 Variable Valve Timing Solenoid: Service and Repair Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve Solenoid Replacement - Bank 2 (Left Side) Intake Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve Solenoid Replacement - Bank 2 (Left Side) Intake Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Variable Valve Timing Solenoid > Component Information > Service and Repair > Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve Solenoid Replacement - Bank 1 (Right Side) Intake > Page 4104 Variable Valve Timing Solenoid: Service and Repair Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve Solenoid Replacement - Bank 2 (Left Side) Exhaust Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve Solenoid Replacement - Bank 2 (Left Side) Exhaust Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Catalytic Converter > Catalyst Shield > Component Information > Service and Repair Catalyst Shield: Service and Repair Catalytic Converter Heat Shield Replacement (LF1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Canister Purge Solenoid > Component Information > Locations > Powertrain Component Views Canister Purge Solenoid: Locations Powertrain Component Views Powertrain Component Views Left Rear Engine Components (LAF) 1 - T8D Ignition Coil 4 2 - T8C Ignition Coil 3 3 - T8B Ignition Coil 2 4 - T8A Ignition Coil 1 5 - Q6F Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Intake 6 - Q6E Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Exhaust 7 - B52A Heated Oxygen Sensor 1 8 - B52B Heated Oxygen Sensor 2 9 - B34 Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor 10 - B23E Camshaft Position Sensor - Exhaust 11 - Q12 Evaporative Emission Purge Solenoid Valve Right Rear of the Engine Components (LF1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Canister Purge Solenoid > Component Information > Locations > Powertrain Component Views > Page 4115 1 - B74 Manifold Absolute Pressure Sensor 2 - T8E Ignition Coil 5 3 - T8C Ignition Coil 3 4 - Q12 Evaporative Emission Purge Solenoid Valve 5 - Q38 Throttle Body 6 - B23B Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 1 Intake 7 - B23D Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 2 Intake 8 - Q6D Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Bank 2 Intake 9 - Q6C Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Bank 2 Exhaust 10 - B23C Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 2 Exhaust 11 - Q6B Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Bank 1 Intake 12 - Q6A Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Bank 1 Exhaust 13 - B23A Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 1 Exhaust 14 - B68A Knock Sensor 1 15 - B26 Crankshaft Position Sensor 16 - T8A Ignition Coil 1 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Canister Purge Solenoid > Component Information > Locations > Powertrain Component Views > Page 4116 Canister Purge Solenoid: Locations Wheels/Vehicle Underbody Component Views Wheels/Vehicle Underbody Component Views Fuel System Components 1 - B46B Fuel Level Sensor - Secondary 2 - B150 Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor 3 - Q13 Evaporative Emission Vent Solenoid Valve 4 - B46A Fuel Level Sensor - Primary 5 - G12 Fuel Pump 6 - B47 Fuel Pressure Sensor Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Canister Purge Solenoid > Component Information > Locations > Page 4117 Canister Purge Solenoid: Diagrams Q12 Evaporative Emission Purge Solenoid Valve (LAF) Q12 Evaporative Emission Purge Solenoid Valve (LF1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Canister Purge Solenoid > Component Information > Locations > Page 4118 Q13 Evaporative Emission Vent Solenoid Valve Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Canister Purge Solenoid > Component Information > Locations > Page 4119 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Canister Purge Solenoid > Component Information > Locations > Page 4120 Canister Purge Solenoid: Service and Repair Evaporative Emission Canister Purge Solenoid Valve Replacement (LF1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Evaporative Emission Control Canister > Canister Vent Valve > Component Information > Service and Repair Canister Vent Valve: Service and Repair Evaporative Emission Canister Vent Solenoid Valve Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the evaporative emission (EVAP) canister. Refer to Evaporative Emission Canister Replacement (See: Service and Repair). 2. Rotate the EVAP canister vent valve counterclockwise to release from the locked position. 3. Remove the vent valve from the EVAP canister. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Evaporative Emission Control Canister > Canister Vent Valve > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 4125 1. Insert the EVAP canister vent solenoid valve into the EVAP canister, with the valve aligned to the released position. 2. Rotate vent valve clockwise to secure into the locked position. 3. Install the EVAP canister. Refer to Evaporative Emission Canister Replacement (See: Service and Repair). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Evaporative Emissions Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Evaporative Emissions Hose: > 09333A > May > 10 > Campaign - Evaporative Emission Diagnostics Technical Service Bulletin # 09333A Date: 100504 Campaign - Evaporative Emission Diagnostics SERVICE UPDATE Bulletin No.: 09333A Date: May 04, 2010 Subject: 09333A - Service Update for Inventory and Customer Vehicles - Evaporative Emission Diagnostics Models: 2010 Chevrolet Equinox 2010 GMC Terrain Supercede: The ECM programming service procedure in this bulletin has been revised to include instructions for dealers to contact Engineering at 734-320-8123 if programming stops prior to completion. Do NOT attempt to reprogram.Please discard all copies of bulletin 09333, issued January 2010. This service update includes vehicles in dealer inventory and customer vehicles that return to the dealership for any reason. Purpose This bulletin provides a service procedure to improve the ability of the evaporative emissions diagnostic to detect leaks by installing a fuel tank vent tubing jumper on certain 2010 model year Chevrolet Equinox and GMC Terrain vehicles. Vehicles equipped with a V6 engine will also require reprogramming of the engine control module. This service procedure should be completed as soon as possible on involved vehicles currently in dealer inventory and customer vehicles that return to the dealer for any type of service. Vehicles Involved A list of involved vehicles currently in dealer inventory is available on the "Service Update Bulletin Information" link under the "Service" tab in GM GlobalConnect (US) or attached to the GlobalConnect message (Canada) used to release this bulletin. Customer vehicles that return for service, for any reason, and are still covered under the vehicle's 8 year/80,000 mile (130,000 km) base emission warranty, and are within the VIN breakpoints provided below, should be checked for vehicle eligibility in the appropriate system listed below. Important Dealers are to confirm vehicle eligibility prior to beginning repairs by using GMVIS (dealers using WINS) or the Investigate Vehicle History link (dealers using GWM). Not all vehicles within the above breakpoints may be involved. Parts Information Parts required to complete this service update are to be obtained from General Motors Service and Parts Operations (GMSPO). Please refer to your "involved vehicles listing" before ordering parts. Normal orders should be placed on a DRO = Daily Replenishment Order. In an emergency situation, parts should be ordered on a CSO = Customer Special Order. Claim Information For vehicles repaired under the 8 year/80,000 mile (130,000 km) emission warranty: 1. Submit a claim using the table below. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Evaporative Emissions Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Evaporative Emissions Hose: > 09333A > May > 10 > Campaign - Evaporative Emission Diagnostics > Page 4134 2. Courtesy Transportation - For dealers using WINS, submit using normal labor code; for dealers using GWM - submit as Net Item under the repair labor code. Disclaimer Service Procedure Service Procedure 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle in SI. 2. Locate the fuel tank EVAP emissions canister (1) and fuel tank EVAP vapor line connection (2). 3. Disconnect the 16 mm (5/8 in) quick connect vapor line (2) from the front of EVAP emissions canister (1). 4. Identify all parts included in the EVAP jumper hose assembly kit. The kit contains two EVAP jumper hoses and three tie straps. There is a large diameter 16 mm (5/8 in) EVAP jumper hose (1) with a 45 degree T-fitting (2) and a small diameter 8 mm (5/16 in) EVAP jumper hose with a T-fitting (3). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Evaporative Emissions Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Evaporative Emissions Hose: > 09333A > May > 10 > Campaign - Evaporative Emission Diagnostics > Page 4135 5. Connect the new 16 mm (5/8 in) EVAP jumper hose (larger diameter hose) (2) to the EVAP emissions canister (1). 6. Install the second piece of the new 8 mm (5/16 in) jumper hose (smaller diameter hose) (3) to the 45 degree T-fitting on the new 16 mm (5/8 in) EVAP jumper hose (2). Ensure that the new 8 mm (5/16 in) jumper hose (3) is installed between the new 16 mm (5/8 in) EVAP jumper hose (2) and floor pan. 7. Insert the non-connector end of the 16 mm (5/8 in) EVAP jumper hose (larger diameter hose) (2) into the existing EVAP vapor line (4). 8. Secure the new jumper hose assembly with a tie strap (6) through the hole in brake clip (5) on LH underbody rail. Avoid contacting the brake or fuel line with the tie wrap. 9. Cut off excess tie strap (6). 10. Route the 8 mm (5/16 in) hose (3) on top of the fuel feed line on the left (driver's) side of the fuel tank assembly. 11. Continue routing the 8 mm (5/16 in) hose (3) through the suspension on the front side of the underbody rail and behind the tank and all-wheel drive unit. Follow the path of the park brake cable. The 8 mm (5/16 in) line should be routed on top of the park brake cable routing. 12. Disconnect the existing EVAP-to-fuel tank vapor line (yellow connector) located on the rear right (passenger side) of vehicle at the fuel tank. 13. Connect the new 8 mm (5/16 in) hose (3) to the fuel tank. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Evaporative Emissions Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Evaporative Emissions Hose: > 09333A > May > 10 > Campaign - Evaporative Emission Diagnostics > Page 4136 14. Connect the existing EVAP hose to the T-fitting on the new 8 mm (5/16 in) hose. Caution Ensure that the 8 mm (5/16 in) hose (3) is tucked in over the park brake cable to prevent the hose from sagging over the fuel tank cutout area. 15. Secure the 8 mm (5/16 in) hose (3) to the parking brake line at the left (driver's) (A) and right (passenger' side) (B) fuel tank strap locations (9) with two tie straps (8) as shown in the illustration. 16. Lower the vehicle. 17. Determine if the vehicle is equipped with a four or six cylinder engine. - If the vehicle is equipped with a four cylinder engine, no further action is required. Refer to the Claim section of the bulletin. - If the vehicle is equipped with a six cylinder engine, refer to ECM Programming Service Procedure in this bulletin. ECM PROGRAMMING SERVICE PROCEDURE Do not attempt to order the calibration number from GMSPO. The calibration numbers required for this service procedure are programmed into control modules via a Multiple Diagnostic Interface (MDI) and TIS2WEB with the calibration update. Use TIS2WEB on or after 01/07/10 to obtain the calibration. If you cannot access the calibration, call the Techline Customer Support Center and it will be provided. If programming stops prior to completion, contact Engineering at 734-320-8123. Do NOT attempt to reprogram. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Evaporative Emissions Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Evaporative Emissions Hose: > 09333A > May > 10 > Campaign - Evaporative Emission Diagnostics > Page 4137 For step-by-step programming instructions, please refer to SI and the Techline Information System (TIS) terminal. 1. Verify that there is a battery charge of 12 to 16 volts. The battery must be able to maintain a charge during programming. Only use an approved Midtronic 165-PSC charger to maintain proper battery voltage during programming. 2. Reprogram the engine control module (ECM). Refer to SI and Service Programming System (SPS) documentation for programming instructions, if required. 1. Connect the MDI to the vehicle. Note Select J2534 MDI and Reprogram ECU from the Select Diagnostic Tool and Programming Process screen. 2. Select J2534 MDI and Reprogram ECU from the Select Diagnostic Tool and Programming Process screen. 3. Select ECM Engine Control Module - Programming from the Supported Controllers screen. 4. Follow the on-screen instructions. 3. Use MDI and GDS to clear all DTCs if required. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Evaporative Emissions Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Evaporative Emissions Hose: > 09333A > May > 10 > Campaign - Evaporative Emission Diagnostics Technical Service Bulletin # 09333A Date: 100504 Campaign - Evaporative Emission Diagnostics SERVICE UPDATE Bulletin No.: 09333A Date: May 04, 2010 Subject: 09333A - Service Update for Inventory and Customer Vehicles - Evaporative Emission Diagnostics Models: 2010 Chevrolet Equinox 2010 GMC Terrain Supercede: The ECM programming service procedure in this bulletin has been revised to include instructions for dealers to contact Engineering at 734-320-8123 if programming stops prior to completion. Do NOT attempt to reprogram.Please discard all copies of bulletin 09333, issued January 2010. This service update includes vehicles in dealer inventory and customer vehicles that return to the dealership for any reason. Purpose This bulletin provides a service procedure to improve the ability of the evaporative emissions diagnostic to detect leaks by installing a fuel tank vent tubing jumper on certain 2010 model year Chevrolet Equinox and GMC Terrain vehicles. Vehicles equipped with a V6 engine will also require reprogramming of the engine control module. This service procedure should be completed as soon as possible on involved vehicles currently in dealer inventory and customer vehicles that return to the dealer for any type of service. Vehicles Involved A list of involved vehicles currently in dealer inventory is available on the "Service Update Bulletin Information" link under the "Service" tab in GM GlobalConnect (US) or attached to the GlobalConnect message (Canada) used to release this bulletin. Customer vehicles that return for service, for any reason, and are still covered under the vehicle's 8 year/80,000 mile (130,000 km) base emission warranty, and are within the VIN breakpoints provided below, should be checked for vehicle eligibility in the appropriate system listed below. Important Dealers are to confirm vehicle eligibility prior to beginning repairs by using GMVIS (dealers using WINS) or the Investigate Vehicle History link (dealers using GWM). Not all vehicles within the above breakpoints may be involved. Parts Information Parts required to complete this service update are to be obtained from General Motors Service and Parts Operations (GMSPO). Please refer to your "involved vehicles listing" before ordering parts. Normal orders should be placed on a DRO = Daily Replenishment Order. In an emergency situation, parts should be ordered on a CSO = Customer Special Order. Claim Information For vehicles repaired under the 8 year/80,000 mile (130,000 km) emission warranty: 1. Submit a claim using the table below. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Evaporative Emissions Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Evaporative Emissions Hose: > 09333A > May > 10 > Campaign - Evaporative Emission Diagnostics > Page 4143 2. Courtesy Transportation - For dealers using WINS, submit using normal labor code; for dealers using GWM - submit as Net Item under the repair labor code. Disclaimer Service Procedure Service Procedure 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle in SI. 2. Locate the fuel tank EVAP emissions canister (1) and fuel tank EVAP vapor line connection (2). 3. Disconnect the 16 mm (5/8 in) quick connect vapor line (2) from the front of EVAP emissions canister (1). 4. Identify all parts included in the EVAP jumper hose assembly kit. The kit contains two EVAP jumper hoses and three tie straps. There is a large diameter 16 mm (5/8 in) EVAP jumper hose (1) with a 45 degree T-fitting (2) and a small diameter 8 mm (5/16 in) EVAP jumper hose with a T-fitting (3). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Evaporative Emissions Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Evaporative Emissions Hose: > 09333A > May > 10 > Campaign - Evaporative Emission Diagnostics > Page 4144 5. Connect the new 16 mm (5/8 in) EVAP jumper hose (larger diameter hose) (2) to the EVAP emissions canister (1). 6. Install the second piece of the new 8 mm (5/16 in) jumper hose (smaller diameter hose) (3) to the 45 degree T-fitting on the new 16 mm (5/8 in) EVAP jumper hose (2). Ensure that the new 8 mm (5/16 in) jumper hose (3) is installed between the new 16 mm (5/8 in) EVAP jumper hose (2) and floor pan. 7. Insert the non-connector end of the 16 mm (5/8 in) EVAP jumper hose (larger diameter hose) (2) into the existing EVAP vapor line (4). 8. Secure the new jumper hose assembly with a tie strap (6) through the hole in brake clip (5) on LH underbody rail. Avoid contacting the brake or fuel line with the tie wrap. 9. Cut off excess tie strap (6). 10. Route the 8 mm (5/16 in) hose (3) on top of the fuel feed line on the left (driver's) side of the fuel tank assembly. 11. Continue routing the 8 mm (5/16 in) hose (3) through the suspension on the front side of the underbody rail and behind the tank and all-wheel drive unit. Follow the path of the park brake cable. The 8 mm (5/16 in) line should be routed on top of the park brake cable routing. 12. Disconnect the existing EVAP-to-fuel tank vapor line (yellow connector) located on the rear right (passenger side) of vehicle at the fuel tank. 13. Connect the new 8 mm (5/16 in) hose (3) to the fuel tank. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Evaporative Emissions Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Evaporative Emissions Hose: > 09333A > May > 10 > Campaign - Evaporative Emission Diagnostics > Page 4145 14. Connect the existing EVAP hose to the T-fitting on the new 8 mm (5/16 in) hose. Caution Ensure that the 8 mm (5/16 in) hose (3) is tucked in over the park brake cable to prevent the hose from sagging over the fuel tank cutout area. 15. Secure the 8 mm (5/16 in) hose (3) to the parking brake line at the left (driver's) (A) and right (passenger' side) (B) fuel tank strap locations (9) with two tie straps (8) as shown in the illustration. 16. Lower the vehicle. 17. Determine if the vehicle is equipped with a four or six cylinder engine. - If the vehicle is equipped with a four cylinder engine, no further action is required. Refer to the Claim section of the bulletin. - If the vehicle is equipped with a six cylinder engine, refer to ECM Programming Service Procedure in this bulletin. ECM PROGRAMMING SERVICE PROCEDURE Do not attempt to order the calibration number from GMSPO. The calibration numbers required for this service procedure are programmed into control modules via a Multiple Diagnostic Interface (MDI) and TIS2WEB with the calibration update. Use TIS2WEB on or after 01/07/10 to obtain the calibration. If you cannot access the calibration, call the Techline Customer Support Center and it will be provided. If programming stops prior to completion, contact Engineering at 734-320-8123. Do NOT attempt to reprogram. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Evaporative Emissions Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Evaporative Emissions Hose: > 09333A > May > 10 > Campaign - Evaporative Emission Diagnostics > Page 4146 For step-by-step programming instructions, please refer to SI and the Techline Information System (TIS) terminal. 1. Verify that there is a battery charge of 12 to 16 volts. The battery must be able to maintain a charge during programming. Only use an approved Midtronic 165-PSC charger to maintain proper battery voltage during programming. 2. Reprogram the engine control module (ECM). Refer to SI and Service Programming System (SPS) documentation for programming instructions, if required. 1. Connect the MDI to the vehicle. Note Select J2534 MDI and Reprogram ECU from the Select Diagnostic Tool and Programming Process screen. 2. Select J2534 MDI and Reprogram ECU from the Select Diagnostic Tool and Programming Process screen. 3. Select ECM Engine Control Module - Programming from the Supported Controllers screen. 4. Follow the on-screen instructions. 3. Use MDI and GDS to clear all DTCs if required. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Evaporative Emissions Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 4147 Evaporative Emissions Hose: Service and Repair Evaporative Emission Line Replacement - Chassis to Canister Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Positive Crankcase Ventilation > PCV Valve Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Positive Crankcase Ventilation Tube Replacement Front PCV Valve Hose: Service and Repair Positive Crankcase Ventilation Tube Replacement - Front Positive Crankcase Ventilation Tube Replacement - Front Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Positive Crankcase Ventilation > PCV Valve Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Positive Crankcase Ventilation Tube Replacement Front > Page 4153 PCV Valve Hose: Service and Repair Positive Crankcase Ventilation Tube Replacement - Rear Positive Crankcase Ventilation Tube Replacement - Rear Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure > System Information > Specifications Fuel Pressure: Specifications Fuel Pressure (Ignition ON, engine OFF) ....................................................................................................................................... 276-448 kPa (40-65 psi). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure > System Information > Specifications > Page 4158 Fuel Pressure: Service Precautions Relieving Fuel Pressure Warning Warning Remove the fuel tank cap and relieve the fuel system pressure before servicing the fuel system in order to reduce the risk of personal injury. After you relieve the fuel system pressure, a small amount of fuel may be released when servicing the fuel lines, the fuel injection pump, or the connections. In order to reduce the risk of personal injury, cover the fuel system components with a shop towel before disconnection. This will catch any fuel that may leak out. Place the towel in an approved container when the disconnection is complete. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure > System Information > System Diagnosis > Fuel Pressure Gauge Installation and Removal Fuel Pressure: Testing and Inspection Fuel Pressure Gauge Installation and Removal Fuel Pressure Gauge Installation and Removal Special Tools CH-48027-100 Digital Pressure Gauge Installation Procedure Warning: Refer to Gasoline/Gasoline Vapors Warning (See: Fuel/Service Precautions). Warning Remove the fuel tank cap and relieve the fuel system pressure before servicing the fuel system in order to reduce the risk of personal injury. After you relieve the fuel system pressure, a small amount of fuel may be released when servicing the fuel lines, the fuel injection pump, or the connections. In order to reduce the risk of personal injury, cover the fuel system components with a shop towel before disconnection. This will catch any fuel that may leak out. Place the towel in an approved container when the disconnection is complete. 1. Relieve the fuel system pressure. Refer to Fuel Pressure Relief (See: Fuel Filter/Fuel Pressure Release/Service and Repair). 2. Connect the CH-48027-1 (1) to the CH-48027-2 (2). 3. Remove the shop towel from around the fuel rail service port, and place in an approved gasoline container. 4. Perform any tests and/or diagnostics as needed. For the proper usage of the CH-48027-100, refer to the manufacture's directions. Removal Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure > System Information > System Diagnosis > Fuel Pressure Gauge Installation and Removal > Page 4161 Warning Wrap a shop towel around the fuel pressure connection in order to reduce the risk of fire and personal injury. The towel will absorb any fuel leakage that occurs during the connection of the fuel pressure gauge. Place the towel in an approved container when the connection of the fuel pressure gauge is complete. 1. Relieve the fuel system pressure, if required. Perform the following steps: 1. Wrap a shop towel around the fuel rail service port. 2. Place the hose on the CH-48027-2 (2) into an approved gasoline container. 3. Open the valve on the CH-48027-2 (2) in order to bleed any fuel from the fuel rail. 4. Close the valve on the CH-48027-2 (2). 5. Remove the hose on the CH-48027-2 (2) from the approved gasoline container. 6. Remove the shop towel from around the fuel rail service port, and place in an approved gasoline container. Caution: Clean all of the following areas before performing any disconnections in order to avoid possible contamination in the system: * The fuel pipe connections * The hose connections * The areas surrounding the connections 2. Disconnect the CH-48027-1 (1) from the CH-48027-2 (2). 3. Disconnect the CH-48027-2 (2) from the CH-48027-3 (3). 4. Disconnect the CH-48027-3 (3) from the fuel rail service port. 5. Install the fuel rail service port cap. 6. Install the engine cover, if required. 7. Tighten the fuel fill cap. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure > System Information > System Diagnosis > Fuel Pressure Gauge Installation and Removal > Page 4162 Fuel Pressure: Testing and Inspection Fuel System Diagnosis Fuel System Diagnosis Diagnostic Instructions * Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle (See: Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle) prior to using this diagnostic procedure. * Review Strategy Based Diagnosis (See: Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Strategy Based Diagnosis) for an overview of the diagnostic approach. * Diagnostic Procedure Instructions (See: Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Diagnostic Procedure Instructions) provides an overview of each diagnostic category. Circuit/System Description The engine control module (ECM) supplies voltage to the fuel pump control module when the ECM detects that the ignition is ON. The voltage from the ECM to the fuel pump control module remains active for 2 s, unless the engine is in Crank or Run. While this voltage is being received, the fuel pump control module closes the ground switch of the fuel pump and also supplies a varying voltage to the fuel tank module in order to maintain the desired fuel rail pressure. The fuel system is an electronic returnless on-demand design. A returnless fuel system reduces the internal temperature of the fuel tank by not returning hot fuel from the engine to the fuel tank. Reducing the internal temperature of the fuel tank results in lower evaporative emissions. An electric turbine style fuel pump attaches to the primary fuel pump module inside the fuel tank. The fuel pump supplies fuel through the fuel feed pipe to the high pressure fuel pump. The high pressure fuel pump supplies fuel to a variable-pressure fuel rail. Fuel enters the combustion chamber through precision multi-hole fuel injectors. The high pressure fuel pump, fuel rail pressure, fuel injection timing, and injection duration are controlled by the engine control module (ECM). The primary fuel tank module also contains a primary jet pump and a secondary jet pump. Fuel pump flow loss, caused by vapor expulsion in the pump inlet chamber, is diverted to the primary jet pump and the secondary jet pump through a restrictive orifice located on the pump cover. The primary jet pump fills the reservoir of the primary fuel tank module. The secondary jet pump creates a venturi action which causes the fuel to be drawn from the secondary side of the fuel tank, through the fuel transfer pipe, to the primary side of the fuel tank. Reference Information Description and Operation Fuel System Description (LF1) (See: Description and Operation/Fuel System Description) Electrical Information Reference * Circuit Testing (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Circuit Testing) * Connector Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Connector Repairs) * Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections) * Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Wiring Repairs) Scan Tool Reference Control Module References (See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning) for scan tool information Special Tools * CH 48027 - Digital Pressure Gauge * J 37287 - Fuel Line Shut-off Adapter Circuit/System Verification Note: * Repair all fuel system related DTCs before performing this diagnostic. * Inspect the fuel system for damage or external leaks before proceeding. * Verify that adequate fuel is in the fuel tank before proceeding. * The Fuel Pump Enable may need to be commanded ON a few times in order to obtain the highest possible fuel pressure. * Before proceeding with this test review the User Manual CH 48027-5 for Safety Information and Instructions. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure > System Information > System Diagnosis > Fuel Pressure Gauge Installation and Removal > Page 4163 1. Ignition OFF, all accessories OFF, install a CH 48027 - Gauge. Refer to Fuel Pressure Gauge Installation and Removal (See: Fuel Pressure Gauge Installation and Removal). Note: High fuel pressure readings may result due to hot soak fuel boiling. With the engine OFF, the fuel pressure may increase to the setting of the pressure relief regulator valve, approximately 580 kPa (84 psi). 2. Ignition ON, engine OFF, command the Fuel Pump Enable ON with a scan tool. Verify the fuel pressure is between 276-448 kPa (40-65 psi) and does not decrease more than 34 kPa (5 psi) in 1 min. 3. Engine idling at normal operating temperature, verify the scan tool Fuel Pump Control Module Fuel Pressure Sensor parameter is between 276-324 kPa (40-47 psi). Circuit/System Testing Note: * The Fuel Pump Enable may need to be commanded ON a few times in order to obtain the highest possible fuel pressure. * DO NOT start the engine. * High fuel pressure readings may result due to hot soak fuel boiling. With the engine OFF, the fuel pressure may increase to the setting of the pressure relief regulator valve, approximately 580 kPa (84 psi). 1. Ignition ON, engine OFF, command the Fuel Pump Enable ON with a scan tool and observe the fuel pressure gauge while the fuel pump is operating. Verify the fuel pressure is between 276-448 kPa (40-65 psi). ‹› If the fuel pressure is less than the specified range, test, inspect, and repair the items listed below. If all items test normal, replace the primary fuel tank module. * Restricted fuel feed pipe * Inspect the harness connectors and the ground circuits of the fuel pump for poor connections. 2. Verify that the fuel pressure does not decrease more than 34 kPa (5 psi) in 1 min. ‹› If the fuel pressure decreases more than the specified value, perform the following procedure: 1. Ignition OFF, relieve the fuel pressure. Refer to Fuel Pressure Relief (See: Fuel Filter/Fuel Pressure Release/Service and Repair). 2. Install the J 37287 - Adapter between the chassis fuel feed hose and the engine compartment fuel feed pipe. 3. Open the valve on the J 37287 - Adapter. 4. Ignition ON, command the Fuel Pump Enable ON with a scan tool and bleed the air from the CH 48027 - Gauge. 5. Command the Fuel Pump Enable ON and then OFF with a scan tool. 6. Close the valve on the J 37287 - Adapter. 7. Monitor the fuel pressure for 1 min. ‹› If the fuel pressure does not decrease more than 34 kPa (5 psi) within the specified time, replace the primary fuel tank module. 3. Relieve the fuel pressure to 69 kPa (10 psi). Verify that the fuel pressure does not decrease more than 14 kPa (2 psi) in 5 min. ‹› If the fuel pressure decreases more than the specified value, replace the primary fuel tank module. 4. Operate the vehicle within the conditions of the customer's concern while monitoring the fuel pressure with the CH 48027 - Gauge. The fuel pressure should not drop off during acceleration, cruise or hard cornering. ‹› If the fuel pressure drops off, test, inspect, and repair the items listed below. If all items test normal, replace the primary fuel tank module. * Restricted fuel feed pipe * Inspect the harness connectors and the ground circuits of the fuel pump for poor connections 5. If the fuel system tests normal, refer to Symptoms - Engine Controls (See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures/Symptoms - Engine Controls). Repair Instructions Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification (See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures/Verification Tests and Procedures) after completing the diagnostic procedure. * Fuel Feed Pipe Replacement (LF1) (See: Fuel Supply Line/Service and Repair/Fuel Feed Pipe Replacement) * Fuel Tank Fuel Pump Module Replacement (See: Fuel Pump/Service and Repair) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Release > System Information > Service and Repair Fuel Pressure Release: Service and Repair Fuel Pressure Relief Warning Fuel that flows out at high pressure can cause serious injury to the skin and eyes. ALWAYS depressurize the fuel system before removing components that are under high fuel pressure. Note: If a scan tool is not available, WAIT at LEAST 2 hours after the engine has been run, before removing the high pressure fuel line. 1. Install a scan tool to the vehicle and command the fuel pump relay OFF, allowing the low pressure fuel pump to shut off. 2. Start the vehicle and allow the engine to idle until the engine stops. The engine will stop in approximately 20-30 seconds. 3. Turn the ignition OFF. 4. Using the scan tool, verify that there is little to no fuel pressure, if there still is fuel pressure repeat step 2. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Idle Speed > System Information > Specifications Idle Speed: Specifications Information not supplied by the manufacturer. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Idle Speed > System Information > Specifications > Page 4170 Idle Speed: Testing and Inspection Throttle/Idle Learn (LF1, LFW) Description The engine control module (ECM) learns the airflow through the throttle body to ensure the correct idle. The learned airflow values are stored within the ECM. These values are learned to adjust for production variation and will continuously learn during the life of the vehicle to compensate for reduced airflow due to throttle body coking. Anytime the throttle body airflow rate changes, for example due to cleaning or replacing, the values must be relearned. An engine that had a heavily coked throttle body that has been cleaned or replaced may take several drive cycles to learn out the coking. To accelerate the process, the scan tool has the ability to reset all learned values back to zero. A new ECM will also have values set to zero. The idle may be unstable or a DTC may set if the learned values do not match the actual airflow. Conditions for Running the Throttle Learn Procedure Reset Procedure * DTCs P0068, P0101, P0102, P0103, P0106, P0107, P0108, P0116, P0117, P0118, P0120, P0122, P0123, P0128, P0171, P0172, P0174, P0175, P0201, P0202, P0203, P0204, P0205, P0206, P0220, P0222, P0223, P0300, P0351, P0352, P0353, P0496, P0601, P0604, P0606, P060D, P0641, P0651, P1516, P2101, P2119, P2120, P2122, P2123, P2125, P2127, P2128, P2135, P2138, or P2176 are not set. * Ignition ON, engine OFF. * The vehicle speed sensor (VSS) is 0 km/h (0 mph). Learn Procedure * DTCs P0068, P0101, P0102, P0103, P0106, P0107, P0108, P0116, P0117, P0118, P0120, P0122, P0123, P0128, P0171, P0172, P0174, P0175, P0201, P0202, P0203, P0204, P0205, P0206, P0220, P0222, P0223, P0300, P0351, P0352, P0353, P0496, P0601, P0604, P0606, P060D, P0641, P0651, P1516, P2101, P2119, P2120, P2122, P2123, P2125, P2127, P2128, P2135, P2138, or P2176 are not set. * The engine speed is between 450-4,000 RPM. * The manifold absolute pressure (MAP) is greater than 5 kPa. * The mass air flow (MAF) is greater than 2 g/s. * The ignition voltage is greater than 10 volts. Throttle Learn Reset Procedure (Performed after the throttle body is cleaned or replaced) 1. Ignition ON, engine OFF, perform the Idle Learn Reset in Module Setup with a scan tool. 2. Start the engine and monitor the TB Idle Airflow Compensation parameter. The TB Idle Airflow Compensation value should equal 0 percent and the engine should be idling at a normal idle speed. 3. Clear the DTCs and return to the diagnostic that referred you here. Learn Procedure (Performed after the ECM is flashed or replaced) Note: Do NOT perform this procedure if DTCs are set. Refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle (See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Descriptions/Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle). 1. Start and idle the engine for 3 minutes. 2. With a scan tool, monitor the Desired Idle Speed and the actual Engine Speed. 3. The ECM will start to learn the new idle cells and Desired Idle Speed should start to decrease. 4. Ignition OFF for 60 seconds. 5. Start and idle the engine for 3 minutes. 6. After the 3 minute run time the engine should be idling normal. Note: During the drive cycle the check engine light may come on with idle speed DTCs. If idle speed codes are set, clear codes so the ECM can continue to learn. ‹› If the engine idle speed has not been learned the vehicle will need to be driven at speeds above 70 km/h (44 mph) with several decelerations and extended idles. 7. After the drive cycle, the engine should be idling normally. ‹› If the engine idle speed has not been learned, turn OFF the ignition for 60 seconds and repeat step 6. 8. Once the engine speed has returned to normal, clear DTCs and return to the diagnostic that referred you here. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Locations Instrument Panel/Center Console Component Views Lower Left of the Instrument Panel Components 1 - B80 Park Brake Switch 2 - T3 Audio Amplifier 3 - K9 Body Control Module 4 - K73 Telematics Communication Interface Control Module (UE1) 5 - B107 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor 6 T4S Wireless Communication Antenna - Bluetooth (UE1 with UPF) 7 - B22 Brake Pedal Position Sensor 8 - X84 Data Link Connector Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4174 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Diagrams B107 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4175 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Service and Repair Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Cleaner Fresh Air Duct/Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair Air Cleaner Fresh Air Duct/Hose: Service and Repair Air Cleaner Outlet Duct Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Filter Element > Component Information > Service and Repair Air Filter Element: Service and Repair Air Cleaner Element Replacement (LE5) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Diagrams B75B Mass Air Flow/Intake Air Temperature Sensor Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4186 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Service and Repair Mass Airflow Sensor with Intake Air Temperature Sensor Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Fuel - GM's Position on Use of E 15 in 2007 Newer M.Y. Fuel: Technical Service Bulletins Fuel - GM's Position on Use of E 15 in 2007 Newer M.Y. INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 10-06-04-015 Date: December 08, 2010 Subject: General Motors' Position Regarding Use of E15 in Model Year 2007 and Newer Vehicles Models: 2007-2011 GM Passenger Cars and Trucks General Motors' position regarding the Environmental Protection Agency announcement allowing the use of E 15 in 2007 and newer vehicles: - General Motors' remains focused on securing a safe and positive driving experience for our customers. GM believes that the waiver decision by the EPA regarding E 15 could lead to confusion for consumers as to what fuel their vehicle should use. In response, we will continue to encourage our customers to refer to their vehicle Owner Manual for proper fuel designation. The vehicle Owner Manual specifies that fuels containing more than 10 percent ethanol should not be used in GM vehicles that do not have a flex fuel designation. - GM has the largest fleet of flex fuel vehicles on the road today (over 4 million in the U.S.) and these vehicles can safely use ethanol blends of up to 85 percent ethanol. So blends of E 15 (15 percent ethanol), as in the partial waiver announced, are appropriate for these vehicles. However, ethanol blends greater than E 10 should not be used in GM vehicles that do not have a flex fuel designation as they are not designed and certified to run on gasoline consisting of more than 10 percent ethanol-blend volume to avoid any unintended consequences, as per: their Owner Manual. - We believe biofuels, especially E 85 ethanol, are an effective near-term solution to reduce petroleum dependence and the carbon footprint of driving. As the global leader in producing vehicles designed to handle ethanol blends from E 0 to E 85, GM offers 19 flexible-fuel vehicles for the 2011 model year. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Fuel - GM's Position on Use of E 15 in 2007 Newer M.Y. > Page 4191 Fuel: Technical Service Bulletins Fuel System - Clicking/Ticking Noises On Cold Start Up INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 07-06-04-025F Date: December 13, 2010 Subject: Information on Clicking/Ticking Sound/Noise Heard During Cold Start, Sound/Noise Decreases But Continues as Engine Warms - Normal Operation of High Pressure Fuel Pump and Injectors Models: 2009-2011 Buick Enclave 2010-2011 Buick LaCrosse 2008-2011 Cadillac CTS, STS 2010-2011 Cadillac SRX 2009-2011 Chevrolet Traverse 2010-2011 Chevrolet Camaro, Equinox 2009-2011 GMC Acadia 2010-2011 GMC Terrain 2009-2010 Saturn OUTLOOK Equipped with 3.0L or 3.6L VVT Direct Injection V6 Engine (VINs G, D, V, Y - RPOs LF1, LLT) Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2011 model year. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 07-06-04-025E (Section 06 - Engine/Propulsion System). The 3.0L and 3.6L SIDI engines (RPOs LF1 and LLT) use a direct injection fuel system that operates at very high fuel pressures. A direct injection fuel system produces a rapid clicking and ticking sound that can be heard from the engine compartment. The sound is more evident when outside around the vehicle or when the hood is open. The sound is more noticeable during idle and is more frequent during a cold start, but lessens once the engine is warm. The rapid ticking noise on cold start up is the fuel pump (located on the rear of the left cylinder head) building up high fuel pressure. When the engine warm-up is completed, the high pressure fuel pump will continue to tick at a lower rate of approximately one tick per second during idle. The clicking sound is the fuel injectors pulsing on and off under higher fuel pressures. These sounds are the results of a normal direct injection fuel system operating properly. DO NOT attempt to repair or replace any parts for this kind of clicking or ticking concern. The clicking or ticking sound is not indicative of any concerns with the engine or the vehicle. You may wish to give the customer a copy of this bulletin. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Fuel - GM's Position on Use of E 15 in 2007 Newer M.Y. > Page 4192 Fuel: Technical Service Bulletins Fuel System - TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline (Canada) INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 05-06-04-022G Date: October 27, 2010 Subject: TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline Information and Available Brands (Deposits, Fuel Economy, No Start, Power, Performance, Stall Concerns) - Canada ONLY Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (Canada Only) Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the model years and include an additional gasoline brand as a TOP TIER source. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 05-06-04-022F (Section 06 - Engine/Propulsion System). In the U.S., refer to the latest version of Corporate Bulletin Number 04-06-04-047I. A new class of fuel called TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is appearing at retail stations of some fuel marketers. This gasoline meets detergency standards developed by six automotive companies. All vehicles will benefit from using TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline over gasoline containing the "Lowest Additive Concentration" recommended by the Canadian General Standards Board (CGSB). Those vehicles that have experienced deposit related concerns may especially benefit from use of TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline. Intake valve: 16,093 km (10,000 mi) with TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline Intake valve: 16,093 km (10,000 mi) with Minimum Additive recommended by the CGSB Top Tier Fuel Availability Chevron was the first to offer TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline in Canada. Shell became the first national gasoline retailer to offer TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline across Canada. Petro-Canada began offering TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline nationally as of October 1, 2006. Sunoco began offering TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline in March of 2007. Esso began offering TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline in May of 2010. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Fuel - GM's Position on Use of E 15 in 2007 Newer M.Y. > Page 4193 Gasoline Brands That Currently Meet TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline Standards The following gasoline brands meet the TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline Standards in all octane grades : Chevron Canada (markets in British Columbia and western Alberta) - Shell Canada (nationally) - Petro-Canada (nationally) - Sunoco-Canada (Ontario) - Esso-Canada (nationally) What is TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline? TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is a new class of gasoline with enhanced detergency and no metallic additives. It meets new, voluntary deposit control standards developed by six automotive companies that exceed the detergent recommendations of Canadian standards and does not contain metallic additives, which can damage vehicle emission control components. Where Can TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline Be Purchased? The TOP TIER program began in the U.S. and Canada on May 3, 2004. Some fuel marketers have already joined and introduced TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline. This is a voluntary program and not all fuel marketers will offer this product. Once fuel marketers make public announcements, they will appear on a list of brands that meet the TOP TIER standards. Who developed TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline standards? TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline standards were developed by six automotive companies: BMW, General Motors, Honda, Toyota, Volkswagen and Audi. Why was TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline developed? TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline was developed to increase the level of detergent additive in gasoline. In the U.S., government regulations require that all gasoline sold in the U.S. contain a detergent additive. However, the requirement is minimal and in many cases, is not sufficient to keep engines clean. In Canada, gasoline standards recommend adherence to U.S. detergency requirements but do not require it. In fact, many brands of gasoline in Canada do not contain any detergent additive. In order to meet TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline standards, a higher level of detergent is needed than what is required or recommended, and no metallic additives are allowed. Also, TOP TIER was developed to give fuel marketers the opportunity to differentiate their product. Why did the six automotive companies join together to develop TOP TIER? All six corporations recognized the benefits to both the vehicle and the consumer. Also, joining together emphasized that low detergency and the intentional addition of metallic additives is an issue of concern to several automotive companies. What are the benefits of TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline? TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline will help keep engines cleaner than gasoline containing the "Lowest Additive Concentration" recommended by Canadian standards. Clean engines help provide optimal fuel economy and engine performance, and also provide reduced emissions. Also, the use of TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline will help reduce deposit related concerns. Who should use TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline? All vehicles will benefit from using TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline over gasoline containing the "Lowest Additive Concentration" recommended by Canadian standards. Those vehicles that have experienced deposit related concerns may especially benefit from use of TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline. More information on TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline can be found at this website, http://www.toptiergas.com/. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Fuel - GM's Position on Use of E 15 in 2007 Newer M.Y. > Page 4194 Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Fuel - GM's Position on Use of E 15 in 2007 Newer M.Y. > Page 4195 Fuel: Technical Service Bulletins Fuel System - 'TOP TIER' Detergent Gasoline Information INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 04-06-04-047I Date: August 17, 2009 Subject: TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline (Deposits, Fuel Economy, No Start, Power, Performance, Stall Concerns) - U.S. Only Models: 2010 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (including Saturn) (U.S. Only) 2003-2010 HUMMER H2 (U.S. Only) 2006-2010 HUMMER H3 (U.S. Only) 2005-2009 Saab 9-7X (U.S. Only) Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add model years and additional sources to the Top Tier Fuel Retailers list. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 04-06-04-047H (Section 06 Engine/Propulsion System). In Canada, refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 05-06-04-022F. A new class of fuel called TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is appearing at retail stations of some fuel marketers. This gasoline meets detergency standards developed by six automotive companies. All vehicles will benefit from using TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline over gasoline containing the "Lowest Additive Concentration" set by the EPA. Those vehicles that have experienced deposit related concerns may especially benefit from the use of TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline. Intake valve: - 10,000 miles with TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline Intake valve: - 10,000 miles with Legal Minimum additive Gasoline Brands That Currently Meet TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline Standards As of August 1, 2009, all grades of the following gasoline brands meet the TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline Standards: - Chevron - Chevron-Canada - QuikTrip - Conoco Phillips 66 - 76 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Fuel - GM's Position on Use of E 15 in 2007 Newer M.Y. > Page 4196 - Shell - Shell-Canada - Entec Stations located in the greater Montgomery, Alabama area. - MFA Oil Company located throughout Missouri. - Kwik Trip, Inc. in Minnesota and Wisconsin and Kwik Star convenience stores in Iowa. The Somerset Refinery, Inc. at Somerset Oil stations in Kentucky. Aloha Petroleum - Tri-Par Oil Company - Turkey Hill Minit Markets - Texaco - Petro-Canada - Sunoco-Canada - Road Ranger located in Illinois, Indiana, Iowa, Kentucky, Missouri, Ohio and Wisconsin What is TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline? TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is a new class of gasoline with enhanced detergency. It meets new, voluntary deposit control standards developed by six automotive companies that exceed the detergent requirements imposed by the EPA. Where Can TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline Be Purchased? The TOP TIER program began on May 3, 2004 and many fuel marketers have joined the program and have introduced TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline. This is a voluntary program and not all fuel marketers will offer this product. Once fuel marketers make public announcements, they will appear on a list of brands that meet the TOP TIER standards. Where Can I find the Latest Information on TOP TIER Fuel and Retailers? On the web, please visit www.toptiergas.com for additional information and updated retailer lists. Who developed TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline standards? TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline standards were developed by six automotive companies: Audi, BMW, General Motors, Honda, Toyota and Volkswagen. Why was TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline developed? TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline was developed to increase the level of detergent additive in gasoline. The EPA requires that all gasoline sold in the U.S. contain a detergent additive. However, the requirement is minimal and in many cases, is not sufficient to keep engines clean. In order to meet TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline standards, a higher level of detergent is needed than what is required by the EPA. Also, TOP TIER was developed to give fuel marketers the opportunity to differentiate their product. Why did the six automotive companies join together to develop TOP TIER? All six corporations recognized the benefits to both the vehicle and the consumer. Also, joining together emphasized that low detergency is an issue of concern to several automotive companies. What are the benefits of TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline? TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline will help keep engines cleaner than gasoline containing the "Lowest Additive Concentration" set by the EPA. Clean engines help provide optimal fuel economy and performance and reduced emissions. Also, use of TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline will help reduce deposit related concerns. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 4197 Fuel: Service Precautions Gasoline/Gasoline Vapors Warning Warning Gasoline or gasoline vapors are highly flammable. A fire could occur if an ignition source is present. Never drain or store gasoline or diesel fuel in an open container, due to the possibility of fire or explosion. Have a dry chemical (Class B) fire extinguisher nearby. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Alcohol/Contaminants-in-Fuel Diagnosis Fuel: Testing and Inspection Alcohol/Contaminants-in-Fuel Diagnosis Alcohol/Contaminants-in-Fuel Diagnosis Diagnostic Instructions * Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle (See: Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle) prior to using this diagnostic procedure. * Review Strategy Based Diagnosis (See: Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Strategy Based Diagnosis) for an overview of the diagnostic approach. * Diagnostic Procedure Instructions (See: Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Diagnostic Procedure Instructions )provides an overview of each diagnostic category. Test Description Water contamination in the fuel system may cause driveability conditions such as hesitation, stalling, no start, or misfires in one or more cylinders. Water may collect near a single fuel injector at the lowest point in the fuel injection system and cause a misfire in that cylinder. If the fuel system is contaminated with water, inspect the fuel system components for rust or deterioration. Ethanol concentrations of greater than 10 percent can cause driveability conditions and fuel system deterioration. Fuel with more than 10 percent ethanol could result in driveability conditions such as hesitation, lack of power, stalling, or no start. Excessive concentrations of ethanol used in vehicles not designed for it may cause fuel system corrosion, deterioration of rubber components, and fuel filter restriction. Reference Information Special Tools J 44175 Fuel Composition Tester System Verification The fuel sample should be drawn from the bottom of the tank so that any water present in the tank will be detected. The sample should be bright and clear. If the sample appears cloudy, or contaminated with water, as indicated by a water layer at the bottom of the sample, perform the Particulate Contaminants in Fuel Testing Procedure. If alcohol contamination is suspected, perform the Alcohol in Fuel Testing procedure. Alcohol in Fuel Testing with Special Tool 1. Test the fuel composition using J 44175 and Instruction Manual. 2. If water appears in the fuel sample, clean the fuel system. 3. Subtract 50 from the reading on the DMM in order to obtain the percentage of alcohol in the fuel sample. 4. If the fuel sample contains more than 15 percent ethanol, add fresh, regular gasoline to the vehicle's fuel tank. 5. Test the fuel composition. 6. If testing shows the ethanol percentage is still more than 15 percent, replace the fuel in the vehicle. Alcohol in Fuel Testing without Special Tool 1. Using a 100 ml (3.38 oz) specified cylinder with 1 ml (0.034 oz) graduation marks, fill the cylinder with fuel to the 90 ml (3.04 oz) mark. 2. Add 10 ml (0.34 oz) of water in order to bring the total fluid volume to 100 ml (3.38 oz) and install a stopper. 3. Shake the cylinder vigorously for 10-15 seconds. 4. Carefully loosen the stopper in order to release the pressure. 5. Re-install the stopper and shake the cylinder vigorously again for 10-15 seconds. 6. Put the cylinder on a level surface for approximately 5 minutes in order to allow adequate liquid separation. If alcohol is present in the fuel, the volume of the lower layer, which would now contain both alcohol and water, will be more than 10 ml (0.34 oz). For example, if the volume of the lower layer is increased to 15 ml (0.51 oz), this indicates at least 5 percent alcohol in the fuel. The actual amount of alcohol may be somewhat more because this procedure does not extract all of the alcohol from the fuel. Particulate Contaminants in Fuel Testing Procedure 1. Using an approved fuel container, draw approximately 0.5 liter (0.53 qt) of fuel. 2. Place the container on a level surface for approximately 5 minutes in order to allow settling of the particulate contamination. Particulate contamination will show up in various shapes and colors. Sand will typically be identified by a white or light brown crystals. Rubber will appear as black and irregular particles. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Alcohol/Contaminants-in-Fuel Diagnosis > Page 4200 3. Observe the fuel sample. If any physical contaminants or water are present, clean the fuel system. Repair Instructions Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification (See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures/Verification Tests and Procedures) after completing the diagnostic procedure. * Fuel System Cleaning (See: Service and Repair) * Fuel Tank Draining (See: Fuel Tank/Service and Repair/Procedures) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Alcohol/Contaminants-in-Fuel Diagnosis > Page 4201 Fuel: Testing and Inspection Fuel Composition Diagnosis Fuel Composition Diagnosis Diagnostic Instructions * Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle (See: Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle) prior to using this diagnostic procedure. * Review Strategy Based Diagnosis (See: Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Strategy Based Diagnosis) for an overview of the diagnostic approach. * Diagnostic Procedure Instructions (See: Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Diagnostic Procedure Instructions) provides an overview of each diagnostic category. Circuit/System Description When an E85 compatible vehicle is built, an engine control module (ECM) or powertrain control module (PCM) replaced, or when the learned alcohol content has been reset with a scan tool, the fuel system will need to contain ASTM gasoline with 15 % or less ethanol content. If the fuel in the fuel system needs to be drained and replaced with ASTM gasoline, the engine will need to run at operating temperature and consume at least 1 liter (0.3 gallon) of fuel before the system will recognize the correct alcohol content. Either ASTM gasoline or ASTM E85 fuel can then be used. In order that the ECM/PCM recognizes a proper next fuel fill, the amount must be 11 liters (3 gallons) or more, and the ethanol content must be between 0-85 %. Reference Information Scan Tool Reference Control Module References (See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning)for scan tool information Special Tools * J 44175 - Fuel Composition Tester * J 44175-A - Fuel Composition Tester Circuit/System Verification 1. Observe the Fuel Composition Learn parameter using the scan tool. The Fuel Composition Learn parameter should display Inactive. Note: * The key needs to be turned OFF for at least 30 s after the parameter displays Inactive to properly store the ethanol learned value in the ECM/PCM memory. * The vehicle may need to be driven more than 11 km (7 mi) with the engine at operating temperature. ‹› If the Fuel Composition Learn parameter displays Active, drive the vehicle until the Fuel Composition Learn parameter displays Inactive. 2. Record the ECM/PCM estimated value of the ethanol content using a scan tool. 3. Record the actual measured percentage of ethanol content using the J 44175 - Tester or J 44175-A - Tester. The ECM/PCM estimated value should be within 15 % of the ethanol content measured with the J 44175 - Tester. ‹› If the ECM/PCM estimated value is not within 15 % of the ethanol content measured with the J44175 Tester continue with Circuit/System Testing. Circuit/System Testing - J44175 Ethanol Content Less Than 15 % 1. Use the scan tool to reset the Fuel Alcohol Content parameter to 3 %. 2. Use the scan tool to reset the fuel trim values. Circuit/System Testing - J44175 Ethanol Content More Than 15 % 1. Perform a complete key cycle, key ON, engine OFF, in order to ensure that the ECM/PCM recognizes a refueling event. Note: It may be necessary to partially drain the fuel tank. 2. Key OFF, add at least 11 liters (3 gallons) of non-blended gasoline to the fuel tank. 3. Use the scan tool to reset the Fuel Alcohol Content parameter to 3 %. Note: In order to ensure the non-blended gasoline has reached the fuel injectors, the vehicle may need to be driven more than 11 km (7 mi) with Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Alcohol/Contaminants-in-Fuel Diagnosis > Page 4202 the engine at operating temperature. 4. Drive the vehicle until the Fuel Composition Learn parameter displays Inactive. 5. Use the scan tool to reset the fuel trim values. Repair Instructions Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification (See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures/Verification Tests and Procedures) after completing the diagnostic procedure. * Fuel System Cleaning (See: Service and Repair) * Fuel Tank Draining (See: Fuel Tank/Service and Repair/Procedures) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Filter > Fuel Pressure Release > System Information > Service and Repair Fuel Pressure Release: Service and Repair Fuel Pressure Relief Warning Fuel that flows out at high pressure can cause serious injury to the skin and eyes. ALWAYS depressurize the fuel system before removing components that are under high fuel pressure. Note: If a scan tool is not available, WAIT at LEAST 2 hours after the engine has been run, before removing the high pressure fuel line. 1. Install a scan tool to the vehicle and command the fuel pump relay OFF, allowing the low pressure fuel pump to shut off. 2. Start the vehicle and allow the engine to idle until the engine stops. The engine will stop in approximately 20-30 seconds. 3. Turn the ignition OFF. 4. Using the scan tool, verify that there is little to no fuel pressure, if there still is fuel pressure repeat step 2. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Fuel System - Clicking/Ticking Noises On Cold Start Up Fuel Injector: Technical Service Bulletins Fuel System - Clicking/Ticking Noises On Cold Start Up INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 07-06-04-025F Date: December 13, 2010 Subject: Information on Clicking/Ticking Sound/Noise Heard During Cold Start, Sound/Noise Decreases But Continues as Engine Warms - Normal Operation of High Pressure Fuel Pump and Injectors Models: 2009-2011 Buick Enclave 2010-2011 Buick LaCrosse 2008-2011 Cadillac CTS, STS 2010-2011 Cadillac SRX 2009-2011 Chevrolet Traverse 2010-2011 Chevrolet Camaro, Equinox 2009-2011 GMC Acadia 2010-2011 GMC Terrain 2009-2010 Saturn OUTLOOK Equipped with 3.0L or 3.6L VVT Direct Injection V6 Engine (VINs G, D, V, Y - RPOs LF1, LLT) Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2011 model year. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 07-06-04-025E (Section 06 - Engine/Propulsion System). The 3.0L and 3.6L SIDI engines (RPOs LF1 and LLT) use a direct injection fuel system that operates at very high fuel pressures. A direct injection fuel system produces a rapid clicking and ticking sound that can be heard from the engine compartment. The sound is more evident when outside around the vehicle or when the hood is open. The sound is more noticeable during idle and is more frequent during a cold start, but lessens once the engine is warm. The rapid ticking noise on cold start up is the fuel pump (located on the rear of the left cylinder head) building up high fuel pressure. When the engine warm-up is completed, the high pressure fuel pump will continue to tick at a lower rate of approximately one tick per second during idle. The clicking sound is the fuel injectors pulsing on and off under higher fuel pressures. These sounds are the results of a normal direct injection fuel system operating properly. DO NOT attempt to repair or replace any parts for this kind of clicking or ticking concern. The clicking or ticking sound is not indicative of any concerns with the engine or the vehicle. You may wish to give the customer a copy of this bulletin. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Fuel System - Clicking/Ticking Noises On Cold Start Up > Page 4211 Fuel Injector: Technical Service Bulletins Fuel System - Clicking/Ticking Noises On Cold Start Up INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 07-06-04-025D Date: January 07, 2010 Subject: Information on Clicking/Ticking Sound/Noise Heard During Cold Start, Sound/Noise Decreases But Continues as Engine Warms - Normal Operation of High Pressure Fuel Pump and Injectors Models: 2009-2010 Buick Enclave 2010 Buick LaCrosse 2008-2010 Cadillac CTS, STS 2010 Cadillac SRX 2009-2010 Chevrolet Traverse 2010 Chevrolet Camaro, Equinox 2009-2010 GMC Acadia 2010 GMC Terrain 2010 Saturn OUTLOOK Equipped with 2.8L, 3.0L or 3.6L VVT Direct Injection V6 Engine (VINs 4, G, D, V - RPOs LAU, LF1, LLT) Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to include additional models and engine RPOs. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 07-06-04-025C (Section 06 - Engine/Propulsion System). The 2.8L, 3.0L and 3.6L SIDI engines (RPOs LAU, LF1 and LLT) use a direct injection fuel system that operates at very high fuel pressures. A direct injection fuel system produces a rapid clicking and ticking sound that can be heard from the engine compartment. The sound is more evident when outside around the vehicle or when the hood is open. The sound is more noticeable during idle and is more frequent during a cold start, but lessens once the engine is warm. The rapid ticking noise on cold start up is the fuel pump (located on the rear of the left cylinder head) building up high fuel pressure. When the engine warm-up is completed, the high pressure fuel pump will continue to tick at a lower rate of approximately one tick per second during idle. The clicking sound is the fuel injectors pulsing on and off under higher fuel pressures. These sounds are the results of a normal direct injection fuel system operating properly. DO NOT attempt to repair or replace any parts for this kind of clicking or ticking concern. The clicking or ticking sound is not indicative of any concerns with the engine or the vehicle. You may wish to give the customer a copy of this bulletin. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 4212 Fuel Injector: Specifications Fuel Injector Resistance ............................................................................................................................................................ 1.9-2.3 ohm at 20°C (68°F). Initial injector opening .......................................................................................................................... ......................................................................... 65 V Holding open ..................................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. 12V Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 4213 Fuel Injector: Diagrams Q17A Fuel Injector 1 (LAF) Q17A Fuel Injector 1 (LF1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 4214 Q17B Fuel Injector 2 (LAF) Q17B Fuel Injector 2 (LF1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 4215 Q17C Fuel Injector 3 (LAF) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 4216 Q17C Fuel Injector 3 (LF1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 4217 Q17D Fuel Injector 4 (LAF) Q17D Fuel Injector 4 (LF1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 4218 Q17E Fuel Injector 5 (LF1) Q17F Fuel Injector 6 (LF1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 4219 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 4220 Fuel Injector: Testing and Inspection Fuel Injector Solenoid Coil Test Diagnostic Instructions * Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle (See: Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle) prior to using this diagnostic procedure. * Review Strategy Based Diagnosis (See: Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Strategy Based Diagnosis) for an overview of the diagnostic approach. * Diagnostic Procedure Instructions (See: Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Diagnostic Procedure Instructions) provides an overview of each diagnostic category. Circuit/System Description The engine control module (ECM) supplies a separate high voltage supply circuit and a high voltage control circuit for each fuel injector. The injector high voltage supply circuit and the high voltage control circuit are both controlled by the ECM. The ECM energizes each fuel injector by grounding the control circuit. The ECM controls each fuel injector with 65 V. This is controlled by a boost capacitor in the ECM. During the 65 V boost phase, the capacitor is discharged through an injector, allowing for initial injector opening. The injector is then held open with 12 V. A fuel injector coil winding resistance that is too high or too low will affect the engine driveability. The fuel injector coil windings are affected by temperature. The resistance of the fuel injector coil windings will increase as the temperature of the fuel injector increases. Reference Information Schematic Reference Engine Controls Schematics (See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams) Electrical Information Reference * Circuit Testing (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Circuit Testing) * Connector Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Connector Repairs) * Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections) * Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Wiring Repairs) Component Testing Note: * The resistance test must be performed at the fuel injector or mis-diagnosis will occur. * The DMM and test leads must be calibrated to 0 ohm in order to prevent mis-diagnosis. 1. Test for 1.9-2.3 ohm at 20°C (68°F) between the high voltage supply circuit terminal 2 and the high voltage control circuit terminal 1 at the Q17 fuel injector. ‹› If not within the specified range, replace the Q17 fuel injector. 2. Measure the resistance between each terminal at the Q17 fuel injector and the Q17 fuel injector housing/case. The DMM should display OL ohm. ‹› If less than the specified value, replace the Q17 fuel injector. Repair Instructions Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification (See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures/Verification Tests and Procedures) after completing the diagnostic procedure. * Fuel Injection Fuel Rail Assembly Replacement - Bank 1 (LF1) (See: Fuel Rail/Service and Repair/Fuel Injection Fuel Rail Assembly Replacement - Bank 1) * Fuel Injection Fuel Rail Assembly Replacement - Bank 2 (LF1) (See: Fuel Rail/Service and Repair/Fuel Injection Fuel Rail Assembly Replacement - Bank 2) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 4221 Fuel Injector: Service and Repair Fuel Injector and Fuel Rail Replacement Special Tools EN-47909 - Fuel Injector Bore and Sleeve Cleaning Kit For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Computers and Control Systems/Tools and Equipment). Removal Procedure 1. Relieve the fuel system pressure. Refer to Fuel Pressure Relief (See: Fuel Filter/Fuel Pressure Release/Service and Repair). 2. Remove the fuel pipe shield. Refer to Fuel Pipe Shield Replacement (LF1) (See: Fuel Supply Line/Service and Repair/Fuel Pipe Shield Replacement). 3. Remove the intake manifold. Refer to Intake Manifold Replacement (See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Intake Manifold/Service and Repair/Intake Manifold Replacement). 4. Remove the fuel feed intermediate pipe. Refer to Fuel Feed Intermediate Pipe Replacement (LF1) (See: Fuel Supply Line/Service and Repair/Fuel Feed Intermediate Pipe Replacement). 5. Remove the foam insulator from the fuel rails. 6. Remove the cylinder head. Refer to Cylinder Head Replacement - Left Side (LF1) (See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Cylinder Head Assembly/Service and Repair/Cylinder Head Replacement - Left Side) or Cylinder Head Replacement - Right Side (LF1) (See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Cylinder Head Assembly/Service and Repair/Cylinder Head Replacement - Right Side) 7. Remove the bolts (1) from the bank 2 fuel rail. 8. Remove the bank 1 fuel rail and injectors (1) as an assembly. Refer to Cylinder Head Disassemble (LF1 or LFW) (See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Service and Repair/Overhaul/55. Cylinder Head Disassemble). 9. Disconnect the bank 1 fuel injector electrical connections. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 4222 10. If the bank 2 fuel rail or injectors are being serviced, remove them. Refer to Cylinder Head Disassemble (LF1 or LFW) (See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Service and Repair/Overhaul/55. Cylinder Head Disassemble). 11. Disconnect the bank 2 fuel injector and fuel pressure sensor electrical connections. Note: The direct fuel injectors must be rebuilt whenever the injector has been released from the fuel rail or cylinder head. 12. It is necessary to rebuild the fuel injectors. Refer to Fuel Rail and Injectors Cleaning and Inspection (LF1 or LFW) (See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Service and Repair/Overhaul/60. Fuel Rail and Injectors Cleaning and Inspection). Installation Procedure 1. Clean the fuel injector bores using EN-47909 - kit. 2. Ensure that the fuel injectors have been properly rebuilt and lubricated. Refer to Fuel Rail and Injectors Cleaning and Inspection (LF1 or LFW) ( See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Service and Repair/Overhaul/60. Fuel Rail and Injectors Cleaning and Inspection). 3. Connect the bank 2 fuel injector and fuel pressure sensor electrical connections. 4. Position the bank 2 fuel rail and evenly hand tighten the 2 outer fuel rail bolts to seat the injectors into the injector bores. Remove the bolts. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 4223 5. Connect the bank 1 fuel injector electrical connections. 6. Position the bank 1 fuel rail and evenly hand tighten the 2 outer fuel rail bolts to seat the injectors into the injector bores. 7. Start and hand tighten the remaining fuel rail bolts. Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener Caution). 8. Tighten the bank 1 and bank 2 fuel rail bolts. * Tighten the inner fuel rail bolts to 10 Nm (89 lb in). * Tighten the outer fuel rail bolts to 10 Nm (89 lb in). 9. Replace any wire harness tie straps cut from the fuel rails. 10. Install the cylinder head. Refer to Cylinder Head Replacement - Left Side (LF1) (See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Cylinder Head Assembly/Service and Repair/Cylinder Head Replacement - Left Side) or Cylinder Head Replacement - Right Side (LF1) (See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Cylinder Head Assembly/Service and Repair/Cylinder Head Replacement - Right Side) 11. Install the fuel feed intermediate pipe. Refer to Fuel Feed Intermediate Pipe Replacement (LF1) (See: Fuel Supply Line/Service and Repair/Fuel Feed Intermediate Pipe Replacement). 12. Inspect for fuel leaks using the following procedure: 1. Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF for 2 seconds. 2. Turn OFF the ignition, for 10 seconds. 3. Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. 4. Inspect for fuel leaks. Note: Before installing the foam insulator, remove any remaining fuel from the injector well. 13. Install the foam insulator to the fuel rails. 14. Install the intake manifold. Refer to Intake Manifold Replacement (See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Intake Manifold/Service and Repair/Intake Manifold Replacement). 15. Install the fuel pipe shield. Refer to Fuel Pipe Shield Replacement (LF1) (See: Fuel Supply Line/Service and Repair/Fuel Pipe Shield Replacement). 16. Install the low side fuel pressure service port cap. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Line Coupler > Component Information > Service and Repair > Metal Collar Quick Connect Fitting Service Fuel Line Coupler: Service and Repair Metal Collar Quick Connect Fitting Service Metal Collar Quick Connect Fitting Service Special Tools * CH-41769 - Fuel Line Disconnect Tool Set * CH-44581 - Fuel Line Disconnect Tool For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Computers and Control Systems/Tools and Equipment). Removal Procedure Warning: Refer to Gasoline/Gasoline Vapors Warning (See: Fuel/Service Precautions). 1. Relieve the fuel system pressure. Refer to Fuel Pressure Relief (See: Fuel Filter/Fuel Pressure Release/Service and Repair). 2. Remove the retainer from the quick-connect fitting. Warning Wear safety glasses when using compressed air, as flying dirt particles may cause eye injury. 3. Blow dirt out of the fitting using compressed air. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Line Coupler > Component Information > Service and Repair > Metal Collar Quick Connect Fitting Service > Page 4228 4. Depending on the fuel line size and ability to access the fitting, choose the appropriate tool: CH-41769 - fuel line disconnect tool set or CH-44581 - fuel line disconnect tool. Insert the CH-41769 - fuel line disconnect tool set or CH-44581 - fuel line disconnect tool into the female connector, then push inward to release the locking tabs. 5. Pull the connection apart. Caution: If necessary, remove rust or burrs from the fuel pipes with an emery cloth. Use a radial motion with the fuel pipe end in order to prevent damage to the O-ring sealing surface. Use a clean shop towel in order to wipe off the male tube ends. Inspect all the connections for dirt and burrs. Clean or replace the components and assemblies as required. 6. Using a clean shop towel, wipe off the male pipe end. 7. Inspect both ends of the fitting for dirt and burrs. 8. Clean or replace the components as required. Installation Procedure Warning In order to reduce the risk of fire and personal injury, before connecting fuel pipe fittings, always apply a few drops of clean engine oil to the male pipe ends. This will ensure proper reconnection and prevent a possible fuel leak. During normal operation, the O-rings located in the female connector will swell and may prevent proper reconnection if not lubricated. 1. Apply a few drops of clean engine oil to the male pipe end. 2. Push both sides of the quick-connect fitting together to cause the retaining tabs to snap into place. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Line Coupler > Component Information > Service and Repair > Metal Collar Quick Connect Fitting Service > Page 4229 3. Pull on both sides of the quick-connect fitting to make sure the connection is secure. 4. Install the retainer to the quick-connect fitting. 5. Inspect for leaks using the following procedure: 1. Turn the ignition ON, with the engine OFF for 2 seconds. 2. Turn the ignition OFF, for 10 seconds. 3. Turn the ignition ON, with the engine OFF for 2 seconds. 4. Turn the ignition OFF. 5. Inspect for leaks. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Line Coupler > Component Information > Service and Repair > Metal Collar Quick Connect Fitting Service > Page 4230 Fuel Line Coupler: Service and Repair Plastic Collar Quick Connect Fitting Service Plastic Collar Quick Connect Fitting Service Removal Procedure Warning: Refer to Gasoline/Gasoline Vapors Warning (See: Fuel/Service Precautions). Note: There are several types of Plastic Collar Fuel and Evaporative Emission Quick Connect Fittings used on this vehicle. * Bartholomew (1) * Q Release (2) * Squeeze to Release (3) * Sliding Retainer (4) * Global Connect (5) * TI Loc (6) * Safe Lock (7) The following instructions apply to all of these types of Plastic Collar Quick Connect Fittings except where indicated. 1. Relieve the fuel system pressure before servicing any fuel system connection. Refer to the Fuel Pressure Relief (See: Fuel Filter/Fuel Pressure Release/Service and Repair). Warning: Refer to Safety Glasses and Compressed Air Warning (See: Service Precautions/Technician Safety Information/Safety Glasses and Compressed Air Warning). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Line Coupler > Component Information > Service and Repair > Metal Collar Quick Connect Fitting Service > Page 4231 2. Using compressed air, blow any dirt out of the quick-connect fitting. 3. This step applies to Bartholomew style connectors ONLY. Squeeze the plastic quick-connect fitting release tabs. 4. This step applies to Q Release style connectors ONLY. Release the fitting by Pushing the tab toward the other side of the slot in the fitting. 5. This step applies to Squeeze to Release style connectors ONLY. Squeeze where indicated by arrows on both sides of the plastic ring surrounding Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Line Coupler > Component Information > Service and Repair > Metal Collar Quick Connect Fitting Service > Page 4232 the quick-connect fitting. 6. This step applies to Squeeze to Release style connectors ONLY. Push in the male side slightly in order to slide the retainer away from the retainers, squeeze where indicated by arrows on both sides of the plastic ring surrounding the quick-connect fitting. 7. This step applies to Sliding Retainer style connectors ONLY. Release the fitting by pressing on one side of the release tab causing it to push in slightly. If the tab doesn't move try pressing the tab in from the opposite side. The tab will only move in one direction. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Line Coupler > Component Information > Service and Repair > Metal Collar Quick Connect Fitting Service > Page 4233 8. This step applies to the Global Connector style only. Push the connector toward the tube in order to release the pressure. Press and hold down the release mechanism, and pull the connector straight out. 9. This step applies to the TI Loc style only. Push the connector toward the tube in order to release the pressure. Release the redundant latch (1) with two fingers or a flat bladed tool. Then press and hold down the bottom release mechanism (2) and pull the connector straight out. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Line Coupler > Component Information > Service and Repair > Metal Collar Quick Connect Fitting Service > Page 4234 10. This step applies to the Safe Lock style only. Push the connector toward the tube in order to release the pressure. Release the second latch (1) with two fingers. Then press and hold down the bottom release mechanism (2) and pull the connector straight out. Warning: Refer to Relieving Fuel Pressure Warning (See: Fuel Pressure/Service Precautions). 11. Using a clean shop towel, wipe off the male pipe end. 12. Inspect both ends of the fitting for dirt and burrs. 13. Clean or replace components as necessary. Installation Procedure Warning: Refer to Fuel Pipe Fitting Warning (See: Service Precautions). 1. Apply a few drops of clean engine oil to the male pipe end. 2. Push both sides of the quick-connect fitting together in order to cause the retaining feature to snap into place. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Line Coupler > Component Information > Service and Repair > Metal Collar Quick Connect Fitting Service > Page 4235 3. Pull on both sides of the quick-connect fitting to make sure the connection is secure. 4. Insert the tube in the connector until the retainer snaps in place. 5. Push down on the redundant latch (1) until it is fully engaged and snapped into position. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Line Coupler > Component Information > Service and Repair > Metal Collar Quick Connect Fitting Service > Page 4236 6. Insert the tube in the connector until the retainer snaps in place. 7. Push down on the second latch (1) in order to secure the connection. 8. Inspect for leaks using the following procedure: 1. Turn the ignition ON, with the engine OFF for 2 seconds. 2. Turn the ignition OFF, for 10 seconds. 3. Turn the ignition ON, with the engine OFF for 2 seconds. 4. Turn the ignition OFF. 5. Inspect for leaks. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations > Disassembled Views Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch: Locations Disassembled Views Disassembled Views Fuel Rail (LF1) 1 - Fuel Rail Bolt 2 - Fuel Pressure Sensor 3 - Fuel Injector Retainer 4 - Fuel Injector O-ring Seal 5 - Fuel Injector Spacer 6 - Fuel Injector 7 - Fuel Injector Teflon Seal 8 - Fuel Rail Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations > Disassembled Views > Page 4241 Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch: Locations Powertrain Component Views Powertrain Component Views Front Engine Components (LAF 2 of 2) 1 - B47B Fuel Rail Pressure Sensor 2 - B74 Manifold Absolute Pressure Sensor 3 - Q17D Fuel Injector 4 4 - Q17C Fuel Injector 3 5 - B1 A/C Refrigerant Pressure Sensor 6 - Q17B Fuel Injector 2 7 - Q17A Fuel Injector 1 Top of the Engine Components (LF1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations > Disassembled Views > Page 4242 1 - B47B Fuel Rail Pressure Sensor 2 - Q17A Fuel Injector 1 3 - Q17C Fuel Injector 3 4 - Q17E Fuel Injector 5 5 - Q17F Fuel Injector 6 6 - Q17D Fuel Injector 4 7 - Q17B Fuel Injector 2 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 4243 Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch: Diagrams B47B Fuel Rail Pressure Sensor Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Pressure Sensor Replacement - Fuel Feed Pipe Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch: Service and Repair Fuel Pressure Sensor Replacement - Fuel Feed Pipe Fuel Pressure Sensor Replacement - Fuel Feed Pipe Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Pressure Sensor Replacement - Fuel Feed Pipe > Page 4246 Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch: Service and Repair Fuel Pressure Sensor Replacement - Fuel Injection Fuel Rail Fuel Pressure Sensor Replacement - Fuel Injection Fuel Rail (LF1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pressure > System Information > Specifications Fuel Pressure: Specifications Fuel Pressure (Ignition ON, engine OFF) ....................................................................................................................................... 276-448 kPa (40-65 psi). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pressure > System Information > Specifications > Page 4251 Fuel Pressure: Service Precautions Relieving Fuel Pressure Warning Warning Remove the fuel tank cap and relieve the fuel system pressure before servicing the fuel system in order to reduce the risk of personal injury. After you relieve the fuel system pressure, a small amount of fuel may be released when servicing the fuel lines, the fuel injection pump, or the connections. In order to reduce the risk of personal injury, cover the fuel system components with a shop towel before disconnection. This will catch any fuel that may leak out. Place the towel in an approved container when the disconnection is complete. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pressure > System Information > System Diagnosis > Fuel Pressure Gauge Installation and Removal Fuel Pressure: Testing and Inspection Fuel Pressure Gauge Installation and Removal Fuel Pressure Gauge Installation and Removal Special Tools CH-48027-100 Digital Pressure Gauge Installation Procedure Warning: Refer to Gasoline/Gasoline Vapors Warning (See: Fuel/Service Precautions). Warning Remove the fuel tank cap and relieve the fuel system pressure before servicing the fuel system in order to reduce the risk of personal injury. After you relieve the fuel system pressure, a small amount of fuel may be released when servicing the fuel lines, the fuel injection pump, or the connections. In order to reduce the risk of personal injury, cover the fuel system components with a shop towel before disconnection. This will catch any fuel that may leak out. Place the towel in an approved container when the disconnection is complete. 1. Relieve the fuel system pressure. Refer to Fuel Pressure Relief (See: Fuel Filter/Fuel Pressure Release/Service and Repair). 2. Connect the CH-48027-1 (1) to the CH-48027-2 (2). 3. Remove the shop towel from around the fuel rail service port, and place in an approved gasoline container. 4. Perform any tests and/or diagnostics as needed. For the proper usage of the CH-48027-100, refer to the manufacture's directions. Removal Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pressure > System Information > System Diagnosis > Fuel Pressure Gauge Installation and Removal > Page 4254 Warning Wrap a shop towel around the fuel pressure connection in order to reduce the risk of fire and personal injury. The towel will absorb any fuel leakage that occurs during the connection of the fuel pressure gauge. Place the towel in an approved container when the connection of the fuel pressure gauge is complete. 1. Relieve the fuel system pressure, if required. Perform the following steps: 1. Wrap a shop towel around the fuel rail service port. 2. Place the hose on the CH-48027-2 (2) into an approved gasoline container. 3. Open the valve on the CH-48027-2 (2) in order to bleed any fuel from the fuel rail. 4. Close the valve on the CH-48027-2 (2). 5. Remove the hose on the CH-48027-2 (2) from the approved gasoline container. 6. Remove the shop towel from around the fuel rail service port, and place in an approved gasoline container. Caution: Clean all of the following areas before performing any disconnections in order to avoid possible contamination in the system: * The fuel pipe connections * The hose connections * The areas surrounding the connections 2. Disconnect the CH-48027-1 (1) from the CH-48027-2 (2). 3. Disconnect the CH-48027-2 (2) from the CH-48027-3 (3). 4. Disconnect the CH-48027-3 (3) from the fuel rail service port. 5. Install the fuel rail service port cap. 6. Install the engine cover, if required. 7. Tighten the fuel fill cap. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pressure > System Information > System Diagnosis > Fuel Pressure Gauge Installation and Removal > Page 4255 Fuel Pressure: Testing and Inspection Fuel System Diagnosis Fuel System Diagnosis Diagnostic Instructions * Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle (See: Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle) prior to using this diagnostic procedure. * Review Strategy Based Diagnosis (See: Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Strategy Based Diagnosis) for an overview of the diagnostic approach. * Diagnostic Procedure Instructions (See: Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Diagnostic Procedure Instructions) provides an overview of each diagnostic category. Circuit/System Description The engine control module (ECM) supplies voltage to the fuel pump control module when the ECM detects that the ignition is ON. The voltage from the ECM to the fuel pump control module remains active for 2 s, unless the engine is in Crank or Run. While this voltage is being received, the fuel pump control module closes the ground switch of the fuel pump and also supplies a varying voltage to the fuel tank module in order to maintain the desired fuel rail pressure. The fuel system is an electronic returnless on-demand design. A returnless fuel system reduces the internal temperature of the fuel tank by not returning hot fuel from the engine to the fuel tank. Reducing the internal temperature of the fuel tank results in lower evaporative emissions. An electric turbine style fuel pump attaches to the primary fuel pump module inside the fuel tank. The fuel pump supplies fuel through the fuel feed pipe to the high pressure fuel pump. The high pressure fuel pump supplies fuel to a variable-pressure fuel rail. Fuel enters the combustion chamber through precision multi-hole fuel injectors. The high pressure fuel pump, fuel rail pressure, fuel injection timing, and injection duration are controlled by the engine control module (ECM). The primary fuel tank module also contains a primary jet pump and a secondary jet pump. Fuel pump flow loss, caused by vapor expulsion in the pump inlet chamber, is diverted to the primary jet pump and the secondary jet pump through a restrictive orifice located on the pump cover. The primary jet pump fills the reservoir of the primary fuel tank module. The secondary jet pump creates a venturi action which causes the fuel to be drawn from the secondary side of the fuel tank, through the fuel transfer pipe, to the primary side of the fuel tank. Reference Information Description and Operation Fuel System Description (LF1) (See: Description and Operation/Fuel System Description) Electrical Information Reference * Circuit Testing (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Circuit Testing) * Connector Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Connector Repairs) * Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections) * Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Wiring Repairs) Scan Tool Reference Control Module References (See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning) for scan tool information Special Tools * CH 48027 - Digital Pressure Gauge * J 37287 - Fuel Line Shut-off Adapter Circuit/System Verification Note: * Repair all fuel system related DTCs before performing this diagnostic. * Inspect the fuel system for damage or external leaks before proceeding. * Verify that adequate fuel is in the fuel tank before proceeding. * The Fuel Pump Enable may need to be commanded ON a few times in order to obtain the highest possible fuel pressure. * Before proceeding with this test review the User Manual CH 48027-5 for Safety Information and Instructions. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pressure > System Information > System Diagnosis > Fuel Pressure Gauge Installation and Removal > Page 4256 1. Ignition OFF, all accessories OFF, install a CH 48027 - Gauge. Refer to Fuel Pressure Gauge Installation and Removal (See: Fuel Pressure Gauge Installation and Removal). Note: High fuel pressure readings may result due to hot soak fuel boiling. With the engine OFF, the fuel pressure may increase to the setting of the pressure relief regulator valve, approximately 580 kPa (84 psi). 2. Ignition ON, engine OFF, command the Fuel Pump Enable ON with a scan tool. Verify the fuel pressure is between 276-448 kPa (40-65 psi) and does not decrease more than 34 kPa (5 psi) in 1 min. 3. Engine idling at normal operating temperature, verify the scan tool Fuel Pump Control Module Fuel Pressure Sensor parameter is between 276-324 kPa (40-47 psi). Circuit/System Testing Note: * The Fuel Pump Enable may need to be commanded ON a few times in order to obtain the highest possible fuel pressure. * DO NOT start the engine. * High fuel pressure readings may result due to hot soak fuel boiling. With the engine OFF, the fuel pressure may increase to the setting of the pressure relief regulator valve, approximately 580 kPa (84 psi). 1. Ignition ON, engine OFF, command the Fuel Pump Enable ON with a scan tool and observe the fuel pressure gauge while the fuel pump is operating. Verify the fuel pressure is between 276-448 kPa (40-65 psi). ‹› If the fuel pressure is less than the specified range, test, inspect, and repair the items listed below. If all items test normal, replace the primary fuel tank module. * Restricted fuel feed pipe * Inspect the harness connectors and the ground circuits of the fuel pump for poor connections. 2. Verify that the fuel pressure does not decrease more than 34 kPa (5 psi) in 1 min. ‹› If the fuel pressure decreases more than the specified value, perform the following procedure: 1. Ignition OFF, relieve the fuel pressure. Refer to Fuel Pressure Relief (See: Fuel Filter/Fuel Pressure Release/Service and Repair). 2. Install the J 37287 - Adapter between the chassis fuel feed hose and the engine compartment fuel feed pipe. 3. Open the valve on the J 37287 - Adapter. 4. Ignition ON, command the Fuel Pump Enable ON with a scan tool and bleed the air from the CH 48027 - Gauge. 5. Command the Fuel Pump Enable ON and then OFF with a scan tool. 6. Close the valve on the J 37287 - Adapter. 7. Monitor the fuel pressure for 1 min. ‹› If the fuel pressure does not decrease more than 34 kPa (5 psi) within the specified time, replace the primary fuel tank module. 3. Relieve the fuel pressure to 69 kPa (10 psi). Verify that the fuel pressure does not decrease more than 14 kPa (2 psi) in 5 min. ‹› If the fuel pressure decreases more than the specified value, replace the primary fuel tank module. 4. Operate the vehicle within the conditions of the customer's concern while monitoring the fuel pressure with the CH 48027 - Gauge. The fuel pressure should not drop off during acceleration, cruise or hard cornering. ‹› If the fuel pressure drops off, test, inspect, and repair the items listed below. If all items test normal, replace the primary fuel tank module. * Restricted fuel feed pipe * Inspect the harness connectors and the ground circuits of the fuel pump for poor connections 5. If the fuel system tests normal, refer to Symptoms - Engine Controls (See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures/Symptoms - Engine Controls). Repair Instructions Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification (See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures/Verification Tests and Procedures) after completing the diagnostic procedure. * Fuel Feed Pipe Replacement (LF1) (See: Fuel Supply Line/Service and Repair/Fuel Feed Pipe Replacement) * Fuel Tank Fuel Pump Module Replacement (See: Service and Repair) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Control Unit > Component Information > Locations Fuel Pump Control Unit: Locations Luggage Compartment/Rear of Vehicle Component Views Left Side of the Luggage Compartment Components 1 - X80R Accessory Power Receptacle - Rear Compartment 2 - K41 Parking Assist Module (UD7) 3 - M17 Liftgate Motor Assembly (TB5) 4 - K27 Fuel Pump Control Module Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Control Unit > Component Information > Locations > Page 4260 Fuel Pump Control Unit: Diagrams K27 Fuel Pump Control Module Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Control Unit > Component Information > Locations > Page 4261 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Rail > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Injection Fuel Rail Assembly Replacement - Bank 1 Fuel Rail: Service and Repair Fuel Injection Fuel Rail Assembly Replacement - Bank 1 Fuel Injection Fuel Rail Assembly Replacement - Bank 1 (LF1) Special Tools EN-49248 - Injector Rail Assembly Remover For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Tools and Equipment/Special Tools). Removal Procedure 1. Relieve the fuel system pressure. Refer to Fuel Pressure Relief (See: Fuel Filter/Fuel Pressure Release/Service and Repair). 2. Remove the fuel pipe shield. Refer to Fuel Pipe Shield Replacement (LF1) (See: Fuel Supply Line/Service and Repair/Fuel Pipe Shield Replacement). 3. Remove the intake manifold. Refer to Intake Manifold Replacement (See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Intake Manifold/Service and Repair/Intake Manifold Replacement). 4. Remove the fuel feed intermediate pipe. Refer to Fuel Feed Intermediate Pipe Replacement (LF1) (See: Fuel Supply Line/Service and Repair/Fuel Feed Intermediate Pipe Replacement). 5. Remove the cylinder head. Refer to Cylinder Head Replacement - Left Side (LF1) (See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Cylinder Head Assembly/Service and Repair/Cylinder Head Replacement - Left Side). 6. Remove the foam insulator from the fuel rails. 7. Disconnect the fuel pressure sensor electrical connector and cut the wire harness tie straps. 8. Remove the fuel rail bolts (1). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Rail > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Injection Fuel Rail Assembly Replacement - Bank 1 > Page 4266 9. Remove the fuel rail and injectors (1) as an assembly using the EN-49248 - remover. 10. Remove the fuel pressure sensor. Refer to Fuel Pressure Sensor Replacement - Fuel Injection Fuel Rail (LF1) (See: Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch/Service and Repair/Fuel Pressure Sensor Replacement - Fuel Injection Fuel Rail). 11. Remove and discard the direct fuel injector hold down clamps. Note: The direct fuel injectors must be rebuilt whenever the injector has been released from the fuel rail or cylinder head. 12. Once the fuel rail is removed, remove the fuel injectors and rebuild them. Refer to Fuel Rail and Injectors Cleaning and Inspection (LF1 or LFW) (See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Service and Repair/Overhaul/60. Fuel Rail and Injectors Cleaning and Inspection). Installation Procedure 1. Install the fuel rail with injectors (2) into the cylinder head evenly. 2. Install NEW direct injector hold down clamps to the injector. 3. Hand tighten the two outer fuel rail bolts to seat the injector in the injector bores. 4. Start and hand tighten the remaining fuel rail bolts and tighten the fuel rail bolts (1). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Rail > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Injection Fuel Rail Assembly Replacement - Bank 1 > Page 4267 Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener Caution). 5. Tighten the fuel rail bolts in the sequence shown: 1. Tighten the Bank 1 fuel rail bolts first pass to 12 Nm (106 lb in). 2. Tighten the Bank 1 fuel rail bolts final pass to 23 Nm (17 lb ft). 6. Install the fuel feed intermediate pipe. Refer to Fuel Feed Intermediate Pipe Replacement (LF1) (See: Fuel Supply Line/Service and Repair/Fuel Feed Intermediate Pipe Replacement). 7. Install the high pressure fuel sensor. Refer to Fuel Pressure Sensor Replacement - Fuel Injection Fuel Rail (LF1) (See: Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch/Service and Repair/Fuel Pressure Sensor Replacement - Fuel Injection Fuel Rail). 8. Connect the fuel injector wiring harness electrical connector to the fuel injectors, fuel rail and fuel pressure sensor. 9. Inspect for fuel leaks using the following procedure: 1. Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF for 2 seconds. 2. Turn OFF the ignition, for 10 seconds. 3. Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. 4. Inspect for fuel leaks. Note: Before installing the foam insulator, remove any remaining fuel from the injector well. 10. Install the foam insulator to the fuel rails. 11. Install the intake manifold. Refer to Intake Manifold Replacement (See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Intake Manifold/Service and Repair/Intake Manifold Replacement). 12. Install the fuel pipe shield. Refer to Fuel Pipe Shield Replacement (LF1) (See: Fuel Supply Line/Service and Repair/Fuel Pipe Shield Replacement). 13. Install the cylinder head. Refer to Cylinder Head Replacement - Left Side (LF1) (See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Cylinder Head Assembly/Service and Repair/Cylinder Head Replacement - Left Side). 14. Install the low side fuel pressure service port cap. 15. Install the fuel tank cap. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Rail > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Injection Fuel Rail Assembly Replacement - Bank 1 > Page 4268 Fuel Rail: Service and Repair Fuel Injection Fuel Rail Assembly Replacement - Bank 2 Fuel Injection Fuel Rail Assembly Replacement - Bank 2 (LF1) Special Tools EN-49248 - Injector Rail Assembly Remover Removal Procedure 1. Relieve the fuel system pressure. Refer to Fuel Pressure Relief (See: Fuel Filter/Fuel Pressure Release/Service and Repair). 2. Remove the fuel pipe shield. Refer to Fuel Pipe Shield Replacement (LF1) (See: Fuel Supply Line/Service and Repair/Fuel Pipe Shield Replacement). 3. Remove the intake manifold. Refer to Intake Manifold Replacement (See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Intake Manifold/Service and Repair/Intake Manifold Replacement). 4. Remove the fuel feed intermediate pipe. Refer to Fuel Feed Intermediate Pipe Replacement (LF1) (See: Fuel Supply Line/Service and Repair/Fuel Feed Intermediate Pipe Replacement). 5. Remove the cylinder head. Refer to Cylinder Head Replacement - Left Side (LF1) (See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Cylinder Head Assembly/Service and Repair/Cylinder Head Replacement - Left Side). 6. Remove the fuel rail bolts (1). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Rail > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Injection Fuel Rail Assembly Replacement - Bank 1 > Page 4269 7. Remove the fuel rail and injectors (1) as an assembly using the EN-49248 - remover. 8. Remove and discard the direct fuel injector hold down clamps. Note: The direct fuel injectors must be rebuilt whenever the injector has been released from the fuel rail or cylinder head. 9. Once the fuel rail is removed, remove the fuel injectors and rebuild them. Refer to Fuel Rail and Injectors Cleaning and Inspection (LF1 or LFW) (See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Service and Repair/Overhaul/60. Fuel Rail and Injectors Cleaning and Inspection). Installation Procedure 1. Install the fuel rail with injectors (2) into the cylinder head evenly. 2. Hand tighten the two outer fuel rail bolts to seat the injector in the injector bores. 3. Start and hand tighten the remaining fuel rail bolts (1). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Rail > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Injection Fuel Rail Assembly Replacement - Bank 1 > Page 4270 Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener Caution). 4. Tighten the fuel rail bolts in the sequence shown: 1. Tighten the Bank 1 fuel rail bolts first pass to 12 Nm (106 lb in). 2. Tighten the Bank 1 fuel rail bolts a final pass to 23 Nm (17 lb ft). 5. Install the fuel feed intermediate pipe. Refer to Fuel Feed Intermediate Pipe Replacement (LF1) (See: Fuel Supply Line/Service and Repair/Fuel Feed Intermediate Pipe Replacement). 6. Connect the fuel injector wiring harness electrical connector from the fuel injectors, fuel rail and fuel pressure sensor. 7. Inspect for fuel leaks using the following procedure: 1. Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF for 2 seconds. 2. Turn OFF the ignition, for 10 seconds. 3. Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. 4. Inspect for fuel leaks. Note: Before installing the foam insulator, remove any remaining fuel from the injector well. 8. Install the foam insulator to the fuel rails. 9. Install the intake manifold. Refer to Intake Manifold Replacement (See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Intake Manifold/Service and Repair/Intake Manifold Replacement). 10. Install the fuel pipe shield. Refer to Fuel Pipe Shield Replacement (LF1) (See: Fuel Supply Line/Service and Repair/Fuel Pipe Shield Replacement). 11. Install the cylinder head. Refer to Cylinder Head Replacement - Left Side (LF1) (See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Cylinder Head Assembly/Service and Repair/Cylinder Head Replacement - Left Side). 12. Install the low side fuel pressure service port cap. 13. Install the fuel tank cap. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Rail > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Injection Fuel Rail Assembly Replacement - Bank 1 > Page 4271 Fuel Rail: Service and Repair Fuel Injector and Fuel Rail Replacement Fuel Injector and Fuel Rail Replacement Special Tools EN-47909 - Fuel Injector Bore and Sleeve Cleaning Kit For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Computers and Control Systems/Tools and Equipment). Removal Procedure 1. Relieve the fuel system pressure. Refer to Fuel Pressure Relief (See: Fuel Filter/Fuel Pressure Release/Service and Repair). 2. Remove the fuel pipe shield. Refer to Fuel Pipe Shield Replacement (LF1) (See: Fuel Supply Line/Service and Repair/Fuel Pipe Shield Replacement). 3. Remove the intake manifold. Refer to Intake Manifold Replacement (See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Intake Manifold/Service and Repair/Intake Manifold Replacement). 4. Remove the fuel feed intermediate pipe. Refer to Fuel Feed Intermediate Pipe Replacement (LF1) (See: Fuel Supply Line/Service and Repair/Fuel Feed Intermediate Pipe Replacement). 5. Remove the foam insulator from the fuel rails. 6. Remove the cylinder head. Refer to Cylinder Head Replacement - Left Side (LF1) (See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Cylinder Head Assembly/Service and Repair/Cylinder Head Replacement - Left Side) or Cylinder Head Replacement - Right Side (LF1) (See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Cylinder Head Assembly/Service and Repair/Cylinder Head Replacement - Right Side) 7. Remove the bolts (1) from the bank 2 fuel rail. 8. Remove the bank 1 fuel rail and injectors (1) as an assembly. Refer to Cylinder Head Disassemble (LF1 or LFW) (See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Service and Repair/Overhaul/55. Cylinder Head Disassemble). 9. Disconnect the bank 1 fuel injector electrical connections. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Rail > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Injection Fuel Rail Assembly Replacement - Bank 1 > Page 4272 10. If the bank 2 fuel rail or injectors are being serviced, remove them. Refer to Cylinder Head Disassemble (LF1 or LFW) (See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Service and Repair/Overhaul/55. Cylinder Head Disassemble). 11. Disconnect the bank 2 fuel injector and fuel pressure sensor electrical connections. Note: The direct fuel injectors must be rebuilt whenever the injector has been released from the fuel rail or cylinder head. 12. It is necessary to rebuild the fuel injectors. Refer to Fuel Rail and Injectors Cleaning and Inspection (LF1 or LFW) (See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Service and Repair/Overhaul/60. Fuel Rail and Injectors Cleaning and Inspection). Installation Procedure 1. Clean the fuel injector bores using EN-47909 - kit. 2. Ensure that the fuel injectors have been properly rebuilt and lubricated. Refer to Fuel Rail and Injectors Cleaning and Inspection (LF1 or LFW) ( See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Service and Repair/Overhaul/60. Fuel Rail and Injectors Cleaning and Inspection). 3. Connect the bank 2 fuel injector and fuel pressure sensor electrical connections. 4. Position the bank 2 fuel rail and evenly hand tighten the 2 outer fuel rail bolts to seat the injectors into the injector bores. Remove the bolts. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Rail > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Injection Fuel Rail Assembly Replacement - Bank 1 > Page 4273 5. Connect the bank 1 fuel injector electrical connections. 6. Position the bank 1 fuel rail and evenly hand tighten the 2 outer fuel rail bolts to seat the injectors into the injector bores. 7. Start and hand tighten the remaining fuel rail bolts. Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener Caution). 8. Tighten the bank 1 and bank 2 fuel rail bolts. * Tighten the inner fuel rail bolts to 10 Nm (89 lb in). * Tighten the outer fuel rail bolts to 10 Nm (89 lb in). 9. Replace any wire harness tie straps cut from the fuel rails. 10. Install the cylinder head. Refer to Cylinder Head Replacement - Left Side (LF1) (See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Cylinder Head Assembly/Service and Repair/Cylinder Head Replacement - Left Side) or Cylinder Head Replacement - Right Side (LF1) (See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Cylinder Head Assembly/Service and Repair/Cylinder Head Replacement - Right Side) 11. Install the fuel feed intermediate pipe. Refer to Fuel Feed Intermediate Pipe Replacement (LF1) (See: Fuel Supply Line/Service and Repair/Fuel Feed Intermediate Pipe Replacement). 12. Inspect for fuel leaks using the following procedure: 1. Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF for 2 seconds. 2. Turn OFF the ignition, for 10 seconds. 3. Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. 4. Inspect for fuel leaks. Note: Before installing the foam insulator, remove any remaining fuel from the injector well. 13. Install the foam insulator to the fuel rails. 14. Install the intake manifold. Refer to Intake Manifold Replacement (See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Intake Manifold/Service and Repair/Intake Manifold Replacement). 15. Install the fuel pipe shield. Refer to Fuel Pipe Shield Replacement (LF1) (See: Fuel Supply Line/Service and Repair/Fuel Pipe Shield Replacement). 16. Install the low side fuel pressure service port cap. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Supply Line > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Line - Chassis Fuel Supply Line: Service and Repair Fuel Line - Chassis Fuel Line Replacement - Chassis Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Supply Line > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Line - Chassis > Page 4278 Fuel Supply Line: Service and Repair Fuel Pipe Shield Replacement Fuel Pipe Shield Replacement (LF1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Supply Line > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Line - Chassis > Page 4279 Fuel Supply Line: Service and Repair Fuel Feed Intermediate Pipe Replacement Fuel Feed Intermediate Pipe Replacement (LF1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Supply Line > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Line - Chassis > Page 4280 Fuel Supply Line: Service and Repair Fuel Feed Pipe Replacement Fuel Feed Pipe Replacement (LF1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Filler Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair Fuel Filler Hose: Service and Repair Fuel Tank Filler Pipe Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Filler Neck > Component Information > Service and Repair Fuel Filler Neck: Service and Repair Fuel Tank Filler Pipe Housing Replacement (Equinox) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Application and ID Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Application and ID Electrical Center Identification Views X50A Fuse Block - Underhood, Label Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Application and ID > Page 4291 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Control Unit > Component Information > Locations Fuel Pump Control Unit: Locations Luggage Compartment/Rear of Vehicle Component Views Left Side of the Luggage Compartment Components 1 - X80R Accessory Power Receptacle - Rear Compartment 2 - K41 Parking Assist Module (UD7) 3 - M17 Liftgate Motor Assembly (TB5) 4 - K27 Fuel Pump Control Module Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Control Unit > Component Information > Locations > Page 4296 Fuel Pump Control Unit: Diagrams K27 Fuel Pump Control Module Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Control Unit > Component Information > Locations > Page 4297 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Application and ID Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Application and ID Electrical Center Identification Views X50A Fuse Block - Underhood, Label Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Application and ID > Page 4301 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Locations Instrument Panel/Center Console Component Views Lower Left of the Instrument Panel Components 1 - B80 Park Brake Switch 2 - T3 Audio Amplifier 3 - K9 Body Control Module 4 - K73 Telematics Communication Interface Control Module (UE1) 5 - B107 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor 6 T4S Wireless Communication Antenna - Bluetooth (UE1 with UPF) 7 - B22 Brake Pedal Position Sensor 8 - X84 Data Link Connector Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4306 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Diagrams B107 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4307 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Service and Repair Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Diagrams B75B Mass Air Flow/Intake Air Temperature Sensor Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4311 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Service and Repair Mass Airflow Sensor with Intake Air Temperature Sensor Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations > Disassembled Views Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch: Locations Disassembled Views Disassembled Views Fuel Rail (LF1) 1 - Fuel Rail Bolt 2 - Fuel Pressure Sensor 3 - Fuel Injector Retainer 4 - Fuel Injector O-ring Seal 5 - Fuel Injector Spacer 6 - Fuel Injector 7 - Fuel Injector Teflon Seal 8 - Fuel Rail Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations > Disassembled Views > Page 4316 Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch: Locations Powertrain Component Views Powertrain Component Views Front Engine Components (LAF 2 of 2) 1 - B47B Fuel Rail Pressure Sensor 2 - B74 Manifold Absolute Pressure Sensor 3 - Q17D Fuel Injector 4 4 - Q17C Fuel Injector 3 5 - B1 A/C Refrigerant Pressure Sensor 6 - Q17B Fuel Injector 2 7 - Q17A Fuel Injector 1 Top of the Engine Components (LF1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations > Disassembled Views > Page 4317 1 - B47B Fuel Rail Pressure Sensor 2 - Q17A Fuel Injector 1 3 - Q17C Fuel Injector 3 4 - Q17E Fuel Injector 5 5 - Q17F Fuel Injector 6 6 - Q17D Fuel Injector 4 7 - Q17B Fuel Injector 2 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 4318 Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch: Diagrams B47B Fuel Rail Pressure Sensor Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Pressure Sensor Replacement - Fuel Feed Pipe Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch: Service and Repair Fuel Pressure Sensor Replacement - Fuel Feed Pipe Fuel Pressure Sensor Replacement - Fuel Feed Pipe Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Pressure Sensor Replacement - Fuel Feed Pipe > Page 4321 Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch: Service and Repair Fuel Pressure Sensor Replacement - Fuel Injection Fuel Rail Fuel Pressure Sensor Replacement - Fuel Injection Fuel Rail (LF1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Body > Component Information > Diagrams Throttle Body: Diagrams Q38 Throttle Body Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Body > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures Throttle Body: Procedures Throttle Body Inspection and Cleaning Note: Over extended time and mileage, deposits may accumulate on the back of the throttle valve plate. The source of the deposit is exhaust gas recirculation (EGR) gas. Typically these deposits pose no problem. Occasionally the deposit may accumulate to a point where perceived pedal effort or throttle valve movement is effected. This procedure should not be performed on vehicles with mileage under 80 450 km (50,000 mi). 1. Remove the air cleaner outlet duct. Refer to Air Cleaner Outlet Duct Replacement (See: Air Cleaner Housing/Air Cleaner Fresh Air Duct/Hose/Service and Repair). Warning Turn OFF the ignition before inserting fingers into the throttle bore. Unexpected movement of the throttle blade could cause personal injury. Caution: Do not insert any tools into the throttle body bore in order to avoid damage to the throttle valve plate. 2. Inspect the throttle body bore and the throttle valve plate for deposits. You will need to open the throttle valve in order to inspect all surfaces. Caution: Do not use any solvent that contains Methyl Ethyl Ketone (MEK). This solvent may damage fuel system components. 3. Clean the throttle body bore and the throttle valve plate using a clean shop towel with GM top engine cleaner, GM P/N 1052626 (Canadian P/N 993026) or AC-Delco Carburetor Tune-Up Conditioner, P/N X66-P, or an equivalent product. 4. Install the air cleaner outlet duct. Refer to Air Cleaner Outlet Duct Replacement (See: Air Cleaner Housing/Air Cleaner Fresh Air Duct/Hose/Service and Repair). 5. Perform the idle learn procedure. Refer to Throttle/Idle Learn (LF1, LFW) (See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Throttle/Idle Learn). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Body > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 4327 Throttle Body: Removal and Replacement Throttle Body Assembly Replacement (LF1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Firing Order > Component Information > Specifications Firing Order: Specifications Ignition System Specifications Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Timing > System Information > Specifications Ignition Timing: Specifications Information not supplied by the manufacturer. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Disassembled Views Camshaft Position Sensor: Locations Disassembled Views Disassembled Views Camshaft Timing Components 1 - Primary Timing Chain Tensioner Bolt 2 - Left Secondary Timing Chain Shoe Bolt 3 - Right Secondary Timing Chain Tensioner 4 - Right Secondary Timing Chain Tensioner Gasket 5 - Right Secondary Timing Chain Shoe 6 - Secondary Timing Chain 7 - Camshaft Position Actuator Bolt 8 Exhaust Camshaft Position Actuator 9 - Camshaft Position Actuator Thrust Washer 10 - Intake Camshaft Position Actuator 11 - Right Secondary Timing Chain Guide 12 - Left Camshaft Intermediate Drive Shaft Sprocket 13 - Camshaft Intermediate Drive Shaft Sprocket Bolt 14 - Left Secondary Timing Chain Shoe 15 - Left Secondary Timing Chain Tensioner Gasket 16 - Left Secondary Timing Chain Tensioner Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Disassembled Views > Page 4339 17 - Left Secondary Timing Chain Guide 18 - Lower Primary Timing Chain Guide 19 - Lower Primary Timing Chain Guide Bolt 20 - Crankshaft Sprocket 21 - Primary Timing Chain 22 - Right Camshaft Intermediate Drive Shaft Sprocket 23 - Upper Primary Timing Chain Guide 24 - Primary Timing Chain Tensioner Gasket 25 - Primary Timing Chain Tensioner Engine Front Cover 1 - Water Pump Pulley Bolt 2 - Water Pump Pulley 3 - Water Pump Assembly 4 - Water Pump Pulley Gasket 5 - Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve Seal 6 - Camshaft Position Sensor Bolt 7 - Camshaft Position Sensor 8 - Camshaft Position Sensor O-ring Seal 9 - Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve Bolt 10 - Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve 11 - Engine Front Cover Gasket 12 - Engine Front Cover Locating Pin Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Disassembled Views > Page 4340 13 - Engine Front Cover 14 - Engine Front Cover Bolt 15 - Engine Front Cover Seal 16 Crankshaft Balancer 17 - Crankshaft Balancer Bolt 18 - Engine Front Cover Bolt 19 - Water Pump Bolt Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Disassembled Views > Page 4341 Camshaft Position Sensor: Locations Powertrain Component Views Powertrain Component Views Front Engine Components (LAF 1 of 2) 1 - Q38 Throttle Body 2 - G18 High Pressure Fuel Pump 3 - B23F Camshaft Position Sensor Intake 4 - B37 Engine Oil Pressure Switch 5 - B68 Knock Sensor 6 - B26 Crankshaft Position Sensor 7 - M64 Starter Motor 8 - Q2 A/C Compressor Clutch 9 - G13 Generator Left Rear Engine Components (LAF) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Disassembled Views > Page 4342 1 - T8D Ignition Coil 4 2 - T8C Ignition Coil 3 3 - T8B Ignition Coil 2 4 - T8A Ignition Coil 1 5 - Q6F Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Intake 6 - Q6E Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Exhaust 7 - B52A Heated Oxygen Sensor 1 8 - B52B Heated Oxygen Sensor 2 9 - B34 Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor 10 - B23E Camshaft Position Sensor - Exhaust 11 - Q12 Evaporative Emission Purge Solenoid Valve Right Rear of the Engine Components (LF1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Disassembled Views > Page 4343 1 - B74 Manifold Absolute Pressure Sensor 2 - T8E Ignition Coil 5 3 - T8C Ignition Coil 3 4 - Q12 Evaporative Emission Purge Solenoid Valve 5 - Q38 Throttle Body 6 - B23B Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 1 Intake 7 - B23D Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 2 Intake 8 - Q6D Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Bank 2 Intake 9 - Q6C Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Bank 2 Exhaust 10 - B23C Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 2 Exhaust 11 - Q6B Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Bank 1 Intake 12 - Q6A Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Bank 1 Exhaust 13 - B23A Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 1 Exhaust 14 - B68A Knock Sensor 1 15 - B26 Crankshaft Position Sensor 16 - T8A Ignition Coil 1 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4344 Camshaft Position Sensor: Diagrams B23A Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 1 Exhaust (LF1) B23B Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 1 Intake (LF1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4345 B23C Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 2 Exhaust (LF1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4346 B23D Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 2 Intake (LF1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4347 B23E Camshaft Position Sensor - Exhaust (LAF) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4348 B23F Camshaft Position Sensor - Intake (LAF) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4349 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Camshaft Position Sensor Replacement - Bank 2 (Left Side) Exhaust Camshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair Camshaft Position Sensor Replacement - Bank 2 (Left Side) Exhaust Camshaft Position Sensor Replacement - Bank 2 (Left Side) Exhaust Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Camshaft Position Sensor Replacement - Bank 2 (Left Side) Exhaust > Page 4352 Camshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair Camshaft Position Sensor Replacement - Bank 2 (Left Side) Intake Camshaft Position Sensor Replacement - Bank 2 (Left Side) Intake Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Camshaft Position Sensor Replacement - Bank 2 (Left Side) Exhaust > Page 4353 Camshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair Camshaft Position Sensor Replacement - Bank 1 (Right Side) Exhaust Camshaft Position Sensor Replacement - Bank 1 (Right Side) Exhaust Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Camshaft Position Sensor Replacement - Bank 2 (Left Side) Exhaust > Page 4354 Camshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair Camshaft Position Sensor Replacement - Bank 1 (Right Side) Intake Camshaft Position Sensor Replacement - Bank 1 (Right Side) Intake Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Disassembled Views Crankshaft Position Sensor: Locations Disassembled Views Disassembled Views Engine Covers and Component Assemblies (1 of 2) (LF1) 1 - Right Camshaft Cover Assembly 2 - Ignition Coil Bolt 3 - Ignition Coil 4 - Spark Plug 5 - Intake Manifold Assembly 6 - Left Camshaft Cover Assembly 7 - Fuel Rail Noise Shield 8 - Fuel Pump Cover 9 - Fuel Pump Cover Bolt 10 - Engine Flywheel 11 - Engine Flywheel Bolt 12 - Engine Assembly 13 - Oil Pan Assembly 14 - Engine Front Cover Assembly 15 - Crankshaft Balancer 16 Crankshaft Balancer Bolt Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Disassembled Views > Page 4359 17 - Crankshaft Position Sensor Heat Shield Bolt - Large 18 - Crankshaft Position Sensor Heat Shield 19 - Crankshaft Position Sensor Heat Shield Bolt - Small Engine Covers and Component Assemblies (2 of 2) (LF1) 1 - Water Outlet Bolt 2 - Water Outlet 3 - Water Outlet O-ring 4 - Water Outlet Seal 5 - Knock Sensor Bolt 6 - Knock Sensor 7 - Engine Coolant Heater Assembly 8 - Crankshaft Position Sensor Bolt 9 - Crankshaft Position Sensor 10 - Crankshaft Position Sensor O-ring 11 - Right Cylinder Head Assembly 12 - Right Cylinder Head Gasket 13 - Lower Fuel Rail Noise Shield 14 - Engine Cooling Thermostat Gasket 15 - Engine Cooling Thermostat 16 - Engine Cooling Thermostat Housing 17 - Engine Cooling Thermostat Bolt - Short 18 - Engine Cooling Thermostat Housing Bolt - Long Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Disassembled Views > Page 4360 19 - Fuel Feed Pipe Assembly 20 - Fuel Feed Pipe Assembly Bolt 21 - Fuel Feed Intermediate Pipe Assembly 22 - Fuel Pump Gasket 23 - Fuel Pump O-ring Seal 24 - Fuel Pump 25 - Fuel Pump Bolt 26 - Left Cylinder Head Assembly 27 - Left Cylinder Head Gasket 28 - Oil Level Indicator 29 Oil Level Indicator Handle O-ring 30 - Oil Level Indicator Tube Bolt 31 - Oil Level Indicator Tube 32 - Oil Level Indicator Tube O-ring 33 - Oil Filter Adapter Assembly 34 - Engine Short Block Assembly 35 - Oil Pump Assembly 36 - Timing Drive Assembly Camshaft Cover Assembly 250 - Left Camshaft Cover 251 - Left Camshaft Cover Gasket 252 - Right Camshaft Cover Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Disassembled Views > Page 4361 253 - Right Camshaft Cover Gasket 254 - Camshaft Cover Spark Plug Port Seal 254 - Camshaft Cover Spark Plug Port Seal 255 - Camshaft Cover Bolt 255 - Camshaft Cover Bolt 256 - Camshaft Cover Bolt Insulator 256 - Camshaft Cover Bolt Insulator 257 - Ignition Coil Bolt Thread Insert 258 Oil Fill Cap 259 - Oil Fill O-ring 259 - Oil Fill O-ring 260 - Left Camshaft Cover PCV Fitting 261 Right Camshaft Cover PCV Fitting Orifice 262 - Oil Fill Tube 263 - Left Camshaft Cover PCV Fitting O-ring 265 - Left Camshaft Housing Cover Insulator 266 - Right Camshaft Housing Cover Insulator 704 - Ignition Coil 704 - Ignition Coil 705 - Ignition Coil Bolt 705 - Ignition Coil Bolt 719 - Spark Plug 719 - Spark Plug Camshaft Timing Components Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Disassembled Views > Page 4362 1 - Primary Timing Chain Tensioner Bolt 2 - Left Secondary Timing Chain Shoe Bolt 3 - Right Secondary Timing Chain Tensioner 4 - Right Secondary Timing Chain Tensioner Gasket 5 - Right Secondary Timing Chain Shoe 6 - Secondary Timing Chain 7 - Camshaft Position Actuator Bolt 8 Exhaust Camshaft Position Actuator 9 - Camshaft Position Actuator Thrust Washer 10 - Intake Camshaft Position Actuator 11 - Right Secondary Timing Chain Guide 12 - Left Camshaft Intermediate Drive Shaft Sprocket 13 - Camshaft Intermediate Drive Shaft Sprocket Bolt 14 - Left Secondary Timing Chain Shoe 15 - Left Secondary Timing Chain Tensioner Gasket 16 - Left Secondary Timing Chain Tensioner 17 - Left Secondary Timing Chain Guide 18 - Lower Primary Timing Chain Guide 19 - Lower Primary Timing Chain Guide Bolt 20 - Crankshaft Sprocket 21 Primary Timing Chain 22 - Right Camshaft Intermediate Drive Shaft Sprocket 23 - Upper Primary Timing Chain Guide 24 - Primary Timing Chain Tensioner Gasket Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Disassembled Views > Page 4363 25 - Primary Timing Chain Tensioner Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Disassembled Views > Page 4364 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Locations Powertrain Component Views Powertrain Component Views Front Engine Components (LAF 1 of 2) 1 - Q38 Throttle Body 2 - G18 High Pressure Fuel Pump 3 - B23F Camshaft Position Sensor Intake 4 - B37 Engine Oil Pressure Switch 5 - B68 Knock Sensor 6 - B26 Crankshaft Position Sensor 7 - M64 Starter Motor 8 - Q2 A/C Compressor Clutch 9 - G13 Generator Right Rear of the Engine Components (LF1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Disassembled Views > Page 4365 1 - B74 Manifold Absolute Pressure Sensor 2 - T8E Ignition Coil 5 3 - T8C Ignition Coil 3 4 - Q12 Evaporative Emission Purge Solenoid Valve 5 - Q38 Throttle Body 6 - B23B Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 1 Intake 7 - B23D Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 2 Intake 8 - Q6D Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Bank 2 Intake 9 - Q6C Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Bank 2 Exhaust 10 - B23C Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 2 Exhaust 11 - Q6B Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Bank 1 Intake 12 - Q6A Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Bank 1 Exhaust 13 - B23A Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 1 Exhaust 14 - B68A Knock Sensor 1 15 - B26 Crankshaft Position Sensor 16 - T8A Ignition Coil 1 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4366 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Diagrams B26 Crankshaft Position Sensor Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4367 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Testing and Inspection Crankshaft Position System Variation Learn Note: The Crankshaft Position System Variation Learn procedure is also required when the following service procedures have been performed, regardless of whether DTC P0315 is set: * An engine replacement * An engine control module (ECM) replacement * A crankshaft balancer replacement * A crankshaft replacement * A crankshaft position sensor replacement * Any engine repairs which disturb the crankshaft to crankshaft position sensor relationship. Note: The ECM monitors certain component signals to determine if all the conditions are met to continue with the crankshaft position System Variation Learn Procedure. 1. Install a scan tool. 2. Monitor the ECM for DTCs with a scan tool. If other DTCs are set, except DTC P0315, refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle ( See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Descriptions/Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle) for the applicable DTC that set. 3. With a scan tool, select the Crankshaft Position System Variation Learn Procedure and perform the following: 1. Block drive wheels. 2. Set parking brake. 3. DO NOT apply brake pedal. 4. Cycle ignition from OFF to ON. 5. Apply and hold brake pedal for the duration of the procedure. 6. Start and idle engine. 7. Turn the air conditioning (A/C) OFF. 8. The vehicle must remain in Park or Neutral. Note: While the learn procedure is in progress, release the throttle immediately when the engine starts to decelerate. The engine control is returned to the operator and the engine responds to throttle position after the learn procedure is complete. 9. Accelerate to wide open throttle (WOT) and release when the fuel cut-off occurs. 4. The scan tool displays Test In Progress. 5. The scan tool displays Learn Successful. 6. Verify DTC P0315 ran and passed This Ignition Cycle. ‹› If DTC P0315 failed or did not run This Ignition Cycle, or another DTC is present, refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle ( See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Descriptions/Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle) for the applicable DTC that set. 7. Once the Learn Procedure has successfully completed, and in order to store the crankshaft position system variation values in the ECM, turn OFF the ignition and verify all vehicle systems are OFF. This may take up to 2 minutes. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4368 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair Crankshaft Position Sensor Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Diagrams Ignition Coil: Diagrams T8A Ignition Coil 1 (LAF) T8A Ignition Coil 1 (LF1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4372 T8B Ignition Coil 2 (LAF) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4373 T8B Ignition Coil 2 (LF1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4374 T8C Ignition Coil 3 (LAF) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4375 T8C Ignition Coil 3 (LF1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4376 T8D Ignition Coil 4 (LAF) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4377 T8D Ignition Coil 4 (LF1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4378 T8E Ignition Coil 5 (LF1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4379 T8F Ignition Coil 6 (LF1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4380 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4381 Ignition Coil: Testing and Inspection Electronic Ignition System Diagnosis Diagnostic Instructions * Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle (See: Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle) prior to using this diagnostic procedure. * Review Strategy Based Diagnosis (See: Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Strategy Based Diagnosis) for an overview of the diagnostic approach. * Diagnostic Procedure Instructions (See: Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Diagnostic Procedure Instructions) provides an overview of each diagnostic category. Circuit/System Description The ignition system on this engine uses individual ignition coils and ignition control circuits for each cylinder. Ignition voltage is supplied to each bank of ignition coils. The engine control module (ECM) controls the ignition system operation. The ECM controls each coil using the ignition control circuits. The ECM commands the ignition control circuit low when a spark event is requested. The sequencing and timing are controlled by the ECM. Diagnostic Aids * The ignition coils for each bank are fused separately. If a fuse opens or the ignition voltage circuit opens between the fuse and the splice, all the ignition coils for one bank of the engine would be inoperative. If the ground circuit opens at the engine block, the ignition coils would be inoperative for one bank of the engine. * Inspect the ignition coils for aftermarket devices. An aftermarket device connected to the ignition coil circuits, may cause a condition with the ignition coils. Reference Information Schematic Reference Engine Controls Schematics (See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams) Connector End View Reference Component Connector End Views (See: Diagrams/Connector Views) Description and Operation Electronic Ignition System Description (See: Computers and Control Systems/Description and Operation/Electronic Ignition System Description) Electrical Information Reference * Circuit Testing (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Circuit Testing) * Connector Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Connector Repairs) * Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections) * Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Wiring Repairs) Scan Tool Reference Control Module References (See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning) for scan tool information Special Tools * EL 26792 - Spark Tester * For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Computers and Control Systems/Tools and Equipment). Circuit/System Testing Note: Do not perform this diagnostic procedure if you were not sent here from a misfire DTC or the Engine Cranks but Does Not Run diagnostic. 1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the harness connector of the affected T8 ignition coil. 2. Ignition ON, test for battery voltage between the ignition voltage circuit terminal D or 2 and ground. ‹› If less than B+, test the ignition voltage circuit for a short to ground or an open/high resistance. If the circuit tests normal and the ignition circuit fuse is open, test all the components connected to the ignition voltage circuit and replace as necessary. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4382 3. Crank or start the engine. Test for 200-400 mV between the appropriate ignition control circuit terminal C or 1 and ground. ‹› If less than the specified value, test the ignition control circuit for a short to ground or an open/high resistance. If the circuit/connection tests normal, replace the K20 ECM. ‹› If greater than the specified value, test the ignition control circuit for a short to voltage. If the circuit/connection tests normal, replace the K20 ECM. 4. Ignition OFF, all vehicle systems OFF, this may take up to 2 min, test for less than 5 ohm between the low reference circuit terminal B or 3 and the K20 ECM housing. ‹› If greater than the specified value, test for an open/high resistance in the low reference circuit. If the circuit/connection tests normal, replace the K20 ECM. 5. Test for less than 5 ohm between the ground circuit terminal A or 4 and ground. ‹› If greater than the specified value, test for an open, or high resistance in the ground circuit. 6. Remove the T8 ignition coil from the engine. Connect the harness. 7. Remove the fuse for the fuel pump or the fuel pump control module, if equipped. 8. Crank the engine and test for strong spark using the EL 26792 - Tester. ‹› If no spark or weak spark is observed, replace the T8 ignition coil. Repair Instructions Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification (See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures/Verification Tests and Procedures) after completing the diagnostic procedure. * Ignition Coil Replacement - Bank 1 (See: Service and Repair/Ignition Coil Replacement - Bank 1) * Ignition Coil Replacement - Bank 2 (See: Service and Repair/Ignition Coil Replacement - Bank 2) * Control Module References (See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning) for ECM replacement, setup, and programming Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Service and Repair > Ignition Coil Replacement - Bank 1 Ignition Coil: Service and Repair Ignition Coil Replacement - Bank 1 Ignition Coil Replacement - Bank 1 Removal Procedure 1. Remove the intake manifold. Refer to Intake Manifold Replacement (See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Intake Manifold/Service and Repair/Intake Manifold Replacement). 2. Disconnect the engine wiring harness electrical connector(s) (1) from the ignition coil(s) (4). 3. Remove the ignition coil bolt(s). 4. Remove the ignition coil(s). Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Service and Repair > Ignition Coil Replacement - Bank 1 > Page 4385 1. Install the ignition coil(s). Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener Caution). 2. Install the ignition coil bolt(s). Tighten the bolt(s) to 10 Nm (89 lb in). 3. Connect the engine wiring harness electrical connector(s) (1) to the ignition coil(s) (4). 4. Install the intake manifold. Refer to Intake Manifold Replacement (See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Intake Manifold/Service and Repair/Intake Manifold Replacement). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Service and Repair > Ignition Coil Replacement - Bank 1 > Page 4386 Ignition Coil: Service and Repair Ignition Coil Replacement - Bank 2 Ignition Coil Replacement - Bank 2 Removal Procedure 1. Remove the intake manifold cover. Refer to Intake Manifold Cover Replacement (See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Intake Manifold/Service and Repair/Intake Manifold Cover Replacement). 2. Disconnect the engine wiring harness electrical connector(s) (5) from the ignition coil(s) (4). 3. Remove the ignition coil bolt(s). 4. Remove the ignition coil(s). Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Service and Repair > Ignition Coil Replacement - Bank 1 > Page 4387 1. Install the ignition coil(s). Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener Caution). 2. Install the ignition coil bolt(s). Tighten the bolt(s) to 10 Nm (89 lb in). 3. Connect the engine wiring harness electrical connector(s) (5) to the ignition coil(s) (4). 4. Install the intake manifold cover. Refer to Intake Manifold Cover Replacement (See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Intake Manifold/Service and Repair/Intake Manifold Cover Replacement). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Relay > Component Information > Locations Ignition Relay: Locations Electrical Center Identification Views X50A Fuse Block - Underhood, Label Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 4391 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Disassembled Views Knock Sensor: Locations Disassembled Views Disassembled Views Engine Covers and Component Assemblies (2 of 2) (LF1) 1 - Water Outlet Bolt 2 - Water Outlet 3 - Water Outlet O-ring 4 - Water Outlet Seal 5 - Knock Sensor Bolt 6 - Knock Sensor 7 - Engine Coolant Heater Assembly 8 - Crankshaft Position Sensor Bolt 9 - Crankshaft Position Sensor 10 - Crankshaft Position Sensor O-ring 11 - Right Cylinder Head Assembly 12 - Right Cylinder Head Gasket 13 - Lower Fuel Rail Noise Shield 14 - Engine Cooling Thermostat Gasket 15 - Engine Cooling Thermostat 16 - Engine Cooling Thermostat Housing Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Disassembled Views > Page 4396 17 - Engine Cooling Thermostat Bolt - Short 18 - Engine Cooling Thermostat Housing Bolt - Long 19 - Fuel Feed Pipe Assembly 20 - Fuel Feed Pipe Assembly Bolt 21 - Fuel Feed Intermediate Pipe Assembly 22 - Fuel Pump Gasket 23 - Fuel Pump O-ring Seal 24 - Fuel Pump 25 - Fuel Pump Bolt 26 - Left Cylinder Head Assembly 27 - Left Cylinder Head Gasket 28 - Oil Level Indicator 29 Oil Level Indicator Handle O-ring 30 - Oil Level Indicator Tube Bolt 31 - Oil Level Indicator Tube 32 - Oil Level Indicator Tube O-ring 33 - Oil Filter Adapter Assembly 34 - Engine Short Block Assembly 35 - Oil Pump Assembly 36 - Timing Drive Assembly Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Disassembled Views > Page 4397 Knock Sensor: Locations Powertrain Component Views Powertrain Component Views Front Engine Components (LAF 1 of 2) 1 - Q38 Throttle Body 2 - G18 High Pressure Fuel Pump 3 - B23F Camshaft Position Sensor Intake 4 - B37 Engine Oil Pressure Switch 5 - B68 Knock Sensor 6 - B26 Crankshaft Position Sensor 7 - M64 Starter Motor 8 - Q2 A/C Compressor Clutch 9 - G13 Generator Left Front of the Engine Components (LF1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Disassembled Views > Page 4398 1 - T8B Ignition Coil 2 2 - T8D Ignition Coil 4 3 - T8F Ignition Coil 6 4 - G18 High Pressure Fuel Pump 5 - B34 Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor 6 - M64 Starter Motor 7 - B68B Knock Sensor 2 8 - B37 Engine Oil Pressure Switch 9 - B1 A/C Refrigerant Pressure Sensor 10 - Q2 A/C Compressor Clutch 11 - G13 Generator Right Rear of the Engine Components (LF1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Disassembled Views > Page 4399 1 - B74 Manifold Absolute Pressure Sensor 2 - T8E Ignition Coil 5 3 - T8C Ignition Coil 3 4 - Q12 Evaporative Emission Purge Solenoid Valve 5 - Q38 Throttle Body 6 - B23B Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 1 Intake 7 - B23D Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 2 Intake 8 - Q6D Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Bank 2 Intake 9 - Q6C Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Bank 2 Exhaust 10 - B23C Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 2 Exhaust 11 - Q6B Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Bank 1 Intake 12 - Q6A Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Bank 1 Exhaust 13 - B23A Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 1 Exhaust 14 - B68A Knock Sensor 1 15 - B26 Crankshaft Position Sensor 16 - T8A Ignition Coil 1 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4400 Knock Sensor: Diagrams B68 Knock Sensor (LAF) B68A Knock Sensor 1 (LF1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4401 B68B Knock Sensor 2 (LF1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4402 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Knock Sensor Replacement - Bank 1 Knock Sensor: Service and Repair Knock Sensor Replacement - Bank 1 Knock Sensor Replacement - Bank 1 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Knock Sensor Replacement - Bank 1 > Page 4405 Knock Sensor: Service and Repair Knock Sensor Replacement - Bank 2 Knock Sensor Replacement - Bank 2 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Relays and Modules - Ignition System > Ignition Relay > Component Information > Locations Ignition Relay: Locations Electrical Center Identification Views X50A Fuse Block - Underhood, Label Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Relays and Modules - Ignition System > Ignition Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 4410 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Disassembled Views Camshaft Position Sensor: Locations Disassembled Views Disassembled Views Camshaft Timing Components 1 - Primary Timing Chain Tensioner Bolt 2 - Left Secondary Timing Chain Shoe Bolt 3 - Right Secondary Timing Chain Tensioner 4 - Right Secondary Timing Chain Tensioner Gasket 5 - Right Secondary Timing Chain Shoe 6 - Secondary Timing Chain 7 - Camshaft Position Actuator Bolt 8 Exhaust Camshaft Position Actuator 9 - Camshaft Position Actuator Thrust Washer 10 - Intake Camshaft Position Actuator 11 - Right Secondary Timing Chain Guide 12 - Left Camshaft Intermediate Drive Shaft Sprocket 13 - Camshaft Intermediate Drive Shaft Sprocket Bolt 14 - Left Secondary Timing Chain Shoe 15 - Left Secondary Timing Chain Tensioner Gasket 16 - Left Secondary Timing Chain Tensioner Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Disassembled Views > Page 4416 17 - Left Secondary Timing Chain Guide 18 - Lower Primary Timing Chain Guide 19 - Lower Primary Timing Chain Guide Bolt 20 - Crankshaft Sprocket 21 - Primary Timing Chain 22 - Right Camshaft Intermediate Drive Shaft Sprocket 23 - Upper Primary Timing Chain Guide 24 - Primary Timing Chain Tensioner Gasket 25 - Primary Timing Chain Tensioner Engine Front Cover 1 - Water Pump Pulley Bolt 2 - Water Pump Pulley 3 - Water Pump Assembly 4 - Water Pump Pulley Gasket 5 - Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve Seal 6 - Camshaft Position Sensor Bolt 7 - Camshaft Position Sensor 8 - Camshaft Position Sensor O-ring Seal 9 - Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve Bolt 10 - Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve 11 - Engine Front Cover Gasket 12 - Engine Front Cover Locating Pin Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Disassembled Views > Page 4417 13 - Engine Front Cover 14 - Engine Front Cover Bolt 15 - Engine Front Cover Seal 16 Crankshaft Balancer 17 - Crankshaft Balancer Bolt 18 - Engine Front Cover Bolt 19 - Water Pump Bolt Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Disassembled Views > Page 4418 Camshaft Position Sensor: Locations Powertrain Component Views Powertrain Component Views Front Engine Components (LAF 1 of 2) 1 - Q38 Throttle Body 2 - G18 High Pressure Fuel Pump 3 - B23F Camshaft Position Sensor Intake 4 - B37 Engine Oil Pressure Switch 5 - B68 Knock Sensor 6 - B26 Crankshaft Position Sensor 7 - M64 Starter Motor 8 - Q2 A/C Compressor Clutch 9 - G13 Generator Left Rear Engine Components (LAF) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Disassembled Views > Page 4419 1 - T8D Ignition Coil 4 2 - T8C Ignition Coil 3 3 - T8B Ignition Coil 2 4 - T8A Ignition Coil 1 5 - Q6F Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Intake 6 - Q6E Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Exhaust 7 - B52A Heated Oxygen Sensor 1 8 - B52B Heated Oxygen Sensor 2 9 - B34 Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor 10 - B23E Camshaft Position Sensor - Exhaust 11 - Q12 Evaporative Emission Purge Solenoid Valve Right Rear of the Engine Components (LF1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Disassembled Views > Page 4420 1 - B74 Manifold Absolute Pressure Sensor 2 - T8E Ignition Coil 5 3 - T8C Ignition Coil 3 4 - Q12 Evaporative Emission Purge Solenoid Valve 5 - Q38 Throttle Body 6 - B23B Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 1 Intake 7 - B23D Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 2 Intake 8 - Q6D Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Bank 2 Intake 9 - Q6C Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Bank 2 Exhaust 10 - B23C Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 2 Exhaust 11 - Q6B Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Bank 1 Intake 12 - Q6A Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Bank 1 Exhaust 13 - B23A Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 1 Exhaust 14 - B68A Knock Sensor 1 15 - B26 Crankshaft Position Sensor 16 - T8A Ignition Coil 1 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4421 Camshaft Position Sensor: Diagrams B23A Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 1 Exhaust (LF1) B23B Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 1 Intake (LF1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4422 B23C Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 2 Exhaust (LF1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4423 B23D Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 2 Intake (LF1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4424 B23E Camshaft Position Sensor - Exhaust (LAF) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4425 B23F Camshaft Position Sensor - Intake (LAF) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4426 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Camshaft Position Sensor Replacement - Bank 2 (Left Side) Exhaust Camshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair Camshaft Position Sensor Replacement - Bank 2 (Left Side) Exhaust Camshaft Position Sensor Replacement - Bank 2 (Left Side) Exhaust Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Camshaft Position Sensor Replacement - Bank 2 (Left Side) Exhaust > Page 4429 Camshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair Camshaft Position Sensor Replacement - Bank 2 (Left Side) Intake Camshaft Position Sensor Replacement - Bank 2 (Left Side) Intake Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Camshaft Position Sensor Replacement - Bank 2 (Left Side) Exhaust > Page 4430 Camshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair Camshaft Position Sensor Replacement - Bank 1 (Right Side) Exhaust Camshaft Position Sensor Replacement - Bank 1 (Right Side) Exhaust Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Camshaft Position Sensor Replacement - Bank 2 (Left Side) Exhaust > Page 4431 Camshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair Camshaft Position Sensor Replacement - Bank 1 (Right Side) Intake Camshaft Position Sensor Replacement - Bank 1 (Right Side) Intake Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Disassembled Views Crankshaft Position Sensor: Locations Disassembled Views Disassembled Views Engine Covers and Component Assemblies (1 of 2) (LF1) 1 - Right Camshaft Cover Assembly 2 - Ignition Coil Bolt 3 - Ignition Coil 4 - Spark Plug 5 - Intake Manifold Assembly 6 - Left Camshaft Cover Assembly 7 - Fuel Rail Noise Shield 8 - Fuel Pump Cover 9 - Fuel Pump Cover Bolt 10 - Engine Flywheel 11 - Engine Flywheel Bolt 12 - Engine Assembly 13 - Oil Pan Assembly 14 - Engine Front Cover Assembly 15 - Crankshaft Balancer 16 Crankshaft Balancer Bolt Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Disassembled Views > Page 4436 17 - Crankshaft Position Sensor Heat Shield Bolt - Large 18 - Crankshaft Position Sensor Heat Shield 19 - Crankshaft Position Sensor Heat Shield Bolt - Small Engine Covers and Component Assemblies (2 of 2) (LF1) 1 - Water Outlet Bolt 2 - Water Outlet 3 - Water Outlet O-ring 4 - Water Outlet Seal 5 - Knock Sensor Bolt 6 - Knock Sensor 7 - Engine Coolant Heater Assembly 8 - Crankshaft Position Sensor Bolt 9 - Crankshaft Position Sensor 10 - Crankshaft Position Sensor O-ring 11 - Right Cylinder Head Assembly 12 - Right Cylinder Head Gasket 13 - Lower Fuel Rail Noise Shield 14 - Engine Cooling Thermostat Gasket 15 - Engine Cooling Thermostat 16 - Engine Cooling Thermostat Housing 17 - Engine Cooling Thermostat Bolt - Short 18 - Engine Cooling Thermostat Housing Bolt - Long Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Disassembled Views > Page 4437 19 - Fuel Feed Pipe Assembly 20 - Fuel Feed Pipe Assembly Bolt 21 - Fuel Feed Intermediate Pipe Assembly 22 - Fuel Pump Gasket 23 - Fuel Pump O-ring Seal 24 - Fuel Pump 25 - Fuel Pump Bolt 26 - Left Cylinder Head Assembly 27 - Left Cylinder Head Gasket 28 - Oil Level Indicator 29 Oil Level Indicator Handle O-ring 30 - Oil Level Indicator Tube Bolt 31 - Oil Level Indicator Tube 32 - Oil Level Indicator Tube O-ring 33 - Oil Filter Adapter Assembly 34 - Engine Short Block Assembly 35 - Oil Pump Assembly 36 - Timing Drive Assembly Camshaft Cover Assembly 250 - Left Camshaft Cover 251 - Left Camshaft Cover Gasket 252 - Right Camshaft Cover Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Disassembled Views > Page 4438 253 - Right Camshaft Cover Gasket 254 - Camshaft Cover Spark Plug Port Seal 254 - Camshaft Cover Spark Plug Port Seal 255 - Camshaft Cover Bolt 255 - Camshaft Cover Bolt 256 - Camshaft Cover Bolt Insulator 256 - Camshaft Cover Bolt Insulator 257 - Ignition Coil Bolt Thread Insert 258 Oil Fill Cap 259 - Oil Fill O-ring 259 - Oil Fill O-ring 260 - Left Camshaft Cover PCV Fitting 261 Right Camshaft Cover PCV Fitting Orifice 262 - Oil Fill Tube 263 - Left Camshaft Cover PCV Fitting O-ring 265 - Left Camshaft Housing Cover Insulator 266 - Right Camshaft Housing Cover Insulator 704 - Ignition Coil 704 - Ignition Coil 705 - Ignition Coil Bolt 705 - Ignition Coil Bolt 719 - Spark Plug 719 - Spark Plug Camshaft Timing Components Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Disassembled Views > Page 4439 1 - Primary Timing Chain Tensioner Bolt 2 - Left Secondary Timing Chain Shoe Bolt 3 - Right Secondary Timing Chain Tensioner 4 - Right Secondary Timing Chain Tensioner Gasket 5 - Right Secondary Timing Chain Shoe 6 - Secondary Timing Chain 7 - Camshaft Position Actuator Bolt 8 Exhaust Camshaft Position Actuator 9 - Camshaft Position Actuator Thrust Washer 10 - Intake Camshaft Position Actuator 11 - Right Secondary Timing Chain Guide 12 - Left Camshaft Intermediate Drive Shaft Sprocket 13 - Camshaft Intermediate Drive Shaft Sprocket Bolt 14 - Left Secondary Timing Chain Shoe 15 - Left Secondary Timing Chain Tensioner Gasket 16 - Left Secondary Timing Chain Tensioner 17 - Left Secondary Timing Chain Guide 18 - Lower Primary Timing Chain Guide 19 - Lower Primary Timing Chain Guide Bolt 20 - Crankshaft Sprocket 21 Primary Timing Chain 22 - Right Camshaft Intermediate Drive Shaft Sprocket 23 - Upper Primary Timing Chain Guide 24 - Primary Timing Chain Tensioner Gasket Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Disassembled Views > Page 4440 25 - Primary Timing Chain Tensioner Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Disassembled Views > Page 4441 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Locations Powertrain Component Views Powertrain Component Views Front Engine Components (LAF 1 of 2) 1 - Q38 Throttle Body 2 - G18 High Pressure Fuel Pump 3 - B23F Camshaft Position Sensor Intake 4 - B37 Engine Oil Pressure Switch 5 - B68 Knock Sensor 6 - B26 Crankshaft Position Sensor 7 - M64 Starter Motor 8 - Q2 A/C Compressor Clutch 9 - G13 Generator Right Rear of the Engine Components (LF1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Disassembled Views > Page 4442 1 - B74 Manifold Absolute Pressure Sensor 2 - T8E Ignition Coil 5 3 - T8C Ignition Coil 3 4 - Q12 Evaporative Emission Purge Solenoid Valve 5 - Q38 Throttle Body 6 - B23B Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 1 Intake 7 - B23D Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 2 Intake 8 - Q6D Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Bank 2 Intake 9 - Q6C Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Bank 2 Exhaust 10 - B23C Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 2 Exhaust 11 - Q6B Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Bank 1 Intake 12 - Q6A Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Bank 1 Exhaust 13 - B23A Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 1 Exhaust 14 - B68A Knock Sensor 1 15 - B26 Crankshaft Position Sensor 16 - T8A Ignition Coil 1 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4443 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Diagrams B26 Crankshaft Position Sensor Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4444 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Testing and Inspection Crankshaft Position System Variation Learn Note: The Crankshaft Position System Variation Learn procedure is also required when the following service procedures have been performed, regardless of whether DTC P0315 is set: * An engine replacement * An engine control module (ECM) replacement * A crankshaft balancer replacement * A crankshaft replacement * A crankshaft position sensor replacement * Any engine repairs which disturb the crankshaft to crankshaft position sensor relationship. Note: The ECM monitors certain component signals to determine if all the conditions are met to continue with the crankshaft position System Variation Learn Procedure. 1. Install a scan tool. 2. Monitor the ECM for DTCs with a scan tool. If other DTCs are set, except DTC P0315, refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle ( See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Descriptions/Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle) for the applicable DTC that set. 3. With a scan tool, select the Crankshaft Position System Variation Learn Procedure and perform the following: 1. Block drive wheels. 2. Set parking brake. 3. DO NOT apply brake pedal. 4. Cycle ignition from OFF to ON. 5. Apply and hold brake pedal for the duration of the procedure. 6. Start and idle engine. 7. Turn the air conditioning (A/C) OFF. 8. The vehicle must remain in Park or Neutral. Note: While the learn procedure is in progress, release the throttle immediately when the engine starts to decelerate. The engine control is returned to the operator and the engine responds to throttle position after the learn procedure is complete. 9. Accelerate to wide open throttle (WOT) and release when the fuel cut-off occurs. 4. The scan tool displays Test In Progress. 5. The scan tool displays Learn Successful. 6. Verify DTC P0315 ran and passed This Ignition Cycle. ‹› If DTC P0315 failed or did not run This Ignition Cycle, or another DTC is present, refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle ( See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Descriptions/Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle) for the applicable DTC that set. 7. Once the Learn Procedure has successfully completed, and in order to store the crankshaft position system variation values in the ECM, turn OFF the ignition and verify all vehicle systems are OFF. This may take up to 2 minutes. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4445 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair Crankshaft Position Sensor Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Locations Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: Locations Instrument Panel/Center Console Component Views Steering Column Components 1 - S78 Turn Signal/Multifunction Switch 2 - X85 Steering Wheel Air Bag Coil 3 - S82 Windshield Wiper/Washer Switch 4 - S39 Ignition Switch 5 - M93 Ignition Cylinder Lock Control Solenoid Actuator 6 - B101 Immobilizer Antenna 7 - B99 Steering Wheel Angle Sensor Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Locations > Page 4450 Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: Service and Repair Ignition Lock Cylinder Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. Refer to Battery Negative Cable Disconnection and Connection (See: Starting and Charging/Battery/Battery Cable/Negative/Service and Repair/Battery Negative Cable Disconnection and Connection). 2. Remove the steering column shroud. Refer to Steering Column Shroud Replacement (See: Steering and Suspension/Steering/Steering Column/Service and Repair/Steering Column Shroud Replacement). 3. Insert the key into the ignition lock cylinder and turn the key to the RUN position. 4. Depress the retainer through the lock housing access hole (2) with a small Allen wrench or similar pick-type tool. 5. Remove the ignition lock cylinder (1) from the ignition and start switch housing. Installation Procedure 1. If you are installing a new ignition lock cylinder, code the lock cylinder. Refer to Lock Cylinder Coding - Ignition (See: Body and Frame/Locks/Service and Repair/Lock Cylinder Coding - Ignition). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Locations > Page 4451 2. Turn the key to the RUN position and insert ignition lock cylinder (1) into the ignition and start switch housing. 3. Turn the key to the LOCK position and remove the key from the ignition lock cylinder. 4. Install the steering column shroud. Refer to Steering Column Shroud Replacement (See: Steering and Suspension/Steering/Steering Column/Service and Repair/Steering Column Shroud Replacement). 5. Connect the battery negative cable. Refer to Battery Negative Cable Disconnection and Connection (See: Starting and Charging/Battery/Battery Cable/Negative/Service and Repair/Battery Negative Cable Disconnection and Connection). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Disassembled Views Knock Sensor: Locations Disassembled Views Disassembled Views Engine Covers and Component Assemblies (2 of 2) (LF1) 1 - Water Outlet Bolt 2 - Water Outlet 3 - Water Outlet O-ring 4 - Water Outlet Seal 5 - Knock Sensor Bolt 6 - Knock Sensor 7 - Engine Coolant Heater Assembly 8 - Crankshaft Position Sensor Bolt 9 - Crankshaft Position Sensor 10 - Crankshaft Position Sensor O-ring 11 - Right Cylinder Head Assembly 12 - Right Cylinder Head Gasket 13 - Lower Fuel Rail Noise Shield 14 - Engine Cooling Thermostat Gasket 15 - Engine Cooling Thermostat 16 - Engine Cooling Thermostat Housing Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Disassembled Views > Page 4456 17 - Engine Cooling Thermostat Bolt - Short 18 - Engine Cooling Thermostat Housing Bolt - Long 19 - Fuel Feed Pipe Assembly 20 - Fuel Feed Pipe Assembly Bolt 21 - Fuel Feed Intermediate Pipe Assembly 22 - Fuel Pump Gasket 23 - Fuel Pump O-ring Seal 24 - Fuel Pump 25 - Fuel Pump Bolt 26 - Left Cylinder Head Assembly 27 - Left Cylinder Head Gasket 28 - Oil Level Indicator 29 Oil Level Indicator Handle O-ring 30 - Oil Level Indicator Tube Bolt 31 - Oil Level Indicator Tube 32 - Oil Level Indicator Tube O-ring 33 - Oil Filter Adapter Assembly 34 - Engine Short Block Assembly 35 - Oil Pump Assembly 36 - Timing Drive Assembly Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Disassembled Views > Page 4457 Knock Sensor: Locations Powertrain Component Views Powertrain Component Views Front Engine Components (LAF 1 of 2) 1 - Q38 Throttle Body 2 - G18 High Pressure Fuel Pump 3 - B23F Camshaft Position Sensor Intake 4 - B37 Engine Oil Pressure Switch 5 - B68 Knock Sensor 6 - B26 Crankshaft Position Sensor 7 - M64 Starter Motor 8 - Q2 A/C Compressor Clutch 9 - G13 Generator Left Front of the Engine Components (LF1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Disassembled Views > Page 4458 1 - T8B Ignition Coil 2 2 - T8D Ignition Coil 4 3 - T8F Ignition Coil 6 4 - G18 High Pressure Fuel Pump 5 - B34 Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor 6 - M64 Starter Motor 7 - B68B Knock Sensor 2 8 - B37 Engine Oil Pressure Switch 9 - B1 A/C Refrigerant Pressure Sensor 10 - Q2 A/C Compressor Clutch 11 - G13 Generator Right Rear of the Engine Components (LF1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Disassembled Views > Page 4459 1 - B74 Manifold Absolute Pressure Sensor 2 - T8E Ignition Coil 5 3 - T8C Ignition Coil 3 4 - Q12 Evaporative Emission Purge Solenoid Valve 5 - Q38 Throttle Body 6 - B23B Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 1 Intake 7 - B23D Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 2 Intake 8 - Q6D Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Bank 2 Intake 9 - Q6C Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Bank 2 Exhaust 10 - B23C Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 2 Exhaust 11 - Q6B Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Bank 1 Intake 12 - Q6A Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Bank 1 Exhaust 13 - B23A Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 1 Exhaust 14 - B68A Knock Sensor 1 15 - B26 Crankshaft Position Sensor 16 - T8A Ignition Coil 1 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4460 Knock Sensor: Diagrams B68 Knock Sensor (LAF) B68A Knock Sensor 1 (LF1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4461 B68B Knock Sensor 2 (LF1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4462 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Knock Sensor Replacement - Bank 1 Knock Sensor: Service and Repair Knock Sensor Replacement - Bank 1 Knock Sensor Replacement - Bank 1 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Knock Sensor Replacement - Bank 1 > Page 4465 Knock Sensor: Service and Repair Knock Sensor Replacement - Bank 2 Knock Sensor Replacement - Bank 2 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications Spark Plug: Specifications Ignition System Specifications Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4469 Spark Plug: Application and ID Ignition System Specifications Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4470 Spark Plug: Testing and Inspection Spark Plug Inspection Spark Plug Usage * Ensure that the correct spark plug is installed. An incorrect spark plug causes driveability conditions. Refer to Ignition System Specifications ( See: Specifications) for the correct spark plug. * Ensure that the spark plug has the correct heat range. An incorrect heat range causes the following conditions: - Spark plug fouling-Colder plug - Pre-ignition causing spark plug and/or engine damage-Hotter plug Spark Plug Inspection * Inspect the terminal post (1) for damage. - Inspect for a bent or broken terminal post (1). - Test for a loose terminal post (1) by twisting and pulling the post. The terminal post (1) should NOT move. * Inspect the insulator (2) for flashover or carbon tracking, soot. This is caused by the electrical charge traveling across the insulator (2) between the terminal post (1) and ground. Inspect for the following conditions: - Inspect the spark plug boot for damage. - Inspect the spark plug recess area of the cylinder head for moisture, such as oil, coolant, or water. A spark plug boot that is saturated causes arcing to ground. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4471 * Inspect the insulator (2) for cracks. All or part of the electrical charge may arc through the crack instead of the electrodes (3, 4). * Inspect for evidence of improper arcing. - Measure the gap between the center electrode (4) and the side electrode (3) terminals. Refer to Ignition System Specifications (See: Specifications). An excessively wide electrode gap can prevent correct spark plug operation. - Inspect for the correct spark plug torque. Refer to Ignition System Specifications (See: Specifications). Insufficient torque can prevent correct spark plug operation. An over torqued spark plug, causes the insulator (2) to crack. - Inspect for signs of tracking that occurred near the insulator tip instead of the center electrode (4). - Inspect for a broken or worn side electrode (3). - Inspect for a broken, worn, or loose center electrode (4) by shaking the spark plug. * A rattling sound indicates internal damage. * A loose center electrode (4) reduces the spark intensity. - Inspect for bridged electrodes (3, 4). Deposits on the electrodes (3, 4) reduce or eliminates the gap. - Inspect for worn or missing platinum pads on the electrodes (3, 4), if equipped. - Inspect for excessive fouling. * Inspect the spark plug recess area of the cylinder head for debris. Dirty or damaged threads can cause the spark plug not to seat correctly during installation. Spark Plug Visual Inspection * Normal operation-Brown to grayish-tan with small amounts of white powdery deposits are normal combustion by-products from fuels with additives. * Carbon fouled-Dry, fluffy, black carbon or soot caused by the following conditions: - Rich fuel mixtures * Leaking fuel injectors * Excessive fuel pressure * Restricted air filter element * Incorrect combustion - Reduced ignition system voltage output * Weak coils * Worn ignition wires Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4472 * Incorrect spark plug gap - Excessive idling or slow speeds under light loads can keep spark plug temperatures so low that normal combustion deposits may not burn off. * Deposit fouling-Oil, coolant, or additives that include substances such as silicone, very white coating, reduces the spark intensity. Most powdery deposits will not effect spark intensity unless they form into a glazing over the electrode. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4473 Spark Plug: Service and Repair Spark Plug Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the ignition coil(s). Refer to Ignition Coil Replacement - Bank 1 (See: Ignition Coil/Service and Repair/Ignition Coil Replacement Bank 1) and/or Ignition Coil Replacement - Bank 2 (See: Ignition Coil/Service and Repair/Ignition Coil Replacement - Bank 2). Warning: Refer to Safety Glasses and Compressed Air Warning (See: Service Precautions/Technician Safety Information/Safety Glasses and Compressed Air Warning). Caution: Clean the spark plug recess area before removing the spark plug. Failure to do so could result in engine damage because of dirt or foreign material entering the cylinder head, or by the contamination of the cylinder head threads. The contaminated threads may prevent the proper seating of the new plug. Use a thread chaser to clean the threads of any contamination. 2. Use compressed air in order to remove debris from the spark plug cavity. Caution: Allow the engine to cool before removing the spark plugs. Attempting to remove the spark plugs from a hot engine may cause the plug threads to seize, causing damage to cylinder head threads. 3. Remove the spark plug. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4474 Caution: Use only the spark plugs specified for use in the vehicle. Do not install spark plugs that are either hotter or colder than those specified for the vehicle. Installing spark plugs of another type can severely damage the engine. Caution: Check the gap of all new and reconditioned spark plugs before installation. The pre-set gaps may have changed during handling. Use a round feeler gauge to ensure an accurate check. Installing the spark plugs with the wrong gap can cause poor engine performance and may even damage the engine. 1. Ensure that the spark plug gap is equivalent to the spark plug gap specification. Refer to Ignition System Specifications (See: Specifications). Caution: Be sure that the spark plug threads smoothly into the cylinder head and the spark plug is fully seated. Use a thread chaser, if necessary, to clean threads in the cylinder head. Cross-threading or failing to fully seat the spark plug can cause overheating of the plug, exhaust blow-by, or thread damage. Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener Caution). 2. Install the spark plug. Tighten the spark plug to 20 Nm (15 lb ft). 3. Install the ignition coil(s). Refer to Ignition Coil Replacement - Bank 1 (See: Ignition Coil/Service and Repair/Ignition Coil Replacement - Bank 1) and/or Ignition Coil Replacement - Bank 2 (See: Ignition Coil/Service and Repair/Ignition Coil Replacement - Bank 2). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Specifications > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission Shift Solenoid: Specifications 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission Shift Solenoid Valve State and Gear Ratio Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Specifications > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 4482 Shift Solenoid: Specifications 6T70/6T75 - Automatic Transmission Shift Solenoid Valve State and Gear Ratio Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4483 Shift Solenoid: Locations Powertrain Component Views Automatic Transmission Electronic Components 1 - Q8 Control Solenoid Valve Assembly 2 - B15 Transmission Internal Mode Switch 3 - B14A Transmission Output Shaft Speed Sensor 4 - B14C Transmission Input Shaft Speed Sensor Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Shift Solenoid: Diagram Information and Instructions Electrical Schematic Symbols Electrical Schematic Symbols Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4486 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4487 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4488 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4489 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4490 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4491 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4492 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4493 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4494 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4495 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4496 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4497 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4498 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4499 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4500 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4501 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4502 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4503 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4504 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4505 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4506 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4507 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4508 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4509 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4510 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4511 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4512 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4513 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4514 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4515 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4516 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4517 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4518 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4519 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4520 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4521 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4522 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4523 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4524 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4525 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4526 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4527 General Electrical Diagnosis General Electrical Diagnosis Basic Knowledge Required Without a basic knowledge of electricity, it will be difficult to use the diagnostic procedures contained in the service manual. You should understand the basic theory of electricity, and know the meaning of voltage (V), current (A), and resistance (Ohms ). You should also be able to read and understand a wiring diagram, as well as understand what happens in a circuit with an open or a shorted wire. Vehicle Zoning Strategy Vehicle Zoning Strategy All grounds, in-line connectors, and splices have identifying numbers that correspond to where they are located in the vehicle. The following table explains the numbering system. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4528 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4529 Shift Solenoid: Diagnostic Aids Arrows and Symbols Arrows and Symbols This service manual uses various symbols in order to describe different service operations. 1 - Front of Vehicle 2 - View Detail 2 - View Detail 3 - Ambient Air Mixed with Another Gas or Indicate Temperature Change 4 - Motion or Direction 5 - View Angle 6 - Dimension (1:2) 7 Ambient/Clean Air Flow or Cool Air Flow 8 - Lubrication Point - Oil or Fluid 9 - Task Related 10 Sectioning (1:3) 11 - Gas Other Than Ambient Air or Hot Air Flow 12 - Lubrication Point - Grease or Jelly 13 - Multidirectional Arrow Decimal and Metric Equivalents Decimal and Metric Equivalents Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4530 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4531 Checking Aftermarket Accessories Checking Aftermarket Accessories Warning: Refer to SIR Warning (See: Restraint Systems/Service Precautions/SIR Warning). Caution: The OBD II symbol is used on the circuit diagrams in order to alert the technician that the circuit is essential for proper OBD II emission control circuit operation. Any circuit which fails and causes the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) to turn ON, or causes emissions-related component damage, is identified as an OBD II circuit. Do not connect aftermarket accessories into the following circuits: * SIR circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the SIR symbol. * OBD II circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the OBD II symbol. Always check for aftermarket accessories (non-OEM) as the first step in diagnosing electrical problems. If the vehicle is so equipped, disconnect the system to verify that these add-on accessories are not the cause of the problems. Possible causes of vehicle problems related to aftermarket accessories include: * Power feeds connected to points other than the battery * Antenna location * Transceiver wiring located too close to vehicle electronic modules or wiring * Poor shielding or poor connectors on antenna feed line * Check for recent service bulletins detailing installation guidelines for aftermarket accessories. Circuit Testing Circuit Testing The Circuit Testing section contains the following diagnostic testing information. Using this information along with the diagnostic procedures will identify the cause of the electrical malfunction. * Using Connector Test Adapters (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Using Connector Test Adapters) * Probing Electrical Connectors (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Probing Electrical Connectors) * Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4532 Procedures/Circuit Testing/Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter) * Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp) * Using Fused Jumper Wires (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Using Fused Jumper Wires) * Measuring Voltage (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Measuring Voltage) * Measuring Voltage Drop (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Measuring Voltage Drop) * Measuring Frequency (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Measuring Frequency) * Testing Ground and Low Reference Circuits (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Testing Ground and Low Reference Circuits) * Testing for Continuity (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Continuity) * Testing for Short to Ground (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Short to Ground) * Testing for a Short to Voltage (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for a Short to Voltage) * Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections) * Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions) * Testing for Electrical Intermittents (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Electrical Intermittents) * Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure) * Circuit Protection - Fuses (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Circuit Protection - Fuses) * Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers) * Circuit Protection - Fusible Links (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Circuit Protection - Fusible Links) Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp Special Tools EL-35616-200 - Test Light - Probe Kit For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test Probe Caution). A test lamp can simply and quickly test a low impedance circuit for voltage. A Digital Multimeter (DMM) should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present if the impedance is low enough, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. In other words, if there is not enough current, the test lamp will not illuminate even though voltage is present. The EL-35616-200 - kit is Micro-Pack compatible and comprised of a 12-volt light bulb with an attached pair of leads. To properly operate this tool use the following procedures. When testing for voltage: 1. Attach one lead to ground. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is voltage at the point being tested. When testing for ground: 1. Attach one lead to battery positive voltage. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where ground should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is ground at the point being tested. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4533 Testing for a Short to Voltage Testing for a Short to Voltage Special Tools EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM) For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test Probe Caution). The following procedure tests for a short to voltage in a circuit. 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Set the rotary dial of the Digital Multimeter (DMM) to the V (DC) position. 4. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. Turn ON the ignition and operate all accessories. 7. If the voltage measured is greater than 1 V, there is a short to voltage in the circuit. Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions Special Tools J-25070 - Heat Gun For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Many intermittent open or shorted circuits are affected by harness/connector movement that is caused by vibration, engine torque, bumps/rough pavement, etc. In order to duplicate the customer's concern, it may be necessary to manipulate the wiring harness if the malfunction appears to be vibration related. Manipulation of a circuit can consist of a wide variety of actions, including: * Wiggling the harness * Disconnecting a connector and reconnecting * Stressing the mechanical connection of a connector * Pulling on the harness or wire in order to identify a separation/break inside the insulation * Relocating a harness or wires All these actions should be performed with some goal in mind. For instance, with a scan tool connected, wiggling the wires may uncover a faulty input to the control module. The snapshot option would be appropriate here. Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure). Another option is, with the component commanded ON and OFF by the scan tool, move related connectors and wiring and observe the component operation. With the engine running, move related connectors and wiring while monitoring engine operation. If harness or connector movement affects the data displayed, component/system operation, or engine operation, inspect and repair the harness/connections as necessary. You may need to load the vehicle in order to duplicate the concern. This may require the use of weights, floor jacks, jackstands, frame machines, etc. In these cases you are attempting to duplicate the concern by manipulating the suspension or frame. This method is useful in finding harnesses that are too short and their connectors pull apart enough to cause a poor connection. A DMM set to Peak Min/Max mode and connected to the suspect circuit while testing can yield desirable results. Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Electrical Intermittents). Certainly, using the senses of sight, smell, and hearing while manipulating the circuit can provide good results as well. There may be instances where circuit manipulation alone will not meet the required criteria for the fault condition to appear. In such cases it may be necessary to expose the suspect circuit to other conditions while manipulating the harness. Such conditions would include high moisture conditions, along with exceptionally high or low temperatures. The following discusses how to expose the circuit to these kinds of conditions. Salt Water Spray Some compounds possess the ability to conduct electricity when dissolved in water such as ordinary salt. By mixing table salt with water in sufficient Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4534 quantities, you can enhance the conductive properties of water so that any circuit which may be sensitive to moisture will more readily fail when liberally sprayed with this mixture. Mixing 0.35L (12 oz) of water with approximately 1 tablespoon of salt will yield a salt solution of 5 percent. Fill a normal spray bottle with this mixture. This mixture is sufficient to enhance the water's own conductivity. This may cause the circuit to fail more easily when sprayed. Once the mixture is completed, spray the suspect area liberally with the solution. Then, while monitoring either a scan tool or DMM, manipulate the harness as discussed previously. High Temperature Conditions If the complaint tends to be heat related, you can simulate the condition using the J-25070 - heat gun. Using the heat gun, you can heat up the suspected area or component. Manipulate the harnesses under high temperature conditions while monitoring the scan tool or DMM to locate the fault condition. The high temperature condition may be achieved simply by test driving the vehicle at normal operating temperature. If a heat gun is unavailable, consider this option to enhance your diagnosis. This option does not allow for the same control, however. Low Temperature Conditions Depending on the nature of the fault condition, placing a fan in front of the vehicle while the vehicle is in the shade can have the desired effect. If this is unsuccessful, use local cooling treatments such as ice or a venturi type nozzle (one that provides hot or cold air). This type of tool is capable of producing air stream temperatures down to -18°C (0°F) from one end and +71°C (160°F) from the other. This is ideally suited for localized cooling needs. Once the vehicle, component, or harness has been sufficiently cooled, manipulate the harness or components in an effort to duplicate the concern. Duplicating Failure Conditions * If none of the previous tests are successful, attempt to duplicate and/or capture the failure conditions. * Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, where applicable, contains the conditions that were present when the DTC set. 1. Review and record Freeze Frame/Failure Records data. 2. Clear the DTCs using the scan tool. 3. Turn the key to OFF and wait 15 seconds. 4. Operate the vehicle under the same conditions that were noted in Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, as closely as possible. The vehicle must also be operating within the Conditions for Running the DTC. Refer to Conditions for Running the DTC in the supporting text if a DTC is being diagnosed. 5. Monitor DTC Status for the DTC being tested. The scan tool will indicate Ran, when the enabling conditions have been satisfied long enough for the DTC to run. The scan tool will also indicate whether the DTC passed or failed. * An alternate method is to drive the vehicle with the DMM connected to a suspected circuit. An abnormal reading on the DMM when the concern occurs, may help you locate the concern. Measuring Frequency Measuring Frequency Special Tools EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM) For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test Probe Caution). The following procedure determines the frequency of a signal. Note: Connecting the Digital Multimeter (DMM) to the circuit before pressing the Hz button will allow the DMM to autorange to an appropriate range. 1. Apply power to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (AC) position. 3. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4535 5. Press the Hz button on the DMM. 6. The DMM will display the frequency measured. Measuring Voltage Measuring Voltage Special Tools EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM) For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test Probe Caution). The following procedure measures the voltage at a selected point in a circuit. 1. Disconnect the electrical harness connector for the circuit being tested, if necessary. 2. Enable the circuit and/or system being tested. Use the following methods: * Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. * Turn ON the engine. * Turn ON the circuit and/or system with a scan tool in Output Controls. * Turn ON the switch for the circuit and/or system being tested. 3. Select the V (AC) or V (DC) position on the Digital Multimeter (DMM). 4. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the point of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. The DMM displays the voltage measured at that point. Measuring Voltage Drop Measuring Voltage Drop Special Tools EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM) For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test Probe Caution). The following procedure determines the difference in voltage potential between 2 points. 1. Set the rotary dial of the Digital Multimeter (DMM) to the V (DC) position. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4536 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to one point of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to the other point of the circuit. 4. Operate the circuit. 5. The DMM displays the difference in voltage between the 2 points. Probing Electrical Connectors Probing Electrical Connectors Note: Always be sure to reinstall the connector position assurance (CPA) and terminal position assurance (TPA) when reconnecting connectors or replacing terminals. Front probe Disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the mating side (front) of the connector. Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test Probe Caution). Note: When probing female 0.64 terminals, it is important to use the correct adapter. There have been some revisions to the test adapter for 0.64 terminals. The proper adapter for 0.64 terminals is the EL-35616-64B which has a gold terminal and a black wire between the base and tip. Failure to use the proper test adapter may result in damage to the terminal being tested and improper diagnosis. Note: The proper adapter for probing the terminals for fuses, relays, or diodes in an electrical center is EL-35616-35. Using any other tool or adapter may damage the terminal being tested. Refer to the following table as a guide in selecting the correct test adapter for front probing connectors: Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4537 Backprobe Note: * Backprobe connector terminals only when specifically required in diagnostic procedures. * Do not backprobe a sealed (Weather Pack(R)) connector, less than a 280 series Metri-Pack connector, a Micro-Pack connector, or a flat wire (dock and lock) connector. * Backprobing can be a source of damage to connector terminals. Use care in order to avoid deforming the terminal, either by forcing the test probe too far into the cavity or by using too large of a test probe. * After backprobing any connector, inspect for terminal damage. If terminal damage is suspected, test for proper terminal contact. Do not disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the harness side (back) of the connector. Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure Using Snapshots in Global Diagnostic System (GDS) Overview Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4538 A snapshot is a recording of what a control module on the vehicle was receiving for information while the snapshot is being made. A snapshot may be used to analyze the data during the time a vehicle condition is current. This allows you to concentrate on making the condition occur, rather than trying to view all the data in anticipation of the fault. To record a snapshot in GDS, select, Record Snapshot, from the options at the top right portion of any of the various pages that allow snapshots to be taken (e.g. Data Display, Control Functions, etc.). When you are finished recording, select, Stop Snapshot recording. The snapshot will now be available for replay. Snapshot Replay The Snapshot Replay function allows reviews of previously recorded vehicle snapshot data. This information can be used in analysis of vehicle problems and detection of trigger error conditions. The graph function can be used to compare parameters to see if a component is functioning properly. Recorded snapshots can be selected for viewing by the following three methods: * Selecting a snapshot file from the Vehicle Home Page and clicking on the Review selection. * Double clicking on the selected snapshot from the Vehicle Home Page. * Entering the Tools selection from the Menu selection and selecting Snapshot replay. Next, open the Snapshot Manager. Double click on the snapshot file you wish to view or click on the Load Snapshot selection and select a snapshot file. Regardless of selection method, a File Loaded pop-up window will be displayed from the Snapshot Replay screen. Select OK from the pop-up window. Snapshot Play Functions There are several snapshot play functions that are used to replay recorded snapshots * The Play function is used to play the snapshot forward by clicking on this selection. A marker will move across the screen when this selection is used. All selections in this area turn grey when they are active. * The Pause function is used to pause play of the snapshot. When this selection is clicked a second time the snapshot will start playing where it left off. * The Stop function is used to stop playing the snapshot. The snapshot will start from the beginning, if Play is selected after using the Stop function. Time Control Time control is used to control the snapshot replay. This function allows selection of a specific time frame, display of different views, and control of display speed. The following functions can be selected directly under Time Control. * The Bookmark selection allows you to add a specific comment in the current display and return to this point in the future. When this option is selected, a pop-up window is displayed. Enter a bookmark name and select OK. * The Note Pad can be selected to add comments to the snapshot replay file at the current point of time. When this option is selected, a pop-up window is displayed. Enter a comment for the snapshot file and select OK. * The Load Snapshot (blue folder) opens a snapshot file and makes it ready for further analysis. This function is also available by clicking on an available snapshot file from the Snapshot Manager. * The Down Arrow displays all Time Control options when selected. Individual options can also be selected by clicking on the item you want. * The Snapshot Display Speed can be controlled by selecting this option. Slow speeds of 1/8X, 1/4X, and 1/2X can be selected. The real time speed can also be selected at 1. Faster speeds of 2X, 4X, and 8X can also be obtained by using this selection. View Selections Each View Selection provides a different way of displaying vehicle data for analysis. The following functions can be selected under Available Views: Note: The parameter name will be shown in the original language used for capture if no translation is available for the name. * Parameter List View - Displays incoming information from the snapshot file. The current value of the parameters is displayed on the screen. * Log View - Contains all the information from the snapshot file. All parameter values are listed in the order they were recorded. Specific parameters can be added or removed from a watchlist by clicking on the appropriate item. * State View - Shows the values of all parameters in a specific time frame. These values can be used for comparison with the trigger view. * Trigger View - Displays all system and user defined triggers. This function can be used when there is a combination of factors involved in a diagnostic problem. When a Trigger condition is met a caution triangle will be displayed on the screen. Triggers: * Load Triggers - Allows you to load a file containing trigger definitions. * Save Triggers - Allows you to save the trigger to your computer's hard drive. * Remove Trigger - Allows you to remove the current trigger. It will no longer be present. * Edit Trigger - Displays a pop-up window where you can modify the limits and parameters contained within a trigger. * Adds Trigger - Displays a pop-up window to configure a trigger. * DTC View - After the Play function is selected and this option is selected this function opens the list of recorded DTCs. * Line Graph View - Displays data that can be visualized against the time-axis. From this view, specific parameters can be selected for graphing by Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4539 checking the box under Selected. At the bottom of the graph there are four functions Zoom In (increase size), Zoom Out (decrease size), Bookmarks, and Pause Scrolling. Each of these functions can be accessed by clicking on them. Testing for Continuity Testing for Continuity Special Tools EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM) For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test Probe Caution). The following procedures verify good continuity in a circuit. With a Digital Multimeter (DMM) 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the Ohms position. 2. Disconnect the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 3. Disconnect the load. 4. Press the MIN MAX button on the DMM. 5. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 6. Connect the other lead of the DMM to the other end of the circuit. 7. If the DMM displays low or no resistance, the circuit has good continuity. With a Test Lamp Note: Only use the test lamp procedure on low impedance power and ground circuits. 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect one lead of the test lamp to one end of the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 5. Connect the other end of the circuit to ground. 6. If the test lamp illuminates (full intensity), then the circuit has good continuity. Testing for Electrical Intermittents Testing for Electrical Intermittents Special Tools EL-39200 Digital Multimeter For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Perform the following procedures while wiggling the harness from side to side. Continue this at convenient points (about 6 inches apart) while watching the test equipment. * Testing for Short to Ground (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Short to Ground) * Testing for Continuity (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Continuity) * Testing for a Short to Voltage (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for a Short to Voltage) If the fault is not identified, perform the procedure below using the MIN MAX feature on the EL-39200 DMM. This feature allows you to manipulate the circuit without having to watch the EL-39200. The EL-39200 will generate an audible tone when a change is detected. Note: The EL-39200 must be used in order to perform the following procedure since the EL-39200 can monitor current, resistance or voltage while recording the minimum (MIN), and maximum (MAX) values measured. 1. Connect the EL-39200 to both sides of a suspected connector (still connected), or from one end of a suspected circuit to the other. Refer to Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4540 Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter) for information on connecting the EL-39200 to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the EL-39200 to the V (AC) or V (DC) position. 3. Press the range button of the EL-39200 in order to select the desired voltage range. 4. Press the MIN MAX button of the EL-39200. The EL-39200 displays 100 ms RECORD and emits an audible tone (beep). Note: The 100 ms RECORD mode is the length of time an input must stay at a new value in order to record the full change. 5. Simulate the condition that is potentially causing the intermittent connection, either by wiggling the connections or the wiring, test driving, or performing other operations. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions). 6. Listen for the audible Min Max Alert which indicates that a new minimum or maximum value has been recorded. 7. Press the MIN MAX button once in order to display the MAX value and note the value. 8. Press the MIN MAX button again in order to display the MIN value and note the value. 9. Determine the difference between the MIN and MAX values. * If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is 1 V or greater an intermittent open or high resistance condition exists. Repair the condition as necessary. * If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is less than 1 V, an intermittent open or high resistance condition does not exist. Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections Special Tools EL-35616 Terminal Test Probe Kit For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). When the condition is not currently present, but is indicated in DTC history, the cause may be intermittent. An intermittent may also be the cause when there is a customer complaint, but the symptom cannot be duplicated. Refer to the Symptom Table of the system that is suspect of causing the condition before trying to locate an intermittent condition. Most intermittent conditions are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. Inspect for the following items: * Wiring broken inside the insulation * Poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector * Poor terminal to wire connection-Some conditions which fall under this description are poor crimps, poor solder joints, crimping over the wire insulation rather than the wire itself, and corrosion in the wire to terminal contact area, etc. * Pierced or damaged insulation can allow moisture to enter the wiring causing corrosion. The conductor can corrode inside the insulation, with little visible evidence. Look for swollen and stiff sections of wire in the suspect circuits. * Wiring which has been pinched, cut, or its insulation rubbed through may cause an intermittent open or short as the bare area touches other wiring or parts of the vehicle. * Wiring that comes in contact with hot or exhaust components * Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions) in order to duplicate the conditions required, in order to verify the customer concern. * Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Electrical Intermittents) for test procedures to detect intermittent open, high resistance, short to ground, and short to voltage conditions. * Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure) for advanced intermittent diagnosis and Vehicle Data Recorder operation. Testing for Terminal Fretting Some intermittent conditions can be caused by wire terminal fretting corrosion. Fretting corrosion is a build-up of insulating, oxidized wear debris that can form when there is a small motion between electrical contacts. The oxidized wear debris can pile up enough at the electrical contact spots that the electrical resistance across the connection increases. Movement between the contacting surfaces as small as 10 to 100 microns can cause fretting. To put this in perspective, a sheet of paper is about 100 microns thick, so fretting motion is small and hard to see. Vibration and thermal expansion/contraction are the main sources that create fretting motion. Since vehicles vibrate and can experience large temperature swings, they are a good source for fretting motion. Tin, copper, nickel, and iron surfaces are all susceptible to fretting corrosion. Fretting corrosion can be difficult to see but it looks like small, dark smudges on the terminals contact surface. To correct a fretting condition disconnect the suspect connector and add Nyogel lubricant 760G (dielectric grease) to both sides of the connector Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4541 terminals. Then reconnect the connector and wipe away any excess lubricant. This will correct the additional terminal contact resistance due to the terminal fretting corrosion. Testing for Proper Terminal Contact It is important to test terminal contact at the component and any inline connectors before replacing a suspect component. Mating terminals must be inspected to ensure good terminal contact. A poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector may be the result of contamination or deformation. Contamination may be caused by the connector halves being improperly connected. A missing or damaged connector seal, damage to the connector itself, or exposing the terminals to moisture and dirt can also cause contamination. Contamination, usually in the underhood or underbody connectors, leads to terminal corrosion, causing an open circuit or intermittently open circuit. Deformation is caused by probing the mating side of a connector terminal without the proper adapter. Always use the EL-35616 when probing connectors. Other causes of terminal deformation are improperly joining the connector halves, or repeatedly separating and joining the connector halves. Deformation, usually to the female terminal contact tang, can result in poor terminal contact causing an open or intermittently open circuit. Testing for Proper Terminal Contact in Bussed Electrical Centers It is very important to use the correct test adapter when testing for proper terminal contact of fuses and relays in a bussed electrical center. Use EL-35616-35 to test for proper terminal contact. Failure to use EL-35616-35 can result in improper diagnosis of the bussed electrical center. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact: 1. Separate the connector halves. 2. Visually inspect the connector halves for contamination. Contamination may result in a white or green build-up within the connector body or between terminals. This causes high terminal resistance, intermittent contact, or an open circuit. An underhood or underbody connector that shows signs of contamination should be replaced in its entirety: terminals, seals, and connector body. 3. Using an equivalent male terminal / terminated lead, verify that the retention force is significantly different between a known good terminal and the suspect terminal. Replace the female terminal in question. Flat Wire (Dock and Lock) Connectors There are no serviceable parts for flat wire (dock and lock) connectors on the harness side or the component side. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact: 1. Remove the component in question. 2. Visually inspect each side of the connector for signs of contamination. Avoid touching either side of the connector as oil from your skin may be a source of contamination as well. 3. Visually inspect the terminal bearing surfaces of the flat wire circuits for splits, cracks, or other imperfections that could cause poor terminal contact. Visually inspect the component side connector to ensure that all of the terminals are uniform and free of damage or deformation. 4. Insert the appropriate adapter from the on the flat wire harness connector in order to test the circuit in question. Control Module/Component Voltage and Grounds Poor voltage or ground connections can cause widely varying symptoms. * Test all control module voltage supply circuits. Many vehicles have multiple circuits supplying voltage to a control module. Other components in the system may have separate voltage supply circuits that may also need to be tested. Inspect connections at the module/component connectors, fuses, and any intermediate connections between the voltage source and the module/component. A test lamp or a DMM may indicate that voltage is present, but neither tests the ability of the circuit to carry sufficient current. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. Refer to Circuit Testing (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Circuit Testing) and Power Distribution Schematics (See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Starting and Charging/Power and Ground Distribution/System Diagram/Power Distribution Schematics). * Test all control module ground and system ground circuits. The control module may have multiple ground circuits. Other components in the system may have separate grounds that may also need to be tested. Inspect grounds for clean and tight connections at the grounding point. Inspect the connections at the component and in splice packs, where applicable. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. Refer to Circuit Testing (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Circuit Testing) and Ground Distribution Schematics (See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Starting and Charging/Power and Ground Distribution/System Diagram/Ground Distribution Schematics). Temperature Sensitivity * An intermittent condition may occur when a component/connection reaches normal operating temperature. The condition may occur only when the component/connection is cold, or only when the component/connection is hot. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4542 * Freeze Frame, Failure Records, Snapshot, or Vehicle Data Recorder data may help with this type of intermittent condition, where applicable. * If the intermittent is related to heat, review the data for a relationship with the following: - High ambient temperatures - Underhood/engine generated heat - Circuit generated heat due to a poor connection, or high electrical load - Higher than normal load conditions, towing, etc. * If the intermittent is related to cold, review the data for the following: - Low ambient temperatures-In extremely low temperatures, ice may form in a connection or component. Inspect for water intrusion. - The condition only occurs on a cold start. - The condition goes away when the vehicle warms up. * Information from the customer may help to determine if the trouble follows a pattern that is temperature related. * If temperature is suspected of causing an intermittent fault condition, attempt to duplicate the condition. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions) in order to duplicate the conditions required. Electromagnetic Interference and Electrical Noise Some electrical components/circuits are sensitive to electromagnetic interference or other types of electrical noise. Inspect for the following conditions: * A misrouted harness that is too close to high voltage/high current devices such as secondary ignition components, motors, generator etc.-These components may induce electrical noise on a circuit that could interfere with normal circuit operation. * Electrical system interference caused by a malfunctioning relay, or a control module driven solenoid or switch-These conditions can cause a sharp electrical surge. Normally, the condition will occur when the malfunctioning component is operating. * Improper installation of non-factory or aftermarket add on accessories such as lights, 2-way radios, amplifiers, electric motors, remote starters, alarm systems, cell phones, etc.-These accessories may lead to interference while in use, but do not fail when the accessories are not in use. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Checking Aftermarket Accessories). * Test for an open diode across the A/C compressor clutch and for other open diodes. Some relays may contain a clamping diode. * The generator may be allowing AC noise into the electrical system. Incorrect Control Module * There are only a few situations where reprogramming a control module is appropriate: - A new service control module is installed. - A control module from another vehicle is installed. - Revised software/calibration files have been released for this vehicle. Note: DO NOT re-program the control module with the SAME software/calibration files that are already present in the control module. This is not an effective repair for any type of concern. * Verify that the control module contains the correct software/calibration. If incorrect programming is found, reprogram the control module with the most current software/calibration. Refer to Control Module References (See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning) for replacement, setup, and programming. Testing for Short to Ground Testing for Short to Ground Special Tools * EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM) * EL 35616-200 - Test Light-Probe Kit For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test Probe Caution). The following procedures test for a short to ground in a circuit. With a Digital Multimeter (DMM) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4543 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the Ohms position. 4. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the other lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. If the DMM does NOT display infinite resistance (OL), there is a short to ground in the circuit. With a Test Lamp 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect one lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to one end of the circuit to be tested. 5. If the test lamp illuminates, there is a short to ground in the circuit. Fuse Powering Several Loads 1. Review the system schematic and locate the fuse that is open. 2. Open the first connector or switch leading from the fuse to each load. 3. Connect a DMM across the fuse terminals (be sure that the fuse is powered). * When the DMM displays voltage the short is in the wiring leading to the first connector or switch. * If the DMM does not display voltage refer to the next step. 4. Close each connector or switch until the DMM displays voltage in order to find which circuit is shorted. Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter Special Tools EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM) For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test Probe Caution). Digital Multimeter (DMM) Basic Requirements Service information is validated using digital multimeters that meet or exceed the following requirements. Using a multimeter that does not meet these basic requirements may give inaccurate readings which could lead to an incorrect diagnosis. Display and Settings 1. Four digits displayed 2. Voltage, amperage, resistance, frequency, diode test settings, and min-max function 3. Display positive and negative values Voltage 1. Have at least 10 Mohm input impedance 2. Test a DC voltage range of 0.1-1000 V. 3. Test an AC voltage range of 0.1-1000 V. Amperage 1. Test a DC amperage range of 0.1µA-10 A. 2. Test an AC amperage range of 0.1µA-10 A. Resistance Test a resistance range of 0.1 ohm-40 Mohm and displays infinite for a value greater than 40 Mohm (O.L. (Over-load)) Frequency Test for a frequency range of 0.5 HZ-199 K HZ Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4544 Diode Test 1. Apply at least 1 mA when performing the diode bias test 2. Display the break over voltage drop (0-3 V) of a forward biased diode 3. Display infinite (O.L. (Over-load)) when a diode is reverse biased Min-Max Readings 1. Can update at a 1 ms sample rate 2. Saves and displays minimum and maximum values Note: Circuits which include any solid state control modules, such as the engine control module (ECM), should only be tested with a 10 MOhms or higher impedance digital multimeter such as the EL-39200. The EL-39200 instruction manual is a good source of information and should be read thoroughly upon receipt of the DMM as well as kept on hand for future reference. A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present if the impedance is low enough, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. In other words, if there is not enough current, the test lamp will not illuminate even though voltage is present. The ohmmeter function on a DMM shows how much resistance exists between 2 points along a circuit. Low resistance in a circuit means good continuity. Note: Disconnect the power feed from the suspect circuit when measuring resistance with a DMM. This prevents incorrect readings. DMMs apply such a small voltage to measure resistance that the presence of voltages can upset a resistance reading. Diodes and solid state components in a circuit can cause a DMM to display a false reading. To find out if a component is affecting a measurement take a reading once, then reverse the leads and take a second reading. If the readings differ the solid state component is affecting the measurement. Following are examples of the various methods of connecting the DMM to the circuit to be tested: * Probe both ends of the connector and either hold the leads in place while manipulating the connector or tape the leads to the harness for continuous monitoring while you perform other operations or test driving. Refer to Probing Electrical Connectors (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Probing Electrical Connectors). * Disconnect the harness at both ends of the suspected circuit where it connects either to a component or to other harnesses. * If the system that is being diagnosed has a specified pinout or breakout box, it may be used in order to simplify connecting the DMM to the circuit or for testing multiple circuits quickly. Using Connector Test Adapters Using Connector Test Adapters Special Tools EL 35616 - Terminal Test Probe Kit For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Caution: Do not insert test equipment probes (DMM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the EL-38125-580 GM Approved Terminal Release Tool Kit in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the EL-38125-580 GM Approved Terminal Release Tool Kit , ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the EL-38125-580 GM Approved Terminal Release Tool Kit label on the inside of the EL-38125-580 GM Approved Terminal Release Tool Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Using Fused Jumper Wires Using Fused Jumper Wires Special Tools J 36169-A Fused Jumper Wire Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4545 Note: A fused jumper may not protect solid state components from being damaged. The J 36169-A includes small clamp connectors that provide adaptation to most connectors without damage. This fused jumper wire is supplied with a 20-A fuse which may not be suitable for some circuits. Do not use a fuse with a higher rating than the fuse that protects the circuit being tested. AFL/EPC Connectors AFL/EPC Connectors Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. 1. For connectors with a bolt in the dress cover, turn the bolt counterclockwise to remove the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4546 2. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the top of the wire dress cover. Slide the CPA forward. 3. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4547 View showing depressing of the lever lock release tab. View of connector in released position. 4. Disconnect the connector from the component. 5. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the dress cover. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs and remove the dress cover. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4548 6. Release the rear lower half of the wiredress cover. 7. Release the tabs that are holding the wiredress cover to the connector body. 8. Remove the nose piece by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the slots on both ends of the connector body. Gently pry the nose piece out of the connector. J 38125-216 can also be used to remove the nose piece. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4549 9. Use the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by lifting the terminal retaining tabs on the inside of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Bosch Connectors (BSK) Bosch Connectors (BSK) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4550 Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 3. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 4. Insert the J 38125-561 tool into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 5. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Bosch Connectors (ECM) Bosch Connectors (ECM) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4551 1. Locate the assist lever on the top of the connector. Move the assist lever to the forward position. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4552 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the connector. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the locking tabs and remove the dress cover. 4. The terminal positive assurance (TPA) is located in the front of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4553 5. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove TPA from the connector. 6. Use the J 38125-213 or the J 38125-556 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4554 Note: Ensure that the dress cover and connector body are both in the released position before reassembling. Failure to do so may cause damage to the connector and component. Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Bosch Connectors (0.64) Bosch Connectors (0.64) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While pressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock until the lever is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Pull the rubber boot that covers the wires back to expose the end of the connector dress cover. 4. Place the connector locking lever in the center of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4555 5. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs that are on the wire end of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover and connector body and pry up. 6. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs located on the opposite side of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover at the connector end and pry up. 7. Remove the dress cover. 8. Cut the tie wrap on the wire bundle. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4556 9. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting a small flat-bladed tool into the small slot in the end of the slider and pushing on the TPA until it comes out of the connector. When the TPA exits the opposite side of the connector, gasp the TPA and pull it completely out of the connector. 10. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 11. Insert the J 38125-560 into the 2 triangular cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 12. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Terminal Replacement Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4557 1. Prior to installation the terminal must be aligned so the (1) coding lugs align with the (2) coding grooves on the connector. 2. Once the terminal is aligned, slide the terminal into the cavity until the retainer has engaged in the cavity of the connector. 3. Slide the TPA in the connector body and seat it using a small flat bladed tool. The TPA is seated when it is flush with the contact housing. 4. Secure the wires to the connector body using a tie wrap and replace the dress cover and grommet. Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Pull out the slider on the connector position assurance (CPA) until it is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4558 5. Insert the J 38125-557 into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Connector Position Assurance Locks Connector Position Assurance Locks The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of the connector. CPAs are used in various connectors throughout the vehicle. CPAs are also used in all SIR system electrical connectors. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals, of the connector. Connector Repairs Connector Repairs Connector Repairs contains a list of all connector repairs. The connector repairs are listed by the connector manufacturer and then by connector type. If the technician cannot identify the manufacturer of the connector, refer to Identifying Connectors below. Knowing the connector manufacturer will assist in finding the correct connector repair from the following list: * Connector Position Assurance Locks (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Connector Position Assurance Locks) * Terminal Position Assurance Locks (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Terminal Position Assurance Locks) * AFL/EPC Connectors (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/AFL/EPC Connectors) * Bosch Connectors (BSK) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Bosch Connectors (BSK))Bosch Connectors (0.64) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Bosch Connectors (0.64))Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT))Bosch Connectors (ECM) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Bosch Connectors (ECM)) * Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack))Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Push to Seat))Delphi Connectors Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4559 (Pull To Seat) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Pull to Seat))Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W))Delphi Connectors (Micro.64) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Micro .64))Delphi Connectors (12-Way) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (12-Way))Delphi Connectors (Steering Gear) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Steering Gear)) * FCI Connectors (Lever Lock) (See: General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/FCI Connectors (Lever Lock))FCI Connectors (SIR) (See: General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/FCI (SIR)) * FEP Connectors (Steering Gear) (See: General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/FEP Connectors (Steering Gear)) * JST Connectors (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/JST Connectors) * Kostal Connectors (Glow Plug Control Module) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Kostal Connectors (Glow Plug Control Module))Kostal Connectors (Transmission) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Kostal Connectors (Transmission)) * Molex Connectors (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Molex Connectors) * Sumitomo Connectors (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Sumitomo Connectors) * Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way))Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor))Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap))Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way))Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module)) * Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Yazaki Connectors (2-Way))Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Yazaki Connectors (16-Way)) * Repairing Connector Terminals (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Repairing Connector Terminals) Connector Anatomy 1 - Connector Positive Assurance (CPA) 2 - Assist Lever 3 - Wiredress Cover 4 - Seal Strain/Relief Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4560 5 - Slide Left Hand 6 - Slide Right Hand 7 - Terminal Positive Assurance (TPA) 8 - Terminal Positive Assurance (TPA) 9 - Connector Seal 10 - Connector Housing 11 - Inner Connector Identifying Connectors Knowing the connector manufacturer is helpful when trying to locating the correct connector repair procedure. There are many different connector designs used on GM vehicles and it is sometimes difficult to identify the connector manufacturer. The information in this document should help with the identification of connector manufactures. The following connector manufacturers make most of the connectors found in GM vehicles: * AFL/EPC (Alcoa Fujikura Ltd./Engineered Plastics Components) * Bosch * Delphi * FCI (Framatome Connectors International) * JAE (Japan Aviation Electronics) * JST (Japan Solderless Terminals) * Kostel * Molex * Sumitomo * Tyco/AMP * Yazaki Identifying the manufacturer of a connector is often difficult. When trying to determine the manufacturer of a connector, look for specific identifying marks that are unique to that connector supplier. Most of these identify marks are hard to find or see. Check the connector carefully and refer to the information below for pictures and descriptions of connector identification markings. * Most of AFLs connectors have EPC on their connector body. Some of the smaller connectors will not have any markings on them. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4561 * In some cases Bosch will actually be printed on the connector. If Bosch does not appear on the connector, look for the Bosch logo. The Bosch logo is a circle with a blunted arrow inside. This logo can appear anywhere on the connector and is often very small. * In some cases Delphi will actually be printed on the connector. If Delphi is not printed on the connector, look for PED. In both cases there is no specific orientation for Delphi or PED and they can appear anywhere on the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4562 * FCI connectors may have the FCI logo on their connectors. The logo is the letters FCI with an "A" above it. * JAE connector have JAE in small letters on their connectors. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4563 * JST connectors have JST in small letters on their connectors, similar to that above. The location of the logo will vary with the connector size and style. * Kostel has an "LK" with a circle around it. These connector are usually used as a transmissions connection. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4564 * Most Molex connectors will have the Molex logo on the dresscover of the connector. In some cases the connectors may have MX followed by another letter. The third letter indicates where the connector was made. A connector with MXD is a Molex connector made in Detroit. Sumitomo has a unique symbol on their connector and possibly a part number. The symbol is similar to that of a diamond lying on its side, similar to that shown. The logo could appear anywhere but the most common place is at the wire side of the housing. * Tyco/AMP has many different and unique connector designs. Some may or may not have identifiable marks on them. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4565 * Yazaki has a wedge or arrow shape, similar to that shown. Delphi Connectors (Push to Seat) Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Follow the steps below in order to repair push to seat connectors. 1. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device, the connector position assurance (CPA) device, and/or the secondary lock. 2. Separate the connector halves (1). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4566 3. Use the proper pick or removal tool (1) in order to release the terminal. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 4. Gently pull the cable and the terminal (2) out of the back of the connector. 5. Re-form the locking device if you are going to reuse the terminal (1). 6. To repair the terminal, refer to Terminal Repair. Terminal Repair 1. Slip the cable seal away from the terminal. 2. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 3. Slip a new cable seal onto the wire. 4. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 5. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 6. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. 7. Slide the cable seal toward the terminal. 8. Crimp the cable seal and the insulation. 9. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply grease to the connector. Reinstalling Terminal 1. In order to reuse a terminal or lead assembly, refer to Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Wiring Repairs). 2. Ensure that the cable seal is kept on the terminal side of the splice. 3. Insert the lead from the back until it catches. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Terminated Lead Repair 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Find the appropriate terminated lead. 3. Use the appropriate splice sleeves depending on the gauge size. 4. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves). Delphi Connectors (Pull to Seat) Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) Special Tools Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4567 J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal If the terminal is visibly damaged or is suspected of having a faulty connection, the terminal should be replaced. Follow the steps below in order to repair pull-to-seat connectors: 1. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) device and/or the secondary lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component or separate the connectors for in-line connectors. 3. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device. 4. Insert the proper pick or removal tool into the front of the connector body. Note: On connectors with more than one terminal the service loop may not be large enough to remove the terminal and crimp on a new one. If the terminal wire does not have a large enough service loop for removal, cut the wire 5 cm (2 in) behind the connector before removal. 5. Grasp the wire at the back of the connector body and gently push the terminal out the front of the connector body. Terminal Repair 1. If the wire needed to be cut in order to remove the terminal, gently push a small length of the same size wire through the back of the connector cavity until there is enough wire exposed in order to crimp on a new terminal. If the wire was not cut, cut the existing wire as close to the old terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 4. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. Terminal Installation 1. Align the terminal and pull the wire from the back of the connector in order to seat the terminal. 2. If necessary, cut the new wire to proper length and splice with existing circuit. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves). 3. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply dielectric grease to the connector. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Micro .64) Delphi Connectors (Micro.64) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4568 Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro.64 connectors. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. The lever lock may be located on the top or sides of the wire dress cover. View of a typical Micro 64 connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4569 Depress the lock and pull the lever over and past the lock. View of the connector when released from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4570 View of another type of Micro 64 connector. Depress the locks that are located on both sides of the wiredress cover and pull the lever over and past the locks. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4571 View of the connector when released from the component. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the front of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool push down on one of the locking tabs and pull the cover up until the dress cover releases. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. 4. Once the front 2 locks are unlocked, lift the front of the dress cover and pull it forward. Note: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 5. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the small slot on the TPA and pushing down until the TPA releases. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4572 Note: Be careful not to angle or rock the J 38125-21 tool when inserting it into the connector or the tool may break. 6. Insert the J 38125-21 tool into the round canal between the terminals cavities at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Follow the steps below in order to repair Micro 64 connector terminals. The Micro 64 connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-64 (M jaw) was developed to crimp Micro 64 terminals. The J 38125-64 crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. The J 38125-64 crimping tool is also designed to crimp both the wire and the insulation at the same time. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro 64 terminals. Note: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gauge wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 1. Cut the wire as close to the damaged terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4573 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert terminal into the appropriate terminal holder until it hits bottom and stops. The correct terminal holder is determined by the wire size. Also ensure that the terminals wings are pointing towards the former on the tool and the release locator. 5. Insert the stripped cable into the terminal. Insulation should be visible on both sides of the terminal insulation wings. 6. Compress the handles until the ratchet automatically releases. 7. Place the terminal into the appropriate cavity and assemble the connector. Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4574 Terminal Removal Procedure There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W connectors. These connectors are very similar but use different terminals and have some minor physical differences also. The first connector design of the Micro-Pack 100W (1) has a white connector interface that holds the terminals. The second design of the Micro-Pack 100W (2) has a gray interface to hold the terminals. Also, the first design has terminal cavities that are further apart (3 mm centerline) and offset from the other row of terminal cavities in the connector. The second design has terminals cavities that are closer together (2.54 mm centerline) and aligned vertically. One other way to identify the second design is the thin strip of material that runs along the outside of the cavities. Note: There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W terminals which are very similar. Ensure that you have the correct terminal before crimping the new terminal to the wire. The first design connector uses the longer terminal (1) that has a raised area in front of the recess in the terminal. The second design connector uses the shorter terminal without the raised area. Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro-Pack 100W connectors. Some Micro-Pack 100W connector disassembly procedures will vary. Use this procedure as a guide. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4575 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Locate the nose piece locking tabs that are positioned on the side of the connector nose piece. The connector nose piece acts as a terminal positive assurance (TPA) and may be referred to as such. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to push in one of the locking tabs while gently pulling on the same side of the nose piece. 4. Repeat the procedure for the other locking tab and remove the nose piece. 5. Remove the wire dress cover. The following is a general procedure for wire dress cover removal. Use this procedure as a guide, some dress cover removal procedures may vary. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4576 6. Use fingers to squeeze the 2 locking legs of the cover. 7. Apply pressure and gently rock the cover until one locking leg is unseated. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4577 8. Continue to apply pressure and rock the cover until the second locking leg is unseated. Repeat procedure for the other side of the dress cover and remove the cover. 9. Use J 38125-12A to gently lift the terminal retaining tab while gently pulling the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. If the terminal is severely bent or damaged, it may be possible on some connectors to push the wire out of the front of the connector instead of pulling it through. This will prevent damage to the internal seals of the connector. Once the terminal is pushed out of the connector, cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible and pull the wire through the connector. Terminal Repair Procedure The Micro-Pack 100W connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool was developed to crimp Micro-Pack 100W terminals. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro-Pack 100 terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4578 1. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. Note: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gauge wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert the terminal into the crimp tool until the core wings are flush with the anvil on the crimp tool. Be sure that the wings are pointed toward the crimp tool former and release the spring locator. The locator will hold the terminal in place. Inspect the alignment of the terminal wings with the crimp tool former. If the terminal wings are wider than the crimp tool former, remove the terminal and bend the terminal wings in slightly. 5. Place stripped wire into terminal. 6. Crimp the new terminal to the wire. If a jam occurs, press the emergency release to open applicator. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4579 Terminal Replacement Procedure After the terminal is crimped to the wire perform the following procedure in order to replace Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the Terminal Removal Procedure. Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The following is the proper procedure for the repair of Weather Pack(R) Connectors. 1. Separate the connector halves (1). 2. Open the secondary lock. A secondary lock aids in terminal retention and is usually molded to the connector (1). 3. Grasp the wire and push the terminal to the forward most position. Hold the wire in this position. 4. Insert the Weather Pack(R) terminal removal tool J 38125-10A into the front (mating end) of the connector cavity until it rests on the cavity shoulder (1). 5. Gently pull on the wire to remove the terminal through the back of the connector (2). Note: Never use force to remove a terminal from a connector. 6. Inspect the terminal and connector for damage. Repair as necessary. Refer to Repairing Connector Terminals (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Repairing Connector Terminals). 7. Reform the lock tang (2) and reset terminal in connector body. 8. Close secondary locks and join connector halves. 9. Verify that circuit is complete and working satisfactorily. 10. Perform system check. Delphi Connectors (12-Way) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4580 Delphi Connectors (12-Way) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) and slide the lever lock away from the connector body. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs on the dress cover of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool release all of the locking tabs. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4581 4. Release the lower wire dress cover locking tab. 5. Release the upper wire dress cover locking tab. 6. Once the locks are unlocked, lift the dress cover off. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4582 Note: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 7. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the locking tabs on both sides of the TPA. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. 8. Remove the nose piece by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the locking tabs on both sides of the nose piece. Gently pry the nose piece out of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4583 9. Insert the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Delphi Connectors (Steering Gear) Delphi Connectors (Steering Gear) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4584 Removal Procedure 1. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the locking tab on the connector. 2. Push down the locking tab to release the connector. The small flat-bladed tool may need to be pushed down and angled back slightly to depress the locking tab. Pull on the connector body while releasing the locking tab to disconnect the connector. FCI Connectors (Lever Lock) FCI Connectors (Lever Lock) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4585 Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. 1. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. 2. The release tab is located on the top of the wiredress cover. 3. View of connector in released position. 4. Disconnect the connector from the component. 5. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the dress cover. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs and remove the dress cover. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4586 6. Use a small flat-blade tool to slide the terminal position assurance (TPA) up one notch on both ends of the connector. The TPA is located underneath the wire dress cover. For the larger terminals insert the J 38125-556 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. For the smaller terminals insert the J 38125-560 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4587 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. FCI (SIR) FCI Connectors (SIR) Removal Procedure Note: The orange CPA must be released first to disconnect or to connect the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4588 1. Lift the orange CPA vertically (avoid lifting on an angle to the connector) approximately 4 mm to release the connector. Use a small flat-bladed tool to help release the orange CPA. The orange CPA can also be released manually without any tools. 2. Grab the connector on both sides and lift the connector vertically to disconnect the connector. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4589 1. Lift the orange CPA vertically approximately 4 mm before installing the connector. Use a small flat-bladed tool to help release the orange CPA. The orange CPA can also be released manually without any tools. 2. Line up the connector key tabs with the initiator key slots. Grab the connector on both sides and push the connector down into the initiator connector sub assembly until fully seated. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4590 3. After the connector is fully seated, push down the orange CPA with your thumb. Push down until the orange CPA is touching the yellow cover on the connector. FEP Connectors (Steering Gear) FEP Connectors (Steering Gear) Removal Procedure 1. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the locking tab on the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4591 2. Push down the locking tab to release the connector. The small flat-bladed tool may need to be pushed down and angled back slightly to depress the locking tab. Pull on the connector body while releasing the locking tab to disconnect the connector. JST Connectors JST Connectors Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. While depressing the lock, remove the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4592 2. Locate the two indents of the terminal position assurance (TPA) located on the bottom of the connector body. Note: The TPA cannot be removed from the connector while there are terminals present in the connector body. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to very carefully raise the TPA on both sides of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4593 4. View of the TPA when removed from the connector body. 5. Use the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the left side of the terminal release cavity as shown in the graphic. Use the tool to move the terminal release to the right with a gentle prying motion. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Kostal Connectors (Glow Plug Control Module) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4594 Kostal Connectors (Glow Plug Control Module) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure View of typical connector. View of connector in released position. 1. Locate the assist lever at the back of the connector. Move the assist lever to the rear position. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4595 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove the dress cover. 4. Slide the dress cover forward and off of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4596 5. The terminal positive assurance (TPA) is located in the front and rear of the connector. Note: The front TPA cannot be removed from the connector. Only move it to the preset position. 6. Use a small flat-blade tool to move the front TPA to the preset position, outboard approximately 0.125 in. (3 mm). 7. Use a small flat-blade tool to completely remove the rear TPA from the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4597 8. Use the J 38125-24 or the J 38125-560 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 9. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Kostal Connectors (Transmission) Kostal Connectors (Transmission) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4598 1. While depressing the lock, twist and remove the connector from the component. 2. Locate the terminal position assurance (TPA). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4599 Note: The TPA cannot be removed from the connector while there are terminals present in the connector body. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to push the TPA until it bottoms out. 4. Use the J 38125-28 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal cavity as shown in the graphic. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 5. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Terminal Replacement Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4600 After the terminal is crimped to the wire, perform the following procedure in order to replace the terminal. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. Locate the terminal position assurance (TPA). 4. Use a small flat-blade tool to push the TPA until it bottoms out. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4601 5. Ensure the TPA is fully seated. The TPA should be centered and flush with the connector body when viewed. Molex Connectors Molex Connectors Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the top of the wire dress cover. Slide the CPA forward. 2. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4602 3. The lever should be in the full forward position. 4. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4603 5. Remove the dress cover by using a flat bladed tool to release the dress cover locking tabs and lift up on the dress cover. 6. Cut the tie wrap that holds the wires to the connector body. 7. Use a small flat-blade tool to pry one side of the nose piece up to the pre-stage position. When the nose piece is in the pre-staged position, the nose piece will be raised above the connector body the length of the step in the nose piece. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4604 8. Use a small flat-blade tool to pry the other side of the piece to the pre-stage position. If the nose piece is higher than the first step in the nose piece, gently push down on the nose piece until it meets with resistance from the connector body, you should feel the nose piece click into position. 9. Insert the J 38125-213 into the small terminal release hole on the nose piece and gently pull on the back of the wire. 10. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Refer to the terminal crimping procedure in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit. Terminal Replacement Procedure After the terminal is crimped to the wire, perform the following procedure in order to replace the terminal. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4605 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the connector disassembly procedure. Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the connector body and pull the CPA out. The CPA is on the wire harness side of connector. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Use a small flat-bladed tool to gently pry off the dress cover by inserting the tool under the cover opposite the harness side and prying up. 4. Remove the cover. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4606 5. Using a small flat-bladed tool, push on the side of the nose piece retainer while pushing the nose piece forward with your thumb. This will release the terminal position assurance (TPA). 6. Insert the J 38125-12A into the corresponding terminal release cavity. The release cavities are the 2 center rows of cavities on one half of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4607 7. Pressing the J 38125-12A tool in the release cavity of the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and crimper in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. Slide the lever lock away from the connector body. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs on the dress cover of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool release all of the locking tabs. 4. Once the locks are unlocked, lift the dress cover off. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4608 Note: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 5. Release the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the blue locking tabs on both ends of the connector. Gently slide the TPA up to the released position on both ends. 6. For the larger terminals insert the J 38125-13A tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. For the smaller terminals insert the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4609 View of the release tool being used for the larger terminals. View of the release tool being used for the larger terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4610 View of the release tool being used for the smaller terminals. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4611 Side view of connector. View of top of connector. 1. Locate the assist lever and lock on the top of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4612 2. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. 3. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4613 4. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the rear of the connector. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. 5. Once the locking tabs are unlocked, slide the inner connector out of the rear of the connector housing. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4614 6. Use the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by pressing on the tang. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Repairing Connector Terminals Repairing Connector Terminals Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Use the following repair procedures in order to repair the following: * Push to Seat terminals * Pull to Seat terminals Some terminals do not require all of the steps shown. Skip the steps that do not apply for your terminal repair. The J-38125 contains further information. 1. Cut off the terminal between the core and the insulation crimp. Minimize any wire loss. For cable seal terminals, remove the seal. 2. Apply the correct cable seal per gauge size of the wire, if used. Slide the seal back along the wire in order to enable insulation removal. 3. Remove the insulation. 4. For sealed terminals only, align the seal with the end of the cable insulation. 5. Position the strip in the terminal. For sealed terminals, position the strip and seal in the terminal. 6. Hand crimp the core wings. 7. Hand crimp the insulation wings. For sealed terminals, hand crimp the insulation wings around the seal and the cable. 8. Solder all of the hand crimp terminals excepting Micro-Pack 100.64 size. Soldering Micro-Pack 100 World terminals may damage the terminal. Sumitomo Connectors Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4615 Sumitomo Connectors Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4616 3. Remove the dress cover by using a flat-blade tool to release the connector locking tabs and pulling off the dress cover. 4. Relieve the tension on the nose piece retainers by inserting J 38125-12A into the single retainer slot on the end of the nose piece and gently prying out the locking tab. Repeat the process for both of the nose piece locking tabs on the opposite side of the nose piece. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4617 5. Once the nose piece retainers are relaxed, use the J 38125-552 to pull up the nose piece by hooking the tool under the nose piece and pulling up. The nose piece should raise slightly. 6. On the opposite side of the nose piece, use the J 38125-552 to pull up the nose piece by hooking the tool under the nose piece and pulling up. The nose piece should release completely. If the nose piece does not come off, repeat the procedure on the opposite side. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4618 7. The illustration above identifies the entry canal where the terminal release tool will be inserted, and the terminal cavity. * Terminal (1) * Entry Canal (2) 8. Insert the J 38125-553 tool into the entry canal and pry up on the terminal retainer. The terminal retainer is a small plastic piece on the top of the terminal. The terminal retainer must be held up while the terminal is pulled out of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4619 9. The illustration shows a cutaway view of the connector to aid the technician in releasing the terminal retainer. 10. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Refer to the terminal crimping procedure in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit. Terminal Replacement Procedure After the terminal is crimped to the wire, perform the following procedure in order to replace the terminal. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the connector disassembly procedure. Terminal Position Assurance Locks Terminal Position Assurance Locks The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4620 2. Insert the J 38125-11A tool into the cavity on the lower right hand face of the connector until the terminal release tang access panel slides over. 3. Ensure that the terminal release tang access panel is in the correct location to access the terminals. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4621 5. Insert the J 38125-11A into the terminal release tang access slot located behind the access panel of the connector and press down on the terminal while carefully pulling the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component by pressing down on the connector position assurance (CPA). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4622 2. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting the tool in the small recess on the side of the connector and pushing up until the TPA releases from the connector body. The TPA should raise just slightly. Do not try to remove the TPA. Note: The TPA on this connector cannot be removed unless the terminals are removed first. The TPA will come out of the connector body, but only slightly. When the TPA is slightly raised the terminals can be removed. Using excessive force to remove the TPA with the terminals still in the connector will damage the connector. 3. Repeat the process for the other side of the connector. 4. Ensure that the TPA is in the proper position to remove the terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4623 5. While pushing the terminal forward, insert the J 38125-24 in the release cavity above the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4624 2. Insert a small flat-blade tool in the slot below the front loaded terminal position assurance (TPA) and pry up. 3. Remove the TPA by pulling it out of the connector. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-553 on a slight upward angle into the cavity below the terminal to be removed. Ensure that the pointed on the end of the tool is facing the bottom of the terminal and it stays in contact with the terminal until it stops on the plastic terminal retainer. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4625 6. Gently pry the plastic terminal retainer down and carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4626 1. While depressing the lock, pull the two connector halves apart. Note: The TPA is fragile and may break if not done carefully. 2. Use a small flat-blade tool to very carefully push the terminal position assurance (TPA) towards the face of the connector on both sides of the connector. 3. View of the male half of the connector with female terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4627 4. View of the female half of the connector with male terminals. 5. Use the J 38125-215 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. View of the female half of the connector with male terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4628 7. View of the male half of the connector with female terminals. 8. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers A circuit breaker is a protective device that is designed to open the circuit when a current load is in excess of the rated breaker capacity. If there is a short or other type of overload condition in the circuit, the excessive current will open the circuit between the circuit breaker terminals. Two types of circuit breakers are used. Circuit Breaker - This type opens when excessive current passes through it for a period of time. It closes again after a few seconds, and if the cause of the high current is still present, it will open again. The circuit breaker will continue to cycle open and closed until the condition causing the high current is removed. Positive Temperature Coefficient (PTC) Circuit Breaker - This type greatly increases its resistance when excessive current passes through it. The excessive current heats the PTC device, as the device heats its resistance increases. Eventually the resistance gets so high that the circuit is effectively open. Unlike the ordinary circuit breaker the PTC unit will not reset until the circuit is opened, by removing the voltage from its terminals. Once the voltage is removed the circuit breaker will re-close within a second or 2. Circuit Protection - Fuses Circuit Protection - Fuses Special Tools EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM) For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4629 The fuse is the most common method of an automotive wiring circuit protection. Whenever there is an excessive amount of current flowing through a circuit the fusible element will melt and create an open or incomplete circuit. Fuses are a one time protection device and must be replaced each time the circuit is overloaded. To determine if a fuse is open, remove the suspected fuse and examine if the element in the fuse is broken (2). If not broken (1), also check for continuity using a Digital Multimeter (DMM) or a continuity tester. If the element is broken or continuity is suspect, replace the fuse with one of equal current rating. Circuit Protection - Fusible Links Circuit Protection - Fusible Links Special Tools EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM) For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Fusible link is wire designed to melt and break continuity when excessive current is applied. It is often located between or near the battery and starter or electrical center. Use a continuity tester or a Digital Multimeter (DMM) at each end of the wire containing the fusible link in order to determine if it is broken. If broken, it must be replaced with fusible link of the same gauge size. Repairing a Fusible Link Note: Fusible links cut longer than 225 mm (approximately 9 in) will not provide sufficient overload protection. Flat Wire Repairs Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4630 Flat Wire Repairs The flat wire within the flex wiring harness is not serviceable. If an open or short exists within the flex wiring harness the complete harness must be replaced. GMLAN Wiring Repairs GMLAN Wiring Repairs Special Tools * EL-38125-10 - Splice Sleeve Crimping Tool * J 38125-5 - Ultra Torch Special Tool * DuraSeal splice sleeves * A wire stripping tool For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: * A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. * A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The GM Local Area Network (GMLAN) System requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working on GMLAN connectors and terminals. GMLAN Repairs Note: When making a repair to any GMLAN network, the original wire length after the repair must be the same length as before the repair. If the network is a twisted pair, the twist must be maintained after the repair is completed. GMLAN has 2 types of networks, low speed and high speed. Low speed GMLAN has a single wire and works at slow speeds. High speed GMLAN has 2 wires in a twisted pair and works at higher speeds. For more information on GMLAN, refer to Data Link Communications Description and Operation ( See: Computers and Control Systems/Information Bus/Description and Operation). GMLAN Connector Terminal Repair Note: A terminated lead can be used to replace damaged connector terminals for both high speed and low speed GMLAN systems. When making a connector terminal repair on a GMLAN high speed system with twisted pair wires, do not untwist the wires more than necessary to make the repair. If the individual terminals are damaged on any GMLAN connection, use the appropriate connector repair procedure in order to repair the terminal. Refer to Connector Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Connector Repairs) for the appropriate connector repair procedure. GMLAN Wire Repair Note: Refer to Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Wiring Repairs) in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gauge size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and EL-38125-10 - tool. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the DuraSeal splice sleeves. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4631 Note: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: * Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. * Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. * Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert to regional wiring gauge size. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the EL-38125-10 - tool in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the splice sleeve crimp tool. The crimp tool has four nests, one for each color. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4632 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs Caution: Do not solder repairs under any circumstances as this could result in the air reference being obstructed. If the heated oxygen sensor pigtail wiring, connector, or terminal is damaged the entire oxygen sensor assembly must be replaced. Do not attempt to repair the wiring, connector, or terminals. In order for the sensor to function properly it must have a clean air reference. This clean air reference is obtained by way of the oxygen sensor signal and heater wires. Any attempt to repair the wires, connectors or terminals could result in the obstruction of the air reference and degrade oxygen sensor performance. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4633 The following guidelines should be used when servicing the heated oxygen sensor: * Do not apply contact cleaner or other materials to the sensor or vehicle harness connectors. These materials may get into the sensor, causing poor performance. Also, the sensor pigtail and harness wires must not be damaged in such a way that the wires inside are exposed. This could provide a path for foreign materials to enter the sensor and cause performance problems. * Neither the sensor nor vehicle lead wires should be bent sharply or kinked. Sharp bends, kinks, etc., could block the reference air path through the lead wire. * Do not remove or defeat the oxygen sensor ground wire (where applicable). Vehicles that utilize the ground wire sensor may rely on this ground as the only ground contact to the sensor. Removal of the ground wire will also cause poor engine performance. * To prevent damage due to water intrusion, be sure that the peripheral seal remains intact on the vehicle harness connector. High Temperature Wiring Repairs High Temperature Wiring Repairs Special Tools * EL-38125-10 - Splice Sleeve Crimping Tool * J 38125-5 - Ultra Torch * DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). High Temperature Wiring Wiring that is exposed to high temperatures, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time may use materials i.e. wires, connectors, and shielding that has a higher heat rating than typical wiring. When making a repair in a high temperature area observe the following: * Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature to replace any damaged wire. * Replace any heat shielding that is removed. * Cover any DuraSeal splice sleeves with SCT1 shrink tubing. * After making a wiring repair, ensure that the location of the wiring is not moved closer to the heat source. Identifying High Temperature Wiring Wiring that is exposed to high temperature, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time need special considerations when making wiring repairs. Areas that may be exposed to higher temperatures can be identified by heat resistant materials that are being used in those areas. These materials may include heat reflective tape, moon tape, and high temperature shrink tubing. Also conduit and other protective coverings may be used. Because conduit or similar coverings are used throughout the vehicle regardless of the temperature, it may be necessary for the technician to determine if an area is exposed to excessive heat before making a wiring repair. Obvious areas of consideration would be any area located near the exhaust manifolds, catalytic converter, and exhaust pipes. Items Required * DuraSeal splice sleeves to crimp and seal connections * High temperature SCT1 shrink tubing to protect the splice sleeves * Terminated leads or pigtails * The correct tools to remove the terminals from the connectors Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature of the same or larger gauge size as the original wire when repair damage wire. Also replace any reflective tape that you remove during the repair. High Temperature Wire Repair Note: Refer to Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Wiring Repairs) in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature rating of the same gauge size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the EL-38125-10 - tool and then encapsulate the splice sleeve using the high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4634 Note: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: * Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. * Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. * Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert to regional wiring gauge size. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Slide a section of high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing down the length of wire to be spliced. Ensure that the shrink tubing will not interfere with the splice procedure. 5. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 6. Use the EL-38125-10 - tool in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the splice sleeve crimp tool. The crimp tool has four nests, one for each color. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4635 7. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 8. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 9. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 10. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 11. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4636 12. Center the high temperature SCT1 shrink tube over the DuraSeal splice sleeve. 13. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the high temperature heat shrink tubing. 14. Gradually move the heat from the center to the open end of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. 15. Replace any reflective tape and clips that may have been remove during the repair. Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation If the wire insulation has been chafed, or broken, enough to show the conductive portion of the wire, and the wire is not damaged, determine the length of insulation that needs to be repaired. If the repair is less than 280 mm (11 in), cut the wire within the damaged area. Than slide the appropriate heat shrink tubing (listed below) over the wire, and repair the wire by splicing the wires together. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves). Once the wire is spliced together slide heat shrink tubing over the damaged area and apply heat to seal the repaired wire. If the wire is damaged, or the damaged area is larger than 280 mm (11 in), than replace the damaged wire by splicing in a new section of wire. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4637 SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs Special Tools * EL-38125-10 - Splice Sleeve Crimping Tool * J 38125-5 - Ultra Torch * DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: * A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. * A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides the necessary low resistance contact integrity for these sensitive, low energy circuits. The Supplemental Inflatable Restraint (SIR) System/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working with the SIR/SRS, and the wiring components, such as connectors and terminals. SIR/SRS Connector Repair (Plastic Body and Terminal Metal Pin) Note: Do not use the terminals in the kit in order to replace damaged SIR/SRS system terminals. Use either an SIR/SRS pigtail or a terminated lead from the SIR Repair Kit Tray. The terminals in the SIR/SRS system are made with a special plating. This plating provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. Pigtail repair packs are available for SIR/SRS connectors with eight or less terminals. Only the connector body is available for connectors with more than eight terminals. Terminated leads can be used to replace damaged terminals when replacing the connector body. SIR/SRS Component Wire Pigtail Repair Note: Do not make wire, connector, or terminal repairs on components with wire pigtails. A wire pigtail is a wire or wires attached directly to the device, not by a connector. If a wiring pigtail is damaged, you must replace the entire component, with pigtail. The inflatable restraint steering wheel module coil is an example of a pigtail component. SIR/SRS Wire Repair Note: Refer to Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Wiring Repairs) in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4638 If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gauge size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and EL-38125-10 - tool. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the DuraSeal splice sleeves. Note: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: * Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. * Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. * Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert to regional wiring gauge size. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the EL-38125-10 - tool in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the splice sleeve crimp tool. The crimp tool has four nests, one for each color. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4639 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Connector Position Assurance (CPA) The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of a connector. CPAs are used in all SIR System connectors and also in some connectors of other systems. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals of a connection. Terminal Position Assurance (TPA) The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4640 Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Special Tools * EL-38125-10 - Splice Sleeve Crimping Tool * J 38125-5 - Ultra Torch * DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Note: Use only DuraSeal splice sleeves. Other splice sleeves may not protect the splice from moisture or provide a good electrical connection. Use DuraSeal splice sleeves to form a one-to-one splice on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. Use DuraSeal splice sleeves where there is special requirements such as moisture sealing. Follow the instructions below in order to splice copper wire using DuraSeal splice sleeves. Note: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: * Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. * Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. * Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert to regional wiring gauge size. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4641 5. Use the EL-38125-10 - tool in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the splice sleeve crimp tool. The crimp tool has four nests, one for each color. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4642 * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Splicing Inline Harness Diodes Splicing Inline Harness Diodes Many vehicle electrical systems use a diode to isolate circuits and protect the components from voltage spikes. When installing a new diode use the following procedure. 1. Open the harness. * If the harness is taped, remove the tape. * To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing seam ripper (available from sewing supply stores) in order to cut open the harness. * If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the diode. 2. If the diode is taped to the harness, remove all of the tape. 3. Check and record the current flow direction and orientation of diode. 4. Remove the inoperative diode from the harness with a suitable soldering tool. Note: If the diode is located next to a connector terminal remove the terminal(s) from the connector to prevent damage from the soldering tool. 5. Carefully strip away a section of insulation next to the old soldered portion of the wire(s). Do not remove any more than is needed to attach the new diode. 6. Check current flow direction of the new diode, being sure to install the diode with correct bias. Reference the appropriate service manual wiring schematic to obtain the correct diode installation position. 7. Attach the new diode to the wire(s) using 60/40 rosin core solder. Before soldering attach some heat sinks (aluminum alligator clips) across the diode wire ends to protect the diode from excessive heat. Follow the manufacturer's instruction for the soldering equipment. 8. Reinstall terminal(s) into the connector body if previously removed. Note: To prevent shorts to ground and water intrusion, completely cover all exposed wire and diode attachment points with tape. 9. Tape the diode to the harness or connector using electrical tape. Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable Twisted/shielded cable is used in order to protect wiring from electrical noise. Two-conductor cable of this construction is used between the radio and the Delco-Bose(R) speaker/amplifier units and other applications where low level, sensitive signals must be carried. Follow the instructions below in order to repair the twisted/shielded cable. 1. Remove the outer jacket (1). Use care not to cut into the drain wire of the mylar tape. 2. Unwrap the tape. Do not remove the tape. Use the tape in order to rewrap the twisted conductors after the splice is made. 3. Prepare the splice. Untwist the conductors and follow the instructions for Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves). Staggering the splices by 65 mm (2.5 in) is recommended. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4643 Note: Apply the mylar tape with the aluminum side inward. This ensures good electrical contact with the drain wire. 4. Re-assemble the cable. * Rewrap the conductors with the mylar tape. If the mylar tape is damaged, use 3M product AL-36FR to replace the damaged mylar tape. * Use caution not to wrap the drain wire in the tape (1). * Follow the splicing instructions for copper wire and splice the drain wire. * Wrap the drain wire around the conductors and tape with electrical tape to replace the outer insulation. 5. Tape over the entire cable. Use a winding motion when you apply the tape. Wiring Repairs Wiring Repairs The Wiring Repairs section contains the following types of wiring repair information. Using these elements together will make wiring repair faster and easier: * Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections) * Flat Wire Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Flat Wire Repairs) * GMLAN Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/GMLAN Wiring Repairs) * High Temperature Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/High Temperature Wiring Repairs) * Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs) * Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves) * Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable) * Splicing Inline Harness Diodes (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Inline Harness Diodes) * SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs) US English/Metric Conversion US English/Metric Conversion Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4644 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4645 Basic Digital Multimeter Requirements Basic Digital Multimeter Requirements Digital Multimeter (DMM) Basic Requirements Service information is validated using digital multimeters that meet or exceed the following requirements. Using a multimeter that does not meet these basic requirements may give inaccurate readings which could lead to an incorrect diagnosis. Display and Settings 1. Four digits displayed 2. Voltage, amperage, resistance, frequency, diode test settings, and min-max function 3. Display positive and negative values Voltage 1. Have at least 10 Mohm input impedance 2. Test a DC voltage range of 0.1-1000 V. 3. Test an AC voltage range of 0.1-1000 V. Amperage 1. Test a DC amperage range of 0.1µA-10 A. 2. Test an AC amperage range of 0.1µA-10 A. Resistance Test a resistance range of 0.1 ohm-40 Mohm and displays infinite for a value greater than 40 Mohm (O.L. (Over-load)) Frequency Test for a frequency range of 0.5 HZ-199 K HZ Diode Test 1. Apply at least 1 mA when performing the diode bias test 2. Display the break over voltage drop (0-3 V) of a forward biased diode 3. Display infinite (O.L. (Over-load)) when a diode is reverse biased Min-Max Readings 1. Can update at a 1 ms sample rate 2. Saves and displays minimum and maximum values Testing Ground and Low Reference Circuits Testing Ground and Low Reference Circuits Because a test lamp can light with up to 200 ohm in a ground or low reference circuit they are not recommended to be used for this type of test. A low impedance test lamp can light and indicate the circuit is good when there is as much as 20-30 ohm present, while a high impedance test lamp can light with up to 200 ohm present in the circuit. This is why the Digital Multi-Meter (DMM) is used when validating a ground or low reference circuit continuity. When using the DMM there are many vehicle conditions that can affect the ground and low reference continuity testing. If these conditions are not met, a ground or low reference circuit test can fail on a good circuit. This may cause longer diagnosis time and incorrect component replacement. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4646 Any current flow through a ground or low reference circuit, while being tested, will skew the DMM continuity reading, or display a reading higher than when there is no current flowing. Performing a ground or low reference circuit continuity test, in reference to the vehicles battery negative terminal, will have the highest risk of failing a good ground or low reference circuit test than any other ground reference point. The best ground test points would be a control module housing (if the control modules housing is metal and grounded), door jamb striker (if attached to metal), under dash metal frame work, engine block, or body ground studs (other than where the negative battery cable is attached). A typical DMM ground or low reference circuit continuity reading can be as high as 100 ohm with the ignition ON, and drop to 15-25 ohm after the ignition is turned OFF. The reading will drop below 10 ohm after 30-40 seconds, then below 5 ohm after 60 seconds. Once the vehicle completely goes to sleep (generally 3-10 minutes) the reading will drop below 0.3 ohm. The following list of conditions may need to be met to ensure a valid continuity reading on a ground or low reference circuit: * Ignition OFF * Key out of the ignition switch (when not equipped with keyless entry and remote start) * Retained Accessory Power (RAP) OFF (open and close the driver door after ignition OFF) * Battery charger set at a 2 A or less charge rate * Scan tool not communicating with any vehicle control module (in some cases it may need to be disconnected from the DLC) * All entry doors closed * Headlamps OFF (auto headlamps disabled) * Any delay lighting OFF * HVAC after blow OFF * Any accessory that can work when the ignition is OFF * Wait up to 60 seconds (after all other listed conditions are met) Activating the DOOR LOCK function with a key fob can greatly reduce the time to achieve a valid ground or low reference continuity test result. Terminal Wiring Repair Terminal Wiring Repair Special Tools * EL-38125-10 - Splice Sleeve Crimp Tool * EL-38125-580 - Terminal Release Tool Kit * J-38125-5 - Ultra Torch * EL-35616 - Connector Test Adapter Kit For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Note: All repairs near the engine manifold, turbo engine and all exhaust pipes should follow the High Temperature Wiring Repair procedures. 1. Find the appropriate connector end view within the connector end view section. The connector end view has the following information: * Diagnostic probe tool * Terminal release tool * Terminal/terminated lead part numbers 2. Determine if a terminal is damaged. Note: Not using the proper test kit probe may cause damage to the terminal(s) that are probed. * Locate the diagnostic probe tool from the connector end view. The connector end view describes the color and part number to help the technician find and use the correct tool. * Connect the probe tool to the Digital Multimeter. * Insert the probe tool into the cavity and follow the procedures from the Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter). 3. Disconnect the connector body to perform the repair. Note: Several procedures for specific connector bodies are called out in Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Wiring Repairs). Use the following repair procedures to repair the following terminals: Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4647 Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack))Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Push to Seat))Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Pull to Seat))Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W))Delphi Connectors (Micro.64) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Micro .64) )Delphi Connectors (12-Way) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (12-Way))Delphi Connectors (Steering Gear) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Steering Gear)) * The TPA and CPA should be removed before releasing the terminal for the connector body. * Look at the connector end view to locate the cavity of the damaged terminal and find the proper terminal release tool from the terminal release tool kit. Note: Using the incorrect terminal release tool can damage the connector body. * Insert the terminal release tool into the cavity. Note: Some terminals have a lever that must be disengaged before the terminal can be released. Gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Terminated Lead Repair Terminated Lead Repair Special Tools * EL-38125-10 - Splice Sleeve Crimp Tool * EL-38125-580 - Terminal Release Tool Kit * J-38125-5 - Ultra Torch * EL-35616 - Connector Test Adapter Kit For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Note: All repairs near the engine manifold, turbo engine and all exhaust pipes should follow the High Temperature Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/High Temperature Wiring Repairs) procedures. Terminated leads are terminals that are crimped onto wires. The terminated lead can be used throughout the vehicle since it is designed for temperatures up to 150°C. The length of the wire is 450 mm. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4648 The DuraSeal splice sleeve has the following 2 critical features: * A special heat shrink tubing that environmentally seals the splice. The shrink tubing contains a sealing adhesive inside the shrink tubing. * A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp that provides the necessary contact integrity for sensitive low energy circuits. 1. Use the connector end view to identify the correct terminated lead. 2. The terminated lead package should include a DuraSeal splice sleeve. If not, use the chart to identify the correct part. 3. Open the harness by removing any tape: Use a sewing seam ripper, or a comparable tool, to cut open the harness, to avoid wire insulation damage. 4. Depending on how many terminals need repairs, cut the terminal and wire back at least 40 mm. Try to keep the harness wire length the same. If more than one terminated lead is required, stagger the lengths by 40 mm. This helps reduce the bundle size of the wire harness. 5. Use the EL-38125-10 - tool in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the splice sleeve crimp tool. The crimp tool has four nests, one for each color. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4649 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the J-38125-5 - ultra torch , apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4650 Shift Solenoid: Exploded Views Disassembled Views Disassembled Views Case and Associated Parts 1 - Control Valve Body Cover Bolt 2 - Control Valve Body Cover Assembly 3 - Control Valve Body Cover Gasket 4 - Control Valve Body Bolt 5 - Control Valve Body Cover Hole Seal 6 - Control Solenoid Valve Heat Sink Bolt 7 - Control Solenoid (w/Body and TCM) Valve Assembly 8 - Control Valve Body Filter Plate Assembly 9 - Control Valve Body Bolt 10 - Control Valve Body Bolt 11 Control Valve Body Assembly 12 - Control Valve Body Spacer Plate Assembly 13 - A/Trans Fluid Level Control Valve 14 - A/Trans Fluid Level Control Valve Gasket 15 - A/Trans Output Speed Sensor Bolt Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4651 16 - A/Trans Output Speed Sensor Assembly 17 - Manual Shaft Detent Spring Bolt 18 - Manual Shaft Detent Lever Spring Assembly 19 - A/Trans Input Speed Sensor Assembly 20 - A/Trans Input Speed Sensor Assembly O-Ring Seal 21 - A/Trans Input Speed Sensor Bolt 22 - Fill Cap 23 - Fill Cap Seal 24 - Torque Converter Housing Gasket 25 - A/Trans Fluid Pump Seal Assembly 26 Torque Converter with Fluid Pump Housing Assembly 27 - Torque Converter and Differential Housing Bolt 28 - A/Trans Fluid Fill Tube Plug Assembly 29 - Torque Converter Assembly Control Valve Body Assembly (1 of 2) 400 - Control Valve Body Bolt 401 - Control Solenoid Valve Support 402 - Valve Channel Plate 403 - Channel Plate to Valve Body Spacer Plate Assembly 404 - Control Valve Body Ball Check Valve 405 - Control Valve Body Assembly Component Location Component Location Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4652 1 - Reaction Carrier Assembly 2 - Control Valve Body Assembly 3 - Input Carrier Assembly 4 Valve Channel Plate 5 - Output Carrier Assembly 6 - Park Gear 7 - Control Solenoid (w/Body and TCM) Valve Assembly 8 - Drive Link Assembly 9 - Drive Sprocket 10 - Torque Converter Assembly 11 - A/Trans Fluid Pump Assembly 12 - Differential Carrier Assembly 13 - Front Differential Ring Gear 14 - Driven Sprocket 15 - 1-2-3-4 Clutch Assembly 16 - Low and Reverse Clutch Assembly 17 - 2-6 Clutch Assembly 18 - 3-5 Reverse Clutch Assembly 19 - 4-5-6 Clutch Assembly 20 A/Trans Input Speed Sensor Assembly 21 - Reaction Sun Gear Assembly Component Location Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4653 Component Location Component Locations 1 - Manual Shift Detent Lever Assembly (w/Shaft Position Switch) 2 - Trans Fluid Level Indicator 3 Reaction Carrier Assembly 4 - Output Speed Sensor 5 - Input Carrier Assembly 6 - Output Carrier Assembly 7 - Front Differential Transfer Drive Gear 8 - Front Differential Transfer Drive Gear Support Assembly 9 - Torque Converter Assembly 10 - Park Pawl Actuator Assembly 11 - Fluid Pump Drive Link Assembly 12 - Park Pawl 13 - Front Differential Transfer Driven Gear 14 - Front Differential Drive Pinion Gear 15 - Park Gear 16 - Torque Converter and Support and Fluid Pump Housing Assembly 17 - Front Differential Carrier Assembly 18 - Front Differential Carrier Baffle 19 Front Differential Ring Gear Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4654 20 - Front Differential Drive Pinion Gear Lube Tube 21 - 1-2-3-4 Clutch Assembly 22 - Low and Reverse Clutch Assembly (OWC) 23 - Low and Reverse Clutch 24 - 2-6 Clutch Assembly 25 3-5-Reverse Clutch Assembly 26 - 4-5-6 Clutch Assembly 27 - Input Speed Sensor 28 - Case Cover Assembly 29 - Control Valve Body Cover 30 - Input Shaft Speed Sensor Reluctor Wheel 31 Control Valve Lower Body Assembly 32 - Control Valve Upper Body Assembly 33 - Control Valve Channel Plate Assembly 34 - Control Solenoid Valve Assembly (w/Body and TCM) 35 - Manual Valve Disassembled Views Disassembled Views Case and Associated Parts Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4655 1 - Control Valve Body Cover Assembly 2 - Transmission Fluid Level Indicator Assembly 3 - Fluid Level Indicator Tube - Model Dependent 4 - Fluid Level Indicator Tube Seal - Model Dependent 5 - Control Valve Body Cover Assembly Gasket 6 - Control Valve Body Cover Stud 7 - Control Valve Body Cover Bolt 8 - Control Valve Body Bolt 9 - Control Valve Body Bolt 10 - Control Valve Body Cover Wiring Connector Hole Seal 11 - Control Solenoid Valve Spring 12 - Control Valve Body Bolt 13 - Control Valve Body Bolt 14 - Control Valve Body Bolt 15 - Control Solenoid (w/Body and TCM) Valve Assembly 16 - Control Solenoid (w/Body and TCM) Filter Plate Assembly 17 - Manual Shaft Detent Assembly 18 - Control Valve Body Assembly 19 - A/Trans Output Speed Sensor Assembly 20 - A/Trans Output Speed Sensor Bolt 21 - A/Trans Case Assembly 22 - Torque Converter Housing Outer Seal 23 - Front Differential Drive Pinion (w/Transfer Gear) Gear Assembly 24 Front Differential Drive Pinion Gear Lube Tube 25 - Torque Converter and Support and A/Trans Fluid Pump Housing Assembly 26 - Torque Converter and Differential Housing Bolt 27 - Torque Converter Assembly 28 - Dust Cover Push Pin - Model Dependent 29 - Dust Cover Bolt - Model Dependent 30 - Dust Cover - Model Dependent 31 - Front Differential Carrier Assembly 32 - Input Shaft Thrust Bearing Assembly 33 - A/Trans Case Cover Gasket 34 - A/Trans Case Cover Assembly 35 - A/Trans Case Cover Assembly Bolt Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4656 Shift Solenoid: Connector Views Q8 Control Solenoid Valve Assembly X1 (MH7 or MHC) Q8 Control Solenoid Valve Assembly X1 (MH2 or MH4) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4657 Q8 Control Solenoid Valve Assembly X2 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4658 Q8 Control Solenoid Valve Assembly X3 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4659 Q8 Control Solenoid Valve Assembly X4 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4660 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission Shift Solenoid: Service and Repair 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission Control Solenoid Valve and Transmission Control Module Assembly Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the transmission control valve body cover. Refer to Control Valve Body Cover Replacement (See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Valve Body/Service and Repair/6T30/6T40/6T45 Automatic Transmission/Control Valve Body Cover Replacement). 2. Disconnect the input speed sensor electrical connector (1). 3. Disconnect the output speed sensor electrical connector (2). 4. Disconnect the shift position switch electrical connector (3). 5. Remove the 3 control valve body bolts (1) M5 x 40.5. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 4663 6. Remove the 12 control valve body bolts (2) M6 x 97. 7. Remove the control solenoid valve assembly (3) with transmission control module. Caution: Use care when removing or installing the filter plate assembly. A broken or missing retaining tab may not adequately secure the filter plate to the control solenoid valve assembly, resulting in possible damage or contamination. 8. Remove the control solenoid valve assembly filter plate (4). Discard the filter plate. It is not reusable. 9. Inspect the channel plate bolt pass through holes for damage or brinelling. Any damage will cause incorrect pressure switch operation. Replace as necessary. Installation Procedure Caution: Use care when removing or installing the filter plate assembly. A broken or missing retaining tab may not adequately secure the filter plate to the control solenoid valve assembly, resulting in possible damage or contamination. 1. Install a NEW control solenoid valve assembly filter plate (4) to prevent fluid leaks past the fluid seals. 2. Install the control solenoid valve assembly (3) with transmission control module. 3. Hand start the control valve body bolts (1, 2). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 4664 Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener Caution). 4. Secure the 12 control valve body bolts (2) M6 x 97 and tighten in sequence to 10 Nm (89 lb in). 5. Secure the 3 control valve body bolts (1) M5 x 40.5 and tighten in sequence to 8 Nm (71 lb in). 6. Connect the input speed sensor electrical connector (1). 7. Connect the output speed sensor electrical connector (2). 8. Connect the shift position switch electrical connector (3). 9. Install the transmission control valve body cover. Refer to Control Valve Body Cover Replacement (See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Valve Body/Service and Repair/6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission/Control Valve Body Cover Replacement). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 4665 Shift Solenoid: Service and Repair 6T70/6T75 - Automatic Transmission Control Solenoid Valve and Transmission Control Module Assembly Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the control valve body cover. Refer to Control Valve Body Cover Replacement (See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Valve Body/Service and Repair/6T70/6T75 - Automatic Transmission/Control Valve Body Cover Replacement). 2. Disconnect the input speed sensor electrical connector (1). 3. Disconnect the output speed sensor electrical connector (2). 4. Disconnect the shift position switch electrical connector (3). 5. Remove the 4 control valve body bolts (1) M6 x 80. 6. Position the control solenoid valve spring (8) to the side. Spring will be released with the removal of the control valve body assembly. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 4666 7. Remove the 2 control valve body bolts (4) M6 x 65. 8. Remove the control valve body bolt (3) M6 x 42. 9. Remove the 3 control valve body bolts (2) M6 x 95. 10. Remove the control valve body bolt (7) M6 x 55. 11. Remove the control solenoid valve body and transmission control module (TCM) assembly (5). Caution: Use care when removing or installing the filter plate assembly. A broken or missing retaining tab may not adequately secure the filter plate to the control solenoid valve assembly, resulting in possible damage or contamination. 12. Remove the control solenoid valve assembly filter plate (6). * Discard the filler plate. It is not reusable. * Inspect the pressure switch manifold seals for damage or contamination. Replace the control solenoid valve assembly as necessary. * Inspect the upper channel plate bolt holes for damage, peening or burnelling. Any damage around the bolt holes near the pressure control switch (PCS) feed holes could cause leakage around the PCS seals. Replace the upper channel plate as necessary. Installation Procedure Caution: Use care when removing or installing the filter plate assembly. A broken or missing retaining tab may not adequately secure the filter plate to the control solenoid valve assembly, resulting in possible damage or contamination. 1. Install a NEW control solenoid valve assembly filter plate (1). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 4667 2. Install the control solenoid valve body and TCM assembly (5). 3. Rotate the control solenoid valve spring (7) into position. Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener Caution). Note: Install all bolts before tightening, then tighten in specified sequence. 4. Install the 4 control valve body bolts (1) M6 x 80. 5. Install the control valve body bolt (6) M6 x 55. 6. Install the 3 control valve body bolts (2) M6 x 95. 7. Install the control valve body bolt (3) M6 x 42. 8. Install the 2 control valve body bolts (4) M6 x 65 and tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb in). 9. Connect the input speed sensor electrical connector (1). 10. Connect the output speed sensor electrical connector (2). 11. Connect the shift position switch electrical connector (3). 12. Install the control valve body cover. Refer to Control Valve Body Cover Replacement (See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Automatic Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 4668 Transmission/Transaxle/Valve Body/Service and Repair/6T70/6T75 - Automatic Transmission/Control Valve Body Cover Replacement). 13. For transmission control module programming and setup. Refer to Control Module References (See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning). Note: After an internal transmission repair or internal part replacement the service fast learn adapt procedure should be performed. 14. Perform the transmission adaptive values learn procedure. Refer to Transmission Adaptive Values Learn (See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid: Diagram Information and Instructions Electrical Schematic Symbols Electrical Schematic Symbols Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4673 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4674 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4675 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4676 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4677 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4678 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4679 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4680 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4681 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4682 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4683 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4684 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4685 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4686 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4687 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4688 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4689 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4690 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4691 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4692 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4693 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4694 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4695 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4696 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4697 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4698 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4699 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4700 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4701 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4702 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4703 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4704 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4705 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4706 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4707 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4708 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4709 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4710 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4711 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4712 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4713 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4714 General Electrical Diagnosis General Electrical Diagnosis Basic Knowledge Required Without a basic knowledge of electricity, it will be difficult to use the diagnostic procedures contained in the service manual. You should understand the basic theory of electricity, and know the meaning of voltage (V), current (A), and resistance (Ohms ). You should also be able to read and understand a wiring diagram, as well as understand what happens in a circuit with an open or a shorted wire. Vehicle Zoning Strategy Vehicle Zoning Strategy All grounds, in-line connectors, and splices have identifying numbers that correspond to where they are located in the vehicle. The following table explains the numbering system. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4715 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4716 Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid: Diagnostic Aids Arrows and Symbols Arrows and Symbols This service manual uses various symbols in order to describe different service operations. 1 - Front of Vehicle 2 - View Detail 2 - View Detail 3 - Ambient Air Mixed with Another Gas or Indicate Temperature Change 4 - Motion or Direction 5 - View Angle 6 - Dimension (1:2) 7 Ambient/Clean Air Flow or Cool Air Flow 8 - Lubrication Point - Oil or Fluid 9 - Task Related 10 Sectioning (1:3) 11 - Gas Other Than Ambient Air or Hot Air Flow 12 - Lubrication Point - Grease or Jelly 13 - Multidirectional Arrow Decimal and Metric Equivalents Decimal and Metric Equivalents Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4717 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4718 Checking Aftermarket Accessories Checking Aftermarket Accessories Warning: Refer to SIR Warning (See: Restraint Systems/Service Precautions/SIR Warning). Caution: The OBD II symbol is used on the circuit diagrams in order to alert the technician that the circuit is essential for proper OBD II emission control circuit operation. Any circuit which fails and causes the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) to turn ON, or causes emissions-related component damage, is identified as an OBD II circuit. Do not connect aftermarket accessories into the following circuits: * SIR circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the SIR symbol. * OBD II circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the OBD II symbol. Always check for aftermarket accessories (non-OEM) as the first step in diagnosing electrical problems. If the vehicle is so equipped, disconnect the system to verify that these add-on accessories are not the cause of the problems. Possible causes of vehicle problems related to aftermarket accessories include: * Power feeds connected to points other than the battery * Antenna location * Transceiver wiring located too close to vehicle electronic modules or wiring * Poor shielding or poor connectors on antenna feed line * Check for recent service bulletins detailing installation guidelines for aftermarket accessories. Circuit Testing Circuit Testing The Circuit Testing section contains the following diagnostic testing information. Using this information along with the diagnostic procedures will identify the cause of the electrical malfunction. * Using Connector Test Adapters (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Using Connector Test Adapters) * Probing Electrical Connectors (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Probing Electrical Connectors) * Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4719 Procedures/Circuit Testing/Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter) * Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp) * Using Fused Jumper Wires (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Using Fused Jumper Wires) * Measuring Voltage (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Measuring Voltage) * Measuring Voltage Drop (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Measuring Voltage Drop) * Measuring Frequency (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Measuring Frequency) * Testing Ground and Low Reference Circuits (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Testing Ground and Low Reference Circuits) * Testing for Continuity (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Continuity) * Testing for Short to Ground (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Short to Ground) * Testing for a Short to Voltage (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for a Short to Voltage) * Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections) * Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions) * Testing for Electrical Intermittents (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Electrical Intermittents) * Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure) * Circuit Protection - Fuses (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Circuit Protection - Fuses) * Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers) * Circuit Protection - Fusible Links (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Circuit Protection - Fusible Links) Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp Special Tools EL-35616-200 - Test Light - Probe Kit For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test Probe Caution). A test lamp can simply and quickly test a low impedance circuit for voltage. A Digital Multimeter (DMM) should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present if the impedance is low enough, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. In other words, if there is not enough current, the test lamp will not illuminate even though voltage is present. The EL-35616-200 - kit is Micro-Pack compatible and comprised of a 12-volt light bulb with an attached pair of leads. To properly operate this tool use the following procedures. When testing for voltage: 1. Attach one lead to ground. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is voltage at the point being tested. When testing for ground: 1. Attach one lead to battery positive voltage. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where ground should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is ground at the point being tested. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4720 Testing for a Short to Voltage Testing for a Short to Voltage Special Tools EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM) For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test Probe Caution). The following procedure tests for a short to voltage in a circuit. 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Set the rotary dial of the Digital Multimeter (DMM) to the V (DC) position. 4. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. Turn ON the ignition and operate all accessories. 7. If the voltage measured is greater than 1 V, there is a short to voltage in the circuit. Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions Special Tools J-25070 - Heat Gun For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Many intermittent open or shorted circuits are affected by harness/connector movement that is caused by vibration, engine torque, bumps/rough pavement, etc. In order to duplicate the customer's concern, it may be necessary to manipulate the wiring harness if the malfunction appears to be vibration related. Manipulation of a circuit can consist of a wide variety of actions, including: * Wiggling the harness * Disconnecting a connector and reconnecting * Stressing the mechanical connection of a connector * Pulling on the harness or wire in order to identify a separation/break inside the insulation * Relocating a harness or wires All these actions should be performed with some goal in mind. For instance, with a scan tool connected, wiggling the wires may uncover a faulty input to the control module. The snapshot option would be appropriate here. Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure). Another option is, with the component commanded ON and OFF by the scan tool, move related connectors and wiring and observe the component operation. With the engine running, move related connectors and wiring while monitoring engine operation. If harness or connector movement affects the data displayed, component/system operation, or engine operation, inspect and repair the harness/connections as necessary. You may need to load the vehicle in order to duplicate the concern. This may require the use of weights, floor jacks, jackstands, frame machines, etc. In these cases you are attempting to duplicate the concern by manipulating the suspension or frame. This method is useful in finding harnesses that are too short and their connectors pull apart enough to cause a poor connection. A DMM set to Peak Min/Max mode and connected to the suspect circuit while testing can yield desirable results. Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Electrical Intermittents). Certainly, using the senses of sight, smell, and hearing while manipulating the circuit can provide good results as well. There may be instances where circuit manipulation alone will not meet the required criteria for the fault condition to appear. In such cases it may be necessary to expose the suspect circuit to other conditions while manipulating the harness. Such conditions would include high moisture conditions, along with exceptionally high or low temperatures. The following discusses how to expose the circuit to these kinds of conditions. Salt Water Spray Some compounds possess the ability to conduct electricity when dissolved in water such as ordinary salt. By mixing table salt with water in sufficient Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4721 quantities, you can enhance the conductive properties of water so that any circuit which may be sensitive to moisture will more readily fail when liberally sprayed with this mixture. Mixing 0.35L (12 oz) of water with approximately 1 tablespoon of salt will yield a salt solution of 5 percent. Fill a normal spray bottle with this mixture. This mixture is sufficient to enhance the water's own conductivity. This may cause the circuit to fail more easily when sprayed. Once the mixture is completed, spray the suspect area liberally with the solution. Then, while monitoring either a scan tool or DMM, manipulate the harness as discussed previously. High Temperature Conditions If the complaint tends to be heat related, you can simulate the condition using the J-25070 - heat gun. Using the heat gun, you can heat up the suspected area or component. Manipulate the harnesses under high temperature conditions while monitoring the scan tool or DMM to locate the fault condition. The high temperature condition may be achieved simply by test driving the vehicle at normal operating temperature. If a heat gun is unavailable, consider this option to enhance your diagnosis. This option does not allow for the same control, however. Low Temperature Conditions Depending on the nature of the fault condition, placing a fan in front of the vehicle while the vehicle is in the shade can have the desired effect. If this is unsuccessful, use local cooling treatments such as ice or a venturi type nozzle (one that provides hot or cold air). This type of tool is capable of producing air stream temperatures down to -18°C (0°F) from one end and +71°C (160°F) from the other. This is ideally suited for localized cooling needs. Once the vehicle, component, or harness has been sufficiently cooled, manipulate the harness or components in an effort to duplicate the concern. Duplicating Failure Conditions * If none of the previous tests are successful, attempt to duplicate and/or capture the failure conditions. * Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, where applicable, contains the conditions that were present when the DTC set. 1. Review and record Freeze Frame/Failure Records data. 2. Clear the DTCs using the scan tool. 3. Turn the key to OFF and wait 15 seconds. 4. Operate the vehicle under the same conditions that were noted in Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, as closely as possible. The vehicle must also be operating within the Conditions for Running the DTC. Refer to Conditions for Running the DTC in the supporting text if a DTC is being diagnosed. 5. Monitor DTC Status for the DTC being tested. The scan tool will indicate Ran, when the enabling conditions have been satisfied long enough for the DTC to run. The scan tool will also indicate whether the DTC passed or failed. * An alternate method is to drive the vehicle with the DMM connected to a suspected circuit. An abnormal reading on the DMM when the concern occurs, may help you locate the concern. Measuring Frequency Measuring Frequency Special Tools EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM) For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test Probe Caution). The following procedure determines the frequency of a signal. Note: Connecting the Digital Multimeter (DMM) to the circuit before pressing the Hz button will allow the DMM to autorange to an appropriate range. 1. Apply power to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (AC) position. 3. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4722 5. Press the Hz button on the DMM. 6. The DMM will display the frequency measured. Measuring Voltage Measuring Voltage Special Tools EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM) For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test Probe Caution). The following procedure measures the voltage at a selected point in a circuit. 1. Disconnect the electrical harness connector for the circuit being tested, if necessary. 2. Enable the circuit and/or system being tested. Use the following methods: * Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. * Turn ON the engine. * Turn ON the circuit and/or system with a scan tool in Output Controls. * Turn ON the switch for the circuit and/or system being tested. 3. Select the V (AC) or V (DC) position on the Digital Multimeter (DMM). 4. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the point of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. The DMM displays the voltage measured at that point. Measuring Voltage Drop Measuring Voltage Drop Special Tools EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM) For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test Probe Caution). The following procedure determines the difference in voltage potential between 2 points. 1. Set the rotary dial of the Digital Multimeter (DMM) to the V (DC) position. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4723 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to one point of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to the other point of the circuit. 4. Operate the circuit. 5. The DMM displays the difference in voltage between the 2 points. Probing Electrical Connectors Probing Electrical Connectors Note: Always be sure to reinstall the connector position assurance (CPA) and terminal position assurance (TPA) when reconnecting connectors or replacing terminals. Front probe Disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the mating side (front) of the connector. Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test Probe Caution). Note: When probing female 0.64 terminals, it is important to use the correct adapter. There have been some revisions to the test adapter for 0.64 terminals. The proper adapter for 0.64 terminals is the EL-35616-64B which has a gold terminal and a black wire between the base and tip. Failure to use the proper test adapter may result in damage to the terminal being tested and improper diagnosis. Note: The proper adapter for probing the terminals for fuses, relays, or diodes in an electrical center is EL-35616-35. Using any other tool or adapter may damage the terminal being tested. Refer to the following table as a guide in selecting the correct test adapter for front probing connectors: Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4724 Backprobe Note: * Backprobe connector terminals only when specifically required in diagnostic procedures. * Do not backprobe a sealed (Weather Pack(R)) connector, less than a 280 series Metri-Pack connector, a Micro-Pack connector, or a flat wire (dock and lock) connector. * Backprobing can be a source of damage to connector terminals. Use care in order to avoid deforming the terminal, either by forcing the test probe too far into the cavity or by using too large of a test probe. * After backprobing any connector, inspect for terminal damage. If terminal damage is suspected, test for proper terminal contact. Do not disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the harness side (back) of the connector. Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure Using Snapshots in Global Diagnostic System (GDS) Overview Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4725 A snapshot is a recording of what a control module on the vehicle was receiving for information while the snapshot is being made. A snapshot may be used to analyze the data during the time a vehicle condition is current. This allows you to concentrate on making the condition occur, rather than trying to view all the data in anticipation of the fault. To record a snapshot in GDS, select, Record Snapshot, from the options at the top right portion of any of the various pages that allow snapshots to be taken (e.g. Data Display, Control Functions, etc.). When you are finished recording, select, Stop Snapshot recording. The snapshot will now be available for replay. Snapshot Replay The Snapshot Replay function allows reviews of previously recorded vehicle snapshot data. This information can be used in analysis of vehicle problems and detection of trigger error conditions. The graph function can be used to compare parameters to see if a component is functioning properly. Recorded snapshots can be selected for viewing by the following three methods: * Selecting a snapshot file from the Vehicle Home Page and clicking on the Review selection. * Double clicking on the selected snapshot from the Vehicle Home Page. * Entering the Tools selection from the Menu selection and selecting Snapshot replay. Next, open the Snapshot Manager. Double click on the snapshot file you wish to view or click on the Load Snapshot selection and select a snapshot file. Regardless of selection method, a File Loaded pop-up window will be displayed from the Snapshot Replay screen. Select OK from the pop-up window. Snapshot Play Functions There are several snapshot play functions that are used to replay recorded snapshots * The Play function is used to play the snapshot forward by clicking on this selection. A marker will move across the screen when this selection is used. All selections in this area turn grey when they are active. * The Pause function is used to pause play of the snapshot. When this selection is clicked a second time the snapshot will start playing where it left off. * The Stop function is used to stop playing the snapshot. The snapshot will start from the beginning, if Play is selected after using the Stop function. Time Control Time control is used to control the snapshot replay. This function allows selection of a specific time frame, display of different views, and control of display speed. The following functions can be selected directly under Time Control. * The Bookmark selection allows you to add a specific comment in the current display and return to this point in the future. When this option is selected, a pop-up window is displayed. Enter a bookmark name and select OK. * The Note Pad can be selected to add comments to the snapshot replay file at the current point of time. When this option is selected, a pop-up window is displayed. Enter a comment for the snapshot file and select OK. * The Load Snapshot (blue folder) opens a snapshot file and makes it ready for further analysis. This function is also available by clicking on an available snapshot file from the Snapshot Manager. * The Down Arrow displays all Time Control options when selected. Individual options can also be selected by clicking on the item you want. * The Snapshot Display Speed can be controlled by selecting this option. Slow speeds of 1/8X, 1/4X, and 1/2X can be selected. The real time speed can also be selected at 1. Faster speeds of 2X, 4X, and 8X can also be obtained by using this selection. View Selections Each View Selection provides a different way of displaying vehicle data for analysis. The following functions can be selected under Available Views: Note: The parameter name will be shown in the original language used for capture if no translation is available for the name. * Parameter List View - Displays incoming information from the snapshot file. The current value of the parameters is displayed on the screen. * Log View - Contains all the information from the snapshot file. All parameter values are listed in the order they were recorded. Specific parameters can be added or removed from a watchlist by clicking on the appropriate item. * State View - Shows the values of all parameters in a specific time frame. These values can be used for comparison with the trigger view. * Trigger View - Displays all system and user defined triggers. This function can be used when there is a combination of factors involved in a diagnostic problem. When a Trigger condition is met a caution triangle will be displayed on the screen. Triggers: * Load Triggers - Allows you to load a file containing trigger definitions. * Save Triggers - Allows you to save the trigger to your computer's hard drive. * Remove Trigger - Allows you to remove the current trigger. It will no longer be present. * Edit Trigger - Displays a pop-up window where you can modify the limits and parameters contained within a trigger. * Adds Trigger - Displays a pop-up window to configure a trigger. * DTC View - After the Play function is selected and this option is selected this function opens the list of recorded DTCs. * Line Graph View - Displays data that can be visualized against the time-axis. From this view, specific parameters can be selected for graphing by Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4726 checking the box under Selected. At the bottom of the graph there are four functions Zoom In (increase size), Zoom Out (decrease size), Bookmarks, and Pause Scrolling. Each of these functions can be accessed by clicking on them. Testing for Continuity Testing for Continuity Special Tools EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM) For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test Probe Caution). The following procedures verify good continuity in a circuit. With a Digital Multimeter (DMM) 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the Ohms position. 2. Disconnect the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 3. Disconnect the load. 4. Press the MIN MAX button on the DMM. 5. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 6. Connect the other lead of the DMM to the other end of the circuit. 7. If the DMM displays low or no resistance, the circuit has good continuity. With a Test Lamp Note: Only use the test lamp procedure on low impedance power and ground circuits. 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect one lead of the test lamp to one end of the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 5. Connect the other end of the circuit to ground. 6. If the test lamp illuminates (full intensity), then the circuit has good continuity. Testing for Electrical Intermittents Testing for Electrical Intermittents Special Tools EL-39200 Digital Multimeter For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Perform the following procedures while wiggling the harness from side to side. Continue this at convenient points (about 6 inches apart) while watching the test equipment. * Testing for Short to Ground (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Short to Ground) * Testing for Continuity (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Continuity) * Testing for a Short to Voltage (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for a Short to Voltage) If the fault is not identified, perform the procedure below using the MIN MAX feature on the EL-39200 DMM. This feature allows you to manipulate the circuit without having to watch the EL-39200. The EL-39200 will generate an audible tone when a change is detected. Note: The EL-39200 must be used in order to perform the following procedure since the EL-39200 can monitor current, resistance or voltage while recording the minimum (MIN), and maximum (MAX) values measured. 1. Connect the EL-39200 to both sides of a suspected connector (still connected), or from one end of a suspected circuit to the other. Refer to Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4727 Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter) for information on connecting the EL-39200 to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the EL-39200 to the V (AC) or V (DC) position. 3. Press the range button of the EL-39200 in order to select the desired voltage range. 4. Press the MIN MAX button of the EL-39200. The EL-39200 displays 100 ms RECORD and emits an audible tone (beep). Note: The 100 ms RECORD mode is the length of time an input must stay at a new value in order to record the full change. 5. Simulate the condition that is potentially causing the intermittent connection, either by wiggling the connections or the wiring, test driving, or performing other operations. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions). 6. Listen for the audible Min Max Alert which indicates that a new minimum or maximum value has been recorded. 7. Press the MIN MAX button once in order to display the MAX value and note the value. 8. Press the MIN MAX button again in order to display the MIN value and note the value. 9. Determine the difference between the MIN and MAX values. * If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is 1 V or greater an intermittent open or high resistance condition exists. Repair the condition as necessary. * If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is less than 1 V, an intermittent open or high resistance condition does not exist. Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections Special Tools EL-35616 Terminal Test Probe Kit For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). When the condition is not currently present, but is indicated in DTC history, the cause may be intermittent. An intermittent may also be the cause when there is a customer complaint, but the symptom cannot be duplicated. Refer to the Symptom Table of the system that is suspect of causing the condition before trying to locate an intermittent condition. Most intermittent conditions are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. Inspect for the following items: * Wiring broken inside the insulation * Poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector * Poor terminal to wire connection-Some conditions which fall under this description are poor crimps, poor solder joints, crimping over the wire insulation rather than the wire itself, and corrosion in the wire to terminal contact area, etc. * Pierced or damaged insulation can allow moisture to enter the wiring causing corrosion. The conductor can corrode inside the insulation, with little visible evidence. Look for swollen and stiff sections of wire in the suspect circuits. * Wiring which has been pinched, cut, or its insulation rubbed through may cause an intermittent open or short as the bare area touches other wiring or parts of the vehicle. * Wiring that comes in contact with hot or exhaust components * Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions) in order to duplicate the conditions required, in order to verify the customer concern. * Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Electrical Intermittents) for test procedures to detect intermittent open, high resistance, short to ground, and short to voltage conditions. * Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure) for advanced intermittent diagnosis and Vehicle Data Recorder operation. Testing for Terminal Fretting Some intermittent conditions can be caused by wire terminal fretting corrosion. Fretting corrosion is a build-up of insulating, oxidized wear debris that can form when there is a small motion between electrical contacts. The oxidized wear debris can pile up enough at the electrical contact spots that the electrical resistance across the connection increases. Movement between the contacting surfaces as small as 10 to 100 microns can cause fretting. To put this in perspective, a sheet of paper is about 100 microns thick, so fretting motion is small and hard to see. Vibration and thermal expansion/contraction are the main sources that create fretting motion. Since vehicles vibrate and can experience large temperature swings, they are a good source for fretting motion. Tin, copper, nickel, and iron surfaces are all susceptible to fretting corrosion. Fretting corrosion can be difficult to see but it looks like small, dark smudges on the terminals contact surface. To correct a fretting condition disconnect the suspect connector and add Nyogel lubricant 760G (dielectric grease) to both sides of the connector Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4728 terminals. Then reconnect the connector and wipe away any excess lubricant. This will correct the additional terminal contact resistance due to the terminal fretting corrosion. Testing for Proper Terminal Contact It is important to test terminal contact at the component and any inline connectors before replacing a suspect component. Mating terminals must be inspected to ensure good terminal contact. A poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector may be the result of contamination or deformation. Contamination may be caused by the connector halves being improperly connected. A missing or damaged connector seal, damage to the connector itself, or exposing the terminals to moisture and dirt can also cause contamination. Contamination, usually in the underhood or underbody connectors, leads to terminal corrosion, causing an open circuit or intermittently open circuit. Deformation is caused by probing the mating side of a connector terminal without the proper adapter. Always use the EL-35616 when probing connectors. Other causes of terminal deformation are improperly joining the connector halves, or repeatedly separating and joining the connector halves. Deformation, usually to the female terminal contact tang, can result in poor terminal contact causing an open or intermittently open circuit. Testing for Proper Terminal Contact in Bussed Electrical Centers It is very important to use the correct test adapter when testing for proper terminal contact of fuses and relays in a bussed electrical center. Use EL-35616-35 to test for proper terminal contact. Failure to use EL-35616-35 can result in improper diagnosis of the bussed electrical center. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact: 1. Separate the connector halves. 2. Visually inspect the connector halves for contamination. Contamination may result in a white or green build-up within the connector body or between terminals. This causes high terminal resistance, intermittent contact, or an open circuit. An underhood or underbody connector that shows signs of contamination should be replaced in its entirety: terminals, seals, and connector body. 3. Using an equivalent male terminal / terminated lead, verify that the retention force is significantly different between a known good terminal and the suspect terminal. Replace the female terminal in question. Flat Wire (Dock and Lock) Connectors There are no serviceable parts for flat wire (dock and lock) connectors on the harness side or the component side. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact: 1. Remove the component in question. 2. Visually inspect each side of the connector for signs of contamination. Avoid touching either side of the connector as oil from your skin may be a source of contamination as well. 3. Visually inspect the terminal bearing surfaces of the flat wire circuits for splits, cracks, or other imperfections that could cause poor terminal contact. Visually inspect the component side connector to ensure that all of the terminals are uniform and free of damage or deformation. 4. Insert the appropriate adapter from the on the flat wire harness connector in order to test the circuit in question. Control Module/Component Voltage and Grounds Poor voltage or ground connections can cause widely varying symptoms. * Test all control module voltage supply circuits. Many vehicles have multiple circuits supplying voltage to a control module. Other components in the system may have separate voltage supply circuits that may also need to be tested. Inspect connections at the module/component connectors, fuses, and any intermediate connections between the voltage source and the module/component. A test lamp or a DMM may indicate that voltage is present, but neither tests the ability of the circuit to carry sufficient current. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. Refer to Circuit Testing (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Circuit Testing) and Power Distribution Schematics (See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Starting and Charging/Power and Ground Distribution/System Diagram/Power Distribution Schematics). * Test all control module ground and system ground circuits. The control module may have multiple ground circuits. Other components in the system may have separate grounds that may also need to be tested. Inspect grounds for clean and tight connections at the grounding point. Inspect the connections at the component and in splice packs, where applicable. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. Refer to Circuit Testing (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Circuit Testing) and Ground Distribution Schematics (See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Starting and Charging/Power and Ground Distribution/System Diagram/Ground Distribution Schematics). Temperature Sensitivity * An intermittent condition may occur when a component/connection reaches normal operating temperature. The condition may occur only when the component/connection is cold, or only when the component/connection is hot. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4729 * Freeze Frame, Failure Records, Snapshot, or Vehicle Data Recorder data may help with this type of intermittent condition, where applicable. * If the intermittent is related to heat, review the data for a relationship with the following: - High ambient temperatures - Underhood/engine generated heat - Circuit generated heat due to a poor connection, or high electrical load - Higher than normal load conditions, towing, etc. * If the intermittent is related to cold, review the data for the following: - Low ambient temperatures-In extremely low temperatures, ice may form in a connection or component. Inspect for water intrusion. - The condition only occurs on a cold start. - The condition goes away when the vehicle warms up. * Information from the customer may help to determine if the trouble follows a pattern that is temperature related. * If temperature is suspected of causing an intermittent fault condition, attempt to duplicate the condition. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions) in order to duplicate the conditions required. Electromagnetic Interference and Electrical Noise Some electrical components/circuits are sensitive to electromagnetic interference or other types of electrical noise. Inspect for the following conditions: * A misrouted harness that is too close to high voltage/high current devices such as secondary ignition components, motors, generator etc.-These components may induce electrical noise on a circuit that could interfere with normal circuit operation. * Electrical system interference caused by a malfunctioning relay, or a control module driven solenoid or switch-These conditions can cause a sharp electrical surge. Normally, the condition will occur when the malfunctioning component is operating. * Improper installation of non-factory or aftermarket add on accessories such as lights, 2-way radios, amplifiers, electric motors, remote starters, alarm systems, cell phones, etc.-These accessories may lead to interference while in use, but do not fail when the accessories are not in use. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Checking Aftermarket Accessories). * Test for an open diode across the A/C compressor clutch and for other open diodes. Some relays may contain a clamping diode. * The generator may be allowing AC noise into the electrical system. Incorrect Control Module * There are only a few situations where reprogramming a control module is appropriate: - A new service control module is installed. - A control module from another vehicle is installed. - Revised software/calibration files have been released for this vehicle. Note: DO NOT re-program the control module with the SAME software/calibration files that are already present in the control module. This is not an effective repair for any type of concern. * Verify that the control module contains the correct software/calibration. If incorrect programming is found, reprogram the control module with the most current software/calibration. Refer to Control Module References (See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning) for replacement, setup, and programming. Testing for Short to Ground Testing for Short to Ground Special Tools * EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM) * EL 35616-200 - Test Light-Probe Kit For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test Probe Caution). The following procedures test for a short to ground in a circuit. With a Digital Multimeter (DMM) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4730 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the Ohms position. 4. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the other lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. If the DMM does NOT display infinite resistance (OL), there is a short to ground in the circuit. With a Test Lamp 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect one lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to one end of the circuit to be tested. 5. If the test lamp illuminates, there is a short to ground in the circuit. Fuse Powering Several Loads 1. Review the system schematic and locate the fuse that is open. 2. Open the first connector or switch leading from the fuse to each load. 3. Connect a DMM across the fuse terminals (be sure that the fuse is powered). * When the DMM displays voltage the short is in the wiring leading to the first connector or switch. * If the DMM does not display voltage refer to the next step. 4. Close each connector or switch until the DMM displays voltage in order to find which circuit is shorted. Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter Special Tools EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM) For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test Probe Caution). Digital Multimeter (DMM) Basic Requirements Service information is validated using digital multimeters that meet or exceed the following requirements. Using a multimeter that does not meet these basic requirements may give inaccurate readings which could lead to an incorrect diagnosis. Display and Settings 1. Four digits displayed 2. Voltage, amperage, resistance, frequency, diode test settings, and min-max function 3. Display positive and negative values Voltage 1. Have at least 10 Mohm input impedance 2. Test a DC voltage range of 0.1-1000 V. 3. Test an AC voltage range of 0.1-1000 V. Amperage 1. Test a DC amperage range of 0.1µA-10 A. 2. Test an AC amperage range of 0.1µA-10 A. Resistance Test a resistance range of 0.1 ohm-40 Mohm and displays infinite for a value greater than 40 Mohm (O.L. (Over-load)) Frequency Test for a frequency range of 0.5 HZ-199 K HZ Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4731 Diode Test 1. Apply at least 1 mA when performing the diode bias test 2. Display the break over voltage drop (0-3 V) of a forward biased diode 3. Display infinite (O.L. (Over-load)) when a diode is reverse biased Min-Max Readings 1. Can update at a 1 ms sample rate 2. Saves and displays minimum and maximum values Note: Circuits which include any solid state control modules, such as the engine control module (ECM), should only be tested with a 10 MOhms or higher impedance digital multimeter such as the EL-39200. The EL-39200 instruction manual is a good source of information and should be read thoroughly upon receipt of the DMM as well as kept on hand for future reference. A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present if the impedance is low enough, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. In other words, if there is not enough current, the test lamp will not illuminate even though voltage is present. The ohmmeter function on a DMM shows how much resistance exists between 2 points along a circuit. Low resistance in a circuit means good continuity. Note: Disconnect the power feed from the suspect circuit when measuring resistance with a DMM. This prevents incorrect readings. DMMs apply such a small voltage to measure resistance that the presence of voltages can upset a resistance reading. Diodes and solid state components in a circuit can cause a DMM to display a false reading. To find out if a component is affecting a measurement take a reading once, then reverse the leads and take a second reading. If the readings differ the solid state component is affecting the measurement. Following are examples of the various methods of connecting the DMM to the circuit to be tested: * Probe both ends of the connector and either hold the leads in place while manipulating the connector or tape the leads to the harness for continuous monitoring while you perform other operations or test driving. Refer to Probing Electrical Connectors (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Probing Electrical Connectors). * Disconnect the harness at both ends of the suspected circuit where it connects either to a component or to other harnesses. * If the system that is being diagnosed has a specified pinout or breakout box, it may be used in order to simplify connecting the DMM to the circuit or for testing multiple circuits quickly. Using Connector Test Adapters Using Connector Test Adapters Special Tools EL 35616 - Terminal Test Probe Kit For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Caution: Do not insert test equipment probes (DMM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the EL-38125-580 GM Approved Terminal Release Tool Kit in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the EL-38125-580 GM Approved Terminal Release Tool Kit , ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the EL-38125-580 GM Approved Terminal Release Tool Kit label on the inside of the EL-38125-580 GM Approved Terminal Release Tool Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Using Fused Jumper Wires Using Fused Jumper Wires Special Tools J 36169-A Fused Jumper Wire Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4732 Note: A fused jumper may not protect solid state components from being damaged. The J 36169-A includes small clamp connectors that provide adaptation to most connectors without damage. This fused jumper wire is supplied with a 20-A fuse which may not be suitable for some circuits. Do not use a fuse with a higher rating than the fuse that protects the circuit being tested. AFL/EPC Connectors AFL/EPC Connectors Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. 1. For connectors with a bolt in the dress cover, turn the bolt counterclockwise to remove the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4733 2. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the top of the wire dress cover. Slide the CPA forward. 3. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4734 View showing depressing of the lever lock release tab. View of connector in released position. 4. Disconnect the connector from the component. 5. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the dress cover. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs and remove the dress cover. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4735 6. Release the rear lower half of the wiredress cover. 7. Release the tabs that are holding the wiredress cover to the connector body. 8. Remove the nose piece by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the slots on both ends of the connector body. Gently pry the nose piece out of the connector. J 38125-216 can also be used to remove the nose piece. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4736 9. Use the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by lifting the terminal retaining tabs on the inside of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Bosch Connectors (BSK) Bosch Connectors (BSK) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4737 Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 3. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 4. Insert the J 38125-561 tool into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 5. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Bosch Connectors (ECM) Bosch Connectors (ECM) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4738 1. Locate the assist lever on the top of the connector. Move the assist lever to the forward position. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4739 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the connector. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the locking tabs and remove the dress cover. 4. The terminal positive assurance (TPA) is located in the front of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4740 5. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove TPA from the connector. 6. Use the J 38125-213 or the J 38125-556 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4741 Note: Ensure that the dress cover and connector body are both in the released position before reassembling. Failure to do so may cause damage to the connector and component. Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Bosch Connectors (0.64) Bosch Connectors (0.64) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While pressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock until the lever is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Pull the rubber boot that covers the wires back to expose the end of the connector dress cover. 4. Place the connector locking lever in the center of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4742 5. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs that are on the wire end of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover and connector body and pry up. 6. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs located on the opposite side of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover at the connector end and pry up. 7. Remove the dress cover. 8. Cut the tie wrap on the wire bundle. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4743 9. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting a small flat-bladed tool into the small slot in the end of the slider and pushing on the TPA until it comes out of the connector. When the TPA exits the opposite side of the connector, gasp the TPA and pull it completely out of the connector. 10. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 11. Insert the J 38125-560 into the 2 triangular cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 12. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Terminal Replacement Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4744 1. Prior to installation the terminal must be aligned so the (1) coding lugs align with the (2) coding grooves on the connector. 2. Once the terminal is aligned, slide the terminal into the cavity until the retainer has engaged in the cavity of the connector. 3. Slide the TPA in the connector body and seat it using a small flat bladed tool. The TPA is seated when it is flush with the contact housing. 4. Secure the wires to the connector body using a tie wrap and replace the dress cover and grommet. Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Pull out the slider on the connector position assurance (CPA) until it is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4745 5. Insert the J 38125-557 into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Connector Position Assurance Locks Connector Position Assurance Locks The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of the connector. CPAs are used in various connectors throughout the vehicle. CPAs are also used in all SIR system electrical connectors. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals, of the connector. Connector Repairs Connector Repairs Connector Repairs contains a list of all connector repairs. The connector repairs are listed by the connector manufacturer and then by connector type. If the technician cannot identify the manufacturer of the connector, refer to Identifying Connectors below. Knowing the connector manufacturer will assist in finding the correct connector repair from the following list: * Connector Position Assurance Locks (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Connector Position Assurance Locks) * Terminal Position Assurance Locks (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Terminal Position Assurance Locks) * AFL/EPC Connectors (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/AFL/EPC Connectors) * Bosch Connectors (BSK) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Bosch Connectors (BSK))Bosch Connectors (0.64) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Bosch Connectors (0.64))Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT))Bosch Connectors (ECM) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Bosch Connectors (ECM)) * Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack))Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Push to Seat))Delphi Connectors Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4746 (Pull To Seat) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Pull to Seat))Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W))Delphi Connectors (Micro.64) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Micro .64))Delphi Connectors (12-Way) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (12-Way))Delphi Connectors (Steering Gear) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Steering Gear)) * FCI Connectors (Lever Lock) (See: General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/FCI Connectors (Lever Lock))FCI Connectors (SIR) (See: General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/FCI (SIR)) * FEP Connectors (Steering Gear) (See: General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/FEP Connectors (Steering Gear)) * JST Connectors (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/JST Connectors) * Kostal Connectors (Glow Plug Control Module) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Kostal Connectors (Glow Plug Control Module))Kostal Connectors (Transmission) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Kostal Connectors (Transmission)) * Molex Connectors (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Molex Connectors) * Sumitomo Connectors (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Sumitomo Connectors) * Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way))Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor))Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap))Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way))Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module)) * Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Yazaki Connectors (2-Way))Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Yazaki Connectors (16-Way)) * Repairing Connector Terminals (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Repairing Connector Terminals) Connector Anatomy 1 - Connector Positive Assurance (CPA) 2 - Assist Lever 3 - Wiredress Cover 4 - Seal Strain/Relief Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4747 5 - Slide Left Hand 6 - Slide Right Hand 7 - Terminal Positive Assurance (TPA) 8 - Terminal Positive Assurance (TPA) 9 - Connector Seal 10 - Connector Housing 11 - Inner Connector Identifying Connectors Knowing the connector manufacturer is helpful when trying to locating the correct connector repair procedure. There are many different connector designs used on GM vehicles and it is sometimes difficult to identify the connector manufacturer. The information in this document should help with the identification of connector manufactures. The following connector manufacturers make most of the connectors found in GM vehicles: * AFL/EPC (Alcoa Fujikura Ltd./Engineered Plastics Components) * Bosch * Delphi * FCI (Framatome Connectors International) * JAE (Japan Aviation Electronics) * JST (Japan Solderless Terminals) * Kostel * Molex * Sumitomo * Tyco/AMP * Yazaki Identifying the manufacturer of a connector is often difficult. When trying to determine the manufacturer of a connector, look for specific identifying marks that are unique to that connector supplier. Most of these identify marks are hard to find or see. Check the connector carefully and refer to the information below for pictures and descriptions of connector identification markings. * Most of AFLs connectors have EPC on their connector body. Some of the smaller connectors will not have any markings on them. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4748 * In some cases Bosch will actually be printed on the connector. If Bosch does not appear on the connector, look for the Bosch logo. The Bosch logo is a circle with a blunted arrow inside. This logo can appear anywhere on the connector and is often very small. * In some cases Delphi will actually be printed on the connector. If Delphi is not printed on the connector, look for PED. In both cases there is no specific orientation for Delphi or PED and they can appear anywhere on the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4749 * FCI connectors may have the FCI logo on their connectors. The logo is the letters FCI with an "A" above it. * JAE connector have JAE in small letters on their connectors. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4750 * JST connectors have JST in small letters on their connectors, similar to that above. The location of the logo will vary with the connector size and style. * Kostel has an "LK" with a circle around it. These connector are usually used as a transmissions connection. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4751 * Most Molex connectors will have the Molex logo on the dresscover of the connector. In some cases the connectors may have MX followed by another letter. The third letter indicates where the connector was made. A connector with MXD is a Molex connector made in Detroit. Sumitomo has a unique symbol on their connector and possibly a part number. The symbol is similar to that of a diamond lying on its side, similar to that shown. The logo could appear anywhere but the most common place is at the wire side of the housing. * Tyco/AMP has many different and unique connector designs. Some may or may not have identifiable marks on them. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4752 * Yazaki has a wedge or arrow shape, similar to that shown. Delphi Connectors (Push to Seat) Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Follow the steps below in order to repair push to seat connectors. 1. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device, the connector position assurance (CPA) device, and/or the secondary lock. 2. Separate the connector halves (1). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4753 3. Use the proper pick or removal tool (1) in order to release the terminal. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 4. Gently pull the cable and the terminal (2) out of the back of the connector. 5. Re-form the locking device if you are going to reuse the terminal (1). 6. To repair the terminal, refer to Terminal Repair. Terminal Repair 1. Slip the cable seal away from the terminal. 2. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 3. Slip a new cable seal onto the wire. 4. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 5. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 6. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. 7. Slide the cable seal toward the terminal. 8. Crimp the cable seal and the insulation. 9. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply grease to the connector. Reinstalling Terminal 1. In order to reuse a terminal or lead assembly, refer to Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Wiring Repairs). 2. Ensure that the cable seal is kept on the terminal side of the splice. 3. Insert the lead from the back until it catches. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Terminated Lead Repair 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Find the appropriate terminated lead. 3. Use the appropriate splice sleeves depending on the gauge size. 4. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves). Delphi Connectors (Pull to Seat) Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) Special Tools Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4754 J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal If the terminal is visibly damaged or is suspected of having a faulty connection, the terminal should be replaced. Follow the steps below in order to repair pull-to-seat connectors: 1. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) device and/or the secondary lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component or separate the connectors for in-line connectors. 3. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device. 4. Insert the proper pick or removal tool into the front of the connector body. Note: On connectors with more than one terminal the service loop may not be large enough to remove the terminal and crimp on a new one. If the terminal wire does not have a large enough service loop for removal, cut the wire 5 cm (2 in) behind the connector before removal. 5. Grasp the wire at the back of the connector body and gently push the terminal out the front of the connector body. Terminal Repair 1. If the wire needed to be cut in order to remove the terminal, gently push a small length of the same size wire through the back of the connector cavity until there is enough wire exposed in order to crimp on a new terminal. If the wire was not cut, cut the existing wire as close to the old terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 4. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. Terminal Installation 1. Align the terminal and pull the wire from the back of the connector in order to seat the terminal. 2. If necessary, cut the new wire to proper length and splice with existing circuit. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves). 3. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply dielectric grease to the connector. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Micro .64) Delphi Connectors (Micro.64) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4755 Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro.64 connectors. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. The lever lock may be located on the top or sides of the wire dress cover. View of a typical Micro 64 connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4756 Depress the lock and pull the lever over and past the lock. View of the connector when released from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4757 View of another type of Micro 64 connector. Depress the locks that are located on both sides of the wiredress cover and pull the lever over and past the locks. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4758 View of the connector when released from the component. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the front of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool push down on one of the locking tabs and pull the cover up until the dress cover releases. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. 4. Once the front 2 locks are unlocked, lift the front of the dress cover and pull it forward. Note: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 5. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the small slot on the TPA and pushing down until the TPA releases. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4759 Note: Be careful not to angle or rock the J 38125-21 tool when inserting it into the connector or the tool may break. 6. Insert the J 38125-21 tool into the round canal between the terminals cavities at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Follow the steps below in order to repair Micro 64 connector terminals. The Micro 64 connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-64 (M jaw) was developed to crimp Micro 64 terminals. The J 38125-64 crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. The J 38125-64 crimping tool is also designed to crimp both the wire and the insulation at the same time. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro 64 terminals. Note: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gauge wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 1. Cut the wire as close to the damaged terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4760 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert terminal into the appropriate terminal holder until it hits bottom and stops. The correct terminal holder is determined by the wire size. Also ensure that the terminals wings are pointing towards the former on the tool and the release locator. 5. Insert the stripped cable into the terminal. Insulation should be visible on both sides of the terminal insulation wings. 6. Compress the handles until the ratchet automatically releases. 7. Place the terminal into the appropriate cavity and assemble the connector. Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4761 Terminal Removal Procedure There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W connectors. These connectors are very similar but use different terminals and have some minor physical differences also. The first connector design of the Micro-Pack 100W (1) has a white connector interface that holds the terminals. The second design of the Micro-Pack 100W (2) has a gray interface to hold the terminals. Also, the first design has terminal cavities that are further apart (3 mm centerline) and offset from the other row of terminal cavities in the connector. The second design has terminals cavities that are closer together (2.54 mm centerline) and aligned vertically. One other way to identify the second design is the thin strip of material that runs along the outside of the cavities. Note: There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W terminals which are very similar. Ensure that you have the correct terminal before crimping the new terminal to the wire. The first design connector uses the longer terminal (1) that has a raised area in front of the recess in the terminal. The second design connector uses the shorter terminal without the raised area. Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro-Pack 100W connectors. Some Micro-Pack 100W connector disassembly procedures will vary. Use this procedure as a guide. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4762 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Locate the nose piece locking tabs that are positioned on the side of the connector nose piece. The connector nose piece acts as a terminal positive assurance (TPA) and may be referred to as such. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to push in one of the locking tabs while gently pulling on the same side of the nose piece. 4. Repeat the procedure for the other locking tab and remove the nose piece. 5. Remove the wire dress cover. The following is a general procedure for wire dress cover removal. Use this procedure as a guide, some dress cover removal procedures may vary. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4763 6. Use fingers to squeeze the 2 locking legs of the cover. 7. Apply pressure and gently rock the cover until one locking leg is unseated. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4764 8. Continue to apply pressure and rock the cover until the second locking leg is unseated. Repeat procedure for the other side of the dress cover and remove the cover. 9. Use J 38125-12A to gently lift the terminal retaining tab while gently pulling the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. If the terminal is severely bent or damaged, it may be possible on some connectors to push the wire out of the front of the connector instead of pulling it through. This will prevent damage to the internal seals of the connector. Once the terminal is pushed out of the connector, cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible and pull the wire through the connector. Terminal Repair Procedure The Micro-Pack 100W connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool was developed to crimp Micro-Pack 100W terminals. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro-Pack 100 terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4765 1. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. Note: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gauge wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert the terminal into the crimp tool until the core wings are flush with the anvil on the crimp tool. Be sure that the wings are pointed toward the crimp tool former and release the spring locator. The locator will hold the terminal in place. Inspect the alignment of the terminal wings with the crimp tool former. If the terminal wings are wider than the crimp tool former, remove the terminal and bend the terminal wings in slightly. 5. Place stripped wire into terminal. 6. Crimp the new terminal to the wire. If a jam occurs, press the emergency release to open applicator. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4766 Terminal Replacement Procedure After the terminal is crimped to the wire perform the following procedure in order to replace Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the Terminal Removal Procedure. Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The following is the proper procedure for the repair of Weather Pack(R) Connectors. 1. Separate the connector halves (1). 2. Open the secondary lock. A secondary lock aids in terminal retention and is usually molded to the connector (1). 3. Grasp the wire and push the terminal to the forward most position. Hold the wire in this position. 4. Insert the Weather Pack(R) terminal removal tool J 38125-10A into the front (mating end) of the connector cavity until it rests on the cavity shoulder (1). 5. Gently pull on the wire to remove the terminal through the back of the connector (2). Note: Never use force to remove a terminal from a connector. 6. Inspect the terminal and connector for damage. Repair as necessary. Refer to Repairing Connector Terminals (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Repairing Connector Terminals). 7. Reform the lock tang (2) and reset terminal in connector body. 8. Close secondary locks and join connector halves. 9. Verify that circuit is complete and working satisfactorily. 10. Perform system check. Delphi Connectors (12-Way) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4767 Delphi Connectors (12-Way) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) and slide the lever lock away from the connector body. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs on the dress cover of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool release all of the locking tabs. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4768 4. Release the lower wire dress cover locking tab. 5. Release the upper wire dress cover locking tab. 6. Once the locks are unlocked, lift the dress cover off. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4769 Note: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 7. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the locking tabs on both sides of the TPA. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. 8. Remove the nose piece by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the locking tabs on both sides of the nose piece. Gently pry the nose piece out of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4770 9. Insert the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Delphi Connectors (Steering Gear) Delphi Connectors (Steering Gear) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4771 Removal Procedure 1. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the locking tab on the connector. 2. Push down the locking tab to release the connector. The small flat-bladed tool may need to be pushed down and angled back slightly to depress the locking tab. Pull on the connector body while releasing the locking tab to disconnect the connector. FCI Connectors (Lever Lock) FCI Connectors (Lever Lock) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4772 Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. 1. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. 2. The release tab is located on the top of the wiredress cover. 3. View of connector in released position. 4. Disconnect the connector from the component. 5. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the dress cover. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs and remove the dress cover. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4773 6. Use a small flat-blade tool to slide the terminal position assurance (TPA) up one notch on both ends of the connector. The TPA is located underneath the wire dress cover. For the larger terminals insert the J 38125-556 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. For the smaller terminals insert the J 38125-560 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4774 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. FCI (SIR) FCI Connectors (SIR) Removal Procedure Note: The orange CPA must be released first to disconnect or to connect the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4775 1. Lift the orange CPA vertically (avoid lifting on an angle to the connector) approximately 4 mm to release the connector. Use a small flat-bladed tool to help release the orange CPA. The orange CPA can also be released manually without any tools. 2. Grab the connector on both sides and lift the connector vertically to disconnect the connector. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4776 1. Lift the orange CPA vertically approximately 4 mm before installing the connector. Use a small flat-bladed tool to help release the orange CPA. The orange CPA can also be released manually without any tools. 2. Line up the connector key tabs with the initiator key slots. Grab the connector on both sides and push the connector down into the initiator connector sub assembly until fully seated. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4777 3. After the connector is fully seated, push down the orange CPA with your thumb. Push down until the orange CPA is touching the yellow cover on the connector. FEP Connectors (Steering Gear) FEP Connectors (Steering Gear) Removal Procedure 1. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the locking tab on the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4778 2. Push down the locking tab to release the connector. The small flat-bladed tool may need to be pushed down and angled back slightly to depress the locking tab. Pull on the connector body while releasing the locking tab to disconnect the connector. JST Connectors JST Connectors Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. While depressing the lock, remove the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4779 2. Locate the two indents of the terminal position assurance (TPA) located on the bottom of the connector body. Note: The TPA cannot be removed from the connector while there are terminals present in the connector body. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to very carefully raise the TPA on both sides of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4780 4. View of the TPA when removed from the connector body. 5. Use the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the left side of the terminal release cavity as shown in the graphic. Use the tool to move the terminal release to the right with a gentle prying motion. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Kostal Connectors (Glow Plug Control Module) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4781 Kostal Connectors (Glow Plug Control Module) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure View of typical connector. View of connector in released position. 1. Locate the assist lever at the back of the connector. Move the assist lever to the rear position. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4782 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove the dress cover. 4. Slide the dress cover forward and off of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4783 5. The terminal positive assurance (TPA) is located in the front and rear of the connector. Note: The front TPA cannot be removed from the connector. Only move it to the preset position. 6. Use a small flat-blade tool to move the front TPA to the preset position, outboard approximately 0.125 in. (3 mm). 7. Use a small flat-blade tool to completely remove the rear TPA from the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4784 8. Use the J 38125-24 or the J 38125-560 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 9. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Kostal Connectors (Transmission) Kostal Connectors (Transmission) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4785 1. While depressing the lock, twist and remove the connector from the component. 2. Locate the terminal position assurance (TPA). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4786 Note: The TPA cannot be removed from the connector while there are terminals present in the connector body. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to push the TPA until it bottoms out. 4. Use the J 38125-28 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal cavity as shown in the graphic. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 5. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Terminal Replacement Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4787 After the terminal is crimped to the wire, perform the following procedure in order to replace the terminal. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. Locate the terminal position assurance (TPA). 4. Use a small flat-blade tool to push the TPA until it bottoms out. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4788 5. Ensure the TPA is fully seated. The TPA should be centered and flush with the connector body when viewed. Molex Connectors Molex Connectors Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the top of the wire dress cover. Slide the CPA forward. 2. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4789 3. The lever should be in the full forward position. 4. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4790 5. Remove the dress cover by using a flat bladed tool to release the dress cover locking tabs and lift up on the dress cover. 6. Cut the tie wrap that holds the wires to the connector body. 7. Use a small flat-blade tool to pry one side of the nose piece up to the pre-stage position. When the nose piece is in the pre-staged position, the nose piece will be raised above the connector body the length of the step in the nose piece. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4791 8. Use a small flat-blade tool to pry the other side of the piece to the pre-stage position. If the nose piece is higher than the first step in the nose piece, gently push down on the nose piece until it meets with resistance from the connector body, you should feel the nose piece click into position. 9. Insert the J 38125-213 into the small terminal release hole on the nose piece and gently pull on the back of the wire. 10. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Refer to the terminal crimping procedure in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit. Terminal Replacement Procedure After the terminal is crimped to the wire, perform the following procedure in order to replace the terminal. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4792 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the connector disassembly procedure. Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the connector body and pull the CPA out. The CPA is on the wire harness side of connector. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Use a small flat-bladed tool to gently pry off the dress cover by inserting the tool under the cover opposite the harness side and prying up. 4. Remove the cover. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4793 5. Using a small flat-bladed tool, push on the side of the nose piece retainer while pushing the nose piece forward with your thumb. This will release the terminal position assurance (TPA). 6. Insert the J 38125-12A into the corresponding terminal release cavity. The release cavities are the 2 center rows of cavities on one half of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4794 7. Pressing the J 38125-12A tool in the release cavity of the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and crimper in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. Slide the lever lock away from the connector body. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs on the dress cover of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool release all of the locking tabs. 4. Once the locks are unlocked, lift the dress cover off. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4795 Note: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 5. Release the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the blue locking tabs on both ends of the connector. Gently slide the TPA up to the released position on both ends. 6. For the larger terminals insert the J 38125-13A tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. For the smaller terminals insert the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4796 View of the release tool being used for the larger terminals. View of the release tool being used for the larger terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4797 View of the release tool being used for the smaller terminals. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4798 Side view of connector. View of top of connector. 1. Locate the assist lever and lock on the top of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4799 2. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. 3. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4800 4. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the rear of the connector. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. 5. Once the locking tabs are unlocked, slide the inner connector out of the rear of the connector housing. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4801 6. Use the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by pressing on the tang. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Repairing Connector Terminals Repairing Connector Terminals Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Use the following repair procedures in order to repair the following: * Push to Seat terminals * Pull to Seat terminals Some terminals do not require all of the steps shown. Skip the steps that do not apply for your terminal repair. The J-38125 contains further information. 1. Cut off the terminal between the core and the insulation crimp. Minimize any wire loss. For cable seal terminals, remove the seal. 2. Apply the correct cable seal per gauge size of the wire, if used. Slide the seal back along the wire in order to enable insulation removal. 3. Remove the insulation. 4. For sealed terminals only, align the seal with the end of the cable insulation. 5. Position the strip in the terminal. For sealed terminals, position the strip and seal in the terminal. 6. Hand crimp the core wings. 7. Hand crimp the insulation wings. For sealed terminals, hand crimp the insulation wings around the seal and the cable. 8. Solder all of the hand crimp terminals excepting Micro-Pack 100.64 size. Soldering Micro-Pack 100 World terminals may damage the terminal. Sumitomo Connectors Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4802 Sumitomo Connectors Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4803 3. Remove the dress cover by using a flat-blade tool to release the connector locking tabs and pulling off the dress cover. 4. Relieve the tension on the nose piece retainers by inserting J 38125-12A into the single retainer slot on the end of the nose piece and gently prying out the locking tab. Repeat the process for both of the nose piece locking tabs on the opposite side of the nose piece. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4804 5. Once the nose piece retainers are relaxed, use the J 38125-552 to pull up the nose piece by hooking the tool under the nose piece and pulling up. The nose piece should raise slightly. 6. On the opposite side of the nose piece, use the J 38125-552 to pull up the nose piece by hooking the tool under the nose piece and pulling up. The nose piece should release completely. If the nose piece does not come off, repeat the procedure on the opposite side. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4805 7. The illustration above identifies the entry canal where the terminal release tool will be inserted, and the terminal cavity. * Terminal (1) * Entry Canal (2) 8. Insert the J 38125-553 tool into the entry canal and pry up on the terminal retainer. The terminal retainer is a small plastic piece on the top of the terminal. The terminal retainer must be held up while the terminal is pulled out of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4806 9. The illustration shows a cutaway view of the connector to aid the technician in releasing the terminal retainer. 10. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Refer to the terminal crimping procedure in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit. Terminal Replacement Procedure After the terminal is crimped to the wire, perform the following procedure in order to replace the terminal. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the connector disassembly procedure. Terminal Position Assurance Locks Terminal Position Assurance Locks The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4807 2. Insert the J 38125-11A tool into the cavity on the lower right hand face of the connector until the terminal release tang access panel slides over. 3. Ensure that the terminal release tang access panel is in the correct location to access the terminals. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4808 5. Insert the J 38125-11A into the terminal release tang access slot located behind the access panel of the connector and press down on the terminal while carefully pulling the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component by pressing down on the connector position assurance (CPA). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4809 2. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting the tool in the small recess on the side of the connector and pushing up until the TPA releases from the connector body. The TPA should raise just slightly. Do not try to remove the TPA. Note: The TPA on this connector cannot be removed unless the terminals are removed first. The TPA will come out of the connector body, but only slightly. When the TPA is slightly raised the terminals can be removed. Using excessive force to remove the TPA with the terminals still in the connector will damage the connector. 3. Repeat the process for the other side of the connector. 4. Ensure that the TPA is in the proper position to remove the terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4810 5. While pushing the terminal forward, insert the J 38125-24 in the release cavity above the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4811 2. Insert a small flat-blade tool in the slot below the front loaded terminal position assurance (TPA) and pry up. 3. Remove the TPA by pulling it out of the connector. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-553 on a slight upward angle into the cavity below the terminal to be removed. Ensure that the pointed on the end of the tool is facing the bottom of the terminal and it stays in contact with the terminal until it stops on the plastic terminal retainer. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4812 6. Gently pry the plastic terminal retainer down and carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4813 1. While depressing the lock, pull the two connector halves apart. Note: The TPA is fragile and may break if not done carefully. 2. Use a small flat-blade tool to very carefully push the terminal position assurance (TPA) towards the face of the connector on both sides of the connector. 3. View of the male half of the connector with female terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4814 4. View of the female half of the connector with male terminals. 5. Use the J 38125-215 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. View of the female half of the connector with male terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4815 7. View of the male half of the connector with female terminals. 8. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers A circuit breaker is a protective device that is designed to open the circuit when a current load is in excess of the rated breaker capacity. If there is a short or other type of overload condition in the circuit, the excessive current will open the circuit between the circuit breaker terminals. Two types of circuit breakers are used. Circuit Breaker - This type opens when excessive current passes through it for a period of time. It closes again after a few seconds, and if the cause of the high current is still present, it will open again. The circuit breaker will continue to cycle open and closed until the condition causing the high current is removed. Positive Temperature Coefficient (PTC) Circuit Breaker - This type greatly increases its resistance when excessive current passes through it. The excessive current heats the PTC device, as the device heats its resistance increases. Eventually the resistance gets so high that the circuit is effectively open. Unlike the ordinary circuit breaker the PTC unit will not reset until the circuit is opened, by removing the voltage from its terminals. Once the voltage is removed the circuit breaker will re-close within a second or 2. Circuit Protection - Fuses Circuit Protection - Fuses Special Tools EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM) For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4816 The fuse is the most common method of an automotive wiring circuit protection. Whenever there is an excessive amount of current flowing through a circuit the fusible element will melt and create an open or incomplete circuit. Fuses are a one time protection device and must be replaced each time the circuit is overloaded. To determine if a fuse is open, remove the suspected fuse and examine if the element in the fuse is broken (2). If not broken (1), also check for continuity using a Digital Multimeter (DMM) or a continuity tester. If the element is broken or continuity is suspect, replace the fuse with one of equal current rating. Circuit Protection - Fusible Links Circuit Protection - Fusible Links Special Tools EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM) For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Fusible link is wire designed to melt and break continuity when excessive current is applied. It is often located between or near the battery and starter or electrical center. Use a continuity tester or a Digital Multimeter (DMM) at each end of the wire containing the fusible link in order to determine if it is broken. If broken, it must be replaced with fusible link of the same gauge size. Repairing a Fusible Link Note: Fusible links cut longer than 225 mm (approximately 9 in) will not provide sufficient overload protection. Flat Wire Repairs Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4817 Flat Wire Repairs The flat wire within the flex wiring harness is not serviceable. If an open or short exists within the flex wiring harness the complete harness must be replaced. GMLAN Wiring Repairs GMLAN Wiring Repairs Special Tools * EL-38125-10 - Splice Sleeve Crimping Tool * J 38125-5 - Ultra Torch Special Tool * DuraSeal splice sleeves * A wire stripping tool For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: * A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. * A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The GM Local Area Network (GMLAN) System requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working on GMLAN connectors and terminals. GMLAN Repairs Note: When making a repair to any GMLAN network, the original wire length after the repair must be the same length as before the repair. If the network is a twisted pair, the twist must be maintained after the repair is completed. GMLAN has 2 types of networks, low speed and high speed. Low speed GMLAN has a single wire and works at slow speeds. High speed GMLAN has 2 wires in a twisted pair and works at higher speeds. For more information on GMLAN, refer to Data Link Communications Description and Operation ( See: Computers and Control Systems/Information Bus/Description and Operation). GMLAN Connector Terminal Repair Note: A terminated lead can be used to replace damaged connector terminals for both high speed and low speed GMLAN systems. When making a connector terminal repair on a GMLAN high speed system with twisted pair wires, do not untwist the wires more than necessary to make the repair. If the individual terminals are damaged on any GMLAN connection, use the appropriate connector repair procedure in order to repair the terminal. Refer to Connector Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Connector Repairs) for the appropriate connector repair procedure. GMLAN Wire Repair Note: Refer to Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Wiring Repairs) in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gauge size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and EL-38125-10 - tool. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the DuraSeal splice sleeves. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4818 Note: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: * Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. * Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. * Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert to regional wiring gauge size. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the EL-38125-10 - tool in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the splice sleeve crimp tool. The crimp tool has four nests, one for each color. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4819 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs Caution: Do not solder repairs under any circumstances as this could result in the air reference being obstructed. If the heated oxygen sensor pigtail wiring, connector, or terminal is damaged the entire oxygen sensor assembly must be replaced. Do not attempt to repair the wiring, connector, or terminals. In order for the sensor to function properly it must have a clean air reference. This clean air reference is obtained by way of the oxygen sensor signal and heater wires. Any attempt to repair the wires, connectors or terminals could result in the obstruction of the air reference and degrade oxygen sensor performance. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4820 The following guidelines should be used when servicing the heated oxygen sensor: * Do not apply contact cleaner or other materials to the sensor or vehicle harness connectors. These materials may get into the sensor, causing poor performance. Also, the sensor pigtail and harness wires must not be damaged in such a way that the wires inside are exposed. This could provide a path for foreign materials to enter the sensor and cause performance problems. * Neither the sensor nor vehicle lead wires should be bent sharply or kinked. Sharp bends, kinks, etc., could block the reference air path through the lead wire. * Do not remove or defeat the oxygen sensor ground wire (where applicable). Vehicles that utilize the ground wire sensor may rely on this ground as the only ground contact to the sensor. Removal of the ground wire will also cause poor engine performance. * To prevent damage due to water intrusion, be sure that the peripheral seal remains intact on the vehicle harness connector. High Temperature Wiring Repairs High Temperature Wiring Repairs Special Tools * EL-38125-10 - Splice Sleeve Crimping Tool * J 38125-5 - Ultra Torch * DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). High Temperature Wiring Wiring that is exposed to high temperatures, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time may use materials i.e. wires, connectors, and shielding that has a higher heat rating than typical wiring. When making a repair in a high temperature area observe the following: * Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature to replace any damaged wire. * Replace any heat shielding that is removed. * Cover any DuraSeal splice sleeves with SCT1 shrink tubing. * After making a wiring repair, ensure that the location of the wiring is not moved closer to the heat source. Identifying High Temperature Wiring Wiring that is exposed to high temperature, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time need special considerations when making wiring repairs. Areas that may be exposed to higher temperatures can be identified by heat resistant materials that are being used in those areas. These materials may include heat reflective tape, moon tape, and high temperature shrink tubing. Also conduit and other protective coverings may be used. Because conduit or similar coverings are used throughout the vehicle regardless of the temperature, it may be necessary for the technician to determine if an area is exposed to excessive heat before making a wiring repair. Obvious areas of consideration would be any area located near the exhaust manifolds, catalytic converter, and exhaust pipes. Items Required * DuraSeal splice sleeves to crimp and seal connections * High temperature SCT1 shrink tubing to protect the splice sleeves * Terminated leads or pigtails * The correct tools to remove the terminals from the connectors Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature of the same or larger gauge size as the original wire when repair damage wire. Also replace any reflective tape that you remove during the repair. High Temperature Wire Repair Note: Refer to Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Wiring Repairs) in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature rating of the same gauge size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the EL-38125-10 - tool and then encapsulate the splice sleeve using the high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4821 Note: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: * Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. * Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. * Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert to regional wiring gauge size. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Slide a section of high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing down the length of wire to be spliced. Ensure that the shrink tubing will not interfere with the splice procedure. 5. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 6. Use the EL-38125-10 - tool in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the splice sleeve crimp tool. The crimp tool has four nests, one for each color. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4822 7. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 8. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 9. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 10. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 11. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4823 12. Center the high temperature SCT1 shrink tube over the DuraSeal splice sleeve. 13. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the high temperature heat shrink tubing. 14. Gradually move the heat from the center to the open end of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. 15. Replace any reflective tape and clips that may have been remove during the repair. Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation If the wire insulation has been chafed, or broken, enough to show the conductive portion of the wire, and the wire is not damaged, determine the length of insulation that needs to be repaired. If the repair is less than 280 mm (11 in), cut the wire within the damaged area. Than slide the appropriate heat shrink tubing (listed below) over the wire, and repair the wire by splicing the wires together. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves). Once the wire is spliced together slide heat shrink tubing over the damaged area and apply heat to seal the repaired wire. If the wire is damaged, or the damaged area is larger than 280 mm (11 in), than replace the damaged wire by splicing in a new section of wire. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4824 SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs Special Tools * EL-38125-10 - Splice Sleeve Crimping Tool * J 38125-5 - Ultra Torch * DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: * A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. * A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides the necessary low resistance contact integrity for these sensitive, low energy circuits. The Supplemental Inflatable Restraint (SIR) System/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working with the SIR/SRS, and the wiring components, such as connectors and terminals. SIR/SRS Connector Repair (Plastic Body and Terminal Metal Pin) Note: Do not use the terminals in the kit in order to replace damaged SIR/SRS system terminals. Use either an SIR/SRS pigtail or a terminated lead from the SIR Repair Kit Tray. The terminals in the SIR/SRS system are made with a special plating. This plating provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. Pigtail repair packs are available for SIR/SRS connectors with eight or less terminals. Only the connector body is available for connectors with more than eight terminals. Terminated leads can be used to replace damaged terminals when replacing the connector body. SIR/SRS Component Wire Pigtail Repair Note: Do not make wire, connector, or terminal repairs on components with wire pigtails. A wire pigtail is a wire or wires attached directly to the device, not by a connector. If a wiring pigtail is damaged, you must replace the entire component, with pigtail. The inflatable restraint steering wheel module coil is an example of a pigtail component. SIR/SRS Wire Repair Note: Refer to Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Wiring Repairs) in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4825 If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gauge size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and EL-38125-10 - tool. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the DuraSeal splice sleeves. Note: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: * Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. * Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. * Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert to regional wiring gauge size. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the EL-38125-10 - tool in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the splice sleeve crimp tool. The crimp tool has four nests, one for each color. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4826 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Connector Position Assurance (CPA) The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of a connector. CPAs are used in all SIR System connectors and also in some connectors of other systems. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals of a connection. Terminal Position Assurance (TPA) The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4827 Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Special Tools * EL-38125-10 - Splice Sleeve Crimping Tool * J 38125-5 - Ultra Torch * DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Note: Use only DuraSeal splice sleeves. Other splice sleeves may not protect the splice from moisture or provide a good electrical connection. Use DuraSeal splice sleeves to form a one-to-one splice on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. Use DuraSeal splice sleeves where there is special requirements such as moisture sealing. Follow the instructions below in order to splice copper wire using DuraSeal splice sleeves. Note: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: * Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. * Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. * Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert to regional wiring gauge size. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4828 5. Use the EL-38125-10 - tool in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the splice sleeve crimp tool. The crimp tool has four nests, one for each color. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4829 * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Splicing Inline Harness Diodes Splicing Inline Harness Diodes Many vehicle electrical systems use a diode to isolate circuits and protect the components from voltage spikes. When installing a new diode use the following procedure. 1. Open the harness. * If the harness is taped, remove the tape. * To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing seam ripper (available from sewing supply stores) in order to cut open the harness. * If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the diode. 2. If the diode is taped to the harness, remove all of the tape. 3. Check and record the current flow direction and orientation of diode. 4. Remove the inoperative diode from the harness with a suitable soldering tool. Note: If the diode is located next to a connector terminal remove the terminal(s) from the connector to prevent damage from the soldering tool. 5. Carefully strip away a section of insulation next to the old soldered portion of the wire(s). Do not remove any more than is needed to attach the new diode. 6. Check current flow direction of the new diode, being sure to install the diode with correct bias. Reference the appropriate service manual wiring schematic to obtain the correct diode installation position. 7. Attach the new diode to the wire(s) using 60/40 rosin core solder. Before soldering attach some heat sinks (aluminum alligator clips) across the diode wire ends to protect the diode from excessive heat. Follow the manufacturer's instruction for the soldering equipment. 8. Reinstall terminal(s) into the connector body if previously removed. Note: To prevent shorts to ground and water intrusion, completely cover all exposed wire and diode attachment points with tape. 9. Tape the diode to the harness or connector using electrical tape. Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable Twisted/shielded cable is used in order to protect wiring from electrical noise. Two-conductor cable of this construction is used between the radio and the Delco-Bose(R) speaker/amplifier units and other applications where low level, sensitive signals must be carried. Follow the instructions below in order to repair the twisted/shielded cable. 1. Remove the outer jacket (1). Use care not to cut into the drain wire of the mylar tape. 2. Unwrap the tape. Do not remove the tape. Use the tape in order to rewrap the twisted conductors after the splice is made. 3. Prepare the splice. Untwist the conductors and follow the instructions for Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves). Staggering the splices by 65 mm (2.5 in) is recommended. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4830 Note: Apply the mylar tape with the aluminum side inward. This ensures good electrical contact with the drain wire. 4. Re-assemble the cable. * Rewrap the conductors with the mylar tape. If the mylar tape is damaged, use 3M product AL-36FR to replace the damaged mylar tape. * Use caution not to wrap the drain wire in the tape (1). * Follow the splicing instructions for copper wire and splice the drain wire. * Wrap the drain wire around the conductors and tape with electrical tape to replace the outer insulation. 5. Tape over the entire cable. Use a winding motion when you apply the tape. Wiring Repairs Wiring Repairs The Wiring Repairs section contains the following types of wiring repair information. Using these elements together will make wiring repair faster and easier: * Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections) * Flat Wire Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Flat Wire Repairs) * GMLAN Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/GMLAN Wiring Repairs) * High Temperature Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/High Temperature Wiring Repairs) * Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs) * Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves) * Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable) * Splicing Inline Harness Diodes (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Inline Harness Diodes) * SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs) US English/Metric Conversion US English/Metric Conversion Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4831 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4832 Basic Digital Multimeter Requirements Basic Digital Multimeter Requirements Digital Multimeter (DMM) Basic Requirements Service information is validated using digital multimeters that meet or exceed the following requirements. Using a multimeter that does not meet these basic requirements may give inaccurate readings which could lead to an incorrect diagnosis. Display and Settings 1. Four digits displayed 2. Voltage, amperage, resistance, frequency, diode test settings, and min-max function 3. Display positive and negative values Voltage 1. Have at least 10 Mohm input impedance 2. Test a DC voltage range of 0.1-1000 V. 3. Test an AC voltage range of 0.1-1000 V. Amperage 1. Test a DC amperage range of 0.1µA-10 A. 2. Test an AC amperage range of 0.1µA-10 A. Resistance Test a resistance range of 0.1 ohm-40 Mohm and displays infinite for a value greater than 40 Mohm (O.L. (Over-load)) Frequency Test for a frequency range of 0.5 HZ-199 K HZ Diode Test 1. Apply at least 1 mA when performing the diode bias test 2. Display the break over voltage drop (0-3 V) of a forward biased diode 3. Display infinite (O.L. (Over-load)) when a diode is reverse biased Min-Max Readings 1. Can update at a 1 ms sample rate 2. Saves and displays minimum and maximum values Testing Ground and Low Reference Circuits Testing Ground and Low Reference Circuits Because a test lamp can light with up to 200 ohm in a ground or low reference circuit they are not recommended to be used for this type of test. A low impedance test lamp can light and indicate the circuit is good when there is as much as 20-30 ohm present, while a high impedance test lamp can light with up to 200 ohm present in the circuit. This is why the Digital Multi-Meter (DMM) is used when validating a ground or low reference circuit continuity. When using the DMM there are many vehicle conditions that can affect the ground and low reference continuity testing. If these conditions are not met, a ground or low reference circuit test can fail on a good circuit. This may cause longer diagnosis time and incorrect component replacement. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4833 Any current flow through a ground or low reference circuit, while being tested, will skew the DMM continuity reading, or display a reading higher than when there is no current flowing. Performing a ground or low reference circuit continuity test, in reference to the vehicles battery negative terminal, will have the highest risk of failing a good ground or low reference circuit test than any other ground reference point. The best ground test points would be a control module housing (if the control modules housing is metal and grounded), door jamb striker (if attached to metal), under dash metal frame work, engine block, or body ground studs (other than where the negative battery cable is attached). A typical DMM ground or low reference circuit continuity reading can be as high as 100 ohm with the ignition ON, and drop to 15-25 ohm after the ignition is turned OFF. The reading will drop below 10 ohm after 30-40 seconds, then below 5 ohm after 60 seconds. Once the vehicle completely goes to sleep (generally 3-10 minutes) the reading will drop below 0.3 ohm. The following list of conditions may need to be met to ensure a valid continuity reading on a ground or low reference circuit: * Ignition OFF * Key out of the ignition switch (when not equipped with keyless entry and remote start) * Retained Accessory Power (RAP) OFF (open and close the driver door after ignition OFF) * Battery charger set at a 2 A or less charge rate * Scan tool not communicating with any vehicle control module (in some cases it may need to be disconnected from the DLC) * All entry doors closed * Headlamps OFF (auto headlamps disabled) * Any delay lighting OFF * HVAC after blow OFF * Any accessory that can work when the ignition is OFF * Wait up to 60 seconds (after all other listed conditions are met) Activating the DOOR LOCK function with a key fob can greatly reduce the time to achieve a valid ground or low reference continuity test result. Terminal Wiring Repair Terminal Wiring Repair Special Tools * EL-38125-10 - Splice Sleeve Crimp Tool * EL-38125-580 - Terminal Release Tool Kit * J-38125-5 - Ultra Torch * EL-35616 - Connector Test Adapter Kit For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Note: All repairs near the engine manifold, turbo engine and all exhaust pipes should follow the High Temperature Wiring Repair procedures. 1. Find the appropriate connector end view within the connector end view section. The connector end view has the following information: * Diagnostic probe tool * Terminal release tool * Terminal/terminated lead part numbers 2. Determine if a terminal is damaged. Note: Not using the proper test kit probe may cause damage to the terminal(s) that are probed. * Locate the diagnostic probe tool from the connector end view. The connector end view describes the color and part number to help the technician find and use the correct tool. * Connect the probe tool to the Digital Multimeter. * Insert the probe tool into the cavity and follow the procedures from the Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter). 3. Disconnect the connector body to perform the repair. Note: Several procedures for specific connector bodies are called out in Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Wiring Repairs). Use the following repair procedures to repair the following terminals: Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4834 Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack))Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Push to Seat))Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Pull to Seat))Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W))Delphi Connectors (Micro.64) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Micro .64) )Delphi Connectors (12-Way) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (12-Way))Delphi Connectors (Steering Gear) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Steering Gear)) * The TPA and CPA should be removed before releasing the terminal for the connector body. * Look at the connector end view to locate the cavity of the damaged terminal and find the proper terminal release tool from the terminal release tool kit. Note: Using the incorrect terminal release tool can damage the connector body. * Insert the terminal release tool into the cavity. Note: Some terminals have a lever that must be disengaged before the terminal can be released. Gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Terminated Lead Repair Terminated Lead Repair Special Tools * EL-38125-10 - Splice Sleeve Crimp Tool * EL-38125-580 - Terminal Release Tool Kit * J-38125-5 - Ultra Torch * EL-35616 - Connector Test Adapter Kit For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Note: All repairs near the engine manifold, turbo engine and all exhaust pipes should follow the High Temperature Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/High Temperature Wiring Repairs) procedures. Terminated leads are terminals that are crimped onto wires. The terminated lead can be used throughout the vehicle since it is designed for temperatures up to 150°C. The length of the wire is 450 mm. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4835 The DuraSeal splice sleeve has the following 2 critical features: * A special heat shrink tubing that environmentally seals the splice. The shrink tubing contains a sealing adhesive inside the shrink tubing. * A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp that provides the necessary contact integrity for sensitive low energy circuits. 1. Use the connector end view to identify the correct terminated lead. 2. The terminated lead package should include a DuraSeal splice sleeve. If not, use the chart to identify the correct part. 3. Open the harness by removing any tape: Use a sewing seam ripper, or a comparable tool, to cut open the harness, to avoid wire insulation damage. 4. Depending on how many terminals need repairs, cut the terminal and wire back at least 40 mm. Try to keep the harness wire length the same. If more than one terminated lead is required, stagger the lengths by 40 mm. This helps reduce the bundle size of the wire harness. 5. Use the EL-38125-10 - tool in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the splice sleeve crimp tool. The crimp tool has four nests, one for each color. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4836 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the J-38125-5 - ultra torch , apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-07-30-016A > Nov > 09 > A/T Controls - Downshift Hesitation/Delayed Shifting Control Module: Customer Interest A/T Controls - Downshift Hesitation/Delayed Shifting TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 09-07-30-016A Date: November 25, 2009 Subject: Transmission Hesitation, Delayed Shifting, Shifting at Wrong Time (Reprogram TCM) Models: 2010 Buick Enclave 2010 Chevrolet Equinox, Traverse 2010 GMC Acadia, Terrain 2010 Saturn OUTLOOK Equipped with 6T40/45 (RPOs MH7, MHC) or 6T70/75 (RPOs MH2, MH4, MY9, MH6) Automatic Transmission 2010 Buick LaCrosse Equipped with 3.0L (RPO LF1) Engine and 6T70 (RPOs MH2, MH4) Automatic Transmission 2010 Chevrolet Malibu 2010 Pontiac G6 2010 Saturn AURA Equipped with 6T40 (RPO MH8) Automatic Transmission All Vehicles Built Prior to the Following VIN Breakpoints: Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add models. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 09-07-30-016 (07- Transmission/Transaxle). Condition Some customers may comment on transmission downshift hesitation, delayed shifting and shifting at the wrong time. Correction A revised transmission calibration has been developed to address these issues. Reprogram the transmission control module (TCM) with updated calibration files using the TIS2WEB Service Programming System (SPS) application. Select SEQ Programming Sequence ECM/TCM from the Supported Controllers screen. Refer to SI and Service Programming System (SPS) documentation for programming instructions, if required. Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table above. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Control Module: > 10-07-30-002A > Jun > 10 > A/T Controls Snapshot Data Using (GDS) Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T Controls - Snapshot Data Using (GDS) INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 10-07-30-002A Date: June 11, 2010 Subject: Navigation Procedure for Snapshot Data Using Global Diagnostic System (GDS), Uploading Snapshot Data to Computer and E-mailing Models: 2010-2011 Buick LaCrosse 2011 Buick Regal 2010-2011 Cadillac SRX 2010-2011 Chevrolet Camaro, Equinox 2010-2011 GMC Terrain Attention: For additional information about GDS and/or the snapshot feature, please review course number: 16048.26W Global Diagnostic System, at the GM training website: www.gmtraining.com. In Canada go to: www.gmprocanada.com. You may also utilize the Help Section of GDS by clicking on the Menu button that is on the lower left corner of the GDS screen. Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2011 model year and correct the step number referred to in the Note for Step 18. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 10-07-30-002 (Section 07 - Transmission/Transaxle). The Global Diagnostic System (GDS) and the multiple diagnostic interface (MDI) module will take the place of the Tech 2(R) on certain vehicles when communicating and diagnosing vehicle on-board electrical systems. This diagnostic tool platform and software will be required for use with all 2010 and later GM Global Architecture (Global A) vehicles beginning with the Chevrolet Camaro, followed by the Buick LaCrosse, Chevrolet Equinox, Cadillac SRX, GMC Terrain and Buick Regal. The following procedure is intended to show the user how to navigate to the appropriate data screen, upload a snapshot of the data to a computer and create an e-mail of the snapshot. The procedure is written for an automatic transmission, but is similar for other data screens. Procedure for GDS Navigating and Uploading Transmission Snapshot Data to a PC and Creating an E-mail 1. Turn OFF the ignition. 2. Connect the MDI to the Data Link Connector (DLC) of the vehicle. Note Use the USB port to make the following MDI connection: 3. Connect the MDI to a PC or laptop that has been downloaded with the GDS application from TIS2WEB. Note At least one Diagnostic Package must be installed on the PC to perform diagnostics. If GDS was just installed, select: Add New Diagnostic Package and then select: a Diagnostic Package to download. 4. Click: On the GDS icon on the PC. 5. The Login Page will appear. 6. Select: A User. 7. The ID Screen will appear. 8. Select: The serial number of the MDI being used. 9. Select: Connect. 10. Verify that the system status is ready by observing for a flashing PC light icon on the MDI. 11. Select: Make, Model and Model Year, in order to build the vehicle. 12. At: The Verification step, turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. 13. Click: Upload VIN, to allow the VIN to be reported to the PC. 14. Select: Next Action. 15. The Home Page will appear. 16. Select: Next. 17. The Diagnostic Screen will appear. Note Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Control Module: > 10-07-30-002A > Jun > 10 > A/T Controls Snapshot Data Using (GDS) > Page 4852 Due to vehicle build, software and RPO variations, GDS may ask for additional information in Step 18. 18. Select: Engine ID, if prompted. 19. Select: Module Diagnostics. 20. Select: TCM. 21. Select: Data Display. 22. Select: The drop down menu to display the available Data Display selections. 23. Select: The appropriate Data Display for the snapshot to be taken. Note The snapshot data can be recorded at idle or on a hoist when using a shop PC. IF the vehicle is driven, the use of a laptop with GDS will be required. PC memory will determine the amount of snapshot recording time. 24. Select: Record Snapshot, when ready. 25. Select: Stop Snapshot, upon completion. 26. Insert: Comment. Use a name, the vehicle model or the concern and date in order to identify the snapshot. 27. Exit: The Data List. 28. Exit: The Diagnostic Screen. 29. The Home Page will appear with the snapshot on the right side. 30. Click: On the Snapshot to Highlight it. 31. Click: Tech Support. Note Enter the necessary e-mail information into ALL of the blank boxes. Failure to do so will result in an error message and the snapshot will not be sent. 32. The Send E-mail dialog box will appear. 1. SENDER: Enter your first name. Use only ONE name as multiple words may cause an error message. 2. RECIPIENT: Enter their e-mail address. Note An error message will occur if this box contains ANY spaces. 3. REPLY TO: Enter your first name here. An e-mail address can be used but it MUST NOT contain any spaces or unrecognized characters. 4. SUBJECT: Enter the appropriate information here, such as the condition, symptom, data parameter being investigated or DTC. 5. TEXT: Type a short message here, such as the test results, snapshot type, or a cell phone number. Note A copy of the snapshot will still reside on the PC. 33. Click: OK, to send the snapshot. Procedure to E-mail GDS Snapshot Data to TAC Important When e-mailing a snapshot to TAC, only send the snapshot data they have REQUESTED. 1. Select: Home Page. The snapshot will appear on the right side. 2. Click: On the Snapshot to Highlight it. 3. Click: Tech Support. 4. The Send E-mail dialog box will appear. Note Enter the necessary e-mail information into ALL of the blank boxes. Failure to do so will result in an error message and the snapshot will not be sent. 5. SENDER: Enter your first name here. Use only ONE name as multiple words may cause an error message. 6. RECIPIENT: Enter the USA or Canada TAC E-mail Address. Note An error message will occur if this box contains ANY spaces. 7. REPLY TO: Enter your first name here. An e-mail address can be used but it MUST NOT contain any spaces or unrecognized characters. 8. SUBJECT: Enter Your TAC Case Number & VIN Number here. Both numbers MUST appear in this box or the e-mail cannot be processed and will be deleted. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Control Module: > 10-07-30-002A > Jun > 10 > A/T Controls Snapshot Data Using (GDS) > Page 4853 9. TEXT: Type a short message here, such as the test results, snapshot type, or a cell phone number. Note A copy of the snapshot will still reside on the PC. 10. Click: OK, to send the snapshot. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Control Module: > 09-07-30-016A > Nov > 09 > A/T Controls Downshift Hesitation/Delayed Shifting Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T Controls - Downshift Hesitation/Delayed Shifting TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 09-07-30-016A Date: November 25, 2009 Subject: Transmission Hesitation, Delayed Shifting, Shifting at Wrong Time (Reprogram TCM) Models: 2010 Buick Enclave 2010 Chevrolet Equinox, Traverse 2010 GMC Acadia, Terrain 2010 Saturn OUTLOOK Equipped with 6T40/45 (RPOs MH7, MHC) or 6T70/75 (RPOs MH2, MH4, MY9, MH6) Automatic Transmission 2010 Buick LaCrosse Equipped with 3.0L (RPO LF1) Engine and 6T70 (RPOs MH2, MH4) Automatic Transmission 2010 Chevrolet Malibu 2010 Pontiac G6 2010 Saturn AURA Equipped with 6T40 (RPO MH8) Automatic Transmission All Vehicles Built Prior to the Following VIN Breakpoints: Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add models. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 09-07-30-016 (07- Transmission/Transaxle). Condition Some customers may comment on transmission downshift hesitation, delayed shifting and shifting at the wrong time. Correction A revised transmission calibration has been developed to address these issues. Reprogram the transmission control module (TCM) with updated calibration files using the TIS2WEB Service Programming System (SPS) application. Select SEQ Programming Sequence ECM/TCM from the Supported Controllers screen. Refer to SI and Service Programming System (SPS) documentation for programming instructions, if required. Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table above. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Control Module: > 10-07-30-002A > Jun > 10 > A/T Controls - Snapshot Data Using (GDS) Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T Controls - Snapshot Data Using (GDS) INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 10-07-30-002A Date: June 11, 2010 Subject: Navigation Procedure for Snapshot Data Using Global Diagnostic System (GDS), Uploading Snapshot Data to Computer and E-mailing Models: 2010-2011 Buick LaCrosse 2011 Buick Regal 2010-2011 Cadillac SRX 2010-2011 Chevrolet Camaro, Equinox 2010-2011 GMC Terrain Attention: For additional information about GDS and/or the snapshot feature, please review course number: 16048.26W Global Diagnostic System, at the GM training website: www.gmtraining.com. In Canada go to: www.gmprocanada.com. You may also utilize the Help Section of GDS by clicking on the Menu button that is on the lower left corner of the GDS screen. Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2011 model year and correct the step number referred to in the Note for Step 18. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 10-07-30-002 (Section 07 - Transmission/Transaxle). The Global Diagnostic System (GDS) and the multiple diagnostic interface (MDI) module will take the place of the Tech 2(R) on certain vehicles when communicating and diagnosing vehicle on-board electrical systems. This diagnostic tool platform and software will be required for use with all 2010 and later GM Global Architecture (Global A) vehicles beginning with the Chevrolet Camaro, followed by the Buick LaCrosse, Chevrolet Equinox, Cadillac SRX, GMC Terrain and Buick Regal. The following procedure is intended to show the user how to navigate to the appropriate data screen, upload a snapshot of the data to a computer and create an e-mail of the snapshot. The procedure is written for an automatic transmission, but is similar for other data screens. Procedure for GDS Navigating and Uploading Transmission Snapshot Data to a PC and Creating an E-mail 1. Turn OFF the ignition. 2. Connect the MDI to the Data Link Connector (DLC) of the vehicle. Note Use the USB port to make the following MDI connection: 3. Connect the MDI to a PC or laptop that has been downloaded with the GDS application from TIS2WEB. Note At least one Diagnostic Package must be installed on the PC to perform diagnostics. If GDS was just installed, select: Add New Diagnostic Package and then select: a Diagnostic Package to download. 4. Click: On the GDS icon on the PC. 5. The Login Page will appear. 6. Select: A User. 7. The ID Screen will appear. 8. Select: The serial number of the MDI being used. 9. Select: Connect. 10. Verify that the system status is ready by observing for a flashing PC light icon on the MDI. 11. Select: Make, Model and Model Year, in order to build the vehicle. 12. At: The Verification step, turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. 13. Click: Upload VIN, to allow the VIN to be reported to the PC. 14. Select: Next Action. 15. The Home Page will appear. 16. Select: Next. 17. The Diagnostic Screen will appear. Note Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Control Module: > 10-07-30-002A > Jun > 10 > A/T Controls - Snapshot Data Using (GDS) > Page 4863 Due to vehicle build, software and RPO variations, GDS may ask for additional information in Step 18. 18. Select: Engine ID, if prompted. 19. Select: Module Diagnostics. 20. Select: TCM. 21. Select: Data Display. 22. Select: The drop down menu to display the available Data Display selections. 23. Select: The appropriate Data Display for the snapshot to be taken. Note The snapshot data can be recorded at idle or on a hoist when using a shop PC. IF the vehicle is driven, the use of a laptop with GDS will be required. PC memory will determine the amount of snapshot recording time. 24. Select: Record Snapshot, when ready. 25. Select: Stop Snapshot, upon completion. 26. Insert: Comment. Use a name, the vehicle model or the concern and date in order to identify the snapshot. 27. Exit: The Data List. 28. Exit: The Diagnostic Screen. 29. The Home Page will appear with the snapshot on the right side. 30. Click: On the Snapshot to Highlight it. 31. Click: Tech Support. Note Enter the necessary e-mail information into ALL of the blank boxes. Failure to do so will result in an error message and the snapshot will not be sent. 32. The Send E-mail dialog box will appear. 1. SENDER: Enter your first name. Use only ONE name as multiple words may cause an error message. 2. RECIPIENT: Enter their e-mail address. Note An error message will occur if this box contains ANY spaces. 3. REPLY TO: Enter your first name here. An e-mail address can be used but it MUST NOT contain any spaces or unrecognized characters. 4. SUBJECT: Enter the appropriate information here, such as the condition, symptom, data parameter being investigated or DTC. 5. TEXT: Type a short message here, such as the test results, snapshot type, or a cell phone number. Note A copy of the snapshot will still reside on the PC. 33. Click: OK, to send the snapshot. Procedure to E-mail GDS Snapshot Data to TAC Important When e-mailing a snapshot to TAC, only send the snapshot data they have REQUESTED. 1. Select: Home Page. The snapshot will appear on the right side. 2. Click: On the Snapshot to Highlight it. 3. Click: Tech Support. 4. The Send E-mail dialog box will appear. Note Enter the necessary e-mail information into ALL of the blank boxes. Failure to do so will result in an error message and the snapshot will not be sent. 5. SENDER: Enter your first name here. Use only ONE name as multiple words may cause an error message. 6. RECIPIENT: Enter the USA or Canada TAC E-mail Address. Note An error message will occur if this box contains ANY spaces. 7. REPLY TO: Enter your first name here. An e-mail address can be used but it MUST NOT contain any spaces or unrecognized characters. 8. SUBJECT: Enter Your TAC Case Number & VIN Number here. Both numbers MUST appear in this box or the e-mail cannot be processed and will be deleted. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Control Module: > 10-07-30-002A > Jun > 10 > A/T Controls - Snapshot Data Using (GDS) > Page 4864 9. TEXT: Type a short message here, such as the test results, snapshot type, or a cell phone number. Note A copy of the snapshot will still reside on the PC. 10. Click: OK, to send the snapshot. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission Control Module: Service and Repair 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission Control Solenoid Valve and Transmission Control Module Assembly Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the transmission control valve body cover. Refer to Control Valve Body Cover Replacement (See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Valve Body/Service and Repair/6T30/6T40/6T45 Automatic Transmission/Control Valve Body Cover Replacement). 2. Disconnect the input speed sensor electrical connector (1). 3. Disconnect the output speed sensor electrical connector (2). 4. Disconnect the shift position switch electrical connector (3). 5. Remove the 3 control valve body bolts (1) M5 x 40.5. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 4867 6. Remove the 12 control valve body bolts (2) M6 x 97. 7. Remove the control solenoid valve assembly (3) with transmission control module. Caution: Use care when removing or installing the filter plate assembly. A broken or missing retaining tab may not adequately secure the filter plate to the control solenoid valve assembly, resulting in possible damage or contamination. 8. Remove the control solenoid valve assembly filter plate (4). Discard the filter plate. It is not reusable. 9. Inspect the channel plate bolt pass through holes for damage or brinelling. Any damage will cause incorrect pressure switch operation. Replace as necessary. Installation Procedure Caution: Use care when removing or installing the filter plate assembly. A broken or missing retaining tab may not adequately secure the filter plate to the control solenoid valve assembly, resulting in possible damage or contamination. 1. Install a NEW control solenoid valve assembly filter plate (4) to prevent fluid leaks past the fluid seals. 2. Install the control solenoid valve assembly (3) with transmission control module. 3. Hand start the control valve body bolts (1, 2). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 4868 Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener Caution). 4. Secure the 12 control valve body bolts (2) M6 x 97 and tighten in sequence to 10 Nm (89 lb in). 5. Secure the 3 control valve body bolts (1) M5 x 40.5 and tighten in sequence to 8 Nm (71 lb in). 6. Connect the input speed sensor electrical connector (1). 7. Connect the output speed sensor electrical connector (2). 8. Connect the shift position switch electrical connector (3). 9. Install the transmission control valve body cover. Refer to Control Valve Body Cover Replacement (See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Valve Body/Service and Repair/6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission/Control Valve Body Cover Replacement). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 4869 Control Module: Service and Repair 6T70/6T75 - Automatic Transmission Control Solenoid Valve and Transmission Control Module Assembly Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the control valve body cover. Refer to Control Valve Body Cover Replacement (See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Valve Body/Service and Repair/6T70/6T75 - Automatic Transmission/Control Valve Body Cover Replacement). 2. Disconnect the input speed sensor electrical connector (1). 3. Disconnect the output speed sensor electrical connector (2). 4. Disconnect the shift position switch electrical connector (3). 5. Remove the 4 control valve body bolts (1) M6 x 80. 6. Position the control solenoid valve spring (8) to the side. Spring will be released with the removal of the control valve body assembly. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 4870 7. Remove the 2 control valve body bolts (4) M6 x 65. 8. Remove the control valve body bolt (3) M6 x 42. 9. Remove the 3 control valve body bolts (2) M6 x 95. 10. Remove the control valve body bolt (7) M6 x 55. 11. Remove the control solenoid valve body and transmission control module (TCM) assembly (5). Caution: Use care when removing or installing the filter plate assembly. A broken or missing retaining tab may not adequately secure the filter plate to the control solenoid valve assembly, resulting in possible damage or contamination. 12. Remove the control solenoid valve assembly filter plate (6). * Discard the filler plate. It is not reusable. * Inspect the pressure switch manifold seals for damage or contamination. Replace the control solenoid valve assembly as necessary. * Inspect the upper channel plate bolt holes for damage, peening or burnelling. Any damage around the bolt holes near the pressure control switch (PCS) feed holes could cause leakage around the PCS seals. Replace the upper channel plate as necessary. Installation Procedure Caution: Use care when removing or installing the filter plate assembly. A broken or missing retaining tab may not adequately secure the filter plate to the control solenoid valve assembly, resulting in possible damage or contamination. 1. Install a NEW control solenoid valve assembly filter plate (1). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 4871 2. Install the control solenoid valve body and TCM assembly (5). 3. Rotate the control solenoid valve spring (7) into position. Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener Caution). Note: Install all bolts before tightening, then tighten in specified sequence. 4. Install the 4 control valve body bolts (1) M6 x 80. 5. Install the control valve body bolt (6) M6 x 55. 6. Install the 3 control valve body bolts (2) M6 x 95. 7. Install the control valve body bolt (3) M6 x 42. 8. Install the 2 control valve body bolts (4) M6 x 65 and tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb in). 9. Connect the input speed sensor electrical connector (1). 10. Connect the output speed sensor electrical connector (2). 11. Connect the shift position switch electrical connector (3). 12. Install the control valve body cover. Refer to Control Valve Body Cover Replacement (See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Automatic Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 4872 Transmission/Transaxle/Valve Body/Service and Repair/6T70/6T75 - Automatic Transmission/Control Valve Body Cover Replacement). 13. For transmission control module programming and setup. Refer to Control Module References (See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning). Note: After an internal transmission repair or internal part replacement the service fast learn adapt procedure should be performed. 14. Perform the transmission adaptive values learn procedure. Refer to Transmission Adaptive Values Learn (See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Differential > Control Unit, Differential Lock > Component Information > Locations Control Unit: Locations Wheels/Vehicle Underbody Component Views Rear Underbody Components 1 - K47 Rear Differential Clutch Control Module (F46) 2 - R6 Data Link Resistor Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Differential > Control Unit, Differential Lock > Component Information > Locations > Page 4877 Control Unit: Diagrams K47 Rear Differential Clutch Control Module (F46) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Differential > Control Unit, Differential Lock > Component Information > Service and Repair > Rear Differential Clutch Control Module Replacement Control Unit: Service and Repair Rear Differential Clutch Control Module Replacement Rear Differential Clutch Control Module Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Differential > Control Unit, Differential Lock > Component Information > Service and Repair > Rear Differential Clutch Control Module Replacement > Page 4880 Control Unit: Service and Repair Rear Wheel Drive Module Clutch Housing Replacement Rear Wheel Drive Module Clutch Housing Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Mode Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations Transmission Mode Switch: Locations Powertrain Component Views Automatic Transmission Electronic Components 1 - Q8 Control Solenoid Valve Assembly 2 - B15 Transmission Internal Mode Switch 3 - B14A Transmission Output Shaft Speed Sensor 4 - B14C Transmission Input Shaft Speed Sensor Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Exploded Views Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Exploded Views 6L50/6L80/6L90 - Automatic Transmission Disassembled Views Park System Components 50 - A/Trans Case 600 - Park Pawl Shaft 601 - Park Pawl Spring 602 - Park Pawl 603 - Park Pawl Actuator Guide Pin 604 - Manual Shift Shaft Seal 605 - Park Pawl Actuator Guide Seal 606 - Park Pawl Actuator Guide 607 - Park Pawl Actuator Assembly 608 - Manual Shift Detent Lever Shaft 609 - Manual Shift Detent (w/Shaft Position Switch) Lever Assembly 610 - Manual Shift Detent Lever Pin 611 - Manual Shift Shaft Pin 6T70/6T75 - Automatic Transmission Disassembled Views Park System Components Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Exploded Views > Page 4890 500 - Park Pawl Actuator Bracket Bolt 501 - Park Pawl Actuator Bracket 502 - Park Pawl Shaft 503 - Park Pawl 504 - Park Pawl Spring 505 - Park Pawl Actuator Guide Pin 506 - Park Pawl Actuator Guide 507 - A/Trans Case Assembly 508 - Manual Shift Shaft Seal 509 - Park Pawl Actuator Assembly 510 - Manual Shift Shaft Pin 511 - Manual Shift Detent (w/Shaft Position Switch) Lever Assembly Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Exploded Views > Page 4891 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Connector Views P2 Transmission Shift Lever Position Indicator Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Service and Repair 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission Manual Shift Detent Lever with Shaft Position Switch Assembly Replacement Special Tools * DT-48550 Detent Lever Pin Remover * J 41229 Manual Shaft Pin Installer Removal Procedure 1. Remove the control valve body. Refer to Control Valve Body Replacement (See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Valve Body/Service and Repair/6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission/Control Valve Body Replacement). 2. Remove the manual shaft detent lever hub pin (1) using DT-48550. 3. Remove the manual shift shaft pin (5). Discard the pin. 4. Remove the manual shaft (2). Note: Disconnect the actuator rod (3) from the detent lever assembly. Do not remove the actuator rod from the transmission case. 5. Remove the manual shaft detent (w/shift position switch) lever assembly (4). Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 4894 Note: Connect the actuator rod (3) to the detent lever assembly. 1. Install the manual shaft detent (w/shift position switch) lever assembly (4). Note: Lubricate the shaft with automatic transmission fluid to prevent damage to the manual shift shaft seal during installation. 2. Install the manual shaft (2). 3. Install the manual shaft detent lever hub pin (1) using DT-48550. Install the Manual Shaft Detent Lever Hub Pin to height of (b) 7.9 mm (0.38 in). Caution: Use the manual shaft pin installer to install the pin at the correct height in order to properly secure the manual shaft. If you install the pin too deep, the case bore may crack. 4. Install the NEW manual shift shaft pin (5) using J 41229. Use a NEW pin to ensure proper engagement with the case. Inspect pin installed height is within (a) 7.2-8.2 mm (0.28-0.32 in). 5. Install the control valve body. Refer to Control Valve Body Replacement (See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Valve Body/Service and Repair/6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission/Control Valve Body Replacement). 6. Perform the transmission adaptive values learn procedure. Refer to Transmission Adaptive Values Learn (See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 4895 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Service and Repair 6T70/6T75 - Automatic Transmission Manual Shift Detent Lever with Shaft Position Switch Assembly Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 4896 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations Transmission Speed Sensor: Locations Powertrain Component Views Front Engine Components (LAF 1 of 2) 1 - Q38 Throttle Body 2 - G18 High Pressure Fuel Pump 3 - B23F Camshaft Position Sensor Intake 4 - B37 Engine Oil Pressure Switch 5 - B68 Knock Sensor 6 - B26 Crankshaft Position Sensor 7 - M64 Starter Motor 8 - Q2 A/C Compressor Clutch 9 - G13 Generator Front Engine Components (LAF 2 of 2) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 4900 1 - B47B Fuel Rail Pressure Sensor 2 - B74 Manifold Absolute Pressure Sensor 3 - Q17D Fuel Injector 4 4 - Q17C Fuel Injector 3 5 - B1 A/C Refrigerant Pressure Sensor 6 - Q17B Fuel Injector 2 7 - Q17A Fuel Injector 1 Left Rear Engine Components (LAF) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 4901 1 - T8D Ignition Coil 4 2 - T8C Ignition Coil 3 3 - T8B Ignition Coil 2 4 - T8A Ignition Coil 1 5 - Q6F Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Intake 6 - Q6E Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Exhaust 7 - B52A Heated Oxygen Sensor 1 8 - B52B Heated Oxygen Sensor 2 9 - B34 Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor 10 - B23E Camshaft Position Sensor - Exhaust 11 - Q12 Evaporative Emission Purge Solenoid Valve Top of the Engine Components (LF1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 4902 1 - B47B Fuel Rail Pressure Sensor 2 - Q17A Fuel Injector 1 3 - Q17C Fuel Injector 3 4 - Q17E Fuel Injector 5 5 - Q17F Fuel Injector 6 6 - Q17D Fuel Injector 4 7 - Q17B Fuel Injector 2 Left Front of the Engine Components (LF1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 4903 1 - T8B Ignition Coil 2 2 - T8D Ignition Coil 4 3 - T8F Ignition Coil 6 4 - G18 High Pressure Fuel Pump 5 - B34 Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor 6 - M64 Starter Motor 7 - B68B Knock Sensor 2 8 - B37 Engine Oil Pressure Switch 9 - B1 A/C Refrigerant Pressure Sensor 10 - Q2 A/C Compressor Clutch 11 - G13 Generator Right Rear of the Engine Components (LF1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 4904 1 - B74 Manifold Absolute Pressure Sensor 2 - T8E Ignition Coil 5 3 - T8C Ignition Coil 3 4 - Q12 Evaporative Emission Purge Solenoid Valve 5 - Q38 Throttle Body 6 - B23B Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 1 Intake 7 - B23D Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 2 Intake 8 - Q6D Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Bank 2 Intake 9 - Q6C Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Bank 2 Exhaust 10 - B23C Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 2 Exhaust 11 - Q6B Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Bank 1 Intake 12 - Q6A Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Bank 1 Exhaust 13 - B23A Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 1 Exhaust 14 - B68A Knock Sensor 1 15 - B26 Crankshaft Position Sensor 16 - T8A Ignition Coil 1 Front of the Exhaust System Components (LF1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 4905 1 - B52C Heated Oxygen Sensor - Bank 1 Sensor 1 2 - B52D Heated Oxygen Sensor - Bank 1 Sensor 2 3 - B52F Heated Oxygen Sensor - Bank 2 Sensor 2 4 - B52E Heated Oxygen Sensor Bank 2 Sensor 1 Automatic Transmission Electronic Components Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 4906 1 - Q8 Control Solenoid Valve Assembly 2 - B15 Transmission Internal Mode Switch 3 - B14A Transmission Output Shaft Speed Sensor 4 - B14C Transmission Input Shaft Speed Sensor Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > 6L50/6L80/6L90 - Automatic Transmission Transmission Speed Sensor: Diagrams 6L50/6L80/6L90 - Automatic Transmission Component Location Component Location 1 - Reaction Carrier Assembly 2 - Control Valve Body Assembly 3 - Input Carrier Assembly 4 Valve Channel Plate 5 - Output Carrier Assembly 6 - Park Gear 7 - Control Solenoid (w/Body and TCM) Valve Assembly 8 - Drive Link Assembly 9 - Drive Sprocket 10 - Torque Converter Assembly 11 - A/Trans Fluid Pump Assembly 12 - Differential Carrier Assembly 13 - Front Differential Ring Gear 14 - Driven Sprocket 15 - 1-2-3-4 Clutch Assembly Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > 6L50/6L80/6L90 - Automatic Transmission > Page 4909 16 - Low and Reverse Clutch Assembly 17 - 2-6 Clutch Assembly 18 - 3-5 Reverse Clutch Assembly 19 - 4-5-6 Clutch Assembly 20 - A/Trans Input Speed Sensor Assembly 21 - Reaction Sun Gear Assembly Disassembled Views Disassembled Views Case and Associated Parts 1 - Control Valve Body Cover Bolt 2 - Control Valve Body Cover Assembly 3 - Control Valve Body Cover Gasket 4 - Control Valve Body Bolt 5 - Control Valve Body Cover Hole Seal 6 - Control Solenoid Valve Heat Sink Bolt 7 - Control Solenoid (w/Body and TCM) Valve Assembly 8 - Control Valve Body Filter Plate Assembly 9 - Control Valve Body Bolt 10 - Control Valve Body Bolt Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > 6L50/6L80/6L90 - Automatic Transmission > Page 4910 11 - Control Valve Body Assembly 12 - Control Valve Body Spacer Plate Assembly 13 - A/Trans Fluid Level Control Valve 14 - A/Trans Fluid Level Control Valve Gasket 15 - A/Trans Output Speed Sensor Bolt 16 - A/Trans Output Speed Sensor Assembly 17 - Manual Shaft Detent Spring Bolt 18 - Manual Shaft Detent Lever Spring Assembly 19 - A/Trans Input Speed Sensor Assembly 20 - A/Trans Input Speed Sensor Assembly O-Ring Seal 21 - A/Trans Input Speed Sensor Bolt 22 Fill Cap 23 - Fill Cap Seal 24 - Torque Converter Housing Gasket 25 - A/Trans Fluid Pump Seal Assembly 26 - Torque Converter with Fluid Pump Housing Assembly 27 - Torque Converter and Differential Housing Bolt 28 - A/Trans Fluid Fill Tube Plug Assembly 29 - Torque Converter Assembly 3-5 Reverse Clutch Assembly 500 - A/Trans Input Shaft Speed Sensor Reluctor Wheel Retainer Ring 501 - A/Trans Input Shaft Speed Sensor Reluctor Wheel 502 - 3-5-Reverse Clutch Piston 503 - 3-5-Reverse Clutch Piston Return Spring Assembly 504 - 3-5-Reverse Clutch Piston Inner Seal 505 - 3-5-Reverse Clutch Piston Inner Seal 506 - 3-5-Reverse Clutch Piston Dam Seal 507 - 3-5-Reverse Clutch Apply Plate 508 - 3-5-Reverse Clutch Plate 509 - 3-5-Reverse Clutch (w/Friction Material) Plate Assembly 510 - 3-5-Reverse Clutch Backing Plate 511 - 3-5-Reverse Clutch Backing Plate Retainer Ring Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > 6L50/6L80/6L90 - Automatic Transmission > Page 4911 Transmission Speed Sensor: Diagrams 6T70/6T75 - Automatic Transmission Component Location Component Location Component Locations 1 - Manual Shift Detent Lever Assembly (w/Shaft Position Switch) 2 - Trans Fluid Level Indicator 3 Reaction Carrier Assembly 4 - Output Speed Sensor 5 - Input Carrier Assembly 6 - Output Carrier Assembly 7 - Front Differential Transfer Drive Gear 8 - Front Differential Transfer Drive Gear Support Assembly 9 - Torque Converter Assembly 10 - Park Pawl Actuator Assembly 11 - Fluid Pump Drive Link Assembly 12 - Park Pawl 13 - Front Differential Transfer Driven Gear Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > 6L50/6L80/6L90 - Automatic Transmission > Page 4912 14 - Front Differential Drive Pinion Gear 15 - Park Gear 16 - Torque Converter and Support and Fluid Pump Housing Assembly 17 - Front Differential Carrier Assembly 18 - Front Differential Carrier Baffle 19 - Front Differential Ring Gear 20 - Front Differential Drive Pinion Gear Lube Tube 21 - 1-2-3-4 Clutch Assembly 22 - Low and Reverse Clutch Assembly (OWC) 23 - Low and Reverse Clutch 24 - 2-6 Clutch Assembly 25 - 3-5-Reverse Clutch Assembly 26 - 4-5-6 Clutch Assembly 27 - Input Speed Sensor 28 - Case Cover Assembly 29 - Control Valve Body Cover 30 Input Shaft Speed Sensor Reluctor Wheel 31 - Control Valve Lower Body Assembly 32 - Control Valve Upper Body Assembly 33 - Control Valve Channel Plate Assembly 34 - Control Solenoid Valve Assembly (w/Body and TCM) 35 - Manual Valve Disassembled Views Disassembled Views Case and Associated Parts Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > 6L50/6L80/6L90 - Automatic Transmission > Page 4913 1 - Control Valve Body Cover Assembly 2 - Transmission Fluid Level Indicator Assembly 3 - Fluid Level Indicator Tube - Model Dependent 4 - Fluid Level Indicator Tube Seal - Model Dependent 5 Control Valve Body Cover Assembly Gasket 6 - Control Valve Body Cover Stud 7 - Control Valve Body Cover Bolt 8 - Control Valve Body Bolt 9 - Control Valve Body Bolt 10 - Control Valve Body Cover Wiring Connector Hole Seal 11 - Control Solenoid Valve Spring 12 - Control Valve Body Bolt 13 - Control Valve Body Bolt 14 - Control Valve Body Bolt 15 - Control Solenoid (w/Body and TCM) Valve Assembly 16 - Control Solenoid (w/Body and TCM) Filter Plate Assembly 17 - Manual Shaft Detent Assembly 18 - Control Valve Body Assembly 19 - A/Trans Output Speed Sensor Assembly 20 - A/Trans Output Speed Sensor Bolt 21 - A/Trans Case Assembly 22 - Torque Converter Housing Outer Seal 23 - Front Differential Drive Pinion (w/Transfer Gear) Gear Assembly 24 Front Differential Drive Pinion Gear Lube Tube Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > 6L50/6L80/6L90 - Automatic Transmission > Page 4914 25 - Torque Converter and Support and A/Trans Fluid Pump Housing Assembly 26 - Torque Converter and Differential Housing Bolt 27 - Torque Converter Assembly 28 - Dust Cover Push Pin - Model Dependent 29 - Dust Cover Bolt - Model Dependent 30 - Dust Cover - Model Dependent 31 - Front Differential Carrier Assembly 32 - Input Shaft Thrust Bearing Assembly 33 - A/Trans Case Cover Gasket 34 - A/Trans Case Cover Assembly 35 - A/Trans Case Cover Assembly Bolt A/Trans Case Cover, 2-6 and Low Reverse Pistons 400 - A/Trans Input Speed Sensor Assembly 401 - A/Trans Input Speed Sensor Bolt 402 - ISS O-Ring Seal 403 - A/Trans Case Cover Assembly 404 - 3-5-Reverse and 4-5-6 Clutch Fluid Seal Ring 405 - 2-6 Clutch Piston 406 - 2-6 Clutch Spring Assembly 407 - 2-6 Clutch Spring Retainer Ring 408 - Low and Reverse Clutch Piston Assembly 409 - Low and Reverse Clutch Spring 410 Low and Reverse Clutch Spring Retainer Ring Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission Output Speed Sensor Replacement Output Speed Sensor Replacement Input Speed Sensor Replacement Input Speed Sensor Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the transmission control valve body cover. Refer to Control Valve Body Cover Replacement (See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Valve Body/Service and Repair/6T30/6T40/6T45 Automatic Transmission/Control Valve Body Cover Replacement). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 4917 2. Disconnect the input speed sensor electrical connector (1). 3. Remove the input speed sensor bolt (2) M6 x 23. 4. Remove the input speed sensor (3). 5. Remove the 3 input speed sensor seals (1). Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 4918 1. Install the 3 input speed sensor seals (1). 2. Install the input speed sensor (3). Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener Caution). 3. Install the input speed sensor bolt (2) M6 x 23 and tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb in). 4. Connect the input speed sensor electrical connector (1). 5. Install the transmission control valve body cover. Refer to Control Valve Body Cover Replacement (See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Valve Body/Service and Repair/6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission/Control Valve Body Cover Replacement). 6. Perform the transmission adaptive values learn procedure. Refer to Transmission Adaptive Values Learn (See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 4919 Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair 6T70/6T75 - Automatic Transmission Output Speed Sensor Replacement Output Speed Sensor Replacement Input Speed Sensor Replacement Input Speed Sensor Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 4920 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 09333A > May > 10 > Campaign - Evaporative Emission Diagnostics Technical Service Bulletin # 09333A Date: 100504 Campaign - Evaporative Emission Diagnostics SERVICE UPDATE Bulletin No.: 09333A Date: May 04, 2010 Subject: 09333A - Service Update for Inventory and Customer Vehicles - Evaporative Emission Diagnostics Models: 2010 Chevrolet Equinox 2010 GMC Terrain Supercede: The ECM programming service procedure in this bulletin has been revised to include instructions for dealers to contact Engineering at 734-320-8123 if programming stops prior to completion. Do NOT attempt to reprogram.Please discard all copies of bulletin 09333, issued January 2010. This service update includes vehicles in dealer inventory and customer vehicles that return to the dealership for any reason. Purpose This bulletin provides a service procedure to improve the ability of the evaporative emissions diagnostic to detect leaks by installing a fuel tank vent tubing jumper on certain 2010 model year Chevrolet Equinox and GMC Terrain vehicles. Vehicles equipped with a V6 engine will also require reprogramming of the engine control module. This service procedure should be completed as soon as possible on involved vehicles currently in dealer inventory and customer vehicles that return to the dealer for any type of service. Vehicles Involved A list of involved vehicles currently in dealer inventory is available on the "Service Update Bulletin Information" link under the "Service" tab in GM GlobalConnect (US) or attached to the GlobalConnect message (Canada) used to release this bulletin. Customer vehicles that return for service, for any reason, and are still covered under the vehicle's 8 year/80,000 mile (130,000 km) base emission warranty, and are within the VIN breakpoints provided below, should be checked for vehicle eligibility in the appropriate system listed below. Important Dealers are to confirm vehicle eligibility prior to beginning repairs by using GMVIS (dealers using WINS) or the Investigate Vehicle History link (dealers using GWM). Not all vehicles within the above breakpoints may be involved. Parts Information Parts required to complete this service update are to be obtained from General Motors Service and Parts Operations (GMSPO). Please refer to your "involved vehicles listing" before ordering parts. Normal orders should be placed on a DRO = Daily Replenishment Order. In an emergency situation, parts should be ordered on a CSO = Customer Special Order. Claim Information For vehicles repaired under the 8 year/80,000 mile (130,000 km) emission warranty: 1. Submit a claim using the table below. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 09333A > May > 10 > Campaign - Evaporative Emission Diagnostics > Page 4929 2. Courtesy Transportation - For dealers using WINS, submit using normal labor code; for dealers using GWM - submit as Net Item under the repair labor code. Disclaimer Service Procedure Service Procedure 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle in SI. 2. Locate the fuel tank EVAP emissions canister (1) and fuel tank EVAP vapor line connection (2). 3. Disconnect the 16 mm (5/8 in) quick connect vapor line (2) from the front of EVAP emissions canister (1). 4. Identify all parts included in the EVAP jumper hose assembly kit. The kit contains two EVAP jumper hoses and three tie straps. There is a large diameter 16 mm (5/8 in) EVAP jumper hose (1) with a 45 degree T-fitting (2) and a small diameter 8 mm (5/16 in) EVAP jumper hose with a T-fitting (3). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 09333A > May > 10 > Campaign - Evaporative Emission Diagnostics > Page 4930 5. Connect the new 16 mm (5/8 in) EVAP jumper hose (larger diameter hose) (2) to the EVAP emissions canister (1). 6. Install the second piece of the new 8 mm (5/16 in) jumper hose (smaller diameter hose) (3) to the 45 degree T-fitting on the new 16 mm (5/8 in) EVAP jumper hose (2). Ensure that the new 8 mm (5/16 in) jumper hose (3) is installed between the new 16 mm (5/8 in) EVAP jumper hose (2) and floor pan. 7. Insert the non-connector end of the 16 mm (5/8 in) EVAP jumper hose (larger diameter hose) (2) into the existing EVAP vapor line (4). 8. Secure the new jumper hose assembly with a tie strap (6) through the hole in brake clip (5) on LH underbody rail. Avoid contacting the brake or fuel line with the tie wrap. 9. Cut off excess tie strap (6). 10. Route the 8 mm (5/16 in) hose (3) on top of the fuel feed line on the left (driver's) side of the fuel tank assembly. 11. Continue routing the 8 mm (5/16 in) hose (3) through the suspension on the front side of the underbody rail and behind the tank and all-wheel drive unit. Follow the path of the park brake cable. The 8 mm (5/16 in) line should be routed on top of the park brake cable routing. 12. Disconnect the existing EVAP-to-fuel tank vapor line (yellow connector) located on the rear right (passenger side) of vehicle at the fuel tank. 13. Connect the new 8 mm (5/16 in) hose (3) to the fuel tank. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 09333A > May > 10 > Campaign - Evaporative Emission Diagnostics > Page 4931 14. Connect the existing EVAP hose to the T-fitting on the new 8 mm (5/16 in) hose. Caution Ensure that the 8 mm (5/16 in) hose (3) is tucked in over the park brake cable to prevent the hose from sagging over the fuel tank cutout area. 15. Secure the 8 mm (5/16 in) hose (3) to the parking brake line at the left (driver's) (A) and right (passenger' side) (B) fuel tank strap locations (9) with two tie straps (8) as shown in the illustration. 16. Lower the vehicle. 17. Determine if the vehicle is equipped with a four or six cylinder engine. - If the vehicle is equipped with a four cylinder engine, no further action is required. Refer to the Claim section of the bulletin. - If the vehicle is equipped with a six cylinder engine, refer to ECM Programming Service Procedure in this bulletin. ECM PROGRAMMING SERVICE PROCEDURE Do not attempt to order the calibration number from GMSPO. The calibration numbers required for this service procedure are programmed into control modules via a Multiple Diagnostic Interface (MDI) and TIS2WEB with the calibration update. Use TIS2WEB on or after 01/07/10 to obtain the calibration. If you cannot access the calibration, call the Techline Customer Support Center and it will be provided. If programming stops prior to completion, contact Engineering at 734-320-8123. Do NOT attempt to reprogram. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 09333A > May > 10 > Campaign - Evaporative Emission Diagnostics > Page 4932 For step-by-step programming instructions, please refer to SI and the Techline Information System (TIS) terminal. 1. Verify that there is a battery charge of 12 to 16 volts. The battery must be able to maintain a charge during programming. Only use an approved Midtronic 165-PSC charger to maintain proper battery voltage during programming. 2. Reprogram the engine control module (ECM). Refer to SI and Service Programming System (SPS) documentation for programming instructions, if required. 1. Connect the MDI to the vehicle. Note Select J2534 MDI and Reprogram ECU from the Select Diagnostic Tool and Programming Process screen. 2. Select J2534 MDI and Reprogram ECU from the Select Diagnostic Tool and Programming Process screen. 3. Select ECM Engine Control Module - Programming from the Supported Controllers screen. 4. Follow the on-screen instructions. 3. Use MDI and GDS to clear all DTCs if required. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-07-30-016A > Nov > 09 > A/T Controls - Downshift Hesitation/Delayed Shifting PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: Customer Interest A/T Controls - Downshift Hesitation/Delayed Shifting TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 09-07-30-016A Date: November 25, 2009 Subject: Transmission Hesitation, Delayed Shifting, Shifting at Wrong Time (Reprogram TCM) Models: 2010 Buick Enclave 2010 Chevrolet Equinox, Traverse 2010 GMC Acadia, Terrain 2010 Saturn OUTLOOK Equipped with 6T40/45 (RPOs MH7, MHC) or 6T70/75 (RPOs MH2, MH4, MY9, MH6) Automatic Transmission 2010 Buick LaCrosse Equipped with 3.0L (RPO LF1) Engine and 6T70 (RPOs MH2, MH4) Automatic Transmission 2010 Chevrolet Malibu 2010 Pontiac G6 2010 Saturn AURA Equipped with 6T40 (RPO MH8) Automatic Transmission All Vehicles Built Prior to the Following VIN Breakpoints: Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add models. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 09-07-30-016 (07- Transmission/Transaxle). Condition Some customers may comment on transmission downshift hesitation, delayed shifting and shifting at the wrong time. Correction A revised transmission calibration has been developed to address these issues. Reprogram the transmission control module (TCM) with updated calibration files using the TIS2WEB Service Programming System (SPS) application. Select SEQ Programming Sequence ECM/TCM from the Supported Controllers screen. Refer to SI and Service Programming System (SPS) documentation for programming instructions, if required. Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table above. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 09-06-04-026C > Aug > 10 > Engine/Transmission - Aftermarket Calibrations PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine/Transmission Aftermarket Calibrations INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 09-06-04-026C Date: August 13, 2010 Subject: Identifying Non-GM (Aftermarket) Engine and Transmission Calibrations for V8 Gas Engines Using Tech 2(R) or Global Diagnostic System (GDS) Models: 2006-2011 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (Excluding Saab 9-7X) 2006-2009 HUMMER H2 2006-2010 HUMMER H3 Equipped with V8 Gas Powered Engines Only Attention: This bulletin applies to V8 gas powered engines ONLY. For Duramax(TM) diesel powered engines, refer to the latest version of Corporate Bulletin Number 08-06-04-006G. Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2011 model year. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 09-06-04-026A (Section 06 - Engine/Propulsion System). General Motors is identifying an increasing number of engine, transmission and catalytic converter part failures that are the result of non-GM (aftermarket) engine and transmission control calibrations being used. When alteration to the GM-released engine or transmission control calibrations occurs, it subjects powertrain and driveline components (engine , transmission, transfer case, driveshaft and rear axle) to stresses that were not tested by General Motors. It is because of these unknown stresses, and the potential to alter reliability, durability and emissions performance, that GM has adopted a policy that prevents any UNAUTHORIZED dealer warranty claim submissions to any remaining warranty coverage, to the powertrain and driveline components whenever the presence of a non-GM (aftermarket) calibration is confirmed - even if the non-GM control module calibration is subsequently removed. Warranty coverage is based on the equipment and calibrations that were released on the vehicle at time of sale, or subsequently updated by GM. That's because GM testing and validation matches the calibration to a host of criteria that is essential to assure reliability, durability and emissions performance over the life of the warranty coverage and beyond. Stresses resulting from calibrations different from those tested and released by GM can damage or weaken components, leading to poor performance and or shortened life. Additionally, non-GM (aftermarket) issued engine control modifications often do not meet the same emissions performance standards as GM issued calibrations. Depending on state statutes, individuals who install engine control module calibrations that put the vehicle outside the parameters of emissions certification standards may be subject to fines and/or penalties. This bulletin outlines a procedure to identify the presence of non-GM (aftermarket) calibrations. GM recommends performing this check whenever a hard part failure is seen on internal engine or transmission components, or before an engine assembly or transmission assembly is being replaced under warranty. It is also recommended that the engine calibration verification procedure be performed whenever diagnostics indicate that catalytic converter replacement is indicated. The PQC has a process to confirm the ECM/PCM calibration is GM issued. The PQC will require a picture of the engine calibration verification screen, as outlined in this bulletin, before authorizing any V8 gas powered engine replacement. If a non-GM calibration is found and verification has taken place through GM, the remaining powertrain and driveline warranty will be blocked and notated in GMVIS and the dealership will be notified. This block prevents any UNAUTHORIZED warranty claim submission. 1. Connect the Tech 2(R) to the vehicle. 2. Go to: Diagnostics and build the vehicle. 3. Select: Powertrain. 4. Select: Engine. 5. *Select: Engine Control Module or PCM. 6. *Select: Module ID Information or I/M Information System if the Module ID Information selection is not available. 7. *If "I/M information System" was selected, it may be necessary to select "Vehicle Information" in order to display the calibration information. ‹› If the CVN information is displayed as "N/A", it will be necessary to contact the TCSC to obtain the CVN information. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 09-06-04-026C > Aug > 10 > Engine/Transmission - Aftermarket Calibrations > Page 4943 8. Take a CLEAR digital picture of the Tech 2(R) Vehicle Information screen showing the engine Calibration IDs and Verification Numbers as shown above. Retain the printout information and the Tech 2(R) screen photograph with the repair order. Note All pictures must be sent as a.jpg file. 9. E-mail a copy of the picture to [email protected]. In the subject line of the e-mail include the phrase "V8 Cal" as well as the complete VIN and Dealer BAC. In the body of the e-mail, include the VIN, mileage, R.O. number and BAC. Include a brief description of the customer concern and cause of the concern. Note The dealer will receive an e-mail reply after the calibrations have been validated. The e-mail reply will advise the dealer if the calibrations are OEM. 10. Allow two hours for the PQC to verify the calibrations and set up the case details. ‹› If the PQC determines that the calibrations ARE aftermarket calibrations, DO NOT contact GM Technical Assistance to discuss warranty concerns on the aftermarket calibrations. ALL questions and concerns about warranty should be directed to the dealers Fixed Operations Manager (FOM), (Warranty Manager (WM) in Canada). 11. You may call the PQC two hours after submitting the e-mail for authorization to replace the assembly. This will provide them time to receive, review and set up a case on the request. Please be prepared to provide all the usual documentation that is normally required when requesting an assembly authorization from the PQC. Tech 2(R) Displaying All Zeroes for the Verification Numbers on the Calibration ID and Verification Number Screen If the Tech 2(R) that you are using displays all zeroes for the Verification Numbers as shown, then perform the following steps: 1. Update the Tech 2(R) with the latest software from TIS2WEB. 2. Turn OFF the ignition for 90 seconds. 3. Connect the Tech 2(R) to the vehicle. 4. Turn ON the ignition, and build the vehicle. Observe the Tech 2(R) Calibration ID and Verification Number screen for proper operation. ‹› If the Tech 2(R) screen still does not display properly, then turn OFF the ignition for 90 seconds again. Turn ON the ignition and observe the same screen for proper operation. Retrieving Calibrations From a Global A Vehicle This information applies to the 2010 Camaro and is typical of the procedure that will be used on Global A vehicles. 1. Turn OFF the ignition. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 09-06-04-026C > Aug > 10 > Engine/Transmission - Aftermarket Calibrations > Page 4944 2. Connect the MDI to the Data Link Connector (DLC) of the vehicle. Note Use the USB port to make the following MDI connection: 3. Connect the MDI to a PC or laptop that has been downloaded with the GDS application from TIS2WEB. Note At least one Diagnostic Package must be installed on the PC to perform diagnostics. If GDS was just installed, select: Add New Diagnostic Package and then select: a Diagnostic Package to download. 4. Click: On the GDS icon on the PC. 5. The Login Page will appear. 6. Select: A User. 7. The ID Screen will appear. 8. Select: The serial number of the MDI being used. 9. Select: Connect. 10. Verify that the system status is ready by observing for a flashing PC light icon on the MDI. 11. Select: Make, Model and Model Year, in order to build the vehicle. 12. Click: Upload VIN, to allow the VIN to be reported to the PC. 13. At: The Verification step, turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. 14. Select: Next Action. 15. The Home Page will appear. 16. Select: Next. 17. The Diagnostic Screen will appear. Note Due to vehicle build, software and RPO variations, GDS may ask for additional information in Step 18. 18. Select: Engine ID, if prompted. 19. Select: Module Diagnostics. 20. Select: ECM. 21. Select: ID Information. 22. The Diagnostics page will appear. Typical View of GDS Calibration History Screen Note GDS is capable of displaying up to 10 Calibration History events. 23. Select: Calibration History from the drop down menu in order to display the following items on the screen: - Calibration History Buffer - Number of Calibration History Events Stored - Calibration Part Number History - Calibration Verification Number History 24. Select: Screenshot. 25. Name and save the file in an appropriate folder. 26. Select : Print, and retain a copy of the screenshot with the repair order. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 09-06-04-026C > Aug > 10 > Engine/Transmission - Aftermarket Calibrations > Page 4945 Note All pictures must be sent as a.jpg file. 27. E-mail a copy of the screenshot to [email protected]. In the subject line of the e-mail include the phrase "V8 Cal" as well as the complete VIN and Dealer BAC. In the body of the e-mail, include the VIN, mileage, R.O. number and BAC. Include a brief description of the customer concern and cause of the concern. Note The dealer will receive an e-mail reply after the calibrations have been validated. The e-mail reply will advise the dealer if the calibrations are OEM. 28. Allow two hours for the PQC to verify the calibrations and set up the case details. ‹› If the PQC determines that the calibrations ARE aftermarket calibrations, DO NOT contact GM Technical Assistance to discuss warranty concerns on the aftermarket calibrations. ALL questions and concerns about warranty should be directed to the dealers Fixed Operations Manager (FOM), (Warranty Manager (WM) in Canada). 29. You may call the PQC two hours after submitting the e-mail for authorization to replace the assembly. This will provide them time to receive, review and set up a case on the request. Please be prepared to provide all the usual documentation that is normally required when requesting an assembly authorization from the PQC. Warranty Information - The Dealership Service Management must be involved in any situation that would justify the use of labor operation Z1111. - Notify the Fixed Operations Manager (FOM) (Warranty Manager (WM) in Canada) of the situation. - All claims will have to be routed to the FOM (WM in Canada) for approval. - Please refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 09-00-89-016, Labor Operation Z1111 - Suspected Tampering or Vehicle Modifications for important information. For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 09333A > May > 10 > Campaign - Evaporative Emission Diagnostics Technical Service Bulletin # 09333A Date: 100504 Campaign - Evaporative Emission Diagnostics SERVICE UPDATE Bulletin No.: 09333A Date: May 04, 2010 Subject: 09333A - Service Update for Inventory and Customer Vehicles - Evaporative Emission Diagnostics Models: 2010 Chevrolet Equinox 2010 GMC Terrain Supercede: The ECM programming service procedure in this bulletin has been revised to include instructions for dealers to contact Engineering at 734-320-8123 if programming stops prior to completion. Do NOT attempt to reprogram.Please discard all copies of bulletin 09333, issued January 2010. This service update includes vehicles in dealer inventory and customer vehicles that return to the dealership for any reason. Purpose This bulletin provides a service procedure to improve the ability of the evaporative emissions diagnostic to detect leaks by installing a fuel tank vent tubing jumper on certain 2010 model year Chevrolet Equinox and GMC Terrain vehicles. Vehicles equipped with a V6 engine will also require reprogramming of the engine control module. This service procedure should be completed as soon as possible on involved vehicles currently in dealer inventory and customer vehicles that return to the dealer for any type of service. Vehicles Involved A list of involved vehicles currently in dealer inventory is available on the "Service Update Bulletin Information" link under the "Service" tab in GM GlobalConnect (US) or attached to the GlobalConnect message (Canada) used to release this bulletin. Customer vehicles that return for service, for any reason, and are still covered under the vehicle's 8 year/80,000 mile (130,000 km) base emission warranty, and are within the VIN breakpoints provided below, should be checked for vehicle eligibility in the appropriate system listed below. Important Dealers are to confirm vehicle eligibility prior to beginning repairs by using GMVIS (dealers using WINS) or the Investigate Vehicle History link (dealers using GWM). Not all vehicles within the above breakpoints may be involved. Parts Information Parts required to complete this service update are to be obtained from General Motors Service and Parts Operations (GMSPO). Please refer to your "involved vehicles listing" before ordering parts. Normal orders should be placed on a DRO = Daily Replenishment Order. In an emergency situation, parts should be ordered on a CSO = Customer Special Order. Claim Information For vehicles repaired under the 8 year/80,000 mile (130,000 km) emission warranty: 1. Submit a claim using the table below. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 09333A > May > 10 > Campaign - Evaporative Emission Diagnostics > Page 4950 2. Courtesy Transportation - For dealers using WINS, submit using normal labor code; for dealers using GWM - submit as Net Item under the repair labor code. Disclaimer Service Procedure Service Procedure 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle in SI. 2. Locate the fuel tank EVAP emissions canister (1) and fuel tank EVAP vapor line connection (2). 3. Disconnect the 16 mm (5/8 in) quick connect vapor line (2) from the front of EVAP emissions canister (1). 4. Identify all parts included in the EVAP jumper hose assembly kit. The kit contains two EVAP jumper hoses and three tie straps. There is a large diameter 16 mm (5/8 in) EVAP jumper hose (1) with a 45 degree T-fitting (2) and a small diameter 8 mm (5/16 in) EVAP jumper hose with a T-fitting (3). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 09333A > May > 10 > Campaign - Evaporative Emission Diagnostics > Page 4951 5. Connect the new 16 mm (5/8 in) EVAP jumper hose (larger diameter hose) (2) to the EVAP emissions canister (1). 6. Install the second piece of the new 8 mm (5/16 in) jumper hose (smaller diameter hose) (3) to the 45 degree T-fitting on the new 16 mm (5/8 in) EVAP jumper hose (2). Ensure that the new 8 mm (5/16 in) jumper hose (3) is installed between the new 16 mm (5/8 in) EVAP jumper hose (2) and floor pan. 7. Insert the non-connector end of the 16 mm (5/8 in) EVAP jumper hose (larger diameter hose) (2) into the existing EVAP vapor line (4). 8. Secure the new jumper hose assembly with a tie strap (6) through the hole in brake clip (5) on LH underbody rail. Avoid contacting the brake or fuel line with the tie wrap. 9. Cut off excess tie strap (6). 10. Route the 8 mm (5/16 in) hose (3) on top of the fuel feed line on the left (driver's) side of the fuel tank assembly. 11. Continue routing the 8 mm (5/16 in) hose (3) through the suspension on the front side of the underbody rail and behind the tank and all-wheel drive unit. Follow the path of the park brake cable. The 8 mm (5/16 in) line should be routed on top of the park brake cable routing. 12. Disconnect the existing EVAP-to-fuel tank vapor line (yellow connector) located on the rear right (passenger side) of vehicle at the fuel tank. 13. Connect the new 8 mm (5/16 in) hose (3) to the fuel tank. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 09333A > May > 10 > Campaign - Evaporative Emission Diagnostics > Page 4952 14. Connect the existing EVAP hose to the T-fitting on the new 8 mm (5/16 in) hose. Caution Ensure that the 8 mm (5/16 in) hose (3) is tucked in over the park brake cable to prevent the hose from sagging over the fuel tank cutout area. 15. Secure the 8 mm (5/16 in) hose (3) to the parking brake line at the left (driver's) (A) and right (passenger' side) (B) fuel tank strap locations (9) with two tie straps (8) as shown in the illustration. 16. Lower the vehicle. 17. Determine if the vehicle is equipped with a four or six cylinder engine. - If the vehicle is equipped with a four cylinder engine, no further action is required. Refer to the Claim section of the bulletin. - If the vehicle is equipped with a six cylinder engine, refer to ECM Programming Service Procedure in this bulletin. ECM PROGRAMMING SERVICE PROCEDURE Do not attempt to order the calibration number from GMSPO. The calibration numbers required for this service procedure are programmed into control modules via a Multiple Diagnostic Interface (MDI) and TIS2WEB with the calibration update. Use TIS2WEB on or after 01/07/10 to obtain the calibration. If you cannot access the calibration, call the Techline Customer Support Center and it will be provided. If programming stops prior to completion, contact Engineering at 734-320-8123. Do NOT attempt to reprogram. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 09333A > May > 10 > Campaign - Evaporative Emission Diagnostics > Page 4953 For step-by-step programming instructions, please refer to SI and the Techline Information System (TIS) terminal. 1. Verify that there is a battery charge of 12 to 16 volts. The battery must be able to maintain a charge during programming. Only use an approved Midtronic 165-PSC charger to maintain proper battery voltage during programming. 2. Reprogram the engine control module (ECM). Refer to SI and Service Programming System (SPS) documentation for programming instructions, if required. 1. Connect the MDI to the vehicle. Note Select J2534 MDI and Reprogram ECU from the Select Diagnostic Tool and Programming Process screen. 2. Select J2534 MDI and Reprogram ECU from the Select Diagnostic Tool and Programming Process screen. 3. Select ECM Engine Control Module - Programming from the Supported Controllers screen. 4. Follow the on-screen instructions. 3. Use MDI and GDS to clear all DTCs if required. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 09-07-30-016A > Nov > 09 > A/T Controls - Downshift Hesitation/Delayed Shifting PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T Controls Downshift Hesitation/Delayed Shifting TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 09-07-30-016A Date: November 25, 2009 Subject: Transmission Hesitation, Delayed Shifting, Shifting at Wrong Time (Reprogram TCM) Models: 2010 Buick Enclave 2010 Chevrolet Equinox, Traverse 2010 GMC Acadia, Terrain 2010 Saturn OUTLOOK Equipped with 6T40/45 (RPOs MH7, MHC) or 6T70/75 (RPOs MH2, MH4, MY9, MH6) Automatic Transmission 2010 Buick LaCrosse Equipped with 3.0L (RPO LF1) Engine and 6T70 (RPOs MH2, MH4) Automatic Transmission 2010 Chevrolet Malibu 2010 Pontiac G6 2010 Saturn AURA Equipped with 6T40 (RPO MH8) Automatic Transmission All Vehicles Built Prior to the Following VIN Breakpoints: Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add models. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 09-07-30-016 (07- Transmission/Transaxle). Condition Some customers may comment on transmission downshift hesitation, delayed shifting and shifting at the wrong time. Correction A revised transmission calibration has been developed to address these issues. Reprogram the transmission control module (TCM) with updated calibration files using the TIS2WEB Service Programming System (SPS) application. Select SEQ Programming Sequence ECM/TCM from the Supported Controllers screen. Refer to SI and Service Programming System (SPS) documentation for programming instructions, if required. Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table above. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 09-06-04-026C > Aug > 10 > Engine/Transmission - Aftermarket Calibrations PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine/Transmission Aftermarket Calibrations INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 09-06-04-026C Date: August 13, 2010 Subject: Identifying Non-GM (Aftermarket) Engine and Transmission Calibrations for V8 Gas Engines Using Tech 2(R) or Global Diagnostic System (GDS) Models: 2006-2011 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (Excluding Saab 9-7X) 2006-2009 HUMMER H2 2006-2010 HUMMER H3 Equipped with V8 Gas Powered Engines Only Attention: This bulletin applies to V8 gas powered engines ONLY. For Duramax(TM) diesel powered engines, refer to the latest version of Corporate Bulletin Number 08-06-04-006G. Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2011 model year. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 09-06-04-026A (Section 06 - Engine/Propulsion System). General Motors is identifying an increasing number of engine, transmission and catalytic converter part failures that are the result of non-GM (aftermarket) engine and transmission control calibrations being used. When alteration to the GM-released engine or transmission control calibrations occurs, it subjects powertrain and driveline components (engine , transmission, transfer case, driveshaft and rear axle) to stresses that were not tested by General Motors. It is because of these unknown stresses, and the potential to alter reliability, durability and emissions performance, that GM has adopted a policy that prevents any UNAUTHORIZED dealer warranty claim submissions to any remaining warranty coverage, to the powertrain and driveline components whenever the presence of a non-GM (aftermarket) calibration is confirmed - even if the non-GM control module calibration is subsequently removed. Warranty coverage is based on the equipment and calibrations that were released on the vehicle at time of sale, or subsequently updated by GM. That's because GM testing and validation matches the calibration to a host of criteria that is essential to assure reliability, durability and emissions performance over the life of the warranty coverage and beyond. Stresses resulting from calibrations different from those tested and released by GM can damage or weaken components, leading to poor performance and or shortened life. Additionally, non-GM (aftermarket) issued engine control modifications often do not meet the same emissions performance standards as GM issued calibrations. Depending on state statutes, individuals who install engine control module calibrations that put the vehicle outside the parameters of emissions certification standards may be subject to fines and/or penalties. This bulletin outlines a procedure to identify the presence of non-GM (aftermarket) calibrations. GM recommends performing this check whenever a hard part failure is seen on internal engine or transmission components, or before an engine assembly or transmission assembly is being replaced under warranty. It is also recommended that the engine calibration verification procedure be performed whenever diagnostics indicate that catalytic converter replacement is indicated. The PQC has a process to confirm the ECM/PCM calibration is GM issued. The PQC will require a picture of the engine calibration verification screen, as outlined in this bulletin, before authorizing any V8 gas powered engine replacement. If a non-GM calibration is found and verification has taken place through GM, the remaining powertrain and driveline warranty will be blocked and notated in GMVIS and the dealership will be notified. This block prevents any UNAUTHORIZED warranty claim submission. 1. Connect the Tech 2(R) to the vehicle. 2. Go to: Diagnostics and build the vehicle. 3. Select: Powertrain. 4. Select: Engine. 5. *Select: Engine Control Module or PCM. 6. *Select: Module ID Information or I/M Information System if the Module ID Information selection is not available. 7. *If "I/M information System" was selected, it may be necessary to select "Vehicle Information" in order to display the calibration information. ‹› If the CVN information is displayed as "N/A", it will be necessary to contact the TCSC to obtain the CVN information. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 09-06-04-026C > Aug > 10 > Engine/Transmission - Aftermarket Calibrations > Page 4963 8. Take a CLEAR digital picture of the Tech 2(R) Vehicle Information screen showing the engine Calibration IDs and Verification Numbers as shown above. Retain the printout information and the Tech 2(R) screen photograph with the repair order. Note All pictures must be sent as a.jpg file. 9. E-mail a copy of the picture to [email protected]. In the subject line of the e-mail include the phrase "V8 Cal" as well as the complete VIN and Dealer BAC. In the body of the e-mail, include the VIN, mileage, R.O. number and BAC. Include a brief description of the customer concern and cause of the concern. Note The dealer will receive an e-mail reply after the calibrations have been validated. The e-mail reply will advise the dealer if the calibrations are OEM. 10. Allow two hours for the PQC to verify the calibrations and set up the case details. ‹› If the PQC determines that the calibrations ARE aftermarket calibrations, DO NOT contact GM Technical Assistance to discuss warranty concerns on the aftermarket calibrations. ALL questions and concerns about warranty should be directed to the dealers Fixed Operations Manager (FOM), (Warranty Manager (WM) in Canada). 11. You may call the PQC two hours after submitting the e-mail for authorization to replace the assembly. This will provide them time to receive, review and set up a case on the request. Please be prepared to provide all the usual documentation that is normally required when requesting an assembly authorization from the PQC. Tech 2(R) Displaying All Zeroes for the Verification Numbers on the Calibration ID and Verification Number Screen If the Tech 2(R) that you are using displays all zeroes for the Verification Numbers as shown, then perform the following steps: 1. Update the Tech 2(R) with the latest software from TIS2WEB. 2. Turn OFF the ignition for 90 seconds. 3. Connect the Tech 2(R) to the vehicle. 4. Turn ON the ignition, and build the vehicle. Observe the Tech 2(R) Calibration ID and Verification Number screen for proper operation. ‹› If the Tech 2(R) screen still does not display properly, then turn OFF the ignition for 90 seconds again. Turn ON the ignition and observe the same screen for proper operation. Retrieving Calibrations From a Global A Vehicle This information applies to the 2010 Camaro and is typical of the procedure that will be used on Global A vehicles. 1. Turn OFF the ignition. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 09-06-04-026C > Aug > 10 > Engine/Transmission - Aftermarket Calibrations > Page 4964 2. Connect the MDI to the Data Link Connector (DLC) of the vehicle. Note Use the USB port to make the following MDI connection: 3. Connect the MDI to a PC or laptop that has been downloaded with the GDS application from TIS2WEB. Note At least one Diagnostic Package must be installed on the PC to perform diagnostics. If GDS was just installed, select: Add New Diagnostic Package and then select: a Diagnostic Package to download. 4. Click: On the GDS icon on the PC. 5. The Login Page will appear. 6. Select: A User. 7. The ID Screen will appear. 8. Select: The serial number of the MDI being used. 9. Select: Connect. 10. Verify that the system status is ready by observing for a flashing PC light icon on the MDI. 11. Select: Make, Model and Model Year, in order to build the vehicle. 12. Click: Upload VIN, to allow the VIN to be reported to the PC. 13. At: The Verification step, turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. 14. Select: Next Action. 15. The Home Page will appear. 16. Select: Next. 17. The Diagnostic Screen will appear. Note Due to vehicle build, software and RPO variations, GDS may ask for additional information in Step 18. 18. Select: Engine ID, if prompted. 19. Select: Module Diagnostics. 20. Select: ECM. 21. Select: ID Information. 22. The Diagnostics page will appear. Typical View of GDS Calibration History Screen Note GDS is capable of displaying up to 10 Calibration History events. 23. Select: Calibration History from the drop down menu in order to display the following items on the screen: - Calibration History Buffer - Number of Calibration History Events Stored - Calibration Part Number History - Calibration Verification Number History 24. Select: Screenshot. 25. Name and save the file in an appropriate folder. 26. Select : Print, and retain a copy of the screenshot with the repair order. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 09-06-04-026C > Aug > 10 > Engine/Transmission - Aftermarket Calibrations > Page 4965 Note All pictures must be sent as a.jpg file. 27. E-mail a copy of the screenshot to [email protected]. In the subject line of the e-mail include the phrase "V8 Cal" as well as the complete VIN and Dealer BAC. In the body of the e-mail, include the VIN, mileage, R.O. number and BAC. Include a brief description of the customer concern and cause of the concern. Note The dealer will receive an e-mail reply after the calibrations have been validated. The e-mail reply will advise the dealer if the calibrations are OEM. 28. Allow two hours for the PQC to verify the calibrations and set up the case details. ‹› If the PQC determines that the calibrations ARE aftermarket calibrations, DO NOT contact GM Technical Assistance to discuss warranty concerns on the aftermarket calibrations. ALL questions and concerns about warranty should be directed to the dealers Fixed Operations Manager (FOM), (Warranty Manager (WM) in Canada). 29. You may call the PQC two hours after submitting the e-mail for authorization to replace the assembly. This will provide them time to receive, review and set up a case on the request. Please be prepared to provide all the usual documentation that is normally required when requesting an assembly authorization from the PQC. Warranty Information - The Dealership Service Management must be involved in any situation that would justify the use of labor operation Z1111. - Notify the Fixed Operations Manager (FOM) (Warranty Manager (WM) in Canada) of the situation. - All claims will have to be routed to the FOM (WM in Canada) for approval. - Please refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 09-00-89-016, Labor Operation Z1111 - Suspected Tampering or Vehicle Modifications for important information. For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 09-07-30-016A > Nov > 09 > A/T Controls - Downshift Hesitation/Delayed Shifting PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T Controls Downshift Hesitation/Delayed Shifting TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 09-07-30-016A Date: November 25, 2009 Subject: Transmission Hesitation, Delayed Shifting, Shifting at Wrong Time (Reprogram TCM) Models: 2010 Buick Enclave 2010 Chevrolet Equinox, Traverse 2010 GMC Acadia, Terrain 2010 Saturn OUTLOOK Equipped with 6T40/45 (RPOs MH7, MHC) or 6T70/75 (RPOs MH2, MH4, MY9, MH6) Automatic Transmission 2010 Buick LaCrosse Equipped with 3.0L (RPO LF1) Engine and 6T70 (RPOs MH2, MH4) Automatic Transmission 2010 Chevrolet Malibu 2010 Pontiac G6 2010 Saturn AURA Equipped with 6T40 (RPO MH8) Automatic Transmission All Vehicles Built Prior to the Following VIN Breakpoints: Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add models. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 09-07-30-016 (07- Transmission/Transaxle). Condition Some customers may comment on transmission downshift hesitation, delayed shifting and shifting at the wrong time. Correction A revised transmission calibration has been developed to address these issues. Reprogram the transmission control module (TCM) with updated calibration files using the TIS2WEB Service Programming System (SPS) application. Select SEQ Programming Sequence ECM/TCM from the Supported Controllers screen. Refer to SI and Service Programming System (SPS) documentation for programming instructions, if required. Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table above. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 09-06-04-026C > Aug > 10 > Engine/Transmission - Aftermarket Calibrations > Page 4975 8. Take a CLEAR digital picture of the Tech 2(R) Vehicle Information screen showing the engine Calibration IDs and Verification Numbers as shown above. Retain the printout information and the Tech 2(R) screen photograph with the repair order. Note All pictures must be sent as a.jpg file. 9. E-mail a copy of the picture to [email protected]. In the subject line of the e-mail include the phrase "V8 Cal" as well as the complete VIN and Dealer BAC. In the body of the e-mail, include the VIN, mileage, R.O. number and BAC. Include a brief description of the customer concern and cause of the concern. Note The dealer will receive an e-mail reply after the calibrations have been validated. The e-mail reply will advise the dealer if the calibrations are OEM. 10. Allow two hours for the PQC to verify the calibrations and set up the case details. ‹› If the PQC determines that the calibrations ARE aftermarket calibrations, DO NOT contact GM Technical Assistance to discuss warranty concerns on the aftermarket calibrations. ALL questions and concerns about warranty should be directed to the dealers Fixed Operations Manager (FOM), (Warranty Manager (WM) in Canada). 11. You may call the PQC two hours after submitting the e-mail for authorization to replace the assembly. This will provide them time to receive, review and set up a case on the request. Please be prepared to provide all the usual documentation that is normally required when requesting an assembly authorization from the PQC. Tech 2(R) Displaying All Zeroes for the Verification Numbers on the Calibration ID and Verification Number Screen If the Tech 2(R) that you are using displays all zeroes for the Verification Numbers as shown, then perform the following steps: 1. Update the Tech 2(R) with the latest software from TIS2WEB. 2. Turn OFF the ignition for 90 seconds. 3. Connect the Tech 2(R) to the vehicle. 4. Turn ON the ignition, and build the vehicle. Observe the Tech 2(R) Calibration ID and Verification Number screen for proper operation. ‹› If the Tech 2(R) screen still does not display properly, then turn OFF the ignition for 90 seconds again. Turn ON the ignition and observe the same screen for proper operation. Retrieving Calibrations From a Global A Vehicle This information applies to the 2010 Camaro and is typical of the procedure that will be used on Global A vehicles. 1. Turn OFF the ignition. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 09-06-04-026C > Aug > 10 > Engine/Transmission - Aftermarket Calibrations > Page 4976 2. Connect the MDI to the Data Link Connector (DLC) of the vehicle. Note Use the USB port to make the following MDI connection: 3. Connect the MDI to a PC or laptop that has been downloaded with the GDS application from TIS2WEB. Note At least one Diagnostic Package must be installed on the PC to perform diagnostics. If GDS was just installed, select: Add New Diagnostic Package and then select: a Diagnostic Package to download. 4. Click: On the GDS icon on the PC. 5. The Login Page will appear. 6. Select: A User. 7. The ID Screen will appear. 8. Select: The serial number of the MDI being used. 9. Select: Connect. 10. Verify that the system status is ready by observing for a flashing PC light icon on the MDI. 11. Select: Make, Model and Model Year, in order to build the vehicle. 12. Click: Upload VIN, to allow the VIN to be reported to the PC. 13. At: The Verification step, turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. 14. Select: Next Action. 15. The Home Page will appear. 16. Select: Next. 17. The Diagnostic Screen will appear. Note Due to vehicle build, software and RPO variations, GDS may ask for additional information in Step 18. 18. Select: Engine ID, if prompted. 19. Select: Module Diagnostics. 20. Select: ECM. 21. Select: ID Information. 22. The Diagnostics page will appear. Typical View of GDS Calibration History Screen Note GDS is capable of displaying up to 10 Calibration History events. 23. Select: Calibration History from the drop down menu in order to display the following items on the screen: - Calibration History Buffer - Number of Calibration History Events Stored - Calibration Part Number History - Calibration Verification Number History 24. Select: Screenshot. 25. Name and save the file in an appropriate folder. 26. Select : Print, and retain a copy of the screenshot with the repair order. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 09-06-04-026C > Aug > 10 > Engine/Transmission - Aftermarket Calibrations > Page 4977 Note All pictures must be sent as a.jpg file. 27. E-mail a copy of the screenshot to [email protected]. In the subject line of the e-mail include the phrase "V8 Cal" as well as the complete VIN and Dealer BAC. In the body of the e-mail, include the VIN, mileage, R.O. number and BAC. Include a brief description of the customer concern and cause of the concern. Note The dealer will receive an e-mail reply after the calibrations have been validated. The e-mail reply will advise the dealer if the calibrations are OEM. 28. Allow two hours for the PQC to verify the calibrations and set up the case details. ‹› If the PQC determines that the calibrations ARE aftermarket calibrations, DO NOT contact GM Technical Assistance to discuss warranty concerns on the aftermarket calibrations. ALL questions and concerns about warranty should be directed to the dealers Fixed Operations Manager (FOM), (Warranty Manager (WM) in Canada). 29. You may call the PQC two hours after submitting the e-mail for authorization to replace the assembly. This will provide them time to receive, review and set up a case on the request. Please be prepared to provide all the usual documentation that is normally required when requesting an assembly authorization from the PQC. Warranty Information - The Dealership Service Management must be involved in any situation that would justify the use of labor operation Z1111. - Notify the Fixed Operations Manager (FOM) (Warranty Manager (WM) in Canada) of the situation. - All claims will have to be routed to the FOM (WM in Canada) for approval. - Please refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 09-00-89-016, Labor Operation Z1111 - Suspected Tampering or Vehicle Modifications for important information. For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 09333A > May > 10 > Campaign - Evaporative Emission Diagnostics Technical Service Bulletin # 09333A Date: 100504 Campaign - Evaporative Emission Diagnostics SERVICE UPDATE Bulletin No.: 09333A Date: May 04, 2010 Subject: 09333A - Service Update for Inventory and Customer Vehicles - Evaporative Emission Diagnostics Models: 2010 Chevrolet Equinox 2010 GMC Terrain Supercede: The ECM programming service procedure in this bulletin has been revised to include instructions for dealers to contact Engineering at 734-320-8123 if programming stops prior to completion. Do NOT attempt to reprogram.Please discard all copies of bulletin 09333, issued January 2010. This service update includes vehicles in dealer inventory and customer vehicles that return to the dealership for any reason. Purpose This bulletin provides a service procedure to improve the ability of the evaporative emissions diagnostic to detect leaks by installing a fuel tank vent tubing jumper on certain 2010 model year Chevrolet Equinox and GMC Terrain vehicles. Vehicles equipped with a V6 engine will also require reprogramming of the engine control module. This service procedure should be completed as soon as possible on involved vehicles currently in dealer inventory and customer vehicles that return to the dealer for any type of service. Vehicles Involved A list of involved vehicles currently in dealer inventory is available on the "Service Update Bulletin Information" link under the "Service" tab in GM GlobalConnect (US) or attached to the GlobalConnect message (Canada) used to release this bulletin. Customer vehicles that return for service, for any reason, and are still covered under the vehicle's 8 year/80,000 mile (130,000 km) base emission warranty, and are within the VIN breakpoints provided below, should be checked for vehicle eligibility in the appropriate system listed below. Important Dealers are to confirm vehicle eligibility prior to beginning repairs by using GMVIS (dealers using WINS) or the Investigate Vehicle History link (dealers using GWM). Not all vehicles within the above breakpoints may be involved. Parts Information Parts required to complete this service update are to be obtained from General Motors Service and Parts Operations (GMSPO). Please refer to your "involved vehicles listing" before ordering parts. Normal orders should be placed on a DRO = Daily Replenishment Order. In an emergency situation, parts should be ordered on a CSO = Customer Special Order. Claim Information For vehicles repaired under the 8 year/80,000 mile (130,000 km) emission warranty: 1. Submit a claim using the table below. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 09333A > May > 10 > Campaign - Evaporative Emission Diagnostics > Page 4982 2. Courtesy Transportation - For dealers using WINS, submit using normal labor code; for dealers using GWM - submit as Net Item under the repair labor code. Disclaimer Service Procedure Service Procedure 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle in SI. 2. Locate the fuel tank EVAP emissions canister (1) and fuel tank EVAP vapor line connection (2). 3. Disconnect the 16 mm (5/8 in) quick connect vapor line (2) from the front of EVAP emissions canister (1). 4. Identify all parts included in the EVAP jumper hose assembly kit. The kit contains two EVAP jumper hoses and three tie straps. There is a large diameter 16 mm (5/8 in) EVAP jumper hose (1) with a 45 degree T-fitting (2) and a small diameter 8 mm (5/16 in) EVAP jumper hose with a T-fitting (3). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 09333A > May > 10 > Campaign - Evaporative Emission Diagnostics > Page 4983 5. Connect the new 16 mm (5/8 in) EVAP jumper hose (larger diameter hose) (2) to the EVAP emissions canister (1). 6. Install the second piece of the new 8 mm (5/16 in) jumper hose (smaller diameter hose) (3) to the 45 degree T-fitting on the new 16 mm (5/8 in) EVAP jumper hose (2). Ensure that the new 8 mm (5/16 in) jumper hose (3) is installed between the new 16 mm (5/8 in) EVAP jumper hose (2) and floor pan. 7. Insert the non-connector end of the 16 mm (5/8 in) EVAP jumper hose (larger diameter hose) (2) into the existing EVAP vapor line (4). 8. Secure the new jumper hose assembly with a tie strap (6) through the hole in brake clip (5) on LH underbody rail. Avoid contacting the brake or fuel line with the tie wrap. 9. Cut off excess tie strap (6). 10. Route the 8 mm (5/16 in) hose (3) on top of the fuel feed line on the left (driver's) side of the fuel tank assembly. 11. Continue routing the 8 mm (5/16 in) hose (3) through the suspension on the front side of the underbody rail and behind the tank and all-wheel drive unit. Follow the path of the park brake cable. The 8 mm (5/16 in) line should be routed on top of the park brake cable routing. 12. Disconnect the existing EVAP-to-fuel tank vapor line (yellow connector) located on the rear right (passenger side) of vehicle at the fuel tank. 13. Connect the new 8 mm (5/16 in) hose (3) to the fuel tank. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 09333A > May > 10 > Campaign - Evaporative Emission Diagnostics > Page 4984 14. Connect the existing EVAP hose to the T-fitting on the new 8 mm (5/16 in) hose. Caution Ensure that the 8 mm (5/16 in) hose (3) is tucked in over the park brake cable to prevent the hose from sagging over the fuel tank cutout area. 15. Secure the 8 mm (5/16 in) hose (3) to the parking brake line at the left (driver's) (A) and right (passenger' side) (B) fuel tank strap locations (9) with two tie straps (8) as shown in the illustration. 16. Lower the vehicle. 17. Determine if the vehicle is equipped with a four or six cylinder engine. - If the vehicle is equipped with a four cylinder engine, no further action is required. Refer to the Claim section of the bulletin. - If the vehicle is equipped with a six cylinder engine, refer to ECM Programming Service Procedure in this bulletin. ECM PROGRAMMING SERVICE PROCEDURE Do not attempt to order the calibration number from GMSPO. The calibration numbers required for this service procedure are programmed into control modules via a Multiple Diagnostic Interface (MDI) and TIS2WEB with the calibration update. Use TIS2WEB on or after 01/07/10 to obtain the calibration. If you cannot access the calibration, call the Techline Customer Support Center and it will be provided. If programming stops prior to completion, contact Engineering at 734-320-8123. Do NOT attempt to reprogram. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 09333A > May > 10 > Campaign - Evaporative Emission Diagnostics > Page 4985 For step-by-step programming instructions, please refer to SI and the Techline Information System (TIS) terminal. 1. Verify that there is a battery charge of 12 to 16 volts. The battery must be able to maintain a charge during programming. Only use an approved Midtronic 165-PSC charger to maintain proper battery voltage during programming. 2. Reprogram the engine control module (ECM). Refer to SI and Service Programming System (SPS) documentation for programming instructions, if required. 1. Connect the MDI to the vehicle. Note Select J2534 MDI and Reprogram ECU from the Select Diagnostic Tool and Programming Process screen. 2. Select J2534 MDI and Reprogram ECU from the Select Diagnostic Tool and Programming Process screen. 3. Select ECM Engine Control Module - Programming from the Supported Controllers screen. 4. Follow the on-screen instructions. 3. Use MDI and GDS to clear all DTCs if required. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Specifications > 6T30/6T40/6T45 Automatic Transmission Shift Solenoid: Specifications 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission Shift Solenoid Valve State and Gear Ratio Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Specifications > 6T30/6T40/6T45 Automatic Transmission > Page 4993 Shift Solenoid: Specifications 6T70/6T75 - Automatic Transmission Shift Solenoid Valve State and Gear Ratio Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4994 Shift Solenoid: Locations Powertrain Component Views Automatic Transmission Electronic Components 1 - Q8 Control Solenoid Valve Assembly 2 - B15 Transmission Internal Mode Switch 3 - B14A Transmission Output Shaft Speed Sensor 4 - B14C Transmission Input Shaft Speed Sensor Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Shift Solenoid: Diagram Information and Instructions Electrical Schematic Symbols Electrical Schematic Symbols Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4997 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4998 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4999 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5000 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5001 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5002 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5003 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5004 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5005 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5006 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5007 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5008 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5009 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5010 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5011 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5012 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5013 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5014 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5015 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5016 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5017 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5018 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5019 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5020 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5021 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5022 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5023 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5024 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5025 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5026 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5027 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5028 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5029 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5030 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5031 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5032 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5033 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5034 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5035 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5036 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5037 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5038 General Electrical Diagnosis General Electrical Diagnosis Basic Knowledge Required Without a basic knowledge of electricity, it will be difficult to use the diagnostic procedures contained in the service manual. You should understand the basic theory of electricity, and know the meaning of voltage (V), current (A), and resistance (Ohms ). You should also be able to read and understand a wiring diagram, as well as understand what happens in a circuit with an open or a shorted wire. Vehicle Zoning Strategy Vehicle Zoning Strategy All grounds, in-line connectors, and splices have identifying numbers that correspond to where they are located in the vehicle. The following table explains the numbering system. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5039 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5040 Shift Solenoid: Diagnostic Aids Arrows and Symbols Arrows and Symbols This service manual uses various symbols in order to describe different service operations. 1 - Front of Vehicle 2 - View Detail 2 - View Detail 3 - Ambient Air Mixed with Another Gas or Indicate Temperature Change 4 - Motion or Direction 5 - View Angle 6 - Dimension (1:2) 7 Ambient/Clean Air Flow or Cool Air Flow 8 - Lubrication Point - Oil or Fluid 9 - Task Related 10 Sectioning (1:3) 11 - Gas Other Than Ambient Air or Hot Air Flow 12 - Lubrication Point - Grease or Jelly 13 - Multidirectional Arrow Decimal and Metric Equivalents Decimal and Metric Equivalents Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5041 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5042 Checking Aftermarket Accessories Checking Aftermarket Accessories Warning: Refer to SIR Warning (See: Restraint Systems/Service Precautions/SIR Warning). Caution: The OBD II symbol is used on the circuit diagrams in order to alert the technician that the circuit is essential for proper OBD II emission control circuit operation. Any circuit which fails and causes the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) to turn ON, or causes emissions-related component damage, is identified as an OBD II circuit. Do not connect aftermarket accessories into the following circuits: * SIR circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the SIR symbol. * OBD II circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the OBD II symbol. Always check for aftermarket accessories (non-OEM) as the first step in diagnosing electrical problems. If the vehicle is so equipped, disconnect the system to verify that these add-on accessories are not the cause of the problems. Possible causes of vehicle problems related to aftermarket accessories include: * Power feeds connected to points other than the battery * Antenna location * Transceiver wiring located too close to vehicle electronic modules or wiring * Poor shielding or poor connectors on antenna feed line * Check for recent service bulletins detailing installation guidelines for aftermarket accessories. Circuit Testing Circuit Testing The Circuit Testing section contains the following diagnostic testing information. Using this information along with the diagnostic procedures will identify the cause of the electrical malfunction. * Using Connector Test Adapters (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Using Connector Test Adapters) * Probing Electrical Connectors (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Probing Electrical Connectors) * Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5043 Procedures/Circuit Testing/Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter) * Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp) * Using Fused Jumper Wires (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Using Fused Jumper Wires) * Measuring Voltage (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Measuring Voltage) * Measuring Voltage Drop (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Measuring Voltage Drop) * Measuring Frequency (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Measuring Frequency) * Testing Ground and Low Reference Circuits (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Testing Ground and Low Reference Circuits) * Testing for Continuity (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Continuity) * Testing for Short to Ground (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Short to Ground) * Testing for a Short to Voltage (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for a Short to Voltage) * Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections) * Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions) * Testing for Electrical Intermittents (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Electrical Intermittents) * Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure) * Circuit Protection - Fuses (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Circuit Protection - Fuses) * Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers) * Circuit Protection - Fusible Links (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Circuit Protection - Fusible Links) Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp Special Tools EL-35616-200 - Test Light - Probe Kit For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test Probe Caution). A test lamp can simply and quickly test a low impedance circuit for voltage. A Digital Multimeter (DMM) should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present if the impedance is low enough, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. In other words, if there is not enough current, the test lamp will not illuminate even though voltage is present. The EL-35616-200 - kit is Micro-Pack compatible and comprised of a 12-volt light bulb with an attached pair of leads. To properly operate this tool use the following procedures. When testing for voltage: 1. Attach one lead to ground. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is voltage at the point being tested. When testing for ground: 1. Attach one lead to battery positive voltage. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where ground should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is ground at the point being tested. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5044 Testing for a Short to Voltage Testing for a Short to Voltage Special Tools EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM) For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test Probe Caution). The following procedure tests for a short to voltage in a circuit. 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Set the rotary dial of the Digital Multimeter (DMM) to the V (DC) position. 4. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. Turn ON the ignition and operate all accessories. 7. If the voltage measured is greater than 1 V, there is a short to voltage in the circuit. Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions Special Tools J-25070 - Heat Gun For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Many intermittent open or shorted circuits are affected by harness/connector movement that is caused by vibration, engine torque, bumps/rough pavement, etc. In order to duplicate the customer's concern, it may be necessary to manipulate the wiring harness if the malfunction appears to be vibration related. Manipulation of a circuit can consist of a wide variety of actions, including: * Wiggling the harness * Disconnecting a connector and reconnecting * Stressing the mechanical connection of a connector * Pulling on the harness or wire in order to identify a separation/break inside the insulation * Relocating a harness or wires All these actions should be performed with some goal in mind. For instance, with a scan tool connected, wiggling the wires may uncover a faulty input to the control module. The snapshot option would be appropriate here. Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure). Another option is, with the component commanded ON and OFF by the scan tool, move related connectors and wiring and observe the component operation. With the engine running, move related connectors and wiring while monitoring engine operation. If harness or connector movement affects the data displayed, component/system operation, or engine operation, inspect and repair the harness/connections as necessary. You may need to load the vehicle in order to duplicate the concern. This may require the use of weights, floor jacks, jackstands, frame machines, etc. In these cases you are attempting to duplicate the concern by manipulating the suspension or frame. This method is useful in finding harnesses that are too short and their connectors pull apart enough to cause a poor connection. A DMM set to Peak Min/Max mode and connected to the suspect circuit while testing can yield desirable results. Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Electrical Intermittents). Certainly, using the senses of sight, smell, and hearing while manipulating the circuit can provide good results as well. There may be instances where circuit manipulation alone will not meet the required criteria for the fault condition to appear. In such cases it may be necessary to expose the suspect circuit to other conditions while manipulating the harness. Such conditions would include high moisture conditions, along with exceptionally high or low temperatures. The following discusses how to expose the circuit to these kinds of conditions. Salt Water Spray Some compounds possess the ability to conduct electricity when dissolved in water such as ordinary salt. By mixing table salt with water in sufficient Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5045 quantities, you can enhance the conductive properties of water so that any circuit which may be sensitive to moisture will more readily fail when liberally sprayed with this mixture. Mixing 0.35L (12 oz) of water with approximately 1 tablespoon of salt will yield a salt solution of 5 percent. Fill a normal spray bottle with this mixture. This mixture is sufficient to enhance the water's own conductivity. This may cause the circuit to fail more easily when sprayed. Once the mixture is completed, spray the suspect area liberally with the solution. Then, while monitoring either a scan tool or DMM, manipulate the harness as discussed previously. High Temperature Conditions If the complaint tends to be heat related, you can simulate the condition using the J-25070 - heat gun. Using the heat gun, you can heat up the suspected area or component. Manipulate the harnesses under high temperature conditions while monitoring the scan tool or DMM to locate the fault condition. The high temperature condition may be achieved simply by test driving the vehicle at normal operating temperature. If a heat gun is unavailable, consider this option to enhance your diagnosis. This option does not allow for the same control, however. Low Temperature Conditions Depending on the nature of the fault condition, placing a fan in front of the vehicle while the vehicle is in the shade can have the desired effect. If this is unsuccessful, use local cooling treatments such as ice or a venturi type nozzle (one that provides hot or cold air). This type of tool is capable of producing air stream temperatures down to -18°C (0°F) from one end and +71°C (160°F) from the other. This is ideally suited for localized cooling needs. Once the vehicle, component, or harness has been sufficiently cooled, manipulate the harness or components in an effort to duplicate the concern. Duplicating Failure Conditions * If none of the previous tests are successful, attempt to duplicate and/or capture the failure conditions. * Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, where applicable, contains the conditions that were present when the DTC set. 1. Review and record Freeze Frame/Failure Records data. 2. Clear the DTCs using the scan tool. 3. Turn the key to OFF and wait 15 seconds. 4. Operate the vehicle under the same conditions that were noted in Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, as closely as possible. The vehicle must also be operating within the Conditions for Running the DTC. Refer to Conditions for Running the DTC in the supporting text if a DTC is being diagnosed. 5. Monitor DTC Status for the DTC being tested. The scan tool will indicate Ran, when the enabling conditions have been satisfied long enough for the DTC to run. The scan tool will also indicate whether the DTC passed or failed. * An alternate method is to drive the vehicle with the DMM connected to a suspected circuit. An abnormal reading on the DMM when the concern occurs, may help you locate the concern. Measuring Frequency Measuring Frequency Special Tools EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM) For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test Probe Caution). The following procedure determines the frequency of a signal. Note: Connecting the Digital Multimeter (DMM) to the circuit before pressing the Hz button will allow the DMM to autorange to an appropriate range. 1. Apply power to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (AC) position. 3. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5046 5. Press the Hz button on the DMM. 6. The DMM will display the frequency measured. Measuring Voltage Measuring Voltage Special Tools EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM) For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test Probe Caution). The following procedure measures the voltage at a selected point in a circuit. 1. Disconnect the electrical harness connector for the circuit being tested, if necessary. 2. Enable the circuit and/or system being tested. Use the following methods: * Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. * Turn ON the engine. * Turn ON the circuit and/or system with a scan tool in Output Controls. * Turn ON the switch for the circuit and/or system being tested. 3. Select the V (AC) or V (DC) position on the Digital Multimeter (DMM). 4. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the point of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. The DMM displays the voltage measured at that point. Measuring Voltage Drop Measuring Voltage Drop Special Tools EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM) For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test Probe Caution). The following procedure determines the difference in voltage potential between 2 points. 1. Set the rotary dial of the Digital Multimeter (DMM) to the V (DC) position. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5047 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to one point of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to the other point of the circuit. 4. Operate the circuit. 5. The DMM displays the difference in voltage between the 2 points. Probing Electrical Connectors Probing Electrical Connectors Note: Always be sure to reinstall the connector position assurance (CPA) and terminal position assurance (TPA) when reconnecting connectors or replacing terminals. Front probe Disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the mating side (front) of the connector. Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test Probe Caution). Note: When probing female 0.64 terminals, it is important to use the correct adapter. There have been some revisions to the test adapter for 0.64 terminals. The proper adapter for 0.64 terminals is the EL-35616-64B which has a gold terminal and a black wire between the base and tip. Failure to use the proper test adapter may result in damage to the terminal being tested and improper diagnosis. Note: The proper adapter for probing the terminals for fuses, relays, or diodes in an electrical center is EL-35616-35. Using any other tool or adapter may damage the terminal being tested. Refer to the following table as a guide in selecting the correct test adapter for front probing connectors: Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5048 Backprobe Note: * Backprobe connector terminals only when specifically required in diagnostic procedures. * Do not backprobe a sealed (Weather Pack(R)) connector, less than a 280 series Metri-Pack connector, a Micro-Pack connector, or a flat wire (dock and lock) connector. * Backprobing can be a source of damage to connector terminals. Use care in order to avoid deforming the terminal, either by forcing the test probe too far into the cavity or by using too large of a test probe. * After backprobing any connector, inspect for terminal damage. If terminal damage is suspected, test for proper terminal contact. Do not disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the harness side (back) of the connector. Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure Using Snapshots in Global Diagnostic System (GDS) Overview Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5049 A snapshot is a recording of what a control module on the vehicle was receiving for information while the snapshot is being made. A snapshot may be used to analyze the data during the time a vehicle condition is current. This allows you to concentrate on making the condition occur, rather than trying to view all the data in anticipation of the fault. To record a snapshot in GDS, select, Record Snapshot, from the options at the top right portion of any of the various pages that allow snapshots to be taken (e.g. Data Display, Control Functions, etc.). When you are finished recording, select, Stop Snapshot recording. The snapshot will now be available for replay. Snapshot Replay The Snapshot Replay function allows reviews of previously recorded vehicle snapshot data. This information can be used in analysis of vehicle problems and detection of trigger error conditions. The graph function can be used to compare parameters to see if a component is functioning properly. Recorded snapshots can be selected for viewing by the following three methods: * Selecting a snapshot file from the Vehicle Home Page and clicking on the Review selection. * Double clicking on the selected snapshot from the Vehicle Home Page. * Entering the Tools selection from the Menu selection and selecting Snapshot replay. Next, open the Snapshot Manager. Double click on the snapshot file you wish to view or click on the Load Snapshot selection and select a snapshot file. Regardless of selection method, a File Loaded pop-up window will be displayed from the Snapshot Replay screen. Select OK from the pop-up window. Snapshot Play Functions There are several snapshot play functions that are used to replay recorded snapshots * The Play function is used to play the snapshot forward by clicking on this selection. A marker will move across the screen when this selection is used. All selections in this area turn grey when they are active. * The Pause function is used to pause play of the snapshot. When this selection is clicked a second time the snapshot will start playing where it left off. * The Stop function is used to stop playing the snapshot. The snapshot will start from the beginning, if Play is selected after using the Stop function. Time Control Time control is used to control the snapshot replay. This function allows selection of a specific time frame, display of different views, and control of display speed. The following functions can be selected directly under Time Control. * The Bookmark selection allows you to add a specific comment in the current display and return to this point in the future. When this option is selected, a pop-up window is displayed. Enter a bookmark name and select OK. * The Note Pad can be selected to add comments to the snapshot replay file at the current point of time. When this option is selected, a pop-up window is displayed. Enter a comment for the snapshot file and select OK. * The Load Snapshot (blue folder) opens a snapshot file and makes it ready for further analysis. This function is also available by clicking on an available snapshot file from the Snapshot Manager. * The Down Arrow displays all Time Control options when selected. Individual options can also be selected by clicking on the item you want. * The Snapshot Display Speed can be controlled by selecting this option. Slow speeds of 1/8X, 1/4X, and 1/2X can be selected. The real time speed can also be selected at 1. Faster speeds of 2X, 4X, and 8X can also be obtained by using this selection. View Selections Each View Selection provides a different way of displaying vehicle data for analysis. The following functions can be selected under Available Views: Note: The parameter name will be shown in the original language used for capture if no translation is available for the name. * Parameter List View - Displays incoming information from the snapshot file. The current value of the parameters is displayed on the screen. * Log View - Contains all the information from the snapshot file. All parameter values are listed in the order they were recorded. Specific parameters can be added or removed from a watchlist by clicking on the appropriate item. * State View - Shows the values of all parameters in a specific time frame. These values can be used for comparison with the trigger view. * Trigger View - Displays all system and user defined triggers. This function can be used when there is a combination of factors involved in a diagnostic problem. When a Trigger condition is met a caution triangle will be displayed on the screen. Triggers: * Load Triggers - Allows you to load a file containing trigger definitions. * Save Triggers - Allows you to save the trigger to your computer's hard drive. * Remove Trigger - Allows you to remove the current trigger. It will no longer be present. * Edit Trigger - Displays a pop-up window where you can modify the limits and parameters contained within a trigger. * Adds Trigger - Displays a pop-up window to configure a trigger. * DTC View - After the Play function is selected and this option is selected this function opens the list of recorded DTCs. * Line Graph View - Displays data that can be visualized against the time-axis. From this view, specific parameters can be selected for graphing by Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5050 checking the box under Selected. At the bottom of the graph there are four functions Zoom In (increase size), Zoom Out (decrease size), Bookmarks, and Pause Scrolling. Each of these functions can be accessed by clicking on them. Testing for Continuity Testing for Continuity Special Tools EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM) For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test Probe Caution). The following procedures verify good continuity in a circuit. With a Digital Multimeter (DMM) 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the Ohms position. 2. Disconnect the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 3. Disconnect the load. 4. Press the MIN MAX button on the DMM. 5. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 6. Connect the other lead of the DMM to the other end of the circuit. 7. If the DMM displays low or no resistance, the circuit has good continuity. With a Test Lamp Note: Only use the test lamp procedure on low impedance power and ground circuits. 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect one lead of the test lamp to one end of the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 5. Connect the other end of the circuit to ground. 6. If the test lamp illuminates (full intensity), then the circuit has good continuity. Testing for Electrical Intermittents Testing for Electrical Intermittents Special Tools EL-39200 Digital Multimeter For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Perform the following procedures while wiggling the harness from side to side. Continue this at convenient points (about 6 inches apart) while watching the test equipment. * Testing for Short to Ground (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Short to Ground) * Testing for Continuity (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Continuity) * Testing for a Short to Voltage (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for a Short to Voltage) If the fault is not identified, perform the procedure below using the MIN MAX feature on the EL-39200 DMM. This feature allows you to manipulate the circuit without having to watch the EL-39200. The EL-39200 will generate an audible tone when a change is detected. Note: The EL-39200 must be used in order to perform the following procedure since the EL-39200 can monitor current, resistance or voltage while recording the minimum (MIN), and maximum (MAX) values measured. 1. Connect the EL-39200 to both sides of a suspected connector (still connected), or from one end of a suspected circuit to the other. Refer to Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5051 Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter) for information on connecting the EL-39200 to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the EL-39200 to the V (AC) or V (DC) position. 3. Press the range button of the EL-39200 in order to select the desired voltage range. 4. Press the MIN MAX button of the EL-39200. The EL-39200 displays 100 ms RECORD and emits an audible tone (beep). Note: The 100 ms RECORD mode is the length of time an input must stay at a new value in order to record the full change. 5. Simulate the condition that is potentially causing the intermittent connection, either by wiggling the connections or the wiring, test driving, or performing other operations. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions). 6. Listen for the audible Min Max Alert which indicates that a new minimum or maximum value has been recorded. 7. Press the MIN MAX button once in order to display the MAX value and note the value. 8. Press the MIN MAX button again in order to display the MIN value and note the value. 9. Determine the difference between the MIN and MAX values. * If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is 1 V or greater an intermittent open or high resistance condition exists. Repair the condition as necessary. * If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is less than 1 V, an intermittent open or high resistance condition does not exist. Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections Special Tools EL-35616 Terminal Test Probe Kit For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). When the condition is not currently present, but is indicated in DTC history, the cause may be intermittent. An intermittent may also be the cause when there is a customer complaint, but the symptom cannot be duplicated. Refer to the Symptom Table of the system that is suspect of causing the condition before trying to locate an intermittent condition. Most intermittent conditions are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. Inspect for the following items: * Wiring broken inside the insulation * Poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector * Poor terminal to wire connection-Some conditions which fall under this description are poor crimps, poor solder joints, crimping over the wire insulation rather than the wire itself, and corrosion in the wire to terminal contact area, etc. * Pierced or damaged insulation can allow moisture to enter the wiring causing corrosion. The conductor can corrode inside the insulation, with little visible evidence. Look for swollen and stiff sections of wire in the suspect circuits. * Wiring which has been pinched, cut, or its insulation rubbed through may cause an intermittent open or short as the bare area touches other wiring or parts of the vehicle. * Wiring that comes in contact with hot or exhaust components * Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions) in order to duplicate the conditions required, in order to verify the customer concern. * Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Electrical Intermittents) for test procedures to detect intermittent open, high resistance, short to ground, and short to voltage conditions. * Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure) for advanced intermittent diagnosis and Vehicle Data Recorder operation. Testing for Terminal Fretting Some intermittent conditions can be caused by wire terminal fretting corrosion. Fretting corrosion is a build-up of insulating, oxidized wear debris that can form when there is a small motion between electrical contacts. The oxidized wear debris can pile up enough at the electrical contact spots that the electrical resistance across the connection increases. Movement between the contacting surfaces as small as 10 to 100 microns can cause fretting. To put this in perspective, a sheet of paper is about 100 microns thick, so fretting motion is small and hard to see. Vibration and thermal expansion/contraction are the main sources that create fretting motion. Since vehicles vibrate and can experience large temperature swings, they are a good source for fretting motion. Tin, copper, nickel, and iron surfaces are all susceptible to fretting corrosion. Fretting corrosion can be difficult to see but it looks like small, dark smudges on the terminals contact surface. To correct a fretting condition disconnect the suspect connector and add Nyogel lubricant 760G (dielectric grease) to both sides of the connector Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5052 terminals. Then reconnect the connector and wipe away any excess lubricant. This will correct the additional terminal contact resistance due to the terminal fretting corrosion. Testing for Proper Terminal Contact It is important to test terminal contact at the component and any inline connectors before replacing a suspect component. Mating terminals must be inspected to ensure good terminal contact. A poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector may be the result of contamination or deformation. Contamination may be caused by the connector halves being improperly connected. A missing or damaged connector seal, damage to the connector itself, or exposing the terminals to moisture and dirt can also cause contamination. Contamination, usually in the underhood or underbody connectors, leads to terminal corrosion, causing an open circuit or intermittently open circuit. Deformation is caused by probing the mating side of a connector terminal without the proper adapter. Always use the EL-35616 when probing connectors. Other causes of terminal deformation are improperly joining the connector halves, or repeatedly separating and joining the connector halves. Deformation, usually to the female terminal contact tang, can result in poor terminal contact causing an open or intermittently open circuit. Testing for Proper Terminal Contact in Bussed Electrical Centers It is very important to use the correct test adapter when testing for proper terminal contact of fuses and relays in a bussed electrical center. Use EL-35616-35 to test for proper terminal contact. Failure to use EL-35616-35 can result in improper diagnosis of the bussed electrical center. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact: 1. Separate the connector halves. 2. Visually inspect the connector halves for contamination. Contamination may result in a white or green build-up within the connector body or between terminals. This causes high terminal resistance, intermittent contact, or an open circuit. An underhood or underbody connector that shows signs of contamination should be replaced in its entirety: terminals, seals, and connector body. 3. Using an equivalent male terminal / terminated lead, verify that the retention force is significantly different between a known good terminal and the suspect terminal. Replace the female terminal in question. Flat Wire (Dock and Lock) Connectors There are no serviceable parts for flat wire (dock and lock) connectors on the harness side or the component side. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact: 1. Remove the component in question. 2. Visually inspect each side of the connector for signs of contamination. Avoid touching either side of the connector as oil from your skin may be a source of contamination as well. 3. Visually inspect the terminal bearing surfaces of the flat wire circuits for splits, cracks, or other imperfections that could cause poor terminal contact. Visually inspect the component side connector to ensure that all of the terminals are uniform and free of damage or deformation. 4. Insert the appropriate adapter from the on the flat wire harness connector in order to test the circuit in question. Control Module/Component Voltage and Grounds Poor voltage or ground connections can cause widely varying symptoms. * Test all control module voltage supply circuits. Many vehicles have multiple circuits supplying voltage to a control module. Other components in the system may have separate voltage supply circuits that may also need to be tested. Inspect connections at the module/component connectors, fuses, and any intermediate connections between the voltage source and the module/component. A test lamp or a DMM may indicate that voltage is present, but neither tests the ability of the circuit to carry sufficient current. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. Refer to Circuit Testing (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Circuit Testing) and Power Distribution Schematics (See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Starting and Charging/Power and Ground Distribution/System Diagram/Power Distribution Schematics). * Test all control module ground and system ground circuits. The control module may have multiple ground circuits. Other components in the system may have separate grounds that may also need to be tested. Inspect grounds for clean and tight connections at the grounding point. Inspect the connections at the component and in splice packs, where applicable. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. Refer to Circuit Testing (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Circuit Testing) and Ground Distribution Schematics (See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Starting and Charging/Power and Ground Distribution/System Diagram/Ground Distribution Schematics). Temperature Sensitivity * An intermittent condition may occur when a component/connection reaches normal operating temperature. The condition may occur only when the component/connection is cold, or only when the component/connection is hot. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5053 * Freeze Frame, Failure Records, Snapshot, or Vehicle Data Recorder data may help with this type of intermittent condition, where applicable. * If the intermittent is related to heat, review the data for a relationship with the following: - High ambient temperatures - Underhood/engine generated heat - Circuit generated heat due to a poor connection, or high electrical load - Higher than normal load conditions, towing, etc. * If the intermittent is related to cold, review the data for the following: - Low ambient temperatures-In extremely low temperatures, ice may form in a connection or component. Inspect for water intrusion. - The condition only occurs on a cold start. - The condition goes away when the vehicle warms up. * Information from the customer may help to determine if the trouble follows a pattern that is temperature related. * If temperature is suspected of causing an intermittent fault condition, attempt to duplicate the condition. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions) in order to duplicate the conditions required. Electromagnetic Interference and Electrical Noise Some electrical components/circuits are sensitive to electromagnetic interference or other types of electrical noise. Inspect for the following conditions: * A misrouted harness that is too close to high voltage/high current devices such as secondary ignition components, motors, generator etc.-These components may induce electrical noise on a circuit that could interfere with normal circuit operation. * Electrical system interference caused by a malfunctioning relay, or a control module driven solenoid or switch-These conditions can cause a sharp electrical surge. Normally, the condition will occur when the malfunctioning component is operating. * Improper installation of non-factory or aftermarket add on accessories such as lights, 2-way radios, amplifiers, electric motors, remote starters, alarm systems, cell phones, etc.-These accessories may lead to interference while in use, but do not fail when the accessories are not in use. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Checking Aftermarket Accessories). * Test for an open diode across the A/C compressor clutch and for other open diodes. Some relays may contain a clamping diode. * The generator may be allowing AC noise into the electrical system. Incorrect Control Module * There are only a few situations where reprogramming a control module is appropriate: - A new service control module is installed. - A control module from another vehicle is installed. - Revised software/calibration files have been released for this vehicle. Note: DO NOT re-program the control module with the SAME software/calibration files that are already present in the control module. This is not an effective repair for any type of concern. * Verify that the control module contains the correct software/calibration. If incorrect programming is found, reprogram the control module with the most current software/calibration. Refer to Control Module References (See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning) for replacement, setup, and programming. Testing for Short to Ground Testing for Short to Ground Special Tools * EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM) * EL 35616-200 - Test Light-Probe Kit For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test Probe Caution). The following procedures test for a short to ground in a circuit. With a Digital Multimeter (DMM) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5054 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the Ohms position. 4. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the other lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. If the DMM does NOT display infinite resistance (OL), there is a short to ground in the circuit. With a Test Lamp 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect one lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to one end of the circuit to be tested. 5. If the test lamp illuminates, there is a short to ground in the circuit. Fuse Powering Several Loads 1. Review the system schematic and locate the fuse that is open. 2. Open the first connector or switch leading from the fuse to each load. 3. Connect a DMM across the fuse terminals (be sure that the fuse is powered). * When the DMM displays voltage the short is in the wiring leading to the first connector or switch. * If the DMM does not display voltage refer to the next step. 4. Close each connector or switch until the DMM displays voltage in order to find which circuit is shorted. Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter Special Tools EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM) For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test Probe Caution). Digital Multimeter (DMM) Basic Requirements Service information is validated using digital multimeters that meet or exceed the following requirements. Using a multimeter that does not meet these basic requirements may give inaccurate readings which could lead to an incorrect diagnosis. Display and Settings 1. Four digits displayed 2. Voltage, amperage, resistance, frequency, diode test settings, and min-max function 3. Display positive and negative values Voltage 1. Have at least 10 Mohm input impedance 2. Test a DC voltage range of 0.1-1000 V. 3. Test an AC voltage range of 0.1-1000 V. Amperage 1. Test a DC amperage range of 0.1µA-10 A. 2. Test an AC amperage range of 0.1µA-10 A. Resistance Test a resistance range of 0.1 ohm-40 Mohm and displays infinite for a value greater than 40 Mohm (O.L. (Over-load)) Frequency Test for a frequency range of 0.5 HZ-199 K HZ Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5055 Diode Test 1. Apply at least 1 mA when performing the diode bias test 2. Display the break over voltage drop (0-3 V) of a forward biased diode 3. Display infinite (O.L. (Over-load)) when a diode is reverse biased Min-Max Readings 1. Can update at a 1 ms sample rate 2. Saves and displays minimum and maximum values Note: Circuits which include any solid state control modules, such as the engine control module (ECM), should only be tested with a 10 MOhms or higher impedance digital multimeter such as the EL-39200. The EL-39200 instruction manual is a good source of information and should be read thoroughly upon receipt of the DMM as well as kept on hand for future reference. A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present if the impedance is low enough, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. In other words, if there is not enough current, the test lamp will not illuminate even though voltage is present. The ohmmeter function on a DMM shows how much resistance exists between 2 points along a circuit. Low resistance in a circuit means good continuity. Note: Disconnect the power feed from the suspect circuit when measuring resistance with a DMM. This prevents incorrect readings. DMMs apply such a small voltage to measure resistance that the presence of voltages can upset a resistance reading. Diodes and solid state components in a circuit can cause a DMM to display a false reading. To find out if a component is affecting a measurement take a reading once, then reverse the leads and take a second reading. If the readings differ the solid state component is affecting the measurement. Following are examples of the various methods of connecting the DMM to the circuit to be tested: * Probe both ends of the connector and either hold the leads in place while manipulating the connector or tape the leads to the harness for continuous monitoring while you perform other operations or test driving. Refer to Probing Electrical Connectors (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Probing Electrical Connectors). * Disconnect the harness at both ends of the suspected circuit where it connects either to a component or to other harnesses. * If the system that is being diagnosed has a specified pinout or breakout box, it may be used in order to simplify connecting the DMM to the circuit or for testing multiple circuits quickly. Using Connector Test Adapters Using Connector Test Adapters Special Tools EL 35616 - Terminal Test Probe Kit For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Caution: Do not insert test equipment probes (DMM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the EL-38125-580 GM Approved Terminal Release Tool Kit in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the EL-38125-580 GM Approved Terminal Release Tool Kit , ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the EL-38125-580 GM Approved Terminal Release Tool Kit label on the inside of the EL-38125-580 GM Approved Terminal Release Tool Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Using Fused Jumper Wires Using Fused Jumper Wires Special Tools J 36169-A Fused Jumper Wire Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5056 Note: A fused jumper may not protect solid state components from being damaged. The J 36169-A includes small clamp connectors that provide adaptation to most connectors without damage. This fused jumper wire is supplied with a 20-A fuse which may not be suitable for some circuits. Do not use a fuse with a higher rating than the fuse that protects the circuit being tested. AFL/EPC Connectors AFL/EPC Connectors Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. 1. For connectors with a bolt in the dress cover, turn the bolt counterclockwise to remove the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5057 2. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the top of the wire dress cover. Slide the CPA forward. 3. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5058 View showing depressing of the lever lock release tab. View of connector in released position. 4. Disconnect the connector from the component. 5. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the dress cover. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs and remove the dress cover. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5059 6. Release the rear lower half of the wiredress cover. 7. Release the tabs that are holding the wiredress cover to the connector body. 8. Remove the nose piece by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the slots on both ends of the connector body. Gently pry the nose piece out of the connector. J 38125-216 can also be used to remove the nose piece. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5060 9. Use the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by lifting the terminal retaining tabs on the inside of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Bosch Connectors (BSK) Bosch Connectors (BSK) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5061 Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 3. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 4. Insert the J 38125-561 tool into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 5. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Bosch Connectors (ECM) Bosch Connectors (ECM) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5062 1. Locate the assist lever on the top of the connector. Move the assist lever to the forward position. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5063 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the connector. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the locking tabs and remove the dress cover. 4. The terminal positive assurance (TPA) is located in the front of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5064 5. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove TPA from the connector. 6. Use the J 38125-213 or the J 38125-556 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5065 Note: Ensure that the dress cover and connector body are both in the released position before reassembling. Failure to do so may cause damage to the connector and component. Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Bosch Connectors (0.64) Bosch Connectors (0.64) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While pressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock until the lever is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Pull the rubber boot that covers the wires back to expose the end of the connector dress cover. 4. Place the connector locking lever in the center of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5066 5. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs that are on the wire end of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover and connector body and pry up. 6. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs located on the opposite side of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover at the connector end and pry up. 7. Remove the dress cover. 8. Cut the tie wrap on the wire bundle. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5067 9. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting a small flat-bladed tool into the small slot in the end of the slider and pushing on the TPA until it comes out of the connector. When the TPA exits the opposite side of the connector, gasp the TPA and pull it completely out of the connector. 10. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 11. Insert the J 38125-560 into the 2 triangular cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 12. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Terminal Replacement Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5068 1. Prior to installation the terminal must be aligned so the (1) coding lugs align with the (2) coding grooves on the connector. 2. Once the terminal is aligned, slide the terminal into the cavity until the retainer has engaged in the cavity of the connector. 3. Slide the TPA in the connector body and seat it using a small flat bladed tool. The TPA is seated when it is flush with the contact housing. 4. Secure the wires to the connector body using a tie wrap and replace the dress cover and grommet. Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Pull out the slider on the connector position assurance (CPA) until it is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5069 5. Insert the J 38125-557 into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Connector Position Assurance Locks Connector Position Assurance Locks The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of the connector. CPAs are used in various connectors throughout the vehicle. CPAs are also used in all SIR system electrical connectors. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals, of the connector. Connector Repairs Connector Repairs Connector Repairs contains a list of all connector repairs. The connector repairs are listed by the connector manufacturer and then by connector type. If the technician cannot identify the manufacturer of the connector, refer to Identifying Connectors below. Knowing the connector manufacturer will assist in finding the correct connector repair from the following list: * Connector Position Assurance Locks (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Connector Position Assurance Locks) * Terminal Position Assurance Locks (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Terminal Position Assurance Locks) * AFL/EPC Connectors (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/AFL/EPC Connectors) * Bosch Connectors (BSK) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Bosch Connectors (BSK))Bosch Connectors (0.64) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Bosch Connectors (0.64))Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT))Bosch Connectors (ECM) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Bosch Connectors (ECM)) * Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack))Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Push to Seat))Delphi Connectors Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5070 (Pull To Seat) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Pull to Seat))Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W))Delphi Connectors (Micro.64) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Micro .64))Delphi Connectors (12-Way) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (12-Way))Delphi Connectors (Steering Gear) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Steering Gear)) * FCI Connectors (Lever Lock) (See: General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/FCI Connectors (Lever Lock))FCI Connectors (SIR) (See: General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/FCI (SIR)) * FEP Connectors (Steering Gear) (See: General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/FEP Connectors (Steering Gear)) * JST Connectors (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/JST Connectors) * Kostal Connectors (Glow Plug Control Module) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Kostal Connectors (Glow Plug Control Module))Kostal Connectors (Transmission) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Kostal Connectors (Transmission)) * Molex Connectors (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Molex Connectors) * Sumitomo Connectors (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Sumitomo Connectors) * Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way))Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor))Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap))Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way))Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module)) * Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Yazaki Connectors (2-Way))Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Yazaki Connectors (16-Way)) * Repairing Connector Terminals (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Repairing Connector Terminals) Connector Anatomy 1 - Connector Positive Assurance (CPA) 2 - Assist Lever 3 - Wiredress Cover 4 - Seal Strain/Relief Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5071 5 - Slide Left Hand 6 - Slide Right Hand 7 - Terminal Positive Assurance (TPA) 8 - Terminal Positive Assurance (TPA) 9 - Connector Seal 10 - Connector Housing 11 - Inner Connector Identifying Connectors Knowing the connector manufacturer is helpful when trying to locating the correct connector repair procedure. There are many different connector designs used on GM vehicles and it is sometimes difficult to identify the connector manufacturer. The information in this document should help with the identification of connector manufactures. The following connector manufacturers make most of the connectors found in GM vehicles: * AFL/EPC (Alcoa Fujikura Ltd./Engineered Plastics Components) * Bosch * Delphi * FCI (Framatome Connectors International) * JAE (Japan Aviation Electronics) * JST (Japan Solderless Terminals) * Kostel * Molex * Sumitomo * Tyco/AMP * Yazaki Identifying the manufacturer of a connector is often difficult. When trying to determine the manufacturer of a connector, look for specific identifying marks that are unique to that connector supplier. Most of these identify marks are hard to find or see. Check the connector carefully and refer to the information below for pictures and descriptions of connector identification markings. * Most of AFLs connectors have EPC on their connector body. Some of the smaller connectors will not have any markings on them. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5072 * In some cases Bosch will actually be printed on the connector. If Bosch does not appear on the connector, look for the Bosch logo. The Bosch logo is a circle with a blunted arrow inside. This logo can appear anywhere on the connector and is often very small. * In some cases Delphi will actually be printed on the connector. If Delphi is not printed on the connector, look for PED. In both cases there is no specific orientation for Delphi or PED and they can appear anywhere on the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5073 * FCI connectors may have the FCI logo on their connectors. The logo is the letters FCI with an "A" above it. * JAE connector have JAE in small letters on their connectors. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5074 * JST connectors have JST in small letters on their connectors, similar to that above. The location of the logo will vary with the connector size and style. * Kostel has an "LK" with a circle around it. These connector are usually used as a transmissions connection. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5075 * Most Molex connectors will have the Molex logo on the dresscover of the connector. In some cases the connectors may have MX followed by another letter. The third letter indicates where the connector was made. A connector with MXD is a Molex connector made in Detroit. Sumitomo has a unique symbol on their connector and possibly a part number. The symbol is similar to that of a diamond lying on its side, similar to that shown. The logo could appear anywhere but the most common place is at the wire side of the housing. * Tyco/AMP has many different and unique connector designs. Some may or may not have identifiable marks on them. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5076 * Yazaki has a wedge or arrow shape, similar to that shown. Delphi Connectors (Push to Seat) Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Follow the steps below in order to repair push to seat connectors. 1. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device, the connector position assurance (CPA) device, and/or the secondary lock. 2. Separate the connector halves (1). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5077 3. Use the proper pick or removal tool (1) in order to release the terminal. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 4. Gently pull the cable and the terminal (2) out of the back of the connector. 5. Re-form the locking device if you are going to reuse the terminal (1). 6. To repair the terminal, refer to Terminal Repair. Terminal Repair 1. Slip the cable seal away from the terminal. 2. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 3. Slip a new cable seal onto the wire. 4. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 5. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 6. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. 7. Slide the cable seal toward the terminal. 8. Crimp the cable seal and the insulation. 9. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply grease to the connector. Reinstalling Terminal 1. In order to reuse a terminal or lead assembly, refer to Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Wiring Repairs). 2. Ensure that the cable seal is kept on the terminal side of the splice. 3. Insert the lead from the back until it catches. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Terminated Lead Repair 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Find the appropriate terminated lead. 3. Use the appropriate splice sleeves depending on the gauge size. 4. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves). Delphi Connectors (Pull to Seat) Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) Special Tools Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5078 J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal If the terminal is visibly damaged or is suspected of having a faulty connection, the terminal should be replaced. Follow the steps below in order to repair pull-to-seat connectors: 1. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) device and/or the secondary lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component or separate the connectors for in-line connectors. 3. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device. 4. Insert the proper pick or removal tool into the front of the connector body. Note: On connectors with more than one terminal the service loop may not be large enough to remove the terminal and crimp on a new one. If the terminal wire does not have a large enough service loop for removal, cut the wire 5 cm (2 in) behind the connector before removal. 5. Grasp the wire at the back of the connector body and gently push the terminal out the front of the connector body. Terminal Repair 1. If the wire needed to be cut in order to remove the terminal, gently push a small length of the same size wire through the back of the connector cavity until there is enough wire exposed in order to crimp on a new terminal. If the wire was not cut, cut the existing wire as close to the old terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 4. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. Terminal Installation 1. Align the terminal and pull the wire from the back of the connector in order to seat the terminal. 2. If necessary, cut the new wire to proper length and splice with existing circuit. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves). 3. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply dielectric grease to the connector. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Micro .64) Delphi Connectors (Micro.64) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5079 Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro.64 connectors. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. The lever lock may be located on the top or sides of the wire dress cover. View of a typical Micro 64 connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5080 Depress the lock and pull the lever over and past the lock. View of the connector when released from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5081 View of another type of Micro 64 connector. Depress the locks that are located on both sides of the wiredress cover and pull the lever over and past the locks. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5082 View of the connector when released from the component. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the front of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool push down on one of the locking tabs and pull the cover up until the dress cover releases. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. 4. Once the front 2 locks are unlocked, lift the front of the dress cover and pull it forward. Note: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 5. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the small slot on the TPA and pushing down until the TPA releases. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5083 Note: Be careful not to angle or rock the J 38125-21 tool when inserting it into the connector or the tool may break. 6. Insert the J 38125-21 tool into the round canal between the terminals cavities at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Follow the steps below in order to repair Micro 64 connector terminals. The Micro 64 connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-64 (M jaw) was developed to crimp Micro 64 terminals. The J 38125-64 crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. The J 38125-64 crimping tool is also designed to crimp both the wire and the insulation at the same time. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro 64 terminals. Note: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gauge wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 1. Cut the wire as close to the damaged terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5084 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert terminal into the appropriate terminal holder until it hits bottom and stops. The correct terminal holder is determined by the wire size. Also ensure that the terminals wings are pointing towards the former on the tool and the release locator. 5. Insert the stripped cable into the terminal. Insulation should be visible on both sides of the terminal insulation wings. 6. Compress the handles until the ratchet automatically releases. 7. Place the terminal into the appropriate cavity and assemble the connector. Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5085 Terminal Removal Procedure There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W connectors. These connectors are very similar but use different terminals and have some minor physical differences also. The first connector design of the Micro-Pack 100W (1) has a white connector interface that holds the terminals. The second design of the Micro-Pack 100W (2) has a gray interface to hold the terminals. Also, the first design has terminal cavities that are further apart (3 mm centerline) and offset from the other row of terminal cavities in the connector. The second design has terminals cavities that are closer together (2.54 mm centerline) and aligned vertically. One other way to identify the second design is the thin strip of material that runs along the outside of the cavities. Note: There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W terminals which are very similar. Ensure that you have the correct terminal before crimping the new terminal to the wire. The first design connector uses the longer terminal (1) that has a raised area in front of the recess in the terminal. The second design connector uses the shorter terminal without the raised area. Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro-Pack 100W connectors. Some Micro-Pack 100W connector disassembly procedures will vary. Use this procedure as a guide. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5086 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Locate the nose piece locking tabs that are positioned on the side of the connector nose piece. The connector nose piece acts as a terminal positive assurance (TPA) and may be referred to as such. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to push in one of the locking tabs while gently pulling on the same side of the nose piece. 4. Repeat the procedure for the other locking tab and remove the nose piece. 5. Remove the wire dress cover. The following is a general procedure for wire dress cover removal. Use this procedure as a guide, some dress cover removal procedures may vary. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5087 6. Use fingers to squeeze the 2 locking legs of the cover. 7. Apply pressure and gently rock the cover until one locking leg is unseated. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5088 8. Continue to apply pressure and rock the cover until the second locking leg is unseated. Repeat procedure for the other side of the dress cover and remove the cover. 9. Use J 38125-12A to gently lift the terminal retaining tab while gently pulling the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. If the terminal is severely bent or damaged, it may be possible on some connectors to push the wire out of the front of the connector instead of pulling it through. This will prevent damage to the internal seals of the connector. Once the terminal is pushed out of the connector, cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible and pull the wire through the connector. Terminal Repair Procedure The Micro-Pack 100W connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool was developed to crimp Micro-Pack 100W terminals. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro-Pack 100 terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5089 1. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. Note: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gauge wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert the terminal into the crimp tool until the core wings are flush with the anvil on the crimp tool. Be sure that the wings are pointed toward the crimp tool former and release the spring locator. The locator will hold the terminal in place. Inspect the alignment of the terminal wings with the crimp tool former. If the terminal wings are wider than the crimp tool former, remove the terminal and bend the terminal wings in slightly. 5. Place stripped wire into terminal. 6. Crimp the new terminal to the wire. If a jam occurs, press the emergency release to open applicator. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5090 Terminal Replacement Procedure After the terminal is crimped to the wire perform the following procedure in order to replace Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the Terminal Removal Procedure. Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The following is the proper procedure for the repair of Weather Pack(R) Connectors. 1. Separate the connector halves (1). 2. Open the secondary lock. A secondary lock aids in terminal retention and is usually molded to the connector (1). 3. Grasp the wire and push the terminal to the forward most position. Hold the wire in this position. 4. Insert the Weather Pack(R) terminal removal tool J 38125-10A into the front (mating end) of the connector cavity until it rests on the cavity shoulder (1). 5. Gently pull on the wire to remove the terminal through the back of the connector (2). Note: Never use force to remove a terminal from a connector. 6. Inspect the terminal and connector for damage. Repair as necessary. Refer to Repairing Connector Terminals (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Repairing Connector Terminals). 7. Reform the lock tang (2) and reset terminal in connector body. 8. Close secondary locks and join connector halves. 9. Verify that circuit is complete and working satisfactorily. 10. Perform system check. Delphi Connectors (12-Way) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5091 Delphi Connectors (12-Way) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) and slide the lever lock away from the connector body. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs on the dress cover of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool release all of the locking tabs. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5092 4. Release the lower wire dress cover locking tab. 5. Release the upper wire dress cover locking tab. 6. Once the locks are unlocked, lift the dress cover off. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5093 Note: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 7. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the locking tabs on both sides of the TPA. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. 8. Remove the nose piece by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the locking tabs on both sides of the nose piece. Gently pry the nose piece out of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5094 9. Insert the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Delphi Connectors (Steering Gear) Delphi Connectors (Steering Gear) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5095 Removal Procedure 1. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the locking tab on the connector. 2. Push down the locking tab to release the connector. The small flat-bladed tool may need to be pushed down and angled back slightly to depress the locking tab. Pull on the connector body while releasing the locking tab to disconnect the connector. FCI Connectors (Lever Lock) FCI Connectors (Lever Lock) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5096 Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. 1. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. 2. The release tab is located on the top of the wiredress cover. 3. View of connector in released position. 4. Disconnect the connector from the component. 5. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the dress cover. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs and remove the dress cover. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5097 6. Use a small flat-blade tool to slide the terminal position assurance (TPA) up one notch on both ends of the connector. The TPA is located underneath the wire dress cover. For the larger terminals insert the J 38125-556 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. For the smaller terminals insert the J 38125-560 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5098 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. FCI (SIR) FCI Connectors (SIR) Removal Procedure Note: The orange CPA must be released first to disconnect or to connect the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5099 1. Lift the orange CPA vertically (avoid lifting on an angle to the connector) approximately 4 mm to release the connector. Use a small flat-bladed tool to help release the orange CPA. The orange CPA can also be released manually without any tools. 2. Grab the connector on both sides and lift the connector vertically to disconnect the connector. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5100 1. Lift the orange CPA vertically approximately 4 mm before installing the connector. Use a small flat-bladed tool to help release the orange CPA. The orange CPA can also be released manually without any tools. 2. Line up the connector key tabs with the initiator key slots. Grab the connector on both sides and push the connector down into the initiator connector sub assembly until fully seated. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5101 3. After the connector is fully seated, push down the orange CPA with your thumb. Push down until the orange CPA is touching the yellow cover on the connector. FEP Connectors (Steering Gear) FEP Connectors (Steering Gear) Removal Procedure 1. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the locking tab on the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5102 2. Push down the locking tab to release the connector. The small flat-bladed tool may need to be pushed down and angled back slightly to depress the locking tab. Pull on the connector body while releasing the locking tab to disconnect the connector. JST Connectors JST Connectors Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. While depressing the lock, remove the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5103 2. Locate the two indents of the terminal position assurance (TPA) located on the bottom of the connector body. Note: The TPA cannot be removed from the connector while there are terminals present in the connector body. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to very carefully raise the TPA on both sides of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5104 4. View of the TPA when removed from the connector body. 5. Use the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the left side of the terminal release cavity as shown in the graphic. Use the tool to move the terminal release to the right with a gentle prying motion. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Kostal Connectors (Glow Plug Control Module) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5105 Kostal Connectors (Glow Plug Control Module) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure View of typical connector. View of connector in released position. 1. Locate the assist lever at the back of the connector. Move the assist lever to the rear position. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5106 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove the dress cover. 4. Slide the dress cover forward and off of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5107 5. The terminal positive assurance (TPA) is located in the front and rear of the connector. Note: The front TPA cannot be removed from the connector. Only move it to the preset position. 6. Use a small flat-blade tool to move the front TPA to the preset position, outboard approximately 0.125 in. (3 mm). 7. Use a small flat-blade tool to completely remove the rear TPA from the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5108 8. Use the J 38125-24 or the J 38125-560 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 9. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Kostal Connectors (Transmission) Kostal Connectors (Transmission) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5109 1. While depressing the lock, twist and remove the connector from the component. 2. Locate the terminal position assurance (TPA). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5110 Note: The TPA cannot be removed from the connector while there are terminals present in the connector body. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to push the TPA until it bottoms out. 4. Use the J 38125-28 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal cavity as shown in the graphic. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 5. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Terminal Replacement Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5111 After the terminal is crimped to the wire, perform the following procedure in order to replace the terminal. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. Locate the terminal position assurance (TPA). 4. Use a small flat-blade tool to push the TPA until it bottoms out. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5112 5. Ensure the TPA is fully seated. The TPA should be centered and flush with the connector body when viewed. Molex Connectors Molex Connectors Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the top of the wire dress cover. Slide the CPA forward. 2. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5113 3. The lever should be in the full forward position. 4. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5114 5. Remove the dress cover by using a flat bladed tool to release the dress cover locking tabs and lift up on the dress cover. 6. Cut the tie wrap that holds the wires to the connector body. 7. Use a small flat-blade tool to pry one side of the nose piece up to the pre-stage position. When the nose piece is in the pre-staged position, the nose piece will be raised above the connector body the length of the step in the nose piece. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5115 8. Use a small flat-blade tool to pry the other side of the piece to the pre-stage position. If the nose piece is higher than the first step in the nose piece, gently push down on the nose piece until it meets with resistance from the connector body, you should feel the nose piece click into position. 9. Insert the J 38125-213 into the small terminal release hole on the nose piece and gently pull on the back of the wire. 10. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Refer to the terminal crimping procedure in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit. Terminal Replacement Procedure After the terminal is crimped to the wire, perform the following procedure in order to replace the terminal. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5116 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the connector disassembly procedure. Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the connector body and pull the CPA out. The CPA is on the wire harness side of connector. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Use a small flat-bladed tool to gently pry off the dress cover by inserting the tool under the cover opposite the harness side and prying up. 4. Remove the cover. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5117 5. Using a small flat-bladed tool, push on the side of the nose piece retainer while pushing the nose piece forward with your thumb. This will release the terminal position assurance (TPA). 6. Insert the J 38125-12A into the corresponding terminal release cavity. The release cavities are the 2 center rows of cavities on one half of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5118 7. Pressing the J 38125-12A tool in the release cavity of the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and crimper in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. Slide the lever lock away from the connector body. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs on the dress cover of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool release all of the locking tabs. 4. Once the locks are unlocked, lift the dress cover off. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5119 Note: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 5. Release the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the blue locking tabs on both ends of the connector. Gently slide the TPA up to the released position on both ends. 6. For the larger terminals insert the J 38125-13A tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. For the smaller terminals insert the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5120 View of the release tool being used for the larger terminals. View of the release tool being used for the larger terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5121 View of the release tool being used for the smaller terminals. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5122 Side view of connector. View of top of connector. 1. Locate the assist lever and lock on the top of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5123 2. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. 3. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5124 4. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the rear of the connector. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. 5. Once the locking tabs are unlocked, slide the inner connector out of the rear of the connector housing. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5125 6. Use the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by pressing on the tang. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Repairing Connector Terminals Repairing Connector Terminals Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Use the following repair procedures in order to repair the following: * Push to Seat terminals * Pull to Seat terminals Some terminals do not require all of the steps shown. Skip the steps that do not apply for your terminal repair. The J-38125 contains further information. 1. Cut off the terminal between the core and the insulation crimp. Minimize any wire loss. For cable seal terminals, remove the seal. 2. Apply the correct cable seal per gauge size of the wire, if used. Slide the seal back along the wire in order to enable insulation removal. 3. Remove the insulation. 4. For sealed terminals only, align the seal with the end of the cable insulation. 5. Position the strip in the terminal. For sealed terminals, position the strip and seal in the terminal. 6. Hand crimp the core wings. 7. Hand crimp the insulation wings. For sealed terminals, hand crimp the insulation wings around the seal and the cable. 8. Solder all of the hand crimp terminals excepting Micro-Pack 100.64 size. Soldering Micro-Pack 100 World terminals may damage the terminal. Sumitomo Connectors Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5126 Sumitomo Connectors Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5127 3. Remove the dress cover by using a flat-blade tool to release the connector locking tabs and pulling off the dress cover. 4. Relieve the tension on the nose piece retainers by inserting J 38125-12A into the single retainer slot on the end of the nose piece and gently prying out the locking tab. Repeat the process for both of the nose piece locking tabs on the opposite side of the nose piece. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5128 5. Once the nose piece retainers are relaxed, use the J 38125-552 to pull up the nose piece by hooking the tool under the nose piece and pulling up. The nose piece should raise slightly. 6. On the opposite side of the nose piece, use the J 38125-552 to pull up the nose piece by hooking the tool under the nose piece and pulling up. The nose piece should release completely. If the nose piece does not come off, repeat the procedure on the opposite side. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5129 7. The illustration above identifies the entry canal where the terminal release tool will be inserted, and the terminal cavity. * Terminal (1) * Entry Canal (2) 8. Insert the J 38125-553 tool into the entry canal and pry up on the terminal retainer. The terminal retainer is a small plastic piece on the top of the terminal. The terminal retainer must be held up while the terminal is pulled out of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5130 9. The illustration shows a cutaway view of the connector to aid the technician in releasing the terminal retainer. 10. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Refer to the terminal crimping procedure in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit. Terminal Replacement Procedure After the terminal is crimped to the wire, perform the following procedure in order to replace the terminal. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the connector disassembly procedure. Terminal Position Assurance Locks Terminal Position Assurance Locks The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5131 2. Insert the J 38125-11A tool into the cavity on the lower right hand face of the connector until the terminal release tang access panel slides over. 3. Ensure that the terminal release tang access panel is in the correct location to access the terminals. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5132 5. Insert the J 38125-11A into the terminal release tang access slot located behind the access panel of the connector and press down on the terminal while carefully pulling the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component by pressing down on the connector position assurance (CPA). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5133 2. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting the tool in the small recess on the side of the connector and pushing up until the TPA releases from the connector body. The TPA should raise just slightly. Do not try to remove the TPA. Note: The TPA on this connector cannot be removed unless the terminals are removed first. The TPA will come out of the connector body, but only slightly. When the TPA is slightly raised the terminals can be removed. Using excessive force to remove the TPA with the terminals still in the connector will damage the connector. 3. Repeat the process for the other side of the connector. 4. Ensure that the TPA is in the proper position to remove the terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5134 5. While pushing the terminal forward, insert the J 38125-24 in the release cavity above the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5135 2. Insert a small flat-blade tool in the slot below the front loaded terminal position assurance (TPA) and pry up. 3. Remove the TPA by pulling it out of the connector. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-553 on a slight upward angle into the cavity below the terminal to be removed. Ensure that the pointed on the end of the tool is facing the bottom of the terminal and it stays in contact with the terminal until it stops on the plastic terminal retainer. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5136 6. Gently pry the plastic terminal retainer down and carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5137 1. While depressing the lock, pull the two connector halves apart. Note: The TPA is fragile and may break if not done carefully. 2. Use a small flat-blade tool to very carefully push the terminal position assurance (TPA) towards the face of the connector on both sides of the connector. 3. View of the male half of the connector with female terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5138 4. View of the female half of the connector with male terminals. 5. Use the J 38125-215 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. View of the female half of the connector with male terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5139 7. View of the male half of the connector with female terminals. 8. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers A circuit breaker is a protective device that is designed to open the circuit when a current load is in excess of the rated breaker capacity. If there is a short or other type of overload condition in the circuit, the excessive current will open the circuit between the circuit breaker terminals. Two types of circuit breakers are used. Circuit Breaker - This type opens when excessive current passes through it for a period of time. It closes again after a few seconds, and if the cause of the high current is still present, it will open again. The circuit breaker will continue to cycle open and closed until the condition causing the high current is removed. Positive Temperature Coefficient (PTC) Circuit Breaker - This type greatly increases its resistance when excessive current passes through it. The excessive current heats the PTC device, as the device heats its resistance increases. Eventually the resistance gets so high that the circuit is effectively open. Unlike the ordinary circuit breaker the PTC unit will not reset until the circuit is opened, by removing the voltage from its terminals. Once the voltage is removed the circuit breaker will re-close within a second or 2. Circuit Protection - Fuses Circuit Protection - Fuses Special Tools EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM) For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5140 The fuse is the most common method of an automotive wiring circuit protection. Whenever there is an excessive amount of current flowing through a circuit the fusible element will melt and create an open or incomplete circuit. Fuses are a one time protection device and must be replaced each time the circuit is overloaded. To determine if a fuse is open, remove the suspected fuse and examine if the element in the fuse is broken (2). If not broken (1), also check for continuity using a Digital Multimeter (DMM) or a continuity tester. If the element is broken or continuity is suspect, replace the fuse with one of equal current rating. Circuit Protection - Fusible Links Circuit Protection - Fusible Links Special Tools EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM) For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Fusible link is wire designed to melt and break continuity when excessive current is applied. It is often located between or near the battery and starter or electrical center. Use a continuity tester or a Digital Multimeter (DMM) at each end of the wire containing the fusible link in order to determine if it is broken. If broken, it must be replaced with fusible link of the same gauge size. Repairing a Fusible Link Note: Fusible links cut longer than 225 mm (approximately 9 in) will not provide sufficient overload protection. Flat Wire Repairs Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5141 Flat Wire Repairs The flat wire within the flex wiring harness is not serviceable. If an open or short exists within the flex wiring harness the complete harness must be replaced. GMLAN Wiring Repairs GMLAN Wiring Repairs Special Tools * EL-38125-10 - Splice Sleeve Crimping Tool * J 38125-5 - Ultra Torch Special Tool * DuraSeal splice sleeves * A wire stripping tool For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: * A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. * A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The GM Local Area Network (GMLAN) System requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working on GMLAN connectors and terminals. GMLAN Repairs Note: When making a repair to any GMLAN network, the original wire length after the repair must be the same length as before the repair. If the network is a twisted pair, the twist must be maintained after the repair is completed. GMLAN has 2 types of networks, low speed and high speed. Low speed GMLAN has a single wire and works at slow speeds. High speed GMLAN has 2 wires in a twisted pair and works at higher speeds. For more information on GMLAN, refer to Data Link Communications Description and Operation ( See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Information Bus/Description and Operation). GMLAN Connector Terminal Repair Note: A terminated lead can be used to replace damaged connector terminals for both high speed and low speed GMLAN systems. When making a connector terminal repair on a GMLAN high speed system with twisted pair wires, do not untwist the wires more than necessary to make the repair. If the individual terminals are damaged on any GMLAN connection, use the appropriate connector repair procedure in order to repair the terminal. Refer to Connector Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Connector Repairs) for the appropriate connector repair procedure. GMLAN Wire Repair Note: Refer to Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Wiring Repairs) in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gauge size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and EL-38125-10 - tool. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the DuraSeal splice sleeves. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5142 Note: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: * Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. * Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. * Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert to regional wiring gauge size. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the EL-38125-10 - tool in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the splice sleeve crimp tool. The crimp tool has four nests, one for each color. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5143 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs Caution: Do not solder repairs under any circumstances as this could result in the air reference being obstructed. If the heated oxygen sensor pigtail wiring, connector, or terminal is damaged the entire oxygen sensor assembly must be replaced. Do not attempt to repair the wiring, connector, or terminals. In order for the sensor to function properly it must have a clean air reference. This clean air reference is obtained by way of the oxygen sensor signal and heater wires. Any attempt to repair the wires, connectors or terminals could result in the obstruction of the air reference and degrade oxygen sensor performance. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5144 The following guidelines should be used when servicing the heated oxygen sensor: * Do not apply contact cleaner or other materials to the sensor or vehicle harness connectors. These materials may get into the sensor, causing poor performance. Also, the sensor pigtail and harness wires must not be damaged in such a way that the wires inside are exposed. This could provide a path for foreign materials to enter the sensor and cause performance problems. * Neither the sensor nor vehicle lead wires should be bent sharply or kinked. Sharp bends, kinks, etc., could block the reference air path through the lead wire. * Do not remove or defeat the oxygen sensor ground wire (where applicable). Vehicles that utilize the ground wire sensor may rely on this ground as the only ground contact to the sensor. Removal of the ground wire will also cause poor engine performance. * To prevent damage due to water intrusion, be sure that the peripheral seal remains intact on the vehicle harness connector. High Temperature Wiring Repairs High Temperature Wiring Repairs Special Tools * EL-38125-10 - Splice Sleeve Crimping Tool * J 38125-5 - Ultra Torch * DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). High Temperature Wiring Wiring that is exposed to high temperatures, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time may use materials i.e. wires, connectors, and shielding that has a higher heat rating than typical wiring. When making a repair in a high temperature area observe the following: * Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature to replace any damaged wire. * Replace any heat shielding that is removed. * Cover any DuraSeal splice sleeves with SCT1 shrink tubing. * After making a wiring repair, ensure that the location of the wiring is not moved closer to the heat source. Identifying High Temperature Wiring Wiring that is exposed to high temperature, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time need special considerations when making wiring repairs. Areas that may be exposed to higher temperatures can be identified by heat resistant materials that are being used in those areas. These materials may include heat reflective tape, moon tape, and high temperature shrink tubing. Also conduit and other protective coverings may be used. Because conduit or similar coverings are used throughout the vehicle regardless of the temperature, it may be necessary for the technician to determine if an area is exposed to excessive heat before making a wiring repair. Obvious areas of consideration would be any area located near the exhaust manifolds, catalytic converter, and exhaust pipes. Items Required * DuraSeal splice sleeves to crimp and seal connections * High temperature SCT1 shrink tubing to protect the splice sleeves * Terminated leads or pigtails * The correct tools to remove the terminals from the connectors Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature of the same or larger gauge size as the original wire when repair damage wire. Also replace any reflective tape that you remove during the repair. High Temperature Wire Repair Note: Refer to Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Wiring Repairs) in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature rating of the same gauge size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the EL-38125-10 - tool and then encapsulate the splice sleeve using the high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5145 Note: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: * Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. * Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. * Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert to regional wiring gauge size. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Slide a section of high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing down the length of wire to be spliced. Ensure that the shrink tubing will not interfere with the splice procedure. 5. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 6. Use the EL-38125-10 - tool in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the splice sleeve crimp tool. The crimp tool has four nests, one for each color. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5146 7. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 8. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 9. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 10. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 11. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5147 12. Center the high temperature SCT1 shrink tube over the DuraSeal splice sleeve. 13. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the high temperature heat shrink tubing. 14. Gradually move the heat from the center to the open end of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. 15. Replace any reflective tape and clips that may have been remove during the repair. Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation If the wire insulation has been chafed, or broken, enough to show the conductive portion of the wire, and the wire is not damaged, determine the length of insulation that needs to be repaired. If the repair is less than 280 mm (11 in), cut the wire within the damaged area. Than slide the appropriate heat shrink tubing (listed below) over the wire, and repair the wire by splicing the wires together. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves). Once the wire is spliced together slide heat shrink tubing over the damaged area and apply heat to seal the repaired wire. If the wire is damaged, or the damaged area is larger than 280 mm (11 in), than replace the damaged wire by splicing in a new section of wire. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5148 SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs Special Tools * EL-38125-10 - Splice Sleeve Crimping Tool * J 38125-5 - Ultra Torch * DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: * A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. * A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides the necessary low resistance contact integrity for these sensitive, low energy circuits. The Supplemental Inflatable Restraint (SIR) System/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working with the SIR/SRS, and the wiring components, such as connectors and terminals. SIR/SRS Connector Repair (Plastic Body and Terminal Metal Pin) Note: Do not use the terminals in the kit in order to replace damaged SIR/SRS system terminals. Use either an SIR/SRS pigtail or a terminated lead from the SIR Repair Kit Tray. The terminals in the SIR/SRS system are made with a special plating. This plating provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. Pigtail repair packs are available for SIR/SRS connectors with eight or less terminals. Only the connector body is available for connectors with more than eight terminals. Terminated leads can be used to replace damaged terminals when replacing the connector body. SIR/SRS Component Wire Pigtail Repair Note: Do not make wire, connector, or terminal repairs on components with wire pigtails. A wire pigtail is a wire or wires attached directly to the device, not by a connector. If a wiring pigtail is damaged, you must replace the entire component, with pigtail. The inflatable restraint steering wheel module coil is an example of a pigtail component. SIR/SRS Wire Repair Note: Refer to Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Wiring Repairs) in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5149 If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gauge size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and EL-38125-10 - tool. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the DuraSeal splice sleeves. Note: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: * Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. * Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. * Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert to regional wiring gauge size. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the EL-38125-10 - tool in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the splice sleeve crimp tool. The crimp tool has four nests, one for each color. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5150 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Connector Position Assurance (CPA) The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of a connector. CPAs are used in all SIR System connectors and also in some connectors of other systems. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals of a connection. Terminal Position Assurance (TPA) The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5151 Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Special Tools * EL-38125-10 - Splice Sleeve Crimping Tool * J 38125-5 - Ultra Torch * DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Note: Use only DuraSeal splice sleeves. Other splice sleeves may not protect the splice from moisture or provide a good electrical connection. Use DuraSeal splice sleeves to form a one-to-one splice on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. Use DuraSeal splice sleeves where there is special requirements such as moisture sealing. Follow the instructions below in order to splice copper wire using DuraSeal splice sleeves. Note: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: * Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. * Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. * Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert to regional wiring gauge size. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5152 5. Use the EL-38125-10 - tool in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the splice sleeve crimp tool. The crimp tool has four nests, one for each color. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5153 * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Splicing Inline Harness Diodes Splicing Inline Harness Diodes Many vehicle electrical systems use a diode to isolate circuits and protect the components from voltage spikes. When installing a new diode use the following procedure. 1. Open the harness. * If the harness is taped, remove the tape. * To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing seam ripper (available from sewing supply stores) in order to cut open the harness. * If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the diode. 2. If the diode is taped to the harness, remove all of the tape. 3. Check and record the current flow direction and orientation of diode. 4. Remove the inoperative diode from the harness with a suitable soldering tool. Note: If the diode is located next to a connector terminal remove the terminal(s) from the connector to prevent damage from the soldering tool. 5. Carefully strip away a section of insulation next to the old soldered portion of the wire(s). Do not remove any more than is needed to attach the new diode. 6. Check current flow direction of the new diode, being sure to install the diode with correct bias. Reference the appropriate service manual wiring schematic to obtain the correct diode installation position. 7. Attach the new diode to the wire(s) using 60/40 rosin core solder. Before soldering attach some heat sinks (aluminum alligator clips) across the diode wire ends to protect the diode from excessive heat. Follow the manufacturer's instruction for the soldering equipment. 8. Reinstall terminal(s) into the connector body if previously removed. Note: To prevent shorts to ground and water intrusion, completely cover all exposed wire and diode attachment points with tape. 9. Tape the diode to the harness or connector using electrical tape. Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable Twisted/shielded cable is used in order to protect wiring from electrical noise. Two-conductor cable of this construction is used between the radio and the Delco-Bose(R) speaker/amplifier units and other applications where low level, sensitive signals must be carried. Follow the instructions below in order to repair the twisted/shielded cable. 1. Remove the outer jacket (1). Use care not to cut into the drain wire of the mylar tape. 2. Unwrap the tape. Do not remove the tape. Use the tape in order to rewrap the twisted conductors after the splice is made. 3. Prepare the splice. Untwist the conductors and follow the instructions for Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves). Staggering the splices by 65 mm (2.5 in) is recommended. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5154 Note: Apply the mylar tape with the aluminum side inward. This ensures good electrical contact with the drain wire. 4. Re-assemble the cable. * Rewrap the conductors with the mylar tape. If the mylar tape is damaged, use 3M product AL-36FR to replace the damaged mylar tape. * Use caution not to wrap the drain wire in the tape (1). * Follow the splicing instructions for copper wire and splice the drain wire. * Wrap the drain wire around the conductors and tape with electrical tape to replace the outer insulation. 5. Tape over the entire cable. Use a winding motion when you apply the tape. Wiring Repairs Wiring Repairs The Wiring Repairs section contains the following types of wiring repair information. Using these elements together will make wiring repair faster and easier: * Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections) * Flat Wire Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Flat Wire Repairs) * GMLAN Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/GMLAN Wiring Repairs) * High Temperature Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/High Temperature Wiring Repairs) * Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs) * Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves) * Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable) * Splicing Inline Harness Diodes (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Inline Harness Diodes) * SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs) US English/Metric Conversion US English/Metric Conversion Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5155 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5156 Basic Digital Multimeter Requirements Basic Digital Multimeter Requirements Digital Multimeter (DMM) Basic Requirements Service information is validated using digital multimeters that meet or exceed the following requirements. Using a multimeter that does not meet these basic requirements may give inaccurate readings which could lead to an incorrect diagnosis. Display and Settings 1. Four digits displayed 2. Voltage, amperage, resistance, frequency, diode test settings, and min-max function 3. Display positive and negative values Voltage 1. Have at least 10 Mohm input impedance 2. Test a DC voltage range of 0.1-1000 V. 3. Test an AC voltage range of 0.1-1000 V. Amperage 1. Test a DC amperage range of 0.1µA-10 A. 2. Test an AC amperage range of 0.1µA-10 A. Resistance Test a resistance range of 0.1 ohm-40 Mohm and displays infinite for a value greater than 40 Mohm (O.L. (Over-load)) Frequency Test for a frequency range of 0.5 HZ-199 K HZ Diode Test 1. Apply at least 1 mA when performing the diode bias test 2. Display the break over voltage drop (0-3 V) of a forward biased diode 3. Display infinite (O.L. (Over-load)) when a diode is reverse biased Min-Max Readings 1. Can update at a 1 ms sample rate 2. Saves and displays minimum and maximum values Testing Ground and Low Reference Circuits Testing Ground and Low Reference Circuits Because a test lamp can light with up to 200 ohm in a ground or low reference circuit they are not recommended to be used for this type of test. A low impedance test lamp can light and indicate the circuit is good when there is as much as 20-30 ohm present, while a high impedance test lamp can light with up to 200 ohm present in the circuit. This is why the Digital Multi-Meter (DMM) is used when validating a ground or low reference circuit continuity. When using the DMM there are many vehicle conditions that can affect the ground and low reference continuity testing. If these conditions are not met, a ground or low reference circuit test can fail on a good circuit. This may cause longer diagnosis time and incorrect component replacement. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5157 Any current flow through a ground or low reference circuit, while being tested, will skew the DMM continuity reading, or display a reading higher than when there is no current flowing. Performing a ground or low reference circuit continuity test, in reference to the vehicles battery negative terminal, will have the highest risk of failing a good ground or low reference circuit test than any other ground reference point. The best ground test points would be a control module housing (if the control modules housing is metal and grounded), door jamb striker (if attached to metal), under dash metal frame work, engine block, or body ground studs (other than where the negative battery cable is attached). A typical DMM ground or low reference circuit continuity reading can be as high as 100 ohm with the ignition ON, and drop to 15-25 ohm after the ignition is turned OFF. The reading will drop below 10 ohm after 30-40 seconds, then below 5 ohm after 60 seconds. Once the vehicle completely goes to sleep (generally 3-10 minutes) the reading will drop below 0.3 ohm. The following list of conditions may need to be met to ensure a valid continuity reading on a ground or low reference circuit: * Ignition OFF * Key out of the ignition switch (when not equipped with keyless entry and remote start) * Retained Accessory Power (RAP) OFF (open and close the driver door after ignition OFF) * Battery charger set at a 2 A or less charge rate * Scan tool not communicating with any vehicle control module (in some cases it may need to be disconnected from the DLC) * All entry doors closed * Headlamps OFF (auto headlamps disabled) * Any delay lighting OFF * HVAC after blow OFF * Any accessory that can work when the ignition is OFF * Wait up to 60 seconds (after all other listed conditions are met) Activating the DOOR LOCK function with a key fob can greatly reduce the time to achieve a valid ground or low reference continuity test result. Terminal Wiring Repair Terminal Wiring Repair Special Tools * EL-38125-10 - Splice Sleeve Crimp Tool * EL-38125-580 - Terminal Release Tool Kit * J-38125-5 - Ultra Torch * EL-35616 - Connector Test Adapter Kit For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Note: All repairs near the engine manifold, turbo engine and all exhaust pipes should follow the High Temperature Wiring Repair procedures. 1. Find the appropriate connector end view within the connector end view section. The connector end view has the following information: * Diagnostic probe tool * Terminal release tool * Terminal/terminated lead part numbers 2. Determine if a terminal is damaged. Note: Not using the proper test kit probe may cause damage to the terminal(s) that are probed. * Locate the diagnostic probe tool from the connector end view. The connector end view describes the color and part number to help the technician find and use the correct tool. * Connect the probe tool to the Digital Multimeter. * Insert the probe tool into the cavity and follow the procedures from the Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter). 3. Disconnect the connector body to perform the repair. Note: Several procedures for specific connector bodies are called out in Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Wiring Repairs). Use the following repair procedures to repair the following terminals: Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5158 Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack))Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Push to Seat))Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Pull to Seat))Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W))Delphi Connectors (Micro.64) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Micro .64) )Delphi Connectors (12-Way) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (12-Way))Delphi Connectors (Steering Gear) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Steering Gear)) * The TPA and CPA should be removed before releasing the terminal for the connector body. * Look at the connector end view to locate the cavity of the damaged terminal and find the proper terminal release tool from the terminal release tool kit. Note: Using the incorrect terminal release tool can damage the connector body. * Insert the terminal release tool into the cavity. Note: Some terminals have a lever that must be disengaged before the terminal can be released. Gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Terminated Lead Repair Terminated Lead Repair Special Tools * EL-38125-10 - Splice Sleeve Crimp Tool * EL-38125-580 - Terminal Release Tool Kit * J-38125-5 - Ultra Torch * EL-35616 - Connector Test Adapter Kit For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Note: All repairs near the engine manifold, turbo engine and all exhaust pipes should follow the High Temperature Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/High Temperature Wiring Repairs) procedures. Terminated leads are terminals that are crimped onto wires. The terminated lead can be used throughout the vehicle since it is designed for temperatures up to 150°C. The length of the wire is 450 mm. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5159 The DuraSeal splice sleeve has the following 2 critical features: * A special heat shrink tubing that environmentally seals the splice. The shrink tubing contains a sealing adhesive inside the shrink tubing. * A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp that provides the necessary contact integrity for sensitive low energy circuits. 1. Use the connector end view to identify the correct terminated lead. 2. The terminated lead package should include a DuraSeal splice sleeve. If not, use the chart to identify the correct part. 3. Open the harness by removing any tape: Use a sewing seam ripper, or a comparable tool, to cut open the harness, to avoid wire insulation damage. 4. Depending on how many terminals need repairs, cut the terminal and wire back at least 40 mm. Try to keep the harness wire length the same. If more than one terminated lead is required, stagger the lengths by 40 mm. This helps reduce the bundle size of the wire harness. 5. Use the EL-38125-10 - tool in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the splice sleeve crimp tool. The crimp tool has four nests, one for each color. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5160 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the J-38125-5 - ultra torch , apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5161 Shift Solenoid: Exploded Views Disassembled Views Disassembled Views Case and Associated Parts 1 - Control Valve Body Cover Bolt 2 - Control Valve Body Cover Assembly 3 - Control Valve Body Cover Gasket 4 - Control Valve Body Bolt 5 - Control Valve Body Cover Hole Seal 6 - Control Solenoid Valve Heat Sink Bolt 7 - Control Solenoid (w/Body and TCM) Valve Assembly 8 - Control Valve Body Filter Plate Assembly 9 - Control Valve Body Bolt 10 - Control Valve Body Bolt 11 Control Valve Body Assembly 12 - Control Valve Body Spacer Plate Assembly 13 - A/Trans Fluid Level Control Valve 14 - A/Trans Fluid Level Control Valve Gasket 15 - A/Trans Output Speed Sensor Bolt Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5162 16 - A/Trans Output Speed Sensor Assembly 17 - Manual Shaft Detent Spring Bolt 18 - Manual Shaft Detent Lever Spring Assembly 19 - A/Trans Input Speed Sensor Assembly 20 - A/Trans Input Speed Sensor Assembly O-Ring Seal 21 - A/Trans Input Speed Sensor Bolt 22 - Fill Cap 23 - Fill Cap Seal 24 - Torque Converter Housing Gasket 25 - A/Trans Fluid Pump Seal Assembly 26 Torque Converter with Fluid Pump Housing Assembly 27 - Torque Converter and Differential Housing Bolt 28 - A/Trans Fluid Fill Tube Plug Assembly 29 - Torque Converter Assembly Control Valve Body Assembly (1 of 2) 400 - Control Valve Body Bolt 401 - Control Solenoid Valve Support 402 - Valve Channel Plate 403 - Channel Plate to Valve Body Spacer Plate Assembly 404 - Control Valve Body Ball Check Valve 405 - Control Valve Body Assembly Component Location Component Location Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5163 1 - Reaction Carrier Assembly 2 - Control Valve Body Assembly 3 - Input Carrier Assembly 4 Valve Channel Plate 5 - Output Carrier Assembly 6 - Park Gear 7 - Control Solenoid (w/Body and TCM) Valve Assembly 8 - Drive Link Assembly 9 - Drive Sprocket 10 - Torque Converter Assembly 11 - A/Trans Fluid Pump Assembly 12 - Differential Carrier Assembly 13 - Front Differential Ring Gear 14 - Driven Sprocket 15 - 1-2-3-4 Clutch Assembly 16 - Low and Reverse Clutch Assembly 17 - 2-6 Clutch Assembly 18 - 3-5 Reverse Clutch Assembly 19 - 4-5-6 Clutch Assembly 20 A/Trans Input Speed Sensor Assembly 21 - Reaction Sun Gear Assembly Component Location Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5164 Component Location Component Locations 1 - Manual Shift Detent Lever Assembly (w/Shaft Position Switch) 2 - Trans Fluid Level Indicator 3 Reaction Carrier Assembly 4 - Output Speed Sensor 5 - Input Carrier Assembly 6 - Output Carrier Assembly 7 - Front Differential Transfer Drive Gear 8 - Front Differential Transfer Drive Gear Support Assembly 9 - Torque Converter Assembly 10 - Park Pawl Actuator Assembly 11 - Fluid Pump Drive Link Assembly 12 - Park Pawl 13 - Front Differential Transfer Driven Gear 14 - Front Differential Drive Pinion Gear 15 - Park Gear 16 - Torque Converter and Support and Fluid Pump Housing Assembly 17 - Front Differential Carrier Assembly 18 - Front Differential Carrier Baffle 19 Front Differential Ring Gear Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5165 20 - Front Differential Drive Pinion Gear Lube Tube 21 - 1-2-3-4 Clutch Assembly 22 - Low and Reverse Clutch Assembly (OWC) 23 - Low and Reverse Clutch 24 - 2-6 Clutch Assembly 25 3-5-Reverse Clutch Assembly 26 - 4-5-6 Clutch Assembly 27 - Input Speed Sensor 28 - Case Cover Assembly 29 - Control Valve Body Cover 30 - Input Shaft Speed Sensor Reluctor Wheel 31 Control Valve Lower Body Assembly 32 - Control Valve Upper Body Assembly 33 - Control Valve Channel Plate Assembly 34 - Control Solenoid Valve Assembly (w/Body and TCM) 35 - Manual Valve Disassembled Views Disassembled Views Case and Associated Parts Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5166 1 - Control Valve Body Cover Assembly 2 - Transmission Fluid Level Indicator Assembly 3 - Fluid Level Indicator Tube - Model Dependent 4 - Fluid Level Indicator Tube Seal - Model Dependent 5 - Control Valve Body Cover Assembly Gasket 6 - Control Valve Body Cover Stud 7 - Control Valve Body Cover Bolt 8 - Control Valve Body Bolt 9 - Control Valve Body Bolt 10 - Control Valve Body Cover Wiring Connector Hole Seal 11 - Control Solenoid Valve Spring 12 - Control Valve Body Bolt 13 - Control Valve Body Bolt 14 - Control Valve Body Bolt 15 - Control Solenoid (w/Body and TCM) Valve Assembly 16 - Control Solenoid (w/Body and TCM) Filter Plate Assembly 17 - Manual Shaft Detent Assembly 18 - Control Valve Body Assembly 19 - A/Trans Output Speed Sensor Assembly 20 - A/Trans Output Speed Sensor Bolt 21 - A/Trans Case Assembly 22 - Torque Converter Housing Outer Seal 23 - Front Differential Drive Pinion (w/Transfer Gear) Gear Assembly 24 Front Differential Drive Pinion Gear Lube Tube 25 - Torque Converter and Support and A/Trans Fluid Pump Housing Assembly 26 - Torque Converter and Differential Housing Bolt 27 - Torque Converter Assembly 28 - Dust Cover Push Pin - Model Dependent 29 - Dust Cover Bolt - Model Dependent 30 - Dust Cover - Model Dependent 31 - Front Differential Carrier Assembly 32 - Input Shaft Thrust Bearing Assembly 33 - A/Trans Case Cover Gasket 34 - A/Trans Case Cover Assembly 35 - A/Trans Case Cover Assembly Bolt Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5167 Shift Solenoid: Connector Views Q8 Control Solenoid Valve Assembly X1 (MH7 or MHC) Q8 Control Solenoid Valve Assembly X1 (MH2 or MH4) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5168 Q8 Control Solenoid Valve Assembly X2 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5169 Q8 Control Solenoid Valve Assembly X3 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5170 Q8 Control Solenoid Valve Assembly X4 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5171 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 Automatic Transmission Shift Solenoid: Service and Repair 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission Control Solenoid Valve and Transmission Control Module Assembly Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the transmission control valve body cover. Refer to Control Valve Body Cover Replacement (See: Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Valve Body/Service and Repair/6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission/Control Valve Body Cover Replacement). 2. Disconnect the input speed sensor electrical connector (1). 3. Disconnect the output speed sensor electrical connector (2). 4. Disconnect the shift position switch electrical connector (3). 5. Remove the 3 control valve body bolts (1) M5 x 40.5. 6. Remove the 12 control valve body bolts (2) M6 x 97. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 Automatic Transmission > Page 5174 7. Remove the control solenoid valve assembly (3) with transmission control module. Caution: Use care when removing or installing the filter plate assembly. A broken or missing retaining tab may not adequately secure the filter plate to the control solenoid valve assembly, resulting in possible damage or contamination. 8. Remove the control solenoid valve assembly filter plate (4). Discard the filter plate. It is not reusable. 9. Inspect the channel plate bolt pass through holes for damage or brinelling. Any damage will cause incorrect pressure switch operation. Replace as necessary. Installation Procedure Caution: Use care when removing or installing the filter plate assembly. A broken or missing retaining tab may not adequately secure the filter plate to the control solenoid valve assembly, resulting in possible damage or contamination. 1. Install a NEW control solenoid valve assembly filter plate (4) to prevent fluid leaks past the fluid seals. 2. Install the control solenoid valve assembly (3) with transmission control module. 3. Hand start the control valve body bolts (1, 2). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 Automatic Transmission > Page 5175 Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener Caution). 4. Secure the 12 control valve body bolts (2) M6 x 97 and tighten in sequence to 10 Nm (89 lb in). 5. Secure the 3 control valve body bolts (1) M5 x 40.5 and tighten in sequence to 8 Nm (71 lb in). 6. Connect the input speed sensor electrical connector (1). 7. Connect the output speed sensor electrical connector (2). 8. Connect the shift position switch electrical connector (3). 9. Install the transmission control valve body cover. Refer to Control Valve Body Cover Replacement (See: Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Valve Body/Service and Repair/6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission/Control Valve Body Cover Replacement). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 Automatic Transmission > Page 5176 Shift Solenoid: Service and Repair 6T70/6T75 - Automatic Transmission Control Solenoid Valve and Transmission Control Module Assembly Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the control valve body cover. Refer to Control Valve Body Cover Replacement (See: Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Valve Body/Service and Repair/6T70/6T75 - Automatic Transmission/Control Valve Body Cover Replacement). 2. Disconnect the input speed sensor electrical connector (1). 3. Disconnect the output speed sensor electrical connector (2). 4. Disconnect the shift position switch electrical connector (3). 5. Remove the 4 control valve body bolts (1) M6 x 80. 6. Position the control solenoid valve spring (8) to the side. Spring will be released with the removal of the control valve body assembly. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 Automatic Transmission > Page 5177 7. Remove the 2 control valve body bolts (4) M6 x 65. 8. Remove the control valve body bolt (3) M6 x 42. 9. Remove the 3 control valve body bolts (2) M6 x 95. 10. Remove the control valve body bolt (7) M6 x 55. 11. Remove the control solenoid valve body and transmission control module (TCM) assembly (5). Caution: Use care when removing or installing the filter plate assembly. A broken or missing retaining tab may not adequately secure the filter plate to the control solenoid valve assembly, resulting in possible damage or contamination. 12. Remove the control solenoid valve assembly filter plate (6). * Discard the filler plate. It is not reusable. * Inspect the pressure switch manifold seals for damage or contamination. Replace the control solenoid valve assembly as necessary. * Inspect the upper channel plate bolt holes for damage, peening or burnelling. Any damage around the bolt holes near the pressure control switch (PCS) feed holes could cause leakage around the PCS seals. Replace the upper channel plate as necessary. Installation Procedure Caution: Use care when removing or installing the filter plate assembly. A broken or missing retaining tab may not adequately secure the filter plate to the control solenoid valve assembly, resulting in possible damage or contamination. 1. Install a NEW control solenoid valve assembly filter plate (1). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 Automatic Transmission > Page 5178 2. Install the control solenoid valve body and TCM assembly (5). 3. Rotate the control solenoid valve spring (7) into position. Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener Caution). Note: Install all bolts before tightening, then tighten in specified sequence. 4. Install the 4 control valve body bolts (1) M6 x 80. 5. Install the control valve body bolt (6) M6 x 55. 6. Install the 3 control valve body bolts (2) M6 x 95. 7. Install the control valve body bolt (3) M6 x 42. 8. Install the 2 control valve body bolts (4) M6 x 65 and tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb in). 9. Connect the input speed sensor electrical connector (1). 10. Connect the output speed sensor electrical connector (2). 11. Connect the shift position switch electrical connector (3). 12. Install the control valve body cover. Refer to Control Valve Body Cover Replacement (See: Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Valve Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 Automatic Transmission > Page 5179 Body/Service and Repair/6T70/6T75 - Automatic Transmission/Control Valve Body Cover Replacement). 13. For transmission control module programming and setup. Refer to Control Module References (See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning). Note: After an internal transmission repair or internal part replacement the service fast learn adapt procedure should be performed. 14. Perform the transmission adaptive values learn procedure. Refer to Transmission Adaptive Values Learn (See: Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/6T30/6T40/6T45 Automatic Transmission). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid: Diagram Information and Instructions Electrical Schematic Symbols Electrical Schematic Symbols Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5184 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5185 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5186 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5187 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5188 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5189 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5190 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5191 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5192 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5193 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5194 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5195 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5196 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5197 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5198 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5199 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5200 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5201 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5202 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5203 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5204 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5205 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5206 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5207 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5208 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5209 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5210 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5211 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5212 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5213 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5214 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5215 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5216 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5217 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5218 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5219 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5220 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5221 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5222 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5223 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5224 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5225 General Electrical Diagnosis General Electrical Diagnosis Basic Knowledge Required Without a basic knowledge of electricity, it will be difficult to use the diagnostic procedures contained in the service manual. You should understand the basic theory of electricity, and know the meaning of voltage (V), current (A), and resistance (Ohms ). You should also be able to read and understand a wiring diagram, as well as understand what happens in a circuit with an open or a shorted wire. Vehicle Zoning Strategy Vehicle Zoning Strategy All grounds, in-line connectors, and splices have identifying numbers that correspond to where they are located in the vehicle. The following table explains the numbering system. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5226 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5227 Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid: Diagnostic Aids Arrows and Symbols Arrows and Symbols This service manual uses various symbols in order to describe different service operations. 1 - Front of Vehicle 2 - View Detail 2 - View Detail 3 - Ambient Air Mixed with Another Gas or Indicate Temperature Change 4 - Motion or Direction 5 - View Angle 6 - Dimension (1:2) 7 Ambient/Clean Air Flow or Cool Air Flow 8 - Lubrication Point - Oil or Fluid 9 - Task Related 10 Sectioning (1:3) 11 - Gas Other Than Ambient Air or Hot Air Flow 12 - Lubrication Point - Grease or Jelly 13 - Multidirectional Arrow Decimal and Metric Equivalents Decimal and Metric Equivalents Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5228 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5229 Checking Aftermarket Accessories Checking Aftermarket Accessories Warning: Refer to SIR Warning (See: Restraint Systems/Service Precautions/SIR Warning). Caution: The OBD II symbol is used on the circuit diagrams in order to alert the technician that the circuit is essential for proper OBD II emission control circuit operation. Any circuit which fails and causes the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) to turn ON, or causes emissions-related component damage, is identified as an OBD II circuit. Do not connect aftermarket accessories into the following circuits: * SIR circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the SIR symbol. * OBD II circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the OBD II symbol. Always check for aftermarket accessories (non-OEM) as the first step in diagnosing electrical problems. If the vehicle is so equipped, disconnect the system to verify that these add-on accessories are not the cause of the problems. Possible causes of vehicle problems related to aftermarket accessories include: * Power feeds connected to points other than the battery * Antenna location * Transceiver wiring located too close to vehicle electronic modules or wiring * Poor shielding or poor connectors on antenna feed line * Check for recent service bulletins detailing installation guidelines for aftermarket accessories. Circuit Testing Circuit Testing The Circuit Testing section contains the following diagnostic testing information. Using this information along with the diagnostic procedures will identify the cause of the electrical malfunction. * Using Connector Test Adapters (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Using Connector Test Adapters) * Probing Electrical Connectors (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Probing Electrical Connectors) * Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5230 Procedures/Circuit Testing/Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter) * Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp) * Using Fused Jumper Wires (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Using Fused Jumper Wires) * Measuring Voltage (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Measuring Voltage) * Measuring Voltage Drop (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Measuring Voltage Drop) * Measuring Frequency (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Measuring Frequency) * Testing Ground and Low Reference Circuits (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Testing Ground and Low Reference Circuits) * Testing for Continuity (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Continuity) * Testing for Short to Ground (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Short to Ground) * Testing for a Short to Voltage (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for a Short to Voltage) * Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections) * Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions) * Testing for Electrical Intermittents (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Electrical Intermittents) * Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure) * Circuit Protection - Fuses (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Circuit Protection - Fuses) * Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers) * Circuit Protection - Fusible Links (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Circuit Protection - Fusible Links) Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp Special Tools EL-35616-200 - Test Light - Probe Kit For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test Probe Caution). A test lamp can simply and quickly test a low impedance circuit for voltage. A Digital Multimeter (DMM) should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present if the impedance is low enough, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. In other words, if there is not enough current, the test lamp will not illuminate even though voltage is present. The EL-35616-200 - kit is Micro-Pack compatible and comprised of a 12-volt light bulb with an attached pair of leads. To properly operate this tool use the following procedures. When testing for voltage: 1. Attach one lead to ground. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is voltage at the point being tested. When testing for ground: 1. Attach one lead to battery positive voltage. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where ground should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is ground at the point being tested. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5231 Testing for a Short to Voltage Testing for a Short to Voltage Special Tools EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM) For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test Probe Caution). The following procedure tests for a short to voltage in a circuit. 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Set the rotary dial of the Digital Multimeter (DMM) to the V (DC) position. 4. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. Turn ON the ignition and operate all accessories. 7. If the voltage measured is greater than 1 V, there is a short to voltage in the circuit. Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions Special Tools J-25070 - Heat Gun For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Many intermittent open or shorted circuits are affected by harness/connector movement that is caused by vibration, engine torque, bumps/rough pavement, etc. In order to duplicate the customer's concern, it may be necessary to manipulate the wiring harness if the malfunction appears to be vibration related. Manipulation of a circuit can consist of a wide variety of actions, including: * Wiggling the harness * Disconnecting a connector and reconnecting * Stressing the mechanical connection of a connector * Pulling on the harness or wire in order to identify a separation/break inside the insulation * Relocating a harness or wires All these actions should be performed with some goal in mind. For instance, with a scan tool connected, wiggling the wires may uncover a faulty input to the control module. The snapshot option would be appropriate here. Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure). Another option is, with the component commanded ON and OFF by the scan tool, move related connectors and wiring and observe the component operation. With the engine running, move related connectors and wiring while monitoring engine operation. If harness or connector movement affects the data displayed, component/system operation, or engine operation, inspect and repair the harness/connections as necessary. You may need to load the vehicle in order to duplicate the concern. This may require the use of weights, floor jacks, jackstands, frame machines, etc. In these cases you are attempting to duplicate the concern by manipulating the suspension or frame. This method is useful in finding harnesses that are too short and their connectors pull apart enough to cause a poor connection. A DMM set to Peak Min/Max mode and connected to the suspect circuit while testing can yield desirable results. Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Electrical Intermittents). Certainly, using the senses of sight, smell, and hearing while manipulating the circuit can provide good results as well. There may be instances where circuit manipulation alone will not meet the required criteria for the fault condition to appear. In such cases it may be necessary to expose the suspect circuit to other conditions while manipulating the harness. Such conditions would include high moisture conditions, along with exceptionally high or low temperatures. The following discusses how to expose the circuit to these kinds of conditions. Salt Water Spray Some compounds possess the ability to conduct electricity when dissolved in water such as ordinary salt. By mixing table salt with water in sufficient Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5232 quantities, you can enhance the conductive properties of water so that any circuit which may be sensitive to moisture will more readily fail when liberally sprayed with this mixture. Mixing 0.35L (12 oz) of water with approximately 1 tablespoon of salt will yield a salt solution of 5 percent. Fill a normal spray bottle with this mixture. This mixture is sufficient to enhance the water's own conductivity. This may cause the circuit to fail more easily when sprayed. Once the mixture is completed, spray the suspect area liberally with the solution. Then, while monitoring either a scan tool or DMM, manipulate the harness as discussed previously. High Temperature Conditions If the complaint tends to be heat related, you can simulate the condition using the J-25070 - heat gun. Using the heat gun, you can heat up the suspected area or component. Manipulate the harnesses under high temperature conditions while monitoring the scan tool or DMM to locate the fault condition. The high temperature condition may be achieved simply by test driving the vehicle at normal operating temperature. If a heat gun is unavailable, consider this option to enhance your diagnosis. This option does not allow for the same control, however. Low Temperature Conditions Depending on the nature of the fault condition, placing a fan in front of the vehicle while the vehicle is in the shade can have the desired effect. If this is unsuccessful, use local cooling treatments such as ice or a venturi type nozzle (one that provides hot or cold air). This type of tool is capable of producing air stream temperatures down to -18°C (0°F) from one end and +71°C (160°F) from the other. This is ideally suited for localized cooling needs. Once the vehicle, component, or harness has been sufficiently cooled, manipulate the harness or components in an effort to duplicate the concern. Duplicating Failure Conditions * If none of the previous tests are successful, attempt to duplicate and/or capture the failure conditions. * Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, where applicable, contains the conditions that were present when the DTC set. 1. Review and record Freeze Frame/Failure Records data. 2. Clear the DTCs using the scan tool. 3. Turn the key to OFF and wait 15 seconds. 4. Operate the vehicle under the same conditions that were noted in Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, as closely as possible. The vehicle must also be operating within the Conditions for Running the DTC. Refer to Conditions for Running the DTC in the supporting text if a DTC is being diagnosed. 5. Monitor DTC Status for the DTC being tested. The scan tool will indicate Ran, when the enabling conditions have been satisfied long enough for the DTC to run. The scan tool will also indicate whether the DTC passed or failed. * An alternate method is to drive the vehicle with the DMM connected to a suspected circuit. An abnormal reading on the DMM when the concern occurs, may help you locate the concern. Measuring Frequency Measuring Frequency Special Tools EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM) For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test Probe Caution). The following procedure determines the frequency of a signal. Note: Connecting the Digital Multimeter (DMM) to the circuit before pressing the Hz button will allow the DMM to autorange to an appropriate range. 1. Apply power to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (AC) position. 3. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5233 5. Press the Hz button on the DMM. 6. The DMM will display the frequency measured. Measuring Voltage Measuring Voltage Special Tools EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM) For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test Probe Caution). The following procedure measures the voltage at a selected point in a circuit. 1. Disconnect the electrical harness connector for the circuit being tested, if necessary. 2. Enable the circuit and/or system being tested. Use the following methods: * Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. * Turn ON the engine. * Turn ON the circuit and/or system with a scan tool in Output Controls. * Turn ON the switch for the circuit and/or system being tested. 3. Select the V (AC) or V (DC) position on the Digital Multimeter (DMM). 4. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the point of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. The DMM displays the voltage measured at that point. Measuring Voltage Drop Measuring Voltage Drop Special Tools EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM) For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test Probe Caution). The following procedure determines the difference in voltage potential between 2 points. 1. Set the rotary dial of the Digital Multimeter (DMM) to the V (DC) position. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5234 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to one point of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to the other point of the circuit. 4. Operate the circuit. 5. The DMM displays the difference in voltage between the 2 points. Probing Electrical Connectors Probing Electrical Connectors Note: Always be sure to reinstall the connector position assurance (CPA) and terminal position assurance (TPA) when reconnecting connectors or replacing terminals. Front probe Disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the mating side (front) of the connector. Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test Probe Caution). Note: When probing female 0.64 terminals, it is important to use the correct adapter. There have been some revisions to the test adapter for 0.64 terminals. The proper adapter for 0.64 terminals is the EL-35616-64B which has a gold terminal and a black wire between the base and tip. Failure to use the proper test adapter may result in damage to the terminal being tested and improper diagnosis. Note: The proper adapter for probing the terminals for fuses, relays, or diodes in an electrical center is EL-35616-35. Using any other tool or adapter may damage the terminal being tested. Refer to the following table as a guide in selecting the correct test adapter for front probing connectors: Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5235 Backprobe Note: * Backprobe connector terminals only when specifically required in diagnostic procedures. * Do not backprobe a sealed (Weather Pack(R)) connector, less than a 280 series Metri-Pack connector, a Micro-Pack connector, or a flat wire (dock and lock) connector. * Backprobing can be a source of damage to connector terminals. Use care in order to avoid deforming the terminal, either by forcing the test probe too far into the cavity or by using too large of a test probe. * After backprobing any connector, inspect for terminal damage. If terminal damage is suspected, test for proper terminal contact. Do not disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the harness side (back) of the connector. Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure Using Snapshots in Global Diagnostic System (GDS) Overview Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5236 A snapshot is a recording of what a control module on the vehicle was receiving for information while the snapshot is being made. A snapshot may be used to analyze the data during the time a vehicle condition is current. This allows you to concentrate on making the condition occur, rather than trying to view all the data in anticipation of the fault. To record a snapshot in GDS, select, Record Snapshot, from the options at the top right portion of any of the various pages that allow snapshots to be taken (e.g. Data Display, Control Functions, etc.). When you are finished recording, select, Stop Snapshot recording. The snapshot will now be available for replay. Snapshot Replay The Snapshot Replay function allows reviews of previously recorded vehicle snapshot data. This information can be used in analysis of vehicle problems and detection of trigger error conditions. The graph function can be used to compare parameters to see if a component is functioning properly. Recorded snapshots can be selected for viewing by the following three methods: * Selecting a snapshot file from the Vehicle Home Page and clicking on the Review selection. * Double clicking on the selected snapshot from the Vehicle Home Page. * Entering the Tools selection from the Menu selection and selecting Snapshot replay. Next, open the Snapshot Manager. Double click on the snapshot file you wish to view or click on the Load Snapshot selection and select a snapshot file. Regardless of selection method, a File Loaded pop-up window will be displayed from the Snapshot Replay screen. Select OK from the pop-up window. Snapshot Play Functions There are several snapshot play functions that are used to replay recorded snapshots * The Play function is used to play the snapshot forward by clicking on this selection. A marker will move across the screen when this selection is used. All selections in this area turn grey when they are active. * The Pause function is used to pause play of the snapshot. When this selection is clicked a second time the snapshot will start playing where it left off. * The Stop function is used to stop playing the snapshot. The snapshot will start from the beginning, if Play is selected after using the Stop function. Time Control Time control is used to control the snapshot replay. This function allows selection of a specific time frame, display of different views, and control of display speed. The following functions can be selected directly under Time Control. * The Bookmark selection allows you to add a specific comment in the current display and return to this point in the future. When this option is selected, a pop-up window is displayed. Enter a bookmark name and select OK. * The Note Pad can be selected to add comments to the snapshot replay file at the current point of time. When this option is selected, a pop-up window is displayed. Enter a comment for the snapshot file and select OK. * The Load Snapshot (blue folder) opens a snapshot file and makes it ready for further analysis. This function is also available by clicking on an available snapshot file from the Snapshot Manager. * The Down Arrow displays all Time Control options when selected. Individual options can also be selected by clicking on the item you want. * The Snapshot Display Speed can be controlled by selecting this option. Slow speeds of 1/8X, 1/4X, and 1/2X can be selected. The real time speed can also be selected at 1. Faster speeds of 2X, 4X, and 8X can also be obtained by using this selection. View Selections Each View Selection provides a different way of displaying vehicle data for analysis. The following functions can be selected under Available Views: Note: The parameter name will be shown in the original language used for capture if no translation is available for the name. * Parameter List View - Displays incoming information from the snapshot file. The current value of the parameters is displayed on the screen. * Log View - Contains all the information from the snapshot file. All parameter values are listed in the order they were recorded. Specific parameters can be added or removed from a watchlist by clicking on the appropriate item. * State View - Shows the values of all parameters in a specific time frame. These values can be used for comparison with the trigger view. * Trigger View - Displays all system and user defined triggers. This function can be used when there is a combination of factors involved in a diagnostic problem. When a Trigger condition is met a caution triangle will be displayed on the screen. Triggers: * Load Triggers - Allows you to load a file containing trigger definitions. * Save Triggers - Allows you to save the trigger to your computer's hard drive. * Remove Trigger - Allows you to remove the current trigger. It will no longer be present. * Edit Trigger - Displays a pop-up window where you can modify the limits and parameters contained within a trigger. * Adds Trigger - Displays a pop-up window to configure a trigger. * DTC View - After the Play function is selected and this option is selected this function opens the list of recorded DTCs. * Line Graph View - Displays data that can be visualized against the time-axis. From this view, specific parameters can be selected for graphing by Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5237 checking the box under Selected. At the bottom of the graph there are four functions Zoom In (increase size), Zoom Out (decrease size), Bookmarks, and Pause Scrolling. Each of these functions can be accessed by clicking on them. Testing for Continuity Testing for Continuity Special Tools EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM) For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test Probe Caution). The following procedures verify good continuity in a circuit. With a Digital Multimeter (DMM) 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the Ohms position. 2. Disconnect the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 3. Disconnect the load. 4. Press the MIN MAX button on the DMM. 5. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 6. Connect the other lead of the DMM to the other end of the circuit. 7. If the DMM displays low or no resistance, the circuit has good continuity. With a Test Lamp Note: Only use the test lamp procedure on low impedance power and ground circuits. 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect one lead of the test lamp to one end of the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 5. Connect the other end of the circuit to ground. 6. If the test lamp illuminates (full intensity), then the circuit has good continuity. Testing for Electrical Intermittents Testing for Electrical Intermittents Special Tools EL-39200 Digital Multimeter For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Perform the following procedures while wiggling the harness from side to side. Continue this at convenient points (about 6 inches apart) while watching the test equipment. * Testing for Short to Ground (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Short to Ground) * Testing for Continuity (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Continuity) * Testing for a Short to Voltage (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for a Short to Voltage) If the fault is not identified, perform the procedure below using the MIN MAX feature on the EL-39200 DMM. This feature allows you to manipulate the circuit without having to watch the EL-39200. The EL-39200 will generate an audible tone when a change is detected. Note: The EL-39200 must be used in order to perform the following procedure since the EL-39200 can monitor current, resistance or voltage while recording the minimum (MIN), and maximum (MAX) values measured. 1. Connect the EL-39200 to both sides of a suspected connector (still connected), or from one end of a suspected circuit to the other. Refer to Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5238 Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter) for information on connecting the EL-39200 to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the EL-39200 to the V (AC) or V (DC) position. 3. Press the range button of the EL-39200 in order to select the desired voltage range. 4. Press the MIN MAX button of the EL-39200. The EL-39200 displays 100 ms RECORD and emits an audible tone (beep). Note: The 100 ms RECORD mode is the length of time an input must stay at a new value in order to record the full change. 5. Simulate the condition that is potentially causing the intermittent connection, either by wiggling the connections or the wiring, test driving, or performing other operations. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions). 6. Listen for the audible Min Max Alert which indicates that a new minimum or maximum value has been recorded. 7. Press the MIN MAX button once in order to display the MAX value and note the value. 8. Press the MIN MAX button again in order to display the MIN value and note the value. 9. Determine the difference between the MIN and MAX values. * If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is 1 V or greater an intermittent open or high resistance condition exists. Repair the condition as necessary. * If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is less than 1 V, an intermittent open or high resistance condition does not exist. Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections Special Tools EL-35616 Terminal Test Probe Kit For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). When the condition is not currently present, but is indicated in DTC history, the cause may be intermittent. An intermittent may also be the cause when there is a customer complaint, but the symptom cannot be duplicated. Refer to the Symptom Table of the system that is suspect of causing the condition before trying to locate an intermittent condition. Most intermittent conditions are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. Inspect for the following items: * Wiring broken inside the insulation * Poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector * Poor terminal to wire connection-Some conditions which fall under this description are poor crimps, poor solder joints, crimping over the wire insulation rather than the wire itself, and corrosion in the wire to terminal contact area, etc. * Pierced or damaged insulation can allow moisture to enter the wiring causing corrosion. The conductor can corrode inside the insulation, with little visible evidence. Look for swollen and stiff sections of wire in the suspect circuits. * Wiring which has been pinched, cut, or its insulation rubbed through may cause an intermittent open or short as the bare area touches other wiring or parts of the vehicle. * Wiring that comes in contact with hot or exhaust components * Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions) in order to duplicate the conditions required, in order to verify the customer concern. * Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Electrical Intermittents) for test procedures to detect intermittent open, high resistance, short to ground, and short to voltage conditions. * Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure) for advanced intermittent diagnosis and Vehicle Data Recorder operation. Testing for Terminal Fretting Some intermittent conditions can be caused by wire terminal fretting corrosion. Fretting corrosion is a build-up of insulating, oxidized wear debris that can form when there is a small motion between electrical contacts. The oxidized wear debris can pile up enough at the electrical contact spots that the electrical resistance across the connection increases. Movement between the contacting surfaces as small as 10 to 100 microns can cause fretting. To put this in perspective, a sheet of paper is about 100 microns thick, so fretting motion is small and hard to see. Vibration and thermal expansion/contraction are the main sources that create fretting motion. Since vehicles vibrate and can experience large temperature swings, they are a good source for fretting motion. Tin, copper, nickel, and iron surfaces are all susceptible to fretting corrosion. Fretting corrosion can be difficult to see but it looks like small, dark smudges on the terminals contact surface. To correct a fretting condition disconnect the suspect connector and add Nyogel lubricant 760G (dielectric grease) to both sides of the connector Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5239 terminals. Then reconnect the connector and wipe away any excess lubricant. This will correct the additional terminal contact resistance due to the terminal fretting corrosion. Testing for Proper Terminal Contact It is important to test terminal contact at the component and any inline connectors before replacing a suspect component. Mating terminals must be inspected to ensure good terminal contact. A poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector may be the result of contamination or deformation. Contamination may be caused by the connector halves being improperly connected. A missing or damaged connector seal, damage to the connector itself, or exposing the terminals to moisture and dirt can also cause contamination. Contamination, usually in the underhood or underbody connectors, leads to terminal corrosion, causing an open circuit or intermittently open circuit. Deformation is caused by probing the mating side of a connector terminal without the proper adapter. Always use the EL-35616 when probing connectors. Other causes of terminal deformation are improperly joining the connector halves, or repeatedly separating and joining the connector halves. Deformation, usually to the female terminal contact tang, can result in poor terminal contact causing an open or intermittently open circuit. Testing for Proper Terminal Contact in Bussed Electrical Centers It is very important to use the correct test adapter when testing for proper terminal contact of fuses and relays in a bussed electrical center. Use EL-35616-35 to test for proper terminal contact. Failure to use EL-35616-35 can result in improper diagnosis of the bussed electrical center. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact: 1. Separate the connector halves. 2. Visually inspect the connector halves for contamination. Contamination may result in a white or green build-up within the connector body or between terminals. This causes high terminal resistance, intermittent contact, or an open circuit. An underhood or underbody connector that shows signs of contamination should be replaced in its entirety: terminals, seals, and connector body. 3. Using an equivalent male terminal / terminated lead, verify that the retention force is significantly different between a known good terminal and the suspect terminal. Replace the female terminal in question. Flat Wire (Dock and Lock) Connectors There are no serviceable parts for flat wire (dock and lock) connectors on the harness side or the component side. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact: 1. Remove the component in question. 2. Visually inspect each side of the connector for signs of contamination. Avoid touching either side of the connector as oil from your skin may be a source of contamination as well. 3. Visually inspect the terminal bearing surfaces of the flat wire circuits for splits, cracks, or other imperfections that could cause poor terminal contact. Visually inspect the component side connector to ensure that all of the terminals are uniform and free of damage or deformation. 4. Insert the appropriate adapter from the on the flat wire harness connector in order to test the circuit in question. Control Module/Component Voltage and Grounds Poor voltage or ground connections can cause widely varying symptoms. * Test all control module voltage supply circuits. Many vehicles have multiple circuits supplying voltage to a control module. Other components in the system may have separate voltage supply circuits that may also need to be tested. Inspect connections at the module/component connectors, fuses, and any intermediate connections between the voltage source and the module/component. A test lamp or a DMM may indicate that voltage is present, but neither tests the ability of the circuit to carry sufficient current. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. Refer to Circuit Testing (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Circuit Testing) and Power Distribution Schematics (See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Starting and Charging/Power and Ground Distribution/System Diagram/Power Distribution Schematics). * Test all control module ground and system ground circuits. The control module may have multiple ground circuits. Other components in the system may have separate grounds that may also need to be tested. Inspect grounds for clean and tight connections at the grounding point. Inspect the connections at the component and in splice packs, where applicable. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. Refer to Circuit Testing (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Circuit Testing) and Ground Distribution Schematics (See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Starting and Charging/Power and Ground Distribution/System Diagram/Ground Distribution Schematics). Temperature Sensitivity * An intermittent condition may occur when a component/connection reaches normal operating temperature. The condition may occur only when the component/connection is cold, or only when the component/connection is hot. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5240 * Freeze Frame, Failure Records, Snapshot, or Vehicle Data Recorder data may help with this type of intermittent condition, where applicable. * If the intermittent is related to heat, review the data for a relationship with the following: - High ambient temperatures - Underhood/engine generated heat - Circuit generated heat due to a poor connection, or high electrical load - Higher than normal load conditions, towing, etc. * If the intermittent is related to cold, review the data for the following: - Low ambient temperatures-In extremely low temperatures, ice may form in a connection or component. Inspect for water intrusion. - The condition only occurs on a cold start. - The condition goes away when the vehicle warms up. * Information from the customer may help to determine if the trouble follows a pattern that is temperature related. * If temperature is suspected of causing an intermittent fault condition, attempt to duplicate the condition. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions) in order to duplicate the conditions required. Electromagnetic Interference and Electrical Noise Some electrical components/circuits are sensitive to electromagnetic interference or other types of electrical noise. Inspect for the following conditions: * A misrouted harness that is too close to high voltage/high current devices such as secondary ignition components, motors, generator etc.-These components may induce electrical noise on a circuit that could interfere with normal circuit operation. * Electrical system interference caused by a malfunctioning relay, or a control module driven solenoid or switch-These conditions can cause a sharp electrical surge. Normally, the condition will occur when the malfunctioning component is operating. * Improper installation of non-factory or aftermarket add on accessories such as lights, 2-way radios, amplifiers, electric motors, remote starters, alarm systems, cell phones, etc.-These accessories may lead to interference while in use, but do not fail when the accessories are not in use. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Checking Aftermarket Accessories). * Test for an open diode across the A/C compressor clutch and for other open diodes. Some relays may contain a clamping diode. * The generator may be allowing AC noise into the electrical system. Incorrect Control Module * There are only a few situations where reprogramming a control module is appropriate: - A new service control module is installed. - A control module from another vehicle is installed. - Revised software/calibration files have been released for this vehicle. Note: DO NOT re-program the control module with the SAME software/calibration files that are already present in the control module. This is not an effective repair for any type of concern. * Verify that the control module contains the correct software/calibration. If incorrect programming is found, reprogram the control module with the most current software/calibration. Refer to Control Module References (See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning) for replacement, setup, and programming. Testing for Short to Ground Testing for Short to Ground Special Tools * EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM) * EL 35616-200 - Test Light-Probe Kit For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test Probe Caution). The following procedures test for a short to ground in a circuit. With a Digital Multimeter (DMM) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5241 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the Ohms position. 4. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the other lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. If the DMM does NOT display infinite resistance (OL), there is a short to ground in the circuit. With a Test Lamp 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect one lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to one end of the circuit to be tested. 5. If the test lamp illuminates, there is a short to ground in the circuit. Fuse Powering Several Loads 1. Review the system schematic and locate the fuse that is open. 2. Open the first connector or switch leading from the fuse to each load. 3. Connect a DMM across the fuse terminals (be sure that the fuse is powered). * When the DMM displays voltage the short is in the wiring leading to the first connector or switch. * If the DMM does not display voltage refer to the next step. 4. Close each connector or switch until the DMM displays voltage in order to find which circuit is shorted. Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter Special Tools EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM) For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test Probe Caution). Digital Multimeter (DMM) Basic Requirements Service information is validated using digital multimeters that meet or exceed the following requirements. Using a multimeter that does not meet these basic requirements may give inaccurate readings which could lead to an incorrect diagnosis. Display and Settings 1. Four digits displayed 2. Voltage, amperage, resistance, frequency, diode test settings, and min-max function 3. Display positive and negative values Voltage 1. Have at least 10 Mohm input impedance 2. Test a DC voltage range of 0.1-1000 V. 3. Test an AC voltage range of 0.1-1000 V. Amperage 1. Test a DC amperage range of 0.1µA-10 A. 2. Test an AC amperage range of 0.1µA-10 A. Resistance Test a resistance range of 0.1 ohm-40 Mohm and displays infinite for a value greater than 40 Mohm (O.L. (Over-load)) Frequency Test for a frequency range of 0.5 HZ-199 K HZ Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5242 Diode Test 1. Apply at least 1 mA when performing the diode bias test 2. Display the break over voltage drop (0-3 V) of a forward biased diode 3. Display infinite (O.L. (Over-load)) when a diode is reverse biased Min-Max Readings 1. Can update at a 1 ms sample rate 2. Saves and displays minimum and maximum values Note: Circuits which include any solid state control modules, such as the engine control module (ECM), should only be tested with a 10 MOhms or higher impedance digital multimeter such as the EL-39200. The EL-39200 instruction manual is a good source of information and should be read thoroughly upon receipt of the DMM as well as kept on hand for future reference. A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present if the impedance is low enough, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. In other words, if there is not enough current, the test lamp will not illuminate even though voltage is present. The ohmmeter function on a DMM shows how much resistance exists between 2 points along a circuit. Low resistance in a circuit means good continuity. Note: Disconnect the power feed from the suspect circuit when measuring resistance with a DMM. This prevents incorrect readings. DMMs apply such a small voltage to measure resistance that the presence of voltages can upset a resistance reading. Diodes and solid state components in a circuit can cause a DMM to display a false reading. To find out if a component is affecting a measurement take a reading once, then reverse the leads and take a second reading. If the readings differ the solid state component is affecting the measurement. Following are examples of the various methods of connecting the DMM to the circuit to be tested: * Probe both ends of the connector and either hold the leads in place while manipulating the connector or tape the leads to the harness for continuous monitoring while you perform other operations or test driving. Refer to Probing Electrical Connectors (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Probing Electrical Connectors). * Disconnect the harness at both ends of the suspected circuit where it connects either to a component or to other harnesses. * If the system that is being diagnosed has a specified pinout or breakout box, it may be used in order to simplify connecting the DMM to the circuit or for testing multiple circuits quickly. Using Connector Test Adapters Using Connector Test Adapters Special Tools EL 35616 - Terminal Test Probe Kit For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Caution: Do not insert test equipment probes (DMM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the EL-38125-580 GM Approved Terminal Release Tool Kit in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the EL-38125-580 GM Approved Terminal Release Tool Kit , ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the EL-38125-580 GM Approved Terminal Release Tool Kit label on the inside of the EL-38125-580 GM Approved Terminal Release Tool Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Using Fused Jumper Wires Using Fused Jumper Wires Special Tools J 36169-A Fused Jumper Wire Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5243 Note: A fused jumper may not protect solid state components from being damaged. The J 36169-A includes small clamp connectors that provide adaptation to most connectors without damage. This fused jumper wire is supplied with a 20-A fuse which may not be suitable for some circuits. Do not use a fuse with a higher rating than the fuse that protects the circuit being tested. AFL/EPC Connectors AFL/EPC Connectors Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. 1. For connectors with a bolt in the dress cover, turn the bolt counterclockwise to remove the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5244 2. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the top of the wire dress cover. Slide the CPA forward. 3. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5245 View showing depressing of the lever lock release tab. View of connector in released position. 4. Disconnect the connector from the component. 5. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the dress cover. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs and remove the dress cover. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5246 6. Release the rear lower half of the wiredress cover. 7. Release the tabs that are holding the wiredress cover to the connector body. 8. Remove the nose piece by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the slots on both ends of the connector body. Gently pry the nose piece out of the connector. J 38125-216 can also be used to remove the nose piece. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5247 9. Use the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by lifting the terminal retaining tabs on the inside of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Bosch Connectors (BSK) Bosch Connectors (BSK) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5248 Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 3. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 4. Insert the J 38125-561 tool into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 5. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Bosch Connectors (ECM) Bosch Connectors (ECM) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5249 1. Locate the assist lever on the top of the connector. Move the assist lever to the forward position. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5250 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the connector. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the locking tabs and remove the dress cover. 4. The terminal positive assurance (TPA) is located in the front of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5251 5. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove TPA from the connector. 6. Use the J 38125-213 or the J 38125-556 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5252 Note: Ensure that the dress cover and connector body are both in the released position before reassembling. Failure to do so may cause damage to the connector and component. Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Bosch Connectors (0.64) Bosch Connectors (0.64) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While pressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock until the lever is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Pull the rubber boot that covers the wires back to expose the end of the connector dress cover. 4. Place the connector locking lever in the center of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5253 5. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs that are on the wire end of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover and connector body and pry up. 6. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs located on the opposite side of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover at the connector end and pry up. 7. Remove the dress cover. 8. Cut the tie wrap on the wire bundle. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5254 9. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting a small flat-bladed tool into the small slot in the end of the slider and pushing on the TPA until it comes out of the connector. When the TPA exits the opposite side of the connector, gasp the TPA and pull it completely out of the connector. 10. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 11. Insert the J 38125-560 into the 2 triangular cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 12. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Terminal Replacement Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5255 1. Prior to installation the terminal must be aligned so the (1) coding lugs align with the (2) coding grooves on the connector. 2. Once the terminal is aligned, slide the terminal into the cavity until the retainer has engaged in the cavity of the connector. 3. Slide the TPA in the connector body and seat it using a small flat bladed tool. The TPA is seated when it is flush with the contact housing. 4. Secure the wires to the connector body using a tie wrap and replace the dress cover and grommet. Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Pull out the slider on the connector position assurance (CPA) until it is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5256 5. Insert the J 38125-557 into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Connector Position Assurance Locks Connector Position Assurance Locks The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of the connector. CPAs are used in various connectors throughout the vehicle. CPAs are also used in all SIR system electrical connectors. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals, of the connector. Connector Repairs Connector Repairs Connector Repairs contains a list of all connector repairs. The connector repairs are listed by the connector manufacturer and then by connector type. If the technician cannot identify the manufacturer of the connector, refer to Identifying Connectors below. Knowing the connector manufacturer will assist in finding the correct connector repair from the following list: * Connector Position Assurance Locks (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Connector Position Assurance Locks) * Terminal Position Assurance Locks (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Terminal Position Assurance Locks) * AFL/EPC Connectors (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/AFL/EPC Connectors) * Bosch Connectors (BSK) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Bosch Connectors (BSK))Bosch Connectors (0.64) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Bosch Connectors (0.64))Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT))Bosch Connectors (ECM) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Bosch Connectors (ECM)) * Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack))Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Push to Seat))Delphi Connectors Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5257 (Pull To Seat) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Pull to Seat))Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W))Delphi Connectors (Micro.64) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Micro .64))Delphi Connectors (12-Way) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (12-Way))Delphi Connectors (Steering Gear) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Steering Gear)) * FCI Connectors (Lever Lock) (See: General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/FCI Connectors (Lever Lock))FCI Connectors (SIR) (See: General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/FCI (SIR)) * FEP Connectors (Steering Gear) (See: General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/FEP Connectors (Steering Gear)) * JST Connectors (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/JST Connectors) * Kostal Connectors (Glow Plug Control Module) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Kostal Connectors (Glow Plug Control Module))Kostal Connectors (Transmission) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Kostal Connectors (Transmission)) * Molex Connectors (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Molex Connectors) * Sumitomo Connectors (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Sumitomo Connectors) * Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way))Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor))Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap))Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way))Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module)) * Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Yazaki Connectors (2-Way))Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Yazaki Connectors (16-Way)) * Repairing Connector Terminals (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Repairing Connector Terminals) Connector Anatomy 1 - Connector Positive Assurance (CPA) 2 - Assist Lever 3 - Wiredress Cover 4 - Seal Strain/Relief Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5258 5 - Slide Left Hand 6 - Slide Right Hand 7 - Terminal Positive Assurance (TPA) 8 - Terminal Positive Assurance (TPA) 9 - Connector Seal 10 - Connector Housing 11 - Inner Connector Identifying Connectors Knowing the connector manufacturer is helpful when trying to locating the correct connector repair procedure. There are many different connector designs used on GM vehicles and it is sometimes difficult to identify the connector manufacturer. The information in this document should help with the identification of connector manufactures. The following connector manufacturers make most of the connectors found in GM vehicles: * AFL/EPC (Alcoa Fujikura Ltd./Engineered Plastics Components) * Bosch * Delphi * FCI (Framatome Connectors International) * JAE (Japan Aviation Electronics) * JST (Japan Solderless Terminals) * Kostel * Molex * Sumitomo * Tyco/AMP * Yazaki Identifying the manufacturer of a connector is often difficult. When trying to determine the manufacturer of a connector, look for specific identifying marks that are unique to that connector supplier. Most of these identify marks are hard to find or see. Check the connector carefully and refer to the information below for pictures and descriptions of connector identification markings. * Most of AFLs connectors have EPC on their connector body. Some of the smaller connectors will not have any markings on them. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5259 * In some cases Bosch will actually be printed on the connector. If Bosch does not appear on the connector, look for the Bosch logo. The Bosch logo is a circle with a blunted arrow inside. This logo can appear anywhere on the connector and is often very small. * In some cases Delphi will actually be printed on the connector. If Delphi is not printed on the connector, look for PED. In both cases there is no specific orientation for Delphi or PED and they can appear anywhere on the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5260 * FCI connectors may have the FCI logo on their connectors. The logo is the letters FCI with an "A" above it. * JAE connector have JAE in small letters on their connectors. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5261 * JST connectors have JST in small letters on their connectors, similar to that above. The location of the logo will vary with the connector size and style. * Kostel has an "LK" with a circle around it. These connector are usually used as a transmissions connection. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5262 * Most Molex connectors will have the Molex logo on the dresscover of the connector. In some cases the connectors may have MX followed by another letter. The third letter indicates where the connector was made. A connector with MXD is a Molex connector made in Detroit. Sumitomo has a unique symbol on their connector and possibly a part number. The symbol is similar to that of a diamond lying on its side, similar to that shown. The logo could appear anywhere but the most common place is at the wire side of the housing. * Tyco/AMP has many different and unique connector designs. Some may or may not have identifiable marks on them. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5263 * Yazaki has a wedge or arrow shape, similar to that shown. Delphi Connectors (Push to Seat) Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Follow the steps below in order to repair push to seat connectors. 1. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device, the connector position assurance (CPA) device, and/or the secondary lock. 2. Separate the connector halves (1). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5264 3. Use the proper pick or removal tool (1) in order to release the terminal. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 4. Gently pull the cable and the terminal (2) out of the back of the connector. 5. Re-form the locking device if you are going to reuse the terminal (1). 6. To repair the terminal, refer to Terminal Repair. Terminal Repair 1. Slip the cable seal away from the terminal. 2. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 3. Slip a new cable seal onto the wire. 4. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 5. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 6. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. 7. Slide the cable seal toward the terminal. 8. Crimp the cable seal and the insulation. 9. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply grease to the connector. Reinstalling Terminal 1. In order to reuse a terminal or lead assembly, refer to Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Wiring Repairs). 2. Ensure that the cable seal is kept on the terminal side of the splice. 3. Insert the lead from the back until it catches. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Terminated Lead Repair 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Find the appropriate terminated lead. 3. Use the appropriate splice sleeves depending on the gauge size. 4. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves). Delphi Connectors (Pull to Seat) Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) Special Tools Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5265 J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal If the terminal is visibly damaged or is suspected of having a faulty connection, the terminal should be replaced. Follow the steps below in order to repair pull-to-seat connectors: 1. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) device and/or the secondary lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component or separate the connectors for in-line connectors. 3. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device. 4. Insert the proper pick or removal tool into the front of the connector body. Note: On connectors with more than one terminal the service loop may not be large enough to remove the terminal and crimp on a new one. If the terminal wire does not have a large enough service loop for removal, cut the wire 5 cm (2 in) behind the connector before removal. 5. Grasp the wire at the back of the connector body and gently push the terminal out the front of the connector body. Terminal Repair 1. If the wire needed to be cut in order to remove the terminal, gently push a small length of the same size wire through the back of the connector cavity until there is enough wire exposed in order to crimp on a new terminal. If the wire was not cut, cut the existing wire as close to the old terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 4. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. Terminal Installation 1. Align the terminal and pull the wire from the back of the connector in order to seat the terminal. 2. If necessary, cut the new wire to proper length and splice with existing circuit. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves). 3. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply dielectric grease to the connector. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Micro .64) Delphi Connectors (Micro.64) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5266 Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro.64 connectors. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. The lever lock may be located on the top or sides of the wire dress cover. View of a typical Micro 64 connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5267 Depress the lock and pull the lever over and past the lock. View of the connector when released from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5268 View of another type of Micro 64 connector. Depress the locks that are located on both sides of the wiredress cover and pull the lever over and past the locks. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5269 View of the connector when released from the component. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the front of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool push down on one of the locking tabs and pull the cover up until the dress cover releases. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. 4. Once the front 2 locks are unlocked, lift the front of the dress cover and pull it forward. Note: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 5. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the small slot on the TPA and pushing down until the TPA releases. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5270 Note: Be careful not to angle or rock the J 38125-21 tool when inserting it into the connector or the tool may break. 6. Insert the J 38125-21 tool into the round canal between the terminals cavities at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Follow the steps below in order to repair Micro 64 connector terminals. The Micro 64 connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-64 (M jaw) was developed to crimp Micro 64 terminals. The J 38125-64 crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. The J 38125-64 crimping tool is also designed to crimp both the wire and the insulation at the same time. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro 64 terminals. Note: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gauge wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 1. Cut the wire as close to the damaged terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5271 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert terminal into the appropriate terminal holder until it hits bottom and stops. The correct terminal holder is determined by the wire size. Also ensure that the terminals wings are pointing towards the former on the tool and the release locator. 5. Insert the stripped cable into the terminal. Insulation should be visible on both sides of the terminal insulation wings. 6. Compress the handles until the ratchet automatically releases. 7. Place the terminal into the appropriate cavity and assemble the connector. Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5272 Terminal Removal Procedure There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W connectors. These connectors are very similar but use different terminals and have some minor physical differences also. The first connector design of the Micro-Pack 100W (1) has a white connector interface that holds the terminals. The second design of the Micro-Pack 100W (2) has a gray interface to hold the terminals. Also, the first design has terminal cavities that are further apart (3 mm centerline) and offset from the other row of terminal cavities in the connector. The second design has terminals cavities that are closer together (2.54 mm centerline) and aligned vertically. One other way to identify the second design is the thin strip of material that runs along the outside of the cavities. Note: There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W terminals which are very similar. Ensure that you have the correct terminal before crimping the new terminal to the wire. The first design connector uses the longer terminal (1) that has a raised area in front of the recess in the terminal. The second design connector uses the shorter terminal without the raised area. Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro-Pack 100W connectors. Some Micro-Pack 100W connector disassembly procedures will vary. Use this procedure as a guide. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5273 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Locate the nose piece locking tabs that are positioned on the side of the connector nose piece. The connector nose piece acts as a terminal positive assurance (TPA) and may be referred to as such. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to push in one of the locking tabs while gently pulling on the same side of the nose piece. 4. Repeat the procedure for the other locking tab and remove the nose piece. 5. Remove the wire dress cover. The following is a general procedure for wire dress cover removal. Use this procedure as a guide, some dress cover removal procedures may vary. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5274 6. Use fingers to squeeze the 2 locking legs of the cover. 7. Apply pressure and gently rock the cover until one locking leg is unseated. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5275 8. Continue to apply pressure and rock the cover until the second locking leg is unseated. Repeat procedure for the other side of the dress cover and remove the cover. 9. Use J 38125-12A to gently lift the terminal retaining tab while gently pulling the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. If the terminal is severely bent or damaged, it may be possible on some connectors to push the wire out of the front of the connector instead of pulling it through. This will prevent damage to the internal seals of the connector. Once the terminal is pushed out of the connector, cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible and pull the wire through the connector. Terminal Repair Procedure The Micro-Pack 100W connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool was developed to crimp Micro-Pack 100W terminals. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro-Pack 100 terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5276 1. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. Note: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gauge wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert the terminal into the crimp tool until the core wings are flush with the anvil on the crimp tool. Be sure that the wings are pointed toward the crimp tool former and release the spring locator. The locator will hold the terminal in place. Inspect the alignment of the terminal wings with the crimp tool former. If the terminal wings are wider than the crimp tool former, remove the terminal and bend the terminal wings in slightly. 5. Place stripped wire into terminal. 6. Crimp the new terminal to the wire. If a jam occurs, press the emergency release to open applicator. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5277 Terminal Replacement Procedure After the terminal is crimped to the wire perform the following procedure in order to replace Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the Terminal Removal Procedure. Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The following is the proper procedure for the repair of Weather Pack(R) Connectors. 1. Separate the connector halves (1). 2. Open the secondary lock. A secondary lock aids in terminal retention and is usually molded to the connector (1). 3. Grasp the wire and push the terminal to the forward most position. Hold the wire in this position. 4. Insert the Weather Pack(R) terminal removal tool J 38125-10A into the front (mating end) of the connector cavity until it rests on the cavity shoulder (1). 5. Gently pull on the wire to remove the terminal through the back of the connector (2). Note: Never use force to remove a terminal from a connector. 6. Inspect the terminal and connector for damage. Repair as necessary. Refer to Repairing Connector Terminals (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Repairing Connector Terminals). 7. Reform the lock tang (2) and reset terminal in connector body. 8. Close secondary locks and join connector halves. 9. Verify that circuit is complete and working satisfactorily. 10. Perform system check. Delphi Connectors (12-Way) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5278 Delphi Connectors (12-Way) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) and slide the lever lock away from the connector body. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs on the dress cover of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool release all of the locking tabs. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5279 4. Release the lower wire dress cover locking tab. 5. Release the upper wire dress cover locking tab. 6. Once the locks are unlocked, lift the dress cover off. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5280 Note: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 7. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the locking tabs on both sides of the TPA. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. 8. Remove the nose piece by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the locking tabs on both sides of the nose piece. Gently pry the nose piece out of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5281 9. Insert the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Delphi Connectors (Steering Gear) Delphi Connectors (Steering Gear) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5282 Removal Procedure 1. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the locking tab on the connector. 2. Push down the locking tab to release the connector. The small flat-bladed tool may need to be pushed down and angled back slightly to depress the locking tab. Pull on the connector body while releasing the locking tab to disconnect the connector. FCI Connectors (Lever Lock) FCI Connectors (Lever Lock) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5283 Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. 1. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. 2. The release tab is located on the top of the wiredress cover. 3. View of connector in released position. 4. Disconnect the connector from the component. 5. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the dress cover. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs and remove the dress cover. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5284 6. Use a small flat-blade tool to slide the terminal position assurance (TPA) up one notch on both ends of the connector. The TPA is located underneath the wire dress cover. For the larger terminals insert the J 38125-556 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. For the smaller terminals insert the J 38125-560 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5285 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. FCI (SIR) FCI Connectors (SIR) Removal Procedure Note: The orange CPA must be released first to disconnect or to connect the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5286 1. Lift the orange CPA vertically (avoid lifting on an angle to the connector) approximately 4 mm to release the connector. Use a small flat-bladed tool to help release the orange CPA. The orange CPA can also be released manually without any tools. 2. Grab the connector on both sides and lift the connector vertically to disconnect the connector. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5287 1. Lift the orange CPA vertically approximately 4 mm before installing the connector. Use a small flat-bladed tool to help release the orange CPA. The orange CPA can also be released manually without any tools. 2. Line up the connector key tabs with the initiator key slots. Grab the connector on both sides and push the connector down into the initiator connector sub assembly until fully seated. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5288 3. After the connector is fully seated, push down the orange CPA with your thumb. Push down until the orange CPA is touching the yellow cover on the connector. FEP Connectors (Steering Gear) FEP Connectors (Steering Gear) Removal Procedure 1. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the locking tab on the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5289 2. Push down the locking tab to release the connector. The small flat-bladed tool may need to be pushed down and angled back slightly to depress the locking tab. Pull on the connector body while releasing the locking tab to disconnect the connector. JST Connectors JST Connectors Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. While depressing the lock, remove the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5290 2. Locate the two indents of the terminal position assurance (TPA) located on the bottom of the connector body. Note: The TPA cannot be removed from the connector while there are terminals present in the connector body. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to very carefully raise the TPA on both sides of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5291 4. View of the TPA when removed from the connector body. 5. Use the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the left side of the terminal release cavity as shown in the graphic. Use the tool to move the terminal release to the right with a gentle prying motion. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Kostal Connectors (Glow Plug Control Module) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5292 Kostal Connectors (Glow Plug Control Module) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure View of typical connector. View of connector in released position. 1. Locate the assist lever at the back of the connector. Move the assist lever to the rear position. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5293 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove the dress cover. 4. Slide the dress cover forward and off of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5294 5. The terminal positive assurance (TPA) is located in the front and rear of the connector. Note: The front TPA cannot be removed from the connector. Only move it to the preset position. 6. Use a small flat-blade tool to move the front TPA to the preset position, outboard approximately 0.125 in. (3 mm). 7. Use a small flat-blade tool to completely remove the rear TPA from the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5295 8. Use the J 38125-24 or the J 38125-560 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 9. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Kostal Connectors (Transmission) Kostal Connectors (Transmission) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5296 1. While depressing the lock, twist and remove the connector from the component. 2. Locate the terminal position assurance (TPA). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5297 Note: The TPA cannot be removed from the connector while there are terminals present in the connector body. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to push the TPA until it bottoms out. 4. Use the J 38125-28 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal cavity as shown in the graphic. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 5. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Terminal Replacement Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5298 After the terminal is crimped to the wire, perform the following procedure in order to replace the terminal. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. Locate the terminal position assurance (TPA). 4. Use a small flat-blade tool to push the TPA until it bottoms out. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5299 5. Ensure the TPA is fully seated. The TPA should be centered and flush with the connector body when viewed. Molex Connectors Molex Connectors Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the top of the wire dress cover. Slide the CPA forward. 2. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5300 3. The lever should be in the full forward position. 4. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5301 5. Remove the dress cover by using a flat bladed tool to release the dress cover locking tabs and lift up on the dress cover. 6. Cut the tie wrap that holds the wires to the connector body. 7. Use a small flat-blade tool to pry one side of the nose piece up to the pre-stage position. When the nose piece is in the pre-staged position, the nose piece will be raised above the connector body the length of the step in the nose piece. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5302 8. Use a small flat-blade tool to pry the other side of the piece to the pre-stage position. If the nose piece is higher than the first step in the nose piece, gently push down on the nose piece until it meets with resistance from the connector body, you should feel the nose piece click into position. 9. Insert the J 38125-213 into the small terminal release hole on the nose piece and gently pull on the back of the wire. 10. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Refer to the terminal crimping procedure in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit. Terminal Replacement Procedure After the terminal is crimped to the wire, perform the following procedure in order to replace the terminal. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5303 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the connector disassembly procedure. Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the connector body and pull the CPA out. The CPA is on the wire harness side of connector. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Use a small flat-bladed tool to gently pry off the dress cover by inserting the tool under the cover opposite the harness side and prying up. 4. Remove the cover. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5304 5. Using a small flat-bladed tool, push on the side of the nose piece retainer while pushing the nose piece forward with your thumb. This will release the terminal position assurance (TPA). 6. Insert the J 38125-12A into the corresponding terminal release cavity. The release cavities are the 2 center rows of cavities on one half of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5305 7. Pressing the J 38125-12A tool in the release cavity of the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and crimper in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. Slide the lever lock away from the connector body. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs on the dress cover of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool release all of the locking tabs. 4. Once the locks are unlocked, lift the dress cover off. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5306 Note: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 5. Release the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the blue locking tabs on both ends of the connector. Gently slide the TPA up to the released position on both ends. 6. For the larger terminals insert the J 38125-13A tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. For the smaller terminals insert the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5307 View of the release tool being used for the larger terminals. View of the release tool being used for the larger terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5308 View of the release tool being used for the smaller terminals. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5309 Side view of connector. View of top of connector. 1. Locate the assist lever and lock on the top of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5310 2. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. 3. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5311 4. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the rear of the connector. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. 5. Once the locking tabs are unlocked, slide the inner connector out of the rear of the connector housing. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5312 6. Use the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by pressing on the tang. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Repairing Connector Terminals Repairing Connector Terminals Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Use the following repair procedures in order to repair the following: * Push to Seat terminals * Pull to Seat terminals Some terminals do not require all of the steps shown. Skip the steps that do not apply for your terminal repair. The J-38125 contains further information. 1. Cut off the terminal between the core and the insulation crimp. Minimize any wire loss. For cable seal terminals, remove the seal. 2. Apply the correct cable seal per gauge size of the wire, if used. Slide the seal back along the wire in order to enable insulation removal. 3. Remove the insulation. 4. For sealed terminals only, align the seal with the end of the cable insulation. 5. Position the strip in the terminal. For sealed terminals, position the strip and seal in the terminal. 6. Hand crimp the core wings. 7. Hand crimp the insulation wings. For sealed terminals, hand crimp the insulation wings around the seal and the cable. 8. Solder all of the hand crimp terminals excepting Micro-Pack 100.64 size. Soldering Micro-Pack 100 World terminals may damage the terminal. Sumitomo Connectors Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5313 Sumitomo Connectors Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5314 3. Remove the dress cover by using a flat-blade tool to release the connector locking tabs and pulling off the dress cover. 4. Relieve the tension on the nose piece retainers by inserting J 38125-12A into the single retainer slot on the end of the nose piece and gently prying out the locking tab. Repeat the process for both of the nose piece locking tabs on the opposite side of the nose piece. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5315 5. Once the nose piece retainers are relaxed, use the J 38125-552 to pull up the nose piece by hooking the tool under the nose piece and pulling up. The nose piece should raise slightly. 6. On the opposite side of the nose piece, use the J 38125-552 to pull up the nose piece by hooking the tool under the nose piece and pulling up. The nose piece should release completely. If the nose piece does not come off, repeat the procedure on the opposite side. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5316 7. The illustration above identifies the entry canal where the terminal release tool will be inserted, and the terminal cavity. * Terminal (1) * Entry Canal (2) 8. Insert the J 38125-553 tool into the entry canal and pry up on the terminal retainer. The terminal retainer is a small plastic piece on the top of the terminal. The terminal retainer must be held up while the terminal is pulled out of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5317 9. The illustration shows a cutaway view of the connector to aid the technician in releasing the terminal retainer. 10. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Refer to the terminal crimping procedure in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit. Terminal Replacement Procedure After the terminal is crimped to the wire, perform the following procedure in order to replace the terminal. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the connector disassembly procedure. Terminal Position Assurance Locks Terminal Position Assurance Locks The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5318 2. Insert the J 38125-11A tool into the cavity on the lower right hand face of the connector until the terminal release tang access panel slides over. 3. Ensure that the terminal release tang access panel is in the correct location to access the terminals. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5319 5. Insert the J 38125-11A into the terminal release tang access slot located behind the access panel of the connector and press down on the terminal while carefully pulling the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component by pressing down on the connector position assurance (CPA). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5320 2. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting the tool in the small recess on the side of the connector and pushing up until the TPA releases from the connector body. The TPA should raise just slightly. Do not try to remove the TPA. Note: The TPA on this connector cannot be removed unless the terminals are removed first. The TPA will come out of the connector body, but only slightly. When the TPA is slightly raised the terminals can be removed. Using excessive force to remove the TPA with the terminals still in the connector will damage the connector. 3. Repeat the process for the other side of the connector. 4. Ensure that the TPA is in the proper position to remove the terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5321 5. While pushing the terminal forward, insert the J 38125-24 in the release cavity above the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5322 2. Insert a small flat-blade tool in the slot below the front loaded terminal position assurance (TPA) and pry up. 3. Remove the TPA by pulling it out of the connector. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-553 on a slight upward angle into the cavity below the terminal to be removed. Ensure that the pointed on the end of the tool is facing the bottom of the terminal and it stays in contact with the terminal until it stops on the plastic terminal retainer. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5323 6. Gently pry the plastic terminal retainer down and carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5324 1. While depressing the lock, pull the two connector halves apart. Note: The TPA is fragile and may break if not done carefully. 2. Use a small flat-blade tool to very carefully push the terminal position assurance (TPA) towards the face of the connector on both sides of the connector. 3. View of the male half of the connector with female terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5325 4. View of the female half of the connector with male terminals. 5. Use the J 38125-215 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. View of the female half of the connector with male terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5326 7. View of the male half of the connector with female terminals. 8. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers A circuit breaker is a protective device that is designed to open the circuit when a current load is in excess of the rated breaker capacity. If there is a short or other type of overload condition in the circuit, the excessive current will open the circuit between the circuit breaker terminals. Two types of circuit breakers are used. Circuit Breaker - This type opens when excessive current passes through it for a period of time. It closes again after a few seconds, and if the cause of the high current is still present, it will open again. The circuit breaker will continue to cycle open and closed until the condition causing the high current is removed. Positive Temperature Coefficient (PTC) Circuit Breaker - This type greatly increases its resistance when excessive current passes through it. The excessive current heats the PTC device, as the device heats its resistance increases. Eventually the resistance gets so high that the circuit is effectively open. Unlike the ordinary circuit breaker the PTC unit will not reset until the circuit is opened, by removing the voltage from its terminals. Once the voltage is removed the circuit breaker will re-close within a second or 2. Circuit Protection - Fuses Circuit Protection - Fuses Special Tools EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM) For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5327 The fuse is the most common method of an automotive wiring circuit protection. Whenever there is an excessive amount of current flowing through a circuit the fusible element will melt and create an open or incomplete circuit. Fuses are a one time protection device and must be replaced each time the circuit is overloaded. To determine if a fuse is open, remove the suspected fuse and examine if the element in the fuse is broken (2). If not broken (1), also check for continuity using a Digital Multimeter (DMM) or a continuity tester. If the element is broken or continuity is suspect, replace the fuse with one of equal current rating. Circuit Protection - Fusible Links Circuit Protection - Fusible Links Special Tools EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM) For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Fusible link is wire designed to melt and break continuity when excessive current is applied. It is often located between or near the battery and starter or electrical center. Use a continuity tester or a Digital Multimeter (DMM) at each end of the wire containing the fusible link in order to determine if it is broken. If broken, it must be replaced with fusible link of the same gauge size. Repairing a Fusible Link Note: Fusible links cut longer than 225 mm (approximately 9 in) will not provide sufficient overload protection. Flat Wire Repairs Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5328 Flat Wire Repairs The flat wire within the flex wiring harness is not serviceable. If an open or short exists within the flex wiring harness the complete harness must be replaced. GMLAN Wiring Repairs GMLAN Wiring Repairs Special Tools * EL-38125-10 - Splice Sleeve Crimping Tool * J 38125-5 - Ultra Torch Special Tool * DuraSeal splice sleeves * A wire stripping tool For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: * A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. * A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The GM Local Area Network (GMLAN) System requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working on GMLAN connectors and terminals. GMLAN Repairs Note: When making a repair to any GMLAN network, the original wire length after the repair must be the same length as before the repair. If the network is a twisted pair, the twist must be maintained after the repair is completed. GMLAN has 2 types of networks, low speed and high speed. Low speed GMLAN has a single wire and works at slow speeds. High speed GMLAN has 2 wires in a twisted pair and works at higher speeds. For more information on GMLAN, refer to Data Link Communications Description and Operation ( See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Information Bus/Description and Operation). GMLAN Connector Terminal Repair Note: A terminated lead can be used to replace damaged connector terminals for both high speed and low speed GMLAN systems. When making a connector terminal repair on a GMLAN high speed system with twisted pair wires, do not untwist the wires more than necessary to make the repair. If the individual terminals are damaged on any GMLAN connection, use the appropriate connector repair procedure in order to repair the terminal. Refer to Connector Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Connector Repairs) for the appropriate connector repair procedure. GMLAN Wire Repair Note: Refer to Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Wiring Repairs) in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gauge size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and EL-38125-10 - tool. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the DuraSeal splice sleeves. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5329 Note: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: * Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. * Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. * Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert to regional wiring gauge size. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the EL-38125-10 - tool in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the splice sleeve crimp tool. The crimp tool has four nests, one for each color. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5330 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs Caution: Do not solder repairs under any circumstances as this could result in the air reference being obstructed. If the heated oxygen sensor pigtail wiring, connector, or terminal is damaged the entire oxygen sensor assembly must be replaced. Do not attempt to repair the wiring, connector, or terminals. In order for the sensor to function properly it must have a clean air reference. This clean air reference is obtained by way of the oxygen sensor signal and heater wires. Any attempt to repair the wires, connectors or terminals could result in the obstruction of the air reference and degrade oxygen sensor performance. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5331 The following guidelines should be used when servicing the heated oxygen sensor: * Do not apply contact cleaner or other materials to the sensor or vehicle harness connectors. These materials may get into the sensor, causing poor performance. Also, the sensor pigtail and harness wires must not be damaged in such a way that the wires inside are exposed. This could provide a path for foreign materials to enter the sensor and cause performance problems. * Neither the sensor nor vehicle lead wires should be bent sharply or kinked. Sharp bends, kinks, etc., could block the reference air path through the lead wire. * Do not remove or defeat the oxygen sensor ground wire (where applicable). Vehicles that utilize the ground wire sensor may rely on this ground as the only ground contact to the sensor. Removal of the ground wire will also cause poor engine performance. * To prevent damage due to water intrusion, be sure that the peripheral seal remains intact on the vehicle harness connector. High Temperature Wiring Repairs High Temperature Wiring Repairs Special Tools * EL-38125-10 - Splice Sleeve Crimping Tool * J 38125-5 - Ultra Torch * DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). High Temperature Wiring Wiring that is exposed to high temperatures, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time may use materials i.e. wires, connectors, and shielding that has a higher heat rating than typical wiring. When making a repair in a high temperature area observe the following: * Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature to replace any damaged wire. * Replace any heat shielding that is removed. * Cover any DuraSeal splice sleeves with SCT1 shrink tubing. * After making a wiring repair, ensure that the location of the wiring is not moved closer to the heat source. Identifying High Temperature Wiring Wiring that is exposed to high temperature, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time need special considerations when making wiring repairs. Areas that may be exposed to higher temperatures can be identified by heat resistant materials that are being used in those areas. These materials may include heat reflective tape, moon tape, and high temperature shrink tubing. Also conduit and other protective coverings may be used. Because conduit or similar coverings are used throughout the vehicle regardless of the temperature, it may be necessary for the technician to determine if an area is exposed to excessive heat before making a wiring repair. Obvious areas of consideration would be any area located near the exhaust manifolds, catalytic converter, and exhaust pipes. Items Required * DuraSeal splice sleeves to crimp and seal connections * High temperature SCT1 shrink tubing to protect the splice sleeves * Terminated leads or pigtails * The correct tools to remove the terminals from the connectors Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature of the same or larger gauge size as the original wire when repair damage wire. Also replace any reflective tape that you remove during the repair. High Temperature Wire Repair Note: Refer to Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Wiring Repairs) in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature rating of the same gauge size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the EL-38125-10 - tool and then encapsulate the splice sleeve using the high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5332 Note: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: * Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. * Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. * Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert to regional wiring gauge size. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Slide a section of high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing down the length of wire to be spliced. Ensure that the shrink tubing will not interfere with the splice procedure. 5. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 6. Use the EL-38125-10 - tool in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the splice sleeve crimp tool. The crimp tool has four nests, one for each color. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5333 7. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 8. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 9. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 10. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 11. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5334 12. Center the high temperature SCT1 shrink tube over the DuraSeal splice sleeve. 13. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the high temperature heat shrink tubing. 14. Gradually move the heat from the center to the open end of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. 15. Replace any reflective tape and clips that may have been remove during the repair. Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation If the wire insulation has been chafed, or broken, enough to show the conductive portion of the wire, and the wire is not damaged, determine the length of insulation that needs to be repaired. If the repair is less than 280 mm (11 in), cut the wire within the damaged area. Than slide the appropriate heat shrink tubing (listed below) over the wire, and repair the wire by splicing the wires together. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves). Once the wire is spliced together slide heat shrink tubing over the damaged area and apply heat to seal the repaired wire. If the wire is damaged, or the damaged area is larger than 280 mm (11 in), than replace the damaged wire by splicing in a new section of wire. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5335 SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs Special Tools * EL-38125-10 - Splice Sleeve Crimping Tool * J 38125-5 - Ultra Torch * DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: * A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. * A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides the necessary low resistance contact integrity for these sensitive, low energy circuits. The Supplemental Inflatable Restraint (SIR) System/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working with the SIR/SRS, and the wiring components, such as connectors and terminals. SIR/SRS Connector Repair (Plastic Body and Terminal Metal Pin) Note: Do not use the terminals in the kit in order to replace damaged SIR/SRS system terminals. Use either an SIR/SRS pigtail or a terminated lead from the SIR Repair Kit Tray. The terminals in the SIR/SRS system are made with a special plating. This plating provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. Pigtail repair packs are available for SIR/SRS connectors with eight or less terminals. Only the connector body is available for connectors with more than eight terminals. Terminated leads can be used to replace damaged terminals when replacing the connector body. SIR/SRS Component Wire Pigtail Repair Note: Do not make wire, connector, or terminal repairs on components with wire pigtails. A wire pigtail is a wire or wires attached directly to the device, not by a connector. If a wiring pigtail is damaged, you must replace the entire component, with pigtail. The inflatable restraint steering wheel module coil is an example of a pigtail component. SIR/SRS Wire Repair Note: Refer to Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Wiring Repairs) in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5336 If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gauge size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and EL-38125-10 - tool. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the DuraSeal splice sleeves. Note: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: * Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. * Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. * Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert to regional wiring gauge size. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the EL-38125-10 - tool in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the splice sleeve crimp tool. The crimp tool has four nests, one for each color. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5337 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Connector Position Assurance (CPA) The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of a connector. CPAs are used in all SIR System connectors and also in some connectors of other systems. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals of a connection. Terminal Position Assurance (TPA) The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5338 Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Special Tools * EL-38125-10 - Splice Sleeve Crimping Tool * J 38125-5 - Ultra Torch * DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Note: Use only DuraSeal splice sleeves. Other splice sleeves may not protect the splice from moisture or provide a good electrical connection. Use DuraSeal splice sleeves to form a one-to-one splice on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. Use DuraSeal splice sleeves where there is special requirements such as moisture sealing. Follow the instructions below in order to splice copper wire using DuraSeal splice sleeves. Note: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: * Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. * Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. * Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert to regional wiring gauge size. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5339 5. Use the EL-38125-10 - tool in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the splice sleeve crimp tool. The crimp tool has four nests, one for each color. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5340 * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Splicing Inline Harness Diodes Splicing Inline Harness Diodes Many vehicle electrical systems use a diode to isolate circuits and protect the components from voltage spikes. When installing a new diode use the following procedure. 1. Open the harness. * If the harness is taped, remove the tape. * To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing seam ripper (available from sewing supply stores) in order to cut open the harness. * If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the diode. 2. If the diode is taped to the harness, remove all of the tape. 3. Check and record the current flow direction and orientation of diode. 4. Remove the inoperative diode from the harness with a suitable soldering tool. Note: If the diode is located next to a connector terminal remove the terminal(s) from the connector to prevent damage from the soldering tool. 5. Carefully strip away a section of insulation next to the old soldered portion of the wire(s). Do not remove any more than is needed to attach the new diode. 6. Check current flow direction of the new diode, being sure to install the diode with correct bias. Reference the appropriate service manual wiring schematic to obtain the correct diode installation position. 7. Attach the new diode to the wire(s) using 60/40 rosin core solder. Before soldering attach some heat sinks (aluminum alligator clips) across the diode wire ends to protect the diode from excessive heat. Follow the manufacturer's instruction for the soldering equipment. 8. Reinstall terminal(s) into the connector body if previously removed. Note: To prevent shorts to ground and water intrusion, completely cover all exposed wire and diode attachment points with tape. 9. Tape the diode to the harness or connector using electrical tape. Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable Twisted/shielded cable is used in order to protect wiring from electrical noise. Two-conductor cable of this construction is used between the radio and the Delco-Bose(R) speaker/amplifier units and other applications where low level, sensitive signals must be carried. Follow the instructions below in order to repair the twisted/shielded cable. 1. Remove the outer jacket (1). Use care not to cut into the drain wire of the mylar tape. 2. Unwrap the tape. Do not remove the tape. Use the tape in order to rewrap the twisted conductors after the splice is made. 3. Prepare the splice. Untwist the conductors and follow the instructions for Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves). Staggering the splices by 65 mm (2.5 in) is recommended. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5341 Note: Apply the mylar tape with the aluminum side inward. This ensures good electrical contact with the drain wire. 4. Re-assemble the cable. * Rewrap the conductors with the mylar tape. If the mylar tape is damaged, use 3M product AL-36FR to replace the damaged mylar tape. * Use caution not to wrap the drain wire in the tape (1). * Follow the splicing instructions for copper wire and splice the drain wire. * Wrap the drain wire around the conductors and tape with electrical tape to replace the outer insulation. 5. Tape over the entire cable. Use a winding motion when you apply the tape. Wiring Repairs Wiring Repairs The Wiring Repairs section contains the following types of wiring repair information. Using these elements together will make wiring repair faster and easier: * Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections) * Flat Wire Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Flat Wire Repairs) * GMLAN Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/GMLAN Wiring Repairs) * High Temperature Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/High Temperature Wiring Repairs) * Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs) * Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves) * Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable) * Splicing Inline Harness Diodes (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Inline Harness Diodes) * SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs) US English/Metric Conversion US English/Metric Conversion Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5342 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5343 Basic Digital Multimeter Requirements Basic Digital Multimeter Requirements Digital Multimeter (DMM) Basic Requirements Service information is validated using digital multimeters that meet or exceed the following requirements. Using a multimeter that does not meet these basic requirements may give inaccurate readings which could lead to an incorrect diagnosis. Display and Settings 1. Four digits displayed 2. Voltage, amperage, resistance, frequency, diode test settings, and min-max function 3. Display positive and negative values Voltage 1. Have at least 10 Mohm input impedance 2. Test a DC voltage range of 0.1-1000 V. 3. Test an AC voltage range of 0.1-1000 V. Amperage 1. Test a DC amperage range of 0.1µA-10 A. 2. Test an AC amperage range of 0.1µA-10 A. Resistance Test a resistance range of 0.1 ohm-40 Mohm and displays infinite for a value greater than 40 Mohm (O.L. (Over-load)) Frequency Test for a frequency range of 0.5 HZ-199 K HZ Diode Test 1. Apply at least 1 mA when performing the diode bias test 2. Display the break over voltage drop (0-3 V) of a forward biased diode 3. Display infinite (O.L. (Over-load)) when a diode is reverse biased Min-Max Readings 1. Can update at a 1 ms sample rate 2. Saves and displays minimum and maximum values Testing Ground and Low Reference Circuits Testing Ground and Low Reference Circuits Because a test lamp can light with up to 200 ohm in a ground or low reference circuit they are not recommended to be used for this type of test. A low impedance test lamp can light and indicate the circuit is good when there is as much as 20-30 ohm present, while a high impedance test lamp can light with up to 200 ohm present in the circuit. This is why the Digital Multi-Meter (DMM) is used when validating a ground or low reference circuit continuity. When using the DMM there are many vehicle conditions that can affect the ground and low reference continuity testing. If these conditions are not met, a ground or low reference circuit test can fail on a good circuit. This may cause longer diagnosis time and incorrect component replacement. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5344 Any current flow through a ground or low reference circuit, while being tested, will skew the DMM continuity reading, or display a reading higher than when there is no current flowing. Performing a ground or low reference circuit continuity test, in reference to the vehicles battery negative terminal, will have the highest risk of failing a good ground or low reference circuit test than any other ground reference point. The best ground test points would be a control module housing (if the control modules housing is metal and grounded), door jamb striker (if attached to metal), under dash metal frame work, engine block, or body ground studs (other than where the negative battery cable is attached). A typical DMM ground or low reference circuit continuity reading can be as high as 100 ohm with the ignition ON, and drop to 15-25 ohm after the ignition is turned OFF. The reading will drop below 10 ohm after 30-40 seconds, then below 5 ohm after 60 seconds. Once the vehicle completely goes to sleep (generally 3-10 minutes) the reading will drop below 0.3 ohm. The following list of conditions may need to be met to ensure a valid continuity reading on a ground or low reference circuit: * Ignition OFF * Key out of the ignition switch (when not equipped with keyless entry and remote start) * Retained Accessory Power (RAP) OFF (open and close the driver door after ignition OFF) * Battery charger set at a 2 A or less charge rate * Scan tool not communicating with any vehicle control module (in some cases it may need to be disconnected from the DLC) * All entry doors closed * Headlamps OFF (auto headlamps disabled) * Any delay lighting OFF * HVAC after blow OFF * Any accessory that can work when the ignition is OFF * Wait up to 60 seconds (after all other listed conditions are met) Activating the DOOR LOCK function with a key fob can greatly reduce the time to achieve a valid ground or low reference continuity test result. Terminal Wiring Repair Terminal Wiring Repair Special Tools * EL-38125-10 - Splice Sleeve Crimp Tool * EL-38125-580 - Terminal Release Tool Kit * J-38125-5 - Ultra Torch * EL-35616 - Connector Test Adapter Kit For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Note: All repairs near the engine manifold, turbo engine and all exhaust pipes should follow the High Temperature Wiring Repair procedures. 1. Find the appropriate connector end view within the connector end view section. The connector end view has the following information: * Diagnostic probe tool * Terminal release tool * Terminal/terminated lead part numbers 2. Determine if a terminal is damaged. Note: Not using the proper test kit probe may cause damage to the terminal(s) that are probed. * Locate the diagnostic probe tool from the connector end view. The connector end view describes the color and part number to help the technician find and use the correct tool. * Connect the probe tool to the Digital Multimeter. * Insert the probe tool into the cavity and follow the procedures from the Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter). 3. Disconnect the connector body to perform the repair. Note: Several procedures for specific connector bodies are called out in Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Wiring Repairs). Use the following repair procedures to repair the following terminals: Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5345 Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack))Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Push to Seat))Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Pull to Seat))Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W))Delphi Connectors (Micro.64) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Micro .64) )Delphi Connectors (12-Way) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (12-Way))Delphi Connectors (Steering Gear) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Steering Gear)) * The TPA and CPA should be removed before releasing the terminal for the connector body. * Look at the connector end view to locate the cavity of the damaged terminal and find the proper terminal release tool from the terminal release tool kit. Note: Using the incorrect terminal release tool can damage the connector body. * Insert the terminal release tool into the cavity. Note: Some terminals have a lever that must be disengaged before the terminal can be released. Gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Terminated Lead Repair Terminated Lead Repair Special Tools * EL-38125-10 - Splice Sleeve Crimp Tool * EL-38125-580 - Terminal Release Tool Kit * J-38125-5 - Ultra Torch * EL-35616 - Connector Test Adapter Kit For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Note: All repairs near the engine manifold, turbo engine and all exhaust pipes should follow the High Temperature Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/High Temperature Wiring Repairs) procedures. Terminated leads are terminals that are crimped onto wires. The terminated lead can be used throughout the vehicle since it is designed for temperatures up to 150°C. The length of the wire is 450 mm. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5346 The DuraSeal splice sleeve has the following 2 critical features: * A special heat shrink tubing that environmentally seals the splice. The shrink tubing contains a sealing adhesive inside the shrink tubing. * A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp that provides the necessary contact integrity for sensitive low energy circuits. 1. Use the connector end view to identify the correct terminated lead. 2. The terminated lead package should include a DuraSeal splice sleeve. If not, use the chart to identify the correct part. 3. Open the harness by removing any tape: Use a sewing seam ripper, or a comparable tool, to cut open the harness, to avoid wire insulation damage. 4. Depending on how many terminals need repairs, cut the terminal and wire back at least 40 mm. Try to keep the harness wire length the same. If more than one terminated lead is required, stagger the lengths by 40 mm. This helps reduce the bundle size of the wire harness. 5. Use the EL-38125-10 - tool in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the splice sleeve crimp tool. The crimp tool has four nests, one for each color. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5347 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the J-38125-5 - ultra torch , apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Specifications > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission Shift Solenoid: Specifications 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission Shift Solenoid Valve State and Gear Ratio Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Specifications > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 5354 Shift Solenoid: Specifications 6T70/6T75 - Automatic Transmission Shift Solenoid Valve State and Gear Ratio Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Page 5355 Shift Solenoid: Locations Powertrain Component Views Automatic Transmission Electronic Components 1 - Q8 Control Solenoid Valve Assembly 2 - B15 Transmission Internal Mode Switch 3 - B14A Transmission Output Shaft Speed Sensor 4 - B14C Transmission Input Shaft Speed Sensor Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Shift Solenoid: Diagram Information and Instructions Electrical Schematic Symbols Electrical Schematic Symbols Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5358 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5359 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5360 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5361 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5362 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5363 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5364 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5365 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5366 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5367 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5368 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5369 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5370 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5371 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5372 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5373 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5374 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5375 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5376 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5377 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5378 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5379 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5380 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5381 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5382 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5383 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5384 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5385 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5386 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5387 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5388 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5389 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5390 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5391 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5392 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5393 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5394 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5395 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5396 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5397 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5398 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5399 General Electrical Diagnosis General Electrical Diagnosis Basic Knowledge Required Without a basic knowledge of electricity, it will be difficult to use the diagnostic procedures contained in the service manual. You should understand the basic theory of electricity, and know the meaning of voltage (V), current (A), and resistance (Ohms ). You should also be able to read and understand a wiring diagram, as well as understand what happens in a circuit with an open or a shorted wire. Vehicle Zoning Strategy Vehicle Zoning Strategy All grounds, in-line connectors, and splices have identifying numbers that correspond to where they are located in the vehicle. The following table explains the numbering system. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5400 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5401 Shift Solenoid: Diagnostic Aids Arrows and Symbols Arrows and Symbols This service manual uses various symbols in order to describe different service operations. 1 - Front of Vehicle 2 - View Detail 2 - View Detail 3 - Ambient Air Mixed with Another Gas or Indicate Temperature Change 4 - Motion or Direction 5 - View Angle 6 - Dimension (1:2) 7 Ambient/Clean Air Flow or Cool Air Flow 8 - Lubrication Point - Oil or Fluid 9 - Task Related 10 Sectioning (1:3) 11 - Gas Other Than Ambient Air or Hot Air Flow 12 - Lubrication Point - Grease or Jelly 13 - Multidirectional Arrow Decimal and Metric Equivalents Decimal and Metric Equivalents Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5402 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5403 Checking Aftermarket Accessories Checking Aftermarket Accessories Warning: Refer to SIR Warning (See: Restraint Systems/Service Precautions/SIR Warning). Caution: The OBD II symbol is used on the circuit diagrams in order to alert the technician that the circuit is essential for proper OBD II emission control circuit operation. Any circuit which fails and causes the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) to turn ON, or causes emissions-related component damage, is identified as an OBD II circuit. Do not connect aftermarket accessories into the following circuits: * SIR circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the SIR symbol. * OBD II circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the OBD II symbol. Always check for aftermarket accessories (non-OEM) as the first step in diagnosing electrical problems. If the vehicle is so equipped, disconnect the system to verify that these add-on accessories are not the cause of the problems. Possible causes of vehicle problems related to aftermarket accessories include: * Power feeds connected to points other than the battery * Antenna location * Transceiver wiring located too close to vehicle electronic modules or wiring * Poor shielding or poor connectors on antenna feed line * Check for recent service bulletins detailing installation guidelines for aftermarket accessories. Circuit Testing Circuit Testing The Circuit Testing section contains the following diagnostic testing information. Using this information along with the diagnostic procedures will identify the cause of the electrical malfunction. * Using Connector Test Adapters (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Using Connector Test Adapters) * Probing Electrical Connectors (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Probing Electrical Connectors) * Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5404 Procedures/Circuit Testing/Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter) * Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp) * Using Fused Jumper Wires (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Using Fused Jumper Wires) * Measuring Voltage (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Measuring Voltage) * Measuring Voltage Drop (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Measuring Voltage Drop) * Measuring Frequency (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Measuring Frequency) * Testing Ground and Low Reference Circuits (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Testing Ground and Low Reference Circuits) * Testing for Continuity (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Continuity) * Testing for Short to Ground (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Short to Ground) * Testing for a Short to Voltage (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for a Short to Voltage) * Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections) * Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions) * Testing for Electrical Intermittents (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Electrical Intermittents) * Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure) * Circuit Protection - Fuses (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Circuit Protection - Fuses) * Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers) * Circuit Protection - Fusible Links (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Circuit Protection - Fusible Links) Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp Special Tools EL-35616-200 - Test Light - Probe Kit For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test Probe Caution). A test lamp can simply and quickly test a low impedance circuit for voltage. A Digital Multimeter (DMM) should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present if the impedance is low enough, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. In other words, if there is not enough current, the test lamp will not illuminate even though voltage is present. The EL-35616-200 - kit is Micro-Pack compatible and comprised of a 12-volt light bulb with an attached pair of leads. To properly operate this tool use the following procedures. When testing for voltage: 1. Attach one lead to ground. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is voltage at the point being tested. When testing for ground: 1. Attach one lead to battery positive voltage. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where ground should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is ground at the point being tested. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5405 Testing for a Short to Voltage Testing for a Short to Voltage Special Tools EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM) For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test Probe Caution). The following procedure tests for a short to voltage in a circuit. 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Set the rotary dial of the Digital Multimeter (DMM) to the V (DC) position. 4. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. Turn ON the ignition and operate all accessories. 7. If the voltage measured is greater than 1 V, there is a short to voltage in the circuit. Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions Special Tools J-25070 - Heat Gun For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Many intermittent open or shorted circuits are affected by harness/connector movement that is caused by vibration, engine torque, bumps/rough pavement, etc. In order to duplicate the customer's concern, it may be necessary to manipulate the wiring harness if the malfunction appears to be vibration related. Manipulation of a circuit can consist of a wide variety of actions, including: * Wiggling the harness * Disconnecting a connector and reconnecting * Stressing the mechanical connection of a connector * Pulling on the harness or wire in order to identify a separation/break inside the insulation * Relocating a harness or wires All these actions should be performed with some goal in mind. For instance, with a scan tool connected, wiggling the wires may uncover a faulty input to the control module. The snapshot option would be appropriate here. Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure). Another option is, with the component commanded ON and OFF by the scan tool, move related connectors and wiring and observe the component operation. With the engine running, move related connectors and wiring while monitoring engine operation. If harness or connector movement affects the data displayed, component/system operation, or engine operation, inspect and repair the harness/connections as necessary. You may need to load the vehicle in order to duplicate the concern. This may require the use of weights, floor jacks, jackstands, frame machines, etc. In these cases you are attempting to duplicate the concern by manipulating the suspension or frame. This method is useful in finding harnesses that are too short and their connectors pull apart enough to cause a poor connection. A DMM set to Peak Min/Max mode and connected to the suspect circuit while testing can yield desirable results. Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Electrical Intermittents). Certainly, using the senses of sight, smell, and hearing while manipulating the circuit can provide good results as well. There may be instances where circuit manipulation alone will not meet the required criteria for the fault condition to appear. In such cases it may be necessary to expose the suspect circuit to other conditions while manipulating the harness. Such conditions would include high moisture conditions, along with exceptionally high or low temperatures. The following discusses how to expose the circuit to these kinds of conditions. Salt Water Spray Some compounds possess the ability to conduct electricity when dissolved in water such as ordinary salt. By mixing table salt with water in sufficient Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5406 quantities, you can enhance the conductive properties of water so that any circuit which may be sensitive to moisture will more readily fail when liberally sprayed with this mixture. Mixing 0.35L (12 oz) of water with approximately 1 tablespoon of salt will yield a salt solution of 5 percent. Fill a normal spray bottle with this mixture. This mixture is sufficient to enhance the water's own conductivity. This may cause the circuit to fail more easily when sprayed. Once the mixture is completed, spray the suspect area liberally with the solution. Then, while monitoring either a scan tool or DMM, manipulate the harness as discussed previously. High Temperature Conditions If the complaint tends to be heat related, you can simulate the condition using the J-25070 - heat gun. Using the heat gun, you can heat up the suspected area or component. Manipulate the harnesses under high temperature conditions while monitoring the scan tool or DMM to locate the fault condition. The high temperature condition may be achieved simply by test driving the vehicle at normal operating temperature. If a heat gun is unavailable, consider this option to enhance your diagnosis. This option does not allow for the same control, however. Low Temperature Conditions Depending on the nature of the fault condition, placing a fan in front of the vehicle while the vehicle is in the shade can have the desired effect. If this is unsuccessful, use local cooling treatments such as ice or a venturi type nozzle (one that provides hot or cold air). This type of tool is capable of producing air stream temperatures down to -18°C (0°F) from one end and +71°C (160°F) from the other. This is ideally suited for localized cooling needs. Once the vehicle, component, or harness has been sufficiently cooled, manipulate the harness or components in an effort to duplicate the concern. Duplicating Failure Conditions * If none of the previous tests are successful, attempt to duplicate and/or capture the failure conditions. * Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, where applicable, contains the conditions that were present when the DTC set. 1. Review and record Freeze Frame/Failure Records data. 2. Clear the DTCs using the scan tool. 3. Turn the key to OFF and wait 15 seconds. 4. Operate the vehicle under the same conditions that were noted in Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, as closely as possible. The vehicle must also be operating within the Conditions for Running the DTC. Refer to Conditions for Running the DTC in the supporting text if a DTC is being diagnosed. 5. Monitor DTC Status for the DTC being tested. The scan tool will indicate Ran, when the enabling conditions have been satisfied long enough for the DTC to run. The scan tool will also indicate whether the DTC passed or failed. * An alternate method is to drive the vehicle with the DMM connected to a suspected circuit. An abnormal reading on the DMM when the concern occurs, may help you locate the concern. Measuring Frequency Measuring Frequency Special Tools EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM) For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test Probe Caution). The following procedure determines the frequency of a signal. Note: Connecting the Digital Multimeter (DMM) to the circuit before pressing the Hz button will allow the DMM to autorange to an appropriate range. 1. Apply power to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (AC) position. 3. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5407 5. Press the Hz button on the DMM. 6. The DMM will display the frequency measured. Measuring Voltage Measuring Voltage Special Tools EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM) For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test Probe Caution). The following procedure measures the voltage at a selected point in a circuit. 1. Disconnect the electrical harness connector for the circuit being tested, if necessary. 2. Enable the circuit and/or system being tested. Use the following methods: * Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. * Turn ON the engine. * Turn ON the circuit and/or system with a scan tool in Output Controls. * Turn ON the switch for the circuit and/or system being tested. 3. Select the V (AC) or V (DC) position on the Digital Multimeter (DMM). 4. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the point of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. The DMM displays the voltage measured at that point. Measuring Voltage Drop Measuring Voltage Drop Special Tools EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM) For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test Probe Caution). The following procedure determines the difference in voltage potential between 2 points. 1. Set the rotary dial of the Digital Multimeter (DMM) to the V (DC) position. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5408 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to one point of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to the other point of the circuit. 4. Operate the circuit. 5. The DMM displays the difference in voltage between the 2 points. Probing Electrical Connectors Probing Electrical Connectors Note: Always be sure to reinstall the connector position assurance (CPA) and terminal position assurance (TPA) when reconnecting connectors or replacing terminals. Front probe Disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the mating side (front) of the connector. Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test Probe Caution). Note: When probing female 0.64 terminals, it is important to use the correct adapter. There have been some revisions to the test adapter for 0.64 terminals. The proper adapter for 0.64 terminals is the EL-35616-64B which has a gold terminal and a black wire between the base and tip. Failure to use the proper test adapter may result in damage to the terminal being tested and improper diagnosis. Note: The proper adapter for probing the terminals for fuses, relays, or diodes in an electrical center is EL-35616-35. Using any other tool or adapter may damage the terminal being tested. Refer to the following table as a guide in selecting the correct test adapter for front probing connectors: Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5409 Backprobe Note: * Backprobe connector terminals only when specifically required in diagnostic procedures. * Do not backprobe a sealed (Weather Pack(R)) connector, less than a 280 series Metri-Pack connector, a Micro-Pack connector, or a flat wire (dock and lock) connector. * Backprobing can be a source of damage to connector terminals. Use care in order to avoid deforming the terminal, either by forcing the test probe too far into the cavity or by using too large of a test probe. * After backprobing any connector, inspect for terminal damage. If terminal damage is suspected, test for proper terminal contact. Do not disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the harness side (back) of the connector. Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure Using Snapshots in Global Diagnostic System (GDS) Overview Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5410 A snapshot is a recording of what a control module on the vehicle was receiving for information while the snapshot is being made. A snapshot may be used to analyze the data during the time a vehicle condition is current. This allows you to concentrate on making the condition occur, rather than trying to view all the data in anticipation of the fault. To record a snapshot in GDS, select, Record Snapshot, from the options at the top right portion of any of the various pages that allow snapshots to be taken (e.g. Data Display, Control Functions, etc.). When you are finished recording, select, Stop Snapshot recording. The snapshot will now be available for replay. Snapshot Replay The Snapshot Replay function allows reviews of previously recorded vehicle snapshot data. This information can be used in analysis of vehicle problems and detection of trigger error conditions. The graph function can be used to compare parameters to see if a component is functioning properly. Recorded snapshots can be selected for viewing by the following three methods: * Selecting a snapshot file from the Vehicle Home Page and clicking on the Review selection. * Double clicking on the selected snapshot from the Vehicle Home Page. * Entering the Tools selection from the Menu selection and selecting Snapshot replay. Next, open the Snapshot Manager. Double click on the snapshot file you wish to view or click on the Load Snapshot selection and select a snapshot file. Regardless of selection method, a File Loaded pop-up window will be displayed from the Snapshot Replay screen. Select OK from the pop-up window. Snapshot Play Functions There are several snapshot play functions that are used to replay recorded snapshots * The Play function is used to play the snapshot forward by clicking on this selection. A marker will move across the screen when this selection is used. All selections in this area turn grey when they are active. * The Pause function is used to pause play of the snapshot. When this selection is clicked a second time the snapshot will start playing where it left off. * The Stop function is used to stop playing the snapshot. The snapshot will start from the beginning, if Play is selected after using the Stop function. Time Control Time control is used to control the snapshot replay. This function allows selection of a specific time frame, display of different views, and control of display speed. The following functions can be selected directly under Time Control. * The Bookmark selection allows you to add a specific comment in the current display and return to this point in the future. When this option is selected, a pop-up window is displayed. Enter a bookmark name and select OK. * The Note Pad can be selected to add comments to the snapshot replay file at the current point of time. When this option is selected, a pop-up window is displayed. Enter a comment for the snapshot file and select OK. * The Load Snapshot (blue folder) opens a snapshot file and makes it ready for further analysis. This function is also available by clicking on an available snapshot file from the Snapshot Manager. * The Down Arrow displays all Time Control options when selected. Individual options can also be selected by clicking on the item you want. * The Snapshot Display Speed can be controlled by selecting this option. Slow speeds of 1/8X, 1/4X, and 1/2X can be selected. The real time speed can also be selected at 1. Faster speeds of 2X, 4X, and 8X can also be obtained by using this selection. View Selections Each View Selection provides a different way of displaying vehicle data for analysis. The following functions can be selected under Available Views: Note: The parameter name will be shown in the original language used for capture if no translation is available for the name. * Parameter List View - Displays incoming information from the snapshot file. The current value of the parameters is displayed on the screen. * Log View - Contains all the information from the snapshot file. All parameter values are listed in the order they were recorded. Specific parameters can be added or removed from a watchlist by clicking on the appropriate item. * State View - Shows the values of all parameters in a specific time frame. These values can be used for comparison with the trigger view. * Trigger View - Displays all system and user defined triggers. This function can be used when there is a combination of factors involved in a diagnostic problem. When a Trigger condition is met a caution triangle will be displayed on the screen. Triggers: * Load Triggers - Allows you to load a file containing trigger definitions. * Save Triggers - Allows you to save the trigger to your computer's hard drive. * Remove Trigger - Allows you to remove the current trigger. It will no longer be present. * Edit Trigger - Displays a pop-up window where you can modify the limits and parameters contained within a trigger. * Adds Trigger - Displays a pop-up window to configure a trigger. * DTC View - After the Play function is selected and this option is selected this function opens the list of recorded DTCs. * Line Graph View - Displays data that can be visualized against the time-axis. From this view, specific parameters can be selected for graphing by Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5411 checking the box under Selected. At the bottom of the graph there are four functions Zoom In (increase size), Zoom Out (decrease size), Bookmarks, and Pause Scrolling. Each of these functions can be accessed by clicking on them. Testing for Continuity Testing for Continuity Special Tools EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM) For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test Probe Caution). The following procedures verify good continuity in a circuit. With a Digital Multimeter (DMM) 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the Ohms position. 2. Disconnect the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 3. Disconnect the load. 4. Press the MIN MAX button on the DMM. 5. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 6. Connect the other lead of the DMM to the other end of the circuit. 7. If the DMM displays low or no resistance, the circuit has good continuity. With a Test Lamp Note: Only use the test lamp procedure on low impedance power and ground circuits. 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect one lead of the test lamp to one end of the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 5. Connect the other end of the circuit to ground. 6. If the test lamp illuminates (full intensity), then the circuit has good continuity. Testing for Electrical Intermittents Testing for Electrical Intermittents Special Tools EL-39200 Digital Multimeter For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Perform the following procedures while wiggling the harness from side to side. Continue this at convenient points (about 6 inches apart) while watching the test equipment. * Testing for Short to Ground (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Short to Ground) * Testing for Continuity (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Continuity) * Testing for a Short to Voltage (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for a Short to Voltage) If the fault is not identified, perform the procedure below using the MIN MAX feature on the EL-39200 DMM. This feature allows you to manipulate the circuit without having to watch the EL-39200. The EL-39200 will generate an audible tone when a change is detected. Note: The EL-39200 must be used in order to perform the following procedure since the EL-39200 can monitor current, resistance or voltage while recording the minimum (MIN), and maximum (MAX) values measured. 1. Connect the EL-39200 to both sides of a suspected connector (still connected), or from one end of a suspected circuit to the other. Refer to Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5412 Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter) for information on connecting the EL-39200 to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the EL-39200 to the V (AC) or V (DC) position. 3. Press the range button of the EL-39200 in order to select the desired voltage range. 4. Press the MIN MAX button of the EL-39200. The EL-39200 displays 100 ms RECORD and emits an audible tone (beep). Note: The 100 ms RECORD mode is the length of time an input must stay at a new value in order to record the full change. 5. Simulate the condition that is potentially causing the intermittent connection, either by wiggling the connections or the wiring, test driving, or performing other operations. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions). 6. Listen for the audible Min Max Alert which indicates that a new minimum or maximum value has been recorded. 7. Press the MIN MAX button once in order to display the MAX value and note the value. 8. Press the MIN MAX button again in order to display the MIN value and note the value. 9. Determine the difference between the MIN and MAX values. * If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is 1 V or greater an intermittent open or high resistance condition exists. Repair the condition as necessary. * If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is less than 1 V, an intermittent open or high resistance condition does not exist. Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections Special Tools EL-35616 Terminal Test Probe Kit For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). When the condition is not currently present, but is indicated in DTC history, the cause may be intermittent. An intermittent may also be the cause when there is a customer complaint, but the symptom cannot be duplicated. Refer to the Symptom Table of the system that is suspect of causing the condition before trying to locate an intermittent condition. Most intermittent conditions are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. Inspect for the following items: * Wiring broken inside the insulation * Poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector * Poor terminal to wire connection-Some conditions which fall under this description are poor crimps, poor solder joints, crimping over the wire insulation rather than the wire itself, and corrosion in the wire to terminal contact area, etc. * Pierced or damaged insulation can allow moisture to enter the wiring causing corrosion. The conductor can corrode inside the insulation, with little visible evidence. Look for swollen and stiff sections of wire in the suspect circuits. * Wiring which has been pinched, cut, or its insulation rubbed through may cause an intermittent open or short as the bare area touches other wiring or parts of the vehicle. * Wiring that comes in contact with hot or exhaust components * Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions) in order to duplicate the conditions required, in order to verify the customer concern. * Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Electrical Intermittents) for test procedures to detect intermittent open, high resistance, short to ground, and short to voltage conditions. * Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure) for advanced intermittent diagnosis and Vehicle Data Recorder operation. Testing for Terminal Fretting Some intermittent conditions can be caused by wire terminal fretting corrosion. Fretting corrosion is a build-up of insulating, oxidized wear debris that can form when there is a small motion between electrical contacts. The oxidized wear debris can pile up enough at the electrical contact spots that the electrical resistance across the connection increases. Movement between the contacting surfaces as small as 10 to 100 microns can cause fretting. To put this in perspective, a sheet of paper is about 100 microns thick, so fretting motion is small and hard to see. Vibration and thermal expansion/contraction are the main sources that create fretting motion. Since vehicles vibrate and can experience large temperature swings, they are a good source for fretting motion. Tin, copper, nickel, and iron surfaces are all susceptible to fretting corrosion. Fretting corrosion can be difficult to see but it looks like small, dark smudges on the terminals contact surface. To correct a fretting condition disconnect the suspect connector and add Nyogel lubricant 760G (dielectric grease) to both sides of the connector Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5413 terminals. Then reconnect the connector and wipe away any excess lubricant. This will correct the additional terminal contact resistance due to the terminal fretting corrosion. Testing for Proper Terminal Contact It is important to test terminal contact at the component and any inline connectors before replacing a suspect component. Mating terminals must be inspected to ensure good terminal contact. A poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector may be the result of contamination or deformation. Contamination may be caused by the connector halves being improperly connected. A missing or damaged connector seal, damage to the connector itself, or exposing the terminals to moisture and dirt can also cause contamination. Contamination, usually in the underhood or underbody connectors, leads to terminal corrosion, causing an open circuit or intermittently open circuit. Deformation is caused by probing the mating side of a connector terminal without the proper adapter. Always use the EL-35616 when probing connectors. Other causes of terminal deformation are improperly joining the connector halves, or repeatedly separating and joining the connector halves. Deformation, usually to the female terminal contact tang, can result in poor terminal contact causing an open or intermittently open circuit. Testing for Proper Terminal Contact in Bussed Electrical Centers It is very important to use the correct test adapter when testing for proper terminal contact of fuses and relays in a bussed electrical center. Use EL-35616-35 to test for proper terminal contact. Failure to use EL-35616-35 can result in improper diagnosis of the bussed electrical center. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact: 1. Separate the connector halves. 2. Visually inspect the connector halves for contamination. Contamination may result in a white or green build-up within the connector body or between terminals. This causes high terminal resistance, intermittent contact, or an open circuit. An underhood or underbody connector that shows signs of contamination should be replaced in its entirety: terminals, seals, and connector body. 3. Using an equivalent male terminal / terminated lead, verify that the retention force is significantly different between a known good terminal and the suspect terminal. Replace the female terminal in question. Flat Wire (Dock and Lock) Connectors There are no serviceable parts for flat wire (dock and lock) connectors on the harness side or the component side. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact: 1. Remove the component in question. 2. Visually inspect each side of the connector for signs of contamination. Avoid touching either side of the connector as oil from your skin may be a source of contamination as well. 3. Visually inspect the terminal bearing surfaces of the flat wire circuits for splits, cracks, or other imperfections that could cause poor terminal contact. Visually inspect the component side connector to ensure that all of the terminals are uniform and free of damage or deformation. 4. Insert the appropriate adapter from the on the flat wire harness connector in order to test the circuit in question. Control Module/Component Voltage and Grounds Poor voltage or ground connections can cause widely varying symptoms. * Test all control module voltage supply circuits. Many vehicles have multiple circuits supplying voltage to a control module. Other components in the system may have separate voltage supply circuits that may also need to be tested. Inspect connections at the module/component connectors, fuses, and any intermediate connections between the voltage source and the module/component. A test lamp or a DMM may indicate that voltage is present, but neither tests the ability of the circuit to carry sufficient current. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. Refer to Circuit Testing (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Circuit Testing) and Power Distribution Schematics (See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Starting and Charging/Power and Ground Distribution/System Diagram/Power Distribution Schematics). * Test all control module ground and system ground circuits. The control module may have multiple ground circuits. Other components in the system may have separate grounds that may also need to be tested. Inspect grounds for clean and tight connections at the grounding point. Inspect the connections at the component and in splice packs, where applicable. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. Refer to Circuit Testing (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Circuit Testing) and Ground Distribution Schematics (See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Starting and Charging/Power and Ground Distribution/System Diagram/Ground Distribution Schematics). Temperature Sensitivity * An intermittent condition may occur when a component/connection reaches normal operating temperature. The condition may occur only when the component/connection is cold, or only when the component/connection is hot. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5414 * Freeze Frame, Failure Records, Snapshot, or Vehicle Data Recorder data may help with this type of intermittent condition, where applicable. * If the intermittent is related to heat, review the data for a relationship with the following: - High ambient temperatures - Underhood/engine generated heat - Circuit generated heat due to a poor connection, or high electrical load - Higher than normal load conditions, towing, etc. * If the intermittent is related to cold, review the data for the following: - Low ambient temperatures-In extremely low temperatures, ice may form in a connection or component. Inspect for water intrusion. - The condition only occurs on a cold start. - The condition goes away when the vehicle warms up. * Information from the customer may help to determine if the trouble follows a pattern that is temperature related. * If temperature is suspected of causing an intermittent fault condition, attempt to duplicate the condition. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions) in order to duplicate the conditions required. Electromagnetic Interference and Electrical Noise Some electrical components/circuits are sensitive to electromagnetic interference or other types of electrical noise. Inspect for the following conditions: * A misrouted harness that is too close to high voltage/high current devices such as secondary ignition components, motors, generator etc.-These components may induce electrical noise on a circuit that could interfere with normal circuit operation. * Electrical system interference caused by a malfunctioning relay, or a control module driven solenoid or switch-These conditions can cause a sharp electrical surge. Normally, the condition will occur when the malfunctioning component is operating. * Improper installation of non-factory or aftermarket add on accessories such as lights, 2-way radios, amplifiers, electric motors, remote starters, alarm systems, cell phones, etc.-These accessories may lead to interference while in use, but do not fail when the accessories are not in use. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Checking Aftermarket Accessories). * Test for an open diode across the A/C compressor clutch and for other open diodes. Some relays may contain a clamping diode. * The generator may be allowing AC noise into the electrical system. Incorrect Control Module * There are only a few situations where reprogramming a control module is appropriate: - A new service control module is installed. - A control module from another vehicle is installed. - Revised software/calibration files have been released for this vehicle. Note: DO NOT re-program the control module with the SAME software/calibration files that are already present in the control module. This is not an effective repair for any type of concern. * Verify that the control module contains the correct software/calibration. If incorrect programming is found, reprogram the control module with the most current software/calibration. Refer to Control Module References (See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning) for replacement, setup, and programming. Testing for Short to Ground Testing for Short to Ground Special Tools * EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM) * EL 35616-200 - Test Light-Probe Kit For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test Probe Caution). The following procedures test for a short to ground in a circuit. With a Digital Multimeter (DMM) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5415 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the Ohms position. 4. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the other lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. If the DMM does NOT display infinite resistance (OL), there is a short to ground in the circuit. With a Test Lamp 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect one lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to one end of the circuit to be tested. 5. If the test lamp illuminates, there is a short to ground in the circuit. Fuse Powering Several Loads 1. Review the system schematic and locate the fuse that is open. 2. Open the first connector or switch leading from the fuse to each load. 3. Connect a DMM across the fuse terminals (be sure that the fuse is powered). * When the DMM displays voltage the short is in the wiring leading to the first connector or switch. * If the DMM does not display voltage refer to the next step. 4. Close each connector or switch until the DMM displays voltage in order to find which circuit is shorted. Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter Special Tools EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM) For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test Probe Caution). Digital Multimeter (DMM) Basic Requirements Service information is validated using digital multimeters that meet or exceed the following requirements. Using a multimeter that does not meet these basic requirements may give inaccurate readings which could lead to an incorrect diagnosis. Display and Settings 1. Four digits displayed 2. Voltage, amperage, resistance, frequency, diode test settings, and min-max function 3. Display positive and negative values Voltage 1. Have at least 10 Mohm input impedance 2. Test a DC voltage range of 0.1-1000 V. 3. Test an AC voltage range of 0.1-1000 V. Amperage 1. Test a DC amperage range of 0.1µA-10 A. 2. Test an AC amperage range of 0.1µA-10 A. Resistance Test a resistance range of 0.1 ohm-40 Mohm and displays infinite for a value greater than 40 Mohm (O.L. (Over-load)) Frequency Test for a frequency range of 0.5 HZ-199 K HZ Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5416 Diode Test 1. Apply at least 1 mA when performing the diode bias test 2. Display the break over voltage drop (0-3 V) of a forward biased diode 3. Display infinite (O.L. (Over-load)) when a diode is reverse biased Min-Max Readings 1. Can update at a 1 ms sample rate 2. Saves and displays minimum and maximum values Note: Circuits which include any solid state control modules, such as the engine control module (ECM), should only be tested with a 10 MOhms or higher impedance digital multimeter such as the EL-39200. The EL-39200 instruction manual is a good source of information and should be read thoroughly upon receipt of the DMM as well as kept on hand for future reference. A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present if the impedance is low enough, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. In other words, if there is not enough current, the test lamp will not illuminate even though voltage is present. The ohmmeter function on a DMM shows how much resistance exists between 2 points along a circuit. Low resistance in a circuit means good continuity. Note: Disconnect the power feed from the suspect circuit when measuring resistance with a DMM. This prevents incorrect readings. DMMs apply such a small voltage to measure resistance that the presence of voltages can upset a resistance reading. Diodes and solid state components in a circuit can cause a DMM to display a false reading. To find out if a component is affecting a measurement take a reading once, then reverse the leads and take a second reading. If the readings differ the solid state component is affecting the measurement. Following are examples of the various methods of connecting the DMM to the circuit to be tested: * Probe both ends of the connector and either hold the leads in place while manipulating the connector or tape the leads to the harness for continuous monitoring while you perform other operations or test driving. Refer to Probing Electrical Connectors (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Probing Electrical Connectors). * Disconnect the harness at both ends of the suspected circuit where it connects either to a component or to other harnesses. * If the system that is being diagnosed has a specified pinout or breakout box, it may be used in order to simplify connecting the DMM to the circuit or for testing multiple circuits quickly. Using Connector Test Adapters Using Connector Test Adapters Special Tools EL 35616 - Terminal Test Probe Kit For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Caution: Do not insert test equipment probes (DMM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the EL-38125-580 GM Approved Terminal Release Tool Kit in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the EL-38125-580 GM Approved Terminal Release Tool Kit , ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the EL-38125-580 GM Approved Terminal Release Tool Kit label on the inside of the EL-38125-580 GM Approved Terminal Release Tool Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Using Fused Jumper Wires Using Fused Jumper Wires Special Tools J 36169-A Fused Jumper Wire Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5417 Note: A fused jumper may not protect solid state components from being damaged. The J 36169-A includes small clamp connectors that provide adaptation to most connectors without damage. This fused jumper wire is supplied with a 20-A fuse which may not be suitable for some circuits. Do not use a fuse with a higher rating than the fuse that protects the circuit being tested. AFL/EPC Connectors AFL/EPC Connectors Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. 1. For connectors with a bolt in the dress cover, turn the bolt counterclockwise to remove the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5418 2. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the top of the wire dress cover. Slide the CPA forward. 3. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5419 View showing depressing of the lever lock release tab. View of connector in released position. 4. Disconnect the connector from the component. 5. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the dress cover. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs and remove the dress cover. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5420 6. Release the rear lower half of the wiredress cover. 7. Release the tabs that are holding the wiredress cover to the connector body. 8. Remove the nose piece by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the slots on both ends of the connector body. Gently pry the nose piece out of the connector. J 38125-216 can also be used to remove the nose piece. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5421 9. Use the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by lifting the terminal retaining tabs on the inside of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Bosch Connectors (BSK) Bosch Connectors (BSK) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5422 Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 3. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 4. Insert the J 38125-561 tool into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 5. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Bosch Connectors (ECM) Bosch Connectors (ECM) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5423 1. Locate the assist lever on the top of the connector. Move the assist lever to the forward position. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5424 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the connector. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the locking tabs and remove the dress cover. 4. The terminal positive assurance (TPA) is located in the front of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5425 5. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove TPA from the connector. 6. Use the J 38125-213 or the J 38125-556 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5426 Note: Ensure that the dress cover and connector body are both in the released position before reassembling. Failure to do so may cause damage to the connector and component. Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Bosch Connectors (0.64) Bosch Connectors (0.64) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While pressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock until the lever is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Pull the rubber boot that covers the wires back to expose the end of the connector dress cover. 4. Place the connector locking lever in the center of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5427 5. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs that are on the wire end of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover and connector body and pry up. 6. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs located on the opposite side of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover at the connector end and pry up. 7. Remove the dress cover. 8. Cut the tie wrap on the wire bundle. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5428 9. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting a small flat-bladed tool into the small slot in the end of the slider and pushing on the TPA until it comes out of the connector. When the TPA exits the opposite side of the connector, gasp the TPA and pull it completely out of the connector. 10. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 11. Insert the J 38125-560 into the 2 triangular cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 12. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Terminal Replacement Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5429 1. Prior to installation the terminal must be aligned so the (1) coding lugs align with the (2) coding grooves on the connector. 2. Once the terminal is aligned, slide the terminal into the cavity until the retainer has engaged in the cavity of the connector. 3. Slide the TPA in the connector body and seat it using a small flat bladed tool. The TPA is seated when it is flush with the contact housing. 4. Secure the wires to the connector body using a tie wrap and replace the dress cover and grommet. Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Pull out the slider on the connector position assurance (CPA) until it is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5430 5. Insert the J 38125-557 into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Connector Position Assurance Locks Connector Position Assurance Locks The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of the connector. CPAs are used in various connectors throughout the vehicle. CPAs are also used in all SIR system electrical connectors. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals, of the connector. Connector Repairs Connector Repairs Connector Repairs contains a list of all connector repairs. The connector repairs are listed by the connector manufacturer and then by connector type. If the technician cannot identify the manufacturer of the connector, refer to Identifying Connectors below. Knowing the connector manufacturer will assist in finding the correct connector repair from the following list: * Connector Position Assurance Locks (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Connector Position Assurance Locks) * Terminal Position Assurance Locks (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Terminal Position Assurance Locks) * AFL/EPC Connectors (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/AFL/EPC Connectors) * Bosch Connectors (BSK) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Bosch Connectors (BSK))Bosch Connectors (0.64) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Bosch Connectors (0.64))Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT))Bosch Connectors (ECM) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Bosch Connectors (ECM)) * Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack))Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Push to Seat))Delphi Connectors Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5431 (Pull To Seat) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Pull to Seat))Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W))Delphi Connectors (Micro.64) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Micro .64))Delphi Connectors (12-Way) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (12-Way))Delphi Connectors (Steering Gear) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Steering Gear)) * FCI Connectors (Lever Lock) (See: General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/FCI Connectors (Lever Lock))FCI Connectors (SIR) (See: General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/FCI (SIR)) * FEP Connectors (Steering Gear) (See: General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/FEP Connectors (Steering Gear)) * JST Connectors (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/JST Connectors) * Kostal Connectors (Glow Plug Control Module) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Kostal Connectors (Glow Plug Control Module))Kostal Connectors (Transmission) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Kostal Connectors (Transmission)) * Molex Connectors (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Molex Connectors) * Sumitomo Connectors (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Sumitomo Connectors) * Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way))Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor))Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap))Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way))Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module)) * Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Yazaki Connectors (2-Way))Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Yazaki Connectors (16-Way)) * Repairing Connector Terminals (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Repairing Connector Terminals) Connector Anatomy 1 - Connector Positive Assurance (CPA) 2 - Assist Lever 3 - Wiredress Cover 4 - Seal Strain/Relief Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5432 5 - Slide Left Hand 6 - Slide Right Hand 7 - Terminal Positive Assurance (TPA) 8 - Terminal Positive Assurance (TPA) 9 - Connector Seal 10 - Connector Housing 11 - Inner Connector Identifying Connectors Knowing the connector manufacturer is helpful when trying to locating the correct connector repair procedure. There are many different connector designs used on GM vehicles and it is sometimes difficult to identify the connector manufacturer. The information in this document should help with the identification of connector manufactures. The following connector manufacturers make most of the connectors found in GM vehicles: * AFL/EPC (Alcoa Fujikura Ltd./Engineered Plastics Components) * Bosch * Delphi * FCI (Framatome Connectors International) * JAE (Japan Aviation Electronics) * JST (Japan Solderless Terminals) * Kostel * Molex * Sumitomo * Tyco/AMP * Yazaki Identifying the manufacturer of a connector is often difficult. When trying to determine the manufacturer of a connector, look for specific identifying marks that are unique to that connector supplier. Most of these identify marks are hard to find or see. Check the connector carefully and refer to the information below for pictures and descriptions of connector identification markings. * Most of AFLs connectors have EPC on their connector body. Some of the smaller connectors will not have any markings on them. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5433 * In some cases Bosch will actually be printed on the connector. If Bosch does not appear on the connector, look for the Bosch logo. The Bosch logo is a circle with a blunted arrow inside. This logo can appear anywhere on the connector and is often very small. * In some cases Delphi will actually be printed on the connector. If Delphi is not printed on the connector, look for PED. In both cases there is no specific orientation for Delphi or PED and they can appear anywhere on the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5434 * FCI connectors may have the FCI logo on their connectors. The logo is the letters FCI with an "A" above it. * JAE connector have JAE in small letters on their connectors. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5435 * JST connectors have JST in small letters on their connectors, similar to that above. The location of the logo will vary with the connector size and style. * Kostel has an "LK" with a circle around it. These connector are usually used as a transmissions connection. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5436 * Most Molex connectors will have the Molex logo on the dresscover of the connector. In some cases the connectors may have MX followed by another letter. The third letter indicates where the connector was made. A connector with MXD is a Molex connector made in Detroit. Sumitomo has a unique symbol on their connector and possibly a part number. The symbol is similar to that of a diamond lying on its side, similar to that shown. The logo could appear anywhere but the most common place is at the wire side of the housing. * Tyco/AMP has many different and unique connector designs. Some may or may not have identifiable marks on them. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5437 * Yazaki has a wedge or arrow shape, similar to that shown. Delphi Connectors (Push to Seat) Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Follow the steps below in order to repair push to seat connectors. 1. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device, the connector position assurance (CPA) device, and/or the secondary lock. 2. Separate the connector halves (1). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5438 3. Use the proper pick or removal tool (1) in order to release the terminal. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 4. Gently pull the cable and the terminal (2) out of the back of the connector. 5. Re-form the locking device if you are going to reuse the terminal (1). 6. To repair the terminal, refer to Terminal Repair. Terminal Repair 1. Slip the cable seal away from the terminal. 2. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 3. Slip a new cable seal onto the wire. 4. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 5. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 6. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. 7. Slide the cable seal toward the terminal. 8. Crimp the cable seal and the insulation. 9. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply grease to the connector. Reinstalling Terminal 1. In order to reuse a terminal or lead assembly, refer to Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Wiring Repairs). 2. Ensure that the cable seal is kept on the terminal side of the splice. 3. Insert the lead from the back until it catches. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Terminated Lead Repair 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Find the appropriate terminated lead. 3. Use the appropriate splice sleeves depending on the gauge size. 4. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves). Delphi Connectors (Pull to Seat) Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) Special Tools Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5439 J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal If the terminal is visibly damaged or is suspected of having a faulty connection, the terminal should be replaced. Follow the steps below in order to repair pull-to-seat connectors: 1. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) device and/or the secondary lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component or separate the connectors for in-line connectors. 3. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device. 4. Insert the proper pick or removal tool into the front of the connector body. Note: On connectors with more than one terminal the service loop may not be large enough to remove the terminal and crimp on a new one. If the terminal wire does not have a large enough service loop for removal, cut the wire 5 cm (2 in) behind the connector before removal. 5. Grasp the wire at the back of the connector body and gently push the terminal out the front of the connector body. Terminal Repair 1. If the wire needed to be cut in order to remove the terminal, gently push a small length of the same size wire through the back of the connector cavity until there is enough wire exposed in order to crimp on a new terminal. If the wire was not cut, cut the existing wire as close to the old terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 4. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. Terminal Installation 1. Align the terminal and pull the wire from the back of the connector in order to seat the terminal. 2. If necessary, cut the new wire to proper length and splice with existing circuit. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves). 3. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply dielectric grease to the connector. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Micro .64) Delphi Connectors (Micro.64) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5440 Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro.64 connectors. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. The lever lock may be located on the top or sides of the wire dress cover. View of a typical Micro 64 connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5441 Depress the lock and pull the lever over and past the lock. View of the connector when released from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5442 View of another type of Micro 64 connector. Depress the locks that are located on both sides of the wiredress cover and pull the lever over and past the locks. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5443 View of the connector when released from the component. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the front of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool push down on one of the locking tabs and pull the cover up until the dress cover releases. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. 4. Once the front 2 locks are unlocked, lift the front of the dress cover and pull it forward. Note: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 5. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the small slot on the TPA and pushing down until the TPA releases. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5444 Note: Be careful not to angle or rock the J 38125-21 tool when inserting it into the connector or the tool may break. 6. Insert the J 38125-21 tool into the round canal between the terminals cavities at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Follow the steps below in order to repair Micro 64 connector terminals. The Micro 64 connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-64 (M jaw) was developed to crimp Micro 64 terminals. The J 38125-64 crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. The J 38125-64 crimping tool is also designed to crimp both the wire and the insulation at the same time. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro 64 terminals. Note: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gauge wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 1. Cut the wire as close to the damaged terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5445 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert terminal into the appropriate terminal holder until it hits bottom and stops. The correct terminal holder is determined by the wire size. Also ensure that the terminals wings are pointing towards the former on the tool and the release locator. 5. Insert the stripped cable into the terminal. Insulation should be visible on both sides of the terminal insulation wings. 6. Compress the handles until the ratchet automatically releases. 7. Place the terminal into the appropriate cavity and assemble the connector. Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5446 Terminal Removal Procedure There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W connectors. These connectors are very similar but use different terminals and have some minor physical differences also. The first connector design of the Micro-Pack 100W (1) has a white connector interface that holds the terminals. The second design of the Micro-Pack 100W (2) has a gray interface to hold the terminals. Also, the first design has terminal cavities that are further apart (3 mm centerline) and offset from the other row of terminal cavities in the connector. The second design has terminals cavities that are closer together (2.54 mm centerline) and aligned vertically. One other way to identify the second design is the thin strip of material that runs along the outside of the cavities. Note: There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W terminals which are very similar. Ensure that you have the correct terminal before crimping the new terminal to the wire. The first design connector uses the longer terminal (1) that has a raised area in front of the recess in the terminal. The second design connector uses the shorter terminal without the raised area. Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro-Pack 100W connectors. Some Micro-Pack 100W connector disassembly procedures will vary. Use this procedure as a guide. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5447 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Locate the nose piece locking tabs that are positioned on the side of the connector nose piece. The connector nose piece acts as a terminal positive assurance (TPA) and may be referred to as such. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to push in one of the locking tabs while gently pulling on the same side of the nose piece. 4. Repeat the procedure for the other locking tab and remove the nose piece. 5. Remove the wire dress cover. The following is a general procedure for wire dress cover removal. Use this procedure as a guide, some dress cover removal procedures may vary. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5448 6. Use fingers to squeeze the 2 locking legs of the cover. 7. Apply pressure and gently rock the cover until one locking leg is unseated. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5449 8. Continue to apply pressure and rock the cover until the second locking leg is unseated. Repeat procedure for the other side of the dress cover and remove the cover. 9. Use J 38125-12A to gently lift the terminal retaining tab while gently pulling the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. If the terminal is severely bent or damaged, it may be possible on some connectors to push the wire out of the front of the connector instead of pulling it through. This will prevent damage to the internal seals of the connector. Once the terminal is pushed out of the connector, cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible and pull the wire through the connector. Terminal Repair Procedure The Micro-Pack 100W connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool was developed to crimp Micro-Pack 100W terminals. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro-Pack 100 terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5450 1. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. Note: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gauge wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert the terminal into the crimp tool until the core wings are flush with the anvil on the crimp tool. Be sure that the wings are pointed toward the crimp tool former and release the spring locator. The locator will hold the terminal in place. Inspect the alignment of the terminal wings with the crimp tool former. If the terminal wings are wider than the crimp tool former, remove the terminal and bend the terminal wings in slightly. 5. Place stripped wire into terminal. 6. Crimp the new terminal to the wire. If a jam occurs, press the emergency release to open applicator. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5451 Terminal Replacement Procedure After the terminal is crimped to the wire perform the following procedure in order to replace Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the Terminal Removal Procedure. Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The following is the proper procedure for the repair of Weather Pack(R) Connectors. 1. Separate the connector halves (1). 2. Open the secondary lock. A secondary lock aids in terminal retention and is usually molded to the connector (1). 3. Grasp the wire and push the terminal to the forward most position. Hold the wire in this position. 4. Insert the Weather Pack(R) terminal removal tool J 38125-10A into the front (mating end) of the connector cavity until it rests on the cavity shoulder (1). 5. Gently pull on the wire to remove the terminal through the back of the connector (2). Note: Never use force to remove a terminal from a connector. 6. Inspect the terminal and connector for damage. Repair as necessary. Refer to Repairing Connector Terminals (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Repairing Connector Terminals). 7. Reform the lock tang (2) and reset terminal in connector body. 8. Close secondary locks and join connector halves. 9. Verify that circuit is complete and working satisfactorily. 10. Perform system check. Delphi Connectors (12-Way) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5452 Delphi Connectors (12-Way) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) and slide the lever lock away from the connector body. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs on the dress cover of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool release all of the locking tabs. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5453 4. Release the lower wire dress cover locking tab. 5. Release the upper wire dress cover locking tab. 6. Once the locks are unlocked, lift the dress cover off. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5454 Note: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 7. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the locking tabs on both sides of the TPA. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. 8. Remove the nose piece by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the locking tabs on both sides of the nose piece. Gently pry the nose piece out of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5455 9. Insert the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Delphi Connectors (Steering Gear) Delphi Connectors (Steering Gear) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5456 Removal Procedure 1. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the locking tab on the connector. 2. Push down the locking tab to release the connector. The small flat-bladed tool may need to be pushed down and angled back slightly to depress the locking tab. Pull on the connector body while releasing the locking tab to disconnect the connector. FCI Connectors (Lever Lock) FCI Connectors (Lever Lock) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5457 Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. 1. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. 2. The release tab is located on the top of the wiredress cover. 3. View of connector in released position. 4. Disconnect the connector from the component. 5. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the dress cover. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs and remove the dress cover. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5458 6. Use a small flat-blade tool to slide the terminal position assurance (TPA) up one notch on both ends of the connector. The TPA is located underneath the wire dress cover. For the larger terminals insert the J 38125-556 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. For the smaller terminals insert the J 38125-560 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5459 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. FCI (SIR) FCI Connectors (SIR) Removal Procedure Note: The orange CPA must be released first to disconnect or to connect the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5460 1. Lift the orange CPA vertically (avoid lifting on an angle to the connector) approximately 4 mm to release the connector. Use a small flat-bladed tool to help release the orange CPA. The orange CPA can also be released manually without any tools. 2. Grab the connector on both sides and lift the connector vertically to disconnect the connector. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5461 1. Lift the orange CPA vertically approximately 4 mm before installing the connector. Use a small flat-bladed tool to help release the orange CPA. The orange CPA can also be released manually without any tools. 2. Line up the connector key tabs with the initiator key slots. Grab the connector on both sides and push the connector down into the initiator connector sub assembly until fully seated. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5462 3. After the connector is fully seated, push down the orange CPA with your thumb. Push down until the orange CPA is touching the yellow cover on the connector. FEP Connectors (Steering Gear) FEP Connectors (Steering Gear) Removal Procedure 1. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the locking tab on the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5463 2. Push down the locking tab to release the connector. The small flat-bladed tool may need to be pushed down and angled back slightly to depress the locking tab. Pull on the connector body while releasing the locking tab to disconnect the connector. JST Connectors JST Connectors Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. While depressing the lock, remove the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5464 2. Locate the two indents of the terminal position assurance (TPA) located on the bottom of the connector body. Note: The TPA cannot be removed from the connector while there are terminals present in the connector body. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to very carefully raise the TPA on both sides of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5465 4. View of the TPA when removed from the connector body. 5. Use the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the left side of the terminal release cavity as shown in the graphic. Use the tool to move the terminal release to the right with a gentle prying motion. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Kostal Connectors (Glow Plug Control Module) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5466 Kostal Connectors (Glow Plug Control Module) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure View of typical connector. View of connector in released position. 1. Locate the assist lever at the back of the connector. Move the assist lever to the rear position. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5467 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove the dress cover. 4. Slide the dress cover forward and off of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5468 5. The terminal positive assurance (TPA) is located in the front and rear of the connector. Note: The front TPA cannot be removed from the connector. Only move it to the preset position. 6. Use a small flat-blade tool to move the front TPA to the preset position, outboard approximately 0.125 in. (3 mm). 7. Use a small flat-blade tool to completely remove the rear TPA from the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5469 8. Use the J 38125-24 or the J 38125-560 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 9. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Kostal Connectors (Transmission) Kostal Connectors (Transmission) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5470 1. While depressing the lock, twist and remove the connector from the component. 2. Locate the terminal position assurance (TPA). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5471 Note: The TPA cannot be removed from the connector while there are terminals present in the connector body. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to push the TPA until it bottoms out. 4. Use the J 38125-28 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal cavity as shown in the graphic. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 5. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Terminal Replacement Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5472 After the terminal is crimped to the wire, perform the following procedure in order to replace the terminal. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. Locate the terminal position assurance (TPA). 4. Use a small flat-blade tool to push the TPA until it bottoms out. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5473 5. Ensure the TPA is fully seated. The TPA should be centered and flush with the connector body when viewed. Molex Connectors Molex Connectors Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the top of the wire dress cover. Slide the CPA forward. 2. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5474 3. The lever should be in the full forward position. 4. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5475 5. Remove the dress cover by using a flat bladed tool to release the dress cover locking tabs and lift up on the dress cover. 6. Cut the tie wrap that holds the wires to the connector body. 7. Use a small flat-blade tool to pry one side of the nose piece up to the pre-stage position. When the nose piece is in the pre-staged position, the nose piece will be raised above the connector body the length of the step in the nose piece. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5476 8. Use a small flat-blade tool to pry the other side of the piece to the pre-stage position. If the nose piece is higher than the first step in the nose piece, gently push down on the nose piece until it meets with resistance from the connector body, you should feel the nose piece click into position. 9. Insert the J 38125-213 into the small terminal release hole on the nose piece and gently pull on the back of the wire. 10. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Refer to the terminal crimping procedure in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit. Terminal Replacement Procedure After the terminal is crimped to the wire, perform the following procedure in order to replace the terminal. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5477 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the connector disassembly procedure. Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the connector body and pull the CPA out. The CPA is on the wire harness side of connector. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Use a small flat-bladed tool to gently pry off the dress cover by inserting the tool under the cover opposite the harness side and prying up. 4. Remove the cover. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5478 5. Using a small flat-bladed tool, push on the side of the nose piece retainer while pushing the nose piece forward with your thumb. This will release the terminal position assurance (TPA). 6. Insert the J 38125-12A into the corresponding terminal release cavity. The release cavities are the 2 center rows of cavities on one half of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5479 7. Pressing the J 38125-12A tool in the release cavity of the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and crimper in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. Slide the lever lock away from the connector body. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs on the dress cover of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool release all of the locking tabs. 4. Once the locks are unlocked, lift the dress cover off. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5480 Note: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 5. Release the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the blue locking tabs on both ends of the connector. Gently slide the TPA up to the released position on both ends. 6. For the larger terminals insert the J 38125-13A tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. For the smaller terminals insert the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5481 View of the release tool being used for the larger terminals. View of the release tool being used for the larger terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5482 View of the release tool being used for the smaller terminals. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5483 Side view of connector. View of top of connector. 1. Locate the assist lever and lock on the top of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5484 2. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. 3. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5485 4. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the rear of the connector. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. 5. Once the locking tabs are unlocked, slide the inner connector out of the rear of the connector housing. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5486 6. Use the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by pressing on the tang. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Repairing Connector Terminals Repairing Connector Terminals Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Use the following repair procedures in order to repair the following: * Push to Seat terminals * Pull to Seat terminals Some terminals do not require all of the steps shown. Skip the steps that do not apply for your terminal repair. The J-38125 contains further information. 1. Cut off the terminal between the core and the insulation crimp. Minimize any wire loss. For cable seal terminals, remove the seal. 2. Apply the correct cable seal per gauge size of the wire, if used. Slide the seal back along the wire in order to enable insulation removal. 3. Remove the insulation. 4. For sealed terminals only, align the seal with the end of the cable insulation. 5. Position the strip in the terminal. For sealed terminals, position the strip and seal in the terminal. 6. Hand crimp the core wings. 7. Hand crimp the insulation wings. For sealed terminals, hand crimp the insulation wings around the seal and the cable. 8. Solder all of the hand crimp terminals excepting Micro-Pack 100.64 size. Soldering Micro-Pack 100 World terminals may damage the terminal. Sumitomo Connectors Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5487 Sumitomo Connectors Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5488 3. Remove the dress cover by using a flat-blade tool to release the connector locking tabs and pulling off the dress cover. 4. Relieve the tension on the nose piece retainers by inserting J 38125-12A into the single retainer slot on the end of the nose piece and gently prying out the locking tab. Repeat the process for both of the nose piece locking tabs on the opposite side of the nose piece. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5489 5. Once the nose piece retainers are relaxed, use the J 38125-552 to pull up the nose piece by hooking the tool under the nose piece and pulling up. The nose piece should raise slightly. 6. On the opposite side of the nose piece, use the J 38125-552 to pull up the nose piece by hooking the tool under the nose piece and pulling up. The nose piece should release completely. If the nose piece does not come off, repeat the procedure on the opposite side. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5490 7. The illustration above identifies the entry canal where the terminal release tool will be inserted, and the terminal cavity. * Terminal (1) * Entry Canal (2) 8. Insert the J 38125-553 tool into the entry canal and pry up on the terminal retainer. The terminal retainer is a small plastic piece on the top of the terminal. The terminal retainer must be held up while the terminal is pulled out of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5491 9. The illustration shows a cutaway view of the connector to aid the technician in releasing the terminal retainer. 10. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Refer to the terminal crimping procedure in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit. Terminal Replacement Procedure After the terminal is crimped to the wire, perform the following procedure in order to replace the terminal. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the connector disassembly procedure. Terminal Position Assurance Locks Terminal Position Assurance Locks The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5492 2. Insert the J 38125-11A tool into the cavity on the lower right hand face of the connector until the terminal release tang access panel slides over. 3. Ensure that the terminal release tang access panel is in the correct location to access the terminals. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5493 5. Insert the J 38125-11A into the terminal release tang access slot located behind the access panel of the connector and press down on the terminal while carefully pulling the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component by pressing down on the connector position assurance (CPA). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5494 2. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting the tool in the small recess on the side of the connector and pushing up until the TPA releases from the connector body. The TPA should raise just slightly. Do not try to remove the TPA. Note: The TPA on this connector cannot be removed unless the terminals are removed first. The TPA will come out of the connector body, but only slightly. When the TPA is slightly raised the terminals can be removed. Using excessive force to remove the TPA with the terminals still in the connector will damage the connector. 3. Repeat the process for the other side of the connector. 4. Ensure that the TPA is in the proper position to remove the terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5495 5. While pushing the terminal forward, insert the J 38125-24 in the release cavity above the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5496 2. Insert a small flat-blade tool in the slot below the front loaded terminal position assurance (TPA) and pry up. 3. Remove the TPA by pulling it out of the connector. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-553 on a slight upward angle into the cavity below the terminal to be removed. Ensure that the pointed on the end of the tool is facing the bottom of the terminal and it stays in contact with the terminal until it stops on the plastic terminal retainer. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5497 6. Gently pry the plastic terminal retainer down and carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5498 1. While depressing the lock, pull the two connector halves apart. Note: The TPA is fragile and may break if not done carefully. 2. Use a small flat-blade tool to very carefully push the terminal position assurance (TPA) towards the face of the connector on both sides of the connector. 3. View of the male half of the connector with female terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5499 4. View of the female half of the connector with male terminals. 5. Use the J 38125-215 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. View of the female half of the connector with male terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5500 7. View of the male half of the connector with female terminals. 8. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers A circuit breaker is a protective device that is designed to open the circuit when a current load is in excess of the rated breaker capacity. If there is a short or other type of overload condition in the circuit, the excessive current will open the circuit between the circuit breaker terminals. Two types of circuit breakers are used. Circuit Breaker - This type opens when excessive current passes through it for a period of time. It closes again after a few seconds, and if the cause of the high current is still present, it will open again. The circuit breaker will continue to cycle open and closed until the condition causing the high current is removed. Positive Temperature Coefficient (PTC) Circuit Breaker - This type greatly increases its resistance when excessive current passes through it. The excessive current heats the PTC device, as the device heats its resistance increases. Eventually the resistance gets so high that the circuit is effectively open. Unlike the ordinary circuit breaker the PTC unit will not reset until the circuit is opened, by removing the voltage from its terminals. Once the voltage is removed the circuit breaker will re-close within a second or 2. Circuit Protection - Fuses Circuit Protection - Fuses Special Tools EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM) For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5501 The fuse is the most common method of an automotive wiring circuit protection. Whenever there is an excessive amount of current flowing through a circuit the fusible element will melt and create an open or incomplete circuit. Fuses are a one time protection device and must be replaced each time the circuit is overloaded. To determine if a fuse is open, remove the suspected fuse and examine if the element in the fuse is broken (2). If not broken (1), also check for continuity using a Digital Multimeter (DMM) or a continuity tester. If the element is broken or continuity is suspect, replace the fuse with one of equal current rating. Circuit Protection - Fusible Links Circuit Protection - Fusible Links Special Tools EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM) For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Fusible link is wire designed to melt and break continuity when excessive current is applied. It is often located between or near the battery and starter or electrical center. Use a continuity tester or a Digital Multimeter (DMM) at each end of the wire containing the fusible link in order to determine if it is broken. If broken, it must be replaced with fusible link of the same gauge size. Repairing a Fusible Link Note: Fusible links cut longer than 225 mm (approximately 9 in) will not provide sufficient overload protection. Flat Wire Repairs Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5502 Flat Wire Repairs The flat wire within the flex wiring harness is not serviceable. If an open or short exists within the flex wiring harness the complete harness must be replaced. GMLAN Wiring Repairs GMLAN Wiring Repairs Special Tools * EL-38125-10 - Splice Sleeve Crimping Tool * J 38125-5 - Ultra Torch Special Tool * DuraSeal splice sleeves * A wire stripping tool For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: * A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. * A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The GM Local Area Network (GMLAN) System requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working on GMLAN connectors and terminals. GMLAN Repairs Note: When making a repair to any GMLAN network, the original wire length after the repair must be the same length as before the repair. If the network is a twisted pair, the twist must be maintained after the repair is completed. GMLAN has 2 types of networks, low speed and high speed. Low speed GMLAN has a single wire and works at slow speeds. High speed GMLAN has 2 wires in a twisted pair and works at higher speeds. For more information on GMLAN, refer to Data Link Communications Description and Operation ( See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Information Bus/Description and Operation). GMLAN Connector Terminal Repair Note: A terminated lead can be used to replace damaged connector terminals for both high speed and low speed GMLAN systems. When making a connector terminal repair on a GMLAN high speed system with twisted pair wires, do not untwist the wires more than necessary to make the repair. If the individual terminals are damaged on any GMLAN connection, use the appropriate connector repair procedure in order to repair the terminal. Refer to Connector Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Connector Repairs) for the appropriate connector repair procedure. GMLAN Wire Repair Note: Refer to Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Wiring Repairs) in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gauge size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and EL-38125-10 - tool. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the DuraSeal splice sleeves. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5503 Note: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: * Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. * Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. * Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert to regional wiring gauge size. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the EL-38125-10 - tool in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the splice sleeve crimp tool. The crimp tool has four nests, one for each color. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5504 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs Caution: Do not solder repairs under any circumstances as this could result in the air reference being obstructed. If the heated oxygen sensor pigtail wiring, connector, or terminal is damaged the entire oxygen sensor assembly must be replaced. Do not attempt to repair the wiring, connector, or terminals. In order for the sensor to function properly it must have a clean air reference. This clean air reference is obtained by way of the oxygen sensor signal and heater wires. Any attempt to repair the wires, connectors or terminals could result in the obstruction of the air reference and degrade oxygen sensor performance. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5505 The following guidelines should be used when servicing the heated oxygen sensor: * Do not apply contact cleaner or other materials to the sensor or vehicle harness connectors. These materials may get into the sensor, causing poor performance. Also, the sensor pigtail and harness wires must not be damaged in such a way that the wires inside are exposed. This could provide a path for foreign materials to enter the sensor and cause performance problems. * Neither the sensor nor vehicle lead wires should be bent sharply or kinked. Sharp bends, kinks, etc., could block the reference air path through the lead wire. * Do not remove or defeat the oxygen sensor ground wire (where applicable). Vehicles that utilize the ground wire sensor may rely on this ground as the only ground contact to the sensor. Removal of the ground wire will also cause poor engine performance. * To prevent damage due to water intrusion, be sure that the peripheral seal remains intact on the vehicle harness connector. High Temperature Wiring Repairs High Temperature Wiring Repairs Special Tools * EL-38125-10 - Splice Sleeve Crimping Tool * J 38125-5 - Ultra Torch * DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). High Temperature Wiring Wiring that is exposed to high temperatures, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time may use materials i.e. wires, connectors, and shielding that has a higher heat rating than typical wiring. When making a repair in a high temperature area observe the following: * Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature to replace any damaged wire. * Replace any heat shielding that is removed. * Cover any DuraSeal splice sleeves with SCT1 shrink tubing. * After making a wiring repair, ensure that the location of the wiring is not moved closer to the heat source. Identifying High Temperature Wiring Wiring that is exposed to high temperature, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time need special considerations when making wiring repairs. Areas that may be exposed to higher temperatures can be identified by heat resistant materials that are being used in those areas. These materials may include heat reflective tape, moon tape, and high temperature shrink tubing. Also conduit and other protective coverings may be used. Because conduit or similar coverings are used throughout the vehicle regardless of the temperature, it may be necessary for the technician to determine if an area is exposed to excessive heat before making a wiring repair. Obvious areas of consideration would be any area located near the exhaust manifolds, catalytic converter, and exhaust pipes. Items Required * DuraSeal splice sleeves to crimp and seal connections * High temperature SCT1 shrink tubing to protect the splice sleeves * Terminated leads or pigtails * The correct tools to remove the terminals from the connectors Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature of the same or larger gauge size as the original wire when repair damage wire. Also replace any reflective tape that you remove during the repair. High Temperature Wire Repair Note: Refer to Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Wiring Repairs) in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature rating of the same gauge size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the EL-38125-10 - tool and then encapsulate the splice sleeve using the high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5506 Note: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: * Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. * Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. * Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert to regional wiring gauge size. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Slide a section of high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing down the length of wire to be spliced. Ensure that the shrink tubing will not interfere with the splice procedure. 5. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 6. Use the EL-38125-10 - tool in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the splice sleeve crimp tool. The crimp tool has four nests, one for each color. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5507 7. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 8. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 9. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 10. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 11. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5508 12. Center the high temperature SCT1 shrink tube over the DuraSeal splice sleeve. 13. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the high temperature heat shrink tubing. 14. Gradually move the heat from the center to the open end of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. 15. Replace any reflective tape and clips that may have been remove during the repair. Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation If the wire insulation has been chafed, or broken, enough to show the conductive portion of the wire, and the wire is not damaged, determine the length of insulation that needs to be repaired. If the repair is less than 280 mm (11 in), cut the wire within the damaged area. Than slide the appropriate heat shrink tubing (listed below) over the wire, and repair the wire by splicing the wires together. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves). Once the wire is spliced together slide heat shrink tubing over the damaged area and apply heat to seal the repaired wire. If the wire is damaged, or the damaged area is larger than 280 mm (11 in), than replace the damaged wire by splicing in a new section of wire. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5509 SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs Special Tools * EL-38125-10 - Splice Sleeve Crimping Tool * J 38125-5 - Ultra Torch * DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: * A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. * A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides the necessary low resistance contact integrity for these sensitive, low energy circuits. The Supplemental Inflatable Restraint (SIR) System/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working with the SIR/SRS, and the wiring components, such as connectors and terminals. SIR/SRS Connector Repair (Plastic Body and Terminal Metal Pin) Note: Do not use the terminals in the kit in order to replace damaged SIR/SRS system terminals. Use either an SIR/SRS pigtail or a terminated lead from the SIR Repair Kit Tray. The terminals in the SIR/SRS system are made with a special plating. This plating provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. Pigtail repair packs are available for SIR/SRS connectors with eight or less terminals. Only the connector body is available for connectors with more than eight terminals. Terminated leads can be used to replace damaged terminals when replacing the connector body. SIR/SRS Component Wire Pigtail Repair Note: Do not make wire, connector, or terminal repairs on components with wire pigtails. A wire pigtail is a wire or wires attached directly to the device, not by a connector. If a wiring pigtail is damaged, you must replace the entire component, with pigtail. The inflatable restraint steering wheel module coil is an example of a pigtail component. SIR/SRS Wire Repair Note: Refer to Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Wiring Repairs) in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5510 If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gauge size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and EL-38125-10 - tool. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the DuraSeal splice sleeves. Note: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: * Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. * Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. * Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert to regional wiring gauge size. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the EL-38125-10 - tool in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the splice sleeve crimp tool. The crimp tool has four nests, one for each color. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5511 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Connector Position Assurance (CPA) The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of a connector. CPAs are used in all SIR System connectors and also in some connectors of other systems. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals of a connection. Terminal Position Assurance (TPA) The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5512 Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Special Tools * EL-38125-10 - Splice Sleeve Crimping Tool * J 38125-5 - Ultra Torch * DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Note: Use only DuraSeal splice sleeves. Other splice sleeves may not protect the splice from moisture or provide a good electrical connection. Use DuraSeal splice sleeves to form a one-to-one splice on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. Use DuraSeal splice sleeves where there is special requirements such as moisture sealing. Follow the instructions below in order to splice copper wire using DuraSeal splice sleeves. Note: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: * Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. * Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. * Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert to regional wiring gauge size. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5513 5. Use the EL-38125-10 - tool in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the splice sleeve crimp tool. The crimp tool has four nests, one for each color. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5514 * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Splicing Inline Harness Diodes Splicing Inline Harness Diodes Many vehicle electrical systems use a diode to isolate circuits and protect the components from voltage spikes. When installing a new diode use the following procedure. 1. Open the harness. * If the harness is taped, remove the tape. * To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing seam ripper (available from sewing supply stores) in order to cut open the harness. * If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the diode. 2. If the diode is taped to the harness, remove all of the tape. 3. Check and record the current flow direction and orientation of diode. 4. Remove the inoperative diode from the harness with a suitable soldering tool. Note: If the diode is located next to a connector terminal remove the terminal(s) from the connector to prevent damage from the soldering tool. 5. Carefully strip away a section of insulation next to the old soldered portion of the wire(s). Do not remove any more than is needed to attach the new diode. 6. Check current flow direction of the new diode, being sure to install the diode with correct bias. Reference the appropriate service manual wiring schematic to obtain the correct diode installation position. 7. Attach the new diode to the wire(s) using 60/40 rosin core solder. Before soldering attach some heat sinks (aluminum alligator clips) across the diode wire ends to protect the diode from excessive heat. Follow the manufacturer's instruction for the soldering equipment. 8. Reinstall terminal(s) into the connector body if previously removed. Note: To prevent shorts to ground and water intrusion, completely cover all exposed wire and diode attachment points with tape. 9. Tape the diode to the harness or connector using electrical tape. Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable Twisted/shielded cable is used in order to protect wiring from electrical noise. Two-conductor cable of this construction is used between the radio and the Delco-Bose(R) speaker/amplifier units and other applications where low level, sensitive signals must be carried. Follow the instructions below in order to repair the twisted/shielded cable. 1. Remove the outer jacket (1). Use care not to cut into the drain wire of the mylar tape. 2. Unwrap the tape. Do not remove the tape. Use the tape in order to rewrap the twisted conductors after the splice is made. 3. Prepare the splice. Untwist the conductors and follow the instructions for Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves). Staggering the splices by 65 mm (2.5 in) is recommended. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5515 Note: Apply the mylar tape with the aluminum side inward. This ensures good electrical contact with the drain wire. 4. Re-assemble the cable. * Rewrap the conductors with the mylar tape. If the mylar tape is damaged, use 3M product AL-36FR to replace the damaged mylar tape. * Use caution not to wrap the drain wire in the tape (1). * Follow the splicing instructions for copper wire and splice the drain wire. * Wrap the drain wire around the conductors and tape with electrical tape to replace the outer insulation. 5. Tape over the entire cable. Use a winding motion when you apply the tape. Wiring Repairs Wiring Repairs The Wiring Repairs section contains the following types of wiring repair information. Using these elements together will make wiring repair faster and easier: * Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections) * Flat Wire Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Flat Wire Repairs) * GMLAN Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/GMLAN Wiring Repairs) * High Temperature Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/High Temperature Wiring Repairs) * Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs) * Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves) * Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable) * Splicing Inline Harness Diodes (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Inline Harness Diodes) * SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs) US English/Metric Conversion US English/Metric Conversion Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5516 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5517 Basic Digital Multimeter Requirements Basic Digital Multimeter Requirements Digital Multimeter (DMM) Basic Requirements Service information is validated using digital multimeters that meet or exceed the following requirements. Using a multimeter that does not meet these basic requirements may give inaccurate readings which could lead to an incorrect diagnosis. Display and Settings 1. Four digits displayed 2. Voltage, amperage, resistance, frequency, diode test settings, and min-max function 3. Display positive and negative values Voltage 1. Have at least 10 Mohm input impedance 2. Test a DC voltage range of 0.1-1000 V. 3. Test an AC voltage range of 0.1-1000 V. Amperage 1. Test a DC amperage range of 0.1µA-10 A. 2. Test an AC amperage range of 0.1µA-10 A. Resistance Test a resistance range of 0.1 ohm-40 Mohm and displays infinite for a value greater than 40 Mohm (O.L. (Over-load)) Frequency Test for a frequency range of 0.5 HZ-199 K HZ Diode Test 1. Apply at least 1 mA when performing the diode bias test 2. Display the break over voltage drop (0-3 V) of a forward biased diode 3. Display infinite (O.L. (Over-load)) when a diode is reverse biased Min-Max Readings 1. Can update at a 1 ms sample rate 2. Saves and displays minimum and maximum values Testing Ground and Low Reference Circuits Testing Ground and Low Reference Circuits Because a test lamp can light with up to 200 ohm in a ground or low reference circuit they are not recommended to be used for this type of test. A low impedance test lamp can light and indicate the circuit is good when there is as much as 20-30 ohm present, while a high impedance test lamp can light with up to 200 ohm present in the circuit. This is why the Digital Multi-Meter (DMM) is used when validating a ground or low reference circuit continuity. When using the DMM there are many vehicle conditions that can affect the ground and low reference continuity testing. If these conditions are not met, a ground or low reference circuit test can fail on a good circuit. This may cause longer diagnosis time and incorrect component replacement. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5518 Any current flow through a ground or low reference circuit, while being tested, will skew the DMM continuity reading, or display a reading higher than when there is no current flowing. Performing a ground or low reference circuit continuity test, in reference to the vehicles battery negative terminal, will have the highest risk of failing a good ground or low reference circuit test than any other ground reference point. The best ground test points would be a control module housing (if the control modules housing is metal and grounded), door jamb striker (if attached to metal), under dash metal frame work, engine block, or body ground studs (other than where the negative battery cable is attached). A typical DMM ground or low reference circuit continuity reading can be as high as 100 ohm with the ignition ON, and drop to 15-25 ohm after the ignition is turned OFF. The reading will drop below 10 ohm after 30-40 seconds, then below 5 ohm after 60 seconds. Once the vehicle completely goes to sleep (generally 3-10 minutes) the reading will drop below 0.3 ohm. The following list of conditions may need to be met to ensure a valid continuity reading on a ground or low reference circuit: * Ignition OFF * Key out of the ignition switch (when not equipped with keyless entry and remote start) * Retained Accessory Power (RAP) OFF (open and close the driver door after ignition OFF) * Battery charger set at a 2 A or less charge rate * Scan tool not communicating with any vehicle control module (in some cases it may need to be disconnected from the DLC) * All entry doors closed * Headlamps OFF (auto headlamps disabled) * Any delay lighting OFF * HVAC after blow OFF * Any accessory that can work when the ignition is OFF * Wait up to 60 seconds (after all other listed conditions are met) Activating the DOOR LOCK function with a key fob can greatly reduce the time to achieve a valid ground or low reference continuity test result. Terminal Wiring Repair Terminal Wiring Repair Special Tools * EL-38125-10 - Splice Sleeve Crimp Tool * EL-38125-580 - Terminal Release Tool Kit * J-38125-5 - Ultra Torch * EL-35616 - Connector Test Adapter Kit For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Note: All repairs near the engine manifold, turbo engine and all exhaust pipes should follow the High Temperature Wiring Repair procedures. 1. Find the appropriate connector end view within the connector end view section. The connector end view has the following information: * Diagnostic probe tool * Terminal release tool * Terminal/terminated lead part numbers 2. Determine if a terminal is damaged. Note: Not using the proper test kit probe may cause damage to the terminal(s) that are probed. * Locate the diagnostic probe tool from the connector end view. The connector end view describes the color and part number to help the technician find and use the correct tool. * Connect the probe tool to the Digital Multimeter. * Insert the probe tool into the cavity and follow the procedures from the Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter). 3. Disconnect the connector body to perform the repair. Note: Several procedures for specific connector bodies are called out in Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Wiring Repairs). Use the following repair procedures to repair the following terminals: Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5519 Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack))Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Push to Seat))Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Pull to Seat))Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W))Delphi Connectors (Micro.64) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Micro .64) )Delphi Connectors (12-Way) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (12-Way))Delphi Connectors (Steering Gear) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Steering Gear)) * The TPA and CPA should be removed before releasing the terminal for the connector body. * Look at the connector end view to locate the cavity of the damaged terminal and find the proper terminal release tool from the terminal release tool kit. Note: Using the incorrect terminal release tool can damage the connector body. * Insert the terminal release tool into the cavity. Note: Some terminals have a lever that must be disengaged before the terminal can be released. Gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Terminated Lead Repair Terminated Lead Repair Special Tools * EL-38125-10 - Splice Sleeve Crimp Tool * EL-38125-580 - Terminal Release Tool Kit * J-38125-5 - Ultra Torch * EL-35616 - Connector Test Adapter Kit For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Note: All repairs near the engine manifold, turbo engine and all exhaust pipes should follow the High Temperature Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/High Temperature Wiring Repairs) procedures. Terminated leads are terminals that are crimped onto wires. The terminated lead can be used throughout the vehicle since it is designed for temperatures up to 150°C. The length of the wire is 450 mm. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5520 The DuraSeal splice sleeve has the following 2 critical features: * A special heat shrink tubing that environmentally seals the splice. The shrink tubing contains a sealing adhesive inside the shrink tubing. * A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp that provides the necessary contact integrity for sensitive low energy circuits. 1. Use the connector end view to identify the correct terminated lead. 2. The terminated lead package should include a DuraSeal splice sleeve. If not, use the chart to identify the correct part. 3. Open the harness by removing any tape: Use a sewing seam ripper, or a comparable tool, to cut open the harness, to avoid wire insulation damage. 4. Depending on how many terminals need repairs, cut the terminal and wire back at least 40 mm. Try to keep the harness wire length the same. If more than one terminated lead is required, stagger the lengths by 40 mm. This helps reduce the bundle size of the wire harness. 5. Use the EL-38125-10 - tool in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the splice sleeve crimp tool. The crimp tool has four nests, one for each color. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5521 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the J-38125-5 - ultra torch , apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5522 Shift Solenoid: Exploded Views Disassembled Views Disassembled Views Case and Associated Parts 1 - Control Valve Body Cover Bolt 2 - Control Valve Body Cover Assembly 3 - Control Valve Body Cover Gasket 4 - Control Valve Body Bolt 5 - Control Valve Body Cover Hole Seal 6 - Control Solenoid Valve Heat Sink Bolt 7 - Control Solenoid (w/Body and TCM) Valve Assembly 8 - Control Valve Body Filter Plate Assembly 9 - Control Valve Body Bolt 10 - Control Valve Body Bolt 11 Control Valve Body Assembly 12 - Control Valve Body Spacer Plate Assembly 13 - A/Trans Fluid Level Control Valve 14 - A/Trans Fluid Level Control Valve Gasket 15 - A/Trans Output Speed Sensor Bolt Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5523 16 - A/Trans Output Speed Sensor Assembly 17 - Manual Shaft Detent Spring Bolt 18 - Manual Shaft Detent Lever Spring Assembly 19 - A/Trans Input Speed Sensor Assembly 20 - A/Trans Input Speed Sensor Assembly O-Ring Seal 21 - A/Trans Input Speed Sensor Bolt 22 - Fill Cap 23 - Fill Cap Seal 24 - Torque Converter Housing Gasket 25 - A/Trans Fluid Pump Seal Assembly 26 Torque Converter with Fluid Pump Housing Assembly 27 - Torque Converter and Differential Housing Bolt 28 - A/Trans Fluid Fill Tube Plug Assembly 29 - Torque Converter Assembly Control Valve Body Assembly (1 of 2) 400 - Control Valve Body Bolt 401 - Control Solenoid Valve Support 402 - Valve Channel Plate 403 - Channel Plate to Valve Body Spacer Plate Assembly 404 - Control Valve Body Ball Check Valve 405 - Control Valve Body Assembly Component Location Component Location Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5524 1 - Reaction Carrier Assembly 2 - Control Valve Body Assembly 3 - Input Carrier Assembly 4 Valve Channel Plate 5 - Output Carrier Assembly 6 - Park Gear 7 - Control Solenoid (w/Body and TCM) Valve Assembly 8 - Drive Link Assembly 9 - Drive Sprocket 10 - Torque Converter Assembly 11 - A/Trans Fluid Pump Assembly 12 - Differential Carrier Assembly 13 - Front Differential Ring Gear 14 - Driven Sprocket 15 - 1-2-3-4 Clutch Assembly 16 - Low and Reverse Clutch Assembly 17 - 2-6 Clutch Assembly 18 - 3-5 Reverse Clutch Assembly 19 - 4-5-6 Clutch Assembly 20 A/Trans Input Speed Sensor Assembly 21 - Reaction Sun Gear Assembly Component Location Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5525 Component Location Component Locations 1 - Manual Shift Detent Lever Assembly (w/Shaft Position Switch) 2 - Trans Fluid Level Indicator 3 Reaction Carrier Assembly 4 - Output Speed Sensor 5 - Input Carrier Assembly 6 - Output Carrier Assembly 7 - Front Differential Transfer Drive Gear 8 - Front Differential Transfer Drive Gear Support Assembly 9 - Torque Converter Assembly 10 - Park Pawl Actuator Assembly 11 - Fluid Pump Drive Link Assembly 12 - Park Pawl 13 - Front Differential Transfer Driven Gear 14 - Front Differential Drive Pinion Gear 15 - Park Gear 16 - Torque Converter and Support and Fluid Pump Housing Assembly 17 - Front Differential Carrier Assembly 18 - Front Differential Carrier Baffle 19 Front Differential Ring Gear Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5526 20 - Front Differential Drive Pinion Gear Lube Tube 21 - 1-2-3-4 Clutch Assembly 22 - Low and Reverse Clutch Assembly (OWC) 23 - Low and Reverse Clutch 24 - 2-6 Clutch Assembly 25 3-5-Reverse Clutch Assembly 26 - 4-5-6 Clutch Assembly 27 - Input Speed Sensor 28 - Case Cover Assembly 29 - Control Valve Body Cover 30 - Input Shaft Speed Sensor Reluctor Wheel 31 Control Valve Lower Body Assembly 32 - Control Valve Upper Body Assembly 33 - Control Valve Channel Plate Assembly 34 - Control Solenoid Valve Assembly (w/Body and TCM) 35 - Manual Valve Disassembled Views Disassembled Views Case and Associated Parts Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5527 1 - Control Valve Body Cover Assembly 2 - Transmission Fluid Level Indicator Assembly 3 - Fluid Level Indicator Tube - Model Dependent 4 - Fluid Level Indicator Tube Seal - Model Dependent 5 - Control Valve Body Cover Assembly Gasket 6 - Control Valve Body Cover Stud 7 - Control Valve Body Cover Bolt 8 - Control Valve Body Bolt 9 - Control Valve Body Bolt 10 - Control Valve Body Cover Wiring Connector Hole Seal 11 - Control Solenoid Valve Spring 12 - Control Valve Body Bolt 13 - Control Valve Body Bolt 14 - Control Valve Body Bolt 15 - Control Solenoid (w/Body and TCM) Valve Assembly 16 - Control Solenoid (w/Body and TCM) Filter Plate Assembly 17 - Manual Shaft Detent Assembly 18 - Control Valve Body Assembly 19 - A/Trans Output Speed Sensor Assembly 20 - A/Trans Output Speed Sensor Bolt 21 - A/Trans Case Assembly 22 - Torque Converter Housing Outer Seal 23 - Front Differential Drive Pinion (w/Transfer Gear) Gear Assembly 24 Front Differential Drive Pinion Gear Lube Tube 25 - Torque Converter and Support and A/Trans Fluid Pump Housing Assembly 26 - Torque Converter and Differential Housing Bolt 27 - Torque Converter Assembly 28 - Dust Cover Push Pin - Model Dependent 29 - Dust Cover Bolt - Model Dependent 30 - Dust Cover - Model Dependent 31 - Front Differential Carrier Assembly 32 - Input Shaft Thrust Bearing Assembly 33 - A/Trans Case Cover Gasket 34 - A/Trans Case Cover Assembly 35 - A/Trans Case Cover Assembly Bolt Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5528 Shift Solenoid: Connector Views Q8 Control Solenoid Valve Assembly X1 (MH7 or MHC) Q8 Control Solenoid Valve Assembly X1 (MH2 or MH4) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5529 Q8 Control Solenoid Valve Assembly X2 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5530 Q8 Control Solenoid Valve Assembly X3 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5531 Q8 Control Solenoid Valve Assembly X4 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5532 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission Shift Solenoid: Service and Repair 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission Control Solenoid Valve and Transmission Control Module Assembly Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the transmission control valve body cover. Refer to Control Valve Body Cover Replacement (See: Valve Body/Service and Repair/6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission/Control Valve Body Cover Replacement). 2. Disconnect the input speed sensor electrical connector (1). 3. Disconnect the output speed sensor electrical connector (2). 4. Disconnect the shift position switch electrical connector (3). 5. Remove the 3 control valve body bolts (1) M5 x 40.5. 6. Remove the 12 control valve body bolts (2) M6 x 97. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 5535 7. Remove the control solenoid valve assembly (3) with transmission control module. Caution: Use care when removing or installing the filter plate assembly. A broken or missing retaining tab may not adequately secure the filter plate to the control solenoid valve assembly, resulting in possible damage or contamination. 8. Remove the control solenoid valve assembly filter plate (4). Discard the filter plate. It is not reusable. 9. Inspect the channel plate bolt pass through holes for damage or brinelling. Any damage will cause incorrect pressure switch operation. Replace as necessary. Installation Procedure Caution: Use care when removing or installing the filter plate assembly. A broken or missing retaining tab may not adequately secure the filter plate to the control solenoid valve assembly, resulting in possible damage or contamination. 1. Install a NEW control solenoid valve assembly filter plate (4) to prevent fluid leaks past the fluid seals. 2. Install the control solenoid valve assembly (3) with transmission control module. 3. Hand start the control valve body bolts (1, 2). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 5536 Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener Caution). 4. Secure the 12 control valve body bolts (2) M6 x 97 and tighten in sequence to 10 Nm (89 lb in). 5. Secure the 3 control valve body bolts (1) M5 x 40.5 and tighten in sequence to 8 Nm (71 lb in). 6. Connect the input speed sensor electrical connector (1). 7. Connect the output speed sensor electrical connector (2). 8. Connect the shift position switch electrical connector (3). 9. Install the transmission control valve body cover. Refer to Control Valve Body Cover Replacement (See: Valve Body/Service and Repair/6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission/Control Valve Body Cover Replacement). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 5537 Shift Solenoid: Service and Repair 6T70/6T75 - Automatic Transmission Control Solenoid Valve and Transmission Control Module Assembly Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the control valve body cover. Refer to Control Valve Body Cover Replacement (See: Valve Body/Service and Repair/6T70/6T75 Automatic Transmission/Control Valve Body Cover Replacement). 2. Disconnect the input speed sensor electrical connector (1). 3. Disconnect the output speed sensor electrical connector (2). 4. Disconnect the shift position switch electrical connector (3). 5. Remove the 4 control valve body bolts (1) M6 x 80. 6. Position the control solenoid valve spring (8) to the side. Spring will be released with the removal of the control valve body assembly. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 5538 7. Remove the 2 control valve body bolts (4) M6 x 65. 8. Remove the control valve body bolt (3) M6 x 42. 9. Remove the 3 control valve body bolts (2) M6 x 95. 10. Remove the control valve body bolt (7) M6 x 55. 11. Remove the control solenoid valve body and transmission control module (TCM) assembly (5). Caution: Use care when removing or installing the filter plate assembly. A broken or missing retaining tab may not adequately secure the filter plate to the control solenoid valve assembly, resulting in possible damage or contamination. 12. Remove the control solenoid valve assembly filter plate (6). * Discard the filler plate. It is not reusable. * Inspect the pressure switch manifold seals for damage or contamination. Replace the control solenoid valve assembly as necessary. * Inspect the upper channel plate bolt holes for damage, peening or burnelling. Any damage around the bolt holes near the pressure control switch (PCS) feed holes could cause leakage around the PCS seals. Replace the upper channel plate as necessary. Installation Procedure Caution: Use care when removing or installing the filter plate assembly. A broken or missing retaining tab may not adequately secure the filter plate to the control solenoid valve assembly, resulting in possible damage or contamination. 1. Install a NEW control solenoid valve assembly filter plate (1). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 5539 2. Install the control solenoid valve body and TCM assembly (5). 3. Rotate the control solenoid valve spring (7) into position. Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener Caution). Note: Install all bolts before tightening, then tighten in specified sequence. 4. Install the 4 control valve body bolts (1) M6 x 80. 5. Install the control valve body bolt (6) M6 x 55. 6. Install the 3 control valve body bolts (2) M6 x 95. 7. Install the control valve body bolt (3) M6 x 42. 8. Install the 2 control valve body bolts (4) M6 x 65 and tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb in). 9. Connect the input speed sensor electrical connector (1). 10. Connect the output speed sensor electrical connector (2). 11. Connect the shift position switch electrical connector (3). 12. Install the control valve body cover. Refer to Control Valve Body Cover Replacement (See: Valve Body/Service and Repair/6T70/6T75 - Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 5540 Automatic Transmission/Control Valve Body Cover Replacement). 13. For transmission control module programming and setup. Refer to Control Module References (See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning). Note: After an internal transmission repair or internal part replacement the service fast learn adapt procedure should be performed. 14. Perform the transmission adaptive values learn procedure. Refer to Transmission Adaptive Values Learn (See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid: Diagram Information and Instructions Electrical Schematic Symbols Electrical Schematic Symbols Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5545 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5546 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5547 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5548 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5549 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5550 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5551 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5552 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5553 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5554 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5555 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5556 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5557 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5558 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5559 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5560 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5561 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5562 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5563 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5564 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5565 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5566 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5567 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5568 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5569 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5570 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5571 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5572 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5573 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5574 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5575 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5576 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5577 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5578 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5579 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5580 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5581 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5582 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5583 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5584 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5585 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5586 General Electrical Diagnosis General Electrical Diagnosis Basic Knowledge Required Without a basic knowledge of electricity, it will be difficult to use the diagnostic procedures contained in the service manual. You should understand the basic theory of electricity, and know the meaning of voltage (V), current (A), and resistance (Ohms ). You should also be able to read and understand a wiring diagram, as well as understand what happens in a circuit with an open or a shorted wire. Vehicle Zoning Strategy Vehicle Zoning Strategy All grounds, in-line connectors, and splices have identifying numbers that correspond to where they are located in the vehicle. The following table explains the numbering system. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5587 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5588 Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid: Diagnostic Aids Arrows and Symbols Arrows and Symbols This service manual uses various symbols in order to describe different service operations. 1 - Front of Vehicle 2 - View Detail 2 - View Detail 3 - Ambient Air Mixed with Another Gas or Indicate Temperature Change 4 - Motion or Direction 5 - View Angle 6 - Dimension (1:2) 7 Ambient/Clean Air Flow or Cool Air Flow 8 - Lubrication Point - Oil or Fluid 9 - Task Related 10 Sectioning (1:3) 11 - Gas Other Than Ambient Air or Hot Air Flow 12 - Lubrication Point - Grease or Jelly 13 - Multidirectional Arrow Decimal and Metric Equivalents Decimal and Metric Equivalents Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5589 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5590 Checking Aftermarket Accessories Checking Aftermarket Accessories Warning: Refer to SIR Warning (See: Restraint Systems/Service Precautions/SIR Warning). Caution: The OBD II symbol is used on the circuit diagrams in order to alert the technician that the circuit is essential for proper OBD II emission control circuit operation. Any circuit which fails and causes the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) to turn ON, or causes emissions-related component damage, is identified as an OBD II circuit. Do not connect aftermarket accessories into the following circuits: * SIR circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the SIR symbol. * OBD II circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the OBD II symbol. Always check for aftermarket accessories (non-OEM) as the first step in diagnosing electrical problems. If the vehicle is so equipped, disconnect the system to verify that these add-on accessories are not the cause of the problems. Possible causes of vehicle problems related to aftermarket accessories include: * Power feeds connected to points other than the battery * Antenna location * Transceiver wiring located too close to vehicle electronic modules or wiring * Poor shielding or poor connectors on antenna feed line * Check for recent service bulletins detailing installation guidelines for aftermarket accessories. Circuit Testing Circuit Testing The Circuit Testing section contains the following diagnostic testing information. Using this information along with the diagnostic procedures will identify the cause of the electrical malfunction. * Using Connector Test Adapters (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Using Connector Test Adapters) * Probing Electrical Connectors (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Probing Electrical Connectors) * Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5591 Procedures/Circuit Testing/Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter) * Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp) * Using Fused Jumper Wires (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Using Fused Jumper Wires) * Measuring Voltage (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Measuring Voltage) * Measuring Voltage Drop (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Measuring Voltage Drop) * Measuring Frequency (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Measuring Frequency) * Testing Ground and Low Reference Circuits (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Testing Ground and Low Reference Circuits) * Testing for Continuity (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Continuity) * Testing for Short to Ground (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Short to Ground) * Testing for a Short to Voltage (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for a Short to Voltage) * Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections) * Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions) * Testing for Electrical Intermittents (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Electrical Intermittents) * Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure) * Circuit Protection - Fuses (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Circuit Protection - Fuses) * Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers) * Circuit Protection - Fusible Links (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Circuit Protection - Fusible Links) Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp Special Tools EL-35616-200 - Test Light - Probe Kit For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test Probe Caution). A test lamp can simply and quickly test a low impedance circuit for voltage. A Digital Multimeter (DMM) should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present if the impedance is low enough, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. In other words, if there is not enough current, the test lamp will not illuminate even though voltage is present. The EL-35616-200 - kit is Micro-Pack compatible and comprised of a 12-volt light bulb with an attached pair of leads. To properly operate this tool use the following procedures. When testing for voltage: 1. Attach one lead to ground. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is voltage at the point being tested. When testing for ground: 1. Attach one lead to battery positive voltage. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where ground should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is ground at the point being tested. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5592 Testing for a Short to Voltage Testing for a Short to Voltage Special Tools EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM) For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test Probe Caution). The following procedure tests for a short to voltage in a circuit. 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Set the rotary dial of the Digital Multimeter (DMM) to the V (DC) position. 4. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. Turn ON the ignition and operate all accessories. 7. If the voltage measured is greater than 1 V, there is a short to voltage in the circuit. Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions Special Tools J-25070 - Heat Gun For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Many intermittent open or shorted circuits are affected by harness/connector movement that is caused by vibration, engine torque, bumps/rough pavement, etc. In order to duplicate the customer's concern, it may be necessary to manipulate the wiring harness if the malfunction appears to be vibration related. Manipulation of a circuit can consist of a wide variety of actions, including: * Wiggling the harness * Disconnecting a connector and reconnecting * Stressing the mechanical connection of a connector * Pulling on the harness or wire in order to identify a separation/break inside the insulation * Relocating a harness or wires All these actions should be performed with some goal in mind. For instance, with a scan tool connected, wiggling the wires may uncover a faulty input to the control module. The snapshot option would be appropriate here. Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure). Another option is, with the component commanded ON and OFF by the scan tool, move related connectors and wiring and observe the component operation. With the engine running, move related connectors and wiring while monitoring engine operation. If harness or connector movement affects the data displayed, component/system operation, or engine operation, inspect and repair the harness/connections as necessary. You may need to load the vehicle in order to duplicate the concern. This may require the use of weights, floor jacks, jackstands, frame machines, etc. In these cases you are attempting to duplicate the concern by manipulating the suspension or frame. This method is useful in finding harnesses that are too short and their connectors pull apart enough to cause a poor connection. A DMM set to Peak Min/Max mode and connected to the suspect circuit while testing can yield desirable results. Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Electrical Intermittents). Certainly, using the senses of sight, smell, and hearing while manipulating the circuit can provide good results as well. There may be instances where circuit manipulation alone will not meet the required criteria for the fault condition to appear. In such cases it may be necessary to expose the suspect circuit to other conditions while manipulating the harness. Such conditions would include high moisture conditions, along with exceptionally high or low temperatures. The following discusses how to expose the circuit to these kinds of conditions. Salt Water Spray Some compounds possess the ability to conduct electricity when dissolved in water such as ordinary salt. By mixing table salt with water in sufficient Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5593 quantities, you can enhance the conductive properties of water so that any circuit which may be sensitive to moisture will more readily fail when liberally sprayed with this mixture. Mixing 0.35L (12 oz) of water with approximately 1 tablespoon of salt will yield a salt solution of 5 percent. Fill a normal spray bottle with this mixture. This mixture is sufficient to enhance the water's own conductivity. This may cause the circuit to fail more easily when sprayed. Once the mixture is completed, spray the suspect area liberally with the solution. Then, while monitoring either a scan tool or DMM, manipulate the harness as discussed previously. High Temperature Conditions If the complaint tends to be heat related, you can simulate the condition using the J-25070 - heat gun. Using the heat gun, you can heat up the suspected area or component. Manipulate the harnesses under high temperature conditions while monitoring the scan tool or DMM to locate the fault condition. The high temperature condition may be achieved simply by test driving the vehicle at normal operating temperature. If a heat gun is unavailable, consider this option to enhance your diagnosis. This option does not allow for the same control, however. Low Temperature Conditions Depending on the nature of the fault condition, placing a fan in front of the vehicle while the vehicle is in the shade can have the desired effect. If this is unsuccessful, use local cooling treatments such as ice or a venturi type nozzle (one that provides hot or cold air). This type of tool is capable of producing air stream temperatures down to -18°C (0°F) from one end and +71°C (160°F) from the other. This is ideally suited for localized cooling needs. Once the vehicle, component, or harness has been sufficiently cooled, manipulate the harness or components in an effort to duplicate the concern. Duplicating Failure Conditions * If none of the previous tests are successful, attempt to duplicate and/or capture the failure conditions. * Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, where applicable, contains the conditions that were present when the DTC set. 1. Review and record Freeze Frame/Failure Records data. 2. Clear the DTCs using the scan tool. 3. Turn the key to OFF and wait 15 seconds. 4. Operate the vehicle under the same conditions that were noted in Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, as closely as possible. The vehicle must also be operating within the Conditions for Running the DTC. Refer to Conditions for Running the DTC in the supporting text if a DTC is being diagnosed. 5. Monitor DTC Status for the DTC being tested. The scan tool will indicate Ran, when the enabling conditions have been satisfied long enough for the DTC to run. The scan tool will also indicate whether the DTC passed or failed. * An alternate method is to drive the vehicle with the DMM connected to a suspected circuit. An abnormal reading on the DMM when the concern occurs, may help you locate the concern. Measuring Frequency Measuring Frequency Special Tools EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM) For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test Probe Caution). The following procedure determines the frequency of a signal. Note: Connecting the Digital Multimeter (DMM) to the circuit before pressing the Hz button will allow the DMM to autorange to an appropriate range. 1. Apply power to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (AC) position. 3. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5594 5. Press the Hz button on the DMM. 6. The DMM will display the frequency measured. Measuring Voltage Measuring Voltage Special Tools EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM) For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test Probe Caution). The following procedure measures the voltage at a selected point in a circuit. 1. Disconnect the electrical harness connector for the circuit being tested, if necessary. 2. Enable the circuit and/or system being tested. Use the following methods: * Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. * Turn ON the engine. * Turn ON the circuit and/or system with a scan tool in Output Controls. * Turn ON the switch for the circuit and/or system being tested. 3. Select the V (AC) or V (DC) position on the Digital Multimeter (DMM). 4. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the point of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. The DMM displays the voltage measured at that point. Measuring Voltage Drop Measuring Voltage Drop Special Tools EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM) For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test Probe Caution). The following procedure determines the difference in voltage potential between 2 points. 1. Set the rotary dial of the Digital Multimeter (DMM) to the V (DC) position. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5595 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to one point of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to the other point of the circuit. 4. Operate the circuit. 5. The DMM displays the difference in voltage between the 2 points. Probing Electrical Connectors Probing Electrical Connectors Note: Always be sure to reinstall the connector position assurance (CPA) and terminal position assurance (TPA) when reconnecting connectors or replacing terminals. Front probe Disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the mating side (front) of the connector. Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test Probe Caution). Note: When probing female 0.64 terminals, it is important to use the correct adapter. There have been some revisions to the test adapter for 0.64 terminals. The proper adapter for 0.64 terminals is the EL-35616-64B which has a gold terminal and a black wire between the base and tip. Failure to use the proper test adapter may result in damage to the terminal being tested and improper diagnosis. Note: The proper adapter for probing the terminals for fuses, relays, or diodes in an electrical center is EL-35616-35. Using any other tool or adapter may damage the terminal being tested. Refer to the following table as a guide in selecting the correct test adapter for front probing connectors: Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5596 Backprobe Note: * Backprobe connector terminals only when specifically required in diagnostic procedures. * Do not backprobe a sealed (Weather Pack(R)) connector, less than a 280 series Metri-Pack connector, a Micro-Pack connector, or a flat wire (dock and lock) connector. * Backprobing can be a source of damage to connector terminals. Use care in order to avoid deforming the terminal, either by forcing the test probe too far into the cavity or by using too large of a test probe. * After backprobing any connector, inspect for terminal damage. If terminal damage is suspected, test for proper terminal contact. Do not disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the harness side (back) of the connector. Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure Using Snapshots in Global Diagnostic System (GDS) Overview Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5597 A snapshot is a recording of what a control module on the vehicle was receiving for information while the snapshot is being made. A snapshot may be used to analyze the data during the time a vehicle condition is current. This allows you to concentrate on making the condition occur, rather than trying to view all the data in anticipation of the fault. To record a snapshot in GDS, select, Record Snapshot, from the options at the top right portion of any of the various pages that allow snapshots to be taken (e.g. Data Display, Control Functions, etc.). When you are finished recording, select, Stop Snapshot recording. The snapshot will now be available for replay. Snapshot Replay The Snapshot Replay function allows reviews of previously recorded vehicle snapshot data. This information can be used in analysis of vehicle problems and detection of trigger error conditions. The graph function can be used to compare parameters to see if a component is functioning properly. Recorded snapshots can be selected for viewing by the following three methods: * Selecting a snapshot file from the Vehicle Home Page and clicking on the Review selection. * Double clicking on the selected snapshot from the Vehicle Home Page. * Entering the Tools selection from the Menu selection and selecting Snapshot replay. Next, open the Snapshot Manager. Double click on the snapshot file you wish to view or click on the Load Snapshot selection and select a snapshot file. Regardless of selection method, a File Loaded pop-up window will be displayed from the Snapshot Replay screen. Select OK from the pop-up window. Snapshot Play Functions There are several snapshot play functions that are used to replay recorded snapshots * The Play function is used to play the snapshot forward by clicking on this selection. A marker will move across the screen when this selection is used. All selections in this area turn grey when they are active. * The Pause function is used to pause play of the snapshot. When this selection is clicked a second time the snapshot will start playing where it left off. * The Stop function is used to stop playing the snapshot. The snapshot will start from the beginning, if Play is selected after using the Stop function. Time Control Time control is used to control the snapshot replay. This function allows selection of a specific time frame, display of different views, and control of display speed. The following functions can be selected directly under Time Control. * The Bookmark selection allows you to add a specific comment in the current display and return to this point in the future. When this option is selected, a pop-up window is displayed. Enter a bookmark name and select OK. * The Note Pad can be selected to add comments to the snapshot replay file at the current point of time. When this option is selected, a pop-up window is displayed. Enter a comment for the snapshot file and select OK. * The Load Snapshot (blue folder) opens a snapshot file and makes it ready for further analysis. This function is also available by clicking on an available snapshot file from the Snapshot Manager. * The Down Arrow displays all Time Control options when selected. Individual options can also be selected by clicking on the item you want. * The Snapshot Display Speed can be controlled by selecting this option. Slow speeds of 1/8X, 1/4X, and 1/2X can be selected. The real time speed can also be selected at 1. Faster speeds of 2X, 4X, and 8X can also be obtained by using this selection. View Selections Each View Selection provides a different way of displaying vehicle data for analysis. The following functions can be selected under Available Views: Note: The parameter name will be shown in the original language used for capture if no translation is available for the name. * Parameter List View - Displays incoming information from the snapshot file. The current value of the parameters is displayed on the screen. * Log View - Contains all the information from the snapshot file. All parameter values are listed in the order they were recorded. Specific parameters can be added or removed from a watchlist by clicking on the appropriate item. * State View - Shows the values of all parameters in a specific time frame. These values can be used for comparison with the trigger view. * Trigger View - Displays all system and user defined triggers. This function can be used when there is a combination of factors involved in a diagnostic problem. When a Trigger condition is met a caution triangle will be displayed on the screen. Triggers: * Load Triggers - Allows you to load a file containing trigger definitions. * Save Triggers - Allows you to save the trigger to your computer's hard drive. * Remove Trigger - Allows you to remove the current trigger. It will no longer be present. * Edit Trigger - Displays a pop-up window where you can modify the limits and parameters contained within a trigger. * Adds Trigger - Displays a pop-up window to configure a trigger. * DTC View - After the Play function is selected and this option is selected this function opens the list of recorded DTCs. * Line Graph View - Displays data that can be visualized against the time-axis. From this view, specific parameters can be selected for graphing by Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5598 checking the box under Selected. At the bottom of the graph there are four functions Zoom In (increase size), Zoom Out (decrease size), Bookmarks, and Pause Scrolling. Each of these functions can be accessed by clicking on them. Testing for Continuity Testing for Continuity Special Tools EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM) For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test Probe Caution). The following procedures verify good continuity in a circuit. With a Digital Multimeter (DMM) 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the Ohms position. 2. Disconnect the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 3. Disconnect the load. 4. Press the MIN MAX button on the DMM. 5. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 6. Connect the other lead of the DMM to the other end of the circuit. 7. If the DMM displays low or no resistance, the circuit has good continuity. With a Test Lamp Note: Only use the test lamp procedure on low impedance power and ground circuits. 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect one lead of the test lamp to one end of the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 5. Connect the other end of the circuit to ground. 6. If the test lamp illuminates (full intensity), then the circuit has good continuity. Testing for Electrical Intermittents Testing for Electrical Intermittents Special Tools EL-39200 Digital Multimeter For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Perform the following procedures while wiggling the harness from side to side. Continue this at convenient points (about 6 inches apart) while watching the test equipment. * Testing for Short to Ground (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Short to Ground) * Testing for Continuity (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Continuity) * Testing for a Short to Voltage (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for a Short to Voltage) If the fault is not identified, perform the procedure below using the MIN MAX feature on the EL-39200 DMM. This feature allows you to manipulate the circuit without having to watch the EL-39200. The EL-39200 will generate an audible tone when a change is detected. Note: The EL-39200 must be used in order to perform the following procedure since the EL-39200 can monitor current, resistance or voltage while recording the minimum (MIN), and maximum (MAX) values measured. 1. Connect the EL-39200 to both sides of a suspected connector (still connected), or from one end of a suspected circuit to the other. Refer to Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5599 Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter) for information on connecting the EL-39200 to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the EL-39200 to the V (AC) or V (DC) position. 3. Press the range button of the EL-39200 in order to select the desired voltage range. 4. Press the MIN MAX button of the EL-39200. The EL-39200 displays 100 ms RECORD and emits an audible tone (beep). Note: The 100 ms RECORD mode is the length of time an input must stay at a new value in order to record the full change. 5. Simulate the condition that is potentially causing the intermittent connection, either by wiggling the connections or the wiring, test driving, or performing other operations. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions). 6. Listen for the audible Min Max Alert which indicates that a new minimum or maximum value has been recorded. 7. Press the MIN MAX button once in order to display the MAX value and note the value. 8. Press the MIN MAX button again in order to display the MIN value and note the value. 9. Determine the difference between the MIN and MAX values. * If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is 1 V or greater an intermittent open or high resistance condition exists. Repair the condition as necessary. * If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is less than 1 V, an intermittent open or high resistance condition does not exist. Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections Special Tools EL-35616 Terminal Test Probe Kit For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). When the condition is not currently present, but is indicated in DTC history, the cause may be intermittent. An intermittent may also be the cause when there is a customer complaint, but the symptom cannot be duplicated. Refer to the Symptom Table of the system that is suspect of causing the condition before trying to locate an intermittent condition. Most intermittent conditions are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. Inspect for the following items: * Wiring broken inside the insulation * Poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector * Poor terminal to wire connection-Some conditions which fall under this description are poor crimps, poor solder joints, crimping over the wire insulation rather than the wire itself, and corrosion in the wire to terminal contact area, etc. * Pierced or damaged insulation can allow moisture to enter the wiring causing corrosion. The conductor can corrode inside the insulation, with little visible evidence. Look for swollen and stiff sections of wire in the suspect circuits. * Wiring which has been pinched, cut, or its insulation rubbed through may cause an intermittent open or short as the bare area touches other wiring or parts of the vehicle. * Wiring that comes in contact with hot or exhaust components * Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions) in order to duplicate the conditions required, in order to verify the customer concern. * Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Electrical Intermittents) for test procedures to detect intermittent open, high resistance, short to ground, and short to voltage conditions. * Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure) for advanced intermittent diagnosis and Vehicle Data Recorder operation. Testing for Terminal Fretting Some intermittent conditions can be caused by wire terminal fretting corrosion. Fretting corrosion is a build-up of insulating, oxidized wear debris that can form when there is a small motion between electrical contacts. The oxidized wear debris can pile up enough at the electrical contact spots that the electrical resistance across the connection increases. Movement between the contacting surfaces as small as 10 to 100 microns can cause fretting. To put this in perspective, a sheet of paper is about 100 microns thick, so fretting motion is small and hard to see. Vibration and thermal expansion/contraction are the main sources that create fretting motion. Since vehicles vibrate and can experience large temperature swings, they are a good source for fretting motion. Tin, copper, nickel, and iron surfaces are all susceptible to fretting corrosion. Fretting corrosion can be difficult to see but it looks like small, dark smudges on the terminals contact surface. To correct a fretting condition disconnect the suspect connector and add Nyogel lubricant 760G (dielectric grease) to both sides of the connector Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5600 terminals. Then reconnect the connector and wipe away any excess lubricant. This will correct the additional terminal contact resistance due to the terminal fretting corrosion. Testing for Proper Terminal Contact It is important to test terminal contact at the component and any inline connectors before replacing a suspect component. Mating terminals must be inspected to ensure good terminal contact. A poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector may be the result of contamination or deformation. Contamination may be caused by the connector halves being improperly connected. A missing or damaged connector seal, damage to the connector itself, or exposing the terminals to moisture and dirt can also cause contamination. Contamination, usually in the underhood or underbody connectors, leads to terminal corrosion, causing an open circuit or intermittently open circuit. Deformation is caused by probing the mating side of a connector terminal without the proper adapter. Always use the EL-35616 when probing connectors. Other causes of terminal deformation are improperly joining the connector halves, or repeatedly separating and joining the connector halves. Deformation, usually to the female terminal contact tang, can result in poor terminal contact causing an open or intermittently open circuit. Testing for Proper Terminal Contact in Bussed Electrical Centers It is very important to use the correct test adapter when testing for proper terminal contact of fuses and relays in a bussed electrical center. Use EL-35616-35 to test for proper terminal contact. Failure to use EL-35616-35 can result in improper diagnosis of the bussed electrical center. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact: 1. Separate the connector halves. 2. Visually inspect the connector halves for contamination. Contamination may result in a white or green build-up within the connector body or between terminals. This causes high terminal resistance, intermittent contact, or an open circuit. An underhood or underbody connector that shows signs of contamination should be replaced in its entirety: terminals, seals, and connector body. 3. Using an equivalent male terminal / terminated lead, verify that the retention force is significantly different between a known good terminal and the suspect terminal. Replace the female terminal in question. Flat Wire (Dock and Lock) Connectors There are no serviceable parts for flat wire (dock and lock) connectors on the harness side or the component side. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact: 1. Remove the component in question. 2. Visually inspect each side of the connector for signs of contamination. Avoid touching either side of the connector as oil from your skin may be a source of contamination as well. 3. Visually inspect the terminal bearing surfaces of the flat wire circuits for splits, cracks, or other imperfections that could cause poor terminal contact. Visually inspect the component side connector to ensure that all of the terminals are uniform and free of damage or deformation. 4. Insert the appropriate adapter from the on the flat wire harness connector in order to test the circuit in question. Control Module/Component Voltage and Grounds Poor voltage or ground connections can cause widely varying symptoms. * Test all control module voltage supply circuits. Many vehicles have multiple circuits supplying voltage to a control module. Other components in the system may have separate voltage supply circuits that may also need to be tested. Inspect connections at the module/component connectors, fuses, and any intermediate connections between the voltage source and the module/component. A test lamp or a DMM may indicate that voltage is present, but neither tests the ability of the circuit to carry sufficient current. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. Refer to Circuit Testing (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Circuit Testing) and Power Distribution Schematics (See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Starting and Charging/Power and Ground Distribution/System Diagram/Power Distribution Schematics). * Test all control module ground and system ground circuits. The control module may have multiple ground circuits. Other components in the system may have separate grounds that may also need to be tested. Inspect grounds for clean and tight connections at the grounding point. Inspect the connections at the component and in splice packs, where applicable. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. Refer to Circuit Testing (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Circuit Testing) and Ground Distribution Schematics (See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Starting and Charging/Power and Ground Distribution/System Diagram/Ground Distribution Schematics). Temperature Sensitivity * An intermittent condition may occur when a component/connection reaches normal operating temperature. The condition may occur only when the component/connection is cold, or only when the component/connection is hot. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5601 * Freeze Frame, Failure Records, Snapshot, or Vehicle Data Recorder data may help with this type of intermittent condition, where applicable. * If the intermittent is related to heat, review the data for a relationship with the following: - High ambient temperatures - Underhood/engine generated heat - Circuit generated heat due to a poor connection, or high electrical load - Higher than normal load conditions, towing, etc. * If the intermittent is related to cold, review the data for the following: - Low ambient temperatures-In extremely low temperatures, ice may form in a connection or component. Inspect for water intrusion. - The condition only occurs on a cold start. - The condition goes away when the vehicle warms up. * Information from the customer may help to determine if the trouble follows a pattern that is temperature related. * If temperature is suspected of causing an intermittent fault condition, attempt to duplicate the condition. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions) in order to duplicate the conditions required. Electromagnetic Interference and Electrical Noise Some electrical components/circuits are sensitive to electromagnetic interference or other types of electrical noise. Inspect for the following conditions: * A misrouted harness that is too close to high voltage/high current devices such as secondary ignition components, motors, generator etc.-These components may induce electrical noise on a circuit that could interfere with normal circuit operation. * Electrical system interference caused by a malfunctioning relay, or a control module driven solenoid or switch-These conditions can cause a sharp electrical surge. Normally, the condition will occur when the malfunctioning component is operating. * Improper installation of non-factory or aftermarket add on accessories such as lights, 2-way radios, amplifiers, electric motors, remote starters, alarm systems, cell phones, etc.-These accessories may lead to interference while in use, but do not fail when the accessories are not in use. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Checking Aftermarket Accessories). * Test for an open diode across the A/C compressor clutch and for other open diodes. Some relays may contain a clamping diode. * The generator may be allowing AC noise into the electrical system. Incorrect Control Module * There are only a few situations where reprogramming a control module is appropriate: - A new service control module is installed. - A control module from another vehicle is installed. - Revised software/calibration files have been released for this vehicle. Note: DO NOT re-program the control module with the SAME software/calibration files that are already present in the control module. This is not an effective repair for any type of concern. * Verify that the control module contains the correct software/calibration. If incorrect programming is found, reprogram the control module with the most current software/calibration. Refer to Control Module References (See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning) for replacement, setup, and programming. Testing for Short to Ground Testing for Short to Ground Special Tools * EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM) * EL 35616-200 - Test Light-Probe Kit For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test Probe Caution). The following procedures test for a short to ground in a circuit. With a Digital Multimeter (DMM) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5602 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the Ohms position. 4. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the other lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. If the DMM does NOT display infinite resistance (OL), there is a short to ground in the circuit. With a Test Lamp 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect one lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to one end of the circuit to be tested. 5. If the test lamp illuminates, there is a short to ground in the circuit. Fuse Powering Several Loads 1. Review the system schematic and locate the fuse that is open. 2. Open the first connector or switch leading from the fuse to each load. 3. Connect a DMM across the fuse terminals (be sure that the fuse is powered). * When the DMM displays voltage the short is in the wiring leading to the first connector or switch. * If the DMM does not display voltage refer to the next step. 4. Close each connector or switch until the DMM displays voltage in order to find which circuit is shorted. Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter Special Tools EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM) For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test Probe Caution). Digital Multimeter (DMM) Basic Requirements Service information is validated using digital multimeters that meet or exceed the following requirements. Using a multimeter that does not meet these basic requirements may give inaccurate readings which could lead to an incorrect diagnosis. Display and Settings 1. Four digits displayed 2. Voltage, amperage, resistance, frequency, diode test settings, and min-max function 3. Display positive and negative values Voltage 1. Have at least 10 Mohm input impedance 2. Test a DC voltage range of 0.1-1000 V. 3. Test an AC voltage range of 0.1-1000 V. Amperage 1. Test a DC amperage range of 0.1µA-10 A. 2. Test an AC amperage range of 0.1µA-10 A. Resistance Test a resistance range of 0.1 ohm-40 Mohm and displays infinite for a value greater than 40 Mohm (O.L. (Over-load)) Frequency Test for a frequency range of 0.5 HZ-199 K HZ Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5603 Diode Test 1. Apply at least 1 mA when performing the diode bias test 2. Display the break over voltage drop (0-3 V) of a forward biased diode 3. Display infinite (O.L. (Over-load)) when a diode is reverse biased Min-Max Readings 1. Can update at a 1 ms sample rate 2. Saves and displays minimum and maximum values Note: Circuits which include any solid state control modules, such as the engine control module (ECM), should only be tested with a 10 MOhms or higher impedance digital multimeter such as the EL-39200. The EL-39200 instruction manual is a good source of information and should be read thoroughly upon receipt of the DMM as well as kept on hand for future reference. A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present if the impedance is low enough, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. In other words, if there is not enough current, the test lamp will not illuminate even though voltage is present. The ohmmeter function on a DMM shows how much resistance exists between 2 points along a circuit. Low resistance in a circuit means good continuity. Note: Disconnect the power feed from the suspect circuit when measuring resistance with a DMM. This prevents incorrect readings. DMMs apply such a small voltage to measure resistance that the presence of voltages can upset a resistance reading. Diodes and solid state components in a circuit can cause a DMM to display a false reading. To find out if a component is affecting a measurement take a reading once, then reverse the leads and take a second reading. If the readings differ the solid state component is affecting the measurement. Following are examples of the various methods of connecting the DMM to the circuit to be tested: * Probe both ends of the connector and either hold the leads in place while manipulating the connector or tape the leads to the harness for continuous monitoring while you perform other operations or test driving. Refer to Probing Electrical Connectors (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Probing Electrical Connectors). * Disconnect the harness at both ends of the suspected circuit where it connects either to a component or to other harnesses. * If the system that is being diagnosed has a specified pinout or breakout box, it may be used in order to simplify connecting the DMM to the circuit or for testing multiple circuits quickly. Using Connector Test Adapters Using Connector Test Adapters Special Tools EL 35616 - Terminal Test Probe Kit For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Caution: Do not insert test equipment probes (DMM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the EL-38125-580 GM Approved Terminal Release Tool Kit in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the EL-38125-580 GM Approved Terminal Release Tool Kit , ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the EL-38125-580 GM Approved Terminal Release Tool Kit label on the inside of the EL-38125-580 GM Approved Terminal Release Tool Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Using Fused Jumper Wires Using Fused Jumper Wires Special Tools J 36169-A Fused Jumper Wire Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5604 Note: A fused jumper may not protect solid state components from being damaged. The J 36169-A includes small clamp connectors that provide adaptation to most connectors without damage. This fused jumper wire is supplied with a 20-A fuse which may not be suitable for some circuits. Do not use a fuse with a higher rating than the fuse that protects the circuit being tested. AFL/EPC Connectors AFL/EPC Connectors Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. 1. For connectors with a bolt in the dress cover, turn the bolt counterclockwise to remove the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5605 2. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the top of the wire dress cover. Slide the CPA forward. 3. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5606 View showing depressing of the lever lock release tab. View of connector in released position. 4. Disconnect the connector from the component. 5. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the dress cover. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs and remove the dress cover. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5607 6. Release the rear lower half of the wiredress cover. 7. Release the tabs that are holding the wiredress cover to the connector body. 8. Remove the nose piece by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the slots on both ends of the connector body. Gently pry the nose piece out of the connector. J 38125-216 can also be used to remove the nose piece. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5608 9. Use the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by lifting the terminal retaining tabs on the inside of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Bosch Connectors (BSK) Bosch Connectors (BSK) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5609 Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 3. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 4. Insert the J 38125-561 tool into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 5. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Bosch Connectors (ECM) Bosch Connectors (ECM) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5610 1. Locate the assist lever on the top of the connector. Move the assist lever to the forward position. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5611 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the connector. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the locking tabs and remove the dress cover. 4. The terminal positive assurance (TPA) is located in the front of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5612 5. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove TPA from the connector. 6. Use the J 38125-213 or the J 38125-556 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5613 Note: Ensure that the dress cover and connector body are both in the released position before reassembling. Failure to do so may cause damage to the connector and component. Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Bosch Connectors (0.64) Bosch Connectors (0.64) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While pressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock until the lever is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Pull the rubber boot that covers the wires back to expose the end of the connector dress cover. 4. Place the connector locking lever in the center of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5614 5. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs that are on the wire end of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover and connector body and pry up. 6. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs located on the opposite side of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover at the connector end and pry up. 7. Remove the dress cover. 8. Cut the tie wrap on the wire bundle. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5615 9. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting a small flat-bladed tool into the small slot in the end of the slider and pushing on the TPA until it comes out of the connector. When the TPA exits the opposite side of the connector, gasp the TPA and pull it completely out of the connector. 10. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 11. Insert the J 38125-560 into the 2 triangular cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 12. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Terminal Replacement Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5616 1. Prior to installation the terminal must be aligned so the (1) coding lugs align with the (2) coding grooves on the connector. 2. Once the terminal is aligned, slide the terminal into the cavity until the retainer has engaged in the cavity of the connector. 3. Slide the TPA in the connector body and seat it using a small flat bladed tool. The TPA is seated when it is flush with the contact housing. 4. Secure the wires to the connector body using a tie wrap and replace the dress cover and grommet. Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Pull out the slider on the connector position assurance (CPA) until it is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5617 5. Insert the J 38125-557 into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Connector Position Assurance Locks Connector Position Assurance Locks The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of the connector. CPAs are used in various connectors throughout the vehicle. CPAs are also used in all SIR system electrical connectors. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals, of the connector. Connector Repairs Connector Repairs Connector Repairs contains a list of all connector repairs. The connector repairs are listed by the connector manufacturer and then by connector type. If the technician cannot identify the manufacturer of the connector, refer to Identifying Connectors below. Knowing the connector manufacturer will assist in finding the correct connector repair from the following list: * Connector Position Assurance Locks (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Connector Position Assurance Locks) * Terminal Position Assurance Locks (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Terminal Position Assurance Locks) * AFL/EPC Connectors (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/AFL/EPC Connectors) * Bosch Connectors (BSK) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Bosch Connectors (BSK))Bosch Connectors (0.64) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Bosch Connectors (0.64))Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT))Bosch Connectors (ECM) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Bosch Connectors (ECM)) * Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack))Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Push to Seat))Delphi Connectors Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5618 (Pull To Seat) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Pull to Seat))Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W))Delphi Connectors (Micro.64) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Micro .64))Delphi Connectors (12-Way) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (12-Way))Delphi Connectors (Steering Gear) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Steering Gear)) * FCI Connectors (Lever Lock) (See: General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/FCI Connectors (Lever Lock))FCI Connectors (SIR) (See: General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/FCI (SIR)) * FEP Connectors (Steering Gear) (See: General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/FEP Connectors (Steering Gear)) * JST Connectors (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/JST Connectors) * Kostal Connectors (Glow Plug Control Module) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Kostal Connectors (Glow Plug Control Module))Kostal Connectors (Transmission) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Kostal Connectors (Transmission)) * Molex Connectors (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Molex Connectors) * Sumitomo Connectors (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Sumitomo Connectors) * Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way))Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor))Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap))Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way))Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module)) * Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Yazaki Connectors (2-Way))Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Yazaki Connectors (16-Way)) * Repairing Connector Terminals (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Repairing Connector Terminals) Connector Anatomy 1 - Connector Positive Assurance (CPA) 2 - Assist Lever 3 - Wiredress Cover 4 - Seal Strain/Relief Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5619 5 - Slide Left Hand 6 - Slide Right Hand 7 - Terminal Positive Assurance (TPA) 8 - Terminal Positive Assurance (TPA) 9 - Connector Seal 10 - Connector Housing 11 - Inner Connector Identifying Connectors Knowing the connector manufacturer is helpful when trying to locating the correct connector repair procedure. There are many different connector designs used on GM vehicles and it is sometimes difficult to identify the connector manufacturer. The information in this document should help with the identification of connector manufactures. The following connector manufacturers make most of the connectors found in GM vehicles: * AFL/EPC (Alcoa Fujikura Ltd./Engineered Plastics Components) * Bosch * Delphi * FCI (Framatome Connectors International) * JAE (Japan Aviation Electronics) * JST (Japan Solderless Terminals) * Kostel * Molex * Sumitomo * Tyco/AMP * Yazaki Identifying the manufacturer of a connector is often difficult. When trying to determine the manufacturer of a connector, look for specific identifying marks that are unique to that connector supplier. Most of these identify marks are hard to find or see. Check the connector carefully and refer to the information below for pictures and descriptions of connector identification markings. * Most of AFLs connectors have EPC on their connector body. Some of the smaller connectors will not have any markings on them. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5620 * In some cases Bosch will actually be printed on the connector. If Bosch does not appear on the connector, look for the Bosch logo. The Bosch logo is a circle with a blunted arrow inside. This logo can appear anywhere on the connector and is often very small. * In some cases Delphi will actually be printed on the connector. If Delphi is not printed on the connector, look for PED. In both cases there is no specific orientation for Delphi or PED and they can appear anywhere on the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5621 * FCI connectors may have the FCI logo on their connectors. The logo is the letters FCI with an "A" above it. * JAE connector have JAE in small letters on their connectors. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5622 * JST connectors have JST in small letters on their connectors, similar to that above. The location of the logo will vary with the connector size and style. * Kostel has an "LK" with a circle around it. These connector are usually used as a transmissions connection. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5623 * Most Molex connectors will have the Molex logo on the dresscover of the connector. In some cases the connectors may have MX followed by another letter. The third letter indicates where the connector was made. A connector with MXD is a Molex connector made in Detroit. Sumitomo has a unique symbol on their connector and possibly a part number. The symbol is similar to that of a diamond lying on its side, similar to that shown. The logo could appear anywhere but the most common place is at the wire side of the housing. * Tyco/AMP has many different and unique connector designs. Some may or may not have identifiable marks on them. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5624 * Yazaki has a wedge or arrow shape, similar to that shown. Delphi Connectors (Push to Seat) Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Follow the steps below in order to repair push to seat connectors. 1. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device, the connector position assurance (CPA) device, and/or the secondary lock. 2. Separate the connector halves (1). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5625 3. Use the proper pick or removal tool (1) in order to release the terminal. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 4. Gently pull the cable and the terminal (2) out of the back of the connector. 5. Re-form the locking device if you are going to reuse the terminal (1). 6. To repair the terminal, refer to Terminal Repair. Terminal Repair 1. Slip the cable seal away from the terminal. 2. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 3. Slip a new cable seal onto the wire. 4. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 5. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 6. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. 7. Slide the cable seal toward the terminal. 8. Crimp the cable seal and the insulation. 9. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply grease to the connector. Reinstalling Terminal 1. In order to reuse a terminal or lead assembly, refer to Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Wiring Repairs). 2. Ensure that the cable seal is kept on the terminal side of the splice. 3. Insert the lead from the back until it catches. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Terminated Lead Repair 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Find the appropriate terminated lead. 3. Use the appropriate splice sleeves depending on the gauge size. 4. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves). Delphi Connectors (Pull to Seat) Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) Special Tools Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5626 J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal If the terminal is visibly damaged or is suspected of having a faulty connection, the terminal should be replaced. Follow the steps below in order to repair pull-to-seat connectors: 1. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) device and/or the secondary lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component or separate the connectors for in-line connectors. 3. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device. 4. Insert the proper pick or removal tool into the front of the connector body. Note: On connectors with more than one terminal the service loop may not be large enough to remove the terminal and crimp on a new one. If the terminal wire does not have a large enough service loop for removal, cut the wire 5 cm (2 in) behind the connector before removal. 5. Grasp the wire at the back of the connector body and gently push the terminal out the front of the connector body. Terminal Repair 1. If the wire needed to be cut in order to remove the terminal, gently push a small length of the same size wire through the back of the connector cavity until there is enough wire exposed in order to crimp on a new terminal. If the wire was not cut, cut the existing wire as close to the old terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 4. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. Terminal Installation 1. Align the terminal and pull the wire from the back of the connector in order to seat the terminal. 2. If necessary, cut the new wire to proper length and splice with existing circuit. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves). 3. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply dielectric grease to the connector. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Micro .64) Delphi Connectors (Micro.64) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5627 Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro.64 connectors. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. The lever lock may be located on the top or sides of the wire dress cover. View of a typical Micro 64 connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5628 Depress the lock and pull the lever over and past the lock. View of the connector when released from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5629 View of another type of Micro 64 connector. Depress the locks that are located on both sides of the wiredress cover and pull the lever over and past the locks. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5630 View of the connector when released from the component. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the front of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool push down on one of the locking tabs and pull the cover up until the dress cover releases. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. 4. Once the front 2 locks are unlocked, lift the front of the dress cover and pull it forward. Note: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 5. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the small slot on the TPA and pushing down until the TPA releases. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5631 Note: Be careful not to angle or rock the J 38125-21 tool when inserting it into the connector or the tool may break. 6. Insert the J 38125-21 tool into the round canal between the terminals cavities at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Follow the steps below in order to repair Micro 64 connector terminals. The Micro 64 connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-64 (M jaw) was developed to crimp Micro 64 terminals. The J 38125-64 crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. The J 38125-64 crimping tool is also designed to crimp both the wire and the insulation at the same time. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro 64 terminals. Note: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gauge wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 1. Cut the wire as close to the damaged terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5632 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert terminal into the appropriate terminal holder until it hits bottom and stops. The correct terminal holder is determined by the wire size. Also ensure that the terminals wings are pointing towards the former on the tool and the release locator. 5. Insert the stripped cable into the terminal. Insulation should be visible on both sides of the terminal insulation wings. 6. Compress the handles until the ratchet automatically releases. 7. Place the terminal into the appropriate cavity and assemble the connector. Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5633 Terminal Removal Procedure There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W connectors. These connectors are very similar but use different terminals and have some minor physical differences also. The first connector design of the Micro-Pack 100W (1) has a white connector interface that holds the terminals. The second design of the Micro-Pack 100W (2) has a gray interface to hold the terminals. Also, the first design has terminal cavities that are further apart (3 mm centerline) and offset from the other row of terminal cavities in the connector. The second design has terminals cavities that are closer together (2.54 mm centerline) and aligned vertically. One other way to identify the second design is the thin strip of material that runs along the outside of the cavities. Note: There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W terminals which are very similar. Ensure that you have the correct terminal before crimping the new terminal to the wire. The first design connector uses the longer terminal (1) that has a raised area in front of the recess in the terminal. The second design connector uses the shorter terminal without the raised area. Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro-Pack 100W connectors. Some Micro-Pack 100W connector disassembly procedures will vary. Use this procedure as a guide. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5634 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Locate the nose piece locking tabs that are positioned on the side of the connector nose piece. The connector nose piece acts as a terminal positive assurance (TPA) and may be referred to as such. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to push in one of the locking tabs while gently pulling on the same side of the nose piece. 4. Repeat the procedure for the other locking tab and remove the nose piece. 5. Remove the wire dress cover. The following is a general procedure for wire dress cover removal. Use this procedure as a guide, some dress cover removal procedures may vary. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5635 6. Use fingers to squeeze the 2 locking legs of the cover. 7. Apply pressure and gently rock the cover until one locking leg is unseated. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5636 8. Continue to apply pressure and rock the cover until the second locking leg is unseated. Repeat procedure for the other side of the dress cover and remove the cover. 9. Use J 38125-12A to gently lift the terminal retaining tab while gently pulling the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. If the terminal is severely bent or damaged, it may be possible on some connectors to push the wire out of the front of the connector instead of pulling it through. This will prevent damage to the internal seals of the connector. Once the terminal is pushed out of the connector, cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible and pull the wire through the connector. Terminal Repair Procedure The Micro-Pack 100W connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool was developed to crimp Micro-Pack 100W terminals. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro-Pack 100 terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5637 1. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. Note: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gauge wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert the terminal into the crimp tool until the core wings are flush with the anvil on the crimp tool. Be sure that the wings are pointed toward the crimp tool former and release the spring locator. The locator will hold the terminal in place. Inspect the alignment of the terminal wings with the crimp tool former. If the terminal wings are wider than the crimp tool former, remove the terminal and bend the terminal wings in slightly. 5. Place stripped wire into terminal. 6. Crimp the new terminal to the wire. If a jam occurs, press the emergency release to open applicator. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5638 Terminal Replacement Procedure After the terminal is crimped to the wire perform the following procedure in order to replace Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the Terminal Removal Procedure. Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The following is the proper procedure for the repair of Weather Pack(R) Connectors. 1. Separate the connector halves (1). 2. Open the secondary lock. A secondary lock aids in terminal retention and is usually molded to the connector (1). 3. Grasp the wire and push the terminal to the forward most position. Hold the wire in this position. 4. Insert the Weather Pack(R) terminal removal tool J 38125-10A into the front (mating end) of the connector cavity until it rests on the cavity shoulder (1). 5. Gently pull on the wire to remove the terminal through the back of the connector (2). Note: Never use force to remove a terminal from a connector. 6. Inspect the terminal and connector for damage. Repair as necessary. Refer to Repairing Connector Terminals (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Repairing Connector Terminals). 7. Reform the lock tang (2) and reset terminal in connector body. 8. Close secondary locks and join connector halves. 9. Verify that circuit is complete and working satisfactorily. 10. Perform system check. Delphi Connectors (12-Way) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5639 Delphi Connectors (12-Way) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) and slide the lever lock away from the connector body. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs on the dress cover of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool release all of the locking tabs. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5640 4. Release the lower wire dress cover locking tab. 5. Release the upper wire dress cover locking tab. 6. Once the locks are unlocked, lift the dress cover off. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5641 Note: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 7. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the locking tabs on both sides of the TPA. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. 8. Remove the nose piece by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the locking tabs on both sides of the nose piece. Gently pry the nose piece out of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5642 9. Insert the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Delphi Connectors (Steering Gear) Delphi Connectors (Steering Gear) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5643 Removal Procedure 1. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the locking tab on the connector. 2. Push down the locking tab to release the connector. The small flat-bladed tool may need to be pushed down and angled back slightly to depress the locking tab. Pull on the connector body while releasing the locking tab to disconnect the connector. FCI Connectors (Lever Lock) FCI Connectors (Lever Lock) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5644 Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. 1. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. 2. The release tab is located on the top of the wiredress cover. 3. View of connector in released position. 4. Disconnect the connector from the component. 5. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the dress cover. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs and remove the dress cover. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5645 6. Use a small flat-blade tool to slide the terminal position assurance (TPA) up one notch on both ends of the connector. The TPA is located underneath the wire dress cover. For the larger terminals insert the J 38125-556 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. For the smaller terminals insert the J 38125-560 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5646 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. FCI (SIR) FCI Connectors (SIR) Removal Procedure Note: The orange CPA must be released first to disconnect or to connect the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5647 1. Lift the orange CPA vertically (avoid lifting on an angle to the connector) approximately 4 mm to release the connector. Use a small flat-bladed tool to help release the orange CPA. The orange CPA can also be released manually without any tools. 2. Grab the connector on both sides and lift the connector vertically to disconnect the connector. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5648 1. Lift the orange CPA vertically approximately 4 mm before installing the connector. Use a small flat-bladed tool to help release the orange CPA. The orange CPA can also be released manually without any tools. 2. Line up the connector key tabs with the initiator key slots. Grab the connector on both sides and push the connector down into the initiator connector sub assembly until fully seated. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5649 3. After the connector is fully seated, push down the orange CPA with your thumb. Push down until the orange CPA is touching the yellow cover on the connector. FEP Connectors (Steering Gear) FEP Connectors (Steering Gear) Removal Procedure 1. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the locking tab on the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5650 2. Push down the locking tab to release the connector. The small flat-bladed tool may need to be pushed down and angled back slightly to depress the locking tab. Pull on the connector body while releasing the locking tab to disconnect the connector. JST Connectors JST Connectors Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. While depressing the lock, remove the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5651 2. Locate the two indents of the terminal position assurance (TPA) located on the bottom of the connector body. Note: The TPA cannot be removed from the connector while there are terminals present in the connector body. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to very carefully raise the TPA on both sides of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5652 4. View of the TPA when removed from the connector body. 5. Use the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the left side of the terminal release cavity as shown in the graphic. Use the tool to move the terminal release to the right with a gentle prying motion. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Kostal Connectors (Glow Plug Control Module) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5653 Kostal Connectors (Glow Plug Control Module) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure View of typical connector. View of connector in released position. 1. Locate the assist lever at the back of the connector. Move the assist lever to the rear position. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5654 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove the dress cover. 4. Slide the dress cover forward and off of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5655 5. The terminal positive assurance (TPA) is located in the front and rear of the connector. Note: The front TPA cannot be removed from the connector. Only move it to the preset position. 6. Use a small flat-blade tool to move the front TPA to the preset position, outboard approximately 0.125 in. (3 mm). 7. Use a small flat-blade tool to completely remove the rear TPA from the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5656 8. Use the J 38125-24 or the J 38125-560 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 9. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Kostal Connectors (Transmission) Kostal Connectors (Transmission) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5657 1. While depressing the lock, twist and remove the connector from the component. 2. Locate the terminal position assurance (TPA). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5658 Note: The TPA cannot be removed from the connector while there are terminals present in the connector body. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to push the TPA until it bottoms out. 4. Use the J 38125-28 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal cavity as shown in the graphic. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 5. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Terminal Replacement Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5659 After the terminal is crimped to the wire, perform the following procedure in order to replace the terminal. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. Locate the terminal position assurance (TPA). 4. Use a small flat-blade tool to push the TPA until it bottoms out. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5660 5. Ensure the TPA is fully seated. The TPA should be centered and flush with the connector body when viewed. Molex Connectors Molex Connectors Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the top of the wire dress cover. Slide the CPA forward. 2. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5661 3. The lever should be in the full forward position. 4. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5662 5. Remove the dress cover by using a flat bladed tool to release the dress cover locking tabs and lift up on the dress cover. 6. Cut the tie wrap that holds the wires to the connector body. 7. Use a small flat-blade tool to pry one side of the nose piece up to the pre-stage position. When the nose piece is in the pre-staged position, the nose piece will be raised above the connector body the length of the step in the nose piece. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5663 8. Use a small flat-blade tool to pry the other side of the piece to the pre-stage position. If the nose piece is higher than the first step in the nose piece, gently push down on the nose piece until it meets with resistance from the connector body, you should feel the nose piece click into position. 9. Insert the J 38125-213 into the small terminal release hole on the nose piece and gently pull on the back of the wire. 10. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Refer to the terminal crimping procedure in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit. Terminal Replacement Procedure After the terminal is crimped to the wire, perform the following procedure in order to replace the terminal. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5664 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the connector disassembly procedure. Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the connector body and pull the CPA out. The CPA is on the wire harness side of connector. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Use a small flat-bladed tool to gently pry off the dress cover by inserting the tool under the cover opposite the harness side and prying up. 4. Remove the cover. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5665 5. Using a small flat-bladed tool, push on the side of the nose piece retainer while pushing the nose piece forward with your thumb. This will release the terminal position assurance (TPA). 6. Insert the J 38125-12A into the corresponding terminal release cavity. The release cavities are the 2 center rows of cavities on one half of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5666 7. Pressing the J 38125-12A tool in the release cavity of the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and crimper in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. Slide the lever lock away from the connector body. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs on the dress cover of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool release all of the locking tabs. 4. Once the locks are unlocked, lift the dress cover off. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5667 Note: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 5. Release the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the blue locking tabs on both ends of the connector. Gently slide the TPA up to the released position on both ends. 6. For the larger terminals insert the J 38125-13A tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. For the smaller terminals insert the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5668 View of the release tool being used for the larger terminals. View of the release tool being used for the larger terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5669 View of the release tool being used for the smaller terminals. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5670 Side view of connector. View of top of connector. 1. Locate the assist lever and lock on the top of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5671 2. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. 3. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5672 4. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the rear of the connector. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. 5. Once the locking tabs are unlocked, slide the inner connector out of the rear of the connector housing. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5673 6. Use the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by pressing on the tang. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Repairing Connector Terminals Repairing Connector Terminals Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Use the following repair procedures in order to repair the following: * Push to Seat terminals * Pull to Seat terminals Some terminals do not require all of the steps shown. Skip the steps that do not apply for your terminal repair. The J-38125 contains further information. 1. Cut off the terminal between the core and the insulation crimp. Minimize any wire loss. For cable seal terminals, remove the seal. 2. Apply the correct cable seal per gauge size of the wire, if used. Slide the seal back along the wire in order to enable insulation removal. 3. Remove the insulation. 4. For sealed terminals only, align the seal with the end of the cable insulation. 5. Position the strip in the terminal. For sealed terminals, position the strip and seal in the terminal. 6. Hand crimp the core wings. 7. Hand crimp the insulation wings. For sealed terminals, hand crimp the insulation wings around the seal and the cable. 8. Solder all of the hand crimp terminals excepting Micro-Pack 100.64 size. Soldering Micro-Pack 100 World terminals may damage the terminal. Sumitomo Connectors Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5674 Sumitomo Connectors Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5675 3. Remove the dress cover by using a flat-blade tool to release the connector locking tabs and pulling off the dress cover. 4. Relieve the tension on the nose piece retainers by inserting J 38125-12A into the single retainer slot on the end of the nose piece and gently prying out the locking tab. Repeat the process for both of the nose piece locking tabs on the opposite side of the nose piece. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5676 5. Once the nose piece retainers are relaxed, use the J 38125-552 to pull up the nose piece by hooking the tool under the nose piece and pulling up. The nose piece should raise slightly. 6. On the opposite side of the nose piece, use the J 38125-552 to pull up the nose piece by hooking the tool under the nose piece and pulling up. The nose piece should release completely. If the nose piece does not come off, repeat the procedure on the opposite side. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5677 7. The illustration above identifies the entry canal where the terminal release tool will be inserted, and the terminal cavity. * Terminal (1) * Entry Canal (2) 8. Insert the J 38125-553 tool into the entry canal and pry up on the terminal retainer. The terminal retainer is a small plastic piece on the top of the terminal. The terminal retainer must be held up while the terminal is pulled out of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5678 9. The illustration shows a cutaway view of the connector to aid the technician in releasing the terminal retainer. 10. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Refer to the terminal crimping procedure in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit. Terminal Replacement Procedure After the terminal is crimped to the wire, perform the following procedure in order to replace the terminal. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the connector disassembly procedure. Terminal Position Assurance Locks Terminal Position Assurance Locks The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5679 2. Insert the J 38125-11A tool into the cavity on the lower right hand face of the connector until the terminal release tang access panel slides over. 3. Ensure that the terminal release tang access panel is in the correct location to access the terminals. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5680 5. Insert the J 38125-11A into the terminal release tang access slot located behind the access panel of the connector and press down on the terminal while carefully pulling the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component by pressing down on the connector position assurance (CPA). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5681 2. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting the tool in the small recess on the side of the connector and pushing up until the TPA releases from the connector body. The TPA should raise just slightly. Do not try to remove the TPA. Note: The TPA on this connector cannot be removed unless the terminals are removed first. The TPA will come out of the connector body, but only slightly. When the TPA is slightly raised the terminals can be removed. Using excessive force to remove the TPA with the terminals still in the connector will damage the connector. 3. Repeat the process for the other side of the connector. 4. Ensure that the TPA is in the proper position to remove the terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5682 5. While pushing the terminal forward, insert the J 38125-24 in the release cavity above the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5683 2. Insert a small flat-blade tool in the slot below the front loaded terminal position assurance (TPA) and pry up. 3. Remove the TPA by pulling it out of the connector. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-553 on a slight upward angle into the cavity below the terminal to be removed. Ensure that the pointed on the end of the tool is facing the bottom of the terminal and it stays in contact with the terminal until it stops on the plastic terminal retainer. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5684 6. Gently pry the plastic terminal retainer down and carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5685 1. While depressing the lock, pull the two connector halves apart. Note: The TPA is fragile and may break if not done carefully. 2. Use a small flat-blade tool to very carefully push the terminal position assurance (TPA) towards the face of the connector on both sides of the connector. 3. View of the male half of the connector with female terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5686 4. View of the female half of the connector with male terminals. 5. Use the J 38125-215 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. View of the female half of the connector with male terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5687 7. View of the male half of the connector with female terminals. 8. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers A circuit breaker is a protective device that is designed to open the circuit when a current load is in excess of the rated breaker capacity. If there is a short or other type of overload condition in the circuit, the excessive current will open the circuit between the circuit breaker terminals. Two types of circuit breakers are used. Circuit Breaker - This type opens when excessive current passes through it for a period of time. It closes again after a few seconds, and if the cause of the high current is still present, it will open again. The circuit breaker will continue to cycle open and closed until the condition causing the high current is removed. Positive Temperature Coefficient (PTC) Circuit Breaker - This type greatly increases its resistance when excessive current passes through it. The excessive current heats the PTC device, as the device heats its resistance increases. Eventually the resistance gets so high that the circuit is effectively open. Unlike the ordinary circuit breaker the PTC unit will not reset until the circuit is opened, by removing the voltage from its terminals. Once the voltage is removed the circuit breaker will re-close within a second or 2. Circuit Protection - Fuses Circuit Protection - Fuses Special Tools EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM) For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5688 The fuse is the most common method of an automotive wiring circuit protection. Whenever there is an excessive amount of current flowing through a circuit the fusible element will melt and create an open or incomplete circuit. Fuses are a one time protection device and must be replaced each time the circuit is overloaded. To determine if a fuse is open, remove the suspected fuse and examine if the element in the fuse is broken (2). If not broken (1), also check for continuity using a Digital Multimeter (DMM) or a continuity tester. If the element is broken or continuity is suspect, replace the fuse with one of equal current rating. Circuit Protection - Fusible Links Circuit Protection - Fusible Links Special Tools EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM) For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Fusible link is wire designed to melt and break continuity when excessive current is applied. It is often located between or near the battery and starter or electrical center. Use a continuity tester or a Digital Multimeter (DMM) at each end of the wire containing the fusible link in order to determine if it is broken. If broken, it must be replaced with fusible link of the same gauge size. Repairing a Fusible Link Note: Fusible links cut longer than 225 mm (approximately 9 in) will not provide sufficient overload protection. Flat Wire Repairs Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5689 Flat Wire Repairs The flat wire within the flex wiring harness is not serviceable. If an open or short exists within the flex wiring harness the complete harness must be replaced. GMLAN Wiring Repairs GMLAN Wiring Repairs Special Tools * EL-38125-10 - Splice Sleeve Crimping Tool * J 38125-5 - Ultra Torch Special Tool * DuraSeal splice sleeves * A wire stripping tool For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: * A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. * A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The GM Local Area Network (GMLAN) System requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working on GMLAN connectors and terminals. GMLAN Repairs Note: When making a repair to any GMLAN network, the original wire length after the repair must be the same length as before the repair. If the network is a twisted pair, the twist must be maintained after the repair is completed. GMLAN has 2 types of networks, low speed and high speed. Low speed GMLAN has a single wire and works at slow speeds. High speed GMLAN has 2 wires in a twisted pair and works at higher speeds. For more information on GMLAN, refer to Data Link Communications Description and Operation ( See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Information Bus/Description and Operation). GMLAN Connector Terminal Repair Note: A terminated lead can be used to replace damaged connector terminals for both high speed and low speed GMLAN systems. When making a connector terminal repair on a GMLAN high speed system with twisted pair wires, do not untwist the wires more than necessary to make the repair. If the individual terminals are damaged on any GMLAN connection, use the appropriate connector repair procedure in order to repair the terminal. Refer to Connector Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Connector Repairs) for the appropriate connector repair procedure. GMLAN Wire Repair Note: Refer to Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Wiring Repairs) in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gauge size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and EL-38125-10 - tool. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the DuraSeal splice sleeves. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5690 Note: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: * Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. * Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. * Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert to regional wiring gauge size. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the EL-38125-10 - tool in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the splice sleeve crimp tool. The crimp tool has four nests, one for each color. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5691 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs Caution: Do not solder repairs under any circumstances as this could result in the air reference being obstructed. If the heated oxygen sensor pigtail wiring, connector, or terminal is damaged the entire oxygen sensor assembly must be replaced. Do not attempt to repair the wiring, connector, or terminals. In order for the sensor to function properly it must have a clean air reference. This clean air reference is obtained by way of the oxygen sensor signal and heater wires. Any attempt to repair the wires, connectors or terminals could result in the obstruction of the air reference and degrade oxygen sensor performance. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5692 The following guidelines should be used when servicing the heated oxygen sensor: * Do not apply contact cleaner or other materials to the sensor or vehicle harness connectors. These materials may get into the sensor, causing poor performance. Also, the sensor pigtail and harness wires must not be damaged in such a way that the wires inside are exposed. This could provide a path for foreign materials to enter the sensor and cause performance problems. * Neither the sensor nor vehicle lead wires should be bent sharply or kinked. Sharp bends, kinks, etc., could block the reference air path through the lead wire. * Do not remove or defeat the oxygen sensor ground wire (where applicable). Vehicles that utilize the ground wire sensor may rely on this ground as the only ground contact to the sensor. Removal of the ground wire will also cause poor engine performance. * To prevent damage due to water intrusion, be sure that the peripheral seal remains intact on the vehicle harness connector. High Temperature Wiring Repairs High Temperature Wiring Repairs Special Tools * EL-38125-10 - Splice Sleeve Crimping Tool * J 38125-5 - Ultra Torch * DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). High Temperature Wiring Wiring that is exposed to high temperatures, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time may use materials i.e. wires, connectors, and shielding that has a higher heat rating than typical wiring. When making a repair in a high temperature area observe the following: * Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature to replace any damaged wire. * Replace any heat shielding that is removed. * Cover any DuraSeal splice sleeves with SCT1 shrink tubing. * After making a wiring repair, ensure that the location of the wiring is not moved closer to the heat source. Identifying High Temperature Wiring Wiring that is exposed to high temperature, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time need special considerations when making wiring repairs. Areas that may be exposed to higher temperatures can be identified by heat resistant materials that are being used in those areas. These materials may include heat reflective tape, moon tape, and high temperature shrink tubing. Also conduit and other protective coverings may be used. Because conduit or similar coverings are used throughout the vehicle regardless of the temperature, it may be necessary for the technician to determine if an area is exposed to excessive heat before making a wiring repair. Obvious areas of consideration would be any area located near the exhaust manifolds, catalytic converter, and exhaust pipes. Items Required * DuraSeal splice sleeves to crimp and seal connections * High temperature SCT1 shrink tubing to protect the splice sleeves * Terminated leads or pigtails * The correct tools to remove the terminals from the connectors Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature of the same or larger gauge size as the original wire when repair damage wire. Also replace any reflective tape that you remove during the repair. High Temperature Wire Repair Note: Refer to Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Wiring Repairs) in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature rating of the same gauge size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the EL-38125-10 - tool and then encapsulate the splice sleeve using the high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5693 Note: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: * Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. * Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. * Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert to regional wiring gauge size. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Slide a section of high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing down the length of wire to be spliced. Ensure that the shrink tubing will not interfere with the splice procedure. 5. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 6. Use the EL-38125-10 - tool in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the splice sleeve crimp tool. The crimp tool has four nests, one for each color. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5694 7. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 8. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 9. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 10. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 11. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5695 12. Center the high temperature SCT1 shrink tube over the DuraSeal splice sleeve. 13. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the high temperature heat shrink tubing. 14. Gradually move the heat from the center to the open end of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. 15. Replace any reflective tape and clips that may have been remove during the repair. Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation If the wire insulation has been chafed, or broken, enough to show the conductive portion of the wire, and the wire is not damaged, determine the length of insulation that needs to be repaired. If the repair is less than 280 mm (11 in), cut the wire within the damaged area. Than slide the appropriate heat shrink tubing (listed below) over the wire, and repair the wire by splicing the wires together. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves). Once the wire is spliced together slide heat shrink tubing over the damaged area and apply heat to seal the repaired wire. If the wire is damaged, or the damaged area is larger than 280 mm (11 in), than replace the damaged wire by splicing in a new section of wire. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5696 SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs Special Tools * EL-38125-10 - Splice Sleeve Crimping Tool * J 38125-5 - Ultra Torch * DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: * A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. * A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides the necessary low resistance contact integrity for these sensitive, low energy circuits. The Supplemental Inflatable Restraint (SIR) System/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working with the SIR/SRS, and the wiring components, such as connectors and terminals. SIR/SRS Connector Repair (Plastic Body and Terminal Metal Pin) Note: Do not use the terminals in the kit in order to replace damaged SIR/SRS system terminals. Use either an SIR/SRS pigtail or a terminated lead from the SIR Repair Kit Tray. The terminals in the SIR/SRS system are made with a special plating. This plating provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. Pigtail repair packs are available for SIR/SRS connectors with eight or less terminals. Only the connector body is available for connectors with more than eight terminals. Terminated leads can be used to replace damaged terminals when replacing the connector body. SIR/SRS Component Wire Pigtail Repair Note: Do not make wire, connector, or terminal repairs on components with wire pigtails. A wire pigtail is a wire or wires attached directly to the device, not by a connector. If a wiring pigtail is damaged, you must replace the entire component, with pigtail. The inflatable restraint steering wheel module coil is an example of a pigtail component. SIR/SRS Wire Repair Note: Refer to Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Wiring Repairs) in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5697 If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gauge size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and EL-38125-10 - tool. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the DuraSeal splice sleeves. Note: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: * Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. * Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. * Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert to regional wiring gauge size. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the EL-38125-10 - tool in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the splice sleeve crimp tool. The crimp tool has four nests, one for each color. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5698 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Connector Position Assurance (CPA) The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of a connector. CPAs are used in all SIR System connectors and also in some connectors of other systems. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals of a connection. Terminal Position Assurance (TPA) The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5699 Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Special Tools * EL-38125-10 - Splice Sleeve Crimping Tool * J 38125-5 - Ultra Torch * DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Note: Use only DuraSeal splice sleeves. Other splice sleeves may not protect the splice from moisture or provide a good electrical connection. Use DuraSeal splice sleeves to form a one-to-one splice on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. Use DuraSeal splice sleeves where there is special requirements such as moisture sealing. Follow the instructions below in order to splice copper wire using DuraSeal splice sleeves. Note: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: * Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. * Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. * Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert to regional wiring gauge size. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5700 5. Use the EL-38125-10 - tool in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the splice sleeve crimp tool. The crimp tool has four nests, one for each color. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5701 * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Splicing Inline Harness Diodes Splicing Inline Harness Diodes Many vehicle electrical systems use a diode to isolate circuits and protect the components from voltage spikes. When installing a new diode use the following procedure. 1. Open the harness. * If the harness is taped, remove the tape. * To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing seam ripper (available from sewing supply stores) in order to cut open the harness. * If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the diode. 2. If the diode is taped to the harness, remove all of the tape. 3. Check and record the current flow direction and orientation of diode. 4. Remove the inoperative diode from the harness with a suitable soldering tool. Note: If the diode is located next to a connector terminal remove the terminal(s) from the connector to prevent damage from the soldering tool. 5. Carefully strip away a section of insulation next to the old soldered portion of the wire(s). Do not remove any more than is needed to attach the new diode. 6. Check current flow direction of the new diode, being sure to install the diode with correct bias. Reference the appropriate service manual wiring schematic to obtain the correct diode installation position. 7. Attach the new diode to the wire(s) using 60/40 rosin core solder. Before soldering attach some heat sinks (aluminum alligator clips) across the diode wire ends to protect the diode from excessive heat. Follow the manufacturer's instruction for the soldering equipment. 8. Reinstall terminal(s) into the connector body if previously removed. Note: To prevent shorts to ground and water intrusion, completely cover all exposed wire and diode attachment points with tape. 9. Tape the diode to the harness or connector using electrical tape. Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable Twisted/shielded cable is used in order to protect wiring from electrical noise. Two-conductor cable of this construction is used between the radio and the Delco-Bose(R) speaker/amplifier units and other applications where low level, sensitive signals must be carried. Follow the instructions below in order to repair the twisted/shielded cable. 1. Remove the outer jacket (1). Use care not to cut into the drain wire of the mylar tape. 2. Unwrap the tape. Do not remove the tape. Use the tape in order to rewrap the twisted conductors after the splice is made. 3. Prepare the splice. Untwist the conductors and follow the instructions for Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves). Staggering the splices by 65 mm (2.5 in) is recommended. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5702 Note: Apply the mylar tape with the aluminum side inward. This ensures good electrical contact with the drain wire. 4. Re-assemble the cable. * Rewrap the conductors with the mylar tape. If the mylar tape is damaged, use 3M product AL-36FR to replace the damaged mylar tape. * Use caution not to wrap the drain wire in the tape (1). * Follow the splicing instructions for copper wire and splice the drain wire. * Wrap the drain wire around the conductors and tape with electrical tape to replace the outer insulation. 5. Tape over the entire cable. Use a winding motion when you apply the tape. Wiring Repairs Wiring Repairs The Wiring Repairs section contains the following types of wiring repair information. Using these elements together will make wiring repair faster and easier: * Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections) * Flat Wire Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Flat Wire Repairs) * GMLAN Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/GMLAN Wiring Repairs) * High Temperature Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/High Temperature Wiring Repairs) * Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs) * Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves) * Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable) * Splicing Inline Harness Diodes (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Inline Harness Diodes) * SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs) US English/Metric Conversion US English/Metric Conversion Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5703 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5704 Basic Digital Multimeter Requirements Basic Digital Multimeter Requirements Digital Multimeter (DMM) Basic Requirements Service information is validated using digital multimeters that meet or exceed the following requirements. Using a multimeter that does not meet these basic requirements may give inaccurate readings which could lead to an incorrect diagnosis. Display and Settings 1. Four digits displayed 2. Voltage, amperage, resistance, frequency, diode test settings, and min-max function 3. Display positive and negative values Voltage 1. Have at least 10 Mohm input impedance 2. Test a DC voltage range of 0.1-1000 V. 3. Test an AC voltage range of 0.1-1000 V. Amperage 1. Test a DC amperage range of 0.1µA-10 A. 2. Test an AC amperage range of 0.1µA-10 A. Resistance Test a resistance range of 0.1 ohm-40 Mohm and displays infinite for a value greater than 40 Mohm (O.L. (Over-load)) Frequency Test for a frequency range of 0.5 HZ-199 K HZ Diode Test 1. Apply at least 1 mA when performing the diode bias test 2. Display the break over voltage drop (0-3 V) of a forward biased diode 3. Display infinite (O.L. (Over-load)) when a diode is reverse biased Min-Max Readings 1. Can update at a 1 ms sample rate 2. Saves and displays minimum and maximum values Testing Ground and Low Reference Circuits Testing Ground and Low Reference Circuits Because a test lamp can light with up to 200 ohm in a ground or low reference circuit they are not recommended to be used for this type of test. A low impedance test lamp can light and indicate the circuit is good when there is as much as 20-30 ohm present, while a high impedance test lamp can light with up to 200 ohm present in the circuit. This is why the Digital Multi-Meter (DMM) is used when validating a ground or low reference circuit continuity. When using the DMM there are many vehicle conditions that can affect the ground and low reference continuity testing. If these conditions are not met, a ground or low reference circuit test can fail on a good circuit. This may cause longer diagnosis time and incorrect component replacement. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5705 Any current flow through a ground or low reference circuit, while being tested, will skew the DMM continuity reading, or display a reading higher than when there is no current flowing. Performing a ground or low reference circuit continuity test, in reference to the vehicles battery negative terminal, will have the highest risk of failing a good ground or low reference circuit test than any other ground reference point. The best ground test points would be a control module housing (if the control modules housing is metal and grounded), door jamb striker (if attached to metal), under dash metal frame work, engine block, or body ground studs (other than where the negative battery cable is attached). A typical DMM ground or low reference circuit continuity reading can be as high as 100 ohm with the ignition ON, and drop to 15-25 ohm after the ignition is turned OFF. The reading will drop below 10 ohm after 30-40 seconds, then below 5 ohm after 60 seconds. Once the vehicle completely goes to sleep (generally 3-10 minutes) the reading will drop below 0.3 ohm. The following list of conditions may need to be met to ensure a valid continuity reading on a ground or low reference circuit: * Ignition OFF * Key out of the ignition switch (when not equipped with keyless entry and remote start) * Retained Accessory Power (RAP) OFF (open and close the driver door after ignition OFF) * Battery charger set at a 2 A or less charge rate * Scan tool not communicating with any vehicle control module (in some cases it may need to be disconnected from the DLC) * All entry doors closed * Headlamps OFF (auto headlamps disabled) * Any delay lighting OFF * HVAC after blow OFF * Any accessory that can work when the ignition is OFF * Wait up to 60 seconds (after all other listed conditions are met) Activating the DOOR LOCK function with a key fob can greatly reduce the time to achieve a valid ground or low reference continuity test result. Terminal Wiring Repair Terminal Wiring Repair Special Tools * EL-38125-10 - Splice Sleeve Crimp Tool * EL-38125-580 - Terminal Release Tool Kit * J-38125-5 - Ultra Torch * EL-35616 - Connector Test Adapter Kit For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Note: All repairs near the engine manifold, turbo engine and all exhaust pipes should follow the High Temperature Wiring Repair procedures. 1. Find the appropriate connector end view within the connector end view section. The connector end view has the following information: * Diagnostic probe tool * Terminal release tool * Terminal/terminated lead part numbers 2. Determine if a terminal is damaged. Note: Not using the proper test kit probe may cause damage to the terminal(s) that are probed. * Locate the diagnostic probe tool from the connector end view. The connector end view describes the color and part number to help the technician find and use the correct tool. * Connect the probe tool to the Digital Multimeter. * Insert the probe tool into the cavity and follow the procedures from the Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter). 3. Disconnect the connector body to perform the repair. Note: Several procedures for specific connector bodies are called out in Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Wiring Repairs). Use the following repair procedures to repair the following terminals: Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5706 Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack))Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Push to Seat))Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Pull to Seat))Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W))Delphi Connectors (Micro.64) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Micro .64) )Delphi Connectors (12-Way) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (12-Way))Delphi Connectors (Steering Gear) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Steering Gear)) * The TPA and CPA should be removed before releasing the terminal for the connector body. * Look at the connector end view to locate the cavity of the damaged terminal and find the proper terminal release tool from the terminal release tool kit. Note: Using the incorrect terminal release tool can damage the connector body. * Insert the terminal release tool into the cavity. Note: Some terminals have a lever that must be disengaged before the terminal can be released. Gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Terminated Lead Repair Terminated Lead Repair Special Tools * EL-38125-10 - Splice Sleeve Crimp Tool * EL-38125-580 - Terminal Release Tool Kit * J-38125-5 - Ultra Torch * EL-35616 - Connector Test Adapter Kit For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Note: All repairs near the engine manifold, turbo engine and all exhaust pipes should follow the High Temperature Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/High Temperature Wiring Repairs) procedures. Terminated leads are terminals that are crimped onto wires. The terminated lead can be used throughout the vehicle since it is designed for temperatures up to 150°C. The length of the wire is 450 mm. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5707 The DuraSeal splice sleeve has the following 2 critical features: * A special heat shrink tubing that environmentally seals the splice. The shrink tubing contains a sealing adhesive inside the shrink tubing. * A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp that provides the necessary contact integrity for sensitive low energy circuits. 1. Use the connector end view to identify the correct terminated lead. 2. The terminated lead package should include a DuraSeal splice sleeve. If not, use the chart to identify the correct part. 3. Open the harness by removing any tape: Use a sewing seam ripper, or a comparable tool, to cut open the harness, to avoid wire insulation damage. 4. Depending on how many terminals need repairs, cut the terminal and wire back at least 40 mm. Try to keep the harness wire length the same. If more than one terminated lead is required, stagger the lengths by 40 mm. This helps reduce the bundle size of the wire harness. 5. Use the EL-38125-10 - tool in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the splice sleeve crimp tool. The crimp tool has four nests, one for each color. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5708 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the J-38125-5 - ultra torch , apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-07-30-016A > Nov > 09 > A/T Controls Downshift Hesitation/Delayed Shifting Control Module: Customer Interest A/T Controls - Downshift Hesitation/Delayed Shifting TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 09-07-30-016A Date: November 25, 2009 Subject: Transmission Hesitation, Delayed Shifting, Shifting at Wrong Time (Reprogram TCM) Models: 2010 Buick Enclave 2010 Chevrolet Equinox, Traverse 2010 GMC Acadia, Terrain 2010 Saturn OUTLOOK Equipped with 6T40/45 (RPOs MH7, MHC) or 6T70/75 (RPOs MH2, MH4, MY9, MH6) Automatic Transmission 2010 Buick LaCrosse Equipped with 3.0L (RPO LF1) Engine and 6T70 (RPOs MH2, MH4) Automatic Transmission 2010 Chevrolet Malibu 2010 Pontiac G6 2010 Saturn AURA Equipped with 6T40 (RPO MH8) Automatic Transmission All Vehicles Built Prior to the Following VIN Breakpoints: Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add models. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 09-07-30-016 (07- Transmission/Transaxle). Condition Some customers may comment on transmission downshift hesitation, delayed shifting and shifting at the wrong time. Correction A revised transmission calibration has been developed to address these issues. Reprogram the transmission control module (TCM) with updated calibration files using the TIS2WEB Service Programming System (SPS) application. Select SEQ Programming Sequence ECM/TCM from the Supported Controllers screen. Refer to SI and Service Programming System (SPS) documentation for programming instructions, if required. Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table above. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Control Module: > 10-07-30-002A > Jun > 10 > A/T Controls - Snapshot Data Using (GDS) Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T Controls - Snapshot Data Using (GDS) INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 10-07-30-002A Date: June 11, 2010 Subject: Navigation Procedure for Snapshot Data Using Global Diagnostic System (GDS), Uploading Snapshot Data to Computer and E-mailing Models: 2010-2011 Buick LaCrosse 2011 Buick Regal 2010-2011 Cadillac SRX 2010-2011 Chevrolet Camaro, Equinox 2010-2011 GMC Terrain Attention: For additional information about GDS and/or the snapshot feature, please review course number: 16048.26W Global Diagnostic System, at the GM training website: www.gmtraining.com. In Canada go to: www.gmprocanada.com. You may also utilize the Help Section of GDS by clicking on the Menu button that is on the lower left corner of the GDS screen. Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2011 model year and correct the step number referred to in the Note for Step 18. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 10-07-30-002 (Section 07 - Transmission/Transaxle). The Global Diagnostic System (GDS) and the multiple diagnostic interface (MDI) module will take the place of the Tech 2(R) on certain vehicles when communicating and diagnosing vehicle on-board electrical systems. This diagnostic tool platform and software will be required for use with all 2010 and later GM Global Architecture (Global A) vehicles beginning with the Chevrolet Camaro, followed by the Buick LaCrosse, Chevrolet Equinox, Cadillac SRX, GMC Terrain and Buick Regal. The following procedure is intended to show the user how to navigate to the appropriate data screen, upload a snapshot of the data to a computer and create an e-mail of the snapshot. The procedure is written for an automatic transmission, but is similar for other data screens. Procedure for GDS Navigating and Uploading Transmission Snapshot Data to a PC and Creating an E-mail 1. Turn OFF the ignition. 2. Connect the MDI to the Data Link Connector (DLC) of the vehicle. Note Use the USB port to make the following MDI connection: 3. Connect the MDI to a PC or laptop that has been downloaded with the GDS application from TIS2WEB. Note At least one Diagnostic Package must be installed on the PC to perform diagnostics. If GDS was just installed, select: Add New Diagnostic Package and then select: a Diagnostic Package to download. 4. Click: On the GDS icon on the PC. 5. The Login Page will appear. 6. Select: A User. 7. The ID Screen will appear. 8. Select: The serial number of the MDI being used. 9. Select: Connect. 10. Verify that the system status is ready by observing for a flashing PC light icon on the MDI. 11. Select: Make, Model and Model Year, in order to build the vehicle. 12. At: The Verification step, turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. 13. Click: Upload VIN, to allow the VIN to be reported to the PC. 14. Select: Next Action. 15. The Home Page will appear. 16. Select: Next. 17. The Diagnostic Screen will appear. Note Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Control Module: > 10-07-30-002A > Jun > 10 > A/T Controls - Snapshot Data Using (GDS) > Page 5722 Due to vehicle build, software and RPO variations, GDS may ask for additional information in Step 18. 18. Select: Engine ID, if prompted. 19. Select: Module Diagnostics. 20. Select: TCM. 21. Select: Data Display. 22. Select: The drop down menu to display the available Data Display selections. 23. Select: The appropriate Data Display for the snapshot to be taken. Note The snapshot data can be recorded at idle or on a hoist when using a shop PC. IF the vehicle is driven, the use of a laptop with GDS will be required. PC memory will determine the amount of snapshot recording time. 24. Select: Record Snapshot, when ready. 25. Select: Stop Snapshot, upon completion. 26. Insert: Comment. Use a name, the vehicle model or the concern and date in order to identify the snapshot. 27. Exit: The Data List. 28. Exit: The Diagnostic Screen. 29. The Home Page will appear with the snapshot on the right side. 30. Click: On the Snapshot to Highlight it. 31. Click: Tech Support. Note Enter the necessary e-mail information into ALL of the blank boxes. Failure to do so will result in an error message and the snapshot will not be sent. 32. The Send E-mail dialog box will appear. 1. SENDER: Enter your first name. Use only ONE name as multiple words may cause an error message. 2. RECIPIENT: Enter their e-mail address. Note An error message will occur if this box contains ANY spaces. 3. REPLY TO: Enter your first name here. An e-mail address can be used but it MUST NOT contain any spaces or unrecognized characters. 4. SUBJECT: Enter the appropriate information here, such as the condition, symptom, data parameter being investigated or DTC. 5. TEXT: Type a short message here, such as the test results, snapshot type, or a cell phone number. Note A copy of the snapshot will still reside on the PC. 33. Click: OK, to send the snapshot. Procedure to E-mail GDS Snapshot Data to TAC Important When e-mailing a snapshot to TAC, only send the snapshot data they have REQUESTED. 1. Select: Home Page. The snapshot will appear on the right side. 2. Click: On the Snapshot to Highlight it. 3. Click: Tech Support. 4. The Send E-mail dialog box will appear. Note Enter the necessary e-mail information into ALL of the blank boxes. Failure to do so will result in an error message and the snapshot will not be sent. 5. SENDER: Enter your first name here. Use only ONE name as multiple words may cause an error message. 6. RECIPIENT: Enter the USA or Canada TAC E-mail Address. Note An error message will occur if this box contains ANY spaces. 7. REPLY TO: Enter your first name here. An e-mail address can be used but it MUST NOT contain any spaces or unrecognized characters. 8. SUBJECT: Enter Your TAC Case Number & VIN Number here. Both numbers MUST appear in this box or the e-mail cannot be processed and will be deleted. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Control Module: > 10-07-30-002A > Jun > 10 > A/T Controls - Snapshot Data Using (GDS) > Page 5723 9. TEXT: Type a short message here, such as the test results, snapshot type, or a cell phone number. Note A copy of the snapshot will still reside on the PC. 10. Click: OK, to send the snapshot. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Control Module: > 09-07-30-016A > Nov > 09 > A/T Controls - Downshift Hesitation/Delayed Shifting Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T Controls - Downshift Hesitation/Delayed Shifting TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 09-07-30-016A Date: November 25, 2009 Subject: Transmission Hesitation, Delayed Shifting, Shifting at Wrong Time (Reprogram TCM) Models: 2010 Buick Enclave 2010 Chevrolet Equinox, Traverse 2010 GMC Acadia, Terrain 2010 Saturn OUTLOOK Equipped with 6T40/45 (RPOs MH7, MHC) or 6T70/75 (RPOs MH2, MH4, MY9, MH6) Automatic Transmission 2010 Buick LaCrosse Equipped with 3.0L (RPO LF1) Engine and 6T70 (RPOs MH2, MH4) Automatic Transmission 2010 Chevrolet Malibu 2010 Pontiac G6 2010 Saturn AURA Equipped with 6T40 (RPO MH8) Automatic Transmission All Vehicles Built Prior to the Following VIN Breakpoints: Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add models. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 09-07-30-016 (07- Transmission/Transaxle). Condition Some customers may comment on transmission downshift hesitation, delayed shifting and shifting at the wrong time. Correction A revised transmission calibration has been developed to address these issues. Reprogram the transmission control module (TCM) with updated calibration files using the TIS2WEB Service Programming System (SPS) application. Select SEQ Programming Sequence ECM/TCM from the Supported Controllers screen. Refer to SI and Service Programming System (SPS) documentation for programming instructions, if required. Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table above. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Control Module: > 10-07-30-002A > Jun > 10 > A/T Controls - Snapshot Data Using (GDS) Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T Controls - Snapshot Data Using (GDS) INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 10-07-30-002A Date: June 11, 2010 Subject: Navigation Procedure for Snapshot Data Using Global Diagnostic System (GDS), Uploading Snapshot Data to Computer and E-mailing Models: 2010-2011 Buick LaCrosse 2011 Buick Regal 2010-2011 Cadillac SRX 2010-2011 Chevrolet Camaro, Equinox 2010-2011 GMC Terrain Attention: For additional information about GDS and/or the snapshot feature, please review course number: 16048.26W Global Diagnostic System, at the GM training website: www.gmtraining.com. In Canada go to: www.gmprocanada.com. You may also utilize the Help Section of GDS by clicking on the Menu button that is on the lower left corner of the GDS screen. Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2011 model year and correct the step number referred to in the Note for Step 18. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 10-07-30-002 (Section 07 - Transmission/Transaxle). The Global Diagnostic System (GDS) and the multiple diagnostic interface (MDI) module will take the place of the Tech 2(R) on certain vehicles when communicating and diagnosing vehicle on-board electrical systems. This diagnostic tool platform and software will be required for use with all 2010 and later GM Global Architecture (Global A) vehicles beginning with the Chevrolet Camaro, followed by the Buick LaCrosse, Chevrolet Equinox, Cadillac SRX, GMC Terrain and Buick Regal. The following procedure is intended to show the user how to navigate to the appropriate data screen, upload a snapshot of the data to a computer and create an e-mail of the snapshot. The procedure is written for an automatic transmission, but is similar for other data screens. Procedure for GDS Navigating and Uploading Transmission Snapshot Data to a PC and Creating an E-mail 1. Turn OFF the ignition. 2. Connect the MDI to the Data Link Connector (DLC) of the vehicle. Note Use the USB port to make the following MDI connection: 3. Connect the MDI to a PC or laptop that has been downloaded with the GDS application from TIS2WEB. Note At least one Diagnostic Package must be installed on the PC to perform diagnostics. If GDS was just installed, select: Add New Diagnostic Package and then select: a Diagnostic Package to download. 4. Click: On the GDS icon on the PC. 5. The Login Page will appear. 6. Select: A User. 7. The ID Screen will appear. 8. Select: The serial number of the MDI being used. 9. Select: Connect. 10. Verify that the system status is ready by observing for a flashing PC light icon on the MDI. 11. Select: Make, Model and Model Year, in order to build the vehicle. 12. At: The Verification step, turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. 13. Click: Upload VIN, to allow the VIN to be reported to the PC. 14. Select: Next Action. 15. The Home Page will appear. 16. Select: Next. 17. The Diagnostic Screen will appear. Note Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Control Module: > 10-07-30-002A > Jun > 10 > A/T Controls - Snapshot Data Using (GDS) > Page 5733 Due to vehicle build, software and RPO variations, GDS may ask for additional information in Step 18. 18. Select: Engine ID, if prompted. 19. Select: Module Diagnostics. 20. Select: TCM. 21. Select: Data Display. 22. Select: The drop down menu to display the available Data Display selections. 23. Select: The appropriate Data Display for the snapshot to be taken. Note The snapshot data can be recorded at idle or on a hoist when using a shop PC. IF the vehicle is driven, the use of a laptop with GDS will be required. PC memory will determine the amount of snapshot recording time. 24. Select: Record Snapshot, when ready. 25. Select: Stop Snapshot, upon completion. 26. Insert: Comment. Use a name, the vehicle model or the concern and date in order to identify the snapshot. 27. Exit: The Data List. 28. Exit: The Diagnostic Screen. 29. The Home Page will appear with the snapshot on the right side. 30. Click: On the Snapshot to Highlight it. 31. Click: Tech Support. Note Enter the necessary e-mail information into ALL of the blank boxes. Failure to do so will result in an error message and the snapshot will not be sent. 32. The Send E-mail dialog box will appear. 1. SENDER: Enter your first name. Use only ONE name as multiple words may cause an error message. 2. RECIPIENT: Enter their e-mail address. Note An error message will occur if this box contains ANY spaces. 3. REPLY TO: Enter your first name here. An e-mail address can be used but it MUST NOT contain any spaces or unrecognized characters. 4. SUBJECT: Enter the appropriate information here, such as the condition, symptom, data parameter being investigated or DTC. 5. TEXT: Type a short message here, such as the test results, snapshot type, or a cell phone number. Note A copy of the snapshot will still reside on the PC. 33. Click: OK, to send the snapshot. Procedure to E-mail GDS Snapshot Data to TAC Important When e-mailing a snapshot to TAC, only send the snapshot data they have REQUESTED. 1. Select: Home Page. The snapshot will appear on the right side. 2. Click: On the Snapshot to Highlight it. 3. Click: Tech Support. 4. The Send E-mail dialog box will appear. Note Enter the necessary e-mail information into ALL of the blank boxes. Failure to do so will result in an error message and the snapshot will not be sent. 5. SENDER: Enter your first name here. Use only ONE name as multiple words may cause an error message. 6. RECIPIENT: Enter the USA or Canada TAC E-mail Address. Note An error message will occur if this box contains ANY spaces. 7. REPLY TO: Enter your first name here. An e-mail address can be used but it MUST NOT contain any spaces or unrecognized characters. 8. SUBJECT: Enter Your TAC Case Number & VIN Number here. Both numbers MUST appear in this box or the e-mail cannot be processed and will be deleted. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Control Module: > 10-07-30-002A > Jun > 10 > A/T Controls - Snapshot Data Using (GDS) > Page 5734 9. TEXT: Type a short message here, such as the test results, snapshot type, or a cell phone number. Note A copy of the snapshot will still reside on the PC. 10. Click: OK, to send the snapshot. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission Control Module: Service and Repair 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission Control Solenoid Valve and Transmission Control Module Assembly Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the transmission control valve body cover. Refer to Control Valve Body Cover Replacement (See: Valve Body/Service and Repair/6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission/Control Valve Body Cover Replacement). 2. Disconnect the input speed sensor electrical connector (1). 3. Disconnect the output speed sensor electrical connector (2). 4. Disconnect the shift position switch electrical connector (3). 5. Remove the 3 control valve body bolts (1) M5 x 40.5. 6. Remove the 12 control valve body bolts (2) M6 x 97. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 5737 7. Remove the control solenoid valve assembly (3) with transmission control module. Caution: Use care when removing or installing the filter plate assembly. A broken or missing retaining tab may not adequately secure the filter plate to the control solenoid valve assembly, resulting in possible damage or contamination. 8. Remove the control solenoid valve assembly filter plate (4). Discard the filter plate. It is not reusable. 9. Inspect the channel plate bolt pass through holes for damage or brinelling. Any damage will cause incorrect pressure switch operation. Replace as necessary. Installation Procedure Caution: Use care when removing or installing the filter plate assembly. A broken or missing retaining tab may not adequately secure the filter plate to the control solenoid valve assembly, resulting in possible damage or contamination. 1. Install a NEW control solenoid valve assembly filter plate (4) to prevent fluid leaks past the fluid seals. 2. Install the control solenoid valve assembly (3) with transmission control module. 3. Hand start the control valve body bolts (1, 2). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 5738 Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener Caution). 4. Secure the 12 control valve body bolts (2) M6 x 97 and tighten in sequence to 10 Nm (89 lb in). 5. Secure the 3 control valve body bolts (1) M5 x 40.5 and tighten in sequence to 8 Nm (71 lb in). 6. Connect the input speed sensor electrical connector (1). 7. Connect the output speed sensor electrical connector (2). 8. Connect the shift position switch electrical connector (3). 9. Install the transmission control valve body cover. Refer to Control Valve Body Cover Replacement (See: Valve Body/Service and Repair/6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission/Control Valve Body Cover Replacement). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 5739 Control Module: Service and Repair 6T70/6T75 - Automatic Transmission Control Solenoid Valve and Transmission Control Module Assembly Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the control valve body cover. Refer to Control Valve Body Cover Replacement (See: Valve Body/Service and Repair/6T70/6T75 Automatic Transmission/Control Valve Body Cover Replacement). 2. Disconnect the input speed sensor electrical connector (1). 3. Disconnect the output speed sensor electrical connector (2). 4. Disconnect the shift position switch electrical connector (3). 5. Remove the 4 control valve body bolts (1) M6 x 80. 6. Position the control solenoid valve spring (8) to the side. Spring will be released with the removal of the control valve body assembly. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 5740 7. Remove the 2 control valve body bolts (4) M6 x 65. 8. Remove the control valve body bolt (3) M6 x 42. 9. Remove the 3 control valve body bolts (2) M6 x 95. 10. Remove the control valve body bolt (7) M6 x 55. 11. Remove the control solenoid valve body and transmission control module (TCM) assembly (5). Caution: Use care when removing or installing the filter plate assembly. A broken or missing retaining tab may not adequately secure the filter plate to the control solenoid valve assembly, resulting in possible damage or contamination. 12. Remove the control solenoid valve assembly filter plate (6). * Discard the filler plate. It is not reusable. * Inspect the pressure switch manifold seals for damage or contamination. Replace the control solenoid valve assembly as necessary. * Inspect the upper channel plate bolt holes for damage, peening or burnelling. Any damage around the bolt holes near the pressure control switch (PCS) feed holes could cause leakage around the PCS seals. Replace the upper channel plate as necessary. Installation Procedure Caution: Use care when removing or installing the filter plate assembly. A broken or missing retaining tab may not adequately secure the filter plate to the control solenoid valve assembly, resulting in possible damage or contamination. 1. Install a NEW control solenoid valve assembly filter plate (1). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 5741 2. Install the control solenoid valve body and TCM assembly (5). 3. Rotate the control solenoid valve spring (7) into position. Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener Caution). Note: Install all bolts before tightening, then tighten in specified sequence. 4. Install the 4 control valve body bolts (1) M6 x 80. 5. Install the control valve body bolt (6) M6 x 55. 6. Install the 3 control valve body bolts (2) M6 x 95. 7. Install the control valve body bolt (3) M6 x 42. 8. Install the 2 control valve body bolts (4) M6 x 65 and tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb in). 9. Connect the input speed sensor electrical connector (1). 10. Connect the output speed sensor electrical connector (2). 11. Connect the shift position switch electrical connector (3). 12. Install the control valve body cover. Refer to Control Valve Body Cover Replacement (See: Valve Body/Service and Repair/6T70/6T75 - Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 5742 Automatic Transmission/Control Valve Body Cover Replacement). 13. For transmission control module programming and setup. Refer to Control Module References (See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning). Note: After an internal transmission repair or internal part replacement the service fast learn adapt procedure should be performed. 14. Perform the transmission adaptive values learn procedure. Refer to Transmission Adaptive Values Learn (See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T - Water Or Coolant Contamination Information Fluid - A/T: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Water Or Coolant Contamination Information INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 08-07-30-035B Date: November 01, 2010 Subject: Information on Water or Ethylene Glycol in Transmission Fluid Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks with Automatic Transmission Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 08-07-30-035A (Section 07 - Transmission/Transaxle). Water or ethylene glycol in automatic transmission fluid (ATF) is harmful to internal transmission components and will have a negative effect on reliability and durability of these parts. Water or ethylene glycol in ATF will also change the friction of the clutches, frequently resulting in shudder during engagement or gear changes, especially during torque converter clutch engagement. Indications of water in the ATF may include: - ATF blowing out of the transmission vent tube. - ATF may appear cloudy or, in cases of extreme contamination, have the appearance of a strawberry milkshake. - Visible water in the oil pan. - A milky white substance inside the pan area. - Spacer plate gaskets that appear to be glued to the valve body face or case. - Spacer plate gaskets that appear to be swollen or wrinkled in areas where they are not compressed. - Rust on internal transmission iron/steel components. If water in the ATF has been found and the source of the water entry has not been identified, or if a leaking in-radiator transmission oil cooler is suspected (with no evidence of cross-contamination in the coolant recovery reservoir), a simple and quick test kit is available that detects the presence of ethylene glycol in ATF. The "Gly-Tek" test kit, available from the Nelco Company, should be obtained and the ATF tested to make an accurate decision on the need for radiator replacement. This can help to prevent customer comebacks if the in-radiator transmission oil cooler is leaking and reduce repair expenses by avoiding radiator replacement if the cooler is not leaking. These test kits can be obtained from: Nelco Company Test kits can be ordered by phone or through the website listed above. Orders are shipped standard delivery time but can be shipped on a next day delivery basis for an extra charge. One test kit will complete 10 individual fluid sample tests. For vehicles repaired under warranty, the cost of the complete test kit plus shipping charges should be divided by 10 and submitted on the warranty claim as a net item. The transmission should be repaired or replaced based on the normal cost comparison procedure. Important If water or coolant is found in the transmission, the following components MUST be replaced. - Replace all of the rubber-type seals. - Replace all of the composition-faced clutch plates and/or bands. - Replace all of the nylon parts. - Replace the torque converter. - Thoroughly clean and rebuild the transmission, using new gaskets and oil filter. Important The following steps must be completed when repairing or replacing. Flush and flow check the transmission oil cooler using J 45096. Refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 02-07-30-052F- Automatic Transmission Oil Cooler Flush and Flow Test Essential Tool J 45096 TransFlow. - Thoroughly inspect the engine cooling system and hoses and clean/repair as necessary. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T - Water Or Coolant Contamination Information > Page 5747 Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications Fluid - A/T: Capacity Specifications 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission 6T40 / 6T45 6-SPEED AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Fluid Change - Drain Plug .................................................................................................................................................... 4.0 6.0 liters (4.2 - 6.3 quarts) Valve Body Cover Removal ................................................................................................................................................. 5.0 7.0 liters (5.3 - 7.4 quarts) Overhaul .................................................................................................... ........................................................................... 8.0 - 8.5 liters (8.5 - 9.0 quarts) 6T70 / 6T75 6-SPEED AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Fluid Change - Drain Plug .................................................................................................................................................... 4.0 6.0 liters (4.2 - 6.3 quarts) Valve Body Cover Removal ................................................................................................................................................. 5.0 7.0 liters (5.3 - 7.4 quarts) Overhaul .................................................................................................... ........................................................................... 7.0 - 9.0 liters (7.4 - 9.5 quarts) NOTE: All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the approximate level. Recheck fluid level after filling. 6T70/6T75 - Automatic Transmission 6T40 / 6T45 6-SPEED AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Fluid Change - Drain Plug .................................................................................................................................................... 4.0 6.0 liters (4.2 - 6.3 quarts) Valve Body Cover Removal ................................................................................................................................................. 5.0 7.0 liters (5.3 - 7.4 quarts) Overhaul .................................................................................................... ........................................................................... 8.0 - 8.5 liters (8.5 - 9.0 quarts) 6T70 / 6T75 6-SPEED AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Fluid Change - Drain Plug .................................................................................................................................................... 4.0 6.0 liters (4.2 - 6.3 quarts) Valve Body Cover Removal ................................................................................................................................................. 5.0 7.0 liters (5.3 - 7.4 quarts) Overhaul .................................................................................................... ........................................................................... 7.0 - 9.0 liters (7.4 - 9.5 quarts) NOTE: All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the approximate level. Recheck fluid level after filling. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 5750 Fluid - A/T: Fluid Type Specifications Automatic Transmission DEXRON-VI Automatic Transmission Fluid. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission Fluid - A/T: Testing and Inspection 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission Transmission Fluid Level and Condition Check This procedure checks both the transmission fluid level, as well as the condition of the fluid itself. Caution: Use Dexron VI transmission fluid only. Failure to use the proper fluid may result in transmission internal damage. Note: Ensure the transmission has enough fluid in it to safely start the vehicle without damaging the transmission. With the vehicle off and the transmission fluid temperature at approximately 20-25°C (68-77°F) there must be at least enough fluid to drain out of the fluid level hole. This will ensure that there is enough fluid in the sump to fill the components once the vehicle is started. Non Dipstick Level Checking Procedure 1. Start the engine. 2. Depress the brake pedal and move the shift lever through each gear range, pausing for about 3 seconds in each range. Then move the shift lever back to PARK (P). 3. Allow the engine to idle 500-800 rpm for at least 3 minutes to allow any fluid foaming to dissipate and the fluid level to stabilize. Release the brake pedal. Note: If the TFT reading is not at the required temperature, allow the vehicle to cool, or operate the vehicle until the appropriate TFT is reached. If the fluid temperature is below the specified range, perform the following procedure to raise the fluid temperature to the specification. Drive the vehicle in second gear until the fluid temperature is at the specified temperature. 4. Keep the engine running and observe the transmission fluid temperature (TFT) using the Driver Information Center or a scan tool. Caution: The transmission fluid level must be checked when the transmission fluid temperature (TFT) is at 85-95°C (185-203°F). If the TFT is not at this temperature, operate the vehicle or allow the fluid to cool as required. Setting the fluid level with a TFT outside this temperature will result in either an under or over-filled transmission. TFT 95°C under-filled, TFT 85°C over-filled. An under-filled transmission will cause premature component wear or damage. An over-filled transmission will cause fluid to discharge out the vent tube, fluid foaming, or pump cavitation. 5. Raise the vehicle on a hoist. The vehicle must be level, with the engine running and the shift lever in the PARK range. 6. While the vehicle is idling, remove the oil level set plug. Allow any fluid to drain. Oil Level Plug (1) * If the fluid is flowing as a steady stream, wait until the fluid begins to drip. * If no fluid comes out, add fluid until fluid drips out. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 5753 7. Inspect the fluid color. The fluid should be red or dark brown. * If the fluid color is very dark or black and has a burnt odor, inspect the fluid for excessive metal particles or other debris. A small amount of "friction" material is a "normal" condition. If large pieces and/or metal particles are noted in the fluid, flush the oil cooler and cooler lines and overhaul the transmission. If there are no signs of transmission internal damage noted, replace the fluid, repair the oil cooler, and flush the cooler lines. * Fluid that is cloudy or milky or appears to be contaminated with water indicates engine coolant or water contamination. Refer to Engine Coolant/Water in Transmission (See: Testing and Inspection/Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures/6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission/Engine Coolant/Water in Transmission). 8. Inspect for external leaks. Refer to Fluid Leak Diagnosis (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission/Fluid Leak Diagnosis). 9. If the fluid was changed, reset the transmission oil life monitor if applicable. Dipstick Level Checking Procedure (If equipped) 1. Park the vehicle on a level surface, apply the parking brake and place the shift lever in PARK (P). Start the engine. 2. Depress the brake pedal and move the shift lever through each gear range, pausing for about 3 seconds in each range. Then move the shift lever back to PARK (P). 3. Allow the engine to idle 500-800 rpm for at least 3 minutes to allow any fluid foaming to dissipate and the fluid level to stabilize. Release the brake pedal. 4. Keep the engine running and observe the transmission fluid temperature (TFT) using the Driver Information Center or a scan tool. Caution: The transmission fluid level must be checked when the transmission fluid temperature (TFT) is at 85-95°C (185-203°F). If the TFT is not at this temperature, operate the vehicle or allow the fluid to cool as required. Setting the fluid level with a TFT outside this temperature will result in either an under or over-filled transmission. TFT 95°C under-filled, TFT 85°C over-filled. An under-filled transmission will cause premature component wear or damage. An over-filled transmission will cause fluid to discharge out the vent tube, fluid foaming, or pump cavitation. Note: * If the TFT reading is not at the required temperature, allow the vehicle to cool, or operate the vehicle until the appropriate TFT is reached. If the fluid temperature is below the specified range, perform the following procedure to raise the fluid temperature to the specification. * Check the transmission fluid level when the TFT is at between 85-95°C (185-203°F). The fluid level rises as fluid temperature increases, so it is important to ensure the transmission fluid temperature is at the specified temperature. Drive the vehicle in second gear until the fluid temperature is at the specified temperature. 5. The vehicle must be level, with the engine running and the shift lever in the PARK range. 6. Remove the dipstick and wipe it with a clean rag or paper towel. 7. Inspect the fluid color. The fluid should be red or dark brown. * If the fluid color is very dark or black and has a burnt odor, inspect the fluid for excessive metal particles or other debris. A small amount of "friction" material is a "normal" condition. If large pieces and/or metal particles are noted in the fluid, flush the oil cooler and cooler lines and overhaul the transmission. If there are no signs of transmission internal damage noted, replace the fluid, repair the oil cooler, and flush the cooler lines. * Fluid that is cloudy or milky or appears to be contaminated with water indicates engine coolant or water contamination. Refer to Engine Coolant/Water in Transmission (See: Testing and Inspection/Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures/6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission/Engine Coolant/Water in Transmission). 8. Install the dipstick. Wait three seconds and then remove it again. Note: Always check the fluid level at least twice. Consistent readings are important to maintaining proper fluid level. If inconsistent readings are noted, inspect the transmission vent cap to ensure it is clean and unclogged. Note: It is not necessary to get the fluid level all the way up to the MAX mark. Anywhere within the crosshatch band is acceptable. 9. Check both sides of the dipstick and read the lower level. 10. Install and remove the dipstick again to verify the reading. Note: Do not add more than one half pint (0.25L) at a time without rechecking the level. Once the oil is on the dipstick bullet, it will not take much more fluid to raise the fluid level into the crosshatch band. Do not overfill. Also, if the fluid level is low, inspect the transmission for leaks. Refer to Fluid Leak Diagnosis (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission/Fluid Leak Diagnosis). 11. If the fluid level is not within the crosshatch band, and the transmission temperature is at 90°C (194°F), add or drain fluid as necessary to bring the level into the crosshatch band. If the fluid level is low, add only enough fluid to bring the level into the crosshatch band. 12. If the fluid level is in the acceptable range, install the dipstick. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 5754 13. If the fluid was changed, reset the transmission oil life monitor if applicable. Fluid Condition Inspection * Inspect the fluid color. The fluid should be red in color. The fluid may also turn brown form normal use, and does not always indicate contamination. Note: Fluid that is very dark or black and has a burnt odor usually indicates contamination or overheating. * If the fluid color is very dark or black and has a burnt odor, inspect the fluid for excessive metal particles or other debris which may indicate transmission damage. Refer to Road Test (See: Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission) to verify transmission operation. Change the transmission fluid if no other conditions are found. * Fluid that is cloudy or milky or appears to be contaminated with water indicates engine coolant or water contamination. Refer to Engine Coolant/Water in Transmission (See: Testing and Inspection/Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures/6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission/Engine Coolant/Water in Transmission). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 5755 Fluid - A/T: Testing and Inspection 6T70/6T75 - Automatic Transmission Transmission Fluid Level and Condition Check This procedure checks both the transmission fluid level, as well as the condition of the fluid itself. Caution: Use Dexron VI transmission fluid only. Failure to use the proper fluid may result in transmission internal damage. Note: Ensure the transmission has enough fluid in it to safely start the vehicle without damaging the transmission. With the vehicle off there must be at least enough fluid to wet the end of the dipstick bullet. This will ensure that there is enough fluid in the sump to fill the components once the vehicle is started. Level Checking Procedure 1. Park the vehicle on a level surface, apply the parking brake and place the shift lever in PARK (P). 2. Start the engine. 3. Depress the brake pedal and move the shift lever through each gear range, pausing for about 3 seconds in each range. Then move the shift lever back to PARK (P). 4. Allow the engine to idle 500-800 rpm for at least 1 minute. Release the brake pedal. 5. Keep the engine running and observe the transmission fluid temperature (TFT) using the Driver Information Center or a scan tool. Note: If the fluid temperature is below the specified range, perform the following procedure to raise the fluid temperature to the specified range. 6. If the TFT reading is not within the required temperature ranges, allow the vehicle to cool, or operate the vehicle until the appropriate TFT is reached. Drive the vehicle in second gear until the fluid temperature is within the specified range. Note: Check the transmission fluid level when the TFT is between 180°F and 200°F (82°C and 93°C). The fluid level rises as fluid temperature increases, so it is important to ensure the transmission fluid temperature is within range. 7. Remove the dipstick and wipe it with a clean rag or paper towel. 8. Inspect the fluid color. The fluid should be red or dark brown. * If the fluid color is very dark or black and has a burnt odor, inspect the fluid for excessive metal particles or other debris. A small amount of "friction" material is a "normal" condition. If large pieces and/or metal particles are noted in the fluid, flush the oil cooler and cooler lines and overhaul the transmission. If there are no signs of transmission internal damage noted, replace the fluid, repair the oil cooler, and flush the cooler lines. * Fluid that is cloudy or milky or appears to be contaminated with water indicates engine coolant or water contamination. Refer to Engine Coolant/Water in Transmission (See: Testing and Inspection/Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures/6T70/6T75 - Automatic Transmission/Engine Coolant/Water in Transmission). 9. Install the dipstick and tighten. Wait three seconds and then remove it again. Note: Always check the fluid level at least twice. Consistent readings are important to maintaining proper fluid level. If inconsistent readings are noted, inspect the transmission vent assembly to ensure it is clean and unclogged. 10. Check both sides of the dipstick and read the lower level. Note: It is not necessary to get the fluid level all the way up to the MAX mark. Anywhere within the crosshatch band is acceptable. 11. Install and remove the dipstick again to verify the reading. 12. If the fluid level is not within the crosshatch band, and the transmission temperature is between 180°F and 200°F (82°C and 93°C), add or drain fluid as necessary to bring the level into the crosshatch band. If the fluid level is low, add only enough fluid to bring the level into the crosshatch band. Note: Do not add more than one pint (0.5L) at a time without rechecking the level. Once the oil is on the dipstick bullet, it will not take much more fluid to raise the fluid level into the crosshatch band. Do not overfill. Also, if the fluid level is low, inspect the transmission for leaks. Refer to Fluid Leak Diagnosis (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/6T70/6T75 - Automatic Transmission/Fluid Leak Diagnosis). 13. If the fluid level is in the acceptable range, install the dipstick. 14. If the fluid was changed, reset the transmission oil life monitor if applicable. Fluid Condition Inspection * Inspect the fluid color. The fluid should be red in color. The fluid may also turn brown form normal use, and does not always indicate contamination. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 5756 Note: Fluid that is very dark or black and has a burnt odor usually indicates contamination or overheating. * If the fluid color is very dark or black and has a burnt odor, inspect the fluid for excessive metal particles or other debris which may indicate transmission damage. Refer to Road Test (See: Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/6T70/6T75 - Automatic Transmission) to verify transmission operation. Change the transmission fluid if no other conditions are found. * Fluid that is cloudy or milky or appears to be contaminated with water indicates engine coolant or water contamination. Refer to Engine Coolant/Water in Transmission (See: Testing and Inspection/Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures/6T70/6T75 - Automatic Transmission/Engine Coolant/Water in Transmission). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission Fluid - A/T: Service and Repair 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission Transmission Fluid Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle (See: Maintenance/Vehicle Lifting/Service and Repair). 2. Remove the fluid drain plug (1). 3. Drain transmission fluid into a suitable container. Caution: Refer to Component Fastener Tightening Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Component Fastener Tightening Caution). 4. Install the fluid drain plug (1) and tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb in). Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 5759 1. Lower the vehicle. 2. Remove the fluid fill cap (1). 3. Fill the transmission to the proper level with the correct fluid. Refer to Transmission Fluid Level and Condition Check (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission/Transmission Fluid Level and Condition Check ) and Fluid Capacity Specifications (6T40/45/50) (See: Specifications/Capacity Specifications/6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission). 4. Install the fluid fill cap (1). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 5760 Fluid - A/T: Service and Repair 6T70/6T75 - Automatic Transmission Transmission Fluid Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Line/Hose, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission Fluid Line/Hose: Service and Repair 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission Transmission Fluid Cooler Pipe Connector Replacement - Radiator Transmission Fluid Cooler Pipe Connector Replacement - Radiator Removal Procedure 1. Drain the cooling system. Refer to Cooling System Draining and Filling (Static) (See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Cooling System/Service and Repair/Cooling System Draining and Filling (Static))Cooling System Draining and Filling (GE 47716) (See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Cooling System/Service and Repair/Cooling System Draining and Filling (GE 47716)). 2. Remove the transaxle oil cooler hoses from the oil cooler fittings on the radiator. Refer to Transmission Fluid Cooler Hose/Pipe Quick-Connect Fitting Disconnection and Connection (See: ). Note: Do not remove the upper and lower transaxle oil cooler fittings from the radiator at the same time other wise the transaxle oil cooler will fall inside the radiator end tank. 3. Remove the oil cooler fitting from the radiator. Installation Procedure 1. Inspect the new O-ring seals for cracks, cuts or damage. Replace if necessary. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Line/Hose, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 5765 Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener Caution). Note: The correct thread engagement is critical. Cross-threaded fittings can achieve proper tightness and still leak. 2. Install the oil cooler fitting to the radiator and tighten to 38 Nm (28 lb ft). 3. Install the transaxle oil cooler hoses to the oil cooler fittings on the radiator. Refer to Transmission Fluid Cooler Hose/Pipe Quick-Connect Fitting Disconnection and Connection (See: ). 4. Fill the cooling system. Refer to Cooling System Draining and Filling (Static) (See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Cooling System/Service and Repair/Cooling System Draining and Filling (Static))Cooling System Draining and Filling (GE 47716) (See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Cooling System/Service and Repair/Cooling System Draining and Filling (GE 47716)). 5. Adjust the transmission fluid level. 6. Inspect for fluid leaks. Transmission Fluid Cooler Hose/Pipe Quick-Connect Fitting Disconnection and Connection Transmission Fluid Cooler Hose/Pipe Quick-Connect Fitting Disconnection and Connection Removal Procedure Important: Perform the following procedure when removing the retaining rings and cooler lines from the quick connect fittings located on the radiator and/or the transmission. 1. Pull the plastic cap back from the quick connect fitting and down along the cooler line about 5 cm (2 in). 2. Using a bent-tip screwdriver, pull on one of the open ends of the retaining ring in order to rotate the retaining ring around the quick connect fitting until the retaining ring is out of position and can be completely removed. 3. Remove the retaining ring from the quick connect fitting. 4. Discard the retaining ring. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Line/Hose, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 5766 5. Pull the cooler line straight out from the quick connect fitting. Installation Procedure Important: * Do not reuse any of the existing oil lines or oil line fittings if there is excessive corrosion. * Do not reuse any of the existing retaining rings that were removed from the existing quick connect fittings. Install new retaining rings. * Ensure the following procedures are performed when installing the new retaining rings onto the fittings. 1. Install a new retaining ring into the quick connect fitting using the following procedure: 2. Hook one of the open ends of the retaining ring in one of the slots in the quick connect fitting. 3. Rotate the retaining ring around the fitting until the retaining ring is positioned with all three ears through the three slots on the fitting. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Line/Hose, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 5767 4. Do not install the new retaining ring onto the fitting by pushing the retaining ring. 5. Ensure that the three retaining ring ears are seen from inside the fitting and that the retaining ring moves freely in the fitting slots. 6. Install the cooler line into the quick connect fitting. 7. Insert the cooler line end into the quick connect fitting until a click is either heard or felt. 8. Do not use the plastic cap on the cooler line in order to install the cooler line into the fitting. 9. Pull back sharply on the cooler line in order to ensure that the cooler line is fastened into the quick connect fitting. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Line/Hose, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 5768 Important: Do not manually depress the retaining clip when installing the plastic cap. 10. Position (snap) the plastic cap onto the fitting. Do not manually depress the retaining ring when installing the plastic cap onto the quick connect fitting. 11. Ensure that the plastic cap is fully seated against the fitting. 12. Ensure that no gap is present between the cap and the fitting. 13. Ensure that the yellow identification band on the tube is hidden within the quick connect fitting. 14. A hidden yellow identification band indicates proper joint seating. 15. Fill the transmission to the proper level with DEXRON(R) VI transmission fluid. Refer to Transmission Fluid Level and Condition Check (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/6T70/6T75 - Automatic Transmission/Transmission Fluid Level and Condition Check). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Line/Hose, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 5769 Transmission Fluid Cooler Outlet Pipe Replacement Transmission Fluid Cooler Outlet Pipe Replacement Transmission Fluid Cooler Inlet Pipe Replacement Transmission Fluid Cooler Inlet Pipe Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Line/Hose, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 5770 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Line/Hose, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 5771 Fluid Line/Hose: Service and Repair 6T70/6T75 - Automatic Transmission Transmission Fluid Cooler Pipe Connector Replacement - Radiator Transmission Fluid Cooler Pipe Connector Replacement - Radiator Removal Procedure 1. Drain the cooling system. Refer to Cooling System Draining and Filling (Static) (See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Cooling System/Service and Repair/Cooling System Draining and Filling (Static))Cooling System Draining and Filling (GE 47716) (See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Cooling System/Service and Repair/Cooling System Draining and Filling (GE 47716)). 2. Remove the transaxle oil cooler hoses from the oil cooler fittings on the radiator. Refer to Transmission Fluid Cooler Hose/Pipe Quick-Connect Fitting Disconnection and Connection (See: ). Note: Do not remove the upper and lower transaxle oil cooler fittings from the radiator at the same time other wise the transaxle oil cooler will fall inside the radiator end tank. 3. Remove the oil cooler fitting from the radiator. Installation Procedure 1. Inspect the new O-ring seals for cracks, cuts or damage. Replace if necessary. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Line/Hose, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 5772 Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener Caution). Note: The correct thread engagement is critical. Cross-threaded fittings can achieve proper tightness and still leak. 2. Install the oil cooler fitting to the radiator and tighten to 38 Nm (28 lb ft). 3. Install the transaxle oil cooler hoses to the oil cooler fittings on the radiator. Refer to Transmission Fluid Cooler Hose/Pipe Quick-Connect Fitting Disconnection and Connection (See: ). 4. Fill the cooling system. Refer to Cooling System Draining and Filling (Static) (See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Cooling System/Service and Repair/Cooling System Draining and Filling (Static))Cooling System Draining and Filling (GE 47716) (See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Cooling System/Service and Repair/Cooling System Draining and Filling (GE 47716)). 5. Adjust the transmission fluid level. 6. Inspect for fluid leaks. Transmission Fluid Cooler Hose/Pipe Quick-Connect Fitting Disconnection and CONNECTION1 Transmission Fluid Cooler Hose/Pipe Quick-Connect Fitting Disconnection and Connection Special Tools J 41623-B - Cooler Quick Connect Tool Removal Procedure Important: Perform the following procedure when removing the retaining rings and cooler lines from the quick connect fittings located on the radiator and/or the transmission. 1. Pull the plastic cap back from the quick connect fitting and down along the cooler line about 5 cm (2 in). 2. Using J 41623-B - Cooler Quick Connect Tool to remove the retaining ring. 3. Remove the retaining ring from the quick connect fitting. 4. Discard the retaining ring. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Line/Hose, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 5773 5. Pull the cooler line straight out from the quick connect fitting. Installation Procedure Important: * Do not reuse any of the existing oil lines or oil line fittings if there is excessive corrosion. * Do not reuse any of the existing retaining rings that were removed from the existing quick connect fittings. Install new retaining rings. * Ensure the following procedures are performed when installing the new retaining rings onto the fittings. 1. Install a new retaining ring into the quick connect fitting using the following procedure: 2. Hook one of the open ends of the retaining ring in one of the slots in the quick connect fitting. 3. Rotate the retaining ring around the fitting until the retaining ring is positioned with all three ears through the three slots on the fitting. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Line/Hose, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 5774 4. Do not install the new retaining ring onto the fitting by pushing the retaining ring. 5. Ensure that the three retaining ring ears are seen from inside the fitting and that the retaining ring moves freely in the fitting slots. 6. Install the cooler line into the quick connect fitting. 7. Insert the cooler line end into the quick connect fitting until a click is either heard or felt. 8. Do not use the plastic cap on the cooler line in order to install the cooler line into the fitting. 9. Pull back sharply on the cooler line in order to ensure that the cooler line is fastened into the quick connect fitting. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Line/Hose, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 5775 Important: Do not manually depress the retaining clip when installing the plastic cap. 10. Position (snap) the plastic cap onto the fitting. Do not manually depress the retaining ring when installing the plastic cap onto the quick connect fitting. 11. Ensure that the plastic cap is fully seated against the fitting. 12. Ensure that no gap is present between the cap and the fitting. 13. Ensure that the yellow identification band on the tube is hidden within the quick connect fitting. 14. A hidden yellow identification band indicates proper joint seating. 15. Fill the transmission to the proper level with DEXRON(R) VI transmission fluid. Refer to Transmission Fluid Level and Condition Check (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/6T70/6T75 - Automatic Transmission/Transmission Fluid Level and Condition Check). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Line/Hose, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 5776 Transmission Fluid Cooler Pipe Replacement - Front Transmission Fluid Cooler Pipe Replacement - Front Transmission Fluid Cooler Pipe Replacement - Rear Transmission Fluid Cooler Pipe Replacement - Rear Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Line/Hose, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 5777 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Pan, A/T > Component Information > Specifications > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission Fluid Pan: Specifications 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission Control valve body cover ..................................................................................................................... ..................................................... 12 Nm (106 lb in) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Pan, A/T > Component Information > Specifications > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 5782 Fluid Pan: Specifications 6T70/6T75 - Automatic Transmission Control Valve Body Cover Cover bolts (1) M6 x 30 ....................................................................................................................... ..................................................... 12 Nm (106 lb in) Cover studs (2) M6 x 30 .................................... ........................................................................................................................................ 12 Nm (106 lb in) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Output Shaft, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T - 2-3 Upshift or 3-2 Downshift Clunk Noise Output Shaft: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - 2-3 Upshift or 3-2 Downshift Clunk Noise INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 01-07-30-042F Date: February 05, 2010 Subject: Information on 2-3 Upshift or 3-2 Downshift Clunk Noise Models: 2010 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2005-2009 Saab 9-7X with 4L60-E, 4L65-E or 4L70-E Automatic Transmission (RPOs M30, M32, M70) Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2010 model year and 4L70E transmission. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 01-07-30-042E (Section 07 - Transmission/Transaxle). Important For 2005 model year fullsize utilities and pickups, refer to Corporate Bulletin 05-07-30-012. Some vehicles may exhibit a clunk noise that can be heard on a 2-3 upshift or a 3-2 downshift. During a 2-3 upshift, the 2-4 band is released and the 3-4 clutch is applied. The timing of this shift can cause a momentary torque reversal of the output shaft that results in a clunk noise. This same torque reversal can also occur on a 3-2 downshift when the 3-4 clutch is released and the 2-4 band applied. This condition may be worse on a 4-wheel drive vehicle due to the additional tolerances in the transfer case. This is a normal condition. No repairs should be attempted. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Parking Pawl, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > 6L50/6L80/6L90 - Automatic Transmission Parking Pawl: Diagrams 6L50/6L80/6L90 - Automatic Transmission Disassembled Views Park System Components 50 - A/Trans Case 600 - Park Pawl Shaft 601 - Park Pawl Spring 602 - Park Pawl 603 - Park Pawl Actuator Guide Pin 604 - Manual Shift Shaft Seal 605 - Park Pawl Actuator Guide Seal 606 - Park Pawl Actuator Guide 607 - Park Pawl Actuator Assembly 608 - Manual Shift Detent Lever Shaft 609 - Manual Shift Detent (w/Shaft Position Switch) Lever Assembly 610 - Manual Shift Detent Lever Pin 611 - Manual Shift Shaft Pin Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Parking Pawl, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > 6L50/6L80/6L90 - Automatic Transmission > Page 5791 Parking Pawl: Diagrams 6T70/6T75 - Automatic Transmission Disassembled Views Park System Components 500 - Park Pawl Actuator Bracket Bolt 501 - Park Pawl Actuator Bracket 502 - Park Pawl Shaft 503 - Park Pawl 504 - Park Pawl Spring 505 - Park Pawl Actuator Guide Pin 506 - Park Pawl Actuator Guide 507 - A/Trans Case Assembly 508 - Manual Shift Shaft Seal 509 - Park Pawl Actuator Assembly 510 - Manual Shift Shaft Pin 511 - Manual Shift Detent (w/Shaft Position Switch) Lever Assembly Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Relays and Modules A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-07-30-016A > Nov > 09 > A/T Controls - Downshift Hesitation/Delayed Shifting Control Module: Customer Interest A/T Controls - Downshift Hesitation/Delayed Shifting TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 09-07-30-016A Date: November 25, 2009 Subject: Transmission Hesitation, Delayed Shifting, Shifting at Wrong Time (Reprogram TCM) Models: 2010 Buick Enclave 2010 Chevrolet Equinox, Traverse 2010 GMC Acadia, Terrain 2010 Saturn OUTLOOK Equipped with 6T40/45 (RPOs MH7, MHC) or 6T70/75 (RPOs MH2, MH4, MY9, MH6) Automatic Transmission 2010 Buick LaCrosse Equipped with 3.0L (RPO LF1) Engine and 6T70 (RPOs MH2, MH4) Automatic Transmission 2010 Chevrolet Malibu 2010 Pontiac G6 2010 Saturn AURA Equipped with 6T40 (RPO MH8) Automatic Transmission All Vehicles Built Prior to the Following VIN Breakpoints: Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add models. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 09-07-30-016 (07- Transmission/Transaxle). Condition Some customers may comment on transmission downshift hesitation, delayed shifting and shifting at the wrong time. Correction A revised transmission calibration has been developed to address these issues. Reprogram the transmission control module (TCM) with updated calibration files using the TIS2WEB Service Programming System (SPS) application. Select SEQ Programming Sequence ECM/TCM from the Supported Controllers screen. Refer to SI and Service Programming System (SPS) documentation for programming instructions, if required. Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table above. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Relays and Modules A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Control Module: > 10-07-30-002A > Jun > 10 > A/T Controls - Snapshot Data Using (GDS) Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T Controls - Snapshot Data Using (GDS) INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 10-07-30-002A Date: June 11, 2010 Subject: Navigation Procedure for Snapshot Data Using Global Diagnostic System (GDS), Uploading Snapshot Data to Computer and E-mailing Models: 2010-2011 Buick LaCrosse 2011 Buick Regal 2010-2011 Cadillac SRX 2010-2011 Chevrolet Camaro, Equinox 2010-2011 GMC Terrain Attention: For additional information about GDS and/or the snapshot feature, please review course number: 16048.26W Global Diagnostic System, at the GM training website: www.gmtraining.com. In Canada go to: www.gmprocanada.com. You may also utilize the Help Section of GDS by clicking on the Menu button that is on the lower left corner of the GDS screen. Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2011 model year and correct the step number referred to in the Note for Step 18. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 10-07-30-002 (Section 07 - Transmission/Transaxle). The Global Diagnostic System (GDS) and the multiple diagnostic interface (MDI) module will take the place of the Tech 2(R) on certain vehicles when communicating and diagnosing vehicle on-board electrical systems. This diagnostic tool platform and software will be required for use with all 2010 and later GM Global Architecture (Global A) vehicles beginning with the Chevrolet Camaro, followed by the Buick LaCrosse, Chevrolet Equinox, Cadillac SRX, GMC Terrain and Buick Regal. The following procedure is intended to show the user how to navigate to the appropriate data screen, upload a snapshot of the data to a computer and create an e-mail of the snapshot. The procedure is written for an automatic transmission, but is similar for other data screens. Procedure for GDS Navigating and Uploading Transmission Snapshot Data to a PC and Creating an E-mail 1. Turn OFF the ignition. 2. Connect the MDI to the Data Link Connector (DLC) of the vehicle. Note Use the USB port to make the following MDI connection: 3. Connect the MDI to a PC or laptop that has been downloaded with the GDS application from TIS2WEB. Note At least one Diagnostic Package must be installed on the PC to perform diagnostics. If GDS was just installed, select: Add New Diagnostic Package and then select: a Diagnostic Package to download. 4. Click: On the GDS icon on the PC. 5. The Login Page will appear. 6. Select: A User. 7. The ID Screen will appear. 8. Select: The serial number of the MDI being used. 9. Select: Connect. 10. Verify that the system status is ready by observing for a flashing PC light icon on the MDI. 11. Select: Make, Model and Model Year, in order to build the vehicle. 12. At: The Verification step, turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. 13. Click: Upload VIN, to allow the VIN to be reported to the PC. 14. Select: Next Action. 15. The Home Page will appear. 16. Select: Next. 17. The Diagnostic Screen will appear. Note Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Relays and Modules A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Control Module: > 10-07-30-002A > Jun > 10 > A/T Controls - Snapshot Data Using (GDS) > Page 5806 Due to vehicle build, software and RPO variations, GDS may ask for additional information in Step 18. 18. Select: Engine ID, if prompted. 19. Select: Module Diagnostics. 20. Select: TCM. 21. Select: Data Display. 22. Select: The drop down menu to display the available Data Display selections. 23. Select: The appropriate Data Display for the snapshot to be taken. Note The snapshot data can be recorded at idle or on a hoist when using a shop PC. IF the vehicle is driven, the use of a laptop with GDS will be required. PC memory will determine the amount of snapshot recording time. 24. Select: Record Snapshot, when ready. 25. Select: Stop Snapshot, upon completion. 26. Insert: Comment. Use a name, the vehicle model or the concern and date in order to identify the snapshot. 27. Exit: The Data List. 28. Exit: The Diagnostic Screen. 29. The Home Page will appear with the snapshot on the right side. 30. Click: On the Snapshot to Highlight it. 31. Click: Tech Support. Note Enter the necessary e-mail information into ALL of the blank boxes. Failure to do so will result in an error message and the snapshot will not be sent. 32. The Send E-mail dialog box will appear. 1. SENDER: Enter your first name. Use only ONE name as multiple words may cause an error message. 2. RECIPIENT: Enter their e-mail address. Note An error message will occur if this box contains ANY spaces. 3. REPLY TO: Enter your first name here. An e-mail address can be used but it MUST NOT contain any spaces or unrecognized characters. 4. SUBJECT: Enter the appropriate information here, such as the condition, symptom, data parameter being investigated or DTC. 5. TEXT: Type a short message here, such as the test results, snapshot type, or a cell phone number. Note A copy of the snapshot will still reside on the PC. 33. Click: OK, to send the snapshot. Procedure to E-mail GDS Snapshot Data to TAC Important When e-mailing a snapshot to TAC, only send the snapshot data they have REQUESTED. 1. Select: Home Page. The snapshot will appear on the right side. 2. Click: On the Snapshot to Highlight it. 3. Click: Tech Support. 4. The Send E-mail dialog box will appear. Note Enter the necessary e-mail information into ALL of the blank boxes. Failure to do so will result in an error message and the snapshot will not be sent. 5. SENDER: Enter your first name here. Use only ONE name as multiple words may cause an error message. 6. RECIPIENT: Enter the USA or Canada TAC E-mail Address. Note An error message will occur if this box contains ANY spaces. 7. REPLY TO: Enter your first name here. An e-mail address can be used but it MUST NOT contain any spaces or unrecognized characters. 8. SUBJECT: Enter Your TAC Case Number & VIN Number here. Both numbers MUST appear in this box or the e-mail cannot be processed and will be deleted. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Relays and Modules A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Control Module: > 10-07-30-002A > Jun > 10 > A/T Controls - Snapshot Data Using (GDS) > Page 5807 9. TEXT: Type a short message here, such as the test results, snapshot type, or a cell phone number. Note A copy of the snapshot will still reside on the PC. 10. Click: OK, to send the snapshot. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Relays and Modules A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Control Module: > 09-07-30-016A > Nov > 09 > A/T Controls - Downshift Hesitation/Delayed Shifting Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T Controls - Downshift Hesitation/Delayed Shifting TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 09-07-30-016A Date: November 25, 2009 Subject: Transmission Hesitation, Delayed Shifting, Shifting at Wrong Time (Reprogram TCM) Models: 2010 Buick Enclave 2010 Chevrolet Equinox, Traverse 2010 GMC Acadia, Terrain 2010 Saturn OUTLOOK Equipped with 6T40/45 (RPOs MH7, MHC) or 6T70/75 (RPOs MH2, MH4, MY9, MH6) Automatic Transmission 2010 Buick LaCrosse Equipped with 3.0L (RPO LF1) Engine and 6T70 (RPOs MH2, MH4) Automatic Transmission 2010 Chevrolet Malibu 2010 Pontiac G6 2010 Saturn AURA Equipped with 6T40 (RPO MH8) Automatic Transmission All Vehicles Built Prior to the Following VIN Breakpoints: Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add models. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 09-07-30-016 (07- Transmission/Transaxle). Condition Some customers may comment on transmission downshift hesitation, delayed shifting and shifting at the wrong time. Correction A revised transmission calibration has been developed to address these issues. Reprogram the transmission control module (TCM) with updated calibration files using the TIS2WEB Service Programming System (SPS) application. Select SEQ Programming Sequence ECM/TCM from the Supported Controllers screen. Refer to SI and Service Programming System (SPS) documentation for programming instructions, if required. Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table above. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Relays and Modules A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Control Module: > 10-07-30-002A > Jun > 10 > A/T Controls - Snapshot Data Using (GDS) Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T Controls - Snapshot Data Using (GDS) INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 10-07-30-002A Date: June 11, 2010 Subject: Navigation Procedure for Snapshot Data Using Global Diagnostic System (GDS), Uploading Snapshot Data to Computer and E-mailing Models: 2010-2011 Buick LaCrosse 2011 Buick Regal 2010-2011 Cadillac SRX 2010-2011 Chevrolet Camaro, Equinox 2010-2011 GMC Terrain Attention: For additional information about GDS and/or the snapshot feature, please review course number: 16048.26W Global Diagnostic System, at the GM training website: www.gmtraining.com. In Canada go to: www.gmprocanada.com. You may also utilize the Help Section of GDS by clicking on the Menu button that is on the lower left corner of the GDS screen. Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2011 model year and correct the step number referred to in the Note for Step 18. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 10-07-30-002 (Section 07 - Transmission/Transaxle). The Global Diagnostic System (GDS) and the multiple diagnostic interface (MDI) module will take the place of the Tech 2(R) on certain vehicles when communicating and diagnosing vehicle on-board electrical systems. This diagnostic tool platform and software will be required for use with all 2010 and later GM Global Architecture (Global A) vehicles beginning with the Chevrolet Camaro, followed by the Buick LaCrosse, Chevrolet Equinox, Cadillac SRX, GMC Terrain and Buick Regal. The following procedure is intended to show the user how to navigate to the appropriate data screen, upload a snapshot of the data to a computer and create an e-mail of the snapshot. The procedure is written for an automatic transmission, but is similar for other data screens. Procedure for GDS Navigating and Uploading Transmission Snapshot Data to a PC and Creating an E-mail 1. Turn OFF the ignition. 2. Connect the MDI to the Data Link Connector (DLC) of the vehicle. Note Use the USB port to make the following MDI connection: 3. Connect the MDI to a PC or laptop that has been downloaded with the GDS application from TIS2WEB. Note At least one Diagnostic Package must be installed on the PC to perform diagnostics. If GDS was just installed, select: Add New Diagnostic Package and then select: a Diagnostic Package to download. 4. Click: On the GDS icon on the PC. 5. The Login Page will appear. 6. Select: A User. 7. The ID Screen will appear. 8. Select: The serial number of the MDI being used. 9. Select: Connect. 10. Verify that the system status is ready by observing for a flashing PC light icon on the MDI. 11. Select: Make, Model and Model Year, in order to build the vehicle. 12. At: The Verification step, turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. 13. Click: Upload VIN, to allow the VIN to be reported to the PC. 14. Select: Next Action. 15. The Home Page will appear. 16. Select: Next. 17. The Diagnostic Screen will appear. Note Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Relays and Modules A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Control Module: > 10-07-30-002A > Jun > 10 > A/T Controls - Snapshot Data Using (GDS) > Page 5817 Due to vehicle build, software and RPO variations, GDS may ask for additional information in Step 18. 18. Select: Engine ID, if prompted. 19. Select: Module Diagnostics. 20. Select: TCM. 21. Select: Data Display. 22. Select: The drop down menu to display the available Data Display selections. 23. Select: The appropriate Data Display for the snapshot to be taken. Note The snapshot data can be recorded at idle or on a hoist when using a shop PC. IF the vehicle is driven, the use of a laptop with GDS will be required. PC memory will determine the amount of snapshot recording time. 24. Select: Record Snapshot, when ready. 25. Select: Stop Snapshot, upon completion. 26. Insert: Comment. Use a name, the vehicle model or the concern and date in order to identify the snapshot. 27. Exit: The Data List. 28. Exit: The Diagnostic Screen. 29. The Home Page will appear with the snapshot on the right side. 30. Click: On the Snapshot to Highlight it. 31. Click: Tech Support. Note Enter the necessary e-mail information into ALL of the blank boxes. Failure to do so will result in an error message and the snapshot will not be sent. 32. The Send E-mail dialog box will appear. 1. SENDER: Enter your first name. Use only ONE name as multiple words may cause an error message. 2. RECIPIENT: Enter their e-mail address. Note An error message will occur if this box contains ANY spaces. 3. REPLY TO: Enter your first name here. An e-mail address can be used but it MUST NOT contain any spaces or unrecognized characters. 4. SUBJECT: Enter the appropriate information here, such as the condition, symptom, data parameter being investigated or DTC. 5. TEXT: Type a short message here, such as the test results, snapshot type, or a cell phone number. Note A copy of the snapshot will still reside on the PC. 33. Click: OK, to send the snapshot. Procedure to E-mail GDS Snapshot Data to TAC Important When e-mailing a snapshot to TAC, only send the snapshot data they have REQUESTED. 1. Select: Home Page. The snapshot will appear on the right side. 2. Click: On the Snapshot to Highlight it. 3. Click: Tech Support. 4. The Send E-mail dialog box will appear. Note Enter the necessary e-mail information into ALL of the blank boxes. Failure to do so will result in an error message and the snapshot will not be sent. 5. SENDER: Enter your first name here. Use only ONE name as multiple words may cause an error message. 6. RECIPIENT: Enter the USA or Canada TAC E-mail Address. Note An error message will occur if this box contains ANY spaces. 7. REPLY TO: Enter your first name here. An e-mail address can be used but it MUST NOT contain any spaces or unrecognized characters. 8. SUBJECT: Enter Your TAC Case Number & VIN Number here. Both numbers MUST appear in this box or the e-mail cannot be processed and will be deleted. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Relays and Modules A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Control Module: > 10-07-30-002A > Jun > 10 > A/T Controls - Snapshot Data Using (GDS) > Page 5818 9. TEXT: Type a short message here, such as the test results, snapshot type, or a cell phone number. Note A copy of the snapshot will still reside on the PC. 10. Click: OK, to send the snapshot. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Relays and Modules A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission Control Module: Service and Repair 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission Control Solenoid Valve and Transmission Control Module Assembly Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the transmission control valve body cover. Refer to Control Valve Body Cover Replacement (See: Valve Body/Service and Repair/6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission/Control Valve Body Cover Replacement). 2. Disconnect the input speed sensor electrical connector (1). 3. Disconnect the output speed sensor electrical connector (2). 4. Disconnect the shift position switch electrical connector (3). 5. Remove the 3 control valve body bolts (1) M5 x 40.5. 6. Remove the 12 control valve body bolts (2) M6 x 97. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Relays and Modules A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 5821 7. Remove the control solenoid valve assembly (3) with transmission control module. Caution: Use care when removing or installing the filter plate assembly. A broken or missing retaining tab may not adequately secure the filter plate to the control solenoid valve assembly, resulting in possible damage or contamination. 8. Remove the control solenoid valve assembly filter plate (4). Discard the filter plate. It is not reusable. 9. Inspect the channel plate bolt pass through holes for damage or brinelling. Any damage will cause incorrect pressure switch operation. Replace as necessary. Installation Procedure Caution: Use care when removing or installing the filter plate assembly. A broken or missing retaining tab may not adequately secure the filter plate to the control solenoid valve assembly, resulting in possible damage or contamination. 1. Install a NEW control solenoid valve assembly filter plate (4) to prevent fluid leaks past the fluid seals. 2. Install the control solenoid valve assembly (3) with transmission control module. 3. Hand start the control valve body bolts (1, 2). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Relays and Modules A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 5822 Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener Caution). 4. Secure the 12 control valve body bolts (2) M6 x 97 and tighten in sequence to 10 Nm (89 lb in). 5. Secure the 3 control valve body bolts (1) M5 x 40.5 and tighten in sequence to 8 Nm (71 lb in). 6. Connect the input speed sensor electrical connector (1). 7. Connect the output speed sensor electrical connector (2). 8. Connect the shift position switch electrical connector (3). 9. Install the transmission control valve body cover. Refer to Control Valve Body Cover Replacement (See: Valve Body/Service and Repair/6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission/Control Valve Body Cover Replacement). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Relays and Modules A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 5823 Control Module: Service and Repair 6T70/6T75 - Automatic Transmission Control Solenoid Valve and Transmission Control Module Assembly Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the control valve body cover. Refer to Control Valve Body Cover Replacement (See: Valve Body/Service and Repair/6T70/6T75 Automatic Transmission/Control Valve Body Cover Replacement). 2. Disconnect the input speed sensor electrical connector (1). 3. Disconnect the output speed sensor electrical connector (2). 4. Disconnect the shift position switch electrical connector (3). 5. Remove the 4 control valve body bolts (1) M6 x 80. 6. Position the control solenoid valve spring (8) to the side. Spring will be released with the removal of the control valve body assembly. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Relays and Modules A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 5824 7. Remove the 2 control valve body bolts (4) M6 x 65. 8. Remove the control valve body bolt (3) M6 x 42. 9. Remove the 3 control valve body bolts (2) M6 x 95. 10. Remove the control valve body bolt (7) M6 x 55. 11. Remove the control solenoid valve body and transmission control module (TCM) assembly (5). Caution: Use care when removing or installing the filter plate assembly. A broken or missing retaining tab may not adequately secure the filter plate to the control solenoid valve assembly, resulting in possible damage or contamination. 12. Remove the control solenoid valve assembly filter plate (6). * Discard the filler plate. It is not reusable. * Inspect the pressure switch manifold seals for damage or contamination. Replace the control solenoid valve assembly as necessary. * Inspect the upper channel plate bolt holes for damage, peening or burnelling. Any damage around the bolt holes near the pressure control switch (PCS) feed holes could cause leakage around the PCS seals. Replace the upper channel plate as necessary. Installation Procedure Caution: Use care when removing or installing the filter plate assembly. A broken or missing retaining tab may not adequately secure the filter plate to the control solenoid valve assembly, resulting in possible damage or contamination. 1. Install a NEW control solenoid valve assembly filter plate (1). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Relays and Modules A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 5825 2. Install the control solenoid valve body and TCM assembly (5). 3. Rotate the control solenoid valve spring (7) into position. Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener Caution). Note: Install all bolts before tightening, then tighten in specified sequence. 4. Install the 4 control valve body bolts (1) M6 x 80. 5. Install the control valve body bolt (6) M6 x 55. 6. Install the 3 control valve body bolts (2) M6 x 95. 7. Install the control valve body bolt (3) M6 x 42. 8. Install the 2 control valve body bolts (4) M6 x 65 and tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb in). 9. Connect the input speed sensor electrical connector (1). 10. Connect the output speed sensor electrical connector (2). 11. Connect the shift position switch electrical connector (3). 12. Install the control valve body cover. Refer to Control Valve Body Cover Replacement (See: Valve Body/Service and Repair/6T70/6T75 - Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Relays and Modules A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 5826 Automatic Transmission/Control Valve Body Cover Replacement). 13. For transmission control module programming and setup. Refer to Control Module References (See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning). Note: After an internal transmission repair or internal part replacement the service fast learn adapt procedure should be performed. 14. Perform the transmission adaptive values learn procedure. Refer to Transmission Adaptive Values Learn (See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Seals and Gaskets, A/T > System Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission Seals and Gaskets: Service and Repair 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission Front Wheel Drive Shaft Seal Replacement - Left Side Front Wheel Drive Shaft Seal Replacement - Left Side Front Wheel Drive Shaft Seal Replacement - Right Side Front Wheel Drive Shaft Seal Replacement - Right Side Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Seals and Gaskets, A/T > System Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 5831 Manual Shift Shaft and Seal Replacement Manual Shift Shaft and Seal Replacement Special Tools * J 45201 Cooler Line Seal Remover * J-46626 Seal Installer Removal Procedure 1. Remove the battery tray. Refer to Battery Tray Replacement (See: Starting and Charging/Battery/Battery Tray/Service and Repair). 2. Remove the manual shaft and position switch assembly. Refer to Manual Shift Detent Lever with Shaft Position Switch Assembly Replacement ( See: Sensors and Switches - A/T/Transmission Position Switch/Sensor/Service and Repair/6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Seals and Gaskets, A/T > System Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 5832 3. Remove the manual shaft seal (1) using J 45201. Installation Procedure 1. Install the manual shaft and position switch assembly. Refer to Manual Shift Detent Lever with Shaft Position Switch Assembly Replacement ( See: Sensors and Switches - A/T/Transmission Position Switch/Sensor/Service and Repair/6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission). 2. Install the manual shaft seal (1) using J-46626. 3. Install the battery tray. Refer to Battery Tray Replacement (See: Starting and Charging/Battery/Battery Tray/Service and Repair). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Seals and Gaskets, A/T > System Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 5833 Seals and Gaskets: Service and Repair 6T70/6T75 - Automatic Transmission Front Wheel Drive Shaft Seal Replacement - Left Side Front Wheel Drive Shaft Seal Replacement - Left Side Front Wheel Drive Shaft Seal Replacement - Right Side Front Wheel Drive Shaft Seal Replacement - Right Side Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Seals and Gaskets, A/T > System Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 5834 Input Speed Sensor Seal Replacement Input Speed Sensor Seal Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Seals and Gaskets, A/T > System Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 5835 Manual Shift Shaft and Seal Replacement Manual Shift Shaft and Seal Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Seals and Gaskets, A/T > System Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 5836 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Mode Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations Transmission Mode Switch: Locations Powertrain Component Views Automatic Transmission Electronic Components 1 - Q8 Control Solenoid Valve Assembly 2 - B15 Transmission Internal Mode Switch 3 - B14A Transmission Output Shaft Speed Sensor 4 - B14C Transmission Input Shaft Speed Sensor Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Exploded Views Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Exploded Views 6L50/6L80/6L90 - Automatic Transmission Disassembled Views Park System Components 50 - A/Trans Case 600 - Park Pawl Shaft 601 - Park Pawl Spring 602 - Park Pawl 603 - Park Pawl Actuator Guide Pin 604 - Manual Shift Shaft Seal 605 - Park Pawl Actuator Guide Seal 606 - Park Pawl Actuator Guide 607 - Park Pawl Actuator Assembly 608 - Manual Shift Detent Lever Shaft 609 - Manual Shift Detent (w/Shaft Position Switch) Lever Assembly 610 - Manual Shift Detent Lever Pin 611 - Manual Shift Shaft Pin 6T70/6T75 - Automatic Transmission Disassembled Views Park System Components Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Exploded Views > Page 5845 500 - Park Pawl Actuator Bracket Bolt 501 - Park Pawl Actuator Bracket 502 - Park Pawl Shaft 503 - Park Pawl 504 - Park Pawl Spring 505 - Park Pawl Actuator Guide Pin 506 - Park Pawl Actuator Guide 507 - A/Trans Case Assembly 508 - Manual Shift Shaft Seal 509 - Park Pawl Actuator Assembly 510 - Manual Shift Shaft Pin 511 - Manual Shift Detent (w/Shaft Position Switch) Lever Assembly Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Exploded Views > Page 5846 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Connector Views P2 Transmission Shift Lever Position Indicator Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 Automatic Transmission Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Service and Repair 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission Manual Shift Detent Lever with Shaft Position Switch Assembly Replacement Special Tools * DT-48550 Detent Lever Pin Remover * J 41229 Manual Shaft Pin Installer Removal Procedure 1. Remove the control valve body. Refer to Control Valve Body Replacement (See: Valve Body/Service and Repair/6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission/Control Valve Body Replacement). 2. Remove the manual shaft detent lever hub pin (1) using DT-48550. 3. Remove the manual shift shaft pin (5). Discard the pin. 4. Remove the manual shaft (2). Note: Disconnect the actuator rod (3) from the detent lever assembly. Do not remove the actuator rod from the transmission case. 5. Remove the manual shaft detent (w/shift position switch) lever assembly (4). Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 Automatic Transmission > Page 5849 Note: Connect the actuator rod (3) to the detent lever assembly. 1. Install the manual shaft detent (w/shift position switch) lever assembly (4). Note: Lubricate the shaft with automatic transmission fluid to prevent damage to the manual shift shaft seal during installation. 2. Install the manual shaft (2). 3. Install the manual shaft detent lever hub pin (1) using DT-48550. Install the Manual Shaft Detent Lever Hub Pin to height of (b) 7.9 mm (0.38 in). Caution: Use the manual shaft pin installer to install the pin at the correct height in order to properly secure the manual shaft. If you install the pin too deep, the case bore may crack. 4. Install the NEW manual shift shaft pin (5) using J 41229. Use a NEW pin to ensure proper engagement with the case. Inspect pin installed height is within (a) 7.2-8.2 mm (0.28-0.32 in). 5. Install the control valve body. Refer to Control Valve Body Replacement (See: Valve Body/Service and Repair/6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission/Control Valve Body Replacement). 6. Perform the transmission adaptive values learn procedure. Refer to Transmission Adaptive Values Learn (See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 Automatic Transmission > Page 5850 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Service and Repair 6T70/6T75 - Automatic Transmission Manual Shift Detent Lever with Shaft Position Switch Assembly Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 Automatic Transmission > Page 5851 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations Transmission Speed Sensor: Locations Powertrain Component Views Front Engine Components (LAF 1 of 2) 1 - Q38 Throttle Body 2 - G18 High Pressure Fuel Pump 3 - B23F Camshaft Position Sensor Intake 4 - B37 Engine Oil Pressure Switch 5 - B68 Knock Sensor 6 - B26 Crankshaft Position Sensor 7 - M64 Starter Motor 8 - Q2 A/C Compressor Clutch 9 - G13 Generator Front Engine Components (LAF 2 of 2) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 5855 1 - B47B Fuel Rail Pressure Sensor 2 - B74 Manifold Absolute Pressure Sensor 3 - Q17D Fuel Injector 4 4 - Q17C Fuel Injector 3 5 - B1 A/C Refrigerant Pressure Sensor 6 - Q17B Fuel Injector 2 7 - Q17A Fuel Injector 1 Left Rear Engine Components (LAF) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 5856 1 - T8D Ignition Coil 4 2 - T8C Ignition Coil 3 3 - T8B Ignition Coil 2 4 - T8A Ignition Coil 1 5 - Q6F Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Intake 6 - Q6E Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Exhaust 7 - B52A Heated Oxygen Sensor 1 8 - B52B Heated Oxygen Sensor 2 9 - B34 Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor 10 - B23E Camshaft Position Sensor - Exhaust 11 - Q12 Evaporative Emission Purge Solenoid Valve Top of the Engine Components (LF1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 5857 1 - B47B Fuel Rail Pressure Sensor 2 - Q17A Fuel Injector 1 3 - Q17C Fuel Injector 3 4 - Q17E Fuel Injector 5 5 - Q17F Fuel Injector 6 6 - Q17D Fuel Injector 4 7 - Q17B Fuel Injector 2 Left Front of the Engine Components (LF1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 5858 1 - T8B Ignition Coil 2 2 - T8D Ignition Coil 4 3 - T8F Ignition Coil 6 4 - G18 High Pressure Fuel Pump 5 - B34 Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor 6 - M64 Starter Motor 7 - B68B Knock Sensor 2 8 - B37 Engine Oil Pressure Switch 9 - B1 A/C Refrigerant Pressure Sensor 10 - Q2 A/C Compressor Clutch 11 - G13 Generator Right Rear of the Engine Components (LF1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 5859 1 - B74 Manifold Absolute Pressure Sensor 2 - T8E Ignition Coil 5 3 - T8C Ignition Coil 3 4 - Q12 Evaporative Emission Purge Solenoid Valve 5 - Q38 Throttle Body 6 - B23B Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 1 Intake 7 - B23D Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 2 Intake 8 - Q6D Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Bank 2 Intake 9 - Q6C Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Bank 2 Exhaust 10 - B23C Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 2 Exhaust 11 - Q6B Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Bank 1 Intake 12 - Q6A Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Bank 1 Exhaust 13 - B23A Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 1 Exhaust 14 - B68A Knock Sensor 1 15 - B26 Crankshaft Position Sensor 16 - T8A Ignition Coil 1 Front of the Exhaust System Components (LF1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 5860 1 - B52C Heated Oxygen Sensor - Bank 1 Sensor 1 2 - B52D Heated Oxygen Sensor - Bank 1 Sensor 2 3 - B52F Heated Oxygen Sensor - Bank 2 Sensor 2 4 - B52E Heated Oxygen Sensor Bank 2 Sensor 1 Automatic Transmission Electronic Components Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 5861 1 - Q8 Control Solenoid Valve Assembly 2 - B15 Transmission Internal Mode Switch 3 - B14A Transmission Output Shaft Speed Sensor 4 - B14C Transmission Input Shaft Speed Sensor Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > 6L50/6L80/6L90 - Automatic Transmission Transmission Speed Sensor: Diagrams 6L50/6L80/6L90 - Automatic Transmission Component Location Component Location 1 - Reaction Carrier Assembly 2 - Control Valve Body Assembly 3 - Input Carrier Assembly 4 Valve Channel Plate 5 - Output Carrier Assembly 6 - Park Gear 7 - Control Solenoid (w/Body and TCM) Valve Assembly 8 - Drive Link Assembly 9 - Drive Sprocket 10 - Torque Converter Assembly 11 - A/Trans Fluid Pump Assembly 12 - Differential Carrier Assembly 13 - Front Differential Ring Gear 14 - Driven Sprocket 15 - 1-2-3-4 Clutch Assembly Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > 6L50/6L80/6L90 - Automatic Transmission > Page 5864 16 - Low and Reverse Clutch Assembly 17 - 2-6 Clutch Assembly 18 - 3-5 Reverse Clutch Assembly 19 - 4-5-6 Clutch Assembly 20 - A/Trans Input Speed Sensor Assembly 21 - Reaction Sun Gear Assembly Disassembled Views Disassembled Views Case and Associated Parts 1 - Control Valve Body Cover Bolt 2 - Control Valve Body Cover Assembly 3 - Control Valve Body Cover Gasket 4 - Control Valve Body Bolt 5 - Control Valve Body Cover Hole Seal 6 - Control Solenoid Valve Heat Sink Bolt 7 - Control Solenoid (w/Body and TCM) Valve Assembly 8 - Control Valve Body Filter Plate Assembly 9 - Control Valve Body Bolt 10 - Control Valve Body Bolt Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > 6L50/6L80/6L90 - Automatic Transmission > Page 5865 11 - Control Valve Body Assembly 12 - Control Valve Body Spacer Plate Assembly 13 - A/Trans Fluid Level Control Valve 14 - A/Trans Fluid Level Control Valve Gasket 15 - A/Trans Output Speed Sensor Bolt 16 - A/Trans Output Speed Sensor Assembly 17 - Manual Shaft Detent Spring Bolt 18 - Manual Shaft Detent Lever Spring Assembly 19 - A/Trans Input Speed Sensor Assembly 20 - A/Trans Input Speed Sensor Assembly O-Ring Seal 21 - A/Trans Input Speed Sensor Bolt 22 Fill Cap 23 - Fill Cap Seal 24 - Torque Converter Housing Gasket 25 - A/Trans Fluid Pump Seal Assembly 26 - Torque Converter with Fluid Pump Housing Assembly 27 - Torque Converter and Differential Housing Bolt 28 - A/Trans Fluid Fill Tube Plug Assembly 29 - Torque Converter Assembly 3-5 Reverse Clutch Assembly 500 - A/Trans Input Shaft Speed Sensor Reluctor Wheel Retainer Ring 501 - A/Trans Input Shaft Speed Sensor Reluctor Wheel 502 - 3-5-Reverse Clutch Piston 503 - 3-5-Reverse Clutch Piston Return Spring Assembly 504 - 3-5-Reverse Clutch Piston Inner Seal 505 - 3-5-Reverse Clutch Piston Inner Seal 506 - 3-5-Reverse Clutch Piston Dam Seal 507 - 3-5-Reverse Clutch Apply Plate 508 - 3-5-Reverse Clutch Plate 509 - 3-5-Reverse Clutch (w/Friction Material) Plate Assembly 510 - 3-5-Reverse Clutch Backing Plate 511 - 3-5-Reverse Clutch Backing Plate Retainer Ring Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > 6L50/6L80/6L90 - Automatic Transmission > Page 5866 Transmission Speed Sensor: Diagrams 6T70/6T75 - Automatic Transmission Component Location Component Location Component Locations 1 - Manual Shift Detent Lever Assembly (w/Shaft Position Switch) 2 - Trans Fluid Level Indicator 3 Reaction Carrier Assembly 4 - Output Speed Sensor 5 - Input Carrier Assembly 6 - Output Carrier Assembly 7 - Front Differential Transfer Drive Gear 8 - Front Differential Transfer Drive Gear Support Assembly 9 - Torque Converter Assembly 10 - Park Pawl Actuator Assembly 11 - Fluid Pump Drive Link Assembly 12 - Park Pawl 13 - Front Differential Transfer Driven Gear Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > 6L50/6L80/6L90 - Automatic Transmission > Page 5867 14 - Front Differential Drive Pinion Gear 15 - Park Gear 16 - Torque Converter and Support and Fluid Pump Housing Assembly 17 - Front Differential Carrier Assembly 18 - Front Differential Carrier Baffle 19 - Front Differential Ring Gear 20 - Front Differential Drive Pinion Gear Lube Tube 21 - 1-2-3-4 Clutch Assembly 22 - Low and Reverse Clutch Assembly (OWC) 23 - Low and Reverse Clutch 24 - 2-6 Clutch Assembly 25 - 3-5-Reverse Clutch Assembly 26 - 4-5-6 Clutch Assembly 27 - Input Speed Sensor 28 - Case Cover Assembly 29 - Control Valve Body Cover 30 Input Shaft Speed Sensor Reluctor Wheel 31 - Control Valve Lower Body Assembly 32 - Control Valve Upper Body Assembly 33 - Control Valve Channel Plate Assembly 34 - Control Solenoid Valve Assembly (w/Body and TCM) 35 - Manual Valve Disassembled Views Disassembled Views Case and Associated Parts Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > 6L50/6L80/6L90 - Automatic Transmission > Page 5868 1 - Control Valve Body Cover Assembly 2 - Transmission Fluid Level Indicator Assembly 3 - Fluid Level Indicator Tube - Model Dependent 4 - Fluid Level Indicator Tube Seal - Model Dependent 5 Control Valve Body Cover Assembly Gasket 6 - Control Valve Body Cover Stud 7 - Control Valve Body Cover Bolt 8 - Control Valve Body Bolt 9 - Control Valve Body Bolt 10 - Control Valve Body Cover Wiring Connector Hole Seal 11 - Control Solenoid Valve Spring 12 - Control Valve Body Bolt 13 - Control Valve Body Bolt 14 - Control Valve Body Bolt 15 - Control Solenoid (w/Body and TCM) Valve Assembly 16 - Control Solenoid (w/Body and TCM) Filter Plate Assembly 17 - Manual Shaft Detent Assembly 18 - Control Valve Body Assembly 19 - A/Trans Output Speed Sensor Assembly 20 - A/Trans Output Speed Sensor Bolt 21 - A/Trans Case Assembly 22 - Torque Converter Housing Outer Seal 23 - Front Differential Drive Pinion (w/Transfer Gear) Gear Assembly 24 Front Differential Drive Pinion Gear Lube Tube Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > 6L50/6L80/6L90 - Automatic Transmission > Page 5869 25 - Torque Converter and Support and A/Trans Fluid Pump Housing Assembly 26 - Torque Converter and Differential Housing Bolt 27 - Torque Converter Assembly 28 - Dust Cover Push Pin - Model Dependent 29 - Dust Cover Bolt - Model Dependent 30 - Dust Cover - Model Dependent 31 - Front Differential Carrier Assembly 32 - Input Shaft Thrust Bearing Assembly 33 - A/Trans Case Cover Gasket 34 - A/Trans Case Cover Assembly 35 - A/Trans Case Cover Assembly Bolt A/Trans Case Cover, 2-6 and Low Reverse Pistons 400 - A/Trans Input Speed Sensor Assembly 401 - A/Trans Input Speed Sensor Bolt 402 - ISS O-Ring Seal 403 - A/Trans Case Cover Assembly 404 - 3-5-Reverse and 4-5-6 Clutch Fluid Seal Ring 405 - 2-6 Clutch Piston 406 - 2-6 Clutch Spring Assembly 407 - 2-6 Clutch Spring Retainer Ring 408 - Low and Reverse Clutch Piston Assembly 409 - Low and Reverse Clutch Spring 410 Low and Reverse Clutch Spring Retainer Ring Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission Output Speed Sensor Replacement Output Speed Sensor Replacement Input Speed Sensor Replacement Input Speed Sensor Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the transmission control valve body cover. Refer to Control Valve Body Cover Replacement (See: Valve Body/Service and Repair/6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission/Control Valve Body Cover Replacement). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 5872 2. Disconnect the input speed sensor electrical connector (1). 3. Remove the input speed sensor bolt (2) M6 x 23. 4. Remove the input speed sensor (3). 5. Remove the 3 input speed sensor seals (1). Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 5873 1. Install the 3 input speed sensor seals (1). 2. Install the input speed sensor (3). Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener Caution). 3. Install the input speed sensor bolt (2) M6 x 23 and tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb in). 4. Connect the input speed sensor electrical connector (1). 5. Install the transmission control valve body cover. Refer to Control Valve Body Cover Replacement (See: Valve Body/Service and Repair/6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission/Control Valve Body Cover Replacement). 6. Perform the transmission adaptive values learn procedure. Refer to Transmission Adaptive Values Learn (See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 5874 Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair 6T70/6T75 - Automatic Transmission Output Speed Sensor Replacement Output Speed Sensor Replacement Input Speed Sensor Replacement Input Speed Sensor Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 5875 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Shift Interlock: Diagram Information and Instructions Electrical Schematic Symbols Electrical Schematic Symbols Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5880 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5881 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5882 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5883 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5884 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5885 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5886 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5887 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5888 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5889 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5890 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5891 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5892 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5893 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5894 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5895 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5896 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5897 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5898 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5899 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5900 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5901 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5902 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5903 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5904 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5905 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5906 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5907 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5908 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5909 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5910 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5911 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5912 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5913 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5914 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5915 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5916 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5917 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5918 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5919 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5920 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5921 General Electrical Diagnosis General Electrical Diagnosis Basic Knowledge Required Without a basic knowledge of electricity, it will be difficult to use the diagnostic procedures contained in the service manual. You should understand the basic theory of electricity, and know the meaning of voltage (V), current (A), and resistance (Ohms ). You should also be able to read and understand a wiring diagram, as well as understand what happens in a circuit with an open or a shorted wire. Vehicle Zoning Strategy Vehicle Zoning Strategy All grounds, in-line connectors, and splices have identifying numbers that correspond to where they are located in the vehicle. The following table explains the numbering system. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5922 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5923 Shift Interlock: Diagnostic Aids Arrows and Symbols Arrows and Symbols This service manual uses various symbols in order to describe different service operations. 1 - Front of Vehicle 2 - View Detail 2 - View Detail 3 - Ambient Air Mixed with Another Gas or Indicate Temperature Change 4 - Motion or Direction 5 - View Angle 6 - Dimension (1:2) 7 Ambient/Clean Air Flow or Cool Air Flow 8 - Lubrication Point - Oil or Fluid 9 - Task Related 10 Sectioning (1:3) 11 - Gas Other Than Ambient Air or Hot Air Flow 12 - Lubrication Point - Grease or Jelly 13 - Multidirectional Arrow Decimal and Metric Equivalents Decimal and Metric Equivalents Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5924 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5925 Checking Aftermarket Accessories Checking Aftermarket Accessories Warning: Refer to SIR Warning (See: Restraint Systems/Service Precautions/SIR Warning). Caution: The OBD II symbol is used on the circuit diagrams in order to alert the technician that the circuit is essential for proper OBD II emission control circuit operation. Any circuit which fails and causes the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) to turn ON, or causes emissions-related component damage, is identified as an OBD II circuit. Do not connect aftermarket accessories into the following circuits: * SIR circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the SIR symbol. * OBD II circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the OBD II symbol. Always check for aftermarket accessories (non-OEM) as the first step in diagnosing electrical problems. If the vehicle is so equipped, disconnect the system to verify that these add-on accessories are not the cause of the problems. Possible causes of vehicle problems related to aftermarket accessories include: * Power feeds connected to points other than the battery * Antenna location * Transceiver wiring located too close to vehicle electronic modules or wiring * Poor shielding or poor connectors on antenna feed line * Check for recent service bulletins detailing installation guidelines for aftermarket accessories. Circuit Testing Circuit Testing The Circuit Testing section contains the following diagnostic testing information. Using this information along with the diagnostic procedures will identify the cause of the electrical malfunction. * Using Connector Test Adapters (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Using Connector Test Adapters) * Probing Electrical Connectors (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Probing Electrical Connectors) * Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5926 Procedures/Circuit Testing/Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter) * Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp) * Using Fused Jumper Wires (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Using Fused Jumper Wires) * Measuring Voltage (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Measuring Voltage) * Measuring Voltage Drop (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Measuring Voltage Drop) * Measuring Frequency (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Measuring Frequency) * Testing Ground and Low Reference Circuits (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Testing Ground and Low Reference Circuits) * Testing for Continuity (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Continuity) * Testing for Short to Ground (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Short to Ground) * Testing for a Short to Voltage (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for a Short to Voltage) * Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections) * Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions) * Testing for Electrical Intermittents (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Electrical Intermittents) * Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure) * Circuit Protection - Fuses (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Circuit Protection - Fuses) * Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers) * Circuit Protection - Fusible Links (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Circuit Protection - Fusible Links) Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp Special Tools EL-35616-200 - Test Light - Probe Kit For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test Probe Caution). A test lamp can simply and quickly test a low impedance circuit for voltage. A Digital Multimeter (DMM) should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present if the impedance is low enough, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. In other words, if there is not enough current, the test lamp will not illuminate even though voltage is present. The EL-35616-200 - kit is Micro-Pack compatible and comprised of a 12-volt light bulb with an attached pair of leads. To properly operate this tool use the following procedures. When testing for voltage: 1. Attach one lead to ground. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is voltage at the point being tested. When testing for ground: 1. Attach one lead to battery positive voltage. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where ground should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is ground at the point being tested. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5927 Testing for a Short to Voltage Testing for a Short to Voltage Special Tools EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM) For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test Probe Caution). The following procedure tests for a short to voltage in a circuit. 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Set the rotary dial of the Digital Multimeter (DMM) to the V (DC) position. 4. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. Turn ON the ignition and operate all accessories. 7. If the voltage measured is greater than 1 V, there is a short to voltage in the circuit. Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions Special Tools J-25070 - Heat Gun For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Many intermittent open or shorted circuits are affected by harness/connector movement that is caused by vibration, engine torque, bumps/rough pavement, etc. In order to duplicate the customer's concern, it may be necessary to manipulate the wiring harness if the malfunction appears to be vibration related. Manipulation of a circuit can consist of a wide variety of actions, including: * Wiggling the harness * Disconnecting a connector and reconnecting * Stressing the mechanical connection of a connector * Pulling on the harness or wire in order to identify a separation/break inside the insulation * Relocating a harness or wires All these actions should be performed with some goal in mind. For instance, with a scan tool connected, wiggling the wires may uncover a faulty input to the control module. The snapshot option would be appropriate here. Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure). Another option is, with the component commanded ON and OFF by the scan tool, move related connectors and wiring and observe the component operation. With the engine running, move related connectors and wiring while monitoring engine operation. If harness or connector movement affects the data displayed, component/system operation, or engine operation, inspect and repair the harness/connections as necessary. You may need to load the vehicle in order to duplicate the concern. This may require the use of weights, floor jacks, jackstands, frame machines, etc. In these cases you are attempting to duplicate the concern by manipulating the suspension or frame. This method is useful in finding harnesses that are too short and their connectors pull apart enough to cause a poor connection. A DMM set to Peak Min/Max mode and connected to the suspect circuit while testing can yield desirable results. Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Electrical Intermittents). Certainly, using the senses of sight, smell, and hearing while manipulating the circuit can provide good results as well. There may be instances where circuit manipulation alone will not meet the required criteria for the fault condition to appear. In such cases it may be necessary to expose the suspect circuit to other conditions while manipulating the harness. Such conditions would include high moisture conditions, along with exceptionally high or low temperatures. The following discusses how to expose the circuit to these kinds of conditions. Salt Water Spray Some compounds possess the ability to conduct electricity when dissolved in water such as ordinary salt. By mixing table salt with water in sufficient Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5928 quantities, you can enhance the conductive properties of water so that any circuit which may be sensitive to moisture will more readily fail when liberally sprayed with this mixture. Mixing 0.35L (12 oz) of water with approximately 1 tablespoon of salt will yield a salt solution of 5 percent. Fill a normal spray bottle with this mixture. This mixture is sufficient to enhance the water's own conductivity. This may cause the circuit to fail more easily when sprayed. Once the mixture is completed, spray the suspect area liberally with the solution. Then, while monitoring either a scan tool or DMM, manipulate the harness as discussed previously. High Temperature Conditions If the complaint tends to be heat related, you can simulate the condition using the J-25070 - heat gun. Using the heat gun, you can heat up the suspected area or component. Manipulate the harnesses under high temperature conditions while monitoring the scan tool or DMM to locate the fault condition. The high temperature condition may be achieved simply by test driving the vehicle at normal operating temperature. If a heat gun is unavailable, consider this option to enhance your diagnosis. This option does not allow for the same control, however. Low Temperature Conditions Depending on the nature of the fault condition, placing a fan in front of the vehicle while the vehicle is in the shade can have the desired effect. If this is unsuccessful, use local cooling treatments such as ice or a venturi type nozzle (one that provides hot or cold air). This type of tool is capable of producing air stream temperatures down to -18°C (0°F) from one end and +71°C (160°F) from the other. This is ideally suited for localized cooling needs. Once the vehicle, component, or harness has been sufficiently cooled, manipulate the harness or components in an effort to duplicate the concern. Duplicating Failure Conditions * If none of the previous tests are successful, attempt to duplicate and/or capture the failure conditions. * Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, where applicable, contains the conditions that were present when the DTC set. 1. Review and record Freeze Frame/Failure Records data. 2. Clear the DTCs using the scan tool. 3. Turn the key to OFF and wait 15 seconds. 4. Operate the vehicle under the same conditions that were noted in Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, as closely as possible. The vehicle must also be operating within the Conditions for Running the DTC. Refer to Conditions for Running the DTC in the supporting text if a DTC is being diagnosed. 5. Monitor DTC Status for the DTC being tested. The scan tool will indicate Ran, when the enabling conditions have been satisfied long enough for the DTC to run. The scan tool will also indicate whether the DTC passed or failed. * An alternate method is to drive the vehicle with the DMM connected to a suspected circuit. An abnormal reading on the DMM when the concern occurs, may help you locate the concern. Measuring Frequency Measuring Frequency Special Tools EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM) For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test Probe Caution). The following procedure determines the frequency of a signal. Note: Connecting the Digital Multimeter (DMM) to the circuit before pressing the Hz button will allow the DMM to autorange to an appropriate range. 1. Apply power to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (AC) position. 3. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5929 5. Press the Hz button on the DMM. 6. The DMM will display the frequency measured. Measuring Voltage Measuring Voltage Special Tools EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM) For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test Probe Caution). The following procedure measures the voltage at a selected point in a circuit. 1. Disconnect the electrical harness connector for the circuit being tested, if necessary. 2. Enable the circuit and/or system being tested. Use the following methods: * Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. * Turn ON the engine. * Turn ON the circuit and/or system with a scan tool in Output Controls. * Turn ON the switch for the circuit and/or system being tested. 3. Select the V (AC) or V (DC) position on the Digital Multimeter (DMM). 4. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the point of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. The DMM displays the voltage measured at that point. Measuring Voltage Drop Measuring Voltage Drop Special Tools EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM) For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test Probe Caution). The following procedure determines the difference in voltage potential between 2 points. 1. Set the rotary dial of the Digital Multimeter (DMM) to the V (DC) position. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5930 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to one point of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to the other point of the circuit. 4. Operate the circuit. 5. The DMM displays the difference in voltage between the 2 points. Probing Electrical Connectors Probing Electrical Connectors Note: Always be sure to reinstall the connector position assurance (CPA) and terminal position assurance (TPA) when reconnecting connectors or replacing terminals. Front probe Disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the mating side (front) of the connector. Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test Probe Caution). Note: When probing female 0.64 terminals, it is important to use the correct adapter. There have been some revisions to the test adapter for 0.64 terminals. The proper adapter for 0.64 terminals is the EL-35616-64B which has a gold terminal and a black wire between the base and tip. Failure to use the proper test adapter may result in damage to the terminal being tested and improper diagnosis. Note: The proper adapter for probing the terminals for fuses, relays, or diodes in an electrical center is EL-35616-35. Using any other tool or adapter may damage the terminal being tested. Refer to the following table as a guide in selecting the correct test adapter for front probing connectors: Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5931 Backprobe Note: * Backprobe connector terminals only when specifically required in diagnostic procedures. * Do not backprobe a sealed (Weather Pack(R)) connector, less than a 280 series Metri-Pack connector, a Micro-Pack connector, or a flat wire (dock and lock) connector. * Backprobing can be a source of damage to connector terminals. Use care in order to avoid deforming the terminal, either by forcing the test probe too far into the cavity or by using too large of a test probe. * After backprobing any connector, inspect for terminal damage. If terminal damage is suspected, test for proper terminal contact. Do not disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the harness side (back) of the connector. Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure Using Snapshots in Global Diagnostic System (GDS) Overview Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5932 A snapshot is a recording of what a control module on the vehicle was receiving for information while the snapshot is being made. A snapshot may be used to analyze the data during the time a vehicle condition is current. This allows you to concentrate on making the condition occur, rather than trying to view all the data in anticipation of the fault. To record a snapshot in GDS, select, Record Snapshot, from the options at the top right portion of any of the various pages that allow snapshots to be taken (e.g. Data Display, Control Functions, etc.). When you are finished recording, select, Stop Snapshot recording. The snapshot will now be available for replay. Snapshot Replay The Snapshot Replay function allows reviews of previously recorded vehicle snapshot data. This information can be used in analysis of vehicle problems and detection of trigger error conditions. The graph function can be used to compare parameters to see if a component is functioning properly. Recorded snapshots can be selected for viewing by the following three methods: * Selecting a snapshot file from the Vehicle Home Page and clicking on the Review selection. * Double clicking on the selected snapshot from the Vehicle Home Page. * Entering the Tools selection from the Menu selection and selecting Snapshot replay. Next, open the Snapshot Manager. Double click on the snapshot file you wish to view or click on the Load Snapshot selection and select a snapshot file. Regardless of selection method, a File Loaded pop-up window will be displayed from the Snapshot Replay screen. Select OK from the pop-up window. Snapshot Play Functions There are several snapshot play functions that are used to replay recorded snapshots * The Play function is used to play the snapshot forward by clicking on this selection. A marker will move across the screen when this selection is used. All selections in this area turn grey when they are active. * The Pause function is used to pause play of the snapshot. When this selection is clicked a second time the snapshot will start playing where it left off. * The Stop function is used to stop playing the snapshot. The snapshot will start from the beginning, if Play is selected after using the Stop function. Time Control Time control is used to control the snapshot replay. This function allows selection of a specific time frame, display of different views, and control of display speed. The following functions can be selected directly under Time Control. * The Bookmark selection allows you to add a specific comment in the current display and return to this point in the future. When this option is selected, a pop-up window is displayed. Enter a bookmark name and select OK. * The Note Pad can be selected to add comments to the snapshot replay file at the current point of time. When this option is selected, a pop-up window is displayed. Enter a comment for the snapshot file and select OK. * The Load Snapshot (blue folder) opens a snapshot file and makes it ready for further analysis. This function is also available by clicking on an available snapshot file from the Snapshot Manager. * The Down Arrow displays all Time Control options when selected. Individual options can also be selected by clicking on the item you want. * The Snapshot Display Speed can be controlled by selecting this option. Slow speeds of 1/8X, 1/4X, and 1/2X can be selected. The real time speed can also be selected at 1. Faster speeds of 2X, 4X, and 8X can also be obtained by using this selection. View Selections Each View Selection provides a different way of displaying vehicle data for analysis. The following functions can be selected under Available Views: Note: The parameter name will be shown in the original language used for capture if no translation is available for the name. * Parameter List View - Displays incoming information from the snapshot file. The current value of the parameters is displayed on the screen. * Log View - Contains all the information from the snapshot file. All parameter values are listed in the order they were recorded. Specific parameters can be added or removed from a watchlist by clicking on the appropriate item. * State View - Shows the values of all parameters in a specific time frame. These values can be used for comparison with the trigger view. * Trigger View - Displays all system and user defined triggers. This function can be used when there is a combination of factors involved in a diagnostic problem. When a Trigger condition is met a caution triangle will be displayed on the screen. Triggers: * Load Triggers - Allows you to load a file containing trigger definitions. * Save Triggers - Allows you to save the trigger to your computer's hard drive. * Remove Trigger - Allows you to remove the current trigger. It will no longer be present. * Edit Trigger - Displays a pop-up window where you can modify the limits and parameters contained within a trigger. * Adds Trigger - Displays a pop-up window to configure a trigger. * DTC View - After the Play function is selected and this option is selected this function opens the list of recorded DTCs. * Line Graph View - Displays data that can be visualized against the time-axis. From this view, specific parameters can be selected for graphing by Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5933 checking the box under Selected. At the bottom of the graph there are four functions Zoom In (increase size), Zoom Out (decrease size), Bookmarks, and Pause Scrolling. Each of these functions can be accessed by clicking on them. Testing for Continuity Testing for Continuity Special Tools EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM) For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test Probe Caution). The following procedures verify good continuity in a circuit. With a Digital Multimeter (DMM) 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the Ohms position. 2. Disconnect the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 3. Disconnect the load. 4. Press the MIN MAX button on the DMM. 5. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 6. Connect the other lead of the DMM to the other end of the circuit. 7. If the DMM displays low or no resistance, the circuit has good continuity. With a Test Lamp Note: Only use the test lamp procedure on low impedance power and ground circuits. 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect one lead of the test lamp to one end of the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 5. Connect the other end of the circuit to ground. 6. If the test lamp illuminates (full intensity), then the circuit has good continuity. Testing for Electrical Intermittents Testing for Electrical Intermittents Special Tools EL-39200 Digital Multimeter For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Perform the following procedures while wiggling the harness from side to side. Continue this at convenient points (about 6 inches apart) while watching the test equipment. * Testing for Short to Ground (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Short to Ground) * Testing for Continuity (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Continuity) * Testing for a Short to Voltage (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for a Short to Voltage) If the fault is not identified, perform the procedure below using the MIN MAX feature on the EL-39200 DMM. This feature allows you to manipulate the circuit without having to watch the EL-39200. The EL-39200 will generate an audible tone when a change is detected. Note: The EL-39200 must be used in order to perform the following procedure since the EL-39200 can monitor current, resistance or voltage while recording the minimum (MIN), and maximum (MAX) values measured. 1. Connect the EL-39200 to both sides of a suspected connector (still connected), or from one end of a suspected circuit to the other. Refer to Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5934 Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter) for information on connecting the EL-39200 to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the EL-39200 to the V (AC) or V (DC) position. 3. Press the range button of the EL-39200 in order to select the desired voltage range. 4. Press the MIN MAX button of the EL-39200. The EL-39200 displays 100 ms RECORD and emits an audible tone (beep). Note: The 100 ms RECORD mode is the length of time an input must stay at a new value in order to record the full change. 5. Simulate the condition that is potentially causing the intermittent connection, either by wiggling the connections or the wiring, test driving, or performing other operations. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions). 6. Listen for the audible Min Max Alert which indicates that a new minimum or maximum value has been recorded. 7. Press the MIN MAX button once in order to display the MAX value and note the value. 8. Press the MIN MAX button again in order to display the MIN value and note the value. 9. Determine the difference between the MIN and MAX values. * If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is 1 V or greater an intermittent open or high resistance condition exists. Repair the condition as necessary. * If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is less than 1 V, an intermittent open or high resistance condition does not exist. Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections Special Tools EL-35616 Terminal Test Probe Kit For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). When the condition is not currently present, but is indicated in DTC history, the cause may be intermittent. An intermittent may also be the cause when there is a customer complaint, but the symptom cannot be duplicated. Refer to the Symptom Table of the system that is suspect of causing the condition before trying to locate an intermittent condition. Most intermittent conditions are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. Inspect for the following items: * Wiring broken inside the insulation * Poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector * Poor terminal to wire connection-Some conditions which fall under this description are poor crimps, poor solder joints, crimping over the wire insulation rather than the wire itself, and corrosion in the wire to terminal contact area, etc. * Pierced or damaged insulation can allow moisture to enter the wiring causing corrosion. The conductor can corrode inside the insulation, with little visible evidence. Look for swollen and stiff sections of wire in the suspect circuits. * Wiring which has been pinched, cut, or its insulation rubbed through may cause an intermittent open or short as the bare area touches other wiring or parts of the vehicle. * Wiring that comes in contact with hot or exhaust components * Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions) in order to duplicate the conditions required, in order to verify the customer concern. * Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Electrical Intermittents) for test procedures to detect intermittent open, high resistance, short to ground, and short to voltage conditions. * Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure) for advanced intermittent diagnosis and Vehicle Data Recorder operation. Testing for Terminal Fretting Some intermittent conditions can be caused by wire terminal fretting corrosion. Fretting corrosion is a build-up of insulating, oxidized wear debris that can form when there is a small motion between electrical contacts. The oxidized wear debris can pile up enough at the electrical contact spots that the electrical resistance across the connection increases. Movement between the contacting surfaces as small as 10 to 100 microns can cause fretting. To put this in perspective, a sheet of paper is about 100 microns thick, so fretting motion is small and hard to see. Vibration and thermal expansion/contraction are the main sources that create fretting motion. Since vehicles vibrate and can experience large temperature swings, they are a good source for fretting motion. Tin, copper, nickel, and iron surfaces are all susceptible to fretting corrosion. Fretting corrosion can be difficult to see but it looks like small, dark smudges on the terminals contact surface. To correct a fretting condition disconnect the suspect connector and add Nyogel lubricant 760G (dielectric grease) to both sides of the connector Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5935 terminals. Then reconnect the connector and wipe away any excess lubricant. This will correct the additional terminal contact resistance due to the terminal fretting corrosion. Testing for Proper Terminal Contact It is important to test terminal contact at the component and any inline connectors before replacing a suspect component. Mating terminals must be inspected to ensure good terminal contact. A poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector may be the result of contamination or deformation. Contamination may be caused by the connector halves being improperly connected. A missing or damaged connector seal, damage to the connector itself, or exposing the terminals to moisture and dirt can also cause contamination. Contamination, usually in the underhood or underbody connectors, leads to terminal corrosion, causing an open circuit or intermittently open circuit. Deformation is caused by probing the mating side of a connector terminal without the proper adapter. Always use the EL-35616 when probing connectors. Other causes of terminal deformation are improperly joining the connector halves, or repeatedly separating and joining the connector halves. Deformation, usually to the female terminal contact tang, can result in poor terminal contact causing an open or intermittently open circuit. Testing for Proper Terminal Contact in Bussed Electrical Centers It is very important to use the correct test adapter when testing for proper terminal contact of fuses and relays in a bussed electrical center. Use EL-35616-35 to test for proper terminal contact. Failure to use EL-35616-35 can result in improper diagnosis of the bussed electrical center. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact: 1. Separate the connector halves. 2. Visually inspect the connector halves for contamination. Contamination may result in a white or green build-up within the connector body or between terminals. This causes high terminal resistance, intermittent contact, or an open circuit. An underhood or underbody connector that shows signs of contamination should be replaced in its entirety: terminals, seals, and connector body. 3. Using an equivalent male terminal / terminated lead, verify that the retention force is significantly different between a known good terminal and the suspect terminal. Replace the female terminal in question. Flat Wire (Dock and Lock) Connectors There are no serviceable parts for flat wire (dock and lock) connectors on the harness side or the component side. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact: 1. Remove the component in question. 2. Visually inspect each side of the connector for signs of contamination. Avoid touching either side of the connector as oil from your skin may be a source of contamination as well. 3. Visually inspect the terminal bearing surfaces of the flat wire circuits for splits, cracks, or other imperfections that could cause poor terminal contact. Visually inspect the component side connector to ensure that all of the terminals are uniform and free of damage or deformation. 4. Insert the appropriate adapter from the on the flat wire harness connector in order to test the circuit in question. Control Module/Component Voltage and Grounds Poor voltage or ground connections can cause widely varying symptoms. * Test all control module voltage supply circuits. Many vehicles have multiple circuits supplying voltage to a control module. Other components in the system may have separate voltage supply circuits that may also need to be tested. Inspect connections at the module/component connectors, fuses, and any intermediate connections between the voltage source and the module/component. A test lamp or a DMM may indicate that voltage is present, but neither tests the ability of the circuit to carry sufficient current. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. Refer to Circuit Testing (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Circuit Testing) and Power Distribution Schematics (See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Starting and Charging/Power and Ground Distribution/System Diagram/Power Distribution Schematics). * Test all control module ground and system ground circuits. The control module may have multiple ground circuits. Other components in the system may have separate grounds that may also need to be tested. Inspect grounds for clean and tight connections at the grounding point. Inspect the connections at the component and in splice packs, where applicable. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. Refer to Circuit Testing (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Circuit Testing) and Ground Distribution Schematics (See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Starting and Charging/Power and Ground Distribution/System Diagram/Ground Distribution Schematics). Temperature Sensitivity * An intermittent condition may occur when a component/connection reaches normal operating temperature. The condition may occur only when the component/connection is cold, or only when the component/connection is hot. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5936 * Freeze Frame, Failure Records, Snapshot, or Vehicle Data Recorder data may help with this type of intermittent condition, where applicable. * If the intermittent is related to heat, review the data for a relationship with the following: - High ambient temperatures - Underhood/engine generated heat - Circuit generated heat due to a poor connection, or high electrical load - Higher than normal load conditions, towing, etc. * If the intermittent is related to cold, review the data for the following: - Low ambient temperatures-In extremely low temperatures, ice may form in a connection or component. Inspect for water intrusion. - The condition only occurs on a cold start. - The condition goes away when the vehicle warms up. * Information from the customer may help to determine if the trouble follows a pattern that is temperature related. * If temperature is suspected of causing an intermittent fault condition, attempt to duplicate the condition. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions) in order to duplicate the conditions required. Electromagnetic Interference and Electrical Noise Some electrical components/circuits are sensitive to electromagnetic interference or other types of electrical noise. Inspect for the following conditions: * A misrouted harness that is too close to high voltage/high current devices such as secondary ignition components, motors, generator etc.-These components may induce electrical noise on a circuit that could interfere with normal circuit operation. * Electrical system interference caused by a malfunctioning relay, or a control module driven solenoid or switch-These conditions can cause a sharp electrical surge. Normally, the condition will occur when the malfunctioning component is operating. * Improper installation of non-factory or aftermarket add on accessories such as lights, 2-way radios, amplifiers, electric motors, remote starters, alarm systems, cell phones, etc.-These accessories may lead to interference while in use, but do not fail when the accessories are not in use. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Checking Aftermarket Accessories). * Test for an open diode across the A/C compressor clutch and for other open diodes. Some relays may contain a clamping diode. * The generator may be allowing AC noise into the electrical system. Incorrect Control Module * There are only a few situations where reprogramming a control module is appropriate: - A new service control module is installed. - A control module from another vehicle is installed. - Revised software/calibration files have been released for this vehicle. Note: DO NOT re-program the control module with the SAME software/calibration files that are already present in the control module. This is not an effective repair for any type of concern. * Verify that the control module contains the correct software/calibration. If incorrect programming is found, reprogram the control module with the most current software/calibration. Refer to Control Module References (See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning) for replacement, setup, and programming. Testing for Short to Ground Testing for Short to Ground Special Tools * EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM) * EL 35616-200 - Test Light-Probe Kit For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test Probe Caution). The following procedures test for a short to ground in a circuit. With a Digital Multimeter (DMM) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5937 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the Ohms position. 4. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the other lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. If the DMM does NOT display infinite resistance (OL), there is a short to ground in the circuit. With a Test Lamp 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect one lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to one end of the circuit to be tested. 5. If the test lamp illuminates, there is a short to ground in the circuit. Fuse Powering Several Loads 1. Review the system schematic and locate the fuse that is open. 2. Open the first connector or switch leading from the fuse to each load. 3. Connect a DMM across the fuse terminals (be sure that the fuse is powered). * When the DMM displays voltage the short is in the wiring leading to the first connector or switch. * If the DMM does not display voltage refer to the next step. 4. Close each connector or switch until the DMM displays voltage in order to find which circuit is shorted. Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter Special Tools EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM) For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test Probe Caution). Digital Multimeter (DMM) Basic Requirements Service information is validated using digital multimeters that meet or exceed the following requirements. Using a multimeter that does not meet these basic requirements may give inaccurate readings which could lead to an incorrect diagnosis. Display and Settings 1. Four digits displayed 2. Voltage, amperage, resistance, frequency, diode test settings, and min-max function 3. Display positive and negative values Voltage 1. Have at least 10 Mohm input impedance 2. Test a DC voltage range of 0.1-1000 V. 3. Test an AC voltage range of 0.1-1000 V. Amperage 1. Test a DC amperage range of 0.1µA-10 A. 2. Test an AC amperage range of 0.1µA-10 A. Resistance Test a resistance range of 0.1 ohm-40 Mohm and displays infinite for a value greater than 40 Mohm (O.L. (Over-load)) Frequency Test for a frequency range of 0.5 HZ-199 K HZ Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5938 Diode Test 1. Apply at least 1 mA when performing the diode bias test 2. Display the break over voltage drop (0-3 V) of a forward biased diode 3. Display infinite (O.L. (Over-load)) when a diode is reverse biased Min-Max Readings 1. Can update at a 1 ms sample rate 2. Saves and displays minimum and maximum values Note: Circuits which include any solid state control modules, such as the engine control module (ECM), should only be tested with a 10 MOhms or higher impedance digital multimeter such as the EL-39200. The EL-39200 instruction manual is a good source of information and should be read thoroughly upon receipt of the DMM as well as kept on hand for future reference. A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present if the impedance is low enough, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. In other words, if there is not enough current, the test lamp will not illuminate even though voltage is present. The ohmmeter function on a DMM shows how much resistance exists between 2 points along a circuit. Low resistance in a circuit means good continuity. Note: Disconnect the power feed from the suspect circuit when measuring resistance with a DMM. This prevents incorrect readings. DMMs apply such a small voltage to measure resistance that the presence of voltages can upset a resistance reading. Diodes and solid state components in a circuit can cause a DMM to display a false reading. To find out if a component is affecting a measurement take a reading once, then reverse the leads and take a second reading. If the readings differ the solid state component is affecting the measurement. Following are examples of the various methods of connecting the DMM to the circuit to be tested: * Probe both ends of the connector and either hold the leads in place while manipulating the connector or tape the leads to the harness for continuous monitoring while you perform other operations or test driving. Refer to Probing Electrical Connectors (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Probing Electrical Connectors). * Disconnect the harness at both ends of the suspected circuit where it connects either to a component or to other harnesses. * If the system that is being diagnosed has a specified pinout or breakout box, it may be used in order to simplify connecting the DMM to the circuit or for testing multiple circuits quickly. Using Connector Test Adapters Using Connector Test Adapters Special Tools EL 35616 - Terminal Test Probe Kit For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Caution: Do not insert test equipment probes (DMM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the EL-38125-580 GM Approved Terminal Release Tool Kit in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the EL-38125-580 GM Approved Terminal Release Tool Kit , ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the EL-38125-580 GM Approved Terminal Release Tool Kit label on the inside of the EL-38125-580 GM Approved Terminal Release Tool Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Using Fused Jumper Wires Using Fused Jumper Wires Special Tools J 36169-A Fused Jumper Wire Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5939 Note: A fused jumper may not protect solid state components from being damaged. The J 36169-A includes small clamp connectors that provide adaptation to most connectors without damage. This fused jumper wire is supplied with a 20-A fuse which may not be suitable for some circuits. Do not use a fuse with a higher rating than the fuse that protects the circuit being tested. AFL/EPC Connectors AFL/EPC Connectors Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. 1. For connectors with a bolt in the dress cover, turn the bolt counterclockwise to remove the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5940 2. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the top of the wire dress cover. Slide the CPA forward. 3. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5941 View showing depressing of the lever lock release tab. View of connector in released position. 4. Disconnect the connector from the component. 5. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the dress cover. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs and remove the dress cover. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5942 6. Release the rear lower half of the wiredress cover. 7. Release the tabs that are holding the wiredress cover to the connector body. 8. Remove the nose piece by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the slots on both ends of the connector body. Gently pry the nose piece out of the connector. J 38125-216 can also be used to remove the nose piece. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5943 9. Use the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by lifting the terminal retaining tabs on the inside of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Bosch Connectors (BSK) Bosch Connectors (BSK) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5944 Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 3. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 4. Insert the J 38125-561 tool into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 5. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Bosch Connectors (ECM) Bosch Connectors (ECM) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5945 1. Locate the assist lever on the top of the connector. Move the assist lever to the forward position. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5946 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the connector. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the locking tabs and remove the dress cover. 4. The terminal positive assurance (TPA) is located in the front of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5947 5. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove TPA from the connector. 6. Use the J 38125-213 or the J 38125-556 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5948 Note: Ensure that the dress cover and connector body are both in the released position before reassembling. Failure to do so may cause damage to the connector and component. Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Bosch Connectors (0.64) Bosch Connectors (0.64) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While pressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock until the lever is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Pull the rubber boot that covers the wires back to expose the end of the connector dress cover. 4. Place the connector locking lever in the center of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5949 5. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs that are on the wire end of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover and connector body and pry up. 6. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs located on the opposite side of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover at the connector end and pry up. 7. Remove the dress cover. 8. Cut the tie wrap on the wire bundle. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5950 9. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting a small flat-bladed tool into the small slot in the end of the slider and pushing on the TPA until it comes out of the connector. When the TPA exits the opposite side of the connector, gasp the TPA and pull it completely out of the connector. 10. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 11. Insert the J 38125-560 into the 2 triangular cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 12. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Terminal Replacement Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5951 1. Prior to installation the terminal must be aligned so the (1) coding lugs align with the (2) coding grooves on the connector. 2. Once the terminal is aligned, slide the terminal into the cavity until the retainer has engaged in the cavity of the connector. 3. Slide the TPA in the connector body and seat it using a small flat bladed tool. The TPA is seated when it is flush with the contact housing. 4. Secure the wires to the connector body using a tie wrap and replace the dress cover and grommet. Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Pull out the slider on the connector position assurance (CPA) until it is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5952 5. Insert the J 38125-557 into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Connector Position Assurance Locks Connector Position Assurance Locks The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of the connector. CPAs are used in various connectors throughout the vehicle. CPAs are also used in all SIR system electrical connectors. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals, of the connector. Connector Repairs Connector Repairs Connector Repairs contains a list of all connector repairs. The connector repairs are listed by the connector manufacturer and then by connector type. If the technician cannot identify the manufacturer of the connector, refer to Identifying Connectors below. Knowing the connector manufacturer will assist in finding the correct connector repair from the following list: * Connector Position Assurance Locks (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Connector Position Assurance Locks) * Terminal Position Assurance Locks (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Terminal Position Assurance Locks) * AFL/EPC Connectors (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/AFL/EPC Connectors) * Bosch Connectors (BSK) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Bosch Connectors (BSK))Bosch Connectors (0.64) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Bosch Connectors (0.64))Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT))Bosch Connectors (ECM) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Bosch Connectors (ECM)) * Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack))Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Push to Seat))Delphi Connectors Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5953 (Pull To Seat) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Pull to Seat))Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W))Delphi Connectors (Micro.64) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Micro .64))Delphi Connectors (12-Way) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (12-Way))Delphi Connectors (Steering Gear) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Steering Gear)) * FCI Connectors (Lever Lock) (See: General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/FCI Connectors (Lever Lock))FCI Connectors (SIR) (See: General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/FCI (SIR)) * FEP Connectors (Steering Gear) (See: General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/FEP Connectors (Steering Gear)) * JST Connectors (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/JST Connectors) * Kostal Connectors (Glow Plug Control Module) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Kostal Connectors (Glow Plug Control Module))Kostal Connectors (Transmission) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Kostal Connectors (Transmission)) * Molex Connectors (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Molex Connectors) * Sumitomo Connectors (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Sumitomo Connectors) * Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way))Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor))Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap))Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way))Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module)) * Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Yazaki Connectors (2-Way))Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Yazaki Connectors (16-Way)) * Repairing Connector Terminals (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Repairing Connector Terminals) Connector Anatomy 1 - Connector Positive Assurance (CPA) 2 - Assist Lever 3 - Wiredress Cover 4 - Seal Strain/Relief Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5954 5 - Slide Left Hand 6 - Slide Right Hand 7 - Terminal Positive Assurance (TPA) 8 - Terminal Positive Assurance (TPA) 9 - Connector Seal 10 - Connector Housing 11 - Inner Connector Identifying Connectors Knowing the connector manufacturer is helpful when trying to locating the correct connector repair procedure. There are many different connector designs used on GM vehicles and it is sometimes difficult to identify the connector manufacturer. The information in this document should help with the identification of connector manufactures. The following connector manufacturers make most of the connectors found in GM vehicles: * AFL/EPC (Alcoa Fujikura Ltd./Engineered Plastics Components) * Bosch * Delphi * FCI (Framatome Connectors International) * JAE (Japan Aviation Electronics) * JST (Japan Solderless Terminals) * Kostel * Molex * Sumitomo * Tyco/AMP * Yazaki Identifying the manufacturer of a connector is often difficult. When trying to determine the manufacturer of a connector, look for specific identifying marks that are unique to that connector supplier. Most of these identify marks are hard to find or see. Check the connector carefully and refer to the information below for pictures and descriptions of connector identification markings. * Most of AFLs connectors have EPC on their connector body. Some of the smaller connectors will not have any markings on them. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5955 * In some cases Bosch will actually be printed on the connector. If Bosch does not appear on the connector, look for the Bosch logo. The Bosch logo is a circle with a blunted arrow inside. This logo can appear anywhere on the connector and is often very small. * In some cases Delphi will actually be printed on the connector. If Delphi is not printed on the connector, look for PED. In both cases there is no specific orientation for Delphi or PED and they can appear anywhere on the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5956 * FCI connectors may have the FCI logo on their connectors. The logo is the letters FCI with an "A" above it. * JAE connector have JAE in small letters on their connectors. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5957 * JST connectors have JST in small letters on their connectors, similar to that above. The location of the logo will vary with the connector size and style. * Kostel has an "LK" with a circle around it. These connector are usually used as a transmissions connection. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5958 * Most Molex connectors will have the Molex logo on the dresscover of the connector. In some cases the connectors may have MX followed by another letter. The third letter indicates where the connector was made. A connector with MXD is a Molex connector made in Detroit. Sumitomo has a unique symbol on their connector and possibly a part number. The symbol is similar to that of a diamond lying on its side, similar to that shown. The logo could appear anywhere but the most common place is at the wire side of the housing. * Tyco/AMP has many different and unique connector designs. Some may or may not have identifiable marks on them. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5959 * Yazaki has a wedge or arrow shape, similar to that shown. Delphi Connectors (Push to Seat) Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Follow the steps below in order to repair push to seat connectors. 1. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device, the connector position assurance (CPA) device, and/or the secondary lock. 2. Separate the connector halves (1). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5960 3. Use the proper pick or removal tool (1) in order to release the terminal. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 4. Gently pull the cable and the terminal (2) out of the back of the connector. 5. Re-form the locking device if you are going to reuse the terminal (1). 6. To repair the terminal, refer to Terminal Repair. Terminal Repair 1. Slip the cable seal away from the terminal. 2. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 3. Slip a new cable seal onto the wire. 4. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 5. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 6. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. 7. Slide the cable seal toward the terminal. 8. Crimp the cable seal and the insulation. 9. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply grease to the connector. Reinstalling Terminal 1. In order to reuse a terminal or lead assembly, refer to Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Wiring Repairs). 2. Ensure that the cable seal is kept on the terminal side of the splice. 3. Insert the lead from the back until it catches. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Terminated Lead Repair 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Find the appropriate terminated lead. 3. Use the appropriate splice sleeves depending on the gauge size. 4. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves). Delphi Connectors (Pull to Seat) Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) Special Tools Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5961 J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal If the terminal is visibly damaged or is suspected of having a faulty connection, the terminal should be replaced. Follow the steps below in order to repair pull-to-seat connectors: 1. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) device and/or the secondary lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component or separate the connectors for in-line connectors. 3. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device. 4. Insert the proper pick or removal tool into the front of the connector body. Note: On connectors with more than one terminal the service loop may not be large enough to remove the terminal and crimp on a new one. If the terminal wire does not have a large enough service loop for removal, cut the wire 5 cm (2 in) behind the connector before removal. 5. Grasp the wire at the back of the connector body and gently push the terminal out the front of the connector body. Terminal Repair 1. If the wire needed to be cut in order to remove the terminal, gently push a small length of the same size wire through the back of the connector cavity until there is enough wire exposed in order to crimp on a new terminal. If the wire was not cut, cut the existing wire as close to the old terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 4. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. Terminal Installation 1. Align the terminal and pull the wire from the back of the connector in order to seat the terminal. 2. If necessary, cut the new wire to proper length and splice with existing circuit. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves). 3. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply dielectric grease to the connector. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Micro .64) Delphi Connectors (Micro.64) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5962 Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro.64 connectors. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. The lever lock may be located on the top or sides of the wire dress cover. View of a typical Micro 64 connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5963 Depress the lock and pull the lever over and past the lock. View of the connector when released from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5964 View of another type of Micro 64 connector. Depress the locks that are located on both sides of the wiredress cover and pull the lever over and past the locks. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5965 View of the connector when released from the component. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the front of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool push down on one of the locking tabs and pull the cover up until the dress cover releases. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. 4. Once the front 2 locks are unlocked, lift the front of the dress cover and pull it forward. Note: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 5. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the small slot on the TPA and pushing down until the TPA releases. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5966 Note: Be careful not to angle or rock the J 38125-21 tool when inserting it into the connector or the tool may break. 6. Insert the J 38125-21 tool into the round canal between the terminals cavities at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Follow the steps below in order to repair Micro 64 connector terminals. The Micro 64 connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-64 (M jaw) was developed to crimp Micro 64 terminals. The J 38125-64 crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. The J 38125-64 crimping tool is also designed to crimp both the wire and the insulation at the same time. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro 64 terminals. Note: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gauge wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 1. Cut the wire as close to the damaged terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5967 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert terminal into the appropriate terminal holder until it hits bottom and stops. The correct terminal holder is determined by the wire size. Also ensure that the terminals wings are pointing towards the former on the tool and the release locator. 5. Insert the stripped cable into the terminal. Insulation should be visible on both sides of the terminal insulation wings. 6. Compress the handles until the ratchet automatically releases. 7. Place the terminal into the appropriate cavity and assemble the connector. Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5968 Terminal Removal Procedure There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W connectors. These connectors are very similar but use different terminals and have some minor physical differences also. The first connector design of the Micro-Pack 100W (1) has a white connector interface that holds the terminals. The second design of the Micro-Pack 100W (2) has a gray interface to hold the terminals. Also, the first design has terminal cavities that are further apart (3 mm centerline) and offset from the other row of terminal cavities in the connector. The second design has terminals cavities that are closer together (2.54 mm centerline) and aligned vertically. One other way to identify the second design is the thin strip of material that runs along the outside of the cavities. Note: There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W terminals which are very similar. Ensure that you have the correct terminal before crimping the new terminal to the wire. The first design connector uses the longer terminal (1) that has a raised area in front of the recess in the terminal. The second design connector uses the shorter terminal without the raised area. Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro-Pack 100W connectors. Some Micro-Pack 100W connector disassembly procedures will vary. Use this procedure as a guide. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5969 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Locate the nose piece locking tabs that are positioned on the side of the connector nose piece. The connector nose piece acts as a terminal positive assurance (TPA) and may be referred to as such. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to push in one of the locking tabs while gently pulling on the same side of the nose piece. 4. Repeat the procedure for the other locking tab and remove the nose piece. 5. Remove the wire dress cover. The following is a general procedure for wire dress cover removal. Use this procedure as a guide, some dress cover removal procedures may vary. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5970 6. Use fingers to squeeze the 2 locking legs of the cover. 7. Apply pressure and gently rock the cover until one locking leg is unseated. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5971 8. Continue to apply pressure and rock the cover until the second locking leg is unseated. Repeat procedure for the other side of the dress cover and remove the cover. 9. Use J 38125-12A to gently lift the terminal retaining tab while gently pulling the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. If the terminal is severely bent or damaged, it may be possible on some connectors to push the wire out of the front of the connector instead of pulling it through. This will prevent damage to the internal seals of the connector. Once the terminal is pushed out of the connector, cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible and pull the wire through the connector. Terminal Repair Procedure The Micro-Pack 100W connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool was developed to crimp Micro-Pack 100W terminals. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro-Pack 100 terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5972 1. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. Note: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gauge wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert the terminal into the crimp tool until the core wings are flush with the anvil on the crimp tool. Be sure that the wings are pointed toward the crimp tool former and release the spring locator. The locator will hold the terminal in place. Inspect the alignment of the terminal wings with the crimp tool former. If the terminal wings are wider than the crimp tool former, remove the terminal and bend the terminal wings in slightly. 5. Place stripped wire into terminal. 6. Crimp the new terminal to the wire. If a jam occurs, press the emergency release to open applicator. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5973 Terminal Replacement Procedure After the terminal is crimped to the wire perform the following procedure in order to replace Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the Terminal Removal Procedure. Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The following is the proper procedure for the repair of Weather Pack(R) Connectors. 1. Separate the connector halves (1). 2. Open the secondary lock. A secondary lock aids in terminal retention and is usually molded to the connector (1). 3. Grasp the wire and push the terminal to the forward most position. Hold the wire in this position. 4. Insert the Weather Pack(R) terminal removal tool J 38125-10A into the front (mating end) of the connector cavity until it rests on the cavity shoulder (1). 5. Gently pull on the wire to remove the terminal through the back of the connector (2). Note: Never use force to remove a terminal from a connector. 6. Inspect the terminal and connector for damage. Repair as necessary. Refer to Repairing Connector Terminals (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Repairing Connector Terminals). 7. Reform the lock tang (2) and reset terminal in connector body. 8. Close secondary locks and join connector halves. 9. Verify that circuit is complete and working satisfactorily. 10. Perform system check. Delphi Connectors (12-Way) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5974 Delphi Connectors (12-Way) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) and slide the lever lock away from the connector body. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs on the dress cover of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool release all of the locking tabs. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5975 4. Release the lower wire dress cover locking tab. 5. Release the upper wire dress cover locking tab. 6. Once the locks are unlocked, lift the dress cover off. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5976 Note: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 7. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the locking tabs on both sides of the TPA. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. 8. Remove the nose piece by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the locking tabs on both sides of the nose piece. Gently pry the nose piece out of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5977 9. Insert the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Delphi Connectors (Steering Gear) Delphi Connectors (Steering Gear) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5978 Removal Procedure 1. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the locking tab on the connector. 2. Push down the locking tab to release the connector. The small flat-bladed tool may need to be pushed down and angled back slightly to depress the locking tab. Pull on the connector body while releasing the locking tab to disconnect the connector. FCI Connectors (Lever Lock) FCI Connectors (Lever Lock) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5979 Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. 1. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. 2. The release tab is located on the top of the wiredress cover. 3. View of connector in released position. 4. Disconnect the connector from the component. 5. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the dress cover. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs and remove the dress cover. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5980 6. Use a small flat-blade tool to slide the terminal position assurance (TPA) up one notch on both ends of the connector. The TPA is located underneath the wire dress cover. For the larger terminals insert the J 38125-556 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. For the smaller terminals insert the J 38125-560 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5981 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. FCI (SIR) FCI Connectors (SIR) Removal Procedure Note: The orange CPA must be released first to disconnect or to connect the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5982 1. Lift the orange CPA vertically (avoid lifting on an angle to the connector) approximately 4 mm to release the connector. Use a small flat-bladed tool to help release the orange CPA. The orange CPA can also be released manually without any tools. 2. Grab the connector on both sides and lift the connector vertically to disconnect the connector. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5983 1. Lift the orange CPA vertically approximately 4 mm before installing the connector. Use a small flat-bladed tool to help release the orange CPA. The orange CPA can also be released manually without any tools. 2. Line up the connector key tabs with the initiator key slots. Grab the connector on both sides and push the connector down into the initiator connector sub assembly until fully seated. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5984 3. After the connector is fully seated, push down the orange CPA with your thumb. Push down until the orange CPA is touching the yellow cover on the connector. FEP Connectors (Steering Gear) FEP Connectors (Steering Gear) Removal Procedure 1. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the locking tab on the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5985 2. Push down the locking tab to release the connector. The small flat-bladed tool may need to be pushed down and angled back slightly to depress the locking tab. Pull on the connector body while releasing the locking tab to disconnect the connector. JST Connectors JST Connectors Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. While depressing the lock, remove the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5986 2. Locate the two indents of the terminal position assurance (TPA) located on the bottom of the connector body. Note: The TPA cannot be removed from the connector while there are terminals present in the connector body. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to very carefully raise the TPA on both sides of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5987 4. View of the TPA when removed from the connector body. 5. Use the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the left side of the terminal release cavity as shown in the graphic. Use the tool to move the terminal release to the right with a gentle prying motion. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Kostal Connectors (Glow Plug Control Module) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5988 Kostal Connectors (Glow Plug Control Module) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure View of typical connector. View of connector in released position. 1. Locate the assist lever at the back of the connector. Move the assist lever to the rear position. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5989 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove the dress cover. 4. Slide the dress cover forward and off of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5990 5. The terminal positive assurance (TPA) is located in the front and rear of the connector. Note: The front TPA cannot be removed from the connector. Only move it to the preset position. 6. Use a small flat-blade tool to move the front TPA to the preset position, outboard approximately 0.125 in. (3 mm). 7. Use a small flat-blade tool to completely remove the rear TPA from the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5991 8. Use the J 38125-24 or the J 38125-560 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 9. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Kostal Connectors (Transmission) Kostal Connectors (Transmission) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5992 1. While depressing the lock, twist and remove the connector from the component. 2. Locate the terminal position assurance (TPA). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5993 Note: The TPA cannot be removed from the connector while there are terminals present in the connector body. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to push the TPA until it bottoms out. 4. Use the J 38125-28 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal cavity as shown in the graphic. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 5. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Terminal Replacement Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5994 After the terminal is crimped to the wire, perform the following procedure in order to replace the terminal. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. Locate the terminal position assurance (TPA). 4. Use a small flat-blade tool to push the TPA until it bottoms out. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5995 5. Ensure the TPA is fully seated. The TPA should be centered and flush with the connector body when viewed. Molex Connectors Molex Connectors Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the top of the wire dress cover. Slide the CPA forward. 2. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5996 3. The lever should be in the full forward position. 4. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5997 5. Remove the dress cover by using a flat bladed tool to release the dress cover locking tabs and lift up on the dress cover. 6. Cut the tie wrap that holds the wires to the connector body. 7. Use a small flat-blade tool to pry one side of the nose piece up to the pre-stage position. When the nose piece is in the pre-staged position, the nose piece will be raised above the connector body the length of the step in the nose piece. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5998 8. Use a small flat-blade tool to pry the other side of the piece to the pre-stage position. If the nose piece is higher than the first step in the nose piece, gently push down on the nose piece until it meets with resistance from the connector body, you should feel the nose piece click into position. 9. Insert the J 38125-213 into the small terminal release hole on the nose piece and gently pull on the back of the wire. 10. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Refer to the terminal crimping procedure in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit. Terminal Replacement Procedure After the terminal is crimped to the wire, perform the following procedure in order to replace the terminal. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5999 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the connector disassembly procedure. Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the connector body and pull the CPA out. The CPA is on the wire harness side of connector. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Use a small flat-bladed tool to gently pry off the dress cover by inserting the tool under the cover opposite the harness side and prying up. 4. Remove the cover. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6000 5. Using a small flat-bladed tool, push on the side of the nose piece retainer while pushing the nose piece forward with your thumb. This will release the terminal position assurance (TPA). 6. Insert the J 38125-12A into the corresponding terminal release cavity. The release cavities are the 2 center rows of cavities on one half of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6001 7. Pressing the J 38125-12A tool in the release cavity of the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and crimper in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. Slide the lever lock away from the connector body. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs on the dress cover of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool release all of the locking tabs. 4. Once the locks are unlocked, lift the dress cover off. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6002 Note: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 5. Release the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the blue locking tabs on both ends of the connector. Gently slide the TPA up to the released position on both ends. 6. For the larger terminals insert the J 38125-13A tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. For the smaller terminals insert the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6003 View of the release tool being used for the larger terminals. View of the release tool being used for the larger terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6004 View of the release tool being used for the smaller terminals. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6005 Side view of connector. View of top of connector. 1. Locate the assist lever and lock on the top of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6006 2. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. 3. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6007 4. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the rear of the connector. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. 5. Once the locking tabs are unlocked, slide the inner connector out of the rear of the connector housing. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6008 6. Use the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by pressing on the tang. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Repairing Connector Terminals Repairing Connector Terminals Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Use the following repair procedures in order to repair the following: * Push to Seat terminals * Pull to Seat terminals Some terminals do not require all of the steps shown. Skip the steps that do not apply for your terminal repair. The J-38125 contains further information. 1. Cut off the terminal between the core and the insulation crimp. Minimize any wire loss. For cable seal terminals, remove the seal. 2. Apply the correct cable seal per gauge size of the wire, if used. Slide the seal back along the wire in order to enable insulation removal. 3. Remove the insulation. 4. For sealed terminals only, align the seal with the end of the cable insulation. 5. Position the strip in the terminal. For sealed terminals, position the strip and seal in the terminal. 6. Hand crimp the core wings. 7. Hand crimp the insulation wings. For sealed terminals, hand crimp the insulation wings around the seal and the cable. 8. Solder all of the hand crimp terminals excepting Micro-Pack 100.64 size. Soldering Micro-Pack 100 World terminals may damage the terminal. Sumitomo Connectors Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6009 Sumitomo Connectors Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6010 3. Remove the dress cover by using a flat-blade tool to release the connector locking tabs and pulling off the dress cover. 4. Relieve the tension on the nose piece retainers by inserting J 38125-12A into the single retainer slot on the end of the nose piece and gently prying out the locking tab. Repeat the process for both of the nose piece locking tabs on the opposite side of the nose piece. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6011 5. Once the nose piece retainers are relaxed, use the J 38125-552 to pull up the nose piece by hooking the tool under the nose piece and pulling up. The nose piece should raise slightly. 6. On the opposite side of the nose piece, use the J 38125-552 to pull up the nose piece by hooking the tool under the nose piece and pulling up. The nose piece should release completely. If the nose piece does not come off, repeat the procedure on the opposite side. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6012 7. The illustration above identifies the entry canal where the terminal release tool will be inserted, and the terminal cavity. * Terminal (1) * Entry Canal (2) 8. Insert the J 38125-553 tool into the entry canal and pry up on the terminal retainer. The terminal retainer is a small plastic piece on the top of the terminal. The terminal retainer must be held up while the terminal is pulled out of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6013 9. The illustration shows a cutaway view of the connector to aid the technician in releasing the terminal retainer. 10. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Refer to the terminal crimping procedure in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit. Terminal Replacement Procedure After the terminal is crimped to the wire, perform the following procedure in order to replace the terminal. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the connector disassembly procedure. Terminal Position Assurance Locks Terminal Position Assurance Locks The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6014 2. Insert the J 38125-11A tool into the cavity on the lower right hand face of the connector until the terminal release tang access panel slides over. 3. Ensure that the terminal release tang access panel is in the correct location to access the terminals. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6015 5. Insert the J 38125-11A into the terminal release tang access slot located behind the access panel of the connector and press down on the terminal while carefully pulling the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component by pressing down on the connector position assurance (CPA). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6016 2. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting the tool in the small recess on the side of the connector and pushing up until the TPA releases from the connector body. The TPA should raise just slightly. Do not try to remove the TPA. Note: The TPA on this connector cannot be removed unless the terminals are removed first. The TPA will come out of the connector body, but only slightly. When the TPA is slightly raised the terminals can be removed. Using excessive force to remove the TPA with the terminals still in the connector will damage the connector. 3. Repeat the process for the other side of the connector. 4. Ensure that the TPA is in the proper position to remove the terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6017 5. While pushing the terminal forward, insert the J 38125-24 in the release cavity above the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6018 2. Insert a small flat-blade tool in the slot below the front loaded terminal position assurance (TPA) and pry up. 3. Remove the TPA by pulling it out of the connector. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-553 on a slight upward angle into the cavity below the terminal to be removed. Ensure that the pointed on the end of the tool is facing the bottom of the terminal and it stays in contact with the terminal until it stops on the plastic terminal retainer. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6019 6. Gently pry the plastic terminal retainer down and carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6020 1. While depressing the lock, pull the two connector halves apart. Note: The TPA is fragile and may break if not done carefully. 2. Use a small flat-blade tool to very carefully push the terminal position assurance (TPA) towards the face of the connector on both sides of the connector. 3. View of the male half of the connector with female terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6021 4. View of the female half of the connector with male terminals. 5. Use the J 38125-215 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. View of the female half of the connector with male terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6022 7. View of the male half of the connector with female terminals. 8. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers A circuit breaker is a protective device that is designed to open the circuit when a current load is in excess of the rated breaker capacity. If there is a short or other type of overload condition in the circuit, the excessive current will open the circuit between the circuit breaker terminals. Two types of circuit breakers are used. Circuit Breaker - This type opens when excessive current passes through it for a period of time. It closes again after a few seconds, and if the cause of the high current is still present, it will open again. The circuit breaker will continue to cycle open and closed until the condition causing the high current is removed. Positive Temperature Coefficient (PTC) Circuit Breaker - This type greatly increases its resistance when excessive current passes through it. The excessive current heats the PTC device, as the device heats its resistance increases. Eventually the resistance gets so high that the circuit is effectively open. Unlike the ordinary circuit breaker the PTC unit will not reset until the circuit is opened, by removing the voltage from its terminals. Once the voltage is removed the circuit breaker will re-close within a second or 2. Circuit Protection - Fuses Circuit Protection - Fuses Special Tools EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM) For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6023 The fuse is the most common method of an automotive wiring circuit protection. Whenever there is an excessive amount of current flowing through a circuit the fusible element will melt and create an open or incomplete circuit. Fuses are a one time protection device and must be replaced each time the circuit is overloaded. To determine if a fuse is open, remove the suspected fuse and examine if the element in the fuse is broken (2). If not broken (1), also check for continuity using a Digital Multimeter (DMM) or a continuity tester. If the element is broken or continuity is suspect, replace the fuse with one of equal current rating. Circuit Protection - Fusible Links Circuit Protection - Fusible Links Special Tools EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM) For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Fusible link is wire designed to melt and break continuity when excessive current is applied. It is often located between or near the battery and starter or electrical center. Use a continuity tester or a Digital Multimeter (DMM) at each end of the wire containing the fusible link in order to determine if it is broken. If broken, it must be replaced with fusible link of the same gauge size. Repairing a Fusible Link Note: Fusible links cut longer than 225 mm (approximately 9 in) will not provide sufficient overload protection. Flat Wire Repairs Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6024 Flat Wire Repairs The flat wire within the flex wiring harness is not serviceable. If an open or short exists within the flex wiring harness the complete harness must be replaced. GMLAN Wiring Repairs GMLAN Wiring Repairs Special Tools * EL-38125-10 - Splice Sleeve Crimping Tool * J 38125-5 - Ultra Torch Special Tool * DuraSeal splice sleeves * A wire stripping tool For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: * A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. * A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The GM Local Area Network (GMLAN) System requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working on GMLAN connectors and terminals. GMLAN Repairs Note: When making a repair to any GMLAN network, the original wire length after the repair must be the same length as before the repair. If the network is a twisted pair, the twist must be maintained after the repair is completed. GMLAN has 2 types of networks, low speed and high speed. Low speed GMLAN has a single wire and works at slow speeds. High speed GMLAN has 2 wires in a twisted pair and works at higher speeds. For more information on GMLAN, refer to Data Link Communications Description and Operation ( See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Information Bus/Description and Operation). GMLAN Connector Terminal Repair Note: A terminated lead can be used to replace damaged connector terminals for both high speed and low speed GMLAN systems. When making a connector terminal repair on a GMLAN high speed system with twisted pair wires, do not untwist the wires more than necessary to make the repair. If the individual terminals are damaged on any GMLAN connection, use the appropriate connector repair procedure in order to repair the terminal. Refer to Connector Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Connector Repairs) for the appropriate connector repair procedure. GMLAN Wire Repair Note: Refer to Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Wiring Repairs) in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gauge size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and EL-38125-10 - tool. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the DuraSeal splice sleeves. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6025 Note: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: * Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. * Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. * Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert to regional wiring gauge size. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the EL-38125-10 - tool in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the splice sleeve crimp tool. The crimp tool has four nests, one for each color. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6026 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs Caution: Do not solder repairs under any circumstances as this could result in the air reference being obstructed. If the heated oxygen sensor pigtail wiring, connector, or terminal is damaged the entire oxygen sensor assembly must be replaced. Do not attempt to repair the wiring, connector, or terminals. In order for the sensor to function properly it must have a clean air reference. This clean air reference is obtained by way of the oxygen sensor signal and heater wires. Any attempt to repair the wires, connectors or terminals could result in the obstruction of the air reference and degrade oxygen sensor performance. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6027 The following guidelines should be used when servicing the heated oxygen sensor: * Do not apply contact cleaner or other materials to the sensor or vehicle harness connectors. These materials may get into the sensor, causing poor performance. Also, the sensor pigtail and harness wires must not be damaged in such a way that the wires inside are exposed. This could provide a path for foreign materials to enter the sensor and cause performance problems. * Neither the sensor nor vehicle lead wires should be bent sharply or kinked. Sharp bends, kinks, etc., could block the reference air path through the lead wire. * Do not remove or defeat the oxygen sensor ground wire (where applicable). Vehicles that utilize the ground wire sensor may rely on this ground as the only ground contact to the sensor. Removal of the ground wire will also cause poor engine performance. * To prevent damage due to water intrusion, be sure that the peripheral seal remains intact on the vehicle harness connector. High Temperature Wiring Repairs High Temperature Wiring Repairs Special Tools * EL-38125-10 - Splice Sleeve Crimping Tool * J 38125-5 - Ultra Torch * DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). High Temperature Wiring Wiring that is exposed to high temperatures, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time may use materials i.e. wires, connectors, and shielding that has a higher heat rating than typical wiring. When making a repair in a high temperature area observe the following: * Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature to replace any damaged wire. * Replace any heat shielding that is removed. * Cover any DuraSeal splice sleeves with SCT1 shrink tubing. * After making a wiring repair, ensure that the location of the wiring is not moved closer to the heat source. Identifying High Temperature Wiring Wiring that is exposed to high temperature, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time need special considerations when making wiring repairs. Areas that may be exposed to higher temperatures can be identified by heat resistant materials that are being used in those areas. These materials may include heat reflective tape, moon tape, and high temperature shrink tubing. Also conduit and other protective coverings may be used. Because conduit or similar coverings are used throughout the vehicle regardless of the temperature, it may be necessary for the technician to determine if an area is exposed to excessive heat before making a wiring repair. Obvious areas of consideration would be any area located near the exhaust manifolds, catalytic converter, and exhaust pipes. Items Required * DuraSeal splice sleeves to crimp and seal connections * High temperature SCT1 shrink tubing to protect the splice sleeves * Terminated leads or pigtails * The correct tools to remove the terminals from the connectors Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature of the same or larger gauge size as the original wire when repair damage wire. Also replace any reflective tape that you remove during the repair. High Temperature Wire Repair Note: Refer to Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Wiring Repairs) in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature rating of the same gauge size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the EL-38125-10 - tool and then encapsulate the splice sleeve using the high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6028 Note: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: * Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. * Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. * Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert to regional wiring gauge size. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Slide a section of high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing down the length of wire to be spliced. Ensure that the shrink tubing will not interfere with the splice procedure. 5. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 6. Use the EL-38125-10 - tool in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the splice sleeve crimp tool. The crimp tool has four nests, one for each color. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6029 7. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 8. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 9. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 10. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 11. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6030 12. Center the high temperature SCT1 shrink tube over the DuraSeal splice sleeve. 13. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the high temperature heat shrink tubing. 14. Gradually move the heat from the center to the open end of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. 15. Replace any reflective tape and clips that may have been remove during the repair. Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation If the wire insulation has been chafed, or broken, enough to show the conductive portion of the wire, and the wire is not damaged, determine the length of insulation that needs to be repaired. If the repair is less than 280 mm (11 in), cut the wire within the damaged area. Than slide the appropriate heat shrink tubing (listed below) over the wire, and repair the wire by splicing the wires together. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves). Once the wire is spliced together slide heat shrink tubing over the damaged area and apply heat to seal the repaired wire. If the wire is damaged, or the damaged area is larger than 280 mm (11 in), than replace the damaged wire by splicing in a new section of wire. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6031 SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs Special Tools * EL-38125-10 - Splice Sleeve Crimping Tool * J 38125-5 - Ultra Torch * DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: * A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. * A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides the necessary low resistance contact integrity for these sensitive, low energy circuits. The Supplemental Inflatable Restraint (SIR) System/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working with the SIR/SRS, and the wiring components, such as connectors and terminals. SIR/SRS Connector Repair (Plastic Body and Terminal Metal Pin) Note: Do not use the terminals in the kit in order to replace damaged SIR/SRS system terminals. Use either an SIR/SRS pigtail or a terminated lead from the SIR Repair Kit Tray. The terminals in the SIR/SRS system are made with a special plating. This plating provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. Pigtail repair packs are available for SIR/SRS connectors with eight or less terminals. Only the connector body is available for connectors with more than eight terminals. Terminated leads can be used to replace damaged terminals when replacing the connector body. SIR/SRS Component Wire Pigtail Repair Note: Do not make wire, connector, or terminal repairs on components with wire pigtails. A wire pigtail is a wire or wires attached directly to the device, not by a connector. If a wiring pigtail is damaged, you must replace the entire component, with pigtail. The inflatable restraint steering wheel module coil is an example of a pigtail component. SIR/SRS Wire Repair Note: Refer to Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Wiring Repairs) in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6032 If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gauge size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and EL-38125-10 - tool. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the DuraSeal splice sleeves. Note: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: * Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. * Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. * Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert to regional wiring gauge size. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the EL-38125-10 - tool in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the splice sleeve crimp tool. The crimp tool has four nests, one for each color. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6033 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Connector Position Assurance (CPA) The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of a connector. CPAs are used in all SIR System connectors and also in some connectors of other systems. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals of a connection. Terminal Position Assurance (TPA) The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6034 Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Special Tools * EL-38125-10 - Splice Sleeve Crimping Tool * J 38125-5 - Ultra Torch * DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Note: Use only DuraSeal splice sleeves. Other splice sleeves may not protect the splice from moisture or provide a good electrical connection. Use DuraSeal splice sleeves to form a one-to-one splice on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. Use DuraSeal splice sleeves where there is special requirements such as moisture sealing. Follow the instructions below in order to splice copper wire using DuraSeal splice sleeves. Note: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: * Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. * Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. * Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert to regional wiring gauge size. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6035 5. Use the EL-38125-10 - tool in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the splice sleeve crimp tool. The crimp tool has four nests, one for each color. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6036 * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Splicing Inline Harness Diodes Splicing Inline Harness Diodes Many vehicle electrical systems use a diode to isolate circuits and protect the components from voltage spikes. When installing a new diode use the following procedure. 1. Open the harness. * If the harness is taped, remove the tape. * To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing seam ripper (available from sewing supply stores) in order to cut open the harness. * If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the diode. 2. If the diode is taped to the harness, remove all of the tape. 3. Check and record the current flow direction and orientation of diode. 4. Remove the inoperative diode from the harness with a suitable soldering tool. Note: If the diode is located next to a connector terminal remove the terminal(s) from the connector to prevent damage from the soldering tool. 5. Carefully strip away a section of insulation next to the old soldered portion of the wire(s). Do not remove any more than is needed to attach the new diode. 6. Check current flow direction of the new diode, being sure to install the diode with correct bias. Reference the appropriate service manual wiring schematic to obtain the correct diode installation position. 7. Attach the new diode to the wire(s) using 60/40 rosin core solder. Before soldering attach some heat sinks (aluminum alligator clips) across the diode wire ends to protect the diode from excessive heat. Follow the manufacturer's instruction for the soldering equipment. 8. Reinstall terminal(s) into the connector body if previously removed. Note: To prevent shorts to ground and water intrusion, completely cover all exposed wire and diode attachment points with tape. 9. Tape the diode to the harness or connector using electrical tape. Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable Twisted/shielded cable is used in order to protect wiring from electrical noise. Two-conductor cable of this construction is used between the radio and the Delco-Bose(R) speaker/amplifier units and other applications where low level, sensitive signals must be carried. Follow the instructions below in order to repair the twisted/shielded cable. 1. Remove the outer jacket (1). Use care not to cut into the drain wire of the mylar tape. 2. Unwrap the tape. Do not remove the tape. Use the tape in order to rewrap the twisted conductors after the splice is made. 3. Prepare the splice. Untwist the conductors and follow the instructions for Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves). Staggering the splices by 65 mm (2.5 in) is recommended. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6037 Note: Apply the mylar tape with the aluminum side inward. This ensures good electrical contact with the drain wire. 4. Re-assemble the cable. * Rewrap the conductors with the mylar tape. If the mylar tape is damaged, use 3M product AL-36FR to replace the damaged mylar tape. * Use caution not to wrap the drain wire in the tape (1). * Follow the splicing instructions for copper wire and splice the drain wire. * Wrap the drain wire around the conductors and tape with electrical tape to replace the outer insulation. 5. Tape over the entire cable. Use a winding motion when you apply the tape. Wiring Repairs Wiring Repairs The Wiring Repairs section contains the following types of wiring repair information. Using these elements together will make wiring repair faster and easier: * Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections) * Flat Wire Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Flat Wire Repairs) * GMLAN Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/GMLAN Wiring Repairs) * High Temperature Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/High Temperature Wiring Repairs) * Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs) * Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves) * Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable) * Splicing Inline Harness Diodes (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Inline Harness Diodes) * SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs) US English/Metric Conversion US English/Metric Conversion Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6038 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6039 Basic Digital Multimeter Requirements Basic Digital Multimeter Requirements Digital Multimeter (DMM) Basic Requirements Service information is validated using digital multimeters that meet or exceed the following requirements. Using a multimeter that does not meet these basic requirements may give inaccurate readings which could lead to an incorrect diagnosis. Display and Settings 1. Four digits displayed 2. Voltage, amperage, resistance, frequency, diode test settings, and min-max function 3. Display positive and negative values Voltage 1. Have at least 10 Mohm input impedance 2. Test a DC voltage range of 0.1-1000 V. 3. Test an AC voltage range of 0.1-1000 V. Amperage 1. Test a DC amperage range of 0.1µA-10 A. 2. Test an AC amperage range of 0.1µA-10 A. Resistance Test a resistance range of 0.1 ohm-40 Mohm and displays infinite for a value greater than 40 Mohm (O.L. (Over-load)) Frequency Test for a frequency range of 0.5 HZ-199 K HZ Diode Test 1. Apply at least 1 mA when performing the diode bias test 2. Display the break over voltage drop (0-3 V) of a forward biased diode 3. Display infinite (O.L. (Over-load)) when a diode is reverse biased Min-Max Readings 1. Can update at a 1 ms sample rate 2. Saves and displays minimum and maximum values Testing Ground and Low Reference Circuits Testing Ground and Low Reference Circuits Because a test lamp can light with up to 200 ohm in a ground or low reference circuit they are not recommended to be used for this type of test. A low impedance test lamp can light and indicate the circuit is good when there is as much as 20-30 ohm present, while a high impedance test lamp can light with up to 200 ohm present in the circuit. This is why the Digital Multi-Meter (DMM) is used when validating a ground or low reference circuit continuity. When using the DMM there are many vehicle conditions that can affect the ground and low reference continuity testing. If these conditions are not met, a ground or low reference circuit test can fail on a good circuit. This may cause longer diagnosis time and incorrect component replacement. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6040 Any current flow through a ground or low reference circuit, while being tested, will skew the DMM continuity reading, or display a reading higher than when there is no current flowing. Performing a ground or low reference circuit continuity test, in reference to the vehicles battery negative terminal, will have the highest risk of failing a good ground or low reference circuit test than any other ground reference point. The best ground test points would be a control module housing (if the control modules housing is metal and grounded), door jamb striker (if attached to metal), under dash metal frame work, engine block, or body ground studs (other than where the negative battery cable is attached). A typical DMM ground or low reference circuit continuity reading can be as high as 100 ohm with the ignition ON, and drop to 15-25 ohm after the ignition is turned OFF. The reading will drop below 10 ohm after 30-40 seconds, then below 5 ohm after 60 seconds. Once the vehicle completely goes to sleep (generally 3-10 minutes) the reading will drop below 0.3 ohm. The following list of conditions may need to be met to ensure a valid continuity reading on a ground or low reference circuit: * Ignition OFF * Key out of the ignition switch (when not equipped with keyless entry and remote start) * Retained Accessory Power (RAP) OFF (open and close the driver door after ignition OFF) * Battery charger set at a 2 A or less charge rate * Scan tool not communicating with any vehicle control module (in some cases it may need to be disconnected from the DLC) * All entry doors closed * Headlamps OFF (auto headlamps disabled) * Any delay lighting OFF * HVAC after blow OFF * Any accessory that can work when the ignition is OFF * Wait up to 60 seconds (after all other listed conditions are met) Activating the DOOR LOCK function with a key fob can greatly reduce the time to achieve a valid ground or low reference continuity test result. Terminal Wiring Repair Terminal Wiring Repair Special Tools * EL-38125-10 - Splice Sleeve Crimp Tool * EL-38125-580 - Terminal Release Tool Kit * J-38125-5 - Ultra Torch * EL-35616 - Connector Test Adapter Kit For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Note: All repairs near the engine manifold, turbo engine and all exhaust pipes should follow the High Temperature Wiring Repair procedures. 1. Find the appropriate connector end view within the connector end view section. The connector end view has the following information: * Diagnostic probe tool * Terminal release tool * Terminal/terminated lead part numbers 2. Determine if a terminal is damaged. Note: Not using the proper test kit probe may cause damage to the terminal(s) that are probed. * Locate the diagnostic probe tool from the connector end view. The connector end view describes the color and part number to help the technician find and use the correct tool. * Connect the probe tool to the Digital Multimeter. * Insert the probe tool into the cavity and follow the procedures from the Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter). 3. Disconnect the connector body to perform the repair. Note: Several procedures for specific connector bodies are called out in Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Wiring Repairs). Use the following repair procedures to repair the following terminals: Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6041 Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack))Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Push to Seat))Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Pull to Seat))Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W))Delphi Connectors (Micro.64) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Micro .64) )Delphi Connectors (12-Way) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (12-Way))Delphi Connectors (Steering Gear) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Steering Gear)) * The TPA and CPA should be removed before releasing the terminal for the connector body. * Look at the connector end view to locate the cavity of the damaged terminal and find the proper terminal release tool from the terminal release tool kit. Note: Using the incorrect terminal release tool can damage the connector body. * Insert the terminal release tool into the cavity. Note: Some terminals have a lever that must be disengaged before the terminal can be released. Gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Terminated Lead Repair Terminated Lead Repair Special Tools * EL-38125-10 - Splice Sleeve Crimp Tool * EL-38125-580 - Terminal Release Tool Kit * J-38125-5 - Ultra Torch * EL-35616 - Connector Test Adapter Kit For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Note: All repairs near the engine manifold, turbo engine and all exhaust pipes should follow the High Temperature Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/High Temperature Wiring Repairs) procedures. Terminated leads are terminals that are crimped onto wires. The terminated lead can be used throughout the vehicle since it is designed for temperatures up to 150°C. The length of the wire is 450 mm. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6042 The DuraSeal splice sleeve has the following 2 critical features: * A special heat shrink tubing that environmentally seals the splice. The shrink tubing contains a sealing adhesive inside the shrink tubing. * A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp that provides the necessary contact integrity for sensitive low energy circuits. 1. Use the connector end view to identify the correct terminated lead. 2. The terminated lead package should include a DuraSeal splice sleeve. If not, use the chart to identify the correct part. 3. Open the harness by removing any tape: Use a sewing seam ripper, or a comparable tool, to cut open the harness, to avoid wire insulation damage. 4. Depending on how many terminals need repairs, cut the terminal and wire back at least 40 mm. Try to keep the harness wire length the same. If more than one terminated lead is required, stagger the lengths by 40 mm. This helps reduce the bundle size of the wire harness. 5. Use the EL-38125-10 - tool in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the splice sleeve crimp tool. The crimp tool has four nests, one for each color. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6043 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the J-38125-5 - ultra torch , apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6044 Shift Interlock: Electrical Diagrams Shift Lock Control Schematics Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 6045 Shift Interlock: Description and Operation Automatic Transmission Shift Lock Control Description and Operation The automatic transmission park lock control system is a safety device that prevents an inadvertent shift out of PARK. The driver must press the brake pedal before moving the park lever out of the PARK position. The system consists of the following components: * The automatic transmission park lock solenoid (serviced as the automatic transmission shift lock actuator), is located within the floor shift control assembly. * The body control module, which controls the voltage supply circuit of the park lock control solenoid. * The engine control module. The body control module controls the voltage to the park lock control solenoid through the park lock control solenoid controlled voltage circuit. The following conditions must be met before the body control module will supply voltage to the park lock solenoid: * The ignition is in the ON position. * The engine control module sends an input via GMLAN serial data to the body control module indicating the transmission is in the PARK position. * The body control module determines the brake pedal is applied according the brake pedal position. Since the park lock control solenoid is permanently grounded, the body control module supplies voltage to the automatic transmission park lock control solenoid, unlocking the park lever allowing the driver to move the park lever out of the PARK position as the solenoid energizes. When the brake pedal is not applied, the body control module turns the control voltage output of the park lock control solenoid OFF, de-energizing the park lock control solenoid. The de-energized solenoid mechanically locks the park lever in the PARK position. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Symptoms - Automatic Transmission Shift Lock Control Shift Interlock: Testing and Inspection Symptoms - Automatic Transmission Shift Lock Control Symptoms - Automatic Transmission Shift Lock Control Important: The following steps must be completed before using the symptom tables. 1. Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle (See: Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle) before using the Symptom Tables in order to verify that all of the following are true: * There are no DTCs set. * The control modules can communicate via the serial data link. 2. Review the system operation in order to familiarize yourself with the system functions. Refer to Automatic Transmission Shift Lock Control Description and Operation (See: Description and Operation). Visual/Physical Inspection * Inspect for aftermarket devices which could affect the operation of the automatic transmission shift lock control. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Checking Aftermarket Accessories). * Inspect the easily accessible or visible system components for obvious damage or conditions which could cause the symptom. Intermittent Faulty electrical connections or wiring may be the cause of intermittent conditions. Refer to Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections ( See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections) Symptom List Refer to a symptom diagnostic procedure in order to diagnose the symptom: Transmission Control Lever Malfunction (See: Transmission Control Lever Malfunction) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Symptoms - Automatic Transmission Shift Lock Control > Page 6048 Shift Interlock: Testing and Inspection Transmission Control Lever Malfunction Transmission Control Lever Malfunction Diagnostic Instructions * Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle (See: Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle) prior to using this diagnostic procedure. * Review Strategy Based Diagnosis (See: Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Strategy Based Diagnosis) for an overview of the diagnostic approach. * Diagnostic Procedure Instructions (See: Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Diagnostic Procedure Instructions) provides an overview of each diagnostic category. Diagnostic Fault Information Circuit/System Description The body control module controls the automatic transmission park lock control solenoid by providing a battery positive voltage to the solenoid. The body control module controls the voltage supply circuit to the automatic transmission park lock control solenoid. The BCM monitors the voltage and current flow of the control circuit. Reference Information Schematic Reference Shift Lock Control Schematics (See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams) Connector End View Reference Component Connector End Views (See: Diagrams/Connector Views) Description and Operation Automatic Transmission Shift Lock Control Description and Operation (See: Description and Operation) Electrical Information Reference * Circuit Testing (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Circuit Testing) * Connector Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Connector Repairs) * Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections) * Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Wiring Repairs) Scan Tool Reference Control Module References (See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning) for scan tool information Circuit/System Verification 1. Ignition ON, observe the scan tool Brake Applied Output Signal parameter while pressing and releasing the brake pedal. The parameter should change from ON to OFF when the brake pedal is depressed. ‹› If the parameter does not change, refer to Stop Lamps Malfunction (See: Lighting and Horns/Testing and Inspection/Stop Lamps Malfunction ). 2. While pressing the brake pedal, the vehicle operator should be able to move the shifter lever out of the park position. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Symptoms - Automatic Transmission Shift Lock Control > Page 6049 Circuit/System Testing 1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the S3 shift lock actuator. 2. Ignition OFF, test for less than 1.0 Ohms between the ground circuit terminal 2 and ground. ‹› If greater than the specified range, test the ground circuit for an open/high resistance. 3. Install a test lamp between the ground circuit terminal 2 and the control circuit terminal 4. 4. Ignition ON, command the scan tool Shift Lock Solenoid Actuator ON and OFF. The test lamp should turn ON and OFF when changing between the commanded states. ‹› If the test lamp is always ON, test the control circuit for short to voltage. If the circuit tests normal, replace the K9 body control module. ‹› If the test lamp is always OFF, test the control circuit for short to ground or an open/high resistance. If the circuit tests normal, replace the K9 body control module. 5. If all circuits test normal, test or replace the S3 shift lock actuator. Repair Instructions Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification (See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures/Verification Tests and Procedures) after completing the diagnostic procedure. * Transmission Control Replacement (See: Shifter A/T/Service and Repair/6T30/6T40/6T45 Automatic Transmission/Transmission Control Replacement) * Control Module References (See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning) for ECM replacement, setup, and programming Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Specifications > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission Shift Solenoid: Specifications 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission Shift Solenoid Valve State and Gear Ratio Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Specifications > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 6054 Shift Solenoid: Specifications 6T70/6T75 - Automatic Transmission Shift Solenoid Valve State and Gear Ratio Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Page 6055 Shift Solenoid: Locations Powertrain Component Views Automatic Transmission Electronic Components 1 - Q8 Control Solenoid Valve Assembly 2 - B15 Transmission Internal Mode Switch 3 - B14A Transmission Output Shaft Speed Sensor 4 - B14C Transmission Input Shaft Speed Sensor Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Shift Solenoid: Diagram Information and Instructions Electrical Schematic Symbols Electrical Schematic Symbols Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6058 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6059 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6060 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6061 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6062 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6063 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6064 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6065 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6066 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6067 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6068 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6069 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6070 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6071 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6072 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6073 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6074 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6075 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6076 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6077 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6078 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6079 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6080 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6081 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6082 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6083 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6084 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6085 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6086 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6087 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6088 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6089 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6090 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6091 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6092 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6093 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6094 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6095 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6096 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6097 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6098 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6099 General Electrical Diagnosis General Electrical Diagnosis Basic Knowledge Required Without a basic knowledge of electricity, it will be difficult to use the diagnostic procedures contained in the service manual. You should understand the basic theory of electricity, and know the meaning of voltage (V), current (A), and resistance (Ohms ). You should also be able to read and understand a wiring diagram, as well as understand what happens in a circuit with an open or a shorted wire. Vehicle Zoning Strategy Vehicle Zoning Strategy All grounds, in-line connectors, and splices have identifying numbers that correspond to where they are located in the vehicle. The following table explains the numbering system. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6100 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6101 Shift Solenoid: Diagnostic Aids Arrows and Symbols Arrows and Symbols This service manual uses various symbols in order to describe different service operations. 1 - Front of Vehicle 2 - View Detail 2 - View Detail 3 - Ambient Air Mixed with Another Gas or Indicate Temperature Change 4 - Motion or Direction 5 - View Angle 6 - Dimension (1:2) 7 Ambient/Clean Air Flow or Cool Air Flow 8 - Lubrication Point - Oil or Fluid 9 - Task Related 10 Sectioning (1:3) 11 - Gas Other Than Ambient Air or Hot Air Flow 12 - Lubrication Point - Grease or Jelly 13 - Multidirectional Arrow Decimal and Metric Equivalents Decimal and Metric Equivalents Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6102 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6103 Checking Aftermarket Accessories Checking Aftermarket Accessories Warning: Refer to SIR Warning (See: Restraint Systems/Service Precautions/SIR Warning). Caution: The OBD II symbol is used on the circuit diagrams in order to alert the technician that the circuit is essential for proper OBD II emission control circuit operation. Any circuit which fails and causes the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) to turn ON, or causes emissions-related component damage, is identified as an OBD II circuit. Do not connect aftermarket accessories into the following circuits: * SIR circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the SIR symbol. * OBD II circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the OBD II symbol. Always check for aftermarket accessories (non-OEM) as the first step in diagnosing electrical problems. If the vehicle is so equipped, disconnect the system to verify that these add-on accessories are not the cause of the problems. Possible causes of vehicle problems related to aftermarket accessories include: * Power feeds connected to points other than the battery * Antenna location * Transceiver wiring located too close to vehicle electronic modules or wiring * Poor shielding or poor connectors on antenna feed line * Check for recent service bulletins detailing installation guidelines for aftermarket accessories. Circuit Testing Circuit Testing The Circuit Testing section contains the following diagnostic testing information. Using this information along with the diagnostic procedures will identify the cause of the electrical malfunction. * Using Connector Test Adapters (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Using Connector Test Adapters) * Probing Electrical Connectors (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Probing Electrical Connectors) * Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6104 Procedures/Circuit Testing/Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter) * Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp) * Using Fused Jumper Wires (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Using Fused Jumper Wires) * Measuring Voltage (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Measuring Voltage) * Measuring Voltage Drop (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Measuring Voltage Drop) * Measuring Frequency (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Measuring Frequency) * Testing Ground and Low Reference Circuits (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Testing Ground and Low Reference Circuits) * Testing for Continuity (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Continuity) * Testing for Short to Ground (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Short to Ground) * Testing for a Short to Voltage (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for a Short to Voltage) * Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections) * Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions) * Testing for Electrical Intermittents (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Electrical Intermittents) * Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure) * Circuit Protection - Fuses (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Circuit Protection - Fuses) * Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers) * Circuit Protection - Fusible Links (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Circuit Protection - Fusible Links) Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp Special Tools EL-35616-200 - Test Light - Probe Kit For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test Probe Caution). A test lamp can simply and quickly test a low impedance circuit for voltage. A Digital Multimeter (DMM) should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present if the impedance is low enough, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. In other words, if there is not enough current, the test lamp will not illuminate even though voltage is present. The EL-35616-200 - kit is Micro-Pack compatible and comprised of a 12-volt light bulb with an attached pair of leads. To properly operate this tool use the following procedures. When testing for voltage: 1. Attach one lead to ground. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is voltage at the point being tested. When testing for ground: 1. Attach one lead to battery positive voltage. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where ground should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is ground at the point being tested. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6105 Testing for a Short to Voltage Testing for a Short to Voltage Special Tools EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM) For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test Probe Caution). The following procedure tests for a short to voltage in a circuit. 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Set the rotary dial of the Digital Multimeter (DMM) to the V (DC) position. 4. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. Turn ON the ignition and operate all accessories. 7. If the voltage measured is greater than 1 V, there is a short to voltage in the circuit. Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions Special Tools J-25070 - Heat Gun For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Many intermittent open or shorted circuits are affected by harness/connector movement that is caused by vibration, engine torque, bumps/rough pavement, etc. In order to duplicate the customer's concern, it may be necessary to manipulate the wiring harness if the malfunction appears to be vibration related. Manipulation of a circuit can consist of a wide variety of actions, including: * Wiggling the harness * Disconnecting a connector and reconnecting * Stressing the mechanical connection of a connector * Pulling on the harness or wire in order to identify a separation/break inside the insulation * Relocating a harness or wires All these actions should be performed with some goal in mind. For instance, with a scan tool connected, wiggling the wires may uncover a faulty input to the control module. The snapshot option would be appropriate here. Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure). Another option is, with the component commanded ON and OFF by the scan tool, move related connectors and wiring and observe the component operation. With the engine running, move related connectors and wiring while monitoring engine operation. If harness or connector movement affects the data displayed, component/system operation, or engine operation, inspect and repair the harness/connections as necessary. You may need to load the vehicle in order to duplicate the concern. This may require the use of weights, floor jacks, jackstands, frame machines, etc. In these cases you are attempting to duplicate the concern by manipulating the suspension or frame. This method is useful in finding harnesses that are too short and their connectors pull apart enough to cause a poor connection. A DMM set to Peak Min/Max mode and connected to the suspect circuit while testing can yield desirable results. Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Electrical Intermittents). Certainly, using the senses of sight, smell, and hearing while manipulating the circuit can provide good results as well. There may be instances where circuit manipulation alone will not meet the required criteria for the fault condition to appear. In such cases it may be necessary to expose the suspect circuit to other conditions while manipulating the harness. Such conditions would include high moisture conditions, along with exceptionally high or low temperatures. The following discusses how to expose the circuit to these kinds of conditions. Salt Water Spray Some compounds possess the ability to conduct electricity when dissolved in water such as ordinary salt. By mixing table salt with water in sufficient Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6106 quantities, you can enhance the conductive properties of water so that any circuit which may be sensitive to moisture will more readily fail when liberally sprayed with this mixture. Mixing 0.35L (12 oz) of water with approximately 1 tablespoon of salt will yield a salt solution of 5 percent. Fill a normal spray bottle with this mixture. This mixture is sufficient to enhance the water's own conductivity. This may cause the circuit to fail more easily when sprayed. Once the mixture is completed, spray the suspect area liberally with the solution. Then, while monitoring either a scan tool or DMM, manipulate the harness as discussed previously. High Temperature Conditions If the complaint tends to be heat related, you can simulate the condition using the J-25070 - heat gun. Using the heat gun, you can heat up the suspected area or component. Manipulate the harnesses under high temperature conditions while monitoring the scan tool or DMM to locate the fault condition. The high temperature condition may be achieved simply by test driving the vehicle at normal operating temperature. If a heat gun is unavailable, consider this option to enhance your diagnosis. This option does not allow for the same control, however. Low Temperature Conditions Depending on the nature of the fault condition, placing a fan in front of the vehicle while the vehicle is in the shade can have the desired effect. If this is unsuccessful, use local cooling treatments such as ice or a venturi type nozzle (one that provides hot or cold air). This type of tool is capable of producing air stream temperatures down to -18°C (0°F) from one end and +71°C (160°F) from the other. This is ideally suited for localized cooling needs. Once the vehicle, component, or harness has been sufficiently cooled, manipulate the harness or components in an effort to duplicate the concern. Duplicating Failure Conditions * If none of the previous tests are successful, attempt to duplicate and/or capture the failure conditions. * Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, where applicable, contains the conditions that were present when the DTC set. 1. Review and record Freeze Frame/Failure Records data. 2. Clear the DTCs using the scan tool. 3. Turn the key to OFF and wait 15 seconds. 4. Operate the vehicle under the same conditions that were noted in Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, as closely as possible. The vehicle must also be operating within the Conditions for Running the DTC. Refer to Conditions for Running the DTC in the supporting text if a DTC is being diagnosed. 5. Monitor DTC Status for the DTC being tested. The scan tool will indicate Ran, when the enabling conditions have been satisfied long enough for the DTC to run. The scan tool will also indicate whether the DTC passed or failed. * An alternate method is to drive the vehicle with the DMM connected to a suspected circuit. An abnormal reading on the DMM when the concern occurs, may help you locate the concern. Measuring Frequency Measuring Frequency Special Tools EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM) For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test Probe Caution). The following procedure determines the frequency of a signal. Note: Connecting the Digital Multimeter (DMM) to the circuit before pressing the Hz button will allow the DMM to autorange to an appropriate range. 1. Apply power to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (AC) position. 3. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6107 5. Press the Hz button on the DMM. 6. The DMM will display the frequency measured. Measuring Voltage Measuring Voltage Special Tools EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM) For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test Probe Caution). The following procedure measures the voltage at a selected point in a circuit. 1. Disconnect the electrical harness connector for the circuit being tested, if necessary. 2. Enable the circuit and/or system being tested. Use the following methods: * Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. * Turn ON the engine. * Turn ON the circuit and/or system with a scan tool in Output Controls. * Turn ON the switch for the circuit and/or system being tested. 3. Select the V (AC) or V (DC) position on the Digital Multimeter (DMM). 4. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the point of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. The DMM displays the voltage measured at that point. Measuring Voltage Drop Measuring Voltage Drop Special Tools EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM) For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test Probe Caution). The following procedure determines the difference in voltage potential between 2 points. 1. Set the rotary dial of the Digital Multimeter (DMM) to the V (DC) position. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6108 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to one point of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to the other point of the circuit. 4. Operate the circuit. 5. The DMM displays the difference in voltage between the 2 points. Probing Electrical Connectors Probing Electrical Connectors Note: Always be sure to reinstall the connector position assurance (CPA) and terminal position assurance (TPA) when reconnecting connectors or replacing terminals. Front probe Disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the mating side (front) of the connector. Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test Probe Caution). Note: When probing female 0.64 terminals, it is important to use the correct adapter. There have been some revisions to the test adapter for 0.64 terminals. The proper adapter for 0.64 terminals is the EL-35616-64B which has a gold terminal and a black wire between the base and tip. Failure to use the proper test adapter may result in damage to the terminal being tested and improper diagnosis. Note: The proper adapter for probing the terminals for fuses, relays, or diodes in an electrical center is EL-35616-35. Using any other tool or adapter may damage the terminal being tested. Refer to the following table as a guide in selecting the correct test adapter for front probing connectors: Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6109 Backprobe Note: * Backprobe connector terminals only when specifically required in diagnostic procedures. * Do not backprobe a sealed (Weather Pack(R)) connector, less than a 280 series Metri-Pack connector, a Micro-Pack connector, or a flat wire (dock and lock) connector. * Backprobing can be a source of damage to connector terminals. Use care in order to avoid deforming the terminal, either by forcing the test probe too far into the cavity or by using too large of a test probe. * After backprobing any connector, inspect for terminal damage. If terminal damage is suspected, test for proper terminal contact. Do not disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the harness side (back) of the connector. Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure Using Snapshots in Global Diagnostic System (GDS) Overview Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6110 A snapshot is a recording of what a control module on the vehicle was receiving for information while the snapshot is being made. A snapshot may be used to analyze the data during the time a vehicle condition is current. This allows you to concentrate on making the condition occur, rather than trying to view all the data in anticipation of the fault. To record a snapshot in GDS, select, Record Snapshot, from the options at the top right portion of any of the various pages that allow snapshots to be taken (e.g. Data Display, Control Functions, etc.). When you are finished recording, select, Stop Snapshot recording. The snapshot will now be available for replay. Snapshot Replay The Snapshot Replay function allows reviews of previously recorded vehicle snapshot data. This information can be used in analysis of vehicle problems and detection of trigger error conditions. The graph function can be used to compare parameters to see if a component is functioning properly. Recorded snapshots can be selected for viewing by the following three methods: * Selecting a snapshot file from the Vehicle Home Page and clicking on the Review selection. * Double clicking on the selected snapshot from the Vehicle Home Page. * Entering the Tools selection from the Menu selection and selecting Snapshot replay. Next, open the Snapshot Manager. Double click on the snapshot file you wish to view or click on the Load Snapshot selection and select a snapshot file. Regardless of selection method, a File Loaded pop-up window will be displayed from the Snapshot Replay screen. Select OK from the pop-up window. Snapshot Play Functions There are several snapshot play functions that are used to replay recorded snapshots * The Play function is used to play the snapshot forward by clicking on this selection. A marker will move across the screen when this selection is used. All selections in this area turn grey when they are active. * The Pause function is used to pause play of the snapshot. When this selection is clicked a second time the snapshot will start playing where it left off. * The Stop function is used to stop playing the snapshot. The snapshot will start from the beginning, if Play is selected after using the Stop function. Time Control Time control is used to control the snapshot replay. This function allows selection of a specific time frame, display of different views, and control of display speed. The following functions can be selected directly under Time Control. * The Bookmark selection allows you to add a specific comment in the current display and return to this point in the future. When this option is selected, a pop-up window is displayed. Enter a bookmark name and select OK. * The Note Pad can be selected to add comments to the snapshot replay file at the current point of time. When this option is selected, a pop-up window is displayed. Enter a comment for the snapshot file and select OK. * The Load Snapshot (blue folder) opens a snapshot file and makes it ready for further analysis. This function is also available by clicking on an available snapshot file from the Snapshot Manager. * The Down Arrow displays all Time Control options when selected. Individual options can also be selected by clicking on the item you want. * The Snapshot Display Speed can be controlled by selecting this option. Slow speeds of 1/8X, 1/4X, and 1/2X can be selected. The real time speed can also be selected at 1. Faster speeds of 2X, 4X, and 8X can also be obtained by using this selection. View Selections Each View Selection provides a different way of displaying vehicle data for analysis. The following functions can be selected under Available Views: Note: The parameter name will be shown in the original language used for capture if no translation is available for the name. * Parameter List View - Displays incoming information from the snapshot file. The current value of the parameters is displayed on the screen. * Log View - Contains all the information from the snapshot file. All parameter values are listed in the order they were recorded. Specific parameters can be added or removed from a watchlist by clicking on the appropriate item. * State View - Shows the values of all parameters in a specific time frame. These values can be used for comparison with the trigger view. * Trigger View - Displays all system and user defined triggers. This function can be used when there is a combination of factors involved in a diagnostic problem. When a Trigger condition is met a caution triangle will be displayed on the screen. Triggers: * Load Triggers - Allows you to load a file containing trigger definitions. * Save Triggers - Allows you to save the trigger to your computer's hard drive. * Remove Trigger - Allows you to remove the current trigger. It will no longer be present. * Edit Trigger - Displays a pop-up window where you can modify the limits and parameters contained within a trigger. * Adds Trigger - Displays a pop-up window to configure a trigger. * DTC View - After the Play function is selected and this option is selected this function opens the list of recorded DTCs. * Line Graph View - Displays data that can be visualized against the time-axis. From this view, specific parameters can be selected for graphing by Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6111 checking the box under Selected. At the bottom of the graph there are four functions Zoom In (increase size), Zoom Out (decrease size), Bookmarks, and Pause Scrolling. Each of these functions can be accessed by clicking on them. Testing for Continuity Testing for Continuity Special Tools EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM) For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test Probe Caution). The following procedures verify good continuity in a circuit. With a Digital Multimeter (DMM) 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the Ohms position. 2. Disconnect the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 3. Disconnect the load. 4. Press the MIN MAX button on the DMM. 5. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 6. Connect the other lead of the DMM to the other end of the circuit. 7. If the DMM displays low or no resistance, the circuit has good continuity. With a Test Lamp Note: Only use the test lamp procedure on low impedance power and ground circuits. 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect one lead of the test lamp to one end of the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 5. Connect the other end of the circuit to ground. 6. If the test lamp illuminates (full intensity), then the circuit has good continuity. Testing for Electrical Intermittents Testing for Electrical Intermittents Special Tools EL-39200 Digital Multimeter For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Perform the following procedures while wiggling the harness from side to side. Continue this at convenient points (about 6 inches apart) while watching the test equipment. * Testing for Short to Ground (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Short to Ground) * Testing for Continuity (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Continuity) * Testing for a Short to Voltage (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for a Short to Voltage) If the fault is not identified, perform the procedure below using the MIN MAX feature on the EL-39200 DMM. This feature allows you to manipulate the circuit without having to watch the EL-39200. The EL-39200 will generate an audible tone when a change is detected. Note: The EL-39200 must be used in order to perform the following procedure since the EL-39200 can monitor current, resistance or voltage while recording the minimum (MIN), and maximum (MAX) values measured. 1. Connect the EL-39200 to both sides of a suspected connector (still connected), or from one end of a suspected circuit to the other. Refer to Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6112 Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter) for information on connecting the EL-39200 to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the EL-39200 to the V (AC) or V (DC) position. 3. Press the range button of the EL-39200 in order to select the desired voltage range. 4. Press the MIN MAX button of the EL-39200. The EL-39200 displays 100 ms RECORD and emits an audible tone (beep). Note: The 100 ms RECORD mode is the length of time an input must stay at a new value in order to record the full change. 5. Simulate the condition that is potentially causing the intermittent connection, either by wiggling the connections or the wiring, test driving, or performing other operations. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions). 6. Listen for the audible Min Max Alert which indicates that a new minimum or maximum value has been recorded. 7. Press the MIN MAX button once in order to display the MAX value and note the value. 8. Press the MIN MAX button again in order to display the MIN value and note the value. 9. Determine the difference between the MIN and MAX values. * If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is 1 V or greater an intermittent open or high resistance condition exists. Repair the condition as necessary. * If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is less than 1 V, an intermittent open or high resistance condition does not exist. Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections Special Tools EL-35616 Terminal Test Probe Kit For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). When the condition is not currently present, but is indicated in DTC history, the cause may be intermittent. An intermittent may also be the cause when there is a customer complaint, but the symptom cannot be duplicated. Refer to the Symptom Table of the system that is suspect of causing the condition before trying to locate an intermittent condition. Most intermittent conditions are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. Inspect for the following items: * Wiring broken inside the insulation * Poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector * Poor terminal to wire connection-Some conditions which fall under this description are poor crimps, poor solder joints, crimping over the wire insulation rather than the wire itself, and corrosion in the wire to terminal contact area, etc. * Pierced or damaged insulation can allow moisture to enter the wiring causing corrosion. The conductor can corrode inside the insulation, with little visible evidence. Look for swollen and stiff sections of wire in the suspect circuits. * Wiring which has been pinched, cut, or its insulation rubbed through may cause an intermittent open or short as the bare area touches other wiring or parts of the vehicle. * Wiring that comes in contact with hot or exhaust components * Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions) in order to duplicate the conditions required, in order to verify the customer concern. * Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Electrical Intermittents) for test procedures to detect intermittent open, high resistance, short to ground, and short to voltage conditions. * Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure) for advanced intermittent diagnosis and Vehicle Data Recorder operation. Testing for Terminal Fretting Some intermittent conditions can be caused by wire terminal fretting corrosion. Fretting corrosion is a build-up of insulating, oxidized wear debris that can form when there is a small motion between electrical contacts. The oxidized wear debris can pile up enough at the electrical contact spots that the electrical resistance across the connection increases. Movement between the contacting surfaces as small as 10 to 100 microns can cause fretting. To put this in perspective, a sheet of paper is about 100 microns thick, so fretting motion is small and hard to see. Vibration and thermal expansion/contraction are the main sources that create fretting motion. Since vehicles vibrate and can experience large temperature swings, they are a good source for fretting motion. Tin, copper, nickel, and iron surfaces are all susceptible to fretting corrosion. Fretting corrosion can be difficult to see but it looks like small, dark smudges on the terminals contact surface. To correct a fretting condition disconnect the suspect connector and add Nyogel lubricant 760G (dielectric grease) to both sides of the connector Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6113 terminals. Then reconnect the connector and wipe away any excess lubricant. This will correct the additional terminal contact resistance due to the terminal fretting corrosion. Testing for Proper Terminal Contact It is important to test terminal contact at the component and any inline connectors before replacing a suspect component. Mating terminals must be inspected to ensure good terminal contact. A poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector may be the result of contamination or deformation. Contamination may be caused by the connector halves being improperly connected. A missing or damaged connector seal, damage to the connector itself, or exposing the terminals to moisture and dirt can also cause contamination. Contamination, usually in the underhood or underbody connectors, leads to terminal corrosion, causing an open circuit or intermittently open circuit. Deformation is caused by probing the mating side of a connector terminal without the proper adapter. Always use the EL-35616 when probing connectors. Other causes of terminal deformation are improperly joining the connector halves, or repeatedly separating and joining the connector halves. Deformation, usually to the female terminal contact tang, can result in poor terminal contact causing an open or intermittently open circuit. Testing for Proper Terminal Contact in Bussed Electrical Centers It is very important to use the correct test adapter when testing for proper terminal contact of fuses and relays in a bussed electrical center. Use EL-35616-35 to test for proper terminal contact. Failure to use EL-35616-35 can result in improper diagnosis of the bussed electrical center. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact: 1. Separate the connector halves. 2. Visually inspect the connector halves for contamination. Contamination may result in a white or green build-up within the connector body or between terminals. This causes high terminal resistance, intermittent contact, or an open circuit. An underhood or underbody connector that shows signs of contamination should be replaced in its entirety: terminals, seals, and connector body. 3. Using an equivalent male terminal / terminated lead, verify that the retention force is significantly different between a known good terminal and the suspect terminal. Replace the female terminal in question. Flat Wire (Dock and Lock) Connectors There are no serviceable parts for flat wire (dock and lock) connectors on the harness side or the component side. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact: 1. Remove the component in question. 2. Visually inspect each side of the connector for signs of contamination. Avoid touching either side of the connector as oil from your skin may be a source of contamination as well. 3. Visually inspect the terminal bearing surfaces of the flat wire circuits for splits, cracks, or other imperfections that could cause poor terminal contact. Visually inspect the component side connector to ensure that all of the terminals are uniform and free of damage or deformation. 4. Insert the appropriate adapter from the on the flat wire harness connector in order to test the circuit in question. Control Module/Component Voltage and Grounds Poor voltage or ground connections can cause widely varying symptoms. * Test all control module voltage supply circuits. Many vehicles have multiple circuits supplying voltage to a control module. Other components in the system may have separate voltage supply circuits that may also need to be tested. Inspect connections at the module/component connectors, fuses, and any intermediate connections between the voltage source and the module/component. A test lamp or a DMM may indicate that voltage is present, but neither tests the ability of the circuit to carry sufficient current. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. Refer to Circuit Testing (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Circuit Testing) and Power Distribution Schematics (See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Starting and Charging/Power and Ground Distribution/System Diagram/Power Distribution Schematics). * Test all control module ground and system ground circuits. The control module may have multiple ground circuits. Other components in the system may have separate grounds that may also need to be tested. Inspect grounds for clean and tight connections at the grounding point. Inspect the connections at the component and in splice packs, where applicable. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. Refer to Circuit Testing (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Circuit Testing) and Ground Distribution Schematics (See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Starting and Charging/Power and Ground Distribution/System Diagram/Ground Distribution Schematics). Temperature Sensitivity * An intermittent condition may occur when a component/connection reaches normal operating temperature. The condition may occur only when the component/connection is cold, or only when the component/connection is hot. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6114 * Freeze Frame, Failure Records, Snapshot, or Vehicle Data Recorder data may help with this type of intermittent condition, where applicable. * If the intermittent is related to heat, review the data for a relationship with the following: - High ambient temperatures - Underhood/engine generated heat - Circuit generated heat due to a poor connection, or high electrical load - Higher than normal load conditions, towing, etc. * If the intermittent is related to cold, review the data for the following: - Low ambient temperatures-In extremely low temperatures, ice may form in a connection or component. Inspect for water intrusion. - The condition only occurs on a cold start. - The condition goes away when the vehicle warms up. * Information from the customer may help to determine if the trouble follows a pattern that is temperature related. * If temperature is suspected of causing an intermittent fault condition, attempt to duplicate the condition. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions) in order to duplicate the conditions required. Electromagnetic Interference and Electrical Noise Some electrical components/circuits are sensitive to electromagnetic interference or other types of electrical noise. Inspect for the following conditions: * A misrouted harness that is too close to high voltage/high current devices such as secondary ignition components, motors, generator etc.-These components may induce electrical noise on a circuit that could interfere with normal circuit operation. * Electrical system interference caused by a malfunctioning relay, or a control module driven solenoid or switch-These conditions can cause a sharp electrical surge. Normally, the condition will occur when the malfunctioning component is operating. * Improper installation of non-factory or aftermarket add on accessories such as lights, 2-way radios, amplifiers, electric motors, remote starters, alarm systems, cell phones, etc.-These accessories may lead to interference while in use, but do not fail when the accessories are not in use. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Checking Aftermarket Accessories). * Test for an open diode across the A/C compressor clutch and for other open diodes. Some relays may contain a clamping diode. * The generator may be allowing AC noise into the electrical system. Incorrect Control Module * There are only a few situations where reprogramming a control module is appropriate: - A new service control module is installed. - A control module from another vehicle is installed. - Revised software/calibration files have been released for this vehicle. Note: DO NOT re-program the control module with the SAME software/calibration files that are already present in the control module. This is not an effective repair for any type of concern. * Verify that the control module contains the correct software/calibration. If incorrect programming is found, reprogram the control module with the most current software/calibration. Refer to Control Module References (See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning) for replacement, setup, and programming. Testing for Short to Ground Testing for Short to Ground Special Tools * EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM) * EL 35616-200 - Test Light-Probe Kit For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test Probe Caution). The following procedures test for a short to ground in a circuit. With a Digital Multimeter (DMM) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6115 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the Ohms position. 4. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the other lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. If the DMM does NOT display infinite resistance (OL), there is a short to ground in the circuit. With a Test Lamp 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect one lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to one end of the circuit to be tested. 5. If the test lamp illuminates, there is a short to ground in the circuit. Fuse Powering Several Loads 1. Review the system schematic and locate the fuse that is open. 2. Open the first connector or switch leading from the fuse to each load. 3. Connect a DMM across the fuse terminals (be sure that the fuse is powered). * When the DMM displays voltage the short is in the wiring leading to the first connector or switch. * If the DMM does not display voltage refer to the next step. 4. Close each connector or switch until the DMM displays voltage in order to find which circuit is shorted. Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter Special Tools EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM) For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test Probe Caution). Digital Multimeter (DMM) Basic Requirements Service information is validated using digital multimeters that meet or exceed the following requirements. Using a multimeter that does not meet these basic requirements may give inaccurate readings which could lead to an incorrect diagnosis. Display and Settings 1. Four digits displayed 2. Voltage, amperage, resistance, frequency, diode test settings, and min-max function 3. Display positive and negative values Voltage 1. Have at least 10 Mohm input impedance 2. Test a DC voltage range of 0.1-1000 V. 3. Test an AC voltage range of 0.1-1000 V. Amperage 1. Test a DC amperage range of 0.1µA-10 A. 2. Test an AC amperage range of 0.1µA-10 A. Resistance Test a resistance range of 0.1 ohm-40 Mohm and displays infinite for a value greater than 40 Mohm (O.L. (Over-load)) Frequency Test for a frequency range of 0.5 HZ-199 K HZ Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6116 Diode Test 1. Apply at least 1 mA when performing the diode bias test 2. Display the break over voltage drop (0-3 V) of a forward biased diode 3. Display infinite (O.L. (Over-load)) when a diode is reverse biased Min-Max Readings 1. Can update at a 1 ms sample rate 2. Saves and displays minimum and maximum values Note: Circuits which include any solid state control modules, such as the engine control module (ECM), should only be tested with a 10 MOhms or higher impedance digital multimeter such as the EL-39200. The EL-39200 instruction manual is a good source of information and should be read thoroughly upon receipt of the DMM as well as kept on hand for future reference. A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present if the impedance is low enough, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. In other words, if there is not enough current, the test lamp will not illuminate even though voltage is present. The ohmmeter function on a DMM shows how much resistance exists between 2 points along a circuit. Low resistance in a circuit means good continuity. Note: Disconnect the power feed from the suspect circuit when measuring resistance with a DMM. This prevents incorrect readings. DMMs apply such a small voltage to measure resistance that the presence of voltages can upset a resistance reading. Diodes and solid state components in a circuit can cause a DMM to display a false reading. To find out if a component is affecting a measurement take a reading once, then reverse the leads and take a second reading. If the readings differ the solid state component is affecting the measurement. Following are examples of the various methods of connecting the DMM to the circuit to be tested: * Probe both ends of the connector and either hold the leads in place while manipulating the connector or tape the leads to the harness for continuous monitoring while you perform other operations or test driving. Refer to Probing Electrical Connectors (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Probing Electrical Connectors). * Disconnect the harness at both ends of the suspected circuit where it connects either to a component or to other harnesses. * If the system that is being diagnosed has a specified pinout or breakout box, it may be used in order to simplify connecting the DMM to the circuit or for testing multiple circuits quickly. Using Connector Test Adapters Using Connector Test Adapters Special Tools EL 35616 - Terminal Test Probe Kit For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Caution: Do not insert test equipment probes (DMM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the EL-38125-580 GM Approved Terminal Release Tool Kit in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the EL-38125-580 GM Approved Terminal Release Tool Kit , ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the EL-38125-580 GM Approved Terminal Release Tool Kit label on the inside of the EL-38125-580 GM Approved Terminal Release Tool Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Using Fused Jumper Wires Using Fused Jumper Wires Special Tools J 36169-A Fused Jumper Wire Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6117 Note: A fused jumper may not protect solid state components from being damaged. The J 36169-A includes small clamp connectors that provide adaptation to most connectors without damage. This fused jumper wire is supplied with a 20-A fuse which may not be suitable for some circuits. Do not use a fuse with a higher rating than the fuse that protects the circuit being tested. AFL/EPC Connectors AFL/EPC Connectors Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. 1. For connectors with a bolt in the dress cover, turn the bolt counterclockwise to remove the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6118 2. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the top of the wire dress cover. Slide the CPA forward. 3. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6119 View showing depressing of the lever lock release tab. View of connector in released position. 4. Disconnect the connector from the component. 5. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the dress cover. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs and remove the dress cover. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6120 6. Release the rear lower half of the wiredress cover. 7. Release the tabs that are holding the wiredress cover to the connector body. 8. Remove the nose piece by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the slots on both ends of the connector body. Gently pry the nose piece out of the connector. J 38125-216 can also be used to remove the nose piece. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6121 9. Use the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by lifting the terminal retaining tabs on the inside of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Bosch Connectors (BSK) Bosch Connectors (BSK) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6122 Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 3. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 4. Insert the J 38125-561 tool into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 5. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Bosch Connectors (ECM) Bosch Connectors (ECM) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6123 1. Locate the assist lever on the top of the connector. Move the assist lever to the forward position. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6124 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the connector. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the locking tabs and remove the dress cover. 4. The terminal positive assurance (TPA) is located in the front of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6125 5. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove TPA from the connector. 6. Use the J 38125-213 or the J 38125-556 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6126 Note: Ensure that the dress cover and connector body are both in the released position before reassembling. Failure to do so may cause damage to the connector and component. Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Bosch Connectors (0.64) Bosch Connectors (0.64) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While pressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock until the lever is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Pull the rubber boot that covers the wires back to expose the end of the connector dress cover. 4. Place the connector locking lever in the center of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6127 5. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs that are on the wire end of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover and connector body and pry up. 6. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs located on the opposite side of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover at the connector end and pry up. 7. Remove the dress cover. 8. Cut the tie wrap on the wire bundle. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6128 9. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting a small flat-bladed tool into the small slot in the end of the slider and pushing on the TPA until it comes out of the connector. When the TPA exits the opposite side of the connector, gasp the TPA and pull it completely out of the connector. 10. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 11. Insert the J 38125-560 into the 2 triangular cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 12. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Terminal Replacement Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6129 1. Prior to installation the terminal must be aligned so the (1) coding lugs align with the (2) coding grooves on the connector. 2. Once the terminal is aligned, slide the terminal into the cavity until the retainer has engaged in the cavity of the connector. 3. Slide the TPA in the connector body and seat it using a small flat bladed tool. The TPA is seated when it is flush with the contact housing. 4. Secure the wires to the connector body using a tie wrap and replace the dress cover and grommet. Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Pull out the slider on the connector position assurance (CPA) until it is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6130 5. Insert the J 38125-557 into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Connector Position Assurance Locks Connector Position Assurance Locks The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of the connector. CPAs are used in various connectors throughout the vehicle. CPAs are also used in all SIR system electrical connectors. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals, of the connector. Connector Repairs Connector Repairs Connector Repairs contains a list of all connector repairs. The connector repairs are listed by the connector manufacturer and then by connector type. If the technician cannot identify the manufacturer of the connector, refer to Identifying Connectors below. Knowing the connector manufacturer will assist in finding the correct connector repair from the following list: * Connector Position Assurance Locks (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Connector Position Assurance Locks) * Terminal Position Assurance Locks (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Terminal Position Assurance Locks) * AFL/EPC Connectors (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/AFL/EPC Connectors) * Bosch Connectors (BSK) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Bosch Connectors (BSK))Bosch Connectors (0.64) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Bosch Connectors (0.64))Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT))Bosch Connectors (ECM) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Bosch Connectors (ECM)) * Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack))Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Push to Seat))Delphi Connectors Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6131 (Pull To Seat) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Pull to Seat))Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W))Delphi Connectors (Micro.64) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Micro .64))Delphi Connectors (12-Way) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (12-Way))Delphi Connectors (Steering Gear) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Steering Gear)) * FCI Connectors (Lever Lock) (See: General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/FCI Connectors (Lever Lock))FCI Connectors (SIR) (See: General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/FCI (SIR)) * FEP Connectors (Steering Gear) (See: General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/FEP Connectors (Steering Gear)) * JST Connectors (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/JST Connectors) * Kostal Connectors (Glow Plug Control Module) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Kostal Connectors (Glow Plug Control Module))Kostal Connectors (Transmission) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Kostal Connectors (Transmission)) * Molex Connectors (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Molex Connectors) * Sumitomo Connectors (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Sumitomo Connectors) * Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way))Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor))Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap))Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way))Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module)) * Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Yazaki Connectors (2-Way))Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Yazaki Connectors (16-Way)) * Repairing Connector Terminals (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Repairing Connector Terminals) Connector Anatomy 1 - Connector Positive Assurance (CPA) 2 - Assist Lever 3 - Wiredress Cover 4 - Seal Strain/Relief Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6132 5 - Slide Left Hand 6 - Slide Right Hand 7 - Terminal Positive Assurance (TPA) 8 - Terminal Positive Assurance (TPA) 9 - Connector Seal 10 - Connector Housing 11 - Inner Connector Identifying Connectors Knowing the connector manufacturer is helpful when trying to locating the correct connector repair procedure. There are many different connector designs used on GM vehicles and it is sometimes difficult to identify the connector manufacturer. The information in this document should help with the identification of connector manufactures. The following connector manufacturers make most of the connectors found in GM vehicles: * AFL/EPC (Alcoa Fujikura Ltd./Engineered Plastics Components) * Bosch * Delphi * FCI (Framatome Connectors International) * JAE (Japan Aviation Electronics) * JST (Japan Solderless Terminals) * Kostel * Molex * Sumitomo * Tyco/AMP * Yazaki Identifying the manufacturer of a connector is often difficult. When trying to determine the manufacturer of a connector, look for specific identifying marks that are unique to that connector supplier. Most of these identify marks are hard to find or see. Check the connector carefully and refer to the information below for pictures and descriptions of connector identification markings. * Most of AFLs connectors have EPC on their connector body. Some of the smaller connectors will not have any markings on them. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6133 * In some cases Bosch will actually be printed on the connector. If Bosch does not appear on the connector, look for the Bosch logo. The Bosch logo is a circle with a blunted arrow inside. This logo can appear anywhere on the connector and is often very small. * In some cases Delphi will actually be printed on the connector. If Delphi is not printed on the connector, look for PED. In both cases there is no specific orientation for Delphi or PED and they can appear anywhere on the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6134 * FCI connectors may have the FCI logo on their connectors. The logo is the letters FCI with an "A" above it. * JAE connector have JAE in small letters on their connectors. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6135 * JST connectors have JST in small letters on their connectors, similar to that above. The location of the logo will vary with the connector size and style. * Kostel has an "LK" with a circle around it. These connector are usually used as a transmissions connection. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6136 * Most Molex connectors will have the Molex logo on the dresscover of the connector. In some cases the connectors may have MX followed by another letter. The third letter indicates where the connector was made. A connector with MXD is a Molex connector made in Detroit. Sumitomo has a unique symbol on their connector and possibly a part number. The symbol is similar to that of a diamond lying on its side, similar to that shown. The logo could appear anywhere but the most common place is at the wire side of the housing. * Tyco/AMP has many different and unique connector designs. Some may or may not have identifiable marks on them. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6137 * Yazaki has a wedge or arrow shape, similar to that shown. Delphi Connectors (Push to Seat) Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Follow the steps below in order to repair push to seat connectors. 1. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device, the connector position assurance (CPA) device, and/or the secondary lock. 2. Separate the connector halves (1). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6138 3. Use the proper pick or removal tool (1) in order to release the terminal. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 4. Gently pull the cable and the terminal (2) out of the back of the connector. 5. Re-form the locking device if you are going to reuse the terminal (1). 6. To repair the terminal, refer to Terminal Repair. Terminal Repair 1. Slip the cable seal away from the terminal. 2. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 3. Slip a new cable seal onto the wire. 4. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 5. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 6. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. 7. Slide the cable seal toward the terminal. 8. Crimp the cable seal and the insulation. 9. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply grease to the connector. Reinstalling Terminal 1. In order to reuse a terminal or lead assembly, refer to Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Wiring Repairs). 2. Ensure that the cable seal is kept on the terminal side of the splice. 3. Insert the lead from the back until it catches. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Terminated Lead Repair 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Find the appropriate terminated lead. 3. Use the appropriate splice sleeves depending on the gauge size. 4. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves). Delphi Connectors (Pull to Seat) Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) Special Tools Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6139 J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal If the terminal is visibly damaged or is suspected of having a faulty connection, the terminal should be replaced. Follow the steps below in order to repair pull-to-seat connectors: 1. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) device and/or the secondary lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component or separate the connectors for in-line connectors. 3. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device. 4. Insert the proper pick or removal tool into the front of the connector body. Note: On connectors with more than one terminal the service loop may not be large enough to remove the terminal and crimp on a new one. If the terminal wire does not have a large enough service loop for removal, cut the wire 5 cm (2 in) behind the connector before removal. 5. Grasp the wire at the back of the connector body and gently push the terminal out the front of the connector body. Terminal Repair 1. If the wire needed to be cut in order to remove the terminal, gently push a small length of the same size wire through the back of the connector cavity until there is enough wire exposed in order to crimp on a new terminal. If the wire was not cut, cut the existing wire as close to the old terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 4. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. Terminal Installation 1. Align the terminal and pull the wire from the back of the connector in order to seat the terminal. 2. If necessary, cut the new wire to proper length and splice with existing circuit. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves). 3. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply dielectric grease to the connector. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Micro .64) Delphi Connectors (Micro.64) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6140 Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro.64 connectors. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. The lever lock may be located on the top or sides of the wire dress cover. View of a typical Micro 64 connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6141 Depress the lock and pull the lever over and past the lock. View of the connector when released from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6142 View of another type of Micro 64 connector. Depress the locks that are located on both sides of the wiredress cover and pull the lever over and past the locks. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6143 View of the connector when released from the component. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the front of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool push down on one of the locking tabs and pull the cover up until the dress cover releases. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. 4. Once the front 2 locks are unlocked, lift the front of the dress cover and pull it forward. Note: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 5. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the small slot on the TPA and pushing down until the TPA releases. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6144 Note: Be careful not to angle or rock the J 38125-21 tool when inserting it into the connector or the tool may break. 6. Insert the J 38125-21 tool into the round canal between the terminals cavities at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Follow the steps below in order to repair Micro 64 connector terminals. The Micro 64 connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-64 (M jaw) was developed to crimp Micro 64 terminals. The J 38125-64 crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. The J 38125-64 crimping tool is also designed to crimp both the wire and the insulation at the same time. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro 64 terminals. Note: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gauge wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 1. Cut the wire as close to the damaged terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6145 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert terminal into the appropriate terminal holder until it hits bottom and stops. The correct terminal holder is determined by the wire size. Also ensure that the terminals wings are pointing towards the former on the tool and the release locator. 5. Insert the stripped cable into the terminal. Insulation should be visible on both sides of the terminal insulation wings. 6. Compress the handles until the ratchet automatically releases. 7. Place the terminal into the appropriate cavity and assemble the connector. Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6146 Terminal Removal Procedure There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W connectors. These connectors are very similar but use different terminals and have some minor physical differences also. The first connector design of the Micro-Pack 100W (1) has a white connector interface that holds the terminals. The second design of the Micro-Pack 100W (2) has a gray interface to hold the terminals. Also, the first design has terminal cavities that are further apart (3 mm centerline) and offset from the other row of terminal cavities in the connector. The second design has terminals cavities that are closer together (2.54 mm centerline) and aligned vertically. One other way to identify the second design is the thin strip of material that runs along the outside of the cavities. Note: There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W terminals which are very similar. Ensure that you have the correct terminal before crimping the new terminal to the wire. The first design connector uses the longer terminal (1) that has a raised area in front of the recess in the terminal. The second design connector uses the shorter terminal without the raised area. Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro-Pack 100W connectors. Some Micro-Pack 100W connector disassembly procedures will vary. Use this procedure as a guide. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6147 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Locate the nose piece locking tabs that are positioned on the side of the connector nose piece. The connector nose piece acts as a terminal positive assurance (TPA) and may be referred to as such. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to push in one of the locking tabs while gently pulling on the same side of the nose piece. 4. Repeat the procedure for the other locking tab and remove the nose piece. 5. Remove the wire dress cover. The following is a general procedure for wire dress cover removal. Use this procedure as a guide, some dress cover removal procedures may vary. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6148 6. Use fingers to squeeze the 2 locking legs of the cover. 7. Apply pressure and gently rock the cover until one locking leg is unseated. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6149 8. Continue to apply pressure and rock the cover until the second locking leg is unseated. Repeat procedure for the other side of the dress cover and remove the cover. 9. Use J 38125-12A to gently lift the terminal retaining tab while gently pulling the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. If the terminal is severely bent or damaged, it may be possible on some connectors to push the wire out of the front of the connector instead of pulling it through. This will prevent damage to the internal seals of the connector. Once the terminal is pushed out of the connector, cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible and pull the wire through the connector. Terminal Repair Procedure The Micro-Pack 100W connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool was developed to crimp Micro-Pack 100W terminals. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro-Pack 100 terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6150 1. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. Note: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gauge wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert the terminal into the crimp tool until the core wings are flush with the anvil on the crimp tool. Be sure that the wings are pointed toward the crimp tool former and release the spring locator. The locator will hold the terminal in place. Inspect the alignment of the terminal wings with the crimp tool former. If the terminal wings are wider than the crimp tool former, remove the terminal and bend the terminal wings in slightly. 5. Place stripped wire into terminal. 6. Crimp the new terminal to the wire. If a jam occurs, press the emergency release to open applicator. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6151 Terminal Replacement Procedure After the terminal is crimped to the wire perform the following procedure in order to replace Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the Terminal Removal Procedure. Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The following is the proper procedure for the repair of Weather Pack(R) Connectors. 1. Separate the connector halves (1). 2. Open the secondary lock. A secondary lock aids in terminal retention and is usually molded to the connector (1). 3. Grasp the wire and push the terminal to the forward most position. Hold the wire in this position. 4. Insert the Weather Pack(R) terminal removal tool J 38125-10A into the front (mating end) of the connector cavity until it rests on the cavity shoulder (1). 5. Gently pull on the wire to remove the terminal through the back of the connector (2). Note: Never use force to remove a terminal from a connector. 6. Inspect the terminal and connector for damage. Repair as necessary. Refer to Repairing Connector Terminals (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Repairing Connector Terminals). 7. Reform the lock tang (2) and reset terminal in connector body. 8. Close secondary locks and join connector halves. 9. Verify that circuit is complete and working satisfactorily. 10. Perform system check. Delphi Connectors (12-Way) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6152 Delphi Connectors (12-Way) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) and slide the lever lock away from the connector body. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs on the dress cover of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool release all of the locking tabs. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6153 4. Release the lower wire dress cover locking tab. 5. Release the upper wire dress cover locking tab. 6. Once the locks are unlocked, lift the dress cover off. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6154 Note: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 7. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the locking tabs on both sides of the TPA. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. 8. Remove the nose piece by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the locking tabs on both sides of the nose piece. Gently pry the nose piece out of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6155 9. Insert the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Delphi Connectors (Steering Gear) Delphi Connectors (Steering Gear) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6156 Removal Procedure 1. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the locking tab on the connector. 2. Push down the locking tab to release the connector. The small flat-bladed tool may need to be pushed down and angled back slightly to depress the locking tab. Pull on the connector body while releasing the locking tab to disconnect the connector. FCI Connectors (Lever Lock) FCI Connectors (Lever Lock) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6157 Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. 1. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. 2. The release tab is located on the top of the wiredress cover. 3. View of connector in released position. 4. Disconnect the connector from the component. 5. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the dress cover. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs and remove the dress cover. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6158 6. Use a small flat-blade tool to slide the terminal position assurance (TPA) up one notch on both ends of the connector. The TPA is located underneath the wire dress cover. For the larger terminals insert the J 38125-556 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. For the smaller terminals insert the J 38125-560 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6159 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. FCI (SIR) FCI Connectors (SIR) Removal Procedure Note: The orange CPA must be released first to disconnect or to connect the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6160 1. Lift the orange CPA vertically (avoid lifting on an angle to the connector) approximately 4 mm to release the connector. Use a small flat-bladed tool to help release the orange CPA. The orange CPA can also be released manually without any tools. 2. Grab the connector on both sides and lift the connector vertically to disconnect the connector. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6161 1. Lift the orange CPA vertically approximately 4 mm before installing the connector. Use a small flat-bladed tool to help release the orange CPA. The orange CPA can also be released manually without any tools. 2. Line up the connector key tabs with the initiator key slots. Grab the connector on both sides and push the connector down into the initiator connector sub assembly until fully seated. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6162 3. After the connector is fully seated, push down the orange CPA with your thumb. Push down until the orange CPA is touching the yellow cover on the connector. FEP Connectors (Steering Gear) FEP Connectors (Steering Gear) Removal Procedure 1. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the locking tab on the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6163 2. Push down the locking tab to release the connector. The small flat-bladed tool may need to be pushed down and angled back slightly to depress the locking tab. Pull on the connector body while releasing the locking tab to disconnect the connector. JST Connectors JST Connectors Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. While depressing the lock, remove the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6164 2. Locate the two indents of the terminal position assurance (TPA) located on the bottom of the connector body. Note: The TPA cannot be removed from the connector while there are terminals present in the connector body. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to very carefully raise the TPA on both sides of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6165 4. View of the TPA when removed from the connector body. 5. Use the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the left side of the terminal release cavity as shown in the graphic. Use the tool to move the terminal release to the right with a gentle prying motion. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Kostal Connectors (Glow Plug Control Module) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6166 Kostal Connectors (Glow Plug Control Module) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure View of typical connector. View of connector in released position. 1. Locate the assist lever at the back of the connector. Move the assist lever to the rear position. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6167 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove the dress cover. 4. Slide the dress cover forward and off of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6168 5. The terminal positive assurance (TPA) is located in the front and rear of the connector. Note: The front TPA cannot be removed from the connector. Only move it to the preset position. 6. Use a small flat-blade tool to move the front TPA to the preset position, outboard approximately 0.125 in. (3 mm). 7. Use a small flat-blade tool to completely remove the rear TPA from the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6169 8. Use the J 38125-24 or the J 38125-560 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 9. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Kostal Connectors (Transmission) Kostal Connectors (Transmission) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6170 1. While depressing the lock, twist and remove the connector from the component. 2. Locate the terminal position assurance (TPA). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6171 Note: The TPA cannot be removed from the connector while there are terminals present in the connector body. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to push the TPA until it bottoms out. 4. Use the J 38125-28 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal cavity as shown in the graphic. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 5. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Terminal Replacement Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6172 After the terminal is crimped to the wire, perform the following procedure in order to replace the terminal. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. Locate the terminal position assurance (TPA). 4. Use a small flat-blade tool to push the TPA until it bottoms out. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6173 5. Ensure the TPA is fully seated. The TPA should be centered and flush with the connector body when viewed. Molex Connectors Molex Connectors Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the top of the wire dress cover. Slide the CPA forward. 2. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6174 3. The lever should be in the full forward position. 4. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6175 5. Remove the dress cover by using a flat bladed tool to release the dress cover locking tabs and lift up on the dress cover. 6. Cut the tie wrap that holds the wires to the connector body. 7. Use a small flat-blade tool to pry one side of the nose piece up to the pre-stage position. When the nose piece is in the pre-staged position, the nose piece will be raised above the connector body the length of the step in the nose piece. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6176 8. Use a small flat-blade tool to pry the other side of the piece to the pre-stage position. If the nose piece is higher than the first step in the nose piece, gently push down on the nose piece until it meets with resistance from the connector body, you should feel the nose piece click into position. 9. Insert the J 38125-213 into the small terminal release hole on the nose piece and gently pull on the back of the wire. 10. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Refer to the terminal crimping procedure in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit. Terminal Replacement Procedure After the terminal is crimped to the wire, perform the following procedure in order to replace the terminal. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6177 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the connector disassembly procedure. Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the connector body and pull the CPA out. The CPA is on the wire harness side of connector. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Use a small flat-bladed tool to gently pry off the dress cover by inserting the tool under the cover opposite the harness side and prying up. 4. Remove the cover. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6178 5. Using a small flat-bladed tool, push on the side of the nose piece retainer while pushing the nose piece forward with your thumb. This will release the terminal position assurance (TPA). 6. Insert the J 38125-12A into the corresponding terminal release cavity. The release cavities are the 2 center rows of cavities on one half of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6179 7. Pressing the J 38125-12A tool in the release cavity of the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and crimper in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. Slide the lever lock away from the connector body. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs on the dress cover of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool release all of the locking tabs. 4. Once the locks are unlocked, lift the dress cover off. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6180 Note: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 5. Release the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the blue locking tabs on both ends of the connector. Gently slide the TPA up to the released position on both ends. 6. For the larger terminals insert the J 38125-13A tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. For the smaller terminals insert the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6181 View of the release tool being used for the larger terminals. View of the release tool being used for the larger terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6182 View of the release tool being used for the smaller terminals. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6183 Side view of connector. View of top of connector. 1. Locate the assist lever and lock on the top of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6184 2. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. 3. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6185 4. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the rear of the connector. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. 5. Once the locking tabs are unlocked, slide the inner connector out of the rear of the connector housing. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6186 6. Use the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by pressing on the tang. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Repairing Connector Terminals Repairing Connector Terminals Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Use the following repair procedures in order to repair the following: * Push to Seat terminals * Pull to Seat terminals Some terminals do not require all of the steps shown. Skip the steps that do not apply for your terminal repair. The J-38125 contains further information. 1. Cut off the terminal between the core and the insulation crimp. Minimize any wire loss. For cable seal terminals, remove the seal. 2. Apply the correct cable seal per gauge size of the wire, if used. Slide the seal back along the wire in order to enable insulation removal. 3. Remove the insulation. 4. For sealed terminals only, align the seal with the end of the cable insulation. 5. Position the strip in the terminal. For sealed terminals, position the strip and seal in the terminal. 6. Hand crimp the core wings. 7. Hand crimp the insulation wings. For sealed terminals, hand crimp the insulation wings around the seal and the cable. 8. Solder all of the hand crimp terminals excepting Micro-Pack 100.64 size. Soldering Micro-Pack 100 World terminals may damage the terminal. Sumitomo Connectors Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6187 Sumitomo Connectors Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6188 3. Remove the dress cover by using a flat-blade tool to release the connector locking tabs and pulling off the dress cover. 4. Relieve the tension on the nose piece retainers by inserting J 38125-12A into the single retainer slot on the end of the nose piece and gently prying out the locking tab. Repeat the process for both of the nose piece locking tabs on the opposite side of the nose piece. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6189 5. Once the nose piece retainers are relaxed, use the J 38125-552 to pull up the nose piece by hooking the tool under the nose piece and pulling up. The nose piece should raise slightly. 6. On the opposite side of the nose piece, use the J 38125-552 to pull up the nose piece by hooking the tool under the nose piece and pulling up. The nose piece should release completely. If the nose piece does not come off, repeat the procedure on the opposite side. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6190 7. The illustration above identifies the entry canal where the terminal release tool will be inserted, and the terminal cavity. * Terminal (1) * Entry Canal (2) 8. Insert the J 38125-553 tool into the entry canal and pry up on the terminal retainer. The terminal retainer is a small plastic piece on the top of the terminal. The terminal retainer must be held up while the terminal is pulled out of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6191 9. The illustration shows a cutaway view of the connector to aid the technician in releasing the terminal retainer. 10. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Refer to the terminal crimping procedure in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit. Terminal Replacement Procedure After the terminal is crimped to the wire, perform the following procedure in order to replace the terminal. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the connector disassembly procedure. Terminal Position Assurance Locks Terminal Position Assurance Locks The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6192 2. Insert the J 38125-11A tool into the cavity on the lower right hand face of the connector until the terminal release tang access panel slides over. 3. Ensure that the terminal release tang access panel is in the correct location to access the terminals. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6193 5. Insert the J 38125-11A into the terminal release tang access slot located behind the access panel of the connector and press down on the terminal while carefully pulling the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component by pressing down on the connector position assurance (CPA). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6194 2. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting the tool in the small recess on the side of the connector and pushing up until the TPA releases from the connector body. The TPA should raise just slightly. Do not try to remove the TPA. Note: The TPA on this connector cannot be removed unless the terminals are removed first. The TPA will come out of the connector body, but only slightly. When the TPA is slightly raised the terminals can be removed. Using excessive force to remove the TPA with the terminals still in the connector will damage the connector. 3. Repeat the process for the other side of the connector. 4. Ensure that the TPA is in the proper position to remove the terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6195 5. While pushing the terminal forward, insert the J 38125-24 in the release cavity above the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6196 2. Insert a small flat-blade tool in the slot below the front loaded terminal position assurance (TPA) and pry up. 3. Remove the TPA by pulling it out of the connector. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-553 on a slight upward angle into the cavity below the terminal to be removed. Ensure that the pointed on the end of the tool is facing the bottom of the terminal and it stays in contact with the terminal until it stops on the plastic terminal retainer. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6197 6. Gently pry the plastic terminal retainer down and carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6198 1. While depressing the lock, pull the two connector halves apart. Note: The TPA is fragile and may break if not done carefully. 2. Use a small flat-blade tool to very carefully push the terminal position assurance (TPA) towards the face of the connector on both sides of the connector. 3. View of the male half of the connector with female terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6199 4. View of the female half of the connector with male terminals. 5. Use the J 38125-215 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. View of the female half of the connector with male terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6200 7. View of the male half of the connector with female terminals. 8. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers A circuit breaker is a protective device that is designed to open the circuit when a current load is in excess of the rated breaker capacity. If there is a short or other type of overload condition in the circuit, the excessive current will open the circuit between the circuit breaker terminals. Two types of circuit breakers are used. Circuit Breaker - This type opens when excessive current passes through it for a period of time. It closes again after a few seconds, and if the cause of the high current is still present, it will open again. The circuit breaker will continue to cycle open and closed until the condition causing the high current is removed. Positive Temperature Coefficient (PTC) Circuit Breaker - This type greatly increases its resistance when excessive current passes through it. The excessive current heats the PTC device, as the device heats its resistance increases. Eventually the resistance gets so high that the circuit is effectively open. Unlike the ordinary circuit breaker the PTC unit will not reset until the circuit is opened, by removing the voltage from its terminals. Once the voltage is removed the circuit breaker will re-close within a second or 2. Circuit Protection - Fuses Circuit Protection - Fuses Special Tools EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM) For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6201 The fuse is the most common method of an automotive wiring circuit protection. Whenever there is an excessive amount of current flowing through a circuit the fusible element will melt and create an open or incomplete circuit. Fuses are a one time protection device and must be replaced each time the circuit is overloaded. To determine if a fuse is open, remove the suspected fuse and examine if the element in the fuse is broken (2). If not broken (1), also check for continuity using a Digital Multimeter (DMM) or a continuity tester. If the element is broken or continuity is suspect, replace the fuse with one of equal current rating. Circuit Protection - Fusible Links Circuit Protection - Fusible Links Special Tools EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM) For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Fusible link is wire designed to melt and break continuity when excessive current is applied. It is often located between or near the battery and starter or electrical center. Use a continuity tester or a Digital Multimeter (DMM) at each end of the wire containing the fusible link in order to determine if it is broken. If broken, it must be replaced with fusible link of the same gauge size. Repairing a Fusible Link Note: Fusible links cut longer than 225 mm (approximately 9 in) will not provide sufficient overload protection. Flat Wire Repairs Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6202 Flat Wire Repairs The flat wire within the flex wiring harness is not serviceable. If an open or short exists within the flex wiring harness the complete harness must be replaced. GMLAN Wiring Repairs GMLAN Wiring Repairs Special Tools * EL-38125-10 - Splice Sleeve Crimping Tool * J 38125-5 - Ultra Torch Special Tool * DuraSeal splice sleeves * A wire stripping tool For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: * A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. * A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The GM Local Area Network (GMLAN) System requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working on GMLAN connectors and terminals. GMLAN Repairs Note: When making a repair to any GMLAN network, the original wire length after the repair must be the same length as before the repair. If the network is a twisted pair, the twist must be maintained after the repair is completed. GMLAN has 2 types of networks, low speed and high speed. Low speed GMLAN has a single wire and works at slow speeds. High speed GMLAN has 2 wires in a twisted pair and works at higher speeds. For more information on GMLAN, refer to Data Link Communications Description and Operation ( See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Information Bus/Description and Operation). GMLAN Connector Terminal Repair Note: A terminated lead can be used to replace damaged connector terminals for both high speed and low speed GMLAN systems. When making a connector terminal repair on a GMLAN high speed system with twisted pair wires, do not untwist the wires more than necessary to make the repair. If the individual terminals are damaged on any GMLAN connection, use the appropriate connector repair procedure in order to repair the terminal. Refer to Connector Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Connector Repairs) for the appropriate connector repair procedure. GMLAN Wire Repair Note: Refer to Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Wiring Repairs) in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gauge size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and EL-38125-10 - tool. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the DuraSeal splice sleeves. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6203 Note: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: * Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. * Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. * Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert to regional wiring gauge size. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the EL-38125-10 - tool in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the splice sleeve crimp tool. The crimp tool has four nests, one for each color. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6204 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs Caution: Do not solder repairs under any circumstances as this could result in the air reference being obstructed. If the heated oxygen sensor pigtail wiring, connector, or terminal is damaged the entire oxygen sensor assembly must be replaced. Do not attempt to repair the wiring, connector, or terminals. In order for the sensor to function properly it must have a clean air reference. This clean air reference is obtained by way of the oxygen sensor signal and heater wires. Any attempt to repair the wires, connectors or terminals could result in the obstruction of the air reference and degrade oxygen sensor performance. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6205 The following guidelines should be used when servicing the heated oxygen sensor: * Do not apply contact cleaner or other materials to the sensor or vehicle harness connectors. These materials may get into the sensor, causing poor performance. Also, the sensor pigtail and harness wires must not be damaged in such a way that the wires inside are exposed. This could provide a path for foreign materials to enter the sensor and cause performance problems. * Neither the sensor nor vehicle lead wires should be bent sharply or kinked. Sharp bends, kinks, etc., could block the reference air path through the lead wire. * Do not remove or defeat the oxygen sensor ground wire (where applicable). Vehicles that utilize the ground wire sensor may rely on this ground as the only ground contact to the sensor. Removal of the ground wire will also cause poor engine performance. * To prevent damage due to water intrusion, be sure that the peripheral seal remains intact on the vehicle harness connector. High Temperature Wiring Repairs High Temperature Wiring Repairs Special Tools * EL-38125-10 - Splice Sleeve Crimping Tool * J 38125-5 - Ultra Torch * DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). High Temperature Wiring Wiring that is exposed to high temperatures, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time may use materials i.e. wires, connectors, and shielding that has a higher heat rating than typical wiring. When making a repair in a high temperature area observe the following: * Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature to replace any damaged wire. * Replace any heat shielding that is removed. * Cover any DuraSeal splice sleeves with SCT1 shrink tubing. * After making a wiring repair, ensure that the location of the wiring is not moved closer to the heat source. Identifying High Temperature Wiring Wiring that is exposed to high temperature, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time need special considerations when making wiring repairs. Areas that may be exposed to higher temperatures can be identified by heat resistant materials that are being used in those areas. These materials may include heat reflective tape, moon tape, and high temperature shrink tubing. Also conduit and other protective coverings may be used. Because conduit or similar coverings are used throughout the vehicle regardless of the temperature, it may be necessary for the technician to determine if an area is exposed to excessive heat before making a wiring repair. Obvious areas of consideration would be any area located near the exhaust manifolds, catalytic converter, and exhaust pipes. Items Required * DuraSeal splice sleeves to crimp and seal connections * High temperature SCT1 shrink tubing to protect the splice sleeves * Terminated leads or pigtails * The correct tools to remove the terminals from the connectors Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature of the same or larger gauge size as the original wire when repair damage wire. Also replace any reflective tape that you remove during the repair. High Temperature Wire Repair Note: Refer to Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Wiring Repairs) in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature rating of the same gauge size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the EL-38125-10 - tool and then encapsulate the splice sleeve using the high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6206 Note: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: * Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. * Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. * Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert to regional wiring gauge size. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Slide a section of high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing down the length of wire to be spliced. Ensure that the shrink tubing will not interfere with the splice procedure. 5. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 6. Use the EL-38125-10 - tool in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the splice sleeve crimp tool. The crimp tool has four nests, one for each color. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6207 7. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 8. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 9. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 10. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 11. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6208 12. Center the high temperature SCT1 shrink tube over the DuraSeal splice sleeve. 13. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the high temperature heat shrink tubing. 14. Gradually move the heat from the center to the open end of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. 15. Replace any reflective tape and clips that may have been remove during the repair. Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation If the wire insulation has been chafed, or broken, enough to show the conductive portion of the wire, and the wire is not damaged, determine the length of insulation that needs to be repaired. If the repair is less than 280 mm (11 in), cut the wire within the damaged area. Than slide the appropriate heat shrink tubing (listed below) over the wire, and repair the wire by splicing the wires together. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves). Once the wire is spliced together slide heat shrink tubing over the damaged area and apply heat to seal the repaired wire. If the wire is damaged, or the damaged area is larger than 280 mm (11 in), than replace the damaged wire by splicing in a new section of wire. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6209 SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs Special Tools * EL-38125-10 - Splice Sleeve Crimping Tool * J 38125-5 - Ultra Torch * DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: * A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. * A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides the necessary low resistance contact integrity for these sensitive, low energy circuits. The Supplemental Inflatable Restraint (SIR) System/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working with the SIR/SRS, and the wiring components, such as connectors and terminals. SIR/SRS Connector Repair (Plastic Body and Terminal Metal Pin) Note: Do not use the terminals in the kit in order to replace damaged SIR/SRS system terminals. Use either an SIR/SRS pigtail or a terminated lead from the SIR Repair Kit Tray. The terminals in the SIR/SRS system are made with a special plating. This plating provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. Pigtail repair packs are available for SIR/SRS connectors with eight or less terminals. Only the connector body is available for connectors with more than eight terminals. Terminated leads can be used to replace damaged terminals when replacing the connector body. SIR/SRS Component Wire Pigtail Repair Note: Do not make wire, connector, or terminal repairs on components with wire pigtails. A wire pigtail is a wire or wires attached directly to the device, not by a connector. If a wiring pigtail is damaged, you must replace the entire component, with pigtail. The inflatable restraint steering wheel module coil is an example of a pigtail component. SIR/SRS Wire Repair Note: Refer to Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Wiring Repairs) in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6210 If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gauge size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and EL-38125-10 - tool. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the DuraSeal splice sleeves. Note: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: * Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. * Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. * Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert to regional wiring gauge size. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the EL-38125-10 - tool in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the splice sleeve crimp tool. The crimp tool has four nests, one for each color. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6211 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Connector Position Assurance (CPA) The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of a connector. CPAs are used in all SIR System connectors and also in some connectors of other systems. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals of a connection. Terminal Position Assurance (TPA) The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6212 Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Special Tools * EL-38125-10 - Splice Sleeve Crimping Tool * J 38125-5 - Ultra Torch * DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Note: Use only DuraSeal splice sleeves. Other splice sleeves may not protect the splice from moisture or provide a good electrical connection. Use DuraSeal splice sleeves to form a one-to-one splice on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. Use DuraSeal splice sleeves where there is special requirements such as moisture sealing. Follow the instructions below in order to splice copper wire using DuraSeal splice sleeves. Note: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: * Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. * Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. * Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert to regional wiring gauge size. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6213 5. Use the EL-38125-10 - tool in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the splice sleeve crimp tool. The crimp tool has four nests, one for each color. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6214 * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Splicing Inline Harness Diodes Splicing Inline Harness Diodes Many vehicle electrical systems use a diode to isolate circuits and protect the components from voltage spikes. When installing a new diode use the following procedure. 1. Open the harness. * If the harness is taped, remove the tape. * To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing seam ripper (available from sewing supply stores) in order to cut open the harness. * If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the diode. 2. If the diode is taped to the harness, remove all of the tape. 3. Check and record the current flow direction and orientation of diode. 4. Remove the inoperative diode from the harness with a suitable soldering tool. Note: If the diode is located next to a connector terminal remove the terminal(s) from the connector to prevent damage from the soldering tool. 5. Carefully strip away a section of insulation next to the old soldered portion of the wire(s). Do not remove any more than is needed to attach the new diode. 6. Check current flow direction of the new diode, being sure to install the diode with correct bias. Reference the appropriate service manual wiring schematic to obtain the correct diode installation position. 7. Attach the new diode to the wire(s) using 60/40 rosin core solder. Before soldering attach some heat sinks (aluminum alligator clips) across the diode wire ends to protect the diode from excessive heat. Follow the manufacturer's instruction for the soldering equipment. 8. Reinstall terminal(s) into the connector body if previously removed. Note: To prevent shorts to ground and water intrusion, completely cover all exposed wire and diode attachment points with tape. 9. Tape the diode to the harness or connector using electrical tape. Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable Twisted/shielded cable is used in order to protect wiring from electrical noise. Two-conductor cable of this construction is used between the radio and the Delco-Bose(R) speaker/amplifier units and other applications where low level, sensitive signals must be carried. Follow the instructions below in order to repair the twisted/shielded cable. 1. Remove the outer jacket (1). Use care not to cut into the drain wire of the mylar tape. 2. Unwrap the tape. Do not remove the tape. Use the tape in order to rewrap the twisted conductors after the splice is made. 3. Prepare the splice. Untwist the conductors and follow the instructions for Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves). Staggering the splices by 65 mm (2.5 in) is recommended. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6215 Note: Apply the mylar tape with the aluminum side inward. This ensures good electrical contact with the drain wire. 4. Re-assemble the cable. * Rewrap the conductors with the mylar tape. If the mylar tape is damaged, use 3M product AL-36FR to replace the damaged mylar tape. * Use caution not to wrap the drain wire in the tape (1). * Follow the splicing instructions for copper wire and splice the drain wire. * Wrap the drain wire around the conductors and tape with electrical tape to replace the outer insulation. 5. Tape over the entire cable. Use a winding motion when you apply the tape. Wiring Repairs Wiring Repairs The Wiring Repairs section contains the following types of wiring repair information. Using these elements together will make wiring repair faster and easier: * Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections) * Flat Wire Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Flat Wire Repairs) * GMLAN Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/GMLAN Wiring Repairs) * High Temperature Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/High Temperature Wiring Repairs) * Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs) * Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves) * Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable) * Splicing Inline Harness Diodes (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Inline Harness Diodes) * SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs) US English/Metric Conversion US English/Metric Conversion Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6216 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6217 Basic Digital Multimeter Requirements Basic Digital Multimeter Requirements Digital Multimeter (DMM) Basic Requirements Service information is validated using digital multimeters that meet or exceed the following requirements. Using a multimeter that does not meet these basic requirements may give inaccurate readings which could lead to an incorrect diagnosis. Display and Settings 1. Four digits displayed 2. Voltage, amperage, resistance, frequency, diode test settings, and min-max function 3. Display positive and negative values Voltage 1. Have at least 10 Mohm input impedance 2. Test a DC voltage range of 0.1-1000 V. 3. Test an AC voltage range of 0.1-1000 V. Amperage 1. Test a DC amperage range of 0.1µA-10 A. 2. Test an AC amperage range of 0.1µA-10 A. Resistance Test a resistance range of 0.1 ohm-40 Mohm and displays infinite for a value greater than 40 Mohm (O.L. (Over-load)) Frequency Test for a frequency range of 0.5 HZ-199 K HZ Diode Test 1. Apply at least 1 mA when performing the diode bias test 2. Display the break over voltage drop (0-3 V) of a forward biased diode 3. Display infinite (O.L. (Over-load)) when a diode is reverse biased Min-Max Readings 1. Can update at a 1 ms sample rate 2. Saves and displays minimum and maximum values Testing Ground and Low Reference Circuits Testing Ground and Low Reference Circuits Because a test lamp can light with up to 200 ohm in a ground or low reference circuit they are not recommended to be used for this type of test. A low impedance test lamp can light and indicate the circuit is good when there is as much as 20-30 ohm present, while a high impedance test lamp can light with up to 200 ohm present in the circuit. This is why the Digital Multi-Meter (DMM) is used when validating a ground or low reference circuit continuity. When using the DMM there are many vehicle conditions that can affect the ground and low reference continuity testing. If these conditions are not met, a ground or low reference circuit test can fail on a good circuit. This may cause longer diagnosis time and incorrect component replacement. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6218 Any current flow through a ground or low reference circuit, while being tested, will skew the DMM continuity reading, or display a reading higher than when there is no current flowing. Performing a ground or low reference circuit continuity test, in reference to the vehicles battery negative terminal, will have the highest risk of failing a good ground or low reference circuit test than any other ground reference point. The best ground test points would be a control module housing (if the control modules housing is metal and grounded), door jamb striker (if attached to metal), under dash metal frame work, engine block, or body ground studs (other than where the negative battery cable is attached). A typical DMM ground or low reference circuit continuity reading can be as high as 100 ohm with the ignition ON, and drop to 15-25 ohm after the ignition is turned OFF. The reading will drop below 10 ohm after 30-40 seconds, then below 5 ohm after 60 seconds. Once the vehicle completely goes to sleep (generally 3-10 minutes) the reading will drop below 0.3 ohm. The following list of conditions may need to be met to ensure a valid continuity reading on a ground or low reference circuit: * Ignition OFF * Key out of the ignition switch (when not equipped with keyless entry and remote start) * Retained Accessory Power (RAP) OFF (open and close the driver door after ignition OFF) * Battery charger set at a 2 A or less charge rate * Scan tool not communicating with any vehicle control module (in some cases it may need to be disconnected from the DLC) * All entry doors closed * Headlamps OFF (auto headlamps disabled) * Any delay lighting OFF * HVAC after blow OFF * Any accessory that can work when the ignition is OFF * Wait up to 60 seconds (after all other listed conditions are met) Activating the DOOR LOCK function with a key fob can greatly reduce the time to achieve a valid ground or low reference continuity test result. Terminal Wiring Repair Terminal Wiring Repair Special Tools * EL-38125-10 - Splice Sleeve Crimp Tool * EL-38125-580 - Terminal Release Tool Kit * J-38125-5 - Ultra Torch * EL-35616 - Connector Test Adapter Kit For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Note: All repairs near the engine manifold, turbo engine and all exhaust pipes should follow the High Temperature Wiring Repair procedures. 1. Find the appropriate connector end view within the connector end view section. The connector end view has the following information: * Diagnostic probe tool * Terminal release tool * Terminal/terminated lead part numbers 2. Determine if a terminal is damaged. Note: Not using the proper test kit probe may cause damage to the terminal(s) that are probed. * Locate the diagnostic probe tool from the connector end view. The connector end view describes the color and part number to help the technician find and use the correct tool. * Connect the probe tool to the Digital Multimeter. * Insert the probe tool into the cavity and follow the procedures from the Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter). 3. Disconnect the connector body to perform the repair. Note: Several procedures for specific connector bodies are called out in Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Wiring Repairs). Use the following repair procedures to repair the following terminals: Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6219 Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack))Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Push to Seat))Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Pull to Seat))Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W))Delphi Connectors (Micro.64) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Micro .64) )Delphi Connectors (12-Way) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (12-Way))Delphi Connectors (Steering Gear) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Steering Gear)) * The TPA and CPA should be removed before releasing the terminal for the connector body. * Look at the connector end view to locate the cavity of the damaged terminal and find the proper terminal release tool from the terminal release tool kit. Note: Using the incorrect terminal release tool can damage the connector body. * Insert the terminal release tool into the cavity. Note: Some terminals have a lever that must be disengaged before the terminal can be released. Gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Terminated Lead Repair Terminated Lead Repair Special Tools * EL-38125-10 - Splice Sleeve Crimp Tool * EL-38125-580 - Terminal Release Tool Kit * J-38125-5 - Ultra Torch * EL-35616 - Connector Test Adapter Kit For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Note: All repairs near the engine manifold, turbo engine and all exhaust pipes should follow the High Temperature Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/High Temperature Wiring Repairs) procedures. Terminated leads are terminals that are crimped onto wires. The terminated lead can be used throughout the vehicle since it is designed for temperatures up to 150°C. The length of the wire is 450 mm. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6220 The DuraSeal splice sleeve has the following 2 critical features: * A special heat shrink tubing that environmentally seals the splice. The shrink tubing contains a sealing adhesive inside the shrink tubing. * A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp that provides the necessary contact integrity for sensitive low energy circuits. 1. Use the connector end view to identify the correct terminated lead. 2. The terminated lead package should include a DuraSeal splice sleeve. If not, use the chart to identify the correct part. 3. Open the harness by removing any tape: Use a sewing seam ripper, or a comparable tool, to cut open the harness, to avoid wire insulation damage. 4. Depending on how many terminals need repairs, cut the terminal and wire back at least 40 mm. Try to keep the harness wire length the same. If more than one terminated lead is required, stagger the lengths by 40 mm. This helps reduce the bundle size of the wire harness. 5. Use the EL-38125-10 - tool in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the splice sleeve crimp tool. The crimp tool has four nests, one for each color. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6221 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the J-38125-5 - ultra torch , apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6222 Shift Solenoid: Exploded Views Disassembled Views Disassembled Views Case and Associated Parts 1 - Control Valve Body Cover Bolt 2 - Control Valve Body Cover Assembly 3 - Control Valve Body Cover Gasket 4 - Control Valve Body Bolt 5 - Control Valve Body Cover Hole Seal 6 - Control Solenoid Valve Heat Sink Bolt 7 - Control Solenoid (w/Body and TCM) Valve Assembly 8 - Control Valve Body Filter Plate Assembly 9 - Control Valve Body Bolt 10 - Control Valve Body Bolt 11 Control Valve Body Assembly 12 - Control Valve Body Spacer Plate Assembly 13 - A/Trans Fluid Level Control Valve 14 - A/Trans Fluid Level Control Valve Gasket 15 - A/Trans Output Speed Sensor Bolt Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6223 16 - A/Trans Output Speed Sensor Assembly 17 - Manual Shaft Detent Spring Bolt 18 - Manual Shaft Detent Lever Spring Assembly 19 - A/Trans Input Speed Sensor Assembly 20 - A/Trans Input Speed Sensor Assembly O-Ring Seal 21 - A/Trans Input Speed Sensor Bolt 22 - Fill Cap 23 - Fill Cap Seal 24 - Torque Converter Housing Gasket 25 - A/Trans Fluid Pump Seal Assembly 26 Torque Converter with Fluid Pump Housing Assembly 27 - Torque Converter and Differential Housing Bolt 28 - A/Trans Fluid Fill Tube Plug Assembly 29 - Torque Converter Assembly Control Valve Body Assembly (1 of 2) 400 - Control Valve Body Bolt 401 - Control Solenoid Valve Support 402 - Valve Channel Plate 403 - Channel Plate to Valve Body Spacer Plate Assembly 404 - Control Valve Body Ball Check Valve 405 - Control Valve Body Assembly Component Location Component Location Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6224 1 - Reaction Carrier Assembly 2 - Control Valve Body Assembly 3 - Input Carrier Assembly 4 Valve Channel Plate 5 - Output Carrier Assembly 6 - Park Gear 7 - Control Solenoid (w/Body and TCM) Valve Assembly 8 - Drive Link Assembly 9 - Drive Sprocket 10 - Torque Converter Assembly 11 - A/Trans Fluid Pump Assembly 12 - Differential Carrier Assembly 13 - Front Differential Ring Gear 14 - Driven Sprocket 15 - 1-2-3-4 Clutch Assembly 16 - Low and Reverse Clutch Assembly 17 - 2-6 Clutch Assembly 18 - 3-5 Reverse Clutch Assembly 19 - 4-5-6 Clutch Assembly 20 A/Trans Input Speed Sensor Assembly 21 - Reaction Sun Gear Assembly Component Location Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6225 Component Location Component Locations 1 - Manual Shift Detent Lever Assembly (w/Shaft Position Switch) 2 - Trans Fluid Level Indicator 3 Reaction Carrier Assembly 4 - Output Speed Sensor 5 - Input Carrier Assembly 6 - Output Carrier Assembly 7 - Front Differential Transfer Drive Gear 8 - Front Differential Transfer Drive Gear Support Assembly 9 - Torque Converter Assembly 10 - Park Pawl Actuator Assembly 11 - Fluid Pump Drive Link Assembly 12 - Park Pawl 13 - Front Differential Transfer Driven Gear 14 - Front Differential Drive Pinion Gear 15 - Park Gear 16 - Torque Converter and Support and Fluid Pump Housing Assembly 17 - Front Differential Carrier Assembly 18 - Front Differential Carrier Baffle 19 Front Differential Ring Gear Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6226 20 - Front Differential Drive Pinion Gear Lube Tube 21 - 1-2-3-4 Clutch Assembly 22 - Low and Reverse Clutch Assembly (OWC) 23 - Low and Reverse Clutch 24 - 2-6 Clutch Assembly 25 3-5-Reverse Clutch Assembly 26 - 4-5-6 Clutch Assembly 27 - Input Speed Sensor 28 - Case Cover Assembly 29 - Control Valve Body Cover 30 - Input Shaft Speed Sensor Reluctor Wheel 31 Control Valve Lower Body Assembly 32 - Control Valve Upper Body Assembly 33 - Control Valve Channel Plate Assembly 34 - Control Solenoid Valve Assembly (w/Body and TCM) 35 - Manual Valve Disassembled Views Disassembled Views Case and Associated Parts Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6227 1 - Control Valve Body Cover Assembly 2 - Transmission Fluid Level Indicator Assembly 3 - Fluid Level Indicator Tube - Model Dependent 4 - Fluid Level Indicator Tube Seal - Model Dependent 5 Control Valve Body Cover Assembly Gasket 6 - Control Valve Body Cover Stud 7 - Control Valve Body Cover Bolt 8 - Control Valve Body Bolt 9 - Control Valve Body Bolt 10 - Control Valve Body Cover Wiring Connector Hole Seal 11 - Control Solenoid Valve Spring 12 - Control Valve Body Bolt 13 - Control Valve Body Bolt 14 - Control Valve Body Bolt 15 - Control Solenoid (w/Body and TCM) Valve Assembly 16 - Control Solenoid (w/Body and TCM) Filter Plate Assembly 17 - Manual Shaft Detent Assembly 18 - Control Valve Body Assembly 19 - A/Trans Output Speed Sensor Assembly 20 - A/Trans Output Speed Sensor Bolt 21 - A/Trans Case Assembly 22 - Torque Converter Housing Outer Seal 23 - Front Differential Drive Pinion (w/Transfer Gear) Gear Assembly 24 Front Differential Drive Pinion Gear Lube Tube 25 - Torque Converter and Support and A/Trans Fluid Pump Housing Assembly 26 - Torque Converter and Differential Housing Bolt 27 - Torque Converter Assembly 28 - Dust Cover Push Pin - Model Dependent 29 - Dust Cover Bolt - Model Dependent 30 - Dust Cover - Model Dependent 31 - Front Differential Carrier Assembly 32 - Input Shaft Thrust Bearing Assembly 33 - A/Trans Case Cover Gasket 34 - A/Trans Case Cover Assembly 35 - A/Trans Case Cover Assembly Bolt Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6228 Shift Solenoid: Connector Views Q8 Control Solenoid Valve Assembly X1 (MH7 or MHC) Q8 Control Solenoid Valve Assembly X1 (MH2 or MH4) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6229 Q8 Control Solenoid Valve Assembly X2 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6230 Q8 Control Solenoid Valve Assembly X3 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6231 Q8 Control Solenoid Valve Assembly X4 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6232 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission Shift Solenoid: Service and Repair 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission Control Solenoid Valve and Transmission Control Module Assembly Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the transmission control valve body cover. Refer to Control Valve Body Cover Replacement (See: Valve Body/Service and Repair/6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission/Control Valve Body Cover Replacement). 2. Disconnect the input speed sensor electrical connector (1). 3. Disconnect the output speed sensor electrical connector (2). 4. Disconnect the shift position switch electrical connector (3). 5. Remove the 3 control valve body bolts (1) M5 x 40.5. 6. Remove the 12 control valve body bolts (2) M6 x 97. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 6235 7. Remove the control solenoid valve assembly (3) with transmission control module. Caution: Use care when removing or installing the filter plate assembly. A broken or missing retaining tab may not adequately secure the filter plate to the control solenoid valve assembly, resulting in possible damage or contamination. 8. Remove the control solenoid valve assembly filter plate (4). Discard the filter plate. It is not reusable. 9. Inspect the channel plate bolt pass through holes for damage or brinelling. Any damage will cause incorrect pressure switch operation. Replace as necessary. Installation Procedure Caution: Use care when removing or installing the filter plate assembly. A broken or missing retaining tab may not adequately secure the filter plate to the control solenoid valve assembly, resulting in possible damage or contamination. 1. Install a NEW control solenoid valve assembly filter plate (4) to prevent fluid leaks past the fluid seals. 2. Install the control solenoid valve assembly (3) with transmission control module. 3. Hand start the control valve body bolts (1, 2). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 6236 Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener Caution). 4. Secure the 12 control valve body bolts (2) M6 x 97 and tighten in sequence to 10 Nm (89 lb in). 5. Secure the 3 control valve body bolts (1) M5 x 40.5 and tighten in sequence to 8 Nm (71 lb in). 6. Connect the input speed sensor electrical connector (1). 7. Connect the output speed sensor electrical connector (2). 8. Connect the shift position switch electrical connector (3). 9. Install the transmission control valve body cover. Refer to Control Valve Body Cover Replacement (See: Valve Body/Service and Repair/6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission/Control Valve Body Cover Replacement). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 6237 Shift Solenoid: Service and Repair 6T70/6T75 - Automatic Transmission Control Solenoid Valve and Transmission Control Module Assembly Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the control valve body cover. Refer to Control Valve Body Cover Replacement (See: Valve Body/Service and Repair/6T70/6T75 Automatic Transmission/Control Valve Body Cover Replacement). 2. Disconnect the input speed sensor electrical connector (1). 3. Disconnect the output speed sensor electrical connector (2). 4. Disconnect the shift position switch electrical connector (3). 5. Remove the 4 control valve body bolts (1) M6 x 80. 6. Position the control solenoid valve spring (8) to the side. Spring will be released with the removal of the control valve body assembly. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 6238 7. Remove the 2 control valve body bolts (4) M6 x 65. 8. Remove the control valve body bolt (3) M6 x 42. 9. Remove the 3 control valve body bolts (2) M6 x 95. 10. Remove the control valve body bolt (7) M6 x 55. 11. Remove the control solenoid valve body and transmission control module (TCM) assembly (5). Caution: Use care when removing or installing the filter plate assembly. A broken or missing retaining tab may not adequately secure the filter plate to the control solenoid valve assembly, resulting in possible damage or contamination. 12. Remove the control solenoid valve assembly filter plate (6). * Discard the filler plate. It is not reusable. * Inspect the pressure switch manifold seals for damage or contamination. Replace the control solenoid valve assembly as necessary. * Inspect the upper channel plate bolt holes for damage, peening or burnelling. Any damage around the bolt holes near the pressure control switch (PCS) feed holes could cause leakage around the PCS seals. Replace the upper channel plate as necessary. Installation Procedure Caution: Use care when removing or installing the filter plate assembly. A broken or missing retaining tab may not adequately secure the filter plate to the control solenoid valve assembly, resulting in possible damage or contamination. 1. Install a NEW control solenoid valve assembly filter plate (1). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 6239 2. Install the control solenoid valve body and TCM assembly (5). 3. Rotate the control solenoid valve spring (7) into position. Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener Caution). Note: Install all bolts before tightening, then tighten in specified sequence. 4. Install the 4 control valve body bolts (1) M6 x 80. 5. Install the control valve body bolt (6) M6 x 55. 6. Install the 3 control valve body bolts (2) M6 x 95. 7. Install the control valve body bolt (3) M6 x 42. 8. Install the 2 control valve body bolts (4) M6 x 65 and tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb in). 9. Connect the input speed sensor electrical connector (1). 10. Connect the output speed sensor electrical connector (2). 11. Connect the shift position switch electrical connector (3). 12. Install the control valve body cover. Refer to Control Valve Body Cover Replacement (See: Valve Body/Service and Repair/6T70/6T75 - Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 6240 Automatic Transmission/Control Valve Body Cover Replacement). 13. For transmission control module programming and setup. Refer to Control Module References (See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning). Note: After an internal transmission repair or internal part replacement the service fast learn adapt procedure should be performed. 14. Perform the transmission adaptive values learn procedure. Refer to Transmission Adaptive Values Learn (See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shifter A/T > Component Information > Diagrams Shifter A/T: Diagrams S3 Transmission Shift Lever Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shifter A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission Shifter A/T: Service and Repair 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission Transmission Control Lever Knob Replacement Transmission Control Lever Knob Replacement Transmission Control Replacement Transmission Control Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shifter A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 6246 Automatic Transmission Range Selector Lever Replacement Automatic Transmission Range Selector Lever Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Set the park brake and chock the wheels. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shifter A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 6247 2. Disconnect the transmission range selector lever cable terminal (1) from the transmission manual shift lever pin. 3. Press the locking tabs inward in order to release the transmission range selector lever cable (2) from the cable bracket. Warning Hold the transmission range selector lever while removing or installing the lever retaining nut. Failure to hold the lever can cause damage to the transmission internal park system components which could allow the vehicle to roll when placed in the park position. 4. Remove the transmission range selector lever nut (1). 5. Remove the transmission range selector lever (2). Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shifter A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 6248 Warning Hold the transmission range selector lever while removing or installing the lever retaining nut. Failure to hold the lever can cause damage to the transmission internal park system components which could allow the vehicle to roll when placed in the park position. 1. Install the transmission range selector lever (2). Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener Caution). 2. Install the transmission range selector lever nut (1) and tighten to 30 Nm (22 lb ft). 3. Install the transmission range selector lever cable (2) to the cable bracket. 4. Connect the transmission range selector lever cable terminal (1) to the transmission manual shift lever pin. 5. Check the range selector cable adjustment. Refer to Range Selector Lever Cable Adjustment (See: Shift Linkage/Shift Cable/Adjustments). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shifter A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 6249 Shifter A/T: Service and Repair 6T70/6T75 - Automatic Transmission Transmission Control Lever Knob Replacement Transmission Control Lever Knob Replacement Transmission Control Replacement Transmission Control Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shifter A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 6250 Automatic Transmission Range Selector Lever Replacement Automatic Transmission Range Selector Lever Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shifter A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 6251 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Linkage, A/T > Shift Cable, A/T > Component Information > Adjustments > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission Shift Cable: Adjustments 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission Range Selector Lever Cable Adjustment Note: Adjust the automatic transmission range selector cable while the transmission and the gear selector are in the Park position only. Failure to do so may cause mis-adjustment. 1. Set the park brake and chock the wheels. 2. Verify the transmission range select lever is in the park position. 3. Verify the transmission manual shift lever is in the park position. 4. Pull the retaining collar (1) forward, then release the range select cable adjuster clip (2). 5. Slide the two halves (1, 2) of the range select cable together until all free play is removed. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Linkage, A/T > Shift Cable, A/T > Component Information > Adjustments > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 6257 6. Depress the adjuster clip (1) locking the adjuster clip completely, then release the retaining collar. 7. Pull both halves of the range select cable in opposite directions to verify the cable adjuster is secured. 8. Check the transmission range select lever in all gear selections for proper operation. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Linkage, A/T > Shift Cable, A/T > Component Information > Adjustments > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 6258 Shift Cable: Adjustments 6T70/6T75 - Automatic Transmission Range Selector Lever Cable Adjustment Note: Adjust the automatic transmission range selector cable while the transmission and the gear selector are in the Park position only. Failure to do so may cause mis-adjustment. 1. Set the park brake and chock the wheels. 2. Verify the transmission range select lever is in the park position. 3. Verify the transmission manual shift lever is in the park position. 4. Pull the retaining collar (1) forward, then release the range select cable adjuster clip (2). 5. Slide the two halves (1, 2) of the range select cable together until all free play is removed. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Linkage, A/T > Shift Cable, A/T > Component Information > Adjustments > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 6259 6. Depress the adjuster clip (1) locking the adjuster clip completely, then release the retaining collar. 7. Pull both halves of the range select cable in opposite directions to verify the cable adjuster is secured. 8. Check the transmission range select lever in all gear selections for proper operation. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Linkage, A/T > Shift Cable, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission Shift Cable: Service and Repair 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission Range Selector Lever Cable Replacement Range Selector Lever Cable Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Set the park brake and chock the wheels. 2. Disconnect the transmission range selector lever cable terminal (1) from the transmission manual shift lever pin (6). 3. Slide the retainer (4) rearward to release the transmission range selector lever cable from the bracket. 4. Remove the left front floor lower console extension. Refer to Front Floor Lower Console Side Finish Cover Replacement - Left Side (Equinox) ( See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Console/Service and Repair/Front Floor Lower Console Side Finish Cover Replacement - Left Side)Front Floor Lower Console Side Finish Cover Replacement - Left Side (Terrain) (See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Console/Service and Repair/Front Floor Lower Console Side Finish Cover Replacement - Left Side). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Linkage, A/T > Shift Cable, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 6262 5. Disconnect the transmission range selector lever cable retainers (2) from the support bracket. 6. Remove the grommet (1) and cable assembly from the floor panel. 7. Slide the transmission range selector lever cable retainer forward (1) and remove the transmission range selector cable from the transmission control base. 8. Disconnect the transmission range selector lever cable terminal (2) from the shift lever pin. 9. Remove the transmission range selector lever cable from the vehicle. Installation Procedure 1. Install the transmission range selector lever cable in the vehicle. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Linkage, A/T > Shift Cable, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 6263 2. Connect the transmission range selector lever cable terminal (2) to the shift lever pin. 3. Install the transmission range selector cable to the transmission control base, then slide the transmission range selector lever cable retainer rearward (1) to lock the cable in place. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Linkage, A/T > Shift Cable, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 6264 4. Install the grommet (1) and cable assembly into the floor panel. 5. Connect the transmission range selector lever cable retainers (2) to the support bracket. 6. Install the front floor console extension. Refer to Front Floor Lower Console Side Finish Cover Replacement - Left Side (Equinox) (See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Console/Service and Repair/Front Floor Lower Console Side Finish Cover Replacement - Left Side)Front Floor Lower Console Side Finish Cover Replacement Left Side (Terrain) (See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Console/Service and Repair/Front Floor Lower Console Side Finish Cover Replacement - Left Side). 7. Connect the transmission range selector lever cable terminal (1) to the transmission manual shift lever pin (6). 8. Install the cable in the bracket, then slide the retainer (4) forward to lock the transmission range selector lever cable in the bracket. 9. Adjust the cable. Refer to Range Selector Lever Cable Adjustment (See: Adjustments) Range Selector Lever Cable Bracket Replacement Range Selector Lever Cable Bracket Replacement Removal Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Linkage, A/T > Shift Cable, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 6265 1. Set the park brake and chock the wheels. 2. Disconnect the range selector cable end (1) from the range selector lever. 3. Disconnect the range selector cable (2) from the range selector cable bracket. 4. Remove the transmission range selector cable bracket bolts (1). 5. Remove the transmission range selector cable bracket (2). Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Linkage, A/T > Shift Cable, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 6266 1. Install the transmission range selector cable bracket (2). Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener Caution). 2. Install the transmission range selector cable bracket bolts (1) and tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb ft). 3. Connect the range selector cable (2) to the range selector cable bracket. 4. Connect the range selector cable end (1) to the range selector lever. 5. Check the range selector cable adjustment. Refer to Range Selector Lever Cable Adjustment (See: Adjustments). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Linkage, A/T > Shift Cable, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 6267 Shift Cable: Service and Repair 6T70/6T75 - Automatic Transmission Range Selector Lever Cable Replacement Range Selector Lever Cable Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Set the park brake and chock the wheels. 2. Disconnect the transmission range selector lever cable terminal (1) from the transmission manual shift lever pin (6). 3. Slide the retainer (4) rearward to release the transmission range selector lever cable from the bracket. 4. Remove the left front floor lower console extension. Refer to Front Floor Lower Console Side Finish Cover Replacement - Left Side (Equinox) ( See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Console/Service and Repair/Front Floor Lower Console Side Finish Cover Replacement - Left Side)Front Floor Lower Console Side Finish Cover Replacement - Left Side (Terrain) (See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Console/Service and Repair/Front Floor Lower Console Side Finish Cover Replacement - Left Side). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Linkage, A/T > Shift Cable, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 6268 5. Disconnect the transmission range selector lever cable retainers (2) from the support bracket. 6. Remove the grommet (1) and cable assembly from the floor panel. 7. Slide the transmission range selector lever cable retainer forward (1) and remove the transmission range selector cable from the transmission control base. 8. Disconnect the transmission range selector lever cable terminal (2) from the shift lever pin. 9. Remove the transmission range selector lever cable from the vehicle. Installation Procedure 1. Install the transmission range selector lever cable in the vehicle. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Linkage, A/T > Shift Cable, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 6269 2. Connect the transmission range selector lever cable terminal (2) to the shift lever pin. 3. Install the transmission range selector cable to the transmission control base, then slide the transmission range selector lever cable retainer rearward (1) to lock the cable in place. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Linkage, A/T > Shift Cable, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 6270 4. Install the grommet (1) and cable assembly into the floor panel. 5. Connect the transmission range selector lever cable retainers (2) to the support bracket. 6. Install the front floor console extension. Refer to Front Floor Lower Console Side Finish Cover Replacement - Left Side (Equinox) (See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Console/Service and Repair/Front Floor Lower Console Side Finish Cover Replacement - Left Side)Front Floor Lower Console Side Finish Cover Replacement Left Side (Terrain) (See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Console/Service and Repair/Front Floor Lower Console Side Finish Cover Replacement - Left Side). 7. Connect the transmission range selector lever cable terminal (1) to the transmission manual shift lever pin (6). 8. Install the cable in the bracket, then slide the retainer (4) forward to lock the transmission range selector lever cable in the bracket. 9. Adjust the cable. Refer to Range Selector Lever Cable Adjustment (See: Adjustments) Range Selector Lever Cable Bracket Replacement Range Selector Lever Cable Bracket Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Linkage, A/T > Shift Cable, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 6271 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Linkage, A/T > Shift Cable, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 6272 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid: Diagram Information and Instructions Electrical Schematic Symbols Electrical Schematic Symbols Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6277 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6278 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6279 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6280 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6281 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6282 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6283 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6284 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6285 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6286 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6287 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6288 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6289 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6290 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6291 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6292 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6293 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6294 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6295 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6296 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6297 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6298 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6299 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6300 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6301 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6302 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6303 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6304 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6305 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6306 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6307 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6308 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6309 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6310 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6311 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6312 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6313 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6314 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6315 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6316 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6317 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6318 General Electrical Diagnosis General Electrical Diagnosis Basic Knowledge Required Without a basic knowledge of electricity, it will be difficult to use the diagnostic procedures contained in the service manual. You should understand the basic theory of electricity, and know the meaning of voltage (V), current (A), and resistance (Ohms ). You should also be able to read and understand a wiring diagram, as well as understand what happens in a circuit with an open or a shorted wire. Vehicle Zoning Strategy Vehicle Zoning Strategy All grounds, in-line connectors, and splices have identifying numbers that correspond to where they are located in the vehicle. The following table explains the numbering system. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6319 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6320 Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid: Diagnostic Aids Arrows and Symbols Arrows and Symbols This service manual uses various symbols in order to describe different service operations. 1 - Front of Vehicle 2 - View Detail 2 - View Detail 3 - Ambient Air Mixed with Another Gas or Indicate Temperature Change 4 - Motion or Direction 5 - View Angle 6 - Dimension (1:2) 7 Ambient/Clean Air Flow or Cool Air Flow 8 - Lubrication Point - Oil or Fluid 9 - Task Related 10 Sectioning (1:3) 11 - Gas Other Than Ambient Air or Hot Air Flow 12 - Lubrication Point - Grease or Jelly 13 - Multidirectional Arrow Decimal and Metric Equivalents Decimal and Metric Equivalents Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6321 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6322 Checking Aftermarket Accessories Checking Aftermarket Accessories Warning: Refer to SIR Warning (See: Restraint Systems/Service Precautions/SIR Warning). Caution: The OBD II symbol is used on the circuit diagrams in order to alert the technician that the circuit is essential for proper OBD II emission control circuit operation. Any circuit which fails and causes the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) to turn ON, or causes emissions-related component damage, is identified as an OBD II circuit. Do not connect aftermarket accessories into the following circuits: * SIR circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the SIR symbol. * OBD II circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the OBD II symbol. Always check for aftermarket accessories (non-OEM) as the first step in diagnosing electrical problems. If the vehicle is so equipped, disconnect the system to verify that these add-on accessories are not the cause of the problems. Possible causes of vehicle problems related to aftermarket accessories include: * Power feeds connected to points other than the battery * Antenna location * Transceiver wiring located too close to vehicle electronic modules or wiring * Poor shielding or poor connectors on antenna feed line * Check for recent service bulletins detailing installation guidelines for aftermarket accessories. Circuit Testing Circuit Testing The Circuit Testing section contains the following diagnostic testing information. Using this information along with the diagnostic procedures will identify the cause of the electrical malfunction. * Using Connector Test Adapters (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Using Connector Test Adapters) * Probing Electrical Connectors (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Probing Electrical Connectors) * Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6323 Procedures/Circuit Testing/Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter) * Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp) * Using Fused Jumper Wires (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Using Fused Jumper Wires) * Measuring Voltage (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Measuring Voltage) * Measuring Voltage Drop (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Measuring Voltage Drop) * Measuring Frequency (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Measuring Frequency) * Testing Ground and Low Reference Circuits (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Testing Ground and Low Reference Circuits) * Testing for Continuity (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Continuity) * Testing for Short to Ground (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Short to Ground) * Testing for a Short to Voltage (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for a Short to Voltage) * Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections) * Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions) * Testing for Electrical Intermittents (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Electrical Intermittents) * Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure) * Circuit Protection - Fuses (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Circuit Protection - Fuses) * Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers) * Circuit Protection - Fusible Links (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Circuit Protection - Fusible Links) Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp Special Tools EL-35616-200 - Test Light - Probe Kit For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test Probe Caution). A test lamp can simply and quickly test a low impedance circuit for voltage. A Digital Multimeter (DMM) should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present if the impedance is low enough, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. In other words, if there is not enough current, the test lamp will not illuminate even though voltage is present. The EL-35616-200 - kit is Micro-Pack compatible and comprised of a 12-volt light bulb with an attached pair of leads. To properly operate this tool use the following procedures. When testing for voltage: 1. Attach one lead to ground. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is voltage at the point being tested. When testing for ground: 1. Attach one lead to battery positive voltage. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where ground should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is ground at the point being tested. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6324 Testing for a Short to Voltage Testing for a Short to Voltage Special Tools EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM) For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test Probe Caution). The following procedure tests for a short to voltage in a circuit. 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Set the rotary dial of the Digital Multimeter (DMM) to the V (DC) position. 4. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. Turn ON the ignition and operate all accessories. 7. If the voltage measured is greater than 1 V, there is a short to voltage in the circuit. Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions Special Tools J-25070 - Heat Gun For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Many intermittent open or shorted circuits are affected by harness/connector movement that is caused by vibration, engine torque, bumps/rough pavement, etc. In order to duplicate the customer's concern, it may be necessary to manipulate the wiring harness if the malfunction appears to be vibration related. Manipulation of a circuit can consist of a wide variety of actions, including: * Wiggling the harness * Disconnecting a connector and reconnecting * Stressing the mechanical connection of a connector * Pulling on the harness or wire in order to identify a separation/break inside the insulation * Relocating a harness or wires All these actions should be performed with some goal in mind. For instance, with a scan tool connected, wiggling the wires may uncover a faulty input to the control module. The snapshot option would be appropriate here. Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure). Another option is, with the component commanded ON and OFF by the scan tool, move related connectors and wiring and observe the component operation. With the engine running, move related connectors and wiring while monitoring engine operation. If harness or connector movement affects the data displayed, component/system operation, or engine operation, inspect and repair the harness/connections as necessary. You may need to load the vehicle in order to duplicate the concern. This may require the use of weights, floor jacks, jackstands, frame machines, etc. In these cases you are attempting to duplicate the concern by manipulating the suspension or frame. This method is useful in finding harnesses that are too short and their connectors pull apart enough to cause a poor connection. A DMM set to Peak Min/Max mode and connected to the suspect circuit while testing can yield desirable results. Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Electrical Intermittents). Certainly, using the senses of sight, smell, and hearing while manipulating the circuit can provide good results as well. There may be instances where circuit manipulation alone will not meet the required criteria for the fault condition to appear. In such cases it may be necessary to expose the suspect circuit to other conditions while manipulating the harness. Such conditions would include high moisture conditions, along with exceptionally high or low temperatures. The following discusses how to expose the circuit to these kinds of conditions. Salt Water Spray Some compounds possess the ability to conduct electricity when dissolved in water such as ordinary salt. By mixing table salt with water in sufficient Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6325 quantities, you can enhance the conductive properties of water so that any circuit which may be sensitive to moisture will more readily fail when liberally sprayed with this mixture. Mixing 0.35L (12 oz) of water with approximately 1 tablespoon of salt will yield a salt solution of 5 percent. Fill a normal spray bottle with this mixture. This mixture is sufficient to enhance the water's own conductivity. This may cause the circuit to fail more easily when sprayed. Once the mixture is completed, spray the suspect area liberally with the solution. Then, while monitoring either a scan tool or DMM, manipulate the harness as discussed previously. High Temperature Conditions If the complaint tends to be heat related, you can simulate the condition using the J-25070 - heat gun. Using the heat gun, you can heat up the suspected area or component. Manipulate the harnesses under high temperature conditions while monitoring the scan tool or DMM to locate the fault condition. The high temperature condition may be achieved simply by test driving the vehicle at normal operating temperature. If a heat gun is unavailable, consider this option to enhance your diagnosis. This option does not allow for the same control, however. Low Temperature Conditions Depending on the nature of the fault condition, placing a fan in front of the vehicle while the vehicle is in the shade can have the desired effect. If this is unsuccessful, use local cooling treatments such as ice or a venturi type nozzle (one that provides hot or cold air). This type of tool is capable of producing air stream temperatures down to -18°C (0°F) from one end and +71°C (160°F) from the other. This is ideally suited for localized cooling needs. Once the vehicle, component, or harness has been sufficiently cooled, manipulate the harness or components in an effort to duplicate the concern. Duplicating Failure Conditions * If none of the previous tests are successful, attempt to duplicate and/or capture the failure conditions. * Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, where applicable, contains the conditions that were present when the DTC set. 1. Review and record Freeze Frame/Failure Records data. 2. Clear the DTCs using the scan tool. 3. Turn the key to OFF and wait 15 seconds. 4. Operate the vehicle under the same conditions that were noted in Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, as closely as possible. The vehicle must also be operating within the Conditions for Running the DTC. Refer to Conditions for Running the DTC in the supporting text if a DTC is being diagnosed. 5. Monitor DTC Status for the DTC being tested. The scan tool will indicate Ran, when the enabling conditions have been satisfied long enough for the DTC to run. The scan tool will also indicate whether the DTC passed or failed. * An alternate method is to drive the vehicle with the DMM connected to a suspected circuit. An abnormal reading on the DMM when the concern occurs, may help you locate the concern. Measuring Frequency Measuring Frequency Special Tools EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM) For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test Probe Caution). The following procedure determines the frequency of a signal. Note: Connecting the Digital Multimeter (DMM) to the circuit before pressing the Hz button will allow the DMM to autorange to an appropriate range. 1. Apply power to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (AC) position. 3. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6326 5. Press the Hz button on the DMM. 6. The DMM will display the frequency measured. Measuring Voltage Measuring Voltage Special Tools EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM) For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test Probe Caution). The following procedure measures the voltage at a selected point in a circuit. 1. Disconnect the electrical harness connector for the circuit being tested, if necessary. 2. Enable the circuit and/or system being tested. Use the following methods: * Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. * Turn ON the engine. * Turn ON the circuit and/or system with a scan tool in Output Controls. * Turn ON the switch for the circuit and/or system being tested. 3. Select the V (AC) or V (DC) position on the Digital Multimeter (DMM). 4. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the point of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. The DMM displays the voltage measured at that point. Measuring Voltage Drop Measuring Voltage Drop Special Tools EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM) For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test Probe Caution). The following procedure determines the difference in voltage potential between 2 points. 1. Set the rotary dial of the Digital Multimeter (DMM) to the V (DC) position. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6327 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to one point of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to the other point of the circuit. 4. Operate the circuit. 5. The DMM displays the difference in voltage between the 2 points. Probing Electrical Connectors Probing Electrical Connectors Note: Always be sure to reinstall the connector position assurance (CPA) and terminal position assurance (TPA) when reconnecting connectors or replacing terminals. Front probe Disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the mating side (front) of the connector. Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test Probe Caution). Note: When probing female 0.64 terminals, it is important to use the correct adapter. There have been some revisions to the test adapter for 0.64 terminals. The proper adapter for 0.64 terminals is the EL-35616-64B which has a gold terminal and a black wire between the base and tip. Failure to use the proper test adapter may result in damage to the terminal being tested and improper diagnosis. Note: The proper adapter for probing the terminals for fuses, relays, or diodes in an electrical center is EL-35616-35. Using any other tool or adapter may damage the terminal being tested. Refer to the following table as a guide in selecting the correct test adapter for front probing connectors: Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6328 Backprobe Note: * Backprobe connector terminals only when specifically required in diagnostic procedures. * Do not backprobe a sealed (Weather Pack(R)) connector, less than a 280 series Metri-Pack connector, a Micro-Pack connector, or a flat wire (dock and lock) connector. * Backprobing can be a source of damage to connector terminals. Use care in order to avoid deforming the terminal, either by forcing the test probe too far into the cavity or by using too large of a test probe. * After backprobing any connector, inspect for terminal damage. If terminal damage is suspected, test for proper terminal contact. Do not disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the harness side (back) of the connector. Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure Using Snapshots in Global Diagnostic System (GDS) Overview Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6329 A snapshot is a recording of what a control module on the vehicle was receiving for information while the snapshot is being made. A snapshot may be used to analyze the data during the time a vehicle condition is current. This allows you to concentrate on making the condition occur, rather than trying to view all the data in anticipation of the fault. To record a snapshot in GDS, select, Record Snapshot, from the options at the top right portion of any of the various pages that allow snapshots to be taken (e.g. Data Display, Control Functions, etc.). When you are finished recording, select, Stop Snapshot recording. The snapshot will now be available for replay. Snapshot Replay The Snapshot Replay function allows reviews of previously recorded vehicle snapshot data. This information can be used in analysis of vehicle problems and detection of trigger error conditions. The graph function can be used to compare parameters to see if a component is functioning properly. Recorded snapshots can be selected for viewing by the following three methods: * Selecting a snapshot file from the Vehicle Home Page and clicking on the Review selection. * Double clicking on the selected snapshot from the Vehicle Home Page. * Entering the Tools selection from the Menu selection and selecting Snapshot replay. Next, open the Snapshot Manager. Double click on the snapshot file you wish to view or click on the Load Snapshot selection and select a snapshot file. Regardless of selection method, a File Loaded pop-up window will be displayed from the Snapshot Replay screen. Select OK from the pop-up window. Snapshot Play Functions There are several snapshot play functions that are used to replay recorded snapshots * The Play function is used to play the snapshot forward by clicking on this selection. A marker will move across the screen when this selection is used. All selections in this area turn grey when they are active. * The Pause function is used to pause play of the snapshot. When this selection is clicked a second time the snapshot will start playing where it left off. * The Stop function is used to stop playing the snapshot. The snapshot will start from the beginning, if Play is selected after using the Stop function. Time Control Time control is used to control the snapshot replay. This function allows selection of a specific time frame, display of different views, and control of display speed. The following functions can be selected directly under Time Control. * The Bookmark selection allows you to add a specific comment in the current display and return to this point in the future. When this option is selected, a pop-up window is displayed. Enter a bookmark name and select OK. * The Note Pad can be selected to add comments to the snapshot replay file at the current point of time. When this option is selected, a pop-up window is displayed. Enter a comment for the snapshot file and select OK. * The Load Snapshot (blue folder) opens a snapshot file and makes it ready for further analysis. This function is also available by clicking on an available snapshot file from the Snapshot Manager. * The Down Arrow displays all Time Control options when selected. Individual options can also be selected by clicking on the item you want. * The Snapshot Display Speed can be controlled by selecting this option. Slow speeds of 1/8X, 1/4X, and 1/2X can be selected. The real time speed can also be selected at 1. Faster speeds of 2X, 4X, and 8X can also be obtained by using this selection. View Selections Each View Selection provides a different way of displaying vehicle data for analysis. The following functions can be selected under Available Views: Note: The parameter name will be shown in the original language used for capture if no translation is available for the name. * Parameter List View - Displays incoming information from the snapshot file. The current value of the parameters is displayed on the screen. * Log View - Contains all the information from the snapshot file. All parameter values are listed in the order they were recorded. Specific parameters can be added or removed from a watchlist by clicking on the appropriate item. * State View - Shows the values of all parameters in a specific time frame. These values can be used for comparison with the trigger view. * Trigger View - Displays all system and user defined triggers. This function can be used when there is a combination of factors involved in a diagnostic problem. When a Trigger condition is met a caution triangle will be displayed on the screen. Triggers: * Load Triggers - Allows you to load a file containing trigger definitions. * Save Triggers - Allows you to save the trigger to your computer's hard drive. * Remove Trigger - Allows you to remove the current trigger. It will no longer be present. * Edit Trigger - Displays a pop-up window where you can modify the limits and parameters contained within a trigger. * Adds Trigger - Displays a pop-up window to configure a trigger. * DTC View - After the Play function is selected and this option is selected this function opens the list of recorded DTCs. * Line Graph View - Displays data that can be visualized against the time-axis. From this view, specific parameters can be selected for graphing by Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6330 checking the box under Selected. At the bottom of the graph there are four functions Zoom In (increase size), Zoom Out (decrease size), Bookmarks, and Pause Scrolling. Each of these functions can be accessed by clicking on them. Testing for Continuity Testing for Continuity Special Tools EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM) For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test Probe Caution). The following procedures verify good continuity in a circuit. With a Digital Multimeter (DMM) 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the Ohms position. 2. Disconnect the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 3. Disconnect the load. 4. Press the MIN MAX button on the DMM. 5. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 6. Connect the other lead of the DMM to the other end of the circuit. 7. If the DMM displays low or no resistance, the circuit has good continuity. With a Test Lamp Note: Only use the test lamp procedure on low impedance power and ground circuits. 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect one lead of the test lamp to one end of the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 5. Connect the other end of the circuit to ground. 6. If the test lamp illuminates (full intensity), then the circuit has good continuity. Testing for Electrical Intermittents Testing for Electrical Intermittents Special Tools EL-39200 Digital Multimeter For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Perform the following procedures while wiggling the harness from side to side. Continue this at convenient points (about 6 inches apart) while watching the test equipment. * Testing for Short to Ground (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Short to Ground) * Testing for Continuity (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Continuity) * Testing for a Short to Voltage (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for a Short to Voltage) If the fault is not identified, perform the procedure below using the MIN MAX feature on the EL-39200 DMM. This feature allows you to manipulate the circuit without having to watch the EL-39200. The EL-39200 will generate an audible tone when a change is detected. Note: The EL-39200 must be used in order to perform the following procedure since the EL-39200 can monitor current, resistance or voltage while recording the minimum (MIN), and maximum (MAX) values measured. 1. Connect the EL-39200 to both sides of a suspected connector (still connected), or from one end of a suspected circuit to the other. Refer to Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6331 Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter) for information on connecting the EL-39200 to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the EL-39200 to the V (AC) or V (DC) position. 3. Press the range button of the EL-39200 in order to select the desired voltage range. 4. Press the MIN MAX button of the EL-39200. The EL-39200 displays 100 ms RECORD and emits an audible tone (beep). Note: The 100 ms RECORD mode is the length of time an input must stay at a new value in order to record the full change. 5. Simulate the condition that is potentially causing the intermittent connection, either by wiggling the connections or the wiring, test driving, or performing other operations. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions). 6. Listen for the audible Min Max Alert which indicates that a new minimum or maximum value has been recorded. 7. Press the MIN MAX button once in order to display the MAX value and note the value. 8. Press the MIN MAX button again in order to display the MIN value and note the value. 9. Determine the difference between the MIN and MAX values. * If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is 1 V or greater an intermittent open or high resistance condition exists. Repair the condition as necessary. * If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is less than 1 V, an intermittent open or high resistance condition does not exist. Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections Special Tools EL-35616 Terminal Test Probe Kit For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). When the condition is not currently present, but is indicated in DTC history, the cause may be intermittent. An intermittent may also be the cause when there is a customer complaint, but the symptom cannot be duplicated. Refer to the Symptom Table of the system that is suspect of causing the condition before trying to locate an intermittent condition. Most intermittent conditions are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. Inspect for the following items: * Wiring broken inside the insulation * Poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector * Poor terminal to wire connection-Some conditions which fall under this description are poor crimps, poor solder joints, crimping over the wire insulation rather than the wire itself, and corrosion in the wire to terminal contact area, etc. * Pierced or damaged insulation can allow moisture to enter the wiring causing corrosion. The conductor can corrode inside the insulation, with little visible evidence. Look for swollen and stiff sections of wire in the suspect circuits. * Wiring which has been pinched, cut, or its insulation rubbed through may cause an intermittent open or short as the bare area touches other wiring or parts of the vehicle. * Wiring that comes in contact with hot or exhaust components * Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions) in order to duplicate the conditions required, in order to verify the customer concern. * Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Electrical Intermittents) for test procedures to detect intermittent open, high resistance, short to ground, and short to voltage conditions. * Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure) for advanced intermittent diagnosis and Vehicle Data Recorder operation. Testing for Terminal Fretting Some intermittent conditions can be caused by wire terminal fretting corrosion. Fretting corrosion is a build-up of insulating, oxidized wear debris that can form when there is a small motion between electrical contacts. The oxidized wear debris can pile up enough at the electrical contact spots that the electrical resistance across the connection increases. Movement between the contacting surfaces as small as 10 to 100 microns can cause fretting. To put this in perspective, a sheet of paper is about 100 microns thick, so fretting motion is small and hard to see. Vibration and thermal expansion/contraction are the main sources that create fretting motion. Since vehicles vibrate and can experience large temperature swings, they are a good source for fretting motion. Tin, copper, nickel, and iron surfaces are all susceptible to fretting corrosion. Fretting corrosion can be difficult to see but it looks like small, dark smudges on the terminals contact surface. To correct a fretting condition disconnect the suspect connector and add Nyogel lubricant 760G (dielectric grease) to both sides of the connector Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6332 terminals. Then reconnect the connector and wipe away any excess lubricant. This will correct the additional terminal contact resistance due to the terminal fretting corrosion. Testing for Proper Terminal Contact It is important to test terminal contact at the component and any inline connectors before replacing a suspect component. Mating terminals must be inspected to ensure good terminal contact. A poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector may be the result of contamination or deformation. Contamination may be caused by the connector halves being improperly connected. A missing or damaged connector seal, damage to the connector itself, or exposing the terminals to moisture and dirt can also cause contamination. Contamination, usually in the underhood or underbody connectors, leads to terminal corrosion, causing an open circuit or intermittently open circuit. Deformation is caused by probing the mating side of a connector terminal without the proper adapter. Always use the EL-35616 when probing connectors. Other causes of terminal deformation are improperly joining the connector halves, or repeatedly separating and joining the connector halves. Deformation, usually to the female terminal contact tang, can result in poor terminal contact causing an open or intermittently open circuit. Testing for Proper Terminal Contact in Bussed Electrical Centers It is very important to use the correct test adapter when testing for proper terminal contact of fuses and relays in a bussed electrical center. Use EL-35616-35 to test for proper terminal contact. Failure to use EL-35616-35 can result in improper diagnosis of the bussed electrical center. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact: 1. Separate the connector halves. 2. Visually inspect the connector halves for contamination. Contamination may result in a white or green build-up within the connector body or between terminals. This causes high terminal resistance, intermittent contact, or an open circuit. An underhood or underbody connector that shows signs of contamination should be replaced in its entirety: terminals, seals, and connector body. 3. Using an equivalent male terminal / terminated lead, verify that the retention force is significantly different between a known good terminal and the suspect terminal. Replace the female terminal in question. Flat Wire (Dock and Lock) Connectors There are no serviceable parts for flat wire (dock and lock) connectors on the harness side or the component side. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact: 1. Remove the component in question. 2. Visually inspect each side of the connector for signs of contamination. Avoid touching either side of the connector as oil from your skin may be a source of contamination as well. 3. Visually inspect the terminal bearing surfaces of the flat wire circuits for splits, cracks, or other imperfections that could cause poor terminal contact. Visually inspect the component side connector to ensure that all of the terminals are uniform and free of damage or deformation. 4. Insert the appropriate adapter from the on the flat wire harness connector in order to test the circuit in question. Control Module/Component Voltage and Grounds Poor voltage or ground connections can cause widely varying symptoms. * Test all control module voltage supply circuits. Many vehicles have multiple circuits supplying voltage to a control module. Other components in the system may have separate voltage supply circuits that may also need to be tested. Inspect connections at the module/component connectors, fuses, and any intermediate connections between the voltage source and the module/component. A test lamp or a DMM may indicate that voltage is present, but neither tests the ability of the circuit to carry sufficient current. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. Refer to Circuit Testing (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Circuit Testing) and Power Distribution Schematics (See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Starting and Charging/Power and Ground Distribution/System Diagram/Power Distribution Schematics). * Test all control module ground and system ground circuits. The control module may have multiple ground circuits. Other components in the system may have separate grounds that may also need to be tested. Inspect grounds for clean and tight connections at the grounding point. Inspect the connections at the component and in splice packs, where applicable. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. Refer to Circuit Testing (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Circuit Testing) and Ground Distribution Schematics (See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Starting and Charging/Power and Ground Distribution/System Diagram/Ground Distribution Schematics). Temperature Sensitivity * An intermittent condition may occur when a component/connection reaches normal operating temperature. The condition may occur only when the component/connection is cold, or only when the component/connection is hot. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6333 * Freeze Frame, Failure Records, Snapshot, or Vehicle Data Recorder data may help with this type of intermittent condition, where applicable. * If the intermittent is related to heat, review the data for a relationship with the following: - High ambient temperatures - Underhood/engine generated heat - Circuit generated heat due to a poor connection, or high electrical load - Higher than normal load conditions, towing, etc. * If the intermittent is related to cold, review the data for the following: - Low ambient temperatures-In extremely low temperatures, ice may form in a connection or component. Inspect for water intrusion. - The condition only occurs on a cold start. - The condition goes away when the vehicle warms up. * Information from the customer may help to determine if the trouble follows a pattern that is temperature related. * If temperature is suspected of causing an intermittent fault condition, attempt to duplicate the condition. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions) in order to duplicate the conditions required. Electromagnetic Interference and Electrical Noise Some electrical components/circuits are sensitive to electromagnetic interference or other types of electrical noise. Inspect for the following conditions: * A misrouted harness that is too close to high voltage/high current devices such as secondary ignition components, motors, generator etc.-These components may induce electrical noise on a circuit that could interfere with normal circuit operation. * Electrical system interference caused by a malfunctioning relay, or a control module driven solenoid or switch-These conditions can cause a sharp electrical surge. Normally, the condition will occur when the malfunctioning component is operating. * Improper installation of non-factory or aftermarket add on accessories such as lights, 2-way radios, amplifiers, electric motors, remote starters, alarm systems, cell phones, etc.-These accessories may lead to interference while in use, but do not fail when the accessories are not in use. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Checking Aftermarket Accessories). * Test for an open diode across the A/C compressor clutch and for other open diodes. Some relays may contain a clamping diode. * The generator may be allowing AC noise into the electrical system. Incorrect Control Module * There are only a few situations where reprogramming a control module is appropriate: - A new service control module is installed. - A control module from another vehicle is installed. - Revised software/calibration files have been released for this vehicle. Note: DO NOT re-program the control module with the SAME software/calibration files that are already present in the control module. This is not an effective repair for any type of concern. * Verify that the control module contains the correct software/calibration. If incorrect programming is found, reprogram the control module with the most current software/calibration. Refer to Control Module References (See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning) for replacement, setup, and programming. Testing for Short to Ground Testing for Short to Ground Special Tools * EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM) * EL 35616-200 - Test Light-Probe Kit For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test Probe Caution). The following procedures test for a short to ground in a circuit. With a Digital Multimeter (DMM) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6334 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the Ohms position. 4. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the other lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. If the DMM does NOT display infinite resistance (OL), there is a short to ground in the circuit. With a Test Lamp 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect one lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to one end of the circuit to be tested. 5. If the test lamp illuminates, there is a short to ground in the circuit. Fuse Powering Several Loads 1. Review the system schematic and locate the fuse that is open. 2. Open the first connector or switch leading from the fuse to each load. 3. Connect a DMM across the fuse terminals (be sure that the fuse is powered). * When the DMM displays voltage the short is in the wiring leading to the first connector or switch. * If the DMM does not display voltage refer to the next step. 4. Close each connector or switch until the DMM displays voltage in order to find which circuit is shorted. Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter Special Tools EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM) For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test Probe Caution). Digital Multimeter (DMM) Basic Requirements Service information is validated using digital multimeters that meet or exceed the following requirements. Using a multimeter that does not meet these basic requirements may give inaccurate readings which could lead to an incorrect diagnosis. Display and Settings 1. Four digits displayed 2. Voltage, amperage, resistance, frequency, diode test settings, and min-max function 3. Display positive and negative values Voltage 1. Have at least 10 Mohm input impedance 2. Test a DC voltage range of 0.1-1000 V. 3. Test an AC voltage range of 0.1-1000 V. Amperage 1. Test a DC amperage range of 0.1µA-10 A. 2. Test an AC amperage range of 0.1µA-10 A. Resistance Test a resistance range of 0.1 ohm-40 Mohm and displays infinite for a value greater than 40 Mohm (O.L. (Over-load)) Frequency Test for a frequency range of 0.5 HZ-199 K HZ Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6335 Diode Test 1. Apply at least 1 mA when performing the diode bias test 2. Display the break over voltage drop (0-3 V) of a forward biased diode 3. Display infinite (O.L. (Over-load)) when a diode is reverse biased Min-Max Readings 1. Can update at a 1 ms sample rate 2. Saves and displays minimum and maximum values Note: Circuits which include any solid state control modules, such as the engine control module (ECM), should only be tested with a 10 MOhms or higher impedance digital multimeter such as the EL-39200. The EL-39200 instruction manual is a good source of information and should be read thoroughly upon receipt of the DMM as well as kept on hand for future reference. A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present if the impedance is low enough, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. In other words, if there is not enough current, the test lamp will not illuminate even though voltage is present. The ohmmeter function on a DMM shows how much resistance exists between 2 points along a circuit. Low resistance in a circuit means good continuity. Note: Disconnect the power feed from the suspect circuit when measuring resistance with a DMM. This prevents incorrect readings. DMMs apply such a small voltage to measure resistance that the presence of voltages can upset a resistance reading. Diodes and solid state components in a circuit can cause a DMM to display a false reading. To find out if a component is affecting a measurement take a reading once, then reverse the leads and take a second reading. If the readings differ the solid state component is affecting the measurement. Following are examples of the various methods of connecting the DMM to the circuit to be tested: * Probe both ends of the connector and either hold the leads in place while manipulating the connector or tape the leads to the harness for continuous monitoring while you perform other operations or test driving. Refer to Probing Electrical Connectors (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Probing Electrical Connectors). * Disconnect the harness at both ends of the suspected circuit where it connects either to a component or to other harnesses. * If the system that is being diagnosed has a specified pinout or breakout box, it may be used in order to simplify connecting the DMM to the circuit or for testing multiple circuits quickly. Using Connector Test Adapters Using Connector Test Adapters Special Tools EL 35616 - Terminal Test Probe Kit For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Caution: Do not insert test equipment probes (DMM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the EL-38125-580 GM Approved Terminal Release Tool Kit in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the EL-38125-580 GM Approved Terminal Release Tool Kit , ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the EL-38125-580 GM Approved Terminal Release Tool Kit label on the inside of the EL-38125-580 GM Approved Terminal Release Tool Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Using Fused Jumper Wires Using Fused Jumper Wires Special Tools J 36169-A Fused Jumper Wire Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6336 Note: A fused jumper may not protect solid state components from being damaged. The J 36169-A includes small clamp connectors that provide adaptation to most connectors without damage. This fused jumper wire is supplied with a 20-A fuse which may not be suitable for some circuits. Do not use a fuse with a higher rating than the fuse that protects the circuit being tested. AFL/EPC Connectors AFL/EPC Connectors Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. 1. For connectors with a bolt in the dress cover, turn the bolt counterclockwise to remove the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6337 2. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the top of the wire dress cover. Slide the CPA forward. 3. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6338 View showing depressing of the lever lock release tab. View of connector in released position. 4. Disconnect the connector from the component. 5. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the dress cover. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs and remove the dress cover. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6339 6. Release the rear lower half of the wiredress cover. 7. Release the tabs that are holding the wiredress cover to the connector body. 8. Remove the nose piece by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the slots on both ends of the connector body. Gently pry the nose piece out of the connector. J 38125-216 can also be used to remove the nose piece. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6340 9. Use the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by lifting the terminal retaining tabs on the inside of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Bosch Connectors (BSK) Bosch Connectors (BSK) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6341 Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 3. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 4. Insert the J 38125-561 tool into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 5. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Bosch Connectors (ECM) Bosch Connectors (ECM) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6342 1. Locate the assist lever on the top of the connector. Move the assist lever to the forward position. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6343 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the connector. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the locking tabs and remove the dress cover. 4. The terminal positive assurance (TPA) is located in the front of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6344 5. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove TPA from the connector. 6. Use the J 38125-213 or the J 38125-556 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6345 Note: Ensure that the dress cover and connector body are both in the released position before reassembling. Failure to do so may cause damage to the connector and component. Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Bosch Connectors (0.64) Bosch Connectors (0.64) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While pressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock until the lever is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Pull the rubber boot that covers the wires back to expose the end of the connector dress cover. 4. Place the connector locking lever in the center of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6346 5. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs that are on the wire end of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover and connector body and pry up. 6. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs located on the opposite side of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover at the connector end and pry up. 7. Remove the dress cover. 8. Cut the tie wrap on the wire bundle. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6347 9. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting a small flat-bladed tool into the small slot in the end of the slider and pushing on the TPA until it comes out of the connector. When the TPA exits the opposite side of the connector, gasp the TPA and pull it completely out of the connector. 10. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 11. Insert the J 38125-560 into the 2 triangular cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 12. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Terminal Replacement Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6348 1. Prior to installation the terminal must be aligned so the (1) coding lugs align with the (2) coding grooves on the connector. 2. Once the terminal is aligned, slide the terminal into the cavity until the retainer has engaged in the cavity of the connector. 3. Slide the TPA in the connector body and seat it using a small flat bladed tool. The TPA is seated when it is flush with the contact housing. 4. Secure the wires to the connector body using a tie wrap and replace the dress cover and grommet. Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Pull out the slider on the connector position assurance (CPA) until it is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6349 5. Insert the J 38125-557 into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Connector Position Assurance Locks Connector Position Assurance Locks The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of the connector. CPAs are used in various connectors throughout the vehicle. CPAs are also used in all SIR system electrical connectors. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals, of the connector. Connector Repairs Connector Repairs Connector Repairs contains a list of all connector repairs. The connector repairs are listed by the connector manufacturer and then by connector type. If the technician cannot identify the manufacturer of the connector, refer to Identifying Connectors below. Knowing the connector manufacturer will assist in finding the correct connector repair from the following list: * Connector Position Assurance Locks (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Connector Position Assurance Locks) * Terminal Position Assurance Locks (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Terminal Position Assurance Locks) * AFL/EPC Connectors (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/AFL/EPC Connectors) * Bosch Connectors (BSK) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Bosch Connectors (BSK))Bosch Connectors (0.64) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Bosch Connectors (0.64))Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT))Bosch Connectors (ECM) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Bosch Connectors (ECM)) * Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack))Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Push to Seat))Delphi Connectors Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6350 (Pull To Seat) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Pull to Seat))Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W))Delphi Connectors (Micro.64) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Micro .64))Delphi Connectors (12-Way) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (12-Way))Delphi Connectors (Steering Gear) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Steering Gear)) * FCI Connectors (Lever Lock) (See: General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/FCI Connectors (Lever Lock))FCI Connectors (SIR) (See: General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/FCI (SIR)) * FEP Connectors (Steering Gear) (See: General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/FEP Connectors (Steering Gear)) * JST Connectors (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/JST Connectors) * Kostal Connectors (Glow Plug Control Module) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Kostal Connectors (Glow Plug Control Module))Kostal Connectors (Transmission) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Kostal Connectors (Transmission)) * Molex Connectors (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Molex Connectors) * Sumitomo Connectors (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Sumitomo Connectors) * Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way))Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor))Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap))Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way))Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module)) * Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Yazaki Connectors (2-Way))Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Yazaki Connectors (16-Way)) * Repairing Connector Terminals (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Repairing Connector Terminals) Connector Anatomy 1 - Connector Positive Assurance (CPA) 2 - Assist Lever 3 - Wiredress Cover 4 - Seal Strain/Relief Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6351 5 - Slide Left Hand 6 - Slide Right Hand 7 - Terminal Positive Assurance (TPA) 8 - Terminal Positive Assurance (TPA) 9 - Connector Seal 10 - Connector Housing 11 - Inner Connector Identifying Connectors Knowing the connector manufacturer is helpful when trying to locating the correct connector repair procedure. There are many different connector designs used on GM vehicles and it is sometimes difficult to identify the connector manufacturer. The information in this document should help with the identification of connector manufactures. The following connector manufacturers make most of the connectors found in GM vehicles: * AFL/EPC (Alcoa Fujikura Ltd./Engineered Plastics Components) * Bosch * Delphi * FCI (Framatome Connectors International) * JAE (Japan Aviation Electronics) * JST (Japan Solderless Terminals) * Kostel * Molex * Sumitomo * Tyco/AMP * Yazaki Identifying the manufacturer of a connector is often difficult. When trying to determine the manufacturer of a connector, look for specific identifying marks that are unique to that connector supplier. Most of these identify marks are hard to find or see. Check the connector carefully and refer to the information below for pictures and descriptions of connector identification markings. * Most of AFLs connectors have EPC on their connector body. Some of the smaller connectors will not have any markings on them. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6352 * In some cases Bosch will actually be printed on the connector. If Bosch does not appear on the connector, look for the Bosch logo. The Bosch logo is a circle with a blunted arrow inside. This logo can appear anywhere on the connector and is often very small. * In some cases Delphi will actually be printed on the connector. If Delphi is not printed on the connector, look for PED. In both cases there is no specific orientation for Delphi or PED and they can appear anywhere on the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6353 * FCI connectors may have the FCI logo on their connectors. The logo is the letters FCI with an "A" above it. * JAE connector have JAE in small letters on their connectors. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6354 * JST connectors have JST in small letters on their connectors, similar to that above. The location of the logo will vary with the connector size and style. * Kostel has an "LK" with a circle around it. These connector are usually used as a transmissions connection. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6355 * Most Molex connectors will have the Molex logo on the dresscover of the connector. In some cases the connectors may have MX followed by another letter. The third letter indicates where the connector was made. A connector with MXD is a Molex connector made in Detroit. Sumitomo has a unique symbol on their connector and possibly a part number. The symbol is similar to that of a diamond lying on its side, similar to that shown. The logo could appear anywhere but the most common place is at the wire side of the housing. * Tyco/AMP has many different and unique connector designs. Some may or may not have identifiable marks on them. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6356 * Yazaki has a wedge or arrow shape, similar to that shown. Delphi Connectors (Push to Seat) Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Follow the steps below in order to repair push to seat connectors. 1. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device, the connector position assurance (CPA) device, and/or the secondary lock. 2. Separate the connector halves (1). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6357 3. Use the proper pick or removal tool (1) in order to release the terminal. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 4. Gently pull the cable and the terminal (2) out of the back of the connector. 5. Re-form the locking device if you are going to reuse the terminal (1). 6. To repair the terminal, refer to Terminal Repair. Terminal Repair 1. Slip the cable seal away from the terminal. 2. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 3. Slip a new cable seal onto the wire. 4. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 5. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 6. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. 7. Slide the cable seal toward the terminal. 8. Crimp the cable seal and the insulation. 9. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply grease to the connector. Reinstalling Terminal 1. In order to reuse a terminal or lead assembly, refer to Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Wiring Repairs). 2. Ensure that the cable seal is kept on the terminal side of the splice. 3. Insert the lead from the back until it catches. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Terminated Lead Repair 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Find the appropriate terminated lead. 3. Use the appropriate splice sleeves depending on the gauge size. 4. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves). Delphi Connectors (Pull to Seat) Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) Special Tools Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6358 J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal If the terminal is visibly damaged or is suspected of having a faulty connection, the terminal should be replaced. Follow the steps below in order to repair pull-to-seat connectors: 1. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) device and/or the secondary lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component or separate the connectors for in-line connectors. 3. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device. 4. Insert the proper pick or removal tool into the front of the connector body. Note: On connectors with more than one terminal the service loop may not be large enough to remove the terminal and crimp on a new one. If the terminal wire does not have a large enough service loop for removal, cut the wire 5 cm (2 in) behind the connector before removal. 5. Grasp the wire at the back of the connector body and gently push the terminal out the front of the connector body. Terminal Repair 1. If the wire needed to be cut in order to remove the terminal, gently push a small length of the same size wire through the back of the connector cavity until there is enough wire exposed in order to crimp on a new terminal. If the wire was not cut, cut the existing wire as close to the old terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 4. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. Terminal Installation 1. Align the terminal and pull the wire from the back of the connector in order to seat the terminal. 2. If necessary, cut the new wire to proper length and splice with existing circuit. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves). 3. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply dielectric grease to the connector. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Micro .64) Delphi Connectors (Micro.64) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6359 Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro.64 connectors. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. The lever lock may be located on the top or sides of the wire dress cover. View of a typical Micro 64 connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6360 Depress the lock and pull the lever over and past the lock. View of the connector when released from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6361 View of another type of Micro 64 connector. Depress the locks that are located on both sides of the wiredress cover and pull the lever over and past the locks. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6362 View of the connector when released from the component. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the front of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool push down on one of the locking tabs and pull the cover up until the dress cover releases. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. 4. Once the front 2 locks are unlocked, lift the front of the dress cover and pull it forward. Note: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 5. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the small slot on the TPA and pushing down until the TPA releases. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6363 Note: Be careful not to angle or rock the J 38125-21 tool when inserting it into the connector or the tool may break. 6. Insert the J 38125-21 tool into the round canal between the terminals cavities at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Follow the steps below in order to repair Micro 64 connector terminals. The Micro 64 connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-64 (M jaw) was developed to crimp Micro 64 terminals. The J 38125-64 crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. The J 38125-64 crimping tool is also designed to crimp both the wire and the insulation at the same time. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro 64 terminals. Note: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gauge wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 1. Cut the wire as close to the damaged terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6364 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert terminal into the appropriate terminal holder until it hits bottom and stops. The correct terminal holder is determined by the wire size. Also ensure that the terminals wings are pointing towards the former on the tool and the release locator. 5. Insert the stripped cable into the terminal. Insulation should be visible on both sides of the terminal insulation wings. 6. Compress the handles until the ratchet automatically releases. 7. Place the terminal into the appropriate cavity and assemble the connector. Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6365 Terminal Removal Procedure There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W connectors. These connectors are very similar but use different terminals and have some minor physical differences also. The first connector design of the Micro-Pack 100W (1) has a white connector interface that holds the terminals. The second design of the Micro-Pack 100W (2) has a gray interface to hold the terminals. Also, the first design has terminal cavities that are further apart (3 mm centerline) and offset from the other row of terminal cavities in the connector. The second design has terminals cavities that are closer together (2.54 mm centerline) and aligned vertically. One other way to identify the second design is the thin strip of material that runs along the outside of the cavities. Note: There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W terminals which are very similar. Ensure that you have the correct terminal before crimping the new terminal to the wire. The first design connector uses the longer terminal (1) that has a raised area in front of the recess in the terminal. The second design connector uses the shorter terminal without the raised area. Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro-Pack 100W connectors. Some Micro-Pack 100W connector disassembly procedures will vary. Use this procedure as a guide. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6366 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Locate the nose piece locking tabs that are positioned on the side of the connector nose piece. The connector nose piece acts as a terminal positive assurance (TPA) and may be referred to as such. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to push in one of the locking tabs while gently pulling on the same side of the nose piece. 4. Repeat the procedure for the other locking tab and remove the nose piece. 5. Remove the wire dress cover. The following is a general procedure for wire dress cover removal. Use this procedure as a guide, some dress cover removal procedures may vary. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6367 6. Use fingers to squeeze the 2 locking legs of the cover. 7. Apply pressure and gently rock the cover until one locking leg is unseated. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6368 8. Continue to apply pressure and rock the cover until the second locking leg is unseated. Repeat procedure for the other side of the dress cover and remove the cover. 9. Use J 38125-12A to gently lift the terminal retaining tab while gently pulling the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. If the terminal is severely bent or damaged, it may be possible on some connectors to push the wire out of the front of the connector instead of pulling it through. This will prevent damage to the internal seals of the connector. Once the terminal is pushed out of the connector, cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible and pull the wire through the connector. Terminal Repair Procedure The Micro-Pack 100W connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool was developed to crimp Micro-Pack 100W terminals. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro-Pack 100 terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6369 1. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. Note: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gauge wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert the terminal into the crimp tool until the core wings are flush with the anvil on the crimp tool. Be sure that the wings are pointed toward the crimp tool former and release the spring locator. The locator will hold the terminal in place. Inspect the alignment of the terminal wings with the crimp tool former. If the terminal wings are wider than the crimp tool former, remove the terminal and bend the terminal wings in slightly. 5. Place stripped wire into terminal. 6. Crimp the new terminal to the wire. If a jam occurs, press the emergency release to open applicator. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6370 Terminal Replacement Procedure After the terminal is crimped to the wire perform the following procedure in order to replace Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the Terminal Removal Procedure. Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The following is the proper procedure for the repair of Weather Pack(R) Connectors. 1. Separate the connector halves (1). 2. Open the secondary lock. A secondary lock aids in terminal retention and is usually molded to the connector (1). 3. Grasp the wire and push the terminal to the forward most position. Hold the wire in this position. 4. Insert the Weather Pack(R) terminal removal tool J 38125-10A into the front (mating end) of the connector cavity until it rests on the cavity shoulder (1). 5. Gently pull on the wire to remove the terminal through the back of the connector (2). Note: Never use force to remove a terminal from a connector. 6. Inspect the terminal and connector for damage. Repair as necessary. Refer to Repairing Connector Terminals (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Repairing Connector Terminals). 7. Reform the lock tang (2) and reset terminal in connector body. 8. Close secondary locks and join connector halves. 9. Verify that circuit is complete and working satisfactorily. 10. Perform system check. Delphi Connectors (12-Way) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6371 Delphi Connectors (12-Way) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) and slide the lever lock away from the connector body. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs on the dress cover of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool release all of the locking tabs. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6372 4. Release the lower wire dress cover locking tab. 5. Release the upper wire dress cover locking tab. 6. Once the locks are unlocked, lift the dress cover off. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6373 Note: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 7. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the locking tabs on both sides of the TPA. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. 8. Remove the nose piece by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the locking tabs on both sides of the nose piece. Gently pry the nose piece out of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6374 9. Insert the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Delphi Connectors (Steering Gear) Delphi Connectors (Steering Gear) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6375 Removal Procedure 1. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the locking tab on the connector. 2. Push down the locking tab to release the connector. The small flat-bladed tool may need to be pushed down and angled back slightly to depress the locking tab. Pull on the connector body while releasing the locking tab to disconnect the connector. FCI Connectors (Lever Lock) FCI Connectors (Lever Lock) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6376 Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. 1. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. 2. The release tab is located on the top of the wiredress cover. 3. View of connector in released position. 4. Disconnect the connector from the component. 5. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the dress cover. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs and remove the dress cover. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6377 6. Use a small flat-blade tool to slide the terminal position assurance (TPA) up one notch on both ends of the connector. The TPA is located underneath the wire dress cover. For the larger terminals insert the J 38125-556 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. For the smaller terminals insert the J 38125-560 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6378 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. FCI (SIR) FCI Connectors (SIR) Removal Procedure Note: The orange CPA must be released first to disconnect or to connect the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6379 1. Lift the orange CPA vertically (avoid lifting on an angle to the connector) approximately 4 mm to release the connector. Use a small flat-bladed tool to help release the orange CPA. The orange CPA can also be released manually without any tools. 2. Grab the connector on both sides and lift the connector vertically to disconnect the connector. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6380 1. Lift the orange CPA vertically approximately 4 mm before installing the connector. Use a small flat-bladed tool to help release the orange CPA. The orange CPA can also be released manually without any tools. 2. Line up the connector key tabs with the initiator key slots. Grab the connector on both sides and push the connector down into the initiator connector sub assembly until fully seated. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6381 3. After the connector is fully seated, push down the orange CPA with your thumb. Push down until the orange CPA is touching the yellow cover on the connector. FEP Connectors (Steering Gear) FEP Connectors (Steering Gear) Removal Procedure 1. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the locking tab on the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6382 2. Push down the locking tab to release the connector. The small flat-bladed tool may need to be pushed down and angled back slightly to depress the locking tab. Pull on the connector body while releasing the locking tab to disconnect the connector. JST Connectors JST Connectors Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. While depressing the lock, remove the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6383 2. Locate the two indents of the terminal position assurance (TPA) located on the bottom of the connector body. Note: The TPA cannot be removed from the connector while there are terminals present in the connector body. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to very carefully raise the TPA on both sides of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6384 4. View of the TPA when removed from the connector body. 5. Use the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the left side of the terminal release cavity as shown in the graphic. Use the tool to move the terminal release to the right with a gentle prying motion. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Kostal Connectors (Glow Plug Control Module) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6385 Kostal Connectors (Glow Plug Control Module) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure View of typical connector. View of connector in released position. 1. Locate the assist lever at the back of the connector. Move the assist lever to the rear position. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6386 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove the dress cover. 4. Slide the dress cover forward and off of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6387 5. The terminal positive assurance (TPA) is located in the front and rear of the connector. Note: The front TPA cannot be removed from the connector. Only move it to the preset position. 6. Use a small flat-blade tool to move the front TPA to the preset position, outboard approximately 0.125 in. (3 mm). 7. Use a small flat-blade tool to completely remove the rear TPA from the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6388 8. Use the J 38125-24 or the J 38125-560 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 9. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Kostal Connectors (Transmission) Kostal Connectors (Transmission) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6389 1. While depressing the lock, twist and remove the connector from the component. 2. Locate the terminal position assurance (TPA). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6390 Note: The TPA cannot be removed from the connector while there are terminals present in the connector body. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to push the TPA until it bottoms out. 4. Use the J 38125-28 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal cavity as shown in the graphic. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 5. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Terminal Replacement Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6391 After the terminal is crimped to the wire, perform the following procedure in order to replace the terminal. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. Locate the terminal position assurance (TPA). 4. Use a small flat-blade tool to push the TPA until it bottoms out. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6392 5. Ensure the TPA is fully seated. The TPA should be centered and flush with the connector body when viewed. Molex Connectors Molex Connectors Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the top of the wire dress cover. Slide the CPA forward. 2. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6393 3. The lever should be in the full forward position. 4. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6394 5. Remove the dress cover by using a flat bladed tool to release the dress cover locking tabs and lift up on the dress cover. 6. Cut the tie wrap that holds the wires to the connector body. 7. Use a small flat-blade tool to pry one side of the nose piece up to the pre-stage position. When the nose piece is in the pre-staged position, the nose piece will be raised above the connector body the length of the step in the nose piece. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6395 8. Use a small flat-blade tool to pry the other side of the piece to the pre-stage position. If the nose piece is higher than the first step in the nose piece, gently push down on the nose piece until it meets with resistance from the connector body, you should feel the nose piece click into position. 9. Insert the J 38125-213 into the small terminal release hole on the nose piece and gently pull on the back of the wire. 10. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Refer to the terminal crimping procedure in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit. Terminal Replacement Procedure After the terminal is crimped to the wire, perform the following procedure in order to replace the terminal. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6396 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the connector disassembly procedure. Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the connector body and pull the CPA out. The CPA is on the wire harness side of connector. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Use a small flat-bladed tool to gently pry off the dress cover by inserting the tool under the cover opposite the harness side and prying up. 4. Remove the cover. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6397 5. Using a small flat-bladed tool, push on the side of the nose piece retainer while pushing the nose piece forward with your thumb. This will release the terminal position assurance (TPA). 6. Insert the J 38125-12A into the corresponding terminal release cavity. The release cavities are the 2 center rows of cavities on one half of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6398 7. Pressing the J 38125-12A tool in the release cavity of the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and crimper in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. Slide the lever lock away from the connector body. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs on the dress cover of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool release all of the locking tabs. 4. Once the locks are unlocked, lift the dress cover off. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6399 Note: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 5. Release the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the blue locking tabs on both ends of the connector. Gently slide the TPA up to the released position on both ends. 6. For the larger terminals insert the J 38125-13A tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. For the smaller terminals insert the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6400 View of the release tool being used for the larger terminals. View of the release tool being used for the larger terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6401 View of the release tool being used for the smaller terminals. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6402 Side view of connector. View of top of connector. 1. Locate the assist lever and lock on the top of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6403 2. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. 3. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6404 4. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the rear of the connector. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. 5. Once the locking tabs are unlocked, slide the inner connector out of the rear of the connector housing. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6405 6. Use the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by pressing on the tang. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Repairing Connector Terminals Repairing Connector Terminals Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Use the following repair procedures in order to repair the following: * Push to Seat terminals * Pull to Seat terminals Some terminals do not require all of the steps shown. Skip the steps that do not apply for your terminal repair. The J-38125 contains further information. 1. Cut off the terminal between the core and the insulation crimp. Minimize any wire loss. For cable seal terminals, remove the seal. 2. Apply the correct cable seal per gauge size of the wire, if used. Slide the seal back along the wire in order to enable insulation removal. 3. Remove the insulation. 4. For sealed terminals only, align the seal with the end of the cable insulation. 5. Position the strip in the terminal. For sealed terminals, position the strip and seal in the terminal. 6. Hand crimp the core wings. 7. Hand crimp the insulation wings. For sealed terminals, hand crimp the insulation wings around the seal and the cable. 8. Solder all of the hand crimp terminals excepting Micro-Pack 100.64 size. Soldering Micro-Pack 100 World terminals may damage the terminal. Sumitomo Connectors Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6406 Sumitomo Connectors Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6407 3. Remove the dress cover by using a flat-blade tool to release the connector locking tabs and pulling off the dress cover. 4. Relieve the tension on the nose piece retainers by inserting J 38125-12A into the single retainer slot on the end of the nose piece and gently prying out the locking tab. Repeat the process for both of the nose piece locking tabs on the opposite side of the nose piece. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6408 5. Once the nose piece retainers are relaxed, use the J 38125-552 to pull up the nose piece by hooking the tool under the nose piece and pulling up. The nose piece should raise slightly. 6. On the opposite side of the nose piece, use the J 38125-552 to pull up the nose piece by hooking the tool under the nose piece and pulling up. The nose piece should release completely. If the nose piece does not come off, repeat the procedure on the opposite side. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6409 7. The illustration above identifies the entry canal where the terminal release tool will be inserted, and the terminal cavity. * Terminal (1) * Entry Canal (2) 8. Insert the J 38125-553 tool into the entry canal and pry up on the terminal retainer. The terminal retainer is a small plastic piece on the top of the terminal. The terminal retainer must be held up while the terminal is pulled out of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6410 9. The illustration shows a cutaway view of the connector to aid the technician in releasing the terminal retainer. 10. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Refer to the terminal crimping procedure in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit. Terminal Replacement Procedure After the terminal is crimped to the wire, perform the following procedure in order to replace the terminal. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the connector disassembly procedure. Terminal Position Assurance Locks Terminal Position Assurance Locks The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6411 2. Insert the J 38125-11A tool into the cavity on the lower right hand face of the connector until the terminal release tang access panel slides over. 3. Ensure that the terminal release tang access panel is in the correct location to access the terminals. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6412 5. Insert the J 38125-11A into the terminal release tang access slot located behind the access panel of the connector and press down on the terminal while carefully pulling the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component by pressing down on the connector position assurance (CPA). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6413 2. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting the tool in the small recess on the side of the connector and pushing up until the TPA releases from the connector body. The TPA should raise just slightly. Do not try to remove the TPA. Note: The TPA on this connector cannot be removed unless the terminals are removed first. The TPA will come out of the connector body, but only slightly. When the TPA is slightly raised the terminals can be removed. Using excessive force to remove the TPA with the terminals still in the connector will damage the connector. 3. Repeat the process for the other side of the connector. 4. Ensure that the TPA is in the proper position to remove the terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6414 5. While pushing the terminal forward, insert the J 38125-24 in the release cavity above the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6415 2. Insert a small flat-blade tool in the slot below the front loaded terminal position assurance (TPA) and pry up. 3. Remove the TPA by pulling it out of the connector. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-553 on a slight upward angle into the cavity below the terminal to be removed. Ensure that the pointed on the end of the tool is facing the bottom of the terminal and it stays in contact with the terminal until it stops on the plastic terminal retainer. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6416 6. Gently pry the plastic terminal retainer down and carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6417 1. While depressing the lock, pull the two connector halves apart. Note: The TPA is fragile and may break if not done carefully. 2. Use a small flat-blade tool to very carefully push the terminal position assurance (TPA) towards the face of the connector on both sides of the connector. 3. View of the male half of the connector with female terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6418 4. View of the female half of the connector with male terminals. 5. Use the J 38125-215 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. View of the female half of the connector with male terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6419 7. View of the male half of the connector with female terminals. 8. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers A circuit breaker is a protective device that is designed to open the circuit when a current load is in excess of the rated breaker capacity. If there is a short or other type of overload condition in the circuit, the excessive current will open the circuit between the circuit breaker terminals. Two types of circuit breakers are used. Circuit Breaker - This type opens when excessive current passes through it for a period of time. It closes again after a few seconds, and if the cause of the high current is still present, it will open again. The circuit breaker will continue to cycle open and closed until the condition causing the high current is removed. Positive Temperature Coefficient (PTC) Circuit Breaker - This type greatly increases its resistance when excessive current passes through it. The excessive current heats the PTC device, as the device heats its resistance increases. Eventually the resistance gets so high that the circuit is effectively open. Unlike the ordinary circuit breaker the PTC unit will not reset until the circuit is opened, by removing the voltage from its terminals. Once the voltage is removed the circuit breaker will re-close within a second or 2. Circuit Protection - Fuses Circuit Protection - Fuses Special Tools EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM) For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6420 The fuse is the most common method of an automotive wiring circuit protection. Whenever there is an excessive amount of current flowing through a circuit the fusible element will melt and create an open or incomplete circuit. Fuses are a one time protection device and must be replaced each time the circuit is overloaded. To determine if a fuse is open, remove the suspected fuse and examine if the element in the fuse is broken (2). If not broken (1), also check for continuity using a Digital Multimeter (DMM) or a continuity tester. If the element is broken or continuity is suspect, replace the fuse with one of equal current rating. Circuit Protection - Fusible Links Circuit Protection - Fusible Links Special Tools EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM) For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Fusible link is wire designed to melt and break continuity when excessive current is applied. It is often located between or near the battery and starter or electrical center. Use a continuity tester or a Digital Multimeter (DMM) at each end of the wire containing the fusible link in order to determine if it is broken. If broken, it must be replaced with fusible link of the same gauge size. Repairing a Fusible Link Note: Fusible links cut longer than 225 mm (approximately 9 in) will not provide sufficient overload protection. Flat Wire Repairs Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6421 Flat Wire Repairs The flat wire within the flex wiring harness is not serviceable. If an open or short exists within the flex wiring harness the complete harness must be replaced. GMLAN Wiring Repairs GMLAN Wiring Repairs Special Tools * EL-38125-10 - Splice Sleeve Crimping Tool * J 38125-5 - Ultra Torch Special Tool * DuraSeal splice sleeves * A wire stripping tool For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: * A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. * A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The GM Local Area Network (GMLAN) System requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working on GMLAN connectors and terminals. GMLAN Repairs Note: When making a repair to any GMLAN network, the original wire length after the repair must be the same length as before the repair. If the network is a twisted pair, the twist must be maintained after the repair is completed. GMLAN has 2 types of networks, low speed and high speed. Low speed GMLAN has a single wire and works at slow speeds. High speed GMLAN has 2 wires in a twisted pair and works at higher speeds. For more information on GMLAN, refer to Data Link Communications Description and Operation ( See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Information Bus/Description and Operation). GMLAN Connector Terminal Repair Note: A terminated lead can be used to replace damaged connector terminals for both high speed and low speed GMLAN systems. When making a connector terminal repair on a GMLAN high speed system with twisted pair wires, do not untwist the wires more than necessary to make the repair. If the individual terminals are damaged on any GMLAN connection, use the appropriate connector repair procedure in order to repair the terminal. Refer to Connector Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Connector Repairs) for the appropriate connector repair procedure. GMLAN Wire Repair Note: Refer to Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Wiring Repairs) in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gauge size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and EL-38125-10 - tool. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the DuraSeal splice sleeves. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6422 Note: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: * Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. * Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. * Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert to regional wiring gauge size. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the EL-38125-10 - tool in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the splice sleeve crimp tool. The crimp tool has four nests, one for each color. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6423 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs Caution: Do not solder repairs under any circumstances as this could result in the air reference being obstructed. If the heated oxygen sensor pigtail wiring, connector, or terminal is damaged the entire oxygen sensor assembly must be replaced. Do not attempt to repair the wiring, connector, or terminals. In order for the sensor to function properly it must have a clean air reference. This clean air reference is obtained by way of the oxygen sensor signal and heater wires. Any attempt to repair the wires, connectors or terminals could result in the obstruction of the air reference and degrade oxygen sensor performance. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6424 The following guidelines should be used when servicing the heated oxygen sensor: * Do not apply contact cleaner or other materials to the sensor or vehicle harness connectors. These materials may get into the sensor, causing poor performance. Also, the sensor pigtail and harness wires must not be damaged in such a way that the wires inside are exposed. This could provide a path for foreign materials to enter the sensor and cause performance problems. * Neither the sensor nor vehicle lead wires should be bent sharply or kinked. Sharp bends, kinks, etc., could block the reference air path through the lead wire. * Do not remove or defeat the oxygen sensor ground wire (where applicable). Vehicles that utilize the ground wire sensor may rely on this ground as the only ground contact to the sensor. Removal of the ground wire will also cause poor engine performance. * To prevent damage due to water intrusion, be sure that the peripheral seal remains intact on the vehicle harness connector. High Temperature Wiring Repairs High Temperature Wiring Repairs Special Tools * EL-38125-10 - Splice Sleeve Crimping Tool * J 38125-5 - Ultra Torch * DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). High Temperature Wiring Wiring that is exposed to high temperatures, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time may use materials i.e. wires, connectors, and shielding that has a higher heat rating than typical wiring. When making a repair in a high temperature area observe the following: * Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature to replace any damaged wire. * Replace any heat shielding that is removed. * Cover any DuraSeal splice sleeves with SCT1 shrink tubing. * After making a wiring repair, ensure that the location of the wiring is not moved closer to the heat source. Identifying High Temperature Wiring Wiring that is exposed to high temperature, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time need special considerations when making wiring repairs. Areas that may be exposed to higher temperatures can be identified by heat resistant materials that are being used in those areas. These materials may include heat reflective tape, moon tape, and high temperature shrink tubing. Also conduit and other protective coverings may be used. Because conduit or similar coverings are used throughout the vehicle regardless of the temperature, it may be necessary for the technician to determine if an area is exposed to excessive heat before making a wiring repair. Obvious areas of consideration would be any area located near the exhaust manifolds, catalytic converter, and exhaust pipes. Items Required * DuraSeal splice sleeves to crimp and seal connections * High temperature SCT1 shrink tubing to protect the splice sleeves * Terminated leads or pigtails * The correct tools to remove the terminals from the connectors Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature of the same or larger gauge size as the original wire when repair damage wire. Also replace any reflective tape that you remove during the repair. High Temperature Wire Repair Note: Refer to Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Wiring Repairs) in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature rating of the same gauge size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the EL-38125-10 - tool and then encapsulate the splice sleeve using the high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6425 Note: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: * Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. * Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. * Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert to regional wiring gauge size. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Slide a section of high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing down the length of wire to be spliced. Ensure that the shrink tubing will not interfere with the splice procedure. 5. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 6. Use the EL-38125-10 - tool in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the splice sleeve crimp tool. The crimp tool has four nests, one for each color. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6426 7. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 8. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 9. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 10. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 11. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6427 12. Center the high temperature SCT1 shrink tube over the DuraSeal splice sleeve. 13. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the high temperature heat shrink tubing. 14. Gradually move the heat from the center to the open end of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. 15. Replace any reflective tape and clips that may have been remove during the repair. Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation If the wire insulation has been chafed, or broken, enough to show the conductive portion of the wire, and the wire is not damaged, determine the length of insulation that needs to be repaired. If the repair is less than 280 mm (11 in), cut the wire within the damaged area. Than slide the appropriate heat shrink tubing (listed below) over the wire, and repair the wire by splicing the wires together. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves). Once the wire is spliced together slide heat shrink tubing over the damaged area and apply heat to seal the repaired wire. If the wire is damaged, or the damaged area is larger than 280 mm (11 in), than replace the damaged wire by splicing in a new section of wire. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6428 SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs Special Tools * EL-38125-10 - Splice Sleeve Crimping Tool * J 38125-5 - Ultra Torch * DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: * A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. * A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides the necessary low resistance contact integrity for these sensitive, low energy circuits. The Supplemental Inflatable Restraint (SIR) System/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working with the SIR/SRS, and the wiring components, such as connectors and terminals. SIR/SRS Connector Repair (Plastic Body and Terminal Metal Pin) Note: Do not use the terminals in the kit in order to replace damaged SIR/SRS system terminals. Use either an SIR/SRS pigtail or a terminated lead from the SIR Repair Kit Tray. The terminals in the SIR/SRS system are made with a special plating. This plating provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. Pigtail repair packs are available for SIR/SRS connectors with eight or less terminals. Only the connector body is available for connectors with more than eight terminals. Terminated leads can be used to replace damaged terminals when replacing the connector body. SIR/SRS Component Wire Pigtail Repair Note: Do not make wire, connector, or terminal repairs on components with wire pigtails. A wire pigtail is a wire or wires attached directly to the device, not by a connector. If a wiring pigtail is damaged, you must replace the entire component, with pigtail. The inflatable restraint steering wheel module coil is an example of a pigtail component. SIR/SRS Wire Repair Note: Refer to Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Wiring Repairs) in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6429 If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gauge size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and EL-38125-10 - tool. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the DuraSeal splice sleeves. Note: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: * Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. * Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. * Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert to regional wiring gauge size. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the EL-38125-10 - tool in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the splice sleeve crimp tool. The crimp tool has four nests, one for each color. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6430 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Connector Position Assurance (CPA) The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of a connector. CPAs are used in all SIR System connectors and also in some connectors of other systems. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals of a connection. Terminal Position Assurance (TPA) The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6431 Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Special Tools * EL-38125-10 - Splice Sleeve Crimping Tool * J 38125-5 - Ultra Torch * DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Note: Use only DuraSeal splice sleeves. Other splice sleeves may not protect the splice from moisture or provide a good electrical connection. Use DuraSeal splice sleeves to form a one-to-one splice on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. Use DuraSeal splice sleeves where there is special requirements such as moisture sealing. Follow the instructions below in order to splice copper wire using DuraSeal splice sleeves. Note: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: * Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. * Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. * Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert to regional wiring gauge size. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6432 5. Use the EL-38125-10 - tool in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the splice sleeve crimp tool. The crimp tool has four nests, one for each color. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6433 * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Splicing Inline Harness Diodes Splicing Inline Harness Diodes Many vehicle electrical systems use a diode to isolate circuits and protect the components from voltage spikes. When installing a new diode use the following procedure. 1. Open the harness. * If the harness is taped, remove the tape. * To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing seam ripper (available from sewing supply stores) in order to cut open the harness. * If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the diode. 2. If the diode is taped to the harness, remove all of the tape. 3. Check and record the current flow direction and orientation of diode. 4. Remove the inoperative diode from the harness with a suitable soldering tool. Note: If the diode is located next to a connector terminal remove the terminal(s) from the connector to prevent damage from the soldering tool. 5. Carefully strip away a section of insulation next to the old soldered portion of the wire(s). Do not remove any more than is needed to attach the new diode. 6. Check current flow direction of the new diode, being sure to install the diode with correct bias. Reference the appropriate service manual wiring schematic to obtain the correct diode installation position. 7. Attach the new diode to the wire(s) using 60/40 rosin core solder. Before soldering attach some heat sinks (aluminum alligator clips) across the diode wire ends to protect the diode from excessive heat. Follow the manufacturer's instruction for the soldering equipment. 8. Reinstall terminal(s) into the connector body if previously removed. Note: To prevent shorts to ground and water intrusion, completely cover all exposed wire and diode attachment points with tape. 9. Tape the diode to the harness or connector using electrical tape. Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable Twisted/shielded cable is used in order to protect wiring from electrical noise. Two-conductor cable of this construction is used between the radio and the Delco-Bose(R) speaker/amplifier units and other applications where low level, sensitive signals must be carried. Follow the instructions below in order to repair the twisted/shielded cable. 1. Remove the outer jacket (1). Use care not to cut into the drain wire of the mylar tape. 2. Unwrap the tape. Do not remove the tape. Use the tape in order to rewrap the twisted conductors after the splice is made. 3. Prepare the splice. Untwist the conductors and follow the instructions for Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves). Staggering the splices by 65 mm (2.5 in) is recommended. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6434 Note: Apply the mylar tape with the aluminum side inward. This ensures good electrical contact with the drain wire. 4. Re-assemble the cable. * Rewrap the conductors with the mylar tape. If the mylar tape is damaged, use 3M product AL-36FR to replace the damaged mylar tape. * Use caution not to wrap the drain wire in the tape (1). * Follow the splicing instructions for copper wire and splice the drain wire. * Wrap the drain wire around the conductors and tape with electrical tape to replace the outer insulation. 5. Tape over the entire cable. Use a winding motion when you apply the tape. Wiring Repairs Wiring Repairs The Wiring Repairs section contains the following types of wiring repair information. Using these elements together will make wiring repair faster and easier: * Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections) * Flat Wire Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Flat Wire Repairs) * GMLAN Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/GMLAN Wiring Repairs) * High Temperature Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/High Temperature Wiring Repairs) * Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs) * Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves) * Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable) * Splicing Inline Harness Diodes (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Inline Harness Diodes) * SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs) US English/Metric Conversion US English/Metric Conversion Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6435 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6436 Basic Digital Multimeter Requirements Basic Digital Multimeter Requirements Digital Multimeter (DMM) Basic Requirements Service information is validated using digital multimeters that meet or exceed the following requirements. Using a multimeter that does not meet these basic requirements may give inaccurate readings which could lead to an incorrect diagnosis. Display and Settings 1. Four digits displayed 2. Voltage, amperage, resistance, frequency, diode test settings, and min-max function 3. Display positive and negative values Voltage 1. Have at least 10 Mohm input impedance 2. Test a DC voltage range of 0.1-1000 V. 3. Test an AC voltage range of 0.1-1000 V. Amperage 1. Test a DC amperage range of 0.1µA-10 A. 2. Test an AC amperage range of 0.1µA-10 A. Resistance Test a resistance range of 0.1 ohm-40 Mohm and displays infinite for a value greater than 40 Mohm (O.L. (Over-load)) Frequency Test for a frequency range of 0.5 HZ-199 K HZ Diode Test 1. Apply at least 1 mA when performing the diode bias test 2. Display the break over voltage drop (0-3 V) of a forward biased diode 3. Display infinite (O.L. (Over-load)) when a diode is reverse biased Min-Max Readings 1. Can update at a 1 ms sample rate 2. Saves and displays minimum and maximum values Testing Ground and Low Reference Circuits Testing Ground and Low Reference Circuits Because a test lamp can light with up to 200 ohm in a ground or low reference circuit they are not recommended to be used for this type of test. A low impedance test lamp can light and indicate the circuit is good when there is as much as 20-30 ohm present, while a high impedance test lamp can light with up to 200 ohm present in the circuit. This is why the Digital Multi-Meter (DMM) is used when validating a ground or low reference circuit continuity. When using the DMM there are many vehicle conditions that can affect the ground and low reference continuity testing. If these conditions are not met, a ground or low reference circuit test can fail on a good circuit. This may cause longer diagnosis time and incorrect component replacement. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6437 Any current flow through a ground or low reference circuit, while being tested, will skew the DMM continuity reading, or display a reading higher than when there is no current flowing. Performing a ground or low reference circuit continuity test, in reference to the vehicles battery negative terminal, will have the highest risk of failing a good ground or low reference circuit test than any other ground reference point. The best ground test points would be a control module housing (if the control modules housing is metal and grounded), door jamb striker (if attached to metal), under dash metal frame work, engine block, or body ground studs (other than where the negative battery cable is attached). A typical DMM ground or low reference circuit continuity reading can be as high as 100 ohm with the ignition ON, and drop to 15-25 ohm after the ignition is turned OFF. The reading will drop below 10 ohm after 30-40 seconds, then below 5 ohm after 60 seconds. Once the vehicle completely goes to sleep (generally 3-10 minutes) the reading will drop below 0.3 ohm. The following list of conditions may need to be met to ensure a valid continuity reading on a ground or low reference circuit: * Ignition OFF * Key out of the ignition switch (when not equipped with keyless entry and remote start) * Retained Accessory Power (RAP) OFF (open and close the driver door after ignition OFF) * Battery charger set at a 2 A or less charge rate * Scan tool not communicating with any vehicle control module (in some cases it may need to be disconnected from the DLC) * All entry doors closed * Headlamps OFF (auto headlamps disabled) * Any delay lighting OFF * HVAC after blow OFF * Any accessory that can work when the ignition is OFF * Wait up to 60 seconds (after all other listed conditions are met) Activating the DOOR LOCK function with a key fob can greatly reduce the time to achieve a valid ground or low reference continuity test result. Terminal Wiring Repair Terminal Wiring Repair Special Tools * EL-38125-10 - Splice Sleeve Crimp Tool * EL-38125-580 - Terminal Release Tool Kit * J-38125-5 - Ultra Torch * EL-35616 - Connector Test Adapter Kit For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Note: All repairs near the engine manifold, turbo engine and all exhaust pipes should follow the High Temperature Wiring Repair procedures. 1. Find the appropriate connector end view within the connector end view section. The connector end view has the following information: * Diagnostic probe tool * Terminal release tool * Terminal/terminated lead part numbers 2. Determine if a terminal is damaged. Note: Not using the proper test kit probe may cause damage to the terminal(s) that are probed. * Locate the diagnostic probe tool from the connector end view. The connector end view describes the color and part number to help the technician find and use the correct tool. * Connect the probe tool to the Digital Multimeter. * Insert the probe tool into the cavity and follow the procedures from the Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter). 3. Disconnect the connector body to perform the repair. Note: Several procedures for specific connector bodies are called out in Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Wiring Repairs). Use the following repair procedures to repair the following terminals: Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6438 Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack))Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Push to Seat))Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Pull to Seat))Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W))Delphi Connectors (Micro.64) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Micro .64) )Delphi Connectors (12-Way) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (12-Way))Delphi Connectors (Steering Gear) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Steering Gear)) * The TPA and CPA should be removed before releasing the terminal for the connector body. * Look at the connector end view to locate the cavity of the damaged terminal and find the proper terminal release tool from the terminal release tool kit. Note: Using the incorrect terminal release tool can damage the connector body. * Insert the terminal release tool into the cavity. Note: Some terminals have a lever that must be disengaged before the terminal can be released. Gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Terminated Lead Repair Terminated Lead Repair Special Tools * EL-38125-10 - Splice Sleeve Crimp Tool * EL-38125-580 - Terminal Release Tool Kit * J-38125-5 - Ultra Torch * EL-35616 - Connector Test Adapter Kit For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Note: All repairs near the engine manifold, turbo engine and all exhaust pipes should follow the High Temperature Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/High Temperature Wiring Repairs) procedures. Terminated leads are terminals that are crimped onto wires. The terminated lead can be used throughout the vehicle since it is designed for temperatures up to 150°C. The length of the wire is 450 mm. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6439 The DuraSeal splice sleeve has the following 2 critical features: * A special heat shrink tubing that environmentally seals the splice. The shrink tubing contains a sealing adhesive inside the shrink tubing. * A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp that provides the necessary contact integrity for sensitive low energy circuits. 1. Use the connector end view to identify the correct terminated lead. 2. The terminated lead package should include a DuraSeal splice sleeve. If not, use the chart to identify the correct part. 3. Open the harness by removing any tape: Use a sewing seam ripper, or a comparable tool, to cut open the harness, to avoid wire insulation damage. 4. Depending on how many terminals need repairs, cut the terminal and wire back at least 40 mm. Try to keep the harness wire length the same. If more than one terminated lead is required, stagger the lengths by 40 mm. This helps reduce the bundle size of the wire harness. 5. Use the EL-38125-10 - tool in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the splice sleeve crimp tool. The crimp tool has four nests, one for each color. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6440 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the J-38125-5 - ultra torch , apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Cooler, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T - Fluid Oil Cooler Flush Transmission Cooler: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Fluid Oil Cooler Flush INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 02-07-30-052G Date: March 02, 2011 Subject: Automatic Transmission Oil Cooler Flush and Flow Test Essential Tool J 45096 TransFlow(R) Models: 2011 and Prior Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks 2003-2010 HUMMER H2 2006-2010 HUMMER H3 with Automatic Transmission/Transaxle including Allison(R) Transmissions Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 02-07-30-052F (Section 07 - Transmission/Transaxle). Important All labor operations that include removal of the transmission from the vehicle include labor time to flush the transmission oil cooler system. The J 45096 transmission oil cooling system flush and flow test tool replaces current tool J 35944-A. J 45096 is a self-contained unit utilizing a 12-volt flow meter, shop air supply and DEXRON(R) VI automatic transmission fluid (ATF). In the flush mode, transmission fluid is cycled through the transmission oil cooling system. High-pressure air is automatically injected into the fluid stream adding agitation to the ATF oil to enhance the removal of contaminated ATF oil and debris. In the flow mode, an electronic flow meter is used to measure the flow capability of the ATF oil cooling system. A digital display indicates the ATF oil flow rate in gallons per minute (GPM) along with the amount of ATF oil in the supply vessel, supply vessel ATF oil temperature, machine cycles and the operating mode. The supply oil vessel has 30 L (32 qt) capacity and the waste oil vessel has 32 L (34 qt) capacity. The waste oil vessel is constructed of a translucent composite material that allows the user to easily identify the oil level. The waste oil vessel can accommodate vacuum evacuation and gravity draining. In the code mode, a random, encrypted code is generated that can be used for verification of flow test results. Current essential cooler line adapters are used to connect the J 45096 to the automatic transmission oil cooler lines that allows J 45096 to adapt to General Motors passenger cars and light duty trucks, current and past models (except the Pontiac Vibe, Wave and Chevrolet Aveo). The tool may be adapted for use on the Pontiac Vibe, Wave and Chevrolet Aveo by dealership personnel with a barbed hose connector and rubber hose obtained locally. The Vibe's/Wave's/Aveo's transmission has a transmission oil requirement which is slightly different than DEXRON(R) VI ATF. However, flushing the cooler with DEXRON(R) VI automatic transmission fluid is an acceptable service procedure. Very little fluid remains in the cooler after the flush procedure and the residual DEXRON(R) VI ATF in the cooler is compatible with the Vibe's/Wave's/Aveo's transmission fluid. Notice Insufficient oil flow through the ATF oil cooling system will cause premature transmission failure. The required minimum ATF oil flow rate reading is directly related to the supply oil temperature. Refer to the flow rate reference chart for the oil flow rate specification based on the temperature of the ATF in the supply vessel. Helpful Hints for Maintaining the Temperature at or above 18°C (65°F) Important - The temperature of the supply vessel oil must be 18°C (65°F) or greater for J 45096 to operate. It is recommended to store the J 45096 in an area of the dealership where the room temperature remains at or above 18°C (65°F) when not in use. - Do not attempt to increase the fluid temperature in the Transflow(R) machine with an engine oil dipstick, or any other immersion type heater. The Transflow(R) machine has a check valve in the supply reservoir. Inserting a heater will damage the check valve and the subsequent repair expense would be the dealer's responsibility. - A heater blanket, P/N J-45096-10, is available for the Transflow(R) transmission cooling system flushing tool. This heater fastens around the Transflow(R) internal supply vessel and runs on 110 volts AC. The heater will warm the ATF in the supply vessel to at least 18°C (65° F) and has a thermostat to hold a constant temperature. Store the Transmission Cooling System Service Tool, J 45096, Transflow(R) machine in a room where the temperature is maintained at or above 18°C (65°F). Keep the ATF level in the reservoir low when the Transmission Cooling System Service Tool, J 45096, Transflow(R), is not in use. Store several gallons of oil in an area where the temperature is maintained at or above 18°C (65°F). Fill the reservoir of the J 45096 as needed before using the machine on Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Cooler, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T - Fluid Oil Cooler Flush > Page 6445 each repair. With the ATF in a tightly sealed container, place the container in a tub of hot water for a period of time. Then pour the ATF into the reservoir. This method works best with a low fluid level in the reservoir. Place the Transflow(R) machine in the direct sunlight with the cabinet door open to expose the reservoir to the rays of the warm sun. Flush / Flow Test Procedure Important All labor operations that include removal of the transmission from the vehicle and require the transmission oil pan or transmission side cover to be removed include labor time to flush the transmission oil cooler system. Refer to SI for Automatic Transmission Oil Cooler Flushing and Flow Test J 45096 for the appropriate procedure. Important The J 45096 can be used to flush the transmission oil cooler system on an Allison equipped vehicle, but the flow meter should not be utilized. Refer to SI for Automatic Transmission Oil Cooler Flushing and Flow Test J 45096 for the appropriate flow check procedure. Machine Displays After completion of the flush and flow test, the following information is to be recorded on the repair order. This information is displayed on the Transmission Cooling System Service Tool, J 45096, Transflow(R) machine when the dial is in the code position. - Tested flow rate (displayed in Gallons Per Minute (GPM) - Temperature (displayed is degrees Fahrenheit) - Cycle number (a number) - Seven digit Alpha/Numeric flow code (i.e. A10DFB2) Warranty Information Important All labor operations that include removal of the transmission from the vehicle include labor time to flush the transmission oil cooler system. Performing a transmission oil cooling system flush and flow test will use between 4.7-7.5 L (5-8 qts) of DEXRON(R)VI transmission fluid. The amount Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Cooler, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T - Fluid Oil Cooler Flush > Page 6446 of transmission fluid (ATF), (DEXRON(R)VI) (fluid) that is to be charged for the flush portion of the repair should not exceed the allowable charge for 7.5 L (2 gal) of fluid. This expense should be shown in the Parts Section of the warranty claim document. The Seven digit Alpha/Numeric flow code, i.e. A10DFB2, "MUST" be written on the job card and placed in the comments section of the warranty claim. Any repair that requires the technician to contact the Product Quality Center (PQC) must also include the seven digit flow code. The agent will request the seven digit flow code and add the information to the PQC case prior to providing authorization for the warranty claim. The Seven digit Alpha/Numeric flow code, i.e. A10DFB2, "MUST" be written on the job card, entered in the warranty claim labor operation Flush Code additional field (when available) and placed in the comments section of the warranty claim. Any repair that requires the technician to contact the Product Quality Center (PQC) must also include the seven digit flow code. The agent will request the seven digit flow code and add the information to the PQC case prior to providing authorization for the warranty claim. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Cooler, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T - Fluid Oil Cooler Flush > Page 6447 Transmission Cooler: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Water Or Coolant Contamination Information INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 08-07-30-035B Date: November 01, 2010 Subject: Information on Water or Ethylene Glycol in Transmission Fluid Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks with Automatic Transmission Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 08-07-30-035A (Section 07 - Transmission/Transaxle). Water or ethylene glycol in automatic transmission fluid (ATF) is harmful to internal transmission components and will have a negative effect on reliability and durability of these parts. Water or ethylene glycol in ATF will also change the friction of the clutches, frequently resulting in shudder during engagement or gear changes, especially during torque converter clutch engagement. Indications of water in the ATF may include: - ATF blowing out of the transmission vent tube. - ATF may appear cloudy or, in cases of extreme contamination, have the appearance of a strawberry milkshake. - Visible water in the oil pan. - A milky white substance inside the pan area. - Spacer plate gaskets that appear to be glued to the valve body face or case. - Spacer plate gaskets that appear to be swollen or wrinkled in areas where they are not compressed. - Rust on internal transmission iron/steel components. If water in the ATF has been found and the source of the water entry has not been identified, or if a leaking in-radiator transmission oil cooler is suspected (with no evidence of cross-contamination in the coolant recovery reservoir), a simple and quick test kit is available that detects the presence of ethylene glycol in ATF. The "Gly-Tek" test kit, available from the Nelco Company, should be obtained and the ATF tested to make an accurate decision on the need for radiator replacement. This can help to prevent customer comebacks if the in-radiator transmission oil cooler is leaking and reduce repair expenses by avoiding radiator replacement if the cooler is not leaking. These test kits can be obtained from: Nelco Company Test kits can be ordered by phone or through the website listed above. Orders are shipped standard delivery time but can be shipped on a next day delivery basis for an extra charge. One test kit will complete 10 individual fluid sample tests. For vehicles repaired under warranty, the cost of the complete test kit plus shipping charges should be divided by 10 and submitted on the warranty claim as a net item. The transmission should be repaired or replaced based on the normal cost comparison procedure. Important If water or coolant is found in the transmission, the following components MUST be replaced. - Replace all of the rubber-type seals. - Replace all of the composition-faced clutch plates and/or bands. - Replace all of the nylon parts. - Replace the torque converter. - Thoroughly clean and rebuild the transmission, using new gaskets and oil filter. Important The following steps must be completed when repairing or replacing. Flush and flow check the transmission oil cooler using J 45096. Refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 02-07-30-052F- Automatic Transmission Oil Cooler Flush and Flow Test Essential Tool J 45096 TransFlow. - Thoroughly inspect the engine cooling system and hoses and clean/repair as necessary. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Cooler, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T - Fluid Oil Cooler Flush > Page 6448 Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Mode Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations Transmission Mode Switch: Locations Powertrain Component Views Automatic Transmission Electronic Components 1 - Q8 Control Solenoid Valve Assembly 2 - B15 Transmission Internal Mode Switch 3 - B14A Transmission Output Shaft Speed Sensor 4 - B14C Transmission Input Shaft Speed Sensor Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Mount, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission Transmission Mount: Service and Repair 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission Transmission Mount Replacement - Left Side Transmission Mount Replacement - Left Side Removal Procedure 1. Remove the battery tray. Refer to Battery Tray Replacement (See: Starting and Charging/Battery/Battery Tray/Service and Repair). 2. Remove the underhood electrical center. 3. Support the engine and transmission. 4. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle (See: Maintenance/Vehicle Lifting/Service and Repair). 5. Remove the front transmission mount to frame bolt (1). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Mount, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 6456 6. Remove the rear transmission mount to rear transmission mount bracket bolt (1). 7. Lower the vehicle. 8. Remove the left transmission mount to transmission bolts (1). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Mount, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 6457 9. Remove the left transmission mount to frame rail bolts (1). 10. Lower the transmission enough to provide clearance for the left transmission mount. 11. Remove the left transmission mount (2). Installation Procedure 1. Install the left transmission mount (2). Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener Caution). 2. Install the left transmission mount to frame rail bolts (1) and tighten to 27 Nm (20 lb ft). 3. Raise the transmission until the transmission contacts the left transmission mount. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Mount, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 6458 4. Install the left transmission mount to transmission bolts (1) and tighten to 50 Nm (37 lb ft). 5. Raise the vehicle. 6. Install the rear transmission mount to rear transmission mount bracket bolt (1) and tighten to 110 Nm (81 lb ft). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Mount, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 6459 7. Install the front transmission mount to frame bolt (1) and tighten to 110 Nm (81 lb ft). 8. Lower the vehicle. 9. Remove the engine and transmission support. 10. Install the battery tray. Refer to Battery Tray Replacement (See: Starting and Charging/Battery/Battery Tray/Service and Repair). 11. Install the underhood electrical center. Transmission Front Mount Replacement Transmission Front Mount Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Mount, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 6460 Transmission Rear Mount Bracket Replacement Transmission Rear Mount Bracket Replacement (AWD) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Mount, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 6461 Transmission Rear Mount Replacement Transmission Rear Mount Replacement (AWD) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Mount, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 6462 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Mount, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 6463 Transmission Mount: Service and Repair 6T70/6T75 - Automatic Transmission Transmission Mount Replacement - Left Side Transmission Mount Replacement - Left Side Removal Procedure 1. Remove the battery tray. Refer to Battery Tray Replacement (See: Starting and Charging/Battery/Battery Tray/Service and Repair). 2. Remove the underhood electrical center. 3. Support the engine and transmission. 4. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle (See: Maintenance/Vehicle Lifting/Service and Repair). 5. Remove the front transmission mount to frame bolt (1). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Mount, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 6464 6. Remove the rear transmission mount to rear transmission mount bracket bolt (1). 7. Lower the vehicle. 8. Remove the left transmission mount to transmission bolts (1). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Mount, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 6465 9. Remove the left transmission mount to frame rail bolts (1). 10. Lower the transmission enough to provide clearance for the left transmission mount. 11. Remove the left transmission mount (2). Installation Procedure 1. Install the left transmission mount (2). Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener Caution). 2. Install the left transmission mount to frame rail bolts (1) and tighten to 27 Nm (20 lb ft). 3. Raise the transmission until the transmission contacts the left transmission mount. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Mount, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 6466 4. Install the left transmission mount to transmission bolts (1) and tighten to 50 Nm (37 lb ft). 5. Raise the vehicle. 6. Install the rear transmission mount to rear transmission mount bracket bolt (1) and tighten to 110 Nm (81 lb ft). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Mount, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 6467 7. Install the front transmission mount to frame bolt (1) and tighten to 110 Nm (81 lb ft). 8. Lower the vehicle. 9. Remove the engine and transmission support. 10. Install the battery tray. Refer to Battery Tray Replacement (See: Starting and Charging/Battery/Battery Tray/Service and Repair). 11. Install the underhood electrical center. Transmission Front Mount Replacement Transmission Front Mount Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Mount, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 6468 Transmission Rear Mount Replacement Transmission Rear Mount Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Mount, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 6469 Transmission Rear Mount Bracket Replacement Transmission Rear Mount Bracket Replacement (AWD) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Mount, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 6470 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Exploded Views Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Exploded Views 6L50/6L80/6L90 - Automatic Transmission Disassembled Views Park System Components 50 - A/Trans Case 600 - Park Pawl Shaft 601 - Park Pawl Spring 602 - Park Pawl 603 - Park Pawl Actuator Guide Pin 604 - Manual Shift Shaft Seal 605 - Park Pawl Actuator Guide Seal 606 - Park Pawl Actuator Guide 607 - Park Pawl Actuator Assembly 608 - Manual Shift Detent Lever Shaft 609 - Manual Shift Detent (w/Shaft Position Switch) Lever Assembly 610 - Manual Shift Detent Lever Pin 611 - Manual Shift Shaft Pin 6T70/6T75 - Automatic Transmission Disassembled Views Park System Components Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Exploded Views > Page 6475 500 - Park Pawl Actuator Bracket Bolt 501 - Park Pawl Actuator Bracket 502 - Park Pawl Shaft 503 - Park Pawl 504 - Park Pawl Spring 505 - Park Pawl Actuator Guide Pin 506 - Park Pawl Actuator Guide 507 - A/Trans Case Assembly 508 - Manual Shift Shaft Seal 509 - Park Pawl Actuator Assembly 510 - Manual Shift Shaft Pin 511 - Manual Shift Detent (w/Shaft Position Switch) Lever Assembly Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Exploded Views > Page 6476 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Connector Views P2 Transmission Shift Lever Position Indicator Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Service and Repair 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission Manual Shift Detent Lever with Shaft Position Switch Assembly Replacement Special Tools * DT-48550 Detent Lever Pin Remover * J 41229 Manual Shaft Pin Installer Removal Procedure 1. Remove the control valve body. Refer to Control Valve Body Replacement (See: Valve Body/Service and Repair/6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission/Control Valve Body Replacement). 2. Remove the manual shaft detent lever hub pin (1) using DT-48550. 3. Remove the manual shift shaft pin (5). Discard the pin. 4. Remove the manual shaft (2). Note: Disconnect the actuator rod (3) from the detent lever assembly. Do not remove the actuator rod from the transmission case. 5. Remove the manual shaft detent (w/shift position switch) lever assembly (4). Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 6479 Note: Connect the actuator rod (3) to the detent lever assembly. 1. Install the manual shaft detent (w/shift position switch) lever assembly (4). Note: Lubricate the shaft with automatic transmission fluid to prevent damage to the manual shift shaft seal during installation. 2. Install the manual shaft (2). 3. Install the manual shaft detent lever hub pin (1) using DT-48550. Install the Manual Shaft Detent Lever Hub Pin to height of (b) 7.9 mm (0.38 in). Caution: Use the manual shaft pin installer to install the pin at the correct height in order to properly secure the manual shaft. If you install the pin too deep, the case bore may crack. 4. Install the NEW manual shift shaft pin (5) using J 41229. Use a NEW pin to ensure proper engagement with the case. Inspect pin installed height is within (a) 7.2-8.2 mm (0.28-0.32 in). 5. Install the control valve body. Refer to Control Valve Body Replacement (See: Valve Body/Service and Repair/6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission/Control Valve Body Replacement). 6. Perform the transmission adaptive values learn procedure. Refer to Transmission Adaptive Values Learn (See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 6480 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Service and Repair 6T70/6T75 - Automatic Transmission Manual Shift Detent Lever with Shaft Position Switch Assembly Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 6481 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Pressure Test Port, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission Transmission Pressure Test Port: Service and Repair 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission Automatic Transmission Fluid Pressure Test Hole Plug Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Pressure Test Port, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 6486 Transmission Pressure Test Port: Service and Repair 6T70/6T75 - Automatic Transmission Automatic Transmission Fluid Pressure Test Hole Plug Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations Transmission Speed Sensor: Locations Powertrain Component Views Front Engine Components (LAF 1 of 2) 1 - Q38 Throttle Body 2 - G18 High Pressure Fuel Pump 3 - B23F Camshaft Position Sensor Intake 4 - B37 Engine Oil Pressure Switch 5 - B68 Knock Sensor 6 - B26 Crankshaft Position Sensor 7 - M64 Starter Motor 8 - Q2 A/C Compressor Clutch 9 - G13 Generator Front Engine Components (LAF 2 of 2) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 6490 1 - B47B Fuel Rail Pressure Sensor 2 - B74 Manifold Absolute Pressure Sensor 3 - Q17D Fuel Injector 4 4 - Q17C Fuel Injector 3 5 - B1 A/C Refrigerant Pressure Sensor 6 - Q17B Fuel Injector 2 7 - Q17A Fuel Injector 1 Left Rear Engine Components (LAF) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 6491 1 - T8D Ignition Coil 4 2 - T8C Ignition Coil 3 3 - T8B Ignition Coil 2 4 - T8A Ignition Coil 1 5 - Q6F Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Intake 6 - Q6E Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Exhaust 7 - B52A Heated Oxygen Sensor 1 8 - B52B Heated Oxygen Sensor 2 9 - B34 Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor 10 - B23E Camshaft Position Sensor - Exhaust 11 - Q12 Evaporative Emission Purge Solenoid Valve Top of the Engine Components (LF1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 6492 1 - B47B Fuel Rail Pressure Sensor 2 - Q17A Fuel Injector 1 3 - Q17C Fuel Injector 3 4 - Q17E Fuel Injector 5 5 - Q17F Fuel Injector 6 6 - Q17D Fuel Injector 4 7 - Q17B Fuel Injector 2 Left Front of the Engine Components (LF1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 6493 1 - T8B Ignition Coil 2 2 - T8D Ignition Coil 4 3 - T8F Ignition Coil 6 4 - G18 High Pressure Fuel Pump 5 - B34 Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor 6 - M64 Starter Motor 7 - B68B Knock Sensor 2 8 - B37 Engine Oil Pressure Switch 9 - B1 A/C Refrigerant Pressure Sensor 10 - Q2 A/C Compressor Clutch 11 - G13 Generator Right Rear of the Engine Components (LF1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 6494 1 - B74 Manifold Absolute Pressure Sensor 2 - T8E Ignition Coil 5 3 - T8C Ignition Coil 3 4 - Q12 Evaporative Emission Purge Solenoid Valve 5 - Q38 Throttle Body 6 - B23B Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 1 Intake 7 - B23D Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 2 Intake 8 - Q6D Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Bank 2 Intake 9 - Q6C Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Bank 2 Exhaust 10 - B23C Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 2 Exhaust 11 - Q6B Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Bank 1 Intake 12 - Q6A Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Bank 1 Exhaust 13 - B23A Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 1 Exhaust 14 - B68A Knock Sensor 1 15 - B26 Crankshaft Position Sensor 16 - T8A Ignition Coil 1 Front of the Exhaust System Components (LF1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 6495 1 - B52C Heated Oxygen Sensor - Bank 1 Sensor 1 2 - B52D Heated Oxygen Sensor - Bank 1 Sensor 2 3 - B52F Heated Oxygen Sensor - Bank 2 Sensor 2 4 - B52E Heated Oxygen Sensor Bank 2 Sensor 1 Automatic Transmission Electronic Components Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 6496 1 - Q8 Control Solenoid Valve Assembly 2 - B15 Transmission Internal Mode Switch 3 - B14A Transmission Output Shaft Speed Sensor 4 - B14C Transmission Input Shaft Speed Sensor Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > 6L50/6L80/6L90 - Automatic Transmission Transmission Speed Sensor: Diagrams 6L50/6L80/6L90 - Automatic Transmission Component Location Component Location 1 - Reaction Carrier Assembly 2 - Control Valve Body Assembly 3 - Input Carrier Assembly 4 Valve Channel Plate 5 - Output Carrier Assembly 6 - Park Gear 7 - Control Solenoid (w/Body and TCM) Valve Assembly 8 - Drive Link Assembly 9 - Drive Sprocket 10 - Torque Converter Assembly 11 - A/Trans Fluid Pump Assembly 12 - Differential Carrier Assembly 13 - Front Differential Ring Gear 14 - Driven Sprocket 15 - 1-2-3-4 Clutch Assembly Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > 6L50/6L80/6L90 - Automatic Transmission > Page 6499 16 - Low and Reverse Clutch Assembly 17 - 2-6 Clutch Assembly 18 - 3-5 Reverse Clutch Assembly 19 - 4-5-6 Clutch Assembly 20 - A/Trans Input Speed Sensor Assembly 21 - Reaction Sun Gear Assembly Disassembled Views Disassembled Views Case and Associated Parts 1 - Control Valve Body Cover Bolt 2 - Control Valve Body Cover Assembly 3 - Control Valve Body Cover Gasket 4 - Control Valve Body Bolt 5 - Control Valve Body Cover Hole Seal 6 - Control Solenoid Valve Heat Sink Bolt 7 - Control Solenoid (w/Body and TCM) Valve Assembly 8 - Control Valve Body Filter Plate Assembly 9 - Control Valve Body Bolt 10 - Control Valve Body Bolt Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > 6L50/6L80/6L90 - Automatic Transmission > Page 6500 11 - Control Valve Body Assembly 12 - Control Valve Body Spacer Plate Assembly 13 - A/Trans Fluid Level Control Valve 14 - A/Trans Fluid Level Control Valve Gasket 15 - A/Trans Output Speed Sensor Bolt 16 - A/Trans Output Speed Sensor Assembly 17 - Manual Shaft Detent Spring Bolt 18 - Manual Shaft Detent Lever Spring Assembly 19 - A/Trans Input Speed Sensor Assembly 20 - A/Trans Input Speed Sensor Assembly O-Ring Seal 21 - A/Trans Input Speed Sensor Bolt 22 Fill Cap 23 - Fill Cap Seal 24 - Torque Converter Housing Gasket 25 - A/Trans Fluid Pump Seal Assembly 26 - Torque Converter with Fluid Pump Housing Assembly 27 - Torque Converter and Differential Housing Bolt 28 - A/Trans Fluid Fill Tube Plug Assembly 29 - Torque Converter Assembly 3-5 Reverse Clutch Assembly 500 - A/Trans Input Shaft Speed Sensor Reluctor Wheel Retainer Ring 501 - A/Trans Input Shaft Speed Sensor Reluctor Wheel 502 - 3-5-Reverse Clutch Piston 503 - 3-5-Reverse Clutch Piston Return Spring Assembly 504 - 3-5-Reverse Clutch Piston Inner Seal 505 - 3-5-Reverse Clutch Piston Inner Seal 506 - 3-5-Reverse Clutch Piston Dam Seal 507 - 3-5-Reverse Clutch Apply Plate 508 - 3-5-Reverse Clutch Plate 509 - 3-5-Reverse Clutch (w/Friction Material) Plate Assembly 510 - 3-5-Reverse Clutch Backing Plate 511 - 3-5-Reverse Clutch Backing Plate Retainer Ring Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > 6L50/6L80/6L90 - Automatic Transmission > Page 6501 Transmission Speed Sensor: Diagrams 6T70/6T75 - Automatic Transmission Component Location Component Location Component Locations 1 - Manual Shift Detent Lever Assembly (w/Shaft Position Switch) 2 - Trans Fluid Level Indicator 3 Reaction Carrier Assembly 4 - Output Speed Sensor 5 - Input Carrier Assembly 6 - Output Carrier Assembly 7 - Front Differential Transfer Drive Gear 8 - Front Differential Transfer Drive Gear Support Assembly 9 - Torque Converter Assembly 10 - Park Pawl Actuator Assembly 11 - Fluid Pump Drive Link Assembly 12 - Park Pawl 13 - Front Differential Transfer Driven Gear Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > 6L50/6L80/6L90 - Automatic Transmission > Page 6502 14 - Front Differential Drive Pinion Gear 15 - Park Gear 16 - Torque Converter and Support and Fluid Pump Housing Assembly 17 - Front Differential Carrier Assembly 18 - Front Differential Carrier Baffle 19 - Front Differential Ring Gear 20 - Front Differential Drive Pinion Gear Lube Tube 21 - 1-2-3-4 Clutch Assembly 22 - Low and Reverse Clutch Assembly (OWC) 23 - Low and Reverse Clutch 24 - 2-6 Clutch Assembly 25 - 3-5-Reverse Clutch Assembly 26 - 4-5-6 Clutch Assembly 27 - Input Speed Sensor 28 - Case Cover Assembly 29 - Control Valve Body Cover 30 Input Shaft Speed Sensor Reluctor Wheel 31 - Control Valve Lower Body Assembly 32 - Control Valve Upper Body Assembly 33 - Control Valve Channel Plate Assembly 34 - Control Solenoid Valve Assembly (w/Body and TCM) 35 - Manual Valve Disassembled Views Disassembled Views Case and Associated Parts Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > 6L50/6L80/6L90 - Automatic Transmission > Page 6503 1 - Control Valve Body Cover Assembly 2 - Transmission Fluid Level Indicator Assembly 3 - Fluid Level Indicator Tube - Model Dependent 4 - Fluid Level Indicator Tube Seal - Model Dependent 5 Control Valve Body Cover Assembly Gasket 6 - Control Valve Body Cover Stud 7 - Control Valve Body Cover Bolt 8 - Control Valve Body Bolt 9 - Control Valve Body Bolt 10 - Control Valve Body Cover Wiring Connector Hole Seal 11 - Control Solenoid Valve Spring 12 - Control Valve Body Bolt 13 - Control Valve Body Bolt 14 - Control Valve Body Bolt 15 - Control Solenoid (w/Body and TCM) Valve Assembly 16 - Control Solenoid (w/Body and TCM) Filter Plate Assembly 17 - Manual Shaft Detent Assembly 18 - Control Valve Body Assembly 19 - A/Trans Output Speed Sensor Assembly 20 - A/Trans Output Speed Sensor Bolt 21 - A/Trans Case Assembly 22 - Torque Converter Housing Outer Seal 23 - Front Differential Drive Pinion (w/Transfer Gear) Gear Assembly 24 Front Differential Drive Pinion Gear Lube Tube Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > 6L50/6L80/6L90 - Automatic Transmission > Page 6504 25 - Torque Converter and Support and A/Trans Fluid Pump Housing Assembly 26 - Torque Converter and Differential Housing Bolt 27 - Torque Converter Assembly 28 - Dust Cover Push Pin - Model Dependent 29 - Dust Cover Bolt - Model Dependent 30 - Dust Cover - Model Dependent 31 - Front Differential Carrier Assembly 32 - Input Shaft Thrust Bearing Assembly 33 - A/Trans Case Cover Gasket 34 - A/Trans Case Cover Assembly 35 - A/Trans Case Cover Assembly Bolt A/Trans Case Cover, 2-6 and Low Reverse Pistons 400 - A/Trans Input Speed Sensor Assembly 401 - A/Trans Input Speed Sensor Bolt 402 - ISS O-Ring Seal 403 - A/Trans Case Cover Assembly 404 - 3-5-Reverse and 4-5-6 Clutch Fluid Seal Ring 405 - 2-6 Clutch Piston 406 - 2-6 Clutch Spring Assembly 407 - 2-6 Clutch Spring Retainer Ring 408 - Low and Reverse Clutch Piston Assembly 409 - Low and Reverse Clutch Spring 410 Low and Reverse Clutch Spring Retainer Ring Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission Output Speed Sensor Replacement Output Speed Sensor Replacement Input Speed Sensor Replacement Input Speed Sensor Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the transmission control valve body cover. Refer to Control Valve Body Cover Replacement (See: Valve Body/Service and Repair/6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission/Control Valve Body Cover Replacement). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 6507 2. Disconnect the input speed sensor electrical connector (1). 3. Remove the input speed sensor bolt (2) M6 x 23. 4. Remove the input speed sensor (3). 5. Remove the 3 input speed sensor seals (1). Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 6508 1. Install the 3 input speed sensor seals (1). 2. Install the input speed sensor (3). Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener Caution). 3. Install the input speed sensor bolt (2) M6 x 23 and tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb in). 4. Connect the input speed sensor electrical connector (1). 5. Install the transmission control valve body cover. Refer to Control Valve Body Cover Replacement (See: Valve Body/Service and Repair/6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission/Control Valve Body Cover Replacement). 6. Perform the transmission adaptive values learn procedure. Refer to Transmission Adaptive Values Learn (See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 6509 Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair 6T70/6T75 - Automatic Transmission Output Speed Sensor Replacement Output Speed Sensor Replacement Input Speed Sensor Replacement Input Speed Sensor Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 6510 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Locations > 6L50/6L80/6L90 - Automatic Transmission Valve Body: Locations 6L50/6L80/6L90 - Automatic Transmission Ball Check Valve Locations Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Locations > 6L50/6L80/6L90 - Automatic Transmission > Page 6515 Valve Body: Locations 6T70/6T75 - Automatic Transmission Ball Check Valve Locations Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission Valve Body: Service and Repair 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission Control Valve Body Cover Replacement Control Valve Body Cover Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. Refer to Battery Negative Cable Disconnection and Connection (See: Starting and Charging/Battery/Battery Cable/Negative/Service and Repair/Battery Negative Cable Disconnection and Connection). 2. Disconnect the radiator outlet hose from the radiator. Refer to Radiator Outlet Hose Replacement (LAF) (See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Cooling System/Radiator Hose)Radiator Outlet Hose Replacement (LF1) (See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Cooling System/Radiator Hose). 3. Remove the oil cooler inlet (1) and outlet (2) hoses from the retainer (2) on the control valve body cover. 4. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle (See: Maintenance/Vehicle Lifting/Service and Repair). 5. Remove the front transmission mount. Refer to Transmission Front Mount Replacement (See: Transmission Mount/Service and Repair/6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission/Transmission Front Mount Replacement). 6. Drain the transmission. Refer to Transmission Fluid Replacement (). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 6518 7. Disconnect the control valve body transmission control module (TCM) electrical connector (1), then the wiring harness from the cover. 8. Remove the control valve body cover bolts (1). 9. Support the transmission with a transmission jack. 10. Using the transmission jack raise the transmission to gain clearance for removal of the control valve body cover. 11. Remove the control valve body cover. 12. Remove the control valve body cover gasket. Caution: Support the control solenoid valve assembly around the connector when removing the seal. Excessive pulling force can damage the internal electrical connections. 13. Remove the control valve body cover wiring connector hole seal. 14. Remove all traces of the old gasket material. Clean the transmission case and control valve body cover gasket surfaces. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 6519 1. Install the control valve body cover wiring connector hole seal (4). 2. Install the control valve body cover gasket (3) to the control valve body cover. 3. Install the control valve body cover (2). 4. Lower the transmission and remove the transmission jack. 5. Hand start the control valve body cover bolts (1). Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener Caution). Note: Install all control valve body cover bolts and studs by hand then torque all bolts and studs in sequence. 6. Install the control valve body cover bolts. Tighten the bolts in sequence to 12 Nm (106 lb in). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 6520 7. Connect the control valve body TCM electrical connector (1), then clip the wiring harness to the cover. 8. Install the front transmission mount. Refer to Transmission Front Mount Replacement (See: Transmission Mount/Service and Repair/6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission/Transmission Front Mount Replacement). 9. Lower the vehicle. 10. Install the oil cooler inlet (1) and outlet (5) hoses to the retainer (2) on the control valve body cover. 11. Connect the radiator outlet hose to the radiator. Refer to Radiator Outlet Hose Replacement (LAF) (See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Cooling System/Radiator Hose)Radiator Outlet Hose Replacement (LF1) (See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Cooling System/Radiator Hose). 12. Connect the negative battery cable. Refer to Battery Negative Cable Disconnection and Connection (See: Starting and Charging/Battery/Battery Cable/Negative/Service and Repair/Battery Negative Cable Disconnection and Connection). 13. Fill the transmission. Refer to Transmission Fluid Replacement (). 14. Check for leaks. Control Valve Body Replacement Control Valve Body Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 6521 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 6522 Valve Body: Service and Repair 6T70/6T75 - Automatic Transmission Control Valve Body Cover Replacement Control Valve Body Cover Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the battery tray. Refer to Battery Tray Replacement (See: Starting and Charging/Battery/Battery Tray/Service and Repair). 2. Remove the oil cooler inlet and outlet hoses from the retainer on the control valve body cover. 3. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle (See: Maintenance/Vehicle Lifting/Service and Repair). 4. Remove the front transmission mount. Refer to Transmission Front Mount Replacement (See: Transmission Mount/Service and Repair/6T70/6T75 - Automatic Transmission/Transmission Front Mount Replacement). 5. Remove the lower nuts from the left transmission mount. Refer to Transmission Mount Replacement - Left Side (See: Transmission Mount/Service and Repair/6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission/Transmission Mount Replacement - Left Side). 6. Drain the transmission. Refer to Transmission Fluid Replacement (). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 6523 7. Disconnect the control valve body transmission control module (TCM) electrical connector (1). 8. Remove the 2 control valve body cover studs M6 x 30. 9. Remove the 12 control valve body cover bolts M6 x 30. 10. Support the transmission with a transmission jack. 11. Using the transmission jack raise the transmission to gain clearance for removal of the control valve body cover. 12. Remove the control valve body cover. 13. Remove the control valve body cover gasket. Caution: Support the control solenoid valve assembly around the connector when removing the seal. Excessive pulling force can damage the internal electrical connections. 14. Remove the control valve body cover wiring connector hole seal. 15. Remove all traces of the old gasket material. Clean the transmission case and control valve body cover gasket surfaces. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 6524 Note: The holes in the control valve body cover wiring connector hole seal must face toward the control solenoid valve assembly. If the holes face toward the valve body cover, there is a potential for a leak around the seal. 1. Install the control valve body cover wiring connector hole seal. 2. Install the control valve body cover gasket to the control valve body cover. 3. Install the control valve body cover. 4. Lower the transmission and remove the transmission jack. Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener Caution). Note: Install all control valve body cover bolts and studs by hand then torque all bolts and studs in sequence. 5. Install the 12 control valve body cover bolts (1) M6 x 30 and tighten the bolts in sequence to 12 Nm (106 lb in). 6. Install the 2 control valve body cover studs (2) M6 x 30 and tighten the studs in sequence to 12 Nm (106 lb in). 7. Connect the control valve body TCM electrical connector (1). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 6525 8. Install the lower nuts to the left transmission mount. Refer to Transmission Mount Replacement Left Side (See: Transmission Mount/Service and Repair/6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission/Transmission Mount Replacement - Left Side). 9. Install the front transmission mount. Refer to Transmission Front Mount Replacement (See: Transmission Mount/Service and Repair/6T70/6T75 - Automatic Transmission/Transmission Front Mount Replacement). 10. Lower the vehicle. 11. Install the oil cooler inlet and outlet hoses to the retainer on the control valve body cover. 12. Install the battery tray. Refer to Battery Tray Replacement (See: Starting and Charging/Battery/Battery Tray/Service and Repair). 13. Fill the transmission. Refer to Transmission Fluid Replacement (). 14. Check for leaks. Control Valve Lower Body and Upper Body Replacement Control Valve Lower Body and Upper Body Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the control valve body cover. Refer to Control Valve Body Cover Replacement (See: Control Valve Body Cover Replacement). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 6526 2. Disconnect the input speed sensor electrical connector (1). 3. Disconnect the output speed sensor electrical connector (2). 4. Disconnect the shift position switch electrical connector (3). 5. Remove the 4 control valve body bolts (1) M6 x 80. 6. Position the control solenoid valve spring (8) to the side. Spring will be released with removal of lower control valve body. 7. Remove the 2 control valve body bolts (4) M6 x 65. 8. Remove the control valve body bolt (3) M6 x 42. 9. Remove the 3 control valve body bolts (2) M6 x 95. 10. Remove the control valve body bolt (7) M6 x 55. 11. Remove the control solenoid valve body and transmission control module (TCM) assembly (5). Caution: Use care when removing or installing the filter plate assembly. A broken or missing retaining tab may not adequately secure the filter plate to the control solenoid valve assembly, resulting in possible damage or contamination. 12. Remove the control solenoid valve body assembly filter plate (6). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 6527 * Discard the filler plate. It is not reusable. * Inspect the pressure switch manifold seals for damage or contamination. Replace the control solenoid valve assembly as necessary. * Inspect the upper channel plate bolt holes for damage, peening or burnelling. Any damage around the bolt holes near the PCS switch feed holes could cause leakage around the PCS switch seals. Replace the upper channel plate as necessary. 13. Remove the 8 control valve body bolts (2) M6 x 65. 14. Remove the 2 control valve body bolts (1) M6 x 55. 15. Remove the manual shaft detent assembly (3). 16. Remove the control valve body assembly (4). 17. The control solenoid valve spring can now be fully removed from the lower control valve body assembly. Note: The clutch fluid passage seal is not reusable. 18. Remove the 1-2-3-4 clutch fluid passage seal (5). Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 6528 Note: The clutch fluid passage seal is not reusable. 1. Install a NEW 1-2-3-4 clutch fluid passage seal (3). Note: * Ensure the control solenoid valve spring is attached to the lower control valve body assembly. * Align the manual valve (2) to the detent lever assembly while installing the lower control valve body assembly. 2. Install the control valve body assembly (1). Note: Ensure proper alignment of the detent assembly to the detent lever assembly with position switch while tightening the bolt. The detent assembly can move and hit the valve body assembly that could cause improper engagement with the detent lever assembly. 3. Install the manual shaft detent assembly (2). Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener Caution). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 6529 Note: Install all bolts before tightening, then tighten in specified sequence. 4. Install the 8 control valve body bolts (1) M6 x 65 and tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb in). 5. Install the 2 control valve body bolts (3) M6 x 55 and tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb in). Caution: Use care when removing or installing the filter plate assembly. A broken or missing retaining tab may not adequately secure the filter plate to the control solenoid valve assembly, resulting in possible damage or contamination. 6. Install a NEW control solenoid valve assembly filter plate (1). 7. Install the control solenoid valve body and TCM assembly (5). 8. Rotate the control solenoid valve spring (7) into position. Note: Install all bolts before tightening, then tighten in specified sequence. 9. Install the 4 control valve body bolts (1) M6 x 80. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 6530 10. Install the control valve body bolt (6) M6 x 55. 11. Install the 3 control valve body bolts (2) M6 x 95. 12. Install the control valve body bolt (3) M6 x 42. 13. Install the 2 control valve body bolts (4) M6 x 65. 14. Connect the input speed sensor electrical connector (1). 15. Connect the output speed sensor electrical connector (2). 16. Connect the shift position switch electrical connector (3). 17. Install the control valve body cover. Refer to Control Valve Body Cover Replacement (See: Control Valve Body Cover Replacement). 18. For transmission control module programming and setup. Refer to Control Module References (See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning). Note: After an internal transmission repair or internal part replacement the service fast learn adapt procedure should be performed. 19. Perform the transmission adaptive values learn procedure. Refer to Transmission Adaptive Values Learn (See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T Controls - Snapshot Data Upload Information Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle: Technical Service Bulletins A/T Controls Snapshot Data Upload Information INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 07-07-30-010B Date: June 19, 2009 Subject: Procedure to Take Snapshot Data with a Tech 2(R) and Upload Data to a Computer Using TIS Software Models: 2004-2010 Passenger Cars and Light Duty Truck (Including Saturn; excluding Astra models) 2004-2010 HUMMER H2, H3 2004-2009 Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the Sending a Snapshot to GM TAC section and add the 2010 model year. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 07-07-30-010A (Section 07 - Transmission/Transaxle). Important Global Diagnostic System (GDS) will take the place of the Tech 2(R) on certain vehicles when communicating and diagnosing vehicle on-board electrical systems. This new diagnostic tool platform and software will be required for use with all GM Global Architecture (Global A) vehicles beginning with the 2010 Chevrolet Camaro, followed later by the Buick Allure/LaCrosse, Chevrolet Equinox, Cadillac SRX and the GMC Terrain. These vehicles will no longer permit Tech 2(R) communication for diagnostic purposes. For further information, refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 09-00-89-019 (Introduction of New Global Diagnostic System (GDS)). This procedure is intended to show the user how to take snapshot data with a Tech 2(R) and upload it to a computer. The procedure is written for an automatic transmission data snapshot on a Saturn AURA, but is similar for all applications. This procedure is written with the assumption the user has a basic understanding of how to use a Tech 2(R) already. Capturing a Snapshot of the Vehicle Data Stream 1. Connect the Tech 2(R) to the vehicle Data Link Connector (DLC) as shown above. Use a CANdi module as required. 2. Power up the Tech 2(R) and press the ENTER key at the start-up screen. 3. From the Main Menu select F0: Diagnostics. 4. Enter all vehicle information as requested on the scan tool's display. Bolded selections are vehicle specific. - Select "2007" - Select "Passenger Car (F0)" - Select "Saturn" Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T Controls - Snapshot Data Upload Information > Page 6535 - Select "Z" - Select "Aura" - Select "Powertrain" - Select "3.6L LY7" - Select "Transmission" - Select "Transmission Data" 5. From the application menu, select F3: Snapshot. - Choose trigger type and trigger point, as described above. - It is preferred to trigger on "Any Code" (F1) - If multiple codes are setting, select "Single Code" and enter the code you are trying to capture on the next screen. - Select "Center (F5)" for the trigger point. This allows the requester/viewer of the data to see the events before and after the code sets. 6. Press the Record Snapshot soft key. The Tech 2(R) screen will display the parameters it is going to record for live viewing. - When the fault occurs, the Tech 2(R) will automatically start recording if the preferred settings (F1 and F5) are selected. - If manual trigger is selected during the setup procedure, you will have to hit the "Trigger" soft key to actually record data. Otherwise, it will automatically start recording when a DTC is set. - Allow the Tech 2(R) to record the data. Please note that a Tech 2(R) can record a maximum of 1 minute of data (30 seconds before and 30 seconds after the trigger point if center trigger is selected). Important The Tech(R)2 can only record two snapshots prior to uploading to a computer. If a third snapshot is requested, the first snapshot will be overwritten. 7. When the snap shot data has been recorded, exit to the Main Menu, then power down and disconnect the Tech 2(R) from the vehicle. Uploading and Sending a Snapshot via TIS2WEB Figure 8 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T Controls - Snapshot Data Upload Information > Page 6536 Figure 9 1. Once TIS2WEB is launched and you're at the main screen, select Snapshot, indicated with a arrow in Figure 8. 2. Select the Upload from Handheld button to launch the device selection screen just like the TIS 2000 procedure described above. Figure 10 3. Select the top button, "Upload from Handheld" which will launch the screen displayed in Figure 10. Make sure the Tech 2(R) is connected to the computer and plugged in. Select Tech 2(R) under Device and select OK. The screen of your Tech 2(R) should start blinking and a line will start scrolling across the screen indicating it is communicating with your computer. Figure 11 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T Controls - Snapshot Data Upload Information > Page 6537 4. Once communication is established and you select the file you want to upload, you will see a screen similar to below. You can email the file directly from TIS2WEB by going to the Snapshot drop down menu and selecting "Send to e-mail" as shown in Figure 11. Figure 12 5. After selecting Send to e-mail, a dialog box like the one shown in Figure 12 will be displayed. Fill in the information as requested and then click send. Include the VIN in the subject line. 6. After all the information is entered, hit the send button. After sending the file, you will receive a confirmation box letting you know the e-mail was sent successfully. 7. It is recommended to now save the file to your computer using the same procedure as if you were using TIS 2000 in case your recipient doesn't receive your email with the snapshot data. Important Sending the file via e-mail through TIS2WEB does NOT save the file locally and there is no way to access your sent mail in TIS2WEB like a regular e-mail program. Sending a Snapshot to GM TAC Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T Controls - Snapshot Data Upload Information > Page 6538 During your call with GM TAC on a current case, you may be advised to send a copy of the Tech 2(R) or VDR Snapshot Data to the TAC e-mail box. U.S. Dealers - send to e-mail box [email protected] Canadian Dealers - send to e-mail box [email protected] Please complete the following: - Be sure to review the procedures listed above for uploading and sending a Snapshot via TIS2WEB. - If you are using a VDR to capture Snapshot Data, information can be accessed in the Techlink Website in the articles (December 2002, December 2003, July 2004 and January 2006). - Please be sure to identify the snapshot by placing the TAC Case Number, the last eight digits of the VIN and the type of data (i.e. engine or transmission) in the subject line of your e-mail. The email Subject Line MUST contain the TAC case number and last 8 digits of the VIN or their email can not be processed and will be deleted. Please send only REQUESTED Snapshot Data to the TAC e-mail box. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T Controls - Snapshot Data Upload Information > Page 6539 Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle: Technical Service Bulletins Vehicle - Engine Crankcase and Subsystems Flushing Info. INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 04-06-01-029E Date: April 29, 2010 Subject: Unnecessary Flushing Services, Additive Recommendations and Proper Utilization of GM Simplified Maintenance Schedule to Enhance Customer Service Experience Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (including Saturn) 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2005-2009 Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the model years and add information about the proper transmission flush procedure. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 04-06-01-029D (Section 06 - Engine/Propulsion System). An Overview of Proper Vehicle Service General Motors is aware that some companies are marketing tools and equipment to support a subsystem flushing procedures. These dedicated machines are in addition to many engine oil, cooling system, fuel system, A/C, transmission flush and steering system additives available to the consumer. GM Vehicles under normal usage do not require any additional procedures or additives beyond what is advised under the former Vehicle Maintenance Schedules or the current Simplified Maintenance Schedules. Do not confuse machines available from Kent-Moore/SPX that are designed to aid and accelerate the process of fluid changing with these flushing machines. Engine Crankcase Flushing General Motors Corporation does not endorse or recommend engine crankcase flushing for any of its gasoline engines. Analysis of some of the aftermarket materials used for crankcase flushing indicate incompatibility with GM engine components and the potential for damage to some engine seals and bearings. Damage to engine components resulting from crankcase flushing IS NOT COVERED under the terms of the New Vehicle Warranty. GM Authorized Service Information: Detailed, Descriptive, and Complete If a specific model vehicle or powertrain need is identified, GM will issue an Authorized Service Document containing a procedure and, if required, provide, make available, or require the specific use of a machine, tool or chemical to accomplish proper vehicle servicing. An example of this is fuel injector cleaning. Due to variation in fuel quality in different areas of the country, GM has recognized the need for fuel injector cleaning methods on some engines, though under normal circumstances, this service is not part of the maintenance requirements. GM has published several gasoline fuel injector cleaning bulletins that fully outline the methods to be used in conjunction with GM Part Numbered solutions to accomplish proper and safe cleaning of the fuel injectors with preventative maintenance suggestions to maintain optimum performance. You may refer to Corporate Bulletin Numbers 03-06-04-030 and 04-06-04-051 for additional information on this subject. Subsystem Flushing Flushing of A/C lines, radiators, transmission coolers, and power steering systems are recognized practices to be performed after catastrophic failures or extreme corrosion when encountered in radiators. For acceptable A/C flushing concerns, refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 01-01-38-006. This practice is NOT required or recommended for normal service operations. The use of external transmission fluid exchange or flush machines is NOT recommended for the automatic or manual transmission. Use of external machines to replace the fluid may affect the operation or durability of the transmission. Transmission fluid should only be replaced by draining and refilling following directions in SI. Refer to Automatic/Manual Transmission Fluid and Filter Replacement. Approved Transmission Flushing Tool (Transmission Cooler Only) The Automatic Transmission Oil Cooler Flush and Flow Test Tool is recommended for GM vehicles. Refer to Transmission Fluid Cooler Flushing and Flow Test in SI using the J 45096. Service Is Important to You and Your Customer General Motors takes great pride in offering our dealerships and customers high quality vehicles that require extremely low maintenance over the life of the vehicle. This low cost of ownership builds repeat sales and offers our customers measurable economy of operation against competing vehicles. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T Controls - Snapshot Data Upload Information > Page 6540 Providing responsible services at the proper intervals will greatly aid your dealership with repeat business, and additional services when required. Most customers appreciate and gain trust in the dealership that informs and offers them just what they need for continued trouble-free operation. Examine your service department's practices and verify that all Service Consultants and Technicians focus on customer satisfaction, vehicle inspections, and other products at time of service. Use this opportunity to upgrade the services you provide to your customers. Here are a few suggestions: - Take the time required to align your dealership service practices with the new GM Simplified Maintenance Schedule. Use the new vehicle Owner's Manual Maintenance I and II schedules to create a "mirror image" in your advertising and dealer service pricing that is easily understandable to your customer. Taking advantage of this new service strategy may greatly increase your dealership service sales and customer retention while decreasing the frequency of visits and inconvenience to your customer. - Review your program to ensure that all vehicles coming in are evaluated for safety and wear items. Examine all vehicles for tire condition, signs of misalignment, brake wear, exterior lamp functionality, exhaust condition, A/C cooling performance, SRS or Air Bag MIL, along with Service Engine Soon or Check Engine indicators. If the Service Engine Soon or Check Engine MIL is illuminated, it is vital that you inform the customer of the concerns with ignoring the indicator and what the required repair would cost. In addition to the possibility of increased emissions and driveability concerns, many customers are unaware that lower gas mileage may also result, with additional cost to the customer. - Be complete in your service recommendations. Some sales opportunities are not being fully pursued nationally. Focus on overlooked but required maintenance that has real benefits to the customer. Many vehicles are equipped with cabin air filters. If these filters are used beyond replacement time, they may impede airflow decreasing A/C and heating performance. Make sure these filters are part of your recommended service. Note that some of our vehicles may not have been factory equipped but will accept the filters as an accessory. - Express the value in maintaining the finish quality of the customer's vehicle at the Maintenance I and II visits. More fully utilize the vehicle prep personnel you already have in place. In today's world, many people simply ignore the finish of their vehicle, at best infrequently using an automatic car wash for exterior cleaning. Offer vehicle detailing services in stages from just a wash and wax to a complete interior cleaning. When paired with the Simplified Maintenance visit, this will increase customer satisfaction. On return, the customer gets a visibly improved vehicle that will be a source of pride of ownership along with a vehicle that is now fully maintained. Also, reinforce the improved resale value of a completely maintained vehicle. - For customers who clean and maintain the appearance of their vehicles themselves encourage the use of GM Vehicle Care products. Many customers may have never used GM Car Wash/Wax Concentrate, GM Cleaner Wax or a longtime product, GM Glass Cleaner, which is a favorite of many customers who try it just once. If your dealership give samples of these products with new car purchases, customers may already be sold on the product but not willing to make a special trip to the dealership. Capitalize on sales at this time. Stock shelves right at the Service counter with these products and consider instituting compensation programs for Service Consultants who suggest these products. Many consumers faced with an intimidating wall full of car care products sold at local auto parts stores may find it comforting to purchase a fully tested product sold by GM that they know will not harm the finish of their vehicle. We suggest these competitively priced basic vehicle care products to emphasize: In USA: - #12378401 GM Vehicle Care Wash/Wax Concentrate 16 fl. oz. (0.473L) - #89021822 GM Vehicle Care Glass Cleaner Aerosol 18 oz. (510 g) - #12377966 GM Vehicle Care Cleaner Wax 16 fl. oz. (0.473L) - #1052929 GM Vehicle Care Chrome and Wire Wheel Cleaner 16 fl. oz. (0.473L) - #88861431 GM Vehicle Care Odor Eliminator 24 fl. oz. (0.710L) In Canada: - #10953203 GM Vehicle Care Wash & Wax Concentrate 473 mL - #992727 GM Glass Cleaner Aerosol 500 g - #10952905 GM Vehicle Care Liquid Cleaner/Wax 473 mL - #10953013 GM Vehicle Care Chrome Cleaner and Polish 454 mL - #10953202 GM Vehicle Care Wheel Brite 473 mL - #88901678 GM Vehicle Care Odor Eliminator 473 mL - Display signboards with the installed price for popular GM Accessories such as running boards and Tonneau Covers. Customers may not think to ask about these desirable items at the time of a service visit. - Finally, take advantage of the GM Goodwrench initiatives (Tire Program, Goodwrench Credit Card, etc. / Dealer Marketing Association (DMA) Promotions in Canada) to provide the customer with more reasons to identify your dealership as the best place to go for parts and service. Remember to utilize ALL of the service aspects you possess in your dealership to satisfy and provide value to your customer. Many businesses exist profitably as an oil change location, a vehicle repair facility, or a detailing shop alone. You already have the capabilities of all three and provide these services with the inherent trust of your customer, under the GM Mark of Excellence. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Differential Cover > Component Information > Service and Repair Differential Cover: Service and Repair Differential Carrier Cover and Seal Replacement - Left Side Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Differential Lock > Control Unit, Differential Lock > Component Information > Locations Control Unit: Locations Wheels/Vehicle Underbody Component Views Rear Underbody Components 1 - K47 Rear Differential Clutch Control Module (F46) 2 - R6 Data Link Resistor Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Differential Lock > Control Unit, Differential Lock > Component Information > Locations > Page 6549 Control Unit: Diagrams K47 Rear Differential Clutch Control Module (F46) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Differential Lock > Control Unit, Differential Lock > Component Information > Service and Repair > Rear Differential Clutch Control Module Replacement Control Unit: Service and Repair Rear Differential Clutch Control Module Replacement Rear Differential Clutch Control Module Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Differential Lock > Control Unit, Differential Lock > Component Information > Service and Repair > Rear Differential Clutch Control Module Replacement > Page 6552 Control Unit: Service and Repair Rear Wheel Drive Module Clutch Housing Replacement Rear Wheel Drive Module Clutch Housing Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Differential Mount > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Differential Mount: > 09-03-08-009B > Jun > 10 > Suspension/Drivetrain - Shudder On Hard Acceleration Differential Mount: Customer Interest Suspension/Drivetrain - Shudder On Hard Acceleration TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 09-03-08-009B Date: June 07, 2010 Subject: Shudder in Vehicle Under Moderate to Hard Acceleration (Insert Washers Under RDM and/or Replace Front Springs and/or Replace Halfshaft) Models: 2010 Chevrolet Equinox 2010 GMC Terrain with 2.4L L4 or 3.0L V6 Engine Built Prior to VIN Breakpoint A6247602 Please Refer to GMVIS Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add vehicle information to the titles in the Correction section. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 09-03-08-009A (Section 03 - Suspension). Condition Some customers may comment on these shudder conditions: - Lateral shudder - Occurs during accelerator apply (moderate to heavy). Can be intermittent and usually noticeable powering through turns at 40 km/h (25 mph) or less. Diagnostic Tip Accelerate the vehicle under moderate to hard pedal. Note that this shudder depends on relative phasing (orientation) of the front halfshaft joints to each other. So, if a shudder does not occur, this may require re-evaluation after or during a turn (such as driving one way down a street and then repeating in the other direction). It is usually noticeable with moderate accelerator apply during a turn at lower speeds. - Vertical shudder - Occurs during moderate to heavy accelerator apply (32-40 km/h (20-25 mph) and is not intermittent. Diagnostic Tip Drive the vehicle in a straight line under moderate to hard acceleration (going up a grade will worsen it). - Lateral wobble (low frequency / high amplitude shudder) (Only on V6 AWD and FWD) - Occurs during acceleration (light, moderate, or heavy). Most noticeable around 64 km/h (40 mph) and up and can be very intermittent (comes and goes at random). Sometimes appears briefly and other times will stay for an extended period of time. Diagnostic Tip Requires accelerator apply and can be very intermittent. If left front halfshaft - will be worse when turning to left (lifting left side of vehicle); If right front halfshaft - will be worse when turning to right (lifting right side of vehicle). Cause This condition may be caused by the standing height of the AWD configurations, which may be too high, increasing the axle joint angles beyond their optimum operating range. The shudder may vary based on the relative phasing of the left and right halfshaft joints. Correction Important Do Not replace the front drive axles. Important Do Not replace springs for FWD configuration. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Differential Mount > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Differential Mount: > 09-03-08-009B > Jun > 10 > Suspension/Drivetrain - Shudder On Hard Acceleration > Page 6561 Verify the condition. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle in SI. Inspect the vehicle to see if the RDM bushings have the washers installed between the top of the bushing and the cradle (1). If not, see the procedure for Installing RDM Washers first. If the condition still occurs, then proceed to Replacement of Front Springs. If adding RDM washers and replacing the spring still do not fix this condition, replace the halfshafts. Installing RDM Washers - Only for All-Wheel Drive (AWD) 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle in SI. 2. Remove the exhaust system from the four rubber hangers. 3. Support the rear differential with a transmission jack stand. 4. Remove the rear differential support bushing bolts (1). 5. Remove the front mounting nuts for the rear differential. 6. Lower the rear differential to gain access and insert washers, GM P/N 11609719, between the top of the bushing and the cradle. 7. Raise the rear differential assembly into place. 8. Tighten the front mounting nuts. Tighten Tighten the nuts to 122 Nm (90 lb ft). 9. Tighten the rear differential support bushing bolts. Tighten Tighten the bolts to 188 Nm (139 lb ft). 10. Remove the transmission jack stand. 11. Install the exhaust system in the hangers. 12. Lower the vehicle. 13. Verify that the condition is corrected. If not, proceed to Replacement of Front Springs. Replacement of Front Springs - For Both 4 and 6 cylinders; All-Wheel Drive (AWD) Only 1. Verify the shudder in the vehicle under hard acceleration. 2. Replace the front springs with GM P/N 20827083 (2.4L L4 Engine) or 20827104 (3.0L V6 Engine). Remove the front struts from the vehicle. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Differential Mount > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Differential Mount: > 09-03-08-009B > Jun > 10 > Suspension/Drivetrain - Shudder On Hard Acceleration > Page 6562 Refer to Strut Assembly Replacement in SI. 3. After the struts are removed from the vehicle, replace the springs. Refer to Strut, Strut Component, and Spring Replacement in SI. Replacement of Halfshaft - Only for V6; FWD and All-Wheel Drive (AWD) 1. Verify the Lateral wobble/shudder in the vehicle under light/hard acceleration. 2. Replace the front wheel drive shaft. Refer to Front Wheel Drive Shaft Replacement in SI. Refer to the GM electronic parts catalog (EPC) for the correct front wheel drive shaft. Parts Information Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Differential Mount > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Differential Mount: > 09-03-08-009B > Jun > 10 > Suspension/Drivetrain - Shudder On Hard Acceleration Differential Mount: All Technical Service Bulletins Suspension/Drivetrain - Shudder On Hard Acceleration TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 09-03-08-009B Date: June 07, 2010 Subject: Shudder in Vehicle Under Moderate to Hard Acceleration (Insert Washers Under RDM and/or Replace Front Springs and/or Replace Halfshaft) Models: 2010 Chevrolet Equinox 2010 GMC Terrain with 2.4L L4 or 3.0L V6 Engine Built Prior to VIN Breakpoint A6247602 Please Refer to GMVIS Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add vehicle information to the titles in the Correction section. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 09-03-08-009A (Section 03 - Suspension). Condition Some customers may comment on these shudder conditions: - Lateral shudder - Occurs during accelerator apply (moderate to heavy). Can be intermittent and usually noticeable powering through turns at 40 km/h (25 mph) or less. Diagnostic Tip Accelerate the vehicle under moderate to hard pedal. Note that this shudder depends on relative phasing (orientation) of the front halfshaft joints to each other. So, if a shudder does not occur, this may require re-evaluation after or during a turn (such as driving one way down a street and then repeating in the other direction). It is usually noticeable with moderate accelerator apply during a turn at lower speeds. - Vertical shudder - Occurs during moderate to heavy accelerator apply (32-40 km/h (20-25 mph) and is not intermittent. Diagnostic Tip Drive the vehicle in a straight line under moderate to hard acceleration (going up a grade will worsen it). - Lateral wobble (low frequency / high amplitude shudder) (Only on V6 AWD and FWD) - Occurs during acceleration (light, moderate, or heavy). Most noticeable around 64 km/h (40 mph) and up and can be very intermittent (comes and goes at random). Sometimes appears briefly and other times will stay for an extended period of time. Diagnostic Tip Requires accelerator apply and can be very intermittent. If left front halfshaft - will be worse when turning to left (lifting left side of vehicle); If right front halfshaft - will be worse when turning to right (lifting right side of vehicle). Cause This condition may be caused by the standing height of the AWD configurations, which may be too high, increasing the axle joint angles beyond their optimum operating range. The shudder may vary based on the relative phasing of the left and right halfshaft joints. Correction Important Do Not replace the front drive axles. Important Do Not replace springs for FWD configuration. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Differential Mount > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Differential Mount: > 09-03-08-009B > Jun > 10 > Suspension/Drivetrain - Shudder On Hard Acceleration > Page 6568 Verify the condition. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle in SI. Inspect the vehicle to see if the RDM bushings have the washers installed between the top of the bushing and the cradle (1). If not, see the procedure for Installing RDM Washers first. If the condition still occurs, then proceed to Replacement of Front Springs. If adding RDM washers and replacing the spring still do not fix this condition, replace the halfshafts. Installing RDM Washers - Only for All-Wheel Drive (AWD) 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle in SI. 2. Remove the exhaust system from the four rubber hangers. 3. Support the rear differential with a transmission jack stand. 4. Remove the rear differential support bushing bolts (1). 5. Remove the front mounting nuts for the rear differential. 6. Lower the rear differential to gain access and insert washers, GM P/N 11609719, between the top of the bushing and the cradle. 7. Raise the rear differential assembly into place. 8. Tighten the front mounting nuts. Tighten Tighten the nuts to 122 Nm (90 lb ft). 9. Tighten the rear differential support bushing bolts. Tighten Tighten the bolts to 188 Nm (139 lb ft). 10. Remove the transmission jack stand. 11. Install the exhaust system in the hangers. 12. Lower the vehicle. 13. Verify that the condition is corrected. If not, proceed to Replacement of Front Springs. Replacement of Front Springs - For Both 4 and 6 cylinders; All-Wheel Drive (AWD) Only 1. Verify the shudder in the vehicle under hard acceleration. 2. Replace the front springs with GM P/N 20827083 (2.4L L4 Engine) or 20827104 (3.0L V6 Engine). Remove the front struts from the vehicle. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Differential Mount > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Differential Mount: > 09-03-08-009B > Jun > 10 > Suspension/Drivetrain - Shudder On Hard Acceleration > Page 6569 Refer to Strut Assembly Replacement in SI. 3. After the struts are removed from the vehicle, replace the springs. Refer to Strut, Strut Component, and Spring Replacement in SI. Replacement of Halfshaft - Only for V6; FWD and All-Wheel Drive (AWD) 1. Verify the Lateral wobble/shudder in the vehicle under light/hard acceleration. 2. Replace the front wheel drive shaft. Refer to Front Wheel Drive Shaft Replacement in SI. Refer to the GM electronic parts catalog (EPC) for the correct front wheel drive shaft. Parts Information Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Differential Mount > Component Information > Service and Repair > Differential Housing Support Bushing Replacement (Front) Differential Mount: Service and Repair Differential Housing Support Bushing Replacement (Front) Differential Housing Support Bushing Replacement (Front) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Differential Mount > Component Information > Service and Repair > Differential Housing Support Bushing Replacement (Front) > Page 6572 Differential Mount: Service and Repair Differential Housing Support Bushing Replacement (Rear) Differential Housing Support Bushing Replacement (Rear) Tools Required J-45725 Cradle Bushing Replacer Removal Procedure 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle (See: Maintenance/Vehicle Lifting/Service and Repair). 2. Remove the rear differential assembly. Refer to Differential Replacement (). 3. Mark a reference point on the frame and old bushing at the 12 and 6 o'clock position to use to alignment the new bushing. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Differential Mount > Component Information > Service and Repair > Differential Housing Support Bushing Replacement (Front) > Page 6573 4. Position the J-45725-1A (1) on the bushing (2). 5. Position the J-45725-2A (1) on the frame. Important: Apply a small amount of grease on the threaded rod to lubricate the nuts when turning the nuts. 6. Install the threaded rod, bearing and washers. 7. Adjust the nuts so that they are touching the J-45725-1A (2) and the J-45725-2A (1). 8. Install the proper size wrenches on the nuts. Important: In the following service procedure, use only HAND TOOLS when using the J-45725. 9. While holding the front wrench (1) rotate the rear wrench (2) to remove the bushing. 10. Remove the special tools. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Differential Mount > Component Information > Service and Repair > Differential Housing Support Bushing Replacement (Front) > Page 6574 11. Remove the bushing from the frame. Installation Procedure Important: Failure to perform the following service procedure prior to the installation of the new bushing, could cause premature failure of the bushing. 1. Before the installation of the new bushing, use a straight edge draw a line on the new bushing at the 12 and 6 o'clock positions. Ensure that the grooves (1) are at the 12 and 6 o'clock positions. 2. Position the new bushing so that the reference marks on the frame and the bushing are in alignment. This will ensure that the new bushing will be within the + or - 5° specification required for the proper alignment of the bushing. Important: The following procedure is to temporarily hold the new bushing in place so that the special tools can be installed for the proper installation. This is NOT to be used to install the bushing. 3. Using a block of wood and a hammer, slightly tap the bushing into the frame. 4. Assemble the threaded rod, bearings and washers as indicated in step 7 in the removal procedure. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Differential Mount > Component Information > Service and Repair > Differential Housing Support Bushing Replacement (Front) > Page 6575 5. Position the J-45725-4 (2) on the inside of the frame. 6. Position J-45725-1A (1) on the outside of the frame. 7. Adjust the nuts so that they are touching the J-45725-2 (1) and the J-45725-2A (2). 8. While holding the front wrench (2) rotate the rear wrench (1) to install the bushing. 9. Remove the special tools. 10. Install the rear differential assembly. Refer to Differential Replacement (). 11. Lower the vehicle. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Differential Mount > Component Information > Service and Repair > Differential Housing Support Bushing Replacement (Front) > Page 6576 Differential Mount: Service and Repair Differential Carrier Assembly Mount Replacement Differential Carrier Assembly Mount Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Fluid - Differential > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications Fluid - Differential: Capacity Specifications Rear Differential ................................................................................................................................... ................................................ 500 ml (16.9 ounces) NOTE: All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the approximate level. Recheck fluid level after filling. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Fluid - Differential > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 6581 Fluid - Differential: Fluid Type Specifications Rear Differential Assembly Synthetic Gear Oil 75W-90 GM P/N 12378514 (Canadian P/N 88901045) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Fluid - Differential > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures Fluid - Differential: Procedures Rear Axle Lubricant Level Inspection Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Fluid - Differential > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 6584 Fluid - Differential: Removal and Replacement Differential Oil Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Pinion Flange, Differential > Component Information > Service and Repair Pinion Flange: Service and Repair Drive Pinion Flange/Yoke and/or Oil Seal Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Relays and Modules - Differential > Control Unit, Differential Lock > Component Information > Locations Control Unit: Locations Wheels/Vehicle Underbody Component Views Rear Underbody Components 1 - K47 Rear Differential Clutch Control Module (F46) 2 - R6 Data Link Resistor Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Relays and Modules - Differential > Control Unit, Differential Lock > Component Information > Locations > Page 6592 Control Unit: Diagrams K47 Rear Differential Clutch Control Module (F46) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Relays and Modules - Differential > Control Unit, Differential Lock > Component Information > Service and Repair > Rear Differential Clutch Control Module Replacement Control Unit: Service and Repair Rear Differential Clutch Control Module Replacement Rear Differential Clutch Control Module Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Relays and Modules - Differential > Control Unit, Differential Lock > Component Information > Service and Repair > Rear Differential Clutch Control Module Replacement > Page 6595 Control Unit: Service and Repair Rear Wheel Drive Module Clutch Housing Replacement Rear Wheel Drive Module Clutch Housing Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Seals and Gaskets, Differential > System Information > Service and Repair > Differential Carrier Cover and Seal Replacement - Left Side Seals and Gaskets: Service and Repair Differential Carrier Cover and Seal Replacement - Left Side Differential Carrier Cover and Seal Replacement - Left Side Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Seals and Gaskets, Differential > System Information > Service and Repair > Differential Carrier Cover and Seal Replacement - Left Side > Page 6600 Seals and Gaskets: Service and Repair Drive Pinion Flange/Yoke and/or Oil Seal Replacement Drive Pinion Flange/Yoke and/or Oil Seal Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Constant Velocity Joint > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Wheel Drive Shaft Outer Joint Inspection Constant Velocity Joint: Testing and Inspection Wheel Drive Shaft Outer Joint Inspection Wheel Drive Shaft Outer Joint Inspection Disassembly Procedure 1. Remove the outer constant velocity (CV) joint and boot from the wheel drive shaft. Refer to Front Wheel Drive Shaft Outer Joint and Boot Replacement (). 2. Remove any lubricant from the CV joint. Note: Position the cage and the inner race so they are level. 3. Install the outer CV joint assembly in a soft jawed vise. Note: The following procedure will have to be repeated until all the ball bearing are removed form the cage. 4. Using a brass drift (1), gentle tap the cage until the ball bearing can be removed from the cage. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Constant Velocity Joint > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Wheel Drive Shaft Outer Joint Inspection > Page 6607 5. Using a small screwdriver, remove the ball bearings (1) from the CV joint (2). 6. Remove the ball bearings from the CV joint in sequence. Note: Position the cage so that the larger radius corners of the cage windows are facing up. 7. Position the cage (1) at a 90 degrees to the centerline of the outer race (2). 8. Align the cage windows with the lands of the outer race (2). 9. Lift and remove the cage (1) and the inner race from the outer race (2). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Constant Velocity Joint > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Wheel Drive Shaft Outer Joint Inspection > Page 6608 10. Position the cage (2) and the inner race (1) so that the larger radius corners of the cage windows are up. 11. Rotate the inner race (1) 90 degrees to the center line of the cage (2). 12. Align the lands of the inner race (1) with the windows of the cage (2). 13. Move the inner race (1) land into the cage window (2). 14. Rotate the inner race (1) down and remove it from the cage (2). 15. Clean the following items thoroughly with the proper cleaning solvent: * The inner race * The outer race * The cage * The ball bearings * The exposed end of the wheel drive shaft Note: The internal parts of the CV joint are NOT SERVICED separately. The outer CV joint is serviced as an assembly. 16. If any of the above items are found to have excessive wear or are damaged, replace the outer CV joint as an assembly. Assembly Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Constant Velocity Joint > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Wheel Drive Shaft Outer Joint Inspection > Page 6609 1. Position the cage (2) so that the larger radius corners of the cage windows are up. 2. Position the inner race (1) 90 degrees to the centerline of the cage (2). 3. Insert the inner race (1) through the bottom of the cage (2). 4. Align the lands of the inner race (1) with the windows of the cage (2). 5. Move the inner race (1) land into the cage window (2). 6. Rotate the inner race (1) down and remove it from the cage (2). 7. Rotate the inner race (1) within the cage (2) so that the grooved surface of the inner race (1) is facing up. 8. Align the inner race (1) ball bearing tracks with the cage (2) windows. 9. Wrap a clean shop towel around the CV joint outer race splined shaft. 10. Place the outer race (2) vertically in a bench vise. 11. Position the cage (1) and the inner race at a 90 degrees to the centerline of the outer race (2). 12. With the inner race and the cage (1) assembly in a vertical position, insert the cage and the inner race into the outer race (2). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Constant Velocity Joint > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Wheel Drive Shaft Outer Joint Inspection > Page 6610 Note: The larger radius corners of the cage windows should be positioned up and the grooved surface of the inner race should be visible. 13. Position the cage (2) and the inner race so that they are level in the vise. 14. Rotate the appropriate component(s), and align the cage windows and the inner race ball bearing (1) tracks with the outer race ball bearing tracks. 15. Position a cage window and the inner race ball bearing track for the ball bearing installation. Note: When performing the following procedure, the opposing cage (2) window and the inner ball bearing (1) track will be accessible for the ball bearing installation. 16. Press down on the cage following one of the outer race ball bearing (1) tracks. 17. Install the ball bearing through the cage window onto the inner race ball bearing (1) track. Note: The following service procedure will have to be performed after each ball bearing (1) has been installed. 18. After the first ball bearing (1) has been installed, use a brass drift and a hammer and gently tap the cage in order to drive the cage and the inner race down completely in the outer race. Note: After the ball bearing (1) has been installed, there should be NO GAP between the ball bearing and the inner race. 19. Position the cage and the inner race so that they are level. 20. Using a plastic hammer, lightly tap the ball bearing (1) into place. 21. Install the ball bearings in sequence. 22. Repeat steps 18 thru 20 until all the ball bearings are installed. 23. Install the outer CV joint and boot on the wheel drive shaft. Refer to Front Wheel Drive Shaft Outer Joint and Boot Replacement (). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Constant Velocity Joint > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Wheel Drive Shaft Outer Joint Inspection > Page 6611 Constant Velocity Joint: Testing and Inspection Wheel Drive Shaft Inner Joint Inspection Wheel Drive Shaft Inner Joint Inspection Inspection Procedure 1. Remove the front wheel drive shaft inner joint and boot. Refer to Front Wheel Drive Shaft Inner Joint and Boot Replacement (). 2. Remove the wheel drive shaft tripod bushing (1) from the tripod housing (3). 3. Remove the wheel drive shaft tripod housing (3) from the wheel drive shaft. 4. Remove the wheel drive shaft tripod joint boot bushing (1). 5. Using a suitable cleaner, remove the excess grease from the tripod assembly. 6. Inspect the following items for damage or excessive wear: * The wheel drive shaft tripod boot * The wheel drive shaft tripod assembly * The wheel drive shaft tripod joint housing * The wheel drive shaft tripod joint bushing * The wheel drive shaft 7. If any of the internal parts are found to be excessively worn or damaged, replace the wheel drive shaft inner joint and boot. Refer to Front Wheel Drive Shaft Inner Joint and Boot Replacement (). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Constant Velocity Joint > Component Information > Service and Repair > Rear Wheel Drive Shaft Inner Joint and Boot Replacement Constant Velocity Joint: Service and Repair Rear Wheel Drive Shaft Inner Joint and Boot Replacement Rear Wheel Drive Shaft Inner Joint and Boot Replacement Special Tools * J 8059 - Snap Ring Pliers * J 35910 - Drive Axle Boot Clamp Pliers Note: The inner Constant Velocity Joint is not serviced separately. If the CV joint is found to have excessive wear or damaged, replace the wheel drive shaft as an assembly. Disassemble Procedure 1. Remove the wheel drive shaft. Refer to Rear Wheel Drive Shaft Replacement (See: Service and Repair). 2. Remove the outer CV joint and boot. Refer to Rear Wheel Drive Shaft Outer Joint and Boot Replacement (See: Rear Wheel Drive Shaft Outer Joint and Boot Replacement). Caution: Do not cut through the wheel drive shaft inboard or outboard boot during service. Cutting through the boot may damage the sealing surface of the housing and the tripot or the constant velocity joint bushing. Damage to the sealing surface may lead to water and dirt intrusion and premature wear of the constant velocity joint. 3. Using the appropriate tool, remove and discard the outer boot clamp (3) and the inner boot clamp (2) from the CV joint (4). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Constant Velocity Joint > Component Information > Service and Repair > Rear Wheel Drive Shaft Inner Joint and Boot Replacement > Page 6614 Note: If the boot is damaged and either the lubricant is gone, water or other foreign material are found in the CV joint, replace the wheel drive shaft as an assembly. 4. Remove the CV joint boot (2) from the CV joint (3) and the wheel drive shaft (1). 5. Using the appropriate cleaner, remove the lubricant from the CV joint and the wheel drive shaft. Assemble Procedure 1. Install the CV joint boot and clamp (1) on the wheel drive shaft and CV joint housing (2). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Constant Velocity Joint > Component Information > Service and Repair > Rear Wheel Drive Shaft Inner Joint and Boot Replacement > Page 6615 2. Ensure that the CV joint boot (1) is properly seated in the groove (2) in the wheel drive shaft (3). 3. Using the J 42572 - pliers , breaker bar, torque wrench and or ratchet (1), close the clamp (2) until the gap (3) measures 2.15 mm (0.085 in). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Constant Velocity Joint > Component Information > Service and Repair > Rear Wheel Drive Shaft Inner Joint and Boot Replacement > Page 6616 4. Place approximately half of the lubricant (1) in the CV joint boot (2) and the other half in the CV joint (3). 5. Install the CV joint boot and clamp (2) CV joint housing (1). 6. The measured distance (1) between the boot edges should be 88.6 mm (3.50 in). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Constant Velocity Joint > Component Information > Service and Repair > Rear Wheel Drive Shaft Inner Joint and Boot Replacement > Page 6617 7. Using the J 42572 - pliers (3), breaker bar (5) and a torque or racket wrench (4), close the clamp until the gap measures 1.90 mm (0.070 in). 8. Move the CV joint in a circular motion to distribute the lubricant inside the cv joint housing. 9. Clean any remaining lubricant from the outside of the CV joint. 10. Install the outer CV joint and boot. Refer to Rear Wheel Drive Shaft Outer Joint and Boot Replacement (See: Rear Wheel Drive Shaft Outer Joint and Boot Replacement). 11. Install the wheel drive shaft. Refer to Rear Wheel Drive Shaft Replacement (See: Service and Repair). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Constant Velocity Joint > Component Information > Service and Repair > Rear Wheel Drive Shaft Inner Joint and Boot Replacement > Page 6618 Constant Velocity Joint: Service and Repair Rear Wheel Drive Shaft Outer Joint and Boot Replacement Rear Wheel Drive Shaft Outer Joint and Boot Replacement Special Tools * J 8059 - Snap Ring Pliers * J 35910 - Drive Axle Boot Clamp Pliers Note: The outer Constant Velocity Joint is not serviced separately. If the CV joint is found to have excessive wear or damaged, replace the wheel drive shaft as an assembly. Disassemble Procedure 1. Remove the wheel drive shaft from the vehicle. Refer to Rear Wheel Drive Shaft Replacement (See: Service and Repair). 2. Install the wheel drive axle shaft in a soft jawed vice. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Constant Velocity Joint > Component Information > Service and Repair > Rear Wheel Drive Shaft Inner Joint and Boot Replacement > Page 6619 Caution: Do not cut through the wheel drive shaft inboard or outboard boot during service. Cutting through the boot may damage the sealing surface of the housing and the tripot or the constant velocity joint bushing. Damage to the sealing surface may lead to water and dirt intrusion and premature wear of the constant velocity joint. Note: The following proceed is for the wheel drive shaft that have the low profile boot clamp. If the wheel drive shaft is equipped with the ear type boot clamp, proceed to step 6. 3. Using the appropriate tool, remove and discard the outer boot clamp (2) from the CV joint boot (3). 4. Using a pair of side cutters, remove and discard the inner boot clamp (4) from the CV joint boot (3). 5. Remove the cv joint boot (3) from the CV joint housing (1). 6. Using a pair of side cutters, remove and discard the outer boot clamp (3) and the inner boot clamp (1). 7. Remove the CV joint boot (2) from the CV joint housing (4). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Constant Velocity Joint > Component Information > Service and Repair > Rear Wheel Drive Shaft Inner Joint and Boot Replacement > Page 6620 8. Using a hammer and a block of wood, remove the CV joint (2) from the wheel drive shaft (1). 9. Using the J 8059 - pliers , remove the retaining ring (2) from the wheel drive shaft. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Constant Velocity Joint > Component Information > Service and Repair > Rear Wheel Drive Shaft Inner Joint and Boot Replacement > Page 6621 10. Remove the CV joint boot (1) from the wheel drive shaft (2). 11. If the CV joint is found to be without any lubricant, have water or any other contaminates in it. Replace the CV joint. Assemble Procedure 1. Position the boot and the clamp (1) on the wheel drive shaft (2), DO NOT crimp. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Constant Velocity Joint > Component Information > Service and Repair > Rear Wheel Drive Shaft Inner Joint and Boot Replacement > Page 6622 2. Ensure that the boot (1) is properly seated in the groove (2) in the wheel drive shaft (3). 3. Using the J 8059 - pliers , install the retaining ring (2) on the wheel drive shaft (1). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Constant Velocity Joint > Component Information > Service and Repair > Rear Wheel Drive Shaft Inner Joint and Boot Replacement > Page 6623 4. Using the J 35910 - pliers (1), close the boot clamp (2) until the gap (3) measures 2.15 mm (0.085 in). 5. Using a small flat bladed screwdriver, compress the retaining ring into the groove in the wheel drive shaft to allow installation of the inner CV joint on the wheel drive shaft. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Constant Velocity Joint > Component Information > Service and Repair > Rear Wheel Drive Shaft Inner Joint and Boot Replacement > Page 6624 Note: The CV joint should just touch the inner retaining ring. 6. Using a block of wood and a hammer, install the CV joint on the wheel drive shaft (1). 7. Place approximately half of the lubricant (2) inside the CV boot (1) and other half in the CV joint (3). 8. Remove any excess lubricant on the CV joint housing or the boot. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Constant Velocity Joint > Component Information > Service and Repair > Rear Wheel Drive Shaft Inner Joint and Boot Replacement > Page 6625 9. Using the J 35910 - pliers (3), torque or ratchet wrench (4) and breaker bar (5), close the boot clamp until the gap (6) measures 1.9 mm (0.070 in) . 10. Move the CV joint in a circular motion 4 to 5 times to distribute the lubricant. 11. Remove the wheel drive shaft from the vise. 12. Install the wheel drive shaft. Refer to Rear Wheel Drive Shaft Replacement (See: Service and Repair). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Constant Velocity Joint Boot > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Wheel Drive Shaft Inner Joint and Boot Replacement Constant Velocity Joint Boot: Service and Repair Front Wheel Drive Shaft Inner Joint and Boot Replacement Front Wheel Drive Shaft Inner Joint and Boot Replacement Special Tools J 35910 - Drive Axle Seal Clamp Pliers Note: The tripot assembly and the internal parts for the tripot assembly are not service. If the tripot assembly is found to have excessive wear or damaged, replace the wheel drive shaft as an assembly. Disassemble Procedure 1. Remove the wheel drive shaft from the vehicle. Refer to Front Wheel Drive Shaft Replacement (See: Service and Repair). 2. Position wheel drive shaft bar in a soft jawed vise and clamp securely. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Constant Velocity Joint Boot > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Wheel Drive Shaft Inner Joint and Boot Replacement > Page 6630 3. Using a flat-bladed tool, remove boot retaining clamp (2) from the boot (3) for the tripod housing (1). 4. Using side cutters, remove the boot clamp (4) from the boot (3) for the wheel drive shaft (5). 5. Remove the tripod housing (1) from the wheel drive shaft (2). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Constant Velocity Joint Boot > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Wheel Drive Shaft Inner Joint and Boot Replacement > Page 6631 6. Remove the retaining clip (1) and the tripod spider (2) from the wheel drive shaft (3). 7. Remove the boot (1) from the wheel drive shaft (2). 8. Inspect the wheel drive shaft inner joint for damage and excessive wear. Refer to Wheel Drive Shaft Inner Joint Inspection (See: Constant Velocity Joint/Testing and Inspection/Wheel Drive Shaft Inner Joint Inspection). Assemble Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Constant Velocity Joint Boot > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Wheel Drive Shaft Inner Joint and Boot Replacement > Page 6632 Note: Ensure the seal clamp is positioned correctly in the seal groove. 1. Position the boot (1) on the wheel drive shaft (2). 2. Install the tripot spider assembly (2) to the wheel drive shaft (3), until seated against shoulder. 3. Install the retaining ring (1) in the wheel drive shaft. 4. Place approximately half of the grease in the kit to the seal and place the remainder in the tripot housing. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Constant Velocity Joint Boot > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Wheel Drive Shaft Inner Joint and Boot Replacement > Page 6633 5. Install the tripod housing (1) on the wheel drive shaft (2). 6. Install the boot clamp (2) on the boot (3) for the tripod housing (1). 7. Install the boot clamp (4) on the boot (3) for the wheel drive (5). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Constant Velocity Joint Boot > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Wheel Drive Shaft Inner Joint and Boot Replacement > Page 6634 8. Using the J 35910 - pliers breaker bar, torque wrench and or ratchet (1) , close the boot clamp (2) until the gap (3) measures 2.15 mm (0.085 in). 9. Using the J 35910 - pliers (3), breaker bar (5), torque wrench and or ratchet (4), close the clamp until the gap (6) measures 1.9 mm (0.070 in). 10. Rotate the housing in a circular motion to distribute the grease in the tripot joint. 11. Install the wheel drive shaft from the vehicle. Refer to Front Wheel Drive Shaft Replacement (See: Service and Repair). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Constant Velocity Joint Boot > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Wheel Drive Shaft Inner Joint and Boot Replacement > Page 6635 Constant Velocity Joint Boot: Service and Repair Rear Wheel Drive Shaft Inner Joint and Boot Replacement Rear Wheel Drive Shaft Inner Joint and Boot Replacement Special Tools * J 8059 - Snap Ring Pliers * J 35910 - Drive Axle Boot Clamp Pliers Note: The inner Constant Velocity Joint is not serviced separately. If the CV joint is found to have excessive wear or damaged, replace the wheel drive shaft as an assembly. Disassemble Procedure 1. Remove the wheel drive shaft. Refer to Rear Wheel Drive Shaft Replacement (See: Service and Repair). 2. Remove the outer CV joint and boot. Refer to Rear Wheel Drive Shaft Outer Joint and Boot Replacement (See: Constant Velocity Joint/Service and Repair/Rear Wheel Drive Shaft Outer Joint and Boot Replacement). Caution: Do not cut through the wheel drive shaft inboard or outboard boot during service. Cutting through the boot may damage the sealing surface of the housing and the tripot or the constant velocity joint bushing. Damage to the sealing surface may lead to water and dirt intrusion and premature wear of the constant velocity joint. 3. Using the appropriate tool, remove and discard the outer boot clamp (3) and the inner boot clamp (2) from the CV joint (4). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Constant Velocity Joint Boot > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Wheel Drive Shaft Inner Joint and Boot Replacement > Page 6636 Note: If the boot is damaged and either the lubricant is gone, water or other foreign material are found in the CV joint, replace the wheel drive shaft as an assembly. 4. Remove the CV joint boot (2) from the CV joint (3) and the wheel drive shaft (1). 5. Using the appropriate cleaner, remove the lubricant from the CV joint and the wheel drive shaft. Assemble Procedure 1. Install the CV joint boot and clamp (1) on the wheel drive shaft and CV joint housing (2). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Constant Velocity Joint Boot > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Wheel Drive Shaft Inner Joint and Boot Replacement > Page 6637 2. Ensure that the CV joint boot (1) is properly seated in the groove (2) in the wheel drive shaft (3). 3. Using the J 42572 - pliers , breaker bar, torque wrench and or ratchet (1), close the clamp (2) until the gap (3) measures 2.15 mm (0.085 in). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Constant Velocity Joint Boot > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Wheel Drive Shaft Inner Joint and Boot Replacement > Page 6638 4. Place approximately half of the lubricant (1) in the CV joint boot (2) and the other half in the CV joint (3). 5. Install the CV joint boot and clamp (2) CV joint housing (1). 6. The measured distance (1) between the boot edges should be 88.6 mm (3.50 in). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Constant Velocity Joint Boot > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Wheel Drive Shaft Inner Joint and Boot Replacement > Page 6639 7. Using the J 42572 - pliers (3), breaker bar (5) and a torque or racket wrench (4), close the clamp until the gap measures 1.90 mm (0.070 in). 8. Move the CV joint in a circular motion to distribute the lubricant inside the cv joint housing. 9. Clean any remaining lubricant from the outside of the CV joint. 10. Install the outer CV joint and boot. Refer to Rear Wheel Drive Shaft Outer Joint and Boot Replacement (See: Constant Velocity Joint/Service and Repair/Rear Wheel Drive Shaft Outer Joint and Boot Replacement). 11. Install the wheel drive shaft. Refer to Rear Wheel Drive Shaft Replacement (See: Service and Repair). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Constant Velocity Joint Boot > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Wheel Drive Shaft Inner Joint and Boot Replacement > Page 6640 Constant Velocity Joint Boot: Service and Repair Front Wheel Drive Shaft Outer Joint and Boot Replacement Front Wheel Drive Shaft Outer Joint and Boot Replacement Special Tools * CH 48894 - Wheel Drive Shaft Boot Clamp Pliers * J 35910 - Drive Axle Seal Clamp Pliers Note: The outer Constant Velocity Joint is not service separately. If the CV joint is found to have excessive wear or damage, replace the wheel drive shaft as an assembly. Disassemble Procedure 1. Remove the wheel drive shaft from the vehicle. Refer to Front Wheel Drive Shaft Replacement (See: Service and Repair) 2. Clamp the drive axle shaft in a soft jawed vice. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Constant Velocity Joint Boot > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Wheel Drive Shaft Inner Joint and Boot Replacement > Page 6641 Caution: Do not cut through the wheel drive shaft inboard or outboard boot during service. Cutting through the boot may damage the sealing surface of the housing and the tripot or the constant velocity joint bushing. Damage to the sealing surface may lead to water and dirt intrusion and premature wear of the constant velocity joint. 3. Use a flat-bladed tool, remove the boot clamp (2) from the constant velocity (CV) joint (1) and the boot (3). 4. Using a pair of side cutters, remove and discard the boot clamp (4) from the boot (3) and the wheel drive shaft (5). Replace with NEW clamps. 5. Using a block of wood and a hammer, remove the CV joint (2) from the wheel drive shaft (1). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Constant Velocity Joint Boot > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Wheel Drive Shaft Inner Joint and Boot Replacement > Page 6642 6. Remove the boot (1) from the wheel drive shaft (2). 7. Inspect the outer CV joint for damage and wear. Refer to Wheel Drive Shaft Outer Joint Inspection (See: Constant Velocity Joint/Testing and Inspection/Wheel Drive Shaft Outer Joint Inspection). Assemble Procedure 1. Position the boot (1) on the wheel drive shaft (2). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Constant Velocity Joint Boot > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Wheel Drive Shaft Inner Joint and Boot Replacement > Page 6643 2. Ensure that the boot (1) is properly seated in the groove (2) in the wheel drive shaft (3). 3. Place approximately half the lubricant (2) inside the CV joint boot (1) and the other half in the CV joint (3). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Constant Velocity Joint Boot > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Wheel Drive Shaft Inner Joint and Boot Replacement > Page 6644 4. Using a block of wood and a hammer, install the CV joint on the wheel drive shaft (1). 5. Install the boot clamp (4) on the boot (3) and the wheel drive shaft (5). 6. Install the boot clamp (2) on the boot (3) and the CV joint housing (1). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Constant Velocity Joint Boot > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Wheel Drive Shaft Inner Joint and Boot Replacement > Page 6645 Note: Ensure that the boot clamp is properly positioned around the entire circumference of the boot. 7. Using the J 35910 - pliers (1), close the clamp (2) until the gap (3) measures 2.15 mm (0.85 in). Note: Ensure that the boot clamp is properly positioned around the entire circumference of the boot. 8. Using the CH 48894 - pliers (1), close the boot clamp (3). 9. Remove the wheel drive shaft from the bench vise. 10. Move the CV joint in a circular motion 4 to 5 times to distribute the lubricant. 11. Install the wheel drive shaft in the vehicle. Refer to Front Wheel Drive Shaft Replacement (See: Service and Repair). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Constant Velocity Joint Boot > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Wheel Drive Shaft Inner Joint and Boot Replacement > Page 6646 Constant Velocity Joint Boot: Service and Repair Rear Wheel Drive Shaft Outer Joint and Boot Replacement Rear Wheel Drive Shaft Outer Joint and Boot Replacement Special Tools * J 8059 - Snap Ring Pliers * J 35910 - Drive Axle Boot Clamp Pliers Note: The outer Constant Velocity Joint is not serviced separately. If the CV joint is found to have excessive wear or damaged, replace the wheel drive shaft as an assembly. Disassemble Procedure 1. Remove the wheel drive shaft from the vehicle. Refer to Rear Wheel Drive Shaft Replacement (See: Service and Repair). 2. Install the wheel drive axle shaft in a soft jawed vice. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Constant Velocity Joint Boot > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Wheel Drive Shaft Inner Joint and Boot Replacement > Page 6647 Caution: Do not cut through the wheel drive shaft inboard or outboard boot during service. Cutting through the boot may damage the sealing surface of the housing and the tripot or the constant velocity joint bushing. Damage to the sealing surface may lead to water and dirt intrusion and premature wear of the constant velocity joint. Note: The following proceed is for the wheel drive shaft that have the low profile boot clamp. If the wheel drive shaft is equipped with the ear type boot clamp, proceed to step 6. 3. Using the appropriate tool, remove and discard the outer boot clamp (2) from the CV joint boot (3). 4. Using a pair of side cutters, remove and discard the inner boot clamp (4) from the CV joint boot (3). 5. Remove the cv joint boot (3) from the CV joint housing (1). 6. Using a pair of side cutters, remove and discard the outer boot clamp (3) and the inner boot clamp (1). 7. Remove the CV joint boot (2) from the CV joint housing (4). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Constant Velocity Joint Boot > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Wheel Drive Shaft Inner Joint and Boot Replacement > Page 6648 8. Using a hammer and a block of wood, remove the CV joint (2) from the wheel drive shaft (1). 9. Using the J 8059 - pliers , remove the retaining ring (2) from the wheel drive shaft. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Constant Velocity Joint Boot > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Wheel Drive Shaft Inner Joint and Boot Replacement > Page 6649 10. Remove the CV joint boot (1) from the wheel drive shaft (2). 11. If the CV joint is found to be without any lubricant, have water or any other contaminates in it. Replace the CV joint. Assemble Procedure 1. Position the boot and the clamp (1) on the wheel drive shaft (2), DO NOT crimp. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Constant Velocity Joint Boot > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Wheel Drive Shaft Inner Joint and Boot Replacement > Page 6650 2. Ensure that the boot (1) is properly seated in the groove (2) in the wheel drive shaft (3). 3. Using the J 8059 - pliers , install the retaining ring (2) on the wheel drive shaft (1). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Constant Velocity Joint Boot > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Wheel Drive Shaft Inner Joint and Boot Replacement > Page 6651 4. Using the J 35910 - pliers (1), close the boot clamp (2) until the gap (3) measures 2.15 mm (0.085 in). 5. Using a small flat bladed screwdriver, compress the retaining ring into the groove in the wheel drive shaft to allow installation of the inner CV joint on the wheel drive shaft. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Constant Velocity Joint Boot > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Wheel Drive Shaft Inner Joint and Boot Replacement > Page 6652 Note: The CV joint should just touch the inner retaining ring. 6. Using a block of wood and a hammer, install the CV joint on the wheel drive shaft (1). 7. Place approximately half of the lubricant (2) inside the CV boot (1) and other half in the CV joint (3). 8. Remove any excess lubricant on the CV joint housing or the boot. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Constant Velocity Joint Boot > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Wheel Drive Shaft Inner Joint and Boot Replacement > Page 6653 9. Using the J 35910 - pliers (3), torque or ratchet wrench (4) and breaker bar (5), close the boot clamp until the gap (6) measures 1.9 mm (0.070 in) . 10. Move the CV joint in a circular motion 4 to 5 times to distribute the lubricant. 11. Remove the wheel drive shaft from the vise. 12. Install the wheel drive shaft. Refer to Rear Wheel Drive Shaft Replacement (See: Service and Repair). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Seals and Gaskets, Drive Axles > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Seals and Gaskets: > 08-04-21-002A > Jun > 09 > Drivetrain - Fluid Leak From Transfer Case/Trans. Area Seals and Gaskets: Customer Interest Drivetrain - Fluid Leak From Transfer Case/Trans. Area TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 08-04-21-002A Date: June 22, 2009 Subject: Automatic Transmission Fluid Leak at Transfer Case Weep Hole (Replace Front Wheel Drive Intermediate (Inner) Shaft Seal) Models: 2008-2010 Buick Enclave 2008-2009 Chevrolet Equinox Sport 2009-2010 Chevrolet Traverse 2010 Chevrolet Equinox 2007-2010 GMC Acadia 2010 GMC Terrain 2008-2009 Pontiac Torrent GXP 2007-2009 Suzuki XL-7 2007-2010 Saturn OUTLOOK 2008-2009 Saturn VUE with 6T45/70/75 AWD/PTU Automatic Transmission (RPO MHC/MH4/MH6) for GM or AF33-5 AWD/PTU Automatic Transmission (RPO M45) for 2007-2008 Suzuki and Getrag 760/790 Transfer Case Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the information and add model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 08-04-21-002 (07 - Transmission/Transaxle). Condition Some customers may comment on a red fluid leak from the transmission or transfer case area. Technicians may find that the fluid is leaking from the transfer case/PTU weep hole farthest from the transmission, near the passenger side. Cause The front wheel drive intermediate (inner) shaft seal may be leaking. Due to low ambient temperatures with various runout conditions between the intermediate drive shaft and the input shaft, the seal material may not properly seal automatic transmission fluid (ATF). Correction Replace the front wheel drive intermediate (inner) shaft seal with a new designed seal. Important Selecting the correct replacement seal is critical due to a 2008 mid-model design update. Use the information below to determine which seal to use. For additional information, refer to New Product Information in the Getrag 760/790 Transfer Case category in SI. For Acadia, Enclave, OUTLOOK and Traverse - For vehicles built prior to VIN Breakpoint 8J217964, use first design seal, P/N 19180998 (Green). - For vehicles built on or after VIN Breakpoint 8J217964, use second design seal, P/N 19206322 (Green). For Equinox, Terrain, Torrent and VUE - For vehicles built prior to VIN Breakpoint 86075818, use first design seal, P/N 19180998 (Green). - For vehicles built on or after VIN Breakpoint 86075818, use second design seal, P/N 19206322 (Green). For Suzuki XL-7 - For vehicles built prior to VIN Breakpoint 86115983, use first design seal, P/N 19180998 (Green). - For vehicles built on or after VIN Breakpoint 86115983, use second design seal, P/N 19206322 (Green). Notice Second design seals are not compatible with first design transfer cases. Installing a second design seal in a first design transfer case will create a Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Seals and Gaskets, Drive Axles > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Seals and Gaskets: > 08-04-21-002A > Jun > 09 > Drivetrain - Fluid Leak From Transfer Case/Trans. Area > Page 6662 transmission fluid leak due to interference with the input shaft. Seal Installation Installing the replacement seal to the proper depth is critical. Use the DT-48078 - Inner Drive Shaft Seal installer with a J 8092 - Driver Handle to install the seal 2.8 mm (0.11 in) (a) from the end of the input shaft. Refer to the Front Drive Axle Inner Shaft Seal Replacement procedure in SI. Parts Information Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table above. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Seals and Gaskets, Drive Axles > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seals and Gaskets: > 08-04-21-002A > Jun > 09 > Drivetrain - Fluid Leak From Transfer Case/Trans. Area Seals and Gaskets: All Technical Service Bulletins Drivetrain - Fluid Leak From Transfer Case/Trans. Area TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 08-04-21-002A Date: June 22, 2009 Subject: Automatic Transmission Fluid Leak at Transfer Case Weep Hole (Replace Front Wheel Drive Intermediate (Inner) Shaft Seal) Models: 2008-2010 Buick Enclave 2008-2009 Chevrolet Equinox Sport 2009-2010 Chevrolet Traverse 2010 Chevrolet Equinox 2007-2010 GMC Acadia 2010 GMC Terrain 2008-2009 Pontiac Torrent GXP 2007-2009 Suzuki XL-7 2007-2010 Saturn OUTLOOK 2008-2009 Saturn VUE with 6T45/70/75 AWD/PTU Automatic Transmission (RPO MHC/MH4/MH6) for GM or AF33-5 AWD/PTU Automatic Transmission (RPO M45) for 2007-2008 Suzuki and Getrag 760/790 Transfer Case Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the information and add model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 08-04-21-002 (07 - Transmission/Transaxle). Condition Some customers may comment on a red fluid leak from the transmission or transfer case area. Technicians may find that the fluid is leaking from the transfer case/PTU weep hole farthest from the transmission, near the passenger side. Cause The front wheel drive intermediate (inner) shaft seal may be leaking. Due to low ambient temperatures with various runout conditions between the intermediate drive shaft and the input shaft, the seal material may not properly seal automatic transmission fluid (ATF). Correction Replace the front wheel drive intermediate (inner) shaft seal with a new designed seal. Important Selecting the correct replacement seal is critical due to a 2008 mid-model design update. Use the information below to determine which seal to use. For additional information, refer to New Product Information in the Getrag 760/790 Transfer Case category in SI. For Acadia, Enclave, OUTLOOK and Traverse - For vehicles built prior to VIN Breakpoint 8J217964, use first design seal, P/N 19180998 (Green). - For vehicles built on or after VIN Breakpoint 8J217964, use second design seal, P/N 19206322 (Green). For Equinox, Terrain, Torrent and VUE - For vehicles built prior to VIN Breakpoint 86075818, use first design seal, P/N 19180998 (Green). - For vehicles built on or after VIN Breakpoint 86075818, use second design seal, P/N 19206322 (Green). For Suzuki XL-7 - For vehicles built prior to VIN Breakpoint 86115983, use first design seal, P/N 19180998 (Green). - For vehicles built on or after VIN Breakpoint 86115983, use second design seal, P/N 19206322 (Green). Notice Second design seals are not compatible with first design transfer cases. Installing a second design seal in a first design transfer case will create a Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Seals and Gaskets, Drive Axles > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seals and Gaskets: > 08-04-21-002A > Jun > 09 > Drivetrain - Fluid Leak From Transfer Case/Trans. Area > Page 6668 transmission fluid leak due to interference with the input shaft. Seal Installation Installing the replacement seal to the proper depth is critical. Use the DT-48078 - Inner Drive Shaft Seal installer with a J 8092 - Driver Handle to install the seal 2.8 mm (0.11 in) (a) from the end of the input shaft. Refer to the Front Drive Axle Inner Shaft Seal Replacement procedure in SI. Parts Information Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table above. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Seals and Gaskets, Drive Axles > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seals and Gaskets: > Page 6669 Seals and Gaskets: By Symptom Technical Service Bulletin # 08-04-21-002A Date: 090622 Drivetrain - Fluid Leak From Transfer Case/Trans. Area TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 08-04-21-002A Date: June 22, 2009 Subject: Automatic Transmission Fluid Leak at Transfer Case Weep Hole (Replace Front Wheel Drive Intermediate (Inner) Shaft Seal) Models: 2008-2010 Buick Enclave 2008-2009 Chevrolet Equinox Sport 2009-2010 Chevrolet Traverse 2010 Chevrolet Equinox 2007-2010 GMC Acadia 2010 GMC Terrain 2008-2009 Pontiac Torrent GXP 2007-2009 Suzuki XL-7 2007-2010 Saturn OUTLOOK 2008-2009 Saturn VUE with 6T45/70/75 AWD/PTU Automatic Transmission (RPO MHC/MH4/MH6) for GM or AF33-5 AWD/PTU Automatic Transmission (RPO M45) for 2007-2008 Suzuki and Getrag 760/790 Transfer Case Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the information and add model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 08-04-21-002 (07 - Transmission/Transaxle). Condition Some customers may comment on a red fluid leak from the transmission or transfer case area. Technicians may find that the fluid is leaking from the transfer case/PTU weep hole farthest from the transmission, near the passenger side. Cause The front wheel drive intermediate (inner) shaft seal may be leaking. Due to low ambient temperatures with various runout conditions between the intermediate drive shaft and the input shaft, the seal material may not properly seal automatic transmission fluid (ATF). Correction Replace the front wheel drive intermediate (inner) shaft seal with a new designed seal. Important Selecting the correct replacement seal is critical due to a 2008 mid-model design update. Use the information below to determine which seal to use. For additional information, refer to New Product Information in the Getrag 760/790 Transfer Case category in SI. For Acadia, Enclave, OUTLOOK and Traverse - For vehicles built prior to VIN Breakpoint 8J217964, use first design seal, P/N 19180998 (Green). - For vehicles built on or after VIN Breakpoint 8J217964, use second design seal, P/N 19206322 (Green). For Equinox, Terrain, Torrent and VUE - For vehicles built prior to VIN Breakpoint 86075818, use first design seal, P/N 19180998 (Green). - For vehicles built on or after VIN Breakpoint 86075818, use second design seal, P/N 19206322 (Green). For Suzuki XL-7 - For vehicles built prior to VIN Breakpoint 86115983, use first design seal, P/N 19180998 (Green). - For vehicles built on or after VIN Breakpoint 86115983, use second design seal, P/N 19206322 (Green). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Seals and Gaskets, Drive Axles > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seals and Gaskets: > Page 6670 Notice Second design seals are not compatible with first design transfer cases. Installing a second design seal in a first design transfer case will create a transmission fluid leak due to interference with the input shaft. Seal Installation Installing the replacement seal to the proper depth is critical. Use the DT-48078 - Inner Drive Shaft Seal installer with a J 8092 - Driver Handle to install the seal 2.8 mm (0.11 in) (a) from the end of the input shaft. Refer to the Front Drive Axle Inner Shaft Seal Replacement procedure in SI. Parts Information Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table above. Disclaimer Technical Service Bulletin # 08-04-21-002A Date: 090622 Drivetrain - Fluid Leak From Transfer Case/Trans. Area TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 08-04-21-002A Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Seals and Gaskets, Drive Axles > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seals and Gaskets: > Page 6671 Date: June 22, 2009 Subject: Automatic Transmission Fluid Leak at Transfer Case Weep Hole (Replace Front Wheel Drive Intermediate (Inner) Shaft Seal) Models: 2008-2010 Buick Enclave 2008-2009 Chevrolet Equinox Sport 2009-2010 Chevrolet Traverse 2010 Chevrolet Equinox 2007-2010 GMC Acadia 2010 GMC Terrain 2008-2009 Pontiac Torrent GXP 2007-2009 Suzuki XL-7 2007-2010 Saturn OUTLOOK 2008-2009 Saturn VUE with 6T45/70/75 AWD/PTU Automatic Transmission (RPO MHC/MH4/MH6) for GM or AF33-5 AWD/PTU Automatic Transmission (RPO M45) for 2007-2008 Suzuki and Getrag 760/790 Transfer Case Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the information and add model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 08-04-21-002 (07 - Transmission/Transaxle). Condition Some customers may comment on a red fluid leak from the transmission or transfer case area. Technicians may find that the fluid is leaking from the transfer case/PTU weep hole farthest from the transmission, near the passenger side. Cause The front wheel drive intermediate (inner) shaft seal may be leaking. Due to low ambient temperatures with various runout conditions between the intermediate drive shaft and the input shaft, the seal material may not properly seal automatic transmission fluid (ATF). Correction Replace the front wheel drive intermediate (inner) shaft seal with a new designed seal. Important Selecting the correct replacement seal is critical due to a 2008 mid-model design update. Use the information below to determine which seal to use. For additional information, refer to New Product Information in the Getrag 760/790 Transfer Case category in SI. For Acadia, Enclave, OUTLOOK and Traverse - For vehicles built prior to VIN Breakpoint 8J217964, use first design seal, P/N 19180998 (Green). - For vehicles built on or after VIN Breakpoint 8J217964, use second design seal, P/N 19206322 (Green). For Equinox, Terrain, Torrent and VUE - For vehicles built prior to VIN Breakpoint 86075818, use first design seal, P/N 19180998 (Green). - For vehicles built on or after VIN Breakpoint 86075818, use second design seal, P/N 19206322 (Green). For Suzuki XL-7 - For vehicles built prior to VIN Breakpoint 86115983, use first design seal, P/N 19180998 (Green). - For vehicles built on or after VIN Breakpoint 86115983, use second design seal, P/N 19206322 (Green). Notice Second design seals are not compatible with first design transfer cases. Installing a second design seal in a first design transfer case will create a transmission fluid leak due to interference with the input shaft. Seal Installation Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Seals and Gaskets, Drive Axles > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seals and Gaskets: > Page 6672 Installing the replacement seal to the proper depth is critical. Use the DT-48078 - Inner Drive Shaft Seal installer with a J 8092 - Driver Handle to install the seal 2.8 mm (0.11 in) (a) from the end of the input shaft. Refer to the Front Drive Axle Inner Shaft Seal Replacement procedure in SI. Parts Information Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table above. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Seals and Gaskets, Drive Axles > System Information > Service and Repair > Rear Axle Shaft Seal Replacement - Left Side Seals and Gaskets: Service and Repair Rear Axle Shaft Seal Replacement - Left Side Rear Axle Shaft Seal Replacement - Left Side Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Seals and Gaskets, Drive Axles > System Information > Service and Repair > Rear Axle Shaft Seal Replacement - Left Side > Page 6675 Seals and Gaskets: Service and Repair Rear Axle Shaft Seal Replacement - Right Side Rear Axle Shaft Seal Replacement - Right Side Special Tools * J 8092 - Driver Handle * J 33832 - Rear Bearing Installer Removal Procedure 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle (See: Maintenance/Vehicle Lifting/Service and Repair). 2. Drain the rear differential. Refer to Differential Oil Replacement (See: Differential Assembly/Fluid - Differential/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement). 3. Remove the exhaust system. Refer to Exhaust Muffler Replacement (See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Exhaust System/Muffler/Service and Repair). 4. Remove the spare tire. Important: In the following service procedure, it is not necessary to completely remove the propeller shaft. Relocate the propeller shaft to the side and secure with mechanics wire or equivalent. 5. Remove the propeller shaft. Refer to Propeller Shaft Replacement (See: Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints/Drive/Propeller Shaft/Service and Repair). 6. Remove the right rear wheel drive shaft. Refer to Rear Wheel Drive Shaft Replacement (See: Axle Shaft Assembly/Service and Repair). 7. Support rear differential with a transmission jack stand. 8. Remove the right rear differential support bushing bolt. Refer to Differential Housing Support Bushing Replacement (Front) (See: Differential Assembly/Differential Mount/Service and Repair/Differential Housing Support Bushing Replacement (Front))Differential Housing Support Bushing Replacement (Rear) (See: Differential Assembly/Differential Mount/Service and Repair/Differential Housing Support Bushing Replacement (Rear)). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Seals and Gaskets, Drive Axles > System Information > Service and Repair > Rear Axle Shaft Seal Replacement - Left Side > Page 6676 9. Remove the left differential mount (1). 10. Remove the right differential support bushing nut (2). Refer to Differential Housing Support Bushing Replacement (Front) (See: Differential Assembly/Differential Mount/Service and Repair/Differential Housing Support Bushing Replacement (Front))Differential Housing Support Bushing Replacement (Rear) (See: Differential Assembly/Differential Mount/Service and Repair/Differential Housing Support Bushing Replacement (Rear)). 11. Lower the differential to gain access to the axle shaft seal. 12. Using the appropriate tool, remove the axle shaft seal (1). Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Seals and Gaskets, Drive Axles > System Information > Service and Repair > Rear Axle Shaft Seal Replacement - Left Side > Page 6677 1. Using the J 8092 - handle and the J 33832 - installer , install the axle shaft seal (1). 2. Lift and position the differential in the rear cradle. 3. Install the left rear support bolt. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Seals and Gaskets, Drive Axles > System Information > Service and Repair > Rear Axle Shaft Seal Replacement - Left Side > Page 6678 4. Install right differential support bushing nut (2). Refer to Differential Housing Support Bushing Replacement (Front) (See: Differential Assembly/Differential Mount/Service and Repair/Differential Housing Support Bushing Replacement (Front))Differential Housing Support Bushing Replacement (Rear) (See: Differential Assembly/Differential Mount/Service and Repair/Differential Housing Support Bushing Replacement (Rear)). 5. Install the left differential mount (1). Refer to Differential Housing Support Bushing Replacement (Front) (See: Differential Assembly/Differential Mount/Service and Repair/Differential Housing Support Bushing Replacement (Front))Differential Housing Support Bushing Replacement (Rear) (See: Differential Assembly/Differential Mount/Service and Repair/Differential Housing Support Bushing Replacement (Rear)). 6. Remove the transmission jack stand. 7. Install the right rear wheel drive shaft. Refer to Rear Wheel Drive Shaft Replacement (See: Axle Shaft Assembly/Service and Repair) 8. Install the propeller shaft. Refer to Propeller Shaft Replacement (See: Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints/Drive/Propeller Shaft/Service and Repair). 9. Install the exhaust system. Refer to Exhaust Muffler Replacement (See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Exhaust System/Muffler/Service and Repair) 10. Remove the spare tire. 11. Fill the rear differential with fluid. Refer to Differential Oil Replacement (See: Differential Assembly/Fluid - Differential/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Wheel Bearing: Testing and Inspection Wheel Bearings Diagnosis Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension Wheel Bearing: Service and Repair Front Suspension Front Wheel Bearing and Hub Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 6684 Wheel Bearing: Service and Repair Rear Suspension Rear Wheel Bearing and Hub Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Wheel Hub > Axle Nut > Component Information > Specifications Axle Nut: Specifications Axle nut ................................................................................................................................................ .................................................... 205 Nm (151 lb ft) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Drive/Propeller Shaft > Component Information > Specifications > Mechanical Specifications Drive/Propeller Shaft: Mechanical Specifications Fastener Tightening Specifications Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Drive/Propeller Shaft > Component Information > Specifications > Mechanical Specifications > Page 6694 Drive/Propeller Shaft: Fluid Type Specifications Adhesives, Fluids, Lubricants, and Sealers Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Drive/Propeller Shaft > Component Information > Specifications > Page 6695 Drive/Propeller Shaft: Description and Operation Propeller Shaft Description and Operation The propeller shaft assembly is a 2-piece design. The front shaft consists of a plunging A-type constant velocity joint at the front and a universal joint and yoke at the rear. The rear shaft consists of a center bearing and a center yoke, which are pressed onto the rear half of the propshaft and retained by a snap ring. The front and rear shafts are joined together at the yokes with a universal joint. The rear shaft attaches to the axle with a flange which is attached to the rear shaft with a universal joint. The center bearing provides support where the front and rear shafts mate and is bolted to the underbody. The front constant velocity joint is bolted to the power take-off unit (PTU), and the rear universal joint flange is bolted to the rear differential. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Drive/Propeller Shaft > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Symptoms - Propeller Shaft Drive/Propeller Shaft: Testing and Inspection Symptoms - Propeller Shaft Symptoms - Propeller Shaft Strategy Based Diagnostics Review the system operations in order to familiarize yourself with the system functions. Refer to Propeller Shaft Description and Operation (See: Description and Operation) , Transfer Case Description and Operation (See: Transfer Case/Description and Operation/Transfer Case Description and Operation) for the Getrag 760 transfer case, and Rear Drive Axle Description and Operation (See: Differential Assembly/Description and Operation) in this service manual. All diagnosis on a vehicle should follow a logical process. Strategy based diagnostics is a uniform approach for repairing all systems. The diagnostic flow may always be used in order to resolve a system problem. The diagnostic flow is the place to start when repairs are necessary. For a detailed explanation, refer to Strategy Based Diagnosis (See: Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Strategy Based Diagnosis). Visual/Physical Inspection * Inspect for aftermarket devices which could affect the operation of the vehicle. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Checking Aftermarket Accessories). Note: The constant velocity (CV) joint is not serviceable. If the boot is torn or the joint is worn or damaged, replace the propeller shaft as an assembly. * Inspect the easily accessible or visible system components for obvious damage or conditions which could cause the symptom: - Inspect the CV joint boot for rips or cracks. - Rotate the CV joint to inspect for binding. - Inspect the CV joint for grease or oil leakage. * Verify the exact operating conditions under which the concern exists. Note factors such as speed, road conditions, ambient temperature, and other specifics. * Compare the driving characteristics or sounds, if applicable, to a known good vehicle and make sure you are not trying to correct a normal condition. Intermittent Test the vehicle under the same conditions that the customer reported in order to verify the system is operating properly. Symptom List Refer to a symptom diagnostic procedure from the following list in order to diagnose the symptom: * Ping, Snap, or Click Noise (See: Ping, Snap, or Click Noise) * Knock or Clunk Noise (See: Knock or Clunk Noise) * Scraping Noise (See: Scraping Noise) * Squeak Noise (See: Squeak Noise) * Shudder on Acceleration at Low Speed (See: Shudder on Acceleration at Low Speed) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Drive/Propeller Shaft > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Symptoms - Propeller Shaft > Page 6698 Drive/Propeller Shaft: Testing and Inspection Knock or Clunk Noise Knock or Clunk Noise Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Drive/Propeller Shaft > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Symptoms - Propeller Shaft > Page 6699 Drive/Propeller Shaft: Testing and Inspection Ping, Snap, or Click Noise Ping, Snap, or Click Noise Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Drive/Propeller Shaft > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Symptoms - Propeller Shaft > Page 6700 Drive/Propeller Shaft: Testing and Inspection Scraping Noise Scraping Noise Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Drive/Propeller Shaft > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Symptoms - Propeller Shaft > Page 6701 Drive/Propeller Shaft: Testing and Inspection Symptoms - Propeller Shaft Symptoms - Propeller Shaft Strategy Based Diagnostics Review the system operations in order to familiarize yourself with the system functions. Refer to Propeller Shaft Description and Operation (See: Description and Operation) , Transfer Case Description and Operation (See: Transfer Case/Description and Operation/Transfer Case Description and Operation) for the Getrag 760 transfer case, and Rear Drive Axle Description and Operation (See: Differential Assembly/Description and Operation) in this service manual. All diagnosis on a vehicle should follow a logical process. Strategy based diagnostics is a uniform approach for repairing all systems. The diagnostic flow may always be used in order to resolve a system problem. The diagnostic flow is the place to start when repairs are necessary. For a detailed explanation, refer to Strategy Based Diagnosis (See: Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Strategy Based Diagnosis). Visual/Physical Inspection * Inspect for aftermarket devices which could affect the operation of the vehicle. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Checking Aftermarket Accessories). Note: The constant velocity (CV) joint is not serviceable. If the boot is torn or the joint is worn or damaged, replace the propeller shaft as an assembly. * Inspect the easily accessible or visible system components for obvious damage or conditions which could cause the symptom: - Inspect the CV joint boot for rips or cracks. - Rotate the CV joint to inspect for binding. - Inspect the CV joint for grease or oil leakage. * Verify the exact operating conditions under which the concern exists. Note factors such as speed, road conditions, ambient temperature, and other specifics. * Compare the driving characteristics or sounds, if applicable, to a known good vehicle and make sure you are not trying to correct a normal condition. Intermittent Test the vehicle under the same conditions that the customer reported in order to verify the system is operating properly. Symptom List Refer to a symptom diagnostic procedure from the following list in order to diagnose the symptom: * Ping, Snap, or Click Noise (See: Ping, Snap, or Click Noise) * Knock or Clunk Noise (See: Knock or Clunk Noise) * Scraping Noise (See: Scraping Noise) * Squeak Noise (See: Squeak Noise) * Shudder on Acceleration at Low Speed (See: Shudder on Acceleration at Low Speed) Knock or Clunk Noise Knock or Clunk Noise Ping, Snap, or Click Noise Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Drive/Propeller Shaft > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Symptoms - Propeller Shaft > Page 6702 Ping, Snap, or Click Noise Scraping Noise Scraping Noise Shudder on Acceleration at Low Speed Shudder on Acceleration at Low Speed Squeak Noise Squeak Noise Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Drive/Propeller Shaft > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 6703 Drive/Propeller Shaft: Service and Repair Propeller Shaft Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Place the transmission in neutral (N). 2. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle (See: Maintenance/Vehicle Lifting/Service and Repair). 3. Mark the relationship of the propeller shaft to the rear differential drive flange and the transfer case. 4. Support the propeller shaft at the rear differential. 5. Remove the mounting bolts for the propeller shaft at the rear differential drive flange. 6. Support propeller shaft at the transfer case. 7. Remove the mounting bolts for the propeller shaft at the transfer case. 8. Support the propeller shaft at the center support bearing. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Drive/Propeller Shaft > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 6704 9. Remove the mounting bolts for the center support bearing. 10. With the aide of an assistant, remove the propeller shaft from the vehicle. Installation Procedure 1. Thoroughly clean the mounting bolts for center bearing and the front and rear propeller shaft flanges. Apply threadlocker, GM P/N 89021297 (Canadian P/N 10953488), to the bolt threads. 2. With the aide of an assistant, position the propeller shaft on the supports. 3. Align the reference marks on the front and rear of the propeller shaft to the transfer case and rear differential. 4. Position the propeller shaft on the transfer case output flange. 5. Finger tighten the mounting bolts for the propeller shaft at the transfer case output flange. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Drive/Propeller Shaft > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 6705 6. Position the center support bearing of the propeller shaft on the vehicle. 7. Finger tighten the mounting bolts for the center support bearing. 8. Position the propeller shaft on the rear differential drive flange. 9. Finger tighten the rear mounting bolts for the propeller shaft. Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener Caution). 10. Tighten the front mounting bolts for the propeller shaft. Tighten the mounting bolts to 35 Nm (25 lb ft). 11. Tighten the mounting bolts for the center support bearing. Tighten the mounting bolts to 25 Nm (19 lb ft). 12. Tighten the rear mounting bolts for the propeller shaft yoke to rear drive axle. Tighten the mounting bolts to 50 Nm (37 lb ft). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Drive/Propeller Shaft > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 6706 13. Remove the supports for the propeller shaft. 14. Lower the vehicle. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Flex Plate > Component Information > Specifications Flex Plate: Specifications Flex plate First pass ............................................................................................................................................. ......................................................... 30 Nm (22 lb ft) Final pass ........................................................ ...................................................................................................................................................... 45 degrees Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Flex Plate > Component Information > Specifications > Page 6710 Flex Plate: Service and Repair Engine Flywheel Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the transmission. Refer to Transmission Replacement (FWD) ()Transmission Replacement (AWD) (). 2. Remove the flywheel. Refer to Engine Flywheel Removal (See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Service and Repair/Overhaul/8. Engine Flywheel Removal) 3. Clean and inspect the flywheel. Refer to Engine Flywheel Cleaning and Inspection (See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Service and Repair/Overhaul/51. Engine Flywheel Cleaning and Inspection). If the flywheel teeth are damaged, inspect the starter for proper operation. Replace the starter if you find excessive wear or damage to the starter drive. Installation Procedure 1. Install the flywheel. Refer to Engine Flywheel Installation (See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Service and Repair/Overhaul/128. Engine Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Flex Plate > Component Information > Specifications > Page 6711 Flywheel Installation) 2. Install the transmission. Refer to Transmission Replacement (FWD) ()Transmission Replacement (AWD) (). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Manual Transmission - M/T Operating Characteristics Manual Transmission/Transaxle: Technical Service Bulletins Manual Transmission - M/T Operating Characteristics INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 03-07-29-004G Date: December 15, 2010 Subject: Manual Transmission Operating Characteristics Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (Including Saturn) 2009 and Prior Chevrolet and GMC Medium Duty Trucks 2006-2010 HUMMER H3 with Manual Transmission Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2011 model year and to add Cold Operation information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 03-07-29-004F (Section 07 Transmission/Transaxle). Important Even though this bulletin attempts to cover operating characteristics of manual transmissions, it cannot be all inclusive. Be sure to compare any questionable concerns to a similar vehicle and if possible, with similar mileage. Even though many of the conditions are described as characteristics and may not be durability issues, GM may attempt to improve specific issues for customer satisfaction. The purpose of this bulletin is to assist in identifying characteristics of manual transmissions that repair attempts will not change. The following are explanations and examples of conditions that will generally occur in all manual transmissions. All noises will vary between transmissions due to build variation, type of transmission (usually the more heavy duty, the more noise), type of flywheel and clutch, level of insulation, etc. Basic Information Many transmission noises are created by the firing pulses of the engine. Each firing pulse creates a sudden change in angular acceleration at the crankshaft. These changes in speed can be reduced with clutch damper springs and dual mass flywheels. However, some speed variation will make it through to the transmission. This can create noise as the various gears will accel and decel against each other because of required clearances. Cold Operation Manual transmission operation will be affected by temperature because the transmission fluid will be thicker when cold. The thicker fluid will increase the amount of force needed to shift the transmission when cold. The likelihood of gear clash will also increase due to the greater time needed for the synchronizer assembly to perform its function. Therefore when the transmission is cold, or before it has reached operating temperature, quick, hard shifts should be avoided to prevent damage to the transmission. Gear Rattle Rattling or grinding (not to be confused with a missed shift type of grinding, also described as a combustion knock type of noise) type noises usually occur while operating the engine at low RPMs (lugging the engine). This can occur while accelerating from a stop (for example, a Corvette) or while operating at low RPMs while under a load (for example, Kodiak in a lower gear and at low engine speed). Vehicles equipped with a dual-mass flywheel (for example, a 3500 HD Sierra with the 6-speed manual and Duramax(R)) will have reduced noise levels as compared to vehicles without (for example, a 4500 Kodiak with the 6-speed manual and Duramax(R)). However, dual-mass flywheels do not eliminate all noise. Neutral Rattle There are often concerns of rattle while idling in neutral with the clutch engaged. This is related to the changes in angular acceleration described earlier. This is a light rattle, and once again, vehicles with dual mass flywheels will have reduced noise. If the engine is shut off while idling in neutral with the clutch engaged, the sudden stop of the engine will create a rapid change in angular acceleration that even dual mass flywheels cannot compensate. Because of the mass of all the components, this will create a noise. This type of noise should not be heard if the clutch is released (pedal pushed to the floor). Backlash Backlash noise is created when changing engine or driveline loading. This can occur when accelerating from a stop, coming to a stop, or applying and releasing the throttle (loading and unloading the driveline). This will vary based on vehicle type, build variations, driver input, vehicle loading, etc. and is created from the necessary clearance between all of the mating gears in the transmission, axle(s) and transfer case (if equipped). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Manual Transmission - M/T Operating Characteristics > Page 6716 Shift Effort Shift effort will vary among different style transmissions and synchronizer designs. Usually the more heavy duty the transmission, the higher the shift effort because of the increased mass of the components. Shift effort can also be higher in cold weather because the fluid will be thicker. Medium duty transmissions will not shift as quickly as a Corvette transmission. To reduce shift effort, do not attempt to rush the shift - allow the synchronizers to work as designed. Shifting harder will only increase the chance of rushing past the synchronizer leading to grinding while shifting. Non-Synchronized Gears Some light duty truck transmissions in 1st gear (creeper-gear) and reverse gears in various transmissions, along with all gears in some medium duty transmissions, may be non-synchronized. This means there is not a mechanism to match input and output shaft speeds to allow for a smooth shift. This function is left up to the driver. This can be noticed if a shift into 1st or reverse is attempted while the vehicle is rolling or before the input shaft stops rotating leading to a gear grind. The grinding can be reduced by coming to a complete stop and pausing for a moment before shifting into the 1st or reverse gear. Some slight grinding can be expected. In medium duty non-synchronized transmissions, the driver must match input shaft (engine) speed to output shaft (driveshaft) speed with every shift. This can be accomplished by double clutching, or by using other methods. If the driver is not able to perform this function properly, there will be gear grinding with each improperly completed shift. Driver training may be required to correct this condition. Clutch brakes are used in medium duty non-synchronized transmissions to allow a shift into gear at a stop. The clutch brake is used to stop the input shaft from spinning, allowing a shift into gear at a stop without grinding. The clutch brake is activated by pressing the clutch pedal all the way to the floor. When the clutch brake is used, it is possible to have a blocked shift with the vehicle stationary. If this occurs, engage the clutch slightly to rotate the input gear to allow the shift. The clutch brake is intended to only be used while at a stop. Care must be taken to not activate the clutch brake while shifting between gears. This could lead to excessive grinding or a blocked or missed shift. Skip Shift Currently, the Cadillac CTS-V, Pontiac GTO, Chevrolet Corvette and Camaro SS (other models may follow) equipped with the 6-speed manual transmission have a feature referred to as a "skip-shift." This feature only allows a shift from 1st to 4th gear when the indicator lamp is illuminated on the dash. Dealers cannot disable this feature as it was established to help meet fuel economy standards. The conditions for this feature are: engine coolant at normal operating temperature, vehicle speed of 24-31 km/h (15-19 mph), 21% or less throttle being used (refer to Service Information or the Owner Manual for more details.) Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-07-30-016A > Nov > 09 > A/T Controls - Downshift Hesitation/Delayed Shifting Control Module: Customer Interest A/T Controls - Downshift Hesitation/Delayed Shifting TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 09-07-30-016A Date: November 25, 2009 Subject: Transmission Hesitation, Delayed Shifting, Shifting at Wrong Time (Reprogram TCM) Models: 2010 Buick Enclave 2010 Chevrolet Equinox, Traverse 2010 GMC Acadia, Terrain 2010 Saturn OUTLOOK Equipped with 6T40/45 (RPOs MH7, MHC) or 6T70/75 (RPOs MH2, MH4, MY9, MH6) Automatic Transmission 2010 Buick LaCrosse Equipped with 3.0L (RPO LF1) Engine and 6T70 (RPOs MH2, MH4) Automatic Transmission 2010 Chevrolet Malibu 2010 Pontiac G6 2010 Saturn AURA Equipped with 6T40 (RPO MH8) Automatic Transmission All Vehicles Built Prior to the Following VIN Breakpoints: Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add models. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 09-07-30-016 (07- Transmission/Transaxle). Condition Some customers may comment on transmission downshift hesitation, delayed shifting and shifting at the wrong time. Correction A revised transmission calibration has been developed to address these issues. Reprogram the transmission control module (TCM) with updated calibration files using the TIS2WEB Service Programming System (SPS) application. Select SEQ Programming Sequence ECM/TCM from the Supported Controllers screen. Refer to SI and Service Programming System (SPS) documentation for programming instructions, if required. Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table above. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Control Module: > 10-07-30-002A > Jun > 10 > A/T Controls - Snapshot Data Using (GDS) Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T Controls - Snapshot Data Using (GDS) INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 10-07-30-002A Date: June 11, 2010 Subject: Navigation Procedure for Snapshot Data Using Global Diagnostic System (GDS), Uploading Snapshot Data to Computer and E-mailing Models: 2010-2011 Buick LaCrosse 2011 Buick Regal 2010-2011 Cadillac SRX 2010-2011 Chevrolet Camaro, Equinox 2010-2011 GMC Terrain Attention: For additional information about GDS and/or the snapshot feature, please review course number: 16048.26W Global Diagnostic System, at the GM training website: www.gmtraining.com. In Canada go to: www.gmprocanada.com. You may also utilize the Help Section of GDS by clicking on the Menu button that is on the lower left corner of the GDS screen. Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2011 model year and correct the step number referred to in the Note for Step 18. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 10-07-30-002 (Section 07 - Transmission/Transaxle). The Global Diagnostic System (GDS) and the multiple diagnostic interface (MDI) module will take the place of the Tech 2(R) on certain vehicles when communicating and diagnosing vehicle on-board electrical systems. This diagnostic tool platform and software will be required for use with all 2010 and later GM Global Architecture (Global A) vehicles beginning with the Chevrolet Camaro, followed by the Buick LaCrosse, Chevrolet Equinox, Cadillac SRX, GMC Terrain and Buick Regal. The following procedure is intended to show the user how to navigate to the appropriate data screen, upload a snapshot of the data to a computer and create an e-mail of the snapshot. The procedure is written for an automatic transmission, but is similar for other data screens. Procedure for GDS Navigating and Uploading Transmission Snapshot Data to a PC and Creating an E-mail 1. Turn OFF the ignition. 2. Connect the MDI to the Data Link Connector (DLC) of the vehicle. Note Use the USB port to make the following MDI connection: 3. Connect the MDI to a PC or laptop that has been downloaded with the GDS application from TIS2WEB. Note At least one Diagnostic Package must be installed on the PC to perform diagnostics. If GDS was just installed, select: Add New Diagnostic Package and then select: a Diagnostic Package to download. 4. Click: On the GDS icon on the PC. 5. The Login Page will appear. 6. Select: A User. 7. The ID Screen will appear. 8. Select: The serial number of the MDI being used. 9. Select: Connect. 10. Verify that the system status is ready by observing for a flashing PC light icon on the MDI. 11. Select: Make, Model and Model Year, in order to build the vehicle. 12. At: The Verification step, turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. 13. Click: Upload VIN, to allow the VIN to be reported to the PC. 14. Select: Next Action. 15. The Home Page will appear. 16. Select: Next. 17. The Diagnostic Screen will appear. Note Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Control Module: > 10-07-30-002A > Jun > 10 > A/T Controls - Snapshot Data Using (GDS) > Page 6732 Due to vehicle build, software and RPO variations, GDS may ask for additional information in Step 18. 18. Select: Engine ID, if prompted. 19. Select: Module Diagnostics. 20. Select: TCM. 21. Select: Data Display. 22. Select: The drop down menu to display the available Data Display selections. 23. Select: The appropriate Data Display for the snapshot to be taken. Note The snapshot data can be recorded at idle or on a hoist when using a shop PC. IF the vehicle is driven, the use of a laptop with GDS will be required. PC memory will determine the amount of snapshot recording time. 24. Select: Record Snapshot, when ready. 25. Select: Stop Snapshot, upon completion. 26. Insert: Comment. Use a name, the vehicle model or the concern and date in order to identify the snapshot. 27. Exit: The Data List. 28. Exit: The Diagnostic Screen. 29. The Home Page will appear with the snapshot on the right side. 30. Click: On the Snapshot to Highlight it. 31. Click: Tech Support. Note Enter the necessary e-mail information into ALL of the blank boxes. Failure to do so will result in an error message and the snapshot will not be sent. 32. The Send E-mail dialog box will appear. 1. SENDER: Enter your first name. Use only ONE name as multiple words may cause an error message. 2. RECIPIENT: Enter their e-mail address. Note An error message will occur if this box contains ANY spaces. 3. REPLY TO: Enter your first name here. An e-mail address can be used but it MUST NOT contain any spaces or unrecognized characters. 4. SUBJECT: Enter the appropriate information here, such as the condition, symptom, data parameter being investigated or DTC. 5. TEXT: Type a short message here, such as the test results, snapshot type, or a cell phone number. Note A copy of the snapshot will still reside on the PC. 33. Click: OK, to send the snapshot. Procedure to E-mail GDS Snapshot Data to TAC Important When e-mailing a snapshot to TAC, only send the snapshot data they have REQUESTED. 1. Select: Home Page. The snapshot will appear on the right side. 2. Click: On the Snapshot to Highlight it. 3. Click: Tech Support. 4. The Send E-mail dialog box will appear. Note Enter the necessary e-mail information into ALL of the blank boxes. Failure to do so will result in an error message and the snapshot will not be sent. 5. SENDER: Enter your first name here. Use only ONE name as multiple words may cause an error message. 6. RECIPIENT: Enter the USA or Canada TAC E-mail Address. Note An error message will occur if this box contains ANY spaces. 7. REPLY TO: Enter your first name here. An e-mail address can be used but it MUST NOT contain any spaces or unrecognized characters. 8. SUBJECT: Enter Your TAC Case Number & VIN Number here. Both numbers MUST appear in this box or the e-mail cannot be processed and will be deleted. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Control Module: > 10-07-30-002A > Jun > 10 > A/T Controls - Snapshot Data Using (GDS) > Page 6733 9. TEXT: Type a short message here, such as the test results, snapshot type, or a cell phone number. Note A copy of the snapshot will still reside on the PC. 10. Click: OK, to send the snapshot. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Control Module: > 09-07-30-016A > Nov > 09 > A/T Controls - Downshift Hesitation/Delayed Shifting Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T Controls - Downshift Hesitation/Delayed Shifting TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 09-07-30-016A Date: November 25, 2009 Subject: Transmission Hesitation, Delayed Shifting, Shifting at Wrong Time (Reprogram TCM) Models: 2010 Buick Enclave 2010 Chevrolet Equinox, Traverse 2010 GMC Acadia, Terrain 2010 Saturn OUTLOOK Equipped with 6T40/45 (RPOs MH7, MHC) or 6T70/75 (RPOs MH2, MH4, MY9, MH6) Automatic Transmission 2010 Buick LaCrosse Equipped with 3.0L (RPO LF1) Engine and 6T70 (RPOs MH2, MH4) Automatic Transmission 2010 Chevrolet Malibu 2010 Pontiac G6 2010 Saturn AURA Equipped with 6T40 (RPO MH8) Automatic Transmission All Vehicles Built Prior to the Following VIN Breakpoints: Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add models. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 09-07-30-016 (07- Transmission/Transaxle). Condition Some customers may comment on transmission downshift hesitation, delayed shifting and shifting at the wrong time. Correction A revised transmission calibration has been developed to address these issues. Reprogram the transmission control module (TCM) with updated calibration files using the TIS2WEB Service Programming System (SPS) application. Select SEQ Programming Sequence ECM/TCM from the Supported Controllers screen. Refer to SI and Service Programming System (SPS) documentation for programming instructions, if required. Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table above. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Control Module: > 10-07-30-002A > Jun > 10 > A/T Controls - Snapshot Data Using (GDS) Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T Controls - Snapshot Data Using (GDS) INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 10-07-30-002A Date: June 11, 2010 Subject: Navigation Procedure for Snapshot Data Using Global Diagnostic System (GDS), Uploading Snapshot Data to Computer and E-mailing Models: 2010-2011 Buick LaCrosse 2011 Buick Regal 2010-2011 Cadillac SRX 2010-2011 Chevrolet Camaro, Equinox 2010-2011 GMC Terrain Attention: For additional information about GDS and/or the snapshot feature, please review course number: 16048.26W Global Diagnostic System, at the GM training website: www.gmtraining.com. In Canada go to: www.gmprocanada.com. You may also utilize the Help Section of GDS by clicking on the Menu button that is on the lower left corner of the GDS screen. Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2011 model year and correct the step number referred to in the Note for Step 18. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 10-07-30-002 (Section 07 - Transmission/Transaxle). The Global Diagnostic System (GDS) and the multiple diagnostic interface (MDI) module will take the place of the Tech 2(R) on certain vehicles when communicating and diagnosing vehicle on-board electrical systems. This diagnostic tool platform and software will be required for use with all 2010 and later GM Global Architecture (Global A) vehicles beginning with the Chevrolet Camaro, followed by the Buick LaCrosse, Chevrolet Equinox, Cadillac SRX, GMC Terrain and Buick Regal. The following procedure is intended to show the user how to navigate to the appropriate data screen, upload a snapshot of the data to a computer and create an e-mail of the snapshot. The procedure is written for an automatic transmission, but is similar for other data screens. Procedure for GDS Navigating and Uploading Transmission Snapshot Data to a PC and Creating an E-mail 1. Turn OFF the ignition. 2. Connect the MDI to the Data Link Connector (DLC) of the vehicle. Note Use the USB port to make the following MDI connection: 3. Connect the MDI to a PC or laptop that has been downloaded with the GDS application from TIS2WEB. Note At least one Diagnostic Package must be installed on the PC to perform diagnostics. If GDS was just installed, select: Add New Diagnostic Package and then select: a Diagnostic Package to download. 4. Click: On the GDS icon on the PC. 5. The Login Page will appear. 6. Select: A User. 7. The ID Screen will appear. 8. Select: The serial number of the MDI being used. 9. Select: Connect. 10. Verify that the system status is ready by observing for a flashing PC light icon on the MDI. 11. Select: Make, Model and Model Year, in order to build the vehicle. 12. At: The Verification step, turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. 13. Click: Upload VIN, to allow the VIN to be reported to the PC. 14. Select: Next Action. 15. The Home Page will appear. 16. Select: Next. 17. The Diagnostic Screen will appear. Note Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Control Module: > 10-07-30-002A > Jun > 10 > A/T Controls - Snapshot Data Using (GDS) > Page 6743 Due to vehicle build, software and RPO variations, GDS may ask for additional information in Step 18. 18. Select: Engine ID, if prompted. 19. Select: Module Diagnostics. 20. Select: TCM. 21. Select: Data Display. 22. Select: The drop down menu to display the available Data Display selections. 23. Select: The appropriate Data Display for the snapshot to be taken. Note The snapshot data can be recorded at idle or on a hoist when using a shop PC. IF the vehicle is driven, the use of a laptop with GDS will be required. PC memory will determine the amount of snapshot recording time. 24. Select: Record Snapshot, when ready. 25. Select: Stop Snapshot, upon completion. 26. Insert: Comment. Use a name, the vehicle model or the concern and date in order to identify the snapshot. 27. Exit: The Data List. 28. Exit: The Diagnostic Screen. 29. The Home Page will appear with the snapshot on the right side. 30. Click: On the Snapshot to Highlight it. 31. Click: Tech Support. Note Enter the necessary e-mail information into ALL of the blank boxes. Failure to do so will result in an error message and the snapshot will not be sent. 32. The Send E-mail dialog box will appear. 1. SENDER: Enter your first name. Use only ONE name as multiple words may cause an error message. 2. RECIPIENT: Enter their e-mail address. Note An error message will occur if this box contains ANY spaces. 3. REPLY TO: Enter your first name here. An e-mail address can be used but it MUST NOT contain any spaces or unrecognized characters. 4. SUBJECT: Enter the appropriate information here, such as the condition, symptom, data parameter being investigated or DTC. 5. TEXT: Type a short message here, such as the test results, snapshot type, or a cell phone number. Note A copy of the snapshot will still reside on the PC. 33. Click: OK, to send the snapshot. Procedure to E-mail GDS Snapshot Data to TAC Important When e-mailing a snapshot to TAC, only send the snapshot data they have REQUESTED. 1. Select: Home Page. The snapshot will appear on the right side. 2. Click: On the Snapshot to Highlight it. 3. Click: Tech Support. 4. The Send E-mail dialog box will appear. Note Enter the necessary e-mail information into ALL of the blank boxes. Failure to do so will result in an error message and the snapshot will not be sent. 5. SENDER: Enter your first name here. Use only ONE name as multiple words may cause an error message. 6. RECIPIENT: Enter the USA or Canada TAC E-mail Address. Note An error message will occur if this box contains ANY spaces. 7. REPLY TO: Enter your first name here. An e-mail address can be used but it MUST NOT contain any spaces or unrecognized characters. 8. SUBJECT: Enter Your TAC Case Number & VIN Number here. Both numbers MUST appear in this box or the e-mail cannot be processed and will be deleted. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Control Module: > 10-07-30-002A > Jun > 10 > A/T Controls - Snapshot Data Using (GDS) > Page 6744 9. TEXT: Type a short message here, such as the test results, snapshot type, or a cell phone number. Note A copy of the snapshot will still reside on the PC. 10. Click: OK, to send the snapshot. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission Control Module: Service and Repair 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission Control Solenoid Valve and Transmission Control Module Assembly Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the transmission control valve body cover. Refer to Control Valve Body Cover Replacement (See: Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Valve Body/Service and Repair/6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission/Control Valve Body Cover Replacement). 2. Disconnect the input speed sensor electrical connector (1). 3. Disconnect the output speed sensor electrical connector (2). 4. Disconnect the shift position switch electrical connector (3). 5. Remove the 3 control valve body bolts (1) M5 x 40.5. 6. Remove the 12 control valve body bolts (2) M6 x 97. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 6747 7. Remove the control solenoid valve assembly (3) with transmission control module. Caution: Use care when removing or installing the filter plate assembly. A broken or missing retaining tab may not adequately secure the filter plate to the control solenoid valve assembly, resulting in possible damage or contamination. 8. Remove the control solenoid valve assembly filter plate (4). Discard the filter plate. It is not reusable. 9. Inspect the channel plate bolt pass through holes for damage or brinelling. Any damage will cause incorrect pressure switch operation. Replace as necessary. Installation Procedure Caution: Use care when removing or installing the filter plate assembly. A broken or missing retaining tab may not adequately secure the filter plate to the control solenoid valve assembly, resulting in possible damage or contamination. 1. Install a NEW control solenoid valve assembly filter plate (4) to prevent fluid leaks past the fluid seals. 2. Install the control solenoid valve assembly (3) with transmission control module. 3. Hand start the control valve body bolts (1, 2). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 6748 Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener Caution). 4. Secure the 12 control valve body bolts (2) M6 x 97 and tighten in sequence to 10 Nm (89 lb in). 5. Secure the 3 control valve body bolts (1) M5 x 40.5 and tighten in sequence to 8 Nm (71 lb in). 6. Connect the input speed sensor electrical connector (1). 7. Connect the output speed sensor electrical connector (2). 8. Connect the shift position switch electrical connector (3). 9. Install the transmission control valve body cover. Refer to Control Valve Body Cover Replacement (See: Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Valve Body/Service and Repair/6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission/Control Valve Body Cover Replacement). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 6749 Control Module: Service and Repair 6T70/6T75 - Automatic Transmission Control Solenoid Valve and Transmission Control Module Assembly Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the control valve body cover. Refer to Control Valve Body Cover Replacement (See: Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Valve Body/Service and Repair/6T70/6T75 - Automatic Transmission/Control Valve Body Cover Replacement). 2. Disconnect the input speed sensor electrical connector (1). 3. Disconnect the output speed sensor electrical connector (2). 4. Disconnect the shift position switch electrical connector (3). 5. Remove the 4 control valve body bolts (1) M6 x 80. 6. Position the control solenoid valve spring (8) to the side. Spring will be released with the removal of the control valve body assembly. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 6750 7. Remove the 2 control valve body bolts (4) M6 x 65. 8. Remove the control valve body bolt (3) M6 x 42. 9. Remove the 3 control valve body bolts (2) M6 x 95. 10. Remove the control valve body bolt (7) M6 x 55. 11. Remove the control solenoid valve body and transmission control module (TCM) assembly (5). Caution: Use care when removing or installing the filter plate assembly. A broken or missing retaining tab may not adequately secure the filter plate to the control solenoid valve assembly, resulting in possible damage or contamination. 12. Remove the control solenoid valve assembly filter plate (6). * Discard the filler plate. It is not reusable. * Inspect the pressure switch manifold seals for damage or contamination. Replace the control solenoid valve assembly as necessary. * Inspect the upper channel plate bolt holes for damage, peening or burnelling. Any damage around the bolt holes near the pressure control switch (PCS) feed holes could cause leakage around the PCS seals. Replace the upper channel plate as necessary. Installation Procedure Caution: Use care when removing or installing the filter plate assembly. A broken or missing retaining tab may not adequately secure the filter plate to the control solenoid valve assembly, resulting in possible damage or contamination. 1. Install a NEW control solenoid valve assembly filter plate (1). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 6751 2. Install the control solenoid valve body and TCM assembly (5). 3. Rotate the control solenoid valve spring (7) into position. Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener Caution). Note: Install all bolts before tightening, then tighten in specified sequence. 4. Install the 4 control valve body bolts (1) M6 x 80. 5. Install the control valve body bolt (6) M6 x 55. 6. Install the 3 control valve body bolts (2) M6 x 95. 7. Install the control valve body bolt (3) M6 x 42. 8. Install the 2 control valve body bolts (4) M6 x 65 and tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb in). 9. Connect the input speed sensor electrical connector (1). 10. Connect the output speed sensor electrical connector (2). 11. Connect the shift position switch electrical connector (3). 12. Install the control valve body cover. Refer to Control Valve Body Cover Replacement (See: Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Valve Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 6752 Body/Service and Repair/6T70/6T75 - Automatic Transmission/Control Valve Body Cover Replacement). 13. For transmission control module programming and setup. Refer to Control Module References (See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning). Note: After an internal transmission repair or internal part replacement the service fast learn adapt procedure should be performed. 14. Perform the transmission adaptive values learn procedure. Refer to Transmission Adaptive Values Learn (See: Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/6T30/6T40/6T45 Automatic Transmission). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Differential > Control Unit, Differential Lock > Component Information > Locations Control Unit: Locations Wheels/Vehicle Underbody Component Views Rear Underbody Components 1 - K47 Rear Differential Clutch Control Module (F46) 2 - R6 Data Link Resistor Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Differential > Control Unit, Differential Lock > Component Information > Locations > Page 6757 Control Unit: Diagrams K47 Rear Differential Clutch Control Module (F46) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Differential > Control Unit, Differential Lock > Component Information > Service and Repair > Rear Differential Clutch Control Module Replacement Control Unit: Service and Repair Rear Differential Clutch Control Module Replacement Rear Differential Clutch Control Module Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Differential > Control Unit, Differential Lock > Component Information > Service and Repair > Rear Differential Clutch Control Module Replacement > Page 6760 Control Unit: Service and Repair Rear Wheel Drive Module Clutch Housing Replacement Rear Wheel Drive Module Clutch Housing Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Mode Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations Transmission Mode Switch: Locations Powertrain Component Views Automatic Transmission Electronic Components 1 - Q8 Control Solenoid Valve Assembly 2 - B15 Transmission Internal Mode Switch 3 - B14A Transmission Output Shaft Speed Sensor 4 - B14C Transmission Input Shaft Speed Sensor Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Exploded Views Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Exploded Views 6L50/6L80/6L90 - Automatic Transmission Disassembled Views Park System Components 50 - A/Trans Case 600 - Park Pawl Shaft 601 - Park Pawl Spring 602 - Park Pawl 603 - Park Pawl Actuator Guide Pin 604 - Manual Shift Shaft Seal 605 - Park Pawl Actuator Guide Seal 606 - Park Pawl Actuator Guide 607 - Park Pawl Actuator Assembly 608 - Manual Shift Detent Lever Shaft 609 - Manual Shift Detent (w/Shaft Position Switch) Lever Assembly 610 - Manual Shift Detent Lever Pin 611 - Manual Shift Shaft Pin 6T70/6T75 - Automatic Transmission Disassembled Views Park System Components Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Exploded Views > Page 6770 500 - Park Pawl Actuator Bracket Bolt 501 - Park Pawl Actuator Bracket 502 - Park Pawl Shaft 503 - Park Pawl 504 - Park Pawl Spring 505 - Park Pawl Actuator Guide Pin 506 - Park Pawl Actuator Guide 507 - A/Trans Case Assembly 508 - Manual Shift Shaft Seal 509 - Park Pawl Actuator Assembly 510 - Manual Shift Shaft Pin 511 - Manual Shift Detent (w/Shaft Position Switch) Lever Assembly Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Exploded Views > Page 6771 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Connector Views P2 Transmission Shift Lever Position Indicator Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Service and Repair 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission Manual Shift Detent Lever with Shaft Position Switch Assembly Replacement Special Tools * DT-48550 Detent Lever Pin Remover * J 41229 Manual Shaft Pin Installer Removal Procedure 1. Remove the control valve body. Refer to Control Valve Body Replacement (See: Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Valve Body/Service and Repair/6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission/Control Valve Body Replacement). 2. Remove the manual shaft detent lever hub pin (1) using DT-48550. 3. Remove the manual shift shaft pin (5). Discard the pin. 4. Remove the manual shaft (2). Note: Disconnect the actuator rod (3) from the detent lever assembly. Do not remove the actuator rod from the transmission case. 5. Remove the manual shaft detent (w/shift position switch) lever assembly (4). Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 6774 Note: Connect the actuator rod (3) to the detent lever assembly. 1. Install the manual shaft detent (w/shift position switch) lever assembly (4). Note: Lubricate the shaft with automatic transmission fluid to prevent damage to the manual shift shaft seal during installation. 2. Install the manual shaft (2). 3. Install the manual shaft detent lever hub pin (1) using DT-48550. Install the Manual Shaft Detent Lever Hub Pin to height of (b) 7.9 mm (0.38 in). Caution: Use the manual shaft pin installer to install the pin at the correct height in order to properly secure the manual shaft. If you install the pin too deep, the case bore may crack. 4. Install the NEW manual shift shaft pin (5) using J 41229. Use a NEW pin to ensure proper engagement with the case. Inspect pin installed height is within (a) 7.2-8.2 mm (0.28-0.32 in). 5. Install the control valve body. Refer to Control Valve Body Replacement (See: Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Valve Body/Service and Repair/6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission/Control Valve Body Replacement). 6. Perform the transmission adaptive values learn procedure. Refer to Transmission Adaptive Values Learn (See: Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/6T30/6T40/6T45 Automatic Transmission). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 6775 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Service and Repair 6T70/6T75 - Automatic Transmission Manual Shift Detent Lever with Shaft Position Switch Assembly Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 6776 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations Transmission Speed Sensor: Locations Powertrain Component Views Front Engine Components (LAF 1 of 2) 1 - Q38 Throttle Body 2 - G18 High Pressure Fuel Pump 3 - B23F Camshaft Position Sensor Intake 4 - B37 Engine Oil Pressure Switch 5 - B68 Knock Sensor 6 - B26 Crankshaft Position Sensor 7 - M64 Starter Motor 8 - Q2 A/C Compressor Clutch 9 - G13 Generator Front Engine Components (LAF 2 of 2) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 6780 1 - B47B Fuel Rail Pressure Sensor 2 - B74 Manifold Absolute Pressure Sensor 3 - Q17D Fuel Injector 4 4 - Q17C Fuel Injector 3 5 - B1 A/C Refrigerant Pressure Sensor 6 - Q17B Fuel Injector 2 7 - Q17A Fuel Injector 1 Left Rear Engine Components (LAF) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 6781 1 - T8D Ignition Coil 4 2 - T8C Ignition Coil 3 3 - T8B Ignition Coil 2 4 - T8A Ignition Coil 1 5 - Q6F Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Intake 6 - Q6E Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Exhaust 7 - B52A Heated Oxygen Sensor 1 8 - B52B Heated Oxygen Sensor 2 9 - B34 Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor 10 - B23E Camshaft Position Sensor - Exhaust 11 - Q12 Evaporative Emission Purge Solenoid Valve Top of the Engine Components (LF1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 6782 1 - B47B Fuel Rail Pressure Sensor 2 - Q17A Fuel Injector 1 3 - Q17C Fuel Injector 3 4 - Q17E Fuel Injector 5 5 - Q17F Fuel Injector 6 6 - Q17D Fuel Injector 4 7 - Q17B Fuel Injector 2 Left Front of the Engine Components (LF1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 6783 1 - T8B Ignition Coil 2 2 - T8D Ignition Coil 4 3 - T8F Ignition Coil 6 4 - G18 High Pressure Fuel Pump 5 - B34 Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor 6 - M64 Starter Motor 7 - B68B Knock Sensor 2 8 - B37 Engine Oil Pressure Switch 9 - B1 A/C Refrigerant Pressure Sensor 10 - Q2 A/C Compressor Clutch 11 - G13 Generator Right Rear of the Engine Components (LF1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 6784 1 - B74 Manifold Absolute Pressure Sensor 2 - T8E Ignition Coil 5 3 - T8C Ignition Coil 3 4 - Q12 Evaporative Emission Purge Solenoid Valve 5 - Q38 Throttle Body 6 - B23B Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 1 Intake 7 - B23D Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 2 Intake 8 - Q6D Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Bank 2 Intake 9 - Q6C Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Bank 2 Exhaust 10 - B23C Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 2 Exhaust 11 - Q6B Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Bank 1 Intake 12 - Q6A Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Bank 1 Exhaust 13 - B23A Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 1 Exhaust 14 - B68A Knock Sensor 1 15 - B26 Crankshaft Position Sensor 16 - T8A Ignition Coil 1 Front of the Exhaust System Components (LF1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 6785 1 - B52C Heated Oxygen Sensor - Bank 1 Sensor 1 2 - B52D Heated Oxygen Sensor - Bank 1 Sensor 2 3 - B52F Heated Oxygen Sensor - Bank 2 Sensor 2 4 - B52E Heated Oxygen Sensor Bank 2 Sensor 1 Automatic Transmission Electronic Components Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 6786 1 - Q8 Control Solenoid Valve Assembly 2 - B15 Transmission Internal Mode Switch 3 - B14A Transmission Output Shaft Speed Sensor 4 - B14C Transmission Input Shaft Speed Sensor Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > 6L50/6L80/6L90 Automatic Transmission Transmission Speed Sensor: Diagrams 6L50/6L80/6L90 - Automatic Transmission Component Location Component Location 1 - Reaction Carrier Assembly 2 - Control Valve Body Assembly 3 - Input Carrier Assembly 4 Valve Channel Plate 5 - Output Carrier Assembly 6 - Park Gear 7 - Control Solenoid (w/Body and TCM) Valve Assembly 8 - Drive Link Assembly 9 - Drive Sprocket 10 - Torque Converter Assembly 11 - A/Trans Fluid Pump Assembly 12 - Differential Carrier Assembly 13 - Front Differential Ring Gear 14 - Driven Sprocket 15 - 1-2-3-4 Clutch Assembly Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > 6L50/6L80/6L90 Automatic Transmission > Page 6789 16 - Low and Reverse Clutch Assembly 17 - 2-6 Clutch Assembly 18 - 3-5 Reverse Clutch Assembly 19 - 4-5-6 Clutch Assembly 20 - A/Trans Input Speed Sensor Assembly 21 - Reaction Sun Gear Assembly Disassembled Views Disassembled Views Case and Associated Parts 1 - Control Valve Body Cover Bolt 2 - Control Valve Body Cover Assembly 3 - Control Valve Body Cover Gasket 4 - Control Valve Body Bolt 5 - Control Valve Body Cover Hole Seal 6 - Control Solenoid Valve Heat Sink Bolt 7 - Control Solenoid (w/Body and TCM) Valve Assembly 8 - Control Valve Body Filter Plate Assembly 9 - Control Valve Body Bolt 10 - Control Valve Body Bolt Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > 6L50/6L80/6L90 Automatic Transmission > Page 6790 11 - Control Valve Body Assembly 12 - Control Valve Body Spacer Plate Assembly 13 - A/Trans Fluid Level Control Valve 14 - A/Trans Fluid Level Control Valve Gasket 15 - A/Trans Output Speed Sensor Bolt 16 - A/Trans Output Speed Sensor Assembly 17 - Manual Shaft Detent Spring Bolt 18 - Manual Shaft Detent Lever Spring Assembly 19 - A/Trans Input Speed Sensor Assembly 20 - A/Trans Input Speed Sensor Assembly O-Ring Seal 21 - A/Trans Input Speed Sensor Bolt 22 Fill Cap 23 - Fill Cap Seal 24 - Torque Converter Housing Gasket 25 - A/Trans Fluid Pump Seal Assembly 26 - Torque Converter with Fluid Pump Housing Assembly 27 - Torque Converter and Differential Housing Bolt 28 - A/Trans Fluid Fill Tube Plug Assembly 29 - Torque Converter Assembly 3-5 Reverse Clutch Assembly 500 - A/Trans Input Shaft Speed Sensor Reluctor Wheel Retainer Ring 501 - A/Trans Input Shaft Speed Sensor Reluctor Wheel 502 - 3-5-Reverse Clutch Piston 503 - 3-5-Reverse Clutch Piston Return Spring Assembly 504 - 3-5-Reverse Clutch Piston Inner Seal 505 - 3-5-Reverse Clutch Piston Inner Seal 506 - 3-5-Reverse Clutch Piston Dam Seal 507 - 3-5-Reverse Clutch Apply Plate 508 - 3-5-Reverse Clutch Plate 509 - 3-5-Reverse Clutch (w/Friction Material) Plate Assembly 510 - 3-5-Reverse Clutch Backing Plate 511 - 3-5-Reverse Clutch Backing Plate Retainer Ring Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > 6L50/6L80/6L90 Automatic Transmission > Page 6791 Transmission Speed Sensor: Diagrams 6T70/6T75 - Automatic Transmission Component Location Component Location Component Locations 1 - Manual Shift Detent Lever Assembly (w/Shaft Position Switch) 2 - Trans Fluid Level Indicator 3 Reaction Carrier Assembly 4 - Output Speed Sensor 5 - Input Carrier Assembly 6 - Output Carrier Assembly 7 - Front Differential Transfer Drive Gear 8 - Front Differential Transfer Drive Gear Support Assembly 9 - Torque Converter Assembly 10 - Park Pawl Actuator Assembly 11 - Fluid Pump Drive Link Assembly 12 - Park Pawl 13 - Front Differential Transfer Driven Gear Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > 6L50/6L80/6L90 Automatic Transmission > Page 6792 14 - Front Differential Drive Pinion Gear 15 - Park Gear 16 - Torque Converter and Support and Fluid Pump Housing Assembly 17 - Front Differential Carrier Assembly 18 - Front Differential Carrier Baffle 19 - Front Differential Ring Gear 20 - Front Differential Drive Pinion Gear Lube Tube 21 - 1-2-3-4 Clutch Assembly 22 - Low and Reverse Clutch Assembly (OWC) 23 - Low and Reverse Clutch 24 - 2-6 Clutch Assembly 25 - 3-5-Reverse Clutch Assembly 26 - 4-5-6 Clutch Assembly 27 - Input Speed Sensor 28 - Case Cover Assembly 29 - Control Valve Body Cover 30 Input Shaft Speed Sensor Reluctor Wheel 31 - Control Valve Lower Body Assembly 32 - Control Valve Upper Body Assembly 33 - Control Valve Channel Plate Assembly 34 - Control Solenoid Valve Assembly (w/Body and TCM) 35 - Manual Valve Disassembled Views Disassembled Views Case and Associated Parts Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > 6L50/6L80/6L90 Automatic Transmission > Page 6793 1 - Control Valve Body Cover Assembly 2 - Transmission Fluid Level Indicator Assembly 3 - Fluid Level Indicator Tube - Model Dependent 4 - Fluid Level Indicator Tube Seal - Model Dependent 5 Control Valve Body Cover Assembly Gasket 6 - Control Valve Body Cover Stud 7 - Control Valve Body Cover Bolt 8 - Control Valve Body Bolt 9 - Control Valve Body Bolt 10 - Control Valve Body Cover Wiring Connector Hole Seal 11 - Control Solenoid Valve Spring 12 - Control Valve Body Bolt 13 - Control Valve Body Bolt 14 - Control Valve Body Bolt 15 - Control Solenoid (w/Body and TCM) Valve Assembly 16 - Control Solenoid (w/Body and TCM) Filter Plate Assembly 17 - Manual Shaft Detent Assembly 18 - Control Valve Body Assembly 19 - A/Trans Output Speed Sensor Assembly 20 - A/Trans Output Speed Sensor Bolt 21 - A/Trans Case Assembly 22 - Torque Converter Housing Outer Seal 23 - Front Differential Drive Pinion (w/Transfer Gear) Gear Assembly 24 Front Differential Drive Pinion Gear Lube Tube Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > 6L50/6L80/6L90 Automatic Transmission > Page 6794 25 - Torque Converter and Support and A/Trans Fluid Pump Housing Assembly 26 - Torque Converter and Differential Housing Bolt 27 - Torque Converter Assembly 28 - Dust Cover Push Pin - Model Dependent 29 - Dust Cover Bolt - Model Dependent 30 - Dust Cover - Model Dependent 31 - Front Differential Carrier Assembly 32 - Input Shaft Thrust Bearing Assembly 33 - A/Trans Case Cover Gasket 34 - A/Trans Case Cover Assembly 35 - A/Trans Case Cover Assembly Bolt A/Trans Case Cover, 2-6 and Low Reverse Pistons 400 - A/Trans Input Speed Sensor Assembly 401 - A/Trans Input Speed Sensor Bolt 402 - ISS O-Ring Seal 403 - A/Trans Case Cover Assembly 404 - 3-5-Reverse and 4-5-6 Clutch Fluid Seal Ring 405 - 2-6 Clutch Piston 406 - 2-6 Clutch Spring Assembly 407 - 2-6 Clutch Spring Retainer Ring 408 - Low and Reverse Clutch Piston Assembly 409 - Low and Reverse Clutch Spring 410 Low and Reverse Clutch Spring Retainer Ring Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission Output Speed Sensor Replacement Output Speed Sensor Replacement Input Speed Sensor Replacement Input Speed Sensor Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the transmission control valve body cover. Refer to Control Valve Body Cover Replacement (See: Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Valve Body/Service and Repair/6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission/Control Valve Body Cover Replacement). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 6797 2. Disconnect the input speed sensor electrical connector (1). 3. Remove the input speed sensor bolt (2) M6 x 23. 4. Remove the input speed sensor (3). 5. Remove the 3 input speed sensor seals (1). Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 6798 1. Install the 3 input speed sensor seals (1). 2. Install the input speed sensor (3). Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener Caution). 3. Install the input speed sensor bolt (2) M6 x 23 and tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb in). 4. Connect the input speed sensor electrical connector (1). 5. Install the transmission control valve body cover. Refer to Control Valve Body Cover Replacement (See: Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Valve Body/Service and Repair/6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission/Control Valve Body Cover Replacement). 6. Perform the transmission adaptive values learn procedure. Refer to Transmission Adaptive Values Learn (See: Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/6T30/6T40/6T45 Automatic Transmission). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 6799 Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair 6T70/6T75 - Automatic Transmission Output Speed Sensor Replacement Output Speed Sensor Replacement Input Speed Sensor Replacement Input Speed Sensor Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 6800 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Fill Plug, Transfer Case > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Drivetrain - Transfer Case Fill Plug Removal Information Fill Plug: Technical Service Bulletins Drivetrain - Transfer Case Fill Plug Removal Information INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 09-04-21-007 Date: November 05, 2009 Subject: Information on Removal of Transfer Case (PTU) Fill Plug Models: 2010 Chevrolet Equinox 2010 GMC Terrain Equipped with AWD (RPO MH4) and Built Prior to September 21, 2009 Please Refer to GMVIS Some technicians may find that when removing the transfer case fill plug, it cannot be removed or is difficult to remove because of interference with the external rib on the transmission case. If you encounter a vehicle where the transfer case fill plug contacts the transmission case, remove material from the transmission case rib starting at the fill plug head, not more than 3 mm (0.118 in) by 25 mm (1 in), using a file or suitable tool to create clearance. Caution - Do not attempt to remove the remaining portion of rib adjacent to the plug head when the plug is removed because marring of the plug sealing surface will cause a leak. - Ensure all debris from grinding/filing is removed prior to removing and reinstalling the fill plug. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Fluid - Transfer Case > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications Fluid - Transfer Case: Capacity Specifications Getrag 760 ........................................................................................................................................... ............................................... 1.0 liters (1.06 quarts) NOTE: All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the approximate level. Recheck fluid level after filling. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Fluid - Transfer Case > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 6810 Fluid - Transfer Case: Fluid Type Specifications TRANSFER CASE (POWER TRANSFER UNIT) SAE 75W-90 Synthetic Axle Lubricant (GM Part No. U.S. 89021677, in Canada 89021678) meeting GM Specification 9986115. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Fluid - Transfer Case > Component Information > Specifications > Page 6811 Fluid - Transfer Case: Service and Repair Transfer Case Fluid Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle (See: Maintenance/Vehicle Lifting/Service and Repair). 2. Remove the drain plug (2). 3. Remove the fill plug (1). Installation Procedure 1. Clean the drain plug. Caution: Refer to Component Fastener Tightening Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Component Fastener Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Fluid - Transfer Case > Component Information > Specifications > Page 6812 Tightening Caution). 2. Install the drain plug (2) and tighten to 39 Nm (29 lb ft). 3. Fill the transfer case with synthetic gear lubricant GM P/N 89021677 (Canadian P/N 89021678) to the bottom of the fill plug, or 0.80 L (0.85 qt). 4. Install the fill plug (1) and tighten to 39 Nm (29 lb ft). 5. Lower the vehicle. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Seals and Gaskets, Transfer Case > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Seals and Gaskets: > 08-04-21-002A > Jun > 09 > Drivetrain - Fluid Leak From Transfer Case/Trans. Area Seals and Gaskets: Customer Interest Drivetrain - Fluid Leak From Transfer Case/Trans. Area TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 08-04-21-002A Date: June 22, 2009 Subject: Automatic Transmission Fluid Leak at Transfer Case Weep Hole (Replace Front Wheel Drive Intermediate (Inner) Shaft Seal) Models: 2008-2010 Buick Enclave 2008-2009 Chevrolet Equinox Sport 2009-2010 Chevrolet Traverse 2010 Chevrolet Equinox 2007-2010 GMC Acadia 2010 GMC Terrain 2008-2009 Pontiac Torrent GXP 2007-2009 Suzuki XL-7 2007-2010 Saturn OUTLOOK 2008-2009 Saturn VUE with 6T45/70/75 AWD/PTU Automatic Transmission (RPO MHC/MH4/MH6) for GM or AF33-5 AWD/PTU Automatic Transmission (RPO M45) for 2007-2008 Suzuki and Getrag 760/790 Transfer Case Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the information and add model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 08-04-21-002 (07 - Transmission/Transaxle). Condition Some customers may comment on a red fluid leak from the transmission or transfer case area. Technicians may find that the fluid is leaking from the transfer case/PTU weep hole farthest from the transmission, near the passenger side. Cause The front wheel drive intermediate (inner) shaft seal may be leaking. Due to low ambient temperatures with various runout conditions between the intermediate drive shaft and the input shaft, the seal material may not properly seal automatic transmission fluid (ATF). Correction Replace the front wheel drive intermediate (inner) shaft seal with a new designed seal. Important Selecting the correct replacement seal is critical due to a 2008 mid-model design update. Use the information below to determine which seal to use. For additional information, refer to New Product Information in the Getrag 760/790 Transfer Case category in SI. For Acadia, Enclave, OUTLOOK and Traverse - For vehicles built prior to VIN Breakpoint 8J217964, use first design seal, P/N 19180998 (Green). - For vehicles built on or after VIN Breakpoint 8J217964, use second design seal, P/N 19206322 (Green). For Equinox, Terrain, Torrent and VUE - For vehicles built prior to VIN Breakpoint 86075818, use first design seal, P/N 19180998 (Green). - For vehicles built on or after VIN Breakpoint 86075818, use second design seal, P/N 19206322 (Green). For Suzuki XL-7 - For vehicles built prior to VIN Breakpoint 86115983, use first design seal, P/N 19180998 (Green). - For vehicles built on or after VIN Breakpoint 86115983, use second design seal, P/N 19206322 (Green). Notice Second design seals are not compatible with first design transfer cases. Installing a second design seal in a first design transfer case will create a Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Seals and Gaskets, Transfer Case > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Seals and Gaskets: > 08-04-21-002A > Jun > 09 > Drivetrain - Fluid Leak From Transfer Case/Trans. Area > Page 6821 transmission fluid leak due to interference with the input shaft. Seal Installation Installing the replacement seal to the proper depth is critical. Use the DT-48078 - Inner Drive Shaft Seal installer with a J 8092 - Driver Handle to install the seal 2.8 mm (0.11 in) (a) from the end of the input shaft. Refer to the Front Drive Axle Inner Shaft Seal Replacement procedure in SI. Parts Information Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table above. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Seals and Gaskets, Transfer Case > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seals and Gaskets: > 08-04-21-002A > Jun > 09 > Drivetrain - Fluid Leak From Transfer Case/Trans. Area Seals and Gaskets: All Technical Service Bulletins Drivetrain - Fluid Leak From Transfer Case/Trans. Area TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 08-04-21-002A Date: June 22, 2009 Subject: Automatic Transmission Fluid Leak at Transfer Case Weep Hole (Replace Front Wheel Drive Intermediate (Inner) Shaft Seal) Models: 2008-2010 Buick Enclave 2008-2009 Chevrolet Equinox Sport 2009-2010 Chevrolet Traverse 2010 Chevrolet Equinox 2007-2010 GMC Acadia 2010 GMC Terrain 2008-2009 Pontiac Torrent GXP 2007-2009 Suzuki XL-7 2007-2010 Saturn OUTLOOK 2008-2009 Saturn VUE with 6T45/70/75 AWD/PTU Automatic Transmission (RPO MHC/MH4/MH6) for GM or AF33-5 AWD/PTU Automatic Transmission (RPO M45) for 2007-2008 Suzuki and Getrag 760/790 Transfer Case Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the information and add model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 08-04-21-002 (07 - Transmission/Transaxle). Condition Some customers may comment on a red fluid leak from the transmission or transfer case area. Technicians may find that the fluid is leaking from the transfer case/PTU weep hole farthest from the transmission, near the passenger side. Cause The front wheel drive intermediate (inner) shaft seal may be leaking. Due to low ambient temperatures with various runout conditions between the intermediate drive shaft and the input shaft, the seal material may not properly seal automatic transmission fluid (ATF). Correction Replace the front wheel drive intermediate (inner) shaft seal with a new designed seal. Important Selecting the correct replacement seal is critical due to a 2008 mid-model design update. Use the information below to determine which seal to use. For additional information, refer to New Product Information in the Getrag 760/790 Transfer Case category in SI. For Acadia, Enclave, OUTLOOK and Traverse - For vehicles built prior to VIN Breakpoint 8J217964, use first design seal, P/N 19180998 (Green). - For vehicles built on or after VIN Breakpoint 8J217964, use second design seal, P/N 19206322 (Green). For Equinox, Terrain, Torrent and VUE - For vehicles built prior to VIN Breakpoint 86075818, use first design seal, P/N 19180998 (Green). - For vehicles built on or after VIN Breakpoint 86075818, use second design seal, P/N 19206322 (Green). For Suzuki XL-7 - For vehicles built prior to VIN Breakpoint 86115983, use first design seal, P/N 19180998 (Green). - For vehicles built on or after VIN Breakpoint 86115983, use second design seal, P/N 19206322 (Green). Notice Second design seals are not compatible with first design transfer cases. Installing a second design seal in a first design transfer case will create a Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Seals and Gaskets, Transfer Case > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seals and Gaskets: > 08-04-21-002A > Jun > 09 > Drivetrain - Fluid Leak From Transfer Case/Trans. Area > Page 6827 transmission fluid leak due to interference with the input shaft. Seal Installation Installing the replacement seal to the proper depth is critical. Use the DT-48078 - Inner Drive Shaft Seal installer with a J 8092 - Driver Handle to install the seal 2.8 mm (0.11 in) (a) from the end of the input shaft. Refer to the Front Drive Axle Inner Shaft Seal Replacement procedure in SI. Parts Information Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table above. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Seals and Gaskets, Transfer Case > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seals and Gaskets: > Page 6828 Seals and Gaskets: By Symptom Technical Service Bulletin # 08-04-21-002A Date: 090622 Drivetrain - Fluid Leak From Transfer Case/Trans. Area TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 08-04-21-002A Date: June 22, 2009 Subject: Automatic Transmission Fluid Leak at Transfer Case Weep Hole (Replace Front Wheel Drive Intermediate (Inner) Shaft Seal) Models: 2008-2010 Buick Enclave 2008-2009 Chevrolet Equinox Sport 2009-2010 Chevrolet Traverse 2010 Chevrolet Equinox 2007-2010 GMC Acadia 2010 GMC Terrain 2008-2009 Pontiac Torrent GXP 2007-2009 Suzuki XL-7 2007-2010 Saturn OUTLOOK 2008-2009 Saturn VUE with 6T45/70/75 AWD/PTU Automatic Transmission (RPO MHC/MH4/MH6) for GM or AF33-5 AWD/PTU Automatic Transmission (RPO M45) for 2007-2008 Suzuki and Getrag 760/790 Transfer Case Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the information and add model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 08-04-21-002 (07 - Transmission/Transaxle). Condition Some customers may comment on a red fluid leak from the transmission or transfer case area. Technicians may find that the fluid is leaking from the transfer case/PTU weep hole farthest from the transmission, near the passenger side. Cause The front wheel drive intermediate (inner) shaft seal may be leaking. Due to low ambient temperatures with various runout conditions between the intermediate drive shaft and the input shaft, the seal material may not properly seal automatic transmission fluid (ATF). Correction Replace the front wheel drive intermediate (inner) shaft seal with a new designed seal. Important Selecting the correct replacement seal is critical due to a 2008 mid-model design update. Use the information below to determine which seal to use. For additional information, refer to New Product Information in the Getrag 760/790 Transfer Case category in SI. For Acadia, Enclave, OUTLOOK and Traverse - For vehicles built prior to VIN Breakpoint 8J217964, use first design seal, P/N 19180998 (Green). - For vehicles built on or after VIN Breakpoint 8J217964, use second design seal, P/N 19206322 (Green). For Equinox, Terrain, Torrent and VUE - For vehicles built prior to VIN Breakpoint 86075818, use first design seal, P/N 19180998 (Green). - For vehicles built on or after VIN Breakpoint 86075818, use second design seal, P/N 19206322 (Green). For Suzuki XL-7 - For vehicles built prior to VIN Breakpoint 86115983, use first design seal, P/N 19180998 (Green). - For vehicles built on or after VIN Breakpoint 86115983, use second design seal, P/N 19206322 (Green). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Seals and Gaskets, Transfer Case > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seals and Gaskets: > Page 6829 Notice Second design seals are not compatible with first design transfer cases. Installing a second design seal in a first design transfer case will create a transmission fluid leak due to interference with the input shaft. Seal Installation Installing the replacement seal to the proper depth is critical. Use the DT-48078 - Inner Drive Shaft Seal installer with a J 8092 - Driver Handle to install the seal 2.8 mm (0.11 in) (a) from the end of the input shaft. Refer to the Front Drive Axle Inner Shaft Seal Replacement procedure in SI. Parts Information Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table above. Disclaimer Technical Service Bulletin # 08-04-21-002A Date: 090622 Drivetrain - Fluid Leak From Transfer Case/Trans. Area TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 08-04-21-002A Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Seals and Gaskets, Transfer Case > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seals and Gaskets: > Page 6830 Date: June 22, 2009 Subject: Automatic Transmission Fluid Leak at Transfer Case Weep Hole (Replace Front Wheel Drive Intermediate (Inner) Shaft Seal) Models: 2008-2010 Buick Enclave 2008-2009 Chevrolet Equinox Sport 2009-2010 Chevrolet Traverse 2010 Chevrolet Equinox 2007-2010 GMC Acadia 2010 GMC Terrain 2008-2009 Pontiac Torrent GXP 2007-2009 Suzuki XL-7 2007-2010 Saturn OUTLOOK 2008-2009 Saturn VUE with 6T45/70/75 AWD/PTU Automatic Transmission (RPO MHC/MH4/MH6) for GM or AF33-5 AWD/PTU Automatic Transmission (RPO M45) for 2007-2008 Suzuki and Getrag 760/790 Transfer Case Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the information and add model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 08-04-21-002 (07 - Transmission/Transaxle). Condition Some customers may comment on a red fluid leak from the transmission or transfer case area. Technicians may find that the fluid is leaking from the transfer case/PTU weep hole farthest from the transmission, near the passenger side. Cause The front wheel drive intermediate (inner) shaft seal may be leaking. Due to low ambient temperatures with various runout conditions between the intermediate drive shaft and the input shaft, the seal material may not properly seal automatic transmission fluid (ATF). Correction Replace the front wheel drive intermediate (inner) shaft seal with a new designed seal. Important Selecting the correct replacement seal is critical due to a 2008 mid-model design update. Use the information below to determine which seal to use. For additional information, refer to New Product Information in the Getrag 760/790 Transfer Case category in SI. For Acadia, Enclave, OUTLOOK and Traverse - For vehicles built prior to VIN Breakpoint 8J217964, use first design seal, P/N 19180998 (Green). - For vehicles built on or after VIN Breakpoint 8J217964, use second design seal, P/N 19206322 (Green). For Equinox, Terrain, Torrent and VUE - For vehicles built prior to VIN Breakpoint 86075818, use first design seal, P/N 19180998 (Green). - For vehicles built on or after VIN Breakpoint 86075818, use second design seal, P/N 19206322 (Green). For Suzuki XL-7 - For vehicles built prior to VIN Breakpoint 86115983, use first design seal, P/N 19180998 (Green). - For vehicles built on or after VIN Breakpoint 86115983, use second design seal, P/N 19206322 (Green). Notice Second design seals are not compatible with first design transfer cases. Installing a second design seal in a first design transfer case will create a transmission fluid leak due to interference with the input shaft. Seal Installation Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Seals and Gaskets, Transfer Case > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seals and Gaskets: > Page 6831 Installing the replacement seal to the proper depth is critical. Use the DT-48078 - Inner Drive Shaft Seal installer with a J 8092 - Driver Handle to install the seal 2.8 mm (0.11 in) (a) from the end of the input shaft. Refer to the Front Drive Axle Inner Shaft Seal Replacement procedure in SI. Parts Information Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table above. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Transfer Case Mount > Component Information > Service and Repair Transfer Case Mount: Service and Repair Transfer Case Brace Replacement (LF1 Engine) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Specifications > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission Shift Solenoid: Specifications 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission Shift Solenoid Valve State and Gear Ratio Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Specifications > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 6842 Shift Solenoid: Specifications 6T70/6T75 - Automatic Transmission Shift Solenoid Valve State and Gear Ratio Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Page 6843 Shift Solenoid: Locations Powertrain Component Views Automatic Transmission Electronic Components 1 - Q8 Control Solenoid Valve Assembly 2 - B15 Transmission Internal Mode Switch 3 - B14A Transmission Output Shaft Speed Sensor 4 - B14C Transmission Input Shaft Speed Sensor Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Shift Solenoid: Diagram Information and Instructions Electrical Schematic Symbols Electrical Schematic Symbols Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6846 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6847 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6848 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6849 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6850 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6851 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6852 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6853 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6854 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6855 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6856 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6857 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6858 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6859 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6860 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6861 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6862 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6863 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6864 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6865 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6866 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6867 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6868 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6869 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6870 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6871 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6872 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6873 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6874 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6875 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6876 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6877 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6878 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6879 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6880 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6881 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6882 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6883 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6884 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6885 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6886 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6887 General Electrical Diagnosis General Electrical Diagnosis Basic Knowledge Required Without a basic knowledge of electricity, it will be difficult to use the diagnostic procedures contained in the service manual. You should understand the basic theory of electricity, and know the meaning of voltage (V), current (A), and resistance (Ohms ). You should also be able to read and understand a wiring diagram, as well as understand what happens in a circuit with an open or a shorted wire. Vehicle Zoning Strategy Vehicle Zoning Strategy All grounds, in-line connectors, and splices have identifying numbers that correspond to where they are located in the vehicle. The following table explains the numbering system. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6888 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6889 Shift Solenoid: Diagnostic Aids Arrows and Symbols Arrows and Symbols This service manual uses various symbols in order to describe different service operations. 1 - Front of Vehicle 2 - View Detail 2 - View Detail 3 - Ambient Air Mixed with Another Gas or Indicate Temperature Change 4 - Motion or Direction 5 - View Angle 6 - Dimension (1:2) 7 Ambient/Clean Air Flow or Cool Air Flow 8 - Lubrication Point - Oil or Fluid 9 - Task Related 10 Sectioning (1:3) 11 - Gas Other Than Ambient Air or Hot Air Flow 12 - Lubrication Point - Grease or Jelly 13 - Multidirectional Arrow Decimal and Metric Equivalents Decimal and Metric Equivalents Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6890 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6891 Checking Aftermarket Accessories Checking Aftermarket Accessories Warning: Refer to SIR Warning (See: Restraint Systems/Service Precautions/SIR Warning). Caution: The OBD II symbol is used on the circuit diagrams in order to alert the technician that the circuit is essential for proper OBD II emission control circuit operation. Any circuit which fails and causes the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) to turn ON, or causes emissions-related component damage, is identified as an OBD II circuit. Do not connect aftermarket accessories into the following circuits: * SIR circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the SIR symbol. * OBD II circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the OBD II symbol. Always check for aftermarket accessories (non-OEM) as the first step in diagnosing electrical problems. If the vehicle is so equipped, disconnect the system to verify that these add-on accessories are not the cause of the problems. Possible causes of vehicle problems related to aftermarket accessories include: * Power feeds connected to points other than the battery * Antenna location * Transceiver wiring located too close to vehicle electronic modules or wiring * Poor shielding or poor connectors on antenna feed line * Check for recent service bulletins detailing installation guidelines for aftermarket accessories. Circuit Testing Circuit Testing The Circuit Testing section contains the following diagnostic testing information. Using this information along with the diagnostic procedures will identify the cause of the electrical malfunction. * Using Connector Test Adapters (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Using Connector Test Adapters) * Probing Electrical Connectors (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Probing Electrical Connectors) * Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6892 Procedures/Circuit Testing/Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter) * Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp) * Using Fused Jumper Wires (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Using Fused Jumper Wires) * Measuring Voltage (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Measuring Voltage) * Measuring Voltage Drop (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Measuring Voltage Drop) * Measuring Frequency (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Measuring Frequency) * Testing Ground and Low Reference Circuits (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Testing Ground and Low Reference Circuits) * Testing for Continuity (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Continuity) * Testing for Short to Ground (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Short to Ground) * Testing for a Short to Voltage (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for a Short to Voltage) * Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections) * Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions) * Testing for Electrical Intermittents (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Electrical Intermittents) * Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure) * Circuit Protection - Fuses (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Circuit Protection - Fuses) * Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers) * Circuit Protection - Fusible Links (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Circuit Protection - Fusible Links) Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp Special Tools EL-35616-200 - Test Light - Probe Kit For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test Probe Caution). A test lamp can simply and quickly test a low impedance circuit for voltage. A Digital Multimeter (DMM) should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present if the impedance is low enough, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. In other words, if there is not enough current, the test lamp will not illuminate even though voltage is present. The EL-35616-200 - kit is Micro-Pack compatible and comprised of a 12-volt light bulb with an attached pair of leads. To properly operate this tool use the following procedures. When testing for voltage: 1. Attach one lead to ground. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is voltage at the point being tested. When testing for ground: 1. Attach one lead to battery positive voltage. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where ground should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is ground at the point being tested. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6893 Testing for a Short to Voltage Testing for a Short to Voltage Special Tools EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM) For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test Probe Caution). The following procedure tests for a short to voltage in a circuit. 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Set the rotary dial of the Digital Multimeter (DMM) to the V (DC) position. 4. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. Turn ON the ignition and operate all accessories. 7. If the voltage measured is greater than 1 V, there is a short to voltage in the circuit. Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions Special Tools J-25070 - Heat Gun For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Many intermittent open or shorted circuits are affected by harness/connector movement that is caused by vibration, engine torque, bumps/rough pavement, etc. In order to duplicate the customer's concern, it may be necessary to manipulate the wiring harness if the malfunction appears to be vibration related. Manipulation of a circuit can consist of a wide variety of actions, including: * Wiggling the harness * Disconnecting a connector and reconnecting * Stressing the mechanical connection of a connector * Pulling on the harness or wire in order to identify a separation/break inside the insulation * Relocating a harness or wires All these actions should be performed with some goal in mind. For instance, with a scan tool connected, wiggling the wires may uncover a faulty input to the control module. The snapshot option would be appropriate here. Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure). Another option is, with the component commanded ON and OFF by the scan tool, move related connectors and wiring and observe the component operation. With the engine running, move related connectors and wiring while monitoring engine operation. If harness or connector movement affects the data displayed, component/system operation, or engine operation, inspect and repair the harness/connections as necessary. You may need to load the vehicle in order to duplicate the concern. This may require the use of weights, floor jacks, jackstands, frame machines, etc. In these cases you are attempting to duplicate the concern by manipulating the suspension or frame. This method is useful in finding harnesses that are too short and their connectors pull apart enough to cause a poor connection. A DMM set to Peak Min/Max mode and connected to the suspect circuit while testing can yield desirable results. Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Electrical Intermittents). Certainly, using the senses of sight, smell, and hearing while manipulating the circuit can provide good results as well. There may be instances where circuit manipulation alone will not meet the required criteria for the fault condition to appear. In such cases it may be necessary to expose the suspect circuit to other conditions while manipulating the harness. Such conditions would include high moisture conditions, along with exceptionally high or low temperatures. The following discusses how to expose the circuit to these kinds of conditions. Salt Water Spray Some compounds possess the ability to conduct electricity when dissolved in water such as ordinary salt. By mixing table salt with water in sufficient Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6894 quantities, you can enhance the conductive properties of water so that any circuit which may be sensitive to moisture will more readily fail when liberally sprayed with this mixture. Mixing 0.35L (12 oz) of water with approximately 1 tablespoon of salt will yield a salt solution of 5 percent. Fill a normal spray bottle with this mixture. This mixture is sufficient to enhance the water's own conductivity. This may cause the circuit to fail more easily when sprayed. Once the mixture is completed, spray the suspect area liberally with the solution. Then, while monitoring either a scan tool or DMM, manipulate the harness as discussed previously. High Temperature Conditions If the complaint tends to be heat related, you can simulate the condition using the J-25070 - heat gun. Using the heat gun, you can heat up the suspected area or component. Manipulate the harnesses under high temperature conditions while monitoring the scan tool or DMM to locate the fault condition. The high temperature condition may be achieved simply by test driving the vehicle at normal operating temperature. If a heat gun is unavailable, consider this option to enhance your diagnosis. This option does not allow for the same control, however. Low Temperature Conditions Depending on the nature of the fault condition, placing a fan in front of the vehicle while the vehicle is in the shade can have the desired effect. If this is unsuccessful, use local cooling treatments such as ice or a venturi type nozzle (one that provides hot or cold air). This type of tool is capable of producing air stream temperatures down to -18°C (0°F) from one end and +71°C (160°F) from the other. This is ideally suited for localized cooling needs. Once the vehicle, component, or harness has been sufficiently cooled, manipulate the harness or components in an effort to duplicate the concern. Duplicating Failure Conditions * If none of the previous tests are successful, attempt to duplicate and/or capture the failure conditions. * Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, where applicable, contains the conditions that were present when the DTC set. 1. Review and record Freeze Frame/Failure Records data. 2. Clear the DTCs using the scan tool. 3. Turn the key to OFF and wait 15 seconds. 4. Operate the vehicle under the same conditions that were noted in Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, as closely as possible. The vehicle must also be operating within the Conditions for Running the DTC. Refer to Conditions for Running the DTC in the supporting text if a DTC is being diagnosed. 5. Monitor DTC Status for the DTC being tested. The scan tool will indicate Ran, when the enabling conditions have been satisfied long enough for the DTC to run. The scan tool will also indicate whether the DTC passed or failed. * An alternate method is to drive the vehicle with the DMM connected to a suspected circuit. An abnormal reading on the DMM when the concern occurs, may help you locate the concern. Measuring Frequency Measuring Frequency Special Tools EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM) For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test Probe Caution). The following procedure determines the frequency of a signal. Note: Connecting the Digital Multimeter (DMM) to the circuit before pressing the Hz button will allow the DMM to autorange to an appropriate range. 1. Apply power to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (AC) position. 3. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6895 5. Press the Hz button on the DMM. 6. The DMM will display the frequency measured. Measuring Voltage Measuring Voltage Special Tools EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM) For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test Probe Caution). The following procedure measures the voltage at a selected point in a circuit. 1. Disconnect the electrical harness connector for the circuit being tested, if necessary. 2. Enable the circuit and/or system being tested. Use the following methods: * Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. * Turn ON the engine. * Turn ON the circuit and/or system with a scan tool in Output Controls. * Turn ON the switch for the circuit and/or system being tested. 3. Select the V (AC) or V (DC) position on the Digital Multimeter (DMM). 4. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the point of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. The DMM displays the voltage measured at that point. Measuring Voltage Drop Measuring Voltage Drop Special Tools EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM) For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test Probe Caution). The following procedure determines the difference in voltage potential between 2 points. 1. Set the rotary dial of the Digital Multimeter (DMM) to the V (DC) position. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6896 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to one point of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to the other point of the circuit. 4. Operate the circuit. 5. The DMM displays the difference in voltage between the 2 points. Probing Electrical Connectors Probing Electrical Connectors Note: Always be sure to reinstall the connector position assurance (CPA) and terminal position assurance (TPA) when reconnecting connectors or replacing terminals. Front probe Disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the mating side (front) of the connector. Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test Probe Caution). Note: When probing female 0.64 terminals, it is important to use the correct adapter. There have been some revisions to the test adapter for 0.64 terminals. The proper adapter for 0.64 terminals is the EL-35616-64B which has a gold terminal and a black wire between the base and tip. Failure to use the proper test adapter may result in damage to the terminal being tested and improper diagnosis. Note: The proper adapter for probing the terminals for fuses, relays, or diodes in an electrical center is EL-35616-35. Using any other tool or adapter may damage the terminal being tested. Refer to the following table as a guide in selecting the correct test adapter for front probing connectors: Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6897 Backprobe Note: * Backprobe connector terminals only when specifically required in diagnostic procedures. * Do not backprobe a sealed (Weather Pack(R)) connector, less than a 280 series Metri-Pack connector, a Micro-Pack connector, or a flat wire (dock and lock) connector. * Backprobing can be a source of damage to connector terminals. Use care in order to avoid deforming the terminal, either by forcing the test probe too far into the cavity or by using too large of a test probe. * After backprobing any connector, inspect for terminal damage. If terminal damage is suspected, test for proper terminal contact. Do not disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the harness side (back) of the connector. Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure Using Snapshots in Global Diagnostic System (GDS) Overview Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6898 A snapshot is a recording of what a control module on the vehicle was receiving for information while the snapshot is being made. A snapshot may be used to analyze the data during the time a vehicle condition is current. This allows you to concentrate on making the condition occur, rather than trying to view all the data in anticipation of the fault. To record a snapshot in GDS, select, Record Snapshot, from the options at the top right portion of any of the various pages that allow snapshots to be taken (e.g. Data Display, Control Functions, etc.). When you are finished recording, select, Stop Snapshot recording. The snapshot will now be available for replay. Snapshot Replay The Snapshot Replay function allows reviews of previously recorded vehicle snapshot data. This information can be used in analysis of vehicle problems and detection of trigger error conditions. The graph function can be used to compare parameters to see if a component is functioning properly. Recorded snapshots can be selected for viewing by the following three methods: * Selecting a snapshot file from the Vehicle Home Page and clicking on the Review selection. * Double clicking on the selected snapshot from the Vehicle Home Page. * Entering the Tools selection from the Menu selection and selecting Snapshot replay. Next, open the Snapshot Manager. Double click on the snapshot file you wish to view or click on the Load Snapshot selection and select a snapshot file. Regardless of selection method, a File Loaded pop-up window will be displayed from the Snapshot Replay screen. Select OK from the pop-up window. Snapshot Play Functions There are several snapshot play functions that are used to replay recorded snapshots * The Play function is used to play the snapshot forward by clicking on this selection. A marker will move across the screen when this selection is used. All selections in this area turn grey when they are active. * The Pause function is used to pause play of the snapshot. When this selection is clicked a second time the snapshot will start playing where it left off. * The Stop function is used to stop playing the snapshot. The snapshot will start from the beginning, if Play is selected after using the Stop function. Time Control Time control is used to control the snapshot replay. This function allows selection of a specific time frame, display of different views, and control of display speed. The following functions can be selected directly under Time Control. * The Bookmark selection allows you to add a specific comment in the current display and return to this point in the future. When this option is selected, a pop-up window is displayed. Enter a bookmark name and select OK. * The Note Pad can be selected to add comments to the snapshot replay file at the current point of time. When this option is selected, a pop-up window is displayed. Enter a comment for the snapshot file and select OK. * The Load Snapshot (blue folder) opens a snapshot file and makes it ready for further analysis. This function is also available by clicking on an available snapshot file from the Snapshot Manager. * The Down Arrow displays all Time Control options when selected. Individual options can also be selected by clicking on the item you want. * The Snapshot Display Speed can be controlled by selecting this option. Slow speeds of 1/8X, 1/4X, and 1/2X can be selected. The real time speed can also be selected at 1. Faster speeds of 2X, 4X, and 8X can also be obtained by using this selection. View Selections Each View Selection provides a different way of displaying vehicle data for analysis. The following functions can be selected under Available Views: Note: The parameter name will be shown in the original language used for capture if no translation is available for the name. * Parameter List View - Displays incoming information from the snapshot file. The current value of the parameters is displayed on the screen. * Log View - Contains all the information from the snapshot file. All parameter values are listed in the order they were recorded. Specific parameters can be added or removed from a watchlist by clicking on the appropriate item. * State View - Shows the values of all parameters in a specific time frame. These values can be used for comparison with the trigger view. * Trigger View - Displays all system and user defined triggers. This function can be used when there is a combination of factors involved in a diagnostic problem. When a Trigger condition is met a caution triangle will be displayed on the screen. Triggers: * Load Triggers - Allows you to load a file containing trigger definitions. * Save Triggers - Allows you to save the trigger to your computer's hard drive. * Remove Trigger - Allows you to remove the current trigger. It will no longer be present. * Edit Trigger - Displays a pop-up window where you can modify the limits and parameters contained within a trigger. * Adds Trigger - Displays a pop-up window to configure a trigger. * DTC View - After the Play function is selected and this option is selected this function opens the list of recorded DTCs. * Line Graph View - Displays data that can be visualized against the time-axis. From this view, specific parameters can be selected for graphing by Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6899 checking the box under Selected. At the bottom of the graph there are four functions Zoom In (increase size), Zoom Out (decrease size), Bookmarks, and Pause Scrolling. Each of these functions can be accessed by clicking on them. Testing for Continuity Testing for Continuity Special Tools EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM) For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test Probe Caution). The following procedures verify good continuity in a circuit. With a Digital Multimeter (DMM) 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the Ohms position. 2. Disconnect the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 3. Disconnect the load. 4. Press the MIN MAX button on the DMM. 5. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 6. Connect the other lead of the DMM to the other end of the circuit. 7. If the DMM displays low or no resistance, the circuit has good continuity. With a Test Lamp Note: Only use the test lamp procedure on low impedance power and ground circuits. 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect one lead of the test lamp to one end of the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 5. Connect the other end of the circuit to ground. 6. If the test lamp illuminates (full intensity), then the circuit has good continuity. Testing for Electrical Intermittents Testing for Electrical Intermittents Special Tools EL-39200 Digital Multimeter For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Perform the following procedures while wiggling the harness from side to side. Continue this at convenient points (about 6 inches apart) while watching the test equipment. * Testing for Short to Ground (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Short to Ground) * Testing for Continuity (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Continuity) * Testing for a Short to Voltage (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for a Short to Voltage) If the fault is not identified, perform the procedure below using the MIN MAX feature on the EL-39200 DMM. This feature allows you to manipulate the circuit without having to watch the EL-39200. The EL-39200 will generate an audible tone when a change is detected. Note: The EL-39200 must be used in order to perform the following procedure since the EL-39200 can monitor current, resistance or voltage while recording the minimum (MIN), and maximum (MAX) values measured. 1. Connect the EL-39200 to both sides of a suspected connector (still connected), or from one end of a suspected circuit to the other. Refer to Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6900 Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter) for information on connecting the EL-39200 to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the EL-39200 to the V (AC) or V (DC) position. 3. Press the range button of the EL-39200 in order to select the desired voltage range. 4. Press the MIN MAX button of the EL-39200. The EL-39200 displays 100 ms RECORD and emits an audible tone (beep). Note: The 100 ms RECORD mode is the length of time an input must stay at a new value in order to record the full change. 5. Simulate the condition that is potentially causing the intermittent connection, either by wiggling the connections or the wiring, test driving, or performing other operations. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions). 6. Listen for the audible Min Max Alert which indicates that a new minimum or maximum value has been recorded. 7. Press the MIN MAX button once in order to display the MAX value and note the value. 8. Press the MIN MAX button again in order to display the MIN value and note the value. 9. Determine the difference between the MIN and MAX values. * If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is 1 V or greater an intermittent open or high resistance condition exists. Repair the condition as necessary. * If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is less than 1 V, an intermittent open or high resistance condition does not exist. Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections Special Tools EL-35616 Terminal Test Probe Kit For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). When the condition is not currently present, but is indicated in DTC history, the cause may be intermittent. An intermittent may also be the cause when there is a customer complaint, but the symptom cannot be duplicated. Refer to the Symptom Table of the system that is suspect of causing the condition before trying to locate an intermittent condition. Most intermittent conditions are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. Inspect for the following items: * Wiring broken inside the insulation * Poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector * Poor terminal to wire connection-Some conditions which fall under this description are poor crimps, poor solder joints, crimping over the wire insulation rather than the wire itself, and corrosion in the wire to terminal contact area, etc. * Pierced or damaged insulation can allow moisture to enter the wiring causing corrosion. The conductor can corrode inside the insulation, with little visible evidence. Look for swollen and stiff sections of wire in the suspect circuits. * Wiring which has been pinched, cut, or its insulation rubbed through may cause an intermittent open or short as the bare area touches other wiring or parts of the vehicle. * Wiring that comes in contact with hot or exhaust components * Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions) in order to duplicate the conditions required, in order to verify the customer concern. * Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Electrical Intermittents) for test procedures to detect intermittent open, high resistance, short to ground, and short to voltage conditions. * Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure) for advanced intermittent diagnosis and Vehicle Data Recorder operation. Testing for Terminal Fretting Some intermittent conditions can be caused by wire terminal fretting corrosion. Fretting corrosion is a build-up of insulating, oxidized wear debris that can form when there is a small motion between electrical contacts. The oxidized wear debris can pile up enough at the electrical contact spots that the electrical resistance across the connection increases. Movement between the contacting surfaces as small as 10 to 100 microns can cause fretting. To put this in perspective, a sheet of paper is about 100 microns thick, so fretting motion is small and hard to see. Vibration and thermal expansion/contraction are the main sources that create fretting motion. Since vehicles vibrate and can experience large temperature swings, they are a good source for fretting motion. Tin, copper, nickel, and iron surfaces are all susceptible to fretting corrosion. Fretting corrosion can be difficult to see but it looks like small, dark smudges on the terminals contact surface. To correct a fretting condition disconnect the suspect connector and add Nyogel lubricant 760G (dielectric grease) to both sides of the connector Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6901 terminals. Then reconnect the connector and wipe away any excess lubricant. This will correct the additional terminal contact resistance due to the terminal fretting corrosion. Testing for Proper Terminal Contact It is important to test terminal contact at the component and any inline connectors before replacing a suspect component. Mating terminals must be inspected to ensure good terminal contact. A poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector may be the result of contamination or deformation. Contamination may be caused by the connector halves being improperly connected. A missing or damaged connector seal, damage to the connector itself, or exposing the terminals to moisture and dirt can also cause contamination. Contamination, usually in the underhood or underbody connectors, leads to terminal corrosion, causing an open circuit or intermittently open circuit. Deformation is caused by probing the mating side of a connector terminal without the proper adapter. Always use the EL-35616 when probing connectors. Other causes of terminal deformation are improperly joining the connector halves, or repeatedly separating and joining the connector halves. Deformation, usually to the female terminal contact tang, can result in poor terminal contact causing an open or intermittently open circuit. Testing for Proper Terminal Contact in Bussed Electrical Centers It is very important to use the correct test adapter when testing for proper terminal contact of fuses and relays in a bussed electrical center. Use EL-35616-35 to test for proper terminal contact. Failure to use EL-35616-35 can result in improper diagnosis of the bussed electrical center. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact: 1. Separate the connector halves. 2. Visually inspect the connector halves for contamination. Contamination may result in a white or green build-up within the connector body or between terminals. This causes high terminal resistance, intermittent contact, or an open circuit. An underhood or underbody connector that shows signs of contamination should be replaced in its entirety: terminals, seals, and connector body. 3. Using an equivalent male terminal / terminated lead, verify that the retention force is significantly different between a known good terminal and the suspect terminal. Replace the female terminal in question. Flat Wire (Dock and Lock) Connectors There are no serviceable parts for flat wire (dock and lock) connectors on the harness side or the component side. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact: 1. Remove the component in question. 2. Visually inspect each side of the connector for signs of contamination. Avoid touching either side of the connector as oil from your skin may be a source of contamination as well. 3. Visually inspect the terminal bearing surfaces of the flat wire circuits for splits, cracks, or other imperfections that could cause poor terminal contact. Visually inspect the component side connector to ensure that all of the terminals are uniform and free of damage or deformation. 4. Insert the appropriate adapter from the on the flat wire harness connector in order to test the circuit in question. Control Module/Component Voltage and Grounds Poor voltage or ground connections can cause widely varying symptoms. * Test all control module voltage supply circuits. Many vehicles have multiple circuits supplying voltage to a control module. Other components in the system may have separate voltage supply circuits that may also need to be tested. Inspect connections at the module/component connectors, fuses, and any intermediate connections between the voltage source and the module/component. A test lamp or a DMM may indicate that voltage is present, but neither tests the ability of the circuit to carry sufficient current. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. Refer to Circuit Testing (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Circuit Testing) and Power Distribution Schematics (See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Starting and Charging/Power and Ground Distribution/System Diagram/Power Distribution Schematics). * Test all control module ground and system ground circuits. The control module may have multiple ground circuits. Other components in the system may have separate grounds that may also need to be tested. Inspect grounds for clean and tight connections at the grounding point. Inspect the connections at the component and in splice packs, where applicable. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. Refer to Circuit Testing (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Circuit Testing) and Ground Distribution Schematics (See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Starting and Charging/Power and Ground Distribution/System Diagram/Ground Distribution Schematics). Temperature Sensitivity * An intermittent condition may occur when a component/connection reaches normal operating temperature. The condition may occur only when the component/connection is cold, or only when the component/connection is hot. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6902 * Freeze Frame, Failure Records, Snapshot, or Vehicle Data Recorder data may help with this type of intermittent condition, where applicable. * If the intermittent is related to heat, review the data for a relationship with the following: - High ambient temperatures - Underhood/engine generated heat - Circuit generated heat due to a poor connection, or high electrical load - Higher than normal load conditions, towing, etc. * If the intermittent is related to cold, review the data for the following: - Low ambient temperatures-In extremely low temperatures, ice may form in a connection or component. Inspect for water intrusion. - The condition only occurs on a cold start. - The condition goes away when the vehicle warms up. * Information from the customer may help to determine if the trouble follows a pattern that is temperature related. * If temperature is suspected of causing an intermittent fault condition, attempt to duplicate the condition. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions) in order to duplicate the conditions required. Electromagnetic Interference and Electrical Noise Some electrical components/circuits are sensitive to electromagnetic interference or other types of electrical noise. Inspect for the following conditions: * A misrouted harness that is too close to high voltage/high current devices such as secondary ignition components, motors, generator etc.-These components may induce electrical noise on a circuit that could interfere with normal circuit operation. * Electrical system interference caused by a malfunctioning relay, or a control module driven solenoid or switch-These conditions can cause a sharp electrical surge. Normally, the condition will occur when the malfunctioning component is operating. * Improper installation of non-factory or aftermarket add on accessories such as lights, 2-way radios, amplifiers, electric motors, remote starters, alarm systems, cell phones, etc.-These accessories may lead to interference while in use, but do not fail when the accessories are not in use. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Checking Aftermarket Accessories). * Test for an open diode across the A/C compressor clutch and for other open diodes. Some relays may contain a clamping diode. * The generator may be allowing AC noise into the electrical system. Incorrect Control Module * There are only a few situations where reprogramming a control module is appropriate: - A new service control module is installed. - A control module from another vehicle is installed. - Revised software/calibration files have been released for this vehicle. Note: DO NOT re-program the control module with the SAME software/calibration files that are already present in the control module. This is not an effective repair for any type of concern. * Verify that the control module contains the correct software/calibration. If incorrect programming is found, reprogram the control module with the most current software/calibration. Refer to Control Module References (See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning) for replacement, setup, and programming. Testing for Short to Ground Testing for Short to Ground Special Tools * EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM) * EL 35616-200 - Test Light-Probe Kit For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test Probe Caution). The following procedures test for a short to ground in a circuit. With a Digital Multimeter (DMM) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6903 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the Ohms position. 4. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the other lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. If the DMM does NOT display infinite resistance (OL), there is a short to ground in the circuit. With a Test Lamp 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect one lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to one end of the circuit to be tested. 5. If the test lamp illuminates, there is a short to ground in the circuit. Fuse Powering Several Loads 1. Review the system schematic and locate the fuse that is open. 2. Open the first connector or switch leading from the fuse to each load. 3. Connect a DMM across the fuse terminals (be sure that the fuse is powered). * When the DMM displays voltage the short is in the wiring leading to the first connector or switch. * If the DMM does not display voltage refer to the next step. 4. Close each connector or switch until the DMM displays voltage in order to find which circuit is shorted. Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter Special Tools EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM) For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test Probe Caution). Digital Multimeter (DMM) Basic Requirements Service information is validated using digital multimeters that meet or exceed the following requirements. Using a multimeter that does not meet these basic requirements may give inaccurate readings which could lead to an incorrect diagnosis. Display and Settings 1. Four digits displayed 2. Voltage, amperage, resistance, frequency, diode test settings, and min-max function 3. Display positive and negative values Voltage 1. Have at least 10 Mohm input impedance 2. Test a DC voltage range of 0.1-1000 V. 3. Test an AC voltage range of 0.1-1000 V. Amperage 1. Test a DC amperage range of 0.1µA-10 A. 2. Test an AC amperage range of 0.1µA-10 A. Resistance Test a resistance range of 0.1 ohm-40 Mohm and displays infinite for a value greater than 40 Mohm (O.L. (Over-load)) Frequency Test for a frequency range of 0.5 HZ-199 K HZ Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6904 Diode Test 1. Apply at least 1 mA when performing the diode bias test 2. Display the break over voltage drop (0-3 V) of a forward biased diode 3. Display infinite (O.L. (Over-load)) when a diode is reverse biased Min-Max Readings 1. Can update at a 1 ms sample rate 2. Saves and displays minimum and maximum values Note: Circuits which include any solid state control modules, such as the engine control module (ECM), should only be tested with a 10 MOhms or higher impedance digital multimeter such as the EL-39200. The EL-39200 instruction manual is a good source of information and should be read thoroughly upon receipt of the DMM as well as kept on hand for future reference. A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present if the impedance is low enough, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. In other words, if there is not enough current, the test lamp will not illuminate even though voltage is present. The ohmmeter function on a DMM shows how much resistance exists between 2 points along a circuit. Low resistance in a circuit means good continuity. Note: Disconnect the power feed from the suspect circuit when measuring resistance with a DMM. This prevents incorrect readings. DMMs apply such a small voltage to measure resistance that the presence of voltages can upset a resistance reading. Diodes and solid state components in a circuit can cause a DMM to display a false reading. To find out if a component is affecting a measurement take a reading once, then reverse the leads and take a second reading. If the readings differ the solid state component is affecting the measurement. Following are examples of the various methods of connecting the DMM to the circuit to be tested: * Probe both ends of the connector and either hold the leads in place while manipulating the connector or tape the leads to the harness for continuous monitoring while you perform other operations or test driving. Refer to Probing Electrical Connectors (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Probing Electrical Connectors). * Disconnect the harness at both ends of the suspected circuit where it connects either to a component or to other harnesses. * If the system that is being diagnosed has a specified pinout or breakout box, it may be used in order to simplify connecting the DMM to the circuit or for testing multiple circuits quickly. Using Connector Test Adapters Using Connector Test Adapters Special Tools EL 35616 - Terminal Test Probe Kit For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Caution: Do not insert test equipment probes (DMM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the EL-38125-580 GM Approved Terminal Release Tool Kit in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the EL-38125-580 GM Approved Terminal Release Tool Kit , ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the EL-38125-580 GM Approved Terminal Release Tool Kit label on the inside of the EL-38125-580 GM Approved Terminal Release Tool Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Using Fused Jumper Wires Using Fused Jumper Wires Special Tools J 36169-A Fused Jumper Wire Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6905 Note: A fused jumper may not protect solid state components from being damaged. The J 36169-A includes small clamp connectors that provide adaptation to most connectors without damage. This fused jumper wire is supplied with a 20-A fuse which may not be suitable for some circuits. Do not use a fuse with a higher rating than the fuse that protects the circuit being tested. AFL/EPC Connectors AFL/EPC Connectors Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. 1. For connectors with a bolt in the dress cover, turn the bolt counterclockwise to remove the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6906 2. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the top of the wire dress cover. Slide the CPA forward. 3. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6907 View showing depressing of the lever lock release tab. View of connector in released position. 4. Disconnect the connector from the component. 5. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the dress cover. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs and remove the dress cover. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6908 6. Release the rear lower half of the wiredress cover. 7. Release the tabs that are holding the wiredress cover to the connector body. 8. Remove the nose piece by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the slots on both ends of the connector body. Gently pry the nose piece out of the connector. J 38125-216 can also be used to remove the nose piece. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6909 9. Use the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by lifting the terminal retaining tabs on the inside of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Bosch Connectors (BSK) Bosch Connectors (BSK) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6910 Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 3. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 4. Insert the J 38125-561 tool into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 5. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Bosch Connectors (ECM) Bosch Connectors (ECM) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6911 1. Locate the assist lever on the top of the connector. Move the assist lever to the forward position. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6912 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the connector. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the locking tabs and remove the dress cover. 4. The terminal positive assurance (TPA) is located in the front of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6913 5. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove TPA from the connector. 6. Use the J 38125-213 or the J 38125-556 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6914 Note: Ensure that the dress cover and connector body are both in the released position before reassembling. Failure to do so may cause damage to the connector and component. Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Bosch Connectors (0.64) Bosch Connectors (0.64) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While pressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock until the lever is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Pull the rubber boot that covers the wires back to expose the end of the connector dress cover. 4. Place the connector locking lever in the center of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6915 5. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs that are on the wire end of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover and connector body and pry up. 6. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs located on the opposite side of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover at the connector end and pry up. 7. Remove the dress cover. 8. Cut the tie wrap on the wire bundle. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6916 9. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting a small flat-bladed tool into the small slot in the end of the slider and pushing on the TPA until it comes out of the connector. When the TPA exits the opposite side of the connector, gasp the TPA and pull it completely out of the connector. 10. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 11. Insert the J 38125-560 into the 2 triangular cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 12. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Terminal Replacement Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6917 1. Prior to installation the terminal must be aligned so the (1) coding lugs align with the (2) coding grooves on the connector. 2. Once the terminal is aligned, slide the terminal into the cavity until the retainer has engaged in the cavity of the connector. 3. Slide the TPA in the connector body and seat it using a small flat bladed tool. The TPA is seated when it is flush with the contact housing. 4. Secure the wires to the connector body using a tie wrap and replace the dress cover and grommet. Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Pull out the slider on the connector position assurance (CPA) until it is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6918 5. Insert the J 38125-557 into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Connector Position Assurance Locks Connector Position Assurance Locks The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of the connector. CPAs are used in various connectors throughout the vehicle. CPAs are also used in all SIR system electrical connectors. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals, of the connector. Connector Repairs Connector Repairs Connector Repairs contains a list of all connector repairs. The connector repairs are listed by the connector manufacturer and then by connector type. If the technician cannot identify the manufacturer of the connector, refer to Identifying Connectors below. Knowing the connector manufacturer will assist in finding the correct connector repair from the following list: * Connector Position Assurance Locks (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Connector Position Assurance Locks) * Terminal Position Assurance Locks (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Terminal Position Assurance Locks) * AFL/EPC Connectors (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/AFL/EPC Connectors) * Bosch Connectors (BSK) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Bosch Connectors (BSK))Bosch Connectors (0.64) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Bosch Connectors (0.64))Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT))Bosch Connectors (ECM) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Bosch Connectors (ECM)) * Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack))Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Push to Seat))Delphi Connectors Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6919 (Pull To Seat) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Pull to Seat))Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W))Delphi Connectors (Micro.64) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Micro .64))Delphi Connectors (12-Way) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (12-Way))Delphi Connectors (Steering Gear) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Steering Gear)) * FCI Connectors (Lever Lock) (See: General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/FCI Connectors (Lever Lock))FCI Connectors (SIR) (See: General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/FCI (SIR)) * FEP Connectors (Steering Gear) (See: General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/FEP Connectors (Steering Gear)) * JST Connectors (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/JST Connectors) * Kostal Connectors (Glow Plug Control Module) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Kostal Connectors (Glow Plug Control Module))Kostal Connectors (Transmission) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Kostal Connectors (Transmission)) * Molex Connectors (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Molex Connectors) * Sumitomo Connectors (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Sumitomo Connectors) * Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way))Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor))Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap))Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way))Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module)) * Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Yazaki Connectors (2-Way))Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Yazaki Connectors (16-Way)) * Repairing Connector Terminals (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Repairing Connector Terminals) Connector Anatomy 1 - Connector Positive Assurance (CPA) 2 - Assist Lever 3 - Wiredress Cover 4 - Seal Strain/Relief Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6920 5 - Slide Left Hand 6 - Slide Right Hand 7 - Terminal Positive Assurance (TPA) 8 - Terminal Positive Assurance (TPA) 9 - Connector Seal 10 - Connector Housing 11 - Inner Connector Identifying Connectors Knowing the connector manufacturer is helpful when trying to locating the correct connector repair procedure. There are many different connector designs used on GM vehicles and it is sometimes difficult to identify the connector manufacturer. The information in this document should help with the identification of connector manufactures. The following connector manufacturers make most of the connectors found in GM vehicles: * AFL/EPC (Alcoa Fujikura Ltd./Engineered Plastics Components) * Bosch * Delphi * FCI (Framatome Connectors International) * JAE (Japan Aviation Electronics) * JST (Japan Solderless Terminals) * Kostel * Molex * Sumitomo * Tyco/AMP * Yazaki Identifying the manufacturer of a connector is often difficult. When trying to determine the manufacturer of a connector, look for specific identifying marks that are unique to that connector supplier. Most of these identify marks are hard to find or see. Check the connector carefully and refer to the information below for pictures and descriptions of connector identification markings. * Most of AFLs connectors have EPC on their connector body. Some of the smaller connectors will not have any markings on them. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6921 * In some cases Bosch will actually be printed on the connector. If Bosch does not appear on the connector, look for the Bosch logo. The Bosch logo is a circle with a blunted arrow inside. This logo can appear anywhere on the connector and is often very small. * In some cases Delphi will actually be printed on the connector. If Delphi is not printed on the connector, look for PED. In both cases there is no specific orientation for Delphi or PED and they can appear anywhere on the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6922 * FCI connectors may have the FCI logo on their connectors. The logo is the letters FCI with an "A" above it. * JAE connector have JAE in small letters on their connectors. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6923 * JST connectors have JST in small letters on their connectors, similar to that above. The location of the logo will vary with the connector size and style. * Kostel has an "LK" with a circle around it. These connector are usually used as a transmissions connection. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6924 * Most Molex connectors will have the Molex logo on the dresscover of the connector. In some cases the connectors may have MX followed by another letter. The third letter indicates where the connector was made. A connector with MXD is a Molex connector made in Detroit. Sumitomo has a unique symbol on their connector and possibly a part number. The symbol is similar to that of a diamond lying on its side, similar to that shown. The logo could appear anywhere but the most common place is at the wire side of the housing. * Tyco/AMP has many different and unique connector designs. Some may or may not have identifiable marks on them. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6925 * Yazaki has a wedge or arrow shape, similar to that shown. Delphi Connectors (Push to Seat) Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Follow the steps below in order to repair push to seat connectors. 1. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device, the connector position assurance (CPA) device, and/or the secondary lock. 2. Separate the connector halves (1). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6926 3. Use the proper pick or removal tool (1) in order to release the terminal. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 4. Gently pull the cable and the terminal (2) out of the back of the connector. 5. Re-form the locking device if you are going to reuse the terminal (1). 6. To repair the terminal, refer to Terminal Repair. Terminal Repair 1. Slip the cable seal away from the terminal. 2. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 3. Slip a new cable seal onto the wire. 4. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 5. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 6. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. 7. Slide the cable seal toward the terminal. 8. Crimp the cable seal and the insulation. 9. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply grease to the connector. Reinstalling Terminal 1. In order to reuse a terminal or lead assembly, refer to Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Wiring Repairs). 2. Ensure that the cable seal is kept on the terminal side of the splice. 3. Insert the lead from the back until it catches. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Terminated Lead Repair 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Find the appropriate terminated lead. 3. Use the appropriate splice sleeves depending on the gauge size. 4. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves). Delphi Connectors (Pull to Seat) Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) Special Tools Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6927 J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal If the terminal is visibly damaged or is suspected of having a faulty connection, the terminal should be replaced. Follow the steps below in order to repair pull-to-seat connectors: 1. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) device and/or the secondary lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component or separate the connectors for in-line connectors. 3. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device. 4. Insert the proper pick or removal tool into the front of the connector body. Note: On connectors with more than one terminal the service loop may not be large enough to remove the terminal and crimp on a new one. If the terminal wire does not have a large enough service loop for removal, cut the wire 5 cm (2 in) behind the connector before removal. 5. Grasp the wire at the back of the connector body and gently push the terminal out the front of the connector body. Terminal Repair 1. If the wire needed to be cut in order to remove the terminal, gently push a small length of the same size wire through the back of the connector cavity until there is enough wire exposed in order to crimp on a new terminal. If the wire was not cut, cut the existing wire as close to the old terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 4. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. Terminal Installation 1. Align the terminal and pull the wire from the back of the connector in order to seat the terminal. 2. If necessary, cut the new wire to proper length and splice with existing circuit. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves). 3. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply dielectric grease to the connector. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Micro .64) Delphi Connectors (Micro.64) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6928 Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro.64 connectors. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. The lever lock may be located on the top or sides of the wire dress cover. View of a typical Micro 64 connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6929 Depress the lock and pull the lever over and past the lock. View of the connector when released from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6930 View of another type of Micro 64 connector. Depress the locks that are located on both sides of the wiredress cover and pull the lever over and past the locks. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6931 View of the connector when released from the component. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the front of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool push down on one of the locking tabs and pull the cover up until the dress cover releases. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. 4. Once the front 2 locks are unlocked, lift the front of the dress cover and pull it forward. Note: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 5. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the small slot on the TPA and pushing down until the TPA releases. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6932 Note: Be careful not to angle or rock the J 38125-21 tool when inserting it into the connector or the tool may break. 6. Insert the J 38125-21 tool into the round canal between the terminals cavities at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Follow the steps below in order to repair Micro 64 connector terminals. The Micro 64 connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-64 (M jaw) was developed to crimp Micro 64 terminals. The J 38125-64 crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. The J 38125-64 crimping tool is also designed to crimp both the wire and the insulation at the same time. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro 64 terminals. Note: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gauge wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 1. Cut the wire as close to the damaged terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6933 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert terminal into the appropriate terminal holder until it hits bottom and stops. The correct terminal holder is determined by the wire size. Also ensure that the terminals wings are pointing towards the former on the tool and the release locator. 5. Insert the stripped cable into the terminal. Insulation should be visible on both sides of the terminal insulation wings. 6. Compress the handles until the ratchet automatically releases. 7. Place the terminal into the appropriate cavity and assemble the connector. Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6934 Terminal Removal Procedure There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W connectors. These connectors are very similar but use different terminals and have some minor physical differences also. The first connector design of the Micro-Pack 100W (1) has a white connector interface that holds the terminals. The second design of the Micro-Pack 100W (2) has a gray interface to hold the terminals. Also, the first design has terminal cavities that are further apart (3 mm centerline) and offset from the other row of terminal cavities in the connector. The second design has terminals cavities that are closer together (2.54 mm centerline) and aligned vertically. One other way to identify the second design is the thin strip of material that runs along the outside of the cavities. Note: There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W terminals which are very similar. Ensure that you have the correct terminal before crimping the new terminal to the wire. The first design connector uses the longer terminal (1) that has a raised area in front of the recess in the terminal. The second design connector uses the shorter terminal without the raised area. Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro-Pack 100W connectors. Some Micro-Pack 100W connector disassembly procedures will vary. Use this procedure as a guide. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6935 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Locate the nose piece locking tabs that are positioned on the side of the connector nose piece. The connector nose piece acts as a terminal positive assurance (TPA) and may be referred to as such. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to push in one of the locking tabs while gently pulling on the same side of the nose piece. 4. Repeat the procedure for the other locking tab and remove the nose piece. 5. Remove the wire dress cover. The following is a general procedure for wire dress cover removal. Use this procedure as a guide, some dress cover removal procedures may vary. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6936 6. Use fingers to squeeze the 2 locking legs of the cover. 7. Apply pressure and gently rock the cover until one locking leg is unseated. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6937 8. Continue to apply pressure and rock the cover until the second locking leg is unseated. Repeat procedure for the other side of the dress cover and remove the cover. 9. Use J 38125-12A to gently lift the terminal retaining tab while gently pulling the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. If the terminal is severely bent or damaged, it may be possible on some connectors to push the wire out of the front of the connector instead of pulling it through. This will prevent damage to the internal seals of the connector. Once the terminal is pushed out of the connector, cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible and pull the wire through the connector. Terminal Repair Procedure The Micro-Pack 100W connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool was developed to crimp Micro-Pack 100W terminals. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro-Pack 100 terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6938 1. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. Note: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gauge wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert the terminal into the crimp tool until the core wings are flush with the anvil on the crimp tool. Be sure that the wings are pointed toward the crimp tool former and release the spring locator. The locator will hold the terminal in place. Inspect the alignment of the terminal wings with the crimp tool former. If the terminal wings are wider than the crimp tool former, remove the terminal and bend the terminal wings in slightly. 5. Place stripped wire into terminal. 6. Crimp the new terminal to the wire. If a jam occurs, press the emergency release to open applicator. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6939 Terminal Replacement Procedure After the terminal is crimped to the wire perform the following procedure in order to replace Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the Terminal Removal Procedure. Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The following is the proper procedure for the repair of Weather Pack(R) Connectors. 1. Separate the connector halves (1). 2. Open the secondary lock. A secondary lock aids in terminal retention and is usually molded to the connector (1). 3. Grasp the wire and push the terminal to the forward most position. Hold the wire in this position. 4. Insert the Weather Pack(R) terminal removal tool J 38125-10A into the front (mating end) of the connector cavity until it rests on the cavity shoulder (1). 5. Gently pull on the wire to remove the terminal through the back of the connector (2). Note: Never use force to remove a terminal from a connector. 6. Inspect the terminal and connector for damage. Repair as necessary. Refer to Repairing Connector Terminals (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Repairing Connector Terminals). 7. Reform the lock tang (2) and reset terminal in connector body. 8. Close secondary locks and join connector halves. 9. Verify that circuit is complete and working satisfactorily. 10. Perform system check. Delphi Connectors (12-Way) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6940 Delphi Connectors (12-Way) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) and slide the lever lock away from the connector body. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs on the dress cover of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool release all of the locking tabs. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6941 4. Release the lower wire dress cover locking tab. 5. Release the upper wire dress cover locking tab. 6. Once the locks are unlocked, lift the dress cover off. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6942 Note: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 7. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the locking tabs on both sides of the TPA. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. 8. Remove the nose piece by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the locking tabs on both sides of the nose piece. Gently pry the nose piece out of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6943 9. Insert the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Delphi Connectors (Steering Gear) Delphi Connectors (Steering Gear) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6944 Removal Procedure 1. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the locking tab on the connector. 2. Push down the locking tab to release the connector. The small flat-bladed tool may need to be pushed down and angled back slightly to depress the locking tab. Pull on the connector body while releasing the locking tab to disconnect the connector. FCI Connectors (Lever Lock) FCI Connectors (Lever Lock) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6945 Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. 1. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. 2. The release tab is located on the top of the wiredress cover. 3. View of connector in released position. 4. Disconnect the connector from the component. 5. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the dress cover. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs and remove the dress cover. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6946 6. Use a small flat-blade tool to slide the terminal position assurance (TPA) up one notch on both ends of the connector. The TPA is located underneath the wire dress cover. For the larger terminals insert the J 38125-556 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. For the smaller terminals insert the J 38125-560 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6947 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. FCI (SIR) FCI Connectors (SIR) Removal Procedure Note: The orange CPA must be released first to disconnect or to connect the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6948 1. Lift the orange CPA vertically (avoid lifting on an angle to the connector) approximately 4 mm to release the connector. Use a small flat-bladed tool to help release the orange CPA. The orange CPA can also be released manually without any tools. 2. Grab the connector on both sides and lift the connector vertically to disconnect the connector. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6949 1. Lift the orange CPA vertically approximately 4 mm before installing the connector. Use a small flat-bladed tool to help release the orange CPA. The orange CPA can also be released manually without any tools. 2. Line up the connector key tabs with the initiator key slots. Grab the connector on both sides and push the connector down into the initiator connector sub assembly until fully seated. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6950 3. After the connector is fully seated, push down the orange CPA with your thumb. Push down until the orange CPA is touching the yellow cover on the connector. FEP Connectors (Steering Gear) FEP Connectors (Steering Gear) Removal Procedure 1. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the locking tab on the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6951 2. Push down the locking tab to release the connector. The small flat-bladed tool may need to be pushed down and angled back slightly to depress the locking tab. Pull on the connector body while releasing the locking tab to disconnect the connector. JST Connectors JST Connectors Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. While depressing the lock, remove the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6952 2. Locate the two indents of the terminal position assurance (TPA) located on the bottom of the connector body. Note: The TPA cannot be removed from the connector while there are terminals present in the connector body. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to very carefully raise the TPA on both sides of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6953 4. View of the TPA when removed from the connector body. 5. Use the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the left side of the terminal release cavity as shown in the graphic. Use the tool to move the terminal release to the right with a gentle prying motion. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Kostal Connectors (Glow Plug Control Module) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6954 Kostal Connectors (Glow Plug Control Module) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure View of typical connector. View of connector in released position. 1. Locate the assist lever at the back of the connector. Move the assist lever to the rear position. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6955 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove the dress cover. 4. Slide the dress cover forward and off of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6956 5. The terminal positive assurance (TPA) is located in the front and rear of the connector. Note: The front TPA cannot be removed from the connector. Only move it to the preset position. 6. Use a small flat-blade tool to move the front TPA to the preset position, outboard approximately 0.125 in. (3 mm). 7. Use a small flat-blade tool to completely remove the rear TPA from the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6957 8. Use the J 38125-24 or the J 38125-560 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 9. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Kostal Connectors (Transmission) Kostal Connectors (Transmission) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6958 1. While depressing the lock, twist and remove the connector from the component. 2. Locate the terminal position assurance (TPA). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6959 Note: The TPA cannot be removed from the connector while there are terminals present in the connector body. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to push the TPA until it bottoms out. 4. Use the J 38125-28 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal cavity as shown in the graphic. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 5. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Terminal Replacement Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6960 After the terminal is crimped to the wire, perform the following procedure in order to replace the terminal. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. Locate the terminal position assurance (TPA). 4. Use a small flat-blade tool to push the TPA until it bottoms out. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6961 5. Ensure the TPA is fully seated. The TPA should be centered and flush with the connector body when viewed. Molex Connectors Molex Connectors Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the top of the wire dress cover. Slide the CPA forward. 2. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6962 3. The lever should be in the full forward position. 4. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6963 5. Remove the dress cover by using a flat bladed tool to release the dress cover locking tabs and lift up on the dress cover. 6. Cut the tie wrap that holds the wires to the connector body. 7. Use a small flat-blade tool to pry one side of the nose piece up to the pre-stage position. When the nose piece is in the pre-staged position, the nose piece will be raised above the connector body the length of the step in the nose piece. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6964 8. Use a small flat-blade tool to pry the other side of the piece to the pre-stage position. If the nose piece is higher than the first step in the nose piece, gently push down on the nose piece until it meets with resistance from the connector body, you should feel the nose piece click into position. 9. Insert the J 38125-213 into the small terminal release hole on the nose piece and gently pull on the back of the wire. 10. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Refer to the terminal crimping procedure in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit. Terminal Replacement Procedure After the terminal is crimped to the wire, perform the following procedure in order to replace the terminal. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6965 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the connector disassembly procedure. Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the connector body and pull the CPA out. The CPA is on the wire harness side of connector. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Use a small flat-bladed tool to gently pry off the dress cover by inserting the tool under the cover opposite the harness side and prying up. 4. Remove the cover. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6966 5. Using a small flat-bladed tool, push on the side of the nose piece retainer while pushing the nose piece forward with your thumb. This will release the terminal position assurance (TPA). 6. Insert the J 38125-12A into the corresponding terminal release cavity. The release cavities are the 2 center rows of cavities on one half of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6967 7. Pressing the J 38125-12A tool in the release cavity of the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and crimper in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. Slide the lever lock away from the connector body. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs on the dress cover of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool release all of the locking tabs. 4. Once the locks are unlocked, lift the dress cover off. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6968 Note: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 5. Release the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the blue locking tabs on both ends of the connector. Gently slide the TPA up to the released position on both ends. 6. For the larger terminals insert the J 38125-13A tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. For the smaller terminals insert the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6969 View of the release tool being used for the larger terminals. View of the release tool being used for the larger terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6970 View of the release tool being used for the smaller terminals. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6971 Side view of connector. View of top of connector. 1. Locate the assist lever and lock on the top of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6972 2. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. 3. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6973 4. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the rear of the connector. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. 5. Once the locking tabs are unlocked, slide the inner connector out of the rear of the connector housing. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6974 6. Use the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by pressing on the tang. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Repairing Connector Terminals Repairing Connector Terminals Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Use the following repair procedures in order to repair the following: * Push to Seat terminals * Pull to Seat terminals Some terminals do not require all of the steps shown. Skip the steps that do not apply for your terminal repair. The J-38125 contains further information. 1. Cut off the terminal between the core and the insulation crimp. Minimize any wire loss. For cable seal terminals, remove the seal. 2. Apply the correct cable seal per gauge size of the wire, if used. Slide the seal back along the wire in order to enable insulation removal. 3. Remove the insulation. 4. For sealed terminals only, align the seal with the end of the cable insulation. 5. Position the strip in the terminal. For sealed terminals, position the strip and seal in the terminal. 6. Hand crimp the core wings. 7. Hand crimp the insulation wings. For sealed terminals, hand crimp the insulation wings around the seal and the cable. 8. Solder all of the hand crimp terminals excepting Micro-Pack 100.64 size. Soldering Micro-Pack 100 World terminals may damage the terminal. Sumitomo Connectors Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6975 Sumitomo Connectors Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6976 3. Remove the dress cover by using a flat-blade tool to release the connector locking tabs and pulling off the dress cover. 4. Relieve the tension on the nose piece retainers by inserting J 38125-12A into the single retainer slot on the end of the nose piece and gently prying out the locking tab. Repeat the process for both of the nose piece locking tabs on the opposite side of the nose piece. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6977 5. Once the nose piece retainers are relaxed, use the J 38125-552 to pull up the nose piece by hooking the tool under the nose piece and pulling up. The nose piece should raise slightly. 6. On the opposite side of the nose piece, use the J 38125-552 to pull up the nose piece by hooking the tool under the nose piece and pulling up. The nose piece should release completely. If the nose piece does not come off, repeat the procedure on the opposite side. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6978 7. The illustration above identifies the entry canal where the terminal release tool will be inserted, and the terminal cavity. * Terminal (1) * Entry Canal (2) 8. Insert the J 38125-553 tool into the entry canal and pry up on the terminal retainer. The terminal retainer is a small plastic piece on the top of the terminal. The terminal retainer must be held up while the terminal is pulled out of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6979 9. The illustration shows a cutaway view of the connector to aid the technician in releasing the terminal retainer. 10. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Refer to the terminal crimping procedure in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit. Terminal Replacement Procedure After the terminal is crimped to the wire, perform the following procedure in order to replace the terminal. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the connector disassembly procedure. Terminal Position Assurance Locks Terminal Position Assurance Locks The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6980 2. Insert the J 38125-11A tool into the cavity on the lower right hand face of the connector until the terminal release tang access panel slides over. 3. Ensure that the terminal release tang access panel is in the correct location to access the terminals. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6981 5. Insert the J 38125-11A into the terminal release tang access slot located behind the access panel of the connector and press down on the terminal while carefully pulling the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component by pressing down on the connector position assurance (CPA). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6982 2. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting the tool in the small recess on the side of the connector and pushing up until the TPA releases from the connector body. The TPA should raise just slightly. Do not try to remove the TPA. Note: The TPA on this connector cannot be removed unless the terminals are removed first. The TPA will come out of the connector body, but only slightly. When the TPA is slightly raised the terminals can be removed. Using excessive force to remove the TPA with the terminals still in the connector will damage the connector. 3. Repeat the process for the other side of the connector. 4. Ensure that the TPA is in the proper position to remove the terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6983 5. While pushing the terminal forward, insert the J 38125-24 in the release cavity above the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6984 2. Insert a small flat-blade tool in the slot below the front loaded terminal position assurance (TPA) and pry up. 3. Remove the TPA by pulling it out of the connector. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-553 on a slight upward angle into the cavity below the terminal to be removed. Ensure that the pointed on the end of the tool is facing the bottom of the terminal and it stays in contact with the terminal until it stops on the plastic terminal retainer. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6985 6. Gently pry the plastic terminal retainer down and carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6986 1. While depressing the lock, pull the two connector halves apart. Note: The TPA is fragile and may break if not done carefully. 2. Use a small flat-blade tool to very carefully push the terminal position assurance (TPA) towards the face of the connector on both sides of the connector. 3. View of the male half of the connector with female terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6987 4. View of the female half of the connector with male terminals. 5. Use the J 38125-215 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. View of the female half of the connector with male terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6988 7. View of the male half of the connector with female terminals. 8. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers A circuit breaker is a protective device that is designed to open the circuit when a current load is in excess of the rated breaker capacity. If there is a short or other type of overload condition in the circuit, the excessive current will open the circuit between the circuit breaker terminals. Two types of circuit breakers are used. Circuit Breaker - This type opens when excessive current passes through it for a period of time. It closes again after a few seconds, and if the cause of the high current is still present, it will open again. The circuit breaker will continue to cycle open and closed until the condition causing the high current is removed. Positive Temperature Coefficient (PTC) Circuit Breaker - This type greatly increases its resistance when excessive current passes through it. The excessive current heats the PTC device, as the device heats its resistance increases. Eventually the resistance gets so high that the circuit is effectively open. Unlike the ordinary circuit breaker the PTC unit will not reset until the circuit is opened, by removing the voltage from its terminals. Once the voltage is removed the circuit breaker will re-close within a second or 2. Circuit Protection - Fuses Circuit Protection - Fuses Special Tools EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM) For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6989 The fuse is the most common method of an automotive wiring circuit protection. Whenever there is an excessive amount of current flowing through a circuit the fusible element will melt and create an open or incomplete circuit. Fuses are a one time protection device and must be replaced each time the circuit is overloaded. To determine if a fuse is open, remove the suspected fuse and examine if the element in the fuse is broken (2). If not broken (1), also check for continuity using a Digital Multimeter (DMM) or a continuity tester. If the element is broken or continuity is suspect, replace the fuse with one of equal current rating. Circuit Protection - Fusible Links Circuit Protection - Fusible Links Special Tools EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM) For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Fusible link is wire designed to melt and break continuity when excessive current is applied. It is often located between or near the battery and starter or electrical center. Use a continuity tester or a Digital Multimeter (DMM) at each end of the wire containing the fusible link in order to determine if it is broken. If broken, it must be replaced with fusible link of the same gauge size. Repairing a Fusible Link Note: Fusible links cut longer than 225 mm (approximately 9 in) will not provide sufficient overload protection. Flat Wire Repairs Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6990 Flat Wire Repairs The flat wire within the flex wiring harness is not serviceable. If an open or short exists within the flex wiring harness the complete harness must be replaced. GMLAN Wiring Repairs GMLAN Wiring Repairs Special Tools * EL-38125-10 - Splice Sleeve Crimping Tool * J 38125-5 - Ultra Torch Special Tool * DuraSeal splice sleeves * A wire stripping tool For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: * A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. * A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The GM Local Area Network (GMLAN) System requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working on GMLAN connectors and terminals. GMLAN Repairs Note: When making a repair to any GMLAN network, the original wire length after the repair must be the same length as before the repair. If the network is a twisted pair, the twist must be maintained after the repair is completed. GMLAN has 2 types of networks, low speed and high speed. Low speed GMLAN has a single wire and works at slow speeds. High speed GMLAN has 2 wires in a twisted pair and works at higher speeds. For more information on GMLAN, refer to Data Link Communications Description and Operation ( See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Information Bus/Description and Operation). GMLAN Connector Terminal Repair Note: A terminated lead can be used to replace damaged connector terminals for both high speed and low speed GMLAN systems. When making a connector terminal repair on a GMLAN high speed system with twisted pair wires, do not untwist the wires more than necessary to make the repair. If the individual terminals are damaged on any GMLAN connection, use the appropriate connector repair procedure in order to repair the terminal. Refer to Connector Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Connector Repairs) for the appropriate connector repair procedure. GMLAN Wire Repair Note: Refer to Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Wiring Repairs) in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gauge size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and EL-38125-10 - tool. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the DuraSeal splice sleeves. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6991 Note: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: * Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. * Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. * Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert to regional wiring gauge size. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the EL-38125-10 - tool in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the splice sleeve crimp tool. The crimp tool has four nests, one for each color. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6992 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs Caution: Do not solder repairs under any circumstances as this could result in the air reference being obstructed. If the heated oxygen sensor pigtail wiring, connector, or terminal is damaged the entire oxygen sensor assembly must be replaced. Do not attempt to repair the wiring, connector, or terminals. In order for the sensor to function properly it must have a clean air reference. This clean air reference is obtained by way of the oxygen sensor signal and heater wires. Any attempt to repair the wires, connectors or terminals could result in the obstruction of the air reference and degrade oxygen sensor performance. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6993 The following guidelines should be used when servicing the heated oxygen sensor: * Do not apply contact cleaner or other materials to the sensor or vehicle harness connectors. These materials may get into the sensor, causing poor performance. Also, the sensor pigtail and harness wires must not be damaged in such a way that the wires inside are exposed. This could provide a path for foreign materials to enter the sensor and cause performance problems. * Neither the sensor nor vehicle lead wires should be bent sharply or kinked. Sharp bends, kinks, etc., could block the reference air path through the lead wire. * Do not remove or defeat the oxygen sensor ground wire (where applicable). Vehicles that utilize the ground wire sensor may rely on this ground as the only ground contact to the sensor. Removal of the ground wire will also cause poor engine performance. * To prevent damage due to water intrusion, be sure that the peripheral seal remains intact on the vehicle harness connector. High Temperature Wiring Repairs High Temperature Wiring Repairs Special Tools * EL-38125-10 - Splice Sleeve Crimping Tool * J 38125-5 - Ultra Torch * DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). High Temperature Wiring Wiring that is exposed to high temperatures, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time may use materials i.e. wires, connectors, and shielding that has a higher heat rating than typical wiring. When making a repair in a high temperature area observe the following: * Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature to replace any damaged wire. * Replace any heat shielding that is removed. * Cover any DuraSeal splice sleeves with SCT1 shrink tubing. * After making a wiring repair, ensure that the location of the wiring is not moved closer to the heat source. Identifying High Temperature Wiring Wiring that is exposed to high temperature, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time need special considerations when making wiring repairs. Areas that may be exposed to higher temperatures can be identified by heat resistant materials that are being used in those areas. These materials may include heat reflective tape, moon tape, and high temperature shrink tubing. Also conduit and other protective coverings may be used. Because conduit or similar coverings are used throughout the vehicle regardless of the temperature, it may be necessary for the technician to determine if an area is exposed to excessive heat before making a wiring repair. Obvious areas of consideration would be any area located near the exhaust manifolds, catalytic converter, and exhaust pipes. Items Required * DuraSeal splice sleeves to crimp and seal connections * High temperature SCT1 shrink tubing to protect the splice sleeves * Terminated leads or pigtails * The correct tools to remove the terminals from the connectors Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature of the same or larger gauge size as the original wire when repair damage wire. Also replace any reflective tape that you remove during the repair. High Temperature Wire Repair Note: Refer to Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Wiring Repairs) in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature rating of the same gauge size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the EL-38125-10 - tool and then encapsulate the splice sleeve using the high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6994 Note: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: * Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. * Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. * Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert to regional wiring gauge size. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Slide a section of high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing down the length of wire to be spliced. Ensure that the shrink tubing will not interfere with the splice procedure. 5. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 6. Use the EL-38125-10 - tool in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the splice sleeve crimp tool. The crimp tool has four nests, one for each color. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6995 7. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 8. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 9. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 10. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 11. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6996 12. Center the high temperature SCT1 shrink tube over the DuraSeal splice sleeve. 13. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the high temperature heat shrink tubing. 14. Gradually move the heat from the center to the open end of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. 15. Replace any reflective tape and clips that may have been remove during the repair. Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation If the wire insulation has been chafed, or broken, enough to show the conductive portion of the wire, and the wire is not damaged, determine the length of insulation that needs to be repaired. If the repair is less than 280 mm (11 in), cut the wire within the damaged area. Than slide the appropriate heat shrink tubing (listed below) over the wire, and repair the wire by splicing the wires together. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves). Once the wire is spliced together slide heat shrink tubing over the damaged area and apply heat to seal the repaired wire. If the wire is damaged, or the damaged area is larger than 280 mm (11 in), than replace the damaged wire by splicing in a new section of wire. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6997 SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs Special Tools * EL-38125-10 - Splice Sleeve Crimping Tool * J 38125-5 - Ultra Torch * DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: * A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. * A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides the necessary low resistance contact integrity for these sensitive, low energy circuits. The Supplemental Inflatable Restraint (SIR) System/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working with the SIR/SRS, and the wiring components, such as connectors and terminals. SIR/SRS Connector Repair (Plastic Body and Terminal Metal Pin) Note: Do not use the terminals in the kit in order to replace damaged SIR/SRS system terminals. Use either an SIR/SRS pigtail or a terminated lead from the SIR Repair Kit Tray. The terminals in the SIR/SRS system are made with a special plating. This plating provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. Pigtail repair packs are available for SIR/SRS connectors with eight or less terminals. Only the connector body is available for connectors with more than eight terminals. Terminated leads can be used to replace damaged terminals when replacing the connector body. SIR/SRS Component Wire Pigtail Repair Note: Do not make wire, connector, or terminal repairs on components with wire pigtails. A wire pigtail is a wire or wires attached directly to the device, not by a connector. If a wiring pigtail is damaged, you must replace the entire component, with pigtail. The inflatable restraint steering wheel module coil is an example of a pigtail component. SIR/SRS Wire Repair Note: Refer to Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Wiring Repairs) in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6998 If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gauge size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and EL-38125-10 - tool. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the DuraSeal splice sleeves. Note: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: * Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. * Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. * Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert to regional wiring gauge size. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the EL-38125-10 - tool in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the splice sleeve crimp tool. The crimp tool has four nests, one for each color. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6999 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Connector Position Assurance (CPA) The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of a connector. CPAs are used in all SIR System connectors and also in some connectors of other systems. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals of a connection. Terminal Position Assurance (TPA) The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7000 Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Special Tools * EL-38125-10 - Splice Sleeve Crimping Tool * J 38125-5 - Ultra Torch * DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Note: Use only DuraSeal splice sleeves. Other splice sleeves may not protect the splice from moisture or provide a good electrical connection. Use DuraSeal splice sleeves to form a one-to-one splice on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. Use DuraSeal splice sleeves where there is special requirements such as moisture sealing. Follow the instructions below in order to splice copper wire using DuraSeal splice sleeves. Note: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: * Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. * Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. * Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert to regional wiring gauge size. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7001 5. Use the EL-38125-10 - tool in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the splice sleeve crimp tool. The crimp tool has four nests, one for each color. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7002 * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Splicing Inline Harness Diodes Splicing Inline Harness Diodes Many vehicle electrical systems use a diode to isolate circuits and protect the components from voltage spikes. When installing a new diode use the following procedure. 1. Open the harness. * If the harness is taped, remove the tape. * To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing seam ripper (available from sewing supply stores) in order to cut open the harness. * If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the diode. 2. If the diode is taped to the harness, remove all of the tape. 3. Check and record the current flow direction and orientation of diode. 4. Remove the inoperative diode from the harness with a suitable soldering tool. Note: If the diode is located next to a connector terminal remove the terminal(s) from the connector to prevent damage from the soldering tool. 5. Carefully strip away a section of insulation next to the old soldered portion of the wire(s). Do not remove any more than is needed to attach the new diode. 6. Check current flow direction of the new diode, being sure to install the diode with correct bias. Reference the appropriate service manual wiring schematic to obtain the correct diode installation position. 7. Attach the new diode to the wire(s) using 60/40 rosin core solder. Before soldering attach some heat sinks (aluminum alligator clips) across the diode wire ends to protect the diode from excessive heat. Follow the manufacturer's instruction for the soldering equipment. 8. Reinstall terminal(s) into the connector body if previously removed. Note: To prevent shorts to ground and water intrusion, completely cover all exposed wire and diode attachment points with tape. 9. Tape the diode to the harness or connector using electrical tape. Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable Twisted/shielded cable is used in order to protect wiring from electrical noise. Two-conductor cable of this construction is used between the radio and the Delco-Bose(R) speaker/amplifier units and other applications where low level, sensitive signals must be carried. Follow the instructions below in order to repair the twisted/shielded cable. 1. Remove the outer jacket (1). Use care not to cut into the drain wire of the mylar tape. 2. Unwrap the tape. Do not remove the tape. Use the tape in order to rewrap the twisted conductors after the splice is made. 3. Prepare the splice. Untwist the conductors and follow the instructions for Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves). Staggering the splices by 65 mm (2.5 in) is recommended. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7003 Note: Apply the mylar tape with the aluminum side inward. This ensures good electrical contact with the drain wire. 4. Re-assemble the cable. * Rewrap the conductors with the mylar tape. If the mylar tape is damaged, use 3M product AL-36FR to replace the damaged mylar tape. * Use caution not to wrap the drain wire in the tape (1). * Follow the splicing instructions for copper wire and splice the drain wire. * Wrap the drain wire around the conductors and tape with electrical tape to replace the outer insulation. 5. Tape over the entire cable. Use a winding motion when you apply the tape. Wiring Repairs Wiring Repairs The Wiring Repairs section contains the following types of wiring repair information. Using these elements together will make wiring repair faster and easier: * Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections) * Flat Wire Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Flat Wire Repairs) * GMLAN Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/GMLAN Wiring Repairs) * High Temperature Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/High Temperature Wiring Repairs) * Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs) * Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves) * Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable) * Splicing Inline Harness Diodes (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Inline Harness Diodes) * SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs) US English/Metric Conversion US English/Metric Conversion Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7004 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7005 Basic Digital Multimeter Requirements Basic Digital Multimeter Requirements Digital Multimeter (DMM) Basic Requirements Service information is validated using digital multimeters that meet or exceed the following requirements. Using a multimeter that does not meet these basic requirements may give inaccurate readings which could lead to an incorrect diagnosis. Display and Settings 1. Four digits displayed 2. Voltage, amperage, resistance, frequency, diode test settings, and min-max function 3. Display positive and negative values Voltage 1. Have at least 10 Mohm input impedance 2. Test a DC voltage range of 0.1-1000 V. 3. Test an AC voltage range of 0.1-1000 V. Amperage 1. Test a DC amperage range of 0.1µA-10 A. 2. Test an AC amperage range of 0.1µA-10 A. Resistance Test a resistance range of 0.1 ohm-40 Mohm and displays infinite for a value greater than 40 Mohm (O.L. (Over-load)) Frequency Test for a frequency range of 0.5 HZ-199 K HZ Diode Test 1. Apply at least 1 mA when performing the diode bias test 2. Display the break over voltage drop (0-3 V) of a forward biased diode 3. Display infinite (O.L. (Over-load)) when a diode is reverse biased Min-Max Readings 1. Can update at a 1 ms sample rate 2. Saves and displays minimum and maximum values Testing Ground and Low Reference Circuits Testing Ground and Low Reference Circuits Because a test lamp can light with up to 200 ohm in a ground or low reference circuit they are not recommended to be used for this type of test. A low impedance test lamp can light and indicate the circuit is good when there is as much as 20-30 ohm present, while a high impedance test lamp can light with up to 200 ohm present in the circuit. This is why the Digital Multi-Meter (DMM) is used when validating a ground or low reference circuit continuity. When using the DMM there are many vehicle conditions that can affect the ground and low reference continuity testing. If these conditions are not met, a ground or low reference circuit test can fail on a good circuit. This may cause longer diagnosis time and incorrect component replacement. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7006 Any current flow through a ground or low reference circuit, while being tested, will skew the DMM continuity reading, or display a reading higher than when there is no current flowing. Performing a ground or low reference circuit continuity test, in reference to the vehicles battery negative terminal, will have the highest risk of failing a good ground or low reference circuit test than any other ground reference point. The best ground test points would be a control module housing (if the control modules housing is metal and grounded), door jamb striker (if attached to metal), under dash metal frame work, engine block, or body ground studs (other than where the negative battery cable is attached). A typical DMM ground or low reference circuit continuity reading can be as high as 100 ohm with the ignition ON, and drop to 15-25 ohm after the ignition is turned OFF. The reading will drop below 10 ohm after 30-40 seconds, then below 5 ohm after 60 seconds. Once the vehicle completely goes to sleep (generally 3-10 minutes) the reading will drop below 0.3 ohm. The following list of conditions may need to be met to ensure a valid continuity reading on a ground or low reference circuit: * Ignition OFF * Key out of the ignition switch (when not equipped with keyless entry and remote start) * Retained Accessory Power (RAP) OFF (open and close the driver door after ignition OFF) * Battery charger set at a 2 A or less charge rate * Scan tool not communicating with any vehicle control module (in some cases it may need to be disconnected from the DLC) * All entry doors closed * Headlamps OFF (auto headlamps disabled) * Any delay lighting OFF * HVAC after blow OFF * Any accessory that can work when the ignition is OFF * Wait up to 60 seconds (after all other listed conditions are met) Activating the DOOR LOCK function with a key fob can greatly reduce the time to achieve a valid ground or low reference continuity test result. Terminal Wiring Repair Terminal Wiring Repair Special Tools * EL-38125-10 - Splice Sleeve Crimp Tool * EL-38125-580 - Terminal Release Tool Kit * J-38125-5 - Ultra Torch * EL-35616 - Connector Test Adapter Kit For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Note: All repairs near the engine manifold, turbo engine and all exhaust pipes should follow the High Temperature Wiring Repair procedures. 1. Find the appropriate connector end view within the connector end view section. The connector end view has the following information: * Diagnostic probe tool * Terminal release tool * Terminal/terminated lead part numbers 2. Determine if a terminal is damaged. Note: Not using the proper test kit probe may cause damage to the terminal(s) that are probed. * Locate the diagnostic probe tool from the connector end view. The connector end view describes the color and part number to help the technician find and use the correct tool. * Connect the probe tool to the Digital Multimeter. * Insert the probe tool into the cavity and follow the procedures from the Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter). 3. Disconnect the connector body to perform the repair. Note: Several procedures for specific connector bodies are called out in Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Wiring Repairs). Use the following repair procedures to repair the following terminals: Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7007 Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack))Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Push to Seat))Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Pull to Seat))Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W))Delphi Connectors (Micro.64) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Micro .64) )Delphi Connectors (12-Way) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (12-Way))Delphi Connectors (Steering Gear) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Steering Gear)) * The TPA and CPA should be removed before releasing the terminal for the connector body. * Look at the connector end view to locate the cavity of the damaged terminal and find the proper terminal release tool from the terminal release tool kit. Note: Using the incorrect terminal release tool can damage the connector body. * Insert the terminal release tool into the cavity. Note: Some terminals have a lever that must be disengaged before the terminal can be released. Gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Terminated Lead Repair Terminated Lead Repair Special Tools * EL-38125-10 - Splice Sleeve Crimp Tool * EL-38125-580 - Terminal Release Tool Kit * J-38125-5 - Ultra Torch * EL-35616 - Connector Test Adapter Kit For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Note: All repairs near the engine manifold, turbo engine and all exhaust pipes should follow the High Temperature Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/High Temperature Wiring Repairs) procedures. Terminated leads are terminals that are crimped onto wires. The terminated lead can be used throughout the vehicle since it is designed for temperatures up to 150°C. The length of the wire is 450 mm. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7008 The DuraSeal splice sleeve has the following 2 critical features: * A special heat shrink tubing that environmentally seals the splice. The shrink tubing contains a sealing adhesive inside the shrink tubing. * A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp that provides the necessary contact integrity for sensitive low energy circuits. 1. Use the connector end view to identify the correct terminated lead. 2. The terminated lead package should include a DuraSeal splice sleeve. If not, use the chart to identify the correct part. 3. Open the harness by removing any tape: Use a sewing seam ripper, or a comparable tool, to cut open the harness, to avoid wire insulation damage. 4. Depending on how many terminals need repairs, cut the terminal and wire back at least 40 mm. Try to keep the harness wire length the same. If more than one terminated lead is required, stagger the lengths by 40 mm. This helps reduce the bundle size of the wire harness. 5. Use the EL-38125-10 - tool in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the splice sleeve crimp tool. The crimp tool has four nests, one for each color. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7009 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the J-38125-5 - ultra torch , apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7010 Shift Solenoid: Exploded Views Disassembled Views Disassembled Views Case and Associated Parts 1 - Control Valve Body Cover Bolt 2 - Control Valve Body Cover Assembly 3 - Control Valve Body Cover Gasket 4 - Control Valve Body Bolt 5 - Control Valve Body Cover Hole Seal 6 - Control Solenoid Valve Heat Sink Bolt 7 - Control Solenoid (w/Body and TCM) Valve Assembly 8 - Control Valve Body Filter Plate Assembly 9 - Control Valve Body Bolt 10 - Control Valve Body Bolt 11 Control Valve Body Assembly 12 - Control Valve Body Spacer Plate Assembly 13 - A/Trans Fluid Level Control Valve 14 - A/Trans Fluid Level Control Valve Gasket 15 - A/Trans Output Speed Sensor Bolt Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7011 16 - A/Trans Output Speed Sensor Assembly 17 - Manual Shaft Detent Spring Bolt 18 - Manual Shaft Detent Lever Spring Assembly 19 - A/Trans Input Speed Sensor Assembly 20 - A/Trans Input Speed Sensor Assembly O-Ring Seal 21 - A/Trans Input Speed Sensor Bolt 22 - Fill Cap 23 - Fill Cap Seal 24 - Torque Converter Housing Gasket 25 - A/Trans Fluid Pump Seal Assembly 26 Torque Converter with Fluid Pump Housing Assembly 27 - Torque Converter and Differential Housing Bolt 28 - A/Trans Fluid Fill Tube Plug Assembly 29 - Torque Converter Assembly Control Valve Body Assembly (1 of 2) 400 - Control Valve Body Bolt 401 - Control Solenoid Valve Support 402 - Valve Channel Plate 403 - Channel Plate to Valve Body Spacer Plate Assembly 404 - Control Valve Body Ball Check Valve 405 - Control Valve Body Assembly Component Location Component Location Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7012 1 - Reaction Carrier Assembly 2 - Control Valve Body Assembly 3 - Input Carrier Assembly 4 Valve Channel Plate 5 - Output Carrier Assembly 6 - Park Gear 7 - Control Solenoid (w/Body and TCM) Valve Assembly 8 - Drive Link Assembly 9 - Drive Sprocket 10 - Torque Converter Assembly 11 - A/Trans Fluid Pump Assembly 12 - Differential Carrier Assembly 13 - Front Differential Ring Gear 14 - Driven Sprocket 15 - 1-2-3-4 Clutch Assembly 16 - Low and Reverse Clutch Assembly 17 - 2-6 Clutch Assembly 18 - 3-5 Reverse Clutch Assembly 19 - 4-5-6 Clutch Assembly 20 A/Trans Input Speed Sensor Assembly 21 - Reaction Sun Gear Assembly Component Location Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7013 Component Location Component Locations 1 - Manual Shift Detent Lever Assembly (w/Shaft Position Switch) 2 - Trans Fluid Level Indicator 3 Reaction Carrier Assembly 4 - Output Speed Sensor 5 - Input Carrier Assembly 6 - Output Carrier Assembly 7 - Front Differential Transfer Drive Gear 8 - Front Differential Transfer Drive Gear Support Assembly 9 - Torque Converter Assembly 10 - Park Pawl Actuator Assembly 11 - Fluid Pump Drive Link Assembly 12 - Park Pawl 13 - Front Differential Transfer Driven Gear 14 - Front Differential Drive Pinion Gear 15 - Park Gear 16 - Torque Converter and Support and Fluid Pump Housing Assembly 17 - Front Differential Carrier Assembly 18 - Front Differential Carrier Baffle 19 Front Differential Ring Gear Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7014 20 - Front Differential Drive Pinion Gear Lube Tube 21 - 1-2-3-4 Clutch Assembly 22 - Low and Reverse Clutch Assembly (OWC) 23 - Low and Reverse Clutch 24 - 2-6 Clutch Assembly 25 3-5-Reverse Clutch Assembly 26 - 4-5-6 Clutch Assembly 27 - Input Speed Sensor 28 - Case Cover Assembly 29 - Control Valve Body Cover 30 - Input Shaft Speed Sensor Reluctor Wheel 31 Control Valve Lower Body Assembly 32 - Control Valve Upper Body Assembly 33 - Control Valve Channel Plate Assembly 34 - Control Solenoid Valve Assembly (w/Body and TCM) 35 - Manual Valve Disassembled Views Disassembled Views Case and Associated Parts Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7015 1 - Control Valve Body Cover Assembly 2 - Transmission Fluid Level Indicator Assembly 3 - Fluid Level Indicator Tube - Model Dependent 4 - Fluid Level Indicator Tube Seal - Model Dependent 5 - Control Valve Body Cover Assembly Gasket 6 - Control Valve Body Cover Stud 7 - Control Valve Body Cover Bolt 8 - Control Valve Body Bolt 9 - Control Valve Body Bolt 10 - Control Valve Body Cover Wiring Connector Hole Seal 11 - Control Solenoid Valve Spring 12 - Control Valve Body Bolt 13 - Control Valve Body Bolt 14 - Control Valve Body Bolt 15 - Control Solenoid (w/Body and TCM) Valve Assembly 16 - Control Solenoid (w/Body and TCM) Filter Plate Assembly 17 - Manual Shaft Detent Assembly 18 - Control Valve Body Assembly 19 - A/Trans Output Speed Sensor Assembly 20 - A/Trans Output Speed Sensor Bolt 21 - A/Trans Case Assembly 22 - Torque Converter Housing Outer Seal 23 - Front Differential Drive Pinion (w/Transfer Gear) Gear Assembly 24 Front Differential Drive Pinion Gear Lube Tube 25 - Torque Converter and Support and A/Trans Fluid Pump Housing Assembly 26 - Torque Converter and Differential Housing Bolt 27 - Torque Converter Assembly 28 - Dust Cover Push Pin - Model Dependent 29 - Dust Cover Bolt - Model Dependent 30 - Dust Cover - Model Dependent 31 - Front Differential Carrier Assembly 32 - Input Shaft Thrust Bearing Assembly 33 - A/Trans Case Cover Gasket 34 - A/Trans Case Cover Assembly 35 - A/Trans Case Cover Assembly Bolt Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7016 Shift Solenoid: Connector Views Q8 Control Solenoid Valve Assembly X1 (MH7 or MHC) Q8 Control Solenoid Valve Assembly X1 (MH2 or MH4) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7017 Q8 Control Solenoid Valve Assembly X2 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7018 Q8 Control Solenoid Valve Assembly X3 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7019 Q8 Control Solenoid Valve Assembly X4 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7020 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission Shift Solenoid: Service and Repair 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission Control Solenoid Valve and Transmission Control Module Assembly Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the transmission control valve body cover. Refer to Control Valve Body Cover Replacement (See: Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Valve Body/Service and Repair/6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission/Control Valve Body Cover Replacement). 2. Disconnect the input speed sensor electrical connector (1). 3. Disconnect the output speed sensor electrical connector (2). 4. Disconnect the shift position switch electrical connector (3). 5. Remove the 3 control valve body bolts (1) M5 x 40.5. 6. Remove the 12 control valve body bolts (2) M6 x 97. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 7023 7. Remove the control solenoid valve assembly (3) with transmission control module. Caution: Use care when removing or installing the filter plate assembly. A broken or missing retaining tab may not adequately secure the filter plate to the control solenoid valve assembly, resulting in possible damage or contamination. 8. Remove the control solenoid valve assembly filter plate (4). Discard the filter plate. It is not reusable. 9. Inspect the channel plate bolt pass through holes for damage or brinelling. Any damage will cause incorrect pressure switch operation. Replace as necessary. Installation Procedure Caution: Use care when removing or installing the filter plate assembly. A broken or missing retaining tab may not adequately secure the filter plate to the control solenoid valve assembly, resulting in possible damage or contamination. 1. Install a NEW control solenoid valve assembly filter plate (4) to prevent fluid leaks past the fluid seals. 2. Install the control solenoid valve assembly (3) with transmission control module. 3. Hand start the control valve body bolts (1, 2). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 7024 Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener Caution). 4. Secure the 12 control valve body bolts (2) M6 x 97 and tighten in sequence to 10 Nm (89 lb in). 5. Secure the 3 control valve body bolts (1) M5 x 40.5 and tighten in sequence to 8 Nm (71 lb in). 6. Connect the input speed sensor electrical connector (1). 7. Connect the output speed sensor electrical connector (2). 8. Connect the shift position switch electrical connector (3). 9. Install the transmission control valve body cover. Refer to Control Valve Body Cover Replacement (See: Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Valve Body/Service and Repair/6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission/Control Valve Body Cover Replacement). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 7025 Shift Solenoid: Service and Repair 6T70/6T75 - Automatic Transmission Control Solenoid Valve and Transmission Control Module Assembly Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the control valve body cover. Refer to Control Valve Body Cover Replacement (See: Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Valve Body/Service and Repair/6T70/6T75 - Automatic Transmission/Control Valve Body Cover Replacement). 2. Disconnect the input speed sensor electrical connector (1). 3. Disconnect the output speed sensor electrical connector (2). 4. Disconnect the shift position switch electrical connector (3). 5. Remove the 4 control valve body bolts (1) M6 x 80. 6. Position the control solenoid valve spring (8) to the side. Spring will be released with the removal of the control valve body assembly. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 7026 7. Remove the 2 control valve body bolts (4) M6 x 65. 8. Remove the control valve body bolt (3) M6 x 42. 9. Remove the 3 control valve body bolts (2) M6 x 95. 10. Remove the control valve body bolt (7) M6 x 55. 11. Remove the control solenoid valve body and transmission control module (TCM) assembly (5). Caution: Use care when removing or installing the filter plate assembly. A broken or missing retaining tab may not adequately secure the filter plate to the control solenoid valve assembly, resulting in possible damage or contamination. 12. Remove the control solenoid valve assembly filter plate (6). * Discard the filler plate. It is not reusable. * Inspect the pressure switch manifold seals for damage or contamination. Replace the control solenoid valve assembly as necessary. * Inspect the upper channel plate bolt holes for damage, peening or burnelling. Any damage around the bolt holes near the pressure control switch (PCS) feed holes could cause leakage around the PCS seals. Replace the upper channel plate as necessary. Installation Procedure Caution: Use care when removing or installing the filter plate assembly. A broken or missing retaining tab may not adequately secure the filter plate to the control solenoid valve assembly, resulting in possible damage or contamination. 1. Install a NEW control solenoid valve assembly filter plate (1). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 7027 2. Install the control solenoid valve body and TCM assembly (5). 3. Rotate the control solenoid valve spring (7) into position. Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener Caution). Note: Install all bolts before tightening, then tighten in specified sequence. 4. Install the 4 control valve body bolts (1) M6 x 80. 5. Install the control valve body bolt (6) M6 x 55. 6. Install the 3 control valve body bolts (2) M6 x 95. 7. Install the control valve body bolt (3) M6 x 42. 8. Install the 2 control valve body bolts (4) M6 x 65 and tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb in). 9. Connect the input speed sensor electrical connector (1). 10. Connect the output speed sensor electrical connector (2). 11. Connect the shift position switch electrical connector (3). 12. Install the control valve body cover. Refer to Control Valve Body Cover Replacement (See: Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Valve Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 7028 Body/Service and Repair/6T70/6T75 - Automatic Transmission/Control Valve Body Cover Replacement). 13. For transmission control module programming and setup. Refer to Control Module References (See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning). Note: After an internal transmission repair or internal part replacement the service fast learn adapt procedure should be performed. 14. Perform the transmission adaptive values learn procedure. Refer to Transmission Adaptive Values Learn (See: Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/6T30/6T40/6T45 Automatic Transmission). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid: Diagram Information and Instructions Electrical Schematic Symbols Electrical Schematic Symbols Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7033 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7034 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7035 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7036 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7037 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7038 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7039 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7040 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7041 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7042 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7043 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7044 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7045 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7046 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7047 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7048 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7049 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7050 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7051 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7052 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7053 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7054 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7055 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7056 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7057 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7058 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7059 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7060 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7061 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7062 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7063 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7064 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7065 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7066 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7067 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7068 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7069 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7070 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7071 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7072 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7073 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7074 General Electrical Diagnosis General Electrical Diagnosis Basic Knowledge Required Without a basic knowledge of electricity, it will be difficult to use the diagnostic procedures contained in the service manual. You should understand the basic theory of electricity, and know the meaning of voltage (V), current (A), and resistance (Ohms ). You should also be able to read and understand a wiring diagram, as well as understand what happens in a circuit with an open or a shorted wire. Vehicle Zoning Strategy Vehicle Zoning Strategy All grounds, in-line connectors, and splices have identifying numbers that correspond to where they are located in the vehicle. The following table explains the numbering system. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7075 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7076 Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid: Diagnostic Aids Arrows and Symbols Arrows and Symbols This service manual uses various symbols in order to describe different service operations. 1 - Front of Vehicle 2 - View Detail 2 - View Detail 3 - Ambient Air Mixed with Another Gas or Indicate Temperature Change 4 - Motion or Direction 5 - View Angle 6 - Dimension (1:2) 7 Ambient/Clean Air Flow or Cool Air Flow 8 - Lubrication Point - Oil or Fluid 9 - Task Related 10 Sectioning (1:3) 11 - Gas Other Than Ambient Air or Hot Air Flow 12 - Lubrication Point - Grease or Jelly 13 - Multidirectional Arrow Decimal and Metric Equivalents Decimal and Metric Equivalents Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7077 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7078 Checking Aftermarket Accessories Checking Aftermarket Accessories Warning: Refer to SIR Warning (See: Restraint Systems/Service Precautions/SIR Warning). Caution: The OBD II symbol is used on the circuit diagrams in order to alert the technician that the circuit is essential for proper OBD II emission control circuit operation. Any circuit which fails and causes the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) to turn ON, or causes emissions-related component damage, is identified as an OBD II circuit. Do not connect aftermarket accessories into the following circuits: * SIR circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the SIR symbol. * OBD II circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the OBD II symbol. Always check for aftermarket accessories (non-OEM) as the first step in diagnosing electrical problems. If the vehicle is so equipped, disconnect the system to verify that these add-on accessories are not the cause of the problems. Possible causes of vehicle problems related to aftermarket accessories include: * Power feeds connected to points other than the battery * Antenna location * Transceiver wiring located too close to vehicle electronic modules or wiring * Poor shielding or poor connectors on antenna feed line * Check for recent service bulletins detailing installation guidelines for aftermarket accessories. Circuit Testing Circuit Testing The Circuit Testing section contains the following diagnostic testing information. Using this information along with the diagnostic procedures will identify the cause of the electrical malfunction. * Using Connector Test Adapters (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Using Connector Test Adapters) * Probing Electrical Connectors (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Probing Electrical Connectors) * Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7079 Procedures/Circuit Testing/Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter) * Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp) * Using Fused Jumper Wires (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Using Fused Jumper Wires) * Measuring Voltage (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Measuring Voltage) * Measuring Voltage Drop (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Measuring Voltage Drop) * Measuring Frequency (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Measuring Frequency) * Testing Ground and Low Reference Circuits (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Testing Ground and Low Reference Circuits) * Testing for Continuity (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Continuity) * Testing for Short to Ground (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Short to Ground) * Testing for a Short to Voltage (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for a Short to Voltage) * Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections) * Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions) * Testing for Electrical Intermittents (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Electrical Intermittents) * Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure) * Circuit Protection - Fuses (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Circuit Protection - Fuses) * Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers) * Circuit Protection - Fusible Links (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Circuit Protection - Fusible Links) Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp Special Tools EL-35616-200 - Test Light - Probe Kit For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test Probe Caution). A test lamp can simply and quickly test a low impedance circuit for voltage. A Digital Multimeter (DMM) should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present if the impedance is low enough, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. In other words, if there is not enough current, the test lamp will not illuminate even though voltage is present. The EL-35616-200 - kit is Micro-Pack compatible and comprised of a 12-volt light bulb with an attached pair of leads. To properly operate this tool use the following procedures. When testing for voltage: 1. Attach one lead to ground. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is voltage at the point being tested. When testing for ground: 1. Attach one lead to battery positive voltage. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where ground should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is ground at the point being tested. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7080 Testing for a Short to Voltage Testing for a Short to Voltage Special Tools EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM) For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test Probe Caution). The following procedure tests for a short to voltage in a circuit. 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Set the rotary dial of the Digital Multimeter (DMM) to the V (DC) position. 4. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. Turn ON the ignition and operate all accessories. 7. If the voltage measured is greater than 1 V, there is a short to voltage in the circuit. Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions Special Tools J-25070 - Heat Gun For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Many intermittent open or shorted circuits are affected by harness/connector movement that is caused by vibration, engine torque, bumps/rough pavement, etc. In order to duplicate the customer's concern, it may be necessary to manipulate the wiring harness if the malfunction appears to be vibration related. Manipulation of a circuit can consist of a wide variety of actions, including: * Wiggling the harness * Disconnecting a connector and reconnecting * Stressing the mechanical connection of a connector * Pulling on the harness or wire in order to identify a separation/break inside the insulation * Relocating a harness or wires All these actions should be performed with some goal in mind. For instance, with a scan tool connected, wiggling the wires may uncover a faulty input to the control module. The snapshot option would be appropriate here. Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure). Another option is, with the component commanded ON and OFF by the scan tool, move related connectors and wiring and observe the component operation. With the engine running, move related connectors and wiring while monitoring engine operation. If harness or connector movement affects the data displayed, component/system operation, or engine operation, inspect and repair the harness/connections as necessary. You may need to load the vehicle in order to duplicate the concern. This may require the use of weights, floor jacks, jackstands, frame machines, etc. In these cases you are attempting to duplicate the concern by manipulating the suspension or frame. This method is useful in finding harnesses that are too short and their connectors pull apart enough to cause a poor connection. A DMM set to Peak Min/Max mode and connected to the suspect circuit while testing can yield desirable results. Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Electrical Intermittents). Certainly, using the senses of sight, smell, and hearing while manipulating the circuit can provide good results as well. There may be instances where circuit manipulation alone will not meet the required criteria for the fault condition to appear. In such cases it may be necessary to expose the suspect circuit to other conditions while manipulating the harness. Such conditions would include high moisture conditions, along with exceptionally high or low temperatures. The following discusses how to expose the circuit to these kinds of conditions. Salt Water Spray Some compounds possess the ability to conduct electricity when dissolved in water such as ordinary salt. By mixing table salt with water in sufficient Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7081 quantities, you can enhance the conductive properties of water so that any circuit which may be sensitive to moisture will more readily fail when liberally sprayed with this mixture. Mixing 0.35L (12 oz) of water with approximately 1 tablespoon of salt will yield a salt solution of 5 percent. Fill a normal spray bottle with this mixture. This mixture is sufficient to enhance the water's own conductivity. This may cause the circuit to fail more easily when sprayed. Once the mixture is completed, spray the suspect area liberally with the solution. Then, while monitoring either a scan tool or DMM, manipulate the harness as discussed previously. High Temperature Conditions If the complaint tends to be heat related, you can simulate the condition using the J-25070 - heat gun. Using the heat gun, you can heat up the suspected area or component. Manipulate the harnesses under high temperature conditions while monitoring the scan tool or DMM to locate the fault condition. The high temperature condition may be achieved simply by test driving the vehicle at normal operating temperature. If a heat gun is unavailable, consider this option to enhance your diagnosis. This option does not allow for the same control, however. Low Temperature Conditions Depending on the nature of the fault condition, placing a fan in front of the vehicle while the vehicle is in the shade can have the desired effect. If this is unsuccessful, use local cooling treatments such as ice or a venturi type nozzle (one that provides hot or cold air). This type of tool is capable of producing air stream temperatures down to -18°C (0°F) from one end and +71°C (160°F) from the other. This is ideally suited for localized cooling needs. Once the vehicle, component, or harness has been sufficiently cooled, manipulate the harness or components in an effort to duplicate the concern. Duplicating Failure Conditions * If none of the previous tests are successful, attempt to duplicate and/or capture the failure conditions. * Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, where applicable, contains the conditions that were present when the DTC set. 1. Review and record Freeze Frame/Failure Records data. 2. Clear the DTCs using the scan tool. 3. Turn the key to OFF and wait 15 seconds. 4. Operate the vehicle under the same conditions that were noted in Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, as closely as possible. The vehicle must also be operating within the Conditions for Running the DTC. Refer to Conditions for Running the DTC in the supporting text if a DTC is being diagnosed. 5. Monitor DTC Status for the DTC being tested. The scan tool will indicate Ran, when the enabling conditions have been satisfied long enough for the DTC to run. The scan tool will also indicate whether the DTC passed or failed. * An alternate method is to drive the vehicle with the DMM connected to a suspected circuit. An abnormal reading on the DMM when the concern occurs, may help you locate the concern. Measuring Frequency Measuring Frequency Special Tools EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM) For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test Probe Caution). The following procedure determines the frequency of a signal. Note: Connecting the Digital Multimeter (DMM) to the circuit before pressing the Hz button will allow the DMM to autorange to an appropriate range. 1. Apply power to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (AC) position. 3. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7082 5. Press the Hz button on the DMM. 6. The DMM will display the frequency measured. Measuring Voltage Measuring Voltage Special Tools EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM) For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test Probe Caution). The following procedure measures the voltage at a selected point in a circuit. 1. Disconnect the electrical harness connector for the circuit being tested, if necessary. 2. Enable the circuit and/or system being tested. Use the following methods: * Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. * Turn ON the engine. * Turn ON the circuit and/or system with a scan tool in Output Controls. * Turn ON the switch for the circuit and/or system being tested. 3. Select the V (AC) or V (DC) position on the Digital Multimeter (DMM). 4. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the point of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. The DMM displays the voltage measured at that point. Measuring Voltage Drop Measuring Voltage Drop Special Tools EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM) For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test Probe Caution). The following procedure determines the difference in voltage potential between 2 points. 1. Set the rotary dial of the Digital Multimeter (DMM) to the V (DC) position. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7083 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to one point of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to the other point of the circuit. 4. Operate the circuit. 5. The DMM displays the difference in voltage between the 2 points. Probing Electrical Connectors Probing Electrical Connectors Note: Always be sure to reinstall the connector position assurance (CPA) and terminal position assurance (TPA) when reconnecting connectors or replacing terminals. Front probe Disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the mating side (front) of the connector. Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test Probe Caution). Note: When probing female 0.64 terminals, it is important to use the correct adapter. There have been some revisions to the test adapter for 0.64 terminals. The proper adapter for 0.64 terminals is the EL-35616-64B which has a gold terminal and a black wire between the base and tip. Failure to use the proper test adapter may result in damage to the terminal being tested and improper diagnosis. Note: The proper adapter for probing the terminals for fuses, relays, or diodes in an electrical center is EL-35616-35. Using any other tool or adapter may damage the terminal being tested. Refer to the following table as a guide in selecting the correct test adapter for front probing connectors: Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7084 Backprobe Note: * Backprobe connector terminals only when specifically required in diagnostic procedures. * Do not backprobe a sealed (Weather Pack(R)) connector, less than a 280 series Metri-Pack connector, a Micro-Pack connector, or a flat wire (dock and lock) connector. * Backprobing can be a source of damage to connector terminals. Use care in order to avoid deforming the terminal, either by forcing the test probe too far into the cavity or by using too large of a test probe. * After backprobing any connector, inspect for terminal damage. If terminal damage is suspected, test for proper terminal contact. Do not disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the harness side (back) of the connector. Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure Using Snapshots in Global Diagnostic System (GDS) Overview Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7085 A snapshot is a recording of what a control module on the vehicle was receiving for information while the snapshot is being made. A snapshot may be used to analyze the data during the time a vehicle condition is current. This allows you to concentrate on making the condition occur, rather than trying to view all the data in anticipation of the fault. To record a snapshot in GDS, select, Record Snapshot, from the options at the top right portion of any of the various pages that allow snapshots to be taken (e.g. Data Display, Control Functions, etc.). When you are finished recording, select, Stop Snapshot recording. The snapshot will now be available for replay. Snapshot Replay The Snapshot Replay function allows reviews of previously recorded vehicle snapshot data. This information can be used in analysis of vehicle problems and detection of trigger error conditions. The graph function can be used to compare parameters to see if a component is functioning properly. Recorded snapshots can be selected for viewing by the following three methods: * Selecting a snapshot file from the Vehicle Home Page and clicking on the Review selection. * Double clicking on the selected snapshot from the Vehicle Home Page. * Entering the Tools selection from the Menu selection and selecting Snapshot replay. Next, open the Snapshot Manager. Double click on the snapshot file you wish to view or click on the Load Snapshot selection and select a snapshot file. Regardless of selection method, a File Loaded pop-up window will be displayed from the Snapshot Replay screen. Select OK from the pop-up window. Snapshot Play Functions There are several snapshot play functions that are used to replay recorded snapshots * The Play function is used to play the snapshot forward by clicking on this selection. A marker will move across the screen when this selection is used. All selections in this area turn grey when they are active. * The Pause function is used to pause play of the snapshot. When this selection is clicked a second time the snapshot will start playing where it left off. * The Stop function is used to stop playing the snapshot. The snapshot will start from the beginning, if Play is selected after using the Stop function. Time Control Time control is used to control the snapshot replay. This function allows selection of a specific time frame, display of different views, and control of display speed. The following functions can be selected directly under Time Control. * The Bookmark selection allows you to add a specific comment in the current display and return to this point in the future. When this option is selected, a pop-up window is displayed. Enter a bookmark name and select OK. * The Note Pad can be selected to add comments to the snapshot replay file at the current point of time. When this option is selected, a pop-up window is displayed. Enter a comment for the snapshot file and select OK. * The Load Snapshot (blue folder) opens a snapshot file and makes it ready for further analysis. This function is also available by clicking on an available snapshot file from the Snapshot Manager. * The Down Arrow displays all Time Control options when selected. Individual options can also be selected by clicking on the item you want. * The Snapshot Display Speed can be controlled by selecting this option. Slow speeds of 1/8X, 1/4X, and 1/2X can be selected. The real time speed can also be selected at 1. Faster speeds of 2X, 4X, and 8X can also be obtained by using this selection. View Selections Each View Selection provides a different way of displaying vehicle data for analysis. The following functions can be selected under Available Views: Note: The parameter name will be shown in the original language used for capture if no translation is available for the name. * Parameter List View - Displays incoming information from the snapshot file. The current value of the parameters is displayed on the screen. * Log View - Contains all the information from the snapshot file. All parameter values are listed in the order they were recorded. Specific parameters can be added or removed from a watchlist by clicking on the appropriate item. * State View - Shows the values of all parameters in a specific time frame. These values can be used for comparison with the trigger view. * Trigger View - Displays all system and user defined triggers. This function can be used when there is a combination of factors involved in a diagnostic problem. When a Trigger condition is met a caution triangle will be displayed on the screen. Triggers: * Load Triggers - Allows you to load a file containing trigger definitions. * Save Triggers - Allows you to save the trigger to your computer's hard drive. * Remove Trigger - Allows you to remove the current trigger. It will no longer be present. * Edit Trigger - Displays a pop-up window where you can modify the limits and parameters contained within a trigger. * Adds Trigger - Displays a pop-up window to configure a trigger. * DTC View - After the Play function is selected and this option is selected this function opens the list of recorded DTCs. * Line Graph View - Displays data that can be visualized against the time-axis. From this view, specific parameters can be selected for graphing by Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7086 checking the box under Selected. At the bottom of the graph there are four functions Zoom In (increase size), Zoom Out (decrease size), Bookmarks, and Pause Scrolling. Each of these functions can be accessed by clicking on them. Testing for Continuity Testing for Continuity Special Tools EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM) For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test Probe Caution). The following procedures verify good continuity in a circuit. With a Digital Multimeter (DMM) 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the Ohms position. 2. Disconnect the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 3. Disconnect the load. 4. Press the MIN MAX button on the DMM. 5. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 6. Connect the other lead of the DMM to the other end of the circuit. 7. If the DMM displays low or no resistance, the circuit has good continuity. With a Test Lamp Note: Only use the test lamp procedure on low impedance power and ground circuits. 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect one lead of the test lamp to one end of the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 5. Connect the other end of the circuit to ground. 6. If the test lamp illuminates (full intensity), then the circuit has good continuity. Testing for Electrical Intermittents Testing for Electrical Intermittents Special Tools EL-39200 Digital Multimeter For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Perform the following procedures while wiggling the harness from side to side. Continue this at convenient points (about 6 inches apart) while watching the test equipment. * Testing for Short to Ground (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Short to Ground) * Testing for Continuity (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Continuity) * Testing for a Short to Voltage (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for a Short to Voltage) If the fault is not identified, perform the procedure below using the MIN MAX feature on the EL-39200 DMM. This feature allows you to manipulate the circuit without having to watch the EL-39200. The EL-39200 will generate an audible tone when a change is detected. Note: The EL-39200 must be used in order to perform the following procedure since the EL-39200 can monitor current, resistance or voltage while recording the minimum (MIN), and maximum (MAX) values measured. 1. Connect the EL-39200 to both sides of a suspected connector (still connected), or from one end of a suspected circuit to the other. Refer to Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7087 Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter) for information on connecting the EL-39200 to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the EL-39200 to the V (AC) or V (DC) position. 3. Press the range button of the EL-39200 in order to select the desired voltage range. 4. Press the MIN MAX button of the EL-39200. The EL-39200 displays 100 ms RECORD and emits an audible tone (beep). Note: The 100 ms RECORD mode is the length of time an input must stay at a new value in order to record the full change. 5. Simulate the condition that is potentially causing the intermittent connection, either by wiggling the connections or the wiring, test driving, or performing other operations. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions). 6. Listen for the audible Min Max Alert which indicates that a new minimum or maximum value has been recorded. 7. Press the MIN MAX button once in order to display the MAX value and note the value. 8. Press the MIN MAX button again in order to display the MIN value and note the value. 9. Determine the difference between the MIN and MAX values. * If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is 1 V or greater an intermittent open or high resistance condition exists. Repair the condition as necessary. * If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is less than 1 V, an intermittent open or high resistance condition does not exist. Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections Special Tools EL-35616 Terminal Test Probe Kit For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). When the condition is not currently present, but is indicated in DTC history, the cause may be intermittent. An intermittent may also be the cause when there is a customer complaint, but the symptom cannot be duplicated. Refer to the Symptom Table of the system that is suspect of causing the condition before trying to locate an intermittent condition. Most intermittent conditions are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. Inspect for the following items: * Wiring broken inside the insulation * Poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector * Poor terminal to wire connection-Some conditions which fall under this description are poor crimps, poor solder joints, crimping over the wire insulation rather than the wire itself, and corrosion in the wire to terminal contact area, etc. * Pierced or damaged insulation can allow moisture to enter the wiring causing corrosion. The conductor can corrode inside the insulation, with little visible evidence. Look for swollen and stiff sections of wire in the suspect circuits. * Wiring which has been pinched, cut, or its insulation rubbed through may cause an intermittent open or short as the bare area touches other wiring or parts of the vehicle. * Wiring that comes in contact with hot or exhaust components * Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions) in order to duplicate the conditions required, in order to verify the customer concern. * Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Electrical Intermittents) for test procedures to detect intermittent open, high resistance, short to ground, and short to voltage conditions. * Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure) for advanced intermittent diagnosis and Vehicle Data Recorder operation. Testing for Terminal Fretting Some intermittent conditions can be caused by wire terminal fretting corrosion. Fretting corrosion is a build-up of insulating, oxidized wear debris that can form when there is a small motion between electrical contacts. The oxidized wear debris can pile up enough at the electrical contact spots that the electrical resistance across the connection increases. Movement between the contacting surfaces as small as 10 to 100 microns can cause fretting. To put this in perspective, a sheet of paper is about 100 microns thick, so fretting motion is small and hard to see. Vibration and thermal expansion/contraction are the main sources that create fretting motion. Since vehicles vibrate and can experience large temperature swings, they are a good source for fretting motion. Tin, copper, nickel, and iron surfaces are all susceptible to fretting corrosion. Fretting corrosion can be difficult to see but it looks like small, dark smudges on the terminals contact surface. To correct a fretting condition disconnect the suspect connector and add Nyogel lubricant 760G (dielectric grease) to both sides of the connector Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7088 terminals. Then reconnect the connector and wipe away any excess lubricant. This will correct the additional terminal contact resistance due to the terminal fretting corrosion. Testing for Proper Terminal Contact It is important to test terminal contact at the component and any inline connectors before replacing a suspect component. Mating terminals must be inspected to ensure good terminal contact. A poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector may be the result of contamination or deformation. Contamination may be caused by the connector halves being improperly connected. A missing or damaged connector seal, damage to the connector itself, or exposing the terminals to moisture and dirt can also cause contamination. Contamination, usually in the underhood or underbody connectors, leads to terminal corrosion, causing an open circuit or intermittently open circuit. Deformation is caused by probing the mating side of a connector terminal without the proper adapter. Always use the EL-35616 when probing connectors. Other causes of terminal deformation are improperly joining the connector halves, or repeatedly separating and joining the connector halves. Deformation, usually to the female terminal contact tang, can result in poor terminal contact causing an open or intermittently open circuit. Testing for Proper Terminal Contact in Bussed Electrical Centers It is very important to use the correct test adapter when testing for proper terminal contact of fuses and relays in a bussed electrical center. Use EL-35616-35 to test for proper terminal contact. Failure to use EL-35616-35 can result in improper diagnosis of the bussed electrical center. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact: 1. Separate the connector halves. 2. Visually inspect the connector halves for contamination. Contamination may result in a white or green build-up within the connector body or between terminals. This causes high terminal resistance, intermittent contact, or an open circuit. An underhood or underbody connector that shows signs of contamination should be replaced in its entirety: terminals, seals, and connector body. 3. Using an equivalent male terminal / terminated lead, verify that the retention force is significantly different between a known good terminal and the suspect terminal. Replace the female terminal in question. Flat Wire (Dock and Lock) Connectors There are no serviceable parts for flat wire (dock and lock) connectors on the harness side or the component side. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact: 1. Remove the component in question. 2. Visually inspect each side of the connector for signs of contamination. Avoid touching either side of the connector as oil from your skin may be a source of contamination as well. 3. Visually inspect the terminal bearing surfaces of the flat wire circuits for splits, cracks, or other imperfections that could cause poor terminal contact. Visually inspect the component side connector to ensure that all of the terminals are uniform and free of damage or deformation. 4. Insert the appropriate adapter from the on the flat wire harness connector in order to test the circuit in question. Control Module/Component Voltage and Grounds Poor voltage or ground connections can cause widely varying symptoms. * Test all control module voltage supply circuits. Many vehicles have multiple circuits supplying voltage to a control module. Other components in the system may have separate voltage supply circuits that may also need to be tested. Inspect connections at the module/component connectors, fuses, and any intermediate connections between the voltage source and the module/component. A test lamp or a DMM may indicate that voltage is present, but neither tests the ability of the circuit to carry sufficient current. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. Refer to Circuit Testing (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Circuit Testing) and Power Distribution Schematics (See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Starting and Charging/Power and Ground Distribution/System Diagram/Power Distribution Schematics). * Test all control module ground and system ground circuits. The control module may have multiple ground circuits. Other components in the system may have separate grounds that may also need to be tested. Inspect grounds for clean and tight connections at the grounding point. Inspect the connections at the component and in splice packs, where applicable. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. Refer to Circuit Testing (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Circuit Testing) and Ground Distribution Schematics (See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Starting and Charging/Power and Ground Distribution/System Diagram/Ground Distribution Schematics). Temperature Sensitivity * An intermittent condition may occur when a component/connection reaches normal operating temperature. The condition may occur only when the component/connection is cold, or only when the component/connection is hot. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7089 * Freeze Frame, Failure Records, Snapshot, or Vehicle Data Recorder data may help with this type of intermittent condition, where applicable. * If the intermittent is related to heat, review the data for a relationship with the following: - High ambient temperatures - Underhood/engine generated heat - Circuit generated heat due to a poor connection, or high electrical load - Higher than normal load conditions, towing, etc. * If the intermittent is related to cold, review the data for the following: - Low ambient temperatures-In extremely low temperatures, ice may form in a connection or component. Inspect for water intrusion. - The condition only occurs on a cold start. - The condition goes away when the vehicle warms up. * Information from the customer may help to determine if the trouble follows a pattern that is temperature related. * If temperature is suspected of causing an intermittent fault condition, attempt to duplicate the condition. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions) in order to duplicate the conditions required. Electromagnetic Interference and Electrical Noise Some electrical components/circuits are sensitive to electromagnetic interference or other types of electrical noise. Inspect for the following conditions: * A misrouted harness that is too close to high voltage/high current devices such as secondary ignition components, motors, generator etc.-These components may induce electrical noise on a circuit that could interfere with normal circuit operation. * Electrical system interference caused by a malfunctioning relay, or a control module driven solenoid or switch-These conditions can cause a sharp electrical surge. Normally, the condition will occur when the malfunctioning component is operating. * Improper installation of non-factory or aftermarket add on accessories such as lights, 2-way radios, amplifiers, electric motors, remote starters, alarm systems, cell phones, etc.-These accessories may lead to interference while in use, but do not fail when the accessories are not in use. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Checking Aftermarket Accessories). * Test for an open diode across the A/C compressor clutch and for other open diodes. Some relays may contain a clamping diode. * The generator may be allowing AC noise into the electrical system. Incorrect Control Module * There are only a few situations where reprogramming a control module is appropriate: - A new service control module is installed. - A control module from another vehicle is installed. - Revised software/calibration files have been released for this vehicle. Note: DO NOT re-program the control module with the SAME software/calibration files that are already present in the control module. This is not an effective repair for any type of concern. * Verify that the control module contains the correct software/calibration. If incorrect programming is found, reprogram the control module with the most current software/calibration. Refer to Control Module References (See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning) for replacement, setup, and programming. Testing for Short to Ground Testing for Short to Ground Special Tools * EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM) * EL 35616-200 - Test Light-Probe Kit For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test Probe Caution). The following procedures test for a short to ground in a circuit. With a Digital Multimeter (DMM) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7090 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the Ohms position. 4. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the other lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. If the DMM does NOT display infinite resistance (OL), there is a short to ground in the circuit. With a Test Lamp 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect one lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to one end of the circuit to be tested. 5. If the test lamp illuminates, there is a short to ground in the circuit. Fuse Powering Several Loads 1. Review the system schematic and locate the fuse that is open. 2. Open the first connector or switch leading from the fuse to each load. 3. Connect a DMM across the fuse terminals (be sure that the fuse is powered). * When the DMM displays voltage the short is in the wiring leading to the first connector or switch. * If the DMM does not display voltage refer to the next step. 4. Close each connector or switch until the DMM displays voltage in order to find which circuit is shorted. Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter Special Tools EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM) For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test Probe Caution). Digital Multimeter (DMM) Basic Requirements Service information is validated using digital multimeters that meet or exceed the following requirements. Using a multimeter that does not meet these basic requirements may give inaccurate readings which could lead to an incorrect diagnosis. Display and Settings 1. Four digits displayed 2. Voltage, amperage, resistance, frequency, diode test settings, and min-max function 3. Display positive and negative values Voltage 1. Have at least 10 Mohm input impedance 2. Test a DC voltage range of 0.1-1000 V. 3. Test an AC voltage range of 0.1-1000 V. Amperage 1. Test a DC amperage range of 0.1µA-10 A. 2. Test an AC amperage range of 0.1µA-10 A. Resistance Test a resistance range of 0.1 ohm-40 Mohm and displays infinite for a value greater than 40 Mohm (O.L. (Over-load)) Frequency Test for a frequency range of 0.5 HZ-199 K HZ Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7091 Diode Test 1. Apply at least 1 mA when performing the diode bias test 2. Display the break over voltage drop (0-3 V) of a forward biased diode 3. Display infinite (O.L. (Over-load)) when a diode is reverse biased Min-Max Readings 1. Can update at a 1 ms sample rate 2. Saves and displays minimum and maximum values Note: Circuits which include any solid state control modules, such as the engine control module (ECM), should only be tested with a 10 MOhms or higher impedance digital multimeter such as the EL-39200. The EL-39200 instruction manual is a good source of information and should be read thoroughly upon receipt of the DMM as well as kept on hand for future reference. A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present if the impedance is low enough, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. In other words, if there is not enough current, the test lamp will not illuminate even though voltage is present. The ohmmeter function on a DMM shows how much resistance exists between 2 points along a circuit. Low resistance in a circuit means good continuity. Note: Disconnect the power feed from the suspect circuit when measuring resistance with a DMM. This prevents incorrect readings. DMMs apply such a small voltage to measure resistance that the presence of voltages can upset a resistance reading. Diodes and solid state components in a circuit can cause a DMM to display a false reading. To find out if a component is affecting a measurement take a reading once, then reverse the leads and take a second reading. If the readings differ the solid state component is affecting the measurement. Following are examples of the various methods of connecting the DMM to the circuit to be tested: * Probe both ends of the connector and either hold the leads in place while manipulating the connector or tape the leads to the harness for continuous monitoring while you perform other operations or test driving. Refer to Probing Electrical Connectors (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Probing Electrical Connectors). * Disconnect the harness at both ends of the suspected circuit where it connects either to a component or to other harnesses. * If the system that is being diagnosed has a specified pinout or breakout box, it may be used in order to simplify connecting the DMM to the circuit or for testing multiple circuits quickly. Using Connector Test Adapters Using Connector Test Adapters Special Tools EL 35616 - Terminal Test Probe Kit For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Caution: Do not insert test equipment probes (DMM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the EL-38125-580 GM Approved Terminal Release Tool Kit in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the EL-38125-580 GM Approved Terminal Release Tool Kit , ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the EL-38125-580 GM Approved Terminal Release Tool Kit label on the inside of the EL-38125-580 GM Approved Terminal Release Tool Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Using Fused Jumper Wires Using Fused Jumper Wires Special Tools J 36169-A Fused Jumper Wire Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7092 Note: A fused jumper may not protect solid state components from being damaged. The J 36169-A includes small clamp connectors that provide adaptation to most connectors without damage. This fused jumper wire is supplied with a 20-A fuse which may not be suitable for some circuits. Do not use a fuse with a higher rating than the fuse that protects the circuit being tested. AFL/EPC Connectors AFL/EPC Connectors Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. 1. For connectors with a bolt in the dress cover, turn the bolt counterclockwise to remove the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7093 2. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the top of the wire dress cover. Slide the CPA forward. 3. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7094 View showing depressing of the lever lock release tab. View of connector in released position. 4. Disconnect the connector from the component. 5. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the dress cover. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs and remove the dress cover. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7095 6. Release the rear lower half of the wiredress cover. 7. Release the tabs that are holding the wiredress cover to the connector body. 8. Remove the nose piece by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the slots on both ends of the connector body. Gently pry the nose piece out of the connector. J 38125-216 can also be used to remove the nose piece. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7096 9. Use the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by lifting the terminal retaining tabs on the inside of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Bosch Connectors (BSK) Bosch Connectors (BSK) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7097 Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 3. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 4. Insert the J 38125-561 tool into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 5. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Bosch Connectors (ECM) Bosch Connectors (ECM) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7098 1. Locate the assist lever on the top of the connector. Move the assist lever to the forward position. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7099 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the connector. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the locking tabs and remove the dress cover. 4. The terminal positive assurance (TPA) is located in the front of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7100 5. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove TPA from the connector. 6. Use the J 38125-213 or the J 38125-556 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7101 Note: Ensure that the dress cover and connector body are both in the released position before reassembling. Failure to do so may cause damage to the connector and component. Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Bosch Connectors (0.64) Bosch Connectors (0.64) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While pressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock until the lever is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Pull the rubber boot that covers the wires back to expose the end of the connector dress cover. 4. Place the connector locking lever in the center of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7102 5. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs that are on the wire end of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover and connector body and pry up. 6. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs located on the opposite side of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover at the connector end and pry up. 7. Remove the dress cover. 8. Cut the tie wrap on the wire bundle. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7103 9. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting a small flat-bladed tool into the small slot in the end of the slider and pushing on the TPA until it comes out of the connector. When the TPA exits the opposite side of the connector, gasp the TPA and pull it completely out of the connector. 10. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 11. Insert the J 38125-560 into the 2 triangular cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 12. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Terminal Replacement Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7104 1. Prior to installation the terminal must be aligned so the (1) coding lugs align with the (2) coding grooves on the connector. 2. Once the terminal is aligned, slide the terminal into the cavity until the retainer has engaged in the cavity of the connector. 3. Slide the TPA in the connector body and seat it using a small flat bladed tool. The TPA is seated when it is flush with the contact housing. 4. Secure the wires to the connector body using a tie wrap and replace the dress cover and grommet. Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Pull out the slider on the connector position assurance (CPA) until it is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7105 5. Insert the J 38125-557 into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Connector Position Assurance Locks Connector Position Assurance Locks The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of the connector. CPAs are used in various connectors throughout the vehicle. CPAs are also used in all SIR system electrical connectors. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals, of the connector. Connector Repairs Connector Repairs Connector Repairs contains a list of all connector repairs. The connector repairs are listed by the connector manufacturer and then by connector type. If the technician cannot identify the manufacturer of the connector, refer to Identifying Connectors below. Knowing the connector manufacturer will assist in finding the correct connector repair from the following list: * Connector Position Assurance Locks (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Connector Position Assurance Locks) * Terminal Position Assurance Locks (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Terminal Position Assurance Locks) * AFL/EPC Connectors (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/AFL/EPC Connectors) * Bosch Connectors (BSK) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Bosch Connectors (BSK))Bosch Connectors (0.64) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Bosch Connectors (0.64))Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT))Bosch Connectors (ECM) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Bosch Connectors (ECM)) * Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack))Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Push to Seat))Delphi Connectors Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7106 (Pull To Seat) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Pull to Seat))Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W))Delphi Connectors (Micro.64) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Micro .64))Delphi Connectors (12-Way) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (12-Way))Delphi Connectors (Steering Gear) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Steering Gear)) * FCI Connectors (Lever Lock) (See: General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/FCI Connectors (Lever Lock))FCI Connectors (SIR) (See: General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/FCI (SIR)) * FEP Connectors (Steering Gear) (See: General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/FEP Connectors (Steering Gear)) * JST Connectors (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/JST Connectors) * Kostal Connectors (Glow Plug Control Module) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Kostal Connectors (Glow Plug Control Module))Kostal Connectors (Transmission) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Kostal Connectors (Transmission)) * Molex Connectors (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Molex Connectors) * Sumitomo Connectors (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Sumitomo Connectors) * Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way))Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor))Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap))Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way))Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module)) * Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Yazaki Connectors (2-Way))Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Yazaki Connectors (16-Way)) * Repairing Connector Terminals (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Repairing Connector Terminals) Connector Anatomy 1 - Connector Positive Assurance (CPA) 2 - Assist Lever 3 - Wiredress Cover 4 - Seal Strain/Relief Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7107 5 - Slide Left Hand 6 - Slide Right Hand 7 - Terminal Positive Assurance (TPA) 8 - Terminal Positive Assurance (TPA) 9 - Connector Seal 10 - Connector Housing 11 - Inner Connector Identifying Connectors Knowing the connector manufacturer is helpful when trying to locating the correct connector repair procedure. There are many different connector designs used on GM vehicles and it is sometimes difficult to identify the connector manufacturer. The information in this document should help with the identification of connector manufactures. The following connector manufacturers make most of the connectors found in GM vehicles: * AFL/EPC (Alcoa Fujikura Ltd./Engineered Plastics Components) * Bosch * Delphi * FCI (Framatome Connectors International) * JAE (Japan Aviation Electronics) * JST (Japan Solderless Terminals) * Kostel * Molex * Sumitomo * Tyco/AMP * Yazaki Identifying the manufacturer of a connector is often difficult. When trying to determine the manufacturer of a connector, look for specific identifying marks that are unique to that connector supplier. Most of these identify marks are hard to find or see. Check the connector carefully and refer to the information below for pictures and descriptions of connector identification markings. * Most of AFLs connectors have EPC on their connector body. Some of the smaller connectors will not have any markings on them. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7108 * In some cases Bosch will actually be printed on the connector. If Bosch does not appear on the connector, look for the Bosch logo. The Bosch logo is a circle with a blunted arrow inside. This logo can appear anywhere on the connector and is often very small. * In some cases Delphi will actually be printed on the connector. If Delphi is not printed on the connector, look for PED. In both cases there is no specific orientation for Delphi or PED and they can appear anywhere on the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7109 * FCI connectors may have the FCI logo on their connectors. The logo is the letters FCI with an "A" above it. * JAE connector have JAE in small letters on their connectors. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7110 * JST connectors have JST in small letters on their connectors, similar to that above. The location of the logo will vary with the connector size and style. * Kostel has an "LK" with a circle around it. These connector are usually used as a transmissions connection. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7111 * Most Molex connectors will have the Molex logo on the dresscover of the connector. In some cases the connectors may have MX followed by another letter. The third letter indicates where the connector was made. A connector with MXD is a Molex connector made in Detroit. Sumitomo has a unique symbol on their connector and possibly a part number. The symbol is similar to that of a diamond lying on its side, similar to that shown. The logo could appear anywhere but the most common place is at the wire side of the housing. * Tyco/AMP has many different and unique connector designs. Some may or may not have identifiable marks on them. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7112 * Yazaki has a wedge or arrow shape, similar to that shown. Delphi Connectors (Push to Seat) Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Follow the steps below in order to repair push to seat connectors. 1. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device, the connector position assurance (CPA) device, and/or the secondary lock. 2. Separate the connector halves (1). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7113 3. Use the proper pick or removal tool (1) in order to release the terminal. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 4. Gently pull the cable and the terminal (2) out of the back of the connector. 5. Re-form the locking device if you are going to reuse the terminal (1). 6. To repair the terminal, refer to Terminal Repair. Terminal Repair 1. Slip the cable seal away from the terminal. 2. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 3. Slip a new cable seal onto the wire. 4. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 5. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 6. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. 7. Slide the cable seal toward the terminal. 8. Crimp the cable seal and the insulation. 9. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply grease to the connector. Reinstalling Terminal 1. In order to reuse a terminal or lead assembly, refer to Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Wiring Repairs). 2. Ensure that the cable seal is kept on the terminal side of the splice. 3. Insert the lead from the back until it catches. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Terminated Lead Repair 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Find the appropriate terminated lead. 3. Use the appropriate splice sleeves depending on the gauge size. 4. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves). Delphi Connectors (Pull to Seat) Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) Special Tools Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7114 J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal If the terminal is visibly damaged or is suspected of having a faulty connection, the terminal should be replaced. Follow the steps below in order to repair pull-to-seat connectors: 1. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) device and/or the secondary lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component or separate the connectors for in-line connectors. 3. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device. 4. Insert the proper pick or removal tool into the front of the connector body. Note: On connectors with more than one terminal the service loop may not be large enough to remove the terminal and crimp on a new one. If the terminal wire does not have a large enough service loop for removal, cut the wire 5 cm (2 in) behind the connector before removal. 5. Grasp the wire at the back of the connector body and gently push the terminal out the front of the connector body. Terminal Repair 1. If the wire needed to be cut in order to remove the terminal, gently push a small length of the same size wire through the back of the connector cavity until there is enough wire exposed in order to crimp on a new terminal. If the wire was not cut, cut the existing wire as close to the old terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 4. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. Terminal Installation 1. Align the terminal and pull the wire from the back of the connector in order to seat the terminal. 2. If necessary, cut the new wire to proper length and splice with existing circuit. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves). 3. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply dielectric grease to the connector. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Micro .64) Delphi Connectors (Micro.64) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7115 Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro.64 connectors. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. The lever lock may be located on the top or sides of the wire dress cover. View of a typical Micro 64 connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7116 Depress the lock and pull the lever over and past the lock. View of the connector when released from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7117 View of another type of Micro 64 connector. Depress the locks that are located on both sides of the wiredress cover and pull the lever over and past the locks. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7118 View of the connector when released from the component. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the front of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool push down on one of the locking tabs and pull the cover up until the dress cover releases. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. 4. Once the front 2 locks are unlocked, lift the front of the dress cover and pull it forward. Note: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 5. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the small slot on the TPA and pushing down until the TPA releases. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7119 Note: Be careful not to angle or rock the J 38125-21 tool when inserting it into the connector or the tool may break. 6. Insert the J 38125-21 tool into the round canal between the terminals cavities at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Follow the steps below in order to repair Micro 64 connector terminals. The Micro 64 connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-64 (M jaw) was developed to crimp Micro 64 terminals. The J 38125-64 crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. The J 38125-64 crimping tool is also designed to crimp both the wire and the insulation at the same time. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro 64 terminals. Note: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gauge wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 1. Cut the wire as close to the damaged terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7120 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert terminal into the appropriate terminal holder until it hits bottom and stops. The correct terminal holder is determined by the wire size. Also ensure that the terminals wings are pointing towards the former on the tool and the release locator. 5. Insert the stripped cable into the terminal. Insulation should be visible on both sides of the terminal insulation wings. 6. Compress the handles until the ratchet automatically releases. 7. Place the terminal into the appropriate cavity and assemble the connector. Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7121 Terminal Removal Procedure There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W connectors. These connectors are very similar but use different terminals and have some minor physical differences also. The first connector design of the Micro-Pack 100W (1) has a white connector interface that holds the terminals. The second design of the Micro-Pack 100W (2) has a gray interface to hold the terminals. Also, the first design has terminal cavities that are further apart (3 mm centerline) and offset from the other row of terminal cavities in the connector. The second design has terminals cavities that are closer together (2.54 mm centerline) and aligned vertically. One other way to identify the second design is the thin strip of material that runs along the outside of the cavities. Note: There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W terminals which are very similar. Ensure that you have the correct terminal before crimping the new terminal to the wire. The first design connector uses the longer terminal (1) that has a raised area in front of the recess in the terminal. The second design connector uses the shorter terminal without the raised area. Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro-Pack 100W connectors. Some Micro-Pack 100W connector disassembly procedures will vary. Use this procedure as a guide. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7122 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Locate the nose piece locking tabs that are positioned on the side of the connector nose piece. The connector nose piece acts as a terminal positive assurance (TPA) and may be referred to as such. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to push in one of the locking tabs while gently pulling on the same side of the nose piece. 4. Repeat the procedure for the other locking tab and remove the nose piece. 5. Remove the wire dress cover. The following is a general procedure for wire dress cover removal. Use this procedure as a guide, some dress cover removal procedures may vary. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7123 6. Use fingers to squeeze the 2 locking legs of the cover. 7. Apply pressure and gently rock the cover until one locking leg is unseated. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7124 8. Continue to apply pressure and rock the cover until the second locking leg is unseated. Repeat procedure for the other side of the dress cover and remove the cover. 9. Use J 38125-12A to gently lift the terminal retaining tab while gently pulling the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. If the terminal is severely bent or damaged, it may be possible on some connectors to push the wire out of the front of the connector instead of pulling it through. This will prevent damage to the internal seals of the connector. Once the terminal is pushed out of the connector, cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible and pull the wire through the connector. Terminal Repair Procedure The Micro-Pack 100W connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool was developed to crimp Micro-Pack 100W terminals. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro-Pack 100 terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7125 1. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. Note: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gauge wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert the terminal into the crimp tool until the core wings are flush with the anvil on the crimp tool. Be sure that the wings are pointed toward the crimp tool former and release the spring locator. The locator will hold the terminal in place. Inspect the alignment of the terminal wings with the crimp tool former. If the terminal wings are wider than the crimp tool former, remove the terminal and bend the terminal wings in slightly. 5. Place stripped wire into terminal. 6. Crimp the new terminal to the wire. If a jam occurs, press the emergency release to open applicator. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7126 Terminal Replacement Procedure After the terminal is crimped to the wire perform the following procedure in order to replace Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the Terminal Removal Procedure. Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The following is the proper procedure for the repair of Weather Pack(R) Connectors. 1. Separate the connector halves (1). 2. Open the secondary lock. A secondary lock aids in terminal retention and is usually molded to the connector (1). 3. Grasp the wire and push the terminal to the forward most position. Hold the wire in this position. 4. Insert the Weather Pack(R) terminal removal tool J 38125-10A into the front (mating end) of the connector cavity until it rests on the cavity shoulder (1). 5. Gently pull on the wire to remove the terminal through the back of the connector (2). Note: Never use force to remove a terminal from a connector. 6. Inspect the terminal and connector for damage. Repair as necessary. Refer to Repairing Connector Terminals (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Repairing Connector Terminals). 7. Reform the lock tang (2) and reset terminal in connector body. 8. Close secondary locks and join connector halves. 9. Verify that circuit is complete and working satisfactorily. 10. Perform system check. Delphi Connectors (12-Way) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7127 Delphi Connectors (12-Way) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) and slide the lever lock away from the connector body. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs on the dress cover of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool release all of the locking tabs. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7128 4. Release the lower wire dress cover locking tab. 5. Release the upper wire dress cover locking tab. 6. Once the locks are unlocked, lift the dress cover off. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7129 Note: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 7. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the locking tabs on both sides of the TPA. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. 8. Remove the nose piece by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the locking tabs on both sides of the nose piece. Gently pry the nose piece out of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7130 9. Insert the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Delphi Connectors (Steering Gear) Delphi Connectors (Steering Gear) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7131 Removal Procedure 1. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the locking tab on the connector. 2. Push down the locking tab to release the connector. The small flat-bladed tool may need to be pushed down and angled back slightly to depress the locking tab. Pull on the connector body while releasing the locking tab to disconnect the connector. FCI Connectors (Lever Lock) FCI Connectors (Lever Lock) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7132 Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. 1. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. 2. The release tab is located on the top of the wiredress cover. 3. View of connector in released position. 4. Disconnect the connector from the component. 5. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the dress cover. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs and remove the dress cover. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7133 6. Use a small flat-blade tool to slide the terminal position assurance (TPA) up one notch on both ends of the connector. The TPA is located underneath the wire dress cover. For the larger terminals insert the J 38125-556 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. For the smaller terminals insert the J 38125-560 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7134 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. FCI (SIR) FCI Connectors (SIR) Removal Procedure Note: The orange CPA must be released first to disconnect or to connect the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7135 1. Lift the orange CPA vertically (avoid lifting on an angle to the connector) approximately 4 mm to release the connector. Use a small flat-bladed tool to help release the orange CPA. The orange CPA can also be released manually without any tools. 2. Grab the connector on both sides and lift the connector vertically to disconnect the connector. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7136 1. Lift the orange CPA vertically approximately 4 mm before installing the connector. Use a small flat-bladed tool to help release the orange CPA. The orange CPA can also be released manually without any tools. 2. Line up the connector key tabs with the initiator key slots. Grab the connector on both sides and push the connector down into the initiator connector sub assembly until fully seated. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7137 3. After the connector is fully seated, push down the orange CPA with your thumb. Push down until the orange CPA is touching the yellow cover on the connector. FEP Connectors (Steering Gear) FEP Connectors (Steering Gear) Removal Procedure 1. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the locking tab on the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7138 2. Push down the locking tab to release the connector. The small flat-bladed tool may need to be pushed down and angled back slightly to depress the locking tab. Pull on the connector body while releasing the locking tab to disconnect the connector. JST Connectors JST Connectors Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. While depressing the lock, remove the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7139 2. Locate the two indents of the terminal position assurance (TPA) located on the bottom of the connector body. Note: The TPA cannot be removed from the connector while there are terminals present in the connector body. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to very carefully raise the TPA on both sides of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7140 4. View of the TPA when removed from the connector body. 5. Use the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the left side of the terminal release cavity as shown in the graphic. Use the tool to move the terminal release to the right with a gentle prying motion. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Kostal Connectors (Glow Plug Control Module) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7141 Kostal Connectors (Glow Plug Control Module) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure View of typical connector. View of connector in released position. 1. Locate the assist lever at the back of the connector. Move the assist lever to the rear position. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7142 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove the dress cover. 4. Slide the dress cover forward and off of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7143 5. The terminal positive assurance (TPA) is located in the front and rear of the connector. Note: The front TPA cannot be removed from the connector. Only move it to the preset position. 6. Use a small flat-blade tool to move the front TPA to the preset position, outboard approximately 0.125 in. (3 mm). 7. Use a small flat-blade tool to completely remove the rear TPA from the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7144 8. Use the J 38125-24 or the J 38125-560 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 9. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Kostal Connectors (Transmission) Kostal Connectors (Transmission) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7145 1. While depressing the lock, twist and remove the connector from the component. 2. Locate the terminal position assurance (TPA). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7146 Note: The TPA cannot be removed from the connector while there are terminals present in the connector body. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to push the TPA until it bottoms out. 4. Use the J 38125-28 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal cavity as shown in the graphic. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 5. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Terminal Replacement Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7147 After the terminal is crimped to the wire, perform the following procedure in order to replace the terminal. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. Locate the terminal position assurance (TPA). 4. Use a small flat-blade tool to push the TPA until it bottoms out. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7148 5. Ensure the TPA is fully seated. The TPA should be centered and flush with the connector body when viewed. Molex Connectors Molex Connectors Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the top of the wire dress cover. Slide the CPA forward. 2. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7149 3. The lever should be in the full forward position. 4. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7150 5. Remove the dress cover by using a flat bladed tool to release the dress cover locking tabs and lift up on the dress cover. 6. Cut the tie wrap that holds the wires to the connector body. 7. Use a small flat-blade tool to pry one side of the nose piece up to the pre-stage position. When the nose piece is in the pre-staged position, the nose piece will be raised above the connector body the length of the step in the nose piece. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7151 8. Use a small flat-blade tool to pry the other side of the piece to the pre-stage position. If the nose piece is higher than the first step in the nose piece, gently push down on the nose piece until it meets with resistance from the connector body, you should feel the nose piece click into position. 9. Insert the J 38125-213 into the small terminal release hole on the nose piece and gently pull on the back of the wire. 10. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Refer to the terminal crimping procedure in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit. Terminal Replacement Procedure After the terminal is crimped to the wire, perform the following procedure in order to replace the terminal. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7152 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the connector disassembly procedure. Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the connector body and pull the CPA out. The CPA is on the wire harness side of connector. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Use a small flat-bladed tool to gently pry off the dress cover by inserting the tool under the cover opposite the harness side and prying up. 4. Remove the cover. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7153 5. Using a small flat-bladed tool, push on the side of the nose piece retainer while pushing the nose piece forward with your thumb. This will release the terminal position assurance (TPA). 6. Insert the J 38125-12A into the corresponding terminal release cavity. The release cavities are the 2 center rows of cavities on one half of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7154 7. Pressing the J 38125-12A tool in the release cavity of the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and crimper in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. Slide the lever lock away from the connector body. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs on the dress cover of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool release all of the locking tabs. 4. Once the locks are unlocked, lift the dress cover off. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7155 Note: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 5. Release the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the blue locking tabs on both ends of the connector. Gently slide the TPA up to the released position on both ends. 6. For the larger terminals insert the J 38125-13A tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. For the smaller terminals insert the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7156 View of the release tool being used for the larger terminals. View of the release tool being used for the larger terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7157 View of the release tool being used for the smaller terminals. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7158 Side view of connector. View of top of connector. 1. Locate the assist lever and lock on the top of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7159 2. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. 3. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7160 4. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the rear of the connector. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. 5. Once the locking tabs are unlocked, slide the inner connector out of the rear of the connector housing. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7161 6. Use the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by pressing on the tang. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Repairing Connector Terminals Repairing Connector Terminals Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Use the following repair procedures in order to repair the following: * Push to Seat terminals * Pull to Seat terminals Some terminals do not require all of the steps shown. Skip the steps that do not apply for your terminal repair. The J-38125 contains further information. 1. Cut off the terminal between the core and the insulation crimp. Minimize any wire loss. For cable seal terminals, remove the seal. 2. Apply the correct cable seal per gauge size of the wire, if used. Slide the seal back along the wire in order to enable insulation removal. 3. Remove the insulation. 4. For sealed terminals only, align the seal with the end of the cable insulation. 5. Position the strip in the terminal. For sealed terminals, position the strip and seal in the terminal. 6. Hand crimp the core wings. 7. Hand crimp the insulation wings. For sealed terminals, hand crimp the insulation wings around the seal and the cable. 8. Solder all of the hand crimp terminals excepting Micro-Pack 100.64 size. Soldering Micro-Pack 100 World terminals may damage the terminal. Sumitomo Connectors Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7162 Sumitomo Connectors Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7163 3. Remove the dress cover by using a flat-blade tool to release the connector locking tabs and pulling off the dress cover. 4. Relieve the tension on the nose piece retainers by inserting J 38125-12A into the single retainer slot on the end of the nose piece and gently prying out the locking tab. Repeat the process for both of the nose piece locking tabs on the opposite side of the nose piece. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7164 5. Once the nose piece retainers are relaxed, use the J 38125-552 to pull up the nose piece by hooking the tool under the nose piece and pulling up. The nose piece should raise slightly. 6. On the opposite side of the nose piece, use the J 38125-552 to pull up the nose piece by hooking the tool under the nose piece and pulling up. The nose piece should release completely. If the nose piece does not come off, repeat the procedure on the opposite side. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7165 7. The illustration above identifies the entry canal where the terminal release tool will be inserted, and the terminal cavity. * Terminal (1) * Entry Canal (2) 8. Insert the J 38125-553 tool into the entry canal and pry up on the terminal retainer. The terminal retainer is a small plastic piece on the top of the terminal. The terminal retainer must be held up while the terminal is pulled out of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7166 9. The illustration shows a cutaway view of the connector to aid the technician in releasing the terminal retainer. 10. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Refer to the terminal crimping procedure in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit. Terminal Replacement Procedure After the terminal is crimped to the wire, perform the following procedure in order to replace the terminal. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the connector disassembly procedure. Terminal Position Assurance Locks Terminal Position Assurance Locks The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7167 2. Insert the J 38125-11A tool into the cavity on the lower right hand face of the connector until the terminal release tang access panel slides over. 3. Ensure that the terminal release tang access panel is in the correct location to access the terminals. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7168 5. Insert the J 38125-11A into the terminal release tang access slot located behind the access panel of the connector and press down on the terminal while carefully pulling the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component by pressing down on the connector position assurance (CPA). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7169 2. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting the tool in the small recess on the side of the connector and pushing up until the TPA releases from the connector body. The TPA should raise just slightly. Do not try to remove the TPA. Note: The TPA on this connector cannot be removed unless the terminals are removed first. The TPA will come out of the connector body, but only slightly. When the TPA is slightly raised the terminals can be removed. Using excessive force to remove the TPA with the terminals still in the connector will damage the connector. 3. Repeat the process for the other side of the connector. 4. Ensure that the TPA is in the proper position to remove the terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7170 5. While pushing the terminal forward, insert the J 38125-24 in the release cavity above the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7171 2. Insert a small flat-blade tool in the slot below the front loaded terminal position assurance (TPA) and pry up. 3. Remove the TPA by pulling it out of the connector. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-553 on a slight upward angle into the cavity below the terminal to be removed. Ensure that the pointed on the end of the tool is facing the bottom of the terminal and it stays in contact with the terminal until it stops on the plastic terminal retainer. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7172 6. Gently pry the plastic terminal retainer down and carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7173 1. While depressing the lock, pull the two connector halves apart. Note: The TPA is fragile and may break if not done carefully. 2. Use a small flat-blade tool to very carefully push the terminal position assurance (TPA) towards the face of the connector on both sides of the connector. 3. View of the male half of the connector with female terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7174 4. View of the female half of the connector with male terminals. 5. Use the J 38125-215 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. View of the female half of the connector with male terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7175 7. View of the male half of the connector with female terminals. 8. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers A circuit breaker is a protective device that is designed to open the circuit when a current load is in excess of the rated breaker capacity. If there is a short or other type of overload condition in the circuit, the excessive current will open the circuit between the circuit breaker terminals. Two types of circuit breakers are used. Circuit Breaker - This type opens when excessive current passes through it for a period of time. It closes again after a few seconds, and if the cause of the high current is still present, it will open again. The circuit breaker will continue to cycle open and closed until the condition causing the high current is removed. Positive Temperature Coefficient (PTC) Circuit Breaker - This type greatly increases its resistance when excessive current passes through it. The excessive current heats the PTC device, as the device heats its resistance increases. Eventually the resistance gets so high that the circuit is effectively open. Unlike the ordinary circuit breaker the PTC unit will not reset until the circuit is opened, by removing the voltage from its terminals. Once the voltage is removed the circuit breaker will re-close within a second or 2. Circuit Protection - Fuses Circuit Protection - Fuses Special Tools EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM) For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7176 The fuse is the most common method of an automotive wiring circuit protection. Whenever there is an excessive amount of current flowing through a circuit the fusible element will melt and create an open or incomplete circuit. Fuses are a one time protection device and must be replaced each time the circuit is overloaded. To determine if a fuse is open, remove the suspected fuse and examine if the element in the fuse is broken (2). If not broken (1), also check for continuity using a Digital Multimeter (DMM) or a continuity tester. If the element is broken or continuity is suspect, replace the fuse with one of equal current rating. Circuit Protection - Fusible Links Circuit Protection - Fusible Links Special Tools EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM) For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Fusible link is wire designed to melt and break continuity when excessive current is applied. It is often located between or near the battery and starter or electrical center. Use a continuity tester or a Digital Multimeter (DMM) at each end of the wire containing the fusible link in order to determine if it is broken. If broken, it must be replaced with fusible link of the same gauge size. Repairing a Fusible Link Note: Fusible links cut longer than 225 mm (approximately 9 in) will not provide sufficient overload protection. Flat Wire Repairs Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7177 Flat Wire Repairs The flat wire within the flex wiring harness is not serviceable. If an open or short exists within the flex wiring harness the complete harness must be replaced. GMLAN Wiring Repairs GMLAN Wiring Repairs Special Tools * EL-38125-10 - Splice Sleeve Crimping Tool * J 38125-5 - Ultra Torch Special Tool * DuraSeal splice sleeves * A wire stripping tool For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: * A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. * A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The GM Local Area Network (GMLAN) System requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working on GMLAN connectors and terminals. GMLAN Repairs Note: When making a repair to any GMLAN network, the original wire length after the repair must be the same length as before the repair. If the network is a twisted pair, the twist must be maintained after the repair is completed. GMLAN has 2 types of networks, low speed and high speed. Low speed GMLAN has a single wire and works at slow speeds. High speed GMLAN has 2 wires in a twisted pair and works at higher speeds. For more information on GMLAN, refer to Data Link Communications Description and Operation ( See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Information Bus/Description and Operation). GMLAN Connector Terminal Repair Note: A terminated lead can be used to replace damaged connector terminals for both high speed and low speed GMLAN systems. When making a connector terminal repair on a GMLAN high speed system with twisted pair wires, do not untwist the wires more than necessary to make the repair. If the individual terminals are damaged on any GMLAN connection, use the appropriate connector repair procedure in order to repair the terminal. Refer to Connector Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Connector Repairs) for the appropriate connector repair procedure. GMLAN Wire Repair Note: Refer to Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Wiring Repairs) in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gauge size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and EL-38125-10 - tool. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the DuraSeal splice sleeves. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7178 Note: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: * Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. * Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. * Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert to regional wiring gauge size. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the EL-38125-10 - tool in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the splice sleeve crimp tool. The crimp tool has four nests, one for each color. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7179 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs Caution: Do not solder repairs under any circumstances as this could result in the air reference being obstructed. If the heated oxygen sensor pigtail wiring, connector, or terminal is damaged the entire oxygen sensor assembly must be replaced. Do not attempt to repair the wiring, connector, or terminals. In order for the sensor to function properly it must have a clean air reference. This clean air reference is obtained by way of the oxygen sensor signal and heater wires. Any attempt to repair the wires, connectors or terminals could result in the obstruction of the air reference and degrade oxygen sensor performance. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7180 The following guidelines should be used when servicing the heated oxygen sensor: * Do not apply contact cleaner or other materials to the sensor or vehicle harness connectors. These materials may get into the sensor, causing poor performance. Also, the sensor pigtail and harness wires must not be damaged in such a way that the wires inside are exposed. This could provide a path for foreign materials to enter the sensor and cause performance problems. * Neither the sensor nor vehicle lead wires should be bent sharply or kinked. Sharp bends, kinks, etc., could block the reference air path through the lead wire. * Do not remove or defeat the oxygen sensor ground wire (where applicable). Vehicles that utilize the ground wire sensor may rely on this ground as the only ground contact to the sensor. Removal of the ground wire will also cause poor engine performance. * To prevent damage due to water intrusion, be sure that the peripheral seal remains intact on the vehicle harness connector. High Temperature Wiring Repairs High Temperature Wiring Repairs Special Tools * EL-38125-10 - Splice Sleeve Crimping Tool * J 38125-5 - Ultra Torch * DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). High Temperature Wiring Wiring that is exposed to high temperatures, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time may use materials i.e. wires, connectors, and shielding that has a higher heat rating than typical wiring. When making a repair in a high temperature area observe the following: * Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature to replace any damaged wire. * Replace any heat shielding that is removed. * Cover any DuraSeal splice sleeves with SCT1 shrink tubing. * After making a wiring repair, ensure that the location of the wiring is not moved closer to the heat source. Identifying High Temperature Wiring Wiring that is exposed to high temperature, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time need special considerations when making wiring repairs. Areas that may be exposed to higher temperatures can be identified by heat resistant materials that are being used in those areas. These materials may include heat reflective tape, moon tape, and high temperature shrink tubing. Also conduit and other protective coverings may be used. Because conduit or similar coverings are used throughout the vehicle regardless of the temperature, it may be necessary for the technician to determine if an area is exposed to excessive heat before making a wiring repair. Obvious areas of consideration would be any area located near the exhaust manifolds, catalytic converter, and exhaust pipes. Items Required * DuraSeal splice sleeves to crimp and seal connections * High temperature SCT1 shrink tubing to protect the splice sleeves * Terminated leads or pigtails * The correct tools to remove the terminals from the connectors Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature of the same or larger gauge size as the original wire when repair damage wire. Also replace any reflective tape that you remove during the repair. High Temperature Wire Repair Note: Refer to Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Wiring Repairs) in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature rating of the same gauge size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the EL-38125-10 - tool and then encapsulate the splice sleeve using the high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7181 Note: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: * Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. * Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. * Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert to regional wiring gauge size. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Slide a section of high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing down the length of wire to be spliced. Ensure that the shrink tubing will not interfere with the splice procedure. 5. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 6. Use the EL-38125-10 - tool in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the splice sleeve crimp tool. The crimp tool has four nests, one for each color. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7182 7. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 8. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 9. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 10. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 11. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7183 12. Center the high temperature SCT1 shrink tube over the DuraSeal splice sleeve. 13. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the high temperature heat shrink tubing. 14. Gradually move the heat from the center to the open end of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. 15. Replace any reflective tape and clips that may have been remove during the repair. Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation If the wire insulation has been chafed, or broken, enough to show the conductive portion of the wire, and the wire is not damaged, determine the length of insulation that needs to be repaired. If the repair is less than 280 mm (11 in), cut the wire within the damaged area. Than slide the appropriate heat shrink tubing (listed below) over the wire, and repair the wire by splicing the wires together. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves). Once the wire is spliced together slide heat shrink tubing over the damaged area and apply heat to seal the repaired wire. If the wire is damaged, or the damaged area is larger than 280 mm (11 in), than replace the damaged wire by splicing in a new section of wire. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7184 SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs Special Tools * EL-38125-10 - Splice Sleeve Crimping Tool * J 38125-5 - Ultra Torch * DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: * A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. * A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides the necessary low resistance contact integrity for these sensitive, low energy circuits. The Supplemental Inflatable Restraint (SIR) System/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working with the SIR/SRS, and the wiring components, such as connectors and terminals. SIR/SRS Connector Repair (Plastic Body and Terminal Metal Pin) Note: Do not use the terminals in the kit in order to replace damaged SIR/SRS system terminals. Use either an SIR/SRS pigtail or a terminated lead from the SIR Repair Kit Tray. The terminals in the SIR/SRS system are made with a special plating. This plating provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. Pigtail repair packs are available for SIR/SRS connectors with eight or less terminals. Only the connector body is available for connectors with more than eight terminals. Terminated leads can be used to replace damaged terminals when replacing the connector body. SIR/SRS Component Wire Pigtail Repair Note: Do not make wire, connector, or terminal repairs on components with wire pigtails. A wire pigtail is a wire or wires attached directly to the device, not by a connector. If a wiring pigtail is damaged, you must replace the entire component, with pigtail. The inflatable restraint steering wheel module coil is an example of a pigtail component. SIR/SRS Wire Repair Note: Refer to Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Wiring Repairs) in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7185 If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gauge size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and EL-38125-10 - tool. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the DuraSeal splice sleeves. Note: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: * Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. * Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. * Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert to regional wiring gauge size. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the EL-38125-10 - tool in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the splice sleeve crimp tool. The crimp tool has four nests, one for each color. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7186 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Connector Position Assurance (CPA) The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of a connector. CPAs are used in all SIR System connectors and also in some connectors of other systems. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals of a connection. Terminal Position Assurance (TPA) The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7187 Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Special Tools * EL-38125-10 - Splice Sleeve Crimping Tool * J 38125-5 - Ultra Torch * DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Note: Use only DuraSeal splice sleeves. Other splice sleeves may not protect the splice from moisture or provide a good electrical connection. Use DuraSeal splice sleeves to form a one-to-one splice on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. Use DuraSeal splice sleeves where there is special requirements such as moisture sealing. Follow the instructions below in order to splice copper wire using DuraSeal splice sleeves. Note: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: * Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. * Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. * Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert to regional wiring gauge size. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7188 5. Use the EL-38125-10 - tool in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the splice sleeve crimp tool. The crimp tool has four nests, one for each color. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7189 * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Splicing Inline Harness Diodes Splicing Inline Harness Diodes Many vehicle electrical systems use a diode to isolate circuits and protect the components from voltage spikes. When installing a new diode use the following procedure. 1. Open the harness. * If the harness is taped, remove the tape. * To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing seam ripper (available from sewing supply stores) in order to cut open the harness. * If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the diode. 2. If the diode is taped to the harness, remove all of the tape. 3. Check and record the current flow direction and orientation of diode. 4. Remove the inoperative diode from the harness with a suitable soldering tool. Note: If the diode is located next to a connector terminal remove the terminal(s) from the connector to prevent damage from the soldering tool. 5. Carefully strip away a section of insulation next to the old soldered portion of the wire(s). Do not remove any more than is needed to attach the new diode. 6. Check current flow direction of the new diode, being sure to install the diode with correct bias. Reference the appropriate service manual wiring schematic to obtain the correct diode installation position. 7. Attach the new diode to the wire(s) using 60/40 rosin core solder. Before soldering attach some heat sinks (aluminum alligator clips) across the diode wire ends to protect the diode from excessive heat. Follow the manufacturer's instruction for the soldering equipment. 8. Reinstall terminal(s) into the connector body if previously removed. Note: To prevent shorts to ground and water intrusion, completely cover all exposed wire and diode attachment points with tape. 9. Tape the diode to the harness or connector using electrical tape. Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable Twisted/shielded cable is used in order to protect wiring from electrical noise. Two-conductor cable of this construction is used between the radio and the Delco-Bose(R) speaker/amplifier units and other applications where low level, sensitive signals must be carried. Follow the instructions below in order to repair the twisted/shielded cable. 1. Remove the outer jacket (1). Use care not to cut into the drain wire of the mylar tape. 2. Unwrap the tape. Do not remove the tape. Use the tape in order to rewrap the twisted conductors after the splice is made. 3. Prepare the splice. Untwist the conductors and follow the instructions for Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves). Staggering the splices by 65 mm (2.5 in) is recommended. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7190 Note: Apply the mylar tape with the aluminum side inward. This ensures good electrical contact with the drain wire. 4. Re-assemble the cable. * Rewrap the conductors with the mylar tape. If the mylar tape is damaged, use 3M product AL-36FR to replace the damaged mylar tape. * Use caution not to wrap the drain wire in the tape (1). * Follow the splicing instructions for copper wire and splice the drain wire. * Wrap the drain wire around the conductors and tape with electrical tape to replace the outer insulation. 5. Tape over the entire cable. Use a winding motion when you apply the tape. Wiring Repairs Wiring Repairs The Wiring Repairs section contains the following types of wiring repair information. Using these elements together will make wiring repair faster and easier: * Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections) * Flat Wire Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Flat Wire Repairs) * GMLAN Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/GMLAN Wiring Repairs) * High Temperature Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/High Temperature Wiring Repairs) * Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs) * Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves) * Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable) * Splicing Inline Harness Diodes (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Inline Harness Diodes) * SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs) US English/Metric Conversion US English/Metric Conversion Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7191 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7192 Basic Digital Multimeter Requirements Basic Digital Multimeter Requirements Digital Multimeter (DMM) Basic Requirements Service information is validated using digital multimeters that meet or exceed the following requirements. Using a multimeter that does not meet these basic requirements may give inaccurate readings which could lead to an incorrect diagnosis. Display and Settings 1. Four digits displayed 2. Voltage, amperage, resistance, frequency, diode test settings, and min-max function 3. Display positive and negative values Voltage 1. Have at least 10 Mohm input impedance 2. Test a DC voltage range of 0.1-1000 V. 3. Test an AC voltage range of 0.1-1000 V. Amperage 1. Test a DC amperage range of 0.1µA-10 A. 2. Test an AC amperage range of 0.1µA-10 A. Resistance Test a resistance range of 0.1 ohm-40 Mohm and displays infinite for a value greater than 40 Mohm (O.L. (Over-load)) Frequency Test for a frequency range of 0.5 HZ-199 K HZ Diode Test 1. Apply at least 1 mA when performing the diode bias test 2. Display the break over voltage drop (0-3 V) of a forward biased diode 3. Display infinite (O.L. (Over-load)) when a diode is reverse biased Min-Max Readings 1. Can update at a 1 ms sample rate 2. Saves and displays minimum and maximum values Testing Ground and Low Reference Circuits Testing Ground and Low Reference Circuits Because a test lamp can light with up to 200 ohm in a ground or low reference circuit they are not recommended to be used for this type of test. A low impedance test lamp can light and indicate the circuit is good when there is as much as 20-30 ohm present, while a high impedance test lamp can light with up to 200 ohm present in the circuit. This is why the Digital Multi-Meter (DMM) is used when validating a ground or low reference circuit continuity. When using the DMM there are many vehicle conditions that can affect the ground and low reference continuity testing. If these conditions are not met, a ground or low reference circuit test can fail on a good circuit. This may cause longer diagnosis time and incorrect component replacement. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7193 Any current flow through a ground or low reference circuit, while being tested, will skew the DMM continuity reading, or display a reading higher than when there is no current flowing. Performing a ground or low reference circuit continuity test, in reference to the vehicles battery negative terminal, will have the highest risk of failing a good ground or low reference circuit test than any other ground reference point. The best ground test points would be a control module housing (if the control modules housing is metal and grounded), door jamb striker (if attached to metal), under dash metal frame work, engine block, or body ground studs (other than where the negative battery cable is attached). A typical DMM ground or low reference circuit continuity reading can be as high as 100 ohm with the ignition ON, and drop to 15-25 ohm after the ignition is turned OFF. The reading will drop below 10 ohm after 30-40 seconds, then below 5 ohm after 60 seconds. Once the vehicle completely goes to sleep (generally 3-10 minutes) the reading will drop below 0.3 ohm. The following list of conditions may need to be met to ensure a valid continuity reading on a ground or low reference circuit: * Ignition OFF * Key out of the ignition switch (when not equipped with keyless entry and remote start) * Retained Accessory Power (RAP) OFF (open and close the driver door after ignition OFF) * Battery charger set at a 2 A or less charge rate * Scan tool not communicating with any vehicle control module (in some cases it may need to be disconnected from the DLC) * All entry doors closed * Headlamps OFF (auto headlamps disabled) * Any delay lighting OFF * HVAC after blow OFF * Any accessory that can work when the ignition is OFF * Wait up to 60 seconds (after all other listed conditions are met) Activating the DOOR LOCK function with a key fob can greatly reduce the time to achieve a valid ground or low reference continuity test result. Terminal Wiring Repair Terminal Wiring Repair Special Tools * EL-38125-10 - Splice Sleeve Crimp Tool * EL-38125-580 - Terminal Release Tool Kit * J-38125-5 - Ultra Torch * EL-35616 - Connector Test Adapter Kit For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Note: All repairs near the engine manifold, turbo engine and all exhaust pipes should follow the High Temperature Wiring Repair procedures. 1. Find the appropriate connector end view within the connector end view section. The connector end view has the following information: * Diagnostic probe tool * Terminal release tool * Terminal/terminated lead part numbers 2. Determine if a terminal is damaged. Note: Not using the proper test kit probe may cause damage to the terminal(s) that are probed. * Locate the diagnostic probe tool from the connector end view. The connector end view describes the color and part number to help the technician find and use the correct tool. * Connect the probe tool to the Digital Multimeter. * Insert the probe tool into the cavity and follow the procedures from the Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter). 3. Disconnect the connector body to perform the repair. Note: Several procedures for specific connector bodies are called out in Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Wiring Repairs). Use the following repair procedures to repair the following terminals: Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7194 Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack))Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Push to Seat))Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Pull to Seat))Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W))Delphi Connectors (Micro.64) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Micro .64) )Delphi Connectors (12-Way) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (12-Way))Delphi Connectors (Steering Gear) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Steering Gear)) * The TPA and CPA should be removed before releasing the terminal for the connector body. * Look at the connector end view to locate the cavity of the damaged terminal and find the proper terminal release tool from the terminal release tool kit. Note: Using the incorrect terminal release tool can damage the connector body. * Insert the terminal release tool into the cavity. Note: Some terminals have a lever that must be disengaged before the terminal can be released. Gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Terminated Lead Repair Terminated Lead Repair Special Tools * EL-38125-10 - Splice Sleeve Crimp Tool * EL-38125-580 - Terminal Release Tool Kit * J-38125-5 - Ultra Torch * EL-35616 - Connector Test Adapter Kit For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Note: All repairs near the engine manifold, turbo engine and all exhaust pipes should follow the High Temperature Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/High Temperature Wiring Repairs) procedures. Terminated leads are terminals that are crimped onto wires. The terminated lead can be used throughout the vehicle since it is designed for temperatures up to 150°C. The length of the wire is 450 mm. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7195 The DuraSeal splice sleeve has the following 2 critical features: * A special heat shrink tubing that environmentally seals the splice. The shrink tubing contains a sealing adhesive inside the shrink tubing. * A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp that provides the necessary contact integrity for sensitive low energy circuits. 1. Use the connector end view to identify the correct terminated lead. 2. The terminated lead package should include a DuraSeal splice sleeve. If not, use the chart to identify the correct part. 3. Open the harness by removing any tape: Use a sewing seam ripper, or a comparable tool, to cut open the harness, to avoid wire insulation damage. 4. Depending on how many terminals need repairs, cut the terminal and wire back at least 40 mm. Try to keep the harness wire length the same. If more than one terminated lead is required, stagger the lengths by 40 mm. This helps reduce the bundle size of the wire harness. 5. Use the EL-38125-10 - tool in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the splice sleeve crimp tool. The crimp tool has four nests, one for each color. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7196 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the J-38125-5 - ultra torch , apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7197 Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid: Electrical Diagrams For information regarding diagrams for this component, please refer to Transmission Control Systems diagrams. See: Diagrams Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-07-30-016A > Nov > 09 > A/T Controls - Downshift Hesitation/Delayed Shifting Control Module: Customer Interest A/T Controls - Downshift Hesitation/Delayed Shifting TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 09-07-30-016A Date: November 25, 2009 Subject: Transmission Hesitation, Delayed Shifting, Shifting at Wrong Time (Reprogram TCM) Models: 2010 Buick Enclave 2010 Chevrolet Equinox, Traverse 2010 GMC Acadia, Terrain 2010 Saturn OUTLOOK Equipped with 6T40/45 (RPOs MH7, MHC) or 6T70/75 (RPOs MH2, MH4, MY9, MH6) Automatic Transmission 2010 Buick LaCrosse Equipped with 3.0L (RPO LF1) Engine and 6T70 (RPOs MH2, MH4) Automatic Transmission 2010 Chevrolet Malibu 2010 Pontiac G6 2010 Saturn AURA Equipped with 6T40 (RPO MH8) Automatic Transmission All Vehicles Built Prior to the Following VIN Breakpoints: Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add models. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 09-07-30-016 (07- Transmission/Transaxle). Condition Some customers may comment on transmission downshift hesitation, delayed shifting and shifting at the wrong time. Correction A revised transmission calibration has been developed to address these issues. Reprogram the transmission control module (TCM) with updated calibration files using the TIS2WEB Service Programming System (SPS) application. Select SEQ Programming Sequence ECM/TCM from the Supported Controllers screen. Refer to SI and Service Programming System (SPS) documentation for programming instructions, if required. Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table above. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Control Module: > 10-07-30-002A > Jun > 10 > A/T Controls Snapshot Data Using (GDS) Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T Controls - Snapshot Data Using (GDS) INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 10-07-30-002A Date: June 11, 2010 Subject: Navigation Procedure for Snapshot Data Using Global Diagnostic System (GDS), Uploading Snapshot Data to Computer and E-mailing Models: 2010-2011 Buick LaCrosse 2011 Buick Regal 2010-2011 Cadillac SRX 2010-2011 Chevrolet Camaro, Equinox 2010-2011 GMC Terrain Attention: For additional information about GDS and/or the snapshot feature, please review course number: 16048.26W Global Diagnostic System, at the GM training website: www.gmtraining.com. In Canada go to: www.gmprocanada.com. You may also utilize the Help Section of GDS by clicking on the Menu button that is on the lower left corner of the GDS screen. Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2011 model year and correct the step number referred to in the Note for Step 18. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 10-07-30-002 (Section 07 - Transmission/Transaxle). The Global Diagnostic System (GDS) and the multiple diagnostic interface (MDI) module will take the place of the Tech 2(R) on certain vehicles when communicating and diagnosing vehicle on-board electrical systems. This diagnostic tool platform and software will be required for use with all 2010 and later GM Global Architecture (Global A) vehicles beginning with the Chevrolet Camaro, followed by the Buick LaCrosse, Chevrolet Equinox, Cadillac SRX, GMC Terrain and Buick Regal. The following procedure is intended to show the user how to navigate to the appropriate data screen, upload a snapshot of the data to a computer and create an e-mail of the snapshot. The procedure is written for an automatic transmission, but is similar for other data screens. Procedure for GDS Navigating and Uploading Transmission Snapshot Data to a PC and Creating an E-mail 1. Turn OFF the ignition. 2. Connect the MDI to the Data Link Connector (DLC) of the vehicle. Note Use the USB port to make the following MDI connection: 3. Connect the MDI to a PC or laptop that has been downloaded with the GDS application from TIS2WEB. Note At least one Diagnostic Package must be installed on the PC to perform diagnostics. If GDS was just installed, select: Add New Diagnostic Package and then select: a Diagnostic Package to download. 4. Click: On the GDS icon on the PC. 5. The Login Page will appear. 6. Select: A User. 7. The ID Screen will appear. 8. Select: The serial number of the MDI being used. 9. Select: Connect. 10. Verify that the system status is ready by observing for a flashing PC light icon on the MDI. 11. Select: Make, Model and Model Year, in order to build the vehicle. 12. At: The Verification step, turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. 13. Click: Upload VIN, to allow the VIN to be reported to the PC. 14. Select: Next Action. 15. The Home Page will appear. 16. Select: Next. 17. The Diagnostic Screen will appear. Note Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Control Module: > 10-07-30-002A > Jun > 10 > A/T Controls Snapshot Data Using (GDS) > Page 7213 Due to vehicle build, software and RPO variations, GDS may ask for additional information in Step 18. 18. Select: Engine ID, if prompted. 19. Select: Module Diagnostics. 20. Select: TCM. 21. Select: Data Display. 22. Select: The drop down menu to display the available Data Display selections. 23. Select: The appropriate Data Display for the snapshot to be taken. Note The snapshot data can be recorded at idle or on a hoist when using a shop PC. IF the vehicle is driven, the use of a laptop with GDS will be required. PC memory will determine the amount of snapshot recording time. 24. Select: Record Snapshot, when ready. 25. Select: Stop Snapshot, upon completion. 26. Insert: Comment. Use a name, the vehicle model or the concern and date in order to identify the snapshot. 27. Exit: The Data List. 28. Exit: The Diagnostic Screen. 29. The Home Page will appear with the snapshot on the right side. 30. Click: On the Snapshot to Highlight it. 31. Click: Tech Support. Note Enter the necessary e-mail information into ALL of the blank boxes. Failure to do so will result in an error message and the snapshot will not be sent. 32. The Send E-mail dialog box will appear. 1. SENDER: Enter your first name. Use only ONE name as multiple words may cause an error message. 2. RECIPIENT: Enter their e-mail address. Note An error message will occur if this box contains ANY spaces. 3. REPLY TO: Enter your first name here. An e-mail address can be used but it MUST NOT contain any spaces or unrecognized characters. 4. SUBJECT: Enter the appropriate information here, such as the condition, symptom, data parameter being investigated or DTC. 5. TEXT: Type a short message here, such as the test results, snapshot type, or a cell phone number. Note A copy of the snapshot will still reside on the PC. 33. Click: OK, to send the snapshot. Procedure to E-mail GDS Snapshot Data to TAC Important When e-mailing a snapshot to TAC, only send the snapshot data they have REQUESTED. 1. Select: Home Page. The snapshot will appear on the right side. 2. Click: On the Snapshot to Highlight it. 3. Click: Tech Support. 4. The Send E-mail dialog box will appear. Note Enter the necessary e-mail information into ALL of the blank boxes. Failure to do so will result in an error message and the snapshot will not be sent. 5. SENDER: Enter your first name here. Use only ONE name as multiple words may cause an error message. 6. RECIPIENT: Enter the USA or Canada TAC E-mail Address. Note An error message will occur if this box contains ANY spaces. 7. REPLY TO: Enter your first name here. An e-mail address can be used but it MUST NOT contain any spaces or unrecognized characters. 8. SUBJECT: Enter Your TAC Case Number & VIN Number here. Both numbers MUST appear in this box or the e-mail cannot be processed and will be deleted. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Control Module: > 10-07-30-002A > Jun > 10 > A/T Controls Snapshot Data Using (GDS) > Page 7214 9. TEXT: Type a short message here, such as the test results, snapshot type, or a cell phone number. Note A copy of the snapshot will still reside on the PC. 10. Click: OK, to send the snapshot. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Control Module: > 09-07-30-016A > Nov > 09 > A/T Controls Downshift Hesitation/Delayed Shifting Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T Controls - Downshift Hesitation/Delayed Shifting TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 09-07-30-016A Date: November 25, 2009 Subject: Transmission Hesitation, Delayed Shifting, Shifting at Wrong Time (Reprogram TCM) Models: 2010 Buick Enclave 2010 Chevrolet Equinox, Traverse 2010 GMC Acadia, Terrain 2010 Saturn OUTLOOK Equipped with 6T40/45 (RPOs MH7, MHC) or 6T70/75 (RPOs MH2, MH4, MY9, MH6) Automatic Transmission 2010 Buick LaCrosse Equipped with 3.0L (RPO LF1) Engine and 6T70 (RPOs MH2, MH4) Automatic Transmission 2010 Chevrolet Malibu 2010 Pontiac G6 2010 Saturn AURA Equipped with 6T40 (RPO MH8) Automatic Transmission All Vehicles Built Prior to the Following VIN Breakpoints: Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add models. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 09-07-30-016 (07- Transmission/Transaxle). Condition Some customers may comment on transmission downshift hesitation, delayed shifting and shifting at the wrong time. Correction A revised transmission calibration has been developed to address these issues. Reprogram the transmission control module (TCM) with updated calibration files using the TIS2WEB Service Programming System (SPS) application. Select SEQ Programming Sequence ECM/TCM from the Supported Controllers screen. Refer to SI and Service Programming System (SPS) documentation for programming instructions, if required. Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table above. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Control Module: > 10-07-30-002A > Jun > 10 > A/T Controls - Snapshot Data Using (GDS) Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T Controls - Snapshot Data Using (GDS) INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 10-07-30-002A Date: June 11, 2010 Subject: Navigation Procedure for Snapshot Data Using Global Diagnostic System (GDS), Uploading Snapshot Data to Computer and E-mailing Models: 2010-2011 Buick LaCrosse 2011 Buick Regal 2010-2011 Cadillac SRX 2010-2011 Chevrolet Camaro, Equinox 2010-2011 GMC Terrain Attention: For additional information about GDS and/or the snapshot feature, please review course number: 16048.26W Global Diagnostic System, at the GM training website: www.gmtraining.com. In Canada go to: www.gmprocanada.com. You may also utilize the Help Section of GDS by clicking on the Menu button that is on the lower left corner of the GDS screen. Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2011 model year and correct the step number referred to in the Note for Step 18. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 10-07-30-002 (Section 07 - Transmission/Transaxle). The Global Diagnostic System (GDS) and the multiple diagnostic interface (MDI) module will take the place of the Tech 2(R) on certain vehicles when communicating and diagnosing vehicle on-board electrical systems. This diagnostic tool platform and software will be required for use with all 2010 and later GM Global Architecture (Global A) vehicles beginning with the Chevrolet Camaro, followed by the Buick LaCrosse, Chevrolet Equinox, Cadillac SRX, GMC Terrain and Buick Regal. The following procedure is intended to show the user how to navigate to the appropriate data screen, upload a snapshot of the data to a computer and create an e-mail of the snapshot. The procedure is written for an automatic transmission, but is similar for other data screens. Procedure for GDS Navigating and Uploading Transmission Snapshot Data to a PC and Creating an E-mail 1. Turn OFF the ignition. 2. Connect the MDI to the Data Link Connector (DLC) of the vehicle. Note Use the USB port to make the following MDI connection: 3. Connect the MDI to a PC or laptop that has been downloaded with the GDS application from TIS2WEB. Note At least one Diagnostic Package must be installed on the PC to perform diagnostics. If GDS was just installed, select: Add New Diagnostic Package and then select: a Diagnostic Package to download. 4. Click: On the GDS icon on the PC. 5. The Login Page will appear. 6. Select: A User. 7. The ID Screen will appear. 8. Select: The serial number of the MDI being used. 9. Select: Connect. 10. Verify that the system status is ready by observing for a flashing PC light icon on the MDI. 11. Select: Make, Model and Model Year, in order to build the vehicle. 12. At: The Verification step, turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. 13. Click: Upload VIN, to allow the VIN to be reported to the PC. 14. Select: Next Action. 15. The Home Page will appear. 16. Select: Next. 17. The Diagnostic Screen will appear. Note Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Control Module: > 10-07-30-002A > Jun > 10 > A/T Controls - Snapshot Data Using (GDS) > Page 7224 Due to vehicle build, software and RPO variations, GDS may ask for additional information in Step 18. 18. Select: Engine ID, if prompted. 19. Select: Module Diagnostics. 20. Select: TCM. 21. Select: Data Display. 22. Select: The drop down menu to display the available Data Display selections. 23. Select: The appropriate Data Display for the snapshot to be taken. Note The snapshot data can be recorded at idle or on a hoist when using a shop PC. IF the vehicle is driven, the use of a laptop with GDS will be required. PC memory will determine the amount of snapshot recording time. 24. Select: Record Snapshot, when ready. 25. Select: Stop Snapshot, upon completion. 26. Insert: Comment. Use a name, the vehicle model or the concern and date in order to identify the snapshot. 27. Exit: The Data List. 28. Exit: The Diagnostic Screen. 29. The Home Page will appear with the snapshot on the right side. 30. Click: On the Snapshot to Highlight it. 31. Click: Tech Support. Note Enter the necessary e-mail information into ALL of the blank boxes. Failure to do so will result in an error message and the snapshot will not be sent. 32. The Send E-mail dialog box will appear. 1. SENDER: Enter your first name. Use only ONE name as multiple words may cause an error message. 2. RECIPIENT: Enter their e-mail address. Note An error message will occur if this box contains ANY spaces. 3. REPLY TO: Enter your first name here. An e-mail address can be used but it MUST NOT contain any spaces or unrecognized characters. 4. SUBJECT: Enter the appropriate information here, such as the condition, symptom, data parameter being investigated or DTC. 5. TEXT: Type a short message here, such as the test results, snapshot type, or a cell phone number. Note A copy of the snapshot will still reside on the PC. 33. Click: OK, to send the snapshot. Procedure to E-mail GDS Snapshot Data to TAC Important When e-mailing a snapshot to TAC, only send the snapshot data they have REQUESTED. 1. Select: Home Page. The snapshot will appear on the right side. 2. Click: On the Snapshot to Highlight it. 3. Click: Tech Support. 4. The Send E-mail dialog box will appear. Note Enter the necessary e-mail information into ALL of the blank boxes. Failure to do so will result in an error message and the snapshot will not be sent. 5. SENDER: Enter your first name here. Use only ONE name as multiple words may cause an error message. 6. RECIPIENT: Enter the USA or Canada TAC E-mail Address. Note An error message will occur if this box contains ANY spaces. 7. REPLY TO: Enter your first name here. An e-mail address can be used but it MUST NOT contain any spaces or unrecognized characters. 8. SUBJECT: Enter Your TAC Case Number & VIN Number here. Both numbers MUST appear in this box or the e-mail cannot be processed and will be deleted. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Control Module: > 10-07-30-002A > Jun > 10 > A/T Controls - Snapshot Data Using (GDS) > Page 7225 9. TEXT: Type a short message here, such as the test results, snapshot type, or a cell phone number. Note A copy of the snapshot will still reside on the PC. 10. Click: OK, to send the snapshot. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission Control Module: Service and Repair 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission Control Solenoid Valve and Transmission Control Module Assembly Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the transmission control valve body cover. Refer to Control Valve Body Cover Replacement (See: Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Valve Body/Service and Repair/6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission/Control Valve Body Cover Replacement). 2. Disconnect the input speed sensor electrical connector (1). 3. Disconnect the output speed sensor electrical connector (2). 4. Disconnect the shift position switch electrical connector (3). 5. Remove the 3 control valve body bolts (1) M5 x 40.5. 6. Remove the 12 control valve body bolts (2) M6 x 97. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 7228 7. Remove the control solenoid valve assembly (3) with transmission control module. Caution: Use care when removing or installing the filter plate assembly. A broken or missing retaining tab may not adequately secure the filter plate to the control solenoid valve assembly, resulting in possible damage or contamination. 8. Remove the control solenoid valve assembly filter plate (4). Discard the filter plate. It is not reusable. 9. Inspect the channel plate bolt pass through holes for damage or brinelling. Any damage will cause incorrect pressure switch operation. Replace as necessary. Installation Procedure Caution: Use care when removing or installing the filter plate assembly. A broken or missing retaining tab may not adequately secure the filter plate to the control solenoid valve assembly, resulting in possible damage or contamination. 1. Install a NEW control solenoid valve assembly filter plate (4) to prevent fluid leaks past the fluid seals. 2. Install the control solenoid valve assembly (3) with transmission control module. 3. Hand start the control valve body bolts (1, 2). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 7229 Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener Caution). 4. Secure the 12 control valve body bolts (2) M6 x 97 and tighten in sequence to 10 Nm (89 lb in). 5. Secure the 3 control valve body bolts (1) M5 x 40.5 and tighten in sequence to 8 Nm (71 lb in). 6. Connect the input speed sensor electrical connector (1). 7. Connect the output speed sensor electrical connector (2). 8. Connect the shift position switch electrical connector (3). 9. Install the transmission control valve body cover. Refer to Control Valve Body Cover Replacement (See: Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Valve Body/Service and Repair/6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission/Control Valve Body Cover Replacement). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 7230 Control Module: Service and Repair 6T70/6T75 - Automatic Transmission Control Solenoid Valve and Transmission Control Module Assembly Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the control valve body cover. Refer to Control Valve Body Cover Replacement (See: Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Valve Body/Service and Repair/6T70/6T75 - Automatic Transmission/Control Valve Body Cover Replacement). 2. Disconnect the input speed sensor electrical connector (1). 3. Disconnect the output speed sensor electrical connector (2). 4. Disconnect the shift position switch electrical connector (3). 5. Remove the 4 control valve body bolts (1) M6 x 80. 6. Position the control solenoid valve spring (8) to the side. Spring will be released with the removal of the control valve body assembly. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 7231 7. Remove the 2 control valve body bolts (4) M6 x 65. 8. Remove the control valve body bolt (3) M6 x 42. 9. Remove the 3 control valve body bolts (2) M6 x 95. 10. Remove the control valve body bolt (7) M6 x 55. 11. Remove the control solenoid valve body and transmission control module (TCM) assembly (5). Caution: Use care when removing or installing the filter plate assembly. A broken or missing retaining tab may not adequately secure the filter plate to the control solenoid valve assembly, resulting in possible damage or contamination. 12. Remove the control solenoid valve assembly filter plate (6). * Discard the filler plate. It is not reusable. * Inspect the pressure switch manifold seals for damage or contamination. Replace the control solenoid valve assembly as necessary. * Inspect the upper channel plate bolt holes for damage, peening or burnelling. Any damage around the bolt holes near the pressure control switch (PCS) feed holes could cause leakage around the PCS seals. Replace the upper channel plate as necessary. Installation Procedure Caution: Use care when removing or installing the filter plate assembly. A broken or missing retaining tab may not adequately secure the filter plate to the control solenoid valve assembly, resulting in possible damage or contamination. 1. Install a NEW control solenoid valve assembly filter plate (1). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 7232 2. Install the control solenoid valve body and TCM assembly (5). 3. Rotate the control solenoid valve spring (7) into position. Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener Caution). Note: Install all bolts before tightening, then tighten in specified sequence. 4. Install the 4 control valve body bolts (1) M6 x 80. 5. Install the control valve body bolt (6) M6 x 55. 6. Install the 3 control valve body bolts (2) M6 x 95. 7. Install the control valve body bolt (3) M6 x 42. 8. Install the 2 control valve body bolts (4) M6 x 65 and tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb in). 9. Connect the input speed sensor electrical connector (1). 10. Connect the output speed sensor electrical connector (2). 11. Connect the shift position switch electrical connector (3). 12. Install the control valve body cover. Refer to Control Valve Body Cover Replacement (See: Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Valve Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 7233 Body/Service and Repair/6T70/6T75 - Automatic Transmission/Control Valve Body Cover Replacement). 13. For transmission control module programming and setup. Refer to Control Module References (See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning). Note: After an internal transmission repair or internal part replacement the service fast learn adapt procedure should be performed. 14. Perform the transmission adaptive values learn procedure. Refer to Transmission Adaptive Values Learn (See: Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/6T30/6T40/6T45 Automatic Transmission). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Differential > Control Unit, Differential Lock > Component Information > Locations Control Unit: Locations Wheels/Vehicle Underbody Component Views Rear Underbody Components 1 - K47 Rear Differential Clutch Control Module (F46) 2 - R6 Data Link Resistor Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Differential > Control Unit, Differential Lock > Component Information > Locations > Page 7238 Control Unit: Diagrams K47 Rear Differential Clutch Control Module (F46) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Differential > Control Unit, Differential Lock > Component Information > Service and Repair > Rear Differential Clutch Control Module Replacement Control Unit: Service and Repair Rear Differential Clutch Control Module Replacement Rear Differential Clutch Control Module Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Differential > Control Unit, Differential Lock > Component Information > Service and Repair > Rear Differential Clutch Control Module Replacement > Page 7241 Control Unit: Service and Repair Rear Wheel Drive Module Clutch Housing Replacement Rear Wheel Drive Module Clutch Housing Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Mode Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations Transmission Mode Switch: Locations Powertrain Component Views Automatic Transmission Electronic Components 1 - Q8 Control Solenoid Valve Assembly 2 - B15 Transmission Internal Mode Switch 3 - B14A Transmission Output Shaft Speed Sensor 4 - B14C Transmission Input Shaft Speed Sensor Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Exploded Views Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Exploded Views 6L50/6L80/6L90 - Automatic Transmission Disassembled Views Park System Components 50 - A/Trans Case 600 - Park Pawl Shaft 601 - Park Pawl Spring 602 - Park Pawl 603 - Park Pawl Actuator Guide Pin 604 - Manual Shift Shaft Seal 605 - Park Pawl Actuator Guide Seal 606 - Park Pawl Actuator Guide 607 - Park Pawl Actuator Assembly 608 - Manual Shift Detent Lever Shaft 609 - Manual Shift Detent (w/Shaft Position Switch) Lever Assembly 610 - Manual Shift Detent Lever Pin 611 - Manual Shift Shaft Pin 6T70/6T75 - Automatic Transmission Disassembled Views Park System Components Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Exploded Views > Page 7251 500 - Park Pawl Actuator Bracket Bolt 501 - Park Pawl Actuator Bracket 502 - Park Pawl Shaft 503 - Park Pawl 504 - Park Pawl Spring 505 - Park Pawl Actuator Guide Pin 506 - Park Pawl Actuator Guide 507 - A/Trans Case Assembly 508 - Manual Shift Shaft Seal 509 - Park Pawl Actuator Assembly 510 - Manual Shift Shaft Pin 511 - Manual Shift Detent (w/Shaft Position Switch) Lever Assembly Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Exploded Views > Page 7252 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Connector Views P2 Transmission Shift Lever Position Indicator Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Service and Repair 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission Manual Shift Detent Lever with Shaft Position Switch Assembly Replacement Special Tools * DT-48550 Detent Lever Pin Remover * J 41229 Manual Shaft Pin Installer Removal Procedure 1. Remove the control valve body. Refer to Control Valve Body Replacement (See: Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Valve Body/Service and Repair/6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission/Control Valve Body Replacement). 2. Remove the manual shaft detent lever hub pin (1) using DT-48550. 3. Remove the manual shift shaft pin (5). Discard the pin. 4. Remove the manual shaft (2). Note: Disconnect the actuator rod (3) from the detent lever assembly. Do not remove the actuator rod from the transmission case. 5. Remove the manual shaft detent (w/shift position switch) lever assembly (4). Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 7255 Note: Connect the actuator rod (3) to the detent lever assembly. 1. Install the manual shaft detent (w/shift position switch) lever assembly (4). Note: Lubricate the shaft with automatic transmission fluid to prevent damage to the manual shift shaft seal during installation. 2. Install the manual shaft (2). 3. Install the manual shaft detent lever hub pin (1) using DT-48550. Install the Manual Shaft Detent Lever Hub Pin to height of (b) 7.9 mm (0.38 in). Caution: Use the manual shaft pin installer to install the pin at the correct height in order to properly secure the manual shaft. If you install the pin too deep, the case bore may crack. 4. Install the NEW manual shift shaft pin (5) using J 41229. Use a NEW pin to ensure proper engagement with the case. Inspect pin installed height is within (a) 7.2-8.2 mm (0.28-0.32 in). 5. Install the control valve body. Refer to Control Valve Body Replacement (See: Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Valve Body/Service and Repair/6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission/Control Valve Body Replacement). 6. Perform the transmission adaptive values learn procedure. Refer to Transmission Adaptive Values Learn (See: Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/6T30/6T40/6T45 Automatic Transmission). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 7256 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Service and Repair 6T70/6T75 - Automatic Transmission Manual Shift Detent Lever with Shaft Position Switch Assembly Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 7257 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations Transmission Speed Sensor: Locations Powertrain Component Views Front Engine Components (LAF 1 of 2) 1 - Q38 Throttle Body 2 - G18 High Pressure Fuel Pump 3 - B23F Camshaft Position Sensor Intake 4 - B37 Engine Oil Pressure Switch 5 - B68 Knock Sensor 6 - B26 Crankshaft Position Sensor 7 - M64 Starter Motor 8 - Q2 A/C Compressor Clutch 9 - G13 Generator Front Engine Components (LAF 2 of 2) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 7261 1 - B47B Fuel Rail Pressure Sensor 2 - B74 Manifold Absolute Pressure Sensor 3 - Q17D Fuel Injector 4 4 - Q17C Fuel Injector 3 5 - B1 A/C Refrigerant Pressure Sensor 6 - Q17B Fuel Injector 2 7 - Q17A Fuel Injector 1 Left Rear Engine Components (LAF) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 7262 1 - T8D Ignition Coil 4 2 - T8C Ignition Coil 3 3 - T8B Ignition Coil 2 4 - T8A Ignition Coil 1 5 - Q6F Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Intake 6 - Q6E Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Exhaust 7 - B52A Heated Oxygen Sensor 1 8 - B52B Heated Oxygen Sensor 2 9 - B34 Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor 10 - B23E Camshaft Position Sensor - Exhaust 11 - Q12 Evaporative Emission Purge Solenoid Valve Top of the Engine Components (LF1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 7263 1 - B47B Fuel Rail Pressure Sensor 2 - Q17A Fuel Injector 1 3 - Q17C Fuel Injector 3 4 - Q17E Fuel Injector 5 5 - Q17F Fuel Injector 6 6 - Q17D Fuel Injector 4 7 - Q17B Fuel Injector 2 Left Front of the Engine Components (LF1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 7264 1 - T8B Ignition Coil 2 2 - T8D Ignition Coil 4 3 - T8F Ignition Coil 6 4 - G18 High Pressure Fuel Pump 5 - B34 Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor 6 - M64 Starter Motor 7 - B68B Knock Sensor 2 8 - B37 Engine Oil Pressure Switch 9 - B1 A/C Refrigerant Pressure Sensor 10 - Q2 A/C Compressor Clutch 11 - G13 Generator Right Rear of the Engine Components (LF1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 7265 1 - B74 Manifold Absolute Pressure Sensor 2 - T8E Ignition Coil 5 3 - T8C Ignition Coil 3 4 - Q12 Evaporative Emission Purge Solenoid Valve 5 - Q38 Throttle Body 6 - B23B Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 1 Intake 7 - B23D Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 2 Intake 8 - Q6D Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Bank 2 Intake 9 - Q6C Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Bank 2 Exhaust 10 - B23C Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 2 Exhaust 11 - Q6B Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Bank 1 Intake 12 - Q6A Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Bank 1 Exhaust 13 - B23A Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 1 Exhaust 14 - B68A Knock Sensor 1 15 - B26 Crankshaft Position Sensor 16 - T8A Ignition Coil 1 Front of the Exhaust System Components (LF1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 7266 1 - B52C Heated Oxygen Sensor - Bank 1 Sensor 1 2 - B52D Heated Oxygen Sensor - Bank 1 Sensor 2 3 - B52F Heated Oxygen Sensor - Bank 2 Sensor 2 4 - B52E Heated Oxygen Sensor Bank 2 Sensor 1 Automatic Transmission Electronic Components Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 7267 1 - Q8 Control Solenoid Valve Assembly 2 - B15 Transmission Internal Mode Switch 3 - B14A Transmission Output Shaft Speed Sensor 4 - B14C Transmission Input Shaft Speed Sensor Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > 6L50/6L80/6L90 - Automatic Transmission Transmission Speed Sensor: Diagrams 6L50/6L80/6L90 - Automatic Transmission Component Location Component Location 1 - Reaction Carrier Assembly 2 - Control Valve Body Assembly 3 - Input Carrier Assembly 4 Valve Channel Plate 5 - Output Carrier Assembly 6 - Park Gear 7 - Control Solenoid (w/Body and TCM) Valve Assembly 8 - Drive Link Assembly 9 - Drive Sprocket 10 - Torque Converter Assembly 11 - A/Trans Fluid Pump Assembly 12 - Differential Carrier Assembly 13 - Front Differential Ring Gear 14 - Driven Sprocket 15 - 1-2-3-4 Clutch Assembly Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > 6L50/6L80/6L90 - Automatic Transmission > Page 7270 16 - Low and Reverse Clutch Assembly 17 - 2-6 Clutch Assembly 18 - 3-5 Reverse Clutch Assembly 19 - 4-5-6 Clutch Assembly 20 - A/Trans Input Speed Sensor Assembly 21 - Reaction Sun Gear Assembly Disassembled Views Disassembled Views Case and Associated Parts 1 - Control Valve Body Cover Bolt 2 - Control Valve Body Cover Assembly 3 - Control Valve Body Cover Gasket 4 - Control Valve Body Bolt 5 - Control Valve Body Cover Hole Seal 6 - Control Solenoid Valve Heat Sink Bolt 7 - Control Solenoid (w/Body and TCM) Valve Assembly 8 - Control Valve Body Filter Plate Assembly 9 - Control Valve Body Bolt 10 - Control Valve Body Bolt Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > 6L50/6L80/6L90 - Automatic Transmission > Page 7271 11 - Control Valve Body Assembly 12 - Control Valve Body Spacer Plate Assembly 13 - A/Trans Fluid Level Control Valve 14 - A/Trans Fluid Level Control Valve Gasket 15 - A/Trans Output Speed Sensor Bolt 16 - A/Trans Output Speed Sensor Assembly 17 - Manual Shaft Detent Spring Bolt 18 - Manual Shaft Detent Lever Spring Assembly 19 - A/Trans Input Speed Sensor Assembly 20 - A/Trans Input Speed Sensor Assembly O-Ring Seal 21 - A/Trans Input Speed Sensor Bolt 22 Fill Cap 23 - Fill Cap Seal 24 - Torque Converter Housing Gasket 25 - A/Trans Fluid Pump Seal Assembly 26 - Torque Converter with Fluid Pump Housing Assembly 27 - Torque Converter and Differential Housing Bolt 28 - A/Trans Fluid Fill Tube Plug Assembly 29 - Torque Converter Assembly 3-5 Reverse Clutch Assembly 500 - A/Trans Input Shaft Speed Sensor Reluctor Wheel Retainer Ring 501 - A/Trans Input Shaft Speed Sensor Reluctor Wheel 502 - 3-5-Reverse Clutch Piston 503 - 3-5-Reverse Clutch Piston Return Spring Assembly 504 - 3-5-Reverse Clutch Piston Inner Seal 505 - 3-5-Reverse Clutch Piston Inner Seal 506 - 3-5-Reverse Clutch Piston Dam Seal 507 - 3-5-Reverse Clutch Apply Plate 508 - 3-5-Reverse Clutch Plate 509 - 3-5-Reverse Clutch (w/Friction Material) Plate Assembly 510 - 3-5-Reverse Clutch Backing Plate 511 - 3-5-Reverse Clutch Backing Plate Retainer Ring Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > 6L50/6L80/6L90 - Automatic Transmission > Page 7272 Transmission Speed Sensor: Diagrams 6T70/6T75 - Automatic Transmission Component Location Component Location Component Locations 1 - Manual Shift Detent Lever Assembly (w/Shaft Position Switch) 2 - Trans Fluid Level Indicator 3 Reaction Carrier Assembly 4 - Output Speed Sensor 5 - Input Carrier Assembly 6 - Output Carrier Assembly 7 - Front Differential Transfer Drive Gear 8 - Front Differential Transfer Drive Gear Support Assembly 9 - Torque Converter Assembly 10 - Park Pawl Actuator Assembly 11 - Fluid Pump Drive Link Assembly 12 - Park Pawl 13 - Front Differential Transfer Driven Gear Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > 6L50/6L80/6L90 - Automatic Transmission > Page 7273 14 - Front Differential Drive Pinion Gear 15 - Park Gear 16 - Torque Converter and Support and Fluid Pump Housing Assembly 17 - Front Differential Carrier Assembly 18 - Front Differential Carrier Baffle 19 - Front Differential Ring Gear 20 - Front Differential Drive Pinion Gear Lube Tube 21 - 1-2-3-4 Clutch Assembly 22 - Low and Reverse Clutch Assembly (OWC) 23 - Low and Reverse Clutch 24 - 2-6 Clutch Assembly 25 - 3-5-Reverse Clutch Assembly 26 - 4-5-6 Clutch Assembly 27 - Input Speed Sensor 28 - Case Cover Assembly 29 - Control Valve Body Cover 30 Input Shaft Speed Sensor Reluctor Wheel 31 - Control Valve Lower Body Assembly 32 - Control Valve Upper Body Assembly 33 - Control Valve Channel Plate Assembly 34 - Control Solenoid Valve Assembly (w/Body and TCM) 35 - Manual Valve Disassembled Views Disassembled Views Case and Associated Parts Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > 6L50/6L80/6L90 - Automatic Transmission > Page 7274 1 - Control Valve Body Cover Assembly 2 - Transmission Fluid Level Indicator Assembly 3 - Fluid Level Indicator Tube - Model Dependent 4 - Fluid Level Indicator Tube Seal - Model Dependent 5 Control Valve Body Cover Assembly Gasket 6 - Control Valve Body Cover Stud 7 - Control Valve Body Cover Bolt 8 - Control Valve Body Bolt 9 - Control Valve Body Bolt 10 - Control Valve Body Cover Wiring Connector Hole Seal 11 - Control Solenoid Valve Spring 12 - Control Valve Body Bolt 13 - Control Valve Body Bolt 14 - Control Valve Body Bolt 15 - Control Solenoid (w/Body and TCM) Valve Assembly 16 - Control Solenoid (w/Body and TCM) Filter Plate Assembly 17 - Manual Shaft Detent Assembly 18 - Control Valve Body Assembly 19 - A/Trans Output Speed Sensor Assembly 20 - A/Trans Output Speed Sensor Bolt 21 - A/Trans Case Assembly 22 - Torque Converter Housing Outer Seal 23 - Front Differential Drive Pinion (w/Transfer Gear) Gear Assembly 24 Front Differential Drive Pinion Gear Lube Tube Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > 6L50/6L80/6L90 - Automatic Transmission > Page 7275 25 - Torque Converter and Support and A/Trans Fluid Pump Housing Assembly 26 - Torque Converter and Differential Housing Bolt 27 - Torque Converter Assembly 28 - Dust Cover Push Pin - Model Dependent 29 - Dust Cover Bolt - Model Dependent 30 - Dust Cover - Model Dependent 31 - Front Differential Carrier Assembly 32 - Input Shaft Thrust Bearing Assembly 33 - A/Trans Case Cover Gasket 34 - A/Trans Case Cover Assembly 35 - A/Trans Case Cover Assembly Bolt A/Trans Case Cover, 2-6 and Low Reverse Pistons 400 - A/Trans Input Speed Sensor Assembly 401 - A/Trans Input Speed Sensor Bolt 402 - ISS O-Ring Seal 403 - A/Trans Case Cover Assembly 404 - 3-5-Reverse and 4-5-6 Clutch Fluid Seal Ring 405 - 2-6 Clutch Piston 406 - 2-6 Clutch Spring Assembly 407 - 2-6 Clutch Spring Retainer Ring 408 - Low and Reverse Clutch Piston Assembly 409 - Low and Reverse Clutch Spring 410 Low and Reverse Clutch Spring Retainer Ring Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission Output Speed Sensor Replacement Output Speed Sensor Replacement Input Speed Sensor Replacement Input Speed Sensor Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the transmission control valve body cover. Refer to Control Valve Body Cover Replacement (See: Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Valve Body/Service and Repair/6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission/Control Valve Body Cover Replacement). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 7278 2. Disconnect the input speed sensor electrical connector (1). 3. Remove the input speed sensor bolt (2) M6 x 23. 4. Remove the input speed sensor (3). 5. Remove the 3 input speed sensor seals (1). Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 7279 1. Install the 3 input speed sensor seals (1). 2. Install the input speed sensor (3). Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener Caution). 3. Install the input speed sensor bolt (2) M6 x 23 and tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb in). 4. Connect the input speed sensor electrical connector (1). 5. Install the transmission control valve body cover. Refer to Control Valve Body Cover Replacement (See: Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Valve Body/Service and Repair/6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission/Control Valve Body Cover Replacement). 6. Perform the transmission adaptive values learn procedure. Refer to Transmission Adaptive Values Learn (See: Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/6T30/6T40/6T45 Automatic Transmission). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 7280 Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair 6T70/6T75 - Automatic Transmission Output Speed Sensor Replacement Output Speed Sensor Replacement Input Speed Sensor Replacement Input Speed Sensor Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 6T30/6T40/6T45 - Automatic Transmission > Page 7281 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Locations Electronic Brake Control Module: Locations Front of Vehicle/Engine Compartment Component Views Engine Compartment Components (Chevrolet) 1 - B20 Brake Fluid Level Switch 2 - B19B Brake Booster Vacuum Sensor 3 - M75 Windshield Wiper Motor 4 - X50A Fuse Block - Underhood 5 - C1 Battery 6 - G24 Windshield Washer Pump 7 - B55 Hood Ajar Switch (BTV) 8 - P12B Horn - Low Note 9 - P12A Horn - High Note 10 - K17 Electronic Brake Control Module Engine Compartment Components (GMC) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 7287 1 - B20 Brake Fluid Level Switch 2 - B19B Brake Booster Vacuum Sensor 3 - M75 Windshield Wiper Motor 4 - X50A Fuse Block - Underhood 5 - C1 Battery 6 - G24 Windshield Washer Pump 7 - P12B Horn - Low Note 8 - B55 Hood Ajar Switch (BTV) 9 - K17 Electronic Brake Control Module 10 - P12A Horn - High Note Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 7288 Electronic Brake Control Module: Diagrams K17 Electronic Brake Control Module Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 7289 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 7290 Electronic Brake Control Module: Service and Repair Electronic Brake Control Module Replacement Removal Procedure Warning: Refer to Brake Fluid Irritant Warning (See: Service Precautions/Technician Safety Information/Brake Fluid Irritant Warning). Caution: Refer to Brake Fluid Effects on Paint and Electrical Components Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings). Caution: Always connect or disconnect the wiring harness connector from the EBCM/EBTCM with the ignition switch in the OFF position. Failure to observe this precaution could result in damage to the EBCM/EBTCM. 1. Place the ignition switch in the OFF position. 2. Remove the accessory wiring junction block. Refer to Accessory Wiring Junction Block Replacement (See: Maintenance/Fuses and Circuit Breakers/Fuse Block/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Accessory Wiring Junction Block Replacement). 3. Clean the electronic brake control module (EBCM) to brake pressure modulator valve (BPMV) area of any dirt or debris. 4. Disconnect the EBCM electrical connector by lifting the locking lever upward. 5. Remove the 4 EBCM bolts (1). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 7291 Note: Do not pry the components apart. 6. Carefully pull the EBCM (1) from the BPMV. 7. Remove the 12 EBCM seals, if necessary. Installation Procedure 1. Install the EBCM seals, if removed. 2. Install the EBCM (1) to the BPMV. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 7292 Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener Caution). 3. Install the 4 EBCM bolts (1) and tighten the bolts in a cross pattern to 3 Nm (27 lb in). 4. Install the accessory wiring junction block. Refer to Accessory Wiring Junction Block Replacement (See: Maintenance/Fuses and Circuit Breakers/Fuse Block/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Accessory Wiring Junction Block Replacement). 5. If installing a new EBCM, program the EBCM. Refer to Control Module References (See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning). 6. Without starting the engine, place the ignition switch in the ON position. 7. Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle (See: Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes: Testing and Inspection Brake Pressure Modulator Valve Pressure Sensor Calibration The brake pressure sensor does not require calibration often. Calibration of the brake pressure sensor might be required after certain service procedures are performed. Some of these procedures are as follows: * Electronic brake control module (EBCM) replacement * Brake pressure modulator valve assembly replacement The Brake Pressure Sensor Calibration procedure can be completed with a scan tool using the following steps: 1. Apply the parking brake, or set the transmission in the P position. 2. Release the brake pedal. 3. Install the scan tool to the data link connector. 4. Ignition ON, engine OFF 5. Select Brake Pressure Sensor Calibration in the EBCM Configuration/Reset Functions list. 6. Follow the scan tool directions to complete the calibration procedure. 7. Clear any DTCs that may be set. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes > Component Information > Service and Repair > Brake Pressure Modulator Valve Replacement Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes: Service and Repair Brake Pressure Modulator Valve Replacement Brake Pressure Modulator Valve Replacement Removal Procedure Warning: Refer to Brake Fluid Irritant Warning (See: Service Precautions/Technician Safety Information/Brake Fluid Irritant Warning). Caution: Refer to Brake Fluid Effects on Paint and Electrical Components Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings). Caution: Always connect or disconnect the wiring harness connector from the EBCM/EBTCM with the ignition switch in the OFF position. Failure to observe this precaution could result in damage to the EBCM/EBTCM. 1. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position. 2. Remove the accessory wiring junction block. Refer to Accessory Wiring Junction Block Replacement (See: Maintenance/Fuses and Circuit Breakers/Fuse Block/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Accessory Wiring Junction Block Replacement). 3. Disconnect the electronic brake control module (EBCM) electrical connector by lifting the locking tabs. 4. Disconnect the left front brake pipe fitting (1) at the brake pressure modulator valve (BPMV). 5. Cap the brake pipe fitting and plug the BPMV outlet port to prevent brake fluid loss and contamination. 6. Disconnect the right front brake pipe fitting (2) from the BPMV. 7. Cap the brake pipe fitting and plug the BPMV outlet port to prevent brake fluid loss and contamination. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes > Component Information > Service and Repair > Brake Pressure Modulator Valve Replacement > Page 7298 8. Disconnect the master cylinder primary brake pipe fitting (1) from the BPMV. 9. Cap the brake pipe fitting and plug the BPMV inlet port to prevent brake fluid loss and contamination. 10. Disconnect the master cylinder secondary brake pipe fitting (2) from the BPMV. 11. Cap the brake pipe fitting and plug the BPMV inlet port to prevent brake fluid loss and contamination. 12. Disconnect the left rear brake pipe fitting (1) from the BPMV. 13. Cap the brake pipe fitting and plug the BPMV outlet port to prevent brake fluid loss and contamination. 14. Disconnect the right rear brake pipe fitting (2) from the BPMV. 15. Cap the brake pipe fitting and plug the BPMV outlet port to prevent brake fluid loss and contamination. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes > Component Information > Service and Repair > Brake Pressure Modulator Valve Replacement > Page 7299 16. Remove the BPMV bolt (1). Note: Do not pry on the accumulator caps on the underside of the BPMV. 17. Carefully remove the BPMV assembly (1) by pulling straight upward. 18. Inspect the insulators for damage and replace, if necessary. 19. If replacing the BPMV, remove the EBCM. Refer to Electronic Brake Control Module Replacement (See: Electronic Brake Control Module/Service and Repair). Installation Procedure 1. Install the EBCM, if removed. Refer to Electronic Brake Control Module Replacement (See: Electronic Brake Control Module/Service and Repair). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes > Component Information > Service and Repair > Brake Pressure Modulator Valve Replacement > Page 7300 2. Install the BPMV assembly (1) to the bracket. Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener Caution). 3. Install the BPMV bolt (1) and tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb in). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes > Component Information > Service and Repair > Brake Pressure Modulator Valve Replacement > Page 7301 4. Connect the left rear brake pipe fitting (1) to the BPMV and tighten to 21 Nm (16 lb ft). 5. Connect the right rear brake pipe fitting (2) to the BPMV and tighten to 21 Nm (16 lb ft). 6. Connect the master cylinder primary brake pipe fitting (1) to the BPMV and tighten to 21 Nm (16 lb ft). 7. Connect the master cylinder secondary brake pipe fitting (2) to the BPMV and tighten to 21 Nm (16 lb ft). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes > Component Information > Service and Repair > Brake Pressure Modulator Valve Replacement > Page 7302 8. Connect the left front brake pipe fitting (1) to the BPMV and tighten to 21 Nm (16 lb ft). 9. Connect the right front brake pipe fitting (2) to the BPMV and tighten to 21 Nm (16 lb ft). 10. Connect the EBCM electrical connector. 11. Install the accessory wiring junction block. Refer to Accessory Wiring Junction Block Replacement (See: Maintenance/Fuses and Circuit Breakers/Fuse Block/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Accessory Wiring Junction Block Replacement). 12. Bleed the hydraulic brake system. Refer to Hydraulic Brake System Bleeding (Manual) (See: Brake Bleeding/Service and Repair)Hydraulic Brake System Bleeding (Pressure) (See: Brake Bleeding/Service and Repair). 13. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position. 14. Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle (See: Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle). 15. Observe the brake pedal feel after performing the diagnostic system check. If the pedal now feels spongy, air may have been in, or may have been introduced into the primary circuit. 16. If the pedal feels spongy, perform the Antilock Brake System Automated Bleed (See: Brake Bleeding/Service and Repair). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes > Component Information > Service and Repair > Brake Pressure Modulator Valve Replacement > Page 7303 Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes: Service and Repair Brake Pressure Modulator Valve Bracket Replacement Brake Pressure Modulator Valve Bracket Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Place the ignition switch in the OFF position. 2. Remove the accessory wiring junction block. Refer to Accessory Wiring Junction Block Replacement (See: Maintenance/Fuses and Circuit Breakers/Fuse Block/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Accessory Wiring Junction Block Replacement). 3. Remove the brake pressure modulator valve (BPMV) bolt (1). Note: Do not pry on the accumulator caps on the underside of the BPMV. 4. Without disconnecting the brake pipe fittings, carefully lift the BPMV assembly (1) upward to release the mounting pins from the BPMV bracket Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes > Component Information > Service and Repair > Brake Pressure Modulator Valve Replacement > Page 7304 insulators. 5. Position the BPMV assembly aside and secure with heavy mechanics wire or equivalent. 6. Remove the 2 BPMV bracket nuts (1). 7. Remove the BPMV bracket bolt (1). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes > Component Information > Service and Repair > Brake Pressure Modulator Valve Replacement > Page 7305 8. Remove the BPMV bracket (1). 9. Inspect the insulators for damage and replace, if necessary. Installation Procedure 1. Install the BPMV bracket (1). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes > Component Information > Service and Repair > Brake Pressure Modulator Valve Replacement > Page 7306 Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener Caution). 2. Install the BPMV bracket bolt (1) and tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb in). 3. Install the BPMV bracket nuts (1) and tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb in). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes > Component Information > Service and Repair > Brake Pressure Modulator Valve Replacement > Page 7307 4. Carefully position the BPMV assembly (1) to the BPMV bracket insulators. 5. Install the BPMV bolt (1) and tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb in). 6. Install the accessory wiring junction block. Refer to Accessory Wiring Junction Block Replacement (See: Maintenance/Fuses and Circuit Breakers/Fuse Block/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Accessory Wiring Junction Block Replacement). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Traction Control Switch > Component Information > Locations Traction Control Switch: Locations Instrument Panel/Center Console Component Views Right Side of the Instrument Panel Components 1 - F107 Steering Wheel Air Bag 2 - P19H Speaker - Left Front Tweeter 3 - E1K Accent Lamp Right Lower Instrument Panel 4 - X80G Accessory Power Receptacle - Instrument Panel 5 - E8K Instrument Panel Courtesy Lamp - Right (LTZ or SLT) 6 - S112 Fuel Economy Mode Switch 7 E1S Accent Lamp - Console Cupholder Right 8 - S75 Traction Control Switch 9 - X80B Accessory Power Receptacle - Center Console 2 10 - E1J Accent Lamp - Left Lower Instrument Panel Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Traction Control Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 7311 Traction Control Switch: Diagrams S75 Traction Control Switch Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Traction Control Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 7312 Traction Control Switch: Service and Repair Electronic Traction Control and Vehicle Stability Control Switch Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations Wheel Speed Sensor: Locations Wheels/Vehicle Underbody Component Views Wheel Components 1 - B5RF Wheel Speed Sensor - Right Front 2 - B5RR Wheel Speed Sensor - Right Rear 3 - B5LR Wheel Speed Sensor - Left Rear 4 - B5LF Wheel Speed Sensor - Left Front Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 7316 Wheel Speed Sensor: Diagrams B5LF Wheel Speed Sensor - Left Front B5LR Wheel Speed Sensor - Left Rear Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 7317 B5RF Wheel Speed Sensor - Right Front Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 7318 B5RR Wheel Speed Sensor - Right Rear Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 7319 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Wheel Speed Sensor Replacement Wheel Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Front Wheel Speed Sensor Replacement Front Wheel Speed Sensor Replacement Removal Procedure Warning: Refer to Brake Dust Warning (See: Service Precautions/Technician Safety Information/Brake Dust Warning). 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle (See: Maintenance/Vehicle Lifting/Service and Repair). 2. Remove the tire and wheel assembly. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation (See: Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair ). 3. Disconnect the wheel speed sensor electrical connector. 4. Remove the front brake hose bracket nut (1). 5. Release the front wheel speed sensor harness from the retainers on the front brake hose. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Wheel Speed Sensor Replacement > Page 7322 6. Remove the wheel speed sensor bolt (1). 7. Remove the wheel speed sensor (1) by pulling the sensor straight upward from the steering knuckle. Installation Procedure 1. Install the wheel speed sensor (1) to the steering knuckle. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Wheel Speed Sensor Replacement > Page 7323 Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener Caution). 2. Install the wheel speed sensor bolt (1) and tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb in). 3. Install the front brake hose bracket nut (1) and tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb in). 4. Connect the wheel speed sensor electrical connector. 5. Install the front wheel speed sensor harness to the retainers on the front brake hose. 6. Install the tire and wheel assembly. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation (See: Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Wheel Speed Sensor Replacement > Page 7324 Wheel Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Rear Wheel Speed Sensor Replacement Rear Wheel Speed Sensor Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Yaw Rate Sensor > Component Information > Locations Yaw Rate Sensor: Locations Passenger Compartment/Roof Component Views Left Side of the Passenger Compartment Components 1 - F105R Roof Rail Air Bag - Right 2 - F105L Roof Rail Air Bag - Left 3 - K36 Inflatable Restraint Sensing and Diagnostic Module 4 - B119 Multi-axis Acceleration Sensor Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Yaw Rate Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 7328 Yaw Rate Sensor: Diagrams B119 Multi-axis Acceleration Sensor Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Yaw Rate Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 7329 Yaw Rate Sensor: Testing and Inspection Vehicle Yaw Sensor Learn Note: The Multi-axis Acceleration Sensor is also known as the Inertia Sensor Module (IMU) in SPS and the Yaw Rate Sensor in the scan tool. The sensor must be configured using SPS before the vehicle yaw sensor learn is performed. The multi-axis acceleration sensor requires a SPS configuration and a yaw rate sensor learn. This is required after certain service procedures are performed. Some of these procedures are as follows: * Electronic brake control module (EBCM) replacement * Multi-axis acceleration sensor replacement * Vehicle yaw sensor replacement * Vehicle yaw sensor with lateral and longitudinal accelerometer sensor replacement The yaw rate sensor learn procedure can be completed with a scan tool using the following steps: 1. Place vehicle on a level surface. 2. Apply the parking brake, or set the transmission in the P position. 3. Install the scan tool to the data link connector. 4. Ignition ON, engine OFF 5. Select Yaw Rate Sensor Reset in the Multi-axis Acceleration Sensor Module Configuration/Reset Functions list. 6. Follow the scan tool directions to complete the calibration procedure. 7. Select Yaw Rate Sensor Learn in the Multi-axis Acceleration Sensor Module Configuration/Reset Functions list. 8. Follow the scan tool directions to complete the calibration procedure. 9. Select Yaw Rate Sensor Learn in the EBCM Configuration/Reset Functions list. 10. Follow the scan tool directions to complete the calibration procedure. 11. Clear any DTCs that may be set. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Yaw Rate Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 7330 Yaw Rate Sensor: Service and Repair Vehicle Yaw Sensor Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Antilock Brake Automated Bleed Procedure Brake Bleeding: Service and Repair Antilock Brake Automated Bleed Procedure Antilock Brake System Automated Bleed Warning: Refer to Brake Fluid Irritant Warning (See: Service Precautions/Technician Safety Information/Brake Fluid Irritant Warning). Caution: Refer to Brake Fluid Effects on Paint and Electrical Components Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings). Note: Before performing the antilock brake system (ABS) Automated Bleed Procedure, first perform a manual or pressure bleed of the base brake system. Refer to Hydraulic Brake System Bleeding (Manual) (See: )Hydraulic Brake System Bleeding (Pressure) (See: ). The automated bleed procedure is recommended when one of the following conditions exist: * Base brake system bleeding does not achieve the desired pedal height or feel * Extreme loss of brake fluid has occurred * Air ingestion is suspected in the secondary circuits of the brake modulator assembly The ABS Automated Bleed Procedure uses a scan tool to cycle the system solenoid valves and run the pump in order to purge any air from the secondary circuits. These circuits are normally closed off, and are only opened during system initialization at vehicle start up and during ABS operation. The automated bleed procedure opens these secondary circuits and allows any air trapped in these circuits to flow out toward the brake corners. Automated Bleed Procedure Caution: The Auto Bleed Procedure may be terminated at any time during the process by pressing the EXIT button. No further Scan Tool prompts pertaining to the Auto Bleed procedure will be given. After exiting the bleed procedure, relieve bleed pressure and disconnect bleed equipment per manufacturers instructions. Failure to properly relieve pressure may result in spilled brake fluid causing damage to components and painted surfaces. 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle (See: Maintenance/Vehicle Lifting/Service and Repair). 2. Remove all 4 tire and wheel assemblies. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation (See: Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair). 3. Inspect the brake system for leaks and visual damage. Refer to Symptoms - Hydraulic Brakes (See: Hydraulic System/Testing and Inspection/Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures/Symptoms - Hydraulic Brakes). Repair or replace components as needed. 4. Lower the vehicle. 5. Inspect the battery state of charge. Refer to Battery Inspection/Test (See: Starting and Charging/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Battery Inspection/Test). 6. Install a scan tool. 7. Turn the ignition ON, with the engine OFF. 8. With the scan tool, establish communications with the ABS system. Select Special Functions. Select Automated Bleed from the Special Functions menu. 9. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle (See: Maintenance/Vehicle Lifting/Service and Repair). 10. Following the directions given on the scan tool, pressure bleed the base brake system. Refer to Hydraulic Brake System Bleeding (Manual) (See: )Hydraulic Brake System Bleeding (Pressure) (See: ). 11. Follow the scan tool directions until the desired brake pedal height is achieved. 12. If the bleed procedure is aborted, a malfunction exists. Perform the following steps before resuming the bleed procedure: * If a DTC is detected, refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle (See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Descriptions/Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle) and diagnose the appropriate DTC. * If the brake pedal feels spongy, perform the conventional brake bleed procedure again. Refer to Hydraulic Brake System Bleeding (Manual) ( See: )Hydraulic Brake System Bleeding (Pressure) (See: ). 13. When the desired pedal height is achieved, press the brake pedal to inspect for firmness. 14. Lower the vehicle. 15. Remove the scan tool. 16. Install the tire and wheel assemblies. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation (See: Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair ). 17. Inspect the brake fluid level. Refer to Master Cylinder Reservoir Filling (See: Hydraulic System/Brake Master Cylinder/Service and Repair/Procedures/Master Cylinder Reservoir Filling). 18. Road test the vehicle while inspecting that the pedal remains high and firm. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Antilock Brake Automated Bleed Procedure > Page 7335 Brake Bleeding: Service and Repair Hydraulic Brake Bleeding (Manual) Hydraulic Brake System Bleeding (Manual) Warning: Refer to Brake Fluid Irritant Warning (See: Service Precautions/Technician Safety Information/Brake Fluid Irritant Warning). Caution: Refer to Brake Fluid Effects on Paint and Electrical Components Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings). 1. Place a clean shop cloth beneath the brake master cylinder to prevent brake fluid spills. 2. With the ignition OFF and the brakes cool, apply the brakes 3-5 times, or until the brake pedal effort increases significantly, in order to deplete the brake booster power reserve. 3. If you have performed a brake master cylinder bench bleeding on this vehicle, or if you disconnected the brake pipes from the master cylinder, you must perform the following steps: 1. Ensure that the brake master cylinder reservoir is full to the maximum-fill level. If necessary, add GM approved brake fluid from a clean, sealed brake fluid container. Refer to Fluid and Lubricant Recommendations (USA and Canada) (See: Maintenance). If removal of the reservoir cap and diaphragm is necessary, clean the outside of the reservoir on and around the cap prior to removal. 2. With the rear brake pipe installed securely to the master cylinder, loosen and separate the front brake pipe from the front port of the brake master cylinder. 3. Allow a small amount of brake fluid to gravity bleed from the open port of the master cylinder. 4. Reconnect the brake pipe to the master cylinder port and tighten securely. 5. Have an assistant slowly depress the brake pedal fully and maintain steady pressure on the pedal. 6. Loosen the same brake pipe to purge air from the open port of the master cylinder. 7. Tighten the brake pipe, then have the assistant slowly release the brake pedal. 8. Wait 15 seconds, then repeat steps 3.3-3.7 until all air is purged from the same port of the master cylinder. 9. With the front brake pipe installed securely to the master cylinder, after all air has been purged from the front port of the master cylinder, loosen and separate the rear brake pipe from the master cylinder, then repeat steps 3.3-3.8. 10. After completing the final master cylinder port bleeding procedure, ensure that both of the brake pipe-to-master cylinder fittings are properly tightened. 4. Fill the brake master cylinder reservoir with GM approved brake fluid from a clean, sealed brake fluid container. Ensure that the brake master cylinder reservoir remains at least half-full during this bleeding procedure. Add fluid as needed to maintain the proper level. Refer to Master Cylinder Reservoir Filling (See: Hydraulic System/Brake Master Cylinder/Service and Repair/Procedures/Master Cylinder Reservoir Filling). Clean the outside of the reservoir on and around the reservoir cap prior to removing the cap and diaphragm. 5. Install a proper box-end wrench onto the RIGHT REAR wheel hydraulic circuit bleeder valve. 6. Install a transparent hose over the end of the bleeder valve. 7. Submerge the open end of the transparent hose into a transparent container partially filled with GM approved brake fluid from a clean, sealed brake fluid container. 8. Have an assistant slowly depress the brake pedal fully and maintain steady pressure on the pedal. 9. Loosen the bleeder valve to purge air from the wheel hydraulic circuit. 10. Tighten the bleeder valve, then have the assistant slowly release the brake pedal. 11. Wait 15 seconds, then repeat steps 8-10 until all air is purged from the same wheel hydraulic circuit. 12. With the right rear wheel hydraulic circuit bleeder valve tightened securely, after all air has been purged from the right rear hydraulic circuit, install a proper box-end wrench onto the LEFT FRONT wheel hydraulic circuit bleeder valve. 13. Install a transparent hose over the end of the bleeder valve, then repeat steps 7-11. 14. With the left front wheel hydraulic circuit bleeder valve tightened securely, after all air has been purged from the left front hydraulic circuit, install a proper box-end wrench onto the LEFT REAR wheel hydraulic circuit bleeder valve. 15. Install a transparent hose over the end of the bleeder valve, then repeat steps 7-11. 16. With the left rear wheel hydraulic circuit bleeder valve tightened securely, after all air has been purged from the left rear hydraulic circuit, install a proper box-end wrench onto the RIGHT FRONT wheel hydraulic circuit bleeder valve. 17. Install a transparent hose over the end of the bleeder valve, then repeat steps 7-11. 18. After completing the final wheel hydraulic circuit bleeding procedure, ensure that each of the 4 wheel hydraulic circuit bleeder valves are properly tightened. 19. Fill the brake master cylinder reservoir to the maximum-fill level with GM approved brake fluid from a clean, sealed brake fluid container. 20. Slowly depress and release the brake pedal. Observe the feel of the brake pedal. Note: If it is determined that air was induced into the system upstream of the ABS modulator prior to servicing, the Antilock Brake System Automated Bleed (See: ) must be performed. 21. If the brake pedal feels spongy, repeat the bleeding procedure again. If the brake pedal still feels spongy after repeating the bleeding procedure, perform the following steps: 1. Inspect the brake system for external leaks. Refer to Brake System External Leak Inspection (See: Hydraulic System/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Brake System External Leak Inspection). 2. Pressure bleed the hydraulic brake system in order to purge any air that may still be trapped in the system. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Antilock Brake Automated Bleed Procedure > Page 7336 22. Turn the ignition key ON, with the engine OFF. Check to see if the brake system warning lamp remains illuminated. Note: DO NOT allow the vehicle to be driven until it is diagnosed and repaired. 23. If the brake system warning lamp remains illuminated, refer to Diagnostic Starting Point Vehicle (See: Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Diagnostic Starting Point - Vehicle). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Antilock Brake Automated Bleed Procedure > Page 7337 Brake Bleeding: Service and Repair Hydraulic Brake Bleeding (Pressure) Hydraulic Brake System Bleeding (Pressure) Special Tools * J-29532 - Diaphragm Type Brake Pressure Bleeder, or equivalent * J-35589-A - Master Cylinder Bleeder Adapter For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Hydraulic System/Tools and Equipment). Warning: Refer to Brake Fluid Irritant Warning (See: Service Precautions/Technician Safety Information/Brake Fluid Irritant Warning). Caution: Refer to Brake Fluid Effects on Paint and Electrical Components Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings). 1. Place a clean shop cloth beneath the brake master cylinder to prevent brake fluid spills. 2. With the ignition OFF and the brakes cool, apply the brakes 3-5 times, or until the brake pedal effort increases significantly, in order to deplete the brake booster power reserve. 3. If you have performed a brake master cylinder bench bleeding on this vehicle, or if you disconnected the brake pipes from the master cylinder, you must perform the following steps: 1. Ensure that the brake master cylinder reservoir is full to the maximum-fill level. If necessary, add GM approved brake fluid from a clean, sealed brake fluid container. Refer to Fluid and Lubricant Recommendations (USA and Canada) (See: Maintenance). If removal of the reservoir cap and diaphragm is necessary, clean the outside of the reservoir on and around the cap prior to removal. 2. With the rear brake pipe installed securely to the master cylinder, loosen and separate the front brake pipe from the front port of the brake master cylinder. 3. Allow a small amount of brake fluid to gravity bleed from the open port of the master cylinder. 4. Reconnect the brake pipe to the master cylinder port and tighten securely. 5. Have an assistant slowly depress the brake pedal fully and maintain steady pressure on the pedal. 6. Loosen the same brake pipe to purge air from the open port of the master cylinder. 7. Tighten the brake pipe, then have the assistant slowly release the brake pedal. 8. Wait 15 seconds, then repeat steps 3.3-3.7 until all air is purged from the same port of the master cylinder. 9. With the front brake pipe installed securely to the master cylinder, after all air has been purged from the front port of the master cylinder, loosen and separate the rear brake pipe from the master cylinder, then repeat steps 3.3-3.8. 10. After completing the final master cylinder port bleeding procedure, ensure that both of the brake pipe-to-master cylinder fittings are properly tightened. 4. Fill the brake master cylinder reservoir to the maximum-fill level with GM approved brake fluid from a clean, sealed brake fluid container. Refer to Master Cylinder Reservoir Filling (See: Hydraulic System/Brake Master Cylinder/Service and Repair/Procedures/Master Cylinder Reservoir Filling). Clean the outside of the reservoir on and around the reservoir cap prior to removing the cap and diaphragm. 5. Install the J-35589-A - Master Cylinder Bleeder Adapter to the brake master cylinder reservoir. 6. Check the brake fluid level in the J-29532 - Diaphragm Type Brake Pressure Bleeder, or equivalent , or equivalent. Add GM approved brake fluid from a clean, sealed brake fluid container as necessary to bring the level to approximately the half-full point. 7. Connect the J-29532 - Diaphragm Type Brake Pressure Bleeder, or equivalent , or equivalent, to the J-35589-A - Master Cylinder Bleeder Adapter. 8. Charge the J-29532 - Diaphragm Type Brake Pressure Bleeder, or equivalent , or equivalent, air tank to 175-205 kPa (25-30 psi). 9. Open the J-29532 - Diaphragm Type Brake Pressure Bleeder, or equivalent , or equivalent, fluid tank valve to allow pressurized brake fluid to enter the brake system. 10. Wait approximately 30 seconds, then inspect the entire hydraulic brake system in order to ensure that there are no existing external brake fluid leaks. Any brake fluid leaks identified require repair prior to completing this procedure. 11. Install a proper box-end wrench onto the RIGHT REAR wheel hydraulic circuit bleeder valve. 12. Install a transparent hose over the end of the bleeder valve. 13. Submerge the open end of the transparent hose into a transparent container partially filled with GM approved brake fluid from a clean, sealed brake fluid container. 14. Loosen the bleeder valve to purge air from the wheel hydraulic circuit. Allow fluid to flow until air bubbles stop flowing from the bleeder, then tighten the bleeder valve. 15. With the right rear wheel hydraulic circuit bleeder valve tightened securely, after all air has been purged from the right rear hydraulic circuit, install a proper box-end wrench onto the LEFT FRONT wheel hydraulic circuit bleeder valve. 16. Install a transparent hose over the end of the bleeder valve, then repeat steps 13-14. 17. With the left front wheel hydraulic circuit bleeder valve tightened securely, after all air has been purged from the left front hydraulic circuit, install a proper box-end wrench onto the LEFT REAR wheel hydraulic circuit bleeder valve. 18. Install a transparent hose over the end of the bleeder valve, then repeat steps 13-14. 19. With the left rear wheel hydraulic circuit bleeder valve tightened securely, after all air has been purged from the left rear hydraulic circuit, install a Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Antilock Brake Automated Bleed Procedure > Page 7338 proper box-end wrench onto the RIGHT FRONT wheel hydraulic circuit bleeder valve 20. Install a transparent hose over the end of the bleeder valve, then repeat steps 13-14. 21. After completing the final wheel hydraulic circuit bleeding procedure, ensure that each of the 4 wheel hydraulic circuit bleeder valves are properly tightened. 22. Close the J-29532 - Diaphragm Type Brake Pressure Bleeder, or equivalent , or equivalent, fluid tank valve, then disconnect the J-29532 Diaphragm Type Brake Pressure Bleeder, or equivalent , or equivalent, from the J-35589-A Master Cylinder Bleeder Adapter. 23. Remove the J-35589-A - Master Cylinder Bleeder Adapter from the brake master cylinder reservoir. 24. Fill the brake master cylinder reservoir to the maximum-fill level with GM approved brake fluid from a clean, sealed brake fluid container. 25. Slowly depress and release the brake pedal. Observe the feel of the brake pedal. Note: If it is determined that air was induced into the system upstream of the ABS modulator prior to servicing, the Antilock Brake System Automated Bleed (See: ) must be performed. 26. If the brake pedal feels spongy, perform the following steps: 1. Inspect the brake system for external leaks. Refer to Brake System External Leak Inspection (See: Hydraulic System/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Brake System External Leak Inspection). 2. Using a scan tool, perform the antilock brake system automated bleeding procedure to remove any air that may have been trapped in the brake pressure modulator valve (BPMV). Refer to Antilock Brake System Automated Bleed (See: ). 27. Turn the ignition key ON, with the engine OFF. Check to see if the brake system warning lamp remains illuminated. Note: DO NOT allow the vehicle to be driven until it is diagnosed and repaired. 28. If the brake system warning lamp remains illuminated, refer to Diagnostic Starting Point Vehicle (See: Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Diagnostic Starting Point - Vehicle). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Antilock Brake Automated Bleed Procedure > Page 7339 Brake Bleeding: Service and Repair Hydraulic Brake Flushing Hydraulic Brake System Flushing Warning: Refer to Brake Fluid Irritant Warning (See: Service Precautions/Technician Safety Information/Brake Fluid Irritant Warning). Caution: Refer to Brake Fluid Effects on Paint and Electrical Components Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings). 1. Inspect the brake fluid for the following conditions, indicating brake fluid contamination: * Fluid separation, indicating 2 types of fluid are present; a substance other than the recommended brake fluid has been introduced into the brake hydraulic system - Swirled appearance - oil-based substance - Layered appearance - silicone-based substance * Fluid discoloration, indicating the presence of moisture or particles that have been introduced into the brake hydraulic system - Cloudy appearance - moisture - Dark appearance/suspended particles in fluid - dirt, rust, corrosion, brake dust 2. Inspect the master cylinder reservoir cap diaphragm and the reservoir-to-master cylinder grommets for swelling, indicating brake fluid contamination. 3. If the brake fluid WAS contaminated with an oil-based or a silicone-based substance, indicated by fluid separation and/or a swollen master cylinder reservoir cap diaphragm and/or swollen reservoir-to-master cylinder grommets, perform the following: 1. Remove ALL of the following components listed from the vehicle. Each component contains internal rubber seals/linings which have been contaminated by the contaminated brake fluid in the brake hydraulic system. Refer to the procedures indicated: * Master Cylinder Replacement (See: Hydraulic System/Brake Master Cylinder/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement) * Front Brake Hose Replacement (See: Hydraulic System/Brake Hose/Line/Service and Repair/Front Brake Hose Replacement) * Rear Brake Hose Replacement (See: Hydraulic System/Brake Hose/Line/Service and Repair/Rear Brake Hose Replacement) * Front Brake Caliper Replacement (See: Disc Brake System/Brake Caliper/Service and Repair/Front Brake Caliper Replacement) * Rear Brake Caliper Replacement (See: Disc Brake System/Brake Caliper/Service and Repair/Rear Brake Caliper Replacement) * Brake Pressure Modulator Valve Replacement (See: Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems/Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes/Service and Repair/Brake Pressure Modulator Valve Replacement) 2. Clean out all the hydraulic brake pipes using denatured alcohol, or equivalent. 3. Dry the brake pipes using non-lubricated, filtered air. 4. Repair or replace ALL of the following components listed and install them to the vehicle. Each component contains internal rubber seals/linings which have been contaminated by the contaminated brake fluid in the brake hydraulic system. Refer to the procedures indicated: * Master Cylinder Replacement (See: Hydraulic System/Brake Master Cylinder/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement); also perform the following: Clean the brake master cylinder reservoir using denatured alcohol, or equivalent, then dry the reservoir using non-lubricated, filtered air. Inspect the reservoir for cracks and/or damage and replace if necessary. Refer to Master Cylinder Reservoir Replacement (See: Hydraulic System/Brake Fluid Reservoir/Service and Repair). Replace the brake master cylinder reservoir cap diaphragm. * Front Brake Hose Replacement (See: Hydraulic System/Brake Hose/Line/Service and Repair/Front Brake Hose Replacement) * Rear Brake Hose Replacement (See: Hydraulic System/Brake Hose/Line/Service and Repair/Rear Brake Hose Replacement) * Front Brake Caliper Replacement (See: Disc Brake System/Brake Caliper/Service and Repair/Front Brake Caliper Replacement) * Rear Brake Caliper Replacement (See: Disc Brake System/Brake Caliper/Service and Repair/Rear Brake Caliper Replacement) * Brake Pressure Modulator Valve Replacement (See: Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems/Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes/Service and Repair/Brake Pressure Modulator Valve Replacement) 4. If the brake fluid was NOT contaminated with an oil-based or a silicone-based substance, but WAS contaminated with water or dirt, rust, corrosion, and/or brake dust, replace the brake master cylinder reservoir cap diaphragm. The diaphragm may have allowed the moisture or particles to enter the hydraulic system. 5. Fill the brake master cylinder reservoir to the maximum-fill level with approved brake fluid from a clean, sealed brake fluid container as specified in the owners manual. 6. Pressure bleed the hydraulic brake system. Begin the procedure with the pressure bleeder reservoir filled to the maximum-fill level with the correct brake fluid as indicated. Refer to Hydraulic Brake System Bleeding (Manual) (See: )Hydraulic Brake System Bleeding (Pressure) (See: ). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Pedal Assy > Component Information > Service and Repair Brake Pedal Assy: Service and Repair Brake Pedal Assembly Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the instrument carrier. Refer to Instrument Carrier Replacement (Equinox) (See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Instrument Carrier Replacement)Instrument Carrier Replacement (Terrain) (See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Instrument Carrier Replacement). 2. Remove the accelerator pedal position sensor. Refer to Accelerator Pedal with Position Sensor Assembly Replacement () or Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor Replacement (See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor/Service and Repair). 3. Remove the brake pedal position sensor. Refer to Brake Pedal Position Sensor Replacement (See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Pedal Positioning System/Pedal Positioning Sensor/Service and Repair/Brake Pedal Position Sensor Replacement). 4. Remove the brake booster pushrod nut (1). 5. Disconnect the brake booster pushrod from the brake pedal pivot pin. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Pedal Assy > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 7343 6. Remove the brake pedal bracket bolt (1). 7. Remove the instrument carrier. Refer to Instrument Carrier Replacement (Equinox) (See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Instrument Carrier Replacement)Instrument Carrier Replacement (Terrain) (See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Instrument Carrier Replacement). 8. Remove the brake pedal bracket nuts (1) and the brake pedal assembly. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Pedal Assy > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 7344 1. Install the brake pedal assembly to the dash panel reinforcement plate. Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener Caution). 2. Install the brake pedal bracket nuts (1) and tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb ft). 3. Install the brake pedal bracket bolt (1) and tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb ft). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Pedal Assy > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 7345 4. Connect the brake booster pushrod from the brake pedal pivot pin. 5. Install the brake booster pushrod nut (1) and tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb ft). 6. Install the brake pedal position sensor. Refer to Brake Pedal Position Sensor Replacement (See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Pedal Positioning System/Pedal Positioning Sensor/Service and Repair/Brake Pedal Position Sensor Replacement). 7. Install the accelerator pedal position sensor. Refer to Accelerator Pedal with Position Sensor Assembly Replacement () or Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor Replacement (See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor/Service and Repair). 8. Install the instrument carrier. Refer to Instrument Carrier Replacement (Equinox) (See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Instrument Carrier Replacement)Instrument Carrier Replacement (Terrain) (See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Instrument Carrier Replacement). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Brake Caliper: Testing and Inspection Brake Caliper Inspection Warning: Refer to Brake Dust Warning (See: Service Precautions/Technician Safety Information/Brake Dust Warning). 1. Inspect the brake caliper housing (1) for cracks, excess wear, and/or damage. If any of these conditions are present, the brake caliper requires replacement. 2. Inspect the caliper piston dust boot seal (2) for cracks, tears, cuts, deterioration and/or improper seating in the caliper body. If any of these conditions are present, the brake caliper requires overhaul or replacement. 3. Inspect for brake fluid leakage around the caliper piston dust boot seal (2) and on the disc brake pads. If there is any evidence of brake fluid leakage, the brake caliper requires overhaul or replacement. 4. Inspect for smooth and complete travel of the caliper pistons into the caliper bores: The movement of the caliper pistons into the caliper bores should be smooth and even. If the caliper piston is frozen or difficult to bottom, the caliper requires overhaul or replacement. * For single piston caliper applications, insert a discarded inner brake pad (2) or block of wood in front of the piston. Using a large C-clamp (1) installed over the body of the caliper (3) and against the brake pad or block of wood, slowly bottom the piston in the bore. * For dual piston caliper applications, insert a discarded inner brake pad (2) or block of wood in front of the pistons. Using 2 large C-clamps (1) installed over the body of the caliper (3) and against the brake pad or block of wood, slowly bottom the pistons evenly into the bores. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Brake Caliper Replacement Brake Caliper: Service and Repair Front Brake Caliper Replacement Front Brake Caliper Replacement Removal Procedure Warning: Refer to Brake Dust Warning (See: Service Precautions/Technician Safety Information/Brake Dust Warning). Warning: Refer to Brake Fluid Irritant Warning (See: Service Precautions/Technician Safety Information/Brake Fluid Irritant Warning). 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle (See: Maintenance/Vehicle Lifting/Service and Repair). 2. Remove the tire and wheel assembly. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation (See: Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair ). 3. Remove the brake hose fitting bolt (1). Note: Do not reuse the brake hose fitting gaskets. 4. Remove and discard the brake hose fitting gaskets (2) from the brake hose fitting (3). 5. Cap the brake hose fitting to prevent brake fluid loss and contamination. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Brake Caliper Replacement > Page 7352 Note: * DO NOT use any air tools to remove or install the guide pin bolts. Use hand tools ONLY. * Install an open end wrench to hold the caliper guide pin in line with the brake caliper while removing or installing the caliper guide pin bolt. DO NOT allow the open end wrench to come in contact with the brake caliper. Allowing the open end wrench to come in contact with the brake caliper will cause a pulsation when the brakes are applied. 6. Using a backup wrench to hold the brake caliper guide pin stationary, remove the brake caliper guide pin bolts (1). 7. Remove the brake caliper. Installation Procedure 1. Install the brake caliper. Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener Caution). 2. Hold the brake caliper guide pin stationary and install the brake caliper guide pin bolts (1) and tighten to 27 Nm (20 lb ft). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Brake Caliper Replacement > Page 7353 Note: Install new brake hose fitting gaskets. 3. Assemble the brake hose fitting bolt (1) and the 2 new brake hose fitting gaskets (2) to the font brake hose fitting (3). 4. Install the brake hose assembly and tighten the brake hose fitting bolt to 40 Nm (30 lb ft). 5. Bleed the hydraulic brake system. Refer to Hydraulic Brake System Bleeding (Manual) (See: Brake Bleeding/Service and Repair)Hydraulic Brake System Bleeding (Pressure) (See: Brake Bleeding/Service and Repair). 6. Install the tire and wheel assembly. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation (See: Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Brake Caliper Replacement > Page 7354 Brake Caliper: Service and Repair Rear Brake Caliper Replacement Rear Brake Caliper Replacement Removal Procedure Warning: Refer to Brake Dust Warning (See: Service Precautions/Technician Safety Information/Brake Dust Warning). Warning: Refer to Brake Fluid Irritant Warning (See: Service Precautions/Technician Safety Information/Brake Fluid Irritant Warning). 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle (See: Maintenance/Vehicle Lifting/Service and Repair). 2. Remove the tire and wheel assembly. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation (See: Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair ). 3. Remove the brake hose fitting bolt (1). 4. Remove the brake hose fitting (2) from the brake caliper. Note: Do not reuse the brake hose fitting gaskets. 5. Remove and discard the brake hose fitting gaskets (3). 6. Cap the brake hose fitting to prevent brake fluid loss and contamination. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Brake Caliper Replacement > Page 7355 Note: * DO NOT use any air tools to remove or install the guide pin bolts. Use hand tools ONLY. * Install an open end wrench to hold the caliper guide pin in line with the brake caliper while removing or installing the caliper guide pin bolt. DO NOT allow the open end wrench to come in contact with the brake caliper. Allowing the open end wrench to come in contact with the brake caliper will cause a pulsation when the brakes are applied. 7. Hold the brake caliper guide pin stationary and remove the brake caliper guide pin bolts (1). 8. Remove the brake caliper. Installation Procedure 1. Install the brake caliper. Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener Caution). 2. Hold the brake caliper guide pin stationary and install the brake caliper guide pin bolts (1) and tighten to 27 Nm (20 lb ft). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Brake Caliper Replacement > Page 7356 Note: Install new brake hose fitting gaskets. 3. Assemble the brake hose fitting bolt (1) to the brake hose fitting (2) with 2 new brake hose fitting gaskets (3). 4. Install the brake hose assembly to the brake caliper and tighten the brake hose fitting bolt to 52 Nm (38 lb ft). 5. Bleed the hydraulic brake system. Refer to Hydraulic Brake System Bleeding (Manual) (See: Brake Bleeding/Service and Repair)Hydraulic Brake System Bleeding (Pressure) (See: Brake Bleeding/Service and Repair). 6. Install the tire and wheel assembly. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation (See: Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Brake Caliper Replacement > Page 7357 Brake Caliper: Service and Repair Front Brake Caliper Hardware Replacement Front Brake Caliper Hardware Replacement Removal Procedure Warning: Refer to Brake Dust Warning (See: Service Precautions/Technician Safety Information/Brake Dust Warning). 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle (See: Maintenance/Vehicle Lifting/Service and Repair). 2. Remove the tire and wheel assembly. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation (See: Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair ). Note: * DO NOT use any air tools to remove or install the guide pin bolts. Use hand tools ONLY. * Install an open end wrench to hold the caliper guide pin in line with the brake caliper while removing or installing the caliper guide pin bolt. DO NOT allow the open end wrench to come in contact with the brake caliper. Allowing the open end wrench to come in contact with the brake caliper will cause a pulsation when the brakes are applied. 3. Hold the brake caliper guide pin stationary and remove the brake caliper guide pin bolts (1). Caution: Support the brake caliper with heavy mechanic wire, or equivalent, whenever it is separated from its mount and the hydraulic flexible brake hose is still connected. Failure to support the caliper in this manner will cause the flexible brake hose to bear the weight of the caliper, which may cause damage to the brake hose and in turn may cause a brake fluid leak. 4. Remove the brake caliper and support with heavy mechanics wire or equivalent. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Brake Caliper Replacement > Page 7358 5. Remove the upper guide pin (1) and seal. Note: The lower brake caliper guide pin is equipped with a bushing and is not interchangeable with the upper guide pin. 6. Remove the lower guide pin (2) and seal. Installation Procedure Note: The guide pins are not interchangeable. Note the location of the guide pins. 1. Apply a light coat of high temperature silicone brake lubricant to the brake caliper guide pins. 2. Install the upper guide pin (1) and seal. 3. Ensure the lip of the seal is fully seated in the groove of the brake caliper guide pin and the brake caliper bracket. 4. Install the lower guide pin (2) and seal. 5. Ensure the lip of the seal is fully seated in the groove of the brake caliper guide pin and the brake caliper bracket. 6. Position the brake caliper to the bracket. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Brake Caliper Replacement > Page 7359 Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener Caution). 7. Hold the brake caliper guide pin stationary and tighten the brake caliper guide pin bolts (1) to 27 Nm(20 lb ft). 8. Install the tire and wheel assembly. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation (See: Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Brake Caliper Replacement > Page 7360 Brake Caliper: Service and Repair Rear Brake Caliper Hardware Replacement Rear Brake Caliper Hardware Replacement Removal Procedure Warning: Refer to Brake Dust Warning (See: Service Precautions/Technician Safety Information/Brake Dust Warning). 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle (See: Maintenance/Vehicle Lifting/Service and Repair). 2. Remove the tire and wheel assembly. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation (See: Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair ). Note: * DO NOT use any air tools to remove or install the guide pin bolts. Use hand tools ONLY. * Install an open end wrench to hold the caliper guide pin in line with the brake caliper while removing or installing the caliper guide pin bolt. DO NOT allow the open end wrench to come in contact with the brake caliper. Allowing the open end wrench to come in contact with the brake caliper will cause a pulsation when the brakes are applied. 3. Hold the brake caliper guide pins stationally and remove the brake caliper guide pin bolts (1). Caution: Support the brake caliper with heavy mechanic wire, or equivalent, whenever it is separated from its mount and the hydraulic flexible brake hose is still connected. Failure to support the caliper in this manner will cause the flexible brake hose to bear the weight of the caliper, which may cause damage to the brake hose and in turn may cause a brake fluid leak. 4. Remove the brake caliper and support with heavy mechanics wire or equivalent. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Brake Caliper Replacement > Page 7361 5. Remove the brake caliper guide pins (1) and seals (2). Installation Procedure 1. Apply a light coat of high temperature silicone brake lubricant to the brake caliper guide pins. 2. Assemble the brake caliper guide pins (1) to the guide pin seals (2). 3. Ensure the lip of the seal is fully seated in the groove of the brake caliper guide pin. 4. Install the upper and lower guide pins and seals to the brake caliper bracket. 5. Ensure the lip of the seal is fully seated in the groove of the brake caliper bracket. 6. Position the brake caliper to the bracket. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Brake Caliper Replacement > Page 7362 Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener Caution). 7. Hold the brake caliper guide pins stationary and tighten the brake caliper guide pin bolts (1) to 27 Nm (20 lb ft). 8. Install the tire and wheel assembly. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation (See: Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Brake Caliper Replacement > Page 7363 Brake Caliper: Service and Repair Front Brake Caliper Replacement Front Brake Caliper Replacement Removal Procedure Warning: Refer to Brake Dust Warning (See: Service Precautions/Technician Safety Information/Brake Dust Warning). Warning: Refer to Brake Fluid Irritant Warning (See: Service Precautions/Technician Safety Information/Brake Fluid Irritant Warning). 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle (See: Maintenance/Vehicle Lifting/Service and Repair). 2. Remove the tire and wheel assembly. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation (See: Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair ). 3. Remove the brake hose fitting bolt (1). Note: Do not reuse the brake hose fitting gaskets. 4. Remove and discard the brake hose fitting gaskets (2) from the brake hose fitting (3). 5. Cap the brake hose fitting to prevent brake fluid loss and contamination. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Brake Caliper Replacement > Page 7364 Note: * DO NOT use any air tools to remove or install the guide pin bolts. Use hand tools ONLY. * Install an open end wrench to hold the caliper guide pin in line with the brake caliper while removing or installing the caliper guide pin bolt. DO NOT allow the open end wrench to come in contact with the brake caliper. Allowing the open end wrench to come in contact with the brake caliper will cause a pulsation when the brakes are applied. 6. Using a backup wrench to hold the brake caliper guide pin stationary, remove the brake caliper guide pin bolts (1). 7. Remove the brake caliper. Installation Procedure 1. Install the brake caliper. Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener Caution). 2. Hold the brake caliper guide pin stationary and install the brake caliper guide pin bolts (1) and tighten to 27 Nm (20 lb ft). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Brake Caliper Replacement > Page 7365 Note: Install new brake hose fitting gaskets. 3. Assemble the brake hose fitting bolt (1) and the 2 new brake hose fitting gaskets (2) to the font brake hose fitting (3). 4. Install the brake hose assembly and tighten the brake hose fitting bolt to 40 Nm (30 lb ft). 5. Bleed the hydraulic brake system. Refer to Hydraulic Brake System Bleeding (Manual) (See: Brake Bleeding/Service and Repair)Hydraulic Brake System Bleeding (Pressure) (See: Brake Bleeding/Service and Repair). 6. Install the tire and wheel assembly. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation (See: Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair). Rear Brake Caliper Replacement Rear Brake Caliper Replacement Removal Procedure Warning: Refer to Brake Dust Warning (See: Service Precautions/Technician Safety Information/Brake Dust Warning). Warning: Refer to Brake Fluid Irritant Warning (See: Service Precautions/Technician Safety Information/Brake Fluid Irritant Warning). 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle (See: Maintenance/Vehicle Lifting/Service and Repair). 2. Remove the tire and wheel assembly. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation (See: Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair ). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Brake Caliper Replacement > Page 7366 3. Remove the brake hose fitting bolt (1). 4. Remove the brake hose fitting (2) from the brake caliper. Note: Do not reuse the brake hose fitting gaskets. 5. Remove and discard the brake hose fitting gaskets (3). 6. Cap the brake hose fitting to prevent brake fluid loss and contamination. Note: * DO NOT use any air tools to remove or install the guide pin bolts. Use hand tools ONLY. * Install an open end wrench to hold the caliper guide pin in line with the brake caliper while removing or installing the caliper guide pin bolt. DO NOT allow the open end wrench to come in contact with the brake caliper. Allowing the open end wrench to come in contact with the brake caliper will cause a pulsation when the brakes are applied. 7. Hold the brake caliper guide pin stationary and remove the brake caliper guide pin bolts (1). 8. Remove the brake caliper. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Brake Caliper Replacement > Page 7367 Installation Procedure 1. Install the brake caliper. Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener Caution). 2. Hold the brake caliper guide pin stationary and install the brake caliper guide pin bolts (1) and tighten to 27 Nm (20 lb ft). Note: Install new brake hose fitting gaskets. 3. Assemble the brake hose fitting bolt (1) to the brake hose fitting (2) with 2 new brake hose fitting gaskets (3). 4. Install the brake hose assembly to the brake caliper and tighten the brake hose fitting bolt to 52 Nm (38 lb ft). 5. Bleed the hydraulic brake system. Refer to Hydraulic Brake System Bleeding (Manual) (See: Brake Bleeding/Service and Repair)Hydraulic Brake System Bleeding (Pressure) (See: Brake Bleeding/Service and Repair). 6. Install the tire and wheel assembly. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation (See: Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Brake Caliper Replacement > Page 7368 Front Brake Caliper Hardware Replacement Front Brake Caliper Hardware Replacement Removal Procedure Warning: Refer to Brake Dust Warning (See: Service Precautions/Technician Safety Information/Brake Dust Warning). 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle (See: Maintenance/Vehicle Lifting/Service and Repair). 2. Remove the tire and wheel assembly. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation (See: Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair ). Note: * DO NOT use any air tools to remove or install the guide pin bolts. Use hand tools ONLY. * Install an open end wrench to hold the caliper guide pin in line with the brake caliper while removing or installing the caliper guide pin bolt. DO NOT allow the open end wrench to come in contact with the brake caliper. Allowing the open end wrench to come in contact with the brake caliper will cause a pulsation when the brakes are applied. 3. Hold the brake caliper guide pin stationary and remove the brake caliper guide pin bolts (1). Caution: Support the brake caliper with heavy mechanic wire, or equivalent, whenever it is separated from its mount and the hydraulic flexible brake hose is still connected. Failure to support the caliper in this manner will cause the flexible brake hose to bear the weight of the caliper, which may cause damage to the brake hose and in turn may cause a brake fluid leak. 4. Remove the brake caliper and support with heavy mechanics wire or equivalent. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Brake Caliper Replacement > Page 7369 5. Remove the upper guide pin (1) and seal. Note: The lower brake caliper guide pin is equipped with a bushing and is not interchangeable with the upper guide pin. 6. Remove the lower guide pin (2) and seal. Installation Procedure Note: The guide pins are not interchangeable. Note the location of the guide pins. 1. Apply a light coat of high temperature silicone brake lubricant to the brake caliper guide pins. 2. Install the upper guide pin (1) and seal. 3. Ensure the lip of the seal is fully seated in the groove of the brake caliper guide pin and the brake caliper bracket. 4. Install the lower guide pin (2) and seal. 5. Ensure the lip of the seal is fully seated in the groove of the brake caliper guide pin and the brake caliper bracket. 6. Position the brake caliper to the bracket. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Brake Caliper Replacement > Page 7370 Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener Caution). 7. Hold the brake caliper guide pin stationary and tighten the brake caliper guide pin bolts (1) to 27 Nm(20 lb ft). 8. Install the tire and wheel assembly. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation (See: Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair). Rear Brake Caliper Hardware Replacement Rear Brake Caliper Hardware Replacement Removal Procedure Warning: Refer to Brake Dust Warning (See: Service Precautions/Technician Safety Information/Brake Dust Warning). 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle (See: Maintenance/Vehicle Lifting/Service and Repair). 2. Remove the tire and wheel assembly. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation (See: Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair ). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Brake Caliper Replacement > Page 7371 Note: * DO NOT use any air tools to remove or install the guide pin bolts. Use hand tools ONLY. * Install an open end wrench to hold the caliper guide pin in line with the brake caliper while removing or installing the caliper guide pin bolt. DO NOT allow the open end wrench to come in contact with the brake caliper. Allowing the open end wrench to come in contact with the brake caliper will cause a pulsation when the brakes are applied. 3. Hold the brake caliper guide pins stationally and remove the brake caliper guide pin bolts (1). Caution: Support the brake caliper with heavy mechanic wire, or equivalent, whenever it is separated from its mount and the hydraulic flexible brake hose is still connected. Failure to support the caliper in this manner will cause the flexible brake hose to bear the weight of the caliper, which may cause damage to the brake hose and in turn may cause a brake fluid leak. 4. Remove the brake caliper and support with heavy mechanics wire or equivalent. 5. Remove the brake caliper guide pins (1) and seals (2). Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Brake Caliper Replacement > Page 7372 1. Apply a light coat of high temperature silicone brake lubricant to the brake caliper guide pins. 2. Assemble the brake caliper guide pins (1) to the guide pin seals (2). 3. Ensure the lip of the seal is fully seated in the groove of the brake caliper guide pin. 4. Install the upper and lower guide pins and seals to the brake caliper bracket. 5. Ensure the lip of the seal is fully seated in the groove of the brake caliper bracket. 6. Position the brake caliper to the bracket. Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener Caution). 7. Hold the brake caliper guide pins stationary and tighten the brake caliper guide pin bolts (1) to 27 Nm (20 lb ft). 8. Install the tire and wheel assembly. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation (See: Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair). Front Brake Caliper Bracket Replacement Front Brake Caliper Bracket Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Brake Caliper Replacement > Page 7373 Removal Procedure Warning: Refer to Brake Dust Warning (See: Service Precautions/Technician Safety Information/Brake Dust Warning). 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle (See: Maintenance/Vehicle Lifting/Service and Repair). 2. Remove the tire and wheel assembly. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation (See: Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair ). Note: * DO NOT use any air tools to remove or install the guide pin bolts. Use hand tools ONLY. * Install an open end wrench to hold the caliper guide pin in line with the brake caliper while removing or installing the caliper guide pin bolt. DO NOT allow the open end wrench to come in contact with the brake caliper. Allowing the open end wrench to come in contact with the brake caliper will cause a pulsation when the brakes are applied. 3. Hold the brake caliper guide pin stationary and remove the brake caliper guide pin bolts (1). Caution: Support the brake caliper with heavy mechanic wire, or equivalent, whenever it is separated from its mount and the hydraulic flexible brake hose is still connected. Failure to support the caliper in this manner will cause the flexible brake hose to bear the weight of the caliper, which may cause damage to the brake hose and in turn may cause a brake fluid leak. 4. Remove the brake caliper and support with heavy mechanics wire or equivalent. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Brake Caliper Replacement > Page 7374 Note: Note the location of the wear sensor for correct installation. 5. Remove the inner brake pad (1). 6. Remove the outer brake pad (2). 7. Remove the brake pad springs (1). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Brake Caliper Replacement > Page 7375 8. Remove the brake caliper bracket bolts (1). 9. Remove the brake caliper bracket (1). Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Brake Caliper Replacement > Page 7376 1. Install the brake caliper bracket (1). Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener Caution). 2. Install the brake caliper bracket bolts (1) and tighten to 190 Nm (140 lb ft). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Brake Caliper Replacement > Page 7377 3. Install the brake pad springs (1). Note: Note the location of the wear sensor for correct installation. 4. Install the inner brake pad (1). 5. Install the outer brake pad (2). 6. Position the brake caliper to the bracket. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Brake Caliper Replacement > Page 7378 7. Hold the brake caliper guide pins stationary and tighten the brake caliper guide pin bolts (1) to 27 Nm (20 lb ft). 8. Install the tire and wheel assembly. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation (See: Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair). Rear Brake Caliper Bracket Replacement Rear Brake Caliper Bracket Replacement Removal Procedure Warning: Refer to Brake Dust Warning (See: Service Precautions/Technician Safety Information/Brake Dust Warning). 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle (See: Maintenance/Vehicle Lifting/Service and Repair). 2. Remove the tire and wheel assembly. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation (See: Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair ). Note: * DO NOT use any air tools to remove or install the guide pin bolts. Use hand tools ONLY. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Brake Caliper Replacement > Page 7379 * Install an open end wrench to hold the caliper guide pin in line with the brake caliper while removing or installing the caliper guide pin bolt. DO NOT allow the open end wrench to come in contact with the brake caliper. Allowing the open end wrench to come in contact with the brake caliper will cause a pulsation when the brakes are applied. 3. Hold the brake caliper guide pins stationary and remove the brake caliper guide pin bolts (1). Caution: Support the brake caliper with heavy mechanic wire, or equivalent, whenever it is separated from its mount and the hydraulic flexible brake hose is still connected. Failure to support the caliper in this manner will cause the flexible brake hose to bear the weight of the caliper, which may cause damage to the brake hose and in turn may cause a brake fluid leak. 4. Remove the brake caliper and support with heavy mechanics wire or equivalent. Note: Note the location of the wear sensor for correct installation. 5. Remove the outer brake pad (1). 6. Remove the inner brake pad (2). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Brake Caliper Replacement > Page 7380 7. Remove the brake pad springs (1). 8. Remove the brake caliper bracket bolts (1). 9. Remove the brake caliper bracket (1). Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Brake Caliper Replacement > Page 7381 1. Install the brake caliper bracket (1). Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener Caution). 2. Install the brake caliper bracket bolts (1) and tighten to 125 Nm (92 lb ft). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Brake Caliper Replacement > Page 7382 3. Install the brake pad springs (1). Note: Note the location of the wear sensor for correct installation. 4. Install the outer brake pad (1). 5. Install the inner brake pad (2). 6. Position the brake caliper to the bracket. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Brake Caliper Replacement > Page 7383 7. Hold the brake caliper guide pins stationary and tighten the brake caliper guide pin bolts (1) to 27 Nm (20 lb ft). 8. Install the tire and wheel assembly. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation (See: Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Pad > Component Information > Specifications Brake Pad: Specifications Brake Pads - Front and Rear Minimum Thickness .............................................................................. ...................................................................................................... 2.0 mm (0.08 in) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Pad > Component Information > Specifications > Page 7387 Brake Pad: Testing and Inspection Brake Pad Inspection Warning: Refer to Brake Dust Warning (See: Service Precautions/Technician Safety Information/Brake Dust Warning). 1. Inspect the disc brake pads at regular intervals, or whenever the tire and wheel assemblies are removed from the vehicle. 2. If replacement is necessary, always replace disc brake pads in axle sets. 3. Inspect both edges of the disc brake pad friction surfaces (3). The highest rate of wear normally occurs at the trailing edge of the disc brake pads. 4. Inspect the thickness of the disc brake pads (3) in order to ensure that they have not worn prematurely. The disc brake pad wear should be approximately even per axle set. 5. Both front and rear disc brake pads have integral, audible wear sensors (1). When the disc brake pad wear reaches the minimum allowable thickness, the wear sensor contacts the disc brake rotor (2). The wear indicator will then produce an audible, high-pitched warning noise during wheel rotation. 6. Replace the disc brake pads when the friction surface (3) is worn to within 0.76 mm (0.030 in) of the mounting plates. 7. Remove the brake calipers and inspect the friction surfaces of the inner and outer disc brake pads to ensure that they are level. Place the disc brake pad friction surfaces together and measure the gap between the surfaces. If more than 0.13 mm (0.005 in) gap exists midway between the length of the disc brake pads, replace the disc brake pads. 8. Verify that any disc brake pad shims that may be required are in place and not damaged or excessively corroded. Replace any missing or damaged shims in order to preserve proper disc brake performance. 9. Replace the disc brake pads if any have separated from the mounting plates. 10. Inspect the disc brake pads friction surfaces for cracks, fractures, or damage which may cause noise or otherwise impair disc brake performance. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Pad > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures Brake Pad: Procedures Brake Pad and Rotor Burnishing Warning Road test a vehicle under safe conditions and while obeying all traffic laws. Do not attempt any maneuvers that could jeopardize vehicle control. Failure to adhere to these precautions could lead to serious personal injury and vehicle damage. Burnishing the brake pads and brake rotors is necessary in order to ensure that the braking surfaces are properly prepared after service has been performed on the disc brake system. This procedure should be performed whenever the disc brake rotors have been refinished or replaced, and/or whenever the disc brake pads have been replaced. 1. Select a smooth road with little or no traffic. 2. Accelerate the vehicle to 48 km/h (30 mph). Note: Use care to avoid overheating the brakes while performing this step. 3. Using moderate to firm pressure, apply the brakes to bring the vehicle to a stop. Do not allow the brakes to lock. 4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 until approximately 20 stops have been completed. Allow sufficient cooling periods between stops in order to properly burnish the brake pads and rotors. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Pad > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 7390 Brake Pad: Removal and Replacement Front Disc Brake Pads Replacement Front Disc Brake Pads Replacement Removal Procedure Warning: Refer to Brake Dust Warning (See: Service Precautions/Technician Safety Information/Brake Dust Warning). 1. Inspect the fluid level in the brake master cylinder reservoir. 2. If the brake fluid level is midway between the maximum-full point and the minimum allowable level, no brake fluid needs to be removed before proceeding. 3. If the brake fluid level is higher than midway between the maximum-full point and the minimum allowable level, remove brake fluid to the midway point before proceeding. 4. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle (See: Maintenance/Vehicle Lifting/Service and Repair). 5. Remove the tire and wheel assembly. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation (See: Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair ). 6. Place a large C-clamp over the brake caliper body and against the outer brake pad. 7. Using the C-clamp, compress the brake caliper piston fully into the brake caliper bore. Note: * DO NOT use any air tools to remove or install the guide pin bolts. Use hand tools ONLY. * Install an open end wrench to hold the caliper guide pin in line with the brake caliper while removing or installing the caliper guide pin bolt. DO NOT allow the open end wrench to come in contact with the brake caliper. Allowing the open end wrench to come in contact with the brake caliper will cause a pulsation when the brakes are applied. 8. Using a backup wrench to hold the brake caliper guide pin stationary, remove the lower brake caliper guide pin bolt (1). 9. Pivot the brake caliper upward. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Pad > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 7391 Note: Note the location of the brake pad wear sensor for correct installation. 10. Remove the inner brake pad (1) and the outer brake pad (2). 11. Remove the upper and lower brake pad springs (1). 12. If installing new brake pads, discard the springs. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Pad > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 7392 Note: If installing new brake pads, install new springs. 1. Install the upper and lower brake pad springs (1). Note: Note the location of the brake pad wear sensor for correct installation. 2. Install the inner brake pad (1) and the outer brake pad (2). 3. Pivot the brake caliper to the installed position. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Pad > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 7393 Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener Caution). 4. Using a backup wrench to hold the brake caliper guide pin stationary, install the lower brake caliper guide pin bolt (1) and tighten to 27 Nm (20 lb ft). 5. Install the tire and wheel assembly. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation (See: Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair). 6. With the engine OFF, gradually apply the brake pedal to approximately 2/3 of its travel distance. 7. Slowly release the brake pedal. 8. Wait 15 seconds, then repeat steps 6-7 until a firm brake pedal is obtained. This will properly seat the brake caliper piston and brake pads. 9. Fill the master cylinder reservoir. Refer to Master Cylinder Reservoir Filling (See: Hydraulic System/Brake Master Cylinder/Service and Repair/Procedures/Master Cylinder Reservoir Filling). 10. Burnish the brake pads and rotors. Refer to Brake Pad and Rotor Burnishing (See: Procedures). Rear Disc Brake Pads Replacement Rear Disc Brake Pads Replacement Removal Procedure Warning: Refer to Brake Dust Warning (See: Service Precautions/Technician Safety Information/Brake Dust Warning). 1. Inspect the fluid level in the brake master cylinder reservoir. 2. If the brake fluid level is midway between the maximum-full point and the minimum allowable level, no brake fluid needs to be removed before proceeding. 3. If the brake fluid level is higher than midway between the maximum-full point and the minimum allowable level, remove brake fluid to the midway point before proceeding. 4. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle (See: Maintenance/Vehicle Lifting/Service and Repair). 5. Remove the tire and wheel assembly. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation (See: Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair ). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Pad > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 7394 Note: * DO NOT use any air tools to remove or install the guide pin bolts. Use hand tools ONLY. * Install an open end wrench to hold the caliper guide pin in line with the brake caliper while removing or installing the caliper guide pin bolt. DO NOT allow the open end wrench to come in contact with the brake caliper. Allowing the open end wrench to come in contact with the brake caliper will cause a pulsation when the brakes are applied. 6. Hold the brake caliper guide pin stationary and remove the lower brake caliper guide pin bolt (1). 7. Pivot the brake caliper (1) upward. 8. Place a block of wood or an old brake pad against the brake caliper pistons. 9. Using a brake pad spreader tool or equivalent, fully seat the caliper piston in the caliper bore. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Pad > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 7395 Note: Note the location of the brake pad wear sensor for correct installation. 10. Remove the outer brake pad (1) and the inner brake pad (2). 11. Remove the upper and lower brake pad springs (1). 12. If installing new brake pads, discard the springs. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Pad > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 7396 Note: If installing new brake pads, install new springs. 1. Install the upper and lower brake pad springs (1). Note: Note the location of the brake pad wear sensor for correct installation. 2. Install the outer brake pad (1) and the inner brake pad (2). 3. Pivot the brake caliper to the installed position. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Pad > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 7397 Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener Caution). 4. Using a backup wrench to hold the brake caliper guide pin stationary, install the lower brake caliper guide pin bolt (1) and tighten to 27 Nm (20 lb ft). 5. Install the tire and wheel assembly. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation (See: Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair). 6. With the engine OFF, gradually apply the brake pedal to approximately 2/3 of its travel distance. 7. Slowly release the brake pedal. 8. Wait 15 seconds, then repeat steps 6-7 until a firm brake pedal is obtained. This will properly seat the brake caliper pistons and brake pads. 9. Fill the master cylinder reservoir. Refer to Master Cylinder Reservoir Filling (See: Hydraulic System/Brake Master Cylinder/Service and Repair/Procedures/Master Cylinder Reservoir Filling). 10. Burnish the brake pads and rotors. Refer to Brake Pad and Rotor Burnishing (See: Procedures). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Brakes- Disc Brake Warranty Service And Procedures Technical Service Bulletin # 00-05-22-002L Date: 090326 Brakes- Disc Brake Warranty Service And Procedures INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 00-05-22-002L Date: March 26, 2009 Subject: Disc Brake Warranty Service and Procedures Models: 1999-2010 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks 2003-2010 HUMMER H2 2006-2010 HUMMER H3 1999-2004 Isuzu Light Duty Trucks (Canada Only) 2005-2009 Saab 9-7X (Canada Only) 1999-2010 Saturn Vehicles (Canada Only) EXCLUDING 2009-2010 Chevrolet Corvette ZR1 Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to inform you that due to improvements in vehicle brake corner and wheel design, assembly plant build processes and dealership required tools like the On-Car Lathe, measuring for Lateral Run Out (LRO) is no longer a required step when performing base brake service. Due to this change, you are no longer required to enter the LRO measurement on the repair order or in the warranty system failure code section. The bulletin information below and the base brake labor operations have been updated accordingly. Due to this change it is more important than ever to properly maintain your brake lathe (per the Brake Lathe Calibration Procedure in this bulletin). Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 00-05-22-002K (Section 05 Brakes). For your convenience, this bulletin updates and centralizes all GM's Standard Brake Service Procedures and Policy Guidelines for brake rotor and brake pad service and wear. For additional information, the Service Technical College lists a complete index of available Brake courses. This information can be accessed at www.gmtraining.com > resources > training materials > brakes courseware index. In Canada, refer to Service Know How course 55040.00V and Hydraulic Brake Certification program 15003.16H. Important PLEASE FAMILIARIZE YOURSELF WITH THESE UPDATES BEFORE PERFORMING YOUR NEXT GM BRAKE SERVICE. The following four (4) key steps are a summary of this bulletin and are REQUIRED in completing a successful brake service. 1. Measure and Document Pre-Service Rotor Thickness* (REQUIRED on Repair Order) determine rotor clean-up/refinish/replace 2. Properly clean ALL brake corner mating surfaces - hub, rotor and wheel 3. Properly clean-up/refinish rotor, measure and document post-service rotor thickness (REQUIRED on Repair Order) Important If it is determined the rotor needs to be refinished, verify lathe equipment is properly calibrated. 4. Properly reassemble the brake corner using proper torque tools, torque specification and torque sequence - wheel lug nuts. * The bulletin refers to Minimum Thickness specification as the minimum allowable thickness after refinish. Always refer to SI to verify the spec stamped on the rotor is the minimum thickness spec after refinish and not the discard spec. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Brakes- Disc Brake Warranty Service And Procedures > Page 7402 Bulletin Format ***REPAIR ORDER REQUIRED DOCUMENTATION Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Brakes- Disc Brake Warranty Service And Procedures > Page 7403 Important When using any one of the brake labor operations listed in this bulletin (except for H9709 - Brake Burnish), the following two rotor measurements (1. Original Rotor Thickness, 2. Refinished Rotor Thickness are required and MUST be written/documented on the repair order, or for your convenience, complete the form (GM Brake Service Repair Order Documentation for Required Measurements) shown above and attach it to the repair order. If the Warranty Parts Center generates a request, this Documentation/Form must be attached to the repair order that is sent back. Important Documentation of brake lathe maintenance and calibration as recommended by the lathe manufacturer must be available for review upon request. Repair Order Documentation - Rotor Original And Refinished Thickness - REQUIRED When resurfacing a brake rotor or drum, the ORIGINAL thickness (measured thickness before refinish) and REFINISHED thickness (measured thickness after refinish) MUST be written/documented on the repair order hard copy for each rotor serviced. If a rotor replacement is necessary, only the original thickness measurement needs to be recorded. Repair Order Documentation - Explanation of Part Replacement - REQUIRED If replacement of a brake component is necessary, proper documentation on the repair order is required. See the following examples: ^ Brake rotor replacement - Customer comment was brake pulsation. Rotor was refinished on a prior brake service. After rotor measurement, it was determined that refinishing the rotor again would take it under the Minimum Thickness specification. ^ Brake pad replacement - Customer comment was brake squeak noise. On inspection, found pads contaminated by fluid leak at caliper. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Brakes- Disc Brake Warranty Service And Procedures > Page 7404 TOOL INFORMATION CORRECTION PLATE PART INFORMATION Refer to TSB 01-05-23-001 for the Brake Align(R) application chart. For vehicles repaired under warranty, Brake Align(R) Run-Out Correction Plates should be submitted in the Net Amount at cost plus 40%. Brake Align(R) Run-Out Correction Plates are available through the following suppliers: - Dealer Equipment and Services - Brake Align(R) LLC (U.S. Dealers Only) * We believe this source and their products to be reliable. There may be additional manufacturers of such products. General Motors does not endorse, indicate any preference for or assume any responsibility for the products from this firm or for any such items, which may be available from other sources. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Brakes- Disc Brake Warranty Service And Procedures > Page 7405 WARRANTY INFORMATION Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Brakes- Disc Brake Warranty Service And Procedures > Page 7406 WORKSHEET - BRAKE LATHE CALIBRATION Important Brake lathe calibration should be performed and recorded monthly or if you are consistently measuring high LRO after rotor refinishing. Disclaimer GM Brake Service Procedure GM BRAKE SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Remove the wheel and caliper. 2. Measure rotor thickness. In order to determine if the rotor can be refinished, do the following steps: Important Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Brakes- Disc Brake Warranty Service And Procedures > Page 7407 If performing routine Brake Service for worn pads only, and the rotors are not damaged and measure within specification - DO NOT REFINISH ROTORS. 1. Remove the rotor(s). 2. Measure the rotor for original thickness using a brake micrometer. Multiple measure points should be taken and the lowest measurement should be recorded. 3. Reference the Minimum Thickness specification stamped on the backside of the rotor or SI for Minimum Thickness specification/other. In most cases, the rotor should be refinished unless the measurement taken makes it obvious that refinishing the rotor would take the measurement under the Minimum Thickness specification (then replacement is necessary). DO NOT use any other manufacturers rotor specifications. 3. ***Record the lowest ORIGINAL rotor thickness measurement on the repair order hard copy as noted in the "Repair Order Documentation - Rotor Refinish" section of this bulletin. 4. Clean all of the mating surfaces between the hub, the rotor and the wheel using the J 42450A Wheel Hub Cleaning Kit and J 41013 - Whiz Wheel(R). If rotors are not to be refinished - Go To Step 8. Important Cleaning all mating surfaces and making them free of corrosion, burrs and other debris (which includes removal of Hubless rotors) is critical and MUST be performed whether using an On-Car or Bench Lathe Refinish Procedure. 5. Be sure to follow the appropriate refinishing procedure listed below for the type of lathe you are using. Important Only replace the rotors if they do not meet the Minimum Thickness specification. Important DO NOT REFINISH NEW ROTORS. Important Only remove the necessary amount of material from each side of the rotor and note that equal amounts of material do not have to be removed from both sides on any brake system using a floating caliper. Important Prior to making the cut, install the recommended clip-on style disc silencer supplied with the lathe. Use of this silencer is critical to prevent chatter from occurring during the cut. Bench Type Lathe 1. Refinish the existing rotor on an approved, well-maintained lathe to guarantee smooth, flat and parallel surfaces. 2. Check for clean and true lathe adapters and make sure the arbor shoulder is clean and free of debris or burrs. For more information, see the "Brake Lathe Calibration Procedure (Bench-Type)" section in this bulletin. 3. On the outboard area of the rotor, position the cutting tools one eighth of an inch into the brake pad area of the rotor. Feed the cutting tools into the rotor until they cut the rotor to new metal, a full 360 degrees. Zero each dial and back off a full turn 4. Move the cutting bits to the middle of the rotor and do the same procedure. If zero is passed during the process, reset zero. Back off a full turn. 5. Position the cutting bits one eighth of an inch inside the inboard (closest to the hub) edge of the brake pad contact area. Do the same procedure. If zero is passed during the process, reset zero. 6. Back off a full turn and position the cutting bits all the way inboard in preparation to refinish the full rotor surface. Advance both tool cutters to the zero setting plus just enough to clean up the entire rotor surface. 7. After completing the refinish, sand both sides of the rotor for approximately one minute per side using a sanding block and 130-150 grit sandpaper to obtain a non-directional finish. On-Car Type Lathe 1. Reinstall the rotor(s). Important Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Brakes- Disc Brake Warranty Service And Procedures > Page 7408 When using the On-Car lathe on vehicles equipped with limited slip (or posi-trac) rear system, it is critical that the rear drive shaft is disconnected/disengaged prior to operation of the On-Car lathe. Remember to mark and re-index the drive shaft correctly on re-assembly to prevent creating driveline vibration. Whenever the lathe drive motor is being switched on, the operator MUST keep their body out of the wheel well area until the machine has reached its normal operating RPM. 2. Refinish the existing rotor on an approved, well-maintained lathe to guarantee smooth, flat and parallel surfaces. Important When raising the vehicle on the lift, be sure to have it at a good working height (waist high is average) to accommodate mounting the On-Car lathe. Optimally, the center piston on the lathe trolley will be mid-travel. If the lathe trolley center piston is completely compressed (bottoming out) or inversely fully extended and hanging off the vehicle hub, this could affect the calibration time of the lathe. 3. Select the correct adapter for the vehicle you're working on and mount it to the hub with the vehicle lug nuts. Hand tighten 34-41 Nm (25-30 lb ft) the nuts using equal torque. DO NOT use impact wrenches, excessive torque will damage the adapter. Important Ensure the adapter sits flush on the rotor hat surface. Be sure to remove any rust, rotor retaining clips, etc. that may preclude the adapter from sitting flat on the mounting surface. 4. Connect the lathe to the adapter, turn on the lathe and activate the computer to compensate for run-out in the hub. 5. Once the computer indicates the compensation process was successful, on the outboard area of the rotor, position the cutting tools one eighth of an inch into the brake pad area of the rotor. Feed the cutting tools into the rotor until they cut the rotor to new metal, a full 360 degrees. Zero each dial and back off a full turn. 6. Move the cutting bits to the middle of the rotor and do the same procedure. If zero is passed during the process, reset zero. Back off a full turn. 7. Position the cutting bits one eighth of an inch inside the inboard (closest to the hub) edge of the brake pad contact area. Do the same procedure. If zero is passed during the process, reset zero. 8. Back off a full turn and position the cutting bits all the way inboard in preparation to refinish the full rotor surface. Advance both tool cutters to the zero setting plus just enough to clean up the entire rotor surface. 9. After completing the refinish, sand both sides of the rotor for approximately one minute per side using a sanding block and 130-150 grit sandpaper to obtain a non-directional finish. 10. Dismount the lathe, but leave the lathe adapter attached to the vehicle. 6. Once the rotor has been properly machined, wash the rotor with soap and water (use a mild dish washing soap) or wipe it clean with GM approved brake cleaner, P/N 88862650 (Canadian P/N 88901247). Important Thoroughly cleaning the rotor will prevent the possible transfer of finite metal dust left as a by-product of machining to the pad material during the seating process, thus reducing the opportunity for squeaks or other noises to occur. 7. ***Record the REFINISHED rotor thickness measurement on the repair order hard copy. Refer to the "Repair Order Documentation - Rotor Refinish" section of this bulletin. 8. Setting up to measure for Lateral Run Out (LRO): Important Measuring for Lateral Run Out (LRO) (steps 8 - 15) is no longer required however, these steps are being left in the overall procedure as a good check to be performed in the case of a repeat pulsation complaint. If you are not checking for LRO, go to step 16. Bench-Type Lathe 1. Ensure that the mating surfaces of the rotor hat section and the hub mating surface are clean and free of debris. 2. Mount the new, original or refinished rotor onto the vehicle hub. Important Always hold the rotor on the bottom half so any debris that may be dislodged from the vents will fall out instead of falling into the mounting area. Any movement or jarring from the rotor falling over on the studs can release rust from the vents on the rotor. 3. Tilt the top of the rotor in towards the vehicle so you can see the studs and ease the rotor onto the studs. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Brakes- Disc Brake Warranty Service And Procedures > Page 7409 4. Slide the rotor all the way to the hub and hold it in place until you have placed one of the conical washers (with the tapered hole side facing out) and run the first lug nut up tight by hand so the rotor doesn't move when you release it. 5. Place the conical washers on the rest of the studs (with the tapered hole side facing out), start and snug the lug nuts by hand. 6. Using the one half inch drive impact wrench and a torque stick (J 39544) or equivalent, start with the lug nut opposite of the one you first tightened by hand and tighten the lug nuts using a star pattern until they touch the hub but do not completely torque. Then again, starting with the first lug nut you tightened by hand, tighten all the lug nuts in a star pattern to the specific vehicle torque specification. 7. DO NOT reinstall the caliper or the wheel at this time. On-Car Type Lathe 1. Leave the On-Car adapter on the wheel. 2. Proceed to Step 9. 9. Fasten the dial indicator to the steering knuckle so that the indicator needle contacts the rotor outboard friction surface approximately 6.35 mm (0.25 in) from the rotor's outer edge. The stylus should be perpendicular to the friction surface of the rotor. Important Make sure the dial indicator needle tip is screwed tight, a loose tip could cause false readings. 10. Measure for LRO. Follow the procedure below to determine if the LRO is within specification (0.050 mm (0.002 in) or LESS). 1. Rotate the rotor and locate the point on the rotor where the lowest dial indicator reading is indicated and set the dial indicator to zero. 2. Rotate the rotor from the low point and locate the point with the highest dial indicator reading (rotor "high spot"). Note the amount and mark the location of the "high spot" on the rotor and mark the closest wheel stud relative to this location. If the high point falls between two studs, mark both studs. In instances where the vehicle has "capped lug nuts" you should mark the hub. 11. If the Lateral Run Out (LRO) measurement is 0.050 mm (0.002 in) or LESS, no correction is necessary. Go to Step 15 if this is the first rotor completed. Go to Step 16 if this is the second rotor completed. If the LRO is GREATER than 0.050 mm (0.002 in), go to Step 12. 12. If the LRO measurement is greater than 0.050 mm (0.002 in), use the following procedure to correct for LRO: Important If the LRO measurement is over 0.279 mm (0.011 in), determine the source or cause of the LRO and correct it (i.e. verify drive axle nut torque specification, refinished rotor is source of LRO due to a lathe qualification issue - see "Brake Lathe Calibration Procedure"). Hubless Rotor 1. Remove the rotor and using the Brake Align(R) application chart (found in TSB 01-05-23-001B), choose the correct plate to bring the rotor LRO to 0.050 mm (0.002 in) or less. The plates come in 0.0762 mm (0.003 in), 0.1524 mm (0.006 in) and 0.2286 (0.009 in) compensation. For more information on proper plate selection, see the instruction video/DVD included in the "Brake Align(R)" kit or TSB 01-05-23-001B. 2. Align the V-notch of the selected Brake Align(R) correction plate to the marked wheel stud ("high spot") or between the two points marked (if the "high spot" is between two wheel studs). Important IF Brake Align(R) Correction Plates are not available for the vehicle being serviced, refer to SI Document - Brake Rotor Assembled Lateral Runout Correction for correcting LRO. Important Per Brake Align(R) manufacturer, NEVER attempt to stack two or more Correction Plates together on one hub. NEVER attempt to reuse a previously installed Correction Plate. 3. Reinstall the rotor using the same method and precautions as the first time - found in Step 8. Make sure to index the rotor correctly to the marks made in step 10, otherwise LRO will be comprised. Hubbed / Captured / Trapped Rotor 1. Measure the rotor thickness. 2. Refinish or replace the rotor (see Service Information for further details). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Brakes- Disc Brake Warranty Service And Procedures > Page 7410 13. Use a Dial Indicator to measure the rotor to verify the LRO is within specification. 14. If using, BENCH LATHE - DO NOT remove conical washers and lug nuts at this time. ON-CAR LATHE - You must remove adapter and install conical washers and lug nuts to retain rotor position. Important For Hubless rotor design, while removing the adapter, you must hold the rotor tight to the hub and install the top conical washer and lug nut first to ensure no debris falls between the surface while removing the adapter. Then, install the remaining conical washers and lug nuts. Otherwise, LRO will be comprised. 15. Perform Steps 1 through 7 on the opposite side of the vehicle (steps 1-12, if performing LRO). 16. Reinstall the rotors on both sides of the vehicle and perform the following steps: 1. Reinstall the calipers and pads. 2. Pump the brakes to pressurize the calipers. 3. Remove the lug nuts/conical washers. 4. Install and properly torque the wheels. Important It is critical to follow the star pattern wheel torque procedure and use the proper tools (torque stick or torque wrench) as referenced in SI. 17. Road test the vehicle to verify the repairs. Brake Lathe Calibration Procedure BRAKE LATHE CALIBRATION PROCEDURE Calibration of the brake lathe should be performed and recorded monthly or whenever post-service brake rotor LRO measurements are consistently reading above specification. BENCH-TYPE LATHE Use the following procedure to calibrate a Bench-type brake lathe: 1. After refinishing a rotor, loosen the arbor nut and while holding the inside bell clamp to keep it from rotating, rotate the rotor 180 degrees. 2. Retighten the arbor nut and set the dial indicator on the rotor using the same instructions as checking the run out on the vehicle. 3. Rotate the arbor and read the runout. 4. Divide the reading by two and this will give you the amount of runout the lathe is cutting into the rotor. Important If there is any runout, you will need to machine the inside bell clamp in place on the lathe (this procedure is for a Bench type lathe ONLY, DO NOT machine inside the bell clamp on an On-Car type lathe). Machining the Inside Bell Clamp (Bench Type Lathe Only) Any nicks or burrs on the shoulder of the arbor must be removed. An 80-grit stone can be used to accomplish this. Spray WD-40(R) on the shoulder and with the lathe running, hold the stone flat against the shoulder surface using slight pressure. When the burrs are gone, clean the surface. Burrs must also be removed from the hub of the inside bell clamp. This can be accomplished with the stone and WD-40(R). Keep the stone flat on the hub while removing the burrs. After removing the burrs, clean the hub. Place the bell clamp on the arbor of the lathe and use the small radius adapters first and then spacers to allow you to tighten the arbor nut to secure the bell clamp to the lathe. Position the tool bit in the left hand of the rotor truer so you can machine the face of the bell clamp. Machine the face of the bell clamp taking just enough off of it to cut the full face of the clamp the full 360 degrees. Before you loosen the arbor nut, match mark the hub of the bell clamp to the arbor and line up these marks before machining a rotor. A magic marker can be used to make the match marks. Machine a rotor and recheck the calibration. Repeat this procedure on all Inside Bell Clamps used. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Brakes- Disc Brake Warranty Service And Procedures > Page 7411 Important If runout is still present, contact the brake lathe supplier. ON-CAR TYPE LATHE Use the following procedure to calibrate an On-Car brake lathe: 1. Connect the lathe to a vehicle using the appropriate adapter. 2. Attach a vise-grip dial indicator to a fixed point in the wheel well and bring the dial indicator to a flat surface on the cutting head. 3. Turn on the lathe and press the "start" button so the lathe begins to compensate. 4. Once compensation is complete, note the runout as measured by the dial indicator. Measured runout at this point is overstated given that it is outside the rotor diameter. 5. If runout is in excess of 0.1016 mm (0.004 in) (0.050 mm (0.002 in) as measured within the rotor diameter), calibration must be tightened. Follow manufacturer's instructions for tightening the calibration of the lathe. This information is found in the manual supplied with the lathe. Important If the machine is taking a long time to compensate during normal use, prior to checking the lathe calibration, it is recommended that the machine be disconnected from the adapter and the adapter (still connected to the vehicle) is rotated 180 degrees and the machine reattached. This will accomplish two things: - It will re-verify the machine is properly attached to the adapter. - It will change the location of the runout (phase) relative to the machine and thus possibly allow for quick compensation as a result of the position change. The following information has been added as a reference to ensure your Pro-Cut PFM lathe provides a consistent smooth surface finish over long term usage. Cutting Tips / Depth of Cut / Tip Life The cutting tips must be right side up. Reference marks always face up. The cutting tips may not have chips or dings in the surface of the points. Cuts of 0.1016-0.381 mm (0.004-0.015 in) will provide the best surface finish and the optimal tip life. When cleaning or rotating the cutting bits, make sure that the seat area for the tip on the tool is free and clear of debris. Cutting Head On each brake job, the technician must center the cutting head for that particular vehicle using one of the mounting bolt holes on the slide plate. Once the head is centered, it is vital that the technician use one hand to push the head firmly and squarely back into the dovetail on the slide plate while using the other hand to tighten the Allen-Hex bolt that secures the head. Failure to do this could result in chatter occurring during the cut. Tool Holder Plate (Cutting Head) The tool holder plate is the plate that the cutting arms are attached to. It can bend or break if a technician accidently runs the cutting arms into the hub of the rotor while the rotor is turning. (Cuts of more than 0.508 mm (0.020 in) can also bend this plate). Once bent, the lathe will most likely not cut properly until the tool holder plate is replaced. In order to verify the condition of the tool holder plate on a machine that will not cut right, remove the mounting bolt and remove the cutting head from the slide plate. With the cutting head titled at an angle, lay the long edge of the tool holder plate down on the flat part of the slide plate. If any gap can be seen between the edge and the slide plate, the tool holder plate is bent and the source of vibration. Also check to ensure that the cutting arms are lying flat on the upper side of the tool holder plate. If the mounting arm post is bent, it will show itself by having the back of the cutting arm lifting off the surface of the tool holder. Gib Adjustment / Loose Gib As wear occurs between the slide plate and the box it rides on, you must take up the slack. You do this by way of a moveable wedge, which we call the gib. Your lathe manual details adjustment process, which you should perform when required after monthly checks or whenever surface finish is inconsistent. Brake Pulsation BRAKE PULSATION Brake pulsation is caused by brake rotor thickness variation. Brake rotor thickness variation causes the piston in the brake caliper, when applied, to "pump" in and out of the caliper housing. The "pumping" effect is transmitted hydraulically to the brake pedal. Brake pulsation concerns may result from two basic conditions: Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Brakes- Disc Brake Warranty Service And Procedures > Page 7412 1. Thickness Variation Pulsation is Caused by Lateral Run Out (LRO). LRO on a brake corner assembly is virtually undetectable unless measured (with a dial indicator after the brake service) and will not be detected as brake pulsation during an after brake service test drive. If the brake corner is assembled with excessive LRO (greater than 0.050 mm (0.002 in), thickness variation will develop on the brake rotor over time and miles. Excessive LRO will cause the brake pads to wear the brake rotors unevenly, which causes rotor thickness variation. Pulsation that is the result of excessive Lateral Run Out usually develops in 4,800-16,000 km (3,000-10,000 mi). The more excessive the LRO, the faster the pulsation will develop. LRO can also be induced when uneven torque is applied to wheel nuts (lug nuts). Improper wheel tightening after tire rotation, spare tire usage, brake inspection, etc. can be the cause of brake pulsation. Again, it usually takes 4,800-16,000 km (3,000-10,000 mi) AFTER the service event for the condition to develop. The customer does not usually make the connection between the service event and the awareness of the pulsation. The proper usage of torque wrenches and/or torque sticks (torque limiting sockets) will greatly reduce or eliminate the pulsation conditions after wheel service events. The improper use of impact wrenches on wheel nuts greatly increases the likelihood of pulsation after wheel service. The following are examples of pulsation conditions and reimbursement recommendations: - If the customer noticed the condition between 4,800-16,000 km (3,000-10,000 mi) and it gradually got worse, normally the repair would be covered. The customer may tolerate the condition until it becomes very apparent. - If a GM dealer performed a prior brake service, consider paying for the repair and then strongly reinforce proper brake lathe maintenance. - If the customer had the brake service done outside of a GM dealership, normally GM would not offer any assistance. - If a customer indicated they had wheel service, ask who performed the service. Then; - If a GM dealer performed the service, consider paying for the repair and then strongly reinforce the use of torque sticks at the dealer. Two common size torque sticks cover 90% of all GM products. Each technician needs to use torque sticks properly every time the wheel nuts are tightened. - If the customer had the wheel service done outside of a GM dealership, normally GM would not offer any assistance. 2. Thickness Variation Pulsation Caused by Brake Rotor Corrosion - Rotor corrosion is another form of thickness variation, which can cause a pulsation concern and can be addressed as follows: - Cosmetic Corrosion: In most instances rotor corrosion is cosmetic and refinishing the rotor is unnecessary. - Corrosion - Pulsation Caused by Thickness Variation (Lot Rot / Low Miles - 0-321 km (0-200 mi): At times more extensive corrosion can cause pulsation due to thickness variation. This usually happens when the vehicle is parked for long periods of time in humid type conditions and the braking surface area under the pads corrodes at a different rate compared to the rest of the braking surface area. Cleaning up of braking surfaces (burnishing) can be accomplished by 10 - 15 moderate stops from 56- 64 km/h (35 - 40 mph) with cooling time between stops. If multiple moderate braking stops do not correct this condition, follow the "Brake Rotor Clean-Up Procedure" below. - Corrosion - Pulsation Caused by Thickness Variation (without rotor flaking / higher mileage 3,200-8,000 km (2,000-5,000 mi): In some cases, more extensive corrosion that is not cleaned up by the brake pad over time and miles can cause the same type of pulsation complaint due to thickness variation. In these cases, the rotor surface is usually darker instead of shiny and a brake pad foot print can be seen against the darker surface. This darker surface is usually due to build-up, on the rotor material surface, caused by a combination of corrosion, pad material and heat. To correct this condition, follow the "Brake Rotor Clean-up Procedure" below. - Corrosion - Pulsation Caused by Thickness Variation (with rotor flaking / higher mileage - 8,000 + km (5,000 + miles) : At times, more extensive corrosion over time and miles can cause pulsation due to thickness variation (flaking). This flaking is usually a build up, mostly on the rotor material surface, caused by a combination of corrosion, pad material and heat. When rotor measurements are taken, the low areas are usually close to the original rotor thickness (new rotor) measurement and the high areas usually measure more than the original rotor thickness (new rotor) measurement (depending on mileage and normal wear). To correct this condition, follow the "Brake Rotor Clean-up Procedure" described below. Important In some flaking instances, cleaning-up this type of corrosion may require more rotor material to be removed then desired. Customer consideration should be taken in these situations and handled on a case by case basis, depending on the amount/percentage of rotor life remaining and the vehicle's warranty time and miles. Brake Rotor Clean-Up Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Brakes- Disc Brake Warranty Service And Procedures > Page 7413 BRAKE ROTOR CLEAN-UP PROCEDURE Clean-up the rotors on an approved, well-maintained brake lathe to guarantee smooth, flat and parallel surfaces. Check for clean and true lathe adapters and make sure the arbor shoulder is clean and free of debris or burrs. For more information see the "Brake Lathe Calibration Procedure" section in this bulletin. 1. On the outboard area of the rotor, position the cutting tools one eighth of an inch into the brake pad area of the rotor. Feed the cutting tools into the rotor until they cut the rotor to new metal, a full 360 degrees. Zero each dial and back off a full turn. 2. Move the cutting bits to the middle of the rotor and do the same procedure. If zero is passed during the process, reset zero. Back off a full turn. 3. Position the cutting bits one eighth of an inch inside the inboard (closest to the hub) edge of the brake pad contact area. Do the same procedure. If zero is passed during the process, reset zero. 4. Back off a full turn and position the cutting bits all the way inboard in preparation to refinish the full rotor surface. Advance both tool cutters to the zero setting plus just enough to clean up the entire rotor surface. 5. After completing the refinish, sand both sides of the rotor for approximately one minute per side using a sanding block and 130-150 grit sandpaper to obtain a non-directional finish. Important Only remove the necessary amount of material from each side of the rotor and note that equal amounts of material do not have to be removed from both sides on any brake system using a floating caliper. Important In many of these instances, such a minimal amount of material is removed from the rotor that customer satisfaction is not a concern for future brake services. This procedure is intended to "Clean-up" the rotor surface and should be conveyed to the customer as such - not as "cut", "refinish" or "machine", which tends to be terms understood as a substantial reduction of rotor material/life. If the brake lathe equipment being used is not capable of removing minor amounts of material while holding tolerances, further lathe maintenance, repair, updates or equipment replacement may be necessary. Brake Noise BRAKE NOISE Some brake noise is normal and differences in loading, type of driving, or driving style can make a difference in brake wear on the same make and model. Depending on weather conditions, driving patterns and the local environment, brake noise may become more or less apparent. Verify all metal-to-metal contact areas between pads, pad guides, caliper and knuckles are clean and lubricated with a thin layer of high temperature silicone grease. Brake noise is caused by a "slip-stick" vibration of brake components. While intermittent brake noise may be normal, performing 3 to 4 aggressive stops may temporarily reduce or eliminate most brake squeal. If the noise persists and is consistently occurring, a brake dampening compound may be applied to the back of each pad. This allows parts to slide freely and not vibrate when moving relative to each other. Use Silicone Brake Lubricant, ACDelco P/N 88862181 (Canadian P/N 88862496) or equivalent. The following noises are characteristics of all braking systems and are unavoidable. They may not indicate improper operation of the brake system. Squeak/Squeal Noise: - Occurs with front semi-metallic brake pads at medium speeds when light to medium pressure is applied to the brake pedal. - Occasionally a noise may occur on rear brakes during the first few stops or with cold brakes and/or high humidity. Grinding Noise: - Common to rear brakes and some front disc brakes during initial stops after the vehicle has been parked overnight. - Caused by corrosion on the metal surfaces during vehicle non-use. Usually disappears after a few stops. Groan Noise: A groan type noise may be heard when stopping quickly or moving forward slowly from a complete stop. This is normal. On vehicles equipped with ABS, a groan or moan type noise during hard braking applications or loose gravel, wet or icy road conditions is a normal function of the ABS activation. Key Points - Frequently Asked Questions KEY POINTS - FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS - Q: How do on-car lathes react to Axle Float? Does the play affect the machining of the rotor, either surface finish or LRO? Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Brakes- Disc Brake Warranty Service And Procedures > Page 7414 A: Because the Pro-Cut on-car lathe adjusts in a live mode while spinning the hub/rotor, the dynamics of a floating axle are effectively eliminated. Once the lathe is compensated, there is no difference in the cutting/surface finish and LRO are just the same as with a non-floating axle. - Q: Which lathe is essential for performing brake work, the bench or on-car? A: Dealers must have a well maintained bench lathe and well maintained on-car lathe. These lathes need to be calibrated on a monthly basis. BOTH lathes are essential to providing quality brake service. - Q: What is the expected tip life for an on-car lathe? A: The geometry and composition of the Pro-Cut tips are designed for "single pass" cutting. When using the Pro-Cut the cutting depth should be set to take all material needed to get below rust grooves, eliminate all run-out and resurface the entire disc in a single pass. Cuts of 0.1016-0.381 mm (0.004-0.015 in) will provide the best surface finish and the optimal tip life. No "skim cut" or "finish cut" is needed. Failure to follow this procedure will shorten tip life. The Pro-cut tips will last between 7-12 cuts per corner. With three usable corners, a pair of tips is good for at least 21 cuts. - Q: Why does GM recommend the use of single pass (referred to as "positive rake") bench and on-car brake lathes? A: GM Service and GM Brake Engineering have performed competitive evaluations on a significant number of bench and on-car brake lathes. These tests measured critical performance characteristics such as flatness, surface finish and the ability of the lathe to repeat accuracy over many uses. In each test, single pass lathe designs out performed the competitors. Single pass brake lathes are more productive requiring less time to perform the same procedure. - Q: Is it okay to leave the caliper/pads installed while cutting rotors using an on-car lathe? A: On-car lathes should never be used with the pads and calipers installed on the vehicle. The debris from cutting the rotors can contaminate the brake pads/calipers which can lead to other brake concerns and comebacks. - Q: What information needs to be documented on the Repair Order? A: Any claim that is submitted using the labor operations in this bulletin, must have the Original Rotor Thickness and Refinish Rotor Thickness (if refinished) documented on the repair order. For more information, refer to the "Repair Order Required Documentation" section of this bulletin. All Warranty Repair Orders paid by GM, are subject to review for compliance and may be debited where the repair does not comply with this procedure. Brake Warranty BRAKE WARRANTY Brake Rotors: - Brake rotor warranty is covered under the terms of the GM New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Reference the vehicle's warranty guide for verification. - Rotors should not be refinished or replaced during normal/routine pad replacement. - Rotors should not be refinished or replaced and is ineffective in correcting brake squeal type noises and/or premature lining wear out. - Rotors should not be refinished or replaced for cosmetic corrosion. Clean up of braking surfaces can be accomplished by 10-15 moderate stops from 56-64 km/h (35-40 mph) with cooling time between stops. - Rotors should not be refinished or replaced for rotor discoloration/hard spots. - Rotors should be refinished NOT replaced for Customer Pulsation concerns. This condition is a result of rotor thickness variation, usually caused by LRO (wear induced over time and miles) or corrosion (Lot Rot). - When rotor refinishing, only remove the necessary amount of material from each side of the rotor and note that equal amounts of material do not have to be removed from both sides on any brake system using a floating caliper. - Rotors should be refinished for severe scoring - depth in excess of 1.5 mm (0.060 in). Important If the scoring depth is more than 1.5 mm (0.060 in) after the rotor is refinished, it should be replaced. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Brakes- Disc Brake Warranty Service And Procedures > Page 7415 - It is not necessary to replace rotors in pairs. Rotors may be replaced individually. However, caution should be exercised, as a variance in surface finish may cause a brake pull condition. - New rotors should not be refinished before installation. Original equipment rotor surfaces are ground to ensure smooth finish and parallelism between mounting and friction surfaces. If a new rotor has more than 0.050 mm (0.002 in) Lateral Run Out (LRO) when properly mounted on the hub, correct it using one of the following methods: 1. For hubless rotor designs, use the correction plate procedure found in the "GM Brake Service Procedure for Hubless Rotors" outlined in this bulletin. 2. For hubbed/trapped/captured rotor designs, refinish the rotor using an On-Car lathe and the procedure outlined in this bulletin. - Never reuse rotors that measure under the Minimum Thickness specification. In this instance, the rotor should be replaced. Important If the Minimum Thickness specification is not visible on the rotor, reference Service Information (SI) for the specific vehicle application. DO NOT use any other manufacturers rotor specifications. Brake Pads: Important When determining the warranty coverage (as an example) - if all four front or four rear brake pads are excessively worn evenly, that would NOT be covered under warranty since this type of wear is most likely due to driving habits or trailering. However, if the brake pads are excessively worn un-evenly, side-to-side or same side/inner-to-outer pads, then consideration should be given to cover this under warranty since this type of wear is most likely due to poor operation of other braking components. - Consideration should be given for covering brake pads up to 39,000 km (24,000 mi) (excluding owner abuse, excessive trailering, or the situations that would not be considered normal use). - Installation of new rotors does not require pad replacement. Do not replace pads unless their condition requires it - excessively worn, damage or contaminated. Brake Wear: Several factors impact brake lining wear and should be taken into account when reviewing related issues: - heavy loads / high temperatures / towing / mountainous driving / city driving / aggressive driving / driver braking characteristics (left foot or two feet) The following are conditions that may extend brake lining wear: - light loads / highway driving / conservative driving / level terrain Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 7416 Brake Rotor/Disc: Specifications Front Disc Brake Rotor Diameter......................................................................................................... ........................................................................................321.00 mm (12.64 in) Discard Thickness..... .............................................................................................................................................................. ...................27.00 mm (1.06 in) Maximum Allowable Lateral Runout................................................... ......................................................................................................0.06 mm (0.002 in) Maximum Allowable Scoring................................................................................................................................. ......................................1.60 mm (0.06 in) Maximum Allowable Thickness Variation.......................... .....................................................................................................................0.025 mm (0.001 in) Rear Disc Brake Rotor Diameter.......................................................................................................... .......................................................................................303.00 mm (11.93 in) Discard Thickness...... .............................................................................................................................................................. ..................18.40 mm (0.72 in) Maximum Allowable Lateral Runout.................................................... .....................................................................................................0.06 mm (0.002 in) Maximum Allowable Scoring................................................................................................................................. ......................................1.60 mm (0.06 in) Maximum Allowable Thickness Variation.......................... .....................................................................................................................0.025 mm (0.001 in) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Brake Rotor Assembled Lateral Runout Correction Brake Rotor/Disc: Testing and Inspection Brake Rotor Assembled Lateral Runout Correction Brake Rotor Assembled Lateral Runout Correction Note: * Brake rotor thickness variation MUST be checked BEFORE checking for assembled lateral runout (LRO). Thickness variation exceeding the maximum acceptable level can cause brake pulsation. Refer to Brake Rotor Thickness Variation Measurement (See: Brake Rotor Thickness Variation Measurement). * Brake rotor assembled lateral runout (LRO) exceeding the maximum allowable specification can cause thickness variation to develop in the brake rotor over time, usually between 4 800-11 300 km (3,000-7,000 mi). Refer to Brake Rotor Assembled Lateral Runout Measurement (See: Brake Rotor Assembled Lateral Runout Measurement). Review the following acceptable methods for bringing the brake rotor assembled LRO to within specifications. Determine which method to use for the specific vehicle being repaired. * The correction plate method of correcting assembled LRO involves the addition of a tapered plate between the brake rotor and the hub/axle flange. The correction plate method can be used to correct LRO that exceeds the specification by up to 0.23 mm (0.009 in). Refer to Brake Rotor Assembled Lateral Runout Correction - Correction Plates (See: Brake Rotor Assembled Lateral Runout Correction - Correction Plates). * The on-vehicle brake lathe method is used to bring the LRO to within specifications through compensating for LRO while refinishing the brake rotor. Refer to Brake Rotor Assembled Lateral Runout Correction - On Vehicle Lathe (See: Brake Rotor Assembled Lateral Runout Correction On Vehicle Lathe). If the assembled LRO cannot be corrected using these methods, then other components must be suspected as causing and/or contributing to the LRO concern. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Brake Rotor Assembled Lateral Runout Correction > Page 7419 Brake Rotor/Disc: Testing and Inspection Brake Rotor Assembled Lateral Runout Correction Correction Plates Brake Rotor Assembled Lateral Runout Correction - Correction Plates Special Tools * CH-39544-KIT - Complete Torque Socket Set - 10 PCS , or equivalent * CH-45101-100 - Conical Brake Rotor Washers For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Tools and Equipment). Warning: Refer to Brake Dust Warning (See: Service Precautions/Technician Safety Information/Brake Dust Warning). Note: * Brake rotor thickness variation MUST be checked BEFORE checking for assembled lateral runout (LRO). Thickness variation exceeding the maximum acceptable level can cause brake pulsation. Refer to Brake Rotor Thickness Variation Measurement (See: Brake Rotor Thickness Variation Measurement). * Brake rotor assembled LRO exceeding the maximum allowable specification can cause thickness variation to develop in the brake rotor over time, usually between 4,800-11,300 km (3,000-7,000 mi). Refer to Brake Rotor Assembled Lateral Runout Measurement (See: Brake Rotor Assembled Lateral Runout Measurement). 1. Rotate the brake rotor to position the high spot, identified and marked during the brake rotor assembled LRO measurement procedure, to face upward. 2. Remove the CH-45101-100 - Conical Brake Rotor Washers and the lug nuts that were installed during the assembled LRO measurement procedure and/or the indexing correction procedure. 3. Inspect the mounting surface of the hub/axle flange and the brake rotor to ensure that there are no foreign particles or debris remaining. 4. Select the correction plate, following the manufacturer's instructions, which has a specification closest to the assembled LRO measurement. For example: If the assembled LRO measurement was 0.076 mm (0.003 in), the 0.076 mm (0.003 in) correction plate would be used. If the Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Brake Rotor Assembled Lateral Runout Correction > Page 7420 measurement was 0.127 mm (0.005 in), the 0.152 mm (0.006 in) correction plate would be used. 5. Determine the positioning for the correction plate (1) using the high spot mark (3) made during the brake rotor assembled LRO measurement procedure. Note: * Do NOT install used correction plates in an attempt to correct brake rotor assembled LRO. * Do NOT stack up, or install more than one correction plate onto one hub/axle flange location, in an attempt to correct brake rotor assembled LRO. 6. Install the correction plate (1) onto the hub/axle flange, with the V-shaped notch (2) orientated to align with the high spot mark (3), that was positioned to face upward. 7. Install the brake rotor to the hub/axle flange. Use the matchmark made prior to removal for proper orientation to the flange. 8. Hold the rotor firmly in place against the hub/axle flange and install one of the CH-45101-100 - Conical Brake Rotor Washers (1) and one lug nut (2) onto the upper-most wheel stud. 9. Continue to hold the rotor secure and tighten the lug nut firmly by hand. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Brake Rotor Assembled Lateral Runout Correction > Page 7421 10. Install the remaining CH-45101-100 - Conical Brake Rotor Washers and lug nuts onto the wheel studs and tighten the nuts firmly by hand in a star-pattern. 11. Using the CH-39544-KIT - Complete Torque Socket Set - 10 PCS , or equivalent, tighten the lug nuts in a star-pattern to specification, in order to properly secure the rotor. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation (See: Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair). 12. Measure the assembled LRO of the brake rotor. Refer to Brake Rotor Assembled Lateral Runout Measurement (See: Brake Rotor Assembled Lateral Runout Measurement). 13. If the brake rotor assembled LRO measurement still exceeds the maximum allowable specification, refer to Brake Rotor Assembled Lateral Runout Correction (See: Brake Rotor Assembled Lateral Runout Correction). 14. If the brake rotor assembled LRO measurement is within specification, install the brake caliper and depress the brake pedal several times to secure the rotor in place before removing the CH-45101-100 - Conical Brake Rotor Washers and the lug nuts. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Brake Rotor Assembled Lateral Runout Correction > Page 7422 Brake Rotor/Disc: Testing and Inspection Brake Rotor Assembled Lateral Runout Correction - On Vehicle Lathe Brake Rotor Assembled Lateral Runout Correction - On Vehicle Lathe Special Tools CH-45101-100 - Conical Brake Rotor Washers For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Tools and Equipment). Warning: Refer to Brake Dust Warning (See: Service Precautions/Technician Safety Information/Brake Dust Warning). Note: * Brake rotor thickness variation MUST be checked BEFORE checking for assembled lateral runout (LRO). Thickness variation exceeding the maximum acceptable level can cause brake pulsation. Refer to Brake Rotor Thickness Variation Measurement (See: Brake Rotor Thickness Variation Measurement). * Brake rotor assembled LRO exceeding the maximum allowable specification can cause thickness variation to develop in the brake rotor over time, usually between 4 800-11 300 km (3,000-7,000 mi). Refer to Brake Rotor Assembled Lateral Runout Measurement (See: Brake Rotor Assembled Lateral Runout Measurement). 1. Ensure that the caliper and caliper bracket that are already being supported, are clear from contacting any rotating components, such as the brake rotor. 2. Remove the CH-45101-100 - Conical Brake Rotor Washers and the lug nuts that were installed during the assembled LRO measurement procedure and/or the indexing correction procedure. 3. Inspect the mounting surface of the hub/axle flange and the brake rotor to ensure that there are no foreign particles or debris remaining. 4. Set up the lathe, following the manufacturer's instructions. 5. Refinish the brake rotor, following the brake lathe manufacturer's instructions. 6. After each successive cut, inspect the brake rotor thickness. Refer to Brake Rotor Thickness Measurement (See: Brake Rotor Thickness Measurement). 7. If at any time the brake rotor exceeds the minimum allowable thickness after refinish specification, the brake rotor must be replaced. After replacing the rotor, proceed to step 10. 8. After refinishing the brake rotor, use the following procedure in order to obtain the desired non-directional finish: 1. Follow the brake lathe manufacturer's recommended speed setting for applying a non-directional finish. 2. Using moderate pressure, apply the non-directional finish: * If the lathe is equipped with a non-directional finishing tool, apply the finish with 120-grit aluminum oxide sandpaper. * If the lathe is not equipped with a non-directional finishing tool, apply the finish with a sanding block and 150-grit aluminum oxide sandpaper. 3. After applying a non-directional finish, clean each friction surface of the brake rotor with denatured alcohol, or an equivalent approved brake cleaner. 9. Remove the lathe from the vehicle. 10. Measure the assembled LRO of the brake rotor. Refer to Brake Rotor Assembled Lateral Runout Measurement (See: Brake Rotor Assembled Lateral Runout Measurement). 11. If the brake rotor assembled LRO measurement still exceeds the maximum allowable specification, refer to Brake Rotor Assembled Lateral Runout Correction (See: Brake Rotor Assembled Lateral Runout Correction). 12. If the brake rotor assembled LRO is within specification, install the brake caliper and depress the brake pedal several times to secure the rotor in place before removing the CH-45101-100 - Conical Brake Rotor Washers and the lug nuts. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Brake Rotor Assembled Lateral Runout Correction > Page 7423 Brake Rotor/Disc: Testing and Inspection Brake Rotor Assembled Lateral Runout Measurement Brake Rotor Assembled Lateral Runout Measurement Special Tools * CH-39544-KIT - Complete Torque Socket Set - 10 PCS , or equivalent * CH-41013 - Rotor Resurfacing Kit * CH-42450-A - Wheel Hub Resurfacing Kit * CH-45101 - Hub and Wheel Runout Gauge * CH-45101-100 - Conical Brake Rotor Washers Warning: Refer to Brake Dust Warning (See: Service Precautions/Technician Safety Information/Brake Dust Warning). Note: * Brake rotor assembled lateral runout (LRO) exceeding the maximum allowable specification can cause thickness variation to develop in the brake rotor over time, usually between 4,800-11,300 km (3,000-7,000 mi). * Brake rotor thickness variation MUST be checked BEFORE checking for assembled lateral runout (LRO). Thickness variation exceeding the maximum acceptable level can cause brake pulsation. Refer to Brake Rotor Thickness Variation Measurement (See: Brake Rotor Thickness Variation Measurement). 1. Matchmark the position of the brake rotor to the wheel studs if this has not been done already. Note: Whenever the brake rotor has been separated from the hub/axle flange, any rust or contaminants should be cleaned from the hub/axle flange and the brake rotor mating surfaces. Failure to do this may result in excessive assembled lateral runout (LRO) of the brake rotor, which could lead to brake pulsation. 2. Inspect the mating surface of the hub/axle flange and the brake rotor to ensure that there are no foreign particles, corrosion, rust, or debris remaining. If the wheel hub/axle flange and/or if the brake rotor mating surfaces exhibit these conditions, perform the following steps: 1. Remove the brake rotor from the vehicle. Refer to Front Brake Rotor Replacement (See: Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Front Brake Rotor Replacement) and/or Rear Brake Rotor Replacement (See: Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Rear Brake Rotor Replacement). 2. Using the CH-42450-A - Wheel Hub Resurfacing Kit , thoroughly clean any rust or corrosion from the mating surface of the hub/axle flange. 3. Using the CH-41013 - Rotor Resurfacing Kit , thoroughly clean any rust or corrosion from the mating surface of the brake rotor. 4. Clean the friction surfaces of the brake rotor with denatured alcohol, or an equivalent approved brake cleaner. 3. Install the rotor to the hub/axle flange using the matchmark made prior to removal. 4. Hold the rotor firmly in place against the hub/axle flange and install one of the CH-45101-100 Conical Brake Rotor Washers (1), and one lug Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Brake Rotor Assembled Lateral Runout Correction > Page 7424 nut (2) onto the upper-most wheel stud. 5. Continue to hold the rotor secure and tighten the lug nut firmly by hand. 6. Install the remaining CH-45101-100 - Conical Brake Rotor Washers and lug nuts onto the wheel studs and tighten the nuts firmly by hand in a star-pattern. 7. Using the CH-39544-KIT - Complete Torque Socket Set - 10 PCS , or equivalent, tighten the lug nuts in a star-pattern to specification, in order to properly secure the rotor. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation (See: Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair). 8. If the brake rotor has been REFINISHED or REPLACED with a new rotor, proceed to step 14. 9. If the brake rotor meets the following criteria, proceed to step 10. * The rotor is within specifications and is being REUSED. * The rotor has NOT been refinished. * The rotor does NOT exhibit thickness variation exceeding the maximum allowable level. 10. Mount a dial indicator, CH-45101 - Hub and Wheel Runout Gauge , or equivalent, to the steering knuckle and position the indicator button so it contacts the brake rotor friction surface at a 90 degree angle, approximately 13 mm (0.5 in) from the outer edge of the rotor. 11. Measure and record the assembled LRO of the brake rotor. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Brake Rotor Assembled Lateral Runout Correction > Page 7425 1. Rotate the rotor until the lowest reading is displayed on the indicator dial, then set the dial to zero. 2. Rotate the rotor until the highest reading is displayed on the dial. 3. Mark the location of the high spot relative to the nearest wheel stud, or studs. 4. Measure and record the amount of LRO. 12. Compare the brake rotor assembled LRO to the following specification: * Front brake rotor maximum allowable assembled lateral runout: 0.05 mm (0.002 in) * Rear brake rotor maximum allowable assembled lateral runout: 0.05 mm (0.002 in) 13. If the brake rotor assembled LRO is within specifications, proceed to step 18. If the brake rotor assembled LRO exceeds the specification, refinish the rotor to ensure true parallelism. Refer to Brake Rotor Refinishing (See: Service and Repair/Procedures/Brake Rotor Refinishing). After refinishing the rotor, proceed to step 14. 14. Mount a dial indicator, CH-45101 - Hub and Wheel Runout Gauge , or equivalent, to the steering knuckle and position the indicator button so it contacts the brake rotor friction surface at a 90 degree angle, approximately 13 mm (0.5 in) from the outer edge of the rotor. 15. Measure and record the assembled LRO of the brake rotor. 1. Rotate the rotor until the lowest reading is displayed on the indicator dial, then set the dial to zero. 2. Rotate the rotor until the highest reading is displayed on the dial. 3. Mark the location of the high spot relative to the nearest wheel stud, or studs. 4. Measure and record the amount of LRO. 16. Compare the brake rotor assembled LRO to the following specification: * Front brake rotor maximum allowable assembled lateral runout: 0.05 mm (0.002 in) * Rear brake rotor maximum allowable assembled lateral runout: 0.05 mm (0.002 in) 17. If the brake rotor assembled LRO measurement exceeds the specification, bring the LRO to within specifications. Refer to Brake Rotor Assembled Lateral Runout Correction (See: Brake Rotor Assembled Lateral Runout Correction). 18. If the brake rotor assembled LRO measurement is within specification, install the brake caliper and depress the brake pedal several times to secure the rotor in place before removing the CH-45101-100 - Conical Brake Rotor Washers and the lug nuts. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Brake Rotor Assembled Lateral Runout Correction > Page 7426 Brake Rotor/Disc: Testing and Inspection Brake Rotor Assembled Lateral Runout Correction Brake Rotor Assembled Lateral Runout Correction Note: * Brake rotor thickness variation MUST be checked BEFORE checking for assembled lateral runout (LRO). Thickness variation exceeding the maximum acceptable level can cause brake pulsation. Refer to Brake Rotor Thickness Variation Measurement (See: Brake Rotor Thickness Variation Measurement). * Brake rotor assembled lateral runout (LRO) exceeding the maximum allowable specification can cause thickness variation to develop in the brake rotor over time, usually between 4 800-11 300 km (3,000-7,000 mi). Refer to Brake Rotor Assembled Lateral Runout Measurement (See: Brake Rotor Assembled Lateral Runout Measurement). Review the following acceptable methods for bringing the brake rotor assembled LRO to within specifications. Determine which method to use for the specific vehicle being repaired. * The correction plate method of correcting assembled LRO involves the addition of a tapered plate between the brake rotor and the hub/axle flange. The correction plate method can be used to correct LRO that exceeds the specification by up to 0.23 mm (0.009 in). Refer to Brake Rotor Assembled Lateral Runout Correction - Correction Plates (See: Brake Rotor Assembled Lateral Runout Correction - Correction Plates). * The on-vehicle brake lathe method is used to bring the LRO to within specifications through compensating for LRO while refinishing the brake rotor. Refer to Brake Rotor Assembled Lateral Runout Correction - On Vehicle Lathe (See: Brake Rotor Assembled Lateral Runout Correction On Vehicle Lathe). If the assembled LRO cannot be corrected using these methods, then other components must be suspected as causing and/or contributing to the LRO concern. Brake Rotor Assembled Lateral Runout Correction - Correction Plates Brake Rotor Assembled Lateral Runout Correction - Correction Plates Special Tools * CH-39544-KIT - Complete Torque Socket Set - 10 PCS , or equivalent * CH-45101-100 - Conical Brake Rotor Washers For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Tools and Equipment). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Brake Rotor Assembled Lateral Runout Correction > Page 7427 Warning: Refer to Brake Dust Warning (See: Service Precautions/Technician Safety Information/Brake Dust Warning). Note: * Brake rotor thickness variation MUST be checked BEFORE checking for assembled lateral runout (LRO). Thickness variation exceeding the maximum acceptable level can cause brake pulsation. Refer to Brake Rotor Thickness Variation Measurement (See: Brake Rotor Thickness Variation Measurement). * Brake rotor assembled LRO exceeding the maximum allowable specification can cause thickness variation to develop in the brake rotor over time, usually between 4,800-11,300 km (3,000-7,000 mi). Refer to Brake Rotor Assembled Lateral Runout Measurement (See: Brake Rotor Assembled Lateral Runout Measurement). 1. Rotate the brake rotor to position the high spot, identified and marked during the brake rotor assembled LRO measurement procedure, to face upward. 2. Remove the CH-45101-100 - Conical Brake Rotor Washers and the lug nuts that were installed during the assembled LRO measurement procedure and/or the indexing correction procedure. 3. Inspect the mounting surface of the hub/axle flange and the brake rotor to ensure that there are no foreign particles or debris remaining. 4. Select the correction plate, following the manufacturer's instructions, which has a specification closest to the assembled LRO measurement. For example: If the assembled LRO measurement was 0.076 mm (0.003 in), the 0.076 mm (0.003 in) correction plate would be used. If the measurement was 0.127 mm (0.005 in), the 0.152 mm (0.006 in) correction plate would be used. 5. Determine the positioning for the correction plate (1) using the high spot mark (3) made during the brake rotor assembled LRO measurement procedure. Note: * Do NOT install used correction plates in an attempt to correct brake rotor assembled LRO. * Do NOT stack up, or install more than one correction plate onto one hub/axle flange location, in an attempt to correct brake rotor assembled LRO. 6. Install the correction plate (1) onto the hub/axle flange, with the V-shaped notch (2) orientated to align with the high spot mark (3), that was positioned to face upward. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Brake Rotor Assembled Lateral Runout Correction > Page 7428 7. Install the brake rotor to the hub/axle flange. Use the matchmark made prior to removal for proper orientation to the flange. 8. Hold the rotor firmly in place against the hub/axle flange and install one of the CH-45101-100 - Conical Brake Rotor Washers (1) and one lug nut (2) onto the upper-most wheel stud. 9. Continue to hold the rotor secure and tighten the lug nut firmly by hand. 10. Install the remaining CH-45101-100 - Conical Brake Rotor Washers and lug nuts onto the wheel studs and tighten the nuts firmly by hand in a star-pattern. 11. Using the CH-39544-KIT - Complete Torque Socket Set - 10 PCS , or equivalent, tighten the lug nuts in a star-pattern to specification, in order to properly secure the rotor. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation (See: Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair). 12. Measure the assembled LRO of the brake rotor. Refer to Brake Rotor Assembled Lateral Runout Measurement (See: Brake Rotor Assembled Lateral Runout Measurement). 13. If the brake rotor assembled LRO measurement still exceeds the maximum allowable specification, refer to Brake Rotor Assembled Lateral Runout Correction (See: Brake Rotor Assembled Lateral Runout Correction). 14. If the brake rotor assembled LRO measurement is within specification, install the brake caliper and depress the brake pedal several times to secure the rotor in place before removing the CH-45101-100 - Conical Brake Rotor Washers and the lug nuts. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Brake Rotor Assembled Lateral Runout Correction > Page 7429 Brake Rotor Assembled Lateral Runout Correction - On Vehicle Lathe Brake Rotor Assembled Lateral Runout Correction - On Vehicle Lathe Special Tools CH-45101-100 - Conical Brake Rotor Washers For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Tools and Equipment). Warning: Refer to Brake Dust Warning (See: Service Precautions/Technician Safety Information/Brake Dust Warning). Note: * Brake rotor thickness variation MUST be checked BEFORE checking for assembled lateral runout (LRO). Thickness variation exceeding the maximum acceptable level can cause brake pulsation. Refer to Brake Rotor Thickness Variation Measurement (See: Brake Rotor Thickness Variation Measurement). * Brake rotor assembled LRO exceeding the maximum allowable specification can cause thickness variation to develop in the brake rotor over time, usually between 4 800-11 300 km (3,000-7,000 mi). Refer to Brake Rotor Assembled Lateral Runout Measurement (See: Brake Rotor Assembled Lateral Runout Measurement). 1. Ensure that the caliper and caliper bracket that are already being supported, are clear from contacting any rotating components, such as the brake rotor. 2. Remove the CH-45101-100 - Conical Brake Rotor Washers and the lug nuts that were installed during the assembled LRO measurement procedure and/or the indexing correction procedure. 3. Inspect the mounting surface of the hub/axle flange and the brake rotor to ensure that there are no foreign particles or debris remaining. 4. Set up the lathe, following the manufacturer's instructions. 5. Refinish the brake rotor, following the brake lathe manufacturer's instructions. 6. After each successive cut, inspect the brake rotor thickness. Refer to Brake Rotor Thickness Measurement (See: Brake Rotor Thickness Measurement). 7. If at any time the brake rotor exceeds the minimum allowable thickness after refinish specification, the brake rotor must be replaced. After replacing the rotor, proceed to step 10. 8. After refinishing the brake rotor, use the following procedure in order to obtain the desired non-directional finish: 1. Follow the brake lathe manufacturer's recommended speed setting for applying a non-directional finish. 2. Using moderate pressure, apply the non-directional finish: * If the lathe is equipped with a non-directional finishing tool, apply the finish with 120-grit aluminum oxide sandpaper. * If the lathe is not equipped with a non-directional finishing tool, apply the finish with a sanding block and 150-grit aluminum oxide sandpaper. 3. After applying a non-directional finish, clean each friction surface of the brake rotor with denatured alcohol, or an equivalent approved brake cleaner. 9. Remove the lathe from the vehicle. 10. Measure the assembled LRO of the brake rotor. Refer to Brake Rotor Assembled Lateral Runout Measurement (See: Brake Rotor Assembled Lateral Runout Measurement). 11. If the brake rotor assembled LRO measurement still exceeds the maximum allowable specification, refer to Brake Rotor Assembled Lateral Runout Correction (See: Brake Rotor Assembled Lateral Runout Correction). 12. If the brake rotor assembled LRO is within specification, install the brake caliper and depress the brake pedal several times to secure the rotor in place before removing the CH-45101-100 - Conical Brake Rotor Washers and the lug nuts. Brake Rotor Assembled Lateral Runout Measurement Brake Rotor Assembled Lateral Runout Measurement Special Tools * CH-39544-KIT - Complete Torque Socket Set - 10 PCS , or equivalent * CH-41013 - Rotor Resurfacing Kit * CH-42450-A - Wheel Hub Resurfacing Kit * CH-45101 - Hub and Wheel Runout Gauge * CH-45101-100 - Conical Brake Rotor Washers Warning: Refer to Brake Dust Warning (See: Service Precautions/Technician Safety Information/Brake Dust Warning). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Brake Rotor Assembled Lateral Runout Correction > Page 7430 Note: * Brake rotor assembled lateral runout (LRO) exceeding the maximum allowable specification can cause thickness variation to develop in the brake rotor over time, usually between 4,800-11,300 km (3,000-7,000 mi). * Brake rotor thickness variation MUST be checked BEFORE checking for assembled lateral runout (LRO). Thickness variation exceeding the maximum acceptable level can cause brake pulsation. Refer to Brake Rotor Thickness Variation Measurement (See: Brake Rotor Thickness Variation Measurement). 1. Matchmark the position of the brake rotor to the wheel studs if this has not been done already. Note: Whenever the brake rotor has been separated from the hub/axle flange, any rust or contaminants should be cleaned from the hub/axle flange and the brake rotor mating surfaces. Failure to do this may result in excessive assembled lateral runout (LRO) of the brake rotor, which could lead to brake pulsation. 2. Inspect the mating surface of the hub/axle flange and the brake rotor to ensure that there are no foreign particles, corrosion, rust, or debris remaining. If the wheel hub/axle flange and/or if the brake rotor mating surfaces exhibit these conditions, perform the following steps: 1. Remove the brake rotor from the vehicle. Refer to Front Brake Rotor Replacement (See: Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Front Brake Rotor Replacement) and/or Rear Brake Rotor Replacement (See: Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Rear Brake Rotor Replacement). 2. Using the CH-42450-A - Wheel Hub Resurfacing Kit , thoroughly clean any rust or corrosion from the mating surface of the hub/axle flange. 3. Using the CH-41013 - Rotor Resurfacing Kit , thoroughly clean any rust or corrosion from the mating surface of the brake rotor. 4. Clean the friction surfaces of the brake rotor with denatured alcohol, or an equivalent approved brake cleaner. 3. Install the rotor to the hub/axle flange using the matchmark made prior to removal. 4. Hold the rotor firmly in place against the hub/axle flange and install one of the CH-45101-100 Conical Brake Rotor Washers (1), and one lug nut (2) onto the upper-most wheel stud. 5. Continue to hold the rotor secure and tighten the lug nut firmly by hand. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Brake Rotor Assembled Lateral Runout Correction > Page 7431 6. Install the remaining CH-45101-100 - Conical Brake Rotor Washers and lug nuts onto the wheel studs and tighten the nuts firmly by hand in a star-pattern. 7. Using the CH-39544-KIT - Complete Torque Socket Set - 10 PCS , or equivalent, tighten the lug nuts in a star-pattern to specification, in order to properly secure the rotor. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation (See: Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair). 8. If the brake rotor has been REFINISHED or REPLACED with a new rotor, proceed to step 14. 9. If the brake rotor meets the following criteria, proceed to step 10. * The rotor is within specifications and is being REUSED. * The rotor has NOT been refinished. * The rotor does NOT exhibit thickness variation exceeding the maximum allowable level. 10. Mount a dial indicator, CH-45101 - Hub and Wheel Runout Gauge , or equivalent, to the steering knuckle and position the indicator button so it contacts the brake rotor friction surface at a 90 degree angle, approximately 13 mm (0.5 in) from the outer edge of the rotor. 11. Measure and record the assembled LRO of the brake rotor. 1. Rotate the rotor until the lowest reading is displayed on the indicator dial, then set the dial to zero. 2. Rotate the rotor until the highest reading is displayed on the dial. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Brake Rotor Assembled Lateral Runout Correction > Page 7432 3. Mark the location of the high spot relative to the nearest wheel stud, or studs. 4. Measure and record the amount of LRO. 12. Compare the brake rotor assembled LRO to the following specification: * Front brake rotor maximum allowable assembled lateral runout: 0.05 mm (0.002 in) * Rear brake rotor maximum allowable assembled lateral runout: 0.05 mm (0.002 in) 13. If the brake rotor assembled LRO is within specifications, proceed to step 18. If the brake rotor assembled LRO exceeds the specification, refinish the rotor to ensure true parallelism. Refer to Brake Rotor Refinishing (See: Service and Repair/Procedures/Brake Rotor Refinishing). After refinishing the rotor, proceed to step 14. 14. Mount a dial indicator, CH-45101 - Hub and Wheel Runout Gauge , or equivalent, to the steering knuckle and position the indicator button so it contacts the brake rotor friction surface at a 90 degree angle, approximately 13 mm (0.5 in) from the outer edge of the rotor. 15. Measure and record the assembled LRO of the brake rotor. 1. Rotate the rotor until the lowest reading is displayed on the indicator dial, then set the dial to zero. 2. Rotate the rotor until the highest reading is displayed on the dial. 3. Mark the location of the high spot relative to the nearest wheel stud, or studs. 4. Measure and record the amount of LRO. 16. Compare the brake rotor assembled LRO to the following specification: * Front brake rotor maximum allowable assembled lateral runout: 0.05 mm (0.002 in) * Rear brake rotor maximum allowable assembled lateral runout: 0.05 mm (0.002 in) 17. If the brake rotor assembled LRO measurement exceeds the specification, bring the LRO to within specifications. Refer to Brake Rotor Assembled Lateral Runout Correction (See: Brake Rotor Assembled Lateral Runout Correction). 18. If the brake rotor assembled LRO measurement is within specification, install the brake caliper and depress the brake pedal several times to secure the rotor in place before removing the CH-45101-100 - Conical Brake Rotor Washers and the lug nuts. Brake Rotor Surface and Wear Inspection Brake Rotor Surface and Wear Inspection Warning: Refer to Brake Dust Warning (See: Service Precautions/Technician Safety Information/Brake Dust Warning). 1. If the inboard friction surface of the brake rotor is not accessible, reposition and support the caliper with the brake pads. Refer to Front Disc Brake Pads Replacement (See: Brake Pad/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Front Disc Brake Pads Replacement) and/or Rear Disc Brake Pads Replacement (See: Brake Pad/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Rear Disc Brake Pads Replacement). 2. Clean the friction surfaces of the brake rotor with denatured alcohol, or an equivalent approved brake cleaner. 3. Inspect the friction surfaces of the brake rotor for the following Braking Surface Conditions: * Heavy rust and/or pitting Light surface rust can be removed with an abrasive disc. Heavy surface rust and/or pitting must be removed by refinishing the rotor. * Cracks and/or heat spots * Excessive blueing discoloration 4. If the friction surfaces of the brake rotor exhibit one or more of the Braking Surface Conditions, the rotor requires refinishing or replacement. 5. Using a micrometer calibrated in thousandths-of-a-millimeter, or ten-thousandths-of-an-inch, measure and record the scoring depth of any grooves present on the rotor friction surfaces. 6. Compare the groove scoring depth recorded to the following specification: Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Brake Rotor Assembled Lateral Runout Correction > Page 7433 Brake rotor maximum allowable scoring: 1.60 mm (0.06 in) 7. If the brake rotor scoring depth exceeds the specification, or if an excessive amount of scoring is present, the rotor requires refinishing or replacement. Brake Rotor Thickness Measurement Brake Rotor Thickness Measurement Warning: Refer to Brake Dust Warning (See: Service Precautions/Technician Safety Information/Brake Dust Warning). 1. If the inboard friction surface of the brake rotor is not accessible, reposition and support the caliper with the brake pads. Refer to Front Disc Brake Pads Replacement (See: Brake Pad/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Front Disc Brake Pads Replacement) and/or Rear Disc Brake Pads Replacement (See: Brake Pad/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Rear Disc Brake Pads Replacement). 2. Clean the friction surfaces of the brake rotor with denatured alcohol, or an equivalent approved brake cleaner. 3. Using a micrometer calibrated in thousandths-of-a-millimeter, or ten-thousandths-of-an-inch, measure and record the lowest thickness of the brake rotor at 4 or more points, equally spaced around the rotor. Ensure that the measurements are only taken within the friction surfaces and that the micrometer is positioned the same distance from the outside edge of the rotor, about 13 mm (1/2 in), for each measurement. 4. Compare the lowest thickness measurement recorded to the following specifications: Brake rotor discard thickness: 27.0 mm (1.063 in) Brake rotor discard thickness: 18.4 mm (0.724 in) 5. If the lowest thickness measurement of the brake rotor is above the minimum allowable thickness after refinishing specification, the rotor may be able to be refinished, depending upon surface and wear conditions which may be present. 6. If the lowest thickness measurement of the brake rotor is at or below the minimum allowable thickness after refinishing specification, the rotor may not be refinished. 7. If the lowest thickness measurement of the brake rotor is at or below the discard thickness specification, the rotor requires replacement. Brake Rotor Thickness Variation Measurement Brake Rotor Thickness Variation Measurement Warning: Refer to Brake Dust Warning (See: Service Precautions/Technician Safety Information/Brake Dust Warning). Note: Any disc brake rotor that exhibits thickness variation exceeding the maximum acceptable level must be refinished or replaced. Thickness variation exceeding the maximum acceptable level can cause brake pulsation. 1. If the inboard friction surface of the brake rotor is not accessible, reposition and support the caliper with the brake pads. Refer to Front Disc Brake Pads Replacement (See: Brake Pad/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Front Disc Brake Pads Replacement) and/or Rear Disc Brake Pads Replacement (See: Brake Pad/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Rear Disc Brake Pads Replacement). 2. Clean the friction surfaces of the brake rotor with denatured alcohol, or an equivalent approved brake cleaner. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Brake Rotor Assembled Lateral Runout Correction > Page 7434 3. Using a micrometer calibrated in thousandths-of-a-millimeter, or ten-thousandths-of-an-inch, measure and record the thickness of the brake rotor at 4 or more points, evenly spaced around the rotor. Ensure that the measurements are only taken within the friction surfaces and that the micrometer is positioned the same distance from the outer edge of the rotor, about 13 mm (1/2 in), for each measurement. 4. Calculate the difference between the highest and lowest thickness measurements recorded to obtain the amount of thickness variation. 5. Compare the thickness variation measurement to the following specification: Brake rotor maximum allowable thickness variation: 0.025 mm (0.001 in) Note: Whenever a brake rotor is refinished or replaced, the assembled lateral runout (LRO) of the rotor must be measured to ensure optimum performance of the disc brakes. 6. If the brake rotor thickness variation measurement exceeds the specification, the rotor requires refinishing or replacement. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures Brake Rotor/Disc: Procedures Brake Pad and Rotor Burnishing Brake Pad and Rotor Burnishing Warning Road test a vehicle under safe conditions and while obeying all traffic laws. Do not attempt any maneuvers that could jeopardize vehicle control. Failure to adhere to these precautions could lead to serious personal injury and vehicle damage. Burnishing the brake pads and brake rotors is necessary in order to ensure that the braking surfaces are properly prepared after service has been performed on the disc brake system. This procedure should be performed whenever the disc brake rotors have been refinished or replaced, and/or whenever the disc brake pads have been replaced. 1. Select a smooth road with little or no traffic. 2. Accelerate the vehicle to 48 km/h (30 mph). Note: Use care to avoid overheating the brakes while performing this step. 3. Using moderate to firm pressure, apply the brakes to bring the vehicle to a stop. Do not allow the brakes to lock. 4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 until approximately 20 stops have been completed. Allow sufficient cooling periods between stops in order to properly burnish the brake pads and rotors. Brake Rotor Refinishing Brake Rotor Refinishing Special Tools * J-41013 - Rotor Resurfacing Kit * J-42450-A - Wheel Hub Resurfacing Kit Note: Do NOT refinish the brake rotors in order to correct any of the following complaints: * Growl or squeal brake noise * Premature brake lining wear * Cosmetic or superficial corrosion of the rotor braking surface * Rotor discoloration Refinish the brake rotors ONLY when 1 or more of the following conditions exist: * Groove depth in excess of specification * Severe scoring of the rotor braking surface * Brake pulsation caused by the following: - Lateral runout in excess of specification - Brake rotor thickness variation in excess of specification - Corrosion or pitting that is deeper than the rotor braking surface 1. Use the J-42450-A - Wheel Hub Resurfacing Kit in order to clean the wheel bearing/hub. 2. Use a micrometer in order to measure the thinnest point of the brake rotor. If the thinnest point of the brake rotor exceeds the brake rotor minimum thickness, do NOT refinish the brake rotor. Replace the brake rotor. 3. Use the J-41013 - Rotor Resurfacing Kit in order to THOROUGHLY clean the rust from the brake rotor flange. 4. Refinish the brake rotor. Refer to the brake lathe manufacturer's operating instructions. Note: Failure to obtain the best possible braking surface finish may cause the vehicle to stop with difficulty. 5. After machining the rotor, use 120 grit aluminum oxide sandpaper and a non-directional rotor finisher, if available, in order to create a non-directional braking surface. 6. Clean the braking surfaces with GM P/N 12377981 (Canadian P/N 10953463) or equivalent, brake parts cleaner. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 7437 Brake Rotor/Disc: Removal and Replacement Front Brake Rotor Replacement Front Brake Rotor Replacement Special Tools * J-41013 - Rotor Resurfacing Kit * J-42450-A - Wheel Hub Resurfacing Kit For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Tools and Equipment). Removal Procedure Warning: Refer to Brake Dust Warning (See: Service Precautions/Technician Safety Information/Brake Dust Warning). 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle (See: Maintenance/Vehicle Lifting/Service and Repair). 2. Remove the tire and wheel assembly. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation (See: Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair ). 3. Remove the brake caliper bracket bolts (1). Caution: Support the brake caliper with heavy mechanic wire, or equivalent, whenever it is separated from its mount and the hydraulic flexible brake hose is still connected. Failure to support the caliper in this manner will cause the flexible brake hose to bear the weight of the caliper, which may cause damage to the brake hose and in turn may cause a brake fluid leak. 4. Remove the brake caliper and bracket assembly and support with heavy mechanics wire or equivalent. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 7438 5. Remove the brake rotor bolt (1) and the brake rotor. Installation Procedure 1. Using the J-42450-A - Wheel Hub Resurfacing Kit , thoroughly clean any rust or corrosion from the mating surface of the hub/axle flange. 2. Using the J-41013 - Rotor Resurfacing Kit , thoroughly clean any rust or corrosion from the mating surface of the rotor to the hub/axle flange. 3. Install the brake rotor. Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener Caution). 4. Install the brake rotor bolt (1) and tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb in). 5. Position the brake caliper and bracket assembly to the vehicle. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 7439 6. Install the brake caliper bracket bolts (1) and tighten to 190 Nm (140 lb ft). 7. Install the tire and wheel assembly. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation (See: Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair). 8. Burnish the brake pads and rotors. Refer to Brake Pad and Rotor Burnishing (See: Brake Pad/Service and Repair/Procedures). Rear Brake Rotor Replacement Rear Brake Rotor Replacement Special Tools * J-41013 - Rotor Resurfacing Kit * J-42450-A - Wheel Hub Resurfacing Kit For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Tools and Equipment). Removal Procedure Warning: Refer to Brake Dust Warning (See: Service Precautions/Technician Safety Information/Brake Dust Warning). 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle (See: Maintenance/Vehicle Lifting/Service and Repair). 2. Remove the tire and wheel assembly. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation (See: Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair ). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 7440 3. Remove the brake caliper bracket bolts (1). Caution: Support the brake caliper with heavy mechanic wire, or equivalent, whenever it is separated from its mount and the hydraulic flexible brake hose is still connected. Failure to support the caliper in this manner will cause the flexible brake hose to bear the weight of the caliper, which may cause damage to the brake hose and in turn may cause a brake fluid leak. 4. Remove the brake caliper and bracket assembly and support with heavy mechanics wire or equivalent. 5. Remove the brake rotor bolt (1) and the brake rotor. 6. If the brake rotor is difficult to remove, remove the park brake shoe adjuster access plug on the face of the brake rotor to gain access to the park brake adjuster and loosen the park brake shoe adjuster. Installation Procedure 1. Using the J-42450-A - Wheel Hub Resurfacing Kit , thoroughly clean any rust or corrosion from the mating surface of the hub/axle flange. 2. Using the J-41013 - Rotor Resurfacing Kit , thoroughly clean any rust or corrosion from the mating surface of the rotor to the hub/axle flange. 3. Install the brake rotor. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 7441 Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener Caution). 4. Install the brake rotor bolt (1) and tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb in). 5. Position the brake caliper and bracket assembly to the vehicle. 6. Install the brake caliper bracket bolts (1) and tighten to 125 Nm (92 lb ft). 7. If necessary, adjust the park brake. Refer to Parking Brake Adjustment (See: Parking Brake System/Adjustments). 8. Install the tire and wheel assembly. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation (See: Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair). 9. Burnish the brake pads and rotors. Refer to Brake Pad and Rotor Burnishing (See: Brake Pad/Service and Repair/Procedures). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Antilock Brake Automated Bleed Procedure Brake Bleeding: Service and Repair Antilock Brake Automated Bleed Procedure Antilock Brake System Automated Bleed Warning: Refer to Brake Fluid Irritant Warning (See: Service Precautions/Technician Safety Information/Brake Fluid Irritant Warning). Caution: Refer to Brake Fluid Effects on Paint and Electrical Components Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings). Note: Before performing the antilock brake system (ABS) Automated Bleed Procedure, first perform a manual or pressure bleed of the base brake system. Refer to Hydraulic Brake System Bleeding (Manual) (See: )Hydraulic Brake System Bleeding (Pressure) (See: ). The automated bleed procedure is recommended when one of the following conditions exist: * Base brake system bleeding does not achieve the desired pedal height or feel * Extreme loss of brake fluid has occurred * Air ingestion is suspected in the secondary circuits of the brake modulator assembly The ABS Automated Bleed Procedure uses a scan tool to cycle the system solenoid valves and run the pump in order to purge any air from the secondary circuits. These circuits are normally closed off, and are only opened during system initialization at vehicle start up and during ABS operation. The automated bleed procedure opens these secondary circuits and allows any air trapped in these circuits to flow out toward the brake corners. Automated Bleed Procedure Caution: The Auto Bleed Procedure may be terminated at any time during the process by pressing the EXIT button. No further Scan Tool prompts pertaining to the Auto Bleed procedure will be given. After exiting the bleed procedure, relieve bleed pressure and disconnect bleed equipment per manufacturers instructions. Failure to properly relieve pressure may result in spilled brake fluid causing damage to components and painted surfaces. 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle (See: Maintenance/Vehicle Lifting/Service and Repair). 2. Remove all 4 tire and wheel assemblies. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation (See: Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair). 3. Inspect the brake system for leaks and visual damage. Refer to Symptoms - Hydraulic Brakes (See: Testing and Inspection/Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures/Symptoms - Hydraulic Brakes). Repair or replace components as needed. 4. Lower the vehicle. 5. Inspect the battery state of charge. Refer to Battery Inspection/Test (See: Starting and Charging/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Battery Inspection/Test). 6. Install a scan tool. 7. Turn the ignition ON, with the engine OFF. 8. With the scan tool, establish communications with the ABS system. Select Special Functions. Select Automated Bleed from the Special Functions menu. 9. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle (See: Maintenance/Vehicle Lifting/Service and Repair). 10. Following the directions given on the scan tool, pressure bleed the base brake system. Refer to Hydraulic Brake System Bleeding (Manual) (See: )Hydraulic Brake System Bleeding (Pressure) (See: ). 11. Follow the scan tool directions until the desired brake pedal height is achieved. 12. If the bleed procedure is aborted, a malfunction exists. Perform the following steps before resuming the bleed procedure: * If a DTC is detected, refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle (See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Descriptions/Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle) and diagnose the appropriate DTC. * If the brake pedal feels spongy, perform the conventional brake bleed procedure again. Refer to Hydraulic Brake System Bleeding (Manual) ( See: )Hydraulic Brake System Bleeding (Pressure) (See: ). 13. When the desired pedal height is achieved, press the brake pedal to inspect for firmness. 14. Lower the vehicle. 15. Remove the scan tool. 16. Install the tire and wheel assemblies. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation (See: Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair ). 17. Inspect the brake fluid level. Refer to Master Cylinder Reservoir Filling (See: Brake Master Cylinder/Service and Repair/Procedures/Master Cylinder Reservoir Filling). 18. Road test the vehicle while inspecting that the pedal remains high and firm. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Antilock Brake Automated Bleed Procedure > Page 7447 Brake Bleeding: Service and Repair Hydraulic Brake Bleeding (Manual) Hydraulic Brake System Bleeding (Manual) Warning: Refer to Brake Fluid Irritant Warning (See: Service Precautions/Technician Safety Information/Brake Fluid Irritant Warning). Caution: Refer to Brake Fluid Effects on Paint and Electrical Components Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings). 1. Place a clean shop cloth beneath the brake master cylinder to prevent brake fluid spills. 2. With the ignition OFF and the brakes cool, apply the brakes 3-5 times, or until the brake pedal effort increases significantly, in order to deplete the brake booster power reserve. 3. If you have performed a brake master cylinder bench bleeding on this vehicle, or if you disconnected the brake pipes from the master cylinder, you must perform the following steps: 1. Ensure that the brake master cylinder reservoir is full to the maximum-fill level. If necessary, add GM approved brake fluid from a clean, sealed brake fluid container. Refer to Fluid and Lubricant Recommendations (USA and Canada) (See: Maintenance). If removal of the reservoir cap and diaphragm is necessary, clean the outside of the reservoir on and around the cap prior to removal. 2. With the rear brake pipe installed securely to the master cylinder, loosen and separate the front brake pipe from the front port of the brake master cylinder. 3. Allow a small amount of brake fluid to gravity bleed from the open port of the master cylinder. 4. Reconnect the brake pipe to the master cylinder port and tighten securely. 5. Have an assistant slowly depress the brake pedal fully and maintain steady pressure on the pedal. 6. Loosen the same brake pipe to purge air from the open port of the master cylinder. 7. Tighten the brake pipe, then have the assistant slowly release the brake pedal. 8. Wait 15 seconds, then repeat steps 3.3-3.7 until all air is purged from the same port of the master cylinder. 9. With the front brake pipe installed securely to the master cylinder, after all air has been purged from the front port of the master cylinder, loosen and separate the rear brake pipe from the master cylinder, then repeat steps 3.3-3.8. 10. After completing the final master cylinder port bleeding procedure, ensure that both of the brake pipe-to-master cylinder fittings are properly tightened. 4. Fill the brake master cylinder reservoir with GM approved brake fluid from a clean, sealed brake fluid container. Ensure that the brake master cylinder reservoir remains at least half-full during this bleeding procedure. Add fluid as needed to maintain the proper level. Refer to Master Cylinder Reservoir Filling (See: Brake Master Cylinder/Service and Repair/Procedures/Master Cylinder Reservoir Filling). Clean the outside of the reservoir on and around the reservoir cap prior to removing the cap and diaphragm. 5. Install a proper box-end wrench onto the RIGHT REAR wheel hydraulic circuit bleeder valve. 6. Install a transparent hose over the end of the bleeder valve. 7. Submerge the open end of the transparent hose into a transparent container partially filled with GM approved brake fluid from a clean, sealed brake fluid container. 8. Have an assistant slowly depress the brake pedal fully and maintain steady pressure on the pedal. 9. Loosen the bleeder valve to purge air from the wheel hydraulic circuit. 10. Tighten the bleeder valve, then have the assistant slowly release the brake pedal. 11. Wait 15 seconds, then repeat steps 8-10 until all air is purged from the same wheel hydraulic circuit. 12. With the right rear wheel hydraulic circuit bleeder valve tightened securely, after all air has been purged from the right rear hydraulic circuit, install a proper box-end wrench onto the LEFT FRONT wheel hydraulic circuit bleeder valve. 13. Install a transparent hose over the end of the bleeder valve, then repeat steps 7-11. 14. With the left front wheel hydraulic circuit bleeder valve tightened securely, after all air has been purged from the left front hydraulic circuit, install a proper box-end wrench onto the LEFT REAR wheel hydraulic circuit bleeder valve. 15. Install a transparent hose over the end of the bleeder valve, then repeat steps 7-11. 16. With the left rear wheel hydraulic circuit bleeder valve tightened securely, after all air has been purged from the left rear hydraulic circuit, install a proper box-end wrench onto the RIGHT FRONT wheel hydraulic circuit bleeder valve. 17. Install a transparent hose over the end of the bleeder valve, then repeat steps 7-11. 18. After completing the final wheel hydraulic circuit bleeding procedure, ensure that each of the 4 wheel hydraulic circuit bleeder valves are properly tightened. 19. Fill the brake master cylinder reservoir to the maximum-fill level with GM approved brake fluid from a clean, sealed brake fluid container. 20. Slowly depress and release the brake pedal. Observe the feel of the brake pedal. Note: If it is determined that air was induced into the system upstream of the ABS modulator prior to servicing, the Antilock Brake System Automated Bleed (See: ) must be performed. 21. If the brake pedal feels spongy, repeat the bleeding procedure again. If the brake pedal still feels spongy after repeating the bleeding procedure, perform the following steps: 1. Inspect the brake system for external leaks. Refer to Brake System External Leak Inspection (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Brake System External Leak Inspection). 2. Pressure bleed the hydraulic brake system in order to purge any air that may still be trapped in the system. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Antilock Brake Automated Bleed Procedure > Page 7448 22. Turn the ignition key ON, with the engine OFF. Check to see if the brake system warning lamp remains illuminated. Note: DO NOT allow the vehicle to be driven until it is diagnosed and repaired. 23. If the brake system warning lamp remains illuminated, refer to Diagnostic Starting Point Vehicle (See: Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Diagnostic Starting Point - Vehicle). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Antilock Brake Automated Bleed Procedure > Page 7449 Brake Bleeding: Service and Repair Hydraulic Brake Bleeding (Pressure) Hydraulic Brake System Bleeding (Pressure) Special Tools * J-29532 - Diaphragm Type Brake Pressure Bleeder, or equivalent * J-35589-A - Master Cylinder Bleeder Adapter For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Tools and Equipment). Warning: Refer to Brake Fluid Irritant Warning (See: Service Precautions/Technician Safety Information/Brake Fluid Irritant Warning). Caution: Refer to Brake Fluid Effects on Paint and Electrical Components Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings). 1. Place a clean shop cloth beneath the brake master cylinder to prevent brake fluid spills. 2. With the ignition OFF and the brakes cool, apply the brakes 3-5 times, or until the brake pedal effort increases significantly, in order to deplete the brake booster power reserve. 3. If you have performed a brake master cylinder bench bleeding on this vehicle, or if you disconnected the brake pipes from the master cylinder, you must perform the following steps: 1. Ensure that the brake master cylinder reservoir is full to the maximum-fill level. If necessary, add GM approved brake fluid from a clean, sealed brake fluid container. Refer to Fluid and Lubricant Recommendations (USA and Canada) (See: Maintenance). If removal of the reservoir cap and diaphragm is necessary, clean the outside of the reservoir on and around the cap prior to removal. 2. With the rear brake pipe installed securely to the master cylinder, loosen and separate the front brake pipe from the front port of the brake master cylinder. 3. Allow a small amount of brake fluid to gravity bleed from the open port of the master cylinder. 4. Reconnect the brake pipe to the master cylinder port and tighten securely. 5. Have an assistant slowly depress the brake pedal fully and maintain steady pressure on the pedal. 6. Loosen the same brake pipe to purge air from the open port of the master cylinder. 7. Tighten the brake pipe, then have the assistant slowly release the brake pedal. 8. Wait 15 seconds, then repeat steps 3.3-3.7 until all air is purged from the same port of the master cylinder. 9. With the front brake pipe installed securely to the master cylinder, after all air has been purged from the front port of the master cylinder, loosen and separate the rear brake pipe from the master cylinder, then repeat steps 3.3-3.8. 10. After completing the final master cylinder port bleeding procedure, ensure that both of the brake pipe-to-master cylinder fittings are properly tightened. 4. Fill the brake master cylinder reservoir to the maximum-fill level with GM approved brake fluid from a clean, sealed brake fluid container. Refer to Master Cylinder Reservoir Filling (See: Brake Master Cylinder/Service and Repair/Procedures/Master Cylinder Reservoir Filling). Clean the outside of the reservoir on and around the reservoir cap prior to removing the cap and diaphragm. 5. Install the J-35589-A - Master Cylinder Bleeder Adapter to the brake master cylinder reservoir. 6. Check the brake fluid level in the J-29532 - Diaphragm Type Brake Pressure Bleeder, or equivalent , or equivalent. Add GM approved brake fluid from a clean, sealed brake fluid container as necessary to bring the level to approximately the half-full point. 7. Connect the J-29532 - Diaphragm Type Brake Pressure Bleeder, or equivalent , or equivalent, to the J-35589-A - Master Cylinder Bleeder Adapter. 8. Charge the J-29532 - Diaphragm Type Brake Pressure Bleeder, or equivalent , or equivalent, air tank to 175-205 kPa (25-30 psi). 9. Open the J-29532 - Diaphragm Type Brake Pressure Bleeder, or equivalent , or equivalent, fluid tank valve to allow pressurized brake fluid to enter the brake system. 10. Wait approximately 30 seconds, then inspect the entire hydraulic brake system in order to ensure that there are no existing external brake fluid leaks. Any brake fluid leaks identified require repair prior to completing this procedure. 11. Install a proper box-end wrench onto the RIGHT REAR wheel hydraulic circuit bleeder valve. 12. Install a transparent hose over the end of the bleeder valve. 13. Submerge the open end of the transparent hose into a transparent container partially filled with GM approved brake fluid from a clean, sealed brake fluid container. 14. Loosen the bleeder valve to purge air from the wheel hydraulic circuit. Allow fluid to flow until air bubbles stop flowing from the bleeder, then tighten the bleeder valve. 15. With the right rear wheel hydraulic circuit bleeder valve tightened securely, after all air has been purged from the right rear hydraulic circuit, install a proper box-end wrench onto the LEFT FRONT wheel hydraulic circuit bleeder valve. 16. Install a transparent hose over the end of the bleeder valve, then repeat steps 13-14. 17. With the left front wheel hydraulic circuit bleeder valve tightened securely, after all air has been purged from the left front hydraulic circuit, install a proper box-end wrench onto the LEFT REAR wheel hydraulic circuit bleeder valve. 18. Install a transparent hose over the end of the bleeder valve, then repeat steps 13-14. 19. With the left rear wheel hydraulic circuit bleeder valve tightened securely, after all air has been purged from the left rear hydraulic circuit, install a proper box-end wrench onto the RIGHT FRONT wheel hydraulic circuit bleeder valve Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Antilock Brake Automated Bleed Procedure > Page 7450 20. Install a transparent hose over the end of the bleeder valve, then repeat steps 13-14. 21. After completing the final wheel hydraulic circuit bleeding procedure, ensure that each of the 4 wheel hydraulic circuit bleeder valves are properly tightened. 22. Close the J-29532 - Diaphragm Type Brake Pressure Bleeder, or equivalent , or equivalent, fluid tank valve, then disconnect the J-29532 Diaphragm Type Brake Pressure Bleeder, or equivalent , or equivalent, from the J-35589-A Master Cylinder Bleeder Adapter. 23. Remove the J-35589-A - Master Cylinder Bleeder Adapter from the brake master cylinder reservoir. 24. Fill the brake master cylinder reservoir to the maximum-fill level with GM approved brake fluid from a clean, sealed brake fluid container. 25. Slowly depress and release the brake pedal. Observe the feel of the brake pedal. Note: If it is determined that air was induced into the system upstream of the ABS modulator prior to servicing, the Antilock Brake System Automated Bleed (See: ) must be performed. 26. If the brake pedal feels spongy, perform the following steps: 1. Inspect the brake system for external leaks. Refer to Brake System External Leak Inspection (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Brake System External Leak Inspection). 2. Using a scan tool, perform the antilock brake system automated bleeding procedure to remove any air that may have been trapped in the brake pressure modulator valve (BPMV). Refer to Antilock Brake System Automated Bleed (See: ). 27. Turn the ignition key ON, with the engine OFF. Check to see if the brake system warning lamp remains illuminated. Note: DO NOT allow the vehicle to be driven until it is diagnosed and repaired. 28. If the brake system warning lamp remains illuminated, refer to Diagnostic Starting Point Vehicle (See: Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Diagnostic Starting Point - Vehicle). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Antilock Brake Automated Bleed Procedure > Page 7451 Brake Bleeding: Service and Repair Hydraulic Brake Flushing Hydraulic Brake System Flushing Warning: Refer to Brake Fluid Irritant Warning (See: Service Precautions/Technician Safety Information/Brake Fluid Irritant Warning). Caution: Refer to Brake Fluid Effects on Paint and Electrical Components Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings). 1. Inspect the brake fluid for the following conditions, indicating brake fluid contamination: * Fluid separation, indicating 2 types of fluid are present; a substance other than the recommended brake fluid has been introduced into the brake hydraulic system - Swirled appearance - oil-based substance - Layered appearance - silicone-based substance * Fluid discoloration, indicating the presence of moisture or particles that have been introduced into the brake hydraulic system - Cloudy appearance - moisture - Dark appearance/suspended particles in fluid - dirt, rust, corrosion, brake dust 2. Inspect the master cylinder reservoir cap diaphragm and the reservoir-to-master cylinder grommets for swelling, indicating brake fluid contamination. 3. If the brake fluid WAS contaminated with an oil-based or a silicone-based substance, indicated by fluid separation and/or a swollen master cylinder reservoir cap diaphragm and/or swollen reservoir-to-master cylinder grommets, perform the following: 1. Remove ALL of the following components listed from the vehicle. Each component contains internal rubber seals/linings which have been contaminated by the contaminated brake fluid in the brake hydraulic system. Refer to the procedures indicated: * Master Cylinder Replacement (See: Brake Master Cylinder/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement) * Front Brake Hose Replacement (See: Brake Hose/Line/Service and Repair/Front Brake Hose Replacement) * Rear Brake Hose Replacement (See: Brake Hose/Line/Service and Repair/Rear Brake Hose Replacement) * Front Brake Caliper Replacement (See: Brake Caliper/Service and Repair/Front Brake Caliper Replacement) * Rear Brake Caliper Replacement (See: Brake Caliper/Service and Repair/Rear Brake Caliper Replacement) * Brake Pressure Modulator Valve Replacement (See: Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes/Service and Repair/Brake Pressure Modulator Valve Replacement) 2. Clean out all the hydraulic brake pipes using denatured alcohol, or equivalent. 3. Dry the brake pipes using non-lubricated, filtered air. 4. Repair or replace ALL of the following components listed and install them to the vehicle. Each component contains internal rubber seals/linings which have been contaminated by the contaminated brake fluid in the brake hydraulic system. Refer to the procedures indicated: * Master Cylinder Replacement (See: Brake Master Cylinder/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement); also perform the following: Clean the brake master cylinder reservoir using denatured alcohol, or equivalent, then dry the reservoir using non-lubricated, filtered air. Inspect the reservoir for cracks and/or damage and replace if necessary. Refer to Master Cylinder Reservoir Replacement (See: Brake Fluid Reservoir/Service and Repair). Replace the brake master cylinder reservoir cap diaphragm. * Front Brake Hose Replacement (See: Brake Hose/Line/Service and Repair/Front Brake Hose Replacement) * Rear Brake Hose Replacement (See: Brake Hose/Line/Service and Repair/Rear Brake Hose Replacement) * Front Brake Caliper Replacement (See: Brake Caliper/Service and Repair/Front Brake Caliper Replacement) * Rear Brake Caliper Replacement (See: Brake Caliper/Service and Repair/Rear Brake Caliper Replacement) * Brake Pressure Modulator Valve Replacement (See: Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes/Service and Repair/Brake Pressure Modulator Valve Replacement) 4. If the brake fluid was NOT contaminated with an oil-based or a silicone-based substance, but WAS contaminated with water or dirt, rust, corrosion, and/or brake dust, replace the brake master cylinder reservoir cap diaphragm. The diaphragm may have allowed the moisture or particles to enter the hydraulic system. 5. Fill the brake master cylinder reservoir to the maximum-fill level with approved brake fluid from a clean, sealed brake fluid container as specified in the owners manual. 6. Pressure bleed the hydraulic brake system. Begin the procedure with the pressure bleeder reservoir filled to the maximum-fill level with the correct brake fluid as indicated. Refer to Hydraulic Brake System Bleeding (Manual) (See: )Hydraulic Brake System Bleeding (Pressure) (See: ). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Brake Caliper: Testing and Inspection Brake Caliper Inspection Warning: Refer to Brake Dust Warning (See: Service Precautions/Technician Safety Information/Brake Dust Warning). 1. Inspect the brake caliper housing (1) for cracks, excess wear, and/or damage. If any of these conditions are present, the brake caliper requires replacement. 2. Inspect the caliper piston dust boot seal (2) for cracks, tears, cuts, deterioration and/or improper seating in the caliper body. If any of these conditions are present, the brake caliper requires overhaul or replacement. 3. Inspect for brake fluid leakage around the caliper piston dust boot seal (2) and on the disc brake pads. If there is any evidence of brake fluid leakage, the brake caliper requires overhaul or replacement. 4. Inspect for smooth and complete travel of the caliper pistons into the caliper bores: The movement of the caliper pistons into the caliper bores should be smooth and even. If the caliper piston is frozen or difficult to bottom, the caliper requires overhaul or replacement. * For single piston caliper applications, insert a discarded inner brake pad (2) or block of wood in front of the piston. Using a large C-clamp (1) installed over the body of the caliper (3) and against the brake pad or block of wood, slowly bottom the piston in the bore. * For dual piston caliper applications, insert a discarded inner brake pad (2) or block of wood in front of the pistons. Using 2 large C-clamps (1) installed over the body of the caliper (3) and against the brake pad or block of wood, slowly bottom the pistons evenly into the bores. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Brake Caliper Replacement Brake Caliper: Service and Repair Front Brake Caliper Replacement Front Brake Caliper Replacement Removal Procedure Warning: Refer to Brake Dust Warning (See: Service Precautions/Technician Safety Information/Brake Dust Warning). Warning: Refer to Brake Fluid Irritant Warning (See: Service Precautions/Technician Safety Information/Brake Fluid Irritant Warning). 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle (See: Maintenance/Vehicle Lifting/Service and Repair). 2. Remove the tire and wheel assembly. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation (See: Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair ). 3. Remove the brake hose fitting bolt (1). Note: Do not reuse the brake hose fitting gaskets. 4. Remove and discard the brake hose fitting gaskets (2) from the brake hose fitting (3). 5. Cap the brake hose fitting to prevent brake fluid loss and contamination. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Brake Caliper Replacement > Page 7457 Note: * DO NOT use any air tools to remove or install the guide pin bolts. Use hand tools ONLY. * Install an open end wrench to hold the caliper guide pin in line with the brake caliper while removing or installing the caliper guide pin bolt. DO NOT allow the open end wrench to come in contact with the brake caliper. Allowing the open end wrench to come in contact with the brake caliper will cause a pulsation when the brakes are applied. 6. Using a backup wrench to hold the brake caliper guide pin stationary, remove the brake caliper guide pin bolts (1). 7. Remove the brake caliper. Installation Procedure 1. Install the brake caliper. Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener Caution). 2. Hold the brake caliper guide pin stationary and install the brake caliper guide pin bolts (1) and tighten to 27 Nm (20 lb ft). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Brake Caliper Replacement > Page 7458 Note: Install new brake hose fitting gaskets. 3. Assemble the brake hose fitting bolt (1) and the 2 new brake hose fitting gaskets (2) to the font brake hose fitting (3). 4. Install the brake hose assembly and tighten the brake hose fitting bolt to 40 Nm (30 lb ft). 5. Bleed the hydraulic brake system. Refer to Hydraulic Brake System Bleeding (Manual) (See: Brake Bleeding/Service and Repair)Hydraulic Brake System Bleeding (Pressure) (See: Brake Bleeding/Service and Repair). 6. Install the tire and wheel assembly. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation (See: Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Brake Caliper Replacement > Page 7459 Brake Caliper: Service and Repair Rear Brake Caliper Replacement Rear Brake Caliper Replacement Removal Procedure Warning: Refer to Brake Dust Warning (See: Service Precautions/Technician Safety Information/Brake Dust Warning). Warning: Refer to Brake Fluid Irritant Warning (See: Service Precautions/Technician Safety Information/Brake Fluid Irritant Warning). 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle (See: Maintenance/Vehicle Lifting/Service and Repair). 2. Remove the tire and wheel assembly. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation (See: Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair ). 3. Remove the brake hose fitting bolt (1). 4. Remove the brake hose fitting (2) from the brake caliper. Note: Do not reuse the brake hose fitting gaskets. 5. Remove and discard the brake hose fitting gaskets (3). 6. Cap the brake hose fitting to prevent brake fluid loss and contamination. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Brake Caliper Replacement > Page 7460 Note: * DO NOT use any air tools to remove or install the guide pin bolts. Use hand tools ONLY. * Install an open end wrench to hold the caliper guide pin in line with the brake caliper while removing or installing the caliper guide pin bolt. DO NOT allow the open end wrench to come in contact with the brake caliper. Allowing the open end wrench to come in contact with the brake caliper will cause a pulsation when the brakes are applied. 7. Hold the brake caliper guide pin stationary and remove the brake caliper guide pin bolts (1). 8. Remove the brake caliper. Installation Procedure 1. Install the brake caliper. Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener Caution). 2. Hold the brake caliper guide pin stationary and install the brake caliper guide pin bolts (1) and tighten to 27 Nm (20 lb ft). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Brake Caliper Replacement > Page 7461 Note: Install new brake hose fitting gaskets. 3. Assemble the brake hose fitting bolt (1) to the brake hose fitting (2) with 2 new brake hose fitting gaskets (3). 4. Install the brake hose assembly to the brake caliper and tighten the brake hose fitting bolt to 52 Nm (38 lb ft). 5. Bleed the hydraulic brake system. Refer to Hydraulic Brake System Bleeding (Manual) (See: Brake Bleeding/Service and Repair)Hydraulic Brake System Bleeding (Pressure) (See: Brake Bleeding/Service and Repair). 6. Install the tire and wheel assembly. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation (See: Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Brake Caliper Replacement > Page 7462 Brake Caliper: Service and Repair Front Brake Caliper Hardware Replacement Front Brake Caliper Hardware Replacement Removal Procedure Warning: Refer to Brake Dust Warning (See: Service Precautions/Technician Safety Information/Brake Dust Warning). 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle (See: Maintenance/Vehicle Lifting/Service and Repair). 2. Remove the tire and wheel assembly. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation (See: Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair ). Note: * DO NOT use any air tools to remove or install the guide pin bolts. Use hand tools ONLY. * Install an open end wrench to hold the caliper guide pin in line with the brake caliper while removing or installing the caliper guide pin bolt. DO NOT allow the open end wrench to come in contact with the brake caliper. Allowing the open end wrench to come in contact with the brake caliper will cause a pulsation when the brakes are applied. 3. Hold the brake caliper guide pin stationary and remove the brake caliper guide pin bolts (1). Caution: Support the brake caliper with heavy mechanic wire, or equivalent, whenever it is separated from its mount and the hydraulic flexible brake hose is still connected. Failure to support the caliper in this manner will cause the flexible brake hose to bear the weight of the caliper, which may cause damage to the brake hose and in turn may cause a brake fluid leak. 4. Remove the brake caliper and support with heavy mechanics wire or equivalent. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Brake Caliper Replacement > Page 7463 5. Remove the upper guide pin (1) and seal. Note: The lower brake caliper guide pin is equipped with a bushing and is not interchangeable with the upper guide pin. 6. Remove the lower guide pin (2) and seal. Installation Procedure Note: The guide pins are not interchangeable. Note the location of the guide pins. 1. Apply a light coat of high temperature silicone brake lubricant to the brake caliper guide pins. 2. Install the upper guide pin (1) and seal. 3. Ensure the lip of the seal is fully seated in the groove of the brake caliper guide pin and the brake caliper bracket. 4. Install the lower guide pin (2) and seal. 5. Ensure the lip of the seal is fully seated in the groove of the brake caliper guide pin and the brake caliper bracket. 6. Position the brake caliper to the bracket. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Brake Caliper Replacement > Page 7464 Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener Caution). 7. Hold the brake caliper guide pin stationary and tighten the brake caliper guide pin bolts (1) to 27 Nm(20 lb ft). 8. Install the tire and wheel assembly. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation (See: Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Brake Caliper Replacement > Page 7465 Brake Caliper: Service and Repair Rear Brake Caliper Hardware Replacement Rear Brake Caliper Hardware Replacement Removal Procedure Warning: Refer to Brake Dust Warning (See: Service Precautions/Technician Safety Information/Brake Dust Warning). 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle (See: Maintenance/Vehicle Lifting/Service and Repair). 2. Remove the tire and wheel assembly. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation (See: Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair ). Note: * DO NOT use any air tools to remove or install the guide pin bolts. Use hand tools ONLY. * Install an open end wrench to hold the caliper guide pin in line with the brake caliper while removing or installing the caliper guide pin bolt. DO NOT allow the open end wrench to come in contact with the brake caliper. Allowing the open end wrench to come in contact with the brake caliper will cause a pulsation when the brakes are applied. 3. Hold the brake caliper guide pins stationally and remove the brake caliper guide pin bolts (1). Caution: Support the brake caliper with heavy mechanic wire, or equivalent, whenever it is separated from its mount and the hydraulic flexible brake hose is still connected. Failure to support the caliper in this manner will cause the flexible brake hose to bear the weight of the caliper, which may cause damage to the brake hose and in turn may cause a brake fluid leak. 4. Remove the brake caliper and support with heavy mechanics wire or equivalent. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Brake Caliper Replacement > Page 7466 5. Remove the brake caliper guide pins (1) and seals (2). Installation Procedure 1. Apply a light coat of high temperature silicone brake lubricant to the brake caliper guide pins. 2. Assemble the brake caliper guide pins (1) to the guide pin seals (2). 3. Ensure the lip of the seal is fully seated in the groove of the brake caliper guide pin. 4. Install the upper and lower guide pins and seals to the brake caliper bracket. 5. Ensure the lip of the seal is fully seated in the groove of the brake caliper bracket. 6. Position the brake caliper to the bracket. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Brake Caliper Replacement > Page 7467 Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener Caution). 7. Hold the brake caliper guide pins stationary and tighten the brake caliper guide pin bolts (1) to 27 Nm (20 lb ft). 8. Install the tire and wheel assembly. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation (See: Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Brake Caliper Replacement > Page 7468 Brake Caliper: Service and Repair Front Brake Caliper Replacement Front Brake Caliper Replacement Removal Procedure Warning: Refer to Brake Dust Warning (See: Service Precautions/Technician Safety Information/Brake Dust Warning). Warning: Refer to Brake Fluid Irritant Warning (See: Service Precautions/Technician Safety Information/Brake Fluid Irritant Warning). 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle (See: Maintenance/Vehicle Lifting/Service and Repair). 2. Remove the tire and wheel assembly. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation (See: Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair ). 3. Remove the brake hose fitting bolt (1). Note: Do not reuse the brake hose fitting gaskets. 4. Remove and discard the brake hose fitting gaskets (2) from the brake hose fitting (3). 5. Cap the brake hose fitting to prevent brake fluid loss and contamination. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Brake Caliper Replacement > Page 7469 Note: * DO NOT use any air tools to remove or install the guide pin bolts. Use hand tools ONLY. * Install an open end wrench to hold the caliper guide pin in line with the brake caliper while removing or installing the caliper guide pin bolt. DO NOT allow the open end wrench to come in contact with the brake caliper. Allowing the open end wrench to come in contact with the brake caliper will cause a pulsation when the brakes are applied. 6. Using a backup wrench to hold the brake caliper guide pin stationary, remove the brake caliper guide pin bolts (1). 7. Remove the brake caliper. Installation Procedure 1. Install the brake caliper. Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener Caution). 2. Hold the brake caliper guide pin stationary and install the brake caliper guide pin bolts (1) and tighten to 27 Nm (20 lb ft). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Brake Caliper Replacement > Page 7470 Note: Install new brake hose fitting gaskets. 3. Assemble the brake hose fitting bolt (1) and the 2 new brake hose fitting gaskets (2) to the font brake hose fitting (3). 4. Install the brake hose assembly and tighten the brake hose fitting bolt to 40 Nm (30 lb ft). 5. Bleed the hydraulic brake system. Refer to Hydraulic Brake System Bleeding (Manual) (See: Brake Bleeding/Service and Repair)Hydraulic Brake System Bleeding (Pressure) (See: Brake Bleeding/Service and Repair). 6. Install the tire and wheel assembly. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation (See: Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair). Rear Brake Caliper Replacement Rear Brake Caliper Replacement Removal Procedure Warning: Refer to Brake Dust Warning (See: Service Precautions/Technician Safety Information/Brake Dust Warning). Warning: Refer to Brake Fluid Irritant Warning (See: Service Precautions/Technician Safety Information/Brake Fluid Irritant Warning). 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle (See: Maintenance/Vehicle Lifting/Service and Repair). 2. Remove the tire and wheel assembly. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation (See: Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair ). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Brake Caliper Replacement > Page 7471 3. Remove the brake hose fitting bolt (1). 4. Remove the brake hose fitting (2) from the brake caliper. Note: Do not reuse the brake hose fitting gaskets. 5. Remove and discard the brake hose fitting gaskets (3). 6. Cap the brake hose fitting to prevent brake fluid loss and contamination. Note: * DO NOT use any air tools to remove or install the guide pin bolts. Use hand tools ONLY. * Install an open end wrench to hold the caliper guide pin in line with the brake caliper while removing or installing the caliper guide pin bolt. DO NOT allow the open end wrench to come in contact with the brake caliper. Allowing the open end wrench to come in contact with the brake caliper will cause a pulsation when the brakes are applied. 7. Hold the brake caliper guide pin stationary and remove the brake caliper guide pin bolts (1). 8. Remove the brake caliper. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Brake Caliper Replacement > Page 7472 Installation Procedure 1. Install the brake caliper. Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener Caution). 2. Hold the brake caliper guide pin stationary and install the brake caliper guide pin bolts (1) and tighten to 27 Nm (20 lb ft). Note: Install new brake hose fitting gaskets. 3. Assemble the brake hose fitting bolt (1) to the brake hose fitting (2) with 2 new brake hose fitting gaskets (3). 4. Install the brake hose assembly to the brake caliper and tighten the brake hose fitting bolt to 52 Nm (38 lb ft). 5. Bleed the hydraulic brake system. Refer to Hydraulic Brake System Bleeding (Manual) (See: Brake Bleeding/Service and Repair)Hydraulic Brake System Bleeding (Pressure) (See: Brake Bleeding/Service and Repair). 6. Install the tire and wheel assembly. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation (See: Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Brake Caliper Replacement > Page 7473 Front Brake Caliper Hardware Replacement Front Brake Caliper Hardware Replacement Removal Procedure Warning: Refer to Brake Dust Warning (See: Service Precautions/Technician Safety Information/Brake Dust Warning). 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle (See: Maintenance/Vehicle Lifting/Service and Repair). 2. Remove the tire and wheel assembly. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation (See: Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair ). Note: * DO NOT use any air tools to remove or install the guide pin bolts. Use hand tools ONLY. * Install an open end wrench to hold the caliper guide pin in line with the brake caliper while removing or installing the caliper guide pin bolt. DO NOT allow the open end wrench to come in contact with the brake caliper. Allowing the open end wrench to come in contact with the brake caliper will cause a pulsation when the brakes are applied. 3. Hold the brake caliper guide pin stationary and remove the brake caliper guide pin bolts (1). Caution: Support the brake caliper with heavy mechanic wire, or equivalent, whenever it is separated from its mount and the hydraulic flexible brake hose is still connected. Failure to support the caliper in this manner will cause the flexible brake hose to bear the weight of the caliper, which may cause damage to the brake hose and in turn may cause a brake fluid leak. 4. Remove the brake caliper and support with heavy mechanics wire or equivalent. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Brake Caliper Replacement > Page 7474 5. Remove the upper guide pin (1) and seal. Note: The lower brake caliper guide pin is equipped with a bushing and is not interchangeable with the upper guide pin. 6. Remove the lower guide pin (2) and seal. Installation Procedure Note: The guide pins are not interchangeable. Note the location of the guide pins. 1. Apply a light coat of high temperature silicone brake lubricant to the brake caliper guide pins. 2. Install the upper guide pin (1) and seal. 3. Ensure the lip of the seal is fully seated in the groove of the brake caliper guide pin and the brake caliper bracket. 4. Install the lower guide pin (2) and seal. 5. Ensure the lip of the seal is fully seated in the groove of the brake caliper guide pin and the brake caliper bracket. 6. Position the brake caliper to the bracket. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Brake Caliper Replacement > Page 7475 Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener Caution). 7. Hold the brake caliper guide pin stationary and tighten the brake caliper guide pin bolts (1) to 27 Nm(20 lb ft). 8. Install the tire and wheel assembly. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation (See: Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair). Rear Brake Caliper Hardware Replacement Rear Brake Caliper Hardware Replacement Removal Procedure Warning: Refer to Brake Dust Warning (See: Service Precautions/Technician Safety Information/Brake Dust Warning). 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle (See: Maintenance/Vehicle Lifting/Service and Repair). 2. Remove the tire and wheel assembly. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation (See: Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair ). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Brake Caliper Replacement > Page 7476 Note: * DO NOT use any air tools to remove or install the guide pin bolts. Use hand tools ONLY. * Install an open end wrench to hold the caliper guide pin in line with the brake caliper while removing or installing the caliper guide pin bolt. DO NOT allow the open end wrench to come in contact with the brake caliper. Allowing the open end wrench to come in contact with the brake caliper will cause a pulsation when the brakes are applied. 3. Hold the brake caliper guide pins stationally and remove the brake caliper guide pin bolts (1). Caution: Support the brake caliper with heavy mechanic wire, or equivalent, whenever it is separated from its mount and the hydraulic flexible brake hose is still connected. Failure to support the caliper in this manner will cause the flexible brake hose to bear the weight of the caliper, which may cause damage to the brake hose and in turn may cause a brake fluid leak. 4. Remove the brake caliper and support with heavy mechanics wire or equivalent. 5. Remove the brake caliper guide pins (1) and seals (2). Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Brake Caliper Replacement > Page 7477 1. Apply a light coat of high temperature silicone brake lubricant to the brake caliper guide pins. 2. Assemble the brake caliper guide pins (1) to the guide pin seals (2). 3. Ensure the lip of the seal is fully seated in the groove of the brake caliper guide pin. 4. Install the upper and lower guide pins and seals to the brake caliper bracket. 5. Ensure the lip of the seal is fully seated in the groove of the brake caliper bracket. 6. Position the brake caliper to the bracket. Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener Caution). 7. Hold the brake caliper guide pins stationary and tighten the brake caliper guide pin bolts (1) to 27 Nm (20 lb ft). 8. Install the tire and wheel assembly. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation (See: Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair). Front Brake Caliper Bracket Replacement Front Brake Caliper Bracket Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Brake Caliper Replacement > Page 7478 Removal Procedure Warning: Refer to Brake Dust Warning (See: Service Precautions/Technician Safety Information/Brake Dust Warning). 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle (See: Maintenance/Vehicle Lifting/Service and Repair). 2. Remove the tire and wheel assembly. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation (See: Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair ). Note: * DO NOT use any air tools to remove or install the guide pin bolts. Use hand tools ONLY. * Install an open end wrench to hold the caliper guide pin in line with the brake caliper while removing or installing the caliper guide pin bolt. DO NOT allow the open end wrench to come in contact with the brake caliper. Allowing the open end wrench to come in contact with the brake caliper will cause a pulsation when the brakes are applied. 3. Hold the brake caliper guide pin stationary and remove the brake caliper guide pin bolts (1). Caution: Support the brake caliper with heavy mechanic wire, or equivalent, whenever it is separated from its mount and the hydraulic flexible brake hose is still connected. Failure to support the caliper in this manner will cause the flexible brake hose to bear the weight of the caliper, which may cause damage to the brake hose and in turn may cause a brake fluid leak. 4. Remove the brake caliper and support with heavy mechanics wire or equivalent. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Brake Caliper Replacement > Page 7479 Note: Note the location of the wear sensor for correct installation. 5. Remove the inner brake pad (1). 6. Remove the outer brake pad (2). 7. Remove the brake pad springs (1). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Brake Caliper Replacement > Page 7480 8. Remove the brake caliper bracket bolts (1). 9. Remove the brake caliper bracket (1). Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Brake Caliper Replacement > Page 7481 1. Install the brake caliper bracket (1). Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener Caution). 2. Install the brake caliper bracket bolts (1) and tighten to 190 Nm (140 lb ft). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Brake Caliper Replacement > Page 7482 3. Install the brake pad springs (1). Note: Note the location of the wear sensor for correct installation. 4. Install the inner brake pad (1). 5. Install the outer brake pad (2). 6. Position the brake caliper to the bracket. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Brake Caliper Replacement > Page 7483 7. Hold the brake caliper guide pins stationary and tighten the brake caliper guide pin bolts (1) to 27 Nm (20 lb ft). 8. Install the tire and wheel assembly. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation (See: Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair). Rear Brake Caliper Bracket Replacement Rear Brake Caliper Bracket Replacement Removal Procedure Warning: Refer to Brake Dust Warning (See: Service Precautions/Technician Safety Information/Brake Dust Warning). 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle (See: Maintenance/Vehicle Lifting/Service and Repair). 2. Remove the tire and wheel assembly. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation (See: Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair ). Note: * DO NOT use any air tools to remove or install the guide pin bolts. Use hand tools ONLY. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Brake Caliper Replacement > Page 7484 * Install an open end wrench to hold the caliper guide pin in line with the brake caliper while removing or installing the caliper guide pin bolt. DO NOT allow the open end wrench to come in contact with the brake caliper. Allowing the open end wrench to come in contact with the brake caliper will cause a pulsation when the brakes are applied. 3. Hold the brake caliper guide pins stationary and remove the brake caliper guide pin bolts (1). Caution: Support the brake caliper with heavy mechanic wire, or equivalent, whenever it is separated from its mount and the hydraulic flexible brake hose is still connected. Failure to support the caliper in this manner will cause the flexible brake hose to bear the weight of the caliper, which may cause damage to the brake hose and in turn may cause a brake fluid leak. 4. Remove the brake caliper and support with heavy mechanics wire or equivalent. Note: Note the location of the wear sensor for correct installation. 5. Remove the outer brake pad (1). 6. Remove the inner brake pad (2). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Brake Caliper Replacement > Page 7485 7. Remove the brake pad springs (1). 8. Remove the brake caliper bracket bolts (1). 9. Remove the brake caliper bracket (1). Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Brake Caliper Replacement > Page 7486 1. Install the brake caliper bracket (1). Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener Caution). 2. Install the brake caliper bracket bolts (1) and tighten to 125 Nm (92 lb ft). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Brake Caliper Replacement > Page 7487 3. Install the brake pad springs (1). Note: Note the location of the wear sensor for correct installation. 4. Install the outer brake pad (1). 5. Install the inner brake pad (2). 6. Position the brake caliper to the bracket. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Brake Caliper Replacement > Page 7488 7. Hold the brake caliper guide pins stationary and tighten the brake caliper guide pin bolts (1) to 27 Nm (20 lb ft). 8. Install the tire and wheel assembly. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation (See: Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Fluid > Component Information > Specifications Brake Fluid: Specifications Hydraulic Brake System: DOT 3 Hydraulic Brake Fluid (GM Part No. U.S. 12377967, in Canada 89021320). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch: Locations Front of Vehicle/Engine Compartment Component Views Engine Compartment Components (Chevrolet) 1 - B20 Brake Fluid Level Switch 2 - B19B Brake Booster Vacuum Sensor 3 - M75 Windshield Wiper Motor 4 - X50A Fuse Block - Underhood 5 - C1 Battery 6 - G24 Windshield Washer Pump 7 - B55 Hood Ajar Switch (BTV) 8 - P12B Horn - Low Note 9 - P12A Horn - High Note 10 - K17 Electronic Brake Control Module Engine Compartment Components (GMC) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 7495 1 - B20 Brake Fluid Level Switch 2 - B19B Brake Booster Vacuum Sensor 3 - M75 Windshield Wiper Motor 4 - X50A Fuse Block - Underhood 5 - C1 Battery 6 - G24 Windshield Washer Pump 7 - P12B Horn - Low Note 8 - B55 Hood Ajar Switch (BTV) 9 - K17 Electronic Brake Control Module 10 - P12A Horn - High Note Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 7496 Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch: Diagrams B20 Brake Fluid Level Switch Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 7497 Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch: Service and Repair Brake Fluid Level Indicator Switch Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the accessory wiring junction block. Refer to Accessory Wiring Junction Block Replacement (See: Maintenance/Fuses and Circuit Breakers/Fuse Block/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Accessory Wiring Junction Block Replacement). 2. Disconnect the brake fluid level indicator switch electrical connector. 3. While compressing the retaining tabs on the inboard side of the brake fluid level indicator switch (1), carefully remove the switch from the brake master cylinder reservoir. Installation Procedure Note: Ensure the retaining tabs on the brake fluid level indicator switch are fully engaged in the master cylinder reservoir. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 7498 1. Install the brake fluid level indicator switch (1) by carefully inserting the switch into the master cylinder reservoir. 2. Connect the brake fluid level indicator switch electrical connector. 3. Install the accessory wiring junction block. Refer to Accessory Wiring Junction Block Replacement (See: Maintenance/Fuses and Circuit Breakers/Fuse Block/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Accessory Wiring Junction Block Replacement). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Fluid Reservoir > Component Information > Service and Repair Brake Fluid Reservoir: Service and Repair Master Cylinder Reservoir Replacement Removal Procedure Warning: Refer to Brake Fluid Irritant Warning (See: Service Precautions/Technician Safety Information/Brake Fluid Irritant Warning). Caution: Refer to Brake Fluid Effects on Paint and Electrical Components Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings). 1. Using a suitable tool, remove the brake fluid from the brake master cylinder reservoir. 2. Discard the brake fluid into an approved container. 3. Disconnect the master cylinder fluid level sensor electrical connector (1). 4. Remove and discard the master cylinder reservoir retaining pins (2) by compressing the locking tabs. 5. Carefully remove the master cylinder reservoir (1) by pulling the reservoir straight up. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Fluid Reservoir > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 7502 6. Remove the master cylinder reservoir seals (1). Installation Procedure 1. Lubricate the master cylinder reservoir seals with GM approved brake fluid from a clean, sealed brake fluid container. 2. Install the master cylinder reservoir seals (1). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Fluid Reservoir > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 7503 3. Install the master cylinder reservoir (1) to the master cylinder. 4. Ensure the master cylinder reservoir bayonets are fully seated in the master cylinder. 5. Connect the master cylinder fluid level sensor electrical connector (1). 6. Install new master cylinder reservoir retaining pins (2). 7. Ensure the retaining pins are fully seated and the locking tabs are fully deployed. 8. Fill the master cylinder reservoir to the proper level. Refer to Master Cylinder Reservoir Filling (See: Brake Master Cylinder/Service and Repair/Procedures/Master Cylinder Reservoir Filling). 9. Observe the brake pedal feel after filling the master cylinder reservoir. If the pedal feels spongy, bleed the hydraulic brake system. Refer to Hydraulic Brake System Bleeding (Manual) (See: Brake Bleeding/Service and Repair)Hydraulic Brake System Bleeding (Pressure) (See: Brake Bleeding/Service and Repair). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Hose/Line > Component Information > Service and Repair > Brake Pipe Replacement Brake Hose/Line: Service and Repair Brake Pipe Replacement Brake Pipe Replacement Special Tools J-45405 - Pipe Flaring Tool Kit For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Tools and Equipment). Warning: Refer to Brake Fluid Irritant Warning (See: Service Precautions/Technician Safety Information/Brake Fluid Irritant Warning). Warning Always use double walled steel brake pipe when replacing brake pipes. The use of any other pipe is not recommended and may cause brake system failure. Carefully route and retain replacement brake pipes. Always use the correct fasteners and the original location for replacement brake pipes. Failure to properly route and retain brake pipes may cause damage to the brake pipes and cause brake system failure. Caution: Refer to Brake Fluid Effects on Paint and Electrical Components Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings). Note: When servicing the brake pipes, note the following: * If sectioning the brake pipe, use replacement pipe of the same type and outside diameter. * Use fittings of the appropriate size and type. * Only create flares of the same type or design as originally equipped on the vehicle. 1. Inspect the area of brake pipe to be repaired or replaced. 2. Release the brake pipe to be replaced from the retainers, as required. 3. Select an appropriate location to section the brake pipe, if necessary. * Allow adequate clearance in order to maneuver the J-45405 - Pipe Flaring Tool Kit. * Avoid sectioning the brake pipe at bends or mounting points. 4. Using a string or wire, measure the length of the pipe to be replaced including all pipe bends. 5. Add to the measurement taken the appropriate additional length required for each flare to be created. * 6.35 mm (0.250 in) for 4.76 mm (3/16 in) diameter pipe * 9.50 mm (0.374 in) for 6.35 mm (1/4 in) diameter pipe * 12.67 mm (0.499 in) for 7.94 mm (5/16 in) diameter pipe Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Hose/Line > Component Information > Service and Repair > Brake Pipe Replacement > Page 7508 Note: Ensure that the brake pipe end to be flared is cut at a square, 90 degree angle to the pipe length. 6. Using the pipe cutter included in the J-45405 - Pipe Flaring Tool Kit , carefully cut the brake pipe squarely to the measured length. 7. Remove the sectioned brake pipe from the vehicle. 8. Select the appropriate size of brake pipe and tube nuts, as necessary. The brake pipe outside diameter determines brake pipe size. 9. Strip the nylon coating from the brake pipe end to be flared, if necessary. 1. Select the appropriate blade on the coating stripping tool included in the J-45405 - Pipe Flaring Tool Kit , by unthreading the blade block from the stripping tool and installing the block with the desired blade facing the tool rollers. * 6.35 mm (0.250 in) blade for 4.76 mm (3/16 in) diameter pipe * 9.50 mm (0.374 in) blade for 6.35 mm (1/4 in) and 7.94 mm (5/16 in) diameter pipe 2. Insert the brake pipe end to be flared into the stripping tool to the depth of the ledge on the tool rollers. 3. While holding the brake pipe firmly against the stripping tool roller ledges, rotate the thumbwheel of the tool until the blade contacts the brake pipe coated surface. Note: Do not gouge the metal surface of the brake pipe. 4. Rotate the stripping tool in a clockwise direction, ensuring that the brake pipe end remains against the tool roller ledges. 5. After each successive revolution of the stripping tool, carefully rotate the thumbwheel of the tool clockwise, in order to continue stripping the coating from the brake pipe until the metal pipe surface is exposed. 6. Loosen the thumbwheel of the tool and remove the brake pipe. Note: Ensure that all loose remnants of the nylon coating have been removed from the brake pipe. 7. Inspect the stripped end of the brake pipe to ensure that the proper amount of coating has been removed. * 6.35 mm (0.250 in) for 4.76 mm (3/16 in) diameter pipe * 9.50 mm (0.374 in) for 6.35 mm (1/4 in) and 7.94 mm (5/16 in) diameter pipe Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Hose/Line > Component Information > Service and Repair > Brake Pipe Replacement > Page 7509 10. Chamfer the inside and outside diameter of the pipe with the de-burring tool included in the J-45405 - Pipe Flaring Tool Kit. 11. Install the tube nuts on the brake pipe, noting their orientation. 12. Clean the brake pipe and the J-45405 - Pipe Flaring Tool Kit of lubricant, contaminants, and debris. 13. Loosen the die clamping screw of the J-45405 - Pipe Flaring Tool Kit. 14. Select the corresponding die set and install the die halves into the die cage with the full, flat face of one die facing the clamping screw, and the counterbores of both dies facing the forming ram. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Hose/Line > Component Information > Service and Repair > Brake Pipe Replacement > Page 7510 15. Place the flat face of an unused die (1) against the die halves in the clamping cage and hold firmly against the counterbored face of the dies. 16. Insert the prepared end of the pipe to be flared through the back of the dies until the pipe is seated against the flat surface of the unused die (1). 17. Remove the unused die (1). 18. Ensure that the rear of both dies are seated firmly against the enclosed end of the die cage. 19. Firmly hand tighten the clamping screw (2) against the dies. 20. Select the appropriate forming mandrel and place into the forming ram. 21. Rotate the hydraulic fluid control valve clockwise to the closed position. 22. Rotate the body of the J-45405 - Pipe Flaring Tool Kit until it bottoms against the die cage. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Hose/Line > Component Information > Service and Repair > Brake Pipe Replacement > Page 7511 23. While guiding the forming mandrel into the exposed end of pipe to be flared, operate the lever of the J-45405 - Pipe Flaring Tool Kit until the forming mandrel bottoms against the clamping dies. 24. Rotate the hydraulic fluid control valve counterclockwise to the open position to allow the hydraulic forming ram to retract. 25. Insert the finishing cone into the forming ram. 26. Rotate the hydraulic fluid control valve clockwise to the closed position. 27. Rotate the body of the J-45405 - Pipe Flaring Tool Kit until it bottoms against the die cage. 28. While guiding the finishing cone into the exposed end of pipe to be flared, operate the lever of the J-45405 - Pipe Flaring Tool Kit until the finishing cone bottoms against the dies. 29. Rotate the hydraulic fluid control valve counterclockwise to the open position to allow the hydraulic forming ram to retract. 30. Loosen the die clamping screw and remove the dies and pipe. 31. If necessary, lightly tap the dies until the die halves separate. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Hose/Line > Component Information > Service and Repair > Brake Pipe Replacement > Page 7512 32. Inspect the brake pipe flare for correct shape and diameter (a). * 6.74-7.10 mm (0.265-0.279 in) flare diameter for 4.76 mm (3/16 in) diameter pipe * 8.57-9.27 mm (0.344-0.358 in) flare diameter for 6.35 mm (1/4 in) diameter pipe * 10.42-10.79 mm (0.410-0.425 in) flare diameter for 7.94 mm (5/16 in) diameter pipe 33. If necessary, using the removed section of brake pipe as a template, shape the new pipe with a suitable brake pipe bending tool. Note: When installing the pipe, maintain a clearance of 19 mm (3/4 in) from all moving or vibrating components. 34. Install the pipe to the vehicle with the appropriate brake pipe unions, as required. 35. If previously released, secure the brake pipe to the retainers. 36. Bleed the hydraulic brake system. Refer to Hydraulic Brake System Bleeding (Manual) (See: Brake Bleeding/Service and Repair)Hydraulic Brake System Bleeding (Pressure) (See: Brake Bleeding/Service and Repair). 37. With the aid of an assistant, inspect the brake pipe flares for leaks by starting the engine and applying the brakes. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Hose/Line > Component Information > Service and Repair > Brake Pipe Replacement > Page 7513 Brake Hose/Line: Service and Repair Front Brake Hose Replacement Front Brake Hose Replacement Removal Procedure Warning: Refer to Brake Fluid Irritant Warning (See: Service Precautions/Technician Safety Information/Brake Fluid Irritant Warning). Caution: Refer to Brake Fluid Effects on Paint and Electrical Components Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings). 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle (See: Maintenance/Vehicle Lifting/Service and Repair). 2. Remove the tire and wheel assembly. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation (See: Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair ). 3. Disconnect the brake pipe fitting (1) from the brake hose. 4. Cap the brake pipe fitting to prevent brake fluid loss and contamination. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Hose/Line > Component Information > Service and Repair > Brake Pipe Replacement > Page 7514 5. Remove the brake hose bracket nut (1). 6. Release the wheel speed sensor harness retaining clips (1) and release the harness. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Hose/Line > Component Information > Service and Repair > Brake Pipe Replacement > Page 7515 7. Remove the brake hose bracket bolt (1). 8. Remove the brake hose fitting bolt (1) from the brake hose and the caliper. Note: Do not reuse the brake hose fitting gaskets. 9. Remove and discard the brake hose fitting gaskets (2) from the brake hose (3). 10. Remove the brake hose. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Hose/Line > Component Information > Service and Repair > Brake Pipe Replacement > Page 7516 1. Install the brake hose. Note: Install new brake hose fitting gaskets. 2. Assemble the brake hose fitting bolt (1) with 2 new brake hose fitting gaskets (2) to the brake hose (3). Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener Caution). 3. Install the brake hose assembly to the brake hose and the caliper and tighten the brake hose fitting bolt to 40 Nm (30 lb ft). 4. Install the brake hose bracket bolt (1) and tighten to 16 Nm (12 lb ft). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Hose/Line > Component Information > Service and Repair > Brake Pipe Replacement > Page 7517 5. Install the wheel speed sensor harness and secure the retaining clips (1). 6. Install the brake hose bracket nut (1) and tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb in). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Hose/Line > Component Information > Service and Repair > Brake Pipe Replacement > Page 7518 7. Connect the brake pipe fitting (1) to the brake hose and tighten to and tighten to 18 Nm (13 lb ft). 8. Bleed the hydraulic brake system. Refer to Hydraulic Brake System Bleeding (Manual) (See: Brake Bleeding/Service and Repair)Hydraulic Brake System Bleeding (Pressure) (See: Brake Bleeding/Service and Repair). 9. Install the tire and wheel assembly. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation (See: Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Hose/Line > Component Information > Service and Repair > Brake Pipe Replacement > Page 7519 Brake Hose/Line: Service and Repair Rear Brake Hose Replacement Rear Brake Hose Replacement Removal Procedure Warning: Refer to Brake Fluid Irritant Warning (See: Service Precautions/Technician Safety Information/Brake Fluid Irritant Warning). Caution: Refer to Brake Fluid Effects on Paint and Electrical Components Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings). 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle (See: Maintenance/Vehicle Lifting/Service and Repair). 2. Remove the tire and wheel assembly. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation (See: Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair ). 3. Disconnect the brake pipe fitting (1) from the brake hose. 4. Cap the brake pipe fitting to prevent brake fluid loss and contamination. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Hose/Line > Component Information > Service and Repair > Brake Pipe Replacement > Page 7520 5. Remove the brake hose bolt (1) securing the brake hose bracket to the wheelhouse. 6. Remove the brake hose bracket bolt (1). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Hose/Line > Component Information > Service and Repair > Brake Pipe Replacement > Page 7521 7. Remove the brake hose fitting bolt (1) from the brake hose and the caliper. 8. Remove the brake hose (2) from the caliper. Note: Do not reuse the brake hose fitting gaskets. 9. Remove and discard the brake hose fitting gaskets (3). 10. Remove the brake hose. Installation Procedure 1. Install the brake hose. Note: Install new brake hose fitting gaskets. 2. Assemble the brake hose fitting bolt (1) to the brake hose (2) with 2 new brake hose fitting gaskets (3). Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener Caution). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Hose/Line > Component Information > Service and Repair > Brake Pipe Replacement > Page 7522 3. Install the brake hose assembly and tighten the brake hose fitting bolt to 52 Nm (38 lb ft). 4. Install the brake hose bracket bolt (1) and tighten to 16 Nm (12 lb ft). 5. Install the brake hose bolt (1) and tighten to 16 Nm (12 lb ft). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Hose/Line > Component Information > Service and Repair > Brake Pipe Replacement > Page 7523 6. Connect the brake pipe fitting (1) and tighten to 18 Nm (13 lb ft). 7. Bleed the hydraulic brake system. Refer to Hydraulic Brake System Bleeding (Manual) (See: Brake Bleeding/Service and Repair)Hydraulic Brake System Bleeding (Pressure) (See: Brake Bleeding/Service and Repair). 8. Install the tire and wheel assembly. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation (See: Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Hydraulic Control Assembly Antilock Brakes > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes: Testing and Inspection Brake Pressure Modulator Valve Pressure Sensor Calibration The brake pressure sensor does not require calibration often. Calibration of the brake pressure sensor might be required after certain service procedures are performed. Some of these procedures are as follows: * Electronic brake control module (EBCM) replacement * Brake pressure modulator valve assembly replacement The Brake Pressure Sensor Calibration procedure can be completed with a scan tool using the following steps: 1. Apply the parking brake, or set the transmission in the P position. 2. Release the brake pedal. 3. Install the scan tool to the data link connector. 4. Ignition ON, engine OFF 5. Select Brake Pressure Sensor Calibration in the EBCM Configuration/Reset Functions list. 6. Follow the scan tool directions to complete the calibration procedure. 7. Clear any DTCs that may be set. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Hydraulic Control Assembly Antilock Brakes > Component Information > Service and Repair > Brake Pressure Modulator Valve Replacement Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes: Service and Repair Brake Pressure Modulator Valve Replacement Brake Pressure Modulator Valve Replacement Removal Procedure Warning: Refer to Brake Fluid Irritant Warning (See: Service Precautions/Technician Safety Information/Brake Fluid Irritant Warning). Caution: Refer to Brake Fluid Effects on Paint and Electrical Components Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings). Caution: Always connect or disconnect the wiring harness connector from the EBCM/EBTCM with the ignition switch in the OFF position. Failure to observe this precaution could result in damage to the EBCM/EBTCM. 1. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position. 2. Remove the accessory wiring junction block. Refer to Accessory Wiring Junction Block Replacement (See: Maintenance/Fuses and Circuit Breakers/Fuse Block/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Accessory Wiring Junction Block Replacement). 3. Disconnect the electronic brake control module (EBCM) electrical connector by lifting the locking tabs. 4. Disconnect the left front brake pipe fitting (1) at the brake pressure modulator valve (BPMV). 5. Cap the brake pipe fitting and plug the BPMV outlet port to prevent brake fluid loss and contamination. 6. Disconnect the right front brake pipe fitting (2) from the BPMV. 7. Cap the brake pipe fitting and plug the BPMV outlet port to prevent brake fluid loss and contamination. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Hydraulic Control Assembly Antilock Brakes > Component Information > Service and Repair > Brake Pressure Modulator Valve Replacement > Page 7529 8. Disconnect the master cylinder primary brake pipe fitting (1) from the BPMV. 9. Cap the brake pipe fitting and plug the BPMV inlet port to prevent brake fluid loss and contamination. 10. Disconnect the master cylinder secondary brake pipe fitting (2) from the BPMV. 11. Cap the brake pipe fitting and plug the BPMV inlet port to prevent brake fluid loss and contamination. 12. Disconnect the left rear brake pipe fitting (1) from the BPMV. 13. Cap the brake pipe fitting and plug the BPMV outlet port to prevent brake fluid loss and contamination. 14. Disconnect the right rear brake pipe fitting (2) from the BPMV. 15. Cap the brake pipe fitting and plug the BPMV outlet port to prevent brake fluid loss and contamination. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Hydraulic Control Assembly Antilock Brakes > Component Information > Service and Repair > Brake Pressure Modulator Valve Replacement > Page 7530 16. Remove the BPMV bolt (1). Note: Do not pry on the accumulator caps on the underside of the BPMV. 17. Carefully remove the BPMV assembly (1) by pulling straight upward. 18. Inspect the insulators for damage and replace, if necessary. 19. If replacing the BPMV, remove the EBCM. Refer to Electronic Brake Control Module Replacement (See: Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems/Electronic Brake Control Module/Service and Repair). Installation Procedure 1. Install the EBCM, if removed. Refer to Electronic Brake Control Module Replacement (See: Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems/Electronic Brake Control Module/Service and Repair). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Hydraulic Control Assembly Antilock Brakes > Component Information > Service and Repair > Brake Pressure Modulator Valve Replacement > Page 7531 2. Install the BPMV assembly (1) to the bracket. Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener Caution). 3. Install the BPMV bolt (1) and tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb in). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Hydraulic Control Assembly Antilock Brakes > Component Information > Service and Repair > Brake Pressure Modulator Valve Replacement > Page 7532 4. Connect the left rear brake pipe fitting (1) to the BPMV and tighten to 21 Nm (16 lb ft). 5. Connect the right rear brake pipe fitting (2) to the BPMV and tighten to 21 Nm (16 lb ft). 6. Connect the master cylinder primary brake pipe fitting (1) to the BPMV and tighten to 21 Nm (16 lb ft). 7. Connect the master cylinder secondary brake pipe fitting (2) to the BPMV and tighten to 21 Nm (16 lb ft). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Hydraulic Control Assembly Antilock Brakes > Component Information > Service and Repair > Brake Pressure Modulator Valve Replacement > Page 7533 8. Connect the left front brake pipe fitting (1) to the BPMV and tighten to 21 Nm (16 lb ft). 9. Connect the right front brake pipe fitting (2) to the BPMV and tighten to 21 Nm (16 lb ft). 10. Connect the EBCM electrical connector. 11. Install the accessory wiring junction block. Refer to Accessory Wiring Junction Block Replacement (See: Maintenance/Fuses and Circuit Breakers/Fuse Block/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Accessory Wiring Junction Block Replacement). 12. Bleed the hydraulic brake system. Refer to Hydraulic Brake System Bleeding (Manual) (See: Brake Bleeding/Service and Repair)Hydraulic Brake System Bleeding (Pressure) (See: Brake Bleeding/Service and Repair). 13. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position. 14. Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle (See: Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle). 15. Observe the brake pedal feel after performing the diagnostic system check. If the pedal now feels spongy, air may have been in, or may have been introduced into the primary circuit. 16. If the pedal feels spongy, perform the Antilock Brake System Automated Bleed (See: Brake Bleeding/Service and Repair). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Hydraulic Control Assembly Antilock Brakes > Component Information > Service and Repair > Brake Pressure Modulator Valve Replacement > Page 7534 Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes: Service and Repair Brake Pressure Modulator Valve Bracket Replacement Brake Pressure Modulator Valve Bracket Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Place the ignition switch in the OFF position. 2. Remove the accessory wiring junction block. Refer to Accessory Wiring Junction Block Replacement (See: Maintenance/Fuses and Circuit Breakers/Fuse Block/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Accessory Wiring Junction Block Replacement). 3. Remove the brake pressure modulator valve (BPMV) bolt (1). Note: Do not pry on the accumulator caps on the underside of the BPMV. 4. Without disconnecting the brake pipe fittings, carefully lift the BPMV assembly (1) upward to release the mounting pins from the BPMV bracket Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Hydraulic Control Assembly Antilock Brakes > Component Information > Service and Repair > Brake Pressure Modulator Valve Replacement > Page 7535 insulators. 5. Position the BPMV assembly aside and secure with heavy mechanics wire or equivalent. 6. Remove the 2 BPMV bracket nuts (1). 7. Remove the BPMV bracket bolt (1). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Hydraulic Control Assembly Antilock Brakes > Component Information > Service and Repair > Brake Pressure Modulator Valve Replacement > Page 7536 8. Remove the BPMV bracket (1). 9. Inspect the insulators for damage and replace, if necessary. Installation Procedure 1. Install the BPMV bracket (1). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Hydraulic Control Assembly Antilock Brakes > Component Information > Service and Repair > Brake Pressure Modulator Valve Replacement > Page 7537 Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener Caution). 2. Install the BPMV bracket bolt (1) and tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb in). 3. Install the BPMV bracket nuts (1) and tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb in). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Hydraulic Control Assembly Antilock Brakes > Component Information > Service and Repair > Brake Pressure Modulator Valve Replacement > Page 7538 4. Carefully position the BPMV assembly (1) to the BPMV bracket insulators. 5. Install the BPMV bolt (1) and tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb in). 6. Install the accessory wiring junction block. Refer to Accessory Wiring Junction Block Replacement (See: Maintenance/Fuses and Circuit Breakers/Fuse Block/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Accessory Wiring Junction Block Replacement). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Master Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures Brake Master Cylinder: Procedures Master Cylinder Bench Bleeding Master Cylinder Bench Bleeding Warning: Refer to Brake Fluid Irritant Warning (See: Service Precautions/Technician Safety Information/Brake Fluid Irritant Warning). Caution: Refer to Brake Fluid Effects on Paint and Electrical Components Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings). 1. Secure the mounting flange of the brake master cylinder in a bench vise so that the rear of the primary piston is accessible. 2. Remove the master cylinder reservoir cap and diaphragm. 3. Install suitable fittings to the master cylinder ports that match the type of flare seat required and also provide for hose attachment. 4. Install transparent hoses to the fittings installed to the master cylinder ports, then route the hoses into the master cylinder reservoir. 5. Fill the master cylinder reservoir to at least the half-way point with GM approved brake fluid from a clean, sealed brake fluid container. Refer to Master Cylinder Reservoir Filling (See: Master Cylinder Reservoir Filling). 6. Ensure that the ends of the transparent hoses running into the master cylinder reservoir are fully submerged in the brake fluid. 7. Using a smooth, round-ended tool, depress and release the primary piston as far as it will travel, a depth of about 25 mm (1 in), several times. Observe the flow of fluid coming from the ports. As air is bled from the primary and secondary pistons, the effort required to depress the primary piston will increase and the amount of travel will decrease. 8. Continue to depress and release the primary piston until fluid flows freely from the ports with no evidence of air bubbles. 9. Remove the transparent hoses from the master cylinder reservoir. 10. Install the master cylinder reservoir cap and diaphragm. 11. Remove the fittings with the transparent hoses from the master cylinder ports. Wrap the master cylinder with a clean shop cloth to prevent brake fluid spills. 12. Remove the master cylinder from the vise. Master Cylinder Reservoir Filling Master Cylinder Reservoir Filling Warning: Refer to Brake Fluid Irritant Warning (See: Service Precautions/Technician Safety Information/Brake Fluid Irritant Warning). Caution: Refer to Brake Fluid Effects on Paint and Electrical Components Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings). 1. Visually inspect the brake fluid level through the brake master cylinder reservoir. 2. If the brake fluid level is at or below the half-full point during routine fluid checks, the brake system should be inspected for wear and possible brake fluid leaks. 3. If the brake fluid level is at or below the half-full point during routine fluid checks, and an inspection of the brake system did not reveal wear or brake fluid leaks, the brake fluid may be topped-off up to the maximum-fill level. 4. If brake system service was just completed, the brake fluid may be topped-off up to the maximum-fill level. 5. If the brake fluid level is above the half-full point, adding brake fluid is not recommended under normal conditions. 6. If brake fluid is to be added to the master cylinder reservoir, clean the outside of the reservoir on and around the reservoir cap prior to removing the cap and diaphragm. Use only GM approved brake fluid from a clean, sealed brake fluid container. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Master Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 7543 Brake Master Cylinder: Removal and Replacement Master Cylinder Replacement Removal Procedure Warning: Refer to Brake Fluid Irritant Warning (See: Service Precautions/Technician Safety Information/Brake Fluid Irritant Warning). Caution: Refer to Brake Fluid Effects on Paint and Electrical Components Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings). 1. Using a suitable tool, remove the brake fluid from the brake master cylinder reservoir. 2. Discard the brake fluid into an approved container. 3. Disconnect the master cylinder fluid level sensor electrical connector (1). 4. Disconnect the master cylinder primary brake pipe fitting (2). Cap the brake pipe fitting and plug the master cylinder outlet port to prevent brake fluid loss and contamination. 5. Disconnect the master cylinder secondary brake pipe fitting (3). Cap the brake pipe fitting and plug the master cylinder outlet port to prevent brake fluid loss and contamination. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Master Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 7544 6. Remove the 2 master cylinder nuts (1). 7. Remove the master cylinder (2). 8. If installing a new master cylinder, remove the master cylinder reservoir and cap. Refer to Master Cylinder Reservoir Replacement (See: Brake Fluid Reservoir/Service and Repair). 9. If removing the master cylinder reservoir, discard the reservoir retaining pins and seals. Installation Procedure 1. If the master cylinder reservoir was removed, install new master cylinder reservoir seals. 2. If installing a new master cylinder, install the master cylinder reservoir and cap using new reservoir retaining pins. Refer to Master Cylinder Reservoir Replacement (See: Brake Fluid Reservoir/Service and Repair). 3. If installing a new master cylinder, bench bleed the master cylinder. Refer to Master Cylinder Bench Bleeding (See: Procedures/Master Cylinder Bench Bleeding). 4. Install the master cylinder (2). Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener Caution). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Master Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 7545 5. Install the 2 master cylinder nuts (1) and tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb ft). 6. Connect the master cylinder fluid level sensor electrical connector (1). 7. Connect the master cylinder primary brake pipe fitting (2) and tighten to 18 Nm (13 lb ft). 8. Connect the master cylinder secondary brake pipe fitting (3) and tighten to 18 Nm (13 lb ft). 9. Bleed the hydraulic brake system. Refer to Hydraulic Brake System Bleeding (Manual) (See: Brake Bleeding/Service and Repair)Hydraulic Brake System Bleeding (Pressure) (See: Brake Bleeding/Service and Repair). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Actuator > Component Information > Service and Repair Parking Brake Actuator: Service and Repair Parking Brake Actuator Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Cable > Component Information > Service and Repair > Parking Brake Front Cable Replacement Parking Brake Cable: Service and Repair Parking Brake Front Cable Replacement Parking Brake Front Cable Replacement Special Tools J-37043 - Parking Brake Cable Release Tool Removal Procedure 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle (See: Maintenance/Vehicle Lifting/Service and Repair). 2. Loosen the park brake cable locknut (1) at the equalizer to relieve tension on the park brake cable. 3. Disconnect the front park brake cable (1) from the rear park brake cable. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Cable > Component Information > Service and Repair > Parking Brake Front Cable Replacement > Page 7554 4. Using the J-37043 - Parking Brake Cable Release Tool , remove the front park brake cable from the park brake cable bracket on the body by compressing the locking tabs on the cable conduit (2). 5. Remove the left side body hinge pillar trim panel. Refer to Body Hinge Pillar Trim Panel Replacement (See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair/Body Hinge Pillar Trim Panel Replacement). 6. Lift the driver floor carpet to expose the front park brake cable routing clip. 7. Release the park brake cable routing clip from the floor stud. 8. Release the front park brake cable pass through grommet. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Cable > Component Information > Service and Repair > Parking Brake Front Cable Replacement > Page 7555 9. Disconnect the front park brake cable from the park brake pedal clevis (1). 10. Remove the front park brake cable from the park brake pedal assembly by compressing the locking tabs on the cable conduit (2). 11. Remove the front park brake cable assembly. Installation Procedure 1. Install the front park brake cable assembly. 2. Connect the front park brake cable to the park brake pedal clevis (1). 3. Install the front park brake cable to the park brake pedal assembly. 4. Ensure the locking tabs on the cable conduit (2) are fully engaged to the park brake pedal assembly. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Cable > Component Information > Service and Repair > Parking Brake Front Cable Replacement > Page 7556 5. Route the front park brake cable through the vehicle floor and seat the pass through grommet. 6. Position the park brake cable routing clip to the floor stud. 7. Position the driver floor carpet to the vehicle floor. 8. Connect the park brake warning indicator switch electrical connector. 9. Install the left side body hinge pillar trim panel. Refer to Body Hinge Pillar Trim Panel Replacement (See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair/Body Hinge Pillar Trim Panel Replacement). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Cable > Component Information > Service and Repair > Parking Brake Front Cable Replacement > Page 7557 10. Install the front park brake cable (1) to the park brake cable bracket on the body. 11. Ensure the locking tabs on the cable conduit (2) are fully engaged to the park brake cable bracket. 12. Connect the front park brake cable to the rear park brake cable. 13. Adjust the park brake. Refer to Parking Brake Adjustment (See: Adjustments). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Cable > Component Information > Service and Repair > Parking Brake Front Cable Replacement > Page 7558 Parking Brake Cable: Service and Repair Parking Brake Rear Cable Replacement (Left) Parking Brake Rear Cable Replacement (Left) Special Tools J-37043 - Parking Brake Cable Release Tool Removal Procedure 1. Release the park brake. 2. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle (See: Maintenance/Vehicle Lifting/Service and Repair). 3. Remove the park brake equalizer locknut (1). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Cable > Component Information > Service and Repair > Parking Brake Front Cable Replacement > Page 7559 4. Using the J-37043 - Parking Brake Cable Release Tool , release the park brake cable from the park brake cable bracket (1) by compressing the locking tabs on the cable conduit (2). 5. Remove the park brake cable from the bracket and the equalizer. 6. Remove the park brake cable bracket bolt (1) from the vehicle underbody. 7. Remove the park brake cable bracket bolt (1) and nut (2) from the lower trailing arm. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Cable > Component Information > Service and Repair > Parking Brake Front Cable Replacement > Page 7560 8. Disconnect the park brake cable eyelet (1) from the park brake actuator. 9. Using the J-37043 Parking Brake Cable Release Tool , remove the parking brake cable (2) from the park brake cable bracket. 10. Remove the park brake cable from the cable bracket (2). Installation Procedure 1. Connect the park brake cable eyelet (1) to the park brake actuator. 2. Install the parking brake cable (2) to the park brake cable bracket. 3. Ensure the locking tabs on the cable conduit are fully engaged to the cable bracket. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Cable > Component Information > Service and Repair > Parking Brake Front Cable Replacement > Page 7561 Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener Caution). 4. Install the park brake cable bracket bolt (1) and nut (2) and tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb ft). 5. Install the park brake cable bracket bolt (1) to the vehicle underbody and tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb ft). 6. Install the park brake cable to the park brake cable bracket (1). 7. Ensure the locking tabs on the cable conduit (2) are fully engaged to the park brake cable bracket. 8. Install the park brake cable to the equalizer. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Cable > Component Information > Service and Repair > Parking Brake Front Cable Replacement > Page 7562 9. Loosely install the park brake equalizer locknut (1). 10. Adjust the park brake. Refer to Parking Brake Adjustment (See: Adjustments). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Cable > Component Information > Service and Repair > Parking Brake Front Cable Replacement > Page 7563 Parking Brake Cable: Service and Repair Parking Brake Rear Cable Replacement (Right) Parking Brake Rear Cable Replacement (Right) Special Tools J-37043 - Parking Brake Cable Release Tool Removal Procedure 1. Release the park brake. 2. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle (See: Maintenance/Vehicle Lifting/Service and Repair). 3. Loosen, but do not remove the park brake equalizer locknut (1). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Cable > Component Information > Service and Repair > Parking Brake Front Cable Replacement > Page 7564 4. Disconnect the front park brake cable (1) from the right park brake cable. 5. Using the J-37043 Parking Brake Cable Release Tool , release the park brake cable from the park brake equalizer (2) by compressing the locking tabs on the cable conduit (3). 6. Remove the 2 park brake cable bracket bolts located on top of the crossmember above the rear suspension module. 7. Remove the park brake cable bracket bolt from the lower trailing arm. 8. Disconnect the park brake cable eyelet (1) from the park brake actuator. 9. Using the J-37043 Parking Brake Cable Release Tool , compress the locking tabs on the park brake cable conduit. 10. Remove the park brake cable from the cable bracket (2). Installation Procedure 1. Position the park brake cable over the rear suspension module. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Cable > Component Information > Service and Repair > Parking Brake Front Cable Replacement > Page 7565 2. Connect the park brake cable eyelet (1) to the park brake actuator. 3. Compress the park brake cable spring and install the park brake cable to the cable bracket (2). 4. Ensure the locking tabs on the cable conduit are fully engaged to the cable bracket. Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener Caution). 5. Install the park brake cable bracket bolt to the lower trailing arm and tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb ft). 6. Install the 2 park brake cable bracket bolts and tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb ft). 7. Position the park brake cable to the equalizer. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Cable > Component Information > Service and Repair > Parking Brake Front Cable Replacement > Page 7566 8. Connect the front park brake cable (1) to the right park brake cable. 9. Install the park brake cable to the park brake equalizer (2). 10. Ensure the locking tabs on the cable conduit (3) are fully engaged to the equalizer. 11. Loosely install the park brake equalizer locknut (1). 12. Adjust the park brake. Refer to Parking Brake Adjustment (See: Adjustments). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Lever > Component Information > Service and Repair Parking Brake Lever: Service and Repair Parking Brake Lever Replacement Special Tools J-37043 - Parking Brake Cable Release Tool Removal Procedure 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle (See: Maintenance/Vehicle Lifting/Service and Repair). 2. Loosen the park brake cable locknut (1) at the equalizer to relieve tension on the park brake cable. 3. Lower the vehicle. 4. Remove the left side body hinge pillar trim panel. Refer to Body Hinge Pillar Trim Panel Replacement (See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair/Body Hinge Pillar Trim Panel Replacement). 5. Disconnect the park brake warning indicator switch electrical connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Lever > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 7570 6. Disconnect the front park brake cable from the park brake pedal clevis (1). 7. Using the J-37043 - Parking Brake Cable Release Tool , remove the front park brake cable from the park brake pedal assembly by compressing the locking tabs on the cable conduit (2). 8. Remove the lower park brake pedal nut (1). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Lever > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 7571 9. Remove the 2 upper park brake pedal nuts (1). 10. Remove the park brake pedal assembly. Installation Procedure 1. Install the park brake pedal assembly. Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener Caution). 2. Install the 2 upper park brake pedal nuts (1) and tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb in). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Lever > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 7572 3. Install the lower park brake pedal nut (1) and tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb in). 4. Connect the front park brake cable to the park brake pedal clevis (1). 5. Install the front park brake cable to the park brake pedal assembly. 6. Ensure the locking tabs on the cable conduit (2) are fully engaged to the park brake pedal assembly. 7. Connect the park brake warning indicator switch electrical connector. 8. Install the left side body hinge pillar trim panel. Refer to Body Hinge Pillar Trim Panel Replacement (See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair/Body Hinge Pillar Trim Panel Replacement). 9. Adjust the park brake. Refer to Parking Brake Adjustment (See: Adjustments). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Shoe > Component Information > Service and Repair Parking Brake Shoe: Service and Repair Parking Brake Shoe Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Shoe > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 7576 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations Parking Brake Warning Switch: Locations Instrument Panel/Center Console Component Views Lower Left of the Instrument Panel Components 1 - B80 Park Brake Switch 2 - T3 Audio Amplifier 3 - K9 Body Control Module 4 - K73 Telematics Communication Interface Control Module (UE1) 5 - B107 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor 6 T4S Wireless Communication Antenna - Bluetooth (UE1 with UPF) 7 - B22 Brake Pedal Position Sensor 8 - X84 Data Link Connector Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 7580 Parking Brake Warning Switch: Diagrams B80 Park Brake Switch Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 7581 Parking Brake Warning Switch: Service and Repair Parking Brake Indicator Switch Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Power Brake Assist > Brake Booster Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations Brake Booster Vacuum Sensor: Locations Front of Vehicle/Engine Compartment Component Views Engine Compartment Components (Chevrolet) 1 - B20 Brake Fluid Level Switch 2 - B19B Brake Booster Vacuum Sensor 3 - M75 Windshield Wiper Motor 4 - X50A Fuse Block - Underhood 5 - C1 Battery 6 - G24 Windshield Washer Pump 7 - B55 Hood Ajar Switch (BTV) 8 - P12B Horn - Low Note 9 - P12A Horn - High Note 10 - K17 Electronic Brake Control Module Engine Compartment Components (GMC) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Power Brake Assist > Brake Booster Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 7586 1 - B20 Brake Fluid Level Switch 2 - B19B Brake Booster Vacuum Sensor 3 - M75 Windshield Wiper Motor 4 - X50A Fuse Block - Underhood 5 - C1 Battery 6 - G24 Windshield Washer Pump 7 - P12B Horn - Low Note 8 - B55 Hood Ajar Switch (BTV) 9 - K17 Electronic Brake Control Module 10 - P12A Horn - High Note Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Power Brake Assist > Brake Booster Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 7587 Brake Booster Vacuum Sensor: Diagrams B19B Brake Booster Vacuum Sensor Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Power Brake Assist > Brake Booster Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 7588 Brake Booster Vacuum Sensor: Service and Repair Power Brake Booster Vacuum Sensor Replacement (3.0L) Removal Procedure 1. With the engine OFF, apply and release the brake pedal several times until the brake pedal becomes firm to deplete the power vacuum brake booster vacuum reserve. 2. Remove the intake manifold cover. Refer to Intake Manifold Cover Replacement (See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Intake Manifold/Service and Repair/Intake Manifold Cover Replacement). 3. Disconnect the power brake booster vacuum sensor electrical connector. 4. Remove the power brake booster vacuum sensor (1) from the power vacuum brake booster. 5. Release the spring clamp (1) and remove the power brake booster vacuum hose from the power brake booster vacuum sensor (2). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Power Brake Assist > Brake Booster Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 7589 Installation Procedure Note: A small amount of denatured alcohol may be used to ease assembly. Do not use soap. 1. Release the tension on the spring clamp (1) and install the power brake booster vacuum hose to the power brake booster vacuum sensor (2). Note: A small amount of denatured alcohol may be used to ease assembly. Do not use soap. 2. Install the power brake booster vacuum sensor (1) to the power vacuum brake booster. 3. Connect the power brake booster vacuum sensor electrical connector. 4. Install the intake manifold cover. Refer to Intake Manifold Cover Replacement (See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Intake Manifold/Service and Repair/Intake Manifold Cover Replacement). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Power Brake Assist > Hydraulic Brake Booster Pump > Component Information > Diagrams Hydraulic Brake Booster Pump: Diagrams G6 Brake Booster Pump - Auxiliary Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Power Brake Assist > Hydraulic Brake Booster Pump > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 7593 Hydraulic Brake Booster Pump: Service and Repair Power Brake Booster Pump Replacement (3.0L) Removal Procedure 1. With the engine OFF, apply and release the brake pedal several times until the brake pedal becomes firm to deplete the power vacuum brake booster vacuum reserve. 2. Remove the intake manifold cover. Refer to Intake Manifold Cover Replacement (See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Intake Manifold/Service and Repair/Intake Manifold Cover Replacement). 3. Disconnect the power brake booster vacuum hose quick connect (3). 4. Release the power brake booster vacuum hose from the routing clip (2) on the power brake booster auxiliary pump. 5. Disconnect the power brake booster auxiliary pump electrical connector. 6. Release the power brake booster auxiliary pump electrical connector retainer from the pump bracket. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Power Brake Assist > Hydraulic Brake Booster Pump > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 7594 7. Remove the power brake booster auxiliary pump nuts (1). 8. Remove the power brake booster auxiliary pump. 9. If removing the power brake booster auxiliary pump bracket, remove the power brake booster auxiliary pump bracket bolts (1). 10. Remove the power brake booster auxiliary pump bracket (1). Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Power Brake Assist > Hydraulic Brake Booster Pump > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 7595 1. If removed, install the power brake booster auxiliary pump bracket (1). Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener Caution). 2. Install the power brake booster auxiliary pump bracket bolts (1) and tighten to 50 Nm (37 lb ft). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Power Brake Assist > Hydraulic Brake Booster Pump > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 7596 3. Install the power brake booster auxiliary pump to the pump bracket. 4. Install the power brake booster auxiliary pump nuts (1) and tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb in) 5. Connect the power brake booster vacuum hose quick connect (3). 6. Connect the power brake booster auxiliary pump electrical connector. 7. Secure the power brake booster auxiliary pump electrical connector retainer to the pump bracket. 8. Secure the power brake booster vacuum hose from the routing clip (2) on the power brake booster auxiliary pump. 9. Install the intake manifold cover. Refer to Intake Manifold Cover Replacement (See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Intake Manifold/Service and Repair/Intake Manifold Cover Replacement). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Power Brake Assist > Vacuum Brake Booster > Component Information > Service and Repair Vacuum Brake Booster: Service and Repair Power Vacuum Brake Booster Replacement Removal Procedure Warning: Refer to Brake Fluid Irritant Warning (See: Service Precautions/Technician Safety Information/Brake Fluid Irritant Warning). Caution: Refer to Brake Fluid Effects on Paint and Electrical Components Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings). 1. Remove the vacuum brake booster vacuum sensor and hose from the vacuum brake booster and position aside. Refer to Power Brake Booster Vacuum Sensor Replacement (2.4L) (See: Brake Booster Vacuum Sensor/Service and Repair)Power Brake Booster Vacuum Sensor Replacement (3.0L) (See: Brake Booster Vacuum Sensor/Service and Repair). 2. Remove the master cylinder. Refer to Master Cylinder Replacement (See: Hydraulic System/Brake Master Cylinder/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement). 3. Remove the brake pressure modulator valve (BPMV). Refer to Brake Pressure Modulator Valve Replacement (See: Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems/Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes/Service and Repair/Brake Pressure Modulator Valve Replacement). 4. Remove the BPMV bracket. Refer to Brake Pressure Modulator Valve Bracket Replacement (See: Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems/Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes/Service and Repair/Brake Pressure Modulator Valve Bracket Replacement). 5. Remove the brake pedal position sensor. Refer to Brake Pedal Position Sensor Replacement (See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Pedal Positioning System/Pedal Positioning Sensor/Service and Repair/Brake Pedal Position Sensor Replacement). 6. Remove the vacuum brake booster pushrod retainer nut (1). 7. Disconnect the vacuum brake booster pushrod from the brake pedal. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Power Brake Assist > Vacuum Brake Booster > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 7600 8. Remove the 4 vacuum brake booster nuts (1). 9. Carefully pull the vacuum brake booster forward until the mounting studs clear the dash panel. Note: Ensure the foam insulator on the mounting surface of the vacuum brake booster withdraws with the booster. 10. Remove the vacuum brake booster (1). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Power Brake Assist > Vacuum Brake Booster > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 7601 11. Inspect the vacuum brake booster gasket (1) for damage and replace if necessary. Installation Procedure 1. Install the vacuum brake booster gasket (1). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Power Brake Assist > Vacuum Brake Booster > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 7602 Note: Ensure the foam insulator on the mounting surface of the vacuum brake booster is properly installed on the booster. 2. While guiding the brake booster pushrod and mounting studs through the dash panel, install the vacuum brake booster (1). Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener Caution). 3. Install the vacuum brake booster nuts (1) and tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb ft).. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Power Brake Assist > Vacuum Brake Booster > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 7603 4. Connect the vacuum brake booster pushrod to the brake pedal. 5. Install the vacuum brake booster pushrod retainer. 6. Rotate the vacuum brake booster pushrod retainer 360 degrees to ensure it is properly installed. 7. Install the vacuum brake booster pushrod retainer nut (1) and tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb ft).. 8. Install the brake pedal position sensor. Refer to Brake Pedal Position Sensor Replacement (See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Pedal Positioning System/Pedal Positioning Sensor/Service and Repair/Brake Pedal Position Sensor Replacement). 9. Install the BPMV bracket. Refer to Brake Pressure Modulator Valve Bracket Replacement (See: Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems/Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes/Service and Repair/Brake Pressure Modulator Valve Bracket Replacement). 10. Install the BPMV. Refer to Brake Pressure Modulator Valve Replacement (See: Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems/Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes/Service and Repair/Brake Pressure Modulator Valve Replacement). 11. Install the master cylinder. Refer to Master Cylinder Replacement (See: Hydraulic System/Brake Master Cylinder/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement). 12. Install the vacuum brake booster vacuum sensor (1) and hose to the vacuum brake booster. Refer to Power Brake Booster Vacuum Sensor Replacement (2.4L) (See: Brake Booster Vacuum Sensor/Service and Repair)Power Brake Booster Vacuum Sensor Replacement (3.0L) (See: Brake Booster Vacuum Sensor/Service and Repair). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Power Brake Assist > Vacuum Pump, Brakes > Component Information > Service and Repair Vacuum Pump: Service and Repair Power Brake Booster Vacuum Check Valve and Hose Replacement (3.0L) Removal Procedure 1. With the engine OFF, apply and release the brake pedal several times until the brake pedal becomes firm to deplete the power vacuum brake booster vacuum reserve. 2. Remove the intake manifold cover. Refer to Intake Manifold Cover Replacement (See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Intake Manifold/Service and Repair/Intake Manifold Cover Replacement). 3. Disconnect the power brake booster vacuum sensor electrical connector. 4. Release the spring clamp (1) and remove the power brake booster vacuum hose from the intake manifold vacuum port. 5. Remove the power brake booster vacuum sensor (2) from the power vacuum brake booster. 6. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle (See: Maintenance/Vehicle Lifting/Service and Repair). 7. Disconnect the power brake booster vacuum hose quick connect (3) from the power brake booster pump. 8. Remove the power brake booster vacuum hose and check valve assembly. 9. Remove the power brake booster vacuum sensor. Refer to Power Brake Booster Vacuum Sensor Replacement (2.4L) (See: Brake Booster Vacuum Sensor/Service and Repair)Power Brake Booster Vacuum Sensor Replacement (3.0L) (See: Brake Booster Vacuum Sensor/Service and Repair). Installation Procedure 1. Install the power brake booster vacuum sensor. Refer to Power Brake Booster Vacuum Sensor Replacement (2.4L) (See: Brake Booster Vacuum Sensor/Service and Repair)Power Brake Booster Vacuum Sensor Replacement (3.0L) (See: Brake Booster Vacuum Sensor/Service and Repair). 2. Install the power brake booster vacuum hose and check valve assembly. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Power Brake Assist > Vacuum Pump, Brakes > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 7607 Note: A small amount of denatured alcohol may be used to ease assembly. Do not use soap. 3. Release the tension on the spring clamp (1) and install the power brake booster vacuum hose to the intake manifold vacuum port. 4. Install the power brake booster vacuum sensor (2) from the power vacuum brake booster. 5. Connect the power brake booster vacuum hose quick connect (3) from the power brake booster pump. 6. Connect the power brake booster vacuum sensor electrical connector. 7. Install the intake manifold cover. Refer to Intake Manifold Cover Replacement (See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Intake Manifold/Service and Repair/Intake Manifold Cover Replacement). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Power Brake Assist > Vacuum Pump Relay, Brakes > Component Information > Locations Vacuum Pump Relay: Locations Electrical Center Identification Views X50A Fuse Block - Underhood, Label Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Power Brake Assist > Vacuum Pump Relay, Brakes > Component Information > Locations > Page 7611 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Locations Electronic Brake Control Module: Locations Front of Vehicle/Engine Compartment Component Views Engine Compartment Components (Chevrolet) 1 - B20 Brake Fluid Level Switch 2 - B19B Brake Booster Vacuum Sensor 3 - M75 Windshield Wiper Motor 4 - X50A Fuse Block - Underhood 5 - C1 Battery 6 - G24 Windshield Washer Pump 7 - B55 Hood Ajar Switch (BTV) 8 - P12B Horn - Low Note 9 - P12A Horn - High Note 10 - K17 Electronic Brake Control Module Engine Compartment Components (GMC) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 7616 1 - B20 Brake Fluid Level Switch 2 - B19B Brake Booster Vacuum Sensor 3 - M75 Windshield Wiper Motor 4 - X50A Fuse Block - Underhood 5 - C1 Battery 6 - G24 Windshield Washer Pump 7 - P12B Horn - Low Note 8 - B55 Hood Ajar Switch (BTV) 9 - K17 Electronic Brake Control Module 10 - P12A Horn - High Note Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 7617 Electronic Brake Control Module: Diagrams K17 Electronic Brake Control Module Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 7618 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 7619 Electronic Brake Control Module: Service and Repair Electronic Brake Control Module Replacement Removal Procedure Warning: Refer to Brake Fluid Irritant Warning (See: Service Precautions/Technician Safety Information/Brake Fluid Irritant Warning). Caution: Refer to Brake Fluid Effects on Paint and Electrical Components Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings). Caution: Always connect or disconnect the wiring harness connector from the EBCM/EBTCM with the ignition switch in the OFF position. Failure to observe this precaution could result in damage to the EBCM/EBTCM. 1. Place the ignition switch in the OFF position. 2. Remove the accessory wiring junction block. Refer to Accessory Wiring Junction Block Replacement (See: Maintenance/Fuses and Circuit Breakers/Fuse Block/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Accessory Wiring Junction Block Replacement). 3. Clean the electronic brake control module (EBCM) to brake pressure modulator valve (BPMV) area of any dirt or debris. 4. Disconnect the EBCM electrical connector by lifting the locking lever upward. 5. Remove the 4 EBCM bolts (1). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 7620 Note: Do not pry the components apart. 6. Carefully pull the EBCM (1) from the BPMV. 7. Remove the 12 EBCM seals, if necessary. Installation Procedure 1. Install the EBCM seals, if removed. 2. Install the EBCM (1) to the BPMV. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 7621 Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener Caution). 3. Install the 4 EBCM bolts (1) and tighten the bolts in a cross pattern to 3 Nm (27 lb in). 4. Install the accessory wiring junction block. Refer to Accessory Wiring Junction Block Replacement (See: Maintenance/Fuses and Circuit Breakers/Fuse Block/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Accessory Wiring Junction Block Replacement). 5. If installing a new EBCM, program the EBCM. Refer to Control Module References (See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning). 6. Without starting the engine, place the ignition switch in the ON position. 7. Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle (See: Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Vacuum Pump Relay, Brakes > Component Information > Locations Vacuum Pump Relay: Locations Electrical Center Identification Views X50A Fuse Block - Underhood, Label Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Vacuum Pump Relay, Brakes > Component Information > Locations > Page 7625 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Booster Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations Brake Booster Vacuum Sensor: Locations Front of Vehicle/Engine Compartment Component Views Engine Compartment Components (Chevrolet) 1 - B20 Brake Fluid Level Switch 2 - B19B Brake Booster Vacuum Sensor 3 - M75 Windshield Wiper Motor 4 - X50A Fuse Block - Underhood 5 - C1 Battery 6 - G24 Windshield Washer Pump 7 - B55 Hood Ajar Switch (BTV) 8 - P12B Horn - Low Note 9 - P12A Horn - High Note 10 - K17 Electronic Brake Control Module Engine Compartment Components (GMC) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Booster Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 7630 1 - B20 Brake Fluid Level Switch 2 - B19B Brake Booster Vacuum Sensor 3 - M75 Windshield Wiper Motor 4 - X50A Fuse Block - Underhood 5 - C1 Battery 6 - G24 Windshield Washer Pump 7 - P12B Horn - Low Note 8 - B55 Hood Ajar Switch (BTV) 9 - K17 Electronic Brake Control Module 10 - P12A Horn - High Note Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Booster Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 7631 Brake Booster Vacuum Sensor: Diagrams B19B Brake Booster Vacuum Sensor Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Booster Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 7632 Brake Booster Vacuum Sensor: Service and Repair Power Brake Booster Vacuum Sensor Replacement (3.0L) Removal Procedure 1. With the engine OFF, apply and release the brake pedal several times until the brake pedal becomes firm to deplete the power vacuum brake booster vacuum reserve. 2. Remove the intake manifold cover. Refer to Intake Manifold Cover Replacement (See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Intake Manifold/Service and Repair/Intake Manifold Cover Replacement). 3. Disconnect the power brake booster vacuum sensor electrical connector. 4. Remove the power brake booster vacuum sensor (1) from the power vacuum brake booster. 5. Release the spring clamp (1) and remove the power brake booster vacuum hose from the power brake booster vacuum sensor (2). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Booster Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 7633 Installation Procedure Note: A small amount of denatured alcohol may be used to ease assembly. Do not use soap. 1. Release the tension on the spring clamp (1) and install the power brake booster vacuum hose to the power brake booster vacuum sensor (2). Note: A small amount of denatured alcohol may be used to ease assembly. Do not use soap. 2. Install the power brake booster vacuum sensor (1) to the power vacuum brake booster. 3. Connect the power brake booster vacuum sensor electrical connector. 4. Install the intake manifold cover. Refer to Intake Manifold Cover Replacement (See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Intake Manifold/Service and Repair/Intake Manifold Cover Replacement). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch: Locations Front of Vehicle/Engine Compartment Component Views Engine Compartment Components (Chevrolet) 1 - B20 Brake Fluid Level Switch 2 - B19B Brake Booster Vacuum Sensor 3 - M75 Windshield Wiper Motor 4 - X50A Fuse Block - Underhood 5 - C1 Battery 6 - G24 Windshield Washer Pump 7 - B55 Hood Ajar Switch (BTV) 8 - P12B Horn - Low Note 9 - P12A Horn - High Note 10 - K17 Electronic Brake Control Module Engine Compartment Components (GMC) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 7637 1 - B20 Brake Fluid Level Switch 2 - B19B Brake Booster Vacuum Sensor 3 - M75 Windshield Wiper Motor 4 - X50A Fuse Block - Underhood 5 - C1 Battery 6 - G24 Windshield Washer Pump 7 - P12B Horn - Low Note 8 - B55 Hood Ajar Switch (BTV) 9 - K17 Electronic Brake Control Module 10 - P12A Horn - High Note Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 7638 Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch: Diagrams B20 Brake Fluid Level Switch Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 7639 Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch: Service and Repair Brake Fluid Level Indicator Switch Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the accessory wiring junction block. Refer to Accessory Wiring Junction Block Replacement (See: Maintenance/Fuses and Circuit Breakers/Fuse Block/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Accessory Wiring Junction Block Replacement). 2. Disconnect the brake fluid level indicator switch electrical connector. 3. While compressing the retaining tabs on the inboard side of the brake fluid level indicator switch (1), carefully remove the switch from the brake master cylinder reservoir. Installation Procedure Note: Ensure the retaining tabs on the brake fluid level indicator switch are fully engaged in the master cylinder reservoir. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 7640 1. Install the brake fluid level indicator switch (1) by carefully inserting the switch into the master cylinder reservoir. 2. Connect the brake fluid level indicator switch electrical connector. 3. Install the accessory wiring junction block. Refer to Accessory Wiring Junction Block Replacement (See: Maintenance/Fuses and Circuit Breakers/Fuse Block/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Accessory Wiring Junction Block Replacement). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations Parking Brake Warning Switch: Locations Instrument Panel/Center Console Component Views Lower Left of the Instrument Panel Components 1 - B80 Park Brake Switch 2 - T3 Audio Amplifier 3 - K9 Body Control Module 4 - K73 Telematics Communication Interface Control Module (UE1) 5 - B107 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor 6 T4S Wireless Communication Antenna - Bluetooth (UE1 with UPF) 7 - B22 Brake Pedal Position Sensor 8 - X84 Data Link Connector Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 7644 Parking Brake Warning Switch: Diagrams B80 Park Brake Switch Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 7645 Parking Brake Warning Switch: Service and Repair Parking Brake Indicator Switch Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Traction Control Switch > Component Information > Locations Traction Control Switch: Locations Instrument Panel/Center Console Component Views Right Side of the Instrument Panel Components 1 - F107 Steering Wheel Air Bag 2 - P19H Speaker - Left Front Tweeter 3 - E1K Accent Lamp Right Lower Instrument Panel 4 - X80G Accessory Power Receptacle - Instrument Panel 5 - E8K Instrument Panel Courtesy Lamp - Right (LTZ or SLT) 6 - S112 Fuel Economy Mode Switch 7 E1S Accent Lamp - Console Cupholder Right 8 - S75 Traction Control Switch 9 - X80B Accessory Power Receptacle - Center Console 2 10 - E1J Accent Lamp - Left Lower Instrument Panel Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Traction Control Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 7649 Traction Control Switch: Diagrams S75 Traction Control Switch Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Traction Control Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 7650 Traction Control Switch: Service and Repair Electronic Traction Control and Vehicle Stability Control Switch Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations Wheel Speed Sensor: Locations Wheels/Vehicle Underbody Component Views Wheel Components 1 - B5RF Wheel Speed Sensor - Right Front 2 - B5RR Wheel Speed Sensor - Right Rear 3 - B5LR Wheel Speed Sensor - Left Rear 4 - B5LF Wheel Speed Sensor - Left Front Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 7654 Wheel Speed Sensor: Diagrams B5LF Wheel Speed Sensor - Left Front B5LR Wheel Speed Sensor - Left Rear Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 7655 B5RF Wheel Speed Sensor - Right Front Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 7656 B5RR Wheel Speed Sensor - Right Rear Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 7657 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Wheel Speed Sensor Replacement Wheel Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Front Wheel Speed Sensor Replacement Front Wheel Speed Sensor Replacement Removal Procedure Warning: Refer to Brake Dust Warning (See: Service Precautions/Technician Safety Information/Brake Dust Warning). 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle (See: Maintenance/Vehicle Lifting/Service and Repair). 2. Remove the tire and wheel assembly. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation (See: Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair ). 3. Disconnect the wheel speed sensor electrical connector. 4. Remove the front brake hose bracket nut (1). 5. Release the front wheel speed sensor harness from the retainers on the front brake hose. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Wheel Speed Sensor Replacement > Page 7660 6. Remove the wheel speed sensor bolt (1). 7. Remove the wheel speed sensor (1) by pulling the sensor straight upward from the steering knuckle. Installation Procedure 1. Install the wheel speed sensor (1) to the steering knuckle. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Wheel Speed Sensor Replacement > Page 7661 Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener Caution). 2. Install the wheel speed sensor bolt (1) and tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb in). 3. Install the front brake hose bracket nut (1) and tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb in). 4. Connect the wheel speed sensor electrical connector. 5. Install the front wheel speed sensor harness to the retainers on the front brake hose. 6. Install the tire and wheel assembly. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation (See: Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Wheel Speed Sensor Replacement > Page 7662 Wheel Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Rear Wheel Speed Sensor Replacement Rear Wheel Speed Sensor Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Yaw Rate Sensor > Component Information > Locations Yaw Rate Sensor: Locations Passenger Compartment/Roof Component Views Left Side of the Passenger Compartment Components 1 - F105R Roof Rail Air Bag - Right 2 - F105L Roof Rail Air Bag - Left 3 - K36 Inflatable Restraint Sensing and Diagnostic Module 4 - B119 Multi-axis Acceleration Sensor Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Yaw Rate Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 7666 Yaw Rate Sensor: Diagrams B119 Multi-axis Acceleration Sensor Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Yaw Rate Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 7667 Yaw Rate Sensor: Testing and Inspection Vehicle Yaw Sensor Learn Note: The Multi-axis Acceleration Sensor is also known as the Inertia Sensor Module (IMU) in SPS and the Yaw Rate Sensor in the scan tool. The sensor must be configured using SPS before the vehicle yaw sensor learn is performed. The multi-axis acceleration sensor requires a SPS configuration and a yaw rate sensor learn. This is required after certain service procedures are performed. Some of these procedures are as follows: * Electronic brake control module (EBCM) replacement * Multi-axis acceleration sensor replacement * Vehicle yaw sensor replacement * Vehicle yaw sensor with lateral and longitudinal accelerometer sensor replacement The yaw rate sensor learn procedure can be completed with a scan tool using the following steps: 1. Place vehicle on a level surface. 2. Apply the parking brake, or set the transmission in the P position. 3. Install the scan tool to the data link connector. 4. Ignition ON, engine OFF 5. Select Yaw Rate Sensor Reset in the Multi-axis Acceleration Sensor Module Configuration/Reset Functions list. 6. Follow the scan tool directions to complete the calibration procedure. 7. Select Yaw Rate Sensor Learn in the Multi-axis Acceleration Sensor Module Configuration/Reset Functions list. 8. Follow the scan tool directions to complete the calibration procedure. 9. Select Yaw Rate Sensor Learn in the EBCM Configuration/Reset Functions list. 10. Follow the scan tool directions to complete the calibration procedure. 11. Clear any DTCs that may be set. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Yaw Rate Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 7668 Yaw Rate Sensor: Service and Repair Vehicle Yaw Sensor Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Battery Current Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams Battery Current Sensor: Diagrams B18 Battery Current Sensor Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Locations Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: Locations Instrument Panel/Center Console Component Views Steering Column Components 1 - S78 Turn Signal/Multifunction Switch 2 - X85 Steering Wheel Air Bag Coil 3 - S82 Windshield Wiper/Washer Switch 4 - S39 Ignition Switch 5 - M93 Ignition Cylinder Lock Control Solenoid Actuator 6 - B101 Immobilizer Antenna 7 - B99 Steering Wheel Angle Sensor Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Locations > Page 7678 Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: Service and Repair Ignition Lock Cylinder Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. Refer to Battery Negative Cable Disconnection and Connection (See: Battery/Battery Cable/Negative/Service and Repair/Battery Negative Cable Disconnection and Connection). 2. Remove the steering column shroud. Refer to Steering Column Shroud Replacement (See: Steering and Suspension/Steering/Steering Column/Service and Repair/Steering Column Shroud Replacement). 3. Insert the key into the ignition lock cylinder and turn the key to the RUN position. 4. Depress the retainer through the lock housing access hole (2) with a small Allen wrench or similar pick-type tool. 5. Remove the ignition lock cylinder (1) from the ignition and start switch housing. Installation Procedure 1. If you are installing a new ignition lock cylinder, code the lock cylinder. Refer to Lock Cylinder Coding - Ignition (See: Body and Frame/Locks/Service and Repair/Lock Cylinder Coding - Ignition). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Locations > Page 7679 2. Turn the key to the RUN position and insert ignition lock cylinder (1) into the ignition and start switch housing. 3. Turn the key to the LOCK position and remove the key from the ignition lock cylinder. 4. Install the steering column shroud. Refer to Steering Column Shroud Replacement (See: Steering and Suspension/Steering/Steering Column/Service and Repair/Steering Column Shroud Replacement). 5. Connect the battery negative cable. Refer to Battery Negative Cable Disconnection and Connection (See: Battery/Battery Cable/Negative/Service and Repair/Battery Negative Cable Disconnection and Connection). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Relays and Modules - Starting and Charging > Starter Relay > Component Information > Locations Starter Relay: Locations Electrical Center Identification Views X50A Fuse Block - Underhood, Label Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Relays and Modules - Starting and Charging > Starter Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 7684 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Battery > Battery Cable > Negative, Battery Cable > System Information > Service and Repair > Battery Negative Cable Replacement Negative: Service and Repair Battery Negative Cable Replacement Battery Negative Cable Replacement (LF1) Removal Procedure 1. Record all of the radio station presets. 2. Disconnect the battery negative cable. Refer to Battery Negative Cable Disconnection and Connection (See: Battery Negative Cable Disconnection and Connection). 3. Disconnect the battery current sensor from the body harness (1) 4. Remove the battery negative cable ground nut (2) from the frame rail. 5. Remove the battery negative cable engine ground bolt (1) from the engine block. 6. Remove the battery negative cable (2). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Battery > Battery Cable > Negative, Battery Cable > System Information > Service and Repair > Battery Negative Cable Replacement > Page 7691 Note: Observe how the battery negative cable was routed within the engine compartment. Installation Procedure Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener Caution). 1. Install the battery negative cable engine ground nut (1) to the engine and tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb ft). 2. Install the battery negative cable frame ground nut (1)to the frame rail and tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb ft). 3. Install battery negative cable clamp to the battery post.Refer to Battery Negative Cable Disconnection and Connection (See: Battery Negative Cable Disconnection and Connection) 4. Reset the radio channel presets. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Battery > Battery Cable > Negative, Battery Cable > System Information > Service and Repair > Battery Negative Cable Replacement > Page 7692 Negative: Service and Repair Battery Negative Cable Disconnection and Connection Battery Negative Cable Disconnection and Connection Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Battery > Battery Cable > Positive, Battery Cable > System Information > Service and Repair Positive: Service and Repair Battery Positive Cable Replacement (LF1) Removal Procedure 1. Record all of the radio station presets. 2. Disconnect the battery negative cable. Refer to Battery Negative Cable Disconnection and Connection (See: Negative/Service and Repair/Battery Negative Cable Disconnection and Connection). 3. Remove the ECM mounting bracket. 4. Remove the battery positive post clamp nut (2). 5. Remove the battery retainer bracket and the battery.Refer to Battery Replacement (See: Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Battery Replacement). 6. Remove battery positive terminal (1) at the fuse block. 7. Disconnect retainers (3) holding battery positive cable (4). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Battery > Battery Cable > Positive, Battery Cable > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 7696 8. Remove generator boot (1) and nut (2) from the generator B+ stud. 9. Remove the starter solenoid nut (3). 10. Remove the battery positive (Starter) cable (4) and the battery positive (Generator) cable (5) from the vehicle. Note: Observe how the battery positive cable was routed within the engine compartment. Installation Procedure Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener Caution). 1. Install the battery positive cable nut (2) to the B+ generator stud and tighten to 20 Nm (15 lb ft). 2. Install battery positive cable nut (3) and terminals (Starter/Generator),to the starter solenoid.Tighten to 10 Nm (88 lb in) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Battery > Battery Cable > Positive, Battery Cable > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 7697 3. Install the battery positive cable terminal nut (1) to the fuse block and tighten to 16 Nm (12 lb ft). 4. Install battery positive cable clamp nut (2) to the battery post and tighten to 10 Nm (88 lb in) 5. Install engine control module (ECM) and battery cover. 6. Reset the radio channel presets. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Battery > Battery Current Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams Battery Current Sensor: Diagrams B18 Battery Current Sensor Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Battery > Battery Tray > Component Information > Service and Repair > Battery Tray Battery Tray: Service and Repair Battery Tray Battery Tray Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Battery > Battery Tray > Component Information > Service and Repair > Battery Tray > Page 7705 Battery Tray: Service and Repair Battery Tray Support Battery Tray Support Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Specifications Alternator: Specifications Generator Usage Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Specifications > Page 7710 Alternator: Diagrams G13 Generator X1 G13 Generator X2 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Specifications > Page 7711 Alternator: Service and Repair Generator Replacement (LF1) Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. Refer to Battery Negative Cable Disconnection and Connection (See: Battery/Battery Cable/Negative/Service and Repair/Battery Negative Cable Disconnection and Connection). 2. Reposition the positive battery cable boot at the generator terminal. 3. Disconnect the engine harness electrical connector (1) from the generator. 4. Remove the positive battery cable nut (2) at the generator. 5. Remove the positive battery cable terminal (3) from the generator. 6. Remove the drive belt. Refer to Drive Belt Replacement (See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories/Drive Belt/Service and Repair). 7. Remove the idler pulley bolt (1) and idler pulley (2). Refer to Drive Belt Idler Pulley Replacement (See: Engine, Cooling and Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Specifications > Page 7712 Exhaust/Engine/Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories/Idler Pulley/Service and Repair). 8. Remove the generator bolts (3). Note: When removing the generator from the vehicle, it may be necessary to maneuver the generator to remove it from the vehicle. 9. Remove the generator(4). Installation Procedure 1. Position the generator (4) to the engine. 2. Loosely install the generator bolts (3). 3. Install the idler pulley. Refer to Drive Belt Idler Pulley Replacement (See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories/Idler Pulley/Service and Repair). Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener Caution). 4. Tighten the generator bolts to 50 Nm (37 lb ft). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Specifications > Page 7713 5. Install the drive belt. Refer to Drive Belt Replacement (See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories/Drive Belt/Service and Repair). 6. Connect the engine harness electrical connector (1) to the generator. 7. Install the positive battery cable terminal (3) to the generator. 8. Install the positive battery cable nut (2) at the generator and tighten to 20 Nm (15 lb ft). 9. Position the positive battery cable boot at the generator terminal. 10. Connect the negative battery cable. Refer to Battery Negative Cable Disconnection and Connection (See: Battery/Battery Cable/Negative/Service and Repair/Battery Negative Cable Disconnection and Connection). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Ignition Lock > Ignition Lock Solenoid > Component Information > Locations Ignition Lock Solenoid: Locations Instrument Panel/Center Console Component Views Steering Column Components 1 - S78 Turn Signal/Multifunction Switch 2 - X85 Steering Wheel Air Bag Coil 3 - S82 Windshield Wiper/Washer Switch 4 - S39 Ignition Switch 5 - M93 Ignition Cylinder Lock Control Solenoid Actuator 6 - B101 Immobilizer Antenna 7 - B99 Steering Wheel Angle Sensor Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Ignition Lock > Ignition Lock Solenoid > Component Information > Locations > Page 7719 Ignition Lock Solenoid: Diagrams M93 Ignition Cylinder Lock Control Solenoid Actuator Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Locations Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: Locations Instrument Panel/Center Console Component Views Steering Column Components 1 - S78 Turn Signal/Multifunction Switch 2 - X85 Steering Wheel Air Bag Coil 3 - S82 Windshield Wiper/Washer Switch 4 - S39 Ignition Switch 5 - M93 Ignition Cylinder Lock Control Solenoid Actuator 6 - B101 Immobilizer Antenna 7 - B99 Steering Wheel Angle Sensor Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Locations > Page 7724 Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: Service and Repair Ignition Lock Cylinder Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. Refer to Battery Negative Cable Disconnection and Connection (See: Battery/Battery Cable/Negative/Service and Repair/Battery Negative Cable Disconnection and Connection). 2. Remove the steering column shroud. Refer to Steering Column Shroud Replacement (See: Steering and Suspension/Steering/Steering Column/Service and Repair/Steering Column Shroud Replacement). 3. Insert the key into the ignition lock cylinder and turn the key to the RUN position. 4. Depress the retainer through the lock housing access hole (2) with a small Allen wrench or similar pick-type tool. 5. Remove the ignition lock cylinder (1) from the ignition and start switch housing. Installation Procedure 1. If you are installing a new ignition lock cylinder, code the lock cylinder. Refer to Lock Cylinder Coding - Ignition (See: Body and Frame/Locks/Service and Repair/Lock Cylinder Coding - Ignition). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Locations > Page 7725 2. Turn the key to the RUN position and insert ignition lock cylinder (1) into the ignition and start switch housing. 3. Turn the key to the LOCK position and remove the key from the ignition lock cylinder. 4. Install the steering column shroud. Refer to Steering Column Shroud Replacement (See: Steering and Suspension/Steering/Steering Column/Service and Repair/Steering Column Shroud Replacement). 5. Connect the battery negative cable. Refer to Battery Negative Cable Disconnection and Connection (See: Battery/Battery Cable/Negative/Service and Repair/Battery Negative Cable Disconnection and Connection). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Key > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Interior/Locks - Key Cutting Procedure Key: Technical Service Bulletins Interior/Locks - Key Cutting Procedure INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 09-00-89-029F Date: January 05, 2011 Subject: Key Cutting Procedure for Obtaining Replacement Key Models: 2010-2011 Buick LaCrosse 2011 Buick Regal 2010-2011 Chevrolet Camaro, Equinox 2011 Chevrolet Cruze, Volt 2010-2011 GMC Terrain 2008-2009 Pontiac G8 Attention: This bulletin applies to the United States and Canada only. Export dealers are to contact their local Technical Assistance Center (TAC) for further information. Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the Chevrolet Volt. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 09-00-89-029E (Section 00 - General Information). Due to the uniqueness of the ignition/door lock key, special equipment is required to cut a key. If you do not have the required equipment, you may order a cut/coded key through GM CC&A.; To obtain a replacement key, the following procedure is suggested: 1. Obtain the vehicle key code. U.S. Dealers: Access the "Key Code Look Up" application through GM GlobalConnect under the Parts Workbench. Canadian Dealers: Access the "KeyCode Look-Up" feature within the OEConnection D2DLink application. 2. Submit a part order through the GM CC&A; Parts System for a key blank. Be sure to include the key code in the "note" field of the order. 3. DO NOT ORDER AN UNCODED KEY AS YOU WILL RECEIVE A BLANK KEY THAT WILL REQUIRE CODING ON THE SPECIAL EQUIPMENT LISTED BELOW. Note The key code is five digits. Some vehicle records do not have the first digit displayed (i.e., vehicle records show the key code as "1234"). When ordering a cut/coded key, refer to the key code table. Important The order will be shipped the same day if received by 12:00 p.m. (noon) EST, or within 24 hours, Monday through Friday via FedEx (Canadian dealers should place their orders for these parts using a CSO order type only. Do not order using the CSO3 order type). Important The remote control transmitter and the key shank are not serviced separately. Important Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Key > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Interior/Locks - Key Cutting Procedure > Page 7730 If a key is received with an incorrect cut contact the SPAC department for assistance. Tip The new key and transmitter will need to be programmed to the vehicle. Refer to Key and Transmitter Programming in SI for details. Parts Information For part numbers and usage, refer to Key in Group 02.187 of the appropriate parts catalog. Important As an alternate to Step 2, the following equipment can be purchased through 1-800-GM-TOOLS or by visiting www.GMDEsolutions.com (U.S.) or www.des-canada.ca (Canada). General Motors highly recommends the use of the following key machines. General Motors has identified superior equipment through testing and evaluation. General Motors believes these sources and their equipment to be reliable. There may be additional manufacturers of such equipment. General Motors does not endorse, indicate any preference for or assume any responsibility for the equipment from these firms or for any such items which may be available for other sources. Equipment Information Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Key > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Interior/Locks - Key Cutting Procedure > Page 7731 Key: Technical Service Bulletins Locks - Key Code Security Rules and Information INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 10-00-89-010 Date: May 27, 2010 Subject: Key Code Security Rules and Information on GM KeyCode Look-Up Application (Canada Only) Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2009 and Prior Saturn and Saab 2002 and Prior Isuzu Attention: This bulletin has been created to address potential issues and questions regarding KeyCode security. This bulletin should be read by all parties involved in KeyCode activity, including dealer operator, partner security coordinator, sales, service and parts departments. A copy of this bulletin should be printed and maintained in the parts department for use as a reference. Important U.S. dealers should refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 10-00-89-009. Where Are Key Codes Located? General Motors provides access to KeyCodes through three sources when a vehicle is delivered to a dealer. Vehicle KeyCodes are located on the original vehicle invoice to the dealership. There is a small white bar coded tag sent with most new vehicles that also has the key code printed on it. Dealerships should make a practice of comparing the tag's keycode numbers to the keycode listed on the invoice. Any discrepancy should be reported immediately to the GM of Canada Key Code Inquiry Desk. Remember to remove the key tag prior to showing vehicles to potential customers. The third source for Key codes is through the GM KeyCode Look-Up feature within the OEConnection D2DLink application. KeyCode Look-Up currently goes back 17 previous model years from the current model year. When a vehicle is received by the dealership, care should be taken to safeguard the original vehicle invoice and KeyCode tag provided with the vehicle. Potential customers should not have access to the invoice or this KeyCode tag prior to the sale being completed. After a sale has been completed, the KeyCode information belongs to the customer and General Motors. Tip Only the original invoice contains key code information, a re-printed invoice does not. GM KeyCode Look-Up Application for GM of Canada Dealers All dealers should review the General Motors of Canada KeyCode Look-Up Policies and Procedures (Service Policy & Procedures Manual Section 3.1.6 "Replacement of VIN plates & keys"). Please note that the KeyCode Access site is restricted. Only authorized users should be using this application. Please see your Parts Manager for site authorized users. KeyCode Look-Up currently goes back 17 years from current model year. Important notes about security: - Users may not access the system from multiple computers simultaneously. - Users may only request one KeyCode at a time. - KeyCode information will only be available on the screen for 2 minutes. - Each user is personally responsible for maintaining and protecting their password. - Never share your password with others. - User Id's are suspended after 6 consecutive failed attempts. - User Id's are disabled if not used for 90 days. - Processes must be in place for regular dealership reviews. - The Parts Manager (or assigned management) must have processes in place for employee termination or life change events. Upon termination individuals access must be turned off immediately and access should be re-evaluated upon any position changes within the dealership. - If you think your password or ID security has been breached, contact Dealer Systems Support at 1-800-265-0573. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Key > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Interior/Locks - Key Cutting Procedure > Page 7732 Each user will be required to accept the following agreement each time the KeyCode application is used. Key Code User Agreement - Key codes are proprietary information belonging to General Motors Corporation and to the vehicle owner. - Unauthorized access to, or use of, key code information is unlawful and may subject the user to criminal and civil penalties. - This information should be treated as strictly confidential and should not be disclosed to anyone unless authorized. I will ensure that the following information is obtained prior to releasing any Key Code information: 1. Government issued picture ID (Drivers License) 2. Registration or other proof of ownership. Registration should have normal markings from the Province that issued the registration and possibly the receipt for payment recorded as well. Important - GM takes this agreement seriously. Each user must be certain of vehicle ownership before giving out key codes. - When the ownership of the vehicle is in doubt, dealership personnel should not provide the information. Key code requests should never be received via a fax or the internet and key codes should never be provided to anyone in this manner. A face to face contact with the owner of the vehicle is the expected manner that dealers will use to release a key code or as otherwise stipulated in this bulletin or other materials. - Key codes should NEVER be sent via a fax or the internet. - Each Dealership should create a permanent file to document all KeyCode Look Up transactions. Requests should be filed by VIN and in each folder retain copies of the following: - Government issued picture ID (Drivers License) - Registration or other proof of ownership. - Copy of the paid customer receipt which has the name of the employee who cut and sold the key to the customer. - Do not put yourself or your Dealership in the position of needing to "explain" a KeyCode Look Up to either GM or law enforcement officials. - Dealership Management has the ability to review all KeyCode Look-Up transactions. - Dealership KeyCode documentation must be retained for two years. Frequently Asked Questions (FAQs) for GM of Canada Dealers How do I request a KeyCode for customer owned vehicle that is not registered? Scrapped, salvaged or stored vehicles that do not have a current registration should still have the ownership verified by requesting the vehicle title, current insurance policy and / or current lien holder information from the customers financing source. If you cannot determine if the customer is the owner of the vehicle, do not provide the key code information. In these cases, a short description of the vehicle (scrapped, salvaged, etc.) and the dealership location should be kept on file. Any clarifying explanation should be entered into the comments field. How do I document a KeyCode request for a vehicle that is being repossessed? The repossessor must document ownership of the vehicle by providing a court ordered repossession order and lien-holder documents prior to providing key code information. Copies of the repossessors Drivers License and a business card should be retained by the dealership for documentation. What do I do if the registration information is locked in the vehicle? Every effort should be made to obtain complete information for each request. Each Dealership will have to decide on a case by case basis if enough information is available to verify the customer's ownership of the vehicle. Other forms of documentation include vehicle title, insurance policy, and or current lien information from the customers financing source. Dealership Management must be involved in any request without complete information. If you cannot determine if the customer is the owner of the vehicle, do not provide the key code information. Can I get a print out of the information on the screen? It is important to note that the Key Code Look Up Search Results contain sensitive and/or proprietary information. For this reason GM recommends against printing it. If the Search Results must be printed, store and/or dispose of the printed copy properly to minimize the risk of improper or illegal use. Who in the dealership has access to the KeyCode application? Dealership Parts Manager (or assigned management) will determine, and control, who is authorized to access the KeyCode Look Up application. However, we anticipate that dealership parts and service management will be the primary users of the application. The KeyCode Look Up application automatically tracks each user activity session. Information tracked by the system includes: User name, User ID, all other entered data and the date/time of access. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Key > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Interior/Locks - Key Cutting Procedure > Page 7733 What if I input the VIN incorrectly? If an incorrect VIN is entered into the system (meaning that the system does not recognize the VIN or that the VIN has been entered incorrectly) the system will return an error message. If I am an authorized user for the KeyCode application, can I access the application from home? Yes. What if I suspect key code misuse? Your dealership should communicate the proper procedures for requesting key codes. Any suspicious activity either within the dealership or externally should be reported to Dealer Systems Support at 1-800-265-0573 or GM of Canada Key Code Inquiry Desk at 1-905-644-4892. Whose key codes can I access through the system? At this time the following Canadian vehicle codes are available through the system: Chevrolet, Cadillac, Buick, Pontiac, GMC, HUMMER (H2 and H3 only), Oldsmobile, Saturn, Saab and Isuzu (up to 2002 model year) for a maximum of 17 model years. What should I do if I enter a valid VIN and the system does not produce any key code information? Occasionally, the KeyCode Look Up application may not produce a key code for a valid VIN. This may be the result of new vehicle information not yet available. In addition, older vehicle information may have been sent to an archive status. If you do not receive a key code returned for valid VIN, you should contact GM of Canada Key Code Inquiry Desk at 1-905-644-4892. How do I access KeyCodes if the KeyCode Look-up system is down? If the KeyCode Look-up system is temporarily unavailable, you can contact the original selling dealer who may have it on file or contact GM of Canada Key Code Inquiry Desk at 1-905-644-4892. If the customer is dealing with an emergency lock-out situation, you need to have the customer contact Roadside assistance, OnStar if subscribed, or 911. What should I do if the KeyCode from the look-up system does not work on the vehicle? On occasion a dealer may encounter a KeyCode that will not work on the vehicle in question. In cases where the KeyCode won't work you will need to verify with the manufacturer of the cutting equipment that the key has been cut correctly. If the key has been cut correctly you may be able to verify the proper KeyCode was given through the original selling dealer. When unable to verify the KeyCode through the original selling dealer contact GM of Canada Key Code Inquiry Desk at 1-905-644-4892. If the key has been cut correctly and the code given does not work, the lock cylinder may have been changed. In these situations following the proper SI document for recoding a key or replacing the lock cylinder may be necessary. How long do I have to keep KeyCode Records? Dealership KeyCode documentation must be retained for two years. Can I get a KeyCode changed in the Look-Up system? Yes, KeyCodes can be changed in the Look-Up system if a lock cylinder has been changed. Contact GM of Canada Key Code Inquiry Desk at 1-905-644-4892. What information do I need before I can provide a driver of a company fleet vehicle Keys or KeyCode information? The dealership should have a copy of the individual's driver's license, proof of employment and registration. If there is any question as to the customer's employment by the fleet company, the dealer should attempt to contact the fleet company for verification. If there is not enough information to determine ownership and employment, this information should not be provided. How do I document a request from an Independent Repair facility for a KeyCode or Key? The independent must provide a copy of their driver's license, proof of employment and signed copy of the repair order for that repair facility. The repair order must include customer's name, address, VIN, city, province and license plate number. Copies of this information must be included in your dealer KeyCode file. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Key > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Interior/Locks - Key Cutting Procedure > Page 7734 Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Keyless Starting System > Keyless Start Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Keyless Start - 2-Way Advanced Remote Start Keyless Start Transmitter: Technical Service Bulletins Keyless Start - 2-Way Advanced Remote Start INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 09-00-89-025A Date: October 26, 2009 Subject: GM Accessories: 2-Way Advanced Remote Start Systems Part Information Models: 2007-2010 Buick Lucerne 2008-2010 Buick Enclave 2007-2010 Cadillac Escalade ESV, EXT 2008-2010 Cadillac DTS 2007-2009 Chevrolet Equinox, HHR 2007-2010 Chevrolet Avalanche, Cobalt, Silverado, Tahoe 2008-2010 Chevrolet Impala, Malibu 2009-2010 Chevrolet Traverse 2007-2010 GMC Acadia, Sierra, Yukon 2008-2010 HUMMER H2 2007-2009 Pontiac Torrent 2007-2010 Pontiac G5, G6 2008-2010 Pontiac G8 2010 Pontiac Solstice 2007-2010 Saturn AURA, OUTLOOK 2009-2010 Saturn VUE 2010 Saturn SKY Attention: This bulletin does not apply to GMODC dealers. Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add part numbers. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 09-00-89-025 (Section 00 - General Information). This bulletin is being published to provide information on locating service part numbers for GM Accessory, 2-Way Advanced Remote Start Systems. Dealers should consult the chart below and use the correct service part. Dealers should not use entire kit for warranty or repair work. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Keyless Starting System > Keyless Start Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Keyless Start - 2-Way Advanced Remote Start > Page 7740 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Keyless Starting System > Keyless Start Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Keyless Start - 2-Way Advanced Remote Start > Page 7741 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Keyless Starting System > Keyless Start Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Keyless Start - 2-Way Advanced Remote Start > Page 7742 Parts Information Service parts common to all 2-Way Advanced Remote Start Systems Transmitter Battery 12493150 Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Motor > Component Information > Locations Starter Motor: Locations Powertrain Component Views Front Engine Components (LAF 1 of 2) 1 - Q38 Throttle Body 2 - G18 High Pressure Fuel Pump 3 - B23F Camshaft Position Sensor Intake 4 - B37 Engine Oil Pressure Switch 5 - B68 Knock Sensor 6 - B26 Crankshaft Position Sensor 7 - M64 Starter Motor 8 - Q2 A/C Compressor Clutch 9 - G13 Generator Left Front of the Engine Components (LF1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Motor > Component Information > Locations > Page 7746 1 - T8B Ignition Coil 2 2 - T8D Ignition Coil 4 3 - T8F Ignition Coil 6 4 - G18 High Pressure Fuel Pump 5 - B34 Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor 6 - M64 Starter Motor 7 - B68B Knock Sensor 2 8 - B37 Engine Oil Pressure Switch 9 - B1 A/C Refrigerant Pressure Sensor 10 - Q2 A/C Compressor Clutch 11 - G13 Generator Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Motor > Component Information > Locations > Page 7747 Starter Motor: Diagrams M64 Starter Motor X1 M64 Starter Motor X2 (Positive Battery Cable) (LAF) M64 Starter Motor X2 (Positive Battery Cable) (LF1) M64 Starter Motor X2 (Generator Harness) (LAF) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Motor > Component Information > Locations > Page 7748 M64 Starter Motor X2 (Generator Harness) (LF1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Motor > Component Information > Locations > Page 7749 Starter Motor: Service and Repair Starter Replacement (LF1) Removal Procedure 1. Turn OFF the ignition. 2. Disconnect the battery negative cable. Refer to Battery Negative Cable Disconnection and Connection (See: Battery/Battery Cable/Negative/Service and Repair/Battery Negative Cable Disconnection and Connection). 3. Remove the heat shield (2) from the starter. 4. Disconnect the knock sensor connector. 5. Disconnect and remove the bank 1 sensor 2 oxygen sensor after the left catalytic converter. Refer to Heated Oxygen Sensor Replacement - Bank 1 Sensor 2 (LF1) (See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Oxygen Sensor/Service and Repair) 6. Remove the battery positive nut (1) and the engine harness connector (2), from the starter solenoid (3). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Motor > Component Information > Locations > Page 7750 7. Remove the starter motor bolts (1). 8. Remove the starter motor (2). Installation Procedure 1. Install the starter motor (2). Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener Caution). 2. Install the starter motor mounting bolts. Tighten to 58 Nm (43 lb ft). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Motor > Component Information > Locations > Page 7751 3. Install the battery positive cable and engine harness connector to the starter. Tighten the battery positive cable nut (1) to 25 Nm (18 lb ft). 4. Install the engine harness connector to the starter solenoid. 5. Install the starter heat shield (2) and tighten the bolt (1) to 7 Nm (62 lb in). 6. Connect the knock sensor connector. 7. Install and connect the bank 1 sensor 2 oxygen sensor. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Relay > Component Information > Locations Starter Relay: Locations Electrical Center Identification Views X50A Fuse Block - Underhood, Label Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 7755 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Accessory Relay > Component Information > Locations Accessory Relay: Locations Electrical Center Identification Views X51A Fuse Block - Instrument Panel Label (before A6284015) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Accessory Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 7760 X51A Fuse Block - Instrument Panel Label (A6284015 and after) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Accessory Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 7761 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Accessory Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 7762 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Accessory Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 7763 Accessory Relay: Diagrams X80A Accessory Power Receptacle - Center Console 1 X80B Accessory Power Receptacle - Center Console 2 X80G Accessory Power Receptacle - Instrument Panel Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Accessory Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 7764 X80R Accessory Power Receptacle - Rear Compartment Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Auxiliary Power Outlet: Diagram Information and Instructions Electrical Schematic Symbols Electrical Schematic Symbols Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7769 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7770 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7771 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7772 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7773 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7774 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7775 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7776 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7777 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7778 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7779 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7780 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7781 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7782 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7783 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7784 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7785 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7786 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7787 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7788 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7789 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7790 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7791 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7792 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7793 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7794 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7795 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7796 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7797 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7798 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7799 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7800 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7801 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7802 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7803 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7804 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7805 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7806 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7807 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7808 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7809 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7810 General Electrical Diagnosis General Electrical Diagnosis Basic Knowledge Required Without a basic knowledge of electricity, it will be difficult to use the diagnostic procedures contained in the service manual. You should understand the basic theory of electricity, and know the meaning of voltage (V), current (A), and resistance (Ohms ). You should also be able to read and understand a wiring diagram, as well as understand what happens in a circuit with an open or a shorted wire. Vehicle Zoning Strategy Vehicle Zoning Strategy All grounds, in-line connectors, and splices have identifying numbers that correspond to where they are located in the vehicle. The following table explains the numbering system. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7811 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7812 Auxiliary Power Outlet: Diagnostic Aids Arrows and Symbols Arrows and Symbols This service manual uses various symbols in order to describe different service operations. 1 - Front of Vehicle 2 - View Detail 2 - View Detail 3 - Ambient Air Mixed with Another Gas or Indicate Temperature Change 4 - Motion or Direction 5 - View Angle 6 - Dimension (1:2) 7 Ambient/Clean Air Flow or Cool Air Flow 8 - Lubrication Point - Oil or Fluid 9 - Task Related 10 Sectioning (1:3) 11 - Gas Other Than Ambient Air or Hot Air Flow 12 - Lubrication Point - Grease or Jelly 13 - Multidirectional Arrow Decimal and Metric Equivalents Decimal and Metric Equivalents Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7813 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7814 Checking Aftermarket Accessories Checking Aftermarket Accessories Warning: Refer to SIR Warning (See: Restraint Systems/Service Precautions/SIR Warning). Caution: The OBD II symbol is used on the circuit diagrams in order to alert the technician that the circuit is essential for proper OBD II emission control circuit operation. Any circuit which fails and causes the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) to turn ON, or causes emissions-related component damage, is identified as an OBD II circuit. Do not connect aftermarket accessories into the following circuits: * SIR circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the SIR symbol. * OBD II circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the OBD II symbol. Always check for aftermarket accessories (non-OEM) as the first step in diagnosing electrical problems. If the vehicle is so equipped, disconnect the system to verify that these add-on accessories are not the cause of the problems. Possible causes of vehicle problems related to aftermarket accessories include: * Power feeds connected to points other than the battery * Antenna location * Transceiver wiring located too close to vehicle electronic modules or wiring * Poor shielding or poor connectors on antenna feed line * Check for recent service bulletins detailing installation guidelines for aftermarket accessories. Circuit Testing Circuit Testing The Circuit Testing section contains the following diagnostic testing information. Using this information along with the diagnostic procedures will identify the cause of the electrical malfunction. * Using Connector Test Adapters (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Using Connector Test Adapters) * Probing Electrical Connectors (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Probing Electrical Connectors) * Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7815 Procedures/Circuit Testing/Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter) * Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp) * Using Fused Jumper Wires (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Using Fused Jumper Wires) * Measuring Voltage (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Measuring Voltage) * Measuring Voltage Drop (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Measuring Voltage Drop) * Measuring Frequency (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Measuring Frequency) * Testing Ground and Low Reference Circuits (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Testing Ground and Low Reference Circuits) * Testing for Continuity (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Continuity) * Testing for Short to Ground (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Short to Ground) * Testing for a Short to Voltage (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for a Short to Voltage) * Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections) * Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions) * Testing for Electrical Intermittents (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Electrical Intermittents) * Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure) * Circuit Protection - Fuses (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Circuit Protection - Fuses) * Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers) * Circuit Protection - Fusible Links (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Circuit Protection - Fusible Links) Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp Special Tools EL-35616-200 - Test Light - Probe Kit For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Tools and Equipment). Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test Probe Caution). A test lamp can simply and quickly test a low impedance circuit for voltage. A Digital Multimeter (DMM) should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present if the impedance is low enough, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. In other words, if there is not enough current, the test lamp will not illuminate even though voltage is present. The EL-35616-200 - kit is Micro-Pack compatible and comprised of a 12-volt light bulb with an attached pair of leads. To properly operate this tool use the following procedures. When testing for voltage: 1. Attach one lead to ground. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is voltage at the point being tested. When testing for ground: 1. Attach one lead to battery positive voltage. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where ground should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is ground at the point being tested. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7816 Testing for a Short to Voltage Testing for a Short to Voltage Special Tools EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM) For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Tools and Equipment). Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test Probe Caution). The following procedure tests for a short to voltage in a circuit. 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Set the rotary dial of the Digital Multimeter (DMM) to the V (DC) position. 4. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. Turn ON the ignition and operate all accessories. 7. If the voltage measured is greater than 1 V, there is a short to voltage in the circuit. Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions Special Tools J-25070 - Heat Gun For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Tools and Equipment). Many intermittent open or shorted circuits are affected by harness/connector movement that is caused by vibration, engine torque, bumps/rough pavement, etc. In order to duplicate the customer's concern, it may be necessary to manipulate the wiring harness if the malfunction appears to be vibration related. Manipulation of a circuit can consist of a wide variety of actions, including: * Wiggling the harness * Disconnecting a connector and reconnecting * Stressing the mechanical connection of a connector * Pulling on the harness or wire in order to identify a separation/break inside the insulation * Relocating a harness or wires All these actions should be performed with some goal in mind. For instance, with a scan tool connected, wiggling the wires may uncover a faulty input to the control module. The snapshot option would be appropriate here. Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure). Another option is, with the component commanded ON and OFF by the scan tool, move related connectors and wiring and observe the component operation. With the engine running, move related connectors and wiring while monitoring engine operation. If harness or connector movement affects the data displayed, component/system operation, or engine operation, inspect and repair the harness/connections as necessary. You may need to load the vehicle in order to duplicate the concern. This may require the use of weights, floor jacks, jackstands, frame machines, etc. In these cases you are attempting to duplicate the concern by manipulating the suspension or frame. This method is useful in finding harnesses that are too short and their connectors pull apart enough to cause a poor connection. A DMM set to Peak Min/Max mode and connected to the suspect circuit while testing can yield desirable results. Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Electrical Intermittents). Certainly, using the senses of sight, smell, and hearing while manipulating the circuit can provide good results as well. There may be instances where circuit manipulation alone will not meet the required criteria for the fault condition to appear. In such cases it may be necessary to expose the suspect circuit to other conditions while manipulating the harness. Such conditions would include high moisture conditions, along with exceptionally high or low temperatures. The following discusses how to expose the circuit to these kinds of conditions. Salt Water Spray Some compounds possess the ability to conduct electricity when dissolved in water such as ordinary salt. By mixing table salt with water in sufficient Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7817 quantities, you can enhance the conductive properties of water so that any circuit which may be sensitive to moisture will more readily fail when liberally sprayed with this mixture. Mixing 0.35L (12 oz) of water with approximately 1 tablespoon of salt will yield a salt solution of 5 percent. Fill a normal spray bottle with this mixture. This mixture is sufficient to enhance the water's own conductivity. This may cause the circuit to fail more easily when sprayed. Once the mixture is completed, spray the suspect area liberally with the solution. Then, while monitoring either a scan tool or DMM, manipulate the harness as discussed previously. High Temperature Conditions If the complaint tends to be heat related, you can simulate the condition using the J-25070 - heat gun. Using the heat gun, you can heat up the suspected area or component. Manipulate the harnesses under high temperature conditions while monitoring the scan tool or DMM to locate the fault condition. The high temperature condition may be achieved simply by test driving the vehicle at normal operating temperature. If a heat gun is unavailable, consider this option to enhance your diagnosis. This option does not allow for the same control, however. Low Temperature Conditions Depending on the nature of the fault condition, placing a fan in front of the vehicle while the vehicle is in the shade can have the desired effect. If this is unsuccessful, use local cooling treatments such as ice or a venturi type nozzle (one that provides hot or cold air). This type of tool is capable of producing air stream temperatures down to -18°C (0°F) from one end and +71°C (160°F) from the other. This is ideally suited for localized cooling needs. Once the vehicle, component, or harness has been sufficiently cooled, manipulate the harness or components in an effort to duplicate the concern. Duplicating Failure Conditions * If none of the previous tests are successful, attempt to duplicate and/or capture the failure conditions. * Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, where applicable, contains the conditions that were present when the DTC set. 1. Review and record Freeze Frame/Failure Records data. 2. Clear the DTCs using the scan tool. 3. Turn the key to OFF and wait 15 seconds. 4. Operate the vehicle under the same conditions that were noted in Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, as closely as possible. The vehicle must also be operating within the Conditions for Running the DTC. Refer to Conditions for Running the DTC in the supporting text if a DTC is being diagnosed. 5. Monitor DTC Status for the DTC being tested. The scan tool will indicate Ran, when the enabling conditions have been satisfied long enough for the DTC to run. The scan tool will also indicate whether the DTC passed or failed. * An alternate method is to drive the vehicle with the DMM connected to a suspected circuit. An abnormal reading on the DMM when the concern occurs, may help you locate the concern. Measuring Frequency Measuring Frequency Special Tools EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM) For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Tools and Equipment). Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test Probe Caution). The following procedure determines the frequency of a signal. Note: Connecting the Digital Multimeter (DMM) to the circuit before pressing the Hz button will allow the DMM to autorange to an appropriate range. 1. Apply power to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (AC) position. 3. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7818 5. Press the Hz button on the DMM. 6. The DMM will display the frequency measured. Measuring Voltage Measuring Voltage Special Tools EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM) For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Tools and Equipment). Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test Probe Caution). The following procedure measures the voltage at a selected point in a circuit. 1. Disconnect the electrical harness connector for the circuit being tested, if necessary. 2. Enable the circuit and/or system being tested. Use the following methods: * Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. * Turn ON the engine. * Turn ON the circuit and/or system with a scan tool in Output Controls. * Turn ON the switch for the circuit and/or system being tested. 3. Select the V (AC) or V (DC) position on the Digital Multimeter (DMM). 4. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the point of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. The DMM displays the voltage measured at that point. Measuring Voltage Drop Measuring Voltage Drop Special Tools EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM) For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Tools and Equipment). Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test Probe Caution). The following procedure determines the difference in voltage potential between 2 points. 1. Set the rotary dial of the Digital Multimeter (DMM) to the V (DC) position. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7819 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to one point of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to the other point of the circuit. 4. Operate the circuit. 5. The DMM displays the difference in voltage between the 2 points. Probing Electrical Connectors Probing Electrical Connectors Note: Always be sure to reinstall the connector position assurance (CPA) and terminal position assurance (TPA) when reconnecting connectors or replacing terminals. Front probe Disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the mating side (front) of the connector. Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test Probe Caution). Note: When probing female 0.64 terminals, it is important to use the correct adapter. There have been some revisions to the test adapter for 0.64 terminals. The proper adapter for 0.64 terminals is the EL-35616-64B which has a gold terminal and a black wire between the base and tip. Failure to use the proper test adapter may result in damage to the terminal being tested and improper diagnosis. Note: The proper adapter for probing the terminals for fuses, relays, or diodes in an electrical center is EL-35616-35. Using any other tool or adapter may damage the terminal being tested. Refer to the following table as a guide in selecting the correct test adapter for front probing connectors: Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7820 Backprobe Note: * Backprobe connector terminals only when specifically required in diagnostic procedures. * Do not backprobe a sealed (Weather Pack(R)) connector, less than a 280 series Metri-Pack connector, a Micro-Pack connector, or a flat wire (dock and lock) connector. * Backprobing can be a source of damage to connector terminals. Use care in order to avoid deforming the terminal, either by forcing the test probe too far into the cavity or by using too large of a test probe. * After backprobing any connector, inspect for terminal damage. If terminal damage is suspected, test for proper terminal contact. Do not disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the harness side (back) of the connector. Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure Using Snapshots in Global Diagnostic System (GDS) Overview Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7821 A snapshot is a recording of what a control module on the vehicle was receiving for information while the snapshot is being made. A snapshot may be used to analyze the data during the time a vehicle condition is current. This allows you to concentrate on making the condition occur, rather than trying to view all the data in anticipation of the fault. To record a snapshot in GDS, select, Record Snapshot, from the options at the top right portion of any of the various pages that allow snapshots to be taken (e.g. Data Display, Control Functions, etc.). When you are finished recording, select, Stop Snapshot recording. The snapshot will now be available for replay. Snapshot Replay The Snapshot Replay function allows reviews of previously recorded vehicle snapshot data. This information can be used in analysis of vehicle problems and detection of trigger error conditions. The graph function can be used to compare parameters to see if a component is functioning properly. Recorded snapshots can be selected for viewing by the following three methods: * Selecting a snapshot file from the Vehicle Home Page and clicking on the Review selection. * Double clicking on the selected snapshot from the Vehicle Home Page. * Entering the Tools selection from the Menu selection and selecting Snapshot replay. Next, open the Snapshot Manager. Double click on the snapshot file you wish to view or click on the Load Snapshot selection and select a snapshot file. Regardless of selection method, a File Loaded pop-up window will be displayed from the Snapshot Replay screen. Select OK from the pop-up window. Snapshot Play Functions There are several snapshot play functions that are used to replay recorded snapshots * The Play function is used to play the snapshot forward by clicking on this selection. A marker will move across the screen when this selection is used. All selections in this area turn grey when they are active. * The Pause function is used to pause play of the snapshot. When this selection is clicked a second time the snapshot will start playing where it left off. * The Stop function is used to stop playing the snapshot. The snapshot will start from the beginning, if Play is selected after using the Stop function. Time Control Time control is used to control the snapshot replay. This function allows selection of a specific time frame, display of different views, and control of display speed. The following functions can be selected directly under Time Control. * The Bookmark selection allows you to add a specific comment in the current display and return to this point in the future. When this option is selected, a pop-up window is displayed. Enter a bookmark name and select OK. * The Note Pad can be selected to add comments to the snapshot replay file at the current point of time. When this option is selected, a pop-up window is displayed. Enter a comment for the snapshot file and select OK. * The Load Snapshot (blue folder) opens a snapshot file and makes it ready for further analysis. This function is also available by clicking on an available snapshot file from the Snapshot Manager. * The Down Arrow displays all Time Control options when selected. Individual options can also be selected by clicking on the item you want. * The Snapshot Display Speed can be controlled by selecting this option. Slow speeds of 1/8X, 1/4X, and 1/2X can be selected. The real time speed can also be selected at 1. Faster speeds of 2X, 4X, and 8X can also be obtained by using this selection. View Selections Each View Selection provides a different way of displaying vehicle data for analysis. The following functions can be selected under Available Views: Note: The parameter name will be shown in the original language used for capture if no translation is available for the name. * Parameter List View - Displays incoming information from the snapshot file. The current value of the parameters is displayed on the screen. * Log View - Contains all the information from the snapshot file. All parameter values are listed in the order they were recorded. Specific parameters can be added or removed from a watchlist by clicking on the appropriate item. * State View - Shows the values of all parameters in a specific time frame. These values can be used for comparison with the trigger view. * Trigger View - Displays all system and user defined triggers. This function can be used when there is a combination of factors involved in a diagnostic problem. When a Trigger condition is met a caution triangle will be displayed on the screen. Triggers: * Load Triggers - Allows you to load a file containing trigger definitions. * Save Triggers - Allows you to save the trigger to your computer's hard drive. * Remove Trigger - Allows you to remove the current trigger. It will no longer be present. * Edit Trigger - Displays a pop-up window where you can modify the limits and parameters contained within a trigger. * Adds Trigger - Displays a pop-up window to configure a trigger. * DTC View - After the Play function is selected and this option is selected this function opens the list of recorded DTCs. * Line Graph View - Displays data that can be visualized against the time-axis. From this view, specific parameters can be selected for graphing by Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7822 checking the box under Selected. At the bottom of the graph there are four functions Zoom In (increase size), Zoom Out (decrease size), Bookmarks, and Pause Scrolling. Each of these functions can be accessed by clicking on them. Testing for Continuity Testing for Continuity Special Tools EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM) For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Tools and Equipment). Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test Probe Caution). The following procedures verify good continuity in a circuit. With a Digital Multimeter (DMM) 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the Ohms position. 2. Disconnect the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 3. Disconnect the load. 4. Press the MIN MAX button on the DMM. 5. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 6. Connect the other lead of the DMM to the other end of the circuit. 7. If the DMM displays low or no resistance, the circuit has good continuity. With a Test Lamp Note: Only use the test lamp procedure on low impedance power and ground circuits. 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect one lead of the test lamp to one end of the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 5. Connect the other end of the circuit to ground. 6. If the test lamp illuminates (full intensity), then the circuit has good continuity. Testing for Electrical Intermittents Testing for Electrical Intermittents Special Tools EL-39200 Digital Multimeter For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Tools and Equipment). Perform the following procedures while wiggling the harness from side to side. Continue this at convenient points (about 6 inches apart) while watching the test equipment. * Testing for Short to Ground (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Short to Ground) * Testing for Continuity (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Continuity) * Testing for a Short to Voltage (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for a Short to Voltage) If the fault is not identified, perform the procedure below using the MIN MAX feature on the EL-39200 DMM. This feature allows you to manipulate the circuit without having to watch the EL-39200. The EL-39200 will generate an audible tone when a change is detected. Note: The EL-39200 must be used in order to perform the following procedure since the EL-39200 can monitor current, resistance or voltage while recording the minimum (MIN), and maximum (MAX) values measured. 1. Connect the EL-39200 to both sides of a suspected connector (still connected), or from one end of a suspected circuit to the other. Refer to Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7823 Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter) for information on connecting the EL-39200 to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the EL-39200 to the V (AC) or V (DC) position. 3. Press the range button of the EL-39200 in order to select the desired voltage range. 4. Press the MIN MAX button of the EL-39200. The EL-39200 displays 100 ms RECORD and emits an audible tone (beep). Note: The 100 ms RECORD mode is the length of time an input must stay at a new value in order to record the full change. 5. Simulate the condition that is potentially causing the intermittent connection, either by wiggling the connections or the wiring, test driving, or performing other operations. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions). 6. Listen for the audible Min Max Alert which indicates that a new minimum or maximum value has been recorded. 7. Press the MIN MAX button once in order to display the MAX value and note the value. 8. Press the MIN MAX button again in order to display the MIN value and note the value. 9. Determine the difference between the MIN and MAX values. * If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is 1 V or greater an intermittent open or high resistance condition exists. Repair the condition as necessary. * If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is less than 1 V, an intermittent open or high resistance condition does not exist. Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections Special Tools EL-35616 Terminal Test Probe Kit For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Tools and Equipment). When the condition is not currently present, but is indicated in DTC history, the cause may be intermittent. An intermittent may also be the cause when there is a customer complaint, but the symptom cannot be duplicated. Refer to the Symptom Table of the system that is suspect of causing the condition before trying to locate an intermittent condition. Most intermittent conditions are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. Inspect for the following items: * Wiring broken inside the insulation * Poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector * Poor terminal to wire connection-Some conditions which fall under this description are poor crimps, poor solder joints, crimping over the wire insulation rather than the wire itself, and corrosion in the wire to terminal contact area, etc. * Pierced or damaged insulation can allow moisture to enter the wiring causing corrosion. The conductor can corrode inside the insulation, with little visible evidence. Look for swollen and stiff sections of wire in the suspect circuits. * Wiring which has been pinched, cut, or its insulation rubbed through may cause an intermittent open or short as the bare area touches other wiring or parts of the vehicle. * Wiring that comes in contact with hot or exhaust components * Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions) in order to duplicate the conditions required, in order to verify the customer concern. * Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Electrical Intermittents) for test procedures to detect intermittent open, high resistance, short to ground, and short to voltage conditions. * Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure) for advanced intermittent diagnosis and Vehicle Data Recorder operation. Testing for Terminal Fretting Some intermittent conditions can be caused by wire terminal fretting corrosion. Fretting corrosion is a build-up of insulating, oxidized wear debris that can form when there is a small motion between electrical contacts. The oxidized wear debris can pile up enough at the electrical contact spots that the electrical resistance across the connection increases. Movement between the contacting surfaces as small as 10 to 100 microns can cause fretting. To put this in perspective, a sheet of paper is about 100 microns thick, so fretting motion is small and hard to see. Vibration and thermal expansion/contraction are the main sources that create fretting motion. Since vehicles vibrate and can experience large temperature swings, they are a good source for fretting motion. Tin, copper, nickel, and iron surfaces are all susceptible to fretting corrosion. Fretting corrosion can be difficult to see but it looks like small, dark smudges on the terminals contact surface. To correct a fretting condition disconnect the suspect connector and add Nyogel lubricant 760G (dielectric grease) to both sides of the connector Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7824 terminals. Then reconnect the connector and wipe away any excess lubricant. This will correct the additional terminal contact resistance due to the terminal fretting corrosion. Testing for Proper Terminal Contact It is important to test terminal contact at the component and any inline connectors before replacing a suspect component. Mating terminals must be inspected to ensure good terminal contact. A poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector may be the result of contamination or deformation. Contamination may be caused by the connector halves being improperly connected. A missing or damaged connector seal, damage to the connector itself, or exposing the terminals to moisture and dirt can also cause contamination. Contamination, usually in the underhood or underbody connectors, leads to terminal corrosion, causing an open circuit or intermittently open circuit. Deformation is caused by probing the mating side of a connector terminal without the proper adapter. Always use the EL-35616 when probing connectors. Other causes of terminal deformation are improperly joining the connector halves, or repeatedly separating and joining the connector halves. Deformation, usually to the female terminal contact tang, can result in poor terminal contact causing an open or intermittently open circuit. Testing for Proper Terminal Contact in Bussed Electrical Centers It is very important to use the correct test adapter when testing for proper terminal contact of fuses and relays in a bussed electrical center. Use EL-35616-35 to test for proper terminal contact. Failure to use EL-35616-35 can result in improper diagnosis of the bussed electrical center. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact: 1. Separate the connector halves. 2. Visually inspect the connector halves for contamination. Contamination may result in a white or green build-up within the connector body or between terminals. This causes high terminal resistance, intermittent contact, or an open circuit. An underhood or underbody connector that shows signs of contamination should be replaced in its entirety: terminals, seals, and connector body. 3. Using an equivalent male terminal / terminated lead, verify that the retention force is significantly different between a known good terminal and the suspect terminal. Replace the female terminal in question. Flat Wire (Dock and Lock) Connectors There are no serviceable parts for flat wire (dock and lock) connectors on the harness side or the component side. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact: 1. Remove the component in question. 2. Visually inspect each side of the connector for signs of contamination. Avoid touching either side of the connector as oil from your skin may be a source of contamination as well. 3. Visually inspect the terminal bearing surfaces of the flat wire circuits for splits, cracks, or other imperfections that could cause poor terminal contact. Visually inspect the component side connector to ensure that all of the terminals are uniform and free of damage or deformation. 4. Insert the appropriate adapter from the on the flat wire harness connector in order to test the circuit in question. Control Module/Component Voltage and Grounds Poor voltage or ground connections can cause widely varying symptoms. * Test all control module voltage supply circuits. Many vehicles have multiple circuits supplying voltage to a control module. Other components in the system may have separate voltage supply circuits that may also need to be tested. Inspect connections at the module/component connectors, fuses, and any intermediate connections between the voltage source and the module/component. A test lamp or a DMM may indicate that voltage is present, but neither tests the ability of the circuit to carry sufficient current. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. Refer to Circuit Testing (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Circuit Testing) and Power Distribution Schematics (See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Power Distribution Schematics). * Test all control module ground and system ground circuits. The control module may have multiple ground circuits. Other components in the system may have separate grounds that may also need to be tested. Inspect grounds for clean and tight connections at the grounding point. Inspect the connections at the component and in splice packs, where applicable. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. Refer to Circuit Testing (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Circuit Testing) and Ground Distribution Schematics (See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Ground Distribution Schematics). Temperature Sensitivity * An intermittent condition may occur when a component/connection reaches normal operating temperature. The condition may occur only when the component/connection is cold, or only when the component/connection is hot. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7825 * Freeze Frame, Failure Records, Snapshot, or Vehicle Data Recorder data may help with this type of intermittent condition, where applicable. * If the intermittent is related to heat, review the data for a relationship with the following: - High ambient temperatures - Underhood/engine generated heat - Circuit generated heat due to a poor connection, or high electrical load - Higher than normal load conditions, towing, etc. * If the intermittent is related to cold, review the data for the following: - Low ambient temperatures-In extremely low temperatures, ice may form in a connection or component. Inspect for water intrusion. - The condition only occurs on a cold start. - The condition goes away when the vehicle warms up. * Information from the customer may help to determine if the trouble follows a pattern that is temperature related. * If temperature is suspected of causing an intermittent fault condition, attempt to duplicate the condition. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions) in order to duplicate the conditions required. Electromagnetic Interference and Electrical Noise Some electrical components/circuits are sensitive to electromagnetic interference or other types of electrical noise. Inspect for the following conditions: * A misrouted harness that is too close to high voltage/high current devices such as secondary ignition components, motors, generator etc.-These components may induce electrical noise on a circuit that could interfere with normal circuit operation. * Electrical system interference caused by a malfunctioning relay, or a control module driven solenoid or switch-These conditions can cause a sharp electrical surge. Normally, the condition will occur when the malfunctioning component is operating. * Improper installation of non-factory or aftermarket add on accessories such as lights, 2-way radios, amplifiers, electric motors, remote starters, alarm systems, cell phones, etc.-These accessories may lead to interference while in use, but do not fail when the accessories are not in use. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Checking Aftermarket Accessories). * Test for an open diode across the A/C compressor clutch and for other open diodes. Some relays may contain a clamping diode. * The generator may be allowing AC noise into the electrical system. Incorrect Control Module * There are only a few situations where reprogramming a control module is appropriate: - A new service control module is installed. - A control module from another vehicle is installed. - Revised software/calibration files have been released for this vehicle. Note: DO NOT re-program the control module with the SAME software/calibration files that are already present in the control module. This is not an effective repair for any type of concern. * Verify that the control module contains the correct software/calibration. If incorrect programming is found, reprogram the control module with the most current software/calibration. Refer to Control Module References (See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning) for replacement, setup, and programming. Testing for Short to Ground Testing for Short to Ground Special Tools * EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM) * EL 35616-200 - Test Light-Probe Kit For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Tools and Equipment). Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test Probe Caution). The following procedures test for a short to ground in a circuit. With a Digital Multimeter (DMM) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7826 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the Ohms position. 4. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the other lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. If the DMM does NOT display infinite resistance (OL), there is a short to ground in the circuit. With a Test Lamp 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect one lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to one end of the circuit to be tested. 5. If the test lamp illuminates, there is a short to ground in the circuit. Fuse Powering Several Loads 1. Review the system schematic and locate the fuse that is open. 2. Open the first connector or switch leading from the fuse to each load. 3. Connect a DMM across the fuse terminals (be sure that the fuse is powered). * When the DMM displays voltage the short is in the wiring leading to the first connector or switch. * If the DMM does not display voltage refer to the next step. 4. Close each connector or switch until the DMM displays voltage in order to find which circuit is shorted. Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter Special Tools EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM) For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Tools and Equipment). Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test Probe Caution). Digital Multimeter (DMM) Basic Requirements Service information is validated using digital multimeters that meet or exceed the following requirements. Using a multimeter that does not meet these basic requirements may give inaccurate readings which could lead to an incorrect diagnosis. Display and Settings 1. Four digits displayed 2. Voltage, amperage, resistance, frequency, diode test settings, and min-max function 3. Display positive and negative values Voltage 1. Have at least 10 Mohm input impedance 2. Test a DC voltage range of 0.1-1000 V. 3. Test an AC voltage range of 0.1-1000 V. Amperage 1. Test a DC amperage range of 0.1µA-10 A. 2. Test an AC amperage range of 0.1µA-10 A. Resistance Test a resistance range of 0.1 ohm-40 Mohm and displays infinite for a value greater than 40 Mohm (O.L. (Over-load)) Frequency Test for a frequency range of 0.5 HZ-199 K HZ Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7827 Diode Test 1. Apply at least 1 mA when performing the diode bias test 2. Display the break over voltage drop (0-3 V) of a forward biased diode 3. Display infinite (O.L. (Over-load)) when a diode is reverse biased Min-Max Readings 1. Can update at a 1 ms sample rate 2. Saves and displays minimum and maximum values Note: Circuits which include any solid state control modules, such as the engine control module (ECM), should only be tested with a 10 MOhms or higher impedance digital multimeter such as the EL-39200. The EL-39200 instruction manual is a good source of information and should be read thoroughly upon receipt of the DMM as well as kept on hand for future reference. A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present if the impedance is low enough, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. In other words, if there is not enough current, the test lamp will not illuminate even though voltage is present. The ohmmeter function on a DMM shows how much resistance exists between 2 points along a circuit. Low resistance in a circuit means good continuity. Note: Disconnect the power feed from the suspect circuit when measuring resistance with a DMM. This prevents incorrect readings. DMMs apply such a small voltage to measure resistance that the presence of voltages can upset a resistance reading. Diodes and solid state components in a circuit can cause a DMM to display a false reading. To find out if a component is affecting a measurement take a reading once, then reverse the leads and take a second reading. If the readings differ the solid state component is affecting the measurement. Following are examples of the various methods of connecting the DMM to the circuit to be tested: * Probe both ends of the connector and either hold the leads in place while manipulating the connector or tape the leads to the harness for continuous monitoring while you perform other operations or test driving. Refer to Probing Electrical Connectors (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Probing Electrical Connectors). * Disconnect the harness at both ends of the suspected circuit where it connects either to a component or to other harnesses. * If the system that is being diagnosed has a specified pinout or breakout box, it may be used in order to simplify connecting the DMM to the circuit or for testing multiple circuits quickly. Using Connector Test Adapters Using Connector Test Adapters Special Tools EL 35616 - Terminal Test Probe Kit For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Tools and Equipment). Caution: Do not insert test equipment probes (DMM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the EL-38125-580 GM Approved Terminal Release Tool Kit in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the EL-38125-580 GM Approved Terminal Release Tool Kit , ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the EL-38125-580 GM Approved Terminal Release Tool Kit label on the inside of the EL-38125-580 GM Approved Terminal Release Tool Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Using Fused Jumper Wires Using Fused Jumper Wires Special Tools J 36169-A Fused Jumper Wire Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7828 Note: A fused jumper may not protect solid state components from being damaged. The J 36169-A includes small clamp connectors that provide adaptation to most connectors without damage. This fused jumper wire is supplied with a 20-A fuse which may not be suitable for some circuits. Do not use a fuse with a higher rating than the fuse that protects the circuit being tested. AFL/EPC Connectors AFL/EPC Connectors Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. 1. For connectors with a bolt in the dress cover, turn the bolt counterclockwise to remove the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7829 2. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the top of the wire dress cover. Slide the CPA forward. 3. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7830 View showing depressing of the lever lock release tab. View of connector in released position. 4. Disconnect the connector from the component. 5. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the dress cover. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs and remove the dress cover. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7831 6. Release the rear lower half of the wiredress cover. 7. Release the tabs that are holding the wiredress cover to the connector body. 8. Remove the nose piece by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the slots on both ends of the connector body. Gently pry the nose piece out of the connector. J 38125-216 can also be used to remove the nose piece. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7832 9. Use the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by lifting the terminal retaining tabs on the inside of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Bosch Connectors (BSK) Bosch Connectors (BSK) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7833 Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 3. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 4. Insert the J 38125-561 tool into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 5. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Bosch Connectors (ECM) Bosch Connectors (ECM) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7834 1. Locate the assist lever on the top of the connector. Move the assist lever to the forward position. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7835 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the connector. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the locking tabs and remove the dress cover. 4. The terminal positive assurance (TPA) is located in the front of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7836 5. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove TPA from the connector. 6. Use the J 38125-213 or the J 38125-556 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7837 Note: Ensure that the dress cover and connector body are both in the released position before reassembling. Failure to do so may cause damage to the connector and component. Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Bosch Connectors (0.64) Bosch Connectors (0.64) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While pressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock until the lever is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Pull the rubber boot that covers the wires back to expose the end of the connector dress cover. 4. Place the connector locking lever in the center of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7838 5. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs that are on the wire end of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover and connector body and pry up. 6. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs located on the opposite side of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover at the connector end and pry up. 7. Remove the dress cover. 8. Cut the tie wrap on the wire bundle. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7839 9. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting a small flat-bladed tool into the small slot in the end of the slider and pushing on the TPA until it comes out of the connector. When the TPA exits the opposite side of the connector, gasp the TPA and pull it completely out of the connector. 10. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 11. Insert the J 38125-560 into the 2 triangular cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 12. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Terminal Replacement Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7840 1. Prior to installation the terminal must be aligned so the (1) coding lugs align with the (2) coding grooves on the connector. 2. Once the terminal is aligned, slide the terminal into the cavity until the retainer has engaged in the cavity of the connector. 3. Slide the TPA in the connector body and seat it using a small flat bladed tool. The TPA is seated when it is flush with the contact housing. 4. Secure the wires to the connector body using a tie wrap and replace the dress cover and grommet. Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Pull out the slider on the connector position assurance (CPA) until it is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7841 5. Insert the J 38125-557 into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Connector Position Assurance Locks Connector Position Assurance Locks The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of the connector. CPAs are used in various connectors throughout the vehicle. CPAs are also used in all SIR system electrical connectors. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals, of the connector. Connector Repairs Connector Repairs Connector Repairs contains a list of all connector repairs. The connector repairs are listed by the connector manufacturer and then by connector type. If the technician cannot identify the manufacturer of the connector, refer to Identifying Connectors below. Knowing the connector manufacturer will assist in finding the correct connector repair from the following list: * Connector Position Assurance Locks (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Connector Position Assurance Locks) * Terminal Position Assurance Locks (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Terminal Position Assurance Locks) * AFL/EPC Connectors (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/AFL/EPC Connectors) * Bosch Connectors (BSK) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Bosch Connectors (BSK))Bosch Connectors (0.64) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Bosch Connectors (0.64))Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT))Bosch Connectors (ECM) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Bosch Connectors (ECM)) * Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack))Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Push to Seat))Delphi Connectors Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7842 (Pull To Seat) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Pull to Seat))Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W))Delphi Connectors (Micro.64) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Micro .64))Delphi Connectors (12-Way) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (12-Way))Delphi Connectors (Steering Gear) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Steering Gear)) * FCI Connectors (Lever Lock) (See: General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/FCI Connectors (Lever Lock))FCI Connectors (SIR) (See: General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/FCI (SIR)) * FEP Connectors (Steering Gear) (See: General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/FEP Connectors (Steering Gear)) * JST Connectors (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/JST Connectors) * Kostal Connectors (Glow Plug Control Module) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Kostal Connectors (Glow Plug Control Module))Kostal Connectors (Transmission) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Kostal Connectors (Transmission)) * Molex Connectors (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Molex Connectors) * Sumitomo Connectors (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Sumitomo Connectors) * Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way))Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor))Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap))Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way))Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module)) * Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Yazaki Connectors (2-Way))Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Yazaki Connectors (16-Way)) * Repairing Connector Terminals (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Repairing Connector Terminals) Connector Anatomy 1 - Connector Positive Assurance (CPA) 2 - Assist Lever 3 - Wiredress Cover 4 - Seal Strain/Relief Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7843 5 - Slide Left Hand 6 - Slide Right Hand 7 - Terminal Positive Assurance (TPA) 8 - Terminal Positive Assurance (TPA) 9 - Connector Seal 10 - Connector Housing 11 - Inner Connector Identifying Connectors Knowing the connector manufacturer is helpful when trying to locating the correct connector repair procedure. There are many different connector designs used on GM vehicles and it is sometimes difficult to identify the connector manufacturer. The information in this document should help with the identification of connector manufactures. The following connector manufacturers make most of the connectors found in GM vehicles: * AFL/EPC (Alcoa Fujikura Ltd./Engineered Plastics Components) * Bosch * Delphi * FCI (Framatome Connectors International) * JAE (Japan Aviation Electronics) * JST (Japan Solderless Terminals) * Kostel * Molex * Sumitomo * Tyco/AMP * Yazaki Identifying the manufacturer of a connector is often difficult. When trying to determine the manufacturer of a connector, look for specific identifying marks that are unique to that connector supplier. Most of these identify marks are hard to find or see. Check the connector carefully and refer to the information below for pictures and descriptions of connector identification markings. * Most of AFLs connectors have EPC on their connector body. Some of the smaller connectors will not have any markings on them. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7844 * In some cases Bosch will actually be printed on the connector. If Bosch does not appear on the connector, look for the Bosch logo. The Bosch logo is a circle with a blunted arrow inside. This logo can appear anywhere on the connector and is often very small. * In some cases Delphi will actually be printed on the connector. If Delphi is not printed on the connector, look for PED. In both cases there is no specific orientation for Delphi or PED and they can appear anywhere on the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7845 * FCI connectors may have the FCI logo on their connectors. The logo is the letters FCI with an "A" above it. * JAE connector have JAE in small letters on their connectors. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7846 * JST connectors have JST in small letters on their connectors, similar to that above. The location of the logo will vary with the connector size and style. * Kostel has an "LK" with a circle around it. These connector are usually used as a transmissions connection. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7847 * Most Molex connectors will have the Molex logo on the dresscover of the connector. In some cases the connectors may have MX followed by another letter. The third letter indicates where the connector was made. A connector with MXD is a Molex connector made in Detroit. Sumitomo has a unique symbol on their connector and possibly a part number. The symbol is similar to that of a diamond lying on its side, similar to that shown. The logo could appear anywhere but the most common place is at the wire side of the housing. * Tyco/AMP has many different and unique connector designs. Some may or may not have identifiable marks on them. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7848 * Yazaki has a wedge or arrow shape, similar to that shown. Delphi Connectors (Push to Seat) Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Follow the steps below in order to repair push to seat connectors. 1. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device, the connector position assurance (CPA) device, and/or the secondary lock. 2. Separate the connector halves (1). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7849 3. Use the proper pick or removal tool (1) in order to release the terminal. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 4. Gently pull the cable and the terminal (2) out of the back of the connector. 5. Re-form the locking device if you are going to reuse the terminal (1). 6. To repair the terminal, refer to Terminal Repair. Terminal Repair 1. Slip the cable seal away from the terminal. 2. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 3. Slip a new cable seal onto the wire. 4. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 5. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 6. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. 7. Slide the cable seal toward the terminal. 8. Crimp the cable seal and the insulation. 9. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply grease to the connector. Reinstalling Terminal 1. In order to reuse a terminal or lead assembly, refer to Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Wiring Repairs). 2. Ensure that the cable seal is kept on the terminal side of the splice. 3. Insert the lead from the back until it catches. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Terminated Lead Repair 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Find the appropriate terminated lead. 3. Use the appropriate splice sleeves depending on the gauge size. 4. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves). Delphi Connectors (Pull to Seat) Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) Special Tools Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7850 J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal If the terminal is visibly damaged or is suspected of having a faulty connection, the terminal should be replaced. Follow the steps below in order to repair pull-to-seat connectors: 1. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) device and/or the secondary lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component or separate the connectors for in-line connectors. 3. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device. 4. Insert the proper pick or removal tool into the front of the connector body. Note: On connectors with more than one terminal the service loop may not be large enough to remove the terminal and crimp on a new one. If the terminal wire does not have a large enough service loop for removal, cut the wire 5 cm (2 in) behind the connector before removal. 5. Grasp the wire at the back of the connector body and gently push the terminal out the front of the connector body. Terminal Repair 1. If the wire needed to be cut in order to remove the terminal, gently push a small length of the same size wire through the back of the connector cavity until there is enough wire exposed in order to crimp on a new terminal. If the wire was not cut, cut the existing wire as close to the old terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 4. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. Terminal Installation 1. Align the terminal and pull the wire from the back of the connector in order to seat the terminal. 2. If necessary, cut the new wire to proper length and splice with existing circuit. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves). 3. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply dielectric grease to the connector. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Micro .64) Delphi Connectors (Micro.64) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7851 Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro.64 connectors. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. The lever lock may be located on the top or sides of the wire dress cover. View of a typical Micro 64 connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7852 Depress the lock and pull the lever over and past the lock. View of the connector when released from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7853 View of another type of Micro 64 connector. Depress the locks that are located on both sides of the wiredress cover and pull the lever over and past the locks. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7854 View of the connector when released from the component. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the front of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool push down on one of the locking tabs and pull the cover up until the dress cover releases. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. 4. Once the front 2 locks are unlocked, lift the front of the dress cover and pull it forward. Note: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 5. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the small slot on the TPA and pushing down until the TPA releases. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7855 Note: Be careful not to angle or rock the J 38125-21 tool when inserting it into the connector or the tool may break. 6. Insert the J 38125-21 tool into the round canal between the terminals cavities at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Follow the steps below in order to repair Micro 64 connector terminals. The Micro 64 connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-64 (M jaw) was developed to crimp Micro 64 terminals. The J 38125-64 crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. The J 38125-64 crimping tool is also designed to crimp both the wire and the insulation at the same time. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro 64 terminals. Note: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gauge wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 1. Cut the wire as close to the damaged terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7856 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert terminal into the appropriate terminal holder until it hits bottom and stops. The correct terminal holder is determined by the wire size. Also ensure that the terminals wings are pointing towards the former on the tool and the release locator. 5. Insert the stripped cable into the terminal. Insulation should be visible on both sides of the terminal insulation wings. 6. Compress the handles until the ratchet automatically releases. 7. Place the terminal into the appropriate cavity and assemble the connector. Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7857 Terminal Removal Procedure There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W connectors. These connectors are very similar but use different terminals and have some minor physical differences also. The first connector design of the Micro-Pack 100W (1) has a white connector interface that holds the terminals. The second design of the Micro-Pack 100W (2) has a gray interface to hold the terminals. Also, the first design has terminal cavities that are further apart (3 mm centerline) and offset from the other row of terminal cavities in the connector. The second design has terminals cavities that are closer together (2.54 mm centerline) and aligned vertically. One other way to identify the second design is the thin strip of material that runs along the outside of the cavities. Note: There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W terminals which are very similar. Ensure that you have the correct terminal before crimping the new terminal to the wire. The first design connector uses the longer terminal (1) that has a raised area in front of the recess in the terminal. The second design connector uses the shorter terminal without the raised area. Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro-Pack 100W connectors. Some Micro-Pack 100W connector disassembly procedures will vary. Use this procedure as a guide. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7858 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Locate the nose piece locking tabs that are positioned on the side of the connector nose piece. The connector nose piece acts as a terminal positive assurance (TPA) and may be referred to as such. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to push in one of the locking tabs while gently pulling on the same side of the nose piece. 4. Repeat the procedure for the other locking tab and remove the nose piece. 5. Remove the wire dress cover. The following is a general procedure for wire dress cover removal. Use this procedure as a guide, some dress cover removal procedures may vary. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7859 6. Use fingers to squeeze the 2 locking legs of the cover. 7. Apply pressure and gently rock the cover until one locking leg is unseated. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7860 8. Continue to apply pressure and rock the cover until the second locking leg is unseated. Repeat procedure for the other side of the dress cover and remove the cover. 9. Use J 38125-12A to gently lift the terminal retaining tab while gently pulling the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. If the terminal is severely bent or damaged, it may be possible on some connectors to push the wire out of the front of the connector instead of pulling it through. This will prevent damage to the internal seals of the connector. Once the terminal is pushed out of the connector, cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible and pull the wire through the connector. Terminal Repair Procedure The Micro-Pack 100W connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool was developed to crimp Micro-Pack 100W terminals. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro-Pack 100 terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7861 1. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. Note: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gauge wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert the terminal into the crimp tool until the core wings are flush with the anvil on the crimp tool. Be sure that the wings are pointed toward the crimp tool former and release the spring locator. The locator will hold the terminal in place. Inspect the alignment of the terminal wings with the crimp tool former. If the terminal wings are wider than the crimp tool former, remove the terminal and bend the terminal wings in slightly. 5. Place stripped wire into terminal. 6. Crimp the new terminal to the wire. If a jam occurs, press the emergency release to open applicator. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7862 Terminal Replacement Procedure After the terminal is crimped to the wire perform the following procedure in order to replace Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the Terminal Removal Procedure. Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The following is the proper procedure for the repair of Weather Pack(R) Connectors. 1. Separate the connector halves (1). 2. Open the secondary lock. A secondary lock aids in terminal retention and is usually molded to the connector (1). 3. Grasp the wire and push the terminal to the forward most position. Hold the wire in this position. 4. Insert the Weather Pack(R) terminal removal tool J 38125-10A into the front (mating end) of the connector cavity until it rests on the cavity shoulder (1). 5. Gently pull on the wire to remove the terminal through the back of the connector (2). Note: Never use force to remove a terminal from a connector. 6. Inspect the terminal and connector for damage. Repair as necessary. Refer to Repairing Connector Terminals (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Repairing Connector Terminals). 7. Reform the lock tang (2) and reset terminal in connector body. 8. Close secondary locks and join connector halves. 9. Verify that circuit is complete and working satisfactorily. 10. Perform system check. Delphi Connectors (12-Way) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7863 Delphi Connectors (12-Way) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) and slide the lever lock away from the connector body. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs on the dress cover of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool release all of the locking tabs. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7864 4. Release the lower wire dress cover locking tab. 5. Release the upper wire dress cover locking tab. 6. Once the locks are unlocked, lift the dress cover off. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7865 Note: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 7. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the locking tabs on both sides of the TPA. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. 8. Remove the nose piece by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the locking tabs on both sides of the nose piece. Gently pry the nose piece out of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7866 9. Insert the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Delphi Connectors (Steering Gear) Delphi Connectors (Steering Gear) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7867 Removal Procedure 1. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the locking tab on the connector. 2. Push down the locking tab to release the connector. The small flat-bladed tool may need to be pushed down and angled back slightly to depress the locking tab. Pull on the connector body while releasing the locking tab to disconnect the connector. FCI Connectors (Lever Lock) FCI Connectors (Lever Lock) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7868 Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. 1. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. 2. The release tab is located on the top of the wiredress cover. 3. View of connector in released position. 4. Disconnect the connector from the component. 5. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the dress cover. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs and remove the dress cover. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7869 6. Use a small flat-blade tool to slide the terminal position assurance (TPA) up one notch on both ends of the connector. The TPA is located underneath the wire dress cover. For the larger terminals insert the J 38125-556 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. For the smaller terminals insert the J 38125-560 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7870 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. FCI (SIR) FCI Connectors (SIR) Removal Procedure Note: The orange CPA must be released first to disconnect or to connect the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7871 1. Lift the orange CPA vertically (avoid lifting on an angle to the connector) approximately 4 mm to release the connector. Use a small flat-bladed tool to help release the orange CPA. The orange CPA can also be released manually without any tools. 2. Grab the connector on both sides and lift the connector vertically to disconnect the connector. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7872 1. Lift the orange CPA vertically approximately 4 mm before installing the connector. Use a small flat-bladed tool to help release the orange CPA. The orange CPA can also be released manually without any tools. 2. Line up the connector key tabs with the initiator key slots. Grab the connector on both sides and push the connector down into the initiator connector sub assembly until fully seated. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7873 3. After the connector is fully seated, push down the orange CPA with your thumb. Push down until the orange CPA is touching the yellow cover on the connector. FEP Connectors (Steering Gear) FEP Connectors (Steering Gear) Removal Procedure 1. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the locking tab on the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7874 2. Push down the locking tab to release the connector. The small flat-bladed tool may need to be pushed down and angled back slightly to depress the locking tab. Pull on the connector body while releasing the locking tab to disconnect the connector. JST Connectors JST Connectors Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. While depressing the lock, remove the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7875 2. Locate the two indents of the terminal position assurance (TPA) located on the bottom of the connector body. Note: The TPA cannot be removed from the connector while there are terminals present in the connector body. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to very carefully raise the TPA on both sides of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7876 4. View of the TPA when removed from the connector body. 5. Use the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the left side of the terminal release cavity as shown in the graphic. Use the tool to move the terminal release to the right with a gentle prying motion. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Kostal Connectors (Glow Plug Control Module) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7877 Kostal Connectors (Glow Plug Control Module) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure View of typical connector. View of connector in released position. 1. Locate the assist lever at the back of the connector. Move the assist lever to the rear position. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7878 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove the dress cover. 4. Slide the dress cover forward and off of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7879 5. The terminal positive assurance (TPA) is located in the front and rear of the connector. Note: The front TPA cannot be removed from the connector. Only move it to the preset position. 6. Use a small flat-blade tool to move the front TPA to the preset position, outboard approximately 0.125 in. (3 mm). 7. Use a small flat-blade tool to completely remove the rear TPA from the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7880 8. Use the J 38125-24 or the J 38125-560 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 9. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Kostal Connectors (Transmission) Kostal Connectors (Transmission) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7881 1. While depressing the lock, twist and remove the connector from the component. 2. Locate the terminal position assurance (TPA). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7882 Note: The TPA cannot be removed from the connector while there are terminals present in the connector body. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to push the TPA until it bottoms out. 4. Use the J 38125-28 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal cavity as shown in the graphic. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 5. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Terminal Replacement Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7883 After the terminal is crimped to the wire, perform the following procedure in order to replace the terminal. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. Locate the terminal position assurance (TPA). 4. Use a small flat-blade tool to push the TPA until it bottoms out. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7884 5. Ensure the TPA is fully seated. The TPA should be centered and flush with the connector body when viewed. Molex Connectors Molex Connectors Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the top of the wire dress cover. Slide the CPA forward. 2. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7885 3. The lever should be in the full forward position. 4. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7886 5. Remove the dress cover by using a flat bladed tool to release the dress cover locking tabs and lift up on the dress cover. 6. Cut the tie wrap that holds the wires to the connector body. 7. Use a small flat-blade tool to pry one side of the nose piece up to the pre-stage position. When the nose piece is in the pre-staged position, the nose piece will be raised above the connector body the length of the step in the nose piece. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7887 8. Use a small flat-blade tool to pry the other side of the piece to the pre-stage position. If the nose piece is higher than the first step in the nose piece, gently push down on the nose piece until it meets with resistance from the connector body, you should feel the nose piece click into position. 9. Insert the J 38125-213 into the small terminal release hole on the nose piece and gently pull on the back of the wire. 10. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Refer to the terminal crimping procedure in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit. Terminal Replacement Procedure After the terminal is crimped to the wire, perform the following procedure in order to replace the terminal. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7888 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the connector disassembly procedure. Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the connector body and pull the CPA out. The CPA is on the wire harness side of connector. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Use a small flat-bladed tool to gently pry off the dress cover by inserting the tool under the cover opposite the harness side and prying up. 4. Remove the cover. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7889 5. Using a small flat-bladed tool, push on the side of the nose piece retainer while pushing the nose piece forward with your thumb. This will release the terminal position assurance (TPA). 6. Insert the J 38125-12A into the corresponding terminal release cavity. The release cavities are the 2 center rows of cavities on one half of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7890 7. Pressing the J 38125-12A tool in the release cavity of the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and crimper in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. Slide the lever lock away from the connector body. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs on the dress cover of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool release all of the locking tabs. 4. Once the locks are unlocked, lift the dress cover off. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7891 Note: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 5. Release the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the blue locking tabs on both ends of the connector. Gently slide the TPA up to the released position on both ends. 6. For the larger terminals insert the J 38125-13A tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. For the smaller terminals insert the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7892 View of the release tool being used for the larger terminals. View of the release tool being used for the larger terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7893 View of the release tool being used for the smaller terminals. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7894 Side view of connector. View of top of connector. 1. Locate the assist lever and lock on the top of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7895 2. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. 3. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7896 4. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the rear of the connector. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. 5. Once the locking tabs are unlocked, slide the inner connector out of the rear of the connector housing. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7897 6. Use the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by pressing on the tang. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Repairing Connector Terminals Repairing Connector Terminals Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Use the following repair procedures in order to repair the following: * Push to Seat terminals * Pull to Seat terminals Some terminals do not require all of the steps shown. Skip the steps that do not apply for your terminal repair. The J-38125 contains further information. 1. Cut off the terminal between the core and the insulation crimp. Minimize any wire loss. For cable seal terminals, remove the seal. 2. Apply the correct cable seal per gauge size of the wire, if used. Slide the seal back along the wire in order to enable insulation removal. 3. Remove the insulation. 4. For sealed terminals only, align the seal with the end of the cable insulation. 5. Position the strip in the terminal. For sealed terminals, position the strip and seal in the terminal. 6. Hand crimp the core wings. 7. Hand crimp the insulation wings. For sealed terminals, hand crimp the insulation wings around the seal and the cable. 8. Solder all of the hand crimp terminals excepting Micro-Pack 100.64 size. Soldering Micro-Pack 100 World terminals may damage the terminal. Sumitomo Connectors Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7898 Sumitomo Connectors Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7899 3. Remove the dress cover by using a flat-blade tool to release the connector locking tabs and pulling off the dress cover. 4. Relieve the tension on the nose piece retainers by inserting J 38125-12A into the single retainer slot on the end of the nose piece and gently prying out the locking tab. Repeat the process for both of the nose piece locking tabs on the opposite side of the nose piece. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7900 5. Once the nose piece retainers are relaxed, use the J 38125-552 to pull up the nose piece by hooking the tool under the nose piece and pulling up. The nose piece should raise slightly. 6. On the opposite side of the nose piece, use the J 38125-552 to pull up the nose piece by hooking the tool under the nose piece and pulling up. The nose piece should release completely. If the nose piece does not come off, repeat the procedure on the opposite side. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7901 7. The illustration above identifies the entry canal where the terminal release tool will be inserted, and the terminal cavity. * Terminal (1) * Entry Canal (2) 8. Insert the J 38125-553 tool into the entry canal and pry up on the terminal retainer. The terminal retainer is a small plastic piece on the top of the terminal. The terminal retainer must be held up while the terminal is pulled out of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7902 9. The illustration shows a cutaway view of the connector to aid the technician in releasing the terminal retainer. 10. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Refer to the terminal crimping procedure in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit. Terminal Replacement Procedure After the terminal is crimped to the wire, perform the following procedure in order to replace the terminal. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the connector disassembly procedure. Terminal Position Assurance Locks Terminal Position Assurance Locks The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7903 2. Insert the J 38125-11A tool into the cavity on the lower right hand face of the connector until the terminal release tang access panel slides over. 3. Ensure that the terminal release tang access panel is in the correct location to access the terminals. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7904 5. Insert the J 38125-11A into the terminal release tang access slot located behind the access panel of the connector and press down on the terminal while carefully pulling the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component by pressing down on the connector position assurance (CPA). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7905 2. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting the tool in the small recess on the side of the connector and pushing up until the TPA releases from the connector body. The TPA should raise just slightly. Do not try to remove the TPA. Note: The TPA on this connector cannot be removed unless the terminals are removed first. The TPA will come out of the connector body, but only slightly. When the TPA is slightly raised the terminals can be removed. Using excessive force to remove the TPA with the terminals still in the connector will damage the connector. 3. Repeat the process for the other side of the connector. 4. Ensure that the TPA is in the proper position to remove the terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7906 5. While pushing the terminal forward, insert the J 38125-24 in the release cavity above the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7907 2. Insert a small flat-blade tool in the slot below the front loaded terminal position assurance (TPA) and pry up. 3. Remove the TPA by pulling it out of the connector. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-553 on a slight upward angle into the cavity below the terminal to be removed. Ensure that the pointed on the end of the tool is facing the bottom of the terminal and it stays in contact with the terminal until it stops on the plastic terminal retainer. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7908 6. Gently pry the plastic terminal retainer down and carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7909 1. While depressing the lock, pull the two connector halves apart. Note: The TPA is fragile and may break if not done carefully. 2. Use a small flat-blade tool to very carefully push the terminal position assurance (TPA) towards the face of the connector on both sides of the connector. 3. View of the male half of the connector with female terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7910 4. View of the female half of the connector with male terminals. 5. Use the J 38125-215 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. View of the female half of the connector with male terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7911 7. View of the male half of the connector with female terminals. 8. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers A circuit breaker is a protective device that is designed to open the circuit when a current load is in excess of the rated breaker capacity. If there is a short or other type of overload condition in the circuit, the excessive current will open the circuit between the circuit breaker terminals. Two types of circuit breakers are used. Circuit Breaker - This type opens when excessive current passes through it for a period of time. It closes again after a few seconds, and if the cause of the high current is still present, it will open again. The circuit breaker will continue to cycle open and closed until the condition causing the high current is removed. Positive Temperature Coefficient (PTC) Circuit Breaker - This type greatly increases its resistance when excessive current passes through it. The excessive current heats the PTC device, as the device heats its resistance increases. Eventually the resistance gets so high that the circuit is effectively open. Unlike the ordinary circuit breaker the PTC unit will not reset until the circuit is opened, by removing the voltage from its terminals. Once the voltage is removed the circuit breaker will re-close within a second or 2. Circuit Protection - Fuses Circuit Protection - Fuses Special Tools EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM) For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7912 The fuse is the most common method of an automotive wiring circuit protection. Whenever there is an excessive amount of current flowing through a circuit the fusible element will melt and create an open or incomplete circuit. Fuses are a one time protection device and must be replaced each time the circuit is overloaded. To determine if a fuse is open, remove the suspected fuse and examine if the element in the fuse is broken (2). If not broken (1), also check for continuity using a Digital Multimeter (DMM) or a continuity tester. If the element is broken or continuity is suspect, replace the fuse with one of equal current rating. Circuit Protection - Fusible Links Circuit Protection - Fusible Links Special Tools EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM) For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Tools and Equipment). Fusible link is wire designed to melt and break continuity when excessive current is applied. It is often located between or near the battery and starter or electrical center. Use a continuity tester or a Digital Multimeter (DMM) at each end of the wire containing the fusible link in order to determine if it is broken. If broken, it must be replaced with fusible link of the same gauge size. Repairing a Fusible Link Note: Fusible links cut longer than 225 mm (approximately 9 in) will not provide sufficient overload protection. Flat Wire Repairs Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7913 Flat Wire Repairs The flat wire within the flex wiring harness is not serviceable. If an open or short exists within the flex wiring harness the complete harness must be replaced. GMLAN Wiring Repairs GMLAN Wiring Repairs Special Tools * EL-38125-10 - Splice Sleeve Crimping Tool * J 38125-5 - Ultra Torch Special Tool * DuraSeal splice sleeves * A wire stripping tool For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Tools and Equipment). The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: * A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. * A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The GM Local Area Network (GMLAN) System requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working on GMLAN connectors and terminals. GMLAN Repairs Note: When making a repair to any GMLAN network, the original wire length after the repair must be the same length as before the repair. If the network is a twisted pair, the twist must be maintained after the repair is completed. GMLAN has 2 types of networks, low speed and high speed. Low speed GMLAN has a single wire and works at slow speeds. High speed GMLAN has 2 wires in a twisted pair and works at higher speeds. For more information on GMLAN, refer to Data Link Communications Description and Operation ( See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Information Bus/Description and Operation). GMLAN Connector Terminal Repair Note: A terminated lead can be used to replace damaged connector terminals for both high speed and low speed GMLAN systems. When making a connector terminal repair on a GMLAN high speed system with twisted pair wires, do not untwist the wires more than necessary to make the repair. If the individual terminals are damaged on any GMLAN connection, use the appropriate connector repair procedure in order to repair the terminal. Refer to Connector Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Connector Repairs) for the appropriate connector repair procedure. GMLAN Wire Repair Note: Refer to Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Wiring Repairs) in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gauge size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and EL-38125-10 - tool. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the DuraSeal splice sleeves. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7914 Note: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: * Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. * Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. * Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert to regional wiring gauge size. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the EL-38125-10 - tool in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the splice sleeve crimp tool. The crimp tool has four nests, one for each color. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7915 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs Caution: Do not solder repairs under any circumstances as this could result in the air reference being obstructed. If the heated oxygen sensor pigtail wiring, connector, or terminal is damaged the entire oxygen sensor assembly must be replaced. Do not attempt to repair the wiring, connector, or terminals. In order for the sensor to function properly it must have a clean air reference. This clean air reference is obtained by way of the oxygen sensor signal and heater wires. Any attempt to repair the wires, connectors or terminals could result in the obstruction of the air reference and degrade oxygen sensor performance. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7916 The following guidelines should be used when servicing the heated oxygen sensor: * Do not apply contact cleaner or other materials to the sensor or vehicle harness connectors. These materials may get into the sensor, causing poor performance. Also, the sensor pigtail and harness wires must not be damaged in such a way that the wires inside are exposed. This could provide a path for foreign materials to enter the sensor and cause performance problems. * Neither the sensor nor vehicle lead wires should be bent sharply or kinked. Sharp bends, kinks, etc., could block the reference air path through the lead wire. * Do not remove or defeat the oxygen sensor ground wire (where applicable). Vehicles that utilize the ground wire sensor may rely on this ground as the only ground contact to the sensor. Removal of the ground wire will also cause poor engine performance. * To prevent damage due to water intrusion, be sure that the peripheral seal remains intact on the vehicle harness connector. High Temperature Wiring Repairs High Temperature Wiring Repairs Special Tools * EL-38125-10 - Splice Sleeve Crimping Tool * J 38125-5 - Ultra Torch * DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Tools and Equipment). High Temperature Wiring Wiring that is exposed to high temperatures, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time may use materials i.e. wires, connectors, and shielding that has a higher heat rating than typical wiring. When making a repair in a high temperature area observe the following: * Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature to replace any damaged wire. * Replace any heat shielding that is removed. * Cover any DuraSeal splice sleeves with SCT1 shrink tubing. * After making a wiring repair, ensure that the location of the wiring is not moved closer to the heat source. Identifying High Temperature Wiring Wiring that is exposed to high temperature, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time need special considerations when making wiring repairs. Areas that may be exposed to higher temperatures can be identified by heat resistant materials that are being used in those areas. These materials may include heat reflective tape, moon tape, and high temperature shrink tubing. Also conduit and other protective coverings may be used. Because conduit or similar coverings are used throughout the vehicle regardless of the temperature, it may be necessary for the technician to determine if an area is exposed to excessive heat before making a wiring repair. Obvious areas of consideration would be any area located near the exhaust manifolds, catalytic converter, and exhaust pipes. Items Required * DuraSeal splice sleeves to crimp and seal connections * High temperature SCT1 shrink tubing to protect the splice sleeves * Terminated leads or pigtails * The correct tools to remove the terminals from the connectors Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature of the same or larger gauge size as the original wire when repair damage wire. Also replace any reflective tape that you remove during the repair. High Temperature Wire Repair Note: Refer to Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Wiring Repairs) in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature rating of the same gauge size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the EL-38125-10 - tool and then encapsulate the splice sleeve using the high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7917 Note: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: * Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. * Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. * Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert to regional wiring gauge size. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Slide a section of high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing down the length of wire to be spliced. Ensure that the shrink tubing will not interfere with the splice procedure. 5. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 6. Use the EL-38125-10 - tool in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the splice sleeve crimp tool. The crimp tool has four nests, one for each color. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7918 7. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 8. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 9. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 10. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 11. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7919 12. Center the high temperature SCT1 shrink tube over the DuraSeal splice sleeve. 13. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the high temperature heat shrink tubing. 14. Gradually move the heat from the center to the open end of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. 15. Replace any reflective tape and clips that may have been remove during the repair. Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation If the wire insulation has been chafed, or broken, enough to show the conductive portion of the wire, and the wire is not damaged, determine the length of insulation that needs to be repaired. If the repair is less than 280 mm (11 in), cut the wire within the damaged area. Than slide the appropriate heat shrink tubing (listed below) over the wire, and repair the wire by splicing the wires together. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves). Once the wire is spliced together slide heat shrink tubing over the damaged area and apply heat to seal the repaired wire. If the wire is damaged, or the damaged area is larger than 280 mm (11 in), than replace the damaged wire by splicing in a new section of wire. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7920 SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs Special Tools * EL-38125-10 - Splice Sleeve Crimping Tool * J 38125-5 - Ultra Torch * DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Tools and Equipment). The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: * A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. * A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides the necessary low resistance contact integrity for these sensitive, low energy circuits. The Supplemental Inflatable Restraint (SIR) System/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working with the SIR/SRS, and the wiring components, such as connectors and terminals. SIR/SRS Connector Repair (Plastic Body and Terminal Metal Pin) Note: Do not use the terminals in the kit in order to replace damaged SIR/SRS system terminals. Use either an SIR/SRS pigtail or a terminated lead from the SIR Repair Kit Tray. The terminals in the SIR/SRS system are made with a special plating. This plating provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. Pigtail repair packs are available for SIR/SRS connectors with eight or less terminals. Only the connector body is available for connectors with more than eight terminals. Terminated leads can be used to replace damaged terminals when replacing the connector body. SIR/SRS Component Wire Pigtail Repair Note: Do not make wire, connector, or terminal repairs on components with wire pigtails. A wire pigtail is a wire or wires attached directly to the device, not by a connector. If a wiring pigtail is damaged, you must replace the entire component, with pigtail. The inflatable restraint steering wheel module coil is an example of a pigtail component. SIR/SRS Wire Repair Note: Refer to Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Wiring Repairs) in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7921 If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gauge size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and EL-38125-10 - tool. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the DuraSeal splice sleeves. Note: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: * Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. * Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. * Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert to regional wiring gauge size. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the EL-38125-10 - tool in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the splice sleeve crimp tool. The crimp tool has four nests, one for each color. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7922 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Connector Position Assurance (CPA) The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of a connector. CPAs are used in all SIR System connectors and also in some connectors of other systems. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals of a connection. Terminal Position Assurance (TPA) The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7923 Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Special Tools * EL-38125-10 - Splice Sleeve Crimping Tool * J 38125-5 - Ultra Torch * DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Tools and Equipment). Note: Use only DuraSeal splice sleeves. Other splice sleeves may not protect the splice from moisture or provide a good electrical connection. Use DuraSeal splice sleeves to form a one-to-one splice on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. Use DuraSeal splice sleeves where there is special requirements such as moisture sealing. Follow the instructions below in order to splice copper wire using DuraSeal splice sleeves. Note: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: * Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. * Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. * Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert to regional wiring gauge size. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7924 5. Use the EL-38125-10 - tool in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the splice sleeve crimp tool. The crimp tool has four nests, one for each color. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7925 * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Splicing Inline Harness Diodes Splicing Inline Harness Diodes Many vehicle electrical systems use a diode to isolate circuits and protect the components from voltage spikes. When installing a new diode use the following procedure. 1. Open the harness. * If the harness is taped, remove the tape. * To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing seam ripper (available from sewing supply stores) in order to cut open the harness. * If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the diode. 2. If the diode is taped to the harness, remove all of the tape. 3. Check and record the current flow direction and orientation of diode. 4. Remove the inoperative diode from the harness with a suitable soldering tool. Note: If the diode is located next to a connector terminal remove the terminal(s) from the connector to prevent damage from the soldering tool. 5. Carefully strip away a section of insulation next to the old soldered portion of the wire(s). Do not remove any more than is needed to attach the new diode. 6. Check current flow direction of the new diode, being sure to install the diode with correct bias. Reference the appropriate service manual wiring schematic to obtain the correct diode installation position. 7. Attach the new diode to the wire(s) using 60/40 rosin core solder. Before soldering attach some heat sinks (aluminum alligator clips) across the diode wire ends to protect the diode from excessive heat. Follow the manufacturer's instruction for the soldering equipment. 8. Reinstall terminal(s) into the connector body if previously removed. Note: To prevent shorts to ground and water intrusion, completely cover all exposed wire and diode attachment points with tape. 9. Tape the diode to the harness or connector using electrical tape. Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable Twisted/shielded cable is used in order to protect wiring from electrical noise. Two-conductor cable of this construction is used between the radio and the Delco-Bose(R) speaker/amplifier units and other applications where low level, sensitive signals must be carried. Follow the instructions below in order to repair the twisted/shielded cable. 1. Remove the outer jacket (1). Use care not to cut into the drain wire of the mylar tape. 2. Unwrap the tape. Do not remove the tape. Use the tape in order to rewrap the twisted conductors after the splice is made. 3. Prepare the splice. Untwist the conductors and follow the instructions for Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves). Staggering the splices by 65 mm (2.5 in) is recommended. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7926 Note: Apply the mylar tape with the aluminum side inward. This ensures good electrical contact with the drain wire. 4. Re-assemble the cable. * Rewrap the conductors with the mylar tape. If the mylar tape is damaged, use 3M product AL-36FR to replace the damaged mylar tape. * Use caution not to wrap the drain wire in the tape (1). * Follow the splicing instructions for copper wire and splice the drain wire. * Wrap the drain wire around the conductors and tape with electrical tape to replace the outer insulation. 5. Tape over the entire cable. Use a winding motion when you apply the tape. Wiring Repairs Wiring Repairs The Wiring Repairs section contains the following types of wiring repair information. Using these elements together will make wiring repair faster and easier: * Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections) * Flat Wire Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Flat Wire Repairs) * GMLAN Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/GMLAN Wiring Repairs) * High Temperature Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/High Temperature Wiring Repairs) * Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs) * Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves) * Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable) * Splicing Inline Harness Diodes (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Inline Harness Diodes) * SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs) US English/Metric Conversion US English/Metric Conversion Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7927 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7928 Basic Digital Multimeter Requirements Basic Digital Multimeter Requirements Digital Multimeter (DMM) Basic Requirements Service information is validated using digital multimeters that meet or exceed the following requirements. Using a multimeter that does not meet these basic requirements may give inaccurate readings which could lead to an incorrect diagnosis. Display and Settings 1. Four digits displayed 2. Voltage, amperage, resistance, frequency, diode test settings, and min-max function 3. Display positive and negative values Voltage 1. Have at least 10 Mohm input impedance 2. Test a DC voltage range of 0.1-1000 V. 3. Test an AC voltage range of 0.1-1000 V. Amperage 1. Test a DC amperage range of 0.1µA-10 A. 2. Test an AC amperage range of 0.1µA-10 A. Resistance Test a resistance range of 0.1 ohm-40 Mohm and displays infinite for a value greater than 40 Mohm (O.L. (Over-load)) Frequency Test for a frequency range of 0.5 HZ-199 K HZ Diode Test 1. Apply at least 1 mA when performing the diode bias test 2. Display the break over voltage drop (0-3 V) of a forward biased diode 3. Display infinite (O.L. (Over-load)) when a diode is reverse biased Min-Max Readings 1. Can update at a 1 ms sample rate 2. Saves and displays minimum and maximum values Testing Ground and Low Reference Circuits Testing Ground and Low Reference Circuits Because a test lamp can light with up to 200 ohm in a ground or low reference circuit they are not recommended to be used for this type of test. A low impedance test lamp can light and indicate the circuit is good when there is as much as 20-30 ohm present, while a high impedance test lamp can light with up to 200 ohm present in the circuit. This is why the Digital Multi-Meter (DMM) is used when validating a ground or low reference circuit continuity. When using the DMM there are many vehicle conditions that can affect the ground and low reference continuity testing. If these conditions are not met, a ground or low reference circuit test can fail on a good circuit. This may cause longer diagnosis time and incorrect component replacement. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7929 Any current flow through a ground or low reference circuit, while being tested, will skew the DMM continuity reading, or display a reading higher than when there is no current flowing. Performing a ground or low reference circuit continuity test, in reference to the vehicles battery negative terminal, will have the highest risk of failing a good ground or low reference circuit test than any other ground reference point. The best ground test points would be a control module housing (if the control modules housing is metal and grounded), door jamb striker (if attached to metal), under dash metal frame work, engine block, or body ground studs (other than where the negative battery cable is attached). A typical DMM ground or low reference circuit continuity reading can be as high as 100 ohm with the ignition ON, and drop to 15-25 ohm after the ignition is turned OFF. The reading will drop below 10 ohm after 30-40 seconds, then below 5 ohm after 60 seconds. Once the vehicle completely goes to sleep (generally 3-10 minutes) the reading will drop below 0.3 ohm. The following list of conditions may need to be met to ensure a valid continuity reading on a ground or low reference circuit: * Ignition OFF * Key out of the ignition switch (when not equipped with keyless entry and remote start) * Retained Accessory Power (RAP) OFF (open and close the driver door after ignition OFF) * Battery charger set at a 2 A or less charge rate * Scan tool not communicating with any vehicle control module (in some cases it may need to be disconnected from the DLC) * All entry doors closed * Headlamps OFF (auto headlamps disabled) * Any delay lighting OFF * HVAC after blow OFF * Any accessory that can work when the ignition is OFF * Wait up to 60 seconds (after all other listed conditions are met) Activating the DOOR LOCK function with a key fob can greatly reduce the time to achieve a valid ground or low reference continuity test result. Terminal Wiring Repair Terminal Wiring Repair Special Tools * EL-38125-10 - Splice Sleeve Crimp Tool * EL-38125-580 - Terminal Release Tool Kit * J-38125-5 - Ultra Torch * EL-35616 - Connector Test Adapter Kit For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Tools and Equipment). Note: All repairs near the engine manifold, turbo engine and all exhaust pipes should follow the High Temperature Wiring Repair procedures. 1. Find the appropriate connector end view within the connector end view section. The connector end view has the following information: * Diagnostic probe tool * Terminal release tool * Terminal/terminated lead part numbers 2. Determine if a terminal is damaged. Note: Not using the proper test kit probe may cause damage to the terminal(s) that are probed. * Locate the diagnostic probe tool from the connector end view. The connector end view describes the color and part number to help the technician find and use the correct tool. * Connect the probe tool to the Digital Multimeter. * Insert the probe tool into the cavity and follow the procedures from the Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter). 3. Disconnect the connector body to perform the repair. Note: Several procedures for specific connector bodies are called out in Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Wiring Repairs). Use the following repair procedures to repair the following terminals: Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7930 Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack))Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Push to Seat))Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Pull to Seat))Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W))Delphi Connectors (Micro.64) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Micro .64) )Delphi Connectors (12-Way) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (12-Way))Delphi Connectors (Steering Gear) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Steering Gear)) * The TPA and CPA should be removed before releasing the terminal for the connector body. * Look at the connector end view to locate the cavity of the damaged terminal and find the proper terminal release tool from the terminal release tool kit. Note: Using the incorrect terminal release tool can damage the connector body. * Insert the terminal release tool into the cavity. Note: Some terminals have a lever that must be disengaged before the terminal can be released. Gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Terminated Lead Repair Terminated Lead Repair Special Tools * EL-38125-10 - Splice Sleeve Crimp Tool * EL-38125-580 - Terminal Release Tool Kit * J-38125-5 - Ultra Torch * EL-35616 - Connector Test Adapter Kit For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Tools and Equipment). Note: All repairs near the engine manifold, turbo engine and all exhaust pipes should follow the High Temperature Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/High Temperature Wiring Repairs) procedures. Terminated leads are terminals that are crimped onto wires. The terminated lead can be used throughout the vehicle since it is designed for temperatures up to 150°C. The length of the wire is 450 mm. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7931 The DuraSeal splice sleeve has the following 2 critical features: * A special heat shrink tubing that environmentally seals the splice. The shrink tubing contains a sealing adhesive inside the shrink tubing. * A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp that provides the necessary contact integrity for sensitive low energy circuits. 1. Use the connector end view to identify the correct terminated lead. 2. The terminated lead package should include a DuraSeal splice sleeve. If not, use the chart to identify the correct part. 3. Open the harness by removing any tape: Use a sewing seam ripper, or a comparable tool, to cut open the harness, to avoid wire insulation damage. 4. Depending on how many terminals need repairs, cut the terminal and wire back at least 40 mm. Try to keep the harness wire length the same. If more than one terminated lead is required, stagger the lengths by 40 mm. This helps reduce the bundle size of the wire harness. 5. Use the EL-38125-10 - tool in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the splice sleeve crimp tool. The crimp tool has four nests, one for each color. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7932 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the J-38125-5 - ultra torch , apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7933 Auxiliary Power Outlet: Electrical Diagrams Cigar Lighter/Power Outlet Schematics Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 7934 Auxiliary Power Outlet: Description and Operation Power Outlets Description and Operation 12 Volt Power Outlet Receptacle Description and Operation The accessory power receptacle in the rear of the vehicle is supplied battery voltage at all times. The accessory power receptacles located in the center console and the instrument panel are supplied battery voltage when the ignition is on or in the accessory position. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Symptoms - Power Outlets Auxiliary Power Outlet: Testing and Inspection Symptoms - Power Outlets Symptoms - Power Outlets Visual/Physical Inspection * Inspect for aftermarket devices which can affect the operation of the power outlets. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Checking Aftermarket Accessories) * Inspect the accessible system components or the visible system components for obvious damage or for obvious conditions which can cause the symptom. Intermittent Electrical connections or wiring may be the cause of intermittent conditions. Refer to Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections) Symptom List Refer to Power Outlet Receptacle Malfunction (See: Power Outlet Receptacle Inoperative (120 VAC)) in order to diagnose the system. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Symptoms - Power Outlets > Page 7937 Auxiliary Power Outlet: Testing and Inspection Power Outlet Receptacle Inoperative (120 VAC) Power Outlet Receptacle Malfunction Diagnostic Instructions * Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle (See: Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle) prior to using this diagnostic procedure. * Review Strategy Based Diagnosis (See: Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Strategy Based Diagnosis) for an overview of the diagnostic approach. * Diagnostic Procedure Instructions (See: Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Diagnostic Procedure Instructions) provides an overview of each diagnostic category. Diagnostic Fault Information Circuit/System Description The accessory power receptacle located in rear of the vehicle is supplied B+ all the time. The accessory power receptacles located in the instrument panel and center console are supplied B+ when the ignition is on or in the accessory position. Reference Information Schematic Reference Cigar Lighter/Power Outlet Schematics (See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams) Connector End View Reference Component Connector End Views (See: Diagrams/Connector Views) Description and Operation Power Outlets Description and Operation (See: Description and Operation) Electrical Information Reference * Circuit Testing (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Circuit Testing) * Connector Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Connector Repairs) * Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections) * Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Wiring Repairs) Circuit/System Testing 1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the appropriate X80 accessory power receptacle. 2. Test for less than 5 ohm between the ground circuit terminal C and ground. ‹› If greater than the specified range, test the ground circuit for an open/high resistance. 3. Ignition ON, verify that a test lamp illuminate between the B+/ignition circuit terminal A and ground. ‹› If the test lamp does not illuminate, test the B+/ignition circuit for a short to ground or an open/high resistance. 4. If all circuits test normal, test or replace the X80 accessory power receptacle. Repair Instructions Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Symptoms - Power Outlets > Page 7938 Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification (See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures/Verification Tests and Procedures) after completing the diagnostic procedure. Accessory Power Receptacle Replacement (See: Service and Repair) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 7939 Auxiliary Power Outlet: Service and Repair Accessory Power Receptacle Replacement Special Tools J 42059 Cigar Lighter Socket Remover Removal Procedure 1. Remove the auxiliary power outlet fuse from the fuse block. 2. Remove the receptacle: 1. Look into the receptacle. There are two 3 mm (0.11 in) tab windows 12 mm (0.47 in) from the front of the receptacle. The J 42059 pushes the plastic latches from these tab windows and the receptacle can be pulled straight out. 2. Place one side of the "T" portion of the J 42059 into the tab window. The J 42059 will not fit straight into the receptacle. Angle the J 42059 slightly for insertion into the receptacle. 3. Insert the other side of the "T" into the opposite tab window. You must move the J 42059 handle toward horizontal to engage the other tab window. 4. Use the J 42059 to pull the receptacle straight out. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 7940 3. If J 42059 tool fails to release the lighter socket from the retainer, perform the following alternate method: 1. Insert a small grinding tool with a cutoff wheel into the socket. 2. Remove the plastic latches in the 3 mm (0.11 in) square windows. 3. Use the J 42059 as directed above to remove the socket. Installation Procedure 1. Route the connector through the retainer. Align the accessory power receptacle retainer to the slot in the opening. 2. Install the retainer by pressing into place fully seated. 3. Connect the electrical connector to the receptacle. 4. Align the tabs on the receptacle to the slots in the retainer. Install the accessory power receptacle by pressing into place until fully seated. 5. Install the accessory power receptacle fuse. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 7941 Auxiliary Power Outlet: Tools and Equipment Special Tools Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Electronic Noise Suppressor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Electronic Noise Suppressor: > 07-08-46-002D > Jul > 09 > Audio System - Noise When Using OnStar(R) Electronic Noise Suppressor: Customer Interest Audio System - Noise When Using OnStar(R) TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 07-08-46-002D Date: July 29, 2009 Subject: Audio Whine Noise from Radio Speakers When Using OnStar(R) (Install Noise Suppression Filter) Models: 2007-2010 GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (Including Saturn) 2007-2010 HUMMER H2, H3 2007-2009 Saab 9-7X Equipped with OnStar(R) (RPO UE1) Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the Warranty Information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 07-08-46-002C (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Condition Some customers may comment on an audio whine coming from the radio speakers when using the OnStar(R) system. The amplitude and frequency of the whine will change with an increase or decrease in engine speed. Cause This condition may be caused by electrical noise on the OnStar(R) Vehicle Communication Interface Module (VCIM) battery feed wire being passed to the microphone output pins at the radio. Correction Technicians are to install a noise suppression filter, P/N 1224205, into the OnStar(R) battery voltage circuit, a few centimeters (inches) from the VCIM. The filter package has three attached wires - a single yellow wire at one end with a yellow wire and a black wire at the other. Install the single yellow wire side into the battery voltage circuit towards the VCIM. Install the remaining single yellow wire into the battery voltage circuit toward the fuse and the black wire to ground. Important The noise suppression filter is polarity sensitive. The filter is designed to be most effective when the end with the capacitor ground is connected towards the source of the electrical noise. Install the filter in this polarity first. If the noise level is still not satisfactory, try disconnecting the capacitor ground. In some cases, if the first installation does not correct the noise, try reversing the filter polarity (removing the filter, turning it end for end and then reinstalling it) and grounding the capacitor lead. Parts Information Warranty Information (excluding Saab U.S. Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table above. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Electronic Noise Suppressor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Electronic Noise Suppressor: > 07-08-46-002D > Jul > 09 > Audio System - Noise When Using OnStar(R) > Page 7950 Warranty Information (Saab U.S. Models) Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Electronic Noise Suppressor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electronic Noise Suppressor: > 07-08-46-002D > Jul > 09 > Audio System - Noise When Using OnStar(R) Electronic Noise Suppressor: All Technical Service Bulletins Audio System - Noise When Using OnStar(R) TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 07-08-46-002D Date: July 29, 2009 Subject: Audio Whine Noise from Radio Speakers When Using OnStar(R) (Install Noise Suppression Filter) Models: 2007-2010 GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (Including Saturn) 2007-2010 HUMMER H2, H3 2007-2009 Saab 9-7X Equipped with OnStar(R) (RPO UE1) Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the Warranty Information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 07-08-46-002C (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Condition Some customers may comment on an audio whine coming from the radio speakers when using the OnStar(R) system. The amplitude and frequency of the whine will change with an increase or decrease in engine speed. Cause This condition may be caused by electrical noise on the OnStar(R) Vehicle Communication Interface Module (VCIM) battery feed wire being passed to the microphone output pins at the radio. Correction Technicians are to install a noise suppression filter, P/N 1224205, into the OnStar(R) battery voltage circuit, a few centimeters (inches) from the VCIM. The filter package has three attached wires - a single yellow wire at one end with a yellow wire and a black wire at the other. Install the single yellow wire side into the battery voltage circuit towards the VCIM. Install the remaining single yellow wire into the battery voltage circuit toward the fuse and the black wire to ground. Important The noise suppression filter is polarity sensitive. The filter is designed to be most effective when the end with the capacitor ground is connected towards the source of the electrical noise. Install the filter in this polarity first. If the noise level is still not satisfactory, try disconnecting the capacitor ground. In some cases, if the first installation does not correct the noise, try reversing the filter polarity (removing the filter, turning it end for end and then reinstalling it) and grounding the capacitor lead. Parts Information Warranty Information (excluding Saab U.S. Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table above. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Electronic Noise Suppressor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electronic Noise Suppressor: > 07-08-46-002D > Jul > 09 > Audio System - Noise When Using OnStar(R) > Page 7956 Warranty Information (Saab U.S. Models) Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Engine Compartment Fuse Block - Owners Manual Fuse: Locations Engine Compartment Fuse Block - Owners Manual ENGINE COMPARTMENT FUSE BLOCK Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Engine Compartment Fuse Block - Owners Manual > Page 7961 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Engine Compartment Fuse Block - Owners Manual > Page 7962 To remove the fuse block cover, squeeze the clips on the cover and lift it straight up. The vehicle may not be equipped with all of the fuses and relays shown. Notice: Spilling liquid on any electrical components on the vehicle may damage it. Always keep the covers on any electrical component. Engine Compartment Fuse Block J-Case Fuses ...................................................................................................................................... ......................................................................... Usage Fuse 1 .................................................................................................................................................. ............................................................. Cool Fan 1 Fuse 2 ................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................. Cool Fan 2 Fuse 3 ............................................................................................................................................... ................................................................ Rear Defog Fuse 4 ............................................................. .............................................................................................................................. Power Windows Right Fuse 5 ........................................................................................................................................ ...................................................... Memory Seat Module Fuse 6 ....................................................... .............................................................................................................................................. Power Seat - Left Fuse 7 ................................................................................................................................ ................................................ Instrument Panel Fuse Block 1 Fuse 8 ............................................... ................................................................................................................................. Instrument Panel Fuse Block 2 Fuse 9 ............................................................................................................................ .......................................................................................... Starter Fuse 10 ......................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. . Brake Booster Fuse 11 ...................................................................................................................... ............................................................................................ Sunroof Fuse 12 ..................................... ........................................................................................................................................... Antilock Brake System Pump Fuse 13 .............................................................................................................. ................................................................ Instrument Panel Fuse Block 3 Fuse 14 ............................. .............................................................................................................................................................. Power Windows - Left Fuse 15 ............................................................................................................ ................................................................. Antilock Brake System Module Mini Fuses ........................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................ Usage Fuse 16 ................................................................................................................................................ ................... Transmission Control Module Battery Fuse 17 ............................................................... .............................................................................................................................. Trailer Parking Light Fuse 18 ....................................................................................................................................... ...................................... Engine Control Module Battery Fuse 19 ....................................................... ................................................................................................................................................. Heated Mirror Fuse 20 ..................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................ Trailer Left Fuse 21 .................................................... ............................................................................................................................................... Lift Gate Module Fuse 22 ................................................................................................................................... .................................................................... Power Lumbar Fuse 23 .................................................. ........................................................................................................................................................ Trailer Right Fuse 24 ........................................................................................................................... .............................................................................. Canister Vent Fuse 25 .......................................... .............................................................................................................................................. Memory Mirror Module Fuse 26 ............................................................................................................................................................ Regulated Voltage Control Battery Sensor Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Engine Compartment Fuse Block - Owners Manual > Page 7963 Fuse 27 ................................................................................................................................................ ................................ Rear Accessory Power Outlet Fuse 28 .............................................................. ....................................................................................................................................................... Wiper Fuse 29 ..................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................ Rear Wiper Fuse 30 ................................................... ............................................................................................................................. Air Conditioning Compressor Fuse 31 ........................................................................................................................... ................................................................................... Rear Latch Fuse 32 ......................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ................ Horn Fuse 33 ...................................................................................................................... ............................................................ Right High-Beam Headlamp Fuse 34 ..................................... ............................................................................................................................................... Left High-Beam Headlamp Fuse 35 ........................................................................................................... ....................................................................................... Ignition Even Coil Fuse 36 ........................... .............................................................................................................................................................. .......... Ignition Odd Coil Fuse 37 ......................................................................................................... ....................................................................................... Windshield Washer Fuse 38 ........................ .............................................................................................................................................................. .............. Front Fog Lamps Fuse 39 .................................................................................................... ........................................................... Post Catalytic Converter Oxygen Sensor Fuse 40 .................. .............................................................................................................................................................. ......... Engine Control Module Fuse 41 ................................................................................................ ................................................................ Pre-Catalytic Converter Oxygen Sensor Fuse 42 .............. .............................................................................................................................................................. ... Transmission Control Module Fuse 43 ............................................................................................ ........................................................................................................................ Mirror Fuse 44 ............ .............................................................................................................................................................. . Chassis Control Module Ignition Fuse 45 .......................................................................................... ............................................................................................................................ Spare Fuse 46 ........ .............................................................................................................................................................. .......................... Rear Drive Module Fuse 47 ...................................................................................... ................................................................................................... Lift Gate Module Logic Fuse 48 ....... ............................................................................................................................................................. Instrument Panel Fuse Block Ignition Fuse 49 .................................................................................... ............................................................................................................ Heated Seat - Front Fuse 50 .. .............................................................................................................................................................. ......................... Chassis Control Module Fuse 51 .............................................................................. ........................................................................................................... Engine Control Module Fuse 52 ......................................................................................................................................................... ...................................... Rear Vision Camera Midi Fuse ............................................................................................................................................. ....................................................................... Usage Fuse 53 ................................................................................................................................................ ......................................... Electric Power Steering Micro Relays ........................................................................................................................................ ....................................................................... Usage Relay 54 .............................................................................................................................................. ........................................................ Rear Defogger Relay 55 ............................................................. .................................................................................................................................... Cooling Fan Low Relay 56 ....................................................................................................................................... ................................................. Head Lamp High Beam Relay 57 ...................................................... ....................................................................................................................................... Cooling Fan Control Relay 58 .................................................................................................................................. ........................................................ Wiper On/Off Control Relay 59 ................................................... ........................................................................................................................... Air Conditioning Compressor Relay 60 .......................................................................................................................... ............................................................................... Wiper Speed Relay 61 ......................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ...... Fog Lamp Relay 62 ...................................................................................................................... ............................................................................... Engine Control Relay 63 ...................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............... Starter Relay 64 ................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................... Run/Crank Mini Relays .......................................................................................................................................... ....................................................................... Usage Relay 65 .............................................................................................................................................. ................................................... Cooling Fan High Relay 66 .............................................................. ........................................................................................................................................ Brake Booster Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Engine Compartment Fuse Block - Owners Manual > Page 7964 Fuse: Locations Instrument Panel Fuse Block - Owners Manual INSTRUMENT PANEL FUSE BLOCK Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Engine Compartment Fuse Block - Owners Manual > Page 7965 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Engine Compartment Fuse Block - Owners Manual > Page 7966 The instrument panel fuse block is located on the passenger side panel of the center console. To access the fuses, open the fuse panel door from the passenger side by pulling it out. To reinstall the door, insert the tabs on the bottom of the door into the console first, then push the door back into its original location. The vehicle may not be equipped with all of the fuses and relays shown. Instrument Panel Fuse Block Mini Fuses ........................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................ Usage Fuse 1 .................................................................................................................................................. ............................................... Steering Wheel DM Fuse 2 ................................................................. ....................................................................................................................................................... Spare Fuse 3 ....................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................. Spare Fuse 4 ..................................................... ...................................................................................................................................... Body Control Module 1 Fuse 5 .................................................................................................................................. ........................................................................... Infotainment Fuse 6 ................................................. .......................................................................................................................................... Body Control Module 7 Fuse 7 ..................................................................................................................... ........................................................................ Noise Control Module Fuse 8 ..................................... ...................................................................................................................................................... Body Control Module 4 Fuse 9 ............................................................................................................ ........................................................................................................... Radio Fuse 10 ......................... .............................................................................................................................................................. .................... SEO Battery Fuse 11 ...................................................................................................... .............................................................. Ultrasonic Rear Parking Aid Module Fuse 12 ................................................................................................................................................. Heater, Ventilation and Air Conditioning Battery Fuse 13 ................................................................................ ........................................................................................................... Auxiliary Power Front Fuse 14 ................................................................................................................................................ Heater, Ventilation and Air Conditioning Ignition Fuse 15 ................................................................................ ................................................................................................................................... Display Fuse 16 .............................................................................................................................................................. ........................... Body Control Module 5 Fuse 17 .............................................................................. .............................................................................................................. Auxiliary Power Rear Fuse 18 ......................................................................................................................................................... ................. Instrument Panel Cluster Ignition Fuse 19 ........................................................................ ................................................................................................................................... PDI Module Fuse 20 ................................................................................................................................................ ......................................... Body Control Module 6 Fuse 21 ................................................................ ............................................................................................................ SEO Retained Accessory Power Fuse 22 .................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................... SDM Ignition Fuse 23 .................................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. .... Spare Fuse 24 ................................................................................................................................ ...................................................................................... Spare Fuse 25 .............................................. .............................................................................................................................................................. ...... PRNDL Fuse 26 ........................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................... Spare Fuse 27 ......................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............... Spare Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Engine Compartment Fuse Block - Owners Manual > Page 7967 Fuse 28 ................................................................................................................................................ ...................................................................... Spare Fuse 30 .............................................................. ........................................................................................................................... Body Control Module 3 Fuse 31 ............................................................................................................................................. .................................................................. Amplifier Fuse 32 .............................................................. ................................................................................................................ Discrete Logic Ignition Switch Fuse 33 .................................................................................................................................... ................................ Communications Integration Module Fuse 34 .................................................... ..................................................................................................................................... Body Control Module 2 Fuse 35 ................................................................................................................................ .......................................................................... SDM Battery Fuse 36 ............................................... ............................................................................................................................................. Data Link Connection Fuse 37 ............................................................................................................................ ............................................... Instrument Panel Cluster Battery Fuse 38 .............................................................................................................................................................. IOS Module (Passenger Sensing System) Fuse 39 ............................................................................ .......................................................................................................................................... Spare J-Case Fuses ...................................................................................................................................... ......................................................................... Usage Fuse 29 ................................................................................................................................................ ............................................... Front Blower Motor Fuse 40 ................................................................ ......................................................................................................................... Body Control Module 8 Relays .................................................................................................................................................. ........................................................................ Usage Relay 41 .............................................................................................................................................. ............................................................. LOG Relay Relay 42 .............................................................. ........................................................................................................... Retained Accessory Power Relay Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood Fuse: Application and ID Fuse Block - Underhood Electrical Center Identification Views X50A Fuse Block - Underhood, Label Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 7970 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 7971 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 7972 X50A Fuse Block - Underhood, Top View X50A Fuse Block - Underhood, Bottom View Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 7973 X50A Fuse Block - Underhood X1 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 7974 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 7975 X50A Fuse Block - Underhood X2 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 7976 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 7977 X50A Fuse Block - Underhood X3 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 7978 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 7979 X50A Fuse Block - Underhood X4 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 7980 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 7981 X50A Fuse Block - Underhood X5 X50A Fuse Block - Underhood X6 (LAF) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 7982 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 7983 Fuse: Application and ID Fuse Block - Instrument Panel Label Electrical Center Identification Views X51A Fuse Block - Instrument Panel Label (before A6284015) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 7984 X51A Fuse Block - Instrument Panel Label (A6284015 and after) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 7985 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 7986 X51A Fuse Block - Instrument Panel, Top View X51A Fuse Block - Instrument Panel, Bottom View Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 7987 X51A Fuse Block - Instrument Panel Wire Entry Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 7988 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 7989 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 7990 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Instrument Panel/Center Console Component Views Fuse Block: Locations Instrument Panel/Center Console Component Views Instrument Panel/Center Console Component Views Lower Right of the Instrument Panel Components 1 - K33 HVAC Control Module 2 - F105 Passenger Instrument Panel Air Bag 3 - X51A Fuse Block Instrument Panel Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Instrument Panel/Center Console Component Views > Page 7995 Fuse Block: Locations Front of Vehicle/Engine Compartment Component Views Front of Vehicle/Engine Compartment Component Views Engine Compartment Components (Chevrolet) 1 - B20 Brake Fluid Level Switch 2 - B19B Brake Booster Vacuum Sensor 3 - M75 Windshield Wiper Motor 4 - X50A Fuse Block - Underhood 5 - C1 Battery 6 - G24 Windshield Washer Pump 7 - B55 Hood Ajar Switch (BTV) 8 - P12B Horn - Low Note 9 - P12A Horn - High Note 10 - K17 Electronic Brake Control Module Engine Compartment Components (GMC) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Instrument Panel/Center Console Component Views > Page 7996 1 - B20 Brake Fluid Level Switch 2 - B19B Brake Booster Vacuum Sensor 3 - M75 Windshield Wiper Motor 4 - X50A Fuse Block - Underhood 5 - C1 Battery 6 - G24 Windshield Washer Pump 7 - P12B Horn - Low Note 8 - B55 Hood Ajar Switch (BTV) 9 - K17 Electronic Brake Control Module 10 - P12A Horn - High Note Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Fuse Block: Diagram Information and Instructions Electrical Schematic Symbols Electrical Schematic Symbols Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7999 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8000 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8001 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8002 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8003 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8004 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8005 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8006 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8007 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8008 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8009 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8010 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8011 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8012 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8013 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8014 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8015 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8016 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8017 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8018 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8019 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8020 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8021 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8022 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8023 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8024 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8025 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8026 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8027 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8028 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8029 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8030 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8031 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8032 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8033 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8034 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8035 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8036 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8037 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8038 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8039 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8040 General Electrical Diagnosis General Electrical Diagnosis Basic Knowledge Required Without a basic knowledge of electricity, it will be difficult to use the diagnostic procedures contained in the service manual. You should understand the basic theory of electricity, and know the meaning of voltage (V), current (A), and resistance (Ohms ). You should also be able to read and understand a wiring diagram, as well as understand what happens in a circuit with an open or a shorted wire. Vehicle Zoning Strategy Vehicle Zoning Strategy All grounds, in-line connectors, and splices have identifying numbers that correspond to where they are located in the vehicle. The following table explains the numbering system. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8041 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8042 Fuse Block: Diagnostic Aids Arrows and Symbols Arrows and Symbols This service manual uses various symbols in order to describe different service operations. 1 - Front of Vehicle 2 - View Detail 2 - View Detail 3 - Ambient Air Mixed with Another Gas or Indicate Temperature Change 4 - Motion or Direction 5 - View Angle 6 - Dimension (1:2) 7 Ambient/Clean Air Flow or Cool Air Flow 8 - Lubrication Point - Oil or Fluid 9 - Task Related 10 Sectioning (1:3) 11 - Gas Other Than Ambient Air or Hot Air Flow 12 - Lubrication Point - Grease or Jelly 13 - Multidirectional Arrow Decimal and Metric Equivalents Decimal and Metric Equivalents Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8043 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8044 Checking Aftermarket Accessories Checking Aftermarket Accessories Warning: Refer to SIR Warning (See: Restraint Systems/Service Precautions/SIR Warning). Caution: The OBD II symbol is used on the circuit diagrams in order to alert the technician that the circuit is essential for proper OBD II emission control circuit operation. Any circuit which fails and causes the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) to turn ON, or causes emissions-related component damage, is identified as an OBD II circuit. Do not connect aftermarket accessories into the following circuits: * SIR circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the SIR symbol. * OBD II circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the OBD II symbol. Always check for aftermarket accessories (non-OEM) as the first step in diagnosing electrical problems. If the vehicle is so equipped, disconnect the system to verify that these add-on accessories are not the cause of the problems. Possible causes of vehicle problems related to aftermarket accessories include: * Power feeds connected to points other than the battery * Antenna location * Transceiver wiring located too close to vehicle electronic modules or wiring * Poor shielding or poor connectors on antenna feed line * Check for recent service bulletins detailing installation guidelines for aftermarket accessories. Circuit Testing Circuit Testing The Circuit Testing section contains the following diagnostic testing information. Using this information along with the diagnostic procedures will identify the cause of the electrical malfunction. * Using Connector Test Adapters (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Using Connector Test Adapters) * Probing Electrical Connectors (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Probing Electrical Connectors) * Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8045 Procedures/Circuit Testing/Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter) * Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp) * Using Fused Jumper Wires (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Using Fused Jumper Wires) * Measuring Voltage (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Measuring Voltage) * Measuring Voltage Drop (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Measuring Voltage Drop) * Measuring Frequency (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Measuring Frequency) * Testing Ground and Low Reference Circuits (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Testing Ground and Low Reference Circuits) * Testing for Continuity (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Continuity) * Testing for Short to Ground (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Short to Ground) * Testing for a Short to Voltage (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for a Short to Voltage) * Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections) * Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions) * Testing for Electrical Intermittents (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Electrical Intermittents) * Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure) * Circuit Protection - Fuses (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Circuit Protection - Fuses) * Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers) * Circuit Protection - Fusible Links (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Circuit Protection - Fusible Links) Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp Special Tools EL-35616-200 - Test Light - Probe Kit For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Tools and Equipment). Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test Probe Caution). A test lamp can simply and quickly test a low impedance circuit for voltage. A Digital Multimeter (DMM) should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present if the impedance is low enough, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. In other words, if there is not enough current, the test lamp will not illuminate even though voltage is present. The EL-35616-200 - kit is Micro-Pack compatible and comprised of a 12-volt light bulb with an attached pair of leads. To properly operate this tool use the following procedures. When testing for voltage: 1. Attach one lead to ground. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is voltage at the point being tested. When testing for ground: 1. Attach one lead to battery positive voltage. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where ground should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is ground at the point being tested. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8046 Testing for a Short to Voltage Testing for a Short to Voltage Special Tools EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM) For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Tools and Equipment). Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test Probe Caution). The following procedure tests for a short to voltage in a circuit. 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Set the rotary dial of the Digital Multimeter (DMM) to the V (DC) position. 4. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. Turn ON the ignition and operate all accessories. 7. If the voltage measured is greater than 1 V, there is a short to voltage in the circuit. Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions Special Tools J-25070 - Heat Gun For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Tools and Equipment). Many intermittent open or shorted circuits are affected by harness/connector movement that is caused by vibration, engine torque, bumps/rough pavement, etc. In order to duplicate the customer's concern, it may be necessary to manipulate the wiring harness if the malfunction appears to be vibration related. Manipulation of a circuit can consist of a wide variety of actions, including: * Wiggling the harness * Disconnecting a connector and reconnecting * Stressing the mechanical connection of a connector * Pulling on the harness or wire in order to identify a separation/break inside the insulation * Relocating a harness or wires All these actions should be performed with some goal in mind. For instance, with a scan tool connected, wiggling the wires may uncover a faulty input to the control module. The snapshot option would be appropriate here. Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure). Another option is, with the component commanded ON and OFF by the scan tool, move related connectors and wiring and observe the component operation. With the engine running, move related connectors and wiring while monitoring engine operation. If harness or connector movement affects the data displayed, component/system operation, or engine operation, inspect and repair the harness/connections as necessary. You may need to load the vehicle in order to duplicate the concern. This may require the use of weights, floor jacks, jackstands, frame machines, etc. In these cases you are attempting to duplicate the concern by manipulating the suspension or frame. This method is useful in finding harnesses that are too short and their connectors pull apart enough to cause a poor connection. A DMM set to Peak Min/Max mode and connected to the suspect circuit while testing can yield desirable results. Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Electrical Intermittents). Certainly, using the senses of sight, smell, and hearing while manipulating the circuit can provide good results as well. There may be instances where circuit manipulation alone will not meet the required criteria for the fault condition to appear. In such cases it may be necessary to expose the suspect circuit to other conditions while manipulating the harness. Such conditions would include high moisture conditions, along with exceptionally high or low temperatures. The following discusses how to expose the circuit to these kinds of conditions. Salt Water Spray Some compounds possess the ability to conduct electricity when dissolved in water such as ordinary salt. By mixing table salt with water in sufficient Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8047 quantities, you can enhance the conductive properties of water so that any circuit which may be sensitive to moisture will more readily fail when liberally sprayed with this mixture. Mixing 0.35L (12 oz) of water with approximately 1 tablespoon of salt will yield a salt solution of 5 percent. Fill a normal spray bottle with this mixture. This mixture is sufficient to enhance the water's own conductivity. This may cause the circuit to fail more easily when sprayed. Once the mixture is completed, spray the suspect area liberally with the solution. Then, while monitoring either a scan tool or DMM, manipulate the harness as discussed previously. High Temperature Conditions If the complaint tends to be heat related, you can simulate the condition using the J-25070 - heat gun. Using the heat gun, you can heat up the suspected area or component. Manipulate the harnesses under high temperature conditions while monitoring the scan tool or DMM to locate the fault condition. The high temperature condition may be achieved simply by test driving the vehicle at normal operating temperature. If a heat gun is unavailable, consider this option to enhance your diagnosis. This option does not allow for the same control, however. Low Temperature Conditions Depending on the nature of the fault condition, placing a fan in front of the vehicle while the vehicle is in the shade can have the desired effect. If this is unsuccessful, use local cooling treatments such as ice or a venturi type nozzle (one that provides hot or cold air). This type of tool is capable of producing air stream temperatures down to -18°C (0°F) from one end and +71°C (160°F) from the other. This is ideally suited for localized cooling needs. Once the vehicle, component, or harness has been sufficiently cooled, manipulate the harness or components in an effort to duplicate the concern. Duplicating Failure Conditions * If none of the previous tests are successful, attempt to duplicate and/or capture the failure conditions. * Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, where applicable, contains the conditions that were present when the DTC set. 1. Review and record Freeze Frame/Failure Records data. 2. Clear the DTCs using the scan tool. 3. Turn the key to OFF and wait 15 seconds. 4. Operate the vehicle under the same conditions that were noted in Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, as closely as possible. The vehicle must also be operating within the Conditions for Running the DTC. Refer to Conditions for Running the DTC in the supporting text if a DTC is being diagnosed. 5. Monitor DTC Status for the DTC being tested. The scan tool will indicate Ran, when the enabling conditions have been satisfied long enough for the DTC to run. The scan tool will also indicate whether the DTC passed or failed. * An alternate method is to drive the vehicle with the DMM connected to a suspected circuit. An abnormal reading on the DMM when the concern occurs, may help you locate the concern. Measuring Frequency Measuring Frequency Special Tools EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM) For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Tools and Equipment). Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test Probe Caution). The following procedure determines the frequency of a signal. Note: Connecting the Digital Multimeter (DMM) to the circuit before pressing the Hz button will allow the DMM to autorange to an appropriate range. 1. Apply power to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (AC) position. 3. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8048 5. Press the Hz button on the DMM. 6. The DMM will display the frequency measured. Measuring Voltage Measuring Voltage Special Tools EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM) For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Tools and Equipment). Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test Probe Caution). The following procedure measures the voltage at a selected point in a circuit. 1. Disconnect the electrical harness connector for the circuit being tested, if necessary. 2. Enable the circuit and/or system being tested. Use the following methods: * Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. * Turn ON the engine. * Turn ON the circuit and/or system with a scan tool in Output Controls. * Turn ON the switch for the circuit and/or system being tested. 3. Select the V (AC) or V (DC) position on the Digital Multimeter (DMM). 4. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the point of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. The DMM displays the voltage measured at that point. Measuring Voltage Drop Measuring Voltage Drop Special Tools EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM) For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Tools and Equipment). Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test Probe Caution). The following procedure determines the difference in voltage potential between 2 points. 1. Set the rotary dial of the Digital Multimeter (DMM) to the V (DC) position. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8049 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to one point of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to the other point of the circuit. 4. Operate the circuit. 5. The DMM displays the difference in voltage between the 2 points. Probing Electrical Connectors Probing Electrical Connectors Note: Always be sure to reinstall the connector position assurance (CPA) and terminal position assurance (TPA) when reconnecting connectors or replacing terminals. Front probe Disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the mating side (front) of the connector. Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test Probe Caution). Note: When probing female 0.64 terminals, it is important to use the correct adapter. There have been some revisions to the test adapter for 0.64 terminals. The proper adapter for 0.64 terminals is the EL-35616-64B which has a gold terminal and a black wire between the base and tip. Failure to use the proper test adapter may result in damage to the terminal being tested and improper diagnosis. Note: The proper adapter for probing the terminals for fuses, relays, or diodes in an electrical center is EL-35616-35. Using any other tool or adapter may damage the terminal being tested. Refer to the following table as a guide in selecting the correct test adapter for front probing connectors: Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8050 Backprobe Note: * Backprobe connector terminals only when specifically required in diagnostic procedures. * Do not backprobe a sealed (Weather Pack(R)) connector, less than a 280 series Metri-Pack connector, a Micro-Pack connector, or a flat wire (dock and lock) connector. * Backprobing can be a source of damage to connector terminals. Use care in order to avoid deforming the terminal, either by forcing the test probe too far into the cavity or by using too large of a test probe. * After backprobing any connector, inspect for terminal damage. If terminal damage is suspected, test for proper terminal contact. Do not disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the harness side (back) of the connector. Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure Using Snapshots in Global Diagnostic System (GDS) Overview Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8051 A snapshot is a recording of what a control module on the vehicle was receiving for information while the snapshot is being made. A snapshot may be used to analyze the data during the time a vehicle condition is current. This allows you to concentrate on making the condition occur, rather than trying to view all the data in anticipation of the fault. To record a snapshot in GDS, select, Record Snapshot, from the options at the top right portion of any of the various pages that allow snapshots to be taken (e.g. Data Display, Control Functions, etc.). When you are finished recording, select, Stop Snapshot recording. The snapshot will now be available for replay. Snapshot Replay The Snapshot Replay function allows reviews of previously recorded vehicle snapshot data. This information can be used in analysis of vehicle problems and detection of trigger error conditions. The graph function can be used to compare parameters to see if a component is functioning properly. Recorded snapshots can be selected for viewing by the following three methods: * Selecting a snapshot file from the Vehicle Home Page and clicking on the Review selection. * Double clicking on the selected snapshot from the Vehicle Home Page. * Entering the Tools selection from the Menu selection and selecting Snapshot replay. Next, open the Snapshot Manager. Double click on the snapshot file you wish to view or click on the Load Snapshot selection and select a snapshot file. Regardless of selection method, a File Loaded pop-up window will be displayed from the Snapshot Replay screen. Select OK from the pop-up window. Snapshot Play Functions There are several snapshot play functions that are used to replay recorded snapshots * The Play function is used to play the snapshot forward by clicking on this selection. A marker will move across the screen when this selection is used. All selections in this area turn grey when they are active. * The Pause function is used to pause play of the snapshot. When this selection is clicked a second time the snapshot will start playing where it left off. * The Stop function is used to stop playing the snapshot. The snapshot will start from the beginning, if Play is selected after using the Stop function. Time Control Time control is used to control the snapshot replay. This function allows selection of a specific time frame, display of different views, and control of display speed. The following functions can be selected directly under Time Control. * The Bookmark selection allows you to add a specific comment in the current display and return to this point in the future. When this option is selected, a pop-up window is displayed. Enter a bookmark name and select OK. * The Note Pad can be selected to add comments to the snapshot replay file at the current point of time. When this option is selected, a pop-up window is displayed. Enter a comment for the snapshot file and select OK. * The Load Snapshot (blue folder) opens a snapshot file and makes it ready for further analysis. This function is also available by clicking on an available snapshot file from the Snapshot Manager. * The Down Arrow displays all Time Control options when selected. Individual options can also be selected by clicking on the item you want. * The Snapshot Display Speed can be controlled by selecting this option. Slow speeds of 1/8X, 1/4X, and 1/2X can be selected. The real time speed can also be selected at 1. Faster speeds of 2X, 4X, and 8X can also be obtained by using this selection. View Selections Each View Selection provides a different way of displaying vehicle data for analysis. The following functions can be selected under Available Views: Note: The parameter name will be shown in the original language used for capture if no translation is available for the name. * Parameter List View - Displays incoming information from the snapshot file. The current value of the parameters is displayed on the screen. * Log View - Contains all the information from the snapshot file. All parameter values are listed in the order they were recorded. Specific parameters can be added or removed from a watchlist by clicking on the appropriate item. * State View - Shows the values of all parameters in a specific time frame. These values can be used for comparison with the trigger view. * Trigger View - Displays all system and user defined triggers. This function can be used when there is a combination of factors involved in a diagnostic problem. When a Trigger condition is met a caution triangle will be displayed on the screen. Triggers: * Load Triggers - Allows you to load a file containing trigger definitions. * Save Triggers - Allows you to save the trigger to your computer's hard drive. * Remove Trigger - Allows you to remove the current trigger. It will no longer be present. * Edit Trigger - Displays a pop-up window where you can modify the limits and parameters contained within a trigger. * Adds Trigger - Displays a pop-up window to configure a trigger. * DTC View - After the Play function is selected and this option is selected this function opens the list of recorded DTCs. * Line Graph View - Displays data that can be visualized against the time-axis. From this view, specific parameters can be selected for graphing by Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8052 checking the box under Selected. At the bottom of the graph there are four functions Zoom In (increase size), Zoom Out (decrease size), Bookmarks, and Pause Scrolling. Each of these functions can be accessed by clicking on them. Testing for Continuity Testing for Continuity Special Tools EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM) For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Tools and Equipment). Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test Probe Caution). The following procedures verify good continuity in a circuit. With a Digital Multimeter (DMM) 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the Ohms position. 2. Disconnect the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 3. Disconnect the load. 4. Press the MIN MAX button on the DMM. 5. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 6. Connect the other lead of the DMM to the other end of the circuit. 7. If the DMM displays low or no resistance, the circuit has good continuity. With a Test Lamp Note: Only use the test lamp procedure on low impedance power and ground circuits. 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect one lead of the test lamp to one end of the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 5. Connect the other end of the circuit to ground. 6. If the test lamp illuminates (full intensity), then the circuit has good continuity. Testing for Electrical Intermittents Testing for Electrical Intermittents Special Tools EL-39200 Digital Multimeter For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Tools and Equipment). Perform the following procedures while wiggling the harness from side to side. Continue this at convenient points (about 6 inches apart) while watching the test equipment. * Testing for Short to Ground (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Short to Ground) * Testing for Continuity (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Continuity) * Testing for a Short to Voltage (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for a Short to Voltage) If the fault is not identified, perform the procedure below using the MIN MAX feature on the EL-39200 DMM. This feature allows you to manipulate the circuit without having to watch the EL-39200. The EL-39200 will generate an audible tone when a change is detected. Note: The EL-39200 must be used in order to perform the following procedure since the EL-39200 can monitor current, resistance or voltage while recording the minimum (MIN), and maximum (MAX) values measured. 1. Connect the EL-39200 to both sides of a suspected connector (still connected), or from one end of a suspected circuit to the other. Refer to Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8053 Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter) for information on connecting the EL-39200 to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the EL-39200 to the V (AC) or V (DC) position. 3. Press the range button of the EL-39200 in order to select the desired voltage range. 4. Press the MIN MAX button of the EL-39200. The EL-39200 displays 100 ms RECORD and emits an audible tone (beep). Note: The 100 ms RECORD mode is the length of time an input must stay at a new value in order to record the full change. 5. Simulate the condition that is potentially causing the intermittent connection, either by wiggling the connections or the wiring, test driving, or performing other operations. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions). 6. Listen for the audible Min Max Alert which indicates that a new minimum or maximum value has been recorded. 7. Press the MIN MAX button once in order to display the MAX value and note the value. 8. Press the MIN MAX button again in order to display the MIN value and note the value. 9. Determine the difference between the MIN and MAX values. * If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is 1 V or greater an intermittent open or high resistance condition exists. Repair the condition as necessary. * If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is less than 1 V, an intermittent open or high resistance condition does not exist. Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections Special Tools EL-35616 Terminal Test Probe Kit For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Tools and Equipment). When the condition is not currently present, but is indicated in DTC history, the cause may be intermittent. An intermittent may also be the cause when there is a customer complaint, but the symptom cannot be duplicated. Refer to the Symptom Table of the system that is suspect of causing the condition before trying to locate an intermittent condition. Most intermittent conditions are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. Inspect for the following items: * Wiring broken inside the insulation * Poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector * Poor terminal to wire connection-Some conditions which fall under this description are poor crimps, poor solder joints, crimping over the wire insulation rather than the wire itself, and corrosion in the wire to terminal contact area, etc. * Pierced or damaged insulation can allow moisture to enter the wiring causing corrosion. The conductor can corrode inside the insulation, with little visible evidence. Look for swollen and stiff sections of wire in the suspect circuits. * Wiring which has been pinched, cut, or its insulation rubbed through may cause an intermittent open or short as the bare area touches other wiring or parts of the vehicle. * Wiring that comes in contact with hot or exhaust components * Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions) in order to duplicate the conditions required, in order to verify the customer concern. * Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Electrical Intermittents) for test procedures to detect intermittent open, high resistance, short to ground, and short to voltage conditions. * Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure) for advanced intermittent diagnosis and Vehicle Data Recorder operation. Testing for Terminal Fretting Some intermittent conditions can be caused by wire terminal fretting corrosion. Fretting corrosion is a build-up of insulating, oxidized wear debris that can form when there is a small motion between electrical contacts. The oxidized wear debris can pile up enough at the electrical contact spots that the electrical resistance across the connection increases. Movement between the contacting surfaces as small as 10 to 100 microns can cause fretting. To put this in perspective, a sheet of paper is about 100 microns thick, so fretting motion is small and hard to see. Vibration and thermal expansion/contraction are the main sources that create fretting motion. Since vehicles vibrate and can experience large temperature swings, they are a good source for fretting motion. Tin, copper, nickel, and iron surfaces are all susceptible to fretting corrosion. Fretting corrosion can be difficult to see but it looks like small, dark smudges on the terminals contact surface. To correct a fretting condition disconnect the suspect connector and add Nyogel lubricant 760G (dielectric grease) to both sides of the connector Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8054 terminals. Then reconnect the connector and wipe away any excess lubricant. This will correct the additional terminal contact resistance due to the terminal fretting corrosion. Testing for Proper Terminal Contact It is important to test terminal contact at the component and any inline connectors before replacing a suspect component. Mating terminals must be inspected to ensure good terminal contact. A poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector may be the result of contamination or deformation. Contamination may be caused by the connector halves being improperly connected. A missing or damaged connector seal, damage to the connector itself, or exposing the terminals to moisture and dirt can also cause contamination. Contamination, usually in the underhood or underbody connectors, leads to terminal corrosion, causing an open circuit or intermittently open circuit. Deformation is caused by probing the mating side of a connector terminal without the proper adapter. Always use the EL-35616 when probing connectors. Other causes of terminal deformation are improperly joining the connector halves, or repeatedly separating and joining the connector halves. Deformation, usually to the female terminal contact tang, can result in poor terminal contact causing an open or intermittently open circuit. Testing for Proper Terminal Contact in Bussed Electrical Centers It is very important to use the correct test adapter when testing for proper terminal contact of fuses and relays in a bussed electrical center. Use EL-35616-35 to test for proper terminal contact. Failure to use EL-35616-35 can result in improper diagnosis of the bussed electrical center. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact: 1. Separate the connector halves. 2. Visually inspect the connector halves for contamination. Contamination may result in a white or green build-up within the connector body or between terminals. This causes high terminal resistance, intermittent contact, or an open circuit. An underhood or underbody connector that shows signs of contamination should be replaced in its entirety: terminals, seals, and connector body. 3. Using an equivalent male terminal / terminated lead, verify that the retention force is significantly different between a known good terminal and the suspect terminal. Replace the female terminal in question. Flat Wire (Dock and Lock) Connectors There are no serviceable parts for flat wire (dock and lock) connectors on the harness side or the component side. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact: 1. Remove the component in question. 2. Visually inspect each side of the connector for signs of contamination. Avoid touching either side of the connector as oil from your skin may be a source of contamination as well. 3. Visually inspect the terminal bearing surfaces of the flat wire circuits for splits, cracks, or other imperfections that could cause poor terminal contact. Visually inspect the component side connector to ensure that all of the terminals are uniform and free of damage or deformation. 4. Insert the appropriate adapter from the on the flat wire harness connector in order to test the circuit in question. Control Module/Component Voltage and Grounds Poor voltage or ground connections can cause widely varying symptoms. * Test all control module voltage supply circuits. Many vehicles have multiple circuits supplying voltage to a control module. Other components in the system may have separate voltage supply circuits that may also need to be tested. Inspect connections at the module/component connectors, fuses, and any intermediate connections between the voltage source and the module/component. A test lamp or a DMM may indicate that voltage is present, but neither tests the ability of the circuit to carry sufficient current. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. Refer to Circuit Testing (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Circuit Testing) and Power Distribution Schematics (See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Power Distribution Schematics). * Test all control module ground and system ground circuits. The control module may have multiple ground circuits. Other components in the system may have separate grounds that may also need to be tested. Inspect grounds for clean and tight connections at the grounding point. Inspect the connections at the component and in splice packs, where applicable. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. Refer to Circuit Testing (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Circuit Testing) and Ground Distribution Schematics (See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Ground Distribution Schematics). Temperature Sensitivity * An intermittent condition may occur when a component/connection reaches normal operating temperature. The condition may occur only when the component/connection is cold, or only when the component/connection is hot. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8055 * Freeze Frame, Failure Records, Snapshot, or Vehicle Data Recorder data may help with this type of intermittent condition, where applicable. * If the intermittent is related to heat, review the data for a relationship with the following: - High ambient temperatures - Underhood/engine generated heat - Circuit generated heat due to a poor connection, or high electrical load - Higher than normal load conditions, towing, etc. * If the intermittent is related to cold, review the data for the following: - Low ambient temperatures-In extremely low temperatures, ice may form in a connection or component. Inspect for water intrusion. - The condition only occurs on a cold start. - The condition goes away when the vehicle warms up. * Information from the customer may help to determine if the trouble follows a pattern that is temperature related. * If temperature is suspected of causing an intermittent fault condition, attempt to duplicate the condition. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions) in order to duplicate the conditions required. Electromagnetic Interference and Electrical Noise Some electrical components/circuits are sensitive to electromagnetic interference or other types of electrical noise. Inspect for the following conditions: * A misrouted harness that is too close to high voltage/high current devices such as secondary ignition components, motors, generator etc.-These components may induce electrical noise on a circuit that could interfere with normal circuit operation. * Electrical system interference caused by a malfunctioning relay, or a control module driven solenoid or switch-These conditions can cause a sharp electrical surge. Normally, the condition will occur when the malfunctioning component is operating. * Improper installation of non-factory or aftermarket add on accessories such as lights, 2-way radios, amplifiers, electric motors, remote starters, alarm systems, cell phones, etc.-These accessories may lead to interference while in use, but do not fail when the accessories are not in use. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Checking Aftermarket Accessories). * Test for an open diode across the A/C compressor clutch and for other open diodes. Some relays may contain a clamping diode. * The generator may be allowing AC noise into the electrical system. Incorrect Control Module * There are only a few situations where reprogramming a control module is appropriate: - A new service control module is installed. - A control module from another vehicle is installed. - Revised software/calibration files have been released for this vehicle. Note: DO NOT re-program the control module with the SAME software/calibration files that are already present in the control module. This is not an effective repair for any type of concern. * Verify that the control module contains the correct software/calibration. If incorrect programming is found, reprogram the control module with the most current software/calibration. Refer to Control Module References (See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning) for replacement, setup, and programming. Testing for Short to Ground Testing for Short to Ground Special Tools * EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM) * EL 35616-200 - Test Light-Probe Kit For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Tools and Equipment). Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test Probe Caution). The following procedures test for a short to ground in a circuit. With a Digital Multimeter (DMM) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8056 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the Ohms position. 4. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the other lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. If the DMM does NOT display infinite resistance (OL), there is a short to ground in the circuit. With a Test Lamp 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect one lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to one end of the circuit to be tested. 5. If the test lamp illuminates, there is a short to ground in the circuit. Fuse Powering Several Loads 1. Review the system schematic and locate the fuse that is open. 2. Open the first connector or switch leading from the fuse to each load. 3. Connect a DMM across the fuse terminals (be sure that the fuse is powered). * When the DMM displays voltage the short is in the wiring leading to the first connector or switch. * If the DMM does not display voltage refer to the next step. 4. Close each connector or switch until the DMM displays voltage in order to find which circuit is shorted. Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter Special Tools EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM) For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Tools and Equipment). Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test Probe Caution). Digital Multimeter (DMM) Basic Requirements Service information is validated using digital multimeters that meet or exceed the following requirements. Using a multimeter that does not meet these basic requirements may give inaccurate readings which could lead to an incorrect diagnosis. Display and Settings 1. Four digits displayed 2. Voltage, amperage, resistance, frequency, diode test settings, and min-max function 3. Display positive and negative values Voltage 1. Have at least 10 Mohm input impedance 2. Test a DC voltage range of 0.1-1000 V. 3. Test an AC voltage range of 0.1-1000 V. Amperage 1. Test a DC amperage range of 0.1µA-10 A. 2. Test an AC amperage range of 0.1µA-10 A. Resistance Test a resistance range of 0.1 ohm-40 Mohm and displays infinite for a value greater than 40 Mohm (O.L. (Over-load)) Frequency Test for a frequency range of 0.5 HZ-199 K HZ Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8057 Diode Test 1. Apply at least 1 mA when performing the diode bias test 2. Display the break over voltage drop (0-3 V) of a forward biased diode 3. Display infinite (O.L. (Over-load)) when a diode is reverse biased Min-Max Readings 1. Can update at a 1 ms sample rate 2. Saves and displays minimum and maximum values Note: Circuits which include any solid state control modules, such as the engine control module (ECM), should only be tested with a 10 MOhms or higher impedance digital multimeter such as the EL-39200. The EL-39200 instruction manual is a good source of information and should be read thoroughly upon receipt of the DMM as well as kept on hand for future reference. A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present if the impedance is low enough, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. In other words, if there is not enough current, the test lamp will not illuminate even though voltage is present. The ohmmeter function on a DMM shows how much resistance exists between 2 points along a circuit. Low resistance in a circuit means good continuity. Note: Disconnect the power feed from the suspect circuit when measuring resistance with a DMM. This prevents incorrect readings. DMMs apply such a small voltage to measure resistance that the presence of voltages can upset a resistance reading. Diodes and solid state components in a circuit can cause a DMM to display a false reading. To find out if a component is affecting a measurement take a reading once, then reverse the leads and take a second reading. If the readings differ the solid state component is affecting the measurement. Following are examples of the various methods of connecting the DMM to the circuit to be tested: * Probe both ends of the connector and either hold the leads in place while manipulating the connector or tape the leads to the harness for continuous monitoring while you perform other operations or test driving. Refer to Probing Electrical Connectors (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Probing Electrical Connectors). * Disconnect the harness at both ends of the suspected circuit where it connects either to a component or to other harnesses. * If the system that is being diagnosed has a specified pinout or breakout box, it may be used in order to simplify connecting the DMM to the circuit or for testing multiple circuits quickly. Using Connector Test Adapters Using Connector Test Adapters Special Tools EL 35616 - Terminal Test Probe Kit For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Tools and Equipment). Caution: Do not insert test equipment probes (DMM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the EL-38125-580 GM Approved Terminal Release Tool Kit in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the EL-38125-580 GM Approved Terminal Release Tool Kit , ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the EL-38125-580 GM Approved Terminal Release Tool Kit label on the inside of the EL-38125-580 GM Approved Terminal Release Tool Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Using Fused Jumper Wires Using Fused Jumper Wires Special Tools J 36169-A Fused Jumper Wire Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8058 Note: A fused jumper may not protect solid state components from being damaged. The J 36169-A includes small clamp connectors that provide adaptation to most connectors without damage. This fused jumper wire is supplied with a 20-A fuse which may not be suitable for some circuits. Do not use a fuse with a higher rating than the fuse that protects the circuit being tested. AFL/EPC Connectors AFL/EPC Connectors Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. 1. For connectors with a bolt in the dress cover, turn the bolt counterclockwise to remove the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8059 2. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the top of the wire dress cover. Slide the CPA forward. 3. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8060 View showing depressing of the lever lock release tab. View of connector in released position. 4. Disconnect the connector from the component. 5. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the dress cover. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs and remove the dress cover. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8061 6. Release the rear lower half of the wiredress cover. 7. Release the tabs that are holding the wiredress cover to the connector body. 8. Remove the nose piece by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the slots on both ends of the connector body. Gently pry the nose piece out of the connector. J 38125-216 can also be used to remove the nose piece. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8062 9. Use the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by lifting the terminal retaining tabs on the inside of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Bosch Connectors (BSK) Bosch Connectors (BSK) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8063 Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 3. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 4. Insert the J 38125-561 tool into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 5. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Bosch Connectors (ECM) Bosch Connectors (ECM) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8064 1. Locate the assist lever on the top of the connector. Move the assist lever to the forward position. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8065 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the connector. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the locking tabs and remove the dress cover. 4. The terminal positive assurance (TPA) is located in the front of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8066 5. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove TPA from the connector. 6. Use the J 38125-213 or the J 38125-556 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8067 Note: Ensure that the dress cover and connector body are both in the released position before reassembling. Failure to do so may cause damage to the connector and component. Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Bosch Connectors (0.64) Bosch Connectors (0.64) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While pressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock until the lever is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Pull the rubber boot that covers the wires back to expose the end of the connector dress cover. 4. Place the connector locking lever in the center of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8068 5. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs that are on the wire end of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover and connector body and pry up. 6. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs located on the opposite side of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover at the connector end and pry up. 7. Remove the dress cover. 8. Cut the tie wrap on the wire bundle. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8069 9. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting a small flat-bladed tool into the small slot in the end of the slider and pushing on the TPA until it comes out of the connector. When the TPA exits the opposite side of the connector, gasp the TPA and pull it completely out of the connector. 10. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 11. Insert the J 38125-560 into the 2 triangular cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 12. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Terminal Replacement Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8070 1. Prior to installation the terminal must be aligned so the (1) coding lugs align with the (2) coding grooves on the connector. 2. Once the terminal is aligned, slide the terminal into the cavity until the retainer has engaged in the cavity of the connector. 3. Slide the TPA in the connector body and seat it using a small flat bladed tool. The TPA is seated when it is flush with the contact housing. 4. Secure the wires to the connector body using a tie wrap and replace the dress cover and grommet. Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Pull out the slider on the connector position assurance (CPA) until it is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8071 5. Insert the J 38125-557 into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Connector Position Assurance Locks Connector Position Assurance Locks The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of the connector. CPAs are used in various connectors throughout the vehicle. CPAs are also used in all SIR system electrical connectors. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals, of the connector. Connector Repairs Connector Repairs Connector Repairs contains a list of all connector repairs. The connector repairs are listed by the connector manufacturer and then by connector type. If the technician cannot identify the manufacturer of the connector, refer to Identifying Connectors below. Knowing the connector manufacturer will assist in finding the correct connector repair from the following list: * Connector Position Assurance Locks (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Connector Position Assurance Locks) * Terminal Position Assurance Locks (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Terminal Position Assurance Locks) * AFL/EPC Connectors (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/AFL/EPC Connectors) * Bosch Connectors (BSK) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Bosch Connectors (BSK))Bosch Connectors (0.64) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Bosch Connectors (0.64))Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT))Bosch Connectors (ECM) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Bosch Connectors (ECM)) * Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack))Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Push to Seat))Delphi Connectors Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8072 (Pull To Seat) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Pull to Seat))Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W))Delphi Connectors (Micro.64) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Micro .64))Delphi Connectors (12-Way) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (12-Way))Delphi Connectors (Steering Gear) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Steering Gear)) * FCI Connectors (Lever Lock) (See: General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/FCI Connectors (Lever Lock))FCI Connectors (SIR) (See: General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/FCI (SIR)) * FEP Connectors (Steering Gear) (See: General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/FEP Connectors (Steering Gear)) * JST Connectors (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/JST Connectors) * Kostal Connectors (Glow Plug Control Module) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Kostal Connectors (Glow Plug Control Module))Kostal Connectors (Transmission) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Kostal Connectors (Transmission)) * Molex Connectors (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Molex Connectors) * Sumitomo Connectors (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Sumitomo Connectors) * Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way))Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor))Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap))Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way))Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module)) * Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Yazaki Connectors (2-Way))Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Yazaki Connectors (16-Way)) * Repairing Connector Terminals (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Repairing Connector Terminals) Connector Anatomy 1 - Connector Positive Assurance (CPA) 2 - Assist Lever 3 - Wiredress Cover 4 - Seal Strain/Relief Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8073 5 - Slide Left Hand 6 - Slide Right Hand 7 - Terminal Positive Assurance (TPA) 8 - Terminal Positive Assurance (TPA) 9 - Connector Seal 10 - Connector Housing 11 - Inner Connector Identifying Connectors Knowing the connector manufacturer is helpful when trying to locating the correct connector repair procedure. There are many different connector designs used on GM vehicles and it is sometimes difficult to identify the connector manufacturer. The information in this document should help with the identification of connector manufactures. The following connector manufacturers make most of the connectors found in GM vehicles: * AFL/EPC (Alcoa Fujikura Ltd./Engineered Plastics Components) * Bosch * Delphi * FCI (Framatome Connectors International) * JAE (Japan Aviation Electronics) * JST (Japan Solderless Terminals) * Kostel * Molex * Sumitomo * Tyco/AMP * Yazaki Identifying the manufacturer of a connector is often difficult. When trying to determine the manufacturer of a connector, look for specific identifying marks that are unique to that connector supplier. Most of these identify marks are hard to find or see. Check the connector carefully and refer to the information below for pictures and descriptions of connector identification markings. * Most of AFLs connectors have EPC on their connector body. Some of the smaller connectors will not have any markings on them. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8074 * In some cases Bosch will actually be printed on the connector. If Bosch does not appear on the connector, look for the Bosch logo. The Bosch logo is a circle with a blunted arrow inside. This logo can appear anywhere on the connector and is often very small. * In some cases Delphi will actually be printed on the connector. If Delphi is not printed on the connector, look for PED. In both cases there is no specific orientation for Delphi or PED and they can appear anywhere on the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8075 * FCI connectors may have the FCI logo on their connectors. The logo is the letters FCI with an "A" above it. * JAE connector have JAE in small letters on their connectors. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8076 * JST connectors have JST in small letters on their connectors, similar to that above. The location of the logo will vary with the connector size and style. * Kostel has an "LK" with a circle around it. These connector are usually used as a transmissions connection. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8077 * Most Molex connectors will have the Molex logo on the dresscover of the connector. In some cases the connectors may have MX followed by another letter. The third letter indicates where the connector was made. A connector with MXD is a Molex connector made in Detroit. Sumitomo has a unique symbol on their connector and possibly a part number. The symbol is similar to that of a diamond lying on its side, similar to that shown. The logo could appear anywhere but the most common place is at the wire side of the housing. * Tyco/AMP has many different and unique connector designs. Some may or may not have identifiable marks on them. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8078 * Yazaki has a wedge or arrow shape, similar to that shown. Delphi Connectors (Push to Seat) Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Follow the steps below in order to repair push to seat connectors. 1. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device, the connector position assurance (CPA) device, and/or the secondary lock. 2. Separate the connector halves (1). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8079 3. Use the proper pick or removal tool (1) in order to release the terminal. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 4. Gently pull the cable and the terminal (2) out of the back of the connector. 5. Re-form the locking device if you are going to reuse the terminal (1). 6. To repair the terminal, refer to Terminal Repair. Terminal Repair 1. Slip the cable seal away from the terminal. 2. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 3. Slip a new cable seal onto the wire. 4. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 5. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 6. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. 7. Slide the cable seal toward the terminal. 8. Crimp the cable seal and the insulation. 9. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply grease to the connector. Reinstalling Terminal 1. In order to reuse a terminal or lead assembly, refer to Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Wiring Repairs). 2. Ensure that the cable seal is kept on the terminal side of the splice. 3. Insert the lead from the back until it catches. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Terminated Lead Repair 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Find the appropriate terminated lead. 3. Use the appropriate splice sleeves depending on the gauge size. 4. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves). Delphi Connectors (Pull to Seat) Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) Special Tools Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8080 J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal If the terminal is visibly damaged or is suspected of having a faulty connection, the terminal should be replaced. Follow the steps below in order to repair pull-to-seat connectors: 1. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) device and/or the secondary lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component or separate the connectors for in-line connectors. 3. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device. 4. Insert the proper pick or removal tool into the front of the connector body. Note: On connectors with more than one terminal the service loop may not be large enough to remove the terminal and crimp on a new one. If the terminal wire does not have a large enough service loop for removal, cut the wire 5 cm (2 in) behind the connector before removal. 5. Grasp the wire at the back of the connector body and gently push the terminal out the front of the connector body. Terminal Repair 1. If the wire needed to be cut in order to remove the terminal, gently push a small length of the same size wire through the back of the connector cavity until there is enough wire exposed in order to crimp on a new terminal. If the wire was not cut, cut the existing wire as close to the old terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 4. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. Terminal Installation 1. Align the terminal and pull the wire from the back of the connector in order to seat the terminal. 2. If necessary, cut the new wire to proper length and splice with existing circuit. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves). 3. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply dielectric grease to the connector. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Micro .64) Delphi Connectors (Micro.64) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8081 Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro.64 connectors. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. The lever lock may be located on the top or sides of the wire dress cover. View of a typical Micro 64 connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8082 Depress the lock and pull the lever over and past the lock. View of the connector when released from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8083 View of another type of Micro 64 connector. Depress the locks that are located on both sides of the wiredress cover and pull the lever over and past the locks. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8084 View of the connector when released from the component. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the front of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool push down on one of the locking tabs and pull the cover up until the dress cover releases. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. 4. Once the front 2 locks are unlocked, lift the front of the dress cover and pull it forward. Note: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 5. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the small slot on the TPA and pushing down until the TPA releases. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8085 Note: Be careful not to angle or rock the J 38125-21 tool when inserting it into the connector or the tool may break. 6. Insert the J 38125-21 tool into the round canal between the terminals cavities at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Follow the steps below in order to repair Micro 64 connector terminals. The Micro 64 connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-64 (M jaw) was developed to crimp Micro 64 terminals. The J 38125-64 crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. The J 38125-64 crimping tool is also designed to crimp both the wire and the insulation at the same time. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro 64 terminals. Note: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gauge wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 1. Cut the wire as close to the damaged terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8086 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert terminal into the appropriate terminal holder until it hits bottom and stops. The correct terminal holder is determined by the wire size. Also ensure that the terminals wings are pointing towards the former on the tool and the release locator. 5. Insert the stripped cable into the terminal. Insulation should be visible on both sides of the terminal insulation wings. 6. Compress the handles until the ratchet automatically releases. 7. Place the terminal into the appropriate cavity and assemble the connector. Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8087 Terminal Removal Procedure There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W connectors. These connectors are very similar but use different terminals and have some minor physical differences also. The first connector design of the Micro-Pack 100W (1) has a white connector interface that holds the terminals. The second design of the Micro-Pack 100W (2) has a gray interface to hold the terminals. Also, the first design has terminal cavities that are further apart (3 mm centerline) and offset from the other row of terminal cavities in the connector. The second design has terminals cavities that are closer together (2.54 mm centerline) and aligned vertically. One other way to identify the second design is the thin strip of material that runs along the outside of the cavities. Note: There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W terminals which are very similar. Ensure that you have the correct terminal before crimping the new terminal to the wire. The first design connector uses the longer terminal (1) that has a raised area in front of the recess in the terminal. The second design connector uses the shorter terminal without the raised area. Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro-Pack 100W connectors. Some Micro-Pack 100W connector disassembly procedures will vary. Use this procedure as a guide. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8088 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Locate the nose piece locking tabs that are positioned on the side of the connector nose piece. The connector nose piece acts as a terminal positive assurance (TPA) and may be referred to as such. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to push in one of the locking tabs while gently pulling on the same side of the nose piece. 4. Repeat the procedure for the other locking tab and remove the nose piece. 5. Remove the wire dress cover. The following is a general procedure for wire dress cover removal. Use this procedure as a guide, some dress cover removal procedures may vary. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8089 6. Use fingers to squeeze the 2 locking legs of the cover. 7. Apply pressure and gently rock the cover until one locking leg is unseated. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8090 8. Continue to apply pressure and rock the cover until the second locking leg is unseated. Repeat procedure for the other side of the dress cover and remove the cover. 9. Use J 38125-12A to gently lift the terminal retaining tab while gently pulling the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. If the terminal is severely bent or damaged, it may be possible on some connectors to push the wire out of the front of the connector instead of pulling it through. This will prevent damage to the internal seals of the connector. Once the terminal is pushed out of the connector, cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible and pull the wire through the connector. Terminal Repair Procedure The Micro-Pack 100W connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool was developed to crimp Micro-Pack 100W terminals. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro-Pack 100 terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8091 1. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. Note: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gauge wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert the terminal into the crimp tool until the core wings are flush with the anvil on the crimp tool. Be sure that the wings are pointed toward the crimp tool former and release the spring locator. The locator will hold the terminal in place. Inspect the alignment of the terminal wings with the crimp tool former. If the terminal wings are wider than the crimp tool former, remove the terminal and bend the terminal wings in slightly. 5. Place stripped wire into terminal. 6. Crimp the new terminal to the wire. If a jam occurs, press the emergency release to open applicator. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8092 Terminal Replacement Procedure After the terminal is crimped to the wire perform the following procedure in order to replace Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the Terminal Removal Procedure. Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The following is the proper procedure for the repair of Weather Pack(R) Connectors. 1. Separate the connector halves (1). 2. Open the secondary lock. A secondary lock aids in terminal retention and is usually molded to the connector (1). 3. Grasp the wire and push the terminal to the forward most position. Hold the wire in this position. 4. Insert the Weather Pack(R) terminal removal tool J 38125-10A into the front (mating end) of the connector cavity until it rests on the cavity shoulder (1). 5. Gently pull on the wire to remove the terminal through the back of the connector (2). Note: Never use force to remove a terminal from a connector. 6. Inspect the terminal and connector for damage. Repair as necessary. Refer to Repairing Connector Terminals (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Repairing Connector Terminals). 7. Reform the lock tang (2) and reset terminal in connector body. 8. Close secondary locks and join connector halves. 9. Verify that circuit is complete and working satisfactorily. 10. Perform system check. Delphi Connectors (12-Way) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8093 Delphi Connectors (12-Way) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) and slide the lever lock away from the connector body. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs on the dress cover of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool release all of the locking tabs. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8094 4. Release the lower wire dress cover locking tab. 5. Release the upper wire dress cover locking tab. 6. Once the locks are unlocked, lift the dress cover off. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8095 Note: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 7. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the locking tabs on both sides of the TPA. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. 8. Remove the nose piece by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the locking tabs on both sides of the nose piece. Gently pry the nose piece out of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8096 9. Insert the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Delphi Connectors (Steering Gear) Delphi Connectors (Steering Gear) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8097 Removal Procedure 1. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the locking tab on the connector. 2. Push down the locking tab to release the connector. The small flat-bladed tool may need to be pushed down and angled back slightly to depress the locking tab. Pull on the connector body while releasing the locking tab to disconnect the connector. FCI Connectors (Lever Lock) FCI Connectors (Lever Lock) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8098 Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. 1. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. 2. The release tab is located on the top of the wiredress cover. 3. View of connector in released position. 4. Disconnect the connector from the component. 5. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the dress cover. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs and remove the dress cover. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8099 6. Use a small flat-blade tool to slide the terminal position assurance (TPA) up one notch on both ends of the connector. The TPA is located underneath the wire dress cover. For the larger terminals insert the J 38125-556 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. For the smaller terminals insert the J 38125-560 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8100 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. FCI (SIR) FCI Connectors (SIR) Removal Procedure Note: The orange CPA must be released first to disconnect or to connect the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8101 1. Lift the orange CPA vertically (avoid lifting on an angle to the connector) approximately 4 mm to release the connector. Use a small flat-bladed tool to help release the orange CPA. The orange CPA can also be released manually without any tools. 2. Grab the connector on both sides and lift the connector vertically to disconnect the connector. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8102 1. Lift the orange CPA vertically approximately 4 mm before installing the connector. Use a small flat-bladed tool to help release the orange CPA. The orange CPA can also be released manually without any tools. 2. Line up the connector key tabs with the initiator key slots. Grab the connector on both sides and push the connector down into the initiator connector sub assembly until fully seated. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8103 3. After the connector is fully seated, push down the orange CPA with your thumb. Push down until the orange CPA is touching the yellow cover on the connector. FEP Connectors (Steering Gear) FEP Connectors (Steering Gear) Removal Procedure 1. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the locking tab on the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8104 2. Push down the locking tab to release the connector. The small flat-bladed tool may need to be pushed down and angled back slightly to depress the locking tab. Pull on the connector body while releasing the locking tab to disconnect the connector. JST Connectors JST Connectors Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. While depressing the lock, remove the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8105 2. Locate the two indents of the terminal position assurance (TPA) located on the bottom of the connector body. Note: The TPA cannot be removed from the connector while there are terminals present in the connector body. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to very carefully raise the TPA on both sides of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8106 4. View of the TPA when removed from the connector body. 5. Use the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the left side of the terminal release cavity as shown in the graphic. Use the tool to move the terminal release to the right with a gentle prying motion. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Kostal Connectors (Glow Plug Control Module) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8107 Kostal Connectors (Glow Plug Control Module) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure View of typical connector. View of connector in released position. 1. Locate the assist lever at the back of the connector. Move the assist lever to the rear position. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8108 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove the dress cover. 4. Slide the dress cover forward and off of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8109 5. The terminal positive assurance (TPA) is located in the front and rear of the connector. Note: The front TPA cannot be removed from the connector. Only move it to the preset position. 6. Use a small flat-blade tool to move the front TPA to the preset position, outboard approximately 0.125 in. (3 mm). 7. Use a small flat-blade tool to completely remove the rear TPA from the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8110 8. Use the J 38125-24 or the J 38125-560 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 9. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Kostal Connectors (Transmission) Kostal Connectors (Transmission) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8111 1. While depressing the lock, twist and remove the connector from the component. 2. Locate the terminal position assurance (TPA). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8112 Note: The TPA cannot be removed from the connector while there are terminals present in the connector body. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to push the TPA until it bottoms out. 4. Use the J 38125-28 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal cavity as shown in the graphic. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 5. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Terminal Replacement Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8113 After the terminal is crimped to the wire, perform the following procedure in order to replace the terminal. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. Locate the terminal position assurance (TPA). 4. Use a small flat-blade tool to push the TPA until it bottoms out. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8114 5. Ensure the TPA is fully seated. The TPA should be centered and flush with the connector body when viewed. Molex Connectors Molex Connectors Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the top of the wire dress cover. Slide the CPA forward. 2. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8115 3. The lever should be in the full forward position. 4. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8116 5. Remove the dress cover by using a flat bladed tool to release the dress cover locking tabs and lift up on the dress cover. 6. Cut the tie wrap that holds the wires to the connector body. 7. Use a small flat-blade tool to pry one side of the nose piece up to the pre-stage position. When the nose piece is in the pre-staged position, the nose piece will be raised above the connector body the length of the step in the nose piece. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8117 8. Use a small flat-blade tool to pry the other side of the piece to the pre-stage position. If the nose piece is higher than the first step in the nose piece, gently push down on the nose piece until it meets with resistance from the connector body, you should feel the nose piece click into position. 9. Insert the J 38125-213 into the small terminal release hole on the nose piece and gently pull on the back of the wire. 10. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Refer to the terminal crimping procedure in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit. Terminal Replacement Procedure After the terminal is crimped to the wire, perform the following procedure in order to replace the terminal. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8118 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the connector disassembly procedure. Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the connector body and pull the CPA out. The CPA is on the wire harness side of connector. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Use a small flat-bladed tool to gently pry off the dress cover by inserting the tool under the cover opposite the harness side and prying up. 4. Remove the cover. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8119 5. Using a small flat-bladed tool, push on the side of the nose piece retainer while pushing the nose piece forward with your thumb. This will release the terminal position assurance (TPA). 6. Insert the J 38125-12A into the corresponding terminal release cavity. The release cavities are the 2 center rows of cavities on one half of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8120 7. Pressing the J 38125-12A tool in the release cavity of the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and crimper in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. Slide the lever lock away from the connector body. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs on the dress cover of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool release all of the locking tabs. 4. Once the locks are unlocked, lift the dress cover off. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8121 Note: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 5. Release the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the blue locking tabs on both ends of the connector. Gently slide the TPA up to the released position on both ends. 6. For the larger terminals insert the J 38125-13A tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. For the smaller terminals insert the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8122 View of the release tool being used for the larger terminals. View of the release tool being used for the larger terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8123 View of the release tool being used for the smaller terminals. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8124 Side view of connector. View of top of connector. 1. Locate the assist lever and lock on the top of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8125 2. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. 3. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8126 4. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the rear of the connector. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. 5. Once the locking tabs are unlocked, slide the inner connector out of the rear of the connector housing. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8127 6. Use the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by pressing on the tang. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Repairing Connector Terminals Repairing Connector Terminals Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Use the following repair procedures in order to repair the following: * Push to Seat terminals * Pull to Seat terminals Some terminals do not require all of the steps shown. Skip the steps that do not apply for your terminal repair. The J-38125 contains further information. 1. Cut off the terminal between the core and the insulation crimp. Minimize any wire loss. For cable seal terminals, remove the seal. 2. Apply the correct cable seal per gauge size of the wire, if used. Slide the seal back along the wire in order to enable insulation removal. 3. Remove the insulation. 4. For sealed terminals only, align the seal with the end of the cable insulation. 5. Position the strip in the terminal. For sealed terminals, position the strip and seal in the terminal. 6. Hand crimp the core wings. 7. Hand crimp the insulation wings. For sealed terminals, hand crimp the insulation wings around the seal and the cable. 8. Solder all of the hand crimp terminals excepting Micro-Pack 100.64 size. Soldering Micro-Pack 100 World terminals may damage the terminal. Sumitomo Connectors Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8128 Sumitomo Connectors Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8129 3. Remove the dress cover by using a flat-blade tool to release the connector locking tabs and pulling off the dress cover. 4. Relieve the tension on the nose piece retainers by inserting J 38125-12A into the single retainer slot on the end of the nose piece and gently prying out the locking tab. Repeat the process for both of the nose piece locking tabs on the opposite side of the nose piece. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8130 5. Once the nose piece retainers are relaxed, use the J 38125-552 to pull up the nose piece by hooking the tool under the nose piece and pulling up. The nose piece should raise slightly. 6. On the opposite side of the nose piece, use the J 38125-552 to pull up the nose piece by hooking the tool under the nose piece and pulling up. The nose piece should release completely. If the nose piece does not come off, repeat the procedure on the opposite side. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8131 7. The illustration above identifies the entry canal where the terminal release tool will be inserted, and the terminal cavity. * Terminal (1) * Entry Canal (2) 8. Insert the J 38125-553 tool into the entry canal and pry up on the terminal retainer. The terminal retainer is a small plastic piece on the top of the terminal. The terminal retainer must be held up while the terminal is pulled out of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8132 9. The illustration shows a cutaway view of the connector to aid the technician in releasing the terminal retainer. 10. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Refer to the terminal crimping procedure in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit. Terminal Replacement Procedure After the terminal is crimped to the wire, perform the following procedure in order to replace the terminal. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the connector disassembly procedure. Terminal Position Assurance Locks Terminal Position Assurance Locks The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8133 2. Insert the J 38125-11A tool into the cavity on the lower right hand face of the connector until the terminal release tang access panel slides over. 3. Ensure that the terminal release tang access panel is in the correct location to access the terminals. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8134 5. Insert the J 38125-11A into the terminal release tang access slot located behind the access panel of the connector and press down on the terminal while carefully pulling the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component by pressing down on the connector position assurance (CPA). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8135 2. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting the tool in the small recess on the side of the connector and pushing up until the TPA releases from the connector body. The TPA should raise just slightly. Do not try to remove the TPA. Note: The TPA on this connector cannot be removed unless the terminals are removed first. The TPA will come out of the connector body, but only slightly. When the TPA is slightly raised the terminals can be removed. Using excessive force to remove the TPA with the terminals still in the connector will damage the connector. 3. Repeat the process for the other side of the connector. 4. Ensure that the TPA is in the proper position to remove the terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8136 5. While pushing the terminal forward, insert the J 38125-24 in the release cavity above the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8137 2. Insert a small flat-blade tool in the slot below the front loaded terminal position assurance (TPA) and pry up. 3. Remove the TPA by pulling it out of the connector. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-553 on a slight upward angle into the cavity below the terminal to be removed. Ensure that the pointed on the end of the tool is facing the bottom of the terminal and it stays in contact with the terminal until it stops on the plastic terminal retainer. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8138 6. Gently pry the plastic terminal retainer down and carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8139 1. While depressing the lock, pull the two connector halves apart. Note: The TPA is fragile and may break if not done carefully. 2. Use a small flat-blade tool to very carefully push the terminal position assurance (TPA) towards the face of the connector on both sides of the connector. 3. View of the male half of the connector with female terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8140 4. View of the female half of the connector with male terminals. 5. Use the J 38125-215 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. View of the female half of the connector with male terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8141 7. View of the male half of the connector with female terminals. 8. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers A circuit breaker is a protective device that is designed to open the circuit when a current load is in excess of the rated breaker capacity. If there is a short or other type of overload condition in the circuit, the excessive current will open the circuit between the circuit breaker terminals. Two types of circuit breakers are used. Circuit Breaker - This type opens when excessive current passes through it for a period of time. It closes again after a few seconds, and if the cause of the high current is still present, it will open again. The circuit breaker will continue to cycle open and closed until the condition causing the high current is removed. Positive Temperature Coefficient (PTC) Circuit Breaker - This type greatly increases its resistance when excessive current passes through it. The excessive current heats the PTC device, as the device heats its resistance increases. Eventually the resistance gets so high that the circuit is effectively open. Unlike the ordinary circuit breaker the PTC unit will not reset until the circuit is opened, by removing the voltage from its terminals. Once the voltage is removed the circuit breaker will re-close within a second or 2. Circuit Protection - Fuses Circuit Protection - Fuses Special Tools EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM) For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8142 The fuse is the most common method of an automotive wiring circuit protection. Whenever there is an excessive amount of current flowing through a circuit the fusible element will melt and create an open or incomplete circuit. Fuses are a one time protection device and must be replaced each time the circuit is overloaded. To determine if a fuse is open, remove the suspected fuse and examine if the element in the fuse is broken (2). If not broken (1), also check for continuity using a Digital Multimeter (DMM) or a continuity tester. If the element is broken or continuity is suspect, replace the fuse with one of equal current rating. Circuit Protection - Fusible Links Circuit Protection - Fusible Links Special Tools EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM) For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Tools and Equipment). Fusible link is wire designed to melt and break continuity when excessive current is applied. It is often located between or near the battery and starter or electrical center. Use a continuity tester or a Digital Multimeter (DMM) at each end of the wire containing the fusible link in order to determine if it is broken. If broken, it must be replaced with fusible link of the same gauge size. Repairing a Fusible Link Note: Fusible links cut longer than 225 mm (approximately 9 in) will not provide sufficient overload protection. Flat Wire Repairs Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8143 Flat Wire Repairs The flat wire within the flex wiring harness is not serviceable. If an open or short exists within the flex wiring harness the complete harness must be replaced. GMLAN Wiring Repairs GMLAN Wiring Repairs Special Tools * EL-38125-10 - Splice Sleeve Crimping Tool * J 38125-5 - Ultra Torch Special Tool * DuraSeal splice sleeves * A wire stripping tool For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Tools and Equipment). The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: * A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. * A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The GM Local Area Network (GMLAN) System requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working on GMLAN connectors and terminals. GMLAN Repairs Note: When making a repair to any GMLAN network, the original wire length after the repair must be the same length as before the repair. If the network is a twisted pair, the twist must be maintained after the repair is completed. GMLAN has 2 types of networks, low speed and high speed. Low speed GMLAN has a single wire and works at slow speeds. High speed GMLAN has 2 wires in a twisted pair and works at higher speeds. For more information on GMLAN, refer to Data Link Communications Description and Operation ( See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Information Bus/Description and Operation). GMLAN Connector Terminal Repair Note: A terminated lead can be used to replace damaged connector terminals for both high speed and low speed GMLAN systems. When making a connector terminal repair on a GMLAN high speed system with twisted pair wires, do not untwist the wires more than necessary to make the repair. If the individual terminals are damaged on any GMLAN connection, use the appropriate connector repair procedure in order to repair the terminal. Refer to Connector Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Connector Repairs) for the appropriate connector repair procedure. GMLAN Wire Repair Note: Refer to Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Wiring Repairs) in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gauge size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and EL-38125-10 - tool. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the DuraSeal splice sleeves. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8144 Note: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: * Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. * Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. * Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert to regional wiring gauge size. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the EL-38125-10 - tool in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the splice sleeve crimp tool. The crimp tool has four nests, one for each color. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8145 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs Caution: Do not solder repairs under any circumstances as this could result in the air reference being obstructed. If the heated oxygen sensor pigtail wiring, connector, or terminal is damaged the entire oxygen sensor assembly must be replaced. Do not attempt to repair the wiring, connector, or terminals. In order for the sensor to function properly it must have a clean air reference. This clean air reference is obtained by way of the oxygen sensor signal and heater wires. Any attempt to repair the wires, connectors or terminals could result in the obstruction of the air reference and degrade oxygen sensor performance. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8146 The following guidelines should be used when servicing the heated oxygen sensor: * Do not apply contact cleaner or other materials to the sensor or vehicle harness connectors. These materials may get into the sensor, causing poor performance. Also, the sensor pigtail and harness wires must not be damaged in such a way that the wires inside are exposed. This could provide a path for foreign materials to enter the sensor and cause performance problems. * Neither the sensor nor vehicle lead wires should be bent sharply or kinked. Sharp bends, kinks, etc., could block the reference air path through the lead wire. * Do not remove or defeat the oxygen sensor ground wire (where applicable). Vehicles that utilize the ground wire sensor may rely on this ground as the only ground contact to the sensor. Removal of the ground wire will also cause poor engine performance. * To prevent damage due to water intrusion, be sure that the peripheral seal remains intact on the vehicle harness connector. High Temperature Wiring Repairs High Temperature Wiring Repairs Special Tools * EL-38125-10 - Splice Sleeve Crimping Tool * J 38125-5 - Ultra Torch * DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Tools and Equipment). High Temperature Wiring Wiring that is exposed to high temperatures, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time may use materials i.e. wires, connectors, and shielding that has a higher heat rating than typical wiring. When making a repair in a high temperature area observe the following: * Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature to replace any damaged wire. * Replace any heat shielding that is removed. * Cover any DuraSeal splice sleeves with SCT1 shrink tubing. * After making a wiring repair, ensure that the location of the wiring is not moved closer to the heat source. Identifying High Temperature Wiring Wiring that is exposed to high temperature, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time need special considerations when making wiring repairs. Areas that may be exposed to higher temperatures can be identified by heat resistant materials that are being used in those areas. These materials may include heat reflective tape, moon tape, and high temperature shrink tubing. Also conduit and other protective coverings may be used. Because conduit or similar coverings are used throughout the vehicle regardless of the temperature, it may be necessary for the technician to determine if an area is exposed to excessive heat before making a wiring repair. Obvious areas of consideration would be any area located near the exhaust manifolds, catalytic converter, and exhaust pipes. Items Required * DuraSeal splice sleeves to crimp and seal connections * High temperature SCT1 shrink tubing to protect the splice sleeves * Terminated leads or pigtails * The correct tools to remove the terminals from the connectors Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature of the same or larger gauge size as the original wire when repair damage wire. Also replace any reflective tape that you remove during the repair. High Temperature Wire Repair Note: Refer to Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Wiring Repairs) in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature rating of the same gauge size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the EL-38125-10 - tool and then encapsulate the splice sleeve using the high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8147 Note: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: * Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. * Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. * Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert to regional wiring gauge size. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Slide a section of high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing down the length of wire to be spliced. Ensure that the shrink tubing will not interfere with the splice procedure. 5. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 6. Use the EL-38125-10 - tool in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the splice sleeve crimp tool. The crimp tool has four nests, one for each color. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8148 7. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 8. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 9. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 10. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 11. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8149 12. Center the high temperature SCT1 shrink tube over the DuraSeal splice sleeve. 13. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the high temperature heat shrink tubing. 14. Gradually move the heat from the center to the open end of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. 15. Replace any reflective tape and clips that may have been remove during the repair. Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation If the wire insulation has been chafed, or broken, enough to show the conductive portion of the wire, and the wire is not damaged, determine the length of insulation that needs to be repaired. If the repair is less than 280 mm (11 in), cut the wire within the damaged area. Than slide the appropriate heat shrink tubing (listed below) over the wire, and repair the wire by splicing the wires together. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves). Once the wire is spliced together slide heat shrink tubing over the damaged area and apply heat to seal the repaired wire. If the wire is damaged, or the damaged area is larger than 280 mm (11 in), than replace the damaged wire by splicing in a new section of wire. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8150 SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs Special Tools * EL-38125-10 - Splice Sleeve Crimping Tool * J 38125-5 - Ultra Torch * DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Tools and Equipment). The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: * A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. * A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides the necessary low resistance contact integrity for these sensitive, low energy circuits. The Supplemental Inflatable Restraint (SIR) System/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working with the SIR/SRS, and the wiring components, such as connectors and terminals. SIR/SRS Connector Repair (Plastic Body and Terminal Metal Pin) Note: Do not use the terminals in the kit in order to replace damaged SIR/SRS system terminals. Use either an SIR/SRS pigtail or a terminated lead from the SIR Repair Kit Tray. The terminals in the SIR/SRS system are made with a special plating. This plating provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. Pigtail repair packs are available for SIR/SRS connectors with eight or less terminals. Only the connector body is available for connectors with more than eight terminals. Terminated leads can be used to replace damaged terminals when replacing the connector body. SIR/SRS Component Wire Pigtail Repair Note: Do not make wire, connector, or terminal repairs on components with wire pigtails. A wire pigtail is a wire or wires attached directly to the device, not by a connector. If a wiring pigtail is damaged, you must replace the entire component, with pigtail. The inflatable restraint steering wheel module coil is an example of a pigtail component. SIR/SRS Wire Repair Note: Refer to Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Wiring Repairs) in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8151 If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gauge size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and EL-38125-10 - tool. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the DuraSeal splice sleeves. Note: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: * Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. * Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. * Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert to regional wiring gauge size. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the EL-38125-10 - tool in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the splice sleeve crimp tool. The crimp tool has four nests, one for each color. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8152 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Connector Position Assurance (CPA) The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of a connector. CPAs are used in all SIR System connectors and also in some connectors of other systems. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals of a connection. Terminal Position Assurance (TPA) The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8153 Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Special Tools * EL-38125-10 - Splice Sleeve Crimping Tool * J 38125-5 - Ultra Torch * DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Tools and Equipment). Note: Use only DuraSeal splice sleeves. Other splice sleeves may not protect the splice from moisture or provide a good electrical connection. Use DuraSeal splice sleeves to form a one-to-one splice on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. Use DuraSeal splice sleeves where there is special requirements such as moisture sealing. Follow the instructions below in order to splice copper wire using DuraSeal splice sleeves. Note: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: * Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. * Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. * Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert to regional wiring gauge size. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8154 5. Use the EL-38125-10 - tool in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the splice sleeve crimp tool. The crimp tool has four nests, one for each color. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8155 * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Splicing Inline Harness Diodes Splicing Inline Harness Diodes Many vehicle electrical systems use a diode to isolate circuits and protect the components from voltage spikes. When installing a new diode use the following procedure. 1. Open the harness. * If the harness is taped, remove the tape. * To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing seam ripper (available from sewing supply stores) in order to cut open the harness. * If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the diode. 2. If the diode is taped to the harness, remove all of the tape. 3. Check and record the current flow direction and orientation of diode. 4. Remove the inoperative diode from the harness with a suitable soldering tool. Note: If the diode is located next to a connector terminal remove the terminal(s) from the connector to prevent damage from the soldering tool. 5. Carefully strip away a section of insulation next to the old soldered portion of the wire(s). Do not remove any more than is needed to attach the new diode. 6. Check current flow direction of the new diode, being sure to install the diode with correct bias. Reference the appropriate service manual wiring schematic to obtain the correct diode installation position. 7. Attach the new diode to the wire(s) using 60/40 rosin core solder. Before soldering attach some heat sinks (aluminum alligator clips) across the diode wire ends to protect the diode from excessive heat. Follow the manufacturer's instruction for the soldering equipment. 8. Reinstall terminal(s) into the connector body if previously removed. Note: To prevent shorts to ground and water intrusion, completely cover all exposed wire and diode attachment points with tape. 9. Tape the diode to the harness or connector using electrical tape. Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable Twisted/shielded cable is used in order to protect wiring from electrical noise. Two-conductor cable of this construction is used between the radio and the Delco-Bose(R) speaker/amplifier units and other applications where low level, sensitive signals must be carried. Follow the instructions below in order to repair the twisted/shielded cable. 1. Remove the outer jacket (1). Use care not to cut into the drain wire of the mylar tape. 2. Unwrap the tape. Do not remove the tape. Use the tape in order to rewrap the twisted conductors after the splice is made. 3. Prepare the splice. Untwist the conductors and follow the instructions for Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves). Staggering the splices by 65 mm (2.5 in) is recommended. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8156 Note: Apply the mylar tape with the aluminum side inward. This ensures good electrical contact with the drain wire. 4. Re-assemble the cable. * Rewrap the conductors with the mylar tape. If the mylar tape is damaged, use 3M product AL-36FR to replace the damaged mylar tape. * Use caution not to wrap the drain wire in the tape (1). * Follow the splicing instructions for copper wire and splice the drain wire. * Wrap the drain wire around the conductors and tape with electrical tape to replace the outer insulation. 5. Tape over the entire cable. Use a winding motion when you apply the tape. Wiring Repairs Wiring Repairs The Wiring Repairs section contains the following types of wiring repair information. Using these elements together will make wiring repair faster and easier: * Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections) * Flat Wire Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Flat Wire Repairs) * GMLAN Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/GMLAN Wiring Repairs) * High Temperature Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/High Temperature Wiring Repairs) * Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs) * Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves) * Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable) * Splicing Inline Harness Diodes (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Inline Harness Diodes) * SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs) US English/Metric Conversion US English/Metric Conversion Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8157 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8158 Basic Digital Multimeter Requirements Basic Digital Multimeter Requirements Digital Multimeter (DMM) Basic Requirements Service information is validated using digital multimeters that meet or exceed the following requirements. Using a multimeter that does not meet these basic requirements may give inaccurate readings which could lead to an incorrect diagnosis. Display and Settings 1. Four digits displayed 2. Voltage, amperage, resistance, frequency, diode test settings, and min-max function 3. Display positive and negative values Voltage 1. Have at least 10 Mohm input impedance 2. Test a DC voltage range of 0.1-1000 V. 3. Test an AC voltage range of 0.1-1000 V. Amperage 1. Test a DC amperage range of 0.1µA-10 A. 2. Test an AC amperage range of 0.1µA-10 A. Resistance Test a resistance range of 0.1 ohm-40 Mohm and displays infinite for a value greater than 40 Mohm (O.L. (Over-load)) Frequency Test for a frequency range of 0.5 HZ-199 K HZ Diode Test 1. Apply at least 1 mA when performing the diode bias test 2. Display the break over voltage drop (0-3 V) of a forward biased diode 3. Display infinite (O.L. (Over-load)) when a diode is reverse biased Min-Max Readings 1. Can update at a 1 ms sample rate 2. Saves and displays minimum and maximum values Testing Ground and Low Reference Circuits Testing Ground and Low Reference Circuits Because a test lamp can light with up to 200 ohm in a ground or low reference circuit they are not recommended to be used for this type of test. A low impedance test lamp can light and indicate the circuit is good when there is as much as 20-30 ohm present, while a high impedance test lamp can light with up to 200 ohm present in the circuit. This is why the Digital Multi-Meter (DMM) is used when validating a ground or low reference circuit continuity. When using the DMM there are many vehicle conditions that can affect the ground and low reference continuity testing. If these conditions are not met, a ground or low reference circuit test can fail on a good circuit. This may cause longer diagnosis time and incorrect component replacement. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8159 Any current flow through a ground or low reference circuit, while being tested, will skew the DMM continuity reading, or display a reading higher than when there is no current flowing. Performing a ground or low reference circuit continuity test, in reference to the vehicles battery negative terminal, will have the highest risk of failing a good ground or low reference circuit test than any other ground reference point. The best ground test points would be a control module housing (if the control modules housing is metal and grounded), door jamb striker (if attached to metal), under dash metal frame work, engine block, or body ground studs (other than where the negative battery cable is attached). A typical DMM ground or low reference circuit continuity reading can be as high as 100 ohm with the ignition ON, and drop to 15-25 ohm after the ignition is turned OFF. The reading will drop below 10 ohm after 30-40 seconds, then below 5 ohm after 60 seconds. Once the vehicle completely goes to sleep (generally 3-10 minutes) the reading will drop below 0.3 ohm. The following list of conditions may need to be met to ensure a valid continuity reading on a ground or low reference circuit: * Ignition OFF * Key out of the ignition switch (when not equipped with keyless entry and remote start) * Retained Accessory Power (RAP) OFF (open and close the driver door after ignition OFF) * Battery charger set at a 2 A or less charge rate * Scan tool not communicating with any vehicle control module (in some cases it may need to be disconnected from the DLC) * All entry doors closed * Headlamps OFF (auto headlamps disabled) * Any delay lighting OFF * HVAC after blow OFF * Any accessory that can work when the ignition is OFF * Wait up to 60 seconds (after all other listed conditions are met) Activating the DOOR LOCK function with a key fob can greatly reduce the time to achieve a valid ground or low reference continuity test result. Terminal Wiring Repair Terminal Wiring Repair Special Tools * EL-38125-10 - Splice Sleeve Crimp Tool * EL-38125-580 - Terminal Release Tool Kit * J-38125-5 - Ultra Torch * EL-35616 - Connector Test Adapter Kit For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Tools and Equipment). Note: All repairs near the engine manifold, turbo engine and all exhaust pipes should follow the High Temperature Wiring Repair procedures. 1. Find the appropriate connector end view within the connector end view section. The connector end view has the following information: * Diagnostic probe tool * Terminal release tool * Terminal/terminated lead part numbers 2. Determine if a terminal is damaged. Note: Not using the proper test kit probe may cause damage to the terminal(s) that are probed. * Locate the diagnostic probe tool from the connector end view. The connector end view describes the color and part number to help the technician find and use the correct tool. * Connect the probe tool to the Digital Multimeter. * Insert the probe tool into the cavity and follow the procedures from the Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter). 3. Disconnect the connector body to perform the repair. Note: Several procedures for specific connector bodies are called out in Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Wiring Repairs). Use the following repair procedures to repair the following terminals: Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8160 Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack))Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Push to Seat))Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Pull to Seat))Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W))Delphi Connectors (Micro.64) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Micro .64) )Delphi Connectors (12-Way) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (12-Way))Delphi Connectors (Steering Gear) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Steering Gear)) * The TPA and CPA should be removed before releasing the terminal for the connector body. * Look at the connector end view to locate the cavity of the damaged terminal and find the proper terminal release tool from the terminal release tool kit. Note: Using the incorrect terminal release tool can damage the connector body. * Insert the terminal release tool into the cavity. Note: Some terminals have a lever that must be disengaged before the terminal can be released. Gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Terminated Lead Repair Terminated Lead Repair Special Tools * EL-38125-10 - Splice Sleeve Crimp Tool * EL-38125-580 - Terminal Release Tool Kit * J-38125-5 - Ultra Torch * EL-35616 - Connector Test Adapter Kit For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Tools and Equipment). Note: All repairs near the engine manifold, turbo engine and all exhaust pipes should follow the High Temperature Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/High Temperature Wiring Repairs) procedures. Terminated leads are terminals that are crimped onto wires. The terminated lead can be used throughout the vehicle since it is designed for temperatures up to 150°C. The length of the wire is 450 mm. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8161 The DuraSeal splice sleeve has the following 2 critical features: * A special heat shrink tubing that environmentally seals the splice. The shrink tubing contains a sealing adhesive inside the shrink tubing. * A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp that provides the necessary contact integrity for sensitive low energy circuits. 1. Use the connector end view to identify the correct terminated lead. 2. The terminated lead package should include a DuraSeal splice sleeve. If not, use the chart to identify the correct part. 3. Open the harness by removing any tape: Use a sewing seam ripper, or a comparable tool, to cut open the harness, to avoid wire insulation damage. 4. Depending on how many terminals need repairs, cut the terminal and wire back at least 40 mm. Try to keep the harness wire length the same. If more than one terminated lead is required, stagger the lengths by 40 mm. This helps reduce the bundle size of the wire harness. 5. Use the EL-38125-10 - tool in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the splice sleeve crimp tool. The crimp tool has four nests, one for each color. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8162 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the J-38125-5 - ultra torch , apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures Fuse Block: Procedures Ground Repair Electrical Grounds Proper electrical system function relies on secure, positive, corrosion-free ground connections. Loose, stripped, or corroded connections increase the possibility of improper system function and loss of module communication. These conditions may also lead to unnecessary repairs and component replacements. In general, electrical ground connections are accomplished using one, or a combination of, three attachment methods: * Welded M6 stud and nut * Welded M6 nut and bolt * Welded M8 nut and bolt Caution: Use GM approved replacement fasteners with conductive finish for electrical ground repair. Determine which attachment method is used, and carry out the appropriate repair. M6 Weld Stud Replacement 1. Select a location adjacent the damaged or missing M6 ground stud having 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance behind the panel surface and 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance surrounding the M6 rivet stud flange. 2. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, remove any grease from the repair site and allow to dry. Note: Ensure 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance is maintained behind the panel to be drilled. 3. Drill a 10 mm (0.40 in) diameter hole through the panel. 4. Carefully remove paint and primer from the area surrounding the rivet stud flange until bare metal is visible. Caution: Use GM approved replacement fasteners with conductive finish for electrical ground repair. 5. Select a replacement conductive M6 rivet stud. Refer to GM parts catalog for the correct part number and application. 6. Using a rivet stud installer, install the replacement conductive M6 rivet stud. 7. Ensure the new rivet stud is securely fastened, with no detectable movement. Note: The rivet stud and surrounding panel area must be properly refinished prior to the installation of the ground terminal and nut to maintain positive electrical grounding. 8. Completely wrap the threads of the rivet stud with painters tape or equivalent. 9. Refinish the repair area using an anti-corrosion primer. Refer to Anti-Corrosion Treatment and Repair (). 10. Allow the refinished repair area to cure sufficiently before removing the protective material applied to the rivet stud threads. 11. Remove the painters tape or equivalent from the rivet stud threads. 12. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, thoroughly clean the rivet stud threads to remove any adhesive and allow to dry. 13. Carefully remove any corrosion from the electrical ground wire terminal. Refer to Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections). 14. Using a small brush, apply Dielectric Lubricant GM P/N 12377900 (Canadian P/N 10953529) to the new conductive M6 rivet stud threads. 15. Install the ground terminal to the new rivet stud. 16. Select a new, conductive M6 nut. Refer to GM parts catalog for the correct part number and application. Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener Caution). 17. Install the M6 nut and tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb in). 18. Check for proper system operation. M6 Weld Nut Caution: Use GM approved replacement fasteners with conductive finish for electrical ground repair. 1. If the M6 weld nut at the electrical ground location is damaged or stripped, a new, conductive self-threading M7 bolt may be used to secure the ground terminal. Refer to GM parts catalog for the correct part number and application. 2. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, remove any grease from the surface surrounding the weld nut and allow to dry. 3. Remove any loose metal particles from the damaged or stripped weld nut with a stiff brush. 4. Using a small brush, apply Dielectric Lubricant GM P/N 12377900 (Canadian P/N 10953529) to the new, conductive, self-threading M7 bolt Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 8165 threads. 5. Carefully remove any corrosion from the electrical ground terminal. Refer to Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections). 6. Install the electrical ground terminal to the new, conductive M7 bolt. Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener Caution). 7. Install the M7 bolt and tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb in). 8. Check for proper system operation. M6 Weld Nut (Alternative Repair) Caution: Use GM approved replacement fasteners with conductive finish for electrical ground repair. 1. If the electrical ground location is accessible from both sides of the panel, a conductive M6 bolt and a conductive M6 nut may be used to secure the electrical ground terminal. Refer to GM parts catalog for the correct part number and application. 2. Select a location adjacent the damaged M6 weld nut having 20 mm (0.79 ) clearance behind the panel surface and 20 mm (0.79 ) clearance surrounding the new electrical ground site. 3. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, remove any grease from the surface surrounding the ground location and allow to dry. Note: Ensure 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance is maintained behind the panel to be drilled. 4. Drill a 10 mm (0.40 in) diameter hole through the panel. 5. Carefully remove paint and primer from the area surrounding the new ground site until bare metal is visible. 6. Using a small brush, apply Dielectric Lubricant GM P/N 12377900 (Canadian P/N 10953529) to the new, conductive M6 bolt threads. 7. Carefully remove any corrosion from the electrical ground terminal. Refer to Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections). 8. Install the electrical ground terminal and new, conductive M6 bolt to the ground location. Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener Caution). 9. Install the conductive M6 nut and tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb in). Note: The repair area must be properly refinished to maintain positive electrical grounding. 10. Refinish the repair area using an anti-corrosion primer. Refer to Anti-Corrosion Treatment and Repair (). 11. Check for proper system operation. M8 Weld Nut Caution: Use GM approved replacement fasteners with conductive finish for electrical ground repair. 1. If the M8 weld nut electrical ground location is accessible from both sides of the panel, a conductive M8 bolt and a conductive M8 nut may be used to secure the ground terminal. Refer to GM parts catalog for the correct part numbers and application. 2. Select a location adjacent to M8 weld nut having 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance behind the panel surface and 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance surrounding the new electrical ground site. 3. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, remove any grease from the surface surrounding the ground location and allow to dry. Note: Ensure 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance is maintained behind the panel to be drilled. 4. Drill a 10 mm (0.40 in) diameter hole through the panel. 5. Carefully remove paint and primer from the area surrounding the new ground site until bare metal is visible. 6. Using a small brush, apply Dielectric Lubricant GM P/N 12377900 (Canadian P/N 10953529) to the new, conductive M8 bolt threads. 7. Carefully remove any corrosion from the electrical ground terminal. Refer to Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections). 8. Install the electrical ground terminal and new, conductive M8 bolt to the ground location. Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener Caution). 9. Install the conductive M8 nut and tighten to 22 Nm (16 lb ft). Note: The repair area must be properly refinished to maintain positive electrical grounding. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 8166 10. Refinish the repair area using an anti-corrosion primer. Refer to Anti-Corrosion Treatment and Repair (). 11. Check for proper system operation. M8 Weld Nut (Alternative Repair) Caution: Use GM approved replacement fasteners with conductive finish for electrical ground repair. 1. If the M8 weld nut electrical ground location is not accessible from both sides of the panel, a conductive M6 rivet stud and a conductive M6 nut may be used to secure the ground terminal. Refer to GM parts catalog for the correct part numbers and application. 2. Select a location adjacent the damaged M8 weld nut having 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance behind the panel surface and 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance surrounding the new, conductive M6 rivet stud flange. 3. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, remove any grease from the repair site and allow to dry. Note: Ensure 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance is maintained behind the panel to be drilled. 4. Drill a 10 mm (0.40 in) diameter hole through the panel. 5. Carefully remove paint and primer from the area surrounding the rivet stud flange until bare metal is visible. 6. Using a rivet stud installer, install the replacement conductive M6 rivet stud. 7. Ensure the new rivet stud is securely fastened, with no detectable movement. Note: The rivet stud and surrounding panel area must be properly refinished prior to the installation of the ground terminal and nut to maintain positive electrical grounding. 8. Completely wrap the threads of the rivet stud with painters tape or equivalent. 9. Refinish the repair area using an anti-corrosion primer. Refer to Anti-Corrosion Treatment and Repair (). 10. Allow the refinished repair area to cure sufficiently before removing the protective material applied to the rivet stud threads. 11. Remove the painters tape or equivalent from the rivet stud threads. 12. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, thoroughly clean the rivet stud threads to remove any adhesive and allow to dry. 13. Carefully remove any corrosion from the electrical ground wire terminal. Refer to Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections). 14. Using a small brush, apply Dielectric Lubricant GM P/N 12377900 (Canadian P/N 10953529) to the new conductive M6 rivet stud threads. 15. Install the ground terminal to the new, conductive M6 rivet stud. Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener Caution). 16. Install the conductive M6 nut and tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb in). 17. Check for proper system operation. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 8167 Fuse Block: Removal and Replacement Accessory Wiring Junction Block Replacement Accessory Wiring Junction Block Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 8168 Instrument Panel Wiring Harness Junction Block Replacement Instrument Panel Wiring Harness Junction Block Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 8169 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Grounding Point > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair Grounding Point: Technical Service Bulletins Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 10-08-45-001B Date: October 25, 2010 Subject: Information for Electrical Ground Repair - Use New Replacement Fasteners with Conductive Finish Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (including Saturn) 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2011 model year and update the Warranty Information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 10-08-45-001A (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Electrical Ground Repair Overview Proper electrical system function relies on secure, stable and corrosion-free electrical ground connections. Loose, stripped, or corroded connections increase the possibility of improper system function and loss of module communication. These conditions may also lead to unnecessary repairs and component replacement. In general, electrical ground connections are accomplished using one, or a combination of the following attachment methods: - Welded M6 stud and nut - Welded M6 nut and bolt - Welded M8 nut and bolt Determine which attachment method is used and perform the appropriate or alternative repair as described in this bulletin. M6 Weld Stud Replacement Caution Use only the GM-approved replacement fasteners with conductive finish for electrical ground repair. 1. Select a location adjacent the damaged or missing M6 ground stud having 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance behind the panel surface and 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance surrounding the M6 conductive rivet stud flange. 2. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, remove any grease from the repair site and allow to dry. Note Ensure 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance is maintained behind the panel to be drilled. 3. Drill a 10 mm (0.40 in) diameter hole through the panel. 4. Remove paint and primer from the area surrounding the 10 mm (0.40 in) hole until bare metal is visible. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Grounding Point > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair > Page 8174 Important The M6 conductive rivet stud as shown, can accommodate a panel thickness range of 0.7-4.2 mm (0.03-0.17 in). If there are layers of sheet metal, they should be touching without any air gaps to ensure a good ground. 5. Select a M6 conductive rivet stud. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. Note Use the GE-50317 rivet stud tool kit. 6. Place the M6 conductive rivet stud (1) in the 10 mm (0.40 in) hole. Assemble the rivet stud tool (2) with the groove and flare side facing the rivet stud, then the washer and the M6 nut (3). 7. Using a wrench on the rivet stud tool, and a socket on the M6 nut, secure the M6 conductive rivet stud. 8. Ensure the rivet stud is securely fastened, WITHOUT ANY detectable movement. 9. Completely wrap the threads of the rivet stud with painters tape or equivalent. Note The rivet stud and surrounding panel area MUST BE properly refinished PRIOR to the installation of the ground wire terminal and conductive nut to maintain a secure, stable and corrosion-free electrical ground. 10. Refinish the repair area using an anti-corrosion primer. Refer to Anti-Corrosion Treatment and Repair in SI. 11. Allow the refinished repair area to cure sufficiently before removing the protective material applied to the rivet stud threads. 12. Remove the painters tape or equivalent from the rivet stud threads. 13. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, thoroughly clean the rivet stud threads to remove any adhesive and allow to dry. 14. Using a small brush, apply Dielectric Lubricant GM P/N 12377900 (Canadian P/N 10953529) to the threads of the M6 conductive rivet stud. Note Fretting corrosion is a build-up of insulating, oxidized wear debris that can form when there is a small motion between electrical contacts. The oxidized wear debris can accumulate at the electrical contact points causing the electrical resistance across the connection to increase. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Grounding Point > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair > Page 8175 15. Carefully remove ANY corrosion or contamination that may be present on the electrical ground wire terminal. 16. Install the electrical ground wire terminal to the rivet stud. 17. Select a M6 conductive nut. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 18. Install the M6 conductive nut to the rivet stud and: Tighten Tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb in). 19. Verify proper system operation. M6 Weld Nut Caution Use only the GM-approved replacement fasteners with conductive finish for electrical ground repair. 1. If the M6 weld nut at the electrical ground location is damaged or stripped, a M7 conductive self-threading bolt may be used to secure the ground wire terminal. 2. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, remove any grease from the surface surrounding the weld nut and allow to dry. 3. Remove any loose metal particles from the damaged or stripped weld nut with a stiff brush. 4. Select a M7 conductive self-threading bolt. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin 5. Using a small brush, apply Dielectric Lubricant GM P/N 12377900 (Canadian P/N 10953529) to the threads of the M7 conductive self-threading bolt. Note Fretting corrosion is a build-up of insulating, oxidized wear debris that can form when there is a small motion between electrical contacts. The oxidized wear debris can accumulate at the electrical contact points causing the electrical resistance across the connection to increase. 6. Carefully remove ANY corrosion or contamination that may be present on the electrical ground wire terminal. 7. Install the electrical ground wire terminal to the M7 conductive self-threading bolt. 8. Install the M7 conductive self-threading bolt and: Tighten Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb in). 9. Verify proper system operation. M6 Weld Nut Alternative Repair Caution Use only the GM-approved replacement fasteners with conductive finish for electrical ground repair. 1. If the electrical ground location is accessible from both sides of the panel, a M6 conductive bolt and a M6 conductive nut may be used to secure the electrical ground wire terminal. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 2. Select a location adjacent the damaged M6 weld nut having 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance behind the panel surface and 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance surrounding the new electrical ground site. 3. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, remove any grease from the surface surrounding the ground location and allow to dry. Note Ensure 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance is maintained behind the panel to be drilled. 4. Drill a 8.5 mm (0.33 in) diameter hole through the panel. 5. Remove paint and primer from the area surrounding the 8.5 mm (0.33 in) hole until bare metal is visible. 6. Select a M6 conductive bolt. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 7. Using a small brush, apply Dielectric Lubricant GM P/N 12377900 (Canadian P/N 10953529) to the threads of the M6 conductive bolt. Note Fretting corrosion is a build-up of insulating, oxidized wear debris that can form when there is a small motion between electrical contacts. The oxidized wear debris can accumulate at the electrical contact points causing the electrical resistance across the connection to increase. 8. Carefully remove ANY corrosion or contamination that may be present on the electrical ground wire terminal. 9. Install the electrical ground wire terminal and the M6 conductive bolt to the ground location. 10. Select a M6 conductive nut. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 11. Install the M6 conductive nut to the bolt and: Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Grounding Point > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair > Page 8176 Tighten Tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb in). Note The repair area MUST BE properly refinished to maintain a secure, stable and corrosion-free electrical ground. 12. Refinish the repair area using an anti-corrosion primer. Refer to Anti-Corrosion Treatment and Repair in SI. 13. Verify proper system operation. M8 Weld Nut Caution Use only the GM-approved replacement fasteners with conductive finish for electrical ground repair. 1. If the M8 weld nut electrical ground location is accessible from both sides of the panel, a M8 conductive bolt and a M8 conductive nut may be used to secure the electrical ground wire terminal. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 2. Select a location adjacent the M8 weld nut having 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance behind the panel surface and 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance surrounding the new electrical ground site. 3. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, remove any grease from the surface surrounding the ground location and allow to dry. Note Ensure 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance is maintained behind the panel to be drilled. 4. Drill a 10 mm (0.40 in) diameter hole through the panel. 5. Remove paint and primer from the area surrounding the 10 mm (0.40 in) hole until bare metal is visible. 6. Select a M8 conductive bolt. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 7. Using a small brush, apply Dielectric Lubricant GM P/N 12377900 (Canadian P/N 10953529) to the threads of the M8 conductive bolt. Note Fretting corrosion is a build-up of insulating, oxidized wear debris that can form when there is a small motion between electrical contacts. The oxidized wear debris can accumulate at the electrical contact points causing the electrical resistance across the connection to increase. 8. Carefully remove ANY corrosion or contamination that may be present on the electrical ground wire terminal. 9. Install the electrical ground wire terminal and the M8 conductive bolt to the ground location. 10. Select a M8 conductive nut. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 11. Install the M8 conductive nut to the bolt and: Tighten Tighten to 22 Nm (16 lb ft). Note The repair area MUST BE properly refinished to maintain a secure, stable and corrosion-free electrical ground. 12. Refinish the repair area using an anti-corrosion primer. Refer to Anti-Corrosion Treatment and Repair in SI. 13. Verify proper system operation. M8 Weld Nut Alternative Repair Caution Use only the GM-approved replacement fasteners with conductive finish for electrical ground repair. 1. If the M8 weld nut electrical ground location is not accessible from both sides of the panel, a M6 conductive rivet stud and a M6 conductive nut may be used to secure the electrical ground wire terminal. 2. Select a location adjacent the damaged M8 weld nut having 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance behind the panel surface and 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance surrounding the M6 conductive rivet stud flange. 3. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, remove any grease from the repair site and allow to dry. Note Ensure 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance is maintained behind the panel to be drilled. 4. Drill a 10 mm (0.40 in) diameter hole through the panel. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Grounding Point > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair > Page 8177 5. Remove paint and primer from the area surrounding the 10 mm (0.40 in) until bare metal is visible. Important The M6 conductive rivet stud as shown, can accommodate a panel thickness range of 0.7-4.2 mm (0.03-0.17 in). If there are layers of sheet metal, they should be touching without any air gaps to ensure a good ground. 6. Select a M6 conductive rivet stud. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. Note Use the GE-50317 rivet stud tool kit. 7. Place the M6 conductive rivet stud (1) in the 10 mm (0.40 in) hole. Assemble the rivet stud tool (2) with the groove and flare side facing the rivet stud, then the washer and the M6 nut (3). 8. Using a wrench on the rivet stud tool, and a socket on the M6 nut, secure the M6 conductive rivet stud. 9. Ensure the new rivet stud is securely fastened, WITHOUT ANY detectable movement. 10. Completely wrap the threads of the rivet stud with painters tape or equivalent. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Grounding Point > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair > Page 8178 Note The rivet stud and surrounding panel area MUST BE properly refinished PRIOR to the installation of the electrical ground wire terminal and conductive nut to maintain a secure, stable and corrosion-free electrical ground. 11. Refinish the repair area using an anti-corrosion primer. Refer to Anti-Corrosion Treatment and Repair in SI. 12. Allow the refinished repair area to cure sufficiently before removing the protective material applied to the rivet stud threads. 13. Remove the painters tape or equivalent from the rivet stud threads. 14. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, thoroughly clean the rivet stud threads to remove any adhesive and allow to dry. 15. Using a small brush, apply Dielectric Lubricant GM P/N 12377900 (Canadian P/N 10953529) to the threads of the M6 conductive rivet stud. Note Fretting corrosion is a build-up of insulating, oxidized wear debris that can form when there is a small motion between electrical contacts. The oxidized wear debris can accumulate at the electrical contact points causing the electrical resistance across the connection to increase. 16. Carefully remove ANY corrosion or contamination that may be present on the electrical ground wire terminal. 17. Install the electrical ground wire terminal to the M6 conductive rivet stud. 18. Select a M6 conductive nut. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 19. Install the M6 conductive nut to the rivet stud and: Tighten Tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb in) 20. Verify proper system operation. Parts Information Warranty Information (excluding Saab Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use: Warranty Information (Saab Models) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Grounding Point > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair > Page 8179 For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 09167 > Jul > 09 > Campaign - Missing Seal/Engine-to-Body Inline Connector Multiple Junction Connector: Recalls Campaign - Missing Seal/Engine-to-Body Inline Connector SERVICE UPDATE Bulletin No.: 09167 Date: July 23, 2009 Subject: 09167 - Service Update for Inventory and Customer Vehicles Missing Seal on Engine-to-Body Inline Connector - Expires with Base Warranty Models: 2010 Chevrolet Equinox THIS SERVICE UPDATE INCLUDES VEHICLES IN DEALER INVENTORY AND CUSTOMER VEHICLES THAT RETURN TO THE DEALERSHIP FOR ANY REASON. IT WILL EXPIRE AT THE END OF THE INVOLVED VEHICLE'S NEW VEHICLE LIMITED WARRANTY PERIOD. Purpose This bulletin provides a service procedure to install a connector seal to the engine-to-body inline connector on certain 2010 model year Chevrolet Equinox vehicles. These vehicles are missing a seal on the engine-to-body inline connector. This service procedure should be completed as soon as possible on involved vehicles currently in dealer inventory and customer vehicles that return to the dealer for any type of service during the New Vehicle Limited Warranty coverage period. Vehicles Involved A list of involved vehicles currently in dealer inventory is available on the "Service Update Bulletin Information" link under the "Service" tab in GM GlobalConnect (US), or attached to the Dealer Communication (Canada), used to release this bulletin. Customer vehicles that return for service, for any reason, and are still covered under the vehicles base warranty, and are within the VIN breakpoints provided below, should be checked for vehicle eligibility in the appropriate system listed below. Important: Dealers are to confirm vehicle eligibility prior to beginning repairs by using the GM Vehicle Inquiry System (GMVIS). Not all vehicles within the above breakpoints may be involved. Parts Information US Only: Connector seals will be shipped from the Warranty Parts Center (WPC) at no charge via UPS 2-Day Delivery - Attention: Parts Manager, to dealers with involved vehicles beginning Friday, July 24, 2009. All dealers who have involved vehicles should have the seals no later than Wednesday, July 29, 2009. Seals needed for dealer-trades are to be obtained by calling the WPC, and requesting WPC P/N 479. Canada Only: Connector seals will be available by calling the WINS Assistance Centre. The seals will be shipped at no charge via Overnight Delivery. Only dealers with affected vehicles should call for these parts Service Procedure 1. Unlock the vehicle and open the door. 2. Place the key FOB on the driver seat (avoid inadvertent FOB key press). 3. Release the hood latch. 4. Exit the vehicle and close the door. 5. Open the hood of the vehicle. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 09167 > Jul > 09 > Campaign - Missing Seal/Engine-to-Body Inline Connector > Page 8188 6. Locate the engine-to-body inline connector (4). This connector (4) is located on the passenger side of the engine compartment near the shock tower (1), air cleaner outlet duct (2), and air cleaner assembly (3). Refer to the illustration. 7. Remove the connector from the shock tower (1) by gently pulling the connector rearward and away from the shock tower. 8. Disengage the connection by pressing the side of the connector and pulling the grey lever to the back. 9. Install a new connector seal. Inspect the connector seal to ensure that the connector seal is not cracked, cut, or damaged. 1. Place one edge of the seal over one edge of the terminal housing as shown. Using both hands, stretch the remaining seal around the terminal housing. 2. Verify that the seal is seated properly around terminal housing. There must be NO TWISTING of the seal and it MUST sit flush as shown in the illustration. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 09167 > Jul > 09 > Campaign - Missing Seal/Engine-to-Body Inline Connector > Page 8189 3. Using tool number 12094441 or a wooden craft tool, gently push the seal to the back of connector, applying pressure to all four sides of the seal evenly. 4. Rotate the connector to the side of the clip and look through the connector window to verify that the seal is fully seated at the back of connector. Refer to the illustration to view an improperly (1) and properly installed (2) connector seal. 10. Engage both connectors and verify that the lever is fully locked by attempting to open it without pressing on the unlocking tabs. 11. Install the connector (2) on the connector clip located on the shock tower (1). Pull on the connector to ensure that it is secure on the clip. 12. Close the hood. 13. Open the front driver's side door. 14. Sit in the driver's seat and close the door. Note If the vehicle passes ALL of the inspection points outlined in Steps 15-20, no further action is required. If the vehicle does NOT pass all inspection points, ensure that the connector pins are NOT bent and that the connector is seated and locked properly. Repeat Steps 15-20 if required to ensure proper installation of the seal and connector. 15. Turn the key to the RUN position. Do NOT start the engine. If the engine telltale (MIL) is ON solid, the vehicle PASSES this inspection point. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 09167 > Jul > 09 > Campaign - Missing Seal/Engine-to-Body Inline Connector > Page 8190 16. Turn the key to crank (start engine). If the engine starts, the vehicle PASSES this inspection point. 17. Wait 10 seconds, if the engine telltale (MIL) is OFF, the vehicle PASSES this inspection point. 18. Push ECO button next to shifter knob (present only on 4 cylinder engine). If the ECO telltale comes ON, the vehicle PASSES this inspection point. 19. Turn the steering wheel 1/4 turn. If the steering wheel is easy to turn, power assist is present. The vehicle PASSES this inspection point. 20. Press accelerator pedal. If the engine RPMs increase, the vehicle PASSES this inspection point. Claim Information Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 07-06-04-019D > Jun > 10 > Electrical Intermittent MIL/DTC P2138/Reduced Power Multiple Junction Connector: Customer Interest Electrical - Intermittent MIL/DTC P2138/Reduced Power TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 07-06-04-019D Date: June 28, 2010 Subject: Intermittent Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) Illuminated, DTC P2138 with Reduced Engine Power (Repair Instrument Panel (IP) to Body Harness Connector) Models: 2005-2011 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (Including Saturn) 2005-2009 HUMMER H2 2006-2010 HUMMER H3 2005-2009 Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the model years and warranty information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 07-06-04-019C (Section 06 - Engine/Propulsion System) Condition - Some customers may comment on an intermittent malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) being Illuminated with a message or an indicator that displays Reduced Engine Power. - The technician may observe on a scan tool DTC P2138 - Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor 1-2 Correlation set as Current or in History. Cause This condition may be caused by water intrusion into the instrument panel (IP) to body harness connector, which carries the APP sensor signals to the ECM/PCM. This water intrusion results in a voltage difference between APP Sensor 1 and APP Sensor 2 that exceeds a predetermined value for more than a calibrated period of time, setting P2138. Correction Note Aftermarket equipment can generate DTC P2138 and/or other DTCs. 1. Verify that aftermarket equipment is not electrically connected to any of the APP sensor signal or low reference circuits or to any other ECM/PCM 5V reference or low reference circuits. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories in SI. 2. Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle. ‹› If any 5V reference DTCs are set, refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle. ‹› If any 5V reference DTCs are not set, proceed to Step 3. 3. Locate the IP to body harness connector, which may be located in and around the left hand kick panel area or inside the IP. Depending on the vehicle and model year, refer to Wiring Systems or Power and Signal Distribution in SI. Note Some examples of potential water leaks are: A-pillar seals, sunroof drain lines (if equipped) and windshield/cowl sealing. 4. Inspect for a water leak in the area. If necessary use a water hose to determine the source of the leak. Refer to General Information > Water Leaks in SI. ‹› If a water leak is observed, repair as necessary. Verify the effectiveness of the repair. 5. Inspect the IP to body harness connector terminals for corrosion and debris. Refer to Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections in SI. ‹› If any corrosion and/or debris is observed, repair as necessary. 6. After completing the repair, verify the proper operation of the system. Depending on the vehicle and model year, perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification procedure or refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle in SI. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 07-06-04-019D > Jun > 10 > Electrical Intermittent MIL/DTC P2138/Reduced Power > Page 8196 Warranty Information (excluding Saab U.S. Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the appropriate labor operation for the source of the water leak Warranty Information (Saab U.S. Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Multiple Junction Connector: > 07-06-04-019D > Jun > 10 > Electrical - Intermittent MIL/DTC P2138/Reduced Power Multiple Junction Connector: All Technical Service Bulletins Electrical - Intermittent MIL/DTC P2138/Reduced Power TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 07-06-04-019D Date: June 28, 2010 Subject: Intermittent Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) Illuminated, DTC P2138 with Reduced Engine Power (Repair Instrument Panel (IP) to Body Harness Connector) Models: 2005-2011 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (Including Saturn) 2005-2009 HUMMER H2 2006-2010 HUMMER H3 2005-2009 Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the model years and warranty information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 07-06-04-019C (Section 06 - Engine/Propulsion System) Condition - Some customers may comment on an intermittent malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) being Illuminated with a message or an indicator that displays Reduced Engine Power. - The technician may observe on a scan tool DTC P2138 - Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor 1-2 Correlation set as Current or in History. Cause This condition may be caused by water intrusion into the instrument panel (IP) to body harness connector, which carries the APP sensor signals to the ECM/PCM. This water intrusion results in a voltage difference between APP Sensor 1 and APP Sensor 2 that exceeds a predetermined value for more than a calibrated period of time, setting P2138. Correction Note Aftermarket equipment can generate DTC P2138 and/or other DTCs. 1. Verify that aftermarket equipment is not electrically connected to any of the APP sensor signal or low reference circuits or to any other ECM/PCM 5V reference or low reference circuits. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories in SI. 2. Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle. ‹› If any 5V reference DTCs are set, refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle. ‹› If any 5V reference DTCs are not set, proceed to Step 3. 3. Locate the IP to body harness connector, which may be located in and around the left hand kick panel area or inside the IP. Depending on the vehicle and model year, refer to Wiring Systems or Power and Signal Distribution in SI. Note Some examples of potential water leaks are: A-pillar seals, sunroof drain lines (if equipped) and windshield/cowl sealing. 4. Inspect for a water leak in the area. If necessary use a water hose to determine the source of the leak. Refer to General Information > Water Leaks in SI. ‹› If a water leak is observed, repair as necessary. Verify the effectiveness of the repair. 5. Inspect the IP to body harness connector terminals for corrosion and debris. Refer to Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections in SI. ‹› If any corrosion and/or debris is observed, repair as necessary. 6. After completing the repair, verify the proper operation of the system. Depending on the vehicle and model year, perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification procedure or refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle in SI. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Multiple Junction Connector: > 07-06-04-019D > Jun > 10 > Electrical - Intermittent MIL/DTC P2138/Reduced Power > Page 8202 Warranty Information (excluding Saab U.S. Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the appropriate labor operation for the source of the water leak Warranty Information (Saab U.S. Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Multiple Junction Connector: > 09167 > Jul > 09 > Campaign - Missing Seal/Engine-to-Body Inline Connector Multiple Junction Connector: All Technical Service Bulletins Campaign - Missing Seal/Engine-to-Body Inline Connector SERVICE UPDATE Bulletin No.: 09167 Date: July 23, 2009 Subject: 09167 - Service Update for Inventory and Customer Vehicles Missing Seal on Engine-to-Body Inline Connector - Expires with Base Warranty Models: 2010 Chevrolet Equinox THIS SERVICE UPDATE INCLUDES VEHICLES IN DEALER INVENTORY AND CUSTOMER VEHICLES THAT RETURN TO THE DEALERSHIP FOR ANY REASON. IT WILL EXPIRE AT THE END OF THE INVOLVED VEHICLE'S NEW VEHICLE LIMITED WARRANTY PERIOD. Purpose This bulletin provides a service procedure to install a connector seal to the engine-to-body inline connector on certain 2010 model year Chevrolet Equinox vehicles. These vehicles are missing a seal on the engine-to-body inline connector. This service procedure should be completed as soon as possible on involved vehicles currently in dealer inventory and customer vehicles that return to the dealer for any type of service during the New Vehicle Limited Warranty coverage period. Vehicles Involved A list of involved vehicles currently in dealer inventory is available on the "Service Update Bulletin Information" link under the "Service" tab in GM GlobalConnect (US), or attached to the Dealer Communication (Canada), used to release this bulletin. Customer vehicles that return for service, for any reason, and are still covered under the vehicles base warranty, and are within the VIN breakpoints provided below, should be checked for vehicle eligibility in the appropriate system listed below. Important: Dealers are to confirm vehicle eligibility prior to beginning repairs by using the GM Vehicle Inquiry System (GMVIS). Not all vehicles within the above breakpoints may be involved. Parts Information US Only: Connector seals will be shipped from the Warranty Parts Center (WPC) at no charge via UPS 2-Day Delivery - Attention: Parts Manager, to dealers with involved vehicles beginning Friday, July 24, 2009. All dealers who have involved vehicles should have the seals no later than Wednesday, July 29, 2009. Seals needed for dealer-trades are to be obtained by calling the WPC, and requesting WPC P/N 479. Canada Only: Connector seals will be available by calling the WINS Assistance Centre. The seals will be shipped at no charge via Overnight Delivery. Only dealers with affected vehicles should call for these parts Service Procedure 1. Unlock the vehicle and open the door. 2. Place the key FOB on the driver seat (avoid inadvertent FOB key press). 3. Release the hood latch. 4. Exit the vehicle and close the door. 5. Open the hood of the vehicle. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Multiple Junction Connector: > 09167 > Jul > 09 > Campaign - Missing Seal/Engine-to-Body Inline Connector > Page 8207 6. Locate the engine-to-body inline connector (4). This connector (4) is located on the passenger side of the engine compartment near the shock tower (1), air cleaner outlet duct (2), and air cleaner assembly (3). Refer to the illustration. 7. Remove the connector from the shock tower (1) by gently pulling the connector rearward and away from the shock tower. 8. Disengage the connection by pressing the side of the connector and pulling the grey lever to the back. 9. Install a new connector seal. Inspect the connector seal to ensure that the connector seal is not cracked, cut, or damaged. 1. Place one edge of the seal over one edge of the terminal housing as shown. Using both hands, stretch the remaining seal around the terminal housing. 2. Verify that the seal is seated properly around terminal housing. There must be NO TWISTING of the seal and it MUST sit flush as shown in the illustration. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Multiple Junction Connector: > 09167 > Jul > 09 > Campaign - Missing Seal/Engine-to-Body Inline Connector > Page 8208 3. Using tool number 12094441 or a wooden craft tool, gently push the seal to the back of connector, applying pressure to all four sides of the seal evenly. 4. Rotate the connector to the side of the clip and look through the connector window to verify that the seal is fully seated at the back of connector. Refer to the illustration to view an improperly (1) and properly installed (2) connector seal. 10. Engage both connectors and verify that the lever is fully locked by attempting to open it without pressing on the unlocking tabs. 11. Install the connector (2) on the connector clip located on the shock tower (1). Pull on the connector to ensure that it is secure on the clip. 12. Close the hood. 13. Open the front driver's side door. 14. Sit in the driver's seat and close the door. Note If the vehicle passes ALL of the inspection points outlined in Steps 15-20, no further action is required. If the vehicle does NOT pass all inspection points, ensure that the connector pins are NOT bent and that the connector is seated and locked properly. Repeat Steps 15-20 if required to ensure proper installation of the seal and connector. 15. Turn the key to the RUN position. Do NOT start the engine. If the engine telltale (MIL) is ON solid, the vehicle PASSES this inspection point. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Multiple Junction Connector: > 09167 > Jul > 09 > Campaign - Missing Seal/Engine-to-Body Inline Connector > Page 8209 16. Turn the key to crank (start engine). If the engine starts, the vehicle PASSES this inspection point. 17. Wait 10 seconds, if the engine telltale (MIL) is OFF, the vehicle PASSES this inspection point. 18. Push ECO button next to shifter knob (present only on 4 cylinder engine). If the ECO telltale comes ON, the vehicle PASSES this inspection point. 19. Turn the steering wheel 1/4 turn. If the steering wheel is easy to turn, power assist is present. The vehicle PASSES this inspection point. 20. Press accelerator pedal. If the engine RPMs increase, the vehicle PASSES this inspection point. Claim Information Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Multiple Junction Connector: > 07-06-04-019D > Jun > 10 > Electrical - Intermittent MIL/DTC P2138/Reduced Power Multiple Junction Connector: All Technical Service Bulletins Electrical - Intermittent MIL/DTC P2138/Reduced Power TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 07-06-04-019D Date: June 28, 2010 Subject: Intermittent Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) Illuminated, DTC P2138 with Reduced Engine Power (Repair Instrument Panel (IP) to Body Harness Connector) Models: 2005-2011 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (Including Saturn) 2005-2009 HUMMER H2 2006-2010 HUMMER H3 2005-2009 Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the model years and warranty information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 07-06-04-019C (Section 06 - Engine/Propulsion System) Condition - Some customers may comment on an intermittent malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) being Illuminated with a message or an indicator that displays Reduced Engine Power. - The technician may observe on a scan tool DTC P2138 - Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor 1-2 Correlation set as Current or in History. Cause This condition may be caused by water intrusion into the instrument panel (IP) to body harness connector, which carries the APP sensor signals to the ECM/PCM. This water intrusion results in a voltage difference between APP Sensor 1 and APP Sensor 2 that exceeds a predetermined value for more than a calibrated period of time, setting P2138. Correction Note Aftermarket equipment can generate DTC P2138 and/or other DTCs. 1. Verify that aftermarket equipment is not electrically connected to any of the APP sensor signal or low reference circuits or to any other ECM/PCM 5V reference or low reference circuits. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories in SI. 2. Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle. ‹› If any 5V reference DTCs are set, refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle. ‹› If any 5V reference DTCs are not set, proceed to Step 3. 3. Locate the IP to body harness connector, which may be located in and around the left hand kick panel area or inside the IP. Depending on the vehicle and model year, refer to Wiring Systems or Power and Signal Distribution in SI. Note Some examples of potential water leaks are: A-pillar seals, sunroof drain lines (if equipped) and windshield/cowl sealing. 4. Inspect for a water leak in the area. If necessary use a water hose to determine the source of the leak. Refer to General Information > Water Leaks in SI. ‹› If a water leak is observed, repair as necessary. Verify the effectiveness of the repair. 5. Inspect the IP to body harness connector terminals for corrosion and debris. Refer to Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections in SI. ‹› If any corrosion and/or debris is observed, repair as necessary. 6. After completing the repair, verify the proper operation of the system. Depending on the vehicle and model year, perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification procedure or refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle in SI. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Multiple Junction Connector: > 07-06-04-019D > Jun > 10 > Electrical - Intermittent MIL/DTC P2138/Reduced Power > Page 8215 Warranty Information (excluding Saab U.S. Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the appropriate labor operation for the source of the water leak Warranty Information (Saab U.S. Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Multiple Junction Connector: > 09167 > Jul > 09 > Campaign - Missing Seal/Engine-to-Body Inline Connector Multiple Junction Connector: All Technical Service Bulletins Campaign - Missing Seal/Engine-to-Body Inline Connector SERVICE UPDATE Bulletin No.: 09167 Date: July 23, 2009 Subject: 09167 - Service Update for Inventory and Customer Vehicles Missing Seal on Engine-to-Body Inline Connector - Expires with Base Warranty Models: 2010 Chevrolet Equinox THIS SERVICE UPDATE INCLUDES VEHICLES IN DEALER INVENTORY AND CUSTOMER VEHICLES THAT RETURN TO THE DEALERSHIP FOR ANY REASON. IT WILL EXPIRE AT THE END OF THE INVOLVED VEHICLE'S NEW VEHICLE LIMITED WARRANTY PERIOD. Purpose This bulletin provides a service procedure to install a connector seal to the engine-to-body inline connector on certain 2010 model year Chevrolet Equinox vehicles. These vehicles are missing a seal on the engine-to-body inline connector. This service procedure should be completed as soon as possible on involved vehicles currently in dealer inventory and customer vehicles that return to the dealer for any type of service during the New Vehicle Limited Warranty coverage period. Vehicles Involved A list of involved vehicles currently in dealer inventory is available on the "Service Update Bulletin Information" link under the "Service" tab in GM GlobalConnect (US), or attached to the Dealer Communication (Canada), used to release this bulletin. Customer vehicles that return for service, for any reason, and are still covered under the vehicles base warranty, and are within the VIN breakpoints provided below, should be checked for vehicle eligibility in the appropriate system listed below. Important: Dealers are to confirm vehicle eligibility prior to beginning repairs by using the GM Vehicle Inquiry System (GMVIS). Not all vehicles within the above breakpoints may be involved. Parts Information US Only: Connector seals will be shipped from the Warranty Parts Center (WPC) at no charge via UPS 2-Day Delivery - Attention: Parts Manager, to dealers with involved vehicles beginning Friday, July 24, 2009. All dealers who have involved vehicles should have the seals no later than Wednesday, July 29, 2009. Seals needed for dealer-trades are to be obtained by calling the WPC, and requesting WPC P/N 479. Canada Only: Connector seals will be available by calling the WINS Assistance Centre. The seals will be shipped at no charge via Overnight Delivery. Only dealers with affected vehicles should call for these parts Service Procedure 1. Unlock the vehicle and open the door. 2. Place the key FOB on the driver seat (avoid inadvertent FOB key press). 3. Release the hood latch. 4. Exit the vehicle and close the door. 5. Open the hood of the vehicle. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Multiple Junction Connector: > 09167 > Jul > 09 > Campaign - Missing Seal/Engine-to-Body Inline Connector > Page 8221 6. Locate the engine-to-body inline connector (4). This connector (4) is located on the passenger side of the engine compartment near the shock tower (1), air cleaner outlet duct (2), and air cleaner assembly (3). Refer to the illustration. 7. Remove the connector from the shock tower (1) by gently pulling the connector rearward and away from the shock tower. 8. Disengage the connection by pressing the side of the connector and pulling the grey lever to the back. 9. Install a new connector seal. Inspect the connector seal to ensure that the connector seal is not cracked, cut, or damaged. 1. Place one edge of the seal over one edge of the terminal housing as shown. Using both hands, stretch the remaining seal around the terminal housing. 2. Verify that the seal is seated properly around terminal housing. There must be NO TWISTING of the seal and it MUST sit flush as shown in the illustration. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Multiple Junction Connector: > 09167 > Jul > 09 > Campaign - Missing Seal/Engine-to-Body Inline Connector > Page 8222 3. Using tool number 12094441 or a wooden craft tool, gently push the seal to the back of connector, applying pressure to all four sides of the seal evenly. 4. Rotate the connector to the side of the clip and look through the connector window to verify that the seal is fully seated at the back of connector. Refer to the illustration to view an improperly (1) and properly installed (2) connector seal. 10. Engage both connectors and verify that the lever is fully locked by attempting to open it without pressing on the unlocking tabs. 11. Install the connector (2) on the connector clip located on the shock tower (1). Pull on the connector to ensure that it is secure on the clip. 12. Close the hood. 13. Open the front driver's side door. 14. Sit in the driver's seat and close the door. Note If the vehicle passes ALL of the inspection points outlined in Steps 15-20, no further action is required. If the vehicle does NOT pass all inspection points, ensure that the connector pins are NOT bent and that the connector is seated and locked properly. Repeat Steps 15-20 if required to ensure proper installation of the seal and connector. 15. Turn the key to the RUN position. Do NOT start the engine. If the engine telltale (MIL) is ON solid, the vehicle PASSES this inspection point. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Multiple Junction Connector: > 09167 > Jul > 09 > Campaign - Missing Seal/Engine-to-Body Inline Connector > Page 8223 16. Turn the key to crank (start engine). If the engine starts, the vehicle PASSES this inspection point. 17. Wait 10 seconds, if the engine telltale (MIL) is OFF, the vehicle PASSES this inspection point. 18. Push ECO button next to shifter knob (present only on 4 cylinder engine). If the ECO telltale comes ON, the vehicle PASSES this inspection point. 19. Turn the steering wheel 1/4 turn. If the steering wheel is easy to turn, power assist is present. The vehicle PASSES this inspection point. 20. Press accelerator pedal. If the engine RPMs increase, the vehicle PASSES this inspection point. Claim Information Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name Multiple Junction Connector: Diagrams Connector End Views By Name A3 - B39 Component Connector End Views A3L Sunshade - Left Front A3R Sunshade - Right Front Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8226 A6C Fuel Pump and Level Sensor Assembly - Primary Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8227 A9A Outside Rearview Mirror - Driver Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8228 A9B Outside Rearview Mirror - Passenger Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8229 A10 Inside Rearview Mirror (UVC with UYS or PCJ or without UVC or UYS or PCJ) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8230 A10 Inside Rearview Mirror (UVC without UYS or PCJ) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8231 A11 Radio X1 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8232 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8233 A11 Radio X3 (UWG) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8234 A11 Radio X4 (UYS or PCJ) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8235 A20 Radio/HVAC Controls Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8236 A23C Liftgate Latch Assembly (TB4) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8237 A23C Liftgate Latch Assembly (TB5) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8238 A23D Door Latch Assembly - Driver Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8239 A23LR Door Latch Assembly - Left Rear Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8240 A23P Door Latch Assembly - Passenger Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8241 A23RR Door Latch Assembly - Right Rear Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8242 B1 A/C Refrigerant Pressure Sensor Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8243 B5LF Wheel Speed Sensor - Left Front Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8244 B5LR Wheel Speed Sensor - Left Rear Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8245 B5RF Wheel Speed Sensor - Right Front Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8246 B5RR Wheel Speed Sensor - Right Rear Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8247 B7E Air Temperature Sensor - Duct Right Lower (C68) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8248 B7J Air Temperature Sensor - Duct Right Upper (C68) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8249 B9 Ambient Air Temperature Sensor B10 Ambient Light Sensor (C67) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8250 B10B Ambient Light/Sunload Sensor (C68) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8251 B17 Barometric Pressure Sensor (LF1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8252 B18 Battery Current Sensor Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8253 B19B Brake Booster Vacuum Sensor Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8254 B20 Brake Fluid Level Switch B22 Brake Pedal Position Sensor Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8255 B23A Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 1 Exhaust (LF1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8256 B23B Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 1 Intake (LF1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8257 B23C Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 2 Exhaust (LF1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8258 B23D Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 2 Intake (LF1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8259 B23E Camshaft Position Sensor - Exhaust (LAF) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8260 B23F Camshaft Position Sensor - Intake (LAF) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8261 B24 Cellular Phone Microphone (UE1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8262 B26 Crankshaft Position Sensor Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8263 B34 Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor (LAF) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8264 B34 Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor (LF1) B37 Engine Oil Pressure Switch (LAF) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8265 B37 Engine Oil Pressure Switch (LF1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8266 B39 A/C Evaporator Temperature Sensor Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8267 B46 - C1 B46B Fuel Level Sensor - Secondary Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8268 B47 Fuel Pressure Sensor Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8269 B47B Fuel Rail Pressure Sensor Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8270 B52A Heated Oxygen Sensor 1 (LAF) B52B Heated Oxygen Sensor 2 (LAF) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8271 B52C Heated Oxygen Sensor - Bank 1 Sensor 1 (LF1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8272 B52D Heated Oxygen Sensor - Bank 1 Sensor 2 (LF1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8273 B52E Heated Oxygen Sensor - Bank 2 Sensor 1 (LF1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8274 B52F Heated Oxygen Sensor - Bank 2 Sensor 2 (LF1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8275 B55 Hood Ajar Switch (BTV) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8276 B59L Front Impact Sensor - Left Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8277 B59R Front Impact Sensor - Right Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8278 B63LF Side Impact Sensor - Left Front Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8279 B63LR Side Impact Sensor - Left Rear Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8280 B63RF Side Impact Sensor - Right Front Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8281 B63RR Side Impact Sensor - Right Rear Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8282 B68 Knock Sensor (LAF) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8283 B68A Knock Sensor 1 (LF1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8284 B68B Knock Sensor 2 (LF1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8285 B70 Liftgate Close Switch (TB5) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8286 B71L Liftgate Object Sensor - Left (TB5) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8287 B71R Liftgate Object Sensor - Right (TB5) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8288 B74 Manifold Absolute Pressure Sensor Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8289 B75B Mass Air Flow/Intake Air Temperature Sensor Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8290 B77F Radio Volume Compensator Interior Noise Microphone - Front (VQN) B77R Radio Volume Compensator Interior Noise Microphone - Rear (VQN) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8291 B78E Rear Object Sensor - Left Middle (UD7) B78F Rear Object Sensor - Right Middle (UD7) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8292 B78G Rear Object Sensor - Left Outer (UD7) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8293 B78H Rear Object Sensor - Right Outer (UD7) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8294 B80 Park Brake Switch B87 Rearview Camera (UVC) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8295 B88D Seat Belt Switch - Driver Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8296 B88P Seat Belt Switch - Passenger B99 Steering Wheel Angle Sensor Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8297 B101 Immobilizer Antenna Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8298 B107 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8299 B119 Multi-axis Acceleration Sensor Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8300 B150 Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8301 C1 Battery C1 Battery C1 Battery + Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8302 E1 - E37 E1C Accent Lamp - Driver Door Handle (TSQ) E1D Accent Lamp - Driver Door (TSQ) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8303 E1J Accent Lamp - Left Lower Instrument Panel Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8304 E1K Accent Lamp - Right Lower Instrument Panel Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8305 E1L Accent Lamp - Overhead Console (TSQ) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8306 E1M Accent Lamp - Passenger Door Handle (TSQ) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8307 E1P Accent Lamp - Passenger Door (TSQ) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8308 E1S Accent Lamp - Console Cupholder Right Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8309 E2LF Side Marker Lamp - Left Front Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8310 E2LR Side Marker Lamp - Left Rear Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8311 E2RF Side Marker Lamp - Right Front Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8312 E2RR Side Marker Lamp - Right Rear Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8313 E4E Head Lamp - Left High Beam Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8314 E4F Head Lamp - Right High Beam Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8315 E4G Head Lamp - Left Low Beam Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8316 E4H Head Lamp - Right Low Beam Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8317 E4N Park/Turn Signal Lamp - Left Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8318 E4P Park/Turn Signal Lamp - Right Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8319 E5A Backup Lamp - Left Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8320 E5AC Tail/Turn Signal Lamp - Left Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8321 E5AD Tail/Turn Signal Lamp - Right Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8322 E5B Backup Lamp - Right Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8323 E5J Tail Lamp - Left Lower (GMC) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8324 E5K Tail Lamp - Right Lower (GMC) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8325 E5M Tail Lamp - Left Upper (GMC) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8326 E5N Tail Lamp - Right Upper (GMC) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8327 E6 Center High Mounted Stop Lamp Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8328 E7L License Plate Lamp - Left Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8329 E7R License Plate Lamp - Right Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8330 E8J Instrument Panel Courtesy Lamp - Left (TSQ) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8331 E8K Instrument Panel Courtesy Lamp - Right (TSQ) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8332 E14A Seat Heating Element - Driver Back (KA1 or SPO Accessory) E14B Seat Heating Element - Driver Cushion (KA1 or SPO Accessory) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8333 E14C Seat Heating Element - Passenger Back (KA1 or SPO Accessory) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8334 E14D Seat Heating Element - Passenger Cushion (KA1 or SPO Accessory) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8335 E18 Rear Defogger Grid X1 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8336 E18 Rear Defogger Grid X2 E28 Center Console Compartment Lamp (TSP or TSQ) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8337 E29LF Fog Lamp - Left Front (T96) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8338 E29RF Fog Lamp - Right Front (T96) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8339 E37EL Dome/Reading Lamps - Front Overhead Console Left Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8340 E37ER Dome/Reading Lamps - Front Overhead Console Right Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8341 E37M Dome/Reading Lamps - Middle Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8342 E37R Dome/Reading Lamps - Rear Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8343 F105 - K27 F105 Passenger Instrument Panel Air Bag X1 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8344 F105 Passenger Instrument Panel Air Bag X2 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8345 F105L Roof Rail Air Bag - Left Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8346 F105R Roof Rail Air Bag - Right Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8347 F106L Side Air Bag - Left Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8348 F106R Side Air Bag - Right Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8349 F107 Steering Wheel Air Bag X1 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8350 F107 Steering Wheel Air Bag X2 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8351 F112D Seat Belt Retractor Pretensioner - Driver Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8352 F112P Seat Belt Retractor Pretensioner - Passenger Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8353 F113D Seat Belt Anchor Pretensioner - Driver Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8354 F113P Seat Belt Anchor Pretensioner - Passenger Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8355 G6 Brake Booster Pump - Auxiliary Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8356 G10 Cooling Fan Motor (LAF) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8357 G10L Cooling Fan Motor - Left (LF1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8358 G10R Cooling Fan Motor - Right (LF1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8359 G13 Generator X1 G13 Generator X2 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8360 G18 High Pressure Fuel Pump Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8361 G24 Windshield Washer Pump K8 Blower Motor Control Module X1 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8362 K8 Blower Motor Control Module X2 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8363 K9 Body Control Module X1 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8364 K9 Body Control Module X2 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8365 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8366 K9 Body Control Module X3 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8367 K9 Body Control Module X4 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8368 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8369 K9 Body Control Module X5 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8370 K9 Body Control Module X6 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8371 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8372 K9 Body Control Module X7 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8373 K17 Electronic Brake Control Module Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8374 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8375 K20 Engine Control Module X1 (LAF) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8376 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8377 K20 Engine Control Module X1 (LF1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8378 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8379 K20 Engine Control Module X2 (LAF) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8380 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8381 K20 Engine Control Module X2 (LF1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8382 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8383 K20 Engine Control Module X3 (LAF) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8384 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8385 K20 Engine Control Module X3 (LF1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8386 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8387 K27 Fuel Pump Control Module Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8388 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8389 K29 - M55 K29 Seat Heating Control Module X1 (KA1 without LTZ or SLT) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8390 K29 Seat Heating Control Module X1 (SPO Accessory) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8391 K29 Seat Heating Control Module X2 (KA1 without LTZ or SLT) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8392 K29 Seat Heating Control Module X3 (KA1 without LTZ or SLT) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8393 K29 Seat Heating Control Module X3 (SPO Accessory) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8394 K29 Seat Heating Control Module X4 (SPO Accessory) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8395 K29 Seat Heating Control Module X5 (SPO Accessory) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8396 K33 HVAC Control Module X1 (C68) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8397 K33 HVAC Control Module X2 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8398 K33 HVAC Control Module X3 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8399 K36 Inflatable Restraint Sensing and Diagnostic Module X1 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8400 K36 Inflatable Restraint Sensing and Diagnostic Module X2 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8401 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8402 K39 Liftgate Control Module X1 (TB5) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8403 K39 Liftgate Control Module X2 (TB5) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8404 K39 Liftgate Control Module X3 (TB5) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8405 K40 Seat Memory Control Module X1 (LTZ or SLT) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8406 K40 Seat Memory Control Module X2 (LTZ or SLT) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8407 K40 Seat Memory Control Module X3 (KA1 with LTZ or SLT) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8408 K40 Seat Memory Control Module X4 (LTZ or SLT) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8409 K40 Seat Memory Control Module X5 (LTZ or SLT) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8410 K41 Parking Assist Control Module X1 (UD7) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8411 K41 Parking Assist Control Module X2 (UD7) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8412 K43 Power Steering Control Module X1 (LAF) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8413 K43 Power Steering Control Module X2 (LAF) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8414 K43 Power Steering Control Module X3 (LAF) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8415 K47 Rear Differential Clutch Control Module (F46) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8416 K73 Telematics Communication Interface Control Module X1 (UE1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8417 K73 Telematics Communication Interface Control Module X2 (UE1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8418 K77 Remote Control Door Lock Receiver Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8419 K85 Passenger Presence Detection Module Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8420 K96L Mirror Control Module - Left (LTZ or SLT) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8421 K108 Active Noise Cancellation Module (VQN) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8422 M6 Air Temperature Door Actuator Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8423 M8 Blower Motor Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8424 M17 Liftgate Motor Assembly (TB5) M37 Mode Door Actuator M45 Rear Wiper Motor Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8425 M46 Air Recirculation Door Motor Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8426 M50D Seat Front Vertical Motor - Driver (AE8) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8427 M51D Seat Horizontal Motor - Driver (AE8) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8428 M52D Seat Lumbar Support Horizontal Motor - Driver M55D Seat Rear Vertical Motor - Driver Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8429 M56 - Q6 M56D Seat Recline Motor - Driver (AE8) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8430 M64 Starter Motor X1 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8431 M64 Starter Motor X2 (Positive Battery Cable) (LAF) M64 Starter Motor X2 (Positive Battery Cable) (LF1) M64 Starter Motor X2 (Generator Harness) (LAF) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8432 M64 Starter Motor X2 (Generator Harness) (LF1) M69 Sunroof Motor (CF5) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8433 M74D Window Motor - Driver Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8434 M74LR Window Motor - Left Rear Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8435 M74P Window Motor - Passenger Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8436 M74RR Window Motor - Right Rear Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8437 M75 Windshield Wiper Motor Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8438 M93 Ignition Cylinder Lock Control Solenoid Actuator Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8439 P2 Transmission Shift Lever Position Indicator Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8440 P12A Horn - High Note Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8441 P12B Horn - Low Note Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8442 P14 Passenger Air Bag Disable Indicator Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8443 P15 Rear Parking Assist Rear Indicators (UD7) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8444 P16 Instrument Cluster Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8445 P17 Info Display Module (UYS or PCJ) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8446 P17 Info Display Module (without UYS or PCJ) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8447 P19AC Speaker - Subwoofer (UZ8) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8448 P19B Speaker - Center Instrument Panel (UZ8) P19G Speaker - Left Front (UW6) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8449 P19G Speaker - Left Front (UZ8) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8450 P19H Speaker - Left Front Tweeter Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8451 P19K Speaker - Left Rear (UW6) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8452 P19K Speaker - Left Rear (UZ8) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8453 P19U Speaker - Right Front (UW6) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8454 P19U Speaker - Right Front (UZ8) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8455 P19V Speaker - Right Front Tweeter Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8456 P19X Speaker - Right Rear (UW6) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8457 P19X Speaker - Right Rear (UZ8) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8458 P22E Video Display - Driver Seatback (UWG) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8459 P22F Video Display - Passenger Seatback (UWG) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8460 Q2 A/C Compressor Clutch Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8461 Q6A Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Bank 1 Exhaust (LF1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8462 Q6B Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Bank 1 Intake (LF1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8463 Q6C Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Bank 2 Exhaust (LF1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8464 Q6D Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Bank 2 Intake (LF1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8465 Q6E Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Exhaust (LAF) Q6F Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Intake (LAF) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8466 Q8 - S70 Q8 Control Solenoid Valve Assembly X1 (MH7 or MHC) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8467 Q8 Control Solenoid Valve Assembly X1 (MH2 or MH4) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8468 Q8 Control Solenoid Valve Assembly X2 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8469 Q8 Control Solenoid Valve Assembly X3 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8470 Q8 Control Solenoid Valve Assembly X4 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8471 Q12 Evaporative Emission Purge Solenoid Valve (LAF) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8472 Q12 Evaporative Emission Purge Solenoid Valve (LF1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8473 Q13 Evaporative Emission Vent Solenoid Valve Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8474 Q17A Fuel Injector 1 (LAF) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8475 Q17A Fuel Injector 1 (LF1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8476 Q17B Fuel Injector 2 (LAF) Q17B Fuel Injector 2 (LF1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8477 Q17C Fuel Injector 3 (LAF) Q17C Fuel Injector 3 (LF1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8478 Q17D Fuel Injector 4 (LAF) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8479 Q17D Fuel Injector 4 (LF1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8480 Q17E Fuel Injector 5 (LF1) Q17F Fuel Injector 6 (LF1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8481 Q38 Throttle Body R6 Data Link Resistor Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8482 R10 Cooling Fan Resistor (LAF) S3 Transmission Shift Lever Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8483 S12 Dome Lamp Switch Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8484 S32D Seat Heating Switch - Driver (SPO Accessory) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8485 S33 Horn Switch Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8486 S36 Instrument Panel Dimmer Switch Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8487 S39 Ignition Switch Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8488 S45B Liftgate Control Switch - Interior (TB5) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8489 S46 Liftgate Handle Switch Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8490 S47D Seat Memory Switch - Driver (LTZ or SLT) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8491 S52 Outside Rearview Mirror Switch Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8492 S64D Seat Adjuster Switch - Driver (AE8 or LTZ or SLT) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8493 S64D Seat Adjuster Switch - Driver (without AE8 or LTZ or SLT) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8494 S65D Seat Lumbar Support Switch - Driver Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8495 S70L Steering Wheel Controls Switch - Left Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8496 S70R Steering Wheel Controls Switch - Right (UK3) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8497 S72 - X88 S72 Sunroof Switch (CF5) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8498 S75 Traction Control Switch Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8499 S78 Turn Signal/Multifunction Switch Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8500 S79D Window Switch - Driver Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8501 S79LR Window Switch - Left Rear Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8502 S79P Window Switch - Passenger X1 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8503 S79P Window Switch - Passenger X2 (LTZ or SLT) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8504 S79RR Window Switch - Right Rear Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8505 S82 Windshield Wiper/Washer Switch Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8506 S88 Sunroof Tilt Switch (CF5) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8507 S112 Fuel Economy Mode Switch Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8508 T3 Audio Amplifier X1 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8509 T3 Audio Amplifier X2 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8510 T3 Audio Amplifier X3 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8511 T8A Ignition Coil 1 (LAF) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8512 T8A Ignition Coil 1 (LF1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8513 T8B Ignition Coil 2 (LAF) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8514 T8B Ignition Coil 2 (LF1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8515 T8C Ignition Coil 3 (LAF) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8516 T8C Ignition Coil 3 (LF1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8517 T8D Ignition Coil 4 (LAF) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8518 T8D Ignition Coil 4 (LF1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8519 T8E Ignition Coil 5 (LF1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8520 T8F Ignition Coil 6 (LF1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8521 T11 Multimedia Player Interface Module (KTA) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8522 X80A Accessory Power Receptacle - Center Console 1 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8523 X80B Accessory Power Receptacle - Center Console 2 X80G Accessory Power Receptacle - Instrument Panel Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8524 X80R Accessory Power Receptacle - Rear Compartment X82 Audio/Video Input Adapter (UWG) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8525 X83 Auxiliary Audio Input (without UWG) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8526 X84 Data Link Connector Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8527 X85 Steering Wheel Air Bag Coil X1 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8528 X85 Steering Wheel Air Bag Coil X2 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8529 X85 Steering Wheel Air Bag Coil X3 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8530 X88 Trailer Connector (V92) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8531 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8532 Multiple Junction Connector: Diagrams Connector End Views By Number X108 Inline Harness Connector End Views X108 Engine Harness to Fuel Injector Bank 1 Harness (LF1) X109 X109 Engine Harness to Fuel Injector Bank 2 Harness (LF1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8533 X110 X110 Forward Lamp Harness to Left Front Lamp Harness Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8534 X112 X112 Engine Harness to Body Harness Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8535 X115 X115 Forward Lamp Harness to Body Harness Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8536 X116 X116 Forward Lamp Harness to Engine Cooling Fan Harness (LAF) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8537 X116 Forward Lamp Harness to Engine Cooling Fan Harness (LF1) X120 X120 Forward Lamp Harness to Right Front Lamp Harness Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8538 X121 X121 Body Harness to Negative Battery Cable Harness X136 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8539 X136 Engine Harness to Fuel Injector Harness (LAF) X203 X203 Airbag Extension Harness to Instrument Panel Harness Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8540 X206 X206 Body Harness to Instrument Panel Harness Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8541 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8542 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8543 X209 X209 Instrument Panel Harness to Headliner Harness Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8544 X210 X210 Instrument Panel Harness to Body Harness Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8545 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8546 X211 X211 Console Harness to Instrument Panel Harness Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8547 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8548 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8549 X213 X213 Instrument Panel Harness to POA HVAC Extension Harness X214 X214 Console Harness to CD Slot Extension Harness Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8550 X215 X215 Console Harness to Seat Heating Power Extension Harness (SPO Accessory) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8551 X302 X302 Driver Seat Cushion Harness to Driver Seat Back Harness Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8552 X300 X300 Headliner Harness to Body Harness X303 X303 Passenger Seat Back Harness to Passenger Seat Cushion Harness Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8553 X304 X304 Driver Seat Back Harness to Driver Seat Cushion Harness Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8554 X307 X307 Driver Seat Back Harness to Instrument Panel Harness (UWG) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8555 X308 X308 Body Harness to Driver Seat Cushion Harness Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8556 X310 X310 Body Harness to Passenger Seat Cushion Harness Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8557 X315 X315 Headliner Harness to Overhead Console Harness Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8558 X316 X316 Overhead Console Harness to Dome/Reading Lamps Harness X309 X309 Passenger Seat Back Harness to Instrument Panel Harness (UWG) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8559 X401 X401 Headliner Harness to Body Harness Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8560 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8561 X405 X405 Body Harness to POA Fuel Tank Harness Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8562 X406 X406 Body Harness to Rear Bumper Harness (UD7) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8563 X407 X407 Body Harness to Left Rear Lamp Harness Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8564 X408 X408 Body Harness to Right Rear Lamp Harness Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8565 X411 X411 Body Harness to Chassis Harness X416 X416 Headliner Harness to POA Sunroof Harness (CF5) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8566 X444 X444 Trailer Extension Harness to Body Harness (V92) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8567 X450 X450 Trailer Pigtail Harness to Trailer Extension Harness (V92) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8568 X500 X500 Body Harness to Driver Door Harness Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8569 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8570 X505 X505 Driver Door Harness to Driver Door Trim Harness Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8571 X600 X600 Body Harness to Passenger Door Harness Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8572 X605 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8573 X605 Passenger Door Harness to Passenger Door Trim Harness Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8574 X700 - X799 X700 Body Harness to Left Rear Door Harness Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8575 X800 - X899 X800 Body Harness to Right Rear Door Harness Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8576 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8577 X900 X900 Body Harness to Liftgate Harness Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8578 X901 X901 Body Harness to Liftgate Harness Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8579 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8580 X902 X902 Liftgate Harness to Left Rear Lamp Harness (GMC) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8581 X903 X903 Liftgate Harness to Right Rear Lamp Harness (GMC) X904 X904 License Lamp Harness to Liftgate Harness Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8582 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8583 Multiple Junction Connector: Diagrams Splices By Number JX201 Splice Pack Connector End Views JX201 JX202 Splice Pack Connector End Views JX202 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 8584 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Relay > Component Information > Service and Repair > Relay Replacement (Attached to Wire Harness) Power Distribution Relay: Service and Repair Relay Replacement (Attached to Wire Harness) Relay Replacement (Attached to Wire Harness) Removal Procedure 1. Locate the relay. Refer to the Master Electrical Component List (See: Locations/Component Locations/A - Z Index) to locate the relay in the vehicle. 2. Remove any fasteners which hold the relay in place. 3. Remove any connector position assurance (CPA) devices or secondary locks. Note: Use care when removing a relay in a wiring harness when the relay is secured by fasteners or tape. 4. Separate the relay (1) from the wire harness connector (2). Installation Procedure 1. Connect the relay (1) to the wire harness connector (2). 2. Install any connector position assurance (CPA) devices or secondary locks. 3. Install the relay using any fasteners or tape that originally held the relay in place. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Relay > Component Information > Service and Repair > Relay Replacement (Attached to Wire Harness) > Page 8589 Power Distribution Relay: Service and Repair Relay Replacement (Within an Electrical Center) Relay Replacement (Within an Electrical Center) Special Tools J 43244 Relay Puller Pliers Removal Procedure 1. Remove the electrical center cover. 2. Locate the relay. Refer to Electrical Center Identification Views (See: Fuse/Application and ID) to locate the electrical center where the relay exists. Note: * Always note the orientation of the relay. * If equipped with a notch style relay; observe the location of the notch on the old relay to verify the new relay is installed with the notch in the same location. * Ensure that the electrical center is secure, as not to put added stress on the wires or terminals. 3. Using the J 43244 (1) position the tool on opposing corners of the relay (2). Caution: Use J43244 to pull the relay straight out from the electrical center terminals. The use of pliers or a flat bladed tool could damage the electrical center. 4. Remove the relay (2) from the electrical center. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Relay > Component Information > Service and Repair > Relay Replacement (Attached to Wire Harness) > Page 8590 1. Install the relay (2) in the same position as removed. 2. Install the electrical center cover. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Accessory Relay > Component Information > Locations Accessory Relay: Locations Electrical Center Identification Views X51A Fuse Block - Instrument Panel Label (before A6284015) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Accessory Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 8595 X51A Fuse Block - Instrument Panel Label (A6284015 and after) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Accessory Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 8596 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Accessory Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 8597 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Accessory Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 8598 Accessory Relay: Diagrams X80A Accessory Power Receptacle - Center Console 1 X80B Accessory Power Receptacle - Center Console 2 X80G Accessory Power Receptacle - Instrument Panel Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Accessory Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 8599 X80R Accessory Power Receptacle - Rear Compartment Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Relay > Component Information > Service and Repair > Relay Replacement (Attached to Wire Harness) Power Distribution Relay: Service and Repair Relay Replacement (Attached to Wire Harness) Relay Replacement (Attached to Wire Harness) Removal Procedure 1. Locate the relay. Refer to the Master Electrical Component List (See: Locations/Component Locations/A - Z Index) to locate the relay in the vehicle. 2. Remove any fasteners which hold the relay in place. 3. Remove any connector position assurance (CPA) devices or secondary locks. Note: Use care when removing a relay in a wiring harness when the relay is secured by fasteners or tape. 4. Separate the relay (1) from the wire harness connector (2). Installation Procedure 1. Connect the relay (1) to the wire harness connector (2). 2. Install any connector position assurance (CPA) devices or secondary locks. 3. Install the relay using any fasteners or tape that originally held the relay in place. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Relay > Component Information > Service and Repair > Relay Replacement (Attached to Wire Harness) > Page 8604 Power Distribution Relay: Service and Repair Relay Replacement (Within an Electrical Center) Relay Replacement (Within an Electrical Center) Special Tools J 43244 Relay Puller Pliers Removal Procedure 1. Remove the electrical center cover. 2. Locate the relay. Refer to Electrical Center Identification Views (See: Fuse/Application and ID) to locate the electrical center where the relay exists. Note: * Always note the orientation of the relay. * If equipped with a notch style relay; observe the location of the notch on the old relay to verify the new relay is installed with the notch in the same location. * Ensure that the electrical center is secure, as not to put added stress on the wires or terminals. 3. Using the J 43244 (1) position the tool on opposing corners of the relay (2). Caution: Use J43244 to pull the relay straight out from the electrical center terminals. The use of pliers or a flat bladed tool could damage the electrical center. 4. Remove the relay (2) from the electrical center. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Relay > Component Information > Service and Repair > Relay Replacement (Attached to Wire Harness) > Page 8605 1. Install the relay (2) in the same position as removed. 2. Install the electrical center cover. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood Relay Box: Application and ID Fuse Block - Underhood Electrical Center Identification Views X50A Fuse Block - Underhood, Label Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 8610 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 8611 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 8612 X50A Fuse Block - Underhood, Top View X50A Fuse Block - Underhood, Bottom View Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 8613 X50A Fuse Block - Underhood X1 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 8614 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 8615 X50A Fuse Block - Underhood X2 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 8616 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 8617 X50A Fuse Block - Underhood X3 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 8618 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 8619 X50A Fuse Block - Underhood X4 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 8620 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 8621 X50A Fuse Block - Underhood X5 X50A Fuse Block - Underhood X6 (LAF) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 8622 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 8623 Relay Box: Application and ID Fuse Block - Instrument Panel Label Electrical Center Identification Views X51A Fuse Block - Instrument Panel Label (before A6284015) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 8624 X51A Fuse Block - Instrument Panel Label (A6284015 and after) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 8625 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 8626 X51A Fuse Block - Instrument Panel, Top View X51A Fuse Block - Instrument Panel, Bottom View Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 8627 X51A Fuse Block - Instrument Panel Wire Entry Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 8628 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 8629 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 8630 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood Relay Box: Application and ID Fuse Block - Underhood Electrical Center Identification Views X50A Fuse Block - Underhood, Label Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 8635 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 8636 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 8637 X50A Fuse Block - Underhood, Top View X50A Fuse Block - Underhood, Bottom View Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 8638 X50A Fuse Block - Underhood X1 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 8639 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 8640 X50A Fuse Block - Underhood X2 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 8641 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 8642 X50A Fuse Block - Underhood X3 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 8643 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 8644 X50A Fuse Block - Underhood X4 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 8645 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 8646 X50A Fuse Block - Underhood X5 X50A Fuse Block - Underhood X6 (LAF) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 8647 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 8648 Relay Box: Application and ID Fuse Block - Instrument Panel Label Electrical Center Identification Views X51A Fuse Block - Instrument Panel Label (before A6284015) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 8649 X51A Fuse Block - Instrument Panel Label (A6284015 and after) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 8650 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 8651 X51A Fuse Block - Instrument Panel, Top View X51A Fuse Block - Instrument Panel, Bottom View Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 8652 X51A Fuse Block - Instrument Panel Wire Entry Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 8653 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 8654 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 8655 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 09167 > Jul > 09 > Campaign - Missing Seal/Engine-to-Body Inline Connector Wiring Harness: Recalls Campaign - Missing Seal/Engine-to-Body Inline Connector SERVICE UPDATE Bulletin No.: 09167 Date: July 23, 2009 Subject: 09167 - Service Update for Inventory and Customer Vehicles Missing Seal on Engine-to-Body Inline Connector - Expires with Base Warranty Models: 2010 Chevrolet Equinox THIS SERVICE UPDATE INCLUDES VEHICLES IN DEALER INVENTORY AND CUSTOMER VEHICLES THAT RETURN TO THE DEALERSHIP FOR ANY REASON. IT WILL EXPIRE AT THE END OF THE INVOLVED VEHICLE'S NEW VEHICLE LIMITED WARRANTY PERIOD. Purpose This bulletin provides a service procedure to install a connector seal to the engine-to-body inline connector on certain 2010 model year Chevrolet Equinox vehicles. These vehicles are missing a seal on the engine-to-body inline connector. This service procedure should be completed as soon as possible on involved vehicles currently in dealer inventory and customer vehicles that return to the dealer for any type of service during the New Vehicle Limited Warranty coverage period. Vehicles Involved A list of involved vehicles currently in dealer inventory is available on the "Service Update Bulletin Information" link under the "Service" tab in GM GlobalConnect (US), or attached to the Dealer Communication (Canada), used to release this bulletin. Customer vehicles that return for service, for any reason, and are still covered under the vehicles base warranty, and are within the VIN breakpoints provided below, should be checked for vehicle eligibility in the appropriate system listed below. Important: Dealers are to confirm vehicle eligibility prior to beginning repairs by using the GM Vehicle Inquiry System (GMVIS). Not all vehicles within the above breakpoints may be involved. Parts Information US Only: Connector seals will be shipped from the Warranty Parts Center (WPC) at no charge via UPS 2-Day Delivery - Attention: Parts Manager, to dealers with involved vehicles beginning Friday, July 24, 2009. All dealers who have involved vehicles should have the seals no later than Wednesday, July 29, 2009. Seals needed for dealer-trades are to be obtained by calling the WPC, and requesting WPC P/N 479. Canada Only: Connector seals will be available by calling the WINS Assistance Centre. The seals will be shipped at no charge via Overnight Delivery. Only dealers with affected vehicles should call for these parts Service Procedure 1. Unlock the vehicle and open the door. 2. Place the key FOB on the driver seat (avoid inadvertent FOB key press). 3. Release the hood latch. 4. Exit the vehicle and close the door. 5. Open the hood of the vehicle. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 09167 > Jul > 09 > Campaign - Missing Seal/Engine-to-Body Inline Connector > Page 8664 6. Locate the engine-to-body inline connector (4). This connector (4) is located on the passenger side of the engine compartment near the shock tower (1), air cleaner outlet duct (2), and air cleaner assembly (3). Refer to the illustration. 7. Remove the connector from the shock tower (1) by gently pulling the connector rearward and away from the shock tower. 8. Disengage the connection by pressing the side of the connector and pulling the grey lever to the back. 9. Install a new connector seal. Inspect the connector seal to ensure that the connector seal is not cracked, cut, or damaged. 1. Place one edge of the seal over one edge of the terminal housing as shown. Using both hands, stretch the remaining seal around the terminal housing. 2. Verify that the seal is seated properly around terminal housing. There must be NO TWISTING of the seal and it MUST sit flush as shown in the illustration. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 09167 > Jul > 09 > Campaign - Missing Seal/Engine-to-Body Inline Connector > Page 8665 3. Using tool number 12094441 or a wooden craft tool, gently push the seal to the back of connector, applying pressure to all four sides of the seal evenly. 4. Rotate the connector to the side of the clip and look through the connector window to verify that the seal is fully seated at the back of connector. Refer to the illustration to view an improperly (1) and properly installed (2) connector seal. 10. Engage both connectors and verify that the lever is fully locked by attempting to open it without pressing on the unlocking tabs. 11. Install the connector (2) on the connector clip located on the shock tower (1). Pull on the connector to ensure that it is secure on the clip. 12. Close the hood. 13. Open the front driver's side door. 14. Sit in the driver's seat and close the door. Note If the vehicle passes ALL of the inspection points outlined in Steps 15-20, no further action is required. If the vehicle does NOT pass all inspection points, ensure that the connector pins are NOT bent and that the connector is seated and locked properly. Repeat Steps 15-20 if required to ensure proper installation of the seal and connector. 15. Turn the key to the RUN position. Do NOT start the engine. If the engine telltale (MIL) is ON solid, the vehicle PASSES this inspection point. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 09167 > Jul > 09 > Campaign - Missing Seal/Engine-to-Body Inline Connector > Page 8666 16. Turn the key to crank (start engine). If the engine starts, the vehicle PASSES this inspection point. 17. Wait 10 seconds, if the engine telltale (MIL) is OFF, the vehicle PASSES this inspection point. 18. Push ECO button next to shifter knob (present only on 4 cylinder engine). If the ECO telltale comes ON, the vehicle PASSES this inspection point. 19. Turn the steering wheel 1/4 turn. If the steering wheel is easy to turn, power assist is present. The vehicle PASSES this inspection point. 20. Press accelerator pedal. If the engine RPMs increase, the vehicle PASSES this inspection point. Claim Information Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 11-09-41-001 > Mar > 11 > Restraint System - SIR Light On, DTC B0014/B0021 Set Wiring Harness: Customer Interest Restraint System - SIR Light On, DTC B0014/B0021 Set TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 11-09-41-001 Date: March 10, 2011 Subject: SIR Light On, DTC B0014 and/or B0021 Set in Sensing and Diagnostics Module (SDM) Models: 2010-2011 Chevrolet Equinox 2010-2011 GMC Terrain Condition Some customers may comment that the SIR light is on, or has been on recently. When checking the vehicle for DTCs, the SDM may report any of the following codes: B0014 02, B0014 04, B0014 0D, B0014 0E, B0021 02, B0021 04, B0021 0D or B0021 0E. This condition may be duplicated by moving the front seat forward and backward or by bouncing on the lower cushion on the affected side. Cause The codes can be set when the SDM senses a change in resistance in the circuit for the seat mounted side impact side airbag. The change in resistance can be small and it can be temporary, but the SDM can still sense the change and set a code. In this case, the airbags will work as intended in a crash but the system should be checked for the cause of the resistance change. The source of the issue can be at or in the connector that connects the airbag from the seat to the body harness. Connector X304 (B0014 LF Side Deployment Loop) is located under the driver seat cushion and connector X303 (B0021 RF Side Deployment Loop) is located under the passenger seat cushion. Correction Replace the driver and passenger seat back harness to seat cushion harness connectors with service kit, P/N 20968489. The two gray connector (Christmas tree style) retainers provided in the kit will not be used. The new connector will be secured to the seat using clip, P/N 19258316. Follow the steps below. Important DO NOT replace the sensing and diagnostic module (SDM), side sensors or air bag modules. Important Both driver and passenger seats must be repaired when this concern occurs even if only one DTC code is set. The service kit contains sufficient components to repair both seat connectors. 1. Disable the SIR system. Refer to SIR Disabling and Enabling in SI. Note Only use hand tools to remove the seat to floor mounting bolts. If there are any problems with bolt removal, refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 10-08-50-002. 2. Remove the seat to floor rear mounting bolts. Loosen the seat from the front hooks and tilt it back to expose the underside of the seat. Refer to Driver or Passenger Seat Replacement procedure in SI. 3. Disconnect the seat to body harness connector. Disconnect the seat airbag connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 11-09-41-001 > Mar > 11 > Restraint System - SIR Light On, DTC B0014/B0021 Set > Page 8672 Important Note the wire colors on the seat airbag harness and body harness. Ensure that the wire colors are matched when installing into the new connector. 4. Cut both wires from the body harness connector and seat airbag harness connector as close to the connector housing (1) as possible to minimize wire length loss. Slide the conduit away on the seat airbag harness and remove just enough tape on the body harness to access the wires to install the terminals and seals. Important Use caution when stripping insulation. Take care not to cut through the wire strands. 5. Slide the wire seals onto all four leads back enough to enable removal of the insulation. Install the blue seals (1) on the seat back harness and the white seals (2) on the seat cushion harness. Strip the insulation off all four leads 5 mm (3/16 in). Align the seals with the wire insulation. 6. On the seat back harness, position two FEMALE terminals onto the wires. Caution must be used not to position the wire too far forward as it may interfere with the mating portion of the terminal. Crimp the terminals on to the bare wire using the J38125-7 crimp tool, jaw E (1). Repeat the procedure using two MALE terminals on the seat cushion harness. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 11-09-41-001 > Mar > 11 > Restraint System - SIR Light On, DTC B0014/B0021 Set > Page 8673 7. Position the wire seal to the terminal and crimp the seal and insulation using the J-38125-6 crimp tool, jaw 1 (1). The completed terminal and seal should appear as shown above (seat back harness connector shown). Note Avoid getting solder on the terminal end or overheating the terminal. Warning DO NOT use soldering equipment that is battery or electric powered. These types of soldering irons can induce voltage into the circuit, which may cause inflator module deployment and/or damage to electrical components. Use only the EL-28125-5A Ultra Torch or another butane fueled soldering iron when working on SIR circuits. 8. Solder all four terminals at the wire crimp. 9. Slide the two body harness terminals through the opening of the orange connector position assurance (CPA) (1). Important Ensure that the appropriate wire colors match up (as noted in Step 4) when the connection is made between the seat airbag harness and body harness. 10. Slide all four terminals (2) into the appropriate connector body as shown above. Install the blue terminal position assurance (TPA) devices onto the connector ends. 11. Add NyoGel 760 Lubricant, P/N 12377900 (in Canada, use P/N 10953529) to the terminals on both sides of the connections. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 11-09-41-001 > Mar > 11 > Restraint System - SIR Light On, DTC B0014/B0021 Set > Page 8674 12. Wrap anti-abrasion electrical tape around the two exposed wires on the body harness up to the back of the connector. Obtain "*Woven Polyester (PET) Electrical Tape" (Special Order PN RZ97156A00) from Kent Automotive. Refer to Parts Information below. Reinstall the conduit on the seat airbag harness. 13. Attach the connector to the bottom of the seat using clip, P/N 19258316. 14. Reinstall the seat. Refer to Driver or Passenger Seat Replacement procedure in SI. 15. Repeat the above procedure on the other seat. 16. Enable the SIR system. Refer to SIR Disabling and Enabling in SI. 17. Turn the ignition on and use the diagnostic tool to clear the SDM DTCs and verify that the issue has been corrected. If the code is still current, refer to the appropriate diagnostic procedure found in SI. *We believe this source and their products to be reliable. There may be additional manufacturers of such products/materials. General Motors does not endorse, indicate any preference for or assume any responsibility for the products or material from this firm or for any such items that may be available from other sources. Parts Information Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 10-08-42-001B > Jan > 11 > Lighting - Low Beam Headlamp(s) Inoperative Wiring Harness: Customer Interest Lighting - Low Beam Headlamp(s) Inoperative TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 10-08-42-001B Date: January 24, 2011 Subject: Low Beam Headlamp Bulb Diagnosis/Replacement (Inspect Bulb and Connector) Models: 2008-2011 Buick Enclave 2007-2011 Cadillac Escalade, Escalade ESV, Escalade EXT 2008-2011 Cadillac CTS, CTS-V 2010-2011 Cadillac CTS Sport Wagon, SRX 2007-2011 Chevrolet Avalanche, Silverado, Suburban, Tahoe 2008-2011 Chevrolet Malibu 2009-2011 Chevrolet Traverse 2010-2011 Chevrolet Equinox 2007-2011 GMC Acadia, Sierra, Yukon, Yukon XL, Yukon Denali, Yukon Denali XL 2010-2011 GMC Terrain 2006-2010 Pontiac G6 2007-2010 Saturn AURA, OUTLOOK Attention: This bulletin DOES NOT apply to vehicles equipped with High Intensity Discharge (HID) lamps. Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the part number for the recommended splice sleeve. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 10-08-42-001A (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Condition Some customers may comment that the low beam headlamp is inoperative. Correction DO NOT replace the entire headlamp assembly for this condition. Replace the bulb and inspect the connector following the procedure below. 1. Remove the headlamp bulb. Refer to Headlamp Bulb Replacement procedure in SI. 2. Inspect the connector. - If the connector is NOT discolored or damaged, replace the bulb only. For bulb part numbers, see Headlamp Bulb (Low Beam) in Group 02.727 of the appropriate Parts Catalog. - If the connector is discolored at the bulb interface, replace the connector (service pigtail listed below) and bulb. Important Use only Duraseal splice sleeves (salmon, P/N 19168446). Other splice sleeves may not protect the splice from moisture or provide a good electrical connection. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves in SI for splicing procedures. 1. Cut the wires of the connector approximately 45 mm (13/4 in) from the connector and splice in the service pigtail connector. Ensure that the splices are not above the connector when re-installing. 2. Replace the bulb. 3. Verify that the headlamp is fully functional. Parts Information Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 10-08-42-001B > Jan > 11 > Lighting - Low Beam Headlamp(s) Inoperative > Page 8679 Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules Wiring Harness: Customer Interest Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 09-06-03-004D Date: December 08, 2010 Subject: Intermittent No Crank/No Start, No Module Communication, MIL, Warning Lights, Vehicle Messages or DTCs Set by Various Control Modules - Diagnosing and Repairing Fretting Corrosion (Disconnect Affected Connector and Apply Dielectric Lubricant) Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks Attention: This repair can be applied to ANY electrical connection including, but not limited to: lighting, body electrical, in-line connections, powertrain control sensors, etc. DO NOT over apply lubricant to the point where it prevents the full engagement of sealed connectors. A light coating on the terminal surfaces is sufficient to correct the condition. Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the Attention statement and add the 2011 model year. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 09-06-03-004C (Section 06 Engine/Propulsion System). Condition Some customers may comment on any of the following conditions: - An intermittent no crank/no start - Intermittent malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) illumination - Intermittent service lamp illumination - Intermittent service message(s) being displayed The technician may determine that he is unable to duplicate the intermittent condition. Cause This condition may be caused by a buildup of nonconductive insulating oxidized debris known as fretting corrosion, occurring between two electrical contact surfaces of the connection or connector. This may be caused by any of the following conditions: - Vibration - Thermal cycling - Poor connection/terminal retention - Micro motion - A connector, component or wiring harness not properly secured resulting in movement On low current signal circuits this condition may cause high resistance, resulting in intermittent connections. On high current power circuits this condition may cause permanent increases in the resistance and may cause a device to become inoperative. Representative List of Control Modules and Components The following is only a representative list of control modules and components that may be affected by this connection or connector condition and DOES NOT include every possible module or component for every vehicle. - Blower Control Module - Body Control Module (BCM) - Communication Interface Module (CIM) - Cooling Fan Control Module - Electronic Brake Control Module (EBCM) - Electronic Brake and Traction Control Module (EBTCM) - Electronic Suspension Control (ESC) Module - Engine Control Module (ECM) - Heating, Ventilation and Air Conditioning (HVAC) Control Module Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules > Page 8684 - HVAC Actuator - Inflatable Restraint Sensing and Diagnostic Module (SDM) - Any AIR BAG module - Seatbelt Lap Anchor Pretensioner - Seatbelt Retractor Pretensioner - An SIR system connection or connector condition resulting in the following DTCs being set: B0015, B0016, B0019, B0020, B0022, or B0023 - Powertrain Control Module (PCM) - Remote Control Door Lock Receiver (RCDLR) - Transmission Control Module (TCM) Correction Important DO NOT replace the control module, wiring or component for the following conditions: - The condition is intermittent and cannot be duplicated. - The condition is present and by disconnecting and reconnecting the connector the condition can no longer be duplicated. Use the following procedure to correct the conditions listed above. 1. Install a scan tool and perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle. Retrieve and record any existing history or current DTCs from all of the control modules (refer to SI). ‹› If any DTC(s) are set, refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle to identify the connector(s) of the control module/component which may be causing the condition (refer to SI). ‹› If DTCs are not set, refer to Symptoms - Vehicle to identify the connector(s) of the control module/component which may be causing the condition (refer to SI). 2. When identified, use the appropriate DTC Diagnostics, Symptoms, Schematics, Component Connector End Views and Component Locator documents to locate and disconnect the affected harness connector(s) which are causing the condition. Note Fretting corrosion looks like little dark smudges on electrical terminals and appear where the actual electrical contact is being made. In less severe cases it may be unable to be seen or identified without the use of a magnifying glass. Important DO NOT apply an excessive amount of dielectric lubricant to the connectors as shown, as hydrolock may result when attempting to mate the connectors. Use ONLY a clean nylon brush that is dedicated to the repair of the conditions in this bulletin. 3. With a one-inch nylon bristle brush, apply dielectric lubricant to both the module/component side and the harness side of the affected connector(s). 4. Reconnect the affected connector(s) and wipe away any excess lubricant that may be present. 5. Attempt to duplicate the condition by using the following information: - DTC Diagnostic Procedure - Circuit/System Description - Conditions for Running the DTC - Conditions for Setting the DTC - Diagnostic Aids - Circuit/System Verification ‹› If the condition cannot be duplicated, the repair is complete. ‹› If the condition can be duplicated, then follow the appropriate DTC, Symptom or Circuit/System Testing procedure (refer to SI). Repair Order Documentation Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules > Page 8685 Important The following information MUST be documented on the repair order. Failure to do so may result in a chargeback. - Customer vehicle condition. - Was a Service Lamp or Service Message illuminated? If yes, specify which Service Lamp or Service Message. - Was a DTC(s) set? If yes, specify which DTC(s) were set. - After following the procedure contained within this bulletin, could the condition be duplicated? ‹› If the condition was not duplicated, then document the affected module/component connector name and number on the repair order. - If the condition was duplicated after the procedure contained within this bulletin was followed, and additional diagnosis led to the replacement of a module or component, the SI Document ID Number MUST be written on the repair order. Parts Information Alternate Distributor For All of North America Note NyoGel(R) 760G Lubricant* is equivalent to GMSPO P/N 12377900, and P/N 10953529 (Canada), specified for use to correct the condition in this bulletin. *We believe this source and their products to be reliable. There may be additional manufacturers of such products/materials. General Motors does not endorse, indicate any preference for, or assume any responsibility for the products or material from this firm or for any such items that may be available from other sources. Warranty Information (excluding Saab Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the appropriate/closest labor operation depending upon the module/component connection that the dielectric lubricant was applied to: Warranty Information (Saab Models) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules > Page 8686 For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the appropriate/closest labor operation depending upon the module/component connection that the dielectric lubricant was applied to refer to the table above. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 07-06-04-019D > Jun > 10 > Electrical - Intermittent MIL/DTC P2138/Reduced Power Wiring Harness: Customer Interest Electrical - Intermittent MIL/DTC P2138/Reduced Power TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 07-06-04-019D Date: June 28, 2010 Subject: Intermittent Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) Illuminated, DTC P2138 with Reduced Engine Power (Repair Instrument Panel (IP) to Body Harness Connector) Models: 2005-2011 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (Including Saturn) 2005-2009 HUMMER H2 2006-2010 HUMMER H3 2005-2009 Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the model years and warranty information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 07-06-04-019C (Section 06 - Engine/Propulsion System) Condition - Some customers may comment on an intermittent malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) being Illuminated with a message or an indicator that displays Reduced Engine Power. - The technician may observe on a scan tool DTC P2138 - Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor 1-2 Correlation set as Current or in History. Cause This condition may be caused by water intrusion into the instrument panel (IP) to body harness connector, which carries the APP sensor signals to the ECM/PCM. This water intrusion results in a voltage difference between APP Sensor 1 and APP Sensor 2 that exceeds a predetermined value for more than a calibrated period of time, setting P2138. Correction Note Aftermarket equipment can generate DTC P2138 and/or other DTCs. 1. Verify that aftermarket equipment is not electrically connected to any of the APP sensor signal or low reference circuits or to any other ECM/PCM 5V reference or low reference circuits. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories in SI. 2. Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle. ‹› If any 5V reference DTCs are set, refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle. ‹› If any 5V reference DTCs are not set, proceed to Step 3. 3. Locate the IP to body harness connector, which may be located in and around the left hand kick panel area or inside the IP. Depending on the vehicle and model year, refer to Wiring Systems or Power and Signal Distribution in SI. Note Some examples of potential water leaks are: A-pillar seals, sunroof drain lines (if equipped) and windshield/cowl sealing. 4. Inspect for a water leak in the area. If necessary use a water hose to determine the source of the leak. Refer to General Information > Water Leaks in SI. ‹› If a water leak is observed, repair as necessary. Verify the effectiveness of the repair. 5. Inspect the IP to body harness connector terminals for corrosion and debris. Refer to Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections in SI. ‹› If any corrosion and/or debris is observed, repair as necessary. 6. After completing the repair, verify the proper operation of the system. Depending on the vehicle and model year, perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification procedure or refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle in SI. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 07-06-04-019D > Jun > 10 > Electrical - Intermittent MIL/DTC P2138/Reduced Power > Page 8691 Warranty Information (excluding Saab U.S. Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the appropriate labor operation for the source of the water leak Warranty Information (Saab U.S. Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 11-09-41-001 > Mar > 11 > Restraint System - SIR Light On, DTC B0014/B0021 Set Wiring Harness: All Technical Service Bulletins Restraint System - SIR Light On, DTC B0014/B0021 Set TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 11-09-41-001 Date: March 10, 2011 Subject: SIR Light On, DTC B0014 and/or B0021 Set in Sensing and Diagnostics Module (SDM) Models: 2010-2011 Chevrolet Equinox 2010-2011 GMC Terrain Condition Some customers may comment that the SIR light is on, or has been on recently. When checking the vehicle for DTCs, the SDM may report any of the following codes: B0014 02, B0014 04, B0014 0D, B0014 0E, B0021 02, B0021 04, B0021 0D or B0021 0E. This condition may be duplicated by moving the front seat forward and backward or by bouncing on the lower cushion on the affected side. Cause The codes can be set when the SDM senses a change in resistance in the circuit for the seat mounted side impact side airbag. The change in resistance can be small and it can be temporary, but the SDM can still sense the change and set a code. In this case, the airbags will work as intended in a crash but the system should be checked for the cause of the resistance change. The source of the issue can be at or in the connector that connects the airbag from the seat to the body harness. Connector X304 (B0014 LF Side Deployment Loop) is located under the driver seat cushion and connector X303 (B0021 RF Side Deployment Loop) is located under the passenger seat cushion. Correction Replace the driver and passenger seat back harness to seat cushion harness connectors with service kit, P/N 20968489. The two gray connector (Christmas tree style) retainers provided in the kit will not be used. The new connector will be secured to the seat using clip, P/N 19258316. Follow the steps below. Important DO NOT replace the sensing and diagnostic module (SDM), side sensors or air bag modules. Important Both driver and passenger seats must be repaired when this concern occurs even if only one DTC code is set. The service kit contains sufficient components to repair both seat connectors. 1. Disable the SIR system. Refer to SIR Disabling and Enabling in SI. Note Only use hand tools to remove the seat to floor mounting bolts. If there are any problems with bolt removal, refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 10-08-50-002. 2. Remove the seat to floor rear mounting bolts. Loosen the seat from the front hooks and tilt it back to expose the underside of the seat. Refer to Driver or Passenger Seat Replacement procedure in SI. 3. Disconnect the seat to body harness connector. Disconnect the seat airbag connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 11-09-41-001 > Mar > 11 > Restraint System - SIR Light On, DTC B0014/B0021 Set > Page 8697 Important Note the wire colors on the seat airbag harness and body harness. Ensure that the wire colors are matched when installing into the new connector. 4. Cut both wires from the body harness connector and seat airbag harness connector as close to the connector housing (1) as possible to minimize wire length loss. Slide the conduit away on the seat airbag harness and remove just enough tape on the body harness to access the wires to install the terminals and seals. Important Use caution when stripping insulation. Take care not to cut through the wire strands. 5. Slide the wire seals onto all four leads back enough to enable removal of the insulation. Install the blue seals (1) on the seat back harness and the white seals (2) on the seat cushion harness. Strip the insulation off all four leads 5 mm (3/16 in). Align the seals with the wire insulation. 6. On the seat back harness, position two FEMALE terminals onto the wires. Caution must be used not to position the wire too far forward as it may interfere with the mating portion of the terminal. Crimp the terminals on to the bare wire using the J38125-7 crimp tool, jaw E (1). Repeat the procedure using two MALE terminals on the seat cushion harness. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 11-09-41-001 > Mar > 11 > Restraint System - SIR Light On, DTC B0014/B0021 Set > Page 8698 7. Position the wire seal to the terminal and crimp the seal and insulation using the J-38125-6 crimp tool, jaw 1 (1). The completed terminal and seal should appear as shown above (seat back harness connector shown). Note Avoid getting solder on the terminal end or overheating the terminal. Warning DO NOT use soldering equipment that is battery or electric powered. These types of soldering irons can induce voltage into the circuit, which may cause inflator module deployment and/or damage to electrical components. Use only the EL-28125-5A Ultra Torch or another butane fueled soldering iron when working on SIR circuits. 8. Solder all four terminals at the wire crimp. 9. Slide the two body harness terminals through the opening of the orange connector position assurance (CPA) (1). Important Ensure that the appropriate wire colors match up (as noted in Step 4) when the connection is made between the seat airbag harness and body harness. 10. Slide all four terminals (2) into the appropriate connector body as shown above. Install the blue terminal position assurance (TPA) devices onto the connector ends. 11. Add NyoGel 760 Lubricant, P/N 12377900 (in Canada, use P/N 10953529) to the terminals on both sides of the connections. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 11-09-41-001 > Mar > 11 > Restraint System - SIR Light On, DTC B0014/B0021 Set > Page 8699 12. Wrap anti-abrasion electrical tape around the two exposed wires on the body harness up to the back of the connector. Obtain "*Woven Polyester (PET) Electrical Tape" (Special Order PN RZ97156A00) from Kent Automotive. Refer to Parts Information below. Reinstall the conduit on the seat airbag harness. 13. Attach the connector to the bottom of the seat using clip, P/N 19258316. 14. Reinstall the seat. Refer to Driver or Passenger Seat Replacement procedure in SI. 15. Repeat the above procedure on the other seat. 16. Enable the SIR system. Refer to SIR Disabling and Enabling in SI. 17. Turn the ignition on and use the diagnostic tool to clear the SDM DTCs and verify that the issue has been corrected. If the code is still current, refer to the appropriate diagnostic procedure found in SI. *We believe this source and their products to be reliable. There may be additional manufacturers of such products/materials. General Motors does not endorse, indicate any preference for or assume any responsibility for the products or material from this firm or for any such items that may be available from other sources. Parts Information Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 10-08-42-001B > Jan > 11 > Lighting - Low Beam Headlamp(s) Inoperative Wiring Harness: All Technical Service Bulletins Lighting - Low Beam Headlamp(s) Inoperative TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 10-08-42-001B Date: January 24, 2011 Subject: Low Beam Headlamp Bulb Diagnosis/Replacement (Inspect Bulb and Connector) Models: 2008-2011 Buick Enclave 2007-2011 Cadillac Escalade, Escalade ESV, Escalade EXT 2008-2011 Cadillac CTS, CTS-V 2010-2011 Cadillac CTS Sport Wagon, SRX 2007-2011 Chevrolet Avalanche, Silverado, Suburban, Tahoe 2008-2011 Chevrolet Malibu 2009-2011 Chevrolet Traverse 2010-2011 Chevrolet Equinox 2007-2011 GMC Acadia, Sierra, Yukon, Yukon XL, Yukon Denali, Yukon Denali XL 2010-2011 GMC Terrain 2006-2010 Pontiac G6 2007-2010 Saturn AURA, OUTLOOK Attention: This bulletin DOES NOT apply to vehicles equipped with High Intensity Discharge (HID) lamps. Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the part number for the recommended splice sleeve. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 10-08-42-001A (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Condition Some customers may comment that the low beam headlamp is inoperative. Correction DO NOT replace the entire headlamp assembly for this condition. Replace the bulb and inspect the connector following the procedure below. 1. Remove the headlamp bulb. Refer to Headlamp Bulb Replacement procedure in SI. 2. Inspect the connector. - If the connector is NOT discolored or damaged, replace the bulb only. For bulb part numbers, see Headlamp Bulb (Low Beam) in Group 02.727 of the appropriate Parts Catalog. - If the connector is discolored at the bulb interface, replace the connector (service pigtail listed below) and bulb. Important Use only Duraseal splice sleeves (salmon, P/N 19168446). Other splice sleeves may not protect the splice from moisture or provide a good electrical connection. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves in SI for splicing procedures. 1. Cut the wires of the connector approximately 45 mm (13/4 in) from the connector and splice in the service pigtail connector. Ensure that the splices are not above the connector when re-installing. 2. Replace the bulb. 3. Verify that the headlamp is fully functional. Parts Information Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 10-08-42-001B > Jan > 11 > Lighting - Low Beam Headlamp(s) Inoperative > Page 8704 Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules Wiring Harness: All Technical Service Bulletins Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 09-06-03-004D Date: December 08, 2010 Subject: Intermittent No Crank/No Start, No Module Communication, MIL, Warning Lights, Vehicle Messages or DTCs Set by Various Control Modules - Diagnosing and Repairing Fretting Corrosion (Disconnect Affected Connector and Apply Dielectric Lubricant) Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks Attention: This repair can be applied to ANY electrical connection including, but not limited to: lighting, body electrical, in-line connections, powertrain control sensors, etc. DO NOT over apply lubricant to the point where it prevents the full engagement of sealed connectors. A light coating on the terminal surfaces is sufficient to correct the condition. Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the Attention statement and add the 2011 model year. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 09-06-03-004C (Section 06 Engine/Propulsion System). Condition Some customers may comment on any of the following conditions: - An intermittent no crank/no start - Intermittent malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) illumination - Intermittent service lamp illumination - Intermittent service message(s) being displayed The technician may determine that he is unable to duplicate the intermittent condition. Cause This condition may be caused by a buildup of nonconductive insulating oxidized debris known as fretting corrosion, occurring between two electrical contact surfaces of the connection or connector. This may be caused by any of the following conditions: - Vibration - Thermal cycling - Poor connection/terminal retention - Micro motion - A connector, component or wiring harness not properly secured resulting in movement On low current signal circuits this condition may cause high resistance, resulting in intermittent connections. On high current power circuits this condition may cause permanent increases in the resistance and may cause a device to become inoperative. Representative List of Control Modules and Components The following is only a representative list of control modules and components that may be affected by this connection or connector condition and DOES NOT include every possible module or component for every vehicle. - Blower Control Module - Body Control Module (BCM) - Communication Interface Module (CIM) - Cooling Fan Control Module - Electronic Brake Control Module (EBCM) - Electronic Brake and Traction Control Module (EBTCM) - Electronic Suspension Control (ESC) Module - Engine Control Module (ECM) - Heating, Ventilation and Air Conditioning (HVAC) Control Module Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules > Page 8709 - HVAC Actuator - Inflatable Restraint Sensing and Diagnostic Module (SDM) - Any AIR BAG module - Seatbelt Lap Anchor Pretensioner - Seatbelt Retractor Pretensioner - An SIR system connection or connector condition resulting in the following DTCs being set: B0015, B0016, B0019, B0020, B0022, or B0023 - Powertrain Control Module (PCM) - Remote Control Door Lock Receiver (RCDLR) - Transmission Control Module (TCM) Correction Important DO NOT replace the control module, wiring or component for the following conditions: - The condition is intermittent and cannot be duplicated. - The condition is present and by disconnecting and reconnecting the connector the condition can no longer be duplicated. Use the following procedure to correct the conditions listed above. 1. Install a scan tool and perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle. Retrieve and record any existing history or current DTCs from all of the control modules (refer to SI). ‹› If any DTC(s) are set, refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle to identify the connector(s) of the control module/component which may be causing the condition (refer to SI). ‹› If DTCs are not set, refer to Symptoms - Vehicle to identify the connector(s) of the control module/component which may be causing the condition (refer to SI). 2. When identified, use the appropriate DTC Diagnostics, Symptoms, Schematics, Component Connector End Views and Component Locator documents to locate and disconnect the affected harness connector(s) which are causing the condition. Note Fretting corrosion looks like little dark smudges on electrical terminals and appear where the actual electrical contact is being made. In less severe cases it may be unable to be seen or identified without the use of a magnifying glass. Important DO NOT apply an excessive amount of dielectric lubricant to the connectors as shown, as hydrolock may result when attempting to mate the connectors. Use ONLY a clean nylon brush that is dedicated to the repair of the conditions in this bulletin. 3. With a one-inch nylon bristle brush, apply dielectric lubricant to both the module/component side and the harness side of the affected connector(s). 4. Reconnect the affected connector(s) and wipe away any excess lubricant that may be present. 5. Attempt to duplicate the condition by using the following information: - DTC Diagnostic Procedure - Circuit/System Description - Conditions for Running the DTC - Conditions for Setting the DTC - Diagnostic Aids - Circuit/System Verification ‹› If the condition cannot be duplicated, the repair is complete. ‹› If the condition can be duplicated, then follow the appropriate DTC, Symptom or Circuit/System Testing procedure (refer to SI). Repair Order Documentation Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules > Page 8710 Important The following information MUST be documented on the repair order. Failure to do so may result in a chargeback. - Customer vehicle condition. - Was a Service Lamp or Service Message illuminated? If yes, specify which Service Lamp or Service Message. - Was a DTC(s) set? If yes, specify which DTC(s) were set. - After following the procedure contained within this bulletin, could the condition be duplicated? ‹› If the condition was not duplicated, then document the affected module/component connector name and number on the repair order. - If the condition was duplicated after the procedure contained within this bulletin was followed, and additional diagnosis led to the replacement of a module or component, the SI Document ID Number MUST be written on the repair order. Parts Information Alternate Distributor For All of North America Note NyoGel(R) 760G Lubricant* is equivalent to GMSPO P/N 12377900, and P/N 10953529 (Canada), specified for use to correct the condition in this bulletin. *We believe this source and their products to be reliable. There may be additional manufacturers of such products/materials. General Motors does not endorse, indicate any preference for, or assume any responsibility for the products or material from this firm or for any such items that may be available from other sources. Warranty Information (excluding Saab Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the appropriate/closest labor operation depending upon the module/component connection that the dielectric lubricant was applied to: Warranty Information (Saab Models) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules > Page 8711 For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the appropriate/closest labor operation depending upon the module/component connection that the dielectric lubricant was applied to refer to the table above. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 10-08-45-001B > Oct > 10 > Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair Wiring Harness: All Technical Service Bulletins Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 10-08-45-001B Date: October 25, 2010 Subject: Information for Electrical Ground Repair - Use New Replacement Fasteners with Conductive Finish Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (including Saturn) 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2011 model year and update the Warranty Information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 10-08-45-001A (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Electrical Ground Repair Overview Proper electrical system function relies on secure, stable and corrosion-free electrical ground connections. Loose, stripped, or corroded connections increase the possibility of improper system function and loss of module communication. These conditions may also lead to unnecessary repairs and component replacement. In general, electrical ground connections are accomplished using one, or a combination of the following attachment methods: - Welded M6 stud and nut - Welded M6 nut and bolt - Welded M8 nut and bolt Determine which attachment method is used and perform the appropriate or alternative repair as described in this bulletin. M6 Weld Stud Replacement Caution Use only the GM-approved replacement fasteners with conductive finish for electrical ground repair. 1. Select a location adjacent the damaged or missing M6 ground stud having 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance behind the panel surface and 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance surrounding the M6 conductive rivet stud flange. 2. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, remove any grease from the repair site and allow to dry. Note Ensure 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance is maintained behind the panel to be drilled. 3. Drill a 10 mm (0.40 in) diameter hole through the panel. 4. Remove paint and primer from the area surrounding the 10 mm (0.40 in) hole until bare metal is visible. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 10-08-45-001B > Oct > 10 > Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair > Page 8716 Important The M6 conductive rivet stud as shown, can accommodate a panel thickness range of 0.7-4.2 mm (0.03-0.17 in). If there are layers of sheet metal, they should be touching without any air gaps to ensure a good ground. 5. Select a M6 conductive rivet stud. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. Note Use the GE-50317 rivet stud tool kit. 6. Place the M6 conductive rivet stud (1) in the 10 mm (0.40 in) hole. Assemble the rivet stud tool (2) with the groove and flare side facing the rivet stud, then the washer and the M6 nut (3). 7. Using a wrench on the rivet stud tool, and a socket on the M6 nut, secure the M6 conductive rivet stud. 8. Ensure the rivet stud is securely fastened, WITHOUT ANY detectable movement. 9. Completely wrap the threads of the rivet stud with painters tape or equivalent. Note The rivet stud and surrounding panel area MUST BE properly refinished PRIOR to the installation of the ground wire terminal and conductive nut to maintain a secure, stable and corrosion-free electrical ground. 10. Refinish the repair area using an anti-corrosion primer. Refer to Anti-Corrosion Treatment and Repair in SI. 11. Allow the refinished repair area to cure sufficiently before removing the protective material applied to the rivet stud threads. 12. Remove the painters tape or equivalent from the rivet stud threads. 13. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, thoroughly clean the rivet stud threads to remove any adhesive and allow to dry. 14. Using a small brush, apply Dielectric Lubricant GM P/N 12377900 (Canadian P/N 10953529) to the threads of the M6 conductive rivet stud. Note Fretting corrosion is a build-up of insulating, oxidized wear debris that can form when there is a small motion between electrical contacts. The oxidized wear debris can accumulate at the electrical contact points causing the electrical resistance across the connection to increase. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 10-08-45-001B > Oct > 10 > Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair > Page 8717 15. Carefully remove ANY corrosion or contamination that may be present on the electrical ground wire terminal. 16. Install the electrical ground wire terminal to the rivet stud. 17. Select a M6 conductive nut. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 18. Install the M6 conductive nut to the rivet stud and: Tighten Tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb in). 19. Verify proper system operation. M6 Weld Nut Caution Use only the GM-approved replacement fasteners with conductive finish for electrical ground repair. 1. If the M6 weld nut at the electrical ground location is damaged or stripped, a M7 conductive self-threading bolt may be used to secure the ground wire terminal. 2. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, remove any grease from the surface surrounding the weld nut and allow to dry. 3. Remove any loose metal particles from the damaged or stripped weld nut with a stiff brush. 4. Select a M7 conductive self-threading bolt. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin 5. Using a small brush, apply Dielectric Lubricant GM P/N 12377900 (Canadian P/N 10953529) to the threads of the M7 conductive self-threading bolt. Note Fretting corrosion is a build-up of insulating, oxidized wear debris that can form when there is a small motion between electrical contacts. The oxidized wear debris can accumulate at the electrical contact points causing the electrical resistance across the connection to increase. 6. Carefully remove ANY corrosion or contamination that may be present on the electrical ground wire terminal. 7. Install the electrical ground wire terminal to the M7 conductive self-threading bolt. 8. Install the M7 conductive self-threading bolt and: Tighten Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb in). 9. Verify proper system operation. M6 Weld Nut Alternative Repair Caution Use only the GM-approved replacement fasteners with conductive finish for electrical ground repair. 1. If the electrical ground location is accessible from both sides of the panel, a M6 conductive bolt and a M6 conductive nut may be used to secure the electrical ground wire terminal. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 2. Select a location adjacent the damaged M6 weld nut having 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance behind the panel surface and 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance surrounding the new electrical ground site. 3. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, remove any grease from the surface surrounding the ground location and allow to dry. Note Ensure 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance is maintained behind the panel to be drilled. 4. Drill a 8.5 mm (0.33 in) diameter hole through the panel. 5. Remove paint and primer from the area surrounding the 8.5 mm (0.33 in) hole until bare metal is visible. 6. Select a M6 conductive bolt. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 7. Using a small brush, apply Dielectric Lubricant GM P/N 12377900 (Canadian P/N 10953529) to the threads of the M6 conductive bolt. Note Fretting corrosion is a build-up of insulating, oxidized wear debris that can form when there is a small motion between electrical contacts. The oxidized wear debris can accumulate at the electrical contact points causing the electrical resistance across the connection to increase. 8. Carefully remove ANY corrosion or contamination that may be present on the electrical ground wire terminal. 9. Install the electrical ground wire terminal and the M6 conductive bolt to the ground location. 10. Select a M6 conductive nut. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 11. Install the M6 conductive nut to the bolt and: Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 10-08-45-001B > Oct > 10 > Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair > Page 8718 Tighten Tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb in). Note The repair area MUST BE properly refinished to maintain a secure, stable and corrosion-free electrical ground. 12. Refinish the repair area using an anti-corrosion primer. Refer to Anti-Corrosion Treatment and Repair in SI. 13. Verify proper system operation. M8 Weld Nut Caution Use only the GM-approved replacement fasteners with conductive finish for electrical ground repair. 1. If the M8 weld nut electrical ground location is accessible from both sides of the panel, a M8 conductive bolt and a M8 conductive nut may be used to secure the electrical ground wire terminal. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 2. Select a location adjacent the M8 weld nut having 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance behind the panel surface and 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance surrounding the new electrical ground site. 3. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, remove any grease from the surface surrounding the ground location and allow to dry. Note Ensure 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance is maintained behind the panel to be drilled. 4. Drill a 10 mm (0.40 in) diameter hole through the panel. 5. Remove paint and primer from the area surrounding the 10 mm (0.40 in) hole until bare metal is visible. 6. Select a M8 conductive bolt. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 7. Using a small brush, apply Dielectric Lubricant GM P/N 12377900 (Canadian P/N 10953529) to the threads of the M8 conductive bolt. Note Fretting corrosion is a build-up of insulating, oxidized wear debris that can form when there is a small motion between electrical contacts. The oxidized wear debris can accumulate at the electrical contact points causing the electrical resistance across the connection to increase. 8. Carefully remove ANY corrosion or contamination that may be present on the electrical ground wire terminal. 9. Install the electrical ground wire terminal and the M8 conductive bolt to the ground location. 10. Select a M8 conductive nut. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 11. Install the M8 conductive nut to the bolt and: Tighten Tighten to 22 Nm (16 lb ft). Note The repair area MUST BE properly refinished to maintain a secure, stable and corrosion-free electrical ground. 12. Refinish the repair area using an anti-corrosion primer. Refer to Anti-Corrosion Treatment and Repair in SI. 13. Verify proper system operation. M8 Weld Nut Alternative Repair Caution Use only the GM-approved replacement fasteners with conductive finish for electrical ground repair. 1. If the M8 weld nut electrical ground location is not accessible from both sides of the panel, a M6 conductive rivet stud and a M6 conductive nut may be used to secure the electrical ground wire terminal. 2. Select a location adjacent the damaged M8 weld nut having 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance behind the panel surface and 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance surrounding the M6 conductive rivet stud flange. 3. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, remove any grease from the repair site and allow to dry. Note Ensure 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance is maintained behind the panel to be drilled. 4. Drill a 10 mm (0.40 in) diameter hole through the panel. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 10-08-45-001B > Oct > 10 > Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair > Page 8719 5. Remove paint and primer from the area surrounding the 10 mm (0.40 in) until bare metal is visible. Important The M6 conductive rivet stud as shown, can accommodate a panel thickness range of 0.7-4.2 mm (0.03-0.17 in). If there are layers of sheet metal, they should be touching without any air gaps to ensure a good ground. 6. Select a M6 conductive rivet stud. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. Note Use the GE-50317 rivet stud tool kit. 7. Place the M6 conductive rivet stud (1) in the 10 mm (0.40 in) hole. Assemble the rivet stud tool (2) with the groove and flare side facing the rivet stud, then the washer and the M6 nut (3). 8. Using a wrench on the rivet stud tool, and a socket on the M6 nut, secure the M6 conductive rivet stud. 9. Ensure the new rivet stud is securely fastened, WITHOUT ANY detectable movement. 10. Completely wrap the threads of the rivet stud with painters tape or equivalent. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 10-08-45-001B > Oct > 10 > Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair > Page 8720 Note The rivet stud and surrounding panel area MUST BE properly refinished PRIOR to the installation of the electrical ground wire terminal and conductive nut to maintain a secure, stable and corrosion-free electrical ground. 11. Refinish the repair area using an anti-corrosion primer. Refer to Anti-Corrosion Treatment and Repair in SI. 12. Allow the refinished repair area to cure sufficiently before removing the protective material applied to the rivet stud threads. 13. Remove the painters tape or equivalent from the rivet stud threads. 14. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, thoroughly clean the rivet stud threads to remove any adhesive and allow to dry. 15. Using a small brush, apply Dielectric Lubricant GM P/N 12377900 (Canadian P/N 10953529) to the threads of the M6 conductive rivet stud. Note Fretting corrosion is a build-up of insulating, oxidized wear debris that can form when there is a small motion between electrical contacts. The oxidized wear debris can accumulate at the electrical contact points causing the electrical resistance across the connection to increase. 16. Carefully remove ANY corrosion or contamination that may be present on the electrical ground wire terminal. 17. Install the electrical ground wire terminal to the M6 conductive rivet stud. 18. Select a M6 conductive nut. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 19. Install the M6 conductive nut to the rivet stud and: Tighten Tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb in) 20. Verify proper system operation. Parts Information Warranty Information (excluding Saab Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use: Warranty Information (Saab Models) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 10-08-45-001B > Oct > 10 > Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair > Page 8721 For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 07-06-04-019D > Jun > 10 > Electrical - Intermittent MIL/DTC P2138/Reduced Power Wiring Harness: All Technical Service Bulletins Electrical - Intermittent MIL/DTC P2138/Reduced Power TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 07-06-04-019D Date: June 28, 2010 Subject: Intermittent Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) Illuminated, DTC P2138 with Reduced Engine Power (Repair Instrument Panel (IP) to Body Harness Connector) Models: 2005-2011 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (Including Saturn) 2005-2009 HUMMER H2 2006-2010 HUMMER H3 2005-2009 Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the model years and warranty information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 07-06-04-019C (Section 06 - Engine/Propulsion System) Condition - Some customers may comment on an intermittent malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) being Illuminated with a message or an indicator that displays Reduced Engine Power. - The technician may observe on a scan tool DTC P2138 - Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor 1-2 Correlation set as Current or in History. Cause This condition may be caused by water intrusion into the instrument panel (IP) to body harness connector, which carries the APP sensor signals to the ECM/PCM. This water intrusion results in a voltage difference between APP Sensor 1 and APP Sensor 2 that exceeds a predetermined value for more than a calibrated period of time, setting P2138. Correction Note Aftermarket equipment can generate DTC P2138 and/or other DTCs. 1. Verify that aftermarket equipment is not electrically connected to any of the APP sensor signal or low reference circuits or to any other ECM/PCM 5V reference or low reference circuits. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories in SI. 2. Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle. ‹› If any 5V reference DTCs are set, refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle. ‹› If any 5V reference DTCs are not set, proceed to Step 3. 3. Locate the IP to body harness connector, which may be located in and around the left hand kick panel area or inside the IP. Depending on the vehicle and model year, refer to Wiring Systems or Power and Signal Distribution in SI. Note Some examples of potential water leaks are: A-pillar seals, sunroof drain lines (if equipped) and windshield/cowl sealing. 4. Inspect for a water leak in the area. If necessary use a water hose to determine the source of the leak. Refer to General Information > Water Leaks in SI. ‹› If a water leak is observed, repair as necessary. Verify the effectiveness of the repair. 5. Inspect the IP to body harness connector terminals for corrosion and debris. Refer to Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections in SI. ‹› If any corrosion and/or debris is observed, repair as necessary. 6. After completing the repair, verify the proper operation of the system. Depending on the vehicle and model year, perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification procedure or refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle in SI. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 07-06-04-019D > Jun > 10 > Electrical - Intermittent MIL/DTC P2138/Reduced Power > Page 8726 Warranty Information (excluding Saab U.S. Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the appropriate labor operation for the source of the water leak Warranty Information (Saab U.S. Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 09167 > Jul > 09 > Campaign - Missing Seal/Engine-to-Body Inline Connector Wiring Harness: All Technical Service Bulletins Campaign - Missing Seal/Engine-to-Body Inline Connector SERVICE UPDATE Bulletin No.: 09167 Date: July 23, 2009 Subject: 09167 - Service Update for Inventory and Customer Vehicles Missing Seal on Engine-to-Body Inline Connector - Expires with Base Warranty Models: 2010 Chevrolet Equinox THIS SERVICE UPDATE INCLUDES VEHICLES IN DEALER INVENTORY AND CUSTOMER VEHICLES THAT RETURN TO THE DEALERSHIP FOR ANY REASON. IT WILL EXPIRE AT THE END OF THE INVOLVED VEHICLE'S NEW VEHICLE LIMITED WARRANTY PERIOD. Purpose This bulletin provides a service procedure to install a connector seal to the engine-to-body inline connector on certain 2010 model year Chevrolet Equinox vehicles. These vehicles are missing a seal on the engine-to-body inline connector. This service procedure should be completed as soon as possible on involved vehicles currently in dealer inventory and customer vehicles that return to the dealer for any type of service during the New Vehicle Limited Warranty coverage period. Vehicles Involved A list of involved vehicles currently in dealer inventory is available on the "Service Update Bulletin Information" link under the "Service" tab in GM GlobalConnect (US), or attached to the Dealer Communication (Canada), used to release this bulletin. Customer vehicles that return for service, for any reason, and are still covered under the vehicles base warranty, and are within the VIN breakpoints provided below, should be checked for vehicle eligibility in the appropriate system listed below. Important: Dealers are to confirm vehicle eligibility prior to beginning repairs by using the GM Vehicle Inquiry System (GMVIS). Not all vehicles within the above breakpoints may be involved. Parts Information US Only: Connector seals will be shipped from the Warranty Parts Center (WPC) at no charge via UPS 2-Day Delivery - Attention: Parts Manager, to dealers with involved vehicles beginning Friday, July 24, 2009. All dealers who have involved vehicles should have the seals no later than Wednesday, July 29, 2009. Seals needed for dealer-trades are to be obtained by calling the WPC, and requesting WPC P/N 479. Canada Only: Connector seals will be available by calling the WINS Assistance Centre. The seals will be shipped at no charge via Overnight Delivery. Only dealers with affected vehicles should call for these parts Service Procedure 1. Unlock the vehicle and open the door. 2. Place the key FOB on the driver seat (avoid inadvertent FOB key press). 3. Release the hood latch. 4. Exit the vehicle and close the door. 5. Open the hood of the vehicle. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 09167 > Jul > 09 > Campaign - Missing Seal/Engine-to-Body Inline Connector > Page 8731 6. Locate the engine-to-body inline connector (4). This connector (4) is located on the passenger side of the engine compartment near the shock tower (1), air cleaner outlet duct (2), and air cleaner assembly (3). Refer to the illustration. 7. Remove the connector from the shock tower (1) by gently pulling the connector rearward and away from the shock tower. 8. Disengage the connection by pressing the side of the connector and pulling the grey lever to the back. 9. Install a new connector seal. Inspect the connector seal to ensure that the connector seal is not cracked, cut, or damaged. 1. Place one edge of the seal over one edge of the terminal housing as shown. Using both hands, stretch the remaining seal around the terminal housing. 2. Verify that the seal is seated properly around terminal housing. There must be NO TWISTING of the seal and it MUST sit flush as shown in the illustration. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 09167 > Jul > 09 > Campaign - Missing Seal/Engine-to-Body Inline Connector > Page 8732 3. Using tool number 12094441 or a wooden craft tool, gently push the seal to the back of connector, applying pressure to all four sides of the seal evenly. 4. Rotate the connector to the side of the clip and look through the connector window to verify that the seal is fully seated at the back of connector. Refer to the illustration to view an improperly (1) and properly installed (2) connector seal. 10. Engage both connectors and verify that the lever is fully locked by attempting to open it without pressing on the unlocking tabs. 11. Install the connector (2) on the connector clip located on the shock tower (1). Pull on the connector to ensure that it is secure on the clip. 12. Close the hood. 13. Open the front driver's side door. 14. Sit in the driver's seat and close the door. Note If the vehicle passes ALL of the inspection points outlined in Steps 15-20, no further action is required. If the vehicle does NOT pass all inspection points, ensure that the connector pins are NOT bent and that the connector is seated and locked properly. Repeat Steps 15-20 if required to ensure proper installation of the seal and connector. 15. Turn the key to the RUN position. Do NOT start the engine. If the engine telltale (MIL) is ON solid, the vehicle PASSES this inspection point. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 09167 > Jul > 09 > Campaign - Missing Seal/Engine-to-Body Inline Connector > Page 8733 16. Turn the key to crank (start engine). If the engine starts, the vehicle PASSES this inspection point. 17. Wait 10 seconds, if the engine telltale (MIL) is OFF, the vehicle PASSES this inspection point. 18. Push ECO button next to shifter knob (present only on 4 cylinder engine). If the ECO telltale comes ON, the vehicle PASSES this inspection point. 19. Turn the steering wheel 1/4 turn. If the steering wheel is easy to turn, power assist is present. The vehicle PASSES this inspection point. 20. Press accelerator pedal. If the engine RPMs increase, the vehicle PASSES this inspection point. Claim Information Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 11-09-41-001 > Mar > 11 > Restraint System - SIR Light On, DTC B0014/B0021 Set Wiring Harness: All Technical Service Bulletins Restraint System - SIR Light On, DTC B0014/B0021 Set TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 11-09-41-001 Date: March 10, 2011 Subject: SIR Light On, DTC B0014 and/or B0021 Set in Sensing and Diagnostics Module (SDM) Models: 2010-2011 Chevrolet Equinox 2010-2011 GMC Terrain Condition Some customers may comment that the SIR light is on, or has been on recently. When checking the vehicle for DTCs, the SDM may report any of the following codes: B0014 02, B0014 04, B0014 0D, B0014 0E, B0021 02, B0021 04, B0021 0D or B0021 0E. This condition may be duplicated by moving the front seat forward and backward or by bouncing on the lower cushion on the affected side. Cause The codes can be set when the SDM senses a change in resistance in the circuit for the seat mounted side impact side airbag. The change in resistance can be small and it can be temporary, but the SDM can still sense the change and set a code. In this case, the airbags will work as intended in a crash but the system should be checked for the cause of the resistance change. The source of the issue can be at or in the connector that connects the airbag from the seat to the body harness. Connector X304 (B0014 LF Side Deployment Loop) is located under the driver seat cushion and connector X303 (B0021 RF Side Deployment Loop) is located under the passenger seat cushion. Correction Replace the driver and passenger seat back harness to seat cushion harness connectors with service kit, P/N 20968489. The two gray connector (Christmas tree style) retainers provided in the kit will not be used. The new connector will be secured to the seat using clip, P/N 19258316. Follow the steps below. Important DO NOT replace the sensing and diagnostic module (SDM), side sensors or air bag modules. Important Both driver and passenger seats must be repaired when this concern occurs even if only one DTC code is set. The service kit contains sufficient components to repair both seat connectors. 1. Disable the SIR system. Refer to SIR Disabling and Enabling in SI. Note Only use hand tools to remove the seat to floor mounting bolts. If there are any problems with bolt removal, refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 10-08-50-002. 2. Remove the seat to floor rear mounting bolts. Loosen the seat from the front hooks and tilt it back to expose the underside of the seat. Refer to Driver or Passenger Seat Replacement procedure in SI. 3. Disconnect the seat to body harness connector. Disconnect the seat airbag connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 11-09-41-001 > Mar > 11 > Restraint System - SIR Light On, DTC B0014/B0021 Set > Page 8739 Important Note the wire colors on the seat airbag harness and body harness. Ensure that the wire colors are matched when installing into the new connector. 4. Cut both wires from the body harness connector and seat airbag harness connector as close to the connector housing (1) as possible to minimize wire length loss. Slide the conduit away on the seat airbag harness and remove just enough tape on the body harness to access the wires to install the terminals and seals. Important Use caution when stripping insulation. Take care not to cut through the wire strands. 5. Slide the wire seals onto all four leads back enough to enable removal of the insulation. Install the blue seals (1) on the seat back harness and the white seals (2) on the seat cushion harness. Strip the insulation off all four leads 5 mm (3/16 in). Align the seals with the wire insulation. 6. On the seat back harness, position two FEMALE terminals onto the wires. Caution must be used not to position the wire too far forward as it may interfere with the mating portion of the terminal. Crimp the terminals on to the bare wire using the J38125-7 crimp tool, jaw E (1). Repeat the procedure using two MALE terminals on the seat cushion harness. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 11-09-41-001 > Mar > 11 > Restraint System - SIR Light On, DTC B0014/B0021 Set > Page 8740 7. Position the wire seal to the terminal and crimp the seal and insulation using the J-38125-6 crimp tool, jaw 1 (1). The completed terminal and seal should appear as shown above (seat back harness connector shown). Note Avoid getting solder on the terminal end or overheating the terminal. Warning DO NOT use soldering equipment that is battery or electric powered. These types of soldering irons can induce voltage into the circuit, which may cause inflator module deployment and/or damage to electrical components. Use only the EL-28125-5A Ultra Torch or another butane fueled soldering iron when working on SIR circuits. 8. Solder all four terminals at the wire crimp. 9. Slide the two body harness terminals through the opening of the orange connector position assurance (CPA) (1). Important Ensure that the appropriate wire colors match up (as noted in Step 4) when the connection is made between the seat airbag harness and body harness. 10. Slide all four terminals (2) into the appropriate connector body as shown above. Install the blue terminal position assurance (TPA) devices onto the connector ends. 11. Add NyoGel 760 Lubricant, P/N 12377900 (in Canada, use P/N 10953529) to the terminals on both sides of the connections. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 11-09-41-001 > Mar > 11 > Restraint System - SIR Light On, DTC B0014/B0021 Set > Page 8741 12. Wrap anti-abrasion electrical tape around the two exposed wires on the body harness up to the back of the connector. Obtain "*Woven Polyester (PET) Electrical Tape" (Special Order PN RZ97156A00) from Kent Automotive. Refer to Parts Information below. Reinstall the conduit on the seat airbag harness. 13. Attach the connector to the bottom of the seat using clip, P/N 19258316. 14. Reinstall the seat. Refer to Driver or Passenger Seat Replacement procedure in SI. 15. Repeat the above procedure on the other seat. 16. Enable the SIR system. Refer to SIR Disabling and Enabling in SI. 17. Turn the ignition on and use the diagnostic tool to clear the SDM DTCs and verify that the issue has been corrected. If the code is still current, refer to the appropriate diagnostic procedure found in SI. *We believe this source and their products to be reliable. There may be additional manufacturers of such products/materials. General Motors does not endorse, indicate any preference for or assume any responsibility for the products or material from this firm or for any such items that may be available from other sources. Parts Information Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 10-08-42-001B > Jan > 11 > Lighting - Low Beam Headlamp(s) Inoperative Wiring Harness: All Technical Service Bulletins Lighting - Low Beam Headlamp(s) Inoperative TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 10-08-42-001B Date: January 24, 2011 Subject: Low Beam Headlamp Bulb Diagnosis/Replacement (Inspect Bulb and Connector) Models: 2008-2011 Buick Enclave 2007-2011 Cadillac Escalade, Escalade ESV, Escalade EXT 2008-2011 Cadillac CTS, CTS-V 2010-2011 Cadillac CTS Sport Wagon, SRX 2007-2011 Chevrolet Avalanche, Silverado, Suburban, Tahoe 2008-2011 Chevrolet Malibu 2009-2011 Chevrolet Traverse 2010-2011 Chevrolet Equinox 2007-2011 GMC Acadia, Sierra, Yukon, Yukon XL, Yukon Denali, Yukon Denali XL 2010-2011 GMC Terrain 2006-2010 Pontiac G6 2007-2010 Saturn AURA, OUTLOOK Attention: This bulletin DOES NOT apply to vehicles equipped with High Intensity Discharge (HID) lamps. Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the part number for the recommended splice sleeve. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 10-08-42-001A (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Condition Some customers may comment that the low beam headlamp is inoperative. Correction DO NOT replace the entire headlamp assembly for this condition. Replace the bulb and inspect the connector following the procedure below. 1. Remove the headlamp bulb. Refer to Headlamp Bulb Replacement procedure in SI. 2. Inspect the connector. - If the connector is NOT discolored or damaged, replace the bulb only. For bulb part numbers, see Headlamp Bulb (Low Beam) in Group 02.727 of the appropriate Parts Catalog. - If the connector is discolored at the bulb interface, replace the connector (service pigtail listed below) and bulb. Important Use only Duraseal splice sleeves (salmon, P/N 19168446). Other splice sleeves may not protect the splice from moisture or provide a good electrical connection. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves in SI for splicing procedures. 1. Cut the wires of the connector approximately 45 mm (13/4 in) from the connector and splice in the service pigtail connector. Ensure that the splices are not above the connector when re-installing. 2. Replace the bulb. 3. Verify that the headlamp is fully functional. Parts Information Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 10-08-42-001B > Jan > 11 > Lighting - Low Beam Headlamp(s) Inoperative > Page 8746 Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules Wiring Harness: All Technical Service Bulletins Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 09-06-03-004D Date: December 08, 2010 Subject: Intermittent No Crank/No Start, No Module Communication, MIL, Warning Lights, Vehicle Messages or DTCs Set by Various Control Modules - Diagnosing and Repairing Fretting Corrosion (Disconnect Affected Connector and Apply Dielectric Lubricant) Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks Attention: This repair can be applied to ANY electrical connection including, but not limited to: lighting, body electrical, in-line connections, powertrain control sensors, etc. DO NOT over apply lubricant to the point where it prevents the full engagement of sealed connectors. A light coating on the terminal surfaces is sufficient to correct the condition. Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the Attention statement and add the 2011 model year. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 09-06-03-004C (Section 06 Engine/Propulsion System). Condition Some customers may comment on any of the following conditions: - An intermittent no crank/no start - Intermittent malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) illumination - Intermittent service lamp illumination - Intermittent service message(s) being displayed The technician may determine that he is unable to duplicate the intermittent condition. Cause This condition may be caused by a buildup of nonconductive insulating oxidized debris known as fretting corrosion, occurring between two electrical contact surfaces of the connection or connector. This may be caused by any of the following conditions: - Vibration - Thermal cycling - Poor connection/terminal retention - Micro motion - A connector, component or wiring harness not properly secured resulting in movement On low current signal circuits this condition may cause high resistance, resulting in intermittent connections. On high current power circuits this condition may cause permanent increases in the resistance and may cause a device to become inoperative. Representative List of Control Modules and Components The following is only a representative list of control modules and components that may be affected by this connection or connector condition and DOES NOT include every possible module or component for every vehicle. - Blower Control Module - Body Control Module (BCM) - Communication Interface Module (CIM) - Cooling Fan Control Module - Electronic Brake Control Module (EBCM) - Electronic Brake and Traction Control Module (EBTCM) - Electronic Suspension Control (ESC) Module - Engine Control Module (ECM) - Heating, Ventilation and Air Conditioning (HVAC) Control Module Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules > Page 8751 - HVAC Actuator - Inflatable Restraint Sensing and Diagnostic Module (SDM) - Any AIR BAG module - Seatbelt Lap Anchor Pretensioner - Seatbelt Retractor Pretensioner - An SIR system connection or connector condition resulting in the following DTCs being set: B0015, B0016, B0019, B0020, B0022, or B0023 - Powertrain Control Module (PCM) - Remote Control Door Lock Receiver (RCDLR) - Transmission Control Module (TCM) Correction Important DO NOT replace the control module, wiring or component for the following conditions: - The condition is intermittent and cannot be duplicated. - The condition is present and by disconnecting and reconnecting the connector the condition can no longer be duplicated. Use the following procedure to correct the conditions listed above. 1. Install a scan tool and perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle. Retrieve and record any existing history or current DTCs from all of the control modules (refer to SI). ‹› If any DTC(s) are set, refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle to identify the connector(s) of the control module/component which may be causing the condition (refer to SI). ‹› If DTCs are not set, refer to Symptoms - Vehicle to identify the connector(s) of the control module/component which may be causing the condition (refer to SI). 2. When identified, use the appropriate DTC Diagnostics, Symptoms, Schematics, Component Connector End Views and Component Locator documents to locate and disconnect the affected harness connector(s) which are causing the condition. Note Fretting corrosion looks like little dark smudges on electrical terminals and appear where the actual electrical contact is being made. In less severe cases it may be unable to be seen or identified without the use of a magnifying glass. Important DO NOT apply an excessive amount of dielectric lubricant to the connectors as shown, as hydrolock may result when attempting to mate the connectors. Use ONLY a clean nylon brush that is dedicated to the repair of the conditions in this bulletin. 3. With a one-inch nylon bristle brush, apply dielectric lubricant to both the module/component side and the harness side of the affected connector(s). 4. Reconnect the affected connector(s) and wipe away any excess lubricant that may be present. 5. Attempt to duplicate the condition by using the following information: - DTC Diagnostic Procedure - Circuit/System Description - Conditions for Running the DTC - Conditions for Setting the DTC - Diagnostic Aids - Circuit/System Verification ‹› If the condition cannot be duplicated, the repair is complete. ‹› If the condition can be duplicated, then follow the appropriate DTC, Symptom or Circuit/System Testing procedure (refer to SI). Repair Order Documentation Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules > Page 8752 Important The following information MUST be documented on the repair order. Failure to do so may result in a chargeback. - Customer vehicle condition. - Was a Service Lamp or Service Message illuminated? If yes, specify which Service Lamp or Service Message. - Was a DTC(s) set? If yes, specify which DTC(s) were set. - After following the procedure contained within this bulletin, could the condition be duplicated? ‹› If the condition was not duplicated, then document the affected module/component connector name and number on the repair order. - If the condition was duplicated after the procedure contained within this bulletin was followed, and additional diagnosis led to the replacement of a module or component, the SI Document ID Number MUST be written on the repair order. Parts Information Alternate Distributor For All of North America Note NyoGel(R) 760G Lubricant* is equivalent to GMSPO P/N 12377900, and P/N 10953529 (Canada), specified for use to correct the condition in this bulletin. *We believe this source and their products to be reliable. There may be additional manufacturers of such products/materials. General Motors does not endorse, indicate any preference for, or assume any responsibility for the products or material from this firm or for any such items that may be available from other sources. Warranty Information (excluding Saab Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the appropriate/closest labor operation depending upon the module/component connection that the dielectric lubricant was applied to: Warranty Information (Saab Models) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules > Page 8753 For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the appropriate/closest labor operation depending upon the module/component connection that the dielectric lubricant was applied to refer to the table above. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 10-08-45-001B > Oct > 10 > Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair Wiring Harness: All Technical Service Bulletins Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 10-08-45-001B Date: October 25, 2010 Subject: Information for Electrical Ground Repair - Use New Replacement Fasteners with Conductive Finish Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (including Saturn) 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2011 model year and update the Warranty Information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 10-08-45-001A (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Electrical Ground Repair Overview Proper electrical system function relies on secure, stable and corrosion-free electrical ground connections. Loose, stripped, or corroded connections increase the possibility of improper system function and loss of module communication. These conditions may also lead to unnecessary repairs and component replacement. In general, electrical ground connections are accomplished using one, or a combination of the following attachment methods: - Welded M6 stud and nut - Welded M6 nut and bolt - Welded M8 nut and bolt Determine which attachment method is used and perform the appropriate or alternative repair as described in this bulletin. M6 Weld Stud Replacement Caution Use only the GM-approved replacement fasteners with conductive finish for electrical ground repair. 1. Select a location adjacent the damaged or missing M6 ground stud having 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance behind the panel surface and 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance surrounding the M6 conductive rivet stud flange. 2. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, remove any grease from the repair site and allow to dry. Note Ensure 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance is maintained behind the panel to be drilled. 3. Drill a 10 mm (0.40 in) diameter hole through the panel. 4. Remove paint and primer from the area surrounding the 10 mm (0.40 in) hole until bare metal is visible. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 10-08-45-001B > Oct > 10 > Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair > Page 8758 Important The M6 conductive rivet stud as shown, can accommodate a panel thickness range of 0.7-4.2 mm (0.03-0.17 in). If there are layers of sheet metal, they should be touching without any air gaps to ensure a good ground. 5. Select a M6 conductive rivet stud. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. Note Use the GE-50317 rivet stud tool kit. 6. Place the M6 conductive rivet stud (1) in the 10 mm (0.40 in) hole. Assemble the rivet stud tool (2) with the groove and flare side facing the rivet stud, then the washer and the M6 nut (3). 7. Using a wrench on the rivet stud tool, and a socket on the M6 nut, secure the M6 conductive rivet stud. 8. Ensure the rivet stud is securely fastened, WITHOUT ANY detectable movement. 9. Completely wrap the threads of the rivet stud with painters tape or equivalent. Note The rivet stud and surrounding panel area MUST BE properly refinished PRIOR to the installation of the ground wire terminal and conductive nut to maintain a secure, stable and corrosion-free electrical ground. 10. Refinish the repair area using an anti-corrosion primer. Refer to Anti-Corrosion Treatment and Repair in SI. 11. Allow the refinished repair area to cure sufficiently before removing the protective material applied to the rivet stud threads. 12. Remove the painters tape or equivalent from the rivet stud threads. 13. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, thoroughly clean the rivet stud threads to remove any adhesive and allow to dry. 14. Using a small brush, apply Dielectric Lubricant GM P/N 12377900 (Canadian P/N 10953529) to the threads of the M6 conductive rivet stud. Note Fretting corrosion is a build-up of insulating, oxidized wear debris that can form when there is a small motion between electrical contacts. The oxidized wear debris can accumulate at the electrical contact points causing the electrical resistance across the connection to increase. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 10-08-45-001B > Oct > 10 > Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair > Page 8759 15. Carefully remove ANY corrosion or contamination that may be present on the electrical ground wire terminal. 16. Install the electrical ground wire terminal to the rivet stud. 17. Select a M6 conductive nut. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 18. Install the M6 conductive nut to the rivet stud and: Tighten Tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb in). 19. Verify proper system operation. M6 Weld Nut Caution Use only the GM-approved replacement fasteners with conductive finish for electrical ground repair. 1. If the M6 weld nut at the electrical ground location is damaged or stripped, a M7 conductive self-threading bolt may be used to secure the ground wire terminal. 2. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, remove any grease from the surface surrounding the weld nut and allow to dry. 3. Remove any loose metal particles from the damaged or stripped weld nut with a stiff brush. 4. Select a M7 conductive self-threading bolt. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin 5. Using a small brush, apply Dielectric Lubricant GM P/N 12377900 (Canadian P/N 10953529) to the threads of the M7 conductive self-threading bolt. Note Fretting corrosion is a build-up of insulating, oxidized wear debris that can form when there is a small motion between electrical contacts. The oxidized wear debris can accumulate at the electrical contact points causing the electrical resistance across the connection to increase. 6. Carefully remove ANY corrosion or contamination that may be present on the electrical ground wire terminal. 7. Install the electrical ground wire terminal to the M7 conductive self-threading bolt. 8. Install the M7 conductive self-threading bolt and: Tighten Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb in). 9. Verify proper system operation. M6 Weld Nut Alternative Repair Caution Use only the GM-approved replacement fasteners with conductive finish for electrical ground repair. 1. If the electrical ground location is accessible from both sides of the panel, a M6 conductive bolt and a M6 conductive nut may be used to secure the electrical ground wire terminal. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 2. Select a location adjacent the damaged M6 weld nut having 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance behind the panel surface and 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance surrounding the new electrical ground site. 3. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, remove any grease from the surface surrounding the ground location and allow to dry. Note Ensure 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance is maintained behind the panel to be drilled. 4. Drill a 8.5 mm (0.33 in) diameter hole through the panel. 5. Remove paint and primer from the area surrounding the 8.5 mm (0.33 in) hole until bare metal is visible. 6. Select a M6 conductive bolt. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 7. Using a small brush, apply Dielectric Lubricant GM P/N 12377900 (Canadian P/N 10953529) to the threads of the M6 conductive bolt. Note Fretting corrosion is a build-up of insulating, oxidized wear debris that can form when there is a small motion between electrical contacts. The oxidized wear debris can accumulate at the electrical contact points causing the electrical resistance across the connection to increase. 8. Carefully remove ANY corrosion or contamination that may be present on the electrical ground wire terminal. 9. Install the electrical ground wire terminal and the M6 conductive bolt to the ground location. 10. Select a M6 conductive nut. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 11. Install the M6 conductive nut to the bolt and: Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 10-08-45-001B > Oct > 10 > Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair > Page 8760 Tighten Tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb in). Note The repair area MUST BE properly refinished to maintain a secure, stable and corrosion-free electrical ground. 12. Refinish the repair area using an anti-corrosion primer. Refer to Anti-Corrosion Treatment and Repair in SI. 13. Verify proper system operation. M8 Weld Nut Caution Use only the GM-approved replacement fasteners with conductive finish for electrical ground repair. 1. If the M8 weld nut electrical ground location is accessible from both sides of the panel, a M8 conductive bolt and a M8 conductive nut may be used to secure the electrical ground wire terminal. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 2. Select a location adjacent the M8 weld nut having 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance behind the panel surface and 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance surrounding the new electrical ground site. 3. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, remove any grease from the surface surrounding the ground location and allow to dry. Note Ensure 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance is maintained behind the panel to be drilled. 4. Drill a 10 mm (0.40 in) diameter hole through the panel. 5. Remove paint and primer from the area surrounding the 10 mm (0.40 in) hole until bare metal is visible. 6. Select a M8 conductive bolt. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 7. Using a small brush, apply Dielectric Lubricant GM P/N 12377900 (Canadian P/N 10953529) to the threads of the M8 conductive bolt. Note Fretting corrosion is a build-up of insulating, oxidized wear debris that can form when there is a small motion between electrical contacts. The oxidized wear debris can accumulate at the electrical contact points causing the electrical resistance across the connection to increase. 8. Carefully remove ANY corrosion or contamination that may be present on the electrical ground wire terminal. 9. Install the electrical ground wire terminal and the M8 conductive bolt to the ground location. 10. Select a M8 conductive nut. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 11. Install the M8 conductive nut to the bolt and: Tighten Tighten to 22 Nm (16 lb ft). Note The repair area MUST BE properly refinished to maintain a secure, stable and corrosion-free electrical ground. 12. Refinish the repair area using an anti-corrosion primer. Refer to Anti-Corrosion Treatment and Repair in SI. 13. Verify proper system operation. M8 Weld Nut Alternative Repair Caution Use only the GM-approved replacement fasteners with conductive finish for electrical ground repair. 1. If the M8 weld nut electrical ground location is not accessible from both sides of the panel, a M6 conductive rivet stud and a M6 conductive nut may be used to secure the electrical ground wire terminal. 2. Select a location adjacent the damaged M8 weld nut having 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance behind the panel surface and 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance surrounding the M6 conductive rivet stud flange. 3. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, remove any grease from the repair site and allow to dry. Note Ensure 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance is maintained behind the panel to be drilled. 4. Drill a 10 mm (0.40 in) diameter hole through the panel. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 10-08-45-001B > Oct > 10 > Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair > Page 8761 5. Remove paint and primer from the area surrounding the 10 mm (0.40 in) until bare metal is visible. Important The M6 conductive rivet stud as shown, can accommodate a panel thickness range of 0.7-4.2 mm (0.03-0.17 in). If there are layers of sheet metal, they should be touching without any air gaps to ensure a good ground. 6. Select a M6 conductive rivet stud. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. Note Use the GE-50317 rivet stud tool kit. 7. Place the M6 conductive rivet stud (1) in the 10 mm (0.40 in) hole. Assemble the rivet stud tool (2) with the groove and flare side facing the rivet stud, then the washer and the M6 nut (3). 8. Using a wrench on the rivet stud tool, and a socket on the M6 nut, secure the M6 conductive rivet stud. 9. Ensure the new rivet stud is securely fastened, WITHOUT ANY detectable movement. 10. Completely wrap the threads of the rivet stud with painters tape or equivalent. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 10-08-45-001B > Oct > 10 > Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair > Page 8762 Note The rivet stud and surrounding panel area MUST BE properly refinished PRIOR to the installation of the electrical ground wire terminal and conductive nut to maintain a secure, stable and corrosion-free electrical ground. 11. Refinish the repair area using an anti-corrosion primer. Refer to Anti-Corrosion Treatment and Repair in SI. 12. Allow the refinished repair area to cure sufficiently before removing the protective material applied to the rivet stud threads. 13. Remove the painters tape or equivalent from the rivet stud threads. 14. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, thoroughly clean the rivet stud threads to remove any adhesive and allow to dry. 15. Using a small brush, apply Dielectric Lubricant GM P/N 12377900 (Canadian P/N 10953529) to the threads of the M6 conductive rivet stud. Note Fretting corrosion is a build-up of insulating, oxidized wear debris that can form when there is a small motion between electrical contacts. The oxidized wear debris can accumulate at the electrical contact points causing the electrical resistance across the connection to increase. 16. Carefully remove ANY corrosion or contamination that may be present on the electrical ground wire terminal. 17. Install the electrical ground wire terminal to the M6 conductive rivet stud. 18. Select a M6 conductive nut. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 19. Install the M6 conductive nut to the rivet stud and: Tighten Tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb in) 20. Verify proper system operation. Parts Information Warranty Information (excluding Saab Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use: Warranty Information (Saab Models) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 10-08-45-001B > Oct > 10 > Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair > Page 8763 For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 07-06-04-019D > Jun > 10 > Electrical - Intermittent MIL/DTC P2138/Reduced Power Wiring Harness: All Technical Service Bulletins Electrical - Intermittent MIL/DTC P2138/Reduced Power TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 07-06-04-019D Date: June 28, 2010 Subject: Intermittent Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) Illuminated, DTC P2138 with Reduced Engine Power (Repair Instrument Panel (IP) to Body Harness Connector) Models: 2005-2011 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (Including Saturn) 2005-2009 HUMMER H2 2006-2010 HUMMER H3 2005-2009 Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the model years and warranty information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 07-06-04-019C (Section 06 - Engine/Propulsion System) Condition - Some customers may comment on an intermittent malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) being Illuminated with a message or an indicator that displays Reduced Engine Power. - The technician may observe on a scan tool DTC P2138 - Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor 1-2 Correlation set as Current or in History. Cause This condition may be caused by water intrusion into the instrument panel (IP) to body harness connector, which carries the APP sensor signals to the ECM/PCM. This water intrusion results in a voltage difference between APP Sensor 1 and APP Sensor 2 that exceeds a predetermined value for more than a calibrated period of time, setting P2138. Correction Note Aftermarket equipment can generate DTC P2138 and/or other DTCs. 1. Verify that aftermarket equipment is not electrically connected to any of the APP sensor signal or low reference circuits or to any other ECM/PCM 5V reference or low reference circuits. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories in SI. 2. Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle. ‹› If any 5V reference DTCs are set, refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle. ‹› If any 5V reference DTCs are not set, proceed to Step 3. 3. Locate the IP to body harness connector, which may be located in and around the left hand kick panel area or inside the IP. Depending on the vehicle and model year, refer to Wiring Systems or Power and Signal Distribution in SI. Note Some examples of potential water leaks are: A-pillar seals, sunroof drain lines (if equipped) and windshield/cowl sealing. 4. Inspect for a water leak in the area. If necessary use a water hose to determine the source of the leak. Refer to General Information > Water Leaks in SI. ‹› If a water leak is observed, repair as necessary. Verify the effectiveness of the repair. 5. Inspect the IP to body harness connector terminals for corrosion and debris. Refer to Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections in SI. ‹› If any corrosion and/or debris is observed, repair as necessary. 6. After completing the repair, verify the proper operation of the system. Depending on the vehicle and model year, perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification procedure or refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle in SI. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 07-06-04-019D > Jun > 10 > Electrical - Intermittent MIL/DTC P2138/Reduced Power > Page 8768 Warranty Information (excluding Saab U.S. Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the appropriate labor operation for the source of the water leak Warranty Information (Saab U.S. Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 10-08-45-001B > Oct > 10 > Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair > Page 8774 Important The M6 conductive rivet stud as shown, can accommodate a panel thickness range of 0.7-4.2 mm (0.03-0.17 in). If there are layers of sheet metal, they should be touching without any air gaps to ensure a good ground. 5. Select a M6 conductive rivet stud. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. Note Use the GE-50317 rivet stud tool kit. 6. Place the M6 conductive rivet stud (1) in the 10 mm (0.40 in) hole. Assemble the rivet stud tool (2) with the groove and flare side facing the rivet stud, then the washer and the M6 nut (3). 7. Using a wrench on the rivet stud tool, and a socket on the M6 nut, secure the M6 conductive rivet stud. 8. Ensure the rivet stud is securely fastened, WITHOUT ANY detectable movement. 9. Completely wrap the threads of the rivet stud with painters tape or equivalent. Note The rivet stud and surrounding panel area MUST BE properly refinished PRIOR to the installation of the ground wire terminal and conductive nut to maintain a secure, stable and corrosion-free electrical ground. 10. Refinish the repair area using an anti-corrosion primer. Refer to Anti-Corrosion Treatment and Repair in SI. 11. Allow the refinished repair area to cure sufficiently before removing the protective material applied to the rivet stud threads. 12. Remove the painters tape or equivalent from the rivet stud threads. 13. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, thoroughly clean the rivet stud threads to remove any adhesive and allow to dry. 14. Using a small brush, apply Dielectric Lubricant GM P/N 12377900 (Canadian P/N 10953529) to the threads of the M6 conductive rivet stud. Note Fretting corrosion is a build-up of insulating, oxidized wear debris that can form when there is a small motion between electrical contacts. The oxidized wear debris can accumulate at the electrical contact points causing the electrical resistance across the connection to increase. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 10-08-45-001B > Oct > 10 > Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair > Page 8775 15. Carefully remove ANY corrosion or contamination that may be present on the electrical ground wire terminal. 16. Install the electrical ground wire terminal to the rivet stud. 17. Select a M6 conductive nut. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 18. Install the M6 conductive nut to the rivet stud and: Tighten Tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb in). 19. Verify proper system operation. M6 Weld Nut Caution Use only the GM-approved replacement fasteners with conductive finish for electrical ground repair. 1. If the M6 weld nut at the electrical ground location is damaged or stripped, a M7 conductive self-threading bolt may be used to secure the ground wire terminal. 2. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, remove any grease from the surface surrounding the weld nut and allow to dry. 3. Remove any loose metal particles from the damaged or stripped weld nut with a stiff brush. 4. Select a M7 conductive self-threading bolt. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin 5. Using a small brush, apply Dielectric Lubricant GM P/N 12377900 (Canadian P/N 10953529) to the threads of the M7 conductive self-threading bolt. Note Fretting corrosion is a build-up of insulating, oxidized wear debris that can form when there is a small motion between electrical contacts. The oxidized wear debris can accumulate at the electrical contact points causing the electrical resistance across the connection to increase. 6. Carefully remove ANY corrosion or contamination that may be present on the electrical ground wire terminal. 7. Install the electrical ground wire terminal to the M7 conductive self-threading bolt. 8. Install the M7 conductive self-threading bolt and: Tighten Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb in). 9. Verify proper system operation. M6 Weld Nut Alternative Repair Caution Use only the GM-approved replacement fasteners with conductive finish for electrical ground repair. 1. If the electrical ground location is accessible from both sides of the panel, a M6 conductive bolt and a M6 conductive nut may be used to secure the electrical ground wire terminal. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 2. Select a location adjacent the damaged M6 weld nut having 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance behind the panel surface and 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance surrounding the new electrical ground site. 3. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, remove any grease from the surface surrounding the ground location and allow to dry. Note Ensure 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance is maintained behind the panel to be drilled. 4. Drill a 8.5 mm (0.33 in) diameter hole through the panel. 5. Remove paint and primer from the area surrounding the 8.5 mm (0.33 in) hole until bare metal is visible. 6. Select a M6 conductive bolt. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 7. Using a small brush, apply Dielectric Lubricant GM P/N 12377900 (Canadian P/N 10953529) to the threads of the M6 conductive bolt. Note Fretting corrosion is a build-up of insulating, oxidized wear debris that can form when there is a small motion between electrical contacts. The oxidized wear debris can accumulate at the electrical contact points causing the electrical resistance across the connection to increase. 8. Carefully remove ANY corrosion or contamination that may be present on the electrical ground wire terminal. 9. Install the electrical ground wire terminal and the M6 conductive bolt to the ground location. 10. Select a M6 conductive nut. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 11. Install the M6 conductive nut to the bolt and: Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 10-08-45-001B > Oct > 10 > Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair > Page 8776 Tighten Tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb in). Note The repair area MUST BE properly refinished to maintain a secure, stable and corrosion-free electrical ground. 12. Refinish the repair area using an anti-corrosion primer. Refer to Anti-Corrosion Treatment and Repair in SI. 13. Verify proper system operation. M8 Weld Nut Caution Use only the GM-approved replacement fasteners with conductive finish for electrical ground repair. 1. If the M8 weld nut electrical ground location is accessible from both sides of the panel, a M8 conductive bolt and a M8 conductive nut may be used to secure the electrical ground wire terminal. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 2. Select a location adjacent the M8 weld nut having 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance behind the panel surface and 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance surrounding the new electrical ground site. 3. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, remove any grease from the surface surrounding the ground location and allow to dry. Note Ensure 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance is maintained behind the panel to be drilled. 4. Drill a 10 mm (0.40 in) diameter hole through the panel. 5. Remove paint and primer from the area surrounding the 10 mm (0.40 in) hole until bare metal is visible. 6. Select a M8 conductive bolt. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 7. Using a small brush, apply Dielectric Lubricant GM P/N 12377900 (Canadian P/N 10953529) to the threads of the M8 conductive bolt. Note Fretting corrosion is a build-up of insulating, oxidized wear debris that can form when there is a small motion between electrical contacts. The oxidized wear debris can accumulate at the electrical contact points causing the electrical resistance across the connection to increase. 8. Carefully remove ANY corrosion or contamination that may be present on the electrical ground wire terminal. 9. Install the electrical ground wire terminal and the M8 conductive bolt to the ground location. 10. Select a M8 conductive nut. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 11. Install the M8 conductive nut to the bolt and: Tighten Tighten to 22 Nm (16 lb ft). Note The repair area MUST BE properly refinished to maintain a secure, stable and corrosion-free electrical ground. 12. Refinish the repair area using an anti-corrosion primer. Refer to Anti-Corrosion Treatment and Repair in SI. 13. Verify proper system operation. M8 Weld Nut Alternative Repair Caution Use only the GM-approved replacement fasteners with conductive finish for electrical ground repair. 1. If the M8 weld nut electrical ground location is not accessible from both sides of the panel, a M6 conductive rivet stud and a M6 conductive nut may be used to secure the electrical ground wire terminal. 2. Select a location adjacent the damaged M8 weld nut having 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance behind the panel surface and 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance surrounding the M6 conductive rivet stud flange. 3. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, remove any grease from the repair site and allow to dry. Note Ensure 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance is maintained behind the panel to be drilled. 4. Drill a 10 mm (0.40 in) diameter hole through the panel. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 10-08-45-001B > Oct > 10 > Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair > Page 8777 5. Remove paint and primer from the area surrounding the 10 mm (0.40 in) until bare metal is visible. Important The M6 conductive rivet stud as shown, can accommodate a panel thickness range of 0.7-4.2 mm (0.03-0.17 in). If there are layers of sheet metal, they should be touching without any air gaps to ensure a good ground. 6. Select a M6 conductive rivet stud. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. Note Use the GE-50317 rivet stud tool kit. 7. Place the M6 conductive rivet stud (1) in the 10 mm (0.40 in) hole. Assemble the rivet stud tool (2) with the groove and flare side facing the rivet stud, then the washer and the M6 nut (3). 8. Using a wrench on the rivet stud tool, and a socket on the M6 nut, secure the M6 conductive rivet stud. 9. Ensure the new rivet stud is securely fastened, WITHOUT ANY detectable movement. 10. Completely wrap the threads of the rivet stud with painters tape or equivalent. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 10-08-45-001B > Oct > 10 > Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair > Page 8778 Note The rivet stud and surrounding panel area MUST BE properly refinished PRIOR to the installation of the electrical ground wire terminal and conductive nut to maintain a secure, stable and corrosion-free electrical ground. 11. Refinish the repair area using an anti-corrosion primer. Refer to Anti-Corrosion Treatment and Repair in SI. 12. Allow the refinished repair area to cure sufficiently before removing the protective material applied to the rivet stud threads. 13. Remove the painters tape or equivalent from the rivet stud threads. 14. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, thoroughly clean the rivet stud threads to remove any adhesive and allow to dry. 15. Using a small brush, apply Dielectric Lubricant GM P/N 12377900 (Canadian P/N 10953529) to the threads of the M6 conductive rivet stud. Note Fretting corrosion is a build-up of insulating, oxidized wear debris that can form when there is a small motion between electrical contacts. The oxidized wear debris can accumulate at the electrical contact points causing the electrical resistance across the connection to increase. 16. Carefully remove ANY corrosion or contamination that may be present on the electrical ground wire terminal. 17. Install the electrical ground wire terminal to the M6 conductive rivet stud. 18. Select a M6 conductive nut. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 19. Install the M6 conductive nut to the rivet stud and: Tighten Tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb in) 20. Verify proper system operation. Parts Information Warranty Information (excluding Saab Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use: Warranty Information (Saab Models) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 10-08-45-001B > Oct > 10 > Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair > Page 8779 For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 09167 > Jul > 09 > Campaign Missing Seal/Engine-to-Body Inline Connector Wiring Harness: All Technical Service Bulletins Campaign - Missing Seal/Engine-to-Body Inline Connector SERVICE UPDATE Bulletin No.: 09167 Date: July 23, 2009 Subject: 09167 - Service Update for Inventory and Customer Vehicles Missing Seal on Engine-to-Body Inline Connector - Expires with Base Warranty Models: 2010 Chevrolet Equinox THIS SERVICE UPDATE INCLUDES VEHICLES IN DEALER INVENTORY AND CUSTOMER VEHICLES THAT RETURN TO THE DEALERSHIP FOR ANY REASON. IT WILL EXPIRE AT THE END OF THE INVOLVED VEHICLE'S NEW VEHICLE LIMITED WARRANTY PERIOD. Purpose This bulletin provides a service procedure to install a connector seal to the engine-to-body inline connector on certain 2010 model year Chevrolet Equinox vehicles. These vehicles are missing a seal on the engine-to-body inline connector. This service procedure should be completed as soon as possible on involved vehicles currently in dealer inventory and customer vehicles that return to the dealer for any type of service during the New Vehicle Limited Warranty coverage period. Vehicles Involved A list of involved vehicles currently in dealer inventory is available on the "Service Update Bulletin Information" link under the "Service" tab in GM GlobalConnect (US), or attached to the Dealer Communication (Canada), used to release this bulletin. Customer vehicles that return for service, for any reason, and are still covered under the vehicles base warranty, and are within the VIN breakpoints provided below, should be checked for vehicle eligibility in the appropriate system listed below. Important: Dealers are to confirm vehicle eligibility prior to beginning repairs by using the GM Vehicle Inquiry System (GMVIS). Not all vehicles within the above breakpoints may be involved. Parts Information US Only: Connector seals will be shipped from the Warranty Parts Center (WPC) at no charge via UPS 2-Day Delivery - Attention: Parts Manager, to dealers with involved vehicles beginning Friday, July 24, 2009. All dealers who have involved vehicles should have the seals no later than Wednesday, July 29, 2009. Seals needed for dealer-trades are to be obtained by calling the WPC, and requesting WPC P/N 479. Canada Only: Connector seals will be available by calling the WINS Assistance Centre. The seals will be shipped at no charge via Overnight Delivery. Only dealers with affected vehicles should call for these parts Service Procedure 1. Unlock the vehicle and open the door. 2. Place the key FOB on the driver seat (avoid inadvertent FOB key press). 3. Release the hood latch. 4. Exit the vehicle and close the door. 5. Open the hood of the vehicle. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 09167 > Jul > 09 > Campaign Missing Seal/Engine-to-Body Inline Connector > Page 8784 6. Locate the engine-to-body inline connector (4). This connector (4) is located on the passenger side of the engine compartment near the shock tower (1), air cleaner outlet duct (2), and air cleaner assembly (3). Refer to the illustration. 7. Remove the connector from the shock tower (1) by gently pulling the connector rearward and away from the shock tower. 8. Disengage the connection by pressing the side of the connector and pulling the grey lever to the back. 9. Install a new connector seal. Inspect the connector seal to ensure that the connector seal is not cracked, cut, or damaged. 1. Place one edge of the seal over one edge of the terminal housing as shown. Using both hands, stretch the remaining seal around the terminal housing. 2. Verify that the seal is seated properly around terminal housing. There must be NO TWISTING of the seal and it MUST sit flush as shown in the illustration. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 09167 > Jul > 09 > Campaign Missing Seal/Engine-to-Body Inline Connector > Page 8785 3. Using tool number 12094441 or a wooden craft tool, gently push the seal to the back of connector, applying pressure to all four sides of the seal evenly. 4. Rotate the connector to the side of the clip and look through the connector window to verify that the seal is fully seated at the back of connector. Refer to the illustration to view an improperly (1) and properly installed (2) connector seal. 10. Engage both connectors and verify that the lever is fully locked by attempting to open it without pressing on the unlocking tabs. 11. Install the connector (2) on the connector clip located on the shock tower (1). Pull on the connector to ensure that it is secure on the clip. 12. Close the hood. 13. Open the front driver's side door. 14. Sit in the driver's seat and close the door. Note If the vehicle passes ALL of the inspection points outlined in Steps 15-20, no further action is required. If the vehicle does NOT pass all inspection points, ensure that the connector pins are NOT bent and that the connector is seated and locked properly. Repeat Steps 15-20 if required to ensure proper installation of the seal and connector. 15. Turn the key to the RUN position. Do NOT start the engine. If the engine telltale (MIL) is ON solid, the vehicle PASSES this inspection point. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 09167 > Jul > 09 > Campaign Missing Seal/Engine-to-Body Inline Connector > Page 8786 16. Turn the key to crank (start engine). If the engine starts, the vehicle PASSES this inspection point. 17. Wait 10 seconds, if the engine telltale (MIL) is OFF, the vehicle PASSES this inspection point. 18. Push ECO button next to shifter knob (present only on 4 cylinder engine). If the ECO telltale comes ON, the vehicle PASSES this inspection point. 19. Turn the steering wheel 1/4 turn. If the steering wheel is easy to turn, power assist is present. The vehicle PASSES this inspection point. 20. Press accelerator pedal. If the engine RPMs increase, the vehicle PASSES this inspection point. Claim Information Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Accessory Relay > Component Information > Locations Accessory Relay: Locations Electrical Center Identification Views X51A Fuse Block - Instrument Panel Label (before A6284015) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Accessory Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 8791 X51A Fuse Block - Instrument Panel Label (A6284015 and after) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Accessory Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 8792 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Accessory Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 8793 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Accessory Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 8794 Accessory Relay: Diagrams X80A Accessory Power Receptacle - Center Console 1 X80B Accessory Power Receptacle - Center Console 2 X80G Accessory Power Receptacle - Instrument Panel Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Accessory Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 8795 X80R Accessory Power Receptacle - Rear Compartment Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Auxiliary Power Outlet: Diagram Information and Instructions Electrical Schematic Symbols Electrical Schematic Symbols Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8800 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8801 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8802 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8803 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8804 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8805 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8806 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8807 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8808 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8809 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8810 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8811 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8812 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8813 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8814 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8815 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8816 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8817 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8818 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8819 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8820 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8821 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8822 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8823 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8824 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8825 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8826 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8827 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8828 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8829 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8830 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8831 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8832 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8833 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8834 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8835 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8836 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8837 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8838 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8839 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8840 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8841 General Electrical Diagnosis General Electrical Diagnosis Basic Knowledge Required Without a basic knowledge of electricity, it will be difficult to use the diagnostic procedures contained in the service manual. You should understand the basic theory of electricity, and know the meaning of voltage (V), current (A), and resistance (Ohms ). You should also be able to read and understand a wiring diagram, as well as understand what happens in a circuit with an open or a shorted wire. Vehicle Zoning Strategy Vehicle Zoning Strategy All grounds, in-line connectors, and splices have identifying numbers that correspond to where they are located in the vehicle. The following table explains the numbering system. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8842 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8843 Auxiliary Power Outlet: Diagnostic Aids Arrows and Symbols Arrows and Symbols This service manual uses various symbols in order to describe different service operations. 1 - Front of Vehicle 2 - View Detail 2 - View Detail 3 - Ambient Air Mixed with Another Gas or Indicate Temperature Change 4 - Motion or Direction 5 - View Angle 6 - Dimension (1:2) 7 Ambient/Clean Air Flow or Cool Air Flow 8 - Lubrication Point - Oil or Fluid 9 - Task Related 10 Sectioning (1:3) 11 - Gas Other Than Ambient Air or Hot Air Flow 12 - Lubrication Point - Grease or Jelly 13 - Multidirectional Arrow Decimal and Metric Equivalents Decimal and Metric Equivalents Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8844 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8845 Checking Aftermarket Accessories Checking Aftermarket Accessories Warning: Refer to SIR Warning (See: Restraint Systems/Service Precautions/SIR Warning). Caution: The OBD II symbol is used on the circuit diagrams in order to alert the technician that the circuit is essential for proper OBD II emission control circuit operation. Any circuit which fails and causes the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) to turn ON, or causes emissions-related component damage, is identified as an OBD II circuit. Do not connect aftermarket accessories into the following circuits: * SIR circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the SIR symbol. * OBD II circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the OBD II symbol. Always check for aftermarket accessories (non-OEM) as the first step in diagnosing electrical problems. If the vehicle is so equipped, disconnect the system to verify that these add-on accessories are not the cause of the problems. Possible causes of vehicle problems related to aftermarket accessories include: * Power feeds connected to points other than the battery * Antenna location * Transceiver wiring located too close to vehicle electronic modules or wiring * Poor shielding or poor connectors on antenna feed line * Check for recent service bulletins detailing installation guidelines for aftermarket accessories. Circuit Testing Circuit Testing The Circuit Testing section contains the following diagnostic testing information. Using this information along with the diagnostic procedures will identify the cause of the electrical malfunction. * Using Connector Test Adapters (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Using Connector Test Adapters) * Probing Electrical Connectors (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Probing Electrical Connectors) * Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8846 Procedures/Circuit Testing/Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter) * Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp) * Using Fused Jumper Wires (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Using Fused Jumper Wires) * Measuring Voltage (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Measuring Voltage) * Measuring Voltage Drop (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Measuring Voltage Drop) * Measuring Frequency (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Measuring Frequency) * Testing Ground and Low Reference Circuits (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Testing Ground and Low Reference Circuits) * Testing for Continuity (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Continuity) * Testing for Short to Ground (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Short to Ground) * Testing for a Short to Voltage (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for a Short to Voltage) * Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections) * Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions) * Testing for Electrical Intermittents (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Electrical Intermittents) * Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure) * Circuit Protection - Fuses (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Circuit Protection - Fuses) * Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers) * Circuit Protection - Fusible Links (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Circuit Protection - Fusible Links) Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp Special Tools EL-35616-200 - Test Light - Probe Kit For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Tools and Equipment). Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test Probe Caution). A test lamp can simply and quickly test a low impedance circuit for voltage. A Digital Multimeter (DMM) should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present if the impedance is low enough, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. In other words, if there is not enough current, the test lamp will not illuminate even though voltage is present. The EL-35616-200 - kit is Micro-Pack compatible and comprised of a 12-volt light bulb with an attached pair of leads. To properly operate this tool use the following procedures. When testing for voltage: 1. Attach one lead to ground. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is voltage at the point being tested. When testing for ground: 1. Attach one lead to battery positive voltage. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where ground should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is ground at the point being tested. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8847 Testing for a Short to Voltage Testing for a Short to Voltage Special Tools EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM) For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Tools and Equipment). Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test Probe Caution). The following procedure tests for a short to voltage in a circuit. 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Set the rotary dial of the Digital Multimeter (DMM) to the V (DC) position. 4. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. Turn ON the ignition and operate all accessories. 7. If the voltage measured is greater than 1 V, there is a short to voltage in the circuit. Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions Special Tools J-25070 - Heat Gun For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Tools and Equipment). Many intermittent open or shorted circuits are affected by harness/connector movement that is caused by vibration, engine torque, bumps/rough pavement, etc. In order to duplicate the customer's concern, it may be necessary to manipulate the wiring harness if the malfunction appears to be vibration related. Manipulation of a circuit can consist of a wide variety of actions, including: * Wiggling the harness * Disconnecting a connector and reconnecting * Stressing the mechanical connection of a connector * Pulling on the harness or wire in order to identify a separation/break inside the insulation * Relocating a harness or wires All these actions should be performed with some goal in mind. For instance, with a scan tool connected, wiggling the wires may uncover a faulty input to the control module. The snapshot option would be appropriate here. Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure). Another option is, with the component commanded ON and OFF by the scan tool, move related connectors and wiring and observe the component operation. With the engine running, move related connectors and wiring while monitoring engine operation. If harness or connector movement affects the data displayed, component/system operation, or engine operation, inspect and repair the harness/connections as necessary. You may need to load the vehicle in order to duplicate the concern. This may require the use of weights, floor jacks, jackstands, frame machines, etc. In these cases you are attempting to duplicate the concern by manipulating the suspension or frame. This method is useful in finding harnesses that are too short and their connectors pull apart enough to cause a poor connection. A DMM set to Peak Min/Max mode and connected to the suspect circuit while testing can yield desirable results. Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Electrical Intermittents). Certainly, using the senses of sight, smell, and hearing while manipulating the circuit can provide good results as well. There may be instances where circuit manipulation alone will not meet the required criteria for the fault condition to appear. In such cases it may be necessary to expose the suspect circuit to other conditions while manipulating the harness. Such conditions would include high moisture conditions, along with exceptionally high or low temperatures. The following discusses how to expose the circuit to these kinds of conditions. Salt Water Spray Some compounds possess the ability to conduct electricity when dissolved in water such as ordinary salt. By mixing table salt with water in sufficient Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8848 quantities, you can enhance the conductive properties of water so that any circuit which may be sensitive to moisture will more readily fail when liberally sprayed with this mixture. Mixing 0.35L (12 oz) of water with approximately 1 tablespoon of salt will yield a salt solution of 5 percent. Fill a normal spray bottle with this mixture. This mixture is sufficient to enhance the water's own conductivity. This may cause the circuit to fail more easily when sprayed. Once the mixture is completed, spray the suspect area liberally with the solution. Then, while monitoring either a scan tool or DMM, manipulate the harness as discussed previously. High Temperature Conditions If the complaint tends to be heat related, you can simulate the condition using the J-25070 - heat gun. Using the heat gun, you can heat up the suspected area or component. Manipulate the harnesses under high temperature conditions while monitoring the scan tool or DMM to locate the fault condition. The high temperature condition may be achieved simply by test driving the vehicle at normal operating temperature. If a heat gun is unavailable, consider this option to enhance your diagnosis. This option does not allow for the same control, however. Low Temperature Conditions Depending on the nature of the fault condition, placing a fan in front of the vehicle while the vehicle is in the shade can have the desired effect. If this is unsuccessful, use local cooling treatments such as ice or a venturi type nozzle (one that provides hot or cold air). This type of tool is capable of producing air stream temperatures down to -18°C (0°F) from one end and +71°C (160°F) from the other. This is ideally suited for localized cooling needs. Once the vehicle, component, or harness has been sufficiently cooled, manipulate the harness or components in an effort to duplicate the concern. Duplicating Failure Conditions * If none of the previous tests are successful, attempt to duplicate and/or capture the failure conditions. * Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, where applicable, contains the conditions that were present when the DTC set. 1. Review and record Freeze Frame/Failure Records data. 2. Clear the DTCs using the scan tool. 3. Turn the key to OFF and wait 15 seconds. 4. Operate the vehicle under the same conditions that were noted in Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, as closely as possible. The vehicle must also be operating within the Conditions for Running the DTC. Refer to Conditions for Running the DTC in the supporting text if a DTC is being diagnosed. 5. Monitor DTC Status for the DTC being tested. The scan tool will indicate Ran, when the enabling conditions have been satisfied long enough for the DTC to run. The scan tool will also indicate whether the DTC passed or failed. * An alternate method is to drive the vehicle with the DMM connected to a suspected circuit. An abnormal reading on the DMM when the concern occurs, may help you locate the concern. Measuring Frequency Measuring Frequency Special Tools EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM) For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Tools and Equipment). Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test Probe Caution). The following procedure determines the frequency of a signal. Note: Connecting the Digital Multimeter (DMM) to the circuit before pressing the Hz button will allow the DMM to autorange to an appropriate range. 1. Apply power to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (AC) position. 3. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8849 5. Press the Hz button on the DMM. 6. The DMM will display the frequency measured. Measuring Voltage Measuring Voltage Special Tools EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM) For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Tools and Equipment). Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test Probe Caution). The following procedure measures the voltage at a selected point in a circuit. 1. Disconnect the electrical harness connector for the circuit being tested, if necessary. 2. Enable the circuit and/or system being tested. Use the following methods: * Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. * Turn ON the engine. * Turn ON the circuit and/or system with a scan tool in Output Controls. * Turn ON the switch for the circuit and/or system being tested. 3. Select the V (AC) or V (DC) position on the Digital Multimeter (DMM). 4. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the point of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. The DMM displays the voltage measured at that point. Measuring Voltage Drop Measuring Voltage Drop Special Tools EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM) For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Tools and Equipment). Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test Probe Caution). The following procedure determines the difference in voltage potential between 2 points. 1. Set the rotary dial of the Digital Multimeter (DMM) to the V (DC) position. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8850 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to one point of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to the other point of the circuit. 4. Operate the circuit. 5. The DMM displays the difference in voltage between the 2 points. Probing Electrical Connectors Probing Electrical Connectors Note: Always be sure to reinstall the connector position assurance (CPA) and terminal position assurance (TPA) when reconnecting connectors or replacing terminals. Front probe Disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the mating side (front) of the connector. Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test Probe Caution). Note: When probing female 0.64 terminals, it is important to use the correct adapter. There have been some revisions to the test adapter for 0.64 terminals. The proper adapter for 0.64 terminals is the EL-35616-64B which has a gold terminal and a black wire between the base and tip. Failure to use the proper test adapter may result in damage to the terminal being tested and improper diagnosis. Note: The proper adapter for probing the terminals for fuses, relays, or diodes in an electrical center is EL-35616-35. Using any other tool or adapter may damage the terminal being tested. Refer to the following table as a guide in selecting the correct test adapter for front probing connectors: Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8851 Backprobe Note: * Backprobe connector terminals only when specifically required in diagnostic procedures. * Do not backprobe a sealed (Weather Pack(R)) connector, less than a 280 series Metri-Pack connector, a Micro-Pack connector, or a flat wire (dock and lock) connector. * Backprobing can be a source of damage to connector terminals. Use care in order to avoid deforming the terminal, either by forcing the test probe too far into the cavity or by using too large of a test probe. * After backprobing any connector, inspect for terminal damage. If terminal damage is suspected, test for proper terminal contact. Do not disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the harness side (back) of the connector. Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure Using Snapshots in Global Diagnostic System (GDS) Overview Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8852 A snapshot is a recording of what a control module on the vehicle was receiving for information while the snapshot is being made. A snapshot may be used to analyze the data during the time a vehicle condition is current. This allows you to concentrate on making the condition occur, rather than trying to view all the data in anticipation of the fault. To record a snapshot in GDS, select, Record Snapshot, from the options at the top right portion of any of the various pages that allow snapshots to be taken (e.g. Data Display, Control Functions, etc.). When you are finished recording, select, Stop Snapshot recording. The snapshot will now be available for replay. Snapshot Replay The Snapshot Replay function allows reviews of previously recorded vehicle snapshot data. This information can be used in analysis of vehicle problems and detection of trigger error conditions. The graph function can be used to compare parameters to see if a component is functioning properly. Recorded snapshots can be selected for viewing by the following three methods: * Selecting a snapshot file from the Vehicle Home Page and clicking on the Review selection. * Double clicking on the selected snapshot from the Vehicle Home Page. * Entering the Tools selection from the Menu selection and selecting Snapshot replay. Next, open the Snapshot Manager. Double click on the snapshot file you wish to view or click on the Load Snapshot selection and select a snapshot file. Regardless of selection method, a File Loaded pop-up window will be displayed from the Snapshot Replay screen. Select OK from the pop-up window. Snapshot Play Functions There are several snapshot play functions that are used to replay recorded snapshots * The Play function is used to play the snapshot forward by clicking on this selection. A marker will move across the screen when this selection is used. All selections in this area turn grey when they are active. * The Pause function is used to pause play of the snapshot. When this selection is clicked a second time the snapshot will start playing where it left off. * The Stop function is used to stop playing the snapshot. The snapshot will start from the beginning, if Play is selected after using the Stop function. Time Control Time control is used to control the snapshot replay. This function allows selection of a specific time frame, display of different views, and control of display speed. The following functions can be selected directly under Time Control. * The Bookmark selection allows you to add a specific comment in the current display and return to this point in the future. When this option is selected, a pop-up window is displayed. Enter a bookmark name and select OK. * The Note Pad can be selected to add comments to the snapshot replay file at the current point of time. When this option is selected, a pop-up window is displayed. Enter a comment for the snapshot file and select OK. * The Load Snapshot (blue folder) opens a snapshot file and makes it ready for further analysis. This function is also available by clicking on an available snapshot file from the Snapshot Manager. * The Down Arrow displays all Time Control options when selected. Individual options can also be selected by clicking on the item you want. * The Snapshot Display Speed can be controlled by selecting this option. Slow speeds of 1/8X, 1/4X, and 1/2X can be selected. The real time speed can also be selected at 1. Faster speeds of 2X, 4X, and 8X can also be obtained by using this selection. View Selections Each View Selection provides a different way of displaying vehicle data for analysis. The following functions can be selected under Available Views: Note: The parameter name will be shown in the original language used for capture if no translation is available for the name. * Parameter List View - Displays incoming information from the snapshot file. The current value of the parameters is displayed on the screen. * Log View - Contains all the information from the snapshot file. All parameter values are listed in the order they were recorded. Specific parameters can be added or removed from a watchlist by clicking on the appropriate item. * State View - Shows the values of all parameters in a specific time frame. These values can be used for comparison with the trigger view. * Trigger View - Displays all system and user defined triggers. This function can be used when there is a combination of factors involved in a diagnostic problem. When a Trigger condition is met a caution triangle will be displayed on the screen. Triggers: * Load Triggers - Allows you to load a file containing trigger definitions. * Save Triggers - Allows you to save the trigger to your computer's hard drive. * Remove Trigger - Allows you to remove the current trigger. It will no longer be present. * Edit Trigger - Displays a pop-up window where you can modify the limits and parameters contained within a trigger. * Adds Trigger - Displays a pop-up window to configure a trigger. * DTC View - After the Play function is selected and this option is selected this function opens the list of recorded DTCs. * Line Graph View - Displays data that can be visualized against the time-axis. From this view, specific parameters can be selected for graphing by Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8853 checking the box under Selected. At the bottom of the graph there are four functions Zoom In (increase size), Zoom Out (decrease size), Bookmarks, and Pause Scrolling. Each of these functions can be accessed by clicking on them. Testing for Continuity Testing for Continuity Special Tools EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM) For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Tools and Equipment). Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test Probe Caution). The following procedures verify good continuity in a circuit. With a Digital Multimeter (DMM) 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the Ohms position. 2. Disconnect the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 3. Disconnect the load. 4. Press the MIN MAX button on the DMM. 5. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 6. Connect the other lead of the DMM to the other end of the circuit. 7. If the DMM displays low or no resistance, the circuit has good continuity. With a Test Lamp Note: Only use the test lamp procedure on low impedance power and ground circuits. 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect one lead of the test lamp to one end of the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 5. Connect the other end of the circuit to ground. 6. If the test lamp illuminates (full intensity), then the circuit has good continuity. Testing for Electrical Intermittents Testing for Electrical Intermittents Special Tools EL-39200 Digital Multimeter For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Tools and Equipment). Perform the following procedures while wiggling the harness from side to side. Continue this at convenient points (about 6 inches apart) while watching the test equipment. * Testing for Short to Ground (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Short to Ground) * Testing for Continuity (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Continuity) * Testing for a Short to Voltage (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for a Short to Voltage) If the fault is not identified, perform the procedure below using the MIN MAX feature on the EL-39200 DMM. This feature allows you to manipulate the circuit without having to watch the EL-39200. The EL-39200 will generate an audible tone when a change is detected. Note: The EL-39200 must be used in order to perform the following procedure since the EL-39200 can monitor current, resistance or voltage while recording the minimum (MIN), and maximum (MAX) values measured. 1. Connect the EL-39200 to both sides of a suspected connector (still connected), or from one end of a suspected circuit to the other. Refer to Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8854 Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter) for information on connecting the EL-39200 to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the EL-39200 to the V (AC) or V (DC) position. 3. Press the range button of the EL-39200 in order to select the desired voltage range. 4. Press the MIN MAX button of the EL-39200. The EL-39200 displays 100 ms RECORD and emits an audible tone (beep). Note: The 100 ms RECORD mode is the length of time an input must stay at a new value in order to record the full change. 5. Simulate the condition that is potentially causing the intermittent connection, either by wiggling the connections or the wiring, test driving, or performing other operations. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions). 6. Listen for the audible Min Max Alert which indicates that a new minimum or maximum value has been recorded. 7. Press the MIN MAX button once in order to display the MAX value and note the value. 8. Press the MIN MAX button again in order to display the MIN value and note the value. 9. Determine the difference between the MIN and MAX values. * If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is 1 V or greater an intermittent open or high resistance condition exists. Repair the condition as necessary. * If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is less than 1 V, an intermittent open or high resistance condition does not exist. Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections Special Tools EL-35616 Terminal Test Probe Kit For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Tools and Equipment). When the condition is not currently present, but is indicated in DTC history, the cause may be intermittent. An intermittent may also be the cause when there is a customer complaint, but the symptom cannot be duplicated. Refer to the Symptom Table of the system that is suspect of causing the condition before trying to locate an intermittent condition. Most intermittent conditions are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. Inspect for the following items: * Wiring broken inside the insulation * Poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector * Poor terminal to wire connection-Some conditions which fall under this description are poor crimps, poor solder joints, crimping over the wire insulation rather than the wire itself, and corrosion in the wire to terminal contact area, etc. * Pierced or damaged insulation can allow moisture to enter the wiring causing corrosion. The conductor can corrode inside the insulation, with little visible evidence. Look for swollen and stiff sections of wire in the suspect circuits. * Wiring which has been pinched, cut, or its insulation rubbed through may cause an intermittent open or short as the bare area touches other wiring or parts of the vehicle. * Wiring that comes in contact with hot or exhaust components * Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions) in order to duplicate the conditions required, in order to verify the customer concern. * Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Electrical Intermittents) for test procedures to detect intermittent open, high resistance, short to ground, and short to voltage conditions. * Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure) for advanced intermittent diagnosis and Vehicle Data Recorder operation. Testing for Terminal Fretting Some intermittent conditions can be caused by wire terminal fretting corrosion. Fretting corrosion is a build-up of insulating, oxidized wear debris that can form when there is a small motion between electrical contacts. The oxidized wear debris can pile up enough at the electrical contact spots that the electrical resistance across the connection increases. Movement between the contacting surfaces as small as 10 to 100 microns can cause fretting. To put this in perspective, a sheet of paper is about 100 microns thick, so fretting motion is small and hard to see. Vibration and thermal expansion/contraction are the main sources that create fretting motion. Since vehicles vibrate and can experience large temperature swings, they are a good source for fretting motion. Tin, copper, nickel, and iron surfaces are all susceptible to fretting corrosion. Fretting corrosion can be difficult to see but it looks like small, dark smudges on the terminals contact surface. To correct a fretting condition disconnect the suspect connector and add Nyogel lubricant 760G (dielectric grease) to both sides of the connector Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8855 terminals. Then reconnect the connector and wipe away any excess lubricant. This will correct the additional terminal contact resistance due to the terminal fretting corrosion. Testing for Proper Terminal Contact It is important to test terminal contact at the component and any inline connectors before replacing a suspect component. Mating terminals must be inspected to ensure good terminal contact. A poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector may be the result of contamination or deformation. Contamination may be caused by the connector halves being improperly connected. A missing or damaged connector seal, damage to the connector itself, or exposing the terminals to moisture and dirt can also cause contamination. Contamination, usually in the underhood or underbody connectors, leads to terminal corrosion, causing an open circuit or intermittently open circuit. Deformation is caused by probing the mating side of a connector terminal without the proper adapter. Always use the EL-35616 when probing connectors. Other causes of terminal deformation are improperly joining the connector halves, or repeatedly separating and joining the connector halves. Deformation, usually to the female terminal contact tang, can result in poor terminal contact causing an open or intermittently open circuit. Testing for Proper Terminal Contact in Bussed Electrical Centers It is very important to use the correct test adapter when testing for proper terminal contact of fuses and relays in a bussed electrical center. Use EL-35616-35 to test for proper terminal contact. Failure to use EL-35616-35 can result in improper diagnosis of the bussed electrical center. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact: 1. Separate the connector halves. 2. Visually inspect the connector halves for contamination. Contamination may result in a white or green build-up within the connector body or between terminals. This causes high terminal resistance, intermittent contact, or an open circuit. An underhood or underbody connector that shows signs of contamination should be replaced in its entirety: terminals, seals, and connector body. 3. Using an equivalent male terminal / terminated lead, verify that the retention force is significantly different between a known good terminal and the suspect terminal. Replace the female terminal in question. Flat Wire (Dock and Lock) Connectors There are no serviceable parts for flat wire (dock and lock) connectors on the harness side or the component side. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact: 1. Remove the component in question. 2. Visually inspect each side of the connector for signs of contamination. Avoid touching either side of the connector as oil from your skin may be a source of contamination as well. 3. Visually inspect the terminal bearing surfaces of the flat wire circuits for splits, cracks, or other imperfections that could cause poor terminal contact. Visually inspect the component side connector to ensure that all of the terminals are uniform and free of damage or deformation. 4. Insert the appropriate adapter from the on the flat wire harness connector in order to test the circuit in question. Control Module/Component Voltage and Grounds Poor voltage or ground connections can cause widely varying symptoms. * Test all control module voltage supply circuits. Many vehicles have multiple circuits supplying voltage to a control module. Other components in the system may have separate voltage supply circuits that may also need to be tested. Inspect connections at the module/component connectors, fuses, and any intermediate connections between the voltage source and the module/component. A test lamp or a DMM may indicate that voltage is present, but neither tests the ability of the circuit to carry sufficient current. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. Refer to Circuit Testing (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Circuit Testing) and Power Distribution Schematics (See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Power Distribution Schematics). * Test all control module ground and system ground circuits. The control module may have multiple ground circuits. Other components in the system may have separate grounds that may also need to be tested. Inspect grounds for clean and tight connections at the grounding point. Inspect the connections at the component and in splice packs, where applicable. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. Refer to Circuit Testing (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Circuit Testing) and Ground Distribution Schematics (See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Ground Distribution Schematics). Temperature Sensitivity * An intermittent condition may occur when a component/connection reaches normal operating temperature. The condition may occur only when the component/connection is cold, or only when the component/connection is hot. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8856 * Freeze Frame, Failure Records, Snapshot, or Vehicle Data Recorder data may help with this type of intermittent condition, where applicable. * If the intermittent is related to heat, review the data for a relationship with the following: - High ambient temperatures - Underhood/engine generated heat - Circuit generated heat due to a poor connection, or high electrical load - Higher than normal load conditions, towing, etc. * If the intermittent is related to cold, review the data for the following: - Low ambient temperatures-In extremely low temperatures, ice may form in a connection or component. Inspect for water intrusion. - The condition only occurs on a cold start. - The condition goes away when the vehicle warms up. * Information from the customer may help to determine if the trouble follows a pattern that is temperature related. * If temperature is suspected of causing an intermittent fault condition, attempt to duplicate the condition. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions) in order to duplicate the conditions required. Electromagnetic Interference and Electrical Noise Some electrical components/circuits are sensitive to electromagnetic interference or other types of electrical noise. Inspect for the following conditions: * A misrouted harness that is too close to high voltage/high current devices such as secondary ignition components, motors, generator etc.-These components may induce electrical noise on a circuit that could interfere with normal circuit operation. * Electrical system interference caused by a malfunctioning relay, or a control module driven solenoid or switch-These conditions can cause a sharp electrical surge. Normally, the condition will occur when the malfunctioning component is operating. * Improper installation of non-factory or aftermarket add on accessories such as lights, 2-way radios, amplifiers, electric motors, remote starters, alarm systems, cell phones, etc.-These accessories may lead to interference while in use, but do not fail when the accessories are not in use. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Checking Aftermarket Accessories). * Test for an open diode across the A/C compressor clutch and for other open diodes. Some relays may contain a clamping diode. * The generator may be allowing AC noise into the electrical system. Incorrect Control Module * There are only a few situations where reprogramming a control module is appropriate: - A new service control module is installed. - A control module from another vehicle is installed. - Revised software/calibration files have been released for this vehicle. Note: DO NOT re-program the control module with the SAME software/calibration files that are already present in the control module. This is not an effective repair for any type of concern. * Verify that the control module contains the correct software/calibration. If incorrect programming is found, reprogram the control module with the most current software/calibration. Refer to Control Module References (See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning) for replacement, setup, and programming. Testing for Short to Ground Testing for Short to Ground Special Tools * EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM) * EL 35616-200 - Test Light-Probe Kit For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Tools and Equipment). Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test Probe Caution). The following procedures test for a short to ground in a circuit. With a Digital Multimeter (DMM) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8857 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the Ohms position. 4. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the other lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. If the DMM does NOT display infinite resistance (OL), there is a short to ground in the circuit. With a Test Lamp 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect one lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to one end of the circuit to be tested. 5. If the test lamp illuminates, there is a short to ground in the circuit. Fuse Powering Several Loads 1. Review the system schematic and locate the fuse that is open. 2. Open the first connector or switch leading from the fuse to each load. 3. Connect a DMM across the fuse terminals (be sure that the fuse is powered). * When the DMM displays voltage the short is in the wiring leading to the first connector or switch. * If the DMM does not display voltage refer to the next step. 4. Close each connector or switch until the DMM displays voltage in order to find which circuit is shorted. Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter Special Tools EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM) For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Tools and Equipment). Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test Probe Caution). Digital Multimeter (DMM) Basic Requirements Service information is validated using digital multimeters that meet or exceed the following requirements. Using a multimeter that does not meet these basic requirements may give inaccurate readings which could lead to an incorrect diagnosis. Display and Settings 1. Four digits displayed 2. Voltage, amperage, resistance, frequency, diode test settings, and min-max function 3. Display positive and negative values Voltage 1. Have at least 10 Mohm input impedance 2. Test a DC voltage range of 0.1-1000 V. 3. Test an AC voltage range of 0.1-1000 V. Amperage 1. Test a DC amperage range of 0.1µA-10 A. 2. Test an AC amperage range of 0.1µA-10 A. Resistance Test a resistance range of 0.1 ohm-40 Mohm and displays infinite for a value greater than 40 Mohm (O.L. (Over-load)) Frequency Test for a frequency range of 0.5 HZ-199 K HZ Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8858 Diode Test 1. Apply at least 1 mA when performing the diode bias test 2. Display the break over voltage drop (0-3 V) of a forward biased diode 3. Display infinite (O.L. (Over-load)) when a diode is reverse biased Min-Max Readings 1. Can update at a 1 ms sample rate 2. Saves and displays minimum and maximum values Note: Circuits which include any solid state control modules, such as the engine control module (ECM), should only be tested with a 10 MOhms or higher impedance digital multimeter such as the EL-39200. The EL-39200 instruction manual is a good source of information and should be read thoroughly upon receipt of the DMM as well as kept on hand for future reference. A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present if the impedance is low enough, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. In other words, if there is not enough current, the test lamp will not illuminate even though voltage is present. The ohmmeter function on a DMM shows how much resistance exists between 2 points along a circuit. Low resistance in a circuit means good continuity. Note: Disconnect the power feed from the suspect circuit when measuring resistance with a DMM. This prevents incorrect readings. DMMs apply such a small voltage to measure resistance that the presence of voltages can upset a resistance reading. Diodes and solid state components in a circuit can cause a DMM to display a false reading. To find out if a component is affecting a measurement take a reading once, then reverse the leads and take a second reading. If the readings differ the solid state component is affecting the measurement. Following are examples of the various methods of connecting the DMM to the circuit to be tested: * Probe both ends of the connector and either hold the leads in place while manipulating the connector or tape the leads to the harness for continuous monitoring while you perform other operations or test driving. Refer to Probing Electrical Connectors (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Probing Electrical Connectors). * Disconnect the harness at both ends of the suspected circuit where it connects either to a component or to other harnesses. * If the system that is being diagnosed has a specified pinout or breakout box, it may be used in order to simplify connecting the DMM to the circuit or for testing multiple circuits quickly. Using Connector Test Adapters Using Connector Test Adapters Special Tools EL 35616 - Terminal Test Probe Kit For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Tools and Equipment). Caution: Do not insert test equipment probes (DMM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the EL-38125-580 GM Approved Terminal Release Tool Kit in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the EL-38125-580 GM Approved Terminal Release Tool Kit , ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the EL-38125-580 GM Approved Terminal Release Tool Kit label on the inside of the EL-38125-580 GM Approved Terminal Release Tool Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Using Fused Jumper Wires Using Fused Jumper Wires Special Tools J 36169-A Fused Jumper Wire Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8859 Note: A fused jumper may not protect solid state components from being damaged. The J 36169-A includes small clamp connectors that provide adaptation to most connectors without damage. This fused jumper wire is supplied with a 20-A fuse which may not be suitable for some circuits. Do not use a fuse with a higher rating than the fuse that protects the circuit being tested. AFL/EPC Connectors AFL/EPC Connectors Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. 1. For connectors with a bolt in the dress cover, turn the bolt counterclockwise to remove the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8860 2. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the top of the wire dress cover. Slide the CPA forward. 3. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8861 View showing depressing of the lever lock release tab. View of connector in released position. 4. Disconnect the connector from the component. 5. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the dress cover. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs and remove the dress cover. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8862 6. Release the rear lower half of the wiredress cover. 7. Release the tabs that are holding the wiredress cover to the connector body. 8. Remove the nose piece by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the slots on both ends of the connector body. Gently pry the nose piece out of the connector. J 38125-216 can also be used to remove the nose piece. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8863 9. Use the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by lifting the terminal retaining tabs on the inside of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Bosch Connectors (BSK) Bosch Connectors (BSK) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8864 Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 3. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 4. Insert the J 38125-561 tool into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 5. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Bosch Connectors (ECM) Bosch Connectors (ECM) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8865 1. Locate the assist lever on the top of the connector. Move the assist lever to the forward position. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8866 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the connector. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the locking tabs and remove the dress cover. 4. The terminal positive assurance (TPA) is located in the front of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8867 5. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove TPA from the connector. 6. Use the J 38125-213 or the J 38125-556 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8868 Note: Ensure that the dress cover and connector body are both in the released position before reassembling. Failure to do so may cause damage to the connector and component. Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Bosch Connectors (0.64) Bosch Connectors (0.64) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While pressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock until the lever is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Pull the rubber boot that covers the wires back to expose the end of the connector dress cover. 4. Place the connector locking lever in the center of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8869 5. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs that are on the wire end of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover and connector body and pry up. 6. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs located on the opposite side of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover at the connector end and pry up. 7. Remove the dress cover. 8. Cut the tie wrap on the wire bundle. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8870 9. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting a small flat-bladed tool into the small slot in the end of the slider and pushing on the TPA until it comes out of the connector. When the TPA exits the opposite side of the connector, gasp the TPA and pull it completely out of the connector. 10. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 11. Insert the J 38125-560 into the 2 triangular cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 12. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Terminal Replacement Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8871 1. Prior to installation the terminal must be aligned so the (1) coding lugs align with the (2) coding grooves on the connector. 2. Once the terminal is aligned, slide the terminal into the cavity until the retainer has engaged in the cavity of the connector. 3. Slide the TPA in the connector body and seat it using a small flat bladed tool. The TPA is seated when it is flush with the contact housing. 4. Secure the wires to the connector body using a tie wrap and replace the dress cover and grommet. Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Pull out the slider on the connector position assurance (CPA) until it is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8872 5. Insert the J 38125-557 into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Connector Position Assurance Locks Connector Position Assurance Locks The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of the connector. CPAs are used in various connectors throughout the vehicle. CPAs are also used in all SIR system electrical connectors. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals, of the connector. Connector Repairs Connector Repairs Connector Repairs contains a list of all connector repairs. The connector repairs are listed by the connector manufacturer and then by connector type. If the technician cannot identify the manufacturer of the connector, refer to Identifying Connectors below. Knowing the connector manufacturer will assist in finding the correct connector repair from the following list: * Connector Position Assurance Locks (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Connector Position Assurance Locks) * Terminal Position Assurance Locks (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Terminal Position Assurance Locks) * AFL/EPC Connectors (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/AFL/EPC Connectors) * Bosch Connectors (BSK) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Bosch Connectors (BSK))Bosch Connectors (0.64) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Bosch Connectors (0.64))Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT))Bosch Connectors (ECM) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Bosch Connectors (ECM)) * Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack))Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Push to Seat))Delphi Connectors Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8873 (Pull To Seat) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Pull to Seat))Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W))Delphi Connectors (Micro.64) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Micro .64))Delphi Connectors (12-Way) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (12-Way))Delphi Connectors (Steering Gear) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Steering Gear)) * FCI Connectors (Lever Lock) (See: General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/FCI Connectors (Lever Lock))FCI Connectors (SIR) (See: General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/FCI (SIR)) * FEP Connectors (Steering Gear) (See: General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/FEP Connectors (Steering Gear)) * JST Connectors (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/JST Connectors) * Kostal Connectors (Glow Plug Control Module) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Kostal Connectors (Glow Plug Control Module))Kostal Connectors (Transmission) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Kostal Connectors (Transmission)) * Molex Connectors (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Molex Connectors) * Sumitomo Connectors (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Sumitomo Connectors) * Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way))Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor))Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap))Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way))Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module)) * Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Yazaki Connectors (2-Way))Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Yazaki Connectors (16-Way)) * Repairing Connector Terminals (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Repairing Connector Terminals) Connector Anatomy 1 - Connector Positive Assurance (CPA) 2 - Assist Lever 3 - Wiredress Cover 4 - Seal Strain/Relief Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8874 5 - Slide Left Hand 6 - Slide Right Hand 7 - Terminal Positive Assurance (TPA) 8 - Terminal Positive Assurance (TPA) 9 - Connector Seal 10 - Connector Housing 11 - Inner Connector Identifying Connectors Knowing the connector manufacturer is helpful when trying to locating the correct connector repair procedure. There are many different connector designs used on GM vehicles and it is sometimes difficult to identify the connector manufacturer. The information in this document should help with the identification of connector manufactures. The following connector manufacturers make most of the connectors found in GM vehicles: * AFL/EPC (Alcoa Fujikura Ltd./Engineered Plastics Components) * Bosch * Delphi * FCI (Framatome Connectors International) * JAE (Japan Aviation Electronics) * JST (Japan Solderless Terminals) * Kostel * Molex * Sumitomo * Tyco/AMP * Yazaki Identifying the manufacturer of a connector is often difficult. When trying to determine the manufacturer of a connector, look for specific identifying marks that are unique to that connector supplier. Most of these identify marks are hard to find or see. Check the connector carefully and refer to the information below for pictures and descriptions of connector identification markings. * Most of AFLs connectors have EPC on their connector body. Some of the smaller connectors will not have any markings on them. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8875 * In some cases Bosch will actually be printed on the connector. If Bosch does not appear on the connector, look for the Bosch logo. The Bosch logo is a circle with a blunted arrow inside. This logo can appear anywhere on the connector and is often very small. * In some cases Delphi will actually be printed on the connector. If Delphi is not printed on the connector, look for PED. In both cases there is no specific orientation for Delphi or PED and they can appear anywhere on the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8876 * FCI connectors may have the FCI logo on their connectors. The logo is the letters FCI with an "A" above it. * JAE connector have JAE in small letters on their connectors. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8877 * JST connectors have JST in small letters on their connectors, similar to that above. The location of the logo will vary with the connector size and style. * Kostel has an "LK" with a circle around it. These connector are usually used as a transmissions connection. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8878 * Most Molex connectors will have the Molex logo on the dresscover of the connector. In some cases the connectors may have MX followed by another letter. The third letter indicates where the connector was made. A connector with MXD is a Molex connector made in Detroit. Sumitomo has a unique symbol on their connector and possibly a part number. The symbol is similar to that of a diamond lying on its side, similar to that shown. The logo could appear anywhere but the most common place is at the wire side of the housing. * Tyco/AMP has many different and unique connector designs. Some may or may not have identifiable marks on them. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8879 * Yazaki has a wedge or arrow shape, similar to that shown. Delphi Connectors (Push to Seat) Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Follow the steps below in order to repair push to seat connectors. 1. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device, the connector position assurance (CPA) device, and/or the secondary lock. 2. Separate the connector halves (1). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8880 3. Use the proper pick or removal tool (1) in order to release the terminal. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 4. Gently pull the cable and the terminal (2) out of the back of the connector. 5. Re-form the locking device if you are going to reuse the terminal (1). 6. To repair the terminal, refer to Terminal Repair. Terminal Repair 1. Slip the cable seal away from the terminal. 2. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 3. Slip a new cable seal onto the wire. 4. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 5. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 6. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. 7. Slide the cable seal toward the terminal. 8. Crimp the cable seal and the insulation. 9. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply grease to the connector. Reinstalling Terminal 1. In order to reuse a terminal or lead assembly, refer to Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Wiring Repairs). 2. Ensure that the cable seal is kept on the terminal side of the splice. 3. Insert the lead from the back until it catches. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Terminated Lead Repair 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Find the appropriate terminated lead. 3. Use the appropriate splice sleeves depending on the gauge size. 4. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves). Delphi Connectors (Pull to Seat) Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) Special Tools Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8881 J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal If the terminal is visibly damaged or is suspected of having a faulty connection, the terminal should be replaced. Follow the steps below in order to repair pull-to-seat connectors: 1. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) device and/or the secondary lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component or separate the connectors for in-line connectors. 3. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device. 4. Insert the proper pick or removal tool into the front of the connector body. Note: On connectors with more than one terminal the service loop may not be large enough to remove the terminal and crimp on a new one. If the terminal wire does not have a large enough service loop for removal, cut the wire 5 cm (2 in) behind the connector before removal. 5. Grasp the wire at the back of the connector body and gently push the terminal out the front of the connector body. Terminal Repair 1. If the wire needed to be cut in order to remove the terminal, gently push a small length of the same size wire through the back of the connector cavity until there is enough wire exposed in order to crimp on a new terminal. If the wire was not cut, cut the existing wire as close to the old terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 4. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. Terminal Installation 1. Align the terminal and pull the wire from the back of the connector in order to seat the terminal. 2. If necessary, cut the new wire to proper length and splice with existing circuit. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves). 3. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply dielectric grease to the connector. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Micro .64) Delphi Connectors (Micro.64) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8882 Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro.64 connectors. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. The lever lock may be located on the top or sides of the wire dress cover. View of a typical Micro 64 connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8883 Depress the lock and pull the lever over and past the lock. View of the connector when released from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8884 View of another type of Micro 64 connector. Depress the locks that are located on both sides of the wiredress cover and pull the lever over and past the locks. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8885 View of the connector when released from the component. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the front of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool push down on one of the locking tabs and pull the cover up until the dress cover releases. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. 4. Once the front 2 locks are unlocked, lift the front of the dress cover and pull it forward. Note: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 5. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the small slot on the TPA and pushing down until the TPA releases. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8886 Note: Be careful not to angle or rock the J 38125-21 tool when inserting it into the connector or the tool may break. 6. Insert the J 38125-21 tool into the round canal between the terminals cavities at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Follow the steps below in order to repair Micro 64 connector terminals. The Micro 64 connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-64 (M jaw) was developed to crimp Micro 64 terminals. The J 38125-64 crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. The J 38125-64 crimping tool is also designed to crimp both the wire and the insulation at the same time. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro 64 terminals. Note: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gauge wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 1. Cut the wire as close to the damaged terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8887 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert terminal into the appropriate terminal holder until it hits bottom and stops. The correct terminal holder is determined by the wire size. Also ensure that the terminals wings are pointing towards the former on the tool and the release locator. 5. Insert the stripped cable into the terminal. Insulation should be visible on both sides of the terminal insulation wings. 6. Compress the handles until the ratchet automatically releases. 7. Place the terminal into the appropriate cavity and assemble the connector. Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8888 Terminal Removal Procedure There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W connectors. These connectors are very similar but use different terminals and have some minor physical differences also. The first connector design of the Micro-Pack 100W (1) has a white connector interface that holds the terminals. The second design of the Micro-Pack 100W (2) has a gray interface to hold the terminals. Also, the first design has terminal cavities that are further apart (3 mm centerline) and offset from the other row of terminal cavities in the connector. The second design has terminals cavities that are closer together (2.54 mm centerline) and aligned vertically. One other way to identify the second design is the thin strip of material that runs along the outside of the cavities. Note: There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W terminals which are very similar. Ensure that you have the correct terminal before crimping the new terminal to the wire. The first design connector uses the longer terminal (1) that has a raised area in front of the recess in the terminal. The second design connector uses the shorter terminal without the raised area. Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro-Pack 100W connectors. Some Micro-Pack 100W connector disassembly procedures will vary. Use this procedure as a guide. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8889 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Locate the nose piece locking tabs that are positioned on the side of the connector nose piece. The connector nose piece acts as a terminal positive assurance (TPA) and may be referred to as such. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to push in one of the locking tabs while gently pulling on the same side of the nose piece. 4. Repeat the procedure for the other locking tab and remove the nose piece. 5. Remove the wire dress cover. The following is a general procedure for wire dress cover removal. Use this procedure as a guide, some dress cover removal procedures may vary. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8890 6. Use fingers to squeeze the 2 locking legs of the cover. 7. Apply pressure and gently rock the cover until one locking leg is unseated. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8891 8. Continue to apply pressure and rock the cover until the second locking leg is unseated. Repeat procedure for the other side of the dress cover and remove the cover. 9. Use J 38125-12A to gently lift the terminal retaining tab while gently pulling the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. If the terminal is severely bent or damaged, it may be possible on some connectors to push the wire out of the front of the connector instead of pulling it through. This will prevent damage to the internal seals of the connector. Once the terminal is pushed out of the connector, cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible and pull the wire through the connector. Terminal Repair Procedure The Micro-Pack 100W connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool was developed to crimp Micro-Pack 100W terminals. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro-Pack 100 terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8892 1. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. Note: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gauge wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert the terminal into the crimp tool until the core wings are flush with the anvil on the crimp tool. Be sure that the wings are pointed toward the crimp tool former and release the spring locator. The locator will hold the terminal in place. Inspect the alignment of the terminal wings with the crimp tool former. If the terminal wings are wider than the crimp tool former, remove the terminal and bend the terminal wings in slightly. 5. Place stripped wire into terminal. 6. Crimp the new terminal to the wire. If a jam occurs, press the emergency release to open applicator. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8893 Terminal Replacement Procedure After the terminal is crimped to the wire perform the following procedure in order to replace Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the Terminal Removal Procedure. Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The following is the proper procedure for the repair of Weather Pack(R) Connectors. 1. Separate the connector halves (1). 2. Open the secondary lock. A secondary lock aids in terminal retention and is usually molded to the connector (1). 3. Grasp the wire and push the terminal to the forward most position. Hold the wire in this position. 4. Insert the Weather Pack(R) terminal removal tool J 38125-10A into the front (mating end) of the connector cavity until it rests on the cavity shoulder (1). 5. Gently pull on the wire to remove the terminal through the back of the connector (2). Note: Never use force to remove a terminal from a connector. 6. Inspect the terminal and connector for damage. Repair as necessary. Refer to Repairing Connector Terminals (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Repairing Connector Terminals). 7. Reform the lock tang (2) and reset terminal in connector body. 8. Close secondary locks and join connector halves. 9. Verify that circuit is complete and working satisfactorily. 10. Perform system check. Delphi Connectors (12-Way) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8894 Delphi Connectors (12-Way) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) and slide the lever lock away from the connector body. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs on the dress cover of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool release all of the locking tabs. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8895 4. Release the lower wire dress cover locking tab. 5. Release the upper wire dress cover locking tab. 6. Once the locks are unlocked, lift the dress cover off. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8896 Note: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 7. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the locking tabs on both sides of the TPA. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. 8. Remove the nose piece by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the locking tabs on both sides of the nose piece. Gently pry the nose piece out of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8897 9. Insert the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Delphi Connectors (Steering Gear) Delphi Connectors (Steering Gear) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8898 Removal Procedure 1. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the locking tab on the connector. 2. Push down the locking tab to release the connector. The small flat-bladed tool may need to be pushed down and angled back slightly to depress the locking tab. Pull on the connector body while releasing the locking tab to disconnect the connector. FCI Connectors (Lever Lock) FCI Connectors (Lever Lock) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8899 Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. 1. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. 2. The release tab is located on the top of the wiredress cover. 3. View of connector in released position. 4. Disconnect the connector from the component. 5. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the dress cover. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs and remove the dress cover. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8900 6. Use a small flat-blade tool to slide the terminal position assurance (TPA) up one notch on both ends of the connector. The TPA is located underneath the wire dress cover. For the larger terminals insert the J 38125-556 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. For the smaller terminals insert the J 38125-560 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8901 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. FCI (SIR) FCI Connectors (SIR) Removal Procedure Note: The orange CPA must be released first to disconnect or to connect the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8902 1. Lift the orange CPA vertically (avoid lifting on an angle to the connector) approximately 4 mm to release the connector. Use a small flat-bladed tool to help release the orange CPA. The orange CPA can also be released manually without any tools. 2. Grab the connector on both sides and lift the connector vertically to disconnect the connector. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8903 1. Lift the orange CPA vertically approximately 4 mm before installing the connector. Use a small flat-bladed tool to help release the orange CPA. The orange CPA can also be released manually without any tools. 2. Line up the connector key tabs with the initiator key slots. Grab the connector on both sides and push the connector down into the initiator connector sub assembly until fully seated. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8904 3. After the connector is fully seated, push down the orange CPA with your thumb. Push down until the orange CPA is touching the yellow cover on the connector. FEP Connectors (Steering Gear) FEP Connectors (Steering Gear) Removal Procedure 1. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the locking tab on the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8905 2. Push down the locking tab to release the connector. The small flat-bladed tool may need to be pushed down and angled back slightly to depress the locking tab. Pull on the connector body while releasing the locking tab to disconnect the connector. JST Connectors JST Connectors Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. While depressing the lock, remove the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8906 2. Locate the two indents of the terminal position assurance (TPA) located on the bottom of the connector body. Note: The TPA cannot be removed from the connector while there are terminals present in the connector body. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to very carefully raise the TPA on both sides of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8907 4. View of the TPA when removed from the connector body. 5. Use the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the left side of the terminal release cavity as shown in the graphic. Use the tool to move the terminal release to the right with a gentle prying motion. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Kostal Connectors (Glow Plug Control Module) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8908 Kostal Connectors (Glow Plug Control Module) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure View of typical connector. View of connector in released position. 1. Locate the assist lever at the back of the connector. Move the assist lever to the rear position. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8909 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove the dress cover. 4. Slide the dress cover forward and off of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8910 5. The terminal positive assurance (TPA) is located in the front and rear of the connector. Note: The front TPA cannot be removed from the connector. Only move it to the preset position. 6. Use a small flat-blade tool to move the front TPA to the preset position, outboard approximately 0.125 in. (3 mm). 7. Use a small flat-blade tool to completely remove the rear TPA from the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8911 8. Use the J 38125-24 or the J 38125-560 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 9. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Kostal Connectors (Transmission) Kostal Connectors (Transmission) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8912 1. While depressing the lock, twist and remove the connector from the component. 2. Locate the terminal position assurance (TPA). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8913 Note: The TPA cannot be removed from the connector while there are terminals present in the connector body. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to push the TPA until it bottoms out. 4. Use the J 38125-28 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal cavity as shown in the graphic. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 5. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Terminal Replacement Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8914 After the terminal is crimped to the wire, perform the following procedure in order to replace the terminal. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. Locate the terminal position assurance (TPA). 4. Use a small flat-blade tool to push the TPA until it bottoms out. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8915 5. Ensure the TPA is fully seated. The TPA should be centered and flush with the connector body when viewed. Molex Connectors Molex Connectors Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the top of the wire dress cover. Slide the CPA forward. 2. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8916 3. The lever should be in the full forward position. 4. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8917 5. Remove the dress cover by using a flat bladed tool to release the dress cover locking tabs and lift up on the dress cover. 6. Cut the tie wrap that holds the wires to the connector body. 7. Use a small flat-blade tool to pry one side of the nose piece up to the pre-stage position. When the nose piece is in the pre-staged position, the nose piece will be raised above the connector body the length of the step in the nose piece. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8918 8. Use a small flat-blade tool to pry the other side of the piece to the pre-stage position. If the nose piece is higher than the first step in the nose piece, gently push down on the nose piece until it meets with resistance from the connector body, you should feel the nose piece click into position. 9. Insert the J 38125-213 into the small terminal release hole on the nose piece and gently pull on the back of the wire. 10. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Refer to the terminal crimping procedure in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit. Terminal Replacement Procedure After the terminal is crimped to the wire, perform the following procedure in order to replace the terminal. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8919 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the connector disassembly procedure. Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the connector body and pull the CPA out. The CPA is on the wire harness side of connector. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Use a small flat-bladed tool to gently pry off the dress cover by inserting the tool under the cover opposite the harness side and prying up. 4. Remove the cover. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8920 5. Using a small flat-bladed tool, push on the side of the nose piece retainer while pushing the nose piece forward with your thumb. This will release the terminal position assurance (TPA). 6. Insert the J 38125-12A into the corresponding terminal release cavity. The release cavities are the 2 center rows of cavities on one half of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8921 7. Pressing the J 38125-12A tool in the release cavity of the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and crimper in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. Slide the lever lock away from the connector body. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs on the dress cover of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool release all of the locking tabs. 4. Once the locks are unlocked, lift the dress cover off. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8922 Note: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 5. Release the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the blue locking tabs on both ends of the connector. Gently slide the TPA up to the released position on both ends. 6. For the larger terminals insert the J 38125-13A tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. For the smaller terminals insert the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8923 View of the release tool being used for the larger terminals. View of the release tool being used for the larger terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8924 View of the release tool being used for the smaller terminals. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8925 Side view of connector. View of top of connector. 1. Locate the assist lever and lock on the top of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8926 2. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. 3. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8927 4. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the rear of the connector. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. 5. Once the locking tabs are unlocked, slide the inner connector out of the rear of the connector housing. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8928 6. Use the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by pressing on the tang. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Repairing Connector Terminals Repairing Connector Terminals Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Use the following repair procedures in order to repair the following: * Push to Seat terminals * Pull to Seat terminals Some terminals do not require all of the steps shown. Skip the steps that do not apply for your terminal repair. The J-38125 contains further information. 1. Cut off the terminal between the core and the insulation crimp. Minimize any wire loss. For cable seal terminals, remove the seal. 2. Apply the correct cable seal per gauge size of the wire, if used. Slide the seal back along the wire in order to enable insulation removal. 3. Remove the insulation. 4. For sealed terminals only, align the seal with the end of the cable insulation. 5. Position the strip in the terminal. For sealed terminals, position the strip and seal in the terminal. 6. Hand crimp the core wings. 7. Hand crimp the insulation wings. For sealed terminals, hand crimp the insulation wings around the seal and the cable. 8. Solder all of the hand crimp terminals excepting Micro-Pack 100.64 size. Soldering Micro-Pack 100 World terminals may damage the terminal. Sumitomo Connectors Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8929 Sumitomo Connectors Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8930 3. Remove the dress cover by using a flat-blade tool to release the connector locking tabs and pulling off the dress cover. 4. Relieve the tension on the nose piece retainers by inserting J 38125-12A into the single retainer slot on the end of the nose piece and gently prying out the locking tab. Repeat the process for both of the nose piece locking tabs on the opposite side of the nose piece. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8931 5. Once the nose piece retainers are relaxed, use the J 38125-552 to pull up the nose piece by hooking the tool under the nose piece and pulling up. The nose piece should raise slightly. 6. On the opposite side of the nose piece, use the J 38125-552 to pull up the nose piece by hooking the tool under the nose piece and pulling up. The nose piece should release completely. If the nose piece does not come off, repeat the procedure on the opposite side. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8932 7. The illustration above identifies the entry canal where the terminal release tool will be inserted, and the terminal cavity. * Terminal (1) * Entry Canal (2) 8. Insert the J 38125-553 tool into the entry canal and pry up on the terminal retainer. The terminal retainer is a small plastic piece on the top of the terminal. The terminal retainer must be held up while the terminal is pulled out of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8933 9. The illustration shows a cutaway view of the connector to aid the technician in releasing the terminal retainer. 10. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Refer to the terminal crimping procedure in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit. Terminal Replacement Procedure After the terminal is crimped to the wire, perform the following procedure in order to replace the terminal. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the connector disassembly procedure. Terminal Position Assurance Locks Terminal Position Assurance Locks The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8934 2. Insert the J 38125-11A tool into the cavity on the lower right hand face of the connector until the terminal release tang access panel slides over. 3. Ensure that the terminal release tang access panel is in the correct location to access the terminals. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8935 5. Insert the J 38125-11A into the terminal release tang access slot located behind the access panel of the connector and press down on the terminal while carefully pulling the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component by pressing down on the connector position assurance (CPA). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8936 2. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting the tool in the small recess on the side of the connector and pushing up until the TPA releases from the connector body. The TPA should raise just slightly. Do not try to remove the TPA. Note: The TPA on this connector cannot be removed unless the terminals are removed first. The TPA will come out of the connector body, but only slightly. When the TPA is slightly raised the terminals can be removed. Using excessive force to remove the TPA with the terminals still in the connector will damage the connector. 3. Repeat the process for the other side of the connector. 4. Ensure that the TPA is in the proper position to remove the terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8937 5. While pushing the terminal forward, insert the J 38125-24 in the release cavity above the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8938 2. Insert a small flat-blade tool in the slot below the front loaded terminal position assurance (TPA) and pry up. 3. Remove the TPA by pulling it out of the connector. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-553 on a slight upward angle into the cavity below the terminal to be removed. Ensure that the pointed on the end of the tool is facing the bottom of the terminal and it stays in contact with the terminal until it stops on the plastic terminal retainer. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8939 6. Gently pry the plastic terminal retainer down and carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8940 1. While depressing the lock, pull the two connector halves apart. Note: The TPA is fragile and may break if not done carefully. 2. Use a small flat-blade tool to very carefully push the terminal position assurance (TPA) towards the face of the connector on both sides of the connector. 3. View of the male half of the connector with female terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8941 4. View of the female half of the connector with male terminals. 5. Use the J 38125-215 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. View of the female half of the connector with male terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8942 7. View of the male half of the connector with female terminals. 8. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers A circuit breaker is a protective device that is designed to open the circuit when a current load is in excess of the rated breaker capacity. If there is a short or other type of overload condition in the circuit, the excessive current will open the circuit between the circuit breaker terminals. Two types of circuit breakers are used. Circuit Breaker - This type opens when excessive current passes through it for a period of time. It closes again after a few seconds, and if the cause of the high current is still present, it will open again. The circuit breaker will continue to cycle open and closed until the condition causing the high current is removed. Positive Temperature Coefficient (PTC) Circuit Breaker - This type greatly increases its resistance when excessive current passes through it. The excessive current heats the PTC device, as the device heats its resistance increases. Eventually the resistance gets so high that the circuit is effectively open. Unlike the ordinary circuit breaker the PTC unit will not reset until the circuit is opened, by removing the voltage from its terminals. Once the voltage is removed the circuit breaker will re-close within a second or 2. Circuit Protection - Fuses Circuit Protection - Fuses Special Tools EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM) For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8943 The fuse is the most common method of an automotive wiring circuit protection. Whenever there is an excessive amount of current flowing through a circuit the fusible element will melt and create an open or incomplete circuit. Fuses are a one time protection device and must be replaced each time the circuit is overloaded. To determine if a fuse is open, remove the suspected fuse and examine if the element in the fuse is broken (2). If not broken (1), also check for continuity using a Digital Multimeter (DMM) or a continuity tester. If the element is broken or continuity is suspect, replace the fuse with one of equal current rating. Circuit Protection - Fusible Links Circuit Protection - Fusible Links Special Tools EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM) For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Tools and Equipment). Fusible link is wire designed to melt and break continuity when excessive current is applied. It is often located between or near the battery and starter or electrical center. Use a continuity tester or a Digital Multimeter (DMM) at each end of the wire containing the fusible link in order to determine if it is broken. If broken, it must be replaced with fusible link of the same gauge size. Repairing a Fusible Link Note: Fusible links cut longer than 225 mm (approximately 9 in) will not provide sufficient overload protection. Flat Wire Repairs Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8944 Flat Wire Repairs The flat wire within the flex wiring harness is not serviceable. If an open or short exists within the flex wiring harness the complete harness must be replaced. GMLAN Wiring Repairs GMLAN Wiring Repairs Special Tools * EL-38125-10 - Splice Sleeve Crimping Tool * J 38125-5 - Ultra Torch Special Tool * DuraSeal splice sleeves * A wire stripping tool For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Tools and Equipment). The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: * A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. * A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The GM Local Area Network (GMLAN) System requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working on GMLAN connectors and terminals. GMLAN Repairs Note: When making a repair to any GMLAN network, the original wire length after the repair must be the same length as before the repair. If the network is a twisted pair, the twist must be maintained after the repair is completed. GMLAN has 2 types of networks, low speed and high speed. Low speed GMLAN has a single wire and works at slow speeds. High speed GMLAN has 2 wires in a twisted pair and works at higher speeds. For more information on GMLAN, refer to Data Link Communications Description and Operation ( See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Information Bus/Description and Operation). GMLAN Connector Terminal Repair Note: A terminated lead can be used to replace damaged connector terminals for both high speed and low speed GMLAN systems. When making a connector terminal repair on a GMLAN high speed system with twisted pair wires, do not untwist the wires more than necessary to make the repair. If the individual terminals are damaged on any GMLAN connection, use the appropriate connector repair procedure in order to repair the terminal. Refer to Connector Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Connector Repairs) for the appropriate connector repair procedure. GMLAN Wire Repair Note: Refer to Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Wiring Repairs) in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gauge size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and EL-38125-10 - tool. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the DuraSeal splice sleeves. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8945 Note: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: * Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. * Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. * Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert to regional wiring gauge size. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the EL-38125-10 - tool in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the splice sleeve crimp tool. The crimp tool has four nests, one for each color. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8946 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs Caution: Do not solder repairs under any circumstances as this could result in the air reference being obstructed. If the heated oxygen sensor pigtail wiring, connector, or terminal is damaged the entire oxygen sensor assembly must be replaced. Do not attempt to repair the wiring, connector, or terminals. In order for the sensor to function properly it must have a clean air reference. This clean air reference is obtained by way of the oxygen sensor signal and heater wires. Any attempt to repair the wires, connectors or terminals could result in the obstruction of the air reference and degrade oxygen sensor performance. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8947 The following guidelines should be used when servicing the heated oxygen sensor: * Do not apply contact cleaner or other materials to the sensor or vehicle harness connectors. These materials may get into the sensor, causing poor performance. Also, the sensor pigtail and harness wires must not be damaged in such a way that the wires inside are exposed. This could provide a path for foreign materials to enter the sensor and cause performance problems. * Neither the sensor nor vehicle lead wires should be bent sharply or kinked. Sharp bends, kinks, etc., could block the reference air path through the lead wire. * Do not remove or defeat the oxygen sensor ground wire (where applicable). Vehicles that utilize the ground wire sensor may rely on this ground as the only ground contact to the sensor. Removal of the ground wire will also cause poor engine performance. * To prevent damage due to water intrusion, be sure that the peripheral seal remains intact on the vehicle harness connector. High Temperature Wiring Repairs High Temperature Wiring Repairs Special Tools * EL-38125-10 - Splice Sleeve Crimping Tool * J 38125-5 - Ultra Torch * DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Tools and Equipment). High Temperature Wiring Wiring that is exposed to high temperatures, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time may use materials i.e. wires, connectors, and shielding that has a higher heat rating than typical wiring. When making a repair in a high temperature area observe the following: * Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature to replace any damaged wire. * Replace any heat shielding that is removed. * Cover any DuraSeal splice sleeves with SCT1 shrink tubing. * After making a wiring repair, ensure that the location of the wiring is not moved closer to the heat source. Identifying High Temperature Wiring Wiring that is exposed to high temperature, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time need special considerations when making wiring repairs. Areas that may be exposed to higher temperatures can be identified by heat resistant materials that are being used in those areas. These materials may include heat reflective tape, moon tape, and high temperature shrink tubing. Also conduit and other protective coverings may be used. Because conduit or similar coverings are used throughout the vehicle regardless of the temperature, it may be necessary for the technician to determine if an area is exposed to excessive heat before making a wiring repair. Obvious areas of consideration would be any area located near the exhaust manifolds, catalytic converter, and exhaust pipes. Items Required * DuraSeal splice sleeves to crimp and seal connections * High temperature SCT1 shrink tubing to protect the splice sleeves * Terminated leads or pigtails * The correct tools to remove the terminals from the connectors Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature of the same or larger gauge size as the original wire when repair damage wire. Also replace any reflective tape that you remove during the repair. High Temperature Wire Repair Note: Refer to Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Wiring Repairs) in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature rating of the same gauge size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the EL-38125-10 - tool and then encapsulate the splice sleeve using the high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8948 Note: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: * Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. * Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. * Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert to regional wiring gauge size. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Slide a section of high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing down the length of wire to be spliced. Ensure that the shrink tubing will not interfere with the splice procedure. 5. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 6. Use the EL-38125-10 - tool in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the splice sleeve crimp tool. The crimp tool has four nests, one for each color. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8949 7. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 8. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 9. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 10. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 11. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8950 12. Center the high temperature SCT1 shrink tube over the DuraSeal splice sleeve. 13. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the high temperature heat shrink tubing. 14. Gradually move the heat from the center to the open end of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. 15. Replace any reflective tape and clips that may have been remove during the repair. Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation If the wire insulation has been chafed, or broken, enough to show the conductive portion of the wire, and the wire is not damaged, determine the length of insulation that needs to be repaired. If the repair is less than 280 mm (11 in), cut the wire within the damaged area. Than slide the appropriate heat shrink tubing (listed below) over the wire, and repair the wire by splicing the wires together. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves). Once the wire is spliced together slide heat shrink tubing over the damaged area and apply heat to seal the repaired wire. If the wire is damaged, or the damaged area is larger than 280 mm (11 in), than replace the damaged wire by splicing in a new section of wire. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8951 SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs Special Tools * EL-38125-10 - Splice Sleeve Crimping Tool * J 38125-5 - Ultra Torch * DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Tools and Equipment). The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: * A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. * A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides the necessary low resistance contact integrity for these sensitive, low energy circuits. The Supplemental Inflatable Restraint (SIR) System/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working with the SIR/SRS, and the wiring components, such as connectors and terminals. SIR/SRS Connector Repair (Plastic Body and Terminal Metal Pin) Note: Do not use the terminals in the kit in order to replace damaged SIR/SRS system terminals. Use either an SIR/SRS pigtail or a terminated lead from the SIR Repair Kit Tray. The terminals in the SIR/SRS system are made with a special plating. This plating provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. Pigtail repair packs are available for SIR/SRS connectors with eight or less terminals. Only the connector body is available for connectors with more than eight terminals. Terminated leads can be used to replace damaged terminals when replacing the connector body. SIR/SRS Component Wire Pigtail Repair Note: Do not make wire, connector, or terminal repairs on components with wire pigtails. A wire pigtail is a wire or wires attached directly to the device, not by a connector. If a wiring pigtail is damaged, you must replace the entire component, with pigtail. The inflatable restraint steering wheel module coil is an example of a pigtail component. SIR/SRS Wire Repair Note: Refer to Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Wiring Repairs) in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8952 If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gauge size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and EL-38125-10 - tool. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the DuraSeal splice sleeves. Note: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: * Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. * Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. * Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert to regional wiring gauge size. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the EL-38125-10 - tool in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the splice sleeve crimp tool. The crimp tool has four nests, one for each color. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8953 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Connector Position Assurance (CPA) The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of a connector. CPAs are used in all SIR System connectors and also in some connectors of other systems. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals of a connection. Terminal Position Assurance (TPA) The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8954 Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Special Tools * EL-38125-10 - Splice Sleeve Crimping Tool * J 38125-5 - Ultra Torch * DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Tools and Equipment). Note: Use only DuraSeal splice sleeves. Other splice sleeves may not protect the splice from moisture or provide a good electrical connection. Use DuraSeal splice sleeves to form a one-to-one splice on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. Use DuraSeal splice sleeves where there is special requirements such as moisture sealing. Follow the instructions below in order to splice copper wire using DuraSeal splice sleeves. Note: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: * Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. * Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. * Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert to regional wiring gauge size. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8955 5. Use the EL-38125-10 - tool in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the splice sleeve crimp tool. The crimp tool has four nests, one for each color. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8956 * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Splicing Inline Harness Diodes Splicing Inline Harness Diodes Many vehicle electrical systems use a diode to isolate circuits and protect the components from voltage spikes. When installing a new diode use the following procedure. 1. Open the harness. * If the harness is taped, remove the tape. * To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing seam ripper (available from sewing supply stores) in order to cut open the harness. * If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the diode. 2. If the diode is taped to the harness, remove all of the tape. 3. Check and record the current flow direction and orientation of diode. 4. Remove the inoperative diode from the harness with a suitable soldering tool. Note: If the diode is located next to a connector terminal remove the terminal(s) from the connector to prevent damage from the soldering tool. 5. Carefully strip away a section of insulation next to the old soldered portion of the wire(s). Do not remove any more than is needed to attach the new diode. 6. Check current flow direction of the new diode, being sure to install the diode with correct bias. Reference the appropriate service manual wiring schematic to obtain the correct diode installation position. 7. Attach the new diode to the wire(s) using 60/40 rosin core solder. Before soldering attach some heat sinks (aluminum alligator clips) across the diode wire ends to protect the diode from excessive heat. Follow the manufacturer's instruction for the soldering equipment. 8. Reinstall terminal(s) into the connector body if previously removed. Note: To prevent shorts to ground and water intrusion, completely cover all exposed wire and diode attachment points with tape. 9. Tape the diode to the harness or connector using electrical tape. Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable Twisted/shielded cable is used in order to protect wiring from electrical noise. Two-conductor cable of this construction is used between the radio and the Delco-Bose(R) speaker/amplifier units and other applications where low level, sensitive signals must be carried. Follow the instructions below in order to repair the twisted/shielded cable. 1. Remove the outer jacket (1). Use care not to cut into the drain wire of the mylar tape. 2. Unwrap the tape. Do not remove the tape. Use the tape in order to rewrap the twisted conductors after the splice is made. 3. Prepare the splice. Untwist the conductors and follow the instructions for Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves). Staggering the splices by 65 mm (2.5 in) is recommended. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8957 Note: Apply the mylar tape with the aluminum side inward. This ensures good electrical contact with the drain wire. 4. Re-assemble the cable. * Rewrap the conductors with the mylar tape. If the mylar tape is damaged, use 3M product AL-36FR to replace the damaged mylar tape. * Use caution not to wrap the drain wire in the tape (1). * Follow the splicing instructions for copper wire and splice the drain wire. * Wrap the drain wire around the conductors and tape with electrical tape to replace the outer insulation. 5. Tape over the entire cable. Use a winding motion when you apply the tape. Wiring Repairs Wiring Repairs The Wiring Repairs section contains the following types of wiring repair information. Using these elements together will make wiring repair faster and easier: * Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections) * Flat Wire Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Flat Wire Repairs) * GMLAN Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/GMLAN Wiring Repairs) * High Temperature Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/High Temperature Wiring Repairs) * Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs) * Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves) * Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable) * Splicing Inline Harness Diodes (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Inline Harness Diodes) * SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs) US English/Metric Conversion US English/Metric Conversion Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8958 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8959 Basic Digital Multimeter Requirements Basic Digital Multimeter Requirements Digital Multimeter (DMM) Basic Requirements Service information is validated using digital multimeters that meet or exceed the following requirements. Using a multimeter that does not meet these basic requirements may give inaccurate readings which could lead to an incorrect diagnosis. Display and Settings 1. Four digits displayed 2. Voltage, amperage, resistance, frequency, diode test settings, and min-max function 3. Display positive and negative values Voltage 1. Have at least 10 Mohm input impedance 2. Test a DC voltage range of 0.1-1000 V. 3. Test an AC voltage range of 0.1-1000 V. Amperage 1. Test a DC amperage range of 0.1µA-10 A. 2. Test an AC amperage range of 0.1µA-10 A. Resistance Test a resistance range of 0.1 ohm-40 Mohm and displays infinite for a value greater than 40 Mohm (O.L. (Over-load)) Frequency Test for a frequency range of 0.5 HZ-199 K HZ Diode Test 1. Apply at least 1 mA when performing the diode bias test 2. Display the break over voltage drop (0-3 V) of a forward biased diode 3. Display infinite (O.L. (Over-load)) when a diode is reverse biased Min-Max Readings 1. Can update at a 1 ms sample rate 2. Saves and displays minimum and maximum values Testing Ground and Low Reference Circuits Testing Ground and Low Reference Circuits Because a test lamp can light with up to 200 ohm in a ground or low reference circuit they are not recommended to be used for this type of test. A low impedance test lamp can light and indicate the circuit is good when there is as much as 20-30 ohm present, while a high impedance test lamp can light with up to 200 ohm present in the circuit. This is why the Digital Multi-Meter (DMM) is used when validating a ground or low reference circuit continuity. When using the DMM there are many vehicle conditions that can affect the ground and low reference continuity testing. If these conditions are not met, a ground or low reference circuit test can fail on a good circuit. This may cause longer diagnosis time and incorrect component replacement. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8960 Any current flow through a ground or low reference circuit, while being tested, will skew the DMM continuity reading, or display a reading higher than when there is no current flowing. Performing a ground or low reference circuit continuity test, in reference to the vehicles battery negative terminal, will have the highest risk of failing a good ground or low reference circuit test than any other ground reference point. The best ground test points would be a control module housing (if the control modules housing is metal and grounded), door jamb striker (if attached to metal), under dash metal frame work, engine block, or body ground studs (other than where the negative battery cable is attached). A typical DMM ground or low reference circuit continuity reading can be as high as 100 ohm with the ignition ON, and drop to 15-25 ohm after the ignition is turned OFF. The reading will drop below 10 ohm after 30-40 seconds, then below 5 ohm after 60 seconds. Once the vehicle completely goes to sleep (generally 3-10 minutes) the reading will drop below 0.3 ohm. The following list of conditions may need to be met to ensure a valid continuity reading on a ground or low reference circuit: * Ignition OFF * Key out of the ignition switch (when not equipped with keyless entry and remote start) * Retained Accessory Power (RAP) OFF (open and close the driver door after ignition OFF) * Battery charger set at a 2 A or less charge rate * Scan tool not communicating with any vehicle control module (in some cases it may need to be disconnected from the DLC) * All entry doors closed * Headlamps OFF (auto headlamps disabled) * Any delay lighting OFF * HVAC after blow OFF * Any accessory that can work when the ignition is OFF * Wait up to 60 seconds (after all other listed conditions are met) Activating the DOOR LOCK function with a key fob can greatly reduce the time to achieve a valid ground or low reference continuity test result. Terminal Wiring Repair Terminal Wiring Repair Special Tools * EL-38125-10 - Splice Sleeve Crimp Tool * EL-38125-580 - Terminal Release Tool Kit * J-38125-5 - Ultra Torch * EL-35616 - Connector Test Adapter Kit For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Tools and Equipment). Note: All repairs near the engine manifold, turbo engine and all exhaust pipes should follow the High Temperature Wiring Repair procedures. 1. Find the appropriate connector end view within the connector end view section. The connector end view has the following information: * Diagnostic probe tool * Terminal release tool * Terminal/terminated lead part numbers 2. Determine if a terminal is damaged. Note: Not using the proper test kit probe may cause damage to the terminal(s) that are probed. * Locate the diagnostic probe tool from the connector end view. The connector end view describes the color and part number to help the technician find and use the correct tool. * Connect the probe tool to the Digital Multimeter. * Insert the probe tool into the cavity and follow the procedures from the Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter). 3. Disconnect the connector body to perform the repair. Note: Several procedures for specific connector bodies are called out in Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Wiring Repairs). Use the following repair procedures to repair the following terminals: Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8961 Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack))Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Push to Seat))Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Pull to Seat))Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W))Delphi Connectors (Micro.64) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Micro .64) )Delphi Connectors (12-Way) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (12-Way))Delphi Connectors (Steering Gear) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Steering Gear)) * The TPA and CPA should be removed before releasing the terminal for the connector body. * Look at the connector end view to locate the cavity of the damaged terminal and find the proper terminal release tool from the terminal release tool kit. Note: Using the incorrect terminal release tool can damage the connector body. * Insert the terminal release tool into the cavity. Note: Some terminals have a lever that must be disengaged before the terminal can be released. Gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Terminated Lead Repair Terminated Lead Repair Special Tools * EL-38125-10 - Splice Sleeve Crimp Tool * EL-38125-580 - Terminal Release Tool Kit * J-38125-5 - Ultra Torch * EL-35616 - Connector Test Adapter Kit For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Tools and Equipment). Note: All repairs near the engine manifold, turbo engine and all exhaust pipes should follow the High Temperature Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/High Temperature Wiring Repairs) procedures. Terminated leads are terminals that are crimped onto wires. The terminated lead can be used throughout the vehicle since it is designed for temperatures up to 150°C. The length of the wire is 450 mm. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8962 The DuraSeal splice sleeve has the following 2 critical features: * A special heat shrink tubing that environmentally seals the splice. The shrink tubing contains a sealing adhesive inside the shrink tubing. * A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp that provides the necessary contact integrity for sensitive low energy circuits. 1. Use the connector end view to identify the correct terminated lead. 2. The terminated lead package should include a DuraSeal splice sleeve. If not, use the chart to identify the correct part. 3. Open the harness by removing any tape: Use a sewing seam ripper, or a comparable tool, to cut open the harness, to avoid wire insulation damage. 4. Depending on how many terminals need repairs, cut the terminal and wire back at least 40 mm. Try to keep the harness wire length the same. If more than one terminated lead is required, stagger the lengths by 40 mm. This helps reduce the bundle size of the wire harness. 5. Use the EL-38125-10 - tool in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the splice sleeve crimp tool. The crimp tool has four nests, one for each color. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8963 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the J-38125-5 - ultra torch , apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8964 Auxiliary Power Outlet: Electrical Diagrams Cigar Lighter/Power Outlet Schematics Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 8965 Auxiliary Power Outlet: Description and Operation Power Outlets Description and Operation 12 Volt Power Outlet Receptacle Description and Operation The accessory power receptacle in the rear of the vehicle is supplied battery voltage at all times. The accessory power receptacles located in the center console and the instrument panel are supplied battery voltage when the ignition is on or in the accessory position. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Symptoms - Power Outlets Auxiliary Power Outlet: Testing and Inspection Symptoms - Power Outlets Symptoms - Power Outlets Visual/Physical Inspection * Inspect for aftermarket devices which can affect the operation of the power outlets. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Checking Aftermarket Accessories) * Inspect the accessible system components or the visible system components for obvious damage or for obvious conditions which can cause the symptom. Intermittent Electrical connections or wiring may be the cause of intermittent conditions. Refer to Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections) Symptom List Refer to Power Outlet Receptacle Malfunction (See: Power Outlet Receptacle Inoperative (120 VAC)) in order to diagnose the system. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Symptoms - Power Outlets > Page 8968 Auxiliary Power Outlet: Testing and Inspection Power Outlet Receptacle Inoperative (120 VAC) Power Outlet Receptacle Malfunction Diagnostic Instructions * Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle (See: Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle) prior to using this diagnostic procedure. * Review Strategy Based Diagnosis (See: Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Strategy Based Diagnosis) for an overview of the diagnostic approach. * Diagnostic Procedure Instructions (See: Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Diagnostic Procedure Instructions) provides an overview of each diagnostic category. Diagnostic Fault Information Circuit/System Description The accessory power receptacle located in rear of the vehicle is supplied B+ all the time. The accessory power receptacles located in the instrument panel and center console are supplied B+ when the ignition is on or in the accessory position. Reference Information Schematic Reference Cigar Lighter/Power Outlet Schematics (See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams) Connector End View Reference Component Connector End Views (See: Diagrams/Connector Views) Description and Operation Power Outlets Description and Operation (See: Description and Operation) Electrical Information Reference * Circuit Testing (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Circuit Testing) * Connector Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Connector Repairs) * Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections) * Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Wiring Repairs) Circuit/System Testing 1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the appropriate X80 accessory power receptacle. 2. Test for less than 5 ohm between the ground circuit terminal C and ground. ‹› If greater than the specified range, test the ground circuit for an open/high resistance. 3. Ignition ON, verify that a test lamp illuminate between the B+/ignition circuit terminal A and ground. ‹› If the test lamp does not illuminate, test the B+/ignition circuit for a short to ground or an open/high resistance. 4. If all circuits test normal, test or replace the X80 accessory power receptacle. Repair Instructions Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Symptoms - Power Outlets > Page 8969 Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification (See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures/Verification Tests and Procedures) after completing the diagnostic procedure. Accessory Power Receptacle Replacement (See: Service and Repair) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 8970 Auxiliary Power Outlet: Service and Repair Accessory Power Receptacle Replacement Special Tools J 42059 Cigar Lighter Socket Remover Removal Procedure 1. Remove the auxiliary power outlet fuse from the fuse block. 2. Remove the receptacle: 1. Look into the receptacle. There are two 3 mm (0.11 in) tab windows 12 mm (0.47 in) from the front of the receptacle. The J 42059 pushes the plastic latches from these tab windows and the receptacle can be pulled straight out. 2. Place one side of the "T" portion of the J 42059 into the tab window. The J 42059 will not fit straight into the receptacle. Angle the J 42059 slightly for insertion into the receptacle. 3. Insert the other side of the "T" into the opposite tab window. You must move the J 42059 handle toward horizontal to engage the other tab window. 4. Use the J 42059 to pull the receptacle straight out. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 8971 3. If J 42059 tool fails to release the lighter socket from the retainer, perform the following alternate method: 1. Insert a small grinding tool with a cutoff wheel into the socket. 2. Remove the plastic latches in the 3 mm (0.11 in) square windows. 3. Use the J 42059 as directed above to remove the socket. Installation Procedure 1. Route the connector through the retainer. Align the accessory power receptacle retainer to the slot in the opening. 2. Install the retainer by pressing into place fully seated. 3. Connect the electrical connector to the receptacle. 4. Align the tabs on the receptacle to the slots in the retainer. Install the accessory power receptacle by pressing into place until fully seated. 5. Install the accessory power receptacle fuse. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 8972 Auxiliary Power Outlet: Tools and Equipment Special Tools Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Electronic Noise Suppressor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Electronic Noise Suppressor: > 07-08-46-002D > Jul > 09 > Audio System - Noise When Using OnStar(R) Electronic Noise Suppressor: Customer Interest Audio System - Noise When Using OnStar(R) TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 07-08-46-002D Date: July 29, 2009 Subject: Audio Whine Noise from Radio Speakers When Using OnStar(R) (Install Noise Suppression Filter) Models: 2007-2010 GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (Including Saturn) 2007-2010 HUMMER H2, H3 2007-2009 Saab 9-7X Equipped with OnStar(R) (RPO UE1) Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the Warranty Information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 07-08-46-002C (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Condition Some customers may comment on an audio whine coming from the radio speakers when using the OnStar(R) system. The amplitude and frequency of the whine will change with an increase or decrease in engine speed. Cause This condition may be caused by electrical noise on the OnStar(R) Vehicle Communication Interface Module (VCIM) battery feed wire being passed to the microphone output pins at the radio. Correction Technicians are to install a noise suppression filter, P/N 1224205, into the OnStar(R) battery voltage circuit, a few centimeters (inches) from the VCIM. The filter package has three attached wires - a single yellow wire at one end with a yellow wire and a black wire at the other. Install the single yellow wire side into the battery voltage circuit towards the VCIM. Install the remaining single yellow wire into the battery voltage circuit toward the fuse and the black wire to ground. Important The noise suppression filter is polarity sensitive. The filter is designed to be most effective when the end with the capacitor ground is connected towards the source of the electrical noise. Install the filter in this polarity first. If the noise level is still not satisfactory, try disconnecting the capacitor ground. In some cases, if the first installation does not correct the noise, try reversing the filter polarity (removing the filter, turning it end for end and then reinstalling it) and grounding the capacitor lead. Parts Information Warranty Information (excluding Saab U.S. Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table above. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Electronic Noise Suppressor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Electronic Noise Suppressor: > 07-08-46-002D > Jul > 09 > Audio System - Noise When Using OnStar(R) > Page 8981 Warranty Information (Saab U.S. Models) Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Electronic Noise Suppressor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electronic Noise Suppressor: > 07-08-46-002D > Jul > 09 > Audio System - Noise When Using OnStar(R) Electronic Noise Suppressor: All Technical Service Bulletins Audio System - Noise When Using OnStar(R) TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 07-08-46-002D Date: July 29, 2009 Subject: Audio Whine Noise from Radio Speakers When Using OnStar(R) (Install Noise Suppression Filter) Models: 2007-2010 GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (Including Saturn) 2007-2010 HUMMER H2, H3 2007-2009 Saab 9-7X Equipped with OnStar(R) (RPO UE1) Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the Warranty Information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 07-08-46-002C (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Condition Some customers may comment on an audio whine coming from the radio speakers when using the OnStar(R) system. The amplitude and frequency of the whine will change with an increase or decrease in engine speed. Cause This condition may be caused by electrical noise on the OnStar(R) Vehicle Communication Interface Module (VCIM) battery feed wire being passed to the microphone output pins at the radio. Correction Technicians are to install a noise suppression filter, P/N 1224205, into the OnStar(R) battery voltage circuit, a few centimeters (inches) from the VCIM. The filter package has three attached wires - a single yellow wire at one end with a yellow wire and a black wire at the other. Install the single yellow wire side into the battery voltage circuit towards the VCIM. Install the remaining single yellow wire into the battery voltage circuit toward the fuse and the black wire to ground. Important The noise suppression filter is polarity sensitive. The filter is designed to be most effective when the end with the capacitor ground is connected towards the source of the electrical noise. Install the filter in this polarity first. If the noise level is still not satisfactory, try disconnecting the capacitor ground. In some cases, if the first installation does not correct the noise, try reversing the filter polarity (removing the filter, turning it end for end and then reinstalling it) and grounding the capacitor lead. Parts Information Warranty Information (excluding Saab U.S. Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table above. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Electronic Noise Suppressor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electronic Noise Suppressor: > 07-08-46-002D > Jul > 09 > Audio System - Noise When Using OnStar(R) > Page 8987 Warranty Information (Saab U.S. Models) Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Engine Compartment Fuse Block - Owners Manual Fuse: Locations Engine Compartment Fuse Block - Owners Manual ENGINE COMPARTMENT FUSE BLOCK Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Engine Compartment Fuse Block - Owners Manual > Page 8992 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Engine Compartment Fuse Block - Owners Manual > Page 8993 To remove the fuse block cover, squeeze the clips on the cover and lift it straight up. The vehicle may not be equipped with all of the fuses and relays shown. Notice: Spilling liquid on any electrical components on the vehicle may damage it. Always keep the covers on any electrical component. Engine Compartment Fuse Block J-Case Fuses ...................................................................................................................................... ......................................................................... Usage Fuse 1 .................................................................................................................................................. ............................................................. Cool Fan 1 Fuse 2 ................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................. Cool Fan 2 Fuse 3 ............................................................................................................................................... ................................................................ Rear Defog Fuse 4 ............................................................. .............................................................................................................................. Power Windows Right Fuse 5 ........................................................................................................................................ ...................................................... Memory Seat Module Fuse 6 ....................................................... .............................................................................................................................................. Power Seat - Left Fuse 7 ................................................................................................................................ ................................................ Instrument Panel Fuse Block 1 Fuse 8 ............................................... ................................................................................................................................. Instrument Panel Fuse Block 2 Fuse 9 ............................................................................................................................ .......................................................................................... Starter Fuse 10 ......................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. . Brake Booster Fuse 11 ...................................................................................................................... ............................................................................................ Sunroof Fuse 12 ..................................... ........................................................................................................................................... Antilock Brake System Pump Fuse 13 .............................................................................................................. ................................................................ Instrument Panel Fuse Block 3 Fuse 14 ............................. .............................................................................................................................................................. Power Windows - Left Fuse 15 ............................................................................................................ ................................................................. Antilock Brake System Module Mini Fuses ........................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................ Usage Fuse 16 ................................................................................................................................................ ................... Transmission Control Module Battery Fuse 17 ............................................................... .............................................................................................................................. Trailer Parking Light Fuse 18 ....................................................................................................................................... ...................................... Engine Control Module Battery Fuse 19 ....................................................... ................................................................................................................................................. Heated Mirror Fuse 20 ..................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................ Trailer Left Fuse 21 .................................................... ............................................................................................................................................... Lift Gate Module Fuse 22 ................................................................................................................................... .................................................................... Power Lumbar Fuse 23 .................................................. ........................................................................................................................................................ Trailer Right Fuse 24 ........................................................................................................................... .............................................................................. Canister Vent Fuse 25 .......................................... .............................................................................................................................................. Memory Mirror Module Fuse 26 ............................................................................................................................................................ Regulated Voltage Control Battery Sensor Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Engine Compartment Fuse Block - Owners Manual > Page 8994 Fuse 27 ................................................................................................................................................ ................................ Rear Accessory Power Outlet Fuse 28 .............................................................. ....................................................................................................................................................... Wiper Fuse 29 ..................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................ Rear Wiper Fuse 30 ................................................... ............................................................................................................................. Air Conditioning Compressor Fuse 31 ........................................................................................................................... ................................................................................... Rear Latch Fuse 32 ......................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ................ Horn Fuse 33 ...................................................................................................................... ............................................................ Right High-Beam Headlamp Fuse 34 ..................................... ............................................................................................................................................... Left High-Beam Headlamp Fuse 35 ........................................................................................................... ....................................................................................... Ignition Even Coil Fuse 36 ........................... .............................................................................................................................................................. .......... Ignition Odd Coil Fuse 37 ......................................................................................................... ....................................................................................... Windshield Washer Fuse 38 ........................ .............................................................................................................................................................. .............. Front Fog Lamps Fuse 39 .................................................................................................... ........................................................... Post Catalytic Converter Oxygen Sensor Fuse 40 .................. .............................................................................................................................................................. ......... Engine Control Module Fuse 41 ................................................................................................ ................................................................ Pre-Catalytic Converter Oxygen Sensor Fuse 42 .............. .............................................................................................................................................................. ... Transmission Control Module Fuse 43 ............................................................................................ ........................................................................................................................ Mirror Fuse 44 ............ .............................................................................................................................................................. . Chassis Control Module Ignition Fuse 45 .......................................................................................... ............................................................................................................................ Spare Fuse 46 ........ .............................................................................................................................................................. .......................... Rear Drive Module Fuse 47 ...................................................................................... ................................................................................................... Lift Gate Module Logic Fuse 48 ....... ............................................................................................................................................................. Instrument Panel Fuse Block Ignition Fuse 49 .................................................................................... ............................................................................................................ Heated Seat - Front Fuse 50 .. .............................................................................................................................................................. ......................... Chassis Control Module Fuse 51 .............................................................................. ........................................................................................................... Engine Control Module Fuse 52 ......................................................................................................................................................... ...................................... Rear Vision Camera Midi Fuse ............................................................................................................................................. ....................................................................... Usage Fuse 53 ................................................................................................................................................ ......................................... Electric Power Steering Micro Relays ........................................................................................................................................ ....................................................................... Usage Relay 54 .............................................................................................................................................. ........................................................ Rear Defogger Relay 55 ............................................................. .................................................................................................................................... Cooling Fan Low Relay 56 ....................................................................................................................................... ................................................. Head Lamp High Beam Relay 57 ...................................................... ....................................................................................................................................... Cooling Fan Control Relay 58 .................................................................................................................................. ........................................................ Wiper On/Off Control Relay 59 ................................................... ........................................................................................................................... Air Conditioning Compressor Relay 60 .......................................................................................................................... ............................................................................... Wiper Speed Relay 61 ......................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ...... Fog Lamp Relay 62 ...................................................................................................................... ............................................................................... Engine Control Relay 63 ...................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............... Starter Relay 64 ................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................... Run/Crank Mini Relays .......................................................................................................................................... ....................................................................... Usage Relay 65 .............................................................................................................................................. ................................................... Cooling Fan High Relay 66 .............................................................. ........................................................................................................................................ Brake Booster Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Engine Compartment Fuse Block - Owners Manual > Page 8995 Fuse: Locations Instrument Panel Fuse Block - Owners Manual INSTRUMENT PANEL FUSE BLOCK Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Engine Compartment Fuse Block - Owners Manual > Page 8996 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Engine Compartment Fuse Block - Owners Manual > Page 8997 The instrument panel fuse block is located on the passenger side panel of the center console. To access the fuses, open the fuse panel door from the passenger side by pulling it out. To reinstall the door, insert the tabs on the bottom of the door into the console first, then push the door back into its original location. The vehicle may not be equipped with all of the fuses and relays shown. Instrument Panel Fuse Block Mini Fuses ........................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................ Usage Fuse 1 .................................................................................................................................................. ............................................... Steering Wheel DM Fuse 2 ................................................................. ....................................................................................................................................................... Spare Fuse 3 ....................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................. Spare Fuse 4 ..................................................... ...................................................................................................................................... Body Control Module 1 Fuse 5 .................................................................................................................................. ........................................................................... Infotainment Fuse 6 ................................................. .......................................................................................................................................... Body Control Module 7 Fuse 7 ..................................................................................................................... ........................................................................ Noise Control Module Fuse 8 ..................................... ...................................................................................................................................................... Body Control Module 4 Fuse 9 ............................................................................................................ ........................................................................................................... Radio Fuse 10 ......................... .............................................................................................................................................................. .................... SEO Battery Fuse 11 ...................................................................................................... .............................................................. Ultrasonic Rear Parking Aid Module Fuse 12 ................................................................................................................................................. Heater, Ventilation and Air Conditioning Battery Fuse 13 ................................................................................ ........................................................................................................... Auxiliary Power Front Fuse 14 ................................................................................................................................................ Heater, Ventilation and Air Conditioning Ignition Fuse 15 ................................................................................ ................................................................................................................................... Display Fuse 16 .............................................................................................................................................................. ........................... Body Control Module 5 Fuse 17 .............................................................................. .............................................................................................................. Auxiliary Power Rear Fuse 18 ......................................................................................................................................................... ................. Instrument Panel Cluster Ignition Fuse 19 ........................................................................ ................................................................................................................................... PDI Module Fuse 20 ................................................................................................................................................ ......................................... Body Control Module 6 Fuse 21 ................................................................ ............................................................................................................ SEO Retained Accessory Power Fuse 22 .................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................... SDM Ignition Fuse 23 .................................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. .... Spare Fuse 24 ................................................................................................................................ ...................................................................................... Spare Fuse 25 .............................................. .............................................................................................................................................................. ...... PRNDL Fuse 26 ........................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................... Spare Fuse 27 ......................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............... Spare Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Engine Compartment Fuse Block - Owners Manual > Page 8998 Fuse 28 ................................................................................................................................................ ...................................................................... Spare Fuse 30 .............................................................. ........................................................................................................................... Body Control Module 3 Fuse 31 ............................................................................................................................................. .................................................................. Amplifier Fuse 32 .............................................................. ................................................................................................................ Discrete Logic Ignition Switch Fuse 33 .................................................................................................................................... ................................ Communications Integration Module Fuse 34 .................................................... ..................................................................................................................................... Body Control Module 2 Fuse 35 ................................................................................................................................ .......................................................................... SDM Battery Fuse 36 ............................................... ............................................................................................................................................. Data Link Connection Fuse 37 ............................................................................................................................ ............................................... Instrument Panel Cluster Battery Fuse 38 .............................................................................................................................................................. IOS Module (Passenger Sensing System) Fuse 39 ............................................................................ .......................................................................................................................................... Spare J-Case Fuses ...................................................................................................................................... ......................................................................... Usage Fuse 29 ................................................................................................................................................ ............................................... Front Blower Motor Fuse 40 ................................................................ ......................................................................................................................... Body Control Module 8 Relays .................................................................................................................................................. ........................................................................ Usage Relay 41 .............................................................................................................................................. ............................................................. LOG Relay Relay 42 .............................................................. ........................................................................................................... Retained Accessory Power Relay Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood Fuse: Application and ID Fuse Block - Underhood Electrical Center Identification Views X50A Fuse Block - Underhood, Label Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 9001 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 9002 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 9003 X50A Fuse Block - Underhood, Top View X50A Fuse Block - Underhood, Bottom View Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 9004 X50A Fuse Block - Underhood X1 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 9005 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 9006 X50A Fuse Block - Underhood X2 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 9007 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 9008 X50A Fuse Block - Underhood X3 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 9009 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 9010 X50A Fuse Block - Underhood X4 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 9011 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 9012 X50A Fuse Block - Underhood X5 X50A Fuse Block - Underhood X6 (LAF) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 9013 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 9014 Fuse: Application and ID Fuse Block - Instrument Panel Label Electrical Center Identification Views X51A Fuse Block - Instrument Panel Label (before A6284015) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 9015 X51A Fuse Block - Instrument Panel Label (A6284015 and after) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 9016 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 9017 X51A Fuse Block - Instrument Panel, Top View X51A Fuse Block - Instrument Panel, Bottom View Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 9018 X51A Fuse Block - Instrument Panel Wire Entry Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 9019 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 9020 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 9021 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Instrument Panel/Center Console Component Views Fuse Block: Locations Instrument Panel/Center Console Component Views Instrument Panel/Center Console Component Views Lower Right of the Instrument Panel Components 1 - K33 HVAC Control Module 2 - F105 Passenger Instrument Panel Air Bag 3 - X51A Fuse Block Instrument Panel Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Instrument Panel/Center Console Component Views > Page 9026 Fuse Block: Locations Front of Vehicle/Engine Compartment Component Views Front of Vehicle/Engine Compartment Component Views Engine Compartment Components (Chevrolet) 1 - B20 Brake Fluid Level Switch 2 - B19B Brake Booster Vacuum Sensor 3 - M75 Windshield Wiper Motor 4 - X50A Fuse Block - Underhood 5 - C1 Battery 6 - G24 Windshield Washer Pump 7 - B55 Hood Ajar Switch (BTV) 8 - P12B Horn - Low Note 9 - P12A Horn - High Note 10 - K17 Electronic Brake Control Module Engine Compartment Components (GMC) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Instrument Panel/Center Console Component Views > Page 9027 1 - B20 Brake Fluid Level Switch 2 - B19B Brake Booster Vacuum Sensor 3 - M75 Windshield Wiper Motor 4 - X50A Fuse Block - Underhood 5 - C1 Battery 6 - G24 Windshield Washer Pump 7 - P12B Horn - Low Note 8 - B55 Hood Ajar Switch (BTV) 9 - K17 Electronic Brake Control Module 10 - P12A Horn - High Note Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Fuse Block: Diagram Information and Instructions Electrical Schematic Symbols Electrical Schematic Symbols Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9030 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9031 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9032 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9033 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9034 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9035 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9036 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9037 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9038 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9039 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9040 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9041 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9042 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9043 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9044 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9045 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9046 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9047 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9048 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9049 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9050 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9051 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9052 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9053 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9054 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9055 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9056 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9057 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9058 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9059 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9060 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9061 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9062 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9063 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9064 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9065 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9066 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9067 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9068 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9069 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9070 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9071 General Electrical Diagnosis General Electrical Diagnosis Basic Knowledge Required Without a basic knowledge of electricity, it will be difficult to use the diagnostic procedures contained in the service manual. You should understand the basic theory of electricity, and know the meaning of voltage (V), current (A), and resistance (Ohms ). You should also be able to read and understand a wiring diagram, as well as understand what happens in a circuit with an open or a shorted wire. Vehicle Zoning Strategy Vehicle Zoning Strategy All grounds, in-line connectors, and splices have identifying numbers that correspond to where they are located in the vehicle. The following table explains the numbering system. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9072 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9073 Fuse Block: Diagnostic Aids Arrows and Symbols Arrows and Symbols This service manual uses various symbols in order to describe different service operations. 1 - Front of Vehicle 2 - View Detail 2 - View Detail 3 - Ambient Air Mixed with Another Gas or Indicate Temperature Change 4 - Motion or Direction 5 - View Angle 6 - Dimension (1:2) 7 Ambient/Clean Air Flow or Cool Air Flow 8 - Lubrication Point - Oil or Fluid 9 - Task Related 10 Sectioning (1:3) 11 - Gas Other Than Ambient Air or Hot Air Flow 12 - Lubrication Point - Grease or Jelly 13 - Multidirectional Arrow Decimal and Metric Equivalents Decimal and Metric Equivalents Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9074 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9075 Checking Aftermarket Accessories Checking Aftermarket Accessories Warning: Refer to SIR Warning (See: Restraint Systems/Service Precautions/SIR Warning). Caution: The OBD II symbol is used on the circuit diagrams in order to alert the technician that the circuit is essential for proper OBD II emission control circuit operation. Any circuit which fails and causes the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) to turn ON, or causes emissions-related component damage, is identified as an OBD II circuit. Do not connect aftermarket accessories into the following circuits: * SIR circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the SIR symbol. * OBD II circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the OBD II symbol. Always check for aftermarket accessories (non-OEM) as the first step in diagnosing electrical problems. If the vehicle is so equipped, disconnect the system to verify that these add-on accessories are not the cause of the problems. Possible causes of vehicle problems related to aftermarket accessories include: * Power feeds connected to points other than the battery * Antenna location * Transceiver wiring located too close to vehicle electronic modules or wiring * Poor shielding or poor connectors on antenna feed line * Check for recent service bulletins detailing installation guidelines for aftermarket accessories. Circuit Testing Circuit Testing The Circuit Testing section contains the following diagnostic testing information. Using this information along with the diagnostic procedures will identify the cause of the electrical malfunction. * Using Connector Test Adapters (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Using Connector Test Adapters) * Probing Electrical Connectors (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Probing Electrical Connectors) * Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9076 Procedures/Circuit Testing/Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter) * Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp) * Using Fused Jumper Wires (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Using Fused Jumper Wires) * Measuring Voltage (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Measuring Voltage) * Measuring Voltage Drop (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Measuring Voltage Drop) * Measuring Frequency (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Measuring Frequency) * Testing Ground and Low Reference Circuits (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Testing Ground and Low Reference Circuits) * Testing for Continuity (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Continuity) * Testing for Short to Ground (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Short to Ground) * Testing for a Short to Voltage (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for a Short to Voltage) * Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections) * Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions) * Testing for Electrical Intermittents (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Electrical Intermittents) * Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure) * Circuit Protection - Fuses (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Circuit Protection - Fuses) * Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers) * Circuit Protection - Fusible Links (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Circuit Protection - Fusible Links) Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp Special Tools EL-35616-200 - Test Light - Probe Kit For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Tools and Equipment). Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test Probe Caution). A test lamp can simply and quickly test a low impedance circuit for voltage. A Digital Multimeter (DMM) should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present if the impedance is low enough, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. In other words, if there is not enough current, the test lamp will not illuminate even though voltage is present. The EL-35616-200 - kit is Micro-Pack compatible and comprised of a 12-volt light bulb with an attached pair of leads. To properly operate this tool use the following procedures. When testing for voltage: 1. Attach one lead to ground. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is voltage at the point being tested. When testing for ground: 1. Attach one lead to battery positive voltage. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where ground should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is ground at the point being tested. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9077 Testing for a Short to Voltage Testing for a Short to Voltage Special Tools EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM) For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Tools and Equipment). Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test Probe Caution). The following procedure tests for a short to voltage in a circuit. 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Set the rotary dial of the Digital Multimeter (DMM) to the V (DC) position. 4. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. Turn ON the ignition and operate all accessories. 7. If the voltage measured is greater than 1 V, there is a short to voltage in the circuit. Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions Special Tools J-25070 - Heat Gun For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Tools and Equipment). Many intermittent open or shorted circuits are affected by harness/connector movement that is caused by vibration, engine torque, bumps/rough pavement, etc. In order to duplicate the customer's concern, it may be necessary to manipulate the wiring harness if the malfunction appears to be vibration related. Manipulation of a circuit can consist of a wide variety of actions, including: * Wiggling the harness * Disconnecting a connector and reconnecting * Stressing the mechanical connection of a connector * Pulling on the harness or wire in order to identify a separation/break inside the insulation * Relocating a harness or wires All these actions should be performed with some goal in mind. For instance, with a scan tool connected, wiggling the wires may uncover a faulty input to the control module. The snapshot option would be appropriate here. Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure). Another option is, with the component commanded ON and OFF by the scan tool, move related connectors and wiring and observe the component operation. With the engine running, move related connectors and wiring while monitoring engine operation. If harness or connector movement affects the data displayed, component/system operation, or engine operation, inspect and repair the harness/connections as necessary. You may need to load the vehicle in order to duplicate the concern. This may require the use of weights, floor jacks, jackstands, frame machines, etc. In these cases you are attempting to duplicate the concern by manipulating the suspension or frame. This method is useful in finding harnesses that are too short and their connectors pull apart enough to cause a poor connection. A DMM set to Peak Min/Max mode and connected to the suspect circuit while testing can yield desirable results. Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Electrical Intermittents). Certainly, using the senses of sight, smell, and hearing while manipulating the circuit can provide good results as well. There may be instances where circuit manipulation alone will not meet the required criteria for the fault condition to appear. In such cases it may be necessary to expose the suspect circuit to other conditions while manipulating the harness. Such conditions would include high moisture conditions, along with exceptionally high or low temperatures. The following discusses how to expose the circuit to these kinds of conditions. Salt Water Spray Some compounds possess the ability to conduct electricity when dissolved in water such as ordinary salt. By mixing table salt with water in sufficient Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9078 quantities, you can enhance the conductive properties of water so that any circuit which may be sensitive to moisture will more readily fail when liberally sprayed with this mixture. Mixing 0.35L (12 oz) of water with approximately 1 tablespoon of salt will yield a salt solution of 5 percent. Fill a normal spray bottle with this mixture. This mixture is sufficient to enhance the water's own conductivity. This may cause the circuit to fail more easily when sprayed. Once the mixture is completed, spray the suspect area liberally with the solution. Then, while monitoring either a scan tool or DMM, manipulate the harness as discussed previously. High Temperature Conditions If the complaint tends to be heat related, you can simulate the condition using the J-25070 - heat gun. Using the heat gun, you can heat up the suspected area or component. Manipulate the harnesses under high temperature conditions while monitoring the scan tool or DMM to locate the fault condition. The high temperature condition may be achieved simply by test driving the vehicle at normal operating temperature. If a heat gun is unavailable, consider this option to enhance your diagnosis. This option does not allow for the same control, however. Low Temperature Conditions Depending on the nature of the fault condition, placing a fan in front of the vehicle while the vehicle is in the shade can have the desired effect. If this is unsuccessful, use local cooling treatments such as ice or a venturi type nozzle (one that provides hot or cold air). This type of tool is capable of producing air stream temperatures down to -18°C (0°F) from one end and +71°C (160°F) from the other. This is ideally suited for localized cooling needs. Once the vehicle, component, or harness has been sufficiently cooled, manipulate the harness or components in an effort to duplicate the concern. Duplicating Failure Conditions * If none of the previous tests are successful, attempt to duplicate and/or capture the failure conditions. * Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, where applicable, contains the conditions that were present when the DTC set. 1. Review and record Freeze Frame/Failure Records data. 2. Clear the DTCs using the scan tool. 3. Turn the key to OFF and wait 15 seconds. 4. Operate the vehicle under the same conditions that were noted in Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, as closely as possible. The vehicle must also be operating within the Conditions for Running the DTC. Refer to Conditions for Running the DTC in the supporting text if a DTC is being diagnosed. 5. Monitor DTC Status for the DTC being tested. The scan tool will indicate Ran, when the enabling conditions have been satisfied long enough for the DTC to run. The scan tool will also indicate whether the DTC passed or failed. * An alternate method is to drive the vehicle with the DMM connected to a suspected circuit. An abnormal reading on the DMM when the concern occurs, may help you locate the concern. Measuring Frequency Measuring Frequency Special Tools EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM) For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Tools and Equipment). Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test Probe Caution). The following procedure determines the frequency of a signal. Note: Connecting the Digital Multimeter (DMM) to the circuit before pressing the Hz button will allow the DMM to autorange to an appropriate range. 1. Apply power to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (AC) position. 3. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9079 5. Press the Hz button on the DMM. 6. The DMM will display the frequency measured. Measuring Voltage Measuring Voltage Special Tools EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM) For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Tools and Equipment). Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test Probe Caution). The following procedure measures the voltage at a selected point in a circuit. 1. Disconnect the electrical harness connector for the circuit being tested, if necessary. 2. Enable the circuit and/or system being tested. Use the following methods: * Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. * Turn ON the engine. * Turn ON the circuit and/or system with a scan tool in Output Controls. * Turn ON the switch for the circuit and/or system being tested. 3. Select the V (AC) or V (DC) position on the Digital Multimeter (DMM). 4. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the point of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. The DMM displays the voltage measured at that point. Measuring Voltage Drop Measuring Voltage Drop Special Tools EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM) For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Tools and Equipment). Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test Probe Caution). The following procedure determines the difference in voltage potential between 2 points. 1. Set the rotary dial of the Digital Multimeter (DMM) to the V (DC) position. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9080 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to one point of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to the other point of the circuit. 4. Operate the circuit. 5. The DMM displays the difference in voltage between the 2 points. Probing Electrical Connectors Probing Electrical Connectors Note: Always be sure to reinstall the connector position assurance (CPA) and terminal position assurance (TPA) when reconnecting connectors or replacing terminals. Front probe Disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the mating side (front) of the connector. Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test Probe Caution). Note: When probing female 0.64 terminals, it is important to use the correct adapter. There have been some revisions to the test adapter for 0.64 terminals. The proper adapter for 0.64 terminals is the EL-35616-64B which has a gold terminal and a black wire between the base and tip. Failure to use the proper test adapter may result in damage to the terminal being tested and improper diagnosis. Note: The proper adapter for probing the terminals for fuses, relays, or diodes in an electrical center is EL-35616-35. Using any other tool or adapter may damage the terminal being tested. Refer to the following table as a guide in selecting the correct test adapter for front probing connectors: Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9081 Backprobe Note: * Backprobe connector terminals only when specifically required in diagnostic procedures. * Do not backprobe a sealed (Weather Pack(R)) connector, less than a 280 series Metri-Pack connector, a Micro-Pack connector, or a flat wire (dock and lock) connector. * Backprobing can be a source of damage to connector terminals. Use care in order to avoid deforming the terminal, either by forcing the test probe too far into the cavity or by using too large of a test probe. * After backprobing any connector, inspect for terminal damage. If terminal damage is suspected, test for proper terminal contact. Do not disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the harness side (back) of the connector. Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure Using Snapshots in Global Diagnostic System (GDS) Overview Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9082 A snapshot is a recording of what a control module on the vehicle was receiving for information while the snapshot is being made. A snapshot may be used to analyze the data during the time a vehicle condition is current. This allows you to concentrate on making the condition occur, rather than trying to view all the data in anticipation of the fault. To record a snapshot in GDS, select, Record Snapshot, from the options at the top right portion of any of the various pages that allow snapshots to be taken (e.g. Data Display, Control Functions, etc.). When you are finished recording, select, Stop Snapshot recording. The snapshot will now be available for replay. Snapshot Replay The Snapshot Replay function allows reviews of previously recorded vehicle snapshot data. This information can be used in analysis of vehicle problems and detection of trigger error conditions. The graph function can be used to compare parameters to see if a component is functioning properly. Recorded snapshots can be selected for viewing by the following three methods: * Selecting a snapshot file from the Vehicle Home Page and clicking on the Review selection. * Double clicking on the selected snapshot from the Vehicle Home Page. * Entering the Tools selection from the Menu selection and selecting Snapshot replay. Next, open the Snapshot Manager. Double click on the snapshot file you wish to view or click on the Load Snapshot selection and select a snapshot file. Regardless of selection method, a File Loaded pop-up window will be displayed from the Snapshot Replay screen. Select OK from the pop-up window. Snapshot Play Functions There are several snapshot play functions that are used to replay recorded snapshots * The Play function is used to play the snapshot forward by clicking on this selection. A marker will move across the screen when this selection is used. All selections in this area turn grey when they are active. * The Pause function is used to pause play of the snapshot. When this selection is clicked a second time the snapshot will start playing where it left off. * The Stop function is used to stop playing the snapshot. The snapshot will start from the beginning, if Play is selected after using the Stop function. Time Control Time control is used to control the snapshot replay. This function allows selection of a specific time frame, display of different views, and control of display speed. The following functions can be selected directly under Time Control. * The Bookmark selection allows you to add a specific comment in the current display and return to this point in the future. When this option is selected, a pop-up window is displayed. Enter a bookmark name and select OK. * The Note Pad can be selected to add comments to the snapshot replay file at the current point of time. When this option is selected, a pop-up window is displayed. Enter a comment for the snapshot file and select OK. * The Load Snapshot (blue folder) opens a snapshot file and makes it ready for further analysis. This function is also available by clicking on an available snapshot file from the Snapshot Manager. * The Down Arrow displays all Time Control options when selected. Individual options can also be selected by clicking on the item you want. * The Snapshot Display Speed can be controlled by selecting this option. Slow speeds of 1/8X, 1/4X, and 1/2X can be selected. The real time speed can also be selected at 1. Faster speeds of 2X, 4X, and 8X can also be obtained by using this selection. View Selections Each View Selection provides a different way of displaying vehicle data for analysis. The following functions can be selected under Available Views: Note: The parameter name will be shown in the original language used for capture if no translation is available for the name. * Parameter List View - Displays incoming information from the snapshot file. The current value of the parameters is displayed on the screen. * Log View - Contains all the information from the snapshot file. All parameter values are listed in the order they were recorded. Specific parameters can be added or removed from a watchlist by clicking on the appropriate item. * State View - Shows the values of all parameters in a specific time frame. These values can be used for comparison with the trigger view. * Trigger View - Displays all system and user defined triggers. This function can be used when there is a combination of factors involved in a diagnostic problem. When a Trigger condition is met a caution triangle will be displayed on the screen. Triggers: * Load Triggers - Allows you to load a file containing trigger definitions. * Save Triggers - Allows you to save the trigger to your computer's hard drive. * Remove Trigger - Allows you to remove the current trigger. It will no longer be present. * Edit Trigger - Displays a pop-up window where you can modify the limits and parameters contained within a trigger. * Adds Trigger - Displays a pop-up window to configure a trigger. * DTC View - After the Play function is selected and this option is selected this function opens the list of recorded DTCs. * Line Graph View - Displays data that can be visualized against the time-axis. From this view, specific parameters can be selected for graphing by Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9083 checking the box under Selected. At the bottom of the graph there are four functions Zoom In (increase size), Zoom Out (decrease size), Bookmarks, and Pause Scrolling. Each of these functions can be accessed by clicking on them. Testing for Continuity Testing for Continuity Special Tools EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM) For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Tools and Equipment). Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test Probe Caution). The following procedures verify good continuity in a circuit. With a Digital Multimeter (DMM) 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the Ohms position. 2. Disconnect the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 3. Disconnect the load. 4. Press the MIN MAX button on the DMM. 5. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 6. Connect the other lead of the DMM to the other end of the circuit. 7. If the DMM displays low or no resistance, the circuit has good continuity. With a Test Lamp Note: Only use the test lamp procedure on low impedance power and ground circuits. 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect one lead of the test lamp to one end of the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 5. Connect the other end of the circuit to ground. 6. If the test lamp illuminates (full intensity), then the circuit has good continuity. Testing for Electrical Intermittents Testing for Electrical Intermittents Special Tools EL-39200 Digital Multimeter For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Tools and Equipment). Perform the following procedures while wiggling the harness from side to side. Continue this at convenient points (about 6 inches apart) while watching the test equipment. * Testing for Short to Ground (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Short to Ground) * Testing for Continuity (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Continuity) * Testing for a Short to Voltage (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for a Short to Voltage) If the fault is not identified, perform the procedure below using the MIN MAX feature on the EL-39200 DMM. This feature allows you to manipulate the circuit without having to watch the EL-39200. The EL-39200 will generate an audible tone when a change is detected. Note: The EL-39200 must be used in order to perform the following procedure since the EL-39200 can monitor current, resistance or voltage while recording the minimum (MIN), and maximum (MAX) values measured. 1. Connect the EL-39200 to both sides of a suspected connector (still connected), or from one end of a suspected circuit to the other. Refer to Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9084 Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter) for information on connecting the EL-39200 to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the EL-39200 to the V (AC) or V (DC) position. 3. Press the range button of the EL-39200 in order to select the desired voltage range. 4. Press the MIN MAX button of the EL-39200. The EL-39200 displays 100 ms RECORD and emits an audible tone (beep). Note: The 100 ms RECORD mode is the length of time an input must stay at a new value in order to record the full change. 5. Simulate the condition that is potentially causing the intermittent connection, either by wiggling the connections or the wiring, test driving, or performing other operations. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions). 6. Listen for the audible Min Max Alert which indicates that a new minimum or maximum value has been recorded. 7. Press the MIN MAX button once in order to display the MAX value and note the value. 8. Press the MIN MAX button again in order to display the MIN value and note the value. 9. Determine the difference between the MIN and MAX values. * If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is 1 V or greater an intermittent open or high resistance condition exists. Repair the condition as necessary. * If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is less than 1 V, an intermittent open or high resistance condition does not exist. Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections Special Tools EL-35616 Terminal Test Probe Kit For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Tools and Equipment). When the condition is not currently present, but is indicated in DTC history, the cause may be intermittent. An intermittent may also be the cause when there is a customer complaint, but the symptom cannot be duplicated. Refer to the Symptom Table of the system that is suspect of causing the condition before trying to locate an intermittent condition. Most intermittent conditions are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. Inspect for the following items: * Wiring broken inside the insulation * Poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector * Poor terminal to wire connection-Some conditions which fall under this description are poor crimps, poor solder joints, crimping over the wire insulation rather than the wire itself, and corrosion in the wire to terminal contact area, etc. * Pierced or damaged insulation can allow moisture to enter the wiring causing corrosion. The conductor can corrode inside the insulation, with little visible evidence. Look for swollen and stiff sections of wire in the suspect circuits. * Wiring which has been pinched, cut, or its insulation rubbed through may cause an intermittent open or short as the bare area touches other wiring or parts of the vehicle. * Wiring that comes in contact with hot or exhaust components * Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions) in order to duplicate the conditions required, in order to verify the customer concern. * Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Electrical Intermittents) for test procedures to detect intermittent open, high resistance, short to ground, and short to voltage conditions. * Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure) for advanced intermittent diagnosis and Vehicle Data Recorder operation. Testing for Terminal Fretting Some intermittent conditions can be caused by wire terminal fretting corrosion. Fretting corrosion is a build-up of insulating, oxidized wear debris that can form when there is a small motion between electrical contacts. The oxidized wear debris can pile up enough at the electrical contact spots that the electrical resistance across the connection increases. Movement between the contacting surfaces as small as 10 to 100 microns can cause fretting. To put this in perspective, a sheet of paper is about 100 microns thick, so fretting motion is small and hard to see. Vibration and thermal expansion/contraction are the main sources that create fretting motion. Since vehicles vibrate and can experience large temperature swings, they are a good source for fretting motion. Tin, copper, nickel, and iron surfaces are all susceptible to fretting corrosion. Fretting corrosion can be difficult to see but it looks like small, dark smudges on the terminals contact surface. To correct a fretting condition disconnect the suspect connector and add Nyogel lubricant 760G (dielectric grease) to both sides of the connector Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9085 terminals. Then reconnect the connector and wipe away any excess lubricant. This will correct the additional terminal contact resistance due to the terminal fretting corrosion. Testing for Proper Terminal Contact It is important to test terminal contact at the component and any inline connectors before replacing a suspect component. Mating terminals must be inspected to ensure good terminal contact. A poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector may be the result of contamination or deformation. Contamination may be caused by the connector halves being improperly connected. A missing or damaged connector seal, damage to the connector itself, or exposing the terminals to moisture and dirt can also cause contamination. Contamination, usually in the underhood or underbody connectors, leads to terminal corrosion, causing an open circuit or intermittently open circuit. Deformation is caused by probing the mating side of a connector terminal without the proper adapter. Always use the EL-35616 when probing connectors. Other causes of terminal deformation are improperly joining the connector halves, or repeatedly separating and joining the connector halves. Deformation, usually to the female terminal contact tang, can result in poor terminal contact causing an open or intermittently open circuit. Testing for Proper Terminal Contact in Bussed Electrical Centers It is very important to use the correct test adapter when testing for proper terminal contact of fuses and relays in a bussed electrical center. Use EL-35616-35 to test for proper terminal contact. Failure to use EL-35616-35 can result in improper diagnosis of the bussed electrical center. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact: 1. Separate the connector halves. 2. Visually inspect the connector halves for contamination. Contamination may result in a white or green build-up within the connector body or between terminals. This causes high terminal resistance, intermittent contact, or an open circuit. An underhood or underbody connector that shows signs of contamination should be replaced in its entirety: terminals, seals, and connector body. 3. Using an equivalent male terminal / terminated lead, verify that the retention force is significantly different between a known good terminal and the suspect terminal. Replace the female terminal in question. Flat Wire (Dock and Lock) Connectors There are no serviceable parts for flat wire (dock and lock) connectors on the harness side or the component side. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact: 1. Remove the component in question. 2. Visually inspect each side of the connector for signs of contamination. Avoid touching either side of the connector as oil from your skin may be a source of contamination as well. 3. Visually inspect the terminal bearing surfaces of the flat wire circuits for splits, cracks, or other imperfections that could cause poor terminal contact. Visually inspect the component side connector to ensure that all of the terminals are uniform and free of damage or deformation. 4. Insert the appropriate adapter from the on the flat wire harness connector in order to test the circuit in question. Control Module/Component Voltage and Grounds Poor voltage or ground connections can cause widely varying symptoms. * Test all control module voltage supply circuits. Many vehicles have multiple circuits supplying voltage to a control module. Other components in the system may have separate voltage supply circuits that may also need to be tested. Inspect connections at the module/component connectors, fuses, and any intermediate connections between the voltage source and the module/component. A test lamp or a DMM may indicate that voltage is present, but neither tests the ability of the circuit to carry sufficient current. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. Refer to Circuit Testing (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Circuit Testing) and Power Distribution Schematics (See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Power Distribution Schematics). * Test all control module ground and system ground circuits. The control module may have multiple ground circuits. Other components in the system may have separate grounds that may also need to be tested. Inspect grounds for clean and tight connections at the grounding point. Inspect the connections at the component and in splice packs, where applicable. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. Refer to Circuit Testing (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Circuit Testing) and Ground Distribution Schematics (See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Ground Distribution Schematics). Temperature Sensitivity * An intermittent condition may occur when a component/connection reaches normal operating temperature. The condition may occur only when the component/connection is cold, or only when the component/connection is hot. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9086 * Freeze Frame, Failure Records, Snapshot, or Vehicle Data Recorder data may help with this type of intermittent condition, where applicable. * If the intermittent is related to heat, review the data for a relationship with the following: - High ambient temperatures - Underhood/engine generated heat - Circuit generated heat due to a poor connection, or high electrical load - Higher than normal load conditions, towing, etc. * If the intermittent is related to cold, review the data for the following: - Low ambient temperatures-In extremely low temperatures, ice may form in a connection or component. Inspect for water intrusion. - The condition only occurs on a cold start. - The condition goes away when the vehicle warms up. * Information from the customer may help to determine if the trouble follows a pattern that is temperature related. * If temperature is suspected of causing an intermittent fault condition, attempt to duplicate the condition. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions) in order to duplicate the conditions required. Electromagnetic Interference and Electrical Noise Some electrical components/circuits are sensitive to electromagnetic interference or other types of electrical noise. Inspect for the following conditions: * A misrouted harness that is too close to high voltage/high current devices such as secondary ignition components, motors, generator etc.-These components may induce electrical noise on a circuit that could interfere with normal circuit operation. * Electrical system interference caused by a malfunctioning relay, or a control module driven solenoid or switch-These conditions can cause a sharp electrical surge. Normally, the condition will occur when the malfunctioning component is operating. * Improper installation of non-factory or aftermarket add on accessories such as lights, 2-way radios, amplifiers, electric motors, remote starters, alarm systems, cell phones, etc.-These accessories may lead to interference while in use, but do not fail when the accessories are not in use. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Checking Aftermarket Accessories). * Test for an open diode across the A/C compressor clutch and for other open diodes. Some relays may contain a clamping diode. * The generator may be allowing AC noise into the electrical system. Incorrect Control Module * There are only a few situations where reprogramming a control module is appropriate: - A new service control module is installed. - A control module from another vehicle is installed. - Revised software/calibration files have been released for this vehicle. Note: DO NOT re-program the control module with the SAME software/calibration files that are already present in the control module. This is not an effective repair for any type of concern. * Verify that the control module contains the correct software/calibration. If incorrect programming is found, reprogram the control module with the most current software/calibration. Refer to Control Module References (See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning) for replacement, setup, and programming. Testing for Short to Ground Testing for Short to Ground Special Tools * EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM) * EL 35616-200 - Test Light-Probe Kit For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Tools and Equipment). Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test Probe Caution). The following procedures test for a short to ground in a circuit. With a Digital Multimeter (DMM) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9087 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the Ohms position. 4. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the other lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. If the DMM does NOT display infinite resistance (OL), there is a short to ground in the circuit. With a Test Lamp 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect one lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to one end of the circuit to be tested. 5. If the test lamp illuminates, there is a short to ground in the circuit. Fuse Powering Several Loads 1. Review the system schematic and locate the fuse that is open. 2. Open the first connector or switch leading from the fuse to each load. 3. Connect a DMM across the fuse terminals (be sure that the fuse is powered). * When the DMM displays voltage the short is in the wiring leading to the first connector or switch. * If the DMM does not display voltage refer to the next step. 4. Close each connector or switch until the DMM displays voltage in order to find which circuit is shorted. Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter Special Tools EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM) For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Tools and Equipment). Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test Probe Caution). Digital Multimeter (DMM) Basic Requirements Service information is validated using digital multimeters that meet or exceed the following requirements. Using a multimeter that does not meet these basic requirements may give inaccurate readings which could lead to an incorrect diagnosis. Display and Settings 1. Four digits displayed 2. Voltage, amperage, resistance, frequency, diode test settings, and min-max function 3. Display positive and negative values Voltage 1. Have at least 10 Mohm input impedance 2. Test a DC voltage range of 0.1-1000 V. 3. Test an AC voltage range of 0.1-1000 V. Amperage 1. Test a DC amperage range of 0.1µA-10 A. 2. Test an AC amperage range of 0.1µA-10 A. Resistance Test a resistance range of 0.1 ohm-40 Mohm and displays infinite for a value greater than 40 Mohm (O.L. (Over-load)) Frequency Test for a frequency range of 0.5 HZ-199 K HZ Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9088 Diode Test 1. Apply at least 1 mA when performing the diode bias test 2. Display the break over voltage drop (0-3 V) of a forward biased diode 3. Display infinite (O.L. (Over-load)) when a diode is reverse biased Min-Max Readings 1. Can update at a 1 ms sample rate 2. Saves and displays minimum and maximum values Note: Circuits which include any solid state control modules, such as the engine control module (ECM), should only be tested with a 10 MOhms or higher impedance digital multimeter such as the EL-39200. The EL-39200 instruction manual is a good source of information and should be read thoroughly upon receipt of the DMM as well as kept on hand for future reference. A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present if the impedance is low enough, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. In other words, if there is not enough current, the test lamp will not illuminate even though voltage is present. The ohmmeter function on a DMM shows how much resistance exists between 2 points along a circuit. Low resistance in a circuit means good continuity. Note: Disconnect the power feed from the suspect circuit when measuring resistance with a DMM. This prevents incorrect readings. DMMs apply such a small voltage to measure resistance that the presence of voltages can upset a resistance reading. Diodes and solid state components in a circuit can cause a DMM to display a false reading. To find out if a component is affecting a measurement take a reading once, then reverse the leads and take a second reading. If the readings differ the solid state component is affecting the measurement. Following are examples of the various methods of connecting the DMM to the circuit to be tested: * Probe both ends of the connector and either hold the leads in place while manipulating the connector or tape the leads to the harness for continuous monitoring while you perform other operations or test driving. Refer to Probing Electrical Connectors (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Probing Electrical Connectors). * Disconnect the harness at both ends of the suspected circuit where it connects either to a component or to other harnesses. * If the system that is being diagnosed has a specified pinout or breakout box, it may be used in order to simplify connecting the DMM to the circuit or for testing multiple circuits quickly. Using Connector Test Adapters Using Connector Test Adapters Special Tools EL 35616 - Terminal Test Probe Kit For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Tools and Equipment). Caution: Do not insert test equipment probes (DMM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the EL-38125-580 GM Approved Terminal Release Tool Kit in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the EL-38125-580 GM Approved Terminal Release Tool Kit , ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the EL-38125-580 GM Approved Terminal Release Tool Kit label on the inside of the EL-38125-580 GM Approved Terminal Release Tool Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Using Fused Jumper Wires Using Fused Jumper Wires Special Tools J 36169-A Fused Jumper Wire Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9089 Note: A fused jumper may not protect solid state components from being damaged. The J 36169-A includes small clamp connectors that provide adaptation to most connectors without damage. This fused jumper wire is supplied with a 20-A fuse which may not be suitable for some circuits. Do not use a fuse with a higher rating than the fuse that protects the circuit being tested. AFL/EPC Connectors AFL/EPC Connectors Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. 1. For connectors with a bolt in the dress cover, turn the bolt counterclockwise to remove the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9090 2. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the top of the wire dress cover. Slide the CPA forward. 3. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9091 View showing depressing of the lever lock release tab. View of connector in released position. 4. Disconnect the connector from the component. 5. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the dress cover. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs and remove the dress cover. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9092 6. Release the rear lower half of the wiredress cover. 7. Release the tabs that are holding the wiredress cover to the connector body. 8. Remove the nose piece by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the slots on both ends of the connector body. Gently pry the nose piece out of the connector. J 38125-216 can also be used to remove the nose piece. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9093 9. Use the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by lifting the terminal retaining tabs on the inside of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Bosch Connectors (BSK) Bosch Connectors (BSK) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9094 Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 3. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 4. Insert the J 38125-561 tool into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 5. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Bosch Connectors (ECM) Bosch Connectors (ECM) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9095 1. Locate the assist lever on the top of the connector. Move the assist lever to the forward position. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9096 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the connector. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the locking tabs and remove the dress cover. 4. The terminal positive assurance (TPA) is located in the front of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9097 5. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove TPA from the connector. 6. Use the J 38125-213 or the J 38125-556 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9098 Note: Ensure that the dress cover and connector body are both in the released position before reassembling. Failure to do so may cause damage to the connector and component. Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Bosch Connectors (0.64) Bosch Connectors (0.64) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While pressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock until the lever is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Pull the rubber boot that covers the wires back to expose the end of the connector dress cover. 4. Place the connector locking lever in the center of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9099 5. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs that are on the wire end of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover and connector body and pry up. 6. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs located on the opposite side of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover at the connector end and pry up. 7. Remove the dress cover. 8. Cut the tie wrap on the wire bundle. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9100 9. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting a small flat-bladed tool into the small slot in the end of the slider and pushing on the TPA until it comes out of the connector. When the TPA exits the opposite side of the connector, gasp the TPA and pull it completely out of the connector. 10. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 11. Insert the J 38125-560 into the 2 triangular cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 12. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Terminal Replacement Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9101 1. Prior to installation the terminal must be aligned so the (1) coding lugs align with the (2) coding grooves on the connector. 2. Once the terminal is aligned, slide the terminal into the cavity until the retainer has engaged in the cavity of the connector. 3. Slide the TPA in the connector body and seat it using a small flat bladed tool. The TPA is seated when it is flush with the contact housing. 4. Secure the wires to the connector body using a tie wrap and replace the dress cover and grommet. Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Pull out the slider on the connector position assurance (CPA) until it is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9102 5. Insert the J 38125-557 into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Connector Position Assurance Locks Connector Position Assurance Locks The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of the connector. CPAs are used in various connectors throughout the vehicle. CPAs are also used in all SIR system electrical connectors. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals, of the connector. Connector Repairs Connector Repairs Connector Repairs contains a list of all connector repairs. The connector repairs are listed by the connector manufacturer and then by connector type. If the technician cannot identify the manufacturer of the connector, refer to Identifying Connectors below. Knowing the connector manufacturer will assist in finding the correct connector repair from the following list: * Connector Position Assurance Locks (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Connector Position Assurance Locks) * Terminal Position Assurance Locks (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Terminal Position Assurance Locks) * AFL/EPC Connectors (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/AFL/EPC Connectors) * Bosch Connectors (BSK) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Bosch Connectors (BSK))Bosch Connectors (0.64) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Bosch Connectors (0.64))Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT))Bosch Connectors (ECM) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Bosch Connectors (ECM)) * Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack))Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Push to Seat))Delphi Connectors Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9103 (Pull To Seat) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Pull to Seat))Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W))Delphi Connectors (Micro.64) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Micro .64))Delphi Connectors (12-Way) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (12-Way))Delphi Connectors (Steering Gear) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Steering Gear)) * FCI Connectors (Lever Lock) (See: General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/FCI Connectors (Lever Lock))FCI Connectors (SIR) (See: General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/FCI (SIR)) * FEP Connectors (Steering Gear) (See: General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/FEP Connectors (Steering Gear)) * JST Connectors (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/JST Connectors) * Kostal Connectors (Glow Plug Control Module) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Kostal Connectors (Glow Plug Control Module))Kostal Connectors (Transmission) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Kostal Connectors (Transmission)) * Molex Connectors (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Molex Connectors) * Sumitomo Connectors (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Sumitomo Connectors) * Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way))Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor))Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap))Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way))Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module)) * Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Yazaki Connectors (2-Way))Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Yazaki Connectors (16-Way)) * Repairing Connector Terminals (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Repairing Connector Terminals) Connector Anatomy 1 - Connector Positive Assurance (CPA) 2 - Assist Lever 3 - Wiredress Cover 4 - Seal Strain/Relief Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9104 5 - Slide Left Hand 6 - Slide Right Hand 7 - Terminal Positive Assurance (TPA) 8 - Terminal Positive Assurance (TPA) 9 - Connector Seal 10 - Connector Housing 11 - Inner Connector Identifying Connectors Knowing the connector manufacturer is helpful when trying to locating the correct connector repair procedure. There are many different connector designs used on GM vehicles and it is sometimes difficult to identify the connector manufacturer. The information in this document should help with the identification of connector manufactures. The following connector manufacturers make most of the connectors found in GM vehicles: * AFL/EPC (Alcoa Fujikura Ltd./Engineered Plastics Components) * Bosch * Delphi * FCI (Framatome Connectors International) * JAE (Japan Aviation Electronics) * JST (Japan Solderless Terminals) * Kostel * Molex * Sumitomo * Tyco/AMP * Yazaki Identifying the manufacturer of a connector is often difficult. When trying to determine the manufacturer of a connector, look for specific identifying marks that are unique to that connector supplier. Most of these identify marks are hard to find or see. Check the connector carefully and refer to the information below for pictures and descriptions of connector identification markings. * Most of AFLs connectors have EPC on their connector body. Some of the smaller connectors will not have any markings on them. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9105 * In some cases Bosch will actually be printed on the connector. If Bosch does not appear on the connector, look for the Bosch logo. The Bosch logo is a circle with a blunted arrow inside. This logo can appear anywhere on the connector and is often very small. * In some cases Delphi will actually be printed on the connector. If Delphi is not printed on the connector, look for PED. In both cases there is no specific orientation for Delphi or PED and they can appear anywhere on the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9106 * FCI connectors may have the FCI logo on their connectors. The logo is the letters FCI with an "A" above it. * JAE connector have JAE in small letters on their connectors. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9107 * JST connectors have JST in small letters on their connectors, similar to that above. The location of the logo will vary with the connector size and style. * Kostel has an "LK" with a circle around it. These connector are usually used as a transmissions connection. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9108 * Most Molex connectors will have the Molex logo on the dresscover of the connector. In some cases the connectors may have MX followed by another letter. The third letter indicates where the connector was made. A connector with MXD is a Molex connector made in Detroit. Sumitomo has a unique symbol on their connector and possibly a part number. The symbol is similar to that of a diamond lying on its side, similar to that shown. The logo could appear anywhere but the most common place is at the wire side of the housing. * Tyco/AMP has many different and unique connector designs. Some may or may not have identifiable marks on them. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9109 * Yazaki has a wedge or arrow shape, similar to that shown. Delphi Connectors (Push to Seat) Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Follow the steps below in order to repair push to seat connectors. 1. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device, the connector position assurance (CPA) device, and/or the secondary lock. 2. Separate the connector halves (1). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9110 3. Use the proper pick or removal tool (1) in order to release the terminal. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 4. Gently pull the cable and the terminal (2) out of the back of the connector. 5. Re-form the locking device if you are going to reuse the terminal (1). 6. To repair the terminal, refer to Terminal Repair. Terminal Repair 1. Slip the cable seal away from the terminal. 2. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 3. Slip a new cable seal onto the wire. 4. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 5. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 6. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. 7. Slide the cable seal toward the terminal. 8. Crimp the cable seal and the insulation. 9. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply grease to the connector. Reinstalling Terminal 1. In order to reuse a terminal or lead assembly, refer to Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Wiring Repairs). 2. Ensure that the cable seal is kept on the terminal side of the splice. 3. Insert the lead from the back until it catches. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Terminated Lead Repair 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Find the appropriate terminated lead. 3. Use the appropriate splice sleeves depending on the gauge size. 4. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves). Delphi Connectors (Pull to Seat) Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) Special Tools Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9111 J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal If the terminal is visibly damaged or is suspected of having a faulty connection, the terminal should be replaced. Follow the steps below in order to repair pull-to-seat connectors: 1. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) device and/or the secondary lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component or separate the connectors for in-line connectors. 3. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device. 4. Insert the proper pick or removal tool into the front of the connector body. Note: On connectors with more than one terminal the service loop may not be large enough to remove the terminal and crimp on a new one. If the terminal wire does not have a large enough service loop for removal, cut the wire 5 cm (2 in) behind the connector before removal. 5. Grasp the wire at the back of the connector body and gently push the terminal out the front of the connector body. Terminal Repair 1. If the wire needed to be cut in order to remove the terminal, gently push a small length of the same size wire through the back of the connector cavity until there is enough wire exposed in order to crimp on a new terminal. If the wire was not cut, cut the existing wire as close to the old terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 4. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. Terminal Installation 1. Align the terminal and pull the wire from the back of the connector in order to seat the terminal. 2. If necessary, cut the new wire to proper length and splice with existing circuit. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves). 3. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply dielectric grease to the connector. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Micro .64) Delphi Connectors (Micro.64) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9112 Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro.64 connectors. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. The lever lock may be located on the top or sides of the wire dress cover. View of a typical Micro 64 connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9113 Depress the lock and pull the lever over and past the lock. View of the connector when released from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9114 View of another type of Micro 64 connector. Depress the locks that are located on both sides of the wiredress cover and pull the lever over and past the locks. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9115 View of the connector when released from the component. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the front of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool push down on one of the locking tabs and pull the cover up until the dress cover releases. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. 4. Once the front 2 locks are unlocked, lift the front of the dress cover and pull it forward. Note: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 5. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the small slot on the TPA and pushing down until the TPA releases. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9116 Note: Be careful not to angle or rock the J 38125-21 tool when inserting it into the connector or the tool may break. 6. Insert the J 38125-21 tool into the round canal between the terminals cavities at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Follow the steps below in order to repair Micro 64 connector terminals. The Micro 64 connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-64 (M jaw) was developed to crimp Micro 64 terminals. The J 38125-64 crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. The J 38125-64 crimping tool is also designed to crimp both the wire and the insulation at the same time. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro 64 terminals. Note: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gauge wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 1. Cut the wire as close to the damaged terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9117 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert terminal into the appropriate terminal holder until it hits bottom and stops. The correct terminal holder is determined by the wire size. Also ensure that the terminals wings are pointing towards the former on the tool and the release locator. 5. Insert the stripped cable into the terminal. Insulation should be visible on both sides of the terminal insulation wings. 6. Compress the handles until the ratchet automatically releases. 7. Place the terminal into the appropriate cavity and assemble the connector. Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9118 Terminal Removal Procedure There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W connectors. These connectors are very similar but use different terminals and have some minor physical differences also. The first connector design of the Micro-Pack 100W (1) has a white connector interface that holds the terminals. The second design of the Micro-Pack 100W (2) has a gray interface to hold the terminals. Also, the first design has terminal cavities that are further apart (3 mm centerline) and offset from the other row of terminal cavities in the connector. The second design has terminals cavities that are closer together (2.54 mm centerline) and aligned vertically. One other way to identify the second design is the thin strip of material that runs along the outside of the cavities. Note: There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W terminals which are very similar. Ensure that you have the correct terminal before crimping the new terminal to the wire. The first design connector uses the longer terminal (1) that has a raised area in front of the recess in the terminal. The second design connector uses the shorter terminal without the raised area. Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro-Pack 100W connectors. Some Micro-Pack 100W connector disassembly procedures will vary. Use this procedure as a guide. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9119 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Locate the nose piece locking tabs that are positioned on the side of the connector nose piece. The connector nose piece acts as a terminal positive assurance (TPA) and may be referred to as such. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to push in one of the locking tabs while gently pulling on the same side of the nose piece. 4. Repeat the procedure for the other locking tab and remove the nose piece. 5. Remove the wire dress cover. The following is a general procedure for wire dress cover removal. Use this procedure as a guide, some dress cover removal procedures may vary. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9120 6. Use fingers to squeeze the 2 locking legs of the cover. 7. Apply pressure and gently rock the cover until one locking leg is unseated. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9121 8. Continue to apply pressure and rock the cover until the second locking leg is unseated. Repeat procedure for the other side of the dress cover and remove the cover. 9. Use J 38125-12A to gently lift the terminal retaining tab while gently pulling the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. If the terminal is severely bent or damaged, it may be possible on some connectors to push the wire out of the front of the connector instead of pulling it through. This will prevent damage to the internal seals of the connector. Once the terminal is pushed out of the connector, cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible and pull the wire through the connector. Terminal Repair Procedure The Micro-Pack 100W connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool was developed to crimp Micro-Pack 100W terminals. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro-Pack 100 terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9122 1. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. Note: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gauge wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert the terminal into the crimp tool until the core wings are flush with the anvil on the crimp tool. Be sure that the wings are pointed toward the crimp tool former and release the spring locator. The locator will hold the terminal in place. Inspect the alignment of the terminal wings with the crimp tool former. If the terminal wings are wider than the crimp tool former, remove the terminal and bend the terminal wings in slightly. 5. Place stripped wire into terminal. 6. Crimp the new terminal to the wire. If a jam occurs, press the emergency release to open applicator. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9123 Terminal Replacement Procedure After the terminal is crimped to the wire perform the following procedure in order to replace Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the Terminal Removal Procedure. Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The following is the proper procedure for the repair of Weather Pack(R) Connectors. 1. Separate the connector halves (1). 2. Open the secondary lock. A secondary lock aids in terminal retention and is usually molded to the connector (1). 3. Grasp the wire and push the terminal to the forward most position. Hold the wire in this position. 4. Insert the Weather Pack(R) terminal removal tool J 38125-10A into the front (mating end) of the connector cavity until it rests on the cavity shoulder (1). 5. Gently pull on the wire to remove the terminal through the back of the connector (2). Note: Never use force to remove a terminal from a connector. 6. Inspect the terminal and connector for damage. Repair as necessary. Refer to Repairing Connector Terminals (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Repairing Connector Terminals). 7. Reform the lock tang (2) and reset terminal in connector body. 8. Close secondary locks and join connector halves. 9. Verify that circuit is complete and working satisfactorily. 10. Perform system check. Delphi Connectors (12-Way) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9124 Delphi Connectors (12-Way) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) and slide the lever lock away from the connector body. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs on the dress cover of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool release all of the locking tabs. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9125 4. Release the lower wire dress cover locking tab. 5. Release the upper wire dress cover locking tab. 6. Once the locks are unlocked, lift the dress cover off. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9126 Note: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 7. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the locking tabs on both sides of the TPA. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. 8. Remove the nose piece by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the locking tabs on both sides of the nose piece. Gently pry the nose piece out of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9127 9. Insert the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Delphi Connectors (Steering Gear) Delphi Connectors (Steering Gear) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9128 Removal Procedure 1. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the locking tab on the connector. 2. Push down the locking tab to release the connector. The small flat-bladed tool may need to be pushed down and angled back slightly to depress the locking tab. Pull on the connector body while releasing the locking tab to disconnect the connector. FCI Connectors (Lever Lock) FCI Connectors (Lever Lock) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9129 Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. 1. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. 2. The release tab is located on the top of the wiredress cover. 3. View of connector in released position. 4. Disconnect the connector from the component. 5. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the dress cover. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs and remove the dress cover. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9130 6. Use a small flat-blade tool to slide the terminal position assurance (TPA) up one notch on both ends of the connector. The TPA is located underneath the wire dress cover. For the larger terminals insert the J 38125-556 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. For the smaller terminals insert the J 38125-560 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9131 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. FCI (SIR) FCI Connectors (SIR) Removal Procedure Note: The orange CPA must be released first to disconnect or to connect the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9132 1. Lift the orange CPA vertically (avoid lifting on an angle to the connector) approximately 4 mm to release the connector. Use a small flat-bladed tool to help release the orange CPA. The orange CPA can also be released manually without any tools. 2. Grab the connector on both sides and lift the connector vertically to disconnect the connector. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9133 1. Lift the orange CPA vertically approximately 4 mm before installing the connector. Use a small flat-bladed tool to help release the orange CPA. The orange CPA can also be released manually without any tools. 2. Line up the connector key tabs with the initiator key slots. Grab the connector on both sides and push the connector down into the initiator connector sub assembly until fully seated. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9134 3. After the connector is fully seated, push down the orange CPA with your thumb. Push down until the orange CPA is touching the yellow cover on the connector. FEP Connectors (Steering Gear) FEP Connectors (Steering Gear) Removal Procedure 1. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the locking tab on the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9135 2. Push down the locking tab to release the connector. The small flat-bladed tool may need to be pushed down and angled back slightly to depress the locking tab. Pull on the connector body while releasing the locking tab to disconnect the connector. JST Connectors JST Connectors Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. While depressing the lock, remove the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9136 2. Locate the two indents of the terminal position assurance (TPA) located on the bottom of the connector body. Note: The TPA cannot be removed from the connector while there are terminals present in the connector body. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to very carefully raise the TPA on both sides of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9137 4. View of the TPA when removed from the connector body. 5. Use the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the left side of the terminal release cavity as shown in the graphic. Use the tool to move the terminal release to the right with a gentle prying motion. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Kostal Connectors (Glow Plug Control Module) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9138 Kostal Connectors (Glow Plug Control Module) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure View of typical connector. View of connector in released position. 1. Locate the assist lever at the back of the connector. Move the assist lever to the rear position. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9139 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove the dress cover. 4. Slide the dress cover forward and off of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9140 5. The terminal positive assurance (TPA) is located in the front and rear of the connector. Note: The front TPA cannot be removed from the connector. Only move it to the preset position. 6. Use a small flat-blade tool to move the front TPA to the preset position, outboard approximately 0.125 in. (3 mm). 7. Use a small flat-blade tool to completely remove the rear TPA from the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9141 8. Use the J 38125-24 or the J 38125-560 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 9. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Kostal Connectors (Transmission) Kostal Connectors (Transmission) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9142 1. While depressing the lock, twist and remove the connector from the component. 2. Locate the terminal position assurance (TPA). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9143 Note: The TPA cannot be removed from the connector while there are terminals present in the connector body. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to push the TPA until it bottoms out. 4. Use the J 38125-28 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal cavity as shown in the graphic. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 5. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Terminal Replacement Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9144 After the terminal is crimped to the wire, perform the following procedure in order to replace the terminal. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. Locate the terminal position assurance (TPA). 4. Use a small flat-blade tool to push the TPA until it bottoms out. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9145 5. Ensure the TPA is fully seated. The TPA should be centered and flush with the connector body when viewed. Molex Connectors Molex Connectors Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the top of the wire dress cover. Slide the CPA forward. 2. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9146 3. The lever should be in the full forward position. 4. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9147 5. Remove the dress cover by using a flat bladed tool to release the dress cover locking tabs and lift up on the dress cover. 6. Cut the tie wrap that holds the wires to the connector body. 7. Use a small flat-blade tool to pry one side of the nose piece up to the pre-stage position. When the nose piece is in the pre-staged position, the nose piece will be raised above the connector body the length of the step in the nose piece. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9148 8. Use a small flat-blade tool to pry the other side of the piece to the pre-stage position. If the nose piece is higher than the first step in the nose piece, gently push down on the nose piece until it meets with resistance from the connector body, you should feel the nose piece click into position. 9. Insert the J 38125-213 into the small terminal release hole on the nose piece and gently pull on the back of the wire. 10. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Refer to the terminal crimping procedure in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit. Terminal Replacement Procedure After the terminal is crimped to the wire, perform the following procedure in order to replace the terminal. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9149 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the connector disassembly procedure. Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the connector body and pull the CPA out. The CPA is on the wire harness side of connector. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Use a small flat-bladed tool to gently pry off the dress cover by inserting the tool under the cover opposite the harness side and prying up. 4. Remove the cover. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9150 5. Using a small flat-bladed tool, push on the side of the nose piece retainer while pushing the nose piece forward with your thumb. This will release the terminal position assurance (TPA). 6. Insert the J 38125-12A into the corresponding terminal release cavity. The release cavities are the 2 center rows of cavities on one half of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9151 7. Pressing the J 38125-12A tool in the release cavity of the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and crimper in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. Slide the lever lock away from the connector body. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs on the dress cover of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool release all of the locking tabs. 4. Once the locks are unlocked, lift the dress cover off. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9152 Note: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 5. Release the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the blue locking tabs on both ends of the connector. Gently slide the TPA up to the released position on both ends. 6. For the larger terminals insert the J 38125-13A tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. For the smaller terminals insert the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9153 View of the release tool being used for the larger terminals. View of the release tool being used for the larger terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9154 View of the release tool being used for the smaller terminals. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9155 Side view of connector. View of top of connector. 1. Locate the assist lever and lock on the top of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9156 2. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. 3. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9157 4. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the rear of the connector. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. 5. Once the locking tabs are unlocked, slide the inner connector out of the rear of the connector housing. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9158 6. Use the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by pressing on the tang. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Repairing Connector Terminals Repairing Connector Terminals Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Use the following repair procedures in order to repair the following: * Push to Seat terminals * Pull to Seat terminals Some terminals do not require all of the steps shown. Skip the steps that do not apply for your terminal repair. The J-38125 contains further information. 1. Cut off the terminal between the core and the insulation crimp. Minimize any wire loss. For cable seal terminals, remove the seal. 2. Apply the correct cable seal per gauge size of the wire, if used. Slide the seal back along the wire in order to enable insulation removal. 3. Remove the insulation. 4. For sealed terminals only, align the seal with the end of the cable insulation. 5. Position the strip in the terminal. For sealed terminals, position the strip and seal in the terminal. 6. Hand crimp the core wings. 7. Hand crimp the insulation wings. For sealed terminals, hand crimp the insulation wings around the seal and the cable. 8. Solder all of the hand crimp terminals excepting Micro-Pack 100.64 size. Soldering Micro-Pack 100 World terminals may damage the terminal. Sumitomo Connectors Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9159 Sumitomo Connectors Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9160 3. Remove the dress cover by using a flat-blade tool to release the connector locking tabs and pulling off the dress cover. 4. Relieve the tension on the nose piece retainers by inserting J 38125-12A into the single retainer slot on the end of the nose piece and gently prying out the locking tab. Repeat the process for both of the nose piece locking tabs on the opposite side of the nose piece. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9161 5. Once the nose piece retainers are relaxed, use the J 38125-552 to pull up the nose piece by hooking the tool under the nose piece and pulling up. The nose piece should raise slightly. 6. On the opposite side of the nose piece, use the J 38125-552 to pull up the nose piece by hooking the tool under the nose piece and pulling up. The nose piece should release completely. If the nose piece does not come off, repeat the procedure on the opposite side. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9162 7. The illustration above identifies the entry canal where the terminal release tool will be inserted, and the terminal cavity. * Terminal (1) * Entry Canal (2) 8. Insert the J 38125-553 tool into the entry canal and pry up on the terminal retainer. The terminal retainer is a small plastic piece on the top of the terminal. The terminal retainer must be held up while the terminal is pulled out of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9163 9. The illustration shows a cutaway view of the connector to aid the technician in releasing the terminal retainer. 10. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Refer to the terminal crimping procedure in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit. Terminal Replacement Procedure After the terminal is crimped to the wire, perform the following procedure in order to replace the terminal. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the connector disassembly procedure. Terminal Position Assurance Locks Terminal Position Assurance Locks The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9164 2. Insert the J 38125-11A tool into the cavity on the lower right hand face of the connector until the terminal release tang access panel slides over. 3. Ensure that the terminal release tang access panel is in the correct location to access the terminals. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9165 5. Insert the J 38125-11A into the terminal release tang access slot located behind the access panel of the connector and press down on the terminal while carefully pulling the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component by pressing down on the connector position assurance (CPA). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9166 2. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting the tool in the small recess on the side of the connector and pushing up until the TPA releases from the connector body. The TPA should raise just slightly. Do not try to remove the TPA. Note: The TPA on this connector cannot be removed unless the terminals are removed first. The TPA will come out of the connector body, but only slightly. When the TPA is slightly raised the terminals can be removed. Using excessive force to remove the TPA with the terminals still in the connector will damage the connector. 3. Repeat the process for the other side of the connector. 4. Ensure that the TPA is in the proper position to remove the terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9167 5. While pushing the terminal forward, insert the J 38125-24 in the release cavity above the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9168 2. Insert a small flat-blade tool in the slot below the front loaded terminal position assurance (TPA) and pry up. 3. Remove the TPA by pulling it out of the connector. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-553 on a slight upward angle into the cavity below the terminal to be removed. Ensure that the pointed on the end of the tool is facing the bottom of the terminal and it stays in contact with the terminal until it stops on the plastic terminal retainer. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9169 6. Gently pry the plastic terminal retainer down and carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9170 1. While depressing the lock, pull the two connector halves apart. Note: The TPA is fragile and may break if not done carefully. 2. Use a small flat-blade tool to very carefully push the terminal position assurance (TPA) towards the face of the connector on both sides of the connector. 3. View of the male half of the connector with female terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9171 4. View of the female half of the connector with male terminals. 5. Use the J 38125-215 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. View of the female half of the connector with male terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9172 7. View of the male half of the connector with female terminals. 8. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers A circuit breaker is a protective device that is designed to open the circuit when a current load is in excess of the rated breaker capacity. If there is a short or other type of overload condition in the circuit, the excessive current will open the circuit between the circuit breaker terminals. Two types of circuit breakers are used. Circuit Breaker - This type opens when excessive current passes through it for a period of time. It closes again after a few seconds, and if the cause of the high current is still present, it will open again. The circuit breaker will continue to cycle open and closed until the condition causing the high current is removed. Positive Temperature Coefficient (PTC) Circuit Breaker - This type greatly increases its resistance when excessive current passes through it. The excessive current heats the PTC device, as the device heats its resistance increases. Eventually the resistance gets so high that the circuit is effectively open. Unlike the ordinary circuit breaker the PTC unit will not reset until the circuit is opened, by removing the voltage from its terminals. Once the voltage is removed the circuit breaker will re-close within a second or 2. Circuit Protection - Fuses Circuit Protection - Fuses Special Tools EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM) For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9173 The fuse is the most common method of an automotive wiring circuit protection. Whenever there is an excessive amount of current flowing through a circuit the fusible element will melt and create an open or incomplete circuit. Fuses are a one time protection device and must be replaced each time the circuit is overloaded. To determine if a fuse is open, remove the suspected fuse and examine if the element in the fuse is broken (2). If not broken (1), also check for continuity using a Digital Multimeter (DMM) or a continuity tester. If the element is broken or continuity is suspect, replace the fuse with one of equal current rating. Circuit Protection - Fusible Links Circuit Protection - Fusible Links Special Tools EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM) For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Tools and Equipment). Fusible link is wire designed to melt and break continuity when excessive current is applied. It is often located between or near the battery and starter or electrical center. Use a continuity tester or a Digital Multimeter (DMM) at each end of the wire containing the fusible link in order to determine if it is broken. If broken, it must be replaced with fusible link of the same gauge size. Repairing a Fusible Link Note: Fusible links cut longer than 225 mm (approximately 9 in) will not provide sufficient overload protection. Flat Wire Repairs Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9174 Flat Wire Repairs The flat wire within the flex wiring harness is not serviceable. If an open or short exists within the flex wiring harness the complete harness must be replaced. GMLAN Wiring Repairs GMLAN Wiring Repairs Special Tools * EL-38125-10 - Splice Sleeve Crimping Tool * J 38125-5 - Ultra Torch Special Tool * DuraSeal splice sleeves * A wire stripping tool For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Tools and Equipment). The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: * A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. * A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The GM Local Area Network (GMLAN) System requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working on GMLAN connectors and terminals. GMLAN Repairs Note: When making a repair to any GMLAN network, the original wire length after the repair must be the same length as before the repair. If the network is a twisted pair, the twist must be maintained after the repair is completed. GMLAN has 2 types of networks, low speed and high speed. Low speed GMLAN has a single wire and works at slow speeds. High speed GMLAN has 2 wires in a twisted pair and works at higher speeds. For more information on GMLAN, refer to Data Link Communications Description and Operation ( See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Information Bus/Description and Operation). GMLAN Connector Terminal Repair Note: A terminated lead can be used to replace damaged connector terminals for both high speed and low speed GMLAN systems. When making a connector terminal repair on a GMLAN high speed system with twisted pair wires, do not untwist the wires more than necessary to make the repair. If the individual terminals are damaged on any GMLAN connection, use the appropriate connector repair procedure in order to repair the terminal. Refer to Connector Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Connector Repairs) for the appropriate connector repair procedure. GMLAN Wire Repair Note: Refer to Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Wiring Repairs) in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gauge size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and EL-38125-10 - tool. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the DuraSeal splice sleeves. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9175 Note: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: * Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. * Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. * Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert to regional wiring gauge size. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the EL-38125-10 - tool in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the splice sleeve crimp tool. The crimp tool has four nests, one for each color. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9176 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs Caution: Do not solder repairs under any circumstances as this could result in the air reference being obstructed. If the heated oxygen sensor pigtail wiring, connector, or terminal is damaged the entire oxygen sensor assembly must be replaced. Do not attempt to repair the wiring, connector, or terminals. In order for the sensor to function properly it must have a clean air reference. This clean air reference is obtained by way of the oxygen sensor signal and heater wires. Any attempt to repair the wires, connectors or terminals could result in the obstruction of the air reference and degrade oxygen sensor performance. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9177 The following guidelines should be used when servicing the heated oxygen sensor: * Do not apply contact cleaner or other materials to the sensor or vehicle harness connectors. These materials may get into the sensor, causing poor performance. Also, the sensor pigtail and harness wires must not be damaged in such a way that the wires inside are exposed. This could provide a path for foreign materials to enter the sensor and cause performance problems. * Neither the sensor nor vehicle lead wires should be bent sharply or kinked. Sharp bends, kinks, etc., could block the reference air path through the lead wire. * Do not remove or defeat the oxygen sensor ground wire (where applicable). Vehicles that utilize the ground wire sensor may rely on this ground as the only ground contact to the sensor. Removal of the ground wire will also cause poor engine performance. * To prevent damage due to water intrusion, be sure that the peripheral seal remains intact on the vehicle harness connector. High Temperature Wiring Repairs High Temperature Wiring Repairs Special Tools * EL-38125-10 - Splice Sleeve Crimping Tool * J 38125-5 - Ultra Torch * DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Tools and Equipment). High Temperature Wiring Wiring that is exposed to high temperatures, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time may use materials i.e. wires, connectors, and shielding that has a higher heat rating than typical wiring. When making a repair in a high temperature area observe the following: * Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature to replace any damaged wire. * Replace any heat shielding that is removed. * Cover any DuraSeal splice sleeves with SCT1 shrink tubing. * After making a wiring repair, ensure that the location of the wiring is not moved closer to the heat source. Identifying High Temperature Wiring Wiring that is exposed to high temperature, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time need special considerations when making wiring repairs. Areas that may be exposed to higher temperatures can be identified by heat resistant materials that are being used in those areas. These materials may include heat reflective tape, moon tape, and high temperature shrink tubing. Also conduit and other protective coverings may be used. Because conduit or similar coverings are used throughout the vehicle regardless of the temperature, it may be necessary for the technician to determine if an area is exposed to excessive heat before making a wiring repair. Obvious areas of consideration would be any area located near the exhaust manifolds, catalytic converter, and exhaust pipes. Items Required * DuraSeal splice sleeves to crimp and seal connections * High temperature SCT1 shrink tubing to protect the splice sleeves * Terminated leads or pigtails * The correct tools to remove the terminals from the connectors Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature of the same or larger gauge size as the original wire when repair damage wire. Also replace any reflective tape that you remove during the repair. High Temperature Wire Repair Note: Refer to Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Wiring Repairs) in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature rating of the same gauge size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the EL-38125-10 - tool and then encapsulate the splice sleeve using the high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9178 Note: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: * Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. * Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. * Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert to regional wiring gauge size. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Slide a section of high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing down the length of wire to be spliced. Ensure that the shrink tubing will not interfere with the splice procedure. 5. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 6. Use the EL-38125-10 - tool in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the splice sleeve crimp tool. The crimp tool has four nests, one for each color. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9179 7. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 8. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 9. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 10. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 11. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9180 12. Center the high temperature SCT1 shrink tube over the DuraSeal splice sleeve. 13. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the high temperature heat shrink tubing. 14. Gradually move the heat from the center to the open end of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. 15. Replace any reflective tape and clips that may have been remove during the repair. Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation If the wire insulation has been chafed, or broken, enough to show the conductive portion of the wire, and the wire is not damaged, determine the length of insulation that needs to be repaired. If the repair is less than 280 mm (11 in), cut the wire within the damaged area. Than slide the appropriate heat shrink tubing (listed below) over the wire, and repair the wire by splicing the wires together. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves). Once the wire is spliced together slide heat shrink tubing over the damaged area and apply heat to seal the repaired wire. If the wire is damaged, or the damaged area is larger than 280 mm (11 in), than replace the damaged wire by splicing in a new section of wire. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9181 SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs Special Tools * EL-38125-10 - Splice Sleeve Crimping Tool * J 38125-5 - Ultra Torch * DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Tools and Equipment). The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: * A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. * A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides the necessary low resistance contact integrity for these sensitive, low energy circuits. The Supplemental Inflatable Restraint (SIR) System/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working with the SIR/SRS, and the wiring components, such as connectors and terminals. SIR/SRS Connector Repair (Plastic Body and Terminal Metal Pin) Note: Do not use the terminals in the kit in order to replace damaged SIR/SRS system terminals. Use either an SIR/SRS pigtail or a terminated lead from the SIR Repair Kit Tray. The terminals in the SIR/SRS system are made with a special plating. This plating provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. Pigtail repair packs are available for SIR/SRS connectors with eight or less terminals. Only the connector body is available for connectors with more than eight terminals. Terminated leads can be used to replace damaged terminals when replacing the connector body. SIR/SRS Component Wire Pigtail Repair Note: Do not make wire, connector, or terminal repairs on components with wire pigtails. A wire pigtail is a wire or wires attached directly to the device, not by a connector. If a wiring pigtail is damaged, you must replace the entire component, with pigtail. The inflatable restraint steering wheel module coil is an example of a pigtail component. SIR/SRS Wire Repair Note: Refer to Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Wiring Repairs) in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9182 If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gauge size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and EL-38125-10 - tool. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the DuraSeal splice sleeves. Note: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: * Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. * Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. * Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert to regional wiring gauge size. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the EL-38125-10 - tool in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the splice sleeve crimp tool. The crimp tool has four nests, one for each color. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9183 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Connector Position Assurance (CPA) The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of a connector. CPAs are used in all SIR System connectors and also in some connectors of other systems. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals of a connection. Terminal Position Assurance (TPA) The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9184 Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Special Tools * EL-38125-10 - Splice Sleeve Crimping Tool * J 38125-5 - Ultra Torch * DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Tools and Equipment). Note: Use only DuraSeal splice sleeves. Other splice sleeves may not protect the splice from moisture or provide a good electrical connection. Use DuraSeal splice sleeves to form a one-to-one splice on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. Use DuraSeal splice sleeves where there is special requirements such as moisture sealing. Follow the instructions below in order to splice copper wire using DuraSeal splice sleeves. Note: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: * Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. * Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. * Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert to regional wiring gauge size. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9185 5. Use the EL-38125-10 - tool in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the splice sleeve crimp tool. The crimp tool has four nests, one for each color. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9186 * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Splicing Inline Harness Diodes Splicing Inline Harness Diodes Many vehicle electrical systems use a diode to isolate circuits and protect the components from voltage spikes. When installing a new diode use the following procedure. 1. Open the harness. * If the harness is taped, remove the tape. * To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing seam ripper (available from sewing supply stores) in order to cut open the harness. * If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the diode. 2. If the diode is taped to the harness, remove all of the tape. 3. Check and record the current flow direction and orientation of diode. 4. Remove the inoperative diode from the harness with a suitable soldering tool. Note: If the diode is located next to a connector terminal remove the terminal(s) from the connector to prevent damage from the soldering tool. 5. Carefully strip away a section of insulation next to the old soldered portion of the wire(s). Do not remove any more than is needed to attach the new diode. 6. Check current flow direction of the new diode, being sure to install the diode with correct bias. Reference the appropriate service manual wiring schematic to obtain the correct diode installation position. 7. Attach the new diode to the wire(s) using 60/40 rosin core solder. Before soldering attach some heat sinks (aluminum alligator clips) across the diode wire ends to protect the diode from excessive heat. Follow the manufacturer's instruction for the soldering equipment. 8. Reinstall terminal(s) into the connector body if previously removed. Note: To prevent shorts to ground and water intrusion, completely cover all exposed wire and diode attachment points with tape. 9. Tape the diode to the harness or connector using electrical tape. Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable Twisted/shielded cable is used in order to protect wiring from electrical noise. Two-conductor cable of this construction is used between the radio and the Delco-Bose(R) speaker/amplifier units and other applications where low level, sensitive signals must be carried. Follow the instructions below in order to repair the twisted/shielded cable. 1. Remove the outer jacket (1). Use care not to cut into the drain wire of the mylar tape. 2. Unwrap the tape. Do not remove the tape. Use the tape in order to rewrap the twisted conductors after the splice is made. 3. Prepare the splice. Untwist the conductors and follow the instructions for Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves). Staggering the splices by 65 mm (2.5 in) is recommended. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9187 Note: Apply the mylar tape with the aluminum side inward. This ensures good electrical contact with the drain wire. 4. Re-assemble the cable. * Rewrap the conductors with the mylar tape. If the mylar tape is damaged, use 3M product AL-36FR to replace the damaged mylar tape. * Use caution not to wrap the drain wire in the tape (1). * Follow the splicing instructions for copper wire and splice the drain wire. * Wrap the drain wire around the conductors and tape with electrical tape to replace the outer insulation. 5. Tape over the entire cable. Use a winding motion when you apply the tape. Wiring Repairs Wiring Repairs The Wiring Repairs section contains the following types of wiring repair information. Using these elements together will make wiring repair faster and easier: * Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections) * Flat Wire Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Flat Wire Repairs) * GMLAN Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/GMLAN Wiring Repairs) * High Temperature Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/High Temperature Wiring Repairs) * Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs) * Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves) * Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable) * Splicing Inline Harness Diodes (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Inline Harness Diodes) * SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs) US English/Metric Conversion US English/Metric Conversion Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9188 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9189 Basic Digital Multimeter Requirements Basic Digital Multimeter Requirements Digital Multimeter (DMM) Basic Requirements Service information is validated using digital multimeters that meet or exceed the following requirements. Using a multimeter that does not meet these basic requirements may give inaccurate readings which could lead to an incorrect diagnosis. Display and Settings 1. Four digits displayed 2. Voltage, amperage, resistance, frequency, diode test settings, and min-max function 3. Display positive and negative values Voltage 1. Have at least 10 Mohm input impedance 2. Test a DC voltage range of 0.1-1000 V. 3. Test an AC voltage range of 0.1-1000 V. Amperage 1. Test a DC amperage range of 0.1µA-10 A. 2. Test an AC amperage range of 0.1µA-10 A. Resistance Test a resistance range of 0.1 ohm-40 Mohm and displays infinite for a value greater than 40 Mohm (O.L. (Over-load)) Frequency Test for a frequency range of 0.5 HZ-199 K HZ Diode Test 1. Apply at least 1 mA when performing the diode bias test 2. Display the break over voltage drop (0-3 V) of a forward biased diode 3. Display infinite (O.L. (Over-load)) when a diode is reverse biased Min-Max Readings 1. Can update at a 1 ms sample rate 2. Saves and displays minimum and maximum values Testing Ground and Low Reference Circuits Testing Ground and Low Reference Circuits Because a test lamp can light with up to 200 ohm in a ground or low reference circuit they are not recommended to be used for this type of test. A low impedance test lamp can light and indicate the circuit is good when there is as much as 20-30 ohm present, while a high impedance test lamp can light with up to 200 ohm present in the circuit. This is why the Digital Multi-Meter (DMM) is used when validating a ground or low reference circuit continuity. When using the DMM there are many vehicle conditions that can affect the ground and low reference continuity testing. If these conditions are not met, a ground or low reference circuit test can fail on a good circuit. This may cause longer diagnosis time and incorrect component replacement. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9190 Any current flow through a ground or low reference circuit, while being tested, will skew the DMM continuity reading, or display a reading higher than when there is no current flowing. Performing a ground or low reference circuit continuity test, in reference to the vehicles battery negative terminal, will have the highest risk of failing a good ground or low reference circuit test than any other ground reference point. The best ground test points would be a control module housing (if the control modules housing is metal and grounded), door jamb striker (if attached to metal), under dash metal frame work, engine block, or body ground studs (other than where the negative battery cable is attached). A typical DMM ground or low reference circuit continuity reading can be as high as 100 ohm with the ignition ON, and drop to 15-25 ohm after the ignition is turned OFF. The reading will drop below 10 ohm after 30-40 seconds, then below 5 ohm after 60 seconds. Once the vehicle completely goes to sleep (generally 3-10 minutes) the reading will drop below 0.3 ohm. The following list of conditions may need to be met to ensure a valid continuity reading on a ground or low reference circuit: * Ignition OFF * Key out of the ignition switch (when not equipped with keyless entry and remote start) * Retained Accessory Power (RAP) OFF (open and close the driver door after ignition OFF) * Battery charger set at a 2 A or less charge rate * Scan tool not communicating with any vehicle control module (in some cases it may need to be disconnected from the DLC) * All entry doors closed * Headlamps OFF (auto headlamps disabled) * Any delay lighting OFF * HVAC after blow OFF * Any accessory that can work when the ignition is OFF * Wait up to 60 seconds (after all other listed conditions are met) Activating the DOOR LOCK function with a key fob can greatly reduce the time to achieve a valid ground or low reference continuity test result. Terminal Wiring Repair Terminal Wiring Repair Special Tools * EL-38125-10 - Splice Sleeve Crimp Tool * EL-38125-580 - Terminal Release Tool Kit * J-38125-5 - Ultra Torch * EL-35616 - Connector Test Adapter Kit For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Tools and Equipment). Note: All repairs near the engine manifold, turbo engine and all exhaust pipes should follow the High Temperature Wiring Repair procedures. 1. Find the appropriate connector end view within the connector end view section. The connector end view has the following information: * Diagnostic probe tool * Terminal release tool * Terminal/terminated lead part numbers 2. Determine if a terminal is damaged. Note: Not using the proper test kit probe may cause damage to the terminal(s) that are probed. * Locate the diagnostic probe tool from the connector end view. The connector end view describes the color and part number to help the technician find and use the correct tool. * Connect the probe tool to the Digital Multimeter. * Insert the probe tool into the cavity and follow the procedures from the Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter). 3. Disconnect the connector body to perform the repair. Note: Several procedures for specific connector bodies are called out in Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Wiring Repairs). Use the following repair procedures to repair the following terminals: Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9191 Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack))Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Push to Seat))Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Pull to Seat))Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W))Delphi Connectors (Micro.64) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Micro .64) )Delphi Connectors (12-Way) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (12-Way))Delphi Connectors (Steering Gear) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Steering Gear)) * The TPA and CPA should be removed before releasing the terminal for the connector body. * Look at the connector end view to locate the cavity of the damaged terminal and find the proper terminal release tool from the terminal release tool kit. Note: Using the incorrect terminal release tool can damage the connector body. * Insert the terminal release tool into the cavity. Note: Some terminals have a lever that must be disengaged before the terminal can be released. Gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Terminated Lead Repair Terminated Lead Repair Special Tools * EL-38125-10 - Splice Sleeve Crimp Tool * EL-38125-580 - Terminal Release Tool Kit * J-38125-5 - Ultra Torch * EL-35616 - Connector Test Adapter Kit For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Tools and Equipment). Note: All repairs near the engine manifold, turbo engine and all exhaust pipes should follow the High Temperature Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/High Temperature Wiring Repairs) procedures. Terminated leads are terminals that are crimped onto wires. The terminated lead can be used throughout the vehicle since it is designed for temperatures up to 150°C. The length of the wire is 450 mm. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9192 The DuraSeal splice sleeve has the following 2 critical features: * A special heat shrink tubing that environmentally seals the splice. The shrink tubing contains a sealing adhesive inside the shrink tubing. * A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp that provides the necessary contact integrity for sensitive low energy circuits. 1. Use the connector end view to identify the correct terminated lead. 2. The terminated lead package should include a DuraSeal splice sleeve. If not, use the chart to identify the correct part. 3. Open the harness by removing any tape: Use a sewing seam ripper, or a comparable tool, to cut open the harness, to avoid wire insulation damage. 4. Depending on how many terminals need repairs, cut the terminal and wire back at least 40 mm. Try to keep the harness wire length the same. If more than one terminated lead is required, stagger the lengths by 40 mm. This helps reduce the bundle size of the wire harness. 5. Use the EL-38125-10 - tool in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the splice sleeve crimp tool. The crimp tool has four nests, one for each color. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9193 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the J-38125-5 - ultra torch , apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures Fuse Block: Procedures Ground Repair Electrical Grounds Proper electrical system function relies on secure, positive, corrosion-free ground connections. Loose, stripped, or corroded connections increase the possibility of improper system function and loss of module communication. These conditions may also lead to unnecessary repairs and component replacements. In general, electrical ground connections are accomplished using one, or a combination of, three attachment methods: * Welded M6 stud and nut * Welded M6 nut and bolt * Welded M8 nut and bolt Caution: Use GM approved replacement fasteners with conductive finish for electrical ground repair. Determine which attachment method is used, and carry out the appropriate repair. M6 Weld Stud Replacement 1. Select a location adjacent the damaged or missing M6 ground stud having 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance behind the panel surface and 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance surrounding the M6 rivet stud flange. 2. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, remove any grease from the repair site and allow to dry. Note: Ensure 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance is maintained behind the panel to be drilled. 3. Drill a 10 mm (0.40 in) diameter hole through the panel. 4. Carefully remove paint and primer from the area surrounding the rivet stud flange until bare metal is visible. Caution: Use GM approved replacement fasteners with conductive finish for electrical ground repair. 5. Select a replacement conductive M6 rivet stud. Refer to GM parts catalog for the correct part number and application. 6. Using a rivet stud installer, install the replacement conductive M6 rivet stud. 7. Ensure the new rivet stud is securely fastened, with no detectable movement. Note: The rivet stud and surrounding panel area must be properly refinished prior to the installation of the ground terminal and nut to maintain positive electrical grounding. 8. Completely wrap the threads of the rivet stud with painters tape or equivalent. 9. Refinish the repair area using an anti-corrosion primer. Refer to Anti-Corrosion Treatment and Repair (). 10. Allow the refinished repair area to cure sufficiently before removing the protective material applied to the rivet stud threads. 11. Remove the painters tape or equivalent from the rivet stud threads. 12. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, thoroughly clean the rivet stud threads to remove any adhesive and allow to dry. 13. Carefully remove any corrosion from the electrical ground wire terminal. Refer to Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections). 14. Using a small brush, apply Dielectric Lubricant GM P/N 12377900 (Canadian P/N 10953529) to the new conductive M6 rivet stud threads. 15. Install the ground terminal to the new rivet stud. 16. Select a new, conductive M6 nut. Refer to GM parts catalog for the correct part number and application. Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener Caution). 17. Install the M6 nut and tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb in). 18. Check for proper system operation. M6 Weld Nut Caution: Use GM approved replacement fasteners with conductive finish for electrical ground repair. 1. If the M6 weld nut at the electrical ground location is damaged or stripped, a new, conductive self-threading M7 bolt may be used to secure the ground terminal. Refer to GM parts catalog for the correct part number and application. 2. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, remove any grease from the surface surrounding the weld nut and allow to dry. 3. Remove any loose metal particles from the damaged or stripped weld nut with a stiff brush. 4. Using a small brush, apply Dielectric Lubricant GM P/N 12377900 (Canadian P/N 10953529) to the new, conductive, self-threading M7 bolt Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 9196 threads. 5. Carefully remove any corrosion from the electrical ground terminal. Refer to Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections). 6. Install the electrical ground terminal to the new, conductive M7 bolt. Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener Caution). 7. Install the M7 bolt and tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb in). 8. Check for proper system operation. M6 Weld Nut (Alternative Repair) Caution: Use GM approved replacement fasteners with conductive finish for electrical ground repair. 1. If the electrical ground location is accessible from both sides of the panel, a conductive M6 bolt and a conductive M6 nut may be used to secure the electrical ground terminal. Refer to GM parts catalog for the correct part number and application. 2. Select a location adjacent the damaged M6 weld nut having 20 mm (0.79 ) clearance behind the panel surface and 20 mm (0.79 ) clearance surrounding the new electrical ground site. 3. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, remove any grease from the surface surrounding the ground location and allow to dry. Note: Ensure 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance is maintained behind the panel to be drilled. 4. Drill a 10 mm (0.40 in) diameter hole through the panel. 5. Carefully remove paint and primer from the area surrounding the new ground site until bare metal is visible. 6. Using a small brush, apply Dielectric Lubricant GM P/N 12377900 (Canadian P/N 10953529) to the new, conductive M6 bolt threads. 7. Carefully remove any corrosion from the electrical ground terminal. Refer to Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections). 8. Install the electrical ground terminal and new, conductive M6 bolt to the ground location. Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener Caution). 9. Install the conductive M6 nut and tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb in). Note: The repair area must be properly refinished to maintain positive electrical grounding. 10. Refinish the repair area using an anti-corrosion primer. Refer to Anti-Corrosion Treatment and Repair (). 11. Check for proper system operation. M8 Weld Nut Caution: Use GM approved replacement fasteners with conductive finish for electrical ground repair. 1. If the M8 weld nut electrical ground location is accessible from both sides of the panel, a conductive M8 bolt and a conductive M8 nut may be used to secure the ground terminal. Refer to GM parts catalog for the correct part numbers and application. 2. Select a location adjacent to M8 weld nut having 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance behind the panel surface and 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance surrounding the new electrical ground site. 3. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, remove any grease from the surface surrounding the ground location and allow to dry. Note: Ensure 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance is maintained behind the panel to be drilled. 4. Drill a 10 mm (0.40 in) diameter hole through the panel. 5. Carefully remove paint and primer from the area surrounding the new ground site until bare metal is visible. 6. Using a small brush, apply Dielectric Lubricant GM P/N 12377900 (Canadian P/N 10953529) to the new, conductive M8 bolt threads. 7. Carefully remove any corrosion from the electrical ground terminal. Refer to Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections). 8. Install the electrical ground terminal and new, conductive M8 bolt to the ground location. Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener Caution). 9. Install the conductive M8 nut and tighten to 22 Nm (16 lb ft). Note: The repair area must be properly refinished to maintain positive electrical grounding. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 9197 10. Refinish the repair area using an anti-corrosion primer. Refer to Anti-Corrosion Treatment and Repair (). 11. Check for proper system operation. M8 Weld Nut (Alternative Repair) Caution: Use GM approved replacement fasteners with conductive finish for electrical ground repair. 1. If the M8 weld nut electrical ground location is not accessible from both sides of the panel, a conductive M6 rivet stud and a conductive M6 nut may be used to secure the ground terminal. Refer to GM parts catalog for the correct part numbers and application. 2. Select a location adjacent the damaged M8 weld nut having 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance behind the panel surface and 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance surrounding the new, conductive M6 rivet stud flange. 3. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, remove any grease from the repair site and allow to dry. Note: Ensure 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance is maintained behind the panel to be drilled. 4. Drill a 10 mm (0.40 in) diameter hole through the panel. 5. Carefully remove paint and primer from the area surrounding the rivet stud flange until bare metal is visible. 6. Using a rivet stud installer, install the replacement conductive M6 rivet stud. 7. Ensure the new rivet stud is securely fastened, with no detectable movement. Note: The rivet stud and surrounding panel area must be properly refinished prior to the installation of the ground terminal and nut to maintain positive electrical grounding. 8. Completely wrap the threads of the rivet stud with painters tape or equivalent. 9. Refinish the repair area using an anti-corrosion primer. Refer to Anti-Corrosion Treatment and Repair (). 10. Allow the refinished repair area to cure sufficiently before removing the protective material applied to the rivet stud threads. 11. Remove the painters tape or equivalent from the rivet stud threads. 12. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, thoroughly clean the rivet stud threads to remove any adhesive and allow to dry. 13. Carefully remove any corrosion from the electrical ground wire terminal. Refer to Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections). 14. Using a small brush, apply Dielectric Lubricant GM P/N 12377900 (Canadian P/N 10953529) to the new conductive M6 rivet stud threads. 15. Install the ground terminal to the new, conductive M6 rivet stud. Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener Caution). 16. Install the conductive M6 nut and tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb in). 17. Check for proper system operation. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 9198 Fuse Block: Removal and Replacement Accessory Wiring Junction Block Replacement Accessory Wiring Junction Block Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 9199 Instrument Panel Wiring Harness Junction Block Replacement Instrument Panel Wiring Harness Junction Block Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 9200 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Grounding Point > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair Grounding Point: Technical Service Bulletins Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 10-08-45-001B Date: October 25, 2010 Subject: Information for Electrical Ground Repair - Use New Replacement Fasteners with Conductive Finish Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (including Saturn) 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2011 model year and update the Warranty Information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 10-08-45-001A (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Electrical Ground Repair Overview Proper electrical system function relies on secure, stable and corrosion-free electrical ground connections. Loose, stripped, or corroded connections increase the possibility of improper system function and loss of module communication. These conditions may also lead to unnecessary repairs and component replacement. In general, electrical ground connections are accomplished using one, or a combination of the following attachment methods: - Welded M6 stud and nut - Welded M6 nut and bolt - Welded M8 nut and bolt Determine which attachment method is used and perform the appropriate or alternative repair as described in this bulletin. M6 Weld Stud Replacement Caution Use only the GM-approved replacement fasteners with conductive finish for electrical ground repair. 1. Select a location adjacent the damaged or missing M6 ground stud having 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance behind the panel surface and 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance surrounding the M6 conductive rivet stud flange. 2. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, remove any grease from the repair site and allow to dry. Note Ensure 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance is maintained behind the panel to be drilled. 3. Drill a 10 mm (0.40 in) diameter hole through the panel. 4. Remove paint and primer from the area surrounding the 10 mm (0.40 in) hole until bare metal is visible. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Grounding Point > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair > Page 9205 Important The M6 conductive rivet stud as shown, can accommodate a panel thickness range of 0.7-4.2 mm (0.03-0.17 in). If there are layers of sheet metal, they should be touching without any air gaps to ensure a good ground. 5. Select a M6 conductive rivet stud. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. Note Use the GE-50317 rivet stud tool kit. 6. Place the M6 conductive rivet stud (1) in the 10 mm (0.40 in) hole. Assemble the rivet stud tool (2) with the groove and flare side facing the rivet stud, then the washer and the M6 nut (3). 7. Using a wrench on the rivet stud tool, and a socket on the M6 nut, secure the M6 conductive rivet stud. 8. Ensure the rivet stud is securely fastened, WITHOUT ANY detectable movement. 9. Completely wrap the threads of the rivet stud with painters tape or equivalent. Note The rivet stud and surrounding panel area MUST BE properly refinished PRIOR to the installation of the ground wire terminal and conductive nut to maintain a secure, stable and corrosion-free electrical ground. 10. Refinish the repair area using an anti-corrosion primer. Refer to Anti-Corrosion Treatment and Repair in SI. 11. Allow the refinished repair area to cure sufficiently before removing the protective material applied to the rivet stud threads. 12. Remove the painters tape or equivalent from the rivet stud threads. 13. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, thoroughly clean the rivet stud threads to remove any adhesive and allow to dry. 14. Using a small brush, apply Dielectric Lubricant GM P/N 12377900 (Canadian P/N 10953529) to the threads of the M6 conductive rivet stud. Note Fretting corrosion is a build-up of insulating, oxidized wear debris that can form when there is a small motion between electrical contacts. The oxidized wear debris can accumulate at the electrical contact points causing the electrical resistance across the connection to increase. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Grounding Point > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair > Page 9206 15. Carefully remove ANY corrosion or contamination that may be present on the electrical ground wire terminal. 16. Install the electrical ground wire terminal to the rivet stud. 17. Select a M6 conductive nut. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 18. Install the M6 conductive nut to the rivet stud and: Tighten Tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb in). 19. Verify proper system operation. M6 Weld Nut Caution Use only the GM-approved replacement fasteners with conductive finish for electrical ground repair. 1. If the M6 weld nut at the electrical ground location is damaged or stripped, a M7 conductive self-threading bolt may be used to secure the ground wire terminal. 2. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, remove any grease from the surface surrounding the weld nut and allow to dry. 3. Remove any loose metal particles from the damaged or stripped weld nut with a stiff brush. 4. Select a M7 conductive self-threading bolt. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin 5. Using a small brush, apply Dielectric Lubricant GM P/N 12377900 (Canadian P/N 10953529) to the threads of the M7 conductive self-threading bolt. Note Fretting corrosion is a build-up of insulating, oxidized wear debris that can form when there is a small motion between electrical contacts. The oxidized wear debris can accumulate at the electrical contact points causing the electrical resistance across the connection to increase. 6. Carefully remove ANY corrosion or contamination that may be present on the electrical ground wire terminal. 7. Install the electrical ground wire terminal to the M7 conductive self-threading bolt. 8. Install the M7 conductive self-threading bolt and: Tighten Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb in). 9. Verify proper system operation. M6 Weld Nut Alternative Repair Caution Use only the GM-approved replacement fasteners with conductive finish for electrical ground repair. 1. If the electrical ground location is accessible from both sides of the panel, a M6 conductive bolt and a M6 conductive nut may be used to secure the electrical ground wire terminal. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 2. Select a location adjacent the damaged M6 weld nut having 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance behind the panel surface and 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance surrounding the new electrical ground site. 3. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, remove any grease from the surface surrounding the ground location and allow to dry. Note Ensure 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance is maintained behind the panel to be drilled. 4. Drill a 8.5 mm (0.33 in) diameter hole through the panel. 5. Remove paint and primer from the area surrounding the 8.5 mm (0.33 in) hole until bare metal is visible. 6. Select a M6 conductive bolt. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 7. Using a small brush, apply Dielectric Lubricant GM P/N 12377900 (Canadian P/N 10953529) to the threads of the M6 conductive bolt. Note Fretting corrosion is a build-up of insulating, oxidized wear debris that can form when there is a small motion between electrical contacts. The oxidized wear debris can accumulate at the electrical contact points causing the electrical resistance across the connection to increase. 8. Carefully remove ANY corrosion or contamination that may be present on the electrical ground wire terminal. 9. Install the electrical ground wire terminal and the M6 conductive bolt to the ground location. 10. Select a M6 conductive nut. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 11. Install the M6 conductive nut to the bolt and: Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Grounding Point > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair > Page 9207 Tighten Tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb in). Note The repair area MUST BE properly refinished to maintain a secure, stable and corrosion-free electrical ground. 12. Refinish the repair area using an anti-corrosion primer. Refer to Anti-Corrosion Treatment and Repair in SI. 13. Verify proper system operation. M8 Weld Nut Caution Use only the GM-approved replacement fasteners with conductive finish for electrical ground repair. 1. If the M8 weld nut electrical ground location is accessible from both sides of the panel, a M8 conductive bolt and a M8 conductive nut may be used to secure the electrical ground wire terminal. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 2. Select a location adjacent the M8 weld nut having 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance behind the panel surface and 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance surrounding the new electrical ground site. 3. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, remove any grease from the surface surrounding the ground location and allow to dry. Note Ensure 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance is maintained behind the panel to be drilled. 4. Drill a 10 mm (0.40 in) diameter hole through the panel. 5. Remove paint and primer from the area surrounding the 10 mm (0.40 in) hole until bare metal is visible. 6. Select a M8 conductive bolt. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 7. Using a small brush, apply Dielectric Lubricant GM P/N 12377900 (Canadian P/N 10953529) to the threads of the M8 conductive bolt. Note Fretting corrosion is a build-up of insulating, oxidized wear debris that can form when there is a small motion between electrical contacts. The oxidized wear debris can accumulate at the electrical contact points causing the electrical resistance across the connection to increase. 8. Carefully remove ANY corrosion or contamination that may be present on the electrical ground wire terminal. 9. Install the electrical ground wire terminal and the M8 conductive bolt to the ground location. 10. Select a M8 conductive nut. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 11. Install the M8 conductive nut to the bolt and: Tighten Tighten to 22 Nm (16 lb ft). Note The repair area MUST BE properly refinished to maintain a secure, stable and corrosion-free electrical ground. 12. Refinish the repair area using an anti-corrosion primer. Refer to Anti-Corrosion Treatment and Repair in SI. 13. Verify proper system operation. M8 Weld Nut Alternative Repair Caution Use only the GM-approved replacement fasteners with conductive finish for electrical ground repair. 1. If the M8 weld nut electrical ground location is not accessible from both sides of the panel, a M6 conductive rivet stud and a M6 conductive nut may be used to secure the electrical ground wire terminal. 2. Select a location adjacent the damaged M8 weld nut having 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance behind the panel surface and 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance surrounding the M6 conductive rivet stud flange. 3. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, remove any grease from the repair site and allow to dry. Note Ensure 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance is maintained behind the panel to be drilled. 4. Drill a 10 mm (0.40 in) diameter hole through the panel. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Grounding Point > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair > Page 9208 5. Remove paint and primer from the area surrounding the 10 mm (0.40 in) until bare metal is visible. Important The M6 conductive rivet stud as shown, can accommodate a panel thickness range of 0.7-4.2 mm (0.03-0.17 in). If there are layers of sheet metal, they should be touching without any air gaps to ensure a good ground. 6. Select a M6 conductive rivet stud. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. Note Use the GE-50317 rivet stud tool kit. 7. Place the M6 conductive rivet stud (1) in the 10 mm (0.40 in) hole. Assemble the rivet stud tool (2) with the groove and flare side facing the rivet stud, then the washer and the M6 nut (3). 8. Using a wrench on the rivet stud tool, and a socket on the M6 nut, secure the M6 conductive rivet stud. 9. Ensure the new rivet stud is securely fastened, WITHOUT ANY detectable movement. 10. Completely wrap the threads of the rivet stud with painters tape or equivalent. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Grounding Point > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair > Page 9209 Note The rivet stud and surrounding panel area MUST BE properly refinished PRIOR to the installation of the electrical ground wire terminal and conductive nut to maintain a secure, stable and corrosion-free electrical ground. 11. Refinish the repair area using an anti-corrosion primer. Refer to Anti-Corrosion Treatment and Repair in SI. 12. Allow the refinished repair area to cure sufficiently before removing the protective material applied to the rivet stud threads. 13. Remove the painters tape or equivalent from the rivet stud threads. 14. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, thoroughly clean the rivet stud threads to remove any adhesive and allow to dry. 15. Using a small brush, apply Dielectric Lubricant GM P/N 12377900 (Canadian P/N 10953529) to the threads of the M6 conductive rivet stud. Note Fretting corrosion is a build-up of insulating, oxidized wear debris that can form when there is a small motion between electrical contacts. The oxidized wear debris can accumulate at the electrical contact points causing the electrical resistance across the connection to increase. 16. Carefully remove ANY corrosion or contamination that may be present on the electrical ground wire terminal. 17. Install the electrical ground wire terminal to the M6 conductive rivet stud. 18. Select a M6 conductive nut. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 19. Install the M6 conductive nut to the rivet stud and: Tighten Tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb in) 20. Verify proper system operation. Parts Information Warranty Information (excluding Saab Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use: Warranty Information (Saab Models) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Grounding Point > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair > Page 9210 For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 09167 > Jul > 09 > Campaign - Missing Seal/Engine-to-Body Inline Connector Multiple Junction Connector: Recalls Campaign - Missing Seal/Engine-to-Body Inline Connector SERVICE UPDATE Bulletin No.: 09167 Date: July 23, 2009 Subject: 09167 - Service Update for Inventory and Customer Vehicles Missing Seal on Engine-to-Body Inline Connector - Expires with Base Warranty Models: 2010 Chevrolet Equinox THIS SERVICE UPDATE INCLUDES VEHICLES IN DEALER INVENTORY AND CUSTOMER VEHICLES THAT RETURN TO THE DEALERSHIP FOR ANY REASON. IT WILL EXPIRE AT THE END OF THE INVOLVED VEHICLE'S NEW VEHICLE LIMITED WARRANTY PERIOD. Purpose This bulletin provides a service procedure to install a connector seal to the engine-to-body inline connector on certain 2010 model year Chevrolet Equinox vehicles. These vehicles are missing a seal on the engine-to-body inline connector. This service procedure should be completed as soon as possible on involved vehicles currently in dealer inventory and customer vehicles that return to the dealer for any type of service during the New Vehicle Limited Warranty coverage period. Vehicles Involved A list of involved vehicles currently in dealer inventory is available on the "Service Update Bulletin Information" link under the "Service" tab in GM GlobalConnect (US), or attached to the Dealer Communication (Canada), used to release this bulletin. Customer vehicles that return for service, for any reason, and are still covered under the vehicles base warranty, and are within the VIN breakpoints provided below, should be checked for vehicle eligibility in the appropriate system listed below. Important: Dealers are to confirm vehicle eligibility prior to beginning repairs by using the GM Vehicle Inquiry System (GMVIS). Not all vehicles within the above breakpoints may be involved. Parts Information US Only: Connector seals will be shipped from the Warranty Parts Center (WPC) at no charge via UPS 2-Day Delivery - Attention: Parts Manager, to dealers with involved vehicles beginning Friday, July 24, 2009. All dealers who have involved vehicles should have the seals no later than Wednesday, July 29, 2009. Seals needed for dealer-trades are to be obtained by calling the WPC, and requesting WPC P/N 479. Canada Only: Connector seals will be available by calling the WINS Assistance Centre. The seals will be shipped at no charge via Overnight Delivery. Only dealers with affected vehicles should call for these parts Service Procedure 1. Unlock the vehicle and open the door. 2. Place the key FOB on the driver seat (avoid inadvertent FOB key press). 3. Release the hood latch. 4. Exit the vehicle and close the door. 5. Open the hood of the vehicle. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 09167 > Jul > 09 > Campaign - Missing Seal/Engine-to-Body Inline Connector > Page 9219 6. Locate the engine-to-body inline connector (4). This connector (4) is located on the passenger side of the engine compartment near the shock tower (1), air cleaner outlet duct (2), and air cleaner assembly (3). Refer to the illustration. 7. Remove the connector from the shock tower (1) by gently pulling the connector rearward and away from the shock tower. 8. Disengage the connection by pressing the side of the connector and pulling the grey lever to the back. 9. Install a new connector seal. Inspect the connector seal to ensure that the connector seal is not cracked, cut, or damaged. 1. Place one edge of the seal over one edge of the terminal housing as shown. Using both hands, stretch the remaining seal around the terminal housing. 2. Verify that the seal is seated properly around terminal housing. There must be NO TWISTING of the seal and it MUST sit flush as shown in the illustration. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 09167 > Jul > 09 > Campaign - Missing Seal/Engine-to-Body Inline Connector > Page 9220 3. Using tool number 12094441 or a wooden craft tool, gently push the seal to the back of connector, applying pressure to all four sides of the seal evenly. 4. Rotate the connector to the side of the clip and look through the connector window to verify that the seal is fully seated at the back of connector. Refer to the illustration to view an improperly (1) and properly installed (2) connector seal. 10. Engage both connectors and verify that the lever is fully locked by attempting to open it without pressing on the unlocking tabs. 11. Install the connector (2) on the connector clip located on the shock tower (1). Pull on the connector to ensure that it is secure on the clip. 12. Close the hood. 13. Open the front driver's side door. 14. Sit in the driver's seat and close the door. Note If the vehicle passes ALL of the inspection points outlined in Steps 15-20, no further action is required. If the vehicle does NOT pass all inspection points, ensure that the connector pins are NOT bent and that the connector is seated and locked properly. Repeat Steps 15-20 if required to ensure proper installation of the seal and connector. 15. Turn the key to the RUN position. Do NOT start the engine. If the engine telltale (MIL) is ON solid, the vehicle PASSES this inspection point. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 09167 > Jul > 09 > Campaign - Missing Seal/Engine-to-Body Inline Connector > Page 9221 16. Turn the key to crank (start engine). If the engine starts, the vehicle PASSES this inspection point. 17. Wait 10 seconds, if the engine telltale (MIL) is OFF, the vehicle PASSES this inspection point. 18. Push ECO button next to shifter knob (present only on 4 cylinder engine). If the ECO telltale comes ON, the vehicle PASSES this inspection point. 19. Turn the steering wheel 1/4 turn. If the steering wheel is easy to turn, power assist is present. The vehicle PASSES this inspection point. 20. Press accelerator pedal. If the engine RPMs increase, the vehicle PASSES this inspection point. Claim Information Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 07-06-04-019D > Jun > 10 > Electrical - Intermittent MIL/DTC P2138/Reduced Power Multiple Junction Connector: Customer Interest Electrical - Intermittent MIL/DTC P2138/Reduced Power TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 07-06-04-019D Date: June 28, 2010 Subject: Intermittent Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) Illuminated, DTC P2138 with Reduced Engine Power (Repair Instrument Panel (IP) to Body Harness Connector) Models: 2005-2011 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (Including Saturn) 2005-2009 HUMMER H2 2006-2010 HUMMER H3 2005-2009 Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the model years and warranty information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 07-06-04-019C (Section 06 - Engine/Propulsion System) Condition - Some customers may comment on an intermittent malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) being Illuminated with a message or an indicator that displays Reduced Engine Power. - The technician may observe on a scan tool DTC P2138 - Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor 1-2 Correlation set as Current or in History. Cause This condition may be caused by water intrusion into the instrument panel (IP) to body harness connector, which carries the APP sensor signals to the ECM/PCM. This water intrusion results in a voltage difference between APP Sensor 1 and APP Sensor 2 that exceeds a predetermined value for more than a calibrated period of time, setting P2138. Correction Note Aftermarket equipment can generate DTC P2138 and/or other DTCs. 1. Verify that aftermarket equipment is not electrically connected to any of the APP sensor signal or low reference circuits or to any other ECM/PCM 5V reference or low reference circuits. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories in SI. 2. Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle. ‹› If any 5V reference DTCs are set, refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle. ‹› If any 5V reference DTCs are not set, proceed to Step 3. 3. Locate the IP to body harness connector, which may be located in and around the left hand kick panel area or inside the IP. Depending on the vehicle and model year, refer to Wiring Systems or Power and Signal Distribution in SI. Note Some examples of potential water leaks are: A-pillar seals, sunroof drain lines (if equipped) and windshield/cowl sealing. 4. Inspect for a water leak in the area. If necessary use a water hose to determine the source of the leak. Refer to General Information > Water Leaks in SI. ‹› If a water leak is observed, repair as necessary. Verify the effectiveness of the repair. 5. Inspect the IP to body harness connector terminals for corrosion and debris. Refer to Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections in SI. ‹› If any corrosion and/or debris is observed, repair as necessary. 6. After completing the repair, verify the proper operation of the system. Depending on the vehicle and model year, perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification procedure or refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle in SI. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 07-06-04-019D > Jun > 10 > Electrical - Intermittent MIL/DTC P2138/Reduced Power > Page 9227 Warranty Information (excluding Saab U.S. Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the appropriate labor operation for the source of the water leak Warranty Information (Saab U.S. Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Multiple Junction Connector: > 07-06-04-019D > Jun > 10 > Electrical - Intermittent MIL/DTC P2138/Reduced Power Multiple Junction Connector: All Technical Service Bulletins Electrical - Intermittent MIL/DTC P2138/Reduced Power TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 07-06-04-019D Date: June 28, 2010 Subject: Intermittent Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) Illuminated, DTC P2138 with Reduced Engine Power (Repair Instrument Panel (IP) to Body Harness Connector) Models: 2005-2011 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (Including Saturn) 2005-2009 HUMMER H2 2006-2010 HUMMER H3 2005-2009 Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the model years and warranty information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 07-06-04-019C (Section 06 - Engine/Propulsion System) Condition - Some customers may comment on an intermittent malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) being Illuminated with a message or an indicator that displays Reduced Engine Power. - The technician may observe on a scan tool DTC P2138 - Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor 1-2 Correlation set as Current or in History. Cause This condition may be caused by water intrusion into the instrument panel (IP) to body harness connector, which carries the APP sensor signals to the ECM/PCM. This water intrusion results in a voltage difference between APP Sensor 1 and APP Sensor 2 that exceeds a predetermined value for more than a calibrated period of time, setting P2138. Correction Note Aftermarket equipment can generate DTC P2138 and/or other DTCs. 1. Verify that aftermarket equipment is not electrically connected to any of the APP sensor signal or low reference circuits or to any other ECM/PCM 5V reference or low reference circuits. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories in SI. 2. Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle. ‹› If any 5V reference DTCs are set, refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle. ‹› If any 5V reference DTCs are not set, proceed to Step 3. 3. Locate the IP to body harness connector, which may be located in and around the left hand kick panel area or inside the IP. Depending on the vehicle and model year, refer to Wiring Systems or Power and Signal Distribution in SI. Note Some examples of potential water leaks are: A-pillar seals, sunroof drain lines (if equipped) and windshield/cowl sealing. 4. Inspect for a water leak in the area. If necessary use a water hose to determine the source of the leak. Refer to General Information > Water Leaks in SI. ‹› If a water leak is observed, repair as necessary. Verify the effectiveness of the repair. 5. Inspect the IP to body harness connector terminals for corrosion and debris. Refer to Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections in SI. ‹› If any corrosion and/or debris is observed, repair as necessary. 6. After completing the repair, verify the proper operation of the system. Depending on the vehicle and model year, perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification procedure or refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle in SI. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Multiple Junction Connector: > 07-06-04-019D > Jun > 10 > Electrical - Intermittent MIL/DTC P2138/Reduced Power > Page 9233 Warranty Information (excluding Saab U.S. Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the appropriate labor operation for the source of the water leak Warranty Information (Saab U.S. Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Multiple Junction Connector: > 09167 > Jul > 09 > Campaign - Missing Seal/Engine-to-Body Inline Connector Multiple Junction Connector: All Technical Service Bulletins Campaign - Missing Seal/Engine-to-Body Inline Connector SERVICE UPDATE Bulletin No.: 09167 Date: July 23, 2009 Subject: 09167 - Service Update for Inventory and Customer Vehicles Missing Seal on Engine-to-Body Inline Connector - Expires with Base Warranty Models: 2010 Chevrolet Equinox THIS SERVICE UPDATE INCLUDES VEHICLES IN DEALER INVENTORY AND CUSTOMER VEHICLES THAT RETURN TO THE DEALERSHIP FOR ANY REASON. IT WILL EXPIRE AT THE END OF THE INVOLVED VEHICLE'S NEW VEHICLE LIMITED WARRANTY PERIOD. Purpose This bulletin provides a service procedure to install a connector seal to the engine-to-body inline connector on certain 2010 model year Chevrolet Equinox vehicles. These vehicles are missing a seal on the engine-to-body inline connector. This service procedure should be completed as soon as possible on involved vehicles currently in dealer inventory and customer vehicles that return to the dealer for any type of service during the New Vehicle Limited Warranty coverage period. Vehicles Involved A list of involved vehicles currently in dealer inventory is available on the "Service Update Bulletin Information" link under the "Service" tab in GM GlobalConnect (US), or attached to the Dealer Communication (Canada), used to release this bulletin. Customer vehicles that return for service, for any reason, and are still covered under the vehicles base warranty, and are within the VIN breakpoints provided below, should be checked for vehicle eligibility in the appropriate system listed below. Important: Dealers are to confirm vehicle eligibility prior to beginning repairs by using the GM Vehicle Inquiry System (GMVIS). Not all vehicles within the above breakpoints may be involved. Parts Information US Only: Connector seals will be shipped from the Warranty Parts Center (WPC) at no charge via UPS 2-Day Delivery - Attention: Parts Manager, to dealers with involved vehicles beginning Friday, July 24, 2009. All dealers who have involved vehicles should have the seals no later than Wednesday, July 29, 2009. Seals needed for dealer-trades are to be obtained by calling the WPC, and requesting WPC P/N 479. Canada Only: Connector seals will be available by calling the WINS Assistance Centre. The seals will be shipped at no charge via Overnight Delivery. Only dealers with affected vehicles should call for these parts Service Procedure 1. Unlock the vehicle and open the door. 2. Place the key FOB on the driver seat (avoid inadvertent FOB key press). 3. Release the hood latch. 4. Exit the vehicle and close the door. 5. Open the hood of the vehicle. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Multiple Junction Connector: > 09167 > Jul > 09 > Campaign - Missing Seal/Engine-to-Body Inline Connector > Page 9238 6. Locate the engine-to-body inline connector (4). This connector (4) is located on the passenger side of the engine compartment near the shock tower (1), air cleaner outlet duct (2), and air cleaner assembly (3). Refer to the illustration. 7. Remove the connector from the shock tower (1) by gently pulling the connector rearward and away from the shock tower. 8. Disengage the connection by pressing the side of the connector and pulling the grey lever to the back. 9. Install a new connector seal. Inspect the connector seal to ensure that the connector seal is not cracked, cut, or damaged. 1. Place one edge of the seal over one edge of the terminal housing as shown. Using both hands, stretch the remaining seal around the terminal housing. 2. Verify that the seal is seated properly around terminal housing. There must be NO TWISTING of the seal and it MUST sit flush as shown in the illustration. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Multiple Junction Connector: > 09167 > Jul > 09 > Campaign - Missing Seal/Engine-to-Body Inline Connector > Page 9239 3. Using tool number 12094441 or a wooden craft tool, gently push the seal to the back of connector, applying pressure to all four sides of the seal evenly. 4. Rotate the connector to the side of the clip and look through the connector window to verify that the seal is fully seated at the back of connector. Refer to the illustration to view an improperly (1) and properly installed (2) connector seal. 10. Engage both connectors and verify that the lever is fully locked by attempting to open it without pressing on the unlocking tabs. 11. Install the connector (2) on the connector clip located on the shock tower (1). Pull on the connector to ensure that it is secure on the clip. 12. Close the hood. 13. Open the front driver's side door. 14. Sit in the driver's seat and close the door. Note If the vehicle passes ALL of the inspection points outlined in Steps 15-20, no further action is required. If the vehicle does NOT pass all inspection points, ensure that the connector pins are NOT bent and that the connector is seated and locked properly. Repeat Steps 15-20 if required to ensure proper installation of the seal and connector. 15. Turn the key to the RUN position. Do NOT start the engine. If the engine telltale (MIL) is ON solid, the vehicle PASSES this inspection point. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Multiple Junction Connector: > 09167 > Jul > 09 > Campaign - Missing Seal/Engine-to-Body Inline Connector > Page 9240 16. Turn the key to crank (start engine). If the engine starts, the vehicle PASSES this inspection point. 17. Wait 10 seconds, if the engine telltale (MIL) is OFF, the vehicle PASSES this inspection point. 18. Push ECO button next to shifter knob (present only on 4 cylinder engine). If the ECO telltale comes ON, the vehicle PASSES this inspection point. 19. Turn the steering wheel 1/4 turn. If the steering wheel is easy to turn, power assist is present. The vehicle PASSES this inspection point. 20. Press accelerator pedal. If the engine RPMs increase, the vehicle PASSES this inspection point. Claim Information Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Multiple Junction Connector: > 07-06-04-019D > Jun > 10 > Electrical - Intermittent MIL/DTC P2138/Reduced Power Multiple Junction Connector: All Technical Service Bulletins Electrical - Intermittent MIL/DTC P2138/Reduced Power TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 07-06-04-019D Date: June 28, 2010 Subject: Intermittent Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) Illuminated, DTC P2138 with Reduced Engine Power (Repair Instrument Panel (IP) to Body Harness Connector) Models: 2005-2011 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (Including Saturn) 2005-2009 HUMMER H2 2006-2010 HUMMER H3 2005-2009 Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the model years and warranty information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 07-06-04-019C (Section 06 - Engine/Propulsion System) Condition - Some customers may comment on an intermittent malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) being Illuminated with a message or an indicator that displays Reduced Engine Power. - The technician may observe on a scan tool DTC P2138 - Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor 1-2 Correlation set as Current or in History. Cause This condition may be caused by water intrusion into the instrument panel (IP) to body harness connector, which carries the APP sensor signals to the ECM/PCM. This water intrusion results in a voltage difference between APP Sensor 1 and APP Sensor 2 that exceeds a predetermined value for more than a calibrated period of time, setting P2138. Correction Note Aftermarket equipment can generate DTC P2138 and/or other DTCs. 1. Verify that aftermarket equipment is not electrically connected to any of the APP sensor signal or low reference circuits or to any other ECM/PCM 5V reference or low reference circuits. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories in SI. 2. Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle. ‹› If any 5V reference DTCs are set, refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle. ‹› If any 5V reference DTCs are not set, proceed to Step 3. 3. Locate the IP to body harness connector, which may be located in and around the left hand kick panel area or inside the IP. Depending on the vehicle and model year, refer to Wiring Systems or Power and Signal Distribution in SI. Note Some examples of potential water leaks are: A-pillar seals, sunroof drain lines (if equipped) and windshield/cowl sealing. 4. Inspect for a water leak in the area. If necessary use a water hose to determine the source of the leak. Refer to General Information > Water Leaks in SI. ‹› If a water leak is observed, repair as necessary. Verify the effectiveness of the repair. 5. Inspect the IP to body harness connector terminals for corrosion and debris. Refer to Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections in SI. ‹› If any corrosion and/or debris is observed, repair as necessary. 6. After completing the repair, verify the proper operation of the system. Depending on the vehicle and model year, perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification procedure or refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle in SI. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Multiple Junction Connector: > 07-06-04-019D > Jun > 10 > Electrical - Intermittent MIL/DTC P2138/Reduced Power > Page 9246 Warranty Information (excluding Saab U.S. Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the appropriate labor operation for the source of the water leak Warranty Information (Saab U.S. Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Multiple Junction Connector: > 09167 > Jul > 09 > Campaign Missing Seal/Engine-to-Body Inline Connector Multiple Junction Connector: All Technical Service Bulletins Campaign - Missing Seal/Engine-to-Body Inline Connector SERVICE UPDATE Bulletin No.: 09167 Date: July 23, 2009 Subject: 09167 - Service Update for Inventory and Customer Vehicles Missing Seal on Engine-to-Body Inline Connector - Expires with Base Warranty Models: 2010 Chevrolet Equinox THIS SERVICE UPDATE INCLUDES VEHICLES IN DEALER INVENTORY AND CUSTOMER VEHICLES THAT RETURN TO THE DEALERSHIP FOR ANY REASON. IT WILL EXPIRE AT THE END OF THE INVOLVED VEHICLE'S NEW VEHICLE LIMITED WARRANTY PERIOD. Purpose This bulletin provides a service procedure to install a connector seal to the engine-to-body inline connector on certain 2010 model year Chevrolet Equinox vehicles. These vehicles are missing a seal on the engine-to-body inline connector. This service procedure should be completed as soon as possible on involved vehicles currently in dealer inventory and customer vehicles that return to the dealer for any type of service during the New Vehicle Limited Warranty coverage period. Vehicles Involved A list of involved vehicles currently in dealer inventory is available on the "Service Update Bulletin Information" link under the "Service" tab in GM GlobalConnect (US), or attached to the Dealer Communication (Canada), used to release this bulletin. Customer vehicles that return for service, for any reason, and are still covered under the vehicles base warranty, and are within the VIN breakpoints provided below, should be checked for vehicle eligibility in the appropriate system listed below. Important: Dealers are to confirm vehicle eligibility prior to beginning repairs by using the GM Vehicle Inquiry System (GMVIS). Not all vehicles within the above breakpoints may be involved. Parts Information US Only: Connector seals will be shipped from the Warranty Parts Center (WPC) at no charge via UPS 2-Day Delivery - Attention: Parts Manager, to dealers with involved vehicles beginning Friday, July 24, 2009. All dealers who have involved vehicles should have the seals no later than Wednesday, July 29, 2009. Seals needed for dealer-trades are to be obtained by calling the WPC, and requesting WPC P/N 479. Canada Only: Connector seals will be available by calling the WINS Assistance Centre. The seals will be shipped at no charge via Overnight Delivery. Only dealers with affected vehicles should call for these parts Service Procedure 1. Unlock the vehicle and open the door. 2. Place the key FOB on the driver seat (avoid inadvertent FOB key press). 3. Release the hood latch. 4. Exit the vehicle and close the door. 5. Open the hood of the vehicle. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Multiple Junction Connector: > 09167 > Jul > 09 > Campaign Missing Seal/Engine-to-Body Inline Connector > Page 9252 6. Locate the engine-to-body inline connector (4). This connector (4) is located on the passenger side of the engine compartment near the shock tower (1), air cleaner outlet duct (2), and air cleaner assembly (3). Refer to the illustration. 7. Remove the connector from the shock tower (1) by gently pulling the connector rearward and away from the shock tower. 8. Disengage the connection by pressing the side of the connector and pulling the grey lever to the back. 9. Install a new connector seal. Inspect the connector seal to ensure that the connector seal is not cracked, cut, or damaged. 1. Place one edge of the seal over one edge of the terminal housing as shown. Using both hands, stretch the remaining seal around the terminal housing. 2. Verify that the seal is seated properly around terminal housing. There must be NO TWISTING of the seal and it MUST sit flush as shown in the illustration. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Multiple Junction Connector: > 09167 > Jul > 09 > Campaign Missing Seal/Engine-to-Body Inline Connector > Page 9253 3. Using tool number 12094441 or a wooden craft tool, gently push the seal to the back of connector, applying pressure to all four sides of the seal evenly. 4. Rotate the connector to the side of the clip and look through the connector window to verify that the seal is fully seated at the back of connector. Refer to the illustration to view an improperly (1) and properly installed (2) connector seal. 10. Engage both connectors and verify that the lever is fully locked by attempting to open it without pressing on the unlocking tabs. 11. Install the connector (2) on the connector clip located on the shock tower (1). Pull on the connector to ensure that it is secure on the clip. 12. Close the hood. 13. Open the front driver's side door. 14. Sit in the driver's seat and close the door. Note If the vehicle passes ALL of the inspection points outlined in Steps 15-20, no further action is required. If the vehicle does NOT pass all inspection points, ensure that the connector pins are NOT bent and that the connector is seated and locked properly. Repeat Steps 15-20 if required to ensure proper installation of the seal and connector. 15. Turn the key to the RUN position. Do NOT start the engine. If the engine telltale (MIL) is ON solid, the vehicle PASSES this inspection point. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Multiple Junction Connector: > 09167 > Jul > 09 > Campaign Missing Seal/Engine-to-Body Inline Connector > Page 9254 16. Turn the key to crank (start engine). If the engine starts, the vehicle PASSES this inspection point. 17. Wait 10 seconds, if the engine telltale (MIL) is OFF, the vehicle PASSES this inspection point. 18. Push ECO button next to shifter knob (present only on 4 cylinder engine). If the ECO telltale comes ON, the vehicle PASSES this inspection point. 19. Turn the steering wheel 1/4 turn. If the steering wheel is easy to turn, power assist is present. The vehicle PASSES this inspection point. 20. Press accelerator pedal. If the engine RPMs increase, the vehicle PASSES this inspection point. Claim Information Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name Multiple Junction Connector: Diagrams Connector End Views By Name A3 - B39 Component Connector End Views A3L Sunshade - Left Front A3R Sunshade - Right Front Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9257 A6C Fuel Pump and Level Sensor Assembly - Primary Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9258 A9A Outside Rearview Mirror - Driver Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9259 A9B Outside Rearview Mirror - Passenger Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9260 A10 Inside Rearview Mirror (UVC with UYS or PCJ or without UVC or UYS or PCJ) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9261 A10 Inside Rearview Mirror (UVC without UYS or PCJ) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9262 A11 Radio X1 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9263 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9264 A11 Radio X3 (UWG) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9265 A11 Radio X4 (UYS or PCJ) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9266 A20 Radio/HVAC Controls Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9267 A23C Liftgate Latch Assembly (TB4) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9268 A23C Liftgate Latch Assembly (TB5) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9269 A23D Door Latch Assembly - Driver Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9270 A23LR Door Latch Assembly - Left Rear Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9271 A23P Door Latch Assembly - Passenger Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9272 A23RR Door Latch Assembly - Right Rear Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9273 B1 A/C Refrigerant Pressure Sensor Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9274 B5LF Wheel Speed Sensor - Left Front Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9275 B5LR Wheel Speed Sensor - Left Rear Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9276 B5RF Wheel Speed Sensor - Right Front Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9277 B5RR Wheel Speed Sensor - Right Rear Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9278 B7E Air Temperature Sensor - Duct Right Lower (C68) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9279 B7J Air Temperature Sensor - Duct Right Upper (C68) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9280 B9 Ambient Air Temperature Sensor B10 Ambient Light Sensor (C67) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9281 B10B Ambient Light/Sunload Sensor (C68) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9282 B17 Barometric Pressure Sensor (LF1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9283 B18 Battery Current Sensor Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9284 B19B Brake Booster Vacuum Sensor Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9285 B20 Brake Fluid Level Switch B22 Brake Pedal Position Sensor Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9286 B23A Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 1 Exhaust (LF1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9287 B23B Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 1 Intake (LF1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9288 B23C Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 2 Exhaust (LF1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9289 B23D Camshaft Position Sensor - Bank 2 Intake (LF1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9290 B23E Camshaft Position Sensor - Exhaust (LAF) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9291 B23F Camshaft Position Sensor - Intake (LAF) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9292 B24 Cellular Phone Microphone (UE1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9293 B26 Crankshaft Position Sensor Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9294 B34 Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor (LAF) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9295 B34 Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor (LF1) B37 Engine Oil Pressure Switch (LAF) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9296 B37 Engine Oil Pressure Switch (LF1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9297 B39 A/C Evaporator Temperature Sensor Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9298 B46 - C1 B46B Fuel Level Sensor - Secondary Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9299 B47 Fuel Pressure Sensor Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9300 B47B Fuel Rail Pressure Sensor Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9301 B52A Heated Oxygen Sensor 1 (LAF) B52B Heated Oxygen Sensor 2 (LAF) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9302 B52C Heated Oxygen Sensor - Bank 1 Sensor 1 (LF1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9303 B52D Heated Oxygen Sensor - Bank 1 Sensor 2 (LF1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9304 B52E Heated Oxygen Sensor - Bank 2 Sensor 1 (LF1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9305 B52F Heated Oxygen Sensor - Bank 2 Sensor 2 (LF1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9306 B55 Hood Ajar Switch (BTV) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9307 B59L Front Impact Sensor - Left Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9308 B59R Front Impact Sensor - Right Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9309 B63LF Side Impact Sensor - Left Front Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9310 B63LR Side Impact Sensor - Left Rear Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9311 B63RF Side Impact Sensor - Right Front Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9312 B63RR Side Impact Sensor - Right Rear Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9313 B68 Knock Sensor (LAF) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9314 B68A Knock Sensor 1 (LF1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9315 B68B Knock Sensor 2 (LF1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9316 B70 Liftgate Close Switch (TB5) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9317 B71L Liftgate Object Sensor - Left (TB5) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9318 B71R Liftgate Object Sensor - Right (TB5) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9319 B74 Manifold Absolute Pressure Sensor Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9320 B75B Mass Air Flow/Intake Air Temperature Sensor Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9321 B77F Radio Volume Compensator Interior Noise Microphone - Front (VQN) B77R Radio Volume Compensator Interior Noise Microphone - Rear (VQN) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9322 B78E Rear Object Sensor - Left Middle (UD7) B78F Rear Object Sensor - Right Middle (UD7) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9323 B78G Rear Object Sensor - Left Outer (UD7) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9324 B78H Rear Object Sensor - Right Outer (UD7) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9325 B80 Park Brake Switch B87 Rearview Camera (UVC) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9326 B88D Seat Belt Switch - Driver Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9327 B88P Seat Belt Switch - Passenger B99 Steering Wheel Angle Sensor Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9328 B101 Immobilizer Antenna Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9329 B107 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9330 B119 Multi-axis Acceleration Sensor Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9331 B150 Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9332 C1 Battery C1 Battery C1 Battery + Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9333 E1 - E37 E1C Accent Lamp - Driver Door Handle (TSQ) E1D Accent Lamp - Driver Door (TSQ) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9334 E1J Accent Lamp - Left Lower Instrument Panel Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9335 E1K Accent Lamp - Right Lower Instrument Panel Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9336 E1L Accent Lamp - Overhead Console (TSQ) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9337 E1M Accent Lamp - Passenger Door Handle (TSQ) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9338 E1P Accent Lamp - Passenger Door (TSQ) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9339 E1S Accent Lamp - Console Cupholder Right Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9340 E2LF Side Marker Lamp - Left Front Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9341 E2LR Side Marker Lamp - Left Rear Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9342 E2RF Side Marker Lamp - Right Front Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9343 E2RR Side Marker Lamp - Right Rear Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9344 E4E Head Lamp - Left High Beam Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9345 E4F Head Lamp - Right High Beam Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9346 E4G Head Lamp - Left Low Beam Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9347 E4H Head Lamp - Right Low Beam Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9348 E4N Park/Turn Signal Lamp - Left Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9349 E4P Park/Turn Signal Lamp - Right Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9350 E5A Backup Lamp - Left Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9351 E5AC Tail/Turn Signal Lamp - Left Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9352 E5AD Tail/Turn Signal Lamp - Right Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9353 E5B Backup Lamp - Right Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9354 E5J Tail Lamp - Left Lower (GMC) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9355 E5K Tail Lamp - Right Lower (GMC) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9356 E5M Tail Lamp - Left Upper (GMC) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9357 E5N Tail Lamp - Right Upper (GMC) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9358 E6 Center High Mounted Stop Lamp Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9359 E7L License Plate Lamp - Left Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9360 E7R License Plate Lamp - Right Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9361 E8J Instrument Panel Courtesy Lamp - Left (TSQ) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9362 E8K Instrument Panel Courtesy Lamp - Right (TSQ) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9363 E14A Seat Heating Element - Driver Back (KA1 or SPO Accessory) E14B Seat Heating Element - Driver Cushion (KA1 or SPO Accessory) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9364 E14C Seat Heating Element - Passenger Back (KA1 or SPO Accessory) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9365 E14D Seat Heating Element - Passenger Cushion (KA1 or SPO Accessory) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9366 E18 Rear Defogger Grid X1 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9367 E18 Rear Defogger Grid X2 E28 Center Console Compartment Lamp (TSP or TSQ) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9368 E29LF Fog Lamp - Left Front (T96) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9369 E29RF Fog Lamp - Right Front (T96) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9370 E37EL Dome/Reading Lamps - Front Overhead Console Left Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9371 E37ER Dome/Reading Lamps - Front Overhead Console Right Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9372 E37M Dome/Reading Lamps - Middle Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9373 E37R Dome/Reading Lamps - Rear Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9374 F105 - K27 F105 Passenger Instrument Panel Air Bag X1 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9375 F105 Passenger Instrument Panel Air Bag X2 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9376 F105L Roof Rail Air Bag - Left Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9377 F105R Roof Rail Air Bag - Right Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9378 F106L Side Air Bag - Left Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9379 F106R Side Air Bag - Right Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9380 F107 Steering Wheel Air Bag X1 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9381 F107 Steering Wheel Air Bag X2 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9382 F112D Seat Belt Retractor Pretensioner - Driver Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9383 F112P Seat Belt Retractor Pretensioner - Passenger Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9384 F113D Seat Belt Anchor Pretensioner - Driver Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9385 F113P Seat Belt Anchor Pretensioner - Passenger Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9386 G6 Brake Booster Pump - Auxiliary Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9387 G10 Cooling Fan Motor (LAF) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9388 G10L Cooling Fan Motor - Left (LF1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9389 G10R Cooling Fan Motor - Right (LF1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9390 G13 Generator X1 G13 Generator X2 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9391 G18 High Pressure Fuel Pump Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9392 G24 Windshield Washer Pump K8 Blower Motor Control Module X1 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9393 K8 Blower Motor Control Module X2 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9394 K9 Body Control Module X1 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9395 K9 Body Control Module X2 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9396 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9397 K9 Body Control Module X3 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9398 K9 Body Control Module X4 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9399 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9400 K9 Body Control Module X5 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9401 K9 Body Control Module X6 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9402 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9403 K9 Body Control Module X7 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9404 K17 Electronic Brake Control Module Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9405 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9406 K20 Engine Control Module X1 (LAF) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9407 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9408 K20 Engine Control Module X1 (LF1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9409 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9410 K20 Engine Control Module X2 (LAF) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9411 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9412 K20 Engine Control Module X2 (LF1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9413 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9414 K20 Engine Control Module X3 (LAF) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9415 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9416 K20 Engine Control Module X3 (LF1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9417 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9418 K27 Fuel Pump Control Module Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9419 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9420 K29 - M55 K29 Seat Heating Control Module X1 (KA1 without LTZ or SLT) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9421 K29 Seat Heating Control Module X1 (SPO Accessory) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9422 K29 Seat Heating Control Module X2 (KA1 without LTZ or SLT) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9423 K29 Seat Heating Control Module X3 (KA1 without LTZ or SLT) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9424 K29 Seat Heating Control Module X3 (SPO Accessory) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9425 K29 Seat Heating Control Module X4 (SPO Accessory) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9426 K29 Seat Heating Control Module X5 (SPO Accessory) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9427 K33 HVAC Control Module X1 (C68) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9428 K33 HVAC Control Module X2 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9429 K33 HVAC Control Module X3 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9430 K36 Inflatable Restraint Sensing and Diagnostic Module X1 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9431 K36 Inflatable Restraint Sensing and Diagnostic Module X2 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9432 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9433 K39 Liftgate Control Module X1 (TB5) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9434 K39 Liftgate Control Module X2 (TB5) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9435 K39 Liftgate Control Module X3 (TB5) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9436 K40 Seat Memory Control Module X1 (LTZ or SLT) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9437 K40 Seat Memory Control Module X2 (LTZ or SLT) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9438 K40 Seat Memory Control Module X3 (KA1 with LTZ or SLT) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9439 K40 Seat Memory Control Module X4 (LTZ or SLT) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9440 K40 Seat Memory Control Module X5 (LTZ or SLT) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9441 K41 Parking Assist Control Module X1 (UD7) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9442 K41 Parking Assist Control Module X2 (UD7) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9443 K43 Power Steering Control Module X1 (LAF) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9444 K43 Power Steering Control Module X2 (LAF) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9445 K43 Power Steering Control Module X3 (LAF) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9446 K47 Rear Differential Clutch Control Module (F46) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9447 K73 Telematics Communication Interface Control Module X1 (UE1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9448 K73 Telematics Communication Interface Control Module X2 (UE1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9449 K77 Remote Control Door Lock Receiver Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9450 K85 Passenger Presence Detection Module Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9451 K96L Mirror Control Module - Left (LTZ or SLT) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9452 K108 Active Noise Cancellation Module (VQN) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9453 M6 Air Temperature Door Actuator Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9454 M8 Blower Motor Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9455 M17 Liftgate Motor Assembly (TB5) M37 Mode Door Actuator M45 Rear Wiper Motor Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9456 M46 Air Recirculation Door Motor Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9457 M50D Seat Front Vertical Motor - Driver (AE8) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9458 M51D Seat Horizontal Motor - Driver (AE8) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9459 M52D Seat Lumbar Support Horizontal Motor - Driver M55D Seat Rear Vertical Motor - Driver Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9460 M56 - Q6 M56D Seat Recline Motor - Driver (AE8) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9461 M64 Starter Motor X1 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9462 M64 Starter Motor X2 (Positive Battery Cable) (LAF) M64 Starter Motor X2 (Positive Battery Cable) (LF1) M64 Starter Motor X2 (Generator Harness) (LAF) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9463 M64 Starter Motor X2 (Generator Harness) (LF1) M69 Sunroof Motor (CF5) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9464 M74D Window Motor - Driver Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9465 M74LR Window Motor - Left Rear Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9466 M74P Window Motor - Passenger Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9467 M74RR Window Motor - Right Rear Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9468 M75 Windshield Wiper Motor Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9469 M93 Ignition Cylinder Lock Control Solenoid Actuator Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9470 P2 Transmission Shift Lever Position Indicator Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9471 P12A Horn - High Note Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9472 P12B Horn - Low Note Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9473 P14 Passenger Air Bag Disable Indicator Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9474 P15 Rear Parking Assist Rear Indicators (UD7) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9475 P16 Instrument Cluster Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9476 P17 Info Display Module (UYS or PCJ) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9477 P17 Info Display Module (without UYS or PCJ) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9478 P19AC Speaker - Subwoofer (UZ8) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9479 P19B Speaker - Center Instrument Panel (UZ8) P19G Speaker - Left Front (UW6) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9480 P19G Speaker - Left Front (UZ8) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9481 P19H Speaker - Left Front Tweeter Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9482 P19K Speaker - Left Rear (UW6) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9483 P19K Speaker - Left Rear (UZ8) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9484 P19U Speaker - Right Front (UW6) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9485 P19U Speaker - Right Front (UZ8) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9486 P19V Speaker - Right Front Tweeter Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9487 P19X Speaker - Right Rear (UW6) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9488 P19X Speaker - Right Rear (UZ8) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9489 P22E Video Display - Driver Seatback (UWG) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9490 P22F Video Display - Passenger Seatback (UWG) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9491 Q2 A/C Compressor Clutch Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9492 Q6A Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Bank 1 Exhaust (LF1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9493 Q6B Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Bank 1 Intake (LF1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9494 Q6C Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Bank 2 Exhaust (LF1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9495 Q6D Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Bank 2 Intake (LF1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9496 Q6E Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Exhaust (LAF) Q6F Camshaft Position Actuator Solenoid Valve - Intake (LAF) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9497 Q8 - S70 Q8 Control Solenoid Valve Assembly X1 (MH7 or MHC) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9498 Q8 Control Solenoid Valve Assembly X1 (MH2 or MH4) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9499 Q8 Control Solenoid Valve Assembly X2 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9500 Q8 Control Solenoid Valve Assembly X3 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9501 Q8 Control Solenoid Valve Assembly X4 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9502 Q12 Evaporative Emission Purge Solenoid Valve (LAF) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9503 Q12 Evaporative Emission Purge Solenoid Valve (LF1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9504 Q13 Evaporative Emission Vent Solenoid Valve Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9505 Q17A Fuel Injector 1 (LAF) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9506 Q17A Fuel Injector 1 (LF1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9507 Q17B Fuel Injector 2 (LAF) Q17B Fuel Injector 2 (LF1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9508 Q17C Fuel Injector 3 (LAF) Q17C Fuel Injector 3 (LF1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9509 Q17D Fuel Injector 4 (LAF) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9510 Q17D Fuel Injector 4 (LF1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9511 Q17E Fuel Injector 5 (LF1) Q17F Fuel Injector 6 (LF1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9512 Q38 Throttle Body R6 Data Link Resistor Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9513 R10 Cooling Fan Resistor (LAF) S3 Transmission Shift Lever Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9514 S12 Dome Lamp Switch Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9515 S32D Seat Heating Switch - Driver (SPO Accessory) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9516 S33 Horn Switch Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9517 S36 Instrument Panel Dimmer Switch Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9518 S39 Ignition Switch Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9519 S45B Liftgate Control Switch - Interior (TB5) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9520 S46 Liftgate Handle Switch Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9521 S47D Seat Memory Switch - Driver (LTZ or SLT) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9522 S52 Outside Rearview Mirror Switch Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9523 S64D Seat Adjuster Switch - Driver (AE8 or LTZ or SLT) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9524 S64D Seat Adjuster Switch - Driver (without AE8 or LTZ or SLT) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9525 S65D Seat Lumbar Support Switch - Driver Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9526 S70L Steering Wheel Controls Switch - Left Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9527 S70R Steering Wheel Controls Switch - Right (UK3) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9528 S72 - X88 S72 Sunroof Switch (CF5) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9529 S75 Traction Control Switch Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9530 S78 Turn Signal/Multifunction Switch Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9531 S79D Window Switch - Driver Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9532 S79LR Window Switch - Left Rear Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9533 S79P Window Switch - Passenger X1 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9534 S79P Window Switch - Passenger X2 (LTZ or SLT) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9535 S79RR Window Switch - Right Rear Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9536 S82 Windshield Wiper/Washer Switch Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9537 S88 Sunroof Tilt Switch (CF5) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9538 S112 Fuel Economy Mode Switch Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9539 T3 Audio Amplifier X1 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9540 T3 Audio Amplifier X2 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9541 T3 Audio Amplifier X3 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9542 T8A Ignition Coil 1 (LAF) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9543 T8A Ignition Coil 1 (LF1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9544 T8B Ignition Coil 2 (LAF) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9545 T8B Ignition Coil 2 (LF1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9546 T8C Ignition Coil 3 (LAF) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9547 T8C Ignition Coil 3 (LF1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9548 T8D Ignition Coil 4 (LAF) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9549 T8D Ignition Coil 4 (LF1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9550 T8E Ignition Coil 5 (LF1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9551 T8F Ignition Coil 6 (LF1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9552 T11 Multimedia Player Interface Module (KTA) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9553 X80A Accessory Power Receptacle - Center Console 1 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9554 X80B Accessory Power Receptacle - Center Console 2 X80G Accessory Power Receptacle - Instrument Panel Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9555 X80R Accessory Power Receptacle - Rear Compartment X82 Audio/Video Input Adapter (UWG) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9556 X83 Auxiliary Audio Input (without UWG) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9557 X84 Data Link Connector Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9558 X85 Steering Wheel Air Bag Coil X1 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9559 X85 Steering Wheel Air Bag Coil X2 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9560 X85 Steering Wheel Air Bag Coil X3 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9561 X88 Trailer Connector (V92) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9562 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9563 Multiple Junction Connector: Diagrams Connector End Views By Number X108 Inline Harness Connector End Views X108 Engine Harness to Fuel Injector Bank 1 Harness (LF1) X109 X109 Engine Harness to Fuel Injector Bank 2 Harness (LF1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9564 X110 X110 Forward Lamp Harness to Left Front Lamp Harness Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9565 X112 X112 Engine Harness to Body Harness Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9566 X115 X115 Forward Lamp Harness to Body Harness Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9567 X116 X116 Forward Lamp Harness to Engine Cooling Fan Harness (LAF) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9568 X116 Forward Lamp Harness to Engine Cooling Fan Harness (LF1) X120 X120 Forward Lamp Harness to Right Front Lamp Harness Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9569 X121 X121 Body Harness to Negative Battery Cable Harness X136 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9570 X136 Engine Harness to Fuel Injector Harness (LAF) X203 X203 Airbag Extension Harness to Instrument Panel Harness Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9571 X206 X206 Body Harness to Instrument Panel Harness Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9572 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9573 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9574 X209 X209 Instrument Panel Harness to Headliner Harness Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9575 X210 X210 Instrument Panel Harness to Body Harness Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9576 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9577 X211 X211 Console Harness to Instrument Panel Harness Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9578 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9579 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9580 X213 X213 Instrument Panel Harness to POA HVAC Extension Harness X214 X214 Console Harness to CD Slot Extension Harness Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9581 X215 X215 Console Harness to Seat Heating Power Extension Harness (SPO Accessory) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9582 X302 X302 Driver Seat Cushion Harness to Driver Seat Back Harness Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9583 X300 X300 Headliner Harness to Body Harness X303 X303 Passenger Seat Back Harness to Passenger Seat Cushion Harness Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9584 X304 X304 Driver Seat Back Harness to Driver Seat Cushion Harness Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9585 X307 X307 Driver Seat Back Harness to Instrument Panel Harness (UWG) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9586 X308 X308 Body Harness to Driver Seat Cushion Harness Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9587 X310 X310 Body Harness to Passenger Seat Cushion Harness Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9588 X315 X315 Headliner Harness to Overhead Console Harness Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9589 X316 X316 Overhead Console Harness to Dome/Reading Lamps Harness X309 X309 Passenger Seat Back Harness to Instrument Panel Harness (UWG) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9590 X401 X401 Headliner Harness to Body Harness Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9591 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9592 X405 X405 Body Harness to POA Fuel Tank Harness Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9593 X406 X406 Body Harness to Rear Bumper Harness (UD7) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9594 X407 X407 Body Harness to Left Rear Lamp Harness Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9595 X408 X408 Body Harness to Right Rear Lamp Harness Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9596 X411 X411 Body Harness to Chassis Harness X416 X416 Headliner Harness to POA Sunroof Harness (CF5) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9597 X444 X444 Trailer Extension Harness to Body Harness (V92) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9598 X450 X450 Trailer Pigtail Harness to Trailer Extension Harness (V92) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9599 X500 X500 Body Harness to Driver Door Harness Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9600 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9601 X505 X505 Driver Door Harness to Driver Door Trim Harness Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9602 X600 X600 Body Harness to Passenger Door Harness Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9603 X605 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9604 X605 Passenger Door Harness to Passenger Door Trim Harness Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9605 X700 - X799 X700 Body Harness to Left Rear Door Harness Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9606 X800 - X899 X800 Body Harness to Right Rear Door Harness Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9607 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9608 X900 X900 Body Harness to Liftgate Harness Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9609 X901 X901 Body Harness to Liftgate Harness Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9610 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9611 X902 X902 Liftgate Harness to Left Rear Lamp Harness (GMC) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9612 X903 X903 Liftgate Harness to Right Rear Lamp Harness (GMC) X904 X904 License Lamp Harness to Liftgate Harness Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9613 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9614 Multiple Junction Connector: Diagrams Splices By Number JX201 Splice Pack Connector End Views JX201 JX202 Splice Pack Connector End Views JX202 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector End Views By Name > Page 9615 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Relay > Component Information > Service and Repair > Relay Replacement (Attached to Wire Harness) Power Distribution Relay: Service and Repair Relay Replacement (Attached to Wire Harness) Relay Replacement (Attached to Wire Harness) Removal Procedure 1. Locate the relay. Refer to the Master Electrical Component List (See: Locations/Component Locations/A - Z Index) to locate the relay in the vehicle. 2. Remove any fasteners which hold the relay in place. 3. Remove any connector position assurance (CPA) devices or secondary locks. Note: Use care when removing a relay in a wiring harness when the relay is secured by fasteners or tape. 4. Separate the relay (1) from the wire harness connector (2). Installation Procedure 1. Connect the relay (1) to the wire harness connector (2). 2. Install any connector position assurance (CPA) devices or secondary locks. 3. Install the relay using any fasteners or tape that originally held the relay in place. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Relay > Component Information > Service and Repair > Relay Replacement (Attached to Wire Harness) > Page 9620 Power Distribution Relay: Service and Repair Relay Replacement (Within an Electrical Center) Relay Replacement (Within an Electrical Center) Special Tools J 43244 Relay Puller Pliers Removal Procedure 1. Remove the electrical center cover. 2. Locate the relay. Refer to Electrical Center Identification Views (See: Fuse/Application and ID) to locate the electrical center where the relay exists. Note: * Always note the orientation of the relay. * If equipped with a notch style relay; observe the location of the notch on the old relay to verify the new relay is installed with the notch in the same location. * Ensure that the electrical center is secure, as not to put added stress on the wires or terminals. 3. Using the J 43244 (1) position the tool on opposing corners of the relay (2). Caution: Use J43244 to pull the relay straight out from the electrical center terminals. The use of pliers or a flat bladed tool could damage the electrical center. 4. Remove the relay (2) from the electrical center. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Relay > Component Information > Service and Repair > Relay Replacement (Attached to Wire Harness) > Page 9621 1. Install the relay (2) in the same position as removed. 2. Install the electrical center cover. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Accessory Relay > Component Information > Locations Accessory Relay: Locations Electrical Center Identification Views X51A Fuse Block - Instrument Panel Label (before A6284015) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Accessory Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 9626 X51A Fuse Block - Instrument Panel Label (A6284015 and after) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Accessory Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 9627 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Accessory Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 9628 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Accessory Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 9629 Accessory Relay: Diagrams X80A Accessory Power Receptacle - Center Console 1 X80B Accessory Power Receptacle - Center Console 2 X80G Accessory Power Receptacle - Instrument Panel Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Accessory Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 9630 X80R Accessory Power Receptacle - Rear Compartment Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Relay > Component Information > Service and Repair > Relay Replacement (Attached to Wire Harness) Power Distribution Relay: Service and Repair Relay Replacement (Attached to Wire Harness) Relay Replacement (Attached to Wire Harness) Removal Procedure 1. Locate the relay. Refer to the Master Electrical Component List (See: Locations/Component Locations/A - Z Index) to locate the relay in the vehicle. 2. Remove any fasteners which hold the relay in place. 3. Remove any connector position assurance (CPA) devices or secondary locks. Note: Use care when removing a relay in a wiring harness when the relay is secured by fasteners or tape. 4. Separate the relay (1) from the wire harness connector (2). Installation Procedure 1. Connect the relay (1) to the wire harness connector (2). 2. Install any connector position assurance (CPA) devices or secondary locks. 3. Install the relay using any fasteners or tape that originally held the relay in place. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Relay > Component Information > Service and Repair > Relay Replacement (Attached to Wire Harness) > Page 9635 Power Distribution Relay: Service and Repair Relay Replacement (Within an Electrical Center) Relay Replacement (Within an Electrical Center) Special Tools J 43244 Relay Puller Pliers Removal Procedure 1. Remove the electrical center cover. 2. Locate the relay. Refer to Electrical Center Identification Views (See: Fuse/Application and ID) to locate the electrical center where the relay exists. Note: * Always note the orientation of the relay. * If equipped with a notch style relay; observe the location of the notch on the old relay to verify the new relay is installed with the notch in the same location. * Ensure that the electrical center is secure, as not to put added stress on the wires or terminals. 3. Using the J 43244 (1) position the tool on opposing corners of the relay (2). Caution: Use J43244 to pull the relay straight out from the electrical center terminals. The use of pliers or a flat bladed tool could damage the electrical center. 4. Remove the relay (2) from the electrical center. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Relay > Component Information > Service and Repair > Relay Replacement (Attached to Wire Harness) > Page 9636 1. Install the relay (2) in the same position as removed. 2. Install the electrical center cover. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood Relay Box: Application and ID Fuse Block - Underhood Electrical Center Identification Views X50A Fuse Block - Underhood, Label Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 9641 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 9642 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 9643 X50A Fuse Block - Underhood, Top View X50A Fuse Block - Underhood, Bottom View Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 9644 X50A Fuse Block - Underhood X1 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 9645 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 9646 X50A Fuse Block - Underhood X2 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 9647 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 9648 X50A Fuse Block - Underhood X3 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 9649 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 9650 X50A Fuse Block - Underhood X4 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 9651 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 9652 X50A Fuse Block - Underhood X5 X50A Fuse Block - Underhood X6 (LAF) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 9653 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 9654 Relay Box: Application and ID Fuse Block - Instrument Panel Label Electrical Center Identification Views X51A Fuse Block - Instrument Panel Label (before A6284015) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 9655 X51A Fuse Block - Instrument Panel Label (A6284015 and after) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 9656 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 9657 X51A Fuse Block - Instrument Panel, Top View X51A Fuse Block - Instrument Panel, Bottom View Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 9658 X51A Fuse Block - Instrument Panel Wire Entry Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 9659 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 9660 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 9661 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood Relay Box: Application and ID Fuse Block - Underhood Electrical Center Identification Views X50A Fuse Block - Underhood, Label Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 9666 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 9667 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 9668 X50A Fuse Block - Underhood, Top View X50A Fuse Block - Underhood, Bottom View Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 9669 X50A Fuse Block - Underhood X1 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 9670 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 9671 X50A Fuse Block - Underhood X2 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 9672 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 9673 X50A Fuse Block - Underhood X3 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 9674 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 9675 X50A Fuse Block - Underhood X4 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 9676 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 9677 X50A Fuse Block - Underhood X5 X50A Fuse Block - Underhood X6 (LAF) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 9678 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 9679 Relay Box: Application and ID Fuse Block - Instrument Panel Label Electrical Center Identification Views X51A Fuse Block - Instrument Panel Label (before A6284015) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 9680 X51A Fuse Block - Instrument Panel Label (A6284015 and after) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 9681 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 9682 X51A Fuse Block - Instrument Panel, Top View X51A Fuse Block - Instrument Panel, Bottom View Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 9683 X51A Fuse Block - Instrument Panel Wire Entry Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 9684 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 9685 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - Underhood > Page 9686 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 09167 > Jul > 09 > Campaign - Missing Seal/Engine-to-Body Inline Connector Wiring Harness: Recalls Campaign - Missing Seal/Engine-to-Body Inline Connector SERVICE UPDATE Bulletin No.: 09167 Date: July 23, 2009 Subject: 09167 - Service Update for Inventory and Customer Vehicles Missing Seal on Engine-to-Body Inline Connector - Expires with Base Warranty Models: 2010 Chevrolet Equinox THIS SERVICE UPDATE INCLUDES VEHICLES IN DEALER INVENTORY AND CUSTOMER VEHICLES THAT RETURN TO THE DEALERSHIP FOR ANY REASON. IT WILL EXPIRE AT THE END OF THE INVOLVED VEHICLE'S NEW VEHICLE LIMITED WARRANTY PERIOD. Purpose This bulletin provides a service procedure to install a connector seal to the engine-to-body inline connector on certain 2010 model year Chevrolet Equinox vehicles. These vehicles are missing a seal on the engine-to-body inline connector. This service procedure should be completed as soon as possible on involved vehicles currently in dealer inventory and customer vehicles that return to the dealer for any type of service during the New Vehicle Limited Warranty coverage period. Vehicles Involved A list of involved vehicles currently in dealer inventory is available on the "Service Update Bulletin Information" link under the "Service" tab in GM GlobalConnect (US), or attached to the Dealer Communication (Canada), used to release this bulletin. Customer vehicles that return for service, for any reason, and are still covered under the vehicles base warranty, and are within the VIN breakpoints provided below, should be checked for vehicle eligibility in the appropriate system listed below. Important: Dealers are to confirm vehicle eligibility prior to beginning repairs by using the GM Vehicle Inquiry System (GMVIS). Not all vehicles within the above breakpoints may be involved. Parts Information US Only: Connector seals will be shipped from the Warranty Parts Center (WPC) at no charge via UPS 2-Day Delivery - Attention: Parts Manager, to dealers with involved vehicles beginning Friday, July 24, 2009. All dealers who have involved vehicles should have the seals no later than Wednesday, July 29, 2009. Seals needed for dealer-trades are to be obtained by calling the WPC, and requesting WPC P/N 479. Canada Only: Connector seals will be available by calling the WINS Assistance Centre. The seals will be shipped at no charge via Overnight Delivery. Only dealers with affected vehicles should call for these parts Service Procedure 1. Unlock the vehicle and open the door. 2. Place the key FOB on the driver seat (avoid inadvertent FOB key press). 3. Release the hood latch. 4. Exit the vehicle and close the door. 5. Open the hood of the vehicle. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 09167 > Jul > 09 > Campaign - Missing Seal/Engine-to-Body Inline Connector > Page 9695 6. Locate the engine-to-body inline connector (4). This connector (4) is located on the passenger side of the engine compartment near the shock tower (1), air cleaner outlet duct (2), and air cleaner assembly (3). Refer to the illustration. 7. Remove the connector from the shock tower (1) by gently pulling the connector rearward and away from the shock tower. 8. Disengage the connection by pressing the side of the connector and pulling the grey lever to the back. 9. Install a new connector seal. Inspect the connector seal to ensure that the connector seal is not cracked, cut, or damaged. 1. Place one edge of the seal over one edge of the terminal housing as shown. Using both hands, stretch the remaining seal around the terminal housing. 2. Verify that the seal is seated properly around terminal housing. There must be NO TWISTING of the seal and it MUST sit flush as shown in the illustration. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 09167 > Jul > 09 > Campaign - Missing Seal/Engine-to-Body Inline Connector > Page 9696 3. Using tool number 12094441 or a wooden craft tool, gently push the seal to the back of connector, applying pressure to all four sides of the seal evenly. 4. Rotate the connector to the side of the clip and look through the connector window to verify that the seal is fully seated at the back of connector. Refer to the illustration to view an improperly (1) and properly installed (2) connector seal. 10. Engage both connectors and verify that the lever is fully locked by attempting to open it without pressing on the unlocking tabs. 11. Install the connector (2) on the connector clip located on the shock tower (1). Pull on the connector to ensure that it is secure on the clip. 12. Close the hood. 13. Open the front driver's side door. 14. Sit in the driver's seat and close the door. Note If the vehicle passes ALL of the inspection points outlined in Steps 15-20, no further action is required. If the vehicle does NOT pass all inspection points, ensure that the connector pins are NOT bent and that the connector is seated and locked properly. Repeat Steps 15-20 if required to ensure proper installation of the seal and connector. 15. Turn the key to the RUN position. Do NOT start the engine. If the engine telltale (MIL) is ON solid, the vehicle PASSES this inspection point. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 09167 > Jul > 09 > Campaign - Missing Seal/Engine-to-Body Inline Connector > Page 9697 16. Turn the key to crank (start engine). If the engine starts, the vehicle PASSES this inspection point. 17. Wait 10 seconds, if the engine telltale (MIL) is OFF, the vehicle PASSES this inspection point. 18. Push ECO button next to shifter knob (present only on 4 cylinder engine). If the ECO telltale comes ON, the vehicle PASSES this inspection point. 19. Turn the steering wheel 1/4 turn. If the steering wheel is easy to turn, power assist is present. The vehicle PASSES this inspection point. 20. Press accelerator pedal. If the engine RPMs increase, the vehicle PASSES this inspection point. Claim Information Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 11-09-41-001 > Mar > 11 > Restraint System - SIR Light On, DTC B0014/B0021 Set Wiring Harness: Customer Interest Restraint System - SIR Light On, DTC B0014/B0021 Set TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 11-09-41-001 Date: March 10, 2011 Subject: SIR Light On, DTC B0014 and/or B0021 Set in Sensing and Diagnostics Module (SDM) Models: 2010-2011 Chevrolet Equinox 2010-2011 GMC Terrain Condition Some customers may comment that the SIR light is on, or has been on recently. When checking the vehicle for DTCs, the SDM may report any of the following codes: B0014 02, B0014 04, B0014 0D, B0014 0E, B0021 02, B0021 04, B0021 0D or B0021 0E. This condition may be duplicated by moving the front seat forward and backward or by bouncing on the lower cushion on the affected side. Cause The codes can be set when the SDM senses a change in resistance in the circuit for the seat mounted side impact side airbag. The change in resistance can be small and it can be temporary, but the SDM can still sense the change and set a code. In this case, the airbags will work as intended in a crash but the system should be checked for the cause of the resistance change. The source of the issue can be at or in the connector that connects the airbag from the seat to the body harness. Connector X304 (B0014 LF Side Deployment Loop) is located under the driver seat cushion and connector X303 (B0021 RF Side Deployment Loop) is located under the passenger seat cushion. Correction Replace the driver and passenger seat back harness to seat cushion harness connectors with service kit, P/N 20968489. The two gray connector (Christmas tree style) retainers provided in the kit will not be used. The new connector will be secured to the seat using clip, P/N 19258316. Follow the steps below. Important DO NOT replace the sensing and diagnostic module (SDM), side sensors or air bag modules. Important Both driver and passenger seats must be repaired when this concern occurs even if only one DTC code is set. The service kit contains sufficient components to repair both seat connectors. 1. Disable the SIR system. Refer to SIR Disabling and Enabling in SI. Note Only use hand tools to remove the seat to floor mounting bolts. If there are any problems with bolt removal, refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 10-08-50-002. 2. Remove the seat to floor rear mounting bolts. Loosen the seat from the front hooks and tilt it back to expose the underside of the seat. Refer to Driver or Passenger Seat Replacement procedure in SI. 3. Disconnect the seat to body harness connector. Disconnect the seat airbag connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 11-09-41-001 > Mar > 11 > Restraint System - SIR Light On, DTC B0014/B0021 Set > Page 9703 Important Note the wire colors on the seat airbag harness and body harness. Ensure that the wire colors are matched when installing into the new connector. 4. Cut both wires from the body harness connector and seat airbag harness connector as close to the connector housing (1) as possible to minimize wire length loss. Slide the conduit away on the seat airbag harness and remove just enough tape on the body harness to access the wires to install the terminals and seals. Important Use caution when stripping insulation. Take care not to cut through the wire strands. 5. Slide the wire seals onto all four leads back enough to enable removal of the insulation. Install the blue seals (1) on the seat back harness and the white seals (2) on the seat cushion harness. Strip the insulation off all four leads 5 mm (3/16 in). Align the seals with the wire insulation. 6. On the seat back harness, position two FEMALE terminals onto the wires. Caution must be used not to position the wire too far forward as it may interfere with the mating portion of the terminal. Crimp the terminals on to the bare wire using the J38125-7 crimp tool, jaw E (1). Repeat the procedure using two MALE terminals on the seat cushion harness. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 11-09-41-001 > Mar > 11 > Restraint System - SIR Light On, DTC B0014/B0021 Set > Page 9704 7. Position the wire seal to the terminal and crimp the seal and insulation using the J-38125-6 crimp tool, jaw 1 (1). The completed terminal and seal should appear as shown above (seat back harness connector shown). Note Avoid getting solder on the terminal end or overheating the terminal. Warning DO NOT use soldering equipment that is battery or electric powered. These types of soldering irons can induce voltage into the circuit, which may cause inflator module deployment and/or damage to electrical components. Use only the EL-28125-5A Ultra Torch or another butane fueled soldering iron when working on SIR circuits. 8. Solder all four terminals at the wire crimp. 9. Slide the two body harness terminals through the opening of the orange connector position assurance (CPA) (1). Important Ensure that the appropriate wire colors match up (as noted in Step 4) when the connection is made between the seat airbag harness and body harness. 10. Slide all four terminals (2) into the appropriate connector body as shown above. Install the blue terminal position assurance (TPA) devices onto the connector ends. 11. Add NyoGel 760 Lubricant, P/N 12377900 (in Canada, use P/N 10953529) to the terminals on both sides of the connections. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 11-09-41-001 > Mar > 11 > Restraint System - SIR Light On, DTC B0014/B0021 Set > Page 9705 12. Wrap anti-abrasion electrical tape around the two exposed wires on the body harness up to the back of the connector. Obtain "*Woven Polyester (PET) Electrical Tape" (Special Order PN RZ97156A00) from Kent Automotive. Refer to Parts Information below. Reinstall the conduit on the seat airbag harness. 13. Attach the connector to the bottom of the seat using clip, P/N 19258316. 14. Reinstall the seat. Refer to Driver or Passenger Seat Replacement procedure in SI. 15. Repeat the above procedure on the other seat. 16. Enable the SIR system. Refer to SIR Disabling and Enabling in SI. 17. Turn the ignition on and use the diagnostic tool to clear the SDM DTCs and verify that the issue has been corrected. If the code is still current, refer to the appropriate diagnostic procedure found in SI. *We believe this source and their products to be reliable. There may be additional manufacturers of such products/materials. General Motors does not endorse, indicate any preference for or assume any responsibility for the products or material from this firm or for any such items that may be available from other sources. Parts Information Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 10-08-42-001B > Jan > 11 > Lighting - Low Beam Headlamp(s) Inoperative Wiring Harness: Customer Interest Lighting - Low Beam Headlamp(s) Inoperative TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 10-08-42-001B Date: January 24, 2011 Subject: Low Beam Headlamp Bulb Diagnosis/Replacement (Inspect Bulb and Connector) Models: 2008-2011 Buick Enclave 2007-2011 Cadillac Escalade, Escalade ESV, Escalade EXT 2008-2011 Cadillac CTS, CTS-V 2010-2011 Cadillac CTS Sport Wagon, SRX 2007-2011 Chevrolet Avalanche, Silverado, Suburban, Tahoe 2008-2011 Chevrolet Malibu 2009-2011 Chevrolet Traverse 2010-2011 Chevrolet Equinox 2007-2011 GMC Acadia, Sierra, Yukon, Yukon XL, Yukon Denali, Yukon Denali XL 2010-2011 GMC Terrain 2006-2010 Pontiac G6 2007-2010 Saturn AURA, OUTLOOK Attention: This bulletin DOES NOT apply to vehicles equipped with High Intensity Discharge (HID) lamps. Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the part number for the recommended splice sleeve. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 10-08-42-001A (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Condition Some customers may comment that the low beam headlamp is inoperative. Correction DO NOT replace the entire headlamp assembly for this condition. Replace the bulb and inspect the connector following the procedure below. 1. Remove the headlamp bulb. Refer to Headlamp Bulb Replacement procedure in SI. 2. Inspect the connector. - If the connector is NOT discolored or damaged, replace the bulb only. For bulb part numbers, see Headlamp Bulb (Low Beam) in Group 02.727 of the appropriate Parts Catalog. - If the connector is discolored at the bulb interface, replace the connector (service pigtail listed below) and bulb. Important Use only Duraseal splice sleeves (salmon, P/N 19168446). Other splice sleeves may not protect the splice from moisture or provide a good electrical connection. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves in SI for splicing procedures. 1. Cut the wires of the connector approximately 45 mm (13/4 in) from the connector and splice in the service pigtail connector. Ensure that the splices are not above the connector when re-installing. 2. Replace the bulb. 3. Verify that the headlamp is fully functional. Parts Information Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 10-08-42-001B > Jan > 11 > Lighting - Low Beam Headlamp(s) Inoperative > Page 9710 Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules Wiring Harness: Customer Interest Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 09-06-03-004D Date: December 08, 2010 Subject: Intermittent No Crank/No Start, No Module Communication, MIL, Warning Lights, Vehicle Messages or DTCs Set by Various Control Modules - Diagnosing and Repairing Fretting Corrosion (Disconnect Affected Connector and Apply Dielectric Lubricant) Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks Attention: This repair can be applied to ANY electrical connection including, but not limited to: lighting, body electrical, in-line connections, powertrain control sensors, etc. DO NOT over apply lubricant to the point where it prevents the full engagement of sealed connectors. A light coating on the terminal surfaces is sufficient to correct the condition. Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the Attention statement and add the 2011 model year. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 09-06-03-004C (Section 06 Engine/Propulsion System). Condition Some customers may comment on any of the following conditions: - An intermittent no crank/no start - Intermittent malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) illumination - Intermittent service lamp illumination - Intermittent service message(s) being displayed The technician may determine that he is unable to duplicate the intermittent condition. Cause This condition may be caused by a buildup of nonconductive insulating oxidized debris known as fretting corrosion, occurring between two electrical contact surfaces of the connection or connector. This may be caused by any of the following conditions: - Vibration - Thermal cycling - Poor connection/terminal retention - Micro motion - A connector, component or wiring harness not properly secured resulting in movement On low current signal circuits this condition may cause high resistance, resulting in intermittent connections. On high current power circuits this condition may cause permanent increases in the resistance and may cause a device to become inoperative. Representative List of Control Modules and Components The following is only a representative list of control modules and components that may be affected by this connection or connector condition and DOES NOT include every possible module or component for every vehicle. - Blower Control Module - Body Control Module (BCM) - Communication Interface Module (CIM) - Cooling Fan Control Module - Electronic Brake Control Module (EBCM) - Electronic Brake and Traction Control Module (EBTCM) - Electronic Suspension Control (ESC) Module - Engine Control Module (ECM) - Heating, Ventilation and Air Conditioning (HVAC) Control Module Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules > Page 9715 - HVAC Actuator - Inflatable Restraint Sensing and Diagnostic Module (SDM) - Any AIR BAG module - Seatbelt Lap Anchor Pretensioner - Seatbelt Retractor Pretensioner - An SIR system connection or connector condition resulting in the following DTCs being set: B0015, B0016, B0019, B0020, B0022, or B0023 - Powertrain Control Module (PCM) - Remote Control Door Lock Receiver (RCDLR) - Transmission Control Module (TCM) Correction Important DO NOT replace the control module, wiring or component for the following conditions: - The condition is intermittent and cannot be duplicated. - The condition is present and by disconnecting and reconnecting the connector the condition can no longer be duplicated. Use the following procedure to correct the conditions listed above. 1. Install a scan tool and perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle. Retrieve and record any existing history or current DTCs from all of the control modules (refer to SI). ‹› If any DTC(s) are set, refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle to identify the connector(s) of the control module/component which may be causing the condition (refer to SI). ‹› If DTCs are not set, refer to Symptoms - Vehicle to identify the connector(s) of the control module/component which may be causing the condition (refer to SI). 2. When identified, use the appropriate DTC Diagnostics, Symptoms, Schematics, Component Connector End Views and Component Locator documents to locate and disconnect the affected harness connector(s) which are causing the condition. Note Fretting corrosion looks like little dark smudges on electrical terminals and appear where the actual electrical contact is being made. In less severe cases it may be unable to be seen or identified without the use of a magnifying glass. Important DO NOT apply an excessive amount of dielectric lubricant to the connectors as shown, as hydrolock may result when attempting to mate the connectors. Use ONLY a clean nylon brush that is dedicated to the repair of the conditions in this bulletin. 3. With a one-inch nylon bristle brush, apply dielectric lubricant to both the module/component side and the harness side of the affected connector(s). 4. Reconnect the affected connector(s) and wipe away any excess lubricant that may be present. 5. Attempt to duplicate the condition by using the following information: - DTC Diagnostic Procedure - Circuit/System Description - Conditions for Running the DTC - Conditions for Setting the DTC - Diagnostic Aids - Circuit/System Verification ‹› If the condition cannot be duplicated, the repair is complete. ‹› If the condition can be duplicated, then follow the appropriate DTC, Symptom or Circuit/System Testing procedure (refer to SI). Repair Order Documentation Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules > Page 9716 Important The following information MUST be documented on the repair order. Failure to do so may result in a chargeback. - Customer vehicle condition. - Was a Service Lamp or Service Message illuminated? If yes, specify which Service Lamp or Service Message. - Was a DTC(s) set? If yes, specify which DTC(s) were set. - After following the procedure contained within this bulletin, could the condition be duplicated? ‹› If the condition was not duplicated, then document the affected module/component connector name and number on the repair order. - If the condition was duplicated after the procedure contained within this bulletin was followed, and additional diagnosis led to the replacement of a module or component, the SI Document ID Number MUST be written on the repair order. Parts Information Alternate Distributor For All of North America Note NyoGel(R) 760G Lubricant* is equivalent to GMSPO P/N 12377900, and P/N 10953529 (Canada), specified for use to correct the condition in this bulletin. *We believe this source and their products to be reliable. There may be additional manufacturers of such products/materials. General Motors does not endorse, indicate any preference for, or assume any responsibility for the products or material from this firm or for any such items that may be available from other sources. Warranty Information (excluding Saab Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the appropriate/closest labor operation depending upon the module/component connection that the dielectric lubricant was applied to: Warranty Information (Saab Models) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules > Page 9717 For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the appropriate/closest labor operation depending upon the module/component connection that the dielectric lubricant was applied to refer to the table above. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 07-06-04-019D > Jun > 10 > Electrical - Intermittent MIL/DTC P2138/Reduced Power Wiring Harness: Customer Interest Electrical - Intermittent MIL/DTC P2138/Reduced Power TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 07-06-04-019D Date: June 28, 2010 Subject: Intermittent Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) Illuminated, DTC P2138 with Reduced Engine Power (Repair Instrument Panel (IP) to Body Harness Connector) Models: 2005-2011 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (Including Saturn) 2005-2009 HUMMER H2 2006-2010 HUMMER H3 2005-2009 Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the model years and warranty information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 07-06-04-019C (Section 06 - Engine/Propulsion System) Condition - Some customers may comment on an intermittent malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) being Illuminated with a message or an indicator that displays Reduced Engine Power. - The technician may observe on a scan tool DTC P2138 - Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor 1-2 Correlation set as Current or in History. Cause This condition may be caused by water intrusion into the instrument panel (IP) to body harness connector, which carries the APP sensor signals to the ECM/PCM. This water intrusion results in a voltage difference between APP Sensor 1 and APP Sensor 2 that exceeds a predetermined value for more than a calibrated period of time, setting P2138. Correction Note Aftermarket equipment can generate DTC P2138 and/or other DTCs. 1. Verify that aftermarket equipment is not electrically connected to any of the APP sensor signal or low reference circuits or to any other ECM/PCM 5V reference or low reference circuits. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories in SI. 2. Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle. ‹› If any 5V reference DTCs are set, refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle. ‹› If any 5V reference DTCs are not set, proceed to Step 3. 3. Locate the IP to body harness connector, which may be located in and around the left hand kick panel area or inside the IP. Depending on the vehicle and model year, refer to Wiring Systems or Power and Signal Distribution in SI. Note Some examples of potential water leaks are: A-pillar seals, sunroof drain lines (if equipped) and windshield/cowl sealing. 4. Inspect for a water leak in the area. If necessary use a water hose to determine the source of the leak. Refer to General Information > Water Leaks in SI. ‹› If a water leak is observed, repair as necessary. Verify the effectiveness of the repair. 5. Inspect the IP to body harness connector terminals for corrosion and debris. Refer to Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections in SI. ‹› If any corrosion and/or debris is observed, repair as necessary. 6. After completing the repair, verify the proper operation of the system. Depending on the vehicle and model year, perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification procedure or refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle in SI. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 07-06-04-019D > Jun > 10 > Electrical - Intermittent MIL/DTC P2138/Reduced Power > Page 9722 Warranty Information (excluding Saab U.S. Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the appropriate labor operation for the source of the water leak Warranty Information (Saab U.S. Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 11-09-41-001 > Mar > 11 > Restraint System - SIR Light On, DTC B0014/B0021 Set Wiring Harness: All Technical Service Bulletins Restraint System - SIR Light On, DTC B0014/B0021 Set TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 11-09-41-001 Date: March 10, 2011 Subject: SIR Light On, DTC B0014 and/or B0021 Set in Sensing and Diagnostics Module (SDM) Models: 2010-2011 Chevrolet Equinox 2010-2011 GMC Terrain Condition Some customers may comment that the SIR light is on, or has been on recently. When checking the vehicle for DTCs, the SDM may report any of the following codes: B0014 02, B0014 04, B0014 0D, B0014 0E, B0021 02, B0021 04, B0021 0D or B0021 0E. This condition may be duplicated by moving the front seat forward and backward or by bouncing on the lower cushion on the affected side. Cause The codes can be set when the SDM senses a change in resistance in the circuit for the seat mounted side impact side airbag. The change in resistance can be small and it can be temporary, but the SDM can still sense the change and set a code. In this case, the airbags will work as intended in a crash but the system should be checked for the cause of the resistance change. The source of the issue can be at or in the connector that connects the airbag from the seat to the body harness. Connector X304 (B0014 LF Side Deployment Loop) is located under the driver seat cushion and connector X303 (B0021 RF Side Deployment Loop) is located under the passenger seat cushion. Correction Replace the driver and passenger seat back harness to seat cushion harness connectors with service kit, P/N 20968489. The two gray connector (Christmas tree style) retainers provided in the kit will not be used. The new connector will be secured to the seat using clip, P/N 19258316. Follow the steps below. Important DO NOT replace the sensing and diagnostic module (SDM), side sensors or air bag modules. Important Both driver and passenger seats must be repaired when this concern occurs even if only one DTC code is set. The service kit contains sufficient components to repair both seat connectors. 1. Disable the SIR system. Refer to SIR Disabling and Enabling in SI. Note Only use hand tools to remove the seat to floor mounting bolts. If there are any problems with bolt removal, refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 10-08-50-002. 2. Remove the seat to floor rear mounting bolts. Loosen the seat from the front hooks and tilt it back to expose the underside of the seat. Refer to Driver or Passenger Seat Replacement procedure in SI. 3. Disconnect the seat to body harness connector. Disconnect the seat airbag connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 11-09-41-001 > Mar > 11 > Restraint System - SIR Light On, DTC B0014/B0021 Set > Page 9728 Important Note the wire colors on the seat airbag harness and body harness. Ensure that the wire colors are matched when installing into the new connector. 4. Cut both wires from the body harness connector and seat airbag harness connector as close to the connector housing (1) as possible to minimize wire length loss. Slide the conduit away on the seat airbag harness and remove just enough tape on the body harness to access the wires to install the terminals and seals. Important Use caution when stripping insulation. Take care not to cut through the wire strands. 5. Slide the wire seals onto all four leads back enough to enable removal of the insulation. Install the blue seals (1) on the seat back harness and the white seals (2) on the seat cushion harness. Strip the insulation off all four leads 5 mm (3/16 in). Align the seals with the wire insulation. 6. On the seat back harness, position two FEMALE terminals onto the wires. Caution must be used not to position the wire too far forward as it may interfere with the mating portion of the terminal. Crimp the terminals on to the bare wire using the J38125-7 crimp tool, jaw E (1). Repeat the procedure using two MALE terminals on the seat cushion harness. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 11-09-41-001 > Mar > 11 > Restraint System - SIR Light On, DTC B0014/B0021 Set > Page 9729 7. Position the wire seal to the terminal and crimp the seal and insulation using the J-38125-6 crimp tool, jaw 1 (1). The completed terminal and seal should appear as shown above (seat back harness connector shown). Note Avoid getting solder on the terminal end or overheating the terminal. Warning DO NOT use soldering equipment that is battery or electric powered. These types of soldering irons can induce voltage into the circuit, which may cause inflator module deployment and/or damage to electrical components. Use only the EL-28125-5A Ultra Torch or another butane fueled soldering iron when working on SIR circuits. 8. Solder all four terminals at the wire crimp. 9. Slide the two body harness terminals through the opening of the orange connector position assurance (CPA) (1). Important Ensure that the appropriate wire colors match up (as noted in Step 4) when the connection is made between the seat airbag harness and body harness. 10. Slide all four terminals (2) into the appropriate connector body as shown above. Install the blue terminal position assurance (TPA) devices onto the connector ends. 11. Add NyoGel 760 Lubricant, P/N 12377900 (in Canada, use P/N 10953529) to the terminals on both sides of the connections. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 11-09-41-001 > Mar > 11 > Restraint System - SIR Light On, DTC B0014/B0021 Set > Page 9730 12. Wrap anti-abrasion electrical tape around the two exposed wires on the body harness up to the back of the connector. Obtain "*Woven Polyester (PET) Electrical Tape" (Special Order PN RZ97156A00) from Kent Automotive. Refer to Parts Information below. Reinstall the conduit on the seat airbag harness. 13. Attach the connector to the bottom of the seat using clip, P/N 19258316. 14. Reinstall the seat. Refer to Driver or Passenger Seat Replacement procedure in SI. 15. Repeat the above procedure on the other seat. 16. Enable the SIR system. Refer to SIR Disabling and Enabling in SI. 17. Turn the ignition on and use the diagnostic tool to clear the SDM DTCs and verify that the issue has been corrected. If the code is still current, refer to the appropriate diagnostic procedure found in SI. *We believe this source and their products to be reliable. There may be additional manufacturers of such products/materials. General Motors does not endorse, indicate any preference for or assume any responsibility for the products or material from this firm or for any such items that may be available from other sources. Parts Information Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 10-08-42-001B > Jan > 11 > Lighting - Low Beam Headlamp(s) Inoperative Wiring Harness: All Technical Service Bulletins Lighting - Low Beam Headlamp(s) Inoperative TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 10-08-42-001B Date: January 24, 2011 Subject: Low Beam Headlamp Bulb Diagnosis/Replacement (Inspect Bulb and Connector) Models: 2008-2011 Buick Enclave 2007-2011 Cadillac Escalade, Escalade ESV, Escalade EXT 2008-2011 Cadillac CTS, CTS-V 2010-2011 Cadillac CTS Sport Wagon, SRX 2007-2011 Chevrolet Avalanche, Silverado, Suburban, Tahoe 2008-2011 Chevrolet Malibu 2009-2011 Chevrolet Traverse 2010-2011 Chevrolet Equinox 2007-2011 GMC Acadia, Sierra, Yukon, Yukon XL, Yukon Denali, Yukon Denali XL 2010-2011 GMC Terrain 2006-2010 Pontiac G6 2007-2010 Saturn AURA, OUTLOOK Attention: This bulletin DOES NOT apply to vehicles equipped with High Intensity Discharge (HID) lamps. Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the part number for the recommended splice sleeve. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 10-08-42-001A (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Condition Some customers may comment that the low beam headlamp is inoperative. Correction DO NOT replace the entire headlamp assembly for this condition. Replace the bulb and inspect the connector following the procedure below. 1. Remove the headlamp bulb. Refer to Headlamp Bulb Replacement procedure in SI. 2. Inspect the connector. - If the connector is NOT discolored or damaged, replace the bulb only. For bulb part numbers, see Headlamp Bulb (Low Beam) in Group 02.727 of the appropriate Parts Catalog. - If the connector is discolored at the bulb interface, replace the connector (service pigtail listed below) and bulb. Important Use only Duraseal splice sleeves (salmon, P/N 19168446). Other splice sleeves may not protect the splice from moisture or provide a good electrical connection. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves in SI for splicing procedures. 1. Cut the wires of the connector approximately 45 mm (13/4 in) from the connector and splice in the service pigtail connector. Ensure that the splices are not above the connector when re-installing. 2. Replace the bulb. 3. Verify that the headlamp is fully functional. Parts Information Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 10-08-42-001B > Jan > 11 > Lighting - Low Beam Headlamp(s) Inoperative > Page 9735 Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules Wiring Harness: All Technical Service Bulletins Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 09-06-03-004D Date: December 08, 2010 Subject: Intermittent No Crank/No Start, No Module Communication, MIL, Warning Lights, Vehicle Messages or DTCs Set by Various Control Modules - Diagnosing and Repairing Fretting Corrosion (Disconnect Affected Connector and Apply Dielectric Lubricant) Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks Attention: This repair can be applied to ANY electrical connection including, but not limited to: lighting, body electrical, in-line connections, powertrain control sensors, etc. DO NOT over apply lubricant to the point where it prevents the full engagement of sealed connectors. A light coating on the terminal surfaces is sufficient to correct the condition. Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the Attention statement and add the 2011 model year. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 09-06-03-004C (Section 06 Engine/Propulsion System). Condition Some customers may comment on any of the following conditions: - An intermittent no crank/no start - Intermittent malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) illumination - Intermittent service lamp illumination - Intermittent service message(s) being displayed The technician may determine that he is unable to duplicate the intermittent condition. Cause This condition may be caused by a buildup of nonconductive insulating oxidized debris known as fretting corrosion, occurring between two electrical contact surfaces of the connection or connector. This may be caused by any of the following conditions: - Vibration - Thermal cycling - Poor connection/terminal retention - Micro motion - A connector, component or wiring harness not properly secured resulting in movement On low current signal circuits this condition may cause high resistance, resulting in intermittent connections. On high current power circuits this condition may cause permanent increases in the resistance and may cause a device to become inoperative. Representative List of Control Modules and Components The following is only a representative list of control modules and components that may be affected by this connection or connector condition and DOES NOT include every possible module or component for every vehicle. - Blower Control Module - Body Control Module (BCM) - Communication Interface Module (CIM) - Cooling Fan Control Module - Electronic Brake Control Module (EBCM) - Electronic Brake and Traction Control Module (EBTCM) - Electronic Suspension Control (ESC) Module - Engine Control Module (ECM) - Heating, Ventilation and Air Conditioning (HVAC) Control Module Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules > Page 9740 - HVAC Actuator - Inflatable Restraint Sensing and Diagnostic Module (SDM) - Any AIR BAG module - Seatbelt Lap Anchor Pretensioner - Seatbelt Retractor Pretensioner - An SIR system connection or connector condition resulting in the following DTCs being set: B0015, B0016, B0019, B0020, B0022, or B0023 - Powertrain Control Module (PCM) - Remote Control Door Lock Receiver (RCDLR) - Transmission Control Module (TCM) Correction Important DO NOT replace the control module, wiring or component for the following conditions: - The condition is intermittent and cannot be duplicated. - The condition is present and by disconnecting and reconnecting the connector the condition can no longer be duplicated. Use the following procedure to correct the conditions listed above. 1. Install a scan tool and perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle. Retrieve and record any existing history or current DTCs from all of the control modules (refer to SI). ‹› If any DTC(s) are set, refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle to identify the connector(s) of the control module/component which may be causing the condition (refer to SI). ‹› If DTCs are not set, refer to Symptoms - Vehicle to identify the connector(s) of the control module/component which may be causing the condition (refer to SI). 2. When identified, use the appropriate DTC Diagnostics, Symptoms, Schematics, Component Connector End Views and Component Locator documents to locate and disconnect the affected harness connector(s) which are causing the condition. Note Fretting corrosion looks like little dark smudges on electrical terminals and appear where the actual electrical contact is being made. In less severe cases it may be unable to be seen or identified without the use of a magnifying glass. Important DO NOT apply an excessive amount of dielectric lubricant to the connectors as shown, as hydrolock may result when attempting to mate the connectors. Use ONLY a clean nylon brush that is dedicated to the repair of the conditions in this bulletin. 3. With a one-inch nylon bristle brush, apply dielectric lubricant to both the module/component side and the harness side of the affected connector(s). 4. Reconnect the affected connector(s) and wipe away any excess lubricant that may be present. 5. Attempt to duplicate the condition by using the following information: - DTC Diagnostic Procedure - Circuit/System Description - Conditions for Running the DTC - Conditions for Setting the DTC - Diagnostic Aids - Circuit/System Verification ‹› If the condition cannot be duplicated, the repair is complete. ‹› If the condition can be duplicated, then follow the appropriate DTC, Symptom or Circuit/System Testing procedure (refer to SI). Repair Order Documentation Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules > Page 9741 Important The following information MUST be documented on the repair order. Failure to do so may result in a chargeback. - Customer vehicle condition. - Was a Service Lamp or Service Message illuminated? If yes, specify which Service Lamp or Service Message. - Was a DTC(s) set? If yes, specify which DTC(s) were set. - After following the procedure contained within this bulletin, could the condition be duplicated? ‹› If the condition was not duplicated, then document the affected module/component connector name and number on the repair order. - If the condition was duplicated after the procedure contained within this bulletin was followed, and additional diagnosis led to the replacement of a module or component, the SI Document ID Number MUST be written on the repair order. Parts Information Alternate Distributor For All of North America Note NyoGel(R) 760G Lubricant* is equivalent to GMSPO P/N 12377900, and P/N 10953529 (Canada), specified for use to correct the condition in this bulletin. *We believe this source and their products to be reliable. There may be additional manufacturers of such products/materials. General Motors does not endorse, indicate any preference for, or assume any responsibility for the products or material from this firm or for any such items that may be available from other sources. Warranty Information (excluding Saab Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the appropriate/closest labor operation depending upon the module/component connection that the dielectric lubricant was applied to: Warranty Information (Saab Models) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules > Page 9742 For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the appropriate/closest labor operation depending upon the module/component connection that the dielectric lubricant was applied to refer to the table above. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 10-08-45-001B > Oct > 10 > Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair Wiring Harness: All Technical Service Bulletins Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 10-08-45-001B Date: October 25, 2010 Subject: Information for Electrical Ground Repair - Use New Replacement Fasteners with Conductive Finish Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (including Saturn) 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2011 model year and update the Warranty Information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 10-08-45-001A (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Electrical Ground Repair Overview Proper electrical system function relies on secure, stable and corrosion-free electrical ground connections. Loose, stripped, or corroded connections increase the possibility of improper system function and loss of module communication. These conditions may also lead to unnecessary repairs and component replacement. In general, electrical ground connections are accomplished using one, or a combination of the following attachment methods: - Welded M6 stud and nut - Welded M6 nut and bolt - Welded M8 nut and bolt Determine which attachment method is used and perform the appropriate or alternative repair as described in this bulletin. M6 Weld Stud Replacement Caution Use only the GM-approved replacement fasteners with conductive finish for electrical ground repair. 1. Select a location adjacent the damaged or missing M6 ground stud having 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance behind the panel surface and 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance surrounding the M6 conductive rivet stud flange. 2. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, remove any grease from the repair site and allow to dry. Note Ensure 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance is maintained behind the panel to be drilled. 3. Drill a 10 mm (0.40 in) diameter hole through the panel. 4. Remove paint and primer from the area surrounding the 10 mm (0.40 in) hole until bare metal is visible. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 10-08-45-001B > Oct > 10 > Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair > Page 9747 Important The M6 conductive rivet stud as shown, can accommodate a panel thickness range of 0.7-4.2 mm (0.03-0.17 in). If there are layers of sheet metal, they should be touching without any air gaps to ensure a good ground. 5. Select a M6 conductive rivet stud. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. Note Use the GE-50317 rivet stud tool kit. 6. Place the M6 conductive rivet stud (1) in the 10 mm (0.40 in) hole. Assemble the rivet stud tool (2) with the groove and flare side facing the rivet stud, then the washer and the M6 nut (3). 7. Using a wrench on the rivet stud tool, and a socket on the M6 nut, secure the M6 conductive rivet stud. 8. Ensure the rivet stud is securely fastened, WITHOUT ANY detectable movement. 9. Completely wrap the threads of the rivet stud with painters tape or equivalent. Note The rivet stud and surrounding panel area MUST BE properly refinished PRIOR to the installation of the ground wire terminal and conductive nut to maintain a secure, stable and corrosion-free electrical ground. 10. Refinish the repair area using an anti-corrosion primer. Refer to Anti-Corrosion Treatment and Repair in SI. 11. Allow the refinished repair area to cure sufficiently before removing the protective material applied to the rivet stud threads. 12. Remove the painters tape or equivalent from the rivet stud threads. 13. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, thoroughly clean the rivet stud threads to remove any adhesive and allow to dry. 14. Using a small brush, apply Dielectric Lubricant GM P/N 12377900 (Canadian P/N 10953529) to the threads of the M6 conductive rivet stud. Note Fretting corrosion is a build-up of insulating, oxidized wear debris that can form when there is a small motion between electrical contacts. The oxidized wear debris can accumulate at the electrical contact points causing the electrical resistance across the connection to increase. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 10-08-45-001B > Oct > 10 > Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair > Page 9748 15. Carefully remove ANY corrosion or contamination that may be present on the electrical ground wire terminal. 16. Install the electrical ground wire terminal to the rivet stud. 17. Select a M6 conductive nut. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 18. Install the M6 conductive nut to the rivet stud and: Tighten Tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb in). 19. Verify proper system operation. M6 Weld Nut Caution Use only the GM-approved replacement fasteners with conductive finish for electrical ground repair. 1. If the M6 weld nut at the electrical ground location is damaged or stripped, a M7 conductive self-threading bolt may be used to secure the ground wire terminal. 2. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, remove any grease from the surface surrounding the weld nut and allow to dry. 3. Remove any loose metal particles from the damaged or stripped weld nut with a stiff brush. 4. Select a M7 conductive self-threading bolt. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin 5. Using a small brush, apply Dielectric Lubricant GM P/N 12377900 (Canadian P/N 10953529) to the threads of the M7 conductive self-threading bolt. Note Fretting corrosion is a build-up of insulating, oxidized wear debris that can form when there is a small motion between electrical contacts. The oxidized wear debris can accumulate at the electrical contact points causing the electrical resistance across the connection to increase. 6. Carefully remove ANY corrosion or contamination that may be present on the electrical ground wire terminal. 7. Install the electrical ground wire terminal to the M7 conductive self-threading bolt. 8. Install the M7 conductive self-threading bolt and: Tighten Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb in). 9. Verify proper system operation. M6 Weld Nut Alternative Repair Caution Use only the GM-approved replacement fasteners with conductive finish for electrical ground repair. 1. If the electrical ground location is accessible from both sides of the panel, a M6 conductive bolt and a M6 conductive nut may be used to secure the electrical ground wire terminal. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 2. Select a location adjacent the damaged M6 weld nut having 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance behind the panel surface and 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance surrounding the new electrical ground site. 3. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, remove any grease from the surface surrounding the ground location and allow to dry. Note Ensure 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance is maintained behind the panel to be drilled. 4. Drill a 8.5 mm (0.33 in) diameter hole through the panel. 5. Remove paint and primer from the area surrounding the 8.5 mm (0.33 in) hole until bare metal is visible. 6. Select a M6 conductive bolt. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 7. Using a small brush, apply Dielectric Lubricant GM P/N 12377900 (Canadian P/N 10953529) to the threads of the M6 conductive bolt. Note Fretting corrosion is a build-up of insulating, oxidized wear debris that can form when there is a small motion between electrical contacts. The oxidized wear debris can accumulate at the electrical contact points causing the electrical resistance across the connection to increase. 8. Carefully remove ANY corrosion or contamination that may be present on the electrical ground wire terminal. 9. Install the electrical ground wire terminal and the M6 conductive bolt to the ground location. 10. Select a M6 conductive nut. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 11. Install the M6 conductive nut to the bolt and: Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 10-08-45-001B > Oct > 10 > Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair > Page 9749 Tighten Tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb in). Note The repair area MUST BE properly refinished to maintain a secure, stable and corrosion-free electrical ground. 12. Refinish the repair area using an anti-corrosion primer. Refer to Anti-Corrosion Treatment and Repair in SI. 13. Verify proper system operation. M8 Weld Nut Caution Use only the GM-approved replacement fasteners with conductive finish for electrical ground repair. 1. If the M8 weld nut electrical ground location is accessible from both sides of the panel, a M8 conductive bolt and a M8 conductive nut may be used to secure the electrical ground wire terminal. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 2. Select a location adjacent the M8 weld nut having 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance behind the panel surface and 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance surrounding the new electrical ground site. 3. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, remove any grease from the surface surrounding the ground location and allow to dry. Note Ensure 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance is maintained behind the panel to be drilled. 4. Drill a 10 mm (0.40 in) diameter hole through the panel. 5. Remove paint and primer from the area surrounding the 10 mm (0.40 in) hole until bare metal is visible. 6. Select a M8 conductive bolt. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 7. Using a small brush, apply Dielectric Lubricant GM P/N 12377900 (Canadian P/N 10953529) to the threads of the M8 conductive bolt. Note Fretting corrosion is a build-up of insulating, oxidized wear debris that can form when there is a small motion between electrical contacts. The oxidized wear debris can accumulate at the electrical contact points causing the electrical resistance across the connection to increase. 8. Carefully remove ANY corrosion or contamination that may be present on the electrical ground wire terminal. 9. Install the electrical ground wire terminal and the M8 conductive bolt to the ground location. 10. Select a M8 conductive nut. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 11. Install the M8 conductive nut to the bolt and: Tighten Tighten to 22 Nm (16 lb ft). Note The repair area MUST BE properly refinished to maintain a secure, stable and corrosion-free electrical ground. 12. Refinish the repair area using an anti-corrosion primer. Refer to Anti-Corrosion Treatment and Repair in SI. 13. Verify proper system operation. M8 Weld Nut Alternative Repair Caution Use only the GM-approved replacement fasteners with conductive finish for electrical ground repair. 1. If the M8 weld nut electrical ground location is not accessible from both sides of the panel, a M6 conductive rivet stud and a M6 conductive nut may be used to secure the electrical ground wire terminal. 2. Select a location adjacent the damaged M8 weld nut having 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance behind the panel surface and 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance surrounding the M6 conductive rivet stud flange. 3. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, remove any grease from the repair site and allow to dry. Note Ensure 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance is maintained behind the panel to be drilled. 4. Drill a 10 mm (0.40 in) diameter hole through the panel. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 10-08-45-001B > Oct > 10 > Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair > Page 9750 5. Remove paint and primer from the area surrounding the 10 mm (0.40 in) until bare metal is visible. Important The M6 conductive rivet stud as shown, can accommodate a panel thickness range of 0.7-4.2 mm (0.03-0.17 in). If there are layers of sheet metal, they should be touching without any air gaps to ensure a good ground. 6. Select a M6 conductive rivet stud. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. Note Use the GE-50317 rivet stud tool kit. 7. Place the M6 conductive rivet stud (1) in the 10 mm (0.40 in) hole. Assemble the rivet stud tool (2) with the groove and flare side facing the rivet stud, then the washer and the M6 nut (3). 8. Using a wrench on the rivet stud tool, and a socket on the M6 nut, secure the M6 conductive rivet stud. 9. Ensure the new rivet stud is securely fastened, WITHOUT ANY detectable movement. 10. Completely wrap the threads of the rivet stud with painters tape or equivalent. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 10-08-45-001B > Oct > 10 > Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair > Page 9751 Note The rivet stud and surrounding panel area MUST BE properly refinished PRIOR to the installation of the electrical ground wire terminal and conductive nut to maintain a secure, stable and corrosion-free electrical ground. 11. Refinish the repair area using an anti-corrosion primer. Refer to Anti-Corrosion Treatment and Repair in SI. 12. Allow the refinished repair area to cure sufficiently before removing the protective material applied to the rivet stud threads. 13. Remove the painters tape or equivalent from the rivet stud threads. 14. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, thoroughly clean the rivet stud threads to remove any adhesive and allow to dry. 15. Using a small brush, apply Dielectric Lubricant GM P/N 12377900 (Canadian P/N 10953529) to the threads of the M6 conductive rivet stud. Note Fretting corrosion is a build-up of insulating, oxidized wear debris that can form when there is a small motion between electrical contacts. The oxidized wear debris can accumulate at the electrical contact points causing the electrical resistance across the connection to increase. 16. Carefully remove ANY corrosion or contamination that may be present on the electrical ground wire terminal. 17. Install the electrical ground wire terminal to the M6 conductive rivet stud. 18. Select a M6 conductive nut. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 19. Install the M6 conductive nut to the rivet stud and: Tighten Tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb in) 20. Verify proper system operation. Parts Information Warranty Information (excluding Saab Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use: Warranty Information (Saab Models) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 10-08-45-001B > Oct > 10 > Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair > Page 9752 For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 07-06-04-019D > Jun > 10 > Electrical - Intermittent MIL/DTC P2138/Reduced Power Wiring Harness: All Technical Service Bulletins Electrical - Intermittent MIL/DTC P2138/Reduced Power TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 07-06-04-019D Date: June 28, 2010 Subject: Intermittent Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) Illuminated, DTC P2138 with Reduced Engine Power (Repair Instrument Panel (IP) to Body Harness Connector) Models: 2005-2011 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (Including Saturn) 2005-2009 HUMMER H2 2006-2010 HUMMER H3 2005-2009 Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the model years and warranty information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 07-06-04-019C (Section 06 - Engine/Propulsion System) Condition - Some customers may comment on an intermittent malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) being Illuminated with a message or an indicator that displays Reduced Engine Power. - The technician may observe on a scan tool DTC P2138 - Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor 1-2 Correlation set as Current or in History. Cause This condition may be caused by water intrusion into the instrument panel (IP) to body harness connector, which carries the APP sensor signals to the ECM/PCM. This water intrusion results in a voltage difference between APP Sensor 1 and APP Sensor 2 that exceeds a predetermined value for more than a calibrated period of time, setting P2138. Correction Note Aftermarket equipment can generate DTC P2138 and/or other DTCs. 1. Verify that aftermarket equipment is not electrically connected to any of the APP sensor signal or low reference circuits or to any other ECM/PCM 5V reference or low reference circuits. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories in SI. 2. Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle. ‹› If any 5V reference DTCs are set, refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle. ‹› If any 5V reference DTCs are not set, proceed to Step 3. 3. Locate the IP to body harness connector, which may be located in and around the left hand kick panel area or inside the IP. Depending on the vehicle and model year, refer to Wiring Systems or Power and Signal Distribution in SI. Note Some examples of potential water leaks are: A-pillar seals, sunroof drain lines (if equipped) and windshield/cowl sealing. 4. Inspect for a water leak in the area. If necessary use a water hose to determine the source of the leak. Refer to General Information > Water Leaks in SI. ‹› If a water leak is observed, repair as necessary. Verify the effectiveness of the repair. 5. Inspect the IP to body harness connector terminals for corrosion and debris. Refer to Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections in SI. ‹› If any corrosion and/or debris is observed, repair as necessary. 6. After completing the repair, verify the proper operation of the system. Depending on the vehicle and model year, perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification procedure or refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle in SI. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 07-06-04-019D > Jun > 10 > Electrical - Intermittent MIL/DTC P2138/Reduced Power > Page 9757 Warranty Information (excluding Saab U.S. Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the appropriate labor operation for the source of the water leak Warranty Information (Saab U.S. Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 09167 > Jul > 09 > Campaign - Missing Seal/Engine-to-Body Inline Connector Wiring Harness: All Technical Service Bulletins Campaign - Missing Seal/Engine-to-Body Inline Connector SERVICE UPDATE Bulletin No.: 09167 Date: July 23, 2009 Subject: 09167 - Service Update for Inventory and Customer Vehicles Missing Seal on Engine-to-Body Inline Connector - Expires with Base Warranty Models: 2010 Chevrolet Equinox THIS SERVICE UPDATE INCLUDES VEHICLES IN DEALER INVENTORY AND CUSTOMER VEHICLES THAT RETURN TO THE DEALERSHIP FOR ANY REASON. IT WILL EXPIRE AT THE END OF THE INVOLVED VEHICLE'S NEW VEHICLE LIMITED WARRANTY PERIOD. Purpose This bulletin provides a service procedure to install a connector seal to the engine-to-body inline connector on certain 2010 model year Chevrolet Equinox vehicles. These vehicles are missing a seal on the engine-to-body inline connector. This service procedure should be completed as soon as possible on involved vehicles currently in dealer inventory and customer vehicles that return to the dealer for any type of service during the New Vehicle Limited Warranty coverage period. Vehicles Involved A list of involved vehicles currently in dealer inventory is available on the "Service Update Bulletin Information" link under the "Service" tab in GM GlobalConnect (US), or attached to the Dealer Communication (Canada), used to release this bulletin. Customer vehicles that return for service, for any reason, and are still covered under the vehicles base warranty, and are within the VIN breakpoints provided below, should be checked for vehicle eligibility in the appropriate system listed below. Important: Dealers are to confirm vehicle eligibility prior to beginning repairs by using the GM Vehicle Inquiry System (GMVIS). Not all vehicles within the above breakpoints may be involved. Parts Information US Only: Connector seals will be shipped from the Warranty Parts Center (WPC) at no charge via UPS 2-Day Delivery - Attention: Parts Manager, to dealers with involved vehicles beginning Friday, July 24, 2009. All dealers who have involved vehicles should have the seals no later than Wednesday, July 29, 2009. Seals needed for dealer-trades are to be obtained by calling the WPC, and requesting WPC P/N 479. Canada Only: Connector seals will be available by calling the WINS Assistance Centre. The seals will be shipped at no charge via Overnight Delivery. Only dealers with affected vehicles should call for these parts Service Procedure 1. Unlock the vehicle and open the door. 2. Place the key FOB on the driver seat (avoid inadvertent FOB key press). 3. Release the hood latch. 4. Exit the vehicle and close the door. 5. Open the hood of the vehicle. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 09167 > Jul > 09 > Campaign - Missing Seal/Engine-to-Body Inline Connector > Page 9762 6. Locate the engine-to-body inline connector (4). This connector (4) is located on the passenger side of the engine compartment near the shock tower (1), air cleaner outlet duct (2), and air cleaner assembly (3). Refer to the illustration. 7. Remove the connector from the shock tower (1) by gently pulling the connector rearward and away from the shock tower. 8. Disengage the connection by pressing the side of the connector and pulling the grey lever to the back. 9. Install a new connector seal. Inspect the connector seal to ensure that the connector seal is not cracked, cut, or damaged. 1. Place one edge of the seal over one edge of the terminal housing as shown. Using both hands, stretch the remaining seal around the terminal housing. 2. Verify that the seal is seated properly around terminal housing. There must be NO TWISTING of the seal and it MUST sit flush as shown in the illustration. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 09167 > Jul > 09 > Campaign - Missing Seal/Engine-to-Body Inline Connector > Page 9763 3. Using tool number 12094441 or a wooden craft tool, gently push the seal to the back of connector, applying pressure to all four sides of the seal evenly. 4. Rotate the connector to the side of the clip and look through the connector window to verify that the seal is fully seated at the back of connector. Refer to the illustration to view an improperly (1) and properly installed (2) connector seal. 10. Engage both connectors and verify that the lever is fully locked by attempting to open it without pressing on the unlocking tabs. 11. Install the connector (2) on the connector clip located on the shock tower (1). Pull on the connector to ensure that it is secure on the clip. 12. Close the hood. 13. Open the front driver's side door. 14. Sit in the driver's seat and close the door. Note If the vehicle passes ALL of the inspection points outlined in Steps 15-20, no further action is required. If the vehicle does NOT pass all inspection points, ensure that the connector pins are NOT bent and that the connector is seated and locked properly. Repeat Steps 15-20 if required to ensure proper installation of the seal and connector. 15. Turn the key to the RUN position. Do NOT start the engine. If the engine telltale (MIL) is ON solid, the vehicle PASSES this inspection point. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 09167 > Jul > 09 > Campaign - Missing Seal/Engine-to-Body Inline Connector > Page 9764 16. Turn the key to crank (start engine). If the engine starts, the vehicle PASSES this inspection point. 17. Wait 10 seconds, if the engine telltale (MIL) is OFF, the vehicle PASSES this inspection point. 18. Push ECO button next to shifter knob (present only on 4 cylinder engine). If the ECO telltale comes ON, the vehicle PASSES this inspection point. 19. Turn the steering wheel 1/4 turn. If the steering wheel is easy to turn, power assist is present. The vehicle PASSES this inspection point. 20. Press accelerator pedal. If the engine RPMs increase, the vehicle PASSES this inspection point. Claim Information Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 11-09-41-001 > Mar > 11 > Restraint System - SIR Light On, DTC B0014/B0021 Set Wiring Harness: All Technical Service Bulletins Restraint System - SIR Light On, DTC B0014/B0021 Set TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 11-09-41-001 Date: March 10, 2011 Subject: SIR Light On, DTC B0014 and/or B0021 Set in Sensing and Diagnostics Module (SDM) Models: 2010-2011 Chevrolet Equinox 2010-2011 GMC Terrain Condition Some customers may comment that the SIR light is on, or has been on recently. When checking the vehicle for DTCs, the SDM may report any of the following codes: B0014 02, B0014 04, B0014 0D, B0014 0E, B0021 02, B0021 04, B0021 0D or B0021 0E. This condition may be duplicated by moving the front seat forward and backward or by bouncing on the lower cushion on the affected side. Cause The codes can be set when the SDM senses a change in resistance in the circuit for the seat mounted side impact side airbag. The change in resistance can be small and it can be temporary, but the SDM can still sense the change and set a code. In this case, the airbags will work as intended in a crash but the system should be checked for the cause of the resistance change. The source of the issue can be at or in the connector that connects the airbag from the seat to the body harness. Connector X304 (B0014 LF Side Deployment Loop) is located under the driver seat cushion and connector X303 (B0021 RF Side Deployment Loop) is located under the passenger seat cushion. Correction Replace the driver and passenger seat back harness to seat cushion harness connectors with service kit, P/N 20968489. The two gray connector (Christmas tree style) retainers provided in the kit will not be used. The new connector will be secured to the seat using clip, P/N 19258316. Follow the steps below. Important DO NOT replace the sensing and diagnostic module (SDM), side sensors or air bag modules. Important Both driver and passenger seats must be repaired when this concern occurs even if only one DTC code is set. The service kit contains sufficient components to repair both seat connectors. 1. Disable the SIR system. Refer to SIR Disabling and Enabling in SI. Note Only use hand tools to remove the seat to floor mounting bolts. If there are any problems with bolt removal, refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 10-08-50-002. 2. Remove the seat to floor rear mounting bolts. Loosen the seat from the front hooks and tilt it back to expose the underside of the seat. Refer to Driver or Passenger Seat Replacement procedure in SI. 3. Disconnect the seat to body harness connector. Disconnect the seat airbag connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 11-09-41-001 > Mar > 11 > Restraint System - SIR Light On, DTC B0014/B0021 Set > Page 9770 Important Note the wire colors on the seat airbag harness and body harness. Ensure that the wire colors are matched when installing into the new connector. 4. Cut both wires from the body harness connector and seat airbag harness connector as close to the connector housing (1) as possible to minimize wire length loss. Slide the conduit away on the seat airbag harness and remove just enough tape on the body harness to access the wires to install the terminals and seals. Important Use caution when stripping insulation. Take care not to cut through the wire strands. 5. Slide the wire seals onto all four leads back enough to enable removal of the insulation. Install the blue seals (1) on the seat back harness and the white seals (2) on the seat cushion harness. Strip the insulation off all four leads 5 mm (3/16 in). Align the seals with the wire insulation. 6. On the seat back harness, position two FEMALE terminals onto the wires. Caution must be used not to position the wire too far forward as it may interfere with the mating portion of the terminal. Crimp the terminals on to the bare wire using the J38125-7 crimp tool, jaw E (1). Repeat the procedure using two MALE terminals on the seat cushion harness. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 11-09-41-001 > Mar > 11 > Restraint System - SIR Light On, DTC B0014/B0021 Set > Page 9771 7. Position the wire seal to the terminal and crimp the seal and insulation using the J-38125-6 crimp tool, jaw 1 (1). The completed terminal and seal should appear as shown above (seat back harness connector shown). Note Avoid getting solder on the terminal end or overheating the terminal. Warning DO NOT use soldering equipment that is battery or electric powered. These types of soldering irons can induce voltage into the circuit, which may cause inflator module deployment and/or damage to electrical components. Use only the EL-28125-5A Ultra Torch or another butane fueled soldering iron when working on SIR circuits. 8. Solder all four terminals at the wire crimp. 9. Slide the two body harness terminals through the opening of the orange connector position assurance (CPA) (1). Important Ensure that the appropriate wire colors match up (as noted in Step 4) when the connection is made between the seat airbag harness and body harness. 10. Slide all four terminals (2) into the appropriate connector body as shown above. Install the blue terminal position assurance (TPA) devices onto the connector ends. 11. Add NyoGel 760 Lubricant, P/N 12377900 (in Canada, use P/N 10953529) to the terminals on both sides of the connections. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 11-09-41-001 > Mar > 11 > Restraint System - SIR Light On, DTC B0014/B0021 Set > Page 9772 12. Wrap anti-abrasion electrical tape around the two exposed wires on the body harness up to the back of the connector. Obtain "*Woven Polyester (PET) Electrical Tape" (Special Order PN RZ97156A00) from Kent Automotive. Refer to Parts Information below. Reinstall the conduit on the seat airbag harness. 13. Attach the connector to the bottom of the seat using clip, P/N 19258316. 14. Reinstall the seat. Refer to Driver or Passenger Seat Replacement procedure in SI. 15. Repeat the above procedure on the other seat. 16. Enable the SIR system. Refer to SIR Disabling and Enabling in SI. 17. Turn the ignition on and use the diagnostic tool to clear the SDM DTCs and verify that the issue has been corrected. If the code is still current, refer to the appropriate diagnostic procedure found in SI. *We believe this source and their products to be reliable. There may be additional manufacturers of such products/materials. General Motors does not endorse, indicate any preference for or assume any responsibility for the products or material from this firm or for any such items that may be available from other sources. Parts Information Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 10-08-42-001B > Jan > 11 > Lighting - Low Beam Headlamp(s) Inoperative Wiring Harness: All Technical Service Bulletins Lighting - Low Beam Headlamp(s) Inoperative TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 10-08-42-001B Date: January 24, 2011 Subject: Low Beam Headlamp Bulb Diagnosis/Replacement (Inspect Bulb and Connector) Models: 2008-2011 Buick Enclave 2007-2011 Cadillac Escalade, Escalade ESV, Escalade EXT 2008-2011 Cadillac CTS, CTS-V 2010-2011 Cadillac CTS Sport Wagon, SRX 2007-2011 Chevrolet Avalanche, Silverado, Suburban, Tahoe 2008-2011 Chevrolet Malibu 2009-2011 Chevrolet Traverse 2010-2011 Chevrolet Equinox 2007-2011 GMC Acadia, Sierra, Yukon, Yukon XL, Yukon Denali, Yukon Denali XL 2010-2011 GMC Terrain 2006-2010 Pontiac G6 2007-2010 Saturn AURA, OUTLOOK Attention: This bulletin DOES NOT apply to vehicles equipped with High Intensity Discharge (HID) lamps. Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the part number for the recommended splice sleeve. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 10-08-42-001A (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Condition Some customers may comment that the low beam headlamp is inoperative. Correction DO NOT replace the entire headlamp assembly for this condition. Replace the bulb and inspect the connector following the procedure below. 1. Remove the headlamp bulb. Refer to Headlamp Bulb Replacement procedure in SI. 2. Inspect the connector. - If the connector is NOT discolored or damaged, replace the bulb only. For bulb part numbers, see Headlamp Bulb (Low Beam) in Group 02.727 of the appropriate Parts Catalog. - If the connector is discolored at the bulb interface, replace the connector (service pigtail listed below) and bulb. Important Use only Duraseal splice sleeves (salmon, P/N 19168446). Other splice sleeves may not protect the splice from moisture or provide a good electrical connection. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves in SI for splicing procedures. 1. Cut the wires of the connector approximately 45 mm (13/4 in) from the connector and splice in the service pigtail connector. Ensure that the splices are not above the connector when re-installing. 2. Replace the bulb. 3. Verify that the headlamp is fully functional. Parts Information Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 10-08-42-001B > Jan > 11 > Lighting - Low Beam Headlamp(s) Inoperative > Page 9777 Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules Wiring Harness: All Technical Service Bulletins Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 09-06-03-004D Date: December 08, 2010 Subject: Intermittent No Crank/No Start, No Module Communication, MIL, Warning Lights, Vehicle Messages or DTCs Set by Various Control Modules - Diagnosing and Repairing Fretting Corrosion (Disconnect Affected Connector and Apply Dielectric Lubricant) Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks Attention: This repair can be applied to ANY electrical connection including, but not limited to: lighting, body electrical, in-line connections, powertrain control sensors, etc. DO NOT over apply lubricant to the point where it prevents the full engagement of sealed connectors. A light coating on the terminal surfaces is sufficient to correct the condition. Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the Attention statement and add the 2011 model year. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 09-06-03-004C (Section 06 Engine/Propulsion System). Condition Some customers may comment on any of the following conditions: - An intermittent no crank/no start - Intermittent malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) illumination - Intermittent service lamp illumination - Intermittent service message(s) being displayed The technician may determine that he is unable to duplicate the intermittent condition. Cause This condition may be caused by a buildup of nonconductive insulating oxidized debris known as fretting corrosion, occurring between two electrical contact surfaces of the connection or connector. This may be caused by any of the following conditions: - Vibration - Thermal cycling - Poor connection/terminal retention - Micro motion - A connector, component or wiring harness not properly secured resulting in movement On low current signal circuits this condition may cause high resistance, resulting in intermittent connections. On high current power circuits this condition may cause permanent increases in the resistance and may cause a device to become inoperative. Representative List of Control Modules and Components The following is only a representative list of control modules and components that may be affected by this connection or connector condition and DOES NOT include every possible module or component for every vehicle. - Blower Control Module - Body Control Module (BCM) - Communication Interface Module (CIM) - Cooling Fan Control Module - Electronic Brake Control Module (EBCM) - Electronic Brake and Traction Control Module (EBTCM) - Electronic Suspension Control (ESC) Module - Engine Control Module (ECM) - Heating, Ventilation and Air Conditioning (HVAC) Control Module Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules > Page 9782 - HVAC Actuator - Inflatable Restraint Sensing and Diagnostic Module (SDM) - Any AIR BAG module - Seatbelt Lap Anchor Pretensioner - Seatbelt Retractor Pretensioner - An SIR system connection or connector condition resulting in the following DTCs being set: B0015, B0016, B0019, B0020, B0022, or B0023 - Powertrain Control Module (PCM) - Remote Control Door Lock Receiver (RCDLR) - Transmission Control Module (TCM) Correction Important DO NOT replace the control module, wiring or component for the following conditions: - The condition is intermittent and cannot be duplicated. - The condition is present and by disconnecting and reconnecting the connector the condition can no longer be duplicated. Use the following procedure to correct the conditions listed above. 1. Install a scan tool and perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle. Retrieve and record any existing history or current DTCs from all of the control modules (refer to SI). ‹› If any DTC(s) are set, refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle to identify the connector(s) of the control module/component which may be causing the condition (refer to SI). ‹› If DTCs are not set, refer to Symptoms - Vehicle to identify the connector(s) of the control module/component which may be causing the condition (refer to SI). 2. When identified, use the appropriate DTC Diagnostics, Symptoms, Schematics, Component Connector End Views and Component Locator documents to locate and disconnect the affected harness connector(s) which are causing the condition. Note Fretting corrosion looks like little dark smudges on electrical terminals and appear where the actual electrical contact is being made. In less severe cases it may be unable to be seen or identified without the use of a magnifying glass. Important DO NOT apply an excessive amount of dielectric lubricant to the connectors as shown, as hydrolock may result when attempting to mate the connectors. Use ONLY a clean nylon brush that is dedicated to the repair of the conditions in this bulletin. 3. With a one-inch nylon bristle brush, apply dielectric lubricant to both the module/component side and the harness side of the affected connector(s). 4. Reconnect the affected connector(s) and wipe away any excess lubricant that may be present. 5. Attempt to duplicate the condition by using the following information: - DTC Diagnostic Procedure - Circuit/System Description - Conditions for Running the DTC - Conditions for Setting the DTC - Diagnostic Aids - Circuit/System Verification ‹› If the condition cannot be duplicated, the repair is complete. ‹› If the condition can be duplicated, then follow the appropriate DTC, Symptom or Circuit/System Testing procedure (refer to SI). Repair Order Documentation Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules > Page 9783 Important The following information MUST be documented on the repair order. Failure to do so may result in a chargeback. - Customer vehicle condition. - Was a Service Lamp or Service Message illuminated? If yes, specify which Service Lamp or Service Message. - Was a DTC(s) set? If yes, specify which DTC(s) were set. - After following the procedure contained within this bulletin, could the condition be duplicated? ‹› If the condition was not duplicated, then document the affected module/component connector name and number on the repair order. - If the condition was duplicated after the procedure contained within this bulletin was followed, and additional diagnosis led to the replacement of a module or component, the SI Document ID Number MUST be written on the repair order. Parts Information Alternate Distributor For All of North America Note NyoGel(R) 760G Lubricant* is equivalent to GMSPO P/N 12377900, and P/N 10953529 (Canada), specified for use to correct the condition in this bulletin. *We believe this source and their products to be reliable. There may be additional manufacturers of such products/materials. General Motors does not endorse, indicate any preference for, or assume any responsibility for the products or material from this firm or for any such items that may be available from other sources. Warranty Information (excluding Saab Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the appropriate/closest labor operation depending upon the module/component connection that the dielectric lubricant was applied to: Warranty Information (Saab Models) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules > Page 9784 For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the appropriate/closest labor operation depending upon the module/component connection that the dielectric lubricant was applied to refer to the table above. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 10-08-45-001B > Oct > 10 > Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair Wiring Harness: All Technical Service Bulletins Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 10-08-45-001B Date: October 25, 2010 Subject: Information for Electrical Ground Repair - Use New Replacement Fasteners with Conductive Finish Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (including Saturn) 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2011 model year and update the Warranty Information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 10-08-45-001A (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Electrical Ground Repair Overview Proper electrical system function relies on secure, stable and corrosion-free electrical ground connections. Loose, stripped, or corroded connections increase the possibility of improper system function and loss of module communication. These conditions may also lead to unnecessary repairs and component replacement. In general, electrical ground connections are accomplished using one, or a combination of the following attachment methods: - Welded M6 stud and nut - Welded M6 nut and bolt - Welded M8 nut and bolt Determine which attachment method is used and perform the appropriate or alternative repair as described in this bulletin. M6 Weld Stud Replacement Caution Use only the GM-approved replacement fasteners with conductive finish for electrical ground repair. 1. Select a location adjacent the damaged or missing M6 ground stud having 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance behind the panel surface and 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance surrounding the M6 conductive rivet stud flange. 2. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, remove any grease from the repair site and allow to dry. Note Ensure 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance is maintained behind the panel to be drilled. 3. Drill a 10 mm (0.40 in) diameter hole through the panel. 4. Remove paint and primer from the area surrounding the 10 mm (0.40 in) hole until bare metal is visible. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 10-08-45-001B > Oct > 10 > Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair > Page 9789 Important The M6 conductive rivet stud as shown, can accommodate a panel thickness range of 0.7-4.2 mm (0.03-0.17 in). If there are layers of sheet metal, they should be touching without any air gaps to ensure a good ground. 5. Select a M6 conductive rivet stud. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. Note Use the GE-50317 rivet stud tool kit. 6. Place the M6 conductive rivet stud (1) in the 10 mm (0.40 in) hole. Assemble the rivet stud tool (2) with the groove and flare side facing the rivet stud, then the washer and the M6 nut (3). 7. Using a wrench on the rivet stud tool, and a socket on the M6 nut, secure the M6 conductive rivet stud. 8. Ensure the rivet stud is securely fastened, WITHOUT ANY detectable movement. 9. Completely wrap the threads of the rivet stud with painters tape or equivalent. Note The rivet stud and surrounding panel area MUST BE properly refinished PRIOR to the installation of the ground wire terminal and conductive nut to maintain a secure, stable and corrosion-free electrical ground. 10. Refinish the repair area using an anti-corrosion primer. Refer to Anti-Corrosion Treatment and Repair in SI. 11. Allow the refinished repair area to cure sufficiently before removing the protective material applied to the rivet stud threads. 12. Remove the painters tape or equivalent from the rivet stud threads. 13. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, thoroughly clean the rivet stud threads to remove any adhesive and allow to dry. 14. Using a small brush, apply Dielectric Lubricant GM P/N 12377900 (Canadian P/N 10953529) to the threads of the M6 conductive rivet stud. Note Fretting corrosion is a build-up of insulating, oxidized wear debris that can form when there is a small motion between electrical contacts. The oxidized wear debris can accumulate at the electrical contact points causing the electrical resistance across the connection to increase. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 10-08-45-001B > Oct > 10 > Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair > Page 9790 15. Carefully remove ANY corrosion or contamination that may be present on the electrical ground wire terminal. 16. Install the electrical ground wire terminal to the rivet stud. 17. Select a M6 conductive nut. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 18. Install the M6 conductive nut to the rivet stud and: Tighten Tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb in). 19. Verify proper system operation. M6 Weld Nut Caution Use only the GM-approved replacement fasteners with conductive finish for electrical ground repair. 1. If the M6 weld nut at the electrical ground location is damaged or stripped, a M7 conductive self-threading bolt may be used to secure the ground wire terminal. 2. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, remove any grease from the surface surrounding the weld nut and allow to dry. 3. Remove any loose metal particles from the damaged or stripped weld nut with a stiff brush. 4. Select a M7 conductive self-threading bolt. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin 5. Using a small brush, apply Dielectric Lubricant GM P/N 12377900 (Canadian P/N 10953529) to the threads of the M7 conductive self-threading bolt. Note Fretting corrosion is a build-up of insulating, oxidized wear debris that can form when there is a small motion between electrical contacts. The oxidized wear debris can accumulate at the electrical contact points causing the electrical resistance across the connection to increase. 6. Carefully remove ANY corrosion or contamination that may be present on the electrical ground wire terminal. 7. Install the electrical ground wire terminal to the M7 conductive self-threading bolt. 8. Install the M7 conductive self-threading bolt and: Tighten Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb in). 9. Verify proper system operation. M6 Weld Nut Alternative Repair Caution Use only the GM-approved replacement fasteners with conductive finish for electrical ground repair. 1. If the electrical ground location is accessible from both sides of the panel, a M6 conductive bolt and a M6 conductive nut may be used to secure the electrical ground wire terminal. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 2. Select a location adjacent the damaged M6 weld nut having 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance behind the panel surface and 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance surrounding the new electrical ground site. 3. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, remove any grease from the surface surrounding the ground location and allow to dry. Note Ensure 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance is maintained behind the panel to be drilled. 4. Drill a 8.5 mm (0.33 in) diameter hole through the panel. 5. Remove paint and primer from the area surrounding the 8.5 mm (0.33 in) hole until bare metal is visible. 6. Select a M6 conductive bolt. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 7. Using a small brush, apply Dielectric Lubricant GM P/N 12377900 (Canadian P/N 10953529) to the threads of the M6 conductive bolt. Note Fretting corrosion is a build-up of insulating, oxidized wear debris that can form when there is a small motion between electrical contacts. The oxidized wear debris can accumulate at the electrical contact points causing the electrical resistance across the connection to increase. 8. Carefully remove ANY corrosion or contamination that may be present on the electrical ground wire terminal. 9. Install the electrical ground wire terminal and the M6 conductive bolt to the ground location. 10. Select a M6 conductive nut. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 11. Install the M6 conductive nut to the bolt and: Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 10-08-45-001B > Oct > 10 > Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair > Page 9791 Tighten Tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb in). Note The repair area MUST BE properly refinished to maintain a secure, stable and corrosion-free electrical ground. 12. Refinish the repair area using an anti-corrosion primer. Refer to Anti-Corrosion Treatment and Repair in SI. 13. Verify proper system operation. M8 Weld Nut Caution Use only the GM-approved replacement fasteners with conductive finish for electrical ground repair. 1. If the M8 weld nut electrical ground location is accessible from both sides of the panel, a M8 conductive bolt and a M8 conductive nut may be used to secure the electrical ground wire terminal. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 2. Select a location adjacent the M8 weld nut having 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance behind the panel surface and 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance surrounding the new electrical ground site. 3. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, remove any grease from the surface surrounding the ground location and allow to dry. Note Ensure 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance is maintained behind the panel to be drilled. 4. Drill a 10 mm (0.40 in) diameter hole through the panel. 5. Remove paint and primer from the area surrounding the 10 mm (0.40 in) hole until bare metal is visible. 6. Select a M8 conductive bolt. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 7. Using a small brush, apply Dielectric Lubricant GM P/N 12377900 (Canadian P/N 10953529) to the threads of the M8 conductive bolt. Note Fretting corrosion is a build-up of insulating, oxidized wear debris that can form when there is a small motion between electrical contacts. The oxidized wear debris can accumulate at the electrical contact points causing the electrical resistance across the connection to increase. 8. Carefully remove ANY corrosion or contamination that may be present on the electrical ground wire terminal. 9. Install the electrical ground wire terminal and the M8 conductive bolt to the ground location. 10. Select a M8 conductive nut. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 11. Install the M8 conductive nut to the bolt and: Tighten Tighten to 22 Nm (16 lb ft). Note The repair area MUST BE properly refinished to maintain a secure, stable and corrosion-free electrical ground. 12. Refinish the repair area using an anti-corrosion primer. Refer to Anti-Corrosion Treatment and Repair in SI. 13. Verify proper system operation. M8 Weld Nut Alternative Repair Caution Use only the GM-approved replacement fasteners with conductive finish for electrical ground repair. 1. If the M8 weld nut electrical ground location is not accessible from both sides of the panel, a M6 conductive rivet stud and a M6 conductive nut may be used to secure the electrical ground wire terminal. 2. Select a location adjacent the damaged M8 weld nut having 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance behind the panel surface and 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance surrounding the M6 conductive rivet stud flange. 3. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, remove any grease from the repair site and allow to dry. Note Ensure 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance is maintained behind the panel to be drilled. 4. Drill a 10 mm (0.40 in) diameter hole through the panel. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 10-08-45-001B > Oct > 10 > Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair > Page 9792 5. Remove paint and primer from the area surrounding the 10 mm (0.40 in) until bare metal is visible. Important The M6 conductive rivet stud as shown, can accommodate a panel thickness range of 0.7-4.2 mm (0.03-0.17 in). If there are layers of sheet metal, they should be touching without any air gaps to ensure a good ground. 6. Select a M6 conductive rivet stud. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. Note Use the GE-50317 rivet stud tool kit. 7. Place the M6 conductive rivet stud (1) in the 10 mm (0.40 in) hole. Assemble the rivet stud tool (2) with the groove and flare side facing the rivet stud, then the washer and the M6 nut (3). 8. Using a wrench on the rivet stud tool, and a socket on the M6 nut, secure the M6 conductive rivet stud. 9. Ensure the new rivet stud is securely fastened, WITHOUT ANY detectable movement. 10. Completely wrap the threads of the rivet stud with painters tape or equivalent. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 10-08-45-001B > Oct > 10 > Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair > Page 9793 Note The rivet stud and surrounding panel area MUST BE properly refinished PRIOR to the installation of the electrical ground wire terminal and conductive nut to maintain a secure, stable and corrosion-free electrical ground. 11. Refinish the repair area using an anti-corrosion primer. Refer to Anti-Corrosion Treatment and Repair in SI. 12. Allow the refinished repair area to cure sufficiently before removing the protective material applied to the rivet stud threads. 13. Remove the painters tape or equivalent from the rivet stud threads. 14. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, thoroughly clean the rivet stud threads to remove any adhesive and allow to dry. 15. Using a small brush, apply Dielectric Lubricant GM P/N 12377900 (Canadian P/N 10953529) to the threads of the M6 conductive rivet stud. Note Fretting corrosion is a build-up of insulating, oxidized wear debris that can form when there is a small motion between electrical contacts. The oxidized wear debris can accumulate at the electrical contact points causing the electrical resistance across the connection to increase. 16. Carefully remove ANY corrosion or contamination that may be present on the electrical ground wire terminal. 17. Install the electrical ground wire terminal to the M6 conductive rivet stud. 18. Select a M6 conductive nut. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 19. Install the M6 conductive nut to the rivet stud and: Tighten Tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb in) 20. Verify proper system operation. Parts Information Warranty Information (excluding Saab Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use: Warranty Information (Saab Models) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 10-08-45-001B > Oct > 10 > Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair > Page 9794 For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 07-06-04-019D > Jun > 10 > Electrical - Intermittent MIL/DTC P2138/Reduced Power Wiring Harness: All Technical Service Bulletins Electrical - Intermittent MIL/DTC P2138/Reduced Power TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 07-06-04-019D Date: June 28, 2010 Subject: Intermittent Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) Illuminated, DTC P2138 with Reduced Engine Power (Repair Instrument Panel (IP) to Body Harness Connector) Models: 2005-2011 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (Including Saturn) 2005-2009 HUMMER H2 2006-2010 HUMMER H3 2005-2009 Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the model years and warranty information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 07-06-04-019C (Section 06 - Engine/Propulsion System) Condition - Some customers may comment on an intermittent malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) being Illuminated with a message or an indicator that displays Reduced Engine Power. - The technician may observe on a scan tool DTC P2138 - Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor 1-2 Correlation set as Current or in History. Cause This condition may be caused by water intrusion into the instrument panel (IP) to body harness connector, which carries the APP sensor signals to the ECM/PCM. This water intrusion results in a voltage difference between APP Sensor 1 and APP Sensor 2 that exceeds a predetermined value for more than a calibrated period of time, setting P2138. Correction Note Aftermarket equipment can generate DTC P2138 and/or other DTCs. 1. Verify that aftermarket equipment is not electrically connected to any of the APP sensor signal or low reference circuits or to any other ECM/PCM 5V reference or low reference circuits. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories in SI. 2. Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle. ‹› If any 5V reference DTCs are set, refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle. ‹› If any 5V reference DTCs are not set, proceed to Step 3. 3. Locate the IP to body harness connector, which may be located in and around the left hand kick panel area or inside the IP. Depending on the vehicle and model year, refer to Wiring Systems or Power and Signal Distribution in SI. Note Some examples of potential water leaks are: A-pillar seals, sunroof drain lines (if equipped) and windshield/cowl sealing. 4. Inspect for a water leak in the area. If necessary use a water hose to determine the source of the leak. Refer to General Information > Water Leaks in SI. ‹› If a water leak is observed, repair as necessary. Verify the effectiveness of the repair. 5. Inspect the IP to body harness connector terminals for corrosion and debris. Refer to Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections in SI. ‹› If any corrosion and/or debris is observed, repair as necessary. 6. After completing the repair, verify the proper operation of the system. Depending on the vehicle and model year, perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification procedure or refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle in SI. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 07-06-04-019D > Jun > 10 > Electrical - Intermittent MIL/DTC P2138/Reduced Power > Page 9799 Warranty Information (excluding Saab U.S. Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the appropriate labor operation for the source of the water leak Warranty Information (Saab U.S. Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 10-08-45-001B > Oct > 10 > Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair > Page 9805 Important The M6 conductive rivet stud as shown, can accommodate a panel thickness range of 0.7-4.2 mm (0.03-0.17 in). If there are layers of sheet metal, they should be touching without any air gaps to ensure a good ground. 5. Select a M6 conductive rivet stud. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. Note Use the GE-50317 rivet stud tool kit. 6. Place the M6 conductive rivet stud (1) in the 10 mm (0.40 in) hole. Assemble the rivet stud tool (2) with the groove and flare side facing the rivet stud, then the washer and the M6 nut (3). 7. Using a wrench on the rivet stud tool, and a socket on the M6 nut, secure the M6 conductive rivet stud. 8. Ensure the rivet stud is securely fastened, WITHOUT ANY detectable movement. 9. Completely wrap the threads of the rivet stud with painters tape or equivalent. Note The rivet stud and surrounding panel area MUST BE properly refinished PRIOR to the installation of the ground wire terminal and conductive nut to maintain a secure, stable and corrosion-free electrical ground. 10. Refinish the repair area using an anti-corrosion primer. Refer to Anti-Corrosion Treatment and Repair in SI. 11. Allow the refinished repair area to cure sufficiently before removing the protective material applied to the rivet stud threads. 12. Remove the painters tape or equivalent from the rivet stud threads. 13. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, thoroughly clean the rivet stud threads to remove any adhesive and allow to dry. 14. Using a small brush, apply Dielectric Lubricant GM P/N 12377900 (Canadian P/N 10953529) to the threads of the M6 conductive rivet stud. Note Fretting corrosion is a build-up of insulating, oxidized wear debris that can form when there is a small motion between electrical contacts. The oxidized wear debris can accumulate at the electrical contact points causing the electrical resistance across the connection to increase. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 10-08-45-001B > Oct > 10 > Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair > Page 9806 15. Carefully remove ANY corrosion or contamination that may be present on the electrical ground wire terminal. 16. Install the electrical ground wire terminal to the rivet stud. 17. Select a M6 conductive nut. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 18. Install the M6 conductive nut to the rivet stud and: Tighten Tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb in). 19. Verify proper system operation. M6 Weld Nut Caution Use only the GM-approved replacement fasteners with conductive finish for electrical ground repair. 1. If the M6 weld nut at the electrical ground location is damaged or stripped, a M7 conductive self-threading bolt may be used to secure the ground wire terminal. 2. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, remove any grease from the surface surrounding the weld nut and allow to dry. 3. Remove any loose metal particles from the damaged or stripped weld nut with a stiff brush. 4. Select a M7 conductive self-threading bolt. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin 5. Using a small brush, apply Dielectric Lubricant GM P/N 12377900 (Canadian P/N 10953529) to the threads of the M7 conductive self-threading bolt. Note Fretting corrosion is a build-up of insulating, oxidized wear debris that can form when there is a small motion between electrical contacts. The oxidized wear debris can accumulate at the electrical contact points causing the electrical resistance across the connection to increase. 6. Carefully remove ANY corrosion or contamination that may be present on the electrical ground wire terminal. 7. Install the electrical ground wire terminal to the M7 conductive self-threading bolt. 8. Install the M7 conductive self-threading bolt and: Tighten Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb in). 9. Verify proper system operation. M6 Weld Nut Alternative Repair Caution Use only the GM-approved replacement fasteners with conductive finish for electrical ground repair. 1. If the electrical ground location is accessible from both sides of the panel, a M6 conductive bolt and a M6 conductive nut may be used to secure the electrical ground wire terminal. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 2. Select a location adjacent the damaged M6 weld nut having 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance behind the panel surface and 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance surrounding the new electrical ground site. 3. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, remove any grease from the surface surrounding the ground location and allow to dry. Note Ensure 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance is maintained behind the panel to be drilled. 4. Drill a 8.5 mm (0.33 in) diameter hole through the panel. 5. Remove paint and primer from the area surrounding the 8.5 mm (0.33 in) hole until bare metal is visible. 6. Select a M6 conductive bolt. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 7. Using a small brush, apply Dielectric Lubricant GM P/N 12377900 (Canadian P/N 10953529) to the threads of the M6 conductive bolt. Note Fretting corrosion is a build-up of insulating, oxidized wear debris that can form when there is a small motion between electrical contacts. The oxidized wear debris can accumulate at the electrical contact points causing the electrical resistance across the connection to increase. 8. Carefully remove ANY corrosion or contamination that may be present on the electrical ground wire terminal. 9. Install the electrical ground wire terminal and the M6 conductive bolt to the ground location. 10. Select a M6 conductive nut. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 11. Install the M6 conductive nut to the bolt and: Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 10-08-45-001B > Oct > 10 > Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair > Page 9807 Tighten Tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb in). Note The repair area MUST BE properly refinished to maintain a secure, stable and corrosion-free electrical ground. 12. Refinish the repair area using an anti-corrosion primer. Refer to Anti-Corrosion Treatment and Repair in SI. 13. Verify proper system operation. M8 Weld Nut Caution Use only the GM-approved replacement fasteners with conductive finish for electrical ground repair. 1. If the M8 weld nut electrical ground location is accessible from both sides of the panel, a M8 conductive bolt and a M8 conductive nut may be used to secure the electrical ground wire terminal. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 2. Select a location adjacent the M8 weld nut having 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance behind the panel surface and 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance surrounding the new electrical ground site. 3. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, remove any grease from the surface surrounding the ground location and allow to dry. Note Ensure 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance is maintained behind the panel to be drilled. 4. Drill a 10 mm (0.40 in) diameter hole through the panel. 5. Remove paint and primer from the area surrounding the 10 mm (0.40 in) hole until bare metal is visible. 6. Select a M8 conductive bolt. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 7. Using a small brush, apply Dielectric Lubricant GM P/N 12377900 (Canadian P/N 10953529) to the threads of the M8 conductive bolt. Note Fretting corrosion is a build-up of insulating, oxidized wear debris that can form when there is a small motion between electrical contacts. The oxidized wear debris can accumulate at the electrical contact points causing the electrical resistance across the connection to increase. 8. Carefully remove ANY corrosion or contamination that may be present on the electrical ground wire terminal. 9. Install the electrical ground wire terminal and the M8 conductive bolt to the ground location. 10. Select a M8 conductive nut. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 11. Install the M8 conductive nut to the bolt and: Tighten Tighten to 22 Nm (16 lb ft). Note The repair area MUST BE properly refinished to maintain a secure, stable and corrosion-free electrical ground. 12. Refinish the repair area using an anti-corrosion primer. Refer to Anti-Corrosion Treatment and Repair in SI. 13. Verify proper system operation. M8 Weld Nut Alternative Repair Caution Use only the GM-approved replacement fasteners with conductive finish for electrical ground repair. 1. If the M8 weld nut electrical ground location is not accessible from both sides of the panel, a M6 conductive rivet stud and a M6 conductive nut may be used to secure the electrical ground wire terminal. 2. Select a location adjacent the damaged M8 weld nut having 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance behind the panel surface and 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance surrounding the M6 conductive rivet stud flange. 3. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, remove any grease from the repair site and allow to dry. Note Ensure 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance is maintained behind the panel to be drilled. 4. Drill a 10 mm (0.40 in) diameter hole through the panel. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 10-08-45-001B > Oct > 10 > Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair > Page 9808 5. Remove paint and primer from the area surrounding the 10 mm (0.40 in) until bare metal is visible. Important The M6 conductive rivet stud as shown, can accommodate a panel thickness range of 0.7-4.2 mm (0.03-0.17 in). If there are layers of sheet metal, they should be touching without any air gaps to ensure a good ground. 6. Select a M6 conductive rivet stud. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. Note Use the GE-50317 rivet stud tool kit. 7. Place the M6 conductive rivet stud (1) in the 10 mm (0.40 in) hole. Assemble the rivet stud tool (2) with the groove and flare side facing the rivet stud, then the washer and the M6 nut (3). 8. Using a wrench on the rivet stud tool, and a socket on the M6 nut, secure the M6 conductive rivet stud. 9. Ensure the new rivet stud is securely fastened, WITHOUT ANY detectable movement. 10. Completely wrap the threads of the rivet stud with painters tape or equivalent. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 10-08-45-001B > Oct > 10 > Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair > Page 9809 Note The rivet stud and surrounding panel area MUST BE properly refinished PRIOR to the installation of the electrical ground wire terminal and conductive nut to maintain a secure, stable and corrosion-free electrical ground. 11. Refinish the repair area using an anti-corrosion primer. Refer to Anti-Corrosion Treatment and Repair in SI. 12. Allow the refinished repair area to cure sufficiently before removing the protective material applied to the rivet stud threads. 13. Remove the painters tape or equivalent from the rivet stud threads. 14. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, thoroughly clean the rivet stud threads to remove any adhesive and allow to dry. 15. Using a small brush, apply Dielectric Lubricant GM P/N 12377900 (Canadian P/N 10953529) to the threads of the M6 conductive rivet stud. Note Fretting corrosion is a build-up of insulating, oxidized wear debris that can form when there is a small motion between electrical contacts. The oxidized wear debris can accumulate at the electrical contact points causing the electrical resistance across the connection to increase. 16. Carefully remove ANY corrosion or contamination that may be present on the electrical ground wire terminal. 17. Install the electrical ground wire terminal to the M6 conductive rivet stud. 18. Select a M6 conductive nut. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 19. Install the M6 conductive nut to the rivet stud and: Tighten Tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb in) 20. Verify proper system operation. Parts Information Warranty Information (excluding Saab Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use: Warranty Information (Saab Models) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 10-08-45-001B > Oct > 10 > Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair > Page 9810 For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 09167 > Jul > 09 > Campaign - Missing Seal/Engine-to-Body Inline Connector Wiring Harness: All Technical Service Bulletins Campaign - Missing Seal/Engine-to-Body Inline Connector SERVICE UPDATE Bulletin No.: 09167 Date: July 23, 2009 Subject: 09167 - Service Update for Inventory and Customer Vehicles Missing Seal on Engine-to-Body Inline Connector - Expires with Base Warranty Models: 2010 Chevrolet Equinox THIS SERVICE UPDATE INCLUDES VEHICLES IN DEALER INVENTORY AND CUSTOMER VEHICLES THAT RETURN TO THE DEALERSHIP FOR ANY REASON. IT WILL EXPIRE AT THE END OF THE INVOLVED VEHICLE'S NEW VEHICLE LIMITED WARRANTY PERIOD. Purpose This bulletin provides a service procedure to install a connector seal to the engine-to-body inline connector on certain 2010 model year Chevrolet Equinox vehicles. These vehicles are missing a seal on the engine-to-body inline connector. This service procedure should be completed as soon as possible on involved vehicles currently in dealer inventory and customer vehicles that return to the dealer for any type of service during the New Vehicle Limited Warranty coverage period. Vehicles Involved A list of involved vehicles currently in dealer inventory is available on the "Service Update Bulletin Information" link under the "Service" tab in GM GlobalConnect (US), or attached to the Dealer Communication (Canada), used to release this bulletin. Customer vehicles that return for service, for any reason, and are still covered under the vehicles base warranty, and are within the VIN breakpoints provided below, should be checked for vehicle eligibility in the appropriate system listed below. Important: Dealers are to confirm vehicle eligibility prior to beginning repairs by using the GM Vehicle Inquiry System (GMVIS). Not all vehicles within the above breakpoints may be involved. Parts Information US Only: Connector seals will be shipped from the Warranty Parts Center (WPC) at no charge via UPS 2-Day Delivery - Attention: Parts Manager, to dealers with involved vehicles beginning Friday, July 24, 2009. All dealers who have involved vehicles should have the seals no later than Wednesday, July 29, 2009. Seals needed for dealer-trades are to be obtained by calling the WPC, and requesting WPC P/N 479. Canada Only: Connector seals will be available by calling the WINS Assistance Centre. The seals will be shipped at no charge via Overnight Delivery. Only dealers with affected vehicles should call for these parts Service Procedure 1. Unlock the vehicle and open the door. 2. Place the key FOB on the driver seat (avoid inadvertent FOB key press). 3. Release the hood latch. 4. Exit the vehicle and close the door. 5. Open the hood of the vehicle. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 09167 > Jul > 09 > Campaign - Missing Seal/Engine-to-Body Inline Connector > Page 9815 6. Locate the engine-to-body inline connector (4). This connector (4) is located on the passenger side of the engine compartment near the shock tower (1), air cleaner outlet duct (2), and air cleaner assembly (3). Refer to the illustration. 7. Remove the connector from the shock tower (1) by gently pulling the connector rearward and away from the shock tower. 8. Disengage the connection by pressing the side of the connector and pulling the grey lever to the back. 9. Install a new connector seal. Inspect the connector seal to ensure that the connector seal is not cracked, cut, or damaged. 1. Place one edge of the seal over one edge of the terminal housing as shown. Using both hands, stretch the remaining seal around the terminal housing. 2. Verify that the seal is seated properly around terminal housing. There must be NO TWISTING of the seal and it MUST sit flush as shown in the illustration. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 09167 > Jul > 09 > Campaign - Missing Seal/Engine-to-Body Inline Connector > Page 9816 3. Using tool number 12094441 or a wooden craft tool, gently push the seal to the back of connector, applying pressure to all four sides of the seal evenly. 4. Rotate the connector to the side of the clip and look through the connector window to verify that the seal is fully seated at the back of connector. Refer to the illustration to view an improperly (1) and properly installed (2) connector seal. 10. Engage both connectors and verify that the lever is fully locked by attempting to open it without pressing on the unlocking tabs. 11. Install the connector (2) on the connector clip located on the shock tower (1). Pull on the connector to ensure that it is secure on the clip. 12. Close the hood. 13. Open the front driver's side door. 14. Sit in the driver's seat and close the door. Note If the vehicle passes ALL of the inspection points outlined in Steps 15-20, no further action is required. If the vehicle does NOT pass all inspection points, ensure that the connector pins are NOT bent and that the connector is seated and locked properly. Repeat Steps 15-20 if required to ensure proper installation of the seal and connector. 15. Turn the key to the RUN position. Do NOT start the engine. If the engine telltale (MIL) is ON solid, the vehicle PASSES this inspection point. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 09167 > Jul > 09 > Campaign - Missing Seal/Engine-to-Body Inline Connector > Page 9817 16. Turn the key to crank (start engine). If the engine starts, the vehicle PASSES this inspection point. 17. Wait 10 seconds, if the engine telltale (MIL) is OFF, the vehicle PASSES this inspection point. 18. Push ECO button next to shifter knob (present only on 4 cylinder engine). If the ECO telltale comes ON, the vehicle PASSES this inspection point. 19. Turn the steering wheel 1/4 turn. If the steering wheel is easy to turn, power assist is present. The vehicle PASSES this inspection point. 20. Press accelerator pedal. If the engine RPMs increase, the vehicle PASSES this inspection point. Claim Information Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Steering/Suspension - Wheel Alignment Specifications Alignment: Technical Service Bulletins Steering/Suspension - Wheel Alignment Specifications WARRANTY ADMINISTRATION Bulletin No.: 05-03-07-009C Date: December 09, 2010 Subject: Wheel Alignment Specifications, Requirements and Recommendations for GM Vehicles Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks Supercede: This bulletin is being extensively revised to provide technicians and warranty administrators with an all inclusive guide for wheel alignments. PLEASE FAMILIARIZE YOURSELF WITH THESE UPDATES BEFORE PERFORMING YOUR NEXT GM WHEEL ALIGNMENT SERVICE. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 05-03-07-009B (Section 03 - Suspension). Purpose The purpose of this bulletin is to provide retail, wholesale and fleet personnel with General Motors' warranty service requirements and recommendations for customer concerns related to wheel alignment. For your convenience, this bulletin updates and centralizes all of GM's Standard Wheel Alignment Service Procedures, Policy Guidelines and bulletins on wheel alignment warranty service. Important PLEASE FAMILIARIZE YOURSELF WITH THESE UPDATES BEFORE PERFORMING YOUR NEXT GM WHEEL ALIGNMENT SERVICE. The following five (5) key steps are a summary of this bulletin and are REQUIRED in completing a successful wheel alignment service. 1. Verify the vehicle is in an Original Equipment condition for curb weight, tires, wheels, suspension and steering configurations. Vehicles modified in any of these areas are not covered for wheel alignment warranty. 2. Review the customer concern relative to "Normal Operation" definitions. 3. Verify that vehicle is within the "Mileage Policy" range. 4. Document wheel alignment warranty claims appropriately for labor operations E2000 and E2020. The following information must be documented or attached to the repair order: - Customer concern in detail - What corrected the customer concern? - If a wheel alignment is performed: - Consult SI for proper specifications. - Document the "Before" AND "After" wheel alignment measurements/settings. - Completed "Wheel Alignment Repair Order Questionnaire" (form attached to this bulletin) 5. Use the proper wheel alignment equipment (preferred with print-out capability), process and the appropriate calibration maintenance schedules. Important If it is determined that a wheel alignment is necessary under warranty, use the proper labor code for the repair. E2000 for Steering Wheel Angle and/or Front Toe set or E2020 for Wheel Alignment Check/Adjust includes Caster, Camber and Toe set (Wheel alignment labor time for other component repairs is to be charged to the component that causes a wheel alignment operation.). The following flowchart is to help summarize the information detailed in this bulletin and should be used whenever a wheel alignment is performed. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Steering/Suspension - Wheel Alignment Specifications > Page 9823 Verify Original Equipment Condition of the Vehicle - Verify that Original Equipment Tires and Wheels or Official GM Accessory Tires and Wheels are on the vehicle. - Verify that aftermarket suspension "Lift" or "Lowering" Kits or other suspension alterations have NOT been done to the vehicle. - Check for accidental damage to the vehicle; for example, severe pothole or curb impacts, collision damage that may have affected the wheel alignment of the vehicle; e.g., engine cradles, suspension control arms, axles, wheels, wheel covers, tires may show evidence of damage/impact. - Check to be sure vehicle has seen "Normal Use" rather than abuse; e.g., very aggressive driving may show up by looking at the tires and condition of the vehicle. - Check for other additional equipment items that may significantly affect vehicle mass such as large tool boxes, campers, snow plow packages (without the snowplow RPO), etc., especially in trucks and cutaway/incomplete vehicles. Significant additional mass can affect trim height and wheel alignment of the vehicle and may necessitate a customer pay wheel alignment when placed semi-permanently in the vehicle (Upfitter instructions are to realign the vehicle after placement of these types of items. (This typically applies to trucks and incomplete vehicles that can be upfit with equipment such as the above.) Customer Concerns, "Normal Operation" Conditions and "Mileage Policy" Possible Concerns The following are typical conditions that may require wheel alignment warranty service: 1. Lead/Pull: defined as "at a constant highway speed on a typical straight road, the amount of effort required at the steering wheel to maintain the vehicle's straight heading." Important Please evaluate for the condition with hands-on the steering wheel. Follow the "Vehicle Leads/Pulls" diagnostic tree located in SI to determine the cause of a lead/pull concern. Lead/Pull concerns can be due to road crown or road slope, tires, wheel alignment or even in rare circumstances a steering gear issue. Lead/pull concerns due to road crown are considered "Normal Operation" and are NOT a warrantable condition -- the customer should be advised that this is "Normal Operation." Important Some customers may comment on a "Lead/Pull" when they hold the steering wheel in a level condition. If so, this is more likely a "steering wheel angle" concern because the customer is "steering" the vehicle to obtain a "level" steering wheel. 2. Steering wheel angle to the left or right (counter-clockwise or clockwise, respectively): Defined as the steering wheel angle (clocking) deviation from "level" while maintaining a straight heading on a typical straight road. 3. Irregular or Premature tire wear: Slight to very slight "feathering" or "edge" wear on the shoulders of tires is NOT considered unusual and should even out with a tire rotation; if the customer is concerned about a "feathering" condition of the tires, the customer could be advised to rotate the tires earlier than the next scheduled mileage/maintenance interval (but no later than the next interval). Be sure to understand the customer's driving habits as this will also heavily influence the tire wear performance; tire wear from aggressive or abusive driving habits is NOT a warrantable condition. Important Slight or mild feathering, cupping, edge or heel/toe wear of tire tread shoulders is "normal" and can show up very early in a tire/vehicle service mileage; in fact, some new tires can show evidence of feathering from the factory. These issues do NOT affect the overall performance and tread life of the tire. Dealer personnel should always check the customer's maintenance records to ensure that tire inflation pressure is being maintained to placard and that the tires are being rotated (modified-X pattern) at the proper mileage intervals. Wheel alignments are NOT to be performed for the types of "Normal" Tire Feathering shown in Figures 1-4 below. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Steering/Suspension - Wheel Alignment Specifications > Page 9824 Figure 1: Full Tread View - "NORMAL" Tire "Feathering" Wear on the Shoulder/Adjacent/Center Ribs Figure 2: Tire Shoulder View Example 1 - "NORMAL" Tire "Feathering" Wear on the Shoulder Figure 3: Tire Shoulder View Example 2 - "NORMAL" Tire "Feathering" Wear Figure 4: Detail Side View of Tire Shoulder Area - "NORMAL" Tire "Feathering" Wear Important When a wheel alignment is deemed necessary for tire wear, be sure to document on the repair order, in as much detail as possible, the severity and type of tire wear (e.g., severe center wear or severe inside or outside shoulder wear) and the position of the tire on the vehicle (RF, LF, LR, RR). Please note the customer's concern with the wear such as, noise, appearance, wear life, etc. A field product report with pictures of the tire wear condition is recommended. Refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 02-00-89-002J and #07-00-89-036C. 4. Other repairs that affect wheel alignment; e.g., certain component replacement such as suspension control arm replacement, engine cradle adjustment/replace, steering gear replacement, steering tie rod replace, suspension strut/shock, steering knuckle, etc. may require a wheel alignment. Important If other components or repairs are identified as affecting the wheel alignment, policy calls for the wheel alignment labor time to be charged to the replaced/repaired component's labor operation time rather than the wheel alignment labor operations. Important Vibration type customer concerns are generally NOT due to wheel alignment except in the rare cases; e.g., extreme diagonal wear across the tread. In general, wheel alignments are NOT to be performed as an investigation/correction for vibration concerns. "Normal Operation" Conditions Vehicle Lead/Pull Due to Road Crown or Slope: As part of "Normal Operation," vehicles will follow side-to-side or left to right road crown or slope. Be sure to verify from the customer the types of roads they are driving as they may not recognize the influence of road crown on vehicle lead/pull and steering wheel angle. If a vehicle requires significant steering effort to prevent it from "climbing" the road crown there may be an issue to be looked into further. Important Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Steering/Suspension - Wheel Alignment Specifications > Page 9825 A wheel alignment will generally NOT correct vehicles that follow the road crown since this is within "Normal Operation." Mileage Policy The following mileage policy applies for E2020 and E2000 labor operations: Note Wheel Alignment is NOT covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty for Express and Savana Cutaway vehicles as these vehicles require Upfitters to set the wheel alignment after completing the vehicles. - 0-800 km (0-500 mi): E2000/E2020 claims ONLY allowed with Call Center Authorization. Due to the tie down during shipping, the vehicle's suspension requires some time to reach normal operating position. For this reason, new vehicles are generally NOT to be aligned until they have accumulated at least 800 km (500 mi). A field product report should accompany any claim within this mileage range. - 801-12,000 km (501-7,500 mi): - If a vehicle came from the factory with incorrect alignment settings, any resulting off-angle steering wheel, lead/pull characteristics or the rare occurrence of excessive tire wear would be apparent early in the life of the vehicle. The following policy applies: - Vehicles 100% Factory Set/Measured for Caster/Camber/Toe - Escalade/ESV/EXT, Tahoe/Suburban, Yukon/XL/Denali, Silverado/Sierra, Express/Savana, Corvette and Colorado/Canyon: E2000/E2020 Claims: Call Center Authorization Required - All Vehicles NOT 100% Factory Set/Measured for Caster/Camber/Toe as noted above: E2000/E2020 Claims: Dealer Service Manager Authorization Required - 12,001 km and beyond (7,501 miles and beyond): During this period, customers are responsible for the wheel alignment expense or dealers may provide on a case-by case basis a one-time customer enthusiasm claim up to 16,000 km (10,000 mi). In the event that a defective component required the use of the subject labor operations, the identified defective component labor operation will include the appropriate labor time for a wheel alignment as an add condition to the component repair. Important Only one wheel alignment labor operation claim (E2000 or E2020) may be used per VIN. Warranty Documentation Requirements When a wheel alignment service has been deemed necessary, the following items will need to be clearly documented on/with the repair order: - Customer concern in detail - What corrected the customer concern? - If a wheel alignment is performed: - Consult SI for proper specifications. - Document the "Before" AND "After" wheel alignment measurements/settings. - Completed "Wheel Alignment Repair Order Questionnaire" (form attached to this bulletin) 1. Document the customer concern in as much detail as possible on the repair order and in the warranty administration system. Preferred examples: - Steering wheel is off angle in the counterclockwise direction by approximately x degrees or clocking position. - Vehicle lead/pulls to the right at approximately x-y mph. Vehicle will climb the road crown. Severe, Moderate or Slight. - RF and LF tires are wearing on the outside shoulders with severe feathering. Important In the event of a lead/pull or steering wheel angle concern, please note the direction of lead/pull (left or right) or direction of steering wheel angle (clockwise or counterclockwise) on the repair order and within the warranty claim verbatim. Important In the event of a tire wear concern, please note the position on the vehicle and where the wear is occurring on the tire; i.e., the RF tire is wearing on the inside shoulder. 2. Document the technician's findings on cause and correction of the issue. Examples: - Reset LF toe from 0.45 degrees to 0.10 degrees and RF toe from -0.25 degrees to 0.10 degrees to correct the steering wheel angle from 5 degrees counterclockwise to 0 degrees. - Reset LF camber from 0.25 degrees to -0.05 degrees to correct the cross-camber condition of +0.30 degrees to 0.00 degrees on the vehicle. - Front Sum toe was found to be 0.50 degrees, reset to 0.20 degrees. 3. Print-out the "Before" and "After" wheel alignment measurements/settings and attach them to the Repair Order or if print-out capability is not Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Steering/Suspension - Wheel Alignment Specifications > Page 9826 available, measurements may also be clearly and legibly handwritten into the Wheel Alignment Repair Order Questionnaire attached to this bulletin. 4. Attach the Wheel Alignment Repair Order Questionnaire below along with the print-out of "Before" and "After" wheel alignment measurements to the Repair Order and retain for use by GM. Wheel Alignment Equipment and Process Wheel alignments must be performed with a quality machine that will give accurate results when performing checks. "External Reference" (image-based camera technology) is preferred. Please refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 05-00-89-029B: General Motors Dealership Critical Equipment Requirements and Recommendations. Requirements: - Computerized four wheel alignment system. - Computer capable of printing before and after alignment reports. - Computer capable of time and date stamp printout. - Racking system must have jacking capability - Racking system must be capable of level to 1.6 mm (1/16 in) - Appropriate wheel stops and safety certification - Built-in turn plates and slip plates - Wheel clamps capable of attaching to 20" or larger wheels - Racking capable of accepting any GM passenger car or light duty truck - Operator properly trained and ASE-certified (U.S. only) in wheel alignment Recommendations: Racking should have front and rear jacking capability. Equipment Maintenance and Calibration: Alignment machines must be regularly calibrated in order to give correct information. Most manufacturers recommend the following: - Alignment machines with "internal reference" sensors should be checked (and calibrated, if necessary) every six months. - Alignment machines with "external reference" (image-based camera technology) should be checked (and calibrated, if necessary) once a year. - Racks must be kept level to within 1.6 mm (1/16 in). - If any instrument that is part of the alignment machine is dropped or damaged in some way, check the calibration immediately. Check with the manufacturer of your specific equipment for their recommended service/calibration schedule. Wheel Alignment Process When performing wheel alignment measurement and/or adjustment, the following steps should be taken: Preliminary Steps: 1. Verify that the vehicle has a full tank of fuel (compensate as necessary). 2. Inspect the wheels and the tires for damage. 3. Inspect the tires for the proper inflation and irregular tire wear. 4. Inspect the wheel bearings for excessive play. 5. Inspect all suspension and steering parts for looseness, wear, or damage. 6. Inspect the steering wheel for excessive drag or poor return due to stiff or rusted linkage or suspension components. 7. Inspect the vehicle trim height. 8. Compensate for frame angle on targeted vehicles (refer to Wheel Alignment Specifications in SI). Satisfactory vehicle operation may occur over a wide range of alignment angles. However, if the wheel alignment angles are not within the range of specifications, adjust the wheel alignment to the specifications. Refer to Wheel Alignment Specifications in SI. Give consideration to excess loads, such as tool boxes, sample cases, etc. Follow the wheel alignment equipment manufacturer's instructions. Measure/Adjust: Important Prior to making any adjustments to wheel alignment on a vehicle, technicians must verify that the wheel alignment specifications loaded into their wheel alignment machine are up-to-date by comparing these to the wheel alignment specifications for the appropriate model and model year in SI. Using incorrect and/or outdated specifications may result in unnecessary adjustments, irregular and/or premature tire wear and repeat customer concerns Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Steering/Suspension - Wheel Alignment Specifications > Page 9827 Important When performing adjustments to vehicles requiring a 4-wheel alignment, set the rear wheel alignment angles first in order to obtain proper front wheel alignment angles. Perform the following steps in order to measure the front and rear alignment angles: 1. Install the alignment equipment according to the manufacturer's instructions. 2. Jounce the front and the rear bumpers 3 times prior to checking the wheel alignment. 3. Measure the alignment angles and record the readings. If necessary, adjust the wheel alignment to vehicle specification and record the before and after measurements. Refer to Wheel Alignment Specifications in SI. Important Technicians must refer to SI for the correct wheel alignment specifications. SI is the only source of GM wheel alignment specifications that is kept up-to-date throughout the year. Test drive vehicle to ensure proper repair. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Steering/Suspension - Wheel Alignment Specifications > Page 9828 Frame Angle Measurement (Express / Savana Only) ........ Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Steering/Suspension - Wheel Alignment Specifications > Page 9829 What corrected the customer concern and was the repair verified? Please Explain: ............. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Specifications > Fastener Tightening Specifications Alignment: Specifications Fastener Tightening Specifications Fastener Tightening Specifications Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Specifications > Fastener Tightening Specifications > Page 9832 Alignment: Specifications Trim Height Specifications Trim Height Specifications Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Specifications > Fastener Tightening Specifications > Page 9833 Alignment: Specifications Wheel Alignment Specifications Wheel Alignment Specifications Note: Specification relative to Caster Sweep measurement method Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Description and Operation > Caster Description Alignment: Description and Operation Caster Description Caster Description Caster is the tilting of the uppermost point of the steering axis either forward or backward, when viewed from the side of the vehicle. A backward tilt is positive (+) and a forward tilt is negative (-). Caster influences directional control of the steering but does not affect the tire wear. Caster is affected by the vehicle height, therefore it is important to keep the body at its designed height. Overloading the vehicle or a weak or sagging rear spring will affect caster. When the rear of the vehicle is lower than its designated trim height, the front suspension moves to a more positive caster. If the rear of the vehicle is higher than its designated trim height, the front suspension moves to a less positive caster. With too little positive caster, steering may be touchy at high speed and wheel returnability may be diminished when coming out of a turn. If one wheel has more positive caster than the other, that wheel will pull toward the center of the vehicle. This condition will cause the vehicle to pull or lead to the side with the least amount of positive caster. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Description and Operation > Caster Description > Page 9836 Alignment: Description and Operation Camber Description Camber Description Camber is the tilting of the wheels from the vertical when viewed from the front of the vehicle. When the wheels tilt outward at the top, the camber is positive (+). When the wheel tilts inward at the top, the camber is negative (-). The amount of tilt is measured in degrees from the vertical. Camber settings influence the directional control and the tire wear. Too much positive camber will result in premature wear on the outside of the tire and cause excessive wear on the suspension parts. Too much negative camber will result in premature wear on the inside of the tire and cause excessive wear on the suspension parts. Unequal side-to-side camber of 1 degree or more will cause the vehicle to pull or lead to the side with the most positive camber. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Description and Operation > Caster Description > Page 9837 Alignment: Description and Operation Toe Description Toe Description Toe is a measurement of how much the front and/or rear wheels are turned in or out from a straight-ahead position. When the wheels are turned in, toe is positive (+). When the wheels are turned out, toe is negative (-). The actual amount of toe is normally only a fraction of a degree. The purpose of toe is to ensure that the wheels roll parallel. Toe also offsets the small deflections of the wheel support system that occur when the vehicle is rolling forward. In other words, with the vehicle standing still and the wheels set with toe-in, the wheels tend to roll parallel on the road when the vehicle is moving. Improper toe adjustment will cause premature tire wear and cause steering instability. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Description and Operation > Caster Description > Page 9838 Alignment: Description and Operation Setback Description Setback Description Setback applies to both the front and the rear wheels. Setback is the amount that one wheel may be aligned behind the other wheel. Setback may be the result of a road hazard or a collision. The first clue is a caster difference from side-to-side of more than 1 degree. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Description and Operation > Caster Description > Page 9839 Alignment: Description and Operation Caster Description Caster Description Caster is the tilting of the uppermost point of the steering axis either forward or backward, when viewed from the side of the vehicle. A backward tilt is positive (+) and a forward tilt is negative (-). Caster influences directional control of the steering but does not affect the tire wear. Caster is affected by the vehicle height, therefore it is important to keep the body at its designed height. Overloading the vehicle or a weak or sagging rear spring will affect caster. When the rear of the vehicle is lower than its designated trim height, the front suspension moves to a more positive caster. If the rear of the vehicle is higher than its designated trim height, the front suspension moves to a less positive caster. With too little positive caster, steering may be touchy at high speed and wheel returnability may be diminished when coming out of a turn. If one wheel has more positive caster than the other, that wheel will pull toward the center of the vehicle. This condition will cause the vehicle to pull or lead to the side with the least amount of positive caster. Camber Description Camber Description Camber is the tilting of the wheels from the vertical when viewed from the front of the vehicle. When the wheels tilt outward at the top, the camber is positive (+). When the wheel tilts inward at the top, the camber is negative (-). The amount of tilt is measured in degrees from the vertical. Camber settings influence the directional control and the tire wear. Too much positive camber will result in premature wear on the outside of the tire and cause excessive wear on the suspension parts. Too much negative camber will result in premature wear on the inside of the tire and cause excessive wear on the suspension parts. Unequal side-to-side camber of 1 degree or more will cause the vehicle to pull or lead to the side with the most positive camber. Toe Description Toe Description Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Description and Operation > Caster Description > Page 9840 Toe is a measurement of how much the front and/or rear wheels are turned in or out from a straight-ahead position. When the wheels are turned in, toe is positive (+). When the wheels are turned out, toe is negative (-). The actual amount of toe is normally only a fraction of a degree. The purpose of toe is to ensure that the wheels roll parallel. Toe also offsets the small deflections of the wheel support system that occur when the vehicle is rolling forward. In other words, with the vehicle standing still and the wheels set with toe-in, the wheels tend to roll parallel on the road when the vehicle is moving. Improper toe adjustment will cause premature tire wear and cause steering instability. Setback Description Setback Description Setback applies to both the front and the rear wheels. Setback is the amount that one wheel may be aligned behind the other wheel. Setback may be the result of a road hazard or a collision. The first clue is a caster difference from side-to-side of more than 1 degree. Thrust Angles Description Thrust Angles Description The front wheels aim or steer the vehicle. The rear wheels control tracking. This tracking action relates to the thrust angle (3). The thrust angle is the path that the rear wheels take. Ideally, the thrust angle is geometrically aligned with the body centerline (2). In the illustration, toe-in is shown on the left rear wheel, moving the thrust line (1) off center. The resulting deviation from the centerline is the thrust angle. If the thrust angle is not set properly the vehicle may "dog track", the steering wheel may not be centered or it could be perceived as a bent axle. Thrust angle can be checked during a wheel alignment. Positive thrust angle means the thrust line is pointing to the right hand side (RHS) of the vehicle. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Description and Operation > Caster Description > Page 9841 Negative thrust angle means the thrust line is pointing to the left hand side (LHS) of the vehicle. If the thrust angle is out of specification, moving the axle to body relationship will change the thrust angle reading. If the vehicle is out in the Positive (+) direction-moving the RHS forward and/or LHS rearward will move the thrust angle towards zero degrees. If the vehicle is out in the Negative (-) direction-moving the RHS rearward and/or LHS forward will move the thrust angle towards zero degrees. Lead/Pull Description Lead/Pull Description At a constant highway speed on a typical straight road, lead/pull is the amount of effort required at the steering wheel to maintain the vehicle's straight path. Important: Vehicles will tend to lead/pull in the direction of the road slope as part of normal operation. Lead/pull is usually caused by the following factors: * Road slope * Variability in tire construction * Wheel alignment (front cross caster and camber) * Unbalanced steering gear * Electronic Power Steering (EPS) steering position and torque sensors not calibrated correctly, if equipped. Torque Steer Description Torque Steer Description A vehicle pulls or leads in one direction during hard acceleration. A vehicle pulls or leads in the other direction during deceleration. The following factors may cause torque steer to be more apparent on a particular vehicle: * A slightly smaller diameter tire on the right front increases a right torque lead. Inspect the front tires for differences in the brand, the construction, or the size. If the tires appear to be similar, change the front tires from side-to-side and retest the vehicle. Tire and wheel assemblies have the most significant effect on torque steer correction. * A large difference in the right and left front tire pressure * Left-to-right differences in the front view axle angle may cause significant steering pull in a vehicle. The pull will be to the side with the most downward sloping axle from the differential to the wheels. Axles typically slope downward from the differential. The slope of the transaxle pan to level ground may be used as an indication of bias axle angles. The side with the higher transaxle pan (shown on the left side of the illustration) has the most downward sloping axle angle. Memory Steer Description Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Description and Operation > Caster Description > Page 9842 Memory Steer Description Memory steer is when the vehicle wants to lead or pull in the direction the driver previously turned the vehicle. Additionally, after turning in the opposite direction, the vehicle will want to lead or pull in that direction. Wander Description Wander Description Wander is the undesired drifting or deviation of a vehicle to either side from a straight path with hand pressure on the steering wheel. Wander is a symptom of the vehicle's sensitivity to external disturbances, such as road crown and crosswind, and accentuated by poor on-center steering feel. Scrub Radius Description Scrub Radius Description Ideally, the scrub radius is as small as possible. Normally, the SAI angle and the centerline of the tire and the wheel intersect below the road surface, causing a positive scrub radius. With struts, the SAI angle is much larger than the long arm/short arm type of suspension. This allows the SAI angle to intersect the camber angle above the road surface, forming a negative scrub radius. The smaller the scrub radius, the better the directional stability. Installing aftermarket wheels that have additional offset will dramatically increase the scrub radius. The newly installed wheels may cause the centerline of the tires to move further away from the spindle. This will increase the scrub radius. A large amount of scrub radius can cause severe shimmy after hitting a bump. Four-wheel drive vehicles with large tires use a steering damper to compensate for an increased scrub radius. Scrub radius is not directly measurable by the conventional methods. Scrub radius is projected geometrically by engineers during the design phase of the suspension. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Description and Operation > Page 9843 Alignment: Testing and Inspection Trim Height Inspection Trim Height Measurement Trim height is a predetermined measurement relating to vehicle ride height. Incorrect trim heights can cause the vehicle to bottom out over bumps, damage to the suspension components and symptoms similar to wheel alignment problems. Check the trim heights when diagnosing suspension concerns and before checking the wheel alignment. Perform the following before measuring the trim heights: * Set the tire pressure to the specifications shown on the certification label. Refer to Vehicle Certification, Tire Placard, Anti-Theft, and Service Parts ID Label (See: Application and ID/Vehicle Certification, Tire Placard, Anti-Theft and Service Parts ID Label). * Check the fuel level. Add additional weight if necessary to simulate a full tank. One U.S. gallon of gasoline weighs approximately 6.5 lbs. One liter of gasoline weights approximately 0.70 kg. * Make sure the passenger and rear compartments are empty, except for the spare tire. * Make sure the vehicle is on a flat and level surface, such as an alignment rack. * For vehicles equipped with automatic level control, ensure the system is functioning properly. * Check that all the vehicle doors are securely closed. * Check that the vehicle hood and rear deck lids are securely closed. * Check for installed after market accessories or modifications that could affect trim height measurement: - Larger of smaller than production wheels and tires - Lifting or lowering kits - Wheel opening flares or ground affects Measuring the P and R Heights Note: The left and right P and R height difference should be no more than 12 mm (0.47 in). Use the following procedure to measure the P and R dimensions: 1. Lift the front bumper of the vehicle up about 38 mm (1.5 in). 2. Gently remove your hands and let the vehicle settle. 3. Repeat this operation 2 more times for a total of 3 times. 4. Measure vertically from the ground to the bottom lip of the wheel opening through the centerline of the front wheel, P height. 5. Push the front bumper of the vehicle down about 38 mm (1.5 in). 6. Gently remove your hands and let the vehicle settle. 7. Repeat this operation 2 more times for a total of 3 times. 8. Re-measure the P height as in step 4. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Description and Operation > Page 9844 9. The true P height is the average of the measurements taken in steps 4 and 8. Refer to Trim Height Specifications (See: Suspension/Specifications/Mechanical Specifications/Trim Height Specifications). 10. Repeat the above steps at the rear of the vehicle for the R heights. 11. If the P and R heights are outside of specifications, measure the Z and D heights. Measuring the Z Height Note: * In order to obtain the proper measurement, Z will equal inner minus the outer. * The left and right Z height difference should be no more than 12 mm (0.47 in). Use the following procedure to measure the Z height: 1. Lift the front bumper of the vehicle up about 38 mm (1.5 in). 2. Gently remove your hands and let the vehicle settle. 3. Repeat this operation 2 more times for a total of 3 times. 4. Repeat this jouncing operation 2 more times for a total of 3 times. 5. Measure from the center of the forward lower control arm attaching bolt tip (a) to the alignment rack. 6. Measure from the center of the ball joint (b) to the alignment rack. 7. The difference between these 2 measurements (a-b) is the Z height. 8. Push the front bumper of the vehicle down about 38 mm (1.5 in). 9. Gently remove your hands and let the vehicle settle. 10. Repeat this operation 2 more times for a total of 3 times. 11. Re-measure the Z height as in step 4. 12. The true Z height is the average of the measurements taken in steps 4 and 8. Refer to Trim Height Specifications (See: Suspension/Specifications/Mechanical Specifications/Trim Height Specifications). If any of these measurements are out of specifications, inspect for the following conditions: * Worn or damage suspension components * Collision damage Measuring the D Height Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Description and Operation > Page 9845 Important: * In order to obtain the proper measurement, D will equal inner minus the outer. * The left and right D height difference should be no more than 12 mm (0.47 in). Use the following procedure to measure the D height: 1. Lift the rear bumper of the vehicle up about 38 mm (1.5 in). 2. Gently remove your hands and let the vehicle settle. 3. Repeat this operation 2 more times for a total of 3 times. 4. Measure from the center of the inner pivot bolt (A) to the alignment rack. 5. Measure from the center of the outer pivot bolt (B) to the alignment rack. 6. The difference between these 2 measurements is the D height. 7. Lift the rear bumper of the vehicle up about 38 mm (1.5 in). 8. Gently remove your hands and let the vehicle settle. 9. Repeat this operation 2 more times for a total of 3 times. 10. Re-measure the D height as in step 4. 11. The true D height is the average of the measurements taken in steps 4 and 8. Refer to Trim Height Specifications (See: Suspension/Specifications/Mechanical Specifications/Trim Height Specifications). If any of these measurements are out of specifications, inspect for the following conditions: * Worn or damage suspension components * Collision damage Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Alignment Measurement Alignment: Service and Repair Wheel Alignment Measurement Wheel Alignment Measurement Steering and vibration complaints are not always the result of improper alignment. One possible cause is wheel and tire imbalance. Another possibility is tire lead due to worn or improperly manufactured tires. Lead/pull is defined as follows: At a constant highway speed on a typical straight road, lead/pull is the amount of effort required at the steering wheel to maintain the vehicle's straight path. Lead is the vehicle deviation from a straight path on a level road without pressure on the steering wheel. Refer to Radial Tire Lead/Pull Correction (See: Wheels and Tires/Testing and Inspection/Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures/Radial Tire Lead/Pull Correction) in order to determine if the vehicle has a tire lead problem. Before performing any adjustment affecting wheel alignment, perform the following inspections in order to ensure correct alignment readings: * Inspect for visible damage to the suspension components and replace as necessary. * Inspect the tires for the proper inflation and irregular tire wear. Refer to Vehicle Certification, Tire Placard, Anti-Theft, and Service Parts ID Label (See: Application and ID/Vehicle Certification, Tire Placard, Anti-Theft and Service Parts ID Label) and Tire Diagnosis - Irregular or Premature Wear (See: Wheels and Tires/Testing and Inspection/Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures/Tire Diagnosis - Irregular or Premature Wear). * Inspect the runout of the wheels and the tires. Refer to Wheel Mounting Surface Check (See: Wheels and Tires/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics). * Inspect the wheel bearings for backlash and excessive play. Refer to Wheel Bearings Diagnosis (See: Suspension/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Wheel Bearings Diagnosis). * Inspect the ball joints for looseness or wear. * Inspect the tie rod ends for looseness or wear. * Inspect the control arms and stabilizer shaft for looseness or wear. * Inspect the steering gear for looseness at the frame. Refer to Fastener Tightening Specifications (See: Steering/Specifications/Mechanical Specifications). * Inspect the struts/shock absorbers for wear, leaks, and any noticeable noises. Refer to Suspension Strut and Shock Absorber Testing - On Vehicle (See: Suspension/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Suspension Strut and Shock Absorber Testing - On Vehicle). * Inspect the vehicle trim height. Refer to Trim Height Inspection (See: Suspension/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Trim Height Inspection). * Inspect the steering wheel for excessive drag or poor return due to stiff or rusted linkage or suspension components. * Inspect the fuel level. The fuel tank should be full or the vehicle should have a compensating load added. Give consideration to excess loads, such as tool boxes, sample cases, etc. If normally carried in the vehicle, these items should remain in the vehicle during alignment adjustments. Give consideration also to the condition of the equipment being used for the alignment. Follow the equipment manufacturer's instructions. Satisfactory vehicle operation may occur over a wide range of alignment settings. However, if the setting exceeds the service allowable specifications, correct the alignment to the service preferred specifications. Refer to Wheel Alignment Specifications (See: Specifications/Wheel Alignment Specifications). Perform the following steps in order to measure the front and rear alignment angles: 1. Install the alignment equipment according to the manufacturer's instructions. 2. Jounce the front and the rear bumpers 3 times prior to checking the wheel alignment. 3. Measure the alignment angles and record the readings. Note: * Record the "Before" and "After" alignment measurements. * When performing adjustments to vehicles requiring a 4-wheel alignment, set the rear toe adjustment first in order to obtain proper front alignment angles. * The rear camber and caster is not adjustable. 4. Adjust alignment angles to vehicle specification, if necessary. Refer to Wheel Alignment Specifications (See: Specifications/Wheel Alignment Specifications). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Alignment Measurement > Page 9848 Alignment: Service and Repair Front Camber Adjustment Front Camber Adjustment 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle (See: Wheels and Tires/Vehicle Lifting/Service and Repair). 2. Remove the wheel and tire assemblies. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation (See: Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair). 3. Remove the strut to knuckle nuts and bolts. Discard the nuts and bolts. 4. If the strut has not been previously modified, perform the following procedure: 1. Disconnect the strut from the knuckle. Note: * Maximum outboard adjustment-(increased negative camber) 2.0 mm of outboard elongation or to within 11.0 mm from outboard edge of lower strut clevis bracket, whichever comes first * Maximum inboard adjustment-(increased positive camber) 4.0 mm of inboard elongation Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Alignment Measurement > Page 9849 * If filing the strut, paint the exposed metal with primer. 2. If increasing negative camber, remove material from the outside of the lower strut hole. 3. If decreasing negative camber, remove material from the inside of the lower strut hole. 5. Loosely install new strut to knuckle nuts and bolts. 6. Adjust the camber to specifications by moving the top of the wheel in or out as necessary. Refer to Wheel Alignment Specifications (See: Specifications/Wheel Alignment Specifications). Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener Caution). 7. Tighten strut to knuckle nuts and bolts to 180 Nm (133 lb ft). 8. Install the wheel and tire assemblies. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation (See: Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Alignment Measurement > Page 9850 Alignment: Service and Repair Wheel Alignment - Steering Wheel Angle and/or Front Toe Adjustment Wheel Alignment - Steering Wheel Angle and/or Front Toe Adjustment 1. Position and lock the steering wheel with the vehicle with the wheels in the straight forward position. 2. Loosen both inner tie rod jam nuts. Note: The inner tie rod must rotate freely from the boot seal surface. Do not allow the boot to rotate. 3. Loosen the inner tie rod seal to boot surface. 4. Use a wrench on the tie rod flats to increase or decrease the toe angle specifications. Refer to Wheel Alignment Specifications (See: Specifications/Wheel Alignment Specifications). Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener Caution). 5. Tighten the inner tie rod jam nuts to 70 Nm (52 lb ft). 6. Inspect the toe angle to ensure proper adjustment and adjust as necessary. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Alignment Measurement > Page 9851 Alignment: Service and Repair Wheel Alignment Measurement Wheel Alignment Measurement Steering and vibration complaints are not always the result of improper alignment. One possible cause is wheel and tire imbalance. Another possibility is tire lead due to worn or improperly manufactured tires. Lead/pull is defined as follows: At a constant highway speed on a typical straight road, lead/pull is the amount of effort required at the steering wheel to maintain the vehicle's straight path. Lead is the vehicle deviation from a straight path on a level road without pressure on the steering wheel. Refer to Radial Tire Lead/Pull Correction (See: Wheels and Tires/Testing and Inspection/Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures/Radial Tire Lead/Pull Correction) in order to determine if the vehicle has a tire lead problem. Before performing any adjustment affecting wheel alignment, perform the following inspections in order to ensure correct alignment readings: * Inspect for visible damage to the suspension components and replace as necessary. * Inspect the tires for the proper inflation and irregular tire wear. Refer to Vehicle Certification, Tire Placard, Anti-Theft, and Service Parts ID Label (See: Application and ID/Vehicle Certification, Tire Placard, Anti-Theft and Service Parts ID Label) and Tire Diagnosis - Irregular or Premature Wear (See: Wheels and Tires/Testing and Inspection/Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures/Tire Diagnosis - Irregular or Premature Wear). * Inspect the runout of the wheels and the tires. Refer to Wheel Mounting Surface Check (See: Wheels and Tires/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics). * Inspect the wheel bearings for backlash and excessive play. Refer to Wheel Bearings Diagnosis (See: Suspension/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Wheel Bearings Diagnosis). * Inspect the ball joints for looseness or wear. * Inspect the tie rod ends for looseness or wear. * Inspect the control arms and stabilizer shaft for looseness or wear. * Inspect the steering gear for looseness at the frame. Refer to Fastener Tightening Specifications (See: Steering/Specifications/Mechanical Specifications). * Inspect the struts/shock absorbers for wear, leaks, and any noticeable noises. Refer to Suspension Strut and Shock Absorber Testing - On Vehicle (See: Suspension/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Suspension Strut and Shock Absorber Testing - On Vehicle). * Inspect the vehicle trim height. Refer to Trim Height Inspection (See: Suspension/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Trim Height Inspection). * Inspect the steering wheel for excessive drag or poor return due to stiff or rusted linkage or suspension components. * Inspect the fuel level. The fuel tank should be full or the vehicle should have a compensating load added. Give consideration to excess loads, such as tool boxes, sample cases, etc. If normally carried in the vehicle, these items should remain in the vehicle during alignment adjustments. Give consideration also to the condition of the equipment being used for the alignment. Follow the equipment manufacturer's instructions. Satisfactory vehicle operation may occur over a wide range of alignment settings. However, if the setting exceeds the service allowable specifications, correct the alignment to the service preferred specifications. Refer to Wheel Alignment Specifications (See: Specifications/Wheel Alignment Specifications). Perform the following steps in order to measure the front and rear alignment angles: 1. Install the alignment equipment according to the manufacturer's instructions. 2. Jounce the front and the rear bumpers 3 times prior to checking the wheel alignment. 3. Measure the alignment angles and record the readings. Note: * Record the "Before" and "After" alignment measurements. * When performing adjustments to vehicles requiring a 4-wheel alignment, set the rear toe adjustment first in order to obtain proper front alignment angles. * The rear camber and caster is not adjustable. 4. Adjust alignment angles to vehicle specification, if necessary. Refer to Wheel Alignment Specifications (See: Specifications/Wheel Alignment Specifications). Front Camber Adjustment Front Camber Adjustment 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle (See: Wheels and Tires/Vehicle Lifting/Service and Repair). 2. Remove the wheel and tire assemblies. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation (See: Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Alignment Measurement > Page 9852 3. Remove the strut to knuckle nuts and bolts. Discard the nuts and bolts. 4. If the strut has not been previously modified, perform the following procedure: 1. Disconnect the strut from the knuckle. Note: * Maximum outboard adjustment-(increased negative camber) 2.0 mm of outboard elongation or to within 11.0 mm from outboard edge of lower strut clevis bracket, whichever comes first * Maximum inboard adjustment-(increased positive camber) 4.0 mm of inboard elongation * If filing the strut, paint the exposed metal with primer. 2. If increasing negative camber, remove material from the outside of the lower strut hole. 3. If decreasing negative camber, remove material from the inside of the lower strut hole. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Alignment Measurement > Page 9853 5. Loosely install new strut to knuckle nuts and bolts. 6. Adjust the camber to specifications by moving the top of the wheel in or out as necessary. Refer to Wheel Alignment Specifications (See: Specifications/Wheel Alignment Specifications). Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener Caution). 7. Tighten strut to knuckle nuts and bolts to 180 Nm (133 lb ft). 8. Install the wheel and tire assemblies. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation (See: Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair). Front Caster Adjustment Front Caster Adjustment The front caster is not adjustable. If the front caster angle is not within specifications, inspect for suspension support misalignment or front suspension damage. Refer to Wheel Alignment Specifications (See: Specifications/Wheel Alignment Specifications). Replace any damaged suspension components as necessary. Wheel Alignment - Steering Wheel Angle and/or Front Toe Adjustment Wheel Alignment - Steering Wheel Angle and/or Front Toe Adjustment Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Alignment Measurement > Page 9854 1. Position and lock the steering wheel with the vehicle with the wheels in the straight forward position. 2. Loosen both inner tie rod jam nuts. Note: The inner tie rod must rotate freely from the boot seal surface. Do not allow the boot to rotate. 3. Loosen the inner tie rod seal to boot surface. 4. Use a wrench on the tie rod flats to increase or decrease the toe angle specifications. Refer to Wheel Alignment Specifications (See: Specifications/Wheel Alignment Specifications). Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener Caution). 5. Tighten the inner tie rod jam nuts to 70 Nm (52 lb ft). 6. Inspect the toe angle to ensure proper adjustment and adjust as necessary. Rear Camber Adjustment Rear Camber Adjustment Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Alignment Measurement > Page 9855 1. Loosen the upper control arm-to-frame fastener enough to allow movement. Note: The frame of the vehicle is slotted, turning the cam nut will move the camber in to the designated location. 2. Rotate the upper control arm-to-frame fastener in the direction necessary to the correct the camber measurement. 3. Snug the upper control arm-to-frame fastener, do not tighten at this time. 4. Reinspect the rear camber specifications and adjust as necessary. Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener Caution). 5. Hold the nut and tighten the upper control arm-to-frame bolt to 164 Nm (121 lb ft). 6. Repeat the procedure for the other rear wheel. Rear Toe Adjustment Rear Toe Adjustment 1. Loosen the suspension adjustment link-to-frame fastener enough to allow for movement. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Alignment Measurement > Page 9856 Note: If experiencing problems in adjusting the rear toe, replace the existing nut with the service cam nut to eliminate the adjustment problem. 2. Rotate the suspension adjustment nut in the direction necessary to correct the toe angle. 3. Snug the suspension adjustment link-to-frame fastener, do not tighten at this time. 4. Reinspect the rear toe specifications and adjust as necessary. Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener Caution). 5. Hold the nut and tighten the link-to-frame fastener bolt to 164 Nm (121 lb ft). 6. Repeat the procedure for the other rear wheel. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Relays and Modules - Steering and Suspension > Relays and Modules - Steering > Steering Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams Steering Control Module: Diagrams K43 Power Steering Control Module X1 (LAF) K43 Power Steering Control Module X2 (LAF) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Relays and Modules - Steering and Suspension > Relays and Modules - Steering > Steering Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 9862 K43 Power Steering Control Module X3 (LAF) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Relays and Modules - Steering and Suspension > Relays and Modules - Steering > Steering Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 9863 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Relays and Modules - Steering and Suspension > Relays and Modules - Steering > Steering Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 9864 Steering Control Module: Service and Repair Power Steering Control Module Calibration Steering Angle Sensor Centering and Software Endstop Learning Warning An inaccurate or not centered steering angle sensor could limit the operation of the electric power steering (EPS) and result in personal injury. Centering of the steering angle sensor and software endstop learning might be required after certain service procedures are performed. Some of these procedures are as follows: * Steering angle sensor replacement * Steering gear replacement * Power steering assist motor replacement * Steering column replacement * Steering linkage inner tie rod replacement * Steering linkage outer tie rod replacement Note: It is necessary to perform the steering angle sensor centering before the software endstop learning. Steering Angle Sensor Centering For the centering procedure of the external steering angle sensor (electronic stability program) refer to Steering Angle Sensor Centering (See: Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension/Sensors and Switches - Steering/Steering Angle Sensor/Service and Repair/Procedures). The centering procedure of the internal steering angle sensor (w/o electronic stability program) can be completed with the following steps: Conditions: Front axle measured and set, engine running, vehicle speed 0 km/h (0 MPH), internal steering angle sensor is activated. 1. Using the steering wheel, align the front wheels in the center forward position. 2. Using a scan tool, perform the Configuration/Reset Functions, Steering Wheel Angle Sensor Centering procedure. 3. Steer from the center position slowly 90° to the left. 4. Steer slowly back to the center position and then slowly 90° to the right. 5. Steer slowly back to the center position. 6. Perform the steering movements again. 7. Centering procedure is completed. Software Endstop Learning The software endstop learning procedure can be completed with the following steps: Conditions: Front axle measured and set, vehicle speed 0 km/h (0 MPH), internal steering angle sensor is calibrated or external steering angle sensor sends a valid CAN signal. 1. Using a scan tool, perform the Configuration/Reset Functions, Power Steering Softstops Reset procedure and follow the on-screen instructions. 2. Using a scan tool, perform the Configuration/Reset Functions, Power Steering Softstops Learn procedure and follow the on-screen instructions. 3. Software endstop learning procedure is completed. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Relays and Modules - Steering and Suspension > Relays and Modules - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > TPMS System - Service And Re-Learning Sensor IDs Tire Pressure Module: Technical Service Bulletins TPMS System - Service And Re-Learning Sensor IDs INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 10-03-16-001 Date: July 19, 2010 Subject: TPMS System Service and Re-Learning Sensor IDs Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2 2009 and Prior HUMMER H3 2010 and Prior Saturn Models 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X with Wheel-Mounted Tire Pressure Sensors In the event that the spare tire, which is normally not equipped with a tire pressure monitor (TPM) sensor, is installed in place of one of the road tires and the vehicle is driven above 40 km/h (25 mph) for 20 minutes or more, the TPM indicator icon on the instrument panel cluster (IPC) will flash for approximately one minute and then remain on steady each time the ignition is turned ON, indicating a diagnostic trouble code (DTC) has been set. The driver information center (DIC), if equipped, will also display a SERVICE TIRE MONITOR type message. When the road tire is repaired and reinstalled in the original location, the TPM indicator icon illumination and DIC message may remain displayed until the DTC is cleared. To ensure that the TPM indicator and the DIC message are cleared after service, it is necessary to clear any TPM DTCs using a scan tool. If a scan tool is unavailable, performing the TPM relearn procedure using a TPM diagnostic tool will provide the same results. It is advised to perform the relearn procedure away from other vehicles to prevent picking up a stray sensor signal. If one or more of the TPM sensors are missing or damaged and have been replaced, then the relearn procedure must be performed. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering > Steering Angle Sensor > Component Information > Locations Steering Angle Sensor: Locations Instrument Panel/Center Console Component Views Steering Column Components 1 - S78 Turn Signal/Multifunction Switch 2 - X85 Steering Wheel Air Bag Coil 3 - S82 Windshield Wiper/Washer Switch 4 - S39 Ignition Switch 5 - M93 Ignition Cylinder Lock Control Solenoid Actuator 6 - B101 Immobilizer Antenna 7 - B99 Steering Wheel Angle Sensor Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering > Steering Angle Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 9875 Steering Angle Sensor: Diagrams B99 Steering Wheel Angle Sensor Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering > Steering Angle Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures Steering Angle Sensor: Procedures Steering Angle Sensor Centering The steering angle sensor does not require a centering often. Centering of the steering angle sensor might be required after certain service procedures are performed. Some of these procedures are as follows: * Electronic brake control module (EBCM) replacement * Steering angle sensor replacement * Steering gear replacement * Steering column replacement * Collision or other physical damage The steering angle sensor centering procedure can be completed with a scan tool using the following steps: 1. Using the steering wheel, align the front wheels forward. 2. Apply the parking brake, or set the transmission in the P position. 3. Install the scan tool to the data link connector. 4. Ignition ON, engine OFF 5. Select Steering Wheel Angle Sensor Reset in the Steering Wheel Angle Sensor Module Configuration/Reset Functions list. 6. Follow the scan tool directions to complete the learn procedure. 7. Select Steering Wheel Angle Sensor Learn in the Steering Wheel Angle Sensor Module Configuration/Reset Functions list. 8. Follow the scan tool directions to complete the learn procedure. 9. Select Steering Wheel Angle Sensor Learn in the EBCM Configuration/Reset Functions list. 10. Follow the scan tool directions to complete the learn procedure. 11. Clear any DTCs that may be set. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering > Steering Angle Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 9878 Steering Angle Sensor: Removal and Replacement Steering Angle Sensor Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Suspension > Steering Angle Sensor > Component Information > Locations Steering Angle Sensor: Locations Instrument Panel/Center Console Component Views Steering Column Components 1 - S78 Turn Signal/Multifunction Switch 2 - X85 Steering Wheel Air Bag Coil 3 - S82 Windshield Wiper/Washer Switch 4 - S39 Ignition Switch 5 - M93 Ignition Cylinder Lock Control Solenoid Actuator 6 - B101 Immobilizer Antenna 7 - B99 Steering Wheel Angle Sensor Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Suspension > Steering Angle Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 9883 Steering Angle Sensor: Diagrams B99 Steering Wheel Angle Sensor Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Suspension > Steering Angle Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures Steering Angle Sensor: Procedures Steering Angle Sensor Centering The steering angle sensor does not require a centering often. Centering of the steering angle sensor might be required after certain service procedures are performed. Some of these procedures are as follows: * Electronic brake control module (EBCM) replacement * Steering angle sensor replacement * Steering gear replacement * Steering column replacement * Collision or other physical damage The steering angle sensor centering procedure can be completed with a scan tool using the following steps: 1. Using the steering wheel, align the front wheels forward. 2. Apply the parking brake, or set the transmission in the P position. 3. Install the scan tool to the data link connector. 4. Ignition ON, engine OFF 5. Select Steering Wheel Angle Sensor Reset in the Steering Wheel Angle Sensor Module Configuration/Reset Functions list. 6. Follow the scan tool directions to complete the learn procedure. 7. Select Steering Wheel Angle Sensor Learn in the Steering Wheel Angle Sensor Module Configuration/Reset Functions list. 8. Follow the scan tool directions to complete the learn procedure. 9. Select Steering Wheel Angle Sensor Learn in the EBCM Configuration/Reset Functions list. 10. Follow the scan tool directions to complete the learn procedure. 11. Clear any DTCs that may be set. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Suspension > Steering Angle Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 9886 Steering Angle Sensor: Removal and Replacement Steering Angle Sensor Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > TPMS System - Service And Re-Learning Sensor IDs Tire Pressure Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins TPMS System - Service And Re-Learning Sensor IDs INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 10-03-16-001 Date: July 19, 2010 Subject: TPMS System Service and Re-Learning Sensor IDs Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2 2009 and Prior HUMMER H3 2010 and Prior Saturn Models 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X with Wheel-Mounted Tire Pressure Sensors In the event that the spare tire, which is normally not equipped with a tire pressure monitor (TPM) sensor, is installed in place of one of the road tires and the vehicle is driven above 40 km/h (25 mph) for 20 minutes or more, the TPM indicator icon on the instrument panel cluster (IPC) will flash for approximately one minute and then remain on steady each time the ignition is turned ON, indicating a diagnostic trouble code (DTC) has been set. The driver information center (DIC), if equipped, will also display a SERVICE TIRE MONITOR type message. When the road tire is repaired and reinstalled in the original location, the TPM indicator icon illumination and DIC message may remain displayed until the DTC is cleared. To ensure that the TPM indicator and the DIC message are cleared after service, it is necessary to clear any TPM DTCs using a scan tool. If a scan tool is unavailable, performing the TPM relearn procedure using a TPM diagnostic tool will provide the same results. It is advised to perform the relearn procedure away from other vehicles to prevent picking up a stray sensor signal. If one or more of the TPM sensors are missing or damaged and have been replaced, then the relearn procedure must be performed. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 9892 Tire Pressure Sensor: Testing and Inspection Tire Pressure Indicator Sensor Learn Special Tools J-46079 Tire Pressure Monitor Diagnostic Tool Relearn Mode Description The tire pressure monitor (TPM) system uses the instrument panel cluster (IPC), body control module (BCM), 4 radio frequency transmitting pressure sensors, and the serial data circuit to perform the TPM Relearn mode functions. The sensor Relearn procedure must be performed after every tire rotation, BCM replacement, or sensor replacement. Once the relearn mode has been enabled, each of the sensors unique identification codes can be learned into the BCM memory. When a sensor ID has been learned, the BCM sends a serial data message to the BCM to sound a horn chirp. This verifies the sensor has transmitted its ID and the BCM has received and learned it. The BCM must learn the sensor IDs in the proper sequence to determine correct sensor location. The first learned ID is assigned to the left front location, the second to right front, the third to right rear and the fourth to left rear. The turn signals will individually illuminate indicating which location is to be learned in the proper sequence. Sensor Functions Using J-46079 or EL-46079 Each sensor has an internal low frequency coil. When the J-46079 is used in activate mode, it produces a low frequency transmission that activates the sensor. The sensor responds to a low frequency activation by transmitting in learn mode. When the BCM receives a learn mode transmission while in TPM learn mode, it will assign that sensors ID to the location on the vehicle relative to the order in which it was learned. Sensor Functions Using Pressure Increase/Decrease Method Each sensor takes a pressure measurement sample once every 30 seconds while in stationary mode. If the tire pressure increases, or decreases by more than 8.3 kPa (1.2 psi) from the last pressure measurement, another measurement will occur immediately to verify the change in pressure. If a pressure change has indeed occurred, the sensor transmits in Learn mode. When the BCM receives a Learn mode transmission while in TPM learn mode, it will assign that sensor's ID to the location on the vehicle relative to the order in which it was learned. Relearn Mode Cancellation The Relearn mode will cancel if the ignition is cycled to OFF or if more than 2 minutes has elapsed for any sensor that has not been learned. If the relearn mode is cancelled before the first sensor is learned, the original sensor IDs will be maintained. If the relearn mode is canceled after the first sensor is learned, the following will occur: * All stored sensor IDs will be invalidated in the BCM memory. * If equipped, the DIC will display dashes instead of tire pressures. * DTC C0775 will be set. These conditions will now require the relearn procedure to be repeated for the system to function properly. TPM Relearn Procedure Note: If using the scan tool to enable the relearn mode, the J-46079 must be used to activate the sensors. When this preferred method is used, any stray sensor signals will not affect the relearn procedure. In the event a particular sensor's information is displayed on the special tool upon activation but the horn does not chirp, it may be necessary to rotate the wheel valve stem to a different position due to the sensor signal is being blocked by another component. If using the DIC buttons to enable the relearn mode, the J-46079 or Pressure Increase/Decrease Method may be used. Before proceeding with this method, ensure that no other learn procedure is being performed simultaneously or that tire pressures are not being adjusted on another TPM equipped vehicle within close proximity. Stray signals from other TPM equipped vehicles just driving by can be inadvertently learned. If any random horn chirps are heard from the vehicle while performing the learn procedure, most likely a stray sensor has been learned and the procedure will need to be cancelled and repeated. Under these circumstances, performing the TPM Relearn Procedure away from other vehicles would be highly recommended. In the event a particular sensor activation does not cause the horn to chirp, it may be necessary to rotate the wheel valve stem to a different position due to the sensor signal is being blocked by another component. Preferred Scan Tool Relearn Enable Method 1. Apply park brake (manual transmission only). 2. Ignition ON, using a scan tool, initiate the Tire Pressure Sensors Learn mode. A double horn chirp will sound indicating the Relearn mode has been enabled. The left front turn signal will also be illuminated. 3. Starting with the left front tire, active the sensor by holding the antenna of the J-46079 aimed upward against the tire sidewall close to the wheel rim at the valve stem location. Press and release the Activate button and wait for a horn chirp. Once the horn chirp has sounded, the sensor information is learned and the turn signal in the next location to be learned will illuminate. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 9893 4. After the horn chirp has sounded and the right front turn signal is illuminated, repeat step 2 for the remaining 3 sensors in the following order: 1. Right front 2. Right rear 3. Left rear 5. When the left rear sensor has been learned and a double horn chirp has sounded, the learn process is complete and the BCM exits the Relearn mode. 6. Ignition OFF, adjust all tires to the recommended pressures. Refer to Vehicle Certification, Tire Placard, Anti-Theft, and Service Parts ID Label ( See: Application and ID/Vehicle Certification, Tire Placard, Anti-Theft and Service Parts ID Label). Alternate DIC Relearn Enable Method 1. Apply park brake (manual transmission only). 2. Ignition ON, activate the Relearn mode with the driver information center (DIC) display controls. A double horn chirp sounds indicating the Relearn mode has been enabled and the left front turn signal will also be illuminated. 3. Starting with the left front tire, activate the tire pressure sensor by using one of the following methods: * Hold the antenna of the J-46079 aimed upward against the tire sidewall close to the wheel rim at the valve stem location. Press and release the activate button and wait for a horn chirp. Once the horn chirp has sounded, the sensor information is learned and the turn signal in the next location to be learned will illuminate. Warning Over inflating tires may cause personal injury or damage to the tires and wheels. When increasing tire pressure do not exceed the maximum inflation pressure as noted on the tire sidewall. * Increase/decrease the tire pressure for 8-10 seconds then wait for a horn chirp. The horn chirp may occur before or up to 30 seconds after the 8-10 second pressure increase/decrease time period has been reached. Once the horn chirp has sounded, the sensor information is learned and the turn signal in the next location to be learned will illuminate. 4. After the horn chirp has sounded and the right front turn signal is illuminated, repeat step 2 for the remaining 3 sensors in the following order: 1. Right front 2. Right rear 3. Left rear 5. When the left rear sensor has been learned and a double horn chirp has sounded, the learn process is complete and the BCM exits the Relearn mode. 6. Ignition OFF, adjust all tires to the recommended pressures. Refer to Vehicle Certification, Tire Placard, Anti-Theft, and Service Parts ID Label ( See: Application and ID/Vehicle Certification, Tire Placard, Anti-Theft and Service Parts ID Label). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 9894 Tire Pressure Sensor: Service and Repair Tire Pressure Indicator Sensor Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Raise the vehicle on a suitable support. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle (See: Wheels and Tires/Vehicle Lifting/Service and Repair). 2. Remove the tire/wheel assembly from the vehicle. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation (See: Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair). Note: Before the tire is removed from the wheel, note the following items to avoid tire pressure sensor damage upon tire dismounting. * Place the sensor's cap and valve on a dry clean surface after removal. The cap is aluminum and the valve is nickel plated to prevent corrosion and are not to be substituted with a cap or valve made of any other material. * When separating the tire bead from the wheel, position the bead breaking fixture 90 degrees from the valve stem. * Position the mounting/dismounting head so the tire iron, or pry bar can be inserted slightly clockwise of the sensor body when prying the tire bead up and over the mounting/dismounting head. * Using the tire machine, rotate the tire/wheel assembly clockwise when transferring the tire bead to the out side of the wheel rim. * Repeat items for inner bead. 3. Remove the tire from the wheel. Refer to Tire Dismounting and Mounting (See: Wheels and Tires/Tires/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement). Note: If any tire sealant is noted upon tire dismounting, remove all residual liquid sealant from the inside of the tire and wheel surfaces. 4. Remove the tire pressure sensor nut. 5. Remove the tire pressure sensor. Installation Procedure 1. Clean any dirt or debris from the grommet sealing area. 2. Insert the sensor in the wheel hole with the air passage facing away from the wheel. Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener Caution). 3. Install the sensor nut and position the sensor body parallel to the inside wheel surface while torquing. Tighten the sensor nut to 7 Nm (62 lb in). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 9895 Note: Before reinstalling the tire on the wheel, note the following items to avoid tire pressure sensor damage upon tire mounting: * Position the mounting/dismounting head 180 degrees from the valve stem. * Position the bead transition area 45 degrees counterclockwise of the valve stem. * Using the tire machine, rotate the tire/wheel assembly clockwise when transferring the tire bead to the inside of the wheel rim. * Repeat items for outer bead. 4. Install the tire on the wheel. Refer to Tire Dismounting and Mounting (See: Wheels and Tires/Tires/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement). Note: A service replacement tire pressure sensor is shipped in OFF mode. In this mode the sensor's unique identification code cannot be learned into the liftgate module (LGM) memory. The sensor must be taken out of OFF mode by spinning the tire/wheel assembly above 32 km/h (20 mph) in order to close the sensor's internal roll switch for at least 10 seconds. 5. Install the tire/wheel assembly on the vehicle. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation (See: Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair). 6. Lower the vehicle. 7. Learn the tire pressure sensors. Refer to Tire Pressure Indicator Sensor Learn (See: Testing and Inspection). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair Power Steering Bleeding: Service and Repair Power Steering System Bleeding Note: * Use clean, new power steering fluid only. Refer to Adhesives, Fluids, Lubricants, and Sealers (See: Specifications/Fluid Type Specifications). * Hoses touching the frame, body or engine may cause system noise. Ensure the hoses do not touch any other part of the vehicle. * Loose connections may not leak, but could allow air into the steering system. Ensure all hose connections are tight. * Maintain the power steering fluid level throughout the bleeding procedure. 1. Fill the power steering fluid reservoir with fluid to the minimum system level, the FULL COLD level, or the middle of the hash mark on the cap stick fluid level indicator, as applicable. 2. Raise the vehicle until the front wheels are off the ground. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle (See: Wheels and Tires/Vehicle Lifting/Service and Repair). 3. With the key in the ON position and with the engine OFF, turn the steering wheel from stop to stop 12 times. If the vehicle is equipped with longer length power steering hoses, turn the steering wheel from stop to stop 15 to 20 times. 4. Verify the power steering fluid level. Refer to Checking and Adding Power Steering Fluid (See: Service and Repair/Checking and Adding Power Steering Fluid). 5. Start the engine. Rotate the steering wheel from left to right. Inspect the power steering system for signs of cavitation or fluid aeration, like pump noise or whining. 6. Verify the fluid level. Repeat the bleed procedure, if necessary. 7. Lower the vehicle. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Fluid > Component Information > Specifications Power Steering Fluid: Specifications Hydraulic Power Steering System (V6 Engines Only) DEXRON-VI Automatic Transmission Fluid Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Fluid Reservoir > Component Information > Service and Repair > Power Steering Fluid Reservoir Replacement - Lower Power Steering Fluid Reservoir: Service and Repair Power Steering Fluid Reservoir Replacement Lower Power Steering Fluid Reservoir Replacement - Lower Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Fluid Reservoir > Component Information > Service and Repair > Power Steering Fluid Reservoir Replacement - Lower > Page 9908 Power Steering Fluid Reservoir: Service and Repair Power Steering Fluid Reservoir Replacement Upper Power Steering Fluid Reservoir Replacement - Upper Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Line/Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Power Steering Line/Hose: > 09334A > Mar > 10 > Campaign - Power Steering Hose Heat Sleeve Removal Technical Service Bulletin # 09334A Date: 100324 Campaign - Power Steering Hose Heat Sleeve Removal SERVICE UPDATE Bulletin No.: 09334A Date: March 24, 2010 Subject: 09334A - Service Update for Inventory and Customer Vehicles - Power Steering Line Sleeve May Retain Moisture - Expires with Base Warranty Models: 2010 Chevrolet Equinox 2010 GMC Terrain Supercede: A Caution statement has been added to the service procedure advising technicians to use care when removing the heat shield from the power steering lines to prevent damage to the power steering lines or power steering line brackets.Please discard all copies of bulletin 09334, issued December 2009. This service update includes vehicles in dealer inventory and customer vehicles that return to the dealership for any reason. It will expire at the end of the involved vehicle's New Vehicle Limited Warranty period. Purpose This bulletin provides a service procedure to remove the sleeve from the power steering line on certain 2010 model year Chevrolet Equinox and GMC Terrain vehicles. The power steering return hose assembly routes power steering fluid from the steering gear, to a heat exchanger, and back to the steering pump. A portion of the lines are covered with a sleeve. The heat sleeve is wrapped around the pipes and secured with nylon ties. Moisture can become trapped between the sleeve and the lines, which over an extended amount of time, could cause corrosion on the line. This service procedure should be completed as soon as possible on involved vehicles currently in dealer inventory and customer vehicles that return to the dealer for any type of service during the New Vehicle Limited Warranty coverage period. Vehicles Involved A list of involved vehicles currently in dealer inventory is available on the "Service Update Bulletin Information" link under the "Service" tab in GM GlobalConnect (US), or attached to the GlobalConnect message (Canada), used to release this bulletin. Customer vehicles that return for service, for any reason, and are still covered under the vehicle's base warranty, and are within the VIN breakpoints provided below, should be checked for vehicle eligibility in the appropriate system listed below. Important Dealers are to confirm vehicle eligibility prior to beginning repairs by using GMVIS (dealers using WINS) or the Investigate Vehicle History link (dealers/retailers using GWM). Not all vehicles within the above breakpoints may be involved. Parts Information No parts are required for this service update. Claim Information 1. Submit a claim using the table above. 2. Courtesy Transportation - For dealers using WINS, submit using normal labor code; for dealers using GWM - submit as Net Item under the repair labor code. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Line/Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Power Steering Line/Hose: > 09334A > Mar > 10 > Campaign - Power Steering Hose Heat Sleeve Removal > Page 9917 Disclaimer Service Procedure Service Procedure 1. Partially raise and support vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle in SI. 2. Determine if there are power steering line heat sleeves attached to the power steering lines located along the frame on the front passenger side of the vehicle. - If heat sleeves are attached to the power steering lines, proceed to Step 3. - If no heat sleeves are attached to the power steering lines, lower the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle in SI. No further action is required. 3. Remove the front passenger side tire and wheel assembly. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation in SI. 4. Remove the passenger side engine splash shield. Refer to Engine Splash Shield Replacement -Right Side in SI. Caution Do not bend the power steering lines or power steering line brackets while removing the heat shield from the power steering lines. Bending the power steering lines or power steering line brackets may cause the power steering lines to contact the drive axle or frame of the vehicle, either at rest or during engine-roll. After removing the heat shield, ensure that there is no contact between the power steering lines and the drive axle or frame of the vehicle to avoid a lline rub through condition and power steering line leak. 5. Locate the power steering line heat sleeves. The power steering lines in the wheelhouse area are wrapped in silver heat sleeves (1) that are secured with service tie straps (2). 6. Remove the tie straps (2) from the power steering line heat sleeves (1) accessible from the wheelhouse area using a wire cutter or equivalent tool. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Line/Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Power Steering Line/Hose: > 09334A > Mar > 10 > Campaign - Power Steering Hose Heat Sleeve Removal > Page 9918 Caution To avoid cutting the rubber portion of the power steering lines or scratching the corrosion-resistant coating on the steel portion of the power steering lines, it is essential to take the following precautions: - Use a safety/utility knife to cut through the silver heat sleeve material. - Apply tape to the outside (non-cutting edges) of the safety/utility knife. - Cut away from the power steering lines and hoses. Never cut into the power steering lines or rubber hoses. - Slowly and carefully remove the sleeve from the power steering line. - Ensure there is NO blade-to-metal or blade-to-rubber contact with the safety/utility knife and power steering line during the sleeve removal process. Note If a plastic body trim tool is NOT available, use a piece of electrical conduit or a flat wooden stick to protect the rubber portion of the power steering line. 7. Protect the hose when starting the cut by inserting a plastic body trim tool (1) or equivalent tool between the rubber hose portion (2) of the power steering line and the heat sleeve (3). Refer to illustration. 8. Insert the safety/utility knife (4) into the heat sleeve material (3) until the blade contacts the plastic body trim tool (1). Caution Do not let the blade tip run off the body trim tool and cut into the rubber hose. 9. Once the blade has made contact with the plastic body trim tool, make a horizontal cut toward the front of the vehicle that is about 25 mm (1 in.) in length. 10. Once the cut has been started, remove the plastic body trim tool or equivalent from the heat sleeve and power steering line. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Line/Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Power Steering Line/Hose: > 09334A > Mar > 10 > Campaign - Power Steering Hose Heat Sleeve Removal > Page 9919 Caution Carefully remove the heat shield from the power steering lines to avoid cutting the rubber hose or metal portion of the power steering lines. 11. Cut the remaining portion of the heat sleeve (3) from end-to-end (5) using a safety/utility knife (4). With the blade tip and cutting edge pointed away from and not contacting the rubber hose, complete the cut by pulling the excess heat sleeve to one side of the hose so the cut path is away from the hose. 12. Remove the heat sleeve material from the power steering lines. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Line/Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Power Steering Line/Hose: > 09334A > Mar > 10 > Campaign - Power Steering Hose Heat Sleeve Removal > Page 9920 ERROR: stackunderflow OFFENDING COMMAND: ~ STACK: Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Line/Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Power Steering Line/Hose: > 09334A > Mar > 10 > Campaign - Power Steering Hose Heat Sleeve Removal Technical Service Bulletin # 09334A Date: 100324 Campaign - Power Steering Hose Heat Sleeve Removal SERVICE UPDATE Bulletin No.: 09334A Date: March 24, 2010 Subject: 09334A - Service Update for Inventory and Customer Vehicles - Power Steering Line Sleeve May Retain Moisture - Expires with Base Warranty Models: 2010 Chevrolet Equinox 2010 GMC Terrain Supercede: A Caution statement has been added to the service procedure advising technicians to use care when removing the heat shield from the power steering lines to prevent damage to the power steering lines or power steering line brackets.Please discard all copies of bulletin 09334, issued December 2009. This service update includes vehicles in dealer inventory and customer vehicles that return to the dealership for any reason. It will expire at the end of the involved vehicle's New Vehicle Limited Warranty period. Purpose This bulletin provides a service procedure to remove the sleeve from the power steering line on certain 2010 model year Chevrolet Equinox and GMC Terrain vehicles. The power steering return hose assembly routes power steering fluid from the steering gear, to a heat exchanger, and back to the steering pump. A portion of the lines are covered with a sleeve. The heat sleeve is wrapped around the pipes and secured with nylon ties. Moisture can become trapped between the sleeve and the lines, which over an extended amount of time, could cause corrosion on the line. This service procedure should be completed as soon as possible on involved vehicles currently in dealer inventory and customer vehicles that return to the dealer for any type of service during the New Vehicle Limited Warranty coverage period. Vehicles Involved A list of involved vehicles currently in dealer inventory is available on the "Service Update Bulletin Information" link under the "Service" tab in GM GlobalConnect (US), or attached to the GlobalConnect message (Canada), used to release this bulletin. Customer vehicles that return for service, for any reason, and are still covered under the vehicle's base warranty, and are within the VIN breakpoints provided below, should be checked for vehicle eligibility in the appropriate system listed below. Important Dealers are to confirm vehicle eligibility prior to beginning repairs by using GMVIS (dealers using WINS) or the Investigate Vehicle History link (dealers/retailers using GWM). Not all vehicles within the above breakpoints may be involved. Parts Information No parts are required for this service update. Claim Information 1. Submit a claim using the table above. 2. Courtesy Transportation - For dealers using WINS, submit using normal labor code; for dealers using GWM - submit as Net Item under the repair labor code. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Line/Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Power Steering Line/Hose: > 09334A > Mar > 10 > Campaign - Power Steering Hose Heat Sleeve Removal > Page 9926 Disclaimer Service Procedure Service Procedure 1. Partially raise and support vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle in SI. 2. Determine if there are power steering line heat sleeves attached to the power steering lines located along the frame on the front passenger side of the vehicle. - If heat sleeves are attached to the power steering lines, proceed to Step 3. - If no heat sleeves are attached to the power steering lines, lower the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle in SI. No further action is required. 3. Remove the front passenger side tire and wheel assembly. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation in SI. 4. Remove the passenger side engine splash shield. Refer to Engine Splash Shield Replacement -Right Side in SI. Caution Do not bend the power steering lines or power steering line brackets while removing the heat shield from the power steering lines. Bending the power steering lines or power steering line brackets may cause the power steering lines to contact the drive axle or frame of the vehicle, either at rest or during engine-roll. After removing the heat shield, ensure that there is no contact between the power steering lines and the drive axle or frame of the vehicle to avoid a lline rub through condition and power steering line leak. 5. Locate the power steering line heat sleeves. The power steering lines in the wheelhouse area are wrapped in silver heat sleeves (1) that are secured with service tie straps (2). 6. Remove the tie straps (2) from the power steering line heat sleeves (1) accessible from the wheelhouse area using a wire cutter or equivalent tool. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Line/Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Power Steering Line/Hose: > 09334A > Mar > 10 > Campaign - Power Steering Hose Heat Sleeve Removal > Page 9927 Caution To avoid cutting the rubber portion of the power steering lines or scratching the corrosion-resistant coating on the steel portion of the power steering lines, it is essential to take the following precautions: - Use a safety/utility knife to cut through the silver heat sleeve material. - Apply tape to the outside (non-cutting edges) of the safety/utility knife. - Cut away from the power steering lines and hoses. Never cut into the power steering lines or rubber hoses. - Slowly and carefully remove the sleeve from the power steering line. - Ensure there is NO blade-to-metal or blade-to-rubber contact with the safety/utility knife and power steering line during the sleeve removal process. Note If a plastic body trim tool is NOT available, use a piece of electrical conduit or a flat wooden stick to protect the rubber portion of the power steering line. 7. Protect the hose when starting the cut by inserting a plastic body trim tool (1) or equivalent tool between the rubber hose portion (2) of the power steering line and the heat sleeve (3). Refer to illustration. 8. Insert the safety/utility knife (4) into the heat sleeve material (3) until the blade contacts the plastic body trim tool (1). Caution Do not let the blade tip run off the body trim tool and cut into the rubber hose. 9. Once the blade has made contact with the plastic body trim tool, make a horizontal cut toward the front of the vehicle that is about 25 mm (1 in.) in length. 10. Once the cut has been started, remove the plastic body trim tool or equivalent from the heat sleeve and power steering line. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Line/Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Power Steering Line/Hose: > 09334A > Mar > 10 > Campaign - Power Steering Hose Heat Sleeve Removal > Page 9928 Caution Carefully remove the heat shield from the power steering lines to avoid cutting the rubber hose or metal portion of the power steering lines. 11. Cut the remaining portion of the heat sleeve (3) from end-to-end (5) using a safety/utility knife (4). With the blade tip and cutting edge pointed away from and not contacting the rubber hose, complete the cut by pulling the excess heat sleeve to one side of the hose so the cut path is away from the hose. 12. Remove the heat sleeve material from the power steering lines. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Line/Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Power Steering Line/Hose: > 09334A > Mar > 10 > Campaign - Power Steering Hose Heat Sleeve Removal > Page 9929 ERROR: stackunderflow OFFENDING COMMAND: ~ STACK: Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Line/Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Power Steering Fluid Cooling Pipe Replacement Power Steering Line/Hose: Service and Repair Power Steering Fluid Cooling Pipe Replacement Power Steering Fluid Cooling Pipe Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Place drain pans under the vehicle. 2. Remove the intake manifold cover. Refer to Intake Manifold Cover Replacement (See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Intake Manifold/Service and Repair/Intake Manifold Cover Replacement). 3. Remove as much power steering fluid from the upper power steering fluid reservoir as possible. 4. Remove the front bumper fascia. Refer to Front Bumper Fascia Replacement (Equinox) (See: Body and Frame/Bumper/Front Bumper/Front Bumper Cover / Fascia/Service and Repair/Front Bumper Fascia Replacement)Front Bumper Fascia Replacement (Terrain) (See: Body and Frame/Bumper/Front Bumper/Front Bumper Cover / Fascia/Service and Repair/Front Bumper Fascia Replacement). 5. Disconnect the power steering fluid cooling pipe (1) from the power steering gear (2). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Line/Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Power Steering Fluid Cooling Pipe Replacement > Page 9932 6. Disconnect the power steering fluid cooling pipe (1) from the lower power steering fluid reservoir (2). 7. Remove the power steering fluid cooling pipe bolt (5) from the bracket (4). 8. Disconnect the power steering fluid cooling pipe clip (3) from the bracket. 9. Remove the power steering fluid cooling pipe nut (2) and disconnect the bracket from the stud. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Line/Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Power Steering Fluid Cooling Pipe Replacement > Page 9933 10. Remove the 2 power steering fluid cooling pipe bolts (1) from the front bumper impact bar. 11. Disconnect the 3 power steering fluid cooling pipe clips (2). 12. Remove the power steering fluid cooling pipe (3) from the vehicle. Installation Procedure 1. Position the power steering fluid cooling pipe (3) in the vehicle. 2. Connect the 3 power steering fluid cooling pipe clips (2). Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener Caution). 3. Install the 2 power steering fluid cooling pipe bolts (1) to the front bumper impact bar and tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb in). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Line/Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Power Steering Fluid Cooling Pipe Replacement > Page 9934 4. Connect the power steering fluid cooling pipe bracket to the stud. Install the power steering fluid cooling pipe nut (2) and tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb in). 5. Connect the power steering fluid cooling pipe clip (3) to the bracket (4). 6. Install the power steering fluid cooling pipe bolt (5) to the bracket and tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb in). 7. Connect the power steering fluid cooling pipe (1) to the reservoir (2). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Line/Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Power Steering Fluid Cooling Pipe Replacement > Page 9935 8. Connect the power steering fluid cooling pipe (1) to the power steering gear (2). Tighten the fitting to 34 Nm (25 lb ft). 9. Fill and bleed the power steering system. Refer to Power Steering System Bleeding (See: Power Steering Bleeding/Service and Repair). 10. Clean any excess power steering fluid from the vehicle. 11. Remove the drain pans. 12. Install the front bumper fascia. Refer to Front Bumper Fascia Replacement (Equinox) (See: Body and Frame/Bumper/Front Bumper/Front Bumper Cover / Fascia/Service and Repair/Front Bumper Fascia Replacement)Front Bumper Fascia Replacement (Terrain) (See: Body and Frame/Bumper/Front Bumper/Front Bumper Cover / Fascia/Service and Repair/Front Bumper Fascia Replacement). 13. Install the intake manifold cover. Refer to Intake Manifold Cover Replacement (See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Intake Manifold/Service and Repair/Intake Manifold Cover Replacement). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Line/Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Power Steering Fluid Cooling Pipe Replacement > Page 9936 Power Steering Line/Hose: Service and Repair Power Steering Fluid Reservoir Outlet Hose Replacement Power Steering Fluid Reservoir Outlet Hose Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Line/Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Power Steering Fluid Cooling Pipe Replacement > Page 9937 Power Steering Line/Hose: Service and Repair Power Steering Gear Inlet Pipe/Hose Replacement Power Steering Gear Inlet Pipe/Hose Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Motor > Component Information > Service and Repair Power Steering Motor: Service and Repair Power Steering Assist Motor Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Motor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 9941 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Pump > Component Information > Specifications Power Steering Pump: Specifications Power Steering Pump Specifications Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Pump > Component Information > Service and Repair > Power Steering Pump Pulley Replacement Power Steering Pump: Service and Repair Power Steering Pump Pulley Replacement Power Steering Pump Pulley Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Pump > Component Information > Service and Repair > Power Steering Pump Pulley Replacement > Page 9947 Power Steering Pump: Service and Repair Power Steering Pump Replacement Power Steering Pump Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Pump > Component Information > Service and Repair > Power Steering Pump Pulley Replacement > Page 9948 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Steering Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams Steering Control Module: Diagrams K43 Power Steering Control Module X1 (LAF) K43 Power Steering Control Module X2 (LAF) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Steering Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 9952 K43 Power Steering Control Module X3 (LAF) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Steering Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 9953 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Steering Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 9954 Steering Control Module: Service and Repair Power Steering Control Module Calibration Steering Angle Sensor Centering and Software Endstop Learning Warning An inaccurate or not centered steering angle sensor could limit the operation of the electric power steering (EPS) and result in personal injury. Centering of the steering angle sensor and software endstop learning might be required after certain service procedures are performed. Some of these procedures are as follows: * Steering angle sensor replacement * Steering gear replacement * Power steering assist motor replacement * Steering column replacement * Steering linkage inner tie rod replacement * Steering linkage outer tie rod replacement Note: It is necessary to perform the steering angle sensor centering before the software endstop learning. Steering Angle Sensor Centering For the centering procedure of the external steering angle sensor (electronic stability program) refer to Steering Angle Sensor Centering (See: Sensors and Switches - Steering/Steering Angle Sensor/Service and Repair/Procedures). The centering procedure of the internal steering angle sensor (w/o electronic stability program) can be completed with the following steps: Conditions: Front axle measured and set, engine running, vehicle speed 0 km/h (0 MPH), internal steering angle sensor is activated. 1. Using the steering wheel, align the front wheels in the center forward position. 2. Using a scan tool, perform the Configuration/Reset Functions, Steering Wheel Angle Sensor Centering procedure. 3. Steer from the center position slowly 90° to the left. 4. Steer slowly back to the center position and then slowly 90° to the right. 5. Steer slowly back to the center position. 6. Perform the steering movements again. 7. Centering procedure is completed. Software Endstop Learning The software endstop learning procedure can be completed with the following steps: Conditions: Front axle measured and set, vehicle speed 0 km/h (0 MPH), internal steering angle sensor is calibrated or external steering angle sensor sends a valid CAN signal. 1. Using a scan tool, perform the Configuration/Reset Functions, Power Steering Softstops Reset procedure and follow the on-screen instructions. 2. Using a scan tool, perform the Configuration/Reset Functions, Power Steering Softstops Learn procedure and follow the on-screen instructions. 3. Software endstop learning procedure is completed. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Relays and Modules - Steering > Steering Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams Steering Control Module: Diagrams K43 Power Steering Control Module X1 (LAF) K43 Power Steering Control Module X2 (LAF) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Relays and Modules - Steering > Steering Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 9959 K43 Power Steering Control Module X3 (LAF) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Relays and Modules - Steering > Steering Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 9960 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Relays and Modules - Steering > Steering Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 9961 Steering Control Module: Service and Repair Power Steering Control Module Calibration Steering Angle Sensor Centering and Software Endstop Learning Warning An inaccurate or not centered steering angle sensor could limit the operation of the electric power steering (EPS) and result in personal injury. Centering of the steering angle sensor and software endstop learning might be required after certain service procedures are performed. Some of these procedures are as follows: * Steering angle sensor replacement * Steering gear replacement * Power steering assist motor replacement * Steering column replacement * Steering linkage inner tie rod replacement * Steering linkage outer tie rod replacement Note: It is necessary to perform the steering angle sensor centering before the software endstop learning. Steering Angle Sensor Centering For the centering procedure of the external steering angle sensor (electronic stability program) refer to Steering Angle Sensor Centering (See: Sensors and Switches - Steering/Steering Angle Sensor/Service and Repair/Procedures). The centering procedure of the internal steering angle sensor (w/o electronic stability program) can be completed with the following steps: Conditions: Front axle measured and set, engine running, vehicle speed 0 km/h (0 MPH), internal steering angle sensor is activated. 1. Using the steering wheel, align the front wheels in the center forward position. 2. Using a scan tool, perform the Configuration/Reset Functions, Steering Wheel Angle Sensor Centering procedure. 3. Steer from the center position slowly 90° to the left. 4. Steer slowly back to the center position and then slowly 90° to the right. 5. Steer slowly back to the center position. 6. Perform the steering movements again. 7. Centering procedure is completed. Software Endstop Learning The software endstop learning procedure can be completed with the following steps: Conditions: Front axle measured and set, vehicle speed 0 km/h (0 MPH), internal steering angle sensor is calibrated or external steering angle sensor sends a valid CAN signal. 1. Using a scan tool, perform the Configuration/Reset Functions, Power Steering Softstops Reset procedure and follow the on-screen instructions. 2. Using a scan tool, perform the Configuration/Reset Functions, Power Steering Softstops Learn procedure and follow the on-screen instructions. 3. Software endstop learning procedure is completed. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Sensors and Switches - Steering > Steering Angle Sensor > Component Information > Locations Steering Angle Sensor: Locations Instrument Panel/Center Console Component Views Steering Column Components 1 - S78 Turn Signal/Multifunction Switch 2 - X85 Steering Wheel Air Bag Coil 3 - S82 Windshield Wiper/Washer Switch 4 - S39 Ignition Switch 5 - M93 Ignition Cylinder Lock Control Solenoid Actuator 6 - B101 Immobilizer Antenna 7 - B99 Steering Wheel Angle Sensor Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Sensors and Switches - Steering > Steering Angle Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 9966 Steering Angle Sensor: Diagrams B99 Steering Wheel Angle Sensor Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Sensors and Switches - Steering > Steering Angle Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures Steering Angle Sensor: Procedures Steering Angle Sensor Centering The steering angle sensor does not require a centering often. Centering of the steering angle sensor might be required after certain service procedures are performed. Some of these procedures are as follows: * Electronic brake control module (EBCM) replacement * Steering angle sensor replacement * Steering gear replacement * Steering column replacement * Collision or other physical damage The steering angle sensor centering procedure can be completed with a scan tool using the following steps: 1. Using the steering wheel, align the front wheels forward. 2. Apply the parking brake, or set the transmission in the P position. 3. Install the scan tool to the data link connector. 4. Ignition ON, engine OFF 5. Select Steering Wheel Angle Sensor Reset in the Steering Wheel Angle Sensor Module Configuration/Reset Functions list. 6. Follow the scan tool directions to complete the learn procedure. 7. Select Steering Wheel Angle Sensor Learn in the Steering Wheel Angle Sensor Module Configuration/Reset Functions list. 8. Follow the scan tool directions to complete the learn procedure. 9. Select Steering Wheel Angle Sensor Learn in the EBCM Configuration/Reset Functions list. 10. Follow the scan tool directions to complete the learn procedure. 11. Clear any DTCs that may be set. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Sensors and Switches - Steering > Steering Angle Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 9969 Steering Angle Sensor: Removal and Replacement Steering Angle Sensor Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Angle Sensor > Component Information > Locations Steering Angle Sensor: Locations Instrument Panel/Center Console Component Views Steering Column Components 1 - S78 Turn Signal/Multifunction Switch 2 - X85 Steering Wheel Air Bag Coil 3 - S82 Windshield Wiper/Washer Switch 4 - S39 Ignition Switch 5 - M93 Ignition Cylinder Lock Control Solenoid Actuator 6 - B101 Immobilizer Antenna 7 - B99 Steering Wheel Angle Sensor Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Angle Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 9973 Steering Angle Sensor: Diagrams B99 Steering Wheel Angle Sensor Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Angle Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures Steering Angle Sensor: Procedures Steering Angle Sensor Centering The steering angle sensor does not require a centering often. Centering of the steering angle sensor might be required after certain service procedures are performed. Some of these procedures are as follows: * Electronic brake control module (EBCM) replacement * Steering angle sensor replacement * Steering gear replacement * Steering column replacement * Collision or other physical damage The steering angle sensor centering procedure can be completed with a scan tool using the following steps: 1. Using the steering wheel, align the front wheels forward. 2. Apply the parking brake, or set the transmission in the P position. 3. Install the scan tool to the data link connector. 4. Ignition ON, engine OFF 5. Select Steering Wheel Angle Sensor Reset in the Steering Wheel Angle Sensor Module Configuration/Reset Functions list. 6. Follow the scan tool directions to complete the learn procedure. 7. Select Steering Wheel Angle Sensor Learn in the Steering Wheel Angle Sensor Module Configuration/Reset Functions list. 8. Follow the scan tool directions to complete the learn procedure. 9. Select Steering Wheel Angle Sensor Learn in the EBCM Configuration/Reset Functions list. 10. Follow the scan tool directions to complete the learn procedure. 11. Clear any DTCs that may be set. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Angle Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 9976 Steering Angle Sensor: Removal and Replacement Steering Angle Sensor Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Diagrams Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Diagrams P14 Passenger Air Bag Disable Indicator Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Diagrams > Page 9981 Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair SIR Disabling and Enabling SIR component location affects how a vehicle should be serviced. There are parts of the SIR system installed in various locations around a vehicle. To find the location of the SIR components refer to SIR Identification Views (See: Restraint Systems/Air Bag Systems/Locations). There are several reasons for disabling the SIR system, such as repairs to the SIR system or servicing a component near or attached to an SIR component. There are several ways to disable the SIR system depending on what type of service is being performed. The following information covers the proper procedures for disabling/enabling the SIR system. SIR Service Precautions Warning When performing service on or near the SIR components or the SIR wiring, the SIR system must be disabled. Failure to observe the correct procedure could cause deployment of the SIR components. Serious injury can occur. Failure to observe the correct procedure could also result in unnecessary SIR system repairs. The inflatable restraint sensing and diagnostic module (SDM) maintains a reserved energy supply. The reserved energy supply provides deployment power for the air bags if the SDM loses battery power during a collision. Deployment power is available for as much as 1 minute after disconnecting the vehicle power. Waiting 1 minute before working on the system after disabling the SIR system prevents deployment of the air bags from the reserved energy supply. General Service Instructions The following are general service instructions which must be followed in order to properly repair the vehicle and return it to its original integrity: * Do not expose air bags to temperatures above 65°C (149°F). * Verify the correct replacement part number. Do not substitute a component from a different vehicle. * Use only original GM replacement parts available from your authorized GM dealer. Do not use salvaged parts for repairs to the SIR system. Discard any of the following components if it has been dropped from a height of 92 cm (3 feet) or greater: * Inflatable restraint sensing and diagnostic module (SDM) * Any air bag * Driver steering wheel air bag coil * Any impact sensor * Seat belt anchor and/or retractor pretensioners * Passenger presence module and/or occupant sensor Disabling Procedure - Air Bag Fuse 1. Turn the steering wheel so that the vehicles wheels are pointing straight ahead. 2. Place the ignition in the OFF position. Note: The SDM may have more than one fused power input. To ensure there is no unwanted SIR deployment, personal injury, or unnecessary SIR system repairs, remove all fuses supplying power to the SDM. With all SDM fuses removed and the ignition switch in the ON position, the AIR BAG warning indicator illuminates. This is normal operation, and does not indicate a SIR system malfunction. 3. Locate and remove the fuse(s) supplying power to the SDM. Refer to SIR Schematics (See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Air Bag Systems) or Electrical Center Identification Views (See: Maintenance/Fuses and Circuit Breakers/Fuse/Application and ID). 4. Wait 1 minute before working on the system. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Diagrams > Page 9982 Enabling Procedure - Air Bag Fuse 1. Place the ignition in the OFF position. 2. Install the fuse(s) supplying power to the SDM. Refer to SIR Schematics (See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Air Bag Systems) or Electrical Center Identification Views (See: Maintenance/Fuses and Circuit Breakers/Fuse/Application and ID). 3. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position. The AIR BAG indicator will flash then turn OFF. 4. Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle if the AIR BAG warning indicator does not operate as described. Refer to Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle (See: Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle). Disabling Procedure - Negative Battery Cable 1. Turn the steering wheel so that the vehicles wheels are pointing straight ahead. 2. Place the ignition in the OFF position. 3. Disconnect the negative battery cable from the battery. Refer to Battery Negative Cable Disconnection and Connection (See: Starting and Charging/Battery/Battery Cable/Negative/Service and Repair/Battery Negative Cable Disconnection and Connection). 4. Wait 1 minute before working on system. Enabling Procedure - Negative Battery Cable 1. Place the ignition in the OFF position. 2. Connect the negative battery cable to the battery. Refer to Battery Negative Cable Disconnection and Connection (See: Starting and Charging/Battery/Battery Cable/Negative/Service and Repair/Battery Negative Cable Disconnection and Connection). 3. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position. The AIR BAG indicator will flash then turn OFF. 4. Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle if the AIR BAG warning indicator does not operate as described. Refer to Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle (See: Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Gear > Steering Gear Seal > Component Information > Service and Repair Steering Gear Seal: Service and Repair Steering Gear Pipe and Seal Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Mounted Controls Transmitter > Component Information > Locations Steering Mounted Controls Transmitter: Locations Instrument Panel/Center Console Component Views Steering Wheel Components 1 - S70L Steering Wheel Controls Switch - Left 2 - S33 Horn Switch 3 - S70R Steering Wheel Controls Switch - Right Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Mounted Controls Transmitter > Component Information > Locations > Page 9990 Steering Mounted Controls Transmitter: Diagrams S70L Steering Wheel Controls Switch - Left S70R Steering Wheel Controls Switch - Right (UK3) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Mounted Controls Transmitter > Component Information > Locations > Page 9991 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Shaft > Component Information > Service and Repair Steering Shaft: Service and Repair Intermediate Steering Shaft Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Shaft > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 9995 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Wheel > Component Information > Description and Operation Steering Wheel: Description and Operation Steering Wheel and Column Description and Operation The steering wheel and column has 4 primary functions: * Vehicle steering * Vehicle security * Driver convenience * Driver safety Vehicle Steering The steering wheel is the first link between the driver and the vehicle. The steering wheel is fastened to a steering shaft within the column. At the lower end of the column, the intermediate shaft connects the column to the steering gear. Vehicle Security-Some Vehicle Models Theft deterrent components are mounted and designed into the steering column. The following components allow the column to be locked in order to minimize theft: * The ignition switch * The steering column lock * The ignition cylinder Driver Convenience The steering wheel and column may also have driver controls attached for convenience and comfort. The following controls may be mounted on or near the steering wheel or column. * The turn signal switch * The hazard switch * The headlamp dimmer switch * The wiper/washer switch * The horn pad/cruise control switch * The tilt or tilt/telescoping functions Driver Safety The energy-absorbing steering column compresses in the event of a front-end collision, which reduces the chance of injury to the driver. The mounting capsules break away from the mounting bracket in the event of an accident. Ignition Lock Cylinder Control Actuator If the vehicle is equipped with a floor mounted console gear shifter, it has a ignition lock cylinder control actuator system in the steering column. The ignition lock cylinder control actuator's purpose is to prevent the ignition key from being turned to the OFF position when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle may still be moving. The column ignition lock system consists of a ignition lock cylinder control actuator , and a Park position switch that is located in the automatic transmission (A/T) shift lock control switch. The ignition lock cylinder control actuator contains a pin that is spring loaded out to mechanically prevent the ignition key cylinder from being turned to the Lock position when vehicle transmission is not in the Park position. If vehicle power is lost, and/or the transmission is not in the Park position the operator will not be able to turn the ignition key to the Lock position and will not be able to remove the ignition key from the column. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Wheel > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 9999 Steering Wheel: Service and Repair Steering Wheel Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Tie Rod > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Steering Linkage Inner Tie Rod Inspection Tie Rod: Testing and Inspection Steering Linkage Inner Tie Rod Inspection Steering Linkage Inner Tie Rod Inspection Special Tools J-8001 - Dial Indicator Set For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Tools and Equipment). Note: This inspection procedure does not supersede local government required inspections that have more stringent requirements. 1. Turn the ignition key to the ON position with the engine OFF. 2. With the aid of an assistant, turn the steering wheel to the full stop position and hold the steering wheel in that position until the test is complete. The tie rod being tested should be inside the steering gear housing seated against the steering stop. 3. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle (See: Wheels and Tires/Vehicle Lifting/Service and Repair). 4. If there is not a good location for the J-8001 - Dial Indicator pointer at the steering gear housing, install a large worm gear hose clamp to the steering gear housing over the larger steering gear boot clamp and align the clamp so that the screw can be a location for the J-8001 - Dial Indicator pointer. 5. Install the J-8001 - Dial Indicator between the inner tie rod (2) and the steering gear housing or the worm gear clamp in such a way as to measure the lash between the inner tie rod and the steering gear housing. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Tie Rod > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Steering Linkage Inner Tie Rod Inspection > Page 10004 Note: Only move the tire enough to feel any lash between the inner tie rod and the inner tie rod housing without moving the steering gear rack. 6. Grasping the tire at the 3 o'clock (2) and 9 o'clock (1) positions, gently push in on one side of the tire in order to remove any lash. 7. Zero the J-8001 - Dial Indicator. 8. On the same side of the tire previously pushed in, gently pull out and measure the lash. 9. Record the measurement seen on the J-8001 - Dial Indicator. 10. If the measured value exceeds 0.5 mm (0.02 in), replace the inner tie rod. Refer to Steering Linkage Inner Tie Rod Replacement (See: Service and Repair/Steering Linkage Inner Tie Rod Replacement). 11. Repeat the procedure for the other side. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Tie Rod > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Steering Linkage Inner Tie Rod Inspection > Page 10005 Tie Rod: Testing and Inspection Steering Linkage Outer Tie Rod Inspection Steering Linkage Outer Tie Rod Inspection Special Tools J-8001 - Dial Indicator Set For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Tools and Equipment). Note: This inspection procedure does not supersede local government required inspections that have more stringent requirements. 1. Inspect the outer tie rod end seal. If the outer tie rod end seal is torn, replace the outer tie rod end. Refer to Steering Linkage Outer Tie Rod Replacement (See: Service and Repair/Steering Linkage Outer Tie Rod Replacement). 2. Raise the side of the vehicle being inspected with a floor jack while maintaining contact between the opposite wheel and the shop floor. Support the lower control arm with a floor jack stand as far outboard as possible and remove the floor jack. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle (See: Wheels and Tires/Vehicle Lifting/Service and Repair). 3. Install the J-8001 - Dial Indicator between the outer tie rod end and the steering knuckle as shown in the graphic. Note that the tire and wheel assembly is shown removed only for clarification of the J-8001 - Dial Indicator position. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Tie Rod > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Steering Linkage Inner Tie Rod Inspection > Page 10006 4. Grasping the tire at the 3 o'clock (2) and 9 o'clock (1) positions, gently push in on one side of the tire to remove any lash. 5. Zero the J-8001 - Dial Indicator. 6. On the same side of the tire previously pushed inwards, gently pull outwards and measure the lash. 7. Record the measurement seen on the J-8001 - Dial Indicator. 8. If the measured value exceeds 0.5 mm (0.02 in) then replace the outer tie rod. Refer to Steering Linkage Outer Tie Rod Replacement (See: Service and Repair/Steering Linkage Outer Tie Rod Replacement). 9. Repeat the procedure for the other side. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Tie Rod > Component Information > Service and Repair > Steering Linkage Inner Tie Rod Replacement Tie Rod: Service and Repair Steering Linkage Inner Tie Rod Replacement Steering Linkage Inner Tie Rod Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove 1 steering gear boot. Refer to Steering Gear Boot Replacement (See: Steering Gear). 2. Turn the steering wheel in order to position the steering gear rack so that only 2 rack teeth and the flat surface of the rack are visible outside the steering gear housing. 3. If equipped with a hydraulic power steering gear, bend the tabs on the steering gear rack thrust washer in order to release the steering linkage inner tie rod. 4. Place a soft jaw pipe wrench or soft jaw pliers on the flat surface of the steering gear rack (3) between the steering gear housing (4) and the inner tie rod housing (2). 5. Place a crows foot wrench on the flats of the inner tie rod housing (2). Caution: Do not change the steering gear preload adjustment before moving the inner tie rod from the steering gear. Changing the steering gear preload adjustment before moving the inner tie rod could result in damage to the pinion and the steering gear. 6. Rotate the steering linkage inner tie rod housing counterclockwise while holding the steering gear rack stationary until the steering linkage inner tie rod separates from the steering gear rack. 7. If equipped with a hydraulic power steering gear, remove the steering gear rack thrust washer. Discard the washer. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Tie Rod > Component Information > Service and Repair > Steering Linkage Inner Tie Rod Replacement > Page 10009 1. If equipped with a hydraulic power steering gear, position the NEW steering gear rack thrust washer (1). 2. Install the steering linkage inner tie rod (2) to the steering gear rack. 3. Place a soft jaw pipe wrench or soft jaw pliers on the flat surface of the steering gear rack (3) between the steering gear housing (4) and the inner tie rod housing (2). Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener Caution). 4. Place a torque wrench with a crows foot wrench attachment on the flats of the inner tie rod housing and tighten to 105 Nm (77 lb ft). 5. If equipped with a hydraulic power steering gear, bend the tabs over on the steering gear rack thrust washer in order to secure the inner tie rod. 6. Install the steering gear boot. Refer to Steering Gear Boot Replacement (See: Steering Gear). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Tie Rod > Component Information > Service and Repair > Steering Linkage Inner Tie Rod Replacement > Page 10010 Tie Rod: Service and Repair Steering Linkage Outer Tie Rod Replacement Steering Linkage Outer Tie Rod Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Tie Rod > Component Information > Service and Repair > Steering Linkage Inner Tie Rod Replacement > Page 10011 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Tie Rod > Component Information > Service and Repair > Steering Linkage Inner Tie Rod Replacement > Page 10012 Tie Rod: Service and Repair Rear Suspension Adjust Link Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Ball Joint > Component Information > Specifications Ball Joint: Specifications Ball Joint Wear limit ............................................................................................................................................. ....................................................... 0.5 mm (0.02 in) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Ball Joint > Component Information > Specifications > Page 10017 Ball Joint: Testing and Inspection Ball Joint Inspection Special Tools J 8001 Dial Indicator Set Note: * The vehicle must rest on a level surface. * The vehicle must be stable. Do not rock the vehicle on the floor stands. 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle (See: Wheels and Tires/Vehicle Lifting/Service and Repair). 2. Clean and inspect the ball joint seal for cuts or tears. If the ball joint seal is damaged, replace the ball joint. Refer to Lower Control Arm Ball Joint Replacement (See: Service and Repair). 3. Support the lower control arm with a floor stand as far outboard as possible and raise the suspension to just below ride height. 4. Install the J 8001 or suitable dial indicator in a way to measure vertical lash in the ball joint. Caution: Do not pry in such a way that the ball joint seal is contacted. Damage to the seal may result. 5. Gently lift or pry the suspension to induce ball joint movement. 6. If the dial indicator indicates a reading greater than 0.5 mm (0.02 in), replace the ball joint. Refer to Lower Control Arm Ball Joint Replacement ( See: Service and Repair). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Ball Joint > Component Information > Specifications > Page 10018 Ball Joint: Service and Repair Lower Control Arm Ball Joint Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the lower control arm. Refer to Lower Control Arm Replacement (See: Control Arm/Service and Repair/Front Suspension). 2. Place the control arm in a vise or suitable holding device. 3. Remove the ball joint rivets using the following procedure. 1. Drill through the rivets using a 8 mm (5/16 in) drill bit. 2. Enlarge the hole using a 12 mm (31/64 in) drill bit. 3. Remove any remaining burs from the control arm. 4. Remove the ball joint from the control arm. Note the position of the ball joint for reassembly. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Ball Joint > Component Information > Specifications > Page 10019 Note: The control arm must be clean and free of debris. 1. Install the ball joint to the control arm as previously noted. Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener Caution). Note: * Only use hardware provided with the new ball joint. * The bolts must be installed with the bolt head on top of the ball joint. 2. Install the ball joint to control arm bolts and tighten the bolts/nuts to 68 Nm (50 lb ft). 3. Install the lower control arm. Refer to Lower Control Arm Replacement (See: Control Arm/Service and Repair/Front Suspension). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Control Arm > Control Arm Bushing > Component Information > Service and Repair Control Arm Bushing: Service and Repair Front Lower Control Arm Bushing Replacement (Rear Bushing) Removal Procedure 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle (See: Wheels and Tires/Vehicle Lifting/Service and Repair). 2. Remove the front tire and wheel assembly. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation (See: Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair). 3. Remove the lower control arm. Refer to Lower Control Arm Replacement (See: Service and Repair/Front Suspension). 4. Remove the rear bushing nut. 5. Remove the rear bushing. Installation Procedure Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener Caution). 1. Install the rear bushing to the lower control arm and tighten the nut to 150 Nm (110 lb ft). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Control Arm > Control Arm Bushing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 10024 2. Install the lower control arm. Refer to Lower Control Arm Replacement (See: Service and Repair/Front Suspension). 3. Install the front tire and wheel assembly. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation (See: Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair). 4. Lower the vehicle. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Rear Knuckle > Component Information > Service and Repair > Rear Suspension Rear Knuckle: Service and Repair Rear Suspension Knuckle Replacement Special Tools J 37043 Park Brake Cable Release Tool Removal Procedure 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle (See: Wheels and Tires/Vehicle Lifting/Service and Repair). 2. Remove the tire and wheel. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation (See: Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair). 3. Disconnect the rear park brake cable from the park brake actuator. 4. Using the J 37043, remove the park brake cable from the mounting bracket Caution: Support the brake caliper with heavy mechanic wire, or equivalent, whenever it is separated from its mount and the hydraulic flexible brake hose is still connected. Failure to support the caliper in this manner will cause the flexible brake hose to bear the weight of the caliper, which may cause damage to the brake hose and in turn may cause a brake fluid leak. 5. Remove the brake caliper and bracket as an assembly and support it with heavy mechanics wire or equivalent. Refer to Rear Brake Caliper Bracket Replacement (See: Brakes and Traction Control/Disc Brake System/Brake Caliper/Service and Repair/Rear Brake Caliper Bracket Replacement). 6. Remove the wheel bearing/hub assembly. Refer to Rear Wheel Bearing and Hub Replacement (See: Wheel Bearing/Service and Repair/Rear Suspension). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Rear Knuckle > Component Information > Service and Repair > Rear Suspension > Page 10029 7. Remove the upper control arm to knuckle bolt and nut. 8. Remove the lower control arm to knuckle bolt and nut. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Rear Knuckle > Component Information > Service and Repair > Rear Suspension > Page 10030 9. Remove the toe link to knuckle bolt and nut. 10. Remove the 3 trailing arm to knuckle bolts. 11. Remove the knuckle from the vehicle. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Rear Knuckle > Component Information > Service and Repair > Rear Suspension > Page 10031 1. Install the knuckle to the lower control arm. Loosely install the bolt and nut. 2. Install the knuckle to the upper control arm. Loosely install the bolt and nut. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Rear Knuckle > Component Information > Service and Repair > Rear Suspension > Page 10032 3. Install the knuckle to the toe link. Loosely install the bolt and nut. 4. Install the 3 trailing arm to knuckle bolts. Loosely install the bolt and nut. Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener Caution). 5. Tighten the bolts and nuts in the following sequence: * Tighten the knuckle to lower control arm bolt and nut to 160 Nm (118 lb ft). * Tighten the knuckle to upper control arm bolt and nut to 160 Nm (118 lb ft). * Tighten the knuckle to toe link bolt and nut to 160 Nm (118 lb ft). * Tighten the 3 trailing arm to knuckle bolts to 110 Nm (81 lb ft). 6. Install the wheel bearing/hub assembly. Refer to Rear Wheel Bearing and Hub Replacement (See: Wheel Bearing/Service and Repair/Rear Suspension). Caution: Support the brake caliper with heavy mechanic wire, or equivalent, whenever it is separated from its mount and the hydraulic flexible Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Rear Knuckle > Component Information > Service and Repair > Rear Suspension > Page 10033 brake hose is still connected. Failure to support the caliper in this manner will cause the flexible brake hose to bear the weight of the caliper, which may cause damage to the brake hose and in turn may cause a brake fluid leak. 7. Remove the supporting wire and position the brake caliper and bracket assemblies back onto the knuckles. Refer to Rear Brake Caliper Bracket Replacement (See: Brakes and Traction Control/Disc Brake System/Brake Caliper/Service and Repair/Rear Brake Caliper Bracket Replacement). 8. Connect the rear park brake cable through the mounting bracket and onto the park brake actuator. 9. Install the tire and wheel. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation (See: Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair). 10. Lower the vehicle. 11. Perform a vehicle wheel alignment. Refer to Wheel Alignment Measurement (See: Alignment/Service and Repair/Wheel Alignment Measurement). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Rear Knuckle > Component Information > Service and Repair > Rear Suspension > Page 10034 Rear Knuckle: Service and Repair Front Suspension Steering Knuckle Replacement Special Tools J-42188-B Ball Joint Separator Removal Procedure 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle (See: Wheels and Tires/Vehicle Lifting/Service and Repair). 2. Remove the tire and wheel. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation (See: Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair). 3. Remove the wheel bearing/hub assembly. Refer to Front Wheel Bearing and Hub Replacement (See: Wheel Bearing/Service and Repair/Front Suspension). Note: Do not allow the stabilizer link ball stud to rotate while removing the link nut. 4. Remove the nut and separate the stabilizer link from the strut assembly. 5. Loosen the steering knuckle to strut bolts and nuts. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Rear Knuckle > Component Information > Service and Repair > Rear Suspension > Page 10035 6. Remove and discard the lower ball joint cotter pin. 7. Loosen the ball stud nut, until level with the top of the ball stud. 8. Using the J-42188-B, separate the lower ball joint from the steering knuckle. 9. Remove the lower ball joint nut and separate from the knuckle. Caution: Do not free the ball stud by using a pickle fork or a wedge-type tool. Damage to the seal or bushing may result. 10. Remove the outer tie rod end from the knuckle. Refer to Steering Linkage Outer Tie Rod Replacement (See: Steering/Tie Rod/Service and Repair/Steering Linkage Outer Tie Rod Replacement). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Rear Knuckle > Component Information > Service and Repair > Rear Suspension > Page 10036 11. Remove the steering knuckle to strut bolts and nuts. 12. Remove the steering knuckle from the vehicle. Installation Procedure 1. Position the steering knuckle to strut assembly. 2. Loosely install the strut to steering knuckle bolts and nuts. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Rear Knuckle > Component Information > Service and Repair > Rear Suspension > Page 10037 3. Position the lower ball joint stud into the steering knuckle. Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener Caution). 4. Install the ball stud nut and tighten to 40 Nm (30 lb ft). 5. Tighten the strut to steering knuckle bolts and nuts to 180 Nm (133 lb ft). Note: Do not loosen the castle nut for cotter pin installation. 6. Tighten the castle nut enough to allow for cotter pin installation. Note: The cotter pin must not contact the wheel speed sensor or drive axle. 7. Install a new cotter pin. 8. Install the outer tie rod end to the knuckle. Refer to Steering Linkage Outer Tie Rod Replacement (See: Steering/Tie Rod/Service and Repair/Steering Linkage Outer Tie Rod Replacement). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Rear Knuckle > Component Information > Service and Repair > Rear Suspension > Page 10038 Note: Do not allow the stabilizer link ball stud to rotate while installing the link nut. 9. Position the stabilizer shaft link to the strut assembly and install the nut. Tighten the nut to 65 Nm (48 lb ft). 10. Install the wheel bearing/hub assembly. Refer to Front Wheel Bearing and Hub Replacement (See: Wheel Bearing/Service and Repair/Front Suspension). 11. Install the tire and wheel. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation (See: Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair). 12. Lower the vehicle. 13. Perform a wheel alignment. Refer to Wheel Alignment Measurement (See: Alignment/Service and Repair/Wheel Alignment Measurement). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Suspension > Steering Angle Sensor > Component Information > Locations Steering Angle Sensor: Locations Instrument Panel/Center Console Component Views Steering Column Components 1 - S78 Turn Signal/Multifunction Switch 2 - X85 Steering Wheel Air Bag Coil 3 - S82 Windshield Wiper/Washer Switch 4 - S39 Ignition Switch 5 - M93 Ignition Cylinder Lock Control Solenoid Actuator 6 - B101 Immobilizer Antenna 7 - B99 Steering Wheel Angle Sensor Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Suspension > Steering Angle Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 10043 Steering Angle Sensor: Diagrams B99 Steering Wheel Angle Sensor Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Suspension > Steering Angle Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures Steering Angle Sensor: Procedures Steering Angle Sensor Centering The steering angle sensor does not require a centering often. Centering of the steering angle sensor might be required after certain service procedures are performed. Some of these procedures are as follows: * Electronic brake control module (EBCM) replacement * Steering angle sensor replacement * Steering gear replacement * Steering column replacement * Collision or other physical damage The steering angle sensor centering procedure can be completed with a scan tool using the following steps: 1. Using the steering wheel, align the front wheels forward. 2. Apply the parking brake, or set the transmission in the P position. 3. Install the scan tool to the data link connector. 4. Ignition ON, engine OFF 5. Select Steering Wheel Angle Sensor Reset in the Steering Wheel Angle Sensor Module Configuration/Reset Functions list. 6. Follow the scan tool directions to complete the learn procedure. 7. Select Steering Wheel Angle Sensor Learn in the Steering Wheel Angle Sensor Module Configuration/Reset Functions list. 8. Follow the scan tool directions to complete the learn procedure. 9. Select Steering Wheel Angle Sensor Learn in the EBCM Configuration/Reset Functions list. 10. Follow the scan tool directions to complete the learn procedure. 11. Clear any DTCs that may be set. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Suspension > Steering Angle Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 10046 Steering Angle Sensor: Removal and Replacement Steering Angle Sensor Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Stabilizer Bar, Sway Control > Stabilizer Bushing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension Stabilizer Bushing: Service and Repair Front Suspension Stabilizer Shaft Insulator Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Stabilizer Bar, Sway Control > Stabilizer Bushing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 10052 Stabilizer Bushing: Service and Repair Rear Suspension Stabilizer Shaft Insulator Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Stabilizer Bar, Sway Control > Stabilizer Link > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension Stabilizer Link: Service and Repair Front Suspension Stabilizer Shaft Link Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Stabilizer Bar, Sway Control > Stabilizer Link > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 10057 Stabilizer Link: Service and Repair Rear Suspension Stabilizer Shaft Link Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle (See: Wheels and Tires/Vehicle Lifting/Service and Repair). 2. Remove the rear tire and wheel assembly. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation (See: Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair). 3. Loosen the stabilizer shaft clamp bolts. Note: Use a 90 degree bend TORX(R) bit to hold the ball stud when loosening or tightening the nut. 4. Remove the stabilizer link to stabilizer shaft nut. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Stabilizer Bar, Sway Control > Stabilizer Link > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 10058 Note: When disconnecting the stabilizer link, hold the link with a wrench to prevent turning. 5. Remove the stabilizer link to lower control arm nut. 6. Remove the stabilizer link from the vehicle. Installation Procedure 1. Position the stabilizer link through the lower control arm. Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener Caution). Note: When connecting the stabilizer link, hold the link with a wrench to prevent turning. 2. Install the stabilizer link to lower control arm nut and tighten to 15 Nm (11 lb ft). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Stabilizer Bar, Sway Control > Stabilizer Link > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 10059 Note: Use a 90 degree bend TORX(R) bit to hold the ball stud when tightening the nut. 3. Install the stabilizer link to stabilizer shaft nut and tighten to 50 Nm (37 lb ft). 4. Tighten the loose stabilizer shaft clamp bolts to 70 Nm (52 lb ft). 5. Install the rear tire and wheel assembly. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation (See: Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair). 6. Lower the vehicle. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Strut / Shock Tower > Front Strut / Shock Tower > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Front Strut / Shock Tower: > 10-03-08-003A > Dec > 10 > Suspension - Front Suspension or Front Strut Noise Front Strut / Shock Tower: Customer Interest Suspension - Front Suspension or Front Strut Noise TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 10-03-08-003A Date: December 20, 2010 Subject: Front Suspension or Front Strut Noise (Apply Grease on Strut Shaft) Models: 2008-2011 Chevrolet Captiva Sport 2010-2011 Chevrolet Equinox 2010-2011 GMC Terrain 2008-2010 Saturn VUE Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the models to include Captiva and VUE. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 10-03-08-003 (Section 03 - Suspension). Condition Some customers may comment on a popping, creak, rattle, squawk, itch or clunk type noise coming from the front of the vehicle. This noise will most likely be heard during small to medium suspension travel. The noise may occur with the vehicle traveling straight and/or during turns. Cause The cause of this condition may be due to the inside diameter of the front strut jounce bumper rubbing against the piston rod of the strut, creating a slip-stick condition. Correction Important DO NOT replace any front suspension components (strut, strut top mount bearing, etc) without first performing this bulletin. 1. Verify that the noise is from the upper strut mount area. The concern may be on both sides of the vehicle. 2. Raise and support the vehicle on a frame lift-type hoist. 3. Pull the dust shield/jounce bumper assembly out of the strut top mount cup. 4. Slide the dust shield/jounce bumper assembly down to expose the top portion of the strut shaft. 5. Apply grease, GM P/N 12345579 (in Canada, 10953481), around the circumference of the strut shaft that is exposed. 6. Unseat the bottom of the dust shield from the strut. 7. Slide the dust shield/jounce bumper assembly up to expose the bottom portion of the strut shaft. 8. Apply the grease around the circumference of the strut shaft that is exposed. 9. Slide the dust shield/jounce bumper assembly down and reattach the bottom to the strut. 10. Push the top of the dust shield/jounce bumper assembly up into the top mount cup as far as possible by hand. The assembly will fully seat once the Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Strut / Shock Tower > Front Strut / Shock Tower > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Front Strut / Shock Tower: > 10-03-08-003A > Dec > 10 > Suspension - Front Suspension or Front Strut Noise > Page 10069 vehicle is on the ground and the suspension is allowed to compress. Parts Information Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Strut / Shock Tower > Front Strut / Shock Tower > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Strut / Shock Tower: > 10-03-08-003A > Dec > 10 > Suspension - Front Suspension or Front Strut Noise Front Strut / Shock Tower: All Technical Service Bulletins Suspension - Front Suspension or Front Strut Noise TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 10-03-08-003A Date: December 20, 2010 Subject: Front Suspension or Front Strut Noise (Apply Grease on Strut Shaft) Models: 2008-2011 Chevrolet Captiva Sport 2010-2011 Chevrolet Equinox 2010-2011 GMC Terrain 2008-2010 Saturn VUE Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the models to include Captiva and VUE. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 10-03-08-003 (Section 03 - Suspension). Condition Some customers may comment on a popping, creak, rattle, squawk, itch or clunk type noise coming from the front of the vehicle. This noise will most likely be heard during small to medium suspension travel. The noise may occur with the vehicle traveling straight and/or during turns. Cause The cause of this condition may be due to the inside diameter of the front strut jounce bumper rubbing against the piston rod of the strut, creating a slip-stick condition. Correction Important DO NOT replace any front suspension components (strut, strut top mount bearing, etc) without first performing this bulletin. 1. Verify that the noise is from the upper strut mount area. The concern may be on both sides of the vehicle. 2. Raise and support the vehicle on a frame lift-type hoist. 3. Pull the dust shield/jounce bumper assembly out of the strut top mount cup. 4. Slide the dust shield/jounce bumper assembly down to expose the top portion of the strut shaft. 5. Apply grease, GM P/N 12345579 (in Canada, 10953481), around the circumference of the strut shaft that is exposed. 6. Unseat the bottom of the dust shield from the strut. 7. Slide the dust shield/jounce bumper assembly up to expose the bottom portion of the strut shaft. 8. Apply the grease around the circumference of the strut shaft that is exposed. 9. Slide the dust shield/jounce bumper assembly down and reattach the bottom to the strut. 10. Push the top of the dust shield/jounce bumper assembly up into the top mount cup as far as possible by hand. The assembly will fully seat once the Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Strut / Shock Tower > Front Strut / Shock Tower > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Strut / Shock Tower: > 10-03-08-003A > Dec > 10 > Suspension - Front Suspension or Front Strut Noise > Page 10075 vehicle is on the ground and the suspension is allowed to compress. Parts Information Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Strut / Shock Tower > Front Strut / Shock Tower > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Strut / Shock Tower: > Page 10076 Front Strut / Shock Tower: By Symptom Technical Service Bulletin # 10-03-08-003A Date: 101220 Suspension - Front Suspension or Front Strut Noise TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 10-03-08-003A Date: December 20, 2010 Subject: Front Suspension or Front Strut Noise (Apply Grease on Strut Shaft) Models: 2008-2011 Chevrolet Captiva Sport 2010-2011 Chevrolet Equinox 2010-2011 GMC Terrain 2008-2010 Saturn VUE Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the models to include Captiva and VUE. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 10-03-08-003 (Section 03 - Suspension). Condition Some customers may comment on a popping, creak, rattle, squawk, itch or clunk type noise coming from the front of the vehicle. This noise will most likely be heard during small to medium suspension travel. The noise may occur with the vehicle traveling straight and/or during turns. Cause The cause of this condition may be due to the inside diameter of the front strut jounce bumper rubbing against the piston rod of the strut, creating a slip-stick condition. Correction Important DO NOT replace any front suspension components (strut, strut top mount bearing, etc) without first performing this bulletin. 1. Verify that the noise is from the upper strut mount area. The concern may be on both sides of the vehicle. 2. Raise and support the vehicle on a frame lift-type hoist. 3. Pull the dust shield/jounce bumper assembly out of the strut top mount cup. 4. Slide the dust shield/jounce bumper assembly down to expose the top portion of the strut shaft. 5. Apply grease, GM P/N 12345579 (in Canada, 10953481), around the circumference of the strut shaft that is exposed. 6. Unseat the bottom of the dust shield from the strut. 7. Slide the dust shield/jounce bumper assembly up to expose the bottom portion of the strut shaft. 8. Apply the grease around the circumference of the strut shaft that is exposed. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Strut / Shock Tower > Front Strut / Shock Tower > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Strut / Shock Tower: > Page 10077 9. Slide the dust shield/jounce bumper assembly down and reattach the bottom to the strut. 10. Push the top of the dust shield/jounce bumper assembly up into the top mount cup as far as possible by hand. The assembly will fully seat once the vehicle is on the ground and the suspension is allowed to compress. Parts Information Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Technical Service Bulletin # 10-03-08-003A Date: 101220 Suspension - Front Suspension or Front Strut Noise TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 10-03-08-003A Date: December 20, 2010 Subject: Front Suspension or Front Strut Noise (Apply Grease on Strut Shaft) Models: 2008-2011 Chevrolet Captiva Sport 2010-2011 Chevrolet Equinox 2010-2011 GMC Terrain 2008-2010 Saturn VUE Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the models to include Captiva and VUE. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 10-03-08-003 (Section 03 - Suspension). Condition Some customers may comment on a popping, creak, rattle, squawk, itch or clunk type noise coming from the front of the vehicle. This noise will most likely be heard during small to medium suspension travel. The noise may occur with the vehicle traveling straight and/or during turns. Cause The cause of this condition may be due to the inside diameter of the front strut jounce bumper rubbing against the piston rod of the strut, creating a slip-stick condition. Correction Important DO NOT replace any front suspension components (strut, strut top mount bearing, etc) without first performing this bulletin. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Strut / Shock Tower > Front Strut / Shock Tower > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Strut / Shock Tower: > Page 10078 1. Verify that the noise is from the upper strut mount area. The concern may be on both sides of the vehicle. 2. Raise and support the vehicle on a frame lift-type hoist. 3. Pull the dust shield/jounce bumper assembly out of the strut top mount cup. 4. Slide the dust shield/jounce bumper assembly down to expose the top portion of the strut shaft. 5. Apply grease, GM P/N 12345579 (in Canada, 10953481), around the circumference of the strut shaft that is exposed. 6. Unseat the bottom of the dust shield from the strut. 7. Slide the dust shield/jounce bumper assembly up to expose the bottom portion of the strut shaft. 8. Apply the grease around the circumference of the strut shaft that is exposed. 9. Slide the dust shield/jounce bumper assembly down and reattach the bottom to the strut. 10. Push the top of the dust shield/jounce bumper assembly up into the top mount cup as far as possible by hand. The assembly will fully seat once the vehicle is on the ground and the suspension is allowed to compress. Parts Information Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Service and Repair Front Subframe: Service and Repair Front Lower Control Arm Bracket Brace Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Service and Repair > Rear Support Replacement (AWD) Rear Subframe: Service and Repair Rear Support Replacement (AWD) Rear Support Replacement (AWD) Special Tools J-37043 - Park Brake Cable Release Tool Removal Procedure 1. Place the park brake lever in the release position. 2. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle (). 3. Remove the tires and wheels. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation (). 4. Remove the exhaust muffler. Refer to Exhaust Muffler Replacement (). 5. Disconnect the rear park brake cables from the park brake actuators. 6. Using the J-37043 release tool , remove the park brake cables from the mounting brackets 7. Position the rear park brake cables aside. 8. Disconnect the rear wheel speed sensor electrical connectors and routing clips from the rear support and upper control arms. Position the wiring harness aside. 9. Remove the rear brake hose bracket nut and bolt. Caution: Support the brake caliper with heavy mechanic wire, or equivalent, whenever it is separated from its mount and the hydraulic flexible brake hose is still connected. Failure to support the caliper in this manner will cause the flexible brake hose to bear the weight of the caliper, which may cause damage to the brake hose and in turn may cause a brake fluid leak. 10. Remove the brake calipers and brackets as assemblies and support them with heavy mechanics wire or equivalent. Refer to Rear Brake Caliper Bracket Replacement (). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Service and Repair > Rear Support Replacement (AWD) > Page 10087 11. Remove the rear park brake cable routing bolts from the trailing arms. 12. While holding the stabilizer link with a wrench, remove the stabilizer link-to-lower control arm nut. 13. Remove the trailing arms. Refer to Trailing Arm Replacement (). 14. Remove the adjustment links. Refer to Adjust Link Replacement (). 15. Remove the rear wheel drive shafts. Refer to Rear Wheel Drive Shaft Replacement (). 16. Remove the rear differential. Refer to Differential Replacement (). 17. Position a transmission jack under the rear support and firmly secure the support to the jack with straps. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Service and Repair > Rear Support Replacement (AWD) > Page 10088 18. Remove the 4 rear support to body bolts. 19. Remove the rear support assembly from the vehicle. 20. With the aid of an assistant, remove the rear support from the transmission jack and place it on the floor. Installation Procedure Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (). 1. If a new rear support is being installed, a transfer of components is necessary. * Upper Control Arms Tighten the upper control arm to rear support nut and bolt to 160 Nm (118 lb ft). * Lower Control Arms Tighten the lower control arm to rear support nut and bolt to 110 Nm (81 lb ft). * Stabilizer bar and insulators Tighten the stabilizer shaft insulator clamp bolts to 70 Nm (52 lb ft). Tighten the stabilizer link to stabilizer shaft nut to 57 Nm (42 lb ft). * Knuckles - Loosely install the upper and lower control arm to knuckle nuts/bolts. These fasteners will be tightened later in this procedure after the wheel driveshafts are installed. 2. With the aid of an assistant, position the rear support onto the transmission jack and firmly secure the support to the jack with straps. 3. Position the rear support assembly to the vehicle. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Service and Repair > Rear Support Replacement (AWD) > Page 10089 4. Install the 4 rear support to body bolts and tighten to 170 Nm (125 lb ft). 5. Install the rear differential. Refer to Differential Replacement (). 6. Install the rear wheel drive shafts. Refer to Rear Wheel Drive Shaft Replacement (). 7. Install the adjustment links. Refer to Adjust Link Replacement (). 8. Install the trailing arms. Refer to Trailing Arm Replacement (). 9. While holding the stabilizer link, install the stabilizer link-to-lower control arm nut and tighten to 15 Nm (11 lb ft). Caution: Support the brake caliper with heavy mechanic wire, or equivalent, whenever it is separated from its mount and the hydraulic flexible brake hose is still connected. Failure to support the caliper in this manner will cause the flexible brake hose to bear the weight of the caliper, which may cause damage to the brake hose and in turn may cause a brake fluid leak. 10. Remove the supporting wire and position the brake caliper and bracket assemblies back onto the knuckles. Refer to Rear Brake Caliper Bracket Replacement (). 11. Install the rear brake hose bracket nut and bolt and tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb in). 12. Position the wiring harness back to the original location, connect the routing clips to the rear support and upper control arms. Connect the rear wheel speed sensor electrical connectors. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Service and Repair > Rear Support Replacement (AWD) > Page 10090 13. Connect the rear park brake cables through the mounting brackets and onto the park brake actuators. 14. Install the rear park brake cable routing bolts to the trailing arms and tighten the bolts to 12 Nm (106 lb in). 15. Install the exhaust muffler. Refer to Exhaust Muffler Replacement (). 16. Install the tires and wheels. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation (). 17. Check the rear alignment. Refer to Wheel Alignment Measurement (). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Service and Repair > Rear Support Replacement (AWD) > Page 10091 Rear Subframe: Service and Repair Rear Support Replacement (FWD) Rear Support Replacement (FWD) Special Tools J-37043 - Park Brake Cable Release Tool Removal Procedure 1. Place the park brake lever in the release position. 2. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle (). 3. Remove the tires and wheels. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation (). 4. Remove the exhaust muffler. Refer to Exhaust Muffler Replacement (). 5. Remove the rear park brake cable routing bolts from the trailing arms. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Service and Repair > Rear Support Replacement (AWD) > Page 10092 6. Disconnect the rear park brake cables from the park brake actuators. 7. Using the J-37043 release tool , remove the park brake cables from the mounting brackets. 8. Position the rear park brake cables aside. 9. Disconnect the rear wheel speed sensor electrical connectors and the routing clips from the rear support and upper control arms. Position the wiring harness aside. 10. Remove the rear brake hose bracket nut and bolt. Caution: Support the brake caliper with heavy mechanic wire, or equivalent, whenever it is separated from its mount and the hydraulic flexible brake hose is still connected. Failure to support the caliper in this manner will cause the flexible brake hose to bear the weight of the caliper, which may cause damage to the brake hose and in turn may cause a brake fluid leak. 11. Remove the brake calipers and brackets as assemblies and support them with heavy mechanics wire or equivalent. Refer to Rear Brake Caliper Bracket Replacement (). 12. While holding the stabilizer link with a wrench, remove the stabilizer link-to-lower control arm nut. 13. Remove the trailing arms. Refer to Trailing Arm Replacement (). 14. Remove the adjustment links. Refer to Adjust Link Replacement (). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Service and Repair > Rear Support Replacement (AWD) > Page 10093 15. Remove the coil springs. Refer to Coil Spring Replacement (). 16. Position a transmission jack under the rear support and firmly secure the support to the jack with straps. 17. Remove the 4 rear support to body bolts. 18. Remove the rear support assembly from the vehicle. 19. With the aid of an assistant, remove the rear support from the transmission jack and place it on the floor. Installation Procedure Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (). 1. If a new rear support is being installed, a transfer of components is necessary. * Upper Control Arms Tighten the upper control arm to rear support nut and bolt to 160 Nm (118 lb ft). * Lower Control Arms Tighten the lower control arm to rear support nut and bolt to 110 Nm (81 lb ft). * Stabilizer bar and insulators Tighten the stabilizer shaft insulator clamp bolts to 70 Nm (52 lb ft). Tighten the stabilizer link to stabilizer shaft nut to 57 Nm (42 lb ft). * Knuckles - The lower control arm to knuckle bolt/nut will be installed and tightened when the coil spring is installed later in this procedure. Tighten upper control arm to knuckle bolt and nut to 160 Nm (118 lb ft). 2. With the aid of an assistant, position the rear support onto the transmission jack and firmly secure the support to the jack with straps. 3. Position the rear support assembly to the vehicle. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Service and Repair > Rear Support Replacement (AWD) > Page 10094 4. Install the 4 rear support to body bolts and tighten to 170 Nm (125 lb ft). 5. Install the coil springs. Refer to Coil Spring Replacement (). 6. Install the adjustment links. Refer to Adjust Link Replacement (). 7. Install the trailing arms. Refer to Trailing Arm Replacement (). 8. While holding the stabilizer link, install the stabilizer link-to-lower control arm nut and tighten to 15 Nm (11 lb ft). Caution: Support the brake caliper with heavy mechanic wire, or equivalent, whenever it is separated from its mount and the hydraulic flexible brake hose is still connected. Failure to support the caliper in this manner will cause the flexible brake hose to bear the weight of the caliper, which may cause damage to the brake hose and in turn may cause a brake fluid leak. 9. Remove the supporting wire and position the brake caliper and bracket assemblies back onto the knuckles. Refer to Rear Brake Caliper Bracket Replacement (). 10. Install the rear brake hose bracket nut and bolt and tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb in). 11. Position the wiring harness back to the original location, connect the routing clips to the rear support and upper control arms. Connect the rear wheel speed sensor electrical connectors. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Service and Repair > Rear Support Replacement (AWD) > Page 10095 12. Connect the rear park brake cables through the mounting brackets and onto the park brake actuators. 13. Install the rear park brake cable routing bolts to the trailing arms and tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb in). 14. Install the exhaust muffler. Refer to Exhaust Muffler Replacement (). 15. Install the tires and wheels. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation (). 16. Check the rear alignment. Refer to Wheel Alignment Measurement (). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Spring ( Coil / Leaf ) > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Suspension Spring ( Coil / Leaf ): > 09-03-08-009B > Jun > 10 > Suspension/Drivetrain - Shudder On Hard Acceleration Suspension Spring ( Coil / Leaf ): Customer Interest Suspension/Drivetrain - Shudder On Hard Acceleration TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 09-03-08-009B Date: June 07, 2010 Subject: Shudder in Vehicle Under Moderate to Hard Acceleration (Insert Washers Under RDM and/or Replace Front Springs and/or Replace Halfshaft) Models: 2010 Chevrolet Equinox 2010 GMC Terrain with 2.4L L4 or 3.0L V6 Engine Built Prior to VIN Breakpoint A6247602 Please Refer to GMVIS Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add vehicle information to the titles in the Correction section. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 09-03-08-009A (Section 03 - Suspension). Condition Some customers may comment on these shudder conditions: - Lateral shudder - Occurs during accelerator apply (moderate to heavy). Can be intermittent and usually noticeable powering through turns at 40 km/h (25 mph) or less. Diagnostic Tip Accelerate the vehicle under moderate to hard pedal. Note that this shudder depends on relative phasing (orientation) of the front halfshaft joints to each other. So, if a shudder does not occur, this may require re-evaluation after or during a turn (such as driving one way down a street and then repeating in the other direction). It is usually noticeable with moderate accelerator apply during a turn at lower speeds. - Vertical shudder - Occurs during moderate to heavy accelerator apply (32-40 km/h (20-25 mph) and is not intermittent. Diagnostic Tip Drive the vehicle in a straight line under moderate to hard acceleration (going up a grade will worsen it). - Lateral wobble (low frequency / high amplitude shudder) (Only on V6 AWD and FWD) - Occurs during acceleration (light, moderate, or heavy). Most noticeable around 64 km/h (40 mph) and up and can be very intermittent (comes and goes at random). Sometimes appears briefly and other times will stay for an extended period of time. Diagnostic Tip Requires accelerator apply and can be very intermittent. If left front halfshaft - will be worse when turning to left (lifting left side of vehicle); If right front halfshaft - will be worse when turning to right (lifting right side of vehicle). Cause This condition may be caused by the standing height of the AWD configurations, which may be too high, increasing the axle joint angles beyond their optimum operating range. The shudder may vary based on the relative phasing of the left and right halfshaft joints. Correction Important Do Not replace the front drive axles. Important Do Not replace springs for FWD configuration. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Spring ( Coil / Leaf ) > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Suspension Spring ( Coil / Leaf ): > 09-03-08-009B > Jun > 10 > Suspension/Drivetrain - Shudder On Hard Acceleration > Page 10104 Verify the condition. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle in SI. Inspect the vehicle to see if the RDM bushings have the washers installed between the top of the bushing and the cradle (1). If not, see the procedure for Installing RDM Washers first. If the condition still occurs, then proceed to Replacement of Front Springs. If adding RDM washers and replacing the spring still do not fix this condition, replace the halfshafts. Installing RDM Washers - Only for All-Wheel Drive (AWD) 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle in SI. 2. Remove the exhaust system from the four rubber hangers. 3. Support the rear differential with a transmission jack stand. 4. Remove the rear differential support bushing bolts (1). 5. Remove the front mounting nuts for the rear differential. 6. Lower the rear differential to gain access and insert washers, GM P/N 11609719, between the top of the bushing and the cradle. 7. Raise the rear differential assembly into place. 8. Tighten the front mounting nuts. Tighten Tighten the nuts to 122 Nm (90 lb ft). 9. Tighten the rear differential support bushing bolts. Tighten Tighten the bolts to 188 Nm (139 lb ft). 10. Remove the transmission jack stand. 11. Install the exhaust system in the hangers. 12. Lower the vehicle. 13. Verify that the condition is corrected. If not, proceed to Replacement of Front Springs. Replacement of Front Springs - For Both 4 and 6 cylinders; All-Wheel Drive (AWD) Only 1. Verify the shudder in the vehicle under hard acceleration. 2. Replace the front springs with GM P/N 20827083 (2.4L L4 Engine) or 20827104 (3.0L V6 Engine). Remove the front struts from the vehicle. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Spring ( Coil / Leaf ) > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Suspension Spring ( Coil / Leaf ): > 09-03-08-009B > Jun > 10 > Suspension/Drivetrain - Shudder On Hard Acceleration > Page 10105 Refer to Strut Assembly Replacement in SI. 3. After the struts are removed from the vehicle, replace the springs. Refer to Strut, Strut Component, and Spring Replacement in SI. Replacement of Halfshaft - Only for V6; FWD and All-Wheel Drive (AWD) 1. Verify the Lateral wobble/shudder in the vehicle under light/hard acceleration. 2. Replace the front wheel drive shaft. Refer to Front Wheel Drive Shaft Replacement in SI. Refer to the GM electronic parts catalog (EPC) for the correct front wheel drive shaft. Parts Information Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Spring ( Coil / Leaf ) > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Suspension Spring ( Coil / Leaf ): > 09-03-08-009B > Jun > 10 > Suspension/Drivetrain - Shudder On Hard Acceleration Suspension Spring ( Coil / Leaf ): All Technical Service Bulletins Suspension/Drivetrain - Shudder On Hard Acceleration TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 09-03-08-009B Date: June 07, 2010 Subject: Shudder in Vehicle Under Moderate to Hard Acceleration (Insert Washers Under RDM and/or Replace Front Springs and/or Replace Halfshaft) Models: 2010 Chevrolet Equinox 2010 GMC Terrain with 2.4L L4 or 3.0L V6 Engine Built Prior to VIN Breakpoint A6247602 Please Refer to GMVIS Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add vehicle information to the titles in the Correction section. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 09-03-08-009A (Section 03 - Suspension). Condition Some customers may comment on these shudder conditions: - Lateral shudder - Occurs during accelerator apply (moderate to heavy). Can be intermittent and usually noticeable powering through turns at 40 km/h (25 mph) or less. Diagnostic Tip Accelerate the vehicle under moderate to hard pedal. Note that this shudder depends on relative phasing (orientation) of the front halfshaft joints to each other. So, if a shudder does not occur, this may require re-evaluation after or during a turn (such as driving one way down a street and then repeating in the other direction). It is usually noticeable with moderate accelerator apply during a turn at lower speeds. - Vertical shudder - Occurs during moderate to heavy accelerator apply (32-40 km/h (20-25 mph) and is not intermittent. Diagnostic Tip Drive the vehicle in a straight line under moderate to hard acceleration (going up a grade will worsen it). - Lateral wobble (low frequency / high amplitude shudder) (Only on V6 AWD and FWD) - Occurs during acceleration (light, moderate, or heavy). Most noticeable around 64 km/h (40 mph) and up and can be very intermittent (comes and goes at random). Sometimes appears briefly and other times will stay for an extended period of time. Diagnostic Tip Requires accelerator apply and can be very intermittent. If left front halfshaft - will be worse when turning to left (lifting left side of vehicle); If right front halfshaft - will be worse when turning to right (lifting right side of vehicle). Cause This condition may be caused by the standing height of the AWD configurations, which may be too high, increasing the axle joint angles beyond their optimum operating range. The shudder may vary based on the relative phasing of the left and right halfshaft joints. Correction Important Do Not replace the front drive axles. Important Do Not replace springs for FWD configuration. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Spring ( Coil / Leaf ) > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Suspension Spring ( Coil / Leaf ): > 09-03-08-009B > Jun > 10 > Suspension/Drivetrain - Shudder On Hard Acceleration > Page 10111 Verify the condition. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle in SI. Inspect the vehicle to see if the RDM bushings have the washers installed between the top of the bushing and the cradle (1). If not, see the procedure for Installing RDM Washers first. If the condition still occurs, then proceed to Replacement of Front Springs. If adding RDM washers and replacing the spring still do not fix this condition, replace the halfshafts. Installing RDM Washers - Only for All-Wheel Drive (AWD) 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle in SI. 2. Remove the exhaust system from the four rubber hangers. 3. Support the rear differential with a transmission jack stand. 4. Remove the rear differential support bushing bolts (1). 5. Remove the front mounting nuts for the rear differential. 6. Lower the rear differential to gain access and insert washers, GM P/N 11609719, between the top of the bushing and the cradle. 7. Raise the rear differential assembly into place. 8. Tighten the front mounting nuts. Tighten Tighten the nuts to 122 Nm (90 lb ft). 9. Tighten the rear differential support bushing bolts. Tighten Tighten the bolts to 188 Nm (139 lb ft). 10. Remove the transmission jack stand. 11. Install the exhaust system in the hangers. 12. Lower the vehicle. 13. Verify that the condition is corrected. If not, proceed to Replacement of Front Springs. Replacement of Front Springs - For Both 4 and 6 cylinders; All-Wheel Drive (AWD) Only 1. Verify the shudder in the vehicle under hard acceleration. 2. Replace the front springs with GM P/N 20827083 (2.4L L4 Engine) or 20827104 (3.0L V6 Engine). Remove the front struts from the vehicle. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Spring ( Coil / Leaf ) > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Suspension Spring ( Coil / Leaf ): > 09-03-08-009B > Jun > 10 > Suspension/Drivetrain - Shudder On Hard Acceleration > Page 10112 Refer to Strut Assembly Replacement in SI. 3. After the struts are removed from the vehicle, replace the springs. Refer to Strut, Strut Component, and Spring Replacement in SI. Replacement of Halfshaft - Only for V6; FWD and All-Wheel Drive (AWD) 1. Verify the Lateral wobble/shudder in the vehicle under light/hard acceleration. 2. Replace the front wheel drive shaft. Refer to Front Wheel Drive Shaft Replacement in SI. Refer to the GM electronic parts catalog (EPC) for the correct front wheel drive shaft. Parts Information Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Spring ( Coil / Leaf ) > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension Coil Spring Suspension Spring ( Coil / Leaf ): Service and Repair Front Suspension Coil Spring Strut, Strut Component, or Spring Replacement Special Tools * J 42991 Strut Rod Nut Socket * J 45400 Strut Spring Compressor Removal Procedure 1. Install the strut assembly in the J 45400 using the following procedure. 1. Adjust the lower legs of the J 45400 to the lowest possible coil of the spring. 2. Adjust the upper legs of the J 45400 to the highest possible coil of the spring. 3. Inspect the strut assembly to insure hooks on the strut compress legs are properly installed on the spring coils. 4. Verify the strut assembly is parallel with the J 45400. 2. Compress the spring enough to unload the upper strut mount. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Spring ( Coil / Leaf ) > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension Coil Spring > Page 10115 Caution: Do not allow the absorber rod to rotate during disassembly/reassembly. Use hand tools to keep the absorber rod from rotating. If air tools are used, and the rod is allowed to rotate, damage to the absorber may occur. 3. Use the J 42991 or equivalent hand tools to remove the strut shaft nut. Note: Leave the spring in the spring compressor. 4. Lower the strut from the spring assembly. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Spring ( Coil / Leaf ) > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension Coil Spring > Page 10116 Caution: Do not handle the top mount assembly by the plastic portion. Handle the top mount assembly by the metal portion when removing/installing the top mount from/to the strut assembly. Holding the top mount assembly by the plastic portion may loosen the snap fit of the bearing components and cause the bearing to fall apart. 5. Remove the upper mount assembly, inspect for damage and deterioration. Replace as necessary. 6. Remove the strut dust shield and inspect for damage and deterioration. Replace as necessary. 7. Remove the hollow bumper from the strut shaft and inspect for damage and deterioration. Replace as necessary. 8. Inspect the spring for damage. Replace as necessary. Installation Procedure 1. Extend the strut to its limit of travel. 2. Install the hollow bumper and dust boot to the strut shaft. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Spring ( Coil / Leaf ) > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension Coil Spring > Page 10117 Note: The tag identifying the spring will be closer to the bottom of the spring. The end of the coil sits up against the tab on the spring seat. 3. With the spring in the compressor, install the strut into the spring. Note: The anti-rotation tab on the spring seat must face 180 degrees from the direction that the knuckle bracket points. 4. Assemble the upper spring seat onto the strut shaft and align the flat with the strut to knuckle mounting bracket. Caution: Do not handle the top mount assembly by the plastic portion. Handle the top mount assembly by the metal portion when removing/installing the top mount from/to the strut assembly. Holding the top mount assembly by the plastic portion may loosen the snap fit of the bearing components and cause the bearing to fall apart. Note: The flat on the metal plate of the top mount assembly must face the same direction of the anti-rotation tab on the spring seat. 5. Assemble the top mount onto the strut shaft and align the flat 180 degrees from flat on the upper spring seat. 6. Loosely install the strut shaft nut. Caution: Do not allow the absorber rod to rotate during disassembly/reassembly. Use hand tools to keep the absorber rod from rotating. If air Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Spring ( Coil / Leaf ) > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension Coil Spring > Page 10118 tools are used, and the rod is allowed to rotate, damage to the absorber may occur. Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener Caution). 7. Hold the strut shaft and use the J 42991 or equivalent hand tools to tighten the shaft while verifying that the upper spring seat flats align with the top mount. Tighten the strut shaft to 55 Nm (41 lb ft). 8. Release the tension on the J 45400. 9. Remove the strut assembly from the J 45400. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Spring ( Coil / Leaf ) > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension Coil Spring > Page 10119 Suspension Spring ( Coil / Leaf ): Service and Repair Rear Suspension Coil Spring Coil Spring Replacement Coil Spring Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle (See: Wheels and Tires/Vehicle Lifting/Service and Repair). 2. Remove the rear tire and wheel assembly. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation (See: Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair). 3. Remove the stabilizer shaft link. Refer to Stabilizer Shaft Link Replacement (See: Stabilizer Bar/Stabilizer Link/Service and Repair/Rear Suspension). 4. Position a jackstand underneath the lower control arm. 5. Raise the jackstand slightly to compress the coil spring. 6. Remove the lower shock bolt and nut. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Spring ( Coil / Leaf ) > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension Coil Spring > Page 10120 7. Loosen the lower control arm to support frame nut and bolt. 8. Remove the lower control arm to knuckle nut and bolt. 9. Slowly lower the control arm in order to unload the coil spring. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Spring ( Coil / Leaf ) > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension Coil Spring > Page 10121 10. Remove the coil spring and insulators. Installation Procedure 1. Inspect the coil spring upper and lower insulators, if damage exists replace the insulators. If no damage exists, transfer the existing components. Refer to Rear Spring Insulator Replacement (See: Rear Spring Insulator Replacement). 2. Position the spring with the rubber insulators into the vehicle. 3. Raise the jackstand to compress the spring. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Spring ( Coil / Leaf ) > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension Coil Spring > Page 10122 Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener Caution). 4. Position the lower control arm to the knuckle and install the nut and bolt and tighten the bolt/nut to 160 Nm (118 lb ft). 5. Tighten the lower control arm to support nut and bolt to 110 Nm (81 lb ft). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Spring ( Coil / Leaf ) > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension Coil Spring > Page 10123 6. Install the shock to the lower control arm nut and bolt and tighten to 110 Nm (81 lb ft). 7. Remove the jackstand from under the vehicle. 8. Install the stabilizer shaft link. Refer to Stabilizer Shaft Link Replacement (See: Stabilizer Bar/Stabilizer Link/Service and Repair/Rear Suspension). 9. Install the rear tire and wheel assembly. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation (See: Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair). 10. Lower the vehicle. Rear Spring Insulator Replacement Rear Spring Insulator Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the coil spring. Refer to Coil Spring Replacement (See: Coil Spring Replacement). 2. Remove the upper and lower rubber insulators from the coil spring. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Spring ( Coil / Leaf ) > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension Coil Spring > Page 10124 Installation Procedure Important: * Spray silicon lubricant on the insulators to aid in installation. * Make sure that part number identification tape located on the coil spring is oriented outboard of the vehicle and at the top of the spring. * Make sure to fully seat the top and bottom coil spring insulators to the spring. 1. Install the upper and lower rubber insulators to the coil spring. 2. Install the coil spring. Refer to Coil Spring Replacement (See: Coil Spring Replacement). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-03-08-009B > Jun > 10 > Suspension/Drivetrain Shudder On Hard Acceleration Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber: Customer Interest Suspension/Drivetrain - Shudder On Hard Acceleration TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 09-03-08-009B Date: June 07, 2010 Subject: Shudder in Vehicle Under Moderate to Hard Acceleration (Insert Washers Under RDM and/or Replace Front Springs and/or Replace Halfshaft) Models: 2010 Chevrolet Equinox 2010 GMC Terrain with 2.4L L4 or 3.0L V6 Engine Built Prior to VIN Breakpoint A6247602 Please Refer to GMVIS Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add vehicle information to the titles in the Correction section. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 09-03-08-009A (Section 03 - Suspension). Condition Some customers may comment on these shudder conditions: - Lateral shudder - Occurs during accelerator apply (moderate to heavy). Can be intermittent and usually noticeable powering through turns at 40 km/h (25 mph) or less. Diagnostic Tip Accelerate the vehicle under moderate to hard pedal. Note that this shudder depends on relative phasing (orientation) of the front halfshaft joints to each other. So, if a shudder does not occur, this may require re-evaluation after or during a turn (such as driving one way down a street and then repeating in the other direction). It is usually noticeable with moderate accelerator apply during a turn at lower speeds. - Vertical shudder - Occurs during moderate to heavy accelerator apply (32-40 km/h (20-25 mph) and is not intermittent. Diagnostic Tip Drive the vehicle in a straight line under moderate to hard acceleration (going up a grade will worsen it). - Lateral wobble (low frequency / high amplitude shudder) (Only on V6 AWD and FWD) - Occurs during acceleration (light, moderate, or heavy). Most noticeable around 64 km/h (40 mph) and up and can be very intermittent (comes and goes at random). Sometimes appears briefly and other times will stay for an extended period of time. Diagnostic Tip Requires accelerator apply and can be very intermittent. If left front halfshaft - will be worse when turning to left (lifting left side of vehicle); If right front halfshaft - will be worse when turning to right (lifting right side of vehicle). Cause This condition may be caused by the standing height of the AWD configurations, which may be too high, increasing the axle joint angles beyond their optimum operating range. The shudder may vary based on the relative phasing of the left and right halfshaft joints. Correction Important Do Not replace the front drive axles. Important Do Not replace springs for FWD configuration. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-03-08-009B > Jun > 10 > Suspension/Drivetrain Shudder On Hard Acceleration > Page 10133 Verify the condition. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle in SI. Inspect the vehicle to see if the RDM bushings have the washers installed between the top of the bushing and the cradle (1). If not, see the procedure for Installing RDM Washers first. If the condition still occurs, then proceed to Replacement of Front Springs. If adding RDM washers and replacing the spring still do not fix this condition, replace the halfshafts. Installing RDM Washers - Only for All-Wheel Drive (AWD) 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle in SI. 2. Remove the exhaust system from the four rubber hangers. 3. Support the rear differential with a transmission jack stand. 4. Remove the rear differential support bushing bolts (1). 5. Remove the front mounting nuts for the rear differential. 6. Lower the rear differential to gain access and insert washers, GM P/N 11609719, between the top of the bushing and the cradle. 7. Raise the rear differential assembly into place. 8. Tighten the front mounting nuts. Tighten Tighten the nuts to 122 Nm (90 lb ft). 9. Tighten the rear differential support bushing bolts. Tighten Tighten the bolts to 188 Nm (139 lb ft). 10. Remove the transmission jack stand. 11. Install the exhaust system in the hangers. 12. Lower the vehicle. 13. Verify that the condition is corrected. If not, proceed to Replacement of Front Springs. Replacement of Front Springs - For Both 4 and 6 cylinders; All-Wheel Drive (AWD) Only 1. Verify the shudder in the vehicle under hard acceleration. 2. Replace the front springs with GM P/N 20827083 (2.4L L4 Engine) or 20827104 (3.0L V6 Engine). Remove the front struts from the vehicle. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-03-08-009B > Jun > 10 > Suspension/Drivetrain Shudder On Hard Acceleration > Page 10134 Refer to Strut Assembly Replacement in SI. 3. After the struts are removed from the vehicle, replace the springs. Refer to Strut, Strut Component, and Spring Replacement in SI. Replacement of Halfshaft - Only for V6; FWD and All-Wheel Drive (AWD) 1. Verify the Lateral wobble/shudder in the vehicle under light/hard acceleration. 2. Replace the front wheel drive shaft. Refer to Front Wheel Drive Shaft Replacement in SI. Refer to the GM electronic parts catalog (EPC) for the correct front wheel drive shaft. Parts Information Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber: > 09-03-08-009B > Jun > 10 > Suspension/Drivetrain - Shudder On Hard Acceleration Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber: All Technical Service Bulletins Suspension/Drivetrain Shudder On Hard Acceleration TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 09-03-08-009B Date: June 07, 2010 Subject: Shudder in Vehicle Under Moderate to Hard Acceleration (Insert Washers Under RDM and/or Replace Front Springs and/or Replace Halfshaft) Models: 2010 Chevrolet Equinox 2010 GMC Terrain with 2.4L L4 or 3.0L V6 Engine Built Prior to VIN Breakpoint A6247602 Please Refer to GMVIS Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add vehicle information to the titles in the Correction section. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 09-03-08-009A (Section 03 - Suspension). Condition Some customers may comment on these shudder conditions: - Lateral shudder - Occurs during accelerator apply (moderate to heavy). Can be intermittent and usually noticeable powering through turns at 40 km/h (25 mph) or less. Diagnostic Tip Accelerate the vehicle under moderate to hard pedal. Note that this shudder depends on relative phasing (orientation) of the front halfshaft joints to each other. So, if a shudder does not occur, this may require re-evaluation after or during a turn (such as driving one way down a street and then repeating in the other direction). It is usually noticeable with moderate accelerator apply during a turn at lower speeds. - Vertical shudder - Occurs during moderate to heavy accelerator apply (32-40 km/h (20-25 mph) and is not intermittent. Diagnostic Tip Drive the vehicle in a straight line under moderate to hard acceleration (going up a grade will worsen it). - Lateral wobble (low frequency / high amplitude shudder) (Only on V6 AWD and FWD) - Occurs during acceleration (light, moderate, or heavy). Most noticeable around 64 km/h (40 mph) and up and can be very intermittent (comes and goes at random). Sometimes appears briefly and other times will stay for an extended period of time. Diagnostic Tip Requires accelerator apply and can be very intermittent. If left front halfshaft - will be worse when turning to left (lifting left side of vehicle); If right front halfshaft - will be worse when turning to right (lifting right side of vehicle). Cause This condition may be caused by the standing height of the AWD configurations, which may be too high, increasing the axle joint angles beyond their optimum operating range. The shudder may vary based on the relative phasing of the left and right halfshaft joints. Correction Important Do Not replace the front drive axles. Important Do Not replace springs for FWD configuration. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber: > 09-03-08-009B > Jun > 10 > Suspension/Drivetrain - Shudder On Hard Acceleration > Page 10140 Verify the condition. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle in SI. Inspect the vehicle to see if the RDM bushings have the washers installed between the top of the bushing and the cradle (1). If not, see the procedure for Installing RDM Washers first. If the condition still occurs, then proceed to Replacement of Front Springs. If adding RDM washers and replacing the spring still do not fix this condition, replace the halfshafts. Installing RDM Washers - Only for All-Wheel Drive (AWD) 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle in SI. 2. Remove the exhaust system from the four rubber hangers. 3. Support the rear differential with a transmission jack stand. 4. Remove the rear differential support bushing bolts (1). 5. Remove the front mounting nuts for the rear differential. 6. Lower the rear differential to gain access and insert washers, GM P/N 11609719, between the top of the bushing and the cradle. 7. Raise the rear differential assembly into place. 8. Tighten the front mounting nuts. Tighten Tighten the nuts to 122 Nm (90 lb ft). 9. Tighten the rear differential support bushing bolts. Tighten Tighten the bolts to 188 Nm (139 lb ft). 10. Remove the transmission jack stand. 11. Install the exhaust system in the hangers. 12. Lower the vehicle. 13. Verify that the condition is corrected. If not, proceed to Replacement of Front Springs. Replacement of Front Springs - For Both 4 and 6 cylinders; All-Wheel Drive (AWD) Only 1. Verify the shudder in the vehicle under hard acceleration. 2. Replace the front springs with GM P/N 20827083 (2.4L L4 Engine) or 20827104 (3.0L V6 Engine). Remove the front struts from the vehicle. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber: > 09-03-08-009B > Jun > 10 > Suspension/Drivetrain - Shudder On Hard Acceleration > Page 10141 Refer to Strut Assembly Replacement in SI. 3. After the struts are removed from the vehicle, replace the springs. Refer to Strut, Strut Component, and Spring Replacement in SI. Replacement of Halfshaft - Only for V6; FWD and All-Wheel Drive (AWD) 1. Verify the Lateral wobble/shudder in the vehicle under light/hard acceleration. 2. Replace the front wheel drive shaft. Refer to Front Wheel Drive Shaft Replacement in SI. Refer to the GM electronic parts catalog (EPC) for the correct front wheel drive shaft. Parts Information Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber: > 05-03-08-002C > Oct > 09 > Suspension - Shock Absorber/Strut Leakage Information Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber: All Technical Service Bulletins Suspension - Shock Absorber/Strut Leakage Information INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 05-03-08-002C Date: October 16, 2009 Subject: Information on Replacement of Shock Absorbers and Struts Due to Fluid Leaks Models: 2010 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (Including Saturn) 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2010 model year and Inspection Procedures. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 05-03-08-002B (Section 03 - Suspension). This bulletin is intended to help identify the severity of shock absorber and strut fluid seepage. Improper diagnosis may lead to components being replaced that are within the manufacturer's specification. Shock absorbers and strut assemblies are fluid-filled components and will normally exhibit some seepage. Seepage is defined as oil film or dust accumulation on the exterior of the shock housing. Shock absorbers and struts are not to be replaced under warranty for seepage. Use the following information to determine if the condition is normal acceptable seepage or a defective component. Important Electronically controlled shock absorbers (MR) may have a tendency to attract dust to this oil film. Often this film and dust can be wiped off and will not return until similar mileage is accumulated again. Inspection Procedure Note The shock absorber or strut assembly DOES NOT have to be removed from the vehicle to perform the following inspection procedure. Use the following descriptions and graphics to determine the serviceability of the component. Shock Absorbers Do Not Replace shock absorbers displaying condition 1 or 2 levels of seepage. 1. Oil or fluid residue only on the bottom or top of the shock absorber and not originating from the shaft seal (the upper part of the lower shock tube). 2. Light film/residue on approximately 1/3 (a) or less of the lower shock tube (A) and originating from the shaft seal. Replace shock absorbers displaying conditions 3 and 4 levels of leaks. 3. Oil drip or trail down the lower shock tube and originating from the shaft seal. 4. An extreme wet film of oil covering more than 1/3 (b) of the lower shock tube and originating from the shaft seal. Coil-over Shock Absorber Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber: > 05-03-08-002C > Oct > 09 > Suspension - Shock Absorber/Strut Leakage Information > Page 10146 Do Not Replace coil-over shock absorbers displaying condition 1 or 2 levels of seepage. 1. Oil or fluid residue only on the bottom of the lower shock absorber tube or the coil-over shock absorber components and not originating from the shaft seal (located at the top of the coil-over shock tube). 2. Light film/residue on the shock absorber tube, but not on the spring seat and originating from the shaft seal. Replace coil-over shock absorbers displaying conditions 3 and 4 levels of leaks. 3. Oil drip or trail down the lower shock tube and originating from the shaft seal. 4. An extreme, wet film of oil covering the shock absorber tube and pooling in the spring seat and originating from the shaft seal. Struts Do Not Replace Struts displaying condition 1 or 2 levels of seepage. 1. Oil or fluid residue only on the bottom of the strut tube or on other strut components and not originating from the shaft seal. 2. Light film/residue on the strut tube, but not on the spring seat and originating from the shaft seal. Replace Struts displaying conditions 3 and 4 levels of leaks. 3. Oil drip or trail down the strut tube and originating from the shaft seal (located at the top of the strut tube). 4. Extreme wet film of oil covering the strut tube and pooling in the spring seat and originating from the shaft seal. Correction Use the information published in SI for diagnosis and repair. Use the applicable published labor operation. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber: > 05-03-08-002C > Oct > 09 > Suspension - Shock Absorber/Strut Leakage Information Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber: All Technical Service Bulletins Suspension - Shock Absorber/Strut Leakage Information INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 05-03-08-002C Date: October 16, 2009 Subject: Information on Replacement of Shock Absorbers and Struts Due to Fluid Leaks Models: 2010 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (Including Saturn) 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2010 model year and Inspection Procedures. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 05-03-08-002B (Section 03 - Suspension). This bulletin is intended to help identify the severity of shock absorber and strut fluid seepage. Improper diagnosis may lead to components being replaced that are within the manufacturer's specification. Shock absorbers and strut assemblies are fluid-filled components and will normally exhibit some seepage. Seepage is defined as oil film or dust accumulation on the exterior of the shock housing. Shock absorbers and struts are not to be replaced under warranty for seepage. Use the following information to determine if the condition is normal acceptable seepage or a defective component. Important Electronically controlled shock absorbers (MR) may have a tendency to attract dust to this oil film. Often this film and dust can be wiped off and will not return until similar mileage is accumulated again. Inspection Procedure Note The shock absorber or strut assembly DOES NOT have to be removed from the vehicle to perform the following inspection procedure. Use the following descriptions and graphics to determine the serviceability of the component. Shock Absorbers Do Not Replace shock absorbers displaying condition 1 or 2 levels of seepage. 1. Oil or fluid residue only on the bottom or top of the shock absorber and not originating from the shaft seal (the upper part of the lower shock tube). 2. Light film/residue on approximately 1/3 (a) or less of the lower shock tube (A) and originating from the shaft seal. Replace shock absorbers displaying conditions 3 and 4 levels of leaks. 3. Oil drip or trail down the lower shock tube and originating from the shaft seal. 4. An extreme wet film of oil covering more than 1/3 (b) of the lower shock tube and originating from the shaft seal. Coil-over Shock Absorber Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber: > 05-03-08-002C > Oct > 09 > Suspension - Shock Absorber/Strut Leakage Information > Page 10152 Do Not Replace coil-over shock absorbers displaying condition 1 or 2 levels of seepage. 1. Oil or fluid residue only on the bottom of the lower shock absorber tube or the coil-over shock absorber components and not originating from the shaft seal (located at the top of the coil-over shock tube). 2. Light film/residue on the shock absorber tube, but not on the spring seat and originating from the shaft seal. Replace coil-over shock absorbers displaying conditions 3 and 4 levels of leaks. 3. Oil drip or trail down the lower shock tube and originating from the shaft seal. 4. An extreme, wet film of oil covering the shock absorber tube and pooling in the spring seat and originating from the shaft seal. Struts Do Not Replace Struts displaying condition 1 or 2 levels of seepage. 1. Oil or fluid residue only on the bottom of the strut tube or on other strut components and not originating from the shaft seal. 2. Light film/residue on the strut tube, but not on the spring seat and originating from the shaft seal. Replace Struts displaying conditions 3 and 4 levels of leaks. 3. Oil drip or trail down the strut tube and originating from the shaft seal (located at the top of the strut tube). 4. Extreme wet film of oil covering the strut tube and pooling in the spring seat and originating from the shaft seal. Correction Use the information published in SI for diagnosis and repair. Use the applicable published labor operation. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Front Suspension Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber: Testing and Inspection Front Suspension Strut and Shock Absorber Inspection (Strut) Note: The strut assembly DOES NOT have to be removed from the vehicle to perform the following inspection procedure. Note: A light film of oil on the top portion of the strut is normal. DO NOT replace the strut for this condition. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Front Suspension > Page 10155 Condition 1 Oil or fluid residue only on the bottom of the strut tube or on other strut components and not originating from the shaft seal, is not a strut related problem. DO NOT replace the strut, look for other external leaks. Condition 2 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Front Suspension > Page 10156 Light film/residue on the strut tube, but not on the spring seat and originating from the shaft seal, is a NORMAL condition. DO NOT replace the strut. Condition 3 Oil drip or trail down the strut tube and originating from the shaft seal, is an ABNORMAL condition. Replace the strut. Condition 4 Extreme wet film of oil covering the strut tube and pooling in the spring seat and originating from the shaft seal, is an ABNORMAL condition. Replace the strut. Inspection 1. Verify the customer's concern is present. If the concern is present, continue to the next step. If the concern is not present, then the vehicle is operating normally. Note: The strut assembly DOES NOT have to be removed from the vehicle to perform the following inspection procedure. 2. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle (See: Wheels and Tires/Vehicle Lifting/Service and Repair). 3. Visually inspect each of the shock absorbers or struts for external fluid leaks. Refer to the following conditions 1, 2 , 3 , and 4 for visual inspection. * If conditions 1 or 2 are found, continue to step 4. * If conditions 3 or 4 are found, replace strut. Refer to Strut Replacement. 4. If equipped with electronic suspension control system, ensure that the system is working properly. Refer to Diagnostic Starting Point-Electronic Suspension Control. 5. Use your hands in order to lift up and push down on each corner of the vehicle 3 times. Remove your hands from the vehicle. If the corner motion exceeds 2 cycles, replace the strut. If the strut does not exceed 2 cycles, NO repair is necessary. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Front Suspension > Page 10157 Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber: Testing and Inspection Strut and Shock Absorber Inspection (Shock Absorber) Strut and Shock Absorber Inspection (Shock Absorber) Note: The shock absorber assembly DOES NOT have to be removed from the vehicle to perform the following inspection procedure. Note: A light film of oil on the top portion of the lower shock absorber tube is normal. DO NOT replace the shock absorber for this condition. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Front Suspension > Page 10158 Condition 1 Oil or fluid residue only on the bottom or top of the shock absorber and not originating from the shaft seal, is not a shock absorber related problem. DO NOT replace the shock absorber, look for other external leaks. Condition 2 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Front Suspension > Page 10159 Light film/residue on approximately 1/3 (a) or less of the lower shock tube (A) and originating from the shaft seal, is a NORMAL condition. DO NOT replace the shock absorber. Condition 3 Oil drip or trail down the lower shock tube and originating from the shaft seal, is an ABNORMAL condition. Replace the shock absorber. Condition 4 An extreme wet film of oil covering more than 1/3 (b) of the lower shock tube and originating from the shaft seal (B), is an ABNORMAL condition. Replace the shock absorber. Refer to Shock Absorber Replacement (See: Service and Repair/Shock Absorber Replacement). Inspection 1. Verify the customer's concern is present. If the concern is present, continue to the next step. If the concern is not present, then the vehicle is operating normally. Note: The shock absorber assembly DOES NOT have to be removed from the vehicle to perform the following inspection procedure. 2. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle (See: Wheels and Tires/Vehicle Lifting/Service and Repair). 3. Visually inspect each of the shock absorbers for external fluid leaks. Refer to the following conditions 1, 2 , 3 , and 4 for visual inspection. * If conditions 1 or 2 are found, continue to step 4. * If conditions 3 or 4 are found, replace shock absorber. Refer to Shock Absorber Replacement (See: Service and Repair/Shock Absorber Replacement). 4. If equipped with electronic suspension control system, ensure that the system is working properly. Refer to Diagnostic Starting Point - Electronic Suspension Control. 5. Use your hands in order to lift up and push down on each corner of the vehicle 3 times. Remove your hands from the vehicle. If the corner motion exceeds 2 cycles, replace the shock absorber. If the shock absorber does not exceed 2 cycles, NO repair is necessary. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension Strut Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber: Service and Repair Front Suspension Strut Suspension Strut Disposal Suspension Strut Disposal Warning Use the proper eye protection when drilling to prevent metal chips from causing physical injury. 1. Clamp the strut in a vise horizontally with the rod (1) completely extended. 2. Drill a hole in the strut at the center of the end cap (3) using a 5 mm (3/16 in) drill bit. Gas or a gas/oil mixture will exhaust when the drill bit penetrates the strut. Use shop towels in order to contain the escaping oil. 3. Remove the strut from the vise. 4. Hold the strut over a drain pan vertically with the hole down. 5. Move the rod (1) in and out of the tube (2) to completely drain the oil from the strut. Strut Assembly Replacement Strut Assembly Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the air inlet screen. Refer to Air Inlet Screen Replacement (Equinox) (See: Body and Frame/Cowl/Cowl Moulding / Trim/Service and Repair/Air Inlet Screen Replacement)Air Inlet Screen Replacement (Terrain) (See: Body and Frame/Cowl/Cowl Moulding / Trim/Service and Repair/Air Inlet Screen Replacement) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension Strut > Page 10162 2. Remove the 3 upper strut mount bolts. 3. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle (See: Wheels and Tires/Vehicle Lifting/Service and Repair). 4. Remove the wheel and tire assembly. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation (See: Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair). 5. Remove the brake hose bracket from the front strut. Refer to Front Brake Hose Replacement (See: Brakes and Traction Control/Hydraulic System/Brake Hose/Line/Service and Repair/Front Brake Hose Replacement). 6. Remove the stabilizer link from the front strut. Refer to Stabilizer Shaft Link Replacement (See: Stabilizer Bar/Stabilizer Link/Service and Repair/Front Suspension). 7. Remove the lower strut bolts and nuts. 8. Remove the strut assembly from the vehicle. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension Strut > Page 10163 1. Position the strut assembly to the vehicle. Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener Caution). 2. Install the 3 upper strut mount bolts and tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb ft). 3. Install the lower strut bolts and nuts and tighten to 200 Nm (148 lb ft). Note: Inspect the stabilizer link seals for damage prior to installation. Replace as required. Note: Do not allow the stabilizer link ball stud to rotate while installing the link nut. 4. Install the stabilizer link to the front strut. Refer to Stabilizer Shaft Link Replacement (See: Stabilizer Bar/Stabilizer Link/Service and Repair/Front Suspension). 5. Install the brake hose bracket to the front strut. Refer to Front Brake Hose Replacement (See: Brakes and Traction Control/Hydraulic System/Brake Hose/Line/Service and Repair/Front Brake Hose Replacement). 6. Install the wheel and tire. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation (See: Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension Strut > Page 10164 7. Lower the vehicle. 8. Install the air inlet screen. Refer to Air Inlet Screen Replacement (Equinox) (See: Body and Frame/Cowl/Cowl Moulding / Trim/Service and Repair/Air Inlet Screen Replacement)Air Inlet Screen Replacement (Terrain) (See: Body and Frame/Cowl/Cowl Moulding / Trim/Service and Repair/Air Inlet Screen Replacement) 9. Perform a wheel alignment. Refer to Wheel Alignment Measurement (See: Alignment/Service and Repair/Wheel Alignment Measurement). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension Strut > Page 10165 Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber: Service and Repair Shock Absorber Replacement Shock Absorber Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle (See: Wheels and Tires/Vehicle Lifting/Service and Repair). 2. Remove the rear tire and wheel assembly. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation (See: Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair). 3. Using the proper jackstand, support the lower control arm or the knuckle. 4. Remove the lower shock bolt. 5. Remove the rear wheel house from the vehicle. Refer to Rear Wheelhouse Panel Liner Replacement (Equinox) (See: Body and Frame/Fender/Rear Fender/Rear Fender Liner/Service and Repair)Rear Wheelhouse Panel Liner Replacement (Terrain) (See: Body and Frame/Fender/Rear Fender/Rear Fender Liner/Service and Repair). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension Strut > Page 10166 6. Remove the upper shock bolt. 7. Remove the shock from the vehicle. Installation Procedure 1. Position the shock to the vehicle. Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener Caution). 2. Install the upper shock bolt and tighten to 110 Nm (81 lb ft). 3. Install the lower shock bolt and tighten to 110 Nm (81 lb ft). 4. Remove the jack stand from the lower control arm or the knuckle. 5. Install the rear wheel house in the vehicle. Refer to Rear Wheelhouse Panel Liner Replacement (Equinox) (See: Body and Frame/Fender/Rear Fender/Rear Fender Liner/Service and Repair)Rear Wheelhouse Panel Liner Replacement (Terrain) (See: Body and Frame/Fender/Rear Fender/Rear Fender Liner/Service and Repair). 6. Install the rear tire and wheel assembly. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation (See: Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension Strut > Page 10167 7. Lower the vehicle. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension Strut > Page 10168 Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber: Service and Repair Shock Absorber Disposal Shock Absorber Disposal Warning Gas charged shock absorbers contain high pressure gas. Do not remove the snap ring from inside the top of the tube. If the snap ring is removed, the contents of the shock absorber will come out with extreme force which may result in personal injury. Warning To prevent personal injury, wear safety glasses when centerpunching and drilling the shock absorber. Use care not to puncture the shock absorber tube with the centerpunch. 1. Make an indentation 10 mm (0.4 in) from the bottom (4) of the tube (3) using a centerpunch. 2. Clamp the shock absorber in a vise horizontally with the shock absorber rod (1) completely extended. 3. Drill a hole in the shock absorber at the centerpunch (4) using a 5 mm (3/16 in) drill bit. Gas or a gas/oil mixture will exhaust when the drill bit penetrates the shock absorber. Use shop towels in order to contain the escaping oil. 4. Make an indentation in the middle (2) of the tube (3) with a centerpunch. 5. Drill a second hole in the shock absorber at the centerpunch (2) using a 5 mm (3/16 in) drill bit. Oil will exhaust when the drill bit penetrates the shock absorber. Use shop towels in order to contain the escaping oil. 6. Remove the shock absorber from the vise. Hold the shock absorber over a drain pan horizontally with the holes down. Move the rod (1) in and out of the tube (3) to completely drain the oil from the shock absorber. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Travel Bumper > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Suspension Travel Bumper: > 10-03-08-003A > Dec > 10 > Suspension - Front Suspension or Front Strut Noise Suspension Travel Bumper: Customer Interest Suspension - Front Suspension or Front Strut Noise TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 10-03-08-003A Date: December 20, 2010 Subject: Front Suspension or Front Strut Noise (Apply Grease on Strut Shaft) Models: 2008-2011 Chevrolet Captiva Sport 2010-2011 Chevrolet Equinox 2010-2011 GMC Terrain 2008-2010 Saturn VUE Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the models to include Captiva and VUE. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 10-03-08-003 (Section 03 - Suspension). Condition Some customers may comment on a popping, creak, rattle, squawk, itch or clunk type noise coming from the front of the vehicle. This noise will most likely be heard during small to medium suspension travel. The noise may occur with the vehicle traveling straight and/or during turns. Cause The cause of this condition may be due to the inside diameter of the front strut jounce bumper rubbing against the piston rod of the strut, creating a slip-stick condition. Correction Important DO NOT replace any front suspension components (strut, strut top mount bearing, etc) without first performing this bulletin. 1. Verify that the noise is from the upper strut mount area. The concern may be on both sides of the vehicle. 2. Raise and support the vehicle on a frame lift-type hoist. 3. Pull the dust shield/jounce bumper assembly out of the strut top mount cup. 4. Slide the dust shield/jounce bumper assembly down to expose the top portion of the strut shaft. 5. Apply grease, GM P/N 12345579 (in Canada, 10953481), around the circumference of the strut shaft that is exposed. 6. Unseat the bottom of the dust shield from the strut. 7. Slide the dust shield/jounce bumper assembly up to expose the bottom portion of the strut shaft. 8. Apply the grease around the circumference of the strut shaft that is exposed. 9. Slide the dust shield/jounce bumper assembly down and reattach the bottom to the strut. 10. Push the top of the dust shield/jounce bumper assembly up into the top mount cup as far as possible by hand. The assembly will fully seat once the Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Travel Bumper > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Suspension Travel Bumper: > 10-03-08-003A > Dec > 10 > Suspension - Front Suspension or Front Strut Noise > Page 10177 vehicle is on the ground and the suspension is allowed to compress. Parts Information Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Travel Bumper > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Suspension Travel Bumper: > 10-03-08-003A > Dec > 10 > Suspension - Front Suspension or Front Strut Noise Suspension Travel Bumper: All Technical Service Bulletins Suspension - Front Suspension or Front Strut Noise TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 10-03-08-003A Date: December 20, 2010 Subject: Front Suspension or Front Strut Noise (Apply Grease on Strut Shaft) Models: 2008-2011 Chevrolet Captiva Sport 2010-2011 Chevrolet Equinox 2010-2011 GMC Terrain 2008-2010 Saturn VUE Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the models to include Captiva and VUE. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 10-03-08-003 (Section 03 - Suspension). Condition Some customers may comment on a popping, creak, rattle, squawk, itch or clunk type noise coming from the front of the vehicle. This noise will most likely be heard during small to medium suspension travel. The noise may occur with the vehicle traveling straight and/or during turns. Cause The cause of this condition may be due to the inside diameter of the front strut jounce bumper rubbing against the piston rod of the strut, creating a slip-stick condition. Correction Important DO NOT replace any front suspension components (strut, strut top mount bearing, etc) without first performing this bulletin. 1. Verify that the noise is from the upper strut mount area. The concern may be on both sides of the vehicle. 2. Raise and support the vehicle on a frame lift-type hoist. 3. Pull the dust shield/jounce bumper assembly out of the strut top mount cup. 4. Slide the dust shield/jounce bumper assembly down to expose the top portion of the strut shaft. 5. Apply grease, GM P/N 12345579 (in Canada, 10953481), around the circumference of the strut shaft that is exposed. 6. Unseat the bottom of the dust shield from the strut. 7. Slide the dust shield/jounce bumper assembly up to expose the bottom portion of the strut shaft. 8. Apply the grease around the circumference of the strut shaft that is exposed. 9. Slide the dust shield/jounce bumper assembly down and reattach the bottom to the strut. 10. Push the top of the dust shield/jounce bumper assembly up into the top mount cup as far as possible by hand. The assembly will fully seat once the Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Travel Bumper > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Suspension Travel Bumper: > 10-03-08-003A > Dec > 10 > Suspension - Front Suspension or Front Strut Noise > Page 10183 vehicle is on the ground and the suspension is allowed to compress. Parts Information Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Travel Bumper > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 10184 Suspension Travel Bumper: Service and Repair Jounce Bumper Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle (See: Wheels and Tires/Vehicle Lifting/Service and Repair). 2. Remove the tire and wheel assembly. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation (See: Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair). 3. Remove the lower control arm assembly. Refer to Rear Axle Lower Control Arm Replacement (See: Control Arm/Service and Repair/Rear Suspension/Rear Axle Lower Control Arm Replacement). 4. Remove the rear suspension jounce bumper (1). Installation Procedure 1. Install the rear suspension jounce bumper (1) and tighten until the jounce bumper just makes contact with the mounting bracket. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Travel Bumper > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 10185 2. Using a grease pencil or equivalent, create a reference mark (1) from the jounce bumper (3) to the mounting bracket (2). 3. Tighten the jounce bumper (3) by rotating it 360° or one full turn. 4. Using the reference mark (1) as a starting point, rotate the jounce bumper (2) an additional 120° or two points of the hex nut (3) on the jounce bumper. 5. Install the lower control arm assembly. Refer to Rear Axle Lower Control Arm Replacement (See: Control Arm/Service and Repair/Rear Suspension/Rear Axle Lower Control Arm Replacement). 6. Install the tire and wheel assembly. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation (See: Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair). 7. Remove the support and lower the vehicle. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Trailing Arm > Component Information > Service and Repair > Trailing Arm Replacement Trailing Arm: Service and Repair Trailing Arm Replacement Trailing Arm Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle (See: Wheels and Tires/Vehicle Lifting/Service and Repair). 2. Remove the tire and wheel. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation (See: Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair). 3. Remove the park brake cable bolt from the trailing arm and from the frame. Refer to Parking Brake Rear Cable Replacement (Left) (See: Brakes and Traction Control/Parking Brake System/Parking Brake Cable/Service and Repair/Parking Brake Rear Cable Replacement (Left))Parking Brake Rear Cable Replacement (Right) (See: Brakes and Traction Control/Parking Brake System/Parking Brake Cable/Service and Repair/Parking Brake Rear Cable Replacement (Right)). 4. Remove the trailing arm bracket to body bolts. Refer to Trailing Arm Bracket Replacement (See: Trailing Arm Bracket Replacement). 5. Remove the trailing arm bushing to bracket nut and bolt. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Trailing Arm > Component Information > Service and Repair > Trailing Arm Replacement > Page 10190 6. Remove the trailing arm to knuckle bolts (1). 7. Remove the trailing arm. Installation Procedure 1. Position the trailing arm to the vehicle. Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener Caution). 2. Install the trailing arm to knuckle bolts (1) and tighten to 110 Nm (81 lb ft). 3. Position the trailing arm bracket to the trailing arm. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Trailing Arm > Component Information > Service and Repair > Trailing Arm Replacement > Page 10191 4. Loosely install the trailing arm bushing to bracket nut and bolt. 5. Install the trail arm bracket. Refer to Trailing Arm Bracket Replacement (See: Trailing Arm Bracket Replacement). 6. Tighten the trailing arm bushing to bracket nut and bolt to 160 Nm (118 lb ft). 7. Install the park brake cable bolt to trailing arm and to the frame. Refer to Parking Brake Rear Cable Replacement (Left) (See: Brakes and Traction Control/Parking Brake System/Parking Brake Cable/Service and Repair/Parking Brake Rear Cable Replacement (Left))Parking Brake Rear Cable Replacement (Right) (See: Brakes and Traction Control/Parking Brake System/Parking Brake Cable/Service and Repair/Parking Brake Rear Cable Replacement (Right)). 8. Install the tire and wheel. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation (See: Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair). 9. Lower the vehicle. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Trailing Arm > Component Information > Service and Repair > Trailing Arm Replacement > Page 10192 Trailing Arm: Service and Repair Trailing Arm Bracket Replacement Trailing Arm Bracket Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle (See: Wheels and Tires/Vehicle Lifting/Service and Repair). 2. Remove the park brake cable from the trailing arm and from the frame. Refer to Parking Brake Rear Cable Replacement (Left) (See: Brakes and Traction Control/Parking Brake System/Parking Brake Cable/Service and Repair/Parking Brake Rear Cable Replacement (Left))Parking Brake Rear Cable Replacement (Right) (See: Brakes and Traction Control/Parking Brake System/Parking Brake Cable/Service and Repair/Parking Brake Rear Cable Replacement (Right)). 3. Remove the trailing arm bracket to body bolts (1). 4. Remove the trailing arm bushing to bracket nut and bolt. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Trailing Arm > Component Information > Service and Repair > Trailing Arm Replacement > Page 10193 5. Remove the trailing arm bracket. Installation Procedure 1. Position the trailing arm bracket to the trailing arm. 2. Loosely install the trailing arm bushing to bracket nut and bolt. 3. Push upward on the trailing arm bracket and loosely install the front bolt (1). Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener Caution). 4. Use a drift to align the remaining trailing arm bracket bolts (1). Tighten the bolts to 110 Nm (81 lb ft). 5. Tighten the trailing arm bushing to bracket nut and bolt to 160 Nm (118 lb ft). 6. Install the park brake cable on the trailing arm and on the frame. Refer to Parking Brake Rear Cable Replacement (Left) (See: Brakes and Traction Control/Parking Brake System/Parking Brake Cable/Service and Repair/Parking Brake Rear Cable Replacement (Left))Parking Brake Rear Cable Replacement (Right) (See: Brakes and Traction Control/Parking Brake System/Parking Brake Cable/Service and Repair/Parking Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Trailing Arm > Component Information > Service and Repair > Trailing Arm Replacement > Page 10194 Brake Rear Cable Replacement (Right)). 7. Remove the support and lower the vehicle. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Wheel Bearing: Testing and Inspection Wheel Bearings Diagnosis Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension Wheel Bearing: Service and Repair Front Suspension Front Wheel Bearing and Hub Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 10200 Wheel Bearing: Service and Repair Rear Suspension Rear Wheel Bearing and Hub Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Wheel Hub > Axle Nut > Component Information > Specifications Axle Nut: Specifications Axle nut ................................................................................................................................................ .................................................... 205 Nm (151 lb ft) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Vehicle Lifting > Component Information > Service and Repair Vehicle Lifting: Service and Repair Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle Danger: To avoid any vehicle damage, serious personal injury or death when major components are removed from the vehicle and the vehicle is supported by a hoist, support the vehicle with jack stands at the opposite end from which the components are being removed and strap the vehicle to the hoist. Danger: To avoid any vehicle damage, serious personal injury or death, always use the jackstands to support the vehicle when lifting the vehicle with a jack. Caution: Perform the following steps before beginning any vehicle lifting or jacking procedure: * Remove or secure all of the vehicle contents in order to avoid any shifting or any movement that may occur during the vehicle lifting or jacking procedure. * The lifting equipment or the jacking equipment weight rating must meet or exceed the weight of the vehicle and any vehicle contents. * The lifting equipment or the jacking equipment must meet the operational standards of the lifting equipment or jacking equipment manufacturer. * Perform the vehicle lifting or jacking procedure on a clean, hard, dry, level surface. * Perform the vehicle lifting or jacking procedure only at the identified lift points. DO NOT allow the lifting equipment or jacking equipment to contact any other vehicle components. Failure to perform the previous steps could result in damage to the lifting equipment or the jacking equipment, the vehicle, and/or the vehicle contents. Vehicle Lifting-Frame Contact Lift Front Lift Pads When lifting the vehicle with a frame-contact lift, place the front lift pads approximately 12.2 in (310 mm) inboard from the front pinchweld flanges. Rear Lift Pads When lifting the vehicle with a frame-contact lift, place the rear lift pads 10.0 in (255 mm) inboard from the rear pinchweld flanges. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Vehicle Lifting > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 10209 Vehicle Jacking Note: * Only the left side or the right side of the rear of the vehicle can be lifted at a time when using these jacking point. * The floor jack pad must not contact the oil pan, splash shield or the steering linkage. Under the Rear Suspension Lift the rear of the vehicle by placing the floor jack lift pad on either side of the suspension cradle, inboard and forward of the rear suspension, as shown. Under the Center of the Front Suspension Frame Lift the front of the vehicle by placing the floor jack lift pad at the center of the front suspension frame, as shown. Supporting the Vehicle with Jackstands Place jackstands ONLY under strong and stable vehicle structures. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Relays and Modules - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > TPMS System - Service And Re-Learning Sensor IDs Tire Pressure Module: Technical Service Bulletins TPMS System - Service And Re-Learning Sensor IDs INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 10-03-16-001 Date: July 19, 2010 Subject: TPMS System Service and Re-Learning Sensor IDs Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2 2009 and Prior HUMMER H3 2010 and Prior Saturn Models 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X with Wheel-Mounted Tire Pressure Sensors In the event that the spare tire, which is normally not equipped with a tire pressure monitor (TPM) sensor, is installed in place of one of the road tires and the vehicle is driven above 40 km/h (25 mph) for 20 minutes or more, the TPM indicator icon on the instrument panel cluster (IPC) will flash for approximately one minute and then remain on steady each time the ignition is turned ON, indicating a diagnostic trouble code (DTC) has been set. The driver information center (DIC), if equipped, will also display a SERVICE TIRE MONITOR type message. When the road tire is repaired and reinstalled in the original location, the TPM indicator icon illumination and DIC message may remain displayed until the DTC is cleared. To ensure that the TPM indicator and the DIC message are cleared after service, it is necessary to clear any TPM DTCs using a scan tool. If a scan tool is unavailable, performing the TPM relearn procedure using a TPM diagnostic tool will provide the same results. It is advised to perform the relearn procedure away from other vehicles to prevent picking up a stray sensor signal. If one or more of the TPM sensors are missing or damaged and have been replaced, then the relearn procedure must be performed. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > TPMS System - Service And Re-Learning Sensor IDs Tire Pressure Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins TPMS System - Service And Re-Learning Sensor IDs INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 10-03-16-001 Date: July 19, 2010 Subject: TPMS System Service and Re-Learning Sensor IDs Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2 2009 and Prior HUMMER H3 2010 and Prior Saturn Models 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X with Wheel-Mounted Tire Pressure Sensors In the event that the spare tire, which is normally not equipped with a tire pressure monitor (TPM) sensor, is installed in place of one of the road tires and the vehicle is driven above 40 km/h (25 mph) for 20 minutes or more, the TPM indicator icon on the instrument panel cluster (IPC) will flash for approximately one minute and then remain on steady each time the ignition is turned ON, indicating a diagnostic trouble code (DTC) has been set. The driver information center (DIC), if equipped, will also display a SERVICE TIRE MONITOR type message. When the road tire is repaired and reinstalled in the original location, the TPM indicator icon illumination and DIC message may remain displayed until the DTC is cleared. To ensure that the TPM indicator and the DIC message are cleared after service, it is necessary to clear any TPM DTCs using a scan tool. If a scan tool is unavailable, performing the TPM relearn procedure using a TPM diagnostic tool will provide the same results. It is advised to perform the relearn procedure away from other vehicles to prevent picking up a stray sensor signal. If one or more of the TPM sensors are missing or damaged and have been replaced, then the relearn procedure must be performed. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 10220 Tire Pressure Sensor: Testing and Inspection Tire Pressure Indicator Sensor Learn Special Tools J-46079 Tire Pressure Monitor Diagnostic Tool Relearn Mode Description The tire pressure monitor (TPM) system uses the instrument panel cluster (IPC), body control module (BCM), 4 radio frequency transmitting pressure sensors, and the serial data circuit to perform the TPM Relearn mode functions. The sensor Relearn procedure must be performed after every tire rotation, BCM replacement, or sensor replacement. Once the relearn mode has been enabled, each of the sensors unique identification codes can be learned into the BCM memory. When a sensor ID has been learned, the BCM sends a serial data message to the BCM to sound a horn chirp. This verifies the sensor has transmitted its ID and the BCM has received and learned it. The BCM must learn the sensor IDs in the proper sequence to determine correct sensor location. The first learned ID is assigned to the left front location, the second to right front, the third to right rear and the fourth to left rear. The turn signals will individually illuminate indicating which location is to be learned in the proper sequence. Sensor Functions Using J-46079 or EL-46079 Each sensor has an internal low frequency coil. When the J-46079 is used in activate mode, it produces a low frequency transmission that activates the sensor. The sensor responds to a low frequency activation by transmitting in learn mode. When the BCM receives a learn mode transmission while in TPM learn mode, it will assign that sensors ID to the location on the vehicle relative to the order in which it was learned. Sensor Functions Using Pressure Increase/Decrease Method Each sensor takes a pressure measurement sample once every 30 seconds while in stationary mode. If the tire pressure increases, or decreases by more than 8.3 kPa (1.2 psi) from the last pressure measurement, another measurement will occur immediately to verify the change in pressure. If a pressure change has indeed occurred, the sensor transmits in Learn mode. When the BCM receives a Learn mode transmission while in TPM learn mode, it will assign that sensor's ID to the location on the vehicle relative to the order in which it was learned. Relearn Mode Cancellation The Relearn mode will cancel if the ignition is cycled to OFF or if more than 2 minutes has elapsed for any sensor that has not been learned. If the relearn mode is cancelled before the first sensor is learned, the original sensor IDs will be maintained. If the relearn mode is canceled after the first sensor is learned, the following will occur: * All stored sensor IDs will be invalidated in the BCM memory. * If equipped, the DIC will display dashes instead of tire pressures. * DTC C0775 will be set. These conditions will now require the relearn procedure to be repeated for the system to function properly. TPM Relearn Procedure Note: If using the scan tool to enable the relearn mode, the J-46079 must be used to activate the sensors. When this preferred method is used, any stray sensor signals will not affect the relearn procedure. In the event a particular sensor's information is displayed on the special tool upon activation but the horn does not chirp, it may be necessary to rotate the wheel valve stem to a different position due to the sensor signal is being blocked by another component. If using the DIC buttons to enable the relearn mode, the J-46079 or Pressure Increase/Decrease Method may be used. Before proceeding with this method, ensure that no other learn procedure is being performed simultaneously or that tire pressures are not being adjusted on another TPM equipped vehicle within close proximity. Stray signals from other TPM equipped vehicles just driving by can be inadvertently learned. If any random horn chirps are heard from the vehicle while performing the learn procedure, most likely a stray sensor has been learned and the procedure will need to be cancelled and repeated. Under these circumstances, performing the TPM Relearn Procedure away from other vehicles would be highly recommended. In the event a particular sensor activation does not cause the horn to chirp, it may be necessary to rotate the wheel valve stem to a different position due to the sensor signal is being blocked by another component. Preferred Scan Tool Relearn Enable Method 1. Apply park brake (manual transmission only). 2. Ignition ON, using a scan tool, initiate the Tire Pressure Sensors Learn mode. A double horn chirp will sound indicating the Relearn mode has been enabled. The left front turn signal will also be illuminated. 3. Starting with the left front tire, active the sensor by holding the antenna of the J-46079 aimed upward against the tire sidewall close to the wheel rim at the valve stem location. Press and release the Activate button and wait for a horn chirp. Once the horn chirp has sounded, the sensor information is learned and the turn signal in the next location to be learned will illuminate. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 10221 4. After the horn chirp has sounded and the right front turn signal is illuminated, repeat step 2 for the remaining 3 sensors in the following order: 1. Right front 2. Right rear 3. Left rear 5. When the left rear sensor has been learned and a double horn chirp has sounded, the learn process is complete and the BCM exits the Relearn mode. 6. Ignition OFF, adjust all tires to the recommended pressures. Refer to Vehicle Certification, Tire Placard, Anti-Theft, and Service Parts ID Label ( See: Application and ID/Vehicle Certification, Tire Placard, Anti-Theft and Service Parts ID Label). Alternate DIC Relearn Enable Method 1. Apply park brake (manual transmission only). 2. Ignition ON, activate the Relearn mode with the driver information center (DIC) display controls. A double horn chirp sounds indicating the Relearn mode has been enabled and the left front turn signal will also be illuminated. 3. Starting with the left front tire, activate the tire pressure sensor by using one of the following methods: * Hold the antenna of the J-46079 aimed upward against the tire sidewall close to the wheel rim at the valve stem location. Press and release the activate button and wait for a horn chirp. Once the horn chirp has sounded, the sensor information is learned and the turn signal in the next location to be learned will illuminate. Warning Over inflating tires may cause personal injury or damage to the tires and wheels. When increasing tire pressure do not exceed the maximum inflation pressure as noted on the tire sidewall. * Increase/decrease the tire pressure for 8-10 seconds then wait for a horn chirp. The horn chirp may occur before or up to 30 seconds after the 8-10 second pressure increase/decrease time period has been reached. Once the horn chirp has sounded, the sensor information is learned and the turn signal in the next location to be learned will illuminate. 4. After the horn chirp has sounded and the right front turn signal is illuminated, repeat step 2 for the remaining 3 sensors in the following order: 1. Right front 2. Right rear 3. Left rear 5. When the left rear sensor has been learned and a double horn chirp has sounded, the learn process is complete and the BCM exits the Relearn mode. 6. Ignition OFF, adjust all tires to the recommended pressures. Refer to Vehicle Certification, Tire Placard, Anti-Theft, and Service Parts ID Label ( See: Application and ID/Vehicle Certification, Tire Placard, Anti-Theft and Service Parts ID Label). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 10222 Tire Pressure Sensor: Service and Repair Tire Pressure Indicator Sensor Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Raise the vehicle on a suitable support. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle (See: Vehicle Lifting/Service and Repair). 2. Remove the tire/wheel assembly from the vehicle. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation (See: Service and Repair). Note: Before the tire is removed from the wheel, note the following items to avoid tire pressure sensor damage upon tire dismounting. * Place the sensor's cap and valve on a dry clean surface after removal. The cap is aluminum and the valve is nickel plated to prevent corrosion and are not to be substituted with a cap or valve made of any other material. * When separating the tire bead from the wheel, position the bead breaking fixture 90 degrees from the valve stem. * Position the mounting/dismounting head so the tire iron, or pry bar can be inserted slightly clockwise of the sensor body when prying the tire bead up and over the mounting/dismounting head. * Using the tire machine, rotate the tire/wheel assembly clockwise when transferring the tire bead to the out side of the wheel rim. * Repeat items for inner bead. 3. Remove the tire from the wheel. Refer to Tire Dismounting and Mounting (See: Tires/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement). Note: If any tire sealant is noted upon tire dismounting, remove all residual liquid sealant from the inside of the tire and wheel surfaces. 4. Remove the tire pressure sensor nut. 5. Remove the tire pressure sensor. Installation Procedure 1. Clean any dirt or debris from the grommet sealing area. 2. Insert the sensor in the wheel hole with the air passage facing away from the wheel. Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener Caution). 3. Install the sensor nut and position the sensor body parallel to the inside wheel surface while torquing. Tighten the sensor nut to 7 Nm (62 lb in). Note: Before reinstalling the tire on the wheel, note the following items to avoid tire pressure sensor damage upon tire mounting: Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 10223 * Position the mounting/dismounting head 180 degrees from the valve stem. * Position the bead transition area 45 degrees counterclockwise of the valve stem. * Using the tire machine, rotate the tire/wheel assembly clockwise when transferring the tire bead to the inside of the wheel rim. * Repeat items for outer bead. 4. Install the tire on the wheel. Refer to Tire Dismounting and Mounting (See: Tires/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement). Note: A service replacement tire pressure sensor is shipped in OFF mode. In this mode the sensor's unique identification code cannot be learned into the liftgate module (LGM) memory. The sensor must be taken out of OFF mode by spinning the tire/wheel assembly above 32 km/h (20 mph) in order to close the sensor's internal roll switch for at least 10 seconds. 5. Install the tire/wheel assembly on the vehicle. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation (See: Service and Repair). 6. Lower the vehicle. 7. Learn the tire pressure sensors. Refer to Tire Pressure Indicator Sensor Learn (See: Testing and Inspection). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Low Tire Pressure Indicator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM System Message/Service Tips Low Tire Pressure Indicator: Technical Service Bulletins Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM System Message/Service Tips # 09-03-16-002A: Dealership Service Consultant Procedure as Vehicle Comes into Service Drive for Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM) System Message, Light and Customer Information - (Apr 27, 2010) Subject: Dealership Service Consultant Procedure as Vehicle Comes into Service Drive for Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM) System Message, Light and Customer Information Models: 2006-2011 Cars and Light Duty Trucks (Including Saturn and Saab) 2006-2010 HUMMER H2, H3 ATTENTION The information found in this bulletin is to be used as a dealership service consultant procedures for customers coming into the service lane with an illuminated "low tire light" or comments on a check tire pressure/low tire pressure/add air to tire or service tire monitor system message. Maintaining proper tire pressures is an Owner's Maintenance item and is not covered under warranty. This bulletin is being revised to add model years and update additional bulletin reference information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 09-03-16-002 (Section 03 -- Suspension). Customer Concerns and Confusion with the Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPM) System The following procedure should be used by dealership service consultants when a customer comes into the service drive with a "low tire light" on or comments on a check tire pressure/low tire pressure/add air to tire or service tire monitor system message. The service consultant should perform the following steps: Procedure Turn the key to ON, without starting the engine. ^ If the low tire light comes on and stays on solid with a check tire pressure/low tire pressure/add air to tire message (on vehicles equipped with DIC), advise the customer: - The system is working properly. - Properly adjusting all tire air pressures to the recommended levels and driving the vehicle will turn the light off (refer to the Tire and Loading Information label on the driver side door). - More detailed information can be found in the Owner Manual. - Service is not covered under warranty - this maintenance is the responsibility of the owner. - Give the customer a copy of the "GM Customer TPMS Information". ^ If the Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM) light blinks for one minute then stays on solid with a service tire monitor system message (on vehicles equipped with DIC): - A TPM system problem exists. The vehicle should be written up accordingly and sent to your service department for further DTC diagnosis and service. - If dashes (--) are displayed in only one or two of the tire pressure readouts, it is likely caused by a previous TPM system relearn that was performed incorrectly due to interference from another vehicle's TPM system during the relearn process (refer to the Important statement later in this bulletin regarding TPM relearn with a Tech 2(R)). - If dashes (--) are displayed in all four of the tire pressure readouts, there is a system problem. Follow the appropriate SI service procedures. ^ If a customer indicates the low tire light comes on for a few minutes when the vehicle is started, then goes off after driving a while, advise the customer: - The system is working properly. - Most likely, air pressure in one or more of the tires is low enough to turn the light on when tires are cold. After driving for a while, tires will heat Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Low Tire Pressure Indicator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM System Message/Service Tips > Page 10229 up, allowing tire air pressure to increase above the threshold causing the light to go off. Properly adjusting all tire air pressures to the recommended levels will correct this (Refer to the Tire and Loading Information Label on the driver side door). - More detailed information can be found in the Owner Manual. - Service is not covered under warranty - this maintenance is the responsibility of the owner. - Give the customer a copy of the "GM Customer TPMS Information". For more detailed information, refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 07-03-16-004C and TPMS Training Course 13044.12T2. Tire Pressure Light At key on, without starting the vehicle: Steady Solid Glowing TPM Indicator If the TPM indicator appears as a steady glowing yellow lamp (as above), the system is functioning properly and you should add air to the tires to correct this condition. Blinking TPM Indicator If the TPM indicator appears as a BLINKING yellow lamp for one minute and then stays on solid, diagnostic service is needed. The Effect of Outside Temperature on Tire Pressures Important: As a rule of thumb, tire pressure will change about 7kPa (1 psi) for every 6°C (10°F) decrease in temperature - Tire pressure will drop when it gets colder outside, and rise when it gets warmer. Under certain situations such as extreme outside temperature changes, the system may bring on a solid light with a check tire pressure message. This should be considered normal and the system is working properly. The light will turn off upon adding the proper amount of air to the tires (refer to the Tire & Loading Information label in the driver's door opening). When properly adjusting tire air pressure, the following steps are important to help optimize the system and prolong bringing a tire pressure light on: ^ Use an accurate, high quality tire pressure gauge. ^ Never set the tire pressure below the specified placard value regardless of tire temperature or ambient temperature. ^ Tire pressure should be set to the specified placard pressure at the lowest seasonal temperature the vehicle will encounter during operation. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Low Tire Pressure Indicator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM System Message/Service Tips > Page 10230 ^ When adding proper tire air pressure, it is important to remember fluctuations in outside air temperatures and tire temperatures effect tire air pressures. ^ After you have added the proper tire pressure, if the vehicle has a DIC (after the system has updated), check to see if DIC displays are the same readings as the tire pressure gauge used (adjust as necessary). ^ Only perform a TPM sensor re-learn after a tire rotation or system part replacements and use the Tech 2(R) to initiate the relearn whenever possible to avoid invalid sensor I.D. learns. Important: Always take outside temperature and tire temperature into consideration to properly set tire pressures. Foe example, on colder days (20°F/-7°C), if setting tire pressure when the vehicle has been indoors (60°F/16°C) or the tires are warm from being driven, it will be necessary to compensate for the low outside temperature by adding 21-27 kPa (3-4 psi) more then the placecard pressure. At some later time, when the vehicle has been parked outside for a while, the tires will cool off and the pressures will drop back into the placecard range. Important: Recently, nitrogen gas (for use in inflating tires) has become available to the general customer through some retailers. The use of nitrogen gas to inflate tires is a technology used in automobile racing. Tires inflated with nitrogen gas may exhibit less of a pressure change in response to outside temperature changes. Nitrogen gas inflation is compatible with GM TPM sensors. For additional information, refer to Corporate Service Bulletin 05-03-10-020C. Important: All Models (Except the Pontiac Vibe): Do not perform a TPM relearn at PDI, the system has already been set at the Assembly Plant. Do not perform a TPM relearn after adding air to the tires. The low tire light is similar to the low fuel indicator and adding something (fuel, air) to the vehicle makes that light turn back off again. Note that because of system behavior, some vehicles must be driven a short distance before the sensors recognize the increase in pressure and turns the light off again. Pontiac Vibe Only: Do not use the TPMS reset button to turn off the light. The system will update and light will turn off when all tire pressures have been adjusted followed by short distance drive. Important: All models (except the Pontiac Vibe): Each tire monitor sensor is learned to a specific vehicle corner. When performing a TPM relearn (only after a tire rotation or replacement of a TPM sensor or Module), always use the Tech2(R) to initiate the J 46079 relearned process. Tech 2(R) - initiated relearns lock out other vehicle TPM signals that may be broadcasting in the area. Only signals initiated by the J 46079 tool will be accepted. This method avoids storing false TPM I.D.s and will prevent customers from returning with dashes (--) displayed in tire pressure readouts and/or a flashing tire pressure monitor (TPM) light. Checking the four TPM I.D.s with the Tech 2(R) prior to and following relearn to verify they are the same can prevent invalid I.D. learns. Pontiac Vibe Only: Tire Monitor Sensors are not learned to a specific vehicle corner. Do not perform a TPM Reset after tire rotation. The TPMS Reset button must only be used during pre-delivery inspection by the dealer to initialize the system (after all tire pressures have been adjusted properly) or when a Tire Pressure Monitor System component is replaced. The J 46079 tool does not work on Vibe TPM sensors. A TPMS relearn on Vibe must be preformed with a Tech 2(R) to set the TPMS Module in learn mode. The TPMS sensor IDs are entered through the Tech 2(R). Refer to SI for further Vibe TPMS information. Labor Operation and Repair Order/Warranty System Claim Required Documentation Important: The ONLY time labor operation E0726 or E0722 should be used is to diagnose for a system issue. That should ONLY occur if, at key ON, without starting the engine, the Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM) blinks for one minute and then stays on solid with a Service Tire Monitor System message (on vehicles equipped with a DIC) If that occurs, a TPM system problem exists and the system will have set a DTC. If one of these operastions is used, the following Repair Order and Warranty System documentation are required: ^ Document the customer complaint on the Repair Order. ^ Document the TPMS DTC that has set on the Repair Order. ^ Enter the TPMS DTC in the Warranty System (WINS) in the Failure Code/DTC field on the claim submission (refer to the Claims Processing Manual, Section IV, Warranty claim Data, Page 6, Item G). If the above information is not documented on the Repair Order and Warranty System, the claim may be rejected. If the Warranty Parts Center (WPC) generates a request, this repair order documentation must be sent back. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Low Tire Pressure Indicator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM System Message/Service Tips > Page 10231 Customer TPMS Information Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Low Tire Pressure Indicator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM System Message/Service Tips > Page 10232 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Low Tire Pressure Indicator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM System Message/Service Tips > Page 10233 Frequently Asked Questions Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > TPMS System - Service And Re-Learning Sensor IDs Tire Pressure Module: Technical Service Bulletins TPMS System - Service And Re-Learning Sensor IDs INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 10-03-16-001 Date: July 19, 2010 Subject: TPMS System Service and Re-Learning Sensor IDs Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2 2009 and Prior HUMMER H3 2010 and Prior Saturn Models 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X with Wheel-Mounted Tire Pressure Sensors In the event that the spare tire, which is normally not equipped with a tire pressure monitor (TPM) sensor, is installed in place of one of the road tires and the vehicle is driven above 40 km/h (25 mph) for 20 minutes or more, the TPM indicator icon on the instrument panel cluster (IPC) will flash for approximately one minute and then remain on steady each time the ignition is turned ON, indicating a diagnostic trouble code (DTC) has been set. The driver information center (DIC), if equipped, will also display a SERVICE TIRE MONITOR type message. When the road tire is repaired and reinstalled in the original location, the TPM indicator icon illumination and DIC message may remain displayed until the DTC is cleared. To ensure that the TPM indicator and the DIC message are cleared after service, it is necessary to clear any TPM DTCs using a scan tool. If a scan tool is unavailable, performing the TPM relearn procedure using a TPM diagnostic tool will provide the same results. It is advised to perform the relearn procedure away from other vehicles to prevent picking up a stray sensor signal. If one or more of the TPM sensors are missing or damaged and have been replaced, then the relearn procedure must be performed. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > TPMS System - Service And Re-Learning Sensor IDs Tire Pressure Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins TPMS System - Service And Re-Learning Sensor IDs INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 10-03-16-001 Date: July 19, 2010 Subject: TPMS System Service and Re-Learning Sensor IDs Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2 2009 and Prior HUMMER H3 2010 and Prior Saturn Models 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X with Wheel-Mounted Tire Pressure Sensors In the event that the spare tire, which is normally not equipped with a tire pressure monitor (TPM) sensor, is installed in place of one of the road tires and the vehicle is driven above 40 km/h (25 mph) for 20 minutes or more, the TPM indicator icon on the instrument panel cluster (IPC) will flash for approximately one minute and then remain on steady each time the ignition is turned ON, indicating a diagnostic trouble code (DTC) has been set. The driver information center (DIC), if equipped, will also display a SERVICE TIRE MONITOR type message. When the road tire is repaired and reinstalled in the original location, the TPM indicator icon illumination and DIC message may remain displayed until the DTC is cleared. To ensure that the TPM indicator and the DIC message are cleared after service, it is necessary to clear any TPM DTCs using a scan tool. If a scan tool is unavailable, performing the TPM relearn procedure using a TPM diagnostic tool will provide the same results. It is advised to perform the relearn procedure away from other vehicles to prevent picking up a stray sensor signal. If one or more of the TPM sensors are missing or damaged and have been replaced, then the relearn procedure must be performed. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 10242 Tire Pressure Sensor: Testing and Inspection Tire Pressure Indicator Sensor Learn Special Tools J-46079 Tire Pressure Monitor Diagnostic Tool Relearn Mode Description The tire pressure monitor (TPM) system uses the instrument panel cluster (IPC), body control module (BCM), 4 radio frequency transmitting pressure sensors, and the serial data circuit to perform the TPM Relearn mode functions. The sensor Relearn procedure must be performed after every tire rotation, BCM replacement, or sensor replacement. Once the relearn mode has been enabled, each of the sensors unique identification codes can be learned into the BCM memory. When a sensor ID has been learned, the BCM sends a serial data message to the BCM to sound a horn chirp. This verifies the sensor has transmitted its ID and the BCM has received and learned it. The BCM must learn the sensor IDs in the proper sequence to determine correct sensor location. The first learned ID is assigned to the left front location, the second to right front, the third to right rear and the fourth to left rear. The turn signals will individually illuminate indicating which location is to be learned in the proper sequence. Sensor Functions Using J-46079 or EL-46079 Each sensor has an internal low frequency coil. When the J-46079 is used in activate mode, it produces a low frequency transmission that activates the sensor. The sensor responds to a low frequency activation by transmitting in learn mode. When the BCM receives a learn mode transmission while in TPM learn mode, it will assign that sensors ID to the location on the vehicle relative to the order in which it was learned. Sensor Functions Using Pressure Increase/Decrease Method Each sensor takes a pressure measurement sample once every 30 seconds while in stationary mode. If the tire pressure increases, or decreases by more than 8.3 kPa (1.2 psi) from the last pressure measurement, another measurement will occur immediately to verify the change in pressure. If a pressure change has indeed occurred, the sensor transmits in Learn mode. When the BCM receives a Learn mode transmission while in TPM learn mode, it will assign that sensor's ID to the location on the vehicle relative to the order in which it was learned. Relearn Mode Cancellation The Relearn mode will cancel if the ignition is cycled to OFF or if more than 2 minutes has elapsed for any sensor that has not been learned. If the relearn mode is cancelled before the first sensor is learned, the original sensor IDs will be maintained. If the relearn mode is canceled after the first sensor is learned, the following will occur: * All stored sensor IDs will be invalidated in the BCM memory. * If equipped, the DIC will display dashes instead of tire pressures. * DTC C0775 will be set. These conditions will now require the relearn procedure to be repeated for the system to function properly. TPM Relearn Procedure Note: If using the scan tool to enable the relearn mode, the J-46079 must be used to activate the sensors. When this preferred method is used, any stray sensor signals will not affect the relearn procedure. In the event a particular sensor's information is displayed on the special tool upon activation but the horn does not chirp, it may be necessary to rotate the wheel valve stem to a different position due to the sensor signal is being blocked by another component. If using the DIC buttons to enable the relearn mode, the J-46079 or Pressure Increase/Decrease Method may be used. Before proceeding with this method, ensure that no other learn procedure is being performed simultaneously or that tire pressures are not being adjusted on another TPM equipped vehicle within close proximity. Stray signals from other TPM equipped vehicles just driving by can be inadvertently learned. If any random horn chirps are heard from the vehicle while performing the learn procedure, most likely a stray sensor has been learned and the procedure will need to be cancelled and repeated. Under these circumstances, performing the TPM Relearn Procedure away from other vehicles would be highly recommended. In the event a particular sensor activation does not cause the horn to chirp, it may be necessary to rotate the wheel valve stem to a different position due to the sensor signal is being blocked by another component. Preferred Scan Tool Relearn Enable Method 1. Apply park brake (manual transmission only). 2. Ignition ON, using a scan tool, initiate the Tire Pressure Sensors Learn mode. A double horn chirp will sound indicating the Relearn mode has been enabled. The left front turn signal will also be illuminated. 3. Starting with the left front tire, active the sensor by holding the antenna of the J-46079 aimed upward against the tire sidewall close to the wheel rim at the valve stem location. Press and release the Activate button and wait for a horn chirp. Once the horn chirp has sounded, the sensor information is learned and the turn signal in the next location to be learned will illuminate. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 10243 4. After the horn chirp has sounded and the right front turn signal is illuminated, repeat step 2 for the remaining 3 sensors in the following order: 1. Right front 2. Right rear 3. Left rear 5. When the left rear sensor has been learned and a double horn chirp has sounded, the learn process is complete and the BCM exits the Relearn mode. 6. Ignition OFF, adjust all tires to the recommended pressures. Refer to Vehicle Certification, Tire Placard, Anti-Theft, and Service Parts ID Label ( See: Application and ID/Vehicle Certification, Tire Placard, Anti-Theft and Service Parts ID Label). Alternate DIC Relearn Enable Method 1. Apply park brake (manual transmission only). 2. Ignition ON, activate the Relearn mode with the driver information center (DIC) display controls. A double horn chirp sounds indicating the Relearn mode has been enabled and the left front turn signal will also be illuminated. 3. Starting with the left front tire, activate the tire pressure sensor by using one of the following methods: * Hold the antenna of the J-46079 aimed upward against the tire sidewall close to the wheel rim at the valve stem location. Press and release the activate button and wait for a horn chirp. Once the horn chirp has sounded, the sensor information is learned and the turn signal in the next location to be learned will illuminate. Warning Over inflating tires may cause personal injury or damage to the tires and wheels. When increasing tire pressure do not exceed the maximum inflation pressure as noted on the tire sidewall. * Increase/decrease the tire pressure for 8-10 seconds then wait for a horn chirp. The horn chirp may occur before or up to 30 seconds after the 8-10 second pressure increase/decrease time period has been reached. Once the horn chirp has sounded, the sensor information is learned and the turn signal in the next location to be learned will illuminate. 4. After the horn chirp has sounded and the right front turn signal is illuminated, repeat step 2 for the remaining 3 sensors in the following order: 1. Right front 2. Right rear 3. Left rear 5. When the left rear sensor has been learned and a double horn chirp has sounded, the learn process is complete and the BCM exits the Relearn mode. 6. Ignition OFF, adjust all tires to the recommended pressures. Refer to Vehicle Certification, Tire Placard, Anti-Theft, and Service Parts ID Label ( See: Application and ID/Vehicle Certification, Tire Placard, Anti-Theft and Service Parts ID Label). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 10244 Tire Pressure Sensor: Service and Repair Tire Pressure Indicator Sensor Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Raise the vehicle on a suitable support. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle (See: Vehicle Lifting/Service and Repair). 2. Remove the tire/wheel assembly from the vehicle. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation (See: Service and Repair). Note: Before the tire is removed from the wheel, note the following items to avoid tire pressure sensor damage upon tire dismounting. * Place the sensor's cap and valve on a dry clean surface after removal. The cap is aluminum and the valve is nickel plated to prevent corrosion and are not to be substituted with a cap or valve made of any other material. * When separating the tire bead from the wheel, position the bead breaking fixture 90 degrees from the valve stem. * Position the mounting/dismounting head so the tire iron, or pry bar can be inserted slightly clockwise of the sensor body when prying the tire bead up and over the mounting/dismounting head. * Using the tire machine, rotate the tire/wheel assembly clockwise when transferring the tire bead to the out side of the wheel rim. * Repeat items for inner bead. 3. Remove the tire from the wheel. Refer to Tire Dismounting and Mounting (See: Tires/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement). Note: If any tire sealant is noted upon tire dismounting, remove all residual liquid sealant from the inside of the tire and wheel surfaces. 4. Remove the tire pressure sensor nut. 5. Remove the tire pressure sensor. Installation Procedure 1. Clean any dirt or debris from the grommet sealing area. 2. Insert the sensor in the wheel hole with the air passage facing away from the wheel. Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener Caution). 3. Install the sensor nut and position the sensor body parallel to the inside wheel surface while torquing. Tighten the sensor nut to 7 Nm (62 lb in). Note: Before reinstalling the tire on the wheel, note the following items to avoid tire pressure sensor damage upon tire mounting: Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 10245 * Position the mounting/dismounting head 180 degrees from the valve stem. * Position the bead transition area 45 degrees counterclockwise of the valve stem. * Using the tire machine, rotate the tire/wheel assembly clockwise when transferring the tire bead to the inside of the wheel rim. * Repeat items for outer bead. 4. Install the tire on the wheel. Refer to Tire Dismounting and Mounting (See: Tires/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement). Note: A service replacement tire pressure sensor is shipped in OFF mode. In this mode the sensor's unique identification code cannot be learned into the liftgate module (LGM) memory. The sensor must be taken out of OFF mode by spinning the tire/wheel assembly above 32 km/h (20 mph) in order to close the sensor's internal roll switch for at least 10 seconds. 5. Install the tire/wheel assembly on the vehicle. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation (See: Service and Repair). 6. Lower the vehicle. 7. Learn the tire pressure sensors. Refer to Tire Pressure Indicator Sensor Learn (See: Testing and Inspection). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM System Message/Service Tips Tires: Technical Service Bulletins Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM System Message/Service Tips # 09-03-16-002A: Dealership Service Consultant Procedure as Vehicle Comes into Service Drive for Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM) System Message, Light and Customer Information - (Apr 27, 2010) Subject: Dealership Service Consultant Procedure as Vehicle Comes into Service Drive for Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM) System Message, Light and Customer Information Models: 2006-2011 Cars and Light Duty Trucks (Including Saturn and Saab) 2006-2010 HUMMER H2, H3 ATTENTION The information found in this bulletin is to be used as a dealership service consultant procedures for customers coming into the service lane with an illuminated "low tire light" or comments on a check tire pressure/low tire pressure/add air to tire or service tire monitor system message. Maintaining proper tire pressures is an Owner's Maintenance item and is not covered under warranty. This bulletin is being revised to add model years and update additional bulletin reference information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 09-03-16-002 (Section 03 -- Suspension). Customer Concerns and Confusion with the Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPM) System The following procedure should be used by dealership service consultants when a customer comes into the service drive with a "low tire light" on or comments on a check tire pressure/low tire pressure/add air to tire or service tire monitor system message. The service consultant should perform the following steps: Procedure Turn the key to ON, without starting the engine. ^ If the low tire light comes on and stays on solid with a check tire pressure/low tire pressure/add air to tire message (on vehicles equipped with DIC), advise the customer: - The system is working properly. - Properly adjusting all tire air pressures to the recommended levels and driving the vehicle will turn the light off (refer to the Tire and Loading Information label on the driver side door). - More detailed information can be found in the Owner Manual. - Service is not covered under warranty - this maintenance is the responsibility of the owner. - Give the customer a copy of the "GM Customer TPMS Information". ^ If the Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM) light blinks for one minute then stays on solid with a service tire monitor system message (on vehicles equipped with DIC): - A TPM system problem exists. The vehicle should be written up accordingly and sent to your service department for further DTC diagnosis and service. - If dashes (--) are displayed in only one or two of the tire pressure readouts, it is likely caused by a previous TPM system relearn that was performed incorrectly due to interference from another vehicle's TPM system during the relearn process (refer to the Important statement later in this bulletin regarding TPM relearn with a Tech 2(R)). - If dashes (--) are displayed in all four of the tire pressure readouts, there is a system problem. Follow the appropriate SI service procedures. ^ If a customer indicates the low tire light comes on for a few minutes when the vehicle is started, then goes off after driving a while, advise the customer: - The system is working properly. - Most likely, air pressure in one or more of the tires is low enough to turn the light on when tires are cold. After driving for a while, tires will heat Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM System Message/Service Tips > Page 10250 up, allowing tire air pressure to increase above the threshold causing the light to go off. Properly adjusting all tire air pressures to the recommended levels will correct this (Refer to the Tire and Loading Information Label on the driver side door). - More detailed information can be found in the Owner Manual. - Service is not covered under warranty - this maintenance is the responsibility of the owner. - Give the customer a copy of the "GM Customer TPMS Information". For more detailed information, refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 07-03-16-004C and TPMS Training Course 13044.12T2. Tire Pressure Light At key on, without starting the vehicle: Steady Solid Glowing TPM Indicator If the TPM indicator appears as a steady glowing yellow lamp (as above), the system is functioning properly and you should add air to the tires to correct this condition. Blinking TPM Indicator If the TPM indicator appears as a BLINKING yellow lamp for one minute and then stays on solid, diagnostic service is needed. The Effect of Outside Temperature on Tire Pressures Important: As a rule of thumb, tire pressure will change about 7kPa (1 psi) for every 6°C (10°F) decrease in temperature - Tire pressure will drop when it gets colder outside, and rise when it gets warmer. Under certain situations such as extreme outside temperature changes, the system may bring on a solid light with a check tire pressure message. This should be considered normal and the system is working properly. The light will turn off upon adding the proper amount of air to the tires (refer to the Tire & Loading Information label in the driver's door opening). When properly adjusting tire air pressure, the following steps are important to help optimize the system and prolong bringing a tire pressure light on: ^ Use an accurate, high quality tire pressure gauge. ^ Never set the tire pressure below the specified placard value regardless of tire temperature or ambient temperature. ^ Tire pressure should be set to the specified placard pressure at the lowest seasonal temperature the vehicle will encounter during operation. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM System Message/Service Tips > Page 10251 ^ When adding proper tire air pressure, it is important to remember fluctuations in outside air temperatures and tire temperatures effect tire air pressures. ^ After you have added the proper tire pressure, if the vehicle has a DIC (after the system has updated), check to see if DIC displays are the same readings as the tire pressure gauge used (adjust as necessary). ^ Only perform a TPM sensor re-learn after a tire rotation or system part replacements and use the Tech 2(R) to initiate the relearn whenever possible to avoid invalid sensor I.D. learns. Important: Always take outside temperature and tire temperature into consideration to properly set tire pressures. Foe example, on colder days (20°F/-7°C), if setting tire pressure when the vehicle has been indoors (60°F/16°C) or the tires are warm from being driven, it will be necessary to compensate for the low outside temperature by adding 21-27 kPa (3-4 psi) more then the placecard pressure. At some later time, when the vehicle has been parked outside for a while, the tires will cool off and the pressures will drop back into the placecard range. Important: Recently, nitrogen gas (for use in inflating tires) has become available to the general customer through some retailers. The use of nitrogen gas to inflate tires is a technology used in automobile racing. Tires inflated with nitrogen gas may exhibit less of a pressure change in response to outside temperature changes. Nitrogen gas inflation is compatible with GM TPM sensors. For additional information, refer to Corporate Service Bulletin 05-03-10-020C. Important: All Models (Except the Pontiac Vibe): Do not perform a TPM relearn at PDI, the system has already been set at the Assembly Plant. Do not perform a TPM relearn after adding air to the tires. The low tire light is similar to the low fuel indicator and adding something (fuel, air) to the vehicle makes that light turn back off again. Note that because of system behavior, some vehicles must be driven a short distance before the sensors recognize the increase in pressure and turns the light off again. Pontiac Vibe Only: Do not use the TPMS reset button to turn off the light. The system will update and light will turn off when all tire pressures have been adjusted followed by short distance drive. Important: All models (except the Pontiac Vibe): Each tire monitor sensor is learned to a specific vehicle corner. When performing a TPM relearn (only after a tire rotation or replacement of a TPM sensor or Module), always use the Tech2(R) to initiate the J 46079 relearned process. Tech 2(R) - initiated relearns lock out other vehicle TPM signals that may be broadcasting in the area. Only signals initiated by the J 46079 tool will be accepted. This method avoids storing false TPM I.D.s and will prevent customers from returning with dashes (--) displayed in tire pressure readouts and/or a flashing tire pressure monitor (TPM) light. Checking the four TPM I.D.s with the Tech 2(R) prior to and following relearn to verify they are the same can prevent invalid I.D. learns. Pontiac Vibe Only: Tire Monitor Sensors are not learned to a specific vehicle corner. Do not perform a TPM Reset after tire rotation. The TPMS Reset button must only be used during pre-delivery inspection by the dealer to initialize the system (after all tire pressures have been adjusted properly) or when a Tire Pressure Monitor System component is replaced. The J 46079 tool does not work on Vibe TPM sensors. A TPMS relearn on Vibe must be preformed with a Tech 2(R) to set the TPMS Module in learn mode. The TPMS sensor IDs are entered through the Tech 2(R). Refer to SI for further Vibe TPMS information. Labor Operation and Repair Order/Warranty System Claim Required Documentation Important: The ONLY time labor operation E0726 or E0722 should be used is to diagnose for a system issue. That should ONLY occur if, at key ON, without starting the engine, the Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM) blinks for one minute and then stays on solid with a Service Tire Monitor System message (on vehicles equipped with a DIC) If that occurs, a TPM system problem exists and the system will have set a DTC. If one of these operastions is used, the following Repair Order and Warranty System documentation are required: ^ Document the customer complaint on the Repair Order. ^ Document the TPMS DTC that has set on the Repair Order. ^ Enter the TPMS DTC in the Warranty System (WINS) in the Failure Code/DTC field on the claim submission (refer to the Claims Processing Manual, Section IV, Warranty claim Data, Page 6, Item G). If the above information is not documented on the Repair Order and Warranty System, the claim may be rejected. If the Warranty Parts Center (WPC) generates a request, this repair order documentation must be sent back. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM System Message/Service Tips > Page 10252 Customer TPMS Information Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM System Message/Service Tips > Page 10253 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM System Message/Service Tips > Page 10254 Frequently Asked Questions Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM System Message/Service Tips > Page 10255 Tires: Technical Service Bulletins TPMS System - Service And Re-Learning Sensor IDs INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 10-03-16-001 Date: July 19, 2010 Subject: TPMS System Service and Re-Learning Sensor IDs Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2 2009 and Prior HUMMER H3 2010 and Prior Saturn Models 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X with Wheel-Mounted Tire Pressure Sensors In the event that the spare tire, which is normally not equipped with a tire pressure monitor (TPM) sensor, is installed in place of one of the road tires and the vehicle is driven above 40 km/h (25 mph) for 20 minutes or more, the TPM indicator icon on the instrument panel cluster (IPC) will flash for approximately one minute and then remain on steady each time the ignition is turned ON, indicating a diagnostic trouble code (DTC) has been set. The driver information center (DIC), if equipped, will also display a SERVICE TIRE MONITOR type message. When the road tire is repaired and reinstalled in the original location, the TPM indicator icon illumination and DIC message may remain displayed until the DTC is cleared. To ensure that the TPM indicator and the DIC message are cleared after service, it is necessary to clear any TPM DTCs using a scan tool. If a scan tool is unavailable, performing the TPM relearn procedure using a TPM diagnostic tool will provide the same results. It is advised to perform the relearn procedure away from other vehicles to prevent picking up a stray sensor signal. If one or more of the TPM sensors are missing or damaged and have been replaced, then the relearn procedure must be performed. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM System Message/Service Tips > Page 10256 Tires: Technical Service Bulletins Wheels/Tires - Use of Nitrogen Gas in Tires INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 05-03-10-020C Date: April 27, 2010 Subject: Use of Nitrogen Gas in Tires Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (including Saturn) 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 05-03-10-020B (Section 03 - Suspension). GM's Position on the Use of Nitrogen Gas in Tires General Motors does not oppose the use of purified nitrogen as an inflation gas for tires. We expect the theoretical benefits to be reduced in practical use due to the lack of an existing infrastructure to continuously facilitate inflating tires with nearly pure nitrogen. Even occasional inflation with compressed atmospheric air will negate many of the theoretical benefits. Given those theoretical benefits, practical limitations, and the robust design of GM original equipment TPC tires, the realized benefits to our customer of inflating their tires with purified nitrogen are expected to be minimal. The Promise of Nitrogen: Under Controlled Conditions Recently, nitrogen gas (for use in inflating tires) has become available to the general consumer through some retailers. The use of nitrogen gas to inflate tires is a technology used in automobile racing. The following benefits under controlled conditions are attributed to nitrogen gas and its unique properties: - A reduction in the expected loss of Tire Pressure over time. - A reduction in the variance of Tire Pressures with temperature changes due to reduction of water vapor concentration. - A reduction of long term rubber degradation due to a decrease in oxygen concentrations. Important These are obtainable performance improvements when relatively pure nitrogen gas is used to inflate tires under controlled conditions. The Promise of Nitrogen: Real World Use Nitrogen inflation can provide some benefit by reducing gas migration (pressure loss) at the molecular level through the tire structure. NHTSA (National Highway Traffic Safety Administration) has stated that the inflation pressure loss of tires can be up to 5% a month. Nitrogen molecules are larger than oxygen molecules and, therefore, are less prone to "seeping" through the tire casing. The actual obtainable benefits of nitrogen vary, based on the physical construction and the materials used in the manufacturing of the tire being inflated. Another potential benefit of nitrogen is the reduced oxidation of tire components. Research has demonstrated that oxygen consumed in the oxidation process of the tire primarily comes from the inflation media. Therefore, it is reasonable to assume that oxidation of tire components can be reduced if the tire is inflated with pure nitrogen. However, only very small amounts of oxygen are required to begin the normal oxidation process. Even slight contamination of the tire inflation gas with compressed atmospheric air during normal inflation pressure maintenance, may negate the benefits of using nitrogen. GM Tire Quality, Technology and Focus of Importance Since 1972, General Motors has designed tires under the TPC (Tire Performance Criteria) specification system, which includes specific requirements that ensure robust tire performance under normal usage. General Motors works with tire suppliers to design and manufacture original equipment tires for GM vehicles. The GM TPC addresses required performance with respect to both inflation pressure retention, and endurance properties for original equipment tires. The inflation pressure retention requirements address availability of oxygen and oxidation concerns, while endurance requirements ensure the mechanical structure of the tire has sufficient strength. This combination has provided our customers with tires that maintain their structural integrity throughout their useful treadlife under normal operating conditions. Regardless of the inflation media for tires (atmospheric air or nitrogen), inflation pressure maintenance of tires is critical for overall tire, and ultimately, vehicle performance. Maintaining the correct inflation pressure allows the tire to perform as intended by the vehicle manufacturer in many areas, including comfort, fuel economy, stopping distance, cornering, traction, treadwear, and noise. Since the load carrying capability of a tire is related to inflation pressure, proper inflation pressure maintenance is necessary for the tire to support the load imposed by the vehicle without excessive structural Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM System Message/Service Tips > Page 10257 degradation. Important Regardless of the inflation media for tires (atmospheric air or nitrogen), inflation pressure maintenance of tires is critical for overall tire, and ultimately, vehicle performance. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM System Message/Service Tips > Page 10258 Tires: Technical Service Bulletins Tires/Wheels - Tire Puncture Repair Procedures INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 04-03-10-001F Date: April 27, 2010 Subject: Tire Puncture Repair Procedures For All Cars and Light Duty Trucks Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (including Saturn) 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 04-03-10-001E (Section 03 - Suspension). This bulletin covers puncture repair procedures for passenger car and light duty truck radial tires in the tread area only. The tire manufacturer must be contacted for its individual repair policy and whether or not the speed rating is retained after repair. Caution - Tire changing can be dangerous and should be done by trained professionals using proper tools and procedures. Always read and understand any manufacturer's warnings contained in their customers literature or molded into the tire sidewall. - Serious eye and ear injury may result from not wearing adequate eye and ear protection while repairing tires. - NEVER inflate beyond 275 kPa (40 pounds) pressure to seat beads. Some run flat tires, such as the Goodyear Extended Mobility Tire (EMT) used on the Corvette, may require more than 275 kPa (40 psi) to seat the bead. In such a case, a tire safety cage must be used. Consult the tire manufacturer for its individual repair policy. - NEVER stand, lean or reach over the assembly during inflation. Repairable area on a radial tire. Important - NEVER repair tires worn to the tread indicators 1.59 mm (2/32") remaining depth). - NEVER repair tires with a tread puncture larger than 6.35 mm (1/4"). - NEVER substitute an inner tube for a permissible or non-permissible repair. - NEVER perform an outside-in tire repair (plug only, on the wheel). - Every tire must be removed from the wheel for proper inspection and repair. - Regardless of the type of repair used, the repair must seal the inner liner and fill the injury. - Consult with repair material supplier/manufacturer for repair unit application procedures and repair tools/repair material recommendations. Three basic steps for tire puncture repair: 1. Remove the tire from the wheel for inspection and repair. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM System Message/Service Tips > Page 10259 2. Fill the injury (puncture) to keep moisture out. 3. Seal the inner liner with a repair unit to prevent air loss. External Inspection 1. Prior to demounting, inspect the tire surface, the valve and the wheel for the source of the leak by using a water and soap solution. Mark the injured area and totally deflate the tire by removing the valve core. 2. Demount the tire from the wheel and place the tire on a well-lighted spreader. Internal Inspection 1. Spread the beads and mark the puncture with a tire crayon. 2. Inspect the inner tire for any signs of internal damage. 3. Remove the puncturing object, noting the direction of the penetration. 4. Probe the injury with a blunt awl in order to determine the extent and direction of the injury. 5. Remove any loose foreign material from the injury. 6. Punctures exceeding 6.35 mm (1/4") should not be repaired. Cleaning 1. Clean the area around the puncture thoroughly with a proper liner cleaner, clean cloth and a scraper. This step serves to remove dirt and mold lubricants to insure proper adhesion and non-contamination of the buffing tool. 2. Refer to information on the product or manufacturer's Material Safety Data Sheet and follow guidelines for handling and disposal. Clean the Injury Channel Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM System Message/Service Tips > Page 10260 1. Use a proper hand reamer, carbide cutter or drill bit to ream the puncture channel from the inside of the tire in order to clean the injury. 2. Remove steel wires protruding above the liner surface to prevent damage to the repair unit. 3. Consult your repair material supplier for recommended reaming tool(s). Fill the Injury 1. It is necessary to fill the injury channel to provide back up for the repair unit and to prevent moisture from entering the tire fabric and steel wires. 2. (For combination repair/plug units skip this step.) Cement the injured channel and fill the injury from the inside of the tire with the repair plug per repair material manufacturer's recommendations. Without stretching the plug, cut the plug off just above the inside tire surface. 3. Consult your repair material supplier for proper repair material selection. Repair Unit Selection Important Do not install the repair unit in this step. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM System Message/Service Tips > Page 10261 1. Center the repair unit over the injury as a reference and outline an area larger than the unit so that buffing will not remove the crayon marks. 2. Remove the repair unit. 3. DO NOT overlap previous or multiple repair units. 4. Consult your repair material supplier for proper repair unit selection. Buffing 1. To prevent contamination and preserve the outline, buff within the marked area thoroughly and evenly with a low speed buffing tool using a fine wire brush or gritted rasp. 2. Buff to a smooth velvet surface (RMA #1 or #2 buffed texture). 3. Use caution not to gouge the inner liner or expose casing fabric. 4. Remove any buffing dust with a vacuum cleaner. 5. Consult your repair material supplier for a proper buffing tool. Cementing Apply chemical cement according to the repair material manufacturer's procedures. Repair Unit Application Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM System Message/Service Tips > Page 10262 1. The tire must be in the relaxed position when the repair unit is installed (Do not spread the beads excessively). Two-Piece Plug and Repair Units 1. If applicable, install the repair unit so that the alignment is correct. 2. Center the repair unit over the injury and stitch down thoroughly with the stitching tool, working from the center out. 3. Being careful not to stretch the plug material, cut the plug flush with the outer tread. Combination Repair/Plug Units 1. Pull the plug through the injury until the repair just reaches the liner. Stitch down thoroughly. 2. Follow the repair material manufacturer's recommendations for further installation instructions. 2. Consult your repair material supplier for the proper stitching tool. Safety Cage Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM System Message/Service Tips > Page 10263 Some run flat tires, such as the Goodyear Extended Mobility Tire (EMT) used on the Corvette, may require more than 275 kPa (40 psi) to seat the bead. In such a case, a tire safety cage must be used. Consult the tire manufacturer for its individual repair policy. Final Inspection 1. After remounting and inflating the tire, check both beads, the repair and the valve with a water and soap solution in order to detect leaks. 2. If the tire continues to lose air, the tire must be demounted and reinspected. 3. Balance the tire and wheel assembly. Refer to Tire and Wheel Assembly Balancing - OFF Vehicle. For additional tire puncture repair information, contact: Rubber Manufacturers Association (RMA) Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM System Message/Service Tips > Page 10264 Tires: Technical Service Bulletins Tires - Slight/Mild Edge Feathering Information INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 07-03-10-008B Date: August 13, 2009 Subject: Information on Slight or Mild Tire Feathering and Recommended Practices (Normal Tire Wear Condition) Models: 2006-2010 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (including Saturn) 2006-2010 HUMMER H2, H3 2006-2009 Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 07-03-10-008A (Section 03 - Suspension). This bulletin provides information regarding the normal tire wear condition of slight or mild tire feathering and recommended practices. If a vehicle comes into a dealership with a concern of slight or mild feathering-type wear on the tires, review with the customer their past tire rotation history. Tires should be rotated every 8,000 to 13,000 km (5,000 to 8,000 mi) for applicable vehicles with tires where a tire rotation is possible or recommended. Refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 05-03-10-015B for information on tire rotation for vehicles with different front/rear tire/wheel sizes. SOME TIRE FEATHERING IS A NORMAL PART OF TIRE WEAR AND THROUGH PROPER TIRE ROTATION AND INFLATION, THIS TIRE WEAR CAN BE MINIMIZED AND TIRE LIFE MAXIMIZED. If the customer has not rotated the tires within the last 8,000 to 13,000 km (5,000 to 8,000 mi), a tire rotation in the modified X-pattern is necessary to clean-up the feathering, rather than placing the vehicle on the alignment machine. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Description and Operation > Tread Wear Indicators Description Tires: Description and Operation Tread Wear Indicators Description Tread Wear Indicators Description The original equipment tires have tread wear indicators that show when you should replace the tires. The location of these indicators are at 60 degree intervals around the outer diameter of the tire. The indicators appear as a 6 mm (0.25 in) wide band when the tire tread depth becomes 1.6 mm (2/32 in). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Description and Operation > Tread Wear Indicators Description > Page 10267 Tires: Description and Operation Tire Inflation Description Tire Inflation Description When you inflate the tires to the recommended inflation pressures, the factory-installed wheels and tires are designed in order to handle loads to the tire's rated load capacity. Incorrect tire pressures, or under-inflated tires, can cause the following conditions: * Vehicle handling concerns * Poor fuel economy * Shortened tire life * Tire overloading Inspect the tire pressure when the following conditions apply: * The vehicle has been sitting at least 3 hours. * The vehicle has not been driven for more than 1.6 km (1 mi). * The tires are cool. Inspect the tires monthly or before any extended trip. Adjust the tire pressure to the specifications on the tire label. Install the valve caps or the extensions on the valves. The caps or the extensions keep out dust and water. The kilopascal (kPa) is the metric term for pressure. The tire pressure may be printed in both kilopascal (kPa) and psi. One psi equals 6.9 kPa. Tires with a higher than recommended pressure can cause the following conditions: * A hard ride * Tire bruising * Rapid tread wear at the center of the tire Tires with a lower than recommended pressure can cause the following conditions: * A tire squeal on turns * Hard steering * Rapid wear and uneven wear on the edge of the tread * Tire rim bruises and tire rim rupture * Tire cord breakage * High tire temperatures * Reduced vehicle handling * High fuel consumption * Soft riding Unequal pressure on the same axle can cause the following conditions: * Uneven braking Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Description and Operation > Tread Wear Indicators Description > Page 10268 * Steering lead * Reduced vehicle handling Refer to the Tire Placard for specific tire and wheel applications and tire pressures. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Description and Operation > Tread Wear Indicators Description > Page 10269 Tires: Description and Operation All Seasons Tires Description All Seasons Tires Description Most Saturn vehicles are equipped with steel belted all-season radial tires as standard equipment. These tires qualify as snow tires, with a higher than average rating for snow traction than the non-all season radial tires previously used. Other performance areas, such as wet traction, rolling resistance, tread life, and air retention, are also improved. This is done by improvements in both tread design and tread compounds. These tires are identified by an M + S molded in the tire side wall after the tire size. The suffix MS is also molded in the tire side wall after the TPC specification number. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Description and Operation > Tread Wear Indicators Description > Page 10270 Tires: Description and Operation P-Metric Sized Tires Description P-Metric Sized Tires Description Most P-metric tire sizes do not have exact corresponding alphanumeric tire sizes. Replacement tires should be of the same tire performance criteria TPC specification number including the same size, the same load range, and the same construction as those originally installed on the vehicle. Consult a tire dealer if you must replace the P-metric tire with other sizes. Tire companies can best recommend the closest match of alphanumeric to P-metric sizes within their own tire lines. The above illustration may not correspond with your vehicle, but is meant as an example. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures Tires: Procedures Tire Repair Tire Repair Warning * Tire changing can be dangerous and should be done by trained professionals using proper tools and procedures. Always read and understand any manufacturer's warnings contained in their customers literature or molded into the tire sidewall. * Serious eye and ear injury may result from not wearing adequate eye and ear protection while repairing tires. * NEVER inflate beyond 275 kPa (40 pounds) pressure to seat beads. * NEVER stand, lean or reach over the assembly during inflation. Note: Repairable area on a radial tire. * NEVER repair tires worn to the tread indicators 1.59 mm (2/32 in) remaining depth. * NEVER repair tires with a tread puncture larger than 6.35 mm (1/4 in). * NEVER substitute an inner tube for a permissible or non-permissible repair. * NEVER perform an outside-in tire repair (plug only, on the wheel). * Every tire must be removed from the wheel for proper inspection and repair. * Regardless of the type of repair used, the repair must seal the inner liner and fill the injury. * Consult with repair material supplier/manufacturer for repair unit application procedures and repair tools/repair material recommendations. Three basic steps for tire puncture repair: 1. Remove the tire from the wheel for inspection and repair. 2. Fill the injury (puncture) to keep moisture out. 3. Seal the inner liner with a repair unit to prevent air loss. External Inspection 1. Prior to demounting, inspect the tire surface, the valve and the wheel for the source of the leak by using a water and soap solution. Mark the injured area and totally deflate the tire by removing the valve core. 2. Demount the tire from the wheel and place the tire on a well-lighted spreader. Internal Inspection Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 10273 1. Spread the beads and mark the puncture with a tire crayon. 2. Inspect the inner tire for any signs of internal damage. 3. Remove the puncturing object, noting the direction of the penetration. 4. Probe the injury with a blunt awl in order to determine the extent and direction of the injury. 5. Remove any loose foreign material from the injury. 6. Punctures exceeding 6.35 mm (1/4 in) should not be repaired. Cleaning 1. Clean the area around the puncture thoroughly with a proper liner cleaner, clean cloth and a scraper. This step serves to remove dirt and mold lubricants to insure proper adhesion and non-contamination of the buffing tool. 2. Refer to information on the product or manufacturer's Material Safety Data Sheet and follow guidelines for handling and disposal. Clean the Injury Channel Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 10274 1. Use a proper hand reamer, carbide cutter or drill bit to ream the puncture channel from the inside of the tire in order to clean the injury. 2. Remove steel wires protruding above the liner surface to prevent damage to the repair unit. 3. Consult your repair material supplier for recommended reaming tool(s). Fill the Injury 1. It is necessary to fill the injury channel to provide back up for the repair unit and to prevent moisture from entering the tire fabric and steel wires. 2. For combination repair/plug units skip this step. Cement the injured channel and fill the injury from the inside of the tire with the repair plug per repair material manufacturer's recommendations. Without stretching the plug, cut the plug off just above the inside tire surface. 3. Consult your repair material supplier for proper repair material selection. Repair Unit Selection Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 10275 Note: Do not install the repair unit in this step. 1. Center the repair unit over the injury as a reference and outline an area larger than the unit so that buffing will not remove the crayon marks. 2. Remove the repair unit. 3. DO NOT overlap previous or multiple repair units. 4. Consult your repair material supplier for proper repair unit selection. Buffing 1. To prevent contamination and preserve the outline, buff within the marked area thoroughly and evenly with a low speed buffing tool using a fine wire brush or gritted rasp. 2. Buff to a smooth velvet surface (RMA #1 or #2 buffed texture). 3. Use caution not to gouge the inner liner or expose casing fabric. 4. Remove any buffing dust with a vacuum cleaner. 5. Consult your repair material supplier for a proper buffing tool. Cementing Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 10276 Apply chemical cement according to the repair material manufacturer's procedures. Repair Unit Application The tire must be in the relaxed position when the repair unit is installed. Do not spread the beads excessively. Two-Piece Plug and Repair Units 1. If applicable, install the repair unit so that the alignment is correct. 2. Center the repair unit over the injury and stitch down thoroughly with the stitching tool, working from the center out. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 10277 3. Being careful not to stretch the plug material, cut the plug flush with the outer tread. Combination Repair/Plug Units 1. Pull the plug through the injury until the repair just reaches the liner. Stitch down thoroughly. 2. Follow the repair material manufacturer's recommendations for further installation instructions. Consult your repair material supplier for the proper stitching tool. Safety Cage Some run flat tires may require more than 275 kPa (40 psi) to seat the bead. In such a case, a tire safety cage must be used. Consult the tire manufacturer for its individual repair policy. Final Inspection Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 10278 1. After remounting and inflating the tire, check both beads, the repair and the valve with a water and soap solution in order to detect leaks. 2. If the tire continues to lose air, the tire must be demounted and reinspected. 3. Balance the tire and wheel assembly. Refer to Tire and Wheel Assembly Balancing - Off Vehicle (See: Body and Frame/Testing and Inspection/Vibration Diagnosis and Correction/Repair Instructions/Tire and Wheel Assembly Balancing - Off Vehicle). For additional tire puncture repair information, contact: Rubber Manufacturers Association (RMA) 1400 K Street, N.W., Suite 900 Washington, DC 20005-2403 Tire Rotation Tire Rotation Rotate the tires and wheels at frequent intervals to equalize wear. Refer to Maintenance Schedule (North American Emissions) (See: Maintenance). In addition to scheduled rotation, rotate the tire and wheel whenever uneven tire wear is noticed. Radial tires tend to wear faster in the shoulder area, particularly in front positions. Radial tires in non-drive locations may develop an irregular wear pattern that may increase tire noise. This makes regular rotation especially necessary. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation (See: Service and Repair). Always use a 4-wheel rotation. After rotation, check the wheel nuts for specified torque. Then, set the tire pressure. After the tires have been rotated, the tire pressure sensors must be reset, if applicable. Refer to Refer to Tire Pressure Indicator Sensor Learn. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 10279 Tires: Removal and Replacement Tire Dismounting and Mounting Caution: Use a tire changing machine in order to dismount tires. Do not use hand tools or tire irons alone in order to remove the tire from the wheel. Damage to the tire beads or the wheel rim could result. Caution: Do not scratch or damage the clear coating on aluminum wheels with the tire changing equipment. Scratching the clear coating could cause the aluminum wheel to corrode and the clear coating to peel from the wheel. Caution: Damage to either the tire bead or the wheel mounting holes can result from the use of improper wheel attachment or tire mounting procedures. It takes up to 70 seconds for all of the air to completely exhaust from a large tire. Failure to follow the proper procedures could cause the tire changer to put enough force on the tire to bend the wheel at the mounting surface. Such damage may result in vibration and/or shimmy, and under severe usage lead to wheel cracking. 1. Remove the valve core from the valve stem. 2. Deflate the tire completely. Note: Rim-clamp European-type tire changers are recommended. 3. Use the tire changer in order to remove the tire from the wheel. Follow steps 4-7 to remove the tire from the wheel. 4. When separating the tire bead from the wheel, position the bead breaking fixture 90, 180 and 270 degrees from the valve stem. Caution: Failure to position valve stem in proper position while dismounting and mounting the tire may result in the TPM sensor to become damaged. 5. Position the wheel and tire so the valve stem is at the 7 o'clock position relative to the head. The tire iron or pry bar can be inserted when prying the outer tire bead up and over the mounting/dismounting head. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 10280 6. Position the wheel and tire so the valve stem is again at the 7 o'clock position relative to the head. The tire iron or pry bar can be inserted when prying the inner tire bead up and over the mounting/dismounting head. 7. Remove all residual liquid sealant from the inside of the tire and wheel surfaces. If any tire sealant is noted upon tire dismounting on vehicles equipped with TPM, replace the tire pressure sensor. Refer to Tire Pressure Indicator Sensor Replacement (See: Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires/Tire Pressure Sensor/Service and Repair). 8. Use a wire brush or coarse steel wool in order to remove any rubber, light rust or corrosion from the wheel bead seats. Caution: When mounting the tires, use an approved tire mounting lubricant. DO NOT use silicon or corrosive base compounds to lubricate the tire bead and the wheel rim. A silicon base compound can cause the tire to slip on the rim. A corrosive type compound can cause tire or rim deterioration. 9. Apply mounting lubricant to the tire bead and the wheel rim. Refer to Adhesives, Fluids, Lubricants, and Sealers (See: Suspension/Specifications/Fluid Type Specifications/Tires and Wheels). 10. Position the rim so the valve stem (1) is at the 7 o'clock position relative to the head (2). This will protect the sensor when the bottom bead seats. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 10281 11. Using the tire machine, rotate the tire/wheel assembly clockwise when transferring the tire bead to the inside of the wheel rim. Ensure that the valve stem (1) is at the 7 o'clock position. 12. After the bottom bead is on the wheel, reposition the wheel and tire so that the valve stem (1) is at the 7 o'clock position relative to the head. This will protect the sensor while mounting the tire bead to the outside of the wheel. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 10282 13. Use the tire changer in order to install the tire to the wheel. Warning To avoid serious personal injury, do not stand over tire when inflating. The bead may break when the bead snaps over the safety hump. Do not exceed 275 kPa (40 psi) pressure when inflating any tire if beads are not seated. If 275 kPa (40 psi) pressure will not seat the beads, deflate, relubricate the beads and reinflate. Overinflation may cause the bead to break and cause serious personal injury. 14. Inflate the tire until it passes the bead humps. Be sure that the valve core is not installed at this time. 15. Install the valve core to the valve core stem. 16. Inflate the tire to the proper air pressure. 17. Ensure that the locating rings are visible on both sides of the tire in order to verify that the tire bead is fully seated on the wheel. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 00-03-10-006F > May > 10 > Wheels/Tires - Tire Radial Force Variation (RFV) Wheels: Customer Interest Wheels/Tires - Tire Radial Force Variation (RFV) INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 00-03-10-006F Date: May 04, 2010 Subject: Information on Tire Radial Force Variation (RFV) Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X 2000-2005 Saturn L Series 2003-2007 Saturn ION Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to considerably expand the available information on Radial Force Variation (RFV) and should be reviewed in whole. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 00-03-10-006E (Section 03 - Suspension). Important - Before measuring tires on equipment such as the Hunter GSP9700, the vehicle MUST be driven a minimum of 16 km (10 mi) to ensure removal of any flat-spotting. Refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 03-03-10-007E - Tire/Wheel Characteristics of GM Original Equipment Tires. - Equipment such as the Hunter GSP9700 MUST be calibrated prior to measuring tire/wheel assemblies for each vehicle. The purpose of this bulletin is to provide guidance to GM dealers when using tire force variation measurement equipment, such as the Hunter GSP9700. This type of equipment can be a valuable tool in diagnosing vehicle ride concerns. The most common ride concern involving tire radial force variation is highway speed shake on smooth roads. Tire related smooth road highway speed shake can be caused by three conditions: imbalance, out of round and tire force variation. These three conditions are not necessarily related. All three conditions must be addressed. Imbalance is normally addressed first, because it is the simpler of the three to correct. Off-vehicle, two plane dynamic wheel balancers are readily available and can accurately correct any imbalance. Balancer calibration and maintenance, proper attachment of the wheel to the balancer, and proper balance weights, are all factors required for a quality balance. However, a perfectly balanced tire/wheel assembly can still be "oval shaped" and cause a vibration. Before balancing, perform the following procedures. Tire and Wheel Diagnosis 1. Set the tire pressure to the placard values. 2. With the vehicle raised, ensure the wheels are centered on the hub by loosening all wheel nuts and hand-tightening all nuts first by hand while shaking the wheel, then torque to specifications using a torque wrench, NOT a torque stick. 3. Visually inspect the tires and the wheels. Inspect for evidence of the following conditions and correct as necessary: - Missing balance weights - Bent rim flange - Irregular tire wear - Incomplete bead seating - Tire irregularities (including pressure settings) - Mud/ice build-up in wheel - Stones in the tire tread - Remove any aftermarket wheels and/or tires and restore vehicle to original condition prior to diagnosing a smooth road shake condition. 4. Road test the vehicle using the Electronic Vibration Analyzer (EVA) essential tool. Drive for a sufficient distance on a known, smooth road surface to duplicate the condition. Determine if the vehicle is sensitive to brake apply. If the brakes are applied lightly and the pulsation felt in the steering wheel increases, refer to the Brakes section of the service manual that deals with brake-induced pulsation. If you can start to hear the vibration as a low boom noise (in addition to feeling it), but cannot see it, the vehicle likely has a first order (one pulse per propshaft revolution) driveline vibration. Driveline first order vibrations are high enough in frequency that most humans can start to hear them at highway speeds, but are too high to be able to be easily seen. These issues can be caused by driveline imbalance or misalignment. If the vehicle exhibits this low boom and the booming pulses in-and-out on a regular basis (like a throbbing), chances are good that the vehicle could have driveline vibration. This type Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 00-03-10-006F > May > 10 > Wheels/Tires - Tire Radial Force Variation (RFV) > Page 10291 of vibration is normally felt more in the "seat of the pants" than the steering wheel. 5. Next, record the Hertz (Hz) reading as displayed by the EVA onto the tire data worksheet found at the end of this bulletin. This should be done after a tire break-in period of at least 16 km (10 mi) at 72 km/h (45 mph) or greater, in order to eliminate any possible tire flat-spotting. This reading confirms what the vehicle vibration frequency is prior to vehicle service and documents the amount of improvement occurring as the result of the various steps taken to repair. Completing the Steering Wheel Shake Worksheet below is required. A copy of the completed worksheet must be saved with the R.O. and a copy included with any parts returned to the Warranty Parts Center for analysis. A reading of 35 to 50 Hz typically indicates a first order propshaft vibration. If this is the situation, refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 08-07-30-044D. Generally, a reading between 10 and 20 Hz indicates a tire/wheel vibration and if this is the reading obtained, continue using this bulletin. If the tire 1st order vibration goes away and stays away during this evaluation, the cause is likely tire flat-spotting. Tire flat-spotting vibration may come and go at any speed over 72 km/h (45 mph) during the first 10 minutes of operation, if vibration continues after 10 minutes of driving at speeds greater than 72 km/h (45 mph), tire flat-spotting can be ruled out as the cause for vibration. 6. If flat-spotting is the cause, provide the explanation that this has occurred due to the vehicle being parked for long periods of time and that the nature of the tire is to take a set. Refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 03-03-10-007E: Information on Tire/Wheel Characteristics (Vibration, Balance, Shake, Flat Spotting) of GM Original Equipment Tires. 7. If the road test indicates a shake/vibration exists, check the imbalance of each tire/wheel assembly on a known, calibrated, off-car dynamic balancer.Make sure the mounting surface of the wheel and the surface of the balancer are absolutely clean and free of debris. Be sure to chose the proper cone/collet for the wheel, and always use the pilot bore for centering. Never center the wheel using the hub-cap bore since it is not a precision machined surface. If any assembly calls for more than 1/4 ounce on either rim flange, remove all balance weights and rebalance to as close to zero as possible. If you can see the vibration (along with feeling it) in the steering wheel (driving straight without your hands on the wheel), it is very likely to be a tire/wheel first order (one pulse per revolution) disturbance. First order disturbances can be caused by imbalance as well as non-uniformities in tires, wheels or hubs. This first order frequency is too low for a human to hear, but if the amplitude is high enough, it can be seen. If a vibration or shake still exists after balancing, any out of round conditions, of the wheel, and force variation conditions of the tire, must be addressed. Equipment such as the Hunter GSP9700 can address both (it is also a wheel balancer). Tire radial force vibration (RFV) can be defined as the amount of stiffness variation the tire will produce in one revolution under a constant load. Radial force variation is what the vehicle feels because the load (weight) of the vehicle is always on the tires. Although free runout of tires (not under load) is not always a good indicator of a smooth ride, it is critical that total tire/wheel assembly runout be within specification. Equipment such as the Hunter GSP9700 loads the tire, similar to on the vehicle, and measures radial force variation of the tire/wheel assembly. Note that the wheel is affecting the tire's RFV measurement at this point. To isolate the wheel, its runout must be measured. This can be easily done on the Hunter, without the need to set up dial indicators. If the wheel meets the runout specification, the tire's RFV can then be addressed. After measuring the tire/wheel assembly under load, and the wheel alone, the machine then calculates (predicts) the radial force variation of the tire. However, because this is a prediction that can include mounting inaccuracies, and the load wheel is much smaller in diameter than used in tire production, this type of service equipment should NOT be used to audit new tires. Rather, it should be used as a service diagnostic tool to minimize radial force variation of the tire/wheel assembly. Equipment such as the Hunter GSP9700 does an excellent job of measuring wheel runout, and of finding the low point of the wheel (for runout) and the high point of the tire (for radial force variation). This allows the tire to be matched mounted to the wheel for lowest tire/wheel assembly force variation. The machine will simplify this process into easy steps. The following assembly radial force variation numbers should be used as a guide: When measuring RFV and match mounting tires perform the following steps. Measuring Wheel Runout and Assembly Radial Force Variation Important The completed worksheet at the end of this bulletin must be attached to the hard copy of the repair order. - Measure radial force variation and radial runout. - If a road force/balancing machine is used, record the radial force variation (RFV) on the worksheet at the end of this bulletin. It may be of benefit to have the lowest RFV assembly to the front left corner. If the machine is not available and the EVA data suggests there is an issue, swap the tire and wheel assemblies from the front to the back. Re-check on the EVA and if the problem still exists, test another vehicle to find tires that do not exhibit the same frequency and swap those tires onto the subject vehicle. - If a runout/balancing machine is used, record the radial runout of the tire/wheel assemblies on the worksheet at the end of this bulletin. If one or more of the tire/wheel assemblies are more than.040 in (1.02 mm), match mount the tire to the wheel to get below.040 in (1.02 mm). For sensitive customers, readings of 0.030 inch (0.76 mm) or less are preferable, it may also be of benefit to have the lowest runout assembly to the front left corner. If the machine is not available and the EVA data suggests there is an issue, swap the tire and wheel assemblies from the front to the back. Re-check on the EVA and if the problem still exists, test another vehicle to find tires that do not exhibit the same frequency and swap those tires Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 00-03-10-006F > May > 10 > Wheels/Tires - Tire Radial Force Variation (RFV) > Page 10292 onto the subject vehicle. - After match mounting, the tire/wheel assembly must be rebalanced. If match mounting tires to in-spec wheels produces assembly values higher than these, tire replacement may be necessary. Replacing tires at lower values will probably mean good tires are being condemned. Because tires can sometimes become temporarily flat-spotted, which will affect force variation, it is important that the vehicle be driven at least 16 km (10 mi) prior to measuring. Tire pressure must also be adjusted to the usage pressure on the vehicle's tire placard prior to measuring. Most GM vehicles will tolerate radial force variation up to these levels. However, some vehicles are more sensitive, and may require lower levels. Also, there are other tire parameters that equipment such as the Hunter GSP9700 cannot measure that may be a factor. In such cases, TAC should be contacted for further instructions. Important - When mounting a GM wheel to a wheel balancer/force variation machine, always use the wheel's center pilot hole. This is the primary centering mechanism on all GM wheels; the bolt holes are secondary. Usually a back cone method to the machine should be used. For added accuracy and repeatability, a flange plate should be used to clamp the wheel onto the cone and machine. This system is offered by all balancer manufacturers in GM's dealer program. - Any type of service equipment that removes tread rubber by grinding, buffing or truing is NOT recommended, and may void the tire warranty. However, tires may have been ground by the tire company as part of their tire manufacturing process. This is a legitimate procedure. Steering Wheel Shake Worksheet When diagnosing vibration concerns, use the following worksheet in conjunction with the appropriate Vibration Analysis-Road testing procedure in the Vibration Correction sub-section in SI. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 00-03-10-006F > May > 10 > Wheels/Tires - Tire Radial Force Variation (RFV) > Page 10293 Refer to the appropriate section of SI for specifications and repair procedures that are related to the vibration concern. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 05-03-10-003F > Apr > 10 > Tires/Wheels - Low Tire/Leaking Cast Aluminum Wheels Wheels: Customer Interest Tires/Wheels - Low Tire/Leaking Cast Aluminum Wheels TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 05-03-10-003F Date: April 27, 2010 Subject: Low Tire Pressure, Leaking Cast Aluminum Wheels (Repair with Adhesive Sealant) Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (Including Saturn) 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X with Cast Aluminum Wheels Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the model years and the bulletin reference information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 05-03-10-003E (Section 03 - Suspension). Condition Some customers may comment on a low tire pressure condition. Diagnosis of the low tire pressure condition indicates an air leak through the cast aluminum wheel. Cause Porosity in the cast aluminum wheel may be the cause. Notice This bulletin specifically addresses issues related to the wheel casting that may result in an air leak. For issues related to corrosion of the wheel in service, please refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 08-03-10-006C - Tire Slowly Goes Flat, Tire Air Loss, Low Tire Pressure Warning Light Illuminated, Aluminum Wheel Bead Seat Corrosion (Clean and Resurface Wheel Bead Seat). Correction 1. Remove the tire and wheel assembly from the vehicle. Refer to the appropriate service procedure in SI. 2. Locate the leaking area by inflating the tire to 276 kPa (40 psi) and dipping the tire/wheel assembly in a water bath, or use a spray bottle with soap and water to locate the specific leak location. Important - If the porosity leak is located in the bead area of the aluminum rim (where the tire meets the rim), the wheel should be replaced. - If two or more leaks are located on one wheel, the wheel should be replaced. 3. If air bubbles are observed, mark the location. - If the leak location is on the tire/rubber area, refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 04-03-10-001F Tire Puncture Repair Procedures for All Cars and Light Duty Trucks. - If the leak is located on the aluminum wheel area, continue with the next step. 4. Inscribe a mark on the tire at the valve stem in order to indicate the orientation of the tire to the wheel. 5. Dismount the tire from the wheel. Refer to Tire Mounting and Dismounting. 6. Remove the tire pressure sensor. Refer to Tire Pressure Sensor removal procedure in SI. 7. Scuff the INSIDE rim surface at the leak area with #80 grit paper and clean the area with general purpose cleaner, such as 3M(R) General Purpose Adhesive Cleaner, P/N 08984, or equivalent. 8. Apply a 3 mm (0.12 in) thick layer of Silicone - Adhesive/Sealant, P/N 12378478 (in Canada, use 88900041), or equivalent, to the leak area. 9. Allow for the adhesive/sealant to dry. Notice Caution must be used when mounting the tire so as not to damage the sealer. Damaging the repair area may result in an air leak. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 05-03-10-003F > Apr > 10 > Tires/Wheels - Low Tire/Leaking Cast Aluminum Wheels > Page 10298 10. Align the inscribed mark on the tire with the valve stem on the wheel. 11. Reinstall the Tire Pressure Sensor. Refer to Tire Pressure Sensor installation procedure in SI. 12. Mount the tire on the wheel. Refer to Tire Mounting and Dismounting. 13. Pressurize the tire to 276 kPa (40 psi) and inspect for leaks. 14. Adjust tire pressure to meet the placard specification. 15. Balance the tire/wheel assembly. Refer to Tire and Wheel Assembly Balancing - Off-Vehicle. 16. Install the tire and wheel assembly onto the vehicle. Refer to the appropriate service procedure in SI. Parts Information Warranty Information (excluding Saab U.S. Models) Important The Silicone - Adhesive/Sealant comes in a case quantity of six. ONLY charge warranty one tube of adhesive/sealant per wheel repair. For vehicles repaired under warranty, use: One leak repair per wheel. Warranty Information (Saab U.S. Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table above. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 08-03-10-006C > Apr > 10 > Tires/Wheels - Tire Slowly Goes Flat/Warning Light ON Wheels: Customer Interest Tires/Wheels - Tire Slowly Goes Flat/Warning Light ON TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 08-03-10-006C Date: April 27, 2010 Subject: Tire Slowly Goes Flat, Tire Air Loss, Low Tire Pressure Warning Light Illuminated, Aluminum Wheel Bead Seat Corrosion (Clean and Resurface Wheel Bead Seat) Models: 2000-2011 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (including Saturn) 2003-2009 HUMMER H2 2006-2010 HUMMER H3 2005-2009 Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 08-03-10-006B (Section 03 - Suspension). Condition Some customers may comment on a tire that slowly loses air pressure over a period of days or weeks. Cause Abrasive elements in the environment may intrude between the tire and wheel at the bead seat. There is always some relative motion between the tire and wheel (when the vehicle is driven) and this motion may cause the abrasive particles to wear the wheel and tire materials. As the wear continues, there may also be intrusion at the tire/wheel interface by corrosive media from the environment. Eventually a path for air develops and a 'slow' leak may ensue. This corrosion may appear on the inboard or outboard bead seating surface of the wheel. This corrosion will not be visible until the tire is dismounted from the wheel. Notice This bulletin specifically addresses issues related to wheel bead seat corrosion that may result in an air leak. For issues related to porosity of the wheel casting that may result in an air leak, please refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 05-03-10-006F - Low Tire Pressure, Leaking Cast Aluminum Wheels (Repair with Adhesive Sealant) Correction In most cases, this type of air loss can be corrected by following the procedure below. Important DO NOT replace a wheel for slow air loss unless you have evaluated and/or tried to repair the wheel with the procedure below. Notice The repair is no longer advised or applicable for chromed aluminum wheels. 1. Remove the wheel and tire assembly for diagnosis. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation in SI. 2. After a water dunk tank leak test, if you determine the source of the air leak to be around the bead seat of the wheel, dismount the tire to examine the bead seat. Shown below is a typical area of bead seat corrosion.Typical Location of Bead Seat Corrosion Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 08-03-10-006C > Apr > 10 > Tires/Wheels - Tire Slowly Goes Flat/Warning Light ON > Page 10303 Important Other forms of slow air leaks are possible. If the body of the tire, valve stem and wheel flange show no signs of air seepage, refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 05-03-10-003D for additional information on possible wheel porosity issues. 3. Bead seat corrosion is identified by what appears like blistering of the wheel finish, causing a rough or uneven surface that is difficult for the tire to maintain a proper seal on. Below is a close-up photo of bead seat corrosion on an aluminum wheel that was sufficient to cause slow air loss. Close-Up of Bead Seat Corrosion 4. If corrosion is found on the wheel bead seat, measure the affected area as shown below. - For vehicles with 32,186 km (20,000 mi) or less, the total allowable combined linear area of repairable corrosion is 100 mm (4 in) or less. If the total area(s) of corrosion exceed these dimensions, the wheel should be replaced. - For vehicles that have exceeded 32,186 km (20,000 mi), the total allowable combined linear area of repairable corrosion is 200 mm (8 in) or less. If the total area(s) of corrosion exceed these dimensions, the wheel should be replaced. 5. In order to correct the wheel leak, use a clean-up (fine cut) sanding disc or biscuit to remove the corrosion and any flaking paint. You should remove the corrosion back far enough until you reach material that is stable and firmly bonded to the wheel. Try to taper the edge of any flaking paint as best you can in order to avoid sharp edges that may increase the chance of a leak reoccurring. The photo below shows an acceptable repaired surface. Notice Corrosion that extends up the lip of the wheel, where after the clean-up process it would be visible with the tire mounted, is only acceptable on the inboard flange. The inboard flange is not visible with the wheel assembly in the mounted position. If any loose coatings or corrosion extend to the visible surfaces on the FACE of the wheel, that wheel must be replaced. Important Remove ONLY the material required to eliminate the corrosion from the bead seating surface. DO NOT remove excessive amounts of material. ALWAYS keep the sealing surface as smooth and level as possible. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 08-03-10-006C > Apr > 10 > Tires/Wheels - Tire Slowly Goes Flat/Warning Light ON > Page 10304 Acceptably Prepared (Cleaned-Up) Wheel Surface 6. Once the corrosion has been eliminated, you should coat the repaired area with a commercially available tire sealant such as Patch Brand Bead Sealant or equivalent. Commercially available bead sealants are black rubber-like coatings that will permanently fill and seal the resurfaced bead seat. At 21°C (70°F) ambient temperature, this sealant will set-up sufficiently for tire mounting in about 10 minutes.Coated and Sealed Bead Seat 7. Remount the tire and install the repaired wheel and tire assembly. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation in SI. Parts Information Patch Brand Bead Sealer is available from Myers Tires at 1-800-998-9897 or on the web at www.myerstiresupply.com. The one-quart size can of sealer will repair about 20 wheels. Warranty Information (excluding Saab U.S. Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use: Warranty Information (Saab U.S. Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table above. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 08-03-10-006C > Apr > 10 > Tires/Wheels - Tire Slowly Goes Flat/Warning Light ON > Page 10305 Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 00-03-10-002F > Apr > 11 > Wheels - Chrome Wheel Staining/Pitting/Corrosion Wheels: All Technical Service Bulletins Wheels - Chrome Wheel Staining/Pitting/Corrosion INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 00-03-10-002F Date: April 21, 2011 Subject: Chemical Staining, Pitting, Corrosion and/or Spotted Appearance of Chromed Aluminum Wheels Models: 2012 and Prior GM Cars and Trucks Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update model years, suggest additional restorative products and add additional corrosion information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 00-03-10-002E (Section 03 - Suspension). Important You may give a copy of this bulletin to the customer. What is Chemical Staining of Chrome Wheels? Figure 1 Chemical staining in most cases results from acid based cleaners (refer to Figure 1 for an example). These stains are frequently milky, black, or greenish in appearance. They result from using cleaning solutions that contain acids on chrome wheels. Soap and water is usually sufficient to clean wheels. If the customer insists on using a wheel cleaner they should only use one that specifically states that it is safe for chromed wheels and does not contain anything in the following list. (Dealers should also survey any products they use during prep or normal cleaning of stock units for these chemicals.) - Ammonium Bifluoride (fluoride source for dissolution of chrome) - Hydrofluoric Acid (directly dissolves chrome) - Hydrochloric Acid (directly dissolves chrome) - Sodium Dodecylbenzenesulfonic Acid - Sulfamic Acid - Phosphoric Acid - Hydroxyacetic Acid Notice Many wheel cleaner instructions advise to take care to avoid contact with painted surfaces. Most customers think of painted surfaces as the fenders, quarter panels and other exterior sheet metal. Many vehicles have painted brake calipers. Acidic wheel cleaners may craze, crack, or discolor the paint on the brake calipers. Damage from wheel cleaners is not covered under the vehicle new car warranty. Soap and water applied with a soft brush is usually all that is required to clean the calipers. Whenever any wheel cleaner is used, it must be THOROUGHLY rinsed off of the wheel with clean, clear water. Special care must be taken to rinse under the hub cap, balance weights, wheel nuts, lug nut caps, between the wheel cladding and off the back side of the wheel. Wheels returned to the Warranty Parts Center (WPC) that exhibit damage from wheel cleaners most often have the damage around and under the wheel weight where the cleaner was incompletely flushed away. Notice Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 00-03-10-002F > Apr > 11 > Wheels - Chrome Wheel Staining/Pitting/Corrosion > Page 10311 Do not use cleaning solutions that contain hydrofluoric, oxalic and most other acids on chrome wheels (or any wheels). If the customer is unsure of the chemical make-up of a particular wheel cleaner, it should be avoided. For wheels showing signs of milky staining from acidic cleaners, refer to Customer Assistance and Instructions below. Warranty of Stained Chrome Wheels Stained wheels are not warrantable. Most acid based cleaners will permanently stain chrome wheels. Follow-up with dealers has confirmed that such cleaners were used on wheels that were returned to the Warranty Parts Center (WPC). Any stained wheels received by the WPC will be charged back to the dealership. To assist the customer, refer to Customer Assistance and Instructions below. Pitting or Spotted Appearance of Chrome Wheels Figure 2 A second type or staining or finish disturbance may result from road chemicals, such as calcium chloride used for dust control of unpaved roads. The staining will look like small pitting (refer to Figure 2). This staining will usually be on the leading edges of each wheel spoke, but may be uniformly distributed. If a vehicle must be operated under such conditions, the chrome wheels should be washed with mild soap and water and thoroughly rinsed as soon as conveniently possible. Important Road chemicals, such as calcium chloride used for dust control of unpaved roads, can also stain chrome wheels. The staining will look like small pitting. This staining will usually be on the leading edges of each wheel spoke. This is explained by the vehicle traveling in the forward direction while being splashed by the road chemical. If a vehicle must be operated under such conditions, the chrome wheels should be washed with mild soap and water and thoroughly rinsed as soon as conveniently possible. Warranty of Pitted or Spotted Chrome Wheels Wheels returned with pitting or spotting as a result of road chemicals may be replaced one time. Damage resulting from contact with these applied road chemicals is corrosive to the wheels finish and may cause damage if the wheels are not kept clean. Important Notify the customer that this is a one time replacement. Please stress to the customer the vital importance of keeping the wheels clean if they are operating the vehicle in an area that applies calcium chloride or other dust controlling chemicals! "GM of Canada" dealers require prior approval by the District Manager - Customer Care and Service Process (DM-CCSP). "Stardust" Corrosion of Chrome Wheels Figure 3 A third type of finish disturbance results from prolonged exposure to brake dust and resultant penetration of brake dust through the chrome. As brakes are applied hot particles of brake material are thrown off and tend to be forced through the leading edge of the wheel spoke windows by airflow. These Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 00-03-10-002F > Apr > 11 > Wheels - Chrome Wheel Staining/Pitting/Corrosion > Page 10312 hot particles embed themselves in the chrome layer and create a small pit. If the material is allowed to sit on the wheel while it is exposed to moisture or salt, it will corrode the wheel beneath the chrome leaving a pit or small blister in the chrome. Heavy brake dust build-up should be removed from wheels by using GM Chrome Cleaner and Polish, P/N 1050173 (in Canada use 10953013). For moderate cleaning, light brake dust build-up or water spots use GM Swirl Remover Polish, P/N 12377965 (in Canada, use Meguiars Plast-X(TM) Clear Plastic Cleaner and Polish #G12310C**). After cleaning, the wheel should be waxed using GM Cleaner Wax, P/N 12377966 (in Canada, use Meguiars Cleaner Wax #M0616C**), which will help protect the wheel from brake dust and reduce adhesion of any brake dust that gets on the wheel surface. For general maintenance cleaning, PEEK Metal Polish† may be used. It will clean and shine the chrome and leave behind a wax coating that may help protect the finish. Warranty of Stardust Corroded Chrome Wheels Wheels returned with pitting or spotting as a result of neglect and brake dust build-up may be replaced one time. Important Notify the customer that this is a one time replacement. Please stress to the customer the vital importance of keeping the wheels clean and free of prolonged exposure to brake dust build-up. "GM of Canada" dealers require prior approval by the District Manager - Customer Care and Service Process (DM-CCSP). Customer Assistance and Instructions GM has looked for ways customers may improve the appearance of wheels damaged by acidic cleaners. The following product and procedure has been found to dramatically improve the appearance of stained wheels. For wheels that have milky stains caused by acidic cleaners try the following: Notice THE 3M CHROME AND METAL POLISH REQUIRED FOR THIS PROCEDURE IS AN EXTREMELY AGGRESSIVE POLISH/CLEANER. THE WHEELS MUST BE CLEANED BEFORE APPLICATION TO AVOID SCRATCHING THE WHEEL SURFACE. THIS PRODUCT WILL REDUCE THE THICKNESS OF THE CHROME PLATING ON THE WHEEL AND IF USED INCORRECTLY OR EXCESSIVELY MAY REMOVE THE CHROME PLATING ALL TOGETHER, EXPOSING A LESS BRIGHT AND BRASSY COLORED SUB-LAYER. FOLLOW INSTRUCTIONS EXACTLY. 1. Wash the wheels with vigorously with soap and water. This step will clean and may reduce wheel staining. Flood all areas of the wheel with water to rinse. 2. Dry the wheels completely. Notice Begin with a small section of the wheel and with light pressure buff off polish and examine results. ONLY apply and rub with sufficient force and time to remove enough staining that you are satisfied with the results. Some wheels may be stained to the extent that you may only achieve a 50% improvement while others may be able to be restored to the original lustre. IN ALL CASES, only apply until the results are satisfactory. 3. Apply 3M Chrome and Metal Polish #39527* with a clean terry cloth towel. As you apply the polish, the staining will be diminished. 4. When dry, buff off the polish with a clean portion of the towel. 5. Repeat application of the 3M Chrome and Metal Polish until satisfied with the results. If continued applications fail to improve the appearance further discontinue use. This procedure will improve the appearance of the wheels and may, with repeated applications, restore the finish dramatically. For wheels that exhibit spotting from road chemicals the above procedure may marginally improve the condition but will not restore the finish or remove the pitting. In this type of staining the wheel finish has actually been removed in spots and no manner of cleaning will restore the finish. †*We believe this source and their products to be reliable. There may be additional manufacturers of such products/materials. General Motors does not endorse, indicate any preference for or assume any responsibility for the products or material from this firm or for any such items that may be available from other sources. Parts Information Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 00-03-10-002F > Apr > 11 > Wheels - Chrome Wheel Staining/Pitting/Corrosion > Page 10313 *This product is currently available from 3M. To obtain information for your local retail location please call 3M at 1-888-364-3577. **This product is currently available from Meguiars (Canada). To obtain information for your local retail location please call Meguiars at 1-800-347-5700 or at www.meguiarscanada.com. ^ This product is currently available from Tri-Peek International. To obtain information for your local retail location please call Tri-Peek at 1-877-615-4272 or at www.tripeek.com. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 09-03-10-011A > Mar > 11 > Tires/Wheels - 19 Inch Wheels Available through GM Wheels: All Technical Service Bulletins Tires/Wheels - 19 Inch Wheels Available through GM INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 09-03-10-011A Date: March 21, 2011 Subject: 19 Inch Accessory Wheels Available through GM Accessories Models: 2010-2011 Chevrolet Equinox 2010-2011 GMC Terrain Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add 2011 model year and update information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 09-03-10-011 (Section 03 - Suspension). The purpose of this bulletin is to provide a reference guide for the technician to upgrade a vehicle from factory wheels and tires to 19" wheels and tires, which are available through GM Accessories. This guide will cover tires, wheels, vehicle modifications, and warranty information. Tires GM offers one tire; the Bridgestone Dueler Alenza HL P235/50R19 99H, GM P/N 19190765, to be used in conjunction with the 19" accessory wheels. The Bridgestone Dueler Alenza HL tire has a Tire Performance Criteria (TPC) spec of 1343MS (molded on the sidewall), which meets or exceeds all Federal Safety guidelines. Important - If the vehicle was built with 19" factory wheels, it is OK to install the accessory 19" wheel, but DO NOT install the accessory 19" tire. Please re-use the 19" factory tire. - If the vehicle was built with 17" or 18" factory wheels, ONLY install the accessory 19" tire on the 19" wheel. DO NOT install the 19" factory tire. Mounting and Balancing Refer to the most recent version of Corporate Bulletin Number 08-03-10-004A for proper methods for mounting, balancing and installing accessory wheels and tires. Wheels Wheel (Lug) Nuts Each wheel nut should be torqued in the appropriate torque sequence (refer to graphic) and to 170 Nm (125 lb ft). The torque should be rechecked after the first 160 km (100 mi). To help protect the wheels from theft, a wheel lock kit is also available. Caution Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly tightened wheel nuts can cause the wheel to become loose and even come off. This could lead to an accident. Be sure to use the correct wheel nuts. Care / Cleaning Use soap, hot water and a 100% cotton cloth to clean and polish the new wheels. If using a wheel cleaner, be sure to select one that will not harm the wheel surface. Avoid car washes that use carbide tipped brushes, as these may damage the wheel's finish. Periodically clean the backside of the wheel to Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 09-03-10-011A > Mar > 11 > Tires/Wheels - 19 Inch Wheels Available through GM > Page 10318 remove road grime, brake dust and grease. Mounting and Balancing Refer to the most recent version of Corporate Bulletin Number 08-03-10-004A for proper methods for mounting, balancing and installing accessory wheels and tires. The mounted and balanced wheel/tire assemblies MUST meet GM service guidelines for measured radial force variation to ensure vibration free performance. The following radial force variation numbers for the assembly should be used as a guide: If any wheel/tire assembly does not meet the above standards, refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 00-03-10-006F: Information on Tire Radial Force Variation (RFV) for further information on possible corrective actions. Vehicle Modifications Tire Label After installing the recommended P235/50R19 tires, place the provided tire label on the vehicle. The new tire label should be located within the red box, over the top of the original tire label found on the door jamb. To locate the label within the red box use the upper left hand edge of the red line as a guide. When properly placed, the new tire label will obscure the original tire information. Be sure that the surface is clean and dry. The surface temperature should not be less than 21°C (65°F). The label is provided as a guide for tire inflation pressures and information relevant to occupant/cargo capacities. Tire Type/Pressure Selection To provide a more accurate function of the Tire Pressure Monitoring System, it is necessary to update the body control module (BCM) with the correct tire type and pressure information. The factory 17" and 18" tires have a placard inflation pressure of 241 kPa (35 psi), which must be changed to 250 kPa (36 psi) when upsizing to the 19" accessory tires. Using the Global Diagnostic System (GDS 2), follow the steps listed below to select the appropriate tire type/pressure: 1. Enter "Module Diagnosis". 2. Select "Body Control Module". 3. Select "Configuration/Reset Functions". 4. Select "Tire Type/Pressure Selection". Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM) System To avoid system malfunctions, it is necessary to install tire pressure sensors in the accessory wheels. Replacement sensors can be obtained or sensors from the OE wheels can be transferred to the accessory wheels. After the wheels are installed on the vehicle, it is necessary to learn the new sensor identification codes/locations into the body control module (BCM). TPM Sensor Relearn Procedure Note If using the scan tool (GDS 2) to enable the learn mode, the EL 46079 Diagnostic Tool must be used to activate the sensors. When this preferred method is used, any stray sensor signals will not affect the learn procedure. In the event a particular sensor's information is displayed on the special tool upon activation but the horn does not chirp, it may be necessary to rotate the wheel valve stem to a different position due to the sensor signal is being blocked by another component. If using the keyless entry transmitter or driver information center buttons to enable the learn mode, the EL 46079 Diagnostic Tool or Pressure Increase/Decrease Method may be used. Before proceeding with this method, ensure that no other learn procedure is being performed simultaneously or that tire pressures are not being adjusted on another Tire Pressure Monitor equipped vehicle within close proximity. Stray signals from other tire pressure equipped vehicles just driving by can be inadvertently learned. If any random horn chirps are heard from the vehicle while performing the learn procedure, most likely a stray sensor has been learned and the procedure will need to be cancelled and repeated. Under these circumstances, performing the tire pressure Learn Procedure away from other vehicles may be highly recommended. In the event a particular sensor activation does not cause the horn to chirp, it may be necessary to rotate the wheel valve stem to a different position due to the sensor signal is being blocked by another component. Preferred Scan Tool (GDS 2) Learn Enable Method Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 09-03-10-011A > Mar > 11 > Tires/Wheels - 19 Inch Wheels Available through GM > Page 10319 1. Using a scan tool (GDS 2), initiate the tire pressure Learn Mode. A double horn chirp will sound together with activated turn signal lamps indicating the Learn Mode has been enabled. The left front turn signal only will then be illuminated. 2. Starting with the left front tire, active the sensor by holding the antenna of the EL 46079 Diagnostic Tool aimed upward against the tire sidewall close to the wheel rim at the valve stem location. Press and release the Activate button and wait for a horn chirp. Once all the turn signal lamps have been activated for 3 seconds and the horn chirp has sounded, the sensor information is learned and the turn signal in the next location to be learned will illuminate. 3. After the horn chirp has sounded and the turn signal in the next location to be learned will illuminate, repeat step 2 for the remaining 3 sensors in the following order: 1. Right front 2. Right rear 3. Left rear 4. When the left rear sensor has been learned, all the turn signal lamps have been activated for 3 seconds and a double horn chirp has sounded, the learn process is complete and BCM exits the learn mode. 5. Ignition OFF, adjust all tires to the recommended pressures. Alternate Driver Information Center Learn Enable Method 1. Ignition ON, press and release the driver information center info button on the stalk switch until the tire learn message appears on the driver information center display. Press and hold the set/reset button until all the turn signal lamps have been activated for 3 seconds and a double horn chirp sounded indicating the Learn Mode has been enabled. The left front turn signal will then be illuminated. 2. Starting with the left front tire, learn the tire pressure using one of the following methods: - Hold the antenna of the EL 46079 Diagnostic Tool aimed upward against the tire sidewall close to the wheel rim at the valve stem location. Press and release the activate button and wait for a horn chirp. Once all the turn signal lamps have been activated for 3 seconds and a single horn chirp sounded, the sensor information is learned and the turn signal in the next location to be learned will illuminate. - Increase/decrease the tire pressure 8.3 kPa (1.2 psi) then wait for a horn chirp. The horn chirp may occur before or up to 30 seconds after the pressure increase/decrease. Once the horn chirp has sounded, the sensor information is learned and the turn signal in the next location to be learned will illuminate. 3. After the horn chirp has sounded the turn signal in the next location to be learned will illuminate, repeat step 2 for the remaining 3 sensors in the following order: 1. Right front 2. Right rear 3. Left rear 4. When the left rear sensor has been learned and all the turn signal lamps have been activated for 3 seconds and a double horn chirp has sounded, the learn process is complete and BCM exits the learn mode. 5. Ignition OFF, adjust all tires to the recommended pressures. Engine Control Module (ECM) Reprogramming Important For proper vehicle operation and to insure coverage under the provisions of the new vehicle warranty, the vehicle must be programmed with the correct calibration as soon as the 19" wheels are installed. When upsizing from 17" wheels only, the ECM must be reprogrammed for speedometer accuracy. Contact Techline to obtain a VCI number. Record this number on the form below. Use the Service Programming System (SPS). Checking and Clearing DTCs After Reprogramming DTCs codes may be set as a result of the programming process. In most cases the codes can be cleared. Calibration Information Documentation 1. Make a copy of the "Accessory Wheel and Tire Information Form" included in this bulletin. 2. Provide all information required on the form. 3. Make a copy of the completed form for the customer to keep in the vehicle along with their Owner's Manual. 4. File the original completed form in the Dealership's Vehicle Service History folder. Important: If original equipment tires/wheels are reinstalled, it will be necessary to reset the programming of the ECM to the original specifications. Warranty Information Wheels Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 09-03-10-011A > Mar > 11 > Tires/Wheels - 19 Inch Wheels Available through GM > Page 10320 All GM Accessories sold and permanently installed on a GM vehicle PRIOR to new vehicle delivery will be covered under the provisions of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. For the U.S., in the event GM Accessories are installed AFTER new vehicle delivery, or are replaced under the new vehicle warranty, they will be covered (parts and labor) for the balance of the vehicle warranty, but in no event less than 12 months/12,000 miles. This coverage is only effective for GM Accessories permanently installed by a GM dealer or a GM approved ADI (Accessory Distributor / Installer). For Canada, in the event GM Accessories are installed AFTER new vehicle delivery, they will be covered (parts and labor) for the balance of the vehicle warranty, or up to 12 months/unlimited kilometers depending on month installed. For replacement after the new vehicle warranty expires, but within the 12 months/unlimited kilometers coverage, refer to claim type ZPTI guidelines. GM Accessories sold over-the-counter, or those not requiring installation, will continue to receive the standard GM Dealer Parts Warranty of 12 months from the date of purchase (parts only). Tires Any approved tire installed on a GM Vehicle PRIOR to delivery will be covered under the provisions of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Tires are covered against defects in material and workmanship. Tires are warranted for defects "without" prorated charge for tread mileage. Subsequent replacements under this warranty will continue to be covered for the remainder of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Any approved tire installed on a GM Vehicle PRIOR to delivery may continue to be warranted on a prorated basis by the tire manufacturer once the New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires. Any approved tire installed AFTER delivery will be covered under the provisions of the tire manufacturer warranty. USA dealers should refer to GM Warranty Administration Bulletin 00-03-10-003O for more information. Canadian dealers should refer to GM Warranty Administration Bulletin 01-03-10-003H. ACCESSORY WHEEL AND TIRE INFORMATION FORM Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 09-03-10-011A > Mar > 11 > Tires/Wheels - 19 Inch Wheels Available through GM > Page 10321 You have just modified your vehicle by installing an "Accessory Package" which includes Wheels and Tires. This form contains important information about your accessory installation. In an effort to provide superior service to you, our customer, we ask that you please present this form to your Servicing Dealer when removing or installing wheels and tires on your vehicle. This form contains important information necessary to service your vehicle. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 99-08-51-007E > Mar > 11 > Wheels/Tires Refinishing Aluminum Wheels Wheels: All Technical Service Bulletins Wheels/Tires - Refinishing Aluminum Wheels INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 99-08-51-007E Date: March 17, 2011 Subject: Refinishing Aluminum Wheels Models: 2012 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add additional model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 99-08-51-007D (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). This bulletin updates General Motor's position on refinishing aluminum wheels. GM does not endorse any repairs that involve welding, bending, straightening or re-machining. Only cosmetic refinishing of the wheel's coatings, using recommended procedures, is allowed. Evaluating Damage In evaluating damage, it is the GM Dealer's responsibility to inspect the wheel for corrosion, scrapes, gouges, etc. The Dealer must insure that such damage is not deeper than what can be sanded or polished off. The wheel must be inspected for cracks. If cracks are found, discard the wheel. Any wheels with bent rim flanges must not be repaired or refinished. Wheels that have been refinished by an outside company must be returned to the same vehicle. The Dealer must record the wheel ID stamp or the cast date on the wheel in order to assure this requirement. Refer to Refinisher's Responsibility - Outside Company later in this bulletin. Aluminum Wheel Refinishing Recommendations - Chrome-plated aluminum wheels Re-plating these wheels is not recommended. - Polished aluminum wheels These wheels have a polyester or acrylic clearcoat on them. If the clearcoat is damaged, refinishing is possible. However, the required refinishing process cannot be performed in the dealer environment. Refer to Refinisher's Responsibility - Outside Company later in this bulletin. - Painted aluminum wheels These wheels are painted using a primer, color coat, and clearcoat procedure. If the paint is damaged, refinishing is possible. As with polished wheels, all original coatings must be removed first. Media blasting is recommended. Refer to GM Aluminum Refinishing Bulletin #53-17-03A for the re-painting of this type of wheel. - Bright, machined aluminum wheels These wheels have a polyester or acrylic clearcoat on them. In some cases, the recessed "pocket" areas of the wheel may be painted. Surface refinishing is possible. The wheel must be totally stripped by media blasting or other suitable means. The wheel should be resurfaced by using a sanding process rather than a machining process. This allows the least amount of material to be removed. Important Do not use any re-machining process that removes aluminum. This could affect the dimensions and function of the wheel. Painting is an option to re-clearcoating polished and bright machined aluminum wheels. Paint will better mask any surface imperfections and is somewhat more durable than clearcoat alone. GM recommends using Corsican SILVER WAEQ9283 for a fine "aluminum-like" look or Sparkle SILVER WA9967 for a very bright look. As an option, the body color may also be used. When using any of the painting options, it is recommended that all four wheels be refinished in order to maintain color uniformity. Refer to GM Aluminum Refinishing Bulletin #53-17-03A for specific procedures and product recommendations. Refinisher's Responsibility - Outside Company Important Some outside companies are offering wheel refinishing services. Such refinished wheels will be permanently marked by the refinisher and are warranted by the refinisher. Any process that re-machines or otherwise re-manufactures the wheel should not be used. A refinisher's responsibility includes inspecting for cracks using the Zyglo system or the equivalent. Any cracked wheels must not be refinished. No welding, hammering or reforming of any kind is allowed. The wheel ID must be recorded and follow the wheel throughout the process in order to assure that the same wheel is returned. A plastic media blast may be used for clean up of the wheel. Hand and/or lathe sanding of the machined surface and the wheel window is allowed. Material removal, though, must be kept to a minimum. Re-machining of the wheel is not allowed. Paint and/or clear coat must not be present on the following surfaces: the nut chamfers, the wheel mounting surfaces and the wheel pilot hole. The refinisher must permanently ID stamp the wheel and warrant the painted/clearcoated surfaces for a minimum of one year or the remainder of the new vehicle warranty, whichever is Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 99-08-51-007E > Mar > 11 > Wheels/Tires Refinishing Aluminum Wheels > Page 10326 longer. Important Whenever a wheel is refinished, the mounting surface and the wheel nut contact surfaces must not be painted or clearcoated. Coating these surfaces could affect the wheel nut torque. When re-mounting a tire on an aluminum wheel, coated balance weights must be used in order to reduce the chance of future cosmetic damage. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 06-03-10-010A > Jun > 10 > Wheels - Changing Procedures/Precautions Wheels: All Technical Service Bulletins Wheels - Changing Procedures/Precautions INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 06-03-10-010A Date: June 09, 2010 Subject: Information on Proper Wheel Changing Procedures and Cautions Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks 2010 and Prior HUMMER Models 2005-2009 Saab 9-7X 2005-2009 Saturn Vehicles Attention: Complete wheel changing instructions for each vehicle line can be found under Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation in Service Information (SI). This bulletin is intended to quickly review and reinforce simple but vital procedures to reduce the possibility of achieving low torque during wheel installation. Always refer to SI for wheel lug nut torque specifications and complete jacking instructions for safe wheel changing. Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to include the 2011 model year and update the available special tool list. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 06-03-10-010 (Section 03 Suspension). Frequency of Wheel Changes - Marketplace Driven Just a few years ago, the increasing longevity of tires along with greater resistance to punctures had greatly reduced the number of times wheels were removed to basically required tire rotation intervals. Today with the booming business in accessory wheels/special application tires (such as winter tires), consumers are having tire/wheel assemblies removed - replaced - or installed more than ever. With this increased activity, it opens up more of a chance for error on the part of the technician. This bulletin will review a few of the common concerns and mistakes to make yourself aware of. Proper Servicing Starts With the Right Tools The following tools have been made available to assist in proper wheel and tire removal and installation. - J 41013 Rotor Resurfacing Kit (or equivalent) - J 42450-A Wheel Hub Resurfacing Kit (or equivalent) Corroded Surfaces One area of concern is corrosion on the mating surfaces of the wheel to the hub on the vehicle. Excessive corrosion, dirt, rust or debris built up on these surfaces can mimic a properly tightened wheel in the service stall. Once the vehicle is driven, the debris may loosen, grind up or be washed away from water splash. This action may result in clearance at the mating surface of the wheel and an under-torqued condition. Caution Before installing a wheel, remove any buildup on the wheel mounting surface and brake drum or brake disc mounting surface. Installing wheels with poor metal-to-metal contact at the mounting surfaces can cause wheel nuts to loosen. This may cause a wheel to come off when the vehicle is moving, possibly resulting in a loss of control or personal injury. Whenever you remove the tire/wheel assemblies, you must inspect the mating surfaces. If corrosion is found, you should remove the debris with a die grinder equipped with a fine sanding pad, wire brush or cleaning disc. Just remove enough material to assure a clean, smooth mating surface. The J 41013 (or equivalent) can be used to clean the following surfaces: - The hub mounting surface - The brake rotor mounting surface - The wheel mounting surface Use the J 42450-A (or equivalent) to clean around the base of the studs and the hub. Lubricants, Grease and Fluids Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 06-03-10-010A > Jun > 10 > Wheels - Changing Procedures/Precautions > Page 10331 Some customers may use penetrating oils, grease or other lubricants on wheel studs to aid in removal or installation. Always use a suitable cleaner/solvent to remove these lubricants prior to installing the wheel and tire assemblies. Lubricants left on the wheel studs may cause improper readings of wheel nut torque. Always install wheels to clean, dry wheel studs ONLY. Notice Lubricants left on the wheel studs or vertical mounting surfaces between the wheel and the rotor or drum may cause the wheel to work itself loose after the vehicle is driven. Always install wheels to clean, dry wheel studs and surfaces ONLY. Beginning with 2011 model year vehicles, put a light coating of grease, GM P/N 1051344 (in Canada, P/N 9930370), on the inner surface of the wheel pilot hole to prevent wheel seizure to the axle or bearing hub. Wheel Stud and Lug Nut Damage Always inspect the wheel studs and lug nuts for signs of damage from crossthreading or abuse. You should never have to force wheel nuts down the stud. Lug nuts that are damaged may not retain properly, yet give the impression of fully tightening. Always inspect and replace any component suspected of damage. Tip Always start wheel nuts by hand! Be certain that all wheel nut threads have been engaged BEFORE tightening the nut. Important If the vehicle has directional tread tires, verify the directional arrow on the outboard side of the tire is pointing in the direction of forward rotation. Wheel Nut Tightening and Torque Improper wheel nut tightening can lead to brake pulsation and rotor damage. In order to avoid additional brake repairs, evenly tighten the wheel nuts to the proper torque specification as shown for each vehicle in SI. Always observe the proper wheel nut tightening sequence as shown below in order to avoid trapping the wheel on the wheel stud threads or clamping the wheel slightly off center resulting in vibration. The Most Important Service You Provide While the above information is well known, and wheel removal so common, technicians run the risk of becoming complacent on this very important Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 06-03-10-010A > Jun > 10 > Wheels - Changing Procedures/Precautions > Page 10332 service operation. A simple distraction or time constraint that rushes the job may result in personal injury if the greatest of care is not exercised. Make it a habit to double check your work and to always side with caution when installing wheels. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 00-03-10-006F > May > 10 > Wheels/Tires - Tire Radial Force Variation (RFV) Wheels: All Technical Service Bulletins Wheels/Tires - Tire Radial Force Variation (RFV) INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 00-03-10-006F Date: May 04, 2010 Subject: Information on Tire Radial Force Variation (RFV) Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X 2000-2005 Saturn L Series 2003-2007 Saturn ION Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to considerably expand the available information on Radial Force Variation (RFV) and should be reviewed in whole. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 00-03-10-006E (Section 03 - Suspension). Important - Before measuring tires on equipment such as the Hunter GSP9700, the vehicle MUST be driven a minimum of 16 km (10 mi) to ensure removal of any flat-spotting. Refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 03-03-10-007E - Tire/Wheel Characteristics of GM Original Equipment Tires. - Equipment such as the Hunter GSP9700 MUST be calibrated prior to measuring tire/wheel assemblies for each vehicle. The purpose of this bulletin is to provide guidance to GM dealers when using tire force variation measurement equipment, such as the Hunter GSP9700. This type of equipment can be a valuable tool in diagnosing vehicle ride concerns. The most common ride concern involving tire radial force variation is highway speed shake on smooth roads. Tire related smooth road highway speed shake can be caused by three conditions: imbalance, out of round and tire force variation. These three conditions are not necessarily related. All three conditions must be addressed. Imbalance is normally addressed first, because it is the simpler of the three to correct. Off-vehicle, two plane dynamic wheel balancers are readily available and can accurately correct any imbalance. Balancer calibration and maintenance, proper attachment of the wheel to the balancer, and proper balance weights, are all factors required for a quality balance. However, a perfectly balanced tire/wheel assembly can still be "oval shaped" and cause a vibration. Before balancing, perform the following procedures. Tire and Wheel Diagnosis 1. Set the tire pressure to the placard values. 2. With the vehicle raised, ensure the wheels are centered on the hub by loosening all wheel nuts and hand-tightening all nuts first by hand while shaking the wheel, then torque to specifications using a torque wrench, NOT a torque stick. 3. Visually inspect the tires and the wheels. Inspect for evidence of the following conditions and correct as necessary: - Missing balance weights - Bent rim flange - Irregular tire wear - Incomplete bead seating - Tire irregularities (including pressure settings) - Mud/ice build-up in wheel - Stones in the tire tread - Remove any aftermarket wheels and/or tires and restore vehicle to original condition prior to diagnosing a smooth road shake condition. 4. Road test the vehicle using the Electronic Vibration Analyzer (EVA) essential tool. Drive for a sufficient distance on a known, smooth road surface to duplicate the condition. Determine if the vehicle is sensitive to brake apply. If the brakes are applied lightly and the pulsation felt in the steering wheel increases, refer to the Brakes section of the service manual that deals with brake-induced pulsation. If you can start to hear the vibration as a low boom noise (in addition to feeling it), but cannot see it, the vehicle likely has a first order (one pulse per propshaft revolution) driveline vibration. Driveline first order vibrations are high enough in frequency that most humans can start to hear them at highway speeds, but are too high to be able to be easily seen. These issues can be caused by driveline imbalance or misalignment. If the vehicle exhibits this low boom and the booming pulses in-and-out on a regular basis (like a throbbing), chances are good that the vehicle could have driveline vibration. This type Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 00-03-10-006F > May > 10 > Wheels/Tires - Tire Radial Force Variation (RFV) > Page 10337 of vibration is normally felt more in the "seat of the pants" than the steering wheel. 5. Next, record the Hertz (Hz) reading as displayed by the EVA onto the tire data worksheet found at the end of this bulletin. This should be done after a tire break-in period of at least 16 km (10 mi) at 72 km/h (45 mph) or greater, in order to eliminate any possible tire flat-spotting. This reading confirms what the vehicle vibration frequency is prior to vehicle service and documents the amount of improvement occurring as the result of the various steps taken to repair. Completing the Steering Wheel Shake Worksheet below is required. A copy of the completed worksheet must be saved with the R.O. and a copy included with any parts returned to the Warranty Parts Center for analysis. A reading of 35 to 50 Hz typically indicates a first order propshaft vibration. If this is the situation, refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 08-07-30-044D. Generally, a reading between 10 and 20 Hz indicates a tire/wheel vibration and if this is the reading obtained, continue using this bulletin. If the tire 1st order vibration goes away and stays away during this evaluation, the cause is likely tire flat-spotting. Tire flat-spotting vibration may come and go at any speed over 72 km/h (45 mph) during the first 10 minutes of operation, if vibration continues after 10 minutes of driving at speeds greater than 72 km/h (45 mph), tire flat-spotting can be ruled out as the cause for vibration. 6. If flat-spotting is the cause, provide the explanation that this has occurred due to the vehicle being parked for long periods of time and that the nature of the tire is to take a set. Refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 03-03-10-007E: Information on Tire/Wheel Characteristics (Vibration, Balance, Shake, Flat Spotting) of GM Original Equipment Tires. 7. If the road test indicates a shake/vibration exists, check the imbalance of each tire/wheel assembly on a known, calibrated, off-car dynamic balancer.Make sure the mounting surface of the wheel and the surface of the balancer are absolutely clean and free of debris. Be sure to chose the proper cone/collet for the wheel, and always use the pilot bore for centering. Never center the wheel using the hub-cap bore since it is not a precision machined surface. If any assembly calls for more than 1/4 ounce on either rim flange, remove all balance weights and rebalance to as close to zero as possible. If you can see the vibration (along with feeling it) in the steering wheel (driving straight without your hands on the wheel), it is very likely to be a tire/wheel first order (one pulse per revolution) disturbance. First order disturbances can be caused by imbalance as well as non-uniformities in tires, wheels or hubs. This first order frequency is too low for a human to hear, but if the amplitude is high enough, it can be seen. If a vibration or shake still exists after balancing, any out of round conditions, of the wheel, and force variation conditions of the tire, must be addressed. Equipment such as the Hunter GSP9700 can address both (it is also a wheel balancer). Tire radial force vibration (RFV) can be defined as the amount of stiffness variation the tire will produce in one revolution under a constant load. Radial force variation is what the vehicle feels because the load (weight) of the vehicle is always on the tires. Although free runout of tires (not under load) is not always a good indicator of a smooth ride, it is critical that total tire/wheel assembly runout be within specification. Equipment such as the Hunter GSP9700 loads the tire, similar to on the vehicle, and measures radial force variation of the tire/wheel assembly. Note that the wheel is affecting the tire's RFV measurement at this point. To isolate the wheel, its runout must be measured. This can be easily done on the Hunter, without the need to set up dial indicators. If the wheel meets the runout specification, the tire's RFV can then be addressed. After measuring the tire/wheel assembly under load, and the wheel alone, the machine then calculates (predicts) the radial force variation of the tire. However, because this is a prediction that can include mounting inaccuracies, and the load wheel is much smaller in diameter than used in tire production, this type of service equipment should NOT be used to audit new tires. Rather, it should be used as a service diagnostic tool to minimize radial force variation of the tire/wheel assembly. Equipment such as the Hunter GSP9700 does an excellent job of measuring wheel runout, and of finding the low point of the wheel (for runout) and the high point of the tire (for radial force variation). This allows the tire to be matched mounted to the wheel for lowest tire/wheel assembly force variation. The machine will simplify this process into easy steps. The following assembly radial force variation numbers should be used as a guide: When measuring RFV and match mounting tires perform the following steps. Measuring Wheel Runout and Assembly Radial Force Variation Important The completed worksheet at the end of this bulletin must be attached to the hard copy of the repair order. - Measure radial force variation and radial runout. - If a road force/balancing machine is used, record the radial force variation (RFV) on the worksheet at the end of this bulletin. It may be of benefit to have the lowest RFV assembly to the front left corner. If the machine is not available and the EVA data suggests there is an issue, swap the tire and wheel assemblies from the front to the back. Re-check on the EVA and if the problem still exists, test another vehicle to find tires that do not exhibit the same frequency and swap those tires onto the subject vehicle. - If a runout/balancing machine is used, record the radial runout of the tire/wheel assemblies on the worksheet at the end of this bulletin. If one or more of the tire/wheel assemblies are more than.040 in (1.02 mm), match mount the tire to the wheel to get below.040 in (1.02 mm). For sensitive customers, readings of 0.030 inch (0.76 mm) or less are preferable, it may also be of benefit to have the lowest runout assembly to the front left corner. If the machine is not available and the EVA data suggests there is an issue, swap the tire and wheel assemblies from the front to the back. Re-check on the EVA and if the problem still exists, test another vehicle to find tires that do not exhibit the same frequency and swap those tires Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 00-03-10-006F > May > 10 > Wheels/Tires - Tire Radial Force Variation (RFV) > Page 10338 onto the subject vehicle. - After match mounting, the tire/wheel assembly must be rebalanced. If match mounting tires to in-spec wheels produces assembly values higher than these, tire replacement may be necessary. Replacing tires at lower values will probably mean good tires are being condemned. Because tires can sometimes become temporarily flat-spotted, which will affect force variation, it is important that the vehicle be driven at least 16 km (10 mi) prior to measuring. Tire pressure must also be adjusted to the usage pressure on the vehicle's tire placard prior to measuring. Most GM vehicles will tolerate radial force variation up to these levels. However, some vehicles are more sensitive, and may require lower levels. Also, there are other tire parameters that equipment such as the Hunter GSP9700 cannot measure that may be a factor. In such cases, TAC should be contacted for further instructions. Important - When mounting a GM wheel to a wheel balancer/force variation machine, always use the wheel's center pilot hole. This is the primary centering mechanism on all GM wheels; the bolt holes are secondary. Usually a back cone method to the machine should be used. For added accuracy and repeatability, a flange plate should be used to clamp the wheel onto the cone and machine. This system is offered by all balancer manufacturers in GM's dealer program. - Any type of service equipment that removes tread rubber by grinding, buffing or truing is NOT recommended, and may void the tire warranty. However, tires may have been ground by the tire company as part of their tire manufacturing process. This is a legitimate procedure. Steering Wheel Shake Worksheet When diagnosing vibration concerns, use the following worksheet in conjunction with the appropriate Vibration Analysis-Road testing procedure in the Vibration Correction sub-section in SI. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 00-03-10-006F > May > 10 > Wheels/Tires - Tire Radial Force Variation (RFV) > Page 10339 Refer to the appropriate section of SI for specifications and repair procedures that are related to the vibration concern. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 05-03-10-003F > Apr > 10 > Tires/Wheels - Low Tire/Leaking Cast Aluminum Wheels Wheels: All Technical Service Bulletins Tires/Wheels - Low Tire/Leaking Cast Aluminum Wheels TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 05-03-10-003F Date: April 27, 2010 Subject: Low Tire Pressure, Leaking Cast Aluminum Wheels (Repair with Adhesive Sealant) Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (Including Saturn) 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X with Cast Aluminum Wheels Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the model years and the bulletin reference information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 05-03-10-003E (Section 03 - Suspension). Condition Some customers may comment on a low tire pressure condition. Diagnosis of the low tire pressure condition indicates an air leak through the cast aluminum wheel. Cause Porosity in the cast aluminum wheel may be the cause. Notice This bulletin specifically addresses issues related to the wheel casting that may result in an air leak. For issues related to corrosion of the wheel in service, please refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 08-03-10-006C - Tire Slowly Goes Flat, Tire Air Loss, Low Tire Pressure Warning Light Illuminated, Aluminum Wheel Bead Seat Corrosion (Clean and Resurface Wheel Bead Seat). Correction 1. Remove the tire and wheel assembly from the vehicle. Refer to the appropriate service procedure in SI. 2. Locate the leaking area by inflating the tire to 276 kPa (40 psi) and dipping the tire/wheel assembly in a water bath, or use a spray bottle with soap and water to locate the specific leak location. Important - If the porosity leak is located in the bead area of the aluminum rim (where the tire meets the rim), the wheel should be replaced. - If two or more leaks are located on one wheel, the wheel should be replaced. 3. If air bubbles are observed, mark the location. - If the leak location is on the tire/rubber area, refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 04-03-10-001F Tire Puncture Repair Procedures for All Cars and Light Duty Trucks. - If the leak is located on the aluminum wheel area, continue with the next step. 4. Inscribe a mark on the tire at the valve stem in order to indicate the orientation of the tire to the wheel. 5. Dismount the tire from the wheel. Refer to Tire Mounting and Dismounting. 6. Remove the tire pressure sensor. Refer to Tire Pressure Sensor removal procedure in SI. 7. Scuff the INSIDE rim surface at the leak area with #80 grit paper and clean the area with general purpose cleaner, such as 3M(R) General Purpose Adhesive Cleaner, P/N 08984, or equivalent. 8. Apply a 3 mm (0.12 in) thick layer of Silicone - Adhesive/Sealant, P/N 12378478 (in Canada, use 88900041), or equivalent, to the leak area. 9. Allow for the adhesive/sealant to dry. Notice Caution must be used when mounting the tire so as not to damage the sealer. Damaging the repair area may result in an air leak. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 05-03-10-003F > Apr > 10 > Tires/Wheels - Low Tire/Leaking Cast Aluminum Wheels > Page 10344 10. Align the inscribed mark on the tire with the valve stem on the wheel. 11. Reinstall the Tire Pressure Sensor. Refer to Tire Pressure Sensor installation procedure in SI. 12. Mount the tire on the wheel. Refer to Tire Mounting and Dismounting. 13. Pressurize the tire to 276 kPa (40 psi) and inspect for leaks. 14. Adjust tire pressure to meet the placard specification. 15. Balance the tire/wheel assembly. Refer to Tire and Wheel Assembly Balancing - Off-Vehicle. 16. Install the tire and wheel assembly onto the vehicle. Refer to the appropriate service procedure in SI. Parts Information Warranty Information (excluding Saab U.S. Models) Important The Silicone - Adhesive/Sealant comes in a case quantity of six. ONLY charge warranty one tube of adhesive/sealant per wheel repair. For vehicles repaired under warranty, use: One leak repair per wheel. Warranty Information (Saab U.S. Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table above. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 08-03-10-006C > Apr > 10 > Tires/Wheels - Tire Slowly Goes Flat/Warning Light ON Wheels: All Technical Service Bulletins Tires/Wheels - Tire Slowly Goes Flat/Warning Light ON TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 08-03-10-006C Date: April 27, 2010 Subject: Tire Slowly Goes Flat, Tire Air Loss, Low Tire Pressure Warning Light Illuminated, Aluminum Wheel Bead Seat Corrosion (Clean and Resurface Wheel Bead Seat) Models: 2000-2011 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (including Saturn) 2003-2009 HUMMER H2 2006-2010 HUMMER H3 2005-2009 Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 08-03-10-006B (Section 03 - Suspension). Condition Some customers may comment on a tire that slowly loses air pressure over a period of days or weeks. Cause Abrasive elements in the environment may intrude between the tire and wheel at the bead seat. There is always some relative motion between the tire and wheel (when the vehicle is driven) and this motion may cause the abrasive particles to wear the wheel and tire materials. As the wear continues, there may also be intrusion at the tire/wheel interface by corrosive media from the environment. Eventually a path for air develops and a 'slow' leak may ensue. This corrosion may appear on the inboard or outboard bead seating surface of the wheel. This corrosion will not be visible until the tire is dismounted from the wheel. Notice This bulletin specifically addresses issues related to wheel bead seat corrosion that may result in an air leak. For issues related to porosity of the wheel casting that may result in an air leak, please refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 05-03-10-006F - Low Tire Pressure, Leaking Cast Aluminum Wheels (Repair with Adhesive Sealant) Correction In most cases, this type of air loss can be corrected by following the procedure below. Important DO NOT replace a wheel for slow air loss unless you have evaluated and/or tried to repair the wheel with the procedure below. Notice The repair is no longer advised or applicable for chromed aluminum wheels. 1. Remove the wheel and tire assembly for diagnosis. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation in SI. 2. After a water dunk tank leak test, if you determine the source of the air leak to be around the bead seat of the wheel, dismount the tire to examine the bead seat. Shown below is a typical area of bead seat corrosion.Typical Location of Bead Seat Corrosion Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 08-03-10-006C > Apr > 10 > Tires/Wheels - Tire Slowly Goes Flat/Warning Light ON > Page 10349 Important Other forms of slow air leaks are possible. If the body of the tire, valve stem and wheel flange show no signs of air seepage, refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 05-03-10-003D for additional information on possible wheel porosity issues. 3. Bead seat corrosion is identified by what appears like blistering of the wheel finish, causing a rough or uneven surface that is difficult for the tire to maintain a proper seal on. Below is a close-up photo of bead seat corrosion on an aluminum wheel that was sufficient to cause slow air loss. Close-Up of Bead Seat Corrosion 4. If corrosion is found on the wheel bead seat, measure the affected area as shown below. - For vehicles with 32,186 km (20,000 mi) or less, the total allowable combined linear area of repairable corrosion is 100 mm (4 in) or less. If the total area(s) of corrosion exceed these dimensions, the wheel should be replaced. - For vehicles that have exceeded 32,186 km (20,000 mi), the total allowable combined linear area of repairable corrosion is 200 mm (8 in) or less. If the total area(s) of corrosion exceed these dimensions, the wheel should be replaced. 5. In order to correct the wheel leak, use a clean-up (fine cut) sanding disc or biscuit to remove the corrosion and any flaking paint. You should remove the corrosion back far enough until you reach material that is stable and firmly bonded to the wheel. Try to taper the edge of any flaking paint as best you can in order to avoid sharp edges that may increase the chance of a leak reoccurring. The photo below shows an acceptable repaired surface. Notice Corrosion that extends up the lip of the wheel, where after the clean-up process it would be visible with the tire mounted, is only acceptable on the inboard flange. The inboard flange is not visible with the wheel assembly in the mounted position. If any loose coatings or corrosion extend to the visible surfaces on the FACE of the wheel, that wheel must be replaced. Important Remove ONLY the material required to eliminate the corrosion from the bead seating surface. DO NOT remove excessive amounts of material. ALWAYS keep the sealing surface as smooth and level as possible. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 08-03-10-006C > Apr > 10 > Tires/Wheels - Tire Slowly Goes Flat/Warning Light ON > Page 10350 Acceptably Prepared (Cleaned-Up) Wheel Surface 6. Once the corrosion has been eliminated, you should coat the repaired area with a commercially available tire sealant such as Patch Brand Bead Sealant or equivalent. Commercially available bead sealants are black rubber-like coatings that will permanently fill and seal the resurfaced bead seat. At 21°C (70°F) ambient temperature, this sealant will set-up sufficiently for tire mounting in about 10 minutes.Coated and Sealed Bead Seat 7. Remount the tire and install the repaired wheel and tire assembly. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation in SI. Parts Information Patch Brand Bead Sealer is available from Myers Tires at 1-800-998-9897 or on the web at www.myerstiresupply.com. The one-quart size can of sealer will repair about 20 wheels. Warranty Information (excluding Saab U.S. Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use: Warranty Information (Saab U.S. Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table above. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 08-03-10-006C > Apr > 10 > Tires/Wheels - Tire Slowly Goes Flat/Warning Light ON > Page 10351 Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 00-03-10-002F > Apr > 11 > Wheels - Chrome Wheel Staining/Pitting/Corrosion Wheels: All Technical Service Bulletins Wheels - Chrome Wheel Staining/Pitting/Corrosion INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 00-03-10-002F Date: April 21, 2011 Subject: Chemical Staining, Pitting, Corrosion and/or Spotted Appearance of Chromed Aluminum Wheels Models: 2012 and Prior GM Cars and Trucks Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update model years, suggest additional restorative products and add additional corrosion information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 00-03-10-002E (Section 03 - Suspension). Important You may give a copy of this bulletin to the customer. What is Chemical Staining of Chrome Wheels? Figure 1 Chemical staining in most cases results from acid based cleaners (refer to Figure 1 for an example). These stains are frequently milky, black, or greenish in appearance. They result from using cleaning solutions that contain acids on chrome wheels. Soap and water is usually sufficient to clean wheels. If the customer insists on using a wheel cleaner they should only use one that specifically states that it is safe for chromed wheels and does not contain anything in the following list. (Dealers should also survey any products they use during prep or normal cleaning of stock units for these chemicals.) - Ammonium Bifluoride (fluoride source for dissolution of chrome) - Hydrofluoric Acid (directly dissolves chrome) - Hydrochloric Acid (directly dissolves chrome) - Sodium Dodecylbenzenesulfonic Acid - Sulfamic Acid - Phosphoric Acid - Hydroxyacetic Acid Notice Many wheel cleaner instructions advise to take care to avoid contact with painted surfaces. Most customers think of painted surfaces as the fenders, quarter panels and other exterior sheet metal. Many vehicles have painted brake calipers. Acidic wheel cleaners may craze, crack, or discolor the paint on the brake calipers. Damage from wheel cleaners is not covered under the vehicle new car warranty. Soap and water applied with a soft brush is usually all that is required to clean the calipers. Whenever any wheel cleaner is used, it must be THOROUGHLY rinsed off of the wheel with clean, clear water. Special care must be taken to rinse under the hub cap, balance weights, wheel nuts, lug nut caps, between the wheel cladding and off the back side of the wheel. Wheels returned to the Warranty Parts Center (WPC) that exhibit damage from wheel cleaners most often have the damage around and under the wheel weight where the cleaner was incompletely flushed away. Notice Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 00-03-10-002F > Apr > 11 > Wheels - Chrome Wheel Staining/Pitting/Corrosion > Page 10357 Do not use cleaning solutions that contain hydrofluoric, oxalic and most other acids on chrome wheels (or any wheels). If the customer is unsure of the chemical make-up of a particular wheel cleaner, it should be avoided. For wheels showing signs of milky staining from acidic cleaners, refer to Customer Assistance and Instructions below. Warranty of Stained Chrome Wheels Stained wheels are not warrantable. Most acid based cleaners will permanently stain chrome wheels. Follow-up with dealers has confirmed that such cleaners were used on wheels that were returned to the Warranty Parts Center (WPC). Any stained wheels received by the WPC will be charged back to the dealership. To assist the customer, refer to Customer Assistance and Instructions below. Pitting or Spotted Appearance of Chrome Wheels Figure 2 A second type or staining or finish disturbance may result from road chemicals, such as calcium chloride used for dust control of unpaved roads. The staining will look like small pitting (refer to Figure 2). This staining will usually be on the leading edges of each wheel spoke, but may be uniformly distributed. If a vehicle must be operated under such conditions, the chrome wheels should be washed with mild soap and water and thoroughly rinsed as soon as conveniently possible. Important Road chemicals, such as calcium chloride used for dust control of unpaved roads, can also stain chrome wheels. The staining will look like small pitting. This staining will usually be on the leading edges of each wheel spoke. This is explained by the vehicle traveling in the forward direction while being splashed by the road chemical. If a vehicle must be operated under such conditions, the chrome wheels should be washed with mild soap and water and thoroughly rinsed as soon as conveniently possible. Warranty of Pitted or Spotted Chrome Wheels Wheels returned with pitting or spotting as a result of road chemicals may be replaced one time. Damage resulting from contact with these applied road chemicals is corrosive to the wheels finish and may cause damage if the wheels are not kept clean. Important Notify the customer that this is a one time replacement. Please stress to the customer the vital importance of keeping the wheels clean if they are operating the vehicle in an area that applies calcium chloride or other dust controlling chemicals! "GM of Canada" dealers require prior approval by the District Manager - Customer Care and Service Process (DM-CCSP). "Stardust" Corrosion of Chrome Wheels Figure 3 A third type of finish disturbance results from prolonged exposure to brake dust and resultant penetration of brake dust through the chrome. As brakes are applied hot particles of brake material are thrown off and tend to be forced through the leading edge of the wheel spoke windows by airflow. These Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 00-03-10-002F > Apr > 11 > Wheels - Chrome Wheel Staining/Pitting/Corrosion > Page 10358 hot particles embed themselves in the chrome layer and create a small pit. If the material is allowed to sit on the wheel while it is exposed to moisture or salt, it will corrode the wheel beneath the chrome leaving a pit or small blister in the chrome. Heavy brake dust build-up should be removed from wheels by using GM Chrome Cleaner and Polish, P/N 1050173 (in Canada use 10953013). For moderate cleaning, light brake dust build-up or water spots use GM Swirl Remover Polish, P/N 12377965 (in Canada, use Meguiars Plast-X(TM) Clear Plastic Cleaner and Polish #G12310C**). After cleaning, the wheel should be waxed using GM Cleaner Wax, P/N 12377966 (in Canada, use Meguiars Cleaner Wax #M0616C**), which will help protect the wheel from brake dust and reduce adhesion of any brake dust that gets on the wheel surface. For general maintenance cleaning, PEEK Metal Polish† may be used. It will clean and shine the chrome and leave behind a wax coating that may help protect the finish. Warranty of Stardust Corroded Chrome Wheels Wheels returned with pitting or spotting as a result of neglect and brake dust build-up may be replaced one time. Important Notify the customer that this is a one time replacement. Please stress to the customer the vital importance of keeping the wheels clean and free of prolonged exposure to brake dust build-up. "GM of Canada" dealers require prior approval by the District Manager - Customer Care and Service Process (DM-CCSP). Customer Assistance and Instructions GM has looked for ways customers may improve the appearance of wheels damaged by acidic cleaners. The following product and procedure has been found to dramatically improve the appearance of stained wheels. For wheels that have milky stains caused by acidic cleaners try the following: Notice THE 3M CHROME AND METAL POLISH REQUIRED FOR THIS PROCEDURE IS AN EXTREMELY AGGRESSIVE POLISH/CLEANER. THE WHEELS MUST BE CLEANED BEFORE APPLICATION TO AVOID SCRATCHING THE WHEEL SURFACE. THIS PRODUCT WILL REDUCE THE THICKNESS OF THE CHROME PLATING ON THE WHEEL AND IF USED INCORRECTLY OR EXCESSIVELY MAY REMOVE THE CHROME PLATING ALL TOGETHER, EXPOSING A LESS BRIGHT AND BRASSY COLORED SUB-LAYER. FOLLOW INSTRUCTIONS EXACTLY. 1. Wash the wheels with vigorously with soap and water. This step will clean and may reduce wheel staining. Flood all areas of the wheel with water to rinse. 2. Dry the wheels completely. Notice Begin with a small section of the wheel and with light pressure buff off polish and examine results. ONLY apply and rub with sufficient force and time to remove enough staining that you are satisfied with the results. Some wheels may be stained to the extent that you may only achieve a 50% improvement while others may be able to be restored to the original lustre. IN ALL CASES, only apply until the results are satisfactory. 3. Apply 3M Chrome and Metal Polish #39527* with a clean terry cloth towel. As you apply the polish, the staining will be diminished. 4. When dry, buff off the polish with a clean portion of the towel. 5. Repeat application of the 3M Chrome and Metal Polish until satisfied with the results. If continued applications fail to improve the appearance further discontinue use. This procedure will improve the appearance of the wheels and may, with repeated applications, restore the finish dramatically. For wheels that exhibit spotting from road chemicals the above procedure may marginally improve the condition but will not restore the finish or remove the pitting. In this type of staining the wheel finish has actually been removed in spots and no manner of cleaning will restore the finish. †*We believe this source and their products to be reliable. There may be additional manufacturers of such products/materials. General Motors does not endorse, indicate any preference for or assume any responsibility for the products or material from this firm or for any such items that may be available from other sources. Parts Information Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 00-03-10-002F > Apr > 11 > Wheels - Chrome Wheel Staining/Pitting/Corrosion > Page 10359 *This product is currently available from 3M. To obtain information for your local retail location please call 3M at 1-888-364-3577. **This product is currently available from Meguiars (Canada). To obtain information for your local retail location please call Meguiars at 1-800-347-5700 or at www.meguiarscanada.com. ^ This product is currently available from Tri-Peek International. To obtain information for your local retail location please call Tri-Peek at 1-877-615-4272 or at www.tripeek.com. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 09-03-10-011A > Mar > 11 > Tires/Wheels - 19 Inch Wheels Available through GM Wheels: All Technical Service Bulletins Tires/Wheels - 19 Inch Wheels Available through GM INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 09-03-10-011A Date: March 21, 2011 Subject: 19 Inch Accessory Wheels Available through GM Accessories Models: 2010-2011 Chevrolet Equinox 2010-2011 GMC Terrain Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add 2011 model year and update information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 09-03-10-011 (Section 03 - Suspension). The purpose of this bulletin is to provide a reference guide for the technician to upgrade a vehicle from factory wheels and tires to 19" wheels and tires, which are available through GM Accessories. This guide will cover tires, wheels, vehicle modifications, and warranty information. Tires GM offers one tire; the Bridgestone Dueler Alenza HL P235/50R19 99H, GM P/N 19190765, to be used in conjunction with the 19" accessory wheels. The Bridgestone Dueler Alenza HL tire has a Tire Performance Criteria (TPC) spec of 1343MS (molded on the sidewall), which meets or exceeds all Federal Safety guidelines. Important - If the vehicle was built with 19" factory wheels, it is OK to install the accessory 19" wheel, but DO NOT install the accessory 19" tire. Please re-use the 19" factory tire. - If the vehicle was built with 17" or 18" factory wheels, ONLY install the accessory 19" tire on the 19" wheel. DO NOT install the 19" factory tire. Mounting and Balancing Refer to the most recent version of Corporate Bulletin Number 08-03-10-004A for proper methods for mounting, balancing and installing accessory wheels and tires. Wheels Wheel (Lug) Nuts Each wheel nut should be torqued in the appropriate torque sequence (refer to graphic) and to 170 Nm (125 lb ft). The torque should be rechecked after the first 160 km (100 mi). To help protect the wheels from theft, a wheel lock kit is also available. Caution Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly tightened wheel nuts can cause the wheel to become loose and even come off. This could lead to an accident. Be sure to use the correct wheel nuts. Care / Cleaning Use soap, hot water and a 100% cotton cloth to clean and polish the new wheels. If using a wheel cleaner, be sure to select one that will not harm the wheel surface. Avoid car washes that use carbide tipped brushes, as these may damage the wheel's finish. Periodically clean the backside of the wheel to Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 09-03-10-011A > Mar > 11 > Tires/Wheels - 19 Inch Wheels Available through GM > Page 10364 remove road grime, brake dust and grease. Mounting and Balancing Refer to the most recent version of Corporate Bulletin Number 08-03-10-004A for proper methods for mounting, balancing and installing accessory wheels and tires. The mounted and balanced wheel/tire assemblies MUST meet GM service guidelines for measured radial force variation to ensure vibration free performance. The following radial force variation numbers for the assembly should be used as a guide: If any wheel/tire assembly does not meet the above standards, refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 00-03-10-006F: Information on Tire Radial Force Variation (RFV) for further information on possible corrective actions. Vehicle Modifications Tire Label After installing the recommended P235/50R19 tires, place the provided tire label on the vehicle. The new tire label should be located within the red box, over the top of the original tire label found on the door jamb. To locate the label within the red box use the upper left hand edge of the red line as a guide. When properly placed, the new tire label will obscure the original tire information. Be sure that the surface is clean and dry. The surface temperature should not be less than 21°C (65°F). The label is provided as a guide for tire inflation pressures and information relevant to occupant/cargo capacities. Tire Type/Pressure Selection To provide a more accurate function of the Tire Pressure Monitoring System, it is necessary to update the body control module (BCM) with the correct tire type and pressure information. The factory 17" and 18" tires have a placard inflation pressure of 241 kPa (35 psi), which must be changed to 250 kPa (36 psi) when upsizing to the 19" accessory tires. Using the Global Diagnostic System (GDS 2), follow the steps listed below to select the appropriate tire type/pressure: 1. Enter "Module Diagnosis". 2. Select "Body Control Module". 3. Select "Configuration/Reset Functions". 4. Select "Tire Type/Pressure Selection". Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM) System To avoid system malfunctions, it is necessary to install tire pressure sensors in the accessory wheels. Replacement sensors can be obtained or sensors from the OE wheels can be transferred to the accessory wheels. After the wheels are installed on the vehicle, it is necessary to learn the new sensor identification codes/locations into the body control module (BCM). TPM Sensor Relearn Procedure Note If using the scan tool (GDS 2) to enable the learn mode, the EL 46079 Diagnostic Tool must be used to activate the sensors. When this preferred method is used, any stray sensor signals will not affect the learn procedure. In the event a particular sensor's information is displayed on the special tool upon activation but the horn does not chirp, it may be necessary to rotate the wheel valve stem to a different position due to the sensor signal is being blocked by another component. If using the keyless entry transmitter or driver information center buttons to enable the learn mode, the EL 46079 Diagnostic Tool or Pressure Increase/Decrease Method may be used. Before proceeding with this method, ensure that no other learn procedure is being performed simultaneously or that tire pressures are not being adjusted on another Tire Pressure Monitor equipped vehicle within close proximity. Stray signals from other tire pressure equipped vehicles just driving by can be inadvertently learned. If any random horn chirps are heard from the vehicle while performing the learn procedure, most likely a stray sensor has been learned and the procedure will need to be cancelled and repeated. Under these circumstances, performing the tire pressure Learn Procedure away from other vehicles may be highly recommended. In the event a particular sensor activation does not cause the horn to chirp, it may be necessary to rotate the wheel valve stem to a different position due to the sensor signal is being blocked by another component. Preferred Scan Tool (GDS 2) Learn Enable Method Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 09-03-10-011A > Mar > 11 > Tires/Wheels - 19 Inch Wheels Available through GM > Page 10365 1. Using a scan tool (GDS 2), initiate the tire pressure Learn Mode. A double horn chirp will sound together with activated turn signal lamps indicating the Learn Mode has been enabled. The left front turn signal only will then be illuminated. 2. Starting with the left front tire, active the sensor by holding the antenna of the EL 46079 Diagnostic Tool aimed upward against the tire sidewall close to the wheel rim at the valve stem location. Press and release the Activate button and wait for a horn chirp. Once all the turn signal lamps have been activated for 3 seconds and the horn chirp has sounded, the sensor information is learned and the turn signal in the next location to be learned will illuminate. 3. After the horn chirp has sounded and the turn signal in the next location to be learned will illuminate, repeat step 2 for the remaining 3 sensors in the following order: 1. Right front 2. Right rear 3. Left rear 4. When the left rear sensor has been learned, all the turn signal lamps have been activated for 3 seconds and a double horn chirp has sounded, the learn process is complete and BCM exits the learn mode. 5. Ignition OFF, adjust all tires to the recommended pressures. Alternate Driver Information Center Learn Enable Method 1. Ignition ON, press and release the driver information center info button on the stalk switch until the tire learn message appears on the driver information center display. Press and hold the set/reset button until all the turn signal lamps have been activated for 3 seconds and a double horn chirp sounded indicating the Learn Mode has been enabled. The left front turn signal will then be illuminated. 2. Starting with the left front tire, learn the tire pressure using one of the following methods: - Hold the antenna of the EL 46079 Diagnostic Tool aimed upward against the tire sidewall close to the wheel rim at the valve stem location. Press and release the activate button and wait for a horn chirp. Once all the turn signal lamps have been activated for 3 seconds and a single horn chirp sounded, the sensor information is learned and the turn signal in the next location to be learned will illuminate. - Increase/decrease the tire pressure 8.3 kPa (1.2 psi) then wait for a horn chirp. The horn chirp may occur before or up to 30 seconds after the pressure increase/decrease. Once the horn chirp has sounded, the sensor information is learned and the turn signal in the next location to be learned will illuminate. 3. After the horn chirp has sounded the turn signal in the next location to be learned will illuminate, repeat step 2 for the remaining 3 sensors in the following order: 1. Right front 2. Right rear 3. Left rear 4. When the left rear sensor has been learned and all the turn signal lamps have been activated for 3 seconds and a double horn chirp has sounded, the learn process is complete and BCM exits the learn mode. 5. Ignition OFF, adjust all tires to the recommended pressures. Engine Control Module (ECM) Reprogramming Important For proper vehicle operation and to insure coverage under the provisions of the new vehicle warranty, the vehicle must be programmed with the correct calibration as soon as the 19" wheels are installed. When upsizing from 17" wheels only, the ECM must be reprogrammed for speedometer accuracy. Contact Techline to obtain a VCI number. Record this number on the form below. Use the Service Programming System (SPS). Checking and Clearing DTCs After Reprogramming DTCs codes may be set as a result of the programming process. In most cases the codes can be cleared. Calibration Information Documentation 1. Make a copy of the "Accessory Wheel and Tire Information Form" included in this bulletin. 2. Provide all information required on the form. 3. Make a copy of the completed form for the customer to keep in the vehicle along with their Owner's Manual. 4. File the original completed form in the Dealership's Vehicle Service History folder. Important: If original equipment tires/wheels are reinstalled, it will be necessary to reset the programming of the ECM to the original specifications. Warranty Information Wheels Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 09-03-10-011A > Mar > 11 > Tires/Wheels - 19 Inch Wheels Available through GM > Page 10366 All GM Accessories sold and permanently installed on a GM vehicle PRIOR to new vehicle delivery will be covered under the provisions of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. For the U.S., in the event GM Accessories are installed AFTER new vehicle delivery, or are replaced under the new vehicle warranty, they will be covered (parts and labor) for the balance of the vehicle warranty, but in no event less than 12 months/12,000 miles. This coverage is only effective for GM Accessories permanently installed by a GM dealer or a GM approved ADI (Accessory Distributor / Installer). For Canada, in the event GM Accessories are installed AFTER new vehicle delivery, they will be covered (parts and labor) for the balance of the vehicle warranty, or up to 12 months/unlimited kilometers depending on month installed. For replacement after the new vehicle warranty expires, but within the 12 months/unlimited kilometers coverage, refer to claim type ZPTI guidelines. GM Accessories sold over-the-counter, or those not requiring installation, will continue to receive the standard GM Dealer Parts Warranty of 12 months from the date of purchase (parts only). Tires Any approved tire installed on a GM Vehicle PRIOR to delivery will be covered under the provisions of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Tires are covered against defects in material and workmanship. Tires are warranted for defects "without" prorated charge for tread mileage. Subsequent replacements under this warranty will continue to be covered for the remainder of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Any approved tire installed on a GM Vehicle PRIOR to delivery may continue to be warranted on a prorated basis by the tire manufacturer once the New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires. Any approved tire installed AFTER delivery will be covered under the provisions of the tire manufacturer warranty. USA dealers should refer to GM Warranty Administration Bulletin 00-03-10-003O for more information. Canadian dealers should refer to GM Warranty Administration Bulletin 01-03-10-003H. ACCESSORY WHEEL AND TIRE INFORMATION FORM Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 09-03-10-011A > Mar > 11 > Tires/Wheels - 19 Inch Wheels Available through GM > Page 10367 You have just modified your vehicle by installing an "Accessory Package" which includes Wheels and Tires. This form contains important information about your accessory installation. In an effort to provide superior service to you, our customer, we ask that you please present this form to your Servicing Dealer when removing or installing wheels and tires on your vehicle. This form contains important information necessary to service your vehicle. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 99-08-51-007E > Mar > 11 > Wheels/Tires Refinishing Aluminum Wheels Wheels: All Technical Service Bulletins Wheels/Tires - Refinishing Aluminum Wheels INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 99-08-51-007E Date: March 17, 2011 Subject: Refinishing Aluminum Wheels Models: 2012 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add additional model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 99-08-51-007D (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). This bulletin updates General Motor's position on refinishing aluminum wheels. GM does not endorse any repairs that involve welding, bending, straightening or re-machining. Only cosmetic refinishing of the wheel's coatings, using recommended procedures, is allowed. Evaluating Damage In evaluating damage, it is the GM Dealer's responsibility to inspect the wheel for corrosion, scrapes, gouges, etc. The Dealer must insure that such damage is not deeper than what can be sanded or polished off. The wheel must be inspected for cracks. If cracks are found, discard the wheel. Any wheels with bent rim flanges must not be repaired or refinished. Wheels that have been refinished by an outside company must be returned to the same vehicle. The Dealer must record the wheel ID stamp or the cast date on the wheel in order to assure this requirement. Refer to Refinisher's Responsibility - Outside Company later in this bulletin. Aluminum Wheel Refinishing Recommendations - Chrome-plated aluminum wheels Re-plating these wheels is not recommended. - Polished aluminum wheels These wheels have a polyester or acrylic clearcoat on them. If the clearcoat is damaged, refinishing is possible. However, the required refinishing process cannot be performed in the dealer environment. Refer to Refinisher's Responsibility - Outside Company later in this bulletin. - Painted aluminum wheels These wheels are painted using a primer, color coat, and clearcoat procedure. If the paint is damaged, refinishing is possible. As with polished wheels, all original coatings must be removed first. Media blasting is recommended. Refer to GM Aluminum Refinishing Bulletin #53-17-03A for the re-painting of this type of wheel. - Bright, machined aluminum wheels These wheels have a polyester or acrylic clearcoat on them. In some cases, the recessed "pocket" areas of the wheel may be painted. Surface refinishing is possible. The wheel must be totally stripped by media blasting or other suitable means. The wheel should be resurfaced by using a sanding process rather than a machining process. This allows the least amount of material to be removed. Important Do not use any re-machining process that removes aluminum. This could affect the dimensions and function of the wheel. Painting is an option to re-clearcoating polished and bright machined aluminum wheels. Paint will better mask any surface imperfections and is somewhat more durable than clearcoat alone. GM recommends using Corsican SILVER WAEQ9283 for a fine "aluminum-like" look or Sparkle SILVER WA9967 for a very bright look. As an option, the body color may also be used. When using any of the painting options, it is recommended that all four wheels be refinished in order to maintain color uniformity. Refer to GM Aluminum Refinishing Bulletin #53-17-03A for specific procedures and product recommendations. Refinisher's Responsibility - Outside Company Important Some outside companies are offering wheel refinishing services. Such refinished wheels will be permanently marked by the refinisher and are warranted by the refinisher. Any process that re-machines or otherwise re-manufactures the wheel should not be used. A refinisher's responsibility includes inspecting for cracks using the Zyglo system or the equivalent. Any cracked wheels must not be refinished. No welding, hammering or reforming of any kind is allowed. The wheel ID must be recorded and follow the wheel throughout the process in order to assure that the same wheel is returned. A plastic media blast may be used for clean up of the wheel. Hand and/or lathe sanding of the machined surface and the wheel window is allowed. Material removal, though, must be kept to a minimum. Re-machining of the wheel is not allowed. Paint and/or clear coat must not be present on the following surfaces: the nut chamfers, the wheel mounting surfaces and the wheel pilot hole. The refinisher must permanently ID stamp the wheel and warrant the painted/clearcoated surfaces for a minimum of one year or the remainder of the new vehicle warranty, whichever is Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 99-08-51-007E > Mar > 11 > Wheels/Tires Refinishing Aluminum Wheels > Page 10372 longer. Important Whenever a wheel is refinished, the mounting surface and the wheel nut contact surfaces must not be painted or clearcoated. Coating these surfaces could affect the wheel nut torque. When re-mounting a tire on an aluminum wheel, coated balance weights must be used in order to reduce the chance of future cosmetic damage. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 06-03-10-010A > Jun > 10 > Wheels - Changing Procedures/Precautions Wheels: All Technical Service Bulletins Wheels - Changing Procedures/Precautions INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 06-03-10-010A Date: June 09, 2010 Subject: Information on Proper Wheel Changing Procedures and Cautions Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks 2010 and Prior HUMMER Models 2005-2009 Saab 9-7X 2005-2009 Saturn Vehicles Attention: Complete wheel changing instructions for each vehicle line can be found under Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation in Service Information (SI). This bulletin is intended to quickly review and reinforce simple but vital procedures to reduce the possibility of achieving low torque during wheel installation. Always refer to SI for wheel lug nut torque specifications and complete jacking instructions for safe wheel changing. Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to include the 2011 model year and update the available special tool list. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 06-03-10-010 (Section 03 Suspension). Frequency of Wheel Changes - Marketplace Driven Just a few years ago, the increasing longevity of tires along with greater resistance to punctures had greatly reduced the number of times wheels were removed to basically required tire rotation intervals. Today with the booming business in accessory wheels/special application tires (such as winter tires), consumers are having tire/wheel assemblies removed - replaced - or installed more than ever. With this increased activity, it opens up more of a chance for error on the part of the technician. This bulletin will review a few of the common concerns and mistakes to make yourself aware of. Proper Servicing Starts With the Right Tools The following tools have been made available to assist in proper wheel and tire removal and installation. - J 41013 Rotor Resurfacing Kit (or equivalent) - J 42450-A Wheel Hub Resurfacing Kit (or equivalent) Corroded Surfaces One area of concern is corrosion on the mating surfaces of the wheel to the hub on the vehicle. Excessive corrosion, dirt, rust or debris built up on these surfaces can mimic a properly tightened wheel in the service stall. Once the vehicle is driven, the debris may loosen, grind up or be washed away from water splash. This action may result in clearance at the mating surface of the wheel and an under-torqued condition. Caution Before installing a wheel, remove any buildup on the wheel mounting surface and brake drum or brake disc mounting surface. Installing wheels with poor metal-to-metal contact at the mounting surfaces can cause wheel nuts to loosen. This may cause a wheel to come off when the vehicle is moving, possibly resulting in a loss of control or personal injury. Whenever you remove the tire/wheel assemblies, you must inspect the mating surfaces. If corrosion is found, you should remove the debris with a die grinder equipped with a fine sanding pad, wire brush or cleaning disc. Just remove enough material to assure a clean, smooth mating surface. The J 41013 (or equivalent) can be used to clean the following surfaces: - The hub mounting surface - The brake rotor mounting surface - The wheel mounting surface Use the J 42450-A (or equivalent) to clean around the base of the studs and the hub. Lubricants, Grease and Fluids Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 06-03-10-010A > Jun > 10 > Wheels - Changing Procedures/Precautions > Page 10377 Some customers may use penetrating oils, grease or other lubricants on wheel studs to aid in removal or installation. Always use a suitable cleaner/solvent to remove these lubricants prior to installing the wheel and tire assemblies. Lubricants left on the wheel studs may cause improper readings of wheel nut torque. Always install wheels to clean, dry wheel studs ONLY. Notice Lubricants left on the wheel studs or vertical mounting surfaces between the wheel and the rotor or drum may cause the wheel to work itself loose after the vehicle is driven. Always install wheels to clean, dry wheel studs and surfaces ONLY. Beginning with 2011 model year vehicles, put a light coating of grease, GM P/N 1051344 (in Canada, P/N 9930370), on the inner surface of the wheel pilot hole to prevent wheel seizure to the axle or bearing hub. Wheel Stud and Lug Nut Damage Always inspect the wheel studs and lug nuts for signs of damage from crossthreading or abuse. You should never have to force wheel nuts down the stud. Lug nuts that are damaged may not retain properly, yet give the impression of fully tightening. Always inspect and replace any component suspected of damage. Tip Always start wheel nuts by hand! Be certain that all wheel nut threads have been engaged BEFORE tightening the nut. Important If the vehicle has directional tread tires, verify the directional arrow on the outboard side of the tire is pointing in the direction of forward rotation. Wheel Nut Tightening and Torque Improper wheel nut tightening can lead to brake pulsation and rotor damage. In order to avoid additional brake repairs, evenly tighten the wheel nuts to the proper torque specification as shown for each vehicle in SI. Always observe the proper wheel nut tightening sequence as shown below in order to avoid trapping the wheel on the wheel stud threads or clamping the wheel slightly off center resulting in vibration. The Most Important Service You Provide While the above information is well known, and wheel removal so common, technicians run the risk of becoming complacent on this very important Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 06-03-10-010A > Jun > 10 > Wheels - Changing Procedures/Precautions > Page 10378 service operation. A simple distraction or time constraint that rushes the job may result in personal injury if the greatest of care is not exercised. Make it a habit to double check your work and to always side with caution when installing wheels. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Description and Operation > Replacement Wheels Description Wheels: Description and Operation Replacement Wheels Description Replacement Wheels Description Replace the wheel if any of the following conditions exist: * The wheel exhibits excessive runout. * The wheel is bent. * The wheel is cracked. * The wheel is severely rusted. * The wheel is severely corroded. Note: Air leaks caused by porosity on aluminum wheels are repairable. * The wheel leaks air. Warning If you are replacing the wheel(s), the wheel stud(s), the wheel nut(s) or the wheel bolt(s), install only new GM original equipment parts. Installation of used parts or non-GM original equipment parts may cause the wheel to loosen, loss of tire air pressure, poor vehicle handling and loss of vehicle control resulting in personal injury. Caution: The use of non-GM original equipment wheels may cause: * Damage to the wheel bearing, the wheel fasteners and the wheel * Tire damage caused by the modified clearance to the adjacent vehicle components * Adverse vehicle steering stability caused by the modified scrub radius * Damage to the vehicle caused by the modified ground clearance * Speedometer and odometer inaccuracy Replace the wheel, the wheel studs and the wheel/nuts, or the wheel bolts if applicable, if any of the following conditions exist: * The wheel has elongated bolt holes. * The wheel/nuts, or bolts if applicable, loosen repeatedly. Steel wheel identification is stamped into the wheel near the valve stem. Aluminum wheel identification is cast into the inboard side of the wheel. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Description and Operation > Replacement Wheels Description > Page 10381 Wheels: Description and Operation Steel Wheel Repair Description Steel Wheel Repair Description Caution: Do not heat wheels in an attempt to soften them for straightening or repair damage from striking curbs, etc. Do not weld wheels. The alloy used in these wheels is heat-treated and uncontrolled heating from welding affects the properties of the material. Caution: The use of tubes in tubeless tires is not a recommended repair due to the fact that speed ratings are greatly reduced. If leaks are found in a steel wheel, replace the wheel with a wheel of original equipment quality. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Wheel Bearing: Testing and Inspection Wheel Bearings Diagnosis Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension Wheel Bearing: Service and Repair Front Suspension Front Wheel Bearing and Hub Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 10387 Wheel Bearing: Service and Repair Rear Suspension Rear Wheel Bearing and Hub Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Hub > Axle Nut > Component Information > Specifications Axle Nut: Specifications Axle nut ................................................................................................................................................ .................................................... 205 Nm (151 lb ft) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Fastener > Component Information > Specifications Wheel Fastener: Specifications Wheel Fastener ................................................................................................................................... ...................................................... 190 Nm (140 ft lb) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Fastener > Component Information > Specifications > Page 10395 Wheel Fastener: Description and Operation Metric Wheel Nuts and Bolts Description Metric wheel/nuts and bolts are identified in the following way: * The wheel/nut has the word Metric stamped on the face. * The letter M is stamped on the end of the wheel bolt. The thread sizes of metric wheel/nuts and the bolts are indicated by the following example: M12 x 1.5. * M = Metric * 12 = Diameter in millimeters * 1.5 = Millimeters gap per thread Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Fastener > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension Wheel Fastener: Service and Repair Front Suspension Wheel Stud Replacement Tools Required J 43631 Ball Joint Remover Removal Procedure 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle (See: Vehicle Lifting/Service and Repair). 2. Remove the tire and wheel assembly. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation (See: Service and Repair). 3. Remove the wheel bearing/hub assembly. Refer to Front Wheel Bearing and Hub Replacement (See: Wheel Bearing/Service and Repair/Front Suspension). 4. Using the J 43631, press out the wheel stud from the wheel bearing/hub assembly. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Fastener > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 10398 Installation Procedure 1. Install the wheel stud to the wheel bearing/hub assembly from the bearing side of the hub flange. 2. Place flat washers over the wheel stud being installer. 3. Install the wheel nut or a hex head nut to the wheel stud. 4. Gradually tighten the nut in order to draw the stud into the hub flange until the head of the wheel stud is fully seated against the hub flange. 5. Remove the nut and flat washers. 6. Install the wheel bearing/hub assembly to the steering knuckle. Refer to Front Wheel Bearing and Hub Replacement (See: Wheel Bearing/Service and Repair/Front Suspension). 7. Install the tire and wheel assembly. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation (See: Service and Repair). 8. Lower the vehicle. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Fastener > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 10399 Wheel Fastener: Service and Repair Rear Suspension Wheel Stud Replacement Tools Required J 43631 Ball Joint Remover Removal Procedure 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle (See: Vehicle Lifting/Service and Repair). 2. Remove the tire and wheel assembly. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation (See: Service and Repair). 3. Remove the wheel bearing/hub replacement. Refer to Rear Wheel Bearing and Hub Replacement (See: Wheel Bearing/Service and Repair/Rear Suspension). 4. Using the J 43631, press out the wheel stud from the wheel bearing/hub assembly. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Fastener > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 10400 Installation Procedure 1. Install the wheel stud to the wheel bearing/hub assembly from the bearing side of the hub flange. 2. Place flat washers over the wheel stud being installed. 3. Install the wheel nut or a hex head nut to the wheel stud. 4. Gradually tighten the nut in order to draw the stud into the hub flange until the head of the wheel stud is fully seated against the hub flange. 5. Remove the nut and flat washers. 6. Install the tire and wheel assembly. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation (See: Service and Repair). 7. Lower the vehicle. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Locations Air Door Actuator / Motor: Locations Instrument Panel/Center Console Component Views Right Side of Instrument Panel - Center Console and HVAC System 1 - B7E Air Temperature Sensor - Duct Right Lower 2 - B7J Air Temperature Sensor - Duct Right Upper 3 - M6 Air Temperature Door Actuator 4 - M8 Blower Motor 5 - K8 Blower Motor Control Module 6 - B39 A/C Evaporator Temperature Sensor 7 - M46 Air Recirculation Door Motor 8 - M37 Mode Door Actuator 9 - X83 Auxiliary Audio Input X1 (without UWG) 10 - X83 Auxiliary Audio Input X2 (without UWG) 11 - X80A Accessory Power Receptacle - Center Console 1 12 - E28 Center Console Compartment Lamp (LT or LTZ or SLE2 or SLT) 13 - X80B Accessory Power Receptacle Center Console 2 14 - X82 Audio/Video Input Adapter (UWG) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 10406 Air Door Actuator / Motor: Diagrams M6 Air Temperature Door Actuator M37 Mode Door Actuator Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 10407 M46 Air Recirculation Door Motor Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > HVAC - Automatic Air Door Actuator / Motor: Service and Repair HVAC - Automatic Air Inlet Valve Actuator Replacement Air Inlet Valve Actuator Replacement Mode Valve Actuator Replacement Mode Valve Actuator Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > HVAC - Automatic > Page 10410 Mode Control Cam Replacement Mode Control Cam Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > HVAC - Automatic > Page 10411 Temperature Valve Actuator Replacement Temperature Valve Actuator Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > HVAC - Automatic > Page 10412 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > HVAC - Automatic > Page 10413 Air Door Actuator / Motor: Service and Repair HVAC - Manual Air Inlet Valve Actuator Replacement Air Inlet Valve Actuator Replacement Mode Valve Actuator Replacement Mode Valve Actuator Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > HVAC - Automatic > Page 10414 Temperature Valve Actuator Replacement Temperature Valve Actuator Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > HVAC - Automatic > Page 10415 Mode Control Cam Replacement Mode Control Cam Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > HVAC - Automatic > Page 10416 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Duct > Component Information > Service and Repair > Air Inlet Housing Replacement Air Duct: Service and Repair Air Inlet Housing Replacement Air Inlet Housing Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Duct > Component Information > Service and Repair > Air Inlet Housing Replacement > Page 10421 Air Duct: Service and Repair Instrument Panel Center Air Outlet Duct Replacement Instrument Panel Center Air Outlet Duct Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Duct > Component Information > Service and Repair > Air Inlet Housing Replacement > Page 10422 Air Duct: Service and Repair Air Distributor Outer Duct Replacement - Left Side Air Distributor Outer Duct Replacement - Left Side Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Duct > Component Information > Service and Repair > Air Inlet Housing Replacement > Page 10423 Air Duct: Service and Repair Air Distributor Outer Duct Replacement - Right Side Air Distributor Outer Duct Replacement - Right Side Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Duct > Component Information > Service and Repair > Air Inlet Housing Replacement > Page 10424 Air Duct: Service and Repair Air Inlet Housing Replacement Air Inlet Housing Replacement Instrument Panel Center Air Outlet Duct Replacement Instrument Panel Center Air Outlet Duct Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Duct > Component Information > Service and Repair > Air Inlet Housing Replacement > Page 10425 Air Distributor Outer Duct Replacement - Left Side Air Distributor Outer Duct Replacement - Left Side Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Duct > Component Information > Service and Repair > Air Inlet Housing Replacement > Page 10426 Air Distributor Outer Duct Replacement - Right Side Air Distributor Outer Duct Replacement - Right Side Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Duct > Component Information > Service and Repair > Air Inlet Housing Replacement > Page 10427 Windshield Defroster Duct Replacement Windshield Defroster Duct Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Duct > Component Information > Service and Repair > Air Inlet Housing Replacement > Page 10428 Side Window Defogger Outlet Duct Replacement - Left Side Side Window Defogger Outlet Duct Replacement - Left Side Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Duct > Component Information > Service and Repair > Air Inlet Housing Replacement > Page 10429 Side Window Defogger Outlet Duct Replacement - Right Side Side Window Defogger Outlet Duct Replacement - Right Side Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Duct > Component Information > Service and Repair > Air Inlet Housing Replacement > Page 10430 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Register > Component Information > Service and Repair > Side Window Defogger Outlet Grille Replacement Air Register: Service and Repair Side Window Defogger Outlet Grille Replacement Side Window Defogger Outlet Grille Replacement (Equinox) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Register > Component Information > Service and Repair > Side Window Defogger Outlet Grille Replacement > Page 10435 Air Register: Service and Repair Instrument Panel Outer Air Outlet Replacement Instrument Panel Outer Air Outlet Replacement (Equinox) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Register > Component Information > Service and Repair > Side Window Defogger Outlet Grille Replacement > Page 10436 Air Register: Service and Repair Floor Air Outlet Replacement - Center Floor Air Outlet Replacement - Center Removal Procedure 1. Remove the front floor console. Refer to Front Floor Console Replacement (See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Console/Service and Repair/Front Floor Console Replacement). 2. Slide the center floor air outlet duct forward enough to clear the rear floor air outlet duct, and then up, and rearward to remove. Installation Procedure 1. Slide the center floor air outlet duct forward enough to clear rear floor air duct, and then down, and rearward to install. 2. Install the front floor console. Refer to Front Floor Console Replacement (See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Console/Service and Repair/Front Floor Console Replacement). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Register > Component Information > Service and Repair > Side Window Defogger Outlet Grille Replacement > Page 10437 Air Register: Service and Repair Rear Floor Air Outlet Replacement Rear Floor Air Outlet Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the front seats. Refer to Driver or Passenger Seat Replacement (See: Body and Frame/Seats/Service and Repair/Driver or Passenger Seat Replacement). 2. Remove the floor console. Refer to Front Floor Console Replacement (See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Console/Service and Repair/Front Floor Console Replacement). 3. Partially remove the floor carpet from the front footwells to the B-pillars. Refer to Front Floor Panel Carpet Replacement (See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Carpet/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Front Floor Panel Carpet Replacement). 4. Remove the rear floor air outlet push pins from the floor pan. 5. Remove the rear floor air outlet from the floor pan. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Register > Component Information > Service and Repair > Side Window Defogger Outlet Grille Replacement > Page 10438 1. Install the rear floor air outlet to the floor pan. 2. Install the rear floor air outlet push pins to the floor pan. 3. Install the floor carpet to the B-pillars and the front footwells. Refer to Front Floor Panel Carpet Replacement (See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Carpet/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Front Floor Panel Carpet Replacement) 4. Install the floor console. Refer to Front Floor Console Replacement (See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Console/Service and Repair/Front Floor Console Replacement). 5. Install the front seats. Refer to Driver or Passenger Seat Replacement (See: Body and Frame/Seats/Service and Repair/Driver or Passenger Seat Replacement). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Register > Component Information > Service and Repair > Side Window Defogger Outlet Grille Replacement > Page 10439 Air Register: Service and Repair Instrument Panel Center Air Outlet Replacement Instrument Panel Center Air Outlet Replacement (Equinox) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Specifications Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC: Specifications Ambient Air Temperature Sensor Resistance Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Specifications > Page 10443 Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC: Locations Front of Vehicle/Engine Compartment Component Views Front of the Engine Compartment Components 1 - G10R Cooling Fan Motor - Right (LF1) 2 - G10L Cooling Fan Motor - Left (LF1) 3 - R10 Cooling Fan Resistor (LAF) 4 - G10 Cooling Fan Motor (LAF) 5 - B9 Ambient Air Temperature Sensor Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Specifications > Page 10444 Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC: Diagrams B9 Ambient Air Temperature Sensor Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Ambient Air Temperature Sensor Replacement Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC: Service and Repair Ambient Air Temperature Sensor Replacement Ambient Air Temperature Sensor Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Ambient Air Temperature Sensor Replacement > Page 10447 Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC: Service and Repair HVAC - Automatic Ambient Air Quality Sensor Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Locations Blower Motor: Locations Instrument Panel/Center Console Component Views Right Side of Instrument Panel - Center Console and HVAC System 1 - B7E Air Temperature Sensor - Duct Right Lower 2 - B7J Air Temperature Sensor - Duct Right Upper 3 - M6 Air Temperature Door Actuator 4 - M8 Blower Motor 5 - K8 Blower Motor Control Module 6 - B39 A/C Evaporator Temperature Sensor 7 - M46 Air Recirculation Door Motor 8 - M37 Mode Door Actuator 9 - X83 Auxiliary Audio Input X1 (without UWG) 10 - X83 Auxiliary Audio Input X2 (without UWG) 11 - X80A Accessory Power Receptacle - Center Console 1 12 - E28 Center Console Compartment Lamp (LT or LTZ or SLE2 or SLT) 13 - X80B Accessory Power Receptacle Center Console 2 14 - X82 Audio/Video Input Adapter (UWG) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Blower Motor: Diagram Information and Instructions Electrical Schematic Symbols Electrical Schematic Symbols Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10453 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10454 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10455 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10456 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10457 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10458 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10459 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10460 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10461 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10462 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10463 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10464 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10465 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10466 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10467 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10468 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10469 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10470 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10471 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10472 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10473 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10474 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10475 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10476 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10477 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10478 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10479 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10480 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10481 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10482 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10483 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10484 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10485 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10486 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10487 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10488 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10489 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10490 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10491 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10492 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10493 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10494 General Electrical Diagnosis General Electrical Diagnosis Basic Knowledge Required Without a basic knowledge of electricity, it will be difficult to use the diagnostic procedures contained in the service manual. You should understand the basic theory of electricity, and know the meaning of voltage (V), current (A), and resistance (Ohms ). You should also be able to read and understand a wiring diagram, as well as understand what happens in a circuit with an open or a shorted wire. Vehicle Zoning Strategy Vehicle Zoning Strategy All grounds, in-line connectors, and splices have identifying numbers that correspond to where they are located in the vehicle. The following table explains the numbering system. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10495 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10496 Blower Motor: Diagnostic Aids Arrows and Symbols Arrows and Symbols This service manual uses various symbols in order to describe different service operations. 1 - Front of Vehicle 2 - View Detail 2 - View Detail 3 - Ambient Air Mixed with Another Gas or Indicate Temperature Change 4 - Motion or Direction 5 - View Angle 6 - Dimension (1:2) 7 Ambient/Clean Air Flow or Cool Air Flow 8 - Lubrication Point - Oil or Fluid 9 - Task Related 10 Sectioning (1:3) 11 - Gas Other Than Ambient Air or Hot Air Flow 12 - Lubrication Point - Grease or Jelly 13 - Multidirectional Arrow Decimal and Metric Equivalents Decimal and Metric Equivalents Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10497 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10498 Checking Aftermarket Accessories Checking Aftermarket Accessories Warning: Refer to SIR Warning (See: Restraint Systems/Service Precautions/SIR Warning). Caution: The OBD II symbol is used on the circuit diagrams in order to alert the technician that the circuit is essential for proper OBD II emission control circuit operation. Any circuit which fails and causes the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) to turn ON, or causes emissions-related component damage, is identified as an OBD II circuit. Do not connect aftermarket accessories into the following circuits: * SIR circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the SIR symbol. * OBD II circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the OBD II symbol. Always check for aftermarket accessories (non-OEM) as the first step in diagnosing electrical problems. If the vehicle is so equipped, disconnect the system to verify that these add-on accessories are not the cause of the problems. Possible causes of vehicle problems related to aftermarket accessories include: * Power feeds connected to points other than the battery * Antenna location * Transceiver wiring located too close to vehicle electronic modules or wiring * Poor shielding or poor connectors on antenna feed line * Check for recent service bulletins detailing installation guidelines for aftermarket accessories. Circuit Testing Circuit Testing The Circuit Testing section contains the following diagnostic testing information. Using this information along with the diagnostic procedures will identify the cause of the electrical malfunction. * Using Connector Test Adapters (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Using Connector Test Adapters) * Probing Electrical Connectors (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Probing Electrical Connectors) * Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10499 Procedures/Circuit Testing/Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter) * Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp) * Using Fused Jumper Wires (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Using Fused Jumper Wires) * Measuring Voltage (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Measuring Voltage) * Measuring Voltage Drop (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Measuring Voltage Drop) * Measuring Frequency (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Measuring Frequency) * Testing Ground and Low Reference Circuits (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Testing Ground and Low Reference Circuits) * Testing for Continuity (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Continuity) * Testing for Short to Ground (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Short to Ground) * Testing for a Short to Voltage (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for a Short to Voltage) * Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections) * Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions) * Testing for Electrical Intermittents (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Electrical Intermittents) * Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure) * Circuit Protection - Fuses (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Circuit Protection - Fuses) * Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers) * Circuit Protection - Fusible Links (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Circuit Protection - Fusible Links) Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp Special Tools EL-35616-200 - Test Light - Probe Kit For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test Probe Caution). A test lamp can simply and quickly test a low impedance circuit for voltage. A Digital Multimeter (DMM) should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present if the impedance is low enough, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. In other words, if there is not enough current, the test lamp will not illuminate even though voltage is present. The EL-35616-200 - kit is Micro-Pack compatible and comprised of a 12-volt light bulb with an attached pair of leads. To properly operate this tool use the following procedures. When testing for voltage: 1. Attach one lead to ground. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is voltage at the point being tested. When testing for ground: 1. Attach one lead to battery positive voltage. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where ground should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is ground at the point being tested. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10500 Testing for a Short to Voltage Testing for a Short to Voltage Special Tools EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM) For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test Probe Caution). The following procedure tests for a short to voltage in a circuit. 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Set the rotary dial of the Digital Multimeter (DMM) to the V (DC) position. 4. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. Turn ON the ignition and operate all accessories. 7. If the voltage measured is greater than 1 V, there is a short to voltage in the circuit. Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions Special Tools J-25070 - Heat Gun For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Many intermittent open or shorted circuits are affected by harness/connector movement that is caused by vibration, engine torque, bumps/rough pavement, etc. In order to duplicate the customer's concern, it may be necessary to manipulate the wiring harness if the malfunction appears to be vibration related. Manipulation of a circuit can consist of a wide variety of actions, including: * Wiggling the harness * Disconnecting a connector and reconnecting * Stressing the mechanical connection of a connector * Pulling on the harness or wire in order to identify a separation/break inside the insulation * Relocating a harness or wires All these actions should be performed with some goal in mind. For instance, with a scan tool connected, wiggling the wires may uncover a faulty input to the control module. The snapshot option would be appropriate here. Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure). Another option is, with the component commanded ON and OFF by the scan tool, move related connectors and wiring and observe the component operation. With the engine running, move related connectors and wiring while monitoring engine operation. If harness or connector movement affects the data displayed, component/system operation, or engine operation, inspect and repair the harness/connections as necessary. You may need to load the vehicle in order to duplicate the concern. This may require the use of weights, floor jacks, jackstands, frame machines, etc. In these cases you are attempting to duplicate the concern by manipulating the suspension or frame. This method is useful in finding harnesses that are too short and their connectors pull apart enough to cause a poor connection. A DMM set to Peak Min/Max mode and connected to the suspect circuit while testing can yield desirable results. Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Electrical Intermittents). Certainly, using the senses of sight, smell, and hearing while manipulating the circuit can provide good results as well. There may be instances where circuit manipulation alone will not meet the required criteria for the fault condition to appear. In such cases it may be necessary to expose the suspect circuit to other conditions while manipulating the harness. Such conditions would include high moisture conditions, along with exceptionally high or low temperatures. The following discusses how to expose the circuit to these kinds of conditions. Salt Water Spray Some compounds possess the ability to conduct electricity when dissolved in water such as ordinary salt. By mixing table salt with water in sufficient Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10501 quantities, you can enhance the conductive properties of water so that any circuit which may be sensitive to moisture will more readily fail when liberally sprayed with this mixture. Mixing 0.35L (12 oz) of water with approximately 1 tablespoon of salt will yield a salt solution of 5 percent. Fill a normal spray bottle with this mixture. This mixture is sufficient to enhance the water's own conductivity. This may cause the circuit to fail more easily when sprayed. Once the mixture is completed, spray the suspect area liberally with the solution. Then, while monitoring either a scan tool or DMM, manipulate the harness as discussed previously. High Temperature Conditions If the complaint tends to be heat related, you can simulate the condition using the J-25070 - heat gun. Using the heat gun, you can heat up the suspected area or component. Manipulate the harnesses under high temperature conditions while monitoring the scan tool or DMM to locate the fault condition. The high temperature condition may be achieved simply by test driving the vehicle at normal operating temperature. If a heat gun is unavailable, consider this option to enhance your diagnosis. This option does not allow for the same control, however. Low Temperature Conditions Depending on the nature of the fault condition, placing a fan in front of the vehicle while the vehicle is in the shade can have the desired effect. If this is unsuccessful, use local cooling treatments such as ice or a venturi type nozzle (one that provides hot or cold air). This type of tool is capable of producing air stream temperatures down to -18°C (0°F) from one end and +71°C (160°F) from the other. This is ideally suited for localized cooling needs. Once the vehicle, component, or harness has been sufficiently cooled, manipulate the harness or components in an effort to duplicate the concern. Duplicating Failure Conditions * If none of the previous tests are successful, attempt to duplicate and/or capture the failure conditions. * Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, where applicable, contains the conditions that were present when the DTC set. 1. Review and record Freeze Frame/Failure Records data. 2. Clear the DTCs using the scan tool. 3. Turn the key to OFF and wait 15 seconds. 4. Operate the vehicle under the same conditions that were noted in Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, as closely as possible. The vehicle must also be operating within the Conditions for Running the DTC. Refer to Conditions for Running the DTC in the supporting text if a DTC is being diagnosed. 5. Monitor DTC Status for the DTC being tested. The scan tool will indicate Ran, when the enabling conditions have been satisfied long enough for the DTC to run. The scan tool will also indicate whether the DTC passed or failed. * An alternate method is to drive the vehicle with the DMM connected to a suspected circuit. An abnormal reading on the DMM when the concern occurs, may help you locate the concern. Measuring Frequency Measuring Frequency Special Tools EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM) For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test Probe Caution). The following procedure determines the frequency of a signal. Note: Connecting the Digital Multimeter (DMM) to the circuit before pressing the Hz button will allow the DMM to autorange to an appropriate range. 1. Apply power to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (AC) position. 3. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10502 5. Press the Hz button on the DMM. 6. The DMM will display the frequency measured. Measuring Voltage Measuring Voltage Special Tools EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM) For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test Probe Caution). The following procedure measures the voltage at a selected point in a circuit. 1. Disconnect the electrical harness connector for the circuit being tested, if necessary. 2. Enable the circuit and/or system being tested. Use the following methods: * Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. * Turn ON the engine. * Turn ON the circuit and/or system with a scan tool in Output Controls. * Turn ON the switch for the circuit and/or system being tested. 3. Select the V (AC) or V (DC) position on the Digital Multimeter (DMM). 4. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the point of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. The DMM displays the voltage measured at that point. Measuring Voltage Drop Measuring Voltage Drop Special Tools EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM) For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test Probe Caution). The following procedure determines the difference in voltage potential between 2 points. 1. Set the rotary dial of the Digital Multimeter (DMM) to the V (DC) position. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10503 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to one point of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to the other point of the circuit. 4. Operate the circuit. 5. The DMM displays the difference in voltage between the 2 points. Probing Electrical Connectors Probing Electrical Connectors Note: Always be sure to reinstall the connector position assurance (CPA) and terminal position assurance (TPA) when reconnecting connectors or replacing terminals. Front probe Disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the mating side (front) of the connector. Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test Probe Caution). Note: When probing female 0.64 terminals, it is important to use the correct adapter. There have been some revisions to the test adapter for 0.64 terminals. The proper adapter for 0.64 terminals is the EL-35616-64B which has a gold terminal and a black wire between the base and tip. Failure to use the proper test adapter may result in damage to the terminal being tested and improper diagnosis. Note: The proper adapter for probing the terminals for fuses, relays, or diodes in an electrical center is EL-35616-35. Using any other tool or adapter may damage the terminal being tested. Refer to the following table as a guide in selecting the correct test adapter for front probing connectors: Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10504 Backprobe Note: * Backprobe connector terminals only when specifically required in diagnostic procedures. * Do not backprobe a sealed (Weather Pack(R)) connector, less than a 280 series Metri-Pack connector, a Micro-Pack connector, or a flat wire (dock and lock) connector. * Backprobing can be a source of damage to connector terminals. Use care in order to avoid deforming the terminal, either by forcing the test probe too far into the cavity or by using too large of a test probe. * After backprobing any connector, inspect for terminal damage. If terminal damage is suspected, test for proper terminal contact. Do not disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the harness side (back) of the connector. Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure Using Snapshots in Global Diagnostic System (GDS) Overview Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10505 A snapshot is a recording of what a control module on the vehicle was receiving for information while the snapshot is being made. A snapshot may be used to analyze the data during the time a vehicle condition is current. This allows you to concentrate on making the condition occur, rather than trying to view all the data in anticipation of the fault. To record a snapshot in GDS, select, Record Snapshot, from the options at the top right portion of any of the various pages that allow snapshots to be taken (e.g. Data Display, Control Functions, etc.). When you are finished recording, select, Stop Snapshot recording. The snapshot will now be available for replay. Snapshot Replay The Snapshot Replay function allows reviews of previously recorded vehicle snapshot data. This information can be used in analysis of vehicle problems and detection of trigger error conditions. The graph function can be used to compare parameters to see if a component is functioning properly. Recorded snapshots can be selected for viewing by the following three methods: * Selecting a snapshot file from the Vehicle Home Page and clicking on the Review selection. * Double clicking on the selected snapshot from the Vehicle Home Page. * Entering the Tools selection from the Menu selection and selecting Snapshot replay. Next, open the Snapshot Manager. Double click on the snapshot file you wish to view or click on the Load Snapshot selection and select a snapshot file. Regardless of selection method, a File Loaded pop-up window will be displayed from the Snapshot Replay screen. Select OK from the pop-up window. Snapshot Play Functions There are several snapshot play functions that are used to replay recorded snapshots * The Play function is used to play the snapshot forward by clicking on this selection. A marker will move across the screen when this selection is used. All selections in this area turn grey when they are active. * The Pause function is used to pause play of the snapshot. When this selection is clicked a second time the snapshot will start playing where it left off. * The Stop function is used to stop playing the snapshot. The snapshot will start from the beginning, if Play is selected after using the Stop function. Time Control Time control is used to control the snapshot replay. This function allows selection of a specific time frame, display of different views, and control of display speed. The following functions can be selected directly under Time Control. * The Bookmark selection allows you to add a specific comment in the current display and return to this point in the future. When this option is selected, a pop-up window is displayed. Enter a bookmark name and select OK. * The Note Pad can be selected to add comments to the snapshot replay file at the current point of time. When this option is selected, a pop-up window is displayed. Enter a comment for the snapshot file and select OK. * The Load Snapshot (blue folder) opens a snapshot file and makes it ready for further analysis. This function is also available by clicking on an available snapshot file from the Snapshot Manager. * The Down Arrow displays all Time Control options when selected. Individual options can also be selected by clicking on the item you want. * The Snapshot Display Speed can be controlled by selecting this option. Slow speeds of 1/8X, 1/4X, and 1/2X can be selected. The real time speed can also be selected at 1. Faster speeds of 2X, 4X, and 8X can also be obtained by using this selection. View Selections Each View Selection provides a different way of displaying vehicle data for analysis. The following functions can be selected under Available Views: Note: The parameter name will be shown in the original language used for capture if no translation is available for the name. * Parameter List View - Displays incoming information from the snapshot file. The current value of the parameters is displayed on the screen. * Log View - Contains all the information from the snapshot file. All parameter values are listed in the order they were recorded. Specific parameters can be added or removed from a watchlist by clicking on the appropriate item. * State View - Shows the values of all parameters in a specific time frame. These values can be used for comparison with the trigger view. * Trigger View - Displays all system and user defined triggers. This function can be used when there is a combination of factors involved in a diagnostic problem. When a Trigger condition is met a caution triangle will be displayed on the screen. Triggers: * Load Triggers - Allows you to load a file containing trigger definitions. * Save Triggers - Allows you to save the trigger to your computer's hard drive. * Remove Trigger - Allows you to remove the current trigger. It will no longer be present. * Edit Trigger - Displays a pop-up window where you can modify the limits and parameters contained within a trigger. * Adds Trigger - Displays a pop-up window to configure a trigger. * DTC View - After the Play function is selected and this option is selected this function opens the list of recorded DTCs. * Line Graph View - Displays data that can be visualized against the time-axis. From this view, specific parameters can be selected for graphing by Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10506 checking the box under Selected. At the bottom of the graph there are four functions Zoom In (increase size), Zoom Out (decrease size), Bookmarks, and Pause Scrolling. Each of these functions can be accessed by clicking on them. Testing for Continuity Testing for Continuity Special Tools EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM) For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test Probe Caution). The following procedures verify good continuity in a circuit. With a Digital Multimeter (DMM) 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the Ohms position. 2. Disconnect the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 3. Disconnect the load. 4. Press the MIN MAX button on the DMM. 5. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 6. Connect the other lead of the DMM to the other end of the circuit. 7. If the DMM displays low or no resistance, the circuit has good continuity. With a Test Lamp Note: Only use the test lamp procedure on low impedance power and ground circuits. 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect one lead of the test lamp to one end of the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 5. Connect the other end of the circuit to ground. 6. If the test lamp illuminates (full intensity), then the circuit has good continuity. Testing for Electrical Intermittents Testing for Electrical Intermittents Special Tools EL-39200 Digital Multimeter For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Perform the following procedures while wiggling the harness from side to side. Continue this at convenient points (about 6 inches apart) while watching the test equipment. * Testing for Short to Ground (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Short to Ground) * Testing for Continuity (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Continuity) * Testing for a Short to Voltage (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for a Short to Voltage) If the fault is not identified, perform the procedure below using the MIN MAX feature on the EL-39200 DMM. This feature allows you to manipulate the circuit without having to watch the EL-39200. The EL-39200 will generate an audible tone when a change is detected. Note: The EL-39200 must be used in order to perform the following procedure since the EL-39200 can monitor current, resistance or voltage while recording the minimum (MIN), and maximum (MAX) values measured. 1. Connect the EL-39200 to both sides of a suspected connector (still connected), or from one end of a suspected circuit to the other. Refer to Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10507 Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter) for information on connecting the EL-39200 to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the EL-39200 to the V (AC) or V (DC) position. 3. Press the range button of the EL-39200 in order to select the desired voltage range. 4. Press the MIN MAX button of the EL-39200. The EL-39200 displays 100 ms RECORD and emits an audible tone (beep). Note: The 100 ms RECORD mode is the length of time an input must stay at a new value in order to record the full change. 5. Simulate the condition that is potentially causing the intermittent connection, either by wiggling the connections or the wiring, test driving, or performing other operations. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions). 6. Listen for the audible Min Max Alert which indicates that a new minimum or maximum value has been recorded. 7. Press the MIN MAX button once in order to display the MAX value and note the value. 8. Press the MIN MAX button again in order to display the MIN value and note the value. 9. Determine the difference between the MIN and MAX values. * If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is 1 V or greater an intermittent open or high resistance condition exists. Repair the condition as necessary. * If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is less than 1 V, an intermittent open or high resistance condition does not exist. Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections Special Tools EL-35616 Terminal Test Probe Kit For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). When the condition is not currently present, but is indicated in DTC history, the cause may be intermittent. An intermittent may also be the cause when there is a customer complaint, but the symptom cannot be duplicated. Refer to the Symptom Table of the system that is suspect of causing the condition before trying to locate an intermittent condition. Most intermittent conditions are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. Inspect for the following items: * Wiring broken inside the insulation * Poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector * Poor terminal to wire connection-Some conditions which fall under this description are poor crimps, poor solder joints, crimping over the wire insulation rather than the wire itself, and corrosion in the wire to terminal contact area, etc. * Pierced or damaged insulation can allow moisture to enter the wiring causing corrosion. The conductor can corrode inside the insulation, with little visible evidence. Look for swollen and stiff sections of wire in the suspect circuits. * Wiring which has been pinched, cut, or its insulation rubbed through may cause an intermittent open or short as the bare area touches other wiring or parts of the vehicle. * Wiring that comes in contact with hot or exhaust components * Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions) in order to duplicate the conditions required, in order to verify the customer concern. * Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Electrical Intermittents) for test procedures to detect intermittent open, high resistance, short to ground, and short to voltage conditions. * Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure) for advanced intermittent diagnosis and Vehicle Data Recorder operation. Testing for Terminal Fretting Some intermittent conditions can be caused by wire terminal fretting corrosion. Fretting corrosion is a build-up of insulating, oxidized wear debris that can form when there is a small motion between electrical contacts. The oxidized wear debris can pile up enough at the electrical contact spots that the electrical resistance across the connection increases. Movement between the contacting surfaces as small as 10 to 100 microns can cause fretting. To put this in perspective, a sheet of paper is about 100 microns thick, so fretting motion is small and hard to see. Vibration and thermal expansion/contraction are the main sources that create fretting motion. Since vehicles vibrate and can experience large temperature swings, they are a good source for fretting motion. Tin, copper, nickel, and iron surfaces are all susceptible to fretting corrosion. Fretting corrosion can be difficult to see but it looks like small, dark smudges on the terminals contact surface. To correct a fretting condition disconnect the suspect connector and add Nyogel lubricant 760G (dielectric grease) to both sides of the connector Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10508 terminals. Then reconnect the connector and wipe away any excess lubricant. This will correct the additional terminal contact resistance due to the terminal fretting corrosion. Testing for Proper Terminal Contact It is important to test terminal contact at the component and any inline connectors before replacing a suspect component. Mating terminals must be inspected to ensure good terminal contact. A poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector may be the result of contamination or deformation. Contamination may be caused by the connector halves being improperly connected. A missing or damaged connector seal, damage to the connector itself, or exposing the terminals to moisture and dirt can also cause contamination. Contamination, usually in the underhood or underbody connectors, leads to terminal corrosion, causing an open circuit or intermittently open circuit. Deformation is caused by probing the mating side of a connector terminal without the proper adapter. Always use the EL-35616 when probing connectors. Other causes of terminal deformation are improperly joining the connector halves, or repeatedly separating and joining the connector halves. Deformation, usually to the female terminal contact tang, can result in poor terminal contact causing an open or intermittently open circuit. Testing for Proper Terminal Contact in Bussed Electrical Centers It is very important to use the correct test adapter when testing for proper terminal contact of fuses and relays in a bussed electrical center. Use EL-35616-35 to test for proper terminal contact. Failure to use EL-35616-35 can result in improper diagnosis of the bussed electrical center. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact: 1. Separate the connector halves. 2. Visually inspect the connector halves for contamination. Contamination may result in a white or green build-up within the connector body or between terminals. This causes high terminal resistance, intermittent contact, or an open circuit. An underhood or underbody connector that shows signs of contamination should be replaced in its entirety: terminals, seals, and connector body. 3. Using an equivalent male terminal / terminated lead, verify that the retention force is significantly different between a known good terminal and the suspect terminal. Replace the female terminal in question. Flat Wire (Dock and Lock) Connectors There are no serviceable parts for flat wire (dock and lock) connectors on the harness side or the component side. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact: 1. Remove the component in question. 2. Visually inspect each side of the connector for signs of contamination. Avoid touching either side of the connector as oil from your skin may be a source of contamination as well. 3. Visually inspect the terminal bearing surfaces of the flat wire circuits for splits, cracks, or other imperfections that could cause poor terminal contact. Visually inspect the component side connector to ensure that all of the terminals are uniform and free of damage or deformation. 4. Insert the appropriate adapter from the on the flat wire harness connector in order to test the circuit in question. Control Module/Component Voltage and Grounds Poor voltage or ground connections can cause widely varying symptoms. * Test all control module voltage supply circuits. Many vehicles have multiple circuits supplying voltage to a control module. Other components in the system may have separate voltage supply circuits that may also need to be tested. Inspect connections at the module/component connectors, fuses, and any intermediate connections between the voltage source and the module/component. A test lamp or a DMM may indicate that voltage is present, but neither tests the ability of the circuit to carry sufficient current. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. Refer to Circuit Testing (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Circuit Testing) and Power Distribution Schematics (See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Starting and Charging/Power and Ground Distribution/System Diagram/Power Distribution Schematics). * Test all control module ground and system ground circuits. The control module may have multiple ground circuits. Other components in the system may have separate grounds that may also need to be tested. Inspect grounds for clean and tight connections at the grounding point. Inspect the connections at the component and in splice packs, where applicable. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. Refer to Circuit Testing (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Circuit Testing) and Ground Distribution Schematics (See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Starting and Charging/Power and Ground Distribution/System Diagram/Ground Distribution Schematics). Temperature Sensitivity * An intermittent condition may occur when a component/connection reaches normal operating temperature. The condition may occur only when the component/connection is cold, or only when the component/connection is hot. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10509 * Freeze Frame, Failure Records, Snapshot, or Vehicle Data Recorder data may help with this type of intermittent condition, where applicable. * If the intermittent is related to heat, review the data for a relationship with the following: - High ambient temperatures - Underhood/engine generated heat - Circuit generated heat due to a poor connection, or high electrical load - Higher than normal load conditions, towing, etc. * If the intermittent is related to cold, review the data for the following: - Low ambient temperatures-In extremely low temperatures, ice may form in a connection or component. Inspect for water intrusion. - The condition only occurs on a cold start. - The condition goes away when the vehicle warms up. * Information from the customer may help to determine if the trouble follows a pattern that is temperature related. * If temperature is suspected of causing an intermittent fault condition, attempt to duplicate the condition. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions) in order to duplicate the conditions required. Electromagnetic Interference and Electrical Noise Some electrical components/circuits are sensitive to electromagnetic interference or other types of electrical noise. Inspect for the following conditions: * A misrouted harness that is too close to high voltage/high current devices such as secondary ignition components, motors, generator etc.-These components may induce electrical noise on a circuit that could interfere with normal circuit operation. * Electrical system interference caused by a malfunctioning relay, or a control module driven solenoid or switch-These conditions can cause a sharp electrical surge. Normally, the condition will occur when the malfunctioning component is operating. * Improper installation of non-factory or aftermarket add on accessories such as lights, 2-way radios, amplifiers, electric motors, remote starters, alarm systems, cell phones, etc.-These accessories may lead to interference while in use, but do not fail when the accessories are not in use. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Checking Aftermarket Accessories). * Test for an open diode across the A/C compressor clutch and for other open diodes. Some relays may contain a clamping diode. * The generator may be allowing AC noise into the electrical system. Incorrect Control Module * There are only a few situations where reprogramming a control module is appropriate: - A new service control module is installed. - A control module from another vehicle is installed. - Revised software/calibration files have been released for this vehicle. Note: DO NOT re-program the control module with the SAME software/calibration files that are already present in the control module. This is not an effective repair for any type of concern. * Verify that the control module contains the correct software/calibration. If incorrect programming is found, reprogram the control module with the most current software/calibration. Refer to Control Module References (See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning) for replacement, setup, and programming. Testing for Short to Ground Testing for Short to Ground Special Tools * EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM) * EL 35616-200 - Test Light-Probe Kit For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test Probe Caution). The following procedures test for a short to ground in a circuit. With a Digital Multimeter (DMM) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10510 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the Ohms position. 4. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the other lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. If the DMM does NOT display infinite resistance (OL), there is a short to ground in the circuit. With a Test Lamp 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect one lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to one end of the circuit to be tested. 5. If the test lamp illuminates, there is a short to ground in the circuit. Fuse Powering Several Loads 1. Review the system schematic and locate the fuse that is open. 2. Open the first connector or switch leading from the fuse to each load. 3. Connect a DMM across the fuse terminals (be sure that the fuse is powered). * When the DMM displays voltage the short is in the wiring leading to the first connector or switch. * If the DMM does not display voltage refer to the next step. 4. Close each connector or switch until the DMM displays voltage in order to find which circuit is shorted. Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter Special Tools EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM) For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test Probe Caution). Digital Multimeter (DMM) Basic Requirements Service information is validated using digital multimeters that meet or exceed the following requirements. Using a multimeter that does not meet these basic requirements may give inaccurate readings which could lead to an incorrect diagnosis. Display and Settings 1. Four digits displayed 2. Voltage, amperage, resistance, frequency, diode test settings, and min-max function 3. Display positive and negative values Voltage 1. Have at least 10 Mohm input impedance 2. Test a DC voltage range of 0.1-1000 V. 3. Test an AC voltage range of 0.1-1000 V. Amperage 1. Test a DC amperage range of 0.1µA-10 A. 2. Test an AC amperage range of 0.1µA-10 A. Resistance Test a resistance range of 0.1 ohm-40 Mohm and displays infinite for a value greater than 40 Mohm (O.L. (Over-load)) Frequency Test for a frequency range of 0.5 HZ-199 K HZ Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10511 Diode Test 1. Apply at least 1 mA when performing the diode bias test 2. Display the break over voltage drop (0-3 V) of a forward biased diode 3. Display infinite (O.L. (Over-load)) when a diode is reverse biased Min-Max Readings 1. Can update at a 1 ms sample rate 2. Saves and displays minimum and maximum values Note: Circuits which include any solid state control modules, such as the engine control module (ECM), should only be tested with a 10 MOhms or higher impedance digital multimeter such as the EL-39200. The EL-39200 instruction manual is a good source of information and should be read thoroughly upon receipt of the DMM as well as kept on hand for future reference. A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present if the impedance is low enough, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. In other words, if there is not enough current, the test lamp will not illuminate even though voltage is present. The ohmmeter function on a DMM shows how much resistance exists between 2 points along a circuit. Low resistance in a circuit means good continuity. Note: Disconnect the power feed from the suspect circuit when measuring resistance with a DMM. This prevents incorrect readings. DMMs apply such a small voltage to measure resistance that the presence of voltages can upset a resistance reading. Diodes and solid state components in a circuit can cause a DMM to display a false reading. To find out if a component is affecting a measurement take a reading once, then reverse the leads and take a second reading. If the readings differ the solid state component is affecting the measurement. Following are examples of the various methods of connecting the DMM to the circuit to be tested: * Probe both ends of the connector and either hold the leads in place while manipulating the connector or tape the leads to the harness for continuous monitoring while you perform other operations or test driving. Refer to Probing Electrical Connectors (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Probing Electrical Connectors). * Disconnect the harness at both ends of the suspected circuit where it connects either to a component or to other harnesses. * If the system that is being diagnosed has a specified pinout or breakout box, it may be used in order to simplify connecting the DMM to the circuit or for testing multiple circuits quickly. Using Connector Test Adapters Using Connector Test Adapters Special Tools EL 35616 - Terminal Test Probe Kit For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Caution: Do not insert test equipment probes (DMM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the EL-38125-580 GM Approved Terminal Release Tool Kit in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the EL-38125-580 GM Approved Terminal Release Tool Kit , ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the EL-38125-580 GM Approved Terminal Release Tool Kit label on the inside of the EL-38125-580 GM Approved Terminal Release Tool Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Using Fused Jumper Wires Using Fused Jumper Wires Special Tools J 36169-A Fused Jumper Wire Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10512 Note: A fused jumper may not protect solid state components from being damaged. The J 36169-A includes small clamp connectors that provide adaptation to most connectors without damage. This fused jumper wire is supplied with a 20-A fuse which may not be suitable for some circuits. Do not use a fuse with a higher rating than the fuse that protects the circuit being tested. AFL/EPC Connectors AFL/EPC Connectors Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. 1. For connectors with a bolt in the dress cover, turn the bolt counterclockwise to remove the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10513 2. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the top of the wire dress cover. Slide the CPA forward. 3. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10514 View showing depressing of the lever lock release tab. View of connector in released position. 4. Disconnect the connector from the component. 5. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the dress cover. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs and remove the dress cover. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10515 6. Release the rear lower half of the wiredress cover. 7. Release the tabs that are holding the wiredress cover to the connector body. 8. Remove the nose piece by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the slots on both ends of the connector body. Gently pry the nose piece out of the connector. J 38125-216 can also be used to remove the nose piece. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10516 9. Use the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by lifting the terminal retaining tabs on the inside of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Bosch Connectors (BSK) Bosch Connectors (BSK) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10517 Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 3. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 4. Insert the J 38125-561 tool into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 5. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Bosch Connectors (ECM) Bosch Connectors (ECM) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10518 1. Locate the assist lever on the top of the connector. Move the assist lever to the forward position. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10519 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the connector. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the locking tabs and remove the dress cover. 4. The terminal positive assurance (TPA) is located in the front of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10520 5. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove TPA from the connector. 6. Use the J 38125-213 or the J 38125-556 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10521 Note: Ensure that the dress cover and connector body are both in the released position before reassembling. Failure to do so may cause damage to the connector and component. Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Bosch Connectors (0.64) Bosch Connectors (0.64) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While pressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock until the lever is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Pull the rubber boot that covers the wires back to expose the end of the connector dress cover. 4. Place the connector locking lever in the center of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10522 5. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs that are on the wire end of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover and connector body and pry up. 6. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs located on the opposite side of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover at the connector end and pry up. 7. Remove the dress cover. 8. Cut the tie wrap on the wire bundle. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10523 9. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting a small flat-bladed tool into the small slot in the end of the slider and pushing on the TPA until it comes out of the connector. When the TPA exits the opposite side of the connector, gasp the TPA and pull it completely out of the connector. 10. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 11. Insert the J 38125-560 into the 2 triangular cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 12. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Terminal Replacement Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10524 1. Prior to installation the terminal must be aligned so the (1) coding lugs align with the (2) coding grooves on the connector. 2. Once the terminal is aligned, slide the terminal into the cavity until the retainer has engaged in the cavity of the connector. 3. Slide the TPA in the connector body and seat it using a small flat bladed tool. The TPA is seated when it is flush with the contact housing. 4. Secure the wires to the connector body using a tie wrap and replace the dress cover and grommet. Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Pull out the slider on the connector position assurance (CPA) until it is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10525 5. Insert the J 38125-557 into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Connector Position Assurance Locks Connector Position Assurance Locks The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of the connector. CPAs are used in various connectors throughout the vehicle. CPAs are also used in all SIR system electrical connectors. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals, of the connector. Connector Repairs Connector Repairs Connector Repairs contains a list of all connector repairs. The connector repairs are listed by the connector manufacturer and then by connector type. If the technician cannot identify the manufacturer of the connector, refer to Identifying Connectors below. Knowing the connector manufacturer will assist in finding the correct connector repair from the following list: * Connector Position Assurance Locks (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Connector Position Assurance Locks) * Terminal Position Assurance Locks (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Terminal Position Assurance Locks) * AFL/EPC Connectors (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/AFL/EPC Connectors) * Bosch Connectors (BSK) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Bosch Connectors (BSK))Bosch Connectors (0.64) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Bosch Connectors (0.64))Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT))Bosch Connectors (ECM) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Bosch Connectors (ECM)) * Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack))Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Push to Seat))Delphi Connectors Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10526 (Pull To Seat) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Pull to Seat))Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W))Delphi Connectors (Micro.64) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Micro .64))Delphi Connectors (12-Way) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (12-Way))Delphi Connectors (Steering Gear) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Steering Gear)) * FCI Connectors (Lever Lock) (See: General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/FCI Connectors (Lever Lock))FCI Connectors (SIR) (See: General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/FCI (SIR)) * FEP Connectors (Steering Gear) (See: General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/FEP Connectors (Steering Gear)) * JST Connectors (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/JST Connectors) * Kostal Connectors (Glow Plug Control Module) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Kostal Connectors (Glow Plug Control Module))Kostal Connectors (Transmission) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Kostal Connectors (Transmission)) * Molex Connectors (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Molex Connectors) * Sumitomo Connectors (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Sumitomo Connectors) * Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way))Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor))Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap))Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way))Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module)) * Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Yazaki Connectors (2-Way))Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Yazaki Connectors (16-Way)) * Repairing Connector Terminals (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Repairing Connector Terminals) Connector Anatomy 1 - Connector Positive Assurance (CPA) 2 - Assist Lever 3 - Wiredress Cover 4 - Seal Strain/Relief Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10527 5 - Slide Left Hand 6 - Slide Right Hand 7 - Terminal Positive Assurance (TPA) 8 - Terminal Positive Assurance (TPA) 9 - Connector Seal 10 - Connector Housing 11 - Inner Connector Identifying Connectors Knowing the connector manufacturer is helpful when trying to locating the correct connector repair procedure. There are many different connector designs used on GM vehicles and it is sometimes difficult to identify the connector manufacturer. The information in this document should help with the identification of connector manufactures. The following connector manufacturers make most of the connectors found in GM vehicles: * AFL/EPC (Alcoa Fujikura Ltd./Engineered Plastics Components) * Bosch * Delphi * FCI (Framatome Connectors International) * JAE (Japan Aviation Electronics) * JST (Japan Solderless Terminals) * Kostel * Molex * Sumitomo * Tyco/AMP * Yazaki Identifying the manufacturer of a connector is often difficult. When trying to determine the manufacturer of a connector, look for specific identifying marks that are unique to that connector supplier. Most of these identify marks are hard to find or see. Check the connector carefully and refer to the information below for pictures and descriptions of connector identification markings. * Most of AFLs connectors have EPC on their connector body. Some of the smaller connectors will not have any markings on them. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10528 * In some cases Bosch will actually be printed on the connector. If Bosch does not appear on the connector, look for the Bosch logo. The Bosch logo is a circle with a blunted arrow inside. This logo can appear anywhere on the connector and is often very small. * In some cases Delphi will actually be printed on the connector. If Delphi is not printed on the connector, look for PED. In both cases there is no specific orientation for Delphi or PED and they can appear anywhere on the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10529 * FCI connectors may have the FCI logo on their connectors. The logo is the letters FCI with an "A" above it. * JAE connector have JAE in small letters on their connectors. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10530 * JST connectors have JST in small letters on their connectors, similar to that above. The location of the logo will vary with the connector size and style. * Kostel has an "LK" with a circle around it. These connector are usually used as a transmissions connection. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10531 * Most Molex connectors will have the Molex logo on the dresscover of the connector. In some cases the connectors may have MX followed by another letter. The third letter indicates where the connector was made. A connector with MXD is a Molex connector made in Detroit. Sumitomo has a unique symbol on their connector and possibly a part number. The symbol is similar to that of a diamond lying on its side, similar to that shown. The logo could appear anywhere but the most common place is at the wire side of the housing. * Tyco/AMP has many different and unique connector designs. Some may or may not have identifiable marks on them. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10532 * Yazaki has a wedge or arrow shape, similar to that shown. Delphi Connectors (Push to Seat) Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Follow the steps below in order to repair push to seat connectors. 1. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device, the connector position assurance (CPA) device, and/or the secondary lock. 2. Separate the connector halves (1). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10533 3. Use the proper pick or removal tool (1) in order to release the terminal. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 4. Gently pull the cable and the terminal (2) out of the back of the connector. 5. Re-form the locking device if you are going to reuse the terminal (1). 6. To repair the terminal, refer to Terminal Repair. Terminal Repair 1. Slip the cable seal away from the terminal. 2. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 3. Slip a new cable seal onto the wire. 4. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 5. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 6. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. 7. Slide the cable seal toward the terminal. 8. Crimp the cable seal and the insulation. 9. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply grease to the connector. Reinstalling Terminal 1. In order to reuse a terminal or lead assembly, refer to Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Wiring Repairs). 2. Ensure that the cable seal is kept on the terminal side of the splice. 3. Insert the lead from the back until it catches. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Terminated Lead Repair 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Find the appropriate terminated lead. 3. Use the appropriate splice sleeves depending on the gauge size. 4. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves). Delphi Connectors (Pull to Seat) Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) Special Tools Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10534 J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal If the terminal is visibly damaged or is suspected of having a faulty connection, the terminal should be replaced. Follow the steps below in order to repair pull-to-seat connectors: 1. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) device and/or the secondary lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component or separate the connectors for in-line connectors. 3. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device. 4. Insert the proper pick or removal tool into the front of the connector body. Note: On connectors with more than one terminal the service loop may not be large enough to remove the terminal and crimp on a new one. If the terminal wire does not have a large enough service loop for removal, cut the wire 5 cm (2 in) behind the connector before removal. 5. Grasp the wire at the back of the connector body and gently push the terminal out the front of the connector body. Terminal Repair 1. If the wire needed to be cut in order to remove the terminal, gently push a small length of the same size wire through the back of the connector cavity until there is enough wire exposed in order to crimp on a new terminal. If the wire was not cut, cut the existing wire as close to the old terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 4. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. Terminal Installation 1. Align the terminal and pull the wire from the back of the connector in order to seat the terminal. 2. If necessary, cut the new wire to proper length and splice with existing circuit. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves). 3. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply dielectric grease to the connector. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Micro .64) Delphi Connectors (Micro.64) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10535 Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro.64 connectors. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. The lever lock may be located on the top or sides of the wire dress cover. View of a typical Micro 64 connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10536 Depress the lock and pull the lever over and past the lock. View of the connector when released from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10537 View of another type of Micro 64 connector. Depress the locks that are located on both sides of the wiredress cover and pull the lever over and past the locks. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10538 View of the connector when released from the component. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the front of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool push down on one of the locking tabs and pull the cover up until the dress cover releases. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. 4. Once the front 2 locks are unlocked, lift the front of the dress cover and pull it forward. Note: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 5. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the small slot on the TPA and pushing down until the TPA releases. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10539 Note: Be careful not to angle or rock the J 38125-21 tool when inserting it into the connector or the tool may break. 6. Insert the J 38125-21 tool into the round canal between the terminals cavities at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Follow the steps below in order to repair Micro 64 connector terminals. The Micro 64 connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-64 (M jaw) was developed to crimp Micro 64 terminals. The J 38125-64 crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. The J 38125-64 crimping tool is also designed to crimp both the wire and the insulation at the same time. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro 64 terminals. Note: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gauge wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 1. Cut the wire as close to the damaged terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10540 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert terminal into the appropriate terminal holder until it hits bottom and stops. The correct terminal holder is determined by the wire size. Also ensure that the terminals wings are pointing towards the former on the tool and the release locator. 5. Insert the stripped cable into the terminal. Insulation should be visible on both sides of the terminal insulation wings. 6. Compress the handles until the ratchet automatically releases. 7. Place the terminal into the appropriate cavity and assemble the connector. Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10541 Terminal Removal Procedure There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W connectors. These connectors are very similar but use different terminals and have some minor physical differences also. The first connector design of the Micro-Pack 100W (1) has a white connector interface that holds the terminals. The second design of the Micro-Pack 100W (2) has a gray interface to hold the terminals. Also, the first design has terminal cavities that are further apart (3 mm centerline) and offset from the other row of terminal cavities in the connector. The second design has terminals cavities that are closer together (2.54 mm centerline) and aligned vertically. One other way to identify the second design is the thin strip of material that runs along the outside of the cavities. Note: There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W terminals which are very similar. Ensure that you have the correct terminal before crimping the new terminal to the wire. The first design connector uses the longer terminal (1) that has a raised area in front of the recess in the terminal. The second design connector uses the shorter terminal without the raised area. Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro-Pack 100W connectors. Some Micro-Pack 100W connector disassembly procedures will vary. Use this procedure as a guide. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10542 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Locate the nose piece locking tabs that are positioned on the side of the connector nose piece. The connector nose piece acts as a terminal positive assurance (TPA) and may be referred to as such. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to push in one of the locking tabs while gently pulling on the same side of the nose piece. 4. Repeat the procedure for the other locking tab and remove the nose piece. 5. Remove the wire dress cover. The following is a general procedure for wire dress cover removal. Use this procedure as a guide, some dress cover removal procedures may vary. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10543 6. Use fingers to squeeze the 2 locking legs of the cover. 7. Apply pressure and gently rock the cover until one locking leg is unseated. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10544 8. Continue to apply pressure and rock the cover until the second locking leg is unseated. Repeat procedure for the other side of the dress cover and remove the cover. 9. Use J 38125-12A to gently lift the terminal retaining tab while gently pulling the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. If the terminal is severely bent or damaged, it may be possible on some connectors to push the wire out of the front of the connector instead of pulling it through. This will prevent damage to the internal seals of the connector. Once the terminal is pushed out of the connector, cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible and pull the wire through the connector. Terminal Repair Procedure The Micro-Pack 100W connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool was developed to crimp Micro-Pack 100W terminals. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro-Pack 100 terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10545 1. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. Note: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gauge wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert the terminal into the crimp tool until the core wings are flush with the anvil on the crimp tool. Be sure that the wings are pointed toward the crimp tool former and release the spring locator. The locator will hold the terminal in place. Inspect the alignment of the terminal wings with the crimp tool former. If the terminal wings are wider than the crimp tool former, remove the terminal and bend the terminal wings in slightly. 5. Place stripped wire into terminal. 6. Crimp the new terminal to the wire. If a jam occurs, press the emergency release to open applicator. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10546 Terminal Replacement Procedure After the terminal is crimped to the wire perform the following procedure in order to replace Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the Terminal Removal Procedure. Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The following is the proper procedure for the repair of Weather Pack(R) Connectors. 1. Separate the connector halves (1). 2. Open the secondary lock. A secondary lock aids in terminal retention and is usually molded to the connector (1). 3. Grasp the wire and push the terminal to the forward most position. Hold the wire in this position. 4. Insert the Weather Pack(R) terminal removal tool J 38125-10A into the front (mating end) of the connector cavity until it rests on the cavity shoulder (1). 5. Gently pull on the wire to remove the terminal through the back of the connector (2). Note: Never use force to remove a terminal from a connector. 6. Inspect the terminal and connector for damage. Repair as necessary. Refer to Repairing Connector Terminals (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Repairing Connector Terminals). 7. Reform the lock tang (2) and reset terminal in connector body. 8. Close secondary locks and join connector halves. 9. Verify that circuit is complete and working satisfactorily. 10. Perform system check. Delphi Connectors (12-Way) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10547 Delphi Connectors (12-Way) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) and slide the lever lock away from the connector body. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs on the dress cover of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool release all of the locking tabs. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10548 4. Release the lower wire dress cover locking tab. 5. Release the upper wire dress cover locking tab. 6. Once the locks are unlocked, lift the dress cover off. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10549 Note: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 7. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the locking tabs on both sides of the TPA. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. 8. Remove the nose piece by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the locking tabs on both sides of the nose piece. Gently pry the nose piece out of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10550 9. Insert the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Delphi Connectors (Steering Gear) Delphi Connectors (Steering Gear) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10551 Removal Procedure 1. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the locking tab on the connector. 2. Push down the locking tab to release the connector. The small flat-bladed tool may need to be pushed down and angled back slightly to depress the locking tab. Pull on the connector body while releasing the locking tab to disconnect the connector. FCI Connectors (Lever Lock) FCI Connectors (Lever Lock) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10552 Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. 1. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. 2. The release tab is located on the top of the wiredress cover. 3. View of connector in released position. 4. Disconnect the connector from the component. 5. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the dress cover. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs and remove the dress cover. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10553 6. Use a small flat-blade tool to slide the terminal position assurance (TPA) up one notch on both ends of the connector. The TPA is located underneath the wire dress cover. For the larger terminals insert the J 38125-556 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. For the smaller terminals insert the J 38125-560 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10554 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. FCI (SIR) FCI Connectors (SIR) Removal Procedure Note: The orange CPA must be released first to disconnect or to connect the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10555 1. Lift the orange CPA vertically (avoid lifting on an angle to the connector) approximately 4 mm to release the connector. Use a small flat-bladed tool to help release the orange CPA. The orange CPA can also be released manually without any tools. 2. Grab the connector on both sides and lift the connector vertically to disconnect the connector. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10556 1. Lift the orange CPA vertically approximately 4 mm before installing the connector. Use a small flat-bladed tool to help release the orange CPA. The orange CPA can also be released manually without any tools. 2. Line up the connector key tabs with the initiator key slots. Grab the connector on both sides and push the connector down into the initiator connector sub assembly until fully seated. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10557 3. After the connector is fully seated, push down the orange CPA with your thumb. Push down until the orange CPA is touching the yellow cover on the connector. FEP Connectors (Steering Gear) FEP Connectors (Steering Gear) Removal Procedure 1. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the locking tab on the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10558 2. Push down the locking tab to release the connector. The small flat-bladed tool may need to be pushed down and angled back slightly to depress the locking tab. Pull on the connector body while releasing the locking tab to disconnect the connector. JST Connectors JST Connectors Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. While depressing the lock, remove the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10559 2. Locate the two indents of the terminal position assurance (TPA) located on the bottom of the connector body. Note: The TPA cannot be removed from the connector while there are terminals present in the connector body. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to very carefully raise the TPA on both sides of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10560 4. View of the TPA when removed from the connector body. 5. Use the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the left side of the terminal release cavity as shown in the graphic. Use the tool to move the terminal release to the right with a gentle prying motion. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Kostal Connectors (Glow Plug Control Module) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10561 Kostal Connectors (Glow Plug Control Module) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure View of typical connector. View of connector in released position. 1. Locate the assist lever at the back of the connector. Move the assist lever to the rear position. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10562 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove the dress cover. 4. Slide the dress cover forward and off of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10563 5. The terminal positive assurance (TPA) is located in the front and rear of the connector. Note: The front TPA cannot be removed from the connector. Only move it to the preset position. 6. Use a small flat-blade tool to move the front TPA to the preset position, outboard approximately 0.125 in. (3 mm). 7. Use a small flat-blade tool to completely remove the rear TPA from the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10564 8. Use the J 38125-24 or the J 38125-560 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 9. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Kostal Connectors (Transmission) Kostal Connectors (Transmission) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10565 1. While depressing the lock, twist and remove the connector from the component. 2. Locate the terminal position assurance (TPA). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10566 Note: The TPA cannot be removed from the connector while there are terminals present in the connector body. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to push the TPA until it bottoms out. 4. Use the J 38125-28 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal cavity as shown in the graphic. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 5. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Terminal Replacement Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10567 After the terminal is crimped to the wire, perform the following procedure in order to replace the terminal. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. Locate the terminal position assurance (TPA). 4. Use a small flat-blade tool to push the TPA until it bottoms out. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10568 5. Ensure the TPA is fully seated. The TPA should be centered and flush with the connector body when viewed. Molex Connectors Molex Connectors Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the top of the wire dress cover. Slide the CPA forward. 2. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10569 3. The lever should be in the full forward position. 4. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10570 5. Remove the dress cover by using a flat bladed tool to release the dress cover locking tabs and lift up on the dress cover. 6. Cut the tie wrap that holds the wires to the connector body. 7. Use a small flat-blade tool to pry one side of the nose piece up to the pre-stage position. When the nose piece is in the pre-staged position, the nose piece will be raised above the connector body the length of the step in the nose piece. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10571 8. Use a small flat-blade tool to pry the other side of the piece to the pre-stage position. If the nose piece is higher than the first step in the nose piece, gently push down on the nose piece until it meets with resistance from the connector body, you should feel the nose piece click into position. 9. Insert the J 38125-213 into the small terminal release hole on the nose piece and gently pull on the back of the wire. 10. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Refer to the terminal crimping procedure in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit. Terminal Replacement Procedure After the terminal is crimped to the wire, perform the following procedure in order to replace the terminal. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10572 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the connector disassembly procedure. Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the connector body and pull the CPA out. The CPA is on the wire harness side of connector. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Use a small flat-bladed tool to gently pry off the dress cover by inserting the tool under the cover opposite the harness side and prying up. 4. Remove the cover. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10573 5. Using a small flat-bladed tool, push on the side of the nose piece retainer while pushing the nose piece forward with your thumb. This will release the terminal position assurance (TPA). 6. Insert the J 38125-12A into the corresponding terminal release cavity. The release cavities are the 2 center rows of cavities on one half of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10574 7. Pressing the J 38125-12A tool in the release cavity of the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and crimper in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. Slide the lever lock away from the connector body. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs on the dress cover of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool release all of the locking tabs. 4. Once the locks are unlocked, lift the dress cover off. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10575 Note: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 5. Release the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the blue locking tabs on both ends of the connector. Gently slide the TPA up to the released position on both ends. 6. For the larger terminals insert the J 38125-13A tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. For the smaller terminals insert the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10576 View of the release tool being used for the larger terminals. View of the release tool being used for the larger terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10577 View of the release tool being used for the smaller terminals. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10578 Side view of connector. View of top of connector. 1. Locate the assist lever and lock on the top of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10579 2. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. 3. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10580 4. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the rear of the connector. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. 5. Once the locking tabs are unlocked, slide the inner connector out of the rear of the connector housing. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10581 6. Use the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by pressing on the tang. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Repairing Connector Terminals Repairing Connector Terminals Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Use the following repair procedures in order to repair the following: * Push to Seat terminals * Pull to Seat terminals Some terminals do not require all of the steps shown. Skip the steps that do not apply for your terminal repair. The J-38125 contains further information. 1. Cut off the terminal between the core and the insulation crimp. Minimize any wire loss. For cable seal terminals, remove the seal. 2. Apply the correct cable seal per gauge size of the wire, if used. Slide the seal back along the wire in order to enable insulation removal. 3. Remove the insulation. 4. For sealed terminals only, align the seal with the end of the cable insulation. 5. Position the strip in the terminal. For sealed terminals, position the strip and seal in the terminal. 6. Hand crimp the core wings. 7. Hand crimp the insulation wings. For sealed terminals, hand crimp the insulation wings around the seal and the cable. 8. Solder all of the hand crimp terminals excepting Micro-Pack 100.64 size. Soldering Micro-Pack 100 World terminals may damage the terminal. Sumitomo Connectors Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10582 Sumitomo Connectors Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10583 3. Remove the dress cover by using a flat-blade tool to release the connector locking tabs and pulling off the dress cover. 4. Relieve the tension on the nose piece retainers by inserting J 38125-12A into the single retainer slot on the end of the nose piece and gently prying out the locking tab. Repeat the process for both of the nose piece locking tabs on the opposite side of the nose piece. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10584 5. Once the nose piece retainers are relaxed, use the J 38125-552 to pull up the nose piece by hooking the tool under the nose piece and pulling up. The nose piece should raise slightly. 6. On the opposite side of the nose piece, use the J 38125-552 to pull up the nose piece by hooking the tool under the nose piece and pulling up. The nose piece should release completely. If the nose piece does not come off, repeat the procedure on the opposite side. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10585 7. The illustration above identifies the entry canal where the terminal release tool will be inserted, and the terminal cavity. * Terminal (1) * Entry Canal (2) 8. Insert the J 38125-553 tool into the entry canal and pry up on the terminal retainer. The terminal retainer is a small plastic piece on the top of the terminal. The terminal retainer must be held up while the terminal is pulled out of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10586 9. The illustration shows a cutaway view of the connector to aid the technician in releasing the terminal retainer. 10. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Refer to the terminal crimping procedure in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit. Terminal Replacement Procedure After the terminal is crimped to the wire, perform the following procedure in order to replace the terminal. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the connector disassembly procedure. Terminal Position Assurance Locks Terminal Position Assurance Locks The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10587 2. Insert the J 38125-11A tool into the cavity on the lower right hand face of the connector until the terminal release tang access panel slides over. 3. Ensure that the terminal release tang access panel is in the correct location to access the terminals. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10588 5. Insert the J 38125-11A into the terminal release tang access slot located behind the access panel of the connector and press down on the terminal while carefully pulling the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component by pressing down on the connector position assurance (CPA). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10589 2. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting the tool in the small recess on the side of the connector and pushing up until the TPA releases from the connector body. The TPA should raise just slightly. Do not try to remove the TPA. Note: The TPA on this connector cannot be removed unless the terminals are removed first. The TPA will come out of the connector body, but only slightly. When the TPA is slightly raised the terminals can be removed. Using excessive force to remove the TPA with the terminals still in the connector will damage the connector. 3. Repeat the process for the other side of the connector. 4. Ensure that the TPA is in the proper position to remove the terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10590 5. While pushing the terminal forward, insert the J 38125-24 in the release cavity above the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10591 2. Insert a small flat-blade tool in the slot below the front loaded terminal position assurance (TPA) and pry up. 3. Remove the TPA by pulling it out of the connector. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-553 on a slight upward angle into the cavity below the terminal to be removed. Ensure that the pointed on the end of the tool is facing the bottom of the terminal and it stays in contact with the terminal until it stops on the plastic terminal retainer. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10592 6. Gently pry the plastic terminal retainer down and carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10593 1. While depressing the lock, pull the two connector halves apart. Note: The TPA is fragile and may break if not done carefully. 2. Use a small flat-blade tool to very carefully push the terminal position assurance (TPA) towards the face of the connector on both sides of the connector. 3. View of the male half of the connector with female terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10594 4. View of the female half of the connector with male terminals. 5. Use the J 38125-215 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. View of the female half of the connector with male terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10595 7. View of the male half of the connector with female terminals. 8. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers A circuit breaker is a protective device that is designed to open the circuit when a current load is in excess of the rated breaker capacity. If there is a short or other type of overload condition in the circuit, the excessive current will open the circuit between the circuit breaker terminals. Two types of circuit breakers are used. Circuit Breaker - This type opens when excessive current passes through it for a period of time. It closes again after a few seconds, and if the cause of the high current is still present, it will open again. The circuit breaker will continue to cycle open and closed until the condition causing the high current is removed. Positive Temperature Coefficient (PTC) Circuit Breaker - This type greatly increases its resistance when excessive current passes through it. The excessive current heats the PTC device, as the device heats its resistance increases. Eventually the resistance gets so high that the circuit is effectively open. Unlike the ordinary circuit breaker the PTC unit will not reset until the circuit is opened, by removing the voltage from its terminals. Once the voltage is removed the circuit breaker will re-close within a second or 2. Circuit Protection - Fuses Circuit Protection - Fuses Special Tools EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM) For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10596 The fuse is the most common method of an automotive wiring circuit protection. Whenever there is an excessive amount of current flowing through a circuit the fusible element will melt and create an open or incomplete circuit. Fuses are a one time protection device and must be replaced each time the circuit is overloaded. To determine if a fuse is open, remove the suspected fuse and examine if the element in the fuse is broken (2). If not broken (1), also check for continuity using a Digital Multimeter (DMM) or a continuity tester. If the element is broken or continuity is suspect, replace the fuse with one of equal current rating. Circuit Protection - Fusible Links Circuit Protection - Fusible Links Special Tools EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM) For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Fusible link is wire designed to melt and break continuity when excessive current is applied. It is often located between or near the battery and starter or electrical center. Use a continuity tester or a Digital Multimeter (DMM) at each end of the wire containing the fusible link in order to determine if it is broken. If broken, it must be replaced with fusible link of the same gauge size. Repairing a Fusible Link Note: Fusible links cut longer than 225 mm (approximately 9 in) will not provide sufficient overload protection. Flat Wire Repairs Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10597 Flat Wire Repairs The flat wire within the flex wiring harness is not serviceable. If an open or short exists within the flex wiring harness the complete harness must be replaced. GMLAN Wiring Repairs GMLAN Wiring Repairs Special Tools * EL-38125-10 - Splice Sleeve Crimping Tool * J 38125-5 - Ultra Torch Special Tool * DuraSeal splice sleeves * A wire stripping tool For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: * A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. * A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The GM Local Area Network (GMLAN) System requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working on GMLAN connectors and terminals. GMLAN Repairs Note: When making a repair to any GMLAN network, the original wire length after the repair must be the same length as before the repair. If the network is a twisted pair, the twist must be maintained after the repair is completed. GMLAN has 2 types of networks, low speed and high speed. Low speed GMLAN has a single wire and works at slow speeds. High speed GMLAN has 2 wires in a twisted pair and works at higher speeds. For more information on GMLAN, refer to Data Link Communications Description and Operation ( See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Information Bus/Description and Operation). GMLAN Connector Terminal Repair Note: A terminated lead can be used to replace damaged connector terminals for both high speed and low speed GMLAN systems. When making a connector terminal repair on a GMLAN high speed system with twisted pair wires, do not untwist the wires more than necessary to make the repair. If the individual terminals are damaged on any GMLAN connection, use the appropriate connector repair procedure in order to repair the terminal. Refer to Connector Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Connector Repairs) for the appropriate connector repair procedure. GMLAN Wire Repair Note: Refer to Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Wiring Repairs) in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gauge size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and EL-38125-10 - tool. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the DuraSeal splice sleeves. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10598 Note: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: * Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. * Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. * Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert to regional wiring gauge size. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the EL-38125-10 - tool in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the splice sleeve crimp tool. The crimp tool has four nests, one for each color. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10599 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs Caution: Do not solder repairs under any circumstances as this could result in the air reference being obstructed. If the heated oxygen sensor pigtail wiring, connector, or terminal is damaged the entire oxygen sensor assembly must be replaced. Do not attempt to repair the wiring, connector, or terminals. In order for the sensor to function properly it must have a clean air reference. This clean air reference is obtained by way of the oxygen sensor signal and heater wires. Any attempt to repair the wires, connectors or terminals could result in the obstruction of the air reference and degrade oxygen sensor performance. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10600 The following guidelines should be used when servicing the heated oxygen sensor: * Do not apply contact cleaner or other materials to the sensor or vehicle harness connectors. These materials may get into the sensor, causing poor performance. Also, the sensor pigtail and harness wires must not be damaged in such a way that the wires inside are exposed. This could provide a path for foreign materials to enter the sensor and cause performance problems. * Neither the sensor nor vehicle lead wires should be bent sharply or kinked. Sharp bends, kinks, etc., could block the reference air path through the lead wire. * Do not remove or defeat the oxygen sensor ground wire (where applicable). Vehicles that utilize the ground wire sensor may rely on this ground as the only ground contact to the sensor. Removal of the ground wire will also cause poor engine performance. * To prevent damage due to water intrusion, be sure that the peripheral seal remains intact on the vehicle harness connector. High Temperature Wiring Repairs High Temperature Wiring Repairs Special Tools * EL-38125-10 - Splice Sleeve Crimping Tool * J 38125-5 - Ultra Torch * DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). High Temperature Wiring Wiring that is exposed to high temperatures, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time may use materials i.e. wires, connectors, and shielding that has a higher heat rating than typical wiring. When making a repair in a high temperature area observe the following: * Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature to replace any damaged wire. * Replace any heat shielding that is removed. * Cover any DuraSeal splice sleeves with SCT1 shrink tubing. * After making a wiring repair, ensure that the location of the wiring is not moved closer to the heat source. Identifying High Temperature Wiring Wiring that is exposed to high temperature, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time need special considerations when making wiring repairs. Areas that may be exposed to higher temperatures can be identified by heat resistant materials that are being used in those areas. These materials may include heat reflective tape, moon tape, and high temperature shrink tubing. Also conduit and other protective coverings may be used. Because conduit or similar coverings are used throughout the vehicle regardless of the temperature, it may be necessary for the technician to determine if an area is exposed to excessive heat before making a wiring repair. Obvious areas of consideration would be any area located near the exhaust manifolds, catalytic converter, and exhaust pipes. Items Required * DuraSeal splice sleeves to crimp and seal connections * High temperature SCT1 shrink tubing to protect the splice sleeves * Terminated leads or pigtails * The correct tools to remove the terminals from the connectors Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature of the same or larger gauge size as the original wire when repair damage wire. Also replace any reflective tape that you remove during the repair. High Temperature Wire Repair Note: Refer to Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Wiring Repairs) in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature rating of the same gauge size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the EL-38125-10 - tool and then encapsulate the splice sleeve using the high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10601 Note: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: * Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. * Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. * Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert to regional wiring gauge size. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Slide a section of high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing down the length of wire to be spliced. Ensure that the shrink tubing will not interfere with the splice procedure. 5. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 6. Use the EL-38125-10 - tool in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the splice sleeve crimp tool. The crimp tool has four nests, one for each color. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10602 7. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 8. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 9. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 10. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 11. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10603 12. Center the high temperature SCT1 shrink tube over the DuraSeal splice sleeve. 13. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the high temperature heat shrink tubing. 14. Gradually move the heat from the center to the open end of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. 15. Replace any reflective tape and clips that may have been remove during the repair. Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation If the wire insulation has been chafed, or broken, enough to show the conductive portion of the wire, and the wire is not damaged, determine the length of insulation that needs to be repaired. If the repair is less than 280 mm (11 in), cut the wire within the damaged area. Than slide the appropriate heat shrink tubing (listed below) over the wire, and repair the wire by splicing the wires together. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves). Once the wire is spliced together slide heat shrink tubing over the damaged area and apply heat to seal the repaired wire. If the wire is damaged, or the damaged area is larger than 280 mm (11 in), than replace the damaged wire by splicing in a new section of wire. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10604 SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs Special Tools * EL-38125-10 - Splice Sleeve Crimping Tool * J 38125-5 - Ultra Torch * DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: * A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. * A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides the necessary low resistance contact integrity for these sensitive, low energy circuits. The Supplemental Inflatable Restraint (SIR) System/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working with the SIR/SRS, and the wiring components, such as connectors and terminals. SIR/SRS Connector Repair (Plastic Body and Terminal Metal Pin) Note: Do not use the terminals in the kit in order to replace damaged SIR/SRS system terminals. Use either an SIR/SRS pigtail or a terminated lead from the SIR Repair Kit Tray. The terminals in the SIR/SRS system are made with a special plating. This plating provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. Pigtail repair packs are available for SIR/SRS connectors with eight or less terminals. Only the connector body is available for connectors with more than eight terminals. Terminated leads can be used to replace damaged terminals when replacing the connector body. SIR/SRS Component Wire Pigtail Repair Note: Do not make wire, connector, or terminal repairs on components with wire pigtails. A wire pigtail is a wire or wires attached directly to the device, not by a connector. If a wiring pigtail is damaged, you must replace the entire component, with pigtail. The inflatable restraint steering wheel module coil is an example of a pigtail component. SIR/SRS Wire Repair Note: Refer to Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Wiring Repairs) in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10605 If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gauge size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and EL-38125-10 - tool. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the DuraSeal splice sleeves. Note: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: * Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. * Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. * Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert to regional wiring gauge size. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the EL-38125-10 - tool in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the splice sleeve crimp tool. The crimp tool has four nests, one for each color. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10606 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Connector Position Assurance (CPA) The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of a connector. CPAs are used in all SIR System connectors and also in some connectors of other systems. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals of a connection. Terminal Position Assurance (TPA) The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10607 Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Special Tools * EL-38125-10 - Splice Sleeve Crimping Tool * J 38125-5 - Ultra Torch * DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Note: Use only DuraSeal splice sleeves. Other splice sleeves may not protect the splice from moisture or provide a good electrical connection. Use DuraSeal splice sleeves to form a one-to-one splice on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. Use DuraSeal splice sleeves where there is special requirements such as moisture sealing. Follow the instructions below in order to splice copper wire using DuraSeal splice sleeves. Note: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: * Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. * Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. * Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert to regional wiring gauge size. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10608 5. Use the EL-38125-10 - tool in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the splice sleeve crimp tool. The crimp tool has four nests, one for each color. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10609 * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Splicing Inline Harness Diodes Splicing Inline Harness Diodes Many vehicle electrical systems use a diode to isolate circuits and protect the components from voltage spikes. When installing a new diode use the following procedure. 1. Open the harness. * If the harness is taped, remove the tape. * To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing seam ripper (available from sewing supply stores) in order to cut open the harness. * If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the diode. 2. If the diode is taped to the harness, remove all of the tape. 3. Check and record the current flow direction and orientation of diode. 4. Remove the inoperative diode from the harness with a suitable soldering tool. Note: If the diode is located next to a connector terminal remove the terminal(s) from the connector to prevent damage from the soldering tool. 5. Carefully strip away a section of insulation next to the old soldered portion of the wire(s). Do not remove any more than is needed to attach the new diode. 6. Check current flow direction of the new diode, being sure to install the diode with correct bias. Reference the appropriate service manual wiring schematic to obtain the correct diode installation position. 7. Attach the new diode to the wire(s) using 60/40 rosin core solder. Before soldering attach some heat sinks (aluminum alligator clips) across the diode wire ends to protect the diode from excessive heat. Follow the manufacturer's instruction for the soldering equipment. 8. Reinstall terminal(s) into the connector body if previously removed. Note: To prevent shorts to ground and water intrusion, completely cover all exposed wire and diode attachment points with tape. 9. Tape the diode to the harness or connector using electrical tape. Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable Twisted/shielded cable is used in order to protect wiring from electrical noise. Two-conductor cable of this construction is used between the radio and the Delco-Bose(R) speaker/amplifier units and other applications where low level, sensitive signals must be carried. Follow the instructions below in order to repair the twisted/shielded cable. 1. Remove the outer jacket (1). Use care not to cut into the drain wire of the mylar tape. 2. Unwrap the tape. Do not remove the tape. Use the tape in order to rewrap the twisted conductors after the splice is made. 3. Prepare the splice. Untwist the conductors and follow the instructions for Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves). Staggering the splices by 65 mm (2.5 in) is recommended. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10610 Note: Apply the mylar tape with the aluminum side inward. This ensures good electrical contact with the drain wire. 4. Re-assemble the cable. * Rewrap the conductors with the mylar tape. If the mylar tape is damaged, use 3M product AL-36FR to replace the damaged mylar tape. * Use caution not to wrap the drain wire in the tape (1). * Follow the splicing instructions for copper wire and splice the drain wire. * Wrap the drain wire around the conductors and tape with electrical tape to replace the outer insulation. 5. Tape over the entire cable. Use a winding motion when you apply the tape. Wiring Repairs Wiring Repairs The Wiring Repairs section contains the following types of wiring repair information. Using these elements together will make wiring repair faster and easier: * Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections) * Flat Wire Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Flat Wire Repairs) * GMLAN Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/GMLAN Wiring Repairs) * High Temperature Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/High Temperature Wiring Repairs) * Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs) * Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves) * Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable) * Splicing Inline Harness Diodes (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Inline Harness Diodes) * SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs) US English/Metric Conversion US English/Metric Conversion Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10611 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10612 Basic Digital Multimeter Requirements Basic Digital Multimeter Requirements Digital Multimeter (DMM) Basic Requirements Service information is validated using digital multimeters that meet or exceed the following requirements. Using a multimeter that does not meet these basic requirements may give inaccurate readings which could lead to an incorrect diagnosis. Display and Settings 1. Four digits displayed 2. Voltage, amperage, resistance, frequency, diode test settings, and min-max function 3. Display positive and negative values Voltage 1. Have at least 10 Mohm input impedance 2. Test a DC voltage range of 0.1-1000 V. 3. Test an AC voltage range of 0.1-1000 V. Amperage 1. Test a DC amperage range of 0.1µA-10 A. 2. Test an AC amperage range of 0.1µA-10 A. Resistance Test a resistance range of 0.1 ohm-40 Mohm and displays infinite for a value greater than 40 Mohm (O.L. (Over-load)) Frequency Test for a frequency range of 0.5 HZ-199 K HZ Diode Test 1. Apply at least 1 mA when performing the diode bias test 2. Display the break over voltage drop (0-3 V) of a forward biased diode 3. Display infinite (O.L. (Over-load)) when a diode is reverse biased Min-Max Readings 1. Can update at a 1 ms sample rate 2. Saves and displays minimum and maximum values Testing Ground and Low Reference Circuits Testing Ground and Low Reference Circuits Because a test lamp can light with up to 200 ohm in a ground or low reference circuit they are not recommended to be used for this type of test. A low impedance test lamp can light and indicate the circuit is good when there is as much as 20-30 ohm present, while a high impedance test lamp can light with up to 200 ohm present in the circuit. This is why the Digital Multi-Meter (DMM) is used when validating a ground or low reference circuit continuity. When using the DMM there are many vehicle conditions that can affect the ground and low reference continuity testing. If these conditions are not met, a ground or low reference circuit test can fail on a good circuit. This may cause longer diagnosis time and incorrect component replacement. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10613 Any current flow through a ground or low reference circuit, while being tested, will skew the DMM continuity reading, or display a reading higher than when there is no current flowing. Performing a ground or low reference circuit continuity test, in reference to the vehicles battery negative terminal, will have the highest risk of failing a good ground or low reference circuit test than any other ground reference point. The best ground test points would be a control module housing (if the control modules housing is metal and grounded), door jamb striker (if attached to metal), under dash metal frame work, engine block, or body ground studs (other than where the negative battery cable is attached). A typical DMM ground or low reference circuit continuity reading can be as high as 100 ohm with the ignition ON, and drop to 15-25 ohm after the ignition is turned OFF. The reading will drop below 10 ohm after 30-40 seconds, then below 5 ohm after 60 seconds. Once the vehicle completely goes to sleep (generally 3-10 minutes) the reading will drop below 0.3 ohm. The following list of conditions may need to be met to ensure a valid continuity reading on a ground or low reference circuit: * Ignition OFF * Key out of the ignition switch (when not equipped with keyless entry and remote start) * Retained Accessory Power (RAP) OFF (open and close the driver door after ignition OFF) * Battery charger set at a 2 A or less charge rate * Scan tool not communicating with any vehicle control module (in some cases it may need to be disconnected from the DLC) * All entry doors closed * Headlamps OFF (auto headlamps disabled) * Any delay lighting OFF * HVAC after blow OFF * Any accessory that can work when the ignition is OFF * Wait up to 60 seconds (after all other listed conditions are met) Activating the DOOR LOCK function with a key fob can greatly reduce the time to achieve a valid ground or low reference continuity test result. Terminal Wiring Repair Terminal Wiring Repair Special Tools * EL-38125-10 - Splice Sleeve Crimp Tool * EL-38125-580 - Terminal Release Tool Kit * J-38125-5 - Ultra Torch * EL-35616 - Connector Test Adapter Kit For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Note: All repairs near the engine manifold, turbo engine and all exhaust pipes should follow the High Temperature Wiring Repair procedures. 1. Find the appropriate connector end view within the connector end view section. The connector end view has the following information: * Diagnostic probe tool * Terminal release tool * Terminal/terminated lead part numbers 2. Determine if a terminal is damaged. Note: Not using the proper test kit probe may cause damage to the terminal(s) that are probed. * Locate the diagnostic probe tool from the connector end view. The connector end view describes the color and part number to help the technician find and use the correct tool. * Connect the probe tool to the Digital Multimeter. * Insert the probe tool into the cavity and follow the procedures from the Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter). 3. Disconnect the connector body to perform the repair. Note: Several procedures for specific connector bodies are called out in Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Wiring Repairs). Use the following repair procedures to repair the following terminals: Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10614 Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack))Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Push to Seat))Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Pull to Seat))Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W))Delphi Connectors (Micro.64) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Micro .64) )Delphi Connectors (12-Way) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (12-Way))Delphi Connectors (Steering Gear) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Steering Gear)) * The TPA and CPA should be removed before releasing the terminal for the connector body. * Look at the connector end view to locate the cavity of the damaged terminal and find the proper terminal release tool from the terminal release tool kit. Note: Using the incorrect terminal release tool can damage the connector body. * Insert the terminal release tool into the cavity. Note: Some terminals have a lever that must be disengaged before the terminal can be released. Gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Terminated Lead Repair Terminated Lead Repair Special Tools * EL-38125-10 - Splice Sleeve Crimp Tool * EL-38125-580 - Terminal Release Tool Kit * J-38125-5 - Ultra Torch * EL-35616 - Connector Test Adapter Kit For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Note: All repairs near the engine manifold, turbo engine and all exhaust pipes should follow the High Temperature Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/High Temperature Wiring Repairs) procedures. Terminated leads are terminals that are crimped onto wires. The terminated lead can be used throughout the vehicle since it is designed for temperatures up to 150°C. The length of the wire is 450 mm. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10615 The DuraSeal splice sleeve has the following 2 critical features: * A special heat shrink tubing that environmentally seals the splice. The shrink tubing contains a sealing adhesive inside the shrink tubing. * A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp that provides the necessary contact integrity for sensitive low energy circuits. 1. Use the connector end view to identify the correct terminated lead. 2. The terminated lead package should include a DuraSeal splice sleeve. If not, use the chart to identify the correct part. 3. Open the harness by removing any tape: Use a sewing seam ripper, or a comparable tool, to cut open the harness, to avoid wire insulation damage. 4. Depending on how many terminals need repairs, cut the terminal and wire back at least 40 mm. Try to keep the harness wire length the same. If more than one terminated lead is required, stagger the lengths by 40 mm. This helps reduce the bundle size of the wire harness. 5. Use the EL-38125-10 - tool in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the splice sleeve crimp tool. The crimp tool has four nests, one for each color. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10616 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the J-38125-5 - ultra torch , apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10617 Blower Motor: Connector Views M8 Blower Motor Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 10618 Blower Motor: Service and Repair Blower Motor Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Cabin Air Filter > Component Information > Service and Repair Cabin Air Filter: Service and Repair Passenger Compartment Air Filter Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Cabin Ventilation Grille > Component Information > Service and Repair Cabin Ventilation Grille: Service and Repair Quarter Outer Panel Pressure Relief Valve Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch > Component Information > Specifications Compressor Clutch: Specifications Air gap ................................................................................................................................................. ................................. 0.30-0.60 mm (0.011-0.023 in) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch > Component Information > Specifications > Page 10629 Compressor Clutch: Diagrams Q2 A/C Compressor Clutch Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch > Component Information > Specifications > Page 10630 Compressor Clutch: Adjustments Air Conditioning Clutch Drive Plate Adjustment 1. Install the clutch plate assembly. Note: Ensure the drive plate does not drag against the pulley when the pulley is rotated. 2. Measure the air gap between the pulley and the drive plate. Adjust the shims to achieve a 0.30-0.60 mm (0.011-0.023 in) air gap. Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener Caution). 3. Install the clutch plate retaining bolt and tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb in). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch Hub > Component Information > Service and Repair Compressor Clutch Hub: Service and Repair Compressor Clutch Plate and Hub Assembly Removal Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor Clutch Relay > Component Information > Locations Compressor Clutch Relay: Locations Electrical Center Identification Views X50A Fuse Block - Underhood, Label Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor Clutch Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 10637 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Condenser HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair Condenser HVAC: Service and Repair Air Conditioning Condenser Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Locations Control Assembly: Locations Instrument Panel/Center Console Component Views Lower Right of the Instrument Panel Components 1 - K33 HVAC Control Module 2 - F105 Passenger Instrument Panel Air Bag 3 - X51A Fuse Block Instrument Panel Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 10644 Control Assembly: Diagrams K33 HVAC Control Module X1 (C68) K33 HVAC Control Module X2 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 10645 K33 HVAC Control Module X3 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 10646 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > HVAC - Manual Control Assembly: Service and Repair HVAC - Manual Heater and Air Conditioning Control Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > HVAC - Manual > Page 10649 Control Assembly: Service and Repair Defroster Valve Replacement Defroster Valve Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > HVAC - Manual > Page 10650 Control Assembly: Service and Repair Vent Valve Replacement Vent Valve Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > HVAC - Manual > Page 10651 Control Assembly: Service and Repair Heater and Air Conditioning Control Replacement Heater and Air Conditioning Control Replacement (Equinox) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Control Module HVAC: > 09298D > Nov > 10 > Recall - Defroster/Defogger Inoperative Technical Service Bulletin # 09298D Date: 101122 Recall - Defroster/Defogger Inoperative FMVSS NONCOMPLIANCE Bulletin No.: 09298D Date: November 22, 2010 Subject: 09298D - Heating and Windshield Defrost Inoperative - Replace Computer Module Models: 2010 Chevrolet Equinox 2010 GMC Terrain Supercede: The Parts Information section in this bulletin has been revised for Canadian dealers. Mass Comp is no longer an Authorized GM Electronics Service Center. Canadian dealers are to begin contacting York Electronics for all exchanges.Discard all copies of bulletin 09298C, issued March 2010. Customers are being instructed to provide their VIN when calling to schedule a service appointment. If the vehicle will not be programmed at the dealership, please provide the VIN to the Parts Manager so parts can be ordered and received in time for the service appointment. Parts will be shipped overnight to dealers so please do not order more than 2 days prior to the scheduled service appointment date. Condition General Motors has decided that certain 2010 model year Chevrolet Equinox and GMC Terrain vehicles fail to conform to Federal/Canada Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 103, "Windshield Defrosting and Defogging Systems", and Standard 101, "Controls and Displays". On these vehicles, software in the center instrument panel can cause the heating, air conditioning, defrost, and radio controls, as well as the panel illumination to become inoperative. Driving without a functioning defrost system can decrease the driver's visibility under certain driving conditions and could result in a crash without warning. Driving without panel illumination can divert the driver's attention while looking for a control. Correction Dealers are to replace the computer module in the center instrument panel. Vehicles Involved Involved are certain 2010 model year Chevrolet Equinox and GMC Terrain vehicles built within these VIN breakpoints: Important Dealers are to confirm vehicle eligibility prior to beginning repairs by using the Required Field Actions section in the Global Warranty system. Not all vehicles within the above breakpoints may be involved. For dealers with involved vehicles, a listing with involved vehicles containing the complete vehicle identification number, customer name, and address information has been prepared and will be provided to US and Canadian dealers through the GM GlobalConnect Recall Reports, or sent directly to export dealers. Dealers will not have a report available if they have no involved vehicles currently assigned. The listing may contain customer names and addresses obtained from Motor Vehicle Registration Records. The use of such motor vehicle registration data for any purpose other than follow-up necessary to complete this recall is a violation of law in several states/provinces/countries. Accordingly, you are urged to limit the use of this report to the follow-up necessary to complete this recall. Parts Information For dealers using the programming tool: Most repairs require no parts. There are a small number of vehicles that will not be able to be reprogrammed; for these vehicles, please follow the parts information below. If you have parts currently in your inventory, please return them to Specmo (U.S.) or York Electronics (Canada). For dealers that did not receive a programming tool: A center instrument panel will be required. Note Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Control Module HVAC: > 09298D > Nov > 10 > Recall - Defroster/Defogger Inoperative > Page 10660 Center instrument panels (radio control assemblies) will be shipped overnight to dealers. Note: Core returns for this recall are to be shipped within 24 hours of receiving the exchange. A prepaid Federal Express Ground label will be included with each exchange. Package the core securely in the original packaging and package inserts provided with the exchange. It is important that the return unit be packaged identically to the exchange unit to prevent damage in shipping. Failure to return the core will result in a charge to the dealer's Open Parts Account. Do not order parts for customer vehicles until they have scheduled an appointment. U.S. Dealers Only: If the customer is not experiencing any concerns with the center instrument panel (ICS), please contact Specmo Enterprises for arrange for an exchange. If the customer does have ICS concerns, please contact the Technical Assistance Center (TAC) prior to ordering an exchange ICS. Dealers are to contact Specmo Enterprises via the internet at www.specmo.com/dealers, to arrange for an exchange of the center instrument panel (radio control assembly). Dealers that do not have an account with Specmo will be able to create an account in order to access the website. Arrange for an exchange by following the prompts. The information below will be required to arrange for an exchange. - Bulletin number 09298 - VIN Ontario Dealers Only: Due to a limited inventory, and to avoid backorders, an onsite mobile upgrade is available. Please contact York Electronics at 888-650-9675 to schedule an appointment. All Other Provinces, Excluding Ontario: To arrange for an exchange of the centre instrument panel (radio control assembly), please contact York Electronics at 888-650-9675. Service Procedure Service Procedure Using the Programming Tool (for dealers that were shipped a programming tool) Note Programming is not performed using TIS2WEB SPS; use provided programming tool. Note If the customer is NOT experiencing any concerns with the center instrument panel (ICS), reprogram the rdio control assembly (center instrument panels) following the instructions below. If the customer does have ICS concerns, please contact the Technical Assistance Center (TAC) prior to programming the radio control assembly (center instrument panels). (1) First Design Radio Control Assembly; (2) Second Design Radio Control Assembly 1. Determine if the radio control assembly is programmable. First design radio control assemblies are NOT programmable and must go through the radio control assembly exchange process. - First design radio control assemblies (1) are NOT programmable. There are NO slots on the backside of the radio control assembly. - Second design radio control assemblies (2) are programmable. They have two slots on the backside of the radio control assembly. If the radio control assembly is a second design assembly, proceed to Step 2. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Control Module HVAC: > 09298D > Nov > 10 > Recall - Defroster/Defogger Inoperative > Page 10661 Caution Insert a plastic body trim tool between the IP and radio control assembly along the top portion of the radio control assembly as shown in the illustration. DO NOT use a flat-blade screwdriver to remove the radio assembly. 2. Remove the radio control assembly (1). Refer to Radio Control Assembly Replacement in SI. 3. Carefully align the radio control assembly channels to the locating pegs of the programming tool as shown in the illustration. 4. Carefully seat the radio control assembly onto the programming tool. 5. The display area of the programming tool will indicate when the programming event has been completed. The programming tool will read "Programming Successful. Remove module." The programming event takes less than 30 seconds to complete. 6. Detach the radio control assembly from the programming tool. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Control Module HVAC: > 09298D > Nov > 10 > Recall - Defroster/Defogger Inoperative > Page 10662 7. Place blue dot (3) on the back of the radio control assembly to indicate that the radio control module has been reprogrammed. 8. Install the radio control assembly. Refer to Radio Control Assembly Replacement in SI. Service Procedure Using the Radio Control Assembly Exchange Process Caution Insert a plastic body trim tool between the IP and radio control assembly along the top portion of the radio control assembly as shown in the illustration. DO NOT use a flat-bladed screwdriver to remove the radio control assembly. Note If the customer is NOT experiencing any concerns with the center instrument panel (ICS), proceed to Step 1 and perform this recall. If the customer DOES have ICS concerns, please contact the Technical Assistance Center (TAC) prior to performing this recall. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Control Module HVAC: > 09298D > Nov > 10 > Recall - Defroster/Defogger Inoperative > Page 10663 Note For vehicles without the color touch screen navigation, unsnap and remove the display from the radio control assembly. Do not return the radio display with the radio control assembly. 1. Remove the radio control assembly (1). Refer to Radio Control Assembly Replacement in SI. 2. Package the radio control assembly and ship it to the exchange center indicated on the prepaid Federal Express Ground label that was enclosed with the exchange unit within 24 hours. Note Module programming and setup is NOT required when replacing only the radio control assembly. 3. Install the radio control assembly. Refer to Radio Control Assembly Replacement in SI. Courtesy Transportation - For US and Canada The General Motors Courtesy Transportation program is intended to minimize customer inconvenience when a vehicle requires a repair that is covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranties. The availability of courtesy transportation to customers whose vehicles are within the warranty coverage period and involved in a product program is very important in maintaining customer satisfaction. Dealers are to ensure that these customers understand that shuttle service or some other form of courtesy transportation is available and will be provided at no charge. Dealers should refer to the General Motors Service Policies and Procedures Manual for Courtesy Transportation guidelines. Warranty Transaction Information 1. Submit a transaction using the table below. * Dealers using WINS should add 0.2 administrative allowance to the labor time. Dealers using GWM should submit 0.2 hours administrative allowance under Administrative Time. ** Administrative allowance for unit exchange. *** Dealers are to claim only administrative allowance of 0.2 hours when the radio control assembly is reprogrammed by York's Mobile Unit. Dealers using WINS should submit 0.2 hours administrative allowance in labor time. Dealers using GWM should submit 0.2 hours administrative allowance under Administrative Time. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Control Module HVAC: > 09298D > Nov > 10 > Recall - Defroster/Defogger Inoperative > Page 10664 Customer Notification - For US and Canada General Motors will notify customers of this recall on their vehicle (see copy of customer letter included with this bulletin). Customer Notification - For Export Letters will be sent to known owners of record located within areas covered by the US National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act. For owners outside these areas, dealers should notify customers using the attached sample letter. Dealer Recall Responsibility - For US and Export (US States, Territories, and Possessions) The US National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act provides that each vehicle that is subject to a recall of this type must be adequately repaired within a reasonable time after the customer has tendered it for repair. A failure to repair within sixty days after tender of a vehicle is prima facie evidence of failure to repair within a reasonable time. If the condition is not adequately repaired within a reasonable time, the customer may be entitled to an identical or reasonably equivalent vehicle at no charge or to a refund of the purchase price less a reasonable allowance for depreciation. To avoid having to provide these burdensome remedies, every effort must be made to promptly schedule an appointment with each customer and to repair their vehicle as soon as possible. In the recall notification letters, customers are told how to contact the US National Highway Traffic Safety Administration if the recall is not completed within a reasonable time. This bulletin is notice to you that the new motor vehicles included in this recall may not comply with the standard identified above. Under Title 49, Section 30112 of the United States Code, it is illegal for a dealer to sell a new motor vehicle which the dealer knows does not comply with an applicable Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard. As a consequence, if you sell any of these motor vehicles without first performing the recall correction, your dealership may be subject to a civil penalty for each such sale. Dealer Recall Responsibility - All All unsold new vehicles in dealers' possession and subject to this recall must be held and inspected/repaired per the service procedure of this recall bulletin before customers take possession of these vehicles. Dealers are to service all vehicles subject to this recall at no charge to customers, regardless of mileage, age of vehicle, or ownership, from this time forward. Customers who have recently purchased vehicles sold from your vehicle inventory, and for which there is no customer information indicated on the dealer listing, are to be contacted by the dealer. Arrangements are to be made to make the required correction according to the instructions contained in this bulletin. A copy of the customer letter is provided in this bulletin for your use in contacting customers. Recall follow-up cards should not be used for this purpose, since the customer may not as yet have received the notification letter. In summary, whenever a vehicle subject to this recall enters your vehicle inventory, or is in your dealership for service in the future, you must take the steps necessary to be sure the recall correction has been made before selling or releasing the vehicle. Disclaimer Owner Letter Owner Letter Dear General Motors Customer: This notice is sent to you in accordance with the requirements of the National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act. General Motors has decided that certain 2010 model year Chevrolet Equinox and GMC Terrain vehicles fail to conform to Federal/Canada Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 103, "Windshield Defrosting and Defogging Systems", and Standard 101, "Controls and Displays". As a result, GM is conducting a recall. We apologize for this inconvenience. However, we are concerned about your safety and continued satisfaction with our products. Important - Your vehicle is involved in recall 09298. - Schedule an appointment with your GM dealer. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Control Module HVAC: > 09298D > Nov > 10 > Recall - Defroster/Defogger Inoperative > Page 10665 - This service will be performed for you at no charge. Why is your vehicle being recalled? The software in the center instrument panel can cause the heating, air conditioning, defrost, and radio controls, as well as the panel illumination to become inoperative. Driving without a functioning defrost system can decrease your visibility under certain driving conditions and could result in a crash without warning. Driving without panel illumination can divert your attention while looking for a control. What will we do? Your GM dealer will replace the computer module in the center instrument panel. This service will be performed for you at no charge. Because of service scheduling requirements, it is likely that your dealer will need your vehicle longer than the actual service correction time of approximately 20 minutes. If your vehicle is within the New Vehicle Limited Warranty, your dealer may provide you with shuttle service or some other form of courtesy transportation while your vehicle is at the dealership for this repair. Please refer to your Owner's Manual and your dealer for details on courtesy transportation. What should you do? You should contact your GM dealer to arrange a service appointment as soon as possible. When scheduling your appointment, please provide your dealer with your vehicle's 17 character vehicle identification number (VIN). Your VIN can be found above your name and address at the top of this letter, and will follow the numbers "09298". Your dealer will need your VIN to order parts for your vehicle so that they will be available on the day of your service appointment. Do you have questions? If you have questions or concerns that your dealer is unable to resolve, please contact the appropriate Customer Assistance Center at the number listed below. More information about your vehicle can be found at the Owner Center at www.gmownercenter.com. If after contacting your dealer and the Customer Assistance Center, you are still not satisfied we have done our best to remedy this condition without charge and within a reasonable time, you may wish to write the Administrator, National Highway Traffic Safety Administration, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE, Washington DC 20590, or call the toll-free Vehicle Safety Hotline at 1.888.327.4236 (TTY 1.800.424.9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov. Federal regulation requires that any vehicle lessor receiving this recall notice must forward a copy of this notice to the lessee within ten days. Scott Lawson Director, Customer and Relationship Services 09298 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Control Module HVAC: > NHTSA09V489000 > Dec > 09 > Recall 09V489000: Defroster Malfunction Control Module HVAC: Recalls Recall 09V489000: Defroster Malfunction VEHICLE MAKE/MODEL: MODEL YEAR(S): Chevrolet/Equinox 2010 GMC/Terrain 2010 MANUFACTURER: General Motors Corp. MFR'S REPORT DATE: December 18, 2009 NHTSA CAMPAIGN ID NUMBER: 09V489000 NHTSA ACTION NUMBER: N/A COMPONENT: Visibility: Defroster/Defogger System POTENTIAL NUMBER OF UNITS AFFECTED: 59031 SUMMARY: General Motors is recalling certain model year 2010 Chevrolet Equinox and GMC Terrain vehicles for failing to comply with the requirements of Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 103, "Windshield Defrosting and Defogging Systems and with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 101, "Controls and Displays". The software in the center instrument panel can cause the heating, air conditioning, defrost, and radio controls, as well as the panel illumination to become inoperative. CONSEQUENCE: Driving without a functioning defrost system can decrease your visibility under certain driving conditions and could result in a crash without warning. REMEDY: Dealers will replace the computer module in the center instrument panel free of charge. The safety recall is expected to begin during January 2010. Owners may contact Chevrolet at 1-800-630-2438, GMC at 1-866-996-9463 or at www.gmownercenter.com. NOTES: GM safety recall No. 090298. Owners may also contact The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration's Vehicle Safety Hotline at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY 1-800-424-9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Control Module HVAC: > 09298D > Nov > 10 > Recall Defroster/Defogger Inoperative Technical Service Bulletin # 09298D Date: 101122 Recall - Defroster/Defogger Inoperative FMVSS NONCOMPLIANCE Bulletin No.: 09298D Date: November 22, 2010 Subject: 09298D - Heating and Windshield Defrost Inoperative - Replace Computer Module Models: 2010 Chevrolet Equinox 2010 GMC Terrain Supercede: The Parts Information section in this bulletin has been revised for Canadian dealers. Mass Comp is no longer an Authorized GM Electronics Service Center. Canadian dealers are to begin contacting York Electronics for all exchanges.Discard all copies of bulletin 09298C, issued March 2010. Customers are being instructed to provide their VIN when calling to schedule a service appointment. If the vehicle will not be programmed at the dealership, please provide the VIN to the Parts Manager so parts can be ordered and received in time for the service appointment. Parts will be shipped overnight to dealers so please do not order more than 2 days prior to the scheduled service appointment date. Condition General Motors has decided that certain 2010 model year Chevrolet Equinox and GMC Terrain vehicles fail to conform to Federal/Canada Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 103, "Windshield Defrosting and Defogging Systems", and Standard 101, "Controls and Displays". On these vehicles, software in the center instrument panel can cause the heating, air conditioning, defrost, and radio controls, as well as the panel illumination to become inoperative. Driving without a functioning defrost system can decrease the driver's visibility under certain driving conditions and could result in a crash without warning. Driving without panel illumination can divert the driver's attention while looking for a control. Correction Dealers are to replace the computer module in the center instrument panel. Vehicles Involved Involved are certain 2010 model year Chevrolet Equinox and GMC Terrain vehicles built within these VIN breakpoints: Important Dealers are to confirm vehicle eligibility prior to beginning repairs by using the Required Field Actions section in the Global Warranty system. Not all vehicles within the above breakpoints may be involved. For dealers with involved vehicles, a listing with involved vehicles containing the complete vehicle identification number, customer name, and address information has been prepared and will be provided to US and Canadian dealers through the GM GlobalConnect Recall Reports, or sent directly to export dealers. Dealers will not have a report available if they have no involved vehicles currently assigned. The listing may contain customer names and addresses obtained from Motor Vehicle Registration Records. The use of such motor vehicle registration data for any purpose other than follow-up necessary to complete this recall is a violation of law in several states/provinces/countries. Accordingly, you are urged to limit the use of this report to the follow-up necessary to complete this recall. Parts Information For dealers using the programming tool: Most repairs require no parts. There are a small number of vehicles that will not be able to be reprogrammed; for these vehicles, please follow the parts information below. If you have parts currently in your inventory, please return them to Specmo (U.S.) or York Electronics (Canada). For dealers that did not receive a programming tool: A center instrument panel will be required. Note Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Control Module HVAC: > 09298D > Nov > 10 > Recall Defroster/Defogger Inoperative > Page 10675 Center instrument panels (radio control assemblies) will be shipped overnight to dealers. Note: Core returns for this recall are to be shipped within 24 hours of receiving the exchange. A prepaid Federal Express Ground label will be included with each exchange. Package the core securely in the original packaging and package inserts provided with the exchange. It is important that the return unit be packaged identically to the exchange unit to prevent damage in shipping. Failure to return the core will result in a charge to the dealer's Open Parts Account. Do not order parts for customer vehicles until they have scheduled an appointment. U.S. Dealers Only: If the customer is not experiencing any concerns with the center instrument panel (ICS), please contact Specmo Enterprises for arrange for an exchange. If the customer does have ICS concerns, please contact the Technical Assistance Center (TAC) prior to ordering an exchange ICS. Dealers are to contact Specmo Enterprises via the internet at www.specmo.com/dealers, to arrange for an exchange of the center instrument panel (radio control assembly). Dealers that do not have an account with Specmo will be able to create an account in order to access the website. Arrange for an exchange by following the prompts. The information below will be required to arrange for an exchange. - Bulletin number 09298 - VIN Ontario Dealers Only: Due to a limited inventory, and to avoid backorders, an onsite mobile upgrade is available. Please contact York Electronics at 888-650-9675 to schedule an appointment. All Other Provinces, Excluding Ontario: To arrange for an exchange of the centre instrument panel (radio control assembly), please contact York Electronics at 888-650-9675. Service Procedure Service Procedure Using the Programming Tool (for dealers that were shipped a programming tool) Note Programming is not performed using TIS2WEB SPS; use provided programming tool. Note If the customer is NOT experiencing any concerns with the center instrument panel (ICS), reprogram the rdio control assembly (center instrument panels) following the instructions below. If the customer does have ICS concerns, please contact the Technical Assistance Center (TAC) prior to programming the radio control assembly (center instrument panels). (1) First Design Radio Control Assembly; (2) Second Design Radio Control Assembly 1. Determine if the radio control assembly is programmable. First design radio control assemblies are NOT programmable and must go through the radio control assembly exchange process. - First design radio control assemblies (1) are NOT programmable. There are NO slots on the backside of the radio control assembly. - Second design radio control assemblies (2) are programmable. They have two slots on the backside of the radio control assembly. If the radio control assembly is a second design assembly, proceed to Step 2. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Control Module HVAC: > 09298D > Nov > 10 > Recall Defroster/Defogger Inoperative > Page 10676 Caution Insert a plastic body trim tool between the IP and radio control assembly along the top portion of the radio control assembly as shown in the illustration. DO NOT use a flat-blade screwdriver to remove the radio assembly. 2. Remove the radio control assembly (1). Refer to Radio Control Assembly Replacement in SI. 3. Carefully align the radio control assembly channels to the locating pegs of the programming tool as shown in the illustration. 4. Carefully seat the radio control assembly onto the programming tool. 5. The display area of the programming tool will indicate when the programming event has been completed. The programming tool will read "Programming Successful. Remove module." The programming event takes less than 30 seconds to complete. 6. Detach the radio control assembly from the programming tool. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Control Module HVAC: > 09298D > Nov > 10 > Recall Defroster/Defogger Inoperative > Page 10677 7. Place blue dot (3) on the back of the radio control assembly to indicate that the radio control module has been reprogrammed. 8. Install the radio control assembly. Refer to Radio Control Assembly Replacement in SI. Service Procedure Using the Radio Control Assembly Exchange Process Caution Insert a plastic body trim tool between the IP and radio control assembly along the top portion of the radio control assembly as shown in the illustration. DO NOT use a flat-bladed screwdriver to remove the radio control assembly. Note If the customer is NOT experiencing any concerns with the center instrument panel (ICS), proceed to Step 1 and perform this recall. If the customer DOES have ICS concerns, please contact the Technical Assistance Center (TAC) prior to performing this recall. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Control Module HVAC: > 09298D > Nov > 10 > Recall Defroster/Defogger Inoperative > Page 10678 Note For vehicles without the color touch screen navigation, unsnap and remove the display from the radio control assembly. Do not return the radio display with the radio control assembly. 1. Remove the radio control assembly (1). Refer to Radio Control Assembly Replacement in SI. 2. Package the radio control assembly and ship it to the exchange center indicated on the prepaid Federal Express Ground label that was enclosed with the exchange unit within 24 hours. Note Module programming and setup is NOT required when replacing only the radio control assembly. 3. Install the radio control assembly. Refer to Radio Control Assembly Replacement in SI. Courtesy Transportation - For US and Canada The General Motors Courtesy Transportation program is intended to minimize customer inconvenience when a vehicle requires a repair that is covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranties. The availability of courtesy transportation to customers whose vehicles are within the warranty coverage period and involved in a product program is very important in maintaining customer satisfaction. Dealers are to ensure that these customers understand that shuttle service or some other form of courtesy transportation is available and will be provided at no charge. Dealers should refer to the General Motors Service Policies and Procedures Manual for Courtesy Transportation guidelines. Warranty Transaction Information 1. Submit a transaction using the table below. * Dealers using WINS should add 0.2 administrative allowance to the labor time. Dealers using GWM should submit 0.2 hours administrative allowance under Administrative Time. ** Administrative allowance for unit exchange. *** Dealers are to claim only administrative allowance of 0.2 hours when the radio control assembly is reprogrammed by York's Mobile Unit. Dealers using WINS should submit 0.2 hours administrative allowance in labor time. Dealers using GWM should submit 0.2 hours administrative allowance under Administrative Time. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Control Module HVAC: > 09298D > Nov > 10 > Recall Defroster/Defogger Inoperative > Page 10679 Customer Notification - For US and Canada General Motors will notify customers of this recall on their vehicle (see copy of customer letter included with this bulletin). Customer Notification - For Export Letters will be sent to known owners of record located within areas covered by the US National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act. For owners outside these areas, dealers should notify customers using the attached sample letter. Dealer Recall Responsibility - For US and Export (US States, Territories, and Possessions) The US National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act provides that each vehicle that is subject to a recall of this type must be adequately repaired within a reasonable time after the customer has tendered it for repair. A failure to repair within sixty days after tender of a vehicle is prima facie evidence of failure to repair within a reasonable time. If the condition is not adequately repaired within a reasonable time, the customer may be entitled to an identical or reasonably equivalent vehicle at no charge or to a refund of the purchase price less a reasonable allowance for depreciation. To avoid having to provide these burdensome remedies, every effort must be made to promptly schedule an appointment with each customer and to repair their vehicle as soon as possible. In the recall notification letters, customers are told how to contact the US National Highway Traffic Safety Administration if the recall is not completed within a reasonable time. This bulletin is notice to you that the new motor vehicles included in this recall may not comply with the standard identified above. Under Title 49, Section 30112 of the United States Code, it is illegal for a dealer to sell a new motor vehicle which the dealer knows does not comply with an applicable Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard. As a consequence, if you sell any of these motor vehicles without first performing the recall correction, your dealership may be subject to a civil penalty for each such sale. Dealer Recall Responsibility - All All unsold new vehicles in dealers' possession and subject to this recall must be held and inspected/repaired per the service procedure of this recall bulletin before customers take possession of these vehicles. Dealers are to service all vehicles subject to this recall at no charge to customers, regardless of mileage, age of vehicle, or ownership, from this time forward. Customers who have recently purchased vehicles sold from your vehicle inventory, and for which there is no customer information indicated on the dealer listing, are to be contacted by the dealer. Arrangements are to be made to make the required correction according to the instructions contained in this bulletin. A copy of the customer letter is provided in this bulletin for your use in contacting customers. Recall follow-up cards should not be used for this purpose, since the customer may not as yet have received the notification letter. In summary, whenever a vehicle subject to this recall enters your vehicle inventory, or is in your dealership for service in the future, you must take the steps necessary to be sure the recall correction has been made before selling or releasing the vehicle. Disclaimer Owner Letter Owner Letter Dear General Motors Customer: This notice is sent to you in accordance with the requirements of the National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act. General Motors has decided that certain 2010 model year Chevrolet Equinox and GMC Terrain vehicles fail to conform to Federal/Canada Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 103, "Windshield Defrosting and Defogging Systems", and Standard 101, "Controls and Displays". As a result, GM is conducting a recall. We apologize for this inconvenience. However, we are concerned about your safety and continued satisfaction with our products. Important - Your vehicle is involved in recall 09298. - Schedule an appointment with your GM dealer. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Control Module HVAC: > 09298D > Nov > 10 > Recall Defroster/Defogger Inoperative > Page 10680 - This service will be performed for you at no charge. Why is your vehicle being recalled? The software in the center instrument panel can cause the heating, air conditioning, defrost, and radio controls, as well as the panel illumination to become inoperative. Driving without a functioning defrost system can decrease your visibility under certain driving conditions and could result in a crash without warning. Driving without panel illumination can divert your attention while looking for a control. What will we do? Your GM dealer will replace the computer module in the center instrument panel. This service will be performed for you at no charge. Because of service scheduling requirements, it is likely that your dealer will need your vehicle longer than the actual service correction time of approximately 20 minutes. If your vehicle is within the New Vehicle Limited Warranty, your dealer may provide you with shuttle service or some other form of courtesy transportation while your vehicle is at the dealership for this repair. Please refer to your Owner's Manual and your dealer for details on courtesy transportation. What should you do? You should contact your GM dealer to arrange a service appointment as soon as possible. When scheduling your appointment, please provide your dealer with your vehicle's 17 character vehicle identification number (VIN). Your VIN can be found above your name and address at the top of this letter, and will follow the numbers "09298". Your dealer will need your VIN to order parts for your vehicle so that they will be available on the day of your service appointment. Do you have questions? If you have questions or concerns that your dealer is unable to resolve, please contact the appropriate Customer Assistance Center at the number listed below. More information about your vehicle can be found at the Owner Center at www.gmownercenter.com. If after contacting your dealer and the Customer Assistance Center, you are still not satisfied we have done our best to remedy this condition without charge and within a reasonable time, you may wish to write the Administrator, National Highway Traffic Safety Administration, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE, Washington DC 20590, or call the toll-free Vehicle Safety Hotline at 1.888.327.4236 (TTY 1.800.424.9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov. Federal regulation requires that any vehicle lessor receiving this recall notice must forward a copy of this notice to the lessee within ten days. Scott Lawson Director, Customer and Relationship Services 09298 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Control Module HVAC: > NHTSA09V489000 > Dec > 09 > Recall 09V489000: Defroster Malfunction Control Module HVAC: All Technical Service Bulletins Recall 09V489000: Defroster Malfunction VEHICLE MAKE/MODEL: MODEL YEAR(S): Chevrolet/Equinox 2010 GMC/Terrain 2010 MANUFACTURER: General Motors Corp. MFR'S REPORT DATE: December 18, 2009 NHTSA CAMPAIGN ID NUMBER: 09V489000 NHTSA ACTION NUMBER: N/A COMPONENT: Visibility: Defroster/Defogger System POTENTIAL NUMBER OF UNITS AFFECTED: 59031 SUMMARY: General Motors is recalling certain model year 2010 Chevrolet Equinox and GMC Terrain vehicles for failing to comply with the requirements of Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 103, "Windshield Defrosting and Defogging Systems and with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 101, "Controls and Displays". The software in the center instrument panel can cause the heating, air conditioning, defrost, and radio controls, as well as the panel illumination to become inoperative. CONSEQUENCE: Driving without a functioning defrost system can decrease your visibility under certain driving conditions and could result in a crash without warning. REMEDY: Dealers will replace the computer module in the center instrument panel free of charge. The safety recall is expected to begin during January 2010. Owners may contact Chevrolet at 1-800-630-2438, GMC at 1-866-996-9463 or at www.gmownercenter.com. NOTES: GM safety recall No. 090298. Owners may also contact The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration's Vehicle Safety Hotline at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY 1-800-424-9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 10685 Control Module HVAC: Locations Instrument Panel/Center Console Component Views Right Side of Instrument Panel - Center Console and HVAC System 1 - B7E Air Temperature Sensor - Duct Right Lower 2 - B7J Air Temperature Sensor - Duct Right Upper 3 - M6 Air Temperature Door Actuator 4 - M8 Blower Motor 5 - K8 Blower Motor Control Module 6 - B39 A/C Evaporator Temperature Sensor 7 - M46 Air Recirculation Door Motor 8 - M37 Mode Door Actuator 9 - X83 Auxiliary Audio Input X1 (without UWG) 10 - X83 Auxiliary Audio Input X2 (without UWG) 11 - X80A Accessory Power Receptacle - Center Console 1 12 - E28 Center Console Compartment Lamp (LT or LTZ or SLE2 or SLT) 13 - X80B Accessory Power Receptacle Center Console 2 14 - X82 Audio/Video Input Adapter (UWG) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 10686 Control Module HVAC: Diagrams K8 Blower Motor Control Module X1 K8 Blower Motor Control Module X2 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 10687 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 10688 Control Module HVAC: Service and Repair Blower Motor Control Module Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Coupler HVAC > A/C Coupler O-ring > Component Information > Service and Repair > Air Conditioning System Seal Replacement A/C Coupler O-ring: Service and Repair Air Conditioning System Seal Replacement Air Conditioning System Seal Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the seal washer from the A/C refrigerant component. 2. Inspect the seal washer for any signs of damage. 3. Inspect the A/C refrigerant components for damage or burrs. Repair or replace as necessary. Note: DO NOT reuse sealing washer. 4. Discard the sealing washer. Installation Procedure Note: Flat washer type seals do not require lubrication. 1. Inspect the new seal washer for any signs of cracks, cuts, or damage. Do not use a damaged seal washer. 2. Using a lint-free clean, dry cloth, clean the sealing surfaces of the A/C refrigerant components. 3. Carefully install the new seal washer onto the A/C refrigerant component. 4. The washer must completely bottom against the surface of the fitting. Note: After tightening the A/C components, there should be a slight sealing washer gap of approximately 1.2 mm (3/64 in) between the A/C line and the A/C component. 5. Assemble the remaining A/C refrigerant components. Refer to the appropriate repair procedure. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Coupler HVAC > A/C Coupler O-ring > Component Information > Service and Repair > Air Conditioning System Seal Replacement > Page 10694 A/C Coupler O-ring: Service and Repair Air Conditioning O-Ring Seal Replacement Air Conditioning O-Ring Seal Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Disassemble the A/C refrigerant components. Refer to the appropriate repair procedure * For compression style fittings use a back up wrench on the fitting (2) and loosen the fitting nut (1). * For banjo style fittings remove the bolt retaining the banjo type fitting. 2. Remove the O-ring seal from the A/C refrigerant component. 3. Inspect the O-ring seal for signs of damage to help determine the root cause of the failure. 4. Inspect the A/C refrigerant components for damage or burrs. Repair if necessary. Note: Cap or tape the open A/C refrigerant components immediately to prevent system contamination. 5. Cap or tape the A/C refrigerant components. 6. Discard the O-ring seal. Installation Procedure 1. Inspect the new O-ring seal for any sign or cracks, cuts, or damage. Replace if necessary. 2. Remove the cap or tape from the A/C refrigerant components. 3. Using a lint-free clean, dry cloth, carefully clean the sealing surfaces of the A/C refrigerant components. Note: DO NOT allow any of the mineral base 525 viscosity refrigerant oil on the new O-ring seal to enter the refrigerant system. 4. Lightly coat the new O-ring seal with mineral base 525 viscosity refrigerant oil. Note: DO NOT reuse O-ring seals. 5. Carefully slide the new O-ring seal onto the A/C refrigerant component. 6. The O-ring seal must be fully seated. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Coupler HVAC > A/C Coupler O-ring > Component Information > Service and Repair > Air Conditioning System Seal Replacement > Page 10695 7. Assemble the A/C components. Refer to the appropriate repair procedure. * For compression style fittings use a back up wrench on the fitting (2) and tighten the fitting nut (1) to specification. * For banjo style fittings install the bolt retaining the banjo type fitting and tighten to specification. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Discharge Air Temperature Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Locations Discharge Air Temperature Sensor / Switch: Locations Instrument Panel/Center Console Component Views Right Side of Instrument Panel - Center Console and HVAC System 1 - B7E Air Temperature Sensor - Duct Right Lower 2 - B7J Air Temperature Sensor - Duct Right Upper 3 - M6 Air Temperature Door Actuator 4 - M8 Blower Motor 5 - K8 Blower Motor Control Module 6 - B39 A/C Evaporator Temperature Sensor 7 - M46 Air Recirculation Door Motor 8 - M37 Mode Door Actuator 9 - X83 Auxiliary Audio Input X1 (without UWG) 10 - X83 Auxiliary Audio Input X2 (without UWG) 11 - X80A Accessory Power Receptacle - Center Console 1 12 - E28 Center Console Compartment Lamp (LT or LTZ or SLE2 or SLT) 13 - X80B Accessory Power Receptacle Center Console 2 14 - X82 Audio/Video Input Adapter (UWG) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Discharge Air Temperature Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 10699 Discharge Air Temperature Sensor / Switch: Diagrams B7E Air Temperature Sensor - Duct Right Lower (C68) B7J Air Temperature Sensor - Duct Right Upper (C68) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Discharge Air Temperature Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 10700 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Discharge Air Temperature Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Duct Air Temperature Sensor Replacement - Upper Discharge Air Temperature Sensor / Switch: Service and Repair Duct Air Temperature Sensor Replacement - Upper Duct Air Temperature Sensor Replacement - Upper Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Discharge Air Temperature Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Duct Air Temperature Sensor Replacement - Upper > Page 10703 Discharge Air Temperature Sensor / Switch: Service and Repair Duct Air Temperature Sensor Replacement - Lower Duct Air Temperature Sensor Replacement - Lower Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Case > Component Information > Service and Repair Evaporator Case: Service and Repair Air Conditioning (A/C) Evaporator Case Assembly Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the HVAC module. Refer to Heater and Air Conditioning Evaporator and Blower Module Replacement (See: Housing Assembly HVAC/Service and Repair). 2. Remove the heater core cover screws from the evaporator case assembly. 3. Remove the heater core cover from the evaporator case assembly. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Case > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 10707 4. Remove the heater core from the HVAC module. 5. Remove the evaporator case assembly screws from the blower case assembly. 6. Remove the evaporator case assembly from the blower case assembly. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Case > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 10708 1. Install evaporator case assembly to the blower case assembly. Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener Caution). 2. Install evaporator case assembly screws to the blower case assembly. Tighten the screws to 1.5 Nm (13 lb in). 3. Install heater core to the HVAC module. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Case > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 10709 4. Install heater core cover. 5. Install heater core cover screws. Tighten the screws to 1.5 Nm (13 lb in). 6. Install the HVAC module. Refer to Heater and Air Conditioning Evaporator and Blower Module Replacement (See: Housing Assembly HVAC/Service and Repair). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Core > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Evaporator Core: > 99-01-39-004C > Jun > 09 > A/C - Musty Odors Emitted From (HVAC) System Evaporator Core: Customer Interest A/C - Musty Odors Emitted From (HVAC) System TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 99-01-39-004C Date: June 12, 2009 Subject: Air Conditioning Odor (Install Evaporator Core Dryer Kit and Apply Cooling Coil Coating) Models: 1993-2010 GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (Including Saturn) 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 All Equipped with Air Conditioning Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2009 and 2010 model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 99-01-39-004B (Section 01 - HVAC). Condition Some customers may comment about musty odors emitted from the Heating, Ventilation and Air Conditioning (HVAC) system at vehicle start-up in hot, humid conditions. Cause This condition may be caused by condensate build-up on the evaporator core, which does not evaporate by itself in high humidity conditions. The odor may be the result of microbial growth on the evaporator core. When the blower motor fan is turned on, the microbial growth may release an unpleasant musty odor into the passenger compartment. There are several other possible sources of a musty odor in a vehicle. A common source is a water leak into the interior of the vehicle or foreign material in the HVAC air distribution system. Follow the procedures in SI for identifying and correcting water leaks and air inlet inspection. The procedure contained in this bulletin is only applicable if the odor source has been determined to be microbial growth on the evaporator core inside the HVAC module. Correction Many vehicles currently incorporate an afterblow function within the HVAC control module software. The afterblow feature, when enabled, employs the HVAC blower fan to dry the evaporator after vehicle shut down and this function will inhibit microbial growth. Technicians are to confirm that the customer concern is evaporator core odor and that the vehicle has the imbedded afterblow feature, as defined in the SI document for that specific vehicle model, model year and specific HVAC option. Refer to SI for enabling the afterblow function. Vehicles being delivered in areas prone to high humidity conditions may benefit from having the afterblow enabled calibration installed prior to any customer comment. Important If the vehicle is not factory equipped with the imbedded afterblow enable feature, it may be added with the Electronic Evaporator Dryer Module Kit (P/N 12497910 or AC Delco 15-5876). Important When installing the Electronic Evaporator Dryer Module, you MUST use the included electrical splice connectors to ensure a proper splice. Complete detailed installation instructions and self testing procedures are supplied with the kit. If necessary, the Electronic Evaporator Dryer Module may be installed underhood if it is protected from extreme heat and water splash areas. To immediately remove the evaporator core odor on all suspect vehicles, it is necessary to eliminate the microbial growth and prevent its re-occurrence. To accomplish this, perform the following procedure: Vehicle and Applicator Tool Preparation 1. The evaporator core must be dry. This may be accomplished by disabling the compressor and running the blower fan on the recirc heat setting for an extended period of time. Note Compressor engagement will cause the evaporator core to remain wet and will prevent full adherence of the Coiling Coil Coating to the evaporator core surfaces. 2. Verify that the air conditioning drain hose is not clogged and place a drain pan beneath the vehicle. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Core > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Evaporator Core: > 99-01-39-004C > Jun > 09 > A/C - Musty Odors Emitted From (HVAC) System > Page 10718 3. Place a protective cover over the carpet below the evaporator core. 4. Remove the cabin air filter, if equipped, and cover the opening prior to applying the Cooling Coil Coating, as the product may clog the filter. If the cabin air filter appears to have little or no remaining life, suggest a replacement to your customer. 5. If the HVAC module has a blower motor cooling tube, be careful NOT TO SPRAY THE COOLING COIL COATING INTO THE BLOWER MOTOR COOLING TUBE. 6. Attach the Flexible Applicator Pressure Spray Tool (J-43810-20A) to a compressed air line operating at 586 kPa (85 psi) to 793 kPa (115 psi). 7. Shake the bottle of Cooling Coil Coating well. Screw the bottle onto the cap on the applicator tool's pick-up tube. Note The pick-up tube is designed for 120 ml (4 oz) and 240 ml (8 oz) bottles and should coil slightly in the bottom of a 120 ml (4 oz) bottle. 8. Use one of the following three methods to apply the Cooling Coil Coating. Important If the Pressure Applicator Spray Tool (J-43810-20A) is not available, the Cooling Coil Coating is also available in an aerosol can (P/N 12377951 (in Canada, 10953503)). Application Through Blower Motor Control Module Opening - Remove the blower motor control module (blower motor resistor). Refer to the applicable procedure in SI. - Clean any debris or foreign material from inside the HVAC module and on the evaporator core surface. - Apply the Cooling Coil Coating directly to the evaporator core through the blower motor blower motor control module (blower motor resistor) opening. - Use the flexible wand to direct the Cooling Coil Coating over the entire evaporator core and surrounding gasket surfaces. - When the application is complete, install the blower motor blower motor control module (blower motor control module). Application Through Blower Motor Opening - Remove the blower motor. Refer to the applicable blower motor removal procedure in SI. - Clean any debris or foreign material from inside the HVAC module and on the evaporator core surface. - Apply the Cooling Coil Coating directly to the evaporator core through the blower motor opening. - Use the flexible wand to direct the Cooling Coil Coating over the entire evaporator core and surrounding gasket surfaces. - When the application is complete, install the blower motor. Application Through a Hole in the HVAC Module - If neither of the two previous application methods are available, it may be necessary to drill a hole in the HVAC module. - Locate an area of the HVAC module between the blower motor and the evaporator core. Drill a 10 mm (3/8 in) hole in the HVAC module. Use caution to keep the drill clear of the evaporator core and the blower motor fan. - With the air distribution vents closed and the blower motor fan speed on HIGH, insert the applicator tool into the hole and spray the Cooling Coil Coating into the airstream toward the evaporator core. - Use a GM approved RTV sealant to plug the hole in the HVAC module. 9. After the Cooling Coil Coating application is complete, start and run the vehicle for approximately 10 minutes, with the compressor disabled, HVAC mode set to Recirculate/Max, heat set to full warm, blower motor fan speed on high, and one window open approximately 12 mm (1/2 in). This cures the Cooling Coil Coating onto the evaporator core surface. 10. While the engine is running, rinse the applicator tool with warm water to prolong the life of the tool. Be sure to spray warm water through the nozzle to rinse out any residual Cooling Coil Coating still in the capillary pick up tube, otherwise it will dry and clog the applicator tool. Also remove the small green valve from the bottle cap and rinse it thoroughly while rolling it between two fingers and then reinstall it. If this valve is clogged , the Cooling Coil Coating will not flow through the applicator tool. 11. Shut off the engine and enable the compressor again. 12. Verify proper HVAC system operation. 13. Remove the protective cover from inside the vehicle. 14. Remove the drain pan from underneath the vehicle. 15. Reinstall the cabin air filter if necessary. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Core > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Evaporator Core: > 99-01-39-004C > Jun > 09 > A/C - Musty Odors Emitted From (HVAC) System > Page 10719 Parts Information Important The Cooling Coil Coating listed below is the only GM approved product for use under warranty as an evaporator core disinfectant and for the long term control of evaporator core microbial growth. Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table above. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Core > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Evaporator Core: > 99-01-39-004C > Jun > 09 > A/C - Musty Odors Emitted From (HVAC) System Evaporator Core: All Technical Service Bulletins A/C - Musty Odors Emitted From (HVAC) System TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 99-01-39-004C Date: June 12, 2009 Subject: Air Conditioning Odor (Install Evaporator Core Dryer Kit and Apply Cooling Coil Coating) Models: 1993-2010 GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (Including Saturn) 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 All Equipped with Air Conditioning Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2009 and 2010 model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 99-01-39-004B (Section 01 - HVAC). Condition Some customers may comment about musty odors emitted from the Heating, Ventilation and Air Conditioning (HVAC) system at vehicle start-up in hot, humid conditions. Cause This condition may be caused by condensate build-up on the evaporator core, which does not evaporate by itself in high humidity conditions. The odor may be the result of microbial growth on the evaporator core. When the blower motor fan is turned on, the microbial growth may release an unpleasant musty odor into the passenger compartment. There are several other possible sources of a musty odor in a vehicle. A common source is a water leak into the interior of the vehicle or foreign material in the HVAC air distribution system. Follow the procedures in SI for identifying and correcting water leaks and air inlet inspection. The procedure contained in this bulletin is only applicable if the odor source has been determined to be microbial growth on the evaporator core inside the HVAC module. Correction Many vehicles currently incorporate an afterblow function within the HVAC control module software. The afterblow feature, when enabled, employs the HVAC blower fan to dry the evaporator after vehicle shut down and this function will inhibit microbial growth. Technicians are to confirm that the customer concern is evaporator core odor and that the vehicle has the imbedded afterblow feature, as defined in the SI document for that specific vehicle model, model year and specific HVAC option. Refer to SI for enabling the afterblow function. Vehicles being delivered in areas prone to high humidity conditions may benefit from having the afterblow enabled calibration installed prior to any customer comment. Important If the vehicle is not factory equipped with the imbedded afterblow enable feature, it may be added with the Electronic Evaporator Dryer Module Kit (P/N 12497910 or AC Delco 15-5876). Important When installing the Electronic Evaporator Dryer Module, you MUST use the included electrical splice connectors to ensure a proper splice. Complete detailed installation instructions and self testing procedures are supplied with the kit. If necessary, the Electronic Evaporator Dryer Module may be installed underhood if it is protected from extreme heat and water splash areas. To immediately remove the evaporator core odor on all suspect vehicles, it is necessary to eliminate the microbial growth and prevent its re-occurrence. To accomplish this, perform the following procedure: Vehicle and Applicator Tool Preparation 1. The evaporator core must be dry. This may be accomplished by disabling the compressor and running the blower fan on the recirc heat setting for an extended period of time. Note Compressor engagement will cause the evaporator core to remain wet and will prevent full adherence of the Coiling Coil Coating to the evaporator core surfaces. 2. Verify that the air conditioning drain hose is not clogged and place a drain pan beneath the vehicle. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Core > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Evaporator Core: > 99-01-39-004C > Jun > 09 > A/C - Musty Odors Emitted From (HVAC) System > Page 10725 3. Place a protective cover over the carpet below the evaporator core. 4. Remove the cabin air filter, if equipped, and cover the opening prior to applying the Cooling Coil Coating, as the product may clog the filter. If the cabin air filter appears to have little or no remaining life, suggest a replacement to your customer. 5. If the HVAC module has a blower motor cooling tube, be careful NOT TO SPRAY THE COOLING COIL COATING INTO THE BLOWER MOTOR COOLING TUBE. 6. Attach the Flexible Applicator Pressure Spray Tool (J-43810-20A) to a compressed air line operating at 586 kPa (85 psi) to 793 kPa (115 psi). 7. Shake the bottle of Cooling Coil Coating well. Screw the bottle onto the cap on the applicator tool's pick-up tube. Note The pick-up tube is designed for 120 ml (4 oz) and 240 ml (8 oz) bottles and should coil slightly in the bottom of a 120 ml (4 oz) bottle. 8. Use one of the following three methods to apply the Cooling Coil Coating. Important If the Pressure Applicator Spray Tool (J-43810-20A) is not available, the Cooling Coil Coating is also available in an aerosol can (P/N 12377951 (in Canada, 10953503)). Application Through Blower Motor Control Module Opening - Remove the blower motor control module (blower motor resistor). Refer to the applicable procedure in SI. - Clean any debris or foreign material from inside the HVAC module and on the evaporator core surface. - Apply the Cooling Coil Coating directly to the evaporator core through the blower motor blower motor control module (blower motor resistor) opening. - Use the flexible wand to direct the Cooling Coil Coating over the entire evaporator core and surrounding gasket surfaces. - When the application is complete, install the blower motor blower motor control module (blower motor control module). Application Through Blower Motor Opening - Remove the blower motor. Refer to the applicable blower motor removal procedure in SI. - Clean any debris or foreign material from inside the HVAC module and on the evaporator core surface. - Apply the Cooling Coil Coating directly to the evaporator core through the blower motor opening. - Use the flexible wand to direct the Cooling Coil Coating over the entire evaporator core and surrounding gasket surfaces. - When the application is complete, install the blower motor. Application Through a Hole in the HVAC Module - If neither of the two previous application methods are available, it may be necessary to drill a hole in the HVAC module. - Locate an area of the HVAC module between the blower motor and the evaporator core. Drill a 10 mm (3/8 in) hole in the HVAC module. Use caution to keep the drill clear of the evaporator core and the blower motor fan. - With the air distribution vents closed and the blower motor fan speed on HIGH, insert the applicator tool into the hole and spray the Cooling Coil Coating into the airstream toward the evaporator core. - Use a GM approved RTV sealant to plug the hole in the HVAC module. 9. After the Cooling Coil Coating application is complete, start and run the vehicle for approximately 10 minutes, with the compressor disabled, HVAC mode set to Recirculate/Max, heat set to full warm, blower motor fan speed on high, and one window open approximately 12 mm (1/2 in). This cures the Cooling Coil Coating onto the evaporator core surface. 10. While the engine is running, rinse the applicator tool with warm water to prolong the life of the tool. Be sure to spray warm water through the nozzle to rinse out any residual Cooling Coil Coating still in the capillary pick up tube, otherwise it will dry and clog the applicator tool. Also remove the small green valve from the bottle cap and rinse it thoroughly while rolling it between two fingers and then reinstall it. If this valve is clogged , the Cooling Coil Coating will not flow through the applicator tool. 11. Shut off the engine and enable the compressor again. 12. Verify proper HVAC system operation. 13. Remove the protective cover from inside the vehicle. 14. Remove the drain pan from underneath the vehicle. 15. Reinstall the cabin air filter if necessary. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Core > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Evaporator Core: > 99-01-39-004C > Jun > 09 > A/C - Musty Odors Emitted From (HVAC) System > Page 10726 Parts Information Important The Cooling Coil Coating listed below is the only GM approved product for use under warranty as an evaporator core disinfectant and for the long term control of evaporator core microbial growth. Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table above. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Core > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 10727 Evaporator Core: Service and Repair Air Conditioning Evaporator Core Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Locations Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch: Locations Instrument Panel/Center Console Component Views Right Side of Instrument Panel - Center Console and HVAC System 1 - B7E Air Temperature Sensor - Duct Right Lower 2 - B7J Air Temperature Sensor - Duct Right Upper 3 - M6 Air Temperature Door Actuator 4 - M8 Blower Motor 5 - K8 Blower Motor Control Module 6 - B39 A/C Evaporator Temperature Sensor 7 - M46 Air Recirculation Door Motor 8 - M37 Mode Door Actuator 9 - X83 Auxiliary Audio Input X1 (without UWG) 10 - X83 Auxiliary Audio Input X2 (without UWG) 11 - X80A Accessory Power Receptacle - Center Console 1 12 - E28 Center Console Compartment Lamp (LT or LTZ or SLE2 or SLT) 13 - X80B Accessory Power Receptacle Center Console 2 14 - X82 Audio/Video Input Adapter (UWG) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 10731 Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch: Diagrams B39 A/C Evaporator Temperature Sensor Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 10732 Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch: Service and Repair Evaporator Air Temperature Sensor Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Expansion Block/Orifice Tube > Component Information > Service and Repair > Air Conditioning Evaporator Thermal Expansion Valve Replacement Expansion Block/Orifice Tube: Service and Repair Air Conditioning Evaporator Thermal Expansion Valve Replacement Air Conditioning Evaporator Thermal Expansion Valve Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Expansion Block/Orifice Tube > Component Information > Service and Repair > Air Conditioning Evaporator Thermal Expansion Valve Replacement > Page 10737 Expansion Block/Orifice Tube: Service and Repair Air Conditioning Evaporator Thermal Expansion Valve Hose Replacement Air Conditioning Evaporator Thermal Expansion Valve Hose Replacement Special Tools J 39400-A - Halogen Leak Detector Removal Procedures 1. Recover the refrigerant. Refer to Refrigerant Recovery and Recharging (See: Service and Repair/Procedures/Refrigerant Recovery and Recharging). 2. Remove the air conditioning compressor hose nut (1) from the air conditioning evaporator thermal expansion valve tube hose. 3. Remove the air conditioning compressor hose from the air conditioning evaporator thermal expansion valve tube hose. 4. Remove the compressor hose retainer nut (2) from the battery box. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Expansion Block/Orifice Tube > Component Information > Service and Repair > Air Conditioning Evaporator Thermal Expansion Valve Replacement > Page 10738 5. Remove the air conditioning evaporator thermal expansion valve tube hose nut (1) from the thermal expansion valve. 6. Remove the air conditioning evaporator thermal expansion valve tube hose (2) from the vehicle. 7. Remove and discard the sealing washers from the air conditioning evaporator thermal expansion valve tube hose. Refer to Air Conditioning System Seal Replacement (See: Coupler HVAC/A/C Coupler O-ring/Service and Repair/Air Conditioning System Seal Replacement). Installation Procedure 1. Install new seal washers to the air conditioning evaporator thermal expansion valve tube hose. Refer to Air Conditioning System Seal Replacement (See: Coupler HVAC/A/C Coupler O-ring/Service and Repair/Air Conditioning System Seal Replacement). 2. Position the air conditioning evaporator thermal expansion valve tube hose in the vehicle. 3. Install the air conditioning evaporator thermal expansion valve tube hose (2) to the thermal expansion valve. 4. Install the air conditioning evaporator thermal expansion valve tube hose nut (1) to the thermal expansion valve and tighten the nut to 22 Nm (16 lb ft). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Expansion Block/Orifice Tube > Component Information > Service and Repair > Air Conditioning Evaporator Thermal Expansion Valve Replacement > Page 10739 5. Install a new sealing washer to the air conditioning evaporator thermal expansion valve tube hose at the compressor hose. Refer to Air Conditioning System Seal Replacement (See: Coupler HVAC/A/C Coupler O-ring/Service and Repair/Air Conditioning System Seal Replacement) 6. Install the air conditioning evaporator thermal expansion valve tube hose (2) to the compressor hose. 7. Install the air conditioning evaporator thermal expansion valve tube hose nut (1) to the compressor hose and tighten to 22 Nm (16 lb ft). 8. install the compressor hose retainer nut (2) to the battery box and tighten to 22 Nm (16 lb ft). 9. Recharge the A/C system. Refer to Refrigerant Recovery and Recharging (See: Service and Repair/Procedures/Refrigerant Recovery and Recharging). 10. Test the affected A/C joints for leaks using J 39400-A. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Heater Core > Component Information > Service and Repair Heater Core: Service and Repair Heater Core Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Heater Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heater Inlet Hose Replacement Heater Hose: Service and Repair Heater Inlet Hose Replacement Heater Inlet Hose Replacement (LF1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Heater Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heater Inlet Hose Replacement > Page 10747 Heater Hose: Service and Repair Heater Outlet Hose Replacement Heater Outlet Hose Replacement (LF1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Air Conditioning Condenser and Air Conditioning Evaporator Tube Replacement Hose/Line HVAC: Service and Repair Air Conditioning Condenser and Air Conditioning Evaporator Tube Replacement Air Conditioning Condenser and Air Conditioning Evaporator Tube Replacement Special Tools J 39400-A - Halogen Leak Detector Removal Procedure 1. Recover the refrigerant. Refer to Refrigerant Recovery and Recharging (See: Service and Repair/Procedures/Refrigerant Recovery and Recharging). 2. Remove the left headlamp. Refer to Headlamp Replacement (Equinox) (See: Lighting and Horns/Headlamp/Service and Repair) Headlamp Replacement (Terrain) (See: Lighting and Horns/Headlamp/Service and Repair). 3. Remove the surge tank. Refer to Radiator Surge Tank Replacement (See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Cooling System/Coolant Reservoir/Service and Repair/Radiator Surge Tank Replacement). 4. Remove the washer bottle. Refer to Windshield Washer Solvent Container Replacement (Equinox) (See: Wiper and Washer Systems/Windshield Washer Reservoir/Service and Repair) Windshield Washer Solvent Container Replacement (Terrain) (See: Wiper and Washer Systems/Windshield Washer Reservoir/Service and Repair). 5. Remove the battery. Refer to Battery Replacement (See: Starting and Charging/Battery/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Battery Replacement). 6. Remove the battery box bolts from the battery box. 7. Disconnect the negative battery cable nut from the wheelhouse. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Air Conditioning Condenser and Air Conditioning Evaporator Tube Replacement > Page 10752 8. Remove the nut retaining the liquid line to the strut tower. 9. Disconnect the harness and vent hose retainers from the liquid line. 10. Remove the evaporator outlet hose and liquid line retainer plate nut from the thermal expansion valve (TXV). 11. Remove the evaporator outlet hose and liquid line from the TXV. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Air Conditioning Condenser and Air Conditioning Evaporator Tube Replacement > Page 10753 12. Remove the liquid line nut from the condenser. 13. Remove the liquid line from the condenser. 14. Remove the bolt retaining the liquid line to the body. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Air Conditioning Condenser and Air Conditioning Evaporator Tube Replacement > Page 10754 15. Position the battery box inboard to allow for routing of the liquid line. 16. Route the liquid line above the battery box and the ground lug. 17. Lift the rear portion of the liquid line upward and remove the liquid line from the vehicle. 18. Remove and discard the sealing washer from the liquid line. Refer to Air Conditioning System Seal Replacement (See: Coupler HVAC/A/C Coupler O-ring/Service and Repair/Air Conditioning System Seal Replacement). 19. Install protective caps to the condenser, the evaporator outlet hose, and the TXV to prevent contamination and desiccant saturation. Installation Procedure 1. Route the liquid line below the battery box and the ground lug. Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener Caution). 2. Connect the negative battery cable nut to the wheelhouse and tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb in). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Air Conditioning Condenser and Air Conditioning Evaporator Tube Replacement > Page 10755 3. Remove the protective caps from the condenser, the evaporator outlet hose, and the TXV. 4. Install the new sealing washer to the liquid line. Refer to Air Conditioning System Seal Replacement (See: Coupler HVAC/A/C Coupler O-ring/Service and Repair/Air Conditioning System Seal Replacement). 5. Route the condenser end of the liquid line into position. 6. Install the liquid line to the condenser. Note: Use a large pair of pliers to hold the fitting while tightening the nut. Be careful not to twist the line. 7. Install the liquid line nut to the condenser and tighten to 22 Nm (16 lb ft). 8. Install the bolt to retain the liquid line to the body and tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb in). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Air Conditioning Condenser and Air Conditioning Evaporator Tube Replacement > Page 10756 9. Remove the protective cap from the TXV, the liquid line, and the evaporator outlet hose. 10. Install new seal washers to the liquid line and the evaporator outlet hose. Refer to Air Conditioning System Seal Replacement (See: Coupler HVAC/A/C Coupler O-ring/Service and Repair/Air Conditioning System Seal Replacement). 11. Install the liquid line and the evaporator outlet hose to the TXV. 12. Install the liquid line and evaporator outlet hose retainer plate nut to the TXV and tighten to 22 Nm (16 lb ft). 13. Install the four battery box bolts to the inside of the battery box and tighten to 15 Nm (11 lb ft). 14. Install the battery box bolt to the outside of the battery box and tighten to 10 Nm (86 lb in). 15. Install the battery. Refer to Battery Replacement (See: Starting and Charging/Battery/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Battery Replacement). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Air Conditioning Condenser and Air Conditioning Evaporator Tube Replacement > Page 10757 16. Install the liquid line to the strut tower. 17. Install the liquid line nut to the strut tower and tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb in). 18. Connect the harness and vent hose retainers to the liquid line. 19. Install the surge tank. Refer to Radiator Surge Tank Replacement (See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Cooling System/Coolant Reservoir/Service and Repair/Radiator Surge Tank Replacement). 20. Install the washer bottle. Refer to Windshield Washer Solvent Container Replacement (Equinox) (See: Wiper and Washer Systems/Windshield Washer Reservoir/Service and Repair) Windshield Washer Solvent Container Replacement (Terrain) (See: Wiper and Washer Systems/Windshield Washer Reservoir/Service and Repair). 21. Install the left headlamp. Refer to Headlamp Replacement (Equinox) (See: Lighting and Horns/Headlamp/Service and Repair) Headlamp Replacement (Terrain) (See: Lighting and Horns/Headlamp/Service and Repair). 22. Recharge the A/C system. Refer to Refrigerant Recovery and Recharging (See: Service and Repair/Procedures/Refrigerant Recovery and Recharging). 23. Test the affected A/C joints for leaks using J 39400-A - Halogen Leak Detector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Air Conditioning Condenser and Air Conditioning Evaporator Tube Replacement > Page 10758 Hose/Line HVAC: Service and Repair Air Conditioning Compressor Hose Replacement Air Conditioning Compressor Hose Replacement (LF1) Special Tools J 39400-A - Halogen Leak Detector Removal Procedures 1. Recover the refrigerant. Refer to Refrigerant Recovery and Recharging (See: Service and Repair/Procedures/Refrigerant Recovery and Recharging). 2. Remove the left headlamp. Refer to Headlamp Replacement (Equinox) (See: Lighting and Horns/Headlamp/Service and Repair) Headlamp Replacement (Terrain) (See: Lighting and Horns/Headlamp/Service and Repair). 3. Remove the air conditioning compressor hose nut (2) from the air conditioning evaporator thermal expansion valve tube hose. 4. Remove the air conditioning compressor hose from the air conditioning evaporator thermal expansion valve tube hose. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Air Conditioning Condenser and Air Conditioning Evaporator Tube Replacement > Page 10759 5. Remove the compressor hose nut (2) from the condenser. 6. Remove the compressor hose (1) from the condenser. 7. Unclip hose from fan shroud. 8. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle (See: Maintenance/Vehicle Lifting/Service and Repair). 9. Disconnect the electrical connector from the air conditioning refrigerant pressure sensor valve. 10. Remove the compressor hose nut (1) at the compressor. 11. Remove the compressor hose (2) from the compressor. 12. Remove the compressor hose from the vehicle. 13. Remove and discard the sealing washers from the compressor hose. Refer to Air Conditioning System Seal Replacement (See: Coupler HVAC/A/C Coupler O-ring/Service and Repair/Air Conditioning System Seal Replacement). Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Air Conditioning Condenser and Air Conditioning Evaporator Tube Replacement > Page 10760 1. Install new seal washers to the compressor hose. Refer to Air Conditioning System Seal Replacement (See: Coupler HVAC/A/C Coupler O-ring/Service and Repair/Air Conditioning System Seal Replacement). 2. Install the compressor hose (2) to the compressor. Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener Caution). 3. Install the compressor hose nut (1) to the compressor and tighten the nut to 22 Nm (16 lb ft). 4. Connect the electrical connector to the air conditioning refrigerant pressure sensor valve. 5. Lower the vehicle. 6. Position the compressor hose in the vehicle. 7. Install a new sealing washer to the air conditioning evaporator thermal expansion valve tube hose. Refer to Air Conditioning System Seal Replacement (See: Coupler HVAC/A/C Coupler O-ring/Service and Repair/Air Conditioning System Seal Replacement). 8. Install the air conditioning evaporator thermal expansion valve tube hose to the compressor hose. 9. Install the compressor hose nut (2) to the air conditioning evaporator thermal expansion valve tube hose and tighten the nut to 22 Nm (16 lb ft). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Air Conditioning Condenser and Air Conditioning Evaporator Tube Replacement > Page 10761 10. Install a new sealing washer to the compressor hose at the condenser. Refer to Air Conditioning System Seal Replacement (See: Coupler HVAC/A/C Coupler O-ring/Service and Repair/Air Conditioning System Seal Replacement) 11. Install the compressor hose (1) to the condenser. 12. Install the compressor hose nut (2) to the condenser and tighten to 20 Nm (15 lb ft). 13. Install the left headlamp. Refer to Headlamp Replacement (Equinox) (See: Lighting and Horns/Headlamp/Service and Repair) Headlamp Replacement (Terrain) (See: Lighting and Horns/Headlamp/Service and Repair). 14. Recharge the A/C system. Refer to Refrigerant Recovery and Recharging (See: Service and Repair/Procedures/Refrigerant Recovery and Recharging). 15. Test the affected A/C joints for leaks using J 39400-A. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Housing Assembly HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair Housing Assembly HVAC: Service and Repair Heater and Air Conditioning Evaporator and Blower Module Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Receiver Dryer > Component Information > Service and Repair Receiver Dryer: Service and Repair Receiver and Dehydrator Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications Refrigerant: Capacity Specifications Refrigerant charge ............................................................................................................................... ........................................................ 0.65 kg (1.43 lb) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 10772 Refrigerant: Fluid Type Specifications Refrigerant ........................................................................................................................................... ....................................................................... R-134a Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant > Component Information > Specifications > Page 10773 Refrigerant: Service and Repair Refrigerant Recovery and Recharging Special Tools J 34100 - Smart Cart Warning To prevent personal injury, avoid breathing A/C Refrigerant and lubricant vapor or mist. Work in a well ventilated area. To remove refrigerant from the A/C System, use service equipment designed for recovery that is certified to meet the requirements of the appropriate SAE Standards. If an accidental system discharge occurs, ventilate the work area before continuing service. Additional health and safety information may be obtained from the refrigerant, refrigerant recovery, and lubricant manufacturers. Warning For personal protection, goggles and lint-free gloves should be worn and a clean cloth wrapped around fittings, valves, and connections when doing work that includes opening the refrigerant system. If refrigerant comes in contact with any part of the body severe frostbite and personal injury can result. The exposed area should be flushed immediately with cold water and prompt medical help should be obtained. Caution: You must replace the desiccant if the A/C refrigerant system has been open to atmosphere for more than four hours, or if the A/C refrigerant oil has been contaminated. Failure to replace the desiccant will result in damage to the A/C refrigerant system. Caution: R-134a is the only approved refrigerant for use in this vehicle. The use of any other refrigerant may result in poor system performance or component failure. Caution: To avoid system damage use only R-134a dedicated tools when servicing the A/C system. Caution: Use only Polyalkylene Glycol Synthetic Refrigerant Oil (PAG) for internal circulation through the R-134a A/C system and only 525 viscosity mineral oil on fitting threads and O-rings. If lubricants other than those specified are used, compressor failure and/or fitting seizure may result. The J 34100 - Smart Cart is a complete air conditioning service center for R-134a. The Smart Cart recovers, recycles, evacuates and recharges A/C refrigerant quickly, accurately and automatically. The unit has a display screen that contains the function controls and displays prompts that will lead the technician through the recover, recycle, evacuate and recharge operations. R-134a is recovered into and charged out of an internal storage vessel. The ACR 2000 automatically replenishes this vessel from an external source tank in order to maintain a constant 5.45-6.82 kg (12-15 lbs) of A/C refrigerant. The Smart Cart has a built in A/C refrigerant identifier that will test for contamination, prior to recovery and will notify the technician if there are foreign gases present in the A/C system. If foreign gases are present, the Smart Cart will not recover the refrigerant from the A/C system. The Smart Cart also features automatic air purge, single pass recycling and an automatic oil drain. Refer to the J 34100 - Smart Cart Smart Cart manual for operation and setup instruction. Always recharge the A/C System with the proper amount of R-134a. Refer to Refrigerant System Specifications (See: Specifications) for the correct amount. A/C Refrigerant System Oil Charge Replenishing If oil was removed from the A/C system during the recovery process or due to component replacement, the oil must be replenished. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant Oil > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications Refrigerant Oil: Capacity Specifications Refrigerant Oil Abrupt Refrigerant Loss ....................................................................................................................... ......................................................... 65 ml (2.20 oz) Compressor Replacement ................................ .............................................................................................................................................. 74 ml (2.50 oz) The service compressor is precharged with the specified amount of PAG oil. Condenser Replacement with the Receiver Dehydrator ...................................................................................................................................... 60 ml (2 oz) Condenser Replacement without the Receiver Dehydrator ................................................................................................................................. 30 ml (1 oz) Evaporator Replacement ..................................................................................................................... ................................................................ 30 ml (1 oz) Receiver Dehydrator Replacement ................ ..................................................................................................................................................... 30 ml (1 oz) Thermal Expansion Valve Replacement ........................................................................................................................................................ 20 ml (0.75 oz) Total System PAG Oil Capacity ....................................................................................... ................................................................................ 120 ml (4 oz) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant Oil > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 10778 Refrigerant Oil: Fluid Type Specifications PAG Oil GM P/N 12378526 for United States PAG Oil GM P/N 88900060 for Canada Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > High Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair High Pressure Sensor / Switch: Service and Repair Air Conditioning Refrigerant Pressure Sensor Valve Replacement (LF1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Compressor Clutch Relay > Component Information > Locations Compressor Clutch Relay: Locations Electrical Center Identification Views X50A Fuse Block - Underhood, Label Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Compressor Clutch Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 10787 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Control Module HVAC: > 09298D > Nov > 10 > Recall Defroster/Defogger Inoperative Technical Service Bulletin # 09298D Date: 101122 Recall - Defroster/Defogger Inoperative FMVSS NONCOMPLIANCE Bulletin No.: 09298D Date: November 22, 2010 Subject: 09298D - Heating and Windshield Defrost Inoperative - Replace Computer Module Models: 2010 Chevrolet Equinox 2010 GMC Terrain Supercede: The Parts Information section in this bulletin has been revised for Canadian dealers. Mass Comp is no longer an Authorized GM Electronics Service Center. Canadian dealers are to begin contacting York Electronics for all exchanges.Discard all copies of bulletin 09298C, issued March 2010. Customers are being instructed to provide their VIN when calling to schedule a service appointment. If the vehicle will not be programmed at the dealership, please provide the VIN to the Parts Manager so parts can be ordered and received in time for the service appointment. Parts will be shipped overnight to dealers so please do not order more than 2 days prior to the scheduled service appointment date. Condition General Motors has decided that certain 2010 model year Chevrolet Equinox and GMC Terrain vehicles fail to conform to Federal/Canada Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 103, "Windshield Defrosting and Defogging Systems", and Standard 101, "Controls and Displays". On these vehicles, software in the center instrument panel can cause the heating, air conditioning, defrost, and radio controls, as well as the panel illumination to become inoperative. Driving without a functioning defrost system can decrease the driver's visibility under certain driving conditions and could result in a crash without warning. Driving without panel illumination can divert the driver's attention while looking for a control. Correction Dealers are to replace the computer module in the center instrument panel. Vehicles Involved Involved are certain 2010 model year Chevrolet Equinox and GMC Terrain vehicles built within these VIN breakpoints: Important Dealers are to confirm vehicle eligibility prior to beginning repairs by using the Required Field Actions section in the Global Warranty system. Not all vehicles within the above breakpoints may be involved. For dealers with involved vehicles, a listing with involved vehicles containing the complete vehicle identification number, customer name, and address information has been prepared and will be provided to US and Canadian dealers through the GM GlobalConnect Recall Reports, or sent directly to export dealers. Dealers will not have a report available if they have no involved vehicles currently assigned. The listing may contain customer names and addresses obtained from Motor Vehicle Registration Records. The use of such motor vehicle registration data for any purpose other than follow-up necessary to complete this recall is a violation of law in several states/provinces/countries. Accordingly, you are urged to limit the use of this report to the follow-up necessary to complete this recall. Parts Information For dealers using the programming tool: Most repairs require no parts. There are a small number of vehicles that will not be able to be reprogrammed; for these vehicles, please follow the parts information below. If you have parts currently in your inventory, please return them to Specmo (U.S.) or York Electronics (Canada). For dealers that did not receive a programming tool: A center instrument panel will be required. Note Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Control Module HVAC: > 09298D > Nov > 10 > Recall Defroster/Defogger Inoperative > Page 10796 Center instrument panels (radio control assemblies) will be shipped overnight to dealers. Note: Core returns for this recall are to be shipped within 24 hours of receiving the exchange. A prepaid Federal Express Ground label will be included with each exchange. Package the core securely in the original packaging and package inserts provided with the exchange. It is important that the return unit be packaged identically to the exchange unit to prevent damage in shipping. Failure to return the core will result in a charge to the dealer's Open Parts Account. Do not order parts for customer vehicles until they have scheduled an appointment. U.S. Dealers Only: If the customer is not experiencing any concerns with the center instrument panel (ICS), please contact Specmo Enterprises for arrange for an exchange. If the customer does have ICS concerns, please contact the Technical Assistance Center (TAC) prior to ordering an exchange ICS. Dealers are to contact Specmo Enterprises via the internet at www.specmo.com/dealers, to arrange for an exchange of the center instrument panel (radio control assembly). Dealers that do not have an account with Specmo will be able to create an account in order to access the website. Arrange for an exchange by following the prompts. The information below will be required to arrange for an exchange. - Bulletin number 09298 - VIN Ontario Dealers Only: Due to a limited inventory, and to avoid backorders, an onsite mobile upgrade is available. Please contact York Electronics at 888-650-9675 to schedule an appointment. All Other Provinces, Excluding Ontario: To arrange for an exchange of the centre instrument panel (radio control assembly), please contact York Electronics at 888-650-9675. Service Procedure Service Procedure Using the Programming Tool (for dealers that were shipped a programming tool) Note Programming is not performed using TIS2WEB SPS; use provided programming tool. Note If the customer is NOT experiencing any concerns with the center instrument panel (ICS), reprogram the rdio control assembly (center instrument panels) following the instructions below. If the customer does have ICS concerns, please contact the Technical Assistance Center (TAC) prior to programming the radio control assembly (center instrument panels). (1) First Design Radio Control Assembly; (2) Second Design Radio Control Assembly 1. Determine if the radio control assembly is programmable. First design radio control assemblies are NOT programmable and must go through the radio control assembly exchange process. - First design radio control assemblies (1) are NOT programmable. There are NO slots on the backside of the radio control assembly. - Second design radio control assemblies (2) are programmable. They have two slots on the backside of the radio control assembly. If the radio control assembly is a second design assembly, proceed to Step 2. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Control Module HVAC: > 09298D > Nov > 10 > Recall Defroster/Defogger Inoperative > Page 10797 Caution Insert a plastic body trim tool between the IP and radio control assembly along the top portion of the radio control assembly as shown in the illustration. DO NOT use a flat-blade screwdriver to remove the radio assembly. 2. Remove the radio control assembly (1). Refer to Radio Control Assembly Replacement in SI. 3. Carefully align the radio control assembly channels to the locating pegs of the programming tool as shown in the illustration. 4. Carefully seat the radio control assembly onto the programming tool. 5. The display area of the programming tool will indicate when the programming event has been completed. The programming tool will read "Programming Successful. Remove module." The programming event takes less than 30 seconds to complete. 6. Detach the radio control assembly from the programming tool. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Control Module HVAC: > 09298D > Nov > 10 > Recall Defroster/Defogger Inoperative > Page 10798 7. Place blue dot (3) on the back of the radio control assembly to indicate that the radio control module has been reprogrammed. 8. Install the radio control assembly. Refer to Radio Control Assembly Replacement in SI. Service Procedure Using the Radio Control Assembly Exchange Process Caution Insert a plastic body trim tool between the IP and radio control assembly along the top portion of the radio control assembly as shown in the illustration. DO NOT use a flat-bladed screwdriver to remove the radio control assembly. Note If the customer is NOT experiencing any concerns with the center instrument panel (ICS), proceed to Step 1 and perform this recall. If the customer DOES have ICS concerns, please contact the Technical Assistance Center (TAC) prior to performing this recall. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Control Module HVAC: > 09298D > Nov > 10 > Recall Defroster/Defogger Inoperative > Page 10799 Note For vehicles without the color touch screen navigation, unsnap and remove the display from the radio control assembly. Do not return the radio display with the radio control assembly. 1. Remove the radio control assembly (1). Refer to Radio Control Assembly Replacement in SI. 2. Package the radio control assembly and ship it to the exchange center indicated on the prepaid Federal Express Ground label that was enclosed with the exchange unit within 24 hours. Note Module programming and setup is NOT required when replacing only the radio control assembly. 3. Install the radio control assembly. Refer to Radio Control Assembly Replacement in SI. Courtesy Transportation - For US and Canada The General Motors Courtesy Transportation program is intended to minimize customer inconvenience when a vehicle requires a repair that is covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranties. The availability of courtesy transportation to customers whose vehicles are within the warranty coverage period and involved in a product program is very important in maintaining customer satisfaction. Dealers are to ensure that these customers understand that shuttle service or some other form of courtesy transportation is available and will be provided at no charge. Dealers should refer to the General Motors Service Policies and Procedures Manual for Courtesy Transportation guidelines. Warranty Transaction Information 1. Submit a transaction using the table below. * Dealers using WINS should add 0.2 administrative allowance to the labor time. Dealers using GWM should submit 0.2 hours administrative allowance under Administrative Time. ** Administrative allowance for unit exchange. *** Dealers are to claim only administrative allowance of 0.2 hours when the radio control assembly is reprogrammed by York's Mobile Unit. Dealers using WINS should submit 0.2 hours administrative allowance in labor time. Dealers using GWM should submit 0.2 hours administrative allowance under Administrative Time. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Control Module HVAC: > 09298D > Nov > 10 > Recall Defroster/Defogger Inoperative > Page 10800 Customer Notification - For US and Canada General Motors will notify customers of this recall on their vehicle (see copy of customer letter included with this bulletin). Customer Notification - For Export Letters will be sent to known owners of record located within areas covered by the US National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act. For owners outside these areas, dealers should notify customers using the attached sample letter. Dealer Recall Responsibility - For US and Export (US States, Territories, and Possessions) The US National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act provides that each vehicle that is subject to a recall of this type must be adequately repaired within a reasonable time after the customer has tendered it for repair. A failure to repair within sixty days after tender of a vehicle is prima facie evidence of failure to repair within a reasonable time. If the condition is not adequately repaired within a reasonable time, the customer may be entitled to an identical or reasonably equivalent vehicle at no charge or to a refund of the purchase price less a reasonable allowance for depreciation. To avoid having to provide these burdensome remedies, every effort must be made to promptly schedule an appointment with each customer and to repair their vehicle as soon as possible. In the recall notification letters, customers are told how to contact the US National Highway Traffic Safety Administration if the recall is not completed within a reasonable time. This bulletin is notice to you that the new motor vehicles included in this recall may not comply with the standard identified above. Under Title 49, Section 30112 of the United States Code, it is illegal for a dealer to sell a new motor vehicle which the dealer knows does not comply with an applicable Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard. As a consequence, if you sell any of these motor vehicles without first performing the recall correction, your dealership may be subject to a civil penalty for each such sale. Dealer Recall Responsibility - All All unsold new vehicles in dealers' possession and subject to this recall must be held and inspected/repaired per the service procedure of this recall bulletin before customers take possession of these vehicles. Dealers are to service all vehicles subject to this recall at no charge to customers, regardless of mileage, age of vehicle, or ownership, from this time forward. Customers who have recently purchased vehicles sold from your vehicle inventory, and for which there is no customer information indicated on the dealer listing, are to be contacted by the dealer. Arrangements are to be made to make the required correction according to the instructions contained in this bulletin. A copy of the customer letter is provided in this bulletin for your use in contacting customers. Recall follow-up cards should not be used for this purpose, since the customer may not as yet have received the notification letter. In summary, whenever a vehicle subject to this recall enters your vehicle inventory, or is in your dealership for service in the future, you must take the steps necessary to be sure the recall correction has been made before selling or releasing the vehicle. Disclaimer Owner Letter Owner Letter Dear General Motors Customer: This notice is sent to you in accordance with the requirements of the National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act. General Motors has decided that certain 2010 model year Chevrolet Equinox and GMC Terrain vehicles fail to conform to Federal/Canada Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 103, "Windshield Defrosting and Defogging Systems", and Standard 101, "Controls and Displays". As a result, GM is conducting a recall. We apologize for this inconvenience. However, we are concerned about your safety and continued satisfaction with our products. Important - Your vehicle is involved in recall 09298. - Schedule an appointment with your GM dealer. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Control Module HVAC: > 09298D > Nov > 10 > Recall Defroster/Defogger Inoperative > Page 10801 - This service will be performed for you at no charge. Why is your vehicle being recalled? The software in the center instrument panel can cause the heating, air conditioning, defrost, and radio controls, as well as the panel illumination to become inoperative. Driving without a functioning defrost system can decrease your visibility under certain driving conditions and could result in a crash without warning. Driving without panel illumination can divert your attention while looking for a control. What will we do? Your GM dealer will replace the computer module in the center instrument panel. This service will be performed for you at no charge. Because of service scheduling requirements, it is likely that your dealer will need your vehicle longer than the actual service correction time of approximately 20 minutes. If your vehicle is within the New Vehicle Limited Warranty, your dealer may provide you with shuttle service or some other form of courtesy transportation while your vehicle is at the dealership for this repair. Please refer to your Owner's Manual and your dealer for details on courtesy transportation. What should you do? You should contact your GM dealer to arrange a service appointment as soon as possible. When scheduling your appointment, please provide your dealer with your vehicle's 17 character vehicle identification number (VIN). Your VIN can be found above your name and address at the top of this letter, and will follow the numbers "09298". Your dealer will need your VIN to order parts for your vehicle so that they will be available on the day of your service appointment. Do you have questions? If you have questions or concerns that your dealer is unable to resolve, please contact the appropriate Customer Assistance Center at the number listed below. More information about your vehicle can be found at the Owner Center at www.gmownercenter.com. If after contacting your dealer and the Customer Assistance Center, you are still not satisfied we have done our best to remedy this condition without charge and within a reasonable time, you may wish to write the Administrator, National Highway Traffic Safety Administration, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE, Washington DC 20590, or call the toll-free Vehicle Safety Hotline at 1.888.327.4236 (TTY 1.800.424.9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov. Federal regulation requires that any vehicle lessor receiving this recall notice must forward a copy of this notice to the lessee within ten days. Scott Lawson Director, Customer and Relationship Services 09298 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Control Module HVAC: > NHTSA09V489000 > Dec > 09 > Recall 09V489000: Defroster Malfunction Control Module HVAC: Recalls Recall 09V489000: Defroster Malfunction VEHICLE MAKE/MODEL: MODEL YEAR(S): Chevrolet/Equinox 2010 GMC/Terrain 2010 MANUFACTURER: General Motors Corp. MFR'S REPORT DATE: December 18, 2009 NHTSA CAMPAIGN ID NUMBER: 09V489000 NHTSA ACTION NUMBER: N/A COMPONENT: Visibility: Defroster/Defogger System POTENTIAL NUMBER OF UNITS AFFECTED: 59031 SUMMARY: General Motors is recalling certain model year 2010 Chevrolet Equinox and GMC Terrain vehicles for failing to comply with the requirements of Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 103, "Windshield Defrosting and Defogging Systems and with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 101, "Controls and Displays". The software in the center instrument panel can cause the heating, air conditioning, defrost, and radio controls, as well as the panel illumination to become inoperative. CONSEQUENCE: Driving without a functioning defrost system can decrease your visibility under certain driving conditions and could result in a crash without warning. REMEDY: Dealers will replace the computer module in the center instrument panel free of charge. The safety recall is expected to begin during January 2010. Owners may contact Chevrolet at 1-800-630-2438, GMC at 1-866-996-9463 or at www.gmownercenter.com. NOTES: GM safety recall No. 090298. Owners may also contact The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration's Vehicle Safety Hotline at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY 1-800-424-9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Control Module HVAC: > 09298D > Nov > 10 > Recall - Defroster/Defogger Inoperative Technical Service Bulletin # 09298D Date: 101122 Recall - Defroster/Defogger Inoperative FMVSS NONCOMPLIANCE Bulletin No.: 09298D Date: November 22, 2010 Subject: 09298D - Heating and Windshield Defrost Inoperative - Replace Computer Module Models: 2010 Chevrolet Equinox 2010 GMC Terrain Supercede: The Parts Information section in this bulletin has been revised for Canadian dealers. Mass Comp is no longer an Authorized GM Electronics Service Center. Canadian dealers are to begin contacting York Electronics for all exchanges.Discard all copies of bulletin 09298C, issued March 2010. Customers are being instructed to provide their VIN when calling to schedule a service appointment. If the vehicle will not be programmed at the dealership, please provide the VIN to the Parts Manager so parts can be ordered and received in time for the service appointment. Parts will be shipped overnight to dealers so please do not order more than 2 days prior to the scheduled service appointment date. Condition General Motors has decided that certain 2010 model year Chevrolet Equinox and GMC Terrain vehicles fail to conform to Federal/Canada Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 103, "Windshield Defrosting and Defogging Systems", and Standard 101, "Controls and Displays". On these vehicles, software in the center instrument panel can cause the heating, air conditioning, defrost, and radio controls, as well as the panel illumination to become inoperative. Driving without a functioning defrost system can decrease the driver's visibility under certain driving conditions and could result in a crash without warning. Driving without panel illumination can divert the driver's attention while looking for a control. Correction Dealers are to replace the computer module in the center instrument panel. Vehicles Involved Involved are certain 2010 model year Chevrolet Equinox and GMC Terrain vehicles built within these VIN breakpoints: Important Dealers are to confirm vehicle eligibility prior to beginning repairs by using the Required Field Actions section in the Global Warranty system. Not all vehicles within the above breakpoints may be involved. For dealers with involved vehicles, a listing with involved vehicles containing the complete vehicle identification number, customer name, and address information has been prepared and will be provided to US and Canadian dealers through the GM GlobalConnect Recall Reports, or sent directly to export dealers. Dealers will not have a report available if they have no involved vehicles currently assigned. The listing may contain customer names and addresses obtained from Motor Vehicle Registration Records. The use of such motor vehicle registration data for any purpose other than follow-up necessary to complete this recall is a violation of law in several states/provinces/countries. Accordingly, you are urged to limit the use of this report to the follow-up necessary to complete this recall. Parts Information For dealers using the programming tool: Most repairs require no parts. There are a small number of vehicles that will not be able to be reprogrammed; for these vehicles, please follow the parts information below. If you have parts currently in your inventory, please return them to Specmo (U.S.) or York Electronics (Canada). For dealers that did not receive a programming tool: A center instrument panel will be required. Note Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Control Module HVAC: > 09298D > Nov > 10 > Recall - Defroster/Defogger Inoperative > Page 10811 Center instrument panels (radio control assemblies) will be shipped overnight to dealers. Note: Core returns for this recall are to be shipped within 24 hours of receiving the exchange. A prepaid Federal Express Ground label will be included with each exchange. Package the core securely in the original packaging and package inserts provided with the exchange. It is important that the return unit be packaged identically to the exchange unit to prevent damage in shipping. Failure to return the core will result in a charge to the dealer's Open Parts Account. Do not order parts for customer vehicles until they have scheduled an appointment. U.S. Dealers Only: If the customer is not experiencing any concerns with the center instrument panel (ICS), please contact Specmo Enterprises for arrange for an exchange. If the customer does have ICS concerns, please contact the Technical Assistance Center (TAC) prior to ordering an exchange ICS. Dealers are to contact Specmo Enterprises via the internet at www.specmo.com/dealers, to arrange for an exchange of the center instrument panel (radio control assembly). Dealers that do not have an account with Specmo will be able to create an account in order to access the website. Arrange for an exchange by following the prompts. The information below will be required to arrange for an exchange. - Bulletin number 09298 - VIN Ontario Dealers Only: Due to a limited inventory, and to avoid backorders, an onsite mobile upgrade is available. Please contact York Electronics at 888-650-9675 to schedule an appointment. All Other Provinces, Excluding Ontario: To arrange for an exchange of the centre instrument panel (radio control assembly), please contact York Electronics at 888-650-9675. Service Procedure Service Procedure Using the Programming Tool (for dealers that were shipped a programming tool) Note Programming is not performed using TIS2WEB SPS; use provided programming tool. Note If the customer is NOT experiencing any concerns with the center instrument panel (ICS), reprogram the rdio control assembly (center instrument panels) following the instructions below. If the customer does have ICS concerns, please contact the Technical Assistance Center (TAC) prior to programming the radio control assembly (center instrument panels). (1) First Design Radio Control Assembly; (2) Second Design Radio Control Assembly 1. Determine if the radio control assembly is programmable. First design radio control assemblies are NOT programmable and must go through the radio control assembly exchange process. - First design radio control assemblies (1) are NOT programmable. There are NO slots on the backside of the radio control assembly. - Second design radio control assemblies (2) are programmable. They have two slots on the backside of the radio control assembly. If the radio control assembly is a second design assembly, proceed to Step 2. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Control Module HVAC: > 09298D > Nov > 10 > Recall - Defroster/Defogger Inoperative > Page 10812 Caution Insert a plastic body trim tool between the IP and radio control assembly along the top portion of the radio control assembly as shown in the illustration. DO NOT use a flat-blade screwdriver to remove the radio assembly. 2. Remove the radio control assembly (1). Refer to Radio Control Assembly Replacement in SI. 3. Carefully align the radio control assembly channels to the locating pegs of the programming tool as shown in the illustration. 4. Carefully seat the radio control assembly onto the programming tool. 5. The display area of the programming tool will indicate when the programming event has been completed. The programming tool will read "Programming Successful. Remove module." The programming event takes less than 30 seconds to complete. 6. Detach the radio control assembly from the programming tool. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Control Module HVAC: > 09298D > Nov > 10 > Recall - Defroster/Defogger Inoperative > Page 10813 7. Place blue dot (3) on the back of the radio control assembly to indicate that the radio control module has been reprogrammed. 8. Install the radio control assembly. Refer to Radio Control Assembly Replacement in SI. Service Procedure Using the Radio Control Assembly Exchange Process Caution Insert a plastic body trim tool between the IP and radio control assembly along the top portion of the radio control assembly as shown in the illustration. DO NOT use a flat-bladed screwdriver to remove the radio control assembly. Note If the customer is NOT experiencing any concerns with the center instrument panel (ICS), proceed to Step 1 and perform this recall. If the customer DOES have ICS concerns, please contact the Technical Assistance Center (TAC) prior to performing this recall. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Control Module HVAC: > 09298D > Nov > 10 > Recall - Defroster/Defogger Inoperative > Page 10814 Note For vehicles without the color touch screen navigation, unsnap and remove the display from the radio control assembly. Do not return the radio display with the radio control assembly. 1. Remove the radio control assembly (1). Refer to Radio Control Assembly Replacement in SI. 2. Package the radio control assembly and ship it to the exchange center indicated on the prepaid Federal Express Ground label that was enclosed with the exchange unit within 24 hours. Note Module programming and setup is NOT required when replacing only the radio control assembly. 3. Install the radio control assembly. Refer to Radio Control Assembly Replacement in SI. Courtesy Transportation - For US and Canada The General Motors Courtesy Transportation program is intended to minimize customer inconvenience when a vehicle requires a repair that is covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranties. The availability of courtesy transportation to customers whose vehicles are within the warranty coverage period and involved in a product program is very important in maintaining customer satisfaction. Dealers are to ensure that these customers understand that shuttle service or some other form of courtesy transportation is available and will be provided at no charge. Dealers should refer to the General Motors Service Policies and Procedures Manual for Courtesy Transportation guidelines. Warranty Transaction Information 1. Submit a transaction using the table below. * Dealers using WINS should add 0.2 administrative allowance to the labor time. Dealers using GWM should submit 0.2 hours administrative allowance under Administrative Time. ** Administrative allowance for unit exchange. *** Dealers are to claim only administrative allowance of 0.2 hours when the radio control assembly is reprogrammed by York's Mobile Unit. Dealers using WINS should submit 0.2 hours administrative allowance in labor time. Dealers using GWM should submit 0.2 hours administrative allowance under Administrative Time. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Control Module HVAC: > 09298D > Nov > 10 > Recall - Defroster/Defogger Inoperative > Page 10815 Customer Notification - For US and Canada General Motors will notify customers of this recall on their vehicle (see copy of customer letter included with this bulletin). Customer Notification - For Export Letters will be sent to known owners of record located within areas covered by the US National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act. For owners outside these areas, dealers should notify customers using the attached sample letter. Dealer Recall Responsibility - For US and Export (US States, Territories, and Possessions) The US National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act provides that each vehicle that is subject to a recall of this type must be adequately repaired within a reasonable time after the customer has tendered it for repair. A failure to repair within sixty days after tender of a vehicle is prima facie evidence of failure to repair within a reasonable time. If the condition is not adequately repaired within a reasonable time, the customer may be entitled to an identical or reasonably equivalent vehicle at no charge or to a refund of the purchase price less a reasonable allowance for depreciation. To avoid having to provide these burdensome remedies, every effort must be made to promptly schedule an appointment with each customer and to repair their vehicle as soon as possible. In the recall notification letters, customers are told how to contact the US National Highway Traffic Safety Administration if the recall is not completed within a reasonable time. This bulletin is notice to you that the new motor vehicles included in this recall may not comply with the standard identified above. Under Title 49, Section 30112 of the United States Code, it is illegal for a dealer to sell a new motor vehicle which the dealer knows does not comply with an applicable Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard. As a consequence, if you sell any of these motor vehicles without first performing the recall correction, your dealership may be subject to a civil penalty for each such sale. Dealer Recall Responsibility - All All unsold new vehicles in dealers' possession and subject to this recall must be held and inspected/repaired per the service procedure of this recall bulletin before customers take possession of these vehicles. Dealers are to service all vehicles subject to this recall at no charge to customers, regardless of mileage, age of vehicle, or ownership, from this time forward. Customers who have recently purchased vehicles sold from your vehicle inventory, and for which there is no customer information indicated on the dealer listing, are to be contacted by the dealer. Arrangements are to be made to make the required correction according to the instructions contained in this bulletin. A copy of the customer letter is provided in this bulletin for your use in contacting customers. Recall follow-up cards should not be used for this purpose, since the customer may not as yet have received the notification letter. In summary, whenever a vehicle subject to this recall enters your vehicle inventory, or is in your dealership for service in the future, you must take the steps necessary to be sure the recall correction has been made before selling or releasing the vehicle. Disclaimer Owner Letter Owner Letter Dear General Motors Customer: This notice is sent to you in accordance with the requirements of the National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act. General Motors has decided that certain 2010 model year Chevrolet Equinox and GMC Terrain vehicles fail to conform to Federal/Canada Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 103, "Windshield Defrosting and Defogging Systems", and Standard 101, "Controls and Displays". As a result, GM is conducting a recall. We apologize for this inconvenience. However, we are concerned about your safety and continued satisfaction with our products. Important - Your vehicle is involved in recall 09298. - Schedule an appointment with your GM dealer. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Control Module HVAC: > 09298D > Nov > 10 > Recall - Defroster/Defogger Inoperative > Page 10816 - This service will be performed for you at no charge. Why is your vehicle being recalled? The software in the center instrument panel can cause the heating, air conditioning, defrost, and radio controls, as well as the panel illumination to become inoperative. Driving without a functioning defrost system can decrease your visibility under certain driving conditions and could result in a crash without warning. Driving without panel illumination can divert your attention while looking for a control. What will we do? Your GM dealer will replace the computer module in the center instrument panel. This service will be performed for you at no charge. Because of service scheduling requirements, it is likely that your dealer will need your vehicle longer than the actual service correction time of approximately 20 minutes. If your vehicle is within the New Vehicle Limited Warranty, your dealer may provide you with shuttle service or some other form of courtesy transportation while your vehicle is at the dealership for this repair. Please refer to your Owner's Manual and your dealer for details on courtesy transportation. What should you do? You should contact your GM dealer to arrange a service appointment as soon as possible. When scheduling your appointment, please provide your dealer with your vehicle's 17 character vehicle identification number (VIN). Your VIN can be found above your name and address at the top of this letter, and will follow the numbers "09298". Your dealer will need your VIN to order parts for your vehicle so that they will be available on the day of your service appointment. Do you have questions? If you have questions or concerns that your dealer is unable to resolve, please contact the appropriate Customer Assistance Center at the number listed below. More information about your vehicle can be found at the Owner Center at www.gmownercenter.com. If after contacting your dealer and the Customer Assistance Center, you are still not satisfied we have done our best to remedy this condition without charge and within a reasonable time, you may wish to write the Administrator, National Highway Traffic Safety Administration, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE, Washington DC 20590, or call the toll-free Vehicle Safety Hotline at 1.888.327.4236 (TTY 1.800.424.9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov. Federal regulation requires that any vehicle lessor receiving this recall notice must forward a copy of this notice to the lessee within ten days. Scott Lawson Director, Customer and Relationship Services 09298 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Control Module HVAC: > NHTSA09V489000 > Dec > 09 > Recall 09V489000: Defroster Malfunction Control Module HVAC: All Technical Service Bulletins Recall 09V489000: Defroster Malfunction VEHICLE MAKE/MODEL: MODEL YEAR(S): Chevrolet/Equinox 2010 GMC/Terrain 2010 MANUFACTURER: General Motors Corp. MFR'S REPORT DATE: December 18, 2009 NHTSA CAMPAIGN ID NUMBER: 09V489000 NHTSA ACTION NUMBER: N/A COMPONENT: Visibility: Defroster/Defogger System POTENTIAL NUMBER OF UNITS AFFECTED: 59031 SUMMARY: General Motors is recalling certain model year 2010 Chevrolet Equinox and GMC Terrain vehicles for failing to comply with the requirements of Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 103, "Windshield Defrosting and Defogging Systems and with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 101, "Controls and Displays". The software in the center instrument panel can cause the heating, air conditioning, defrost, and radio controls, as well as the panel illumination to become inoperative. CONSEQUENCE: Driving without a functioning defrost system can decrease your visibility under certain driving conditions and could result in a crash without warning. REMEDY: Dealers will replace the computer module in the center instrument panel free of charge. The safety recall is expected to begin during January 2010. Owners may contact Chevrolet at 1-800-630-2438, GMC at 1-866-996-9463 or at www.gmownercenter.com. NOTES: GM safety recall No. 090298. Owners may also contact The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration's Vehicle Safety Hotline at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY 1-800-424-9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 10821 Control Module HVAC: Locations Instrument Panel/Center Console Component Views Right Side of Instrument Panel - Center Console and HVAC System 1 - B7E Air Temperature Sensor - Duct Right Lower 2 - B7J Air Temperature Sensor - Duct Right Upper 3 - M6 Air Temperature Door Actuator 4 - M8 Blower Motor 5 - K8 Blower Motor Control Module 6 - B39 A/C Evaporator Temperature Sensor 7 - M46 Air Recirculation Door Motor 8 - M37 Mode Door Actuator 9 - X83 Auxiliary Audio Input X1 (without UWG) 10 - X83 Auxiliary Audio Input X2 (without UWG) 11 - X80A Accessory Power Receptacle - Center Console 1 12 - E28 Center Console Compartment Lamp (LT or LTZ or SLE2 or SLT) 13 - X80B Accessory Power Receptacle Center Console 2 14 - X82 Audio/Video Input Adapter (UWG) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 10822 Control Module HVAC: Diagrams K8 Blower Motor Control Module X1 K8 Blower Motor Control Module X2 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 10823 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 10824 Control Module HVAC: Service and Repair Blower Motor Control Module Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Specifications Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC: Specifications Ambient Air Temperature Sensor Resistance Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Specifications > Page 10829 Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC: Locations Front of Vehicle/Engine Compartment Component Views Front of the Engine Compartment Components 1 - G10R Cooling Fan Motor - Right (LF1) 2 - G10L Cooling Fan Motor - Left (LF1) 3 - R10 Cooling Fan Resistor (LAF) 4 - G10 Cooling Fan Motor (LAF) 5 - B9 Ambient Air Temperature Sensor Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Specifications > Page 10830 Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC: Diagrams B9 Ambient Air Temperature Sensor Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Ambient Air Temperature Sensor Replacement Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC: Service and Repair Ambient Air Temperature Sensor Replacement Ambient Air Temperature Sensor Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Ambient Air Temperature Sensor Replacement > Page 10833 Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC: Service and Repair HVAC - Automatic Ambient Air Quality Sensor Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Discharge Air Temperature Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Locations Discharge Air Temperature Sensor / Switch: Locations Instrument Panel/Center Console Component Views Right Side of Instrument Panel - Center Console and HVAC System 1 - B7E Air Temperature Sensor - Duct Right Lower 2 - B7J Air Temperature Sensor - Duct Right Upper 3 - M6 Air Temperature Door Actuator 4 - M8 Blower Motor 5 - K8 Blower Motor Control Module 6 - B39 A/C Evaporator Temperature Sensor 7 - M46 Air Recirculation Door Motor 8 - M37 Mode Door Actuator 9 - X83 Auxiliary Audio Input X1 (without UWG) 10 - X83 Auxiliary Audio Input X2 (without UWG) 11 - X80A Accessory Power Receptacle - Center Console 1 12 - E28 Center Console Compartment Lamp (LT or LTZ or SLE2 or SLT) 13 - X80B Accessory Power Receptacle Center Console 2 14 - X82 Audio/Video Input Adapter (UWG) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Discharge Air Temperature Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 10837 Discharge Air Temperature Sensor / Switch: Diagrams B7E Air Temperature Sensor - Duct Right Lower (C68) B7J Air Temperature Sensor - Duct Right Upper (C68) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Discharge Air Temperature Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 10838 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Discharge Air Temperature Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Duct Air Temperature Sensor Replacement Upper Discharge Air Temperature Sensor / Switch: Service and Repair Duct Air Temperature Sensor Replacement - Upper Duct Air Temperature Sensor Replacement - Upper Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Discharge Air Temperature Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Duct Air Temperature Sensor Replacement Upper > Page 10841 Discharge Air Temperature Sensor / Switch: Service and Repair Duct Air Temperature Sensor Replacement - Lower Duct Air Temperature Sensor Replacement - Lower Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Locations Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch: Locations Instrument Panel/Center Console Component Views Right Side of Instrument Panel - Center Console and HVAC System 1 - B7E Air Temperature Sensor - Duct Right Lower 2 - B7J Air Temperature Sensor - Duct Right Upper 3 - M6 Air Temperature Door Actuator 4 - M8 Blower Motor 5 - K8 Blower Motor Control Module 6 - B39 A/C Evaporator Temperature Sensor 7 - M46 Air Recirculation Door Motor 8 - M37 Mode Door Actuator 9 - X83 Auxiliary Audio Input X1 (without UWG) 10 - X83 Auxiliary Audio Input X2 (without UWG) 11 - X80A Accessory Power Receptacle - Center Console 1 12 - E28 Center Console Compartment Lamp (LT or LTZ or SLE2 or SLT) 13 - X80B Accessory Power Receptacle Center Console 2 14 - X82 Audio/Video Input Adapter (UWG) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 10845 Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch: Diagrams B39 A/C Evaporator Temperature Sensor Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 10846 Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch: Service and Repair Evaporator Air Temperature Sensor Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > High Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair High Pressure Sensor / Switch: Service and Repair Air Conditioning Refrigerant Pressure Sensor Valve Replacement (LF1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Service Port HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair Service Port HVAC: Service and Repair Air Conditioning Refrigerant Service Valve Core Replacement Special Tools * J 39400-A - Halogen Leak Detector * J 46246 - Valve Core Removal Tool Removal Procedure 1. Recover the refrigerant. Refer to Refrigerant Recovery and Recharging (See: Service and Repair/Procedures/Refrigerant Recovery and Recharging). 2. Use J 46246 - Valve Core Removal Tool or equivalent to remove the valve core. Installation Procedure 1. Use J 46246 - Valve Core Removal Tool or equivalent to install and tighten the valve core. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Service Port HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 10854 2. Evacuate and charge the A/C system. Refer to Refrigerant Recovery and Recharging (See: Service and Repair/Procedures/Refrigerant Recovery and Recharging). Note: To prevent loss of refrigerant charge, tighten the cap. Replace the cap if the seal is missing or damaged. 3. Test the affected A/C fittings for leaks using J 39400-A - Halogen Leak Detector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Repairs and Inspections Required After a Collision > System Information > Service and Repair > Seat Belts Repairs and Inspections Required After a Collision: Service and Repair Seat Belts Repairs and Inspections Required After a Collision Warning Restraint systems can be damaged in a collision. To help avoid injury and ensure that all parts in need of replacement are replaced: * Replace any seat belt system that was in use during the collision serious enough to deploy any automatic restraint device such as air bags and seat belt pretensioners. This not only includes seat belt systems in use by people of adult size, but seat belt systems used to secure child restraints, infant carriers and booster seats, including LATCH system and top tether anchorages. * Replace any seat belt system that has torn, worn, or damaged components. This not only includes adult seat belt systems, but built-in child restraints and LATCH system components, if any. * Replace any seat belt system if you observe the words "REPLACE" or "CAUTION", or if a yellow tag is visible. Do not replace a seat belt if only the child seat caution label is visible. * Replace any seat belt system if you are doubtful about its condition. This not only includes adult seat belt systems, but built-in child restraints, LATCH system components, and any restraint system used to secure infant carriers, child restraints, and booster seats. Do NOT replace single seat belt system components in vehicles that have been in a collision as described above. Always replace the entire seat belt system with the buckle, guide and retractor assembly, which includes the latch and webbing material. After a minor collision where no automatic restraint device was deployed, seat belt system replacement may not be necessary, unless some of the parts are torn, worn, or damaged. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Repairs and Inspections Required After a Collision > System Information > Service and Repair > Seat Belts > Page 10860 Repairs and Inspections Required After a Collision: Service and Repair Supplemental Inflatable Restraints Repairs and Inspections Required After a Collision Accident With or Without Air Bag Deployment - Component Inspections Warning Proper operation of the Supplemental Inflatable Restraint (SIR) sensing system requires that any repairs to the vehicle structure return the vehicle structure to the original production configuration. Not properly repairing the vehicle structure could cause non-deployment of the air bag(s) in a frontal collision or deployment of the air bag(s) for conditions less severe than intended. After any collision, inspect the following components as indicated. If you detect any damage, replace the component. If you detect any damage to the mounting points or mounting hardware, repair the component or replace the hardware as needed. * The steering column-Inspect the steering column for bending, twisting, buckling or any type of damage. * The instrument panel knee bolsters and mounting points-Inspect the knee bolsters for bending, twisting, buckling, or any other type of damage. * The instrument panel brackets, braces, etc.-Inspect for bending, twisting, buckling, or any other type of damage. * The seat belts-Perform the seat belt operational and functional checks. Refer to Repairs and Inspections Required After a Collision (See: Seat Belts). * The instrument panel cross car beam-Inspect for bending, twisting, buckling, or any other type of damage. * The instrument panel mounting points and brackets-Inspect for bending, twisting, buckling, or any other type of damage. * The seats and seat mounting points-Inspect for bending, twisting, buckling, or any other type of damage. * The roof and headliner mounting points. Accident With Frontal Air Bag Deployment - Component Replacement and Inspections After a collision involving air bag deployment, replace the following components. * Passenger instrument panel air bag * Driver steering wheel air bag * Inflatable restraint sensing and diagnostic module (SDM) * Front and/or side impact sensors * Driver/Passenger seat side air bag, if deployed * Seat back cover on if side seat air bag is deployed * Driver/Passenger seat belt anchor and/or retractor pretensioners Perform additional inspections on the following components. * Steering wheel air bag coil and the coil wiring pigtail-Inspect for melting, scorching, or other damage due to excessive heat. * Mounting points or mounting hardware for the passenger instrument panel air bag, steering wheel air bag, SDM, seat side air bag (if deployed) and seat belt anchor and/or retractor pretensioners-Inspect for any damage and repair or replace each component as needed. Accident With Side Seat Air Bag Deployment - Component Replacement and Inspections After a collision involving driver/passenger side seat air bag deployment, replace the following components. * Left/right side impact sensors on the side of the impact. * Left/right roof rail air bag on the side of the impact. * Inflatable restraint sensing and diagnostic module (SDM), if SDM has DTC B0052 56. * Inflatable restraint seat belt anchor and/or retractor pretensioner. * Driver or passenger seat back cushion cover replacement. Warning Do not repair or replace the seat stitching or seams in the seat back trim cover with an internal mounted seat side airbag module. Replace the complete seat back trim cover from the OEM. Non-OEM seat stitching may cause improper airbag deployment which could result in personal injury. Perform additional inspections on the following components. * Mounting points or mounting hardware for the side impact sensors, and driver/passenger side seat air bags on the side of impact-Inspect for any damage and repair or replace each component as needed. * Mounting points, mounting hardware, headliner and trim pieces for the left/right roof rail air bag on the side of impact-Inspect for any damage and repair or replace each component as needed. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Repairs and Inspections Required After a Collision > System Information > Service and Repair > Seat Belts > Page 10861 * Mounting points or mounting hardware for the SDM and seat belt anchor and/or retractor pretensioners-Inspect for any damage and repair or replace each component as needed. * The seat cushion frame * The seat recliner and cover, if equipped * The seat adjuster * The seat back frame * Door trim assembly * Impacted seat cushion side covers and switches Impact Sensor Replacement Guidelines The impact sensor replacement policy requires replacing sensors in the area of the accident damage. The area of accident damage is defined as the portion of the vehicle which is crushed, bent, or damaged due to a collision. An example of this would be a moderate collision where the front of the vehicle impacts a object. If the vehicle has an impact sensor mounted forward of the radiator, it must be replaced. * Replace the impact sensor whether or not the air bags have deployed. * Replace the impact sensor even if it appears to be undamaged. Impact sensor damage which is not visible, such as slight bending of the mounting bracket or cuts in the wire insulation, can cause improper operation of the SIR system. Do not try to determine whether the impact sensor is undamaged, replace the impact sensor. Also, if you follow a diagnostic trouble code (DTC) procedure and a malfunctioning impact sensor is indicated, replace the impact sensor. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Diagrams Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Diagrams P14 Passenger Air Bag Disable Indicator Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Diagrams > Page 10866 Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair SIR Disabling and Enabling SIR component location affects how a vehicle should be serviced. There are parts of the SIR system installed in various locations around a vehicle. To find the location of the SIR components refer to SIR Identification Views (See: Locations). There are several reasons for disabling the SIR system, such as repairs to the SIR system or servicing a component near or attached to an SIR component. There are several ways to disable the SIR system depending on what type of service is being performed. The following information covers the proper procedures for disabling/enabling the SIR system. SIR Service Precautions Warning When performing service on or near the SIR components or the SIR wiring, the SIR system must be disabled. Failure to observe the correct procedure could cause deployment of the SIR components. Serious injury can occur. Failure to observe the correct procedure could also result in unnecessary SIR system repairs. The inflatable restraint sensing and diagnostic module (SDM) maintains a reserved energy supply. The reserved energy supply provides deployment power for the air bags if the SDM loses battery power during a collision. Deployment power is available for as much as 1 minute after disconnecting the vehicle power. Waiting 1 minute before working on the system after disabling the SIR system prevents deployment of the air bags from the reserved energy supply. General Service Instructions The following are general service instructions which must be followed in order to properly repair the vehicle and return it to its original integrity: * Do not expose air bags to temperatures above 65°C (149°F). * Verify the correct replacement part number. Do not substitute a component from a different vehicle. * Use only original GM replacement parts available from your authorized GM dealer. Do not use salvaged parts for repairs to the SIR system. Discard any of the following components if it has been dropped from a height of 92 cm (3 feet) or greater: * Inflatable restraint sensing and diagnostic module (SDM) * Any air bag * Driver steering wheel air bag coil * Any impact sensor * Seat belt anchor and/or retractor pretensioners * Passenger presence module and/or occupant sensor Disabling Procedure - Air Bag Fuse 1. Turn the steering wheel so that the vehicles wheels are pointing straight ahead. 2. Place the ignition in the OFF position. Note: The SDM may have more than one fused power input. To ensure there is no unwanted SIR deployment, personal injury, or unnecessary SIR system repairs, remove all fuses supplying power to the SDM. With all SDM fuses removed and the ignition switch in the ON position, the AIR BAG warning indicator illuminates. This is normal operation, and does not indicate a SIR system malfunction. 3. Locate and remove the fuse(s) supplying power to the SDM. Refer to SIR Schematics (See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams) or Electrical Center Identification Views (See: Maintenance/Fuses and Circuit Breakers/Fuse/Application and ID). 4. Wait 1 minute before working on the system. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Diagrams > Page 10867 Enabling Procedure - Air Bag Fuse 1. Place the ignition in the OFF position. 2. Install the fuse(s) supplying power to the SDM. Refer to SIR Schematics (See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams) or Electrical Center Identification Views (See: Maintenance/Fuses and Circuit Breakers/Fuse/Application and ID). 3. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position. The AIR BAG indicator will flash then turn OFF. 4. Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle if the AIR BAG warning indicator does not operate as described. Refer to Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle (See: Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle). Disabling Procedure - Negative Battery Cable 1. Turn the steering wheel so that the vehicles wheels are pointing straight ahead. 2. Place the ignition in the OFF position. 3. Disconnect the negative battery cable from the battery. Refer to Battery Negative Cable Disconnection and Connection (See: Starting and Charging/Battery/Battery Cable/Negative/Service and Repair/Battery Negative Cable Disconnection and Connection). 4. Wait 1 minute before working on system. Enabling Procedure - Negative Battery Cable 1. Place the ignition in the OFF position. 2. Connect the negative battery cable to the battery. Refer to Battery Negative Cable Disconnection and Connection (See: Starting and Charging/Battery/Battery Cable/Negative/Service and Repair/Battery Negative Cable Disconnection and Connection). 3. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position. The AIR BAG indicator will flash then turn OFF. 4. Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle if the AIR BAG warning indicator does not operate as described. Refer to Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle (See: Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Air Bag Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Air Bag Harness: > 11-09-41-001 > Mar > 11 > Restraint System - SIR Light On, DTC B0014/B0021 Set Air Bag Harness: Customer Interest Restraint System - SIR Light On, DTC B0014/B0021 Set TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 11-09-41-001 Date: March 10, 2011 Subject: SIR Light On, DTC B0014 and/or B0021 Set in Sensing and Diagnostics Module (SDM) Models: 2010-2011 Chevrolet Equinox 2010-2011 GMC Terrain Condition Some customers may comment that the SIR light is on, or has been on recently. When checking the vehicle for DTCs, the SDM may report any of the following codes: B0014 02, B0014 04, B0014 0D, B0014 0E, B0021 02, B0021 04, B0021 0D or B0021 0E. This condition may be duplicated by moving the front seat forward and backward or by bouncing on the lower cushion on the affected side. Cause The codes can be set when the SDM senses a change in resistance in the circuit for the seat mounted side impact side airbag. The change in resistance can be small and it can be temporary, but the SDM can still sense the change and set a code. In this case, the airbags will work as intended in a crash but the system should be checked for the cause of the resistance change. The source of the issue can be at or in the connector that connects the airbag from the seat to the body harness. Connector X304 (B0014 LF Side Deployment Loop) is located under the driver seat cushion and connector X303 (B0021 RF Side Deployment Loop) is located under the passenger seat cushion. Correction Replace the driver and passenger seat back harness to seat cushion harness connectors with service kit, P/N 20968489. The two gray connector (Christmas tree style) retainers provided in the kit will not be used. The new connector will be secured to the seat using clip, P/N 19258316. Follow the steps below. Important DO NOT replace the sensing and diagnostic module (SDM), side sensors or air bag modules. Important Both driver and passenger seats must be repaired when this concern occurs even if only one DTC code is set. The service kit contains sufficient components to repair both seat connectors. 1. Disable the SIR system. Refer to SIR Disabling and Enabling in SI. Note Only use hand tools to remove the seat to floor mounting bolts. If there are any problems with bolt removal, refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 10-08-50-002. 2. Remove the seat to floor rear mounting bolts. Loosen the seat from the front hooks and tilt it back to expose the underside of the seat. Refer to Driver or Passenger Seat Replacement procedure in SI. 3. Disconnect the seat to body harness connector. Disconnect the seat airbag connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Air Bag Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Air Bag Harness: > 11-09-41-001 > Mar > 11 > Restraint System - SIR Light On, DTC B0014/B0021 Set > Page 10877 Important Note the wire colors on the seat airbag harness and body harness. Ensure that the wire colors are matched when installing into the new connector. 4. Cut both wires from the body harness connector and seat airbag harness connector as close to the connector housing (1) as possible to minimize wire length loss. Slide the conduit away on the seat airbag harness and remove just enough tape on the body harness to access the wires to install the terminals and seals. Important Use caution when stripping insulation. Take care not to cut through the wire strands. 5. Slide the wire seals onto all four leads back enough to enable removal of the insulation. Install the blue seals (1) on the seat back harness and the white seals (2) on the seat cushion harness. Strip the insulation off all four leads 5 mm (3/16 in). Align the seals with the wire insulation. 6. On the seat back harness, position two FEMALE terminals onto the wires. Caution must be used not to position the wire too far forward as it may interfere with the mating portion of the terminal. Crimp the terminals on to the bare wire using the J38125-7 crimp tool, jaw E (1). Repeat the procedure using two MALE terminals on the seat cushion harness. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Air Bag Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Air Bag Harness: > 11-09-41-001 > Mar > 11 > Restraint System - SIR Light On, DTC B0014/B0021 Set > Page 10878 7. Position the wire seal to the terminal and crimp the seal and insulation using the J-38125-6 crimp tool, jaw 1 (1). The completed terminal and seal should appear as shown above (seat back harness connector shown). Note Avoid getting solder on the terminal end or overheating the terminal. Warning DO NOT use soldering equipment that is battery or electric powered. These types of soldering irons can induce voltage into the circuit, which may cause inflator module deployment and/or damage to electrical components. Use only the EL-28125-5A Ultra Torch or another butane fueled soldering iron when working on SIR circuits. 8. Solder all four terminals at the wire crimp. 9. Slide the two body harness terminals through the opening of the orange connector position assurance (CPA) (1). Important Ensure that the appropriate wire colors match up (as noted in Step 4) when the connection is made between the seat airbag harness and body harness. 10. Slide all four terminals (2) into the appropriate connector body as shown above. Install the blue terminal position assurance (TPA) devices onto the connector ends. 11. Add NyoGel 760 Lubricant, P/N 12377900 (in Canada, use P/N 10953529) to the terminals on both sides of the connections. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Air Bag Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Air Bag Harness: > 11-09-41-001 > Mar > 11 > Restraint System - SIR Light On, DTC B0014/B0021 Set > Page 10879 12. Wrap anti-abrasion electrical tape around the two exposed wires on the body harness up to the back of the connector. Obtain "*Woven Polyester (PET) Electrical Tape" (Special Order PN RZ97156A00) from Kent Automotive. Refer to Parts Information below. Reinstall the conduit on the seat airbag harness. 13. Attach the connector to the bottom of the seat using clip, P/N 19258316. 14. Reinstall the seat. Refer to Driver or Passenger Seat Replacement procedure in SI. 15. Repeat the above procedure on the other seat. 16. Enable the SIR system. Refer to SIR Disabling and Enabling in SI. 17. Turn the ignition on and use the diagnostic tool to clear the SDM DTCs and verify that the issue has been corrected. If the code is still current, refer to the appropriate diagnostic procedure found in SI. *We believe this source and their products to be reliable. There may be additional manufacturers of such products/materials. General Motors does not endorse, indicate any preference for or assume any responsibility for the products or material from this firm or for any such items that may be available from other sources. Parts Information Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Air Bag Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Air Bag Harness: > 11-09-41-001 > Mar > 11 > Restraint System - SIR Light On, DTC B0014/B0021 Set Air Bag Harness: All Technical Service Bulletins Restraint System - SIR Light On, DTC B0014/B0021 Set TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 11-09-41-001 Date: March 10, 2011 Subject: SIR Light On, DTC B0014 and/or B0021 Set in Sensing and Diagnostics Module (SDM) Models: 2010-2011 Chevrolet Equinox 2010-2011 GMC Terrain Condition Some customers may comment that the SIR light is on, or has been on recently. When checking the vehicle for DTCs, the SDM may report any of the following codes: B0014 02, B0014 04, B0014 0D, B0014 0E, B0021 02, B0021 04, B0021 0D or B0021 0E. This condition may be duplicated by moving the front seat forward and backward or by bouncing on the lower cushion on the affected side. Cause The codes can be set when the SDM senses a change in resistance in the circuit for the seat mounted side impact side airbag. The change in resistance can be small and it can be temporary, but the SDM can still sense the change and set a code. In this case, the airbags will work as intended in a crash but the system should be checked for the cause of the resistance change. The source of the issue can be at or in the connector that connects the airbag from the seat to the body harness. Connector X304 (B0014 LF Side Deployment Loop) is located under the driver seat cushion and connector X303 (B0021 RF Side Deployment Loop) is located under the passenger seat cushion. Correction Replace the driver and passenger seat back harness to seat cushion harness connectors with service kit, P/N 20968489. The two gray connector (Christmas tree style) retainers provided in the kit will not be used. The new connector will be secured to the seat using clip, P/N 19258316. Follow the steps below. Important DO NOT replace the sensing and diagnostic module (SDM), side sensors or air bag modules. Important Both driver and passenger seats must be repaired when this concern occurs even if only one DTC code is set. The service kit contains sufficient components to repair both seat connectors. 1. Disable the SIR system. Refer to SIR Disabling and Enabling in SI. Note Only use hand tools to remove the seat to floor mounting bolts. If there are any problems with bolt removal, refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 10-08-50-002. 2. Remove the seat to floor rear mounting bolts. Loosen the seat from the front hooks and tilt it back to expose the underside of the seat. Refer to Driver or Passenger Seat Replacement procedure in SI. 3. Disconnect the seat to body harness connector. Disconnect the seat airbag connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Air Bag Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Air Bag Harness: > 11-09-41-001 > Mar > 11 > Restraint System - SIR Light On, DTC B0014/B0021 Set > Page 10885 Important Note the wire colors on the seat airbag harness and body harness. Ensure that the wire colors are matched when installing into the new connector. 4. Cut both wires from the body harness connector and seat airbag harness connector as close to the connector housing (1) as possible to minimize wire length loss. Slide the conduit away on the seat airbag harness and remove just enough tape on the body harness to access the wires to install the terminals and seals. Important Use caution when stripping insulation. Take care not to cut through the wire strands. 5. Slide the wire seals onto all four leads back enough to enable removal of the insulation. Install the blue seals (1) on the seat back harness and the white seals (2) on the seat cushion harness. Strip the insulation off all four leads 5 mm (3/16 in). Align the seals with the wire insulation. 6. On the seat back harness, position two FEMALE terminals onto the wires. Caution must be used not to position the wire too far forward as it may interfere with the mating portion of the terminal. Crimp the terminals on to the bare wire using the J38125-7 crimp tool, jaw E (1). Repeat the procedure using two MALE terminals on the seat cushion harness. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Air Bag Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Air Bag Harness: > 11-09-41-001 > Mar > 11 > Restraint System - SIR Light On, DTC B0014/B0021 Set > Page 10886 7. Position the wire seal to the terminal and crimp the seal and insulation using the J-38125-6 crimp tool, jaw 1 (1). The completed terminal and seal should appear as shown above (seat back harness connector shown). Note Avoid getting solder on the terminal end or overheating the terminal. Warning DO NOT use soldering equipment that is battery or electric powered. These types of soldering irons can induce voltage into the circuit, which may cause inflator module deployment and/or damage to electrical components. Use only the EL-28125-5A Ultra Torch or another butane fueled soldering iron when working on SIR circuits. 8. Solder all four terminals at the wire crimp. 9. Slide the two body harness terminals through the opening of the orange connector position assurance (CPA) (1). Important Ensure that the appropriate wire colors match up (as noted in Step 4) when the connection is made between the seat airbag harness and body harness. 10. Slide all four terminals (2) into the appropriate connector body as shown above. Install the blue terminal position assurance (TPA) devices onto the connector ends. 11. Add NyoGel 760 Lubricant, P/N 12377900 (in Canada, use P/N 10953529) to the terminals on both sides of the connections. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Air Bag Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Air Bag Harness: > 11-09-41-001 > Mar > 11 > Restraint System - SIR Light On, DTC B0014/B0021 Set > Page 10887 12. Wrap anti-abrasion electrical tape around the two exposed wires on the body harness up to the back of the connector. Obtain "*Woven Polyester (PET) Electrical Tape" (Special Order PN RZ97156A00) from Kent Automotive. Refer to Parts Information below. Reinstall the conduit on the seat airbag harness. 13. Attach the connector to the bottom of the seat using clip, P/N 19258316. 14. Reinstall the seat. Refer to Driver or Passenger Seat Replacement procedure in SI. 15. Repeat the above procedure on the other seat. 16. Enable the SIR system. Refer to SIR Disabling and Enabling in SI. 17. Turn the ignition on and use the diagnostic tool to clear the SDM DTCs and verify that the issue has been corrected. If the code is still current, refer to the appropriate diagnostic procedure found in SI. *We believe this source and their products to be reliable. There may be additional manufacturers of such products/materials. General Motors does not endorse, indicate any preference for or assume any responsibility for the products or material from this firm or for any such items that may be available from other sources. Parts Information Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Locations > SIR Identification Views Air Bag Control Module: Locations SIR Identification Views SIR Identification Views The SIR Identification Views shown below illustrate the approximate location of all SIR components available for the vehicle. This will assist in determining the appropriate SIR Disabling and Enabling for a given service procedure. Refer to SIR Disabling and Enabling (See: Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming/Service and Repair). 1 - Front End Sensor - Right-Located under the front hood in the engine compartment 2 Instrument Panel Air Bag-Located at the top right under the instrument panel 3 - Roof Rail Air Bag Right-Located under the headliner, extending from the passenger front windshield pillar to the passenger rear windshield pillar 4 - Right Front Side Impact Sensor-Located under the right front door trim near the lower rear of the door frame 5 - Inflatable Restraint Sensing and Diagnostic Module (SDM)-Located underneath the vehicle carpet under the center console 6 - Passenger Presence Detection System-Located under the front passenger sear trim cover (if equipped) 7 Right Front Seat Belt Anchor Tensioner-Located on the outboard side of the passenger seat (if equipped) 8 - Passenger Side Seat Impact Air Bag-Located on the seat back of passenger seat (if equipped) 9 - Right Front Seat Belt Retractor Pretensioner-Located under the trim near the bottom of the center pillar 10 - Right Rear Side Impact Sensor-Located under the right rear door trim near the lower rear of the door frame 11 - Right Roof Rail Module-Located behind the garnish molding on the upper rear pillar 12 - Left Roof Rail Module-Located behind garnish molding on the upper rear pillar 13 - Left Rear Side Impact Sensor-Located under the left rear door trim near the lower rear of the door frame 14 - Left Front Seat Belt Retractor Pretensioner-Located under the trim near the bottom of the center pillar 15 - Driver Side Seat Impact Air Bag-Located on the seat back of the driver seat 16 - Left Front Seat belt Anchor Tensioner-Located on the outboard side of the driver seat 17 - Left Front Side Impact Sensor-Located under the left front door trim near the lower rear of the door frame 18 - Left Roof Rail Air Bag-Located under the headliner, extending from the driver front windshield pillar to the driver rear windshield pillar 19 - Steering Wheel Air Bag-Located on the steering wheel 20 - Vehicle Battery-Located at the front left of the engine compartment. 21 - Left Front End Sensor-Located under the front hood in the engine compartment Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Locations > SIR Identification Views > Page 10892 Air Bag Control Module: Locations Passenger Compartment/Roof Component Views Passenger Compartment/Roof Component Views Left Side of the Passenger Compartment Components 1 - F105R Roof Rail Air Bag - Right 2 - F105L Roof Rail Air Bag - Left 3 - K36 Inflatable Restraint Sensing and Diagnostic Module 4 - B119 Multi-axis Acceleration Sensor Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 10893 Air Bag Control Module: Diagrams K36 Inflatable Restraint Sensing and Diagnostic Module X1 K36 Inflatable Restraint Sensing and Diagnostic Module X2 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 10894 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 10895 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 10896 Air Bag Control Module: Service and Repair Inflatable Restraint Sensing and Diagnostic Module Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable, Air Bag > Component Information > Diagrams Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable: Diagrams X85 Steering Wheel Air Bag Coil X1 X85 Steering Wheel Air Bag Coil X2 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable, Air Bag > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 10900 X85 Steering Wheel Air Bag Coil X3 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable, Air Bag > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 10901 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable, Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable: Procedures Inflatable Restraint Steering Wheel Module Coil Centering Caution: The new SIR coil assembly will be centered. Improper alignment of the SIR coil assembly may damage the unit, causing an inflatable restraint malfunction. 1. Verify the following conditions before centering the supplemental inflatable restraint (SIR) steering wheel module coil: * The wheels on the vehicle are straight ahead. * The centering mark (1) of the steering shaft is in the 6 o'clock position. 2. Turn the lobe of the clock spring clockwise until the coil ribbon stops. Do not force. 3. Turn the lobe of the clock spring counterclockwise approximately 3 turns to the Neutral position. 4. Properly align until the centering window turns yellow (1). This indicates the CENTER position. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable, Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 10904 Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable: Removal and Replacement Steering Wheel Inflatable Restraint Module Coil Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > SIR Identification Views Impact Sensor: Locations SIR Identification Views SIR Identification Views The SIR Identification Views shown below illustrate the approximate location of all SIR components available for the vehicle. This will assist in determining the appropriate SIR Disabling and Enabling for a given service procedure. Refer to SIR Disabling and Enabling (See: Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming/Service and Repair). 1 - Front End Sensor - Right-Located under the front hood in the engine compartment 2 Instrument Panel Air Bag-Located at the top right under the instrument panel 3 - Roof Rail Air Bag Right-Located under the headliner, extending from the passenger front windshield pillar to the passenger rear windshield pillar 4 - Right Front Side Impact Sensor-Located under the right front door trim near the lower rear of the door frame 5 - Inflatable Restraint Sensing and Diagnostic Module (SDM)-Located underneath the vehicle carpet under the center console 6 - Passenger Presence Detection System-Located under the front passenger sear trim cover (if equipped) 7 Right Front Seat Belt Anchor Tensioner-Located on the outboard side of the passenger seat (if equipped) 8 - Passenger Side Seat Impact Air Bag-Located on the seat back of passenger seat (if equipped) 9 - Right Front Seat Belt Retractor Pretensioner-Located under the trim near the bottom of the center pillar 10 - Right Rear Side Impact Sensor-Located under the right rear door trim near the lower rear of the door frame 11 - Right Roof Rail Module-Located behind the garnish molding on the upper rear pillar 12 - Left Roof Rail Module-Located behind garnish molding on the upper rear pillar 13 - Left Rear Side Impact Sensor-Located under the left rear door trim near the lower rear of the door frame 14 - Left Front Seat Belt Retractor Pretensioner-Located under the trim near the bottom of the center pillar 15 - Driver Side Seat Impact Air Bag-Located on the seat back of the driver seat 16 - Left Front Seat belt Anchor Tensioner-Located on the outboard side of the driver seat 17 - Left Front Side Impact Sensor-Located under the left front door trim near the lower rear of the door frame 18 - Left Roof Rail Air Bag-Located under the headliner, extending from the driver front windshield pillar to the driver rear windshield pillar 19 - Steering Wheel Air Bag-Located on the steering wheel 20 - Vehicle Battery-Located at the front left of the engine compartment. 21 - Left Front End Sensor-Located under the front hood in the engine compartment Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > SIR Identification Views > Page 10909 Impact Sensor: Locations Door Component Views Door Component Views Driver Door Components 1 - A23D Door Latch Assembly - Driver 2 - A9A Outside Rearview Mirror - Driver 3 - E1C Accent Lamp - Driver Door Handle (LTZ or SLT) 4 - K96L Mirror Control Module - Left (LTZ or SLT) 5 S52S Outside Rearview Mirror Switch 6 - P19G Speaker - Left Front 7 - M74D Window Motor Driver 8 - B63LF Side Impact Sensor - Left Front 9 - S79D Window Switch - Driver 10 - E1D Accent Lamp - Driver Door (LTZ or SLT) Passenger Door Components Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > SIR Identification Views > Page 10910 1 - A9B Outside Rearview Mirror - Passenger 2 - E1M Accent Lamp - Passenger Door Handle (LTZ or SLT) 3 - S79P Window Switch - Passenger 4 - A23P Door Latch Assembly - Passenger 5 - E1P Accent Lamp - Passenger Door (LTZ or SLT) 6 - B63RF Side Impact Sensor - Right Front 7 M74P Window Motor - Passenger 8 - P19U Speaker - Right Front Left Rear Door Components Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > SIR Identification Views > Page 10911 1 - A23LR Door Latch Assembly - Left Rear 2 - S79LR Window Switch - Left Rear 3 - M74LR Window Motor - Left Rear 4 - P19K Speaker - Left Rear 5 - B63LR Side Impact Sensor - Left Rear Right Rear Door Components Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > SIR Identification Views > Page 10912 1 - S79RR Window Switch - Right Rear 2 - A23RR Door Latch Assembly - Right Rear 3 - M74RR Window Motor - Right Rear 4 - B63RR Side Impact Sensor - Right Rear 5 - P19X Speaker - Right Rear Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 10913 Impact Sensor: Diagrams B59L Front Impact Sensor - Left B59R Front Impact Sensor - Right Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 10914 B63LF Side Impact Sensor - Left Front Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 10915 B63LR Side Impact Sensor - Left Rear Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 10916 B63RF Side Impact Sensor - Right Front Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 10917 B63RR Side Impact Sensor - Right Rear Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 10918 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front End Inflatable Restraint Discriminating Sensor Replacement Impact Sensor: Service and Repair Front End Inflatable Restraint Discriminating Sensor Replacement Front End Inflatable Restraint Discriminating Sensor Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front End Inflatable Restraint Discriminating Sensor Replacement > Page 10921 Impact Sensor: Service and Repair Inflatable Restraint Side Impact Sensor Replacement - Front Side Door Inflatable Restraint Side Impact Sensor Replacement - Front Side Door Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front End Inflatable Restraint Discriminating Sensor Replacement > Page 10922 Impact Sensor: Service and Repair Inflatable Restraint Side Impact Sensor Replacement - Rear Side Door Inflatable Restraint Side Impact Sensor Replacement - Rear Side Door Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Restraint Systems - Accessory Electrical Interference Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag: Technical Service Bulletins Restraint Systems Accessory Electrical Interference INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 08-09-41-007D Date: January 28, 2011 Subject: Passenger Presence System (PPS) May Command Passenger Airbag Indicator and Seat Belt Reminder On When Electronic Devices (Computers, MP3 Players, Cell Phones, Diagnostic Scan Tool, etc.) Are Placed on Front Passenger Seat, DTCs 5045, B0074 0F, B101D or B0081 Set Models: 2009-2011 Buick Enclave 2009-2011 Cadillac CTS 2010-2011 Cadillac SRX 2009-2011 Chevrolet Cobalt (except SS model), HHR (except SS model), Impala, Traverse 2010-2011 Chevrolet Equinox 2009-2011 GMC Acadia 2010-2011 GMC Terrain 2009-2010 Saturn OUTLOOK 2010 Saturn VUE ' Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2011 model year. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 08-09-41-007C (Section 09 - Restraints). Dealers should be aware that when certain electronic devices (computers, MP3 players, cell phones, Tech 2(R), etc.) are placed on the front passenger seat, the front passenger airbag indicator may illuminate. The seat belt reminder light/chime may also be activated. This is due to the fact that some electronic devices placed on the front passenger seat may interfere with the electric field generated by the PPS system, causing it to enable (turn ON) the passenger airbag and turn on the safety belt reminder light and chime - even though the seat is not occupied. The electronic device does not necessarily need to be turned on to cause this condition. DTCs 5045, B0081 0F, B0074 0F or B101D may set depending on the vehicle. If you remove the electronic device from the front passenger seat, the DTC will go into history. If this happens, clear all SDM and PPS DTCs. If the DTC is still current, follow the service procedure in SI for that DTC. If the DTCs do not return, no repair is needed (do not replace any parts for this condition). Note Never rest the diagnostic scan tool or components on the passenger front seat or touch the passenger front seat while the diagnostic scan tool is in contact with your body. This may cause the SIR lamp to illuminate while holding the diagnostic scan tool because your body can transfer the electronic "noise" to the sensor mat in the passenger front seat. Please advise the customer to avoid placing the electronic device in the front passenger seat in the future. Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Restraint Systems - Accessory Electrical Interference Seat Occupant Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins Restraint Systems - Accessory Electrical Interference INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 08-09-41-007D Date: January 28, 2011 Subject: Passenger Presence System (PPS) May Command Passenger Airbag Indicator and Seat Belt Reminder On When Electronic Devices (Computers, MP3 Players, Cell Phones, Diagnostic Scan Tool, etc.) Are Placed on Front Passenger Seat, DTCs 5045, B0074 0F, B101D or B0081 Set Models: 2009-2011 Buick Enclave 2009-2011 Cadillac CTS 2010-2011 Cadillac SRX 2009-2011 Chevrolet Cobalt (except SS model), HHR (except SS model), Impala, Traverse 2010-2011 Chevrolet Equinox 2009-2011 GMC Acadia 2010-2011 GMC Terrain 2009-2010 Saturn OUTLOOK 2010 Saturn VUE ' Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2011 model year. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 08-09-41-007C (Section 09 - Restraints). Dealers should be aware that when certain electronic devices (computers, MP3 players, cell phones, Tech 2(R), etc.) are placed on the front passenger seat, the front passenger airbag indicator may illuminate. The seat belt reminder light/chime may also be activated. This is due to the fact that some electronic devices placed on the front passenger seat may interfere with the electric field generated by the PPS system, causing it to enable (turn ON) the passenger airbag and turn on the safety belt reminder light and chime - even though the seat is not occupied. The electronic device does not necessarily need to be turned on to cause this condition. DTCs 5045, B0081 0F, B0074 0F or B101D may set depending on the vehicle. If you remove the electronic device from the front passenger seat, the DTC will go into history. If this happens, clear all SDM and PPS DTCs. If the DTC is still current, follow the service procedure in SI for that DTC. If the DTCs do not return, no repair is needed (do not replace any parts for this condition). Note Never rest the diagnostic scan tool or components on the passenger front seat or touch the passenger front seat while the diagnostic scan tool is in contact with your body. This may cause the SIR lamp to illuminate while holding the diagnostic scan tool because your body can transfer the electronic "noise" to the sensor mat in the passenger front seat. Please advise the customer to avoid placing the electronic device in the front passenger seat in the future. Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Restraint Systems - Accessory Electrical Interference > Page 10931 Seat Occupant Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins Restraints - Passenger Presence System Information INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 06-08-50-009F Date: December 23, 2010 Subject: Information on Passenger Presence Sensing System (PPS or PSS) Concerns With Custom Upholstery, Accessory Seat Heaters or Other Comfort Enhancing Devices Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks Equipped with Passenger Presence Sensing System Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 06-08-50-009E (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Concerns About Safety and Alterations to the Front Passenger Seat Important ON A GM VEHICLE EQUIPPED WITH A PASSENGER SENSING SYSTEM, USE THE SEAT COVERS AND OTHER SEAT-RELATED EQUIPMENT AS RELEASED BY GM FOR THAT VEHICLE. DO NOT ALTER THE SEAT COVERS OR SEAT-RELATED EQUIPMENT. ANY ALTERATIONS TO SEAT COVERS OR GM ACCESSORIES DEFEATS THE INTENDED DESIGN OF THE SYSTEM. GM WILL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY PROBLEMS CAUSED BY USE OF SUCH IMPROPER SEAT ALTERATIONS, INCLUDING ANY WARRANTY REPAIRS INCURRED. The front passenger seat in many GM vehicles is equipped with a passenger sensing system that will turn off the right front passenger's frontal airbag under certain conditions, such as when an infant or child seat is present. In some vehicles, the passenger sensing system will also turn off the right front passenger's seat mounted side impact airbag. For the system to function properly, sensors are used in the seat to detect the presence of a properly-seated occupant. The passenger sensing system may not operate properly if the original seat trim is replaced (1) by non-GM covers, upholstery or trim, or (2) by GM covers, upholstery or trim designed for a different vehicle or (3) by GM covers, upholstery or trim that has been altered by a trim shop, or (4) if any object, such as an aftermarket seat heater or a comfort enhancing pad or device is installed under the seat fabric or between the occupant and the seat fabric. Aftermarket Seat Heaters, Custom Upholstery, and Comfort Enhancing Pads or Devices Important ON A GM VEHICLE EQUIPPED WITH A PASSENGER SENSING SYSTEM, USE ONLY SEAT COVERS AND OTHER SEAT-RELATED EQUIPMENT RELEASED AS GM ACCESSORIES FOR THAT VEHICLE. DO NOT USE ANY OTHER TYPE OF SEAT COVERS OR SEAT-RELATED EQUIPMENT, OR GM ACCESSORIES RELEASED FOR OTHER VEHICLE APPLICATIONS. GM WILL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY PROBLEMS CAUSED BY USE OF SUCH IMPROPER SEAT ACCESSORIES, INCLUDING ANY WARRANTY REPAIRS MADE NECESSARY BY SUCH USE. Many types of aftermarket accessories are available to customers, upfitting shops, and dealers. Some of these devices sit on top of, or are Velcro(R) strapped to the seat while others such as seat heaters are installed under the seat fabric. Additionally, seat covers made of leather or other materials may have different padding thickness installed that could prevent the Passenger Sensing System from functioning properly. Never alter the vehicle seats. Never add pads or other devices to the seat cushion, as this may interfere with the operation of the Passenger Sensing System and either prevent proper deployment of the passenger airbag or prevent proper suppression of the passenger air bag. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 10932 Seat Occupant Sensor: Locations Passenger Compartment/Roof Component Views Passenger Seat Components 1 - F106R Side Air Bag - Right 2 - P22F Video Display - Passenger Seatback (UWG) 3 - E14C Seat Heating Element - Passenger Back (KA1) 4 - B88P Seat Belt Switch - Passenger 5 - K85 Passenger Presence Detection Module 6 - E14D Seat Heating Element - Passenger Cushion (KA1) 7 - F113P Seat Belt Anchor Pretensioner - Passenger Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 10933 Seat Occupant Sensor: Diagrams K85 Passenger Presence Detection Module Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 10934 Seat Occupant Sensor: Service and Repair Inflatable Restraint Front Passenger Presence Sensor Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Side Air Bag > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Side Air Bag: > 11-09-41-001 > Mar > 11 > Restraint System - SIR Light On, DTC B0014/B0021 Set Side Air Bag: Customer Interest Restraint System - SIR Light On, DTC B0014/B0021 Set TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 11-09-41-001 Date: March 10, 2011 Subject: SIR Light On, DTC B0014 and/or B0021 Set in Sensing and Diagnostics Module (SDM) Models: 2010-2011 Chevrolet Equinox 2010-2011 GMC Terrain Condition Some customers may comment that the SIR light is on, or has been on recently. When checking the vehicle for DTCs, the SDM may report any of the following codes: B0014 02, B0014 04, B0014 0D, B0014 0E, B0021 02, B0021 04, B0021 0D or B0021 0E. This condition may be duplicated by moving the front seat forward and backward or by bouncing on the lower cushion on the affected side. Cause The codes can be set when the SDM senses a change in resistance in the circuit for the seat mounted side impact side airbag. The change in resistance can be small and it can be temporary, but the SDM can still sense the change and set a code. In this case, the airbags will work as intended in a crash but the system should be checked for the cause of the resistance change. The source of the issue can be at or in the connector that connects the airbag from the seat to the body harness. Connector X304 (B0014 LF Side Deployment Loop) is located under the driver seat cushion and connector X303 (B0021 RF Side Deployment Loop) is located under the passenger seat cushion. Correction Replace the driver and passenger seat back harness to seat cushion harness connectors with service kit, P/N 20968489. The two gray connector (Christmas tree style) retainers provided in the kit will not be used. The new connector will be secured to the seat using clip, P/N 19258316. Follow the steps below. Important DO NOT replace the sensing and diagnostic module (SDM), side sensors or air bag modules. Important Both driver and passenger seats must be repaired when this concern occurs even if only one DTC code is set. The service kit contains sufficient components to repair both seat connectors. 1. Disable the SIR system. Refer to SIR Disabling and Enabling in SI. Note Only use hand tools to remove the seat to floor mounting bolts. If there are any problems with bolt removal, refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 10-08-50-002. 2. Remove the seat to floor rear mounting bolts. Loosen the seat from the front hooks and tilt it back to expose the underside of the seat. Refer to Driver or Passenger Seat Replacement procedure in SI. 3. Disconnect the seat to body harness connector. Disconnect the seat airbag connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Side Air Bag > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Side Air Bag: > 11-09-41-001 > Mar > 11 > Restraint System - SIR Light On, DTC B0014/B0021 Set > Page 10943 Important Note the wire colors on the seat airbag harness and body harness. Ensure that the wire colors are matched when installing into the new connector. 4. Cut both wires from the body harness connector and seat airbag harness connector as close to the connector housing (1) as possible to minimize wire length loss. Slide the conduit away on the seat airbag harness and remove just enough tape on the body harness to access the wires to install the terminals and seals. Important Use caution when stripping insulation. Take care not to cut through the wire strands. 5. Slide the wire seals onto all four leads back enough to enable removal of the insulation. Install the blue seals (1) on the seat back harness and the white seals (2) on the seat cushion harness. Strip the insulation off all four leads 5 mm (3/16 in). Align the seals with the wire insulation. 6. On the seat back harness, position two FEMALE terminals onto the wires. Caution must be used not to position the wire too far forward as it may interfere with the mating portion of the terminal. Crimp the terminals on to the bare wire using the J38125-7 crimp tool, jaw E (1). Repeat the procedure using two MALE terminals on the seat cushion harness. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Side Air Bag > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Side Air Bag: > 11-09-41-001 > Mar > 11 > Restraint System - SIR Light On, DTC B0014/B0021 Set > Page 10944 7. Position the wire seal to the terminal and crimp the seal and insulation using the J-38125-6 crimp tool, jaw 1 (1). The completed terminal and seal should appear as shown above (seat back harness connector shown). Note Avoid getting solder on the terminal end or overheating the terminal. Warning DO NOT use soldering equipment that is battery or electric powered. These types of soldering irons can induce voltage into the circuit, which may cause inflator module deployment and/or damage to electrical components. Use only the EL-28125-5A Ultra Torch or another butane fueled soldering iron when working on SIR circuits. 8. Solder all four terminals at the wire crimp. 9. Slide the two body harness terminals through the opening of the orange connector position assurance (CPA) (1). Important Ensure that the appropriate wire colors match up (as noted in Step 4) when the connection is made between the seat airbag harness and body harness. 10. Slide all four terminals (2) into the appropriate connector body as shown above. Install the blue terminal position assurance (TPA) devices onto the connector ends. 11. Add NyoGel 760 Lubricant, P/N 12377900 (in Canada, use P/N 10953529) to the terminals on both sides of the connections. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Side Air Bag > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Side Air Bag: > 11-09-41-001 > Mar > 11 > Restraint System - SIR Light On, DTC B0014/B0021 Set > Page 10945 12. Wrap anti-abrasion electrical tape around the two exposed wires on the body harness up to the back of the connector. Obtain "*Woven Polyester (PET) Electrical Tape" (Special Order PN RZ97156A00) from Kent Automotive. Refer to Parts Information below. Reinstall the conduit on the seat airbag harness. 13. Attach the connector to the bottom of the seat using clip, P/N 19258316. 14. Reinstall the seat. Refer to Driver or Passenger Seat Replacement procedure in SI. 15. Repeat the above procedure on the other seat. 16. Enable the SIR system. Refer to SIR Disabling and Enabling in SI. 17. Turn the ignition on and use the diagnostic tool to clear the SDM DTCs and verify that the issue has been corrected. If the code is still current, refer to the appropriate diagnostic procedure found in SI. *We believe this source and their products to be reliable. There may be additional manufacturers of such products/materials. General Motors does not endorse, indicate any preference for or assume any responsibility for the products or material from this firm or for any such items that may be available from other sources. Parts Information Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Side Air Bag > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Side Air Bag: > 11-09-41-001 > Mar > 11 > Restraint System - SIR Light On, DTC B0014/B0021 Set Side Air Bag: All Technical Service Bulletins Restraint System - SIR Light On, DTC B0014/B0021 Set TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 11-09-41-001 Date: March 10, 2011 Subject: SIR Light On, DTC B0014 and/or B0021 Set in Sensing and Diagnostics Module (SDM) Models: 2010-2011 Chevrolet Equinox 2010-2011 GMC Terrain Condition Some customers may comment that the SIR light is on, or has been on recently. When checking the vehicle for DTCs, the SDM may report any of the following codes: B0014 02, B0014 04, B0014 0D, B0014 0E, B0021 02, B0021 04, B0021 0D or B0021 0E. This condition may be duplicated by moving the front seat forward and backward or by bouncing on the lower cushion on the affected side. Cause The codes can be set when the SDM senses a change in resistance in the circuit for the seat mounted side impact side airbag. The change in resistance can be small and it can be temporary, but the SDM can still sense the change and set a code. In this case, the airbags will work as intended in a crash but the system should be checked for the cause of the resistance change. The source of the issue can be at or in the connector that connects the airbag from the seat to the body harness. Connector X304 (B0014 LF Side Deployment Loop) is located under the driver seat cushion and connector X303 (B0021 RF Side Deployment Loop) is located under the passenger seat cushion. Correction Replace the driver and passenger seat back harness to seat cushion harness connectors with service kit, P/N 20968489. The two gray connector (Christmas tree style) retainers provided in the kit will not be used. The new connector will be secured to the seat using clip, P/N 19258316. Follow the steps below. Important DO NOT replace the sensing and diagnostic module (SDM), side sensors or air bag modules. Important Both driver and passenger seats must be repaired when this concern occurs even if only one DTC code is set. The service kit contains sufficient components to repair both seat connectors. 1. Disable the SIR system. Refer to SIR Disabling and Enabling in SI. Note Only use hand tools to remove the seat to floor mounting bolts. If there are any problems with bolt removal, refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 10-08-50-002. 2. Remove the seat to floor rear mounting bolts. Loosen the seat from the front hooks and tilt it back to expose the underside of the seat. Refer to Driver or Passenger Seat Replacement procedure in SI. 3. Disconnect the seat to body harness connector. Disconnect the seat airbag connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Side Air Bag > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Side Air Bag: > 11-09-41-001 > Mar > 11 > Restraint System - SIR Light On, DTC B0014/B0021 Set > Page 10951 Important Note the wire colors on the seat airbag harness and body harness. Ensure that the wire colors are matched when installing into the new connector. 4. Cut both wires from the body harness connector and seat airbag harness connector as close to the connector housing (1) as possible to minimize wire length loss. Slide the conduit away on the seat airbag harness and remove just enough tape on the body harness to access the wires to install the terminals and seals. Important Use caution when stripping insulation. Take care not to cut through the wire strands. 5. Slide the wire seals onto all four leads back enough to enable removal of the insulation. Install the blue seals (1) on the seat back harness and the white seals (2) on the seat cushion harness. Strip the insulation off all four leads 5 mm (3/16 in). Align the seals with the wire insulation. 6. On the seat back harness, position two FEMALE terminals onto the wires. Caution must be used not to position the wire too far forward as it may interfere with the mating portion of the terminal. Crimp the terminals on to the bare wire using the J38125-7 crimp tool, jaw E (1). Repeat the procedure using two MALE terminals on the seat cushion harness. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Side Air Bag > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Side Air Bag: > 11-09-41-001 > Mar > 11 > Restraint System - SIR Light On, DTC B0014/B0021 Set > Page 10952 7. Position the wire seal to the terminal and crimp the seal and insulation using the J-38125-6 crimp tool, jaw 1 (1). The completed terminal and seal should appear as shown above (seat back harness connector shown). Note Avoid getting solder on the terminal end or overheating the terminal. Warning DO NOT use soldering equipment that is battery or electric powered. These types of soldering irons can induce voltage into the circuit, which may cause inflator module deployment and/or damage to electrical components. Use only the EL-28125-5A Ultra Torch or another butane fueled soldering iron when working on SIR circuits. 8. Solder all four terminals at the wire crimp. 9. Slide the two body harness terminals through the opening of the orange connector position assurance (CPA) (1). Important Ensure that the appropriate wire colors match up (as noted in Step 4) when the connection is made between the seat airbag harness and body harness. 10. Slide all four terminals (2) into the appropriate connector body as shown above. Install the blue terminal position assurance (TPA) devices onto the connector ends. 11. Add NyoGel 760 Lubricant, P/N 12377900 (in Canada, use P/N 10953529) to the terminals on both sides of the connections. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Side Air Bag > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Side Air Bag: > 11-09-41-001 > Mar > 11 > Restraint System - SIR Light On, DTC B0014/B0021 Set > Page 10953 12. Wrap anti-abrasion electrical tape around the two exposed wires on the body harness up to the back of the connector. Obtain "*Woven Polyester (PET) Electrical Tape" (Special Order PN RZ97156A00) from Kent Automotive. Refer to Parts Information below. Reinstall the conduit on the seat airbag harness. 13. Attach the connector to the bottom of the seat using clip, P/N 19258316. 14. Reinstall the seat. Refer to Driver or Passenger Seat Replacement procedure in SI. 15. Repeat the above procedure on the other seat. 16. Enable the SIR system. Refer to SIR Disabling and Enabling in SI. 17. Turn the ignition on and use the diagnostic tool to clear the SDM DTCs and verify that the issue has been corrected. If the code is still current, refer to the appropriate diagnostic procedure found in SI. *We believe this source and their products to be reliable. There may be additional manufacturers of such products/materials. General Motors does not endorse, indicate any preference for or assume any responsibility for the products or material from this firm or for any such items that may be available from other sources. Parts Information Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Malfunction Lamp / Indicator, Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair Malfunction Lamp / Indicator: Service and Repair Inflatable Restraint Instrument Panel Module Indicator Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Head Restraint System > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Restraints - Driver/Passenger Seat Head Rest Information Head Restraint System: Technical Service Bulletins Restraints - Driver/Passenger Seat Head Rest Information INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 10-08-50-003A Date: March 24, 2011 Subject: Information on Driver or Passenger Seat Head Restraint Concerns with Comfort, Custom Upholstery or Other Comfort Enhancing Devices Models: 2012 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks Equipped with Adjustable Head Restraints Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 10-08-50-003 (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Important ON A GM VEHICLE EQUIPPED WITH ADJUSTABLE HEAD RESTRAINTS, USE THE HEAD RESTRAINT COVERS, FOAM AND OTHER SEAT-RELATED EQUIPMENT AS RELEASED BY GM FOR THAT VEHICLE. DO NOT ALTER OR REPOSITION THE HEAD RESTRAINT SYSTEM. ANY ALTERATIONS TO HEAD RESTRAINTS DEFEATS THE INTENDED DESIGN OF THE SYSTEM. GM WILL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY PROBLEMS CAUSED BY USE OF SUCH IMPROPER DESIGN ALTERATIONS, INCLUDING ANY WARRANTY REPAIRS INCURRED. You may have a customer with a concern that the head restraint is uncomfortable or sits too far forward. The front driver and passenger seats are equipped with head restraints that have been designed to help minimize injuries while still providing comfort to the occupants. Each GM vehicle has its own specifically designed head restraint. The head restraints should only be used in the vehicle for which they were designed. The head restraint will not operate to its design intent if the original foam is replaced (1) by non-GM foam or head restraint, (2) by GM foam or head restraint designed for a different vehicle, (3) by GM foam or head restraint that has been altered by a trim shop or (4) if any object, such as an aftermarket comfort enhancing pad or device, is installed. Never modify the design of the head restraint or remove the head restraint from the vehicle as this may interfere with the operation of the seating and restraint systems and may prevent proper positioning of the passenger within the vehicle. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Knee Diverter > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driver Knee Bolster Panel Replacement Knee Diverter: Service and Repair Driver Knee Bolster Panel Replacement Driver Knee Bolster Panel Replacement (Equinox) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Knee Diverter > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driver Knee Bolster Panel Replacement > Page 10965 Knee Diverter: Service and Repair Driver Knee Bolster Reinforcement Replacement Driver Knee Bolster Reinforcement Replacement (Equinox) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Locations > SIR Identification Views Air Bag Control Module: Locations SIR Identification Views SIR Identification Views The SIR Identification Views shown below illustrate the approximate location of all SIR components available for the vehicle. This will assist in determining the appropriate SIR Disabling and Enabling for a given service procedure. Refer to SIR Disabling and Enabling (See: Air Bag Systems/Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming/Service and Repair). 1 - Front End Sensor - Right-Located under the front hood in the engine compartment 2 Instrument Panel Air Bag-Located at the top right under the instrument panel 3 - Roof Rail Air Bag Right-Located under the headliner, extending from the passenger front windshield pillar to the passenger rear windshield pillar 4 - Right Front Side Impact Sensor-Located under the right front door trim near the lower rear of the door frame 5 - Inflatable Restraint Sensing and Diagnostic Module (SDM)-Located underneath the vehicle carpet under the center console 6 - Passenger Presence Detection System-Located under the front passenger sear trim cover (if equipped) 7 Right Front Seat Belt Anchor Tensioner-Located on the outboard side of the passenger seat (if equipped) 8 - Passenger Side Seat Impact Air Bag-Located on the seat back of passenger seat (if equipped) 9 - Right Front Seat Belt Retractor Pretensioner-Located under the trim near the bottom of the center pillar 10 - Right Rear Side Impact Sensor-Located under the right rear door trim near the lower rear of the door frame 11 - Right Roof Rail Module-Located behind the garnish molding on the upper rear pillar 12 - Left Roof Rail Module-Located behind garnish molding on the upper rear pillar 13 - Left Rear Side Impact Sensor-Located under the left rear door trim near the lower rear of the door frame 14 - Left Front Seat Belt Retractor Pretensioner-Located under the trim near the bottom of the center pillar 15 - Driver Side Seat Impact Air Bag-Located on the seat back of the driver seat 16 - Left Front Seat belt Anchor Tensioner-Located on the outboard side of the driver seat 17 - Left Front Side Impact Sensor-Located under the left front door trim near the lower rear of the door frame 18 - Left Roof Rail Air Bag-Located under the headliner, extending from the driver front windshield pillar to the driver rear windshield pillar 19 - Steering Wheel Air Bag-Located on the steering wheel 20 - Vehicle Battery-Located at the front left of the engine compartment. 21 - Left Front End Sensor-Located under the front hood in the engine compartment Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Locations > SIR Identification Views > Page 10971 Air Bag Control Module: Locations Passenger Compartment/Roof Component Views Passenger Compartment/Roof Component Views Left Side of the Passenger Compartment Components 1 - F105R Roof Rail Air Bag - Right 2 - F105L Roof Rail Air Bag - Left 3 - K36 Inflatable Restraint Sensing and Diagnostic Module 4 - B119 Multi-axis Acceleration Sensor Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 10972 Air Bag Control Module: Diagrams K36 Inflatable Restraint Sensing and Diagnostic Module X1 K36 Inflatable Restraint Sensing and Diagnostic Module X2 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 10973 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 10974 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 10975 Air Bag Control Module: Service and Repair Inflatable Restraint Sensing and Diagnostic Module Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Restraint Systems - Accessory Electrical Interference Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag: Technical Service Bulletins Restraint Systems Accessory Electrical Interference INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 08-09-41-007D Date: January 28, 2011 Subject: Passenger Presence System (PPS) May Command Passenger Airbag Indicator and Seat Belt Reminder On When Electronic Devices (Computers, MP3 Players, Cell Phones, Diagnostic Scan Tool, etc.) Are Placed on Front Passenger Seat, DTCs 5045, B0074 0F, B101D or B0081 Set Models: 2009-2011 Buick Enclave 2009-2011 Cadillac CTS 2010-2011 Cadillac SRX 2009-2011 Chevrolet Cobalt (except SS model), HHR (except SS model), Impala, Traverse 2010-2011 Chevrolet Equinox 2009-2011 GMC Acadia 2010-2011 GMC Terrain 2009-2010 Saturn OUTLOOK 2010 Saturn VUE ' Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2011 model year. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 08-09-41-007C (Section 09 - Restraints). Dealers should be aware that when certain electronic devices (computers, MP3 players, cell phones, Tech 2(R), etc.) are placed on the front passenger seat, the front passenger airbag indicator may illuminate. The seat belt reminder light/chime may also be activated. This is due to the fact that some electronic devices placed on the front passenger seat may interfere with the electric field generated by the PPS system, causing it to enable (turn ON) the passenger airbag and turn on the safety belt reminder light and chime - even though the seat is not occupied. The electronic device does not necessarily need to be turned on to cause this condition. DTCs 5045, B0081 0F, B0074 0F or B101D may set depending on the vehicle. If you remove the electronic device from the front passenger seat, the DTC will go into history. If this happens, clear all SDM and PPS DTCs. If the DTC is still current, follow the service procedure in SI for that DTC. If the DTCs do not return, no repair is needed (do not replace any parts for this condition). Note Never rest the diagnostic scan tool or components on the passenger front seat or touch the passenger front seat while the diagnostic scan tool is in contact with your body. This may cause the SIR lamp to illuminate while holding the diagnostic scan tool because your body can transfer the electronic "noise" to the sensor mat in the passenger front seat. Please advise the customer to avoid placing the electronic device in the front passenger seat in the future. Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Diagrams Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Diagrams P14 Passenger Air Bag Disable Indicator Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Diagrams > Page 10984 Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair SIR Disabling and Enabling SIR component location affects how a vehicle should be serviced. There are parts of the SIR system installed in various locations around a vehicle. To find the location of the SIR components refer to SIR Identification Views (See: Air Bag Systems/Locations). There are several reasons for disabling the SIR system, such as repairs to the SIR system or servicing a component near or attached to an SIR component. There are several ways to disable the SIR system depending on what type of service is being performed. The following information covers the proper procedures for disabling/enabling the SIR system. SIR Service Precautions Warning When performing service on or near the SIR components or the SIR wiring, the SIR system must be disabled. Failure to observe the correct procedure could cause deployment of the SIR components. Serious injury can occur. Failure to observe the correct procedure could also result in unnecessary SIR system repairs. The inflatable restraint sensing and diagnostic module (SDM) maintains a reserved energy supply. The reserved energy supply provides deployment power for the air bags if the SDM loses battery power during a collision. Deployment power is available for as much as 1 minute after disconnecting the vehicle power. Waiting 1 minute before working on the system after disabling the SIR system prevents deployment of the air bags from the reserved energy supply. General Service Instructions The following are general service instructions which must be followed in order to properly repair the vehicle and return it to its original integrity: * Do not expose air bags to temperatures above 65°C (149°F). * Verify the correct replacement part number. Do not substitute a component from a different vehicle. * Use only original GM replacement parts available from your authorized GM dealer. Do not use salvaged parts for repairs to the SIR system. Discard any of the following components if it has been dropped from a height of 92 cm (3 feet) or greater: * Inflatable restraint sensing and diagnostic module (SDM) * Any air bag * Driver steering wheel air bag coil * Any impact sensor * Seat belt anchor and/or retractor pretensioners * Passenger presence module and/or occupant sensor Disabling Procedure - Air Bag Fuse 1. Turn the steering wheel so that the vehicles wheels are pointing straight ahead. 2. Place the ignition in the OFF position. Note: The SDM may have more than one fused power input. To ensure there is no unwanted SIR deployment, personal injury, or unnecessary SIR system repairs, remove all fuses supplying power to the SDM. With all SDM fuses removed and the ignition switch in the ON position, the AIR BAG warning indicator illuminates. This is normal operation, and does not indicate a SIR system malfunction. 3. Locate and remove the fuse(s) supplying power to the SDM. Refer to SIR Schematics (See: Air Bag Systems/Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams) or Electrical Center Identification Views (See: Maintenance/Fuses and Circuit Breakers/Fuse/Application and ID). 4. Wait 1 minute before working on the system. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Diagrams > Page 10985 Enabling Procedure - Air Bag Fuse 1. Place the ignition in the OFF position. 2. Install the fuse(s) supplying power to the SDM. Refer to SIR Schematics (See: Air Bag Systems/Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams) or Electrical Center Identification Views (See: Maintenance/Fuses and Circuit Breakers/Fuse/Application and ID). 3. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position. The AIR BAG indicator will flash then turn OFF. 4. Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle if the AIR BAG warning indicator does not operate as described. Refer to Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle (See: Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle). Disabling Procedure - Negative Battery Cable 1. Turn the steering wheel so that the vehicles wheels are pointing straight ahead. 2. Place the ignition in the OFF position. 3. Disconnect the negative battery cable from the battery. Refer to Battery Negative Cable Disconnection and Connection (See: Starting and Charging/Battery/Battery Cable/Negative/Service and Repair/Battery Negative Cable Disconnection and Connection). 4. Wait 1 minute before working on system. Enabling Procedure - Negative Battery Cable 1. Place the ignition in the OFF position. 2. Connect the negative battery cable to the battery. Refer to Battery Negative Cable Disconnection and Connection (See: Starting and Charging/Battery/Battery Cable/Negative/Service and Repair/Battery Negative Cable Disconnection and Connection). 3. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position. The AIR BAG indicator will flash then turn OFF. 4. Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle if the AIR BAG warning indicator does not operate as described. Refer to Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle (See: Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Restraint System - Normal Safety Belt Locking Conditions Seat Belt: Technical Service Bulletins Restraint System - Normal Safety Belt Locking Conditions INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 05-09-40-002E Date: October 21, 2010 Subject: Safety Belt Locking Conditions (Normal Operating Characteristic) Models: 2005-2011 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (Including Saturn) 2005-2010 HUMMER H2, H3 2005-2009 Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2011 model year. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 05-09-40-002D (Section 09 - Restraints). The purpose of this bulletin is to explain when the safety belts are supposed to lock. There are several different locking situations for both front and rear safety belts. Overspool Lock There is an unintentional locking condition that ALL safety belts from ALL manufacturers may experience called "overspool lock". If the webbing snaps back to the stowed position rapidly enough, the retractor will lock with the belt fully stowed. This is more likely to occur when customers "help" the belt to retract. Without the weight of the latch plate and friction to slow the retractive speed of the webbing, the higher than normal webbing retraction speed that occurs engages the locking mechanism when a sudden stop occurs at the end of web travel. Since the webbing is now fully loaded on the spool, the retractor cannot rewind itself further to release the locking mechanism. When this happens, the occupant cannot extract the belt to wear it. DO NOT replace the retractor for this condition until first attempting to disengage the locking mechanism by following the recommendation listed below. Recommendation Pull hard on the locked webbing and then release. The hard pull extracts a small amount of webbing from the retractor which, in turn, permits a small amount of retraction to occur when released. This is all that is needed to disengage the locking mechanism. The safety belt will now function properly. Vehicle Sensing This type of locking occurs in response to the vehicle under the following conditions: - The vehicle changes speed or direction abruptly (the vehicle goes into rapid acceleration OR rapid deceleration or there is aggressive cornering). - It can also occur in a static condition when a vehicle is parked on a large slant (fore-aft or side-to-side), such as streets in San Francisco, California. - It may also occur over rough road conditions where the retractor mechanism is bounced into a locked condition. In all of these conditions, as long as tension is maintained on the webbing, the belt will stay locked. When the tension is released, the belt retracts slightly, the lock bar disengages and the safety belt should return to normal function. Please inform customers that may comment that "the belt locks intermittently" that this is the design intent and the belt is functioning properly. Web Sensing This type of locking occurs in response to the extraction of webbing. When the webbing reels out at an accelerated rate, it goes into lock mode and stays there until tension is again released. To observe this condition, extract the webbing quickly. Customers may refer to this condition as "intermittent lock-up" and encounter it when trying to put the belt on too quickly. Automatic Locking (ALR) When the webbing is pulled all the way out, it automatically converts the retractor into a cinch-down mode (i.e. ALR). This is typically used to tightly secure a child seat to the vehicle. Some customers may experience inadvertent activation of ALR mode if they happen to pull the belt all the way out to the end of travel while they are putting the belt on. The ALR mode of operation is automatically cancelled when the belt is unfastened and stowed (the belt returns to normal sensitive function). Corvette only - This locking mechanism is also provided at the driver's position of the Corvette only, as a unique feature. Corvette customers may find this feature appealing when they plan to operate the vehicle in a "spirited" manner (such as driving in mountainous terrain). With the ALR active, the operator is snugly cinched into the seat and kept firmly in place during high G-force driving maneuvers. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Restraint System - Normal Safety Belt Locking Conditions > Page 10990 Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt > Component Information > Service and Repair > Seat Belt Latch Stop Installation Seat Belt: Service and Repair Seat Belt Latch Stop Installation Seat Belt Latch Stop Installation Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt > Component Information > Service and Repair > Seat Belt Latch Stop Installation > Page 10993 Seat Belt: Service and Repair Rear Seat Center Belt Replacement Rear Seat Center Belt Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt > Component Information > Service and Repair > Seat Belt Latch Stop Installation > Page 10994 Seat Belt: Service and Repair Driver or Passenger Seat Retractor Side Belt Replacement Driver or Passenger Seat Retractor Side Belt Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt > Component Information > Service and Repair > Seat Belt Latch Stop Installation > Page 10995 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-09-40-001A > Feb > 11 > Restraints - Seat Belt Warning Lamp On/Buckling Issues Seat Belt Buckle: Customer Interest Restraints - Seat Belt Warning Lamp On/Buckling Issues INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 09-09-40-001A Date: February 02, 2011 Subject: Seat Belt Buckle Latching Issues and/or Seat Belt Warning Lights Illuminated Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (Including Saturn) 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7 X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2011 model year. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 09-09-40-001 (Section 09 - Restraints). This bulletin is being published to advise dealers about seat belt buckles not operating and/or seat belt warning light illumination, as well as difficulty latching and unlatching the buckle or the buckle release button sticking. Analysis of warranty data has determined that this condition may be caused by sticky beverages being spilled onto or into the seat belt buckle assembly. Foreign debris from food, candy wrappers, paper and coins can also contribute to this condition. Important If foreign material (debris) or sticky liquids are the cause of the concern, show the customer the condition of the component (buckle assembly) and explain how it is affecting the function of the restraint system. Strongly recommend that the component be replaced. Point out the fact that this is not a manufacturing defect and is not covered by the new vehicle warranty. If the customer declines to have parts replaced, the service department management must make a notation on the service record that the lack of functionality of seating position with an inoperative buckle was fully explained to the customer. The service department management must advise the customer that having a non-functioning buckle in a seating position voids ability to use that seating position (no one should ride in the seat). Also make the customer aware that it may be against the law to ride in a vehicle without wearing a restraint system. Important Never insert anything other than the seat belt latch plate into the buckle assembly. Do not attempt to dig anything out of a buckle with a tool. Never try to wash out a buckle to remove a spilled liquid as this may damage the buckle. Use the following steps to determine the cause of the concern. 1. Inspect the buckle assembly with a light shining on the latch plate insertion area. Look for any debris or foreign objects in the buckle. 2. If any debris or foreign objects are observed, try to vacuum out the item. After the foreign material is removed, latch and unlatch the seat belt. If the system functions properly, do not replace the seat belt buckle assembly. 3. If the condition has not been corrected, inspect the buckle assembly for any sticky residue. If sticky residue is found, inform the customer that a substance was spilled on the seat belt buckle assembly causing the malfunction. The buckle assembly will need to be replaced at the customer's expense. 4. Refer to SI for seat belt component replacement. Important If foreign material (debris) or sticky liquids are the cause of the concern, show the customer the condition of the component (buckle assembly) and explain how it is affecting the function of the restraint system. Strongly recommend that the component be replaced at the customer's expense. Point out the fact that this is not a manufacturing defect and is not covered by the new vehicle warranty. If the customer declines to have parts replaced, the service department management must make a notation on the service record that the lack of functionality of seating position with an inoperative buckle was fully explained to the customer. The service department management must advise customer that having a non-functioning buckle in a seating position voids ability to use that seating position (no one should ride in the seat). Also make the customer aware that it may be against the law to ride in a vehicle without wearing a restraint system. 5. If further restraint diagnosis is required, refer to Seat Belt System Operational and Functional Checks in SI. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-09-40-001A > Feb > 11 > Restraints - Seat Belt Warning Lamp On/Buckling Issues > Page 11004 Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seat Belt Buckle: > 09-09-40-001A > Feb > 11 > Restraints - Seat Belt Warning Lamp On/Buckling Issues Seat Belt Buckle: All Technical Service Bulletins Restraints - Seat Belt Warning Lamp On/Buckling Issues INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 09-09-40-001A Date: February 02, 2011 Subject: Seat Belt Buckle Latching Issues and/or Seat Belt Warning Lights Illuminated Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (Including Saturn) 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7 X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2011 model year. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 09-09-40-001 (Section 09 - Restraints). This bulletin is being published to advise dealers about seat belt buckles not operating and/or seat belt warning light illumination, as well as difficulty latching and unlatching the buckle or the buckle release button sticking. Analysis of warranty data has determined that this condition may be caused by sticky beverages being spilled onto or into the seat belt buckle assembly. Foreign debris from food, candy wrappers, paper and coins can also contribute to this condition. Important If foreign material (debris) or sticky liquids are the cause of the concern, show the customer the condition of the component (buckle assembly) and explain how it is affecting the function of the restraint system. Strongly recommend that the component be replaced. Point out the fact that this is not a manufacturing defect and is not covered by the new vehicle warranty. If the customer declines to have parts replaced, the service department management must make a notation on the service record that the lack of functionality of seating position with an inoperative buckle was fully explained to the customer. The service department management must advise the customer that having a non-functioning buckle in a seating position voids ability to use that seating position (no one should ride in the seat). Also make the customer aware that it may be against the law to ride in a vehicle without wearing a restraint system. Important Never insert anything other than the seat belt latch plate into the buckle assembly. Do not attempt to dig anything out of a buckle with a tool. Never try to wash out a buckle to remove a spilled liquid as this may damage the buckle. Use the following steps to determine the cause of the concern. 1. Inspect the buckle assembly with a light shining on the latch plate insertion area. Look for any debris or foreign objects in the buckle. 2. If any debris or foreign objects are observed, try to vacuum out the item. After the foreign material is removed, latch and unlatch the seat belt. If the system functions properly, do not replace the seat belt buckle assembly. 3. If the condition has not been corrected, inspect the buckle assembly for any sticky residue. If sticky residue is found, inform the customer that a substance was spilled on the seat belt buckle assembly causing the malfunction. The buckle assembly will need to be replaced at the customer's expense. 4. Refer to SI for seat belt component replacement. Important If foreign material (debris) or sticky liquids are the cause of the concern, show the customer the condition of the component (buckle assembly) and explain how it is affecting the function of the restraint system. Strongly recommend that the component be replaced at the customer's expense. Point out the fact that this is not a manufacturing defect and is not covered by the new vehicle warranty. If the customer declines to have parts replaced, the service department management must make a notation on the service record that the lack of functionality of seating position with an inoperative buckle was fully explained to the customer. The service department management must advise customer that having a non-functioning buckle in a seating position voids ability to use that seating position (no one should ride in the seat). Also make the customer aware that it may be against the law to ride in a vehicle without wearing a restraint system. 5. If further restraint diagnosis is required, refer to Seat Belt System Operational and Functional Checks in SI. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seat Belt Buckle: > 09-09-40-001A > Feb > 11 > Restraints - Seat Belt Warning Lamp On/Buckling Issues > Page 11010 Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seat Belt Buckle: > 07-09-40-002A > Jun > 09 > Restraints Seat Belt Latch Stop Button Availability Seat Belt Buckle: All Technical Service Bulletins Restraints - Seat Belt Latch Stop Button Availability INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 07-09-40-002A Date: June 04, 2009 Subject: Seat Belt Latch Stop Button Available for Service Models: 2005-2010 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (Including Saturn) 2005-2010 HUMMER H2 2006-2010 HUMMER H3 2009-2010 HUMMER H3T .............................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................. Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the models and model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 07-09-40-002 (Section 09 - Restraints). .............................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................. All seat belt retractor assemblies contain a stop button. If a stop button becomes damaged, the button can be replaced by ordering a replacement button through the GM Parts Catalog. The seat belt retractor assembly does not need replacement. Refer to the Seat Belt Latch Stop Installation procedure in SI for the complete installation procedure. Parts Information For part numbers, usage and availability of stop buttons, see Stop Kit in Group 14.875 (cars) or Group 16.714 (trucks) of the appropriate Parts Catalog. Saturn retailers should refer to the appropriate model year Parts & Illustration Catalog for the vehicle. Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table above. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Seat Belt Buckle: > 07-09-40-002A > Jun > 09 > Restraints Seat Belt Latch Stop Button Availability Seat Belt Buckle: All Technical Service Bulletins Restraints - Seat Belt Latch Stop Button Availability INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 07-09-40-002A Date: June 04, 2009 Subject: Seat Belt Latch Stop Button Available for Service Models: 2005-2010 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (Including Saturn) 2005-2010 HUMMER H2 2006-2010 HUMMER H3 2009-2010 HUMMER H3T .............................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................. Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the models and model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 07-09-40-002 (Section 09 - Restraints). .............................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................. All seat belt retractor assemblies contain a stop button. If a stop button becomes damaged, the button can be replaced by ordering a replacement button through the GM Parts Catalog. The seat belt retractor assembly does not need replacement. Refer to the Seat Belt Latch Stop Installation procedure in SI for the complete installation procedure. Parts Information For part numbers, usage and availability of stop buttons, see Stop Kit in Group 14.875 (cars) or Group 16.714 (trucks) of the appropriate Parts Catalog. Saturn retailers should refer to the appropriate model year Parts & Illustration Catalog for the vehicle. Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table above. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driver or Passenger Seat Belt Buckle Replacement Seat Belt Buckle: Service and Repair Driver or Passenger Seat Belt Buckle Replacement Driver or Passenger Seat Belt Buckle Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driver or Passenger Seat Belt Buckle Replacement > Page 11022 Seat Belt Buckle: Service and Repair Rear Seat Buckle Side Belt Replacement Rear Seat Buckle Side Belt Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle Switch > Component Information > Locations Seat Belt Buckle Switch: Locations Passenger Compartment/Roof Component Views Driver Seat Components 1 - M56D Seat Recline Motor - Driver (AE8) 2 - E14A Seat Heating Element - Driver Back (KA1) 3 P22E Video Display - Driver Seatback (UWG) 4 - F106L Side Air Bag - Left 5 - M52D Seat Lumbar Support Horizontal Motor - Driver 6 - M51D Seat Horizontal Motor - Driver (AE8) 7 - K40 Seat Memory Control Module (LTZ or SLT) or K29 Seat Heating Control Module (KA1 without LTZ or SLT) 8 - F113D Seat Belt Anchor Pretensioner - Driver 9 - M55D Seat Rear Vertical Motor (AE8) or M57D Seat Vertical Motor (without AE8) 10 - M50D Seat Front Vertical Motor - Driver 11 - S65D Seat Lumbar Support Switch - Driver 12 - S64D Seat Adjuster Switch - Driver (without AE8) 13 S64D Seat Adjuster Switch - Driver (AE8) 14 - S47D Seat Memory Switch - Driver (LTZ or SLT) 15 - E14B Seat Heating Element - Driver Cushion (KA1) 16 - B88D Seat Belt Switch - Driver Passenger Seat Components Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 11026 1 - F106R Side Air Bag - Right 2 - P22F Video Display - Passenger Seatback (UWG) 3 - E14C Seat Heating Element - Passenger Back (KA1) 4 - B88P Seat Belt Switch - Passenger 5 - K85 Passenger Presence Detection Module 6 - E14D Seat Heating Element - Passenger Cushion (KA1) 7 - F113P Seat Belt Anchor Pretensioner - Passenger Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 11027 Seat Belt Buckle Switch: Diagrams B88D Seat Belt Switch - Driver B88P Seat Belt Switch - Passenger F113D Seat Belt Anchor Pretensioner - Driver Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 11028 F113P Seat Belt Anchor Pretensioner - Passsenger Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 11029 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Extension > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Restraints - Extender Availability For Seat Belt Seat Belt Extension: Technical Service Bulletins Restraints - Extender Availability For Seat Belt INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 99-09-40-005F Date: June 23, 2010 Subject: Seat Belt Extender Availability Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (Including Saturn) 2009 and Prior HUMMER H2 2010 and Prior HUMMER H3 2005-2009 Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2009‐2011 model years and update the Warranty Information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 99-09-40-005E (Section 09 Restraints). Important: DO NOT use belt extenders when securing a child restraint. The seat and shoulder belt restraint systems used in all General Motors vehicles have sufficient belt length to accommodate most drivers and passengers. Consequently, requests for belt extensions (extenders) should be minimal. Seat belt extenders are available ONLY IN BLACK for most GM passenger cars and trucks produced in recent years. They are available in two different lengths, 23 cm (9 in) and 38 cm (15 in). They are designed to be coupled with the existing belts in each vehicle. When in use, the extender makes the belt arrangement a "custom fit" and use by anyone else or in another vehicle will lessen or nullify the protection offered by the vehicle's restraint system. For this reason, it is extremely important that the correct length extender be used for the vehicle and occupant intended. Important: Do not use an extender just to make it easier to buckle the safety belt. Use an extender only when you cannot buckle the safety belt without using an extender. Parts Information For part numbers, usage and availability of extenders, see Extension Kit in Group 14.875 (cars) or Group 16.714 (trucks) of the appropriate parts catalog. Saturn retailers should refer to the appropriate model year Parts & Illustration catalog for the vehicle. U.S. Saab dealers should contact the Parts Help line. Canadian Saab dealers should fax requests to Partech Canada. Warranty Information ^ Seat belt extenders are a NO CHARGE item to all GM customers who request them for their specific vehicles. ^ Dealers should not be charging part costs since these extenders are supplied by GM to the dealers. ^ Dealers should not be charging labor costs since the extender can be customer installed. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Guide Track > Component Information > Service and Repair Seat Belt Guide Track: Service and Repair Driver or Passenger Seat Shoulder Belt Guide Adjuster Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Retractor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Restraint System - Normal Safety Belt Locking Conditions Seat Belt Retractor: Technical Service Bulletins Restraint System - Normal Safety Belt Locking Conditions INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 05-09-40-002E Date: October 21, 2010 Subject: Safety Belt Locking Conditions (Normal Operating Characteristic) Models: 2005-2011 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (Including Saturn) 2005-2010 HUMMER H2, H3 2005-2009 Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2011 model year. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 05-09-40-002D (Section 09 - Restraints). The purpose of this bulletin is to explain when the safety belts are supposed to lock. There are several different locking situations for both front and rear safety belts. Overspool Lock There is an unintentional locking condition that ALL safety belts from ALL manufacturers may experience called "overspool lock". If the webbing snaps back to the stowed position rapidly enough, the retractor will lock with the belt fully stowed. This is more likely to occur when customers "help" the belt to retract. Without the weight of the latch plate and friction to slow the retractive speed of the webbing, the higher than normal webbing retraction speed that occurs engages the locking mechanism when a sudden stop occurs at the end of web travel. Since the webbing is now fully loaded on the spool, the retractor cannot rewind itself further to release the locking mechanism. When this happens, the occupant cannot extract the belt to wear it. DO NOT replace the retractor for this condition until first attempting to disengage the locking mechanism by following the recommendation listed below. Recommendation Pull hard on the locked webbing and then release. The hard pull extracts a small amount of webbing from the retractor which, in turn, permits a small amount of retraction to occur when released. This is all that is needed to disengage the locking mechanism. The safety belt will now function properly. Vehicle Sensing This type of locking occurs in response to the vehicle under the following conditions: - The vehicle changes speed or direction abruptly (the vehicle goes into rapid acceleration OR rapid deceleration or there is aggressive cornering). - It can also occur in a static condition when a vehicle is parked on a large slant (fore-aft or side-to-side), such as streets in San Francisco, California. - It may also occur over rough road conditions where the retractor mechanism is bounced into a locked condition. In all of these conditions, as long as tension is maintained on the webbing, the belt will stay locked. When the tension is released, the belt retracts slightly, the lock bar disengages and the safety belt should return to normal function. Please inform customers that may comment that "the belt locks intermittently" that this is the design intent and the belt is functioning properly. Web Sensing This type of locking occurs in response to the extraction of webbing. When the webbing reels out at an accelerated rate, it goes into lock mode and stays there until tension is again released. To observe this condition, extract the webbing quickly. Customers may refer to this condition as "intermittent lock-up" and encounter it when trying to put the belt on too quickly. Automatic Locking (ALR) When the webbing is pulled all the way out, it automatically converts the retractor into a cinch-down mode (i.e. ALR). This is typically used to tightly secure a child seat to the vehicle. Some customers may experience inadvertent activation of ALR mode if they happen to pull the belt all the way out to the end of travel while they are putting the belt on. The ALR mode of operation is automatically cancelled when the belt is unfastened and stowed (the belt returns to normal sensitive function). Corvette only - This locking mechanism is also provided at the driver's position of the Corvette only, as a unique feature. Corvette customers may find this feature appealing when they plan to operate the vehicle in a "spirited" manner (such as driving in mountainous terrain). With the ALR active, the operator is snugly cinched into the seat and kept firmly in place during high G-force driving maneuvers. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Retractor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Restraint System - Normal Safety Belt Locking Conditions > Page 11041 Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Retractor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Restraint System - Normal Safety Belt Locking Conditions > Page 11042 Seat Belt Retractor: Technical Service Bulletins Restraints - Seat Belt Latch Stop Button Availability INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 07-09-40-002A Date: June 04, 2009 Subject: Seat Belt Latch Stop Button Available for Service Models: 2005-2010 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (Including Saturn) 2005-2010 HUMMER H2 2006-2010 HUMMER H3 2009-2010 HUMMER H3T .............................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................. Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the models and model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 07-09-40-002 (Section 09 - Restraints). .............................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................. All seat belt retractor assemblies contain a stop button. If a stop button becomes damaged, the button can be replaced by ordering a replacement button through the GM Parts Catalog. The seat belt retractor assembly does not need replacement. Refer to the Seat Belt Latch Stop Installation procedure in SI for the complete installation procedure. Parts Information For part numbers, usage and availability of stop buttons, see Stop Kit in Group 14.875 (cars) or Group 16.714 (trucks) of the appropriate Parts Catalog. Saturn retailers should refer to the appropriate model year Parts & Illustration Catalog for the vehicle. Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table above. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Retractor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 11043 Seat Belt Retractor: Diagrams F112D Seat Belt Retractor Pretensioner - Driver F112P Seat Belt Retractor Pretensioner - Passenger Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Retractor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 11044 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Retractor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 11045 Seat Belt Retractor: Service and Repair Rear Seat Retractor Side Belt Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Tensioner > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures Seat Belt Tensioner: Procedures Pretensioner Handling and Scrapping Scrapping Procedure During the course of a vehicles useful life, certain situations may arise which will necessitate the disposal of a live (undeployed) pretensioner. The following information covers the proper procedures for the disposing of a live (undeployed) pretensioner. Deploy the pretensioner before disposal. Do not dispose of a live (undeployed) pretensioner through normal disposal channels until the pretensioner has been deployed. The following information covers the proper procedures for the disposing of a live (undeployed) pretensioner. * After replacement of a pretensioner under warranty. The pretensioner may need to be returned undeployed to the original manufacturer of pretensioner. * If the vehicle is the subject of a Product Liability report related to the SIR system and is subject to a Preliminary Investigation (GM-1241). Do not alter the SIR system in any manner. * If the vehicle is involved in a campaign affecting the pretensioners. Follow the instructions in the Campaign Service Bulletin for proper SIR handling procedures. Deployment Procedures The pretensioner can be deployed inside or outside of the vehicle. The method used depends upon the final disposition of the vehicle. Review the following procedures in order to determine which will work best in a given situation. Deployment Inside the Vehicle Refer to Inflatable Restraint Module Handling and Scrapping () for deploying the pretensioner inside vehicle under Vehicle Scrapping Procedure. Deployment Outside Vehicle for Seat Belt Pretensioners Deploy the seat belt pretensioners outside of the vehicle when the vehicle will be returned to service. Situations that require deployment outside of the vehicle include the following: * Using the SIR diagnostics, you determine that the seat belt pretensioner is malfunctioning. * The pretensioner pigtail (if equipped) is damaged. * The pretensioner connector is damaged. * The pretensioner connector terminal is damaged. Deployment and disposal of a malfunctioning seat belt pretensioner is subject to any required retention period. Warning In order to prevent accidental deployment of the pretensioner which could cause personal injury, do not dispose of an undeployed pretensioner as normal shop waste. The undeployed pretensioner contains substances that could cause severe illness or personal injury if the sealed container is damaged during disposal. Use the following deployment procedures to safely dispose of an undeployed pretensioner. Failure to dispose of a pretensioner as instructed may be a violation of federal, state, or local laws. Warning When you are deploying a pretensioner for disposal, perform the deployment procedures in the order listed. Failure to follow the procedures in the order listed may result in personal injury. Special Tools * J 39401-B SIR Deployment Fixture * J 38826 SIR Deployment Harness Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Tensioner > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 11050 1. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position. 2. Remove the ignition key. 3. Put on safety glasses. 4. Remove the seat belt pretensioner from the vehicle. 5. When carrying a pretensioner to the deployment area keep the open end of pretensioner pointed away from the body. 6. Clear a space on the ground about 1.85 M (6 ft) in diameter for deployment of the pretensioner. If possible, use a paved, outdoor location free of activity. Otherwise, use a space free of activity on the shop floor. Make sure you have sufficient ventilation. 7. Make sure no loose or flammable objects are in the area. 8. Place the J 39401-B SIR Deployment Fixture in the center of the cleared area. 9. Fill the fixture plastic reservoir with water or sand. 10. Mount the pretensioner (1) in the SIR deployment fixture (3) with the open end facing up using the following mounting method. 1. Adjust and secure the J 39401-B arms (4) to the deployment fixture (3). 2. To mount, use the proper size bolt (2) and nut (5) with washers in order to secure the pretensioner (1) to the deployment fixture brackets (4). 3. Securely tighten all fasteners prior to deployment. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Tensioner > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 11051 11. Inspect the J 38826 SIR Deployment Harness and the appropriate pigtail adapter for damage. Replace as needed. 12. Short the 2 SIR deployment harness (1) leads together using one banana plug seated into the other. 13. Connect the appropriate pigtail adapter (2) to the SIR deployment harness (1). 14. Extend the SIR deployment harness and adapter to full length from the deployment fixture. 15. Connect the pretensioner (1) to the adapter (2) on the deployment harness (3). Note: The rapid gas expansion involved with deploying a pretensioner is very loud. Notify all the people in the immediate area that you intend to deploy the seat belt pretensioner. 16. Clear the area of people. Warning Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Tensioner > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 11052 When you are deploying a pretensioner for disposal, perform the deployment procedures in the order listed. Failure to follow the procedures in the order listed may result in personal injury. 17. Separate the 2 banana plugs on the SIR deployment harness. Note: When the seat belt pretensioner deploys, the deployment fixture may jump about 30 cm (1 ft) vertically. This is a normal reaction of the seat belt pretensioner due to the force of the rapid expansion of gas inside the pretensioner. 18. Place a 12 V minimum/2 A minimum power source (i.e., vehicle battery) near the shorted end of the harness. 19. Connect the SIR deployment harness wires to the power source. Pretensioner deployment will occur when contact is made. 20. Disconnect the SIR deployment harness from the power source after the pretensioner deploys. 21. Seat one banana plug into the other in order to short the deployment harness leads. 22. If the pretensioner did not deploy, disconnect the adapter and discontinue the procedure. Contact the Technical Assistance Group. Otherwise, proceed to the following steps. 23. Put on a pair of shop gloves. 24. Disconnect the pigtail adapter from the pretensioner as soon as possible. 25. Inspect the pigtail adapter and the SIR deployment harness. Replace as needed. 26. Dispose of the deployed pretensioner through normal refuse channels. 27. Wash hands with a mild soap. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Tensioner > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 11053 Seat Belt Tensioner: Removal and Replacement Driver or Passenger Seat Belt Tensioner Replacement Driver or Passenger Seat Belt Tensioner Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Tensioner > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 11054 Driver or Passenger Seat Belt Tensioner Cover Replacement Driver or Passenger Seat Belt Tensioner Cover Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Tensioner > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 11055 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > SIR Identification Views Impact Sensor: Locations SIR Identification Views SIR Identification Views The SIR Identification Views shown below illustrate the approximate location of all SIR components available for the vehicle. This will assist in determining the appropriate SIR Disabling and Enabling for a given service procedure. Refer to SIR Disabling and Enabling (See: Air Bag Systems/Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming/Service and Repair). 1 - Front End Sensor - Right-Located under the front hood in the engine compartment 2 Instrument Panel Air Bag-Located at the top right under the instrument panel 3 - Roof Rail Air Bag Right-Located under the headliner, extending from the passenger front windshield pillar to the passenger rear windshield pillar 4 - Right Front Side Impact Sensor-Located under the right front door trim near the lower rear of the door frame 5 - Inflatable Restraint Sensing and Diagnostic Module (SDM)-Located underneath the vehicle carpet under the center console 6 - Passenger Presence Detection System-Located under the front passenger sear trim cover (if equipped) 7 Right Front Seat Belt Anchor Tensioner-Located on the outboard side of the passenger seat (if equipped) 8 - Passenger Side Seat Impact Air Bag-Located on the seat back of passenger seat (if equipped) 9 - Right Front Seat Belt Retractor Pretensioner-Located under the trim near the bottom of the center pillar 10 - Right Rear Side Impact Sensor-Located under the right rear door trim near the lower rear of the door frame 11 - Right Roof Rail Module-Located behind the garnish molding on the upper rear pillar 12 - Left Roof Rail Module-Located behind garnish molding on the upper rear pillar 13 - Left Rear Side Impact Sensor-Located under the left rear door trim near the lower rear of the door frame 14 - Left Front Seat Belt Retractor Pretensioner-Located under the trim near the bottom of the center pillar 15 - Driver Side Seat Impact Air Bag-Located on the seat back of the driver seat 16 - Left Front Seat belt Anchor Tensioner-Located on the outboard side of the driver seat 17 - Left Front Side Impact Sensor-Located under the left front door trim near the lower rear of the door frame 18 - Left Roof Rail Air Bag-Located under the headliner, extending from the driver front windshield pillar to the driver rear windshield pillar 19 - Steering Wheel Air Bag-Located on the steering wheel 20 - Vehicle Battery-Located at the front left of the engine compartment. 21 - Left Front End Sensor-Located under the front hood in the engine compartment Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > SIR Identification Views > Page 11061 Impact Sensor: Locations Door Component Views Door Component Views Driver Door Components 1 - A23D Door Latch Assembly - Driver 2 - A9A Outside Rearview Mirror - Driver 3 - E1C Accent Lamp - Driver Door Handle (LTZ or SLT) 4 - K96L Mirror Control Module - Left (LTZ or SLT) 5 S52S Outside Rearview Mirror Switch 6 - P19G Speaker - Left Front 7 - M74D Window Motor Driver 8 - B63LF Side Impact Sensor - Left Front 9 - S79D Window Switch - Driver 10 - E1D Accent Lamp - Driver Door (LTZ or SLT) Passenger Door Components Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > SIR Identification Views > Page 11062 1 - A9B Outside Rearview Mirror - Passenger 2 - E1M Accent Lamp - Passenger Door Handle (LTZ or SLT) 3 - S79P Window Switch - Passenger 4 - A23P Door Latch Assembly - Passenger 5 - E1P Accent Lamp - Passenger Door (LTZ or SLT) 6 - B63RF Side Impact Sensor - Right Front 7 M74P Window Motor - Passenger 8 - P19U Speaker - Right Front Left Rear Door Components Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > SIR Identification Views > Page 11063 1 - A23LR Door Latch Assembly - Left Rear 2 - S79LR Window Switch - Left Rear 3 - M74LR Window Motor - Left Rear 4 - P19K Speaker - Left Rear 5 - B63LR Side Impact Sensor - Left Rear Right Rear Door Components Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > SIR Identification Views > Page 11064 1 - S79RR Window Switch - Right Rear 2 - A23RR Door Latch Assembly - Right Rear 3 - M74RR Window Motor - Right Rear 4 - B63RR Side Impact Sensor - Right Rear 5 - P19X Speaker - Right Rear Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 11065 Impact Sensor: Diagrams B59L Front Impact Sensor - Left B59R Front Impact Sensor - Right Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 11066 B63LF Side Impact Sensor - Left Front Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 11067 B63LR Side Impact Sensor - Left Rear Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 11068 B63RF Side Impact Sensor - Right Front Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 11069 B63RR Side Impact Sensor - Right Rear Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 11070 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front End Inflatable Restraint Discriminating Sensor Replacement Impact Sensor: Service and Repair Front End Inflatable Restraint Discriminating Sensor Replacement Front End Inflatable Restraint Discriminating Sensor Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front End Inflatable Restraint Discriminating Sensor Replacement > Page 11073 Impact Sensor: Service and Repair Inflatable Restraint Side Impact Sensor Replacement - Front Side Door Inflatable Restraint Side Impact Sensor Replacement - Front Side Door Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front End Inflatable Restraint Discriminating Sensor Replacement > Page 11074 Impact Sensor: Service and Repair Inflatable Restraint Side Impact Sensor Replacement - Rear Side Door Inflatable Restraint Side Impact Sensor Replacement - Rear Side Door Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Buckle Switch > Component Information > Locations Seat Belt Buckle Switch: Locations Passenger Compartment/Roof Component Views Driver Seat Components 1 - M56D Seat Recline Motor - Driver (AE8) 2 - E14A Seat Heating Element - Driver Back (KA1) 3 P22E Video Display - Driver Seatback (UWG) 4 - F106L Side Air Bag - Left 5 - M52D Seat Lumbar Support Horizontal Motor - Driver 6 - M51D Seat Horizontal Motor - Driver (AE8) 7 - K40 Seat Memory Control Module (LTZ or SLT) or K29 Seat Heating Control Module (KA1 without LTZ or SLT) 8 - F113D Seat Belt Anchor Pretensioner - Driver 9 - M55D Seat Rear Vertical Motor (AE8) or M57D Seat Vertical Motor (without AE8) 10 - M50D Seat Front Vertical Motor - Driver 11 - S65D Seat Lumbar Support Switch - Driver 12 - S64D Seat Adjuster Switch - Driver (without AE8) 13 S64D Seat Adjuster Switch - Driver (AE8) 14 - S47D Seat Memory Switch - Driver (LTZ or SLT) 15 - E14B Seat Heating Element - Driver Cushion (KA1) 16 - B88D Seat Belt Switch - Driver Passenger Seat Components Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Buckle Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 11078 1 - F106R Side Air Bag - Right 2 - P22F Video Display - Passenger Seatback (UWG) 3 - E14C Seat Heating Element - Passenger Back (KA1) 4 - B88P Seat Belt Switch - Passenger 5 - K85 Passenger Presence Detection Module 6 - E14D Seat Heating Element - Passenger Cushion (KA1) 7 - F113P Seat Belt Anchor Pretensioner - Passenger Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Buckle Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 11079 Seat Belt Buckle Switch: Diagrams B88D Seat Belt Switch - Driver B88P Seat Belt Switch - Passenger F113D Seat Belt Anchor Pretensioner - Driver Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Buckle Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 11080 F113P Seat Belt Anchor Pretensioner - Passsenger Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Buckle Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 11081 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Restraint Systems - Accessory Electrical Interference Seat Occupant Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins Restraint Systems - Accessory Electrical Interference INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 08-09-41-007D Date: January 28, 2011 Subject: Passenger Presence System (PPS) May Command Passenger Airbag Indicator and Seat Belt Reminder On When Electronic Devices (Computers, MP3 Players, Cell Phones, Diagnostic Scan Tool, etc.) Are Placed on Front Passenger Seat, DTCs 5045, B0074 0F, B101D or B0081 Set Models: 2009-2011 Buick Enclave 2009-2011 Cadillac CTS 2010-2011 Cadillac SRX 2009-2011 Chevrolet Cobalt (except SS model), HHR (except SS model), Impala, Traverse 2010-2011 Chevrolet Equinox 2009-2011 GMC Acadia 2010-2011 GMC Terrain 2009-2010 Saturn OUTLOOK 2010 Saturn VUE ' Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2011 model year. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 08-09-41-007C (Section 09 - Restraints). Dealers should be aware that when certain electronic devices (computers, MP3 players, cell phones, Tech 2(R), etc.) are placed on the front passenger seat, the front passenger airbag indicator may illuminate. The seat belt reminder light/chime may also be activated. This is due to the fact that some electronic devices placed on the front passenger seat may interfere with the electric field generated by the PPS system, causing it to enable (turn ON) the passenger airbag and turn on the safety belt reminder light and chime - even though the seat is not occupied. The electronic device does not necessarily need to be turned on to cause this condition. DTCs 5045, B0081 0F, B0074 0F or B101D may set depending on the vehicle. If you remove the electronic device from the front passenger seat, the DTC will go into history. If this happens, clear all SDM and PPS DTCs. If the DTC is still current, follow the service procedure in SI for that DTC. If the DTCs do not return, no repair is needed (do not replace any parts for this condition). Note Never rest the diagnostic scan tool or components on the passenger front seat or touch the passenger front seat while the diagnostic scan tool is in contact with your body. This may cause the SIR lamp to illuminate while holding the diagnostic scan tool because your body can transfer the electronic "noise" to the sensor mat in the passenger front seat. Please advise the customer to avoid placing the electronic device in the front passenger seat in the future. Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Restraint Systems - Accessory Electrical Interference > Page 11086 Seat Occupant Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins Restraints - Passenger Presence System Information INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 06-08-50-009F Date: December 23, 2010 Subject: Information on Passenger Presence Sensing System (PPS or PSS) Concerns With Custom Upholstery, Accessory Seat Heaters or Other Comfort Enhancing Devices Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks Equipped with Passenger Presence Sensing System Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 06-08-50-009E (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Concerns About Safety and Alterations to the Front Passenger Seat Important ON A GM VEHICLE EQUIPPED WITH A PASSENGER SENSING SYSTEM, USE THE SEAT COVERS AND OTHER SEAT-RELATED EQUIPMENT AS RELEASED BY GM FOR THAT VEHICLE. DO NOT ALTER THE SEAT COVERS OR SEAT-RELATED EQUIPMENT. ANY ALTERATIONS TO SEAT COVERS OR GM ACCESSORIES DEFEATS THE INTENDED DESIGN OF THE SYSTEM. GM WILL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY PROBLEMS CAUSED BY USE OF SUCH IMPROPER SEAT ALTERATIONS, INCLUDING ANY WARRANTY REPAIRS INCURRED. The front passenger seat in many GM vehicles is equipped with a passenger sensing system that will turn off the right front passenger's frontal airbag under certain conditions, such as when an infant or child seat is present. In some vehicles, the passenger sensing system will also turn off the right front passenger's seat mounted side impact airbag. For the system to function properly, sensors are used in the seat to detect the presence of a properly-seated occupant. The passenger sensing system may not operate properly if the original seat trim is replaced (1) by non-GM covers, upholstery or trim, or (2) by GM covers, upholstery or trim designed for a different vehicle or (3) by GM covers, upholstery or trim that has been altered by a trim shop, or (4) if any object, such as an aftermarket seat heater or a comfort enhancing pad or device is installed under the seat fabric or between the occupant and the seat fabric. Aftermarket Seat Heaters, Custom Upholstery, and Comfort Enhancing Pads or Devices Important ON A GM VEHICLE EQUIPPED WITH A PASSENGER SENSING SYSTEM, USE ONLY SEAT COVERS AND OTHER SEAT-RELATED EQUIPMENT RELEASED AS GM ACCESSORIES FOR THAT VEHICLE. DO NOT USE ANY OTHER TYPE OF SEAT COVERS OR SEAT-RELATED EQUIPMENT, OR GM ACCESSORIES RELEASED FOR OTHER VEHICLE APPLICATIONS. GM WILL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY PROBLEMS CAUSED BY USE OF SUCH IMPROPER SEAT ACCESSORIES, INCLUDING ANY WARRANTY REPAIRS MADE NECESSARY BY SUCH USE. Many types of aftermarket accessories are available to customers, upfitting shops, and dealers. Some of these devices sit on top of, or are Velcro(R) strapped to the seat while others such as seat heaters are installed under the seat fabric. Additionally, seat covers made of leather or other materials may have different padding thickness installed that could prevent the Passenger Sensing System from functioning properly. Never alter the vehicle seats. Never add pads or other devices to the seat cushion, as this may interfere with the operation of the Passenger Sensing System and either prevent proper deployment of the passenger airbag or prevent proper suppression of the passenger air bag. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 11087 Seat Occupant Sensor: Locations Passenger Compartment/Roof Component Views Passenger Seat Components 1 - F106R Side Air Bag - Right 2 - P22F Video Display - Passenger Seatback (UWG) 3 - E14C Seat Heating Element - Passenger Back (KA1) 4 - B88P Seat Belt Switch - Passenger 5 - K85 Passenger Presence Detection Module 6 - E14D Seat Heating Element - Passenger Cushion (KA1) 7 - F113P Seat Belt Anchor Pretensioner - Passenger Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 11088 Seat Occupant Sensor: Diagrams K85 Passenger Presence Detection Module Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 11089 Seat Occupant Sensor: Service and Repair Inflatable Restraint Front Passenger Presence Sensor Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Relay > Component Information > Locations Accessory Relay: Locations Electrical Center Identification Views X51A Fuse Block - Instrument Panel Label (before A6284015) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 11094 X51A Fuse Block - Instrument Panel Label (A6284015 and after) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 11095 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 11096 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 11097 Accessory Relay: Diagrams X80A Accessory Power Receptacle - Center Console 1 X80B Accessory Power Receptacle - Center Console 2 X80G Accessory Power Receptacle - Instrument Panel Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 11098 X80R Accessory Power Receptacle - Rear Compartment Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antenna > Antenna, Radio > Antenna Cable > Component Information > Application and ID Antenna Cable: Application and ID Antenna Coaxial/Connector Cable Identification Table Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antenna > Antenna, Radio > Antenna Cable > Component Information > Service and Repair > Radio Antenna Cable Extension Cable Replacement Antenna Cable: Service and Repair Radio Antenna Cable Extension Cable Replacement Radio Antenna Cable Extension Cable Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antenna > Antenna, Radio > Antenna Cable > Component Information > Service and Repair > Radio Antenna Cable Extension Cable Replacement > Page 11106 Antenna Cable: Service and Repair Radio Antenna Cable Extension Cable Connector Replacement Radio Antenna Cable Extension Cable Connector Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antenna > Antenna, Radio > Antenna Cable > Component Information > Service and Repair > Radio Antenna Cable Extension Cable Replacement > Page 11107 Antenna Cable: Service and Repair Radio Antenna Cable Extension Radio End Cable Replacement Radio Antenna Cable Extension Radio End Cable Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Service and Repair Alarm Module: Service and Repair Theft Deterrent Module Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Locations Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm): Locations Front of Vehicle/Engine Compartment Component Views Engine Compartment Components (Chevrolet) 1 - B20 Brake Fluid Level Switch 2 - B19B Brake Booster Vacuum Sensor 3 - M75 Windshield Wiper Motor 4 - X50A Fuse Block - Underhood 5 - C1 Battery 6 - G24 Windshield Washer Pump 7 - B55 Hood Ajar Switch (BTV) 8 - P12B Horn - Low Note 9 - P12A Horn - High Note 10 - K17 Electronic Brake Control Module Engine Compartment Components (GMC) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Locations > Page 11115 1 - B20 Brake Fluid Level Switch 2 - B19B Brake Booster Vacuum Sensor 3 - M75 Windshield Wiper Motor 4 - X50A Fuse Block - Underhood 5 - C1 Battery 6 - G24 Windshield Washer Pump 7 - P12B Horn - Low Note 8 - B55 Hood Ajar Switch (BTV) 9 - K17 Electronic Brake Control Module 10 - P12A Horn - High Note Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Locations > Page 11116 Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm): Diagrams B55 Hood Ajar Switch (BTV) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Diagrams Keyless Entry Module: Diagrams K77 Remote Control Door Lock Receiver Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 11121 Keyless Entry Module: Service and Repair Remote Control Door Lock Receiver Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Starting System > Keyless Start Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Keyless Start - 2-Way Advanced Remote Start Keyless Start Transmitter: Technical Service Bulletins Keyless Start - 2-Way Advanced Remote Start INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 09-00-89-025A Date: October 26, 2009 Subject: GM Accessories: 2-Way Advanced Remote Start Systems Part Information Models: 2007-2010 Buick Lucerne 2008-2010 Buick Enclave 2007-2010 Cadillac Escalade ESV, EXT 2008-2010 Cadillac DTS 2007-2009 Chevrolet Equinox, HHR 2007-2010 Chevrolet Avalanche, Cobalt, Silverado, Tahoe 2008-2010 Chevrolet Impala, Malibu 2009-2010 Chevrolet Traverse 2007-2010 GMC Acadia, Sierra, Yukon 2008-2010 HUMMER H2 2007-2009 Pontiac Torrent 2007-2010 Pontiac G5, G6 2008-2010 Pontiac G8 2010 Pontiac Solstice 2007-2010 Saturn AURA, OUTLOOK 2009-2010 Saturn VUE 2010 Saturn SKY Attention: This bulletin does not apply to GMODC dealers. Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add part numbers. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 09-00-89-025 (Section 00 - General Information). This bulletin is being published to provide information on locating service part numbers for GM Accessory, 2-Way Advanced Remote Start Systems. Dealers should consult the chart below and use the correct service part. Dealers should not use entire kit for warranty or repair work. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Starting System > Keyless Start Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Keyless Start - 2-Way Advanced Remote Start > Page 11127 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Starting System > Keyless Start Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Keyless Start - 2-Way Advanced Remote Start > Page 11128 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Starting System > Keyless Start Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Keyless Start - 2-Way Advanced Remote Start > Page 11129 Parts Information Service parts common to all 2-Way Advanced Remote Start Systems Transmitter Battery 12493150 Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Keyless Entry Transmitter: Diagram Information and Instructions Electrical Schematic Symbols Electrical Schematic Symbols Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11134 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11135 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11136 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11137 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11138 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11139 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11140 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11141 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11142 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11143 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11144 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11145 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11146 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11147 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11148 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11149 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11150 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11151 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11152 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11153 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11154 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11155 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11156 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11157 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11158 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11159 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11160 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11161 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11162 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11163 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11164 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11165 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11166 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11167 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11168 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11169 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11170 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11171 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11172 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11173 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11174 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11175 General Electrical Diagnosis General Electrical Diagnosis Basic Knowledge Required Without a basic knowledge of electricity, it will be difficult to use the diagnostic procedures contained in the service manual. You should understand the basic theory of electricity, and know the meaning of voltage (V), current (A), and resistance (Ohms ). You should also be able to read and understand a wiring diagram, as well as understand what happens in a circuit with an open or a shorted wire. Vehicle Zoning Strategy Vehicle Zoning Strategy All grounds, in-line connectors, and splices have identifying numbers that correspond to where they are located in the vehicle. The following table explains the numbering system. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11176 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11177 Keyless Entry Transmitter: Diagnostic Aids Arrows and Symbols Arrows and Symbols This service manual uses various symbols in order to describe different service operations. 1 - Front of Vehicle 2 - View Detail 2 - View Detail 3 - Ambient Air Mixed with Another Gas or Indicate Temperature Change 4 - Motion or Direction 5 - View Angle 6 - Dimension (1:2) 7 Ambient/Clean Air Flow or Cool Air Flow 8 - Lubrication Point - Oil or Fluid 9 - Task Related 10 Sectioning (1:3) 11 - Gas Other Than Ambient Air or Hot Air Flow 12 - Lubrication Point - Grease or Jelly 13 - Multidirectional Arrow Decimal and Metric Equivalents Decimal and Metric Equivalents Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11178 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11179 Checking Aftermarket Accessories Checking Aftermarket Accessories Warning: Refer to SIR Warning (See: Restraint Systems/Service Precautions/SIR Warning). Caution: The OBD II symbol is used on the circuit diagrams in order to alert the technician that the circuit is essential for proper OBD II emission control circuit operation. Any circuit which fails and causes the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) to turn ON, or causes emissions-related component damage, is identified as an OBD II circuit. Do not connect aftermarket accessories into the following circuits: * SIR circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the SIR symbol. * OBD II circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the OBD II symbol. Always check for aftermarket accessories (non-OEM) as the first step in diagnosing electrical problems. If the vehicle is so equipped, disconnect the system to verify that these add-on accessories are not the cause of the problems. Possible causes of vehicle problems related to aftermarket accessories include: * Power feeds connected to points other than the battery * Antenna location * Transceiver wiring located too close to vehicle electronic modules or wiring * Poor shielding or poor connectors on antenna feed line * Check for recent service bulletins detailing installation guidelines for aftermarket accessories. Circuit Testing Circuit Testing The Circuit Testing section contains the following diagnostic testing information. Using this information along with the diagnostic procedures will identify the cause of the electrical malfunction. * Using Connector Test Adapters (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Using Connector Test Adapters) * Probing Electrical Connectors (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Probing Electrical Connectors) * Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11180 Procedures/Circuit Testing/Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter) * Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp) * Using Fused Jumper Wires (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Using Fused Jumper Wires) * Measuring Voltage (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Measuring Voltage) * Measuring Voltage Drop (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Measuring Voltage Drop) * Measuring Frequency (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Measuring Frequency) * Testing Ground and Low Reference Circuits (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Testing Ground and Low Reference Circuits) * Testing for Continuity (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Continuity) * Testing for Short to Ground (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Short to Ground) * Testing for a Short to Voltage (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for a Short to Voltage) * Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections) * Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions) * Testing for Electrical Intermittents (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Electrical Intermittents) * Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure) * Circuit Protection - Fuses (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Circuit Protection - Fuses) * Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers) * Circuit Protection - Fusible Links (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Circuit Protection - Fusible Links) Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp Special Tools EL-35616-200 - Test Light - Probe Kit For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test Probe Caution). A test lamp can simply and quickly test a low impedance circuit for voltage. A Digital Multimeter (DMM) should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present if the impedance is low enough, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. In other words, if there is not enough current, the test lamp will not illuminate even though voltage is present. The EL-35616-200 - kit is Micro-Pack compatible and comprised of a 12-volt light bulb with an attached pair of leads. To properly operate this tool use the following procedures. When testing for voltage: 1. Attach one lead to ground. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is voltage at the point being tested. When testing for ground: 1. Attach one lead to battery positive voltage. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where ground should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is ground at the point being tested. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11181 Testing for a Short to Voltage Testing for a Short to Voltage Special Tools EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM) For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test Probe Caution). The following procedure tests for a short to voltage in a circuit. 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Set the rotary dial of the Digital Multimeter (DMM) to the V (DC) position. 4. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. Turn ON the ignition and operate all accessories. 7. If the voltage measured is greater than 1 V, there is a short to voltage in the circuit. Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions Special Tools J-25070 - Heat Gun For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Many intermittent open or shorted circuits are affected by harness/connector movement that is caused by vibration, engine torque, bumps/rough pavement, etc. In order to duplicate the customer's concern, it may be necessary to manipulate the wiring harness if the malfunction appears to be vibration related. Manipulation of a circuit can consist of a wide variety of actions, including: * Wiggling the harness * Disconnecting a connector and reconnecting * Stressing the mechanical connection of a connector * Pulling on the harness or wire in order to identify a separation/break inside the insulation * Relocating a harness or wires All these actions should be performed with some goal in mind. For instance, with a scan tool connected, wiggling the wires may uncover a faulty input to the control module. The snapshot option would be appropriate here. Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure). Another option is, with the component commanded ON and OFF by the scan tool, move related connectors and wiring and observe the component operation. With the engine running, move related connectors and wiring while monitoring engine operation. If harness or connector movement affects the data displayed, component/system operation, or engine operation, inspect and repair the harness/connections as necessary. You may need to load the vehicle in order to duplicate the concern. This may require the use of weights, floor jacks, jackstands, frame machines, etc. In these cases you are attempting to duplicate the concern by manipulating the suspension or frame. This method is useful in finding harnesses that are too short and their connectors pull apart enough to cause a poor connection. A DMM set to Peak Min/Max mode and connected to the suspect circuit while testing can yield desirable results. Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Electrical Intermittents). Certainly, using the senses of sight, smell, and hearing while manipulating the circuit can provide good results as well. There may be instances where circuit manipulation alone will not meet the required criteria for the fault condition to appear. In such cases it may be necessary to expose the suspect circuit to other conditions while manipulating the harness. Such conditions would include high moisture conditions, along with exceptionally high or low temperatures. The following discusses how to expose the circuit to these kinds of conditions. Salt Water Spray Some compounds possess the ability to conduct electricity when dissolved in water such as ordinary salt. By mixing table salt with water in sufficient Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11182 quantities, you can enhance the conductive properties of water so that any circuit which may be sensitive to moisture will more readily fail when liberally sprayed with this mixture. Mixing 0.35L (12 oz) of water with approximately 1 tablespoon of salt will yield a salt solution of 5 percent. Fill a normal spray bottle with this mixture. This mixture is sufficient to enhance the water's own conductivity. This may cause the circuit to fail more easily when sprayed. Once the mixture is completed, spray the suspect area liberally with the solution. Then, while monitoring either a scan tool or DMM, manipulate the harness as discussed previously. High Temperature Conditions If the complaint tends to be heat related, you can simulate the condition using the J-25070 - heat gun. Using the heat gun, you can heat up the suspected area or component. Manipulate the harnesses under high temperature conditions while monitoring the scan tool or DMM to locate the fault condition. The high temperature condition may be achieved simply by test driving the vehicle at normal operating temperature. If a heat gun is unavailable, consider this option to enhance your diagnosis. This option does not allow for the same control, however. Low Temperature Conditions Depending on the nature of the fault condition, placing a fan in front of the vehicle while the vehicle is in the shade can have the desired effect. If this is unsuccessful, use local cooling treatments such as ice or a venturi type nozzle (one that provides hot or cold air). This type of tool is capable of producing air stream temperatures down to -18°C (0°F) from one end and +71°C (160°F) from the other. This is ideally suited for localized cooling needs. Once the vehicle, component, or harness has been sufficiently cooled, manipulate the harness or components in an effort to duplicate the concern. Duplicating Failure Conditions * If none of the previous tests are successful, attempt to duplicate and/or capture the failure conditions. * Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, where applicable, contains the conditions that were present when the DTC set. 1. Review and record Freeze Frame/Failure Records data. 2. Clear the DTCs using the scan tool. 3. Turn the key to OFF and wait 15 seconds. 4. Operate the vehicle under the same conditions that were noted in Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, as closely as possible. The vehicle must also be operating within the Conditions for Running the DTC. Refer to Conditions for Running the DTC in the supporting text if a DTC is being diagnosed. 5. Monitor DTC Status for the DTC being tested. The scan tool will indicate Ran, when the enabling conditions have been satisfied long enough for the DTC to run. The scan tool will also indicate whether the DTC passed or failed. * An alternate method is to drive the vehicle with the DMM connected to a suspected circuit. An abnormal reading on the DMM when the concern occurs, may help you locate the concern. Measuring Frequency Measuring Frequency Special Tools EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM) For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test Probe Caution). The following procedure determines the frequency of a signal. Note: Connecting the Digital Multimeter (DMM) to the circuit before pressing the Hz button will allow the DMM to autorange to an appropriate range. 1. Apply power to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (AC) position. 3. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11183 5. Press the Hz button on the DMM. 6. The DMM will display the frequency measured. Measuring Voltage Measuring Voltage Special Tools EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM) For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test Probe Caution). The following procedure measures the voltage at a selected point in a circuit. 1. Disconnect the electrical harness connector for the circuit being tested, if necessary. 2. Enable the circuit and/or system being tested. Use the following methods: * Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. * Turn ON the engine. * Turn ON the circuit and/or system with a scan tool in Output Controls. * Turn ON the switch for the circuit and/or system being tested. 3. Select the V (AC) or V (DC) position on the Digital Multimeter (DMM). 4. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the point of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. The DMM displays the voltage measured at that point. Measuring Voltage Drop Measuring Voltage Drop Special Tools EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM) For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test Probe Caution). The following procedure determines the difference in voltage potential between 2 points. 1. Set the rotary dial of the Digital Multimeter (DMM) to the V (DC) position. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11184 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to one point of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to the other point of the circuit. 4. Operate the circuit. 5. The DMM displays the difference in voltage between the 2 points. Probing Electrical Connectors Probing Electrical Connectors Note: Always be sure to reinstall the connector position assurance (CPA) and terminal position assurance (TPA) when reconnecting connectors or replacing terminals. Front probe Disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the mating side (front) of the connector. Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test Probe Caution). Note: When probing female 0.64 terminals, it is important to use the correct adapter. There have been some revisions to the test adapter for 0.64 terminals. The proper adapter for 0.64 terminals is the EL-35616-64B which has a gold terminal and a black wire between the base and tip. Failure to use the proper test adapter may result in damage to the terminal being tested and improper diagnosis. Note: The proper adapter for probing the terminals for fuses, relays, or diodes in an electrical center is EL-35616-35. Using any other tool or adapter may damage the terminal being tested. Refer to the following table as a guide in selecting the correct test adapter for front probing connectors: Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11185 Backprobe Note: * Backprobe connector terminals only when specifically required in diagnostic procedures. * Do not backprobe a sealed (Weather Pack(R)) connector, less than a 280 series Metri-Pack connector, a Micro-Pack connector, or a flat wire (dock and lock) connector. * Backprobing can be a source of damage to connector terminals. Use care in order to avoid deforming the terminal, either by forcing the test probe too far into the cavity or by using too large of a test probe. * After backprobing any connector, inspect for terminal damage. If terminal damage is suspected, test for proper terminal contact. Do not disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the harness side (back) of the connector. Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure Using Snapshots in Global Diagnostic System (GDS) Overview Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11186 A snapshot is a recording of what a control module on the vehicle was receiving for information while the snapshot is being made. A snapshot may be used to analyze the data during the time a vehicle condition is current. This allows you to concentrate on making the condition occur, rather than trying to view all the data in anticipation of the fault. To record a snapshot in GDS, select, Record Snapshot, from the options at the top right portion of any of the various pages that allow snapshots to be taken (e.g. Data Display, Control Functions, etc.). When you are finished recording, select, Stop Snapshot recording. The snapshot will now be available for replay. Snapshot Replay The Snapshot Replay function allows reviews of previously recorded vehicle snapshot data. This information can be used in analysis of vehicle problems and detection of trigger error conditions. The graph function can be used to compare parameters to see if a component is functioning properly. Recorded snapshots can be selected for viewing by the following three methods: * Selecting a snapshot file from the Vehicle Home Page and clicking on the Review selection. * Double clicking on the selected snapshot from the Vehicle Home Page. * Entering the Tools selection from the Menu selection and selecting Snapshot replay. Next, open the Snapshot Manager. Double click on the snapshot file you wish to view or click on the Load Snapshot selection and select a snapshot file. Regardless of selection method, a File Loaded pop-up window will be displayed from the Snapshot Replay screen. Select OK from the pop-up window. Snapshot Play Functions There are several snapshot play functions that are used to replay recorded snapshots * The Play function is used to play the snapshot forward by clicking on this selection. A marker will move across the screen when this selection is used. All selections in this area turn grey when they are active. * The Pause function is used to pause play of the snapshot. When this selection is clicked a second time the snapshot will start playing where it left off. * The Stop function is used to stop playing the snapshot. The snapshot will start from the beginning, if Play is selected after using the Stop function. Time Control Time control is used to control the snapshot replay. This function allows selection of a specific time frame, display of different views, and control of display speed. The following functions can be selected directly under Time Control. * The Bookmark selection allows you to add a specific comment in the current display and return to this point in the future. When this option is selected, a pop-up window is displayed. Enter a bookmark name and select OK. * The Note Pad can be selected to add comments to the snapshot replay file at the current point of time. When this option is selected, a pop-up window is displayed. Enter a comment for the snapshot file and select OK. * The Load Snapshot (blue folder) opens a snapshot file and makes it ready for further analysis. This function is also available by clicking on an available snapshot file from the Snapshot Manager. * The Down Arrow displays all Time Control options when selected. Individual options can also be selected by clicking on the item you want. * The Snapshot Display Speed can be controlled by selecting this option. Slow speeds of 1/8X, 1/4X, and 1/2X can be selected. The real time speed can also be selected at 1. Faster speeds of 2X, 4X, and 8X can also be obtained by using this selection. View Selections Each View Selection provides a different way of displaying vehicle data for analysis. The following functions can be selected under Available Views: Note: The parameter name will be shown in the original language used for capture if no translation is available for the name. * Parameter List View - Displays incoming information from the snapshot file. The current value of the parameters is displayed on the screen. * Log View - Contains all the information from the snapshot file. All parameter values are listed in the order they were recorded. Specific parameters can be added or removed from a watchlist by clicking on the appropriate item. * State View - Shows the values of all parameters in a specific time frame. These values can be used for comparison with the trigger view. * Trigger View - Displays all system and user defined triggers. This function can be used when there is a combination of factors involved in a diagnostic problem. When a Trigger condition is met a caution triangle will be displayed on the screen. Triggers: * Load Triggers - Allows you to load a file containing trigger definitions. * Save Triggers - Allows you to save the trigger to your computer's hard drive. * Remove Trigger - Allows you to remove the current trigger. It will no longer be present. * Edit Trigger - Displays a pop-up window where you can modify the limits and parameters contained within a trigger. * Adds Trigger - Displays a pop-up window to configure a trigger. * DTC View - After the Play function is selected and this option is selected this function opens the list of recorded DTCs. * Line Graph View - Displays data that can be visualized against the time-axis. From this view, specific parameters can be selected for graphing by Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11187 checking the box under Selected. At the bottom of the graph there are four functions Zoom In (increase size), Zoom Out (decrease size), Bookmarks, and Pause Scrolling. Each of these functions can be accessed by clicking on them. Testing for Continuity Testing for Continuity Special Tools EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM) For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test Probe Caution). The following procedures verify good continuity in a circuit. With a Digital Multimeter (DMM) 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the Ohms position. 2. Disconnect the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 3. Disconnect the load. 4. Press the MIN MAX button on the DMM. 5. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 6. Connect the other lead of the DMM to the other end of the circuit. 7. If the DMM displays low or no resistance, the circuit has good continuity. With a Test Lamp Note: Only use the test lamp procedure on low impedance power and ground circuits. 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect one lead of the test lamp to one end of the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 5. Connect the other end of the circuit to ground. 6. If the test lamp illuminates (full intensity), then the circuit has good continuity. Testing for Electrical Intermittents Testing for Electrical Intermittents Special Tools EL-39200 Digital Multimeter For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Perform the following procedures while wiggling the harness from side to side. Continue this at convenient points (about 6 inches apart) while watching the test equipment. * Testing for Short to Ground (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Short to Ground) * Testing for Continuity (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Continuity) * Testing for a Short to Voltage (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for a Short to Voltage) If the fault is not identified, perform the procedure below using the MIN MAX feature on the EL-39200 DMM. This feature allows you to manipulate the circuit without having to watch the EL-39200. The EL-39200 will generate an audible tone when a change is detected. Note: The EL-39200 must be used in order to perform the following procedure since the EL-39200 can monitor current, resistance or voltage while recording the minimum (MIN), and maximum (MAX) values measured. 1. Connect the EL-39200 to both sides of a suspected connector (still connected), or from one end of a suspected circuit to the other. Refer to Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11188 Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter) for information on connecting the EL-39200 to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the EL-39200 to the V (AC) or V (DC) position. 3. Press the range button of the EL-39200 in order to select the desired voltage range. 4. Press the MIN MAX button of the EL-39200. The EL-39200 displays 100 ms RECORD and emits an audible tone (beep). Note: The 100 ms RECORD mode is the length of time an input must stay at a new value in order to record the full change. 5. Simulate the condition that is potentially causing the intermittent connection, either by wiggling the connections or the wiring, test driving, or performing other operations. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions). 6. Listen for the audible Min Max Alert which indicates that a new minimum or maximum value has been recorded. 7. Press the MIN MAX button once in order to display the MAX value and note the value. 8. Press the MIN MAX button again in order to display the MIN value and note the value. 9. Determine the difference between the MIN and MAX values. * If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is 1 V or greater an intermittent open or high resistance condition exists. Repair the condition as necessary. * If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is less than 1 V, an intermittent open or high resistance condition does not exist. Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections Special Tools EL-35616 Terminal Test Probe Kit For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). When the condition is not currently present, but is indicated in DTC history, the cause may be intermittent. An intermittent may also be the cause when there is a customer complaint, but the symptom cannot be duplicated. Refer to the Symptom Table of the system that is suspect of causing the condition before trying to locate an intermittent condition. Most intermittent conditions are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. Inspect for the following items: * Wiring broken inside the insulation * Poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector * Poor terminal to wire connection-Some conditions which fall under this description are poor crimps, poor solder joints, crimping over the wire insulation rather than the wire itself, and corrosion in the wire to terminal contact area, etc. * Pierced or damaged insulation can allow moisture to enter the wiring causing corrosion. The conductor can corrode inside the insulation, with little visible evidence. Look for swollen and stiff sections of wire in the suspect circuits. * Wiring which has been pinched, cut, or its insulation rubbed through may cause an intermittent open or short as the bare area touches other wiring or parts of the vehicle. * Wiring that comes in contact with hot or exhaust components * Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions) in order to duplicate the conditions required, in order to verify the customer concern. * Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Electrical Intermittents) for test procedures to detect intermittent open, high resistance, short to ground, and short to voltage conditions. * Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure) for advanced intermittent diagnosis and Vehicle Data Recorder operation. Testing for Terminal Fretting Some intermittent conditions can be caused by wire terminal fretting corrosion. Fretting corrosion is a build-up of insulating, oxidized wear debris that can form when there is a small motion between electrical contacts. The oxidized wear debris can pile up enough at the electrical contact spots that the electrical resistance across the connection increases. Movement between the contacting surfaces as small as 10 to 100 microns can cause fretting. To put this in perspective, a sheet of paper is about 100 microns thick, so fretting motion is small and hard to see. Vibration and thermal expansion/contraction are the main sources that create fretting motion. Since vehicles vibrate and can experience large temperature swings, they are a good source for fretting motion. Tin, copper, nickel, and iron surfaces are all susceptible to fretting corrosion. Fretting corrosion can be difficult to see but it looks like small, dark smudges on the terminals contact surface. To correct a fretting condition disconnect the suspect connector and add Nyogel lubricant 760G (dielectric grease) to both sides of the connector Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11189 terminals. Then reconnect the connector and wipe away any excess lubricant. This will correct the additional terminal contact resistance due to the terminal fretting corrosion. Testing for Proper Terminal Contact It is important to test terminal contact at the component and any inline connectors before replacing a suspect component. Mating terminals must be inspected to ensure good terminal contact. A poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector may be the result of contamination or deformation. Contamination may be caused by the connector halves being improperly connected. A missing or damaged connector seal, damage to the connector itself, or exposing the terminals to moisture and dirt can also cause contamination. Contamination, usually in the underhood or underbody connectors, leads to terminal corrosion, causing an open circuit or intermittently open circuit. Deformation is caused by probing the mating side of a connector terminal without the proper adapter. Always use the EL-35616 when probing connectors. Other causes of terminal deformation are improperly joining the connector halves, or repeatedly separating and joining the connector halves. Deformation, usually to the female terminal contact tang, can result in poor terminal contact causing an open or intermittently open circuit. Testing for Proper Terminal Contact in Bussed Electrical Centers It is very important to use the correct test adapter when testing for proper terminal contact of fuses and relays in a bussed electrical center. Use EL-35616-35 to test for proper terminal contact. Failure to use EL-35616-35 can result in improper diagnosis of the bussed electrical center. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact: 1. Separate the connector halves. 2. Visually inspect the connector halves for contamination. Contamination may result in a white or green build-up within the connector body or between terminals. This causes high terminal resistance, intermittent contact, or an open circuit. An underhood or underbody connector that shows signs of contamination should be replaced in its entirety: terminals, seals, and connector body. 3. Using an equivalent male terminal / terminated lead, verify that the retention force is significantly different between a known good terminal and the suspect terminal. Replace the female terminal in question. Flat Wire (Dock and Lock) Connectors There are no serviceable parts for flat wire (dock and lock) connectors on the harness side or the component side. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact: 1. Remove the component in question. 2. Visually inspect each side of the connector for signs of contamination. Avoid touching either side of the connector as oil from your skin may be a source of contamination as well. 3. Visually inspect the terminal bearing surfaces of the flat wire circuits for splits, cracks, or other imperfections that could cause poor terminal contact. Visually inspect the component side connector to ensure that all of the terminals are uniform and free of damage or deformation. 4. Insert the appropriate adapter from the on the flat wire harness connector in order to test the circuit in question. Control Module/Component Voltage and Grounds Poor voltage or ground connections can cause widely varying symptoms. * Test all control module voltage supply circuits. Many vehicles have multiple circuits supplying voltage to a control module. Other components in the system may have separate voltage supply circuits that may also need to be tested. Inspect connections at the module/component connectors, fuses, and any intermediate connections between the voltage source and the module/component. A test lamp or a DMM may indicate that voltage is present, but neither tests the ability of the circuit to carry sufficient current. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. Refer to Circuit Testing (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Circuit Testing) and Power Distribution Schematics (See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Starting and Charging/Power and Ground Distribution/System Diagram/Power Distribution Schematics). * Test all control module ground and system ground circuits. The control module may have multiple ground circuits. Other components in the system may have separate grounds that may also need to be tested. Inspect grounds for clean and tight connections at the grounding point. Inspect the connections at the component and in splice packs, where applicable. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. Refer to Circuit Testing (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Circuit Testing) and Ground Distribution Schematics (See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Starting and Charging/Power and Ground Distribution/System Diagram/Ground Distribution Schematics). Temperature Sensitivity * An intermittent condition may occur when a component/connection reaches normal operating temperature. The condition may occur only when the component/connection is cold, or only when the component/connection is hot. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11190 * Freeze Frame, Failure Records, Snapshot, or Vehicle Data Recorder data may help with this type of intermittent condition, where applicable. * If the intermittent is related to heat, review the data for a relationship with the following: - High ambient temperatures - Underhood/engine generated heat - Circuit generated heat due to a poor connection, or high electrical load - Higher than normal load conditions, towing, etc. * If the intermittent is related to cold, review the data for the following: - Low ambient temperatures-In extremely low temperatures, ice may form in a connection or component. Inspect for water intrusion. - The condition only occurs on a cold start. - The condition goes away when the vehicle warms up. * Information from the customer may help to determine if the trouble follows a pattern that is temperature related. * If temperature is suspected of causing an intermittent fault condition, attempt to duplicate the condition. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions) in order to duplicate the conditions required. Electromagnetic Interference and Electrical Noise Some electrical components/circuits are sensitive to electromagnetic interference or other types of electrical noise. Inspect for the following conditions: * A misrouted harness that is too close to high voltage/high current devices such as secondary ignition components, motors, generator etc.-These components may induce electrical noise on a circuit that could interfere with normal circuit operation. * Electrical system interference caused by a malfunctioning relay, or a control module driven solenoid or switch-These conditions can cause a sharp electrical surge. Normally, the condition will occur when the malfunctioning component is operating. * Improper installation of non-factory or aftermarket add on accessories such as lights, 2-way radios, amplifiers, electric motors, remote starters, alarm systems, cell phones, etc.-These accessories may lead to interference while in use, but do not fail when the accessories are not in use. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Checking Aftermarket Accessories). * Test for an open diode across the A/C compressor clutch and for other open diodes. Some relays may contain a clamping diode. * The generator may be allowing AC noise into the electrical system. Incorrect Control Module * There are only a few situations where reprogramming a control module is appropriate: - A new service control module is installed. - A control module from another vehicle is installed. - Revised software/calibration files have been released for this vehicle. Note: DO NOT re-program the control module with the SAME software/calibration files that are already present in the control module. This is not an effective repair for any type of concern. * Verify that the control module contains the correct software/calibration. If incorrect programming is found, reprogram the control module with the most current software/calibration. Refer to Control Module References (See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning) for replacement, setup, and programming. Testing for Short to Ground Testing for Short to Ground Special Tools * EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM) * EL 35616-200 - Test Light-Probe Kit For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test Probe Caution). The following procedures test for a short to ground in a circuit. With a Digital Multimeter (DMM) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11191 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the Ohms position. 4. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the other lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. If the DMM does NOT display infinite resistance (OL), there is a short to ground in the circuit. With a Test Lamp 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect one lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to one end of the circuit to be tested. 5. If the test lamp illuminates, there is a short to ground in the circuit. Fuse Powering Several Loads 1. Review the system schematic and locate the fuse that is open. 2. Open the first connector or switch leading from the fuse to each load. 3. Connect a DMM across the fuse terminals (be sure that the fuse is powered). * When the DMM displays voltage the short is in the wiring leading to the first connector or switch. * If the DMM does not display voltage refer to the next step. 4. Close each connector or switch until the DMM displays voltage in order to find which circuit is shorted. Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter Special Tools EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM) For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test Probe Caution). Digital Multimeter (DMM) Basic Requirements Service information is validated using digital multimeters that meet or exceed the following requirements. Using a multimeter that does not meet these basic requirements may give inaccurate readings which could lead to an incorrect diagnosis. Display and Settings 1. Four digits displayed 2. Voltage, amperage, resistance, frequency, diode test settings, and min-max function 3. Display positive and negative values Voltage 1. Have at least 10 Mohm input impedance 2. Test a DC voltage range of 0.1-1000 V. 3. Test an AC voltage range of 0.1-1000 V. Amperage 1. Test a DC amperage range of 0.1µA-10 A. 2. Test an AC amperage range of 0.1µA-10 A. Resistance Test a resistance range of 0.1 ohm-40 Mohm and displays infinite for a value greater than 40 Mohm (O.L. (Over-load)) Frequency Test for a frequency range of 0.5 HZ-199 K HZ Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11192 Diode Test 1. Apply at least 1 mA when performing the diode bias test 2. Display the break over voltage drop (0-3 V) of a forward biased diode 3. Display infinite (O.L. (Over-load)) when a diode is reverse biased Min-Max Readings 1. Can update at a 1 ms sample rate 2. Saves and displays minimum and maximum values Note: Circuits which include any solid state control modules, such as the engine control module (ECM), should only be tested with a 10 MOhms or higher impedance digital multimeter such as the EL-39200. The EL-39200 instruction manual is a good source of information and should be read thoroughly upon receipt of the DMM as well as kept on hand for future reference. A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present if the impedance is low enough, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. In other words, if there is not enough current, the test lamp will not illuminate even though voltage is present. The ohmmeter function on a DMM shows how much resistance exists between 2 points along a circuit. Low resistance in a circuit means good continuity. Note: Disconnect the power feed from the suspect circuit when measuring resistance with a DMM. This prevents incorrect readings. DMMs apply such a small voltage to measure resistance that the presence of voltages can upset a resistance reading. Diodes and solid state components in a circuit can cause a DMM to display a false reading. To find out if a component is affecting a measurement take a reading once, then reverse the leads and take a second reading. If the readings differ the solid state component is affecting the measurement. Following are examples of the various methods of connecting the DMM to the circuit to be tested: * Probe both ends of the connector and either hold the leads in place while manipulating the connector or tape the leads to the harness for continuous monitoring while you perform other operations or test driving. Refer to Probing Electrical Connectors (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Probing Electrical Connectors). * Disconnect the harness at both ends of the suspected circuit where it connects either to a component or to other harnesses. * If the system that is being diagnosed has a specified pinout or breakout box, it may be used in order to simplify connecting the DMM to the circuit or for testing multiple circuits quickly. Using Connector Test Adapters Using Connector Test Adapters Special Tools EL 35616 - Terminal Test Probe Kit For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Caution: Do not insert test equipment probes (DMM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the EL-38125-580 GM Approved Terminal Release Tool Kit in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the EL-38125-580 GM Approved Terminal Release Tool Kit , ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the EL-38125-580 GM Approved Terminal Release Tool Kit label on the inside of the EL-38125-580 GM Approved Terminal Release Tool Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Using Fused Jumper Wires Using Fused Jumper Wires Special Tools J 36169-A Fused Jumper Wire Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11193 Note: A fused jumper may not protect solid state components from being damaged. The J 36169-A includes small clamp connectors that provide adaptation to most connectors without damage. This fused jumper wire is supplied with a 20-A fuse which may not be suitable for some circuits. Do not use a fuse with a higher rating than the fuse that protects the circuit being tested. AFL/EPC Connectors AFL/EPC Connectors Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. 1. For connectors with a bolt in the dress cover, turn the bolt counterclockwise to remove the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11194 2. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the top of the wire dress cover. Slide the CPA forward. 3. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11195 View showing depressing of the lever lock release tab. View of connector in released position. 4. Disconnect the connector from the component. 5. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the dress cover. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs and remove the dress cover. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11196 6. Release the rear lower half of the wiredress cover. 7. Release the tabs that are holding the wiredress cover to the connector body. 8. Remove the nose piece by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the slots on both ends of the connector body. Gently pry the nose piece out of the connector. J 38125-216 can also be used to remove the nose piece. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11197 9. Use the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by lifting the terminal retaining tabs on the inside of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Bosch Connectors (BSK) Bosch Connectors (BSK) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11198 Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 3. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 4. Insert the J 38125-561 tool into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 5. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Bosch Connectors (ECM) Bosch Connectors (ECM) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11199 1. Locate the assist lever on the top of the connector. Move the assist lever to the forward position. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11200 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the connector. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the locking tabs and remove the dress cover. 4. The terminal positive assurance (TPA) is located in the front of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11201 5. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove TPA from the connector. 6. Use the J 38125-213 or the J 38125-556 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11202 Note: Ensure that the dress cover and connector body are both in the released position before reassembling. Failure to do so may cause damage to the connector and component. Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Bosch Connectors (0.64) Bosch Connectors (0.64) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While pressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock until the lever is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Pull the rubber boot that covers the wires back to expose the end of the connector dress cover. 4. Place the connector locking lever in the center of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11203 5. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs that are on the wire end of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover and connector body and pry up. 6. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs located on the opposite side of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover at the connector end and pry up. 7. Remove the dress cover. 8. Cut the tie wrap on the wire bundle. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11204 9. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting a small flat-bladed tool into the small slot in the end of the slider and pushing on the TPA until it comes out of the connector. When the TPA exits the opposite side of the connector, gasp the TPA and pull it completely out of the connector. 10. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 11. Insert the J 38125-560 into the 2 triangular cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 12. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Terminal Replacement Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11205 1. Prior to installation the terminal must be aligned so the (1) coding lugs align with the (2) coding grooves on the connector. 2. Once the terminal is aligned, slide the terminal into the cavity until the retainer has engaged in the cavity of the connector. 3. Slide the TPA in the connector body and seat it using a small flat bladed tool. The TPA is seated when it is flush with the contact housing. 4. Secure the wires to the connector body using a tie wrap and replace the dress cover and grommet. Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Pull out the slider on the connector position assurance (CPA) until it is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11206 5. Insert the J 38125-557 into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Connector Position Assurance Locks Connector Position Assurance Locks The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of the connector. CPAs are used in various connectors throughout the vehicle. CPAs are also used in all SIR system electrical connectors. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals, of the connector. Connector Repairs Connector Repairs Connector Repairs contains a list of all connector repairs. The connector repairs are listed by the connector manufacturer and then by connector type. If the technician cannot identify the manufacturer of the connector, refer to Identifying Connectors below. Knowing the connector manufacturer will assist in finding the correct connector repair from the following list: * Connector Position Assurance Locks (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Connector Position Assurance Locks) * Terminal Position Assurance Locks (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Terminal Position Assurance Locks) * AFL/EPC Connectors (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/AFL/EPC Connectors) * Bosch Connectors (BSK) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Bosch Connectors (BSK))Bosch Connectors (0.64) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Bosch Connectors (0.64))Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT))Bosch Connectors (ECM) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Bosch Connectors (ECM)) * Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack))Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Push to Seat))Delphi Connectors Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11207 (Pull To Seat) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Pull to Seat))Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W))Delphi Connectors (Micro.64) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Micro .64))Delphi Connectors (12-Way) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (12-Way))Delphi Connectors (Steering Gear) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Steering Gear)) * FCI Connectors (Lever Lock) (See: General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/FCI Connectors (Lever Lock))FCI Connectors (SIR) (See: General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/FCI (SIR)) * FEP Connectors (Steering Gear) (See: General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/FEP Connectors (Steering Gear)) * JST Connectors (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/JST Connectors) * Kostal Connectors (Glow Plug Control Module) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Kostal Connectors (Glow Plug Control Module))Kostal Connectors (Transmission) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Kostal Connectors (Transmission)) * Molex Connectors (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Molex Connectors) * Sumitomo Connectors (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Sumitomo Connectors) * Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way))Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor))Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap))Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way))Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module)) * Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Yazaki Connectors (2-Way))Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Yazaki Connectors (16-Way)) * Repairing Connector Terminals (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Repairing Connector Terminals) Connector Anatomy 1 - Connector Positive Assurance (CPA) 2 - Assist Lever 3 - Wiredress Cover 4 - Seal Strain/Relief Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11208 5 - Slide Left Hand 6 - Slide Right Hand 7 - Terminal Positive Assurance (TPA) 8 - Terminal Positive Assurance (TPA) 9 - Connector Seal 10 - Connector Housing 11 - Inner Connector Identifying Connectors Knowing the connector manufacturer is helpful when trying to locating the correct connector repair procedure. There are many different connector designs used on GM vehicles and it is sometimes difficult to identify the connector manufacturer. The information in this document should help with the identification of connector manufactures. The following connector manufacturers make most of the connectors found in GM vehicles: * AFL/EPC (Alcoa Fujikura Ltd./Engineered Plastics Components) * Bosch * Delphi * FCI (Framatome Connectors International) * JAE (Japan Aviation Electronics) * JST (Japan Solderless Terminals) * Kostel * Molex * Sumitomo * Tyco/AMP * Yazaki Identifying the manufacturer of a connector is often difficult. When trying to determine the manufacturer of a connector, look for specific identifying marks that are unique to that connector supplier. Most of these identify marks are hard to find or see. Check the connector carefully and refer to the information below for pictures and descriptions of connector identification markings. * Most of AFLs connectors have EPC on their connector body. Some of the smaller connectors will not have any markings on them. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11209 * In some cases Bosch will actually be printed on the connector. If Bosch does not appear on the connector, look for the Bosch logo. The Bosch logo is a circle with a blunted arrow inside. This logo can appear anywhere on the connector and is often very small. * In some cases Delphi will actually be printed on the connector. If Delphi is not printed on the connector, look for PED. In both cases there is no specific orientation for Delphi or PED and they can appear anywhere on the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11210 * FCI connectors may have the FCI logo on their connectors. The logo is the letters FCI with an "A" above it. * JAE connector have JAE in small letters on their connectors. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11211 * JST connectors have JST in small letters on their connectors, similar to that above. The location of the logo will vary with the connector size and style. * Kostel has an "LK" with a circle around it. These connector are usually used as a transmissions connection. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11212 * Most Molex connectors will have the Molex logo on the dresscover of the connector. In some cases the connectors may have MX followed by another letter. The third letter indicates where the connector was made. A connector with MXD is a Molex connector made in Detroit. Sumitomo has a unique symbol on their connector and possibly a part number. The symbol is similar to that of a diamond lying on its side, similar to that shown. The logo could appear anywhere but the most common place is at the wire side of the housing. * Tyco/AMP has many different and unique connector designs. Some may or may not have identifiable marks on them. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11213 * Yazaki has a wedge or arrow shape, similar to that shown. Delphi Connectors (Push to Seat) Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Follow the steps below in order to repair push to seat connectors. 1. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device, the connector position assurance (CPA) device, and/or the secondary lock. 2. Separate the connector halves (1). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11214 3. Use the proper pick or removal tool (1) in order to release the terminal. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 4. Gently pull the cable and the terminal (2) out of the back of the connector. 5. Re-form the locking device if you are going to reuse the terminal (1). 6. To repair the terminal, refer to Terminal Repair. Terminal Repair 1. Slip the cable seal away from the terminal. 2. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 3. Slip a new cable seal onto the wire. 4. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 5. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 6. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. 7. Slide the cable seal toward the terminal. 8. Crimp the cable seal and the insulation. 9. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply grease to the connector. Reinstalling Terminal 1. In order to reuse a terminal or lead assembly, refer to Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Wiring Repairs). 2. Ensure that the cable seal is kept on the terminal side of the splice. 3. Insert the lead from the back until it catches. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Terminated Lead Repair 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Find the appropriate terminated lead. 3. Use the appropriate splice sleeves depending on the gauge size. 4. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves). Delphi Connectors (Pull to Seat) Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) Special Tools Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11215 J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal If the terminal is visibly damaged or is suspected of having a faulty connection, the terminal should be replaced. Follow the steps below in order to repair pull-to-seat connectors: 1. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) device and/or the secondary lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component or separate the connectors for in-line connectors. 3. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device. 4. Insert the proper pick or removal tool into the front of the connector body. Note: On connectors with more than one terminal the service loop may not be large enough to remove the terminal and crimp on a new one. If the terminal wire does not have a large enough service loop for removal, cut the wire 5 cm (2 in) behind the connector before removal. 5. Grasp the wire at the back of the connector body and gently push the terminal out the front of the connector body. Terminal Repair 1. If the wire needed to be cut in order to remove the terminal, gently push a small length of the same size wire through the back of the connector cavity until there is enough wire exposed in order to crimp on a new terminal. If the wire was not cut, cut the existing wire as close to the old terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 4. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. Terminal Installation 1. Align the terminal and pull the wire from the back of the connector in order to seat the terminal. 2. If necessary, cut the new wire to proper length and splice with existing circuit. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves). 3. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply dielectric grease to the connector. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Micro .64) Delphi Connectors (Micro.64) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11216 Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro.64 connectors. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. The lever lock may be located on the top or sides of the wire dress cover. View of a typical Micro 64 connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11217 Depress the lock and pull the lever over and past the lock. View of the connector when released from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11218 View of another type of Micro 64 connector. Depress the locks that are located on both sides of the wiredress cover and pull the lever over and past the locks. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11219 View of the connector when released from the component. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the front of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool push down on one of the locking tabs and pull the cover up until the dress cover releases. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. 4. Once the front 2 locks are unlocked, lift the front of the dress cover and pull it forward. Note: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 5. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the small slot on the TPA and pushing down until the TPA releases. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11220 Note: Be careful not to angle or rock the J 38125-21 tool when inserting it into the connector or the tool may break. 6. Insert the J 38125-21 tool into the round canal between the terminals cavities at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Follow the steps below in order to repair Micro 64 connector terminals. The Micro 64 connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-64 (M jaw) was developed to crimp Micro 64 terminals. The J 38125-64 crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. The J 38125-64 crimping tool is also designed to crimp both the wire and the insulation at the same time. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro 64 terminals. Note: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gauge wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 1. Cut the wire as close to the damaged terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11221 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert terminal into the appropriate terminal holder until it hits bottom and stops. The correct terminal holder is determined by the wire size. Also ensure that the terminals wings are pointing towards the former on the tool and the release locator. 5. Insert the stripped cable into the terminal. Insulation should be visible on both sides of the terminal insulation wings. 6. Compress the handles until the ratchet automatically releases. 7. Place the terminal into the appropriate cavity and assemble the connector. Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11222 Terminal Removal Procedure There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W connectors. These connectors are very similar but use different terminals and have some minor physical differences also. The first connector design of the Micro-Pack 100W (1) has a white connector interface that holds the terminals. The second design of the Micro-Pack 100W (2) has a gray interface to hold the terminals. Also, the first design has terminal cavities that are further apart (3 mm centerline) and offset from the other row of terminal cavities in the connector. The second design has terminals cavities that are closer together (2.54 mm centerline) and aligned vertically. One other way to identify the second design is the thin strip of material that runs along the outside of the cavities. Note: There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W terminals which are very similar. Ensure that you have the correct terminal before crimping the new terminal to the wire. The first design connector uses the longer terminal (1) that has a raised area in front of the recess in the terminal. The second design connector uses the shorter terminal without the raised area. Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro-Pack 100W connectors. Some Micro-Pack 100W connector disassembly procedures will vary. Use this procedure as a guide. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11223 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Locate the nose piece locking tabs that are positioned on the side of the connector nose piece. The connector nose piece acts as a terminal positive assurance (TPA) and may be referred to as such. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to push in one of the locking tabs while gently pulling on the same side of the nose piece. 4. Repeat the procedure for the other locking tab and remove the nose piece. 5. Remove the wire dress cover. The following is a general procedure for wire dress cover removal. Use this procedure as a guide, some dress cover removal procedures may vary. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11224 6. Use fingers to squeeze the 2 locking legs of the cover. 7. Apply pressure and gently rock the cover until one locking leg is unseated. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11225 8. Continue to apply pressure and rock the cover until the second locking leg is unseated. Repeat procedure for the other side of the dress cover and remove the cover. 9. Use J 38125-12A to gently lift the terminal retaining tab while gently pulling the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. If the terminal is severely bent or damaged, it may be possible on some connectors to push the wire out of the front of the connector instead of pulling it through. This will prevent damage to the internal seals of the connector. Once the terminal is pushed out of the connector, cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible and pull the wire through the connector. Terminal Repair Procedure The Micro-Pack 100W connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool was developed to crimp Micro-Pack 100W terminals. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro-Pack 100 terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11226 1. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. Note: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gauge wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert the terminal into the crimp tool until the core wings are flush with the anvil on the crimp tool. Be sure that the wings are pointed toward the crimp tool former and release the spring locator. The locator will hold the terminal in place. Inspect the alignment of the terminal wings with the crimp tool former. If the terminal wings are wider than the crimp tool former, remove the terminal and bend the terminal wings in slightly. 5. Place stripped wire into terminal. 6. Crimp the new terminal to the wire. If a jam occurs, press the emergency release to open applicator. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11227 Terminal Replacement Procedure After the terminal is crimped to the wire perform the following procedure in order to replace Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the Terminal Removal Procedure. Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The following is the proper procedure for the repair of Weather Pack(R) Connectors. 1. Separate the connector halves (1). 2. Open the secondary lock. A secondary lock aids in terminal retention and is usually molded to the connector (1). 3. Grasp the wire and push the terminal to the forward most position. Hold the wire in this position. 4. Insert the Weather Pack(R) terminal removal tool J 38125-10A into the front (mating end) of the connector cavity until it rests on the cavity shoulder (1). 5. Gently pull on the wire to remove the terminal through the back of the connector (2). Note: Never use force to remove a terminal from a connector. 6. Inspect the terminal and connector for damage. Repair as necessary. Refer to Repairing Connector Terminals (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Repairing Connector Terminals). 7. Reform the lock tang (2) and reset terminal in connector body. 8. Close secondary locks and join connector halves. 9. Verify that circuit is complete and working satisfactorily. 10. Perform system check. Delphi Connectors (12-Way) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11228 Delphi Connectors (12-Way) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) and slide the lever lock away from the connector body. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs on the dress cover of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool release all of the locking tabs. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11229 4. Release the lower wire dress cover locking tab. 5. Release the upper wire dress cover locking tab. 6. Once the locks are unlocked, lift the dress cover off. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11230 Note: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 7. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the locking tabs on both sides of the TPA. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. 8. Remove the nose piece by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the locking tabs on both sides of the nose piece. Gently pry the nose piece out of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11231 9. Insert the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Delphi Connectors (Steering Gear) Delphi Connectors (Steering Gear) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11232 Removal Procedure 1. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the locking tab on the connector. 2. Push down the locking tab to release the connector. The small flat-bladed tool may need to be pushed down and angled back slightly to depress the locking tab. Pull on the connector body while releasing the locking tab to disconnect the connector. FCI Connectors (Lever Lock) FCI Connectors (Lever Lock) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11233 Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. 1. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. 2. The release tab is located on the top of the wiredress cover. 3. View of connector in released position. 4. Disconnect the connector from the component. 5. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the dress cover. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs and remove the dress cover. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11234 6. Use a small flat-blade tool to slide the terminal position assurance (TPA) up one notch on both ends of the connector. The TPA is located underneath the wire dress cover. For the larger terminals insert the J 38125-556 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. For the smaller terminals insert the J 38125-560 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11235 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. FCI (SIR) FCI Connectors (SIR) Removal Procedure Note: The orange CPA must be released first to disconnect or to connect the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11236 1. Lift the orange CPA vertically (avoid lifting on an angle to the connector) approximately 4 mm to release the connector. Use a small flat-bladed tool to help release the orange CPA. The orange CPA can also be released manually without any tools. 2. Grab the connector on both sides and lift the connector vertically to disconnect the connector. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11237 1. Lift the orange CPA vertically approximately 4 mm before installing the connector. Use a small flat-bladed tool to help release the orange CPA. The orange CPA can also be released manually without any tools. 2. Line up the connector key tabs with the initiator key slots. Grab the connector on both sides and push the connector down into the initiator connector sub assembly until fully seated. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11238 3. After the connector is fully seated, push down the orange CPA with your thumb. Push down until the orange CPA is touching the yellow cover on the connector. FEP Connectors (Steering Gear) FEP Connectors (Steering Gear) Removal Procedure 1. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the locking tab on the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11239 2. Push down the locking tab to release the connector. The small flat-bladed tool may need to be pushed down and angled back slightly to depress the locking tab. Pull on the connector body while releasing the locking tab to disconnect the connector. JST Connectors JST Connectors Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. While depressing the lock, remove the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11240 2. Locate the two indents of the terminal position assurance (TPA) located on the bottom of the connector body. Note: The TPA cannot be removed from the connector while there are terminals present in the connector body. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to very carefully raise the TPA on both sides of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11241 4. View of the TPA when removed from the connector body. 5. Use the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the left side of the terminal release cavity as shown in the graphic. Use the tool to move the terminal release to the right with a gentle prying motion. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Kostal Connectors (Glow Plug Control Module) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11242 Kostal Connectors (Glow Plug Control Module) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure View of typical connector. View of connector in released position. 1. Locate the assist lever at the back of the connector. Move the assist lever to the rear position. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11243 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove the dress cover. 4. Slide the dress cover forward and off of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11244 5. The terminal positive assurance (TPA) is located in the front and rear of the connector. Note: The front TPA cannot be removed from the connector. Only move it to the preset position. 6. Use a small flat-blade tool to move the front TPA to the preset position, outboard approximately 0.125 in. (3 mm). 7. Use a small flat-blade tool to completely remove the rear TPA from the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11245 8. Use the J 38125-24 or the J 38125-560 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 9. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Kostal Connectors (Transmission) Kostal Connectors (Transmission) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11246 1. While depressing the lock, twist and remove the connector from the component. 2. Locate the terminal position assurance (TPA). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11247 Note: The TPA cannot be removed from the connector while there are terminals present in the connector body. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to push the TPA until it bottoms out. 4. Use the J 38125-28 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal cavity as shown in the graphic. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 5. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Terminal Replacement Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11248 After the terminal is crimped to the wire, perform the following procedure in order to replace the terminal. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. Locate the terminal position assurance (TPA). 4. Use a small flat-blade tool to push the TPA until it bottoms out. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11249 5. Ensure the TPA is fully seated. The TPA should be centered and flush with the connector body when viewed. Molex Connectors Molex Connectors Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the top of the wire dress cover. Slide the CPA forward. 2. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11250 3. The lever should be in the full forward position. 4. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11251 5. Remove the dress cover by using a flat bladed tool to release the dress cover locking tabs and lift up on the dress cover. 6. Cut the tie wrap that holds the wires to the connector body. 7. Use a small flat-blade tool to pry one side of the nose piece up to the pre-stage position. When the nose piece is in the pre-staged position, the nose piece will be raised above the connector body the length of the step in the nose piece. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11252 8. Use a small flat-blade tool to pry the other side of the piece to the pre-stage position. If the nose piece is higher than the first step in the nose piece, gently push down on the nose piece until it meets with resistance from the connector body, you should feel the nose piece click into position. 9. Insert the J 38125-213 into the small terminal release hole on the nose piece and gently pull on the back of the wire. 10. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Refer to the terminal crimping procedure in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit. Terminal Replacement Procedure After the terminal is crimped to the wire, perform the following procedure in order to replace the terminal. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11253 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the connector disassembly procedure. Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the connector body and pull the CPA out. The CPA is on the wire harness side of connector. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Use a small flat-bladed tool to gently pry off the dress cover by inserting the tool under the cover opposite the harness side and prying up. 4. Remove the cover. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11254 5. Using a small flat-bladed tool, push on the side of the nose piece retainer while pushing the nose piece forward with your thumb. This will release the terminal position assurance (TPA). 6. Insert the J 38125-12A into the corresponding terminal release cavity. The release cavities are the 2 center rows of cavities on one half of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11255 7. Pressing the J 38125-12A tool in the release cavity of the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and crimper in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. Slide the lever lock away from the connector body. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs on the dress cover of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool release all of the locking tabs. 4. Once the locks are unlocked, lift the dress cover off. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11256 Note: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 5. Release the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the blue locking tabs on both ends of the connector. Gently slide the TPA up to the released position on both ends. 6. For the larger terminals insert the J 38125-13A tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. For the smaller terminals insert the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11257 View of the release tool being used for the larger terminals. View of the release tool being used for the larger terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11258 View of the release tool being used for the smaller terminals. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11259 Side view of connector. View of top of connector. 1. Locate the assist lever and lock on the top of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11260 2. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. 3. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11261 4. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the rear of the connector. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. 5. Once the locking tabs are unlocked, slide the inner connector out of the rear of the connector housing. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11262 6. Use the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by pressing on the tang. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Repairing Connector Terminals Repairing Connector Terminals Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Use the following repair procedures in order to repair the following: * Push to Seat terminals * Pull to Seat terminals Some terminals do not require all of the steps shown. Skip the steps that do not apply for your terminal repair. The J-38125 contains further information. 1. Cut off the terminal between the core and the insulation crimp. Minimize any wire loss. For cable seal terminals, remove the seal. 2. Apply the correct cable seal per gauge size of the wire, if used. Slide the seal back along the wire in order to enable insulation removal. 3. Remove the insulation. 4. For sealed terminals only, align the seal with the end of the cable insulation. 5. Position the strip in the terminal. For sealed terminals, position the strip and seal in the terminal. 6. Hand crimp the core wings. 7. Hand crimp the insulation wings. For sealed terminals, hand crimp the insulation wings around the seal and the cable. 8. Solder all of the hand crimp terminals excepting Micro-Pack 100.64 size. Soldering Micro-Pack 100 World terminals may damage the terminal. Sumitomo Connectors Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11263 Sumitomo Connectors Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11264 3. Remove the dress cover by using a flat-blade tool to release the connector locking tabs and pulling off the dress cover. 4. Relieve the tension on the nose piece retainers by inserting J 38125-12A into the single retainer slot on the end of the nose piece and gently prying out the locking tab. Repeat the process for both of the nose piece locking tabs on the opposite side of the nose piece. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11265 5. Once the nose piece retainers are relaxed, use the J 38125-552 to pull up the nose piece by hooking the tool under the nose piece and pulling up. The nose piece should raise slightly. 6. On the opposite side of the nose piece, use the J 38125-552 to pull up the nose piece by hooking the tool under the nose piece and pulling up. The nose piece should release completely. If the nose piece does not come off, repeat the procedure on the opposite side. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11266 7. The illustration above identifies the entry canal where the terminal release tool will be inserted, and the terminal cavity. * Terminal (1) * Entry Canal (2) 8. Insert the J 38125-553 tool into the entry canal and pry up on the terminal retainer. The terminal retainer is a small plastic piece on the top of the terminal. The terminal retainer must be held up while the terminal is pulled out of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11267 9. The illustration shows a cutaway view of the connector to aid the technician in releasing the terminal retainer. 10. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Refer to the terminal crimping procedure in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit. Terminal Replacement Procedure After the terminal is crimped to the wire, perform the following procedure in order to replace the terminal. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the connector disassembly procedure. Terminal Position Assurance Locks Terminal Position Assurance Locks The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11268 2. Insert the J 38125-11A tool into the cavity on the lower right hand face of the connector until the terminal release tang access panel slides over. 3. Ensure that the terminal release tang access panel is in the correct location to access the terminals. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11269 5. Insert the J 38125-11A into the terminal release tang access slot located behind the access panel of the connector and press down on the terminal while carefully pulling the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component by pressing down on the connector position assurance (CPA). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11270 2. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting the tool in the small recess on the side of the connector and pushing up until the TPA releases from the connector body. The TPA should raise just slightly. Do not try to remove the TPA. Note: The TPA on this connector cannot be removed unless the terminals are removed first. The TPA will come out of the connector body, but only slightly. When the TPA is slightly raised the terminals can be removed. Using excessive force to remove the TPA with the terminals still in the connector will damage the connector. 3. Repeat the process for the other side of the connector. 4. Ensure that the TPA is in the proper position to remove the terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11271 5. While pushing the terminal forward, insert the J 38125-24 in the release cavity above the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11272 2. Insert a small flat-blade tool in the slot below the front loaded terminal position assurance (TPA) and pry up. 3. Remove the TPA by pulling it out of the connector. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-553 on a slight upward angle into the cavity below the terminal to be removed. Ensure that the pointed on the end of the tool is facing the bottom of the terminal and it stays in contact with the terminal until it stops on the plastic terminal retainer. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11273 6. Gently pry the plastic terminal retainer down and carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11274 1. While depressing the lock, pull the two connector halves apart. Note: The TPA is fragile and may break if not done carefully. 2. Use a small flat-blade tool to very carefully push the terminal position assurance (TPA) towards the face of the connector on both sides of the connector. 3. View of the male half of the connector with female terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11275 4. View of the female half of the connector with male terminals. 5. Use the J 38125-215 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. View of the female half of the connector with male terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11276 7. View of the male half of the connector with female terminals. 8. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers A circuit breaker is a protective device that is designed to open the circuit when a current load is in excess of the rated breaker capacity. If there is a short or other type of overload condition in the circuit, the excessive current will open the circuit between the circuit breaker terminals. Two types of circuit breakers are used. Circuit Breaker - This type opens when excessive current passes through it for a period of time. It closes again after a few seconds, and if the cause of the high current is still present, it will open again. The circuit breaker will continue to cycle open and closed until the condition causing the high current is removed. Positive Temperature Coefficient (PTC) Circuit Breaker - This type greatly increases its resistance when excessive current passes through it. The excessive current heats the PTC device, as the device heats its resistance increases. Eventually the resistance gets so high that the circuit is effectively open. Unlike the ordinary circuit breaker the PTC unit will not reset until the circuit is opened, by removing the voltage from its terminals. Once the voltage is removed the circuit breaker will re-close within a second or 2. Circuit Protection - Fuses Circuit Protection - Fuses Special Tools EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM) For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11277 The fuse is the most common method of an automotive wiring circuit protection. Whenever there is an excessive amount of current flowing through a circuit the fusible element will melt and create an open or incomplete circuit. Fuses are a one time protection device and must be replaced each time the circuit is overloaded. To determine if a fuse is open, remove the suspected fuse and examine if the element in the fuse is broken (2). If not broken (1), also check for continuity using a Digital Multimeter (DMM) or a continuity tester. If the element is broken or continuity is suspect, replace the fuse with one of equal current rating. Circuit Protection - Fusible Links Circuit Protection - Fusible Links Special Tools EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM) For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Fusible link is wire designed to melt and break continuity when excessive current is applied. It is often located between or near the battery and starter or electrical center. Use a continuity tester or a Digital Multimeter (DMM) at each end of the wire containing the fusible link in order to determine if it is broken. If broken, it must be replaced with fusible link of the same gauge size. Repairing a Fusible Link Note: Fusible links cut longer than 225 mm (approximately 9 in) will not provide sufficient overload protection. Flat Wire Repairs Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11278 Flat Wire Repairs The flat wire within the flex wiring harness is not serviceable. If an open or short exists within the flex wiring harness the complete harness must be replaced. GMLAN Wiring Repairs GMLAN Wiring Repairs Special Tools * EL-38125-10 - Splice Sleeve Crimping Tool * J 38125-5 - Ultra Torch Special Tool * DuraSeal splice sleeves * A wire stripping tool For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: * A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. * A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The GM Local Area Network (GMLAN) System requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working on GMLAN connectors and terminals. GMLAN Repairs Note: When making a repair to any GMLAN network, the original wire length after the repair must be the same length as before the repair. If the network is a twisted pair, the twist must be maintained after the repair is completed. GMLAN has 2 types of networks, low speed and high speed. Low speed GMLAN has a single wire and works at slow speeds. High speed GMLAN has 2 wires in a twisted pair and works at higher speeds. For more information on GMLAN, refer to Data Link Communications Description and Operation ( See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Information Bus/Description and Operation). GMLAN Connector Terminal Repair Note: A terminated lead can be used to replace damaged connector terminals for both high speed and low speed GMLAN systems. When making a connector terminal repair on a GMLAN high speed system with twisted pair wires, do not untwist the wires more than necessary to make the repair. If the individual terminals are damaged on any GMLAN connection, use the appropriate connector repair procedure in order to repair the terminal. Refer to Connector Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Connector Repairs) for the appropriate connector repair procedure. GMLAN Wire Repair Note: Refer to Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Wiring Repairs) in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gauge size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and EL-38125-10 - tool. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the DuraSeal splice sleeves. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11279 Note: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: * Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. * Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. * Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert to regional wiring gauge size. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the EL-38125-10 - tool in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the splice sleeve crimp tool. The crimp tool has four nests, one for each color. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11280 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs Caution: Do not solder repairs under any circumstances as this could result in the air reference being obstructed. If the heated oxygen sensor pigtail wiring, connector, or terminal is damaged the entire oxygen sensor assembly must be replaced. Do not attempt to repair the wiring, connector, or terminals. In order for the sensor to function properly it must have a clean air reference. This clean air reference is obtained by way of the oxygen sensor signal and heater wires. Any attempt to repair the wires, connectors or terminals could result in the obstruction of the air reference and degrade oxygen sensor performance. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11281 The following guidelines should be used when servicing the heated oxygen sensor: * Do not apply contact cleaner or other materials to the sensor or vehicle harness connectors. These materials may get into the sensor, causing poor performance. Also, the sensor pigtail and harness wires must not be damaged in such a way that the wires inside are exposed. This could provide a path for foreign materials to enter the sensor and cause performance problems. * Neither the sensor nor vehicle lead wires should be bent sharply or kinked. Sharp bends, kinks, etc., could block the reference air path through the lead wire. * Do not remove or defeat the oxygen sensor ground wire (where applicable). Vehicles that utilize the ground wire sensor may rely on this ground as the only ground contact to the sensor. Removal of the ground wire will also cause poor engine performance. * To prevent damage due to water intrusion, be sure that the peripheral seal remains intact on the vehicle harness connector. High Temperature Wiring Repairs High Temperature Wiring Repairs Special Tools * EL-38125-10 - Splice Sleeve Crimping Tool * J 38125-5 - Ultra Torch * DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). High Temperature Wiring Wiring that is exposed to high temperatures, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time may use materials i.e. wires, connectors, and shielding that has a higher heat rating than typical wiring. When making a repair in a high temperature area observe the following: * Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature to replace any damaged wire. * Replace any heat shielding that is removed. * Cover any DuraSeal splice sleeves with SCT1 shrink tubing. * After making a wiring repair, ensure that the location of the wiring is not moved closer to the heat source. Identifying High Temperature Wiring Wiring that is exposed to high temperature, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time need special considerations when making wiring repairs. Areas that may be exposed to higher temperatures can be identified by heat resistant materials that are being used in those areas. These materials may include heat reflective tape, moon tape, and high temperature shrink tubing. Also conduit and other protective coverings may be used. Because conduit or similar coverings are used throughout the vehicle regardless of the temperature, it may be necessary for the technician to determine if an area is exposed to excessive heat before making a wiring repair. Obvious areas of consideration would be any area located near the exhaust manifolds, catalytic converter, and exhaust pipes. Items Required * DuraSeal splice sleeves to crimp and seal connections * High temperature SCT1 shrink tubing to protect the splice sleeves * Terminated leads or pigtails * The correct tools to remove the terminals from the connectors Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature of the same or larger gauge size as the original wire when repair damage wire. Also replace any reflective tape that you remove during the repair. High Temperature Wire Repair Note: Refer to Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Wiring Repairs) in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature rating of the same gauge size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the EL-38125-10 - tool and then encapsulate the splice sleeve using the high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11282 Note: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: * Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. * Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. * Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert to regional wiring gauge size. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Slide a section of high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing down the length of wire to be spliced. Ensure that the shrink tubing will not interfere with the splice procedure. 5. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 6. Use the EL-38125-10 - tool in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the splice sleeve crimp tool. The crimp tool has four nests, one for each color. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11283 7. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 8. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 9. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 10. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 11. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11284 12. Center the high temperature SCT1 shrink tube over the DuraSeal splice sleeve. 13. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the high temperature heat shrink tubing. 14. Gradually move the heat from the center to the open end of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. 15. Replace any reflective tape and clips that may have been remove during the repair. Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation If the wire insulation has been chafed, or broken, enough to show the conductive portion of the wire, and the wire is not damaged, determine the length of insulation that needs to be repaired. If the repair is less than 280 mm (11 in), cut the wire within the damaged area. Than slide the appropriate heat shrink tubing (listed below) over the wire, and repair the wire by splicing the wires together. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves). Once the wire is spliced together slide heat shrink tubing over the damaged area and apply heat to seal the repaired wire. If the wire is damaged, or the damaged area is larger than 280 mm (11 in), than replace the damaged wire by splicing in a new section of wire. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11285 SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs Special Tools * EL-38125-10 - Splice Sleeve Crimping Tool * J 38125-5 - Ultra Torch * DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: * A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. * A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides the necessary low resistance contact integrity for these sensitive, low energy circuits. The Supplemental Inflatable Restraint (SIR) System/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working with the SIR/SRS, and the wiring components, such as connectors and terminals. SIR/SRS Connector Repair (Plastic Body and Terminal Metal Pin) Note: Do not use the terminals in the kit in order to replace damaged SIR/SRS system terminals. Use either an SIR/SRS pigtail or a terminated lead from the SIR Repair Kit Tray. The terminals in the SIR/SRS system are made with a special plating. This plating provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. Pigtail repair packs are available for SIR/SRS connectors with eight or less terminals. Only the connector body is available for connectors with more than eight terminals. Terminated leads can be used to replace damaged terminals when replacing the connector body. SIR/SRS Component Wire Pigtail Repair Note: Do not make wire, connector, or terminal repairs on components with wire pigtails. A wire pigtail is a wire or wires attached directly to the device, not by a connector. If a wiring pigtail is damaged, you must replace the entire component, with pigtail. The inflatable restraint steering wheel module coil is an example of a pigtail component. SIR/SRS Wire Repair Note: Refer to Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Wiring Repairs) in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11286 If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gauge size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and EL-38125-10 - tool. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the DuraSeal splice sleeves. Note: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: * Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. * Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. * Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert to regional wiring gauge size. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the EL-38125-10 - tool in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the splice sleeve crimp tool. The crimp tool has four nests, one for each color. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11287 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Connector Position Assurance (CPA) The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of a connector. CPAs are used in all SIR System connectors and also in some connectors of other systems. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals of a connection. Terminal Position Assurance (TPA) The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11288 Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Special Tools * EL-38125-10 - Splice Sleeve Crimping Tool * J 38125-5 - Ultra Torch * DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Note: Use only DuraSeal splice sleeves. Other splice sleeves may not protect the splice from moisture or provide a good electrical connection. Use DuraSeal splice sleeves to form a one-to-one splice on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. Use DuraSeal splice sleeves where there is special requirements such as moisture sealing. Follow the instructions below in order to splice copper wire using DuraSeal splice sleeves. Note: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: * Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. * Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. * Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert to regional wiring gauge size. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11289 5. Use the EL-38125-10 - tool in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the splice sleeve crimp tool. The crimp tool has four nests, one for each color. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11290 * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Splicing Inline Harness Diodes Splicing Inline Harness Diodes Many vehicle electrical systems use a diode to isolate circuits and protect the components from voltage spikes. When installing a new diode use the following procedure. 1. Open the harness. * If the harness is taped, remove the tape. * To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing seam ripper (available from sewing supply stores) in order to cut open the harness. * If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the diode. 2. If the diode is taped to the harness, remove all of the tape. 3. Check and record the current flow direction and orientation of diode. 4. Remove the inoperative diode from the harness with a suitable soldering tool. Note: If the diode is located next to a connector terminal remove the terminal(s) from the connector to prevent damage from the soldering tool. 5. Carefully strip away a section of insulation next to the old soldered portion of the wire(s). Do not remove any more than is needed to attach the new diode. 6. Check current flow direction of the new diode, being sure to install the diode with correct bias. Reference the appropriate service manual wiring schematic to obtain the correct diode installation position. 7. Attach the new diode to the wire(s) using 60/40 rosin core solder. Before soldering attach some heat sinks (aluminum alligator clips) across the diode wire ends to protect the diode from excessive heat. Follow the manufacturer's instruction for the soldering equipment. 8. Reinstall terminal(s) into the connector body if previously removed. Note: To prevent shorts to ground and water intrusion, completely cover all exposed wire and diode attachment points with tape. 9. Tape the diode to the harness or connector using electrical tape. Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable Twisted/shielded cable is used in order to protect wiring from electrical noise. Two-conductor cable of this construction is used between the radio and the Delco-Bose(R) speaker/amplifier units and other applications where low level, sensitive signals must be carried. Follow the instructions below in order to repair the twisted/shielded cable. 1. Remove the outer jacket (1). Use care not to cut into the drain wire of the mylar tape. 2. Unwrap the tape. Do not remove the tape. Use the tape in order to rewrap the twisted conductors after the splice is made. 3. Prepare the splice. Untwist the conductors and follow the instructions for Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves). Staggering the splices by 65 mm (2.5 in) is recommended. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11291 Note: Apply the mylar tape with the aluminum side inward. This ensures good electrical contact with the drain wire. 4. Re-assemble the cable. * Rewrap the conductors with the mylar tape. If the mylar tape is damaged, use 3M product AL-36FR to replace the damaged mylar tape. * Use caution not to wrap the drain wire in the tape (1). * Follow the splicing instructions for copper wire and splice the drain wire. * Wrap the drain wire around the conductors and tape with electrical tape to replace the outer insulation. 5. Tape over the entire cable. Use a winding motion when you apply the tape. Wiring Repairs Wiring Repairs The Wiring Repairs section contains the following types of wiring repair information. Using these elements together will make wiring repair faster and easier: * Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections) * Flat Wire Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Flat Wire Repairs) * GMLAN Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/GMLAN Wiring Repairs) * High Temperature Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/High Temperature Wiring Repairs) * Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs) * Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves) * Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable) * Splicing Inline Harness Diodes (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Inline Harness Diodes) * SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs) US English/Metric Conversion US English/Metric Conversion Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11292 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11293 Basic Digital Multimeter Requirements Basic Digital Multimeter Requirements Digital Multimeter (DMM) Basic Requirements Service information is validated using digital multimeters that meet or exceed the following requirements. Using a multimeter that does not meet these basic requirements may give inaccurate readings which could lead to an incorrect diagnosis. Display and Settings 1. Four digits displayed 2. Voltage, amperage, resistance, frequency, diode test settings, and min-max function 3. Display positive and negative values Voltage 1. Have at least 10 Mohm input impedance 2. Test a DC voltage range of 0.1-1000 V. 3. Test an AC voltage range of 0.1-1000 V. Amperage 1. Test a DC amperage range of 0.1µA-10 A. 2. Test an AC amperage range of 0.1µA-10 A. Resistance Test a resistance range of 0.1 ohm-40 Mohm and displays infinite for a value greater than 40 Mohm (O.L. (Over-load)) Frequency Test for a frequency range of 0.5 HZ-199 K HZ Diode Test 1. Apply at least 1 mA when performing the diode bias test 2. Display the break over voltage drop (0-3 V) of a forward biased diode 3. Display infinite (O.L. (Over-load)) when a diode is reverse biased Min-Max Readings 1. Can update at a 1 ms sample rate 2. Saves and displays minimum and maximum values Testing Ground and Low Reference Circuits Testing Ground and Low Reference Circuits Because a test lamp can light with up to 200 ohm in a ground or low reference circuit they are not recommended to be used for this type of test. A low impedance test lamp can light and indicate the circuit is good when there is as much as 20-30 ohm present, while a high impedance test lamp can light with up to 200 ohm present in the circuit. This is why the Digital Multi-Meter (DMM) is used when validating a ground or low reference circuit continuity. When using the DMM there are many vehicle conditions that can affect the ground and low reference continuity testing. If these conditions are not met, a ground or low reference circuit test can fail on a good circuit. This may cause longer diagnosis time and incorrect component replacement. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11294 Any current flow through a ground or low reference circuit, while being tested, will skew the DMM continuity reading, or display a reading higher than when there is no current flowing. Performing a ground or low reference circuit continuity test, in reference to the vehicles battery negative terminal, will have the highest risk of failing a good ground or low reference circuit test than any other ground reference point. The best ground test points would be a control module housing (if the control modules housing is metal and grounded), door jamb striker (if attached to metal), under dash metal frame work, engine block, or body ground studs (other than where the negative battery cable is attached). A typical DMM ground or low reference circuit continuity reading can be as high as 100 ohm with the ignition ON, and drop to 15-25 ohm after the ignition is turned OFF. The reading will drop below 10 ohm after 30-40 seconds, then below 5 ohm after 60 seconds. Once the vehicle completely goes to sleep (generally 3-10 minutes) the reading will drop below 0.3 ohm. The following list of conditions may need to be met to ensure a valid continuity reading on a ground or low reference circuit: * Ignition OFF * Key out of the ignition switch (when not equipped with keyless entry and remote start) * Retained Accessory Power (RAP) OFF (open and close the driver door after ignition OFF) * Battery charger set at a 2 A or less charge rate * Scan tool not communicating with any vehicle control module (in some cases it may need to be disconnected from the DLC) * All entry doors closed * Headlamps OFF (auto headlamps disabled) * Any delay lighting OFF * HVAC after blow OFF * Any accessory that can work when the ignition is OFF * Wait up to 60 seconds (after all other listed conditions are met) Activating the DOOR LOCK function with a key fob can greatly reduce the time to achieve a valid ground or low reference continuity test result. Terminal Wiring Repair Terminal Wiring Repair Special Tools * EL-38125-10 - Splice Sleeve Crimp Tool * EL-38125-580 - Terminal Release Tool Kit * J-38125-5 - Ultra Torch * EL-35616 - Connector Test Adapter Kit For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Note: All repairs near the engine manifold, turbo engine and all exhaust pipes should follow the High Temperature Wiring Repair procedures. 1. Find the appropriate connector end view within the connector end view section. The connector end view has the following information: * Diagnostic probe tool * Terminal release tool * Terminal/terminated lead part numbers 2. Determine if a terminal is damaged. Note: Not using the proper test kit probe may cause damage to the terminal(s) that are probed. * Locate the diagnostic probe tool from the connector end view. The connector end view describes the color and part number to help the technician find and use the correct tool. * Connect the probe tool to the Digital Multimeter. * Insert the probe tool into the cavity and follow the procedures from the Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter). 3. Disconnect the connector body to perform the repair. Note: Several procedures for specific connector bodies are called out in Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Wiring Repairs). Use the following repair procedures to repair the following terminals: Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11295 Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack))Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Push to Seat))Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Pull to Seat))Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W))Delphi Connectors (Micro.64) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Micro .64) )Delphi Connectors (12-Way) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (12-Way))Delphi Connectors (Steering Gear) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Steering Gear)) * The TPA and CPA should be removed before releasing the terminal for the connector body. * Look at the connector end view to locate the cavity of the damaged terminal and find the proper terminal release tool from the terminal release tool kit. Note: Using the incorrect terminal release tool can damage the connector body. * Insert the terminal release tool into the cavity. Note: Some terminals have a lever that must be disengaged before the terminal can be released. Gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Terminated Lead Repair Terminated Lead Repair Special Tools * EL-38125-10 - Splice Sleeve Crimp Tool * EL-38125-580 - Terminal Release Tool Kit * J-38125-5 - Ultra Torch * EL-35616 - Connector Test Adapter Kit For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Note: All repairs near the engine manifold, turbo engine and all exhaust pipes should follow the High Temperature Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/High Temperature Wiring Repairs) procedures. Terminated leads are terminals that are crimped onto wires. The terminated lead can be used throughout the vehicle since it is designed for temperatures up to 150°C. The length of the wire is 450 mm. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11296 The DuraSeal splice sleeve has the following 2 critical features: * A special heat shrink tubing that environmentally seals the splice. The shrink tubing contains a sealing adhesive inside the shrink tubing. * A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp that provides the necessary contact integrity for sensitive low energy circuits. 1. Use the connector end view to identify the correct terminated lead. 2. The terminated lead package should include a DuraSeal splice sleeve. If not, use the chart to identify the correct part. 3. Open the harness by removing any tape: Use a sewing seam ripper, or a comparable tool, to cut open the harness, to avoid wire insulation damage. 4. Depending on how many terminals need repairs, cut the terminal and wire back at least 40 mm. Try to keep the harness wire length the same. If more than one terminated lead is required, stagger the lengths by 40 mm. This helps reduce the bundle size of the wire harness. 5. Use the EL-38125-10 - tool in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the splice sleeve crimp tool. The crimp tool has four nests, one for each color. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11297 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the J-38125-5 - ultra torch , apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11298 Keyless Entry Transmitter: Electrical Diagrams Remote Function Schematics Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 11299 Keyless Entry Transmitter: Tools and Equipment Special Tools Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Cellular Phone Microphone > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Cellular Phone Microphone: > 10-08-44-003B > Oct > 10 > Audio - Buzz Noise When Using Bluetooth(R) Cellular Phone Microphone: Customer Interest Audio - Buzz Noise When Using Bluetooth(R) TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 10-08-44-003B Date: October 13, 2010 Subject: Buzz Noise During Call When Using Bluetooth(R) (Replace Microphone and Bezel) Models: 2009-2011 Buick Enclave, LaCrosse, Lucerne 2008-2011 Cadillac CTS, CTS-V 2009-2011 Cadillac DTS, Escalade, Escalade ESV, Escalade EXT, SRX, STS (with RPO YQ1 or YQ2), XLR 2009-2010 Chevrolet Cobalt, Corvette, Equinox, HHR, Impala, Malibu, Silverado, Suburban, Tahoe, TrailBlazer, Traverse 2010-2011 Chevrolet Camaro 2009-2010 GMC Envoy 2009-2011 GMC Acadia, Sierra, Yukon, Yukon XL 2009-2010 Pontiac G5, G6, Solstice, Torrent 2009-2010 HUMMER H2, H3 2009-2010 Saturn AURA, OUTLOOK, SKY, VUE 2009 Saab 9-7X All Equipped with OnStar(R) (UE1) and Bluetooth (UPF) Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to replace the microphone and bezel (if needed) and update model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 10-08-44-003A (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Condition Some customers may comment on a buzz noise (from the land-line side only) during a call. On any vehicle equipped with OnStar(R) (UE1) and Bluetooth(R) (UPF), an electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) buzz can be heard from the land-line side only of the phone during a Bluetooth(R) phone call made with an older model global system for mobile communications (GSM) phone. The buzz is only heard with older model GSM phones and is dependent on the distance of the phone from the microphone. The newer 3G GSM phones or other cellular phones (CDMA, TDMA, etc.) have not shown this concern. Correction Equipped with Headliner Microphone (Cobalt, HHR (non-sunroof) H2, H3) A new microphone and bezel has been developed to address this concern. Replace the existing microphone with GM P/N 20951265. Also replace the bezel. Refer to the parts information table below for correct color/part number. Equipped with Overhead Console Microphone Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Cellular Phone Microphone > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Cellular Phone Microphone: > 10-08-44-003B > Oct > 10 > Audio - Buzz Noise When Using Bluetooth(R) > Page 11309 A new microphone has been developed to address this concern. Replace the existing microphone with GM P/N 20951265. Parts Information Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Cellular Phone Microphone > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Cellular Phone Microphone: > 10-08-44-003B > Oct > 10 > Audio - Buzz Noise When Using Bluetooth(R) Cellular Phone Microphone: All Technical Service Bulletins Audio - Buzz Noise When Using Bluetooth(R) TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 10-08-44-003B Date: October 13, 2010 Subject: Buzz Noise During Call When Using Bluetooth(R) (Replace Microphone and Bezel) Models: 2009-2011 Buick Enclave, LaCrosse, Lucerne 2008-2011 Cadillac CTS, CTS-V 2009-2011 Cadillac DTS, Escalade, Escalade ESV, Escalade EXT, SRX, STS (with RPO YQ1 or YQ2), XLR 2009-2010 Chevrolet Cobalt, Corvette, Equinox, HHR, Impala, Malibu, Silverado, Suburban, Tahoe, TrailBlazer, Traverse 2010-2011 Chevrolet Camaro 2009-2010 GMC Envoy 2009-2011 GMC Acadia, Sierra, Yukon, Yukon XL 2009-2010 Pontiac G5, G6, Solstice, Torrent 2009-2010 HUMMER H2, H3 2009-2010 Saturn AURA, OUTLOOK, SKY, VUE 2009 Saab 9-7X All Equipped with OnStar(R) (UE1) and Bluetooth (UPF) Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to replace the microphone and bezel (if needed) and update model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 10-08-44-003A (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Condition Some customers may comment on a buzz noise (from the land-line side only) during a call. On any vehicle equipped with OnStar(R) (UE1) and Bluetooth(R) (UPF), an electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) buzz can be heard from the land-line side only of the phone during a Bluetooth(R) phone call made with an older model global system for mobile communications (GSM) phone. The buzz is only heard with older model GSM phones and is dependent on the distance of the phone from the microphone. The newer 3G GSM phones or other cellular phones (CDMA, TDMA, etc.) have not shown this concern. Correction Equipped with Headliner Microphone (Cobalt, HHR (non-sunroof) H2, H3) A new microphone and bezel has been developed to address this concern. Replace the existing microphone with GM P/N 20951265. Also replace the bezel. Refer to the parts information table below for correct color/part number. Equipped with Overhead Console Microphone Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Cellular Phone Microphone > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Cellular Phone Microphone: > 10-08-44-003B > Oct > 10 > Audio - Buzz Noise When Using Bluetooth(R) > Page 11315 A new microphone has been developed to address this concern. Replace the existing microphone with GM P/N 20951265. Parts Information Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Cellular Phone Microphone > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 11316 Cellular Phone Microphone: Diagrams B24 Cellular Phone Microphone (UE1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Cellular Phone Microphone > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 11317 Cellular Phone Microphone: Service and Repair Mobile Telephone Microphone Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > OnStar(R) - Availability for Hearing Impaired Communications Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins OnStar(R) - Availability for Hearing Impaired INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 06-08-46-005B Date: February 11, 2010 Subject: Availability of OnStar(R) for Hearing Impaired Models: 2007-2010 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (Including Saturn and Saab) Except 2007 Cadillac CTS Except 2007-2008 HUMMER H2, H2 SUT Except 2007 Pontiac Montana SV6 Except 2007-2010 Pontiac Vibe Except 2007 Saturn ION, VUE Except 2008 Saturn Astra Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add a Note regarding 2009 Bluetooth(R)-equipped vehicles, additional models and model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 06-08-46-005A (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Important This service bulletin is not applicable to 'GM of Canada' dealers and retailers. Note On 2009 and newer model year vehicles equipped with the Bluetooth(R) feature (option code UPF), when up-fitted with TTY capabilities, the Bluetooth(R) feature will be disabled. OnStar with Text Telephone Capability (TTY) General Motors is pleased to announce that the safety and security of OnStar is now available to our deaf, hard of hearing and speech impaired customers. The current vehicles listed above, as well as forthcoming vehicles equipped with OnStar hardware version 7.0 or higher, have the ability to utilize texting telephones. Vehicle specific TTY capability can be determined by utilizing the VIN lookup Tool. Additional information may be found by referring to www.onstar.com/tty. TTY equipment allows people who are deaf, hard of hearing or speech impaired, in-vehicle access to 911 and basic OnStar(R) services by pressing the OnStar(R) blue button or red emergency button. The keypad provides a means to communicate by allowing customers to type messages back and forth, with an OnStar(R) advisor or other party when using the OnStar(R) Hands-Free Calling feature. A TTY is required at both ends of the conversation in order to communicate. OnStar(R) Turn by Turn Navigation and Virtual Advisor are not available with the addition of TTY. The Reimbursement Program This equipment will be made available to eligible customers through GM Mobility and OnStar(R). Under this program, the customer must complete a GM Mobility application form. To take advantage of the program, vehicles must be adapted at the time of delivery for purchase / lease and a dealer claim ($1,000 Maximum per GM Mobility guidelines) with the application form submitted to GM Mobility. Saab dealers must fax documents. GM Dealers will receive electronic reimbursement directly from GM Mobility. Saab dealers will receive a check directly from OnStar(R). Additional questions or concerns should be directed to the OnStar Dealer Center. How to Order To order the dealer installed kit, contact AutoCraft Electronics or via the web at www.autocraft.com. The kit consists of an OnStar Interface Module, a Dial Pad (for making calls), OTIM wiring harness, the TTY device, installation/Tech 2(R) programming instructions and owner's guide. Warranty Information The Ultra-Tec Compact C TTY device is manufactured by an independent manufacturer and is covered by the manufacturer's warranty. It is not covered under the GM New Vehicle Limited Warranty. All other parts (OTIM, dial pad and OTIM wiring harness) are covered by the standard GM new vehicle parts and labor warranty. Replacement parts are available through AutoCraft Electronics. Contact AutoCraft Electronics or via the web. Warranty claims for the OTIM, dial pad and OTIM wiring harness should be submitted through normal warranty procedures using a sublet warranty claim with GM Labor Operation R5140. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > OnStar(R) - Availability for Hearing Impaired > Page 11322 Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > OnStar(R) - Availability for Hearing Impaired > Page 11323 Communications Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins Audio - Radio Does Not Mute Enough When Using OnStar(R) TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 10-08-46-001 Date: January 27, 2010 Subject: Radio Does Not Mute Enough When OnStar(R) Turn-by Turn Navigation Directions Are Announced (Increase Volume Setting or Request Soft Mute Feature Change Through OnStar(R) Customer Service) Models: 2009-2010 GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (Including Saturn) 2009-2010 HUMMER H2, H3 2009 Saab 9-7X All Equipped with OnStar(R) (RPO UE1) Condition Some customers may comment that when the radio is on, it does not mute enough when the OnStar(R) Turn-by-Turn Navigation directions are announced. Cause This condition may be caused by the customer improperly setting the radio volume high enough when the Turn-by-Turn Navigation messages are played. The 2009 and 2010 models with OnStar(R) initiates a "soft mute" feature when the radio is on during Turn-by-Turn Navigation direction announcements. During the announcement, the radio can still be heard at a very low volume. Previous model years initiated a "hard mute" during this function which completely muted the radio audio. Correction Instruct the customer to increase the radio volume while getting the Turn-by-Turn Navigation direction announcements. You can control the message volume using the radio volume control, only when the Turn-by-Turn navigation messages are playing. Some customers that were accustomed to previous model vehicles with the "hard mute" feature may be dissatisfied with the function of the "soft mute" feature. For those customers, contact the OnStar(R) Customer Service Center by pushing the Blue OnStar(R) Button to speak to a trained Advisor and request a change be made to the vehicle from the "soft mute" setting to that of the hard or complete muting of audio playback during Turn by Turn directions. OnStar(R) will then create a case number. Advise the customer that the vehicle update should be completed Over the Air within 5 business days, after which an OnStar(R) Customer Care advisor will follow-up with the customer to verify the fix. If the customer does not hear back from OnStar(R) within a week, advise them to press the Blue OnStar(R) Button and ask for Customer Care to check status. Warranty Information (excluding Saab U.S. Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use: Warranty Information (Saab U.S. Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table above. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > OnStar(R) - Availability for Hearing Impaired > Page 11324 Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 11325 Communications Control Module: Locations Instrument Panel/Center Console Component Views Left Side of the Instrument Panel Components 1 - P16 Instrument Cluster 2 - B10B Ambient Light/Sunload Sensor (C68) or B10 Ambient Light Sensor (C67) 3 - P19B Speaker - Center Instrument Panel (UZ8) 4 - P17 Info Display Module 5 P19V Speaker - Right Front Tweeter 6 - A20 Radio/HVAC Controls 7 - A11 Radio 8 - S3 Transmission Shift Lever 9 - P2 Transmission Shift Lever Position Indicator 10 - T11 Multimedia Player Interface Module (KTA) 11 - K108 Active Noise Cancellation Module (VQN) 12 - E8J Instrument Panel Courtesy Lamp - Left (LTZ or SLT) 13 - S36 Instrument Panel Dimmer Switch Lower Left of the Instrument Panel Components Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 11326 1 - B80 Park Brake Switch 2 - T3 Audio Amplifier 3 - K9 Body Control Module 4 - K73 Telematics Communication Interface Control Module (UE1) 5 - B107 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor 6 T4S Wireless Communication Antenna - Bluetooth (UE1 with UPF) 7 - B22 Brake Pedal Position Sensor 8 - X84 Data Link Connector Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 11327 Communications Control Module: Diagrams K73 Telematics Communication Interface Control Module X1 (UE1) K73 Telematics Communication Interface Control Module X2 (UE1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 11328 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 11329 Communications Control Module: Service and Repair Communication Interface Module Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems > Parking Assist Control Module > Component Information > Locations Parking Assist Control Module: Locations Luggage Compartment/Rear of Vehicle Component Views Left Side of the Luggage Compartment Components 1 - X80R Accessory Power Receptacle - Rear Compartment 2 - K41 Parking Assist Module (UD7) 3 - M17 Liftgate Motor Assembly (TB5) 4 - K27 Fuel Pump Control Module Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems > Parking Assist Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 11334 Parking Assist Control Module: Diagrams K41 Parking Assist Control Module X1 (UD7) K41 Parking Assist Control Module X2 (UD7) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems > Parking Assist Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 11335 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems > Parking Assist Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 11336 Parking Assist Control Module: Service and Repair Rear Object Alarm Module Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Locations Parking Assist Distance Sensor: Locations Luggage Compartment/Rear of Vehicle Component Views Rear of Vehicle Components (Chevrolet) 1 - E2LR Side Marker Lamp - Left Rear 2 - E5A Backup Lamp - Left 3 - E6 Center High Mounted Stop Lamp 4 - T4G Cellular Phone, Navigation, and Digital Radio Antenna 5 - M45 Rear Wiper Motor 6 - E5B Backup Lamp - Right 7 - E2RR Side Marker Lamp - Right Rear 8 - E5T Tail/Brake and Turn Signal Lamp - Right 9 - E7R License Plate Lamp - Right 10 - B78H Rear Object Sensor Right Outer (UD7) 11 - B78F Rear Object Sensor - Right Middle (UD7) 12 - S46 Liftgate Handle Switch 13 - B87 Rearview Camera (UVC) 14 - X88 Trailer Connector (V92) 15 - B78E Rear Object Sensor - Left Middle (UD7) 16 - E7L License Plate Lamp - Left Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 11340 17 - B78G Rear Object Sensor - Left Outer (UD7) 18 - E5S Tail/Brake and Turn Signal Lamp - Left Rear of Vehicle Components (GMC) 1 - E5M Tail Lamp - Left Upper 2 - E6 Center High Mounted Stop Lamp 3 - T4G Cellular Phone, Navigation, and Digital Radio Antenna 4 - M45 Rear Wiper Motor 5 - E5N Tail Lamp - Right Upper 6 - E5T Tail/Brake and Turn Signal Lamp - Right 7 - E2RR Side Marker Lamp - Right Rear 8 - E5K Tail Lamp - Right Lower 9 - E5B Backup Lamp - Right 10 - B78H Rear Object Sensor - Right Outer (UD7) 11 - E7R License Plate Lamp - Right 12 - S46 Liftgate Handle Switch 13 - B87 Rearview Camera (UVC) 14 - E7L License Plate Lamp - Left 15 - B78F Rear Object Sensor - Right Middle (UD7) 16 - X88 Trailer Connector (V92) 17 - B78E Rear Object Sensor - Left Middle (UD7) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 11341 18 - B78G Rear Object Sensor - Left Outer (UD7) 19 - E5A Backup Lamp - Left 20 - E5J Tail Lamp - Left Lower 21 - E2LR Side Marker Lamp - Left Rear 22 - E5S Tail/Brake and Turn Signal Lamp Left Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 11342 Parking Assist Distance Sensor: Diagrams B78E Rear Object Sensor - Left Middle (UD7) B78F Rear Object Sensor - Right Middle (UD7) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 11343 B78G Rear Object Sensor - Left Outer (UD7) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 11344 B78H Rear Object Sensor - Right Outer (UD7) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 11345 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Rear Object Sensor Housing Replacement Parking Assist Distance Sensor: Service and Repair Rear Object Sensor Housing Replacement Rear Object Sensor Housing Replacement 1. Remove the rear fascia. Refer to Rear Bumper Fascia Replacement (See: Body and Frame/Bumper/Rear Bumper/Rear Bumper Cover / Fascia/Service and Repair/Rear Bumper Fascia Replacement). 2. Disconnect the sensor harness. 3. Remove the sensor from the sensor housing. The sensor housing must be painted if replaced. If reinstalled, painting will not be necessary. Important: Do Not grind off alignment tabs. 4. Sand/grind sonic weld plastic residue from the fascia. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Rear Object Sensor Housing Replacement > Page 11348 5. Apply structural adhesive epoxy, Lord Fusor(TM) 127EZ or equivalent, to fascia at mating surface. 6. Using the alignment tabs, install the sensor housing to the fascia. 7. Allow adhesive to cure according to manufacturer's directions. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Rear Object Sensor Housing Replacement > Page 11349 8. Install the sensor to the sensor housing. 9. Connect the electrical harness. 10. Install the rear fascia. Refer to Rear Bumper Fascia Replacement (See: Body and Frame/Bumper/Rear Bumper/Rear Bumper Cover / Fascia/Service and Repair/Rear Bumper Fascia Replacement). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Rear Object Sensor Housing Replacement > Page 11350 Parking Assist Distance Sensor: Service and Repair Rear Object Sensor Replacement Rear Object Sensor Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove rear bumper fascia. Refer to Rear Bumper Fascia Replacement (See: Body and Frame/Bumper/Rear Bumper/Rear Bumper Cover / Fascia/Service and Repair/Rear Bumper Fascia Replacement). 2. Disconnect electrical from the rear object sensor. 3. Lift the locking tabs on the housing and remove the rear object sensor. Installation Procedure Note: Do not refinish previously painted sensors. Excess paint build up will cause the sensor to be inoperative. 1. Paint the rear object sensor. Refer to Basecoat/Clearcoat Paint Systems (See: Body and Frame/Paint, Striping and Decals/Paint/Application and ID/Basecoat/Clearcoat Paint Systems). 2. Ensure the paint does not exceed 6 mils. Use a paint thickness gauge suitable for non-ferrous metals. Refer to Paint Gauges (). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Rear Object Sensor Housing Replacement > Page 11351 3. Insert the sensor into the housing. 4. Connect the electrical connector to the rear object sensor. 5. Install the rear bumper fascia. Refer to Rear Bumper Fascia Replacement (See: Body and Frame/Bumper/Rear Bumper/Rear Bumper Cover / Fascia/Service and Repair/Rear Bumper Fascia Replacement). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems > Parking Assist Warning Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams Parking Assist Warning Indicator: Diagrams P15 Rear Parking Assist Rear Indicators (UD7) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems > Parking Assist Warning Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 11355 Parking Assist Warning Indicator: Service and Repair Information Center Telltale Assembly Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems > Rear Vision Camera > Component Information > Diagrams Rear Vision Camera: Diagrams B87 Rearview Camera (UVC) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems > Rear Vision Camera > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 11359 Rear Vision Camera: Service and Repair Rearview Camera Image Display Module Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Locations Driver/Vehicle Information Display: Locations Instrument Panel/Center Console Component Views Left Side of the Instrument Panel Components 1 - P16 Instrument Cluster 2 - B10B Ambient Light/Sunload Sensor (C68) or B10 Ambient Light Sensor (C67) 3 - P19B Speaker - Center Instrument Panel (UZ8) 4 - P17 Info Display Module 5 P19V Speaker - Right Front Tweeter 6 - A20 Radio/HVAC Controls 7 - A11 Radio 8 - S3 Transmission Shift Lever 9 - P2 Transmission Shift Lever Position Indicator 10 - T11 Multimedia Player Interface Module (KTA) 11 - K108 Active Noise Cancellation Module (VQN) 12 - E8J Instrument Panel Courtesy Lamp - Left (LTZ or SLT) 13 - S36 Instrument Panel Dimmer Switch Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Locations > Page 11363 Driver/Vehicle Information Display: Diagrams P17 Info Display Module (UYS or PCJ) P17 Info Display Module (without UYS or PCJ) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Locations > Page 11364 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Locations > Page 11365 Driver/Vehicle Information Display: Service and Repair Driver Information Display Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Emergency Contact Module: > 05-08-46-004C > Dec > 10 > OnStar(R) - Number Incorrect/Incorrectly Assigned Emergency Contact Module: Customer Interest OnStar(R) - Number Incorrect/Incorrectly Assigned INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 05-08-46-004C Date: December 23, 2010 Subject: OnStar(R) Phone Number Concerns (Phone Number Incorrect/Assigned to Another Vehicle/Phone) That Occur During Diagnosis of OnStar(R) System Models: 2000-2011 GM Passenger Cars and Trucks Equipped with OnStar(R) (RPO UE1) Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update model years up to 2011. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 05-08-46-004B (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). During diagnosis of an OnStar(R) concern, the technician may be told that the OnStar(R) phone number is incorrect or tied to another vehicle and/or phone of some kind. To resolve these concerns, the Tech 2(R) with software version 22.005 (or higher), has the capability to change the OnStar(R) phone number. Service Procedure 1. With the Tech 2(R), build the vehicle to specifications within the Diagnostics area of the Tech 2(R). 2. For vehicles with physical-based diagnostics - under Body, go to the OnStar(R) section. Then select the Special Functions menu. For vehicles with functional-based diagnostics - under Body and Accessories, go to the Cellular Communication section. Select Module Setup and then Vehicle Communication Interface Module. 3. Locate the Program Phone Number prompt and select it. The original phone number will be displayed on the Tech 2(R) screen. 4. Contact the OnStar(R) team at the GM Technical Assistance Center (TAC) to obtain a new phone number. 5. Highlight the digits of the phone number one at a time and enter the new phone number using the number keys on the Tech 2(R). 6. Press the Soft key at the base of the screen for Done once these numbers have been changed on the screen. 7. Press the Soft key for Done again. The area code or new phone number has now been programmed into the phone. 8. Cycle the ignition to Off and open the driver's door. 9. Press the blue OnStar(R) button to make sure that a normal connection can be made to the OnStar(R) call center. If applicable, make sure the Hands-Free Calling (HFC) works properly by making a phone call. 10. If the system is working properly, fax or voicemail a case closing into the OnStar(R) team at TAC with the results. Dealers in Canada should submit case closing information through the GM infoNET. Please follow this diagnostic process thoroughly and complete each step. If the condition exhibited is resolved WITHOUT completing every step, the remaining steps do not need to be performed. If the procedure above does not resolve the condition, you must contact TAC for further assistance. This diagnostic approach was developed specifically for this condition and should not automatically be used for other vehicles with similar symptoms. Warranty Information (excluding Saab Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use: Warranty Information (Saab Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Emergency Contact Module: > 05-08-46-004C > Dec > 10 > OnStar(R) - Number Incorrect/Incorrectly Assigned > Page 11374 Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 05-08-46-004C > Dec > 10 > OnStar(R) - Number Incorrect/Incorrectly Assigned Emergency Contact Module: All Technical Service Bulletins OnStar(R) - Number Incorrect/Incorrectly Assigned INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 05-08-46-004C Date: December 23, 2010 Subject: OnStar(R) Phone Number Concerns (Phone Number Incorrect/Assigned to Another Vehicle/Phone) That Occur During Diagnosis of OnStar(R) System Models: 2000-2011 GM Passenger Cars and Trucks Equipped with OnStar(R) (RPO UE1) Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update model years up to 2011. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 05-08-46-004B (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). During diagnosis of an OnStar(R) concern, the technician may be told that the OnStar(R) phone number is incorrect or tied to another vehicle and/or phone of some kind. To resolve these concerns, the Tech 2(R) with software version 22.005 (or higher), has the capability to change the OnStar(R) phone number. Service Procedure 1. With the Tech 2(R), build the vehicle to specifications within the Diagnostics area of the Tech 2(R). 2. For vehicles with physical-based diagnostics - under Body, go to the OnStar(R) section. Then select the Special Functions menu. For vehicles with functional-based diagnostics - under Body and Accessories, go to the Cellular Communication section. Select Module Setup and then Vehicle Communication Interface Module. 3. Locate the Program Phone Number prompt and select it. The original phone number will be displayed on the Tech 2(R) screen. 4. Contact the OnStar(R) team at the GM Technical Assistance Center (TAC) to obtain a new phone number. 5. Highlight the digits of the phone number one at a time and enter the new phone number using the number keys on the Tech 2(R). 6. Press the Soft key at the base of the screen for Done once these numbers have been changed on the screen. 7. Press the Soft key for Done again. The area code or new phone number has now been programmed into the phone. 8. Cycle the ignition to Off and open the driver's door. 9. Press the blue OnStar(R) button to make sure that a normal connection can be made to the OnStar(R) call center. If applicable, make sure the Hands-Free Calling (HFC) works properly by making a phone call. 10. If the system is working properly, fax or voicemail a case closing into the OnStar(R) team at TAC with the results. Dealers in Canada should submit case closing information through the GM infoNET. Please follow this diagnostic process thoroughly and complete each step. If the condition exhibited is resolved WITHOUT completing every step, the remaining steps do not need to be performed. If the procedure above does not resolve the condition, you must contact TAC for further assistance. This diagnostic approach was developed specifically for this condition and should not automatically be used for other vehicles with similar symptoms. Warranty Information (excluding Saab Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use: Warranty Information (Saab Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 05-08-46-004C > Dec > 10 > OnStar(R) - Number Incorrect/Incorrectly Assigned > Page 11380 Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Entertainment Systems > Auxiliary Input / Output Jack, Entertainment System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Audio System - USB/Multimedia Interface Information Auxiliary Input / Output Jack: Technical Service Bulletins Audio System - USB/Multimedia Interface Information INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 09-08-44-013C Date: October 05, 2010 Subject: Information on USB Command and Control Multimedia Player Interface/List of Supported Devices Models: 2010-2011 Buick Enclave, LaCrosse 2008-2011 Cadillac CTS 2010-2011 Cadillac Escalade Models, SRX 2009-2010 Chevrolet Cobalt 2009-2011 Chevrolet HHR, Malibu 2010-2011 Chevrolet Avalanche, Camaro, Equinox, Silverado, Suburban, Tahoe, Traverse 2011 Chevrolet Cruze 2010-2011 GMC Acadia, Sierra, Terrain, Yukon 2009-2010 Pontiac G5, G6, Solstice, Solstice Coupe 2009-2010 Saturn AURA, SKY 2010 Saturn OUTLOOK All Equipped with Convenience and Connectivity Package - RPOs KTA, KTB, SRJ, U4H, UUI, UUJ, UUM, UUN, U2S, U2X, U2Y, UAV, UYZ, UY5 Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 09-08-44-013B (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). USB Radio and MP3 Functionality The USB (Universal Serial Bus) will be a USB 2.0 port on the radio faceplate, on the IP or in the center console. This interface will give the customer the additional functionality of iPod/MP3 command and control. Customers now have full radio control of the iPod/MP3 audio files via the USB cable. A single USB connection allows digital audio transferring from the iPod to the radio. The customer will also have playback capability with a USB memory stick (only MP3 and WMA files). Note Not all memory sticks are supported. Customers have full radio control of the iPod/MP3 audio files via the USB cable. A single USB connection allows digital audio transferring from the iPod to the radio. The iPod will be charging while connected to the radio. Note Video from the iPod is NOT capable of being transferred to a Navigation radio display. For the Chevrolet Cobalt, HHR and Malibu; Pontiac G5, G6, Solstice; and Saturn AURA, SKY, the USB port is on the faceplate of the radio. For all other models, it is located in the center console or IP. For the Cadillac CTS only, a special iPod cable (USB and AUX cable) is needed. This special cable comes delivered with the vehicle. In all cases, the iPod will be charging while connected to the radio through the USB port when the vehicle is running or the RPA is active. Problems with iPod Not Connecting If the infotainment system does not operate properly when using a device connected through the USB port, this may be due to an incompatible media device. Important DO NOT replace the radio or multimedia interface module due to a customer device incompatibility issue. Verify the customer's media device is validated for this system using the list below. If the customer's device is a validated device for this system, follow the SI diagnostic procedure to isolate the fault. If the customer's device is not on the validated device list, explain to the customer that their particular unit is not compatible with the system. Troubleshooting Tips for iPod Devices Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Entertainment Systems > Auxiliary Input / Output Jack, Entertainment System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Audio System - USB/Multimedia Interface Information > Page 11386 1. Check the version of the iPod/MP3 to confirm that it is supported. 2. Unplug and Re-insert the iPod to verify the customer complaint. 3. Verify the battery charge of the iPod. A low battery condition on the iPod may not allow it to connect to the radio. The iPod may need to be charged before it can be controlled by the radio. 4. If the customer receives a "Device Not Supported" message on their radio or is having general iPod/MP3 connection issues (and they have a supported device), they may need to reset their iPod. To reset the iPod: - For the iPod Nanos and Classic , Toggle the Hold switch on and off. (Slide it to Hold, then turn it off again. Press and hold the Menu and Center (Select) buttons simultaneously until the Apple logo appears, about 6 to 8 seconds. You may need to repeat this step. - For the iPod Touch and iPhone: Press and hold the Sleep/Wake button for a few seconds until the red slider appears, then slide the slider. 5. Have the customer check their cable for quality. - Aftermarket cables can wear from use. The customer may need to purchase a new USB cable. - Verify that cable extensions are not present. The extra capacitance may cause too large a signal drop for the iPod to communicate with the radio. 6. If the customer receives a "Device Not Supported" message on their radio with an iPod connected (and they have a supported device), the customer may need to download the latest firmware from the Apple website (Please visit www.apple.com for more information). Validated Apple Device - Both Charge/Support Digital Audio (For All RPOs) For further information on identifying iPod models, please visit http://support.apple.com/kb/ht1353 Other Validated Device- Both Charge/Support Digital Audio for Buick LaCrosse, Chevrolet Camaro, Equinox Only (RPO KTA or KTB) Important: Must be set to MTP (Mass Transfer Protocol) in the MP3 Player device setting. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Entertainment Systems > Auxiliary Input / Output Jack, Entertainment System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Audio System - USB/Multimedia Interface Information > Page 11387 Important These devices (and additional MP3 players) may be capable of connecting to the other USB options by internally setting the MP3 device to MSC (Mass Storage Class) mode. In this mode, the USB port will see the device as a flash drive. Please have the customer refer to their MP3 device manual on how to set the device to MSC. If the device is not able to be set to MSC, the customer must use the AUX jack. Note MTP mode must be used in order to transfer ANY Digital Rights Management (DRM) protected content. Non-Validated Apple Device Important The devices above are NOT supported by USB interface. Apple does not support digital media transfer from these devices through the USB port. The customer can still listen to their older iPod on vehicle by connecting it to the Auxiliary Input Jack using a standard 3.5 mm (1/8 in) stereo cable. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Entertainment Systems > Auxiliary Input / Output Jack, Entertainment System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Audio System - USB/Multimedia Interface Information > Page 11388 Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Entertainment Systems > Auxiliary Input / Output Jack, Entertainment System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 11389 Auxiliary Input / Output Jack: Diagrams X82 Audio/Video Input Adapter (UWG) X83 Auxiliary Audio Input (without UWG) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Entertainment Systems > Auxiliary Input / Output Jack, Entertainment System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 11390 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Entertainment Systems > Television / Monitor > Component Information > Diagrams Television / Monitor: Diagrams P22E Video Display - Driver Seatback (UWG) P22F Video Display - Passenger Seatback (UWG) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Entertainment Systems > Television / Monitor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 11394 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Entertainment Systems > Television / Monitor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 11395 Television / Monitor: Service and Repair Video Display Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Entertainment Systems > DVD Player > Component Information > Service and Repair DVD Player: Service and Repair Audio/Video Disc Player Adapter Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Entertainment Systems > Entertainment System Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams Entertainment System Control Module: Diagrams T11 Multimedia Player Interface Module (KTA) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Entertainment Systems > Entertainment System Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 11402 Entertainment System Control Module: Service and Repair Multimedia Player Interface Module Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Global Positioning System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 05-08-46-004C > Dec > 10 > OnStar(R) - Number Incorrect/Incorrectly Assigned Global Positioning System: Customer Interest OnStar(R) - Number Incorrect/Incorrectly Assigned INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 05-08-46-004C Date: December 23, 2010 Subject: OnStar(R) Phone Number Concerns (Phone Number Incorrect/Assigned to Another Vehicle/Phone) That Occur During Diagnosis of OnStar(R) System Models: 2000-2011 GM Passenger Cars and Trucks Equipped with OnStar(R) (RPO UE1) Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update model years up to 2011. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 05-08-46-004B (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). During diagnosis of an OnStar(R) concern, the technician may be told that the OnStar(R) phone number is incorrect or tied to another vehicle and/or phone of some kind. To resolve these concerns, the Tech 2(R) with software version 22.005 (or higher), has the capability to change the OnStar(R) phone number. Service Procedure 1. With the Tech 2(R), build the vehicle to specifications within the Diagnostics area of the Tech 2(R). 2. For vehicles with physical-based diagnostics - under Body, go to the OnStar(R) section. Then select the Special Functions menu. For vehicles with functional-based diagnostics - under Body and Accessories, go to the Cellular Communication section. Select Module Setup and then Vehicle Communication Interface Module. 3. Locate the Program Phone Number prompt and select it. The original phone number will be displayed on the Tech 2(R) screen. 4. Contact the OnStar(R) team at the GM Technical Assistance Center (TAC) to obtain a new phone number. 5. Highlight the digits of the phone number one at a time and enter the new phone number using the number keys on the Tech 2(R). 6. Press the Soft key at the base of the screen for Done once these numbers have been changed on the screen. 7. Press the Soft key for Done again. The area code or new phone number has now been programmed into the phone. 8. Cycle the ignition to Off and open the driver's door. 9. Press the blue OnStar(R) button to make sure that a normal connection can be made to the OnStar(R) call center. If applicable, make sure the Hands-Free Calling (HFC) works properly by making a phone call. 10. If the system is working properly, fax or voicemail a case closing into the OnStar(R) team at TAC with the results. Dealers in Canada should submit case closing information through the GM infoNET. Please follow this diagnostic process thoroughly and complete each step. If the condition exhibited is resolved WITHOUT completing every step, the remaining steps do not need to be performed. If the procedure above does not resolve the condition, you must contact TAC for further assistance. This diagnostic approach was developed specifically for this condition and should not automatically be used for other vehicles with similar symptoms. Warranty Information (excluding Saab Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use: Warranty Information (Saab Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Global Positioning System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 05-08-46-004C > Dec > 10 > OnStar(R) - Number Incorrect/Incorrectly Assigned > Page 11411 Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Global Positioning System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Global Positioning System: > 05-08-46-004C > Dec > 10 > OnStar(R) - Number Incorrect/Incorrectly Assigned Global Positioning System: All Technical Service Bulletins OnStar(R) - Number Incorrect/Incorrectly Assigned INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 05-08-46-004C Date: December 23, 2010 Subject: OnStar(R) Phone Number Concerns (Phone Number Incorrect/Assigned to Another Vehicle/Phone) That Occur During Diagnosis of OnStar(R) System Models: 2000-2011 GM Passenger Cars and Trucks Equipped with OnStar(R) (RPO UE1) Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update model years up to 2011. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 05-08-46-004B (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). During diagnosis of an OnStar(R) concern, the technician may be told that the OnStar(R) phone number is incorrect or tied to another vehicle and/or phone of some kind. To resolve these concerns, the Tech 2(R) with software version 22.005 (or higher), has the capability to change the OnStar(R) phone number. Service Procedure 1. With the Tech 2(R), build the vehicle to specifications within the Diagnostics area of the Tech 2(R). 2. For vehicles with physical-based diagnostics - under Body, go to the OnStar(R) section. Then select the Special Functions menu. For vehicles with functional-based diagnostics - under Body and Accessories, go to the Cellular Communication section. Select Module Setup and then Vehicle Communication Interface Module. 3. Locate the Program Phone Number prompt and select it. The original phone number will be displayed on the Tech 2(R) screen. 4. Contact the OnStar(R) team at the GM Technical Assistance Center (TAC) to obtain a new phone number. 5. Highlight the digits of the phone number one at a time and enter the new phone number using the number keys on the Tech 2(R). 6. Press the Soft key at the base of the screen for Done once these numbers have been changed on the screen. 7. Press the Soft key for Done again. The area code or new phone number has now been programmed into the phone. 8. Cycle the ignition to Off and open the driver's door. 9. Press the blue OnStar(R) button to make sure that a normal connection can be made to the OnStar(R) call center. If applicable, make sure the Hands-Free Calling (HFC) works properly by making a phone call. 10. If the system is working properly, fax or voicemail a case closing into the OnStar(R) team at TAC with the results. Dealers in Canada should submit case closing information through the GM infoNET. Please follow this diagnostic process thoroughly and complete each step. If the condition exhibited is resolved WITHOUT completing every step, the remaining steps do not need to be performed. If the procedure above does not resolve the condition, you must contact TAC for further assistance. This diagnostic approach was developed specifically for this condition and should not automatically be used for other vehicles with similar symptoms. Warranty Information (excluding Saab Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use: Warranty Information (Saab Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Global Positioning System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Global Positioning System: > 05-08-46-004C > Dec > 10 > OnStar(R) - Number Incorrect/Incorrectly Assigned > Page 11417 Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Global Positioning System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Global Positioning System: > 06-08-46-005B > Feb > 10 > OnStar(R) - Availability for Hearing Impaired Global Positioning System: All Technical Service Bulletins OnStar(R) - Availability for Hearing Impaired INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 06-08-46-005B Date: February 11, 2010 Subject: Availability of OnStar(R) for Hearing Impaired Models: 2007-2010 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (Including Saturn and Saab) Except 2007 Cadillac CTS Except 2007-2008 HUMMER H2, H2 SUT Except 2007 Pontiac Montana SV6 Except 2007-2010 Pontiac Vibe Except 2007 Saturn ION, VUE Except 2008 Saturn Astra Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add a Note regarding 2009 Bluetooth(R)-equipped vehicles, additional models and model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 06-08-46-005A (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Important This service bulletin is not applicable to 'GM of Canada' dealers and retailers. Note On 2009 and newer model year vehicles equipped with the Bluetooth(R) feature (option code UPF), when up-fitted with TTY capabilities, the Bluetooth(R) feature will be disabled. OnStar with Text Telephone Capability (TTY) General Motors is pleased to announce that the safety and security of OnStar is now available to our deaf, hard of hearing and speech impaired customers. The current vehicles listed above, as well as forthcoming vehicles equipped with OnStar hardware version 7.0 or higher, have the ability to utilize texting telephones. Vehicle specific TTY capability can be determined by utilizing the VIN lookup Tool. Additional information may be found by referring to www.onstar.com/tty. TTY equipment allows people who are deaf, hard of hearing or speech impaired, in-vehicle access to 911 and basic OnStar(R) services by pressing the OnStar(R) blue button or red emergency button. The keypad provides a means to communicate by allowing customers to type messages back and forth, with an OnStar(R) advisor or other party when using the OnStar(R) Hands-Free Calling feature. A TTY is required at both ends of the conversation in order to communicate. OnStar(R) Turn by Turn Navigation and Virtual Advisor are not available with the addition of TTY. The Reimbursement Program This equipment will be made available to eligible customers through GM Mobility and OnStar(R). Under this program, the customer must complete a GM Mobility application form. To take advantage of the program, vehicles must be adapted at the time of delivery for purchase / lease and a dealer claim ($1,000 Maximum per GM Mobility guidelines) with the application form submitted to GM Mobility. Saab dealers must fax documents. GM Dealers will receive electronic reimbursement directly from GM Mobility. Saab dealers will receive a check directly from OnStar(R). Additional questions or concerns should be directed to the OnStar Dealer Center. How to Order To order the dealer installed kit, contact AutoCraft Electronics or via the web at www.autocraft.com. The kit consists of an OnStar Interface Module, a Dial Pad (for making calls), OTIM wiring harness, the TTY device, installation/Tech 2(R) programming instructions and owner's guide. Warranty Information The Ultra-Tec Compact C TTY device is manufactured by an independent manufacturer and is covered by the manufacturer's warranty. It is not covered under the GM New Vehicle Limited Warranty. All other parts (OTIM, dial pad and OTIM wiring harness) are covered by the standard GM new vehicle parts and labor warranty. Replacement parts are available through AutoCraft Electronics. Contact AutoCraft Electronics or via the web. Warranty claims for the OTIM, dial pad and OTIM wiring harness should be submitted through normal warranty procedures using a sublet warranty claim with GM Labor Operation R5140. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Global Positioning System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Global Positioning System: > 06-08-46-005B > Feb > 10 > OnStar(R) - Availability for Hearing Impaired > Page 11422 Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Global Positioning System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Global Positioning System: > 06-08-46-005B > Feb > 10 > OnStar(R) - Availability for Hearing Impaired Global Positioning System: All Technical Service Bulletins OnStar(R) - Availability for Hearing Impaired INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 06-08-46-005B Date: February 11, 2010 Subject: Availability of OnStar(R) for Hearing Impaired Models: 2007-2010 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (Including Saturn and Saab) Except 2007 Cadillac CTS Except 2007-2008 HUMMER H2, H2 SUT Except 2007 Pontiac Montana SV6 Except 2007-2010 Pontiac Vibe Except 2007 Saturn ION, VUE Except 2008 Saturn Astra Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add a Note regarding 2009 Bluetooth(R)-equipped vehicles, additional models and model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 06-08-46-005A (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Important This service bulletin is not applicable to 'GM of Canada' dealers and retailers. Note On 2009 and newer model year vehicles equipped with the Bluetooth(R) feature (option code UPF), when up-fitted with TTY capabilities, the Bluetooth(R) feature will be disabled. OnStar with Text Telephone Capability (TTY) General Motors is pleased to announce that the safety and security of OnStar is now available to our deaf, hard of hearing and speech impaired customers. The current vehicles listed above, as well as forthcoming vehicles equipped with OnStar hardware version 7.0 or higher, have the ability to utilize texting telephones. Vehicle specific TTY capability can be determined by utilizing the VIN lookup Tool. Additional information may be found by referring to www.onstar.com/tty. TTY equipment allows people who are deaf, hard of hearing or speech impaired, in-vehicle access to 911 and basic OnStar(R) services by pressing the OnStar(R) blue button or red emergency button. The keypad provides a means to communicate by allowing customers to type messages back and forth, with an OnStar(R) advisor or other party when using the OnStar(R) Hands-Free Calling feature. A TTY is required at both ends of the conversation in order to communicate. OnStar(R) Turn by Turn Navigation and Virtual Advisor are not available with the addition of TTY. The Reimbursement Program This equipment will be made available to eligible customers through GM Mobility and OnStar(R). Under this program, the customer must complete a GM Mobility application form. To take advantage of the program, vehicles must be adapted at the time of delivery for purchase / lease and a dealer claim ($1,000 Maximum per GM Mobility guidelines) with the application form submitted to GM Mobility. Saab dealers must fax documents. GM Dealers will receive electronic reimbursement directly from GM Mobility. Saab dealers will receive a check directly from OnStar(R). Additional questions or concerns should be directed to the OnStar Dealer Center. How to Order To order the dealer installed kit, contact AutoCraft Electronics or via the web at www.autocraft.com. The kit consists of an OnStar Interface Module, a Dial Pad (for making calls), OTIM wiring harness, the TTY device, installation/Tech 2(R) programming instructions and owner's guide. Warranty Information The Ultra-Tec Compact C TTY device is manufactured by an independent manufacturer and is covered by the manufacturer's warranty. It is not covered under the GM New Vehicle Limited Warranty. All other parts (OTIM, dial pad and OTIM wiring harness) are covered by the standard GM new vehicle parts and labor warranty. Replacement parts are available through AutoCraft Electronics. Contact AutoCraft Electronics or via the web. Warranty claims for the OTIM, dial pad and OTIM wiring harness should be submitted through normal warranty procedures using a sublet warranty claim with GM Labor Operation R5140. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Global Positioning System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Global Positioning System: > 06-08-46-005B > Feb > 10 > OnStar(R) - Availability for Hearing Impaired > Page 11428 Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Memory Positioning Systems > Memory Positioning Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Electrical - L/H Seat Inop./Erratic Memory Sys Operation Memory Positioning Module: Technical Service Bulletins Electrical - L/H Seat Inop./Erratic Memory Sys Operation TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 09-08-50-015B Date: January 15, 2010 Subject: Driver Power Seat Inoperative, Outside Mirrors Do Not Return to Original Position with Park Tilt Mirrors, Memory Remote Recall Intermittent Operation, Adjustable Pedals Inoperative (Reprogram Memory Seat Module) Models: 2010 Cadillac SRX Built Prior to January 6, 2010 2010 Chevrolet Equinox 2010 GMC Terrain All Built Prior to November 2, 2009 Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the 2010 Cadillac SRX build date. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 09-08-50-015A (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Condition Some customers may comment on one or more of the following concerns: - The driver power seat is inoperative (when equipped with Memory Seat only). The driver seat will not move forward, rearward and the recliner will not move forward or rearward. The customer may also experience the inability to move the seat up or down. - The outside mirrors do not return to the original position after the Park Tilt Mirrors function is engaged. The customer may report that the outside mirrors tilt downward when placing the vehicle in reverse, attempt to return to the original position, but do not reach the memory position after taking the vehicle out of reverse. The customer may also witness the mirrors staying in the tilt position and not returning to the memory position at all. - The Memory Remote Recall feature operates intermittently. If the customer enables the Memory Remote Recall feature in the Vehicle Personalization menu, they may comment about intermittent operation. - The Adjustable Pedals are inoperative (Cadillac SRX only). The customer may experience the inability to move the Adjustable Pedals forward or rearward. Cause This condition may be caused by a software state, interaction of features and serial data messages that can contribute to one or more of the above conditions. Correction Important DO NOT replace the MSM for this concern. Reprogram and perform the Setup procedure for the MSM with the latest software calibration. Refer to Memory Seat Control Module Programming and Setup in SI. Important Select the correct calibration files for the appropriate vehicle configuration (body style) and RPO codes. A revised calibration has been developed to address this condition. Technicians are to reprogram the MSM using the Service Programming System (SPS) with the latest software available on TIS2WEB. Refer to the Service Programming System (SPS) procedures in SI. When using a Tech 2(R) or a Multiple Diagnostic Interface (MDI) for reprogramming, ensure that it is updated with the latest software version. During programming, the battery voltage must be maintained within the proper range of 12-15 Volts. Only use the approved Midtronics(R) PSC 550 Battery Maintainer (SPS Programming Support Tool EL-49642) or equivalent during programming. Warranty Information Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Memory Positioning Systems > Memory Positioning Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Electrical - L/H Seat Inop./Erratic Memory Sys Operation > Page 11434 For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table above. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Memory Positioning Systems > Memory Positioning Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 11435 Memory Positioning Module: Locations Passenger Compartment/Roof Component Views Driver Seat Components 1 - M56D Seat Recline Motor - Driver (AE8) 2 - E14A Seat Heating Element - Driver Back (KA1) 3 P22E Video Display - Driver Seatback (UWG) 4 - F106L Side Air Bag - Left 5 - M52D Seat Lumbar Support Horizontal Motor - Driver 6 - M51D Seat Horizontal Motor - Driver (AE8) 7 - K40 Seat Memory Control Module (LTZ or SLT) or K29 Seat Heating Control Module (KA1 without LTZ or SLT) 8 - F113D Seat Belt Anchor Pretensioner - Driver 9 - M55D Seat Rear Vertical Motor (AE8) or M57D Seat Vertical Motor (without AE8) 10 - M50D Seat Front Vertical Motor - Driver 11 - S65D Seat Lumbar Support Switch - Driver 12 - S64D Seat Adjuster Switch - Driver (without AE8) 13 S64D Seat Adjuster Switch - Driver (AE8) 14 - S47D Seat Memory Switch - Driver (LTZ or SLT) 15 - E14B Seat Heating Element - Driver Cushion (KA1) 16 - B88D Seat Belt Switch - Driver Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Memory Positioning Systems > Memory Positioning Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 11436 Memory Positioning Module: Diagrams K40 Seat Memory Control Module X1 (LTZ or SLT) K40 Seat Memory Control Module X2 (LTZ or SLT) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Memory Positioning Systems > Memory Positioning Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 11437 K40 Seat Memory Control Module X3 (KA1 with LTZ or SLT) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Memory Positioning Systems > Memory Positioning Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 11438 K40 Seat Memory Control Module X4 (LTZ or SLT) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Memory Positioning Systems > Memory Positioning Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 11439 K40 Seat Memory Control Module X5 (LTZ or SLT) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Memory Positioning Systems > Memory Positioning Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 11440 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Memory Positioning Systems > Seat Memory Switch > Component Information > Locations Seat Memory Switch: Locations Passenger Compartment/Roof Component Views Driver Seat Components 1 - M56D Seat Recline Motor - Driver (AE8) 2 - E14A Seat Heating Element - Driver Back (KA1) 3 P22E Video Display - Driver Seatback (UWG) 4 - F106L Side Air Bag - Left 5 - M52D Seat Lumbar Support Horizontal Motor - Driver 6 - M51D Seat Horizontal Motor - Driver (AE8) 7 - K40 Seat Memory Control Module (LTZ or SLT) or K29 Seat Heating Control Module (KA1 without LTZ or SLT) 8 - F113D Seat Belt Anchor Pretensioner - Driver 9 - M55D Seat Rear Vertical Motor (AE8) or M57D Seat Vertical Motor (without AE8) 10 - M50D Seat Front Vertical Motor - Driver 11 - S65D Seat Lumbar Support Switch - Driver 12 - S64D Seat Adjuster Switch - Driver (without AE8) 13 S64D Seat Adjuster Switch - Driver (AE8) 14 - S47D Seat Memory Switch - Driver (LTZ or SLT) 15 - E14B Seat Heating Element - Driver Cushion (KA1) 16 - B88D Seat Belt Switch - Driver Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Memory Positioning Systems > Seat Memory Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 11444 Seat Memory Switch: Diagrams S47D Seat Memory Switch - Driver (LTZ or SLT) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Memory Positioning Systems > Seat Memory Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 11445 Seat Memory Switch: Service and Repair Driver Seat Adjuster Memory Switch Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Navigation Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Navigation Module: > 09221C > Jan > 11 > Campaign Navigation System Update Navigation Module: Recalls Campaign - Navigation System Update SERVICE UPDATE Bulletin No.: 09221C Date: January 27, 2011 Subject: 09221C - Service Update for Inventory and Customer Vehicles - Navigation System Update - Expires with Base Warranty Models: 2010 Buick Allure, LaCrosse 2010 Cadillac SRX 2010 Chevrolet Equinox 2010 GMC Terrain Supercede: The Service Procedure in this bulletin has been revised. Please discard all copies of bulletin 09221B, issued November 2009. THIS SERVICE UPDATE INCLUDES VEHICLES IN DEALER INVENTORY AND CUSTOMER VEHICLES THAT RETURN TO THE DEALERSHIP FOR ANY REASON. IT WILL EXPIRE AT THE END OF THE INVOLVED VEHICLE'S NEW VEHICLE LIMITED WARRANTY PERIOD. Purpose This bulletin provides a service procedure to program the radio module on certain 2010 Buick Allure, LaCrosse; Cadillac SRX; Chevrolet Equinox; and GMC Terrain vehicles. This program will address multiple concerns with the navigation system. This service procedure should be completed as soon as possible on involved vehicles currently in dealer inventory and customer vehicles that return to the dealer for any type of service during the New Vehicle Limited Warranty coverage period. Vehicles Involved A list of involved vehicles currently in dealer inventory is available on the "Service Update Bulletin Information" link under the "Service" tab in GM GlobalConnect (US), or attached to the Dealer Communication (Canada), used to release this bulletin. Customer vehicles that return for service, for any reason, and are still covered under the vehicle's base warranty, and are within the VIN breakpoints provided below, should be checked for vehicle eligibility in the appropriate system listed below. Important Dealers are to confirm vehicle eligibility prior to beginning repairs by using the Investigate Vehicle History link on the Global Warranty Management application within GlobalConnect. Not all vehicles within the above breakpoints may be involved. Parts Information For US: Flash drives were shipped from the Warranty Parts Center (WPC) at no charge via UPS Ground Delivery-Attention: Parts Manager, to dealers with involved vehicles. If your USB Flash Drive has been misplaced, dealers are to obtain a USB 2.0 Flash Drive locally at their expense. The minimum USB Flash Drive capacity requirement is 512 MB. Follow the service procedure titled, FOR CANADIAN DEALERS, AND US DEALERS WHO NEED TO DOWNLOAD A CALIBRATION TO A NEW USB FLASH DRIVE. The calibration downloaded to the USB Flash Drive can be used to program all vehicles involved in the field action. After completing the programming event for all vehicles involved in the field action, remove (delete) the calibration from the USB Flash Drive. Save the USB Flash Drive for future USB programming events. Do NOT contact the WPC for a USB Flash Drive. For Canada: Dealers are to obtain a USB 2.0 Flash Drive locally. The minimum USB Flash Drive capacity requirement is 512 MB. A one-time allowance is provided for the purchase of a USB 2.0. Flash Drive. The calibration downloaded to the USB Flash Drive can be used to program all vehicles involved in the field action. After completing the programming event for all vehicles involved in the field action, remove (delete) the calibration Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Navigation Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Navigation Module: > 09221C > Jan > 11 > Campaign Navigation System Update > Page 11455 from the USB Flash Drive. Save the USB Flash Drive for future USB programming events. Service Procedure Note This procedure begins with a USB flash drive programming event. This IS NOT a TIS2WEB programming event. This procedure requires a USB 2.0 flash drive. The minimum USB flash drive capacity requirement is 512 MB. The software downloaded to the USB flash drive can be used to update all vehicles involved in this bulletin. Any existing date on the USB flash drive will be erased during the TIS2WEB-to-USB flash drive download procedure. To ensure important date IS NOT deleted from the USB flash drive, transfer the data from the USB flash drive onto another approved storage device BEFORE attempting to download software from TIS2WEB. Once the software is downloaded to the USB, DO NOT add any data to the storage device. 1. The Navigation radio software has been revised to address the above conditions. You will udpate the radio using a USB FLASH DRIVE and the Service Programming System (SPS) with the file available on TIS2WEB. Refer to the SPS procedures and Control Module References in SI. Note During programming, the battery voltage MUST be maintained within the proper range of 12-15 volts. 2. Connect the Midtronics(R) PSC 550 Battery Maintainer (SPS Programming Support Tool EL-49642) or an equivalent to the battery. 3. Connect the MDI to the vehicle. 4. Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. 5. Select: J-2534 MDI from the Select Diagnostics Tool and Programming Process screen. 6. Select: RAD - "Radio USB Programming for Navigation Software - Setup", from the Supported Controllers screen. Refer to SI and SPS for programming instructions, if required. 7. Insert a USB flash drive into the USB port of your computer. Press the REFRESH button if your USB drive IS NOT selectable in the Available USB Drives box. 8. Select NEXT from the SPS Special Function screen. 9. Monitor the Progress Status bar at the bottom of the SPS Special Function screen. Note The files have been successfully loaded onto the USB flash drive when the Progress Status bar is completely shaded and the SPS Special Functions screen displays the following message: "Remove the USB stick and insert into the vehicle USB port." 10. Remove the USB flash drive from the computer when the Progress Status bar indicates that the software download has been completed. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Navigation Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Navigation Module: > 09221C > Jan > 11 > Campaign Navigation System Update > Page 11456 11. Press FINISH from the SPS Special Function screen. DO NOT wait for the Completion screen to appear on the display. Note On Cadillac SRX vehicles, turn on the radio and press the NAV button to raise the viewscreen. If this is not done before inserting the USB drive, you will not be able to operate the "Ok" button in the following step. 12. Insert the USB flash drive into the USB port of the vehicle. The radio will display the title "Program Update" along with warnings not to interrupt power or remove the media. A bar graph will form indicating progress and an "OK" button will appear. PRESS the appropriate radio button or area of the screen to activate the "OK" command and begin programming. 13. A status bar indicates progress. Note DO NOT cycle the ignition even if the view screen indicates to cycle it. At the conclusion of the USB drive downloading to the radio, installation of the programming will automatically begin as indicated by the white progress bar below. If the view screen instead remains blank for more than 40 minutes, you may then cycle the ignition. This will reinitialize the programming event. Do not remove the USB flash drive. 14. After the USB programming has completed, the screen will go blank. (On the SRX, the screen will also lower.) It is not necessary to observe the entire programming process. Once the screen has gone blank, a white outline bar graph will appear. (Not visible on SRX due to the screen being lowered.) The downloaded program will automatically install. Once this progress bar fills, the screen will go blank and USB programming will be complete. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Navigation Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Navigation Module: > 09221C > Jan > 11 > Campaign Navigation System Update > Page 11457 15. When the programming event has completed, the radio will display Download Complete and the version number U413. Note On the SRX, the display screen will rise at the completion of the USB download to allow viewing of the programming complete screen and version number. 16. Turn OFF the ignition for 60 seconds. 17. Remove the USB flash drive. 18. The vehicle MUST now be calibrated. Note Vehicle calibration is a required step. Many of the radio and navigation functions will not operate properly unless the calibration outlined in the following steps is performed. Note After completion of the USB programming event, but prior to the initialization of SPS programming, the radio will display a Cadillac splash screen if operated. This is a normal condition. Completion of the SPS programming below will restore the radio to the proper splash screen for the vehicle being serviced. 19. Return to the SPS programming screen. Select J-2534 MDI from the Select Diagnostics Tool and Programming Process screen. 20. Select RAD: Radio Programming. 21. You must now select the proper choices for the build of the vehicle you are servicing. Refer to the vehicle SPID label or the vehicle build information through GWM for the specific RPOs the vehicle is equipped with. 22. Once you have selected the proper vehicle options, you may initiate SPS programming. Upon completion of this step, the radio is updated. Note At the completion of the programming, you may verify the programming is updated and successful by pressing CONFIG, entering NAV and then viewing the map database. You should see version U413 displayed. Note The navigation radio will be returned to factory default value during this upgrade. Warranty Transaction Information Submit a claim using the table below. * USB Flash Drives were sent to involved U.S. dealers at no charge from the WPC. If dealers no longer have that flash drive, they are to purchase one at their expense. Do NOT submit for the cost of a USB flash drive. ** Submit the actual cost of the USB 2.0 Flash Drive, not to exceed $10.00 USD, $10.30 CAD. The calibration downloaded to the USB Flash Drive can be used to program all vehicles involved in the field action. After completing the programming event for all vehicles involved in the field action, remove (delete) the calibration from the USB Flash Drive. Save the USB Flash Drive for future USB programming events. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Navigation Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Navigation Module: > 09221C > Jan > 11 > Campaign Navigation System Update > Page 11458 Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Navigation Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Navigation Module: > 09221C > Jan > 11 > Campaign - Navigation System Update Navigation Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Campaign - Navigation System Update SERVICE UPDATE Bulletin No.: 09221C Date: January 27, 2011 Subject: 09221C - Service Update for Inventory and Customer Vehicles - Navigation System Update - Expires with Base Warranty Models: 2010 Buick Allure, LaCrosse 2010 Cadillac SRX 2010 Chevrolet Equinox 2010 GMC Terrain Supercede: The Service Procedure in this bulletin has been revised. Please discard all copies of bulletin 09221B, issued November 2009. THIS SERVICE UPDATE INCLUDES VEHICLES IN DEALER INVENTORY AND CUSTOMER VEHICLES THAT RETURN TO THE DEALERSHIP FOR ANY REASON. IT WILL EXPIRE AT THE END OF THE INVOLVED VEHICLE'S NEW VEHICLE LIMITED WARRANTY PERIOD. Purpose This bulletin provides a service procedure to program the radio module on certain 2010 Buick Allure, LaCrosse; Cadillac SRX; Chevrolet Equinox; and GMC Terrain vehicles. This program will address multiple concerns with the navigation system. This service procedure should be completed as soon as possible on involved vehicles currently in dealer inventory and customer vehicles that return to the dealer for any type of service during the New Vehicle Limited Warranty coverage period. Vehicles Involved A list of involved vehicles currently in dealer inventory is available on the "Service Update Bulletin Information" link under the "Service" tab in GM GlobalConnect (US), or attached to the Dealer Communication (Canada), used to release this bulletin. Customer vehicles that return for service, for any reason, and are still covered under the vehicle's base warranty, and are within the VIN breakpoints provided below, should be checked for vehicle eligibility in the appropriate system listed below. Important Dealers are to confirm vehicle eligibility prior to beginning repairs by using the Investigate Vehicle History link on the Global Warranty Management application within GlobalConnect. Not all vehicles within the above breakpoints may be involved. Parts Information For US: Flash drives were shipped from the Warranty Parts Center (WPC) at no charge via UPS Ground Delivery-Attention: Parts Manager, to dealers with involved vehicles. If your USB Flash Drive has been misplaced, dealers are to obtain a USB 2.0 Flash Drive locally at their expense. The minimum USB Flash Drive capacity requirement is 512 MB. Follow the service procedure titled, FOR CANADIAN DEALERS, AND US DEALERS WHO NEED TO DOWNLOAD A CALIBRATION TO A NEW USB FLASH DRIVE. The calibration downloaded to the USB Flash Drive can be used to program all vehicles involved in the field action. After completing the programming event for all vehicles involved in the field action, remove (delete) the calibration from the USB Flash Drive. Save the USB Flash Drive for future USB programming events. Do NOT contact the WPC for a USB Flash Drive. For Canada: Dealers are to obtain a USB 2.0 Flash Drive locally. The minimum USB Flash Drive capacity requirement is 512 MB. A one-time allowance is provided for the purchase of a USB 2.0. Flash Drive. The calibration downloaded to the USB Flash Drive can be used to program all vehicles involved in the field action. After completing the programming event for all vehicles involved in the field action, remove (delete) the calibration Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Navigation Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Navigation Module: > 09221C > Jan > 11 > Campaign - Navigation System Update > Page 11464 from the USB Flash Drive. Save the USB Flash Drive for future USB programming events. Service Procedure Note This procedure begins with a USB flash drive programming event. This IS NOT a TIS2WEB programming event. This procedure requires a USB 2.0 flash drive. The minimum USB flash drive capacity requirement is 512 MB. The software downloaded to the USB flash drive can be used to update all vehicles involved in this bulletin. Any existing date on the USB flash drive will be erased during the TIS2WEB-to-USB flash drive download procedure. To ensure important date IS NOT deleted from the USB flash drive, transfer the data from the USB flash drive onto another approved storage device BEFORE attempting to download software from TIS2WEB. Once the software is downloaded to the USB, DO NOT add any data to the storage device. 1. The Navigation radio software has been revised to address the above conditions. You will udpate the radio using a USB FLASH DRIVE and the Service Programming System (SPS) with the file available on TIS2WEB. Refer to the SPS procedures and Control Module References in SI. Note During programming, the battery voltage MUST be maintained within the proper range of 12-15 volts. 2. Connect the Midtronics(R) PSC 550 Battery Maintainer (SPS Programming Support Tool EL-49642) or an equivalent to the battery. 3. Connect the MDI to the vehicle. 4. Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. 5. Select: J-2534 MDI from the Select Diagnostics Tool and Programming Process screen. 6. Select: RAD - "Radio USB Programming for Navigation Software - Setup", from the Supported Controllers screen. Refer to SI and SPS for programming instructions, if required. 7. Insert a USB flash drive into the USB port of your computer. Press the REFRESH button if your USB drive IS NOT selectable in the Available USB Drives box. 8. Select NEXT from the SPS Special Function screen. 9. Monitor the Progress Status bar at the bottom of the SPS Special Function screen. Note The files have been successfully loaded onto the USB flash drive when the Progress Status bar is completely shaded and the SPS Special Functions screen displays the following message: "Remove the USB stick and insert into the vehicle USB port." 10. Remove the USB flash drive from the computer when the Progress Status bar indicates that the software download has been completed. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Navigation Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Navigation Module: > 09221C > Jan > 11 > Campaign - Navigation System Update > Page 11465 11. Press FINISH from the SPS Special Function screen. DO NOT wait for the Completion screen to appear on the display. Note On Cadillac SRX vehicles, turn on the radio and press the NAV button to raise the viewscreen. If this is not done before inserting the USB drive, you will not be able to operate the "Ok" button in the following step. 12. Insert the USB flash drive into the USB port of the vehicle. The radio will display the title "Program Update" along with warnings not to interrupt power or remove the media. A bar graph will form indicating progress and an "OK" button will appear. PRESS the appropriate radio button or area of the screen to activate the "OK" command and begin programming. 13. A status bar indicates progress. Note DO NOT cycle the ignition even if the view screen indicates to cycle it. At the conclusion of the USB drive downloading to the radio, installation of the programming will automatically begin as indicated by the white progress bar below. If the view screen instead remains blank for more than 40 minutes, you may then cycle the ignition. This will reinitialize the programming event. Do not remove the USB flash drive. 14. After the USB programming has completed, the screen will go blank. (On the SRX, the screen will also lower.) It is not necessary to observe the entire programming process. Once the screen has gone blank, a white outline bar graph will appear. (Not visible on SRX due to the screen being lowered.) The downloaded program will automatically install. Once this progress bar fills, the screen will go blank and USB programming will be complete. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Navigation Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Navigation Module: > 09221C > Jan > 11 > Campaign - Navigation System Update > Page 11466 15. When the programming event has completed, the radio will display Download Complete and the version number U413. Note On the SRX, the display screen will rise at the completion of the USB download to allow viewing of the programming complete screen and version number. 16. Turn OFF the ignition for 60 seconds. 17. Remove the USB flash drive. 18. The vehicle MUST now be calibrated. Note Vehicle calibration is a required step. Many of the radio and navigation functions will not operate properly unless the calibration outlined in the following steps is performed. Note After completion of the USB programming event, but prior to the initialization of SPS programming, the radio will display a Cadillac splash screen if operated. This is a normal condition. Completion of the SPS programming below will restore the radio to the proper splash screen for the vehicle being serviced. 19. Return to the SPS programming screen. Select J-2534 MDI from the Select Diagnostics Tool and Programming Process screen. 20. Select RAD: Radio Programming. 21. You must now select the proper choices for the build of the vehicle you are servicing. Refer to the vehicle SPID label or the vehicle build information through GWM for the specific RPOs the vehicle is equipped with. 22. Once you have selected the proper vehicle options, you may initiate SPS programming. Upon completion of this step, the radio is updated. Note At the completion of the programming, you may verify the programming is updated and successful by pressing CONFIG, entering NAV and then viewing the map database. You should see version U413 displayed. Note The navigation radio will be returned to factory default value during this upgrade. Warranty Transaction Information Submit a claim using the table below. * USB Flash Drives were sent to involved U.S. dealers at no charge from the WPC. If dealers no longer have that flash drive, they are to purchase one at their expense. Do NOT submit for the cost of a USB flash drive. ** Submit the actual cost of the USB 2.0 Flash Drive, not to exceed $10.00 USD, $10.30 CAD. The calibration downloaded to the USB Flash Drive can be used to program all vehicles involved in the field action. After completing the programming event for all vehicles involved in the field action, remove (delete) the calibration from the USB Flash Drive. Save the USB Flash Drive for future USB programming events. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Navigation Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Navigation Module: > 09221C > Jan > 11 > Campaign - Navigation System Update > Page 11467 Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Pedal Positioning System > Pedal Positioning Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Brake Pedal Position Sensor Calibration Pedal Positioning Sensor: Service and Repair Brake Pedal Position Sensor Calibration Brake Pedal Position Sensor Calibration Calibration Criteria Note: Do not apply the brake pedal during the brake pedal position sensor calibration procedure. Any movement of the brake pedal during this procedure will cause the calibration procedure to fail. If this occurs, the brake pedal position sensor calibration must be repeated. Brake pedal position sensor calibration must be performed after the brake pedal position sensor or body control module (BCM) have been serviced. The calibration procedure will set the brake pedal position sensor home value. This value is used by the BCM to determine the action of the driver applying the brake system and to provide this information to the vehicle subsystems via serial data. Calibration Procedure 1. Apply the parking brake. 2. Place the transmission in the PARK position. 3. Install a scan tool. 4. Clear all BCM DTCs before proceeding. 5. Navigate to the Module Diagnosis menu. 6. Select BCM menu item. 7. Select Configuration/Reset Functions menu item. 8. Select the Brake Pedal Position Sensor Learn procedure and follow the directions displayed on the screen. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Pedal Positioning System > Pedal Positioning Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Brake Pedal Position Sensor Calibration > Page 11473 Pedal Positioning Sensor: Service and Repair Brake Pedal Position Sensor Replacement Brake Pedal Position Sensor Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Amplifier, Sound System > Component Information > Diagrams Amplifier: Diagrams T3 Audio Amplifier X1 T3 Audio Amplifier X2 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Amplifier, Sound System > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 11478 T3 Audio Amplifier X3 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Amplifier, Sound System > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 11479 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Amplifier, Sound System > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 11480 Amplifier: Service and Repair Radio Speaker Amplifier Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Automatic Volume Control > System Information > Diagrams Automatic Volume Control: Diagrams B77F Radio Volume Compensator Interior Noise Microphone - Front (VQN) B77R Radio Volume Compensator Interior Noise Microphone - Rear (VQN) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Automatic Volume Control > System Information > Diagrams > Page 11484 Automatic Volume Control: Service and Repair Radio Volume Compensator Interior Noise Microphone Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Compact Disc Player (CD) > Component Information > Service and Repair Compact Disc Player (CD): Service and Repair Audio Disc Player and USB Receptacle Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Radio/Stereo > Radio/Stereo Noise Filter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Radio/Stereo Noise Filter: > 07-08-46-002D > Jul > 09 > Audio System - Noise When Using OnStar(R) Radio/Stereo Noise Filter: Customer Interest Audio System - Noise When Using OnStar(R) TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 07-08-46-002D Date: July 29, 2009 Subject: Audio Whine Noise from Radio Speakers When Using OnStar(R) (Install Noise Suppression Filter) Models: 2007-2010 GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (Including Saturn) 2007-2010 HUMMER H2, H3 2007-2009 Saab 9-7X Equipped with OnStar(R) (RPO UE1) Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the Warranty Information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 07-08-46-002C (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Condition Some customers may comment on an audio whine coming from the radio speakers when using the OnStar(R) system. The amplitude and frequency of the whine will change with an increase or decrease in engine speed. Cause This condition may be caused by electrical noise on the OnStar(R) Vehicle Communication Interface Module (VCIM) battery feed wire being passed to the microphone output pins at the radio. Correction Technicians are to install a noise suppression filter, P/N 1224205, into the OnStar(R) battery voltage circuit, a few centimeters (inches) from the VCIM. The filter package has three attached wires - a single yellow wire at one end with a yellow wire and a black wire at the other. Install the single yellow wire side into the battery voltage circuit towards the VCIM. Install the remaining single yellow wire into the battery voltage circuit toward the fuse and the black wire to ground. Important The noise suppression filter is polarity sensitive. The filter is designed to be most effective when the end with the capacitor ground is connected towards the source of the electrical noise. Install the filter in this polarity first. If the noise level is still not satisfactory, try disconnecting the capacitor ground. In some cases, if the first installation does not correct the noise, try reversing the filter polarity (removing the filter, turning it end for end and then reinstalling it) and grounding the capacitor lead. Parts Information Warranty Information (excluding Saab U.S. Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table above. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Radio/Stereo > Radio/Stereo Noise Filter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Radio/Stereo Noise Filter: > 07-08-46-002D > Jul > 09 > Audio System - Noise When Using OnStar(R) > Page 11497 Warranty Information (Saab U.S. Models) Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Radio/Stereo > Radio/Stereo Noise Filter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Radio/Stereo Noise Filter: > 07-08-46-002D > Jul > 09 > Audio System - Noise When Using OnStar(R) Radio/Stereo Noise Filter: All Technical Service Bulletins Audio System - Noise When Using OnStar(R) TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 07-08-46-002D Date: July 29, 2009 Subject: Audio Whine Noise from Radio Speakers When Using OnStar(R) (Install Noise Suppression Filter) Models: 2007-2010 GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (Including Saturn) 2007-2010 HUMMER H2, H3 2007-2009 Saab 9-7X Equipped with OnStar(R) (RPO UE1) Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the Warranty Information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 07-08-46-002C (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Condition Some customers may comment on an audio whine coming from the radio speakers when using the OnStar(R) system. The amplitude and frequency of the whine will change with an increase or decrease in engine speed. Cause This condition may be caused by electrical noise on the OnStar(R) Vehicle Communication Interface Module (VCIM) battery feed wire being passed to the microphone output pins at the radio. Correction Technicians are to install a noise suppression filter, P/N 1224205, into the OnStar(R) battery voltage circuit, a few centimeters (inches) from the VCIM. The filter package has three attached wires - a single yellow wire at one end with a yellow wire and a black wire at the other. Install the single yellow wire side into the battery voltage circuit towards the VCIM. Install the remaining single yellow wire into the battery voltage circuit toward the fuse and the black wire to ground. Important The noise suppression filter is polarity sensitive. The filter is designed to be most effective when the end with the capacitor ground is connected towards the source of the electrical noise. Install the filter in this polarity first. If the noise level is still not satisfactory, try disconnecting the capacitor ground. In some cases, if the first installation does not correct the noise, try reversing the filter polarity (removing the filter, turning it end for end and then reinstalling it) and grounding the capacitor lead. Parts Information Warranty Information (excluding Saab U.S. Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table above. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Radio/Stereo > Radio/Stereo Noise Filter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Radio/Stereo Noise Filter: > 07-08-46-002D > Jul > 09 > Audio System - Noise When Using OnStar(R) > Page 11503 Warranty Information (Saab U.S. Models) Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Signal Processing Module > Component Information > Locations Signal Processing Module: Locations Instrument Panel/Center Console Component Views Left Side of the Instrument Panel Components 1 - P16 Instrument Cluster 2 - B10B Ambient Light/Sunload Sensor (C68) or B10 Ambient Light Sensor (C67) 3 - P19B Speaker - Center Instrument Panel (UZ8) 4 - P17 Info Display Module 5 P19V Speaker - Right Front Tweeter 6 - A20 Radio/HVAC Controls 7 - A11 Radio 8 - S3 Transmission Shift Lever 9 - P2 Transmission Shift Lever Position Indicator 10 - T11 Multimedia Player Interface Module (KTA) 11 - K108 Active Noise Cancellation Module (VQN) 12 - E8J Instrument Panel Courtesy Lamp - Left (LTZ or SLT) 13 - S36 Instrument Panel Dimmer Switch Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Signal Processing Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 11507 Signal Processing Module: Diagrams K108 Active Noise Cancellation Module (VQN) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Signal Processing Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 11508 Signal Processing Module: Description and Operation Active Noise Cancellation Description and Operation The entertainment system on this vehicle may have several different configurations. To determine the specific configuration of the vehicle, please see the Service Parts ID Label, and refer to RPO Code List (See: Application and ID/RPO Code List). Active Noise Cancellation (ANC) is a method used to cancel out undesirable sound generated by the engine or an open window. Active Noise Cancellation Control Circuit Operation An Active Noise Cancellation (ANC) system has four main components: the ANC module, microphone(s), audio amplifier(s), and speaker(s). The microphone is connected to the audio system and picks up the sound/noise in the vehicle cabin while the speakers produce the cancellation vibrations. The ANC system is composed of two microphones. The microphones are centrally located in the headliner to detect noise in the vehicle caused by the engine, or an open window. The processor analyzes the noise signal and outputs a cancellation signal audio tone based on positive coefficient and phase change to moderate the engine noise and make the vehicle seem quieter and without vibration. The ANC system uses the engine revolutions per minute (RPM) signal from the tachometer to determine the rotational speed in an engine. The ANC system works within 1500-2500 engine RPM. The cancellation signal is then amplified and a signal is sent to the speaker and subwoofer. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Signal Processing Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 11509 Signal Processing Module: Service and Repair Active Noise Cancellation Module Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Diagrams Speaker: Diagrams P19AC Speaker - Subwoofer (UZ8) P19B Speaker - Center Instrument Panel (UZ8) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 11513 P19G Speaker - Left Front (UW6) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 11514 P19G Speaker - Left Front (UZ8) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 11515 P19H Speaker - Left Front Tweeter Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 11516 P19K Speaker - Left Rear (UW6) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 11517 P19K Speaker - Left Rear (UZ8) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 11518 P19U Speaker - Right Front (UW6) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 11519 P19U Speaker - Right Front (UZ8) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 11520 P19V Speaker - Right Front Tweeter Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 11521 P19X Speaker - Right Rear (UW6) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 11522 P19X Speaker - Right Rear (UZ8) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 11523 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Service and Repair > Radio Front Center Speaker Replacement Speaker: Service and Repair Radio Front Center Speaker Replacement Radio Front Center Speaker Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Service and Repair > Radio Front Center Speaker Replacement > Page 11526 Speaker: Service and Repair Radio Front Side Door Lower Speaker Replacement Radio Front Side Door Lower Speaker Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Service and Repair > Radio Front Center Speaker Replacement > Page 11527 Speaker: Service and Repair Radio Rear Side Door Lower Speaker Replacement Radio Rear Side Door Lower Speaker Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Service and Repair > Radio Front Center Speaker Replacement > Page 11528 Speaker: Service and Repair Radio Rear Compartment Speaker Replacement Radio Rear Compartment Speaker Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Service and Repair > Radio Front Center Speaker Replacement > Page 11529 Speaker: Service and Repair Radio Windshield Side Garnish Molding Speaker Replacement Radio Windshield Side Garnish Molding Speaker Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Relay > Component Information > Locations Accessory Relay: Locations Electrical Center Identification Views X51A Fuse Block - Instrument Panel Label (before A6284015) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 11534 X51A Fuse Block - Instrument Panel Label (A6284015 and after) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 11535 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 11536 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 11537 Accessory Relay: Diagrams X80A Accessory Power Receptacle - Center Console 1 X80B Accessory Power Receptacle - Center Console 2 X80G Accessory Power Receptacle - Instrument Panel Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 11538 X80R Accessory Power Receptacle - Rear Compartment Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Service and Repair Alarm Module: Service and Repair Theft Deterrent Module Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > OnStar(R) Availability for Hearing Impaired Communications Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins OnStar(R) - Availability for Hearing Impaired INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 06-08-46-005B Date: February 11, 2010 Subject: Availability of OnStar(R) for Hearing Impaired Models: 2007-2010 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (Including Saturn and Saab) Except 2007 Cadillac CTS Except 2007-2008 HUMMER H2, H2 SUT Except 2007 Pontiac Montana SV6 Except 2007-2010 Pontiac Vibe Except 2007 Saturn ION, VUE Except 2008 Saturn Astra Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add a Note regarding 2009 Bluetooth(R)-equipped vehicles, additional models and model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 06-08-46-005A (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Important This service bulletin is not applicable to 'GM of Canada' dealers and retailers. Note On 2009 and newer model year vehicles equipped with the Bluetooth(R) feature (option code UPF), when up-fitted with TTY capabilities, the Bluetooth(R) feature will be disabled. OnStar with Text Telephone Capability (TTY) General Motors is pleased to announce that the safety and security of OnStar is now available to our deaf, hard of hearing and speech impaired customers. The current vehicles listed above, as well as forthcoming vehicles equipped with OnStar hardware version 7.0 or higher, have the ability to utilize texting telephones. Vehicle specific TTY capability can be determined by utilizing the VIN lookup Tool. Additional information may be found by referring to www.onstar.com/tty. TTY equipment allows people who are deaf, hard of hearing or speech impaired, in-vehicle access to 911 and basic OnStar(R) services by pressing the OnStar(R) blue button or red emergency button. The keypad provides a means to communicate by allowing customers to type messages back and forth, with an OnStar(R) advisor or other party when using the OnStar(R) Hands-Free Calling feature. A TTY is required at both ends of the conversation in order to communicate. OnStar(R) Turn by Turn Navigation and Virtual Advisor are not available with the addition of TTY. The Reimbursement Program This equipment will be made available to eligible customers through GM Mobility and OnStar(R). Under this program, the customer must complete a GM Mobility application form. To take advantage of the program, vehicles must be adapted at the time of delivery for purchase / lease and a dealer claim ($1,000 Maximum per GM Mobility guidelines) with the application form submitted to GM Mobility. Saab dealers must fax documents. GM Dealers will receive electronic reimbursement directly from GM Mobility. Saab dealers will receive a check directly from OnStar(R). Additional questions or concerns should be directed to the OnStar Dealer Center. How to Order To order the dealer installed kit, contact AutoCraft Electronics or via the web at www.autocraft.com. The kit consists of an OnStar Interface Module, a Dial Pad (for making calls), OTIM wiring harness, the TTY device, installation/Tech 2(R) programming instructions and owner's guide. Warranty Information The Ultra-Tec Compact C TTY device is manufactured by an independent manufacturer and is covered by the manufacturer's warranty. It is not covered under the GM New Vehicle Limited Warranty. All other parts (OTIM, dial pad and OTIM wiring harness) are covered by the standard GM new vehicle parts and labor warranty. Replacement parts are available through AutoCraft Electronics. Contact AutoCraft Electronics or via the web. Warranty claims for the OTIM, dial pad and OTIM wiring harness should be submitted through normal warranty procedures using a sublet warranty claim with GM Labor Operation R5140. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > OnStar(R) Availability for Hearing Impaired > Page 11546 Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > OnStar(R) Availability for Hearing Impaired > Page 11547 Communications Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins Audio - Radio Does Not Mute Enough When Using OnStar(R) TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 10-08-46-001 Date: January 27, 2010 Subject: Radio Does Not Mute Enough When OnStar(R) Turn-by Turn Navigation Directions Are Announced (Increase Volume Setting or Request Soft Mute Feature Change Through OnStar(R) Customer Service) Models: 2009-2010 GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (Including Saturn) 2009-2010 HUMMER H2, H3 2009 Saab 9-7X All Equipped with OnStar(R) (RPO UE1) Condition Some customers may comment that when the radio is on, it does not mute enough when the OnStar(R) Turn-by-Turn Navigation directions are announced. Cause This condition may be caused by the customer improperly setting the radio volume high enough when the Turn-by-Turn Navigation messages are played. The 2009 and 2010 models with OnStar(R) initiates a "soft mute" feature when the radio is on during Turn-by-Turn Navigation direction announcements. During the announcement, the radio can still be heard at a very low volume. Previous model years initiated a "hard mute" during this function which completely muted the radio audio. Correction Instruct the customer to increase the radio volume while getting the Turn-by-Turn Navigation direction announcements. You can control the message volume using the radio volume control, only when the Turn-by-Turn navigation messages are playing. Some customers that were accustomed to previous model vehicles with the "hard mute" feature may be dissatisfied with the function of the "soft mute" feature. For those customers, contact the OnStar(R) Customer Service Center by pushing the Blue OnStar(R) Button to speak to a trained Advisor and request a change be made to the vehicle from the "soft mute" setting to that of the hard or complete muting of audio playback during Turn by Turn directions. OnStar(R) will then create a case number. Advise the customer that the vehicle update should be completed Over the Air within 5 business days, after which an OnStar(R) Customer Care advisor will follow-up with the customer to verify the fix. If the customer does not hear back from OnStar(R) within a week, advise them to press the Blue OnStar(R) Button and ask for Customer Care to check status. Warranty Information (excluding Saab U.S. Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use: Warranty Information (Saab U.S. Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table above. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > OnStar(R) Availability for Hearing Impaired > Page 11548 Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 11549 Communications Control Module: Locations Instrument Panel/Center Console Component Views Left Side of the Instrument Panel Components 1 - P16 Instrument Cluster 2 - B10B Ambient Light/Sunload Sensor (C68) or B10 Ambient Light Sensor (C67) 3 - P19B Speaker - Center Instrument Panel (UZ8) 4 - P17 Info Display Module 5 P19V Speaker - Right Front Tweeter 6 - A20 Radio/HVAC Controls 7 - A11 Radio 8 - S3 Transmission Shift Lever 9 - P2 Transmission Shift Lever Position Indicator 10 - T11 Multimedia Player Interface Module (KTA) 11 - K108 Active Noise Cancellation Module (VQN) 12 - E8J Instrument Panel Courtesy Lamp - Left (LTZ or SLT) 13 - S36 Instrument Panel Dimmer Switch Lower Left of the Instrument Panel Components Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 11550 1 - B80 Park Brake Switch 2 - T3 Audio Amplifier 3 - K9 Body Control Module 4 - K73 Telematics Communication Interface Control Module (UE1) 5 - B107 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor 6 T4S Wireless Communication Antenna - Bluetooth (UE1 with UPF) 7 - B22 Brake Pedal Position Sensor 8 - X84 Data Link Connector Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 11551 Communications Control Module: Diagrams K73 Telematics Communication Interface Control Module X1 (UE1) K73 Telematics Communication Interface Control Module X2 (UE1) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 11552 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 11553 Communications Control Module: Service and Repair Communication Interface Module Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Emergency Contact Module: > 05-08-46-004C > Dec > 10 > OnStar(R) - Number Incorrect/Incorrectly Assigned Emergency Contact Module: Customer Interest OnStar(R) - Number Incorrect/Incorrectly Assigned INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 05-08-46-004C Date: December 23, 2010 Subject: OnStar(R) Phone Number Concerns (Phone Number Incorrect/Assigned to Another Vehicle/Phone) That Occur During Diagnosis of OnStar(R) System Models: 2000-2011 GM Passenger Cars and Trucks Equipped with OnStar(R) (RPO UE1) Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update model years up to 2011. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 05-08-46-004B (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). During diagnosis of an OnStar(R) concern, the technician may be told that the OnStar(R) phone number is incorrect or tied to another vehicle and/or phone of some kind. To resolve these concerns, the Tech 2(R) with software version 22.005 (or higher), has the capability to change the OnStar(R) phone number. Service Procedure 1. With the Tech 2(R), build the vehicle to specifications within the Diagnostics area of the Tech 2(R). 2. For vehicles with physical-based diagnostics - under Body, go to the OnStar(R) section. Then select the Special Functions menu. For vehicles with functional-based diagnostics - under Body and Accessories, go to the Cellular Communication section. Select Module Setup and then Vehicle Communication Interface Module. 3. Locate the Program Phone Number prompt and select it. The original phone number will be displayed on the Tech 2(R) screen. 4. Contact the OnStar(R) team at the GM Technical Assistance Center (TAC) to obtain a new phone number. 5. Highlight the digits of the phone number one at a time and enter the new phone number using the number keys on the Tech 2(R). 6. Press the Soft key at the base of the screen for Done once these numbers have been changed on the screen. 7. Press the Soft key for Done again. The area code or new phone number has now been programmed into the phone. 8. Cycle the ignition to Off and open the driver's door. 9. Press the blue OnStar(R) button to make sure that a normal connection can be made to the OnStar(R) call center. If applicable, make sure the Hands-Free Calling (HFC) works properly by making a phone call. 10. If the system is working properly, fax or voicemail a case closing into the OnStar(R) team at TAC with the results. Dealers in Canada should submit case closing information through the GM infoNET. Please follow this diagnostic process thoroughly and complete each step. If the condition exhibited is resolved WITHOUT completing every step, the remaining steps do not need to be performed. If the procedure above does not resolve the condition, you must contact TAC for further assistance. This diagnostic approach was developed specifically for this condition and should not automatically be used for other vehicles with similar symptoms. Warranty Information (excluding Saab Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use: Warranty Information (Saab Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Emergency Contact Module: > 05-08-46-004C > Dec > 10 > OnStar(R) - Number Incorrect/Incorrectly Assigned > Page 11562 Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 05-08-46-004C > Dec > 10 > OnStar(R) - Number Incorrect/Incorrectly Assigned Emergency Contact Module: All Technical Service Bulletins OnStar(R) - Number Incorrect/Incorrectly Assigned INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 05-08-46-004C Date: December 23, 2010 Subject: OnStar(R) Phone Number Concerns (Phone Number Incorrect/Assigned to Another Vehicle/Phone) That Occur During Diagnosis of OnStar(R) System Models: 2000-2011 GM Passenger Cars and Trucks Equipped with OnStar(R) (RPO UE1) Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update model years up to 2011. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 05-08-46-004B (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). During diagnosis of an OnStar(R) concern, the technician may be told that the OnStar(R) phone number is incorrect or tied to another vehicle and/or phone of some kind. To resolve these concerns, the Tech 2(R) with software version 22.005 (or higher), has the capability to change the OnStar(R) phone number. Service Procedure 1. With the Tech 2(R), build the vehicle to specifications within the Diagnostics area of the Tech 2(R). 2. For vehicles with physical-based diagnostics - under Body, go to the OnStar(R) section. Then select the Special Functions menu. For vehicles with functional-based diagnostics - under Body and Accessories, go to the Cellular Communication section. Select Module Setup and then Vehicle Communication Interface Module. 3. Locate the Program Phone Number prompt and select it. The original phone number will be displayed on the Tech 2(R) screen. 4. Contact the OnStar(R) team at the GM Technical Assistance Center (TAC) to obtain a new phone number. 5. Highlight the digits of the phone number one at a time and enter the new phone number using the number keys on the Tech 2(R). 6. Press the Soft key at the base of the screen for Done once these numbers have been changed on the screen. 7. Press the Soft key for Done again. The area code or new phone number has now been programmed into the phone. 8. Cycle the ignition to Off and open the driver's door. 9. Press the blue OnStar(R) button to make sure that a normal connection can be made to the OnStar(R) call center. If applicable, make sure the Hands-Free Calling (HFC) works properly by making a phone call. 10. If the system is working properly, fax or voicemail a case closing into the OnStar(R) team at TAC with the results. Dealers in Canada should submit case closing information through the GM infoNET. Please follow this diagnostic process thoroughly and complete each step. If the condition exhibited is resolved WITHOUT completing every step, the remaining steps do not need to be performed. If the procedure above does not resolve the condition, you must contact TAC for further assistance. This diagnostic approach was developed specifically for this condition and should not automatically be used for other vehicles with similar symptoms. Warranty Information (excluding Saab Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use: Warranty Information (Saab Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 05-08-46-004C > Dec > 10 > OnStar(R) - Number Incorrect/Incorrectly Assigned > Page 11568 Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Entertainment System Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams Entertainment System Control Module: Diagrams T11 Multimedia Player Interface Module (KTA) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Entertainment System Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 11572 Entertainment System Control Module: Service and Repair Multimedia Player Interface Module Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Diagrams Keyless Entry Module: Diagrams K77 Remote Control Door Lock Receiver Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 11576 Keyless Entry Module: Service and Repair Remote Control Door Lock Receiver Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Navigation Module: > 09221C > Jan > 11 > Campaign - Navigation System Update Navigation Module: Recalls Campaign - Navigation System Update SERVICE UPDATE Bulletin No.: 09221C Date: January 27, 2011 Subject: 09221C - Service Update for Inventory and Customer Vehicles - Navigation System Update - Expires with Base Warranty Models: 2010 Buick Allure, LaCrosse 2010 Cadillac SRX 2010 Chevrolet Equinox 2010 GMC Terrain Supercede: The Service Procedure in this bulletin has been revised. Please discard all copies of bulletin 09221B, issued November 2009. THIS SERVICE UPDATE INCLUDES VEHICLES IN DEALER INVENTORY AND CUSTOMER VEHICLES THAT RETURN TO THE DEALERSHIP FOR ANY REASON. IT WILL EXPIRE AT THE END OF THE INVOLVED VEHICLE'S NEW VEHICLE LIMITED WARRANTY PERIOD. Purpose This bulletin provides a service procedure to program the radio module on certain 2010 Buick Allure, LaCrosse; Cadillac SRX; Chevrolet Equinox; and GMC Terrain vehicles. This program will address multiple concerns with the navigation system. This service procedure should be completed as soon as possible on involved vehicles currently in dealer inventory and customer vehicles that return to the dealer for any type of service during the New Vehicle Limited Warranty coverage period. Vehicles Involved A list of involved vehicles currently in dealer inventory is available on the "Service Update Bulletin Information" link under the "Service" tab in GM GlobalConnect (US), or attached to the Dealer Communication (Canada), used to release this bulletin. Customer vehicles that return for service, for any reason, and are still covered under the vehicle's base warranty, and are within the VIN breakpoints provided below, should be checked for vehicle eligibility in the appropriate system listed below. Important Dealers are to confirm vehicle eligibility prior to beginning repairs by using the Investigate Vehicle History link on the Global Warranty Management application within GlobalConnect. Not all vehicles within the above breakpoints may be involved. Parts Information For US: Flash drives were shipped from the Warranty Parts Center (WPC) at no charge via UPS Ground Delivery-Attention: Parts Manager, to dealers with involved vehicles. If your USB Flash Drive has been misplaced, dealers are to obtain a USB 2.0 Flash Drive locally at their expense. The minimum USB Flash Drive capacity requirement is 512 MB. Follow the service procedure titled, FOR CANADIAN DEALERS, AND US DEALERS WHO NEED TO DOWNLOAD A CALIBRATION TO A NEW USB FLASH DRIVE. The calibration downloaded to the USB Flash Drive can be used to program all vehicles involved in the field action. After completing the programming event for all vehicles involved in the field action, remove (delete) the calibration from the USB Flash Drive. Save the USB Flash Drive for future USB programming events. Do NOT contact the WPC for a USB Flash Drive. For Canada: Dealers are to obtain a USB 2.0 Flash Drive locally. The minimum USB Flash Drive capacity requirement is 512 MB. A one-time allowance is provided for the purchase of a USB 2.0. Flash Drive. The calibration downloaded to the USB Flash Drive can be used to program all vehicles involved in the field action. After completing the programming event for all vehicles involved in the field action, remove (delete) the calibration Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Navigation Module: > 09221C > Jan > 11 > Campaign - Navigation System Update > Page 11585 from the USB Flash Drive. Save the USB Flash Drive for future USB programming events. Service Procedure Note This procedure begins with a USB flash drive programming event. This IS NOT a TIS2WEB programming event. This procedure requires a USB 2.0 flash drive. The minimum USB flash drive capacity requirement is 512 MB. The software downloaded to the USB flash drive can be used to update all vehicles involved in this bulletin. Any existing date on the USB flash drive will be erased during the TIS2WEB-to-USB flash drive download procedure. To ensure important date IS NOT deleted from the USB flash drive, transfer the data from the USB flash drive onto another approved storage device BEFORE attempting to download software from TIS2WEB. Once the software is downloaded to the USB, DO NOT add any data to the storage device. 1. The Navigation radio software has been revised to address the above conditions. You will udpate the radio using a USB FLASH DRIVE and the Service Programming System (SPS) with the file available on TIS2WEB. Refer to the SPS procedures and Control Module References in SI. Note During programming, the battery voltage MUST be maintained within the proper range of 12-15 volts. 2. Connect the Midtronics(R) PSC 550 Battery Maintainer (SPS Programming Support Tool EL-49642) or an equivalent to the battery. 3. Connect the MDI to the vehicle. 4. Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. 5. Select: J-2534 MDI from the Select Diagnostics Tool and Programming Process screen. 6. Select: RAD - "Radio USB Programming for Navigation Software - Setup", from the Supported Controllers screen. Refer to SI and SPS for programming instructions, if required. 7. Insert a USB flash drive into the USB port of your computer. Press the REFRESH button if your USB drive IS NOT selectable in the Available USB Drives box. 8. Select NEXT from the SPS Special Function screen. 9. Monitor the Progress Status bar at the bottom of the SPS Special Function screen. Note The files have been successfully loaded onto the USB flash drive when the Progress Status bar is completely shaded and the SPS Special Functions screen displays the following message: "Remove the USB stick and insert into the vehicle USB port." 10. Remove the USB flash drive from the computer when the Progress Status bar indicates that the software download has been completed. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Navigation Module: > 09221C > Jan > 11 > Campaign - Navigation System Update > Page 11586 11. Press FINISH from the SPS Special Function screen. DO NOT wait for the Completion screen to appear on the display. Note On Cadillac SRX vehicles, turn on the radio and press the NAV button to raise the viewscreen. If this is not done before inserting the USB drive, you will not be able to operate the "Ok" button in the following step. 12. Insert the USB flash drive into the USB port of the vehicle. The radio will display the title "Program Update" along with warnings not to interrupt power or remove the media. A bar graph will form indicating progress and an "OK" button will appear. PRESS the appropriate radio button or area of the screen to activate the "OK" command and begin programming. 13. A status bar indicates progress. Note DO NOT cycle the ignition even if the view screen indicates to cycle it. At the conclusion of the USB drive downloading to the radio, installation of the programming will automatically begin as indicated by the white progress bar below. If the view screen instead remains blank for more than 40 minutes, you may then cycle the ignition. This will reinitialize the programming event. Do not remove the USB flash drive. 14. After the USB programming has completed, the screen will go blank. (On the SRX, the screen will also lower.) It is not necessary to observe the entire programming process. Once the screen has gone blank, a white outline bar graph will appear. (Not visible on SRX due to the screen being lowered.) The downloaded program will automatically install. Once this progress bar fills, the screen will go blank and USB programming will be complete. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Navigation Module: > 09221C > Jan > 11 > Campaign - Navigation System Update > Page 11587 15. When the programming event has completed, the radio will display Download Complete and the version number U413. Note On the SRX, the display screen will rise at the completion of the USB download to allow viewing of the programming complete screen and version number. 16. Turn OFF the ignition for 60 seconds. 17. Remove the USB flash drive. 18. The vehicle MUST now be calibrated. Note Vehicle calibration is a required step. Many of the radio and navigation functions will not operate properly unless the calibration outlined in the following steps is performed. Note After completion of the USB programming event, but prior to the initialization of SPS programming, the radio will display a Cadillac splash screen if operated. This is a normal condition. Completion of the SPS programming below will restore the radio to the proper splash screen for the vehicle being serviced. 19. Return to the SPS programming screen. Select J-2534 MDI from the Select Diagnostics Tool and Programming Process screen. 20. Select RAD: Radio Programming. 21. You must now select the proper choices for the build of the vehicle you are servicing. Refer to the vehicle SPID label or the vehicle build information through GWM for the specific RPOs the vehicle is equipped with. 22. Once you have selected the proper vehicle options, you may initiate SPS programming. Upon completion of this step, the radio is updated. Note At the completion of the programming, you may verify the programming is updated and successful by pressing CONFIG, entering NAV and then viewing the map database. You should see version U413 displayed. Note The navigation radio will be returned to factory default value during this upgrade. Warranty Transaction Information Submit a claim using the table below. * USB Flash Drives were sent to involved U.S. dealers at no charge from the WPC. If dealers no longer have that flash drive, they are to purchase one at their expense. Do NOT submit for the cost of a USB flash drive. ** Submit the actual cost of the USB 2.0 Flash Drive, not to exceed $10.00 USD, $10.30 CAD. The calibration downloaded to the USB Flash Drive can be used to program all vehicles involved in the field action. After completing the programming event for all vehicles involved in the field action, remove (delete) the calibration from the USB Flash Drive. Save the USB Flash Drive for future USB programming events. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Navigation Module: > 09221C > Jan > 11 > Campaign - Navigation System Update > Page 11588 Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Navigation Module: > 09221C > Jan > 11 > Campaign - Navigation System Update Navigation Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Campaign - Navigation System Update SERVICE UPDATE Bulletin No.: 09221C Date: January 27, 2011 Subject: 09221C - Service Update for Inventory and Customer Vehicles - Navigation System Update - Expires with Base Warranty Models: 2010 Buick Allure, LaCrosse 2010 Cadillac SRX 2010 Chevrolet Equinox 2010 GMC Terrain Supercede: The Service Procedure in this bulletin has been revised. Please discard all copies of bulletin 09221B, issued November 2009. THIS SERVICE UPDATE INCLUDES VEHICLES IN DEALER INVENTORY AND CUSTOMER VEHICLES THAT RETURN TO THE DEALERSHIP FOR ANY REASON. IT WILL EXPIRE AT THE END OF THE INVOLVED VEHICLE'S NEW VEHICLE LIMITED WARRANTY PERIOD. Purpose This bulletin provides a service procedure to program the radio module on certain 2010 Buick Allure, LaCrosse; Cadillac SRX; Chevrolet Equinox; and GMC Terrain vehicles. This program will address multiple concerns with the navigation system. This service procedure should be completed as soon as possible on involved vehicles currently in dealer inventory and customer vehicles that return to the dealer for any type of service during the New Vehicle Limited Warranty coverage period. Vehicles Involved A list of involved vehicles currently in dealer inventory is available on the "Service Update Bulletin Information" link under the "Service" tab in GM GlobalConnect (US), or attached to the Dealer Communication (Canada), used to release this bulletin. Customer vehicles that return for service, for any reason, and are still covered under the vehicle's base warranty, and are within the VIN breakpoints provided below, should be checked for vehicle eligibility in the appropriate system listed below. Important Dealers are to confirm vehicle eligibility prior to beginning repairs by using the Investigate Vehicle History link on the Global Warranty Management application within GlobalConnect. Not all vehicles within the above breakpoints may be involved. Parts Information For US: Flash drives were shipped from the Warranty Parts Center (WPC) at no charge via UPS Ground Delivery-Attention: Parts Manager, to dealers with involved vehicles. If your USB Flash Drive has been misplaced, dealers are to obtain a USB 2.0 Flash Drive locally at their expense. The minimum USB Flash Drive capacity requirement is 512 MB. Follow the service procedure titled, FOR CANADIAN DEALERS, AND US DEALERS WHO NEED TO DOWNLOAD A CALIBRATION TO A NEW USB FLASH DRIVE. The calibration downloaded to the USB Flash Drive can be used to program all vehicles involved in the field action. After completing the programming event for all vehicles involved in the field action, remove (delete) the calibration from the USB Flash Drive. Save the USB Flash Drive for future USB programming events. Do NOT contact the WPC for a USB Flash Drive. For Canada: Dealers are to obtain a USB 2.0 Flash Drive locally. The minimum USB Flash Drive capacity requirement is 512 MB. A one-time allowance is provided for the purchase of a USB 2.0. Flash Drive. The calibration downloaded to the USB Flash Drive can be used to program all vehicles involved in the field action. After completing the programming event for all vehicles involved in the field action, remove (delete) the calibration Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Navigation Module: > 09221C > Jan > 11 > Campaign - Navigation System Update > Page 11594 from the USB Flash Drive. Save the USB Flash Drive for future USB programming events. Service Procedure Note This procedure begins with a USB flash drive programming event. This IS NOT a TIS2WEB programming event. This procedure requires a USB 2.0 flash drive. The minimum USB flash drive capacity requirement is 512 MB. The software downloaded to the USB flash drive can be used to update all vehicles involved in this bulletin. Any existing date on the USB flash drive will be erased during the TIS2WEB-to-USB flash drive download procedure. To ensure important date IS NOT deleted from the USB flash drive, transfer the data from the USB flash drive onto another approved storage device BEFORE attempting to download software from TIS2WEB. Once the software is downloaded to the USB, DO NOT add any data to the storage device. 1. The Navigation radio software has been revised to address the above conditions. You will udpate the radio using a USB FLASH DRIVE and the Service Programming System (SPS) with the file available on TIS2WEB. Refer to the SPS procedures and Control Module References in SI. Note During programming, the battery voltage MUST be maintained within the proper range of 12-15 volts. 2. Connect the Midtronics(R) PSC 550 Battery Maintainer (SPS Programming Support Tool EL-49642) or an equivalent to the battery. 3. Connect the MDI to the vehicle. 4. Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. 5. Select: J-2534 MDI from the Select Diagnostics Tool and Programming Process screen. 6. Select: RAD - "Radio USB Programming for Navigation Software - Setup", from the Supported Controllers screen. Refer to SI and SPS for programming instructions, if required. 7. Insert a USB flash drive into the USB port of your computer. Press the REFRESH button if your USB drive IS NOT selectable in the Available USB Drives box. 8. Select NEXT from the SPS Special Function screen. 9. Monitor the Progress Status bar at the bottom of the SPS Special Function screen. Note The files have been successfully loaded onto the USB flash drive when the Progress Status bar is completely shaded and the SPS Special Functions screen displays the following message: "Remove the USB stick and insert into the vehicle USB port." 10. Remove the USB flash drive from the computer when the Progress Status bar indicates that the software download has been completed. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Navigation Module: > 09221C > Jan > 11 > Campaign - Navigation System Update > Page 11595 11. Press FINISH from the SPS Special Function screen. DO NOT wait for the Completion screen to appear on the display. Note On Cadillac SRX vehicles, turn on the radio and press the NAV button to raise the viewscreen. If this is not done before inserting the USB drive, you will not be able to operate the "Ok" button in the following step. 12. Insert the USB flash drive into the USB port of the vehicle. The radio will display the title "Program Update" along with warnings not to interrupt power or remove the media. A bar graph will form indicating progress and an "OK" button will appear. PRESS the appropriate radio button or area of the screen to activate the "OK" command and begin programming. 13. A status bar indicates progress. Note DO NOT cycle the ignition even if the view screen indicates to cycle it. At the conclusion of the USB drive downloading to the radio, installation of the programming will automatically begin as indicated by the white progress bar below. If the view screen instead remains blank for more than 40 minutes, you may then cycle the ignition. This will reinitialize the programming event. Do not remove the USB flash drive. 14. After the USB programming has completed, the screen will go blank. (On the SRX, the screen will also lower.) It is not necessary to observe the entire programming process. Once the screen has gone blank, a white outline bar graph will appear. (Not visible on SRX due to the screen being lowered.) The downloaded program will automatically install. Once this progress bar fills, the screen will go blank and USB programming will be complete. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Navigation Module: > 09221C > Jan > 11 > Campaign - Navigation System Update > Page 11596 15. When the programming event has completed, the radio will display Download Complete and the version number U413. Note On the SRX, the display screen will rise at the completion of the USB download to allow viewing of the programming complete screen and version number. 16. Turn OFF the ignition for 60 seconds. 17. Remove the USB flash drive. 18. The vehicle MUST now be calibrated. Note Vehicle calibration is a required step. Many of the radio and navigation functions will not operate properly unless the calibration outlined in the following steps is performed. Note After completion of the USB programming event, but prior to the initialization of SPS programming, the radio will display a Cadillac splash screen if operated. This is a normal condition. Completion of the SPS programming below will restore the radio to the proper splash screen for the vehicle being serviced. 19. Return to the SPS programming screen. Select J-2534 MDI from the Select Diagnostics Tool and Programming Process screen. 20. Select RAD: Radio Programming. 21. You must now select the proper choices for the build of the vehicle you are servicing. Refer to the vehicle SPID label or the vehicle build information through GWM for the specific RPOs the vehicle is equipped with. 22. Once you have selected the proper vehicle options, you may initiate SPS programming. Upon completion of this step, the radio is updated. Note At the completion of the programming, you may verify the programming is updated and successful by pressing CONFIG, entering NAV and then viewing the map database. You should see version U413 displayed. Note The navigation radio will be returned to factory default value during this upgrade. Warranty Transaction Information Submit a claim using the table below. * USB Flash Drives were sent to involved U.S. dealers at no charge from the WPC. If dealers no longer have that flash drive, they are to purchase one at their expense. Do NOT submit for the cost of a USB flash drive. ** Submit the actual cost of the USB 2.0 Flash Drive, not to exceed $10.00 USD, $10.30 CAD. The calibration downloaded to the USB Flash Drive can be used to program all vehicles involved in the field action. After completing the programming event for all vehicles involved in the field action, remove (delete) the calibration from the USB Flash Drive. Save the USB Flash Drive for future USB programming events. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Navigation Module: > 09221C > Jan > 11 > Campaign - Navigation System Update > Page 11597 Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking Assist Control Module > Component Information > Locations Parking Assist Control Module: Locations Luggage Compartment/Rear of Vehicle Component Views Left Side of the Luggage Compartment Components 1 - X80R Accessory Power Receptacle - Rear Compartment 2 - K41 Parking Assist Module (UD7) 3 - M17 Liftgate Motor Assembly (TB5) 4 - K27 Fuel Pump Control Module Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking Assist Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 11601 Parking Assist Control Module: Diagrams K41 Parking Assist Control Module X1 (UD7) K41 Parking Assist Control Module X2 (UD7) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking Assist Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 11602 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking Assist Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 11603 Parking Assist Control Module: Service and Repair Rear Object Alarm Module Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relay Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Relay Module: > 09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules Relay Module: Customer Interest Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 09-06-03-004D Date: December 08, 2010 Subject: Intermittent No Crank/No Start, No Module Communication, MIL, Warning Lights, Vehicle Messages or DTCs Set by Various Control Modules - Diagnosing and Repairing Fretting Corrosion (Disconnect Affected Connector and Apply Dielectric Lubricant) Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks Attention: This repair can be applied to ANY electrical connection including, but not limited to: lighting, body electrical, in-line connections, powertrain control sensors, etc. DO NOT over apply lubricant to the point where it prevents the full engagement of sealed connectors. A light coating on the terminal surfaces is sufficient to correct the condition. Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the Attention statement and add the 2011 model year. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 09-06-03-004C (Section 06 Engine/Propulsion System). Condition Some customers may comment on any of the following conditions: - An intermittent no crank/no start - Intermittent malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) illumination - Intermittent service lamp illumination - Intermittent service message(s) being displayed The technician may determine that he is unable to duplicate the intermittent condition. Cause This condition may be caused by a buildup of nonconductive insulating oxidized debris known as fretting corrosion, occurring between two electrical contact surfaces of the connection or connector. This may be caused by any of the following conditions: - Vibration - Thermal cycling - Poor connection/terminal retention - Micro motion - A connector, component or wiring harness not properly secured resulting in movement On low current signal circuits this condition may cause high resistance, resulting in intermittent connections. On high current power circuits this condition may cause permanent increases in the resistance and may cause a device to become inoperative. Representative List of Control Modules and Components The following is only a representative list of control modules and components that may be affected by this connection or connector condition and DOES NOT include every possible module or component for every vehicle. - Blower Control Module - Body Control Module (BCM) - Communication Interface Module (CIM) - Cooling Fan Control Module - Electronic Brake Control Module (EBCM) - Electronic Brake and Traction Control Module (EBTCM) - Electronic Suspension Control (ESC) Module - Engine Control Module (ECM) - Heating, Ventilation and Air Conditioning (HVAC) Control Module Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relay Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Relay Module: > 09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules > Page 11612 - HVAC Actuator - Inflatable Restraint Sensing and Diagnostic Module (SDM) - Any AIR BAG module - Seatbelt Lap Anchor Pretensioner - Seatbelt Retractor Pretensioner - An SIR system connection or connector condition resulting in the following DTCs being set: B0015, B0016, B0019, B0020, B0022, or B0023 - Powertrain Control Module (PCM) - Remote Control Door Lock Receiver (RCDLR) - Transmission Control Module (TCM) Correction Important DO NOT replace the control module, wiring or component for the following conditions: - The condition is intermittent and cannot be duplicated. - The condition is present and by disconnecting and reconnecting the connector the condition can no longer be duplicated. Use the following procedure to correct the conditions listed above. 1. Install a scan tool and perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle. Retrieve and record any existing history or current DTCs from all of the control modules (refer to SI). ‹› If any DTC(s) are set, refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle to identify the connector(s) of the control module/component which may be causing the condition (refer to SI). ‹› If DTCs are not set, refer to Symptoms - Vehicle to identify the connector(s) of the control module/component which may be causing the condition (refer to SI). 2. When identified, use the appropriate DTC Diagnostics, Symptoms, Schematics, Component Connector End Views and Component Locator documents to locate and disconnect the affected harness connector(s) which are causing the condition. Note Fretting corrosion looks like little dark smudges on electrical terminals and appear where the actual electrical contact is being made. In less severe cases it may be unable to be seen or identified without the use of a magnifying glass. Important DO NOT apply an excessive amount of dielectric lubricant to the connectors as shown, as hydrolock may result when attempting to mate the connectors. Use ONLY a clean nylon brush that is dedicated to the repair of the conditions in this bulletin. 3. With a one-inch nylon bristle brush, apply dielectric lubricant to both the module/component side and the harness side of the affected connector(s). 4. Reconnect the affected connector(s) and wipe away any excess lubricant that may be present. 5. Attempt to duplicate the condition by using the following information: - DTC Diagnostic Procedure - Circuit/System Description - Conditions for Running the DTC - Conditions for Setting the DTC - Diagnostic Aids - Circuit/System Verification ‹› If the condition cannot be duplicated, the repair is complete. ‹› If the condition can be duplicated, then follow the appropriate DTC, Symptom or Circuit/System Testing procedure (refer to SI). Repair Order Documentation Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relay Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Relay Module: > 09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules > Page 11613 Important The following information MUST be documented on the repair order. Failure to do so may result in a chargeback. - Customer vehicle condition. - Was a Service Lamp or Service Message illuminated? If yes, specify which Service Lamp or Service Message. - Was a DTC(s) set? If yes, specify which DTC(s) were set. - After following the procedure contained within this bulletin, could the condition be duplicated? ‹› If the condition was not duplicated, then document the affected module/component connector name and number on the repair order. - If the condition was duplicated after the procedure contained within this bulletin was followed, and additional diagnosis led to the replacement of a module or component, the SI Document ID Number MUST be written on the repair order. Parts Information Alternate Distributor For All of North America Note NyoGel(R) 760G Lubricant* is equivalent to GMSPO P/N 12377900, and P/N 10953529 (Canada), specified for use to correct the condition in this bulletin. *We believe this source and their products to be reliable. There may be additional manufacturers of such products/materials. General Motors does not endorse, indicate any preference for, or assume any responsibility for the products or material from this firm or for any such items that may be available from other sources. Warranty Information (excluding Saab Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the appropriate/closest labor operation depending upon the module/component connection that the dielectric lubricant was applied to: Warranty Information (Saab Models) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relay Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Relay Module: > 09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules > Page 11614 For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the appropriate/closest labor operation depending upon the module/component connection that the dielectric lubricant was applied to refer to the table above. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relay Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Relay Module: > 09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules Relay Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 09-06-03-004D Date: December 08, 2010 Subject: Intermittent No Crank/No Start, No Module Communication, MIL, Warning Lights, Vehicle Messages or DTCs Set by Various Control Modules - Diagnosing and Repairing Fretting Corrosion (Disconnect Affected Connector and Apply Dielectric Lubricant) Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks Attention: This repair can be applied to ANY electrical connection including, but not limited to: lighting, body electrical, in-line connections, powertrain control sensors, etc. DO NOT over apply lubricant to the point where it prevents the full engagement of sealed connectors. A light coating on the terminal surfaces is sufficient to correct the condition. Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the Attention statement and add the 2011 model year. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 09-06-03-004C (Section 06 Engine/Propulsion System). Condition Some customers may comment on any of the following conditions: - An intermittent no crank/no start - Intermittent malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) illumination - Intermittent service lamp illumination - Intermittent service message(s) being displayed The technician may determine that he is unable to duplicate the intermittent condition. Cause This condition may be caused by a buildup of nonconductive insulating oxidized debris known as fretting corrosion, occurring between two electrical contact surfaces of the connection or connector. This may be caused by any of the following conditions: - Vibration - Thermal cycling - Poor connection/terminal retention - Micro motion - A connector, component or wiring harness not properly secured resulting in movement On low current signal circuits this condition may cause high resistance, resulting in intermittent connections. On high current power circuits this condition may cause permanent increases in the resistance and may cause a device to become inoperative. Representative List of Control Modules and Components The following is only a representative list of control modules and components that may be affected by this connection or connector condition and DOES NOT include every possible module or component for every vehicle. - Blower Control Module - Body Control Module (BCM) - Communication Interface Module (CIM) - Cooling Fan Control Module - Electronic Brake Control Module (EBCM) - Electronic Brake and Traction Control Module (EBTCM) - Electronic Suspension Control (ESC) Module - Engine Control Module (ECM) - Heating, Ventilation and Air Conditioning (HVAC) Control Module Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relay Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Relay Module: > 09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules > Page 11620 - HVAC Actuator - Inflatable Restraint Sensing and Diagnostic Module (SDM) - Any AIR BAG module - Seatbelt Lap Anchor Pretensioner - Seatbelt Retractor Pretensioner - An SIR system connection or connector condition resulting in the following DTCs being set: B0015, B0016, B0019, B0020, B0022, or B0023 - Powertrain Control Module (PCM) - Remote Control Door Lock Receiver (RCDLR) - Transmission Control Module (TCM) Correction Important DO NOT replace the control module, wiring or component for the following conditions: - The condition is intermittent and cannot be duplicated. - The condition is present and by disconnecting and reconnecting the connector the condition can no longer be duplicated. Use the following procedure to correct the conditions listed above. 1. Install a scan tool and perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle. Retrieve and record any existing history or current DTCs from all of the control modules (refer to SI). ‹› If any DTC(s) are set, refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle to identify the connector(s) of the control module/component which may be causing the condition (refer to SI). ‹› If DTCs are not set, refer to Symptoms - Vehicle to identify the connector(s) of the control module/component which may be causing the condition (refer to SI). 2. When identified, use the appropriate DTC Diagnostics, Symptoms, Schematics, Component Connector End Views and Component Locator documents to locate and disconnect the affected harness connector(s) which are causing the condition. Note Fretting corrosion looks like little dark smudges on electrical terminals and appear where the actual electrical contact is being made. In less severe cases it may be unable to be seen or identified without the use of a magnifying glass. Important DO NOT apply an excessive amount of dielectric lubricant to the connectors as shown, as hydrolock may result when attempting to mate the connectors. Use ONLY a clean nylon brush that is dedicated to the repair of the conditions in this bulletin. 3. With a one-inch nylon bristle brush, apply dielectric lubricant to both the module/component side and the harness side of the affected connector(s). 4. Reconnect the affected connector(s) and wipe away any excess lubricant that may be present. 5. Attempt to duplicate the condition by using the following information: - DTC Diagnostic Procedure - Circuit/System Description - Conditions for Running the DTC - Conditions for Setting the DTC - Diagnostic Aids - Circuit/System Verification ‹› If the condition cannot be duplicated, the repair is complete. ‹› If the condition can be duplicated, then follow the appropriate DTC, Symptom or Circuit/System Testing procedure (refer to SI). Repair Order Documentation Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relay Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Relay Module: > 09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules > Page 11621 Important The following information MUST be documented on the repair order. Failure to do so may result in a chargeback. - Customer vehicle condition. - Was a Service Lamp or Service Message illuminated? If yes, specify which Service Lamp or Service Message. - Was a DTC(s) set? If yes, specify which DTC(s) were set. - After following the procedure contained within this bulletin, could the condition be duplicated? ‹› If the condition was not duplicated, then document the affected module/component connector name and number on the repair order. - If the condition was duplicated after the procedure contained within this bulletin was followed, and additional diagnosis led to the replacement of a module or component, the SI Document ID Number MUST be written on the repair order. Parts Information Alternate Distributor For All of North America Note NyoGel(R) 760G Lubricant* is equivalent to GMSPO P/N 12377900, and P/N 10953529 (Canada), specified for use to correct the condition in this bulletin. *We believe this source and their products to be reliable. There may be additional manufacturers of such products/materials. General Motors does not endorse, indicate any preference for, or assume any responsibility for the products or material from this firm or for any such items that may be available from other sources. Warranty Information (excluding Saab Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the appropriate/closest labor operation depending upon the module/component connection that the dielectric lubricant was applied to: Warranty Information (Saab Models) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relay Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Relay Module: > 09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules > Page 11622 For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the appropriate/closest labor operation depending upon the module/component connection that the dielectric lubricant was applied to refer to the table above. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Signal Processing Module > Component Information > Locations Signal Processing Module: Locations Instrument Panel/Center Console Component Views Left Side of the Instrument Panel Components 1 - P16 Instrument Cluster 2 - B10B Ambient Light/Sunload Sensor (C68) or B10 Ambient Light Sensor (C67) 3 - P19B Speaker - Center Instrument Panel (UZ8) 4 - P17 Info Display Module 5 P19V Speaker - Right Front Tweeter 6 - A20 Radio/HVAC Controls 7 - A11 Radio 8 - S3 Transmission Shift Lever 9 - P2 Transmission Shift Lever Position Indicator 10 - T11 Multimedia Player Interface Module (KTA) 11 - K108 Active Noise Cancellation Module (VQN) 12 - E8J Instrument Panel Courtesy Lamp - Left (LTZ or SLT) 13 - S36 Instrument Panel Dimmer Switch Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Signal Processing Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 11626 Signal Processing Module: Diagrams K108 Active Noise Cancellation Module (VQN) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Signal Processing Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 11627 Signal Processing Module: Description and Operation Active Noise Cancellation Description and Operation The entertainment system on this vehicle may have several different configurations. To determine the specific configuration of the vehicle, please see the Service Parts ID Label, and refer to RPO Code List (See: Application and ID/RPO Code List). Active Noise Cancellation (ANC) is a method used to cancel out undesirable sound generated by the engine or an open window. Active Noise Cancellation Control Circuit Operation An Active Noise Cancellation (ANC) system has four main components: the ANC module, microphone(s), audio amplifier(s), and speaker(s). The microphone is connected to the audio system and picks up the sound/noise in the vehicle cabin while the speakers produce the cancellation vibrations. The ANC system is composed of two microphones. The microphones are centrally located in the headliner to detect noise in the vehicle caused by the engine, or an open window. The processor analyzes the noise signal and outputs a cancellation signal audio tone based on positive coefficient and phase change to moderate the engine noise and make the vehicle seem quieter and without vibration. The ANC system uses the engine revolutions per minute (RPM) signal from the tachometer to determine the rotational speed in an engine. The ANC system works within 1500-2500 engine RPM. The cancellation signal is then amplified and a signal is sent to the speaker and subwoofer. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Signal Processing Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 11628 Signal Processing Module: Service and Repair Active Noise Cancellation Module Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relay Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Relay Module: > 09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules Relay Module: Customer Interest Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 09-06-03-004D Date: December 08, 2010 Subject: Intermittent No Crank/No Start, No Module Communication, MIL, Warning Lights, Vehicle Messages or DTCs Set by Various Control Modules - Diagnosing and Repairing Fretting Corrosion (Disconnect Affected Connector and Apply Dielectric Lubricant) Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks Attention: This repair can be applied to ANY electrical connection including, but not limited to: lighting, body electrical, in-line connections, powertrain control sensors, etc. DO NOT over apply lubricant to the point where it prevents the full engagement of sealed connectors. A light coating on the terminal surfaces is sufficient to correct the condition. Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the Attention statement and add the 2011 model year. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 09-06-03-004C (Section 06 Engine/Propulsion System). Condition Some customers may comment on any of the following conditions: - An intermittent no crank/no start - Intermittent malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) illumination - Intermittent service lamp illumination - Intermittent service message(s) being displayed The technician may determine that he is unable to duplicate the intermittent condition. Cause This condition may be caused by a buildup of nonconductive insulating oxidized debris known as fretting corrosion, occurring between two electrical contact surfaces of the connection or connector. This may be caused by any of the following conditions: - Vibration - Thermal cycling - Poor connection/terminal retention - Micro motion - A connector, component or wiring harness not properly secured resulting in movement On low current signal circuits this condition may cause high resistance, resulting in intermittent connections. On high current power circuits this condition may cause permanent increases in the resistance and may cause a device to become inoperative. Representative List of Control Modules and Components The following is only a representative list of control modules and components that may be affected by this connection or connector condition and DOES NOT include every possible module or component for every vehicle. - Blower Control Module - Body Control Module (BCM) - Communication Interface Module (CIM) - Cooling Fan Control Module - Electronic Brake Control Module (EBCM) - Electronic Brake and Traction Control Module (EBTCM) - Electronic Suspension Control (ESC) Module - Engine Control Module (ECM) - Heating, Ventilation and Air Conditioning (HVAC) Control Module Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relay Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Relay Module: > 09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules > Page 11637 - HVAC Actuator - Inflatable Restraint Sensing and Diagnostic Module (SDM) - Any AIR BAG module - Seatbelt Lap Anchor Pretensioner - Seatbelt Retractor Pretensioner - An SIR system connection or connector condition resulting in the following DTCs being set: B0015, B0016, B0019, B0020, B0022, or B0023 - Powertrain Control Module (PCM) - Remote Control Door Lock Receiver (RCDLR) - Transmission Control Module (TCM) Correction Important DO NOT replace the control module, wiring or component for the following conditions: - The condition is intermittent and cannot be duplicated. - The condition is present and by disconnecting and reconnecting the connector the condition can no longer be duplicated. Use the following procedure to correct the conditions listed above. 1. Install a scan tool and perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle. Retrieve and record any existing history or current DTCs from all of the control modules (refer to SI). ‹› If any DTC(s) are set, refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle to identify the connector(s) of the control module/component which may be causing the condition (refer to SI). ‹› If DTCs are not set, refer to Symptoms - Vehicle to identify the connector(s) of the control module/component which may be causing the condition (refer to SI). 2. When identified, use the appropriate DTC Diagnostics, Symptoms, Schematics, Component Connector End Views and Component Locator documents to locate and disconnect the affected harness connector(s) which are causing the condition. Note Fretting corrosion looks like little dark smudges on electrical terminals and appear where the actual electrical contact is being made. In less severe cases it may be unable to be seen or identified without the use of a magnifying glass. Important DO NOT apply an excessive amount of dielectric lubricant to the connectors as shown, as hydrolock may result when attempting to mate the connectors. Use ONLY a clean nylon brush that is dedicated to the repair of the conditions in this bulletin. 3. With a one-inch nylon bristle brush, apply dielectric lubricant to both the module/component side and the harness side of the affected connector(s). 4. Reconnect the affected connector(s) and wipe away any excess lubricant that may be present. 5. Attempt to duplicate the condition by using the following information: - DTC Diagnostic Procedure - Circuit/System Description - Conditions for Running the DTC - Conditions for Setting the DTC - Diagnostic Aids - Circuit/System Verification ‹› If the condition cannot be duplicated, the repair is complete. ‹› If the condition can be duplicated, then follow the appropriate DTC, Symptom or Circuit/System Testing procedure (refer to SI). Repair Order Documentation Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relay Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Relay Module: > 09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules > Page 11638 Important The following information MUST be documented on the repair order. Failure to do so may result in a chargeback. - Customer vehicle condition. - Was a Service Lamp or Service Message illuminated? If yes, specify which Service Lamp or Service Message. - Was a DTC(s) set? If yes, specify which DTC(s) were set. - After following the procedure contained within this bulletin, could the condition be duplicated? ‹› If the condition was not duplicated, then document the affected module/component connector name and number on the repair order. - If the condition was duplicated after the procedure contained within this bulletin was followed, and additional diagnosis led to the replacement of a module or component, the SI Document ID Number MUST be written on the repair order. Parts Information Alternate Distributor For All of North America Note NyoGel(R) 760G Lubricant* is equivalent to GMSPO P/N 12377900, and P/N 10953529 (Canada), specified for use to correct the condition in this bulletin. *We believe this source and their products to be reliable. There may be additional manufacturers of such products/materials. General Motors does not endorse, indicate any preference for, or assume any responsibility for the products or material from this firm or for any such items that may be available from other sources. Warranty Information (excluding Saab Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the appropriate/closest labor operation depending upon the module/component connection that the dielectric lubricant was applied to: Warranty Information (Saab Models) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relay Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Relay Module: > 09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules > Page 11639 For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the appropriate/closest labor operation depending upon the module/component connection that the dielectric lubricant was applied to refer to the table above. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relay Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Relay Module: > 09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 > Electrical MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules Relay Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 09-06-03-004D Date: December 08, 2010 Subject: Intermittent No Crank/No Start, No Module Communication, MIL, Warning Lights, Vehicle Messages or DTCs Set by Various Control Modules - Diagnosing and Repairing Fretting Corrosion (Disconnect Affected Connector and Apply Dielectric Lubricant) Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks Attention: This repair can be applied to ANY electrical connection including, but not limited to: lighting, body electrical, in-line connections, powertrain control sensors, etc. DO NOT over apply lubricant to the point where it prevents the full engagement of sealed connectors. A light coating on the terminal surfaces is sufficient to correct the condition. Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the Attention statement and add the 2011 model year. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 09-06-03-004C (Section 06 Engine/Propulsion System). Condition Some customers may comment on any of the following conditions: - An intermittent no crank/no start - Intermittent malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) illumination - Intermittent service lamp illumination - Intermittent service message(s) being displayed The technician may determine that he is unable to duplicate the intermittent condition. Cause This condition may be caused by a buildup of nonconductive insulating oxidized debris known as fretting corrosion, occurring between two electrical contact surfaces of the connection or connector. This may be caused by any of the following conditions: - Vibration - Thermal cycling - Poor connection/terminal retention - Micro motion - A connector, component or wiring harness not properly secured resulting in movement On low current signal circuits this condition may cause high resistance, resulting in intermittent connections. On high current power circuits this condition may cause permanent increases in the resistance and may cause a device to become inoperative. Representative List of Control Modules and Components The following is only a representative list of control modules and components that may be affected by this connection or connector condition and DOES NOT include every possible module or component for every vehicle. - Blower Control Module - Body Control Module (BCM) - Communication Interface Module (CIM) - Cooling Fan Control Module - Electronic Brake Control Module (EBCM) - Electronic Brake and Traction Control Module (EBTCM) - Electronic Suspension Control (ESC) Module - Engine Control Module (ECM) - Heating, Ventilation and Air Conditioning (HVAC) Control Module Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relay Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Relay Module: > 09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 > Electrical MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules > Page 11645 - HVAC Actuator - Inflatable Restraint Sensing and Diagnostic Module (SDM) - Any AIR BAG module - Seatbelt Lap Anchor Pretensioner - Seatbelt Retractor Pretensioner - An SIR system connection or connector condition resulting in the following DTCs being set: B0015, B0016, B0019, B0020, B0022, or B0023 - Powertrain Control Module (PCM) - Remote Control Door Lock Receiver (RCDLR) - Transmission Control Module (TCM) Correction Important DO NOT replace the control module, wiring or component for the following conditions: - The condition is intermittent and cannot be duplicated. - The condition is present and by disconnecting and reconnecting the connector the condition can no longer be duplicated. Use the following procedure to correct the conditions listed above. 1. Install a scan tool and perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle. Retrieve and record any existing history or current DTCs from all of the control modules (refer to SI). ‹› If any DTC(s) are set, refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle to identify the connector(s) of the control module/component which may be causing the condition (refer to SI). ‹› If DTCs are not set, refer to Symptoms - Vehicle to identify the connector(s) of the control module/component which may be causing the condition (refer to SI). 2. When identified, use the appropriate DTC Diagnostics, Symptoms, Schematics, Component Connector End Views and Component Locator documents to locate and disconnect the affected harness connector(s) which are causing the condition. Note Fretting corrosion looks like little dark smudges on electrical terminals and appear where the actual electrical contact is being made. In less severe cases it may be unable to be seen or identified without the use of a magnifying glass. Important DO NOT apply an excessive amount of dielectric lubricant to the connectors as shown, as hydrolock may result when attempting to mate the connectors. Use ONLY a clean nylon brush that is dedicated to the repair of the conditions in this bulletin. 3. With a one-inch nylon bristle brush, apply dielectric lubricant to both the module/component side and the harness side of the affected connector(s). 4. Reconnect the affected connector(s) and wipe away any excess lubricant that may be present. 5. Attempt to duplicate the condition by using the following information: - DTC Diagnostic Procedure - Circuit/System Description - Conditions for Running the DTC - Conditions for Setting the DTC - Diagnostic Aids - Circuit/System Verification ‹› If the condition cannot be duplicated, the repair is complete. ‹› If the condition can be duplicated, then follow the appropriate DTC, Symptom or Circuit/System Testing procedure (refer to SI). Repair Order Documentation Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relay Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Relay Module: > 09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 > Electrical MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules > Page 11646 Important The following information MUST be documented on the repair order. Failure to do so may result in a chargeback. - Customer vehicle condition. - Was a Service Lamp or Service Message illuminated? If yes, specify which Service Lamp or Service Message. - Was a DTC(s) set? If yes, specify which DTC(s) were set. - After following the procedure contained within this bulletin, could the condition be duplicated? ‹› If the condition was not duplicated, then document the affected module/component connector name and number on the repair order. - If the condition was duplicated after the procedure contained within this bulletin was followed, and additional diagnosis led to the replacement of a module or component, the SI Document ID Number MUST be written on the repair order. Parts Information Alternate Distributor For All of North America Note NyoGel(R) 760G Lubricant* is equivalent to GMSPO P/N 12377900, and P/N 10953529 (Canada), specified for use to correct the condition in this bulletin. *We believe this source and their products to be reliable. There may be additional manufacturers of such products/materials. General Motors does not endorse, indicate any preference for, or assume any responsibility for the products or material from this firm or for any such items that may be available from other sources. Warranty Information (excluding Saab Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the appropriate/closest labor operation depending upon the module/component connection that the dielectric lubricant was applied to: Warranty Information (Saab Models) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relay Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Relay Module: > 09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 > Electrical MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules > Page 11647 For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the appropriate/closest labor operation depending upon the module/component connection that the dielectric lubricant was applied to refer to the table above. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Locations Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm): Locations Front of Vehicle/Engine Compartment Component Views Engine Compartment Components (Chevrolet) 1 - B20 Brake Fluid Level Switch 2 - B19B Brake Booster Vacuum Sensor 3 - M75 Windshield Wiper Motor 4 - X50A Fuse Block - Underhood 5 - C1 Battery 6 - G24 Windshield Washer Pump 7 - B55 Hood Ajar Switch (BTV) 8 - P12B Horn - Low Note 9 - P12A Horn - High Note 10 - K17 Electronic Brake Control Module Engine Compartment Components (GMC) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Locations > Page 11652 1 - B20 Brake Fluid Level Switch 2 - B19B Brake Booster Vacuum Sensor 3 - M75 Windshield Wiper Motor 4 - X50A Fuse Block - Underhood 5 - C1 Battery 6 - G24 Windshield Washer Pump 7 - P12B Horn - Low Note 8 - B55 Hood Ajar Switch (BTV) 9 - K17 Electronic Brake Control Module 10 - P12A Horn - High Note Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Locations > Page 11653 Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm): Diagrams B55 Hood Ajar Switch (BTV) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Locations Parking Assist Distance Sensor: Locations Luggage Compartment/Rear of Vehicle Component Views Rear of Vehicle Components (Chevrolet) 1 - E2LR Side Marker Lamp - Left Rear 2 - E5A Backup Lamp - Left 3 - E6 Center High Mounted Stop Lamp 4 - T4G Cellular Phone, Navigation, and Digital Radio Antenna 5 - M45 Rear Wiper Motor 6 - E5B Backup Lamp - Right 7 - E2RR Side Marker Lamp - Right Rear 8 - E5T Tail/Brake and Turn Signal Lamp - Right 9 - E7R License Plate Lamp - Right 10 - B78H Rear Object Sensor Right Outer (UD7) 11 - B78F Rear Object Sensor - Right Middle (UD7) 12 - S46 Liftgate Handle Switch 13 - B87 Rearview Camera (UVC) 14 - X88 Trailer Connector (V92) 15 - B78E Rear Object Sensor - Left Middle (UD7) 16 - E7L License Plate Lamp - Left Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 11657 17 - B78G Rear Object Sensor - Left Outer (UD7) 18 - E5S Tail/Brake and Turn Signal Lamp - Left Rear of Vehicle Components (GMC) 1 - E5M Tail Lamp - Left Upper 2 - E6 Center High Mounted Stop Lamp 3 - T4G Cellular Phone, Navigation, and Digital Radio Antenna 4 - M45 Rear Wiper Motor 5 - E5N Tail Lamp - Right Upper 6 - E5T Tail/Brake and Turn Signal Lamp - Right 7 - E2RR Side Marker Lamp - Right Rear 8 - E5K Tail Lamp - Right Lower 9 - E5B Backup Lamp - Right 10 - B78H Rear Object Sensor - Right Outer (UD7) 11 - E7R License Plate Lamp - Right 12 - S46 Liftgate Handle Switch 13 - B87 Rearview Camera (UVC) 14 - E7L License Plate Lamp - Left 15 - B78F Rear Object Sensor - Right Middle (UD7) 16 - X88 Trailer Connector (V92) 17 - B78E Rear Object Sensor - Left Middle (UD7) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 11658 18 - B78G Rear Object Sensor - Left Outer (UD7) 19 - E5A Backup Lamp - Left 20 - E5J Tail Lamp - Left Lower 21 - E2LR Side Marker Lamp - Left Rear 22 - E5S Tail/Brake and Turn Signal Lamp Left Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 11659 Parking Assist Distance Sensor: Diagrams B78E Rear Object Sensor - Left Middle (UD7) B78F Rear Object Sensor - Right Middle (UD7) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 11660 B78G Rear Object Sensor - Left Outer (UD7) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 11661 B78H Rear Object Sensor - Right Outer (UD7) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 11662 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Rear Object Sensor Housing Replacement Parking Assist Distance Sensor: Service and Repair Rear Object Sensor Housing Replacement Rear Object Sensor Housing Replacement 1. Remove the rear fascia. Refer to Rear Bumper Fascia Replacement (See: Body and Frame/Bumper/Rear Bumper/Rear Bumper Cover / Fascia/Service and Repair/Rear Bumper Fascia Replacement). 2. Disconnect the sensor harness. 3. Remove the sensor from the sensor housing. The sensor housing must be painted if replaced. If reinstalled, painting will not be necessary. Important: Do Not grind off alignment tabs. 4. Sand/grind sonic weld plastic residue from the fascia. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Rear Object Sensor Housing Replacement > Page 11665 5. Apply structural adhesive epoxy, Lord Fusor(TM) 127EZ or equivalent, to fascia at mating surface. 6. Using the alignment tabs, install the sensor housing to the fascia. 7. Allow adhesive to cure according to manufacturer's directions. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Rear Object Sensor Housing Replacement > Page 11666 8. Install the sensor to the sensor housing. 9. Connect the electrical harness. 10. Install the rear fascia. Refer to Rear Bumper Fascia Replacement (See: Body and Frame/Bumper/Rear Bumper/Rear Bumper Cover / Fascia/Service and Repair/Rear Bumper Fascia Replacement). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Rear Object Sensor Housing Replacement > Page 11667 Parking Assist Distance Sensor: Service and Repair Rear Object Sensor Replacement Rear Object Sensor Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove rear bumper fascia. Refer to Rear Bumper Fascia Replacement (See: Body and Frame/Bumper/Rear Bumper/Rear Bumper Cover / Fascia/Service and Repair/Rear Bumper Fascia Replacement). 2. Disconnect electrical from the rear object sensor. 3. Lift the locking tabs on the housing and remove the rear object sensor. Installation Procedure Note: Do not refinish previously painted sensors. Excess paint build up will cause the sensor to be inoperative. 1. Paint the rear object sensor. Refer to Basecoat/Clearcoat Paint Systems (See: Body and Frame/Paint, Striping and Decals/Paint/Application and ID/Basecoat/Clearcoat Paint Systems). 2. Ensure the paint does not exceed 6 mils. Use a paint thickness gauge suitable for non-ferrous metals. Refer to Paint Gauges (). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Rear Object Sensor Housing Replacement > Page 11668 3. Insert the sensor into the housing. 4. Connect the electrical connector to the rear object sensor. 5. Install the rear bumper fascia. Refer to Rear Bumper Fascia Replacement (See: Body and Frame/Bumper/Rear Bumper/Rear Bumper Cover / Fascia/Service and Repair/Rear Bumper Fascia Replacement). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Pedal Positioning Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Brake Pedal Position Sensor Calibration Pedal Positioning Sensor: Service and Repair Brake Pedal Position Sensor Calibration Brake Pedal Position Sensor Calibration Calibration Criteria Note: Do not apply the brake pedal during the brake pedal position sensor calibration procedure. Any movement of the brake pedal during this procedure will cause the calibration procedure to fail. If this occurs, the brake pedal position sensor calibration must be repeated. Brake pedal position sensor calibration must be performed after the brake pedal position sensor or body control module (BCM) have been serviced. The calibration procedure will set the brake pedal position sensor home value. This value is used by the BCM to determine the action of the driver applying the brake system and to provide this information to the vehicle subsystems via serial data. Calibration Procedure 1. Apply the parking brake. 2. Place the transmission in the PARK position. 3. Install a scan tool. 4. Clear all BCM DTCs before proceeding. 5. Navigate to the Module Diagnosis menu. 6. Select BCM menu item. 7. Select Configuration/Reset Functions menu item. 8. Select the Brake Pedal Position Sensor Learn procedure and follow the directions displayed on the screen. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Pedal Positioning Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Brake Pedal Position Sensor Calibration > Page 11673 Pedal Positioning Sensor: Service and Repair Brake Pedal Position Sensor Replacement Brake Pedal Position Sensor Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Steering Mounted Controls Transmitter > Component Information > Locations Steering Mounted Controls Transmitter: Locations Instrument Panel/Center Console Component Views Steering Wheel Components 1 - S70L Steering Wheel Controls Switch - Left 2 - S33 Horn Switch 3 - S70R Steering Wheel Controls Switch - Right Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Steering Mounted Controls Transmitter > Component Information > Locations > Page 11677 Steering Mounted Controls Transmitter: Diagrams S70L Steering Wheel Controls Switch - Left S70R Steering Wheel Controls Switch - Right (UK3) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Steering Mounted Controls Transmitter > Component Information > Locations > Page 11678 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Locations Trailer Connector: Locations Luggage Compartment/Rear of Vehicle Component Views Rear of Vehicle Components (Chevrolet) 1 - E2LR Side Marker Lamp - Left Rear 2 - E5A Backup Lamp - Left 3 - E6 Center High Mounted Stop Lamp 4 - T4G Cellular Phone, Navigation, and Digital Radio Antenna 5 - M45 Rear Wiper Motor 6 - E5B Backup Lamp - Right 7 - E2RR Side Marker Lamp - Right Rear 8 - E5T Tail/Brake and Turn Signal Lamp - Right 9 - E7R License Plate Lamp - Right 10 - B78H Rear Object Sensor Right Outer (UD7) 11 - B78F Rear Object Sensor - Right Middle (UD7) 12 - S46 Liftgate Handle Switch 13 - B87 Rearview Camera (UVC) 14 - X88 Trailer Connector (V92) 15 - B78E Rear Object Sensor - Left Middle (UD7) 16 - E7L License Plate Lamp - Left Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Locations > Page 11683 17 - B78G Rear Object Sensor - Left Outer (UD7) 18 - E5S Tail/Brake and Turn Signal Lamp - Left Rear of Vehicle Components (GMC) 1 - E5M Tail Lamp - Left Upper 2 - E6 Center High Mounted Stop Lamp 3 - T4G Cellular Phone, Navigation, and Digital Radio Antenna 4 - M45 Rear Wiper Motor 5 - E5N Tail Lamp - Right Upper 6 - E5T Tail/Brake and Turn Signal Lamp - Right 7 - E2RR Side Marker Lamp - Right Rear 8 - E5K Tail Lamp - Right Lower 9 - E5B Backup Lamp - Right 10 - B78H Rear Object Sensor - Right Outer (UD7) 11 - E7R License Plate Lamp - Right 12 - S46 Liftgate Handle Switch 13 - B87 Rearview Camera (UVC) 14 - E7L License Plate Lamp - Left 15 - B78F Rear Object Sensor - Right Middle (UD7) 16 - X88 Trailer Connector (V92) 17 - B78E Rear Object Sensor - Left Middle (UD7) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Locations > Page 11684 18 - B78G Rear Object Sensor - Left Outer (UD7) 19 - E5A Backup Lamp - Left 20 - E5J Tail Lamp - Left Lower 21 - E2LR Side Marker Lamp - Left Rear 22 - E5S Tail/Brake and Turn Signal Lamp Left Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Locations > Page 11685 Trailer Connector: Diagrams X88 Trailer Connector (V92) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Hitch > Component Information > Service and Repair Trailer Hitch: Service and Repair Trailer Hitch Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Locations Trailer Connector: Locations Luggage Compartment/Rear of Vehicle Component Views Rear of Vehicle Components (Chevrolet) 1 - E2LR Side Marker Lamp - Left Rear 2 - E5A Backup Lamp - Left 3 - E6 Center High Mounted Stop Lamp 4 - T4G Cellular Phone, Navigation, and Digital Radio Antenna 5 - M45 Rear Wiper Motor 6 - E5B Backup Lamp - Right 7 - E2RR Side Marker Lamp - Right Rear 8 - E5T Tail/Brake and Turn Signal Lamp - Right 9 - E7R License Plate Lamp - Right 10 - B78H Rear Object Sensor Right Outer (UD7) 11 - B78F Rear Object Sensor - Right Middle (UD7) 12 - S46 Liftgate Handle Switch 13 - B87 Rearview Camera (UVC) 14 - X88 Trailer Connector (V92) 15 - B78E Rear Object Sensor - Left Middle (UD7) 16 - E7L License Plate Lamp - Left Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Locations > Page 11692 17 - B78G Rear Object Sensor - Left Outer (UD7) 18 - E5S Tail/Brake and Turn Signal Lamp - Left Rear of Vehicle Components (GMC) 1 - E5M Tail Lamp - Left Upper 2 - E6 Center High Mounted Stop Lamp 3 - T4G Cellular Phone, Navigation, and Digital Radio Antenna 4 - M45 Rear Wiper Motor 5 - E5N Tail Lamp - Right Upper 6 - E5T Tail/Brake and Turn Signal Lamp - Right 7 - E2RR Side Marker Lamp - Right Rear 8 - E5K Tail Lamp - Right Lower 9 - E5B Backup Lamp - Right 10 - B78H Rear Object Sensor - Right Outer (UD7) 11 - E7R License Plate Lamp - Right 12 - S46 Liftgate Handle Switch 13 - B87 Rearview Camera (UVC) 14 - E7L License Plate Lamp - Left 15 - B78F Rear Object Sensor - Right Middle (UD7) 16 - X88 Trailer Connector (V92) 17 - B78E Rear Object Sensor - Left Middle (UD7) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Locations > Page 11693 18 - B78G Rear Object Sensor - Left Outer (UD7) 19 - E5A Backup Lamp - Left 20 - E5J Tail Lamp - Left Lower 21 - E2LR Side Marker Lamp - Left Rear 22 - E5S Tail/Brake and Turn Signal Lamp Left Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Locations > Page 11694 Trailer Connector: Diagrams X88 Trailer Connector (V92) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Body Controls - Unable To Reprogram Body Control Module Body Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins Body Controls - Unable To Reprogram Body Control Module INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 09-08-47-001A Date: June 14, 2010 Subject: Unable to Reprogram Body Control Module (BCM), BCM Reprogramming Did Not Complete - Revised Reprogramming Instructions Models: 2006-2010 Buick Lucerne 2006-2010 Cadillac DTS 2007-2010 Cadillac Escalade, Escalade ESV, Escalade EXT, SRX 2008-2010 Cadillac CTS 2010 Cadillac CTS Wagon 2010 Chevrolet Camaro 2006-2007 Chevrolet Monte Carlo 2006-2010 Chevrolet Impala 2007-2010 Chevrolet Avalanche, Equinox, Silverado, Suburban, Tahoe 2008-2010 Chevrolet Express 2009-2010 Chevrolet Traverse 2007-2010 GMC Acadia, Sierra, Yukon, Yukon XL, Yukon Denali, Yukon Denali XL 2008-2010 GMC Savana 2010 GMC Terrain 2007-2009 Pontiac Torrent 2008-2009 Pontiac G8 2008-2009 HUMMER H2 2007-2009 Saturn OUTLOOK 2008-2009 Saturn VUE Refer to GMVIS Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the models and the model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 09-08-47-001 (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Some technicians may experience an unsuccessful body control module (BCM) reprogramming event, when choosing the Reprogram ECU selection on the Service Programming System (SPS). The technician may also notice that when attempting to reprogram the BCM again after this incident has occurred, the BCM may not complete the programming event. This condition may be caused by the following: - A reprogramming event that was interrupted due to a lack of communication between the vehicle and the TIS2WEB terminal. - The vehicle experienced low system voltage during the reprogramming event. Important Do not replace the BCM for this condition. SPS Programming Process Selection Perform this procedure first. 1. If reprogramming has failed during the initial reprogramming event, back out of the SPS application completely. 2. Re-select SPS from the TIS2WEB terminal application. 3. When selecting the Programming Process , choose Replace and Program ECU , even though a new BCM is NOT being installed. 4. Reprogram the BCM using the Service Programming System (SPS) with the latest calibration available on TIS2WEB. Refer to the SPS procedures in SI. When using a multiple diagnostic interface (MDI) for reprogramming, ensure that it is updated with the latest software version. When using a Tech 2(R) for reprogramming, ensure that it is updated with the latest software version. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Body Controls - Unable To Reprogram Body Control Module > Page 11701 During programming, the battery voltage must be maintained within the proper range of 12-15 volts. Only use the approved Midtronics(R) PSC 550 Battery Maintainer (SPS Programming Support Tool EL-49642) or equivalent during programming. BCM Still Fails to Reprogram If the BCM still fails to reprogram perform this procedure: 1. Turn OFF the ignition, and remove the key. 2. Remove the fuses that power up the following modules/components for a minimum of 2 minutes: - BCM - EBCM - ECM - IS LPS (located in the left IP fusebox) - TCM 3. Open and close the driver door. Allow enough time for the retained accessory power (RAP) to turn OFF. 4. Reinstall the fuses. 5. When selecting the Programming Process , choose Replace and Program ECU , even though a new BCM is NOT being installed. 6. Reprogram the BCM using the Service Programming System (SPS) with the latest calibration available on TIS2WEB. Refer to the SPS procedures in SI. When using a multiple diagnostic interface (MDI) for reprogramming, ensure that it is updated with the latest software version. When using a Tech 2(R) for reprogramming, ensure that it is updated with the latest software version. During programming, the battery voltage must be maintained within the proper range of 12-15 Volts. Only use the approved Midtronics(R) PSC 550 Battery Maintainer (SPS Programming Support Tool EL-49642) or equivalent during programming. Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table above. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 11702 Body Control Module: Locations Instrument Panel/Center Console Component Views Lower Left of the Instrument Panel Components 1 - B80 Park Brake Switch 2 - T3 Audio Amplifier 3 - K9 Body Control Module 4 - K73 Telematics Communication Interface Control Module (UE1) 5 - B107 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor 6 T4S Wireless Communication Antenna - Bluetooth (UE1 with UPF) 7 - B22 Brake Pedal Position Sensor 8 - X84 Data Link Connector Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 11703 Body Control Module: Diagrams K9 Body Control Module X1 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 11704 K9 Body Control Module X2 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 11705 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 11706 K9 Body Control Module X3 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 11707 K9 Body Control Module X4 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 11708 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 11709 K9 Body Control Module X5 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 11710 K9 Body Control Module X6 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 11711 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 11712 K9 Body Control Module X7 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 11713 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 11714 Body Control Module: Service and Repair Body Control Module Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Bumper > Front Bumper > Front Bumper Cover / Fascia > System Information > Service and Repair > Front Bumper Fascia Replacement Front Bumper Cover / Fascia: Service and Repair Front Bumper Fascia Replacement Front Bumper Fascia Replacement (Equinox) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Bumper > Front Bumper > Front Bumper Cover / Fascia > System Information > Service and Repair > Front Bumper Fascia Replacement > Page 11721 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Bumper > Front Bumper > Front Bumper Cover / Fascia > System Information > Service and Repair > Front Bumper Fascia Replacement > Page 11722 Front Bumper Cover / Fascia: Service and Repair Front Bumper Fascia Side Retainer Replacement Front Bumper Fascia Side Retainer Replacement (Equinox) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Bumper > Front Bumper > Front Bumper Cover / Fascia > System Information > Service and Repair > Front Bumper Fascia Replacement > Page 11723 Front Bumper Cover / Fascia: Service and Repair Front Bumper Lower Fascia Replacement Front Bumper Lower Fascia Replacement (Equinox) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Bumper > Front Bumper > Front Bumper Cover / Fascia > System Information > Service and Repair > Front Bumper Fascia Replacement > Page 11724 Front Bumper Cover / Fascia: Service and Repair Front Bumper Fascia Support Replacement Front Bumper Fascia Support Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Bumper > Front Bumper > Front Bumper Cover / Fascia > System Information > Service and Repair > Front Bumper Fascia Replacement > Page 11725 Front Bumper Cover / Fascia: Service and Repair Front Bumper Fascia Replacement Front Bumper Fascia Replacement (Equinox) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Bumper > Front Bumper > Front Bumper Cover / Fascia > System Information > Service and Repair > Front Bumper Fascia Replacement > Page 11726 Front Bumper Fascia Side Retainer Replacement Front Bumper Fascia Side Retainer Replacement (Equinox) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Bumper > Front Bumper > Front Bumper Cover / Fascia > System Information > Service and Repair > Front Bumper Fascia Replacement > Page 11727 Front Bumper Lower Fascia Replacement Front Bumper Lower Fascia Replacement (Equinox) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Bumper > Front Bumper > Front Bumper Cover / Fascia > System Information > Service and Repair > Front Bumper Fascia Replacement > Page 11728 Front Bumper Fascia Support Replacement Front Bumper Fascia Support Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Bumper > Front Bumper > Front Bumper Cover / Fascia > System Information > Service and Repair > Front Bumper Fascia Replacement > Page 11729 Front Bumper Fascia Bracket Replacement Front Bumper Fascia Bracket Replacement (Equinox) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Bumper > Front Bumper > Front Bumper Cover / Fascia > System Information > Service and Repair > Front Bumper Fascia Replacement > Page 11730 Front Bumper Upper Fascia Replacement Front Bumper Upper Fascia Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Bumper > Front Bumper > Front Bumper Cover / Fascia > System Information > Service and Repair > Front Bumper Fascia Replacement > Page 11731 Front Bumper Fascia Opening Cover Replacement Front Bumper Fascia Opening Cover Replacement (Equinox) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Bumper > Front Bumper > Front Bumper Cover / Fascia > System Information > Service and Repair > Front Bumper Fascia Replacement > Page 11732 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Bumper > Front Bumper > Front Bumper Reinforcement > System Information > Service and Repair Front Bumper Reinforcement: Service and Repair Front Bumper Impact Bar Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Bumper > Front Bumper > Front Bumper Shock Absorber > System Information > Service and Repair Front Bumper Shock Absorber: Service and Repair Front Bumper Energy Absorber Replacement (Equinox) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Bumper > Rear Bumper > Rear Bumper Cover / Fascia > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Rear Bumper Cover / Fascia: > 09-08-62-003 > Sep > 09 > Body - Rear Bumper Fascia Not Flush With Quarter Panel Rear Bumper Cover / Fascia: Customer Interest Body - Rear Bumper Fascia Not Flush With Quarter Panel TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 09-08-62-003 Date: September 16, 2009 Subject: Rear Bumper Fascia Gap, Not Flush With Quarter Panel (Install Fastener) Models: 2010 Chevrolet Equinox Built Prior to August 10, 2009 Condition Some customers may comment that the bumper fascia has a gap and is not flush with the quarter panel in the area under the tail lamp. This condition is more prevalent in warmer climates. The condition most commonly occurs on the left side of the vehicle during high temperature conditions. The condition may also be present on the right side of the vehicle to a lesser extent. Cause This condition may be caused by a lack of support from the bumper mounting system. This lack of support may allow a gap to form during high temperature conditions. Correction The installation of an additional fastener will limit the movement of the rear bumper fascia. Use the following steps to install an additional fastener between the fascia and the fascia support. 1. Remove the screw cover and loosen (do not remove) the two fascia fasteners as shown. 2. Remove the tail lamp assembly on the affected side. Refer to Tail Lamp Replacement (Equinox) in SI. 3. Locate the fascia support bracket as shown. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Bumper > Rear Bumper > Rear Bumper Cover / Fascia > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Rear Bumper Cover / Fascia: > 09-08-62-003 > Sep > 09 > Body - Rear Bumper Fascia Not Flush With Quarter Panel > Page 11748 4. By hand, apply inboard pressure to the fascia. Position the fascia 1.0 mm (0.04 in) inboard (sub-flush) to the quarter panel surface. 5. While holding the fascia and fascia support in position, drill a 3 mm (1/8 in) pilot hole in the fascia and fascia support. Use the location shown in the illustration. 6. While holding the fascia and fascia support in position, install the fastener, GM P/N 11609539. Tighten Tighten the fastener to 2.5 Nm (22 lb in). 7. Reinstall the tail lamp assembly on the affected side. Refer to Tail Lamp Replacement (Equinox) in SI. Verify the fit of the fascia and tail lamp. Reposition as required before tightening the tail lamp fasteners. 8. Tighten the two fascia retainers as shown. Tighten Tighten the retainers to 7 Nm (62 lb in). 9. Reinstall the fascia screw cover. 10. Repeat the procedure on the other side of the vehicle if required. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Bumper > Rear Bumper > Rear Bumper Cover / Fascia > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Rear Bumper Cover / Fascia: > 09-08-62-003 > Sep > 09 > Body - Rear Bumper Fascia Not Flush With Quarter Panel > Page 11749 Parts Information Warranty Information Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Bumper > Rear Bumper > Rear Bumper Cover / Fascia > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Bumper Cover / Fascia: > 09-08-62-003 > Sep > 09 > Body - Rear Bumper Fascia Not Flush With Quarter Panel Rear Bumper Cover / Fascia: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - Rear Bumper Fascia Not Flush With Quarter Panel TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 09-08-62-003 Date: September 16, 2009 Subject: Rear Bumper Fascia Gap, Not Flush With Quarter Panel (Install Fastener) Models: 2010 Chevrolet Equinox Built Prior to August 10, 2009 Condition Some customers may comment that the bumper fascia has a gap and is not flush with the quarter panel in the area under the tail lamp. This condition is more prevalent in warmer climates. The condition most commonly occurs on the left side of the vehicle during high temperature conditions. The condition may also be present on the right side of the vehicle to a lesser extent. Cause This condition may be caused by a lack of support from the bumper mounting system. This lack of support may allow a gap to form during high temperature conditions. Correction The installation of an additional fastener will limit the movement of the rear bumper fascia. Use the following steps to install an additional fastener between the fascia and the fascia support. 1. Remove the screw cover and loosen (do not remove) the two fascia fasteners as shown. 2. Remove the tail lamp assembly on the affected side. Refer to Tail Lamp Replacement (Equinox) in SI. 3. Locate the fascia support bracket as shown. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Bumper > Rear Bumper > Rear Bumper Cover / Fascia > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Bumper Cover / Fascia: > 09-08-62-003 > Sep > 09 > Body - Rear Bumper Fascia Not Flush With Quarter Panel > Page 11755 4. By hand, apply inboard pressure to the fascia. Position the fascia 1.0 mm (0.04 in) inboard (sub-flush) to the quarter panel surface. 5. While holding the fascia and fascia support in position, drill a 3 mm (1/8 in) pilot hole in the fascia and fascia support. Use the location shown in the illustration. 6. While holding the fascia and fascia support in position, install the fastener, GM P/N 11609539. Tighten Tighten the fastener to 2.5 Nm (22 lb in). 7. Reinstall the tail lamp assembly on the affected side. Refer to Tail Lamp Replacement (Equinox) in SI. Verify the fit of the fascia and tail lamp. Reposition as required before tightening the tail lamp fasteners. 8. Tighten the two fascia retainers as shown. Tighten Tighten the retainers to 7 Nm (62 lb in). 9. Reinstall the fascia screw cover. 10. Repeat the procedure on the other side of the vehicle if required. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Bumper > Rear Bumper > Rear Bumper Cover / Fascia > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Bumper Cover / Fascia: > 09-08-62-003 > Sep > 09 > Body - Rear Bumper Fascia Not Flush With Quarter Panel > Page 11756 Parts Information Warranty Information Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Bumper > Rear Bumper > Rear Bumper Cover / Fascia > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Bumper Cover / Fascia: > Page 11757 Rear Bumper Cover / Fascia: By Symptom Technical Service Bulletin # 09-08-62-003 Date: 090916 Body - Rear Bumper Fascia Not Flush With Quarter Panel TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 09-08-62-003 Date: September 16, 2009 Subject: Rear Bumper Fascia Gap, Not Flush With Quarter Panel (Install Fastener) Models: 2010 Chevrolet Equinox Built Prior to August 10, 2009 Condition Some customers may comment that the bumper fascia has a gap and is not flush with the quarter panel in the area under the tail lamp. This condition is more prevalent in warmer climates. The condition most commonly occurs on the left side of the vehicle during high temperature conditions. The condition may also be present on the right side of the vehicle to a lesser extent. Cause This condition may be caused by a lack of support from the bumper mounting system. This lack of support may allow a gap to form during high temperature conditions. Correction The installation of an additional fastener will limit the movement of the rear bumper fascia. Use the following steps to install an additional fastener between the fascia and the fascia support. 1. Remove the screw cover and loosen (do not remove) the two fascia fasteners as shown. 2. Remove the tail lamp assembly on the affected side. Refer to Tail Lamp Replacement (Equinox) in SI. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Bumper > Rear Bumper > Rear Bumper Cover / Fascia > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Bumper Cover / Fascia: > Page 11758 3. Locate the fascia support bracket as shown. 4. By hand, apply inboard pressure to the fascia. Position the fascia 1.0 mm (0.04 in) inboard (sub-flush) to the quarter panel surface. 5. While holding the fascia and fascia support in position, drill a 3 mm (1/8 in) pilot hole in the fascia and fascia support. Use the location shown in the illustration. 6. While holding the fascia and fascia support in position, install the fastener, GM P/N 11609539. Tighten Tighten the fastener to 2.5 Nm (22 lb in). 7. Reinstall the tail lamp assembly on the affected side. Refer to Tail Lamp Replacement (Equinox) in SI. Verify the fit of the fascia and tail lamp. Reposition as required before tightening the tail lamp fasteners. 8. Tighten the two fascia retainers as shown. Tighten Tighten the retainers to 7 Nm (62 lb in). 9. Reinstall the fascia screw cover. 10. Repeat the procedure on the other side of the vehicle if required. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Bumper > Rear Bumper > Rear Bumper Cover / Fascia > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Bumper Cover / Fascia: > Page 11759 Parts Information Warranty Information Disclaimer Technical Service Bulletin # 09-08-62-003 Date: 090916 Body - Rear Bumper Fascia Not Flush With Quarter Panel TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 09-08-62-003 Date: September 16, 2009 Subject: Rear Bumper Fascia Gap, Not Flush With Quarter Panel (Install Fastener) Models: 2010 Chevrolet Equinox Built Prior to August 10, 2009 Condition Some customers may comment that the bumper fascia has a gap and is not flush with the quarter panel in the area under the tail lamp. This condition is more prevalent in warmer climates. The condition most commonly occurs on the left side of the vehicle during high temperature conditions. The condition may also be present on the right side of the vehicle to a lesser extent. Cause This condition may be caused by a lack of support from the bumper mounting system. This lack of support may allow a gap to form during high temperature conditions. Correction The installation of an additional fastener will limit the movement of the rear bumper fascia. Use the following steps to install an additional fastener between the fascia and the fascia support. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Bumper > Rear Bumper > Rear Bumper Cover / Fascia > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Bumper Cover / Fascia: > Page 11760 1. Remove the screw cover and loosen (do not remove) the two fascia fasteners as shown. 2. Remove the tail lamp assembly on the affected side. Refer to Tail Lamp Replacement (Equinox) in SI. 3. Locate the fascia support bracket as shown. 4. By hand, apply inboard pressure to the fascia. Position the fascia 1.0 mm (0.04 in) inboard (sub-flush) to the quarter panel surface. 5. While holding the fascia and fascia support in position, drill a 3 mm (1/8 in) pilot hole in the fascia and fascia support. Use the location shown in the illustration. 6. While holding the fascia and fascia support in position, install the fastener, GM P/N 11609539. Tighten Tighten the fastener to 2.5 Nm (22 lb in). 7. Reinstall the tail lamp assembly on the affected side. Refer to Tail Lamp Replacement (Equinox) in SI. Verify the fit of the fascia and tail lamp. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Bumper > Rear Bumper > Rear Bumper Cover / Fascia > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Bumper Cover / Fascia: > Page 11761 Reposition as required before tightening the tail lamp fasteners. 8. Tighten the two fascia retainers as shown. Tighten Tighten the retainers to 7 Nm (62 lb in). 9. Reinstall the fascia screw cover. 10. Repeat the procedure on the other side of the vehicle if required. Parts Information Warranty Information Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Bumper > Rear Bumper > Rear Bumper Cover / Fascia > System Information > Service and Repair > Rear Bumper Fascia Bracket Replacement - Side Rear Bumper Cover / Fascia: Service and Repair Rear Bumper Fascia Bracket Replacement - Side Rear Bumper Fascia Bracket Replacement - Side (Equinox) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Bumper > Rear Bumper > Rear Bumper Cover / Fascia > System Information > Service and Repair > Rear Bumper Fascia Bracket Replacement - Side > Page 11764 Rear Bumper Cover / Fascia: Service and Repair Rear Bumper Fascia Replacement Rear Bumper Fascia Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Bumper > Rear Bumper > Rear Bumper Cover / Fascia > System Information > Service and Repair > Rear Bumper Fascia Bracket Replacement - Side > Page 11765 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Bumper > Rear Bumper > Rear Bumper Cover / Fascia > System Information > Service and Repair > Rear Bumper Fascia Bracket Replacement - Side > Page 11766 Rear Bumper Cover / Fascia: Service and Repair Rear Bumper Fascia Support Replacement Rear Bumper Fascia Support Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Bumper > Rear Bumper > Rear Bumper Cover / Fascia > System Information > Service and Repair > Rear Bumper Fascia Bracket Replacement - Side > Page 11767 Rear Bumper Cover / Fascia: Service and Repair Rear Bumper Upper Fascia Replacement Rear Bumper Upper Fascia Replacement (Equinox) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Bumper > Rear Bumper > Rear Bumper Cover / Fascia > System Information > Service and Repair > Rear Bumper Fascia Bracket Replacement - Side > Page 11768 Rear Bumper Cover / Fascia: Service and Repair Rear Bumper Fascia Bracket Replacement - Side Rear Bumper Fascia Bracket Replacement - Side (Equinox) Rear Bumper Fascia Replacement Rear Bumper Fascia Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Bumper > Rear Bumper > Rear Bumper Cover / Fascia > System Information > Service and Repair > Rear Bumper Fascia Bracket Replacement - Side > Page 11769 Rear Bumper Fascia Support Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Bumper > Rear Bumper > Rear Bumper Cover / Fascia > System Information > Service and Repair > Rear Bumper Fascia Bracket Replacement - Side > Page 11770 Rear Bumper Fascia Support Replacement Rear Bumper Upper Fascia Replacement Rear Bumper Upper Fascia Replacement (Equinox) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Bumper > Rear Bumper > Rear Bumper Cover / Fascia > System Information > Service and Repair > Rear Bumper Fascia Bracket Replacement - Side > Page 11771 Rear Bumper Lower Fascia Replacement Rear Bumper Lower Fascia Replacement (Equinox) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Bumper > Rear Bumper > Rear Bumper Cover / Fascia > System Information > Service and Repair > Rear Bumper Fascia Bracket Replacement - Side > Page 11772 Rear Bumper Fascia Bumper Guard Pad Replacement Rear Bumper Fascia Bumper Guard Pad Replacement (Equinox) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Bumper > Rear Bumper > Rear Bumper Cover / Fascia > System Information > Service and Repair > Rear Bumper Fascia Bracket Replacement - Side > Page 11773 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Bumper > Rear Bumper > Rear Bumper Reinforcement > System Information > Service and Repair Rear Bumper Reinforcement: Service and Repair Rear Bumper Impact Bar Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Bumper > Rear Bumper > Rear Bumper Shock Absorber > System Information > Service and Repair Rear Bumper Shock Absorber: Service and Repair Rear Bumper Energy Absorber Replacement (Equinox) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Cabin Ventilation Grille > Component Information > Service and Repair Cabin Ventilation Grille: Service and Repair Quarter Outer Panel Pressure Relief Valve Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Cowl > Cowl Moulding / Trim > System Information > Service and Repair > Air Inlet Screen Replacement Cowl Moulding / Trim: Service and Repair Air Inlet Screen Replacement Air Inlet Screen Replacement (Equinox) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Cowl > Cowl Moulding / Trim > System Information > Service and Repair > Air Inlet Screen Replacement > Page 11788 Cowl Moulding / Trim: Service and Repair Air Inlet Grille Panel Extension Replacement Air Inlet Grille Panel Extension Replacement (Equinox) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Handle > Front Door Exterior Handle > System Information > Adjustments Front Door Exterior Handle: Adjustments Front Side Door Outside Handle Rod Adjustment Removal Procedure 1. Remove the front side door trim panel. Refer to Front Side Door Trim Panel Replacement (See: Front Door Panel/Service and Repair). 2. Remove the front side door water deflector. 3. Use a flat-head tool to open the clip from the threaded rod connecting the lock to the outside handle. Note: The rear window channel blocks access to the rod clip. Removing the two bolts from the rear run channel enough to undo clip. 4. Adjust the travel of the handle by removing the threaded rod from the clip. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Handle > Front Door Exterior Handle > System Information > Adjustments > Page 11796 1. Position the outside door handle rod in the clip in order to eliminate any free play in the outside door handle. 2. Install the clip cover closed over the threaded outside door handle rod. 3. Inspect the door lock system for proper operation. 4. Install the front side door water deflector. 5. Install the front side door trim panel. Refer to Front Side Door Trim Panel Replacement (See: Front Door Panel/Service and Repair). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Handle > Front Door Exterior Handle > System Information > Service and Repair > Front Side Door Outside Handle Housing Replacement Front Door Exterior Handle: Service and Repair Front Side Door Outside Handle Housing Replacement Front Side Door Outside Handle Housing Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Handle > Front Door Exterior Handle > System Information > Service and Repair > Front Side Door Outside Handle Housing Replacement > Page 11799 Front Door Exterior Handle: Service and Repair Front Side Door Outside Handle Replacement Front Side Door Outside Handle Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Handle > Front Door Exterior Handle > System Information > Service and Repair > Front Side Door Outside Handle Housing Replacement > Page 11800 Front Door Exterior Handle: Service and Repair Front Side Door Outside Handle Rod Replacement Front Side Door Outside Handle Rod Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Handle > Front Door Interior Handle > System Information > Service and Repair Front Door Interior Handle: Service and Repair Front Side Door Inside Handle Cable Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Hinge > System Information > Service and Repair Front Door Hinge: Service and Repair Front Side Door Upper Hinge and Lower Hinge Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Latch > System Information > Diagrams Front Door Latch: Diagrams A23D Door Latch Assembly - Driver A23P Door Latch Assembly - Passenger Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Latch > System Information > Diagrams > Page 11810 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Latch > System Information > Diagrams > Page 11811 Front Door Latch: Service and Repair Front Side Door Latch Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Limiter > System Information > Service and Repair Front Door Limiter: Service and Repair Front Side Door Check Link Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Panel > System Information > Service and Repair > Front Side Door Accessory Switch Mount Plate Replacement Front Door Panel: Service and Repair Front Side Door Accessory Switch Mount Plate Replacement Front Side Door Accessory Switch Mount Plate Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Panel > System Information > Service and Repair > Front Side Door Accessory Switch Mount Plate Replacement > Page 11819 Front Door Panel: Service and Repair Front Side Door Garnish Molding Replacement Front Side Door Garnish Molding Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Panel > System Information > Service and Repair > Front Side Door Accessory Switch Mount Plate Replacement > Page 11820 Front Door Panel: Service and Repair Front Side Door Trim Panel Front Side Door Trim Panel Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Striker > System Information > Adjustments Front Door Striker: Adjustments Front Side Door Lock Striker Adjustment To determine if striker adjustment is required, proceed as follows: Warning In order to prevent SIR deployment, personal injury, or unnecessary SIR system repairs, do not strike the door or the door pillar in the area of the side impact sensor (SIS). Turn OFF the ignition and remove the key when performing service in the area of the SIS. 1. Ensure the door is properly aligned within the door opening before proceeding with the striker adjustment. 2. Close the door onto the striker and note if the door drags on the striker causing the door to move upward or downward upon contact with the striker. Also note the closing effort to fully engage the latch. 3. Using a grease pencil, mark around the striker for reference of the original position. Loosen the striker. 4. Move the striker to eliminate drag on the striker and door latch and to achieve the proper door position within the door opening. Start with the up/down position, then position the striker to achieve proper alignment to the door opening. Set the in/out adjustment for the proper door seal engagement making sure the door closing efforts are correct. Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener Caution). 5. Tighten the striker bolts. Tighten the door striker bolts to 25 Nm (18 lb ft). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Striker > System Information > Adjustments > Page 11824 Front Door Striker: Service and Repair Front Side Door Lock Striker Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front or Rear Side Door Lower Weatherstrip Replacement Front Door Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Front or Rear Side Door Lower Weatherstrip Replacement Front or Rear Side Door Lower Weatherstrip Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front or Rear Side Door Lower Weatherstrip Replacement > Page 11829 Front Door Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Front Side Door Window Weatherstrip Replacement Front Side Door Window Weatherstrip Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front or Rear Side Door Lower Weatherstrip Replacement > Page 11830 Front Door Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Front Side Door Auxiliary Weatherstrip Replacement Front Side Door Auxiliary Weatherstrip Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front or Rear Side Door Lower Weatherstrip Replacement > Page 11831 Front Door Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Front Side Door Weatherstrip Replacement Front Side Door Weatherstrip Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Window Glass > Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Front Side Door Window Belt Reveal Molding Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Window Motor > Component Information > Locations Front Door Window Motor: Locations Door Component Views Driver Door Components 1 - A23D Door Latch Assembly - Driver 2 - A9A Outside Rearview Mirror - Driver 3 - E1C Accent Lamp - Driver Door Handle (LTZ or SLT) 4 - K96L Mirror Control Module - Left (LTZ or SLT) 5 S52S Outside Rearview Mirror Switch 6 - P19G Speaker - Left Front 7 - M74D Window Motor Driver 8 - B63LF Side Impact Sensor - Left Front 9 - S79D Window Switch - Driver 10 - E1D Accent Lamp - Driver Door (LTZ or SLT) Passenger Door Components Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Window Motor > Component Information > Locations > Page 11839 1 - A9B Outside Rearview Mirror - Passenger 2 - E1M Accent Lamp - Passenger Door Handle (LTZ or SLT) 3 - S79P Window Switch - Passenger 4 - A23P Door Latch Assembly - Passenger 5 - E1P Accent Lamp - Passenger Door (LTZ or SLT) 6 - B63RF Side Impact Sensor - Right Front 7 M74P Window Motor - Passenger 8 - P19U Speaker - Right Front Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Window Motor > Component Information > Locations > Page 11840 Front Door Window Motor: Diagrams M74D Window Motor - Driver M74LR Window Motor - Left Rear Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Window Motor > Component Information > Locations > Page 11841 M74P Window Motor - Passenger Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Window Motor > Component Information > Locations > Page 11842 M74RR Window Motor - Right Rear Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Window Motor > Component Information > Locations > Page 11843 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Window Motor > Component Information > Locations > Page 11844 Front Door Window Motor: Service and Repair Front Side Door Window Regulator Motor Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Window Regulator > System Information > Service and Repair Front Door Window Regulator: Service and Repair Front Side Door Window Regulator Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Handle > Rear Door Exterior Handle > System Information > Service and Repair > Rear Side Door Outside Handle Housing Replacement Rear Door Exterior Handle: Service and Repair Rear Side Door Outside Handle Housing Replacement Rear Side Door Outside Handle Housing Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Handle > Rear Door Exterior Handle > System Information > Service and Repair > Rear Side Door Outside Handle Housing Replacement > Page 11854 Rear Door Exterior Handle: Service and Repair Rear Side Door Outside Handle Replacement Rear Side Door Outside Handle Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Handle > Rear Door Exterior Handle > System Information > Service and Repair > Rear Side Door Outside Handle Housing Replacement > Page 11855 Rear Door Exterior Handle: Service and Repair Rear Side Door Outside Handle Rod Adjustment Rear Side Door Outside Handle Rod Adjustment Removal Procedure 1. Remove the rear side door trim panel. Refer to Rear Side Door Trim Panel Replacement (See: Rear Door Panel/Service and Repair/Rear Side Door Trim Panel Replacement). 2. Remove the rear side door water deflector. 3. Use a flat-head tool to open the clip from the threaded rod connecting the lock to the outside handle. 4. Adjust the travel of the handle by removing the threaded rod from the clip. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Handle > Rear Door Exterior Handle > System Information > Service and Repair > Rear Side Door Outside Handle Housing Replacement > Page 11856 1. Position the outside door handle rod (2) in the clip (1) in order to eliminate any free play in the outside door handle. 2. Install the clip cover closed over the threaded outside door handle rod. 3. Inspect the door lock system for proper operation. 4. Install the rear side door water deflector. 5. Install the rear side door trim panel. Refer to Rear Side Door Trim Panel Replacement (See: Rear Door Panel/Service and Repair/Rear Side Door Trim Panel Replacement). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Handle > Rear Door Exterior Handle > System Information > Service and Repair > Rear Side Door Outside Handle Housing Replacement > Page 11857 Rear Door Exterior Handle: Service and Repair Rear Side Door Outside Handle Rod Replacement Rear Side Door Outside Handle Rod Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Handle > Rear Door Interior Handle > System Information > Service and Repair Rear Door Interior Handle: Service and Repair Rear Side Door Inside Handle Cable Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Hinge > System Information > Service and Repair Rear Door Hinge: Service and Repair Rear Side Door Upper Hinge and Lower Hinge Replacement Removal Procedure Warning In order to prevent SIR deployment, personal injury, or unnecessary SIR system repairs, do not strike the door or the door pillar in the area of the side impact sensor (SIS). Turn OFF the ignition and remove the key when performing service in the area of the SIS. 1. Mark around the hinge location with a soft marker for installation alignment purposes. 2. Support the door. 3. With the door fully latched on the striker, remove the hinge to door bolts. 4. Remove the hinge to body bolts and remove the hinges one at a time. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Hinge > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 11864 1. Position the hinge to the vehicle with the marks made prior to removal. Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener Caution). 2. Install the hinge to door bolts. Tighten the bolts to 25 Nm (18 lb ft). 3. Install the hinge to body bolts. Tighten the bolts to 36 Nm (27 lb ft). 4. Inspect the door for proper alignment. Refer to Rear Side Door Adjustment (See: Adjustments). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Latch > System Information > Diagrams Rear Door Latch: Diagrams A23LR Door Latch Assembly - Left Rear A23RR Door Latch Assembly - Right Rear Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Latch > System Information > Diagrams > Page 11868 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Latch > System Information > Diagrams > Page 11869 Rear Door Latch: Service and Repair Rear Side Door Latch Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Limiter > System Information > Service and Repair Rear Door Limiter: Service and Repair Rear Side Door Check Link Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Panel > System Information > Service and Repair > Rear Side Door Accessory Switch Mount Plate Replacement Rear Door Panel: Service and Repair Rear Side Door Accessory Switch Mount Plate Replacement Rear Side Door Accessory Switch Mount Plate Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Panel > System Information > Service and Repair > Rear Side Door Accessory Switch Mount Plate Replacement > Page 11877 Rear Door Panel: Service and Repair Rear Side Door Garnish Molding Replacement Rear Side Door Garnish Molding Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Panel > System Information > Service and Repair > Rear Side Door Accessory Switch Mount Plate Replacement > Page 11878 Rear Door Panel: Service and Repair Rear Side Door Trim Panel Replacement Rear Side Door Trim Panel Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Striker > System Information > Adjustments Rear Door Striker: Adjustments Rear Side Door Lock Striker Adjustment To determine if striker adjustment is required, proceed as follows: Warning In order to prevent SIR deployment, personal injury, or unnecessary SIR system repairs, do not strike the door or the door pillar in the area of the side impact sensor (SIS). Turn OFF the ignition and remove the key when performing service in the area of the SIS. 1. Ensure the door is properly aligned within the door opening before proceeding with the striker adjustment. 2. Close the door onto the striker and note if the door drags on the striker causing the door to move upward or downward upon contact with the striker. Also note the closing effort to fully engage the latch. 3. Using a grease pencil, mark around the striker for reference of the original position. Loosen the striker. 4. Move the striker to eliminate drag on the striker and door latch and to achieve the proper door position within the door opening. Start with the up/down position, then position the striker to achieve proper alignment to the door opening. Set the in/out adjustment for the proper door seal engagement making sure the door closing efforts are correct. Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener Caution). 5. Tighten the striker screws. Tighten the door striker screws to 25 Nm (18 lb ft). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Striker > System Information > Adjustments > Page 11882 Rear Door Striker: Service and Repair Rear Side Door Lock Striker Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Rear Side Door Window Weatherstrip Replacement Rear Door Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Rear Side Door Window Weatherstrip Replacement Rear Side Door Window Weatherstrip Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Rear Side Door Window Weatherstrip Replacement > Page 11887 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Rear Side Door Window Weatherstrip Replacement > Page 11888 Rear Door Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Rear Side Door Lower Rear Auxiliary Sealing Strip Replacement Rear Side Door Lower Rear Auxiliary Sealing Strip Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Rear Side Door Window Weatherstrip Replacement > Page 11889 Rear Door Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Front or Rear Side Door Lower Weatherstrip Replacement Front or Rear Side Door Lower Weatherstrip Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Rear Side Door Window Weatherstrip Replacement > Page 11890 Rear Door Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Rear Side Door Auxiliary Weatherstrip Replacement Rear Side Door Auxiliary Weatherstrip Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Rear Side Door Window Weatherstrip Replacement > Page 11891 Rear Door Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Rear Side Door Weatherstrip Replacement Rear Side Door Weatherstrip Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Window Glass > Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Rear Side Door Window Belt Reveal Molding Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Window Motor > Component Information > Locations Rear Door Window Motor: Locations Door Component Views Left Rear Door Components 1 - A23LR Door Latch Assembly - Left Rear 2 - S79LR Window Switch - Left Rear 3 - M74LR Window Motor - Left Rear 4 - P19K Speaker - Left Rear 5 - B63LR Side Impact Sensor - Left Rear Right Rear Door Components Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Window Motor > Component Information > Locations > Page 11899 1 - S79RR Window Switch - Right Rear 2 - A23RR Door Latch Assembly - Right Rear 3 - M74RR Window Motor - Right Rear 4 - B63RR Side Impact Sensor - Right Rear 5 - P19X Speaker - Right Rear Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Window Motor > Component Information > Locations > Page 11900 Rear Door Window Motor: Diagrams M74D Window Motor - Driver M74LR Window Motor - Left Rear Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Window Motor > Component Information > Locations > Page 11901 M74P Window Motor - Passenger Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Window Motor > Component Information > Locations > Page 11902 M74RR Window Motor - Right Rear Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Window Motor > Component Information > Locations > Page 11903 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Window Motor > Component Information > Locations > Page 11904 Rear Door Window Motor: Service and Repair Rear Side Door Window Regulator Motor Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Window Regulator > System Information > Service and Repair Rear Door Window Regulator: Service and Repair Rear Side Door Window Regulator Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Fuel Door > Component Information > Service and Repair Fuel Door: Service and Repair Fuel Tank Filler Door Replacement (Equinox) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Hood > Hood Hinge > Component Information > Service and Repair Hood Hinge: Service and Repair Hood Hinge Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Hood > Hood Insulator / Pad > Component Information > Service and Repair Hood Insulator / Pad: Service and Repair Hood Insulator Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Hood > Hood Latch > Component Information > Service and Repair Hood Latch: Service and Repair Hood Primary and Secondary Latch Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Hood > Hood Latch Release Cable > Component Information > Service and Repair > Hood Primary Latch Release Cable Replacement Hood Latch Release Cable: Service and Repair Hood Primary Latch Release Cable Replacement Hood Primary Latch Release Cable Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Hood > Hood Latch Release Cable > Component Information > Service and Repair > Hood Primary Latch Release Cable Replacement > Page 11925 Hood Latch Release Cable: Service and Repair Hood Primary Latch Release Cable Handle Replacement Hood Primary Latch Release Cable Handle Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Hood > Hood Shock / Support > Component Information > Service and Repair Hood Shock / Support: Service and Repair Hood Strut Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Hood > Hood Switch / Sensor > Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Locations Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm): Locations Front of Vehicle/Engine Compartment Component Views Engine Compartment Components (Chevrolet) 1 - B20 Brake Fluid Level Switch 2 - B19B Brake Booster Vacuum Sensor 3 - M75 Windshield Wiper Motor 4 - X50A Fuse Block - Underhood 5 - C1 Battery 6 - G24 Windshield Washer Pump 7 - B55 Hood Ajar Switch (BTV) 8 - P12B Horn - Low Note 9 - P12A Horn - High Note 10 - K17 Electronic Brake Control Module Engine Compartment Components (GMC) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Hood > Hood Switch / Sensor > Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Locations > Page 11933 1 - B20 Brake Fluid Level Switch 2 - B19B Brake Booster Vacuum Sensor 3 - M75 Windshield Wiper Motor 4 - X50A Fuse Block - Underhood 5 - C1 Battery 6 - G24 Windshield Washer Pump 7 - P12B Horn - Low Note 8 - B55 Hood Ajar Switch (BTV) 9 - K17 Electronic Brake Control Module 10 - P12A Horn - High Note Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Hood > Hood Switch / Sensor > Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Locations > Page 11934 Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm): Diagrams B55 Hood Ajar Switch (BTV) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Hood > Hood Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Hood Front Seal Replacement Hood Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Hood Front Seal Replacement Hood Front Seal Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Hood > Hood Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Hood Front Seal Replacement > Page 11939 Hood Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Hood Rear Weatherstrip Replacement Hood Rear Weatherstrip Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Liftgate Window Glass > Component Information > Service and Repair Liftgate Window Glass: Service and Repair Liftgate Window Replacement Special Tools * J 24402-A Glass Sealant (Cold Knife) Remover * J 39032 Stationary Glass Removal Tool * Use a urethane adhesive systems which meet GM Specification GM 3651G Removal Procedure Warning: Refer to Cracked Window Warning (See: Windows and Glass/Service Precautions/Cracked Window Warning). Note: Before cutting out a stationary window, apply a double layer of masking tape around the perimeter of the painted surfaces and the interior trim. 1. Open the liftgate. 2. Remove the liftgate lower trim finish panel. Refer to Liftgate Lower Trim Finish Panel Replacement () and Liftgate Lower Trim Finish Panel Replacement (). 3. Disconnect the electrical connectors from the liftgate window defogger bus bar. 4. Remove the rear window wiper arm. Refer to Rear Window Wiper Arm Replacement (Equinox) (See: Wiper and Washer Systems/Wiper Arm/Service and Repair/Rear Window Wiper Arm Replacement) Rear Window Wiper Arm Replacement (Terrain) (See: Wiper and Washer Systems/Wiper Arm/Service and Repair/Rear Window Wiper Arm Replacement). 5. Remove the rear end spoiler. Refer to Rear End Spoiler Replacement (Equinox) (See: Spoilers, Flaps, and Air Dams/Spoiler/Service and Repair) Rear End Spoiler Replacement (Terrain) (See: Spoilers, Flaps, and Air Dams/Spoiler/Service and Repair). Warning: Refer to Defroster Outlet Warning (See: Heating and Air Conditioning/Service Precautions/Technician Safety Information). 6. Cover the following parts to protect from broken glass: * Upper dash pad * Defroster outlets and A/C outlets * Seats and carpeting Warning: Refer to Glass and Sheet Metal Handling Warning (See: Service Precautions/Technician Safety Information/Glass and Sheet Metal Handling Warning). 7. Using a utility knife, carefully cut the lace (1) from the sides and the top edge of the window to access the urethane adhesive bead, if equipped. Note: Keep the cutting edge of the tool against the window. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Liftgate Window Glass > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 11944 8. Remove the window from the urethane adhesive. * Leave a base of urethane approximately 2 mm (0.078 in) on the pinch-weld flange. * The only suitable lubrication is clear water. * Use J 24402-A, J 39032 or equivalent in order to remove the window. Note: Keep the cutting edge of the knife/tool against the window. Do this from inside the vehicle. 9. If necessary, use a long utility knife or similar tool to remove the bottom corners of the window from the urethane adhesive. 10. With the aid of an assistant, remove the window (1) from the vehicle. Installation Procedure 1. Install the liftgate window into the opening. Refer to Adhesive Installation of Liftgate Windows (See: Windows and Glass/Windows/Service and Repair/Adhesive Installation of Liftgate Windows). 2. Install the rear end spoiler. Refer to Rear End Spoiler Replacement (Equinox) (See: Spoilers, Flaps, and Air Dams/Spoiler/Service and Repair) Rear End Spoiler Replacement (Terrain) (See: Spoilers, Flaps, and Air Dams/Spoiler/Service and Repair). 3. Install the rear window wiper arm. Refer to Rear Window Wiper Arm Replacement (Equinox) (See: Wiper and Washer Systems/Wiper Arm/Service and Repair/Rear Window Wiper Arm Replacement) Rear Window Wiper Arm Replacement (Terrain) (See: Wiper and Washer Systems/Wiper Arm/Service and Repair/Rear Window Wiper Arm Replacement). 4. Connect the liftgate window defogger electrical connectors to the bus bar. 5. Install the liftgate lower trim finish panel. Refer to Liftgate Lower Trim Finish Panel Replacement () and Liftgate Lower Trim Finish Panel Replacement (). 6. Remove the double layer of masking tape around the perimeter of the painted surfaces and the interior trim. 7. Close the liftgate. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module: > 09-08-66-010B > Mar > 10 > Body - Power Liftgate Inoperative from Key FOB Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module: Customer Interest Body - Power Liftgate Inoperative from Key FOB TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 09-08-66-010B Date: March 25, 2010 Subject: Power Liftgate Inoperative from Key FOB, Interior Mounted Open/Close Switch, Gate Mounted Open/Close Switch and Gate Mounted Touch Pad (Reprogram Liftgate Control Module) Models: 2010 Cadillac CTS Sport Wagon, SRX 2010 Chevrolet Equinox 2010 GMC Terrain Built Prior to the Following VIN Breakpoints: Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add VIN breakpoint information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 09-08-66-010A (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Condition - Some customers may comment that the power liftgate is inoperative from the key FOB, the interior mounted open/close switch, the liftgate mounted open/close switch and the liftgate mounted touch pad. - 2010 Cadillac CTS Sport Wagon ONLY - Some customers may comment that the power liftgate does not open on first attempt, but will open on subsequent consecutive attempts. Cause This condition may be caused by a power liftgate microprocessor issue that could cause the power liftgate module to stop communicating on the GMLAN Serial Data Bus. Correction Note If the power liftgate module is not communicating, remove the two power liftgate module fuses, wait a minimum of 1 minute , and reinstall the two fuses; or disconnect the power liftgate module (disconnect all three connectors at the module), check and verify power and ground to the module, and re-connect the power liftgate module. Verify communication. If communication is restored, then update the software in the power liftgate module. - A revised power liftgate module calibration has been released to address this condition. Reprogram the power liftgate module using the Service Programming System (SPS) with the latest calibration available on TIS2WEB. Refer to the SPS procedures in SI. - When using a multiple diagnostic interface (MDI) for reprogramming, ensure that it is updated with the latest software version. - When using a Tech 2(R) for reprogramming, ensure that it is updated with the latest software version. - During programming, the battery voltage must be maintained within the proper range of 12-16 volts. Only use the approved Midtronics(R) PSC 550 Battery Maintainer (SPS Programming Support Tool EL-49642) or equivalent during programming. Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table above. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module: > 09-08-66-010B > Mar > 10 > Body - Power Liftgate Inoperative from Key FOB > Page 11953 Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module: > 09-08-66-010B > Mar > 10 > Body - Power Liftgate Inoperative from Key FOB Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - Power Liftgate Inoperative from Key FOB TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 09-08-66-010B Date: March 25, 2010 Subject: Power Liftgate Inoperative from Key FOB, Interior Mounted Open/Close Switch, Gate Mounted Open/Close Switch and Gate Mounted Touch Pad (Reprogram Liftgate Control Module) Models: 2010 Cadillac CTS Sport Wagon, SRX 2010 Chevrolet Equinox 2010 GMC Terrain Built Prior to the Following VIN Breakpoints: Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add VIN breakpoint information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 09-08-66-010A (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Condition - Some customers may comment that the power liftgate is inoperative from the key FOB, the interior mounted open/close switch, the liftgate mounted open/close switch and the liftgate mounted touch pad. - 2010 Cadillac CTS Sport Wagon ONLY - Some customers may comment that the power liftgate does not open on first attempt, but will open on subsequent consecutive attempts. Cause This condition may be caused by a power liftgate microprocessor issue that could cause the power liftgate module to stop communicating on the GMLAN Serial Data Bus. Correction Note If the power liftgate module is not communicating, remove the two power liftgate module fuses, wait a minimum of 1 minute , and reinstall the two fuses; or disconnect the power liftgate module (disconnect all three connectors at the module), check and verify power and ground to the module, and re-connect the power liftgate module. Verify communication. If communication is restored, then update the software in the power liftgate module. - A revised power liftgate module calibration has been released to address this condition. Reprogram the power liftgate module using the Service Programming System (SPS) with the latest calibration available on TIS2WEB. Refer to the SPS procedures in SI. - When using a multiple diagnostic interface (MDI) for reprogramming, ensure that it is updated with the latest software version. - When using a Tech 2(R) for reprogramming, ensure that it is updated with the latest software version. - During programming, the battery voltage must be maintained within the proper range of 12-16 volts. Only use the approved Midtronics(R) PSC 550 Battery Maintainer (SPS Programming Support Tool EL-49642) or equivalent during programming. Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table above. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module: > 09-08-66-010B > Mar > 10 > Body - Power Liftgate Inoperative from Key FOB > Page 11959 Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 11960 Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module: Locations Luggage Compartment/Rear of Vehicle Component Views Liftgate Components 1 - B71R Liftgate Object Sensor - Right (TB5) 2 - E18 Rear Defogger Grid 3 - B71L Liftgate Object Sensor - Left (TB5) 4 - M45 Rear Wiper Motor 5 - K39 Liftgate Control Module (TB5) 6 - A23C Liftgate Latch Assembly 7 - B70 Liftgate Close Switch (TB5) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 11961 Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module: Diagrams K39 Liftgate Control Module X1 (TB5) K39 Liftgate Control Module X2 (TB5) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 11962 K39 Liftgate Control Module X3 (TB5) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 11963 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 11964 Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module: Service and Repair Accessory and Liftgate Control Module Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Power Trunk / Liftgate Hazard Sensor > Component Information > Locations Power Trunk / Liftgate Hazard Sensor: Locations Luggage Compartment/Rear of Vehicle Component Views Liftgate Components 1 - B71R Liftgate Object Sensor - Right (TB5) 2 - E18 Rear Defogger Grid 3 - B71L Liftgate Object Sensor - Left (TB5) 4 - M45 Rear Wiper Motor 5 - K39 Liftgate Control Module (TB5) 6 - A23C Liftgate Latch Assembly 7 - B70 Liftgate Close Switch (TB5) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Power Trunk / Liftgate Hazard Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 11968 Power Trunk / Liftgate Hazard Sensor: Diagrams B71L Liftgate Object Sensor - Left (TB5) B71R Liftgate Object Sensor - Right (TB5) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Power Trunk / Liftgate Hazard Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 11969 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Hinge > Component Information > Service and Repair Trunk / Liftgate Hinge: Service and Repair Liftgate Hinge Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Handle > Component Information > Service and Repair Trunk / Liftgate Handle: Service and Repair Liftgate Outside Handle Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Hydraulic Control Unit > Component Information > Service and Repair Trunk / Liftgate Hydraulic Control Unit: Service and Repair Liftgate Hydraulic Actuator Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Hydraulic Fluid > Component Information > Service and Repair > Liftgate Hydraulic System Refilling Trunk / Liftgate Hydraulic Fluid: Service and Repair Liftgate Hydraulic System Refilling Liftgate Hydraulic System Refilling Warning: Refer to Eye Protection Warning (See: Service Precautions/Technician Safety Information/Eye Protection Warning). Warning: Refer to Battery Disconnect Warning (See: Starting and Charging/Battery/Service Precautions). Note: * The actuator/hose assemblies are shipped full with fluid. In this case the pump fluid reservoir should only be filled to the normal + sign. Do not overfill to compensate for an empty actuator/hose assembly. * Symptom of a low fluid condition will be a jerking liftgate and with an abnormal hydraulic pump noise as the liftgate is being open. The liftgate will not open to the full open position. The liftgate will reverse before reaching the full open position if not operating properly. * Inspection of the hydraulic fluid level and/or refilling may only be completed if the liftgate hydraulic actuator pump is removed from the vehicle and placed on a clean/level workbench horizontally to the + sign to accurately inspect and add fluid as needed. The liftgate hydraulic actuator pump must rest in the horizontal position for one minute before the hydraulic fluid level is inspected. The level must be above the + mark. * The liftgate hydraulic system components must be tested for proper operation before reinstalling the trim panels that cover the liftgate hydraulic actuator pump and actuator/hose assemblies so the fluid level can be recheck after cycling the liftgate 3-5 times to ensure proper fluid level. Rechecking the fluid level will require removal of the liftgate hydraulic pump. 1. Remove the liftgate hydraulic pump. Refer to Liftgate Hydraulic Pump Replacement (See: Trunk / Liftgate Hydraulic Pump/Service and Repair/Liftgate Hydraulic Pump Replacement). 2. Position the pump with the fluid reservoir in a vertical position with the filler screw (1) in the up and/or on top position. 3. Wipe the surface around the filler screw clean. 4. Remove the filler screw (1) and place on a clean, lint and dust free surface. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Hydraulic Fluid > Component Information > Service and Repair > Liftgate Hydraulic System Refilling > Page 11983 5. Add hydraulic fluid from a clean container (1). Refer to Adhesives, Fluids, Lubricants, and Sealers (See: Locks/Specifications/Fluid Type Specifications) for the recommended fluid. Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener Caution). 6. Install the filler screw and tighten to 1.3 Nm (12 lb in). 7. Position the liftgate hydraulic actuator pump (1) on a clean/level workbench horizontally to the + sign to accurately inspect and add fluid as needed. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Hydraulic Fluid > Component Information > Service and Repair > Liftgate Hydraulic System Refilling > Page 11984 8. The liftgate hydraulic actuator pump must rest in the horizontal position for one minute before the hydraulic fluid level is inspected. The level must be above the + mark. 9. Install the pump without the trim and inspect for proper operation and fluid level. The fluid level can be checked after cycling the liftgate 3-5 times to ensure proper fluid level. If the fluid is still low repeat the procedure. 10. Install the liftgate hydraulic pump after inspection. Refer to Liftgate Hydraulic Pump Replacement (See: Trunk / Liftgate Hydraulic Pump/Service and Repair/Liftgate Hydraulic Pump Replacement). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Hydraulic Fluid > Component Information > Service and Repair > Liftgate Hydraulic System Refilling > Page 11985 Trunk / Liftgate Hydraulic Fluid: Service and Repair Liftgate Hydraulic System Bleeding Liftgate Hydraulic System Bleeding Warning: Refer to Eye Protection Warning (See: Service Precautions/Technician Safety Information/Eye Protection Warning). Note: Inspection of the hydraulic fluid level and/or refilling may only be completed if the liftgate hydraulic actuator pump is removed from the vehicle and placed on a clean/level workbench horizontally to the + sign to accurately inspect and add fluid as needed. The liftgate hydraulic actuator pump must rest in the horizontal position for one minute before the hydraulic fluid level is inspected. The level must be above the + mark after cycling the liftgate 3-5 times. 1. Cycle the liftgate 3-5 times to ensure proper fluid level. 2. Inspect the fluid level. Refer to Liftgate Hydraulic Pump Replacement (See: Trunk / Liftgate Hydraulic Pump/Service and Repair/Liftgate Hydraulic Pump Replacement). 3. If adding fluid is required, refer to Liftgate Hydraulic System Refilling (See: Liftgate Hydraulic System Refilling). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Hydraulic Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair Trunk / Liftgate Hydraulic Hose: Service and Repair Liftgate Hydraulic Actuator Hose Disconnection and Connection Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Hydraulic Pump > Component Information > Service and Repair > Liftgate Hydraulic Pump Replacement Trunk / Liftgate Hydraulic Pump: Service and Repair Liftgate Hydraulic Pump Replacement Liftgate Hydraulic Pump Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Hydraulic Pump > Component Information > Service and Repair > Liftgate Hydraulic Pump Replacement > Page 11993 Trunk / Liftgate Hydraulic Pump: Service and Repair Liftgate Hydraulic Pump Insulator Replacement Liftgate Hydraulic Pump Insulator Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Hydraulic Pump > Component Information > Service and Repair > Liftgate Hydraulic Pump Replacement > Page 11994 Trunk / Liftgate Hydraulic Pump: Service and Repair Liftgate Hydraulic Pump Cover Replacement Liftgate Hydraulic Pump Cover Replacement (Equinox) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Latch > Component Information > Diagrams Trunk / Liftgate Latch: Diagrams A23C Liftgate Latch Assembly (TB4) A23C Liftgate Latch Assembly (TB5) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Latch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 11998 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Latch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 11999 Trunk / Liftgate Latch: Service and Repair Liftgate Latch Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Motor > Component Information > Locations Trunk / Liftgate Motor: Locations Luggage Compartment/Rear of Vehicle Component Views Left Side of the Luggage Compartment Components 1 - X80R Accessory Power Receptacle - Rear Compartment 2 - K41 Parking Assist Module (UD7) 3 - M17 Liftgate Motor Assembly (TB5) 4 - K27 Fuel Pump Control Module Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Motor > Component Information > Locations > Page 12003 Trunk / Liftgate Motor: Diagrams M17 Liftgate Motor Assembly (TB5) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair Trunk / Liftgate Position Sensor: Service and Repair Liftgate Side Upper Sensor Replacement (Equinox) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Relay > Component Information > Locations Trunk / Liftgate Relay: Locations Electrical Center Identification Views X50A Fuse Block - Underhood, Label Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 12010 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Shock / Support > Component Information > Service and Repair Trunk / Liftgate Shock / Support: Service and Repair Liftgate Strut Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Striker > Component Information > Adjustments Trunk / Liftgate Striker: Adjustments Liftgate Lock Striker Adjustment Note: Make certain the liftgate is properly aligned within the liftgate opening before proceeding with the striker adjustment. 1. Close the liftgate onto the striker and note if liftgate drags on striker causing the liftgate to move side to side upon contact with the striker. Also note closing efforts to fully engage latch. 2. Mark around the striker with a grease pencil for reference of original position. 3. Loosen striker bolts. 4. Move the striker to eliminate drag on striker and liftgate latch and to achieve proper liftgate position within the liftgate opening. 5. Align the left/right liftgate position, then position the striker to achieve proper alignment to liftgate opening. 6. Align the in/out adjustment for proper liftgate seal engagement making sure the liftgate closing efforts are correct. Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener Caution). 7. Verify correct alignment of striker and tighten striker bolts. Tighten the bolts to 25 Nm (18 lb ft). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Striker > Component Information > Adjustments > Page 12017 Trunk / Liftgate Striker: Service and Repair Liftgate Lock Striker Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Switch > Component Information > Locations Trunk / Liftgate Switch: Locations Luggage Compartment/Rear of Vehicle Component Views Liftgate Components 1 - B71R Liftgate Object Sensor - Right (TB5) 2 - E18 Rear Defogger Grid 3 - B71L Liftgate Object Sensor - Left (TB5) 4 - M45 Rear Wiper Motor 5 - K39 Liftgate Control Module (TB5) 6 - A23C Liftgate Latch Assembly 7 - B70 Liftgate Close Switch (TB5) Rear of Vehicle Components (Chevrolet) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 12021 1 - E2LR Side Marker Lamp - Left Rear 2 - E5A Backup Lamp - Left 3 - E6 Center High Mounted Stop Lamp 4 - T4G Cellular Phone, Navigation, and Digital Radio Antenna 5 - M45 Rear Wiper Motor 6 - E5B Backup Lamp - Right 7 - E2RR Side Marker Lamp - Right Rear 8 - E5T Tail/Brake and Turn Signal Lamp - Right 9 - E7R License Plate Lamp - Right 10 - B78H Rear Object Sensor Right Outer (UD7) 11 - B78F Rear Object Sensor - Right Middle (UD7) 12 - S46 Liftgate Handle Switch 13 - B87 Rearview Camera (UVC) 14 - X88 Trailer Connector (V92) 15 - B78E Rear Object Sensor - Left Middle (UD7) 16 - E7L License Plate Lamp - Left 17 - B78G Rear Object Sensor Left Outer (UD7) 18 - E5S Tail/Brake and Turn Signal Lamp - Left Rear of Vehicle Components (GMC) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 12022 1 - E5M Tail Lamp - Left Upper 2 - E6 Center High Mounted Stop Lamp 3 - T4G Cellular Phone, Navigation, and Digital Radio Antenna 4 - M45 Rear Wiper Motor 5 - E5N Tail Lamp - Right Upper 6 - E5T Tail/Brake and Turn Signal Lamp - Right 7 - E2RR Side Marker Lamp - Right Rear 8 - E5K Tail Lamp - Right Lower 9 - E5B Backup Lamp - Right 10 - B78H Rear Object Sensor - Right Outer (UD7) 11 - E7R License Plate Lamp - Right 12 - S46 Liftgate Handle Switch 13 - B87 Rearview Camera (UVC) 14 - E7L License Plate Lamp - Left 15 - B78F Rear Object Sensor - Right Middle (UD7) 16 - X88 Trailer Connector (V92) 17 - B78E Rear Object Sensor - Left Middle (UD7) 18 B78G Rear Object Sensor - Left Outer (UD7) 19 - E5A Backup Lamp - Left 20 - E5J Tail Lamp Left Lower 21 - E2LR Side Marker Lamp - Left Rear 22 - E5S Tail/Brake and Turn Signal Lamp Left Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 12023 Trunk / Liftgate Switch: Diagrams B70 Liftgate Close Switch (TB5) S45B Liftgate Control Switch - Interior (TB5) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 12024 S46 Liftgate Handle Switch Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 12025 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Liftgate Close Switch Replacement Trunk / Liftgate Switch: Service and Repair Liftgate Close Switch Replacement Liftgate Close Switch Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Liftgate Close Switch Replacement > Page 12028 Trunk / Liftgate Switch: Service and Repair Rear Compartment Lid Release Switch Replacement Rear Compartment Lid Release Switch Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Liftgate Close Switch Replacement > Page 12029 Trunk / Liftgate Switch: Service and Repair Liftgate Release Switch Replacement Liftgate Release Switch Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Liftgate Upper Weatherstrip Replacement Trunk / Liftgate Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Liftgate Upper Weatherstrip Replacement Liftgate Upper Weatherstrip Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Liftgate Upper Weatherstrip Replacement > Page 12034 Trunk / Liftgate Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Liftgate Weatherstrip Replacement Liftgate Weatherstrip Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Liftgate Upper Weatherstrip Replacement > Page 12035 Trunk / Liftgate Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Liftgate Wedge Replacement Liftgate Wedge Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Liftgate Upper Weatherstrip Replacement > Page 12036 Trunk / Liftgate Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Liftgate Wedge Replacement - Body Side Liftgate Wedge Replacement - Body Side Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Exterior Moulding / Trim > Cowl Moulding / Trim > System Information > Service and Repair > Air Inlet Screen Replacement Cowl Moulding / Trim: Service and Repair Air Inlet Screen Replacement Air Inlet Screen Replacement (Equinox) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Exterior Moulding / Trim > Cowl Moulding / Trim > System Information > Service and Repair > Air Inlet Screen Replacement > Page 12042 Cowl Moulding / Trim: Service and Repair Air Inlet Grille Panel Extension Replacement Air Inlet Grille Panel Extension Replacement (Equinox) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Fender > Front Fender > Front Fender Liner > System Information > Service and Repair Front Fender Liner: Service and Repair Front Wheelhouse Liner Replacement (Equinox) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Fender > Rear Fender > Rear Fender Liner > System Information > Service and Repair Rear Fender Liner: Service and Repair Rear Wheelhouse Panel Liner Replacement (Equinox) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Firewall > Component Information > Service and Repair Firewall: Service and Repair Plenum Upper Panel Replacement Removal Procedure Warning: Refer to Approved Equipment for Collision Repair Warning (See: Service Precautions/Technician Safety Information/Approved Equipment for Collision Repair Warning). 1. Disable the supplemental inflatable restraint (SIR) system. Refer to SIR Disabling and Enabling (See: Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming/Service and Repair). 2. Disconnect the negative battery cable. Refer to Battery Negative Cable Disconnection and Connection (See: Starting and Charging/Battery/Battery Cable/Negative/Service and Repair/Battery Negative Cable Disconnection and Connection). 3. Remove all related panels and components. 4. Repair as much of the damage as possible to factory specifications. Refer to Dimensions - Body (). 5. Note the location and remove the sealers and anti-corrosion materials from the repair area, as necessary. Refer to Anti-Corrosion Treatment and Repair (). Note: Do not damage any inner panels or reinforcements. 6. Locate and drill out all factory welds. Note the number and location of the welds for installation of the plenum top panel. 7. Remove the damaged plenum top panel. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Firewall > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 12055 Note: If the location of the original plug weld holes can not be determined, space the plug weld holes every 40 mm (1 1/2 in) apart. Some panels may have structural weld-thru adhesive. It is necessary to replace the weld-thru adhesive with an additional spot weld between each factory spot weld. 1. Drill 8 mm (5/16 in) plug weld holes in the service part as necessary in the locations noted from the original panel. 2. Prepare all mating surfaces as necessary. 3. Apply GM-approved Weld-Thru Coating or equivalent to all mating surfaces. Refer to Anti-Corrosion Treatment and Repair (). 4. Position the plenum top panel to the vehicle using 3-dimensional measuring equipment. Clamp the plenum top panel into place. 5. Plug weld accordingly. 6. Clean and prepare all welded surfaces. 7. Apply the sealers and anti-corrosion materials to the repair area, as necessary. Refer to Anti-Corrosion Treatment and Repair (). 8. Paint the repair area. Refer to Basecoat/Clearcoat Paint Systems (See: Paint, Striping and Decals/Paint/Application and ID/Basecoat/Clearcoat Paint Systems). 9. Install all related panels and components. 10. Connect the negative battery cable. Refer to Battery Negative Cable Disconnection and Connection (See: Starting and Charging/Battery/Battery Cable/Negative/Service and Repair/Battery Negative Cable Disconnection and Connection). 11. Enable the SIR system. Refer to SIR Disabling and Enabling (See: Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming/Service and Repair). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Service and Repair Front Subframe: Service and Repair Front Lower Control Arm Bracket Brace Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Service and Repair > Rear Support Replacement (AWD) Rear Subframe: Service and Repair Rear Support Replacement (AWD) Rear Support Replacement (AWD) Special Tools J-37043 - Park Brake Cable Release Tool Removal Procedure 1. Place the park brake lever in the release position. 2. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle (). 3. Remove the tires and wheels. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation (). 4. Remove the exhaust muffler. Refer to Exhaust Muffler Replacement (). 5. Disconnect the rear park brake cables from the park brake actuators. 6. Using the J-37043 release tool , remove the park brake cables from the mounting brackets 7. Position the rear park brake cables aside. 8. Disconnect the rear wheel speed sensor electrical connectors and routing clips from the rear support and upper control arms. Position the wiring harness aside. 9. Remove the rear brake hose bracket nut and bolt. Caution: Support the brake caliper with heavy mechanic wire, or equivalent, whenever it is separated from its mount and the hydraulic flexible brake hose is still connected. Failure to support the caliper in this manner will cause the flexible brake hose to bear the weight of the caliper, which may cause damage to the brake hose and in turn may cause a brake fluid leak. 10. Remove the brake calipers and brackets as assemblies and support them with heavy mechanics wire or equivalent. Refer to Rear Brake Caliper Bracket Replacement (). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Service and Repair > Rear Support Replacement (AWD) > Page 12065 11. Remove the rear park brake cable routing bolts from the trailing arms. 12. While holding the stabilizer link with a wrench, remove the stabilizer link-to-lower control arm nut. 13. Remove the trailing arms. Refer to Trailing Arm Replacement (). 14. Remove the adjustment links. Refer to Adjust Link Replacement (). 15. Remove the rear wheel drive shafts. Refer to Rear Wheel Drive Shaft Replacement (). 16. Remove the rear differential. Refer to Differential Replacement (). 17. Position a transmission jack under the rear support and firmly secure the support to the jack with straps. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Service and Repair > Rear Support Replacement (AWD) > Page 12066 18. Remove the 4 rear support to body bolts. 19. Remove the rear support assembly from the vehicle. 20. With the aid of an assistant, remove the rear support from the transmission jack and place it on the floor. Installation Procedure Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (). 1. If a new rear support is being installed, a transfer of components is necessary. * Upper Control Arms Tighten the upper control arm to rear support nut and bolt to 160 Nm (118 lb ft). * Lower Control Arms Tighten the lower control arm to rear support nut and bolt to 110 Nm (81 lb ft). * Stabilizer bar and insulators Tighten the stabilizer shaft insulator clamp bolts to 70 Nm (52 lb ft). Tighten the stabilizer link to stabilizer shaft nut to 57 Nm (42 lb ft). * Knuckles - Loosely install the upper and lower control arm to knuckle nuts/bolts. These fasteners will be tightened later in this procedure after the wheel driveshafts are installed. 2. With the aid of an assistant, position the rear support onto the transmission jack and firmly secure the support to the jack with straps. 3. Position the rear support assembly to the vehicle. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Service and Repair > Rear Support Replacement (AWD) > Page 12067 4. Install the 4 rear support to body bolts and tighten to 170 Nm (125 lb ft). 5. Install the rear differential. Refer to Differential Replacement (). 6. Install the rear wheel drive shafts. Refer to Rear Wheel Drive Shaft Replacement (). 7. Install the adjustment links. Refer to Adjust Link Replacement (). 8. Install the trailing arms. Refer to Trailing Arm Replacement (). 9. While holding the stabilizer link, install the stabilizer link-to-lower control arm nut and tighten to 15 Nm (11 lb ft). Caution: Support the brake caliper with heavy mechanic wire, or equivalent, whenever it is separated from its mount and the hydraulic flexible brake hose is still connected. Failure to support the caliper in this manner will cause the flexible brake hose to bear the weight of the caliper, which may cause damage to the brake hose and in turn may cause a brake fluid leak. 10. Remove the supporting wire and position the brake caliper and bracket assemblies back onto the knuckles. Refer to Rear Brake Caliper Bracket Replacement (). 11. Install the rear brake hose bracket nut and bolt and tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb in). 12. Position the wiring harness back to the original location, connect the routing clips to the rear support and upper control arms. Connect the rear wheel speed sensor electrical connectors. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Service and Repair > Rear Support Replacement (AWD) > Page 12068 13. Connect the rear park brake cables through the mounting brackets and onto the park brake actuators. 14. Install the rear park brake cable routing bolts to the trailing arms and tighten the bolts to 12 Nm (106 lb in). 15. Install the exhaust muffler. Refer to Exhaust Muffler Replacement (). 16. Install the tires and wheels. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation (). 17. Check the rear alignment. Refer to Wheel Alignment Measurement (). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Service and Repair > Rear Support Replacement (AWD) > Page 12069 Rear Subframe: Service and Repair Rear Support Replacement (FWD) Rear Support Replacement (FWD) Special Tools J-37043 - Park Brake Cable Release Tool Removal Procedure 1. Place the park brake lever in the release position. 2. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle (). 3. Remove the tires and wheels. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation (). 4. Remove the exhaust muffler. Refer to Exhaust Muffler Replacement (). 5. Remove the rear park brake cable routing bolts from the trailing arms. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Service and Repair > Rear Support Replacement (AWD) > Page 12070 6. Disconnect the rear park brake cables from the park brake actuators. 7. Using the J-37043 release tool , remove the park brake cables from the mounting brackets. 8. Position the rear park brake cables aside. 9. Disconnect the rear wheel speed sensor electrical connectors and the routing clips from the rear support and upper control arms. Position the wiring harness aside. 10. Remove the rear brake hose bracket nut and bolt. Caution: Support the brake caliper with heavy mechanic wire, or equivalent, whenever it is separated from its mount and the hydraulic flexible brake hose is still connected. Failure to support the caliper in this manner will cause the flexible brake hose to bear the weight of the caliper, which may cause damage to the brake hose and in turn may cause a brake fluid leak. 11. Remove the brake calipers and brackets as assemblies and support them with heavy mechanics wire or equivalent. Refer to Rear Brake Caliper Bracket Replacement (). 12. While holding the stabilizer link with a wrench, remove the stabilizer link-to-lower control arm nut. 13. Remove the trailing arms. Refer to Trailing Arm Replacement (). 14. Remove the adjustment links. Refer to Adjust Link Replacement (). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Service and Repair > Rear Support Replacement (AWD) > Page 12071 15. Remove the coil springs. Refer to Coil Spring Replacement (). 16. Position a transmission jack under the rear support and firmly secure the support to the jack with straps. 17. Remove the 4 rear support to body bolts. 18. Remove the rear support assembly from the vehicle. 19. With the aid of an assistant, remove the rear support from the transmission jack and place it on the floor. Installation Procedure Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (). 1. If a new rear support is being installed, a transfer of components is necessary. * Upper Control Arms Tighten the upper control arm to rear support nut and bolt to 160 Nm (118 lb ft). * Lower Control Arms Tighten the lower control arm to rear support nut and bolt to 110 Nm (81 lb ft). * Stabilizer bar and insulators Tighten the stabilizer shaft insulator clamp bolts to 70 Nm (52 lb ft). Tighten the stabilizer link to stabilizer shaft nut to 57 Nm (42 lb ft). * Knuckles - The lower control arm to knuckle bolt/nut will be installed and tightened when the coil spring is installed later in this procedure. Tighten upper control arm to knuckle bolt and nut to 160 Nm (118 lb ft). 2. With the aid of an assistant, position the rear support onto the transmission jack and firmly secure the support to the jack with straps. 3. Position the rear support assembly to the vehicle. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Service and Repair > Rear Support Replacement (AWD) > Page 12072 4. Install the 4 rear support to body bolts and tighten to 170 Nm (125 lb ft). 5. Install the coil springs. Refer to Coil Spring Replacement (). 6. Install the adjustment links. Refer to Adjust Link Replacement (). 7. Install the trailing arms. Refer to Trailing Arm Replacement (). 8. While holding the stabilizer link, install the stabilizer link-to-lower control arm nut and tighten to 15 Nm (11 lb ft). Caution: Support the brake caliper with heavy mechanic wire, or equivalent, whenever it is separated from its mount and the hydraulic flexible brake hose is still connected. Failure to support the caliper in this manner will cause the flexible brake hose to bear the weight of the caliper, which may cause damage to the brake hose and in turn may cause a brake fluid leak. 9. Remove the supporting wire and position the brake caliper and bracket assemblies back onto the knuckles. Refer to Rear Brake Caliper Bracket Replacement (). 10. Install the rear brake hose bracket nut and bolt and tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb in). 11. Position the wiring harness back to the original location, connect the routing clips to the rear support and upper control arms. Connect the rear wheel speed sensor electrical connectors. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Service and Repair > Rear Support Replacement (AWD) > Page 12073 12. Connect the rear park brake cables through the mounting brackets and onto the park brake actuators. 13. Install the rear park brake cable routing bolts to the trailing arms and tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb in). 14. Install the exhaust muffler. Refer to Exhaust Muffler Replacement (). 15. Install the tires and wheels. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation (). 16. Check the rear alignment. Refer to Wheel Alignment Measurement (). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Trailer Hitch > Component Information > Service and Repair Trailer Hitch: Service and Repair Trailer Hitch Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Grille > Component Information > Service and Repair > Radiator Lower Grille Replacement Grille: Service and Repair Radiator Lower Grille Replacement Radiator Lower Grille Replacement (Equinox) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Grille > Component Information > Service and Repair > Radiator Lower Grille Replacement > Page 12081 Grille: Service and Repair Radiator Lower Outer Grille Replacement Radiator Lower Outer Grille Replacement (Equinox) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Grille > Component Information > Service and Repair > Radiator Lower Grille Replacement > Page 12082 Grille: Service and Repair Radiator Upper Grille Replacement Radiator Upper Grille Replacement (Equinox) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Carpet > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Interior - Cleaning Interior Surfaces of Vehicle Carpet: Technical Service Bulletins Interior - Cleaning Interior Surfaces of Vehicle INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 06-00-89-029F Date: April 27, 2010 Subject: Interior Cleaning - Instrument Panel (IP), Hard or Plastic Surfaces, Seats, Carpet, Leather, Vinyl, Fabric Cleaner, Stain Remover, Restorer - Product Availability Models: 2006-2011 GM Passenger Cars and Trucks including Saturn (EXCLUDES Cadillac DTS Platinum and Escalade Platinum with RPO R9N - Tehama Leather) 2006-2010 HUMMER H2, H3 2006-2009 Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 06-00-89-029E (Section 00 - General Information). To keep the vehicle interior looking the best, it should be cleaned often. It is important to keep the upholstery from becoming heavily soiled. The vehicle's interior can experience extreme heat, which can cause stains to set quickly. Lighter color interiors may require more frequent cleaning. Care should be taken because newspapers and garments may transfer color to the vehicle's interior. Many of today's interiors are made with new low gloss materials. Permanent damage may result from using cleaners on ANY surfaces (interior trim, instrument panel, carpet, leather, vinyl and fabric) for which they are not intended. Using non-approved products can actually set the stain to the point that nothing can remove it. Important Do not use silicone or wax-based products or those containing organic solvents (such as naptha, alcohol, etc.) to clean your vehicle's interior because they can alter the appearance by increasing the gloss in a non-uniform manner. The increase in gloss may cause annoying reflections in the windshield and even make it difficult to see through the windshield under certain conditions. - Never use a STIFF brush or a brush that has been previously used with a harsh chemical. This can cause damage to the vehicle's interior surfaces. - Use only mild, Neutral-pH cleaners. Avoid laundry detergents or dishwashing soaps with degreasers. Using too much soap will leave residue that leaves streaks and attracts dirt. Because it is critical to use only mild, neutral-pH cleaners, General Motors has approved the use of the cleaners and conditioners listed in this bulletin for the cleaning of interiors. These products are in the neutral-pH range and will maintain the best vehicle interior appearance. These products are water-based, biodegradable, and do not contain bleach, solvents or harsh chemicals. Interior trim pieces on new vehicles, as well as service components, arrive with a protective film. When removing the protective film, adhesive residue may be left on the trim panels/components. The cleaner (for leather, vinyl, plastic and interior paint) is an effective cleaner in removing adhesive residue without causing damage to the component. Important - If soapy, alkaline cleaning solutions are used on fabrics, and not thoroughly rinsed out, the residual left in the fabric will attract dirt. Because the recommended cleaners/conditioners are in the pH neutral range, they won't leave behind soapy residue. - On heavily stained or difficult to clean fabric/carpet, it is recommended that the entire surface be treated and cleaned vs. spot cleaning. Refer to Extractor Machine and Concentrate section of this bulletin for more information. Effective cleaning steps for hard and/or plastic surfaces: 1. Using a clean towel, apply/spray cleaner - leather, vinyl, plastic, interior paint, directly onto the towel. 2. Wipe the surface with the towel/cleaner. 3. If necessary, use a soft bristle brush to work cleaner into the crevasses of the area being cleaned. 4. Wipe off any excess cleaner from the surface. 5. Using a clean towel, apply/spray the conditioner (leather, vinyl restorer) directly onto the towel. 6. Wipe the conditioner onto the previously cleaned area to restore the material to it's original luster. Important Today's interiors are developed and intended to have a low-gloss appearance. It is important to use only products which provide a low-gloss finish in order to maintain the interior's integrity, customer appeal and satisfaction. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Carpet > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Interior - Cleaning Interior Surfaces of Vehicle > Page 12088 Effective cleaning steps for fabric: 1. Remove any residue by lightly rubbing the surface with a clean towel. 2. Choose the appropriate stain remover based on the stain type. 3. Spray and lightly brush the area with a clean, soft bristle brush. 4. Gently blot up the stain. 5. On upholstery/carpet, the use of a fabric protector can help to reduce or eliminate future staining. Upholstery and Carpet Stains When cleaning upholstery and carpet stains ONLY, the following cleaning chart will help you determine which cleaner/formula works best on a particular stain. The chart lists many of the common stains. Some complex stains may require the application of both stain removers, one after the other, to remove both food-based oils and synthetic oils. A soft bristle brush (P/N 88861425) should be used to safely work the cleaner into the leather grain or material. This enables the dirt/stain to be completely removed from the material. Leather Conditioner/Restorer A Leather Conditioner/Restorer is also available. The restorer is safe for all vinyl and leather. It is a water-based product and contains essential emollients to restore suppleness, conditions and adds luster without adding gloss. The restorer will also provide protection against re-staining. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Carpet > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Interior - Cleaning Interior Surfaces of Vehicle > Page 12089 Dye Transfer: Dye transfer will happen any time a natural fiber like cotton, silk, wool, or suede comes into contact with leather. The lighter the leather color, the more quickly the dye transfer will appear. Leather should be cleaned on a regular basis so that the dirt and grime do not adversely affect the top coat of the leather. After cleaning the leather, it is important to treat the surface with the restorer. Extractor Machine and Concentrate For difficult to clean materials or when cleaning a large area, the best results will be achieved when using an extractor machine and concentrate. General Motors offers the Ruby Extractor (P/N 627-CC-3000AU) through GM Tools and Equipment 1-800-GM-TOOLS, and has recently released a concentrate for use with the extractor machine. Whichever extractor machine is used, it should meet the minimum specifications of the Ruby Extractor: Ruby Extractor Specifications: - Pump PSI: 55 - Water Lift: 85" - Hose Length: 10 ft Important The Ruby Extractor also comes with a 6 year Outer Body and 3 year Parts warranty. Extractor: The Ruby Extractor machine was designed for automotive use and works effectively in the vehicle's interior. The narrow design of the vacuum head allows detail work in tight areas. The water pressure pump is reduced so the fabric surface is not wet more than is necessary. The dry time is greatly reduced due to less water on the fabric surface, the vacuum head making better contact with the surface and the significant water lift capability of the machine. Concentrate: The concentrated extraction cleaner is engineered with lower pH levels to help remove alkaline buildup on fabrics. The concentrate should be mixed according to the instructions listed on the container. The available concentrate helps to break the stain down and then the stain is easily removed with less water. The concentrate used in the Ruby Extractor is slightly acidic to remove soap and alkalinity from the fabric surfaces left behind by using improper, soapy solutions. Dirt, grease and grime are more easily removed when the proper solution is used during the extraction process. Parts Information Products are available in two sizes; 8 oz / 235 ML and 24 oz / 710 ML bottles. Available Equipment Equipment is available by contacting 1-800-GMTOOLS. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Carpet > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Interior - Cleaning Interior Surfaces of Vehicle > Page 12090 Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Carpet > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Interior - Cleaning Interior Surfaces of Vehicle > Page 12091 Carpet: Technical Service Bulletins Interior - Proper Use of Floor Mats INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 10-08-110-001 Date: March 30, 2010 Subject: Information on Proper Use of Floor Mats Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (Including Saturn) 2003-2009 HUMMER H2 2006-2010 HUMMER H3, H3T 2005-2009 Saab 9-7X GM's carpeted and all-weather (rubber) floor mats are especially designed for use in specific GM vehicles. Using floor mats that were not designed for the specific vehicle or using them incorrectly may cause interference with the accelerator or brake pedal. Please review the following safety guidelines regarding proper driver's side floor mat usage with the customer. Warning If a floor mat is the wrong size or is not properly installed, it can interfere with the accelerator pedal and/or brake pedal. Interference with the pedals can cause unintended acceleration and/or increased stopping distance which can cause a crash and injury. Make sure the floor mat does not interfere with the accelerator or brake pedal. - Do not flip the driver's floor mat over (in an effort to keep the floor mat clean) - Do not place anything on top of the driver's floor mat (e.g. carpet remnant, towel) - Do not place another mat on top of the driver's floor mat (e.g. do not place all-weather rubber mats over carpeted floor mats) - Only use floor mats that are designed specifically for your vehicle - When using replacement mats, make certain the mats do not interfere with the accelerator or brake pedal before driving the vehicle If your vehicle is equipped with a floor mat retaining pin(s) or clip(s), make certain the mat is installed correctly and according to the instructions. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Carpet > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Interior - Cleaning Interior Surfaces of Vehicle > Page 12092 After installing floor mats, make certain they cannot move and do not interfere with the accelerator or brake pedals. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Carpet > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures Carpet: Procedures Eliminating Unwanted Odors in Vehicles Eliminating Unwanted Odors in Vehicles GM Vehicle Care Odor Eliminator, GM P/N 88861431 (Canadian P/N 88861436), may control or eliminate odors in the interior and luggage compartment areas of GM vehicles. This non-toxic, biodegradable, odorless product has been shown to greatly reduce or remove the following types of odor: * Objectionable smells of mold and mildew resulting from vehicle water leaks * Customer created odors, such as smoke You may safely use GM Vehicle Care Odor Eliminator on fabrics, vinyl, leather, carpet, and sound deadening materials. You may also induce this product into HVAC modules and instrument panel ducts for the control of non-bacterial related odors. Important: This product leaves no residual scent and should not be used as an air freshener. This product may result in the permanent elimination of an odor and may be preferable to customers whose allergies make them sensitive to perfumes. This product may effectively remove odors when directly contacting the odor source. In cases such as water leaks, use this product with diagnostic procedures to first eliminate the primary cause of the odor. Then use further applications on the residual odor to permanently correct the vehicle condition. How to Use this Product * Spray GM Vehicle Care Odor Eliminator directly or as an additive with carpet shampoo in steam cleaners. * Do not use on any interior surface that plain water would deteriorate, because this product will have the same effect. Also avoid letting this product come into contact with vinegar or any acidic substance. Acid-based products will hamper the effectiveness of GM Vehicle Care Odor Eliminator. * Complete eight page treatment sheets are enclosed within each case of GM Vehicle Care Odor Eliminator. These treatment instructions range from simple vehicle odor elimination to full step by step procedures for odor removal from water leaks. If lost, contact your dealership. * Instructions and cautions are printed on the bottle, but additional help is available. If you encounter a persistent or recurring odor, you may call to obtain additional information and usage suggestions. Drying Floor Carpet Floor Carpet Drying If the carpet or the pad or insulator is wet, use the following criteria for drying or for replacing the components: * For a 1-piece carpet assembly bonded to a cotton or a fiber padding, replace the entire assembly. * For a 2-piece carpet assembly with a cotton or a fiber padding, replace the padding only. While the carpet is out of the vehicle, dry the carpet using the method described below. * For a 1-piece carpet assembly bonded to a foam padding or attached to a synthetic padding, dry the carpet using the method described below. * For a 2-piece carpet assembly with a synthetic padding, dry the assembly using the method described below. * For a 1-piece carpet assembly with a separate cotton or a fiber padding, replace the cotton or fiber padding. While the carpet is out of the vehicle, dry the carpet using the method described below. Drying Method 1. If you observe puddles of liquid on the carpet face, use a wet vacuum to remove the excess moisture. 2. Blot the face of the carpet with a towel in order to absorb as much moisture as possible. 3. Point a fan at the affected area and air dry the carpet. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Carpet > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 12095 Carpet: Removal and Replacement Front Floor Panel Carpet Replacement Front Floor Panel Carpet Replacement Rear Side Door Opening Floor Carpet Retainer Replacement Rear Side Door Opening Floor Carpet Retainer Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Carpet > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 12096 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Console > Console Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams Console Lamp: Diagrams E28 Center Console Compartment Lamp (TSP or TSQ) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Console > Console Lamp > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Floor Console Flood Lamp Replacement Console Lamp: Service and Repair Front Floor Console Flood Lamp Replacement Front Floor Console Flood Lamp Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Console > Console Lamp > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Floor Console Flood Lamp Replacement > Page 12103 Console Lamp: Service and Repair Front Floor Console Armrest Compartment Lamp Replacement Front Floor Console Armrest Compartment Lamp Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Diagrams Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Diagrams P14 Passenger Air Bag Disable Indicator Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Diagrams > Page 12108 Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair SIR Disabling and Enabling SIR component location affects how a vehicle should be serviced. There are parts of the SIR system installed in various locations around a vehicle. To find the location of the SIR components refer to SIR Identification Views (See: Restraint Systems/Air Bag Systems/Locations). There are several reasons for disabling the SIR system, such as repairs to the SIR system or servicing a component near or attached to an SIR component. There are several ways to disable the SIR system depending on what type of service is being performed. The following information covers the proper procedures for disabling/enabling the SIR system. SIR Service Precautions Warning When performing service on or near the SIR components or the SIR wiring, the SIR system must be disabled. Failure to observe the correct procedure could cause deployment of the SIR components. Serious injury can occur. Failure to observe the correct procedure could also result in unnecessary SIR system repairs. The inflatable restraint sensing and diagnostic module (SDM) maintains a reserved energy supply. The reserved energy supply provides deployment power for the air bags if the SDM loses battery power during a collision. Deployment power is available for as much as 1 minute after disconnecting the vehicle power. Waiting 1 minute before working on the system after disabling the SIR system prevents deployment of the air bags from the reserved energy supply. General Service Instructions The following are general service instructions which must be followed in order to properly repair the vehicle and return it to its original integrity: * Do not expose air bags to temperatures above 65°C (149°F). * Verify the correct replacement part number. Do not substitute a component from a different vehicle. * Use only original GM replacement parts available from your authorized GM dealer. Do not use salvaged parts for repairs to the SIR system. Discard any of the following components if it has been dropped from a height of 92 cm (3 feet) or greater: * Inflatable restraint sensing and diagnostic module (SDM) * Any air bag * Driver steering wheel air bag coil * Any impact sensor * Seat belt anchor and/or retractor pretensioners * Passenger presence module and/or occupant sensor Disabling Procedure - Air Bag Fuse 1. Turn the steering wheel so that the vehicles wheels are pointing straight ahead. 2. Place the ignition in the OFF position. Note: The SDM may have more than one fused power input. To ensure there is no unwanted SIR deployment, personal injury, or unnecessary SIR system repairs, remove all fuses supplying power to the SDM. With all SDM fuses removed and the ignition switch in the ON position, the AIR BAG warning indicator illuminates. This is normal operation, and does not indicate a SIR system malfunction. 3. Locate and remove the fuse(s) supplying power to the SDM. Refer to SIR Schematics (See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Air Bag Systems) or Electrical Center Identification Views (See: Maintenance/Fuses and Circuit Breakers/Fuse/Application and ID). 4. Wait 1 minute before working on the system. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Diagrams > Page 12109 Enabling Procedure - Air Bag Fuse 1. Place the ignition in the OFF position. 2. Install the fuse(s) supplying power to the SDM. Refer to SIR Schematics (See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Air Bag Systems) or Electrical Center Identification Views (See: Maintenance/Fuses and Circuit Breakers/Fuse/Application and ID). 3. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position. The AIR BAG indicator will flash then turn OFF. 4. Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle if the AIR BAG warning indicator does not operate as described. Refer to Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle (See: Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle). Disabling Procedure - Negative Battery Cable 1. Turn the steering wheel so that the vehicles wheels are pointing straight ahead. 2. Place the ignition in the OFF position. 3. Disconnect the negative battery cable from the battery. Refer to Battery Negative Cable Disconnection and Connection (See: Starting and Charging/Battery/Battery Cable/Negative/Service and Repair/Battery Negative Cable Disconnection and Connection). 4. Wait 1 minute before working on system. Enabling Procedure - Negative Battery Cable 1. Place the ignition in the OFF position. 2. Connect the negative battery cable to the battery. Refer to Battery Negative Cable Disconnection and Connection (See: Starting and Charging/Battery/Battery Cable/Negative/Service and Repair/Battery Negative Cable Disconnection and Connection). 3. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position. The AIR BAG indicator will flash then turn OFF. 4. Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle if the AIR BAG warning indicator does not operate as described. Refer to Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle (See: Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Glove Compartment > Component Information > Service and Repair > Instrument Panel Center Compartment Replacement Glove Compartment: Service and Repair Instrument Panel Center Compartment Replacement Instrument Panel Center Compartment Replacement (Equinox) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Glove Compartment > Component Information > Service and Repair > Instrument Panel Center Compartment Replacement > Page 12114 Glove Compartment: Service and Repair Instrument Panel Center Compartment Bracket Replacement Instrument Panel Center Compartment Bracket Replacement (Equinox) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Glove Compartment > Component Information > Service and Repair > Instrument Panel Center Compartment Replacement > Page 12115 Glove Compartment: Service and Repair Instrument Panel Compartment Door Latch Replacement Instrument Panel Compartment Door Latch Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Glove Compartment > Component Information > Service and Repair > Instrument Panel Center Compartment Replacement > Page 12116 Glove Compartment: Service and Repair Instrument Panel Compartment Door Replacement Instrument Panel Compartment Door Replacement (Equinox) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Glove Compartment > Component Information > Service and Repair > Instrument Panel Center Compartment Replacement > Page 12117 Glove Compartment: Service and Repair Instrument Panel Compartment Door Dampener Replacement Instrument Panel Compartment Door Dampener Replacement (Equinox) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Headliner > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Headliner: > 08-08-67-016F > Jan > 11 > Body - Roof Panel Flutters/Rattle Noise When Doors Close Headliner: Customer Interest Body - Roof Panel Flutters/Rattle Noise When Doors Close TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 08-08-67-016F Date: January 24, 2011 Subject: Roof Panel Flutters or Rattle Noise from Roof or Headliner when Closing Doors (Apply Foam) Models: 2007-2009 Cadillac Escalade, Escalade ESV, Escalade EXT 2007-2009 Chevrolet Avalanche, Silverado (Crew Cab Models Only), Suburban, Tahoe 2010-2011 Chevrolet Equinox 2007-2009 GMC Sierra (Crew Cab Models Only), Yukon, Yukon Denali, Yukon XL, Yukon Denali XL 2010-2011 GMC Terrain Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2011 model year to Equinox/Terrain models. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 08-08-67-016E (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Condition Some customers may comment that the roof panel flutters and/or there is a rattle noise from the roof or headliner when closing one of the side doors or the liftgate. Cause This may be caused by the excessive motion of the roof panel. On initial inspection, you may notice that the roof panel expansion adhesive material has separated between the roof and the roof bow. The concern is seen mostly on the first cross bow. Correction Lower the headliner assembly (it is not usually necessary to remove the headliner from the vehicle) to gain access to the roof bows. Refer to Headlining Trim Panel Replacement in SI. Remove any loose foam from the roof bow or bows. Apply Fusor super flexible anti-flutter foam-fast set, Fusor P/N 121/124, or equivalent, in a continuous bead the entire length between the roof bow reinforcement and the roof outer panel. Reinstall the headliner. Refer to Headlining Trim Panel Replacement in SI. Parts Information Contact Lord Fusor at 1-877-275-5673 or on the Web at www.lord.com. Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Headliner > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Headliner: > 08-08-67-016F > Jan > 11 > Body - Roof Panel Flutters/Rattle Noise When Doors Close > Page 12126 Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Headliner > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Headliner: > 08-08-67-016F > Jan > 11 > Body - Roof Panel Flutters/Rattle Noise When Doors Close Headliner: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - Roof Panel Flutters/Rattle Noise When Doors Close TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 08-08-67-016F Date: January 24, 2011 Subject: Roof Panel Flutters or Rattle Noise from Roof or Headliner when Closing Doors (Apply Foam) Models: 2007-2009 Cadillac Escalade, Escalade ESV, Escalade EXT 2007-2009 Chevrolet Avalanche, Silverado (Crew Cab Models Only), Suburban, Tahoe 2010-2011 Chevrolet Equinox 2007-2009 GMC Sierra (Crew Cab Models Only), Yukon, Yukon Denali, Yukon XL, Yukon Denali XL 2010-2011 GMC Terrain Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2011 model year to Equinox/Terrain models. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 08-08-67-016E (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Condition Some customers may comment that the roof panel flutters and/or there is a rattle noise from the roof or headliner when closing one of the side doors or the liftgate. Cause This may be caused by the excessive motion of the roof panel. On initial inspection, you may notice that the roof panel expansion adhesive material has separated between the roof and the roof bow. The concern is seen mostly on the first cross bow. Correction Lower the headliner assembly (it is not usually necessary to remove the headliner from the vehicle) to gain access to the roof bows. Refer to Headlining Trim Panel Replacement in SI. Remove any loose foam from the roof bow or bows. Apply Fusor super flexible anti-flutter foam-fast set, Fusor P/N 121/124, or equivalent, in a continuous bead the entire length between the roof bow reinforcement and the roof outer panel. Reinstall the headliner. Refer to Headlining Trim Panel Replacement in SI. Parts Information Contact Lord Fusor at 1-877-275-5673 or on the Web at www.lord.com. Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Headliner > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Headliner: > 08-08-67-016F > Jan > 11 > Body - Roof Panel Flutters/Rattle Noise When Doors Close > Page 12132 Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Headliner > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 12133 Headliner: Service and Repair Headlining Trim Panel Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Headliner > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 12134 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Passenger Assist Handle > Component Information > Service and Repair > Roof Rail Front Assist Handle Replacement Passenger Assist Handle: Service and Repair Roof Rail Front Assist Handle Replacement Roof Rail Front Assist Handle Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Passenger Assist Handle > Component Information > Service and Repair > Roof Rail Front Assist Handle Replacement > Page 12139 Passenger Assist Handle: Service and Repair Roof Rail Rear Assist Handle Replacement Roof Rail Rear Assist Handle Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Scuff Plate > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Side Door Sill Trim Plate Replacement Scuff Plate: Service and Repair Front Side Door Sill Trim Plate Replacement Front Side Door Sill Trim Plate Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Scuff Plate > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Side Door Sill Trim Plate Replacement > Page 12144 Scuff Plate: Service and Repair Rear Side Door Sill Trim Plate Replacement Rear Side Door Sill Trim Plate Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Sun Visor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Sunshade Sun Visor: Service and Repair Sunshade Sunshade Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Sun Visor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Sunshade > Page 12149 Sun Visor: Service and Repair Sunshade Support Replacement Sunshade Support Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Body Hinge Pillar Trim Panel Replacement Trim Panel: Service and Repair Body Hinge Pillar Trim Panel Replacement Body Hinge Pillar Trim Panel Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Body Hinge Pillar Trim Panel Replacement > Page 12154 Trim Panel: Service and Repair Quarter Window Trim Finish Panel Replacement Quarter Window Trim Finish Panel Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Body Hinge Pillar Trim Panel Replacement > Page 12155 Trim Panel: Service and Repair Body Side Trim Panel Replacement - Left Side Body Side Trim Panel Replacement - Left Side Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Body Hinge Pillar Trim Panel Replacement > Page 12156 Trim Panel: Service and Repair Body Side Trim Panel Replacement - Right Side Body Side Trim Panel Replacement - Right Side Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Body Hinge Pillar Trim Panel Replacement > Page 12157 Trim Panel: Service and Repair Body Hinge Pillar Trim Panel Replacement Body Hinge Pillar Trim Panel Replacement Quarter Window Trim Finish Panel Replacement Quarter Window Trim Finish Panel Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Body Hinge Pillar Trim Panel Replacement > Page 12158 Body Side Trim Panel Replacement - Left Side Body Side Trim Panel Replacement - Left Side Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Body Hinge Pillar Trim Panel Replacement > Page 12159 Body Side Trim Panel Replacement - Right Side Body Side Trim Panel Replacement - Right Side Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Body Hinge Pillar Trim Panel Replacement > Page 12160 Center Pillar Lower Trim Panel Replacement Center Pillar Lower Trim Panel Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Body Hinge Pillar Trim Panel Replacement > Page 12161 Center Pillar Upper Trim Panel Replacement Center Pillar Upper Trim Panel Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Body Hinge Pillar Trim Panel Replacement > Page 12162 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Body Hinge Pillar Trim Panel Replacement > Page 12163 Liftgate Upper Trim Finish Panel Replacement Liftgate Upper Trim Finish Panel Replacement Rear End Trim Finish Panel Replacement Rear End Trim Finish Panel Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Body Hinge Pillar Trim Panel Replacement > Page 12164 Windshield Side Garnish Molding Replacement Windshield Side Garnish Molding Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Body Hinge Pillar Trim Panel Replacement > Page 12165 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Door Locks > Door Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Side Door Lock Opening Cover Replacement Door Lock Cylinder: Service and Repair Front Side Door Lock Opening Cover Replacement Front Side Door Lock Opening Cover Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Door Locks > Door Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Side Door Lock Opening Cover Replacement > Page 12172 Door Lock Cylinder: Service and Repair Front Side Door Lock Cylinder Rod Replacement Front Side Door Lock Cylinder Rod Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Door Locks > Door Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Side Door Lock Opening Cover Replacement > Page 12173 Door Lock Cylinder: Service and Repair Front Side Door Lock Cylinder Replacement Front Side Door Lock Cylinder Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Door Locks > Door Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Side Door Lock Opening Cover Replacement > Page 12174 Door Lock Cylinder: Service and Repair Rear Side Door Lock Cylinder Opening Cover Replacement Rear Side Door Lock Cylinder Opening Cover Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Door Locks > Door Lock Relay > Component Information > Locations Door Lock Relay: Locations Electrical Center Identification Views X50A Fuse Block - Underhood, Label Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Door Locks > Door Lock Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 12178 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Key > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Interior/Locks - Key Cutting Procedure Key: Technical Service Bulletins Interior/Locks - Key Cutting Procedure INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 09-00-89-029F Date: January 05, 2011 Subject: Key Cutting Procedure for Obtaining Replacement Key Models: 2010-2011 Buick LaCrosse 2011 Buick Regal 2010-2011 Chevrolet Camaro, Equinox 2011 Chevrolet Cruze, Volt 2010-2011 GMC Terrain 2008-2009 Pontiac G8 Attention: This bulletin applies to the United States and Canada only. Export dealers are to contact their local Technical Assistance Center (TAC) for further information. Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the Chevrolet Volt. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 09-00-89-029E (Section 00 - General Information). Due to the uniqueness of the ignition/door lock key, special equipment is required to cut a key. If you do not have the required equipment, you may order a cut/coded key through GM CC&A.; To obtain a replacement key, the following procedure is suggested: 1. Obtain the vehicle key code. U.S. Dealers: Access the "Key Code Look Up" application through GM GlobalConnect under the Parts Workbench. Canadian Dealers: Access the "KeyCode Look-Up" feature within the OEConnection D2DLink application. 2. Submit a part order through the GM CC&A; Parts System for a key blank. Be sure to include the key code in the "note" field of the order. 3. DO NOT ORDER AN UNCODED KEY AS YOU WILL RECEIVE A BLANK KEY THAT WILL REQUIRE CODING ON THE SPECIAL EQUIPMENT LISTED BELOW. Note The key code is five digits. Some vehicle records do not have the first digit displayed (i.e., vehicle records show the key code as "1234"). When ordering a cut/coded key, refer to the key code table. Important The order will be shipped the same day if received by 12:00 p.m. (noon) EST, or within 24 hours, Monday through Friday via FedEx (Canadian dealers should place their orders for these parts using a CSO order type only. Do not order using the CSO3 order type). Important The remote control transmitter and the key shank are not serviced separately. Important Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Key > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Interior/Locks - Key Cutting Procedure > Page 12183 If a key is received with an incorrect cut contact the SPAC department for assistance. Tip The new key and transmitter will need to be programmed to the vehicle. Refer to Key and Transmitter Programming in SI for details. Parts Information For part numbers and usage, refer to Key in Group 02.187 of the appropriate parts catalog. Important As an alternate to Step 2, the following equipment can be purchased through 1-800-GM-TOOLS or by visiting www.GMDEsolutions.com (U.S.) or www.des-canada.ca (Canada). General Motors highly recommends the use of the following key machines. General Motors has identified superior equipment through testing and evaluation. General Motors believes these sources and their equipment to be reliable. There may be additional manufacturers of such equipment. General Motors does not endorse, indicate any preference for or assume any responsibility for the equipment from these firms or for any such items which may be available for other sources. Equipment Information Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Key > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Interior/Locks - Key Cutting Procedure > Page 12184 Key: Technical Service Bulletins Locks - Key Code Security Rules and Information INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 10-00-89-010 Date: May 27, 2010 Subject: Key Code Security Rules and Information on GM KeyCode Look-Up Application (Canada Only) Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2009 and Prior Saturn and Saab 2002 and Prior Isuzu Attention: This bulletin has been created to address potential issues and questions regarding KeyCode security. This bulletin should be read by all parties involved in KeyCode activity, including dealer operator, partner security coordinator, sales, service and parts departments. A copy of this bulletin should be printed and maintained in the parts department for use as a reference. Important U.S. dealers should refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 10-00-89-009. Where Are Key Codes Located? General Motors provides access to KeyCodes through three sources when a vehicle is delivered to a dealer. Vehicle KeyCodes are located on the original vehicle invoice to the dealership. There is a small white bar coded tag sent with most new vehicles that also has the key code printed on it. Dealerships should make a practice of comparing the tag's keycode numbers to the keycode listed on the invoice. Any discrepancy should be reported immediately to the GM of Canada Key Code Inquiry Desk. Remember to remove the key tag prior to showing vehicles to potential customers. The third source for Key codes is through the GM KeyCode Look-Up feature within the OEConnection D2DLink application. KeyCode Look-Up currently goes back 17 previous model years from the current model year. When a vehicle is received by the dealership, care should be taken to safeguard the original vehicle invoice and KeyCode tag provided with the vehicle. Potential customers should not have access to the invoice or this KeyCode tag prior to the sale being completed. After a sale has been completed, the KeyCode information belongs to the customer and General Motors. Tip Only the original invoice contains key code information, a re-printed invoice does not. GM KeyCode Look-Up Application for GM of Canada Dealers All dealers should review the General Motors of Canada KeyCode Look-Up Policies and Procedures (Service Policy & Procedures Manual Section 3.1.6 "Replacement of VIN plates & keys"). Please note that the KeyCode Access site is restricted. Only authorized users should be using this application. Please see your Parts Manager for site authorized users. KeyCode Look-Up currently goes back 17 years from current model year. Important notes about security: - Users may not access the system from multiple computers simultaneously. - Users may only request one KeyCode at a time. - KeyCode information will only be available on the screen for 2 minutes. - Each user is personally responsible for maintaining and protecting their password. - Never share your password with others. - User Id's are suspended after 6 consecutive failed attempts. - User Id's are disabled if not used for 90 days. - Processes must be in place for regular dealership reviews. - The Parts Manager (or assigned management) must have processes in place for employee termination or life change events. Upon termination individuals access must be turned off immediately and access should be re-evaluated upon any position changes within the dealership. - If you think your password or ID security has been breached, contact Dealer Systems Support at 1-800-265-0573. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Key > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Interior/Locks - Key Cutting Procedure > Page 12185 Each user will be required to accept the following agreement each time the KeyCode application is used. Key Code User Agreement - Key codes are proprietary information belonging to General Motors Corporation and to the vehicle owner. - Unauthorized access to, or use of, key code information is unlawful and may subject the user to criminal and civil penalties. - This information should be treated as strictly confidential and should not be disclosed to anyone unless authorized. I will ensure that the following information is obtained prior to releasing any Key Code information: 1. Government issued picture ID (Drivers License) 2. Registration or other proof of ownership. Registration should have normal markings from the Province that issued the registration and possibly the receipt for payment recorded as well. Important - GM takes this agreement seriously. Each user must be certain of vehicle ownership before giving out key codes. - When the ownership of the vehicle is in doubt, dealership personnel should not provide the information. Key code requests should never be received via a fax or the internet and key codes should never be provided to anyone in this manner. A face to face contact with the owner of the vehicle is the expected manner that dealers will use to release a key code or as otherwise stipulated in this bulletin or other materials. - Key codes should NEVER be sent via a fax or the internet. - Each Dealership should create a permanent file to document all KeyCode Look Up transactions. Requests should be filed by VIN and in each folder retain copies of the following: - Government issued picture ID (Drivers License) - Registration or other proof of ownership. - Copy of the paid customer receipt which has the name of the employee who cut and sold the key to the customer. - Do not put yourself or your Dealership in the position of needing to "explain" a KeyCode Look Up to either GM or law enforcement officials. - Dealership Management has the ability to review all KeyCode Look-Up transactions. - Dealership KeyCode documentation must be retained for two years. Frequently Asked Questions (FAQs) for GM of Canada Dealers How do I request a KeyCode for customer owned vehicle that is not registered? Scrapped, salvaged or stored vehicles that do not have a current registration should still have the ownership verified by requesting the vehicle title, current insurance policy and / or current lien holder information from the customers financing source. If you cannot determine if the customer is the owner of the vehicle, do not provide the key code information. In these cases, a short description of the vehicle (scrapped, salvaged, etc.) and the dealership location should be kept on file. Any clarifying explanation should be entered into the comments field. How do I document a KeyCode request for a vehicle that is being repossessed? The repossessor must document ownership of the vehicle by providing a court ordered repossession order and lien-holder documents prior to providing key code information. Copies of the repossessors Drivers License and a business card should be retained by the dealership for documentation. What do I do if the registration information is locked in the vehicle? Every effort should be made to obtain complete information for each request. Each Dealership will have to decide on a case by case basis if enough information is available to verify the customer's ownership of the vehicle. Other forms of documentation include vehicle title, insurance policy, and or current lien information from the customers financing source. Dealership Management must be involved in any request without complete information. If you cannot determine if the customer is the owner of the vehicle, do not provide the key code information. Can I get a print out of the information on the screen? It is important to note that the Key Code Look Up Search Results contain sensitive and/or proprietary information. For this reason GM recommends against printing it. If the Search Results must be printed, store and/or dispose of the printed copy properly to minimize the risk of improper or illegal use. Who in the dealership has access to the KeyCode application? Dealership Parts Manager (or assigned management) will determine, and control, who is authorized to access the KeyCode Look Up application. However, we anticipate that dealership parts and service management will be the primary users of the application. The KeyCode Look Up application automatically tracks each user activity session. Information tracked by the system includes: User name, User ID, all other entered data and the date/time of access. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Key > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Interior/Locks - Key Cutting Procedure > Page 12186 What if I input the VIN incorrectly? If an incorrect VIN is entered into the system (meaning that the system does not recognize the VIN or that the VIN has been entered incorrectly) the system will return an error message. If I am an authorized user for the KeyCode application, can I access the application from home? Yes. What if I suspect key code misuse? Your dealership should communicate the proper procedures for requesting key codes. Any suspicious activity either within the dealership or externally should be reported to Dealer Systems Support at 1-800-265-0573 or GM of Canada Key Code Inquiry Desk at 1-905-644-4892. Whose key codes can I access through the system? At this time the following Canadian vehicle codes are available through the system: Chevrolet, Cadillac, Buick, Pontiac, GMC, HUMMER (H2 and H3 only), Oldsmobile, Saturn, Saab and Isuzu (up to 2002 model year) for a maximum of 17 model years. What should I do if I enter a valid VIN and the system does not produce any key code information? Occasionally, the KeyCode Look Up application may not produce a key code for a valid VIN. This may be the result of new vehicle information not yet available. In addition, older vehicle information may have been sent to an archive status. If you do not receive a key code returned for valid VIN, you should contact GM of Canada Key Code Inquiry Desk at 1-905-644-4892. How do I access KeyCodes if the KeyCode Look-up system is down? If the KeyCode Look-up system is temporarily unavailable, you can contact the original selling dealer who may have it on file or contact GM of Canada Key Code Inquiry Desk at 1-905-644-4892. If the customer is dealing with an emergency lock-out situation, you need to have the customer contact Roadside assistance, OnStar if subscribed, or 911. What should I do if the KeyCode from the look-up system does not work on the vehicle? On occasion a dealer may encounter a KeyCode that will not work on the vehicle in question. In cases where the KeyCode won't work you will need to verify with the manufacturer of the cutting equipment that the key has been cut correctly. If the key has been cut correctly you may be able to verify the proper KeyCode was given through the original selling dealer. When unable to verify the KeyCode through the original selling dealer contact GM of Canada Key Code Inquiry Desk at 1-905-644-4892. If the key has been cut correctly and the code given does not work, the lock cylinder may have been changed. In these situations following the proper SI document for recoding a key or replacing the lock cylinder may be necessary. How long do I have to keep KeyCode Records? Dealership KeyCode documentation must be retained for two years. Can I get a KeyCode changed in the Look-Up system? Yes, KeyCodes can be changed in the Look-Up system if a lock cylinder has been changed. Contact GM of Canada Key Code Inquiry Desk at 1-905-644-4892. What information do I need before I can provide a driver of a company fleet vehicle Keys or KeyCode information? The dealership should have a copy of the individual's driver's license, proof of employment and registration. If there is any question as to the customer's employment by the fleet company, the dealer should attempt to contact the fleet company for verification. If there is not enough information to determine ownership and employment, this information should not be provided. How do I document a request from an Independent Repair facility for a KeyCode or Key? The independent must provide a copy of their driver's license, proof of employment and signed copy of the repair order for that repair facility. The repair order must include customer's name, address, VIN, city, province and license plate number. Copies of this information must be included in your dealer KeyCode file. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Key > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Interior/Locks - Key Cutting Procedure > Page 12187 Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Diagrams Keyless Entry Module: Diagrams K77 Remote Control Door Lock Receiver Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 12192 Keyless Entry Module: Service and Repair Remote Control Door Lock Receiver Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Starting System > Keyless Start Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Keyless Start - 2-Way Advanced Remote Start Keyless Start Transmitter: Technical Service Bulletins Keyless Start - 2-Way Advanced Remote Start INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 09-00-89-025A Date: October 26, 2009 Subject: GM Accessories: 2-Way Advanced Remote Start Systems Part Information Models: 2007-2010 Buick Lucerne 2008-2010 Buick Enclave 2007-2010 Cadillac Escalade ESV, EXT 2008-2010 Cadillac DTS 2007-2009 Chevrolet Equinox, HHR 2007-2010 Chevrolet Avalanche, Cobalt, Silverado, Tahoe 2008-2010 Chevrolet Impala, Malibu 2009-2010 Chevrolet Traverse 2007-2010 GMC Acadia, Sierra, Yukon 2008-2010 HUMMER H2 2007-2009 Pontiac Torrent 2007-2010 Pontiac G5, G6 2008-2010 Pontiac G8 2010 Pontiac Solstice 2007-2010 Saturn AURA, OUTLOOK 2009-2010 Saturn VUE 2010 Saturn SKY Attention: This bulletin does not apply to GMODC dealers. Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add part numbers. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 09-00-89-025 (Section 00 - General Information). This bulletin is being published to provide information on locating service part numbers for GM Accessory, 2-Way Advanced Remote Start Systems. Dealers should consult the chart below and use the correct service part. Dealers should not use entire kit for warranty or repair work. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Starting System > Keyless Start Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Keyless Start - 2-Way Advanced Remote Start > Page 12198 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Starting System > Keyless Start Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Keyless Start - 2-Way Advanced Remote Start > Page 12199 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Starting System > Keyless Start Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Keyless Start - 2-Way Advanced Remote Start > Page 12200 Parts Information Service parts common to all 2-Way Advanced Remote Start Systems Transmitter Battery 12493150 Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Keyless Entry Transmitter: Diagram Information and Instructions Electrical Schematic Symbols Electrical Schematic Symbols Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12205 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12206 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12207 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12208 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12209 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12210 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12211 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12212 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12213 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12214 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12215 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12216 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12217 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12218 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12219 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12220 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12221 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12222 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12223 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12224 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12225 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12226 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12227 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12228 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12229 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12230 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12231 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12232 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12233 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12234 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12235 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12236 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12237 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12238 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12239 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12240 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12241 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12242 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12243 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12244 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12245 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12246 General Electrical Diagnosis General Electrical Diagnosis Basic Knowledge Required Without a basic knowledge of electricity, it will be difficult to use the diagnostic procedures contained in the service manual. You should understand the basic theory of electricity, and know the meaning of voltage (V), current (A), and resistance (Ohms ). You should also be able to read and understand a wiring diagram, as well as understand what happens in a circuit with an open or a shorted wire. Vehicle Zoning Strategy Vehicle Zoning Strategy All grounds, in-line connectors, and splices have identifying numbers that correspond to where they are located in the vehicle. The following table explains the numbering system. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12247 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12248 Keyless Entry Transmitter: Diagnostic Aids Arrows and Symbols Arrows and Symbols This service manual uses various symbols in order to describe different service operations. 1 - Front of Vehicle 2 - View Detail 2 - View Detail 3 - Ambient Air Mixed with Another Gas or Indicate Temperature Change 4 - Motion or Direction 5 - View Angle 6 - Dimension (1:2) 7 Ambient/Clean Air Flow or Cool Air Flow 8 - Lubrication Point - Oil or Fluid 9 - Task Related 10 Sectioning (1:3) 11 - Gas Other Than Ambient Air or Hot Air Flow 12 - Lubrication Point - Grease or Jelly 13 - Multidirectional Arrow Decimal and Metric Equivalents Decimal and Metric Equivalents Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12249 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12250 Checking Aftermarket Accessories Checking Aftermarket Accessories Warning: Refer to SIR Warning (See: Restraint Systems/Service Precautions/SIR Warning). Caution: The OBD II symbol is used on the circuit diagrams in order to alert the technician that the circuit is essential for proper OBD II emission control circuit operation. Any circuit which fails and causes the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) to turn ON, or causes emissions-related component damage, is identified as an OBD II circuit. Do not connect aftermarket accessories into the following circuits: * SIR circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the SIR symbol. * OBD II circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the OBD II symbol. Always check for aftermarket accessories (non-OEM) as the first step in diagnosing electrical problems. If the vehicle is so equipped, disconnect the system to verify that these add-on accessories are not the cause of the problems. Possible causes of vehicle problems related to aftermarket accessories include: * Power feeds connected to points other than the battery * Antenna location * Transceiver wiring located too close to vehicle electronic modules or wiring * Poor shielding or poor connectors on antenna feed line * Check for recent service bulletins detailing installation guidelines for aftermarket accessories. Circuit Testing Circuit Testing The Circuit Testing section contains the following diagnostic testing information. Using this information along with the diagnostic procedures will identify the cause of the electrical malfunction. * Using Connector Test Adapters (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Using Connector Test Adapters) * Probing Electrical Connectors (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Probing Electrical Connectors) * Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12251 Procedures/Circuit Testing/Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter) * Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp) * Using Fused Jumper Wires (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Using Fused Jumper Wires) * Measuring Voltage (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Measuring Voltage) * Measuring Voltage Drop (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Measuring Voltage Drop) * Measuring Frequency (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Measuring Frequency) * Testing Ground and Low Reference Circuits (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Testing Ground and Low Reference Circuits) * Testing for Continuity (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Continuity) * Testing for Short to Ground (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Short to Ground) * Testing for a Short to Voltage (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for a Short to Voltage) * Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections) * Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions) * Testing for Electrical Intermittents (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Electrical Intermittents) * Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure) * Circuit Protection - Fuses (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Circuit Protection - Fuses) * Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers) * Circuit Protection - Fusible Links (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Circuit Protection - Fusible Links) Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp Special Tools EL-35616-200 - Test Light - Probe Kit For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test Probe Caution). A test lamp can simply and quickly test a low impedance circuit for voltage. A Digital Multimeter (DMM) should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present if the impedance is low enough, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. In other words, if there is not enough current, the test lamp will not illuminate even though voltage is present. The EL-35616-200 - kit is Micro-Pack compatible and comprised of a 12-volt light bulb with an attached pair of leads. To properly operate this tool use the following procedures. When testing for voltage: 1. Attach one lead to ground. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is voltage at the point being tested. When testing for ground: 1. Attach one lead to battery positive voltage. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where ground should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is ground at the point being tested. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12252 Testing for a Short to Voltage Testing for a Short to Voltage Special Tools EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM) For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test Probe Caution). The following procedure tests for a short to voltage in a circuit. 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Set the rotary dial of the Digital Multimeter (DMM) to the V (DC) position. 4. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. Turn ON the ignition and operate all accessories. 7. If the voltage measured is greater than 1 V, there is a short to voltage in the circuit. Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions Special Tools J-25070 - Heat Gun For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Many intermittent open or shorted circuits are affected by harness/connector movement that is caused by vibration, engine torque, bumps/rough pavement, etc. In order to duplicate the customer's concern, it may be necessary to manipulate the wiring harness if the malfunction appears to be vibration related. Manipulation of a circuit can consist of a wide variety of actions, including: * Wiggling the harness * Disconnecting a connector and reconnecting * Stressing the mechanical connection of a connector * Pulling on the harness or wire in order to identify a separation/break inside the insulation * Relocating a harness or wires All these actions should be performed with some goal in mind. For instance, with a scan tool connected, wiggling the wires may uncover a faulty input to the control module. The snapshot option would be appropriate here. Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure). Another option is, with the component commanded ON and OFF by the scan tool, move related connectors and wiring and observe the component operation. With the engine running, move related connectors and wiring while monitoring engine operation. If harness or connector movement affects the data displayed, component/system operation, or engine operation, inspect and repair the harness/connections as necessary. You may need to load the vehicle in order to duplicate the concern. This may require the use of weights, floor jacks, jackstands, frame machines, etc. In these cases you are attempting to duplicate the concern by manipulating the suspension or frame. This method is useful in finding harnesses that are too short and their connectors pull apart enough to cause a poor connection. A DMM set to Peak Min/Max mode and connected to the suspect circuit while testing can yield desirable results. Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Electrical Intermittents). Certainly, using the senses of sight, smell, and hearing while manipulating the circuit can provide good results as well. There may be instances where circuit manipulation alone will not meet the required criteria for the fault condition to appear. In such cases it may be necessary to expose the suspect circuit to other conditions while manipulating the harness. Such conditions would include high moisture conditions, along with exceptionally high or low temperatures. The following discusses how to expose the circuit to these kinds of conditions. Salt Water Spray Some compounds possess the ability to conduct electricity when dissolved in water such as ordinary salt. By mixing table salt with water in sufficient Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12253 quantities, you can enhance the conductive properties of water so that any circuit which may be sensitive to moisture will more readily fail when liberally sprayed with this mixture. Mixing 0.35L (12 oz) of water with approximately 1 tablespoon of salt will yield a salt solution of 5 percent. Fill a normal spray bottle with this mixture. This mixture is sufficient to enhance the water's own conductivity. This may cause the circuit to fail more easily when sprayed. Once the mixture is completed, spray the suspect area liberally with the solution. Then, while monitoring either a scan tool or DMM, manipulate the harness as discussed previously. High Temperature Conditions If the complaint tends to be heat related, you can simulate the condition using the J-25070 - heat gun. Using the heat gun, you can heat up the suspected area or component. Manipulate the harnesses under high temperature conditions while monitoring the scan tool or DMM to locate the fault condition. The high temperature condition may be achieved simply by test driving the vehicle at normal operating temperature. If a heat gun is unavailable, consider this option to enhance your diagnosis. This option does not allow for the same control, however. Low Temperature Conditions Depending on the nature of the fault condition, placing a fan in front of the vehicle while the vehicle is in the shade can have the desired effect. If this is unsuccessful, use local cooling treatments such as ice or a venturi type nozzle (one that provides hot or cold air). This type of tool is capable of producing air stream temperatures down to -18°C (0°F) from one end and +71°C (160°F) from the other. This is ideally suited for localized cooling needs. Once the vehicle, component, or harness has been sufficiently cooled, manipulate the harness or components in an effort to duplicate the concern. Duplicating Failure Conditions * If none of the previous tests are successful, attempt to duplicate and/or capture the failure conditions. * Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, where applicable, contains the conditions that were present when the DTC set. 1. Review and record Freeze Frame/Failure Records data. 2. Clear the DTCs using the scan tool. 3. Turn the key to OFF and wait 15 seconds. 4. Operate the vehicle under the same conditions that were noted in Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, as closely as possible. The vehicle must also be operating within the Conditions for Running the DTC. Refer to Conditions for Running the DTC in the supporting text if a DTC is being diagnosed. 5. Monitor DTC Status for the DTC being tested. The scan tool will indicate Ran, when the enabling conditions have been satisfied long enough for the DTC to run. The scan tool will also indicate whether the DTC passed or failed. * An alternate method is to drive the vehicle with the DMM connected to a suspected circuit. An abnormal reading on the DMM when the concern occurs, may help you locate the concern. Measuring Frequency Measuring Frequency Special Tools EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM) For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test Probe Caution). The following procedure determines the frequency of a signal. Note: Connecting the Digital Multimeter (DMM) to the circuit before pressing the Hz button will allow the DMM to autorange to an appropriate range. 1. Apply power to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (AC) position. 3. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12254 5. Press the Hz button on the DMM. 6. The DMM will display the frequency measured. Measuring Voltage Measuring Voltage Special Tools EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM) For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test Probe Caution). The following procedure measures the voltage at a selected point in a circuit. 1. Disconnect the electrical harness connector for the circuit being tested, if necessary. 2. Enable the circuit and/or system being tested. Use the following methods: * Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. * Turn ON the engine. * Turn ON the circuit and/or system with a scan tool in Output Controls. * Turn ON the switch for the circuit and/or system being tested. 3. Select the V (AC) or V (DC) position on the Digital Multimeter (DMM). 4. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the point of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. The DMM displays the voltage measured at that point. Measuring Voltage Drop Measuring Voltage Drop Special Tools EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM) For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test Probe Caution). The following procedure determines the difference in voltage potential between 2 points. 1. Set the rotary dial of the Digital Multimeter (DMM) to the V (DC) position. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12255 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to one point of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to the other point of the circuit. 4. Operate the circuit. 5. The DMM displays the difference in voltage between the 2 points. Probing Electrical Connectors Probing Electrical Connectors Note: Always be sure to reinstall the connector position assurance (CPA) and terminal position assurance (TPA) when reconnecting connectors or replacing terminals. Front probe Disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the mating side (front) of the connector. Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test Probe Caution). Note: When probing female 0.64 terminals, it is important to use the correct adapter. There have been some revisions to the test adapter for 0.64 terminals. The proper adapter for 0.64 terminals is the EL-35616-64B which has a gold terminal and a black wire between the base and tip. Failure to use the proper test adapter may result in damage to the terminal being tested and improper diagnosis. Note: The proper adapter for probing the terminals for fuses, relays, or diodes in an electrical center is EL-35616-35. Using any other tool or adapter may damage the terminal being tested. Refer to the following table as a guide in selecting the correct test adapter for front probing connectors: Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12256 Backprobe Note: * Backprobe connector terminals only when specifically required in diagnostic procedures. * Do not backprobe a sealed (Weather Pack(R)) connector, less than a 280 series Metri-Pack connector, a Micro-Pack connector, or a flat wire (dock and lock) connector. * Backprobing can be a source of damage to connector terminals. Use care in order to avoid deforming the terminal, either by forcing the test probe too far into the cavity or by using too large of a test probe. * After backprobing any connector, inspect for terminal damage. If terminal damage is suspected, test for proper terminal contact. Do not disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the harness side (back) of the connector. Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure Using Snapshots in Global Diagnostic System (GDS) Overview Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12257 A snapshot is a recording of what a control module on the vehicle was receiving for information while the snapshot is being made. A snapshot may be used to analyze the data during the time a vehicle condition is current. This allows you to concentrate on making the condition occur, rather than trying to view all the data in anticipation of the fault. To record a snapshot in GDS, select, Record Snapshot, from the options at the top right portion of any of the various pages that allow snapshots to be taken (e.g. Data Display, Control Functions, etc.). When you are finished recording, select, Stop Snapshot recording. The snapshot will now be available for replay. Snapshot Replay The Snapshot Replay function allows reviews of previously recorded vehicle snapshot data. This information can be used in analysis of vehicle problems and detection of trigger error conditions. The graph function can be used to compare parameters to see if a component is functioning properly. Recorded snapshots can be selected for viewing by the following three methods: * Selecting a snapshot file from the Vehicle Home Page and clicking on the Review selection. * Double clicking on the selected snapshot from the Vehicle Home Page. * Entering the Tools selection from the Menu selection and selecting Snapshot replay. Next, open the Snapshot Manager. Double click on the snapshot file you wish to view or click on the Load Snapshot selection and select a snapshot file. Regardless of selection method, a File Loaded pop-up window will be displayed from the Snapshot Replay screen. Select OK from the pop-up window. Snapshot Play Functions There are several snapshot play functions that are used to replay recorded snapshots * The Play function is used to play the snapshot forward by clicking on this selection. A marker will move across the screen when this selection is used. All selections in this area turn grey when they are active. * The Pause function is used to pause play of the snapshot. When this selection is clicked a second time the snapshot will start playing where it left off. * The Stop function is used to stop playing the snapshot. The snapshot will start from the beginning, if Play is selected after using the Stop function. Time Control Time control is used to control the snapshot replay. This function allows selection of a specific time frame, display of different views, and control of display speed. The following functions can be selected directly under Time Control. * The Bookmark selection allows you to add a specific comment in the current display and return to this point in the future. When this option is selected, a pop-up window is displayed. Enter a bookmark name and select OK. * The Note Pad can be selected to add comments to the snapshot replay file at the current point of time. When this option is selected, a pop-up window is displayed. Enter a comment for the snapshot file and select OK. * The Load Snapshot (blue folder) opens a snapshot file and makes it ready for further analysis. This function is also available by clicking on an available snapshot file from the Snapshot Manager. * The Down Arrow displays all Time Control options when selected. Individual options can also be selected by clicking on the item you want. * The Snapshot Display Speed can be controlled by selecting this option. Slow speeds of 1/8X, 1/4X, and 1/2X can be selected. The real time speed can also be selected at 1. Faster speeds of 2X, 4X, and 8X can also be obtained by using this selection. View Selections Each View Selection provides a different way of displaying vehicle data for analysis. The following functions can be selected under Available Views: Note: The parameter name will be shown in the original language used for capture if no translation is available for the name. * Parameter List View - Displays incoming information from the snapshot file. The current value of the parameters is displayed on the screen. * Log View - Contains all the information from the snapshot file. All parameter values are listed in the order they were recorded. Specific parameters can be added or removed from a watchlist by clicking on the appropriate item. * State View - Shows the values of all parameters in a specific time frame. These values can be used for comparison with the trigger view. * Trigger View - Displays all system and user defined triggers. This function can be used when there is a combination of factors involved in a diagnostic problem. When a Trigger condition is met a caution triangle will be displayed on the screen. Triggers: * Load Triggers - Allows you to load a file containing trigger definitions. * Save Triggers - Allows you to save the trigger to your computer's hard drive. * Remove Trigger - Allows you to remove the current trigger. It will no longer be present. * Edit Trigger - Displays a pop-up window where you can modify the limits and parameters contained within a trigger. * Adds Trigger - Displays a pop-up window to configure a trigger. * DTC View - After the Play function is selected and this option is selected this function opens the list of recorded DTCs. * Line Graph View - Displays data that can be visualized against the time-axis. From this view, specific parameters can be selected for graphing by Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12258 checking the box under Selected. At the bottom of the graph there are four functions Zoom In (increase size), Zoom Out (decrease size), Bookmarks, and Pause Scrolling. Each of these functions can be accessed by clicking on them. Testing for Continuity Testing for Continuity Special Tools EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM) For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test Probe Caution). The following procedures verify good continuity in a circuit. With a Digital Multimeter (DMM) 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the Ohms position. 2. Disconnect the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 3. Disconnect the load. 4. Press the MIN MAX button on the DMM. 5. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 6. Connect the other lead of the DMM to the other end of the circuit. 7. If the DMM displays low or no resistance, the circuit has good continuity. With a Test Lamp Note: Only use the test lamp procedure on low impedance power and ground circuits. 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect one lead of the test lamp to one end of the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 5. Connect the other end of the circuit to ground. 6. If the test lamp illuminates (full intensity), then the circuit has good continuity. Testing for Electrical Intermittents Testing for Electrical Intermittents Special Tools EL-39200 Digital Multimeter For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Perform the following procedures while wiggling the harness from side to side. Continue this at convenient points (about 6 inches apart) while watching the test equipment. * Testing for Short to Ground (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Short to Ground) * Testing for Continuity (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Continuity) * Testing for a Short to Voltage (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for a Short to Voltage) If the fault is not identified, perform the procedure below using the MIN MAX feature on the EL-39200 DMM. This feature allows you to manipulate the circuit without having to watch the EL-39200. The EL-39200 will generate an audible tone when a change is detected. Note: The EL-39200 must be used in order to perform the following procedure since the EL-39200 can monitor current, resistance or voltage while recording the minimum (MIN), and maximum (MAX) values measured. 1. Connect the EL-39200 to both sides of a suspected connector (still connected), or from one end of a suspected circuit to the other. Refer to Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12259 Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter) for information on connecting the EL-39200 to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the EL-39200 to the V (AC) or V (DC) position. 3. Press the range button of the EL-39200 in order to select the desired voltage range. 4. Press the MIN MAX button of the EL-39200. The EL-39200 displays 100 ms RECORD and emits an audible tone (beep). Note: The 100 ms RECORD mode is the length of time an input must stay at a new value in order to record the full change. 5. Simulate the condition that is potentially causing the intermittent connection, either by wiggling the connections or the wiring, test driving, or performing other operations. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions). 6. Listen for the audible Min Max Alert which indicates that a new minimum or maximum value has been recorded. 7. Press the MIN MAX button once in order to display the MAX value and note the value. 8. Press the MIN MAX button again in order to display the MIN value and note the value. 9. Determine the difference between the MIN and MAX values. * If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is 1 V or greater an intermittent open or high resistance condition exists. Repair the condition as necessary. * If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is less than 1 V, an intermittent open or high resistance condition does not exist. Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections Special Tools EL-35616 Terminal Test Probe Kit For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). When the condition is not currently present, but is indicated in DTC history, the cause may be intermittent. An intermittent may also be the cause when there is a customer complaint, but the symptom cannot be duplicated. Refer to the Symptom Table of the system that is suspect of causing the condition before trying to locate an intermittent condition. Most intermittent conditions are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. Inspect for the following items: * Wiring broken inside the insulation * Poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector * Poor terminal to wire connection-Some conditions which fall under this description are poor crimps, poor solder joints, crimping over the wire insulation rather than the wire itself, and corrosion in the wire to terminal contact area, etc. * Pierced or damaged insulation can allow moisture to enter the wiring causing corrosion. The conductor can corrode inside the insulation, with little visible evidence. Look for swollen and stiff sections of wire in the suspect circuits. * Wiring which has been pinched, cut, or its insulation rubbed through may cause an intermittent open or short as the bare area touches other wiring or parts of the vehicle. * Wiring that comes in contact with hot or exhaust components * Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions) in order to duplicate the conditions required, in order to verify the customer concern. * Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Electrical Intermittents) for test procedures to detect intermittent open, high resistance, short to ground, and short to voltage conditions. * Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure) for advanced intermittent diagnosis and Vehicle Data Recorder operation. Testing for Terminal Fretting Some intermittent conditions can be caused by wire terminal fretting corrosion. Fretting corrosion is a build-up of insulating, oxidized wear debris that can form when there is a small motion between electrical contacts. The oxidized wear debris can pile up enough at the electrical contact spots that the electrical resistance across the connection increases. Movement between the contacting surfaces as small as 10 to 100 microns can cause fretting. To put this in perspective, a sheet of paper is about 100 microns thick, so fretting motion is small and hard to see. Vibration and thermal expansion/contraction are the main sources that create fretting motion. Since vehicles vibrate and can experience large temperature swings, they are a good source for fretting motion. Tin, copper, nickel, and iron surfaces are all susceptible to fretting corrosion. Fretting corrosion can be difficult to see but it looks like small, dark smudges on the terminals contact surface. To correct a fretting condition disconnect the suspect connector and add Nyogel lubricant 760G (dielectric grease) to both sides of the connector Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12260 terminals. Then reconnect the connector and wipe away any excess lubricant. This will correct the additional terminal contact resistance due to the terminal fretting corrosion. Testing for Proper Terminal Contact It is important to test terminal contact at the component and any inline connectors before replacing a suspect component. Mating terminals must be inspected to ensure good terminal contact. A poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector may be the result of contamination or deformation. Contamination may be caused by the connector halves being improperly connected. A missing or damaged connector seal, damage to the connector itself, or exposing the terminals to moisture and dirt can also cause contamination. Contamination, usually in the underhood or underbody connectors, leads to terminal corrosion, causing an open circuit or intermittently open circuit. Deformation is caused by probing the mating side of a connector terminal without the proper adapter. Always use the EL-35616 when probing connectors. Other causes of terminal deformation are improperly joining the connector halves, or repeatedly separating and joining the connector halves. Deformation, usually to the female terminal contact tang, can result in poor terminal contact causing an open or intermittently open circuit. Testing for Proper Terminal Contact in Bussed Electrical Centers It is very important to use the correct test adapter when testing for proper terminal contact of fuses and relays in a bussed electrical center. Use EL-35616-35 to test for proper terminal contact. Failure to use EL-35616-35 can result in improper diagnosis of the bussed electrical center. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact: 1. Separate the connector halves. 2. Visually inspect the connector halves for contamination. Contamination may result in a white or green build-up within the connector body or between terminals. This causes high terminal resistance, intermittent contact, or an open circuit. An underhood or underbody connector that shows signs of contamination should be replaced in its entirety: terminals, seals, and connector body. 3. Using an equivalent male terminal / terminated lead, verify that the retention force is significantly different between a known good terminal and the suspect terminal. Replace the female terminal in question. Flat Wire (Dock and Lock) Connectors There are no serviceable parts for flat wire (dock and lock) connectors on the harness side or the component side. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact: 1. Remove the component in question. 2. Visually inspect each side of the connector for signs of contamination. Avoid touching either side of the connector as oil from your skin may be a source of contamination as well. 3. Visually inspect the terminal bearing surfaces of the flat wire circuits for splits, cracks, or other imperfections that could cause poor terminal contact. Visually inspect the component side connector to ensure that all of the terminals are uniform and free of damage or deformation. 4. Insert the appropriate adapter from the on the flat wire harness connector in order to test the circuit in question. Control Module/Component Voltage and Grounds Poor voltage or ground connections can cause widely varying symptoms. * Test all control module voltage supply circuits. Many vehicles have multiple circuits supplying voltage to a control module. Other components in the system may have separate voltage supply circuits that may also need to be tested. Inspect connections at the module/component connectors, fuses, and any intermediate connections between the voltage source and the module/component. A test lamp or a DMM may indicate that voltage is present, but neither tests the ability of the circuit to carry sufficient current. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. Refer to Circuit Testing (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Circuit Testing) and Power Distribution Schematics (See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Starting and Charging/Power and Ground Distribution/System Diagram/Power Distribution Schematics). * Test all control module ground and system ground circuits. The control module may have multiple ground circuits. Other components in the system may have separate grounds that may also need to be tested. Inspect grounds for clean and tight connections at the grounding point. Inspect the connections at the component and in splice packs, where applicable. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. Refer to Circuit Testing (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Circuit Testing) and Ground Distribution Schematics (See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Starting and Charging/Power and Ground Distribution/System Diagram/Ground Distribution Schematics). Temperature Sensitivity * An intermittent condition may occur when a component/connection reaches normal operating temperature. The condition may occur only when the component/connection is cold, or only when the component/connection is hot. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12261 * Freeze Frame, Failure Records, Snapshot, or Vehicle Data Recorder data may help with this type of intermittent condition, where applicable. * If the intermittent is related to heat, review the data for a relationship with the following: - High ambient temperatures - Underhood/engine generated heat - Circuit generated heat due to a poor connection, or high electrical load - Higher than normal load conditions, towing, etc. * If the intermittent is related to cold, review the data for the following: - Low ambient temperatures-In extremely low temperatures, ice may form in a connection or component. Inspect for water intrusion. - The condition only occurs on a cold start. - The condition goes away when the vehicle warms up. * Information from the customer may help to determine if the trouble follows a pattern that is temperature related. * If temperature is suspected of causing an intermittent fault condition, attempt to duplicate the condition. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions) in order to duplicate the conditions required. Electromagnetic Interference and Electrical Noise Some electrical components/circuits are sensitive to electromagnetic interference or other types of electrical noise. Inspect for the following conditions: * A misrouted harness that is too close to high voltage/high current devices such as secondary ignition components, motors, generator etc.-These components may induce electrical noise on a circuit that could interfere with normal circuit operation. * Electrical system interference caused by a malfunctioning relay, or a control module driven solenoid or switch-These conditions can cause a sharp electrical surge. Normally, the condition will occur when the malfunctioning component is operating. * Improper installation of non-factory or aftermarket add on accessories such as lights, 2-way radios, amplifiers, electric motors, remote starters, alarm systems, cell phones, etc.-These accessories may lead to interference while in use, but do not fail when the accessories are not in use. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Checking Aftermarket Accessories). * Test for an open diode across the A/C compressor clutch and for other open diodes. Some relays may contain a clamping diode. * The generator may be allowing AC noise into the electrical system. Incorrect Control Module * There are only a few situations where reprogramming a control module is appropriate: - A new service control module is installed. - A control module from another vehicle is installed. - Revised software/calibration files have been released for this vehicle. Note: DO NOT re-program the control module with the SAME software/calibration files that are already present in the control module. This is not an effective repair for any type of concern. * Verify that the control module contains the correct software/calibration. If incorrect programming is found, reprogram the control module with the most current software/calibration. Refer to Control Module References (See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning) for replacement, setup, and programming. Testing for Short to Ground Testing for Short to Ground Special Tools * EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM) * EL 35616-200 - Test Light-Probe Kit For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test Probe Caution). The following procedures test for a short to ground in a circuit. With a Digital Multimeter (DMM) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12262 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the Ohms position. 4. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the other lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. If the DMM does NOT display infinite resistance (OL), there is a short to ground in the circuit. With a Test Lamp 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect one lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to one end of the circuit to be tested. 5. If the test lamp illuminates, there is a short to ground in the circuit. Fuse Powering Several Loads 1. Review the system schematic and locate the fuse that is open. 2. Open the first connector or switch leading from the fuse to each load. 3. Connect a DMM across the fuse terminals (be sure that the fuse is powered). * When the DMM displays voltage the short is in the wiring leading to the first connector or switch. * If the DMM does not display voltage refer to the next step. 4. Close each connector or switch until the DMM displays voltage in order to find which circuit is shorted. Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter Special Tools EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM) For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test Probe Caution). Digital Multimeter (DMM) Basic Requirements Service information is validated using digital multimeters that meet or exceed the following requirements. Using a multimeter that does not meet these basic requirements may give inaccurate readings which could lead to an incorrect diagnosis. Display and Settings 1. Four digits displayed 2. Voltage, amperage, resistance, frequency, diode test settings, and min-max function 3. Display positive and negative values Voltage 1. Have at least 10 Mohm input impedance 2. Test a DC voltage range of 0.1-1000 V. 3. Test an AC voltage range of 0.1-1000 V. Amperage 1. Test a DC amperage range of 0.1µA-10 A. 2. Test an AC amperage range of 0.1µA-10 A. Resistance Test a resistance range of 0.1 ohm-40 Mohm and displays infinite for a value greater than 40 Mohm (O.L. (Over-load)) Frequency Test for a frequency range of 0.5 HZ-199 K HZ Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12263 Diode Test 1. Apply at least 1 mA when performing the diode bias test 2. Display the break over voltage drop (0-3 V) of a forward biased diode 3. Display infinite (O.L. (Over-load)) when a diode is reverse biased Min-Max Readings 1. Can update at a 1 ms sample rate 2. Saves and displays minimum and maximum values Note: Circuits which include any solid state control modules, such as the engine control module (ECM), should only be tested with a 10 MOhms or higher impedance digital multimeter such as the EL-39200. The EL-39200 instruction manual is a good source of information and should be read thoroughly upon receipt of the DMM as well as kept on hand for future reference. A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present if the impedance is low enough, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. In other words, if there is not enough current, the test lamp will not illuminate even though voltage is present. The ohmmeter function on a DMM shows how much resistance exists between 2 points along a circuit. Low resistance in a circuit means good continuity. Note: Disconnect the power feed from the suspect circuit when measuring resistance with a DMM. This prevents incorrect readings. DMMs apply such a small voltage to measure resistance that the presence of voltages can upset a resistance reading. Diodes and solid state components in a circuit can cause a DMM to display a false reading. To find out if a component is affecting a measurement take a reading once, then reverse the leads and take a second reading. If the readings differ the solid state component is affecting the measurement. Following are examples of the various methods of connecting the DMM to the circuit to be tested: * Probe both ends of the connector and either hold the leads in place while manipulating the connector or tape the leads to the harness for continuous monitoring while you perform other operations or test driving. Refer to Probing Electrical Connectors (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Probing Electrical Connectors). * Disconnect the harness at both ends of the suspected circuit where it connects either to a component or to other harnesses. * If the system that is being diagnosed has a specified pinout or breakout box, it may be used in order to simplify connecting the DMM to the circuit or for testing multiple circuits quickly. Using Connector Test Adapters Using Connector Test Adapters Special Tools EL 35616 - Terminal Test Probe Kit For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Caution: Do not insert test equipment probes (DMM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the EL-38125-580 GM Approved Terminal Release Tool Kit in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the EL-38125-580 GM Approved Terminal Release Tool Kit , ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the EL-38125-580 GM Approved Terminal Release Tool Kit label on the inside of the EL-38125-580 GM Approved Terminal Release Tool Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Using Fused Jumper Wires Using Fused Jumper Wires Special Tools J 36169-A Fused Jumper Wire Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12264 Note: A fused jumper may not protect solid state components from being damaged. The J 36169-A includes small clamp connectors that provide adaptation to most connectors without damage. This fused jumper wire is supplied with a 20-A fuse which may not be suitable for some circuits. Do not use a fuse with a higher rating than the fuse that protects the circuit being tested. AFL/EPC Connectors AFL/EPC Connectors Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. 1. For connectors with a bolt in the dress cover, turn the bolt counterclockwise to remove the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12265 2. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the top of the wire dress cover. Slide the CPA forward. 3. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12266 View showing depressing of the lever lock release tab. View of connector in released position. 4. Disconnect the connector from the component. 5. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the dress cover. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs and remove the dress cover. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12267 6. Release the rear lower half of the wiredress cover. 7. Release the tabs that are holding the wiredress cover to the connector body. 8. Remove the nose piece by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the slots on both ends of the connector body. Gently pry the nose piece out of the connector. J 38125-216 can also be used to remove the nose piece. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12268 9. Use the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by lifting the terminal retaining tabs on the inside of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Bosch Connectors (BSK) Bosch Connectors (BSK) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12269 Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 3. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 4. Insert the J 38125-561 tool into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 5. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Bosch Connectors (ECM) Bosch Connectors (ECM) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12270 1. Locate the assist lever on the top of the connector. Move the assist lever to the forward position. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12271 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the connector. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the locking tabs and remove the dress cover. 4. The terminal positive assurance (TPA) is located in the front of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12272 5. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove TPA from the connector. 6. Use the J 38125-213 or the J 38125-556 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12273 Note: Ensure that the dress cover and connector body are both in the released position before reassembling. Failure to do so may cause damage to the connector and component. Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Bosch Connectors (0.64) Bosch Connectors (0.64) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While pressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock until the lever is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Pull the rubber boot that covers the wires back to expose the end of the connector dress cover. 4. Place the connector locking lever in the center of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12274 5. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs that are on the wire end of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover and connector body and pry up. 6. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs located on the opposite side of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover at the connector end and pry up. 7. Remove the dress cover. 8. Cut the tie wrap on the wire bundle. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12275 9. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting a small flat-bladed tool into the small slot in the end of the slider and pushing on the TPA until it comes out of the connector. When the TPA exits the opposite side of the connector, gasp the TPA and pull it completely out of the connector. 10. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 11. Insert the J 38125-560 into the 2 triangular cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 12. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Terminal Replacement Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12276 1. Prior to installation the terminal must be aligned so the (1) coding lugs align with the (2) coding grooves on the connector. 2. Once the terminal is aligned, slide the terminal into the cavity until the retainer has engaged in the cavity of the connector. 3. Slide the TPA in the connector body and seat it using a small flat bladed tool. The TPA is seated when it is flush with the contact housing. 4. Secure the wires to the connector body using a tie wrap and replace the dress cover and grommet. Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Pull out the slider on the connector position assurance (CPA) until it is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12277 5. Insert the J 38125-557 into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Connector Position Assurance Locks Connector Position Assurance Locks The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of the connector. CPAs are used in various connectors throughout the vehicle. CPAs are also used in all SIR system electrical connectors. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals, of the connector. Connector Repairs Connector Repairs Connector Repairs contains a list of all connector repairs. The connector repairs are listed by the connector manufacturer and then by connector type. If the technician cannot identify the manufacturer of the connector, refer to Identifying Connectors below. Knowing the connector manufacturer will assist in finding the correct connector repair from the following list: * Connector Position Assurance Locks (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Connector Position Assurance Locks) * Terminal Position Assurance Locks (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Terminal Position Assurance Locks) * AFL/EPC Connectors (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/AFL/EPC Connectors) * Bosch Connectors (BSK) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Bosch Connectors (BSK))Bosch Connectors (0.64) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Bosch Connectors (0.64))Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT))Bosch Connectors (ECM) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Bosch Connectors (ECM)) * Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack))Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Push to Seat))Delphi Connectors Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12278 (Pull To Seat) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Pull to Seat))Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W))Delphi Connectors (Micro.64) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Micro .64))Delphi Connectors (12-Way) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (12-Way))Delphi Connectors (Steering Gear) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Steering Gear)) * FCI Connectors (Lever Lock) (See: General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/FCI Connectors (Lever Lock))FCI Connectors (SIR) (See: General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/FCI (SIR)) * FEP Connectors (Steering Gear) (See: General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/FEP Connectors (Steering Gear)) * JST Connectors (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/JST Connectors) * Kostal Connectors (Glow Plug Control Module) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Kostal Connectors (Glow Plug Control Module))Kostal Connectors (Transmission) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Kostal Connectors (Transmission)) * Molex Connectors (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Molex Connectors) * Sumitomo Connectors (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Sumitomo Connectors) * Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way))Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor))Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap))Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way))Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module)) * Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Yazaki Connectors (2-Way))Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Yazaki Connectors (16-Way)) * Repairing Connector Terminals (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Repairing Connector Terminals) Connector Anatomy 1 - Connector Positive Assurance (CPA) 2 - Assist Lever 3 - Wiredress Cover 4 - Seal Strain/Relief Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12279 5 - Slide Left Hand 6 - Slide Right Hand 7 - Terminal Positive Assurance (TPA) 8 - Terminal Positive Assurance (TPA) 9 - Connector Seal 10 - Connector Housing 11 - Inner Connector Identifying Connectors Knowing the connector manufacturer is helpful when trying to locating the correct connector repair procedure. There are many different connector designs used on GM vehicles and it is sometimes difficult to identify the connector manufacturer. The information in this document should help with the identification of connector manufactures. The following connector manufacturers make most of the connectors found in GM vehicles: * AFL/EPC (Alcoa Fujikura Ltd./Engineered Plastics Components) * Bosch * Delphi * FCI (Framatome Connectors International) * JAE (Japan Aviation Electronics) * JST (Japan Solderless Terminals) * Kostel * Molex * Sumitomo * Tyco/AMP * Yazaki Identifying the manufacturer of a connector is often difficult. When trying to determine the manufacturer of a connector, look for specific identifying marks that are unique to that connector supplier. Most of these identify marks are hard to find or see. Check the connector carefully and refer to the information below for pictures and descriptions of connector identification markings. * Most of AFLs connectors have EPC on their connector body. Some of the smaller connectors will not have any markings on them. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12280 * In some cases Bosch will actually be printed on the connector. If Bosch does not appear on the connector, look for the Bosch logo. The Bosch logo is a circle with a blunted arrow inside. This logo can appear anywhere on the connector and is often very small. * In some cases Delphi will actually be printed on the connector. If Delphi is not printed on the connector, look for PED. In both cases there is no specific orientation for Delphi or PED and they can appear anywhere on the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12281 * FCI connectors may have the FCI logo on their connectors. The logo is the letters FCI with an "A" above it. * JAE connector have JAE in small letters on their connectors. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12282 * JST connectors have JST in small letters on their connectors, similar to that above. The location of the logo will vary with the connector size and style. * Kostel has an "LK" with a circle around it. These connector are usually used as a transmissions connection. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12283 * Most Molex connectors will have the Molex logo on the dresscover of the connector. In some cases the connectors may have MX followed by another letter. The third letter indicates where the connector was made. A connector with MXD is a Molex connector made in Detroit. Sumitomo has a unique symbol on their connector and possibly a part number. The symbol is similar to that of a diamond lying on its side, similar to that shown. The logo could appear anywhere but the most common place is at the wire side of the housing. * Tyco/AMP has many different and unique connector designs. Some may or may not have identifiable marks on them. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12284 * Yazaki has a wedge or arrow shape, similar to that shown. Delphi Connectors (Push to Seat) Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Follow the steps below in order to repair push to seat connectors. 1. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device, the connector position assurance (CPA) device, and/or the secondary lock. 2. Separate the connector halves (1). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12285 3. Use the proper pick or removal tool (1) in order to release the terminal. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 4. Gently pull the cable and the terminal (2) out of the back of the connector. 5. Re-form the locking device if you are going to reuse the terminal (1). 6. To repair the terminal, refer to Terminal Repair. Terminal Repair 1. Slip the cable seal away from the terminal. 2. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 3. Slip a new cable seal onto the wire. 4. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 5. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 6. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. 7. Slide the cable seal toward the terminal. 8. Crimp the cable seal and the insulation. 9. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply grease to the connector. Reinstalling Terminal 1. In order to reuse a terminal or lead assembly, refer to Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Wiring Repairs). 2. Ensure that the cable seal is kept on the terminal side of the splice. 3. Insert the lead from the back until it catches. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Terminated Lead Repair 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Find the appropriate terminated lead. 3. Use the appropriate splice sleeves depending on the gauge size. 4. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves). Delphi Connectors (Pull to Seat) Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) Special Tools Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12286 J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal If the terminal is visibly damaged or is suspected of having a faulty connection, the terminal should be replaced. Follow the steps below in order to repair pull-to-seat connectors: 1. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) device and/or the secondary lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component or separate the connectors for in-line connectors. 3. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device. 4. Insert the proper pick or removal tool into the front of the connector body. Note: On connectors with more than one terminal the service loop may not be large enough to remove the terminal and crimp on a new one. If the terminal wire does not have a large enough service loop for removal, cut the wire 5 cm (2 in) behind the connector before removal. 5. Grasp the wire at the back of the connector body and gently push the terminal out the front of the connector body. Terminal Repair 1. If the wire needed to be cut in order to remove the terminal, gently push a small length of the same size wire through the back of the connector cavity until there is enough wire exposed in order to crimp on a new terminal. If the wire was not cut, cut the existing wire as close to the old terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 4. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. Terminal Installation 1. Align the terminal and pull the wire from the back of the connector in order to seat the terminal. 2. If necessary, cut the new wire to proper length and splice with existing circuit. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves). 3. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply dielectric grease to the connector. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Micro .64) Delphi Connectors (Micro.64) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12287 Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro.64 connectors. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. The lever lock may be located on the top or sides of the wire dress cover. View of a typical Micro 64 connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12288 Depress the lock and pull the lever over and past the lock. View of the connector when released from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12289 View of another type of Micro 64 connector. Depress the locks that are located on both sides of the wiredress cover and pull the lever over and past the locks. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12290 View of the connector when released from the component. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the front of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool push down on one of the locking tabs and pull the cover up until the dress cover releases. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. 4. Once the front 2 locks are unlocked, lift the front of the dress cover and pull it forward. Note: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 5. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the small slot on the TPA and pushing down until the TPA releases. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12291 Note: Be careful not to angle or rock the J 38125-21 tool when inserting it into the connector or the tool may break. 6. Insert the J 38125-21 tool into the round canal between the terminals cavities at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Follow the steps below in order to repair Micro 64 connector terminals. The Micro 64 connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-64 (M jaw) was developed to crimp Micro 64 terminals. The J 38125-64 crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. The J 38125-64 crimping tool is also designed to crimp both the wire and the insulation at the same time. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro 64 terminals. Note: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gauge wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 1. Cut the wire as close to the damaged terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12292 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert terminal into the appropriate terminal holder until it hits bottom and stops. The correct terminal holder is determined by the wire size. Also ensure that the terminals wings are pointing towards the former on the tool and the release locator. 5. Insert the stripped cable into the terminal. Insulation should be visible on both sides of the terminal insulation wings. 6. Compress the handles until the ratchet automatically releases. 7. Place the terminal into the appropriate cavity and assemble the connector. Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12293 Terminal Removal Procedure There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W connectors. These connectors are very similar but use different terminals and have some minor physical differences also. The first connector design of the Micro-Pack 100W (1) has a white connector interface that holds the terminals. The second design of the Micro-Pack 100W (2) has a gray interface to hold the terminals. Also, the first design has terminal cavities that are further apart (3 mm centerline) and offset from the other row of terminal cavities in the connector. The second design has terminals cavities that are closer together (2.54 mm centerline) and aligned vertically. One other way to identify the second design is the thin strip of material that runs along the outside of the cavities. Note: There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W terminals which are very similar. Ensure that you have the correct terminal before crimping the new terminal to the wire. The first design connector uses the longer terminal (1) that has a raised area in front of the recess in the terminal. The second design connector uses the shorter terminal without the raised area. Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro-Pack 100W connectors. Some Micro-Pack 100W connector disassembly procedures will vary. Use this procedure as a guide. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12294 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Locate the nose piece locking tabs that are positioned on the side of the connector nose piece. The connector nose piece acts as a terminal positive assurance (TPA) and may be referred to as such. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to push in one of the locking tabs while gently pulling on the same side of the nose piece. 4. Repeat the procedure for the other locking tab and remove the nose piece. 5. Remove the wire dress cover. The following is a general procedure for wire dress cover removal. Use this procedure as a guide, some dress cover removal procedures may vary. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12295 6. Use fingers to squeeze the 2 locking legs of the cover. 7. Apply pressure and gently rock the cover until one locking leg is unseated. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12296 8. Continue to apply pressure and rock the cover until the second locking leg is unseated. Repeat procedure for the other side of the dress cover and remove the cover. 9. Use J 38125-12A to gently lift the terminal retaining tab while gently pulling the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. If the terminal is severely bent or damaged, it may be possible on some connectors to push the wire out of the front of the connector instead of pulling it through. This will prevent damage to the internal seals of the connector. Once the terminal is pushed out of the connector, cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible and pull the wire through the connector. Terminal Repair Procedure The Micro-Pack 100W connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool was developed to crimp Micro-Pack 100W terminals. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro-Pack 100 terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12297 1. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. Note: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gauge wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert the terminal into the crimp tool until the core wings are flush with the anvil on the crimp tool. Be sure that the wings are pointed toward the crimp tool former and release the spring locator. The locator will hold the terminal in place. Inspect the alignment of the terminal wings with the crimp tool former. If the terminal wings are wider than the crimp tool former, remove the terminal and bend the terminal wings in slightly. 5. Place stripped wire into terminal. 6. Crimp the new terminal to the wire. If a jam occurs, press the emergency release to open applicator. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12298 Terminal Replacement Procedure After the terminal is crimped to the wire perform the following procedure in order to replace Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the Terminal Removal Procedure. Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The following is the proper procedure for the repair of Weather Pack(R) Connectors. 1. Separate the connector halves (1). 2. Open the secondary lock. A secondary lock aids in terminal retention and is usually molded to the connector (1). 3. Grasp the wire and push the terminal to the forward most position. Hold the wire in this position. 4. Insert the Weather Pack(R) terminal removal tool J 38125-10A into the front (mating end) of the connector cavity until it rests on the cavity shoulder (1). 5. Gently pull on the wire to remove the terminal through the back of the connector (2). Note: Never use force to remove a terminal from a connector. 6. Inspect the terminal and connector for damage. Repair as necessary. Refer to Repairing Connector Terminals (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Repairing Connector Terminals). 7. Reform the lock tang (2) and reset terminal in connector body. 8. Close secondary locks and join connector halves. 9. Verify that circuit is complete and working satisfactorily. 10. Perform system check. Delphi Connectors (12-Way) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12299 Delphi Connectors (12-Way) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) and slide the lever lock away from the connector body. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs on the dress cover of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool release all of the locking tabs. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12300 4. Release the lower wire dress cover locking tab. 5. Release the upper wire dress cover locking tab. 6. Once the locks are unlocked, lift the dress cover off. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12301 Note: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 7. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the locking tabs on both sides of the TPA. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. 8. Remove the nose piece by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the locking tabs on both sides of the nose piece. Gently pry the nose piece out of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12302 9. Insert the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Delphi Connectors (Steering Gear) Delphi Connectors (Steering Gear) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12303 Removal Procedure 1. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the locking tab on the connector. 2. Push down the locking tab to release the connector. The small flat-bladed tool may need to be pushed down and angled back slightly to depress the locking tab. Pull on the connector body while releasing the locking tab to disconnect the connector. FCI Connectors (Lever Lock) FCI Connectors (Lever Lock) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12304 Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. 1. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. 2. The release tab is located on the top of the wiredress cover. 3. View of connector in released position. 4. Disconnect the connector from the component. 5. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the dress cover. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs and remove the dress cover. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12305 6. Use a small flat-blade tool to slide the terminal position assurance (TPA) up one notch on both ends of the connector. The TPA is located underneath the wire dress cover. For the larger terminals insert the J 38125-556 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. For the smaller terminals insert the J 38125-560 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12306 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. FCI (SIR) FCI Connectors (SIR) Removal Procedure Note: The orange CPA must be released first to disconnect or to connect the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12307 1. Lift the orange CPA vertically (avoid lifting on an angle to the connector) approximately 4 mm to release the connector. Use a small flat-bladed tool to help release the orange CPA. The orange CPA can also be released manually without any tools. 2. Grab the connector on both sides and lift the connector vertically to disconnect the connector. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12308 1. Lift the orange CPA vertically approximately 4 mm before installing the connector. Use a small flat-bladed tool to help release the orange CPA. The orange CPA can also be released manually without any tools. 2. Line up the connector key tabs with the initiator key slots. Grab the connector on both sides and push the connector down into the initiator connector sub assembly until fully seated. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12309 3. After the connector is fully seated, push down the orange CPA with your thumb. Push down until the orange CPA is touching the yellow cover on the connector. FEP Connectors (Steering Gear) FEP Connectors (Steering Gear) Removal Procedure 1. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the locking tab on the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12310 2. Push down the locking tab to release the connector. The small flat-bladed tool may need to be pushed down and angled back slightly to depress the locking tab. Pull on the connector body while releasing the locking tab to disconnect the connector. JST Connectors JST Connectors Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. While depressing the lock, remove the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12311 2. Locate the two indents of the terminal position assurance (TPA) located on the bottom of the connector body. Note: The TPA cannot be removed from the connector while there are terminals present in the connector body. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to very carefully raise the TPA on both sides of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12312 4. View of the TPA when removed from the connector body. 5. Use the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the left side of the terminal release cavity as shown in the graphic. Use the tool to move the terminal release to the right with a gentle prying motion. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Kostal Connectors (Glow Plug Control Module) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12313 Kostal Connectors (Glow Plug Control Module) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure View of typical connector. View of connector in released position. 1. Locate the assist lever at the back of the connector. Move the assist lever to the rear position. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12314 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove the dress cover. 4. Slide the dress cover forward and off of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12315 5. The terminal positive assurance (TPA) is located in the front and rear of the connector. Note: The front TPA cannot be removed from the connector. Only move it to the preset position. 6. Use a small flat-blade tool to move the front TPA to the preset position, outboard approximately 0.125 in. (3 mm). 7. Use a small flat-blade tool to completely remove the rear TPA from the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12316 8. Use the J 38125-24 or the J 38125-560 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 9. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Kostal Connectors (Transmission) Kostal Connectors (Transmission) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12317 1. While depressing the lock, twist and remove the connector from the component. 2. Locate the terminal position assurance (TPA). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12318 Note: The TPA cannot be removed from the connector while there are terminals present in the connector body. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to push the TPA until it bottoms out. 4. Use the J 38125-28 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal cavity as shown in the graphic. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 5. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Terminal Replacement Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12319 After the terminal is crimped to the wire, perform the following procedure in order to replace the terminal. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. Locate the terminal position assurance (TPA). 4. Use a small flat-blade tool to push the TPA until it bottoms out. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12320 5. Ensure the TPA is fully seated. The TPA should be centered and flush with the connector body when viewed. Molex Connectors Molex Connectors Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the top of the wire dress cover. Slide the CPA forward. 2. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12321 3. The lever should be in the full forward position. 4. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12322 5. Remove the dress cover by using a flat bladed tool to release the dress cover locking tabs and lift up on the dress cover. 6. Cut the tie wrap that holds the wires to the connector body. 7. Use a small flat-blade tool to pry one side of the nose piece up to the pre-stage position. When the nose piece is in the pre-staged position, the nose piece will be raised above the connector body the length of the step in the nose piece. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12323 8. Use a small flat-blade tool to pry the other side of the piece to the pre-stage position. If the nose piece is higher than the first step in the nose piece, gently push down on the nose piece until it meets with resistance from the connector body, you should feel the nose piece click into position. 9. Insert the J 38125-213 into the small terminal release hole on the nose piece and gently pull on the back of the wire. 10. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Refer to the terminal crimping procedure in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit. Terminal Replacement Procedure After the terminal is crimped to the wire, perform the following procedure in order to replace the terminal. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12324 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the connector disassembly procedure. Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the connector body and pull the CPA out. The CPA is on the wire harness side of connector. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Use a small flat-bladed tool to gently pry off the dress cover by inserting the tool under the cover opposite the harness side and prying up. 4. Remove the cover. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12325 5. Using a small flat-bladed tool, push on the side of the nose piece retainer while pushing the nose piece forward with your thumb. This will release the terminal position assurance (TPA). 6. Insert the J 38125-12A into the corresponding terminal release cavity. The release cavities are the 2 center rows of cavities on one half of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12326 7. Pressing the J 38125-12A tool in the release cavity of the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and crimper in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. Slide the lever lock away from the connector body. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs on the dress cover of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool release all of the locking tabs. 4. Once the locks are unlocked, lift the dress cover off. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12327 Note: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 5. Release the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the blue locking tabs on both ends of the connector. Gently slide the TPA up to the released position on both ends. 6. For the larger terminals insert the J 38125-13A tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. For the smaller terminals insert the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12328 View of the release tool being used for the larger terminals. View of the release tool being used for the larger terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12329 View of the release tool being used for the smaller terminals. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12330 Side view of connector. View of top of connector. 1. Locate the assist lever and lock on the top of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12331 2. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. 3. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12332 4. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the rear of the connector. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. 5. Once the locking tabs are unlocked, slide the inner connector out of the rear of the connector housing. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12333 6. Use the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by pressing on the tang. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Repairing Connector Terminals Repairing Connector Terminals Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Use the following repair procedures in order to repair the following: * Push to Seat terminals * Pull to Seat terminals Some terminals do not require all of the steps shown. Skip the steps that do not apply for your terminal repair. The J-38125 contains further information. 1. Cut off the terminal between the core and the insulation crimp. Minimize any wire loss. For cable seal terminals, remove the seal. 2. Apply the correct cable seal per gauge size of the wire, if used. Slide the seal back along the wire in order to enable insulation removal. 3. Remove the insulation. 4. For sealed terminals only, align the seal with the end of the cable insulation. 5. Position the strip in the terminal. For sealed terminals, position the strip and seal in the terminal. 6. Hand crimp the core wings. 7. Hand crimp the insulation wings. For sealed terminals, hand crimp the insulation wings around the seal and the cable. 8. Solder all of the hand crimp terminals excepting Micro-Pack 100.64 size. Soldering Micro-Pack 100 World terminals may damage the terminal. Sumitomo Connectors Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12334 Sumitomo Connectors Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12335 3. Remove the dress cover by using a flat-blade tool to release the connector locking tabs and pulling off the dress cover. 4. Relieve the tension on the nose piece retainers by inserting J 38125-12A into the single retainer slot on the end of the nose piece and gently prying out the locking tab. Repeat the process for both of the nose piece locking tabs on the opposite side of the nose piece. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12336 5. Once the nose piece retainers are relaxed, use the J 38125-552 to pull up the nose piece by hooking the tool under the nose piece and pulling up. The nose piece should raise slightly. 6. On the opposite side of the nose piece, use the J 38125-552 to pull up the nose piece by hooking the tool under the nose piece and pulling up. The nose piece should release completely. If the nose piece does not come off, repeat the procedure on the opposite side. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12337 7. The illustration above identifies the entry canal where the terminal release tool will be inserted, and the terminal cavity. * Terminal (1) * Entry Canal (2) 8. Insert the J 38125-553 tool into the entry canal and pry up on the terminal retainer. The terminal retainer is a small plastic piece on the top of the terminal. The terminal retainer must be held up while the terminal is pulled out of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12338 9. The illustration shows a cutaway view of the connector to aid the technician in releasing the terminal retainer. 10. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Refer to the terminal crimping procedure in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit. Terminal Replacement Procedure After the terminal is crimped to the wire, perform the following procedure in order to replace the terminal. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the connector disassembly procedure. Terminal Position Assurance Locks Terminal Position Assurance Locks The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12339 2. Insert the J 38125-11A tool into the cavity on the lower right hand face of the connector until the terminal release tang access panel slides over. 3. Ensure that the terminal release tang access panel is in the correct location to access the terminals. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12340 5. Insert the J 38125-11A into the terminal release tang access slot located behind the access panel of the connector and press down on the terminal while carefully pulling the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component by pressing down on the connector position assurance (CPA). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12341 2. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting the tool in the small recess on the side of the connector and pushing up until the TPA releases from the connector body. The TPA should raise just slightly. Do not try to remove the TPA. Note: The TPA on this connector cannot be removed unless the terminals are removed first. The TPA will come out of the connector body, but only slightly. When the TPA is slightly raised the terminals can be removed. Using excessive force to remove the TPA with the terminals still in the connector will damage the connector. 3. Repeat the process for the other side of the connector. 4. Ensure that the TPA is in the proper position to remove the terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12342 5. While pushing the terminal forward, insert the J 38125-24 in the release cavity above the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12343 2. Insert a small flat-blade tool in the slot below the front loaded terminal position assurance (TPA) and pry up. 3. Remove the TPA by pulling it out of the connector. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-553 on a slight upward angle into the cavity below the terminal to be removed. Ensure that the pointed on the end of the tool is facing the bottom of the terminal and it stays in contact with the terminal until it stops on the plastic terminal retainer. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12344 6. Gently pry the plastic terminal retainer down and carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12345 1. While depressing the lock, pull the two connector halves apart. Note: The TPA is fragile and may break if not done carefully. 2. Use a small flat-blade tool to very carefully push the terminal position assurance (TPA) towards the face of the connector on both sides of the connector. 3. View of the male half of the connector with female terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12346 4. View of the female half of the connector with male terminals. 5. Use the J 38125-215 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. View of the female half of the connector with male terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12347 7. View of the male half of the connector with female terminals. 8. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers A circuit breaker is a protective device that is designed to open the circuit when a current load is in excess of the rated breaker capacity. If there is a short or other type of overload condition in the circuit, the excessive current will open the circuit between the circuit breaker terminals. Two types of circuit breakers are used. Circuit Breaker - This type opens when excessive current passes through it for a period of time. It closes again after a few seconds, and if the cause of the high current is still present, it will open again. The circuit breaker will continue to cycle open and closed until the condition causing the high current is removed. Positive Temperature Coefficient (PTC) Circuit Breaker - This type greatly increases its resistance when excessive current passes through it. The excessive current heats the PTC device, as the device heats its resistance increases. Eventually the resistance gets so high that the circuit is effectively open. Unlike the ordinary circuit breaker the PTC unit will not reset until the circuit is opened, by removing the voltage from its terminals. Once the voltage is removed the circuit breaker will re-close within a second or 2. Circuit Protection - Fuses Circuit Protection - Fuses Special Tools EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM) For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12348 The fuse is the most common method of an automotive wiring circuit protection. Whenever there is an excessive amount of current flowing through a circuit the fusible element will melt and create an open or incomplete circuit. Fuses are a one time protection device and must be replaced each time the circuit is overloaded. To determine if a fuse is open, remove the suspected fuse and examine if the element in the fuse is broken (2). If not broken (1), also check for continuity using a Digital Multimeter (DMM) or a continuity tester. If the element is broken or continuity is suspect, replace the fuse with one of equal current rating. Circuit Protection - Fusible Links Circuit Protection - Fusible Links Special Tools EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM) For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Fusible link is wire designed to melt and break continuity when excessive current is applied. It is often located between or near the battery and starter or electrical center. Use a continuity tester or a Digital Multimeter (DMM) at each end of the wire containing the fusible link in order to determine if it is broken. If broken, it must be replaced with fusible link of the same gauge size. Repairing a Fusible Link Note: Fusible links cut longer than 225 mm (approximately 9 in) will not provide sufficient overload protection. Flat Wire Repairs Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12349 Flat Wire Repairs The flat wire within the flex wiring harness is not serviceable. If an open or short exists within the flex wiring harness the complete harness must be replaced. GMLAN Wiring Repairs GMLAN Wiring Repairs Special Tools * EL-38125-10 - Splice Sleeve Crimping Tool * J 38125-5 - Ultra Torch Special Tool * DuraSeal splice sleeves * A wire stripping tool For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: * A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. * A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The GM Local Area Network (GMLAN) System requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working on GMLAN connectors and terminals. GMLAN Repairs Note: When making a repair to any GMLAN network, the original wire length after the repair must be the same length as before the repair. If the network is a twisted pair, the twist must be maintained after the repair is completed. GMLAN has 2 types of networks, low speed and high speed. Low speed GMLAN has a single wire and works at slow speeds. High speed GMLAN has 2 wires in a twisted pair and works at higher speeds. For more information on GMLAN, refer to Data Link Communications Description and Operation ( See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Information Bus/Description and Operation). GMLAN Connector Terminal Repair Note: A terminated lead can be used to replace damaged connector terminals for both high speed and low speed GMLAN systems. When making a connector terminal repair on a GMLAN high speed system with twisted pair wires, do not untwist the wires more than necessary to make the repair. If the individual terminals are damaged on any GMLAN connection, use the appropriate connector repair procedure in order to repair the terminal. Refer to Connector Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Connector Repairs) for the appropriate connector repair procedure. GMLAN Wire Repair Note: Refer to Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Wiring Repairs) in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gauge size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and EL-38125-10 - tool. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the DuraSeal splice sleeves. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12350 Note: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: * Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. * Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. * Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert to regional wiring gauge size. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the EL-38125-10 - tool in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the splice sleeve crimp tool. The crimp tool has four nests, one for each color. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12351 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs Caution: Do not solder repairs under any circumstances as this could result in the air reference being obstructed. If the heated oxygen sensor pigtail wiring, connector, or terminal is damaged the entire oxygen sensor assembly must be replaced. Do not attempt to repair the wiring, connector, or terminals. In order for the sensor to function properly it must have a clean air reference. This clean air reference is obtained by way of the oxygen sensor signal and heater wires. Any attempt to repair the wires, connectors or terminals could result in the obstruction of the air reference and degrade oxygen sensor performance. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12352 The following guidelines should be used when servicing the heated oxygen sensor: * Do not apply contact cleaner or other materials to the sensor or vehicle harness connectors. These materials may get into the sensor, causing poor performance. Also, the sensor pigtail and harness wires must not be damaged in such a way that the wires inside are exposed. This could provide a path for foreign materials to enter the sensor and cause performance problems. * Neither the sensor nor vehicle lead wires should be bent sharply or kinked. Sharp bends, kinks, etc., could block the reference air path through the lead wire. * Do not remove or defeat the oxygen sensor ground wire (where applicable). Vehicles that utilize the ground wire sensor may rely on this ground as the only ground contact to the sensor. Removal of the ground wire will also cause poor engine performance. * To prevent damage due to water intrusion, be sure that the peripheral seal remains intact on the vehicle harness connector. High Temperature Wiring Repairs High Temperature Wiring Repairs Special Tools * EL-38125-10 - Splice Sleeve Crimping Tool * J 38125-5 - Ultra Torch * DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). High Temperature Wiring Wiring that is exposed to high temperatures, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time may use materials i.e. wires, connectors, and shielding that has a higher heat rating than typical wiring. When making a repair in a high temperature area observe the following: * Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature to replace any damaged wire. * Replace any heat shielding that is removed. * Cover any DuraSeal splice sleeves with SCT1 shrink tubing. * After making a wiring repair, ensure that the location of the wiring is not moved closer to the heat source. Identifying High Temperature Wiring Wiring that is exposed to high temperature, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time need special considerations when making wiring repairs. Areas that may be exposed to higher temperatures can be identified by heat resistant materials that are being used in those areas. These materials may include heat reflective tape, moon tape, and high temperature shrink tubing. Also conduit and other protective coverings may be used. Because conduit or similar coverings are used throughout the vehicle regardless of the temperature, it may be necessary for the technician to determine if an area is exposed to excessive heat before making a wiring repair. Obvious areas of consideration would be any area located near the exhaust manifolds, catalytic converter, and exhaust pipes. Items Required * DuraSeal splice sleeves to crimp and seal connections * High temperature SCT1 shrink tubing to protect the splice sleeves * Terminated leads or pigtails * The correct tools to remove the terminals from the connectors Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature of the same or larger gauge size as the original wire when repair damage wire. Also replace any reflective tape that you remove during the repair. High Temperature Wire Repair Note: Refer to Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Wiring Repairs) in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature rating of the same gauge size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the EL-38125-10 - tool and then encapsulate the splice sleeve using the high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12353 Note: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: * Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. * Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. * Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert to regional wiring gauge size. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Slide a section of high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing down the length of wire to be spliced. Ensure that the shrink tubing will not interfere with the splice procedure. 5. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 6. Use the EL-38125-10 - tool in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the splice sleeve crimp tool. The crimp tool has four nests, one for each color. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12354 7. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 8. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 9. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 10. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 11. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12355 12. Center the high temperature SCT1 shrink tube over the DuraSeal splice sleeve. 13. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the high temperature heat shrink tubing. 14. Gradually move the heat from the center to the open end of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. 15. Replace any reflective tape and clips that may have been remove during the repair. Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation If the wire insulation has been chafed, or broken, enough to show the conductive portion of the wire, and the wire is not damaged, determine the length of insulation that needs to be repaired. If the repair is less than 280 mm (11 in), cut the wire within the damaged area. Than slide the appropriate heat shrink tubing (listed below) over the wire, and repair the wire by splicing the wires together. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves). Once the wire is spliced together slide heat shrink tubing over the damaged area and apply heat to seal the repaired wire. If the wire is damaged, or the damaged area is larger than 280 mm (11 in), than replace the damaged wire by splicing in a new section of wire. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12356 SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs Special Tools * EL-38125-10 - Splice Sleeve Crimping Tool * J 38125-5 - Ultra Torch * DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: * A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. * A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides the necessary low resistance contact integrity for these sensitive, low energy circuits. The Supplemental Inflatable Restraint (SIR) System/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working with the SIR/SRS, and the wiring components, such as connectors and terminals. SIR/SRS Connector Repair (Plastic Body and Terminal Metal Pin) Note: Do not use the terminals in the kit in order to replace damaged SIR/SRS system terminals. Use either an SIR/SRS pigtail or a terminated lead from the SIR Repair Kit Tray. The terminals in the SIR/SRS system are made with a special plating. This plating provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. Pigtail repair packs are available for SIR/SRS connectors with eight or less terminals. Only the connector body is available for connectors with more than eight terminals. Terminated leads can be used to replace damaged terminals when replacing the connector body. SIR/SRS Component Wire Pigtail Repair Note: Do not make wire, connector, or terminal repairs on components with wire pigtails. A wire pigtail is a wire or wires attached directly to the device, not by a connector. If a wiring pigtail is damaged, you must replace the entire component, with pigtail. The inflatable restraint steering wheel module coil is an example of a pigtail component. SIR/SRS Wire Repair Note: Refer to Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Wiring Repairs) in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12357 If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gauge size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and EL-38125-10 - tool. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the DuraSeal splice sleeves. Note: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: * Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. * Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. * Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert to regional wiring gauge size. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the EL-38125-10 - tool in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the splice sleeve crimp tool. The crimp tool has four nests, one for each color. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12358 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Connector Position Assurance (CPA) The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of a connector. CPAs are used in all SIR System connectors and also in some connectors of other systems. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals of a connection. Terminal Position Assurance (TPA) The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12359 Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Special Tools * EL-38125-10 - Splice Sleeve Crimping Tool * J 38125-5 - Ultra Torch * DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Note: Use only DuraSeal splice sleeves. Other splice sleeves may not protect the splice from moisture or provide a good electrical connection. Use DuraSeal splice sleeves to form a one-to-one splice on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. Use DuraSeal splice sleeves where there is special requirements such as moisture sealing. Follow the instructions below in order to splice copper wire using DuraSeal splice sleeves. Note: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: * Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. * Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. * Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert to regional wiring gauge size. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12360 5. Use the EL-38125-10 - tool in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the splice sleeve crimp tool. The crimp tool has four nests, one for each color. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12361 * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Splicing Inline Harness Diodes Splicing Inline Harness Diodes Many vehicle electrical systems use a diode to isolate circuits and protect the components from voltage spikes. When installing a new diode use the following procedure. 1. Open the harness. * If the harness is taped, remove the tape. * To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing seam ripper (available from sewing supply stores) in order to cut open the harness. * If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the diode. 2. If the diode is taped to the harness, remove all of the tape. 3. Check and record the current flow direction and orientation of diode. 4. Remove the inoperative diode from the harness with a suitable soldering tool. Note: If the diode is located next to a connector terminal remove the terminal(s) from the connector to prevent damage from the soldering tool. 5. Carefully strip away a section of insulation next to the old soldered portion of the wire(s). Do not remove any more than is needed to attach the new diode. 6. Check current flow direction of the new diode, being sure to install the diode with correct bias. Reference the appropriate service manual wiring schematic to obtain the correct diode installation position. 7. Attach the new diode to the wire(s) using 60/40 rosin core solder. Before soldering attach some heat sinks (aluminum alligator clips) across the diode wire ends to protect the diode from excessive heat. Follow the manufacturer's instruction for the soldering equipment. 8. Reinstall terminal(s) into the connector body if previously removed. Note: To prevent shorts to ground and water intrusion, completely cover all exposed wire and diode attachment points with tape. 9. Tape the diode to the harness or connector using electrical tape. Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable Twisted/shielded cable is used in order to protect wiring from electrical noise. Two-conductor cable of this construction is used between the radio and the Delco-Bose(R) speaker/amplifier units and other applications where low level, sensitive signals must be carried. Follow the instructions below in order to repair the twisted/shielded cable. 1. Remove the outer jacket (1). Use care not to cut into the drain wire of the mylar tape. 2. Unwrap the tape. Do not remove the tape. Use the tape in order to rewrap the twisted conductors after the splice is made. 3. Prepare the splice. Untwist the conductors and follow the instructions for Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves). Staggering the splices by 65 mm (2.5 in) is recommended. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12362 Note: Apply the mylar tape with the aluminum side inward. This ensures good electrical contact with the drain wire. 4. Re-assemble the cable. * Rewrap the conductors with the mylar tape. If the mylar tape is damaged, use 3M product AL-36FR to replace the damaged mylar tape. * Use caution not to wrap the drain wire in the tape (1). * Follow the splicing instructions for copper wire and splice the drain wire. * Wrap the drain wire around the conductors and tape with electrical tape to replace the outer insulation. 5. Tape over the entire cable. Use a winding motion when you apply the tape. Wiring Repairs Wiring Repairs The Wiring Repairs section contains the following types of wiring repair information. Using these elements together will make wiring repair faster and easier: * Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections) * Flat Wire Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Flat Wire Repairs) * GMLAN Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/GMLAN Wiring Repairs) * High Temperature Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/High Temperature Wiring Repairs) * Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs) * Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves) * Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable) * Splicing Inline Harness Diodes (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Inline Harness Diodes) * SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs) US English/Metric Conversion US English/Metric Conversion Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12363 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12364 Basic Digital Multimeter Requirements Basic Digital Multimeter Requirements Digital Multimeter (DMM) Basic Requirements Service information is validated using digital multimeters that meet or exceed the following requirements. Using a multimeter that does not meet these basic requirements may give inaccurate readings which could lead to an incorrect diagnosis. Display and Settings 1. Four digits displayed 2. Voltage, amperage, resistance, frequency, diode test settings, and min-max function 3. Display positive and negative values Voltage 1. Have at least 10 Mohm input impedance 2. Test a DC voltage range of 0.1-1000 V. 3. Test an AC voltage range of 0.1-1000 V. Amperage 1. Test a DC amperage range of 0.1µA-10 A. 2. Test an AC amperage range of 0.1µA-10 A. Resistance Test a resistance range of 0.1 ohm-40 Mohm and displays infinite for a value greater than 40 Mohm (O.L. (Over-load)) Frequency Test for a frequency range of 0.5 HZ-199 K HZ Diode Test 1. Apply at least 1 mA when performing the diode bias test 2. Display the break over voltage drop (0-3 V) of a forward biased diode 3. Display infinite (O.L. (Over-load)) when a diode is reverse biased Min-Max Readings 1. Can update at a 1 ms sample rate 2. Saves and displays minimum and maximum values Testing Ground and Low Reference Circuits Testing Ground and Low Reference Circuits Because a test lamp can light with up to 200 ohm in a ground or low reference circuit they are not recommended to be used for this type of test. A low impedance test lamp can light and indicate the circuit is good when there is as much as 20-30 ohm present, while a high impedance test lamp can light with up to 200 ohm present in the circuit. This is why the Digital Multi-Meter (DMM) is used when validating a ground or low reference circuit continuity. When using the DMM there are many vehicle conditions that can affect the ground and low reference continuity testing. If these conditions are not met, a ground or low reference circuit test can fail on a good circuit. This may cause longer diagnosis time and incorrect component replacement. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12365 Any current flow through a ground or low reference circuit, while being tested, will skew the DMM continuity reading, or display a reading higher than when there is no current flowing. Performing a ground or low reference circuit continuity test, in reference to the vehicles battery negative terminal, will have the highest risk of failing a good ground or low reference circuit test than any other ground reference point. The best ground test points would be a control module housing (if the control modules housing is metal and grounded), door jamb striker (if attached to metal), under dash metal frame work, engine block, or body ground studs (other than where the negative battery cable is attached). A typical DMM ground or low reference circuit continuity reading can be as high as 100 ohm with the ignition ON, and drop to 15-25 ohm after the ignition is turned OFF. The reading will drop below 10 ohm after 30-40 seconds, then below 5 ohm after 60 seconds. Once the vehicle completely goes to sleep (generally 3-10 minutes) the reading will drop below 0.3 ohm. The following list of conditions may need to be met to ensure a valid continuity reading on a ground or low reference circuit: * Ignition OFF * Key out of the ignition switch (when not equipped with keyless entry and remote start) * Retained Accessory Power (RAP) OFF (open and close the driver door after ignition OFF) * Battery charger set at a 2 A or less charge rate * Scan tool not communicating with any vehicle control module (in some cases it may need to be disconnected from the DLC) * All entry doors closed * Headlamps OFF (auto headlamps disabled) * Any delay lighting OFF * HVAC after blow OFF * Any accessory that can work when the ignition is OFF * Wait up to 60 seconds (after all other listed conditions are met) Activating the DOOR LOCK function with a key fob can greatly reduce the time to achieve a valid ground or low reference continuity test result. Terminal Wiring Repair Terminal Wiring Repair Special Tools * EL-38125-10 - Splice Sleeve Crimp Tool * EL-38125-580 - Terminal Release Tool Kit * J-38125-5 - Ultra Torch * EL-35616 - Connector Test Adapter Kit For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Note: All repairs near the engine manifold, turbo engine and all exhaust pipes should follow the High Temperature Wiring Repair procedures. 1. Find the appropriate connector end view within the connector end view section. The connector end view has the following information: * Diagnostic probe tool * Terminal release tool * Terminal/terminated lead part numbers 2. Determine if a terminal is damaged. Note: Not using the proper test kit probe may cause damage to the terminal(s) that are probed. * Locate the diagnostic probe tool from the connector end view. The connector end view describes the color and part number to help the technician find and use the correct tool. * Connect the probe tool to the Digital Multimeter. * Insert the probe tool into the cavity and follow the procedures from the Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter). 3. Disconnect the connector body to perform the repair. Note: Several procedures for specific connector bodies are called out in Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Wiring Repairs). Use the following repair procedures to repair the following terminals: Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12366 Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack))Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Push to Seat))Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Pull to Seat))Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W))Delphi Connectors (Micro.64) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Micro .64) )Delphi Connectors (12-Way) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (12-Way))Delphi Connectors (Steering Gear) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Steering Gear)) * The TPA and CPA should be removed before releasing the terminal for the connector body. * Look at the connector end view to locate the cavity of the damaged terminal and find the proper terminal release tool from the terminal release tool kit. Note: Using the incorrect terminal release tool can damage the connector body. * Insert the terminal release tool into the cavity. Note: Some terminals have a lever that must be disengaged before the terminal can be released. Gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Terminated Lead Repair Terminated Lead Repair Special Tools * EL-38125-10 - Splice Sleeve Crimp Tool * EL-38125-580 - Terminal Release Tool Kit * J-38125-5 - Ultra Torch * EL-35616 - Connector Test Adapter Kit For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Note: All repairs near the engine manifold, turbo engine and all exhaust pipes should follow the High Temperature Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/High Temperature Wiring Repairs) procedures. Terminated leads are terminals that are crimped onto wires. The terminated lead can be used throughout the vehicle since it is designed for temperatures up to 150°C. The length of the wire is 450 mm. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12367 The DuraSeal splice sleeve has the following 2 critical features: * A special heat shrink tubing that environmentally seals the splice. The shrink tubing contains a sealing adhesive inside the shrink tubing. * A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp that provides the necessary contact integrity for sensitive low energy circuits. 1. Use the connector end view to identify the correct terminated lead. 2. The terminated lead package should include a DuraSeal splice sleeve. If not, use the chart to identify the correct part. 3. Open the harness by removing any tape: Use a sewing seam ripper, or a comparable tool, to cut open the harness, to avoid wire insulation damage. 4. Depending on how many terminals need repairs, cut the terminal and wire back at least 40 mm. Try to keep the harness wire length the same. If more than one terminated lead is required, stagger the lengths by 40 mm. This helps reduce the bundle size of the wire harness. 5. Use the EL-38125-10 - tool in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the splice sleeve crimp tool. The crimp tool has four nests, one for each color. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12368 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the J-38125-5 - ultra torch , apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12369 Keyless Entry Transmitter: Electrical Diagrams Remote Function Schematics Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 12370 Keyless Entry Transmitter: Tools and Equipment Special Tools Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > System Information > Description and Operation Power Locks: Description and Operation Power Door Locks Description and Operation Door Lock System Components The power door lock system consists of the following components: * Central door lock switch * Child door lockout switch * Door lock actuators in each of the doors * Body control module (BCM) * Underhood fuse block Door Lock System Controls The power door lock system can be controlled by any of the following: * A door lock switch LOCK or UNLOCK activation * A mechanical key cylinder lock/unlock * A keyless entry transmitter activation * An automatic door lock activation * An automatic door unlock activation Door Lock Operation When the central door lock switch is activated in the lock or unlock position the BCM will receive a ground signal on either the door lock switch lock or unlock signal circuits. The BCM, upon receipt of a lock switch lock or unlock signal, will supply voltage to the door lock actuator lock or unlock control circuits. Since the opposite side of the lock actuator is connected to ground through the other lock actuator control circuit, the doors will then lock or unlock as commanded. The following three circuits are used to operate the lock: * Driver door unlock * Passenger door unlock * All door lock Child Door Lockout Operation The operator has the option to disable the interior rear door handles to prevent the unauthorized opening of the rear door doors while still retaining normal driver and passenger door handle functions. The rear door latches contain switches that are open when the rear doors are unlocked and closed when the rear doors are locked. The operator will first lock all the doors by pressing the central door lock switch. When the child door lockout switch is pressed, the BCM will confirm that the rear doors have been locked, if the rear doors are locked the BCM will then command the child lockout latches and will command the child lockout indicator to illuminate. The driver and passenger doors will still function normally by pressing the central door lock switch which will unlock the doors but the child lockout latches will continue to disable the interior rear door handles. Pressing the child lockout switch again will signal a command to the BCM to unlatch the rear doors, restore normal interior rear door handle functions and the turn off the child lockout indicator. If the child lockout indicator flashes while trying to lockout the rear door handles means one or both rear door latches are not locked and the child lockout system will not function. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Heated Element, Mirror > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Mirrors - Heated Mirrors, Defrosting Time Heated Element: Technical Service Bulletins Mirrors - Heated Mirrors, Defrosting Time INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 08-08-64-011A Date: February 25, 2010 Subject: Information on Heated Electrochromatic Outside Rearview Mirror Performance Models: 2010 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (including Saturn) 2009 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 08-08-64-011 (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Defrosting Time/Performance Concern The electrochromatic (auto-dimming) outside rearview mirror used on the driver's side of many GM vehicles is slower to defrost than the passenger side outside rearview mirror. This is a normal condition. The glass on the driver's side electrochromatic mirror is twice as thick as the traditional glass on the passenger side mirror. The heating elements for the mirrors on both sides draw the same wattage, therefore the driver's side mirror will take approximately twice as long to defrost as the passenger mirror (approximately four minutes versus two minutes). Should a customer indicate that the driver's side heated mirror is not functioning correctly, verify it's function based upon this information prior to replacing the mirror. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Memory Positioning Systems > Memory Positioning Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Electrical - L/H Seat Inop./Erratic Memory Sys Operation Memory Positioning Module: Technical Service Bulletins Electrical - L/H Seat Inop./Erratic Memory Sys Operation TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 09-08-50-015B Date: January 15, 2010 Subject: Driver Power Seat Inoperative, Outside Mirrors Do Not Return to Original Position with Park Tilt Mirrors, Memory Remote Recall Intermittent Operation, Adjustable Pedals Inoperative (Reprogram Memory Seat Module) Models: 2010 Cadillac SRX Built Prior to January 6, 2010 2010 Chevrolet Equinox 2010 GMC Terrain All Built Prior to November 2, 2009 Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the 2010 Cadillac SRX build date. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 09-08-50-015A (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Condition Some customers may comment on one or more of the following concerns: - The driver power seat is inoperative (when equipped with Memory Seat only). The driver seat will not move forward, rearward and the recliner will not move forward or rearward. The customer may also experience the inability to move the seat up or down. - The outside mirrors do not return to the original position after the Park Tilt Mirrors function is engaged. The customer may report that the outside mirrors tilt downward when placing the vehicle in reverse, attempt to return to the original position, but do not reach the memory position after taking the vehicle out of reverse. The customer may also witness the mirrors staying in the tilt position and not returning to the memory position at all. - The Memory Remote Recall feature operates intermittently. If the customer enables the Memory Remote Recall feature in the Vehicle Personalization menu, they may comment about intermittent operation. - The Adjustable Pedals are inoperative (Cadillac SRX only). The customer may experience the inability to move the Adjustable Pedals forward or rearward. Cause This condition may be caused by a software state, interaction of features and serial data messages that can contribute to one or more of the above conditions. Correction Important DO NOT replace the MSM for this concern. Reprogram and perform the Setup procedure for the MSM with the latest software calibration. Refer to Memory Seat Control Module Programming and Setup in SI. Important Select the correct calibration files for the appropriate vehicle configuration (body style) and RPO codes. A revised calibration has been developed to address this condition. Technicians are to reprogram the MSM using the Service Programming System (SPS) with the latest software available on TIS2WEB. Refer to the Service Programming System (SPS) procedures in SI. When using a Tech 2(R) or a Multiple Diagnostic Interface (MDI) for reprogramming, ensure that it is updated with the latest software version. During programming, the battery voltage must be maintained within the proper range of 12-15 Volts. Only use the approved Midtronics(R) PSC 550 Battery Maintainer (SPS Programming Support Tool EL-49642) or equivalent during programming. Warranty Information Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Memory Positioning Systems > Memory Positioning Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Electrical - L/H Seat Inop./Erratic Memory Sys Operation > Page 12384 For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table above. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Memory Positioning Systems > Memory Positioning Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 12385 Memory Positioning Module: Locations Passenger Compartment/Roof Component Views Driver Seat Components 1 - M56D Seat Recline Motor - Driver (AE8) 2 - E14A Seat Heating Element - Driver Back (KA1) 3 P22E Video Display - Driver Seatback (UWG) 4 - F106L Side Air Bag - Left 5 - M52D Seat Lumbar Support Horizontal Motor - Driver 6 - M51D Seat Horizontal Motor - Driver (AE8) 7 - K40 Seat Memory Control Module (LTZ or SLT) or K29 Seat Heating Control Module (KA1 without LTZ or SLT) 8 - F113D Seat Belt Anchor Pretensioner - Driver 9 - M55D Seat Rear Vertical Motor (AE8) or M57D Seat Vertical Motor (without AE8) 10 - M50D Seat Front Vertical Motor - Driver 11 - S65D Seat Lumbar Support Switch - Driver 12 - S64D Seat Adjuster Switch - Driver (without AE8) 13 S64D Seat Adjuster Switch - Driver (AE8) 14 - S47D Seat Memory Switch - Driver (LTZ or SLT) 15 - E14B Seat Heating Element - Driver Cushion (KA1) 16 - B88D Seat Belt Switch - Driver Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Memory Positioning Systems > Memory Positioning Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 12386 Memory Positioning Module: Diagrams K40 Seat Memory Control Module X1 (LTZ or SLT) K40 Seat Memory Control Module X2 (LTZ or SLT) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Memory Positioning Systems > Memory Positioning Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 12387 K40 Seat Memory Control Module X3 (KA1 with LTZ or SLT) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Memory Positioning Systems > Memory Positioning Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 12388 K40 Seat Memory Control Module X4 (LTZ or SLT) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Memory Positioning Systems > Memory Positioning Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 12389 K40 Seat Memory Control Module X5 (LTZ or SLT) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Memory Positioning Systems > Memory Positioning Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 12390 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Memory Positioning Systems > Seat Memory Switch > Component Information > Locations Seat Memory Switch: Locations Passenger Compartment/Roof Component Views Driver Seat Components 1 - M56D Seat Recline Motor - Driver (AE8) 2 - E14A Seat Heating Element - Driver Back (KA1) 3 P22E Video Display - Driver Seatback (UWG) 4 - F106L Side Air Bag - Left 5 - M52D Seat Lumbar Support Horizontal Motor - Driver 6 - M51D Seat Horizontal Motor - Driver (AE8) 7 - K40 Seat Memory Control Module (LTZ or SLT) or K29 Seat Heating Control Module (KA1 without LTZ or SLT) 8 - F113D Seat Belt Anchor Pretensioner - Driver 9 - M55D Seat Rear Vertical Motor (AE8) or M57D Seat Vertical Motor (without AE8) 10 - M50D Seat Front Vertical Motor - Driver 11 - S65D Seat Lumbar Support Switch - Driver 12 - S64D Seat Adjuster Switch - Driver (without AE8) 13 S64D Seat Adjuster Switch - Driver (AE8) 14 - S47D Seat Memory Switch - Driver (LTZ or SLT) 15 - E14B Seat Heating Element - Driver Cushion (KA1) 16 - B88D Seat Belt Switch - Driver Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Memory Positioning Systems > Seat Memory Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 12394 Seat Memory Switch: Diagrams S47D Seat Memory Switch - Driver (LTZ or SLT) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Memory Positioning Systems > Seat Memory Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 12395 Seat Memory Switch: Service and Repair Driver Seat Adjuster Memory Switch Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Power Mirror Control Module > Component Information > Locations Power Mirror Control Module: Locations Door Component Views Driver Door Components 1 - A23D Door Latch Assembly - Driver 2 - A9A Outside Rearview Mirror - Driver 3 - E1C Accent Lamp - Driver Door Handle (LTZ or SLT) 4 - K96L Mirror Control Module - Left (LTZ or SLT) 5 S52S Outside Rearview Mirror Switch 6 - P19G Speaker - Left Front 7 - M74D Window Motor Driver 8 - B63LF Side Impact Sensor - Left Front 9 - S79D Window Switch - Driver 10 - E1D Accent Lamp - Driver Door (LTZ or SLT) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Power Mirror Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 12399 Power Mirror Control Module: Diagrams K96L Mirror Control Module - Left (LTZ or SLT) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Power Mirror Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 12400 Power Mirror Control Module: Service and Repair Outside Rearview Mirror Folding Control Module Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Power Mirror Switch > Component Information > Locations Power Mirror Switch: Locations Door Component Views Driver Door Components 1 - A23D Door Latch Assembly - Driver 2 - A9A Outside Rearview Mirror - Driver 3 - E1C Accent Lamp - Driver Door Handle (LTZ or SLT) 4 - K96L Mirror Control Module - Left (LTZ or SLT) 5 S52S Outside Rearview Mirror Switch 6 - P19G Speaker - Left Front 7 - M74D Window Motor Driver 8 - B63LF Side Impact Sensor - Left Front 9 - S79D Window Switch - Driver 10 - E1D Accent Lamp - Driver Door (LTZ or SLT) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Power Mirror Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 12404 Power Mirror Switch: Diagrams S52 Outside Rearview Mirror Switch Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Power Mirror Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 12405 Power Mirror Switch: Service and Repair Outside Remote Control Rearview Mirror Switch Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 05-08-51-008C > Jun > 09 > Body - Bumps or Rust Colored Spots in Paint Paint: Customer Interest Body - Bumps or Rust Colored Spots in Paint TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 05-08-51-008C Date: June 22, 2009 Subject: Bumps or Rust Colored Spots in Paint Due to Rail or Iron Dust (Remove Rail Dust) Models: 1994-2010 GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (Including Saturn) 2003-2010 HUMMER H2 2006-2010 HUMMER H3 2005-2009 Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 05-08-51-008B (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Condition Visible rust colored spots or bumps on a vehicle's paint surface from rail or iron dust. Cause Rail dust comes from tiny iron particles produced from the friction between train wheels and the tracks and gets deposited on the vehicle surfaces. Iron dust can get deposited on the surface if the vehicle is stored near any operation producing iron dust such as an iron ore yard. Either material can lay on top of, or become embedded in, the paint surface. Correction Because the severity of the condition varies, proper diagnosis of the damage is critical to the success of repairs. Diagnosis should be performed on horizontal surfaces (hood, roof, deck lid, pick up box, etc.) after the vehicle has been properly cleaned. There are two types of repair materials recommended to repair rail dust or iron dust: 1. GEL TYPE OXALIC ACID: - Has the characteristics of the liquid type oxalic acid but stays where you put it because of its gel consistency. 2. CLAY TYPE NON-ACID BASED: - Requires surface lubricant during use. - Has different grades available. Caution Rail dust remover (Oxalic Acid) is an acidic substance containing chemicals that will break down the iron particles embedded in the finish. When working with rail dust remover, use the necessary safety equipment, including gloves and goggles. Follow the chemical manufacturer's directions closely because it may require special handling and disposal. If, upon inspection, some particles are still present, the various chemical manufacturer's processes can be repeated. After the removal process, small pits may remain in the clearcoat and can be corrected, in most cases, with a finesse/polish operation. Procedure 1. Move the vehicle to a cool shaded area and make sure that the vehicle surfaces are cool during the removal process. DO NOT PERFORM THE REMOVAL PROCESS IN DIRECT SUNLIGHT OR ON A VEHICLE WITH HOT OR WARM BODY PANELS. 2. Wash the vehicle with soap and water. Dry it immediately and clean the affected areas with a wax and grease remover. 3. Perform the removal process according to the chemical manufacturer's directions. Once the damage has been repaired, the final step involves a polishing process. Rail Dust Remover Manufacturers Use the chemical manufacturers listed below, or equivalent: Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 05-08-51-008C > Jun > 09 > Body - Bumps or Rust Colored Spots in Paint > Page 12415 Auto Magic(R) or Clay Magic(R) products available from: Auto Wax Company, Inc. 1275 Round Table Dr. Dallas, TX 75247 (800) 826-0828 (Toll-Free) or (214) 631-4000 (Local) Fax (214) 634-1342 www.automagic.com [email protected] E038 Fallout Gel or E038E Liquid Fallout Remover II available from: Valvoline Car Brite Company 1910 South State Avenue Indianapolis, In 46203 (800) 347-2439 (Toll Free) or (317) 788-9925 (Local) Fax (317) 788-9930 www.carbrite.com [email protected] *We believe these sources and their products to be reliable. There may be additional manufacturers of such products. General Motors does not endorse, indicate any preference for or assume any responsibility for the products from these firms or for any such items which may be available from other sources. If rail dust remover is not available in your area, call one of the numbers listed above for a distributor near your location. Warranty Information (excluding Saab U.S. Models) Important Refer to the Policy & Procedures Manual, section 1.2.1.7 for detailed information regarding warranty coverage for this condition. Important In certain cases where the vehicle finish is severely damaged and the actual repair time exceeds the published time, the additional time should be submitted in the "Other Labor Hours" field. Warranty Information (Saab U.S. Models) Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Paint: > 10-08-51-001 > Jan > 10 > Body/Paint - 2010 Exterior Paint Codes Paint: All Technical Service Bulletins Body/Paint - 2010 Exterior Paint Codes INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 10-08-51-001 Date: January 05, 2010 Subject: Exterior Paint Codes Models: 2010 Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (Including Saturn and Saab) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Paint: > 10-08-51-001 > Jan > 10 > Body/Paint - 2010 Exterior Paint Codes > Page 12421 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Paint: > 10-08-51-001 > Jan > 10 > Body/Paint - 2010 Exterior Paint Codes > Page 12422 The primary exterior body paint codes on the SPID label may be missing on some 2010 vehicles. Above is a chart with the primary exterior body colors for your reference. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Paint: > 05-08-51-008C > Jun > 09 > Body - Bumps or Rust Colored Spots in Paint Paint: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - Bumps or Rust Colored Spots in Paint TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 05-08-51-008C Date: June 22, 2009 Subject: Bumps or Rust Colored Spots in Paint Due to Rail or Iron Dust (Remove Rail Dust) Models: 1994-2010 GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (Including Saturn) 2003-2010 HUMMER H2 2006-2010 HUMMER H3 2005-2009 Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 05-08-51-008B (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Condition Visible rust colored spots or bumps on a vehicle's paint surface from rail or iron dust. Cause Rail dust comes from tiny iron particles produced from the friction between train wheels and the tracks and gets deposited on the vehicle surfaces. Iron dust can get deposited on the surface if the vehicle is stored near any operation producing iron dust such as an iron ore yard. Either material can lay on top of, or become embedded in, the paint surface. Correction Because the severity of the condition varies, proper diagnosis of the damage is critical to the success of repairs. Diagnosis should be performed on horizontal surfaces (hood, roof, deck lid, pick up box, etc.) after the vehicle has been properly cleaned. There are two types of repair materials recommended to repair rail dust or iron dust: 1. GEL TYPE OXALIC ACID: - Has the characteristics of the liquid type oxalic acid but stays where you put it because of its gel consistency. 2. CLAY TYPE NON-ACID BASED: - Requires surface lubricant during use. - Has different grades available. Caution Rail dust remover (Oxalic Acid) is an acidic substance containing chemicals that will break down the iron particles embedded in the finish. When working with rail dust remover, use the necessary safety equipment, including gloves and goggles. Follow the chemical manufacturer's directions closely because it may require special handling and disposal. If, upon inspection, some particles are still present, the various chemical manufacturer's processes can be repeated. After the removal process, small pits may remain in the clearcoat and can be corrected, in most cases, with a finesse/polish operation. Procedure 1. Move the vehicle to a cool shaded area and make sure that the vehicle surfaces are cool during the removal process. DO NOT PERFORM THE REMOVAL PROCESS IN DIRECT SUNLIGHT OR ON A VEHICLE WITH HOT OR WARM BODY PANELS. 2. Wash the vehicle with soap and water. Dry it immediately and clean the affected areas with a wax and grease remover. 3. Perform the removal process according to the chemical manufacturer's directions. Once the damage has been repaired, the final step involves a polishing process. Rail Dust Remover Manufacturers Use the chemical manufacturers listed below, or equivalent: Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Paint: > 05-08-51-008C > Jun > 09 > Body - Bumps or Rust Colored Spots in Paint > Page 12427 Auto Magic(R) or Clay Magic(R) products available from: Auto Wax Company, Inc. 1275 Round Table Dr. Dallas, TX 75247 (800) 826-0828 (Toll-Free) or (214) 631-4000 (Local) Fax (214) 634-1342 www.automagic.com [email protected] E038 Fallout Gel or E038E Liquid Fallout Remover II available from: Valvoline Car Brite Company 1910 South State Avenue Indianapolis, In 46203 (800) 347-2439 (Toll Free) or (317) 788-9925 (Local) Fax (317) 788-9930 www.carbrite.com [email protected] *We believe these sources and their products to be reliable. There may be additional manufacturers of such products. General Motors does not endorse, indicate any preference for or assume any responsibility for the products from these firms or for any such items which may be available from other sources. If rail dust remover is not available in your area, call one of the numbers listed above for a distributor near your location. Warranty Information (excluding Saab U.S. Models) Important Refer to the Policy & Procedures Manual, section 1.2.1.7 for detailed information regarding warranty coverage for this condition. Important In certain cases where the vehicle finish is severely damaged and the actual repair time exceeds the published time, the additional time should be submitted in the "Other Labor Hours" field. Warranty Information (Saab U.S. Models) Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Paint: > Page 12428 Paint: By Symptom Technical Service Bulletin # 05-08-51-008C Date: 090622 Body - Bumps or Rust Colored Spots in Paint TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 05-08-51-008C Date: June 22, 2009 Subject: Bumps or Rust Colored Spots in Paint Due to Rail or Iron Dust (Remove Rail Dust) Models: 1994-2010 GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (Including Saturn) 2003-2010 HUMMER H2 2006-2010 HUMMER H3 2005-2009 Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 05-08-51-008B (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Condition Visible rust colored spots or bumps on a vehicle's paint surface from rail or iron dust. Cause Rail dust comes from tiny iron particles produced from the friction between train wheels and the tracks and gets deposited on the vehicle surfaces. Iron dust can get deposited on the surface if the vehicle is stored near any operation producing iron dust such as an iron ore yard. Either material can lay on top of, or become embedded in, the paint surface. Correction Because the severity of the condition varies, proper diagnosis of the damage is critical to the success of repairs. Diagnosis should be performed on horizontal surfaces (hood, roof, deck lid, pick up box, etc.) after the vehicle has been properly cleaned. There are two types of repair materials recommended to repair rail dust or iron dust: 1. GEL TYPE OXALIC ACID: - Has the characteristics of the liquid type oxalic acid but stays where you put it because of its gel consistency. 2. CLAY TYPE NON-ACID BASED: - Requires surface lubricant during use. - Has different grades available. Caution Rail dust remover (Oxalic Acid) is an acidic substance containing chemicals that will break down the iron particles embedded in the finish. When working with rail dust remover, use the necessary safety equipment, including gloves and goggles. Follow the chemical manufacturer's directions closely because it may require special handling and disposal. If, upon inspection, some particles are still present, the various chemical manufacturer's processes can be repeated. After the removal process, small pits may remain in the clearcoat and can be corrected, in most cases, with a finesse/polish operation. Procedure 1. Move the vehicle to a cool shaded area and make sure that the vehicle surfaces are cool during the removal process. DO NOT PERFORM THE REMOVAL PROCESS IN DIRECT SUNLIGHT OR ON A VEHICLE WITH HOT OR WARM BODY PANELS. 2. Wash the vehicle with soap and water. Dry it immediately and clean the affected areas with a wax and grease remover. 3. Perform the removal process according to the chemical manufacturer's directions. Once the damage has been repaired, the final step involves a polishing process. Rail Dust Remover Manufacturers Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Paint: > Page 12429 Use the chemical manufacturers listed below, or equivalent: Auto Magic(R) or Clay Magic(R) products available from: Auto Wax Company, Inc. 1275 Round Table Dr. Dallas, TX 75247 (800) 826-0828 (Toll-Free) or (214) 631-4000 (Local) Fax (214) 634-1342 www.automagic.com [email protected] E038 Fallout Gel or E038E Liquid Fallout Remover II available from: Valvoline Car Brite Company 1910 South State Avenue Indianapolis, In 46203 (800) 347-2439 (Toll Free) or (317) 788-9925 (Local) Fax (317) 788-9930 www.carbrite.com [email protected] *We believe these sources and their products to be reliable. There may be additional manufacturers of such products. General Motors does not endorse, indicate any preference for or assume any responsibility for the products from these firms or for any such items which may be available from other sources. If rail dust remover is not available in your area, call one of the numbers listed above for a distributor near your location. Warranty Information (excluding Saab U.S. Models) Important Refer to the Policy & Procedures Manual, section 1.2.1.7 for detailed information regarding warranty coverage for this condition. Important In certain cases where the vehicle finish is severely damaged and the actual repair time exceeds the published time, the additional time should be submitted in the "Other Labor Hours" field. Warranty Information (Saab U.S. Models) Disclaimer Technical Service Bulletin # 05-08-51-008C Date: 090622 Body - Bumps or Rust Colored Spots in Paint Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Paint: > Page 12430 TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 05-08-51-008C Date: June 22, 2009 Subject: Bumps or Rust Colored Spots in Paint Due to Rail or Iron Dust (Remove Rail Dust) Models: 1994-2010 GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (Including Saturn) 2003-2010 HUMMER H2 2006-2010 HUMMER H3 2005-2009 Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 05-08-51-008B (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Condition Visible rust colored spots or bumps on a vehicle's paint surface from rail or iron dust. Cause Rail dust comes from tiny iron particles produced from the friction between train wheels and the tracks and gets deposited on the vehicle surfaces. Iron dust can get deposited on the surface if the vehicle is stored near any operation producing iron dust such as an iron ore yard. Either material can lay on top of, or become embedded in, the paint surface. Correction Because the severity of the condition varies, proper diagnosis of the damage is critical to the success of repairs. Diagnosis should be performed on horizontal surfaces (hood, roof, deck lid, pick up box, etc.) after the vehicle has been properly cleaned. There are two types of repair materials recommended to repair rail dust or iron dust: 1. GEL TYPE OXALIC ACID: - Has the characteristics of the liquid type oxalic acid but stays where you put it because of its gel consistency. 2. CLAY TYPE NON-ACID BASED: - Requires surface lubricant during use. - Has different grades available. Caution Rail dust remover (Oxalic Acid) is an acidic substance containing chemicals that will break down the iron particles embedded in the finish. When working with rail dust remover, use the necessary safety equipment, including gloves and goggles. Follow the chemical manufacturer's directions closely because it may require special handling and disposal. If, upon inspection, some particles are still present, the various chemical manufacturer's processes can be repeated. After the removal process, small pits may remain in the clearcoat and can be corrected, in most cases, with a finesse/polish operation. Procedure 1. Move the vehicle to a cool shaded area and make sure that the vehicle surfaces are cool during the removal process. DO NOT PERFORM THE REMOVAL PROCESS IN DIRECT SUNLIGHT OR ON A VEHICLE WITH HOT OR WARM BODY PANELS. 2. Wash the vehicle with soap and water. Dry it immediately and clean the affected areas with a wax and grease remover. 3. Perform the removal process according to the chemical manufacturer's directions. Once the damage has been repaired, the final step involves a polishing process. Rail Dust Remover Manufacturers Use the chemical manufacturers listed below, or equivalent: Auto Magic(R) or Clay Magic(R) products available from: Auto Wax Company, Inc. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Paint: > Page 12431 1275 Round Table Dr. Dallas, TX 75247 (800) 826-0828 (Toll-Free) or (214) 631-4000 (Local) Fax (214) 634-1342 www.automagic.com [email protected] E038 Fallout Gel or E038E Liquid Fallout Remover II available from: Valvoline Car Brite Company 1910 South State Avenue Indianapolis, In 46203 (800) 347-2439 (Toll Free) or (317) 788-9925 (Local) Fax (317) 788-9930 www.carbrite.com [email protected] *We believe these sources and their products to be reliable. There may be additional manufacturers of such products. General Motors does not endorse, indicate any preference for or assume any responsibility for the products from these firms or for any such items which may be available from other sources. If rail dust remover is not available in your area, call one of the numbers listed above for a distributor near your location. Warranty Information (excluding Saab U.S. Models) Important Refer to the Policy & Procedures Manual, section 1.2.1.7 for detailed information regarding warranty coverage for this condition. Important In certain cases where the vehicle finish is severely damaged and the actual repair time exceeds the published time, the additional time should be submitted in the "Other Labor Hours" field. Warranty Information (Saab U.S. Models) Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Paint: > 10-08-51-001 > Jan > 10 > Body/Paint - 2010 Exterior Paint Codes Paint: All Technical Service Bulletins Body/Paint - 2010 Exterior Paint Codes INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 10-08-51-001 Date: January 05, 2010 Subject: Exterior Paint Codes Models: 2010 Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (Including Saturn and Saab) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Paint: > 10-08-51-001 > Jan > 10 > Body/Paint - 2010 Exterior Paint Codes > Page 12437 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Paint: > 10-08-51-001 > Jan > 10 > Body/Paint - 2010 Exterior Paint Codes > Page 12438 The primary exterior body paint codes on the SPID label may be missing on some 2010 vehicles. Above is a chart with the primary exterior body colors for your reference. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Service Precautions > Technician Safety Information Paint: Technician Safety Information Handling of Refrigerant Lines and Fittings Caution: To avoid system damage use only R-134a dedicated tools when servicing the A/C system. * Keep all metal tubing lines free of dents or kinks. Any line restrictions will cause the loss of system capacity. * Never bend a flexible hose line to a radius of less than four times the diameter of the hose. * Never allow a flexible hose line to come within 65 mm (2-1/2 in) of the exhaust manifold. * Inspect flexible hose lines regularly for leaks or brittleness. * Replace flexible hose lines with new lines if you find signs of deterioration or leaking. * Discharge the refrigeration system of all refrigerant before disconnecting any fitting in the refrigeration system. * Proceed very cautiously regardless of the gauge readings. Warning For personal protection, goggles and lint-free gloves should be worn and a clean cloth wrapped around fittings, valves, and connections when doing work that includes opening the refrigerant system. If refrigerant comes in contact with any part of the body severe frostbite and personal injury can result. The exposed area should be flushed immediately with cold water and prompt medical help should be obtained. * Open the fittings very slowly. * If you notice pressure when you loosen a fitting, allow the pressure to bleed off as described Discharging, Adding Oil, Evacuating, and Charging Procedures for A/C System. * Cap or tape any refrigerant line immediately after it is opened. This will prevent the entrance of moisture and dirt, which can cause internal compressor wear or plugged lines in the condenser, the evaporator core, the expansion valve, or the compressor inlet screens. * Keep the sealing surfaces in perfect condition. A burr or a piece of dirt may cause a refrigerant leak. * When seal washers are used, always install the seal washer without lubrication. * When O-rings are used, always lightly coat the new O-ring seal with mineral base 525 viscosity refrigerant oil prior to installation. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Service Precautions > Technician Safety Information > Page 12441 Paint: Vehicle Damage Warnings Brake Fluid Effects on Paint and Electrical Components Caution Brake Fluid Effects on Paint and Electrical Components Caution Caution: Avoid spilling brake fluid onto painted surfaces, electrical connections, wiring, or cables. Brake fluid will damage painted surfaces and cause corrosion to electrical components. If any brake fluid comes in contact with painted surfaces, immediately flush the area with water. If any brake fluid comes in contact with electrical connections, wiring, or cables, use a clean shop cloth to wipe away the fluid. Clearcoat/Ultraviolet Screeners Caution Clearcoat/Ultraviolet Screeners Caution Caution: Removing more than 0.5 mils of the clearcoat can result in early paint failure. The clearcoat contains ultraviolet screeners. Do not finesse sand more than what is required to remove the defect. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Application and ID > Basecoat/Clearcoat Paint Systems Paint: Application and ID Basecoat/Clearcoat Paint Systems Basecoat/Clearcoat Paint Systems Warning Exposure to isocyanates during paint preparation and application processes can cause severe breathing problems. Read and follow all of the instructions from the manufacturers of painting materials, equipment, and protective gear. All paint finish repairs of rigid exterior surfaces must meet GM standards. Refer to the latest revision of the GM Approved Refinish Materials book to identify the paint systems you may use that have been engineered to meet GM standards. The GM Approved Refinish Materials book supplies all approved products, including volatile organic compound (VOC) compliant regulations recommended by the individual manufacturer, and detailed procedures for materials used in their paint system. The latest revision of the GM Approved Refinish Materials book is located on the Goodwrench website. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Application and ID > Basecoat/Clearcoat Paint Systems > Page 12444 Paint: Application and ID Paint Identification Paint Identification Warning Exposure to isocyanates during paint preparation and application processes can cause severe breathing problems. Read and follow all of the instructions from the manufacturers of painting materials, equipment, and protective gear. Note: Always refer to the GM Approved Refinish Materials booklet. This information identifies the paint systems you may use. The latest revision of the GM Approved Refinish Materials book is located on the Goodwrench website. Use the service parts identification label to identify the type of paint technology, paint codes, trim level, and any special order paint colors on the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Certification, Tire Placard, Anti-Theft, and Service Parts ID Label (See: Application and ID/Vehicle Certification, Tire Placard, Anti-Theft and Service Parts ID Label). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Radiator Support > Component Information > Service and Repair Radiator Support: Service and Repair Front End Upper Tie Bar Replacement Removal Procedure Warning: Refer to Approved Equipment for Collision Repair Warning (See: Service Precautions/Technician Safety Information/Approved Equipment for Collision Repair Warning). Warning: Refer to Glass and Sheet Metal Handling Warning (See: Service Precautions/Technician Safety Information/Glass and Sheet Metal Handling Warning). Note: Before beginning the repair, refer to Metal Panel Bonding () for proper adhesive applicator preparations and general information. 1. Disable the supplemental inflatable restraint (SIR) system. Refer to SIR Disabling and Enabling (See: Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming/Service and Repair). 2. Disconnect the negative battery cable. Refer to Battery Negative Cable Disconnection and Connection (See: Starting and Charging/Battery/Battery Cable/Negative/Service and Repair/Battery Negative Cable Disconnection and Connection). 3. Remove all related panels and components. 4. Repair as much of the damage as possible to factory specifications. Refer to Dimensions - Body (). 5. Note the location and remove the sealers and anti-corrosion materials from the repair area, as necessary. Refer to Anti-Corrosion Treatment and Repair (). Note: Do not damage any inner panels or reinforcements. Record the number and location of the original welds for installation of the service part. 6. Locate and drill out all factory welds (1). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Radiator Support > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 12448 7. Remove the damaged tie bar assembly (1). Installation Procedure Note: If the location of the original plug welds cannot be determined or structural weld- thru adhesive was present, space plug weld holes every 40 mm (1 1/2 in) apart. 1. Drill 8 mm (5/16 in) plug weld holes in the service part as necessary in the locations noted from the original panel (1). 2. Prepare all mating surfaces as necessary. 3. Apply GM-approved Weld-Thru Coating or equivalent to all mating surfaces. Refer to Anti-Corrosion Treatment and Repair (). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Radiator Support > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 12449 4. Position the tie bar assembly to the vehicle using 3-dimensional measuring equipment (1). Clamp the tie bar assembly into place. 5. Plug weld accordingly (1). 6. Clean and prepare all welded surfaces. 7. Apply the sealers and anti-corrosion materials to the repair area, as necessary. Refer to Anti-Corrosion Treatment and Repair (). 8. Paint the repair area. Refer to Basecoat/Clearcoat Paint Systems (See: Paint, Striping and Decals/Paint/Application and ID/Basecoat/Clearcoat Paint Systems). 9. Install all related panels and components. 10. Connect the negative battery cable. Refer to Battery Negative Cable Disconnection and Connection (See: Starting and Charging/Battery/Battery Cable/Negative/Service and Repair/Battery Negative Cable Disconnection and Connection). 11. Enable the SIR system. Refer to SIR Disabling and Enabling (See: Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming/Service and Repair). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Door Lock Relay > Component Information > Locations Door Lock Relay: Locations Electrical Center Identification Views X50A Fuse Block - Underhood, Label Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Door Lock Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 12454 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Diagrams Keyless Entry Module: Diagrams K77 Remote Control Door Lock Receiver Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 12458 Keyless Entry Module: Service and Repair Remote Control Door Lock Receiver Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Memory Positioning Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Electrical - L/H Seat Inop./Erratic Memory Sys Operation Memory Positioning Module: Technical Service Bulletins Electrical - L/H Seat Inop./Erratic Memory Sys Operation TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 09-08-50-015B Date: January 15, 2010 Subject: Driver Power Seat Inoperative, Outside Mirrors Do Not Return to Original Position with Park Tilt Mirrors, Memory Remote Recall Intermittent Operation, Adjustable Pedals Inoperative (Reprogram Memory Seat Module) Models: 2010 Cadillac SRX Built Prior to January 6, 2010 2010 Chevrolet Equinox 2010 GMC Terrain All Built Prior to November 2, 2009 Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the 2010 Cadillac SRX build date. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 09-08-50-015A (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Condition Some customers may comment on one or more of the following concerns: - The driver power seat is inoperative (when equipped with Memory Seat only). The driver seat will not move forward, rearward and the recliner will not move forward or rearward. The customer may also experience the inability to move the seat up or down. - The outside mirrors do not return to the original position after the Park Tilt Mirrors function is engaged. The customer may report that the outside mirrors tilt downward when placing the vehicle in reverse, attempt to return to the original position, but do not reach the memory position after taking the vehicle out of reverse. The customer may also witness the mirrors staying in the tilt position and not returning to the memory position at all. - The Memory Remote Recall feature operates intermittently. If the customer enables the Memory Remote Recall feature in the Vehicle Personalization menu, they may comment about intermittent operation. - The Adjustable Pedals are inoperative (Cadillac SRX only). The customer may experience the inability to move the Adjustable Pedals forward or rearward. Cause This condition may be caused by a software state, interaction of features and serial data messages that can contribute to one or more of the above conditions. Correction Important DO NOT replace the MSM for this concern. Reprogram and perform the Setup procedure for the MSM with the latest software calibration. Refer to Memory Seat Control Module Programming and Setup in SI. Important Select the correct calibration files for the appropriate vehicle configuration (body style) and RPO codes. A revised calibration has been developed to address this condition. Technicians are to reprogram the MSM using the Service Programming System (SPS) with the latest software available on TIS2WEB. Refer to the Service Programming System (SPS) procedures in SI. When using a Tech 2(R) or a Multiple Diagnostic Interface (MDI) for reprogramming, ensure that it is updated with the latest software version. During programming, the battery voltage must be maintained within the proper range of 12-15 Volts. Only use the approved Midtronics(R) PSC 550 Battery Maintainer (SPS Programming Support Tool EL-49642) or equivalent during programming. Warranty Information Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Memory Positioning Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Electrical - L/H Seat Inop./Erratic Memory Sys Operation > Page 12463 For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table above. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Memory Positioning Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 12464 Memory Positioning Module: Locations Passenger Compartment/Roof Component Views Driver Seat Components 1 - M56D Seat Recline Motor - Driver (AE8) 2 - E14A Seat Heating Element - Driver Back (KA1) 3 P22E Video Display - Driver Seatback (UWG) 4 - F106L Side Air Bag - Left 5 - M52D Seat Lumbar Support Horizontal Motor - Driver 6 - M51D Seat Horizontal Motor - Driver (AE8) 7 - K40 Seat Memory Control Module (LTZ or SLT) or K29 Seat Heating Control Module (KA1 without LTZ or SLT) 8 - F113D Seat Belt Anchor Pretensioner - Driver 9 - M55D Seat Rear Vertical Motor (AE8) or M57D Seat Vertical Motor (without AE8) 10 - M50D Seat Front Vertical Motor - Driver 11 - S65D Seat Lumbar Support Switch - Driver 12 - S64D Seat Adjuster Switch - Driver (without AE8) 13 S64D Seat Adjuster Switch - Driver (AE8) 14 - S47D Seat Memory Switch - Driver (LTZ or SLT) 15 - E14B Seat Heating Element - Driver Cushion (KA1) 16 - B88D Seat Belt Switch - Driver Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Memory Positioning Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 12465 Memory Positioning Module: Diagrams K40 Seat Memory Control Module X1 (LTZ or SLT) K40 Seat Memory Control Module X2 (LTZ or SLT) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Memory Positioning Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 12466 K40 Seat Memory Control Module X3 (KA1 with LTZ or SLT) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Memory Positioning Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 12467 K40 Seat Memory Control Module X4 (LTZ or SLT) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Memory Positioning Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 12468 K40 Seat Memory Control Module X5 (LTZ or SLT) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Memory Positioning Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 12469 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Power Mirror Control Module > Component Information > Locations Power Mirror Control Module: Locations Door Component Views Driver Door Components 1 - A23D Door Latch Assembly - Driver 2 - A9A Outside Rearview Mirror - Driver 3 - E1C Accent Lamp - Driver Door Handle (LTZ or SLT) 4 - K96L Mirror Control Module - Left (LTZ or SLT) 5 S52S Outside Rearview Mirror Switch 6 - P19G Speaker - Left Front 7 - M74D Window Motor Driver 8 - B63LF Side Impact Sensor - Left Front 9 - S79D Window Switch - Driver 10 - E1D Accent Lamp - Driver Door (LTZ or SLT) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Power Mirror Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 12473 Power Mirror Control Module: Diagrams K96L Mirror Control Module - Left (LTZ or SLT) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Power Mirror Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 12474 Power Mirror Control Module: Service and Repair Outside Rearview Mirror Folding Control Module Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Power Seat Control Module > Component Information > Locations Power Seat Control Module: Locations Passenger Compartment/Roof Component Views Driver Seat Components 1 - M56D Seat Recline Motor - Driver (AE8) 2 - E14A Seat Heating Element - Driver Back (KA1) 3 P22E Video Display - Driver Seatback (UWG) 4 - F106L Side Air Bag - Left 5 - M52D Seat Lumbar Support Horizontal Motor - Driver 6 - M51D Seat Horizontal Motor - Driver (AE8) 7 - K40 Seat Memory Control Module (LTZ or SLT) or K29 Seat Heating Control Module (KA1 without LTZ or SLT) 8 - F113D Seat Belt Anchor Pretensioner - Driver 9 - M55D Seat Rear Vertical Motor (AE8) or M57D Seat Vertical Motor (without AE8) 10 - M50D Seat Front Vertical Motor - Driver 11 - S65D Seat Lumbar Support Switch - Driver 12 - S64D Seat Adjuster Switch - Driver (without AE8) 13 S64D Seat Adjuster Switch - Driver (AE8) 14 - S47D Seat Memory Switch - Driver (LTZ or SLT) 15 - E14B Seat Heating Element - Driver Cushion (KA1) 16 - B88D Seat Belt Switch - Driver Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Power Seat Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 12478 Power Seat Control Module: Diagrams K40 Seat Memory Control Module X1 (LTZ or SLT) K40 Seat Memory Control Module X2 (LTZ or SLT) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Power Seat Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 12479 K40 Seat Memory Control Module X3 (KA1 with LTZ or SLT) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Power Seat Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 12480 K40 Seat Memory Control Module X4 (LTZ or SLT) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Power Seat Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 12481 K40 Seat Memory Control Module X5 (LTZ or SLT) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Power Seat Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 12482 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Power Seat Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 12483 Power Seat Control Module: Service and Repair Driver or Passenger Seat Adjuster Memory Module Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module: > 09-08-66-010B > Mar > 10 > Body - Power Liftgate Inoperative from Key FOB Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module: Customer Interest Body - Power Liftgate Inoperative from Key FOB TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 09-08-66-010B Date: March 25, 2010 Subject: Power Liftgate Inoperative from Key FOB, Interior Mounted Open/Close Switch, Gate Mounted Open/Close Switch and Gate Mounted Touch Pad (Reprogram Liftgate Control Module) Models: 2010 Cadillac CTS Sport Wagon, SRX 2010 Chevrolet Equinox 2010 GMC Terrain Built Prior to the Following VIN Breakpoints: Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add VIN breakpoint information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 09-08-66-010A (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Condition - Some customers may comment that the power liftgate is inoperative from the key FOB, the interior mounted open/close switch, the liftgate mounted open/close switch and the liftgate mounted touch pad. - 2010 Cadillac CTS Sport Wagon ONLY - Some customers may comment that the power liftgate does not open on first attempt, but will open on subsequent consecutive attempts. Cause This condition may be caused by a power liftgate microprocessor issue that could cause the power liftgate module to stop communicating on the GMLAN Serial Data Bus. Correction Note If the power liftgate module is not communicating, remove the two power liftgate module fuses, wait a minimum of 1 minute , and reinstall the two fuses; or disconnect the power liftgate module (disconnect all three connectors at the module), check and verify power and ground to the module, and re-connect the power liftgate module. Verify communication. If communication is restored, then update the software in the power liftgate module. - A revised power liftgate module calibration has been released to address this condition. Reprogram the power liftgate module using the Service Programming System (SPS) with the latest calibration available on TIS2WEB. Refer to the SPS procedures in SI. - When using a multiple diagnostic interface (MDI) for reprogramming, ensure that it is updated with the latest software version. - When using a Tech 2(R) for reprogramming, ensure that it is updated with the latest software version. - During programming, the battery voltage must be maintained within the proper range of 12-16 volts. Only use the approved Midtronics(R) PSC 550 Battery Maintainer (SPS Programming Support Tool EL-49642) or equivalent during programming. Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table above. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module: > 09-08-66-010B > Mar > 10 > Body - Power Liftgate Inoperative from Key FOB > Page 12492 Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module: > 09-08-66-010B > Mar > 10 > Body - Power Liftgate Inoperative from Key FOB Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - Power Liftgate Inoperative from Key FOB TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 09-08-66-010B Date: March 25, 2010 Subject: Power Liftgate Inoperative from Key FOB, Interior Mounted Open/Close Switch, Gate Mounted Open/Close Switch and Gate Mounted Touch Pad (Reprogram Liftgate Control Module) Models: 2010 Cadillac CTS Sport Wagon, SRX 2010 Chevrolet Equinox 2010 GMC Terrain Built Prior to the Following VIN Breakpoints: Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add VIN breakpoint information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 09-08-66-010A (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Condition - Some customers may comment that the power liftgate is inoperative from the key FOB, the interior mounted open/close switch, the liftgate mounted open/close switch and the liftgate mounted touch pad. - 2010 Cadillac CTS Sport Wagon ONLY - Some customers may comment that the power liftgate does not open on first attempt, but will open on subsequent consecutive attempts. Cause This condition may be caused by a power liftgate microprocessor issue that could cause the power liftgate module to stop communicating on the GMLAN Serial Data Bus. Correction Note If the power liftgate module is not communicating, remove the two power liftgate module fuses, wait a minimum of 1 minute , and reinstall the two fuses; or disconnect the power liftgate module (disconnect all three connectors at the module), check and verify power and ground to the module, and re-connect the power liftgate module. Verify communication. If communication is restored, then update the software in the power liftgate module. - A revised power liftgate module calibration has been released to address this condition. Reprogram the power liftgate module using the Service Programming System (SPS) with the latest calibration available on TIS2WEB. Refer to the SPS procedures in SI. - When using a multiple diagnostic interface (MDI) for reprogramming, ensure that it is updated with the latest software version. - When using a Tech 2(R) for reprogramming, ensure that it is updated with the latest software version. - During programming, the battery voltage must be maintained within the proper range of 12-16 volts. Only use the approved Midtronics(R) PSC 550 Battery Maintainer (SPS Programming Support Tool EL-49642) or equivalent during programming. Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table above. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module: > 09-08-66-010B > Mar > 10 > Body - Power Liftgate Inoperative from Key FOB > Page 12498 Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 12499 Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module: Locations Luggage Compartment/Rear of Vehicle Component Views Liftgate Components 1 - B71R Liftgate Object Sensor - Right (TB5) 2 - E18 Rear Defogger Grid 3 - B71L Liftgate Object Sensor - Left (TB5) 4 - M45 Rear Wiper Motor 5 - K39 Liftgate Control Module (TB5) 6 - A23C Liftgate Latch Assembly 7 - B70 Liftgate Close Switch (TB5) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 12500 Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module: Diagrams K39 Liftgate Control Module X1 (TB5) K39 Liftgate Control Module X2 (TB5) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 12501 K39 Liftgate Control Module X3 (TB5) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 12502 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 12503 Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module: Service and Repair Accessory and Liftgate Control Module Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Control Module > Component Information > Locations Seat Heater Control Module: Locations Passenger Compartment/Roof Component Views Driver Seat Components 1 - M56D Seat Recline Motor - Driver (AE8) 2 - E14A Seat Heating Element - Driver Back (KA1) 3 P22E Video Display - Driver Seatback (UWG) 4 - F106L Side Air Bag - Left 5 - M52D Seat Lumbar Support Horizontal Motor - Driver 6 - M51D Seat Horizontal Motor - Driver (AE8) 7 - K40 Seat Memory Control Module (LTZ or SLT) or K29 Seat Heating Control Module (KA1 without LTZ or SLT) 8 - F113D Seat Belt Anchor Pretensioner - Driver 9 - M55D Seat Rear Vertical Motor (AE8) or M57D Seat Vertical Motor (without AE8) 10 - M50D Seat Front Vertical Motor - Driver 11 - S65D Seat Lumbar Support Switch - Driver 12 - S64D Seat Adjuster Switch - Driver (without AE8) 13 S64D Seat Adjuster Switch - Driver (AE8) 14 - S47D Seat Memory Switch - Driver (LTZ or SLT) 15 - E14B Seat Heating Element - Driver Cushion (KA1) 16 - B88D Seat Belt Switch - Driver Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 12507 Seat Heater Control Module: Diagrams K29 Seat Heating Control Module X1 (KA1 without LTZ or SLT) K29 Seat Heating Control Module X1 (SPO Accessory) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 12508 K29 Seat Heating Control Module X2 (KA1 without LTZ or SLT) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 12509 K29 Seat Heating Control Module X3 (KA1 without LTZ or SLT) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 12510 K29 Seat Heating Control Module X3 (SPO Accessory) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 12511 K29 Seat Heating Control Module X4 (SPO Accessory) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 12512 K29 Seat Heating Control Module X5 (SPO Accessory) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 12513 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 12514 Seat Heater Control Module: Service and Repair Front Seat Heater Control Module Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Trunk / Liftgate Relay > Component Information > Locations Trunk / Liftgate Relay: Locations Electrical Center Identification Views X50A Fuse Block - Underhood, Label Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Trunk / Liftgate Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 12518 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Luggage Rack > Component Information > Specifications Luggage Rack: Specifications Fastener Tightening Specifications Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Luggage Rack > Component Information > Specifications > Page 12523 Luggage Rack: Service and Repair Luggage Carrier Side Rail Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sun Shade > Component Information > Diagrams Sun Shade: Diagrams Component Connector End Views A3L Sunshade - Left Front A3R Sunshade - Right Front Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sun Shade > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 12528 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sun Shade > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 12529 Sun Shade: Service and Repair Sunroof Sunshade Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the sunroof window. Refer to Sunroof Window Replacement (See: Sunroof / Moonroof Panel/Service and Repair). 2. Remove the screws from the sunroof drain channel. 3. Remove the sunroof drain channel. Slide the sunshade (2) forward to the closed position. 4. Apply slight upward pressure to the rear of the sunshade flange close to either left or right of the guide track to disengage the tab. 5. Rotate the rear of the sunshade toward the guide tab was disengaged until all tabs release. 6. Remove the sunshade (2) from the sunroof frame (1). Installation Procedure 1. Engage one front tab of the sunshade by positioning it into the lower guide track. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sun Shade > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 12530 2. Rotate the sunshade (1) toward opposite guide to engage other front tab while ensuring rear tab of first side engaged. 3. Gently apply upward pressure to the rear sunshade flange to engage last tab. 4. Slide the sunshade back and forth to ensure proper operation. 5. Slide the sunshade to the half closed position. Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener Caution). 6. Install the rear drain channel, large flange to rear. Tighten the bolts to 2 Nm (18 lb in). 7. Install the sunroof window. Refer to Sunroof Window Replacement (See: Sunroof / Moonroof Panel/Service and Repair). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Motor > Component Information > Locations Sunroof / Moonroof Motor: Locations Passenger Compartment/Roof Component Views Headliner Components 2 - E37R Dome/Reading Lamps - Rear 3 - B77R Radio Volume Compensator Interior Noise Microphone - Rear (VQN) 4 - M69 Sunroof Motor (CF5) 5 - E37M Dome/Reading Lamps - Middle 6 - E37EL Dome/Reading Lamps - Front Overhead Console Left 7 - S12 Dome Lamp Switch 8 - B24 Cellular Phone Microphone (UE1) 9 - S72 Sunroof Switch (CF5) 10 - S45B Liftgate Control Switch Interior (TB5) 11 - S88 Sunroof Tilt Switch (CF5) 12 - S17RF Dome/Reading Lamps Switch - Front Overhead Console Right 13 - S17LF Dome/Reading Lamps Switch - Front Overhead Console Left 14 - E37ER Dome/Reading Lamps - Front Overhead Console Right 15 - E1L Accent Lamp Overhead Console (LT or LTZ or SLE2 or SLT) 16 - P14 Passenger Airbag Disable Indicator 17 - A3R Sunshade - Right Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Motor > Component Information > Locations > Page 12534 18 - K77 Remote Control Door Lock Receiver 19 - A10 Inside Rearview Mirror 20 - P7 Display (UVC without UYS or PCJ) 21 - A3L Sunshade - Left 22 - B77F Radio Volume Compensator Interior Noise Microphone - Front (VQN) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Motor > Component Information > Locations > Page 12535 Sunroof / Moonroof Motor: Diagrams M69 Sunroof Motor (CF5) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Motor > Component Information > Locations > Page 12536 Sunroof / Moonroof Motor: Testing and Inspection Sunroof Motor/Actuator Initialization/Teach Process Note: If the sunroof motor is new, cycle the sunroof seven (7) times to teach the motor/actuator initialization process. 1. Perform the initialization/teach process on a new or reinstalled motor as follows: 1. Ensure that the headliner electrical harness is connected to the sunroof motor. 2. Put the vehicle Park Brake On. 3. Ensure that the vehicle is in Park. 4. Engine running. Note: If the sunroof window doesn't go to the vent open position first time, release the switch and press the switch again. 2. Press and hold the sunroof switch to the vent open position until the sunroof window stops in the vent open position. 3. Again press and hold the sunroof switch to the vent open position for at least 10 seconds, then the window should move slightly. 4. Verify the sunroof operation. If the initialization/teach procedure is not carried out completely, it has to be started again. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Motor > Component Information > Locations > Page 12537 Sunroof / Moonroof Motor: Service and Repair Sunroof Motor/Actuator Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Switch > Component Information > Locations Sunroof / Moonroof Switch: Locations Passenger Compartment/Roof Component Views Headliner Components 2 - E37R Dome/Reading Lamps - Rear 3 - B77R Radio Volume Compensator Interior Noise Microphone - Rear (VQN) 4 - M69 Sunroof Motor (CF5) 5 - E37M Dome/Reading Lamps - Middle 6 - E37EL Dome/Reading Lamps - Front Overhead Console Left 7 - S12 Dome Lamp Switch 8 - B24 Cellular Phone Microphone (UE1) 9 - S72 Sunroof Switch (CF5) 10 - S45B Liftgate Control Switch Interior (TB5) 11 - S88 Sunroof Tilt Switch (CF5) 12 - S17RF Dome/Reading Lamps Switch - Front Overhead Console Right 13 - S17LF Dome/Reading Lamps Switch - Front Overhead Console Left 14 - E37ER Dome/Reading Lamps - Front Overhead Console Right 15 - E1L Accent Lamp Overhead Console (LT or LTZ or SLE2 or SLT) 16 - P14 Passenger Airbag Disable Indicator 17 - A3R Sunshade - Right Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 12541 18 - K77 Remote Control Door Lock Receiver 19 - A10 Inside Rearview Mirror 20 - P7 Display (UVC without UYS or PCJ) 21 - A3L Sunshade - Left 22 - B77F Radio Volume Compensator Interior Noise Microphone - Front (VQN) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 12542 Sunroof / Moonroof Switch: Diagrams S72 Sunroof Switch (CF5) S88 Sunroof Tilt Switch (CF5) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 12543 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Sunroof Tilt Position Switch Replacement Sunroof / Moonroof Switch: Service and Repair Sunroof Tilt Position Switch Replacement Sunroof Tilt Position Switch Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Sunroof Tilt Position Switch Replacement > Page 12546 Sunroof / Moonroof Switch: Service and Repair Sunroof Switch Sunroof Switch Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Track > Component Information > Service and Repair Sunroof / Moonroof Track: Service and Repair Sunroof Track Timing/Synchronization 1. It is only necessary to lower the headliner. Only do those steps in the headliner replacement procedure that will lower the headliner enough to gain access to the part. Refer to Headlining Trim Panel Replacement (See: Interior Moulding / Trim/Headliner/Service and Repair). 2. Place the sunroof window in the vent/open position. 3. Remove the screws from the motor/actuator. 4. Disengage the motor/actuator from the drive cables and module. Note: After the motor/actuator has been remove it will be necessary to align the module tracks. 5. Remove the sunroof window. Refer to Sunroof Window Replacement (See: Sunroof / Moonroof Panel/Service and Repair). 6. Sliding the drive cable plates (1) on the left and right forward until the first stop is made (2), this will lock the sliding bracket and release drive cable plate. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Track > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 12550 7. Manually adjust the drive cable plates (1) on the left and right sides, by sliding them forward until contact is made to the guide crimp (timing hard stop). 8. Install the sunroof motor/actuator. Refer to Sunroof Motor/Actuator Replacement (See: Sunroof / Moonroof Motor/Service and Repair). 9. Install the sunroof window. Refer to Sunroof Window Replacement (See: Sunroof / Moonroof Panel/Service and Repair). 10. Ensure the motor/actuator initialization/teach process has been done. Refer to Sunroof Motor/Actuator Initialization/Teach Process (See: Sunroof / Moonroof Motor/Testing and Inspection). 11. Verify the sunroof for proper operation. 12. Install the headliner. Refer to Headlining Trim Panel Replacement (See: Interior Moulding / Trim/Headliner/Service and Repair). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Windguard > Component Information > Service and Repair Sunroof / Moonroof Windguard: Service and Repair Sunroof Air Deflector Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Drain > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures Sunroof / Moonroof Drain: Procedures Sunroof Drain Inspection and Cleaning Drain Hose Routing Note: If the headliner is wet DO NOT remove any interior trim. Do the Plugged Drain Hose test first. A drain trough encircles the sunroof window panel and water is drained off by the drain hoses located at each corner of the housing. A drain channel spans across the sunroof module at the rear of the window panel and directs water into the trough. 1. The front drain hoses are routed down the windshield pillars and out the plenum upper panel (wiper pocket). The front hoses are installed in a rubber grommet and retained by clips. 2. The rear drain hoses are routed through the rear pillars and out of the rocker panel. In some vehicle the drain hoses are routed out through the metal roof slots and routed to the lower wheelhouse to drain out of the vehicle. The rear hoses are installed in a rubber grommet and retained by clips. Plugged Drain Hose If a waterleak has occurred check for a plugged drain hose at each corner of drainage system. 1. Open the sunroof window. 2. To test for blockage, pour a small container of water into the module housing drain trough. Check each corner to confirm the drain hose is draining water. Warning Wear safety glasses in order to avoid eye damage. 3. Use compressed air, 241 kPa (35 psi) or less to blow out any drain hose that is plugged. 4. Test the system again. 5. If the hose remains plugged, check to see it is properly routed and does not have a kink. Refer to Sunroof Housing Front Drain Hose Replacement (See: Removal and Replacement/Sunroof Housing Front Drain Hose Replacement) or Sunroof Housing Rear Drain Hose Replacement (See: Removal and Replacement/Sunroof Housing Rear Drain Hose Replacement). 6. Remove the blockage using the following steps. 1. Push mechanics wire through the hose to remove the obstruction. 2. Use compressed air in order to blow out any remaining material. Disconnected Drain Hose Inspect the drainage system for disconnected drain hoses. Complete the following steps in order to obtain partial access to drain hoses and check for a disconnected hose. 1. Open the sunroof window panel. 2. Lower the headliner as needed. Refer to Headlining Trim Panel Replacement (See: Interior Moulding / Trim/Headliner/Service and Repair). 3. Connect any disconnected hoses. 4. Ensure that the rear drain hoses are properly routed in the metal roof slot and taped in place. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Drain > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 12558 Sunroof / Moonroof Drain: Removal and Replacement Sunroof Housing Front Drain Hose Replacement Sunroof Housing Front Drain Hose Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Drain > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 12559 Sunroof Housing Rear Drain Hose Replacement Sunroof Housing Rear Drain Hose Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Drain > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 12560 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Frame > Component Information > Service and Repair Sunroof / Moonroof Frame: Service and Repair Sunroof Frame Replacement Removal Procedure 1. It is only necessary to lower the headliner. Only do those step in headliner replacement that will lower the headliner enough to gain access to the part. Refer to Headlining Trim Panel Replacement (See: Interior Moulding / Trim/Headliner/Service and Repair). 2. Remove the sunroof window. Refer to Sunroof Window Replacement (See: Sunroof / Moonroof Panel/Service and Repair). 3. Disconnect the electrical connector from the sunroof frame. 4. Disconnect the front and rear sunroof drain hoses. Refer to Sunroof Housing Front Drain Hose Replacement (See: Sunroof / Moonroof Drain/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Sunroof Housing Front Drain Hose Replacement) and Sunroof Housing Rear Drain Hose Replacement (See: Sunroof / Moonroof Drain/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Sunroof Housing Rear Drain Hose Replacement). 5. With the aid of an assistant, remove the bolts (1) that secure the sunroof frame (2). Installation Procedure 1. Before transferring any parts perform the timing/synchronization of the sunroof frame. Refer to Sunroof Track Timing/Synchronization (See: Sunroof / Moonroof Track/Service and Repair). 2. Transfer all necessary parts to the new frame. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Frame > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 12564 3. With the aid of an assistant, position the new sunroof frame (2) into the roof opening. Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener Caution). 4. With the aid of an assistant, install the bolts (1) that secure the sunroof frame (2) to the roof. Tighten the bolts to 8 Nm (70 lb in). 5. Connect the front and rear sunroof drain hoses. Refer to Sunroof Housing Front Drain Hose Replacement (See: Sunroof / Moonroof Drain/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Sunroof Housing Front Drain Hose Replacement) and Sunroof Housing Rear Drain Hose Replacement (See: Sunroof / Moonroof Drain/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Sunroof Housing Rear Drain Hose Replacement). 6. Connect the electrical connectors to the sunroof frame. 7. Install and adjust the sunroof window. Refer to Sunroof Window Replacement (See: Sunroof / Moonroof Panel/Service and Repair). 8. Ensure the motor/actuator initialization/teach process has been done. Refer to Sunroof Motor/Actuator Initialization/Teach Process (See: Sunroof / Moonroof Motor/Testing and Inspection). 9. Verify the proper operation of the sunroof before installing the headliner. 10. Install the headliner. Refer to Headlining Trim Panel Replacement (See: Interior Moulding / Trim/Headliner/Service and Repair). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Panel > Component Information > Adjustments Sunroof / Moonroof Panel: Adjustments Sunroof Window Height and Opening Fit Adjustment 1. Remove the sunroof panel side opening closeout covers. Refer to Sunroof Panel Side Opening Closeout Cover Replacement (See: Service and Repair/Sunroof Panel Side Opening Closeout Cover Replacement). Note: Correct adjustment cannot be achieved if the sunroof window is closed from vent position. 2. Cycle the sunroof window from full open to closed position. Note: Do Not remove or lower headliner to access sunroof window screws. 3. Loosen the adjusting screws on the window. 4. Adjust the corners of the front window panel using the following guidelines: * Adjust the front of the sunroof window to 0.0 mm-1.0 mm (0.0 in-0.04 in ) below the top surface of the roof panel. * Adjust the rear center line of the sunroof window to 2 mm-3 mm (0.08 in-0.12 in) below the top surface of the roof panel. Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener Caution). 5. Tighten the sunroof window adjustment screws to 5 Nm (44 lb in). 6. Cycle sunroof window through all positions. 7. Inspect the sunroof window adjustment. Adjust if necessary. 8. Install the sunroof panel side opening closeout covers. Refer to Sunroof Panel Side Opening Closeout Cover Replacement (See: Service and Repair/Sunroof Panel Side Opening Closeout Cover Replacement). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Sunroof Panel Side Opening Closeout Cover Replacement Sunroof / Moonroof Panel: Service and Repair Sunroof Panel Side Opening Closeout Cover Replacement Sunroof Panel Side Opening Closeout Cover Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Open the sunshade to the full rearward position. 2. Open the sunroof window (1) to the vent position. 3. Detach both sides of the sunroof side opening closeout panel covers (6) from the sunroof window clips (2). 4. Open the sunroof to the full open position. 5. Using a flat-bladed tool, press the locking tab (4) outward, from inside the roof opening, in order to detach the side opening closeout panel cover from the sunroof track channel (3). 6. With the lock tab (4) depressed, lift the front edge of the side opening closeout panel cover from the track, working towards the rear of the sunroof opening. 7. Repeat the steps for the entire length of the side opening closeout panel cover (6). 8. Remove the sunroof side opening closeout panel cover from the sunroof module track assembly. Installation Procedure 1. Place in position, the new sunroof side opening closeout panel cover (6) to the sunroof module track assembly (3). 2. Hold the lower part (5) of the side opening closeout panel cover firmly and press the locking tab (4) into the track assembly. 3. Ensure the entire length of the side opening closeout panel cover (6) is secure to the sunroof assembly track. 4. Close the sunroof window (1). 5. Open the sunroof window to the vent position. 6. Secure the sunroof side opening closeout panel cover (6) to the 3 clips (2) located on the inside edge of the sunroof window. 7. Close the sunroof window. 8. Cycle the sunroof window to the vent position and full open positions in order to ensure the sunroof side opening closeout panel covers are secure to the attachment clips. 9. Close the sunroof window. 10. Close the sunshade. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Sunroof Panel Side Opening Closeout Cover Replacement > Page 12570 Sunroof / Moonroof Panel: Service and Repair Sunroof Window Sunroof Window Replacement Removal Procedure Caution: In order to prevent damage to the paint, mask the roof panel in front of the sunroof opening using masking tape and paper. 1. Cycle the sunroof window to the vent position. 2. Slide the sunshade rearward. 3. Remove the sunroof panel side opening closeout covers. Refer to Sunroof Panel Side Opening Closeout Cover Replacement (See: Sunroof Panel Side Opening Closeout Cover Replacement). 4. Remove the sunroof window screws (1) on both sides. Note: If operating the sunroof without the window, refer to Sunroof Air Deflector Replacement (See: Sunroof / Moonroof Windguard/Service and Repair). 5. Lift the sunroof window from the sunroof opening. Installation Procedure 1. Position the sunroof window into the opening. 2. Install the sunroof window screws (1). Do not tighten the screws. 3. Carefully close the sunroof window from the vent position to the full closed position. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Sunroof Panel Side Opening Closeout Cover Replacement > Page 12571 4. Adjust the sunroof window. Refer to Sunroof Window Height and Opening Fit Adjustment (See: Adjustments). Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener Caution). 5. Tighten the sunroof window screws to 5 Nm (44 lb in). 6. Install the sunroof panel side opening closeout covers. Refer to Sunroof Panel Side Opening Closeout Cover Replacement (See: Sunroof Panel Side Opening Closeout Cover Replacement). 7. Operate the window to ensure that the window seal properly to the frame. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Head Rest > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driver or Passenger Seat Head Restraint Replacement Head Rest: Service and Repair Driver or Passenger Seat Head Restraint Replacement Driver or Passenger Seat Head Restraint Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Head Rest > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driver or Passenger Seat Head Restraint Replacement > Page 12577 Head Rest: Service and Repair Front Seat Head Restraint Guide Replacement Front Seat Head Restraint Guide Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Head Rest > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driver or Passenger Seat Head Restraint Replacement > Page 12578 Head Rest: Service and Repair Rear Seat Head Restraint Replacement Rear Seat Head Restraint Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Head Rest > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driver or Passenger Seat Head Restraint Replacement > Page 12579 Head Rest: Service and Repair Rear Seat Head Restraint Guide Replacement Rear Seat Head Restraint Guide Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Head Restraint System > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Restraints - Driver/Passenger Seat Head Rest Information Head Restraint System: Technical Service Bulletins Restraints - Driver/Passenger Seat Head Rest Information INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 10-08-50-003A Date: March 24, 2011 Subject: Information on Driver or Passenger Seat Head Restraint Concerns with Comfort, Custom Upholstery or Other Comfort Enhancing Devices Models: 2012 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks Equipped with Adjustable Head Restraints Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 10-08-50-003 (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Important ON A GM VEHICLE EQUIPPED WITH ADJUSTABLE HEAD RESTRAINTS, USE THE HEAD RESTRAINT COVERS, FOAM AND OTHER SEAT-RELATED EQUIPMENT AS RELEASED BY GM FOR THAT VEHICLE. DO NOT ALTER OR REPOSITION THE HEAD RESTRAINT SYSTEM. ANY ALTERATIONS TO HEAD RESTRAINTS DEFEATS THE INTENDED DESIGN OF THE SYSTEM. GM WILL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY PROBLEMS CAUSED BY USE OF SUCH IMPROPER DESIGN ALTERATIONS, INCLUDING ANY WARRANTY REPAIRS INCURRED. You may have a customer with a concern that the head restraint is uncomfortable or sits too far forward. The front driver and passenger seats are equipped with head restraints that have been designed to help minimize injuries while still providing comfort to the occupants. Each GM vehicle has its own specifically designed head restraint. The head restraints should only be used in the vehicle for which they were designed. The head restraint will not operate to its design intent if the original foam is replaced (1) by non-GM foam or head restraint, (2) by GM foam or head restraint designed for a different vehicle, (3) by GM foam or head restraint that has been altered by a trim shop or (4) if any object, such as an aftermarket comfort enhancing pad or device, is installed. Never modify the design of the head restraint or remove the head restraint from the vehicle as this may interfere with the operation of the seating and restraint systems and may prevent proper positioning of the passenger within the vehicle. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Memory Positioning Systems > Memory Positioning Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Electrical - L/H Seat Inop./Erratic Memory Sys Operation Memory Positioning Module: Technical Service Bulletins Electrical - L/H Seat Inop./Erratic Memory Sys Operation TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 09-08-50-015B Date: January 15, 2010 Subject: Driver Power Seat Inoperative, Outside Mirrors Do Not Return to Original Position with Park Tilt Mirrors, Memory Remote Recall Intermittent Operation, Adjustable Pedals Inoperative (Reprogram Memory Seat Module) Models: 2010 Cadillac SRX Built Prior to January 6, 2010 2010 Chevrolet Equinox 2010 GMC Terrain All Built Prior to November 2, 2009 Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the 2010 Cadillac SRX build date. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 09-08-50-015A (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Condition Some customers may comment on one or more of the following concerns: - The driver power seat is inoperative (when equipped with Memory Seat only). The driver seat will not move forward, rearward and the recliner will not move forward or rearward. The customer may also experience the inability to move the seat up or down. - The outside mirrors do not return to the original position after the Park Tilt Mirrors function is engaged. The customer may report that the outside mirrors tilt downward when placing the vehicle in reverse, attempt to return to the original position, but do not reach the memory position after taking the vehicle out of reverse. The customer may also witness the mirrors staying in the tilt position and not returning to the memory position at all. - The Memory Remote Recall feature operates intermittently. If the customer enables the Memory Remote Recall feature in the Vehicle Personalization menu, they may comment about intermittent operation. - The Adjustable Pedals are inoperative (Cadillac SRX only). The customer may experience the inability to move the Adjustable Pedals forward or rearward. Cause This condition may be caused by a software state, interaction of features and serial data messages that can contribute to one or more of the above conditions. Correction Important DO NOT replace the MSM for this concern. Reprogram and perform the Setup procedure for the MSM with the latest software calibration. Refer to Memory Seat Control Module Programming and Setup in SI. Important Select the correct calibration files for the appropriate vehicle configuration (body style) and RPO codes. A revised calibration has been developed to address this condition. Technicians are to reprogram the MSM using the Service Programming System (SPS) with the latest software available on TIS2WEB. Refer to the Service Programming System (SPS) procedures in SI. When using a Tech 2(R) or a Multiple Diagnostic Interface (MDI) for reprogramming, ensure that it is updated with the latest software version. During programming, the battery voltage must be maintained within the proper range of 12-15 Volts. Only use the approved Midtronics(R) PSC 550 Battery Maintainer (SPS Programming Support Tool EL-49642) or equivalent during programming. Warranty Information Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Memory Positioning Systems > Memory Positioning Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Electrical - L/H Seat Inop./Erratic Memory Sys Operation > Page 12589 For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table above. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Memory Positioning Systems > Memory Positioning Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 12590 Memory Positioning Module: Locations Passenger Compartment/Roof Component Views Driver Seat Components 1 - M56D Seat Recline Motor - Driver (AE8) 2 - E14A Seat Heating Element - Driver Back (KA1) 3 P22E Video Display - Driver Seatback (UWG) 4 - F106L Side Air Bag - Left 5 - M52D Seat Lumbar Support Horizontal Motor - Driver 6 - M51D Seat Horizontal Motor - Driver (AE8) 7 - K40 Seat Memory Control Module (LTZ or SLT) or K29 Seat Heating Control Module (KA1 without LTZ or SLT) 8 - F113D Seat Belt Anchor Pretensioner - Driver 9 - M55D Seat Rear Vertical Motor (AE8) or M57D Seat Vertical Motor (without AE8) 10 - M50D Seat Front Vertical Motor - Driver 11 - S65D Seat Lumbar Support Switch - Driver 12 - S64D Seat Adjuster Switch - Driver (without AE8) 13 S64D Seat Adjuster Switch - Driver (AE8) 14 - S47D Seat Memory Switch - Driver (LTZ or SLT) 15 - E14B Seat Heating Element - Driver Cushion (KA1) 16 - B88D Seat Belt Switch - Driver Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Memory Positioning Systems > Memory Positioning Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 12591 Memory Positioning Module: Diagrams K40 Seat Memory Control Module X1 (LTZ or SLT) K40 Seat Memory Control Module X2 (LTZ or SLT) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Memory Positioning Systems > Memory Positioning Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 12592 K40 Seat Memory Control Module X3 (KA1 with LTZ or SLT) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Memory Positioning Systems > Memory Positioning Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 12593 K40 Seat Memory Control Module X4 (LTZ or SLT) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Memory Positioning Systems > Memory Positioning Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 12594 K40 Seat Memory Control Module X5 (LTZ or SLT) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Memory Positioning Systems > Memory Positioning Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 12595 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Memory Positioning Systems > Seat Memory Switch > Component Information > Locations Seat Memory Switch: Locations Passenger Compartment/Roof Component Views Driver Seat Components 1 - M56D Seat Recline Motor - Driver (AE8) 2 - E14A Seat Heating Element - Driver Back (KA1) 3 P22E Video Display - Driver Seatback (UWG) 4 - F106L Side Air Bag - Left 5 - M52D Seat Lumbar Support Horizontal Motor - Driver 6 - M51D Seat Horizontal Motor - Driver (AE8) 7 - K40 Seat Memory Control Module (LTZ or SLT) or K29 Seat Heating Control Module (KA1 without LTZ or SLT) 8 - F113D Seat Belt Anchor Pretensioner - Driver 9 - M55D Seat Rear Vertical Motor (AE8) or M57D Seat Vertical Motor (without AE8) 10 - M50D Seat Front Vertical Motor - Driver 11 - S65D Seat Lumbar Support Switch - Driver 12 - S64D Seat Adjuster Switch - Driver (without AE8) 13 S64D Seat Adjuster Switch - Driver (AE8) 14 - S47D Seat Memory Switch - Driver (LTZ or SLT) 15 - E14B Seat Heating Element - Driver Cushion (KA1) 16 - B88D Seat Belt Switch - Driver Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Memory Positioning Systems > Seat Memory Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 12599 Seat Memory Switch: Diagrams S47D Seat Memory Switch - Driver (LTZ or SLT) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Memory Positioning Systems > Seat Memory Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 12600 Seat Memory Switch: Service and Repair Driver Seat Adjuster Memory Switch Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Control Module > Component Information > Locations Power Seat Control Module: Locations Passenger Compartment/Roof Component Views Driver Seat Components 1 - M56D Seat Recline Motor - Driver (AE8) 2 - E14A Seat Heating Element - Driver Back (KA1) 3 P22E Video Display - Driver Seatback (UWG) 4 - F106L Side Air Bag - Left 5 - M52D Seat Lumbar Support Horizontal Motor - Driver 6 - M51D Seat Horizontal Motor - Driver (AE8) 7 - K40 Seat Memory Control Module (LTZ or SLT) or K29 Seat Heating Control Module (KA1 without LTZ or SLT) 8 - F113D Seat Belt Anchor Pretensioner - Driver 9 - M55D Seat Rear Vertical Motor (AE8) or M57D Seat Vertical Motor (without AE8) 10 - M50D Seat Front Vertical Motor - Driver 11 - S65D Seat Lumbar Support Switch - Driver 12 - S64D Seat Adjuster Switch - Driver (without AE8) 13 S64D Seat Adjuster Switch - Driver (AE8) 14 - S47D Seat Memory Switch - Driver (LTZ or SLT) 15 - E14B Seat Heating Element - Driver Cushion (KA1) 16 - B88D Seat Belt Switch - Driver Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 12604 Power Seat Control Module: Diagrams K40 Seat Memory Control Module X1 (LTZ or SLT) K40 Seat Memory Control Module X2 (LTZ or SLT) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 12605 K40 Seat Memory Control Module X3 (KA1 with LTZ or SLT) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 12606 K40 Seat Memory Control Module X4 (LTZ or SLT) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 12607 K40 Seat Memory Control Module X5 (LTZ or SLT) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 12608 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 12609 Power Seat Control Module: Service and Repair Driver or Passenger Seat Adjuster Memory Module Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Motor > Component Information > Locations Power Seat Motor: Locations Passenger Compartment/Roof Component Views Driver Seat Components 1 - M56D Seat Recline Motor - Driver (AE8) 2 - E14A Seat Heating Element - Driver Back (KA1) 3 P22E Video Display - Driver Seatback (UWG) 4 - F106L Side Air Bag - Left 5 - M52D Seat Lumbar Support Horizontal Motor - Driver 6 - M51D Seat Horizontal Motor - Driver (AE8) 7 - K40 Seat Memory Control Module (LTZ or SLT) or K29 Seat Heating Control Module (KA1 without LTZ or SLT) 8 - F113D Seat Belt Anchor Pretensioner - Driver 9 - M55D Seat Rear Vertical Motor (AE8) or M57D Seat Vertical Motor (without AE8) 10 - M50D Seat Front Vertical Motor - Driver 11 - S65D Seat Lumbar Support Switch - Driver 12 - S64D Seat Adjuster Switch - Driver (without AE8) 13 S64D Seat Adjuster Switch - Driver (AE8) 14 - S47D Seat Memory Switch - Driver (LTZ or SLT) 15 - E14B Seat Heating Element - Driver Cushion (KA1) 16 - B88D Seat Belt Switch - Driver Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Motor > Component Information > Locations > Page 12613 Power Seat Motor: Diagrams M50D Seat Front Vertical Motor - Driver (AE8) M51D Seat Horizontal Motor - Driver (AE8) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Motor > Component Information > Locations > Page 12614 M52D Seat Lumbar Support Horizontal Motor - Driver Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Motor > Component Information > Locations > Page 12615 M55D Seat Rear Vertical Motor - Driver Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Motor > Component Information > Locations > Page 12616 M56D Seat Recline Motor - Driver (AE8) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Motor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Seat Tilt Adjuster Actuator Replacement Power Seat Motor: Service and Repair Front Seat Tilt Adjuster Actuator Replacement Front Seat Tilt Adjuster Actuator Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Motor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Seat Tilt Adjuster Actuator Replacement > Page 12619 Power Seat Motor: Service and Repair Front Seat Adjuster Actuator Replacement Front Seat Adjuster Actuator Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Locations Power Seat Switch: Locations Passenger Compartment/Roof Component Views Driver Seat Components 1 - M56D Seat Recline Motor - Driver (AE8) 2 - E14A Seat Heating Element - Driver Back (KA1) 3 P22E Video Display - Driver Seatback (UWG) 4 - F106L Side Air Bag - Left 5 - M52D Seat Lumbar Support Horizontal Motor - Driver 6 - M51D Seat Horizontal Motor - Driver (AE8) 7 - K40 Seat Memory Control Module (LTZ or SLT) or K29 Seat Heating Control Module (KA1 without LTZ or SLT) 8 - F113D Seat Belt Anchor Pretensioner - Driver 9 - M55D Seat Rear Vertical Motor (AE8) or M57D Seat Vertical Motor (without AE8) 10 - M50D Seat Front Vertical Motor - Driver 11 - S65D Seat Lumbar Support Switch - Driver 12 - S64D Seat Adjuster Switch - Driver (without AE8) 13 S64D Seat Adjuster Switch - Driver (AE8) 14 - S47D Seat Memory Switch - Driver (LTZ or SLT) 15 - E14B Seat Heating Element - Driver Cushion (KA1) 16 - B88D Seat Belt Switch - Driver Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 12623 Power Seat Switch: Diagrams S64D Seat Adjuster Switch - Driver (AE8 or LTZ or SLT) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 12624 S64D Seat Adjuster Switch - Driver (without AE8 or LTZ or SLT) S65D Seat Lumbar Support Switch - Driver Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 12625 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driver Seat Adjuster Switch Replacement Power Seat Switch: Service and Repair Driver Seat Adjuster Switch Replacement Driver Seat Adjuster Switch Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driver Seat Adjuster Switch Replacement > Page 12628 Power Seat Switch: Service and Repair Driver Seat Lumbar Control Switch Replacement Driver Seat Lumbar Control Switch Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Back > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driver or Passenger Seat Back Cushion Cover and Pad Replacement Seat Back: Service and Repair Driver or Passenger Seat Back Cushion Cover and Pad Replacement Driver or Passenger Seat Back Cushion Cover and Pad Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Back > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driver or Passenger Seat Back Cushion Cover and Pad Replacement > Page 12633 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Back > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driver or Passenger Seat Back Cushion Cover and Pad Replacement > Page 12634 Seat Back: Service and Repair Driver or Passenger Seat Back Cushion Frame Replacement Driver or Passenger Seat Back Cushion Frame Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Back > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driver or Passenger Seat Back Cushion Cover and Pad Replacement > Page 12635 Seat Back: Service and Repair Driver or Passenger Seat Back Cushion Finish Panel Replacement Driver or Passenger Seat Back Cushion Finish Panel Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Back > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driver or Passenger Seat Back Cushion Cover and Pad Replacement > Page 12636 Seat Back: Service and Repair Rear Seat Back Cushion Latch Cable Replacement Rear Seat Back Cushion Latch Cable Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the rear seat. Refer to Rear Seat Replacement (See: Service and Repair/Rear Seat Replacement). 2. Remove the fastener from the rear seat back latch and pull the latch out from the seat back assembly. 3. Detach the latch cable from the latch. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Back > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driver or Passenger Seat Back Cushion Cover and Pad Replacement > Page 12637 4. If you are going to replace the cable, disconnect the latch cable at the seat recliner mechanism. 5. Open the J-strip at the bottom of the seat cover. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Back > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driver or Passenger Seat Back Cushion Cover and Pad Replacement > Page 12638 6. Attach a mechanics wire to the cable to guide it through the seat back. 7. Pull the cable out from the seat back assembly. Installation Procedure 1. Attach a mechanics wire to the new cable to guide it through the seat back. 2. If you are replacing the cable, route the cable through the rear seat back. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Back > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driver or Passenger Seat Back Cushion Cover and Pad Replacement > Page 12639 3. Connect the latch cable to the recliner mechanism. 4. Connect the J-strip at the bottom of the seat cover. 5. Connect the latch cable to the latch assembly. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Back > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driver or Passenger Seat Back Cushion Cover and Pad Replacement > Page 12640 Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener Caution). 6. Install the latch to the seat back with a fastener and tighten to 2.5 Nm (22 lb in). 7. Install the rear seat. Refer to Rear Seat Replacement (See: Service and Repair/Rear Seat Replacement). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Back > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driver or Passenger Seat Back Cushion Cover and Pad Replacement > Page 12641 Seat Back: Service and Repair Driver or Passenger Seat Back Cushion Cover and Pad Replacement Driver or Passenger Seat Back Cushion Cover and Pad Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Back > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driver or Passenger Seat Back Cushion Cover and Pad Replacement > Page 12642 Driver or Passenger Seat Back Cushion Frame Replacement Driver or Passenger Seat Back Cushion Frame Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Back > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driver or Passenger Seat Back Cushion Cover and Pad Replacement > Page 12643 Driver or Passenger Seat Back Cushion Finish Panel Replacement Driver or Passenger Seat Back Cushion Finish Panel Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Back > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driver or Passenger Seat Back Cushion Cover and Pad Replacement > Page 12644 Rear Seat Back Cushion Latch Cable Replacement Rear Seat Back Cushion Latch Cable Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the rear seat. Refer to Rear Seat Replacement (See: Service and Repair/Rear Seat Replacement). 2. Remove the fastener from the rear seat back latch and pull the latch out from the seat back assembly. 3. Detach the latch cable from the latch. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Back > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driver or Passenger Seat Back Cushion Cover and Pad Replacement > Page 12645 4. If you are going to replace the cable, disconnect the latch cable at the seat recliner mechanism. 5. Open the J-strip at the bottom of the seat cover. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Back > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driver or Passenger Seat Back Cushion Cover and Pad Replacement > Page 12646 6. Attach a mechanics wire to the cable to guide it through the seat back. 7. Pull the cable out from the seat back assembly. Installation Procedure 1. Attach a mechanics wire to the new cable to guide it through the seat back. 2. If you are replacing the cable, route the cable through the rear seat back. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Back > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driver or Passenger Seat Back Cushion Cover and Pad Replacement > Page 12647 3. Connect the latch cable to the recliner mechanism. 4. Connect the J-strip at the bottom of the seat cover. 5. Connect the latch cable to the latch assembly. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Back > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driver or Passenger Seat Back Cushion Cover and Pad Replacement > Page 12648 Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener Caution). 6. Install the latch to the seat back with a fastener and tighten to 2.5 Nm (22 lb in). 7. Install the rear seat. Refer to Rear Seat Replacement (See: Service and Repair/Rear Seat Replacement). Rear Seat Back Cushion Panel Replacement (with 60 percent seat) Rear Seat Back Cushion Panel Replacement (with 60 percent seat) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Back > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driver or Passenger Seat Back Cushion Cover and Pad Replacement > Page 12649 Rear Seat Back Cushion Panel Replacement (with 40 percent seat) Rear Seat Back Cushion Panel Replacement (with 40 percent seat) Rear Seat Back Cushion Cover and Pad Replacement (with 60 percent seat) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Back > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driver or Passenger Seat Back Cushion Cover and Pad Replacement > Page 12650 Rear Seat Back Cushion Cover and Pad Replacement (with 60 percent seat) Rear Seat Back Cushion Cover and Pad Replacement (with 40 percent seat) Rear Seat Back Cushion Cover and Pad Replacement (with 40 percent seat) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Back > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driver or Passenger Seat Back Cushion Cover and Pad Replacement > Page 12651 Rear Seat Back Cushion Frame Replacement (with 60 percent seat) Rear Seat Back Cushion Frame Replacement (with 60 percent seat) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Back > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driver or Passenger Seat Back Cushion Cover and Pad Replacement > Page 12652 Rear Seat Back Cushion Frame Replacement (with 40 percent seat) Rear Seat Back Cushion Frame Replacement (with 40 percent seat) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Back > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driver or Passenger Seat Back Cushion Cover and Pad Replacement > Page 12653 Rear Seat Recliner Inner Finish Cover Replacement Rear Seat Recliner Inner Finish Cover Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Back > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driver or Passenger Seat Back Cushion Cover and Pad Replacement > Page 12654 Rear Seat Back Cushion Latch Release Handle Replacement Rear Seat Back Cushion Latch Release Handle Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Back > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driver or Passenger Seat Back Cushion Cover and Pad Replacement > Page 12655 Rear Seat Recliner Outer Finish Cover Replacement Rear Seat Recliner Outer Finish Cover Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Back > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driver or Passenger Seat Back Cushion Cover and Pad Replacement > Page 12656 Rear Seat Outer Recliner Rear Finish Cover Replacement Rear Seat Outer Recliner Rear Finish Cover Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Back > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driver or Passenger Seat Back Cushion Cover and Pad Replacement > Page 12657 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cover > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Interior - Seat Cover Wrinkle/Crease/Burn Info Seat Cover: Technical Service Bulletins Interior - Seat Cover Wrinkle/Crease/Burn Info INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 04-08-50-006D Date: September 09, 2010 Subject: Minor Wrinkles/Creases, Discoloration, Cigarette Burns and Customer Induced Cuts and Stains on Front and Rear Driver and Passenger Seats with Leather, Vinyl or Cloth Seat Covers Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks 2009 and Prior HUMMER H2 2010 and Prior HUMMER H3 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X 2010 and Prior Saturn Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add a model year. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 04-08-50-006C (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). If a customer comes in to your dealership due to certain conditions of the seat covers (splits, wrinkles, loose stitching, etc.), you must examine the seat cover in order to determine the validity of the customer claim. Some components from the above listed vehicles have been returned to the Warranty Parts Center (WPC) and analysis of these parts showed "customer induced damage" or No Trouble Found (NTF). The dealer should pay particular attention to the following conditions: - Cigarette burns Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cover > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Interior - Seat Cover Wrinkle/Crease/Burn Info > Page 12662 - Customer induced cuts (knife cuts, cut by customer tools, etc.) - Paint stains (customer should have cleaned paint stains while paint was still wet) - Coffee stains and other removable dirt These should be cleaned as described in the Owner's Manual under Appearance Care. Also, refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 06-00-89-029A or later. - Evidence of chemicals used for cleaning, other than those specified in the Owner's Manual - Other chemical spills - Minor and normal leather wrinkles as a result of use - Other defects to the seat cover not detected during the pre-delivery inspection (PDI). Inform the customer that the above issues were not present when the vehicle was purchased and cannot be replaced under warranty. The covers, however, may be repaired or replaced at the customer's expense. The following conditions are not caused by the customer and should be covered by warranty: - Split seams Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cover > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Interior - Seat Cover Wrinkle/Crease/Burn Info > Page 12663 - Wear/cracking/peeling - Discoloration/dye transfer from customer clothing (if discoloration/dye transfer is not removed after using GM Leather and Vinyl Plastic Cleaner, P/N 88861401 (in Canada, P/N 88861409), replace the covers.) Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cover > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Interior - Seat Cover Wrinkle/Crease/Burn Info > Page 12664 Seat Cover: Technical Service Bulletins Interior - Cleaning Interior Surfaces of Vehicle INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 06-00-89-029F Date: April 27, 2010 Subject: Interior Cleaning - Instrument Panel (IP), Hard or Plastic Surfaces, Seats, Carpet, Leather, Vinyl, Fabric Cleaner, Stain Remover, Restorer - Product Availability Models: 2006-2011 GM Passenger Cars and Trucks including Saturn (EXCLUDES Cadillac DTS Platinum and Escalade Platinum with RPO R9N - Tehama Leather) 2006-2010 HUMMER H2, H3 2006-2009 Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 06-00-89-029E (Section 00 - General Information). To keep the vehicle interior looking the best, it should be cleaned often. It is important to keep the upholstery from becoming heavily soiled. The vehicle's interior can experience extreme heat, which can cause stains to set quickly. Lighter color interiors may require more frequent cleaning. Care should be taken because newspapers and garments may transfer color to the vehicle's interior. Many of today's interiors are made with new low gloss materials. Permanent damage may result from using cleaners on ANY surfaces (interior trim, instrument panel, carpet, leather, vinyl and fabric) for which they are not intended. Using non-approved products can actually set the stain to the point that nothing can remove it. Important Do not use silicone or wax-based products or those containing organic solvents (such as naptha, alcohol, etc.) to clean your vehicle's interior because they can alter the appearance by increasing the gloss in a non-uniform manner. The increase in gloss may cause annoying reflections in the windshield and even make it difficult to see through the windshield under certain conditions. - Never use a STIFF brush or a brush that has been previously used with a harsh chemical. This can cause damage to the vehicle's interior surfaces. - Use only mild, Neutral-pH cleaners. Avoid laundry detergents or dishwashing soaps with degreasers. Using too much soap will leave residue that leaves streaks and attracts dirt. Because it is critical to use only mild, neutral-pH cleaners, General Motors has approved the use of the cleaners and conditioners listed in this bulletin for the cleaning of interiors. These products are in the neutral-pH range and will maintain the best vehicle interior appearance. These products are water-based, biodegradable, and do not contain bleach, solvents or harsh chemicals. Interior trim pieces on new vehicles, as well as service components, arrive with a protective film. When removing the protective film, adhesive residue may be left on the trim panels/components. The cleaner (for leather, vinyl, plastic and interior paint) is an effective cleaner in removing adhesive residue without causing damage to the component. Important - If soapy, alkaline cleaning solutions are used on fabrics, and not thoroughly rinsed out, the residual left in the fabric will attract dirt. Because the recommended cleaners/conditioners are in the pH neutral range, they won't leave behind soapy residue. - On heavily stained or difficult to clean fabric/carpet, it is recommended that the entire surface be treated and cleaned vs. spot cleaning. Refer to Extractor Machine and Concentrate section of this bulletin for more information. Effective cleaning steps for hard and/or plastic surfaces: 1. Using a clean towel, apply/spray cleaner - leather, vinyl, plastic, interior paint, directly onto the towel. 2. Wipe the surface with the towel/cleaner. 3. If necessary, use a soft bristle brush to work cleaner into the crevasses of the area being cleaned. 4. Wipe off any excess cleaner from the surface. 5. Using a clean towel, apply/spray the conditioner (leather, vinyl restorer) directly onto the towel. 6. Wipe the conditioner onto the previously cleaned area to restore the material to it's original luster. Important Today's interiors are developed and intended to have a low-gloss appearance. It is important to use only products which provide a low-gloss finish in order to maintain the interior's integrity, customer appeal and satisfaction. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cover > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Interior - Seat Cover Wrinkle/Crease/Burn Info > Page 12665 Effective cleaning steps for fabric: 1. Remove any residue by lightly rubbing the surface with a clean towel. 2. Choose the appropriate stain remover based on the stain type. 3. Spray and lightly brush the area with a clean, soft bristle brush. 4. Gently blot up the stain. 5. On upholstery/carpet, the use of a fabric protector can help to reduce or eliminate future staining. Upholstery and Carpet Stains When cleaning upholstery and carpet stains ONLY, the following cleaning chart will help you determine which cleaner/formula works best on a particular stain. The chart lists many of the common stains. Some complex stains may require the application of both stain removers, one after the other, to remove both food-based oils and synthetic oils. A soft bristle brush (P/N 88861425) should be used to safely work the cleaner into the leather grain or material. This enables the dirt/stain to be completely removed from the material. Leather Conditioner/Restorer A Leather Conditioner/Restorer is also available. The restorer is safe for all vinyl and leather. It is a water-based product and contains essential emollients to restore suppleness, conditions and adds luster without adding gloss. The restorer will also provide protection against re-staining. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cover > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Interior - Seat Cover Wrinkle/Crease/Burn Info > Page 12666 Dye Transfer: Dye transfer will happen any time a natural fiber like cotton, silk, wool, or suede comes into contact with leather. The lighter the leather color, the more quickly the dye transfer will appear. Leather should be cleaned on a regular basis so that the dirt and grime do not adversely affect the top coat of the leather. After cleaning the leather, it is important to treat the surface with the restorer. Extractor Machine and Concentrate For difficult to clean materials or when cleaning a large area, the best results will be achieved when using an extractor machine and concentrate. General Motors offers the Ruby Extractor (P/N 627-CC-3000AU) through GM Tools and Equipment 1-800-GM-TOOLS, and has recently released a concentrate for use with the extractor machine. Whichever extractor machine is used, it should meet the minimum specifications of the Ruby Extractor: Ruby Extractor Specifications: - Pump PSI: 55 - Water Lift: 85" - Hose Length: 10 ft Important The Ruby Extractor also comes with a 6 year Outer Body and 3 year Parts warranty. Extractor: The Ruby Extractor machine was designed for automotive use and works effectively in the vehicle's interior. The narrow design of the vacuum head allows detail work in tight areas. The water pressure pump is reduced so the fabric surface is not wet more than is necessary. The dry time is greatly reduced due to less water on the fabric surface, the vacuum head making better contact with the surface and the significant water lift capability of the machine. Concentrate: The concentrated extraction cleaner is engineered with lower pH levels to help remove alkaline buildup on fabrics. The concentrate should be mixed according to the instructions listed on the container. The available concentrate helps to break the stain down and then the stain is easily removed with less water. The concentrate used in the Ruby Extractor is slightly acidic to remove soap and alkalinity from the fabric surfaces left behind by using improper, soapy solutions. Dirt, grease and grime are more easily removed when the proper solution is used during the extraction process. Parts Information Products are available in two sizes; 8 oz / 235 ML and 24 oz / 710 ML bottles. Available Equipment Equipment is available by contacting 1-800-GMTOOLS. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cover > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Interior - Seat Cover Wrinkle/Crease/Burn Info > Page 12667 Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cushion > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Seat Cushion Cover and Pad Replacement Seat Cushion: Service and Repair Front Seat Cushion Cover and Pad Replacement Front Seat Cushion Cover and Pad Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cushion > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Seat Cushion Cover and Pad Replacement > Page 12672 Seat Cushion: Service and Repair Rear Seat Cushion Cover and Pad Replacement Rear Seat Cushion Cover and Pad Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cushion > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Seat Cushion Cover and Pad Replacement > Page 12673 Seat Cushion: Service and Repair Rear Seat Cushion Frame Replacement Rear Seat Cushion Frame Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Seat Fan: Diagram Information and Instructions Electrical Schematic Symbols Electrical Schematic Symbols Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12678 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12679 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12680 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12681 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12682 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12683 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12684 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12685 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12686 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12687 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12688 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12689 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12690 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12691 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12692 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12693 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12694 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12695 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12696 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12697 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12698 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12699 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12700 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12701 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12702 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12703 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12704 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12705 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12706 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12707 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12708 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12709 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12710 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12711 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12712 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12713 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12714 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12715 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12716 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12717 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12718 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12719 General Electrical Diagnosis General Electrical Diagnosis Basic Knowledge Required Without a basic knowledge of electricity, it will be difficult to use the diagnostic procedures contained in the service manual. You should understand the basic theory of electricity, and know the meaning of voltage (V), current (A), and resistance (Ohms ). You should also be able to read and understand a wiring diagram, as well as understand what happens in a circuit with an open or a shorted wire. Vehicle Zoning Strategy Vehicle Zoning Strategy All grounds, in-line connectors, and splices have identifying numbers that correspond to where they are located in the vehicle. The following table explains the numbering system. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12720 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12721 Seat Fan: Diagnostic Aids Arrows and Symbols Arrows and Symbols This service manual uses various symbols in order to describe different service operations. 1 - Front of Vehicle 2 - View Detail 2 - View Detail 3 - Ambient Air Mixed with Another Gas or Indicate Temperature Change 4 - Motion or Direction 5 - View Angle 6 - Dimension (1:2) 7 Ambient/Clean Air Flow or Cool Air Flow 8 - Lubrication Point - Oil or Fluid 9 - Task Related 10 Sectioning (1:3) 11 - Gas Other Than Ambient Air or Hot Air Flow 12 - Lubrication Point - Grease or Jelly 13 - Multidirectional Arrow Decimal and Metric Equivalents Decimal and Metric Equivalents Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12722 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12723 Checking Aftermarket Accessories Checking Aftermarket Accessories Warning: Refer to SIR Warning (See: Restraint Systems/Service Precautions/SIR Warning). Caution: The OBD II symbol is used on the circuit diagrams in order to alert the technician that the circuit is essential for proper OBD II emission control circuit operation. Any circuit which fails and causes the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) to turn ON, or causes emissions-related component damage, is identified as an OBD II circuit. Do not connect aftermarket accessories into the following circuits: * SIR circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the SIR symbol. * OBD II circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the OBD II symbol. Always check for aftermarket accessories (non-OEM) as the first step in diagnosing electrical problems. If the vehicle is so equipped, disconnect the system to verify that these add-on accessories are not the cause of the problems. Possible causes of vehicle problems related to aftermarket accessories include: * Power feeds connected to points other than the battery * Antenna location * Transceiver wiring located too close to vehicle electronic modules or wiring * Poor shielding or poor connectors on antenna feed line * Check for recent service bulletins detailing installation guidelines for aftermarket accessories. Circuit Testing Circuit Testing The Circuit Testing section contains the following diagnostic testing information. Using this information along with the diagnostic procedures will identify the cause of the electrical malfunction. * Using Connector Test Adapters (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Using Connector Test Adapters) * Probing Electrical Connectors (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Probing Electrical Connectors) * Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12724 Procedures/Circuit Testing/Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter) * Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp) * Using Fused Jumper Wires (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Using Fused Jumper Wires) * Measuring Voltage (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Measuring Voltage) * Measuring Voltage Drop (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Measuring Voltage Drop) * Measuring Frequency (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Measuring Frequency) * Testing Ground and Low Reference Circuits (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Testing Ground and Low Reference Circuits) * Testing for Continuity (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Continuity) * Testing for Short to Ground (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Short to Ground) * Testing for a Short to Voltage (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for a Short to Voltage) * Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections) * Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions) * Testing for Electrical Intermittents (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Electrical Intermittents) * Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure) * Circuit Protection - Fuses (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Circuit Protection - Fuses) * Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers) * Circuit Protection - Fusible Links (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Circuit Protection - Fusible Links) Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp Special Tools EL-35616-200 - Test Light - Probe Kit For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test Probe Caution). A test lamp can simply and quickly test a low impedance circuit for voltage. A Digital Multimeter (DMM) should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present if the impedance is low enough, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. In other words, if there is not enough current, the test lamp will not illuminate even though voltage is present. The EL-35616-200 - kit is Micro-Pack compatible and comprised of a 12-volt light bulb with an attached pair of leads. To properly operate this tool use the following procedures. When testing for voltage: 1. Attach one lead to ground. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is voltage at the point being tested. When testing for ground: 1. Attach one lead to battery positive voltage. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where ground should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is ground at the point being tested. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12725 Testing for a Short to Voltage Testing for a Short to Voltage Special Tools EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM) For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test Probe Caution). The following procedure tests for a short to voltage in a circuit. 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Set the rotary dial of the Digital Multimeter (DMM) to the V (DC) position. 4. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. Turn ON the ignition and operate all accessories. 7. If the voltage measured is greater than 1 V, there is a short to voltage in the circuit. Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions Special Tools J-25070 - Heat Gun For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Many intermittent open or shorted circuits are affected by harness/connector movement that is caused by vibration, engine torque, bumps/rough pavement, etc. In order to duplicate the customer's concern, it may be necessary to manipulate the wiring harness if the malfunction appears to be vibration related. Manipulation of a circuit can consist of a wide variety of actions, including: * Wiggling the harness * Disconnecting a connector and reconnecting * Stressing the mechanical connection of a connector * Pulling on the harness or wire in order to identify a separation/break inside the insulation * Relocating a harness or wires All these actions should be performed with some goal in mind. For instance, with a scan tool connected, wiggling the wires may uncover a faulty input to the control module. The snapshot option would be appropriate here. Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure). Another option is, with the component commanded ON and OFF by the scan tool, move related connectors and wiring and observe the component operation. With the engine running, move related connectors and wiring while monitoring engine operation. If harness or connector movement affects the data displayed, component/system operation, or engine operation, inspect and repair the harness/connections as necessary. You may need to load the vehicle in order to duplicate the concern. This may require the use of weights, floor jacks, jackstands, frame machines, etc. In these cases you are attempting to duplicate the concern by manipulating the suspension or frame. This method is useful in finding harnesses that are too short and their connectors pull apart enough to cause a poor connection. A DMM set to Peak Min/Max mode and connected to the suspect circuit while testing can yield desirable results. Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Electrical Intermittents). Certainly, using the senses of sight, smell, and hearing while manipulating the circuit can provide good results as well. There may be instances where circuit manipulation alone will not meet the required criteria for the fault condition to appear. In such cases it may be necessary to expose the suspect circuit to other conditions while manipulating the harness. Such conditions would include high moisture conditions, along with exceptionally high or low temperatures. The following discusses how to expose the circuit to these kinds of conditions. Salt Water Spray Some compounds possess the ability to conduct electricity when dissolved in water such as ordinary salt. By mixing table salt with water in sufficient Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12726 quantities, you can enhance the conductive properties of water so that any circuit which may be sensitive to moisture will more readily fail when liberally sprayed with this mixture. Mixing 0.35L (12 oz) of water with approximately 1 tablespoon of salt will yield a salt solution of 5 percent. Fill a normal spray bottle with this mixture. This mixture is sufficient to enhance the water's own conductivity. This may cause the circuit to fail more easily when sprayed. Once the mixture is completed, spray the suspect area liberally with the solution. Then, while monitoring either a scan tool or DMM, manipulate the harness as discussed previously. High Temperature Conditions If the complaint tends to be heat related, you can simulate the condition using the J-25070 - heat gun. Using the heat gun, you can heat up the suspected area or component. Manipulate the harnesses under high temperature conditions while monitoring the scan tool or DMM to locate the fault condition. The high temperature condition may be achieved simply by test driving the vehicle at normal operating temperature. If a heat gun is unavailable, consider this option to enhance your diagnosis. This option does not allow for the same control, however. Low Temperature Conditions Depending on the nature of the fault condition, placing a fan in front of the vehicle while the vehicle is in the shade can have the desired effect. If this is unsuccessful, use local cooling treatments such as ice or a venturi type nozzle (one that provides hot or cold air). This type of tool is capable of producing air stream temperatures down to -18°C (0°F) from one end and +71°C (160°F) from the other. This is ideally suited for localized cooling needs. Once the vehicle, component, or harness has been sufficiently cooled, manipulate the harness or components in an effort to duplicate the concern. Duplicating Failure Conditions * If none of the previous tests are successful, attempt to duplicate and/or capture the failure conditions. * Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, where applicable, contains the conditions that were present when the DTC set. 1. Review and record Freeze Frame/Failure Records data. 2. Clear the DTCs using the scan tool. 3. Turn the key to OFF and wait 15 seconds. 4. Operate the vehicle under the same conditions that were noted in Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, as closely as possible. The vehicle must also be operating within the Conditions for Running the DTC. Refer to Conditions for Running the DTC in the supporting text if a DTC is being diagnosed. 5. Monitor DTC Status for the DTC being tested. The scan tool will indicate Ran, when the enabling conditions have been satisfied long enough for the DTC to run. The scan tool will also indicate whether the DTC passed or failed. * An alternate method is to drive the vehicle with the DMM connected to a suspected circuit. An abnormal reading on the DMM when the concern occurs, may help you locate the concern. Measuring Frequency Measuring Frequency Special Tools EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM) For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test Probe Caution). The following procedure determines the frequency of a signal. Note: Connecting the Digital Multimeter (DMM) to the circuit before pressing the Hz button will allow the DMM to autorange to an appropriate range. 1. Apply power to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (AC) position. 3. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12727 5. Press the Hz button on the DMM. 6. The DMM will display the frequency measured. Measuring Voltage Measuring Voltage Special Tools EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM) For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test Probe Caution). The following procedure measures the voltage at a selected point in a circuit. 1. Disconnect the electrical harness connector for the circuit being tested, if necessary. 2. Enable the circuit and/or system being tested. Use the following methods: * Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. * Turn ON the engine. * Turn ON the circuit and/or system with a scan tool in Output Controls. * Turn ON the switch for the circuit and/or system being tested. 3. Select the V (AC) or V (DC) position on the Digital Multimeter (DMM). 4. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the point of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. The DMM displays the voltage measured at that point. Measuring Voltage Drop Measuring Voltage Drop Special Tools EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM) For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test Probe Caution). The following procedure determines the difference in voltage potential between 2 points. 1. Set the rotary dial of the Digital Multimeter (DMM) to the V (DC) position. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12728 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to one point of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to the other point of the circuit. 4. Operate the circuit. 5. The DMM displays the difference in voltage between the 2 points. Probing Electrical Connectors Probing Electrical Connectors Note: Always be sure to reinstall the connector position assurance (CPA) and terminal position assurance (TPA) when reconnecting connectors or replacing terminals. Front probe Disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the mating side (front) of the connector. Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test Probe Caution). Note: When probing female 0.64 terminals, it is important to use the correct adapter. There have been some revisions to the test adapter for 0.64 terminals. The proper adapter for 0.64 terminals is the EL-35616-64B which has a gold terminal and a black wire between the base and tip. Failure to use the proper test adapter may result in damage to the terminal being tested and improper diagnosis. Note: The proper adapter for probing the terminals for fuses, relays, or diodes in an electrical center is EL-35616-35. Using any other tool or adapter may damage the terminal being tested. Refer to the following table as a guide in selecting the correct test adapter for front probing connectors: Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12729 Backprobe Note: * Backprobe connector terminals only when specifically required in diagnostic procedures. * Do not backprobe a sealed (Weather Pack(R)) connector, less than a 280 series Metri-Pack connector, a Micro-Pack connector, or a flat wire (dock and lock) connector. * Backprobing can be a source of damage to connector terminals. Use care in order to avoid deforming the terminal, either by forcing the test probe too far into the cavity or by using too large of a test probe. * After backprobing any connector, inspect for terminal damage. If terminal damage is suspected, test for proper terminal contact. Do not disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the harness side (back) of the connector. Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure Using Snapshots in Global Diagnostic System (GDS) Overview Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12730 A snapshot is a recording of what a control module on the vehicle was receiving for information while the snapshot is being made. A snapshot may be used to analyze the data during the time a vehicle condition is current. This allows you to concentrate on making the condition occur, rather than trying to view all the data in anticipation of the fault. To record a snapshot in GDS, select, Record Snapshot, from the options at the top right portion of any of the various pages that allow snapshots to be taken (e.g. Data Display, Control Functions, etc.). When you are finished recording, select, Stop Snapshot recording. The snapshot will now be available for replay. Snapshot Replay The Snapshot Replay function allows reviews of previously recorded vehicle snapshot data. This information can be used in analysis of vehicle problems and detection of trigger error conditions. The graph function can be used to compare parameters to see if a component is functioning properly. Recorded snapshots can be selected for viewing by the following three methods: * Selecting a snapshot file from the Vehicle Home Page and clicking on the Review selection. * Double clicking on the selected snapshot from the Vehicle Home Page. * Entering the Tools selection from the Menu selection and selecting Snapshot replay. Next, open the Snapshot Manager. Double click on the snapshot file you wish to view or click on the Load Snapshot selection and select a snapshot file. Regardless of selection method, a File Loaded pop-up window will be displayed from the Snapshot Replay screen. Select OK from the pop-up window. Snapshot Play Functions There are several snapshot play functions that are used to replay recorded snapshots * The Play function is used to play the snapshot forward by clicking on this selection. A marker will move across the screen when this selection is used. All selections in this area turn grey when they are active. * The Pause function is used to pause play of the snapshot. When this selection is clicked a second time the snapshot will start playing where it left off. * The Stop function is used to stop playing the snapshot. The snapshot will start from the beginning, if Play is selected after using the Stop function. Time Control Time control is used to control the snapshot replay. This function allows selection of a specific time frame, display of different views, and control of display speed. The following functions can be selected directly under Time Control. * The Bookmark selection allows you to add a specific comment in the current display and return to this point in the future. When this option is selected, a pop-up window is displayed. Enter a bookmark name and select OK. * The Note Pad can be selected to add comments to the snapshot replay file at the current point of time. When this option is selected, a pop-up window is displayed. Enter a comment for the snapshot file and select OK. * The Load Snapshot (blue folder) opens a snapshot file and makes it ready for further analysis. This function is also available by clicking on an available snapshot file from the Snapshot Manager. * The Down Arrow displays all Time Control options when selected. Individual options can also be selected by clicking on the item you want. * The Snapshot Display Speed can be controlled by selecting this option. Slow speeds of 1/8X, 1/4X, and 1/2X can be selected. The real time speed can also be selected at 1. Faster speeds of 2X, 4X, and 8X can also be obtained by using this selection. View Selections Each View Selection provides a different way of displaying vehicle data for analysis. The following functions can be selected under Available Views: Note: The parameter name will be shown in the original language used for capture if no translation is available for the name. * Parameter List View - Displays incoming information from the snapshot file. The current value of the parameters is displayed on the screen. * Log View - Contains all the information from the snapshot file. All parameter values are listed in the order they were recorded. Specific parameters can be added or removed from a watchlist by clicking on the appropriate item. * State View - Shows the values of all parameters in a specific time frame. These values can be used for comparison with the trigger view. * Trigger View - Displays all system and user defined triggers. This function can be used when there is a combination of factors involved in a diagnostic problem. When a Trigger condition is met a caution triangle will be displayed on the screen. Triggers: * Load Triggers - Allows you to load a file containing trigger definitions. * Save Triggers - Allows you to save the trigger to your computer's hard drive. * Remove Trigger - Allows you to remove the current trigger. It will no longer be present. * Edit Trigger - Displays a pop-up window where you can modify the limits and parameters contained within a trigger. * Adds Trigger - Displays a pop-up window to configure a trigger. * DTC View - After the Play function is selected and this option is selected this function opens the list of recorded DTCs. * Line Graph View - Displays data that can be visualized against the time-axis. From this view, specific parameters can be selected for graphing by Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12731 checking the box under Selected. At the bottom of the graph there are four functions Zoom In (increase size), Zoom Out (decrease size), Bookmarks, and Pause Scrolling. Each of these functions can be accessed by clicking on them. Testing for Continuity Testing for Continuity Special Tools EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM) For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test Probe Caution). The following procedures verify good continuity in a circuit. With a Digital Multimeter (DMM) 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the Ohms position. 2. Disconnect the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 3. Disconnect the load. 4. Press the MIN MAX button on the DMM. 5. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 6. Connect the other lead of the DMM to the other end of the circuit. 7. If the DMM displays low or no resistance, the circuit has good continuity. With a Test Lamp Note: Only use the test lamp procedure on low impedance power and ground circuits. 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect one lead of the test lamp to one end of the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 5. Connect the other end of the circuit to ground. 6. If the test lamp illuminates (full intensity), then the circuit has good continuity. Testing for Electrical Intermittents Testing for Electrical Intermittents Special Tools EL-39200 Digital Multimeter For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Perform the following procedures while wiggling the harness from side to side. Continue this at convenient points (about 6 inches apart) while watching the test equipment. * Testing for Short to Ground (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Short to Ground) * Testing for Continuity (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Continuity) * Testing for a Short to Voltage (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for a Short to Voltage) If the fault is not identified, perform the procedure below using the MIN MAX feature on the EL-39200 DMM. This feature allows you to manipulate the circuit without having to watch the EL-39200. The EL-39200 will generate an audible tone when a change is detected. Note: The EL-39200 must be used in order to perform the following procedure since the EL-39200 can monitor current, resistance or voltage while recording the minimum (MIN), and maximum (MAX) values measured. 1. Connect the EL-39200 to both sides of a suspected connector (still connected), or from one end of a suspected circuit to the other. Refer to Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12732 Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter) for information on connecting the EL-39200 to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the EL-39200 to the V (AC) or V (DC) position. 3. Press the range button of the EL-39200 in order to select the desired voltage range. 4. Press the MIN MAX button of the EL-39200. The EL-39200 displays 100 ms RECORD and emits an audible tone (beep). Note: The 100 ms RECORD mode is the length of time an input must stay at a new value in order to record the full change. 5. Simulate the condition that is potentially causing the intermittent connection, either by wiggling the connections or the wiring, test driving, or performing other operations. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions). 6. Listen for the audible Min Max Alert which indicates that a new minimum or maximum value has been recorded. 7. Press the MIN MAX button once in order to display the MAX value and note the value. 8. Press the MIN MAX button again in order to display the MIN value and note the value. 9. Determine the difference between the MIN and MAX values. * If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is 1 V or greater an intermittent open or high resistance condition exists. Repair the condition as necessary. * If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is less than 1 V, an intermittent open or high resistance condition does not exist. Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections Special Tools EL-35616 Terminal Test Probe Kit For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). When the condition is not currently present, but is indicated in DTC history, the cause may be intermittent. An intermittent may also be the cause when there is a customer complaint, but the symptom cannot be duplicated. Refer to the Symptom Table of the system that is suspect of causing the condition before trying to locate an intermittent condition. Most intermittent conditions are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. Inspect for the following items: * Wiring broken inside the insulation * Poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector * Poor terminal to wire connection-Some conditions which fall under this description are poor crimps, poor solder joints, crimping over the wire insulation rather than the wire itself, and corrosion in the wire to terminal contact area, etc. * Pierced or damaged insulation can allow moisture to enter the wiring causing corrosion. The conductor can corrode inside the insulation, with little visible evidence. Look for swollen and stiff sections of wire in the suspect circuits. * Wiring which has been pinched, cut, or its insulation rubbed through may cause an intermittent open or short as the bare area touches other wiring or parts of the vehicle. * Wiring that comes in contact with hot or exhaust components * Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions) in order to duplicate the conditions required, in order to verify the customer concern. * Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Electrical Intermittents) for test procedures to detect intermittent open, high resistance, short to ground, and short to voltage conditions. * Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure) for advanced intermittent diagnosis and Vehicle Data Recorder operation. Testing for Terminal Fretting Some intermittent conditions can be caused by wire terminal fretting corrosion. Fretting corrosion is a build-up of insulating, oxidized wear debris that can form when there is a small motion between electrical contacts. The oxidized wear debris can pile up enough at the electrical contact spots that the electrical resistance across the connection increases. Movement between the contacting surfaces as small as 10 to 100 microns can cause fretting. To put this in perspective, a sheet of paper is about 100 microns thick, so fretting motion is small and hard to see. Vibration and thermal expansion/contraction are the main sources that create fretting motion. Since vehicles vibrate and can experience large temperature swings, they are a good source for fretting motion. Tin, copper, nickel, and iron surfaces are all susceptible to fretting corrosion. Fretting corrosion can be difficult to see but it looks like small, dark smudges on the terminals contact surface. To correct a fretting condition disconnect the suspect connector and add Nyogel lubricant 760G (dielectric grease) to both sides of the connector Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12733 terminals. Then reconnect the connector and wipe away any excess lubricant. This will correct the additional terminal contact resistance due to the terminal fretting corrosion. Testing for Proper Terminal Contact It is important to test terminal contact at the component and any inline connectors before replacing a suspect component. Mating terminals must be inspected to ensure good terminal contact. A poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector may be the result of contamination or deformation. Contamination may be caused by the connector halves being improperly connected. A missing or damaged connector seal, damage to the connector itself, or exposing the terminals to moisture and dirt can also cause contamination. Contamination, usually in the underhood or underbody connectors, leads to terminal corrosion, causing an open circuit or intermittently open circuit. Deformation is caused by probing the mating side of a connector terminal without the proper adapter. Always use the EL-35616 when probing connectors. Other causes of terminal deformation are improperly joining the connector halves, or repeatedly separating and joining the connector halves. Deformation, usually to the female terminal contact tang, can result in poor terminal contact causing an open or intermittently open circuit. Testing for Proper Terminal Contact in Bussed Electrical Centers It is very important to use the correct test adapter when testing for proper terminal contact of fuses and relays in a bussed electrical center. Use EL-35616-35 to test for proper terminal contact. Failure to use EL-35616-35 can result in improper diagnosis of the bussed electrical center. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact: 1. Separate the connector halves. 2. Visually inspect the connector halves for contamination. Contamination may result in a white or green build-up within the connector body or between terminals. This causes high terminal resistance, intermittent contact, or an open circuit. An underhood or underbody connector that shows signs of contamination should be replaced in its entirety: terminals, seals, and connector body. 3. Using an equivalent male terminal / terminated lead, verify that the retention force is significantly different between a known good terminal and the suspect terminal. Replace the female terminal in question. Flat Wire (Dock and Lock) Connectors There are no serviceable parts for flat wire (dock and lock) connectors on the harness side or the component side. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact: 1. Remove the component in question. 2. Visually inspect each side of the connector for signs of contamination. Avoid touching either side of the connector as oil from your skin may be a source of contamination as well. 3. Visually inspect the terminal bearing surfaces of the flat wire circuits for splits, cracks, or other imperfections that could cause poor terminal contact. Visually inspect the component side connector to ensure that all of the terminals are uniform and free of damage or deformation. 4. Insert the appropriate adapter from the on the flat wire harness connector in order to test the circuit in question. Control Module/Component Voltage and Grounds Poor voltage or ground connections can cause widely varying symptoms. * Test all control module voltage supply circuits. Many vehicles have multiple circuits supplying voltage to a control module. Other components in the system may have separate voltage supply circuits that may also need to be tested. Inspect connections at the module/component connectors, fuses, and any intermediate connections between the voltage source and the module/component. A test lamp or a DMM may indicate that voltage is present, but neither tests the ability of the circuit to carry sufficient current. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. Refer to Circuit Testing (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Circuit Testing) and Power Distribution Schematics (See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Starting and Charging/Power and Ground Distribution/System Diagram/Power Distribution Schematics). * Test all control module ground and system ground circuits. The control module may have multiple ground circuits. Other components in the system may have separate grounds that may also need to be tested. Inspect grounds for clean and tight connections at the grounding point. Inspect the connections at the component and in splice packs, where applicable. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. Refer to Circuit Testing (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Circuit Testing) and Ground Distribution Schematics (See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Starting and Charging/Power and Ground Distribution/System Diagram/Ground Distribution Schematics). Temperature Sensitivity * An intermittent condition may occur when a component/connection reaches normal operating temperature. The condition may occur only when the component/connection is cold, or only when the component/connection is hot. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12734 * Freeze Frame, Failure Records, Snapshot, or Vehicle Data Recorder data may help with this type of intermittent condition, where applicable. * If the intermittent is related to heat, review the data for a relationship with the following: - High ambient temperatures - Underhood/engine generated heat - Circuit generated heat due to a poor connection, or high electrical load - Higher than normal load conditions, towing, etc. * If the intermittent is related to cold, review the data for the following: - Low ambient temperatures-In extremely low temperatures, ice may form in a connection or component. Inspect for water intrusion. - The condition only occurs on a cold start. - The condition goes away when the vehicle warms up. * Information from the customer may help to determine if the trouble follows a pattern that is temperature related. * If temperature is suspected of causing an intermittent fault condition, attempt to duplicate the condition. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions) in order to duplicate the conditions required. Electromagnetic Interference and Electrical Noise Some electrical components/circuits are sensitive to electromagnetic interference or other types of electrical noise. Inspect for the following conditions: * A misrouted harness that is too close to high voltage/high current devices such as secondary ignition components, motors, generator etc.-These components may induce electrical noise on a circuit that could interfere with normal circuit operation. * Electrical system interference caused by a malfunctioning relay, or a control module driven solenoid or switch-These conditions can cause a sharp electrical surge. Normally, the condition will occur when the malfunctioning component is operating. * Improper installation of non-factory or aftermarket add on accessories such as lights, 2-way radios, amplifiers, electric motors, remote starters, alarm systems, cell phones, etc.-These accessories may lead to interference while in use, but do not fail when the accessories are not in use. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Checking Aftermarket Accessories). * Test for an open diode across the A/C compressor clutch and for other open diodes. Some relays may contain a clamping diode. * The generator may be allowing AC noise into the electrical system. Incorrect Control Module * There are only a few situations where reprogramming a control module is appropriate: - A new service control module is installed. - A control module from another vehicle is installed. - Revised software/calibration files have been released for this vehicle. Note: DO NOT re-program the control module with the SAME software/calibration files that are already present in the control module. This is not an effective repair for any type of concern. * Verify that the control module contains the correct software/calibration. If incorrect programming is found, reprogram the control module with the most current software/calibration. Refer to Control Module References (See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning) for replacement, setup, and programming. Testing for Short to Ground Testing for Short to Ground Special Tools * EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM) * EL 35616-200 - Test Light-Probe Kit For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test Probe Caution). The following procedures test for a short to ground in a circuit. With a Digital Multimeter (DMM) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12735 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the Ohms position. 4. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the other lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. If the DMM does NOT display infinite resistance (OL), there is a short to ground in the circuit. With a Test Lamp 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect one lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to one end of the circuit to be tested. 5. If the test lamp illuminates, there is a short to ground in the circuit. Fuse Powering Several Loads 1. Review the system schematic and locate the fuse that is open. 2. Open the first connector or switch leading from the fuse to each load. 3. Connect a DMM across the fuse terminals (be sure that the fuse is powered). * When the DMM displays voltage the short is in the wiring leading to the first connector or switch. * If the DMM does not display voltage refer to the next step. 4. Close each connector or switch until the DMM displays voltage in order to find which circuit is shorted. Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter Special Tools EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM) For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test Probe Caution). Digital Multimeter (DMM) Basic Requirements Service information is validated using digital multimeters that meet or exceed the following requirements. Using a multimeter that does not meet these basic requirements may give inaccurate readings which could lead to an incorrect diagnosis. Display and Settings 1. Four digits displayed 2. Voltage, amperage, resistance, frequency, diode test settings, and min-max function 3. Display positive and negative values Voltage 1. Have at least 10 Mohm input impedance 2. Test a DC voltage range of 0.1-1000 V. 3. Test an AC voltage range of 0.1-1000 V. Amperage 1. Test a DC amperage range of 0.1µA-10 A. 2. Test an AC amperage range of 0.1µA-10 A. Resistance Test a resistance range of 0.1 ohm-40 Mohm and displays infinite for a value greater than 40 Mohm (O.L. (Over-load)) Frequency Test for a frequency range of 0.5 HZ-199 K HZ Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12736 Diode Test 1. Apply at least 1 mA when performing the diode bias test 2. Display the break over voltage drop (0-3 V) of a forward biased diode 3. Display infinite (O.L. (Over-load)) when a diode is reverse biased Min-Max Readings 1. Can update at a 1 ms sample rate 2. Saves and displays minimum and maximum values Note: Circuits which include any solid state control modules, such as the engine control module (ECM), should only be tested with a 10 MOhms or higher impedance digital multimeter such as the EL-39200. The EL-39200 instruction manual is a good source of information and should be read thoroughly upon receipt of the DMM as well as kept on hand for future reference. A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present if the impedance is low enough, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. In other words, if there is not enough current, the test lamp will not illuminate even though voltage is present. The ohmmeter function on a DMM shows how much resistance exists between 2 points along a circuit. Low resistance in a circuit means good continuity. Note: Disconnect the power feed from the suspect circuit when measuring resistance with a DMM. This prevents incorrect readings. DMMs apply such a small voltage to measure resistance that the presence of voltages can upset a resistance reading. Diodes and solid state components in a circuit can cause a DMM to display a false reading. To find out if a component is affecting a measurement take a reading once, then reverse the leads and take a second reading. If the readings differ the solid state component is affecting the measurement. Following are examples of the various methods of connecting the DMM to the circuit to be tested: * Probe both ends of the connector and either hold the leads in place while manipulating the connector or tape the leads to the harness for continuous monitoring while you perform other operations or test driving. Refer to Probing Electrical Connectors (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Probing Electrical Connectors). * Disconnect the harness at both ends of the suspected circuit where it connects either to a component or to other harnesses. * If the system that is being diagnosed has a specified pinout or breakout box, it may be used in order to simplify connecting the DMM to the circuit or for testing multiple circuits quickly. Using Connector Test Adapters Using Connector Test Adapters Special Tools EL 35616 - Terminal Test Probe Kit For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Caution: Do not insert test equipment probes (DMM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the EL-38125-580 GM Approved Terminal Release Tool Kit in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the EL-38125-580 GM Approved Terminal Release Tool Kit , ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the EL-38125-580 GM Approved Terminal Release Tool Kit label on the inside of the EL-38125-580 GM Approved Terminal Release Tool Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Using Fused Jumper Wires Using Fused Jumper Wires Special Tools J 36169-A Fused Jumper Wire Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12737 Note: A fused jumper may not protect solid state components from being damaged. The J 36169-A includes small clamp connectors that provide adaptation to most connectors without damage. This fused jumper wire is supplied with a 20-A fuse which may not be suitable for some circuits. Do not use a fuse with a higher rating than the fuse that protects the circuit being tested. AFL/EPC Connectors AFL/EPC Connectors Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. 1. For connectors with a bolt in the dress cover, turn the bolt counterclockwise to remove the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12738 2. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the top of the wire dress cover. Slide the CPA forward. 3. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12739 View showing depressing of the lever lock release tab. View of connector in released position. 4. Disconnect the connector from the component. 5. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the dress cover. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs and remove the dress cover. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12740 6. Release the rear lower half of the wiredress cover. 7. Release the tabs that are holding the wiredress cover to the connector body. 8. Remove the nose piece by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the slots on both ends of the connector body. Gently pry the nose piece out of the connector. J 38125-216 can also be used to remove the nose piece. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12741 9. Use the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by lifting the terminal retaining tabs on the inside of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Bosch Connectors (BSK) Bosch Connectors (BSK) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12742 Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 3. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 4. Insert the J 38125-561 tool into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 5. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Bosch Connectors (ECM) Bosch Connectors (ECM) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12743 1. Locate the assist lever on the top of the connector. Move the assist lever to the forward position. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12744 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the connector. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the locking tabs and remove the dress cover. 4. The terminal positive assurance (TPA) is located in the front of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12745 5. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove TPA from the connector. 6. Use the J 38125-213 or the J 38125-556 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12746 Note: Ensure that the dress cover and connector body are both in the released position before reassembling. Failure to do so may cause damage to the connector and component. Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Bosch Connectors (0.64) Bosch Connectors (0.64) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While pressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock until the lever is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Pull the rubber boot that covers the wires back to expose the end of the connector dress cover. 4. Place the connector locking lever in the center of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12747 5. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs that are on the wire end of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover and connector body and pry up. 6. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs located on the opposite side of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover at the connector end and pry up. 7. Remove the dress cover. 8. Cut the tie wrap on the wire bundle. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12748 9. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting a small flat-bladed tool into the small slot in the end of the slider and pushing on the TPA until it comes out of the connector. When the TPA exits the opposite side of the connector, gasp the TPA and pull it completely out of the connector. 10. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 11. Insert the J 38125-560 into the 2 triangular cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 12. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Terminal Replacement Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12749 1. Prior to installation the terminal must be aligned so the (1) coding lugs align with the (2) coding grooves on the connector. 2. Once the terminal is aligned, slide the terminal into the cavity until the retainer has engaged in the cavity of the connector. 3. Slide the TPA in the connector body and seat it using a small flat bladed tool. The TPA is seated when it is flush with the contact housing. 4. Secure the wires to the connector body using a tie wrap and replace the dress cover and grommet. Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Pull out the slider on the connector position assurance (CPA) until it is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12750 5. Insert the J 38125-557 into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Connector Position Assurance Locks Connector Position Assurance Locks The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of the connector. CPAs are used in various connectors throughout the vehicle. CPAs are also used in all SIR system electrical connectors. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals, of the connector. Connector Repairs Connector Repairs Connector Repairs contains a list of all connector repairs. The connector repairs are listed by the connector manufacturer and then by connector type. If the technician cannot identify the manufacturer of the connector, refer to Identifying Connectors below. Knowing the connector manufacturer will assist in finding the correct connector repair from the following list: * Connector Position Assurance Locks (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Connector Position Assurance Locks) * Terminal Position Assurance Locks (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Terminal Position Assurance Locks) * AFL/EPC Connectors (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/AFL/EPC Connectors) * Bosch Connectors (BSK) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Bosch Connectors (BSK))Bosch Connectors (0.64) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Bosch Connectors (0.64))Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT))Bosch Connectors (ECM) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Bosch Connectors (ECM)) * Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack))Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Push to Seat))Delphi Connectors Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12751 (Pull To Seat) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Pull to Seat))Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W))Delphi Connectors (Micro.64) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Micro .64))Delphi Connectors (12-Way) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (12-Way))Delphi Connectors (Steering Gear) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Steering Gear)) * FCI Connectors (Lever Lock) (See: General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/FCI Connectors (Lever Lock))FCI Connectors (SIR) (See: General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/FCI (SIR)) * FEP Connectors (Steering Gear) (See: General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/FEP Connectors (Steering Gear)) * JST Connectors (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/JST Connectors) * Kostal Connectors (Glow Plug Control Module) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Kostal Connectors (Glow Plug Control Module))Kostal Connectors (Transmission) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Kostal Connectors (Transmission)) * Molex Connectors (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Molex Connectors) * Sumitomo Connectors (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Sumitomo Connectors) * Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way))Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor))Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap))Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way))Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module)) * Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Yazaki Connectors (2-Way))Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Yazaki Connectors (16-Way)) * Repairing Connector Terminals (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Repairing Connector Terminals) Connector Anatomy 1 - Connector Positive Assurance (CPA) 2 - Assist Lever 3 - Wiredress Cover 4 - Seal Strain/Relief Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12752 5 - Slide Left Hand 6 - Slide Right Hand 7 - Terminal Positive Assurance (TPA) 8 - Terminal Positive Assurance (TPA) 9 - Connector Seal 10 - Connector Housing 11 - Inner Connector Identifying Connectors Knowing the connector manufacturer is helpful when trying to locating the correct connector repair procedure. There are many different connector designs used on GM vehicles and it is sometimes difficult to identify the connector manufacturer. The information in this document should help with the identification of connector manufactures. The following connector manufacturers make most of the connectors found in GM vehicles: * AFL/EPC (Alcoa Fujikura Ltd./Engineered Plastics Components) * Bosch * Delphi * FCI (Framatome Connectors International) * JAE (Japan Aviation Electronics) * JST (Japan Solderless Terminals) * Kostel * Molex * Sumitomo * Tyco/AMP * Yazaki Identifying the manufacturer of a connector is often difficult. When trying to determine the manufacturer of a connector, look for specific identifying marks that are unique to that connector supplier. Most of these identify marks are hard to find or see. Check the connector carefully and refer to the information below for pictures and descriptions of connector identification markings. * Most of AFLs connectors have EPC on their connector body. Some of the smaller connectors will not have any markings on them. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12753 * In some cases Bosch will actually be printed on the connector. If Bosch does not appear on the connector, look for the Bosch logo. The Bosch logo is a circle with a blunted arrow inside. This logo can appear anywhere on the connector and is often very small. * In some cases Delphi will actually be printed on the connector. If Delphi is not printed on the connector, look for PED. In both cases there is no specific orientation for Delphi or PED and they can appear anywhere on the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12754 * FCI connectors may have the FCI logo on their connectors. The logo is the letters FCI with an "A" above it. * JAE connector have JAE in small letters on their connectors. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12755 * JST connectors have JST in small letters on their connectors, similar to that above. The location of the logo will vary with the connector size and style. * Kostel has an "LK" with a circle around it. These connector are usually used as a transmissions connection. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12756 * Most Molex connectors will have the Molex logo on the dresscover of the connector. In some cases the connectors may have MX followed by another letter. The third letter indicates where the connector was made. A connector with MXD is a Molex connector made in Detroit. Sumitomo has a unique symbol on their connector and possibly a part number. The symbol is similar to that of a diamond lying on its side, similar to that shown. The logo could appear anywhere but the most common place is at the wire side of the housing. * Tyco/AMP has many different and unique connector designs. Some may or may not have identifiable marks on them. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12757 * Yazaki has a wedge or arrow shape, similar to that shown. Delphi Connectors (Push to Seat) Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Follow the steps below in order to repair push to seat connectors. 1. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device, the connector position assurance (CPA) device, and/or the secondary lock. 2. Separate the connector halves (1). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12758 3. Use the proper pick or removal tool (1) in order to release the terminal. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 4. Gently pull the cable and the terminal (2) out of the back of the connector. 5. Re-form the locking device if you are going to reuse the terminal (1). 6. To repair the terminal, refer to Terminal Repair. Terminal Repair 1. Slip the cable seal away from the terminal. 2. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 3. Slip a new cable seal onto the wire. 4. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 5. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 6. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. 7. Slide the cable seal toward the terminal. 8. Crimp the cable seal and the insulation. 9. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply grease to the connector. Reinstalling Terminal 1. In order to reuse a terminal or lead assembly, refer to Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Wiring Repairs). 2. Ensure that the cable seal is kept on the terminal side of the splice. 3. Insert the lead from the back until it catches. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Terminated Lead Repair 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Find the appropriate terminated lead. 3. Use the appropriate splice sleeves depending on the gauge size. 4. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves). Delphi Connectors (Pull to Seat) Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) Special Tools Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12759 J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal If the terminal is visibly damaged or is suspected of having a faulty connection, the terminal should be replaced. Follow the steps below in order to repair pull-to-seat connectors: 1. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) device and/or the secondary lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component or separate the connectors for in-line connectors. 3. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device. 4. Insert the proper pick or removal tool into the front of the connector body. Note: On connectors with more than one terminal the service loop may not be large enough to remove the terminal and crimp on a new one. If the terminal wire does not have a large enough service loop for removal, cut the wire 5 cm (2 in) behind the connector before removal. 5. Grasp the wire at the back of the connector body and gently push the terminal out the front of the connector body. Terminal Repair 1. If the wire needed to be cut in order to remove the terminal, gently push a small length of the same size wire through the back of the connector cavity until there is enough wire exposed in order to crimp on a new terminal. If the wire was not cut, cut the existing wire as close to the old terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 4. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. Terminal Installation 1. Align the terminal and pull the wire from the back of the connector in order to seat the terminal. 2. If necessary, cut the new wire to proper length and splice with existing circuit. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves). 3. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply dielectric grease to the connector. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Micro .64) Delphi Connectors (Micro.64) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12760 Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro.64 connectors. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. The lever lock may be located on the top or sides of the wire dress cover. View of a typical Micro 64 connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12761 Depress the lock and pull the lever over and past the lock. View of the connector when released from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12762 View of another type of Micro 64 connector. Depress the locks that are located on both sides of the wiredress cover and pull the lever over and past the locks. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12763 View of the connector when released from the component. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the front of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool push down on one of the locking tabs and pull the cover up until the dress cover releases. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. 4. Once the front 2 locks are unlocked, lift the front of the dress cover and pull it forward. Note: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 5. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the small slot on the TPA and pushing down until the TPA releases. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12764 Note: Be careful not to angle or rock the J 38125-21 tool when inserting it into the connector or the tool may break. 6. Insert the J 38125-21 tool into the round canal between the terminals cavities at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Follow the steps below in order to repair Micro 64 connector terminals. The Micro 64 connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-64 (M jaw) was developed to crimp Micro 64 terminals. The J 38125-64 crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. The J 38125-64 crimping tool is also designed to crimp both the wire and the insulation at the same time. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro 64 terminals. Note: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gauge wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 1. Cut the wire as close to the damaged terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12765 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert terminal into the appropriate terminal holder until it hits bottom and stops. The correct terminal holder is determined by the wire size. Also ensure that the terminals wings are pointing towards the former on the tool and the release locator. 5. Insert the stripped cable into the terminal. Insulation should be visible on both sides of the terminal insulation wings. 6. Compress the handles until the ratchet automatically releases. 7. Place the terminal into the appropriate cavity and assemble the connector. Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12766 Terminal Removal Procedure There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W connectors. These connectors are very similar but use different terminals and have some minor physical differences also. The first connector design of the Micro-Pack 100W (1) has a white connector interface that holds the terminals. The second design of the Micro-Pack 100W (2) has a gray interface to hold the terminals. Also, the first design has terminal cavities that are further apart (3 mm centerline) and offset from the other row of terminal cavities in the connector. The second design has terminals cavities that are closer together (2.54 mm centerline) and aligned vertically. One other way to identify the second design is the thin strip of material that runs along the outside of the cavities. Note: There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W terminals which are very similar. Ensure that you have the correct terminal before crimping the new terminal to the wire. The first design connector uses the longer terminal (1) that has a raised area in front of the recess in the terminal. The second design connector uses the shorter terminal without the raised area. Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro-Pack 100W connectors. Some Micro-Pack 100W connector disassembly procedures will vary. Use this procedure as a guide. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12767 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Locate the nose piece locking tabs that are positioned on the side of the connector nose piece. The connector nose piece acts as a terminal positive assurance (TPA) and may be referred to as such. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to push in one of the locking tabs while gently pulling on the same side of the nose piece. 4. Repeat the procedure for the other locking tab and remove the nose piece. 5. Remove the wire dress cover. The following is a general procedure for wire dress cover removal. Use this procedure as a guide, some dress cover removal procedures may vary. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12768 6. Use fingers to squeeze the 2 locking legs of the cover. 7. Apply pressure and gently rock the cover until one locking leg is unseated. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12769 8. Continue to apply pressure and rock the cover until the second locking leg is unseated. Repeat procedure for the other side of the dress cover and remove the cover. 9. Use J 38125-12A to gently lift the terminal retaining tab while gently pulling the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. If the terminal is severely bent or damaged, it may be possible on some connectors to push the wire out of the front of the connector instead of pulling it through. This will prevent damage to the internal seals of the connector. Once the terminal is pushed out of the connector, cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible and pull the wire through the connector. Terminal Repair Procedure The Micro-Pack 100W connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool was developed to crimp Micro-Pack 100W terminals. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro-Pack 100 terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12770 1. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. Note: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gauge wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert the terminal into the crimp tool until the core wings are flush with the anvil on the crimp tool. Be sure that the wings are pointed toward the crimp tool former and release the spring locator. The locator will hold the terminal in place. Inspect the alignment of the terminal wings with the crimp tool former. If the terminal wings are wider than the crimp tool former, remove the terminal and bend the terminal wings in slightly. 5. Place stripped wire into terminal. 6. Crimp the new terminal to the wire. If a jam occurs, press the emergency release to open applicator. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12771 Terminal Replacement Procedure After the terminal is crimped to the wire perform the following procedure in order to replace Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the Terminal Removal Procedure. Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The following is the proper procedure for the repair of Weather Pack(R) Connectors. 1. Separate the connector halves (1). 2. Open the secondary lock. A secondary lock aids in terminal retention and is usually molded to the connector (1). 3. Grasp the wire and push the terminal to the forward most position. Hold the wire in this position. 4. Insert the Weather Pack(R) terminal removal tool J 38125-10A into the front (mating end) of the connector cavity until it rests on the cavity shoulder (1). 5. Gently pull on the wire to remove the terminal through the back of the connector (2). Note: Never use force to remove a terminal from a connector. 6. Inspect the terminal and connector for damage. Repair as necessary. Refer to Repairing Connector Terminals (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Repairing Connector Terminals). 7. Reform the lock tang (2) and reset terminal in connector body. 8. Close secondary locks and join connector halves. 9. Verify that circuit is complete and working satisfactorily. 10. Perform system check. Delphi Connectors (12-Way) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12772 Delphi Connectors (12-Way) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) and slide the lever lock away from the connector body. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs on the dress cover of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool release all of the locking tabs. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12773 4. Release the lower wire dress cover locking tab. 5. Release the upper wire dress cover locking tab. 6. Once the locks are unlocked, lift the dress cover off. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12774 Note: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 7. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the locking tabs on both sides of the TPA. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. 8. Remove the nose piece by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the locking tabs on both sides of the nose piece. Gently pry the nose piece out of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12775 9. Insert the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Delphi Connectors (Steering Gear) Delphi Connectors (Steering Gear) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12776 Removal Procedure 1. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the locking tab on the connector. 2. Push down the locking tab to release the connector. The small flat-bladed tool may need to be pushed down and angled back slightly to depress the locking tab. Pull on the connector body while releasing the locking tab to disconnect the connector. FCI Connectors (Lever Lock) FCI Connectors (Lever Lock) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12777 Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. 1. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. 2. The release tab is located on the top of the wiredress cover. 3. View of connector in released position. 4. Disconnect the connector from the component. 5. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the dress cover. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs and remove the dress cover. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12778 6. Use a small flat-blade tool to slide the terminal position assurance (TPA) up one notch on both ends of the connector. The TPA is located underneath the wire dress cover. For the larger terminals insert the J 38125-556 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. For the smaller terminals insert the J 38125-560 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12779 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. FCI (SIR) FCI Connectors (SIR) Removal Procedure Note: The orange CPA must be released first to disconnect or to connect the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12780 1. Lift the orange CPA vertically (avoid lifting on an angle to the connector) approximately 4 mm to release the connector. Use a small flat-bladed tool to help release the orange CPA. The orange CPA can also be released manually without any tools. 2. Grab the connector on both sides and lift the connector vertically to disconnect the connector. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12781 1. Lift the orange CPA vertically approximately 4 mm before installing the connector. Use a small flat-bladed tool to help release the orange CPA. The orange CPA can also be released manually without any tools. 2. Line up the connector key tabs with the initiator key slots. Grab the connector on both sides and push the connector down into the initiator connector sub assembly until fully seated. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12782 3. After the connector is fully seated, push down the orange CPA with your thumb. Push down until the orange CPA is touching the yellow cover on the connector. FEP Connectors (Steering Gear) FEP Connectors (Steering Gear) Removal Procedure 1. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the locking tab on the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12783 2. Push down the locking tab to release the connector. The small flat-bladed tool may need to be pushed down and angled back slightly to depress the locking tab. Pull on the connector body while releasing the locking tab to disconnect the connector. JST Connectors JST Connectors Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. While depressing the lock, remove the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12784 2. Locate the two indents of the terminal position assurance (TPA) located on the bottom of the connector body. Note: The TPA cannot be removed from the connector while there are terminals present in the connector body. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to very carefully raise the TPA on both sides of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12785 4. View of the TPA when removed from the connector body. 5. Use the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the left side of the terminal release cavity as shown in the graphic. Use the tool to move the terminal release to the right with a gentle prying motion. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Kostal Connectors (Glow Plug Control Module) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12786 Kostal Connectors (Glow Plug Control Module) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure View of typical connector. View of connector in released position. 1. Locate the assist lever at the back of the connector. Move the assist lever to the rear position. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12787 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove the dress cover. 4. Slide the dress cover forward and off of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12788 5. The terminal positive assurance (TPA) is located in the front and rear of the connector. Note: The front TPA cannot be removed from the connector. Only move it to the preset position. 6. Use a small flat-blade tool to move the front TPA to the preset position, outboard approximately 0.125 in. (3 mm). 7. Use a small flat-blade tool to completely remove the rear TPA from the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12789 8. Use the J 38125-24 or the J 38125-560 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 9. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Kostal Connectors (Transmission) Kostal Connectors (Transmission) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12790 1. While depressing the lock, twist and remove the connector from the component. 2. Locate the terminal position assurance (TPA). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12791 Note: The TPA cannot be removed from the connector while there are terminals present in the connector body. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to push the TPA until it bottoms out. 4. Use the J 38125-28 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal cavity as shown in the graphic. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 5. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Terminal Replacement Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12792 After the terminal is crimped to the wire, perform the following procedure in order to replace the terminal. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. Locate the terminal position assurance (TPA). 4. Use a small flat-blade tool to push the TPA until it bottoms out. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12793 5. Ensure the TPA is fully seated. The TPA should be centered and flush with the connector body when viewed. Molex Connectors Molex Connectors Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the top of the wire dress cover. Slide the CPA forward. 2. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12794 3. The lever should be in the full forward position. 4. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12795 5. Remove the dress cover by using a flat bladed tool to release the dress cover locking tabs and lift up on the dress cover. 6. Cut the tie wrap that holds the wires to the connector body. 7. Use a small flat-blade tool to pry one side of the nose piece up to the pre-stage position. When the nose piece is in the pre-staged position, the nose piece will be raised above the connector body the length of the step in the nose piece. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12796 8. Use a small flat-blade tool to pry the other side of the piece to the pre-stage position. If the nose piece is higher than the first step in the nose piece, gently push down on the nose piece until it meets with resistance from the connector body, you should feel the nose piece click into position. 9. Insert the J 38125-213 into the small terminal release hole on the nose piece and gently pull on the back of the wire. 10. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Refer to the terminal crimping procedure in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit. Terminal Replacement Procedure After the terminal is crimped to the wire, perform the following procedure in order to replace the terminal. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12797 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the connector disassembly procedure. Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the connector body and pull the CPA out. The CPA is on the wire harness side of connector. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Use a small flat-bladed tool to gently pry off the dress cover by inserting the tool under the cover opposite the harness side and prying up. 4. Remove the cover. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12798 5. Using a small flat-bladed tool, push on the side of the nose piece retainer while pushing the nose piece forward with your thumb. This will release the terminal position assurance (TPA). 6. Insert the J 38125-12A into the corresponding terminal release cavity. The release cavities are the 2 center rows of cavities on one half of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12799 7. Pressing the J 38125-12A tool in the release cavity of the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and crimper in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. Slide the lever lock away from the connector body. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs on the dress cover of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool release all of the locking tabs. 4. Once the locks are unlocked, lift the dress cover off. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12800 Note: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 5. Release the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the blue locking tabs on both ends of the connector. Gently slide the TPA up to the released position on both ends. 6. For the larger terminals insert the J 38125-13A tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. For the smaller terminals insert the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12801 View of the release tool being used for the larger terminals. View of the release tool being used for the larger terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12802 View of the release tool being used for the smaller terminals. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12803 Side view of connector. View of top of connector. 1. Locate the assist lever and lock on the top of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12804 2. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. 3. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12805 4. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the rear of the connector. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. 5. Once the locking tabs are unlocked, slide the inner connector out of the rear of the connector housing. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12806 6. Use the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by pressing on the tang. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Repairing Connector Terminals Repairing Connector Terminals Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Use the following repair procedures in order to repair the following: * Push to Seat terminals * Pull to Seat terminals Some terminals do not require all of the steps shown. Skip the steps that do not apply for your terminal repair. The J-38125 contains further information. 1. Cut off the terminal between the core and the insulation crimp. Minimize any wire loss. For cable seal terminals, remove the seal. 2. Apply the correct cable seal per gauge size of the wire, if used. Slide the seal back along the wire in order to enable insulation removal. 3. Remove the insulation. 4. For sealed terminals only, align the seal with the end of the cable insulation. 5. Position the strip in the terminal. For sealed terminals, position the strip and seal in the terminal. 6. Hand crimp the core wings. 7. Hand crimp the insulation wings. For sealed terminals, hand crimp the insulation wings around the seal and the cable. 8. Solder all of the hand crimp terminals excepting Micro-Pack 100.64 size. Soldering Micro-Pack 100 World terminals may damage the terminal. Sumitomo Connectors Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12807 Sumitomo Connectors Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12808 3. Remove the dress cover by using a flat-blade tool to release the connector locking tabs and pulling off the dress cover. 4. Relieve the tension on the nose piece retainers by inserting J 38125-12A into the single retainer slot on the end of the nose piece and gently prying out the locking tab. Repeat the process for both of the nose piece locking tabs on the opposite side of the nose piece. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12809 5. Once the nose piece retainers are relaxed, use the J 38125-552 to pull up the nose piece by hooking the tool under the nose piece and pulling up. The nose piece should raise slightly. 6. On the opposite side of the nose piece, use the J 38125-552 to pull up the nose piece by hooking the tool under the nose piece and pulling up. The nose piece should release completely. If the nose piece does not come off, repeat the procedure on the opposite side. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12810 7. The illustration above identifies the entry canal where the terminal release tool will be inserted, and the terminal cavity. * Terminal (1) * Entry Canal (2) 8. Insert the J 38125-553 tool into the entry canal and pry up on the terminal retainer. The terminal retainer is a small plastic piece on the top of the terminal. The terminal retainer must be held up while the terminal is pulled out of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12811 9. The illustration shows a cutaway view of the connector to aid the technician in releasing the terminal retainer. 10. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Refer to the terminal crimping procedure in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit. Terminal Replacement Procedure After the terminal is crimped to the wire, perform the following procedure in order to replace the terminal. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the connector disassembly procedure. Terminal Position Assurance Locks Terminal Position Assurance Locks The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12812 2. Insert the J 38125-11A tool into the cavity on the lower right hand face of the connector until the terminal release tang access panel slides over. 3. Ensure that the terminal release tang access panel is in the correct location to access the terminals. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12813 5. Insert the J 38125-11A into the terminal release tang access slot located behind the access panel of the connector and press down on the terminal while carefully pulling the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component by pressing down on the connector position assurance (CPA). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12814 2. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting the tool in the small recess on the side of the connector and pushing up until the TPA releases from the connector body. The TPA should raise just slightly. Do not try to remove the TPA. Note: The TPA on this connector cannot be removed unless the terminals are removed first. The TPA will come out of the connector body, but only slightly. When the TPA is slightly raised the terminals can be removed. Using excessive force to remove the TPA with the terminals still in the connector will damage the connector. 3. Repeat the process for the other side of the connector. 4. Ensure that the TPA is in the proper position to remove the terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12815 5. While pushing the terminal forward, insert the J 38125-24 in the release cavity above the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12816 2. Insert a small flat-blade tool in the slot below the front loaded terminal position assurance (TPA) and pry up. 3. Remove the TPA by pulling it out of the connector. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-553 on a slight upward angle into the cavity below the terminal to be removed. Ensure that the pointed on the end of the tool is facing the bottom of the terminal and it stays in contact with the terminal until it stops on the plastic terminal retainer. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12817 6. Gently pry the plastic terminal retainer down and carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12818 1. While depressing the lock, pull the two connector halves apart. Note: The TPA is fragile and may break if not done carefully. 2. Use a small flat-blade tool to very carefully push the terminal position assurance (TPA) towards the face of the connector on both sides of the connector. 3. View of the male half of the connector with female terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12819 4. View of the female half of the connector with male terminals. 5. Use the J 38125-215 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. View of the female half of the connector with male terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12820 7. View of the male half of the connector with female terminals. 8. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers A circuit breaker is a protective device that is designed to open the circuit when a current load is in excess of the rated breaker capacity. If there is a short or other type of overload condition in the circuit, the excessive current will open the circuit between the circuit breaker terminals. Two types of circuit breakers are used. Circuit Breaker - This type opens when excessive current passes through it for a period of time. It closes again after a few seconds, and if the cause of the high current is still present, it will open again. The circuit breaker will continue to cycle open and closed until the condition causing the high current is removed. Positive Temperature Coefficient (PTC) Circuit Breaker - This type greatly increases its resistance when excessive current passes through it. The excessive current heats the PTC device, as the device heats its resistance increases. Eventually the resistance gets so high that the circuit is effectively open. Unlike the ordinary circuit breaker the PTC unit will not reset until the circuit is opened, by removing the voltage from its terminals. Once the voltage is removed the circuit breaker will re-close within a second or 2. Circuit Protection - Fuses Circuit Protection - Fuses Special Tools EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM) For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12821 The fuse is the most common method of an automotive wiring circuit protection. Whenever there is an excessive amount of current flowing through a circuit the fusible element will melt and create an open or incomplete circuit. Fuses are a one time protection device and must be replaced each time the circuit is overloaded. To determine if a fuse is open, remove the suspected fuse and examine if the element in the fuse is broken (2). If not broken (1), also check for continuity using a Digital Multimeter (DMM) or a continuity tester. If the element is broken or continuity is suspect, replace the fuse with one of equal current rating. Circuit Protection - Fusible Links Circuit Protection - Fusible Links Special Tools EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM) For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Fusible link is wire designed to melt and break continuity when excessive current is applied. It is often located between or near the battery and starter or electrical center. Use a continuity tester or a Digital Multimeter (DMM) at each end of the wire containing the fusible link in order to determine if it is broken. If broken, it must be replaced with fusible link of the same gauge size. Repairing a Fusible Link Note: Fusible links cut longer than 225 mm (approximately 9 in) will not provide sufficient overload protection. Flat Wire Repairs Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12822 Flat Wire Repairs The flat wire within the flex wiring harness is not serviceable. If an open or short exists within the flex wiring harness the complete harness must be replaced. GMLAN Wiring Repairs GMLAN Wiring Repairs Special Tools * EL-38125-10 - Splice Sleeve Crimping Tool * J 38125-5 - Ultra Torch Special Tool * DuraSeal splice sleeves * A wire stripping tool For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: * A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. * A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The GM Local Area Network (GMLAN) System requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working on GMLAN connectors and terminals. GMLAN Repairs Note: When making a repair to any GMLAN network, the original wire length after the repair must be the same length as before the repair. If the network is a twisted pair, the twist must be maintained after the repair is completed. GMLAN has 2 types of networks, low speed and high speed. Low speed GMLAN has a single wire and works at slow speeds. High speed GMLAN has 2 wires in a twisted pair and works at higher speeds. For more information on GMLAN, refer to Data Link Communications Description and Operation ( See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Information Bus/Description and Operation). GMLAN Connector Terminal Repair Note: A terminated lead can be used to replace damaged connector terminals for both high speed and low speed GMLAN systems. When making a connector terminal repair on a GMLAN high speed system with twisted pair wires, do not untwist the wires more than necessary to make the repair. If the individual terminals are damaged on any GMLAN connection, use the appropriate connector repair procedure in order to repair the terminal. Refer to Connector Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Connector Repairs) for the appropriate connector repair procedure. GMLAN Wire Repair Note: Refer to Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Wiring Repairs) in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gauge size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and EL-38125-10 - tool. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the DuraSeal splice sleeves. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12823 Note: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: * Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. * Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. * Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert to regional wiring gauge size. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the EL-38125-10 - tool in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the splice sleeve crimp tool. The crimp tool has four nests, one for each color. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12824 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs Caution: Do not solder repairs under any circumstances as this could result in the air reference being obstructed. If the heated oxygen sensor pigtail wiring, connector, or terminal is damaged the entire oxygen sensor assembly must be replaced. Do not attempt to repair the wiring, connector, or terminals. In order for the sensor to function properly it must have a clean air reference. This clean air reference is obtained by way of the oxygen sensor signal and heater wires. Any attempt to repair the wires, connectors or terminals could result in the obstruction of the air reference and degrade oxygen sensor performance. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12825 The following guidelines should be used when servicing the heated oxygen sensor: * Do not apply contact cleaner or other materials to the sensor or vehicle harness connectors. These materials may get into the sensor, causing poor performance. Also, the sensor pigtail and harness wires must not be damaged in such a way that the wires inside are exposed. This could provide a path for foreign materials to enter the sensor and cause performance problems. * Neither the sensor nor vehicle lead wires should be bent sharply or kinked. Sharp bends, kinks, etc., could block the reference air path through the lead wire. * Do not remove or defeat the oxygen sensor ground wire (where applicable). Vehicles that utilize the ground wire sensor may rely on this ground as the only ground contact to the sensor. Removal of the ground wire will also cause poor engine performance. * To prevent damage due to water intrusion, be sure that the peripheral seal remains intact on the vehicle harness connector. High Temperature Wiring Repairs High Temperature Wiring Repairs Special Tools * EL-38125-10 - Splice Sleeve Crimping Tool * J 38125-5 - Ultra Torch * DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). High Temperature Wiring Wiring that is exposed to high temperatures, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time may use materials i.e. wires, connectors, and shielding that has a higher heat rating than typical wiring. When making a repair in a high temperature area observe the following: * Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature to replace any damaged wire. * Replace any heat shielding that is removed. * Cover any DuraSeal splice sleeves with SCT1 shrink tubing. * After making a wiring repair, ensure that the location of the wiring is not moved closer to the heat source. Identifying High Temperature Wiring Wiring that is exposed to high temperature, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time need special considerations when making wiring repairs. Areas that may be exposed to higher temperatures can be identified by heat resistant materials that are being used in those areas. These materials may include heat reflective tape, moon tape, and high temperature shrink tubing. Also conduit and other protective coverings may be used. Because conduit or similar coverings are used throughout the vehicle regardless of the temperature, it may be necessary for the technician to determine if an area is exposed to excessive heat before making a wiring repair. Obvious areas of consideration would be any area located near the exhaust manifolds, catalytic converter, and exhaust pipes. Items Required * DuraSeal splice sleeves to crimp and seal connections * High temperature SCT1 shrink tubing to protect the splice sleeves * Terminated leads or pigtails * The correct tools to remove the terminals from the connectors Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature of the same or larger gauge size as the original wire when repair damage wire. Also replace any reflective tape that you remove during the repair. High Temperature Wire Repair Note: Refer to Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Wiring Repairs) in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature rating of the same gauge size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the EL-38125-10 - tool and then encapsulate the splice sleeve using the high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12826 Note: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: * Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. * Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. * Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert to regional wiring gauge size. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Slide a section of high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing down the length of wire to be spliced. Ensure that the shrink tubing will not interfere with the splice procedure. 5. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 6. Use the EL-38125-10 - tool in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the splice sleeve crimp tool. The crimp tool has four nests, one for each color. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12827 7. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 8. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 9. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 10. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 11. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12828 12. Center the high temperature SCT1 shrink tube over the DuraSeal splice sleeve. 13. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the high temperature heat shrink tubing. 14. Gradually move the heat from the center to the open end of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. 15. Replace any reflective tape and clips that may have been remove during the repair. Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation If the wire insulation has been chafed, or broken, enough to show the conductive portion of the wire, and the wire is not damaged, determine the length of insulation that needs to be repaired. If the repair is less than 280 mm (11 in), cut the wire within the damaged area. Than slide the appropriate heat shrink tubing (listed below) over the wire, and repair the wire by splicing the wires together. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves). Once the wire is spliced together slide heat shrink tubing over the damaged area and apply heat to seal the repaired wire. If the wire is damaged, or the damaged area is larger than 280 mm (11 in), than replace the damaged wire by splicing in a new section of wire. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12829 SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs Special Tools * EL-38125-10 - Splice Sleeve Crimping Tool * J 38125-5 - Ultra Torch * DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: * A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. * A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides the necessary low resistance contact integrity for these sensitive, low energy circuits. The Supplemental Inflatable Restraint (SIR) System/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working with the SIR/SRS, and the wiring components, such as connectors and terminals. SIR/SRS Connector Repair (Plastic Body and Terminal Metal Pin) Note: Do not use the terminals in the kit in order to replace damaged SIR/SRS system terminals. Use either an SIR/SRS pigtail or a terminated lead from the SIR Repair Kit Tray. The terminals in the SIR/SRS system are made with a special plating. This plating provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. Pigtail repair packs are available for SIR/SRS connectors with eight or less terminals. Only the connector body is available for connectors with more than eight terminals. Terminated leads can be used to replace damaged terminals when replacing the connector body. SIR/SRS Component Wire Pigtail Repair Note: Do not make wire, connector, or terminal repairs on components with wire pigtails. A wire pigtail is a wire or wires attached directly to the device, not by a connector. If a wiring pigtail is damaged, you must replace the entire component, with pigtail. The inflatable restraint steering wheel module coil is an example of a pigtail component. SIR/SRS Wire Repair Note: Refer to Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Wiring Repairs) in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12830 If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gauge size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and EL-38125-10 - tool. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the DuraSeal splice sleeves. Note: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: * Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. * Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. * Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert to regional wiring gauge size. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the EL-38125-10 - tool in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the splice sleeve crimp tool. The crimp tool has four nests, one for each color. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12831 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Connector Position Assurance (CPA) The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of a connector. CPAs are used in all SIR System connectors and also in some connectors of other systems. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals of a connection. Terminal Position Assurance (TPA) The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12832 Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Special Tools * EL-38125-10 - Splice Sleeve Crimping Tool * J 38125-5 - Ultra Torch * DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Note: Use only DuraSeal splice sleeves. Other splice sleeves may not protect the splice from moisture or provide a good electrical connection. Use DuraSeal splice sleeves to form a one-to-one splice on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. Use DuraSeal splice sleeves where there is special requirements such as moisture sealing. Follow the instructions below in order to splice copper wire using DuraSeal splice sleeves. Note: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: * Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. * Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. * Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert to regional wiring gauge size. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12833 5. Use the EL-38125-10 - tool in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the splice sleeve crimp tool. The crimp tool has four nests, one for each color. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12834 * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Splicing Inline Harness Diodes Splicing Inline Harness Diodes Many vehicle electrical systems use a diode to isolate circuits and protect the components from voltage spikes. When installing a new diode use the following procedure. 1. Open the harness. * If the harness is taped, remove the tape. * To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing seam ripper (available from sewing supply stores) in order to cut open the harness. * If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the diode. 2. If the diode is taped to the harness, remove all of the tape. 3. Check and record the current flow direction and orientation of diode. 4. Remove the inoperative diode from the harness with a suitable soldering tool. Note: If the diode is located next to a connector terminal remove the terminal(s) from the connector to prevent damage from the soldering tool. 5. Carefully strip away a section of insulation next to the old soldered portion of the wire(s). Do not remove any more than is needed to attach the new diode. 6. Check current flow direction of the new diode, being sure to install the diode with correct bias. Reference the appropriate service manual wiring schematic to obtain the correct diode installation position. 7. Attach the new diode to the wire(s) using 60/40 rosin core solder. Before soldering attach some heat sinks (aluminum alligator clips) across the diode wire ends to protect the diode from excessive heat. Follow the manufacturer's instruction for the soldering equipment. 8. Reinstall terminal(s) into the connector body if previously removed. Note: To prevent shorts to ground and water intrusion, completely cover all exposed wire and diode attachment points with tape. 9. Tape the diode to the harness or connector using electrical tape. Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable Twisted/shielded cable is used in order to protect wiring from electrical noise. Two-conductor cable of this construction is used between the radio and the Delco-Bose(R) speaker/amplifier units and other applications where low level, sensitive signals must be carried. Follow the instructions below in order to repair the twisted/shielded cable. 1. Remove the outer jacket (1). Use care not to cut into the drain wire of the mylar tape. 2. Unwrap the tape. Do not remove the tape. Use the tape in order to rewrap the twisted conductors after the splice is made. 3. Prepare the splice. Untwist the conductors and follow the instructions for Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves). Staggering the splices by 65 mm (2.5 in) is recommended. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12835 Note: Apply the mylar tape with the aluminum side inward. This ensures good electrical contact with the drain wire. 4. Re-assemble the cable. * Rewrap the conductors with the mylar tape. If the mylar tape is damaged, use 3M product AL-36FR to replace the damaged mylar tape. * Use caution not to wrap the drain wire in the tape (1). * Follow the splicing instructions for copper wire and splice the drain wire. * Wrap the drain wire around the conductors and tape with electrical tape to replace the outer insulation. 5. Tape over the entire cable. Use a winding motion when you apply the tape. Wiring Repairs Wiring Repairs The Wiring Repairs section contains the following types of wiring repair information. Using these elements together will make wiring repair faster and easier: * Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections) * Flat Wire Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Flat Wire Repairs) * GMLAN Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/GMLAN Wiring Repairs) * High Temperature Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/High Temperature Wiring Repairs) * Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs) * Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves) * Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable) * Splicing Inline Harness Diodes (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Inline Harness Diodes) * SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs) US English/Metric Conversion US English/Metric Conversion Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12836 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12837 Basic Digital Multimeter Requirements Basic Digital Multimeter Requirements Digital Multimeter (DMM) Basic Requirements Service information is validated using digital multimeters that meet or exceed the following requirements. Using a multimeter that does not meet these basic requirements may give inaccurate readings which could lead to an incorrect diagnosis. Display and Settings 1. Four digits displayed 2. Voltage, amperage, resistance, frequency, diode test settings, and min-max function 3. Display positive and negative values Voltage 1. Have at least 10 Mohm input impedance 2. Test a DC voltage range of 0.1-1000 V. 3. Test an AC voltage range of 0.1-1000 V. Amperage 1. Test a DC amperage range of 0.1µA-10 A. 2. Test an AC amperage range of 0.1µA-10 A. Resistance Test a resistance range of 0.1 ohm-40 Mohm and displays infinite for a value greater than 40 Mohm (O.L. (Over-load)) Frequency Test for a frequency range of 0.5 HZ-199 K HZ Diode Test 1. Apply at least 1 mA when performing the diode bias test 2. Display the break over voltage drop (0-3 V) of a forward biased diode 3. Display infinite (O.L. (Over-load)) when a diode is reverse biased Min-Max Readings 1. Can update at a 1 ms sample rate 2. Saves and displays minimum and maximum values Testing Ground and Low Reference Circuits Testing Ground and Low Reference Circuits Because a test lamp can light with up to 200 ohm in a ground or low reference circuit they are not recommended to be used for this type of test. A low impedance test lamp can light and indicate the circuit is good when there is as much as 20-30 ohm present, while a high impedance test lamp can light with up to 200 ohm present in the circuit. This is why the Digital Multi-Meter (DMM) is used when validating a ground or low reference circuit continuity. When using the DMM there are many vehicle conditions that can affect the ground and low reference continuity testing. If these conditions are not met, a ground or low reference circuit test can fail on a good circuit. This may cause longer diagnosis time and incorrect component replacement. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12838 Any current flow through a ground or low reference circuit, while being tested, will skew the DMM continuity reading, or display a reading higher than when there is no current flowing. Performing a ground or low reference circuit continuity test, in reference to the vehicles battery negative terminal, will have the highest risk of failing a good ground or low reference circuit test than any other ground reference point. The best ground test points would be a control module housing (if the control modules housing is metal and grounded), door jamb striker (if attached to metal), under dash metal frame work, engine block, or body ground studs (other than where the negative battery cable is attached). A typical DMM ground or low reference circuit continuity reading can be as high as 100 ohm with the ignition ON, and drop to 15-25 ohm after the ignition is turned OFF. The reading will drop below 10 ohm after 30-40 seconds, then below 5 ohm after 60 seconds. Once the vehicle completely goes to sleep (generally 3-10 minutes) the reading will drop below 0.3 ohm. The following list of conditions may need to be met to ensure a valid continuity reading on a ground or low reference circuit: * Ignition OFF * Key out of the ignition switch (when not equipped with keyless entry and remote start) * Retained Accessory Power (RAP) OFF (open and close the driver door after ignition OFF) * Battery charger set at a 2 A or less charge rate * Scan tool not communicating with any vehicle control module (in some cases it may need to be disconnected from the DLC) * All entry doors closed * Headlamps OFF (auto headlamps disabled) * Any delay lighting OFF * HVAC after blow OFF * Any accessory that can work when the ignition is OFF * Wait up to 60 seconds (after all other listed conditions are met) Activating the DOOR LOCK function with a key fob can greatly reduce the time to achieve a valid ground or low reference continuity test result. Terminal Wiring Repair Terminal Wiring Repair Special Tools * EL-38125-10 - Splice Sleeve Crimp Tool * EL-38125-580 - Terminal Release Tool Kit * J-38125-5 - Ultra Torch * EL-35616 - Connector Test Adapter Kit For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Note: All repairs near the engine manifold, turbo engine and all exhaust pipes should follow the High Temperature Wiring Repair procedures. 1. Find the appropriate connector end view within the connector end view section. The connector end view has the following information: * Diagnostic probe tool * Terminal release tool * Terminal/terminated lead part numbers 2. Determine if a terminal is damaged. Note: Not using the proper test kit probe may cause damage to the terminal(s) that are probed. * Locate the diagnostic probe tool from the connector end view. The connector end view describes the color and part number to help the technician find and use the correct tool. * Connect the probe tool to the Digital Multimeter. * Insert the probe tool into the cavity and follow the procedures from the Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter). 3. Disconnect the connector body to perform the repair. Note: Several procedures for specific connector bodies are called out in Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Wiring Repairs). Use the following repair procedures to repair the following terminals: Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12839 Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack))Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Push to Seat))Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Pull to Seat))Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W))Delphi Connectors (Micro.64) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Micro .64) )Delphi Connectors (12-Way) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (12-Way))Delphi Connectors (Steering Gear) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Steering Gear)) * The TPA and CPA should be removed before releasing the terminal for the connector body. * Look at the connector end view to locate the cavity of the damaged terminal and find the proper terminal release tool from the terminal release tool kit. Note: Using the incorrect terminal release tool can damage the connector body. * Insert the terminal release tool into the cavity. Note: Some terminals have a lever that must be disengaged before the terminal can be released. Gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Terminated Lead Repair Terminated Lead Repair Special Tools * EL-38125-10 - Splice Sleeve Crimp Tool * EL-38125-580 - Terminal Release Tool Kit * J-38125-5 - Ultra Torch * EL-35616 - Connector Test Adapter Kit For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Note: All repairs near the engine manifold, turbo engine and all exhaust pipes should follow the High Temperature Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/High Temperature Wiring Repairs) procedures. Terminated leads are terminals that are crimped onto wires. The terminated lead can be used throughout the vehicle since it is designed for temperatures up to 150°C. The length of the wire is 450 mm. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12840 The DuraSeal splice sleeve has the following 2 critical features: * A special heat shrink tubing that environmentally seals the splice. The shrink tubing contains a sealing adhesive inside the shrink tubing. * A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp that provides the necessary contact integrity for sensitive low energy circuits. 1. Use the connector end view to identify the correct terminated lead. 2. The terminated lead package should include a DuraSeal splice sleeve. If not, use the chart to identify the correct part. 3. Open the harness by removing any tape: Use a sewing seam ripper, or a comparable tool, to cut open the harness, to avoid wire insulation damage. 4. Depending on how many terminals need repairs, cut the terminal and wire back at least 40 mm. Try to keep the harness wire length the same. If more than one terminated lead is required, stagger the lengths by 40 mm. This helps reduce the bundle size of the wire harness. 5. Use the EL-38125-10 - tool in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the splice sleeve crimp tool. The crimp tool has four nests, one for each color. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12841 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the J-38125-5 - ultra torch , apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12842 Seat Fan: Electrical Diagrams Heated/Cooled Seat Schematics Power, Ground, Serial Data, and Controls (KA1) Heating Elements (KA1 without LTZ or SLT) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12843 Heating Elements (KA1 with LTZ or SLT) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12844 SPO Heated Seats Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12845 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Specifications Seat Heater: Specifications Fastener Tightening Specifications Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Seat Heater: Diagram Information and Instructions Electrical Schematic Symbols Electrical Schematic Symbols Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12851 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12852 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12853 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12854 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12855 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12856 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12857 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12858 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12859 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12860 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12861 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12862 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12863 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12864 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12865 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12866 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12867 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12868 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12869 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12870 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12871 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12872 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12873 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12874 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12875 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12876 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12877 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12878 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12879 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12880 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12881 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12882 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12883 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12884 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12885 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12886 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12887 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12888 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12889 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12890 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12891 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12892 General Electrical Diagnosis General Electrical Diagnosis Basic Knowledge Required Without a basic knowledge of electricity, it will be difficult to use the diagnostic procedures contained in the service manual. You should understand the basic theory of electricity, and know the meaning of voltage (V), current (A), and resistance (Ohms ). You should also be able to read and understand a wiring diagram, as well as understand what happens in a circuit with an open or a shorted wire. Vehicle Zoning Strategy Vehicle Zoning Strategy All grounds, in-line connectors, and splices have identifying numbers that correspond to where they are located in the vehicle. The following table explains the numbering system. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12893 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12894 Seat Heater: Diagnostic Aids Arrows and Symbols Arrows and Symbols This service manual uses various symbols in order to describe different service operations. 1 - Front of Vehicle 2 - View Detail 2 - View Detail 3 - Ambient Air Mixed with Another Gas or Indicate Temperature Change 4 - Motion or Direction 5 - View Angle 6 - Dimension (1:2) 7 Ambient/Clean Air Flow or Cool Air Flow 8 - Lubrication Point - Oil or Fluid 9 - Task Related 10 Sectioning (1:3) 11 - Gas Other Than Ambient Air or Hot Air Flow 12 - Lubrication Point - Grease or Jelly 13 - Multidirectional Arrow Decimal and Metric Equivalents Decimal and Metric Equivalents Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12895 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12896 Checking Aftermarket Accessories Checking Aftermarket Accessories Warning: Refer to SIR Warning (See: Restraint Systems/Service Precautions/SIR Warning). Caution: The OBD II symbol is used on the circuit diagrams in order to alert the technician that the circuit is essential for proper OBD II emission control circuit operation. Any circuit which fails and causes the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) to turn ON, or causes emissions-related component damage, is identified as an OBD II circuit. Do not connect aftermarket accessories into the following circuits: * SIR circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the SIR symbol. * OBD II circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the OBD II symbol. Always check for aftermarket accessories (non-OEM) as the first step in diagnosing electrical problems. If the vehicle is so equipped, disconnect the system to verify that these add-on accessories are not the cause of the problems. Possible causes of vehicle problems related to aftermarket accessories include: * Power feeds connected to points other than the battery * Antenna location * Transceiver wiring located too close to vehicle electronic modules or wiring * Poor shielding or poor connectors on antenna feed line * Check for recent service bulletins detailing installation guidelines for aftermarket accessories. Circuit Testing Circuit Testing The Circuit Testing section contains the following diagnostic testing information. Using this information along with the diagnostic procedures will identify the cause of the electrical malfunction. * Using Connector Test Adapters (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Using Connector Test Adapters) * Probing Electrical Connectors (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Probing Electrical Connectors) * Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12897 Procedures/Circuit Testing/Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter) * Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp) * Using Fused Jumper Wires (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Using Fused Jumper Wires) * Measuring Voltage (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Measuring Voltage) * Measuring Voltage Drop (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Measuring Voltage Drop) * Measuring Frequency (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Measuring Frequency) * Testing Ground and Low Reference Circuits (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Testing Ground and Low Reference Circuits) * Testing for Continuity (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Continuity) * Testing for Short to Ground (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Short to Ground) * Testing for a Short to Voltage (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for a Short to Voltage) * Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections) * Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions) * Testing for Electrical Intermittents (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Electrical Intermittents) * Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure) * Circuit Protection - Fuses (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Circuit Protection - Fuses) * Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers) * Circuit Protection - Fusible Links (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Circuit Protection - Fusible Links) Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp Special Tools EL-35616-200 - Test Light - Probe Kit For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test Probe Caution). A test lamp can simply and quickly test a low impedance circuit for voltage. A Digital Multimeter (DMM) should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present if the impedance is low enough, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. In other words, if there is not enough current, the test lamp will not illuminate even though voltage is present. The EL-35616-200 - kit is Micro-Pack compatible and comprised of a 12-volt light bulb with an attached pair of leads. To properly operate this tool use the following procedures. When testing for voltage: 1. Attach one lead to ground. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is voltage at the point being tested. When testing for ground: 1. Attach one lead to battery positive voltage. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where ground should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is ground at the point being tested. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12898 Testing for a Short to Voltage Testing for a Short to Voltage Special Tools EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM) For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test Probe Caution). The following procedure tests for a short to voltage in a circuit. 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Set the rotary dial of the Digital Multimeter (DMM) to the V (DC) position. 4. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. Turn ON the ignition and operate all accessories. 7. If the voltage measured is greater than 1 V, there is a short to voltage in the circuit. Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions Special Tools J-25070 - Heat Gun For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Many intermittent open or shorted circuits are affected by harness/connector movement that is caused by vibration, engine torque, bumps/rough pavement, etc. In order to duplicate the customer's concern, it may be necessary to manipulate the wiring harness if the malfunction appears to be vibration related. Manipulation of a circuit can consist of a wide variety of actions, including: * Wiggling the harness * Disconnecting a connector and reconnecting * Stressing the mechanical connection of a connector * Pulling on the harness or wire in order to identify a separation/break inside the insulation * Relocating a harness or wires All these actions should be performed with some goal in mind. For instance, with a scan tool connected, wiggling the wires may uncover a faulty input to the control module. The snapshot option would be appropriate here. Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure). Another option is, with the component commanded ON and OFF by the scan tool, move related connectors and wiring and observe the component operation. With the engine running, move related connectors and wiring while monitoring engine operation. If harness or connector movement affects the data displayed, component/system operation, or engine operation, inspect and repair the harness/connections as necessary. You may need to load the vehicle in order to duplicate the concern. This may require the use of weights, floor jacks, jackstands, frame machines, etc. In these cases you are attempting to duplicate the concern by manipulating the suspension or frame. This method is useful in finding harnesses that are too short and their connectors pull apart enough to cause a poor connection. A DMM set to Peak Min/Max mode and connected to the suspect circuit while testing can yield desirable results. Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Electrical Intermittents). Certainly, using the senses of sight, smell, and hearing while manipulating the circuit can provide good results as well. There may be instances where circuit manipulation alone will not meet the required criteria for the fault condition to appear. In such cases it may be necessary to expose the suspect circuit to other conditions while manipulating the harness. Such conditions would include high moisture conditions, along with exceptionally high or low temperatures. The following discusses how to expose the circuit to these kinds of conditions. Salt Water Spray Some compounds possess the ability to conduct electricity when dissolved in water such as ordinary salt. By mixing table salt with water in sufficient Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12899 quantities, you can enhance the conductive properties of water so that any circuit which may be sensitive to moisture will more readily fail when liberally sprayed with this mixture. Mixing 0.35L (12 oz) of water with approximately 1 tablespoon of salt will yield a salt solution of 5 percent. Fill a normal spray bottle with this mixture. This mixture is sufficient to enhance the water's own conductivity. This may cause the circuit to fail more easily when sprayed. Once the mixture is completed, spray the suspect area liberally with the solution. Then, while monitoring either a scan tool or DMM, manipulate the harness as discussed previously. High Temperature Conditions If the complaint tends to be heat related, you can simulate the condition using the J-25070 - heat gun. Using the heat gun, you can heat up the suspected area or component. Manipulate the harnesses under high temperature conditions while monitoring the scan tool or DMM to locate the fault condition. The high temperature condition may be achieved simply by test driving the vehicle at normal operating temperature. If a heat gun is unavailable, consider this option to enhance your diagnosis. This option does not allow for the same control, however. Low Temperature Conditions Depending on the nature of the fault condition, placing a fan in front of the vehicle while the vehicle is in the shade can have the desired effect. If this is unsuccessful, use local cooling treatments such as ice or a venturi type nozzle (one that provides hot or cold air). This type of tool is capable of producing air stream temperatures down to -18°C (0°F) from one end and +71°C (160°F) from the other. This is ideally suited for localized cooling needs. Once the vehicle, component, or harness has been sufficiently cooled, manipulate the harness or components in an effort to duplicate the concern. Duplicating Failure Conditions * If none of the previous tests are successful, attempt to duplicate and/or capture the failure conditions. * Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, where applicable, contains the conditions that were present when the DTC set. 1. Review and record Freeze Frame/Failure Records data. 2. Clear the DTCs using the scan tool. 3. Turn the key to OFF and wait 15 seconds. 4. Operate the vehicle under the same conditions that were noted in Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, as closely as possible. The vehicle must also be operating within the Conditions for Running the DTC. Refer to Conditions for Running the DTC in the supporting text if a DTC is being diagnosed. 5. Monitor DTC Status for the DTC being tested. The scan tool will indicate Ran, when the enabling conditions have been satisfied long enough for the DTC to run. The scan tool will also indicate whether the DTC passed or failed. * An alternate method is to drive the vehicle with the DMM connected to a suspected circuit. An abnormal reading on the DMM when the concern occurs, may help you locate the concern. Measuring Frequency Measuring Frequency Special Tools EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM) For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test Probe Caution). The following procedure determines the frequency of a signal. Note: Connecting the Digital Multimeter (DMM) to the circuit before pressing the Hz button will allow the DMM to autorange to an appropriate range. 1. Apply power to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (AC) position. 3. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12900 5. Press the Hz button on the DMM. 6. The DMM will display the frequency measured. Measuring Voltage Measuring Voltage Special Tools EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM) For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test Probe Caution). The following procedure measures the voltage at a selected point in a circuit. 1. Disconnect the electrical harness connector for the circuit being tested, if necessary. 2. Enable the circuit and/or system being tested. Use the following methods: * Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. * Turn ON the engine. * Turn ON the circuit and/or system with a scan tool in Output Controls. * Turn ON the switch for the circuit and/or system being tested. 3. Select the V (AC) or V (DC) position on the Digital Multimeter (DMM). 4. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the point of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. The DMM displays the voltage measured at that point. Measuring Voltage Drop Measuring Voltage Drop Special Tools EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM) For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test Probe Caution). The following procedure determines the difference in voltage potential between 2 points. 1. Set the rotary dial of the Digital Multimeter (DMM) to the V (DC) position. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12901 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to one point of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to the other point of the circuit. 4. Operate the circuit. 5. The DMM displays the difference in voltage between the 2 points. Probing Electrical Connectors Probing Electrical Connectors Note: Always be sure to reinstall the connector position assurance (CPA) and terminal position assurance (TPA) when reconnecting connectors or replacing terminals. Front probe Disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the mating side (front) of the connector. Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test Probe Caution). Note: When probing female 0.64 terminals, it is important to use the correct adapter. There have been some revisions to the test adapter for 0.64 terminals. The proper adapter for 0.64 terminals is the EL-35616-64B which has a gold terminal and a black wire between the base and tip. Failure to use the proper test adapter may result in damage to the terminal being tested and improper diagnosis. Note: The proper adapter for probing the terminals for fuses, relays, or diodes in an electrical center is EL-35616-35. Using any other tool or adapter may damage the terminal being tested. Refer to the following table as a guide in selecting the correct test adapter for front probing connectors: Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12902 Backprobe Note: * Backprobe connector terminals only when specifically required in diagnostic procedures. * Do not backprobe a sealed (Weather Pack(R)) connector, less than a 280 series Metri-Pack connector, a Micro-Pack connector, or a flat wire (dock and lock) connector. * Backprobing can be a source of damage to connector terminals. Use care in order to avoid deforming the terminal, either by forcing the test probe too far into the cavity or by using too large of a test probe. * After backprobing any connector, inspect for terminal damage. If terminal damage is suspected, test for proper terminal contact. Do not disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the harness side (back) of the connector. Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure Using Snapshots in Global Diagnostic System (GDS) Overview Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12903 A snapshot is a recording of what a control module on the vehicle was receiving for information while the snapshot is being made. A snapshot may be used to analyze the data during the time a vehicle condition is current. This allows you to concentrate on making the condition occur, rather than trying to view all the data in anticipation of the fault. To record a snapshot in GDS, select, Record Snapshot, from the options at the top right portion of any of the various pages that allow snapshots to be taken (e.g. Data Display, Control Functions, etc.). When you are finished recording, select, Stop Snapshot recording. The snapshot will now be available for replay. Snapshot Replay The Snapshot Replay function allows reviews of previously recorded vehicle snapshot data. This information can be used in analysis of vehicle problems and detection of trigger error conditions. The graph function can be used to compare parameters to see if a component is functioning properly. Recorded snapshots can be selected for viewing by the following three methods: * Selecting a snapshot file from the Vehicle Home Page and clicking on the Review selection. * Double clicking on the selected snapshot from the Vehicle Home Page. * Entering the Tools selection from the Menu selection and selecting Snapshot replay. Next, open the Snapshot Manager. Double click on the snapshot file you wish to view or click on the Load Snapshot selection and select a snapshot file. Regardless of selection method, a File Loaded pop-up window will be displayed from the Snapshot Replay screen. Select OK from the pop-up window. Snapshot Play Functions There are several snapshot play functions that are used to replay recorded snapshots * The Play function is used to play the snapshot forward by clicking on this selection. A marker will move across the screen when this selection is used. All selections in this area turn grey when they are active. * The Pause function is used to pause play of the snapshot. When this selection is clicked a second time the snapshot will start playing where it left off. * The Stop function is used to stop playing the snapshot. The snapshot will start from the beginning, if Play is selected after using the Stop function. Time Control Time control is used to control the snapshot replay. This function allows selection of a specific time frame, display of different views, and control of display speed. The following functions can be selected directly under Time Control. * The Bookmark selection allows you to add a specific comment in the current display and return to this point in the future. When this option is selected, a pop-up window is displayed. Enter a bookmark name and select OK. * The Note Pad can be selected to add comments to the snapshot replay file at the current point of time. When this option is selected, a pop-up window is displayed. Enter a comment for the snapshot file and select OK. * The Load Snapshot (blue folder) opens a snapshot file and makes it ready for further analysis. This function is also available by clicking on an available snapshot file from the Snapshot Manager. * The Down Arrow displays all Time Control options when selected. Individual options can also be selected by clicking on the item you want. * The Snapshot Display Speed can be controlled by selecting this option. Slow speeds of 1/8X, 1/4X, and 1/2X can be selected. The real time speed can also be selected at 1. Faster speeds of 2X, 4X, and 8X can also be obtained by using this selection. View Selections Each View Selection provides a different way of displaying vehicle data for analysis. The following functions can be selected under Available Views: Note: The parameter name will be shown in the original language used for capture if no translation is available for the name. * Parameter List View - Displays incoming information from the snapshot file. The current value of the parameters is displayed on the screen. * Log View - Contains all the information from the snapshot file. All parameter values are listed in the order they were recorded. Specific parameters can be added or removed from a watchlist by clicking on the appropriate item. * State View - Shows the values of all parameters in a specific time frame. These values can be used for comparison with the trigger view. * Trigger View - Displays all system and user defined triggers. This function can be used when there is a combination of factors involved in a diagnostic problem. When a Trigger condition is met a caution triangle will be displayed on the screen. Triggers: * Load Triggers - Allows you to load a file containing trigger definitions. * Save Triggers - Allows you to save the trigger to your computer's hard drive. * Remove Trigger - Allows you to remove the current trigger. It will no longer be present. * Edit Trigger - Displays a pop-up window where you can modify the limits and parameters contained within a trigger. * Adds Trigger - Displays a pop-up window to configure a trigger. * DTC View - After the Play function is selected and this option is selected this function opens the list of recorded DTCs. * Line Graph View - Displays data that can be visualized against the time-axis. From this view, specific parameters can be selected for graphing by Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12904 checking the box under Selected. At the bottom of the graph there are four functions Zoom In (increase size), Zoom Out (decrease size), Bookmarks, and Pause Scrolling. Each of these functions can be accessed by clicking on them. Testing for Continuity Testing for Continuity Special Tools EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM) For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test Probe Caution). The following procedures verify good continuity in a circuit. With a Digital Multimeter (DMM) 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the Ohms position. 2. Disconnect the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 3. Disconnect the load. 4. Press the MIN MAX button on the DMM. 5. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 6. Connect the other lead of the DMM to the other end of the circuit. 7. If the DMM displays low or no resistance, the circuit has good continuity. With a Test Lamp Note: Only use the test lamp procedure on low impedance power and ground circuits. 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect one lead of the test lamp to one end of the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 5. Connect the other end of the circuit to ground. 6. If the test lamp illuminates (full intensity), then the circuit has good continuity. Testing for Electrical Intermittents Testing for Electrical Intermittents Special Tools EL-39200 Digital Multimeter For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Perform the following procedures while wiggling the harness from side to side. Continue this at convenient points (about 6 inches apart) while watching the test equipment. * Testing for Short to Ground (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Short to Ground) * Testing for Continuity (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Continuity) * Testing for a Short to Voltage (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for a Short to Voltage) If the fault is not identified, perform the procedure below using the MIN MAX feature on the EL-39200 DMM. This feature allows you to manipulate the circuit without having to watch the EL-39200. The EL-39200 will generate an audible tone when a change is detected. Note: The EL-39200 must be used in order to perform the following procedure since the EL-39200 can monitor current, resistance or voltage while recording the minimum (MIN), and maximum (MAX) values measured. 1. Connect the EL-39200 to both sides of a suspected connector (still connected), or from one end of a suspected circuit to the other. Refer to Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12905 Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter) for information on connecting the EL-39200 to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the EL-39200 to the V (AC) or V (DC) position. 3. Press the range button of the EL-39200 in order to select the desired voltage range. 4. Press the MIN MAX button of the EL-39200. The EL-39200 displays 100 ms RECORD and emits an audible tone (beep). Note: The 100 ms RECORD mode is the length of time an input must stay at a new value in order to record the full change. 5. Simulate the condition that is potentially causing the intermittent connection, either by wiggling the connections or the wiring, test driving, or performing other operations. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions). 6. Listen for the audible Min Max Alert which indicates that a new minimum or maximum value has been recorded. 7. Press the MIN MAX button once in order to display the MAX value and note the value. 8. Press the MIN MAX button again in order to display the MIN value and note the value. 9. Determine the difference between the MIN and MAX values. * If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is 1 V or greater an intermittent open or high resistance condition exists. Repair the condition as necessary. * If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is less than 1 V, an intermittent open or high resistance condition does not exist. Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections Special Tools EL-35616 Terminal Test Probe Kit For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). When the condition is not currently present, but is indicated in DTC history, the cause may be intermittent. An intermittent may also be the cause when there is a customer complaint, but the symptom cannot be duplicated. Refer to the Symptom Table of the system that is suspect of causing the condition before trying to locate an intermittent condition. Most intermittent conditions are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. Inspect for the following items: * Wiring broken inside the insulation * Poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector * Poor terminal to wire connection-Some conditions which fall under this description are poor crimps, poor solder joints, crimping over the wire insulation rather than the wire itself, and corrosion in the wire to terminal contact area, etc. * Pierced or damaged insulation can allow moisture to enter the wiring causing corrosion. The conductor can corrode inside the insulation, with little visible evidence. Look for swollen and stiff sections of wire in the suspect circuits. * Wiring which has been pinched, cut, or its insulation rubbed through may cause an intermittent open or short as the bare area touches other wiring or parts of the vehicle. * Wiring that comes in contact with hot or exhaust components * Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions) in order to duplicate the conditions required, in order to verify the customer concern. * Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Electrical Intermittents) for test procedures to detect intermittent open, high resistance, short to ground, and short to voltage conditions. * Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure) for advanced intermittent diagnosis and Vehicle Data Recorder operation. Testing for Terminal Fretting Some intermittent conditions can be caused by wire terminal fretting corrosion. Fretting corrosion is a build-up of insulating, oxidized wear debris that can form when there is a small motion between electrical contacts. The oxidized wear debris can pile up enough at the electrical contact spots that the electrical resistance across the connection increases. Movement between the contacting surfaces as small as 10 to 100 microns can cause fretting. To put this in perspective, a sheet of paper is about 100 microns thick, so fretting motion is small and hard to see. Vibration and thermal expansion/contraction are the main sources that create fretting motion. Since vehicles vibrate and can experience large temperature swings, they are a good source for fretting motion. Tin, copper, nickel, and iron surfaces are all susceptible to fretting corrosion. Fretting corrosion can be difficult to see but it looks like small, dark smudges on the terminals contact surface. To correct a fretting condition disconnect the suspect connector and add Nyogel lubricant 760G (dielectric grease) to both sides of the connector Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12906 terminals. Then reconnect the connector and wipe away any excess lubricant. This will correct the additional terminal contact resistance due to the terminal fretting corrosion. Testing for Proper Terminal Contact It is important to test terminal contact at the component and any inline connectors before replacing a suspect component. Mating terminals must be inspected to ensure good terminal contact. A poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector may be the result of contamination or deformation. Contamination may be caused by the connector halves being improperly connected. A missing or damaged connector seal, damage to the connector itself, or exposing the terminals to moisture and dirt can also cause contamination. Contamination, usually in the underhood or underbody connectors, leads to terminal corrosion, causing an open circuit or intermittently open circuit. Deformation is caused by probing the mating side of a connector terminal without the proper adapter. Always use the EL-35616 when probing connectors. Other causes of terminal deformation are improperly joining the connector halves, or repeatedly separating and joining the connector halves. Deformation, usually to the female terminal contact tang, can result in poor terminal contact causing an open or intermittently open circuit. Testing for Proper Terminal Contact in Bussed Electrical Centers It is very important to use the correct test adapter when testing for proper terminal contact of fuses and relays in a bussed electrical center. Use EL-35616-35 to test for proper terminal contact. Failure to use EL-35616-35 can result in improper diagnosis of the bussed electrical center. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact: 1. Separate the connector halves. 2. Visually inspect the connector halves for contamination. Contamination may result in a white or green build-up within the connector body or between terminals. This causes high terminal resistance, intermittent contact, or an open circuit. An underhood or underbody connector that shows signs of contamination should be replaced in its entirety: terminals, seals, and connector body. 3. Using an equivalent male terminal / terminated lead, verify that the retention force is significantly different between a known good terminal and the suspect terminal. Replace the female terminal in question. Flat Wire (Dock and Lock) Connectors There are no serviceable parts for flat wire (dock and lock) connectors on the harness side or the component side. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact: 1. Remove the component in question. 2. Visually inspect each side of the connector for signs of contamination. Avoid touching either side of the connector as oil from your skin may be a source of contamination as well. 3. Visually inspect the terminal bearing surfaces of the flat wire circuits for splits, cracks, or other imperfections that could cause poor terminal contact. Visually inspect the component side connector to ensure that all of the terminals are uniform and free of damage or deformation. 4. Insert the appropriate adapter from the on the flat wire harness connector in order to test the circuit in question. Control Module/Component Voltage and Grounds Poor voltage or ground connections can cause widely varying symptoms. * Test all control module voltage supply circuits. Many vehicles have multiple circuits supplying voltage to a control module. Other components in the system may have separate voltage supply circuits that may also need to be tested. Inspect connections at the module/component connectors, fuses, and any intermediate connections between the voltage source and the module/component. A test lamp or a DMM may indicate that voltage is present, but neither tests the ability of the circuit to carry sufficient current. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. Refer to Circuit Testing (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Circuit Testing) and Power Distribution Schematics (See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Starting and Charging/Power and Ground Distribution/System Diagram/Power Distribution Schematics). * Test all control module ground and system ground circuits. The control module may have multiple ground circuits. Other components in the system may have separate grounds that may also need to be tested. Inspect grounds for clean and tight connections at the grounding point. Inspect the connections at the component and in splice packs, where applicable. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. Refer to Circuit Testing (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Circuit Testing) and Ground Distribution Schematics (See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Starting and Charging/Power and Ground Distribution/System Diagram/Ground Distribution Schematics). Temperature Sensitivity * An intermittent condition may occur when a component/connection reaches normal operating temperature. The condition may occur only when the component/connection is cold, or only when the component/connection is hot. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12907 * Freeze Frame, Failure Records, Snapshot, or Vehicle Data Recorder data may help with this type of intermittent condition, where applicable. * If the intermittent is related to heat, review the data for a relationship with the following: - High ambient temperatures - Underhood/engine generated heat - Circuit generated heat due to a poor connection, or high electrical load - Higher than normal load conditions, towing, etc. * If the intermittent is related to cold, review the data for the following: - Low ambient temperatures-In extremely low temperatures, ice may form in a connection or component. Inspect for water intrusion. - The condition only occurs on a cold start. - The condition goes away when the vehicle warms up. * Information from the customer may help to determine if the trouble follows a pattern that is temperature related. * If temperature is suspected of causing an intermittent fault condition, attempt to duplicate the condition. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions) in order to duplicate the conditions required. Electromagnetic Interference and Electrical Noise Some electrical components/circuits are sensitive to electromagnetic interference or other types of electrical noise. Inspect for the following conditions: * A misrouted harness that is too close to high voltage/high current devices such as secondary ignition components, motors, generator etc.-These components may induce electrical noise on a circuit that could interfere with normal circuit operation. * Electrical system interference caused by a malfunctioning relay, or a control module driven solenoid or switch-These conditions can cause a sharp electrical surge. Normally, the condition will occur when the malfunctioning component is operating. * Improper installation of non-factory or aftermarket add on accessories such as lights, 2-way radios, amplifiers, electric motors, remote starters, alarm systems, cell phones, etc.-These accessories may lead to interference while in use, but do not fail when the accessories are not in use. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Checking Aftermarket Accessories). * Test for an open diode across the A/C compressor clutch and for other open diodes. Some relays may contain a clamping diode. * The generator may be allowing AC noise into the electrical system. Incorrect Control Module * There are only a few situations where reprogramming a control module is appropriate: - A new service control module is installed. - A control module from another vehicle is installed. - Revised software/calibration files have been released for this vehicle. Note: DO NOT re-program the control module with the SAME software/calibration files that are already present in the control module. This is not an effective repair for any type of concern. * Verify that the control module contains the correct software/calibration. If incorrect programming is found, reprogram the control module with the most current software/calibration. Refer to Control Module References (See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning) for replacement, setup, and programming. Testing for Short to Ground Testing for Short to Ground Special Tools * EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM) * EL 35616-200 - Test Light-Probe Kit For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test Probe Caution). The following procedures test for a short to ground in a circuit. With a Digital Multimeter (DMM) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12908 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the Ohms position. 4. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the other lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. If the DMM does NOT display infinite resistance (OL), there is a short to ground in the circuit. With a Test Lamp 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect one lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to one end of the circuit to be tested. 5. If the test lamp illuminates, there is a short to ground in the circuit. Fuse Powering Several Loads 1. Review the system schematic and locate the fuse that is open. 2. Open the first connector or switch leading from the fuse to each load. 3. Connect a DMM across the fuse terminals (be sure that the fuse is powered). * When the DMM displays voltage the short is in the wiring leading to the first connector or switch. * If the DMM does not display voltage refer to the next step. 4. Close each connector or switch until the DMM displays voltage in order to find which circuit is shorted. Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter Special Tools EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM) For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test Probe Caution). Digital Multimeter (DMM) Basic Requirements Service information is validated using digital multimeters that meet or exceed the following requirements. Using a multimeter that does not meet these basic requirements may give inaccurate readings which could lead to an incorrect diagnosis. Display and Settings 1. Four digits displayed 2. Voltage, amperage, resistance, frequency, diode test settings, and min-max function 3. Display positive and negative values Voltage 1. Have at least 10 Mohm input impedance 2. Test a DC voltage range of 0.1-1000 V. 3. Test an AC voltage range of 0.1-1000 V. Amperage 1. Test a DC amperage range of 0.1µA-10 A. 2. Test an AC amperage range of 0.1µA-10 A. Resistance Test a resistance range of 0.1 ohm-40 Mohm and displays infinite for a value greater than 40 Mohm (O.L. (Over-load)) Frequency Test for a frequency range of 0.5 HZ-199 K HZ Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12909 Diode Test 1. Apply at least 1 mA when performing the diode bias test 2. Display the break over voltage drop (0-3 V) of a forward biased diode 3. Display infinite (O.L. (Over-load)) when a diode is reverse biased Min-Max Readings 1. Can update at a 1 ms sample rate 2. Saves and displays minimum and maximum values Note: Circuits which include any solid state control modules, such as the engine control module (ECM), should only be tested with a 10 MOhms or higher impedance digital multimeter such as the EL-39200. The EL-39200 instruction manual is a good source of information and should be read thoroughly upon receipt of the DMM as well as kept on hand for future reference. A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present if the impedance is low enough, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. In other words, if there is not enough current, the test lamp will not illuminate even though voltage is present. The ohmmeter function on a DMM shows how much resistance exists between 2 points along a circuit. Low resistance in a circuit means good continuity. Note: Disconnect the power feed from the suspect circuit when measuring resistance with a DMM. This prevents incorrect readings. DMMs apply such a small voltage to measure resistance that the presence of voltages can upset a resistance reading. Diodes and solid state components in a circuit can cause a DMM to display a false reading. To find out if a component is affecting a measurement take a reading once, then reverse the leads and take a second reading. If the readings differ the solid state component is affecting the measurement. Following are examples of the various methods of connecting the DMM to the circuit to be tested: * Probe both ends of the connector and either hold the leads in place while manipulating the connector or tape the leads to the harness for continuous monitoring while you perform other operations or test driving. Refer to Probing Electrical Connectors (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Probing Electrical Connectors). * Disconnect the harness at both ends of the suspected circuit where it connects either to a component or to other harnesses. * If the system that is being diagnosed has a specified pinout or breakout box, it may be used in order to simplify connecting the DMM to the circuit or for testing multiple circuits quickly. Using Connector Test Adapters Using Connector Test Adapters Special Tools EL 35616 - Terminal Test Probe Kit For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Caution: Do not insert test equipment probes (DMM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the EL-38125-580 GM Approved Terminal Release Tool Kit in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the EL-38125-580 GM Approved Terminal Release Tool Kit , ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the EL-38125-580 GM Approved Terminal Release Tool Kit label on the inside of the EL-38125-580 GM Approved Terminal Release Tool Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Using Fused Jumper Wires Using Fused Jumper Wires Special Tools J 36169-A Fused Jumper Wire Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12910 Note: A fused jumper may not protect solid state components from being damaged. The J 36169-A includes small clamp connectors that provide adaptation to most connectors without damage. This fused jumper wire is supplied with a 20-A fuse which may not be suitable for some circuits. Do not use a fuse with a higher rating than the fuse that protects the circuit being tested. AFL/EPC Connectors AFL/EPC Connectors Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. 1. For connectors with a bolt in the dress cover, turn the bolt counterclockwise to remove the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12911 2. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the top of the wire dress cover. Slide the CPA forward. 3. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12912 View showing depressing of the lever lock release tab. View of connector in released position. 4. Disconnect the connector from the component. 5. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the dress cover. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs and remove the dress cover. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12913 6. Release the rear lower half of the wiredress cover. 7. Release the tabs that are holding the wiredress cover to the connector body. 8. Remove the nose piece by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the slots on both ends of the connector body. Gently pry the nose piece out of the connector. J 38125-216 can also be used to remove the nose piece. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12914 9. Use the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by lifting the terminal retaining tabs on the inside of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Bosch Connectors (BSK) Bosch Connectors (BSK) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12915 Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 3. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 4. Insert the J 38125-561 tool into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 5. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Bosch Connectors (ECM) Bosch Connectors (ECM) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12916 1. Locate the assist lever on the top of the connector. Move the assist lever to the forward position. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12917 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the connector. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the locking tabs and remove the dress cover. 4. The terminal positive assurance (TPA) is located in the front of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12918 5. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove TPA from the connector. 6. Use the J 38125-213 or the J 38125-556 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12919 Note: Ensure that the dress cover and connector body are both in the released position before reassembling. Failure to do so may cause damage to the connector and component. Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Bosch Connectors (0.64) Bosch Connectors (0.64) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While pressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock until the lever is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Pull the rubber boot that covers the wires back to expose the end of the connector dress cover. 4. Place the connector locking lever in the center of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12920 5. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs that are on the wire end of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover and connector body and pry up. 6. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs located on the opposite side of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover at the connector end and pry up. 7. Remove the dress cover. 8. Cut the tie wrap on the wire bundle. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12921 9. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting a small flat-bladed tool into the small slot in the end of the slider and pushing on the TPA until it comes out of the connector. When the TPA exits the opposite side of the connector, gasp the TPA and pull it completely out of the connector. 10. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 11. Insert the J 38125-560 into the 2 triangular cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 12. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Terminal Replacement Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12922 1. Prior to installation the terminal must be aligned so the (1) coding lugs align with the (2) coding grooves on the connector. 2. Once the terminal is aligned, slide the terminal into the cavity until the retainer has engaged in the cavity of the connector. 3. Slide the TPA in the connector body and seat it using a small flat bladed tool. The TPA is seated when it is flush with the contact housing. 4. Secure the wires to the connector body using a tie wrap and replace the dress cover and grommet. Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Pull out the slider on the connector position assurance (CPA) until it is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12923 5. Insert the J 38125-557 into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Connector Position Assurance Locks Connector Position Assurance Locks The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of the connector. CPAs are used in various connectors throughout the vehicle. CPAs are also used in all SIR system electrical connectors. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals, of the connector. Connector Repairs Connector Repairs Connector Repairs contains a list of all connector repairs. The connector repairs are listed by the connector manufacturer and then by connector type. If the technician cannot identify the manufacturer of the connector, refer to Identifying Connectors below. Knowing the connector manufacturer will assist in finding the correct connector repair from the following list: * Connector Position Assurance Locks (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Connector Position Assurance Locks) * Terminal Position Assurance Locks (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Terminal Position Assurance Locks) * AFL/EPC Connectors (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/AFL/EPC Connectors) * Bosch Connectors (BSK) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Bosch Connectors (BSK))Bosch Connectors (0.64) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Bosch Connectors (0.64))Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT))Bosch Connectors (ECM) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Bosch Connectors (ECM)) * Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack))Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Push to Seat))Delphi Connectors Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12924 (Pull To Seat) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Pull to Seat))Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W))Delphi Connectors (Micro.64) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Micro .64))Delphi Connectors (12-Way) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (12-Way))Delphi Connectors (Steering Gear) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Steering Gear)) * FCI Connectors (Lever Lock) (See: General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/FCI Connectors (Lever Lock))FCI Connectors (SIR) (See: General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/FCI (SIR)) * FEP Connectors (Steering Gear) (See: General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/FEP Connectors (Steering Gear)) * JST Connectors (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/JST Connectors) * Kostal Connectors (Glow Plug Control Module) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Kostal Connectors (Glow Plug Control Module))Kostal Connectors (Transmission) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Kostal Connectors (Transmission)) * Molex Connectors (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Molex Connectors) * Sumitomo Connectors (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Sumitomo Connectors) * Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way))Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor))Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap))Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way))Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module)) * Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Yazaki Connectors (2-Way))Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Yazaki Connectors (16-Way)) * Repairing Connector Terminals (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Repairing Connector Terminals) Connector Anatomy 1 - Connector Positive Assurance (CPA) 2 - Assist Lever 3 - Wiredress Cover 4 - Seal Strain/Relief Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12925 5 - Slide Left Hand 6 - Slide Right Hand 7 - Terminal Positive Assurance (TPA) 8 - Terminal Positive Assurance (TPA) 9 - Connector Seal 10 - Connector Housing 11 - Inner Connector Identifying Connectors Knowing the connector manufacturer is helpful when trying to locating the correct connector repair procedure. There are many different connector designs used on GM vehicles and it is sometimes difficult to identify the connector manufacturer. The information in this document should help with the identification of connector manufactures. The following connector manufacturers make most of the connectors found in GM vehicles: * AFL/EPC (Alcoa Fujikura Ltd./Engineered Plastics Components) * Bosch * Delphi * FCI (Framatome Connectors International) * JAE (Japan Aviation Electronics) * JST (Japan Solderless Terminals) * Kostel * Molex * Sumitomo * Tyco/AMP * Yazaki Identifying the manufacturer of a connector is often difficult. When trying to determine the manufacturer of a connector, look for specific identifying marks that are unique to that connector supplier. Most of these identify marks are hard to find or see. Check the connector carefully and refer to the information below for pictures and descriptions of connector identification markings. * Most of AFLs connectors have EPC on their connector body. Some of the smaller connectors will not have any markings on them. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12926 * In some cases Bosch will actually be printed on the connector. If Bosch does not appear on the connector, look for the Bosch logo. The Bosch logo is a circle with a blunted arrow inside. This logo can appear anywhere on the connector and is often very small. * In some cases Delphi will actually be printed on the connector. If Delphi is not printed on the connector, look for PED. In both cases there is no specific orientation for Delphi or PED and they can appear anywhere on the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12927 * FCI connectors may have the FCI logo on their connectors. The logo is the letters FCI with an "A" above it. * JAE connector have JAE in small letters on their connectors. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12928 * JST connectors have JST in small letters on their connectors, similar to that above. The location of the logo will vary with the connector size and style. * Kostel has an "LK" with a circle around it. These connector are usually used as a transmissions connection. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12929 * Most Molex connectors will have the Molex logo on the dresscover of the connector. In some cases the connectors may have MX followed by another letter. The third letter indicates where the connector was made. A connector with MXD is a Molex connector made in Detroit. Sumitomo has a unique symbol on their connector and possibly a part number. The symbol is similar to that of a diamond lying on its side, similar to that shown. The logo could appear anywhere but the most common place is at the wire side of the housing. * Tyco/AMP has many different and unique connector designs. Some may or may not have identifiable marks on them. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12930 * Yazaki has a wedge or arrow shape, similar to that shown. Delphi Connectors (Push to Seat) Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Follow the steps below in order to repair push to seat connectors. 1. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device, the connector position assurance (CPA) device, and/or the secondary lock. 2. Separate the connector halves (1). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12931 3. Use the proper pick or removal tool (1) in order to release the terminal. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 4. Gently pull the cable and the terminal (2) out of the back of the connector. 5. Re-form the locking device if you are going to reuse the terminal (1). 6. To repair the terminal, refer to Terminal Repair. Terminal Repair 1. Slip the cable seal away from the terminal. 2. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 3. Slip a new cable seal onto the wire. 4. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 5. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 6. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. 7. Slide the cable seal toward the terminal. 8. Crimp the cable seal and the insulation. 9. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply grease to the connector. Reinstalling Terminal 1. In order to reuse a terminal or lead assembly, refer to Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Wiring Repairs). 2. Ensure that the cable seal is kept on the terminal side of the splice. 3. Insert the lead from the back until it catches. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Terminated Lead Repair 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Find the appropriate terminated lead. 3. Use the appropriate splice sleeves depending on the gauge size. 4. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves). Delphi Connectors (Pull to Seat) Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) Special Tools Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12932 J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal If the terminal is visibly damaged or is suspected of having a faulty connection, the terminal should be replaced. Follow the steps below in order to repair pull-to-seat connectors: 1. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) device and/or the secondary lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component or separate the connectors for in-line connectors. 3. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device. 4. Insert the proper pick or removal tool into the front of the connector body. Note: On connectors with more than one terminal the service loop may not be large enough to remove the terminal and crimp on a new one. If the terminal wire does not have a large enough service loop for removal, cut the wire 5 cm (2 in) behind the connector before removal. 5. Grasp the wire at the back of the connector body and gently push the terminal out the front of the connector body. Terminal Repair 1. If the wire needed to be cut in order to remove the terminal, gently push a small length of the same size wire through the back of the connector cavity until there is enough wire exposed in order to crimp on a new terminal. If the wire was not cut, cut the existing wire as close to the old terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 4. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. Terminal Installation 1. Align the terminal and pull the wire from the back of the connector in order to seat the terminal. 2. If necessary, cut the new wire to proper length and splice with existing circuit. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves). 3. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply dielectric grease to the connector. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Micro .64) Delphi Connectors (Micro.64) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12933 Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro.64 connectors. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. The lever lock may be located on the top or sides of the wire dress cover. View of a typical Micro 64 connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12934 Depress the lock and pull the lever over and past the lock. View of the connector when released from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12935 View of another type of Micro 64 connector. Depress the locks that are located on both sides of the wiredress cover and pull the lever over and past the locks. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12936 View of the connector when released from the component. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the front of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool push down on one of the locking tabs and pull the cover up until the dress cover releases. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. 4. Once the front 2 locks are unlocked, lift the front of the dress cover and pull it forward. Note: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 5. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the small slot on the TPA and pushing down until the TPA releases. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12937 Note: Be careful not to angle or rock the J 38125-21 tool when inserting it into the connector or the tool may break. 6. Insert the J 38125-21 tool into the round canal between the terminals cavities at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Follow the steps below in order to repair Micro 64 connector terminals. The Micro 64 connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-64 (M jaw) was developed to crimp Micro 64 terminals. The J 38125-64 crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. The J 38125-64 crimping tool is also designed to crimp both the wire and the insulation at the same time. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro 64 terminals. Note: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gauge wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 1. Cut the wire as close to the damaged terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12938 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert terminal into the appropriate terminal holder until it hits bottom and stops. The correct terminal holder is determined by the wire size. Also ensure that the terminals wings are pointing towards the former on the tool and the release locator. 5. Insert the stripped cable into the terminal. Insulation should be visible on both sides of the terminal insulation wings. 6. Compress the handles until the ratchet automatically releases. 7. Place the terminal into the appropriate cavity and assemble the connector. Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12939 Terminal Removal Procedure There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W connectors. These connectors are very similar but use different terminals and have some minor physical differences also. The first connector design of the Micro-Pack 100W (1) has a white connector interface that holds the terminals. The second design of the Micro-Pack 100W (2) has a gray interface to hold the terminals. Also, the first design has terminal cavities that are further apart (3 mm centerline) and offset from the other row of terminal cavities in the connector. The second design has terminals cavities that are closer together (2.54 mm centerline) and aligned vertically. One other way to identify the second design is the thin strip of material that runs along the outside of the cavities. Note: There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W terminals which are very similar. Ensure that you have the correct terminal before crimping the new terminal to the wire. The first design connector uses the longer terminal (1) that has a raised area in front of the recess in the terminal. The second design connector uses the shorter terminal without the raised area. Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro-Pack 100W connectors. Some Micro-Pack 100W connector disassembly procedures will vary. Use this procedure as a guide. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12940 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Locate the nose piece locking tabs that are positioned on the side of the connector nose piece. The connector nose piece acts as a terminal positive assurance (TPA) and may be referred to as such. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to push in one of the locking tabs while gently pulling on the same side of the nose piece. 4. Repeat the procedure for the other locking tab and remove the nose piece. 5. Remove the wire dress cover. The following is a general procedure for wire dress cover removal. Use this procedure as a guide, some dress cover removal procedures may vary. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12941 6. Use fingers to squeeze the 2 locking legs of the cover. 7. Apply pressure and gently rock the cover until one locking leg is unseated. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12942 8. Continue to apply pressure and rock the cover until the second locking leg is unseated. Repeat procedure for the other side of the dress cover and remove the cover. 9. Use J 38125-12A to gently lift the terminal retaining tab while gently pulling the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. If the terminal is severely bent or damaged, it may be possible on some connectors to push the wire out of the front of the connector instead of pulling it through. This will prevent damage to the internal seals of the connector. Once the terminal is pushed out of the connector, cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible and pull the wire through the connector. Terminal Repair Procedure The Micro-Pack 100W connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool was developed to crimp Micro-Pack 100W terminals. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro-Pack 100 terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12943 1. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. Note: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gauge wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert the terminal into the crimp tool until the core wings are flush with the anvil on the crimp tool. Be sure that the wings are pointed toward the crimp tool former and release the spring locator. The locator will hold the terminal in place. Inspect the alignment of the terminal wings with the crimp tool former. If the terminal wings are wider than the crimp tool former, remove the terminal and bend the terminal wings in slightly. 5. Place stripped wire into terminal. 6. Crimp the new terminal to the wire. If a jam occurs, press the emergency release to open applicator. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12944 Terminal Replacement Procedure After the terminal is crimped to the wire perform the following procedure in order to replace Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the Terminal Removal Procedure. Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The following is the proper procedure for the repair of Weather Pack(R) Connectors. 1. Separate the connector halves (1). 2. Open the secondary lock. A secondary lock aids in terminal retention and is usually molded to the connector (1). 3. Grasp the wire and push the terminal to the forward most position. Hold the wire in this position. 4. Insert the Weather Pack(R) terminal removal tool J 38125-10A into the front (mating end) of the connector cavity until it rests on the cavity shoulder (1). 5. Gently pull on the wire to remove the terminal through the back of the connector (2). Note: Never use force to remove a terminal from a connector. 6. Inspect the terminal and connector for damage. Repair as necessary. Refer to Repairing Connector Terminals (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Repairing Connector Terminals). 7. Reform the lock tang (2) and reset terminal in connector body. 8. Close secondary locks and join connector halves. 9. Verify that circuit is complete and working satisfactorily. 10. Perform system check. Delphi Connectors (12-Way) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12945 Delphi Connectors (12-Way) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) and slide the lever lock away from the connector body. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs on the dress cover of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool release all of the locking tabs. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12946 4. Release the lower wire dress cover locking tab. 5. Release the upper wire dress cover locking tab. 6. Once the locks are unlocked, lift the dress cover off. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12947 Note: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 7. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the locking tabs on both sides of the TPA. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. 8. Remove the nose piece by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the locking tabs on both sides of the nose piece. Gently pry the nose piece out of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12948 9. Insert the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Delphi Connectors (Steering Gear) Delphi Connectors (Steering Gear) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12949 Removal Procedure 1. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the locking tab on the connector. 2. Push down the locking tab to release the connector. The small flat-bladed tool may need to be pushed down and angled back slightly to depress the locking tab. Pull on the connector body while releasing the locking tab to disconnect the connector. FCI Connectors (Lever Lock) FCI Connectors (Lever Lock) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12950 Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. 1. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. 2. The release tab is located on the top of the wiredress cover. 3. View of connector in released position. 4. Disconnect the connector from the component. 5. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the dress cover. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs and remove the dress cover. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12951 6. Use a small flat-blade tool to slide the terminal position assurance (TPA) up one notch on both ends of the connector. The TPA is located underneath the wire dress cover. For the larger terminals insert the J 38125-556 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. For the smaller terminals insert the J 38125-560 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12952 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. FCI (SIR) FCI Connectors (SIR) Removal Procedure Note: The orange CPA must be released first to disconnect or to connect the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12953 1. Lift the orange CPA vertically (avoid lifting on an angle to the connector) approximately 4 mm to release the connector. Use a small flat-bladed tool to help release the orange CPA. The orange CPA can also be released manually without any tools. 2. Grab the connector on both sides and lift the connector vertically to disconnect the connector. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12954 1. Lift the orange CPA vertically approximately 4 mm before installing the connector. Use a small flat-bladed tool to help release the orange CPA. The orange CPA can also be released manually without any tools. 2. Line up the connector key tabs with the initiator key slots. Grab the connector on both sides and push the connector down into the initiator connector sub assembly until fully seated. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12955 3. After the connector is fully seated, push down the orange CPA with your thumb. Push down until the orange CPA is touching the yellow cover on the connector. FEP Connectors (Steering Gear) FEP Connectors (Steering Gear) Removal Procedure 1. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the locking tab on the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12956 2. Push down the locking tab to release the connector. The small flat-bladed tool may need to be pushed down and angled back slightly to depress the locking tab. Pull on the connector body while releasing the locking tab to disconnect the connector. JST Connectors JST Connectors Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. While depressing the lock, remove the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12957 2. Locate the two indents of the terminal position assurance (TPA) located on the bottom of the connector body. Note: The TPA cannot be removed from the connector while there are terminals present in the connector body. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to very carefully raise the TPA on both sides of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12958 4. View of the TPA when removed from the connector body. 5. Use the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the left side of the terminal release cavity as shown in the graphic. Use the tool to move the terminal release to the right with a gentle prying motion. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Kostal Connectors (Glow Plug Control Module) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12959 Kostal Connectors (Glow Plug Control Module) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure View of typical connector. View of connector in released position. 1. Locate the assist lever at the back of the connector. Move the assist lever to the rear position. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12960 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove the dress cover. 4. Slide the dress cover forward and off of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12961 5. The terminal positive assurance (TPA) is located in the front and rear of the connector. Note: The front TPA cannot be removed from the connector. Only move it to the preset position. 6. Use a small flat-blade tool to move the front TPA to the preset position, outboard approximately 0.125 in. (3 mm). 7. Use a small flat-blade tool to completely remove the rear TPA from the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12962 8. Use the J 38125-24 or the J 38125-560 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 9. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Kostal Connectors (Transmission) Kostal Connectors (Transmission) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12963 1. While depressing the lock, twist and remove the connector from the component. 2. Locate the terminal position assurance (TPA). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12964 Note: The TPA cannot be removed from the connector while there are terminals present in the connector body. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to push the TPA until it bottoms out. 4. Use the J 38125-28 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal cavity as shown in the graphic. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 5. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Terminal Replacement Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12965 After the terminal is crimped to the wire, perform the following procedure in order to replace the terminal. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. Locate the terminal position assurance (TPA). 4. Use a small flat-blade tool to push the TPA until it bottoms out. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12966 5. Ensure the TPA is fully seated. The TPA should be centered and flush with the connector body when viewed. Molex Connectors Molex Connectors Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the top of the wire dress cover. Slide the CPA forward. 2. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12967 3. The lever should be in the full forward position. 4. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12968 5. Remove the dress cover by using a flat bladed tool to release the dress cover locking tabs and lift up on the dress cover. 6. Cut the tie wrap that holds the wires to the connector body. 7. Use a small flat-blade tool to pry one side of the nose piece up to the pre-stage position. When the nose piece is in the pre-staged position, the nose piece will be raised above the connector body the length of the step in the nose piece. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12969 8. Use a small flat-blade tool to pry the other side of the piece to the pre-stage position. If the nose piece is higher than the first step in the nose piece, gently push down on the nose piece until it meets with resistance from the connector body, you should feel the nose piece click into position. 9. Insert the J 38125-213 into the small terminal release hole on the nose piece and gently pull on the back of the wire. 10. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Refer to the terminal crimping procedure in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit. Terminal Replacement Procedure After the terminal is crimped to the wire, perform the following procedure in order to replace the terminal. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12970 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the connector disassembly procedure. Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the connector body and pull the CPA out. The CPA is on the wire harness side of connector. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Use a small flat-bladed tool to gently pry off the dress cover by inserting the tool under the cover opposite the harness side and prying up. 4. Remove the cover. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12971 5. Using a small flat-bladed tool, push on the side of the nose piece retainer while pushing the nose piece forward with your thumb. This will release the terminal position assurance (TPA). 6. Insert the J 38125-12A into the corresponding terminal release cavity. The release cavities are the 2 center rows of cavities on one half of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12972 7. Pressing the J 38125-12A tool in the release cavity of the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and crimper in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. Slide the lever lock away from the connector body. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs on the dress cover of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool release all of the locking tabs. 4. Once the locks are unlocked, lift the dress cover off. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12973 Note: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 5. Release the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the blue locking tabs on both ends of the connector. Gently slide the TPA up to the released position on both ends. 6. For the larger terminals insert the J 38125-13A tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. For the smaller terminals insert the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12974 View of the release tool being used for the larger terminals. View of the release tool being used for the larger terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12975 View of the release tool being used for the smaller terminals. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12976 Side view of connector. View of top of connector. 1. Locate the assist lever and lock on the top of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12977 2. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. 3. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12978 4. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the rear of the connector. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. 5. Once the locking tabs are unlocked, slide the inner connector out of the rear of the connector housing. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12979 6. Use the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by pressing on the tang. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Repairing Connector Terminals Repairing Connector Terminals Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Use the following repair procedures in order to repair the following: * Push to Seat terminals * Pull to Seat terminals Some terminals do not require all of the steps shown. Skip the steps that do not apply for your terminal repair. The J-38125 contains further information. 1. Cut off the terminal between the core and the insulation crimp. Minimize any wire loss. For cable seal terminals, remove the seal. 2. Apply the correct cable seal per gauge size of the wire, if used. Slide the seal back along the wire in order to enable insulation removal. 3. Remove the insulation. 4. For sealed terminals only, align the seal with the end of the cable insulation. 5. Position the strip in the terminal. For sealed terminals, position the strip and seal in the terminal. 6. Hand crimp the core wings. 7. Hand crimp the insulation wings. For sealed terminals, hand crimp the insulation wings around the seal and the cable. 8. Solder all of the hand crimp terminals excepting Micro-Pack 100.64 size. Soldering Micro-Pack 100 World terminals may damage the terminal. Sumitomo Connectors Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12980 Sumitomo Connectors Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12981 3. Remove the dress cover by using a flat-blade tool to release the connector locking tabs and pulling off the dress cover. 4. Relieve the tension on the nose piece retainers by inserting J 38125-12A into the single retainer slot on the end of the nose piece and gently prying out the locking tab. Repeat the process for both of the nose piece locking tabs on the opposite side of the nose piece. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12982 5. Once the nose piece retainers are relaxed, use the J 38125-552 to pull up the nose piece by hooking the tool under the nose piece and pulling up. The nose piece should raise slightly. 6. On the opposite side of the nose piece, use the J 38125-552 to pull up the nose piece by hooking the tool under the nose piece and pulling up. The nose piece should release completely. If the nose piece does not come off, repeat the procedure on the opposite side. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12983 7. The illustration above identifies the entry canal where the terminal release tool will be inserted, and the terminal cavity. * Terminal (1) * Entry Canal (2) 8. Insert the J 38125-553 tool into the entry canal and pry up on the terminal retainer. The terminal retainer is a small plastic piece on the top of the terminal. The terminal retainer must be held up while the terminal is pulled out of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12984 9. The illustration shows a cutaway view of the connector to aid the technician in releasing the terminal retainer. 10. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Refer to the terminal crimping procedure in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit. Terminal Replacement Procedure After the terminal is crimped to the wire, perform the following procedure in order to replace the terminal. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the connector disassembly procedure. Terminal Position Assurance Locks Terminal Position Assurance Locks The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12985 2. Insert the J 38125-11A tool into the cavity on the lower right hand face of the connector until the terminal release tang access panel slides over. 3. Ensure that the terminal release tang access panel is in the correct location to access the terminals. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12986 5. Insert the J 38125-11A into the terminal release tang access slot located behind the access panel of the connector and press down on the terminal while carefully pulling the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component by pressing down on the connector position assurance (CPA). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12987 2. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting the tool in the small recess on the side of the connector and pushing up until the TPA releases from the connector body. The TPA should raise just slightly. Do not try to remove the TPA. Note: The TPA on this connector cannot be removed unless the terminals are removed first. The TPA will come out of the connector body, but only slightly. When the TPA is slightly raised the terminals can be removed. Using excessive force to remove the TPA with the terminals still in the connector will damage the connector. 3. Repeat the process for the other side of the connector. 4. Ensure that the TPA is in the proper position to remove the terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12988 5. While pushing the terminal forward, insert the J 38125-24 in the release cavity above the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12989 2. Insert a small flat-blade tool in the slot below the front loaded terminal position assurance (TPA) and pry up. 3. Remove the TPA by pulling it out of the connector. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-553 on a slight upward angle into the cavity below the terminal to be removed. Ensure that the pointed on the end of the tool is facing the bottom of the terminal and it stays in contact with the terminal until it stops on the plastic terminal retainer. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12990 6. Gently pry the plastic terminal retainer down and carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12991 1. While depressing the lock, pull the two connector halves apart. Note: The TPA is fragile and may break if not done carefully. 2. Use a small flat-blade tool to very carefully push the terminal position assurance (TPA) towards the face of the connector on both sides of the connector. 3. View of the male half of the connector with female terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12992 4. View of the female half of the connector with male terminals. 5. Use the J 38125-215 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. View of the female half of the connector with male terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12993 7. View of the male half of the connector with female terminals. 8. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers A circuit breaker is a protective device that is designed to open the circuit when a current load is in excess of the rated breaker capacity. If there is a short or other type of overload condition in the circuit, the excessive current will open the circuit between the circuit breaker terminals. Two types of circuit breakers are used. Circuit Breaker - This type opens when excessive current passes through it for a period of time. It closes again after a few seconds, and if the cause of the high current is still present, it will open again. The circuit breaker will continue to cycle open and closed until the condition causing the high current is removed. Positive Temperature Coefficient (PTC) Circuit Breaker - This type greatly increases its resistance when excessive current passes through it. The excessive current heats the PTC device, as the device heats its resistance increases. Eventually the resistance gets so high that the circuit is effectively open. Unlike the ordinary circuit breaker the PTC unit will not reset until the circuit is opened, by removing the voltage from its terminals. Once the voltage is removed the circuit breaker will re-close within a second or 2. Circuit Protection - Fuses Circuit Protection - Fuses Special Tools EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM) For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12994 The fuse is the most common method of an automotive wiring circuit protection. Whenever there is an excessive amount of current flowing through a circuit the fusible element will melt and create an open or incomplete circuit. Fuses are a one time protection device and must be replaced each time the circuit is overloaded. To determine if a fuse is open, remove the suspected fuse and examine if the element in the fuse is broken (2). If not broken (1), also check for continuity using a Digital Multimeter (DMM) or a continuity tester. If the element is broken or continuity is suspect, replace the fuse with one of equal current rating. Circuit Protection - Fusible Links Circuit Protection - Fusible Links Special Tools EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM) For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Fusible link is wire designed to melt and break continuity when excessive current is applied. It is often located between or near the battery and starter or electrical center. Use a continuity tester or a Digital Multimeter (DMM) at each end of the wire containing the fusible link in order to determine if it is broken. If broken, it must be replaced with fusible link of the same gauge size. Repairing a Fusible Link Note: Fusible links cut longer than 225 mm (approximately 9 in) will not provide sufficient overload protection. Flat Wire Repairs Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12995 Flat Wire Repairs The flat wire within the flex wiring harness is not serviceable. If an open or short exists within the flex wiring harness the complete harness must be replaced. GMLAN Wiring Repairs GMLAN Wiring Repairs Special Tools * EL-38125-10 - Splice Sleeve Crimping Tool * J 38125-5 - Ultra Torch Special Tool * DuraSeal splice sleeves * A wire stripping tool For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: * A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. * A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The GM Local Area Network (GMLAN) System requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working on GMLAN connectors and terminals. GMLAN Repairs Note: When making a repair to any GMLAN network, the original wire length after the repair must be the same length as before the repair. If the network is a twisted pair, the twist must be maintained after the repair is completed. GMLAN has 2 types of networks, low speed and high speed. Low speed GMLAN has a single wire and works at slow speeds. High speed GMLAN has 2 wires in a twisted pair and works at higher speeds. For more information on GMLAN, refer to Data Link Communications Description and Operation ( See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Information Bus/Description and Operation). GMLAN Connector Terminal Repair Note: A terminated lead can be used to replace damaged connector terminals for both high speed and low speed GMLAN systems. When making a connector terminal repair on a GMLAN high speed system with twisted pair wires, do not untwist the wires more than necessary to make the repair. If the individual terminals are damaged on any GMLAN connection, use the appropriate connector repair procedure in order to repair the terminal. Refer to Connector Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Connector Repairs) for the appropriate connector repair procedure. GMLAN Wire Repair Note: Refer to Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Wiring Repairs) in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gauge size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and EL-38125-10 - tool. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the DuraSeal splice sleeves. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12996 Note: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: * Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. * Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. * Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert to regional wiring gauge size. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the EL-38125-10 - tool in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the splice sleeve crimp tool. The crimp tool has four nests, one for each color. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12997 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs Caution: Do not solder repairs under any circumstances as this could result in the air reference being obstructed. If the heated oxygen sensor pigtail wiring, connector, or terminal is damaged the entire oxygen sensor assembly must be replaced. Do not attempt to repair the wiring, connector, or terminals. In order for the sensor to function properly it must have a clean air reference. This clean air reference is obtained by way of the oxygen sensor signal and heater wires. Any attempt to repair the wires, connectors or terminals could result in the obstruction of the air reference and degrade oxygen sensor performance. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12998 The following guidelines should be used when servicing the heated oxygen sensor: * Do not apply contact cleaner or other materials to the sensor or vehicle harness connectors. These materials may get into the sensor, causing poor performance. Also, the sensor pigtail and harness wires must not be damaged in such a way that the wires inside are exposed. This could provide a path for foreign materials to enter the sensor and cause performance problems. * Neither the sensor nor vehicle lead wires should be bent sharply or kinked. Sharp bends, kinks, etc., could block the reference air path through the lead wire. * Do not remove or defeat the oxygen sensor ground wire (where applicable). Vehicles that utilize the ground wire sensor may rely on this ground as the only ground contact to the sensor. Removal of the ground wire will also cause poor engine performance. * To prevent damage due to water intrusion, be sure that the peripheral seal remains intact on the vehicle harness connector. High Temperature Wiring Repairs High Temperature Wiring Repairs Special Tools * EL-38125-10 - Splice Sleeve Crimping Tool * J 38125-5 - Ultra Torch * DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). High Temperature Wiring Wiring that is exposed to high temperatures, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time may use materials i.e. wires, connectors, and shielding that has a higher heat rating than typical wiring. When making a repair in a high temperature area observe the following: * Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature to replace any damaged wire. * Replace any heat shielding that is removed. * Cover any DuraSeal splice sleeves with SCT1 shrink tubing. * After making a wiring repair, ensure that the location of the wiring is not moved closer to the heat source. Identifying High Temperature Wiring Wiring that is exposed to high temperature, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time need special considerations when making wiring repairs. Areas that may be exposed to higher temperatures can be identified by heat resistant materials that are being used in those areas. These materials may include heat reflective tape, moon tape, and high temperature shrink tubing. Also conduit and other protective coverings may be used. Because conduit or similar coverings are used throughout the vehicle regardless of the temperature, it may be necessary for the technician to determine if an area is exposed to excessive heat before making a wiring repair. Obvious areas of consideration would be any area located near the exhaust manifolds, catalytic converter, and exhaust pipes. Items Required * DuraSeal splice sleeves to crimp and seal connections * High temperature SCT1 shrink tubing to protect the splice sleeves * Terminated leads or pigtails * The correct tools to remove the terminals from the connectors Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature of the same or larger gauge size as the original wire when repair damage wire. Also replace any reflective tape that you remove during the repair. High Temperature Wire Repair Note: Refer to Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Wiring Repairs) in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature rating of the same gauge size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the EL-38125-10 - tool and then encapsulate the splice sleeve using the high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12999 Note: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: * Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. * Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. * Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert to regional wiring gauge size. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Slide a section of high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing down the length of wire to be spliced. Ensure that the shrink tubing will not interfere with the splice procedure. 5. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 6. Use the EL-38125-10 - tool in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the splice sleeve crimp tool. The crimp tool has four nests, one for each color. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13000 7. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 8. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 9. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 10. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 11. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13001 12. Center the high temperature SCT1 shrink tube over the DuraSeal splice sleeve. 13. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the high temperature heat shrink tubing. 14. Gradually move the heat from the center to the open end of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. 15. Replace any reflective tape and clips that may have been remove during the repair. Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation If the wire insulation has been chafed, or broken, enough to show the conductive portion of the wire, and the wire is not damaged, determine the length of insulation that needs to be repaired. If the repair is less than 280 mm (11 in), cut the wire within the damaged area. Than slide the appropriate heat shrink tubing (listed below) over the wire, and repair the wire by splicing the wires together. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves). Once the wire is spliced together slide heat shrink tubing over the damaged area and apply heat to seal the repaired wire. If the wire is damaged, or the damaged area is larger than 280 mm (11 in), than replace the damaged wire by splicing in a new section of wire. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13002 SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs Special Tools * EL-38125-10 - Splice Sleeve Crimping Tool * J 38125-5 - Ultra Torch * DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: * A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. * A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides the necessary low resistance contact integrity for these sensitive, low energy circuits. The Supplemental Inflatable Restraint (SIR) System/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working with the SIR/SRS, and the wiring components, such as connectors and terminals. SIR/SRS Connector Repair (Plastic Body and Terminal Metal Pin) Note: Do not use the terminals in the kit in order to replace damaged SIR/SRS system terminals. Use either an SIR/SRS pigtail or a terminated lead from the SIR Repair Kit Tray. The terminals in the SIR/SRS system are made with a special plating. This plating provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. Pigtail repair packs are available for SIR/SRS connectors with eight or less terminals. Only the connector body is available for connectors with more than eight terminals. Terminated leads can be used to replace damaged terminals when replacing the connector body. SIR/SRS Component Wire Pigtail Repair Note: Do not make wire, connector, or terminal repairs on components with wire pigtails. A wire pigtail is a wire or wires attached directly to the device, not by a connector. If a wiring pigtail is damaged, you must replace the entire component, with pigtail. The inflatable restraint steering wheel module coil is an example of a pigtail component. SIR/SRS Wire Repair Note: Refer to Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Wiring Repairs) in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13003 If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gauge size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and EL-38125-10 - tool. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the DuraSeal splice sleeves. Note: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: * Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. * Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. * Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert to regional wiring gauge size. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the EL-38125-10 - tool in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the splice sleeve crimp tool. The crimp tool has four nests, one for each color. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13004 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Connector Position Assurance (CPA) The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of a connector. CPAs are used in all SIR System connectors and also in some connectors of other systems. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals of a connection. Terminal Position Assurance (TPA) The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13005 Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Special Tools * EL-38125-10 - Splice Sleeve Crimping Tool * J 38125-5 - Ultra Torch * DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Note: Use only DuraSeal splice sleeves. Other splice sleeves may not protect the splice from moisture or provide a good electrical connection. Use DuraSeal splice sleeves to form a one-to-one splice on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. Use DuraSeal splice sleeves where there is special requirements such as moisture sealing. Follow the instructions below in order to splice copper wire using DuraSeal splice sleeves. Note: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: * Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. * Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. * Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert to regional wiring gauge size. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13006 5. Use the EL-38125-10 - tool in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the splice sleeve crimp tool. The crimp tool has four nests, one for each color. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13007 * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Splicing Inline Harness Diodes Splicing Inline Harness Diodes Many vehicle electrical systems use a diode to isolate circuits and protect the components from voltage spikes. When installing a new diode use the following procedure. 1. Open the harness. * If the harness is taped, remove the tape. * To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing seam ripper (available from sewing supply stores) in order to cut open the harness. * If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the diode. 2. If the diode is taped to the harness, remove all of the tape. 3. Check and record the current flow direction and orientation of diode. 4. Remove the inoperative diode from the harness with a suitable soldering tool. Note: If the diode is located next to a connector terminal remove the terminal(s) from the connector to prevent damage from the soldering tool. 5. Carefully strip away a section of insulation next to the old soldered portion of the wire(s). Do not remove any more than is needed to attach the new diode. 6. Check current flow direction of the new diode, being sure to install the diode with correct bias. Reference the appropriate service manual wiring schematic to obtain the correct diode installation position. 7. Attach the new diode to the wire(s) using 60/40 rosin core solder. Before soldering attach some heat sinks (aluminum alligator clips) across the diode wire ends to protect the diode from excessive heat. Follow the manufacturer's instruction for the soldering equipment. 8. Reinstall terminal(s) into the connector body if previously removed. Note: To prevent shorts to ground and water intrusion, completely cover all exposed wire and diode attachment points with tape. 9. Tape the diode to the harness or connector using electrical tape. Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable Twisted/shielded cable is used in order to protect wiring from electrical noise. Two-conductor cable of this construction is used between the radio and the Delco-Bose(R) speaker/amplifier units and other applications where low level, sensitive signals must be carried. Follow the instructions below in order to repair the twisted/shielded cable. 1. Remove the outer jacket (1). Use care not to cut into the drain wire of the mylar tape. 2. Unwrap the tape. Do not remove the tape. Use the tape in order to rewrap the twisted conductors after the splice is made. 3. Prepare the splice. Untwist the conductors and follow the instructions for Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves). Staggering the splices by 65 mm (2.5 in) is recommended. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13008 Note: Apply the mylar tape with the aluminum side inward. This ensures good electrical contact with the drain wire. 4. Re-assemble the cable. * Rewrap the conductors with the mylar tape. If the mylar tape is damaged, use 3M product AL-36FR to replace the damaged mylar tape. * Use caution not to wrap the drain wire in the tape (1). * Follow the splicing instructions for copper wire and splice the drain wire. * Wrap the drain wire around the conductors and tape with electrical tape to replace the outer insulation. 5. Tape over the entire cable. Use a winding motion when you apply the tape. Wiring Repairs Wiring Repairs The Wiring Repairs section contains the following types of wiring repair information. Using these elements together will make wiring repair faster and easier: * Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections) * Flat Wire Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Flat Wire Repairs) * GMLAN Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/GMLAN Wiring Repairs) * High Temperature Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/High Temperature Wiring Repairs) * Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs) * Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves) * Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable) * Splicing Inline Harness Diodes (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Inline Harness Diodes) * SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs) US English/Metric Conversion US English/Metric Conversion Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13009 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13010 Basic Digital Multimeter Requirements Basic Digital Multimeter Requirements Digital Multimeter (DMM) Basic Requirements Service information is validated using digital multimeters that meet or exceed the following requirements. Using a multimeter that does not meet these basic requirements may give inaccurate readings which could lead to an incorrect diagnosis. Display and Settings 1. Four digits displayed 2. Voltage, amperage, resistance, frequency, diode test settings, and min-max function 3. Display positive and negative values Voltage 1. Have at least 10 Mohm input impedance 2. Test a DC voltage range of 0.1-1000 V. 3. Test an AC voltage range of 0.1-1000 V. Amperage 1. Test a DC amperage range of 0.1µA-10 A. 2. Test an AC amperage range of 0.1µA-10 A. Resistance Test a resistance range of 0.1 ohm-40 Mohm and displays infinite for a value greater than 40 Mohm (O.L. (Over-load)) Frequency Test for a frequency range of 0.5 HZ-199 K HZ Diode Test 1. Apply at least 1 mA when performing the diode bias test 2. Display the break over voltage drop (0-3 V) of a forward biased diode 3. Display infinite (O.L. (Over-load)) when a diode is reverse biased Min-Max Readings 1. Can update at a 1 ms sample rate 2. Saves and displays minimum and maximum values Testing Ground and Low Reference Circuits Testing Ground and Low Reference Circuits Because a test lamp can light with up to 200 ohm in a ground or low reference circuit they are not recommended to be used for this type of test. A low impedance test lamp can light and indicate the circuit is good when there is as much as 20-30 ohm present, while a high impedance test lamp can light with up to 200 ohm present in the circuit. This is why the Digital Multi-Meter (DMM) is used when validating a ground or low reference circuit continuity. When using the DMM there are many vehicle conditions that can affect the ground and low reference continuity testing. If these conditions are not met, a ground or low reference circuit test can fail on a good circuit. This may cause longer diagnosis time and incorrect component replacement. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13011 Any current flow through a ground or low reference circuit, while being tested, will skew the DMM continuity reading, or display a reading higher than when there is no current flowing. Performing a ground or low reference circuit continuity test, in reference to the vehicles battery negative terminal, will have the highest risk of failing a good ground or low reference circuit test than any other ground reference point. The best ground test points would be a control module housing (if the control modules housing is metal and grounded), door jamb striker (if attached to metal), under dash metal frame work, engine block, or body ground studs (other than where the negative battery cable is attached). A typical DMM ground or low reference circuit continuity reading can be as high as 100 ohm with the ignition ON, and drop to 15-25 ohm after the ignition is turned OFF. The reading will drop below 10 ohm after 30-40 seconds, then below 5 ohm after 60 seconds. Once the vehicle completely goes to sleep (generally 3-10 minutes) the reading will drop below 0.3 ohm. The following list of conditions may need to be met to ensure a valid continuity reading on a ground or low reference circuit: * Ignition OFF * Key out of the ignition switch (when not equipped with keyless entry and remote start) * Retained Accessory Power (RAP) OFF (open and close the driver door after ignition OFF) * Battery charger set at a 2 A or less charge rate * Scan tool not communicating with any vehicle control module (in some cases it may need to be disconnected from the DLC) * All entry doors closed * Headlamps OFF (auto headlamps disabled) * Any delay lighting OFF * HVAC after blow OFF * Any accessory that can work when the ignition is OFF * Wait up to 60 seconds (after all other listed conditions are met) Activating the DOOR LOCK function with a key fob can greatly reduce the time to achieve a valid ground or low reference continuity test result. Terminal Wiring Repair Terminal Wiring Repair Special Tools * EL-38125-10 - Splice Sleeve Crimp Tool * EL-38125-580 - Terminal Release Tool Kit * J-38125-5 - Ultra Torch * EL-35616 - Connector Test Adapter Kit For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Note: All repairs near the engine manifold, turbo engine and all exhaust pipes should follow the High Temperature Wiring Repair procedures. 1. Find the appropriate connector end view within the connector end view section. The connector end view has the following information: * Diagnostic probe tool * Terminal release tool * Terminal/terminated lead part numbers 2. Determine if a terminal is damaged. Note: Not using the proper test kit probe may cause damage to the terminal(s) that are probed. * Locate the diagnostic probe tool from the connector end view. The connector end view describes the color and part number to help the technician find and use the correct tool. * Connect the probe tool to the Digital Multimeter. * Insert the probe tool into the cavity and follow the procedures from the Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter). 3. Disconnect the connector body to perform the repair. Note: Several procedures for specific connector bodies are called out in Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Wiring Repairs). Use the following repair procedures to repair the following terminals: Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13012 Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack))Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Push to Seat))Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Pull to Seat))Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W))Delphi Connectors (Micro.64) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Micro .64) )Delphi Connectors (12-Way) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (12-Way))Delphi Connectors (Steering Gear) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Steering Gear)) * The TPA and CPA should be removed before releasing the terminal for the connector body. * Look at the connector end view to locate the cavity of the damaged terminal and find the proper terminal release tool from the terminal release tool kit. Note: Using the incorrect terminal release tool can damage the connector body. * Insert the terminal release tool into the cavity. Note: Some terminals have a lever that must be disengaged before the terminal can be released. Gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Terminated Lead Repair Terminated Lead Repair Special Tools * EL-38125-10 - Splice Sleeve Crimp Tool * EL-38125-580 - Terminal Release Tool Kit * J-38125-5 - Ultra Torch * EL-35616 - Connector Test Adapter Kit For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Note: All repairs near the engine manifold, turbo engine and all exhaust pipes should follow the High Temperature Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/High Temperature Wiring Repairs) procedures. Terminated leads are terminals that are crimped onto wires. The terminated lead can be used throughout the vehicle since it is designed for temperatures up to 150°C. The length of the wire is 450 mm. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13013 The DuraSeal splice sleeve has the following 2 critical features: * A special heat shrink tubing that environmentally seals the splice. The shrink tubing contains a sealing adhesive inside the shrink tubing. * A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp that provides the necessary contact integrity for sensitive low energy circuits. 1. Use the connector end view to identify the correct terminated lead. 2. The terminated lead package should include a DuraSeal splice sleeve. If not, use the chart to identify the correct part. 3. Open the harness by removing any tape: Use a sewing seam ripper, or a comparable tool, to cut open the harness, to avoid wire insulation damage. 4. Depending on how many terminals need repairs, cut the terminal and wire back at least 40 mm. Try to keep the harness wire length the same. If more than one terminated lead is required, stagger the lengths by 40 mm. This helps reduce the bundle size of the wire harness. 5. Use the EL-38125-10 - tool in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the splice sleeve crimp tool. The crimp tool has four nests, one for each color. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13014 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the J-38125-5 - ultra torch , apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13015 Seat Heater: Connector Views E14A Seat Heating Element - Driver Back (KA1 or SPO Accessory) E14B Seat Heating Element - Driver Cushion (KA1 or SPO Accessory) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13016 E14C Seat Heating Element - Passenger Back (KA1 or SPO Accessory) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13017 E14D Seat Heating Element - Passenger Cushion (KA1 or SPO Accessory) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13018 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13019 Seat Heater: Electrical Diagrams Heated/Cooled Seat Schematics Power, Ground, Serial Data, and Controls (KA1) Heating Elements (KA1 without LTZ or SLT) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13020 Heating Elements (KA1 with LTZ or SLT) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13021 SPO Heated Seats Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13022 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Description and Operation > Heated Seats Description and Operation (Factory Installed) Seat Heater: Description and Operation Heated Seats Description and Operation (Factory Installed) Heated Seats Description and Operation (Factory Installed) Heated Seat Components The heated seat system consists of the following components: * Heated seat switch * HVAC control * Seat memory control module or seat heating control module * Seat cushion heating element * Seat back heating element * Seat cushion temperature sensor * 10 A fuse * 25 A fuse Heated Seat Operation The driver and passenger heated seats are controlled by separate heated seat switches. Both switches are located in the HVAC controls. When a heated seat switch is pressed, a LIN-Bus message is sent from the HVAC control to the HVAC control module. The HVAC control module then serves as a gateway to transmit the message to the seat memory control module/seat heating control module via serial data line indicating the heated seat command. In response to this message, the seat memory control module/seat heating control module applies or removes battery voltage through the element supply voltage circuit of the seat heating elements. The seat memory control module/seat heating control module sends a serial data message back to the HVAC control module to gateway the information to the HVAC control to either illuminate or turn off the appropriate temperature indicator. Temperature Regulation The seat memory control module/seat heating control module monitors the seat temperature through the temperature sensor signal circuit and the temperature sensor (thermistor) located in the seat cushion with the heater element. The temperature sensor is a variable resistor, it's resistance varies as the temperature of the seat changes. When the temperature sensor resistance indicates to the seat module that the seat has reached the desired temperature, the module opens the ground path of the seat heating elements through the heated seat element control circuit. The module will then cycle the element control circuit open and closed in order to maintain the desired temperature. Remote Start Seat Heating and Ventilation Some vehicles allow the customer to configure their heated and/or ventilated seats to come on after a remote start is commanded. The heated seats will only come on if the outside air temperature is below 50°F as measured by the outside air temperature sensor. When seat heating is commanded, the heating level will be on the "High" setting. On some vehicles, the LED display for the temperature level may not illuminate during remote start operation. When the vehicle operator inserts the key in the ignition and turns it to the "On" position, the heated seats will automatically turn off. Be aware that during remote start heated seat operation, since there is no occupant in the seat, the customer may comment that they feel little or no difference in the temperature of the seat. This is due to little heat transfer to the seat cover occurring since there is no weigh on the cushion. Once the seat is occupied and the seat cover is pressed against the heater element, heat will begin to transfer more rapidly to the seat cover. Load Management The electrical power management function is designed to monitor the vehicle electrical load and determine when the battery is potentially in a high discharge condition. The heated seat system is one of the vehicle loads that is subject to reduction during a battery discharge condition. For more information on load management refer to Electrical Power Management Description and Operation (See: Starting and Charging/Description and Operation/Electrical Power Management Description and Operation). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Description and Operation > Heated Seats Description and Operation (Factory Installed) > Page 13025 Seat Heater: Description and Operation Heated Seats Description and Operation (Dealer Installed) Heated Seats Description and Operation (Dealer Installed) Heated Seat Components The heated seat system consists of the following components: * Heated seat switch * Seat heating control module * Driver seat cushion heating element * Driver seat back heating element * Driver seat cushion temperature sensor * Passenger seat cushion heating element * Passenger seat back heating element * Passenger seat cushion temperature sensor Heated Seat Operation Battery positive voltage and ground is supplied to the seat heating control module from the auxiliary power outlet harness connector located under the CD player. This voltage is used to power up the heated seat module and to supply power to the seat heater elements. Battery voltage is supplied to the heated seat switch from the seat heating control module. When a heated seat switch is pressed, battery voltage is applied through the switch contacts and the heated seat switch signal circuit to the seat heating control module indicating the heated seat command. In response to this signal, the seat heating control module applies battery voltage through the control circuit to the seat heater elements. Temperature Regulation The seat memory control module/seat heating control module monitors the seat temperature through the temperature sensor signal circuit and the temperature sensor (thermistor) located in the seat cushion with the heater element. The temperature sensor is a variable resistor, it's resistance varies as the temperature of the seat changes. When the temperature sensor resistance indicates to the seat module that the seat has reached the desired temperature, the module opens the ground path of the seat heating elements through the heated seat element control circuit. The module will then cycle the element control circuit open and closed in order to maintain the desired temperature. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Symptoms - Seat Heating and Cooling Seat Heater: Testing and Inspection Symptoms - Seat Heating and Cooling Symptoms - Seat Heating and Cooling Note: The following steps must be completed before using the symptom tables. 1. When diagnosing a heated seat system condition perform the Diagnostic System Check Vehicle (See: Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle) , before using the symptom tables in order to verify that all of the following are true: * There are no DTCs set. * The control module(s) can communicate via the serial data link. 2. Review the system operation in order to familiarize yourself with the system functions. Refer to Heated Seats Description and Operation (Factory Installed) (See: Description and Operation/Heated Seats Description and Operation (Factory Installed))Heated Seats Description and Operation (Dealer Installed) (See: Description and Operation/Heated Seats Description and Operation (Dealer Installed)). Visual/Physical Inspection * Inspect for aftermarket devices which could affect the operation of the power seats. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Checking Aftermarket Accessories). * Inspect the easily accessible or visible system components for obvious damage or conditions which could cause the symptom. * Inspect the seat adjuster track for conditions which may cause binding or objects within the seat adjustment range which obstruct movement or interfere with wiring. Intermittent Faulty electrical connections or wiring may be the cause of intermittent conditions. Refer to Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections ( See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections). Symptom List Refer to the Front Heated Seat Malfunction (Without Memory) (See: Front Heated Seat Malfunction (Without Memory))Front Heated Seat Malfunction (With Memory) (See: Front Heated Seat Malfunction (With Memory))Front Heated Seat Malfunction (Dealer Installed) (See: Front Heated Seat Malfunction (Dealer Installed)) diagnostic procedure in order to diagnose the symptom. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Symptoms - Seat Heating and Cooling > Page 13028 Seat Heater: Testing and Inspection Front Heated Seat Malfunction (Without Memory) Front Heated Seat Malfunction (Without Memory) Diagnostic Instructions * Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle (See: Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle) prior to using this diagnostic procedure. * Review Strategy Based Diagnosis (See: Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Strategy Based Diagnosis) for an overview of the diagnostic approach. * Diagnostic Procedure Instructions (See: Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Diagnostic Procedure Instructions) provides an overview of each diagnostic category. Diagnostic Fault Information Circuit/System Description The driver and front passenger heated seats are controlled by separate heated seat switches that are located in the radio/HVAC controls. When a heated seat switch is pressed, a serial message is sent from the radio/HVAC controls to the HVAC control module indicating the heated seat command. The HVAC control module serves as a gateway to transmit the message to the seat heating control module via the serial data line. In response to this message, the seat heating control module applies battery voltage through the element supply voltage circuit to the appropriate seat heating elements. The seat heating control module then sends a serial data message back to the HVAC control module to gateway the information to the radio/HVAC controls to either illuminate or turn off the appropriate temperature indicator. Reference Information Schematic Reference Heated/Cooled Seat Schematics (See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams) Connector End View Reference Component Connector End Views (See: Diagrams/Connector Views) Description and Operation Heated Seats Description and Operation (Factory Installed) (See: Description and Operation/Heated Seats Description and Operation (Factory Installed))Heated Seats Description and Operation (Dealer Installed) (See: Description and Operation/Heated Seats Description and Operation (Dealer Installed)) Electrical Information Reference * Circuit Testing (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Circuit Testing) * Connector Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Connector Repairs) * Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections) * Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Symptoms - Seat Heating and Cooling > Page 13029 Repairs/Wiring Repairs) Scan Tool Reference Control Module References (See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning) for scan tool information Circuit/System Verification 1. Engine ON, observe the scan tool Driver Seat Heating/Venting/Cooling Mode parameter while pressing the driver HEATED seat switch. The reading should change between Off and Back & Cushion. ‹› If not the specified value, replace the A20 radio/HVAC controls. 2. Observe the scan tool Passenger Seat Heating/Venting/Cooling Mode parameter while pressing the passenger HEATED seat switch. The reading should change between Off and Back & Cushion. ‹› If not the specified value, replace the A20 radio/HVAC controls. 3. If all scan tool parameter readings test normal, there are no DTCs set, and the driver and/or passenger heated seat is inoperative, replace the K29 seat heating control module. Repair Instructions Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification (See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures/Verification Tests and Procedures) after completing the diagnostic procedure. * Radio Control Assembly Replacement (See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc/Radio/Stereo/Service and Repair/Radio Control Assembly Replacement) * Control Module References (See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning) for seat memory control module replacement, setup, and programming Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Symptoms - Seat Heating and Cooling > Page 13030 Seat Heater: Testing and Inspection Front Heated Seat Malfunction (With Memory) Front Heated Seat Malfunction (With Memory) Diagnostic Instructions * Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle (See: Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle) prior to using this diagnostic procedure. * Review Strategy Based Diagnosis (See: Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Strategy Based Diagnosis) for an overview of the diagnostic approach. * Diagnostic Procedure Instructions (See: Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Diagnostic Procedure Instructions) provides an overview of each diagnostic category. Diagnostic Fault Information Circuit/System Description The driver and front passenger heated seats are controlled by separate heated seat switches that are located in the radio/HVAC controls. When a heated seat switch is pressed, a serial data message is sent from the radio/HVAC controls to the HVAC control module indicating the heated seat command. The HVAC control module serves as a gateway to transmit the message to the seat memory control module via the serial data line. In response to this message, the seat memory control module applies battery voltage through the element supply voltage circuit to the appropriate seat heating elements. The seat memory control module then sends a serial data message back to the HVAC control module to gateway the information to the radio/HVAC controls to either illuminate or turn off the appropriate temperature indicator. Reference Information Schematic Reference Heated/Cooled Seat Schematics (See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams) Connector End View Reference Component Connector End Views (See: Diagrams/Connector Views) Description and Operation Heated Seats Description and Operation (Factory Installed) (See: Description and Operation/Heated Seats Description and Operation (Factory Installed))Heated Seats Description and Operation (Dealer Installed) (See: Description and Operation/Heated Seats Description and Operation (Dealer Installed)) Electrical Information Reference * Circuit Testing (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Symptoms - Seat Heating and Cooling > Page 13031 Testing/Circuit Testing) * Connector Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Connector Repairs) * Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections) * Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Wiring Repairs) Scan Tool Reference Control Module References (See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning) for scan tool information Circuit/System Testing 1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the X4 harness connector at the K40 seat memory control module. 2. Ignition ON, verify that a test lamp illuminates between the B+ circuit terminal 5 and ground. ‹› If the test lamp does not illuminate, test the B+ circuit for a short to ground or an open/high resistance. 3. Ignition OFF, connect the X4 harness connector at the K40 seat memory control module. 4. Ignition ON, observe the scan tool Driver Seat Heating/Venting/Cooling Mode parameter while pressing the driver HEATED seat switch. The reading should change between Off and Back & Cushion. ‹› If not the specified value, replace the A20 radio/HVAC controls. 5. Observe the scan tool Passenger Seat Heating/Venting/Cooling Mode parameter while pressing the passenger HEATED seat switch. The reading should change between Off and Back & Cushion. ‹› If not the specified value, replace the A20 radio/HVAC controls. 6. If all scan tool parameter readings test normal, there are no DTCs set, and the driver and/or passenger heated seat is inoperative, replace the K40 seat memory control module. Repair Instructions Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification (See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures/Verification Tests and Procedures) after completing the diagnostic procedure. * Radio Control Assembly Replacement (See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc/Radio/Stereo/Service and Repair/Radio Control Assembly Replacement) * Control Module References (See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning) for seat memory control module replacement, setup, and programming Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Symptoms - Seat Heating and Cooling > Page 13032 Seat Heater: Testing and Inspection Front Heated Seat Malfunction (Dealer Installed) Front Heated Seat Malfunction (Dealer Installed) Diagnostic Instructions * Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle (See: Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle) prior to using this diagnostic procedure. * Review Strategy Based Diagnosis (See: Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Strategy Based Diagnosis) for an overview of the diagnostic approach. * Diagnostic Procedure Instructions (See: Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Diagnostic Procedure Instructions) provides an overview of each diagnostic category. Diagnostic Fault Information Circuit/System Description Battery positive voltage and ground is supplied to the seat heating control module from the auxiliary power outlet harness connector located under the CD player. This voltage is used to power up the heated seat module and to supply power to the seat heater elements. Battery voltage is supplied to the heated seat switch from the seat heating control module. When a heated seat switch is pressed, battery voltage is applied through the switch contacts and the heated seat switch signal circuit to the seat heating control module indicating the heated seat command. In response to this signal, the seat heating control module applies battery voltage through the control circuit to the seat heater elements. Reference Information Schematic Reference Heated/Cooled Seat Schematics (See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams) Connector End View Reference Component Connector End Views (See: Diagrams/Connector Views) Description and Operation Heated Seats Description and Operation (Factory Installed) (See: Description and Operation/Heated Seats Description and Operation (Factory Installed))Heated Seats Description and Operation (Dealer Installed) (See: Description and Operation/Heated Seats Description and Operation (Dealer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Symptoms - Seat Heating and Cooling > Page 13033 Installed)) Electrical Information Reference * Circuit Testing (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Circuit Testing) * Connector Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Connector Repairs) * Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections) * Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Wiring Repairs) Scan Tool Reference Control Module References (See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning) for scan tool information Circuit System Verification Note: For a valid test of the heated seat operation, you must sit in the seat for at least a 5 minute period for which the heat has time to reach the seat surface. 1. Ignition ON, operate both heated seats. The seat cushion and seat back should get warm for both seats. ‹› If both the driver and front passenger heated seats are inoperative, refer to Driver and Passenger Heated Seats Inoperative. ‹› If just one of the heated seats is inoperative or always ON, refer to Heated Seat Malfunction. 2. Observe the heated seat switch temperature indicators while pressing the appropriate heated seat switch through the high, medium, and low positions. The appropriate indicators should illuminate as the switch is activated. ‹› If the heated seat operates normal, but one or all of the switch temperature indicators are inoperative or always ON, refer to Heated Seat Switch Indicator Malfunction. ‹› If three temperature indicators are flashing, there is a problem with the heating element circuit. Refer to Heated Seat Malfunction. ‹› If one temperature indicator is flashing, there is a problem with the temperature sensor circuit. Refer to Heated Seat Malfunction. Circuit/System Testing Driver and Passenger Heated Seats Inoperative 1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the X4 harness connector at the seat heating control module. 2. Test for less than 5 Ohms between the ground circuit terminals listed below and ground: * Terminal 2 * Terminal 5 ‹› If greater than the specified range, test the ground circuit for an open/high resistance. 3. Ignition ON, verify that a test lamp illuminates between the B+ circuit terminals listed below and ground: * Terminal 3 * Terminal 6 ‹› If the test lamp does not illuminate, test the B+ circuit for a short to ground or an open/high resistance. 4. Ignition OFF, connect the X2 harness connector at seat heating control module and disconnect the harness connector at the heated seat switch. 5. Ignition ON, verify that a test lamp illuminates between the B+ circuit terminal 1 and ground. ‹› If the test lamp does not illuminate, test the B+ circuit for a short to ground or an open/high resistance. If the circuit tests normal, replace the seat heating control module. 6. If all circuits test normal, replace the seat heating control module. Heated Seat Malfunction 1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the X5 harness connector at the seat heating control module. 2. Install a 3 A fused jumper wire between the B+ circuit terminal 1 and B+. 3. Connect a test lamp between the appropriate signal circuit terminal listed below and ground. * Driver heated seat switch terminal 2 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Symptoms - Seat Heating and Cooling > Page 13034 * Passenger heated seat switch terminal 7 4. Ignition ON, press and release the appropriate heated seat switch. The test lamp should turn ON and OFF as the switch is pressed and released. ‹› If the test lamp is always ON, test the signal circuit for a short to voltage. If the circuit tests normal, test or replace the heated seat switch. ‹› If the test lamp is always OFF, test the signal circuit for a short to ground or an open/high resistance. If the circuit tests normal, test or replace the heated seat switch. 5. Ignition OFF, connect the X5 harness connector at the seat heating control module and disconnect the appropriate X1 or X3 harness connector at the seat heating control module. 6. Test for 800 - 300 kOhms between the signal circuit terminal 3 and low reference circuit terminal 4. ‹› If less than the specified range, test for a short between the signal and low reference circuits. If the circuits test normal, test or replace the seat cushion heater element. ‹› If greater than the specified range, test the signal and low reference circuits for a short to voltage or an open/high resistance. If the circuits test normal, test or replace the seat cushion heater element. 7. Disconnect the harness connector at the seat back heating element. Note: Element resistance must be measured twice to ensure that all failure conditions are simulated. First with the seat unoccupied, then with the seat occupied. 8. Test for 1 - 5 Ohms between control the circuit terminal A and the low reference circuit terminal B. ‹› If not within the specified range, test or replace the seat back heating element. 9. Connect the harness connector at the seat back heating element. Note: Element resistance must be measured twice to ensure that all failure conditions are simulated. First with the seat unoccupied, then with the seat occupied. 10. At the seat heating control module harness connector, test for 1 - 7 Ohms between the control circuit terminal 1 and the low reference circuit terminal 2. ‹› If less than the specified range, test for a short between the control and low reference circuits. If the circuits test normal, test or replace the seat cushion heater element. ‹› If greater than the specified range, test the control and low reference circuits for an open/high resistance. If the circuits test normal, test or replace the seat cushion heater element. 11. Test for infinite resistance between the control circuit terminal 1 and ground. ‹› If not the specified value, test the control circuit for a short to ground. 12. Ignition ON, test for less than 0.1 V between the control circuit terminal 1 and ground. ‹› If greater than the specified value, test the control circuit for a short to voltage. 13. If all circuits test normal, replace the seat heating control module. Heated Seat Switch Indicator Malfunction 1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the heated seat switch. 2. Ignition ON, verify that a test lamp does not illuminate between the control circuit terminals listed below and B+. * Left seat high temperature indicator terminal 2 * Left seat medium temperature indicator terminal 3 * Left seat low temperature indicator terminal * Right seat high temperature indicator terminal 6 * Right seat medium temperature indicator terminal 7 * Right seat low temperature indicator terminal ‹› If the test illuminates, test the appropriate control circuit for a short to ground. If the circuit tests normal, replace the seat heating control module. 3. Ignition OFF, connect the harness connector at the heated seat switch and disconnect the X5 harness connector at the seat heating control module. 4. Install a 3 A fused jumper wire between the B+ circuit terminal 1 and B+. 5. Ignition ON, connect a test lamp between the control circuit terminals listed below and ground. The appropriate temperature indicator should Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Symptoms - Seat Heating and Cooling > Page 13035 illuminate. * Left seat high temperature indicator terminal 2 * Left seat medium temperature indicator terminal 3 * Left seat low temperature indicator terminal * Right seat high temperature indicator terminal 7 * Right seat medium temperature indicator terminal 8 * Right seat low temperature indicator terminal ‹› If the indicator does not illuminate, test the control circuit for a short to voltage or an open/high resistance. If the circuit tests normal, test or replace the heated seat switch. 6. If all circuits test normal, replace the seat heating control module. Repair Instructions Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification (See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures/Verification Tests and Procedures) after completing the diagnostic procedure. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driver or Passenger Seat Back Cushion Heater Replacement Seat Heater: Service and Repair Driver or Passenger Seat Back Cushion Heater Replacement Driver or Passenger Seat Back Cushion Heater Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driver or Passenger Seat Back Cushion Heater Replacement > Page 13038 Seat Heater: Service and Repair Driver or Passenger Seat Cushion Heater Replacement Driver or Passenger Seat Cushion Heater Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater Control Module > Component Information > Locations Seat Heater Control Module: Locations Passenger Compartment/Roof Component Views Driver Seat Components 1 - M56D Seat Recline Motor - Driver (AE8) 2 - E14A Seat Heating Element - Driver Back (KA1) 3 P22E Video Display - Driver Seatback (UWG) 4 - F106L Side Air Bag - Left 5 - M52D Seat Lumbar Support Horizontal Motor - Driver 6 - M51D Seat Horizontal Motor - Driver (AE8) 7 - K40 Seat Memory Control Module (LTZ or SLT) or K29 Seat Heating Control Module (KA1 without LTZ or SLT) 8 - F113D Seat Belt Anchor Pretensioner - Driver 9 - M55D Seat Rear Vertical Motor (AE8) or M57D Seat Vertical Motor (without AE8) 10 - M50D Seat Front Vertical Motor - Driver 11 - S65D Seat Lumbar Support Switch - Driver 12 - S64D Seat Adjuster Switch - Driver (without AE8) 13 S64D Seat Adjuster Switch - Driver (AE8) 14 - S47D Seat Memory Switch - Driver (LTZ or SLT) 15 - E14B Seat Heating Element - Driver Cushion (KA1) 16 - B88D Seat Belt Switch - Driver Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 13042 Seat Heater Control Module: Diagrams K29 Seat Heating Control Module X1 (KA1 without LTZ or SLT) K29 Seat Heating Control Module X1 (SPO Accessory) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 13043 K29 Seat Heating Control Module X2 (KA1 without LTZ or SLT) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 13044 K29 Seat Heating Control Module X3 (KA1 without LTZ or SLT) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 13045 K29 Seat Heating Control Module X3 (SPO Accessory) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 13046 K29 Seat Heating Control Module X4 (SPO Accessory) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 13047 K29 Seat Heating Control Module X5 (SPO Accessory) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 13048 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 13049 Seat Heater Control Module: Service and Repair Front Seat Heater Control Module Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater Switch > Component Information > Diagrams Seat Heater Switch: Diagrams S32D Seat Heating Switch - Driver (SPO Accessory) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Vacuum/Pressure Pump, Seats > Component Information > Service and Repair Vacuum/Pressure Pump: Service and Repair Driver or Passenger Seat Adjuster Vertical Actuator Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Hood Switch / Sensor > Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Locations Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm): Locations Front of Vehicle/Engine Compartment Component Views Engine Compartment Components (Chevrolet) 1 - B20 Brake Fluid Level Switch 2 - B19B Brake Booster Vacuum Sensor 3 - M75 Windshield Wiper Motor 4 - X50A Fuse Block - Underhood 5 - C1 Battery 6 - G24 Windshield Washer Pump 7 - B55 Hood Ajar Switch (BTV) 8 - P12B Horn - Low Note 9 - P12A Horn - High Note 10 - K17 Electronic Brake Control Module Engine Compartment Components (GMC) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Hood Switch / Sensor > Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Locations > Page 13061 1 - B20 Brake Fluid Level Switch 2 - B19B Brake Booster Vacuum Sensor 3 - M75 Windshield Wiper Motor 4 - X50A Fuse Block - Underhood 5 - C1 Battery 6 - G24 Windshield Washer Pump 7 - P12B Horn - Low Note 8 - B55 Hood Ajar Switch (BTV) 9 - K17 Electronic Brake Control Module 10 - P12A Horn - High Note Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Hood Switch / Sensor > Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Locations > Page 13062 Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm): Diagrams B55 Hood Ajar Switch (BTV) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Pedal Positioning Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Brake Pedal Position Sensor Calibration Pedal Positioning Sensor: Service and Repair Brake Pedal Position Sensor Calibration Brake Pedal Position Sensor Calibration Calibration Criteria Note: Do not apply the brake pedal during the brake pedal position sensor calibration procedure. Any movement of the brake pedal during this procedure will cause the calibration procedure to fail. If this occurs, the brake pedal position sensor calibration must be repeated. Brake pedal position sensor calibration must be performed after the brake pedal position sensor or body control module (BCM) have been serviced. The calibration procedure will set the brake pedal position sensor home value. This value is used by the BCM to determine the action of the driver applying the brake system and to provide this information to the vehicle subsystems via serial data. Calibration Procedure 1. Apply the parking brake. 2. Place the transmission in the PARK position. 3. Install a scan tool. 4. Clear all BCM DTCs before proceeding. 5. Navigate to the Module Diagnosis menu. 6. Select BCM menu item. 7. Select Configuration/Reset Functions menu item. 8. Select the Brake Pedal Position Sensor Learn procedure and follow the directions displayed on the screen. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Pedal Positioning Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Brake Pedal Position Sensor Calibration > Page 13067 Pedal Positioning Sensor: Service and Repair Brake Pedal Position Sensor Replacement Brake Pedal Position Sensor Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Mirror Switch > Component Information > Locations Power Mirror Switch: Locations Door Component Views Driver Door Components 1 - A23D Door Latch Assembly - Driver 2 - A9A Outside Rearview Mirror - Driver 3 - E1C Accent Lamp - Driver Door Handle (LTZ or SLT) 4 - K96L Mirror Control Module - Left (LTZ or SLT) 5 S52S Outside Rearview Mirror Switch 6 - P19G Speaker - Left Front 7 - M74D Window Motor Driver 8 - B63LF Side Impact Sensor - Left Front 9 - S79D Window Switch - Driver 10 - E1D Accent Lamp - Driver Door (LTZ or SLT) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Mirror Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 13071 Power Mirror Switch: Diagrams S52 Outside Rearview Mirror Switch Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Mirror Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 13072 Power Mirror Switch: Service and Repair Outside Remote Control Rearview Mirror Switch Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Locations Power Seat Switch: Locations Passenger Compartment/Roof Component Views Driver Seat Components 1 - M56D Seat Recline Motor - Driver (AE8) 2 - E14A Seat Heating Element - Driver Back (KA1) 3 P22E Video Display - Driver Seatback (UWG) 4 - F106L Side Air Bag - Left 5 - M52D Seat Lumbar Support Horizontal Motor - Driver 6 - M51D Seat Horizontal Motor - Driver (AE8) 7 - K40 Seat Memory Control Module (LTZ or SLT) or K29 Seat Heating Control Module (KA1 without LTZ or SLT) 8 - F113D Seat Belt Anchor Pretensioner - Driver 9 - M55D Seat Rear Vertical Motor (AE8) or M57D Seat Vertical Motor (without AE8) 10 - M50D Seat Front Vertical Motor - Driver 11 - S65D Seat Lumbar Support Switch - Driver 12 - S64D Seat Adjuster Switch - Driver (without AE8) 13 S64D Seat Adjuster Switch - Driver (AE8) 14 - S47D Seat Memory Switch - Driver (LTZ or SLT) 15 - E14B Seat Heating Element - Driver Cushion (KA1) 16 - B88D Seat Belt Switch - Driver Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 13076 Power Seat Switch: Diagrams S64D Seat Adjuster Switch - Driver (AE8 or LTZ or SLT) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 13077 S64D Seat Adjuster Switch - Driver (without AE8 or LTZ or SLT) S65D Seat Lumbar Support Switch - Driver Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 13078 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driver Seat Adjuster Switch Replacement Power Seat Switch: Service and Repair Driver Seat Adjuster Switch Replacement Driver Seat Adjuster Switch Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driver Seat Adjuster Switch Replacement > Page 13081 Power Seat Switch: Service and Repair Driver Seat Lumbar Control Switch Replacement Driver Seat Lumbar Control Switch Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Trunk / Liftgate Hazard Sensor > Component Information > Locations Power Trunk / Liftgate Hazard Sensor: Locations Luggage Compartment/Rear of Vehicle Component Views Liftgate Components 1 - B71R Liftgate Object Sensor - Right (TB5) 2 - E18 Rear Defogger Grid 3 - B71L Liftgate Object Sensor - Left (TB5) 4 - M45 Rear Wiper Motor 5 - K39 Liftgate Control Module (TB5) 6 - A23C Liftgate Latch Assembly 7 - B70 Liftgate Close Switch (TB5) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Trunk / Liftgate Hazard Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 13085 Power Trunk / Liftgate Hazard Sensor: Diagrams B71L Liftgate Object Sensor - Left (TB5) B71R Liftgate Object Sensor - Right (TB5) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Trunk / Liftgate Hazard Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 13086 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Switch > Component Information > Diagrams Seat Heater Switch: Diagrams S32D Seat Heating Switch - Driver (SPO Accessory) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Seat Memory Switch > Component Information > Locations Seat Memory Switch: Locations Passenger Compartment/Roof Component Views Driver Seat Components 1 - M56D Seat Recline Motor - Driver (AE8) 2 - E14A Seat Heating Element - Driver Back (KA1) 3 P22E Video Display - Driver Seatback (UWG) 4 - F106L Side Air Bag - Left 5 - M52D Seat Lumbar Support Horizontal Motor - Driver 6 - M51D Seat Horizontal Motor - Driver (AE8) 7 - K40 Seat Memory Control Module (LTZ or SLT) or K29 Seat Heating Control Module (KA1 without LTZ or SLT) 8 - F113D Seat Belt Anchor Pretensioner - Driver 9 - M55D Seat Rear Vertical Motor (AE8) or M57D Seat Vertical Motor (without AE8) 10 - M50D Seat Front Vertical Motor - Driver 11 - S65D Seat Lumbar Support Switch - Driver 12 - S64D Seat Adjuster Switch - Driver (without AE8) 13 S64D Seat Adjuster Switch - Driver (AE8) 14 - S47D Seat Memory Switch - Driver (LTZ or SLT) 15 - E14B Seat Heating Element - Driver Cushion (KA1) 16 - B88D Seat Belt Switch - Driver Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Seat Memory Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 13093 Seat Memory Switch: Diagrams S47D Seat Memory Switch - Driver (LTZ or SLT) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Seat Memory Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 13094 Seat Memory Switch: Service and Repair Driver Seat Adjuster Memory Switch Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Switch > Component Information > Locations Sunroof / Moonroof Switch: Locations Passenger Compartment/Roof Component Views Headliner Components 2 - E37R Dome/Reading Lamps - Rear 3 - B77R Radio Volume Compensator Interior Noise Microphone - Rear (VQN) 4 - M69 Sunroof Motor (CF5) 5 - E37M Dome/Reading Lamps - Middle 6 - E37EL Dome/Reading Lamps - Front Overhead Console Left 7 - S12 Dome Lamp Switch 8 - B24 Cellular Phone Microphone (UE1) 9 - S72 Sunroof Switch (CF5) 10 - S45B Liftgate Control Switch Interior (TB5) 11 - S88 Sunroof Tilt Switch (CF5) 12 - S17RF Dome/Reading Lamps Switch - Front Overhead Console Right 13 - S17LF Dome/Reading Lamps Switch - Front Overhead Console Left 14 - E37ER Dome/Reading Lamps - Front Overhead Console Right 15 - E1L Accent Lamp Overhead Console (LT or LTZ or SLE2 or SLT) 16 - P14 Passenger Airbag Disable Indicator 17 - A3R Sunshade - Right Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 13098 18 - K77 Remote Control Door Lock Receiver 19 - A10 Inside Rearview Mirror 20 - P7 Display (UVC without UYS or PCJ) 21 - A3L Sunshade - Left 22 - B77F Radio Volume Compensator Interior Noise Microphone - Front (VQN) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 13099 Sunroof / Moonroof Switch: Diagrams S72 Sunroof Switch (CF5) S88 Sunroof Tilt Switch (CF5) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 13100 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Sunroof Tilt Position Switch Replacement Sunroof / Moonroof Switch: Service and Repair Sunroof Tilt Position Switch Replacement Sunroof Tilt Position Switch Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Sunroof Tilt Position Switch Replacement > Page 13103 Sunroof / Moonroof Switch: Service and Repair Sunroof Switch Sunroof Switch Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Trunk / Liftgate Switch > Component Information > Locations Trunk / Liftgate Switch: Locations Luggage Compartment/Rear of Vehicle Component Views Liftgate Components 1 - B71R Liftgate Object Sensor - Right (TB5) 2 - E18 Rear Defogger Grid 3 - B71L Liftgate Object Sensor - Left (TB5) 4 - M45 Rear Wiper Motor 5 - K39 Liftgate Control Module (TB5) 6 - A23C Liftgate Latch Assembly 7 - B70 Liftgate Close Switch (TB5) Rear of Vehicle Components (Chevrolet) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Trunk / Liftgate Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 13107 1 - E2LR Side Marker Lamp - Left Rear 2 - E5A Backup Lamp - Left 3 - E6 Center High Mounted Stop Lamp 4 - T4G Cellular Phone, Navigation, and Digital Radio Antenna 5 - M45 Rear Wiper Motor 6 - E5B Backup Lamp - Right 7 - E2RR Side Marker Lamp - Right Rear 8 - E5T Tail/Brake and Turn Signal Lamp - Right 9 - E7R License Plate Lamp - Right 10 - B78H Rear Object Sensor Right Outer (UD7) 11 - B78F Rear Object Sensor - Right Middle (UD7) 12 - S46 Liftgate Handle Switch 13 - B87 Rearview Camera (UVC) 14 - X88 Trailer Connector (V92) 15 - B78E Rear Object Sensor - Left Middle (UD7) 16 - E7L License Plate Lamp - Left 17 - B78G Rear Object Sensor Left Outer (UD7) 18 - E5S Tail/Brake and Turn Signal Lamp - Left Rear of Vehicle Components (GMC) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Trunk / Liftgate Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 13108 1 - E5M Tail Lamp - Left Upper 2 - E6 Center High Mounted Stop Lamp 3 - T4G Cellular Phone, Navigation, and Digital Radio Antenna 4 - M45 Rear Wiper Motor 5 - E5N Tail Lamp - Right Upper 6 - E5T Tail/Brake and Turn Signal Lamp - Right 7 - E2RR Side Marker Lamp - Right Rear 8 - E5K Tail Lamp - Right Lower 9 - E5B Backup Lamp - Right 10 - B78H Rear Object Sensor - Right Outer (UD7) 11 - E7R License Plate Lamp - Right 12 - S46 Liftgate Handle Switch 13 - B87 Rearview Camera (UVC) 14 - E7L License Plate Lamp - Left 15 - B78F Rear Object Sensor - Right Middle (UD7) 16 - X88 Trailer Connector (V92) 17 - B78E Rear Object Sensor - Left Middle (UD7) 18 B78G Rear Object Sensor - Left Outer (UD7) 19 - E5A Backup Lamp - Left 20 - E5J Tail Lamp Left Lower 21 - E2LR Side Marker Lamp - Left Rear 22 - E5S Tail/Brake and Turn Signal Lamp Left Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Trunk / Liftgate Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 13109 Trunk / Liftgate Switch: Diagrams B70 Liftgate Close Switch (TB5) S45B Liftgate Control Switch - Interior (TB5) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Trunk / Liftgate Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 13110 S46 Liftgate Handle Switch Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Trunk / Liftgate Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 13111 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Trunk / Liftgate Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Liftgate Close Switch Replacement Trunk / Liftgate Switch: Service and Repair Liftgate Close Switch Replacement Liftgate Close Switch Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Trunk / Liftgate Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Liftgate Close Switch Replacement > Page 13114 Trunk / Liftgate Switch: Service and Repair Rear Compartment Lid Release Switch Replacement Rear Compartment Lid Release Switch Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Trunk / Liftgate Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Liftgate Close Switch Replacement > Page 13115 Trunk / Liftgate Switch: Service and Repair Liftgate Release Switch Replacement Liftgate Release Switch Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Trunk / Liftgate Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair Trunk / Liftgate Position Sensor: Service and Repair Liftgate Side Upper Sensor Replacement (Equinox) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Splash Guard > Component Information > Service and Repair > Engine Splash Shield Replacement - Left Side Splash Guard: Service and Repair Engine Splash Shield Replacement - Left Side Engine Splash Shield Replacement - Left Side Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Splash Guard > Component Information > Service and Repair > Engine Splash Shield Replacement - Left Side > Page 13123 Splash Guard: Service and Repair Engine Splash Shield Replacement - Right Side Engine Splash Shield Replacement - Right Side Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Spoilers, Flaps, and Air Dams > Spoiler > Component Information > Service and Repair Spoiler: Service and Repair Rear End Spoiler Replacement (Equinox) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Strut / Shock Tower > Front Strut / Shock Tower > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Front Strut / Shock Tower: > 10-03-08-003A > Dec > 10 > Suspension Front Suspension or Front Strut Noise Front Strut / Shock Tower: Customer Interest Suspension - Front Suspension or Front Strut Noise TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 10-03-08-003A Date: December 20, 2010 Subject: Front Suspension or Front Strut Noise (Apply Grease on Strut Shaft) Models: 2008-2011 Chevrolet Captiva Sport 2010-2011 Chevrolet Equinox 2010-2011 GMC Terrain 2008-2010 Saturn VUE Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the models to include Captiva and VUE. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 10-03-08-003 (Section 03 - Suspension). Condition Some customers may comment on a popping, creak, rattle, squawk, itch or clunk type noise coming from the front of the vehicle. This noise will most likely be heard during small to medium suspension travel. The noise may occur with the vehicle traveling straight and/or during turns. Cause The cause of this condition may be due to the inside diameter of the front strut jounce bumper rubbing against the piston rod of the strut, creating a slip-stick condition. Correction Important DO NOT replace any front suspension components (strut, strut top mount bearing, etc) without first performing this bulletin. 1. Verify that the noise is from the upper strut mount area. The concern may be on both sides of the vehicle. 2. Raise and support the vehicle on a frame lift-type hoist. 3. Pull the dust shield/jounce bumper assembly out of the strut top mount cup. 4. Slide the dust shield/jounce bumper assembly down to expose the top portion of the strut shaft. 5. Apply grease, GM P/N 12345579 (in Canada, 10953481), around the circumference of the strut shaft that is exposed. 6. Unseat the bottom of the dust shield from the strut. 7. Slide the dust shield/jounce bumper assembly up to expose the bottom portion of the strut shaft. 8. Apply the grease around the circumference of the strut shaft that is exposed. 9. Slide the dust shield/jounce bumper assembly down and reattach the bottom to the strut. 10. Push the top of the dust shield/jounce bumper assembly up into the top mount cup as far as possible by hand. The assembly will fully seat once the Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Strut / Shock Tower > Front Strut / Shock Tower > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Front Strut / Shock Tower: > 10-03-08-003A > Dec > 10 > Suspension Front Suspension or Front Strut Noise > Page 13137 vehicle is on the ground and the suspension is allowed to compress. Parts Information Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Strut / Shock Tower > Front Strut / Shock Tower > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Strut / Shock Tower: > 10-03-08-003A > Dec > 10 > Suspension - Front Suspension or Front Strut Noise Front Strut / Shock Tower: All Technical Service Bulletins Suspension - Front Suspension or Front Strut Noise TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 10-03-08-003A Date: December 20, 2010 Subject: Front Suspension or Front Strut Noise (Apply Grease on Strut Shaft) Models: 2008-2011 Chevrolet Captiva Sport 2010-2011 Chevrolet Equinox 2010-2011 GMC Terrain 2008-2010 Saturn VUE Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the models to include Captiva and VUE. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 10-03-08-003 (Section 03 - Suspension). Condition Some customers may comment on a popping, creak, rattle, squawk, itch or clunk type noise coming from the front of the vehicle. This noise will most likely be heard during small to medium suspension travel. The noise may occur with the vehicle traveling straight and/or during turns. Cause The cause of this condition may be due to the inside diameter of the front strut jounce bumper rubbing against the piston rod of the strut, creating a slip-stick condition. Correction Important DO NOT replace any front suspension components (strut, strut top mount bearing, etc) without first performing this bulletin. 1. Verify that the noise is from the upper strut mount area. The concern may be on both sides of the vehicle. 2. Raise and support the vehicle on a frame lift-type hoist. 3. Pull the dust shield/jounce bumper assembly out of the strut top mount cup. 4. Slide the dust shield/jounce bumper assembly down to expose the top portion of the strut shaft. 5. Apply grease, GM P/N 12345579 (in Canada, 10953481), around the circumference of the strut shaft that is exposed. 6. Unseat the bottom of the dust shield from the strut. 7. Slide the dust shield/jounce bumper assembly up to expose the bottom portion of the strut shaft. 8. Apply the grease around the circumference of the strut shaft that is exposed. 9. Slide the dust shield/jounce bumper assembly down and reattach the bottom to the strut. 10. Push the top of the dust shield/jounce bumper assembly up into the top mount cup as far as possible by hand. The assembly will fully seat once the Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Strut / Shock Tower > Front Strut / Shock Tower > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Strut / Shock Tower: > 10-03-08-003A > Dec > 10 > Suspension - Front Suspension or Front Strut Noise > Page 13143 vehicle is on the ground and the suspension is allowed to compress. Parts Information Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Strut / Shock Tower > Front Strut / Shock Tower > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Strut / Shock Tower: > Page 13144 Front Strut / Shock Tower: By Symptom Technical Service Bulletin # 10-03-08-003A Date: 101220 Suspension - Front Suspension or Front Strut Noise TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 10-03-08-003A Date: December 20, 2010 Subject: Front Suspension or Front Strut Noise (Apply Grease on Strut Shaft) Models: 2008-2011 Chevrolet Captiva Sport 2010-2011 Chevrolet Equinox 2010-2011 GMC Terrain 2008-2010 Saturn VUE Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the models to include Captiva and VUE. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 10-03-08-003 (Section 03 - Suspension). Condition Some customers may comment on a popping, creak, rattle, squawk, itch or clunk type noise coming from the front of the vehicle. This noise will most likely be heard during small to medium suspension travel. The noise may occur with the vehicle traveling straight and/or during turns. Cause The cause of this condition may be due to the inside diameter of the front strut jounce bumper rubbing against the piston rod of the strut, creating a slip-stick condition. Correction Important DO NOT replace any front suspension components (strut, strut top mount bearing, etc) without first performing this bulletin. 1. Verify that the noise is from the upper strut mount area. The concern may be on both sides of the vehicle. 2. Raise and support the vehicle on a frame lift-type hoist. 3. Pull the dust shield/jounce bumper assembly out of the strut top mount cup. 4. Slide the dust shield/jounce bumper assembly down to expose the top portion of the strut shaft. 5. Apply grease, GM P/N 12345579 (in Canada, 10953481), around the circumference of the strut shaft that is exposed. 6. Unseat the bottom of the dust shield from the strut. 7. Slide the dust shield/jounce bumper assembly up to expose the bottom portion of the strut shaft. 8. Apply the grease around the circumference of the strut shaft that is exposed. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Strut / Shock Tower > Front Strut / Shock Tower > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Strut / Shock Tower: > Page 13145 9. Slide the dust shield/jounce bumper assembly down and reattach the bottom to the strut. 10. Push the top of the dust shield/jounce bumper assembly up into the top mount cup as far as possible by hand. The assembly will fully seat once the vehicle is on the ground and the suspension is allowed to compress. Parts Information Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Technical Service Bulletin # 10-03-08-003A Date: 101220 Suspension - Front Suspension or Front Strut Noise TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 10-03-08-003A Date: December 20, 2010 Subject: Front Suspension or Front Strut Noise (Apply Grease on Strut Shaft) Models: 2008-2011 Chevrolet Captiva Sport 2010-2011 Chevrolet Equinox 2010-2011 GMC Terrain 2008-2010 Saturn VUE Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the models to include Captiva and VUE. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 10-03-08-003 (Section 03 - Suspension). Condition Some customers may comment on a popping, creak, rattle, squawk, itch or clunk type noise coming from the front of the vehicle. This noise will most likely be heard during small to medium suspension travel. The noise may occur with the vehicle traveling straight and/or during turns. Cause The cause of this condition may be due to the inside diameter of the front strut jounce bumper rubbing against the piston rod of the strut, creating a slip-stick condition. Correction Important DO NOT replace any front suspension components (strut, strut top mount bearing, etc) without first performing this bulletin. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Strut / Shock Tower > Front Strut / Shock Tower > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Strut / Shock Tower: > Page 13146 1. Verify that the noise is from the upper strut mount area. The concern may be on both sides of the vehicle. 2. Raise and support the vehicle on a frame lift-type hoist. 3. Pull the dust shield/jounce bumper assembly out of the strut top mount cup. 4. Slide the dust shield/jounce bumper assembly down to expose the top portion of the strut shaft. 5. Apply grease, GM P/N 12345579 (in Canada, 10953481), around the circumference of the strut shaft that is exposed. 6. Unseat the bottom of the dust shield from the strut. 7. Slide the dust shield/jounce bumper assembly up to expose the bottom portion of the strut shaft. 8. Apply the grease around the circumference of the strut shaft that is exposed. 9. Slide the dust shield/jounce bumper assembly down and reattach the bottom to the strut. 10. Push the top of the dust shield/jounce bumper assembly up into the top mount cup as far as possible by hand. The assembly will fully seat once the vehicle is on the ground and the suspension is allowed to compress. Parts Information Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Unibody > Cowl > Cowl Moulding / Trim > System Information > Service and Repair > Air Inlet Screen Replacement Cowl Moulding / Trim: Service and Repair Air Inlet Screen Replacement Air Inlet Screen Replacement (Equinox) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Unibody > Cowl > Cowl Moulding / Trim > System Information > Service and Repair > Air Inlet Screen Replacement > Page 13153 Cowl Moulding / Trim: Service and Repair Air Inlet Grille Panel Extension Replacement Air Inlet Grille Panel Extension Replacement (Equinox) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Front Door Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front or Rear Side Door Lower Weatherstrip Replacement Front Door Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Front or Rear Side Door Lower Weatherstrip Replacement Front or Rear Side Door Lower Weatherstrip Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Front Door Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front or Rear Side Door Lower Weatherstrip Replacement > Page 13159 Front Door Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Front Side Door Window Weatherstrip Replacement Front Side Door Window Weatherstrip Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Front Door Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front or Rear Side Door Lower Weatherstrip Replacement > Page 13160 Front Door Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Front Side Door Auxiliary Weatherstrip Replacement Front Side Door Auxiliary Weatherstrip Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Front Door Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front or Rear Side Door Lower Weatherstrip Replacement > Page 13161 Front Door Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Front Side Door Weatherstrip Replacement Front Side Door Weatherstrip Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Front Side Door Window Belt Reveal Molding Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Hood Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Hood Front Seal Replacement Hood Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Hood Front Seal Replacement Hood Front Seal Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Hood Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Hood Front Seal Replacement > Page 13169 Hood Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Hood Rear Weatherstrip Replacement Hood Rear Weatherstrip Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Rear Door Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Rear Side Door Window Weatherstrip Replacement Rear Door Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Rear Side Door Window Weatherstrip Replacement Rear Side Door Window Weatherstrip Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Rear Door Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Rear Side Door Window Weatherstrip Replacement > Page 13174 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Rear Door Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Rear Side Door Window Weatherstrip Replacement > Page 13175 Rear Door Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Rear Side Door Lower Rear Auxiliary Sealing Strip Replacement Rear Side Door Lower Rear Auxiliary Sealing Strip Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Rear Door Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Rear Side Door Window Weatherstrip Replacement > Page 13176 Rear Door Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Front or Rear Side Door Lower Weatherstrip Replacement Front or Rear Side Door Lower Weatherstrip Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Rear Door Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Rear Side Door Window Weatherstrip Replacement > Page 13177 Rear Door Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Rear Side Door Auxiliary Weatherstrip Replacement Rear Side Door Auxiliary Weatherstrip Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Rear Door Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Rear Side Door Window Weatherstrip Replacement > Page 13178 Rear Door Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Rear Side Door Weatherstrip Replacement Rear Side Door Weatherstrip Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Rear Side Door Window Belt Reveal Molding Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Trunk / Liftgate Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Liftgate Upper Weatherstrip Replacement Trunk / Liftgate Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Liftgate Upper Weatherstrip Replacement Liftgate Upper Weatherstrip Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Trunk / Liftgate Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Liftgate Upper Weatherstrip Replacement > Page 13186 Trunk / Liftgate Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Liftgate Weatherstrip Replacement Liftgate Weatherstrip Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Trunk / Liftgate Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Liftgate Upper Weatherstrip Replacement > Page 13187 Trunk / Liftgate Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Liftgate Wedge Replacement Liftgate Wedge Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Trunk / Liftgate Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Liftgate Upper Weatherstrip Replacement > Page 13188 Trunk / Liftgate Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Liftgate Wedge Replacement - Body Side Liftgate Wedge Replacement - Body Side Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Cruise Control Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Cruise Control Switch Replacement (NK5) Cruise Control Switch: Service and Repair Cruise Control Switch Replacement (NK5) Cruise Control Switch Replacement (NK5) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Cruise Control Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Cruise Control Switch Replacement (NK5) > Page 13194 Cruise Control Switch: Service and Repair Cruise Control Switch Replacement (NP5) Cruise Control Switch Replacement (NP5) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Cruise Control Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Cruise Control Switch Replacement (NK5) Cruise Control Switch: Service and Repair Cruise Control Switch Replacement (NK5) Cruise Control Switch Replacement (NK5) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Cruise Control Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Cruise Control Switch Replacement (NK5) > Page 13200 Cruise Control Switch: Service and Repair Cruise Control Switch Replacement (NP5) Cruise Control Switch Replacement (NP5) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Battery Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Battery Lamp/Indicator: > 11-08-49-001 > Jan > 11 > Battery - Transport Mode On Battery Light Flashing Battery Lamp/Indicator: Customer Interest Battery - Transport Mode On Battery Light Flashing TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 11-08-49-001 Date: January 31, 2011 Subject: Transport Mode On Message Displayed in Driver Information Center (DIC) and Battery Light is Flashing (Follow Procedure as Outlined Below) Models: 2010-2011 Buick LaCrosse 2011 Buick Regal 2010-2011 Cadillac SRX 2010-2011 Chevrolet Camaro, Equinox 2011 Chevrolet Volt Condition Some customers may comment that the red battery light is flashing and there is a "Transport Mode On" message displayed in the DIC. The transport mode is intended for use on vehicles being shipped outside of the United States and Canada. Correction 2011 Vehicle Procedure To turn the Transport Mode On/Off, it will be necessary to activate the hazard flashers, press the brake pedal, then press and hold the Start/Stop button or turn the ignition key to the crank position for 15 seconds. 2010 Chevrolet Camaro Procedure To turn the Transport Mode On/Off, it will be necessary to activate the hazard lamps, turn the ignition key to the crank position, and then hold it in the crank position for 15 seconds. The Transport Mode Off message will be displayed and the Battery light will turn off. 2010 Buick LaCrosse Procedure To turn the Transport Mode On/Off, it will be necessary to push and hold the Start/Stop button or turn the ignition key to the crank position, while the brake is applied for 15 seconds or until the Transport Mode Off message is displayed. 2010 Cadillac SRX Procedure To turn the Transport Mode On/Off, it will be necessary to push and hold the Start/Stop button while the brake is applied for 15 seconds or until the Transport Mode Off message is displayed. For SRX, if Transport Mode is active, this causes the RKE system to only work when the ignition is On or the BCM is awake (approximately 20 minutes after ignition off). 2010 Chevrolet Equinox Procedure To turn the Transport Mode On/Off, it will be necessary to turn the ignition key to the crank position, and then hold it in the crank position for 15 seconds. After turning the Transport Mode Off, make sure the ignition lock cylinder is not binding on the bezel around it, and causing the key to stick in the crank position. Note If this is a repeat concern, this feature can be completely turned off by reprogramming the BCM. This calibration will be titled "Update calibrations to improve Customer Satisfaction." Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Battery Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Battery Lamp/Indicator: > 11-08-49-001 > Jan > 11 > Battery - Transport Mode On Battery Light Flashing > Page 13210 Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Battery Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Battery Lamp/Indicator: > 11-08-49-001 > Jan > 11 > Battery - Transport Mode On Battery Light Flashing Battery Lamp/Indicator: All Technical Service Bulletins Battery - Transport Mode On Battery Light Flashing TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 11-08-49-001 Date: January 31, 2011 Subject: Transport Mode On Message Displayed in Driver Information Center (DIC) and Battery Light is Flashing (Follow Procedure as Outlined Below) Models: 2010-2011 Buick LaCrosse 2011 Buick Regal 2010-2011 Cadillac SRX 2010-2011 Chevrolet Camaro, Equinox 2011 Chevrolet Volt Condition Some customers may comment that the red battery light is flashing and there is a "Transport Mode On" message displayed in the DIC. The transport mode is intended for use on vehicles being shipped outside of the United States and Canada. Correction 2011 Vehicle Procedure To turn the Transport Mode On/Off, it will be necessary to activate the hazard flashers, press the brake pedal, then press and hold the Start/Stop button or turn the ignition key to the crank position for 15 seconds. 2010 Chevrolet Camaro Procedure To turn the Transport Mode On/Off, it will be necessary to activate the hazard lamps, turn the ignition key to the crank position, and then hold it in the crank position for 15 seconds. The Transport Mode Off message will be displayed and the Battery light will turn off. 2010 Buick LaCrosse Procedure To turn the Transport Mode On/Off, it will be necessary to push and hold the Start/Stop button or turn the ignition key to the crank position, while the brake is applied for 15 seconds or until the Transport Mode Off message is displayed. 2010 Cadillac SRX Procedure To turn the Transport Mode On/Off, it will be necessary to push and hold the Start/Stop button while the brake is applied for 15 seconds or until the Transport Mode Off message is displayed. For SRX, if Transport Mode is active, this causes the RKE system to only work when the ignition is On or the BCM is awake (approximately 20 minutes after ignition off). 2010 Chevrolet Equinox Procedure To turn the Transport Mode On/Off, it will be necessary to turn the ignition key to the crank position, and then hold it in the crank position for 15 seconds. After turning the Transport Mode Off, make sure the ignition lock cylinder is not binding on the bezel around it, and causing the key to stick in the crank position. Note If this is a repeat concern, this feature can be completely turned off by reprogramming the BCM. This calibration will be titled "Update calibrations to improve Customer Satisfaction." Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Battery Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Battery Lamp/Indicator: > 11-08-49-001 > Jan > 11 > Battery - Transport Mode On Battery Light Flashing > Page 13216 Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Cigarette Lighter: Diagram Information and Instructions Electrical Schematic Symbols Electrical Schematic Symbols Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13221 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13222 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13223 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13224 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13225 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13226 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13227 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13228 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13229 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13230 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13231 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13232 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13233 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13234 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13235 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13236 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13237 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13238 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13239 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13240 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13241 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13242 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13243 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13244 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13245 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13246 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13247 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13248 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13249 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13250 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13251 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13252 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13253 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13254 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13255 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13256 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13257 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13258 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13259 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13260 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13261 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13262 General Electrical Diagnosis General Electrical Diagnosis Basic Knowledge Required Without a basic knowledge of electricity, it will be difficult to use the diagnostic procedures contained in the service manual. You should understand the basic theory of electricity, and know the meaning of voltage (V), current (A), and resistance (Ohms ). You should also be able to read and understand a wiring diagram, as well as understand what happens in a circuit with an open or a shorted wire. Vehicle Zoning Strategy Vehicle Zoning Strategy All grounds, in-line connectors, and splices have identifying numbers that correspond to where they are located in the vehicle. The following table explains the numbering system. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13263 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13264 Cigarette Lighter: Diagnostic Aids Arrows and Symbols Arrows and Symbols This service manual uses various symbols in order to describe different service operations. 1 - Front of Vehicle 2 - View Detail 2 - View Detail 3 - Ambient Air Mixed with Another Gas or Indicate Temperature Change 4 - Motion or Direction 5 - View Angle 6 - Dimension (1:2) 7 Ambient/Clean Air Flow or Cool Air Flow 8 - Lubrication Point - Oil or Fluid 9 - Task Related 10 Sectioning (1:3) 11 - Gas Other Than Ambient Air or Hot Air Flow 12 - Lubrication Point - Grease or Jelly 13 - Multidirectional Arrow Decimal and Metric Equivalents Decimal and Metric Equivalents Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13265 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13266 Checking Aftermarket Accessories Checking Aftermarket Accessories Warning: Refer to SIR Warning (See: Restraint Systems/Service Precautions/SIR Warning). Caution: The OBD II symbol is used on the circuit diagrams in order to alert the technician that the circuit is essential for proper OBD II emission control circuit operation. Any circuit which fails and causes the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) to turn ON, or causes emissions-related component damage, is identified as an OBD II circuit. Do not connect aftermarket accessories into the following circuits: * SIR circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the SIR symbol. * OBD II circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the OBD II symbol. Always check for aftermarket accessories (non-OEM) as the first step in diagnosing electrical problems. If the vehicle is so equipped, disconnect the system to verify that these add-on accessories are not the cause of the problems. Possible causes of vehicle problems related to aftermarket accessories include: * Power feeds connected to points other than the battery * Antenna location * Transceiver wiring located too close to vehicle electronic modules or wiring * Poor shielding or poor connectors on antenna feed line * Check for recent service bulletins detailing installation guidelines for aftermarket accessories. Circuit Testing Circuit Testing The Circuit Testing section contains the following diagnostic testing information. Using this information along with the diagnostic procedures will identify the cause of the electrical malfunction. * Using Connector Test Adapters (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Using Connector Test Adapters) * Probing Electrical Connectors (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Probing Electrical Connectors) * Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13267 Procedures/Circuit Testing/Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter) * Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp) * Using Fused Jumper Wires (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Using Fused Jumper Wires) * Measuring Voltage (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Measuring Voltage) * Measuring Voltage Drop (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Measuring Voltage Drop) * Measuring Frequency (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Measuring Frequency) * Testing Ground and Low Reference Circuits (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Testing Ground and Low Reference Circuits) * Testing for Continuity (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Continuity) * Testing for Short to Ground (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Short to Ground) * Testing for a Short to Voltage (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for a Short to Voltage) * Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections) * Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions) * Testing for Electrical Intermittents (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Electrical Intermittents) * Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure) * Circuit Protection - Fuses (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Circuit Protection - Fuses) * Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers) * Circuit Protection - Fusible Links (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Circuit Protection - Fusible Links) Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp Special Tools EL-35616-200 - Test Light - Probe Kit For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test Probe Caution). A test lamp can simply and quickly test a low impedance circuit for voltage. A Digital Multimeter (DMM) should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present if the impedance is low enough, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. In other words, if there is not enough current, the test lamp will not illuminate even though voltage is present. The EL-35616-200 - kit is Micro-Pack compatible and comprised of a 12-volt light bulb with an attached pair of leads. To properly operate this tool use the following procedures. When testing for voltage: 1. Attach one lead to ground. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is voltage at the point being tested. When testing for ground: 1. Attach one lead to battery positive voltage. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where ground should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is ground at the point being tested. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13268 Testing for a Short to Voltage Testing for a Short to Voltage Special Tools EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM) For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test Probe Caution). The following procedure tests for a short to voltage in a circuit. 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Set the rotary dial of the Digital Multimeter (DMM) to the V (DC) position. 4. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. Turn ON the ignition and operate all accessories. 7. If the voltage measured is greater than 1 V, there is a short to voltage in the circuit. Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions Special Tools J-25070 - Heat Gun For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Many intermittent open or shorted circuits are affected by harness/connector movement that is caused by vibration, engine torque, bumps/rough pavement, etc. In order to duplicate the customer's concern, it may be necessary to manipulate the wiring harness if the malfunction appears to be vibration related. Manipulation of a circuit can consist of a wide variety of actions, including: * Wiggling the harness * Disconnecting a connector and reconnecting * Stressing the mechanical connection of a connector * Pulling on the harness or wire in order to identify a separation/break inside the insulation * Relocating a harness or wires All these actions should be performed with some goal in mind. For instance, with a scan tool connected, wiggling the wires may uncover a faulty input to the control module. The snapshot option would be appropriate here. Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure). Another option is, with the component commanded ON and OFF by the scan tool, move related connectors and wiring and observe the component operation. With the engine running, move related connectors and wiring while monitoring engine operation. If harness or connector movement affects the data displayed, component/system operation, or engine operation, inspect and repair the harness/connections as necessary. You may need to load the vehicle in order to duplicate the concern. This may require the use of weights, floor jacks, jackstands, frame machines, etc. In these cases you are attempting to duplicate the concern by manipulating the suspension or frame. This method is useful in finding harnesses that are too short and their connectors pull apart enough to cause a poor connection. A DMM set to Peak Min/Max mode and connected to the suspect circuit while testing can yield desirable results. Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Electrical Intermittents). Certainly, using the senses of sight, smell, and hearing while manipulating the circuit can provide good results as well. There may be instances where circuit manipulation alone will not meet the required criteria for the fault condition to appear. In such cases it may be necessary to expose the suspect circuit to other conditions while manipulating the harness. Such conditions would include high moisture conditions, along with exceptionally high or low temperatures. The following discusses how to expose the circuit to these kinds of conditions. Salt Water Spray Some compounds possess the ability to conduct electricity when dissolved in water such as ordinary salt. By mixing table salt with water in sufficient Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13269 quantities, you can enhance the conductive properties of water so that any circuit which may be sensitive to moisture will more readily fail when liberally sprayed with this mixture. Mixing 0.35L (12 oz) of water with approximately 1 tablespoon of salt will yield a salt solution of 5 percent. Fill a normal spray bottle with this mixture. This mixture is sufficient to enhance the water's own conductivity. This may cause the circuit to fail more easily when sprayed. Once the mixture is completed, spray the suspect area liberally with the solution. Then, while monitoring either a scan tool or DMM, manipulate the harness as discussed previously. High Temperature Conditions If the complaint tends to be heat related, you can simulate the condition using the J-25070 - heat gun. Using the heat gun, you can heat up the suspected area or component. Manipulate the harnesses under high temperature conditions while monitoring the scan tool or DMM to locate the fault condition. The high temperature condition may be achieved simply by test driving the vehicle at normal operating temperature. If a heat gun is unavailable, consider this option to enhance your diagnosis. This option does not allow for the same control, however. Low Temperature Conditions Depending on the nature of the fault condition, placing a fan in front of the vehicle while the vehicle is in the shade can have the desired effect. If this is unsuccessful, use local cooling treatments such as ice or a venturi type nozzle (one that provides hot or cold air). This type of tool is capable of producing air stream temperatures down to -18°C (0°F) from one end and +71°C (160°F) from the other. This is ideally suited for localized cooling needs. Once the vehicle, component, or harness has been sufficiently cooled, manipulate the harness or components in an effort to duplicate the concern. Duplicating Failure Conditions * If none of the previous tests are successful, attempt to duplicate and/or capture the failure conditions. * Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, where applicable, contains the conditions that were present when the DTC set. 1. Review and record Freeze Frame/Failure Records data. 2. Clear the DTCs using the scan tool. 3. Turn the key to OFF and wait 15 seconds. 4. Operate the vehicle under the same conditions that were noted in Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, as closely as possible. The vehicle must also be operating within the Conditions for Running the DTC. Refer to Conditions for Running the DTC in the supporting text if a DTC is being diagnosed. 5. Monitor DTC Status for the DTC being tested. The scan tool will indicate Ran, when the enabling conditions have been satisfied long enough for the DTC to run. The scan tool will also indicate whether the DTC passed or failed. * An alternate method is to drive the vehicle with the DMM connected to a suspected circuit. An abnormal reading on the DMM when the concern occurs, may help you locate the concern. Measuring Frequency Measuring Frequency Special Tools EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM) For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test Probe Caution). The following procedure determines the frequency of a signal. Note: Connecting the Digital Multimeter (DMM) to the circuit before pressing the Hz button will allow the DMM to autorange to an appropriate range. 1. Apply power to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (AC) position. 3. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13270 5. Press the Hz button on the DMM. 6. The DMM will display the frequency measured. Measuring Voltage Measuring Voltage Special Tools EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM) For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test Probe Caution). The following procedure measures the voltage at a selected point in a circuit. 1. Disconnect the electrical harness connector for the circuit being tested, if necessary. 2. Enable the circuit and/or system being tested. Use the following methods: * Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. * Turn ON the engine. * Turn ON the circuit and/or system with a scan tool in Output Controls. * Turn ON the switch for the circuit and/or system being tested. 3. Select the V (AC) or V (DC) position on the Digital Multimeter (DMM). 4. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the point of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. The DMM displays the voltage measured at that point. Measuring Voltage Drop Measuring Voltage Drop Special Tools EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM) For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test Probe Caution). The following procedure determines the difference in voltage potential between 2 points. 1. Set the rotary dial of the Digital Multimeter (DMM) to the V (DC) position. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13271 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to one point of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to the other point of the circuit. 4. Operate the circuit. 5. The DMM displays the difference in voltage between the 2 points. Probing Electrical Connectors Probing Electrical Connectors Note: Always be sure to reinstall the connector position assurance (CPA) and terminal position assurance (TPA) when reconnecting connectors or replacing terminals. Front probe Disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the mating side (front) of the connector. Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test Probe Caution). Note: When probing female 0.64 terminals, it is important to use the correct adapter. There have been some revisions to the test adapter for 0.64 terminals. The proper adapter for 0.64 terminals is the EL-35616-64B which has a gold terminal and a black wire between the base and tip. Failure to use the proper test adapter may result in damage to the terminal being tested and improper diagnosis. Note: The proper adapter for probing the terminals for fuses, relays, or diodes in an electrical center is EL-35616-35. Using any other tool or adapter may damage the terminal being tested. Refer to the following table as a guide in selecting the correct test adapter for front probing connectors: Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13272 Backprobe Note: * Backprobe connector terminals only when specifically required in diagnostic procedures. * Do not backprobe a sealed (Weather Pack(R)) connector, less than a 280 series Metri-Pack connector, a Micro-Pack connector, or a flat wire (dock and lock) connector. * Backprobing can be a source of damage to connector terminals. Use care in order to avoid deforming the terminal, either by forcing the test probe too far into the cavity or by using too large of a test probe. * After backprobing any connector, inspect for terminal damage. If terminal damage is suspected, test for proper terminal contact. Do not disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the harness side (back) of the connector. Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure Using Snapshots in Global Diagnostic System (GDS) Overview Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13273 A snapshot is a recording of what a control module on the vehicle was receiving for information while the snapshot is being made. A snapshot may be used to analyze the data during the time a vehicle condition is current. This allows you to concentrate on making the condition occur, rather than trying to view all the data in anticipation of the fault. To record a snapshot in GDS, select, Record Snapshot, from the options at the top right portion of any of the various pages that allow snapshots to be taken (e.g. Data Display, Control Functions, etc.). When you are finished recording, select, Stop Snapshot recording. The snapshot will now be available for replay. Snapshot Replay The Snapshot Replay function allows reviews of previously recorded vehicle snapshot data. This information can be used in analysis of vehicle problems and detection of trigger error conditions. The graph function can be used to compare parameters to see if a component is functioning properly. Recorded snapshots can be selected for viewing by the following three methods: * Selecting a snapshot file from the Vehicle Home Page and clicking on the Review selection. * Double clicking on the selected snapshot from the Vehicle Home Page. * Entering the Tools selection from the Menu selection and selecting Snapshot replay. Next, open the Snapshot Manager. Double click on the snapshot file you wish to view or click on the Load Snapshot selection and select a snapshot file. Regardless of selection method, a File Loaded pop-up window will be displayed from the Snapshot Replay screen. Select OK from the pop-up window. Snapshot Play Functions There are several snapshot play functions that are used to replay recorded snapshots * The Play function is used to play the snapshot forward by clicking on this selection. A marker will move across the screen when this selection is used. All selections in this area turn grey when they are active. * The Pause function is used to pause play of the snapshot. When this selection is clicked a second time the snapshot will start playing where it left off. * The Stop function is used to stop playing the snapshot. The snapshot will start from the beginning, if Play is selected after using the Stop function. Time Control Time control is used to control the snapshot replay. This function allows selection of a specific time frame, display of different views, and control of display speed. The following functions can be selected directly under Time Control. * The Bookmark selection allows you to add a specific comment in the current display and return to this point in the future. When this option is selected, a pop-up window is displayed. Enter a bookmark name and select OK. * The Note Pad can be selected to add comments to the snapshot replay file at the current point of time. When this option is selected, a pop-up window is displayed. Enter a comment for the snapshot file and select OK. * The Load Snapshot (blue folder) opens a snapshot file and makes it ready for further analysis. This function is also available by clicking on an available snapshot file from the Snapshot Manager. * The Down Arrow displays all Time Control options when selected. Individual options can also be selected by clicking on the item you want. * The Snapshot Display Speed can be controlled by selecting this option. Slow speeds of 1/8X, 1/4X, and 1/2X can be selected. The real time speed can also be selected at 1. Faster speeds of 2X, 4X, and 8X can also be obtained by using this selection. View Selections Each View Selection provides a different way of displaying vehicle data for analysis. The following functions can be selected under Available Views: Note: The parameter name will be shown in the original language used for capture if no translation is available for the name. * Parameter List View - Displays incoming information from the snapshot file. The current value of the parameters is displayed on the screen. * Log View - Contains all the information from the snapshot file. All parameter values are listed in the order they were recorded. Specific parameters can be added or removed from a watchlist by clicking on the appropriate item. * State View - Shows the values of all parameters in a specific time frame. These values can be used for comparison with the trigger view. * Trigger View - Displays all system and user defined triggers. This function can be used when there is a combination of factors involved in a diagnostic problem. When a Trigger condition is met a caution triangle will be displayed on the screen. Triggers: * Load Triggers - Allows you to load a file containing trigger definitions. * Save Triggers - Allows you to save the trigger to your computer's hard drive. * Remove Trigger - Allows you to remove the current trigger. It will no longer be present. * Edit Trigger - Displays a pop-up window where you can modify the limits and parameters contained within a trigger. * Adds Trigger - Displays a pop-up window to configure a trigger. * DTC View - After the Play function is selected and this option is selected this function opens the list of recorded DTCs. * Line Graph View - Displays data that can be visualized against the time-axis. From this view, specific parameters can be selected for graphing by Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13274 checking the box under Selected. At the bottom of the graph there are four functions Zoom In (increase size), Zoom Out (decrease size), Bookmarks, and Pause Scrolling. Each of these functions can be accessed by clicking on them. Testing for Continuity Testing for Continuity Special Tools EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM) For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test Probe Caution). The following procedures verify good continuity in a circuit. With a Digital Multimeter (DMM) 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the Ohms position. 2. Disconnect the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 3. Disconnect the load. 4. Press the MIN MAX button on the DMM. 5. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 6. Connect the other lead of the DMM to the other end of the circuit. 7. If the DMM displays low or no resistance, the circuit has good continuity. With a Test Lamp Note: Only use the test lamp procedure on low impedance power and ground circuits. 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect one lead of the test lamp to one end of the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 5. Connect the other end of the circuit to ground. 6. If the test lamp illuminates (full intensity), then the circuit has good continuity. Testing for Electrical Intermittents Testing for Electrical Intermittents Special Tools EL-39200 Digital Multimeter For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Perform the following procedures while wiggling the harness from side to side. Continue this at convenient points (about 6 inches apart) while watching the test equipment. * Testing for Short to Ground (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Short to Ground) * Testing for Continuity (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Continuity) * Testing for a Short to Voltage (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for a Short to Voltage) If the fault is not identified, perform the procedure below using the MIN MAX feature on the EL-39200 DMM. This feature allows you to manipulate the circuit without having to watch the EL-39200. The EL-39200 will generate an audible tone when a change is detected. Note: The EL-39200 must be used in order to perform the following procedure since the EL-39200 can monitor current, resistance or voltage while recording the minimum (MIN), and maximum (MAX) values measured. 1. Connect the EL-39200 to both sides of a suspected connector (still connected), or from one end of a suspected circuit to the other. Refer to Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13275 Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter) for information on connecting the EL-39200 to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the EL-39200 to the V (AC) or V (DC) position. 3. Press the range button of the EL-39200 in order to select the desired voltage range. 4. Press the MIN MAX button of the EL-39200. The EL-39200 displays 100 ms RECORD and emits an audible tone (beep). Note: The 100 ms RECORD mode is the length of time an input must stay at a new value in order to record the full change. 5. Simulate the condition that is potentially causing the intermittent connection, either by wiggling the connections or the wiring, test driving, or performing other operations. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions). 6. Listen for the audible Min Max Alert which indicates that a new minimum or maximum value has been recorded. 7. Press the MIN MAX button once in order to display the MAX value and note the value. 8. Press the MIN MAX button again in order to display the MIN value and note the value. 9. Determine the difference between the MIN and MAX values. * If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is 1 V or greater an intermittent open or high resistance condition exists. Repair the condition as necessary. * If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is less than 1 V, an intermittent open or high resistance condition does not exist. Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections Special Tools EL-35616 Terminal Test Probe Kit For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). When the condition is not currently present, but is indicated in DTC history, the cause may be intermittent. An intermittent may also be the cause when there is a customer complaint, but the symptom cannot be duplicated. Refer to the Symptom Table of the system that is suspect of causing the condition before trying to locate an intermittent condition. Most intermittent conditions are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. Inspect for the following items: * Wiring broken inside the insulation * Poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector * Poor terminal to wire connection-Some conditions which fall under this description are poor crimps, poor solder joints, crimping over the wire insulation rather than the wire itself, and corrosion in the wire to terminal contact area, etc. * Pierced or damaged insulation can allow moisture to enter the wiring causing corrosion. The conductor can corrode inside the insulation, with little visible evidence. Look for swollen and stiff sections of wire in the suspect circuits. * Wiring which has been pinched, cut, or its insulation rubbed through may cause an intermittent open or short as the bare area touches other wiring or parts of the vehicle. * Wiring that comes in contact with hot or exhaust components * Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions) in order to duplicate the conditions required, in order to verify the customer concern. * Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Electrical Intermittents) for test procedures to detect intermittent open, high resistance, short to ground, and short to voltage conditions. * Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure) for advanced intermittent diagnosis and Vehicle Data Recorder operation. Testing for Terminal Fretting Some intermittent conditions can be caused by wire terminal fretting corrosion. Fretting corrosion is a build-up of insulating, oxidized wear debris that can form when there is a small motion between electrical contacts. The oxidized wear debris can pile up enough at the electrical contact spots that the electrical resistance across the connection increases. Movement between the contacting surfaces as small as 10 to 100 microns can cause fretting. To put this in perspective, a sheet of paper is about 100 microns thick, so fretting motion is small and hard to see. Vibration and thermal expansion/contraction are the main sources that create fretting motion. Since vehicles vibrate and can experience large temperature swings, they are a good source for fretting motion. Tin, copper, nickel, and iron surfaces are all susceptible to fretting corrosion. Fretting corrosion can be difficult to see but it looks like small, dark smudges on the terminals contact surface. To correct a fretting condition disconnect the suspect connector and add Nyogel lubricant 760G (dielectric grease) to both sides of the connector Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13276 terminals. Then reconnect the connector and wipe away any excess lubricant. This will correct the additional terminal contact resistance due to the terminal fretting corrosion. Testing for Proper Terminal Contact It is important to test terminal contact at the component and any inline connectors before replacing a suspect component. Mating terminals must be inspected to ensure good terminal contact. A poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector may be the result of contamination or deformation. Contamination may be caused by the connector halves being improperly connected. A missing or damaged connector seal, damage to the connector itself, or exposing the terminals to moisture and dirt can also cause contamination. Contamination, usually in the underhood or underbody connectors, leads to terminal corrosion, causing an open circuit or intermittently open circuit. Deformation is caused by probing the mating side of a connector terminal without the proper adapter. Always use the EL-35616 when probing connectors. Other causes of terminal deformation are improperly joining the connector halves, or repeatedly separating and joining the connector halves. Deformation, usually to the female terminal contact tang, can result in poor terminal contact causing an open or intermittently open circuit. Testing for Proper Terminal Contact in Bussed Electrical Centers It is very important to use the correct test adapter when testing for proper terminal contact of fuses and relays in a bussed electrical center. Use EL-35616-35 to test for proper terminal contact. Failure to use EL-35616-35 can result in improper diagnosis of the bussed electrical center. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact: 1. Separate the connector halves. 2. Visually inspect the connector halves for contamination. Contamination may result in a white or green build-up within the connector body or between terminals. This causes high terminal resistance, intermittent contact, or an open circuit. An underhood or underbody connector that shows signs of contamination should be replaced in its entirety: terminals, seals, and connector body. 3. Using an equivalent male terminal / terminated lead, verify that the retention force is significantly different between a known good terminal and the suspect terminal. Replace the female terminal in question. Flat Wire (Dock and Lock) Connectors There are no serviceable parts for flat wire (dock and lock) connectors on the harness side or the component side. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact: 1. Remove the component in question. 2. Visually inspect each side of the connector for signs of contamination. Avoid touching either side of the connector as oil from your skin may be a source of contamination as well. 3. Visually inspect the terminal bearing surfaces of the flat wire circuits for splits, cracks, or other imperfections that could cause poor terminal contact. Visually inspect the component side connector to ensure that all of the terminals are uniform and free of damage or deformation. 4. Insert the appropriate adapter from the on the flat wire harness connector in order to test the circuit in question. Control Module/Component Voltage and Grounds Poor voltage or ground connections can cause widely varying symptoms. * Test all control module voltage supply circuits. Many vehicles have multiple circuits supplying voltage to a control module. Other components in the system may have separate voltage supply circuits that may also need to be tested. Inspect connections at the module/component connectors, fuses, and any intermediate connections between the voltage source and the module/component. A test lamp or a DMM may indicate that voltage is present, but neither tests the ability of the circuit to carry sufficient current. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. Refer to Circuit Testing (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Circuit Testing) and Power Distribution Schematics (See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Starting and Charging/Power and Ground Distribution/System Diagram/Power Distribution Schematics). * Test all control module ground and system ground circuits. The control module may have multiple ground circuits. Other components in the system may have separate grounds that may also need to be tested. Inspect grounds for clean and tight connections at the grounding point. Inspect the connections at the component and in splice packs, where applicable. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. Refer to Circuit Testing (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Circuit Testing) and Ground Distribution Schematics (See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Starting and Charging/Power and Ground Distribution/System Diagram/Ground Distribution Schematics). Temperature Sensitivity * An intermittent condition may occur when a component/connection reaches normal operating temperature. The condition may occur only when the component/connection is cold, or only when the component/connection is hot. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13277 * Freeze Frame, Failure Records, Snapshot, or Vehicle Data Recorder data may help with this type of intermittent condition, where applicable. * If the intermittent is related to heat, review the data for a relationship with the following: - High ambient temperatures - Underhood/engine generated heat - Circuit generated heat due to a poor connection, or high electrical load - Higher than normal load conditions, towing, etc. * If the intermittent is related to cold, review the data for the following: - Low ambient temperatures-In extremely low temperatures, ice may form in a connection or component. Inspect for water intrusion. - The condition only occurs on a cold start. - The condition goes away when the vehicle warms up. * Information from the customer may help to determine if the trouble follows a pattern that is temperature related. * If temperature is suspected of causing an intermittent fault condition, attempt to duplicate the condition. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions) in order to duplicate the conditions required. Electromagnetic Interference and Electrical Noise Some electrical components/circuits are sensitive to electromagnetic interference or other types of electrical noise. Inspect for the following conditions: * A misrouted harness that is too close to high voltage/high current devices such as secondary ignition components, motors, generator etc.-These components may induce electrical noise on a circuit that could interfere with normal circuit operation. * Electrical system interference caused by a malfunctioning relay, or a control module driven solenoid or switch-These conditions can cause a sharp electrical surge. Normally, the condition will occur when the malfunctioning component is operating. * Improper installation of non-factory or aftermarket add on accessories such as lights, 2-way radios, amplifiers, electric motors, remote starters, alarm systems, cell phones, etc.-These accessories may lead to interference while in use, but do not fail when the accessories are not in use. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Checking Aftermarket Accessories). * Test for an open diode across the A/C compressor clutch and for other open diodes. Some relays may contain a clamping diode. * The generator may be allowing AC noise into the electrical system. Incorrect Control Module * There are only a few situations where reprogramming a control module is appropriate: - A new service control module is installed. - A control module from another vehicle is installed. - Revised software/calibration files have been released for this vehicle. Note: DO NOT re-program the control module with the SAME software/calibration files that are already present in the control module. This is not an effective repair for any type of concern. * Verify that the control module contains the correct software/calibration. If incorrect programming is found, reprogram the control module with the most current software/calibration. Refer to Control Module References (See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning) for replacement, setup, and programming. Testing for Short to Ground Testing for Short to Ground Special Tools * EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM) * EL 35616-200 - Test Light-Probe Kit For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test Probe Caution). The following procedures test for a short to ground in a circuit. With a Digital Multimeter (DMM) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13278 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the Ohms position. 4. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the other lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. If the DMM does NOT display infinite resistance (OL), there is a short to ground in the circuit. With a Test Lamp 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect one lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to one end of the circuit to be tested. 5. If the test lamp illuminates, there is a short to ground in the circuit. Fuse Powering Several Loads 1. Review the system schematic and locate the fuse that is open. 2. Open the first connector or switch leading from the fuse to each load. 3. Connect a DMM across the fuse terminals (be sure that the fuse is powered). * When the DMM displays voltage the short is in the wiring leading to the first connector or switch. * If the DMM does not display voltage refer to the next step. 4. Close each connector or switch until the DMM displays voltage in order to find which circuit is shorted. Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter Special Tools EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM) For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Caution: Refer to Test Probe Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Test Probe Caution). Digital Multimeter (DMM) Basic Requirements Service information is validated using digital multimeters that meet or exceed the following requirements. Using a multimeter that does not meet these basic requirements may give inaccurate readings which could lead to an incorrect diagnosis. Display and Settings 1. Four digits displayed 2. Voltage, amperage, resistance, frequency, diode test settings, and min-max function 3. Display positive and negative values Voltage 1. Have at least 10 Mohm input impedance 2. Test a DC voltage range of 0.1-1000 V. 3. Test an AC voltage range of 0.1-1000 V. Amperage 1. Test a DC amperage range of 0.1µA-10 A. 2. Test an AC amperage range of 0.1µA-10 A. Resistance Test a resistance range of 0.1 ohm-40 Mohm and displays infinite for a value greater than 40 Mohm (O.L. (Over-load)) Frequency Test for a frequency range of 0.5 HZ-199 K HZ Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13279 Diode Test 1. Apply at least 1 mA when performing the diode bias test 2. Display the break over voltage drop (0-3 V) of a forward biased diode 3. Display infinite (O.L. (Over-load)) when a diode is reverse biased Min-Max Readings 1. Can update at a 1 ms sample rate 2. Saves and displays minimum and maximum values Note: Circuits which include any solid state control modules, such as the engine control module (ECM), should only be tested with a 10 MOhms or higher impedance digital multimeter such as the EL-39200. The EL-39200 instruction manual is a good source of information and should be read thoroughly upon receipt of the DMM as well as kept on hand for future reference. A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present if the impedance is low enough, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. In other words, if there is not enough current, the test lamp will not illuminate even though voltage is present. The ohmmeter function on a DMM shows how much resistance exists between 2 points along a circuit. Low resistance in a circuit means good continuity. Note: Disconnect the power feed from the suspect circuit when measuring resistance with a DMM. This prevents incorrect readings. DMMs apply such a small voltage to measure resistance that the presence of voltages can upset a resistance reading. Diodes and solid state components in a circuit can cause a DMM to display a false reading. To find out if a component is affecting a measurement take a reading once, then reverse the leads and take a second reading. If the readings differ the solid state component is affecting the measurement. Following are examples of the various methods of connecting the DMM to the circuit to be tested: * Probe both ends of the connector and either hold the leads in place while manipulating the connector or tape the leads to the harness for continuous monitoring while you perform other operations or test driving. Refer to Probing Electrical Connectors (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Probing Electrical Connectors). * Disconnect the harness at both ends of the suspected circuit where it connects either to a component or to other harnesses. * If the system that is being diagnosed has a specified pinout or breakout box, it may be used in order to simplify connecting the DMM to the circuit or for testing multiple circuits quickly. Using Connector Test Adapters Using Connector Test Adapters Special Tools EL 35616 - Terminal Test Probe Kit For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Caution: Do not insert test equipment probes (DMM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the EL-38125-580 GM Approved Terminal Release Tool Kit in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the EL-38125-580 GM Approved Terminal Release Tool Kit , ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the EL-38125-580 GM Approved Terminal Release Tool Kit label on the inside of the EL-38125-580 GM Approved Terminal Release Tool Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Using Fused Jumper Wires Using Fused Jumper Wires Special Tools J 36169-A Fused Jumper Wire Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13280 Note: A fused jumper may not protect solid state components from being damaged. The J 36169-A includes small clamp connectors that provide adaptation to most connectors without damage. This fused jumper wire is supplied with a 20-A fuse which may not be suitable for some circuits. Do not use a fuse with a higher rating than the fuse that protects the circuit being tested. AFL/EPC Connectors AFL/EPC Connectors Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. 1. For connectors with a bolt in the dress cover, turn the bolt counterclockwise to remove the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13281 2. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the top of the wire dress cover. Slide the CPA forward. 3. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13282 View showing depressing of the lever lock release tab. View of connector in released position. 4. Disconnect the connector from the component. 5. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the dress cover. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs and remove the dress cover. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13283 6. Release the rear lower half of the wiredress cover. 7. Release the tabs that are holding the wiredress cover to the connector body. 8. Remove the nose piece by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the slots on both ends of the connector body. Gently pry the nose piece out of the connector. J 38125-216 can also be used to remove the nose piece. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13284 9. Use the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by lifting the terminal retaining tabs on the inside of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Bosch Connectors (BSK) Bosch Connectors (BSK) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13285 Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 3. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 4. Insert the J 38125-561 tool into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 5. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Bosch Connectors (ECM) Bosch Connectors (ECM) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13286 1. Locate the assist lever on the top of the connector. Move the assist lever to the forward position. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13287 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the connector. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the locking tabs and remove the dress cover. 4. The terminal positive assurance (TPA) is located in the front of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13288 5. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove TPA from the connector. 6. Use the J 38125-213 or the J 38125-556 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13289 Note: Ensure that the dress cover and connector body are both in the released position before reassembling. Failure to do so may cause damage to the connector and component. Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Bosch Connectors (0.64) Bosch Connectors (0.64) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While pressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock until the lever is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Pull the rubber boot that covers the wires back to expose the end of the connector dress cover. 4. Place the connector locking lever in the center of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13290 5. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs that are on the wire end of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover and connector body and pry up. 6. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs located on the opposite side of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover at the connector end and pry up. 7. Remove the dress cover. 8. Cut the tie wrap on the wire bundle. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13291 9. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting a small flat-bladed tool into the small slot in the end of the slider and pushing on the TPA until it comes out of the connector. When the TPA exits the opposite side of the connector, gasp the TPA and pull it completely out of the connector. 10. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 11. Insert the J 38125-560 into the 2 triangular cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 12. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Terminal Replacement Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13292 1. Prior to installation the terminal must be aligned so the (1) coding lugs align with the (2) coding grooves on the connector. 2. Once the terminal is aligned, slide the terminal into the cavity until the retainer has engaged in the cavity of the connector. 3. Slide the TPA in the connector body and seat it using a small flat bladed tool. The TPA is seated when it is flush with the contact housing. 4. Secure the wires to the connector body using a tie wrap and replace the dress cover and grommet. Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Pull out the slider on the connector position assurance (CPA) until it is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13293 5. Insert the J 38125-557 into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Connector Position Assurance Locks Connector Position Assurance Locks The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of the connector. CPAs are used in various connectors throughout the vehicle. CPAs are also used in all SIR system electrical connectors. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals, of the connector. Connector Repairs Connector Repairs Connector Repairs contains a list of all connector repairs. The connector repairs are listed by the connector manufacturer and then by connector type. If the technician cannot identify the manufacturer of the connector, refer to Identifying Connectors below. Knowing the connector manufacturer will assist in finding the correct connector repair from the following list: * Connector Position Assurance Locks (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Connector Position Assurance Locks) * Terminal Position Assurance Locks (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Terminal Position Assurance Locks) * AFL/EPC Connectors (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/AFL/EPC Connectors) * Bosch Connectors (BSK) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Bosch Connectors (BSK))Bosch Connectors (0.64) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Bosch Connectors (0.64))Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT))Bosch Connectors (ECM) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Bosch Connectors (ECM)) * Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack))Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Push to Seat))Delphi Connectors Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13294 (Pull To Seat) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Pull to Seat))Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W))Delphi Connectors (Micro.64) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Micro .64))Delphi Connectors (12-Way) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (12-Way))Delphi Connectors (Steering Gear) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Steering Gear)) * FCI Connectors (Lever Lock) (See: General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/FCI Connectors (Lever Lock))FCI Connectors (SIR) (See: General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/FCI (SIR)) * FEP Connectors (Steering Gear) (See: General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/FEP Connectors (Steering Gear)) * JST Connectors (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/JST Connectors) * Kostal Connectors (Glow Plug Control Module) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Kostal Connectors (Glow Plug Control Module))Kostal Connectors (Transmission) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Kostal Connectors (Transmission)) * Molex Connectors (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Molex Connectors) * Sumitomo Connectors (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Sumitomo Connectors) * Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way))Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor))Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap))Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way))Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module)) * Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Yazaki Connectors (2-Way))Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Yazaki Connectors (16-Way)) * Repairing Connector Terminals (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Repairing Connector Terminals) Connector Anatomy 1 - Connector Positive Assurance (CPA) 2 - Assist Lever 3 - Wiredress Cover 4 - Seal Strain/Relief Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13295 5 - Slide Left Hand 6 - Slide Right Hand 7 - Terminal Positive Assurance (TPA) 8 - Terminal Positive Assurance (TPA) 9 - Connector Seal 10 - Connector Housing 11 - Inner Connector Identifying Connectors Knowing the connector manufacturer is helpful when trying to locating the correct connector repair procedure. There are many different connector designs used on GM vehicles and it is sometimes difficult to identify the connector manufacturer. The information in this document should help with the identification of connector manufactures. The following connector manufacturers make most of the connectors found in GM vehicles: * AFL/EPC (Alcoa Fujikura Ltd./Engineered Plastics Components) * Bosch * Delphi * FCI (Framatome Connectors International) * JAE (Japan Aviation Electronics) * JST (Japan Solderless Terminals) * Kostel * Molex * Sumitomo * Tyco/AMP * Yazaki Identifying the manufacturer of a connector is often difficult. When trying to determine the manufacturer of a connector, look for specific identifying marks that are unique to that connector supplier. Most of these identify marks are hard to find or see. Check the connector carefully and refer to the information below for pictures and descriptions of connector identification markings. * Most of AFLs connectors have EPC on their connector body. Some of the smaller connectors will not have any markings on them. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13296 * In some cases Bosch will actually be printed on the connector. If Bosch does not appear on the connector, look for the Bosch logo. The Bosch logo is a circle with a blunted arrow inside. This logo can appear anywhere on the connector and is often very small. * In some cases Delphi will actually be printed on the connector. If Delphi is not printed on the connector, look for PED. In both cases there is no specific orientation for Delphi or PED and they can appear anywhere on the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13297 * FCI connectors may have the FCI logo on their connectors. The logo is the letters FCI with an "A" above it. * JAE connector have JAE in small letters on their connectors. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13298 * JST connectors have JST in small letters on their connectors, similar to that above. The location of the logo will vary with the connector size and style. * Kostel has an "LK" with a circle around it. These connector are usually used as a transmissions connection. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13299 * Most Molex connectors will have the Molex logo on the dresscover of the connector. In some cases the connectors may have MX followed by another letter. The third letter indicates where the connector was made. A connector with MXD is a Molex connector made in Detroit. Sumitomo has a unique symbol on their connector and possibly a part number. The symbol is similar to that of a diamond lying on its side, similar to that shown. The logo could appear anywhere but the most common place is at the wire side of the housing. * Tyco/AMP has many different and unique connector designs. Some may or may not have identifiable marks on them. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13300 * Yazaki has a wedge or arrow shape, similar to that shown. Delphi Connectors (Push to Seat) Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Follow the steps below in order to repair push to seat connectors. 1. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device, the connector position assurance (CPA) device, and/or the secondary lock. 2. Separate the connector halves (1). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13301 3. Use the proper pick or removal tool (1) in order to release the terminal. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 4. Gently pull the cable and the terminal (2) out of the back of the connector. 5. Re-form the locking device if you are going to reuse the terminal (1). 6. To repair the terminal, refer to Terminal Repair. Terminal Repair 1. Slip the cable seal away from the terminal. 2. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 3. Slip a new cable seal onto the wire. 4. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 5. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 6. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. 7. Slide the cable seal toward the terminal. 8. Crimp the cable seal and the insulation. 9. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply grease to the connector. Reinstalling Terminal 1. In order to reuse a terminal or lead assembly, refer to Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Wiring Repairs). 2. Ensure that the cable seal is kept on the terminal side of the splice. 3. Insert the lead from the back until it catches. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Terminated Lead Repair 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Find the appropriate terminated lead. 3. Use the appropriate splice sleeves depending on the gauge size. 4. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves). Delphi Connectors (Pull to Seat) Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) Special Tools Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13302 J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal If the terminal is visibly damaged or is suspected of having a faulty connection, the terminal should be replaced. Follow the steps below in order to repair pull-to-seat connectors: 1. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) device and/or the secondary lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component or separate the connectors for in-line connectors. 3. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device. 4. Insert the proper pick or removal tool into the front of the connector body. Note: On connectors with more than one terminal the service loop may not be large enough to remove the terminal and crimp on a new one. If the terminal wire does not have a large enough service loop for removal, cut the wire 5 cm (2 in) behind the connector before removal. 5. Grasp the wire at the back of the connector body and gently push the terminal out the front of the connector body. Terminal Repair 1. If the wire needed to be cut in order to remove the terminal, gently push a small length of the same size wire through the back of the connector cavity until there is enough wire exposed in order to crimp on a new terminal. If the wire was not cut, cut the existing wire as close to the old terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 4. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. Terminal Installation 1. Align the terminal and pull the wire from the back of the connector in order to seat the terminal. 2. If necessary, cut the new wire to proper length and splice with existing circuit. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves). 3. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply dielectric grease to the connector. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Micro .64) Delphi Connectors (Micro.64) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13303 Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro.64 connectors. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. The lever lock may be located on the top or sides of the wire dress cover. View of a typical Micro 64 connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13304 Depress the lock and pull the lever over and past the lock. View of the connector when released from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13305 View of another type of Micro 64 connector. Depress the locks that are located on both sides of the wiredress cover and pull the lever over and past the locks. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13306 View of the connector when released from the component. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the front of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool push down on one of the locking tabs and pull the cover up until the dress cover releases. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. 4. Once the front 2 locks are unlocked, lift the front of the dress cover and pull it forward. Note: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 5. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the small slot on the TPA and pushing down until the TPA releases. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13307 Note: Be careful not to angle or rock the J 38125-21 tool when inserting it into the connector or the tool may break. 6. Insert the J 38125-21 tool into the round canal between the terminals cavities at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Follow the steps below in order to repair Micro 64 connector terminals. The Micro 64 connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-64 (M jaw) was developed to crimp Micro 64 terminals. The J 38125-64 crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. The J 38125-64 crimping tool is also designed to crimp both the wire and the insulation at the same time. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro 64 terminals. Note: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gauge wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 1. Cut the wire as close to the damaged terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13308 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert terminal into the appropriate terminal holder until it hits bottom and stops. The correct terminal holder is determined by the wire size. Also ensure that the terminals wings are pointing towards the former on the tool and the release locator. 5. Insert the stripped cable into the terminal. Insulation should be visible on both sides of the terminal insulation wings. 6. Compress the handles until the ratchet automatically releases. 7. Place the terminal into the appropriate cavity and assemble the connector. Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13309 Terminal Removal Procedure There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W connectors. These connectors are very similar but use different terminals and have some minor physical differences also. The first connector design of the Micro-Pack 100W (1) has a white connector interface that holds the terminals. The second design of the Micro-Pack 100W (2) has a gray interface to hold the terminals. Also, the first design has terminal cavities that are further apart (3 mm centerline) and offset from the other row of terminal cavities in the connector. The second design has terminals cavities that are closer together (2.54 mm centerline) and aligned vertically. One other way to identify the second design is the thin strip of material that runs along the outside of the cavities. Note: There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W terminals which are very similar. Ensure that you have the correct terminal before crimping the new terminal to the wire. The first design connector uses the longer terminal (1) that has a raised area in front of the recess in the terminal. The second design connector uses the shorter terminal without the raised area. Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro-Pack 100W connectors. Some Micro-Pack 100W connector disassembly procedures will vary. Use this procedure as a guide. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13310 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Locate the nose piece locking tabs that are positioned on the side of the connector nose piece. The connector nose piece acts as a terminal positive assurance (TPA) and may be referred to as such. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to push in one of the locking tabs while gently pulling on the same side of the nose piece. 4. Repeat the procedure for the other locking tab and remove the nose piece. 5. Remove the wire dress cover. The following is a general procedure for wire dress cover removal. Use this procedure as a guide, some dress cover removal procedures may vary. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13311 6. Use fingers to squeeze the 2 locking legs of the cover. 7. Apply pressure and gently rock the cover until one locking leg is unseated. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13312 8. Continue to apply pressure and rock the cover until the second locking leg is unseated. Repeat procedure for the other side of the dress cover and remove the cover. 9. Use J 38125-12A to gently lift the terminal retaining tab while gently pulling the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. If the terminal is severely bent or damaged, it may be possible on some connectors to push the wire out of the front of the connector instead of pulling it through. This will prevent damage to the internal seals of the connector. Once the terminal is pushed out of the connector, cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible and pull the wire through the connector. Terminal Repair Procedure The Micro-Pack 100W connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool was developed to crimp Micro-Pack 100W terminals. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro-Pack 100 terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13313 1. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. Note: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gauge wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert the terminal into the crimp tool until the core wings are flush with the anvil on the crimp tool. Be sure that the wings are pointed toward the crimp tool former and release the spring locator. The locator will hold the terminal in place. Inspect the alignment of the terminal wings with the crimp tool former. If the terminal wings are wider than the crimp tool former, remove the terminal and bend the terminal wings in slightly. 5. Place stripped wire into terminal. 6. Crimp the new terminal to the wire. If a jam occurs, press the emergency release to open applicator. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13314 Terminal Replacement Procedure After the terminal is crimped to the wire perform the following procedure in order to replace Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the Terminal Removal Procedure. Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The following is the proper procedure for the repair of Weather Pack(R) Connectors. 1. Separate the connector halves (1). 2. Open the secondary lock. A secondary lock aids in terminal retention and is usually molded to the connector (1). 3. Grasp the wire and push the terminal to the forward most position. Hold the wire in this position. 4. Insert the Weather Pack(R) terminal removal tool J 38125-10A into the front (mating end) of the connector cavity until it rests on the cavity shoulder (1). 5. Gently pull on the wire to remove the terminal through the back of the connector (2). Note: Never use force to remove a terminal from a connector. 6. Inspect the terminal and connector for damage. Repair as necessary. Refer to Repairing Connector Terminals (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Repairing Connector Terminals). 7. Reform the lock tang (2) and reset terminal in connector body. 8. Close secondary locks and join connector halves. 9. Verify that circuit is complete and working satisfactorily. 10. Perform system check. Delphi Connectors (12-Way) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13315 Delphi Connectors (12-Way) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) and slide the lever lock away from the connector body. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs on the dress cover of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool release all of the locking tabs. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13316 4. Release the lower wire dress cover locking tab. 5. Release the upper wire dress cover locking tab. 6. Once the locks are unlocked, lift the dress cover off. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13317 Note: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 7. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the locking tabs on both sides of the TPA. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. 8. Remove the nose piece by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the locking tabs on both sides of the nose piece. Gently pry the nose piece out of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13318 9. Insert the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Delphi Connectors (Steering Gear) Delphi Connectors (Steering Gear) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13319 Removal Procedure 1. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the locking tab on the connector. 2. Push down the locking tab to release the connector. The small flat-bladed tool may need to be pushed down and angled back slightly to depress the locking tab. Pull on the connector body while releasing the locking tab to disconnect the connector. FCI Connectors (Lever Lock) FCI Connectors (Lever Lock) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13320 Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. 1. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. 2. The release tab is located on the top of the wiredress cover. 3. View of connector in released position. 4. Disconnect the connector from the component. 5. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the dress cover. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs and remove the dress cover. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13321 6. Use a small flat-blade tool to slide the terminal position assurance (TPA) up one notch on both ends of the connector. The TPA is located underneath the wire dress cover. For the larger terminals insert the J 38125-556 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. For the smaller terminals insert the J 38125-560 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13322 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. FCI (SIR) FCI Connectors (SIR) Removal Procedure Note: The orange CPA must be released first to disconnect or to connect the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13323 1. Lift the orange CPA vertically (avoid lifting on an angle to the connector) approximately 4 mm to release the connector. Use a small flat-bladed tool to help release the orange CPA. The orange CPA can also be released manually without any tools. 2. Grab the connector on both sides and lift the connector vertically to disconnect the connector. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13324 1. Lift the orange CPA vertically approximately 4 mm before installing the connector. Use a small flat-bladed tool to help release the orange CPA. The orange CPA can also be released manually without any tools. 2. Line up the connector key tabs with the initiator key slots. Grab the connector on both sides and push the connector down into the initiator connector sub assembly until fully seated. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13325 3. After the connector is fully seated, push down the orange CPA with your thumb. Push down until the orange CPA is touching the yellow cover on the connector. FEP Connectors (Steering Gear) FEP Connectors (Steering Gear) Removal Procedure 1. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the locking tab on the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13326 2. Push down the locking tab to release the connector. The small flat-bladed tool may need to be pushed down and angled back slightly to depress the locking tab. Pull on the connector body while releasing the locking tab to disconnect the connector. JST Connectors JST Connectors Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. While depressing the lock, remove the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13327 2. Locate the two indents of the terminal position assurance (TPA) located on the bottom of the connector body. Note: The TPA cannot be removed from the connector while there are terminals present in the connector body. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to very carefully raise the TPA on both sides of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13328 4. View of the TPA when removed from the connector body. 5. Use the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the left side of the terminal release cavity as shown in the graphic. Use the tool to move the terminal release to the right with a gentle prying motion. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Kostal Connectors (Glow Plug Control Module) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13329 Kostal Connectors (Glow Plug Control Module) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure View of typical connector. View of connector in released position. 1. Locate the assist lever at the back of the connector. Move the assist lever to the rear position. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13330 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove the dress cover. 4. Slide the dress cover forward and off of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13331 5. The terminal positive assurance (TPA) is located in the front and rear of the connector. Note: The front TPA cannot be removed from the connector. Only move it to the preset position. 6. Use a small flat-blade tool to move the front TPA to the preset position, outboard approximately 0.125 in. (3 mm). 7. Use a small flat-blade tool to completely remove the rear TPA from the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13332 8. Use the J 38125-24 or the J 38125-560 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 9. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Kostal Connectors (Transmission) Kostal Connectors (Transmission) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13333 1. While depressing the lock, twist and remove the connector from the component. 2. Locate the terminal position assurance (TPA). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13334 Note: The TPA cannot be removed from the connector while there are terminals present in the connector body. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to push the TPA until it bottoms out. 4. Use the J 38125-28 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal cavity as shown in the graphic. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 5. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Terminal Replacement Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13335 After the terminal is crimped to the wire, perform the following procedure in order to replace the terminal. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. Locate the terminal position assurance (TPA). 4. Use a small flat-blade tool to push the TPA until it bottoms out. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13336 5. Ensure the TPA is fully seated. The TPA should be centered and flush with the connector body when viewed. Molex Connectors Molex Connectors Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the top of the wire dress cover. Slide the CPA forward. 2. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13337 3. The lever should be in the full forward position. 4. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13338 5. Remove the dress cover by using a flat bladed tool to release the dress cover locking tabs and lift up on the dress cover. 6. Cut the tie wrap that holds the wires to the connector body. 7. Use a small flat-blade tool to pry one side of the nose piece up to the pre-stage position. When the nose piece is in the pre-staged position, the nose piece will be raised above the connector body the length of the step in the nose piece. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13339 8. Use a small flat-blade tool to pry the other side of the piece to the pre-stage position. If the nose piece is higher than the first step in the nose piece, gently push down on the nose piece until it meets with resistance from the connector body, you should feel the nose piece click into position. 9. Insert the J 38125-213 into the small terminal release hole on the nose piece and gently pull on the back of the wire. 10. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Refer to the terminal crimping procedure in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit. Terminal Replacement Procedure After the terminal is crimped to the wire, perform the following procedure in order to replace the terminal. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13340 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the connector disassembly procedure. Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the connector body and pull the CPA out. The CPA is on the wire harness side of connector. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Use a small flat-bladed tool to gently pry off the dress cover by inserting the tool under the cover opposite the harness side and prying up. 4. Remove the cover. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13341 5. Using a small flat-bladed tool, push on the side of the nose piece retainer while pushing the nose piece forward with your thumb. This will release the terminal position assurance (TPA). 6. Insert the J 38125-12A into the corresponding terminal release cavity. The release cavities are the 2 center rows of cavities on one half of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13342 7. Pressing the J 38125-12A tool in the release cavity of the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and crimper in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. Slide the lever lock away from the connector body. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs on the dress cover of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool release all of the locking tabs. 4. Once the locks are unlocked, lift the dress cover off. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13343 Note: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 5. Release the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the blue locking tabs on both ends of the connector. Gently slide the TPA up to the released position on both ends. 6. For the larger terminals insert the J 38125-13A tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. For the smaller terminals insert the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13344 View of the release tool being used for the larger terminals. View of the release tool being used for the larger terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13345 View of the release tool being used for the smaller terminals. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13346 Side view of connector. View of top of connector. 1. Locate the assist lever and lock on the top of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13347 2. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. 3. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13348 4. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the rear of the connector. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. 5. Once the locking tabs are unlocked, slide the inner connector out of the rear of the connector housing. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13349 6. Use the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by pressing on the tang. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Repairing Connector Terminals Repairing Connector Terminals Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Use the following repair procedures in order to repair the following: * Push to Seat terminals * Pull to Seat terminals Some terminals do not require all of the steps shown. Skip the steps that do not apply for your terminal repair. The J-38125 contains further information. 1. Cut off the terminal between the core and the insulation crimp. Minimize any wire loss. For cable seal terminals, remove the seal. 2. Apply the correct cable seal per gauge size of the wire, if used. Slide the seal back along the wire in order to enable insulation removal. 3. Remove the insulation. 4. For sealed terminals only, align the seal with the end of the cable insulation. 5. Position the strip in the terminal. For sealed terminals, position the strip and seal in the terminal. 6. Hand crimp the core wings. 7. Hand crimp the insulation wings. For sealed terminals, hand crimp the insulation wings around the seal and the cable. 8. Solder all of the hand crimp terminals excepting Micro-Pack 100.64 size. Soldering Micro-Pack 100 World terminals may damage the terminal. Sumitomo Connectors Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13350 Sumitomo Connectors Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13351 3. Remove the dress cover by using a flat-blade tool to release the connector locking tabs and pulling off the dress cover. 4. Relieve the tension on the nose piece retainers by inserting J 38125-12A into the single retainer slot on the end of the nose piece and gently prying out the locking tab. Repeat the process for both of the nose piece locking tabs on the opposite side of the nose piece. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13352 5. Once the nose piece retainers are relaxed, use the J 38125-552 to pull up the nose piece by hooking the tool under the nose piece and pulling up. The nose piece should raise slightly. 6. On the opposite side of the nose piece, use the J 38125-552 to pull up the nose piece by hooking the tool under the nose piece and pulling up. The nose piece should release completely. If the nose piece does not come off, repeat the procedure on the opposite side. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13353 7. The illustration above identifies the entry canal where the terminal release tool will be inserted, and the terminal cavity. * Terminal (1) * Entry Canal (2) 8. Insert the J 38125-553 tool into the entry canal and pry up on the terminal retainer. The terminal retainer is a small plastic piece on the top of the terminal. The terminal retainer must be held up while the terminal is pulled out of the connector. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13354 9. The illustration shows a cutaway view of the connector to aid the technician in releasing the terminal retainer. 10. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Refer to the terminal crimping procedure in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit. Terminal Replacement Procedure After the terminal is crimped to the wire, perform the following procedure in order to replace the terminal. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the connector disassembly procedure. Terminal Position Assurance Locks Terminal Position Assurance Locks The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13355 2. Insert the J 38125-11A tool into the cavity on the lower right hand face of the connector until the terminal release tang access panel slides over. 3. Ensure that the terminal release tang access panel is in the correct location to access the terminals. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13356 5. Insert the J 38125-11A into the terminal release tang access slot located behind the access panel of the connector and press down on the terminal while carefully pulling the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component by pressing down on the connector position assurance (CPA). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13357 2. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting the tool in the small recess on the side of the connector and pushing up until the TPA releases from the connector body. The TPA should raise just slightly. Do not try to remove the TPA. Note: The TPA on this connector cannot be removed unless the terminals are removed first. The TPA will come out of the connector body, but only slightly. When the TPA is slightly raised the terminals can be removed. Using excessive force to remove the TPA with the terminals still in the connector will damage the connector. 3. Repeat the process for the other side of the connector. 4. Ensure that the TPA is in the proper position to remove the terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13358 5. While pushing the terminal forward, insert the J 38125-24 in the release cavity above the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13359 2. Insert a small flat-blade tool in the slot below the front loaded terminal position assurance (TPA) and pry up. 3. Remove the TPA by pulling it out of the connector. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-553 on a slight upward angle into the cavity below the terminal to be removed. Ensure that the pointed on the end of the tool is facing the bottom of the terminal and it stays in contact with the terminal until it stops on the plastic terminal retainer. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13360 6. Gently pry the plastic terminal retainer down and carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13361 1. While depressing the lock, pull the two connector halves apart. Note: The TPA is fragile and may break if not done carefully. 2. Use a small flat-blade tool to very carefully push the terminal position assurance (TPA) towards the face of the connector on both sides of the connector. 3. View of the male half of the connector with female terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13362 4. View of the female half of the connector with male terminals. 5. Use the J 38125-215 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. View of the female half of the connector with male terminals. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13363 7. View of the male half of the connector with female terminals. 8. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers A circuit breaker is a protective device that is designed to open the circuit when a current load is in excess of the rated breaker capacity. If there is a short or other type of overload condition in the circuit, the excessive current will open the circuit between the circuit breaker terminals. Two types of circuit breakers are used. Circuit Breaker - This type opens when excessive current passes through it for a period of time. It closes again after a few seconds, and if the cause of the high current is still present, it will open again. The circuit breaker will continue to cycle open and closed until the condition causing the high current is removed. Positive Temperature Coefficient (PTC) Circuit Breaker - This type greatly increases its resistance when excessive current passes through it. The excessive current heats the PTC device, as the device heats its resistance increases. Eventually the resistance gets so high that the circuit is effectively open. Unlike the ordinary circuit breaker the PTC unit will not reset until the circuit is opened, by removing the voltage from its terminals. Once the voltage is removed the circuit breaker will re-close within a second or 2. Circuit Protection - Fuses Circuit Protection - Fuses Special Tools EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM) For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13364 The fuse is the most common method of an automotive wiring circuit protection. Whenever there is an excessive amount of current flowing through a circuit the fusible element will melt and create an open or incomplete circuit. Fuses are a one time protection device and must be replaced each time the circuit is overloaded. To determine if a fuse is open, remove the suspected fuse and examine if the element in the fuse is broken (2). If not broken (1), also check for continuity using a Digital Multimeter (DMM) or a continuity tester. If the element is broken or continuity is suspect, replace the fuse with one of equal current rating. Circuit Protection - Fusible Links Circuit Protection - Fusible Links Special Tools EL 39200 - Digital Multimeter (DMM) For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Fusible link is wire designed to melt and break continuity when excessive current is applied. It is often located between or near the battery and starter or electrical center. Use a continuity tester or a Digital Multimeter (DMM) at each end of the wire containing the fusible link in order to determine if it is broken. If broken, it must be replaced with fusible link of the same gauge size. Repairing a Fusible Link Note: Fusible links cut longer than 225 mm (approximately 9 in) will not provide sufficient overload protection. Flat Wire Repairs Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13365 Flat Wire Repairs The flat wire within the flex wiring harness is not serviceable. If an open or short exists within the flex wiring harness the complete harness must be replaced. GMLAN Wiring Repairs GMLAN Wiring Repairs Special Tools * EL-38125-10 - Splice Sleeve Crimping Tool * J 38125-5 - Ultra Torch Special Tool * DuraSeal splice sleeves * A wire stripping tool For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: * A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. * A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The GM Local Area Network (GMLAN) System requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working on GMLAN connectors and terminals. GMLAN Repairs Note: When making a repair to any GMLAN network, the original wire length after the repair must be the same length as before the repair. If the network is a twisted pair, the twist must be maintained after the repair is completed. GMLAN has 2 types of networks, low speed and high speed. Low speed GMLAN has a single wire and works at slow speeds. High speed GMLAN has 2 wires in a twisted pair and works at higher speeds. For more information on GMLAN, refer to Data Link Communications Description and Operation ( See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Information Bus/Description and Operation). GMLAN Connector Terminal Repair Note: A terminated lead can be used to replace damaged connector terminals for both high speed and low speed GMLAN systems. When making a connector terminal repair on a GMLAN high speed system with twisted pair wires, do not untwist the wires more than necessary to make the repair. If the individual terminals are damaged on any GMLAN connection, use the appropriate connector repair procedure in order to repair the terminal. Refer to Connector Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Connector Repairs) for the appropriate connector repair procedure. GMLAN Wire Repair Note: Refer to Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Wiring Repairs) in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gauge size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and EL-38125-10 - tool. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the DuraSeal splice sleeves. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13366 Note: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: * Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. * Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. * Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert to regional wiring gauge size. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the EL-38125-10 - tool in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the splice sleeve crimp tool. The crimp tool has four nests, one for each color. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13367 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs Caution: Do not solder repairs under any circumstances as this could result in the air reference being obstructed. If the heated oxygen sensor pigtail wiring, connector, or terminal is damaged the entire oxygen sensor assembly must be replaced. Do not attempt to repair the wiring, connector, or terminals. In order for the sensor to function properly it must have a clean air reference. This clean air reference is obtained by way of the oxygen sensor signal and heater wires. Any attempt to repair the wires, connectors or terminals could result in the obstruction of the air reference and degrade oxygen sensor performance. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13368 The following guidelines should be used when servicing the heated oxygen sensor: * Do not apply contact cleaner or other materials to the sensor or vehicle harness connectors. These materials may get into the sensor, causing poor performance. Also, the sensor pigtail and harness wires must not be damaged in such a way that the wires inside are exposed. This could provide a path for foreign materials to enter the sensor and cause performance problems. * Neither the sensor nor vehicle lead wires should be bent sharply or kinked. Sharp bends, kinks, etc., could block the reference air path through the lead wire. * Do not remove or defeat the oxygen sensor ground wire (where applicable). Vehicles that utilize the ground wire sensor may rely on this ground as the only ground contact to the sensor. Removal of the ground wire will also cause poor engine performance. * To prevent damage due to water intrusion, be sure that the peripheral seal remains intact on the vehicle harness connector. High Temperature Wiring Repairs High Temperature Wiring Repairs Special Tools * EL-38125-10 - Splice Sleeve Crimping Tool * J 38125-5 - Ultra Torch * DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). High Temperature Wiring Wiring that is exposed to high temperatures, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time may use materials i.e. wires, connectors, and shielding that has a higher heat rating than typical wiring. When making a repair in a high temperature area observe the following: * Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature to replace any damaged wire. * Replace any heat shielding that is removed. * Cover any DuraSeal splice sleeves with SCT1 shrink tubing. * After making a wiring repair, ensure that the location of the wiring is not moved closer to the heat source. Identifying High Temperature Wiring Wiring that is exposed to high temperature, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time need special considerations when making wiring repairs. Areas that may be exposed to higher temperatures can be identified by heat resistant materials that are being used in those areas. These materials may include heat reflective tape, moon tape, and high temperature shrink tubing. Also conduit and other protective coverings may be used. Because conduit or similar coverings are used throughout the vehicle regardless of the temperature, it may be necessary for the technician to determine if an area is exposed to excessive heat before making a wiring repair. Obvious areas of consideration would be any area located near the exhaust manifolds, catalytic converter, and exhaust pipes. Items Required * DuraSeal splice sleeves to crimp and seal connections * High temperature SCT1 shrink tubing to protect the splice sleeves * Terminated leads or pigtails * The correct tools to remove the terminals from the connectors Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature of the same or larger gauge size as the original wire when repair damage wire. Also replace any reflective tape that you remove during the repair. High Temperature Wire Repair Note: Refer to Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Wiring Repairs) in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature rating of the same gauge size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the EL-38125-10 - tool and then encapsulate the splice sleeve using the high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13369 Note: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: * Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. * Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. * Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert to regional wiring gauge size. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Slide a section of high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing down the length of wire to be spliced. Ensure that the shrink tubing will not interfere with the splice procedure. 5. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 6. Use the EL-38125-10 - tool in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the splice sleeve crimp tool. The crimp tool has four nests, one for each color. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13370 7. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 8. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 9. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 10. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 11. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13371 12. Center the high temperature SCT1 shrink tube over the DuraSeal splice sleeve. 13. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the high temperature heat shrink tubing. 14. Gradually move the heat from the center to the open end of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. 15. Replace any reflective tape and clips that may have been remove during the repair. Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation If the wire insulation has been chafed, or broken, enough to show the conductive portion of the wire, and the wire is not damaged, determine the length of insulation that needs to be repaired. If the repair is less than 280 mm (11 in), cut the wire within the damaged area. Than slide the appropriate heat shrink tubing (listed below) over the wire, and repair the wire by splicing the wires together. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves). Once the wire is spliced together slide heat shrink tubing over the damaged area and apply heat to seal the repaired wire. If the wire is damaged, or the damaged area is larger than 280 mm (11 in), than replace the damaged wire by splicing in a new section of wire. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13372 SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs Special Tools * EL-38125-10 - Splice Sleeve Crimping Tool * J 38125-5 - Ultra Torch * DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: * A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. * A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides the necessary low resistance contact integrity for these sensitive, low energy circuits. The Supplemental Inflatable Restraint (SIR) System/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working with the SIR/SRS, and the wiring components, such as connectors and terminals. SIR/SRS Connector Repair (Plastic Body and Terminal Metal Pin) Note: Do not use the terminals in the kit in order to replace damaged SIR/SRS system terminals. Use either an SIR/SRS pigtail or a terminated lead from the SIR Repair Kit Tray. The terminals in the SIR/SRS system are made with a special plating. This plating provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. Pigtail repair packs are available for SIR/SRS connectors with eight or less terminals. Only the connector body is available for connectors with more than eight terminals. Terminated leads can be used to replace damaged terminals when replacing the connector body. SIR/SRS Component Wire Pigtail Repair Note: Do not make wire, connector, or terminal repairs on components with wire pigtails. A wire pigtail is a wire or wires attached directly to the device, not by a connector. If a wiring pigtail is damaged, you must replace the entire component, with pigtail. The inflatable restraint steering wheel module coil is an example of a pigtail component. SIR/SRS Wire Repair Note: Refer to Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Wiring Repairs) in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13373 If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gauge size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and EL-38125-10 - tool. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the DuraSeal splice sleeves. Note: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: * Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. * Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. * Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert to regional wiring gauge size. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the EL-38125-10 - tool in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the splice sleeve crimp tool. The crimp tool has four nests, one for each color. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13374 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Connector Position Assurance (CPA) The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of a connector. CPAs are used in all SIR System connectors and also in some connectors of other systems. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals of a connection. Terminal Position Assurance (TPA) The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13375 Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Special Tools * EL-38125-10 - Splice Sleeve Crimping Tool * J 38125-5 - Ultra Torch * DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Note: Use only DuraSeal splice sleeves. Other splice sleeves may not protect the splice from moisture or provide a good electrical connection. Use DuraSeal splice sleeves to form a one-to-one splice on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. Use DuraSeal splice sleeves where there is special requirements such as moisture sealing. Follow the instructions below in order to splice copper wire using DuraSeal splice sleeves. Note: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: * Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. * Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. * Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert to regional wiring gauge size. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13376 5. Use the EL-38125-10 - tool in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the splice sleeve crimp tool. The crimp tool has four nests, one for each color. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13377 * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Splicing Inline Harness Diodes Splicing Inline Harness Diodes Many vehicle electrical systems use a diode to isolate circuits and protect the components from voltage spikes. When installing a new diode use the following procedure. 1. Open the harness. * If the harness is taped, remove the tape. * To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing seam ripper (available from sewing supply stores) in order to cut open the harness. * If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the diode. 2. If the diode is taped to the harness, remove all of the tape. 3. Check and record the current flow direction and orientation of diode. 4. Remove the inoperative diode from the harness with a suitable soldering tool. Note: If the diode is located next to a connector terminal remove the terminal(s) from the connector to prevent damage from the soldering tool. 5. Carefully strip away a section of insulation next to the old soldered portion of the wire(s). Do not remove any more than is needed to attach the new diode. 6. Check current flow direction of the new diode, being sure to install the diode with correct bias. Reference the appropriate service manual wiring schematic to obtain the correct diode installation position. 7. Attach the new diode to the wire(s) using 60/40 rosin core solder. Before soldering attach some heat sinks (aluminum alligator clips) across the diode wire ends to protect the diode from excessive heat. Follow the manufacturer's instruction for the soldering equipment. 8. Reinstall terminal(s) into the connector body if previously removed. Note: To prevent shorts to ground and water intrusion, completely cover all exposed wire and diode attachment points with tape. 9. Tape the diode to the harness or connector using electrical tape. Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable Twisted/shielded cable is used in order to protect wiring from electrical noise. Two-conductor cable of this construction is used between the radio and the Delco-Bose(R) speaker/amplifier units and other applications where low level, sensitive signals must be carried. Follow the instructions below in order to repair the twisted/shielded cable. 1. Remove the outer jacket (1). Use care not to cut into the drain wire of the mylar tape. 2. Unwrap the tape. Do not remove the tape. Use the tape in order to rewrap the twisted conductors after the splice is made. 3. Prepare the splice. Untwist the conductors and follow the instructions for Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves). Staggering the splices by 65 mm (2.5 in) is recommended. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13378 Note: Apply the mylar tape with the aluminum side inward. This ensures good electrical contact with the drain wire. 4. Re-assemble the cable. * Rewrap the conductors with the mylar tape. If the mylar tape is damaged, use 3M product AL-36FR to replace the damaged mylar tape. * Use caution not to wrap the drain wire in the tape (1). * Follow the splicing instructions for copper wire and splice the drain wire. * Wrap the drain wire around the conductors and tape with electrical tape to replace the outer insulation. 5. Tape over the entire cable. Use a winding motion when you apply the tape. Wiring Repairs Wiring Repairs The Wiring Repairs section contains the following types of wiring repair information. Using these elements together will make wiring repair faster and easier: * Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections) * Flat Wire Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Flat Wire Repairs) * GMLAN Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/GMLAN Wiring Repairs) * High Temperature Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/High Temperature Wiring Repairs) * Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs) * Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves) * Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable) * Splicing Inline Harness Diodes (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Splicing Inline Harness Diodes) * SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs) US English/Metric Conversion US English/Metric Conversion Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13379 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13380 Basic Digital Multimeter Requirements Basic Digital Multimeter Requirements Digital Multimeter (DMM) Basic Requirements Service information is validated using digital multimeters that meet or exceed the following requirements. Using a multimeter that does not meet these basic requirements may give inaccurate readings which could lead to an incorrect diagnosis. Display and Settings 1. Four digits displayed 2. Voltage, amperage, resistance, frequency, diode test settings, and min-max function 3. Display positive and negative values Voltage 1. Have at least 10 Mohm input impedance 2. Test a DC voltage range of 0.1-1000 V. 3. Test an AC voltage range of 0.1-1000 V. Amperage 1. Test a DC amperage range of 0.1µA-10 A. 2. Test an AC amperage range of 0.1µA-10 A. Resistance Test a resistance range of 0.1 ohm-40 Mohm and displays infinite for a value greater than 40 Mohm (O.L. (Over-load)) Frequency Test for a frequency range of 0.5 HZ-199 K HZ Diode Test 1. Apply at least 1 mA when performing the diode bias test 2. Display the break over voltage drop (0-3 V) of a forward biased diode 3. Display infinite (O.L. (Over-load)) when a diode is reverse biased Min-Max Readings 1. Can update at a 1 ms sample rate 2. Saves and displays minimum and maximum values Testing Ground and Low Reference Circuits Testing Ground and Low Reference Circuits Because a test lamp can light with up to 200 ohm in a ground or low reference circuit they are not recommended to be used for this type of test. A low impedance test lamp can light and indicate the circuit is good when there is as much as 20-30 ohm present, while a high impedance test lamp can light with up to 200 ohm present in the circuit. This is why the Digital Multi-Meter (DMM) is used when validating a ground or low reference circuit continuity. When using the DMM there are many vehicle conditions that can affect the ground and low reference continuity testing. If these conditions are not met, a ground or low reference circuit test can fail on a good circuit. This may cause longer diagnosis time and incorrect component replacement. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13381 Any current flow through a ground or low reference circuit, while being tested, will skew the DMM continuity reading, or display a reading higher than when there is no current flowing. Performing a ground or low reference circuit continuity test, in reference to the vehicles battery negative terminal, will have the highest risk of failing a good ground or low reference circuit test than any other ground reference point. The best ground test points would be a control module housing (if the control modules housing is metal and grounded), door jamb striker (if attached to metal), under dash metal frame work, engine block, or body ground studs (other than where the negative battery cable is attached). A typical DMM ground or low reference circuit continuity reading can be as high as 100 ohm with the ignition ON, and drop to 15-25 ohm after the ignition is turned OFF. The reading will drop below 10 ohm after 30-40 seconds, then below 5 ohm after 60 seconds. Once the vehicle completely goes to sleep (generally 3-10 minutes) the reading will drop below 0.3 ohm. The following list of conditions may need to be met to ensure a valid continuity reading on a ground or low reference circuit: * Ignition OFF * Key out of the ignition switch (when not equipped with keyless entry and remote start) * Retained Accessory Power (RAP) OFF (open and close the driver door after ignition OFF) * Battery charger set at a 2 A or less charge rate * Scan tool not communicating with any vehicle control module (in some cases it may need to be disconnected from the DLC) * All entry doors closed * Headlamps OFF (auto headlamps disabled) * Any delay lighting OFF * HVAC after blow OFF * Any accessory that can work when the ignition is OFF * Wait up to 60 seconds (after all other listed conditions are met) Activating the DOOR LOCK function with a key fob can greatly reduce the time to achieve a valid ground or low reference continuity test result. Terminal Wiring Repair Terminal Wiring Repair Special Tools * EL-38125-10 - Splice Sleeve Crimp Tool * EL-38125-580 - Terminal Release Tool Kit * J-38125-5 - Ultra Torch * EL-35616 - Connector Test Adapter Kit For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Note: All repairs near the engine manifold, turbo engine and all exhaust pipes should follow the High Temperature Wiring Repair procedures. 1. Find the appropriate connector end view within the connector end view section. The connector end view has the following information: * Diagnostic probe tool * Terminal release tool * Terminal/terminated lead part numbers 2. Determine if a terminal is damaged. Note: Not using the proper test kit probe may cause damage to the terminal(s) that are probed. * Locate the diagnostic probe tool from the connector end view. The connector end view describes the color and part number to help the technician find and use the correct tool. * Connect the probe tool to the Digital Multimeter. * Insert the probe tool into the cavity and follow the procedures from the Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter). 3. Disconnect the connector body to perform the repair. Note: Several procedures for specific connector bodies are called out in Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Wiring Repairs). Use the following repair procedures to repair the following terminals: Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13382 Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack))Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Push to Seat))Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Pull to Seat))Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W))Delphi Connectors (Micro.64) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Micro .64) )Delphi Connectors (12-Way) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (12-Way))Delphi Connectors (Steering Gear) (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Delphi Connectors (Steering Gear)) * The TPA and CPA should be removed before releasing the terminal for the connector body. * Look at the connector end view to locate the cavity of the damaged terminal and find the proper terminal release tool from the terminal release tool kit. Note: Using the incorrect terminal release tool can damage the connector body. * Insert the terminal release tool into the cavity. Note: Some terminals have a lever that must be disengaged before the terminal can be released. Gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Terminated Lead Repair Terminated Lead Repair Special Tools * EL-38125-10 - Splice Sleeve Crimp Tool * EL-38125-580 - Terminal Release Tool Kit * J-38125-5 - Ultra Torch * EL-35616 - Connector Test Adapter Kit For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (See: Power and Ground Distribution/Tools and Equipment). Note: All repairs near the engine manifold, turbo engine and all exhaust pipes should follow the High Temperature Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/High Temperature Wiring Repairs) procedures. Terminated leads are terminals that are crimped onto wires. The terminated lead can be used throughout the vehicle since it is designed for temperatures up to 150°C. The length of the wire is 450 mm. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13383 The DuraSeal splice sleeve has the following 2 critical features: * A special heat shrink tubing that environmentally seals the splice. The shrink tubing contains a sealing adhesive inside the shrink tubing. * A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp that provides the necessary contact integrity for sensitive low energy circuits. 1. Use the connector end view to identify the correct terminated lead. 2. The terminated lead package should include a DuraSeal splice sleeve. If not, use the chart to identify the correct part. 3. Open the harness by removing any tape: Use a sewing seam ripper, or a comparable tool, to cut open the harness, to avoid wire insulation damage. 4. Depending on how many terminals need repairs, cut the terminal and wire back at least 40 mm. Try to keep the harness wire length the same. If more than one terminated lead is required, stagger the lengths by 40 mm. This helps reduce the bundle size of the wire harness. 5. Use the EL-38125-10 - tool in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the splice sleeve crimp tool. The crimp tool has four nests, one for each color. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13384 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the J-38125-5 - ultra torch , apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13385 Cigarette Lighter: Electrical Diagrams Cigar Lighter/Power Outlet Schematics Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Diagrams Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Diagrams P14 Passenger Air Bag Disable Indicator Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Diagrams > Page 13390 Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair SIR Disabling and Enabling SIR component location affects how a vehicle should be serviced. There are parts of the SIR system installed in various locations around a vehicle. To find the location of the SIR components refer to SIR Identification Views (See: Restraint Systems/Air Bag Systems/Locations). There are several reasons for disabling the SIR system, such as repairs to the SIR system or servicing a component near or attached to an SIR component. There are several ways to disable the SIR system depending on what type of service is being performed. The following information covers the proper procedures for disabling/enabling the SIR system. SIR Service Precautions Warning When performing service on or near the SIR components or the SIR wiring, the SIR system must be disabled. Failure to observe the correct procedure could cause deployment of the SIR components. Serious injury can occur. Failure to observe the correct procedure could also result in unnecessary SIR system repairs. The inflatable restraint sensing and diagnostic module (SDM) maintains a reserved energy supply. The reserved energy supply provides deployment power for the air bags if the SDM loses battery power during a collision. Deployment power is available for as much as 1 minute after disconnecting the vehicle power. Waiting 1 minute before working on the system after disabling the SIR system prevents deployment of the air bags from the reserved energy supply. General Service Instructions The following are general service instructions which must be followed in order to properly repair the vehicle and return it to its original integrity: * Do not expose air bags to temperatures above 65°C (149°F). * Verify the correct replacement part number. Do not substitute a component from a different vehicle. * Use only original GM replacement parts available from your authorized GM dealer. Do not use salvaged parts for repairs to the SIR system. Discard any of the following components if it has been dropped from a height of 92 cm (3 feet) or greater: * Inflatable restraint sensing and diagnostic module (SDM) * Any air bag * Driver steering wheel air bag coil * Any impact sensor * Seat belt anchor and/or retractor pretensioners * Passenger presence module and/or occupant sensor Disabling Procedure - Air Bag Fuse 1. Turn the steering wheel so that the vehicles wheels are pointing straight ahead. 2. Place the ignition in the OFF position. Note: The SDM may have more than one fused power input. To ensure there is no unwanted SIR deployment, personal injury, or unnecessary SIR system repairs, remove all fuses supplying power to the SDM. With all SDM fuses removed and the ignition switch in the ON position, the AIR BAG warning indicator illuminates. This is normal operation, and does not indicate a SIR system malfunction. 3. Locate and remove the fuse(s) supplying power to the SDM. Refer to SIR Schematics (See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Air Bag Systems) or Electrical Center Identification Views (See: Maintenance/Fuses and Circuit Breakers/Fuse/Application and ID). 4. Wait 1 minute before working on the system. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Diagrams > Page 13391 Enabling Procedure - Air Bag Fuse 1. Place the ignition in the OFF position. 2. Install the fuse(s) supplying power to the SDM. Refer to SIR Schematics (See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Air Bag Systems) or Electrical Center Identification Views (See: Maintenance/Fuses and Circuit Breakers/Fuse/Application and ID). 3. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position. The AIR BAG indicator will flash then turn OFF. 4. Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle if the AIR BAG warning indicator does not operate as described. Refer to Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle (See: Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle). Disabling Procedure - Negative Battery Cable 1. Turn the steering wheel so that the vehicles wheels are pointing straight ahead. 2. Place the ignition in the OFF position. 3. Disconnect the negative battery cable from the battery. Refer to Battery Negative Cable Disconnection and Connection (See: Starting and Charging/Battery/Battery Cable/Negative/Service and Repair/Battery Negative Cable Disconnection and Connection). 4. Wait 1 minute before working on system. Enabling Procedure - Negative Battery Cable 1. Place the ignition in the OFF position. 2. Connect the negative battery cable to the battery. Refer to Battery Negative Cable Disconnection and Connection (See: Starting and Charging/Battery/Battery Cable/Negative/Service and Repair/Battery Negative Cable Disconnection and Connection). 3. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position. The AIR BAG indicator will flash then turn OFF. 4. Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle if the AIR BAG warning indicator does not operate as described. Refer to Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle (See: Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Locations Dimmer Switch: Locations Instrument Panel/Center Console Component Views Left Side of the Instrument Panel Components 1 - P16 Instrument Cluster 2 - B10B Ambient Light/Sunload Sensor (C68) or B10 Ambient Light Sensor (C67) 3 - P19B Speaker - Center Instrument Panel (UZ8) 4 - P17 Info Display Module 5 P19V Speaker - Right Front Tweeter 6 - A20 Radio/HVAC Controls 7 - A11 Radio 8 - S3 Transmission Shift Lever 9 - P2 Transmission Shift Lever Position Indicator 10 - T11 Multimedia Player Interface Module (KTA) 11 - K108 Active Noise Cancellation Module (VQN) 12 - E8J Instrument Panel Courtesy Lamp - Left (LTZ or SLT) 13 - S36 Instrument Panel Dimmer Switch Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 13395 Dimmer Switch: Diagrams S36 Instrument Panel Dimmer Switch Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 13396 Dimmer Switch: Service and Repair Instrument Panel Lamp Dimmer Switch Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Door/Trunk Ajar Indicator/Lamp > Component Information > Description and Operation Door/Trunk Ajar Indicator/Lamp: Description and Operation Door Ajar Indicator Description and Operation Door Ajar Indicator System Components The door ajar indicator system consists of the following components: * Body control module (BCM) * Instrument cluster * Driver information center * Driver door latch * Passenger door latch * Left rear door latch * Right rear door latch * Liftgate door latch * Driver window switch * Passenger window switch * Left rear window switch * Right rear window switch Driver Door Ajar The driver window switch receives a discrete input from the driver door ajar switch within the driver door latch to indicate the status of the door. The window switch then communicates this status to the instrument cluster via GMLAN message. The instrument panel cluster, upon receipt of this GMLAN message, will illuminate the appropriate door ajar message in the driver information center and also send a GMLAN message to the radio to activate the door ajar audible warning when the vehicle speed is greater then 8 km/h (5 MPH). Passenger Door Ajar The passenger window switch receives a discrete input from the passenger door ajar switch within the passenger door latch to indicate the status of the door. The window switch then communicates this status to the instrument cluster via GMLAN message. The instrument panel cluster, upon receipt of this GMLAN message, will illuminate the appropriate door ajar message in the driver information center and also send a GMLAN message to the radio to activate the door ajar audible warning when the vehicle speed is greater then 8 km/h (5 MPH). Left Rear Door Ajar And Right Rear Door Ajar The body control module (BCM) (without power rear windows) or the left and right rear window switches (with power rear windows AED) receive discrete inputs from both the rear door latches and the rear compartment lid latch to indicate the status of the doors and rear compartment lid. The BCM or window switches then communicate this status to the instrument cluster via GMLAN message. The instrument panel cluster, upon receipt of this GMLAN message, will illuminate the appropriate door ajar message in the driver information center and also send a GMLAN message to the radio to activate the door ajar audible warning when the vehicle speed is greater then 8 km/h (5 MPH) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Door/Trunk Ajar Indicator/Lamp > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 13400 Door/Trunk Ajar Indicator/Lamp: Service and Repair Front Side Door Warning Lamp Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Locations Driver/Vehicle Information Display: Locations Instrument Panel/Center Console Component Views Left Side of the Instrument Panel Components 1 - P16 Instrument Cluster 2 - B10B Ambient Light/Sunload Sensor (C68) or B10 Ambient Light Sensor (C67) 3 - P19B Speaker - Center Instrument Panel (UZ8) 4 - P17 Info Display Module 5 P19V Speaker - Right Front Tweeter 6 - A20 Radio/HVAC Controls 7 - A11 Radio 8 - S3 Transmission Shift Lever 9 - P2 Transmission Shift Lever Position Indicator 10 - T11 Multimedia Player Interface Module (KTA) 11 - K108 Active Noise Cancellation Module (VQN) 12 - E8J Instrument Panel Courtesy Lamp - Left (LTZ or SLT) 13 - S36 Instrument Panel Dimmer Switch Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Locations > Page 13404 Driver/Vehicle Information Display: Diagrams P17 Info Display Module (UYS or PCJ) P17 Info Display Module (without UYS or PCJ) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Locations > Page 13405 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Locations > Page 13406 Driver/Vehicle Information Display: Service and Repair Driver Information Display Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Diagrams Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Diagrams P14 Passenger Air Bag Disable Indicator Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Diagrams > Page 13411 Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair SIR Disabling and Enabling SIR component location affects how a vehicle should be serviced. There are parts of the SIR system installed in various locations around a vehicle. To find the location of the SIR components refer to SIR Identification Views (See: Restraint Systems/Air Bag Systems/Locations). There are several reasons for disabling the SIR system, such as repairs to the SIR system or servicing a component near or attached to an SIR component. There are several ways to disable the SIR system depending on what type of service is being performed. The following information covers the proper procedures for disabling/enabling the SIR system. SIR Service Precautions Warning When performing service on or near the SIR components or the SIR wiring, the SIR system must be disabled. Failure to observe the correct procedure could cause deployment of the SIR components. Serious injury can occur. Failure to observe the correct procedure could also result in unnecessary SIR system repairs. The inflatable restraint sensing and diagnostic module (SDM) maintains a reserved energy supply. The reserved energy supply provides deployment power for the air bags if the SDM loses battery power during a collision. Deployment power is available for as much as 1 minute after disconnecting the vehicle power. Waiting 1 minute before working on the system after disabling the SIR system prevents deployment of the air bags from the reserved energy supply. General Service Instructions The following are general service instructions which must be followed in order to properly repair the vehicle and return it to its original integrity: * Do not expose air bags to temperatures above 65°C (149°F). * Verify the correct replacement part number. Do not substitute a component from a different vehicle. * Use only original GM replacement parts available from your authorized GM dealer. Do not use salvaged parts for repairs to the SIR system. Discard any of the following components if it has been dropped from a height of 92 cm (3 feet) or greater: * Inflatable restraint sensing and diagnostic module (SDM) * Any air bag * Driver steering wheel air bag coil * Any impact sensor * Seat belt anchor and/or retractor pretensioners * Passenger presence module and/or occupant sensor Disabling Procedure - Air Bag Fuse 1. Turn the steering wheel so that the vehicles wheels are pointing straight ahead. 2. Place the ignition in the OFF position. Note: The SDM may have more than one fused power input. To ensure there is no unwanted SIR deployment, personal injury, or unnecessary SIR system repairs, remove all fuses supplying power to the SDM. With all SDM fuses removed and the ignition switch in the ON position, the AIR BAG warning indicator illuminates. This is normal operation, and does not indicate a SIR system malfunction. 3. Locate and remove the fuse(s) supplying power to the SDM. Refer to SIR Schematics (See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Air Bag Systems) or Electrical Center Identification Views (See: Maintenance/Fuses and Circuit Breakers/Fuse/Application and ID). 4. Wait 1 minute before working on the system. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Diagrams > Page 13412 Enabling Procedure - Air Bag Fuse 1. Place the ignition in the OFF position. 2. Install the fuse(s) supplying power to the SDM. Refer to SIR Schematics (See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Air Bag Systems) or Electrical Center Identification Views (See: Maintenance/Fuses and Circuit Breakers/Fuse/Application and ID). 3. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position. The AIR BAG indicator will flash then turn OFF. 4. Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle if the AIR BAG warning indicator does not operate as described. Refer to Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle (See: Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle). Disabling Procedure - Negative Battery Cable 1. Turn the steering wheel so that the vehicles wheels are pointing straight ahead. 2. Place the ignition in the OFF position. 3. Disconnect the negative battery cable from the battery. Refer to Battery Negative Cable Disconnection and Connection (See: Starting and Charging/Battery/Battery Cable/Negative/Service and Repair/Battery Negative Cable Disconnection and Connection). 4. Wait 1 minute before working on system. Enabling Procedure - Negative Battery Cable 1. Place the ignition in the OFF position. 2. Connect the negative battery cable to the battery. Refer to Battery Negative Cable Disconnection and Connection (See: Starting and Charging/Battery/Battery Cable/Negative/Service and Repair/Battery Negative Cable Disconnection and Connection). 3. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position. The AIR BAG indicator will flash then turn OFF. 4. Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle if the AIR BAG warning indicator does not operate as described. Refer to Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle (See: Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 09298D > Nov > 10 > Recall - Defroster/Defogger Inoperative Technical Service Bulletin # 09298D Date: 101122 Recall - Defroster/Defogger Inoperative FMVSS NONCOMPLIANCE Bulletin No.: 09298D Date: November 22, 2010 Subject: 09298D - Heating and Windshield Defrost Inoperative - Replace Computer Module Models: 2010 Chevrolet Equinox 2010 GMC Terrain Supercede: The Parts Information section in this bulletin has been revised for Canadian dealers. Mass Comp is no longer an Authorized GM Electronics Service Center. Canadian dealers are to begin contacting York Electronics for all exchanges.Discard all copies of bulletin 09298C, issued March 2010. Customers are being instructed to provide their VIN when calling to schedule a service appointment. If the vehicle will not be programmed at the dealership, please provide the VIN to the Parts Manager so parts can be ordered and received in time for the service appointment. Parts will be shipped overnight to dealers so please do not order more than 2 days prior to the scheduled service appointment date. Condition General Motors has decided that certain 2010 model year Chevrolet Equinox and GMC Terrain vehicles fail to conform to Federal/Canada Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 103, "Windshield Defrosting and Defogging Systems", and Standard 101, "Controls and Displays". On these vehicles, software in the center instrument panel can cause the heating, air conditioning, defrost, and radio controls, as well as the panel illumination to become inoperative. Driving without a functioning defrost system can decrease the driver's visibility under certain driving conditions and could result in a crash without warning. Driving without panel illumination can divert the driver's attention while looking for a control. Correction Dealers are to replace the computer module in the center instrument panel. Vehicles Involved Involved are certain 2010 model year Chevrolet Equinox and GMC Terrain vehicles built within these VIN breakpoints: Important Dealers are to confirm vehicle eligibility prior to beginning repairs by using the Required Field Actions section in the Global Warranty system. Not all vehicles within the above breakpoints may be involved. For dealers with involved vehicles, a listing with involved vehicles containing the complete vehicle identification number, customer name, and address information has been prepared and will be provided to US and Canadian dealers through the GM GlobalConnect Recall Reports, or sent directly to export dealers. Dealers will not have a report available if they have no involved vehicles currently assigned. The listing may contain customer names and addresses obtained from Motor Vehicle Registration Records. The use of such motor vehicle registration data for any purpose other than follow-up necessary to complete this recall is a violation of law in several states/provinces/countries. Accordingly, you are urged to limit the use of this report to the follow-up necessary to complete this recall. Parts Information For dealers using the programming tool: Most repairs require no parts. There are a small number of vehicles that will not be able to be reprogrammed; for these vehicles, please follow the parts information below. If you have parts currently in your inventory, please return them to Specmo (U.S.) or York Electronics (Canada). For dealers that did not receive a programming tool: A center instrument panel will be required. Note Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 09298D > Nov > 10 > Recall - Defroster/Defogger Inoperative > Page 13421 Center instrument panels (radio control assemblies) will be shipped overnight to dealers. Note: Core returns for this recall are to be shipped within 24 hours of receiving the exchange. A prepaid Federal Express Ground label will be included with each exchange. Package the core securely in the original packaging and package inserts provided with the exchange. It is important that the return unit be packaged identically to the exchange unit to prevent damage in shipping. Failure to return the core will result in a charge to the dealer's Open Parts Account. Do not order parts for customer vehicles until they have scheduled an appointment. U.S. Dealers Only: If the customer is not experiencing any concerns with the center instrument panel (ICS), please contact Specmo Enterprises for arrange for an exchange. If the customer does have ICS concerns, please contact the Technical Assistance Center (TAC) prior to ordering an exchange ICS. Dealers are to contact Specmo Enterprises via the internet at www.specmo.com/dealers, to arrange for an exchange of the center instrument panel (radio control assembly). Dealers that do not have an account with Specmo will be able to create an account in order to access the website. Arrange for an exchange by following the prompts. The information below will be required to arrange for an exchange. - Bulletin number 09298 - VIN Ontario Dealers Only: Due to a limited inventory, and to avoid backorders, an onsite mobile upgrade is available. Please contact York Electronics at 888-650-9675 to schedule an appointment. All Other Provinces, Excluding Ontario: To arrange for an exchange of the centre instrument panel (radio control assembly), please contact York Electronics at 888-650-9675. Service Procedure Service Procedure Using the Programming Tool (for dealers that were shipped a programming tool) Note Programming is not performed using TIS2WEB SPS; use provided programming tool. Note If the customer is NOT experiencing any concerns with the center instrument panel (ICS), reprogram the rdio control assembly (center instrument panels) following the instructions below. If the customer does have ICS concerns, please contact the Technical Assistance Center (TAC) prior to programming the radio control assembly (center instrument panels). (1) First Design Radio Control Assembly; (2) Second Design Radio Control Assembly 1. Determine if the radio control assembly is programmable. First design radio control assemblies are NOT programmable and must go through the radio control assembly exchange process. - First design radio control assemblies (1) are NOT programmable. There are NO slots on the backside of the radio control assembly. - Second design radio control assemblies (2) are programmable. They have two slots on the backside of the radio control assembly. If the radio control assembly is a second design assembly, proceed to Step 2. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 09298D > Nov > 10 > Recall - Defroster/Defogger Inoperative > Page 13422 Caution Insert a plastic body trim tool between the IP and radio control assembly along the top portion of the radio control assembly as shown in the illustration. DO NOT use a flat-blade screwdriver to remove the radio assembly. 2. Remove the radio control assembly (1). Refer to Radio Control Assembly Replacement in SI. 3. Carefully align the radio control assembly channels to the locating pegs of the programming tool as shown in the illustration. 4. Carefully seat the radio control assembly onto the programming tool. 5. The display area of the programming tool will indicate when the programming event has been completed. The programming tool will read "Programming Successful. Remove module." The programming event takes less than 30 seconds to complete. 6. Detach the radio control assembly from the programming tool. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 09298D > Nov > 10 > Recall - Defroster/Defogger Inoperative > Page 13423 7. Place blue dot (3) on the back of the radio control assembly to indicate that the radio control module has been reprogrammed. 8. Install the radio control assembly. Refer to Radio Control Assembly Replacement in SI. Service Procedure Using the Radio Control Assembly Exchange Process Caution Insert a plastic body trim tool between the IP and radio control assembly along the top portion of the radio control assembly as shown in the illustration. DO NOT use a flat-bladed screwdriver to remove the radio control assembly. Note If the customer is NOT experiencing any concerns with the center instrument panel (ICS), proceed to Step 1 and perform this recall. If the customer DOES have ICS concerns, please contact the Technical Assistance Center (TAC) prior to performing this recall. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 09298D > Nov > 10 > Recall - Defroster/Defogger Inoperative > Page 13424 Note For vehicles without the color touch screen navigation, unsnap and remove the display from the radio control assembly. Do not return the radio display with the radio control assembly. 1. Remove the radio control assembly (1). Refer to Radio Control Assembly Replacement in SI. 2. Package the radio control assembly and ship it to the exchange center indicated on the prepaid Federal Express Ground label that was enclosed with the exchange unit within 24 hours. Note Module programming and setup is NOT required when replacing only the radio control assembly. 3. Install the radio control assembly. Refer to Radio Control Assembly Replacement in SI. Courtesy Transportation - For US and Canada The General Motors Courtesy Transportation program is intended to minimize customer inconvenience when a vehicle requires a repair that is covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranties. The availability of courtesy transportation to customers whose vehicles are within the warranty coverage period and involved in a product program is very important in maintaining customer satisfaction. Dealers are to ensure that these customers understand that shuttle service or some other form of courtesy transportation is available and will be provided at no charge. Dealers should refer to the General Motors Service Policies and Procedures Manual for Courtesy Transportation guidelines. Warranty Transaction Information 1. Submit a transaction using the table below. * Dealers using WINS should add 0.2 administrative allowance to the labor time. Dealers using GWM should submit 0.2 hours administrative allowance under Administrative Time. ** Administrative allowance for unit exchange. *** Dealers are to claim only administrative allowance of 0.2 hours when the radio control assembly is reprogrammed by York's Mobile Unit. Dealers using WINS should submit 0.2 hours administrative allowance in labor time. Dealers using GWM should submit 0.2 hours administrative allowance under Administrative Time. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 09298D > Nov > 10 > Recall - Defroster/Defogger Inoperative > Page 13425 Customer Notification - For US and Canada General Motors will notify customers of this recall on their vehicle (see copy of customer letter included with this bulletin). Customer Notification - For Export Letters will be sent to known owners of record located within areas covered by the US National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act. For owners outside these areas, dealers should notify customers using the attached sample letter. Dealer Recall Responsibility - For US and Export (US States, Territories, and Possessions) The US National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act provides that each vehicle that is subject to a recall of this type must be adequately repaired within a reasonable time after the customer has tendered it for repair. A failure to repair within sixty days after tender of a vehicle is prima facie evidence of failure to repair within a reasonable time. If the condition is not adequately repaired within a reasonable time, the customer may be entitled to an identical or reasonably equivalent vehicle at no charge or to a refund of the purchase price less a reasonable allowance for depreciation. To avoid having to provide these burdensome remedies, every effort must be made to promptly schedule an appointment with each customer and to repair their vehicle as soon as possible. In the recall notification letters, customers are told how to contact the US National Highway Traffic Safety Administration if the recall is not completed within a reasonable time. This bulletin is notice to you that the new motor vehicles included in this recall may not comply with the standard identified above. Under Title 49, Section 30112 of the United States Code, it is illegal for a dealer to sell a new motor vehicle which the dealer knows does not comply with an applicable Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard. As a consequence, if you sell any of these motor vehicles without first performing the recall correction, your dealership may be subject to a civil penalty for each such sale. Dealer Recall Responsibility - All All unsold new vehicles in dealers' possession and subject to this recall must be held and inspected/repaired per the service procedure of this recall bulletin before customers take possession of these vehicles. Dealers are to service all vehicles subject to this recall at no charge to customers, regardless of mileage, age of vehicle, or ownership, from this time forward. Customers who have recently purchased vehicles sold from your vehicle inventory, and for which there is no customer information indicated on the dealer listing, are to be contacted by the dealer. Arrangements are to be made to make the required correction according to the instructions contained in this bulletin. A copy of the customer letter is provided in this bulletin for your use in contacting customers. Recall follow-up cards should not be used for this purpose, since the customer may not as yet have received the notification letter. In summary, whenever a vehicle subject to this recall enters your vehicle inventory, or is in your dealership for service in the future, you must take the steps necessary to be sure the recall correction has been made before selling or releasing the vehicle. Disclaimer Owner Letter Owner Letter Dear General Motors Customer: This notice is sent to you in accordance with the requirements of the National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act. General Motors has decided that certain 2010 model year Chevrolet Equinox and GMC Terrain vehicles fail to conform to Federal/Canada Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 103, "Windshield Defrosting and Defogging Systems", and Standard 101, "Controls and Displays". As a result, GM is conducting a recall. We apologize for this inconvenience. However, we are concerned about your safety and continued satisfaction with our products. Important - Your vehicle is involved in recall 09298. - Schedule an appointment with your GM dealer. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 09298D > Nov > 10 > Recall - Defroster/Defogger Inoperative > Page 13426 - This service will be performed for you at no charge. Why is your vehicle being recalled? The software in the center instrument panel can cause the heating, air conditioning, defrost, and radio controls, as well as the panel illumination to become inoperative. Driving without a functioning defrost system can decrease your visibility under certain driving conditions and could result in a crash without warning. Driving without panel illumination can divert your attention while looking for a control. What will we do? Your GM dealer will replace the computer module in the center instrument panel. This service will be performed for you at no charge. Because of service scheduling requirements, it is likely that your dealer will need your vehicle longer than the actual service correction time of approximately 20 minutes. If your vehicle is within the New Vehicle Limited Warranty, your dealer may provide you with shuttle service or some other form of courtesy transportation while your vehicle is at the dealership for this repair. Please refer to your Owner's Manual and your dealer for details on courtesy transportation. What should you do? You should contact your GM dealer to arrange a service appointment as soon as possible. When scheduling your appointment, please provide your dealer with your vehicle's 17 character vehicle identification number (VIN). Your VIN can be found above your name and address at the top of this letter, and will follow the numbers "09298". Your dealer will need your VIN to order parts for your vehicle so that they will be available on the day of your service appointment. Do you have questions? If you have questions or concerns that your dealer is unable to resolve, please contact the appropriate Customer Assistance Center at the number listed below. More information about your vehicle can be found at the Owner Center at www.gmownercenter.com. If after contacting your dealer and the Customer Assistance Center, you are still not satisfied we have done our best to remedy this condition without charge and within a reasonable time, you may wish to write the Administrator, National Highway Traffic Safety Administration, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE, Washington DC 20590, or call the toll-free Vehicle Safety Hotline at 1.888.327.4236 (TTY 1.800.424.9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov. Federal regulation requires that any vehicle lessor receiving this recall notice must forward a copy of this notice to the lessee within ten days. Scott Lawson Director, Customer and Relationship Services 09298 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > NHTSA09V489000 > Dec > 09 > Recall 09V489000: Defroster Malfunction Instrument Panel Control Module: Recalls Recall 09V489000: Defroster Malfunction VEHICLE MAKE/MODEL: MODEL YEAR(S): Chevrolet/Equinox 2010 GMC/Terrain 2010 MANUFACTURER: General Motors Corp. MFR'S REPORT DATE: December 18, 2009 NHTSA CAMPAIGN ID NUMBER: 09V489000 NHTSA ACTION NUMBER: N/A COMPONENT: Visibility: Defroster/Defogger System POTENTIAL NUMBER OF UNITS AFFECTED: 59031 SUMMARY: General Motors is recalling certain model year 2010 Chevrolet Equinox and GMC Terrain vehicles for failing to comply with the requirements of Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 103, "Windshield Defrosting and Defogging Systems and with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 101, "Controls and Displays". The software in the center instrument panel can cause the heating, air conditioning, defrost, and radio controls, as well as the panel illumination to become inoperative. CONSEQUENCE: Driving without a functioning defrost system can decrease your visibility under certain driving conditions and could result in a crash without warning. REMEDY: Dealers will replace the computer module in the center instrument panel free of charge. The safety recall is expected to begin during January 2010. Owners may contact Chevrolet at 1-800-630-2438, GMC at 1-866-996-9463 or at www.gmownercenter.com. NOTES: GM safety recall No. 090298. Owners may also contact The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration's Vehicle Safety Hotline at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY 1-800-424-9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 10-08-49-003 > May > 10 > Electrical - Instrument Panel Blanks Out/Inoperative Instrument Panel Control Module: Customer Interest Electrical - Instrument Panel Blanks Out/Inoperative TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 10-08-49-003 Date: May 17, 2010 Subject: Intermittent Instrument Panel Cluster (IPC) Inoperative, Driver Information Center (DIC) Blanks Out (Reprogram IPC) Models: 2010 Chevrolet Equinox 2010 GMC Terrain All Built Prior to November 15, 2009 Condition In rare cases, some customers may comment that on ignition start up, intermittently, the IPC lights do not come on, the IPC gauges are inoperative, or the DIC goes blank. The Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) may also come on. Cause This condition may be caused by a software state or anomaly, which can contribute to one or more of the above conditions. Correction Important On certain IPCs that are inoperative, the cluster could lock up in sleep mode. Cycling the ignition will not unlock it from sleep mode. Disconnect the battery or fuse for at least 3 minutes and re-apply the power to unlock the cluster. This procedure is required prior to reprogramming an IPC that is locked up in sleep mode. DO NOT replace the IPC or Body Control Module (BCM) for this concern. Reprogram the IPC with the latest software calibration. Note A limited number of early build Equinox vehicles may experience an error when attempting to reprogram the IPC. Should you experience this condition when reprogramming the IPC, please contact the Techline Customer Support Center (TCSC) for revised calibrations. VINS that MAY experience this condition will have VIN sequence numbers between 200008 and 200575. Important Select the correct calibration files for the appropriate vehicle configuration (body style) and RPO codes. A revised calibration has been developed to address this condition. Technicians are to reprogram the IPC using the Service Programming System (SPS) with the latest software available on TIS2WEB. Refer to Instrument Cluster Programming and Setup in SI. When using a Tech 2(R) or a Multiple Diagnostic Interface (MDI) for reprogramming, ensure that it is updated with the latest software version. During programming, the battery voltage must be maintained within the proper range of 12-15 Volts. Only use the approved Midtronics(R) PSC 550 Battery Maintainer (SPS Programming Support Tool EL-49642) or equivalent during programming. Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table above. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 10-08-49-003 > May > 10 > Electrical - Instrument Panel Blanks Out/Inoperative > Page 13436 Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Instrument Panel Control Module: > 09298D > Nov > 10 > Recall - Defroster/Defogger Inoperative Technical Service Bulletin # 09298D Date: 101122 Recall - Defroster/Defogger Inoperative FMVSS NONCOMPLIANCE Bulletin No.: 09298D Date: November 22, 2010 Subject: 09298D - Heating and Windshield Defrost Inoperative - Replace Computer Module Models: 2010 Chevrolet Equinox 2010 GMC Terrain Supercede: The Parts Information section in this bulletin has been revised for Canadian dealers. Mass Comp is no longer an Authorized GM Electronics Service Center. Canadian dealers are to begin contacting York Electronics for all exchanges.Discard all copies of bulletin 09298C, issued March 2010. Customers are being instructed to provide their VIN when calling to schedule a service appointment. If the vehicle will not be programmed at the dealership, please provide the VIN to the Parts Manager so parts can be ordered and received in time for the service appointment. Parts will be shipped overnight to dealers so please do not order more than 2 days prior to the scheduled service appointment date. Condition General Motors has decided that certain 2010 model year Chevrolet Equinox and GMC Terrain vehicles fail to conform to Federal/Canada Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 103, "Windshield Defrosting and Defogging Systems", and Standard 101, "Controls and Displays". On these vehicles, software in the center instrument panel can cause the heating, air conditioning, defrost, and radio controls, as well as the panel illumination to become inoperative. Driving without a functioning defrost system can decrease the driver's visibility under certain driving conditions and could result in a crash without warning. Driving without panel illumination can divert the driver's attention while looking for a control. Correction Dealers are to replace the computer module in the center instrument panel. Vehicles Involved Involved are certain 2010 model year Chevrolet Equinox and GMC Terrain vehicles built within these VIN breakpoints: Important Dealers are to confirm vehicle eligibility prior to beginning repairs by using the Required Field Actions section in the Global Warranty system. Not all vehicles within the above breakpoints may be involved. For dealers with involved vehicles, a listing with involved vehicles containing the complete vehicle identification number, customer name, and address information has been prepared and will be provided to US and Canadian dealers through the GM GlobalConnect Recall Reports, or sent directly to export dealers. Dealers will not have a report available if they have no involved vehicles currently assigned. The listing may contain customer names and addresses obtained from Motor Vehicle Registration Records. The use of such motor vehicle registration data for any purpose other than follow-up necessary to complete this recall is a violation of law in several states/provinces/countries. Accordingly, you are urged to limit the use of this report to the follow-up necessary to complete this recall. Parts Information For dealers using the programming tool: Most repairs require no parts. There are a small number of vehicles that will not be able to be reprogrammed; for these vehicles, please follow the parts information below. If you have parts currently in your inventory, please return them to Specmo (U.S.) or York Electronics (Canada). For dealers that did not receive a programming tool: A center instrument panel will be required. Note Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Instrument Panel Control Module: > 09298D > Nov > 10 > Recall - Defroster/Defogger Inoperative > Page 13442 Center instrument panels (radio control assemblies) will be shipped overnight to dealers. Note: Core returns for this recall are to be shipped within 24 hours of receiving the exchange. A prepaid Federal Express Ground label will be included with each exchange. Package the core securely in the original packaging and package inserts provided with the exchange. It is important that the return unit be packaged identically to the exchange unit to prevent damage in shipping. Failure to return the core will result in a charge to the dealer's Open Parts Account. Do not order parts for customer vehicles until they have scheduled an appointment. U.S. Dealers Only: If the customer is not experiencing any concerns with the center instrument panel (ICS), please contact Specmo Enterprises for arrange for an exchange. If the customer does have ICS concerns, please contact the Technical Assistance Center (TAC) prior to ordering an exchange ICS. Dealers are to contact Specmo Enterprises via the internet at www.specmo.com/dealers, to arrange for an exchange of the center instrument panel (radio control assembly). Dealers that do not have an account with Specmo will be able to create an account in order to access the website. Arrange for an exchange by following the prompts. The information below will be required to arrange for an exchange. - Bulletin number 09298 - VIN Ontario Dealers Only: Due to a limited inventory, and to avoid backorders, an onsite mobile upgrade is available. Please contact York Electronics at 888-650-9675 to schedule an appointment. All Other Provinces, Excluding Ontario: To arrange for an exchange of the centre instrument panel (radio control assembly), please contact York Electronics at 888-650-9675. Service Procedure Service Procedure Using the Programming Tool (for dealers that were shipped a programming tool) Note Programming is not performed using TIS2WEB SPS; use provided programming tool. Note If the customer is NOT experiencing any concerns with the center instrument panel (ICS), reprogram the rdio control assembly (center instrument panels) following the instructions below. If the customer does have ICS concerns, please contact the Technical Assistance Center (TAC) prior to programming the radio control assembly (center instrument panels). (1) First Design Radio Control Assembly; (2) Second Design Radio Control Assembly 1. Determine if the radio control assembly is programmable. First design radio control assemblies are NOT programmable and must go through the radio control assembly exchange process. - First design radio control assemblies (1) are NOT programmable. There are NO slots on the backside of the radio control assembly. - Second design radio control assemblies (2) are programmable. They have two slots on the backside of the radio control assembly. If the radio control assembly is a second design assembly, proceed to Step 2. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Instrument Panel Control Module: > 09298D > Nov > 10 > Recall - Defroster/Defogger Inoperative > Page 13443 Caution Insert a plastic body trim tool between the IP and radio control assembly along the top portion of the radio control assembly as shown in the illustration. DO NOT use a flat-blade screwdriver to remove the radio assembly. 2. Remove the radio control assembly (1). Refer to Radio Control Assembly Replacement in SI. 3. Carefully align the radio control assembly channels to the locating pegs of the programming tool as shown in the illustration. 4. Carefully seat the radio control assembly onto the programming tool. 5. The display area of the programming tool will indicate when the programming event has been completed. The programming tool will read "Programming Successful. Remove module." The programming event takes less than 30 seconds to complete. 6. Detach the radio control assembly from the programming tool. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Instrument Panel Control Module: > 09298D > Nov > 10 > Recall - Defroster/Defogger Inoperative > Page 13444 7. Place blue dot (3) on the back of the radio control assembly to indicate that the radio control module has been reprogrammed. 8. Install the radio control assembly. Refer to Radio Control Assembly Replacement in SI. Service Procedure Using the Radio Control Assembly Exchange Process Caution Insert a plastic body trim tool between the IP and radio control assembly along the top portion of the radio control assembly as shown in the illustration. DO NOT use a flat-bladed screwdriver to remove the radio control assembly. Note If the customer is NOT experiencing any concerns with the center instrument panel (ICS), proceed to Step 1 and perform this recall. If the customer DOES have ICS concerns, please contact the Technical Assistance Center (TAC) prior to performing this recall. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Instrument Panel Control Module: > 09298D > Nov > 10 > Recall - Defroster/Defogger Inoperative > Page 13445 Note For vehicles without the color touch screen navigation, unsnap and remove the display from the radio control assembly. Do not return the radio display with the radio control assembly. 1. Remove the radio control assembly (1). Refer to Radio Control Assembly Replacement in SI. 2. Package the radio control assembly and ship it to the exchange center indicated on the prepaid Federal Express Ground label that was enclosed with the exchange unit within 24 hours. Note Module programming and setup is NOT required when replacing only the radio control assembly. 3. Install the radio control assembly. Refer to Radio Control Assembly Replacement in SI. Courtesy Transportation - For US and Canada The General Motors Courtesy Transportation program is intended to minimize customer inconvenience when a vehicle requires a repair that is covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranties. The availability of courtesy transportation to customers whose vehicles are within the warranty coverage period and involved in a product program is very important in maintaining customer satisfaction. Dealers are to ensure that these customers understand that shuttle service or some other form of courtesy transportation is available and will be provided at no charge. Dealers should refer to the General Motors Service Policies and Procedures Manual for Courtesy Transportation guidelines. Warranty Transaction Information 1. Submit a transaction using the table below. * Dealers using WINS should add 0.2 administrative allowance to the labor time. Dealers using GWM should submit 0.2 hours administrative allowance under Administrative Time. ** Administrative allowance for unit exchange. *** Dealers are to claim only administrative allowance of 0.2 hours when the radio control assembly is reprogrammed by York's Mobile Unit. Dealers using WINS should submit 0.2 hours administrative allowance in labor time. Dealers using GWM should submit 0.2 hours administrative allowance under Administrative Time. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Instrument Panel Control Module: > 09298D > Nov > 10 > Recall - Defroster/Defogger Inoperative > Page 13446 Customer Notification - For US and Canada General Motors will notify customers of this recall on their vehicle (see copy of customer letter included with this bulletin). Customer Notification - For Export Letters will be sent to known owners of record located within areas covered by the US National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act. For owners outside these areas, dealers should notify customers using the attached sample letter. Dealer Recall Responsibility - For US and Export (US States, Territories, and Possessions) The US National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act provides that each vehicle that is subject to a recall of this type must be adequately repaired within a reasonable time after the customer has tendered it for repair. A failure to repair within sixty days after tender of a vehicle is prima facie evidence of failure to repair within a reasonable time. If the condition is not adequately repaired within a reasonable time, the customer may be entitled to an identical or reasonably equivalent vehicle at no charge or to a refund of the purchase price less a reasonable allowance for depreciation. To avoid having to provide these burdensome remedies, every effort must be made to promptly schedule an appointment with each customer and to repair their vehicle as soon as possible. In the recall notification letters, customers are told how to contact the US National Highway Traffic Safety Administration if the recall is not completed within a reasonable time. This bulletin is notice to you that the new motor vehicles included in this recall may not comply with the standard identified above. Under Title 49, Section 30112 of the United States Code, it is illegal for a dealer to sell a new motor vehicle which the dealer knows does not comply with an applicable Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard. As a consequence, if you sell any of these motor vehicles without first performing the recall correction, your dealership may be subject to a civil penalty for each such sale. Dealer Recall Responsibility - All All unsold new vehicles in dealers' possession and subject to this recall must be held and inspected/repaired per the service procedure of this recall bulletin before customers take possession of these vehicles. Dealers are to service all vehicles subject to this recall at no charge to customers, regardless of mileage, age of vehicle, or ownership, from this time forward. Customers who have recently purchased vehicles sold from your vehicle inventory, and for which there is no customer information indicated on the dealer listing, are to be contacted by the dealer. Arrangements are to be made to make the required correction according to the instructions contained in this bulletin. A copy of the customer letter is provided in this bulletin for your use in contacting customers. Recall follow-up cards should not be used for this purpose, since the customer may not as yet have received the notification letter. In summary, whenever a vehicle subject to this recall enters your vehicle inventory, or is in your dealership for service in the future, you must take the steps necessary to be sure the recall correction has been made before selling or releasing the vehicle. Disclaimer Owner Letter Owner Letter Dear General Motors Customer: This notice is sent to you in accordance with the requirements of the National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act. General Motors has decided that certain 2010 model year Chevrolet Equinox and GMC Terrain vehicles fail to conform to Federal/Canada Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 103, "Windshield Defrosting and Defogging Systems", and Standard 101, "Controls and Displays". As a result, GM is conducting a recall. We apologize for this inconvenience. However, we are concerned about your safety and continued satisfaction with our products. Important - Your vehicle is involved in recall 09298. - Schedule an appointment with your GM dealer. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Instrument Panel Control Module: > 09298D > Nov > 10 > Recall - Defroster/Defogger Inoperative > Page 13447 - This service will be performed for you at no charge. Why is your vehicle being recalled? The software in the center instrument panel can cause the heating, air conditioning, defrost, and radio controls, as well as the panel illumination to become inoperative. Driving without a functioning defrost system can decrease your visibility under certain driving conditions and could result in a crash without warning. Driving without panel illumination can divert your attention while looking for a control. What will we do? Your GM dealer will replace the computer module in the center instrument panel. This service will be performed for you at no charge. Because of service scheduling requirements, it is likely that your dealer will need your vehicle longer than the actual service correction time of approximately 20 minutes. If your vehicle is within the New Vehicle Limited Warranty, your dealer may provide you with shuttle service or some other form of courtesy transportation while your vehicle is at the dealership for this repair. Please refer to your Owner's Manual and your dealer for details on courtesy transportation. What should you do? You should contact your GM dealer to arrange a service appointment as soon as possible. When scheduling your appointment, please provide your dealer with your vehicle's 17 character vehicle identification number (VIN). Your VIN can be found above your name and address at the top of this letter, and will follow the numbers "09298". Your dealer will need your VIN to order parts for your vehicle so that they will be available on the day of your service appointment. Do you have questions? If you have questions or concerns that your dealer is unable to resolve, please contact the appropriate Customer Assistance Center at the number listed below. More information about your vehicle can be found at the Owner Center at www.gmownercenter.com. If after contacting your dealer and the Customer Assistance Center, you are still not satisfied we have done our best to remedy this condition without charge and within a reasonable time, you may wish to write the Administrator, National Highway Traffic Safety Administration, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE, Washington DC 20590, or call the toll-free Vehicle Safety Hotline at 1.888.327.4236 (TTY 1.800.424.9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov. Federal regulation requires that any vehicle lessor receiving this recall notice must forward a copy of this notice to the lessee within ten days. Scott Lawson Director, Customer and Relationship Services 09298 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Instrument Panel Control Module: > 10-08-49-003 > May > 10 > Electrical - Instrument Panel Blanks Out/Inoperative Instrument Panel Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Electrical - Instrument Panel Blanks Out/Inoperative TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 10-08-49-003 Date: May 17, 2010 Subject: Intermittent Instrument Panel Cluster (IPC) Inoperative, Driver Information Center (DIC) Blanks Out (Reprogram IPC) Models: 2010 Chevrolet Equinox 2010 GMC Terrain All Built Prior to November 15, 2009 Condition In rare cases, some customers may comment that on ignition start up, intermittently, the IPC lights do not come on, the IPC gauges are inoperative, or the DIC goes blank. The Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) may also come on. Cause This condition may be caused by a software state or anomaly, which can contribute to one or more of the above conditions. Correction Important On certain IPCs that are inoperative, the cluster could lock up in sleep mode. Cycling the ignition will not unlock it from sleep mode. Disconnect the battery or fuse for at least 3 minutes and re-apply the power to unlock the cluster. This procedure is required prior to reprogramming an IPC that is locked up in sleep mode. DO NOT replace the IPC or Body Control Module (BCM) for this concern. Reprogram the IPC with the latest software calibration. Note A limited number of early build Equinox vehicles may experience an error when attempting to reprogram the IPC. Should you experience this condition when reprogramming the IPC, please contact the Techline Customer Support Center (TCSC) for revised calibrations. VINS that MAY experience this condition will have VIN sequence numbers between 200008 and 200575. Important Select the correct calibration files for the appropriate vehicle configuration (body style) and RPO codes. A revised calibration has been developed to address this condition. Technicians are to reprogram the IPC using the Service Programming System (SPS) with the latest software available on TIS2WEB. Refer to Instrument Cluster Programming and Setup in SI. When using a Tech 2(R) or a Multiple Diagnostic Interface (MDI) for reprogramming, ensure that it is updated with the latest software version. During programming, the battery voltage must be maintained within the proper range of 12-15 Volts. Only use the approved Midtronics(R) PSC 550 Battery Maintainer (SPS Programming Support Tool EL-49642) or equivalent during programming. Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table above. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Instrument Panel Control Module: > 10-08-49-003 > May > 10 > Electrical - Instrument Panel Blanks Out/Inoperative > Page 13452 Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Instrument Panel Control Module: > NHTSA09V489000 > Dec > 09 > Recall 09V489000: Defroster Malfunction Instrument Panel Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Recall 09V489000: Defroster Malfunction VEHICLE MAKE/MODEL: MODEL YEAR(S): Chevrolet/Equinox 2010 GMC/Terrain 2010 MANUFACTURER: General Motors Corp. MFR'S REPORT DATE: December 18, 2009 NHTSA CAMPAIGN ID NUMBER: 09V489000 NHTSA ACTION NUMBER: N/A COMPONENT: Visibility: Defroster/Defogger System POTENTIAL NUMBER OF UNITS AFFECTED: 59031 SUMMARY: General Motors is recalling certain model year 2010 Chevrolet Equinox and GMC Terrain vehicles for failing to comply with the requirements of Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 103, "Windshield Defrosting and Defogging Systems and with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 101, "Controls and Displays". The software in the center instrument panel can cause the heating, air conditioning, defrost, and radio controls, as well as the panel illumination to become inoperative. CONSEQUENCE: Driving without a functioning defrost system can decrease your visibility under certain driving conditions and could result in a crash without warning. REMEDY: Dealers will replace the computer module in the center instrument panel free of charge. The safety recall is expected to begin during January 2010. Owners may contact Chevrolet at 1-800-630-2438, GMC at 1-866-996-9463 or at www.gmownercenter.com. NOTES: GM safety recall No. 090298. Owners may also contact The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration's Vehicle Safety Hotline at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY 1-800-424-9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Instrument Panel Control Module: > 09298D > Nov > 10 > Recall - Defroster/Defogger Inoperative Technical Service Bulletin # 09298D Date: 101122 Recall - Defroster/Defogger Inoperative FMVSS NONCOMPLIANCE Bulletin No.: 09298D Date: November 22, 2010 Subject: 09298D - Heating and Windshield Defrost Inoperative - Replace Computer Module Models: 2010 Chevrolet Equinox 2010 GMC Terrain Supercede: The Parts Information section in this bulletin has been revised for Canadian dealers. Mass Comp is no longer an Authorized GM Electronics Service Center. Canadian dealers are to begin contacting York Electronics for all exchanges.Discard all copies of bulletin 09298C, issued March 2010. Customers are being instructed to provide their VIN when calling to schedule a service appointment. If the vehicle will not be programmed at the dealership, please provide the VIN to the Parts Manager so parts can be ordered and received in time for the service appointment. Parts will be shipped overnight to dealers so please do not order more than 2 days prior to the scheduled service appointment date. Condition General Motors has decided that certain 2010 model year Chevrolet Equinox and GMC Terrain vehicles fail to conform to Federal/Canada Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 103, "Windshield Defrosting and Defogging Systems", and Standard 101, "Controls and Displays". On these vehicles, software in the center instrument panel can cause the heating, air conditioning, defrost, and radio controls, as well as the panel illumination to become inoperative. Driving without a functioning defrost system can decrease the driver's visibility under certain driving conditions and could result in a crash without warning. Driving without panel illumination can divert the driver's attention while looking for a control. Correction Dealers are to replace the computer module in the center instrument panel. Vehicles Involved Involved are certain 2010 model year Chevrolet Equinox and GMC Terrain vehicles built within these VIN breakpoints: Important Dealers are to confirm vehicle eligibility prior to beginning repairs by using the Required Field Actions section in the Global Warranty system. Not all vehicles within the above breakpoints may be involved. For dealers with involved vehicles, a listing with involved vehicles containing the complete vehicle identification number, customer name, and address information has been prepared and will be provided to US and Canadian dealers through the GM GlobalConnect Recall Reports, or sent directly to export dealers. Dealers will not have a report available if they have no involved vehicles currently assigned. The listing may contain customer names and addresses obtained from Motor Vehicle Registration Records. The use of such motor vehicle registration data for any purpose other than follow-up necessary to complete this recall is a violation of law in several states/provinces/countries. Accordingly, you are urged to limit the use of this report to the follow-up necessary to complete this recall. Parts Information For dealers using the programming tool: Most repairs require no parts. There are a small number of vehicles that will not be able to be reprogrammed; for these vehicles, please follow the parts information below. If you have parts currently in your inventory, please return them to Specmo (U.S.) or York Electronics (Canada). For dealers that did not receive a programming tool: A center instrument panel will be required. Note Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Instrument Panel Control Module: > 09298D > Nov > 10 > Recall - Defroster/Defogger Inoperative > Page 13462 Center instrument panels (radio control assemblies) will be shipped overnight to dealers. Note: Core returns for this recall are to be shipped within 24 hours of receiving the exchange. A prepaid Federal Express Ground label will be included with each exchange. Package the core securely in the original packaging and package inserts provided with the exchange. It is important that the return unit be packaged identically to the exchange unit to prevent damage in shipping. Failure to return the core will result in a charge to the dealer's Open Parts Account. Do not order parts for customer vehicles until they have scheduled an appointment. U.S. Dealers Only: If the customer is not experiencing any concerns with the center instrument panel (ICS), please contact Specmo Enterprises for arrange for an exchange. If the customer does have ICS concerns, please contact the Technical Assistance Center (TAC) prior to ordering an exchange ICS. Dealers are to contact Specmo Enterprises via the internet at www.specmo.com/dealers, to arrange for an exchange of the center instrument panel (radio control assembly). Dealers that do not have an account with Specmo will be able to create an account in order to access the website. Arrange for an exchange by following the prompts. The information below will be required to arrange for an exchange. - Bulletin number 09298 - VIN Ontario Dealers Only: Due to a limited inventory, and to avoid backorders, an onsite mobile upgrade is available. Please contact York Electronics at 888-650-9675 to schedule an appointment. All Other Provinces, Excluding Ontario: To arrange for an exchange of the centre instrument panel (radio control assembly), please contact York Electronics at 888-650-9675. Service Procedure Service Procedure Using the Programming Tool (for dealers that were shipped a programming tool) Note Programming is not performed using TIS2WEB SPS; use provided programming tool. Note If the customer is NOT experiencing any concerns with the center instrument panel (ICS), reprogram the rdio control assembly (center instrument panels) following the instructions below. If the customer does have ICS concerns, please contact the Technical Assistance Center (TAC) prior to programming the radio control assembly (center instrument panels). (1) First Design Radio Control Assembly; (2) Second Design Radio Control Assembly 1. Determine if the radio control assembly is programmable. First design radio control assemblies are NOT programmable and must go through the radio control assembly exchange process. - First design radio control assemblies (1) are NOT programmable. There are NO slots on the backside of the radio control assembly. - Second design radio control assemblies (2) are programmable. They have two slots on the backside of the radio control assembly. If the radio control assembly is a second design assembly, proceed to Step 2. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Instrument Panel Control Module: > 09298D > Nov > 10 > Recall - Defroster/Defogger Inoperative > Page 13463 Caution Insert a plastic body trim tool between the IP and radio control assembly along the top portion of the radio control assembly as shown in the illustration. DO NOT use a flat-blade screwdriver to remove the radio assembly. 2. Remove the radio control assembly (1). Refer to Radio Control Assembly Replacement in SI. 3. Carefully align the radio control assembly channels to the locating pegs of the programming tool as shown in the illustration. 4. Carefully seat the radio control assembly onto the programming tool. 5. The display area of the programming tool will indicate when the programming event has been completed. The programming tool will read "Programming Successful. Remove module." The programming event takes less than 30 seconds to complete. 6. Detach the radio control assembly from the programming tool. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Instrument Panel Control Module: > 09298D > Nov > 10 > Recall - Defroster/Defogger Inoperative > Page 13464 7. Place blue dot (3) on the back of the radio control assembly to indicate that the radio control module has been reprogrammed. 8. Install the radio control assembly. Refer to Radio Control Assembly Replacement in SI. Service Procedure Using the Radio Control Assembly Exchange Process Caution Insert a plastic body trim tool between the IP and radio control assembly along the top portion of the radio control assembly as shown in the illustration. DO NOT use a flat-bladed screwdriver to remove the radio control assembly. Note If the customer is NOT experiencing any concerns with the center instrument panel (ICS), proceed to Step 1 and perform this recall. If the customer DOES have ICS concerns, please contact the Technical Assistance Center (TAC) prior to performing this recall. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Instrument Panel Control Module: > 09298D > Nov > 10 > Recall - Defroster/Defogger Inoperative > Page 13465 Note For vehicles without the color touch screen navigation, unsnap and remove the display from the radio control assembly. Do not return the radio display with the radio control assembly. 1. Remove the radio control assembly (1). Refer to Radio Control Assembly Replacement in SI. 2. Package the radio control assembly and ship it to the exchange center indicated on the prepaid Federal Express Ground label that was enclosed with the exchange unit within 24 hours. Note Module programming and setup is NOT required when replacing only the radio control assembly. 3. Install the radio control assembly. Refer to Radio Control Assembly Replacement in SI. Courtesy Transportation - For US and Canada The General Motors Courtesy Transportation program is intended to minimize customer inconvenience when a vehicle requires a repair that is covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranties. The availability of courtesy transportation to customers whose vehicles are within the warranty coverage period and involved in a product program is very important in maintaining customer satisfaction. Dealers are to ensure that these customers understand that shuttle service or some other form of courtesy transportation is available and will be provided at no charge. Dealers should refer to the General Motors Service Policies and Procedures Manual for Courtesy Transportation guidelines. Warranty Transaction Information 1. Submit a transaction using the table below. * Dealers using WINS should add 0.2 administrative allowance to the labor time. Dealers using GWM should submit 0.2 hours administrative allowance under Administrative Time. ** Administrative allowance for unit exchange. *** Dealers are to claim only administrative allowance of 0.2 hours when the radio control assembly is reprogrammed by York's Mobile Unit. Dealers using WINS should submit 0.2 hours administrative allowance in labor time. Dealers using GWM should submit 0.2 hours administrative allowance under Administrative Time. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Instrument Panel Control Module: > 09298D > Nov > 10 > Recall - Defroster/Defogger Inoperative > Page 13466 Customer Notification - For US and Canada General Motors will notify customers of this recall on their vehicle (see copy of customer letter included with this bulletin). Customer Notification - For Export Letters will be sent to known owners of record located within areas covered by the US National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act. For owners outside these areas, dealers should notify customers using the attached sample letter. Dealer Recall Responsibility - For US and Export (US States, Territories, and Possessions) The US National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act provides that each vehicle that is subject to a recall of this type must be adequately repaired within a reasonable time after the customer has tendered it for repair. A failure to repair within sixty days after tender of a vehicle is prima facie evidence of failure to repair within a reasonable time. If the condition is not adequately repaired within a reasonable time, the customer may be entitled to an identical or reasonably equivalent vehicle at no charge or to a refund of the purchase price less a reasonable allowance for depreciation. To avoid having to provide these burdensome remedies, every effort must be made to promptly schedule an appointment with each customer and to repair their vehicle as soon as possible. In the recall notification letters, customers are told how to contact the US National Highway Traffic Safety Administration if the recall is not completed within a reasonable time. This bulletin is notice to you that the new motor vehicles included in this recall may not comply with the standard identified above. Under Title 49, Section 30112 of the United States Code, it is illegal for a dealer to sell a new motor vehicle which the dealer knows does not comply with an applicable Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard. As a consequence, if you sell any of these motor vehicles without first performing the recall correction, your dealership may be subject to a civil penalty for each such sale. Dealer Recall Responsibility - All All unsold new vehicles in dealers' possession and subject to this recall must be held and inspected/repaired per the service procedure of this recall bulletin before customers take possession of these vehicles. Dealers are to service all vehicles subject to this recall at no charge to customers, regardless of mileage, age of vehicle, or ownership, from this time forward. Customers who have recently purchased vehicles sold from your vehicle inventory, and for which there is no customer information indicated on the dealer listing, are to be contacted by the dealer. Arrangements are to be made to make the required correction according to the instructions contained in this bulletin. A copy of the customer letter is provided in this bulletin for your use in contacting customers. Recall follow-up cards should not be used for this purpose, since the customer may not as yet have received the notification letter. In summary, whenever a vehicle subject to this recall enters your vehicle inventory, or is in your dealership for service in the future, you must take the steps necessary to be sure the recall correction has been made before selling or releasing the vehicle. Disclaimer Owner Letter Owner Letter Dear General Motors Customer: This notice is sent to you in accordance with the requirements of the National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act. General Motors has decided that certain 2010 model year Chevrolet Equinox and GMC Terrain vehicles fail to conform to Federal/Canada Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 103, "Windshield Defrosting and Defogging Systems", and Standard 101, "Controls and Displays". As a result, GM is conducting a recall. We apologize for this inconvenience. However, we are concerned about your safety and continued satisfaction with our products. Important - Your vehicle is involved in recall 09298. - Schedule an appointment with your GM dealer. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Instrument Panel Control Module: > 09298D > Nov > 10 > Recall - Defroster/Defogger Inoperative > Page 13467 - This service will be performed for you at no charge. Why is your vehicle being recalled? The software in the center instrument panel can cause the heating, air conditioning, defrost, and radio controls, as well as the panel illumination to become inoperative. Driving without a functioning defrost system can decrease your visibility under certain driving conditions and could result in a crash without warning. Driving without panel illumination can divert your attention while looking for a control. What will we do? Your GM dealer will replace the computer module in the center instrument panel. This service will be performed for you at no charge. Because of service scheduling requirements, it is likely that your dealer will need your vehicle longer than the actual service correction time of approximately 20 minutes. If your vehicle is within the New Vehicle Limited Warranty, your dealer may provide you with shuttle service or some other form of courtesy transportation while your vehicle is at the dealership for this repair. Please refer to your Owner's Manual and your dealer for details on courtesy transportation. What should you do? You should contact your GM dealer to arrange a service appointment as soon as possible. When scheduling your appointment, please provide your dealer with your vehicle's 17 character vehicle identification number (VIN). Your VIN can be found above your name and address at the top of this letter, and will follow the numbers "09298". Your dealer will need your VIN to order parts for your vehicle so that they will be available on the day of your service appointment. Do you have questions? If you have questions or concerns that your dealer is unable to resolve, please contact the appropriate Customer Assistance Center at the number listed below. More information about your vehicle can be found at the Owner Center at www.gmownercenter.com. If after contacting your dealer and the Customer Assistance Center, you are still not satisfied we have done our best to remedy this condition without charge and within a reasonable time, you may wish to write the Administrator, National Highway Traffic Safety Administration, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE, Washington DC 20590, or call the toll-free Vehicle Safety Hotline at 1.888.327.4236 (TTY 1.800.424.9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov. Federal regulation requires that any vehicle lessor receiving this recall notice must forward a copy of this notice to the lessee within ten days. Scott Lawson Director, Customer and Relationship Services 09298 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Instrument Panel Control Module: > NHTSA09V489000 > Dec > 09 > Recall 09V489000: Defroster Malfunction Instrument Panel Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Recall 09V489000: Defroster Malfunction VEHICLE MAKE/MODEL: MODEL YEAR(S): Chevrolet/Equinox 2010 GMC/Terrain 2010 MANUFACTURER: General Motors Corp. MFR'S REPORT DATE: December 18, 2009 NHTSA CAMPAIGN ID NUMBER: 09V489000 NHTSA ACTION NUMBER: N/A COMPONENT: Visibility: Defroster/Defogger System POTENTIAL NUMBER OF UNITS AFFECTED: 59031 SUMMARY: General Motors is recalling certain model year 2010 Chevrolet Equinox and GMC Terrain vehicles for failing to comply with the requirements of Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 103, "Windshield Defrosting and Defogging Systems and with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 101, "Controls and Displays". The software in the center instrument panel can cause the heating, air conditioning, defrost, and radio controls, as well as the panel illumination to become inoperative. CONSEQUENCE: Driving without a functioning defrost system can decrease your visibility under certain driving conditions and could result in a crash without warning. REMEDY: Dealers will replace the computer module in the center instrument panel free of charge. The safety recall is expected to begin during January 2010. Owners may contact Chevrolet at 1-800-630-2438, GMC at 1-866-996-9463 or at www.gmownercenter.com. NOTES: GM safety recall No. 090298. Owners may also contact The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration's Vehicle Safety Hotline at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY 1-800-424-9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Instrument Panel Control Module: > 10-08-49-003 > May > 10 > Electrical - Instrument Panel Blanks Out/Inoperative Instrument Panel Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Electrical - Instrument Panel Blanks Out/Inoperative TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 10-08-49-003 Date: May 17, 2010 Subject: Intermittent Instrument Panel Cluster (IPC) Inoperative, Driver Information Center (DIC) Blanks Out (Reprogram IPC) Models: 2010 Chevrolet Equinox 2010 GMC Terrain All Built Prior to November 15, 2009 Condition In rare cases, some customers may comment that on ignition start up, intermittently, the IPC lights do not come on, the IPC gauges are inoperative, or the DIC goes blank. The Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) may also come on. Cause This condition may be caused by a software state or anomaly, which can contribute to one or more of the above conditions. Correction Important On certain IPCs that are inoperative, the cluster could lock up in sleep mode. Cycling the ignition will not unlock it from sleep mode. Disconnect the battery or fuse for at least 3 minutes and re-apply the power to unlock the cluster. This procedure is required prior to reprogramming an IPC that is locked up in sleep mode. DO NOT replace the IPC or Body Control Module (BCM) for this concern. Reprogram the IPC with the latest software calibration. Note A limited number of early build Equinox vehicles may experience an error when attempting to reprogram the IPC. Should you experience this condition when reprogramming the IPC, please contact the Techline Customer Support Center (TCSC) for revised calibrations. VINS that MAY experience this condition will have VIN sequence numbers between 200008 and 200575. Important Select the correct calibration files for the appropriate vehicle configuration (body style) and RPO codes. A revised calibration has been developed to address this condition. Technicians are to reprogram the IPC using the Service Programming System (SPS) with the latest software available on TIS2WEB. Refer to Instrument Cluster Programming and Setup in SI. When using a Tech 2(R) or a Multiple Diagnostic Interface (MDI) for reprogramming, ensure that it is updated with the latest software version. During programming, the battery voltage must be maintained within the proper range of 12-15 Volts. Only use the approved Midtronics(R) PSC 550 Battery Maintainer (SPS Programming Support Tool EL-49642) or equivalent during programming. Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table above. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Instrument Panel Control Module: > 10-08-49-003 > May > 10 > Electrical - Instrument Panel Blanks Out/Inoperative > Page 13477 Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Low Tire Pressure Indicator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM System Message/Service Tips Low Tire Pressure Indicator: Technical Service Bulletins Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM System Message/Service Tips # 09-03-16-002A: Dealership Service Consultant Procedure as Vehicle Comes into Service Drive for Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM) System Message, Light and Customer Information - (Apr 27, 2010) Subject: Dealership Service Consultant Procedure as Vehicle Comes into Service Drive for Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM) System Message, Light and Customer Information Models: 2006-2011 Cars and Light Duty Trucks (Including Saturn and Saab) 2006-2010 HUMMER H2, H3 ATTENTION The information found in this bulletin is to be used as a dealership service consultant procedures for customers coming into the service lane with an illuminated "low tire light" or comments on a check tire pressure/low tire pressure/add air to tire or service tire monitor system message. Maintaining proper tire pressures is an Owner's Maintenance item and is not covered under warranty. This bulletin is being revised to add model years and update additional bulletin reference information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 09-03-16-002 (Section 03 -- Suspension). Customer Concerns and Confusion with the Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPM) System The following procedure should be used by dealership service consultants when a customer comes into the service drive with a "low tire light" on or comments on a check tire pressure/low tire pressure/add air to tire or service tire monitor system message. The service consultant should perform the following steps: Procedure Turn the key to ON, without starting the engine. ^ If the low tire light comes on and stays on solid with a check tire pressure/low tire pressure/add air to tire message (on vehicles equipped with DIC), advise the customer: - The system is working properly. - Properly adjusting all tire air pressures to the recommended levels and driving the vehicle will turn the light off (refer to the Tire and Loading Information label on the driver side door). - More detailed information can be found in the Owner Manual. - Service is not covered under warranty - this maintenance is the responsibility of the owner. - Give the customer a copy of the "GM Customer TPMS Information". ^ If the Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM) light blinks for one minute then stays on solid with a service tire monitor system message (on vehicles equipped with DIC): - A TPM system problem exists. The vehicle should be written up accordingly and sent to your service department for further DTC diagnosis and service. - If dashes (--) are displayed in only one or two of the tire pressure readouts, it is likely caused by a previous TPM system relearn that was performed incorrectly due to interference from another vehicle's TPM system during the relearn process (refer to the Important statement later in this bulletin regarding TPM relearn with a Tech 2(R)). - If dashes (--) are displayed in all four of the tire pressure readouts, there is a system problem. Follow the appropriate SI service procedures. ^ If a customer indicates the low tire light comes on for a few minutes when the vehicle is started, then goes off after driving a while, advise the customer: - The system is working properly. - Most likely, air pressure in one or more of the tires is low enough to turn the light on when tires are cold. After driving for a while, tires will heat Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Low Tire Pressure Indicator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM System Message/Service Tips > Page 13482 up, allowing tire air pressure to increase above the threshold causing the light to go off. Properly adjusting all tire air pressures to the recommended levels will correct this (Refer to the Tire and Loading Information Label on the driver side door). - More detailed information can be found in the Owner Manual. - Service is not covered under warranty - this maintenance is the responsibility of the owner. - Give the customer a copy of the "GM Customer TPMS Information". For more detailed information, refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 07-03-16-004C and TPMS Training Course 13044.12T2. Tire Pressure Light At key on, without starting the vehicle: Steady Solid Glowing TPM Indicator If the TPM indicator appears as a steady glowing yellow lamp (as above), the system is functioning properly and you should add air to the tires to correct this condition. Blinking TPM Indicator If the TPM indicator appears as a BLINKING yellow lamp for one minute and then stays on solid, diagnostic service is needed. The Effect of Outside Temperature on Tire Pressures Important: As a rule of thumb, tire pressure will change about 7kPa (1 psi) for every 6°C (10°F) decrease in temperature - Tire pressure will drop when it gets colder outside, and rise when it gets warmer. Under certain situations such as extreme outside temperature changes, the system may bring on a solid light with a check tire pressure message. This should be considered normal and the system is working properly. The light will turn off upon adding the proper amount of air to the tires (refer to the Tire & Loading Information label in the driver's door opening). When properly adjusting tire air pressure, the following steps are important to help optimize the system and prolong bringing a tire pressure light on: ^ Use an accurate, high quality tire pressure gauge. ^ Never set the tire pressure below the specified placard value regardless of tire temperature or ambient temperature. ^ Tire pressure should be set to the specified placard pressure at the lowest seasonal temperature the vehicle will encounter during operation. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Low Tire Pressure Indicator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM System Message/Service Tips > Page 13483 ^ When adding proper tire air pressure, it is important to remember fluctuations in outside air temperatures and tire temperatures effect tire air pressures. ^ After you have added the proper tire pressure, if the vehicle has a DIC (after the system has updated), check to see if DIC displays are the same readings as the tire pressure gauge used (adjust as necessary). ^ Only perform a TPM sensor re-learn after a tire rotation or system part replacements and use the Tech 2(R) to initiate the relearn whenever possible to avoid invalid sensor I.D. learns. Important: Always take outside temperature and tire temperature into consideration to properly set tire pressures. Foe example, on colder days (20°F/-7°C), if setting tire pressure when the vehicle has been indoors (60°F/16°C) or the tires are warm from being driven, it will be necessary to compensate for the low outside temperature by adding 21-27 kPa (3-4 psi) more then the placecard pressure. At some later time, when the vehicle has been parked outside for a while, the tires will cool off and the pressures will drop back into the placecard range. Important: Recently, nitrogen gas (for use in inflating tires) has become available to the general customer through some retailers. The use of nitrogen gas to inflate tires is a technology used in automobile racing. Tires inflated with nitrogen gas may exhibit less of a pressure change in response to outside temperature changes. Nitrogen gas inflation is compatible with GM TPM sensors. For additional information, refer to Corporate Service Bulletin 05-03-10-020C. Important: All Models (Except the Pontiac Vibe): Do not perform a TPM relearn at PDI, the system has already been set at the Assembly Plant. Do not perform a TPM relearn after adding air to the tires. The low tire light is similar to the low fuel indicator and adding something (fuel, air) to the vehicle makes that light turn back off again. Note that because of system behavior, some vehicles must be driven a short distance before the sensors recognize the increase in pressure and turns the light off again. Pontiac Vibe Only: Do not use the TPMS reset button to turn off the light. The system will update and light will turn off when all tire pressures have been adjusted followed by short distance drive. Important: All models (except the Pontiac Vibe): Each tire monitor sensor is learned to a specific vehicle corner. When performing a TPM relearn (only after a tire rotation or replacement of a TPM sensor or Module), always use the Tech2(R) to initiate the J 46079 relearned process. Tech 2(R) - initiated relearns lock out other vehicle TPM signals that may be broadcasting in the area. Only signals initiated by the J 46079 tool will be accepted. This method avoids storing false TPM I.D.s and will prevent customers from returning with dashes (--) displayed in tire pressure readouts and/or a flashing tire pressure monitor (TPM) light. Checking the four TPM I.D.s with the Tech 2(R) prior to and following relearn to verify they are the same can prevent invalid I.D. learns. Pontiac Vibe Only: Tire Monitor Sensors are not learned to a specific vehicle corner. Do not perform a TPM Reset after tire rotation. The TPMS Reset button must only be used during pre-delivery inspection by the dealer to initialize the system (after all tire pressures have been adjusted properly) or when a Tire Pressure Monitor System component is replaced. The J 46079 tool does not work on Vibe TPM sensors. A TPMS relearn on Vibe must be preformed with a Tech 2(R) to set the TPMS Module in learn mode. The TPMS sensor IDs are entered through the Tech 2(R). Refer to SI for further Vibe TPMS information. Labor Operation and Repair Order/Warranty System Claim Required Documentation Important: The ONLY time labor operation E0726 or E0722 should be used is to diagnose for a system issue. That should ONLY occur if, at key ON, without starting the engine, the Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM) blinks for one minute and then stays on solid with a Service Tire Monitor System message (on vehicles equipped with a DIC) If that occurs, a TPM system problem exists and the system will have set a DTC. If one of these operastions is used, the following Repair Order and Warranty System documentation are required: ^ Document the customer complaint on the Repair Order. ^ Document the TPMS DTC that has set on the Repair Order. ^ Enter the TPMS DTC in the Warranty System (WINS) in the Failure Code/DTC field on the claim submission (refer to the Claims Processing Manual, Section IV, Warranty claim Data, Page 6, Item G). If the above information is not documented on the Repair Order and Warranty System, the claim may be rejected. If the Warranty Parts Center (WPC) generates a request, this repair order documentation must be sent back. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Low Tire Pressure Indicator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM System Message/Service Tips > Page 13484 Customer TPMS Information Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Low Tire Pressure Indicator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM System Message/Service Tips > Page 13485 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Low Tire Pressure Indicator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM System Message/Service Tips > Page 13486 Frequently Asked Questions Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Maintenance Required Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Service and Repair Maintenance Required Lamp/Indicator: Service and Repair SERVICE VEHICLE SOON or SERVICE ENGINE SOON INDICATOR If your vehicle is equipped with a "SERVICE VEHICLE SOON"or a "SERVICE ENGINE SOON" indicator. This indicator is not a maintenance indicator and does not mean a maintenance service is required. For additional "SERVICE VEHICLE SOON"or a "SERVICE ENGINE SOON" indicator information refer to Malfunction Indicator Lamp. For Maintenance Required Lamp/Indicator, refer to Oil Change Reminder Lamp. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Malfunction Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Malfunction Indicator Lamp: Testing and Inspection Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) Diagnosis Diagnostic Instructions * Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle (See: Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle) prior to using this diagnostic procedure. * Review Strategy Based Diagnosis (See: Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Strategy Based Diagnosis) for an overview of the diagnostic approach. * Diagnostic Procedure Instructions (See: Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Diagnostic Procedure Instructions )provides an overview of each diagnostic category. Circuit/System Description Ignition voltage is supplied to the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL). The engine control module (ECM) turns the MIL ON by grounding the MIL control circuit. Diagnostic Aids If the condition is intermittent, move the related harnesses and connectors with the engine operating. Monitor the scan tool Circuit Test Status parameters for the component. The Circuit Test Status parameter will change from OK or Not run to Fault if there is a condition with the circuit or a connection. Reference Information Schematic Reference * Instrument Cluster Schematics (See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Instrument Cluster Schematics) * Engine Controls Schematics (See: Powertrain Management/Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams) Connector End View Reference Component Connector End Views (See: Diagrams/Connector Views) Electrical Information Reference * Circuit Testing (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Circuit Testing) * Connector Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Connector Repairs/Connector Repairs) * Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Circuit Testing/Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections) * Wiring Repairs (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/General Electrical Diagnostic Procedures/Wiring Repairs/Wiring Repairs) Scan Tool Reference Control Module References (See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning)for scan tool information Circuit/System Verification 1. Ignition ON, observe the scan tool MIL Circuit Test Status parameters. Each of the MIL circuit test status parameters should display OK or Not Run. 2. Ignition ON, command the MIL ON and OFF with a scan tool. The MIL should turn ON and OFF as commanded. 3. Operate the vehicle within the Conditions for Running the DTC to verify the DTC does not reset. You may also operate the vehicle within the conditions that you observed from the Freeze Frame/Failure Records data. Circuit/System Testing 1. If any other IPC indicators or gauges are inoperative, refer to Instrument Cluster Gauges Inoperative (See: Testing and Inspection/Instrument Cluster Gauges Inoperative). 2. Ignition OFF, disconnect the ECM harness connectors. Ignition ON, the MIL should not illuminate. ‹› If the MIL is illuminated, test the MIL control circuit terminal 46-X1 for a short to ground. If the circuit tests normal, replace the IPC. 3. Ignition ON, connect a 3 A fused jumper wire between the MIL control circuit terminal 46-X1 and ground. The MIL should illuminate. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Malfunction Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 13493 ‹› If the MIL does not illuminate, test the MIL control circuit for a short to voltage, or an open/high resistance. If the circuit test normal, replace the IPC/bulb. 4. If all circuits/connections test normal, replace the ECM. Repair Instructions Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification (See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures/Verification Tests and Procedures) after completing the diagnostic procedure. * Control Module References (See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning) * Instrument Cluster Replacement (Equinox) (See: Instrument Cluster / Carrier/Service and Repair)Instrument Cluster Replacement (Terrain) ( See: Instrument Cluster / Carrier/Service and Repair) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Odometer > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Instruments - IPC Odometer Programming Reference Guide Odometer: Technical Service Bulletins Instruments - IPC Odometer Programming Reference Guide INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 07-08-49-020D Date: December 06, 2010 Subject: IPC Odometer Programming Method Quick Reference Guide Models: 2003-2011 GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (Including Saturn) 2003-2010 HUMMER H2, H3 2005-2009 Saab 9-7X Attention: This bulletin applies to vehicles sold in the U.S. and Canada Only. Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add information for the 2011 model year and add new 2011 vehicles. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 07-08-49-020C (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). The purpose of this bulletin is to provide a reference guide to help identify which season odometer programming method to use after replacing the instrument panel cluster (IPC). The three season odometer programming methods in use today are listed below. In addition, this reference guide lists the component where the season odometer value is stored. The season odometer value may be stored in the IPC, the driver information center (DIC) or the integrated body control module (IBCM), also commonly called a body control module (BCM). Season Odometer Programming Methods in Use Today 1. IPC reprogramming and setup using the service programming system (SPS). 2. Odometer setup at the electronic service center (ESC) when using an exchange IPC/DIC. 3. Tech 2(R) - The Tech 2 is used to set up a replacement BCM, which includes loading the odometer value that is displayed and stored in the IPC. A replacement IPC will display the previously stored vehicle odometer value, communicated from the BCM, after cycling the ignition or driving the vehicle. *The odometer programming is integrated as part of the BCM programming procedure. It is not a stand-alone event. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Odometer > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Instruments - IPC Odometer Programming Reference Guide > Page 13498 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Odometer > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Instruments - IPC Odometer Programming Reference Guide > Page 13499 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Odometer > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Instruments - IPC Odometer Programming Reference Guide > Page 13500 Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Oil Change Reminder Lamp > Component Information > Service and Repair Oil Change Reminder Lamp: Service and Repair GM Oil Life System Resetting This vehicle has a computer system that indicates when to change the engine oil and filter. This is based on engine revolutions and engine temperature, and not on mileage. Based on driving conditions, the mileage at which an oil change is indicated can vary considerably. For the oil life system to work properly, the system must be reset every time the oil is changed. When the system has calculated that oil life has been diminished, it indicates that an oil change is necessary. A "Change Engine Oil Soon" message comes on. Change the oil as soon as possible within the next 1 000 km (600 miles). It is possible that, if driving under the best conditions, the oil life system might not indicate that an oil change is necessary for over a year. However, the engine oil and filter must be changed at least once a year and at this time the system must be reset. Your dealer has trained service people who will perform this work using genuine parts and reset the system. It is also important to check the oil regularly and keep it at the proper level. If the system is ever reset accidentally, the oil must be changed at 5 000 km (3,000 miles) since the last oil change. Remember to reset the oil life system whenever the oil is changed. How to Reset the Engine Oil Life System Reset the system whenever the engine oil is changed so that the system can calculate the next engine oil change. To reset the system: 1. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN with the engine off. 2. Fully press and release the accelerator pedal three times within five seconds. If the vehicle has Driver Information Center (DIC) buttons: 1. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN, with the engine off. 2. Press the DIC menu button until "Remaining Oil Life" displays. 3. Press and hold the set/clear button until "100%" is displayed. 4. Turn the key to LOCK/OFF. The system is reset when the "Change Engine Oil Soon" message goes off. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Parking Assist Warning Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams Parking Assist Warning Indicator: Diagrams P15 Rear Parking Assist Rear Indicators (UD7) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Parking Assist Warning Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 13507 Parking Assist Warning Indicator: Service and Repair Information Center Telltale Assembly Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations Parking Brake Warning Switch: Locations Instrument Panel/Center Console Component Views Lower Left of the Instrument Panel Components 1 - B80 Park Brake Switch 2 - T3 Audio Amplifier 3 - K9 Body Control Module 4 - K73 Telematics Communication Interface Control Module (UE1) 5 - B107 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor 6 T4S Wireless Communication Antenna - Bluetooth (UE1 with UPF) 7 - B22 Brake Pedal Position Sensor 8 - X84 Data Link Connector Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 13511 Parking Brake Warning Switch: Diagrams B80 Park Brake Switch Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 13512 Parking Brake Warning Switch: Service and Repair Parking Brake Indicator Switch Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Relays and Modules - Instrument Panel > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 09298D > Nov > 10 > Recall - Defroster/Defogger Inoperative Technical Service Bulletin # 09298D Date: 101122 Recall - Defroster/Defogger Inoperative FMVSS NONCOMPLIANCE Bulletin No.: 09298D Date: November 22, 2010 Subject: 09298D - Heating and Windshield Defrost Inoperative - Replace Computer Module Models: 2010 Chevrolet Equinox 2010 GMC Terrain Supercede: The Parts Information section in this bulletin has been revised for Canadian dealers. Mass Comp is no longer an Authorized GM Electronics Service Center. Canadian dealers are to begin contacting York Electronics for all exchanges.Discard all copies of bulletin 09298C, issued March 2010. Customers are being instructed to provide their VIN when calling to schedule a service appointment. If the vehicle will not be programmed at the dealership, please provide the VIN to the Parts Manager so parts can be ordered and received in time for the service appointment. Parts will be shipped overnight to dealers so please do not order more than 2 days prior to the scheduled service appointment date. Condition General Motors has decided that certain 2010 model year Chevrolet Equinox and GMC Terrain vehicles fail to conform to Federal/Canada Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 103, "Windshield Defrosting and Defogging Systems", and Standard 101, "Controls and Displays". On these vehicles, software in the center instrument panel can cause the heating, air conditioning, defrost, and radio controls, as well as the panel illumination to become inoperative. Driving without a functioning defrost system can decrease the driver's visibility under certain driving conditions and could result in a crash without warning. Driving without panel illumination can divert the driver's attention while looking for a control. Correction Dealers are to replace the computer module in the center instrument panel. Vehicles Involved Involved are certain 2010 model year Chevrolet Equinox and GMC Terrain vehicles built within these VIN breakpoints: Important Dealers are to confirm vehicle eligibility prior to beginning repairs by using the Required Field Actions section in the Global Warranty system. Not all vehicles within the above breakpoints may be involved. For dealers with involved vehicles, a listing with involved vehicles containing the complete vehicle identification number, customer name, and address information has been prepared and will be provided to US and Canadian dealers through the GM GlobalConnect Recall Reports, or sent directly to export dealers. Dealers will not have a report available if they have no involved vehicles currently assigned. The listing may contain customer names and addresses obtained from Motor Vehicle Registration Records. The use of such motor vehicle registration data for any purpose other than follow-up necessary to complete this recall is a violation of law in several states/provinces/countries. Accordingly, you are urged to limit the use of this report to the follow-up necessary to complete this recall. Parts Information For dealers using the programming tool: Most repairs require no parts. There are a small number of vehicles that will not be able to be reprogrammed; for these vehicles, please follow the parts information below. If you have parts currently in your inventory, please return them to Specmo (U.S.) or York Electronics (Canada). For dealers that did not receive a programming tool: A center instrument panel will be required. Note Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Relays and Modules - Instrument Panel > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 09298D > Nov > 10 > Recall - Defroster/Defogger Inoperative > Page 13522 Center instrument panels (radio control assemblies) will be shipped overnight to dealers. Note: Core returns for this recall are to be shipped within 24 hours of receiving the exchange. A prepaid Federal Express Ground label will be included with each exchange. Package the core securely in the original packaging and package inserts provided with the exchange. It is important that the return unit be packaged identically to the exchange unit to prevent damage in shipping. Failure to return the core will result in a charge to the dealer's Open Parts Account. Do not order parts for customer vehicles until they have scheduled an appointment. U.S. Dealers Only: If the customer is not experiencing any concerns with the center instrument panel (ICS), please contact Specmo Enterprises for arrange for an exchange. If the customer does have ICS concerns, please contact the Technical Assistance Center (TAC) prior to ordering an exchange ICS. Dealers are to contact Specmo Enterprises via the internet at www.specmo.com/dealers, to arrange for an exchange of the center instrument panel (radio control assembly). Dealers that do not have an account with Specmo will be able to create an account in order to access the website. Arrange for an exchange by following the prompts. The information below will be required to arrange for an exchange. - Bulletin number 09298 - VIN Ontario Dealers Only: Due to a limited inventory, and to avoid backorders, an onsite mobile upgrade is available. Please contact York Electronics at 888-650-9675 to schedule an appointment. All Other Provinces, Excluding Ontario: To arrange for an exchange of the centre instrument panel (radio control assembly), please contact York Electronics at 888-650-9675. Service Procedure Service Procedure Using the Programming Tool (for dealers that were shipped a programming tool) Note Programming is not performed using TIS2WEB SPS; use provided programming tool. Note If the customer is NOT experiencing any concerns with the center instrument panel (ICS), reprogram the rdio control assembly (center instrument panels) following the instructions below. If the customer does have ICS concerns, please contact the Technical Assistance Center (TAC) prior to programming the radio control assembly (center instrument panels). (1) First Design Radio Control Assembly; (2) Second Design Radio Control Assembly 1. Determine if the radio control assembly is programmable. First design radio control assemblies are NOT programmable and must go through the radio control assembly exchange process. - First design radio control assemblies (1) are NOT programmable. There are NO slots on the backside of the radio control assembly. - Second design radio control assemblies (2) are programmable. They have two slots on the backside of the radio control assembly. If the radio control assembly is a second design assembly, proceed to Step 2. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Relays and Modules - Instrument Panel > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 09298D > Nov > 10 > Recall - Defroster/Defogger Inoperative > Page 13523 Caution Insert a plastic body trim tool between the IP and radio control assembly along the top portion of the radio control assembly as shown in the illustration. DO NOT use a flat-blade screwdriver to remove the radio assembly. 2. Remove the radio control assembly (1). Refer to Radio Control Assembly Replacement in SI. 3. Carefully align the radio control assembly channels to the locating pegs of the programming tool as shown in the illustration. 4. Carefully seat the radio control assembly onto the programming tool. 5. The display area of the programming tool will indicate when the programming event has been completed. The programming tool will read "Programming Successful. Remove module." The programming event takes less than 30 seconds to complete. 6. Detach the radio control assembly from the programming tool. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Relays and Modules - Instrument Panel > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 09298D > Nov > 10 > Recall - Defroster/Defogger Inoperative > Page 13524 7. Place blue dot (3) on the back of the radio control assembly to indicate that the radio control module has been reprogrammed. 8. Install the radio control assembly. Refer to Radio Control Assembly Replacement in SI. Service Procedure Using the Radio Control Assembly Exchange Process Caution Insert a plastic body trim tool between the IP and radio control assembly along the top portion of the radio control assembly as shown in the illustration. DO NOT use a flat-bladed screwdriver to remove the radio control assembly. Note If the customer is NOT experiencing any concerns with the center instrument panel (ICS), proceed to Step 1 and perform this recall. If the customer DOES have ICS concerns, please contact the Technical Assistance Center (TAC) prior to performing this recall. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Relays and Modules - Instrument Panel > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 09298D > Nov > 10 > Recall - Defroster/Defogger Inoperative > Page 13525 Note For vehicles without the color touch screen navigation, unsnap and remove the display from the radio control assembly. Do not return the radio display with the radio control assembly. 1. Remove the radio control assembly (1). Refer to Radio Control Assembly Replacement in SI. 2. Package the radio control assembly and ship it to the exchange center indicated on the prepaid Federal Express Ground label that was enclosed with the exchange unit within 24 hours. Note Module programming and setup is NOT required when replacing only the radio control assembly. 3. Install the radio control assembly. Refer to Radio Control Assembly Replacement in SI. Courtesy Transportation - For US and Canada The General Motors Courtesy Transportation program is intended to minimize customer inconvenience when a vehicle requires a repair that is covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranties. The availability of courtesy transportation to customers whose vehicles are within the warranty coverage period and involved in a product program is very important in maintaining customer satisfaction. Dealers are to ensure that these customers understand that shuttle service or some other form of courtesy transportation is available and will be provided at no charge. Dealers should refer to the General Motors Service Policies and Procedures Manual for Courtesy Transportation guidelines. Warranty Transaction Information 1. Submit a transaction using the table below. * Dealers using WINS should add 0.2 administrative allowance to the labor time. Dealers using GWM should submit 0.2 hours administrative allowance under Administrative Time. ** Administrative allowance for unit exchange. *** Dealers are to claim only administrative allowance of 0.2 hours when the radio control assembly is reprogrammed by York's Mobile Unit. Dealers using WINS should submit 0.2 hours administrative allowance in labor time. Dealers using GWM should submit 0.2 hours administrative allowance under Administrative Time. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Relays and Modules - Instrument Panel > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 09298D > Nov > 10 > Recall - Defroster/Defogger Inoperative > Page 13526 Customer Notification - For US and Canada General Motors will notify customers of this recall on their vehicle (see copy of customer letter included with this bulletin). Customer Notification - For Export Letters will be sent to known owners of record located within areas covered by the US National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act. For owners outside these areas, dealers should notify customers using the attached sample letter. Dealer Recall Responsibility - For US and Export (US States, Territories, and Possessions) The US National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act provides that each vehicle that is subject to a recall of this type must be adequately repaired within a reasonable time after the customer has tendered it for repair. A failure to repair within sixty days after tender of a vehicle is prima facie evidence of failure to repair within a reasonable time. If the condition is not adequately repaired within a reasonable time, the customer may be entitled to an identical or reasonably equivalent vehicle at no charge or to a refund of the purchase price less a reasonable allowance for depreciation. To avoid having to provide these burdensome remedies, every effort must be made to promptly schedule an appointment with each customer and to repair their vehicle as soon as possible. In the recall notification letters, customers are told how to contact the US National Highway Traffic Safety Administration if the recall is not completed within a reasonable time. This bulletin is notice to you that the new motor vehicles included in this recall may not comply with the standard identified above. Under Title 49, Section 30112 of the United States Code, it is illegal for a dealer to sell a new motor vehicle which the dealer knows does not comply with an applicable Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard. As a consequence, if you sell any of these motor vehicles without first performing the recall correction, your dealership may be subject to a civil penalty for each such sale. Dealer Recall Responsibility - All All unsold new vehicles in dealers' possession and subject to this recall must be held and inspected/repaired per the service procedure of this recall bulletin before customers take possession of these vehicles. Dealers are to service all vehicles subject to this recall at no charge to customers, regardless of mileage, age of vehicle, or ownership, from this time forward. Customers who have recently purchased vehicles sold from your vehicle inventory, and for which there is no customer information indicated on the dealer listing, are to be contacted by the dealer. Arrangements are to be made to make the required correction according to the instructions contained in this bulletin. A copy of the customer letter is provided in this bulletin for your use in contacting customers. Recall follow-up cards should not be used for this purpose, since the customer may not as yet have received the notification letter. In summary, whenever a vehicle subject to this recall enters your vehicle inventory, or is in your dealership for service in the future, you must take the steps necessary to be sure the recall correction has been made before selling or releasing the vehicle. Disclaimer Owner Letter Owner Letter Dear General Motors Customer: This notice is sent to you in accordance with the requirements of the National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act. General Motors has decided that certain 2010 model year Chevrolet Equinox and GMC Terrain vehicles fail to conform to Federal/Canada Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 103, "Windshield Defrosting and Defogging Systems", and Standard 101, "Controls and Displays". As a result, GM is conducting a recall. We apologize for this inconvenience. However, we are concerned about your safety and continued satisfaction with our products. Important - Your vehicle is involved in recall 09298. - Schedule an appointment with your GM dealer. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Relays and Modules - Instrument Panel > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 09298D > Nov > 10 > Recall - Defroster/Defogger Inoperative > Page 13527 - This service will be performed for you at no charge. Why is your vehicle being recalled? The software in the center instrument panel can cause the heating, air conditioning, defrost, and radio controls, as well as the panel illumination to become inoperative. Driving without a functioning defrost system can decrease your visibility under certain driving conditions and could result in a crash without warning. Driving without panel illumination can divert your attention while looking for a control. What will we do? Your GM dealer will replace the computer module in the center instrument panel. This service will be performed for you at no charge. Because of service scheduling requirements, it is likely that your dealer will need your vehicle longer than the actual service correction time of approximately 20 minutes. If your vehicle is within the New Vehicle Limited Warranty, your dealer may provide you with shuttle service or some other form of courtesy transportation while your vehicle is at the dealership for this repair. Please refer to your Owner's Manual and your dealer for details on courtesy transportation. What should you do? You should contact your GM dealer to arrange a service appointment as soon as possible. When scheduling your appointment, please provide your dealer with your vehicle's 17 character vehicle identification number (VIN). Your VIN can be found above your name and address at the top of this letter, and will follow the numbers "09298". Your dealer will need your VIN to order parts for your vehicle so that they will be available on the day of your service appointment. Do you have questions? If you have questions or concerns that your dealer is unable to resolve, please contact the appropriate Customer Assistance Center at the number listed below. More information about your vehicle can be found at the Owner Center at www.gmownercenter.com. If after contacting your dealer and the Customer Assistance Center, you are still not satisfied we have done our best to remedy this condition without charge and within a reasonable time, you may wish to write the Administrator, National Highway Traffic Safety Administration, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE, Washington DC 20590, or call the toll-free Vehicle Safety Hotline at 1.888.327.4236 (TTY 1.800.424.9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov. Federal regulation requires that any vehicle lessor receiving this recall notice must forward a copy of this notice to the lessee within ten days. Scott Lawson Director, Customer and Relationship Services 09298 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Relays and Modules - Instrument Panel > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > NHTSA09V489000 > Dec > 09 > Recall 09V489000: Defroster Malfunction Instrument Panel Control Module: Recalls Recall 09V489000: Defroster Malfunction VEHICLE MAKE/MODEL: MODEL YEAR(S): Chevrolet/Equinox 2010 GMC/Terrain 2010 MANUFACTURER: General Motors Corp. MFR'S REPORT DATE: December 18, 2009 NHTSA CAMPAIGN ID NUMBER: 09V489000 NHTSA ACTION NUMBER: N/A COMPONENT: Visibility: Defroster/Defogger System POTENTIAL NUMBER OF UNITS AFFECTED: 59031 SUMMARY: General Motors is recalling certain model year 2010 Chevrolet Equinox and GMC Terrain vehicles for failing to comply with the requirements of Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 103, "Windshield Defrosting and Defogging Systems and with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 101, "Controls and Displays". The software in the center instrument panel can cause the heating, air conditioning, defrost, and radio controls, as well as the panel illumination to become inoperative. CONSEQUENCE: Driving without a functioning defrost system can decrease your visibility under certain driving conditions and could result in a crash without warning. REMEDY: Dealers will replace the computer module in the center instrument panel free of charge. The safety recall is expected to begin during January 2010. Owners may contact Chevrolet at 1-800-630-2438, GMC at 1-866-996-9463 or at www.gmownercenter.com. NOTES: GM safety recall No. 090298. Owners may also contact The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration's Vehicle Safety Hotline at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY 1-800-424-9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Relays and Modules - Instrument Panel > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 10-08-49-003 > May > 10 > Electrical - Instrument Panel Blanks Out/Inoperative Instrument Panel Control Module: Customer Interest Electrical - Instrument Panel Blanks Out/Inoperative TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 10-08-49-003 Date: May 17, 2010 Subject: Intermittent Instrument Panel Cluster (IPC) Inoperative, Driver Information Center (DIC) Blanks Out (Reprogram IPC) Models: 2010 Chevrolet Equinox 2010 GMC Terrain All Built Prior to November 15, 2009 Condition In rare cases, some customers may comment that on ignition start up, intermittently, the IPC lights do not come on, the IPC gauges are inoperative, or the DIC goes blank. The Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) may also come on. Cause This condition may be caused by a software state or anomaly, which can contribute to one or more of the above conditions. Correction Important On certain IPCs that are inoperative, the cluster could lock up in sleep mode. Cycling the ignition will not unlock it from sleep mode. Disconnect the battery or fuse for at least 3 minutes and re-apply the power to unlock the cluster. This procedure is required prior to reprogramming an IPC that is locked up in sleep mode. DO NOT replace the IPC or Body Control Module (BCM) for this concern. Reprogram the IPC with the latest software calibration. Note A limited number of early build Equinox vehicles may experience an error when attempting to reprogram the IPC. Should you experience this condition when reprogramming the IPC, please contact the Techline Customer Support Center (TCSC) for revised calibrations. VINS that MAY experience this condition will have VIN sequence numbers between 200008 and 200575. Important Select the correct calibration files for the appropriate vehicle configuration (body style) and RPO codes. A revised calibration has been developed to address this condition. Technicians are to reprogram the IPC using the Service Programming System (SPS) with the latest software available on TIS2WEB. Refer to Instrument Cluster Programming and Setup in SI. When using a Tech 2(R) or a Multiple Diagnostic Interface (MDI) for reprogramming, ensure that it is updated with the latest software version. During programming, the battery voltage must be maintained within the proper range of 12-15 Volts. Only use the approved Midtronics(R) PSC 550 Battery Maintainer (SPS Programming Support Tool EL-49642) or equivalent during programming. Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table above. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Relays and Modules - Instrument Panel > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 10-08-49-003 > May > 10 > Electrical - Instrument Panel Blanks Out/Inoperative > Page 13537 Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Relays and Modules - Instrument Panel > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Instrument Panel Control Module: > 09298D > Nov > 10 > Recall - Defroster/Defogger Inoperative Technical Service Bulletin # 09298D Date: 101122 Recall - Defroster/Defogger Inoperative FMVSS NONCOMPLIANCE Bulletin No.: 09298D Date: November 22, 2010 Subject: 09298D - Heating and Windshield Defrost Inoperative - Replace Computer Module Models: 2010 Chevrolet Equinox 2010 GMC Terrain Supercede: The Parts Information section in this bulletin has been revised for Canadian dealers. Mass Comp is no longer an Authorized GM Electronics Service Center. Canadian dealers are to begin contacting York Electronics for all exchanges.Discard all copies of bulletin 09298C, issued March 2010. Customers are being instructed to provide their VIN when calling to schedule a service appointment. If the vehicle will not be programmed at the dealership, please provide the VIN to the Parts Manager so parts can be ordered and received in time for the service appointment. Parts will be shipped overnight to dealers so please do not order more than 2 days prior to the scheduled service appointment date. Condition General Motors has decided that certain 2010 model year Chevrolet Equinox and GMC Terrain vehicles fail to conform to Federal/Canada Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 103, "Windshield Defrosting and Defogging Systems", and Standard 101, "Controls and Displays". On these vehicles, software in the center instrument panel can cause the heating, air conditioning, defrost, and radio controls, as well as the panel illumination to become inoperative. Driving without a functioning defrost system can decrease the driver's visibility under certain driving conditions and could result in a crash without warning. Driving without panel illumination can divert the driver's attention while looking for a control. Correction Dealers are to replace the computer module in the center instrument panel. Vehicles Involved Involved are certain 2010 model year Chevrolet Equinox and GMC Terrain vehicles built within these VIN breakpoints: Important Dealers are to confirm vehicle eligibility prior to beginning repairs by using the Required Field Actions section in the Global Warranty system. Not all vehicles within the above breakpoints may be involved. For dealers with involved vehicles, a listing with involved vehicles containing the complete vehicle identification number, customer name, and address information has been prepared and will be provided to US and Canadian dealers through the GM GlobalConnect Recall Reports, or sent directly to export dealers. Dealers will not have a report available if they have no involved vehicles currently assigned. The listing may contain customer names and addresses obtained from Motor Vehicle Registration Records. The use of such motor vehicle registration data for any purpose other than follow-up necessary to complete this recall is a violation of law in several states/provinces/countries. Accordingly, you are urged to limit the use of this report to the follow-up necessary to complete this recall. Parts Information For dealers using the programming tool: Most repairs require no parts. There are a small number of vehicles that will not be able to be reprogrammed; for these vehicles, please follow the parts information below. If you have parts currently in your inventory, please return them to Specmo (U.S.) or York Electronics (Canada). For dealers that did not receive a programming tool: A center instrument panel will be required. Note Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Relays and Modules - Instrument Panel > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Instrument Panel Control Module: > 09298D > Nov > 10 > Recall - Defroster/Defogger Inoperative > Page 13543 Center instrument panels (radio control assemblies) will be shipped overnight to dealers. Note: Core returns for this recall are to be shipped within 24 hours of receiving the exchange. A prepaid Federal Express Ground label will be included with each exchange. Package the core securely in the original packaging and package inserts provided with the exchange. It is important that the return unit be packaged identically to the exchange unit to prevent damage in shipping. Failure to return the core will result in a charge to the dealer's Open Parts Account. Do not order parts for customer vehicles until they have scheduled an appointment. U.S. Dealers Only: If the customer is not experiencing any concerns with the center instrument panel (ICS), please contact Specmo Enterprises for arrange for an exchange. If the customer does have ICS concerns, please contact the Technical Assistance Center (TAC) prior to ordering an exchange ICS. Dealers are to contact Specmo Enterprises via the internet at www.specmo.com/dealers, to arrange for an exchange of the center instrument panel (radio control assembly). Dealers that do not have an account with Specmo will be able to create an account in order to access the website. Arrange for an exchange by following the prompts. The information below will be required to arrange for an exchange. - Bulletin number 09298 - VIN Ontario Dealers Only: Due to a limited inventory, and to avoid backorders, an onsite mobile upgrade is available. Please contact York Electronics at 888-650-9675 to schedule an appointment. All Other Provinces, Excluding Ontario: To arrange for an exchange of the centre instrument panel (radio control assembly), please contact York Electronics at 888-650-9675. Service Procedure Service Procedure Using the Programming Tool (for dealers that were shipped a programming tool) Note Programming is not performed using TIS2WEB SPS; use provided programming tool. Note If the customer is NOT experiencing any concerns with the center instrument panel (ICS), reprogram the rdio control assembly (center instrument panels) following the instructions below. If the customer does have ICS concerns, please contact the Technical Assistance Center (TAC) prior to programming the radio control assembly (center instrument panels). (1) First Design Radio Control Assembly; (2) Second Design Radio Control Assembly 1. Determine if the radio control assembly is programmable. First design radio control assemblies are NOT programmable and must go through the radio control assembly exchange process. - First design radio control assemblies (1) are NOT programmable. There are NO slots on the backside of the radio control assembly. - Second design radio control assemblies (2) are programmable. They have two slots on the backside of the radio control assembly. If the radio control assembly is a second design assembly, proceed to Step 2. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Relays and Modules - Instrument Panel > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Instrument Panel Control Module: > 09298D > Nov > 10 > Recall - Defroster/Defogger Inoperative > Page 13544 Caution Insert a plastic body trim tool between the IP and radio control assembly along the top portion of the radio control assembly as shown in the illustration. DO NOT use a flat-blade screwdriver to remove the radio assembly. 2. Remove the radio control assembly (1). Refer to Radio Control Assembly Replacement in SI. 3. Carefully align the radio control assembly channels to the locating pegs of the programming tool as shown in the illustration. 4. Carefully seat the radio control assembly onto the programming tool. 5. The display area of the programming tool will indicate when the programming event has been completed. The programming tool will read "Programming Successful. Remove module." The programming event takes less than 30 seconds to complete. 6. Detach the radio control assembly from the programming tool. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Relays and Modules - Instrument Panel > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Instrument Panel Control Module: > 09298D > Nov > 10 > Recall - Defroster/Defogger Inoperative > Page 13545 7. Place blue dot (3) on the back of the radio control assembly to indicate that the radio control module has been reprogrammed. 8. Install the radio control assembly. Refer to Radio Control Assembly Replacement in SI. Service Procedure Using the Radio Control Assembly Exchange Process Caution Insert a plastic body trim tool between the IP and radio control assembly along the top portion of the radio control assembly as shown in the illustration. DO NOT use a flat-bladed screwdriver to remove the radio control assembly. Note If the customer is NOT experiencing any concerns with the center instrument panel (ICS), proceed to Step 1 and perform this recall. If the customer DOES have ICS concerns, please contact the Technical Assistance Center (TAC) prior to performing this recall. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Relays and Modules - Instrument Panel > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Instrument Panel Control Module: > 09298D > Nov > 10 > Recall - Defroster/Defogger Inoperative > Page 13546 Note For vehicles without the color touch screen navigation, unsnap and remove the display from the radio control assembly. Do not return the radio display with the radio control assembly. 1. Remove the radio control assembly (1). Refer to Radio Control Assembly Replacement in SI. 2. Package the radio control assembly and ship it to the exchange center indicated on the prepaid Federal Express Ground label that was enclosed with the exchange unit within 24 hours. Note Module programming and setup is NOT required when replacing only the radio control assembly. 3. Install the radio control assembly. Refer to Radio Control Assembly Replacement in SI. Courtesy Transportation - For US and Canada The General Motors Courtesy Transportation program is intended to minimize customer inconvenience when a vehicle requires a repair that is covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranties. The availability of courtesy transportation to customers whose vehicles are within the warranty coverage period and involved in a product program is very important in maintaining customer satisfaction. Dealers are to ensure that these customers understand that shuttle service or some other form of courtesy transportation is available and will be provided at no charge. Dealers should refer to the General Motors Service Policies and Procedures Manual for Courtesy Transportation guidelines. Warranty Transaction Information 1. Submit a transaction using the table below. * Dealers using WINS should add 0.2 administrative allowance to the labor time. Dealers using GWM should submit 0.2 hours administrative allowance under Administrative Time. ** Administrative allowance for unit exchange. *** Dealers are to claim only administrative allowance of 0.2 hours when the radio control assembly is reprogrammed by York's Mobile Unit. Dealers using WINS should submit 0.2 hours administrative allowance in labor time. Dealers using GWM should submit 0.2 hours administrative allowance under Administrative Time. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Relays and Modules - Instrument Panel > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Instrument Panel Control Module: > 09298D > Nov > 10 > Recall - Defroster/Defogger Inoperative > Page 13547 Customer Notification - For US and Canada General Motors will notify customers of this recall on their vehicle (see copy of customer letter included with this bulletin). Customer Notification - For Export Letters will be sent to known owners of record located within areas covered by the US National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act. For owners outside these areas, dealers should notify customers using the attached sample letter. Dealer Recall Responsibility - For US and Export (US States, Territories, and Possessions) The US National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act provides that each vehicle that is subject to a recall of this type must be adequately repaired within a reasonable time after the customer has tendered it for repair. A failure to repair within sixty days after tender of a vehicle is prima facie evidence of failure to repair within a reasonable time. If the condition is not adequately repaired within a reasonable time, the customer may be entitled to an identical or reasonably equivalent vehicle at no charge or to a refund of the purchase price less a reasonable allowance for depreciation. To avoid having to provide these burdensome remedies, every effort must be made to promptly schedule an appointment with each customer and to repair their vehicle as soon as possible. In the recall notification letters, customers are told how to contact the US National Highway Traffic Safety Administration if the recall is not completed within a reasonable time. This bulletin is notice to you that the new motor vehicles included in this recall may not comply with the standard identified above. Under Title 49, Section 30112 of the United States Code, it is illegal for a dealer to sell a new motor vehicle which the dealer knows does not comply with an applicable Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard. As a consequence, if you sell any of these motor vehicles without first performing the recall correction, your dealership may be subject to a civil penalty for each such sale. Dealer Recall Responsibility - All All unsold new vehicles in dealers' possession and subject to this recall must be held and inspected/repaired per the service procedure of this recall bulletin before customers take possession of these vehicles. Dealers are to service all vehicles subject to this recall at no charge to customers, regardless of mileage, age of vehicle, or ownership, from this time forward. Customers who have recently purchased vehicles sold from your vehicle inventory, and for which there is no customer information indicated on the dealer listing, are to be contacted by the dealer. Arrangements are to be made to make the required correction according to the instructions contained in this bulletin. A copy of the customer letter is provided in this bulletin for your use in contacting customers. Recall follow-up cards should not be used for this purpose, since the customer may not as yet have received the notification letter. In summary, whenever a vehicle subject to this recall enters your vehicle inventory, or is in your dealership for service in the future, you must take the steps necessary to be sure the recall correction has been made before selling or releasing the vehicle. Disclaimer Owner Letter Owner Letter Dear General Motors Customer: This notice is sent to you in accordance with the requirements of the National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act. General Motors has decided that certain 2010 model year Chevrolet Equinox and GMC Terrain vehicles fail to conform to Federal/Canada Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 103, "Windshield Defrosting and Defogging Systems", and Standard 101, "Controls and Displays". As a result, GM is conducting a recall. We apologize for this inconvenience. However, we are concerned about your safety and continued satisfaction with our products. Important - Your vehicle is involved in recall 09298. - Schedule an appointment with your GM dealer. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Relays and Modules - Instrument Panel > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Instrument Panel Control Module: > 09298D > Nov > 10 > Recall - Defroster/Defogger Inoperative > Page 13548 - This service will be performed for you at no charge. Why is your vehicle being recalled? The software in the center instrument panel can cause the heating, air conditioning, defrost, and radio controls, as well as the panel illumination to become inoperative. Driving without a functioning defrost system can decrease your visibility under certain driving conditions and could result in a crash without warning. Driving without panel illumination can divert your attention while looking for a control. What will we do? Your GM dealer will replace the computer module in the center instrument panel. This service will be performed for you at no charge. Because of service scheduling requirements, it is likely that your dealer will need your vehicle longer than the actual service correction time of approximately 20 minutes. If your vehicle is within the New Vehicle Limited Warranty, your dealer may provide you with shuttle service or some other form of courtesy transportation while your vehicle is at the dealership for this repair. Please refer to your Owner's Manual and your dealer for details on courtesy transportation. What should you do? You should contact your GM dealer to arrange a service appointment as soon as possible. When scheduling your appointment, please provide your dealer with your vehicle's 17 character vehicle identification number (VIN). Your VIN can be found above your name and address at the top of this letter, and will follow the numbers "09298". Your dealer will need your VIN to order parts for your vehicle so that they will be available on the day of your service appointment. Do you have questions? If you have questions or concerns that your dealer is unable to resolve, please contact the appropriate Customer Assistance Center at the number listed below. More information about your vehicle can be found at the Owner Center at www.gmownercenter.com. If after contacting your dealer and the Customer Assistance Center, you are still not satisfied we have done our best to remedy this condition without charge and within a reasonable time, you may wish to write the Administrator, National Highway Traffic Safety Administration, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE, Washington DC 20590, or call the toll-free Vehicle Safety Hotline at 1.888.327.4236 (TTY 1.800.424.9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov. Federal regulation requires that any vehicle lessor receiving this recall notice must forward a copy of this notice to the lessee within ten days. Scott Lawson Director, Customer and Relationship Services 09298 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Relays and Modules - Instrument Panel > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Instrument Panel Control Module: > 10-08-49-003 > May > 10 > Electrical - Instrument Panel Blanks Out/Inoperative Instrument Panel Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Electrical - Instrument Panel Blanks Out/Inoperative TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 10-08-49-003 Date: May 17, 2010 Subject: Intermittent Instrument Panel Cluster (IPC) Inoperative, Driver Information Center (DIC) Blanks Out (Reprogram IPC) Models: 2010 Chevrolet Equinox 2010 GMC Terrain All Built Prior to November 15, 2009 Condition In rare cases, some customers may comment that on ignition start up, intermittently, the IPC lights do not come on, the IPC gauges are inoperative, or the DIC goes blank. The Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) may also come on. Cause This condition may be caused by a software state or anomaly, which can contribute to one or more of the above conditions. Correction Important On certain IPCs that are inoperative, the cluster could lock up in sleep mode. Cycling the ignition will not unlock it from sleep mode. Disconnect the battery or fuse for at least 3 minutes and re-apply the power to unlock the cluster. This procedure is required prior to reprogramming an IPC that is locked up in sleep mode. DO NOT replace the IPC or Body Control Module (BCM) for this concern. Reprogram the IPC with the latest software calibration. Note A limited number of early build Equinox vehicles may experience an error when attempting to reprogram the IPC. Should you experience this condition when reprogramming the IPC, please contact the Techline Customer Support Center (TCSC) for revised calibrations. VINS that MAY experience this condition will have VIN sequence numbers between 200008 and 200575. Important Select the correct calibration files for the appropriate vehicle configuration (body style) and RPO codes. A revised calibration has been developed to address this condition. Technicians are to reprogram the IPC using the Service Programming System (SPS) with the latest software available on TIS2WEB. Refer to Instrument Cluster Programming and Setup in SI. When using a Tech 2(R) or a Multiple Diagnostic Interface (MDI) for reprogramming, ensure that it is updated with the latest software version. During programming, the battery voltage must be maintained within the proper range of 12-15 Volts. Only use the approved Midtronics(R) PSC 550 Battery Maintainer (SPS Programming Support Tool EL-49642) or equivalent during programming. Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table above. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Relays and Modules - Instrument Panel > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Instrument Panel Control Module: > 10-08-49-003 > May > 10 > Electrical - Instrument Panel Blanks Out/Inoperative > Page 13553 Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Relays and Modules - Instrument Panel > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Instrument Panel Control Module: > NHTSA09V489000 > Dec > 09 > Recall 09V489000: Defroster Malfunction Instrument Panel Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Recall 09V489000: Defroster Malfunction VEHICLE MAKE/MODEL: MODEL YEAR(S): Chevrolet/Equinox 2010 GMC/Terrain 2010 MANUFACTURER: General Motors Corp. MFR'S REPORT DATE: December 18, 2009 NHTSA CAMPAIGN ID NUMBER: 09V489000 NHTSA ACTION NUMBER: N/A COMPONENT: Visibility: Defroster/Defogger System POTENTIAL NUMBER OF UNITS AFFECTED: 59031 SUMMARY: General Motors is recalling certain model year 2010 Chevrolet Equinox and GMC Terrain vehicles for failing to comply with the requirements of Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 103, "Windshield Defrosting and Defogging Systems and with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 101, "Controls and Displays". The software in the center instrument panel can cause the heating, air conditioning, defrost, and radio controls, as well as the panel illumination to become inoperative. CONSEQUENCE: Driving without a functioning defrost system can decrease your visibility under certain driving conditions and could result in a crash without warning. REMEDY: Dealers will replace the computer module in the center instrument panel free of charge. The safety recall is expected to begin during January 2010. Owners may contact Chevrolet at 1-800-630-2438, GMC at 1-866-996-9463 or at www.gmownercenter.com. NOTES: GM safety recall No. 090298. Owners may also contact The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration's Vehicle Safety Hotline at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY 1-800-424-9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Relays and Modules - Instrument Panel > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Instrument Panel Control Module: > 10-08-49-003 > May > 10 > Electrical - Instrument Panel Blanks Out/Inoperative Instrument Panel Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Electrical - Instrument Panel Blanks Out/Inoperative TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 10-08-49-003 Date: May 17, 2010 Subject: Intermittent Instrument Panel Cluster (IPC) Inoperative, Driver Information Center (DIC) Blanks Out (Reprogram IPC) Models: 2010 Chevrolet Equinox 2010 GMC Terrain All Built Prior to November 15, 2009 Condition In rare cases, some customers may comment that on ignition start up, intermittently, the IPC lights do not come on, the IPC gauges are inoperative, or the DIC goes blank. The Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) may also come on. Cause This condition may be caused by a software state or anomaly, which can contribute to one or more of the above conditions. Correction Important On certain IPCs that are inoperative, the cluster could lock up in sleep mode. Cycling the ignition will not unlock it from sleep mode. Disconnect the battery or fuse for at least 3 minutes and re-apply the power to unlock the cluster. This procedure is required prior to reprogramming an IPC that is locked up in sleep mode. DO NOT replace the IPC or Body Control Module (BCM) for this concern. Reprogram the IPC with the latest software calibration. Note A limited number of early build Equinox vehicles may experience an error when attempting to reprogram the IPC. Should you experience this condition when reprogramming the IPC, please contact the Techline Customer Support Center (TCSC) for revised calibrations. VINS that MAY experience this condition will have VIN sequence numbers between 200008 and 200575. Important Select the correct calibration files for the appropriate vehicle configuration (body style) and RPO codes. A revised calibration has been developed to address this condition. Technicians are to reprogram the IPC using the Service Programming System (SPS) with the latest software available on TIS2WEB. Refer to Instrument Cluster Programming and Setup in SI. When using a Tech 2(R) or a Multiple Diagnostic Interface (MDI) for reprogramming, ensure that it is updated with the latest software version. During programming, the battery voltage must be maintained within the proper range of 12-15 Volts. Only use the approved Midtronics(R) PSC 550 Battery Maintainer (SPS Programming Support Tool EL-49642) or equivalent during programming. Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table above. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Relays and Modules - Instrument Panel > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Instrument Panel Control Module: > 10-08-49-003 > May > 10 > Electrical - Instrument Panel Blanks Out/Inoperative > Page 13563 Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Relays and Modules - Instrument Panel > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Instrument Panel Control Module: > 09298D > Nov > 10 > Recall - Defroster/Defogger Inoperative Technical Service Bulletin # 09298D Date: 101122 Recall - Defroster/Defogger Inoperative FMVSS NONCOMPLIANCE Bulletin No.: 09298D Date: November 22, 2010 Subject: 09298D - Heating and Windshield Defrost Inoperative - Replace Computer Module Models: 2010 Chevrolet Equinox 2010 GMC Terrain Supercede: The Parts Information section in this bulletin has been revised for Canadian dealers. Mass Comp is no longer an Authorized GM Electronics Service Center. Canadian dealers are to begin contacting York Electronics for all exchanges.Discard all copies of bulletin 09298C, issued March 2010. Customers are being instructed to provide their VIN when calling to schedule a service appointment. If the vehicle will not be programmed at the dealership, please provide the VIN to the Parts Manager so parts can be ordered and received in time for the service appointment. Parts will be shipped overnight to dealers so please do not order more than 2 days prior to the scheduled service appointment date. Condition General Motors has decided that certain 2010 model year Chevrolet Equinox and GMC Terrain vehicles fail to conform to Federal/Canada Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 103, "Windshield Defrosting and Defogging Systems", and Standard 101, "Controls and Displays". On these vehicles, software in the center instrument panel can cause the heating, air conditioning, defrost, and radio controls, as well as the panel illumination to become inoperative. Driving without a functioning defrost system can decrease the driver's visibility under certain driving conditions and could result in a crash without warning. Driving without panel illumination can divert the driver's attention while looking for a control. Correction Dealers are to replace the computer module in the center instrument panel. Vehicles Involved Involved are certain 2010 model year Chevrolet Equinox and GMC Terrain vehicles built within these VIN breakpoints: Important Dealers are to confirm vehicle eligibility prior to beginning repairs by using the Required Field Actions section in the Global Warranty system. Not all vehicles within the above breakpoints may be involved. For dealers with involved vehicles, a listing with involved vehicles containing the complete vehicle identification number, customer name, and address information has been prepared and will be provided to US and Canadian dealers through the GM GlobalConnect Recall Reports, or sent directly to export dealers. Dealers will not have a report available if they have no involved vehicles currently assigned. The listing may contain customer names and addresses obtained from Motor Vehicle Registration Records. The use of such motor vehicle registration data for any purpose other than follow-up necessary to complete this recall is a violation of law in several states/provinces/countries. Accordingly, you are urged to limit the use of this report to the follow-up necessary to complete this recall. Parts Information For dealers using the programming tool: Most repairs require no parts. There are a small number of vehicles that will not be able to be reprogrammed; for these vehicles, please follow the parts information below. If you have parts currently in your inventory, please return them to Specmo (U.S.) or York Electronics (Canada). For dealers that did not receive a programming tool: A center instrument panel will be required. Note Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Relays and Modules - Instrument Panel > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Instrument Panel Control Module: > 09298D > Nov > 10 > Recall - Defroster/Defogger Inoperative > Page 13569 Center instrument panels (radio control assemblies) will be shipped overnight to dealers. Note: Core returns for this recall are to be shipped within 24 hours of receiving the exchange. A prepaid Federal Express Ground label will be included with each exchange. Package the core securely in the original packaging and package inserts provided with the exchange. It is important that the return unit be packaged identically to the exchange unit to prevent damage in shipping. Failure to return the core will result in a charge to the dealer's Open Parts Account. Do not order parts for customer vehicles until they have scheduled an appointment. U.S. Dealers Only: If the customer is not experiencing any concerns with the center instrument panel (ICS), please contact Specmo Enterprises for arrange for an exchange. If the customer does have ICS concerns, please contact the Technical Assistance Center (TAC) prior to ordering an exchange ICS. Dealers are to contact Specmo Enterprises via the internet at www.specmo.com/dealers, to arrange for an exchange of the center instrument panel (radio control assembly). Dealers that do not have an account with Specmo will be able to create an account in order to access the website. Arrange for an exchange by following the prompts. The information below will be required to arrange for an exchange. - Bulletin number 09298 - VIN Ontario Dealers Only: Due to a limited inventory, and to avoid backorders, an onsite mobile upgrade is available. Please contact York Electronics at 888-650-9675 to schedule an appointment. All Other Provinces, Excluding Ontario: To arrange for an exchange of the centre instrument panel (radio control assembly), please contact York Electronics at 888-650-9675. Service Procedure Service Procedure Using the Programming Tool (for dealers that were shipped a programming tool) Note Programming is not performed using TIS2WEB SPS; use provided programming tool. Note If the customer is NOT experiencing any concerns with the center instrument panel (ICS), reprogram the rdio control assembly (center instrument panels) following the instructions below. If the customer does have ICS concerns, please contact the Technical Assistance Center (TAC) prior to programming the radio control assembly (center instrument panels). (1) First Design Radio Control Assembly; (2) Second Design Radio Control Assembly 1. Determine if the radio control assembly is programmable. First design radio control assemblies are NOT programmable and must go through the radio control assembly exchange process. - First design radio control assemblies (1) are NOT programmable. There are NO slots on the backside of the radio control assembly. - Second design radio control assemblies (2) are programmable. They have two slots on the backside of the radio control assembly. If the radio control assembly is a second design assembly, proceed to Step 2. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Relays and Modules - Instrument Panel > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Instrument Panel Control Module: > 09298D > Nov > 10 > Recall - Defroster/Defogger Inoperative > Page 13570 Caution Insert a plastic body trim tool between the IP and radio control assembly along the top portion of the radio control assembly as shown in the illustration. DO NOT use a flat-blade screwdriver to remove the radio assembly. 2. Remove the radio control assembly (1). Refer to Radio Control Assembly Replacement in SI. 3. Carefully align the radio control assembly channels to the locating pegs of the programming tool as shown in the illustration. 4. Carefully seat the radio control assembly onto the programming tool. 5. The display area of the programming tool will indicate when the programming event has been completed. The programming tool will read "Programming Successful. Remove module." The programming event takes less than 30 seconds to complete. 6. Detach the radio control assembly from the programming tool. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Relays and Modules - Instrument Panel > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Instrument Panel Control Module: > 09298D > Nov > 10 > Recall - Defroster/Defogger Inoperative > Page 13571 7. Place blue dot (3) on the back of the radio control assembly to indicate that the radio control module has been reprogrammed. 8. Install the radio control assembly. Refer to Radio Control Assembly Replacement in SI. Service Procedure Using the Radio Control Assembly Exchange Process Caution Insert a plastic body trim tool between the IP and radio control assembly along the top portion of the radio control assembly as shown in the illustration. DO NOT use a flat-bladed screwdriver to remove the radio control assembly. Note If the customer is NOT experiencing any concerns with the center instrument panel (ICS), proceed to Step 1 and perform this recall. If the customer DOES have ICS concerns, please contact the Technical Assistance Center (TAC) prior to performing this recall. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Relays and Modules - Instrument Panel > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Instrument Panel Control Module: > 09298D > Nov > 10 > Recall - Defroster/Defogger Inoperative > Page 13572 Note For vehicles without the color touch screen navigation, unsnap and remove the display from the radio control assembly. Do not return the radio display with the radio control assembly. 1. Remove the radio control assembly (1). Refer to Radio Control Assembly Replacement in SI. 2. Package the radio control assembly and ship it to the exchange center indicated on the prepaid Federal Express Ground label that was enclosed with the exchange unit within 24 hours. Note Module programming and setup is NOT required when replacing only the radio control assembly. 3. Install the radio control assembly. Refer to Radio Control Assembly Replacement in SI. Courtesy Transportation - For US and Canada The General Motors Courtesy Transportation program is intended to minimize customer inconvenience when a vehicle requires a repair that is covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranties. The availability of courtesy transportation to customers whose vehicles are within the warranty coverage period and involved in a product program is very important in maintaining customer satisfaction. Dealers are to ensure that these customers understand that shuttle service or some other form of courtesy transportation is available and will be provided at no charge. Dealers should refer to the General Motors Service Policies and Procedures Manual for Courtesy Transportation guidelines. Warranty Transaction Information 1. Submit a transaction using the table below. * Dealers using WINS should add 0.2 administrative allowance to the labor time. Dealers using GWM should submit 0.2 hours administrative allowance under Administrative Time. ** Administrative allowance for unit exchange. *** Dealers are to claim only administrative allowance of 0.2 hours when the radio control assembly is reprogrammed by York's Mobile Unit. Dealers using WINS should submit 0.2 hours administrative allowance in labor time. Dealers using GWM should submit 0.2 hours administrative allowance under Administrative Time. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Relays and Modules - Instrument Panel > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Instrument Panel Control Module: > 09298D > Nov > 10 > Recall - Defroster/Defogger Inoperative > Page 13573 Customer Notification - For US and Canada General Motors will notify customers of this recall on their vehicle (see copy of customer letter included with this bulletin). Customer Notification - For Export Letters will be sent to known owners of record located within areas covered by the US National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act. For owners outside these areas, dealers should notify customers using the attached sample letter. Dealer Recall Responsibility - For US and Export (US States, Territories, and Possessions) The US National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act provides that each vehicle that is subject to a recall of this type must be adequately repaired within a reasonable time after the customer has tendered it for repair. A failure to repair within sixty days after tender of a vehicle is prima facie evidence of failure to repair within a reasonable time. If the condition is not adequately repaired within a reasonable time, the customer may be entitled to an identical or reasonably equivalent vehicle at no charge or to a refund of the purchase price less a reasonable allowance for depreciation. To avoid having to provide these burdensome remedies, every effort must be made to promptly schedule an appointment with each customer and to repair their vehicle as soon as possible. In the recall notification letters, customers are told how to contact the US National Highway Traffic Safety Administration if the recall is not completed within a reasonable time. This bulletin is notice to you that the new motor vehicles included in this recall may not comply with the standard identified above. Under Title 49, Section 30112 of the United States Code, it is illegal for a dealer to sell a new motor vehicle which the dealer knows does not comply with an applicable Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard. As a consequence, if you sell any of these motor vehicles without first performing the recall correction, your dealership may be subject to a civil penalty for each such sale. Dealer Recall Responsibility - All All unsold new vehicles in dealers' possession and subject to this recall must be held and inspected/repaired per the service procedure of this recall bulletin before customers take possession of these vehicles. Dealers are to service all vehicles subject to this recall at no charge to customers, regardless of mileage, age of vehicle, or ownership, from this time forward. Customers who have recently purchased vehicles sold from your vehicle inventory, and for which there is no customer information indicated on the dealer listing, are to be contacted by the dealer. Arrangements are to be made to make the required correction according to the instructions contained in this bulletin. A copy of the customer letter is provided in this bulletin for your use in contacting customers. Recall follow-up cards should not be used for this purpose, since the customer may not as yet have received the notification letter. In summary, whenever a vehicle subject to this recall enters your vehicle inventory, or is in your dealership for service in the future, you must take the steps necessary to be sure the recall correction has been made before selling or releasing the vehicle. Disclaimer Owner Letter Owner Letter Dear General Motors Customer: This notice is sent to you in accordance with the requirements of the National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act. General Motors has decided that certain 2010 model year Chevrolet Equinox and GMC Terrain vehicles fail to conform to Federal/Canada Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 103, "Windshield Defrosting and Defogging Systems", and Standard 101, "Controls and Displays". As a result, GM is conducting a recall. We apologize for this inconvenience. However, we are concerned about your safety and continued satisfaction with our products. Important - Your vehicle is involved in recall 09298. - Schedule an appointment with your GM dealer. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Relays and Modules - Instrument Panel > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Instrument Panel Control Module: > 09298D > Nov > 10 > Recall - Defroster/Defogger Inoperative > Page 13574 - This service will be performed for you at no charge. Why is your vehicle being recalled? The software in the center instrument panel can cause the heating, air conditioning, defrost, and radio controls, as well as the panel illumination to become inoperative. Driving without a functioning defrost system can decrease your visibility under certain driving conditions and could result in a crash without warning. Driving without panel illumination can divert your attention while looking for a control. What will we do? Your GM dealer will replace the computer module in the center instrument panel. This service will be performed for you at no charge. Because of service scheduling requirements, it is likely that your dealer will need your vehicle longer than the actual service correction time of approximately 20 minutes. If your vehicle is within the New Vehicle Limited Warranty, your dealer may provide you with shuttle service or some other form of courtesy transportation while your vehicle is at the dealership for this repair. Please refer to your Owner's Manual and your dealer for details on courtesy transportation. What should you do? You should contact your GM dealer to arrange a service appointment as soon as possible. When scheduling your appointment, please provide your dealer with your vehicle's 17 character vehicle identification number (VIN). Your VIN can be found above your name and address at the top of this letter, and will follow the numbers "09298". Your dealer will need your VIN to order parts for your vehicle so that they will be available on the day of your service appointment. Do you have questions? If you have questions or concerns that your dealer is unable to resolve, please contact the appropriate Customer Assistance Center at the number listed below. More information about your vehicle can be found at the Owner Center at www.gmownercenter.com. If after contacting your dealer and the Customer Assistance Center, you are still not satisfied we have done our best to remedy this condition without charge and within a reasonable time, you may wish to write the Administrator, National Highway Traffic Safety Administration, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE, Washington DC 20590, or call the toll-free Vehicle Safety Hotline at 1.888.327.4236 (TTY 1.800.424.9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov. Federal regulation requires that any vehicle lessor receiving this recall notice must forward a copy of this notice to the lessee within ten days. Scott Lawson Director, Customer and Relationship Services 09298 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Relays and Modules - Instrument Panel > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Instrument Panel Control Module: > NHTSA09V489000 > Dec > 09 > Recall 09V489000: Defroster Malfunction Instrument Panel Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Recall 09V489000: Defroster Malfunction VEHICLE MAKE/MODEL: MODEL YEAR(S): Chevrolet/Equinox 2010 GMC/Terrain 2010 MANUFACTURER: General Motors Corp. MFR'S REPORT DATE: December 18, 2009 NHTSA CAMPAIGN ID NUMBER: 09V489000 NHTSA ACTION NUMBER: N/A COMPONENT: Visibility: Defroster/Defogger System POTENTIAL NUMBER OF UNITS AFFECTED: 59031 SUMMARY: General Motors is recalling certain model year 2010 Chevrolet Equinox and GMC Terrain vehicles for failing to comply with the requirements of Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 103, "Windshield Defrosting and Defogging Systems and with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 101, "Controls and Displays". The software in the center instrument panel can cause the heating, air conditioning, defrost, and radio controls, as well as the panel illumination to become inoperative. CONSEQUENCE: Driving without a functioning defrost system can decrease your visibility under certain driving conditions and could result in a crash without warning. REMEDY: Dealers will replace the computer module in the center instrument panel free of charge. The safety recall is expected to begin during January 2010. Owners may contact Chevrolet at 1-800-630-2438, GMC at 1-866-996-9463 or at www.gmownercenter.com. NOTES: GM safety recall No. 090298. Owners may also contact The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration's Vehicle Safety Hotline at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY 1-800-424-9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Locations Dimmer Switch: Locations Instrument Panel/Center Console Component Views Left Side of the Instrument Panel Components 1 - P16 Instrument Cluster 2 - B10B Ambient Light/Sunload Sensor (C68) or B10 Ambient Light Sensor (C67) 3 - P19B Speaker - Center Instrument Panel (UZ8) 4 - P17 Info Display Module 5 P19V Speaker - Right Front Tweeter 6 - A20 Radio/HVAC Controls 7 - A11 Radio 8 - S3 Transmission Shift Lever 9 - P2 Transmission Shift Lever Position Indicator 10 - T11 Multimedia Player Interface Module (KTA) 11 - K108 Active Noise Cancellation Module (VQN) 12 - E8J Instrument Panel Courtesy Lamp - Left (LTZ or SLT) 13 - S36 Instrument Panel Dimmer Switch Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 13583 Dimmer Switch: Diagrams S36 Instrument Panel Dimmer Switch Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 13584 Dimmer Switch: Service and Repair Instrument Panel Lamp Dimmer Switch Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations Parking Brake Warning Switch: Locations Instrument Panel/Center Console Component Views Lower Left of the Instrument Panel Components 1 - B80 Park Brake Switch 2 - T3 Audio Amplifier 3 - K9 Body Control Module 4 - K73 Telematics Communication Interface Control Module (UE1) 5 - B107 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor 6 T4S Wireless Communication Antenna - Bluetooth (UE1 with UPF) 7 - B22 Brake Pedal Position Sensor 8 - X84 Data Link Connector Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 13588 Parking Brake Warning Switch: Diagrams B80 Park Brake Switch Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 13589 Parking Brake Warning Switch: Service and Repair Parking Brake Indicator Switch Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Tire Monitoring System > Low Tire Pressure Indicator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM System Message/Service Tips Low Tire Pressure Indicator: Technical Service Bulletins Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM System Message/Service Tips # 09-03-16-002A: Dealership Service Consultant Procedure as Vehicle Comes into Service Drive for Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM) System Message, Light and Customer Information - (Apr 27, 2010) Subject: Dealership Service Consultant Procedure as Vehicle Comes into Service Drive for Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM) System Message, Light and Customer Information Models: 2006-2011 Cars and Light Duty Trucks (Including Saturn and Saab) 2006-2010 HUMMER H2, H3 ATTENTION The information found in this bulletin is to be used as a dealership service consultant procedures for customers coming into the service lane with an illuminated "low tire light" or comments on a check tire pressure/low tire pressure/add air to tire or service tire monitor system message. Maintaining proper tire pressures is an Owner's Maintenance item and is not covered under warranty. This bulletin is being revised to add model years and update additional bulletin reference information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 09-03-16-002 (Section 03 -- Suspension). Customer Concerns and Confusion with the Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPM) System The following procedure should be used by dealership service consultants when a customer comes into the service drive with a "low tire light" on or comments on a check tire pressure/low tire pressure/add air to tire or service tire monitor system message. The service consultant should perform the following steps: Procedure Turn the key to ON, without starting the engine. ^ If the low tire light comes on and stays on solid with a check tire pressure/low tire pressure/add air to tire message (on vehicles equipped with DIC), advise the customer: - The system is working properly. - Properly adjusting all tire air pressures to the recommended levels and driving the vehicle will turn the light off (refer to the Tire and Loading Information label on the driver side door). - More detailed information can be found in the Owner Manual. - Service is not covered under warranty - this maintenance is the responsibility of the owner. - Give the customer a copy of the "GM Customer TPMS Information". ^ If the Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM) light blinks for one minute then stays on solid with a service tire monitor system message (on vehicles equipped with DIC): - A TPM system problem exists. The vehicle should be written up accordingly and sent to your service department for further DTC diagnosis and service. - If dashes (--) are displayed in only one or two of the tire pressure readouts, it is likely caused by a previous TPM system relearn that was performed incorrectly due to interference from another vehicle's TPM system during the relearn process (refer to the Important statement later in this bulletin regarding TPM relearn with a Tech 2(R)). - If dashes (--) are displayed in all four of the tire pressure readouts, there is a system problem. Follow the appropriate SI service procedures. ^ If a customer indicates the low tire light comes on for a few minutes when the vehicle is started, then goes off after driving a while, advise the customer: - The system is working properly. - Most likely, air pressure in one or more of the tires is low enough to turn the light on when tires are cold. After driving for a while, tires will heat Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Tire Monitoring System > Low Tire Pressure Indicator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM System Message/Service Tips > Page 13595 up, allowing tire air pressure to increase above the threshold causing the light to go off. Properly adjusting all tire air pressures to the recommended levels will correct this (Refer to the Tire and Loading Information Label on the driver side door). - More detailed information can be found in the Owner Manual. - Service is not covered under warranty - this maintenance is the responsibility of the owner. - Give the customer a copy of the "GM Customer TPMS Information". For more detailed information, refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 07-03-16-004C and TPMS Training Course 13044.12T2. Tire Pressure Light At key on, without starting the vehicle: Steady Solid Glowing TPM Indicator If the TPM indicator appears as a steady glowing yellow lamp (as above), the system is functioning properly and you should add air to the tires to correct this condition. Blinking TPM Indicator If the TPM indicator appears as a BLINKING yellow lamp for one minute and then stays on solid, diagnostic service is needed. The Effect of Outside Temperature on Tire Pressures Important: As a rule of thumb, tire pressure will change about 7kPa (1 psi) for every 6°C (10°F) decrease in temperature - Tire pressure will drop when it gets colder outside, and rise when it gets warmer. Under certain situations such as extreme outside temperature changes, the system may bring on a solid light with a check tire pressure message. This should be considered normal and the system is working properly. The light will turn off upon adding the proper amount of air to the tires (refer to the Tire & Loading Information label in the driver's door opening). When properly adjusting tire air pressure, the following steps are important to help optimize the system and prolong bringing a tire pressure light on: ^ Use an accurate, high quality tire pressure gauge. ^ Never set the tire pressure below the specified placard value regardless of tire temperature or ambient temperature. ^ Tire pressure should be set to the specified placard pressure at the lowest seasonal temperature the vehicle will encounter during operation. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Tire Monitoring System > Low Tire Pressure Indicator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM System Message/Service Tips > Page 13596 ^ When adding proper tire air pressure, it is important to remember fluctuations in outside air temperatures and tire temperatures effect tire air pressures. ^ After you have added the proper tire pressure, if the vehicle has a DIC (after the system has updated), check to see if DIC displays are the same readings as the tire pressure gauge used (adjust as necessary). ^ Only perform a TPM sensor re-learn after a tire rotation or system part replacements and use the Tech 2(R) to initiate the relearn whenever possible to avoid invalid sensor I.D. learns. Important: Always take outside temperature and tire temperature into consideration to properly set tire pressures. Foe example, on colder days (20°F/-7°C), if setting tire pressure when the vehicle has been indoors (60°F/16°C) or the tires are warm from being driven, it will be necessary to compensate for the low outside temperature by adding 21-27 kPa (3-4 psi) more then the placecard pressure. At some later time, when the vehicle has been parked outside for a while, the tires will cool off and the pressures will drop back into the placecard range. Important: Recently, nitrogen gas (for use in inflating tires) has become available to the general customer through some retailers. The use of nitrogen gas to inflate tires is a technology used in automobile racing. Tires inflated with nitrogen gas may exhibit less of a pressure change in response to outside temperature changes. Nitrogen gas inflation is compatible with GM TPM sensors. For additional information, refer to Corporate Service Bulletin 05-03-10-020C. Important: All Models (Except the Pontiac Vibe): Do not perform a TPM relearn at PDI, the system has already been set at the Assembly Plant. Do not perform a TPM relearn after adding air to the tires. The low tire light is similar to the low fuel indicator and adding something (fuel, air) to the vehicle makes that light turn back off again. Note that because of system behavior, some vehicles must be driven a short distance before the sensors recognize the increase in pressure and turns the light off again. Pontiac Vibe Only: Do not use the TPMS reset button to turn off the light. The system will update and light will turn off when all tire pressures have been adjusted followed by short distance drive. Important: All models (except the Pontiac Vibe): Each tire monitor sensor is learned to a specific vehicle corner. When performing a TPM relearn (only after a tire rotation or replacement of a TPM sensor or Module), always use the Tech2(R) to initiate the J 46079 relearned process. Tech 2(R) - initiated relearns lock out other vehicle TPM signals that may be broadcasting in the area. Only signals initiated by the J 46079 tool will be accepted. This method avoids storing false TPM I.D.s and will prevent customers from returning with dashes (--) displayed in tire pressure readouts and/or a flashing tire pressure monitor (TPM) light. Checking the four TPM I.D.s with the Tech 2(R) prior to and following relearn to verify they are the same can prevent invalid I.D. learns. Pontiac Vibe Only: Tire Monitor Sensors are not learned to a specific vehicle corner. Do not perform a TPM Reset after tire rotation. The TPMS Reset button must only be used during pre-delivery inspection by the dealer to initialize the system (after all tire pressures have been adjusted properly) or when a Tire Pressure Monitor System component is replaced. The J 46079 tool does not work on Vibe TPM sensors. A TPMS relearn on Vibe must be preformed with a Tech 2(R) to set the TPMS Module in learn mode. The TPMS sensor IDs are entered through the Tech 2(R). Refer to SI for further Vibe TPMS information. Labor Operation and Repair Order/Warranty System Claim Required Documentation Important: The ONLY time labor operation E0726 or E0722 should be used is to diagnose for a system issue. That should ONLY occur if, at key ON, without starting the engine, the Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM) blinks for one minute and then stays on solid with a Service Tire Monitor System message (on vehicles equipped with a DIC) If that occurs, a TPM system problem exists and the system will have set a DTC. If one of these operastions is used, the following Repair Order and Warranty System documentation are required: ^ Document the customer complaint on the Repair Order. ^ Document the TPMS DTC that has set on the Repair Order. ^ Enter the TPMS DTC in the Warranty System (WINS) in the Failure Code/DTC field on the claim submission (refer to the Claims Processing Manual, Section IV, Warranty claim Data, Page 6, Item G). If the above information is not documented on the Repair Order and Warranty System, the claim may be rejected. If the Warranty Parts Center (WPC) generates a request, this repair order documentation must be sent back. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Tire Monitoring System > Low Tire Pressure Indicator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM System Message/Service Tips > Page 13597 Customer TPMS Information Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Tire Monitoring System > Low Tire Pressure Indicator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM System Message/Service Tips > Page 13598 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Tire Monitoring System > Low Tire Pressure Indicator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM System Message/Service Tips > Page 13599 Frequently Asked Questions Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > TPMS System - Service And Re-Learning Sensor IDs Tire Pressure Module: Technical Service Bulletins TPMS System - Service And Re-Learning Sensor IDs INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 10-03-16-001 Date: July 19, 2010 Subject: TPMS System Service and Re-Learning Sensor IDs Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2 2009 and Prior HUMMER H3 2010 and Prior Saturn Models 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X with Wheel-Mounted Tire Pressure Sensors In the event that the spare tire, which is normally not equipped with a tire pressure monitor (TPM) sensor, is installed in place of one of the road tires and the vehicle is driven above 40 km/h (25 mph) for 20 minutes or more, the TPM indicator icon on the instrument panel cluster (IPC) will flash for approximately one minute and then remain on steady each time the ignition is turned ON, indicating a diagnostic trouble code (DTC) has been set. The driver information center (DIC), if equipped, will also display a SERVICE TIRE MONITOR type message. When the road tire is repaired and reinstalled in the original location, the TPM indicator icon illumination and DIC message may remain displayed until the DTC is cleared. To ensure that the TPM indicator and the DIC message are cleared after service, it is necessary to clear any TPM DTCs using a scan tool. If a scan tool is unavailable, performing the TPM relearn procedure using a TPM diagnostic tool will provide the same results. It is advised to perform the relearn procedure away from other vehicles to prevent picking up a stray sensor signal. If one or more of the TPM sensors are missing or damaged and have been replaced, then the relearn procedure must be performed. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > TPMS System - Service And Re-Learning Sensor IDs Tire Pressure Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins TPMS System - Service And Re-Learning Sensor IDs INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 10-03-16-001 Date: July 19, 2010 Subject: TPMS System Service and Re-Learning Sensor IDs Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2 2009 and Prior HUMMER H3 2010 and Prior Saturn Models 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X with Wheel-Mounted Tire Pressure Sensors In the event that the spare tire, which is normally not equipped with a tire pressure monitor (TPM) sensor, is installed in place of one of the road tires and the vehicle is driven above 40 km/h (25 mph) for 20 minutes or more, the TPM indicator icon on the instrument panel cluster (IPC) will flash for approximately one minute and then remain on steady each time the ignition is turned ON, indicating a diagnostic trouble code (DTC) has been set. The driver information center (DIC), if equipped, will also display a SERVICE TIRE MONITOR type message. When the road tire is repaired and reinstalled in the original location, the TPM indicator icon illumination and DIC message may remain displayed until the DTC is cleared. To ensure that the TPM indicator and the DIC message are cleared after service, it is necessary to clear any TPM DTCs using a scan tool. If a scan tool is unavailable, performing the TPM relearn procedure using a TPM diagnostic tool will provide the same results. It is advised to perform the relearn procedure away from other vehicles to prevent picking up a stray sensor signal. If one or more of the TPM sensors are missing or damaged and have been replaced, then the relearn procedure must be performed. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 13608 Tire Pressure Sensor: Testing and Inspection Tire Pressure Indicator Sensor Learn Special Tools J-46079 Tire Pressure Monitor Diagnostic Tool Relearn Mode Description The tire pressure monitor (TPM) system uses the instrument panel cluster (IPC), body control module (BCM), 4 radio frequency transmitting pressure sensors, and the serial data circuit to perform the TPM Relearn mode functions. The sensor Relearn procedure must be performed after every tire rotation, BCM replacement, or sensor replacement. Once the relearn mode has been enabled, each of the sensors unique identification codes can be learned into the BCM memory. When a sensor ID has been learned, the BCM sends a serial data message to the BCM to sound a horn chirp. This verifies the sensor has transmitted its ID and the BCM has received and learned it. The BCM must learn the sensor IDs in the proper sequence to determine correct sensor location. The first learned ID is assigned to the left front location, the second to right front, the third to right rear and the fourth to left rear. The turn signals will individually illuminate indicating which location is to be learned in the proper sequence. Sensor Functions Using J-46079 or EL-46079 Each sensor has an internal low frequency coil. When the J-46079 is used in activate mode, it produces a low frequency transmission that activates the sensor. The sensor responds to a low frequency activation by transmitting in learn mode. When the BCM receives a learn mode transmission while in TPM learn mode, it will assign that sensors ID to the location on the vehicle relative to the order in which it was learned. Sensor Functions Using Pressure Increase/Decrease Method Each sensor takes a pressure measurement sample once every 30 seconds while in stationary mode. If the tire pressure increases, or decreases by more than 8.3 kPa (1.2 psi) from the last pressure measurement, another measurement will occur immediately to verify the change in pressure. If a pressure change has indeed occurred, the sensor transmits in Learn mode. When the BCM receives a Learn mode transmission while in TPM learn mode, it will assign that sensor's ID to the location on the vehicle relative to the order in which it was learned. Relearn Mode Cancellation The Relearn mode will cancel if the ignition is cycled to OFF or if more than 2 minutes has elapsed for any sensor that has not been learned. If the relearn mode is cancelled before the first sensor is learned, the original sensor IDs will be maintained. If the relearn mode is canceled after the first sensor is learned, the following will occur: * All stored sensor IDs will be invalidated in the BCM memory. * If equipped, the DIC will display dashes instead of tire pressures. * DTC C0775 will be set. These conditions will now require the relearn procedure to be repeated for the system to function properly. TPM Relearn Procedure Note: If using the scan tool to enable the relearn mode, the J-46079 must be used to activate the sensors. When this preferred method is used, any stray sensor signals will not affect the relearn procedure. In the event a particular sensor's information is displayed on the special tool upon activation but the horn does not chirp, it may be necessary to rotate the wheel valve stem to a different position due to the sensor signal is being blocked by another component. If using the DIC buttons to enable the relearn mode, the J-46079 or Pressure Increase/Decrease Method may be used. Before proceeding with this method, ensure that no other learn procedure is being performed simultaneously or that tire pressures are not being adjusted on another TPM equipped vehicle within close proximity. Stray signals from other TPM equipped vehicles just driving by can be inadvertently learned. If any random horn chirps are heard from the vehicle while performing the learn procedure, most likely a stray sensor has been learned and the procedure will need to be cancelled and repeated. Under these circumstances, performing the TPM Relearn Procedure away from other vehicles would be highly recommended. In the event a particular sensor activation does not cause the horn to chirp, it may be necessary to rotate the wheel valve stem to a different position due to the sensor signal is being blocked by another component. Preferred Scan Tool Relearn Enable Method 1. Apply park brake (manual transmission only). 2. Ignition ON, using a scan tool, initiate the Tire Pressure Sensors Learn mode. A double horn chirp will sound indicating the Relearn mode has been enabled. The left front turn signal will also be illuminated. 3. Starting with the left front tire, active the sensor by holding the antenna of the J-46079 aimed upward against the tire sidewall close to the wheel rim at the valve stem location. Press and release the Activate button and wait for a horn chirp. Once the horn chirp has sounded, the sensor information is learned and the turn signal in the next location to be learned will illuminate. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 13609 4. After the horn chirp has sounded and the right front turn signal is illuminated, repeat step 2 for the remaining 3 sensors in the following order: 1. Right front 2. Right rear 3. Left rear 5. When the left rear sensor has been learned and a double horn chirp has sounded, the learn process is complete and the BCM exits the Relearn mode. 6. Ignition OFF, adjust all tires to the recommended pressures. Refer to Vehicle Certification, Tire Placard, Anti-Theft, and Service Parts ID Label ( See: Application and ID/Vehicle Certification, Tire Placard, Anti-Theft and Service Parts ID Label). Alternate DIC Relearn Enable Method 1. Apply park brake (manual transmission only). 2. Ignition ON, activate the Relearn mode with the driver information center (DIC) display controls. A double horn chirp sounds indicating the Relearn mode has been enabled and the left front turn signal will also be illuminated. 3. Starting with the left front tire, activate the tire pressure sensor by using one of the following methods: * Hold the antenna of the J-46079 aimed upward against the tire sidewall close to the wheel rim at the valve stem location. Press and release the activate button and wait for a horn chirp. Once the horn chirp has sounded, the sensor information is learned and the turn signal in the next location to be learned will illuminate. Warning Over inflating tires may cause personal injury or damage to the tires and wheels. When increasing tire pressure do not exceed the maximum inflation pressure as noted on the tire sidewall. * Increase/decrease the tire pressure for 8-10 seconds then wait for a horn chirp. The horn chirp may occur before or up to 30 seconds after the 8-10 second pressure increase/decrease time period has been reached. Once the horn chirp has sounded, the sensor information is learned and the turn signal in the next location to be learned will illuminate. 4. After the horn chirp has sounded and the right front turn signal is illuminated, repeat step 2 for the remaining 3 sensors in the following order: 1. Right front 2. Right rear 3. Left rear 5. When the left rear sensor has been learned and a double horn chirp has sounded, the learn process is complete and the BCM exits the Relearn mode. 6. Ignition OFF, adjust all tires to the recommended pressures. Refer to Vehicle Certification, Tire Placard, Anti-Theft, and Service Parts ID Label ( See: Application and ID/Vehicle Certification, Tire Placard, Anti-Theft and Service Parts ID Label). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 13610 Tire Pressure Sensor: Service and Repair Tire Pressure Indicator Sensor Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Raise the vehicle on a suitable support. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle (See: Maintenance/Vehicle Lifting/Service and Repair). 2. Remove the tire/wheel assembly from the vehicle. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation (See: Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair). Note: Before the tire is removed from the wheel, note the following items to avoid tire pressure sensor damage upon tire dismounting. * Place the sensor's cap and valve on a dry clean surface after removal. The cap is aluminum and the valve is nickel plated to prevent corrosion and are not to be substituted with a cap or valve made of any other material. * When separating the tire bead from the wheel, position the bead breaking fixture 90 degrees from the valve stem. * Position the mounting/dismounting head so the tire iron, or pry bar can be inserted slightly clockwise of the sensor body when prying the tire bead up and over the mounting/dismounting head. * Using the tire machine, rotate the tire/wheel assembly clockwise when transferring the tire bead to the out side of the wheel rim. * Repeat items for inner bead. 3. Remove the tire from the wheel. Refer to Tire Dismounting and Mounting (See: Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Tires/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement). Note: If any tire sealant is noted upon tire dismounting, remove all residual liquid sealant from the inside of the tire and wheel surfaces. 4. Remove the tire pressure sensor nut. 5. Remove the tire pressure sensor. Installation Procedure 1. Clean any dirt or debris from the grommet sealing area. 2. Insert the sensor in the wheel hole with the air passage facing away from the wheel. Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution (See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Fastener Caution). 3. Install the sensor nut and position the sensor body parallel to the inside wheel surface while torquing. Tighten the sensor nut to 7 Nm (62 lb in). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 13611 Note: Before reinstalling the tire on the wheel, note the following items to avoid tire pressure sensor damage upon tire mounting: * Position the mounting/dismounting head 180 degrees from the valve stem. * Position the bead transition area 45 degrees counterclockwise of the valve stem. * Using the tire machine, rotate the tire/wheel assembly clockwise when transferring the tire bead to the inside of the wheel rim. * Repeat items for outer bead. 4. Install the tire on the wheel. Refer to Tire Dismounting and Mounting (See: Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Tires/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement). Note: A service replacement tire pressure sensor is shipped in OFF mode. In this mode the sensor's unique identification code cannot be learned into the liftgate module (LGM) memory. The sensor must be taken out of OFF mode by spinning the tire/wheel assembly above 32 km/h (20 mph) in order to close the sensor's internal roll switch for at least 10 seconds. 5. Install the tire/wheel assembly on the vehicle. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation (See: Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair). 6. Lower the vehicle. 7. Learn the tire pressure sensors. Refer to Tire Pressure Indicator Sensor Learn (See: Testing and Inspection). Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Ambient Light Sensor > Component Information > Locations Ambient Light Sensor: Locations Instrument Panel/Center Console Component Views Left Side of the Instrument Panel Components 1 - P16 Instrument Cluster 2 - B10B Ambient Light/Sunload Sensor (C68) or B10 Ambient Light Sensor (C67) 3 - P19B Speaker - Center Instrument Panel (UZ8) 4 - P17 Info Display Module 5 P19V Speaker - Right Front Tweeter 6 - A20 Radio/HVAC Controls 7 - A11 Radio 8 - S3 Transmission Shift Lever 9 - P2 Transmission Shift Lever Position Indicator 10 - T11 Multimedia Player Interface Module (KTA) 11 - K108 Active Noise Cancellation Module (VQN) 12 - E8J Instrument Panel Courtesy Lamp - Left (LTZ or SLT) 13 - S36 Instrument Panel Dimmer Switch Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Ambient Light Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 13616 Ambient Light Sensor: Diagrams B10 Ambient Light Sensor (C67) B10B Ambient Light/Sunload Sensor (C68) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Ambient Light Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 13617 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp > Backup Light Bulb > Component Information > Service and Repair Backup Light Bulb: Service and Repair Backup Lamp Bulb Replacement (Equinox) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Brake Light Bulb > Component Information > Service and Repair Brake Light Bulb: Service and Repair Stop and Turn Signal Lamp Bulb Replacement (Equinox) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Center Mounted Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams Center Mounted Brake Lamp: Diagrams E6 Center High Mounted Stop Lamp Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Center Mounted Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 13629 Center Mounted Brake Lamp: Service and Repair High Mount Stop Lamp Replacement (Equinox) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Console Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams Console Lamp: Diagrams E28 Center Console Compartment Lamp (TSP or TSQ) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Console Lamp > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Floor Console Flood Lamp Replacement Console Lamp: Service and Repair Front Floor Console Flood Lamp Replacement Front Floor Console Flood Lamp Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Console Lamp > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Floor Console Flood Lamp Replacement > Page 13636 Console Lamp: Service and Repair Front Floor Console Armrest Compartment Lamp Replacement Front Floor Console Armrest Compartment Lamp Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Locations Dimmer Switch: Locations Instrument Panel/Center Console Component Views Left Side of the Instrument Panel Components 1 - P16 Instrument Cluster 2 - B10B Ambient Light/Sunload Sensor (C68) or B10 Ambient Light Sensor (C67) 3 - P19B Speaker - Center Instrument Panel (UZ8) 4 - P17 Info Display Module 5 P19V Speaker - Right Front Tweeter 6 - A20 Radio/HVAC Controls 7 - A11 Radio 8 - S3 Transmission Shift Lever 9 - P2 Transmission Shift Lever Position Indicator 10 - T11 Multimedia Player Interface Module (KTA) 11 - K108 Active Noise Cancellation Module (VQN) 12 - E8J Instrument Panel Courtesy Lamp - Left (LTZ or SLT) 13 - S36 Instrument Panel Dimmer Switch Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 13640 Dimmer Switch: Diagrams S36 Instrument Panel Dimmer Switch Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 13641 Dimmer Switch: Service and Repair Instrument Panel Lamp Dimmer Switch Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dome Lamp > Dome Lamp Bulb > Component Information > Service and Repair Dome Lamp Bulb: Service and Repair Dome Lamp Bulb Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dome Lamp > Dome Lamp Switch > Component Information > Locations Dome Lamp Switch: Locations Passenger Compartment/Roof Component Views Headliner Components 2 - E37R Dome/Reading Lamps - Rear 3 - B77R Radio Volume Compensator Interior Noise Microphone - Rear (VQN) 4 - M69 Sunroof Motor (CF5) 5 - E37M Dome/Reading Lamps - Middle 6 - E37EL Dome/Reading Lamps - Front Overhead Console Left 7 - S12 Dome Lamp Switch 8 - B24 Cellular Phone Microphone (UE1) 9 - S72 Sunroof Switch (CF5) 10 - S45B Liftgate Control Switch Interior (TB5) 11 - S88 Sunroof Tilt Switch (CF5) 12 - S17RF Dome/Reading Lamps Switch - Front Overhead Console Right 13 - S17LF Dome/Reading Lamps Switch - Front Overhead Console Left 14 - E37ER Dome/Reading Lamps - Front Overhead Console Right 15 - E1L Accent Lamp Overhead Console (LT or LTZ or SLE2 or SLT) 16 - P14 Passenger Airbag Disable Indicator 17 - A3R Sunshade - Right Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dome Lamp > Dome Lamp Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 13649 18 - K77 Remote Control Door Lock Receiver 19 - A10 Inside Rearview Mirror 20 - P7 Display (UVC without UYS or PCJ) 21 - A3L Sunshade - Left 22 - B77F Radio Volume Compensator Interior Noise Microphone - Front (VQN) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dome Lamp > Dome Lamp Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 13650 Dome Lamp Switch: Diagrams S12 Dome Lamp Switch Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Fog/Driving Lamp > Fog/Driving Lamp Bulb > Component Information > Service and Repair Fog/Driving Lamp Bulb: Service and Repair Front Fog Lamp Bulb Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Fog/Driving Lamp > Fog/Driving Lamp Relay > Component Information > Locations Fog/Driving Lamp Relay: Locations Electrical Center Identification Views X50A Fuse Block - Underhood, Label Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Fog/Driving Lamp > Fog/Driving Lamp Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 13658 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Headlamp > Headlamp Bulb > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 10-08-42-001B > Jan > 11 > Lighting - Low Beam Headlamp(s) Inoperative Headlamp Bulb: Customer Interest Lighting - Low Beam Headlamp(s) Inoperative TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 10-08-42-001B Date: January 24, 2011 Subject: Low Beam Headlamp Bulb Diagnosis/Replacement (Inspect Bulb and Connector) Models: 2008-2011 Buick Enclave 2007-2011 Cadillac Escalade, Escalade ESV, Escalade EXT 2008-2011 Cadillac CTS, CTS-V 2010-2011 Cadillac CTS Sport Wagon, SRX 2007-2011 Chevrolet Avalanche, Silverado, Suburban, Tahoe 2008-2011 Chevrolet Malibu 2009-2011 Chevrolet Traverse 2010-2011 Chevrolet Equinox 2007-2011 GMC Acadia, Sierra, Yukon, Yukon XL, Yukon Denali, Yukon Denali XL 2010-2011 GMC Terrain 2006-2010 Pontiac G6 2007-2010 Saturn AURA, OUTLOOK Attention: This bulletin DOES NOT apply to vehicles equipped with High Intensity Discharge (HID) lamps. Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the part number for the recommended splice sleeve. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 10-08-42-001A (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Condition Some customers may comment that the low beam headlamp is inoperative. Correction DO NOT replace the entire headlamp assembly for this condition. Replace the bulb and inspect the connector following the procedure below. 1. Remove the headlamp bulb. Refer to Headlamp Bulb Replacement procedure in SI. 2. Inspect the connector. - If the connector is NOT discolored or damaged, replace the bulb only. For bulb part numbers, see Headlamp Bulb (Low Beam) in Group 02.727 of the appropriate Parts Catalog. - If the connector is discolored at the bulb interface, replace the connector (service pigtail listed below) and bulb. Important Use only Duraseal splice sleeves (salmon, P/N 19168446). Other splice sleeves may not protect the splice from moisture or provide a good electrical connection. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves in SI for splicing procedures. 1. Cut the wires of the connector approximately 45 mm (13/4 in) from the connector and splice in the service pigtail connector. Ensure that the splices are not above the connector when re-installing. 2. Replace the bulb. 3. Verify that the headlamp is fully functional. Parts Information Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Headlamp > Headlamp Bulb > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 10-08-42-001B > Jan > 11 > Lighting - Low Beam Headlamp(s) Inoperative > Page 13668 Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Headlamp > Headlamp Bulb > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 10-08-42-001B > Jan > 11 > Lighting - Low Beam Headlamp(s) Inoperative Headlamp Bulb: All Technical Service Bulletins Lighting - Low Beam Headlamp(s) Inoperative TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 10-08-42-001B Date: January 24, 2011 Subject: Low Beam Headlamp Bulb Diagnosis/Replacement (Inspect Bulb and Connector) Models: 2008-2011 Buick Enclave 2007-2011 Cadillac Escalade, Escalade ESV, Escalade EXT 2008-2011 Cadillac CTS, CTS-V 2010-2011 Cadillac CTS Sport Wagon, SRX 2007-2011 Chevrolet Avalanche, Silverado, Suburban, Tahoe 2008-2011 Chevrolet Malibu 2009-2011 Chevrolet Traverse 2010-2011 Chevrolet Equinox 2007-2011 GMC Acadia, Sierra, Yukon, Yukon XL, Yukon Denali, Yukon Denali XL 2010-2011 GMC Terrain 2006-2010 Pontiac G6 2007-2010 Saturn AURA, OUTLOOK Attention: This bulletin DOES NOT apply to vehicles equipped with High Intensity Discharge (HID) lamps. Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the part number for the recommended splice sleeve. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 10-08-42-001A (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Condition Some customers may comment that the low beam headlamp is inoperative. Correction DO NOT replace the entire headlamp assembly for this condition. Replace the bulb and inspect the connector following the procedure below. 1. Remove the headlamp bulb. Refer to Headlamp Bulb Replacement procedure in SI. 2. Inspect the connector. - If the connector is NOT discolored or damaged, replace the bulb only. For bulb part numbers, see Headlamp Bulb (Low Beam) in Group 02.727 of the appropriate Parts Catalog. - If the connector is discolored at the bulb interface, replace the connector (service pigtail listed below) and bulb. Important Use only Duraseal splice sleeves (salmon, P/N 19168446). Other splice sleeves may not protect the splice from moisture or provide a good electrical connection. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves in SI for splicing procedures. 1. Cut the wires of the connector approximately 45 mm (13/4 in) from the connector and splice in the service pigtail connector. Ensure that the splices are not above the connector when re-installing. 2. Replace the bulb. 3. Verify that the headlamp is fully functional. Parts Information Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Headlamp > Headlamp Bulb > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 10-08-42-001B > Jan > 11 > Lighting - Low Beam Headlamp(s) Inoperative > Page 13674 Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Headlamp > Headlamp Bulb > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Headlamp Bulb: > 09221C > Jan > 11 > Campaign - Navigation System Update Navigation Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Campaign - Navigation System Update SERVICE UPDATE Bulletin No.: 09221C Date: January 27, 2011 Subject: 09221C - Service Update for Inventory and Customer Vehicles - Navigation System Update - Expires with Base Warranty Models: 2010 Buick Allure, LaCrosse 2010 Cadillac SRX 2010 Chevrolet Equinox 2010 GMC Terrain Supercede: The Service Procedure in this bulletin has been revised. Please discard all copies of bulletin 09221B, issued November 2009. THIS SERVICE UPDATE INCLUDES VEHICLES IN DEALER INVENTORY AND CUSTOMER VEHICLES THAT RETURN TO THE DEALERSHIP FOR ANY REASON. IT WILL EXPIRE AT THE END OF THE INVOLVED VEHICLE'S NEW VEHICLE LIMITED WARRANTY PERIOD. Purpose This bulletin provides a service procedure to program the radio module on certain 2010 Buick Allure, LaCrosse; Cadillac SRX; Chevrolet Equinox; and GMC Terrain vehicles. This program will address multiple concerns with the navigation system. This service procedure should be completed as soon as possible on involved vehicles currently in dealer inventory and customer vehicles that return to the dealer for any type of service during the New Vehicle Limited Warranty coverage period. Vehicles Involved A list of involved vehicles currently in dealer inventory is available on the "Service Update Bulletin Information" link under the "Service" tab in GM GlobalConnect (US), or attached to the Dealer Communication (Canada), used to release this bulletin. Customer vehicles that return for service, for any reason, and are still covered under the vehicle's base warranty, and are within the VIN breakpoints provided below, should be checked for vehicle eligibility in the appropriate system listed below. Important Dealers are to confirm vehicle eligibility prior to beginning repairs by using the Investigate Vehicle History link on the Global Warranty Management application within GlobalConnect. Not all vehicles within the above breakpoints may be involved. Parts Information For US: Flash drives were shipped from the Warranty Parts Center (WPC) at no charge via UPS Ground Delivery-Attention: Parts Manager, to dealers with involved vehicles. If your USB Flash Drive has been misplaced, dealers are to obtain a USB 2.0 Flash Drive locally at their expense. The minimum USB Flash Drive capacity requirement is 512 MB. Follow the service procedure titled, FOR CANADIAN DEALERS, AND US DEALERS WHO NEED TO DOWNLOAD A CALIBRATION TO A NEW USB FLASH DRIVE. The calibration downloaded to the USB Flash Drive can be used to program all vehicles involved in the field action. After completing the programming event for all vehicles involved in the field action, remove (delete) the calibration from the USB Flash Drive. Save the USB Flash Drive for future USB programming events. Do NOT contact the WPC for a USB Flash Drive. For Canada: Dealers are to obtain a USB 2.0 Flash Drive locally. The minimum USB Flash Drive capacity requirement is 512 MB. A one-time allowance is provided for the purchase of a USB 2.0. Flash Drive. The calibration downloaded to the USB Flash Drive can be used to program all vehicles involved in the field action. After completing the programming event for all vehicles involved in the field action, remove (delete) the calibration Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Headlamp > Headlamp Bulb > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Headlamp Bulb: > 09221C > Jan > 11 > Campaign - Navigation System Update > Page 13680 from the USB Flash Drive. Save the USB Flash Drive for future USB programming events. Service Procedure Note This procedure begins with a USB flash drive programming event. This IS NOT a TIS2WEB programming event. This procedure requires a USB 2.0 flash drive. The minimum USB flash drive capacity requirement is 512 MB. The software downloaded to the USB flash drive can be used to update all vehicles involved in this bulletin. Any existing date on the USB flash drive will be erased during the TIS2WEB-to-USB flash drive download procedure. To ensure important date IS NOT deleted from the USB flash drive, transfer the data from the USB flash drive onto another approved storage device BEFORE attempting to download software from TIS2WEB. Once the software is downloaded to the USB, DO NOT add any data to the storage device. 1. The Navigation radio software has been revised to address the above conditions. You will udpate the radio using a USB FLASH DRIVE and the Service Programming System (SPS) with the file available on TIS2WEB. Refer to the SPS procedures and Control Module References in SI. Note During programming, the battery voltage MUST be maintained within the proper range of 12-15 volts. 2. Connect the Midtronics(R) PSC 550 Battery Maintainer (SPS Programming Support Tool EL-49642) or an equivalent to the battery. 3. Connect the MDI to the vehicle. 4. Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. 5. Select: J-2534 MDI from the Select Diagnostics Tool and Programming Process screen. 6. Select: RAD - "Radio USB Programming for Navigation Software - Setup", from the Supported Controllers screen. Refer to SI and SPS for programming instructions, if required. 7. Insert a USB flash drive into the USB port of your computer. Press the REFRESH button if your USB drive IS NOT selectable in the Available USB Drives box. 8. Select NEXT from the SPS Special Function screen. 9. Monitor the Progress Status bar at the bottom of the SPS Special Function screen. Note The files have been successfully loaded onto the USB flash drive when the Progress Status bar is completely shaded and the SPS Special Functions screen displays the following message: "Remove the USB stick and insert into the vehicle USB port." 10. Remove the USB flash drive from the computer when the Progress Status bar indicates that the software download has been completed. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Headlamp > Headlamp Bulb > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Headlamp Bulb: > 09221C > Jan > 11 > Campaign - Navigation System Update > Page 13681 11. Press FINISH from the SPS Special Function screen. DO NOT wait for the Completion screen to appear on the display. Note On Cadillac SRX vehicles, turn on the radio and press the NAV button to raise the viewscreen. If this is not done before inserting the USB drive, you will not be able to operate the "Ok" button in the following step. 12. Insert the USB flash drive into the USB port of the vehicle. The radio will display the title "Program Update" along with warnings not to interrupt power or remove the media. A bar graph will form indicating progress and an "OK" button will appear. PRESS the appropriate radio button or area of the screen to activate the "OK" command and begin programming. 13. A status bar indicates progress. Note DO NOT cycle the ignition even if the view screen indicates to cycle it. At the conclusion of the USB drive downloading to the radio, installation of the programming will automatically begin as indicated by the white progress bar below. If the view screen instead remains blank for more than 40 minutes, you may then cycle the ignition. This will reinitialize the programming event. Do not remove the USB flash drive. 14. After the USB programming has completed, the screen will go blank. (On the SRX, the screen will also lower.) It is not necessary to observe the entire programming process. Once the screen has gone blank, a white outline bar graph will appear. (Not visible on SRX due to the screen being lowered.) The downloaded program will automatically install. Once this progress bar fills, the screen will go blank and USB programming will be complete. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Headlamp > Headlamp Bulb > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Headlamp Bulb: > 09221C > Jan > 11 > Campaign - Navigation System Update > Page 13682 15. When the programming event has completed, the radio will display Download Complete and the version number U413. Note On the SRX, the display screen will rise at the completion of the USB download to allow viewing of the programming complete screen and version number. 16. Turn OFF the ignition for 60 seconds. 17. Remove the USB flash drive. 18. The vehicle MUST now be calibrated. Note Vehicle calibration is a required step. Many of the radio and navigation functions will not operate properly unless the calibration outlined in the following steps is performed. Note After completion of the USB programming event, but prior to the initialization of SPS programming, the radio will display a Cadillac splash screen if operated. This is a normal condition. Completion of the SPS programming below will restore the radio to the proper splash screen for the vehicle being serviced. 19. Return to the SPS programming screen. Select J-2534 MDI from the Select Diagnostics Tool and Programming Process screen. 20. Select RAD: Radio Programming. 21. You must now select the proper choices for the build of the vehicle you are servicing. Refer to the vehicle SPID label or the vehicle build information through GWM for the specific RPOs the vehicle is equipped with. 22. Once you have selected the proper vehicle options, you may initiate SPS programming. Upon completion of this step, the radio is updated. Note At the completion of the programming, you may verify the programming is updated and successful by pressing CONFIG, entering NAV and then viewing the map database. You should see version U413 displayed. Note The navigation radio will be returned to factory default value during this upgrade. Warranty Transaction Information Submit a claim using the table below. * USB Flash Drives were sent to involved U.S. dealers at no charge from the WPC. If dealers no longer have that flash drive, they are to purchase one at their expense. Do NOT submit for the cost of a USB flash drive. ** Submit the actual cost of the USB 2.0 Flash Drive, not to exceed $10.00 USD, $10.30 CAD. The calibration downloaded to the USB Flash Drive can be used to program all vehicles involved in the field action. After completing the programming event for all vehicles involved in the field action, remove (delete) the calibration from the USB Flash Drive. Save the USB Flash Drive for future USB programming events. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Headlamp > Headlamp Bulb > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Headlamp Bulb: > 09221C > Jan > 11 > Campaign - Navigation System Update > Page 13683 Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Headlamp > Headlamp Bulb > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Headlamp Bulb: > 09221C > Jan > 11 > Campaign - Navigation System Update > Page 13689 from the USB Flash Drive. Save the USB Flash Drive for future USB programming events. Service Procedure Note This procedure begins with a USB flash drive programming event. This IS NOT a TIS2WEB programming event. This procedure requires a USB 2.0 flash drive. The minimum USB flash drive capacity requirement is 512 MB. The software downloaded to the USB flash drive can be used to update all vehicles involved in this bulletin. Any existing date on the USB flash drive will be erased during the TIS2WEB-to-USB flash drive download procedure. To ensure important date IS NOT deleted from the USB flash drive, transfer the data from the USB flash drive onto another approved storage device BEFORE attempting to download software from TIS2WEB. Once the software is downloaded to the USB, DO NOT add any data to the storage device. 1. The Navigation radio software has been revised to address the above conditions. You will udpate the radio using a USB FLASH DRIVE and the Service Programming System (SPS) with the file available on TIS2WEB. Refer to the SPS procedures and Control Module References in SI. Note During programming, the battery voltage MUST be maintained within the proper range of 12-15 volts. 2. Connect the Midtronics(R) PSC 550 Battery Maintainer (SPS Programming Support Tool EL-49642) or an equivalent to the battery. 3. Connect the MDI to the vehicle. 4. Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. 5. Select: J-2534 MDI from the Select Diagnostics Tool and Programming Process screen. 6. Select: RAD - "Radio USB Programming for Navigation Software - Setup", from the Supported Controllers screen. Refer to SI and SPS for programming instructions, if required. 7. Insert a USB flash drive into the USB port of your computer. Press the REFRESH button if your USB drive IS NOT selectable in the Available USB Drives box. 8. Select NEXT from the SPS Special Function screen. 9. Monitor the Progress Status bar at the bottom of the SPS Special Function screen. Note The files have been successfully loaded onto the USB flash drive when the Progress Status bar is completely shaded and the SPS Special Functions screen displays the following message: "Remove the USB stick and insert into the vehicle USB port." 10. Remove the USB flash drive from the computer when the Progress Status bar indicates that the software download has been completed. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Headlamp > Headlamp Bulb > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Headlamp Bulb: > 09221C > Jan > 11 > Campaign - Navigation System Update > Page 13690 11. Press FINISH from the SPS Special Function screen. DO NOT wait for the Completion screen to appear on the display. Note On Cadillac SRX vehicles, turn on the radio and press the NAV button to raise the viewscreen. If this is not done before inserting the USB drive, you will not be able to operate the "Ok" button in the following step. 12. Insert the USB flash drive into the USB port of the vehicle. The radio will display the title "Program Update" along with warnings not to interrupt power or remove the media. A bar graph will form indicating progress and an "OK" button will appear. PRESS the appropriate radio button or area of the screen to activate the "OK" command and begin programming. 13. A status bar indicates progress. Note DO NOT cycle the ignition even if the view screen indicates to cycle it. At the conclusion of the USB drive downloading to the radio, installation of the programming will automatically begin as indicated by the white progress bar below. If the view screen instead remains blank for more than 40 minutes, you may then cycle the ignition. This will reinitialize the programming event. Do not remove the USB flash drive. 14. After the USB programming has completed, the screen will go blank. (On the SRX, the screen will also lower.) It is not necessary to observe the entire programming process. Once the screen has gone blank, a white outline bar graph will appear. (Not visible on SRX due to the screen being lowered.) The downloaded program will automatically install. Once this progress bar fills, the screen will go blank and USB programming will be complete. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Headlamp > Headlamp Bulb > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Headlamp Bulb: > 09221C > Jan > 11 > Campaign - Navigation System Update > Page 13691 15. When the programming event has completed, the radio will display Download Complete and the version number U413. Note On the SRX, the display screen will rise at the completion of the USB download to allow viewing of the programming complete screen and version number. 16. Turn OFF the ignition for 60 seconds. 17. Remove the USB flash drive. 18. The vehicle MUST now be calibrated. Note Vehicle calibration is a required step. Many of the radio and navigation functions will not operate properly unless the calibration outlined in the following steps is performed. Note After completion of the USB programming event, but prior to the initialization of SPS programming, the radio will display a Cadillac splash screen if operated. This is a normal condition. Completion of the SPS programming below will restore the radio to the proper splash screen for the vehicle being serviced. 19. Return to the SPS programming screen. Select J-2534 MDI from the Select Diagnostics Tool and Programming Process screen. 20. Select RAD: Radio Programming. 21. You must now select the proper choices for the build of the vehicle you are servicing. Refer to the vehicle SPID label or the vehicle build information through GWM for the specific RPOs the vehicle is equipped with. 22. Once you have selected the proper vehicle options, you may initiate SPS programming. Upon completion of this step, the radio is updated. Note At the completion of the programming, you may verify the programming is updated and successful by pressing CONFIG, entering NAV and then viewing the map database. You should see version U413 displayed. Note The navigation radio will be returned to factory default value during this upgrade. Warranty Transaction Information Submit a claim using the table below. * USB Flash Drives were sent to involved U.S. dealers at no charge from the WPC. If dealers no longer have that flash drive, they are to purchase one at their expense. Do NOT submit for the cost of a USB flash drive. ** Submit the actual cost of the USB 2.0 Flash Drive, not to exceed $10.00 USD, $10.30 CAD. The calibration downloaded to the USB Flash Drive can be used to program all vehicles involved in the field action. After completing the programming event for all vehicles involved in the field action, remove (delete) the calibration from the USB Flash Drive. Save the USB Flash Drive for future USB programming events. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Headlamp > Headlamp Bulb > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Headlamp Bulb: > 09221C > Jan > 11 > Campaign - Navigation System Update > Page 13692 Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Headlamp > Headlamp Bulb > Component Information > Service and Repair > Headlamp Bulb Replacement (High Beam) Headlamp Bulb: Service and Repair Headlamp Bulb Replacement (High Beam) Headlamp Bulb Replacement (High Beam Equinox) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Headlamp > Headlamp Bulb > Component Information > Service and Repair > Headlamp Bulb Replacement (High Beam) > Page 13695 Headlamp Bulb: Service and Repair Headlamp Bulb Replacement (Low Beam) Headlamp Bulb Replacement (Low Beam Equinox) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Headlamp > Headlamp Dimmer Relay > Component Information > Locations Headlamp Dimmer Relay: Locations Electrical Center Identification Views X50A Fuse Block - Underhood, Label Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Headlamp > Headlamp Dimmer Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 13699 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Headlamp > Headlamp Dimmer Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair Headlamp Dimmer Sensor: Service and Repair Headlamp Automatic Control Ambient Light Sensor Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Headlamp > Headlamp Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Locations Headlamp Dimmer Switch: Locations Instrument Panel/Center Console Component Views Left Side of the Instrument Panel Components 1 - P16 Instrument Cluster 2 - B10B Ambient Light/Sunload Sensor (C68) or B10 Ambient Light Sensor (C67) 3 - P19B Speaker - Center Instrument Panel (UZ8) 4 - P17 Info Display Module 5 P19V Speaker - Right Front Tweeter 6 - A20 Radio/HVAC Controls 7 - A11 Radio 8 - S3 Transmission Shift Lever 9 - P2 Transmission Shift Lever Position Indicator 10 - T11 Multimedia Player Interface Module (KTA) 11 - K108 Active Noise Cancellation Module (VQN) 12 - E8J Instrument Panel Courtesy Lamp - Left (LTZ or SLT) 13 - S36 Instrument Panel Dimmer Switch Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Headlamp > Headlamp Lens > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Lighting - Headlamp Polycarbonate Lens Damage Prevention Headlamp Lens: Technical Service Bulletins Lighting - Headlamp Polycarbonate Lens Damage Prevention INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 02-08-42-001D Date: June 21, 2010 Subject: Headlamp Lens Overheating When Covered and Chemical Damage to Exterior Polycarbonate Headlamp Lenses Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (Including Saturn) 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add model years and to revise the warning statements. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 02-08-42-001C (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). The bulletin is being issued to make dealers and customers aware of chemical damage that may be caused to exterior polycarbonate headlamp lenses. Most late model vehicles have these types of headlamp lenses. This material is used because of its temperature and high impact resistance. A variety of chemicals can cause crazing or cracking of the headlamp lens. Headlamp lenses are very sensitive. Care should be exercised to avoid contact with all exterior headlamp lenses when treating a vehicle with any type of chemical, such as those recommended for rail dust removal. Rubbing compound, grease tar and oil removers, tire cleaners, cleaner waxes and even car wash soaps in too high a concentration may also attribute to this condition. This could result in the need to replace the entire headlamp housing. Warning Use only lukewarm or cold water, a soft cloth and a car washing soap to clean exterior lamps and lenses. Also, crazing or deformations of the lens may occur if a shop mat or fender cover is draped over the fender and covers a portion or all of the headlamp assembly while the DRL or headlamps are on. This action restricts the amount of heat dissipated by the headlamps. Warning Care should be taken to not cover headlamps with shop mats or fender covers if the vehicle is being serviced with the headlamps or DRL illuminated. Covering an illuminated lamp can cause excessive heat build up and crazing/deformation of the lens may occur. The degradation of the lens can be unnoticeable at first and eventually become hairline cracks in the lens. In extreme cases, it could cause the lens to deform. This damage can also be caused by aftermarket shields that are often tinted in color. Once a heat buildup is generated by the headlamp, a degradation of the headlamp lens begins. This degradation of the lens can be unnoticeable at first and eventually manifest as spider cracks. In more extreme cases, it will begin to melt the lens of the headlamp. Notice Headlamps damaged by chemicals, improper cleaning, or overheating due to being covered are not covered under the new vehicle warranty. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Horn > Horn Relay > Component Information > Locations Horn Relay: Locations Electrical Center Identification Views X50A Fuse Block - Underhood, Label Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Horn > Horn Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 13714 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Horn > Horn Switch > Component Information > Locations Horn Switch: Locations Instrument Panel/Center Console Component Views Steering Wheel Components 1 - S70L Steering Wheel Controls Switch - Left 2 - S33 Horn Switch 3 - S70R Steering Wheel Controls Switch - Right Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Horn > Horn Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 13718 Horn Switch: Diagrams S33 Horn Switch Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Horn > Horn Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 13719 Horn Switch: Service and Repair Steering Wheel Horn Contact Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams License Plate Lamp: Diagrams E7L License Plate Lamp - Left E7R License Plate Lamp - Right Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 13723 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 13724 License Plate Lamp: Service and Repair Rear License Plate Lamp Replacement (Equinox) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Map Light > Component Information > Service and Repair Map Light: Service and Repair Reading Lamp Switch Pushbutton Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Marker Lamp > Marker Lamp Bulb > Component Information > Service and Repair Marker Lamp Bulb: Service and Repair Front Side Marker Lamp Bulb Replacement (Equinox) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp > Parking Lamp Relay > Component Information > Locations Parking Lamp Relay: Locations Electrical Center Identification Views X50A Fuse Block - Underhood, Label Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp > Parking Lamp Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 13736 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp > Parking Light Bulb > Component Information > Service and Repair Parking Light Bulb: Service and Repair Parking and Turn Signal Lamp Bulb Replacement (Equinox) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Fog/Driving Lamp Relay > Component Information > Locations Fog/Driving Lamp Relay: Locations Electrical Center Identification Views X50A Fuse Block - Underhood, Label Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Fog/Driving Lamp Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 13744 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Dimmer Relay > Component Information > Locations Headlamp Dimmer Relay: Locations Electrical Center Identification Views X50A Fuse Block - Underhood, Label Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Dimmer Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 13748 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Horn Relay > Component Information > Locations Horn Relay: Locations Electrical Center Identification Views X50A Fuse Block - Underhood, Label Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Horn Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 13752 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp Relay > Component Information > Locations Parking Lamp Relay: Locations Electrical Center Identification Views X50A Fuse Block - Underhood, Label Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 13756 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Turn Signal Relay > Component Information > Locations Turn Signal Relay: Locations Electrical Center Identification Views X50A Fuse Block - Underhood, Label Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Turn Signal Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 13760 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Ambient Light Sensor > Component Information > Locations Ambient Light Sensor: Locations Instrument Panel/Center Console Component Views Left Side of the Instrument Panel Components 1 - P16 Instrument Cluster 2 - B10B Ambient Light/Sunload Sensor (C68) or B10 Ambient Light Sensor (C67) 3 - P19B Speaker - Center Instrument Panel (UZ8) 4 - P17 Info Display Module 5 P19V Speaker - Right Front Tweeter 6 - A20 Radio/HVAC Controls 7 - A11 Radio 8 - S3 Transmission Shift Lever 9 - P2 Transmission Shift Lever Position Indicator 10 - T11 Multimedia Player Interface Module (KTA) 11 - K108 Active Noise Cancellation Module (VQN) 12 - E8J Instrument Panel Courtesy Lamp - Left (LTZ or SLT) 13 - S36 Instrument Panel Dimmer Switch Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Ambient Light Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 13765 Ambient Light Sensor: Diagrams B10 Ambient Light Sensor (C67) B10B Ambient Light/Sunload Sensor (C68) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Ambient Light Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 13766 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Dome Lamp Switch > Component Information > Locations Dome Lamp Switch: Locations Passenger Compartment/Roof Component Views Headliner Components 2 - E37R Dome/Reading Lamps - Rear 3 - B77R Radio Volume Compensator Interior Noise Microphone - Rear (VQN) 4 - M69 Sunroof Motor (CF5) 5 - E37M Dome/Reading Lamps - Middle 6 - E37EL Dome/Reading Lamps - Front Overhead Console Left 7 - S12 Dome Lamp Switch 8 - B24 Cellular Phone Microphone (UE1) 9 - S72 Sunroof Switch (CF5) 10 - S45B Liftgate Control Switch Interior (TB5) 11 - S88 Sunroof Tilt Switch (CF5) 12 - S17RF Dome/Reading Lamps Switch - Front Overhead Console Right 13 - S17LF Dome/Reading Lamps Switch - Front Overhead Console Left 14 - E37ER Dome/Reading Lamps - Front Overhead Console Right 15 - E1L Accent Lamp Overhead Console (LT or LTZ or SLE2 or SLT) 16 - P14 Passenger Airbag Disable Indicator 17 - A3R Sunshade - Right Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Dome Lamp Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 13770 18 - K77 Remote Control Door Lock Receiver 19 - A10 Inside Rearview Mirror 20 - P7 Display (UVC without UYS or PCJ) 21 - A3L Sunshade - Left 22 - B77F Radio Volume Compensator Interior Noise Microphone - Front (VQN) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Dome Lamp Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 13771 Dome Lamp Switch: Diagrams S12 Dome Lamp Switch Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Dimmer Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair Headlamp Dimmer Sensor: Service and Repair Headlamp Automatic Control Ambient Light Sensor Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Locations Headlamp Dimmer Switch: Locations Instrument Panel/Center Console Component Views Left Side of the Instrument Panel Components 1 - P16 Instrument Cluster 2 - B10B Ambient Light/Sunload Sensor (C68) or B10 Ambient Light Sensor (C67) 3 - P19B Speaker - Center Instrument Panel (UZ8) 4 - P17 Info Display Module 5 P19V Speaker - Right Front Tweeter 6 - A20 Radio/HVAC Controls 7 - A11 Radio 8 - S3 Transmission Shift Lever 9 - P2 Transmission Shift Lever Position Indicator 10 - T11 Multimedia Player Interface Module (KTA) 11 - K108 Active Noise Cancellation Module (VQN) 12 - E8J Instrument Panel Courtesy Lamp - Left (LTZ or SLT) 13 - S36 Instrument Panel Dimmer Switch Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Horn Switch > Component Information > Locations Horn Switch: Locations Instrument Panel/Center Console Component Views Steering Wheel Components 1 - S70L Steering Wheel Controls Switch - Left 2 - S33 Horn Switch 3 - S70R Steering Wheel Controls Switch - Right Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Horn Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 13781 Horn Switch: Diagrams S33 Horn Switch Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Horn Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 13782 Horn Switch: Service and Repair Steering Wheel Horn Contact Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Turn Signal Switch > Component Information > Locations Turn Signal Switch: Locations Instrument Panel/Center Console Component Views Steering Column Components 1 - S78 Turn Signal/Multifunction Switch 2 - X85 Steering Wheel Air Bag Coil 3 - S82 Windshield Wiper/Washer Switch 4 - S39 Ignition Switch 5 - M93 Ignition Cylinder Lock Control Solenoid Actuator 6 - B101 Immobilizer Antenna 7 - B99 Steering Wheel Angle Sensor Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Turn Signal Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 13786 Turn Signal Switch: Diagrams S78 Turn Signal/Multifunction Switch Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Turn Signal Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Turn Signal Switch Bracket Replacement Turn Signal Switch: Service and Repair Turn Signal Switch Bracket Replacement Turn Signal Switch Bracket Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Turn Signal Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Turn Signal Switch Bracket Replacement > Page 13789 Turn Signal Switch: Service and Repair Turn Signal Multifunction Switch Replacement Turn Signal Multifunction Switch Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Tail Light Bulb > Component Information > Service and Repair Tail Light Bulb: Service and Repair Tail Lamp Bulb Replacement (Equinox) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Turn Signals > Turn Signal Lamp > Turn Signal Bulb > Component Information > Service and Repair > Parking and Turn Signal Lamp Bulb Replacement Turn Signal Bulb: Service and Repair Parking and Turn Signal Lamp Bulb Replacement Parking and Turn Signal Lamp Bulb Replacement (Equinox) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Turn Signals > Turn Signal Lamp > Turn Signal Bulb > Component Information > Service and Repair > Parking and Turn Signal Lamp Bulb Replacement > Page 13800 Turn Signal Bulb: Service and Repair Stop and Turn Signal Lamp Bulb Replacement Stop and Turn Signal Lamp Bulb Replacement (Equinox) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Turn Signals > Turn Signal Relay > Component Information > Locations Turn Signal Relay: Locations Electrical Center Identification Views X50A Fuse Block - Underhood, Label Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Turn Signals > Turn Signal Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 13804 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Turn Signals > Turn Signal Switch > Component Information > Locations Turn Signal Switch: Locations Instrument Panel/Center Console Component Views Steering Column Components 1 - S78 Turn Signal/Multifunction Switch 2 - X85 Steering Wheel Air Bag Coil 3 - S82 Windshield Wiper/Washer Switch 4 - S39 Ignition Switch 5 - M93 Ignition Cylinder Lock Control Solenoid Actuator 6 - B101 Immobilizer Antenna 7 - B99 Steering Wheel Angle Sensor Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Turn Signals > Turn Signal Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 13808 Turn Signal Switch: Diagrams S78 Turn Signal/Multifunction Switch Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Turn Signals > Turn Signal Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Turn Signal Switch Bracket Replacement Turn Signal Switch: Service and Repair Turn Signal Switch Bracket Replacement Turn Signal Switch Bracket Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Turn Signals > Turn Signal Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Turn Signal Switch Bracket Replacement > Page 13811 Turn Signal Switch: Service and Repair Turn Signal Multifunction Switch Replacement Turn Signal Multifunction Switch Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element > Heated Glass Element Relay > Component Information > Locations Heated Glass Element Relay: Locations Electrical Center Identification Views X50A Fuse Block - Underhood, Label Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element > Heated Glass Element Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 13817 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Relays and Modules - Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element Relay > Component Information > Locations Heated Glass Element Relay: Locations Electrical Center Identification Views X50A Fuse Block - Underhood, Label Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Relays and Modules - Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 13822 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Locations Power Window Switch: Locations Door Component Views Driver Door Components 1 - A23D Door Latch Assembly - Driver 2 - A9A Outside Rearview Mirror - Driver 3 - E1C Accent Lamp - Driver Door Handle (LTZ or SLT) 4 - K96L Mirror Control Module - Left (LTZ or SLT) 5 S52S Outside Rearview Mirror Switch 6 - P19G Speaker - Left Front 7 - M74D Window Motor Driver 8 - B63LF Side Impact Sensor - Left Front 9 - S79D Window Switch - Driver 10 - E1D Accent Lamp - Driver Door (LTZ or SLT) Passenger Door Components Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 13827 1 - A9B Outside Rearview Mirror - Passenger 2 - E1M Accent Lamp - Passenger Door Handle (LTZ or SLT) 3 - S79P Window Switch - Passenger 4 - A23P Door Latch Assembly - Passenger 5 - E1P Accent Lamp - Passenger Door (LTZ or SLT) 6 - B63RF Side Impact Sensor - Right Front 7 M74P Window Motor - Passenger 8 - P19U Speaker - Right Front Left Rear Door Components Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 13828 1 - A23LR Door Latch Assembly - Left Rear 2 - S79LR Window Switch - Left Rear 3 - M74LR Window Motor - Left Rear 4 - P19K Speaker - Left Rear 5 - B63LR Side Impact Sensor - Left Rear Right Rear Door Components Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 13829 1 - S79RR Window Switch - Right Rear 2 - A23RR Door Latch Assembly - Right Rear 3 - M74RR Window Motor - Right Rear 4 - B63RR Side Impact Sensor - Right Rear 5 - P19X Speaker - Right Rear Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 13830 Power Window Switch: Diagrams S79D Window Switch - Driver S79LR Window Switch - Left Rear Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 13831 S79P Window Switch - Passenger X1 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 13832 S79P Window Switch - Passenger X2 (LTZ or SLT) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 13833 S79RR Window Switch - Right Rear Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 13834 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Side Door Window Switch Replacement Power Window Switch: Service and Repair Front Side Door Window Switch Replacement Front Side Door Window Switch Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Side Door Window Switch Replacement > Page 13837 Power Window Switch: Service and Repair Front Side Door Window and Multifunction Switch Replacement Front Side Door Window and Multifunction Switch Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Side Door Window Switch Replacement > Page 13838 Power Window Switch: Service and Repair Rear Side Door Window Switch Replacement Rear Side Door Window Switch Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Motor > Front Door Window Motor > Component Information > Locations Front Door Window Motor: Locations Door Component Views Driver Door Components 1 - A23D Door Latch Assembly - Driver 2 - A9A Outside Rearview Mirror - Driver 3 - E1C Accent Lamp - Driver Door Handle (LTZ or SLT) 4 - K96L Mirror Control Module - Left (LTZ or SLT) 5 S52S Outside Rearview Mirror Switch 6 - P19G Speaker - Left Front 7 - M74D Window Motor Driver 8 - B63LF Side Impact Sensor - Left Front 9 - S79D Window Switch - Driver 10 - E1D Accent Lamp - Driver Door (LTZ or SLT) Passenger Door Components Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Motor > Front Door Window Motor > Component Information > Locations > Page 13844 1 - A9B Outside Rearview Mirror - Passenger 2 - E1M Accent Lamp - Passenger Door Handle (LTZ or SLT) 3 - S79P Window Switch - Passenger 4 - A23P Door Latch Assembly - Passenger 5 - E1P Accent Lamp - Passenger Door (LTZ or SLT) 6 - B63RF Side Impact Sensor - Right Front 7 M74P Window Motor - Passenger 8 - P19U Speaker - Right Front Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Motor > Front Door Window Motor > Component Information > Locations > Page 13845 Front Door Window Motor: Diagrams M74D Window Motor - Driver M74LR Window Motor - Left Rear Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Motor > Front Door Window Motor > Component Information > Locations > Page 13846 M74P Window Motor - Passenger Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Motor > Front Door Window Motor > Component Information > Locations > Page 13847 M74RR Window Motor - Right Rear Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Motor > Front Door Window Motor > Component Information > Locations > Page 13848 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Motor > Front Door Window Motor > Component Information > Locations > Page 13849 Front Door Window Motor: Service and Repair Front Side Door Window Regulator Motor Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Motor > Rear Door Window Motor > Component Information > Locations Rear Door Window Motor: Locations Door Component Views Left Rear Door Components 1 - A23LR Door Latch Assembly - Left Rear 2 - S79LR Window Switch - Left Rear 3 - M74LR Window Motor - Left Rear 4 - P19K Speaker - Left Rear 5 - B63LR Side Impact Sensor - Left Rear Right Rear Door Components Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Motor > Rear Door Window Motor > Component Information > Locations > Page 13853 1 - S79RR Window Switch - Right Rear 2 - A23RR Door Latch Assembly - Right Rear 3 - M74RR Window Motor - Right Rear 4 - B63RR Side Impact Sensor - Right Rear 5 - P19X Speaker - Right Rear Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Motor > Rear Door Window Motor > Component Information > Locations > Page 13854 Rear Door Window Motor: Diagrams M74D Window Motor - Driver M74LR Window Motor - Left Rear Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Motor > Rear Door Window Motor > Component Information > Locations > Page 13855 M74P Window Motor - Passenger Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Motor > Rear Door Window Motor > Component Information > Locations > Page 13856 M74RR Window Motor - Right Rear Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Motor > Rear Door Window Motor > Component Information > Locations > Page 13857 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Motor > Rear Door Window Motor > Component Information > Locations > Page 13858 Rear Door Window Motor: Service and Repair Rear Side Door Window Regulator Motor Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Locations Power Window Switch: Locations Door Component Views Driver Door Components 1 - A23D Door Latch Assembly - Driver 2 - A9A Outside Rearview Mirror - Driver 3 - E1C Accent Lamp - Driver Door Handle (LTZ or SLT) 4 - K96L Mirror Control Module - Left (LTZ or SLT) 5 S52S Outside Rearview Mirror Switch 6 - P19G Speaker - Left Front 7 - M74D Window Motor Driver 8 - B63LF Side Impact Sensor - Left Front 9 - S79D Window Switch - Driver 10 - E1D Accent Lamp - Driver Door (LTZ or SLT) Passenger Door Components Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 13862 1 - A9B Outside Rearview Mirror - Passenger 2 - E1M Accent Lamp - Passenger Door Handle (LTZ or SLT) 3 - S79P Window Switch - Passenger 4 - A23P Door Latch Assembly - Passenger 5 - E1P Accent Lamp - Passenger Door (LTZ or SLT) 6 - B63RF Side Impact Sensor - Right Front 7 M74P Window Motor - Passenger 8 - P19U Speaker - Right Front Left Rear Door Components Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 13863 1 - A23LR Door Latch Assembly - Left Rear 2 - S79LR Window Switch - Left Rear 3 - M74LR Window Motor - Left Rear 4 - P19K Speaker - Left Rear 5 - B63LR Side Impact Sensor - Left Rear Right Rear Door Components Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 13864 1 - S79RR Window Switch - Right Rear 2 - A23RR Door Latch Assembly - Right Rear 3 - M74RR Window Motor - Right Rear 4 - B63RR Side Impact Sensor - Right Rear 5 - P19X Speaker - Right Rear Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 13865 Power Window Switch: Diagrams S79D Window Switch - Driver S79LR Window Switch - Left Rear Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 13866 S79P Window Switch - Passenger X1 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 13867 S79P Window Switch - Passenger X2 (LTZ or SLT) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 13868 S79RR Window Switch - Right Rear Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 13869 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Side Door Window Switch Replacement Power Window Switch: Service and Repair Front Side Door Window Switch Replacement Front Side Door Window Switch Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Side Door Window Switch Replacement > Page 13872 Power Window Switch: Service and Repair Front Side Door Window and Multifunction Switch Replacement Front Side Door Window and Multifunction Switch Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Side Door Window Switch Replacement > Page 13873 Power Window Switch: Service and Repair Rear Side Door Window Switch Replacement Rear Side Door Window Switch Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Back Window Glass > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 03-08-48-006H > Apr > 11 > A/C - Window Defroster Contact/Tab Repair Information Back Window Glass: Customer Interest A/C - Window Defroster Contact/Tab Repair Information INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 03-08-48-006H Date: April 11, 2011 Subject: Repair Information for Reconnection of Rear Window Defroster Contact or Tab Models: 2000-2012 GM Passenger Cars and Trucks 2003-2009 HUMMER H2 2006-2010 HUMMER H3 2005-2009 Saab 9-7X 2007-2010 Opel GT 2007-2008 Daewoo G2X Equipped With Electric Rear Window Defroster - RPO C49 Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2012 model year. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 03-08-48-006G (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Repair Suggestions Soldering Defroster Contact Tabs In many cases the terminal tab will still be in the connector when you examine the vehicle. For Chevrolet Tahoe, Suburban, GMC Yukon, and Cadillac Escalade vehicles (with moveable glass), always replace the defroster tab (GM P/N 25916031) and the defroster electrical power connector (P/N 12034110). For all other vehicles, reconnect the original defroster tab. In most applications it is preferable to create a new solder connection to reattach a separated rear defroster tab. If you take note of the steps below, it is possible to create a new solder joint that is equal to, or stronger than, the original. The generic procedure below is not very time intensive, but does include minor preparation work to create a good bonding surface. Be sure to follow each of the steps, as combined they will produce the strongest bond possible. Please consider the following before attempting the repair: - Soldering introduces significant heat to the glass window of the vehicle. When performing the re-connection of the tab, use only the heat required to do the job. Pre-heat the soldering iron and have the solder in your other hand, ready to go, the moment you have enough heat to melt the solder. - If it is winter, bring the vehicle into the service garage and remove any snow from the back window area. Allow time for the glass to warm to the temperature inside the building. Soldering creates a "hot spot" in the glass. DO NOT solder on cold glass. Caution Heating the glass excessively, or repeatedly without time to cool, may result in glass breakage. ALWAYS wear safety glasses when performing this repair! - You MUST use a silver-bearing solder to make the connection. DO NOT attempt this repair with conventional tin/lead alloy solders. Silver bearing solder will adhere to the electrical buss bar, making a strong and lasting repair. - Protect surfaces under the area to be soldered. It is very easy to drip solder when performing this repair. Placing a shop towel under the soldering area is sufficient protection. Soldering Procedure 1. It is imperative to remove and replace the rear defroster electrical power connector by crimping a new connector to the feed wire. The proper connector P/N 12034110 can be found in the Packard Electrical Assortment, Tray 18, Position 5. - Insert Delphi pick 12094430 to depress the locking tab on the terminal. - Insert Delphi pick 12094429 to release the secondary lock tab. Important DO NOT re-use the existing defroster tab on new-style full-size utility vehicles with moveable glass. 2. Connect the electrical connector to the defroster tab. Fully engage the connector. An improperly seated connector may cause excessive resistance and impede the proper operation of the defroster. Add a small bead of solder to mate the electrical connector tab to the defroster tab. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Back Window Glass > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 03-08-48-006H > Apr > 11 > A/C - Window Defroster Contact/Tab Repair Information > Page 13883 3. Prepare the surface of the used defroster tab (not required for new tabs on new-style full-size utility models) and the defroster buss bar with fine grain (500 grit) sandpaper or Emery cloth. It is not necessary to remove all of the original solder, but it should be scuffed sufficiently so that no oxidation is present. The photo above shows a close up of a properly prepared surface. Tip You may want to mask the glass around the contact area with tape. This is easy to do and will allow you to safely prepare the contact surface without the risk of scratching the glass or the black painted shading. Important Most rear glass has a black painted masking around the edge of the glass. When cleaning up the connection surface, be very careful not to damage the surface of the black shading or the surface of the glass. 4. Wipe the newly prepared contact area with Kent Automotive* Acrysol(TM) (or equivalent) to remove any residual oil or dirt. Important Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Back Window Glass > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 03-08-48-006H > Apr > 11 > A/C - Window Defroster Contact/Tab Repair Information > Page 13884 You MUST use a silver-bearing solder to make the solder joint. DO NOT attempt this repair with conventional tin/lead alloy solders. Most suppliers have this type of solder available and it is available nationally at Radio Shack(R)*. It is sold in several diameters and either are acceptable for this repair. 5. For this step, it is permitted that two technicians be used if required. Heat the new connector on the surface of the buss bar that is to be soldered. Long nose pliers are suggested to hold the electrical connector and the defroster tab in place. Keep the solder ready and begin flowing out the solder as soon as the melting temperature has been reached. Tip If a single technician is attempting this repair, it is beneficial to wrap one turn of the solder around the new contacts base. In this manner, as the melting point of the solder is reached, a layer is deposited on the bottom side of the contact. Important Try to align the new contact so that it is positioned with the same orientation as the original contact. 6. The above illustrates an ideal finished solder joint. Additional stray solder will not harm the performance of the bond; however, while it is unlikely that customers may refer to the appearance of the rear window defroster and its components as a positive styling feature of the vehicle interior, it is easy to elicit the opposite reaction due to a poor cosmetic application. *We believe this source and their products to be reliable. There may be additional manufacturers of such products/materials. General Motors does not endorse, indicate any preference for, or assume any responsibility for the products or material from this firm or for any such items that may be available from other sources. Parts Information Acrysol(TM) can be ordered directly from Kent Automotive at 1-800-654-6333 (in Canada, 1-800-563-1717). Radio Shack(R) products can be found nationally at retail locations, www.radioshack.com, or at 1-800-843-7422. All other parts can be ordered through GMSPO or SSPO. Warranty Information (excluding Saab U.S. Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use: Warranty Information (Saab U.S. Models) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Back Window Glass > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 03-08-48-006H > Apr > 11 > A/C - Window Defroster Contact/Tab Repair Information > Page 13885 For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Back Window Glass > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Back Window Glass: > 03-08-48-006H > Apr > 11 > A/C - Window Defroster Contact/Tab Repair Information Back Window Glass: All Technical Service Bulletins A/C - Window Defroster Contact/Tab Repair Information INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 03-08-48-006H Date: April 11, 2011 Subject: Repair Information for Reconnection of Rear Window Defroster Contact or Tab Models: 2000-2012 GM Passenger Cars and Trucks 2003-2009 HUMMER H2 2006-2010 HUMMER H3 2005-2009 Saab 9-7X 2007-2010 Opel GT 2007-2008 Daewoo G2X Equipped With Electric Rear Window Defroster - RPO C49 Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2012 model year. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 03-08-48-006G (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Repair Suggestions Soldering Defroster Contact Tabs In many cases the terminal tab will still be in the connector when you examine the vehicle. For Chevrolet Tahoe, Suburban, GMC Yukon, and Cadillac Escalade vehicles (with moveable glass), always replace the defroster tab (GM P/N 25916031) and the defroster electrical power connector (P/N 12034110). For all other vehicles, reconnect the original defroster tab. In most applications it is preferable to create a new solder connection to reattach a separated rear defroster tab. If you take note of the steps below, it is possible to create a new solder joint that is equal to, or stronger than, the original. The generic procedure below is not very time intensive, but does include minor preparation work to create a good bonding surface. Be sure to follow each of the steps, as combined they will produce the strongest bond possible. Please consider the following before attempting the repair: - Soldering introduces significant heat to the glass window of the vehicle. When performing the re-connection of the tab, use only the heat required to do the job. Pre-heat the soldering iron and have the solder in your other hand, ready to go, the moment you have enough heat to melt the solder. - If it is winter, bring the vehicle into the service garage and remove any snow from the back window area. Allow time for the glass to warm to the temperature inside the building. Soldering creates a "hot spot" in the glass. DO NOT solder on cold glass. Caution Heating the glass excessively, or repeatedly without time to cool, may result in glass breakage. ALWAYS wear safety glasses when performing this repair! - You MUST use a silver-bearing solder to make the connection. DO NOT attempt this repair with conventional tin/lead alloy solders. Silver bearing solder will adhere to the electrical buss bar, making a strong and lasting repair. - Protect surfaces under the area to be soldered. It is very easy to drip solder when performing this repair. Placing a shop towel under the soldering area is sufficient protection. Soldering Procedure 1. It is imperative to remove and replace the rear defroster electrical power connector by crimping a new connector to the feed wire. The proper connector P/N 12034110 can be found in the Packard Electrical Assortment, Tray 18, Position 5. - Insert Delphi pick 12094430 to depress the locking tab on the terminal. - Insert Delphi pick 12094429 to release the secondary lock tab. Important DO NOT re-use the existing defroster tab on new-style full-size utility vehicles with moveable glass. 2. Connect the electrical connector to the defroster tab. Fully engage the connector. An improperly seated connector may cause excessive resistance and impede the proper operation of the defroster. Add a small bead of solder to mate the electrical connector tab to the defroster tab. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Back Window Glass > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Back Window Glass: > 03-08-48-006H > Apr > 11 > A/C - Window Defroster Contact/Tab Repair Information > Page 13891 3. Prepare the surface of the used defroster tab (not required for new tabs on new-style full-size utility models) and the defroster buss bar with fine grain (500 grit) sandpaper or Emery cloth. It is not necessary to remove all of the original solder, but it should be scuffed sufficiently so that no oxidation is present. The photo above shows a close up of a properly prepared surface. Tip You may want to mask the glass around the contact area with tape. This is easy to do and will allow you to safely prepare the contact surface without the risk of scratching the glass or the black painted shading. Important Most rear glass has a black painted masking around the edge of the glass. When cleaning up the connection surface, be very careful not to damage the surface of the black shading or the surface of the glass. 4. Wipe the newly prepared contact area with Kent Automotive* Acrysol(TM) (or equivalent) to remove any residual oil or dirt. Important Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Back Window Glass > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Back Window Glass: > 03-08-48-006H > Apr > 11 > A/C - Window Defroster Contact/Tab Repair Information > Page 13892 You MUST use a silver-bearing solder to make the solder joint. DO NOT attempt this repair with conventional tin/lead alloy solders. Most suppliers have this type of solder available and it is available nationally at Radio Shack(R)*. It is sold in several diameters and either are acceptable for this repair. 5. For this step, it is permitted that two technicians be used if required. Heat the new connector on the surface of the buss bar that is to be soldered. Long nose pliers are suggested to hold the electrical connector and the defroster tab in place. Keep the solder ready and begin flowing out the solder as soon as the melting temperature has been reached. Tip If a single technician is attempting this repair, it is beneficial to wrap one turn of the solder around the new contacts base. In this manner, as the melting point of the solder is reached, a layer is deposited on the bottom side of the contact. Important Try to align the new contact so that it is positioned with the same orientation as the original contact. 6. The above illustrates an ideal finished solder joint. Additional stray solder will not harm the performance of the bond; however, while it is unlikely that customers may refer to the appearance of the rear window defroster and its components as a positive styling feature of the vehicle interior, it is easy to elicit the opposite reaction due to a poor cosmetic application. *We believe this source and their products to be reliable. There may be additional manufacturers of such products/materials. General Motors does not endorse, indicate any preference for, or assume any responsibility for the products or material from this firm or for any such items that may be available from other sources. Parts Information Acrysol(TM) can be ordered directly from Kent Automotive at 1-800-654-6333 (in Canada, 1-800-563-1717). Radio Shack(R) products can be found nationally at retail locations, www.radioshack.com, or at 1-800-843-7422. All other parts can be ordered through GMSPO or SSPO. Warranty Information (excluding Saab U.S. Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use: Warranty Information (Saab U.S. Models) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Back Window Glass > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Back Window Glass: > 03-08-48-006H > Apr > 11 > A/C - Window Defroster Contact/Tab Repair Information > Page 13893 For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Back Window Glass > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Back Window Glass: > 00-08-48-005D > Sep > 10 > Body - Vehicle Glass Distortion Information Back Window Glass: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - Vehicle Glass Distortion Information INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 00-08-48-005D Date: September 10, 2010 Subject: Distortion in Outer Surface of Vehicle Glass Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks 2009 and Prior HUMMER H2 2010 and Prior HUMMER H3 2005-2009 Saab 9-7X 2010 and Prior Saturn Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 00-08-48-005C (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Distortion in the outer surface of the windshield glass, door glass or backlite glass may appear after the vehicle has: - Accumulated some mileage. - Been frequently washed in automatic car washes, particularly "touchless" car washes. This distortion may look like a subtle orange peel pattern, or may look like a drip or sag etched into the surface of the glass. Some car wash solutions contain a buffered solution of hydrofluoric acid which is used to clean the glass. This should not cause a problem if used in the correct concentration. However, if not used correctly, hydrofluoric acid will attack the glass, and over time, will cause visual distortion in the outer surface of the glass which cannot be removed by scraping or polishing. If this condition is suspected, look at the area of the windshield under the wipers or below the belt seal on the side glass. The area of the glass below the wipers or belt seal will not be affected and what looks like a drip or sag may be apparent at the edge of the wiper or belt seal. You may also see a line on the glass where the wiper blade or the belt seal contacts the glass. Important The repair will require replacing the affected glass and is not a result of a defect in material or workmanship. Therefore, is not covered by New Vehicle Warranty. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Back Window Glass > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Back Window Glass: > 00-08-48-005D > Sep > 10 > Body - Vehicle Glass Distortion Information Back Window Glass: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - Vehicle Glass Distortion Information INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 00-08-48-005D Date: September 10, 2010 Subject: Distortion in Outer Surface of Vehicle Glass Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks 2009 and Prior HUMMER H2 2010 and Prior HUMMER H3 2005-2009 Saab 9-7X 2010 and Prior Saturn Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 00-08-48-005C (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Distortion in the outer surface of the windshield glass, door glass or backlite glass may appear after the vehicle has: - Accumulated some mileage. - Been frequently washed in automatic car washes, particularly "touchless" car washes. This distortion may look like a subtle orange peel pattern, or may look like a drip or sag etched into the surface of the glass. Some car wash solutions contain a buffered solution of hydrofluoric acid which is used to clean the glass. This should not cause a problem if used in the correct concentration. However, if not used correctly, hydrofluoric acid will attack the glass, and over time, will cause visual distortion in the outer surface of the glass which cannot be removed by scraping or polishing. If this condition is suspected, look at the area of the windshield under the wipers or below the belt seal on the side glass. The area of the glass below the wipers or belt seal will not be affected and what looks like a drip or sag may be apparent at the edge of the wiper or belt seal. You may also see a line on the glass where the wiper blade or the belt seal contacts the glass. Important The repair will require replacing the affected glass and is not a result of a defect in material or workmanship. Therefore, is not covered by New Vehicle Warranty. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Front Corner Window Glass > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Body - Vehicle Glass Distortion Information Front Corner Window Glass: Technical Service Bulletins Body - Vehicle Glass Distortion Information INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 00-08-48-005D Date: September 10, 2010 Subject: Distortion in Outer Surface of Vehicle Glass Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks 2009 and Prior HUMMER H2 2010 and Prior HUMMER H3 2005-2009 Saab 9-7X 2010 and Prior Saturn Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 00-08-48-005C (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Distortion in the outer surface of the windshield glass, door glass or backlite glass may appear after the vehicle has: - Accumulated some mileage. - Been frequently washed in automatic car washes, particularly "touchless" car washes. This distortion may look like a subtle orange peel pattern, or may look like a drip or sag etched into the surface of the glass. Some car wash solutions contain a buffered solution of hydrofluoric acid which is used to clean the glass. This should not cause a problem if used in the correct concentration. However, if not used correctly, hydrofluoric acid will attack the glass, and over time, will cause visual distortion in the outer surface of the glass which cannot be removed by scraping or polishing. If this condition is suspected, look at the area of the windshield under the wipers or below the belt seal on the side glass. The area of the glass below the wipers or belt seal will not be affected and what looks like a drip or sag may be apparent at the edge of the wiper or belt seal. You may also see a line on the glass where the wiper blade or the belt seal contacts the glass. Important The repair will require replacing the affected glass and is not a result of a defect in material or workmanship. Therefore, is not covered by New Vehicle Warranty. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Front Door Window Glass > Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Front Side Door Window Belt Reveal Molding Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Liftgate Window Glass > Component Information > Service and Repair Liftgate Window Glass: Service and Repair Liftgate Window Replacement Special Tools * J 24402-A Glass Sealant (Cold Knife) Remover * J 39032 Stationary Glass Removal Tool * Use a urethane adhesive systems which meet GM Specification GM 3651G Removal Procedure Warning: Refer to Cracked Window Warning (See: Service Precautions/Cracked Window Warning). Note: Before cutting out a stationary window, apply a double layer of masking tape around the perimeter of the painted surfaces and the interior trim. 1. Open the liftgate. 2. Remove the liftgate lower trim finish panel. Refer to Liftgate Lower Trim Finish Panel Replacement () and Liftgate Lower Trim Finish Panel Replacement (). 3. Disconnect the electrical connectors from the liftgate window defogger bus bar. 4. Remove the rear window wiper arm. Refer to Rear Window Wiper Arm Replacement (Equinox) (See: Wiper and Washer Systems/Wiper Arm/Service and Repair/Rear Window Wiper Arm Replacement) Rear Window Wiper Arm Replacement (Terrain) (See: Wiper and Washer Systems/Wiper Arm/Service and Repair/Rear Window Wiper Arm Replacement). 5. Remove the rear end spoiler. Refer to Rear End Spoiler Replacement (Equinox) (See: Body and Frame/Spoilers, Flaps, and Air Dams/Spoiler/Service and Repair) Rear End Spoiler Replacement (Terrain) (See: Body and Frame/Spoilers, Flaps, and Air Dams/Spoiler/Service and Repair). Warning: Refer to Defroster Outlet Warning (See: Heating and Air Conditioning/Service Precautions/Technician Safety Information). 6. Cover the following parts to protect from broken glass: * Upper dash pad * Defroster outlets and A/C outlets * Seats and carpeting Warning: Refer to Glass and Sheet Metal Handling Warning (See: Body and Frame/Service Precautions/Technician Safety Information/Glass and Sheet Metal Handling Warning). 7. Using a utility knife, carefully cut the lace (1) from the sides and the top edge of the window to access the urethane adhesive bead, if equipped. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Liftgate Window Glass > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 13914 Note: Keep the cutting edge of the tool against the window. 8. Remove the window from the urethane adhesive. * Leave a base of urethane approximately 2 mm (0.078 in) on the pinch-weld flange. * The only suitable lubrication is clear water. * Use J 24402-A, J 39032 or equivalent in order to remove the window. Note: Keep the cutting edge of the knife/tool against the window. Do this from inside the vehicle. 9. If necessary, use a long utility knife or similar tool to remove the bottom corners of the window from the urethane adhesive. 10. With the aid of an assistant, remove the window (1) from the vehicle. Installation Procedure 1. Install the liftgate window into the opening. Refer to Adhesive Installation of Liftgate Windows (See: Service and Repair/Adhesive Installation of Liftgate Windows). 2. Install the rear end spoiler. Refer to Rear End Spoiler Replacement (Equinox) (See: Body and Frame/Spoilers, Flaps, and Air Dams/Spoiler/Service and Repair) Rear End Spoiler Replacement (Terrain) (See: Body and Frame/Spoilers, Flaps, and Air Dams/Spoiler/Service and Repair). 3. Install the rear window wiper arm. Refer to Rear Window Wiper Arm Replacement (Equinox) (See: Wiper and Washer Systems/Wiper Arm/Service and Repair/Rear Window Wiper Arm Replacement) Rear Window Wiper Arm Replacement (Terrain) (See: Wiper and Washer Systems/Wiper Arm/Service and Repair/Rear Window Wiper Arm Replacement). 4. Connect the liftgate window defogger electrical connectors to the bus bar. 5. Install the liftgate lower trim finish panel. Refer to Liftgate Lower Trim Finish Panel Replacement () and Liftgate Lower Trim Finish Panel Replacement (). 6. Remove the double layer of masking tape around the perimeter of the painted surfaces and the interior trim. 7. Close the liftgate. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Quarter Window Glass > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Body - Vehicle Glass Distortion Information Quarter Window Glass: Technical Service Bulletins Body - Vehicle Glass Distortion Information INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 00-08-48-005D Date: September 10, 2010 Subject: Distortion in Outer Surface of Vehicle Glass Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks 2009 and Prior HUMMER H2 2010 and Prior HUMMER H3 2005-2009 Saab 9-7X 2010 and Prior Saturn Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 00-08-48-005C (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Distortion in the outer surface of the windshield glass, door glass or backlite glass may appear after the vehicle has: - Accumulated some mileage. - Been frequently washed in automatic car washes, particularly "touchless" car washes. This distortion may look like a subtle orange peel pattern, or may look like a drip or sag etched into the surface of the glass. Some car wash solutions contain a buffered solution of hydrofluoric acid which is used to clean the glass. This should not cause a problem if used in the correct concentration. However, if not used correctly, hydrofluoric acid will attack the glass, and over time, will cause visual distortion in the outer surface of the glass which cannot be removed by scraping or polishing. If this condition is suspected, look at the area of the windshield under the wipers or below the belt seal on the side glass. The area of the glass below the wipers or belt seal will not be affected and what looks like a drip or sag may be apparent at the edge of the wiper or belt seal. You may also see a line on the glass where the wiper blade or the belt seal contacts the glass. Important The repair will require replacing the affected glass and is not a result of a defect in material or workmanship. Therefore, is not covered by New Vehicle Warranty. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Quarter Window Glass > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 13919 Quarter Window Glass: Service and Repair Quarter Window Replacement Special Tools * J 24402-A Glass Sealant (Cold Knife) Remover * J 39032 Stationary Glass Removal Tool * Use a urethane adhesive systems which meet GM Specification GM 3651G Removal Procedure Warning: Refer to Cracked Window Warning (See: Service Precautions/Cracked Window Warning). Note: Before cutting out a quarter window, apply a double layer of masking tape around the perimeter of the painted surfaces and the interior trim. 1. Open the liftgate. 2. Remove the quarter window trim finish panel. Refer to Quarter Window Trim Finish Panel Replacement (See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair/Quarter Window Trim Finish Panel Replacement). Warning: Refer to Defroster Outlet Warning (See: Heating and Air Conditioning/Service Precautions/Technician Safety Information). 3. Cover the following parts to protect from broken glass: * Upper dash pad * Defroster outlets and A/C outlets * Seats and carpeting Warning: Refer to Glass and Sheet Metal Handling Warning (See: Body and Frame/Service Precautions/Technician Safety Information/Glass and Sheet Metal Handling Warning). 4. Using a utility knife, carefully cut the lace (1) from the sides and the top edge of the window to access the urethane adhesive bead, if equipped. Note: Keep the cutting edge of the tool against the window. 5. Remove the window from the urethane adhesive. * Leave a base of urethane approximately 2 mm (0.078 in) on the pinch-weld flange. * The only suitable lubrication is clear water. * Use J 24402-A, J 39032, or equivalent to remove the window. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Quarter Window Glass > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 13920 Note: Keep the cutting edge of the knife/tool against the window. Do this from inside the vehicle. 6. If necessary, use a long utility knife or similar tool to remove the bottom corners of the window from the urethane adhesive. 7. Remove the window (1) from the vehicle. Installation Procedure 1. Install the quarter window into the opening. Refer to Adhesive Installation of Quarter Windows (See: Service and Repair/Adhesive Installation of Quarter Windows). 2. Install the quarter window trim finish panel. Refer to Quarter Window Trim Finish Panel Replacement (See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair/Quarter Window Trim Finish Panel Replacement). 3. Remove the double layer of masking tape around the perimeter of the painted surfaces and the interior trim. 4. Close the liftgate. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Rear Door Window Glass > Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Rear Side Door Window Belt Reveal Molding Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Regulator > Front Door Window Regulator > System Information > Service and Repair Front Door Window Regulator: Service and Repair Front Side Door Window Regulator Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Regulator > Rear Door Window Regulator > System Information > Service and Repair Rear Door Window Regulator: Service and Repair Rear Side Door Window Regulator Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windshield > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-08-48-006 > Sep > 09 > Body - Stain/Film On Windshield Glass Perimeter Windshield: Customer Interest Body - Stain/Film On Windshield Glass Perimeter TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 09-08-48-006 Date: September 18, 2009 Subject: Clear Stain or Film on Inside Perimeter of Windshield Glass (Clean/Polish Glass) Models: 2010 and Prior Passenger Cars and Trucks (Including Saturn and Saab) 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 Condition Some customers may comment on a clear stain or film on the inside of the windshield glass. This condition appears along the outer edges of the glass along the top, bottom or A-pillar areas. Normal glass cleaning procedures will not remove the stain. Cause The assembly plant uses a clear sealer/primer on the outer edge of the windshield glass to improve adhesion to the urethane adhesive that bonds the windshield glass to the vehicle body. Excess sealer/primer may drip or flow onto the windshield and cause a stain. Once the sealer/primer dries, it may appear to have etched the glass. Correction Note A "white" type of toothpaste is recommended for this repair. Gel-type toothpaste may provide less satisfactory results. Use a small amount of toothpaste on a soft, cotton cloth to polish the stained area. It may be necessary to wrap the cloth around a paint stir stick or a similar tool to reach the lower corners of the windshield glass. After polishing the glass, clean the inside of the windshield glass with a clean, damp, cotton cloth and verify all of the stain is removed. Do not use any cleaners or solvents - use only clean warm water. Warranty Information (excluding Saab U.S. Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use: Warranty Information (Saab U.S. Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windshield > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-08-48-006 > Sep > 09 > Body - Stain/Film On Windshield Glass Perimeter > Page 13940 Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windshield > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-08-48-002A > Mar > 09 > Body - Marks/Stains on Windshield When Wet Windshield: Customer Interest Body - Marks/Stains on Windshield When Wet TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 09-08-48-002A Date: March 19, 2009 Subject: Marks/Stains on Windshield When Wet (Clean Windshield) Models: 2010 and Prior Passenger Cars and Trucks (Including Saturn and Saab) 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the models and model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 09-08-48-002 (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Condition Some owners may comment that marks/stains appear on the windshield when the windshield is wet. Cause This condition may be caused by contact between the windshield and the vacuum hoses or other tools used in the assembly process. This contact may leave a residue that creates a water repellent surface on the glass which, in wet conditions, appear as marks/stains on the surface. Correction Important DO NOT REPLACE THE WINDSHIELD FOR THIS CONDITION. To clean the windshield, use Eastwood Glass Polishing Compound*. Follow the manufacturer's directions for product use. Use only hand tools. DO NOT USE POWER TOOLS. Parts Information Eastwood Glass Polishing Compound 1-800-343-9353 (for overseas inquiries: +1-610-705-2200) http://www.eastwoodco.com/ *We believe this source and their products to be reliable. There may be additional manufacturers of such products. General Motors does not endorse, indicate any preference for or assume any responsibility for the products from this firm or for any such items which may be available from other sources. Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table above. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windshield > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Windshield: > 06-08-43-003C > Feb > 11 > Glass/Body - Windshield Wiper Performance Windshield: All Technical Service Bulletins Glass/Body - Windshield Wiper Performance INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 06-08-43-003C Date: February 21, 2011 Subject: Windshield Wiper Performance, Cleaning Instructions and Maintenance Models: 2012 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (including Saturn) 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2010 and Prior Isuzu Medium Duty Trucks 2005-2009 Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2011 and 2012 model year. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 06-08-43-003B (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Wiper Concerns Most concerns about windshield wiper performance are the result of dirty wiper blades, damaged wiper blades, or worn out blades that are continuing to be used beyond their useful life. Depending on environmental conditions, wiper blades can have dramatic differences in lifespan. Here are some tips and guidelines to maximize wiper performance to avoid damage to the blades, and to avoid unnecessary replacements. Many wiper blades are being replaced under warranty with reviews showing there is nothing wrong with the returned blades other than a build-up of dirt. Additionally, advise the customer to review the information in their Owner Manual. Inspection and Cleaning Scheduled Maintenance - Inspect your wipers rubber blades every 4-6 months or 12,000 km (7,500 mi) for wear, cracking or contamination. - Clean the windshield and the rubber wiper blades (using the procedure below) if the blades are not clearing the glass satisfactorily. If this does not correct the problem, then replace the rubber elements. Cleaning Procedure Important Avoid getting windshield washer fluid on your hands. Wear rubber gloves or avoid direct contact with washer fluid. Important Do not use gasoline, kerosene, or petroleum based products to clean wiper blades. - Clean the rubber blades using a lint free cloth or paper towel soaked with windshield washer fluid or a mild detergent. You should see significant amounts of dirt being removed on the cloth. - Be sure to wash the windshield thoroughly when you clean the blades. Bugs, road grime, sap and a buildup of car wash/wax treatments may additionally cause wiper streaking. Tip For a larger scale buildup on the windshield, use a non-abrasive cleaner such as Bon-Ami* (www.faultless.com) cleanser with a wet sponge, being sure to use plenty of water to avoid scratching the glass. Flush the surface and body panels completely. Tip For day-to-day exterior glass cleaning and to maintain a streak free appearance, suggest Vehicle Care Glass Cleaner, P/N 88862560 (in Canada, 992727). This product is an easy to use foaming cleaner that quickly removes dirt and grime from glass surfaces. Tip Interior glass should be cleaned with plain, clean water to eliminate any film or haze on the window and help prevent fogging, a major customer dissatisfier. Refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 03-00-89-006D for more information. The New Vehicle Pre-Delivery Inspection form also recommends using plain water to clean interior glass. *"We believe this material to be reliable. There may be additional manufacturers of such material. General Motors does not endorse, indicate any preference for or assume any responsibility for the products or equipment from these firms or any such items which may be available from other sources. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windshield > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Windshield: > 06-08-43-003C > Feb > 11 > Glass/Body - Windshield Wiper Performance > Page 13950 Avoiding Wiper Damage The following are major contributors to wiper damage. Some of these you can control and others are environmental concerns. - Extremely dusty areas (such as driving on dirt roads) may cause the wipers rubber edge to wear quickly and unevenly. - Sand and salt used on roads for increasing winter traction and ice control will cause the wiper blades to wear quicker. Areas with significant snowfall require more frequent blade replacements. - Heat and time may cause the rubber blades to take a "permanent set" resulting in the rubber not flexing and turning over uniformly. This condition may result in streaking and/or unwiped areas. - Rubber blades are easily cut or torn when using ice scrapers. Likewise pulling blades up off a frozen windshield can tear the rubber. Exercise caution when clearing ice and snow. - Using your wipers to "wear through" frost and ice, instead of allowing the defrosters to melt the ice, can dull, nick or tear the rubber blades. - Banging wipers on the glass to remove ice and snow may cause the blade to bend, dislodging the rubber and causing potential scratching of the windshield. - Ice can form in the pin joints of the wipers, which can cause streaking and unwiped areas. To remove ice from pin joints, compress the blade and rubber edge with your hand to loosen the frozen joints. Consider using Winter Blades that have a rubber cover to avoid this condition. Note GM does not recommend the use of any spray on/wipe on windshield treatments or washer fluid additives. The variation in friction that results on the glass from the use of these products causes wipers to chatter and have premature wear. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windshield > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Windshield: > 00-08-48-005D > Sep > 10 > Body - Vehicle Glass Distortion Information Windshield: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - Vehicle Glass Distortion Information INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 00-08-48-005D Date: September 10, 2010 Subject: Distortion in Outer Surface of Vehicle Glass Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks 2009 and Prior HUMMER H2 2010 and Prior HUMMER H3 2005-2009 Saab 9-7X 2010 and Prior Saturn Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 00-08-48-005C (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Distortion in the outer surface of the windshield glass, door glass or backlite glass may appear after the vehicle has: - Accumulated some mileage. - Been frequently washed in automatic car washes, particularly "touchless" car washes. This distortion may look like a subtle orange peel pattern, or may look like a drip or sag etched into the surface of the glass. Some car wash solutions contain a buffered solution of hydrofluoric acid which is used to clean the glass. This should not cause a problem if used in the correct concentration. However, if not used correctly, hydrofluoric acid will attack the glass, and over time, will cause visual distortion in the outer surface of the glass which cannot be removed by scraping or polishing. If this condition is suspected, look at the area of the windshield under the wipers or below the belt seal on the side glass. The area of the glass below the wipers or belt seal will not be affected and what looks like a drip or sag may be apparent at the edge of the wiper or belt seal. You may also see a line on the glass where the wiper blade or the belt seal contacts the glass. Important The repair will require replacing the affected glass and is not a result of a defect in material or workmanship. Therefore, is not covered by New Vehicle Warranty. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windshield > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Windshield: > 09-08-48-006 > Sep > 09 > Body - Stain/Film On Windshield Glass Perimeter Windshield: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - Stain/Film On Windshield Glass Perimeter TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 09-08-48-006 Date: September 18, 2009 Subject: Clear Stain or Film on Inside Perimeter of Windshield Glass (Clean/Polish Glass) Models: 2010 and Prior Passenger Cars and Trucks (Including Saturn and Saab) 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 Condition Some customers may comment on a clear stain or film on the inside of the windshield glass. This condition appears along the outer edges of the glass along the top, bottom or A-pillar areas. Normal glass cleaning procedures will not remove the stain. Cause The assembly plant uses a clear sealer/primer on the outer edge of the windshield glass to improve adhesion to the urethane adhesive that bonds the windshield glass to the vehicle body. Excess sealer/primer may drip or flow onto the windshield and cause a stain. Once the sealer/primer dries, it may appear to have etched the glass. Correction Note A "white" type of toothpaste is recommended for this repair. Gel-type toothpaste may provide less satisfactory results. Use a small amount of toothpaste on a soft, cotton cloth to polish the stained area. It may be necessary to wrap the cloth around a paint stir stick or a similar tool to reach the lower corners of the windshield glass. After polishing the glass, clean the inside of the windshield glass with a clean, damp, cotton cloth and verify all of the stain is removed. Do not use any cleaners or solvents - use only clean warm water. Warranty Information (excluding Saab U.S. Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use: Warranty Information (Saab U.S. Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windshield > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Windshield: > 09-08-48-006 > Sep > 09 > Body - Stain/Film On Windshield Glass Perimeter > Page 13959 Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windshield > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Windshield: > 09-08-48-002A > Mar > 09 > Body - Marks/Stains on Windshield When Wet Windshield: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - Marks/Stains on Windshield When Wet TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 09-08-48-002A Date: March 19, 2009 Subject: Marks/Stains on Windshield When Wet (Clean Windshield) Models: 2010 and Prior Passenger Cars and Trucks (Including Saturn and Saab) 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the models and model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 09-08-48-002 (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Condition Some owners may comment that marks/stains appear on the windshield when the windshield is wet. Cause This condition may be caused by contact between the windshield and the vacuum hoses or other tools used in the assembly process. This contact may leave a residue that creates a water repellent surface on the glass which, in wet conditions, appear as marks/stains on the surface. Correction Important DO NOT REPLACE THE WINDSHIELD FOR THIS CONDITION. To clean the windshield, use Eastwood Glass Polishing Compound*. Follow the manufacturer's directions for product use. Use only hand tools. DO NOT USE POWER TOOLS. Parts Information Eastwood Glass Polishing Compound 1-800-343-9353 (for overseas inquiries: +1-610-705-2200) http://www.eastwoodco.com/ *We believe this source and their products to be reliable. There may be additional manufacturers of such products. General Motors does not endorse, indicate any preference for or assume any responsibility for the products from this firm or for any such items which may be available from other sources. Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table above. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windshield > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Windshield: > 06-08-43-003C > Feb > 11 > Glass/Body - Windshield Wiper Performance Windshield: All Technical Service Bulletins Glass/Body - Windshield Wiper Performance INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 06-08-43-003C Date: February 21, 2011 Subject: Windshield Wiper Performance, Cleaning Instructions and Maintenance Models: 2012 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (including Saturn) 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2010 and Prior Isuzu Medium Duty Trucks 2005-2009 Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2011 and 2012 model year. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 06-08-43-003B (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Wiper Concerns Most concerns about windshield wiper performance are the result of dirty wiper blades, damaged wiper blades, or worn out blades that are continuing to be used beyond their useful life. Depending on environmental conditions, wiper blades can have dramatic differences in lifespan. Here are some tips and guidelines to maximize wiper performance to avoid damage to the blades, and to avoid unnecessary replacements. Many wiper blades are being replaced under warranty with reviews showing there is nothing wrong with the returned blades other than a build-up of dirt. Additionally, advise the customer to review the information in their Owner Manual. Inspection and Cleaning Scheduled Maintenance - Inspect your wipers rubber blades every 4-6 months or 12,000 km (7,500 mi) for wear, cracking or contamination. - Clean the windshield and the rubber wiper blades (using the procedure below) if the blades are not clearing the glass satisfactorily. If this does not correct the problem, then replace the rubber elements. Cleaning Procedure Important Avoid getting windshield washer fluid on your hands. Wear rubber gloves or avoid direct contact with washer fluid. Important Do not use gasoline, kerosene, or petroleum based products to clean wiper blades. - Clean the rubber blades using a lint free cloth or paper towel soaked with windshield washer fluid or a mild detergent. You should see significant amounts of dirt being removed on the cloth. - Be sure to wash the windshield thoroughly when you clean the blades. Bugs, road grime, sap and a buildup of car wash/wax treatments may additionally cause wiper streaking. Tip For a larger scale buildup on the windshield, use a non-abrasive cleaner such as Bon-Ami* (www.faultless.com) cleanser with a wet sponge, being sure to use plenty of water to avoid scratching the glass. Flush the surface and body panels completely. Tip For day-to-day exterior glass cleaning and to maintain a streak free appearance, suggest Vehicle Care Glass Cleaner, P/N 88862560 (in Canada, 992727). This product is an easy to use foaming cleaner that quickly removes dirt and grime from glass surfaces. Tip Interior glass should be cleaned with plain, clean water to eliminate any film or haze on the window and help prevent fogging, a major customer dissatisfier. Refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 03-00-89-006D for more information. The New Vehicle Pre-Delivery Inspection form also recommends using plain water to clean interior glass. *"We believe this material to be reliable. There may be additional manufacturers of such material. General Motors does not endorse, indicate any preference for or assume any responsibility for the products or equipment from these firms or any such items which may be available from other sources. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windshield > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Windshield: > 06-08-43-003C > Feb > 11 > Glass/Body - Windshield Wiper Performance > Page 13969 Avoiding Wiper Damage The following are major contributors to wiper damage. Some of these you can control and others are environmental concerns. - Extremely dusty areas (such as driving on dirt roads) may cause the wipers rubber edge to wear quickly and unevenly. - Sand and salt used on roads for increasing winter traction and ice control will cause the wiper blades to wear quicker. Areas with significant snowfall require more frequent blade replacements. - Heat and time may cause the rubber blades to take a "permanent set" resulting in the rubber not flexing and turning over uniformly. This condition may result in streaking and/or unwiped areas. - Rubber blades are easily cut or torn when using ice scrapers. Likewise pulling blades up off a frozen windshield can tear the rubber. Exercise caution when clearing ice and snow. - Using your wipers to "wear through" frost and ice, instead of allowing the defrosters to melt the ice, can dull, nick or tear the rubber blades. - Banging wipers on the glass to remove ice and snow may cause the blade to bend, dislodging the rubber and causing potential scratching of the windshield. - Ice can form in the pin joints of the wipers, which can cause streaking and unwiped areas. To remove ice from pin joints, compress the blade and rubber edge with your hand to loosen the frozen joints. Consider using Winter Blades that have a rubber cover to avoid this condition. Note GM does not recommend the use of any spray on/wipe on windshield treatments or washer fluid additives. The variation in friction that results on the glass from the use of these products causes wipers to chatter and have premature wear. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windshield > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Windshield: > 00-08-48-005D > Sep > 10 > Body - Vehicle Glass Distortion Information Windshield: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - Vehicle Glass Distortion Information INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 00-08-48-005D Date: September 10, 2010 Subject: Distortion in Outer Surface of Vehicle Glass Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks 2009 and Prior HUMMER H2 2010 and Prior HUMMER H3 2005-2009 Saab 9-7X 2010 and Prior Saturn Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 00-08-48-005C (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Distortion in the outer surface of the windshield glass, door glass or backlite glass may appear after the vehicle has: - Accumulated some mileage. - Been frequently washed in automatic car washes, particularly "touchless" car washes. This distortion may look like a subtle orange peel pattern, or may look like a drip or sag etched into the surface of the glass. Some car wash solutions contain a buffered solution of hydrofluoric acid which is used to clean the glass. This should not cause a problem if used in the correct concentration. However, if not used correctly, hydrofluoric acid will attack the glass, and over time, will cause visual distortion in the outer surface of the glass which cannot be removed by scraping or polishing. If this condition is suspected, look at the area of the windshield under the wipers or below the belt seal on the side glass. The area of the glass below the wipers or belt seal will not be affected and what looks like a drip or sag may be apparent at the edge of the wiper or belt seal. You may also see a line on the glass where the wiper blade or the belt seal contacts the glass. Important The repair will require replacing the affected glass and is not a result of a defect in material or workmanship. Therefore, is not covered by New Vehicle Warranty. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windshield > Component Information > Service and Repair > Windshield Replacement Windshield: Service and Repair Windshield Replacement Windshield Replacement Special Tools * J 24402-A Glass Sealant Cold Knife Remover * J 39032 Stationary Glass Removal Tool * Use a urethane adhesive systems which meet GM Specification GM 3651G Removal Procedure Note: Before cutting out a stationary window, apply a double layer of masking tape around the perimeter of the painted surfaces and the interior trim. 1. Open the hood. 2. Remove the windshield wiper arms and blades. Refer to Windshield Wiper Arm Replacement (Equinox Driver Side) (See: Wiper and Washer Systems/Wiper Arm/Service and Repair/Windshield Wiper Arm Replacement (Driver Side)) Windshield Wiper Arm Replacement (Equinox Passenger Side) (See: Wiper and Washer Systems/Wiper Arm/Service and Repair/Windshield Wiper Arm Replacement (Passenger Side)) Windshield Wiper Arm Replacement (Terrain Driver Side) (See: Wiper and Washer Systems/Wiper Arm/Service and Repair/Windshield Wiper Arm Replacement (Driver Side)) Windshield Wiper Arm Replacement (Terrain Passenger Side) (See: Wiper and Washer Systems/Wiper Arm/Service and Repair/Windshield Wiper Arm Replacement (Passenger Side)). 3. Remove the air inlet grille. Refer to Air Inlet Screen Replacement (Equinox) (See: Body and Frame/Cowl/Cowl Moulding / Trim/Service and Repair/Air Inlet Screen Replacement) Air Inlet Screen Replacement (Terrain) (See: Body and Frame/Cowl/Cowl Moulding / Trim/Service and Repair/Air Inlet Screen Replacement). 4. Remove the interior windshield pillar garnish moldings. Refer to Windshield Side Garnish Molding Replacement (See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair/Windshield Side Garnish Molding Replacement). 5. Remove the rearview mirror. Refer to Inside Rearview Mirror Replacement (See: Body and Frame/Mirrors/Service and Repair/Inside Rearview Mirror Replacement). 6. Remove the remote control door lock receiver. Refer to Remote Control Door Lock Receiver Replacement (See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm Systems/Keyless Entry/Keyless Entry Module/Service and Repair). Warning: Refer to Defroster Outlet Warning (See: Heating and Air Conditioning/Service Precautions/Technician Safety Information). 7. Cover the following parts to protect from broken glass: * Upper dash pad * Defroster outlets and A/C outlets * Seats and carpeting Warning: Refer to Glass and Sheet Metal Handling Warning (See: Body and Frame/Service Precautions/Technician Safety Information/Glass and Sheet Metal Handling Warning). 8. Using a utility knife, carefully cut the lace (1) from the sides and the top edge of the window to access the urethane adhesive bead, if equipped. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windshield > Component Information > Service and Repair > Windshield Replacement > Page 13976 Note: Keep the cutting edge of the tool against the window. 9. Remove the window from the urethane adhesive. * Leave a base of urethane approximately 2 mm (0.078 in) on the pinch-weld flange. * The only suitable lubrication is clear water. * Use J 24402-A, J 39032, or equivalent to remove the window. Note: Keep the cutting edge of the knife/tool against the window. Do this from inside the vehicle. 10. If necessary, use a long utility knife or similar tool to remove the bottom corners of the windshield from the urethane adhesive. Note: If the retainers are cut off when removing the window it will be necessary to tape the it in place. 11. With the aid of an assistant (2), remove the windshield (1) from the vehicle. Installation Procedure 1. Install the windshield into the opening. Refer to Adhesive Installation of Windshields (See: Adhesive Installation of Windshields). 2. Install the remote control door lock receiver. Refer to Remote Control Door Lock Receiver Replacement (See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm Systems/Keyless Entry/Keyless Entry Module/Service and Repair). 3. Install the rearview mirror. Refer to Inside Rearview Mirror Replacement (See: Body and Frame/Mirrors/Service and Repair/Inside Rearview Mirror Replacement). 4. Install the interior windshield pillar garnish moldings. Refer to Windshield Side Garnish Molding Replacement (See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair/Windshield Side Garnish Molding Replacement). 5. Install the air inlet grille. Refer to Air Inlet Screen Replacement (Equinox) (See: Body and Frame/Cowl/Cowl Moulding / Trim/Service and Repair/Air Inlet Screen Replacement) Air Inlet Screen Replacement (Terrain) (See: Body and Frame/Cowl/Cowl Moulding / Trim/Service and Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windshield > Component Information > Service and Repair > Windshield Replacement > Page 13977 Repair/Air Inlet Screen Replacement). 6. Install the windshield wipers arms and blades. Refer to Windshield Wiper Arm Replacement (Equinox Driver Side) (See: Wiper and Washer Systems/Wiper Arm/Service and Repair/Windshield Wiper Arm Replacement (Driver Side)) Windshield Wiper Arm Replacement (Equinox Passenger Side) (See: Wiper and Washer Systems/Wiper Arm/Service and Repair/Windshield Wiper Arm Replacement (Passenger Side)) Windshield Wiper Arm Replacement (Terrain Driver Side) (See: Wiper and Washer Systems/Wiper Arm/Service and Repair/Windshield Wiper Arm Replacement (Driver Side)) Windshield Wiper Arm Replacement (Terrain Passenger Side) (See: Wiper and Washer Systems/Wiper Arm/Service and Repair/Windshield Wiper Arm Replacement (Passenger Side)). 7. Remove the double layer of masking tape around the perimeter of the painted surfaces and the interior trim. 8. Close the hood. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windshield > Component Information > Service and Repair > Windshield Replacement > Page 13978 Windshield: Service and Repair Adhesive Installation of Windshields Adhesive Installation of Windshields Warning: Refer to Glass and Sheet Metal Handling Warning (See: Body and Frame/Service Precautions/Technician Safety Information/Glass and Sheet Metal Handling Warning). 1. Use a urethane adhesive systems which meet GM Specification GM 3651G 2. Remove all mounds or loose pieces of urethane adhesive from the pinchweld area. 3. If the original window is being reused, remove all but approximately 2 mm (3/64 in) of the existing bead of urethane adhesive from the pinchweld flange by using a clean utility knife or razor blade scraper. 4. Inspect for any of the following problems in order to help prevent future breakage of the window: * The flange of the window opening * High weld * Solder spots * Hardened sealer * Any other obstruction or irregularity in the pinchweld flange Note: If corrosion of the pinch-weld flange is present or if sheet metal repairs or replacements are required, the pinch-weld flange must be refinished in order to restore the bonding area strength. If paint repairs are required, mask the flange bonding area prior to applying the color coat in order to provide a clean primer only surface. Materials such as BASF DE15(R), DuPont 2610(R), Sherwin-Williams PSE 4600 and NP70(R) and Martin-Semour 5120 and 5130(R) PPG DP90LF SPIES/ HECKER 3688/8590 - 3688/5150 - 4070/5090 STANDOX 11158/13320 - 14653/14980 products are approved for this application. 5. After repairing the opening as indicated, perform the following steps: 1. Remove all traces of broken glass from the outer cowl panel, seats, floor and defroster ducts. 2. Clean around the edge of the inside surface of the window with a 50/50 mixture of isopropyl alcohol and water by volume on a dampened lint free cloth. Warning When replacing stationary windows, use Urethane Adhesive Kit GM P/N 12346392 (Canadian P/N 10952983), or a urethane adhesive system meeting GM Specification GM3651G, to maintain original installation integrity. Failure to use the urethane adhesive kit will result in poor retention of the window which may allow unrestrained occupants to be ejected from the vehicle resulting in personal injury. 6. Verify all primers and urethane adhesive are within expiration dates. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windshield > Component Information > Service and Repair > Windshield Replacement > Page 13979 Warning Failure to prep the area prior to the application of primer may cause insufficient bonding of urethane adhesive. Insufficient bonding of urethane adhesive may allow unrestrained occupants to be ejected from the vehicle resulting in personal injury. Note: Do not apply the black #3 primer to the existing bead (1) of the urethane adhesive on the pinch-weld flange. Apply the primer only to nicks, scratches or the primed surfaces. 7. Shake the pinch-weld primer black #3 for at least 1 minute. 8. Use a new dauber in order to apply the primer to the surface of the pinch-weld flange (1). 9. Allow the pinch-weld primer to dry for approximately 10 minutes. 10. With the aid of an assistant, dry fit the window (1) to the opening in order to determine the correct position. 11. Use masking tape in order to mark the locations (1) of the window (2) in the opening. 12. Cut the masking tape in the center and remove the window from the opening. Note: Use care when applying glass prep clear #1 on the window. This primer dries almost instantly, and may stain the viewing area of the window if not applied evenly. 13. Use a new dauber in order to apply glass prep clear #1 to the area approximately 10-16 mm (3/8-5/8 in) around the entire perimeter of the window inner surface. Immediately wipe the glass primed area using a clean, lint-free cloth. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windshield > Component Information > Service and Repair > Windshield Replacement > Page 13980 14. Apply a second coat of the glass prep clear #1 to the same area of the glass. Note: The glass primer black #2 is effective up to 8 hours after applying it to the glass. The primed surface of the glass must be kept clean. 15. Shake the glass primer black #2 for at least 1 minute. 16. Use a new dauber in order to apply the glass primer black #2 to the same areas (2) that glass prep clear #1 was applied. 17. Allow the glass primer to dry for approximately 10 minutes. 18. Cut the applicator nozzle in order to provide a bead of 12.7 mm (1/2 in) wide and 12.7 mm (1/2 in) high. 19. Use a cartridge-type caulking gun in order to apply a smooth, continuous bead of urethane adhesive. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windshield > Component Information > Service and Repair > Windshield Replacement > Page 13981 20. Use the edge of the window as a guide for the nozzle in order to apply the urethane adhesive (1) to the inner surface of the window (3). 21. With the aid of an assistant, place the window in the opening. If installing a windshield, place the windshield on the lower supports (2), if equipped. 22. Align the masking tape (1) lines on the window (2) and the body. 23. Press the window firmly into place. 24. Tape the window to the body in order to minimize movement until the urethane adhesive cures. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windshield > Component Information > Service and Repair > Windshield Replacement > Page 13982 25. Clean any excess urethane adhesive from the body. Note: Do not direct a hard stream of high pressure water to the freshly applied urethane adhesive. 26. Use a soft spray of warm water in order to immediately water test the window. 27. Inspect the window for leaks. 28. If any leaks are found, use a plastic paddle in order to apply extra urethane adhesive at the leak point. 29. Retest the window for leaks. Warning Insufficient curing of urethane adhesive may allow unrestrained occupants to be ejected from the vehicle resulting in personal injury. * For the moisture-curing type of urethane adhesive, allow a minimum of 6 hours at 21°C (70°F) or greater and with at least 30 percent relative humidity. Allow at least 24 hours for the complete curing of the urethane adhesive. * For the chemical-curing type of urethane adhesive, allow a minimum of 1 hour. Do NOT physically disturb the repair area until after these minimum times have elapsed. 30. Maintain the following conditions in order to properly cure the urethane adhesive: * Partially lower a door window in order to prevent pressure buildups when closing doors before the urethane adhesive cures. * Do not drive the vehicle until the urethane adhesive is cured. Refer to the above curing times. * Do not use compressed air in order to dry the urethane adhesive. 31. Complete the window installation. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Relays and Modules - Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Relay > Component Information > Locations Windshield Washer Relay: Locations Electrical Center Identification Views X50A Fuse Block - Underhood, Label Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Relays and Modules - Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 13988 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Relays and Modules - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Relay > Component Information > Locations Wiper Relay: Locations Electrical Center Identification Views X50A Fuse Block - Underhood, Label Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Relays and Modules - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 13992 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Switch > Component Information > Locations Windshield Washer Switch: Locations Instrument Panel/Center Console Component Views Steering Column Components 1 - S78 Turn Signal/Multifunction Switch 2 - X85 Steering Wheel Air Bag Coil 3 - S82 Windshield Wiper/Washer Switch 4 - S39 Ignition Switch 5 - M93 Ignition Cylinder Lock Control Solenoid Actuator 6 - B101 Immobilizer Antenna 7 - B99 Steering Wheel Angle Sensor Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 13997 Windshield Washer Switch: Diagrams S82 Windshield Wiper/Washer Switch Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 13998 Windshield Washer Switch: Service and Repair Windshield Wiper and Washer Switch Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair Wiper Switch: Service and Repair Windshield Wiper and Washer Switch Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Washer Hose Repair Windshield Washer Hose: Service and Repair Washer Hose Repair Washer Hose Repair Washer Hose Repair and Routing The washer hose can be a component within the main body wire harness conduit. The washer hose is a hard plastic convoluted tube that could be wrapped with electrical tape along the main body electrical wiring harness. It starts underhood where it connects from the rear window washer pump hose to the rear window washer nozzle extension hose. The washer hose usually routes into the main body wire harness underhood and passes through the front of the dash panel grommet. The washer hose is routed either inside the vehicle interior behind the left front side window garnish molding, along the headliner area and continues to the rear of the vehicle, as equipped. The washer hose could be routed back to the center of the vehicle where it could possibly connect to the high mounted stop lamp or the rear window washer pump where it connects by rubber flexible tubing, at the lift gate opening, if equipped. Removal Procedure 1. Locate the damaged section of the washer hose, this will be hard plastic convoluted tubing. 2. If the leak is located inside the main body wire harness, carefully cut the electrical tape, securing the harness within the electrical conduit to expose the damaged section of washer hose. 3. Cut and remove the damaged section of the washer hose. Installation Procedure 1. In order to repair the damaged section of washer hose, use the following steps: * Use a 9.5 mm (3/8 in) vacuum hose to replace damaged section. * Overlap the washer hose onto the plastic tubing by, 12.5 mm (0.50 in) on each end. * Secure each end of the vacuum hose with a 100 mm (4 in) cable tie. 2. Verify the repair by activating the front and rear (if equipped) washer system and check the system for leaks. 3. If the leak was located inside the main body wire harness or conduit, use electrical tape to retain the repaired section to the exterior of the electrical wire harness conduit. 4. If the leak was located external from the conduit, secure the hose with cable ties to prevent unnecessary movement and unwanted noise. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Washer Hose Repair > Page 14006 5. If the leak requires the washer hose to be removed in the front of dash panel grommet complete the following: * Carefully slit the grommet next to the original washer hose. * Pass the new section of the washer hose through, next to the existing grommet tubing. * Repair the hose on either side of the grommet. * Use small tie straps to secure the hose onto the washer tubing. * Verify the repair by operating the washer system. * Seal any openings in the grommet, larger than the hose that was passed through. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Washer Hose Repair > Page 14007 Windshield Washer Hose: Service and Repair Rear Window Washer Pump Hose Replacement Washer Pump to Headliner Hose Rear Window Washer Pump Hose Replacement - Washer Pump to Headliner Hose (Equinox) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Pump > Component Information > Diagrams Windshield Washer Pump: Diagrams G24 Windshield Washer Pump Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Pump > Component Information > Service and Repair > Windshield Washer Pump Hose Replacement Windshield Washer Pump: Service and Repair Windshield Washer Pump Hose Replacement Windshield Washer Pump Hose Replacement (Equinox) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Pump > Component Information > Service and Repair > Windshield Washer Pump Hose Replacement > Page 14013 Windshield Washer Pump: Service and Repair Windshield Washer Pump Replacement Windshield Washer Pump Replacement (Equinox) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Relay > Component Information > Locations Windshield Washer Relay: Locations Electrical Center Identification Views X50A Fuse Block - Underhood, Label Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 14017 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Reservoir > Component Information > Service and Repair Windshield Washer Reservoir: Service and Repair Windshield Washer Solvent Container Replacement (Equinox) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Reservoir > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 14021 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Spray Nozzle > Component Information > Service and Repair > Windshield Washer Nozzle Hose Replacement Windshield Washer Spray Nozzle: Service and Repair Windshield Washer Nozzle Hose Replacement Windshield Washer Nozzle Hose Replacement (Equinox) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Spray Nozzle > Component Information > Service and Repair > Windshield Washer Nozzle Hose Replacement > Page 14026 Windshield Washer Spray Nozzle: Service and Repair Windshield Washer Nozzle Replacement Windshield Washer Nozzle Replacement (Equinox) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Spray Nozzle > Component Information > Service and Repair > Windshield Washer Nozzle Hose Replacement > Page 14027 Windshield Washer Spray Nozzle: Service and Repair Rear Window Washer Nozzle Replacement Rear Window Washer Nozzle Replacement (Equinox) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Switch > Component Information > Locations Windshield Washer Switch: Locations Instrument Panel/Center Console Component Views Steering Column Components 1 - S78 Turn Signal/Multifunction Switch 2 - X85 Steering Wheel Air Bag Coil 3 - S82 Windshield Wiper/Washer Switch 4 - S39 Ignition Switch 5 - M93 Ignition Cylinder Lock Control Solenoid Actuator 6 - B101 Immobilizer Antenna 7 - B99 Steering Wheel Angle Sensor Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 14031 Windshield Washer Switch: Diagrams S82 Windshield Wiper/Washer Switch Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 14032 Windshield Washer Switch: Service and Repair Windshield Wiper and Washer Switch Replacement Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Blade > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Glass/Body - Windshield Wiper Performance Wiper Blade: Technical Service Bulletins Glass/Body - Windshield Wiper Performance INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 06-08-43-003C Date: February 21, 2011 Subject: Windshield Wiper Performance, Cleaning Instructions and Maintenance Models: 2012 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (including Saturn) 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2010 and Prior Isuzu Medium Duty Trucks 2005-2009 Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2011 and 2012 model year. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 06-08-43-003B (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Wiper Concerns Most concerns about windshield wiper performance are the result of dirty wiper blades, damaged wiper blades, or worn out blades that are continuing to be used beyond their useful life. Depending on environmental conditions, wiper blades can have dramatic differences in lifespan. Here are some tips and guidelines to maximize wiper performance to avoid damage to the blades, and to avoid unnecessary replacements. Many wiper blades are being replaced under warranty with reviews showing there is nothing wrong with the returned blades other than a build-up of dirt. Additionally, advise the customer to review the information in their Owner Manual. Inspection and Cleaning Scheduled Maintenance - Inspect your wipers rubber blades every 4-6 months or 12,000 km (7,500 mi) for wear, cracking or contamination. - Clean the windshield and the rubber wiper blades (using the procedure below) if the blades are not clearing the glass satisfactorily. If this does not correct the problem, then replace the rubber elements. Cleaning Procedure Important Avoid getting windshield washer fluid on your hands. Wear rubber gloves or avoid direct contact with washer fluid. Important Do not use gasoline, kerosene, or petroleum based products to clean wiper blades. - Clean the rubber blades using a lint free cloth or paper towel soaked with windshield washer fluid or a mild detergent. You should see significant amounts of dirt being removed on the cloth. - Be sure to wash the windshield thoroughly when you clean the blades. Bugs, road grime, sap and a buildup of car wash/wax treatments may additionally cause wiper streaking. Tip For a larger scale buildup on the windshield, use a non-abrasive cleaner such as Bon-Ami* (www.faultless.com) cleanser with a wet sponge, being sure to use plenty of water to avoid scratching the glass. Flush the surface and body panels completely. Tip For day-to-day exterior glass cleaning and to maintain a streak free appearance, suggest Vehicle Care Glass Cleaner, P/N 88862560 (in Canada, 992727). This product is an easy to use foaming cleaner that quickly removes dirt and grime from glass surfaces. Tip Interior glass should be cleaned with plain, clean water to eliminate any film or haze on the window and help prevent fogging, a major customer dissatisfier. Refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 03-00-89-006D for more information. The New Vehicle Pre-Delivery Inspection form also recommends using plain water to clean interior glass. *"We believe this material to be reliable. There may be additional manufacturers of such material. General Motors does not endorse, indicate any preference for or assume any responsibility for the products or equipment from these firms or any such items which may be available from other sources. Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Blade > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Glass/Body - Windshield Wiper Performance > Page 14037 Avoiding Wiper Damage The following are major contributors to wiper damage. Some of these you can control and others are environmental concerns. - Extremely dusty areas (such as driving on dirt roads) may cause the wipers rubber edge to wear quickly and unevenly. - Sand and salt used on roads for increasing winter traction and ice control will cause the wiper blades to wear quicker. Areas with significant snowfall require more frequent blade replacements. - Heat and time may cause the rubber blades to take a "permanent set" resulting in the rubber not flexing and turning over uniformly. This condition may result in streaking and/or unwiped areas. - Rubber blades are easily cut or torn when using ice scrapers. Likewise pulling blades up off a frozen windshield can tear the rubber. Exercise caution when clearing ice and snow. - Using your wipers to "wear through" frost and ice, instead of allowing the defrosters to melt the ice, can dull, nick or tear the rubber blades. - Banging wipers on the glass to remove ice and snow may cause the blade to bend, dislodging the rubber and causing potential scratching of the windshield. - Ice can form in the pin joints of the wipers, which can cause streaking and unwiped areas. To remove ice from pin joints, compress the blade and rubber edge with your hand to loosen the frozen joints. Consider using Winter Blades that have a rubber cover to avoid this condition. Note GM does not recommend the use of any spray on/wipe on windshield treatments or washer fluid additives. The variation in friction that results on the glass from the use of these products causes wipers to chatter and have premature wear. Disclaimer Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Blade > Component Information > Service and Repair > Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement (Driver Side) Wiper Blade: Service and Repair Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement (Driver Side) Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement (Equinox Driver Side) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Blade > Component Information > Service and Repair > Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement (Driver Side) > Page 14040 Wiper Blade: Service and Repair Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement (Passenger Side) Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement (Equinox Passenger Side) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Blade > Component Information > Service and Repair > Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement (Driver Side) > Page 14041 Wiper Blade: Service and Repair Rear Window Wiper Blade Replacement Rear Window Wiper Blade Replacement (Equinox) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Gear Box > Component Information > Service and Repair Wiper Gear Box: Service and Repair Windshield Wiper Transmission Replacement (Equinox) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Locations > Luggage Compartment/Rear of Vehicle Component Views Wiper Motor: Locations Luggage Compartment/Rear of Vehicle Component Views Luggage Compartment/Rear of Vehicle Component Views Liftgate Components 1 - B71R Liftgate Object Sensor - Right (TB5) 2 - E18 Rear Defogger Grid 3 - B71L Liftgate Object Sensor - Left (TB5) 4 - M45 Rear Wiper Motor 5 - K39 Liftgate Control Module (TB5) 6 - A23C Liftgate Latch Assembly 7 - B70 Liftgate Close Switch (TB5) Rear of Vehicle Components (Chevrolet) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Locations > Luggage Compartment/Rear of Vehicle Component Views > Page 14049 1 - E2LR Side Marker Lamp - Left Rear 2 - E5A Backup Lamp - Left 3 - E6 Center High Mounted Stop Lamp 4 - T4G Cellular Phone, Navigation, and Digital Radio Antenna 5 - M45 Rear Wiper Motor 6 - E5B Backup Lamp - Right 7 - E2RR Side Marker Lamp - Right Rear 8 - E5T Tail/Brake and Turn Signal Lamp - Right 9 - E7R License Plate Lamp - Right 10 - B78H Rear Object Sensor Right Outer (UD7) 11 - B78F Rear Object Sensor - Right Middle (UD7) 12 - S46 Liftgate Handle Switch 13 - B87 Rearview Camera (UVC) 14 - X88 Trailer Connector (V92) 15 - B78E Rear Object Sensor - Left Middle (UD7) 16 - E7L License Plate Lamp - Left 17 - B78G Rear Object Sensor Left Outer (UD7) 18 - E5S Tail/Brake and Turn Signal Lamp - Left Rear of Vehicle Components (GMC) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Locations > Luggage Compartment/Rear of Vehicle Component Views > Page 14050 1 - E5M Tail Lamp - Left Upper 2 - E6 Center High Mounted Stop Lamp 3 - T4G Cellular Phone, Navigation, and Digital Radio Antenna 4 - M45 Rear Wiper Motor 5 - E5N Tail Lamp - Right Upper 6 - E5T Tail/Brake and Turn Signal Lamp - Right 7 - E2RR Side Marker Lamp - Right Rear 8 - E5K Tail Lamp - Right Lower 9 - E5B Backup Lamp - Right 10 - B78H Rear Object Sensor - Right Outer (UD7) 11 - E7R License Plate Lamp - Right 12 - S46 Liftgate Handle Switch 13 - B87 Rearview Camera (UVC) 14 - E7L License Plate Lamp - Left 15 - B78F Rear Object Sensor - Right Middle (UD7) 16 - X88 Trailer Connector (V92) 17 - B78E Rear Object Sensor - Left Middle (UD7) 18 B78G Rear Object Sensor - Left Outer (UD7) 19 - E5A Backup Lamp - Left 20 - E5J Tail Lamp Left Lower 21 - E2LR Side Marker Lamp - Left Rear 22 - E5S Tail/Brake and Turn Signal Lamp Left Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Locations > Luggage Compartment/Rear of Vehicle Component Views > Page 14051 Wiper Motor: Locations Front of Vehicle/Engine Compartment Component Views Front of Vehicle/Engine Compartment Component Views Engine Compartment Components (Chevrolet) 1 - B20 Brake Fluid Level Switch 2 - B19B Brake Booster Vacuum Sensor 3 - M75 Windshield Wiper Motor 4 - X50A Fuse Block - Underhood 5 - C1 Battery 6 - G24 Windshield Washer Pump 7 - B55 Hood Ajar Switch (BTV) 8 - P12B Horn - Low Note 9 - P12A Horn - High Note 10 - K17 Electronic Brake Control Module Engine Compartment Components (GMC) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Locations > Luggage Compartment/Rear of Vehicle Component Views > Page 14052 1 - B20 Brake Fluid Level Switch 2 - B19B Brake Booster Vacuum Sensor 3 - M75 Windshield Wiper Motor 4 - X50A Fuse Block - Underhood 5 - C1 Battery 6 - G24 Windshield Washer Pump 7 - P12B Horn - Low Note 8 - B55 Hood Ajar Switch (BTV) 9 - K17 Electronic Brake Control Module 10 - P12A Horn - High Note Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Locations > Page 14053 Wiper Motor: Diagrams M45 Rear Wiper Motor M75 Windshield Wiper Motor Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Locations > Page 14054 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Rear Window Wiper Motor Replacement Wiper Motor: Service and Repair Rear Window Wiper Motor Replacement Rear Window Wiper Motor Replacement (Equinox) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Rear Window Wiper Motor Replacement > Page 14057 Wiper Motor: Service and Repair Windshield Wiper Motor Replacement Windshield Wiper Motor Replacement (Equinox Terrain) Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Relay > Component Information > Locations Wiper Relay: Locations Electrical Center Identification Views X50A Fuse Block - Underhood, Label Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 14061 Chevrolet Equinox Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2010)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair Wiper Switch: Service and Repair Windshield Wiper and Washer Switch Replacement